1

The Korean War

 ALSO BY BUD HANNINGS
Forts of the United States:
An Historical Dictionary, 16th through 19th Centuries
(McFarland, 2006)
The Korean War
An Exhaustive Chronolog y
BUD HANNINGS
Foreword by General P. X. Kelley,
28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.)

Volume 1
(foreword; preface; prologue;
acronyms and abbreviations;
January 5, 1950–September 22, 1950)

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Jefferson, North Carolina, and London
 Volume 1
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CATALOGUING-IN-PUBLICATION DATA
Hannings, Bud.
The Korean war : an exhaustive chronology / Bud Hannings ;
foreword by General P.X. Kelley, 28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.).
p. cm.
Includes index.

3 volume set—
ISBN-13: 978-0-7864-2814-4
illustrated case binding : 50# alkaline paper

1. Korean War, 1950–1953 — Chronology. 2. Korean War, 1950–1953.

3. Korean War, 1950–1953 — United States — Chronology.
4. United Nations — Armed Forces — Korea — Chronology. I. Title.
DS918.H336 2007 951.904'20202 — dc22 2007010570

British Library cataloguing data are available

©2007 Bud Hannings. All rights reserved

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying
or recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the publisher.

On the cover: Situation Map of Korea, November 25, 1950;

Elements of Eighth Army retire from Sunch’on
and move south towards P’yongyang, December 2, 1950

Manufactured in the United States of America

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Box 611, Jefferson, North Carolina 28640
www.mcfarlandpub.com
 Contents
• Volume 1 •
Foreword, by General P. X. Kelley,
28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.) 1
Preface 3
Prologue: The Prelude to War 7
Acronyms and Abbreviations 15

Chronology: January 5, 1950–

September 22, 1950 23

• Volume 2 •

Chronology: September 23, 1950–

November 12, 1951 403

• Volume 3 •

Chronology: November 13, 1951–

September 6, 1953 803

Appendices
1. Eighth Army, Order of Battle 975
2. Major Combat Events 981
3. United Nations Command, Senior Military Commanders 983
4. U.S. Air Force Commanders 985
5. Medal of Honor Recipients 988

v
Contents vi

6. Major U.S. Air Force Units 994

7. U.S. Marine Units 997
8. U.S. Naval Vessels 999
9. U.S. Naval Air Units 1002
10. Carrier-Based and Non–Carrier-Based Squadrons 1003
11. U.S. Naval Vessels Sunk or Damaged in Action 1009
12. Numbers of U.S. Navy and
Marine Corps Personnel Killed and Wounded 1013
13. U.S. Aces of the Korean War 1014
14. U.S. Army Command Strength 1016
15. U.S. Army Battle Casualties 1017
16. Foreign Nation Forces 1018

Bibliography 1021
General Index 1025
Military Units Index 1069
 Foreword
by General P. X. Kelley,
28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.)
Bud Hannings has done a masterful job in
providing current and future generations with
what can accurately be called the most complete
and authoritative chronology ever compiled
about the Korean War. All who read it will un-
derstand and fully comprehend why those who
endured this most difficult confiict chafe when
the war is referred to as a “Police Action.”
The Korean War: An Exhaustive Chron-
olog y is a superbly and skillfully written com-
pendium of the often-called “Forgotten War.”
It tells of the extreme hardships and privations
suffered by the Soldiers, Sailors, Airmen and
Marines on the ground, in the air and at sea as
they struggle to stem the tide of a seemingly
unstoppable enemy. This is not a book on
grand strategy. Rather, its primary focus is on
the extraordinary achievements of small units
and individuals.
The confiict began on June 25, 1950,
when without warning tens of thousands of
North Koreans surged over the border into
South Korea and only one American soldier
stood in their way as they attacked towards
Seoul. This chronology begins when a scant
American Task Force is sent to Korea from
nearby Japan to become the first U.S. unit to
engage the enemy. It then chronicles the other
units that follow from Japan and the United
States, as well as from other countries that par-
ticipated under the fiag of the United Nations.
1
A desperate withdrawal quickly followed
the initial invasion as the friendly forces pulled
back from the 38th Parallel towards Pusan. The
U.S. Marines arrived there during early August to
bolster the U.S. Eighth Army as it battled for sur-
vival. Soon after, during September, as part of
the strategic plan to conduct an amphibious as-
sault against Inchon, the U.S. Eighth Army ini-
tiated its breakout from the Pusan Perimeter.
The book chronicles the perilous landing
of the U.S. Marines at Inchon on 15 Septem-
ber, the subsequent drive to recapture Seoul,
and the simultaneous advance of the U.S.
Eighth Army as it moved to join the U.S. X
Corps. From there, the book chronicles the
U.S. X Corps as the cruel Korean winter set in,
as if synchronized with the crossing of the Yalu
River by the Chinese armies.
Of particular significance is the fierce and
difficult combat under the worst possible
weather conditions after the U.S. Marines be-
came surrounded by hordes of Chinese at the
Chosin Reservoir. During their movement to
Hungnam, the reader is reminded of Admiral
Chester Nimitz’s famous comment during the
World War II Battle of Iwo Jima, “Uncommon
valor was a common virtue.”
Throughout this spectacular three-volume
work, the reader will encounter the setbacks,
the triumphs, and the agonies of the fighting
men on the ground, moving from foxhole to
Foreword by General P. X. Kelley
foxhole, rice paddy to rice paddy and hill to
hill. Readers may better understand the thrill of
being in the cockpit of a Corsair being cata-
pulted from the deck of a U.S. Navy carrier or
the clamor in the turret of a naval gun. They
can also crawl alongside a dirty infantryman,
the “Queen of Battle,” during a tortuous ad-
vance against an enemy machine gun or invin-
cible tank. Eventually, readers will join in the
negotiations at Panmunjom during the final
days of the confiict when the repatriated United
Nations forces arrive at Freedom Village.
Readers can then close the cover with the
knowledge that those who served in Korea up-
held the highest traditions of the American
fighting men, while accomplishing a dual set
2
of noble achievements — the containment of
Communism and the sharing of one of their
most cherished possessions: freedom.
No one who reads this book will ever
think of the Korean War as the “Forgotten
War.” And no one will ever forget the sacrifices
that were borne by Americans and their coun-
terparts from the United Nations. The Ameri-
cans who served in the Korean War, like those
who came before them and those that followed,
all have additional bonds: the instinctive na-
ture of their privilege to defend their country
and their fiag and their determination to share
their valor in the defense of others seeking free-
dom from tyranny.
 Preface
The purpose of this book is to provide a
detailed account of the combat actions of the
Korean War for serious students of history and
for those with an interest in the U.S. military.
The book aims to provide an accurate and fac-
tual depiction of the everyday occurrences from
the minor engagements to the major battles that
were fought by ground, air and naval forces.
Prior to the beginning of the chronology
is a prologue, “The Prelude to War,” a brief
overview of the situation in the Pacific with re-
gard to Korea and Japan at the termination of
World War II. This section displays the early
intent of the Kremlin to dominate in Asia by
first gaining control of Korea. At the same time,
it summarizes the ongoing crisis in Europe and
the Mideast during the same time period, to
give the reader a wide view of the Kremlin’s in-
tentions. In Europe the Soviets boldly made
their moves, but in the Pacific, their operations
remained clandestine.
Showing the buildup to the war, the
chronology begins in January 1950. From the
invasion of South Korea on 25 June 1950, it
covers the activities of the U.S. Army and the
United States Marines on a daily basis. It doc-
uments the formidable efforts of the U.S. Air
Force and the U.S. Navy to hold the line while
the American ground forces were preparing to
react to the massive invasion across the 38th
Parallel by the Communists against the newly
created Republic of South Korea.
The book provides an easily accessible
route to both the major battles and the seem-
3
ingly never-ending clashes that ranged from di-
rect assaults to ambushes. It is possible to fol-
low an infantry division or regiment on a daily
basis (with regard to combat) from the early
days of the confiict until the final shots were
fired on 27 July 1953. All activity initiated by
Eighth Army, X Corps, the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade (later 1st Marine Division) and
the ROKs Corps is depicted.
Although the primary coverage points to
the U.S. forces, the book simultaneously tracks
the entire U.N. ground force. Fifty-three na-
tions joined the struggle against the Commu-
nist aggression in Korea, but the heaviest bur-
den was carried by the Americans. Fifteen
additional nations committed combat troops; of
those, Turkey and Great Britain were the only
countries to field more than one battalion.
South Korean forces included sixteen infantry
divisions. In contrast, the Chinese Communists
funneled thousands of troops into Korea to
swell the ranks of the North Korean forces.
Later, toward the end of 1950, several
hundred thousand Chinese troops unexpect-
edly and openly joined the fight. In the mean-
time, although it was not made public, Soviet
pilots were often the opponents of American
aviators during the frequent clashes in the skies
over Korea.
The book does not confine itself to the in-
fantry troops. All units are detailed, including
accompanying artillery, armor and other sup-
port contingents, including airborne forces.
The book also concentrates on the smaller
Preface
contingents and the actions of individual sol-
diers, sailors and Marines. One hundred and
thirty-one men who served during the war in
Korea received the Medal of Honor. Of those,
ninety-four made the ultimate sacrifice. The
actions of those individuals, with rare excep-
tion, are detailed in the book on the date of the
action. One of the recipients, Tibor Rubin,
whose period of eligibility for the award en-
compassed 1950–1953 did not receive his
award until 23 September 2005, when it was
presented by President George W. Bush. The
book also closely follows the naval blockade of
Korea and the air war against enemy targets in
North Korea, as well as the close-air support
missions. In conjunction with the comprehen-
sive coverage, an overview of the war summa-
rizes the confiict, highlights the various engage-
ments and follows the see-saw battles that
dominated the first six months of the war and
the bloody months of combat that followed.
Within the summary, the dates of the respective
actions are listed, which provides the researcher
or reader with a direct route to the identical ac-
tion in the book, where the incident or action
is covered in more detail.
Hardships and dangers the ground troops
faced can be found in almost every paragraph.
The constant warfare raged from the east coast
to the west coast and from Pusan to the south
by the sea to the Yalu River in the north at the
border with Manchuria. There was no easy
ground in Korea, nor did the troops get to
enjoy many fair skies. U.S. troops spent three
Christmases in Korea and usually they were
fighting in torrential heat during the monsoon
season, when the roads became fiooded and the
bridges were washed out. Or, they were heav-
ily engaged along icy slopes and primitive
frozen mountain roads in weather that dropped
way below zero. The enemy, a formidable foe,
faced the same elements, but they more easily
adapted to it.
Some of the names of major battles that
were seared into the minds of those who served
are Oman, Kum River, Naktong Bulge, In-
4
chon, Chosin Reservoir, Koto-ri, Hamhung
and Bloody Ridge. Others included Heartbreak
Ridge, the Punch Bowl, Bunker Hill, Vegas
Cities, the Hook and Pork Chop Hill. Each was
a colossal confiagration that can never be fully
described by a single pen or by a thousand.
Nonetheless, whether it was a major battle or a
minor skirmish in Korea, it was most probably
under grueling circumstances.
During 1951, the strategy on winning the
war changed dramatically. Eighth Army re-
ceived orders to cancel all offensives and take a
defensive posture. The orders arrived in con-
junction with the decision not to fight for com-
plete victory. Nonetheless, permission was still
granted to conduct strong patrols. While the
confiict changed to a contest for the hills, and
later towards the end of the year, descended
into stalemate, the confrontations did not be-
come less ruthless. The book continues with
comprehensive coverage of the respective units
until the culmination of the war.
The text does not place any emphasis on
the political elements of the war, but it does
contain information regarding the strategy in
Washington and the differences between Gen-
eral MacArthur and the president as well as the
Joint Chiefs of Staff. Nor does the book provide
an in-depth study of the strategies mapped out
by the High Command, but it does provide an
overview of the U.N. strategy as well as that of
the Communists.
Researching the facts contained herein was
challenging because of the enormous depth and
breadth of the confiict. However, thanks to the
meticulous records of the armed forces, includ-
ing the official volumes done by the respective
services and the individual military historical
centers, Leatherneck magazine and Infantry
magazine, as well as other distinguished works
on the Korean War (listed in the bibliography),
the endeavor was not tedious. The author was
not faced with the problem of discerning fact
from fiction and for that I am sincerely grate-
ful to all of our armed forces.
All photographs are from the United
 5 Preface
States Air Force, United States Army, United
States Marine Corps, United States Navy,
Department of Defense and the National Ar-
chives.
It should be noted that the records of the
Communist forces — including the Chinese,
North Koreans and Soviets — were unavailable.
Consequently, the references to their activity
and casualties were accumulated from the
records of the U.S. armed forces. The most dif-
ficult part of the prolonged project was how to
capture the full picture of the war and condense
it. With that in mind, the project was under-
taken and completed to the best of my ability.
I hope that the book will be considered a fair
and accurate portrayal of the war.
The book was purposely written in the pres-
ent tense to give an immediate feel for the tribu-
lations endured by the troops on the battlefields
of the harsh Korean terrain for a period of three
years, two months and two days. When the con-
fiict ended on 27 July 1953, the troops knew they
were not going to spend their fourth straight
Christmas on a Korean field of battle.
This page intentionally left blank
 Prologue:
The Prelude to War
Korea, known as the Hermit Kingdom,
played no major part in the confiagration
known as World War II; however, it was to be-
come the foundation of the Communists’ plan
to bring Asia under the total domination of
Moscow. While the Allies confronted the post-
war situation in Europe, Stalin — in addition
to complicating matters at every turn in Eu-
rope — devoted much time to launching long-
term plans to test the mettle of the free world
in Korea.
During mid–July 1945, President Harry
Truman arrived in Berlin to attend the Potsdam
Conference. At the time, Russia had not yet de-
clared war against Japan and the conference did
not focus on Asia. On 12 August 1945, shortly
after the U.S. dropped two atomic bombs on
Japan, the Soviets declared war on Japan. Rus-
sian troops were immediately dispatched from
Manchuria into Korea, initiating the first signal
of Russian intentions. The Russians portended
that the presence of their troops was to facilitate
the surrender of Japanese troops, but there had
been no official agreement between Russia and
the U.S. to bisect Korea.
Korea, until the 20th century, had been
an independent nation, nestled between China,
Russia and Japan. During 1910, the Japanese
annexed it for future colonization and as a cat-
apult for entry into Asia. After the conclusion
of World War I, the Korean people had thought
the great nations would find compassion for
7
them, but to no avail. It remained a Japanese
possession and it was kept as a police state.
During 1943 at the Cairo Conference, the Al-
lies, including the Russians, proclaimed that
Korea would become a free nation at the ap-
propriate time.
On 16 August 1945, Josef Stalin de-
manded that the Soviets be permitted to de-
ploy occupational troops in Japanese territory in
the northern sector of Hokkaido; however,
President Truman immediately refused the re-
quest. While the Russians continued to circum-
vent the U.S. to find a way into Japan, Ameri-
can armed forces began to occupy the country.
A vanguard arrived in Japan on 28 August.
On 7 September 1945, British, French,
Soviet and U.S. forces paraded in Berlin in
honor of V-J Day. The grand parade was nearly
cancelled due to the obstinacy of the Russians,
who demanded to be first in the parade line.
Nevertheless, it became the final combined pa-
rade. Soon after, the Communists began to
openly attempt to instigate trouble, not only
in Germany and Europe, but in other coun-
tries, including Greece, Iran, Turkey, the Phil-
ippines and Korea.
On 8 September, the U.S. 24th Corps
(6th, 7th and 40th Infantry Divisions), com-
manded by Major General John R. Hodge, was
ordered to Korea. Hodge became the com-
mander of U.S. Army forces in Korea. He
discovered upon his arrival that the Russians
Prologue
had halted at the 38th Parallel as agreed, alle-
viating the tension for the occupation force.
The U.S. troops began to accept the surrender
of Japanese troops below the 38th Parallel. On
9 September 1945, the Japanese at Seoul offi-
cially relinquished their control over Korea to
the U.S. 7th Division.
By mid–November 1945, it was deter-
mined that the anticipated 25,000-man Ko-
rean police force should be bolstered by a Ko-
rean national defense force. The Korean Air
Force was to amount to one transport squadron
and two fighter squadrons. In addition, the
combined strength of the Korean Navy and
Coast Guard would stand at 4,500 troops. The
findings were sent to Washington. Later dur-
ing a meeting in Moscow (between the U.S.
and the Soviets), it was agreed to form a provi-
sional government for all of Korea.
In the meantime, the U.S. continued to
shrink its armed forces in the Pacific and in Eu-
rope, while the Soviets continued to build their
strength. The Soviets maintained a relatively
low profile with regard to Korea, but not Eu-
rope, nor the Mideast. Russia tested the U.S.
in Berlin during March of 1946 by moving into
the U.S. zone and removing railroad tracks.
Meanwhile, the Soviets still resisted removing
their troops from Iran. It was during that same
period that Winston Churchill, speaking at a
college conference in the U.S., described the
situation in Eastern Europe and coined the
phrase “Iron Curtain.”
By May of 1946, the joint United States–
USSR Commission, which had been author-
ized during the Moscow Conference of the For-
eign Ministers of the U.S. and the Soviet Union
for the purpose of bringing about a unified
Korea, made no progress. During 1947, the
commission returned to the table, but still no
progress was made. Consequently, the U.S.
took the question of Korean independence and
unification to the United Nations, rather than
waste more time with the Russians. The U.N.
discussed the issue in September 1947.
In March 1947, the conference of Foreign
8
Ministers convened in Moscow. During the
same month, President Truman, concerned
with the spread of Communism, proclaimed
what became known as the Truman Doctrine.
The Truman Doctrine made it emphatically
clear that the U.S. would oppose Communism
and its expansion plans, wherever it became
necessary. Truman later stated that his speech
was “America’s answer to the surge of Commu-
nist tyranny.”
By spring of 1947, the situation in Korea
remained fiuid, the tensions between the U.S.
and the Soviet Union had not lessened, and still
there was no progress on unification. Mean-
while, the Soviets raised the stakes in Europe
by seizing control of Hungary. By summer, the
Soviets attempted to gain power in Greece. The
city of Berlin became a powder keg.
In September 1947 the Korean people re-
ceived a disturbing bit of news when it became
known that the Joint Chiefs of Staff sent a let-
ter concerning Korea to Secretary of State Dean
Acheson, informing him that there was little
U.S. strategic interest there. The letter also of-
fered the opinion that there was no need to
continue maintaining the “present troops and
bases in Korea.”
The United Nations in October 1947
adopted in principle a resolution drafted by the
U.S. that called for the establishment of a tem-
porary commission to oversee elections in
Korea. However, the Soviet Union refused to
cooperate. The Russians barred U.N. represen-
tatives from entering its controlled portion of
Korea. Nonetheless, during February 1948, it
was decided that the elections would be held in
May.
General Douglas MacArthur informed the
Joint Chiefs of Staff that in his opinion, a South
Korean army was not feasible. He said the U.S.
forces in Korea were unable to provide suffi-
cient protection. He suggested that the Con-
stabulary be increased to 50,000 men. Mean-
while, the North Koreans made an aggressive
move. On 8 February 1948, the communists
announced that the North Korean provisional
 9 Prologue
government had established the Korean Peo-
ple’s Army. The Russians initiated their with-
drawal from Korea during February 1948;
however, many advisors remained behind. In
addition, the Russians left tanks and aircraft
behind.
By spring of 1948, the condition of the
U.S. armed forces was quite poor. The Soviets,
aware of the deterioration of the American mil-
itary, had been steadily raising the stakes in Eu-
rope, while continuing their meddling in Asia.
During April 1948, Truman again reiterated
his displeasure with the Russians and with the
French. The French had been unable to sustain
their zone in Berlin by themselves and con-
cluded that they would join with the Ameri-
cans and British. Truman was aware of Soviet
intentions in Korea and Japan, but the priority
had become Europe. Subsequent to the prob-
lems in Berlin, Truman stated: “For the first
year after the war, the British and Americans
made every effort to make a joint control suc-
ceed. The Russians, however, with a good as-
sist from the French, defeated these efforts.”
On 10 May 1948, free elections were held
in Korea, but the citizens of North Korea were
forbidden from participating. About 95 percent
of the eligible populace in South Korea voted
and elected a National Assembly. Soon after, on
the 31st, the newly elected representatives gath-
ered in Seoul and elected Syngman Rhee, a
staunch anticommunist, as president for a four-
year term. The election process worked well,
despite the Communists’ attempts to disrupt
the historical event. By that time, the South Ko-
reans were nearly on their own. By mid–1949,
the only U.S. troops in the country were advi-
sors and their numbers barely reached 500 men.
To make the situation more tenuous, by the end
of the summer the U.S. eliminated Korea as a de-
fense responsibility for General MacArthur. The
troops in Korea at that time were placed under
the jurisdiction of John J. Muccio, the U.S. am-
bassador to Korea, as part of the U.S. plan for a
total pull-out, leaving a supposedly solid coun-
try to govern itself.
During the summer of 1948 there were no
outward signs of violence by the Communists in
Asia, but Europe continued to reach the brink
of disaster. The Russians, prevented from land-
ing troops in Japan and unable to totally halt
the spread of democracy in Korea, tightened the
noose in Berlin by initiating a blockade during
June 1948. The U.S. and Britain stood deter-
mined to thwart the Russians by starting an air-
lift. The French, although part of the Allied
force in Berlin, had no transport planes and
played no part in the operation. By 25 June, C-
47s began to arrive in Berlin with food and sup-
plies. The planes continued the operation non-
stop, 24 hours a day to maintain the
city and prevent the people from starving until
the Russians finally relented and lifted the
blockade.
On 15 August 1948, Syngman Rhee was
inaugurated president of South Korea. His in-
auguration brought about the end of U.S. oc-
cupation in Korea. The U.S. began to transfer
its authority to the new government. The
South Koreans began to call the Constabulary
the National Defense Army, but the term was
not acknowledged by the United States. Dur-
ing the transitional period, the U.S. agreed to
maintain the training of the Constabulary
forces and the Korean Coast Guard. The Amer-
ican advisors were to be reassigned to the Over-
strength Detachment, Headquarters, USAFIK,
to be reorganized as a Provisional Military Ad-
visory Group (PMAG). On 26 August, John J.
Muccio, recently appointed special assistant to
Korea by President Truman, established a U.S.
diplomatic mission in the capital. Muccio also
retained the rank of ambassador, with author-
ization by the president to negotiate the im-
pending withdrawal of U.S. troops from Korea.
The phase-out began on 15 September.
By October 1948, more trouble began to
brew. Members of the Constabulary ignited an
insurrection. On 19 October, the S.K. 14th
Regiment, under orders to quash the turmoil,
received U.S. rifies; however, the unit contained
some Communist NCOs. The unit had been
Prologue
ordered to the island of Chej-do to assist forces
already there. The unit was ordered to move
out before the rifies were distributed to prevent
the Communists from getting them. The Com-
munist NCOs instigated mutiny. The rebels
seized Yosu and imprisoned some loyalists. The
progress of the insurrection was halted by the
21st and by the 25th it was eliminated.
The newly created Republic of South
Korea was officially recognized by the U.S. on
1 January 1949. Shortly thereafter, on 15 Jan-
uary, the U.S. 24th Corps left Korea for Japan,
where it would disband. The remaining units
were to depart during March. During that same
month, the Soviets agreed to supply and arm
six North Korean infantry divisions and three
mechanized contingents. In addition, the Sovi-
ets committed to equip eight battalions of
Constabulary troops who were to operate near
the 38th Parallel and they committed to deliver
100 Soviet fighter planes, thirty light and
medium bombers and twenty reconnaissance
planes.
As the Russians equipped and trained the
North Koreans, the activity was relatively quiet.
Although the U.S. was in the process of with-
drawing its troops from Korea and had signed
an agreement with the South Koreans, the U.N.
Security Council decided during March 1949,
that the U.S.— rather than the U.N.— should
pay the expenses of arming the present force of
65,000 men. At the time, sufficient equipment
to arm 50,000 troops had been, or was about to
be, transferred from the Americans to the South
Koreans. The U.N. also decided that the U.S.
should supply some ships and equipment, val-
ued at about one million dollars, to the Korean
Coast Guard. And the U.N., not the U.S. Con-
gress, also decided that legislative action should
be forthcoming to get permanent financial aid
for Korea from a U.S. assistance program for
free nations. That legislation emerged and was
signed into law by President Truman in Octo-
ber 1949.
Despite the obvious Soviet build-up in
Europe and the intelligence that indicated So-
10
viet intent to dominate Asia, too, the U.S. con-
tinued to thin its fighting forces. Towards the
latter part of March, President Truman ap-
pointed Louis A. Johnson, a lawyer, as secre-
tary of defense. Johnson was conspicuously no
friend of the U.S. armed forces and he was an
obvious adversary to the Marine Corps and
Navy. Johnson intended to help eliminate both
branches of the service. Johnson believed that
amphibious invasions were extinct following
the close of World War II and he was convinced
the Air Force could replace the U.S. Navy.
Back in the States, the armed forces were
not faring too well with the politicians. On 23
April 1949, the U.S. Navy received a startling
surprise as Secretary of Defense Johnson aborted
a $188 million project that cost the Navy its
anticipated super-carrier, the USS United States.
Johnson’s action severely hindered the Navy’s
postwar aviation plans and he nearly killed off
Marine aviation with the same blow. Although
there were many concerns about Soviet expan-
sion, there were no thoughts of how the U.S.
Navy and the Marine Corps would be the last
chance to keep the U.S. from being driven from
Korea the following year. Only intervention by
Congressman Carl Vinson saved Marine Corps
aviation. Inter-service rivalry by that time had
reached a dangerous level.
Meanwhile, the Kremlin continued to
maintain the blockade of West Berlin, but the
city continued to receive food and supplies by air
delivery without interruption. The Russians also
ignited activity in North Korea to incite trou-
ble in Asia. On 3 May 1949, North Korean
Communist troops launched a raid in the vicin-
ity of Kaesong in the Republic of South Korea.
This clash was followed by hundreds of similar
skirmishes during the next six months. Many of
the exchanges were minor, but both sides sus-
tained high casualties. The Communists also
initiated guerrilla activity in South Korea. While
the tension continued to build in Korea, the So-
viets began to lessen tension in Berlin. On 4
May, the Russians agreed to lift the blockade,
ending the futile attempt to starve the West
 11
Berliners. The blockade officially terminated on
12 May 1949.
By June 1949, more evidence emerged re-
garding the Kremlin’s activities in Korea and the
entry of the Communist Chinese. A clandestine
operation run by General MacArthur’s head-
quarters in Japan discovered information about
Chinese fiying into Pyongyang under the pre-
tense of being war refugees. Other intelligence
verified that the North Koreans and the Chinese
Communists were controlled by the Kremlin.
About 2,000 reports fiowed into headquarters
in Tokyo and from there they were forwarded to
the States. The intelligence also validated the in-
ability of Syngman Rhee to meet a Communist
attack, primarily because of the lack of planes
and tanks. The South Koreans’ armor consisted
of some half-tracks and scout cars and their air
force encompassed only a few planes.
On 1 July 1949, the Provisional Advisory
Group, earlier organized to assist the South Ko-
rean Armed Forces, became the official connec-
tion between the U.S. and Korea following the
departure of USAFIK. It became the U.S. mil-
itary advisory group to the Republic of Korea,
known as KMAG. The members of KMAG,
coming under the American Diplomatic Mis-
sion, received diplomatic immunity. The newly
formed South Korean units had to contend
with the numerous actions initiated by the
North Korean regular forces and with the ever-
growing guerrilla units. The KMAG advisors
also supported the S.K. Coast Guard, which
had about ninety vessels, of which only forty
were seaworthy. Consequently, the S.K. Coast
guard was outclassed by the smugglers and pi-
rates who maintained their exploits with little
interruption.
The North Korean Communists opened
a strong attack against the South Korean
Ongjin Peninsula during August 1949. The in-
cursion began strongly and brought severe
fighting, but the South Koreans were able to
prevail. The Communists were driven back be-
yond the 38th Parallel. Later, on 1 September,
intelligence reports forwarded from Far East
Prologue
Command to Washington indicated that since
the previous June, one Chinese division had
trickled into North Korea from Antung, Man-
churia. In conjunction, the Chinese on 21 Sep-
tember announced the establishment of the
People’s Republic of China, with the capital in
Beijing (a name restored from the Chinese Na-
tionalists’ Peiping), under the wing of the So-
viets. The Communist republic was first led by
Mao Tse-tung. During February of 1950, the
Chinese and Soviets fastened the bond further
by signing a friendship pact in Moscow. Soon
after, on the 23rd, President Truman an-
nounced to the nation that the Soviet Union
had detonated an atomic bomb.
Back in Washington, D.C., the House
Armed Services Committee held hearings on
19 October that focused on the possibility of the
extinction of the U.S. Navy and Marine Corps.
One witness, General Omar Bradley, chairman
of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, read his statement,
which unraveled like a tirade rather than an ob-
jective viewpoint. Bradley concluded his state-
ment with a prophecy: “I also predict that large
scale amphibious operations will never occur
again.” On 27 October, Admiral Louis E. Den-
feld (chief of naval operations), who had ap-
peared as a witness during the House hearings
to defend the role of the Navy, was fired by De-
fense Secretary Johnson.
On 8 December, General Headquarters
Intelligence in Japan received a report from its
agents in Korea. The information included the
number of North Korean divisions, which
stood between four and eight, bolstered by sep-
arate brigades. Their aircraft were documented
as Soviet-made and included 60 to 70 planes.
They also had about 35 to 40 Soviet T-34
tanks. Headquarters was also informed that the
winter would prevent any hostilities, but that
during April and May of 1950, Communist ac-
tion was very possible.
The situation in Asia at the beginning of
1950 remained poor. The occupation troops
still based in Japan had fallen far from their ef-
fectiveness during World War II. On 5 January
Prologue
1950, President Truman proclaimed that the
United States would not initiate, either directly
or indirectly, any military action to intercede
on behalf of the Nationalist Chinese under Chi-
ang Kai-shek on Formosa. Within a week, the
situation in the Far East became more confus-
ing. Korea was placed on the chopping block
when the secretary of state proclaimed that the
U.S. would act to defend Japan, the Philippines
and Okinawa. Korea was eliminated from the
protection of U.S. forces, which in turn sig-
naled to the Russians that Korea was an easy
target for Communist expansion. On the 20th,
more alarming information reached Far East
Command from the operatives in Korea. The
intelligence suggested a Communist invasion
of South Korea would be launched during ei-
ther March or April of 1950. The report, which
was forwarded to Washington, detailed the
movement of the North Korean forces and of
the continual arrivals of new Chinese units.
Nonetheless, the signs of imminent danger
failed to push the U.S. towards defending
South Korea.
By 1 March 1950, the House of Repre-
sentatives’ Armed Services Committee issued a
report that publicized its 1949 investigations. It
recommended that important air warfare roles
should be given to the Navy and Marine Corps
and it urged increased combined training. The
demise of the Navy and Marine Corps was
shelved.
During April, in response to a request
from General MacArthur for instructors (U.S.
Navy and Marine Corps) to train the U.S.
Army troops in amphibious warfare, the Marine
Corps was eager to accommodate MacArthur,
particularly because of the recent stinging re-
marks by General Bradley.
In the meantime, the clouds of war were
stirring in Korea. By mid–April, the Commu-
nists ordered all North Koreans living within
three miles of the 38th Parallel to abandon their
homes. Soon after, North Korean troops and
guerrillas occupied the empty living quarters.
The activity was picked up by MacArthur’s op-
12
erators in Korea, turned in to headquarters and
from there forwarded to Washington.
By May of 1950, it became even clearer
that the reaches of Communism had been caus-
ing havoc around the globe. Secretary of State
Dean Acheson, while in Paris, announced that
the U.S. was going to provide military aid to
Cambodia, France, Laos and Vietnam to bol-
ster the respective struggles against the rebels
in French Indochina, who had been described
as Communists. There was no mention of aid
for South Korea, which left the message that
Korea was on its own. The Communists essen-
tially signaled their intentions on 8 June, when
the newspapers in Pyongyang, North Korea,
published a manifesto claiming that a parlia-
ment would be elected during August and that
a meeting was scheduled to convene in Seoul
on the 15th of August.
On 15 June, the KMAG announced the
grim circumstances and stated that because of
a lack of equipment the South Korean armed
forces could withstand an enemy invasion no
longer than fifteen days. By the 23rd, following
an upsurge in incursions, one KMAG advisor,
Lt. Colonel Thomas McPhail, became con-
vinced that an attack was imminent. He based
his conclusions on intelligence gathered while
engaging guerrillas. McPhail’s intelligence had
discovered fresh infantry units, camoufiaged
tanks and antiaircraft batteries, all deployed
within striking distance of the South Korean
positions below the 38th Parallel. Lt. Colonel
McPhail convinced General Kim, the S.K. 6th
Division commander, to cancel all weekend
leaves and to ensure that all defensive fortifi-
cations were fully manned at their positions that
guarded the approaches to Chunchon. McPhail
forwarded the intelligence to headquarters, but
still, the information did not sound any alarms.
Things remained quiet along the 38th
Parallel on 24 June. The tranquility provided
the enemy with additional opportunities to fi-
nalize preparations for the invasion scheduled to
commence on the following day. The South
Koreans had four divisions and one regiment
 13 Prologue

positioned to react to hostilities if they devel- based to the rear. To add to the crisis, many of
oped, but of those, only four regiments and one the troops and KMAG advisors were on week-
battalion were deployed near the front below end liberty on the morning of the 25th when
the 38th Parallel. The bulk of the forces were the colossal offensive began.
This page intentionally left blank
 Acronyms and Abbreviations

This list is not all-inclusive, but it includes the military terms most commonly used
during the Korean War period, as well as other standard abbreviations and acronyms.

AA— Airman Apprentice (USN) ADCOM— Air (later, Aerospace) Defense Com-
AAA— Antiaircraft artillery mand (see also, ADC)
AAB— Army Air Base ADM— Admiral
AAC— Alaskan Air Command Admin— Administration
AAF— Army Air Forces AdmO— Administration Order
AAFld— Army Air Field Adv Tn— Advanced Trainer
AB— Air Base ADVON— Advanced Echelon
AB–Aviation Boatswain’s Mate (USN) AE— Ammunition Ship
ABCCC— Airborne Battlefield Command Con- AE— Aviation Electrician’s Mate (USN)
trol and Communication AEF— American Expeditionary Force
ABG— Air Base Group AEMS— Armament and Electronics Maintenance
Abn— Airborne Squadron
AbnRCT— Airborne Regimental Combat Team AerialDel Plat— Aerial Delivery Platoon
ABW— Air Base Wing AETC— Air Education and Training Command
AC— Air Controlman AEW— Airborne Early Warning
AC— Symbol following some photo negative AF— Aviation Photographer’s Mate (USN)
numbers, denoting a black and white negative AF— Air Force
AC&CS— Airborne Command and Control AF— Store Ship
Squadron AFA— Armored Field Artillery
ACC— Air Combat Command AFB— Air Force Base
ACE— Accelerated Co-Pilot Enrichment Pro- AFFE— Army Forces Far East
gram AFCON— Air Force–controlled
AcofS— Assistant Chief of Staff AFHRA— Air Force Historical Research Agency
ACW— Air Control Wing AFLC— Air Force Logistics Command
AD— Aviation Machinist Mate (USN) Afid— Airfield
AD— Douglas “Skyraider”: single-engine attack AFMC— Air Force Materiel Command
plane (USA) AFOUA—Air Force Outstanding Unit Award
AD— Destroyer Tender AFRC— Air Force Reserve Command
ADC— Air Defense Command (see also AFRES— Air Force Reserve
ADCOM) AFRTC— Air Force Reserve Training Center
ADC— Assistant Division Commander AFS— Air Force Station
ADCOM— Advance Command and Liaison AFSC— Air Force Systems Command
Group AFSOC—Air Force Special Operations Command

15
Acronyms and Abbreviations 16

AFSPC— Air Force Space Command AS— Air Station

AG— Aerographer’s Mate (USN) ASCOM— Army Service Command
AGC— Amphibious Command Ship (Amphibi- ASP— Ammunition Supply Point
ous Force Flagship) Asst— Assistant
AGO— Office of the Adjutant General AT— Antitank
AH— Hospital Ship AT— Aviation Electronics Technician (AT)
AIA— Air Intelligence Agency ATAR— Anti-tank Aircraft Rockets
Air DelPlat— Air Delivery Platoon ATC— Air Training Command [1946–1993]
AirO— Air Officer (later, AETC); Air Transport Command
AirSptSec— Air Support Section [1942–1948]
AK— Aviation Storekeeper (USN) ATF— Ocean Tug–Fleet
AK— Cargo Ship ATIS— Allied Translator and Interpreter Section
AKA— Assault (Attack) Cargo Ship ATTF— Alaska Tanker Task Force
AKL— Light Cargo Ship AU— Attack Model of Vought F4U “Corsair”
AKS— Stores Issue Ship Aux— Auxiliary
AL— Aviation Electronic (USN) AV— Seaplane Tender
ALCE— Airlift Control Element AVP— Seaplane Tender, Small
ALCM— Air Launched Cruise Missile AW— Automatic Weapons
ALCS— Airborne Launch Control System AW— Airlift Wing
AM— Aviation Structural Mechanic (USN) AWADS— Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery Sys-
AM— Minesweeper tem
AMC— Air Mobility Command B-26— Douglas “Invader”: twin-engine light
AMIK— American Mission in Korea bomber (USA)
AMS— Auxiliary Motor Minesweeper or B-29— Boeing “Superfortress”: four-engine
Minesweeper, Small bomber (USA)
AMPH Trac Bn— Amphibious Tractor Battalion BAR— Browning Automatic Rifie
AMPH TrkBn— Truck Battalion BB— Battleship
AMW— Air Mobility Wing Bchmstr Unit— Beachmaster Unit
AN— Airman (USN) BCT— Battalion Combat Team
ANG— Air National Guard BIRD DOG— Search and Rescue
ANGB— Air National Guard Base BLT— Battalion Landing Team
ANGLICO— Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison BM— Boatswain’s Mate (USN)
Company BMEWS— Ballistic Missile Early Warning Sys-
AO— Aviation Ordnance Man (USN) tem
AO— Oiler Bn— Battalion
AOG— Gasoline Tanker BomCom— Bomber Command
AP— Transport Brig— Brigade
APA— Attack Transport Brig— Brigadier
APD— High Speed Transport Brig Gen— Brigadier General
Aprt— Airport BRIGGEN— Brigadier General
ARADCOM— Army Air Defense Command BT— Boilerman (USN)
ARB— Air Reserve Base Btry— Battery
ARFC— Air Reserve Flying Center BuMed— Bureau of Medicine
ARG— Repair Ship-Internal Combustion Engine BW— Bombardment/Bomb Wing
ARH— Repair Ship-Heavy Hull Damage C-47/R4D— Douglas “Skytrain”: twin-engine
ARL— Repair Ship–Landing Craft transport plane
ARMDAmphBn— Armored Amphibious Battal- CA— Heavy Cruiser
ion CAP— Combat Air Patrol
ARS— Salvage Vessel CAS— Close-Air Support
ART— Air Reserve Technician Capt— Captain
ARW— Air Refueling Wing CBI— China-Burma-India Theater
 17
CCF— Chinese Communist Forces (Korean War)
CCTS— Combat Crew Training Squadron
CCTW— Combat Crew Training Wing
CDR— Commander
CENTAF— Central Air Force
CG— Commanding General
CIC— Counter-Intelligence Corps (USA)
CINCFE— Commander-in-Chief, Far East
CINCLANT— Commander-in-Chief, Atlantic
CINCPAC— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific
Command
CINCPACAF— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific
Air Forces
CINCPACFLT— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific
Fleet
CINCSAC— Commander-in-Chief, Strategic Air
Command
CINCUNC— Commander-in-Chief, United
Nations Command
CINCUSAFE— Commander-in-Chief, United
States Air Forces in Europe
CL— Light Cruiser
CLAA— Light Antiaircraft Cruiser
CMC— Commandant of the Marine Corps
CNO— Chief of Naval Operations
CO— Commanding Officer
CO— Company
COB— Collocated Operating Base
Col— Colonel
COMAirSupGrp— Commander Air Support
Group
ComCarCom— Combat Cargo Command
COMCARDIV— Commander, Carrier Division
Comd— Command
COMFAIRJAP— Commander, Fleet Air Wing
Japan
ComFltAir Wing— Commander Fleet Air Wing
COMNAGFE— Commander Naval Air Group
Far East
COMNAVFE— Commander, Naval Forces Far
East
COMNAVMARIANAS— Commander, Naval
Forces Marianas
COMO— Commodore
ComPacFlt— Commander Pacific Fleet
COMPHIBGRUONE— Commander Amphibi-
ous Group One
COMPHIBPAC— Commander, Amphibious
Forces Pacific
COMSEVENTHFLT— Commander, Seventh
Fleet
Acronyms and Abbreviations
COMUNBLOCKANDCORTFOR— Comman-
der, United Nations Blockading and Escort
Force
CONAD— Continental Air Defense Command
CONLUS— Continental United States
CONUS— Continental United States
COS— Combined Operations Section
CP— Command Post
CPV— Chinese People’s Volunteers
CPX— Command Post Exchange
CR— Command Report
C/S— Chief of Staff
CS— Commissaryman (USN)
CSG— Combat Service Group
CSG— Combat Support Group
CSUSA— Chief of Staff, U.S. Army
CT— Communication Technician (USN)
CTC— Civil Transport Corps
CTE— Commander Task Element
CTF— Commander Task Force
CTG— Commander Task Group
CTS— Combat Training Squadron
CV— Aircraft Carrier
CVA— Attack Aircraft Carrier
CVE— Aircraft Carrier Escort
CVG— Carrier Air Group
CVL— Aircraft Carrier Light
CZ— Canal Zone (in Panama)
DAF— Department of the Air Force
DC— Damage Controlman (USN)
DD— Destroyer
DDE— Destroyer Escort
DDER— Radar Picket Destroyer Escort
DDR— Radar Picket Destroyer
DESDIV— Destroyer Division
Det— Detachment
DEW— Distant Early Warning
DF— Disposition Form
DFSC— Symbol denoting color photographic
number
DIS— Daily Intelligence Summary
Div— Division
DMS–Destroyer Minesweeper
DMZ— Demilitarized Zone
DOD— Department of Defense
DOW— Died of Wounds
DPRK— Democratic People’s Republic of Korea
(North Korea)
DRU— Direct Reporting Unit
DT— Dental Technician (USN)
DUC— Distinguished Unit Citation
Acronyms and Abbreviations 18

DUKW— Amphibious Truck FEC— Far East Command

dy— Duty FECOM— Far East Command
EAME— European-African-Middle Eastern FES— Far Eastern Squadron
ECIDE (U)— East Coast Island Defense Ele- FICON— Fighter-Interceptor Carrier, Recon-
ment (Unit) naissance
ECM— Electronic Countermeasures FL— Flight Leader
EM— Electrician’s Mate (USN) Fld— Field
EMB Off— Embarkation Officer FMF— Fleet Marine Force
EngrBn— Engineer Battalion FMFLant— Fleet Marine Force, Atlantic
EngrPortConst Co— Engineer Port Construc- FMFPac— Fleet Marine Force, Pacific
tion Company (USA) FMS— Field Maintenance Squadron
EngrSpecBrig— Engineer Special Brigade (USA) FN— Fireman (USN)
ENS— Ensign Electronic Technician (USN) FO— Forward Observer (artillery)
ETO— European Theater of Operations FOA— Field Operating Agency
ETTF— European Tanker Task Force FS— Fighter Squadron
EUSAK— Eighth U.S. Army in Korea FSA— Fire Support Arms
ERC— Enlisted Reserve Corps FSA— Fire Support Area
F2H— McDonnell “Banshee”: single-engine jet FSCC— Fire Support Coordination Center
fighter (US) Ft— Fort
F2H-2P— Douglas “Skyknight”: twin-engine jet FT— Fire Control Technician
fighter (US) FTW— Flying Training Wing
F3D— Douglas “Skyknight”: single-engine jet Fum & BathPlat— Fumigation and Bath Pla-
fighter (US) toon
F3D-2— Douglas “Skyknight”: two-engine jet FW— Fighter Wing
fighter (US) G-1— Personnel section of divisional or higher
F4U— Chance Vought “Corsair”: single-engine staff
fighter (US) G-2— Intelligence section of divisional or higher
F4U-5N— Chance Vought “Corsair” single staff
engine night fighter G-3— Operations and training section of divi-
F-51— North American “Mustang”: single- sional or higher staff
engine fighter (US) G-4— Logistics section of divisional or higher
F7F-3N— Grumman “Tigercat” twin-engine staff
night fighter GCI— Ground Control Intercept
F9F— Grumman “Panther”: single-engine jet Gen— General
fighter (US) GHQ— General Headquarters
F-80— Lockheed “Shooting Star”: single-engine GHQAF— General Headquarters Air Force
jet fighter (US) GHQFEC— General Headquarters, Far East
F-86— North American “Sabre”: single-engine Command
jet fighter (US) GLCM— Ground Launched Cruise Missile
FA— Field artillery GM— Gunner’s Mate (USN)
FA— Fireman (USN) GO— General Order
FABn— Field Artillery Battalion HA— Hospitalman Apprentice
FAC— Forward Air Control (controller) H&d— Harassing and Interdiction
FBG— Fighter Bomber Group HE— High Explosive
FAF— Fifth Air Force (later named PACAF) Hedron— Headquarters Squadrn
FAFIK— Fifth Air Force in Korea HF— High Frequency Radio
FASRon— Fleet Air Service Squadron HM— Hospital Corpsman (USN)
FBHL— Force Beachhead Line HMS— Her Majesty’s Ship
FC— Fire Controlman HMAS— Her Majesty’s Australian Ship
FEAF— Far Eastern Air Forces HMCS— Her Majesty’s Canadian Ship
FEAM Com— Far East Materiel Command HMNZS— Her Majesty’s New Zealand Ship
 19 Acronyms and Abbreviations

HMR— Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron LCM— Landing Craft, Mechanized

HN— Hospitalman (USN) LCOL (also Lt. Col)–Lieutenant Colonel
HO3S-1— Sikorsky Helicopter LCVP— Landing Craft, Vehicle and Personnel
HQ— Headquarters LG— Landing Ground
HqBn— Headquarters Battalion LGB— Laser Guided Bomb
HqCo— Headquarters Company Ln— Liaison
HQMC— Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps LSD— Land Ship, Dock
HqSq— Headquarters Squadron LSI(L)— Landing Ship, Infantry (Large)
HRS-1— Sikorsky Single Engine Helicopter LSM— Landing Ship Medium
H & S Co— Headquarters and Service Company LSMR— Landing Ship, Medium Rocket
HTL-4— Bell Two-Place Helicopter LST— Landing Ship, Tank
I&R— Intelligence and Reconnaissance LSTH— Landing Ship, Tank Casualty Evacua-
IBC— Iceland Base Command tion
ICBM— Intercontinental Ballistic Missile LSU— Landing Ship, Utility
ICM— Intercontinental Missile (i.e. the Snark) 1LT— First Lieutenant
Inf Div— Infantry Division 2LT— Second Lieutenant
Intl— International Lt— Lieutenant
IRBM— Intermediate Range Ballistic Missile Lt Col (also LCOL)— Lieutenant Colonel
IW— Intelligence Wing LTGen— Lieutenant General
JANIS— Joint Army-Navy Intelligence Service LTJG— Lieutenant ( Junior Grade)
(Studies) LVT— Landing Vehicle, Tracked
JCS— Joint Chiefs of Staff LVT(A)— Landing Vehicle, Tracked (Armored)
JIC— Joint Intelligence Committee M4A3E8— Flame Tank, Medium
JLC— Japan Logistical Command M45— Medium Tank
JML— Small Minesweeper, ex–Japanese MAC— Military Airlift Command (earlier called
JMS— Japanese Minesweeper MATS)
Jnl— Journal MAC— Military Armistice Commission
JOC— Joint Operations Center MAG— Marine Aircraft Group
JOG— Joint Operations Center Maj— Major
JSPOG— Joint Strategic Plans and Operations Maj Gen— Major General
Group MAJCOM— Major Command
JSSC— Joint Strategic Survey Committee MAJCON— Major Command Controlled
JTF— Joint Task Force Mar— Marine (s)
KATUSA— Korean Augmentation to the U.S. MASH— Mobile Army Surgical Hospital
Army MASRT— Marine Air Support Radar Team
KCOMC— Korean Communication Zone (Also MATS— Military Air Transport Service (later
KComZ) called MAC)
KIA— Killed in Action MAW— Marine Air Wing
K/KE— Symbols denoting photo color negative MAW— Military Airlift Wing
number MBP— Main Battle Position
KMAG— U.S. Military Advisory Group to the MDL— Military Demarcation Line
Republic of Korea MDW— Medical Wing
KMC— Korean Marine Corps ME— Metalsmith (USN)
KMCRCT— Korean Marine Corps Regimental MedAmb— CoMedical Ambulance Company,
Combat Regiment USA
KPR— Kimpo Provisional Regiment MedBn— Medical Battalion
KTACS—Korean Tactical Air Control System Memo— Memorandum
KVA— Korean Volunteer Army MGCIS— Marine Ground Control Intercept
LANTIRN— Low Altitude Navigation and Tar- Squadron
geting Infrared System for Night MIA— Missing in Action
LCDR— Lieutenant Commander MiG— Soviet Fighter Aircraft
Acronyms and Abbreviations
MILSTAR— Military Strategic and Tactical
Relay
MISD— Military Intelligence Service Detach-
ment (USA)
MLR— Main Line of Resistance
MM— Machinist’s Mate (USN)
MMS— Munitions Maintenance Squadron
MN— Mineman (USN)
MOH— Medal of Honor
MOS— Military Occupational Speciality
Mosquito— North American AT-6 “Texan”
Trainer, Single Engine Plane used as Airborne
FAC and Target Spotting
MP— Military Police
MPCo— Military Police Company
MPQ— Ground Radar Controlled Bombing
MS— Manuscript
Msg— Message
MSR— Main supply route
MSTS— Military Sea Transport Service
MT— Motor Transport
MTACS— Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron
MTBn— Motor Transport Battalion
MTO— Mediterranean Theater of Operations
MUC— Meritorious Unit Commendation
Muni— Municipal
MW— Missile Wing
NAF— Numbered Air Force
NAS— Naval Air Station
NASA— National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration
NATO— North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NavBchGru— Naval Beach Group
NAVFE— Naval Forces, Far East
NAVSTAR— Navigational Satellite Timing and
Ranging
NCAS— Night Close-Air Support
NCO— Noncommissioned officer
NEACP— National Emergency Airborne Com-
mand Post
NGF— Naval Gun Fire
NK— North Korea (n)
NKA— North Korean Army
NKPA— North Korean People’s Army
NORAD— North American Air Defense Com-
mand
NOTS— Naval Ordnance Test Station
NPRJ— National Police Reserve of Japan
NSC— National Security Council
NUC— Navy Unit Commendation
OCAC— Office of the Chief of the Air Corps
20
OCAFF— Office, Chief of Army Field Forces
OCMH— Office, Chief of Military History
OE-1— Cessna Single-Engine Light Observation
Plane
Off— Officer
OG— Operations Group
OL— Operating Location
OMS— Organizational Maintenance Squadron
ONI— Office of Naval Intelligence
OOB— Order of Battle
OP— Observation Post
OPLR— Outpost Line of Resistance
Opn— Operation
Opno— Operation Order
OpnPlan— Operation Plan
ORC— Organized Reserve Corps
ORDAmmCo— Ordnance Ammunition Com-
pany (USA)
OrdBn— Ordnance Battalion
OSA— Office of the Secretary of the Army
OSI— Office of Strategic Intelligence
OY— Consolidated Vultee Light Observation Plane
PACAF— Pacific Air Forces (earlier called FEAF)
PACCS— Post-attack Command and Control
System
PB4Y— Consolidated “Privateer”: four-engine
patrol plane (USA)
PBM— Martin “Mariner”: twin-engine fiying
boat (USA)
PC— Submarine Chaser
PCE— Escort Amphibious Control Vessel
PF— Frigate
PH— Photographer’s Mate (USN)
PhibGru— Amphibious Group
PhibTraPacTraining— Command Amphibious
Forces, Pacific Fleet
PHILCOM— Philippines Command
PLA— People’s Liberation Army
Plat— Platoon
PMAG— Provisional Military Advisory Group
PO-2— Polikarpov: light night bomber biplane
(Soviet)
POW— Prisoner of War
PR— Parachute Rigger (USN)
Prov— Provisional
PUC— Presidential Unit Citation
QM— Quartermaster
R4D— Douglass Transport (Navy and Marine
designation of C-47)
R5D— Douglas Four-Engine Transport (Navy
and Marine designation of C-54)
 21
RAAF— Royal Australian Air Force
Rad— Radio
RADM— Rear Admiral
RAF— Royal Air Force (of Great Britain)
R & D— Research and Development
RB-26— Douglas “Invader”: twin-engine recon-
naissance plane (USA)
RCM— Electronic-countermeasure reconnais-
sance
RcnCo— Reconnaissance Company
RCT— Regimental Combat Team
RD— Radarman (USN)
Recon— Reconnaissance
Reinf— Reinforced
RESCAP— Rescue Combat Air Patrol
RktBn— Rocket Battalion
RM— Radioman
RM— Royal Marines
ROK— Republic of Korea (South Korea)
ROKA— Republic of Korea Army
ROKN— Republic of Korea Navy
ROPE— Code name for aircraft decoy system
Rpt— Report
RQW— Rescue Wing
RS— Reconnaissance Squadron
RTAFB— Royal Thai(land) Air Force Base
RTNAfid— Royal Thai(land) Navy Airfield
RTU— Replacement Training Unit
RW— Reconnaissance Wing
RYCOM— Ryukyus Command
SA— Seaman Apprentice
SAC— Strategic Air Command
SAC— Supporting Arms Center
SAGE— Semi-automatic Ground Environment
SANACC— State-Army-Navy-Air Force Co-
ordinating Committee
SAR— Special Action Report
SCAB— Ship Control of Aircraft Bombing
SCAJAP— Supreme Commander Allied Powers,
Japan
SCAP— Supreme Commander, Allied Powers
SD— Steward (USN)
SEA— Southeast Asia
Sec— Section
SecDef— Secretary of Defense
SecNav— Secretary of the Navy
ServBn— Service Battalion
SFCP— Spotting Fire Command Post
Sgd— Signed
SGS— Secretary of the General Staff
Sh— Ship’s Serviceman
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SigBn— Signal Battalion
SigRepCo— Signal Repair Company
SK— Storekeeper (USN)
SMS— Strategic Missile Squadron
SMW— Strategic Missile Wing
SMSMarine— Supply Squadron
SN— Seaman
SO— Sonarman (USN)
SOA— Separate Operating Agency
SOP— Standard Operating Procedure
SOS— Special Operations Squadron
SOW— Special Operations Wing
SP— Shore Party
SPBn— Shore Party Battalion
SpOpnsCo— Special Operations Company
(USA)
SPTW— Support Wing
SPW— Space Wing (prior to 1994 [see also SW])
SRAM— Short Range Attack Missile
SRS— Strategic Reconnaissance Squadron
SRW— Strategic Reconnaissance Wing
Sta— Station
SW— Strategic Wing prior to 1994; afterwards
Space Wing
SWA— Southwest Asia
T/D— Table of Distribution
T/O— Table of Organization
TAC— Tactical Air Command
TAC— Tactical Air Coordinator
TacAir— Tactical Air
TACC— Tactical Air Control Center
TACP— Tactical Air Control Party
TACRON— Tactical Air Control Squadron
TAD— Tactical Air Direction
TADC— Tactical Air Direction Center
TAO— Tactical Air Observer
T-AP— Transport Operated by MSTS
TAR— Tactical Air Request
TARCAP— Tactical Air Reconaissance Combat
Air Patrol
TAS— Tactical Airlift Squadron
TASS— Tactical Air Support Squadron
TAW— Tactical Airlift Wing
TBM— General Motors “Avenger” Torpedo
Bomber
TCG— Troop Carrier Group
TCVE— Military Sea Transportation Service Air-
craft Ferry
TCW— Troop Carrier Wing
TE— Task Element
TEWS— Tactical Electronic Warfare Squadron
Acronyms and Abbreviations
TF— Task Force
TFS— Tactical Fighter Squadron
TFTG— Tactical Fighter Training Group
TFTS— Tactical Fighter Training Squadron
TFTW— Tactical Fighter Training Wing
TFW— Tactical Fighter Wing
TG— Task Group
TH— Territory of Hawaii
TkBn— Tank Battalion
TM— Torpedoman’s Mate (USN)
TMW— Tactical Missile Wing
Tng— Training
T/O— Table of Organization
TO & E— Table of Organization and Equipment
TOT— Time on Target
TRK— Truck
TRS— Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron
TRW— Tactical Reconnaissance Wing prior to
1992; Training Wing after 1993
TTS— Tactical Training Squadron
TU— Task Unit
TUSLOG— The United States Logistics Group
TW— Test Wing
UDT— Underwater Demolition Team
UF— Unit of Fire
UN— United Nations
UNC— United Nations Command
UNCOK— United Nations Commission in
Korea
UNCURK— United Nations Commission for
the Unification and Rehabilitation of Korea
unkn— unknown
US— United States (of America)
USA— United States Army
USAF— United States Air Force
USAFA— United States Air Force Academy
USAFE— United States Air Forces in Europe
USAFIK— United States Army Forces in Korea
USAMGIK— United States Army Military Gov-
ernment in Korea
22
USAR— U.S. Army Reserve
USARPAC— United States Army, Pacific
USCG— U.S. Coast Guard
USMC— United States Marine Corps
USMCR— United States Marine Corps Reserve
USMILAT— U.S. Military Attaché
USMA— U.S. Military Academy (West Point)
USN— United States Navy
USNAS— United States Naval Air Station
USSTAF— United States Strategic Air Forces
USSR— Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
VA— Navy Attack Squadron
VA— Veterans Administration
VADM— Vice Admiral
VFNavy— Fighter Squadron
VHB— Very Heavy Bombardment
VIP— Very Important Person(s)
VNAF— Vietnamese Air Force (Republic of
Vietnam or South Vietnam)
VMF— Marine Fighter Squadron
VMF(N)— Marine Night Fighter Squadron
VMO— Marine Observation Type Aircraft
(Squadron)
VMR— Marine Transport Type Aircraft
VMJ— Marine Photographic Squadron
VT— Shell Equipped with Proximity Fuse
WD— War Department
WD— War Diary
WG— Wing
WESPAC— Western Pacific
WIA— Wounded in Action
WP— White Phosphorus Shell
Yak-9— Yakovlev “Frank”: single-engine fighter
(Soviet)
Yak-18— Yakovlev: single-engine trainer (Soviet)
YMS— Motor Minesweeper
YN— Yeoman
YTB— Harbor Tug, Big
YW— District Barge
ZI— Zone of Interior
THE CHRONOLOGY

1950
An association known as IPR (Institute of Pacific January 1950 Negotiations between the
Relations), since as early as the mid–1930s, according South Korean Army and the National Police, bro-
to the Internal Security Subcommittee of the U.S. Sen- kered by KMAG (U.S. military advisory group to
ate, has been dominated by pro–Communist and the Republic of Korea) advisors, have brought about
pro–Soviet sympathies. Also, the Reece committee, a plan to train about 10,000 policemen for combat.
called to investigate tax-exempt foundations, notes: The blueprint calls for twenty-two police battalions,
“Nor does the point need to be labored that the loss of each composed of 112 men. Initially, more than 100
China to the Communists may have been the most police officers are sent to the Korean Army Infantry
tragic event in our [U.S.] history, and one to which the School to become familiarized with tactics and sub-
foundation-supported Institute of Pacific Relations sequently become military officers. The plan never
heavily contributed.” really gets off the ground due to the lack of fund-
IPR is a private organization, branched in ten sepa- ing. By May, only one battalion is genuinely mustered
rate countries and composed of ten separate national for the field. Colonel Harold Krohn, KMAG advi-
councils, with its main Headquarters in New York. sor to the National Police, in a report dated June 15,
Wall Street plays a principal part in the success of IPR: states that no combat police battalions had been
its primary contributors include the Carnegie and placed in the field prior to that month. The Army has
Rockefeller foundations, funded by the Morgans and the great difficulty getting its units to receive training,
Rockefellers. Also, Chase National Bank, National City as the Communists guerrillas maintain their activ-
Bank, Standard Oil, International Telephone and Tele- ity, keeping the Army busy.
graph and International General Electric contribute;
contributions poured heavily into IPR, apparently due
January 5 In the United States: President Tru-
man proclaims that the United States will not initiate,
to the connection between them and the banking inter-
either directly or indirectly, any Military action to in-
ests of the Rockefellers and the Morgans.
tercede on behalf of the Nationalist Chinese under Chi-
As the U.S. nears entrance into the Korean Conflict,
ang Kai-shek on Formosa. Chiang Kai-shek and his
the Rhodes Conspiracy theory again surfaces (secret so-
top aides fled from the mainland to Formosa during
ciety to spread British upper-class lifestyle); the Round
December, along with many of the nationalist troops.
Table Groups extend their organization; in New York,
A Chinese Communist attack against the island strong-
according to Professor Carroll Quigley, the front for
hold is anticipated. Within a week, the situation in the
the organization is the Council on Foreign Relations,
Far East becomes more confusing when the secretary
which in turn is a front for J.P. Morgan and Company.
of state proclaims that the U.S. would act to defend
Quigley, later (1960s) acknowledges the conspiracy,
Japan, the Philippines and Okinawa, eliminating Korea
stating: “There is a conspiracy, and I should know be-
from the protection of U.S. forces. Nevertheless, the
cause I am closely connected to it.” Quigley, in his book
KMAG advisors continue to train the South Koreans.
proclaims: “This network which we may identify as
— In Guam: The Fleet Marine Force is removed
round table groups has no aversion to cooperating with
from Guam. It returns to California. The final elements
the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently
depart on 25 April.
does so.”
— In Japan: An intelligence report comes into Gen-

23
March 10, 1950
eral Headquarters indicating that the Communists in
North Korea will launch an invasion of South Korea
during March or April; it further defines the movement
of the 3rd North Korean Division into the western sec-
tor of the 38th Parallel, the deployment of the 2nd
North Korean Division to the south and continued ar-
rivals of Chinese troops. These facts and the increasing
size of the border Constabulary force point to military
action. The reports are forwarded to Washington by
the Far East Command, but the U.S. has shown little
interest in defending Korea.
March 10 In Japan: Another intelligence report
from Korea predicts a North Korean invasion as early
as spring but undoubtedly by the fall, then pins it
down: “Latest reports received that the North Korean
P.A. [People’s Army] will invade South Korea in June.”
MacArthur, again forwards the information to Wash-
ington. Korea is not under the responsibility of
MacArthur, rather the State Department, and the few
troops (500 advisors) still in Korea report to the Amer-
ican ambassador. The training of police combat bat-
talions remains well behind schedule. About
mid–March, the South Korean Army puts out a sec-
ond memo intended to get all contingents through a
thirteen-week training schedule (battalion) by June 1
and the regimental phase by the end of June.
March 15 In the United States: Congress ap-
proves a request for additional $10,970,000 in aid to
Korea in response to a request from General William
Roberts and Ambassador Muccio made in December
1949. Because of a priority position assigned to Korea
by the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the bulk of requested equip-
ment is not available in the war-reserve stocks and must
be procured from commercial sources, which delays
delivery. By June 25, the day the Communists invade
South Korea, about $1,000 worth of supplies have been
delivered and about $300,000 in Signal Corps equip-
ment and spare parts are in transit. According to testi-
mony given later during Congressional hearings, one
KMAG officer stated that prior to the outbreak of hos-
tilities, only about $250 worth of wire had been re-
ceived in Korea. These developments greatly concern the
KMAG advisors.
April 1950 In Japan: In response to a recent
request from General MacArthur for the Navy and
Marine Corps to provide amphibious training for
the Army troops in Japan, a Marine instruction team
commanded by Col. Edward Forney arrives. The
Marines jump at the opportunity to accommodate
General MacArthur, especially considering General
Bradley’s predicted demise of the corps. Subse-
quently, a small amphibious force and support ele-
ments, including aviation personnel, join the instruc-
tors in Japan.
April 5 The Seventh Fleet, commanded by Admi-
ral Struble and based in the Philippines, is off the shores
of Korea. Planes attached to Air Group 5 (top jet-
trained unit in the Pacific), zoom from the Valley Forge
24
and fly a parade formation over Inchon and Seoul, then
several days later the jets repeat the ceremonial flight
over Hong Kong. The Seventh Fleet comes under the
jurisdiction of Admiral Radford, not General Mac-
Arthur.
April 15 In Japan: General Headquarters receives
another of its intelligence documents; this one verifies
that the Communists directed the evacuation of all
civilians living within three miles of the 38th Parallel.
Soon after evacuation, the memo advises, North Korean
troops and guerrillas took over the empty living quar-
ters. This information is dispatched to Washington.
May 9 In China: The Communist Chinese govern-
ment announces it will release two American aviators
that it has held since 19 October 1948, when their
plane was forced down in Manchuria. The two men,
Master Sergeant Elmer C. Bender, U.S. Marine Corps,
and William C. Smith, U.S. Navy (electrician’s mate),
state upon their release that they had to admit to espi-
onage to get their release.
May 25 In Japan: Activity in North Korea is ac-
celerating, according to an intelligence dispatch from
operatives in Korea. The message discloses recent in-
spection of all Army units and it identifies seven differ-
ent divisions. The message also reiterates its previously
dispatched information concerning the infusion of Chi-
nese troops. General Headquarters is informed about
the compulsory service in the North Korean Armed
Forces, confirming that between 100,000 and 150,000
youths have been inducted. General MacArthur and
the Far East Command still have no authority over
Korea or Formosa, as they have been the wards of the
State Department. Nonetheless, MacArthur’s G-2 in-
stinctively had formed a small and inconspicuous intel-
ligence unit; Korean Liaison Office (KLO). Seemingly,
the information contained in the nearly 2,000 messages
forwarded to Washington had been disregarded. Within
one month, a heavy price will be paid for the inatten-
tion. The South Korean Armed Forces are composed of
ten divisions; however in direct opposition to
MacArthur, the Koreans had been trained for Constab-
ulary duty, not front line combat. In contrast, the
North Koreans were well trained and their guns were
pointed toward South Korea. Kaesong, which had been
attacked by Communists in August 1949, is again
raided during May 1950.
Late May In the U.S. Far East Command:
Extensive fleet exercises occur in the waters between
the Philippine Islands and Korea, including warships
of the Seventh Fleet and many of Vice Admiral
Charles Turner Joy’s command (General Mac-
Arthur’s Naval commander). The operation takes
place as ships are turning over, affording extra ves-
sels. The Seventh Fleet, upon completion of the ma-
neuvers, is scheduled to arrive back in Manila by the
4th of July, pay a subsequent visit to Hong Kong and
stop in Japan during the summer.
 25
June 1950 In the United States: U.S. Army
strength is officially listed at 591,000, although its au-
thorized strength is capped at 630,000. It is com-
posed of ten combat divisions, nine separate regi-
mental combat teams and the postwar Constabulary
(Germany), which is approximate to one division.
Of these, four divisions are deployed in Japan: the 7th
(Honshu — northern sector), 24th (Kyushu), 25th
(Honshu—southern sector) and the 1st Cavalry (In-
fantry), deployed in the Kanto Plain within the cen-
tral sector of Honshu. Only the 1st Cavalry (In-
fantry) is at full strength. Although the division in
Europe comprises a full complement, the remaining
combat units are below full strength, including the
battalion composition standing at two per regiment,
rather than three. Artillery units are similarly re-
duced in size and equipment; firing batteries are de-
pleted from three to two. Other exceptions are the
24th Regiment, 25th Division, which has a full com-
plement of three battalions, and the 159th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, which is composed of three firing
batteries. In essence, American combat units stand
at about 70 percent of full strength. To add to the
concern, the tank units are using the light M24 tank.
Available equipment for the U.S. Army qualifies as
near archaic and has been exposed to extensive use
during World War II. These figures contrast sharply
to the 89 divisions that comprised the U.S. Army
during 1945.
During June, the U.S. Navy, comprised of
377,000 troops and 670 vessels (active), has nearly
one-third of its vessels in the Pacific under the com-
mand of Admiral Arthur W. Radford, with 20 per-
cent of this force stationed in the Far East at Tokyo,
under the command of Vice Admiral Charles Turner
Joy. Joy’s staff is composed of 29 officers. In addition,
the U.S. Navy has about 4,300 operational aircraft
of all types. The warships operating close to Japan
are: Amphibious Force, under Rear Admiral J.H.
Doyle—USS Arikara (ATT 98), USS Cavalier (APA
37), USS Mt. McKinley (AGC 7), USS Union (AKA
106) and the LST 611; Support Force, under Rear
Admiral J. M. Higgins — Cruiser USS Juneau, De-
stroyers USS Colett, Dehaven, Mansfield and Swen-
son; and Auxiliary Motor Minesweepers — USS
Chatterer, Kite, Mocking Bird, Osprey, Partridge and
the Red Head. Since the initial days of occupation,
their principal activity has been to patrol the waters
of the Tsushima Strait to prevent smugglers from op-
erating between Korea and Japan, and to patrol the
waters off the Ryukyus to eliminate the Chinese pi-
rate vessels (in southwest Japan, between Taiwan and
Japan). The island chain, composed of Amami Is-
lands (part of Kagoshima prefecture), the Okinawa
Islands, and the Sakishima Islands, separates the East
China Sea from the Philippine Sea.
Other duties include displaying the U.S. colors at
Japanese ports and maintaining training exercises to
keep the fleet ready while holding vigil. Also, the
Seventh Fleet, commanded by Vice Admiral Stru-
June 15, 1950
ble, is dispersed between Hong Kong, Sangley Point
and Subic Bay (Philippines); it is composed of two
carriers and eight destroyers and has fundamentally
practiced its peacetime mission, spending a great
amount of time displaying the U.S. flag in the vari-
ous ports of the Orient. Seventh Fleet vessels are:
the Carriers USS Rochester (CA) and USS Valley Forge
(CV), the Destroyers USS Brush, USS Eversole, USS
Fletcher, USS Maddox, USS S.N. Moore, USS Rad-
ford, USS Shelton and the USS Taussig. The Marine
Corps’ is basically domiciled in the United States,
with its 1st Marine Division at Camp Pendleton
(West Coast) and the 2nd Marine Division stationed
at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina, except for one
battalion, which is in the Mediterranean with the
fleet. Neither Marine division is at full strength. The
journey by sea from the U.S. West Coast to Pusan,
Korea, varies in time. Personnel make the trip in
about sixteen days; however, travel time is much
greater for the ships transporting heavy equipment
and supplies. Also, at the beginning of June, the U.S.
Air Force is composed of 48 Groups (Air Wings).
Far East Air Forces (FEAF), the biggest contingent
outside the continental U.S., is commanded by Gen-
eral George Stratemeyer and is composed of nine
groups, outfitted with approximately 350 opera-
tional planes. Air Force fighter strength stands at 18
squadrons and troop strength stands at about 33,625
(officers and enlisted), although its authorized
strength is 39,975. Total aircraft for FEAF is listed
at 1,172, but the figure includes many in storage or
being salvaged. The Military Air Transport Service,
Pacific Division, operating between the U.S. and the
Far East, is composed of about 60 four-engine trans-
ports, supplemented by MATS C-74s and C-97s.
The planes shuttle between the States and Hawaii.
This force will quadruple after the outbreak of war
in Korea. The U.S. Reserve Forces total more than
two and one-half million men, with the majority of
the troops being in the National Guard and Orga-
nized Reserve Corps. The National Guard is com-
posed of 325,000 troops and twenty-seven divisions,
none at full strength. The Organized Reserve Corps
stands at 186,000 troops, most of whom serve with
combat support units and service contingents. In ad-
dition, the ROTC (Reserve Officer Training Corps)
is composed of 219,000 students enrolled either in
high school or college.
June 2 In the United States: The Naval Academy
graduating class at Annapolis is composed of 690 mid-
shipmen; forty-eight of these accept commissions in
the Marine Corps.
June 15 The ongoing program to combat-train
the South Korean police battalions and army units re-
mains behind schedule. The bulk of the contingents
have not completed the courses, but by this time, all
Korean troops have fired their rifles for qualification. In
conjunction, some police battalions replace S.K. Army
units to handle internal security, which permits army
June 18, 1950
battalions to return to their bases to receive training.
Schedules for the completion of training are again
raised, and pushed back from June to July 31 for bat-
talion courses and the end of October for regimental
training. All the while, Korean leadership qualities have
been below standard and slow coming.
In related activity, KMAG reports that the Korean
Coast Guard stands at only about 70 percent of capac-
ity. It contains 105 vessels, but only 58 are serviceable
and the number includes fishing vessels. There has been
movement toward detaching the Coast Guard advisors
and reassigning them under the State Department as a
cost-cutting plan. KMAG stipulates that regardless of
which department controls the expenses, the advisors are
still quite necessary. In addition, the U.S. is in the
process of reducing U.S. Army operations in Korea dur-
ing fiscal 1951. The Korean Air Force contains ten Har-
vard trainers and consists of twelve operable liaison
planes. KMAG makes it known that because of the cur-
rent situation, including the condition of the armed
forces and lack of operational equipment and supplies,
the South Koreans will be able to mount only a defen-
sive operation. If hostilities occur it is thought the
South Koreans can hold no longer than fifteen days.
KMAG also makes it clear that “Korea is threatened
with the same disaster that befell China.” Simply put,
KMAG sounds the alarm that the Communists could
overrun Korea if they choose to ignite hostilities.
The North Koreans have been on an escalating war-
footing, supported by the Russians who have bolstered
the North’s capabilities since the close of World War
II. Several thousand North Koreans have received train-
ing in the Soviet Union and the Soviets have con-
tributed large numbers of advisors and training instruc-
tors to assist the build-up. In addition, the North
Koreans have received from the Russians great num-
bers of equipment, including artillery, fighter planes
and tanks.
In other activity, General William Roberts departs
Korea. Colonel Sterling Wright, the chief of staff, as-
sumes command of KMAG until Major Frank Keating
arrives from the States. However, Keating chooses to re-
tire rather than move to Korea. In the interim, Colo-
nel Wright is instructed to remain until another re-
placement for Keating arrives. Lt. Colonel Carl Sturies
has temporary control of the advisory group. Colonel
Wright is scheduled to depart Korea to attend the In-
dustrial College of the Armed Forces in the United
States.
— In the United States: At Quantico, Va., combat
demonstrations are exhibited for President Truman to
show him why the Marine Corps should receive a larger
share of the budget. The Marines showcase an assault
landing launched from carrier-based helicopters to
spotlight the speed with which troops and their supplies
can be ferried from the sea to targets behind enemy
lines. The president expresses no desire to pass the buck
and, in a touch of sarcasm, places his hand on a how-
itzer, implying that he puts his confidence in it.
26
June 18 In the Philippines: Admiral Struble, hav-
ing been in the Philippines several days to confer with
Louis Johnson, secretary of defense, and General Brad-
ley, chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff, departs Manila for
Pearl Harbor to speak with Admiral Arthur Radford.
The discussions in Manila focus primarily on the poten-
tial dangers that could prompt trouble in Japan, In-
dochina and even Formosa. Another topic is the cauldron
simmering in the Philippines with the Huks, but Korea
is not discussed, although it comes under the umbrella
of the Seventh Fleet. General Bradley and Louis John-
son, during their stay in the Far East, also visit Japan.
From Hawaii, Struble heads for the States for a confer-
ence with Admiral Forrest Sherman before attending his
daughter’s wedding. In his absence, Rear Admiral J. M.
Hoskins, commanding officer of Carrier Division 3, as-
sumes temporary command of Seventh Fleet.
June 23 Lt. Colonel Thomas McPhail, KMAG
advisor to the Republic of Korea (ROK) 6th Division,
has become concerned about possible enemy incur-
sions. McPhail bases his conclusions on various mis-
sions his intelligence units have executed. Recent re-
connaissance missions have uncovered new enemy
infantry units, camouflaged tanks and antiaircraft bat-
teries, all within striking distance of the South Korean
positions below the 38th Parallel. Lt. Colonel McPhail
convinces General Kim, the S.K. 6th Division com-
mander, to cancel all weekend leaves and to ensure that
all defensive fortifications are totally manned. The 6th
S.K. Division guards the approaches to Chunchon,
which during the past several weeks, has received its
baptism under fire, while engaging enemy guerrillas
who had crossed the border between Chunchon and
Kangnung. The intelligence has been forwarded by
McPhail to his superior officers, but there is still no
thought of an enemy invasion. Meanwhile, other S.K.
units, on either flank of the 6th Division, are unpre-
pared and less trained as the weekend of the 23rd ap-
proaches.
June 24 There is no suspicion of an invasion by
North Korea. Four South Korean divisions and one
regiment are deployed defensively to react to hostili-
ties, but only four regiments and one battalion are
posted near the front lines below the 38th Parallel. The
remainder are stationed to the rear. Many of the South
Koreans and the KMAG advisors are on weekend lib-
erty when the invasion occurs.
June 25–June 28 THE INVASION OF SOUTH
KOREA At 0400 on June 25, the sudden roar of ar-
tillery and mortars, accompanied by the shriek of
bugles and clanging armor, jolts the South Koreans
and their American advisors into a hellish war.
Blackened skies are illuminated by crimson streaks of
unrelenting fire along the 38th Parallel, across the
entire peninsula. The North Korean I Corps strikes
southward with feverish pitch. It pounds against the
Ongjin peninsula and the other border areas on the
east, as they press toward Chunchon. After the initial
 27
shock, South Korean units of the 17th Regiment re-
turn fire, but it is insufficient to halt the attack. Units
of the N.K. II Corps stream across the border, rav-
aging everything in their path as they pounce on
South Korean positions near Chunchon and
Hongch’on, farther east. The blistering attack is not
totally synchronized. Some of the staggered fire com-
mences as late as 0500. Nonetheless, much of the
potent firepower far outdistances anything in the
South Korean arsenal. The flying terror creates a
great deal of panic and confusion south of the bor-
der.
North Korea, which has become an armed fortress
through the support of the Kremlin, has quietly
placed about seven infantry divisions and one ar-
mored division close to the 38th Parallel. Slightly to
the rear are thousands of reinforcements. Subsequent
to the invasion, the North Koreans will claim that
they had reacted to a South Korean incursion and
had ordered a counterattack, but on June 8, more
than two weeks prior to the opening of hostilities,
newspapers in Pyongyang (North Korea) proclaimed
through a manifesto that a parliament would be
elected during early August. In conjunction, a meet-
ing is scheduled to convene in Seoul on August 15,
making it clear that the Communists anticipated
total control of Korea by mid–August.
The postwar strategy of the Soviets (Bolsheviks)
to gain power by cunning use of its satellites and fel-
low travelers has been unfolding according to plan.
While the strategic eyes of the U.S. are focused on
Europe, a tranquil and rainy Sunday morning is
transformed into a cauldron of horror as about
90,000 crack North Korean troops, many trained in
the Soviet Union, burst across the 38th Parallel,
spearheaded by Soviet-made tanks. Swarms of
screaming troops, foliage sprouting from their uni-
forms and helmets, attack and scorch the earth. The
advance is effortless at many of the selected targets,
as the South Koreans lack planes, tanks, and anti-
tank weapons, which compels many of them to re-
treat in disarray. Synchronized unopposed air attacks
also occur.
Seoul, the embattled capital of South Korea, and
Kimpo Airfield are struck by several air raids before
day’s end. The ugly combination of air, ground and
armor attacks wreaks havoc on soldiers and civilians
alike. Crushed and burning buildings are common-
place. Throngs of bewildered civilians flee in ab-
solute fright under the echo of guns. Trembling chil-
dren are scattered about the line of retreat. Some
children are dead, others are huddled in fear, adding
to the gloom. The initial fighting during the contest
is lopsided. Later, one South Korean who was there
described the defense and likened it to “throwing
eggs at a rock.” Observations after the fact reveal
many South Korean dead who are piled in irregular
layers and others, merely tossed in singular lines,
lying prone in unnatural positions, their hands tied
behind their backs.
June 25, 1950
Meanwhile, the American advisors, meager in
number (fewer than 500), are unable to provide any
genuine assistance. No U.S. combat troops are in
Korea. Few aircraft remain and none of those are
available to the South Koreans. The dilemma of the
Americans is seriously compounded because few of
the South Korean troops speak English. Once the
North Koreans infiltrate, it is impossible to distin-
guish friend from foe.
It becomes increasingly apparent that the United
States is ill-prepared to immediately halt the Soviet-
backed North Korean invaders and unprepared to
neutralize Communist aggression in the Far East.
However, at the moment, word of the invasion has
not yet reached Washington. Incursions along the
border have been frequently occurring for many
months; therefore, the U.S. Embassy initially as-
sumes it is just another pesky provocation. This con-
clusion is shattered at 1100, when North Korean
Premier Kim Il Sung proclaims over the radio that a
full-scale invasion had been launched.
As the juggernaut begins moving west to east, the
isolated Ongjin peninsula, bound on three sides by
water and on the north by the 38th Parallel, is struck
solidly by the N.K. I Corps. At about 0400, Ongjin,
which covers about 26 air miles of mountainous ter-
rain along the 38th Parallel, is pounded by artillery
of the 14th Regiment, 6th North Korean Division
and the Constabulary troops of the 3rd Brigade.
These fierce artillery attacks are followed about one-
half hour later by ground forces. Swiftly, the belea-
guered undermanned 17th Regiment (ROK), com-
manded by Colonel Paik. In Yup, and its five
American advisors are imperiled. One battered bat-
talion is wiped out. The remainder of the regiment
is compelled to withdraw toward the sea. There is
one ferry crossing, located on the eastern side of the
peninsula, from where the boats travel across Haeju
Bay to the mainland.
Emergency calls from Ongjin are picked up in
Seoul at 0600. By 0900, another desperate plea fil-
ters into headquarters. The message urgently requests
air evacuation. Two American pilots flying L-5
planes depart Seoul and extricate the American ad-
visors. Meanwhile, previously laid-out evacuation
plans are set in motion to salvage the battered regi-
ment. Three LSTs (landing ship tanks) answer the
call and rescue the survivors on the following day.
Farther east, across the water from the Ongjin
peninsula, lies Kaesong. It is about two miles south
of the 38th Parallel. The town is defended by two
battalions of the 12th Regiment, 1st S.K. Division,
which are deployed slightly north of the town. An-
other battalion is strung out about 20 miles to the
west at Yonan. Meanwhile, the 13th Regiment holds
positions east of Kaesong, near the Imjin River at
Korangp’o-ri. Also, the 11th Regiment (reserve) and
headquarters are deployed further south at Suisak,
slightly north of Seoul. At approximately 0500, the
13th and 15th Regiments, N.K. 6th Division, crash
June 25, 1950
A Douglas C-54 military transport plane hit during a raid on Kimpo Airfield by North Korean planes
on 28 June.
across the border in a two-pronged move. Many
troops spring from Songaksan (Hill 475), which
spreads along the 38th Parallel above Kaesong. An-
other contingent, about regimental strength, arrives
by train, using tracks that had been secretly re-laid
north of the 38th Parallel just prior to the invasion.
The sole American advisor at the 38th Parallel at
the onset of the invasion is Captain Joseph R. Dar-
rigo, who is awakened by the sounds of guns. Imme-
diately he rushes into Kaesong, where he spots the
enemy troops as they bounce from the rail cars.
There is little time to react when the one-sided fight
erupts. By 0930, Kaesong falls along with Yonan.
The defenders are decimated. Only two companies
of the S.K. 12th Regiment escape death or capture.
Darrigo makes it safely to Munsan-ni. In conjunc-
tion, at daybreak in Seoul, Colonel Rockwell, USA,
is contacted by S.K. Colonel Paik, who informs him
of the invasion. Paik then phones headquarters at
Suisak and orders the 11th Regiment and other con-
tingents to rush to Munsan-ni-Korangp’o-ri and re-
inforce the 13th Regiment at the Imjin River Bridge,
the predetermined spot to form a strong defense line.
With great rapidity, the 13th Regiment reaches its
destination and becomes engaged in fierce fighting
for several days against elements of the N.K. 1st Di-
vision and its supporting tanks.
Lacking antitank equipment, courageous yet reck-
less volunteers of the 13th Regiment affix explosives
to themselves and individually charge the enemy
28
armor. Others board the tanks and attempt to drop
grenades down the hatch. These and other types of
suicidal actions near the Imjin Bridge knock out sev-
eral tanks, but after the quick loss of about ninety
men, few others volunteer. The Imjin River bridge
at Munsan-ni is to be blown as soon as the 12th Reg-
iment is safely across, but with the enemy on the
heels of the regiment, the plan fails, and the bridge
is seized intact. Enemy control of the key bridge cre-
ates additional problems for the weary defenders;
however, despite the overwhelming enemy superi-
ority, the S.K. 1st Division holds the line at
Korangp’o-ri nearly three days before it withdraws to
the Han River to escape envelopment and slaughter
by the enemy units in the Uijongbu Corridor.
Adding to the dreary plight of the S.K. 1st Divi-
sion, American planes inadvertently attack them on
the 28th. The aircraft, under orders to destroy enemy
columns and decimate “organized troops north of
the Han River,” strike the retreating unit with rock-
ets and machine gun fire, causing heavy casualties. In
a most unusual display of morale boosting, Colonel
Paik, speaking to his men after the accidental raid,
states: “You did not think the Americans would help
us. Now you know better.”
While the multi-pronged assault unwinds, the eye
of the blistering attack moves full-throttle down the
Uijongbu Corridor. Units of the N.K. 105th Ar-
mored Brigade smash into contingents of the S.K.
7th Division, commanded by Brigadier General Yu
 29
Jai Hyung. The 1st Regiment, which is deployed
along the 38th Parallel, feels the sting. During the ini-
tial fighting, which erupts about 0530, the 1st Reg-
iment takes severe losses. Tanks of the N.K. 105th
Armored Brigade support the 3rd and 4th N.K. Di-
visions as they penetrate toward Seoul. About 40
tanks of the 107th Tank Regiment, followed by the
N.K. 4th Division, spring from positions near
Yonch’on. They advance along the western road and
drive toward Tongduch’on-ni and hammer the S.K.
3rd Regiment. One enemy unit, the 16th N.K. Reg-
iment, sustains heavy losses before the South Kore-
ans lose the town toward the end of the day. Syn-
chronized with the 4th Division, the N.K. 3rd
Division, bolstered by about 40 tanks of the 109th
Tank Regiment, smash their way down the eastern
route. They grind along the P’och’on Road (Kum-
hwa-Uijongbu-Seoul Road), which is defended by
the S.K. 9th Regiment.
As the enemy rumbles down the two separate
highways which join at Uijongbu, the overmatched
South Koreans take high casualties, prompting an
ROK officer to send an emergency call to Seoul for
reinforcements as early as 0830. He states that all
available forces had been committed. The dual dag-
ger of the enemy pushes forward. The N.K. 3rd Di-
vision reaches the steps of P’och’on, but pulls back
during the night. On the morning of the 26th, the
town is taken without opposition, which permits the
3rd Division to immediately drive toward Uijongbu.
The S.K. Army High Command in Seoul reacts
shortly after 0930 on the 25th. It sends reserve forces
north to launch a counterattack in the Uijongbu
Corridor. The first troops to begin rushing north are
contingents of the 2nd S.K. Division at Taejon, com-
manded by General Lee Hyung Koon. At 1430,
some American advisors, elements of the 5th Regi-
ment and Division Headquarters move by rail from
Taejon toward Seoul. Other KMAG advisors with
the S.K. 2nd Division are scattered at other loca-
tions, such as Anjung-ni, Ch’ongju and Yongju.
These advisors also rush to Seoul. At about darkness,
contingents of the S.K. 5th Division depart Kwangju
in southwest Korea heading north, and troops of the
S.K. 3rd Division advance from Taegu, ninety miles
below Seoul. Initially, the S.K. 3rd Division has lit-
tle knowledge of the unfolding invasion. Its Com-
mander, Colonel Yu Sung Yul, and the senior
KMAG advisor, Lt. Colonel Rollins Emmerich, are
in Chinju, attending a conference. They learn of the
attack during their return to Taegu. By the time Em-
merich arrives back at Taegu, at about 1800, ele-
ments of the S.K. 3rd Division and three KMAG ad-
visors are en route to Seoul. Like the other American
advisors, those in Taegu are unsure of what their role
has become with the opening of hostilities.
Meanwhile, back in the United States, during a
specially called session of the U.N. General Assem-
bly on the 25th, the North Koreans are directed to
halt their aggression and return across the 38th Par-
June 25, 1950
allel, but the directive is ignored. Two days later, on
the 27th, President Truman commits air and naval
forces to aid the South Koreans. Soon after, at the re-
quest of General MacArthur, U.S. ground troops are
on their way to Korea. Ironically, many in the U.S.
thought the infantry and the amphibious forces had
been rendered obsolete by the creation of the atomic
bomb. But it is the infantry which gets the call to
arms as the U.S. goes to war under the auspices of the
United Nations. This is called a “police action.”
Across the 38th Parallel, The N.K. 2nd Division
(II Corps) moves from H’wachon, just above the
border, to replace Constabulary troops, then attack
Chunchon, a primary road junction near the border
along the Pukhan River. The division anticipates an
effortless early morning victory. The N.K. 7th Di-
vision advances from Inje toward Hongch’on, several
miles farther south. To their surprise, the ROK 6th
Division stands ready for the fight. No weekend
passes had been handed out, and the unit is at full
strength. The N.K. 2nd Division’s 6th Regiment
winds down the river road, and the 4th Regiment
moves over Peacock Mountain, both expecting to
converge for victory at Chunchon. But determined
resistance greets the advance. Heavily fortified con-
crete pillboxes scattered atop the crest of a towering
hill just north of the town foil the plot. The 2nd Di-
vision’s incessant accurate fire delays the enemy
timetable and scores well against the N.K. 6th Reg-
iment. South Korean resistance is resolute, which
forces the North Koreans to change strategy. On the
25th, the N.K. 7th Division en route to Hongch’on
is ordered to pivot and reinforce the 2nd Division
on the 25th.
The farthest point of battle from the Ongjin
peninsula is the east coast, where the remaining
North Korean troops are staged in the vicinity of the
Taebaek Mountains, near Inje. Their mission is to
secure the eastern mountains. The N.K. 5th Division
and the 766th Independent Unit, bolstered by guer-
rilla contingents, are perched for the border cross-
ing. Facing the enemy is the S.K. 8th Division,
which is deployed in a near vertical line. Its 10th
Regiment guards the border. Headquarters stands at
Kangnung, about 15 miles south of the border. The
21st Regiment is garrisoned 25 miles further south
at Samch’ok, but when the invasion commences at
about 0500, most of its troops are scattered through-
out the Taebaek Mountains eradicating Communist
guerrillas. Six KMAG advisors, including Major
Gerald E. Larsen, the chief advisor, are at headquar-
ters in Kangnung with the 10th Regiment when the
invasion begins. Major George Kessler is at Scam-
ch’ok.
The 10th Regiment becomes heavily engaged with
elements of the N.K. 5th Division and the 766th In-
dependent Unit. Enemy guerrillas execute amphibi-
ous landings above and below Samch’ok, defended by
the S.K. 21st Regiment. In concert, two battalions of
the N.K. 766th Independent Unit debark near
June 25, 1950
Kangnung. Again, overpowering Communist force
makes the South Korean positions untenable. Fight-
ing remains heavy throughout the day, but previ-
ously prepared withdrawal plans are being quickly
activated. Elements of the 21st Regiment rush anti-
tank guns to the water’s edge near Samch’ok and
commence fire against some offshore vessels. The
South Koreans sink two vessels; the remainder departs
the area. Up to this point, Major Kessler and the ad-
visors at Samch’ok remain unaware that the incursion
is part of a full-scale invasion.
On the following day, the S.K. 10th Regiment
continues buying priceless time at the border, while
the remainder of the 8th Division prepares to evac-
uate Kangnung and head south for Pusan. Fighting
across the peninsula on the 26th remains ferocious,
but enemy tanks ensure continued success. South
Koreans, having only antipersonnel mines in their
arsenal, remain disadvantaged.
The diverted N.K. 7th Division reaches Chun-
chon during the evening of the 26th, adding its tanks
to the battle, but the S.K. 6th Division still inflicts
punishment upon the enemy. The bitter combat
rages continually into the 27th, but relentless enemy
pressure finally collapses both flanks of the defend-
ers. At this crucial point, orders arrive that instruct
the beleaguered S.K. 6th Division to withdraw far-
ther south. Subsequent to a South Korean pull-back
on the 28th, the 2nd and 7th N.K. Divisions, led by
nine tanks, enter a charred Chunchon. Nonetheless,
for this prize, the North Koreans have paid a high
price. Their 2nd Division sustains about 40 percent
casualties and the 6th Regiment incurs more than
50 percent casualties. The N.K. 7th Division sus-
tains moderate casualties. In addition, the North Ko-
reans lose about 16 self-propelled guns (SU 76-mm)
and other assorted weapons. The seizure of Chun-
chon opens the way for the 7th Division to resume
its trek toward Hongch’on. In conjunction, the N.K.
2nd Division marches directly toward Seoul.
On the 26th, in the S.K. 7th Division sector north
of Uijongbu, General Yu Jai Hyung launches a solid
counterattack against the N.K. 4th Division, but the
inflicted losses are not severe enough to halt the ad-
vance. Inaccurate battle reports claim the destruc-
tion of 58 enemy tanks and the capture of 1,580
North Korean troops, greatly confusing South Korean
strategy. In conjunction, General Lee fails to order
two available battalions of the S.K. 2nd Division to
attack. Consequently, the South Korean counterat-
tack is weakened.
General Lee, convinced an attack would be futile,
keeps his command in defensive positions along the
P’och’on Road, about two miles northeast of Ui-
jongbu. At 0800 (26th), North Koreans encroach
their positions. Initially they are met with artillery
and small arms fire. The accompanying tanks take the
hits, but the shells bounce off harmlessly. Subsequent
to a short pause, the armor blows through the South
Korean defenses and rolls into Uijongbu. In the
30
wake, the N.K. 7th Regiment barges into the two
battalions of the S.K. 2nd Division, and shreds its
ranks. Faced with total envelopment, the survivors
make it to the nearby hills. The collapse of the S.K.
2nd Division forces the S.K. 7th Division to abort its
attack, which had been advancing up the western
road. The 7th retires to more tenable positions below
Uijongbu. As the invaders deepen their penetration,
the South Koreans’ plight deteriorates drastically. In
retrospect, the decision by General Chae, S.K. chief
of staff, to delegate responsibility to the 2nd Division
to hold the P’och’on Road proves to be a mortal
wound. The 2nd Division had been unable to field
a full division for the task.
The night of the 26th causes more apprehension
for the South Koreans, whose forces are being
pounded at every point. In Seoul, the government
considers evacuation, but a heated debate in the
General Assembly concludes with a decision to re-
main in the capital. Nonetheless, without inform-
ing the American advisors (KMAG), S.K. Army
Headquarters departs the beleaguered city on the
morning of the 27th, heading for Yongdungp’o,
about five miles farther south. Also, at about 0900,
Ambassador Muccio and his staff move to Suwon.
Colonel Wright and KMAG move to Sihung-ni and
persuade General Chae to return to Seoul. Chae’s
headquarters arrives back in Seoul about 1800, but
by this time, the original confidence of those in the
capital has vanished, being replaced by an aura of
bewilderment.
Colonel Wright had received several messages
from General MacArthur, urging him to “repair to
your former locations. Momentous decisions are in
the offing. Be of good cheer.” Another message from
MacArthur informs Wright that MacArthur will be
placed in command of all troops in Korea. Mean-
while, the surviving South Korean units are still
being wracked by the relentless enemy advances. The
S.K. 1st Division is endangered at Korangp’o-ri, as
the 3rd and 4th N.K. Divisions, moving from Ui-
jongbu, close on it in coordination with the N.K.
1st Division, which is driving from their immediate
eastern flank. Also, the remaining operational units
of the 2nd, 5th and Capital (Palace Guard) Divi-
sions and the 7th S.K. Division are engaged in sep-
arate and uncoordinated delaying actions. Com-
bined, they are still unable to forestall the tenacious
enemy advance toward Seoul.
As the North Koreans gallop south, President Syn-
gman Rhee continues to plead for help from the
United Nations. Some of the South Korean units
fight bravely, but most have been trained only for
Constabulary duty. Many of them retreat in disor-
ganized fashion to escape the surging Soviet-made T-
34 tanks, the ring of automatic weapons and the
menacing sting of the burp guns. As the Republic
of Korea forces hurriedly retire, huge, irregular
columns of civilians, most transporting colossal loads
upon their backs, flee south from their homes near
 31
the 38th Parallel. This unanticipated activity clogs the
paths and roads, which are now under constant straf-
ing by Soviet-made aircraft. In addition, great num-
bers of ROK forces have abandoned the military and
changed into peasant clothes to blend into the panic-
stricken civilian flight. But there is no sanctuary in
Seoul. The government prepares for evacuation to
forestall total defeat.
By the 27th, it becomes inevitable that the ROK
forces cannot hold the capital. The Communists,
taking advantage of the expanding confusion, dis-
patch planes, which deposit leaflets to entice the
populace to surrender. This is in coordination with
a radio broadcast by N.K. Field Marshal Choe Yong
Gun, who also requests surrender. The pleas for ca-
pitulation are ignored; however, most of the precau-
tionary plans to meet any pending threat are never
implemented. Roadblocks are fabricated, but left
unguarded. The bridges are not blown and, with few
exceptions, the fabricated obstacles are not covered
by defensive fire. Consequently, the rampaging
North Koreans face an unobstructed path to Seoul.
One small contingent from the ROK Engineer-
ing School, led by Lt. Colonel Oum Hung Sup,
strikes four approaching enemy tanks at the
Uijongbu-Seoul Road at a mined bridge. But by
nightfall, at about 1930, the N.K. 9th Regiment,
3rd Division, reaches the outskirts of the embattled
city. This penetration is beaten back, but later, at
2300, an infantry platoon, bolstered by one tank,
cranks into the northeast section of the city. It en-
ters the Secret Gardens at Chang-Duk Palace. This
infiltration too, is met and destroyed as Korean po-
lice eliminate or chase off the troops and decimate the
tank. Nevertheless, the real onslaught is close be-
hind. By midnight, the American advisors and the
North Korean officers are discussing the Han River
bridge. General Chae states that he has not ordered
the bridge destroyed. It is determined that no order
will be given until the enemy tanks are directly on the
street of ROK Army Headquarters.
Soon after midnight (27th–28th), General Chae
is apparently placed in a jeep and driven over the
bridge out of the city, leaving dissension behind.
Major George Sedberry (KMAG) attempts to con-
vince the ROK deputy chief of staff, General Kim
Paik II, to refrain from blowing the bridge until
troops and equipment can be evacuated. In addi-
tion, the vice minister of defense, according to Gen-
eral Kim, directed the bridge be blown at 0130, fur-
ther complicating the crisis. Immediately upon being
informed of the impending demolition, General Lee
Hyung Koon, commanding officer, 2nd S.K. Divi-
sion, urges General Chang Kuk to halt the order
until he can extricate his command. Reluctantly, the
general agrees, but the roads are jammed, slowing
his motorcade. As Chang reaches a point about 150
yards from the span at 0215, he is greeted with a
thunderous roar and a gargantuan blast of fire and de-
bris. The two spans of the Han River bridge and
June 25, 1950
three companion railroad bridges are simultaneously
detonated. The consequences are grave; many mil-
itary personnel and civilians are obliterated in the
horrific explosion. Several KMAG officers had safely
crossed the span, beating the catastrophe by about
five minutes.
Still on the north side of the span, only a few feet
from the blown portion, several American war cor-
respondents — Keys Beech, Burton Crane and Frank
Gibney — stare through their shattered windshield
at a truck directly in front of them that had been lost
with all its troops on board. Subsequently, a board of
inquiry meets to place the blame for the incident. It
results in a military court martial for the ROK sen-
ior engineer, who is summarily executed. The verdict
remains under debate today. Some believe the order
had been given by General Chae and others set
blame on the vice minister of defense, neither of
whom had been charged. Stronger arguments support
the case against the latter.
In the capital, the early morning hours of the 28th
are gloomy. Remaining KMAG officers successfully
seek exit routes and cross the Han River at 0600,
but the majority of the South Korean Army contin-
gents and their equipment remain trapped. Some
scattered units attempt to hold the enemy back,
while the others cross the river, without most of their
heavy equipment and transports. The N.K. 3rd Di-
vision attempts to enter the city, but it hits fierce re-
sistance offered by a small, heroic contingent of
South Koreans who hold until about noon. Eventu-
ally, elements of the N.K. 16th Regiment, 4th Divi-
sion, break into the capital. Another band of ROK
troops holds a Spartan line on South Mountain,
within the city. These gallant men resist throughout
the day until the last man is wiped out. However,
Communist control of the city occurs by midday,
and the conquering troops are received by a tumul-
tuous welcome by fifth columnists and exuberant
college-age students.
Meanwhile, surviving ROK troops attempt to re-
form on the south side of the Han River. At the time
of invasion, the South Korean defenders numbered
about 98,000 troops. Now, four days later, the South
Koreans assess the situation and assume they have
depleted their force by about 75 percent. Command-
ing officers can account for only about 22,000 troops
(south of the Han River) by the end of the month.
Later, more stragglers limp into headquarters and
favorable reports filter in concerning the 6th and 8th
S.K. Divisions. The news pumps the numbers back
to about 54,000. Incredibly, 44,000 troops are killed,
wounded or missing in the first week of combat.
Many of these losses are directly attributed to the
premature destruction of the Han River Bridge. Be-
fore, during and subsequent to the entry of Seoul, the
North Koreans exhibit a barbaric nature that greatly
overshadows the atrocities of the Japanese during
World War II.
U.S. Congressional clamoring to demobilize the
June 25, 1950
military has been progressing since the close of World
War II. This movement has jeopardized America’s
ability to defend itself or those nations it has prom-
ised to defend. But when President Truman is in-
formed of the disaster, about seven hours after the ig-
nition of the conflict, he moves quickly. President
Truman returns to the Blair House, his temporary
house in D.C., from his home in Independence,
Missouri. He urges the United Nations to take im-
mediate action. Now, as South Korea’s defenses are
collapsing under the Iron Canopy of the North Ko-
reans, Washington must reverse its position and re-
mobilize.
At present, the U.S. Armed Forces are in wretched
fighting condition unbecoming a superpower. Of
the ten active U.S. Army Divisions, only the 1st Di-
vision stands at full strength, and it is in Europe star-
ing down the Soviets. There are four weakened
Eighth Army Divisions in Japan; however, none are
battle-tried and most of the men are inexperienced.
The Marine Corps has been deflated from nearly
500,000 at the conclusion of World War II to a dan-
gerous level of fewer than 75,000 men. In conjunc-
tion, the Air Force and Navy, both under-strength,
will be called upon to fill the gap while the ground
forces begin to mobilize. It is the Air Force which
forestalls total defeat. Ironically, the U.S. Navy will
need the services of a tremendous number of Japa-
nese seamen to meet the threat.
A predetermined evacuation plan (Operation
CRULLER) begins to extricate endangered Americans
and some personnel from other nations. The evacuees
board the Reinholt and embark for Japan on the 27th.
Others are airlifted from Kimpo Airfield on the 26th
by Fifth Air Force planes, which dispatch C-46s, C-
47s and C-54s to handle the emergency. Meanwhile,
after the fall of Seoul, General MacArthur is flown
to the front on the 29th. MacArthur gets a first-hand
observation of the nightmare. As MacArthur focuses
on the chaos, he devises a plan to reverse the im-
pending rout, an amphibious landing at Inchon.
MacArthur, not surprisingly, remains resolute as he
peers through the grueling action near the destroyed
Han River bridge, and witnesses the muddled masses
of retreating South Korean troops.
The first U.S. ground troops to arrive in Korea
will be composed of elements of the 24th Division,
commanded by Major General William Dean, the
previous military governor of South Korea. Ironi-
cally, General Dean had been readying his return to
the United States and bidding goodbye to friends as
he departed church services in Japan on the 25th. It
was then that he received the news that he was not
yet going home. The post duty officer informed him
of the invasion. General Dean realizes that his weak-
ened division is deployed all across Japan and begins
to reel them in for deployment in Korea, less than
150 miles away.
On June 30, General Dean informs Colonel
Charles (Brad) Smith that he will command the first
32
troops in Korea and that Dean will follow soon after.
Colonel Smith is to lead Task Force Smith into Pusan
and drive north to delay the North Koreans until the
balance of the 24th Division and other reinforce-
ments can be rushed to support them. Task Force
Smith will fly to Pusan, then by convoy advance to
Taejon and attempt to hold. Colonel Smith is be-
coming adapted to being suddenly awakened with
orders. On December 7, 1941, the colonel was awak-
ened and directed to command an infantry contin-
gent at Oahu, Hawaii. Task Force Smith, composed
of about 400 infantry troops and an artillery unit,
reaches positions near Osan on July 5. Smith’s task
force becomes the first contingent of U.S. troops to
clash with the Communists in North Korea. The en-
gagement is a costly one for the young Americans
who expect to quickly extinguish the fighting. They
barely escape total slaughter. Their carbines and ob-
solete antitank weapons are way overmatched. Some
troops break under the pressure, but more stand and
fight, making the ultimate sacrifice to buy time for
MacArthur’s warriors. Many of the young men of
Task Force Smith are captured and butchered by the
North Koreans.
General MacArthur is chosen to command the
United Nations forces on July 8. He will confer with
other military leaders and be informed that the 1st
Marine Division is available. The Marines (seasoned
veterans) begin to arrive from Camp Pendleton at
Pusan during early August. The swaggering entrance
of 5,000 Marines perks up the besieged defenders
to the point of angering some of the beleaguered
Army troops. Nonetheless, their self-confidence be-
comes contagious. and inspires the others to break the
siege.
Meanwhile, General Walton Walker’s command
must hold the line at the Pusan Perimeter or be
driven into the sea. His forces meet the challenge,
and the Communists realize that their quest for easy
victory has been snatched from them by the strength-
ened forces.
For the duration of the conflict, Communist air-
craft of both the Chinese and Russians receive sanc-
tuary in China, which prevents American and other
Allied pilots from destroying them. Initially, back in
America, the citizens have no knowledge that about
seventy-five percent of the Communists’ air missions
are clandestinely flown by Russian pilots. The gov-
ernment knows this; however, due to fear that the
American people would demand retaliation against
the Soviet Union, which could provoke another war
in Europe, it is not discussed publicly. Nevertheless,
the American pilots in Korea are aware of their prin-
cipal foe.
While the opposing ground forces continue to
battle for the won-again lost-again barren blood-
soaked hills, the casualties continue to climb. Fifty-
three nations join the struggle against the Commu-
nist aggression, but it is the American fighting men
who assume the brunt of the task. Only fifteen ad-
 33
ditional nations commit combat troops. Turkey and
Great Britain are the only nations to field more than
the strength of a battalion. South Korean forces com-
pose sixteen infantry divisions. In contrast, the Chi-
nese Communists funnel thousands of troops into
the ranks of the North Koreans, and toward the end
of 1950, several hundred thousand Chinese troops
openly join the fight. The protracted struggle con-
tains all the elements of man’s inhumanity to man
and enunciates the equally powerful hope of men to
remain free, regardless of the sacrifices.
June 25 North Korean armed forces invade South
Korea. Since the beginning of June, the North Koreans
have offered two suggestions for the unification of
Korea, but neither is acceptable to the South Korean
Government. In addition, the U.S. has been in the
process of diminishing its aid to the new republic, and
repeatedly, the U.S. has publicly stated that Korea is
not within its protective zone. Actually, the U.S. has
laid out clear instructions on what the policy is for
KMAG advisors, with one exception. The U.S. has not
issued instructions on what they should do once hos-
tilities begin. KMAG now faces a dilemma and the am-
bassador has no specific instructions. Ambassador Muc-
cio suggests that the entire mission, including the
advisors, could converge on the embassy in Seoul if the
Communists take the city and diplomatic immunity
could be claimed, but KMAG declines the suggestion.
South Korean President Rhee and his government are
preparing to evacuate Seoul by mid-day, although the
U.S. ambassador suggests that they stay to forestall
panic. Rhee then explains during the late-night meet-
ing at the Ducksoo Palace that if the Communists seize
the city and the government officials, the cause will be
lost and all resistance will collapse. Seoul is overrun by
Communists on the 28th. After a series of communi-
cations between Syngman Rhee and U.S. officials,
Washington authorizes General MacArthur to rush
military supplies to South Korea. The shipments mov-
ing to Korea by sea sail by several routes: from Yoko-
hama the distance is 900 miles, but this route can be
shortened by about 235 miles if passage is through the
Bungo-Suido Strait; from Sasebo, 130 miles; from
Moji, 123 miles; from Kobe, 361 miles; and the dis-
tance by sea from Fukuoka to Pusan is about 110 miles.
The port of Pusan is the jewel of Korea, and it is ca-
pable of handling the heavy tonnage expected to begin
arriving to support the U.N. cause. More than 24 deep-
water vessels can simultaneously be docked with about
14 LSTs side-by-side unloading their cargoes on the
beach. Unloading becomes the easiest of the tasks; most
transportation in Korea along the 22,000 miles of prim-
itive roads has been by oxcart. In contrast, the railroad
system had been well built by the Japanese, and these
rails carry the heaviest burden for the United Nations
forces.
Once it is determined that the invasion is full-scale,
the KMAG advisors suggest that the South Koreans
immediately initiate the previously fabricated defense
June 25, 1950
plan, which calls for the evacuation of the Ongjin
Peninsula and the redeployment of all units west of the
Imjin River to the south bank of the river. In addition
the plan directs that all reserve divisions posted in the
south prepare to attack north upon orders. Major Gen-
eral Chae Byong Duk, South Korean chief of staff, con-
curs with the advice of KMAG, and he directs that all
Divisions be informed.
In related activity, Ambassador Muccio dispatches
Commander John Seifert, Naval attaché to Inchon, to
find a suitable vessel to transport the American civilians
to Japan; he chooses the best of the lot, a Norwegian
ship, the Reinholt. After unloading its cargo of fertilizer,
the ship is prepared to receive the evacuees. Early on
the 26th, Muccio activates Operation CRULLER to ex-
ecute the rescue of U.S. civilians. A South Korean pa-
trol boat (PC 701) encounters and engages a North
Korean vessel, which is armed and transporting about
600 Communist troops off Pusan. The North Korean
steamer is destroyed in what becomes the first naval
surface action of the conflict.
In Air Force activity, apparently, the North Koreans
feel confident that there will be no intervention by the
U.S. to save South Korea. Communist aircraft strike
several times without opposition, and damage facili-
ties at the Kimpo Airfield. A U.S. C-54 transport plane
on the ground is also damaged. A contingent of U.S.
fighter planes (8th Fighter Group) operating off the
coast of South Korea is fired upon at about 1700, by a
North Korean naval contingent. Also, the North Korean
Air Force, according to U.S. estimates prior to the in-
vasion, stands at 21 IL bombers and 33 Yak fighters.
The enemy aircraft are domiciled at four bases: Py-
ongyang, Sinanju, Sinuiju and Wonsan.
—In the United States: Warren Austin, U.S. ambas-
sador to the United Nations, announces the North Ko-
rean Communist invasion of the Republic of South
Korea: “At 4 o’clock in the morning Sunday, June 25th,
Korean time (1926, June 24th, Washington time),
armed forces from North Korea commenced an unpro-
voked assault against the territory of the Republic of
Korea.... This wholly illegal and unprovoked attack by
the Korean north forces ... constitutes a breach of the
peace and an act of aggression.... It would appear from
the nature of the attack and the manner in which it was
launched that it constitutes an all-out offensive against
the Republic of Korea.” In response, a U.N. resolution
emerges from a special session: “Noting with grave con-
cern the armed attack upon the Republic of Korea by
forces from North Korea, the Security Council deter-
mines that this action constitutes a breach of the peace.”
The U.S. Ambassador to South Korea, John J. Muc-
cio, had informed the U.S. of the invasion. At the time,
it was still June 24, U.S. time.
The U.N. response calls for an immediate with-
drawal by the North Koreans to the 38th Parallel in
synchronization with an immediate halt to the hostile
actions. The resolution also calls on all members “to
render every assistance to the United Nations in the
execution of this resolution and to refrain from giving
June 26, 1950
assistance to the North Korean authorities.” The pri-
mary antagonist, the Soviet Union, is absent from the
meeting, having boycotted the sessions since January 10,
1950, in protest of Red China being denied a seat as the
bona fide representative of China. This Soviet miscal-
culation eliminates the Communist veto and permits the
U.N. to take action. The resolution receives an absten-
tion from the representative from Yugoslavia, another
Communist-dominated nation, but nine yes votes are
cast. The nations voting yes are China, Cuba, Ecuador,
Egypt, France, Great Britain, India, Norway and the
United States.
There are no U.S. combat troops in Korea. Also, the
total inundation of Soviet propaganda had prevented the
U.S. government from properly equipping the South
Korean Armed Forces to defend themselves. In addition
to the U.S. Army and U.S. Naval strength at danger-
ously low levels, there are no Marine Corps forces of any
consequences in the Far East. In fact, due to the Tru-
man Administration’s postwar policy, there are few ac-
tive duty Marines in the United States. Later, when
Truman’s attempts to disband the Marine Corps sub-
side as the call goes out for Marines to be sent to Korea,
the Marines’ actions in Korea put the idea of disband-
ing the corps to rest.
— In Japan: Official word of the North Korean in-
vasion of South Korea is dispatched from Korea at 0925
by the U.S. Embassy, but neither General MacArthur
nor his general headquarters receive orders concerning
the crisis at the 38th Parallel. Instructions, however,
do arrive to evacuate the Americans from Korea. By
about midnight, Brigadier General Edwin K. Wright
has instructed all units necessary to initiate the evacu-
ation to stand ready. The operation gets underway at
0100 on the 26th. A plan of action for such an occur-
rence had been distributed on July 1, 1949. Also, Col-
onel William H.S. Wright receives permission from
Ambassador Muccio to evacuate KMAG personnel
from Korea, except for 33 men who are to remain with
ROK headquarters. Soon after, President Truman in-
forms MacArthur that he will be in command of the op-
eration in Korea. Amphibious Group 1, commanded by
Admiral Doyle, is en route from Tokyo to Chigasaki
Beach to execute a practice amphibious landing. Navy
and Marine specialists will oversee a landing by the
35th Regiment on the following day.
In other activity, subsequent to emergency talks be-
tween Ambassador Muccio and Syngman Rhee, the
former requests that MacArthur supply additional am-
munition to ensure that the South Koreans are able to
meet the crisis.
— In the U.S. Far East Command: Major General
Earle E. Partridge, commander, Fifth Air Force, directs
his wing commanders to make preparations to evacu-
ate U.S. citizens from South Korea. Also, the Twenti-
eth Air Force orders two squadrons of 51 Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wings to go on air defense alert in Japan.
June 26 The U.S. Air Force begins to airlift Amer-
ican civilians from Korea. It initiates flights between
34
Kimpo Airfield outside of Seoul and Itazuke Airfield
in Kyushu, Japan. The Air Force utilizes SB-17 planes
to provide cover during the rescue operation. American
dependents are also transported from Seoul to Inchon
for evacuation to Japan. Slightly after midnight (25th–
26th), Ambassador Muccio activates the evacuation
plans. Armed Forces Radio station WVTP, which has
been broadcasting constant updates, instructs all
women and children to speed to Camp Sobinggo to
receive transportation to Inchon, where they will board
the vessel Reinholt. By about 1800, on the 26th, more
than 700 passengers are aboard the ship, which usually
carries no more than twelve passengers. The Reinholt is
escorted to Japan by the USS Mansfield (DD 728) and
USS Dehaven (DD 727). Other Americans at Taegu
and Taejon join those in Pusan and depart aboard the
vessel Pioneer Dale. Air Force planes based in Japan fly
continual escort and surveillance flights throughout the
day to ensure safety. Additional flights transport ammu-
nition and supplies from Japan to the embattled South
Koreans.
In related activity, Colonel Wright returns to KMAG
headquarters from Japan. He is briefed on the deteri-
orating circumstances and as the situation becomes
more grave, he prepares orders that direct KMAG per-
sonnel to move farther south to positions between Seoul
and Pusan, from where they can be quickly evacuated
if the situation warrants. Clear instructions dictating
further action by KMAG are not forthcoming from
Washington, but the U.S. is definitely reversing its po-
sition concerning its intent to defend Korea. Word ar-
rives from the secretary of state through the Far East
Command that all KMAG advisors are to stay with
their respective Korean units as long as it remains fea-
sible and the units are operating in a combat mode. By
the latter part of the 26th, Ambassador Muccio requests
military planes from Japan to evacuate non-essential
personnel from the mission. Soon after, following
strong suggestions from his staff, Colonel Wright directs
all nonessential KMAG personnel to depart by truck
for Suwon, from where they will be airlifted to Japan.
Colonel Wright retains thirty-three officers and en-
listed men to remain with him to assist the South Ko-
reans. Wright further orders that if the KMAG face im-
minent capture, they are to break for the embassy and
seek diplomatic immunity with Muccio’s party.
— In the U.S. Far East Command: With the unex-
pected outbreak of hostilities ongoing in Korea, the lo-
gistical problems are monumental. The Pacific Coast
will serve as origin point for the Military Air Transport
Service en route to Tokyo. Three separate routes will be
utilized. The first is Great Circle, with flights originat-
ing at McChord Air Force Base, Tacoma, Washington,
with Tokyo its destination, via Anchorage, Alaska, and
Shemya, Aleutian Islands, covering a distance of about
5,688 miles and 30 to 33 flying hours. A second route
originates at Travis Air Force Base, near San Francisco,
by way of Honolulu and Wake Island, a distance of
about 6,718 miles to Tokyo and 34 flying hours. The
third route is by way of Southern California via Hon-
 35
olulu, Johnston, Kwajalein and Guam, requiring 40
hours of flying time to cover the distance of 8,000
miles. Throughout the month of July, an accelerating
number of flights transport more than 100 tons of sup-
plies per day. Subsequent to the delivery of supplies to
Japan, they are forwarded to Korea, basically from
Ashiya Airbase, supplemented by the airfields at Brady
and Itazuke. At present, due to U.S. government sen-
timent that there had been no danger of trouble in
Korea, there are no C-Rations there and almost none
in Japan. Those rations initially arriving in Korea, in-
cluding the C-Rations and B-Rations, are the ultimate
in leftovers, having been around since the close of
World War II. Age doesn’t affect the taste, and the
ground troops who consume them seemingly never for-
get them. Also, in Washington, a scheduled policy
meeting is canceled, which prompts the commandant
of the Marine Corps, Clifford B. Cates, to make an ex-
temporaneous entry on his wall calendar: “SecNav’s
policy meeting called off. Nuts.” General Cates is anx-
ious to commit his Marines to the war.
In other activity, President Truman and his advisors
meet in the Blair House to assess the situation in Korea,
but intelligence is still minimal. Talk of committing
U.S. ground troops is considered, but the ramifications
are great and it will take more time; therefore, word is
sent to MacArthur that the use of ground troops is not
authorized. In conjunction, the U.S. does not have
many ground troops prepared for mobilization in the
Far East. Nevertheless, the consensus seems to be that
Infantry will be required soon.
In Naval activity, the 7th Fleet departs the Philip-
pines heading north to Korea.
— In Japan: President Truman authorizes General
MacArthur to dispatch a military survey group to Korea
to assess the situation. On the following day, Brigadier
General John H. Church and twelve other staff officers
Troops loading supplies and ammunition aboard planes in Japan for use by the ROK forces in Korea.
June 27, 1950
and enlisted men depart for Korea. Amphibious Group
1 conducts the 35th Regiment’s practice landing as
scheduled at Chigasaki Bay. Another landing is sched-
uled for the following day. It gets underway, but the
hostilities in Korea cause its premature cancellation.
Orders come in recalling the air support, and shortly
thereafter, the destroyers are directed to withdraw. Also,
Far East Air Forces receive C-47s from various points in
the Far East in exchange for C-54s. The C-47s provide
the Air Force with the ability to land on smaller
airstrips.
June 27–September 15, 1950
FIRST DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
THE U.N. DEFENSIVE
June 27 In response to orders from President Tru-
man (see In the United States, this entry), General
MacArthur, from his headquarters in Tokyo, speeds a
contingent of technical specialists to Korea where he
establishes General Headquarters Advanced Command
and Liaison Group (ADCOM), commanded by Gen-
eral John H. Church. General Church departs Haneda
Airfield and arrives at Itazuke at 0600. Church expects
to depart for Seoul, but new instructions arrive that di-
rect him to reroute to Suwon, because of the deterio-
rating situation in the capital. Church’s entourage ar-
rives at Suwon by air at about 1900. Headquarters is
established in Suwon at the Experimental Agriculture
Building. MacArthur arrives on the 29th to survey the
battle area.
In other activity, the government officials of the Re-
public evacuate Seoul as the North Koreans sweep
south, and reach Taejon, but soon after, the South Ko-
reans are forced to jump back farther to Taegu and from
there, to the last stop, Pusan. U.S. Embassy officials
June 27, 1950
also begin to exit in haste, slightly after 0900. Muccio,
just prior to his evacuation, reports to MacArthur that
the Armed Forces Radio Station is being destroyed to
prevent use by the enemy. South Korean Army officials
also depart without informing KMAG. When in-
formed, Colonel Sterling Wright and his staff rush to
Sihung to intercept the ROKs and convince them to
President Harry S Truman, after making the deci-
sion to support the Republic of South Korea.
36
return to the capital. During the trip, Wright receives
a radio message from MacArthur which informs him
that the Joint Chiefs of Staff has ordered MacArthur
to assume control of all U.S. troops in Korea, includ-
ing KMAG. While conferring with the South Koreans
in Sihung, another radio message from MacArthur is re-
ceived by Wright. It instructs him “to be of good
cheer.” MacArthur also tells Colonel Wright that big de-
cisions by the U.S. are about to unfold. This news per-
suades the South Korean headquarters personnel, in-
cluding the chief of staff, to return, but the stay is
short-lived. The South Koreans again evacuate on the
following morning, without notifying the Americans.
Finally, the exhausting efforts of Wright conclude. He
attempts to halt the evacuation of the remaining
KMAG personnel at Suwon, previously scheduled to
depart for Japan, and succeeds in stopping about thirty
men. They are ordered to return to Seoul.
Meanwhile, the swarming hordes of North Koreans
allow little time to dispose of critical records in the U.S.
Embassy, which causes severe complications. Some se-
cret documents are burned on the roof; however, un-
classified personnel records will be seized and subse-
quent purges held. In addition, when the North
Koreans enter the city on the following day, they bring
cases of documents containing the names of scores of
South Koreans considered anticommunist. People, tied
together, are led into the streets, and after a quick kan-
garoo trial, by what is known as People’s Court, many
innocent victims are executed. When an accusation is
made and the sentence given, the onlookers are asked
if anyone wants to speak on their behalf. None do,
aware that they would then be shot, too.
According to CIA reports, more than half of the stu-
dents in Seoul support the North Koreans and great
numbers of them have voluntarily joined the Commu-
nist Army. Also, many who remain in Seoul greet the
invaders with enthusiasm. But many more reject the
aggressors and wait in hopes of MacArthur and the U.S.
arriving to save them. The U.S. fleet moves to block-
ade North Korea, but President Truman also intends
to ensure that the Nationalist Chinese under Chiang
Kai-shek on Formosa are unable to initiate raids against
the Chinese mainland and possibly provoke China to
enter the conflict.
In Air Force activity, Americans and some other for-
eign nationals continue to be evacuated from Kimpo
and Suwon Airfields, but the pace is accelerated as the
danger increases. During the activity at the airfields,
three North Korean planes attack four American escort
fighter planes. The three enemy planes are blown from
the sky. Four additional enemy aircraft are destroyed
in dog fights later in the day. The first shot by the Air
Force in the war is fired by Major James W. Little, com-
mander, 339th FAWS. In addition, Lt. William G.
Hudson, 68th FAWS, with Lieutenant Carl Fraser as his
radar observer, emerge as the victors in the first aerial
victory of the war. The seven enemy planes shot down
had been achieved by six pilots. Another of the pilots
to score a victory is Lieutenant Robert H. Dewald, 35th
 37 June 27, 1950

Top: U.S. destroyers in mothballs at San Diego following the termination of World War II. The Korean
War brings some of the ships back to activate service. Bottom: KMAG advisors during the withdrawal
from Seoul on 27 June. The American advisors are en route to Kimpo airfield about eighteen miles dis-
tant.
June 27, 1950 38

Top: A patient in a litter arrives in Japan from Korea aboard the SS Reinholt during the withdrawal of
Americans from Korea. Bottom: Two soldiers chat with one of the younger Americans being evacuated
from Korea.

Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber
Group.
Also, B-26s, operating from Japan, execute a night
attack against enemy targets; however, the raids are not
successful, due to inclement weather.
In other activity, the 8th Fighter-Bomber Wing
(FBW) establishes a composite unit of U.S. Air Force
and South Korean airmen at Taegu Airfield. The pi-
lots will fly F-51D Mustangs. The air evacuation safely
transports 718 Americans to Japan, and another 809
Americans are transported by sea ( June 26–29). In all,
2,001 people are evacuated. Word arrives in Taegu from
Ambassador Muccio that the KMAG advisors are to
separate from the S.K. 3rd Division and move south
 39
to Pusan; the families of the advisors had been evacu-
ated earlier.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral Hoskins orders the
Seventh Fleet to leave Hong Kong and Subic Bay for
Sasebo, but en route, orders arrive from Admiral Joy
that divert the fleet to Okinawa, which will place it in
close proximity to Korea and Formosa, yet a safer dis-
tance from the Chinese and Soviet Air Forces. Mean-
while, the USS Juneau and the Destroyer USS DeHaven
are directed to sweep the coastal waters south of the
38th Parallel and intercept any hostile landings. The
USS Sergeant Keathley departs Yokohama with a capac-
ity load of ammunition and supplies, including twelve
105-mm howitzers; the ship is escorted by the USS
Juneau and DeHaven to Pusan.
— In the United States: President Truman sends
word to the United Nations, reference their resolution
of the 25th, that the Northern aggressors have not
heeded the order to halt hostilities, but rather have cho-
sen to press the attack. The president notes the Security
Council’s plea for all members to aid the U.N.’s effort
to mandate compliance, then clearly emphasizes Amer-
ica’s intent: “I have ordered United States air and sea
forces to give the Korean government troops cover and
air support. The attack upon Korea makes it plain be-
yond all doubt that Communism has passed beyond the
use of subversion to conquer independent nations and
will now use armed invasion and war.” Also, President
Truman directs the U.S. Seventh Fleet to ensure the
safety of Formosa by deploying in such fashion to for-
bid a Communist invasion. In addition, U.N. Ambas-
sador Warren Austin presents a letter to the Security
Council that underscores the North Korean intent to
“completely disregard and flout the decision of the se-
curity council....” The United Nations Security Coun-
cil goes into another special session, which results in a
second resolution: “The Security Council recommends
that the members of the United Nations furnish such as-
sistance to the Republic of Korea (South) as may be nec-
essary, to repel the armed attack and to restore interna-
tional peace and security in the area.” (On the 26th,
Washington time, a teleconference between Washington
and Tokyo had transpired, and resulted in the issuance
of orders to evacuate civilians and dependents from
Korea. In a separate message, the Pacific Fleet is directed
to prepare additional ships to move to the Western Pa-
cific.) The Soviets again are absent from the U.N. ses-
sion, continuing their protest pattern since the beginning
of January. In their absence, they are unable to veto the
resolution. Although the United Nations falls short of
declaring war, the intent is clear and the action is called
“Police Action.” The nation of Yugoslavia votes no.
Egypt and India abstain, but the latter joins the action
two days later. The precedent-setting resolution passes
with the votes of China, Cuba, Ecuador, France, Great
Britain, Norway and the United States.
June 28 At about 0100, KMAG personnel attempt
to inform Colonel William H.S. Wright that the South
Korean Army Headquarters is again evacuating Seoul,
June 28, 1950
but he is inaccessible, as the past few days have left him
sleepless and his aide refuses to wake him. A second
trip to headquarters by Lt. Colonel Lewis Vieman
proves fruitful, but as the two men are about to confer,
conversation becomes almost unnecessary as the Han
River bridge blows, and their focus centers on the im-
mensity of the situation. The bridge was not to be de-
stroyed until the enemy secured the capital and all
South Korean troops had been evacuated to the south
bank of the Han. This disaster cripples the evacuation
process, needlessly kills hundreds of people on the
bridge and traps S.K. units in the city. Panic and con-
fusion run rampant. Colonel William Wright attempts
to move the Americans out of Seoul by convoy; how-
ever, the alternate bridges are also blown.
Eventually, Lt. Colonel Lee Chi Yep offers to assist
the Americans. He commandeers a ferry by shooting
one boatman through his clothing. The startled river-
man quickly moves his huge raft to shore. Most Amer-
icans cross safely at about 0800, but the original fifty
vehicles are left behind. From the south bank of the
Han, the main contingent walks fifteen exhausting
miles along a primitive trail to Anyang-ni, where they
are greeted by an advance party. Colonel Lee Chi Yep,
the enterprising South Korean who procured the raft,
accompanies the Americans during the long walk. En
route, Colonel Chi Yep commandeers a jeep and speeds
ahead and procures vehicles to transport the party to
Suwon. In the meantime, Colonel Wright, two officers
and three enlisted men remain on the north bank in
Seoul to locate a safe crossing for the command jeep,
which contains the radio, their only means of commu-
nicating with Japan. Before dawn, the small party is
able to board another raft, which also accommodates the
jeep. Wright’s party makes it to Suwon to join the main
group there. Also, the capital falls; North Korean tanks,
followed by Infantry, enter Seoul. North Korean Col-
onel Han Se Gon later relates that one of his gunners
had run up the flag of the People’s Republic of Korea,
and they watched it flutter bravely.
In Air Force activity, fighting in the region remains ex-
tremely heavy on the ground. At Suwon, Communist
planes bomb the airfield. One plane, a C-54, is de-
stroyed on the ground. Also, General Church, subse-
quent to his initial observations while at Suwon, in-
forms General MacArthur that only by an infusion of
U.S. ground troops can the original boundary in Korea
be restored. First reports that filter into headquarters
during the invasion cause grave concern about the
plight of some Americans (KMAG), but by the end of
the month, all are accounted for and only three casu-
alties have struck their ranks, all minor wounds. In
other activity, C-54s and C-47s evacuate the last of
851 U.S. citizens who are flown out of Korea.
Also, U.S. planes bomb enemy positions in Seoul.
In Pusan, the situation remains confusing, too. The
KMAG Advisors to the S.K. 3rd Division arrive from
Taegu after a tedious journey begun on the previous
day. The small column nudges southward through end-
less rows of frantic South Korean civilians and then en-
June 28, 1950 40

Situation in Korea, June 28, 1950.

 41
counters a nasty rainstorm which stalls the group. The
Americans abandon their mud-trapped vehicles out-
side Pusan and walk the remainder of the route. Once
in Pusan, Colonel Emmerich’s party spots South Ko-
reans who are raiding the American compound to steal
food, equipment, furniture and about anything else
they can get. The newly arrived Americans begin firing
over the heads of the Koreans and the pirating ceases.
Colonel Emmerich is informed by Captain Gerald Put-
nam, advisor to the S.K. 23rd Regiment, that the
American dependents had departed Pusan on the pre-
vious day aboard the Pioneer Dale. He is also told that
another vessel, the Letitia Lykes, remains in port with
members of the American Mission and some KMAG
advisors. The KMAG advisors are sent for and ordered
to return to Emmerich’s Headquarters. Later, Em-
merich makes radio contact with the Far East Com-
mand in Japan and speaks with Brigadier General
George Back to get instructions. Unfortunately, Head-
quarters in Japan, like Emmerich, has little knowledge
of the crisis; General Back inquires if Emmerich has
any first hand information about the situation in Seoul.
Emmerich is instructed to wait for orders. Meanwhile,
Headquarters in Japan will maintain constant contact
with Pusan to try and keep abreast of the crisis. Colo-
nel Emmerich, totally unaware of KMAG’s predica-
ment in Seoul, establishes a Provisional Military Advi-
sory Group, Headquarters, Pusan, Korea, and as the
senior officer, he creates a small staff and designates
himself commanding officer.
In Naval activity, the USS Juneau (CLAA 119), off
the east coast of Korea, bombards enemy targets in the
vicinity of Samchock, in what becomes the initial major
naval surface fire support operation of the conflict.
— In the United States: The commandant of the
Marine Corps, General Cates, meets with Admiral For-
est P. Sherman, chief of Naval Operations, and recom-
mends that the Fleet Marine Force be committed to
Korea. Soon after, on the 30th, General Cates attends
the secretary of the navy’s conference. The discussions
include the possibility and probability of committing
Marines to Korea.
—In Japan: In Air Force activity, at 0600, a C-54
takes off from Tachikawa Airfield near Tokyo, trans-
porting 105-mm ammunition to Suwon to supplement
the ammunition transported the previous day from
Japan by ship. By mid-afternoon, additional aircraft
depart with nearly 120 additional tons of ammunition.
The planes that run supplies and B-26 light bombers
are provided protection by F-80s based at Itazuke. An
Air Force reconnaissance plane (RF-80-A), piloted by
Lieutenant Lt. Bryce Poe II, initiates a mission to ac-
quire photographs of the vanguard of the North Korean
invasion forces. Poe flies the initial reconnaissance mis-
sion by a jet. Also, the 3rd Bombardment Group dis-
patches more than 20 B-26s, which launch the Air
Force’s first air strikes of the conflict. The planes attack
the rails at Munsan and other rail traffic in the sector
between Seoul and the border with North Korea. One
of the planes is hit and damaged by anti-aircraft fire. It
June 29, 1950
crashes while returning to Japan and all aboard are
killed.
In other activity, other planes, B-29s attached to the
19th Bombardment Group, depart their base on Oki-
nawa and attack targets that include rail bridges and
vehicles in the initial medium bomber attacks of the
conflict. Bad weather over Japan limits Fifth Air Force
sorties, but eighteen fighters execute close air support
and interdiction missions.
In Naval activity, the vessel Cardinal O’Connell, her
hulls crammed with ammunition from the Ikego Am-
munition Depot, departs Japan for Korea, escorted by
the destroyers Collett and Mansfield, to further aug-
ment the South Korean cause. Also, British Admiral
Sir Patrick Brind informs Admiral Joy that the Royal
Navy will commit Task Group 96.8 (British Rear Ad-
miral W.G. Andrewes), which includes the carrier HMS
Triumph, cruiser HMS Belfast and the destroyers HMS
Consort and Cossock. The British warships enjoin the
Seventh Fleet at Buckner Bay, Okinawa. The other
British vessels, which include the frigates HMS Alacrity,
HMS Black Swan and HMS Hart, as well as the cruiser
HMS Jamaica, swell the ranks of the blockade force. In
addition, Australia and New Zealand commit warships,
which also join the naval blockade of North Korea. On
the following day, the Allied Naval Force is transferred
to the operational control of General MacArthur.
In other naval activity, the U.S. Navy forms an an-
tisubmarine warfare (ASW) patrol off Sasebo. It oper-
ates only until 1 July 1950.
June 29 General MacArthur and fourteen addi-
tional staff members depart Japan at 0610 for Suwon
aboard the Bataan, an unarmed aircraft. The Bataan,
after a hazardous flight that includes a close encounter
with a Russian Yak fighter, lands safely on a dwarfed
airstrip amidst a wrecked C-54. American fighters close
in and quickly drive the Communist plane away. At
about 0800, while in flight, MacArthur has a message
dispatched to Lt. General George Stratemeyer’s second
in command. The message to General Partridge, dic-
tated by Stratemeyer: “Stratemeyer to Partridge: Take
out North Korean airfield immediately. No publicity.
Macarthur approves.” Communist planes are bomb-
ing the retreating South Koreans and have also plas-
tered the airfield at Suwon, just prior to MacArthur’s
arrival. Once aground, the Bataan is flown back to
Tokyo out of harm’s way, but Lt. Colonel Anthony
Story, MacArthur’s pilot, returns to Suwon at 1715 to
pick up the general. While in Korea, MacArthur moves
right to the front to assess the ongoing tragedy. His jeep
drives past the mystified and bewildered civilians as
they flee for safety, and he passes the South Koreans
that are in retreat. At the Han River, MacArthur clearly
perceives the disaster at hand when he observes a routed
South Korean Army in disorganized retreat. Some other
officers see things differently, observing that many units
had retired with discipline. One demoralized Korean of-
ficer remarks to a friend: “We can’t fight them without
equipment,” giving credence to their inability to hold
June 29, 1950
the line. Many of the South Koreans have fought
bravely, but the match is one-sided.
General MacArthur, standing in the midst of the
death and destruction and under enemy fire, scruti-
nizes the final rear guard actions at the Han River, while
simultaneously collecting even incidental information
to assist him in what would have to be a miraculous
extrication from defeat. First impressions of the
MacArthur party convince them that only the contin-
gents of the South Korean 1st and 7th Divisions con-
tain enough men and equipment to resist effectively.
Nevertheless, units of the S.K. 5th Division hold in
Yongdungp’o, and to the west, Inchon is held by the
Capital Division. Additional S.K. troops of the 2nd
Division regroup at the junction of the Han and
Pukhan Rivers. Meanwhile, the S.K. 6th Division, fol-
lowing its gallant three-day stand, continues its retreat
toward Wonju in the center of the peninsula. The ROK
8th Division also retreats. The 23rd Regiment, 3rd S.K.
Division, moves north from Pusan toward Ulchin,
about sixty-five miles above Pohang-dong, to intercept
an anticipated North Korean drive down the east coastal
highway.
MacArthur thinks not with despair, but of victory,
and in less than thirty minutes he conceives his plan.
Although his sparse occupation troops are overwhelm-
ingly outnumbered, MacArthur has devised a strategy
to use them to give the impression of strength to buy
time and receive reinforcements. He will direct an or-
derly retreat to gain more tentative positions and per-
mit the disillusioned ROK troops to regain their con-
fidence. Meanwhile, the swiftness of the North Korean
advance forces the South Koreans to continue to make
many mistakes, one of which included the premature
demolition of the Han River bridge. During this brief
period at the river, MacArthur realizes that the power
of the North Korean thrust might propel them to the
last stop, Pusan. He devises a plan to launch an am-
phibious invasion behind the enemy lines at Inchon,
from which point he can recapture Seoul and isolate
the Communists troops between there and Pusan. The
plan will be poorly received by Washington, but his
persistence will prevail. Later in the day — subsequent
to meeting with President Rhee, Ambassador John
Muccio and General John Church — General Mac-
Arthur returns to Tokyo to mobilize his forces. Mac-
Arthur’s concludes about the future of Korea, during his
initial visit to the front, that “air and naval action alone
could not be decisive, and that nothing short of the in-
tervention of U.S. ground forces could give assurance
of stopping the Communists and of later regaining the
ground.”
The first U.S. ground troops arrive in Korea at
Suwon. Detachment X, composed of less than thirty-
five men, has also brought four M55 machine guns of
the 507th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion. Slightly after
1600, the unit engages four attacking enemy planes.
One is destroyed and another is thought to have been
destroyed. Another air raid occurs about 2000. As the
day progresses, contingents of the N.K. 6th Division,
42
which had breached the Han River west of Seoul on
the previous day, seize control of Kimpo Airfield. In
addition, the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions in Seoul pre-
pare to bolt the river in force, following the cessation
of a heavy artillery bombardment of South Korean po-
sitions. The N.K. 1st Division trails the 3rd and 4th
Divisions, but later it pivots and moves toward Ichon
and Umsong on the first primary road east of the Seoul-
Pusan highway.
In the meantime, Colonel Emmerich continues to
maintain contact with headquarters in Japan. Mem-
bers of Emmerich’s staff forward weather reports to the
Air Force at Itazuke to aid the success of its missions.
Meanwhile, additional KMAG advisors who were with
the S.K. 6th and 8th Divisions at Wonju arrive at Pusan
bringing the KMAG forces there to twenty-two officers
and 34 enlisted men. Two missionaries and six civil-
ians of the ECA are also with Emmerich. The newly es-
tablished Provisional KMAG becomes active. It dis-
patches one team composed of six men to Taejon and
another detachment of two officers is sent to rejoin the
S.K. 3rd Division at Taegu. Emmerich’s command also
dispatches some communications personnel to the
Coast Guard Base at Chinhae.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force executes 172
sorties in support of the S.K. forces. This level of sup-
port is maintained during the coming days. On this
day, B-26s attack bridges, and Fifth Air Force F-80s
patrol above the Han River, while F-82s, attached to the
86th FAWS, initiate the first napalm air strike of the
conflict. In the skies, Air Force planes of the 35th and
80th Fighter Bomber Squadrons (FBS) operating near
Suwon encounter and engage North Korean aircraft
that are attacking Suwon’s airfield. Five enemy planes
are eliminated from the North Korean Air Force. One
of the enemy planes is destroyed by Lieutenant Richard
J. Burns (35th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter
Bomber Group). Burns, piloting an F-51 Mustang,
downs an IL-10. In addition, other aircraft, 8 B-29s
attached to the 19th Bomber Group, pound Kimpo
airfield, which had been seized by the Communists.
The B-29s also hit the rail depot at Seoul. Subsequent
to completing the mission, the B-29s head back to Ok-
inawa, but en route, enemy aircraft intercept the group.
Another pilot, Lieutenant Roy W. Marsh, 80th Fighter
Bomber Squadron (8th Fighter Bomber Group), fly-
ing an F-80C, knocks out an IL-10 which closes on
Seoul at an elevation of 1,200 feet. Marsh engages the
plane near Uijongbu. The bombers return safely; how-
ever, one of the attacking planes is shot down by the
gunners to rack up the initial kill of an enemy plane by
a B-29 gunner. In yet other activity, subsequent to au-
thorization by MacArthur to select targets in North
Korea, 18 planes (3rd Bomber Group B-26s) attached
to Fifth Air Force, strike Heijo Airfield on the outskirts
of Pyongyang, and report the destruction of about 25
planes on the field.
In other activity, a pack of three enemy planes close
against Lieutenant Harry T. Sandlin (80th Fighter
Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group) near
 43
Suwon. Sandlin outmaneuvers the trio and places his F-
51 Mustang to the rear of an LA-7, dispenses about
800 rounds of machine gun fire and downs the enemy
aircraft.
In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Juneau commences
the first U.S. Naval surface vessel bombardment of the
conflict. Operating off the east coast of Korea, it bom-
bards suspected enemy positions in the vicinity of
Kangnung–Samch’ok, where N.K. guerrillas and the
elements of the Communist 766th Independent Unit
had landed on the 25th.
— In the United States: Major General L.L. Lem-
nitzer pens a memorandum to the secretary of defense
that contains a consensus of the thoughts of the mili-
tary leaders at the time of the invasion. It states that
there had been knowledge of the North Korean ability
to attack South Korea. But he emphasizes that every
other country bordering the Soviet Union possesses the
same capabilities and that no intelligence agency had
considered Korea as “a point of attack.”
In other activity, Secretary of State Dean Acheson is
informed by the Australian ambassador that two Aus-
tralian warships and the 77th Royal Australian Fighter
Squadron (all presently based in Japan) will join the
U.S. forces. Additional naval forces are committed by
Canada, Netherlands and New Zealand. Also, the only
nation to offer ground troops is Nationalist China, but
their proposal to dispatch 33,000 troops is short-
circuited by MacArthur on the following day. Mac-
Arthur claims that the Nationalist contingent is un-
trained and lacks motor transport and artillery. There
is speculation that Washington prefers to keep the Na-
tionalist Chinese out of the conflict to avoid the pos-
sibility of inciting the Communist Chinese.
In other activity, General Eisenhower visits the Pen-
tagon ( June 28, Washington time) to meet with Gen-
eral Omar Bradley, but Bradley is confined to bed, suf-
fering from a stomach virus. Eisenhower speaks with
Generals Matt Ridgway, Joseph Collins and Wade
Haislip. Apparently Eisenhower is stunned to discover
the unpreparedness of the U.S. Army and the noncha-
lant attitudes concerning the Korean crisis. Eisenhower
strongly urges initial mobilization of sufficient force to
meet the threat, including the bolstering of the forces
in Europe and the use of the atom bomb, if necessary.
Eisenhower is in town for a scheduled physical exam-
ination, but he seemingly writes a few prescriptions for
the Army while there. Ike also makes note that he
would prefer a younger General in command, an ob-
vious referral to MacArthur. Nonetheless, showing em-
pathy towards MacArthur’s plight, Eisenhower also
states that the restrictions that confine MacArthur’s re-
sponsive actions to the area below the 38th Parallel
should be lifted.
— In Japan: By today, the U.S. Air Force has trans-
ferred many of its aircraft from distant bases to Ashiya
and Itazuke Airbases to ensure they are capable of strik-
ing the battle sectors in Korea. Also, the 19th Bom-
bardment Group, Twentieth Air Force, relocates from
Guam to Kadena Airfield on Okinawa. And, the 8th
June 30, 1950
Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron (TRS), based at
Yokota, initiates photographic reconnaissance missions
with its RB-29 aircraft to gain intelligence regarding
airfields in North Korea.
In other activity, the 21st Troop Carrier Squadron
(TCS) arrives at Tachikawa Air Force Base from Clark
AFB in the Philippines to begin operations from Japan.
June 30 Using the umbrella coverage of artillery
and tank fire, the 8th Regiment, 3rd N.K. Division,
moves from Seoul to the south bank of the Han River.
Many troops cross on foot while others swim. Others
are ferried across on wooden boats, which are also uti-
lized to transport trucks. The advance, once across the
river, stalls as the regiment reforms. The pause prevents
a quick move against Yongdungp’o, the conduit for the
primary rail and road routes heading south. In response
to the enemy penetration, General Church directs S.K.
Chief of Staff General Chae to mount a counterattack
and strike the enemy at the riverbank. But the interdict-
ing North Korean fire frustrates the effort. With con-
tinuing reports expressing the deterioration of the South
Korean resistance, Lt. General Chung II Kwon arrives
in Korea from Japan to relieve General Chae.
At about 1600, General Church, using the radio,
hurries another urgent message to Tokyo, relating more
grim details of the lopsided struggle. Soon after, he
dashes twelve miles south to Osan, from where he can
speak to Tokyo directly by telephone. While speaking
to MacArthur’s chief of staff, General Edward Almond,
General Church is informed that U.S. ground troops
have been committed to the cause, which gives him
some temporary hope. Church is instructed to hold
Suwon’s airstrip for another day to receive the rein-
forcements, and he responds in the affirmative that it
will be held. However, in Church’s short absence, more
confusion has compounded the dilemma. False infor-
mation, relayed by a U.S. plane, that a North Korean
column moving from the east was nearing Suwon, is
given to S.K. Generals Chung and Chae. The erro-
neous information causes bedlam when they return to
Suwon from the Han River with the distressing news.
Following this event, an unexplained glaring red flare
shoots into the air from a point near the railroad station,
located about 500 yards from a command post. KMAG
personnel at the post react with contrasting opinions,
and neither General Church nor Colonel William
Wright is on location. Discussion on the unfolding ac-
tivity reaches no concrete conclusion; however, initially
it is decided by an on-site ADCOM officer to evacu-
ate the town and form a perimeter around the airfield.
In turn, the decision and ongoing undisciplined activ-
ity have confounded the Korean officers. During the
ensuing moments, some ADCOM people, assuming
Suwon is being surrounded, begin destroying their
equipment with thermite grenades.
Meanwhile, at the airfield, a defensive perimeter is
about to be established, but lacking direction, the of-
ficers abort the plan and prepare to retire south to Tae-
jon. An astonished General Church, having re-
June 30, 1950
turned from Osan, encounters the convoy while it sits
to await the call to move out toward Taejon. Church im-
mediately orders the convoy to return to Suwon. Gen-
eral Church, already fuming over the disruption at the
airfield, sees his patience pushed to the brink when he
returns to town and finds his headquarters and most
of the valuable signal equipment destroyed. Realizing
that holding the airfield is no longer feasible, General
Church, drenched from the torrential rain and appar-
ently fatigued from the overtaxing day, orders the con-
voy to withdraw to Osan, where he can reopen commu-
nications with Tokyo. Following a brief conversation
between Church and General Almond, it is agreed that
the ADCOM personnel would head for Taejon. In con-
junction, S.K. Army Headquarters remains in Suwon.
The expected reinforcements are diverted to Pusan. In
the meantime, other N.K. units prepare to launch a
strong crossing of the Han on the following day.
In other activity, an advance group of U.S. officers,
led by Lt. Colonel Lewis A. Hunt, arrives in Korea to
begin organizing the logistical operations in Pusan.
In Air Force activity, The 77th Royal Australian Air
Force (RAAF) Squadron arrives in Korea. Later, the
Australian squadron will be attached to Fifth Air Force.
While evacuations are ongoing at Suwon, the Air Force
initiates modifications at another field, Kumhae Air-
field, located slightly more than ten miles northwest of
Pusan. Also, near Suwon, Lieutenant John B. Thomas,
36th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber
Group, engages an enemy Yak-9 type aircraft. Thomas,
flying an F-80, prevails and the Yak plummets in flames
to the ground. Also, Fifth Air Force tactical air control
contingents arrive at Suwon.
In other activity, planes (B-26s), attached to the 3rd
Bombing Group, attack enemy positions in the vicin-
ity of Seoul, while B-29s also pound enemy targets near
Seoul, at locations north of the Han River.
— In the United States: General Lawton Collins
(Army chief of staff ) receives a message from Mac-
Arthur (near midnight June 29, Washington time); he
informs Frank Pace, Secretary of the Army, of Mac-
Arthur’s request for a regimental combat team to be
committed near the Han River, far from Pusan. Mac-
Arthur’s request enunciates the necessity of American
troops to stem the tide and retake the surrendered ter-
rain. He states, “To continue to utilize the forces of our
air and navy without an effective ground element can-
not be decisive.” Following an early morning conver-
sation with Pace, President Truman authorizes the use
of the combat team, and later in the day, the president
informs officials of the State and Defense departments
that he is authorizing the dispatch of two divisions from
Japan. He also states that he has ordered the imple-
mentation of a naval blockade of North Korea. Tru-
man makes the U.S. position public during the after-
noon. During this talk with the press the president
emphasizes that the U.S. is not at war; the conflict is
dubbed a “police action.”
General Collins calls the other chiefs of staff at about
0530 and informs them of the decision to send ground
44
troops to Korea. They are miffed, but no formal protest
is ever made. U.N. Ambassador Warren Austin speaks
to the Security Council of the General Assembly, in-
forming them of the U.S. initiatives (in response to
U.N. resolutions of June 25 and 27) to curtail the hos-
tilities in Korea.
The strength of the U.S. Marine Corps stands at
74,279 men. The 1st Marine Division (reinforced), sta-
tioned at Camp Pendleton, California, contains 641 of-
ficers and 7,148 enlisted men. Due to the intolerable
situation in Korea, the 1st Provisional Brigade will drain
the weakened division further; however, by September
15, 26,000 Marines will bulge the 1st Marine Division,
as calls go out and Marines (active and reserve) con-
verge on Pendleton from points all across the country.
More Marines will be drawn from the Mediterranean
Fleet. It is a feat unparalleled in military history. The 1st
Marine Division will have no time allotted for a re-
hearsal landing prior to the invasion of Inchon.
— In Japan: General MacArthur is informed by
Washington (directive 6-29-50) that he is to deploy
U.S. Army forces in South Korea to keep communica-
tions and other important functions operating prop-
erly, to deploy additional troops to maintain control of
a port and airfield in the vicinity of Pusan-Chinhae,
and to commit air and naval forces against North Ko-
rean military targets, without encroaching against the
Soviet Union or Manchuria (Communist China). The
instructions from the president also stipulate that a dual
blockade is to be initiated, whereby the Communists are
prevented from attacking Formosa and the Formosans
are similarly restrained from opening hostilities against
the mainland. MacArthur is also informed that he is
receiving operational control of the U.S. 7th Fleet.
However, the directive, approved by the president, stip-
ulates that MacArthur is not to retaliate against the So-
viet Union if they directly intervene in the aggression,
which places the American forces at a great disadvan-
tage and possible jeopardy if they are fired upon and are
forbidden to retaliate.
MacArthur directs General Walton Walker to move
the 24th Division to Korea. In turn, General Walker
briefs General William F. Dean, commanding officer,
24th Division, on his orders. General Dean, accord-
ing to the instructions, will command all U.S. Army
forces in Korea. Dean is to transport his Division Head-
quarters and one infantry regiment to Pusan by air. The
heavy equipment, including artillery, tanks, ammuni-
tion and food, are to be shipped to Korea by sea. Ulti-
mately, the plans filter down to the man who will lead
the task force, Lt. Colonel Charles B. Smith, who is
awakened from his sleep and ordered to speed to the
command post. Smith is ordered to take his battalion
(minus Companies A and B) to Itazuke Air Base, where
he will meet General Kean and receive further instruc-
tions. By 0300 on the 1st, the task force is on the high-
way on a 75 mile journey during a driving rain. The
convoy reaches its destination slightly after 0800.
In other activity, General Stratemeyer, convinced of
the need for more air power, requests additional planes
 45
to supplement his force. The appeal calls for twenty-
three B-29s, 164 F-80Cs, sixty-four F-51s, twenty-
one C-54s and twenty-one F-82s. The Air Force’s
downsizing after World War II creates problems that
will continue for the duration of the war. The Air Force
responds but no F-80s are available for Far East Air
Forces. Substitutes are instead sent, 150 F-51 Mus-
tangs. Also, Stratemeyer pulls 50 dusty F-51s out of
his storage bin for added punch. The F-51 proves bet-
ter suited for the rugged conditions of the Korean air-
fields and it covers more range than the F-80s.
July 1 The North Koreans continue their south-
ward drive. From Seoul, the N.K. 5th Regiment, 4th
Division, held in reserve since the invasion began,
pushes its 3rd Battalion across the Han River at 0400.
The remainder of the division follows and ignites a
fierce contest for Yongdungp’o that lasts until July 3.
The South Koreans raise solid resistance and inflict
heavy casualties upon the attackers. Nevertheless, by
0800 on July 3, the North Koreans seize control of the
town and force the South Koreans to retreat. The
enemy sustains 227 dead, 1,822 wounded and 107 men
missing, while capturing the prize. As the hotly con-
tested battle ensues, the N.K. 3rd Division also fords the
Han.
In other activity, the ADCOM convoy reaches Tae-
jon. General Church establishes a new command post.
Colonel Wright dispatches five of his KMAG officers
to Suwon to assist the South Koreans there. The Eighth
Army Operation Order calls for an initial delaying
force, comprised of two rifle companies, reinforced by
two platoons of 4.2 inch mortars and one platoon of 75-
mm recoilless rifles. The remainder of the 24th Divi-
sion follows by sea. From Pusan, trains will transport
the task force to P’yongt’aek, and from there, the troops
advance to Osan, where they encounter overpowering
resistance on July 5. The task force is composed of
mostly green troops, but they are full of confidence and
expect to quickly terminate the hostilities.
In the central corridor of Korea, the South Korean
6th Division continues to fight effective delaying actions
against the N.K. 7th Division, which has sustained
about 400 casualties and several destroyed T-34 tanks,
between Chunch’on and Hongch’on. The enemy ad-
vances slowly, marching from Hongch’on, through the
mountainous terrain toward Wonju, a strategic rail and
highway center. Here, too, elements of the S.K. 6th
Division forge stiff resistance to further frustrate the
N.K. commanding officer, Maj. Gen. Chon U. The
sluggish advance apparently handicaps the time sched-
ule of the North Korean main command, which re-
places Chon U, on about the 4th of July, one day be-
fore the capitulation of Wonju. In conjunction, the
N.K. 7th Division becomes the 12th N.K. Division to
differentiate it from a new division that is activated and
designated the 7th N.K. Division. Also, during the
early part of July, MacArthur focuses on his plan to
launch an amphibious landing behind the enemy lines,
at Inchon. He will direct Admiral James T. Doyle to
July 1, 1950
make the proper preparations and study all the complex-
ities of initiating the invasion. Doyle diligently executes
his orders and subsequently informs MacArthur on the
findings of his staff: “Our research listed every known
geographical and naval handicap—Inchon had ’em all.”
— In Okinawa: Vice Admiral A. D. Struble’s Strik-
ing Force (TF-77) departs Buckner Bay and steams to-
ward Korea’s west coast. The naval force is composed
of three components: a Screening Group, TG77.2,
commanded by Captain C. W. Parker, USN, consist-
ing of eight U.S. and two British destroyers; a Support
Force, TG77.1, commanded by British Rear Admiral
W.G. Andrewes, consisting of the Cruisers USS
Rochester and HMS Belfast; and the Carrier Group
TG77.4, commanded by Rear Admiral J. M. Hoskins,
USN, composed of the USS Valley Forge and the HMS
Triumph. While the convoy moves north, conditions
on the Korean peninsula continue to deteriorate,
prompting several dispatches to reach the fleet, essen-
tially informing it to maintain the attack beyond the
first day. The orders also specify that particular atten-
tion should be given to the railroads near Kumchon,
Sariwon and Sinanju to disrupt the enemy’s supply line.
— In the United States: There are no outward signs,
but the White House and the military are concerned
about the United States’ capability to handle a major So-
viet threat.
— In Japan: Task Force Smith, with 406 of its 440-
man strength, departs Japan for Korea. The task force
is not designated TF Smith until several months later.
Some elements had arrived at Pusan on the previous
day. The unit is composed of the 1st Battalion, 21st
Regiment, Rifle Companies B and C, both at less than
full strength but each with six 2.36-inch bazooka teams
and four 60-mm mortars; a recoilless rifle platoon
(composite), less two of its four guns; one-half of a
headquarters company; and four 4.2 inch mortars, two
of which have not been airlifted. Six transport planes,
attached to the 374th TCW, move the troops to Pusan
from Korea. The first plane lifts off at 0845, but upon
arrival at Pusan, it and the second plane, which is trans-
porting Colonel C.B. Smith, are both compelled to re-
turn to Japan because of a thick fog that hovers over
the runway. At about 1100, the Pusan airstrip receives
the first of many flights. Colonel Charles B. Smith ar-
rives on the tenth flight. Transport vehicles wait at the
runway to carry the force seventeen miles to Pusan,
where crowds anxiously await their arrival. Once there,
the people greet the troops with a tumultuous welcome
that includes banners and huge smiles. When the troop
trains depart for Taejon at 2000, a South Korean band
plays a spirited send-off.
In other activity, the 34th Regiment begins board-
ing a ship during the night. It will embark Pusan on the
night of the 2nd. The remainder of the 21st Regiment,
except Companies A and D, embarks from Sasebo on
July 3. Companies A and D travel separately by ship
from Moji.
In yet other activity, the Far East Command instructs
the Eighth Army to take responsibility for total logis-
July 2, 1950
A contingent of Task Force Smith boards a C-54 transport in Japan on 1 July. The troops are the first
U.S. combat troops to arrive in Korea.
tical support of the U.S. and all other Allied forces op-
erating in Korea, including the South Korean forces.
The logistical responsibilities are assumed by Eighth
Army Rear, which remains in Yokohama. This respon-
sibility is transferred to Japan Logistical Command
during August 1950.
— In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd, USMC,
Commanding General FMF Pacific, arrives at Hawaii
from the United States. General Shepherd is en route
to the Far East, anticipating the arrival of Marines. Co-
incidentally, today General MacArthur requests a Ma-
rine Brigade to assist Eighth Army in Korea. Also, the
U.S. Navy forms Task Force Yoke, which is composed
of vessels that assemble on the West Coast and at Pearl
Harbor. The naval task force is to be commanded by
Rear Admiral Walter F. Boone.
July 2 Task Force Smith’s train pulls into Taejon
at 0800. Soon after, Colonel Charles B. Smith is es-
corted by Colonel LeRoy Lutes to General Church’s
headquarters where a meeting is ongoing between the
general and several other U.S. and South Korean offi-
cers. General Church welcomes Colonel C.B. Smith
and gives him a quick update that details where the
task force is needed by referring to the spot on the map.
General Church, as is the case with most of the Amer-
ican command, remains convinced that the invasion
will be rebuffed. He tells Smith: “We have a little ac-
tion up here. All we need is some men up here [point-
ing to the spot] who won’t run when they see tanks.”
Colonel Smith reflects no apprehension. He has much
46
confidence in his officers, one-third of whom have seen
combat in either the Atlantic or Pacific during World
War II. Smith feels equally confident about his troops,
although many are green; however, he is totally un-
aware of the enemy’s strength and the supporting tanks.
Task Force Smith moves to the rest area, but Colo-
nel Smith and several officers move out and travel north
about eighty miles along harsh roads to Osan. Smith’s
entourage passes innumerable Republic of Korea troops
and civilians as they move south. The uncomfortable
trip appears profitable, as Lt. Colonel Smith discovers
what he believes is a perfect defensive position about
three miles north of Osan. The selected site, a ragged
ridge of hills that run north, intersects the road at right
angles. Its point reaches a height of 300 feet and affords
an excellent view of approaching traffic. In addition,
the task force positions will control both the railroad
and highway. During the reconnaissance mission,
enemy planes pass over without detecting the Americans.
Smith and his party return to Taejon after dark. Or-
ders arrive that instruct Smith to move his force by rail
to Ansong and P’yongt’aek, the former 20 miles south-
east of Osan and the latter 15 miles south of the town.
Again the troop train rolls north. Colonel Smith re-
mains at P’yongt’aek, separated by about twelve miles
from the other half of his force. He establishes head-
quarters along the main road.
In other activity, General Dean reaches Korea by
plane, but due to the darkness, his pilot is unable to
locate the airstrip at Taejon. They return to Japan. On
the following day, General Dean hitches a ride with
 47
Captain Ben Tufts, the recently appointed liaison offi-
cer between the press and the army. Tuft’s pilot is fa-
miliar with Taejon and despite a dense fog, he lands at
about 1030. While at General Church’s headquarters,
General Dean receives word that he will command all
U.S. Army troops in Korea, effective 0001 July 4. These
Americans will face more than human enemies; the
other foes, the weather and terrain, are equally severe.
The Korean battlefields in summer frequently experi-
ence temperatures of more than 100 degrees, and the
land is inundated with precipitous hills that bear sparse
foliage. When the sun is not blazing, it is usually rain-
ing heavily. The elements extract nearly as many casu-
alties due to exhaustion as those inflicted by the enemy
during the early days of the war. Salt tablets are a ne-
cessity and heat exhaustion is commonplace.
Central Mountain area: The S.K. 6th Division en-
gages the N.K. 7th Division near Wonju. The stiff re-
sistance hinders the enemy’s advance.
In Air Force activity, at Pusan, the tremendous weight
of the Air Force C-54s takes a heavy toll on the air-
field. The Air Force is forced to cancel the flights of
the C-54s until reinforcing steel plates arrive to support
the runways. In the meantime, the Air Force uses C-47s
to transport the troops and equipment; the smaller
planes handle a maximum of eighteen troops.
In Naval activity, the official U.N. blockade doesn’t
begin until July 4. Nevertheless, at daybreak, a few
naval guardians appear to scatter four N.K. torpedo
boats that are escorting ten converted trawlers to Chu-
munjin. As the USS Juneau and two accompanying
Royal Navy vessels alter course to attack the flotilla,
the enemy PT boats move to strike first. This hostile en-
Elements of the U.S. 24th Division board a ship in Japan on 2 July. The troops are en route to Korea.
July 2, 1950
counter, which becomes the first naval engagement of
the conflict, is brief and deadly. The PT boats receive
the volley. Two PTs immediately sink, and the remain-
ing two speed out of harm’s way. Soon after, additional
salvos arc toward the flotilla. Seven enemy trawlers sink
and the remaining two escape behind a breakwater.
Also, an American LST delivers more reinforcements
from Japan to Korea. Elements of the 52nd Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Miller O.
Perry, debark at Pusan. On the following day, this con-
tingent moves north by train to augment Task Force
Smith. In addition, contingents of the 34th Infantry
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Jay Lovless, starts
to arrive by sea at Pusan. On the following day, two
LSTs arrive, transporting supplies and equipment.
In other Naval activity, the Sergeant Keathley, an am-
munition vessel, arrives at Pusan from Japan. The
KMAG personnel, which had earlier evacuated Suwon
and Pusan, debark. Upon arrival, they join with
KMAG in Pusan under Colonel Emmerich. Later, most
move by train to Taejon. A critical shortage of all types
of vehicles exists within KMAG since the evacuation
of Seoul; 48 vehicles, including jeeps, ambulances and
trucks, are loaded aboard flatcars and forwarded under
guard to Taegu.
—In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd arrives at
Pearl Harbor to assume his new position as com-
mander, Fleet Marine Force Pacific. Soon after his ar-
rival in Honolulu, Shepherd receives a waiting message
from the commandant that alerts him of the probabil-
ity of Marines going to Korea. Before noon, General
Shepherd meets with Admiral Radford.
— In Japan: U.S. Ambassador William Sebald con-
July 3, 1950
fers with General Almond and subsequently with Gen-
eral MacArthur,\ to discuss a message received from
the Chinese Nationalist Mission in Tokyo. Chiang Kai-
shek offers to commit three combat divisions to fight
with the other U.N. troops. The offer is forwarded to
Washington, where it is rejected. There is tremendous
concern that Nationalist Chinese participation would
precipitate the entry of Communist China and addi-
tionally, the Chinese lack armor, artillery, vehicles and
sufficient ammunition. However, subsequent ground
units that are committed by other countries arrive in the
theater without arms and some even without uniforms.
Most of the arms the Chinese Nationalists had received
from the U.S. were confiscated by the Communists
when Chiang Kai-shek’s forces were driven to Formosa.
In other activity, General MacArthur dispatches a
message to Washington that accepts the commitment
of Marines to the Korean Theater. He requests that
they be dispatched immediately. Back in the States, Ad-
miral Sherman, subsequent to authorization by Presi-
dent Truman and the Joint Chiefs of Staff, directs Ad-
miral Radford to transport the Marine units to the Far
East. There are presently no Marine units of any con-
sequence in the Far East. The 1st Marine Provisional
Brigade will be the first American contingent to depart
the U.S. to participate in the Korean conflict. In con-
cert with the massive endeavor to reel in the manpower,
the logistics of gathering sufficient equipment for the
Marine Brigade presents a Herculean task: an enor-
mous time constraint coupled with finding dependable
operational vehicles and weapons. The veteran vehi-
cles of the Pacific Campaign, referred to as antiques by
many, are recalled from their sanctuary at the colossal
USMC supply depot in the vast desert area at Barstow,
California. Once the “mothballs” are swept off, the re-
galvanized iron chariots move to Camp Pendleton and
El Toro. Amphibian tractors, DUKWs, trucks and
jeeps, most still brandishing the scars of the Pacific
Campaign, roll toward the coast along the highways
and rails to meet the deadline.
At the conclusion of World War II, much of the U.S.
equipment was abandoned, never to be returned to the
States. However, the Marines salvaged everything they
could, even if it might have belonged to another branch
of the armed services. It has been said that a lot of the
equipment that arrived at California received new paint
because some appeared more gray than green. The
Marines do receive some new equipment, such as their
allotment of the new 3.5 rocket launchers and some
vehicles. Nonetheless, the veteran vehicles overwhelm-
ingly surpass the number of veterans designated to drive
them.
July 3 Specialists in air-to-ground communica-
tions arrive in Taejon. These two Fifth Air Force Tac-
tical Air Control contingents greatly enhance the U.N.
support of ground troops. In the process, much of the
inadvertent bombing and strafing of South Korean
forces during these first days of the war ceases. Today,
four Royal Australian Air Force Mustangs mistakenly
48
bomb and strafe a nine-boxcar ammunition train that
has paused in P’yongt’aek, to await orders to head
north. The Australian pilots make six passes and dev-
astate the train, the station and a large section of the
town; many civilian casualties are sustained. Addition-
ally, the ammunition continues to explode throughout
the night. Also, thirty trucks are destroyed and about
200 ROK troops are killed.
In another tragic incident, the town of Suwon and
a passing South Korean convoy are each accidentally
struck by friendly aircraft fire. Return fire knocks out
one of the planes. The pilot makes an emergency land-
ing at Suwon Airfield and to his surprise, is captured by
the friendly KMAG and ROK forces there. General
Church contacts FEAF and pleads that the Air Force
confine their strikes to positions north of the Han River
bridge.
In other activity, the U.S. 52nd Artillery Battalion ar-
rives in Taejon. General Church orders it to move by
train to P’yongt’aek to join Task Force Smith, but due
to the accidental damage at the railroad station, the re-
inforcements move to Songhwan-ni, and from there
they drive six miles to arrive at P’yongt’aek before day-
break on the 4th. At Wonju, vicious fighting continues
between contingents of the S.K. 6th Division and the
N.K. 7th Division.
In other activity, Yongdungp’o falls to the North Ko-
rean 4th Division. During the morning, the first enemy
tanks cross the Han River via a repaired railroad bridge
to join the infantry. In conjunction, the N.K. 6th Di-
vision continues to advance; elements nudge against
Inchon. After dark, six tanks, trailed by an infantry
battalion, roll into the strategic port city.
In Naval activity, the carriers of the 7th Fleet, sup-
ported by British carriers, initiate operations off the
west coast of North Korea in conjunction with orders
issued by the commander of Naval Forces Far East on
30 June. The carriers USS Valley Forge and the HMS
Triumph launch planes against enemy airfields on the
west coast in the vicinity of Pyongyang-Chinnamp’o.
These aircraft, attached to Admiral Struble’s 7th Fleet
carriers, initiate their first air attack of the war. At 0600,
sixteen F4U Corsairs (VF-54), commanded by Lt.
Commander D.K. English, and twelve AD Skyraiders
(VA-55), commanded by Lt. Commander N.D. Hod-
son, shoot from the decks of the Valley Forge; the for-
mer each carry eight 5-inch rockets, and the latter each
carry six 100-pound and two 500-pound bombs. Both
groups close on the airfield at Pyongyang. Subsequently,
the F9F2 Panther jets, also aboard the Valley Forge, cat-
apult into the sky and quickly climb higher before over-
taking the slower propeller craft. The jets zap the tar-
get before the enemy planes can get off the ground,
initiating the U.S. Navy’s first jet combat attack. Al-
though the weather is poor, the skies are clear on the first
pass and three aircraft are destroyed. On the second
pass, the Panthers decimate two more enemy aircraft.
Meanwhile, ammunition storage areas are ablaze
when the Corsairs and Skyraiders that follow the jets
converge on the target. Their dives account for a direct
 49 July 3, 1950

Panther jets prepare to take off from a carrier to strike enemy targets in Korea.

hit on the fuel storage area, the total annihilation of the
three hangars and complete destruction of the runways.
North Korean return fire is totally inadequate. No hits
are sustained by any of the attacking aircraft.
Later in the day, the planes strike again. The air
strikes pummel the rail center in Pyongyang and the
bridges that span the Taedong River. Fifteen locomo-
tives are devastated, ten others sustain damage and large
numbers of boxcars are decimated; however, the bridge
remains intact.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
meet in Washington, D.C., to discuss strategy. One of
July 3, 1950
the topics is the possible commitment of Marines to
Korea. General Cates, commandant, Marine Corps, is
permitted to attend only this part of the meeting. The
joint chiefs are: General Bradley, chairman; General
Lawton Collins, Army chief of staff; Admiral Sherman,
chief of Naval Operations; and General Hoyt Vanden-
berg, Air Force chief of staff. The commandant of the
Marine Corps jots down a note of historical impor-
tance on his wall calendar: “Attended JCS [Joint Chiefs
of Staff ] meeting. Orders for employment of FMF ap-
proved.”
The apparent movement of the corps had already
been in the works. On July 1st, Admiral Forest Sher-
man inquired of Admiral Radford the time involved to
transport either a Marine Battalion Landing Team or a
Marine Regimental Combat Team (RCT) from the
West Coast to Korea. On the 2nd, Radford responds,
informing Sherman that a landing team could be
loaded in four days and embarked in six days. He also
states that an RCT could be loaded in six days and be
prepared to sail in ten days. Admiral C. Turner Joy
makes it known that a Marine RCT could be dis-
patched to the Pacific if General MacArthur would
want it. MacArthur had accepted the offer immedi-
ately and so stated in his message on July 2nd, which
An AD Skyraider takes off from a carrier to support ground troops. The plane is carrying more than
4,000 pounds of bombs and rockets.
50
requested the immediate presence of the Marine RCT
and its supporting aircraft. Nonetheless, there is still
much reluctance on the part of the joint chiefs to com-
mit the Marines, and there are additional efforts by
General Vandenberg to cancel out Marine aviation
units, but to no avail.
In other activity, Major Vincent J. Gottschalk,
USMC, is appointed commanding officer, VMO-6,
the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade’s Air Observation
Squadron. The squadron will be composed of eight
fixed wing aircraft (light observation planes) and seven
rotary wing aircraft (helicopters), the latter being
brought in from Quantico, Virginia. Gottschalk is
directed to have his outfit ready to embark on the 11th.
It becomes an extraordinary challenge that requires an
immense effort and some ingenuity, peculiar to the
corps, to accomplish the mission. The helicopters and
accompanying personnel will not arrive at El Toro until
two days before shipping out. The fixed wing aircraft
personnel number eight pilots and thirty-three enlisted
Marines.
— In Japan: General MacArthur dispatches a mes-
sage to Washington just after midnight ( July 2–3), with
regard to his instructions to implement a naval block-
ade of North Korea. He lays out a pragmatic plan that
 51 July 3, 1950

Top: Planes aboard the USS Valley Forge prepare for launch to strike enemy targets in North Korea. Bot-
tom: U.S. bombers strike the railroad bridges at Seoul. Two of three are hit. The third is destroyed by TNT.
July 4, 1950
he considers mandatory to effectively enforce the block-
ade. Geographically, the alignment of warships must
isolate the eastern ports of Ch’ongjin, Najin and Won-
san, while simultaneously they cap the sea lanes off the
west coast ports of Anju, Chinnamp’o, Inchon and
Sonch’on. Due to presidential restrictions, which ex-
plicitly forbid action or reaction to the Soviet Union,
Najin, Ch’ongjin and Sonch’on are left unmolested.
This non-action keeps U.N. warships a safe distance
from the Soviet Union and Manchuria. However, it
grants the Communists several lanes that are guaranteed
safe passage. MacArthur notifies Washington that all
available ships will be at their assigned stations on the
4th.
Also, General MacArthur, aware that available am-
munition is useless against tanks, requests that the
newly perfected 3.5 rocket launcher be sped to Korea.
Production of this weapon’s ammunition had begun
about fifteen days before the outbreak of hostilities in
Korea. The initial shipment of 3.5 rocket launchers is
flown from Travis Air Base, California, on July 8 and
it arrives on the 10th. By July 12, the rocket launchers
reach Taejon. Immediately thereafter, particular men
of the 24th Division are indoctrinated on the proper use
of this weapon. This new antitank weapon is con-
structed of aluminum, weighs 15 pounds, and stretches
five feet in length. The rocket launcher is has a smooth
bore and an open tube that is capable of launching an
eight and one-half pound, 23 inch long shell. The U.S.
Eighth Army is in dire need of a weapon that can pen-
etrate the armor of the Russian-built tanks. This new
shell is expected to destroy any tank encountered.
In other activity, the Far East Air Force establishes a
Joint Operations Center on Kyushu at Itazuke Air Base
to better control the fighter planes that operate over
Korea.
July 4 Twenty-two additional officers are named
general and special staff officers of USAFIK. The offi-
cer selections are basically drawn from ADCOM, but
some KMAG officers are chosen. Most KMAG offi-
cers who had returned to Japan after the Communist in-
vasion arrived back in Korea aboard the Sergeant Keath-
ley on July 2. Also, Brigadier General Crump Garvin
and some of his staff arrive in Pusan to establish Pusan
Base Command, which is activated this day. On the
13th of July, it will be renamed Pusan Logistical Com-
mand. The U.N. Naval blockade of portions of North
Korea becomes effective this day.
In other activity, the North Korean 3rd and 4th Di-
visions, with Yongdungp’o under their belt and tanks
by their side, reinitiate their southern drive. The
columns move down the major rail-highway route. At
about 0600, the 5th Regiment, N.K. 4th Division,
takes the point. It drives feverishly down Suwon Road
and covers half the distance between Yongdungp’o and
Suwon by 1200. Infantry, augmented by eleven tanks,
move into Anyang-ni. Meanwhile, South Koreans who
are fleeing on foot and in trucks from Suwon to P’y-
ongt’aek cause the route to become heavily clogged.
52
The traffic jams last throughout the night. During the
day, enemy tanks overpower a delaying force attached to
the S.K. 5th Regiment, 2nd Division, operating between
Anyang-ni and Suwon. The Republic of Korea unit, lack-
ing much equipment, is crushed by the armor, then over-
run by infantry. During the daylong skirmishes, U.S. and
Australian Air Force planes attempt to aid the ROK forces
near Osan, but on several occasions they mistakenly strike
ROK troops and inflict more casualties. The South Ko-
reans, unable to neutralize the enemy advance, pull out
of Suwon before dark, and by midnight, the town is taken
by the N.K. 4th Division. Meanwhile, Lt. Colonel Brad
Smith pulls his separated command into P’yongt’aek. It
is bolstered by a contingent of the 52nd Artillery Battal-
ion, which had come in from Japan by sea. The unit is
composed of one-half section of headquarters and serv-
ice batteries and the complete complement of Battery A,
comprised of 108 men and 73 vehicles.
In other activity, Colonel Brad Smith and a small
party, including Colonel Miller O. Perry, return to the
Osan vicinity and decide on definite positions for the
U.S. artillery. As they travel, they pass ROK troops set-
ting the bridges for possible detonation. Also, in Taejon,
Generals Dean and Church confer with General Barth,
acting commanding general of the 24th Division Ar-
tillery. Brigadier General Henry J.D. Meyer, the divi-
sional artillery commander, is en route back from the
States. General Dean sends General Barth to P’y-
ongt’aek, with orders for Colonel Brad Smith to deploy
at “those good positions near Osan you told General
Church about.” Just after midnight, Task Force Smith
moves out of P’yongt’aek, after working out some un-
expected problems with transportation. A scarcity of
North Korean drivers suddenly develops when word ar-
rives that the convoy will move north. Without hesita-
tion and unwilling to listen to persuasion, the North
Koreans vanish into the darkness as fast as their GI boots
can carry them. Unperturbed, the Americans jump into
the drivers’ seats and head north, only to encounter more
difficulty. Driving under blackout conditions, they en-
counter several unexpected obstacles, primarily ROK
forces and North Korean civilians heading south.
As the task force continues along the clogged road,
the Americans attempt to convince the South Korean
demolition troops who are setting charges on the
bridges to stop because the Americans require use of
the spans. One particular group of South Koreans, ap-
parently unimpressed with the American request, refuses
to discontinue their operation. General Barth picks up
the crates of dynamite and heaves them into the river
to terminate the problem.
Meanwhile, the efforts of the South Korean 6th Di-
vision to hold Wonju and fend off the N.K. 7th Divi-
sion begins to falter, due to overpowering enemy
strength. Wonju is abandoned by the following day. At
Pusan, the 34th Regiment, which had arrived on July
2, moves north by rail. The 1st Battalion departs at
about daylight and arrives at P’yongt’aek about 0500
( July 5). The remainder of the regiment follows later.
Colonel Ayres arrives with the 1st Battalion.
 53
In other activity, Colonel Emmerich departs Pusan
for Taegu to join the other KMAG personnel there and
establish a small base of operations.
In the East Coast sector, the North Korean 5th Di-
vision continues to advance along the coastal road with-
out opposition. Its 11th Regiment, which temporarily
has been on a separate trek, has been traveling for eight
days along an inland route, which passes through P’y-
ongch’ang and Yongwol. On or about this day, the N.K.
11th Regiment encounters a contingent of the S.K. 8th
Division at Ch’unyang. The South Koreans are at-
tempting to withdraw inland to help defend the
Tanyang area. After the hard-fought skirmish, the N.K.
11th Regiment swings east to join the division at
Ulchin, on or near the 10th of July. The N.K. 5th Di-
vision incurs about 1,800 casualties during this journey
through the nasty mountain terrain.
In Naval activity, Corsairs from the Valley Forge de-
stroy ten locomotives and one bridge, while the
Skyraiders eliminate some small vessels in a nearby
river. Enemy fire damages four Skyraiders, but all
planes return to the Valley Forge. One plane attempts a
crash landing and destroys three planes and damages
six others in the process. The two days of raids destroy
eleven enemy planes and inflict damage to one other.
— In the United States: Lt. General Lemuel C.
Shepherd, Jr., commanding officer, Fleet Marine Force
Pacific, and Colonel Victor Krulak (later commandant),
a G-3 staff officer, receive orders to proceed from Pearl
Harbor to Japan to meet with General MacArthur.
General Shepherd, prior to his departure, requests that
the 5th Marines’ rifle companies each receive a third
platoon before shipping out to Korea, and on the fol-
U.S. and British planes strike enemy targets at Pyongyang on 4 July.
July 4, 1950
lowing day, Admiral Sherman approves the request.
The additional firepower is welcome, but unfortunately
there is insufficient time to add a third company to
each of the battalions, which are operating with only
two companies per peacetime requirements.
The 1st Marine Brigade, scheduled to embark in one
week, initiates round-the-clock activity at Camp
Pendleton and its neighboring base, El Toro, which
domiciles the air components of the brigade. Telegrams
are sizzling the wires, informing Marines stationed at
posts scattered throughout the nation to report to
Pendleton and El Toro. Included in this gathering of
warriors are the first helicopter pilots of the U.S. Armed
Forces to be established as a unit, destined for overseas
combat duty.
— In Japan: Far East Command holds another
meeting. Representatives of the Army, Navy and Air
Force attend, with General Almond presiding. Brigadier
General William S. Fellers, USMC, commanding gen-
eral, Troop Training Unit (TTU), Amphibious Train-
ing Command, Pacific Fleet, and Colonel Edward For-
ney, USMC, commanding officer, Mobile Training
Team Able, are summoned to the meeting. Forney has
been in Japan since Spring to instruct U.S. Army troops
on amphibious warfare. Admiral Doyle and his staff,
aboard the USS McKinley, have also been instructed to
fly to Tokyo to attend this meeting. Doyle is under
temporary orders to assist in the formulation of plans
for a 1st Cavalry Division amphibious landing “some-
where in Korea,” possibly Kunsan, but MacArthur
seems intent on the target being Inchon. General
MacArthur informs his chief of staff, General Almond,
to prepare for an amphibious invasion behind enemy
July 4, 1950 54

Top: A contingent of U.S. soldiers tries to grab a little rest along a road during early July. Bottom: U.S.
troops pause along a road in the vicinity of Suwon. An M1 rifle leans against a radio (SCR 300) on the
left forefront. Two .30-caliber Browning machine guns can be seen next to the soldier in the forefront.

lines in Korea; but, due to a drastic shortage of trained
amphibious assault troops, an absolute decision can-
not be reached.
The Joint Strategic Plans and Operations Group, led
by Brigadier General Edwin K. Wright, is presently
working on a plan that calls for one Marine Regimen-
tal Combat Team and a U.S. Army assault force to land
at Inchon in coordination with a frontal attack by the
24th and 25th Divisions. MacArthur suggests that the
1st Cavalry Division, commanded by General Hobart
 55
H. Gay, comprise the Army assault force. In conjunc-
tion, PhibGru One, Admiral Doyle’s amphibious
group, and Training Team Able, led by Colonel Ed-
ward Forney, are given responsibility for training the
force. Forney, on the following day (5th), becomes the
G-5 (plans) specialist assigned to assist the cavalry with
the operation, dubbed BLUE HEARTS, which is tenta-
tively scheduled for July 22.
In other activity, General William Dean assumes
command of all U.S. Army forces in Japan. He appoints
General Church his deputy commander. Also, Gen-
eral MacArthur orders that a base command be estab-
lished in Pusan. It will be commanded by Brigadier
General Crump Garvin.
— In Okinawa: The 29th Regiment, composed of
only two under-strength battalions, receives about 400
draftees from the United States.
July 5 THE BATTLE OF OSAN Task Force Smith,
composed of 540 men, is a blend of seasoned veterans
who had seen duty in either the Atlantic or Pacific the-
aters during World War II, and a heftier proportion of
untried troops from the post-war era. Colonel Brad
Smith’s force moves confidently to intercept and halt the
advancing hordes of Communist North Koreans. Task
Force Smith, the first American contingent to face
Communist troops in the Korean conflict (war), com-
pletes the last miles of its trek to plug the dike. After the
tedious journey from P’yongt’aek, Smith’s convoy
reaches its designated positions north of Osan at about
0300. The troops debark and immediately begin to de-
ploy and plant the artillery to meet the anticipated
enemy thrust. Despite an annoying and incessant pen-
etrating downpour, the operation, designed to foil the
enemy and ensure its failure, unfolds methodically, ac-
cording to the planned strategy of Colonel Smith.
Task Force Smith expects to firmly hold the line and
extinguish the threat. Two platoons of Company B
spread out in positions that force them to squat un-
comfortably in the irritable dampness to fortify their
line of defense east of the long, winding Osan-Suwon
Road. The remaining platoon digs in along the west
side of the road, atop an elevated knob. Nearby, a 75-
mm recoilless rifle with its barrel pointing north is
perched on the eastern fringe of the highway. In addi-
tion, 4.2 inch mortars are deployed on the south (re-
verse) slope of the rugged ridge, several hundred yards
away and directly to the rear of Company B. Slightly be-
hind B Company stand three agile platoons of Com-
pany C. One platoon stretches solidly along a slim ridge
that trails south on the west side of the railroad tracks.
It provides a refused right flank. The other two pla-
toons hold their positions east of the tracks, and an-
other 75-mm recoilless rifle peers north from its loca-
tion just west of the tracks. The infantry gets some
additional muscle when four 2.36 bazookas and four
.50-caliber machine guns are dispersed among the lines,
manned by volunteer crews from headquarters and
service batteries personnel.
Four 105-mm howitzers are planted about 2,000
July 5, 1950
yards to the rear of the infantry. Each howitzer has been
towed individually by two jeeps, the only vehicles ca-
pable of maneuvering the primitive, slim dirt path. The
big guns are neatly scattered amidst a cluster of houses
that stand between saturated rice paddies to the front
and shallow hills to the rear. A fifth howitzer is impro-
vised for use as an antitank weapon. It is plugged in
about halfway between the infantry line and the main
battery site. The artillery contingents have about 1,200
rounds of ammunition on site and several additional
truckloads are concealed in the houses. However,
HEAT ammo, that which will be required to neutral-
ize the Russian-made tanks, incredibly, is missing, ex-
cept for a mere six rounds. When the ammunition was
loaded in Japan, only 18 rounds of HEAT ammo were
on hand, six of which were allotted to A Company. The
ability of the less potent HE ammunition becomes the
primary unknown factor. The weapons have been test
fired and stand ready, but there is no way of knowing
if they can kill the tanks. However, as the first glimpse
of daylight arrives on this dreary rain-drenched terrain,
the defenders sense that the answer to this and numer-
ous other questions would soon be obvious.
But for now, the 540 Americans, acting as vanguard
for the U.N., bide their time, awaiting the inevitable ap-
proach of the enemy whose strength and numbers re-
main a mystery. The Americans lack tanks, and due to
the inclement weather, there will also be no aircraft to
bolster the positions. And all the South Korean troops
in the area had by this time retreated south.
From his position atop the ridge, Colonel Smith
stares toward Suwon, which is surprisingly visible de-
spite being eight miles to the north. Shortly after 0700,
Smith spots activity on the highway just outside of the
town, but it is not quite identifiable. By 0730, the
movement proves to be an advancing column of enemy
tanks, trailed by infantry. The Communists, unaware
of the Americans, are marching toward Osan, situated
between Seoul and Chonan, to crush the South Ko-
rean troops. Meanwhile, General Barth returns to the
artillery sector, but he has no knowledge yet of the im-
minent encounter with the North Koreans.
A forward artillery observer tracks the advancing T-
34 tanks. At about 0800, he requests artillery fire. At
approximately 0816, the U.S. Army fires its first ar-
tillery salvo of the war. Initially, Gun 2 launches two
shells, and follows with a string of fire from the adjoin-
ing pieces. The shells arc toward the enemy armor,
which is closing from 4,000 yards, but within two
thousand yards of the vulnerable infantry. While the
howitzers search for more precise fire, the observer, by
use of his phone, helps stabilize their accuracy by fix-
ing the range. An avalanche of shells pounds the ap-
proaching tanks, but to the amazement of the onlook-
ing U.S. infantry, the tanks continue to advance,
unharmed by the storm of artillery fire. The howitzers
maintain their fire, but the tanks continue to advance
unharmed. The infantry become temporarily mesmer-
ized while they watch shells that strike tanks and seem
unable to even dent the paint.
July 5, 1950
It is a startling revelation to the stunned Americans,
who believed they could easily overmatch the advanc-
ing enemy. Some expected to be back in Japan to attend
an upcoming weekend regimental party. Now, these
seemingly invincible tanks encroach the infantry-held
ridges. Many other tanks trail the vanguard. It becomes
increasingly apparent that the lack of antitank mines
means that Task Force Smith faces imminent disaster.
Meanwhile, the menacing armor roll forward, unim-
peded by obstacles and U.S. presence.
The eight tanks advance in challenging fashion. In
single file, the armor drives directly down the road clos-
ing toward a range of 700 yards. Meanwhile, Colonel
Smith has prudently ordered his recoilless rifle teams to
resist firing until the tanks breach the 700-yard mark.
Suddenly, in unison, the two 75-mm guns, deployed on
opposite sides of the highway, commence firing. The
raging storm of fire descends precisely on the column
and scores ferocious direct hits that inflict no damage.
The tanks push forward and scoff at the incessant bar-
rage of incoming shells. The T-34s commence a blis-
tering enfilade. Menacing 85-mm cannon and 7.62-
mm machine gun shells lambaste the saddle of the
ridge. The violent bombardment squeezes the positions
of the infantry and rips the ground asunder with a myr-
iad of relentless fire. The attack implants instant ap-
prehension in their hearts. The odds against the men of
U.S. Task Force Smith increase greatly as their posi-
tions become more perilous. Some might consider them
a modern modified version of the men who partici-
pated in the legendary Charge of the Light Brigade.
Most certainly, they find themselves greatly outnum-
bered near a valley of death in a far-away land. But it
is the propensity of the individual G.I. to excel under
pressure that will forestall annihilation.
The first wave of muddy tanks prepares to roll
through the infantry. They stand close enough for an
American to peer down the turrets when the bazookas
spring into action. One adventurous 2nd Lieutenant,
Ollie D. Connor, waits anxiously as the point tanks
pass his personal rut along the east side of the road.
Then he bolts from his prone position and snaps off
22 consecutive rockets to strike the rear of the armor,
its most fragile location. Apparently, the shells inflict
no damage; rather they glance off the rear to the as-
tonishment of the onlookers. Unmolested, the unflap-
pable tanks resume their drive through the pass. It is
possible that some bazooka fire has scored damage, but
the tanks maintain their advance.
Within minutes, two lead tanks clear the pass and are
quickly met by fire from the howitzer, which had been
out front with the infantry and in possession of the six
rounds of HEAT ammunition. Both tanks sustain
damage, which forces them to pull off the road to per-
mit the trailing tanks to pass. Two North Koreans flee
their burning tank by jumping out with their hands in
the air. Soon after, another tanker emerges from the
inferno, but he comes out fighting. The enemy soldier
fires his burp gun toward a nearby machine gun posi-
tion and kills the unidentified assistant gunner, whom
56
history will record as the first American fighting man
to die during the Korean War. U.S. return fire kills the
three North Koreans.
In the meantime, the remaining tanks resume the
attack, but the Americans have expended their effective
HEAT ammunition, all six rounds. This assures the
galloping T-34s a free pass to Osan. In the meantime,
General Barth returns to P’yongt’aek to forewarn the re-
inforcements of the 34th Regiment that the enemy
tanks are likely to break through the first line of de-
fense and most probably will strike their positions.
While the remaining six lead tanks crash forward,
the remainder advance in intervals of four to a group,
adding the raw firepower of 24 additional tanks. It is
an awesome sight to the dug-in infantry, but surpris-
ingly, the tanks ignore the foot soldiers and plow for-
ward. The armor leaves the fate of Task Force Smith to
the approaching N.K. 4th Division. The final tank
passes the infantry at about 0900. About 20 men of
Task Force Smith have been killed or wounded. The
infantry had earlier predicted that the tanks would not
pass and gave the artillerymen the assurance: “Don’t
worry....” Now, there is little time for worry. It is time
to fight for survival, or surely Task Force Smith and
the artillerymen face annihilation.
To make the critical situation even more grave, the
first of the roving steel monsters chew up the telephone
wire that had been strung along the road to keep com-
munications open between the advance infantry and
the laid-back artillery units. This bad luck is further
compounded by the incessant, dismal cloudburst that
seriously interferes with radio transmissions. The radio
operators struggle to keep their superior officers in-
formed of the conditions on the battlefield. All radio
communication ceases at about 1100, when the satu-
rated radios completely fail.
By this time, the artillery contingents require nei-
ther radios nor phones to inform them of the location
of the enemy tanks. The turrets are nearly down their
throats. Suddenly, the clanking armor roars into action
and commences firing into suspected U.S. positions,
but the enemy misses the mark. The concealed positions
of the artillery remain unscathed. Nevertheless, if the
turrets were elephant trunks, the Americans could toss
peanuts to them.
The tanks continue to press forward. Artillery shells
pound the approaching armor, again to no avail, ex-
cept that the fire extracts wariness from the enemy.
They surge forward but with a touch of caution. Upon
reaching a point about 500 yards from the firing bat-
tery, the tanks pause, as if to seek refuge, but then in an
instant, as if recoiled, they spring forward. Throwing the
momentary caution to the wind in an effort to evade a
direct hit, the armor, with their hatches closed and their
guns firing, run the gauntlet in record time. All the
while, the enemy has been unable to discover the exact
positions of the artillery, which gives the Americans a
slight reprieve. The tank fire still inflicts no harm.
Meanwhile, U.S. guns, bolstered by three accompany-
ing bazooka teams, commence fire. From a distance of
 57
150 to 300 yards, the gunners score repeated hits but
inflict no serious damage.
Two other bazooka teams, led by Colonel M. Perry
and Sergeant Edwin Eversole, rush to support the ar-
tillerymen as soon as they learn of the breakthrough.
Both men reach the artillery positions just before the
tanks arrive. But Perry and Eversole get snagged in a rice
paddy between the howitzers and the tanks. The lead
tank fires and severs a telephone pole, which topples
toward Eversole. He reacts in time and rolls into a
drainage ditch to barely escape death. During the skir-
mish, bazooka fire strikes the third tank in the column
and damages its tracks. Exerting little effort, the re-
maining armor passes the stalled tank and continues
the advance. The four overworked and undernourished
howitzers remain in operational condition.
Colonel Perry and an interpreter move toward the
paralyzed tank to persuade its crew to surrender, but no
response is forthcoming. Perry decides to violently evict
the tenants. He orders the howitzers to fire. Three quick
pumps from the guns and two North Koreans pop out
of the hatch and run to a culvert for cover. A squad
moves out and an exchange occurs. The two North Ko-
reans perish. Colonel Perry becomes wounded by small
arms fire during the action. Despite a leg wound, and
aware of the imminent arrival of more tanks, he refuses
evacuation and continues to command.
Shortly thereafter, the deadly parade appears. A long
chain of tanks noisily clanks down the road. Moving
turret-to-tail like a band of mechanical elephants, they
probe and penetrate deeply. No intervals appear in the
line of defiant armor as the ordeal begins to accelerate
to a more dangerous plateau. For Task Force Smith,
despite the lopsided odds, discipline has been the order
An enemy self-propelled gun after being destroyed by U.S. fire.
July 5, 1950
of the day, but the enemy’s overwhelming superiority
soon changes the tempo. The armor crashes forward
and provokes disorganization, confusion and with
some, the lack of a will to return fire. Unquestionably,
some troops run for the rear; however, most stand
firmly and fight. As the second wave of tanks comes
into range, troops are spotted aboard them. By this
point, the anxiety of the defenders dissipates and is re-
placed by a shrill fear that causes some over-stressed
artillerymen to abandon their weapons and begin to
“take off.” One of the remaining troops described these
men as “shy about helping.”
The test of leadership stands naked along a small,
charred parcel of barren earth that has already reclaimed
a few proud Americans. No bland gray monuments
mark the spot in their honor. But it can never be erased
from the minds of the men who are there, for they
surely received more than their fair share of hell in the
boondocks.
Instinctively, the officers revert to dragging the am-
munition to the guns and shoving the shells irrever-
ently into the barrels. The senior NCOs (noncommis-
sioned officers) then resume the fire in an attempt to
halt the onslaught. The new gunners hardly miss a beat
during the unexpected interruption. The sterling ex-
ample of the officers, such as Colonel Perry and Lieu-
tenant Dwain L. Scott, beams with magnetism and
soon thereafter, the men begin to return to their duty
stations. Both Perry and Scott receive the Silver Star
for their heroism and leadership.
Amazingly, the tanks are content to continue their ad-
vance and expend very little ammunition against the
artillery positions. However, the enemy fire does set
one building ablaze and it detonates a small supply
July 5, 1950
depot that contains about 300 artillery shells. The tanks
whiz by and the artillery continues to pound it with
streams of fire.
Despite the heavy barrage, only one tank sustains
damage. Its tracks are severed when it passes directly
in front of an artillery piece. Although the tanks es-
cape much harm, the troops riding on them do not fare
so well. The ring of shells that harmlessly bounce
around and off the tanks rakes the enemy infantrymen,
who brave the fire by riding on the outside of the
scrambling vehicles. Most are blown off the armor by
the sizzling cannon fire, but some remain aboard. As
the tanks scramble down the road, some still transport
dead infantrymen that are either sprawled in unnatu-
ral suspension or slung over the sides. Many others,
catapulted from the speeding armor, lie dead along the
highway. It is a shocking and gruesome sight even for
the troops of Task Force Smith.
The final tank passes through the artillery positions
at about 1015. The column closes against Osan, but it
has four fewer tanks to commit and another three T-34s
are hindered by damages. The enemy has inflicted
about twenty casualties to the U.S. infantry, and the
latest exchange has caused three artillery casualties, in-
cluding Colonel Perry. In addition, the North Koreans
have destroyed one howitzer and inflicted damage to
one other.
Back on the ridges, while the tanks rumble toward
Osan, the worst is not over. For the stunned infantry-
men that are fastened to the ridges, it is just a mysteri-
ous lull, prior to another drastic ordeal. Silence de-
scends upon the ridges soon after the final tank crashes
through their positions. In the wake of the enemy
armor, the survivors peer across the bloodied perime-
ter to see the bodies of men who only moments ago
had been their friends. The grisly scene escalates the
aura of gloom. Other than an occasional pounding of
a spade or the crackle of an ammunition-can being
checked, there is little unnecessary noise. Raindrops
break the utter silence and seemingly fall in cadence
with the racing hearts of the sentinels who prepare for
the next waves of the enemy.
Despite the momentary lull of the conspicuous
sounds of battle, the tension rings resoundingly. The
tanks, which had easily broken through the artillery,
had stunned the defenders, but the officers retained
confidence in the ability of the infantrymen in the hills
and expected them to halt the attack. Nevertheless, they
also have a new and stark understanding of the enemy
they face. Before embarkation from Japan, the message
conveyed to Task Force Smith was that they would be
participating in a police action. Now they are praying
that they have enough police.
The first signal of the imminence of more combat
appears about one hour after the encounter with the
tanks, when Colonel Smith discovers another huge
flurry of motion occurring just outside of Suwon. The
soggy Suwon-Osan Road begins to swell with large
amounts of troops and vehicles that are heading south.
Task Force Smith, called “an arrogant display of
58
strength” by General MacArthur, was intended to dis-
play American resolve and deter further aggression by
the North Koreans. The task force had accepted the re-
sponsibility honorably, and up to now it had been able
to retain its confidence. But as the enemy movement
comes into clearer focus, it becomes evident that the
positions are untenable. Smith’s artillery is of little
value. Most of the guns lack proper ammunition. And
there is no available air support.
The enemy column is spearheaded by three tanks.
The file flows like boiling lava and moves in an irreg-
ular uninterrupted line. The massive convoy is com-
posed of countless trucks and an incalculable number
of troops who march with indifference to a saturating
rain. Colonel Smith ponders the awesome sight and
prepares to react. The colossal column takes about one
hour to close within 1,000 yards of Smith’s defenses. He
estimates it to be six miles long. Undeterred by the
overwhelming odds, Task Force Smith digs in at the
pass to meet and engage the enemy.
The surviving artillery commences firing once the
column reaches a point about 1,000 yards from the
perimeter, but soon after, communications again cease,
complicating what is already a Herculean task. Initially,
the tanks advance unmolested, but soon encounter
heavy opposition. Mortars and machine guns plaster
the iron monsters and score much higher success rates
than the previous encounter against with the first wave
of tanks. Direct hits strike the lead trucks and ignite tu-
multuous explosions. The gunners then increase their
rate of fire and yet more trucks are set afire; still, the
tanks press forward.
Meanwhile, the truckers flee from their splattered
vehicles and dive for the trenches. Farther back, other
troops jump from their unharmed vehicles and spread
out. Some scurry from their trucks to less hazardous
positions and await orders to attack. Other enemy in-
fantrymen advance toward the finger ridge. They de-
ploy in concert with some contingents that maneuver
to execute a double envelopment, designed to trap and
annihilate the isolated Americans. Meanwhile, the U.S.
maintains a solid wall of fire that forbids frontal ad-
vance. Temporarily, the North Koreans project no de-
sire to strike the nimble flanks.
By 1230, heavy numbers of enemy troops control a
hill on the west side of the highway, which provides
them with a tremendous advantage over a Company B,
platoon, deployed on a nearby knob. The endangered
unit is quickly ordered to withdraw to the east side of
the highway. A feverish exchange of fire erupts as the
Americans attempt to hold the fragile line. Task Force
Smith also must contend with overpowering enemy
forces that dominate the hills above its right flank. In
the midst of this marathon of death, while enemy ma-
chine guns on the right flank pummel the perimeter, the
task force attempts to distribute additional ammuni-
tion among the troops. During this vicious exchange,
communication between the artillery and infantry re-
mains inoperable. Adding to the dire circumstances,
weather becomes nastier. The elements eradicate any
 59
possibility of potent air strikes. Rapidly, the situation
deteriorates further and few options remain.
The enemy closes the noose tightly. Contingents
drive against both flanks in synchronization with an-
other powerful force that hammers against the rear door
of the beleaguered Americans. By 1430, Colonel Smith
orders a disciplined withdrawal that is destined to be ex-
tremely risky. The troops pull back in “leap-frog” mo-
tion. This is a difficult procedure under normal battle
conditions, but Task Force Smith is saddled with an
extraordinary amount of disadvantages, including a rap-
idly depleting ammunition supply that nears total ex-
haustion. Because of severed communications, Colo-
nel Perry and the artillery units remain stranded about
one mile to the rear. The choices are few: retreat or die.
Still, they must move back without becoming reac-
quainted with the enemy tanks that also lurk in the
rear.
The task force withdraws, reluctantly leaving its dead
and some wounded behind. Between twenty-five to
thirty severely wounded troops are left at the ridge to
the compassion of the new and yet unknown enemy.
Those with lesser wounds retire with the various units,
but along the dogged retreat, intense enemy fire causes
separations. Consequently more wounded fall behind,
unable to complete the horrid trip. During the harsh re-
treat, the survivors are forced to abandon the recoilless
rifles, mortars and machine guns. Along the routes of
escape, the enemy pours tenacious fire into the ranks.
At times, quarters are so close that machine gun and
burp gun fire strike them from point-blank range.
Initially, when orders to retreat spread through the
ranks, one platoon of Company B does receive the word
to fall back. Company C leads, trailed by the medics and
battalion headquarters. Company B provides cover fire
for the pull-back and it is the last to evacuate the hills.
In concert with B Company’s withdrawal, Colonel
Smith darts through the rice paddies and heads west to
hook up with Perry and inform him of the withdrawal.
Once Smith encounters Perry, the artillerymen
quickly initiate their retreat, but before they move back,
the troops disarm the five remaining operable how-
itzers and carry the breech locks and aiming circles with
them. After a harrowing march though unfamiliar ter-
rain, the artillerymen reach the fringes of Osan with-
out incident. Surprisingly, the trucks remain in place,
exactly where they had been parked. The vehicles have
sustained several machine gun bullet holes, but they
are operable. Without hesitation, the convoy moves to-
ward Ansong by way of an alternate route that shadows
the southern tip of Osan. The contingent expects this
route to be free of enemy armor. The convoy barely es-
capes disaster when it nears a suspicious bend in the
road. The lead jeep, transporting Colonels Smith and
Perry, wisely takes the curve cautiously. To their amaze-
ment, three enemy tanks have paused in their path.
The crews of the tanks are relaxed during an apparent
cigarette break. Had the tankers been non-smokers, it
might have been quite hazardous to the health of the tat-
tered survivors.
July 5, 1950
The bad omen of more enemy tanks prompts quick
reflexes and pulsating hearts. The truck drivers make an
instant U-turn and head toward the northern portion
of Osan to search for a less volatile route. The small
but conspicuous convoy still proudly bears U.S. in-
signias as it rolls along the northern edge of town and
swerves onto a dirt path that leads east, on a gamble
that it will feed into a road to Ansong. Along the cir-
cuitous route, the convoy spots some ragged infantry
stragglers and hoists them aboard. About 100 troops
hitch a ride and happily enter Ansong after sunset.
There have been fiercer battles, bigger wars and more
gruesome casualties throughout the history of the U.S.
Army than the battle fought on this day by a relatively
small band of men. But these warriors exhibited great
valor and courage against an overwhelming enemy
force.
On the following morning ( July 6), Colonel Smith
and his survivors move to Ch’onan. After an accurate
count, it is determined that his contingent now
amounts to only 185 men. Soon after, Company C ar-
rives. Captain Dashmer accounts for 65 men in his
party. Other survivors filter back to safety at Ch’onan,
Taejon and P’yongt’aek during the next few days. It is
later determined that the 1st Battalion, 21st Infantry
Regiment losses (missing) amount to five officers and
148 enlisted men, including 65 men in Company B,
which sustains the highest casualties, and 34 troops of
C Company. The artillery contingent’s losses as of July
7 are 26 enlisted men and five officers. The North Ko-
rean 4th Division losses are placed at 42 killed and
about 85 wounded, including some slight casualties at
P’yongt’aek on the 6th.
More American reinforcements are en route to
Korea, but a dilemma remains. The first blow-out had
been lopsided and the Americans paid an expensive
price for the hours it bought. The aftermath of the bat-
tle proves the efficiency of the enemy and the deficien-
cies of the weaponry of the Americans, who nearly be-
came cannon fodder. In contrast, the North Koreans
are well-trained and better equipped than the Ameri-
cans. In Japan, the U.S. 24th Division has 17 obsolete
M-24 tanks, but only twelve are operational. Also, the
medium Pershing tank is capable of equalizing the
Russian-made tanks, but the 92 Pershings are in Japan,
held in storage and supposedly not serviceable. The
Eighth Army Ordnance section jumps into action and
saves the endangered Pershings from the scrap heap by
putting them in usable condition in a Herculean salvage
operation.
The immediate challenge for the U.S. is to reverse its
ongoing dismemberment of the U.S. military, and to
move rapidly to properly equip and support the troops
that must follow Task Force Smith’s beleaguered sur-
vivors.
Many of the men of Task Force Smith who had been
captured during the first day of combat had been im-
mediately executed. Subsequently, North Korean Lieu-
tenant Pak Huyunk (later brigadier general) describes,
without remorse, a segment of the barbaric activity:
July 5, 1950
“When we charged the Americans they were too fright-
ened to resist. They threw down their guns, held up
their hands and begged for mercy. We didn’t shoot
those who were begging for their lives, but we ruth-
lessly shot those who were resisting. After the battle we
rested and had a meal. Dead Americans were lying all
over the place with their mouths open. There was a
man in our Ninth Squad, a real joker, who said ‘look
the Americans are still hungry, even though they are
dead. Here have some earth.’ He then shoved a hand-
ful of dirt into each mouth. Everyone was amused.”
One can only wonder how many of the “hungry dead”
were the wounded who couldn’t finish the journey.
In other activity, Colonel Lovless, commanding of-
ficer, 34th Regiment, meets with General Dean in Tae-
jon. Dean suggests that Lovless deploy his 3rd Battal-
ion (commanded by Colonel David H. Smith) at
Ansong, about 12 miles east of P’yongt’aek, if it is fea-
sible. Dean also instructs Lovless to establish regimen-
tal headquarters at Songhwan-ni, about six miles south
of P’yongt’aek. Lovless becomes disturbed by what he
considers a dangerous and unnecessary division of his
command. He requests permission to commit his reg-
iment as one solid unit. Nevertheless, Lovless loses the
spirited debate with General Dean, and both requests
are carried out. Headquarters is established this day.
Ansong and P’yongt’aek, separated by about eleven
miles, are vital positions along the two main highways,
which head south between the Yellow Sea and the West
Central Mountains. These towns must be held to ensure
that the western sector of Korea is not easily overrun, but
Lovless encounters additional problems. The regiment’s
radios are unable to communicate from point to point.
The 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment (commanded by Col-
onel Ayres), is without battle experience and it lacks
tanks. Artillery and antitank weaponry are too few in
number and too ill-equipped to realistically deter a
strong advance for a prolonged period of time. The 1st
Battalion, nonetheless, deploys at P’yongt’aek, slightly
south of TF Smith at Osan. However, there are no com-
munications between Ayres’ command and that of Col-
onel Brad Smith (TF Smith). Subsequently, Colonel
Ayres, in an interview with Lacy Barnett, states that
General Dean had suggested that he “go as far north as
possible, preferably to P’yongt’aek.” Ayres further states
that “General Dean did not inform him that the P’y-
ongt’aek position was an important one to hold.” Col-
onel Ayres then relates that “as far as he was concerned
on 5 and 6 July, Asan Bay was a tourist attraction.” Dean
had spoken to Ayres in Taejon, prior to the arrival of
Lovless. Also, the recently arrived 63rd FABn, com-
manded by Colonel Robert Dawson, is under orders to
head north to bolster the 34th Regiment, but it encoun-
ters difficulty while unloading equipment. The project
becomes delayed and in addition, there is no transporta-
tion immediately available. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battal-
ion, 21st Regiment, and the regimental commander,
Colonel Richard W. Stephens, remain in Pusan in search
of northbound transportation.
In other activity, General Barth returns to P’y-
60
ongt’aek and anticipates reinforcements from the 34th
Regiment. Upon his arrival, Barth locates Colonel
Ayres, recently appointed commanding officer, 1st Bat-
talion, 34th Regiment. After conferring with Ayres,
Barth requests that bazooka squads be sent north to in-
tercept the advancing tanks. Shortly thereafter, a de-
tachment (I and R Platoon) led by Lieutenant Charles
Payne and an infantry contingent led by Lieutenant
William Caldwell III hustle north. The contingent
sights tank tracks near Sojong. Not long after, a horse-
riding South Korean trooper pulls alongside and warns
the Americans about approaching tanks. He suggests
that they withdraw, but the convoy intends to inter-
cept, rather than evade, the enemy.
It moves north cautiously and after advancing about
one mile, the tank is located. It is halted near the rail-
road tracks outside of Sojong-ni, which is about five
miles south of Osan. At 1600, a bellicose encounter
erupts when the GIs open fire, but inflict no damage to
the tank. Enemy machine gun fire pounds the Amer-
icans and kills Private Kenneth Shadrick. The positions
soon become untenable and the bazooka teams retreat,
but they bring Shadrick’s body out with them.
Upon the group’s return to P’yongt’aek, the distress-
ing news is reported to both Colonel Harold Ayres and
General Barth. After sunset, General Dean arrives at
P’yongt’aek and he, too, is briefed, but there is still no
information on Task Force Smith’s fate. Dean returns
to Taejon possessing no obvious solution with which to
halt the attack. And, similarly to those at Osan, no air
cover is available. Subsequent to Dean’s departure, sev-
eral of Smith’s survivors stumble into P’yongt’aek. The
stories are so overstated that it appears as if Task Force
Smith has been annihilated. Colonel Perry arrives early
on the 6th, and he provides more accurate informa-
tion. Nonetheless, preparations are made to withdraw
from P’yongt’aek. Actually, Colonel Smith had arrived
safely at Ansong and then he had stopped at Colonel
Lovless’ command post at Songhwan, prior to depart-
ing for Chonan, but General Dean never checks with
Colonel Lovless.
Meanwhile, the 1st North Korean Division contin-
ues to trail the N.K. 2nd Division south toward Um-
song. At Ichon, situated south of Seoul and west of the
Han River, an enemy regiment (2nd N.K. Division)
engages South Korean troops and hits unexpected stiff
resistance. The North Korean unit sustains heavy casu-
alties and becomes isolated. Nearby, to the northwest
along the Yongin Road, another enemy regiment sus-
tains high casualties after it encounters rigid resistance
by South Korean forces. Following these difficult ac-
tions, the N.K. 1st Division swivels southeast and heads
toward Ch’ungju. The N.K. 2nd Division continues
to press south toward Ch’unch’on and Ch’onju. The
2nd N.K. Division pays heavily during this advance. It
is to join the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions for a proba-
ble massive attack against Taejon.
Meanwhile, in the central mountainous area, the
N.K. 7th Division, re-designated the N.K. 12th Divi-
sion, seizes Wonju. Following its capture, the division
 61 July 5, 1950

Top: A U.S. Army soldier operates a switchboard in the field. Bottom: At Pusan, a touch of innocence in
a war-torn nation. This group of South Korean Boy Scouts had their picture taken by a U.S. Navy pho-
tographer who paused with the boys while en route to the front.
July 6, 1950
divides its force, dispatching some contingents south
toward Ch’ungju and others southeast toward
Chech’on. In reaction, the weary S.K. 6th Division
maintains its delaying tactics, and attempts to forestall
the loss of the Ch’ungju corridor. The S.K. 8th Divi-
sion is en route from the east coast to form a perime-
ter line in the Tanyang corridor. By the 12th, despite
the vigorous attempts to hold, both Chech’on and
Ch’ungju are seized by the surging N.K. 12th Divi-
sion, which then tightens its grip around Tanyang.
Also, the Far East Air Forces Joint Operations Center
transfers from Japan to Taejon. Circumstances compel
the center to relocate to Taegu on July 14.
In Naval activity, The U.S. navy establishes Service
Squadron 3, to become the primary logistics unit of
the 7th Fleet effective 7 July. Also, the U.S. Navy ini-
tiates President Truman’s directive to establish a block-
ade of the Korean coasts.
In Marine activity, Fleet Marine Force Pacific at
Hawaii directs the 1st Marine Division to establish the
1st Provisional Marine Brigade. The brigade is formed
by Marines from the East and West Coasts.
— In the United States: The 1st Marine Aircraft
Wing, commanded by Brigadier General Thomas J.
Cushman, is formed at El Toro, California. It will bol-
ster the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade.
— In Okinawa: The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th
Regiment, receive word to prepare to ship out to Korea;
neither unit is trained for battle, but they are informed
that training will be provided upon arrival in Japan.
Both battalions embark for Japan on July 21.
July 6 The North Korean Army continues to ad-
vance. General Barth departs P’yongt’aek at 0130. He
reaches Songhwan-ni about six miles farther south
about 0230. Once there, Barth instructs Colonel Ayres
to hold until the positions become untenable. The 1st
Battalion, 34th Regiment, blows the bridge just north
of P’yongt’aek at 0300. Prior to dawn, General Barth
moves to Ch’onan. He locates reinforcements from
Headquarters Company, 1st Battalion, 21st Infantry,
and contingents of Companies A and D, which had not
embarked on 1 July with Task Force Smith. Immedi-
ately, Barth deploys the contingents defensively about
two miles south of Ch’onan. Soon after, Barth moves
to Songhwan-ni to inspect the defenses there.
Meanwhile, back at the river, a saturating rain inter-
twined with a miserable fog taunts the troops as day-
light arrives. The men of the 1st Battalion squat in their
waterlogged foxholes, and they attempt to consume
their cold, bland C-rations while they await the immi-
nent arrival of the enemy. Shortly thereafter, an un-
usual gurgling noise is heard. A quick glance across the
river causes instant deliberation as the silhouette of
tanks and some enemy infantry comes into view as they
encroach the battered bridge. Some troops become pre-
maturely heartened, convinced that remnants of Task
Force Smith are approaching; however, others vividly
recall that the Americans had no tanks.
The speculation ends. Thirteen tanks, followed by in-
62
fantry, prepare to bolt the river. A brisk exchange of
fire erupts. One enemy truck is destroyed, but the
bazooka fire is inadequate. Captain Osburn receives
orders from Colonel Ayres to withdraw Company A
from the western side of the road. Osburn is directed
to retain one platoon to the rear to afford cover fire
during the pull-back. Soon after, Company B is or-
dered to abandon the east side of the highway. In the
meantime, enemy infantry begins fording the river as
it moves to envelop the Americans. Making matters
worse, enemy fire had previously knocked out the mor-
tar observer. Having no guidance, the mortars are in-
effective.
Back at Songhwan-ni, where Colonel Smith and
about 86 men had already passed through, General Barth
arrives to confer with Colonel Lovless. Barth informs
Ayres of the orders from Dean, instructing Barth to give
orders to the regiment. Lovless is not especially over-
joyed with the situation. Barth discusses the deployment
of the 1st Battalion and then he directs Colonel Ayres
to regroup the regiment near Ch’onan. In addition, Barth
instructs Ayres to direct his 3rd Battalion (minus L Com-
pany) to abandon Ansong and move to Ch’onan. Com-
pany L (regimental reserve), which is outside of P’y-
ongt’aek, is ordered to provide rear cover fire for the 1st
Battalion while it pulls out of its river positions.
The orders are not carried out; Company L moves di-
rectly to Ch’onan. Due to the distance between An-
song, P’yongt’aek and Songhwan-ni, there is no radio
communication. The radios cannot hold the range, and
the land wires, which had been laid between the latter
two towns, have been ripped out and cut by retreating
South Korean civilians and troops who use the wire to
fasten their packs. Messages between P’yongt’aek,
Songhwan-ni and Ansong are transferred by messengers,
but these runners are outdistanced by the emerging
events, and they arrive at their destinations with out-
dated news.
The embattled 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, is
forced to begin its retreat before noon. The first contin-
gents to depart the river positions arrive at Ch’onan dur-
ing the afternoon. The remaining units of the battalion
pull into Ch’onan during the evening and deploy defen-
sively, near the newly arrived contingents of the 21st
Regiment. Much equipment and clothing is abandoned
along the route and left for the North Koreans. Near
Ch’onan and Osan, the South Koreans’ situation is sim-
ilar. The ROKs are crammed aboard southbound trains.
At Taejon, General Dean is consistently updated by
telephone on the unraveling sequence of events at P’y-
ongt’aek. Dean arrives at Ch’onan after dark. He con-
venes a heated meeting with Colonel Lovless and other
officers to determine who authorized a withdrawal. Col-
onel Ayres, without referring to his orders from General
Barth (who stands by in stony silence), takes responsi-
bility. An infuriated Dean considers his option of send-
ing the regiment back, then countermands himself, due
to the threat of a night ambush. However, Dean orders
the 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, to move a company
north at daybreak.
 63
— In Air Force activity, B-29s launch the initial
strategic air attacks of the war when 9 bombers attack
the Rising Sun oil refinery at Wonsan and another tar-
get, a chemical plant at Hungnam. Meanwhile, other
planes (B-26s) pound advancing enemy columns.
After-action reports indicate the destruction of 6 to 10
tanks by the B-26s.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
instruct General MacArthur to provide his estimate of
the necessary amount of personnel needed to sweep the
North Korean troops out of South Korea. On the fol-
lowing day, MacArthur responds, stating that between
four to four and one-half complete infantry divisions,
one regimental combat team composed of airborne
troops, and three tank battalions bolstered by support
artillery would be required. Additionally, MacArthur
claims he will require 40,000 reinforcements to exe-
cute the operation without placing Japan in peril.
In other activity, Major General Hobart R. Gay is in-
formed by MacArthur that his 1st Cavalry Division is
to be the battering ram that will storm Inchon. The
cavalry landing is expected to trap the enemy between
it and the Eighth Army and ROK troops. But much of
the initial information on the progress of the ROK
Army has been erroneous and highly exaggerated. And
the battle-readiness of Eighth Army is terribly poor,
making the situation graver than anticipated. In con-
junction, the U.S. has been totally surprised by the
skillfulness of the advancing North Korean People’s
Army. Additionally, large numbers of the 1st Cavalry’s
proficient noncoms (about 750) have been pulled from
its ranks to round out the anemic 24th and 25th Di-
visions. Ultimately, this meeting between MacArthur
and General Gay becomes irrelevant. The bad condi-
tions in Korea continue to deteriorate, which mandates
that the 1st Cavalry must be committed to Pusan to
prop up the perimeter.
— In Japan: By today, it becomes common knowl-
edge that General MacArthur intends to deploy the
U.S. Eighth Army in Korea, with General Walker as-
suming operational control of the campaign. In con-
junction, General Walker calls Colonel William Collier
in Kobe, and requests that he come to Yokohama on
the following day to discuss the crisis in Korea.
July 7 General Walton Walker arrives from Japan
to confer with General Dean. General Barth departs
Ch’onan for Taejon.
In other activity, at 0810, Company L, 34th Regi-
ment, moves north from deserted Ch’onan to intercept
the advancing North Korean 4th Division. General
Dean also orders a battalion to head north. At about
1030, the 3rd Battalion moves north to bolster Com-
pany L. General Dean’s order: “To CO 34th Inf. Move
one Bn. fwd with minimum transportation. Gain con-
tact and be prepared to fight delaying action back to re-
cent position. PD air reports no enemy armor south of
river.” As the 3rd Battalion advances, a steady flood of
civilians is moving south. Some are walking and oth-
ers are on horseback. Colonel Lovless notices heavy
July 7, 1950
military movement in the hills to the west. Lovless, who
inquires of his interpreter whether they are North or
South Koreans, is told that they are South Koreans on
the run. At about 1300, while the intelligence and re-
connaissance platoon is at the point, the enemy is spot-
ted in the heights, but they vanish from sight. The ad-
vance continues, but with caution, because sporadically,
the enemy reappears. Along the route, an artillery offi-
cer informs Colonel Lovless and an accompanying of-
ficer, Colonel Robert Martin, that he has only one gun.
It is deployed about three miles from Ch’onan, from
where it can shell the area to the front of Company L.
In the meantime, about five miles north of Ch’onan,
with the small force more or less sucked in, a moder-
ate dose of enemy small-arms fire and mortars strike
positions near the point platoon, barring advance.
Within a short while (1600), a liaison plane arrives
overhead to bring the contingent up to date and make
the earlier intelligence obsolete. The plane drops this
message: “To CO 34th Infantry, 1600 7 July. Proceed
with greatest caution. Large number of troops on your
east and west flanks. Near Ansong, lots of tanks
(40–50) and trucks. Myang-Myon large concentration
of troops. Songhwan-ni large concentration of troops
trying to flank your unit; signed Dean.”
The alarming, but not totally unexpected, news
prompts Colonels Lovless and Martin to head for the
1st Battalion’s Command Post to inform Colonel Ayres.
At the CP, they encounter General Church and Gen-
eral Pearson Menoher (assistant division commander,
24th Division). Church delivers an order from Dean
to Lovless, which relieves him of command and in-
structs him to turn his 34th Regiment over to Colonel
Martin. The change of command occurs at 1800. Gen-
eral Dean had previously requested that Colonel Mar-
tin, an old and trusted friend, be transferred to his com-
mand. Dean and Martin served together with the 44th
Division during World War II. In turn, Colonel Lov-
less had been in command of the 34th for a very short
period of time and the unit, not known for being a
crack outfit, had not turned around soon enough to
suit the high command.
In the meantime, Major Dunn arrives at the Com-
mand Post and informs Colonel Lovless that Lt. Col-
onel David Smith’s 1st Battalion is pulling back from
its excellent defensive positions. Lovless quickly ex-
plains that he has been relieved and tells Dunn to speak
with Colonel Martin. Dunn is ordered by Martin to
return and restore order within the 3rd Battalion.
Meanwhile, the ground troops are becoming more
endangered. Major Dunn (34th Infantry S-3) moves
from 1st Battalion command post to the forward posi-
tions of the 3rd Battalion. He arrives in time to observe
the unit digging in defensively north of Ch’onan. While
in conversation with Lt. Colonel David H. Smith, 1st
Battalion Commander, the I and R platoon leader
drives up in a dilapidated jeep. As he jumps from the
vehicle, the bullet holes in his clothing and canteen tell
the story before he can open his mouth. His platoon had
been ambushed by a force of 40 enemy troops at a tiny
July 7, 1950 64

U.S. artillery (camouflaged 105-mm howitzer M2A1) deployed near Ch’onan on 7 July.

village about one mile from headquarters. Three men
had been left behind.
Major Dunn takes a rifle company detachment to
rescue the isolated troops, but soon after, Major Boone
Seegars (Battalion S-3) arrives from the vicinity of the
ambush. He informs Dunn that the men have been re-
united. Major Dunn aborts the rescue attempt and or-
ders a defensive posture.
Enemy fire from the west bank commences against
Dunn’s unit. The Americans return fire, but the enemy
is too distant. In a flash, the situation deteriorates.
While Dunn attempts to calm the nearby troops,
friendly fire strikes near their positions and causes pan-
demonium. Dunn reacts to quell the fire, but when he
reaches the 3rd Battalion positions, the men are aban-
doning their designated areas. Dunn is placed in com-

Opposite top: A camouflaged U.S. Army truck at Ch’onan on 7 July. A .50-caliber M2 HB Browning
machine gun is mounted on the vehicle, but barely visible due to the rice straw. Opposite bottom: A closer
view of the two soldiers manning the Browning machine gun (M2 HB) atop the camouflaged truck at
Ch’onan on 7 July.
65 July 7, 1950
July 7, 1950 66

mand and he pushes the men northward. Two jeeps enemy force of about 40 men was alone. The main
transporting Majors Dunn and Seegars and two com- body had been about two hours outside the village.
pany commanders push forward. At a point about one The 3rd Battalion, in its haste to retreat, also abandons
mile from where Dunn wants the 3rd Battalion to re- equipment, including mortars. Upon arrival at Ch’onan
occupy the terrain, the North Koreans spring anotherthe unit is badly disorganized. Colonel Martin takes a
ambush. Point-blank range fire pounds the vehicles. headquarters company north to reclaim the lost equip-
Dunn and Seegars both are seriously wounded. One ment, while Lt. Colonel David H. Smith, positioned
unarmed officer runs to the rear as he explains he is
south of Ch’onan, is directed to move into Ch’onan
going for help. and defend it.
Meanwhile, an artery in Dunn’s head bleeds The redeployment of the disoriented 3rd Battalion at
profusely. Major Seegars succumbs during the night; Ch’onan is complete by about 1700, with contingents
his body is recovered sometime in November. stretched along the railroad tracks west of town and
At the first sounds of fire, the trailing rifle company
others dispersed along the northern fringes of Ch’o-
hits the ground and returns fire; however, the unit nan. The first encounter with the Communists occurs
makes no attempt to rescue the wounded, nor is an ad-
on the western side of town during the first part of eve-
vance ordered by any officers on scene. Moments later,
ning. Shortly thereafter, a column of tanks and infantry
an officer repeatedly yells “fall back,” leaving the men
approaches the eastern defenses. The latter is met by
in the two advance jeeps to an unknown fate. The 3rdfire from a contingent of the 63rd Field Artillery Bat-
Battalion’s withdrawal in the face of combat against a
talion, which had recently been deployed south of
much lesser force and its abandonment of wounded Ch’onan to bolster the 34th Regiment. Two tanks are
men on the field is subsequently described by Major reported destroyed by the combination of white phos-
Dunn, who remains a prisoner of war for 38 months, phorous and HE ammunition. Still, this contingent
as “nauseating.” In addition, Dunn notes that the penetrates the town before midnight, and entraps about
80 men, including Colonel Martin. The
fighting dangerously depletes the U.S. am-
munition. Word reaches General Dean about
the critical lack of supplies and of the precar-
ious situation of Martin and the other iso-
lated men. Skirmishing continues through-
out the night as the N.K. 16th and 18th
Regiments, supported by tanks of the 105th
Armored Division, increase the pressure.
Before noon on this day, a train transport-
ing Colonel Stephens and elements of his
21st Regiment arrives in Taejon. Within one
hour, the unit heads north to Choch’iwon
to bolster the 34th Regiment and to keep the
supply route clear.
Meanwhile, discipline at Choch’iwon is
loose. The supplies for the various units have
become mixed up and another problem has
emerged. Guards must ride the locomotives
because many South Korean engineers are
frightened. At the slightest hint of trouble
the engineers attempt to move south with
the trains and supplies they have yet to un-
load. Colonel Stephens deploys the 3rd Bat-
talion, 21st Regiment, six miles north of
Choch’iwon. Another contingent, composed
of Companies A and D, 1st Battalion, re-
turns from Chonan and deploys about one
mile farther north at Chonui, along a ridge
just east of town. These positions are about
three miles below the fork where the Kongju
Road splits from the principal highway and
about twelve miles from Ch’onan.
— In the United States: The 1st Provi-
sional Marine Brigade, commanded by
A U.S. soldier checks the fuse on a mine in the vicinity of Brigadier General Edward A. Craig, is
Ch’onan. activated at Camp Pendleton; the unit is
 67 July 7, 1950

Top: U.S. troops prepare powder charges in vicinity of Ch’onan. Bottom: U.S. troops load ammunition
into a 105-mm howitzer in vicinity of Ch’onan.

composed of the 5th Marines, the 1st Battalion, 11th
Marines and Marine Aircraft Group 33 (MAG-33).
The latter includes three squadrons and is commanded
by Brigadier General Thomas H. Cushman. The
brigade begins boarding the warships on the 12th. On
the 14th, the convoy sails for Korea. The three
squadrons of MAG 33 are: VMF-214, 29 officers, 157
enlisted men and 24 F4U4B planes; VMF-323, 29 of-
ficers, 157 enlisted men and 24 F4U4B planes; and
VMF(N)-513, 15 officers, 98 enlisted men and 12
July 8, 1950
F4U5N planes. The helicopter contingent, VMO-6,
commanded by Major Vincent Gottschalk, will be
composed of 15 officers, 63 enlisted men, eight light
observation planes and four HO3S-1 Sikorsky 2-place
helicopters. Seven pilots, 30 enlisted men and the four
Sikorsky helicopters will be detached from HMX-1
(Quantico) on July 8, from where they will proceed to
El Toro, California, to join the brigade.
Also, Company A, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, is ac-
tivated for service with the 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade. The unit, acutely familiar with the M4A3
medium tank, equipped with the 75-mm gun or a 105-
mm howitzer, will be supplied with Pershing M-26
tanks, which are equipped with 90-mm guns. The
tankers receive scant time to acquaint themselves with
the Pershings. Captain Gearl M. English, the com-
manding officer, finagles in order to get his Marines
one day of practice in the field. Each gunner and loader
is restricted to a meager two rounds. The tanks’ 90-
mm guns are then silenced until the tanks engage the
enemy in Korea. Support battalions of the brigade are
also scaled down. Company A, 1st Motor Transport
Battalion, is composed of six officers and 107 enlisted
men. Company A, 1st Engineer Battalion (reinforced),
is composed of eight officers and 209 enlisted men.
— In the United Nations Security Council:
The United Nations Security Council passes its third
resolution concerning Communist aggression in the
Republic of Korea, recommending that “all members
providing military forces and other assistance make
such forces ... available to a unified command ... and re-
quests the United States to designate the commander of
such forces.” The resolution also directs the unified
command to fly the United Nations flag “concurrently
with the flags of the various nations participating.”
President Truman desires a requisite for victory and by
the following day, his choice of commander is given to
the United Nations.
— In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd, USMC,
and his G-3, Colonel Victor H. Krulak, subsequent to
the activation of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade,
depart Hawaii by air for Japan.
— In Japan: General MacArthur orders General
Dean (in Korea) to provide protection for the 35th
Fighter Group, USAF, commanded by Colonel Robert
Witty at Yonil, where an airbase is being established.
MacArthur is aware that the N.K. 5th Division is mov-
ing down the coast road toward Pohang-dong, five
miles north of Yonil. Dean dispatches the 3rd Battal-
ion, 19th Regiment, from Taegu and some additional
force from other locations to fill the gap.
In other activity, Lt. Gen. Walton H. Walker directs
Colonel William Collier to proceed to Korea as soon as
possible and establish Eighth Army headquarters there.
Walker explains that he is flying to Korea on this day,
but he will return on the 8th. Also, General MacArthur
is diligently formulating plans to ensure that the Com-
munists are unable to cause disruptions in Japan. With
the encouragement of MacArthur, the Japanese gov-
ernment decreases the activities of the Communists,
68
which diminishes the possibility of massive disruptions
within the country. The Japanese, who favor the ac-
tions of the U.S. and the U.N. against the North Ko-
reans, contribute much unheralded support.
July 8 Colonel Collier arrives by plane at Ashiya
Airbase in Pusan. Then, after a short flight to Taejon,
he locates General Dean near the front lines. After some
discussion, Taejon is ruled out as a location for Eighth
Army Headquarters. Collier, familiar with Korea, se-
lects less crowded Taegu.
At Taejon, General Dean receives word at about
0220 that Colonel Martin has escaped from Ch’onan,
raising his spirits; however, sometime before daybreak,
Martin returns to the besieged town. During the on-
going fighting, the supply line had been reopened. One
ammunition truck moves back to the village and spots
a column of about five tanks and some infantry driv-
ing from the northwest, along a previously mined dirt
road. The enemy passes without incident. Enemy pen-
etration occurs about 0600 and intense exchanges of fire
erupt. One man, Private Leotis Heater, lobs five
grenades at a tank, setting it ablaze. During the vicious
fighting, two rifle companies become isolated. Colo-
nel Martin continues to rally his men. He comman-
deers a bazooka. Assisted by Sergeant Jerry Christen-
son, he prepares to blast an approaching tank, but it
swirls its turret toward the bazooka team. The oppos-
ing weapons fire at approximately the same time and
the tank fire severs Martin’s body in half. The power of
the explosion also pops one of Christenson’s eyes from
its socket. Amazingly, he is able to replace his eye in the
socket.
Christenson, who succumbs in December 1950, be-
comes a POW with Major Dunn at P’yongyang. Col-
onel Martin’s actions under fire earn him the first Dis-
tinguished Service Cross of the conflict; however, it is
a posthumous award. An aidman in the medical collec-
tions station, Corporal (later Major) Lacy Barnett, at-
tests that there were no remains of Colonel Martin to
be returned to Graves Registration, but according to
Barnett, “Colonel Martin’s watch and billfold were re-
covered.” Also, Barnett states that Colonel Martin’s
daughter does have the “blood-soaked order signed by
General Dean, appointing him as CO, 34th Infantry on
July 7th.”
As more enemy troops and tanks enter Ch’onan, the
fate of the 3rd Battalion becomes grim. Between 0800
and 1000, the survivors depart. Later in the day it is de-
termined that 175 men escape. Many officers of regi-
mental headquarters had been unable to escape. The
ill-fated battalion loses nearly all its mortars, machine
guns and rifles prior to moving south. Before the day
is out, North Korean radio proclaims the capture of
sixty men.
The commanding officer, 3rd Battalion, Lt. Colonel
David Smith, is exhausted and is transferred out within
a couple of days on the 9th. The artillery units head
farther south, but the 1st Battalion still holds south of
Ch’onan.
 69 July 8, 1950

U.S. troops depart a hillside position in the vicinity of Ch’onan on 8 July.

In other activity, General Walker arrives in Taejon
during the morning to confer with General Dean to
find a solution and buy more time until Walker can
transfer the Eighth Army from Japan. Both Dean and
Walker, observing from a nearby hill, watch the 3rd
Battalion in action at Ch’onan.
Upon being informed of Colonel Martin’s death,
General Dean places Colonel Wadlington in command
of the 34th Regiment and orders him to pull back to-
ward the Kum River. In conjunction, Lt. Colonel Ayres’
1st Battalion is deployed near Ch’onan, but after con-
sulting with Generals Dean and Walker, Ayres is also
July 8, 1950
ordered to pull back toward the Kum River. The com-
plexities of the withdrawal are many. Slightly south of
Ch’onan, the road divides and later converges on Tae-
jon, making the defense of both routes mandatory. The
21st Infantry is to move along the main Choch’iwon
Road and execute a delaying action while it retires par-
allel to the rail line. The 34th Regiment is to follow
the Kongju Road due south toward the Kum River.
The 24th Regiment heads south during the late after-
noon.
Meanwhile, contingents of the North Korean 3rd
Division begin to arrive at Ch’onan to augment the
N.K. 4th Division. These enemy components deploy
east of the town. Throughout the day, Dean’s orders
emphasize the necessity of fighting delaying actions to
support the withdrawal. Later, he issues an operational
order that reaffirms his earlier demands: “Hold Kum
River Line at all costs. Maximum repeat maximum
delay will be effected.” One battery of 155-mm how-
itzers (11th Field Artillery Bn.) and a contingent of M-
24 light tanks (78th Heavy Tank Battalion) advance to
Choch’iwon to support the 21st Regiment.
Also, the 3rd Engineering Combat Battalion bolsters
the 34th Regiment. It establishes roadblocks in front of
Kongju and contingents wire the Kum River bridges
for possible demolition. The 21st gets a hefty order
from General Dean. It is directed to hold Choch’iwon
and simultaneously guard the left flank of Ch’ongju to
afford the South Korean forces time to withdraw. The
task will be difficult because no reinforcements will be
available for at least four days. The 21st and 34th Reg-
iments are directed to hold the river line until totally un-
tenable, and only then they are to cross to the south
bank of the Kum to make the final stand. The fate of
Taejon lies in the balance.
Meanwhile, the South Koreans activate Headquar-
ters I Corps at Ch’ongju. It is composed of the Capi-
tal and the 1st Divisions. KMAG documents also show
the S.K. 2nd Division operating under I Corps during
July, but other records will reveal that the 2nd Divi-
sion had been rendered unsuited for combat during the
first week of the war. During November 1950, a new
ROK 2nd Division is established. Nearly all early South
Korean records fail to survive the conflict.
In other activity, General Dean dispatches a critical
message to General MacArthur in Japan that informs
him of the inadequacy of the 2.36 rocket launchers,
which have proven to be totally ineffective against
enemy tanks. Dean’s urgent request also includes anti-
tank mines. He presses MacArthur to have these items
rushed to Korea from the States.
Central Mountain area: Below Wonju, planes de-
tect long columns of enemy armor, vehicles and in-
fantry that are driving south in an apparent effort to
expand the envelopment of ROK troops and sever the
primary north-south communication line in the Tae-
jon area.
Eastern Coastal area: The 3rd Battalion, 19th Reg-
iment, arrives at Pohang-dong from Taegu. It is to hold
the line against the N.K. 5th Division. An antiaircraft
70
unit will arrive on the following day, and heavy engi-
neering equipment is en route via LSTs to speed the
work at Yonil Airfield.
In other activity, General Kean arrives from Japan
at Taejon to meet with General Dean. Kean’s 25th Di-
vision will begin arriving in two days.
In Air Force activity, Two airmen, Lieutenant Oliver
Duerksen and Lieutenant Frank Chermak, operating in
radio-equipped jeeps and acting as forward air con-
trollers, direct the initial direct air to ground attacks
during the Korean War.
In Naval activity, Commander Michael J.L. Luosey
assumes command of the diminutive South Korean
(ROK) Navy.
— In the United States: General MacArthur is cho-
sen by President Truman to command the United Na-
tions troops in South Korea. The general’s task is to be
blocked with obstacles. Primarily, the U.S. Armed
Forces in the Far East are deeply under-strength and
untrained for such an undertaking. The U.S. has been
undergoing a continuous depletion of men and equip-
ment, and the training of troops in Japan has been poor
at best. Weaponry is also dangerously low, due to the
inauspicious practice of mass demobilization after the
war. Also, the plan to land the 1st Cavalry Division at
Inchon is canceled on this day, due to the continuing
deterioration of the situation in Korea.
Meanwhile, the Soviets have been steadily fortify-
ing their war machinery, including stockpiling all Japa-
nese equipment captured by them during their previ-
ous several-day war against a beaten Japan during
August 1945.
MacArthur faces some other critical problems. As
commander of the United Nation Forces, he is com-
pelled to report his plans and actions to the United Na-
tions. Coincidentally, the Soviet Union representative
in the U.N. receives all this information. Also, U.S.
planes are forbidden from crossing the Yalu River in
pursuit of enemy aircraft. This practice permits enemy
planes to strike U.N. positions, then retire across the
Yalu River to the sanctuary of Manchuria.
During America’s War Between the States, General
Robert E. Lee would tell his commanders to read the
northern newspapers to become informed about what
the Union forces intended to do. In this case, the North
Koreans need simply to read their copies of the United
Nations’ secret memos, smuggled to them by the Sovi-
ets. MacArthur learns this lesson quickly and elimi-
nates some of the problem.
In other activity, General MacArthur authorizes
Japan, through its prime minister, Shigeru Yoshida, to
establish a national police reserve of 75,000 men. He
also authorizes the Maritime Safety Board to increase
its force to 8,000 men. With the draining of U.S. troops
from Japan for the Korean crisis, more strength is re-
quired to safeguard the welfare of Japan against aggres-
sors from outside nations and from a potential Commu-
nist threat from within Japan.
Ambassador Sebald later notes that the Japanese
forces looked genuinely G.I. from their uniforms to
 71 July 9, 1950

their equipment. He relates his experience while visit-
ing a training camp: “Only when I saw the soldiers eat-
ing with chop sticks did I fully realize that these were
indeed, soldiers of another Japanese generation....”
Also, Far East Air Forces establishes a Provisional
Bomber Command, based at Yokota, Japan. Major Gen-
eral Emmett O’Donnell, Jr., is appointed as commander.
July 9 Effective 1300, Eighth Army Headquarters
Korea is established at Taegu. Chonan and vicinity have
been abandoned by the fatigued U.S. troops who are
pulling back toward Taejon, under heavy Communist
pressure. The enemy tanks keep rolling south. In the
midst of the chaotic fighting, the bewildered civilians
are fleeing in absolute panic, often under the guns of

U.S. Army engineers prepare to blow a bridge to slow the North Korean advance toward Taejon and Taegu.
July 9, 1950 72

Top: U.S. troops deployed with a 4.2-inch chemical mortar (M2). Bottom: South Korean troops (ROKs)
man an 81-mm mortar (M1).
 73
Eighth Army 105-mm howitzers are positioned south of Ch’onan, firing at enemy positions.
North Korean planes. However, a combination of U.S.
Air Force, U.S. Navy, Marines and Australian Air Force
planes has been clearing the skies. By the following day,
the Russian Yak fighters, flown by the North Koreans,
will have been thoroughly thrashed, giving the Allies
total air supremacy. It is the air forces that contain the
enemy and buy precious time for the Americans to re-
group and reinforce as they are being shoved back to
Pusan and the sea.
At Choch’iwon, the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment,
commanded by Lt. Colonel Carl Jensen, is dug in north
of the town. And a composite battalion is deployed
south and east of Chonui, along a low ridge about 500
yards east of the town and a steep hill about 800 yards
south of the town. At Chonui, engineers detonate the
approach bridges. Eleven tanks, supplemented by about
200 to 300 infantry, close against Chonui by mid-
afternoon. Planes and artillery intercept the column
and inflict damage and casualties. Reports indicate five
tanks ablaze. As the infantry penetrates Chonui,
bazookas and artillery fire greet them to slow the
progress of the enemy, which is moving house-to-
house.
East of Chonui, planes pound another advancing
convoy composed of about 200 vehicles. Reports from
the air indicate about 100 vehicles destroyed. The night
passes slowly as the beleaguered defenders, using the
illumination from the aging fires in Chonui, keep a
cautious vigil. Enemy patrols nudge against their po-
sitions.
July 9, 1950
At Chinch’on, the South Korean Capital Division
and some police spring an effective ambush against one
battalion of the N.K. 2nd Division. The South Kore-
ans capture four artillery pieces and 27 vehicles. The
stunned North Koreans then launch a strong counter-
attack that ignites several days of bitter fighting. The
ROK force, subsequent to the fall of Ch’onan and
Chonui on their west flank, abandons its positions on
the 11th, permitting the N.K. 2nd Division to enter
Chinch’on.
In other activity, Lt. Colonel David Smith is evac-
uated for two or three days of rest. The exhaustion is to-
tally physical, due to lack of sleep, but things get messed
up in Taejon. The medical report specifies that Smith
should not be placed under the psychiatric department.
Nevertheless, the medical personnel in Taejon place
Smith on a plane to Tokyo and when he arrives there,
someone discovers “exhaustion” on his record and sends
him to the psychiatric hospital in Tokyo. The error be-
comes embarrassing, and Colonel D. Smith is quickly
discharged and sent to Camp Drake to await a new as-
signment. Smith eventually retires after thirty years of
honorable service in the Army.
— In the United States: According to reports, the
ground troops of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade,
which is preparing to embark for Korea, stands at 266
officers and 4,503 enlisted men: the two largest contin-
gents are the 5th Marines and the 1st Battalion, 11th
Marines. The 5th Marines comprises 113 officers and
2,068 enlisted men. The 1st Battalion (reinforced) 11th
July 10, 1950
Marines is composed of 37 officers and 455 enlisted
men. In addition, the air component comprises 192
officers and 1,358 enlisted men, which swells the
brigade to a total of 458 officers and 5,861 enlisted
men, for a total of 6,319 troops. Nonetheless, with the
arrival of the additional rifle companies (requested by
General Shepherd) and some extra support personnel,
the brigade’s final number as it departs will be 6,534
troops.
— In Japan: General MacArthur updates the Joint
Chiefs of Staff on the situation in South Korea. The
dispatch from MacArthur informs them of the fighting
efficiency of the enemy ground troops and of the supe-
rior quality of their equipment: “This force more and
more assumes the aspect of a combination of Soviet
leadership and technical guidance with Chinese Com-
munist ground elements. While it serves under the flag
of North Korea, it can no longer be considered as an in-
digenous N.K. military effort.” MacArthur commits
part of his B-29 Superfortress contingent to the war ef-
fort.
In other activity, General Shepherd, commanding
officer Fleet Marine Force Pacific, and Colonel Kru-
lak, USMC, arrive in Tokyo from Pearl Harbor.
July 10 Colonel Stephens, having spent the night
at the forward positions (21st Regiment) near Chonui,
is on hand for the anticipated arrival of the enemy. The
composite battalion, 21st Infantry, is composed of a
combination of about 500 personnel drawn from Com-
panies A and D, and Companies B and C. These units
that arrived at Pusan too late to move out with Task
Force Smith hold the ground that overlooks the high-
way and railroad. There is another hill to the west on
the left flank, but due to the unavailability of troops,
the left flank remains undefended.
East of Chonui, pea soup fog keeps the troops de-
ployed on the ridge from seeing the road. Despite no
visible signs of the enemy, it becomes apparent at about
0555 that they are close. Nearby, Korean voices flow
in from the left. Soon after, an enemy soldier whistles
a signal that triggers random American fire. Colonel
Stephens orders the men to cease firing blindly. By
0700, enemy mortars pour fire upon the ridge, preced-
ing an attack, which places most of its strength against
the far left portion of the ridge against Company A,
commanded by Lieutenant Ray Bixler. U.S. mortar fire
is called upon to strike the valley between the two
American positions to hold the enemy at bay. In the
meantime, a large contingent of North Koreans cir-
cumvents the battalion’s right flank and drives against
the mortar positions. This attack is synchronized with
tanks, which had advanced unobserved from Chonui
under the dense fog cover. The tanks rumble past the
infantry, which can hear but not see them. At about
0800, the fog lifts, and four enemy tanks are fully vis-
ible as they penetrate the village. Others had made it to
the Americans’ rear to enjoin enemy infantry, which
had breached the right flank. The tank fire originating
in the rear causes more concern. In the midst of the
74
combat, all communication between Colonel Stephens
and the mortarmen is severed. The mortars fall silent,
leaving only artillery to assist. There is some American
tank participation near Chonui during the morning,
but this, the initiation of U.S. tank action in Korea, is
unimpressive.
Meanwhile, at about 0900, additional enemy in-
fantrymen bolt toward the Americans, but artillery fire
repels the attack and inflicts heavy casualties. Although
the infantry is turned back, tanks batter the American
positions with machine gun fire. Then at about 1100,
the left portion of the hill, held by Bixler’s men, is
struck by intense small arms fire. Lieutenant Bixler,
aware the North Koreans are closing fast, contacts Col-
onel Stephens at 1125. The next seven minutes move
at a furious pace. After explaining that his unit has
taken severe casualties, Bixler requests permission to
withdraw before he is overrun. He receives a response
instructing him to hold on. “Relief is on the way.”
Within minutes, thanks to the lifting fog, two jet planes
stream overhead. The tanks are attacked, but no dam-
age is sustained. The enemy infantry on Bixler’s im-
mediate left is stung hard with strafing, keeping the
enemy ground troops harnessed and grasping for cover.
Meanwhile, the survivors of the mortar and recoil-
less rifle units make it back to the ridge to support the
beleaguered infantry. The planes expend their ammu-
nition and are forced to depart, leaving the infantry
vulnerable. During this contest, some men holding the
right sector of the ridge begin to desert their positions,
and more follow suit later. In addition, U.S. commu-
nications become increasingly poor, as the tanks again
have ripped the strung land wires. The forward artillery
observer’s radio goes dead, and the silence gives the ar-
tillerymen the impression that the 21st Regiment has
been overrun. Friendly fire commences at 1132. It
strikes the ridge feverishly, but it is still being held by
the dwindling American force on the left sector of the
ridge. Colonel Stephens dashes 100 yards to his jeep,
grabs the radio and calls for the regimental artillery to
cease fire, but to no avail. Stephens receives a report
from Bixler at 1135, informing him that most of his
unit have become casualties, and more desperately,
Bixler states that his command is surrounded. No fur-
ther reports are forthcoming. Bixler’s positions are over-
run and most of those remaining alive are killed in their
foxholes. As the fateful news about Bixler’s command
spreads, the right flank begins to collapse. One man
screams: “Everybody on the right flank is taking off.”
It is not an exaggeration. Colonel Stephens glances to
the right flank and sees the stampede to the rear. He at-
tempts to halt the retreat. One man, Corporal Richard
Okada, a Nisei from Hawaii, corrals a few men, but
the attempt is futile. Those few surviving men who re-
fuse to abandon their positions and choose to stand
and fight become terribly imperiled. Colonel Stephens
orders a withdrawal at 1205. The pull-back is near fatal,
because two more jets appear and mistake the Americans
for North Koreans. The aircraft inadvertently strafe the
Americans as they cross a rice paddy. Luckily, there are
 75 July 10, 1950

An enemy tank, captured during the fighting on 10 July.

no casualties, and Stephens gets the troops back to the
American lines.
U.S. casualties at this action near Chonui: A Com-
pany sustains 27 wounded and 30 missing; D Company
sustains three killed and eight wounded. The Heavy
Mortar Company sustains fourteen casualties and six of
these men are discovered later in the day, when the ridge
is recaptured. Each man has his hands tied behind his
back and a bullet hole in the back of his head. One of
the men, a jeep driver, escapes while the other six sur-
render.
The 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, commanded by
July 10, 1950
Colonel Delbert Pryor, is ordered to counterattack to-
ward Chonui, but the assault does not commence.
Pryor is relieved of command and replaced by Colonel
Carl Jensen. Subsequent to Colonel Stephens’ return
to friendly lines, he orders Colonel Jensen’s 3rd Battal-
ion to mount a counterattack and regain the lost terrain
at Chonui. The aggressive attack, supported by several
tanks, regains the ridge and reclaims the bodies of the
massacred Americans. However, the tanks are less than
battle-ready. Lacking the proper lubricating oil, the
guns had not yet been fired. Two of the U.S. tanks are
lost when the guns fire and the turrets are blown off.
One enemy tank is damaged during the confrontation.
In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion lacks the strength to
reclaim the hill defended by Bixler and his men. Ten
troops of A and D Companies who chose not to pull
back during the friendly artillery fire are rescued at their
post. At about 2045, General Dean contacts Colonel
Stephens and gives him an option: “If you consider it
necessary, withdraw to your next delaying position prior
to dawn.” General Dean reiterates the importance of
holding Choch’iwon to forestall the collapse of the
South Korean main supply route.
By 2200, General Dean contacts a regimental offi-
cer and authorizes a pull-back to positions four miles
to the rear and two miles north of Choch’iwon, with
the stipulation “hold in your new position and fight
like hell. I expect you to hold it all day tomorrow.”
Colonel Jensen and his exhausted 3rd Battalion pull
back toward their original positions just before mid-
night, bringing out most of the equipment that
had been abandoned earlier. The troops have to do
some housecleaning before they can get some sleep. In
their absence, North Korean troops have become squat-
ters, occupying some of the foxholes. After one hour
of unexpected combat, the Communists are driven
out. The troops attempt to rest; however, daybreak
approaches and with it, more enemy tanks and troops.
In conjunction, Major Heritage, the 24th Division’s
surgeon, notes in the division historical report
that Captain Duerk, the 21st Regiment’s surgeon (at
1605, 10 July), “requests 1,500 units of benzedrine
or hexedrine because of the fact that an entire unit
has slept through an enemy attack. There wasn’t
any on hand so Captain Duerk was notified of this
fact.” Also, Task Force Smith, with its new replace-
ments, is en route from Taejon to rejoin the 21st Reg-
iment.
Central Mountain area: Several N.K. Divisions
continue to drive toward Taegu. The S.K. 8th Divi-
sion, previously unable to penetrate enemy resistance,
has been rerouted from scattered positions in Pohang-
dong, Yongch’on and Taegu vicinity to Tanyang by rail.
The unit debarks the train near the upper south bank
of the Han River and deploys to defend the Yongju-
Andong corridor. Also, elements of the 25th Infantry
Division begin landing in Korea when the 27th Regi-
ment (Wolf hound) debarks at Pusan. It is commanded
by Lt. Colonel John H. “Mike” Michaelis. Initially, the
27th Regiment is dispatched to the vicinity of Uisong,
76
about 35 miles north of Taegu. After a short stay there,
it is redeployed in Andong.
Eastern Coastal area: the N.K. 11th Regiment,
having moved along its inland route for over a week, re-
joins its parent 5th Division at Ulchin. In the meantime,
a huge number of specially trained North Korean civil-
ians have been transported by sea to Ulchin for the pur-
pose of establishing a Communist civil government
within this eastern province. In addition, the 766th
Independent Infantry, upon its arrival at Ulchin, is de-
tached from the N.K. 5th Division. Its mission, ac-
cording to information from POWs, is to subdivide
into small groups, move west into the mountains and
then sweep south to disrupt South Korean communi-
cations between Taegu and Pusan.
Meanwhile, since the S.K. 8th Division moved in-
land, the only unit remaining to block the enemy ad-
vance along the coastal road is the 23rd Regiment, 3rd
S.K. Division. The regiment, commanded by Colonel
“Tiger Kim” Chong Won, has been skirmishing with
guerrillas since early July in the vicinity of P’yonghae-
ri and Ulchin. Today the N.K. 5th Division approaches
P’yonghae-ri and is met with heavy resistance, igniting
a string of bloody battles along the coastal road. The
Communists press to capture Yongdok and gain dom-
ination of the northern approaches to Pohang-dong.
Colonel Kim Chong Won requests reinforcements, and
Colonel Emmerich (KMAG 3rd S.K. Division) con-
curs. He presses the Republic of Korea Army to dis-
patch the required manpower. The 1st Separate Bat-
talion and the Yongdungp’o Separate Battalion move
by railcars to join the ROK 23rd Regiment. Both units,
numbering about 1,500 men, are equipped with Japa-
nese rifles and carbines.
At the S.K. 3rd Division’s positions, about 50 miles
farther south at Pohang-dong, some ROK troops are
spotted moving toward the rear. Colonel Emmerich
and South Korean officers order the contingents back
to Yongdok. It is the strategy of the South Koreans and
the U.S. military to defend this portion of Korea, by
holding the Mun’gyong and Tanyang passes of the
Han-Naktong watershed.
In other activity, a plane arrives at Taejon from Travis
Air Force Base, California. It delivers instructors to
train and familiarize the troops with the new 3.5 rocket
launcher. The first delivery of the rocket launchers ar-
rives two days later.
In yet other activity, elements of the 25th Infantry
Division, commanded by Major General William B.
Kean, begin to arrive in Korea on this day. The 27th
Regiment debarks at Pusan. Initially, the 27th Regi-
ment, commanded by Lt. Colonel John H. Michaelis,
will be dispatched thirty-five miles north of Taegu in
the vicinity of Uisong. Also, the North Korean II Corps
Commander, Major General Kim Kwang Hyop, is de-
moted to corps chief of staff. He is replaced by Lt. Gen-
eral Kim Mu Chong, who is expected to get the II
Corps to move more quickly.
In Air Force Activity, F-80 aircraft, sweeping the area
for targets, swoop down through the heavy skies about
 77
Slaughtered GIs. U.S. troops captured by the Communists are recovered by the Americans. Each man has
his hands tied behind his back and had been shot. This is not an uncommon practice of the North Koreans.
25 miles north of P’yongt’aek. Visibility is sufficient
to give them an eagle’s view of a huge column of vehi-
cles that have stalled at a blown bridge. The pilots in-
form headquarters, and within minutes of the trans-
mission, every available plane of the U.S. Fifth Air
Force speeds toward the bonanza. The giant-sized air
strike, comprising B-26s, F-80s and F-82s, plasters the
column and inflicts heavy damage. Aerial observers re-
port the decimation of huge numbers of enemy troops
and the destruction of 38 tanks, 117 trucks and seven
half-tracs. The figure is considered exaggerated. How-
ever, the inflated figures are nonetheless, unintentional,
caused by the circumstances under which the planes are
operating. This raid and the one unleashed against the
enemy on the afteroon of the 9th near Chonui are con-
sidered to have caused the most destruction to enemy
armor of any individual engagement of the war. The long-
term effects of the raid become apparent immediately.
July 10, 1950
Following these attacks, the North Koreans halt day-
light movement of their vehicles, choosing to camou-
flage them until darkness. The enemy troops also remain
inconspicuous until after dark. The North Koreans
then advance along secondary roads when possible and
hide many supplies in railroad tunnels, out of harm’s
way. In conjunction, Fifth Air Force on this day initi-
ates the use of T-6 trainer aircraft to handle forward
air control missions, because liaison airplanes lack the
speed to evade enemy aircraft.
In Naval activity, the ongoing naval blockade of
North Korean ports is expanded to include Wonsan
and Chinnampo. In yet other activity, the commander
of the Pacific Fleet is directed to embark Task Force
Yoke as soon as it is fully prepared.
— In the United States: The Department of the
Army informs General MacArthur in Japan that the
U.S. is preparing to expedite the delivery of three
July 11, 1950
medium tank battalions to Korea to neutralize the Rus-
sian T-34 tanks in the service of the North Korean
Armed Forces. The 6th (M-46), 70th (M-26 and
M4A3) and the 73rd (M-26) Tank Battalions embark
from San Francisco on July 23 and arrive by sea in
Korea on 7 August. Other armor reinforcements will
follow.
General Ridgway, handling the hectic day-to-day
operations in the Pentagon (during the absence of
Collins), places all pertinent units on alert for imminent
deployment in the Far East. The outfits include an air-
borne RCT, 11th Airborne, several tank battalions, ad-
ditional artillery units and combat engineers. The U.S.
Armed Forces are too few in number to properly han-
dle the crisis, but the political climate mandates oppo-
sition to activating the reserves.
Meanwhile, the General Reserve is being depleted,
and if a large-scale confrontation erupts in some other
part of the world, such as Europe, the U.S. is unprepared
to properly react. Ironically, it is thought that the re-
serves would require much training to prepare for com-
bat, but the available regular forces have not been over-
trained.
In other activity, at the urging of President Truman,
Generals Joseph Collins and Hoyt Vandenberg, Army
and Air Force chiefs of staff respectively, depart for
Japan and subsequently to Korea to gather first-hand re-
ports on the situation.
— In Japan: General MacArthur is informed that
the 2nd Infantry Division (Ft. Lewis, Tacoma, Wash-
ington) and some other supporting units (antiaircraft
artillery and armor) are about to embark for Korea.
MacArthur sends word to Washington that he would
prefer the 2nd Division be at full strength. He also puts
emphasis on speeding the other troops he had previ-
ously requested.
In other activity, Admiral Richard Ruble, command-
ing officer, Carrier Division 15, and his staff arrive in
Tokyo by air. Ruble reports to Admiral Joy. Ruble had
been stationed in San Diego, and his assigned task up
to the outbreak of hostilities had been antisubmarine
warfare (hunter-killer) operations, but on the 12th of
July he officially receives additional responsibilities.
Another conference is held at MacArthur’s Head-
quarters. Admiral Doyle’s suggestion of a troop land-
ing at Pohang-dong is accepted by members of General
MacArthur’s and Admiral Joy’s respective staffs. Ini-
tially, the proposed landing site had been on the west
coast at Inchon, but the swift disintegration of the
South Korean forces during the early days of the hos-
tilities cancels this option. By the following day, a spe-
cial reconnaissance team is airlifted to Pohang to recon-
noiter the area. Presently, Pohang-dong, about seventy
miles north of Pusan, is in no immediate danger, de-
spite the dynamic advance of the enemy. The Spartan
actions of the slim forces of the 24th Division and sup-
porting air and sea forces, including the sure-pointed
naval surface fire of the cruisers and destroyers under the
command of Rear Admiral John M. Higgins, have fore-
stalled even greater successes of the enemy.
78
The proposed amphibious invasion of Korea (BLUE-
HEARTS) is aborted due to the failure of the U.S. and
South Korean troops to repulse the southern attack of
the enemy. However, planning for a similar type oper-
ation continues, headed by General Edwin K. Wright,
MacArthur’s assistant chief of staff (G-3). The respon-
sibility falls to Wright’s Joint Strategic Plans and Oper-
ations Group. A deputy, Colonel Donald H. Galloway,
is in direct command of the JSPOG. A blueprint of the
amphibious strategy will be offered on July 23. During
the conference, a casual conversation between General
MacArthur and General Shepherd instigates a momen-
tous historical event.
MacArthur begins discussing the accomplishments
of the 1st Marine Division when it was under his author-
ity during the New Britain campaign in 1943–44. Con-
tinuing, MacArthur says that if he had the 1st Marine
Division in Japan he would employ it as his landing
force for the Inchon operation. The tone moves from ca-
sual exchange to a more serious discussion between
MacArthur and Shepherd, who had been the assistant di-
visional commander of the 1st Marine Division during
the New Britain operation. Shepherd suggests that
MacArthur request that the 1st Marine Division be as-
signed to him. MacArthur, with a genuine excitement,
asks if it could be ready to launch an invasion by the
15th of September. Shepherd responds in the affirma-
tive, then bolsters his enthusiastic boast by noting that
the division is under his command and he would take
personal responsibility to ensure its readiness, minus
the infantry regiment and other Marines of the brigade.
Of course, General Shepherd does not give General
MacArthur the full story. Thanks to the gutting of the
armed forces and the activation of the Marine brigade,
the 1st Marine Division presently contains fewer troops
than one regimental combat team, giving the Marines
a full scale nightmare to bring the division to full
strength and have it ready for an assault in 67 days.
MacArthur requests the 1st Marine Division on this
day.
MacArthur, with regard to the Inchon invasion, is
on record stating that the invasion will succeed, and he
adds, “But I must have the Marines.” Shepherd pre-
pares to call out the Marines, including the reserves, but
first, Congress and President Truman must authorize
the rebuilding of what they dismantled. MacArthur’s
request for the 1st Marine Division is expeditiously dis-
patched to Washington.
July 11 The men of the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regi-
ment, having hardly closed their eyes following the pre-
vious day’s furious fighting, are back in combat-ready
positions, and they face another dense fog. At 0630,
again the clanking noise of tanks can be heard. The
rumble of armor approaches from the opposite side of
a minefield. Meanwhile, Task Force Smith (B and C
Companies) has arrived from Taejon with 205 replace-
ments. It rejoins the 21st Regiment about two miles
north of Choch’iwon and will be in place by 0730. In
conjunction, Companies B and C have re-supplied at
 79
Choch’iwon. This hook-up of the four companies
places Lt. Colonel Brad Smith’s 1st Battalion together
for the first time since the task force was initially
formed.
At the 3rd Battalion’s positions, four enemy tanks
breach the minefield just after 0630 with a massive
thrust. As the menacing tanks burst toward the battal-
ion, enemy mortars commence fire. The shells strike
the perimeter with pinpoint accuracy. The communi-
cations center is wiped out and the ammunition depot
sustains a deadly blow. Apparently, the enemy had
mapped out the entire 3rd Battalion area while it tem-
porarily occupied the ground on the previous day.
While the tanks and mortars inflict severe casualties
on the 3rd Battalion, the enemy infantry (3rd N.K. Di-
vision) strikes against both flanks with 1,000 troops.
The American defenders, having lost their command
post, their ammunition and communications as well as
their deployment position intelligence, are gravely
threatened. The North Koreans have also established
roadblocks behind 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment’s lines,
which prevents any chance of getting more ammunition.
Desperate fighting continues for several hours against
insurmountable odds.
Nevertheless, the 3rd Battalion resists tenaciously.
Heavy machine gun fire rips viciously into K Com-
pany’s command post. In this instance, return fire is
anemic, but sufficient. Private Paul R. Spear single-
A General Chaffee light tank (M24) in action during mid–July.
July 11, 1950
handedly charges the enemy position with his entire
arsenal, his pistol. Spear lunges into the position, but
his weapon is empty. He improvises and uses his pis-
tol as a short pipe. The free-swinging infantryman
drives the enemy from the position; however, Spear be-
comes severely wounded by enemy fire.
The hectic morning phases out with another North
Korean rout. The 3rd Battalion, which sustains 60 per-
cent casualties, is overrun. Those who are able begin
to withdraw toward Choch’iwon to avoid annihilation.
About ninety percent of these are weaponless. The at-
tack had been so thoroughly organized and swift that
many of the survivors are also shoeless and without
canteens. Helmets are considered a luxury. Escape is
again an arduous task.
During the retreat, Colonel Jensen and his S-2 offi-
cer, Lieutenant Leon J. Jacques, are cut down while
trying to wade across a creek to the rear of their former
command post. Other officers, including Captain
O’Dean T. Cox, commanding officer, Company L, are
missing in action.
Some men are unwilling to continue the march due
to exhaustion from their two days of incessant fight-
ing. They choose to remain along the road. The eight
officers and 142 troops avoid death or capture and re-
form as a provisional company, comprising three rifle
platoons and a heavy weapons company. Statistics for
the battalion improve slightly by July 15 when more
July 12, 1950
stragglers enter U.S. lines, bringing total strength to
322 men. On July 10, the first day of this battle, the
unit strength had been 667 men. The 3rd Battalion
had also lost supplies, equivalent of that required to
supply two rifle battalions with weapons and clothing
for nearly 1,000 men.
By nightfall, the grim reports of the fate of the 3rd
Battalion, 21st Regiment, reach General Dean. Using
his limited resources, he continues to find a solution
to halt the onslaught in front of Choch’iwon and save
the South Korean Main Supply Route. Another Spar-
tan outfit, Company A, 3rd Engineer Combat Battal-
ion, is rushed into extra duty. The men are ordered to
establish every imaginable type of obstacle they can
create to hold the sagging line. These engineers must
also prepare to afford cover-fire if the 21st Regiment is
compelled to withdraw. Earlier in the day, Dean had or-
dered the 13th Field Artillery Battalion and the 19th In-
fantry Regiment to speed from Pohang-dong and
Taegu, respectively, to bolster the line at Taejon.
While the N.K. 3rd Division pounds the 3rd Battal-
ion, 21st Regiment, its 1st Battalion, about two miles
away in front of Choch’iwon, has mysteriously remained
unmolested. Nonetheless, the 1st Battalion realizes its
positions are in jeopardy. Its lack of combat accelerates
the anxiety as the troops await the imminent enemy ar-
rival, expected prior to dawn on the 12th. Also, along
the Konju Road, the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment,
which is deployed to cover the withdrawal of the 34th
Regiment, engages contingents of the N.K. 4th Division.
Four Light M-24 tanks, attached to the 78th Tank Bat-
talion, support the fight; however, enemy firepower
quickly neutralizes the fly-weight tanks. During an im-
promptu rescue operation, one tank speeds to save sur-
vivors from a jeep that had been ambushed by infiltra-
tors. En route the tank is destroyed by infantry
close-range fire. Two other tanks are decimated by
enemy artillery fire. Nonetheless, the effective rear-
guard actions of Ayres’ 1st Battalion and some support-
ing artillery help the regiment reach the Kum River with
only a few additional casualties. The 3rd Battalion,
commanded by Major Newton Lantron, reaches Taejon.
The survivors are regrouped as a composite company
and moved to Konju. The remainder of the regiment
crosses the Kum River on the following day.
Meanwhile, during the night, a contingent of the
34th Regiment’s I&R Platoon captures a scout from the
N.K. 16th Regiment, 4th Division. The prisoner, seized
north of the Kum River, opposite Konju, reveals that his
regiment’s objective is Konju. At Chinch’on, the S.K.
Capital Division and its supporting police contingent are
forced to pull out. Facing envelopment due to the col-
lapse of their western flank by the enemy seizure of
Ch’onan and Chonui, the troops of the Capital Divi-
sion evacuate their positions. The bloodied N.K. 2nd
Division takes the town. Its commanding officer dis-
regards the high casualties and exhausted condition of
his troops. The division, without pause, drives toward
the headquarters of the South Korean I Corps at
Ch’ongju. It is met there by heavy artillery fire from
80
the guns of some determined South Koreans. The ef-
fective barrage halts the N.K. 2nd Division at the steps
of the town. The division sustains about 800 additional
casualties. The artillery continues to plaster the enemy
until the following day.
On the 12th, Choch’iwon, about 12 miles west of
Ch’ongju, is relinquished by contingents of the U.S.
24th Division. This forces the South Koreans at
Ch’ongju to withdraw. The town is abandoned to the
N.K. 2nd Division. Also, the 24th Regiment, 25th Di-
vision, commanded by Colonel Horton V. White, ar-
rives in Korea. It is the only regiment is the U.S. Eighth
Army that contains three battalions. Meanwhile, the
27th Regiment transfers from Usiong to Andong.
Eastern Coastal area: The 23rd S.K. Regiment re-
acts to enormous enemy pressure from the N.K. 5th
Division. Its command post is moved back into Yong-
dok. The S.K. 3rd Division has orders to hold it.
In other activity, the North Koreans initiate the use
of prisoners of war (POWs) for their propaganda strat-
egy. In Seoul, Captain Ambrose H. Nugent, 52nd Field
Artillery Battalion, under Communist duress, speaks
in English over the radio. Nugent reads from a pre-
pared text composed of about 1,000 words. Although
most Koreans cannot understand a word he is saying,
the North Koreans get good mileage from the incident.
A Communist interpreter translates for the Koreans.
In other activity, Captain Vincent Robinson,
USMC, Lt. Commander Jack Lowentrout and Lt. JG
George Atcheson III, attached to Amphibious Group
One, and selected members of the First Cavalry’s Di-
vision’s staff arrive in Pohang-dong from Tokyo. They
gather intelligence during their two-day stay to assure
a safe landing and to seek an area to deploy the cav-
alry. Also, the N.K. 6th Division, trailing the N.K. 3rd
and 4th Divisions south after the seizure of Seoul, re-
acts to recent new orders from the N.K. Army headquar-
ters. It departs the Ch’onan area, and advances toward
the west coast from where it will thrust a sturdy spear
into the side of Eighth Army. The N.K. Sixth Divi-
sion, subsequent to shifting off the main highway, con-
ceals its positions. U.S. intelligence is unable to dis-
cover its location for about two weeks.
In the United States: President Truman authorizes
the Marine Corps to expand to two wartime strength
divisions. The corps had been drastically reduced fol-
lowing the close of World War II. Each division will
consist of about 23,000 men. The chief of naval oper-
ations authorizes the activation of ships from the re-
serve fleet.
July 12 By this date, the Communists occupy
about one-half of South Korea. Four U.S. battalions
have withdrawn across the Kum River, which had been
the primary line of defense above Taejon. As dawn ar-
rives at Choch’iwon, the uneasy men of the 1st Battal-
ion, 21st Regiment, are afforded little time to ponder
the weather or gripe about terrible cold chow. They are
disinterested in everything except survival. The 21st
Regimental War Diary notes that four tanks join the 1st
 81
U.S. Marines (1st Provisional Brigade) board an attack transport in San Diego. A convoy transporting
the Marines to Korea embarks on 12 July.
Battalion at 0730, but the unit is unspecified. In con-
junction, the War Diary of the 24th Division notes that
Company A, 71st Heavy Tank Battalion (1st Cavalry),
arrives at Taejon on this day. It deploys at the airstrip,
with orders to execute reconnaissance missions “south
of the Kum River between Kongju and Taepyong-ni.”
The unit’s eighteen tanks are assigned to the 24th Di-
vision.
Meanwhile, the North Korean 3rd Division, which
passes the N.K. 4th Division, will spring the attack.
The 4th Division will retrace its steps from Chonui
and plunge down the Konju Road to chase the retreat-
ing 34th Regiment. A quick glance from the positions
of C Company, 21st Regiment, detects an enemy pa-
trol while it probes near the perimeter. Additional and
heavier concentrations of enemy forces are then dis-
covered by others who sight hostile troops operating
on both flanks of the battalion.
Soon after, at 0930, enemy artillery commences a
hefty bombardment. Sheets of enemy artillery shells,
synchronized with a powerful attack by a battalion
strength unit, pound the American positions. The in-
fantry contingent, composed of about 2,000 troops,
propels a crushing blow into the fragile left flank. Col-
onel Stephens, aware that his force is primarily com-
July 12, 1950
posed of green and untried replacements, attempts to
repel the attack, but again lacking air cover, sufficient
men and weapons, the battle is futile. By noon, for the
third day in a row, nearly dubbing the hour as the
witching hour, overpowering enemy force is again able
to execute envelopment tactics destined to wipe out an
American force. General Dean receives another mes-
sage in a long string of grim reports. Stephens enunci-
ates the desperation of the regiment in his report: “Am
surrounded. 1st battalion left giving way. Having noth-
ing left to establish intermediate delaying position am
forced to withdraw to river line. I have issued instruc-
tions to withdraw.”
Colonel Smith, having become accustomed to ex-
tricating his survivors from the North Korean hordes
since the disaster at Osan on the 5th, again exudes con-
fidence to retain the discipline and morale of his
strained troops (1st Battalion). Enemy pressure con-
tinues to press forward as the withdrawal is initiated.
The embattled infantry companies begin their move to
the rear one company at a time in an effort to reach the
trucks. All the while, artillery shells ring the area; one
barrage strikes against the regimental command post
on the fringe of Choch’iwon. Nonetheless, the man-
dated retreat to more tenable positions on the south
July 12, 1950 82

Top: During the night of the 12th-13th, engineers blow the bridges across the Kum River at Konju and
Taep’yong-ni. Bottom: A view of the bridge across the Kum River at Konju and Taep’yong-ni after the
smoke clears.
 83
bank of the Kum River, under the circumstances, is to-
tally organized.
The 1st Battalion redeploys by about 1550 near a
highway bridge which spans the river at Taep’yong-ni.
All units reach the new defensive line by about 1600,
although some isolated small groups are still filtering
into the lines at 2100. The prognosis for the regiment
is hazy at best. About 325 men, including able and
walking wounded troops of the 1st and 3rd Battalions,
persist in defying the odds by remaining at another
soon to be besieged post to buy more precious time
while the South Korean troops continue to flee. While
the ROKs abscond, 64 men of the 3rd Battalion and
about 261 troops of the 1st Battalion attempt to hold.
These survivors of 21st Regiment have fought a valiant
three-day delaying action between Chonui and
Choch’iwon against two crack North Korean divisions.
While the massive enemy blows are being launched
against the 21st Regiment, the 1st Battalion, 34th Reg-
iment, holds positions on the Konju Road to protect the
regiment’s retreat. Engagements are fought at the road
against elements of the N.K. 4th Division, which had
diverted from the main road and taken the right fork
to drive toward Kongju.
The survivors of the 34th Regiment and the 63rd
Field Artillery Battalion ford the Kum River with the
final contingents of infantry and Colonel Ayres, 1st
Battalion commander. The crossing is completed by
dusk. Orders from General Dean are delivered to Col-
onel Ayres, who is directed to maintain a small outpost
on the north bank of the river, then “blow the main
bridge, only when the enemy starts to cross.” In con-
junction, Colonel Wadlington directs Company L to
hold the bridge and secure the area for 600 yards to the
front. During the night of the 12th–13th, engineers
blow the bridges across the Kum River at Konju and
Taep’yong-ni. The railroad span at Sinch’on will be
blown on the 15th.
During this same period, the 24th Reconnaissance
Company guts all flat-bottomed boats it can locate for
a distance that stretches 16 miles below Konju. In con-
cert, General Menoher, assistant commander, 24th Di-
vision, orders identical action to be taken against all
similar boats between Konju and the railroad station
east of the town along the arc of the river.
With the ongoing thrashing of the 24th Division,
General Walker requests immediate help. He instructs
his chief of staff, Colonel Landrum, to contact General
Almond in Tokyo in an attempt to get the two battal-
ions in Okinawa. On the following day, General
MacArthur instructs the Okinawa Command to embark
the particular battalions to Korea.
In other activity, the 19th Regiment reaches the
south bank of the Kum River. It relieves the 21st In-
fantry on the following day.
Central Mountain area: The N. K. 12th Division
(previously 7th Division) drives through the eastern
(second) mountain corridor closing from north of
Tanyang. It encroaches the S.K. 8th Division, which
has just withdrawn from its east coast positions to es-
July 12, 1950
tablish a new line. Advance contingents of the N.K.
12th Division cross the Han River. Earlier, the S.K 8th
Division, upon hitting the stiff resistance, failed to
break through, prompting the unit to take a prolonged
circuitous route to its designated area. In addition, the
N.K. 15th Division (advancing through the first moun-
tain corridor), which had followed the 7th Division to
Wonju, departs there. It heads west through Yoju, then
it pivots southward where it had previously engaged
South Korean troops at Changhowon-ni. On this day
the division moves into Koesan, about 18 miles north-
west of Mun’gyong.
Meanwhile, the 1st N.K. Division (moving through
the 1st mountain corridor), which had diverted from its
northwest advance, moves south from Ch’ungju and
butts against contingents of the S.K. 6th Division just
north of Mun’gyong. Vicious battles continue to ensue
between these opponents for domination of the Mun’-
gyong pass and plateau. General Dean orders General
Kean, commanding officer, 25th Division, to deploy his
force where it can halt the enemy advance below
Ch’ungju; however, Kean is to keep one battalion at
Yonil Airfield to defend it. General Kean is also to man-
date one regiment (24th) to remain at Kumch’on in re-
serve, poised to speed to Taejon or Ch’ungju, whichever
requires the support first.
Eastern Coastal area: Heavy fighting continues near
P’yonghae-ri, as the S.K. 23rd Regiment continues to
engage the N.K. 5th Division. On or about the follow-
ing day, North Korean troops seize P’yonghae-ri and
prepare to move against Yongdok. Subsequent to enter-
ing the town, the 10th Regiment, 5th N.K. Division
will peel off and head west into the mountains to seize
Chinbo. From there, the 10th Regiment will be poised
to strike Yongdok from the rear, thus setting the stage
for the imminent and first major combat on the east
coast.
In other activity, the 24th Regiment, 25th Division,
arrives in Pusan. On the following day, the 35th
Regiment, 25th Division, begins coming ashore
at Pusan. By the 15th, the entire division is ashore.
General Kean establishes his command post at
Yongch’on, about halfway between Taegu and Pohang-
dong.
In Air Force Activity, the 92nd Bomber Group
launches its initial mission from its airbase in Japan to
strike enemy marshaling yards at enemy-held Seoul.
Communist fighter planes are able to down two of the
bombers, one B-29 and one B-26, and one other craft,
an L-4. The losses provide the enemy with their first
victory in the skies.
— In the United States: On the West Coast, the 1st
Provisional Marine Brigade begins boarding ships that
will transport them to Korea via Japan; it will be the
final publicized embarkation of troops for the duration
of the war in Korea. Between today and the 14th, Task
Group 53.7 embarks San Diego for Korea; it travels
under strict radio silence.
The vessels transporting the ground troops are
the LSDs USS Fort Marion, USS Gunston Hall, the
July 13, 1950
AKAs USS Alshain and Whiteside and the APAs USS
Clymer, USS Henrico and USS Pickaway. The vessels
Fort Marion and Gunston Hall (designated Task Unit
53.7.3) also depart today. Marine Aircraft Group 33
is ordered to embark on the transports USS Acherenar,
Anderson and the carrier USS Badoeng Strait. Due
to the chronic shortage of ships, the Marine Brigade
departs lacking about one-third of its motor transport.
In other activity, Lt. Colonel Welborn G. Dolvin,
USA, receives verbal orders that he is to depart
for Korea to command the 89th Medium Tank
Battalion, which is hurriedly being established. Dolvin
and more than 150 troops of the 2nd Armored
Division embark for Japan from the West Coast on the
17th.
— In Japan: At Yokohama, elements of the 1st Cav-
alry Division begin boarding ships, but the initial strat-
egy to launch an amphibious landing at Inchon has
been scrapped because of the ongoing fast-paced enemy
advance. It has already swept south of the Han River,
bulldozing the U.S. 24th Division as it advanced. The
cavalry continues the boarding process until the 14th.
On the 15th, the command ship (Task Force 90) USS
Mount McKinley and the remaining vessels embark for
the east coast of Korea.
In other activity, Admiral Ruble is temporarily ap-
pointed commander, Naval Air Japan. Ruble will be
responsible for providing logistical support to all naval
aircraft and every Marine air squadron in the Korean
Theater. Four Military Air Transport Service planes,
transporting 58 3.5-inch rocket launchers (bazookas)
and shaped charges arrive in Japan from the United
States to the jubilation of the military, which remains
in dire need of the latest weapon designed to destroy
enemy tanks.
July 13 Lt. General Walton H. Walker, command-
ing officer, Eighth Army, assumes control of all ground
forces in Korea effective 0001. He establishes head-
quarters in Taegu. In conjunction, the ROK transfers
its headquarters from Taejon to Taegu. To Walker’s dis-
may, he has too few troops and he lacks the necessary
equipment to stop the North Korean hordes at the steps
of Taejon. The beleaguered 24th Division will be forced
to retreat further. General Walker immediately initi-
ates priority tactical objectives. The 24th Division,
stretched along the south bank of the Kum River, must
defend the Kongju-Taejon vicinity and hold the line
there.
The 25th Division is ordered to bolster the South
Koreans’ effort in the central mountains. The 25th is
also directed to deploy contingents to defend Yonil Air-
field and the port town of Pohang-dong. At the 24th
Division line along the Kum River, intelligence has
placed the opposition at about two enemy divisions,
supported by about 50 tanks. The advancing ground
force is composed of contingents of the N.K. 3rd and
4th Divisions. Each division moves to envelop Taejon.
The 24th Division, scattered along the south bank of
the Kum River, is expected to halt the advance. The
84
34th and 19th Regiments form a shallow crescent on the
left and right respectively and to the far left, the 24th
Reconnaissance Company is deployed in several groups
to guard the key river crossings below Konju. Also, the
21st Regiment, subsequent to being relieved by the
19th Regiment, deploys defensively in reserve southeast
of Taejon.
The battered 24th Division, composed of about only
7,400 troops, including artillery personnel, holds
the perimeter. At 0440, the steel-supported bridge in
the forefront of Kongju is blown, which forms a
moat that separates the 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment,
from the enemy. Slightly after daybreak, a squad of
North Koreans establishes a machine gun position on
the opposing bank. During the early afternoon, the
enemy machine gun positions initiate sporadic firing.
The in-place communications of the endangered regi-
ment remains consistent; it is less than poor, and again,
the only sure way to transmit information is by messen-
ger.
The regiment’s 3rd Battalion, supported by the 63rd
Field Artillery Battalion, holds staggered positions
on the high ground overlooking the Kongju-Nonsan
Road. The enemy launches no major attacks during
this day prior to dusk, but still, the 3rd Battalion,
commanded by Colonel Wadlington, incurs severe
problems as its S-2 and S-3 officers come down with
battle fatigue. Both officers are evacuated. Later, after
dark, K Company, composed of about 40 men, is ren-
dered unsuitable for combat due to mental and physi-
cal ailments. It is evacuated to Taejon for further dis-
position.
Subsequent to the non-battle loss of K Company,
responsibility for holding the Kum River line to the
front of Kongju is relegated to two weakened rifle units,
Company I and Company L, on the right and left re-
spectively. No friendly troops are deployed to their left
and there is about a two-mile gap between them and the
19th Regiment to their right.
In other activity, the 35th Regiment, 25th Division,
commanded by Colonel Henry G. Fisher, begins to ar-
rive in Korea. Some contingents debark at Pusan dur-
ing the next several days. Also, the 27th Division, at
Uisong, is directed by Eighth Army to move out and re-
deploy at Andong. It is to form a defensive line behind
the defending South Korean troops.
Also, the N.K. 6th Division, which has been mov-
ing inconspicuously toward the west coast, pivots at
Yesan, then moves south across the lower Kum River in
two separate columns against Kunsan.
East Coast sector: At Yongdok, Colonel Rollins Em-
merich’s unit (KMAG), attached to the S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion, dispatches a detonation plan to Eighth Army. It
specifies the details for blowing the bridges and the
coastal road at Yongdok. In contrast, the enemy has
plans to demolish a strategic bridge near An’gang’ni
(between Taegu and Pohang-dong) and the plan incor-
porates the detonation of both ends of the Ch’ongdo
railroad tunnel (between Taegu and Pusan). These
combined actions would clearly devastate the supply
 85
U.S. troops en route to positions in the hills south of the Kum River.
routes of the U.S.–South Korean front-line troops. Two
platoons of ROK troops and two U.S. officers rush to
the tunnel to forestall its destruction.
In other activity, General Church and his staff
(ADCOM) are instructed by Tokyo to return to Japan;
however, communication and intelligence personnel
remain with Eighth Army while their services are still
required. Also, the small reconnaissance team departs
Pohang-dong for Japan, having successfully concluded
that it contains a suitable landing site for the 1st Cav-
alry Division. In its favor is a one-track railway line
that stretches west into Taegu, and from there it leads
northwest into Taejon. The cavalry will have access to
quick movement by rail of combat troops into the bat-
tle zone (Central front).
In Air Force activity, Wonsan, a key port city along
the east coast of North Korea, is the first recipient of a
heavy strategic bombing mission by the Far East Air
Force. The city is also a strategic communication cen-
ter that acts as a conduit during the initial portion of
the war. The bulk of equipment supplied to the North
Koreans by the Russians moves through the city. The
port there is linked by train with Vladivostok, Siberia.
In other activity, Air Force planes attached to the
92nd Bombardment Group at Yokota, Japan, and the
22nd Bombardment Group at Kadena, Okinawa, drop
400 tons of bombs on Wonsan.
— In the Pacific Ocean: The USS Fort Marion, one
of the two advance vessels that departed California on
the previous day, suffers an accident. The vessel, which
is transporting Company A, 1st Marine Tank Battal-
July 13 , 1950
ion, and the 1st Marine Amphibious Tractor Company,
is beset by an accidental flooding of the deck well,
which causes five feet of water to rise amidst the new
Pershing M-26 tanks. Fourteen tanks are damaged be-
fore the pumps can flush out the water. The acciden-
tal flood also destroys 300 90-mm projectiles (already
in short supply) and 5,000 rounds of .30-caliber am-
munition.
Urgent dispatches are sent back to Marine headquar-
ters to inform staff of the brigade’s misfortune. Quick
action is taken. Captain English, commanding officer,
Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, is reassured that re-
placement tanks would be requisitioned at once and
forwarded as soon as possible. English is ordered to dis-
card the damaged ammunition.
In the meantime, while preparations are being made
to transport the new armor, it is determined that twelve
of the tanks can be repaired at sea. The remaining two
tanks, with the acquisition of parts, can be fixed upon
arrival at Japan. The Marines consider the tanks para-
mount for their anticipated success against the menac-
ing Russian T-34 tanks. The replacement ammunition
is loaded aboard one of the other vessels in the main
convoy and four additional tanks are to be included in
the first resupply convoy.
— In Japan: General MacArthur orders General
Stratemeyer to commit the Far East Air Force’s B-26s
and B-29s in a copious effort to halt the North Korean
advance.
In other activity, Generals Joseph Collins and Hoyt
Vandenberg arrive in Tokyo to confer with General
July 13, 1950 86

Top: A group of U.S. infantry makes use of a captured North Korean jeep. Bottom: U.S. troops examine
a captured armored car.

MacArthur and other general officers, including Gen-
erals Walker and Almond, and Admiral Radford, com-
mander, Pacific Fleet. MacArthur presses for maximum
support to defeat the North Koreans, but the JCS mir-
ror the opinions of the Truman Administration and it
becomes apparent that no blank check is being drawn.
Subsequent to the meeting in Tokyo, General Collins
and General Vandenberg travel by air with General
Walker to Taegu, Korea, to confer with General Dean
regarding the deteriorating situation in his 25th Divi-
sion zone. Collins and Vandenberg return to Japan after
the meeting.
 87
July 14 The sober darkness combines with another
nasty rainfall along the entire U.S. perimeter at the
Kum River Line. These conditions temporarily eclipse
the approach of the enemy, but soon after dawn, the
grumble of rolling tanks echoes across the river. At
about 0600, Company I, 34th Regiment, feels the sting
of hostile fire. Shells, probably attributed to tank fire,
pound its area, while other synchronized fire is hurled
toward the positions of L Company. However, the
shells near L Company explode prematurely and high
in the sky, inflicting no damage. Subsequent to the
enemy barrage, L Company scouts discover an enemy
contingent composed of about thirty men that are
crossing the Kum River about two miles below their
positions. Within a couple of hours, about 500 North
Koreans ford the river to threaten the south bank po-
sitions of the American force. A liaison plane attached
to the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion is sent aloft. It,
too, spots enemy movement, which apparently is the
same two barges spotted by L Company. Although the
information is dispatched to an artillery unit, a decision
is made to permit the barges free passage in hopes of
catching more lucrative targets.
East of Kongju, one platoon of the 11th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion commences firing at the advancing
enemy ground troops. At about the same time, enemy
fighter planes appear and chase the liaison plane. The
artillery fire then ceases. In conjunction, a third battery
is attached to the 11th Field Artillery Battalion to be-
come the first artillery battalion in Korea to contain a
full complement of three batteries.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans continue to thump
Company L (34th Regiment, 3rd Battalion), with
effective artillery and mortar fire. Lieutenant Stith,
commander, Company L, attempts to locate his sup-
porting mortar and machine gun units, but the effort
is futile. Stith, convinced his company’s positions
are untenable, orders a pull-back without requesting
permission. Company L abandons its positions in
the heights above the south bank of the Kum River.
Lieutenant Stith then moves to locate 3rd Battalion
headquarters. After a sustained effort, Stith encounters
headquarters outside of Nonsan. When the battalion
commander is informed of the withdrawal of
Company L, Lt. Stith is immediately relieved of com-
mand and informed by the battalion commander
(Major Lantron) that he might be receiving a court
martial.
Colonel Wadlington had been ordered to move his
34th Regiment south to the vicinity of Nonsan, but
later, during the afternoon, General Dean orders
Wadlington to pull the 34th Regiment from the Kum
River Line before daylight on the 15th. The withdrawal
begins, pursuant to orders, at 0100.
In the meantime, the North Koreans have begun
fording the Kum River. They intentionally bypass the
two rifle companies (prior to retreat of L Company)
and quietly drive toward the rear artillery positions.
Seemingly, the North Koreans have complete knowledge
of the location of the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion,
July 14, 1950
commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Dawson,
which is deployed about three miles south of the Kum
River outside of Samyo. Due to poor communications,
the U.S. artillerymen are unaware of the withdrawal of
Company L, but some communications have been ac-
tive between the artillerymen and the 34th Regimen-
tal Headquarters.
Following another dreary night of rain, the weather
had brightened during daylight. At about 1330, a for-
ward position of the artillery discovers an approaching
enemy force and instantly reports the activity. Orders
arrive directing the men “not to fire unless fired upon.”
The hesitation is deadly. The troops manning the ma-
chine gun position are quickly overrun, and the North
Koreans use the captured gun to slice into the ranks of
Headquarters Battery. In concert, enemy mortar fire
hits Headquarters Battery with pinpoint accuracy,
which verifies that enemy intelligence had advance
knowledge of the location of the guns. Decimating fire
crushes the command post and inflicts injuries to med-
ical personnel. The barrage simultaneously bludgeons
the communications truck, which severs radio com-
munications. The startling attack also strikes an am-
munition truck, which adds to the dilemma of Head-
quarters Battery.
As the enemy closes the noose tighter, a ring of fire
whacks the Fire Direction Center, making escape from
the building extremely dangerous. Both doors, front
and rear, are plastered viciously. Nonetheless, the troops
inside escape and make their way to the positions of
Battery B, which has not yet come under attack. Dur-
ing this hasty retreat, Major William E. Dressler (bat-
talion commander), who had replaced Lt. Colonel
Dawson (evacuated due to illness) on the 13th, and
Corporal Edward L. McCall are not among the es-
capees. About two and one-half years later, American
troops discover their bodies in a single foxhole.
While this vicious attack is underway, Battery A also
faces a ground assault, which appears to be synchro-
nized with the attack against Headquarters Battery.
The defenders of Battery A hold a fragile line about
250 yards north of Headquarters Battery. They come
under assault when a contingent of about 100 scream-
ing North Koreans (16th Regiment) sprints from a hill
located west of the outpost. The artillerymen pound
the attackers with small arms fire and halt the attack.
The enemy troops charge back up the hill, but the re-
prieve is short lasting. The enemy had only changed
direction, and soon after, they charge down yet another
hill and reach the road. Battery A comes under fire from
a range of about 150 yards. Supporting mortar fire also
blasts Battery A, and causes the majority of the men to
abandon their positions.
The evacuation again leaves a few Americans remain-
ing under horrendous fire while they attempt to halt
the horde of attackers. One man, Corporal Lawrence A.
Ray, supported by several other steadfast soldiers, pours
fire into the enemy. Lawrence becomes twice wounded
while overtaxing his BAR.
While some Americans stand rigidly under fire, the
July 14, 1950
others head for safer quarters. Lawrence, still firing his
weapon, is struck by a mortar fragment that knocks
him into temporary unconsciousness. When he wakes
up, his options are few. He struggles to a nearby ditch
and stumbles into fifteen men of his unit, all of whom
are weaponless. Corporal Lawrence and the others in the
ditch escape south, but unfortunately, many who stood
and fought are lost. Along the line of retreat they locate
the body of Captain Lundel M. Sutherland, Battery A
commander.
Meanwhile, with the destruction of Headquarters
Battery and Battery A, which loses its five operational
guns, another powerful thrust is unfolding against Bat-
tery B. Again, the enemy, about 400 strong, has
emerged behind the battery lines from where they de-
ploy machine guns. At about 1415, a wild and confus-
ing exchange occurs as the North Korean guns rake the
area. Two U.S. machine guns, positioned outside the de-
fense area but now within enemy lines, answer the fire.
Enemy mortar shells join the battle pounding Battery
B, which loses a communications jeep and two 105-
mm howitzers.
Suddenly, a contingent of South Korean cavalry gal-
lops past Battery B and charges toward the North Ko-
reans, but the action fails to halt the enemy fire. The re-
sults of the charge go unknown due the confusion of the
day’s events. By 1500, orders are issued to move back,
but the road is permeated with enemy fire, which com-
pels the artillerymen to desert their guns, but before
abandoning the weapons, the firing locks and sights
are removed to render the guns useless. This thunder-
ous assault lasts less than two hours, but the 63rd Ar-
tillery Battalion loses ten 105-mm howitzers, about 60
to 80 vehicles and much of their ammunition. The sur-
vivors make their way back to Service Headquarters,
the sole unit to escape attack.
As word spreads about the disastrous encounter, Ser-
vice Battery prepares to retreat. A few straggling sur-
vivors hitch rides in their trucks for the fifteen-mile
trip south to Nonsan. Others file into Nonsan during
the night and into the following day. A total of 125
enlisted men and 11 officers are reported missing in
action subsequent to the deadly encounter.
At about 1500, word of the fate of the artillery bat-
talion reaches Colonel Wadlington, acting regimental
commander, 34th Infantry, at his headquarters. Act-
ing on previous orders from General Dean, Wadling-
ton orders the 1st Battalion under Colonel Ayres to ex-
ecute an attack to extricate the besieged battalion. Then
it is to push the enemy west to forestall an attack against
Taejon. Slightly after 1700, the 1st Battalion advances
on an uneventful three-mile march. Suddenly, machine
gun fire rakes their ranks as they approach the previously
held artillery positions. Carbine fire joins the machine
guns and the advance stalls. As dusk settles over the
area, the 1st Battalion, ordered to retire if the mission
could not be completed by darkness, returns to Non-
san.
The Communists, having successfully forged the
Kum River, drive toward Taejon. The shallow river per-
88
mits the tanks to easily cross. The swiftness of the ad-
vance nearly totally envelops the 24th Division’s posi-
tions at Taejon, a strategic town that contains a pri-
mary communications center. Taejon also stands at the
point of a highway that winds through the mountain
passes toward Pusan. The city also contains a double
track railroad line that follows a parallel route to the
harbor at Pusan. With this latest enemy success, the
19th Regiment, with its left flank now naked, stands
against the enemy.
In conjunction, I Company, 34th Infantry, had come
under shelling attacks during the day, but no enemy
ground attacks are launched. However, the unit be-
comes isolated. At about 2130, Lieutenant Hicks moves
Company I over the mountains east and southeast of
Kongju to rejoin its parent 34th Regiment. Before day-
break on the following day, the threatened 34th Regi-
ment redeploys slightly east of Nonsan and braces for
an attack. General Dean orders Colonel Stephens to
prepare the 21st Regiment, poised east of Taejon, to
move to support the 34th Regiment. Back in the 19th
Regimental area, eight miles north of Taejon, the reg-
iment, commanded by Colonel Meloy, extends from
its positions east of the railroad. The perimeter follows
the serpentine river line west and halts about three miles
outside of Kongju. The irregular river line zig-zags,
forcing the two battalion units to defend about 30 land
miles. The primary defensive line is concentrated along
the Seoul-Pusan Road, where it crosses the Kum River
(200–300 yards wide) at Taep’yong-ni.
First Battalion headquarters (Lt. Col. Otho T. Win-
stead) is located in the village of Palsan, about two miles
south of the Kum. Company E, 1st Battalion, is de-
ployed on the high ground overlooking the Kum River
railroad crossing at Sinch’on. The railroad crossing is ac-
tually in the area of ROK responsibility. Heading west
from this high ground, there is about a two-mile gap
that separates Company E, 1st Battalion, from Com-
pany C; the latter is deployed about three miles east of
Taep’yong-ni along three northern finger ridges of Hill
200.
Another gap (1,000 yards) in the line exists between
C Company and Company A, which is strung out
along the Kum, downstream and to the rear of a huge
dike west of the highway. Joining Company A at the
dike is a platoon of Company B, 1st Battalion, but the
remainder of the company is sprinkled along the high
ground, which nudges down toward the river. Respon-
sibility for the regiment continues west for another five
air-miles, but there simply are not sufficient troops to
adequately handle the task. A small outpost, about two
miles west, is manned by one platoon of Company G,
2nd Battalion, but there are few other defenses.
The final three miles of the regimental perimeter are
held by about 70 men of the I&R Platoon, an artillery
battery, and one platoon of engineers. The 2nd Battal-
ion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Thomas McGrail,
with two of its rifle companies, is held in reserve behind
the 1st Battalion. The 1st Battalion is bolstered by two
batteries of the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, com-
 89
manded by Lt. Colonel Miller Perry. These guns are
deployed at Tumanni, three miles south of the river.
Four other batteries are deployed farther south to aug-
ment the 19th Regiment. Two pieces are from the 11th
Field Artillery Battalion and two are from the 13th
Field Artillery Battalion (commanded by Lt. Colonel
Charles W. Stratton). Enemy fire begins to strike the
19th Regiment at 1300.
Despite air strikes during the day, the enemy remains
well positioned, opposite the 19th Infantry, and it is
poised to make a solid assault. However, the line holds
throughout the day and no major crossings to the south
bank occur. And those of lesser strength are repulsed.
The news is not necessarily good, as information fil-
ters into headquarters concerning the defeat of the 34th
Regiment at Konju. This distressing information seems
to coincide with the disintegration of the left flank.
The imperiled 19th Regiment prepares for the worst.
Apparently, there is much misunderstanding among
units. Although the rumors are widely spread that the
34th Regiment collapsed, according to the 24th In-
fantry War Diary, a collapse of the 34th Regiment did
not occur. The diary (132400K July to 142400K July)
states, “It is believed that this enemy force infiltrated
across the Kum River to the west during the night and
remained hidden in the hills until a force of 600 to 800
men, with plenty of mortars and machine guns, had
assembled. The force then debouched from the hills
and struck the 63rd FABn without warning. With most
of its artillery lost and a large enemy force building up
to even greater size to its rear, the 34th RCT was given
permission to withdraw to the south under cover of
darkness, commencing after midnight.”
Central Mountain area: the N.K. 12th Division
seizes a Han River crossing at Tanyang and afterwards,
it institutes a fight to capture Tanyang Pass from the
S.K. 8th Division. As the battles unfold, the S.K. 8th
Division is compelled to abandon its positions. By the
middle of July, the North Korean forces are breaching
the Taebaek Mountain passes heading into the upper
Naktong River Valley.
East Coast area: the N.K. 5th Division, which had
crossed the 38th Parallel on the 25th of June, has driven
south over the mountains. It has moved without oppo-
sition and now encroaches Yongdok. As the enemy ad-
vances, the ROK forces begin to fold, offering little op-
position. Two tunnels, two bridges and two passes, all
located between Yonghae and Yongdok and each greatly
needed by the enemy, are blown to slow their progress.
Powerful surface guns of the U.S. Navy are commit-
ted. The huge ships move close, then blast the cliffs
that overlook the coastal highway. The thunderous
bombardment creates instant landslides that add more
obstacles along the enemy’s path.
At Yongdok, S.K. Brigadier General Lee Chu Sik,
commanding general, 3rd ROK Division, proclaims
that he wants to redeploy his forces south of Yongdok.
He also intends to transfer his division command post
to Pohang-dong, but Colonel Emmerich immediately
nixes this idea. Emmerich forcefully contends that the
July 14, 1950
east coast road must be held at all costs. Although the
S.K. 3rd Division is isolated from the remainder of the
operational S.K. Army, replenishment of supplies and
ammunition has continued by shuttling bulky fishing
boats between there and Pusan. Also, it is anticipated
that supplies soon will be rolling in from Pohang-dong
on rail cars. The operation at Yongdok is also aug-
mented by the South Koreans’ harsh methods of ac-
quiring recruits and supply-bearers. The latter are used
to lug immense loads (A-frames) on their backs to
move supplies over the mountains. Within two days, el-
ements of the N.K. 5th Division are poised to strike
and seize Yongdok.
In other activity, the South Korean Army activates its
II Corps, composed of the S.K. 3rd, 6th and 8th Divi-
sions and the 23rd Regiment; headquarters will be in
Hamch’ang. The II Corps assumes responsibility for
South Korean operations in the eastern mountain area
and when possible, the coastal sector, defended by the
S. K. 23rd Regiment.
At Taegu, the South Korean Army establishes the 1st
Replacement Training Center, which is to accept and
train replacement troops within a ten-day schedule,
passing 1,000 troops through each class.
In Air Force activity, the 35th Fighter Interceptor
Group (FIG) arrives at Pohang from Japan. The 35th
becomes the initial U.S. Air Force fighter group to de-
ploy in South Korea. It will operate from K-3, a re-
cently completed airfield.
Also, the 6132nd Tactical Air Control Squadron is
activated at Taegu. Colonel Joseph D. Lee, USAF, is
appointed commanding officer. The unit is to provide
forward, ground-based air control for aircraft flying
close-air missions in support of ground forces. In ad-
dition, a Fifth Air Force–Eighth Army Joint Opera-
tions Center is activated at Taegu.
—In the United States: The final elements of
the convoy assigned to transport the 1st Provisional
Marine Brigade to Korea depart San Diego. This is
the final troop deployment from the United States to
be publicized for the duration of the war in Korea.
Ironically, it is also the first measurable contingent of
U.S. troops to depart the States and enter combat in
Korea.
The Marine commandant, Clifton B. Cates, stands
proudly near the docks, as he has done for the past three
days, to bid farewell to his Marines. Although it is ap-
parent to the commandant that the majority of the pri-
vates and PFCs are much too young to have served dur-
ing World War II, it is equally obvious to his trained eye
that the majority of the company commanders, pla-
toon leaders and the NCOs are molded from the “old
breed,” from Guadalcanal, Saipan, Tinian, Tarawa,
Pelelieu, Iwo and Okinawa.
The “old breed” that had battled the Japanese will en-
sure that the new breed upholds the traditions of the
corps. General Cates snaps off a mighty salute as the
troops pass. During the final send off, he speaks to his
Marines: “You boys clean this thing up in a couple of
months, or I’ll be over to see you.”
July 15, 1950
Soon after its departure, the transport USS Henrico
becomes crippled. It is inflicted with a major mechan-
ical malfunction while passing San Clemente Island.
Temporarily, the vessel is rendered unfit to sail. The
1st Battalion, 5th Marines Landing Team, and the reg-
imental commander, Lt. Colonel Murray, and his staff
are aboard. Colonel Murray and his staff transfer to the
USS Pickaway, but the 1st Battalion, comprising about
one-third of the brigade’s combat troops, returns to
port aboard the limping vessel.
No other ships are available to transport the Marines.
They are compelled to wait impatiently for the repairs
to be completed. The Marines are confined to the ves-
sel, except for some training on the docks, to prevent
any possible security leaks. The unfortunate gutting of
the U.S. Armed Forces, subsequent to the close of
World War II, has become even more obvious.
The Pickaway makes two attempts to embark, but on
both occasions the vessel is forced to return for addi-
tional repairs. Finally, on its third attempt, the ship
sails west, moving under the Golden Gate Bridge on its
solo cruise toward Japan.
In other activity, General Cates directs the activa-
tion of the First Replacement Draft (800 officers and
enlisted men). Their departure is scheduled for August
10. This augments General Edward Craig’s mission in
the event that the hostilities in Korea mandate a prema-
ture entrance of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade.
—In Japan: General MacArthur, recently appointed
commander-in-chief of the United Nations Forces, is
given a U.N. flag by U.S. Army chief of staff General
J. Lawton Collins during a historic ceremony atop the
Dai Ichi building. This is the first United Nations com-
mand.
General headquarters convenes daily ( July through
mid–September) to keep abreast of the Korean hostil-
ities during these first perplexing months. Those who
attend include Major General Willoughby (Intelligence
G-2), Brigadier General H.E. Eastwood (Logistics),
Brigadier General E.K. Wright (Operations) and rep-
resentatives of the Air Force and Navy. Ambassador Se-
bald frequently attends these meetings.
In other activity, at Yokohama, the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision begins its loading operations for the landing at
Pohang-dong. The cavalry expects to arrive in time to
forestall its loss to the enemy. Preparations during the
previous week have been hectic, due to the acute short-
age of amphibious shipping. Nevertheless, the U.S.
Navy comes through with two AKAs, six LSUs, two
MSTS transports and sixteen LSTs. In addition, LCMs
and LCVPs are on hand. Also, Admiral Joy, the com-
mander of Naval Forces Far East authorizes attacks
against any unidentified submarines if the action is in
self-defense or if it is evident that the unidentified ves-
sel is preparing to take action against U.S. forces.
In other activity, Fifth Air Force establishes an ad-
vance headquarters at Itazuke Air Force Base.
July 15 At 0600, the remnant 21st Regiment, 24th
Division, departs the Taejon airstrip. It moves east to-
90
ward Okch’on to establish a defensive position in the
heights to protect the rear of the 24th Division. Gen-
eral Dean has expressed concern that the North Kore-
ans might romp through the South Korean lines east of
Taejon, which also prompts him to redeploy the 21st
Regiment. The total regimental strength, including a
provisional group of 466 men, stands at about 1,100
troops. The 1st Battalion is composed of 517 men and
the 3rd Battalion stands at a mere 132 troops. Upon
completion of the eight-mile march, the 21st Regiment
spreads out. Its command post remains in Okch’on.
The line then extends to dominate the road that leads
from the Kum River ferry to the Seoul-Pusan High-
way. Also, a battery of the 11th Field Artillery Battal-
ion accompanies the 21st Regiment. Engineers wire the
nearby railroad and highway tunnels for demolition.
Meanwhile, at about 0700 along the Kum River
Line, the North Koreans begin to ford the river near the
19th Regiment’s far left positions. The I&R Platoon
streams a steady flow of machine gun fire into the ranks
and planes arrive to offer assistance. The combination
turns the enemy back. However, farther down the river
in the 34th Regimental sector, another enemy crossing
takes place. Slight skirmishing occurs when the I&R
Platoon probes to establish contact with the 34th Reg-
iment. Most of the 19th Regiment’s reserve (about 65
percent) is pushed up to help support the deficient left
flank. It, too, is thinly manned by only one machine
gun platoon from G Company and a contingent of 81-
mm mortars attached to H Company. The left flank is
further bolstered by two Quad-50s attached to the
26th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion and two light
tanks. These reserve troops are commanded by Lt.
Colonel Thomas McGrail, commanding officer, 2nd
Battalion, 19th Regiment. Still in reserve is Com-
pany F.
While General Dean continues to search for solutions
to hold back the advancing enemy, the North Korean
3rd Division makes plans to launch a powerful thrust.
Before the sun sets, an N.K. T-34 tank swings around
a bend in the road on the opposite side of the river.
Quick communication between a member of Com-
pany B and the company commander sounds the
alarm, but during the conversation, eight more tanks
are spotted. The tanks commence firing, but without
accuracy. Two friendly planes arrive to assist the 3rd
Platoon. Several tanks that had begun the barrage seek
refuge in the woods. The sole tank that remains on the
road is set afire by the aircraft.
The planes remain overhead until dark, but after
their departure, the North Koreans roll trucks
crammed with troops up to the bank of the river. Soon
after, new air strikes and formidable mortar and ar-
tillery barrages strike the enemy positions on the north
flank of the river. Many of the huts are set afire, giv-
ing the black sky a crimson glow. The North Koreans
attempt to cross in small groups and they sustain heavy
casualties, but some troops make it to the south bank
by swimming under cover fire afforded by their tanks.
Farther up the Kum River, at Hill 200, Company C
 91
repels the enemy three separate times, but friendly fire
inadvertently knocks out two of its 60-mm mortars
and cripples its other one. Corporal Tabor modifies a
mortar, then while holding the tube in his hand, he
cranks out over 300 rounds. This type of adamant re-
sistance by the 19th Regiment forbids all crossing at-
tempts. Undeterred, the enemy still prepares for a mas-
sive assault.
East Coast area: The North Korean 5th Division
continues prodding toward Yongdok.
In Air Force activity, at Taegu, the 51st Fighter
Squadron (Provisional) initiates its initial combat mis-
sion for F-51 Mustangs in Korea.
In other activity, Fifth Air Force issues an operation
order that assigns “Mosquito” call signs to airborne con-
trollers using T-6 planes. The T-6 aircraft become
known as Mosquito planes.
— In the United States: General Shepherd instructs
General Harry Liversedge, acting commanding gen-
eral, 1st Marine Division, to increase the training and
workday for the troops of the division. Coincidentally,
General MacArthur places his second request for a war-
strength Marine division for his plan to invade Inchon,
Korea.
In other activity, Generals Collins and Vandenberg
arrive back in the States (14th Washington time) from
the Far East; President Truman, the other JCS and
Louis Johnson are brought up to date.
— In Japan: A U.S. Army band gives the Navy a
U.S. armorers load .50-caliber machine gun ammunition belts into the wing of an F-51 Mustang.
July 15, 1950
proper send-off, enthusiastically playing “Anchors
Aweigh” as the warships of Task Force 90, commanded
by Rear Admiral Doyle, embark for Korea. Doyle is
aboard the USS McKinley, which will transport the 1st
Cavalry Division to Pohang-dong. Thanks to the post-
war actions of Congress, the gutted Navy is unable to
easily carry out the mission. Two previous military sea
transportation vessels, the USS Oglethorpe (AKA-100)
and the USS Titania, have been hurried to Yokosuka,
Japan, to be altered for handling boat skids. Other ur-
gently needed but unavailable equipment is quickly
manufactured. Even with the zealous effort to outfit
the fleet, there has been another and more desperate
crisis. The U.S. Navy lacks sufficient personnel to man
the ships and has been forced to commandeer person-
nel from the amphibious base at Coronado, Califor-
nia. The improvised fleet had been fabricated by reac-
tivating six former Japanese LSUs to augment the
AKAs, which have also been given a hurried transfusion
and face-lift to ensure a method of landing the troops.
The fleet departs to rendezvous with the Tractor Group,
but it is still unclear whether General Hobart Gay’s 1st
Cavalry will land unopposed. It reaches Pohang on the
18th. In conjunction, naval aircraft of Admiral John
M. Hoskins’ Carrier Group are on call to provide air
support if necessary.
In other activity, the Far East Command notifies
Major Tony Raibl (executive officer, 3rd Bn., 29th In-
fantry Regiment) that the regiment, based on Okinawa,
July 15, 1950 92

Top: A ground crew loads an F-51 Mustang with fragmentation bombs. Bottom: A U.S. Gun Motor Car-
riage (M15A1) moves to positions along the Kum River on July 15. It carries one 37-mm gun (M1A2)
and two .50-caliber (M2 HB) flexible machine guns.

should prepare for embarkment to Korea. Recent plans
for the 29th Regiment included about six weeks of
combat training, but the deteriorating situation in
Korea scraps the preparation. The 29th Regiment, as is
the case with most others in Korea, will be composed
of just two battalions. Headquarters remains on Oki-
nawa to form a base for another regiment, which will
be formed to assume responsibility for the defense of the
island. The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th Regiment, are
the first of the eleven infantry battalions initially re-
quested by MacArthur to bolster the effort to turn back
the Communists in Korea.
In other activity, General MacArthur, in an effort
to decrease the huge numbers of airlifts from Korea to
Japan, suggests supplementing the effort by use of the
Japanese railroads and sea ferries. MacArthur’s head-
quarters contacts Eighth Army, suggesting the imple-
mentation of daily ferry service. They originate in the
 93
Hakata-Moji area of Japan and move to Pusan, fed by
a conveyor belt of rails that funnel express trains from
the Tokyo-Yokohama vicinity, which essentially is a
modified version of the famed World War II Red Ball
express. The first train will depart Yokohama on July 23.
July 16 (See also, BATTLE OF THE KUM RIVER, this
entry.) In the Kum River area, the 24th Division sec-
tor, 21st Regimental zone, a message arrives at 0500
from Division G-3. It directs the 21st Regiment to dis-
patch one platoon of tanks from Company A, 71st
Tank Battalion, to the positions of the 19th Regiment
north of Taejon, but the tanks do not advance.
In conjunction, the G-3 Periodic Operations Report
Number 11, 24th Infantry Division notes that Com-
pany A, 71st Tank Battalion (1st Cavalry Division), is
attached to the 19th Regiment. The report also stipu-
lates that there is no change with Company A, 78th
Tank Battalion (24th Division), on July 16; the 71st
Bn. tanks bolster the 24th Division tanks.
East Coast area: The North Koreans begin flooding
into the area near Yongdok, but rather than offer seri-
ous opposition, the South Korean 23rd Regiment,
which holds positions in front of the imperiled town,
gives way and begins rushing south. The KMAG advi-
sors become perplexed as they become aware that the
critical situation that confronts them may become in-
surmountable. A message of inquiry from Eighth Army
Headquarters is received by Colonel Emmerich, who
dispatches a stark response, informing headquarters
that about 75 percent of the S.K. 23rd Regiment has ab-
sconded, fleeing south. The message says: “Advisors
threatening and shooting in the air trying to get them
[23rd S.K. Regiment] assembled. Commanding general
(lee chu sik) forming a straggler line. If straggler line is
successful we may be able to reorganize and reestablish
the line. If this fails I am afraid that the whole thing will
develop in complete disintegration.”
In other activity, thirty B-29s attached to Far East Air
Force attack the enemy railroad yards at Seoul. During the
raid the railroad bridge that spans the Han River, which
has survived several previous air raids, is finally destroyed.
Also, the 40th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (35th
Group), USAF, transfers from its base at Ashiya, Japan,
to Yonil Airfield, located in the eastern corridor below
the Naktong River.
A contingent of U.S. planes detects a column of
enemy armor in the vicinity of Choch’iwon and takes
it under attack. One plane, flown by Lieutenant Don-
ald B. Russell, is hit and severely damaged by antiair-
craft fire during the first strafing run. His plane loses its
left wing tip and the tip tank and his plane’s flaps also
become damaged. Nevertheless, Russell, at great risk
to his life, continues the attack and knocks out one
tank with a rocket and on successive passes, he damages
one other tank and destroys several vehicles. Afterwards,
he nurses the plane back to the base and is compelled
to make an emergency landing without flaps in total
darkness. Russell receives a Silver Star for his tremen-
dous heroism on this flight.
July 16, 1950
BATTLE OF THE KUM RIVER In the 19th Regiment,
24th Division sector along the Kum River, the enemy
strikes early. During the predawn hours, at about 0300,
a flash of brilliance bursts in the air as a flare is shot
from a passing North Korean plane. This brief illumi-
nation signals the attack. The north bank of the Kum
roars with violent sounds of artillery, and in cadence,
swarms of North Koreans initiate the crossing using
many methods, including rafting and swimming. The
massive assault is met by blistering fire; however, again
the Americans are too under-strength and their com-
munications become confusing.
As the 1st Battalion attempts to dilute enemy
strength with return fire, signals get crossed. At the
main crossing site, a contingent of the 11th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion pivots the guns toward the wrong lo-
cation and the requested flares do not appear. The mis-
take is deadly. The 1st Battalion’s 1st Platoon, C
Company, commanded by Lt. Thomas Maher, feels
the first heavy thud. Enemy troops that have penetrated
a large hole between C and E Companies at about 0400
initiate a furious attack. During the brutal combat,
Lieutenant Maher is called by Lieutenant Henry McGill
and asked to check on the situation; Maher responds:
“We’re doing fine.” And then, in less than a minute, a
shot from a burp gun slays Maher. It is the beginning
of the end. C Company, which has thrown back several
attacks during the night, is unable to repulse this fourth
thrust. Their positions are quickly overrun, and only
about thirteen men escape. They don’t retreat, but
rather hold steady on the middle finger of Hill 200.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans have begun to deeply
pierce the lines to initiate envelopment of the 1st Bat-
talion. They launch a series of attacks coordinated with
heavy infiltration to the rear. Company B, deployed
to the right, also comes under attack. An enemy force
composed of 300 to 400 men has crossed the river prior
to daybreak. By first light of day, additional separate
groups, composed of about 30 men each, are spotted
as they bolt across the river, wading through shoulder-
high water with their weapons extended over their
heads. It becomes apparent to Captain Monroe Ander-
son that once across the river, most of the North
Koreans, their uniforms adorned with bushes and
shrubs, conceal themselves in the hills, while others by-
pass Company B. Soon after, North Koreans are cross-
ing all along the regimental front, imperiling the entire
line.
By 0630, unyielding enemy pressure forces the 1st
Battalion to begin pulling back. Artillery and mortar fire
fails to break up the attack, and the expected air cover
is absent. Colonel Winstead, 1st Battalion Commander,
informs Colonel Meloy of his predicament. Winstead’s
command post and the positions of the Heavy Mortar
Company sustain severe fire, but the enemy surge jeop-
ardizes the entire battalion. The Communists overrun
a Company B platoon, which is deployed behind the
dike. About 15 survivors of the decimated platoon
make it to safety. In conjunction, a portion of
Company A is also leveled as the North Koreans plow
July 16, 1950
through the rice paddies and advance to capture the
heights at Kadong-ni.
Colonels Meloy and Winstead attempt to mount a
counterattack with their remaining force. One tank,
one Quad-50 antiaircraft artillery half-trac and an array
of troops that includes cooks and clerks mount a des-
perate but successful counterattack. By 0900 the Amer-
icans drive the enemy from the high ground at Kadong-
ni. During the bloody struggle, the 1st Battalion
Executive Officer, Major John Cook, the Battalion S-
1, Captain Alan Hackett and the Battalion S-3, Wayne
B. Macomber, are killed.
Despite the lack of air support, the 19th Regiment
prevails; General Dean is informed that as he requested,
it can retain its positions until dark. However, another
unexpected entity enters the battlefield strategy. Al-
though the 19th Regiment is confident it can hold the
line, it becomes evident that Colonel Meloy has no
troops to defend his infiltrated rear against the North
Koreans who had earlier bypassed Company B and
Company F at the Kum. By now, these Communists
have established formidable roadblocks at a sharp turn
along the primary road about three miles behind the
lines near Tuman-Ni. Urgent calls are placed for the
airstrikes that had been promised on the previous day.
The enemy takes great advantage of the battered 19th
Regiment.
A small American force attempts to procure addi-
tional ammunition for the weary 1st Battalion, but it is
halted by the obstacle. Lieutenant Robert Nash, lead-
ing the contingent, is instructed by Colonel Meloy to
head back and direct Colonel McGrail to commit
Company G and Company H, 2nd Battalion, to at-
tack and demolish the roadblock. En route, enemy fire
destroys Nash’s jeep. Undaunted, he eventually walks
into the 13th Field Artillery Battalion positions, gets
another jeep and then speeds to Sangwang-ni to give
Colonel McGrail his new orders. While this unexpected
setback is unraveling, additional enemy troops begin
to pummel the 19th Regiment’s artillery, which in-
creases the urgency of reinforcements. Horrendous
stress pushes the beleaguered 1st Battalion to the brink
of endurance.
Colonel Perry, commanding officer of the 52nd Field
Artillery Battalion, peers westward from his command
post that stands outside of Tuman-ni. He detects a pro-
longed line of enemy troops, clothed in white and
about two miles distant in the mountains. These enemy
troops scamper over one ridge, then disappear over an-
other ridge to the south. Colonel Perry orders Battery
A to commence firing on the moving column. Simul-
taneously, he informs the 13th Field Artillery Battalion,
which is deployed below his positions, that North Ko-
reans are encroaching his lines.
Events begin to rapidly change. While the 13th Field
Artillery Battalion prepares for the attack, a portion of
the enemy force tails off and advances against Com-
pany B, 52nd Field Artillery Battalion. The morning
lingers like a plague, and the necessary airpower and
additional ammunition are unavailable. Since dawn,
94
only six friendly aircraft have sortied over the front.
More urgent pleas for airstrikes go unanswered. How-
ever, one platoon of tanks (Company A, 71st Tank
Battalion) is en route from the 21st Regiment’s positions
to bolster the beleaguered 19th Regiment and the 52nd
FABn.
A furious exchange, beginning with American
artillery fire, erupts between Company B, 52nd Field
Artillery Battalion and the North Koreans. During the
first enemy salvo, the battery commander and his first
sergeant are both slain; and about five other top peo-
ple are badly wounded. The executive officer, Lieuten-
ant William Steele, assumes command. He continues to
direct the fire while he regroups his command. In con-
junction with this skirmish, another improvised group
of soldiers that includes medical personnel is mobilized
to initiate a counterattack in synchronization with ar-
tillery fire of Company B to crush the enemy’s flank.
The combined effort succeeds and this enemy attack is
thwarted.
The North Koreans retire southward and head to-
ward the hills. However, the situation continues to be-
come more grave for the 19th Regiment. Its only es-
cape route from the battlefield is blocked. As the hours
pass, the enemy continues to fortify the roadblock and
the nearby hills to gain domination of the entire area.
In addition to the imperiled 19th Regiment, the posi-
tions of the 11th and 13th Field Artillery Battalions
(both deployed farther south) are barraged from inac-
curate long range small arms fire, signaling yet another
alarm.
The vehicles that had been halted at the roadblock
are increasing in numbers. Colonel Meloy arrives there
with Major Edward Logan (Regimental S-3), only to
discover chaos and a definite lack of discipline. The
Americans return fire, but the enemy positions remain
concealed, causing the fire to be wasted. Meloy attempts
to rally the men and initiate an attack to secure the
hills, but he becomes wounded. Command of the Kum
River Line is then assumed by Colonel Winstead (1st
Battalion Commander). Time flashes by at a furious
pace, and the battle-weary troops must contend with yet
another enemy, the temperature, which surges to more
than 100 degrees.
By about 1300, General Dean is informed of the on-
going crisis, including the wounding of Colonel Meloy.
Dean informs Major Logan that reinforcements will
arrive to destroy the roadblock. However, Dean spec-
ifies that Logan must hold until about 1530, the esti-
mated time of arrival of the fresh troops. Following the
conversation between Dean and Logan, enemy fire de-
stroys the communications vehicle, ceasing all commu-
nications.
Soon after, Colonel Winstead directs Logan to form
an assault group at the roadblock and attempt to re-
duce it. Logan is ordered to dispatch a messenger to
establish contact with the advancing reinforcements.
Colonel Winstead then begins to move back to the po-
sitions of the 1st Battalion at the river. By about 1330,
he orders it to pull back. During his return to the Kum
 95
River, Winstead is slain. The withdrawal is overtaxing,
as the men of the 19th Regiment are not accustomed to
the steep hills, the high humidity and the summer sun
over Korea. Many of the men from Company C are re-
luctant to move from their foxholes on Hill 200 be-
cause of an ongoing ferocious enemy artillery attack
that has the company pinned down.
One soldier, Corporal Jack Arawaka, becomes seri-
ously wounded when his machine gun blows up in his
face, costing him most of his sight and all of his hear-
ing. Arawaka, undaunted by his horrendous wounds,
clasps a BAR and fiercely resists the enemy advance.
Corporal Arawaka never leaves the hill.
During the withdrawal, Company C discovers dead
enemy soldiers scattered along a rice paddy ditch. The
bodies are partially covered with water. One corpse still
firmly clutches a grenade as Lt. Augustus Orr is pass-
ing. Suddenly, Orr spots an air bubble, then he sees the
corpse open his eyes. Orr quickly liquidates the born-
again soldier. The Americans ensure that the rest of the
North Koreans in the paddy are truly deceased, and
then they resume their desperate journey. When Com-
pany C reaches the road, it encounters a contingent of
enemy troops, but the Communists turn and head back
toward the bridge rather than initiate a skirmish.
Companies A and B, also heading south, are barely
visible in the forward distance as C Company also
moves south along the highway. Along the way, about
six enemy machine guns, manned on the hill east of
Palsan-ni, commence firing on Company C. The en-
filade disrupts the disciplined withdrawal. The blister-
ing fire stuns the unit and causes the troops to disperse
haphazardly. The survivors break south, some forming
small groups and others moving individually. The
wounded have trouble escaping, but as usual brave
corpsmen remain behind, rendering aid and sacrific-
ing their own safety. Company B moves along the west
side of the highway as it pulls back under the protec-
tion of F Company, but while providing this cover,
Company F is struck at its left rear and left flank.
In the meantime, the crisis at the roadblock height-
ens as more vehicles arrive to lengthen the line of stalled
trucks. All the while, the enemy fire from the over-
looking heights becomes more incessant. Some officers
mount attacks to destroy the enemy positions contain-
ing automatic weapons, but all fail miserably. The two
available light tanks at the roadblock are unable to lo-
cate the exact positions of the enemy guns because they
are using smokeless powder. Nevertheless, the tanks
commence fire in hopes of striking the concealed po-
sitions, but to no avail.
While attempts are in progress to silence the guns
in the high ground, four F-51s appear overhead. The
planes pound the hill and create a new problem for the
attacking American troops. During one of the assaults
by a 50-man contingent, the leader, Lieutenant Lloyd
Smith, and one other officer suddenly find themselves
alone after advancing about three hundred feet. Lack-
ing the remainder of the assault unit, the two officers
move back down the hill toward their positions at the
July 16, 1950
roadblock. In the meantime, heavy enemy fire contin-
ues to pulverize the area near the U.S. vehicles. Most of
the soldiers remain in the ditches to avoid being shot.
As the dreadful day continues, other means of pen-
etrating the roadblock continue, all scoring little suc-
cess. Repeated attempts are made to move the crippled
vehicles, but this only results in more casualties. Con-
sequently, each time the vehicles begin to move, the
enemy fire rains upon them. Supporting air strikes also
fail to terminate the enemy machine gun fire.
Orders go out to Company F, which has been held
in reserve, to attack and break through the roadblock;
however, its circumstances are also bleak since it is
under siege and totally surrounded. By 1430, Major
Logan places Captain Edgar Fenstermacher in com-
mand of the troops at the roadblock while he leads
about twenty men east, then south to find a circuitous
route around the blockage. After a harrowing two-hour
trek, the contingent encounters the 13th Field Artillery
Battalion, which has already begun moving farther
south. Shortly thereafter, Major Logan confers with
General Dean. Meanwhile, 2nd Lt. Robert Nash com-
pletes his eventful journey to Colonel McGrail’s com-
mand and from there, he speeds to Taejon airstrip to re-
ceive permission from General Menoher, assistant
division commander, to commandeer vehicles to trans-
port Companies G and H to support the 19th Regi-
ment at the Kum River.
During the swiftly changing events, General Dean
instructs Major Logan to continue moving south to es-
tablish a new line of defense west of the Taejon airstrip
and he also orders Colonel McGrail to lead the rein-
forcements to help stall the attacking North Koreans at
the Kum. In the meantime, five jeeps, each containing
wounded men that had breached the roadblock, race
through the perimeter of the 13th Field Artillery.
While running the gauntlet under sheets of fire, the
wounded are each wounded again at least one time.
The convoy, led by Lt. Colonel Homer Chandler,
who sustains a leg wound, continues racing south,
while Colonel McGrail moves forward with the relief
force, bolstered by two light tanks and four antiair-
craft vehicles, each crammed with troops. The advance
is short-lived. After traveling about one mile, the rein-
forcements round a sharp curve that places the relief
convoy about 300 to 400 yards from the final curve
prior to reaching the roadblock. Without warning,
enemy fire, seemingly from all directions, pounds the
vehicles and inflicts a startling and crushing blow. The
U.S. antiaircraft vehicles return fire to no avail. All four
vehicles are destroyed. The majority of the infantry
bolts from the vehicles to seek refuge in nearby ditches.
The two surviving light tanks commence firing and
blast the suspected enemy positions. By 1600, having
expended all their ammunition, both tanks head south.
The casualty rate becomes extremely high: personnel in
the vehicles either wounded or killed stand at 90 per-
cent.
Back behind the roadblock, the entrapped survivors
remain unaware of the rescue attempts. Undaunted,
July 16, 1950
they continue to search for a way to break through. Fi-
nally, at about 1800, amidst the burning debris, several
officers decide to ram the barricade with a tank to get
Colonel Meloy (wounded) to safety where he can receive
medical help. Subsequent to four attempts, the charg-
ing tank plows the burning vehicles and other inciner-
ated obstacles out of the center of the road to create suf-
ficient space to break out. The roaring tank, trailed by
about twenty trucks, darts through the enfilade just be-
fore another hurricane of enemy fire again forbids pas-
sage.
During the hurried trip south, the tank that permit-
ted the breakthrough stalls and it is transporting
Colonel Meloy. All the other vehicles refuse to stop and
give assistance. These retreating vehicles express
no concern for their fellow troops nor their wounded
commanding officer, nor the tankers that made the
breakthrough possible. However, a contingent of Cap-
tain Michael Barszcz’s troops provide protection for
Meloy and soon after, the 2nd Battalion gets him to
safety.
About one hour later, at 1900, the 500 entrapped
men receive orders from Captain Fenstermacher to pre-
pare to walk out. They are directed to head east subse-
quent to destroying all 100 vehicles. During this activ-
ity, Fenstermacher is slain when he sustains a shot in
the neck. Not all the defending troops have regrouped
at the roadblock; rather, many have scattered individ-
ually and in small groups, retreating east toward Taejon.
Meanwhile, as the ambush of the relief force under
McGrail is taking place, Company H is rushing to the
scene. Company G, near Kongju, is still halted, await-
ing transportation to the roadblock. At the same time,
the I&R Platoon is diligently destroying the road at
Kongju to create obstacles in the path of the expected
enemy advance. Soon after, at Yusong, Company G,
commanded by Capt. Barszcz, arrives and receives in-
structions from General Menoher to fall out and de-
ploy on the river bank to resist some expected tanks,
but this order is changed and G Company is directed to
head for the roadblock.
While rushing to the front, a retreating truck trans-
porting a military policeman on the front fender causes
a false alarm as the policeman screams, “Tanks! Tanks!”
The truck keeps racing south, but Capt. Barszcz places
his jeep across the road to block it, then he deploys his
men to attack the tanks. However, the alarm had been
false. After the unnecessary waste of time, Company G
advances on foot and after a short walk, the unit en-
counters General Dean. He instructs Barszcz to advance
and establish contact with the enemy, then launch an at-
tack to demolish the roadblock.
The advance continues, however, without results,
just additional casualties. G Company reaches a point
about two miles south of Tuman-ni and six miles north
of Yusong, still about one-half mile from the enemy
positions, when it comes under long range fire. The
unit drives forward and ascends a hill to approach the
enemy to their left. The troops reach the summit at
sundown and establish fortified positions, but soon af-
96
terward orders reach them instructing them to with-
draw. This withdrawal terminates the effort to break
the roadblock and rescue the trapped contingents.
While Company G pulls back toward Yusong, it
comes upon the stalled tank, Colonel Meloy and some
other wounded men. An officer returns with a vehicle.
The wounded, including Meloy, who had been aban-
doned earlier by the others in their convoy, are sped to
Yusong.
As the enduring day comes to a close, the battered
survivors cling to hope, but again the valiant efforts of
the majority are shortchanged by the callous actions of
a minority.
About one hour before midnight, the final survivors
at the roadblock are heading east toward the hills. The
ascent is tough, and many of the wounded (about 30
men) are being carried on litters by able-bodied troops.
During the climb many of the litter bearers vanish,
abandoning the wounded. And those who reach the
crest with the seriously wounded maintain that the in-
jured can be carried no farther. Captain Linton J. But-
trey, medical officer, and the regimental chaplain, Her-
man G. Felhoelter, decide to remain with the wounded
from this group. Chaplain Felhoelter then advises Cap-
tain Buttrey to escape as the two men realize that the
enemy is extremely close to their defenseless positions.
Buttrey departs and sustains a serious wound as he gets
away.
Soon after, the North Koreans pounce on the
wounded men. Sergeant James W. Haskins, Headquar-
ters Company, observes the slaughter though his binoc-
ulars. While the chaplain is praying over the wounded,
the enemy massacres him and all of the wounded
Americans.
By the following day, survivors of the 19th Regiment
begin to reach Taejon and Yusong. The grueling con-
test has cost the regiment heavily, but Companies G
and E remain operable. Company E, deployed at the
railroad bridge on the east flank, has not yet come
under attack. Of the regiment’s 900 men at the begin-
ning of the battle, only 434 are reported on the roster
in Taejon on the 17th. Company C sustains 122 casu-
alties out of 171 men. The Regimental Headquarters
Company suffers 57 casualties out of a strength of 191
men. The 1st Battalion, composed of 785 men, sus-
tains a 43 percent casualty rate (338 men). The 2nd
Battalion sustains lesser casualties, 86 troops out of 777
men. Also, the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, com-
posed of 393 men, sustains 53 casualties. The 19th
Regiment in its entirety, including artillery compo-
nents, suffers 19 percent casualties (650 men). During
the afternoon of the 17th, following its devastating de-
feat, the 19th Regiment moves to Yongdong to be re-
equipped and await replacement troops.
The North Korean 3rd Division had failed repeatedly
to permanently penetrate the frontal positions of the
19th Regiment during the day, except for the positions
of Company C on Hill 200; the defenders successfully
repelled the attacks or drove them back by counterat-
tack. Nonetheless, the enemy’s attack again over-
 97
Yongdong, located southeast of Taejon. U.S. contingents prepare for action against the enemy that con-
trols the hills there. The town is abandoned on 26 July.
whelmed the American units by penetration and
envelopment, although no enemy tanks had been com-
mitted south of the Kum River during this engage-
ment. By now, the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions have
crossed the Kum River, and they are closing on Tae-
jon. In conjunction, the N.K. 2nd Division, which had
been hitting stiff ROK resistance, is unable to join the
other divisions in time for the fight for Taejon.
The Americans continue to withdraw to their next
designated delaying positions, much closer to Taejon.
Shortly after sunset, the 34th Regiment pulls back from
its positions near Nonsan. It moves south about twenty
miles, where it redeploys several miles west of Taejon
with responsibility for the immediate area north and
west of the city. However, the 34th Infantry, like the
other two regiments of the 24th Division, has been se-
riously weakened and is able to muster only about one
battalion to defend its perimeter. Responsibility for the
area was to have been shared with the 19th Infantry,
but the 19th is now rendered ineffective for battle.
Colonel Charles Beauchamp arrives from Japan to
July 16, 1950
assume command of the 34th Regiment, replacing
Colonel Martin (killed on July 8). Also, all 24th Divi-
sion artillery units, except the 105-mm howitzers of
the 11th Field Artillery Battalion, are merged into a
composite battalion and ordered to spread out to defend
the Taejon airfield. Colonel Meloy and Colonel Chan-
dler both receive medical attention in a hospital.
—In the United States: The Advance Echelon of the
1st Marine Air Wing departs the West Coast by air for
Japan. Brigadier Generals Edward A. Craig, command-
ing officer, 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, and Thomas
J. Cushman, his chief of staff, and several staff members
are aboard the transport plane. The entourage stops at
Pearl Harbor to confer with General Shepherd, USMC,
and subsequently Admiral Radford, prior to pushing to
the Far East. During the brief meetings in Hawaii, Gen-
eral Craig reiterates his sharp concerns about inadequate
amounts of equipment and a crucial shortage of replace-
ment troops for the Marine ranks, which already are
dangerously thin. Following the conferences, the plane
departs, arriving in Japan on the 19th.
July 17, 1950
July 17 General Walton H. Walker, subsequent to
instructions from General MacArthur, assumes com-
mand of all Republic of Korea ground troops. South
Korean President Syngman Rhee has requested this ac-
tion, but there is nothing in writing to this effect. As the
conflict progresses, U.N. command of ROK forces oc-
casionally becomes a strained endeavor. Later in the
day, General Walker is presented a United Nations flag
from a representative of the U.N. The flag is hung at
Eighth Army Headquarters.
At Taejon, General Dean concentrates on trying to
establish a solid line in front of the town. Dean and
two other officers remain at Taejon, but the remainder
of Headquarters, 24th Division, departs by rail to
Yongdong. By mid-afternoon, the 34th Regiment is in
place in front of Taejon, but the other two regiments ex-
pected to share responsibility are unavailable. Again,
the defenses are implemented for the purpose of slow-
ing the enemy, not halting the attack. The key to suc-
cess depends on the arrival of sufficient numbers of re-
inforcements.
In other activity, the 24th Division Operations In-
structions No. 7 at Taejon (0900) dictates changes with
attached tanks: “Company A, 71st Tank Battalion, 1st
platoon relieved from attachment 19th RCT and re-
verts to company control.” It is attached to 21st Regi-
ment. Also, the instructions order the 24th Division
tanks, Company A, 78th Tank Battalion, to move to
Yongdong by rail.
East Coast area: the North Koreans easily seize
Yongdok as the undisciplined S.K. 23rd Regiment col-
lapses. Eighth Army, stunned by the lightning quick
capture of the town, reacts immediately. The 159th
Field Artillery Battalion, the first artillery unit brought
into the area to support the South Koreans, initiates its
mission during the afternoon by pounding enemy po-
sitions. In conjunction, the South Koreans regroup and
prepare to mount a counterattack on the following day
to regain the lost terrain. The contest for control of
Yongdok bounces back and forth until finally on the
2nd of August, the South Koreans terminate the bat-
tle and gain control of the town.
In other activity, forty-seven B-29s attack Hung-
nam along the northeast coast of North Korea; the pri-
mary target is the Chosin Nitrogen Plant there. A group
of 3 B-29s accidentally bomb friendly civilians in An-
dong.
July 18 A shipment of 3,000 antitank mines arrives
in Pusan from Japan; Japanese factories have been man-
ufacturing these mines since the beginning of July to aid
the U.N. cause. Also, the fleet transporting the 1st Cav-
alry Division arrives off Pohang-dong on the southeast
coast of Korea at 0558. The flotilla moves without in-
cident into Yongil Bay and the landing occurs without
opposition. With the good news at hand, Admiral
Doyle informs the Seventh Fleet planes that their serv-
ices would not be required to cover the ground troops.
Admiral Struble then orders the Seventh Fleet to pro-
ceed north into the Sea of Japan to implement the
98
air strikes that have been scheduled subsequent to cov-
ering the landing. Carrier based planes attack and dev-
astate North Korean airfields, railroads, factories and
an oil refinery at Wonsan. And, the planes strike targets
at Hamhung, Hungnam and Numpyong.
The raids continue into the following day. One naval
plane is lost (on the 19th) during the missions. It is the
initial naval plane that is lost during the conflict. Mean-
while, the fleet’s (CTF 90) signal is raised: “Land the
Landing Force.” The administrative (Plan B — unop-
posed) landing gets a rousing approval from Comman-
der Noel, Admiral Doyle’s planning officer, as the
beaches are not considered suitable against opposition,
and especially because now a sinister typhoon, dubbed
“Helene,” is arriving.
The first contingent of troops (8th Cavalry Regi-
ment) debark slightly after 0600 and are greeted by Lt.
General Walton H. Walker. At 0630, the smiling gen-
eral welcomes the 5th Cavalry. Soon after, the landing
is temporarily aborted, thanks to Helene (“Grace” in
Marine records), the rampaging typhoon. The 7th Cav-
alry Regiment and the 82nd Field Artillery Battalion be-
come temporary sailors, a tedious task for ground
troops untrained for conquering seasickness. Despite
the nasty storm, by midnight the LSTs unload about 60
percent of their cargoes; the Mount McKinley,
Oglethorpe, Titania and the Union are totally unloaded.
A total of 10,027 troops debark and 2,022 vehicles plus
2,729 tons of supplies are unloaded.
The inclement weather also suspends the unloading
of supplies at Pusan, which dangerously depletes Eighth
Army’s rations. Meanwhile, back at Pohang-dong,
trains stand ready to shuttle the cavalrymen north to the
battle zone. Some armored units of the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision flow ashore within the first twenty-four hours.
Before one week passes, they engage Communist forces
on the Taegu-Pusan Highway.
At Taejon, General Dean prepares to abandon the
city on the following day. In conjunction, Colonel
Stephens’ 21st Regiment is at Okch’on. Engineers with
the regiment work east of Taejon, wiring the tunnels
for demolition. However, General Walker, following a
stop at General Gay’s positions at Pohang, arrives at
Taejon Airstrip during the morning and plans change.
By day’s end, evacuation plans are aborted. Walker,
having acquired a detailed report of all available troops
and of those reinforcements en route, decides to hold
Taejon with the 24th Division and ROK troops, bol-
stered by the 1st Cavalry, which deploys around
Okch’on and south of Taejon along the Kumsan Road.
Walker’s strategy calls for halting the North Koreans
between Taejon and Taegu.
General Walker is convinced that if the North Ko-
reans compel a withdrawal beyond the Naktong River,
the U.S.–ROK troops can hold there until a bolstered
Eighth Army can initiate an offensive. Ultimately, Dean
is informed by General Walker that the 24th Division
must hold Taejon for 48 hours. Consequently, this ex-
tends Dean’s plan by 24 hours. In accordance with
Walker’s wishes, Dean readjusts his strategy. He goes to
 99 July 18, 1950

A U.S. Army contingent loads into a landing craft July 18 off Pohang-dong on the Korean east coast.

the 24th Division command post at Yongdong and or-
ders the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, to return from
there to Taejon. In conjunction, Battery B, 13th Field
Artillery Battalion, is directed to depart its positions at
Okch’on and redeploy at the Taejon airstrip. Also, the
Reconnaissance Company (attached to the division) at
Kumsan is transferred to control of the 34th Regiment
to afford the regiment more immediate information
concerning its southern flank.
However on the 19th, the new regimental com-
mander, Colonel Beauchamp, orders it to move to Tae-
jon. When the reconnaissance company abandons
Kumsan, the southern flank becomes defenseless and
without eyes, giving the enemy great advantage.
July 18, 1950 100
Top: Landing craft head for the beach in vicinity of Pohang-dong. LSTs are on the left. Bottom: A U.S.
infantry contingent (1st Cavalry Division) lands at Pohang-dong.
General Dean, unaware of the movement of the Re-
connaissance Company, confers with Colonel Stephens
and informs him that the 21st Regiment should remain
along the Taejon-Okch’on Road and in the hills north-
west of Taejon, between it and Okch’on to keep the
enemy from breaking through ROK lines. The 21st In-
fantry, however, is directed to dispatch frequent patrols
into Taejon. In conjunction, the combination of tanks,
including the 24th Division’s Company A, 78th Tank
Battalion, and those of the 1st Cavalry, Company A,
71st Tank Battalion, gives the 24th Division added
strength; the latter includes six officers and 122 en-
listed men.
In other activity, the N.K. 2nd Division departs
 101
Ch’ongju to hook up with the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divi-
sions to bolster the attack to seize Taejon. The 2nd Di-
vision has sustained severe casualties along its march
and is unable to reach the objective on time.
In still other activity, General John H. Church is
promoted to major general.
East Coast area: Elements of the South Korean 3rd
Division form to attack and regain Yongdok. U.S.
planes converge over enemy positions at Yongdok at
0545 and deposit enormous amounts of menacing fire-
power on the North Koreans. This blow is followed by
a huge barrage launched by the naval surface guns of the
fleet. The enemy receives no interlude. At 0600, the
light cruiser Juneau blasts two star shells into the sky to
signal the attack. The South Koreans, their numbers
swelled by reinforcements, race forward under the um-
brella coverage of the massive naval guns. The exhaus-
tive sprint carries them to positions from where their
small-arms weapons become effective. Other naval
guns, firing in concert with the ground troops’ support
fire, pound the enemy’s rear. The combined thrust
compels the North Koreans to evacuate and regroup
about three miles north of the town.
Although the South Koreans take the objective, it is
lost again on the following day. Contingents of the
N.K. 5th Division counterattack and push the South
Koreans back out of the Yongdok. Determined to re-
venge their loss, the South Koreans open another attack
on the 21st, which opens a new segment of the roller
coaster ride for domination of the area. The bulk of
the ground fighting is at close quarters, causing grue-
some results.
In the meantime, more warships arrive and the
tenacity of the naval vessel’s surface guns accelerates in
concert with the aircraft. The planes and naval vessels
give a repeat performance over Yongdok and deliver an
early wake-up call to the occupants. The destroyers
USS Higbee, DeHaven, Mansfield, and Swenson and the
HMS Belfast, a British cruiser, are offshore.
The incessant barrage, when enjoined by artillery
and mortar fire, peels the skin from the earth and ig-
nites raging fires that torch the arid battle zone. Fierce
combat propels the South Koreans back into the cov-
eted town; however, the enemy, despite the enfilade
of U.N. air and naval support, takes advantage of its
own artillery support and retakes the lost ground by
dusk.
By day’s end, the entire area, including the hills,
stands stark naked. The terrain stretching from
Kanggu-dong through Yongdok and several miles be-
yond is denuded of vegetation. The landscape is clut-
tered with clusters of mangled corpses. Every tiny vil-
lage in the vicinity has been decimated. Although the
North Koreans recapture Yongdok, the naval armada
remains offshore to keep them under check for a while.
Aircraft continue to dominate the skies. From dawn
to dusk, planes deliver a steady stream of ravaging fire
to restrict the enemy’s movement. On occasion, contin-
gents emerge from the burning rubble of Yongdok and
attempt to maneuver through the mountains to circle
July 18, 1950
the ROK forces, but they become conspicuous targets
and sustain heavy losses.
Today, it is estimated that effective fire, initiating
solely from the Juneau (according to observers), ac-
counts for the deaths of about 400 North Korean
troops. Several days later, on the 24th, according to in-
formation from captured prisoners, about 800 North
Koreans are killed after getting snagged, immobilized
and annihilated by the combined power of planes at-
tacking from the west in synchronization with the naval
surface guns that lambaste the grid area from the east.
The struggle for control of the town decreases slightly
while the N.K. 5th Division regroups and the South
Koreans receive reinforcements. But several more
fiercely contested battles occur. The reformed S.K.
22nd Regiment and contingents of the ROK Naval
Combat Team arrive to bolster the assault force. Also,
U.S. forces have been deployed to the rear of the S.K.
23rd Regiment, near Pohang-dong.
On the 23rd, the U.S. 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry,
deployed behind the S.K. 23rd Regiment and restricted
by orders to support the ROK forces with “fire only,”
discovers a problem; the men of Company C, deployed
on Hill 181 (Round Top), stare spellbound as the
North Koreans and South Koreans badger each other on
the southern fringes of Yongdok. The Americans must
refrain from giving assistance. The directed passiveness
pays no dividends as the North Koreans await darkness
and surround Hill 181, but no enemy attack is
mounted during the night. In another instance on the
23rd, an 81-mm mortar platoon attached to Company
D becomes encircled by North Korean troops, but they
are driven back.
On the 24th, the S.K. 23rd Regiment again recap-
tures Yongdok; using a preconceived strategy it takes the
objective, then pulls out to form a strong night perime-
ter. During the action, the U.S. 21st Regiment relieves
the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, and takes responsibility
for guarding the rear of the ROK forces at Yongdok.
Later, the N.K. 5th Division moves into Yongdok and
is greeted by more overpowering air strikes and naval
surface vessel bombardments. Despite the gargantuan
strikes that inflict heavy casualties, the enemy retains its
tenacity.
Nonetheless, the S.K. 3rd Division is determined to
gain absolute victory, although initially the command-
ing general, Lee Chu Sik, had only reluctantly agreed
to renew the attack. The big push, scheduled for July
27, commences on time. At 0830, the artillery in ca-
dence with the navy’s long guns announces the attack
and initiate a thunderous bombardment. Swarms of
aircraft join the attack and enunciate the intentions of
the South Koreans. The ROKs fearlessly attack and
hammer the North Koreans. In turn, the Communists
batter the South Koreans, dealing out equal punish-
ment. The slugfest ensues nearly without pause. The
fate of Yongdok is finally decided on the 2nd of Au-
gust, when a victorious S.K. 3rd Division routs the
enemy and chases them north.
This victory culminates the first effective holding
July 19, 1950
action against the enemy since the outbreak of hostil-
ities. Victory had been tilted to the South Koreans be-
cause of the tremendously effective methods and fire-
power of the aircraft and ships. Also, the terrain did
not permit the Communists to unfold their usual en-
velopment tactics.
West Coast area: The unopposed N.K. 6th Divi-
sion continues to move south along the west coast; it en-
croaches Kunsan, which possesses a port.
In Naval activity, seven planes (VF-51), led by
Commander A.D. Pollock from the Valley Forge, take
off during the morning and swoop up the northeast
coast beyond Wonsan, where they locate an operable oil
refinery that has survived three previous bombing raids.
During the latter part of the afternoon (1700), twenty-
one aircraft are launched from the Valley Forge.
Ten F4U Corsairs, equipped with two rockets each
and ample supplies of 20-mm ammunition, led by Lt.
Commander W.R. Pittman (VF-53), and eleven AD
Skyraiders, each carrying two rockets (high velocity)
and one 500 pound bomb, augmented by one 1,000
pound bomb, led by Lt. Commander N.D. Hodson
(VA-55), execute the mission. The thunderous chain of
explosions, columns of swirling flames and mountains
of smoke attest to its success. The refinery is reduced to
ruins, but when the planes are 60 miles away, return-
ing to the Valley Forge, the smoke-filled sky remains in
view. The Chosin Oil Refinery, capable of producing
1,700,000 barrels of oil a year, is rendered useless.
Ironically, according to the Key West Agreement
(1948), the Chosin Refinery should have come under
“strategic warfare,” a target for the Air Force rather than
the Navy. (See also East Coast area, this date.)
— In the United States: Major General Oliver P.
Smith, USMC, who had been commissioned a second
lieutenant during World War I and later served in the
Pacific during World War II, departs Washington,
D.C., to assume command of the 1st Marine Division;
Brigadier General Harry B. Liversedge is temporary
commanding officer of the division. General Smith
succeeds Major General Graves B. Erskine, who is as-
signed to the State Department for a secret mission in
Southeast Asia.
July 19–20 1950 THE BATTLE OF TAEJON At 0730,
the North Koreans attack to topple the city, which
is defended by about 4,000 men of the U.S. 24th
Division. Six enemy planes strike the positions of
the 21st Regiment. The airstrike damages a railroad
slightly northwest of Okch’on, but before noon, en-
gineers (3rd Platoon, Company B) repair it to per-
mit resumption of two-way traffic. Taejon airstrip
is also struck. During the attack, the planes drop
statements that had been coerced from several cap-
tured American officers and three noncommissioned
officers.
Outside of Taejon, near Yusong, at least two
enemy Yaks are blown from the sky by troops of Bat-
tery A, 26th Antiaircraft Battalion. The ground at-
tack is launched by elements of the N.K. 4th Divi-
102
sion. Its 16th and 18th Regiments, lacking both
tanks and artillery, drive from the south and west.
The stunning maneuver envelops the city and simul-
taneously permits the North Koreans to erect a for-
midable roadblock east of Taejon, along the Okch’on
Road.
The exact routes of the enemy’s movement are not
available, but speculation attributes the enemy de-
scent upon Taejon as having come through the
mountains from the Nonsan-Taejon Road and by
forced march from Nonsan along the highway from
Kumsan. Later, other evidence provides proof that
at least a portion of the envelopment force had
moved through Kumsan.
Although no T-34 tanks accompany the 16th and
18th N.K. Regiments, some tanks (107th Tank Reg-
iment, 105th N.K. Armored Division) attached to
the 4th N.K. Division since the initial invasion across
the 38th Parallel break into the city during the morn-
ing. Later, during the afternoon, additional tanks
(203rd Tank Regiment) attached to the N.K. 3rd
Division penetrate the city limits.
Meanwhile, U.S. Air Force planes scour the skies
in search of enemy positions near the Kum River.
The aircraft plaster suspected locations west and
southwest of Taejon, but again, the North Koreans
are undeterred. They unleash their assault.
In the meantime, General Dean is heading for
Yongdong. En route, at about 1000, while pausing
at Okch’on, he decides to return to Taejon to recheck
the defending positions of the 34th Regiment at the
front entrance of the city.
At about the same time, the 24th Reconnaissance
Battalion arrives at Taejon and it is immediately di-
rected to dispatch one platoon, composed of 39 men,
southwest along the Nonsan Road. At 1030, when
the unit reaches a point about three miles west of the
Kap-ch’on River, near the positions of L Company,
34th Regiment, the enemy springs an ugly ambush.
The platoon gets snagged in a deadly cross-fire by
elements of the N.K. 4th Division (probably con-
tingents of the N.K. 5th Regiment). The platoon
pivots quickly, then sprints to the east bank of the
river to join a contingent of L Company. Soon after,
the balance of L Company arrives to support a road-
block on the Nonsan Road.
The enemy buildup for the attack has been huge.
During the morning, Taejon airstrip is pounded by
artillery that has escaped harm by U.S. air strikes.
The rain of fire against the airstrip and the perime-
ter of the 34th Regiment originates from the north
and northwest and remains incessant throughout the
day. It reaches proportions that rival bombardments
of World War II. By the time General Dean arrives
back at Taejon, the enemy attack is operating at full
throttle. He rushes to the roadblock to direct the
battle.
By 1300, Colonel McGrail’s 2nd Battalion, 19th
Regiment, arrives in Taejon; it too speeds directly to
the L Company roadblock, which nears collapse due
 103 July 19, 1950

Top: U.S. soldiers in action on 20 July in the vicinity of Taejon. The weapon is a 3.5-inch rocket launcher
(super bazooka). It is capable of destroying the previously invincible T-34 tank. Bottom: A 3.5-inch
rocket launcher (M20) team in action during the fighting at Taejon. The weapon weighs 15 pounds and
is composed of two parts for easy handling and transporting.

to enormous enemy pressure. Meanwhile, General
Dean coordinates the fire of two U.S. tanks to fore-
stall disaster until McGrail arrives. Contingents of
the N.K. 3rd Division bolster the N.K. 5th Regi-
ment (4th Division) and provide a heavy punch to
bolster the frontal assault. The vicious sting of the
enemy also pounds the 19th Regiment, particularly
Company F, deployed on the left perimeter of Tae-
jon.
During the afternoon, it becomes more evident
that the enemy is poised to launch a major ground
attack against the beleaguered and slimly numbered
July 19, 1950
group of Americans. Colonels Ayres and Beauchamp
discuss a night withdrawal. Beauchamp tells Ayres
that Taejon can be held for an additional 24 hours,
and he has so informed General Dean.
The Communists maintain momentum through-
out the day, but the roadblock holds. As the tedious
ordeal continues, darkness, accompanied by sporadic
rainfall, settles over the battlefield. The rain, a
byproduct caused by a typhoon that had spared the
immediate area, eradicates the choking dust that has
been swirling around all day. Enemy infiltrators use
the elements to their advantage. They discover a large
hole separating the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment,
and the 19th Infantry’s Company F (2nd Battalion)
and penetrate with impunity. The darkness and tem-
porary tranquility do little to reassure the defend-
ers, and the utter silence raises the edginess of most
of the troops that are scattered in front of Taejon.
All anticipate a major night assault.
Nearly all of the 1st Battalion’s vehicles have been
moved into the city to prevent capture if the forward
positions are overrun. The artillery, which had been
deployed at the airstrip to bolster the 34th Regiment,
has been pulled back and redeployed on the south-
ern fringes of the city. Not surprisingly, at about
2200, the peculiar silence is crushed when the clank-
ing noise of approaching tanks is detected along the
right flank of the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment. The
roar of the T-34s signals imminent battle.
A patrol dispatched to probe the strength of the
enemy movement vanishes without trace. Colonel
Ayres confers with Colonel Beauchamp and again
suggests a pull-back, but no withdrawal plans are
implemented. Intertwined with the mysterious loss
of the patrol, more foreboding sounds are picked up
along the Kumsan Road, about six miles south of
Taejon. This discovery clearly indicates more enemy
infiltration. Again, the information is transmitted to
the 34th Regimental Command Post.
A nine-man patrol, composed of troops of the
24th Reconnaissance Company, led by Lieutenant
George Kristanoff, is dispatched to probe the
strength of the enemy. The patrol moves cautiously
down the Kumsan Highway and encounters an
impassable roadblock. In an instant, the enemy
commences firing and inflicts yet another disaster
on the Americans. All four jeeps in the convoy
are decimated and the bodies of the troops are scat-
tered along the roadway. A report regarding the
ambush reaches Taejon at about 0200 (20 July).
The news that the jeep had been ambushed is
considered only an isolated incident, rather than a
major enemy infiltration. Dean is not informed of the
roadblock. At about 0300, a security patrol, com-
posed of one platoon, ventures down the road to in-
spect its defenses. It, too, halts abruptly at the road-
block.
Shortly thereafter, the enemy increases the pres-
sure. The North Koreans quickly destroy the advance
observation post of the 1st Battalion, 34th Reg-
104
iment; then by use of the usual envelopment tactics,
they plow through key battalion defenses. Simulta-
neously, enemy armor and infantry strike a power-
ful blow against the right flank. Other units spring
from the north and they also hammer the right flank.
The defenders’ positions are becoming untenable,
and to make matters worse, the enemy armor is clos-
ing fast. The 1st Battalion command post comes
under severe attack by 0400. Colonel Ayres is un-
able to raise communications with his front-line
troops as enemy tanks begin to bang against the
door. Infantry bazooka teams, deployed to guard the
road approaches, initiate an abandonment of their
positions, and the rifle companies expend only sparse
amounts of ammunition before they pull back. Hav-
ing few remaining options, Colonel Ayres orders the
command post to pull back.
Before the first light of dawn, about 200 troops led
by Major Leland Dunham begin to march out of the
Yudung valley heading south. Ayres follows shortly
thereafter. Later, about three miles south of Taejon,
Major Dunham is mortally wounded near the Kum-
san Road. Several others in his party are less seri-
ously wounded. Those who are able head west toward
Masuri.
Meanwhile, Taejon jumps with activity as addi-
tional information arrives from the front lines. Then,
suddenly, communications are severed between Col-
onel Beauchamp and the 1st Battalion. Patrols are
sent to inspect the wire and make repairs, but the
troops are unable to complete the task because the
enemy has gained control of the road, nearly to the
airfield. Colonel Beauchamp, still unconvinced of
the enemy’s deep penetration, ventures forward in a
jeep to verify the reports. He reaches the junction
of the Seoul Highway and Nonsan Road, about one-
half mile outside the town. Here, he receives first-
hand verification when his jeep encounters an enemy
tank that pummels his vehicle with machine gun
fire. The jeep is set afire, but Beauchamp sustains
only a superficial wound. Undaunted and apparently
greatly aggravated, he crawls several hundred yards,
locates a bazooka team and prepares to take on the
tank.
The imminent encounter holds a surprise for the
mighty T-34 tanks. New ammunition, recently per-
fected after about five years of experimentation, has
arrived in Korea and it is about to confront the near
impenetrable enemy armor. Beauchamp disregards
his wound and returns to the road junction with the
bazooka team and high hopes that the initial test of
the weapon will be a huge success. Soon after, the
bazooka fires upon the tank and the results are im-
mediately known, to the jubilation of the Ameri-
cans. The T-34 is quickly reduced to burning scrap
and its startled crew is captured. Two additional
enemy tanks arrive on scene and they, too, are in-
troduced to the new bazookas. Both are blown away.
Nonetheless, the destruction of the three tanks is not
enough to halt the ground attacks. Back at Taejon,
 105
word of the destruction of the tanks fails to reach
the commanders.
Meanwhile, due to the fear of being enveloped,
the 1st Battalion, 34th Infantry, moves into the
mountains instead of heading for Taejon. With the
seizure of more ground, the enemy is able to direct
more confusion; using a captured jeep radio, the
North Koreans plant false information concerning
the condition of the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment. In
conjunction, the gap between the 2nd Battalion,
19th Regiment, and the 1st Battalion, 34th Regi-
ment, begins to dangerously widen. The 3rd Battal-
ion, 34th Regiment, mounts an attack to seal the
hole. Company K and a contingent of M Company
advances; however, an enemy battalion and six T-
34 tanks disperse the attackers. During these blazing
contests, SFC Robert E. Dare attempts to get the
besieged troops of the advance platoon to safety.
Despite the nasty opposition, the U.S. 3rd Battal-
ion (34th Regiment) troops make it back to their
starting point, but SFC Dare sacrifices his life to en-
sure the safety of his buddies. For his gallantry under
fire, Dare receives the Distinguished Service Cross
posthumously.
Earlier, at 0131, an entry is posted in the 21st
Regiment War Diary that about 200 guerrillas had
infiltrated behind the lines of the 34th Regiment,
but it is not known if this information had been
passed on to General Dean or Colonel Beauchamp.
Within the city, General Dean is awakened by
small-arms fire at 0530. Slightly thereafter, an enemy
tank rolls by the 34th Regimental Headquarters.
Dean, supported by two bazooka teams, chases the
tank as it heads out of town. The hunting trip is un-
successful, but when the tank reenters the city, it is
destroyed by a howitzer. Dean and his group miss
two other tanks; however, by 0900, four of the five
tanks that penetrate Taejon are decimated by Amer-
ican fire. Later, at about 1400, Dean’s contingent fi-
nally bags a tank. Dean, a squad of the 3rd Engi-
neering Combat Battalion, and Lieutenant Arthur
Clarke take credit for the kill. Clarke relates: “I re-
mained by the corner of the building in front of the
tank to use my Molotov cocktail on it if it began to
move. The first round (fired from second story) hit
the tank and the occupants began to scream and
moan. The second round quieted most of the
screaming and the third made it all quiet.” General
Dean, attempting to inspire his troops to become
tank killers, remarks: “I got me a tank.”
Meanwhile, east of the airstrip, the 3rd Battalion,
34th Regiment, commanded by Major Lantron, re-
mains unmolested throughout the morning, except
for sporadic artillery and mortar fire. At about 0930,
Major Lantron, without explanation, departs the
command post and vanishes. In his absence, Colo-
nel Wadlington orders Captain Jack E. Smith to as-
sume command of the 3rd Battalion (34th Regi-
ment). Subsequently, it is determined that Major
Lantron had been captured by the North Koreans.
July 19, 1950
In the 19th Regimental sector, the 2nd Battalion
has sustained penetration along the Nonsan Road
throughout the night, but some reports on the de-
teriorating situation there have been erroneous. The
battalion has not been overrun. Company F buck-
les under the enormous pressure and pulls back by
about dawn, but Company E stands firmly at the
bridge. Major Dunham guides the 1st Battalion
(34th Regiment) and the 34th Infantry Headquar-
ters Group south by maneuvering behind the lines of
Company F, 19th Regiment. A smaller contingent
led by Colonel Ayres trails the larger group.
Slightly after daybreak, while Dunham and Ayres
are retiring, fierce fighting continues between Com-
pany F and the enemy, but F Company is compelled
to abandon the hill to the west. Dunham’s contingent
heads south toward the hills. Colonel Ayres’ unit en-
counters heavy enemy fire at the bridge over the
Yudung River, but it avoids getting trapped and joins
Dunham in the heights south of Taejon. By about
noon, Ayres turns over command of his 150-man
1st Battalion to Major Dunham and instructs him to
redeploy three miles south of Taejon along the Kum-
san Road to guard the rear of the city. Ayres and a
small group depart separately and are soon struck by
enemy fire. Only four men, including Ayres, escape.
Wilson Fielder, a Time magazine correspondent, is
killed and his body is discovered several months later.
Ayres and the three other survivors evade nearby
enemy contingents until nightfall, then escape to
safety.
Meanwhile, Second Lieutenant Robert L. Her-
bert (G Company, 19th Regiment), upon orders
from Colonel McGrail, leads his 2nd Platoon toward
Taejon to clear the road. En route he encounters and
commandeers a rifle company (B Company, 34th
Regiment) and a bazooka team. Soon after, the con-
tingent meets up with Lieutenant Little and a rein-
forced squad that is protecting the fork in the road.
During this enduring morning of confusion,
enemy pressure forces more miscalculations. Colo-
nel McGrail, at his 2nd Battalion, 34th Regiment
command post east of the Yudung bridge, had dis-
patched Lieutenant Herbert to Taejon. By then,
more distressing reports filter into headquarters.
Word reaches McGrail his Company F has been
forced to withdraw. McGrail also learns that the 1st
Battalion has been shoved back.
Captain Montesclaros volunteers to go to regimen-
tal headquarters in Taejon and he is soon surprised to
find the road open when he meets Lieutenant Her-
bert at the roadblock. Montesclaros enters headquar-
ters and informs General Dean about the positions of
the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, and he requests or-
ders to carry back to Colonel McGrail. Dean tells
him, while patting him on the back, “My boy, I am
not running the show, Beauchamp is.” Dean then in-
structs him to go to Colonel Beauchamp, command-
ing officer, 34th Regiment. Beauchamp dispatches
Montesclaros with orders that direct McGrail to bring
July 19, 1950 106

Top: U.S. soldiers man a machine gun (.30-caliber Browning light M1919A6) position in the vicinity of
Taejon. Bottom: U.S. troops are deployed in the vicinity of Taejon with a .50-caliber Browning machine
gun (M2 HB).

the 2nd Battalion back to the city, but upon his re-
turn to battalion headquarters, Montesclaros discov-
ers it abandoned. McGrail had attempted to relocate
his command post on a hill south of the road, but
even that fails. McGrail orders E Company to pull
back, but then his radio becomes inoperable and
enemy troops converge on his positions.
In the meantime, McGrail’s force heads for the
mountains instead of Taejon, unaware of the orders
instructing him to head for the city. Unable to locate
McGrail, despite a one-hour search, Montesclaros
returns toward Taejon. He encounters Company E,
which reports it had been overrun and forced to
climb the hills. Montesclaros then looks north and
 107
spots a large enemy contingent that is less than two
miles from Taejon. He chooses to join Company E,
rather than return to Taejon.
As noon approaches, no units of the 19th Regi-
ment are in place west of Taejon. The last unit po-
sitioned close to the besieged city, Company G, pulls
out by 1300. Its 3rd Platoon protects the rear and is
scheduled to depart after the weapons section, but the
latter requests that it be the final unit to withdraw.
The mortar men choose to fight first and expend
their mortars before moving back. This command,
composed of eighteen enlisted men and the one of-
ficer, is lost to the enemy.
The situation in the city continues to deteriorate.
Persistent enemy penetration causes more complica-
tions as the day drags out. Snipers ring shots in all di-
rections. At the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regimental
compound, enemy tanks commence firing. The bar-
rage kills some troops and detonates an ammunition
vehicle. Following this, the tanks speed away and
begin blasting other targets. Subsequent to the depar-
ture of the enemy armor, bazookas are located. The
bazooka fire attempts to eliminate the snipers, but
during the operation, the fire ignites many of the
poorly constructed dwellings. Within a short time,
much of the city is in flames.
Meanwhile, enemy tanks return on scene and
commence incessant fire. Point-blank fire knocks
out two jeeps at the medical company’s headquar-
ters; both vehicles are crammed with troops and all
but two men are killed. The two survivors are
wounded, and one of these lies in the street, unable
to move. The crew of one of the Communist tanks
spots the wounded man. Soon after, the tank ad-
vances and drives right over the soldier, crushing
him. Eventually, two of the three tanks are destroyed
and the third one takes a wicked hit that severs its tur-
ret, but it escapes.
During its first day of use, the new 3.5 rocket
launcher destroys a total of eight T-34 tanks. Two
others are destroyed by artillery fire. In addition, the
U.S. Fifth Air Force destroys at least five tanks. Fi-
nally, the T-34 meets a formidable adversary. These
3.5 rocket launchers prevent the enemy tanks from
causing panic in the city of Taejon.
Back at the roadblock with Lieutenant Herbert,
the enemy is closing fast from the northwest. Her-
bert requests that the howitzers be repositioned to
meet the threat, but the artillery officer refuses to
redirect the fire without authorization. Herbert con-
tacts the battalion operations officer, but his request
is denied.
The artillery is pointed in three different direc-
tions, but not toward the attacking enemy. In con-
trast, unrestrained enemy mortars and artillery begin
to bellow. The barrages kill several defenders at the
roadblock. New orders arrive instructing Herbert to
hold the line until reinforcements arrive to evacuate
the artillery. About fifty men led by Lieutenant
William Wygal rush to the scene to bolster Herbert’s
July 19, 1950
cause. Eventually, Herbert is ordered to join the evac-
uation. In conjunction, the artillerymen abandon
their howitzers. A counterattack is ordered to retrieve
them. Nonetheless, it becomes apparent that Taejon
will fall.
General Dean and Colonel Beauchamp, still un-
aware that their lines of defense outside the city have
been uprooted, discuss evacuation plans during
lunch (C-Rations). At about 1400, in an effort to
save the vehicles, Dean advises a daylight abandon-
ment of the city. By 1500, the 34th Regiment’s 3rd
Battalion heads the march, trailed by the artillery,
the medical company, 34th Regimental Command
Group and the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment. The
1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, holds the rear. How-
ever, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 34th and 19th Reg-
iments respectively, never receive the word because
the runners cannot locate their positions. Apparently,
General Dean and Colonel Beauchamp have no
knowledge that the word to evacuate does not reach
the two battalions.
When the convoy initiates its departure, Colonel
Beauchamp takes a jeep and moves to the southeast-
ern fringes of the city where he discovers four U.S.
light tanks (24th Reconnaissance Company). Im-
mediately, he directs them to defend the Okch’on
Road exit and the southeastern tip of the city. As
Beauchamp moves back into the city, he notices that
the tanks are abandoning their positions. Beauchamp
makes an abrupt U-turn and catches them, but si-
multaneously he comes under small-arms fire.
Beauchamp bolts from the jeep and takes two of the
tanks to form a temporary line of defense.
The armor moves to a strategic pass about three
miles south of Taejon to permit a safe withdrawal.
Several anti-aircraft half-tracs join the barricade.
From his vantage point at the pass, Beauchamp spots
an incoming locomotive that is being held up at an
approach tunnel by enemy fire. The train, originat-
ing in Iwon’ni, is attempting to retrieve a ten-car
ammunition train that was previously abandoned by
a Korean crew. Beauchamp contacts 21st Regimen-
tal headquarters to report the incident, and he is told
by General Menoher to come to Okch’on to give a
“detailed report” on the situation; Beauchamp also in-
forms General Menoher and Colonel Stephens of
the unfolding disaster east of the city.
Meanwhile, the 21st Regiment has not been dis-
patched to support the 34th and 19th Regiments at
Taejon, because until now, Stephens claims that he
had no prior knowledge of the disaster in Taejon. At
this time, the 21st Regiment remains in the heights
at Okch’on and it cannot arrive in time to reinforce
the city. Menoher and Stephens are informed about
the deadly roadblock at Taejon, and this, too, had
been unknown by the patrols that had been dis-
patched from headquarters to probe the highway.
In the meantime, Captain Hatfield, who had dis-
patched the earlier train from Taejon, continues to
hold at the station to protect the ammunition train,
July 19, 1950
but the anticipated locomotive never arrives with the
armed train to evacuate the ammunition. Hatfield
steadfastly guards the ammunition until he is slain at
the rail yard. The train is blown by U.S. aircraft on
the following day to prevent its capture.
At about 1700, General Dean, during the unex-
plained absence of Colonel Beauchamp at Okch’on,
orders Col. Wadlington to depart with the convoy.
The lead portion of the 34th Regimental convoy, the
3rd Battalion and some artillery safely pass through
the tunnel, but then the trap-door closes as the
enemy severs the escape route from the city and iso-
lates the remainder of the 34th RCT.
Meanwhile, heavy skirmishing occurs near the rail
yards. North Korean infantry overrun an artillery
battery. In response, Dean orders a counterattack.
Elements of the 3rd Battalion, commanded by Major
McDaniel and supported by the guns of Company
L, recapture the lost equipment.
In the meantime, Captain Jack Smith, upon orders
from Major William McDaniel, deploys a contin-
gent of Company L, 3rd Battalion, to cover the with-
drawal, while the remainder of the battalion joins
the convoy. Due to the serious shortage of tractor
drivers, some of the recaptured guns are left behind,
but they are inoperable. Other guns are towed to
safety. At an undetermined time during the battle
for Taejon, Major McDaniel is captured and sum-
marily executed by his captors.
The stalled convoy adds to the dilemma in Taejon.
Dean takes measures to clear the destroyed vehicles
to reopen the passage. He places an urgent call to
the 24th Division headquarters to request armor to
clear the eastern exit from Taejon. All the while,
enemy troops continue to converge on the city. The
stand of L Company gains more importance as
throngs of North Koreans stampede out of the air-
field. Dean tells Captain Jack Smith that he must
hold for forty-five minutes to provide just enough
time for the convoy to escape. Immediately there-
after, Smith and L Company are to pull back with
great haste.
During the evacuation, the city becomes totally
engulfed in flames. Shells burst in the staging areas,
boosting casualties. Meanwhile, more snipers have
infiltrated the city to further hinder the evacuation.
Nevertheless, by about 1800, the principal convoy
takes off. Subsequent to its departure, Captain Jack
Smith and L Company (34th Regiment) make a
hasty and disciplined withdrawal. They travel out
of Taejon in trucks and come under tenacious fire
as they move. Smith attempts to follow the route of
the convoy via the Okch’on Road, but complications
develop. Colonel Wadlington expects to lead the
convoy, but in an effort to get to the point of the
column, his jeep takes a circuitous route. The jour-
ney is hair-raising and includes several harrowing
and life threatening experiences. The ride unexpect-
edly terminates with the intentional destruction of the
jeep, which gets caught on a dead-end street and
108
under heavy enemy fire. Wadlington’s group then
initiates a long climb up the mountain.
In the meantime, as expected, the convoy rolls out
under a rain of sniper fire. One vehicle goes out of
control and plows into a building, nearly trapping the
rest of the column from passing. More confusion oc-
curs. A segment of the beginning of the convoy takes
a wrong turn and terminates its journey on the same
dead end that netted Wadlington. About fifty vehi-
cles are abandoned and about 150 troops, led by sev-
eral officers, make for the hills on foot. As the night
progresses, this group becomes scattered and many
lose their bearings. Some of the troops reach U.S.
lines on the following morning and others straggle
into the perimeter on the 22nd. However, many of
the troops vanish.
During the anguishing withdrawal, the remain-
der of the convoy continues to move in the right di-
rection, but the city becomes even more of an in-
ferno. There is scarce breathing room between the
vehicles and the burning buildings that consume
both sides of the streets. General Dean rushes to the
front of the convoy and barely misses the turn for
the Okch’on Road. Raging fires prevent Dean’s jeep
and an accompanying vehicle from reversing direc-
tion. Both vehicles must take the Kumsan Road.
Along the road, Dean and his party halt to pick up
several wounded Americans. The two vehicles then
continue, but shortly thereafter, they encounter an
enemy roadblock and become the recipients of a
storm of fire. Lieutenant Clark is wounded during the
ambush. The Americans avoid a calamity by reach-
ing the bank of the Taejon River, where they conceal
themselves until darkness. Later, they cross to the
west bank and disappear into the hills near Nang-
wol. General Dean moves back down the mountain
at about midnight to fetch water for the wounded;
however, he never rejoins the group and word of his
whereabouts remains unknown for several years. (See
also, July 21, 1950.)
Meanwhile, the main convoy continues down the
Okch’on Road until it is hammered by enemy mor-
tar fire that pulverizes the lead vehicle to create an
impassable blockage. Instantly, an armored vehicle
pushes the disabled vehicle to the side, but another
salvo of blistering fire takes out the Amtrac and kills
the driver. This is followed by deadly machine gun
fire that rakes the line of stalled vehicles. Instinc-
tively, the troops bolt from the endangered vehicles,
only to find themselves in equally devastating cir-
cumstances. Lurking North Korean soldiers rise from
the nearby rice paddies and unleash another
firestorm. Burp guns rip through the ranks.
As the mortar fire strikes the column, one soldier,
SFC Joseph Szito, grabs a 60-mm mortar and be-
gins pounding an enemy position just slightly up a
hill south of the Okch’on Road. Next Szito com-
mandeers an 81-mm mortar; he fires about thirty
smoke shells to afford the Americans an opportunity
to push the disabled burning Amtrac off the road.
 109 July 19, 1950

Few volunteers venture out on the road to remove
the obstacle, increasing the severity of the ordeal. At
about this time, the enemy inundates the shattered
column with another thunderclap of fire, which
quickly ignites several more vehicles at the front of the
convoy. With sparse recourse available, the survivors
torch the remaining vehicles, then begin to head on
foot into the mountains.
Soon after, the next section of the convoy reaches
the stalled convoy. Bedlam occurs as these men are
also forced to abandon their vehicles under sheets of
withering fire. They scatter for safety and in one par-
ticular area encompassing about fifty square yards,
about 250 soldiers are crammed together, most pray-
ing for the sun to set. Soon after darkness, 2nd Lieu-
tenant Ralph Boyd and a few men attempt to clear
the road and search for some operable vehicles. After
a Herculean effort and thanks to the assistance of an
artillery prime mover, a passage is cleared. The small
contingent of troops and its six vehicles resume the

In the Eighth Army rear area near Taejon, troops stand by for orders to move up to the front. One sol-
dier grabs a catnap in a shelter half. His M1 rifle is leaning against a tree.
July 19, 1950 110

U.S. troops maintain a forward command post. The soldier using a field telephone has a modified M1
(sniper’s rifle, .30-caliber MIC) close by against his left shoulder.

retreat. They are ordered to remain silent and they re-
ceive explicit instructions not to return enemy fire.
The convoy soon gets attacked. A sudden burst
of enemy machine gun fire slices into their thinning
ranks. Lieutenant Boyd sustains a superficial wound,
but he loses consciousness when he is thrown from
the vehicle. When he regains consciousness, he dis-
covers that he has been left behind; despite his
wound, he sprints two and one-half miles and
reaches the lines of the 21st Regiment.
Back at Okch’on, Colonel Beauchamp had arrived
from the pass and informed General Menoher about
 111
the North Korean roadblock. It is unclear why the
patrols of the 21st Regiment have not informed
Menoher or Colonel Stephens. Beauchamp, under
orders from Menoher, leads five light tanks (released
from 21st Regiment) from Okch’on en route to the
roadblock. He collects a contingent of about sixty
men attached to I Company, 34th Regiment. At
about darkness, the rescue team advances to posi-
tions just short of the pass and at that point one of
the tanks strikes a mine. At about the same time, a
well-camouflaged enemy soldier, using an electrical
switch, detonates a whole pattern of strung mines.
The reinforcements are then struck by more blister-
ing fire. Undeterred, the riflemen advance toward
the blocked pass and the highway tunnel. Several
troops actually reach the tunnel; however, within
two hours, they expend their ammunition and are
compelled to return to Okch’on without seizing the
objective.
About 500 enemy troops are deployed on each
flank along the evacuation route. Estimates of enemy
troop strength to the immediate front of the 34th
Regiment stand at about 2,500 to 3,000 North Ko-
reans. The losses at Taejon are extremely heavy. Col-
onel Beauchamp gazes at the devastation near the
tunnel and easily spots the scattered corpses of the
heroic engineers. Beauchamp had earlier ordered
them to defend the pass. Some of the engineers had
escaped. The two tanks and the antiaircraft vehicles
are evacuated. Nonetheless, the extensive roadblock,
which extends from about two miles east of Taejon
along the Okch’on Road outside of the village of
Chojon and stretches from there to the first high-
way and rail tunnels east of Taejon, remains a gaunt-
let of devastating fire throughout the night.
Company L, 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, which
had fought the rear-action to cover the withdrawal,
moves at a furious pace, but it, too, misses the turn
at the Okch’on Road and heads directly down the
Kumsan Road. The column passes a steady line of
abandoned and burning vehicles as Captain Jack
Smith attempts to lead his contingent through several
enemy roadblocks. Using the services of about 150
men, including approximately fifty wounded, Smith
breaks through several minor blockages and then
overcomes a final obstacle just before dusk. Eventu-
ally, Smith reaches Chinju, not far from the southern
tip of Korea. A hospital train rushes to Chinju from
Pusan. Captain Smith leaves the wounded at Pusan,
then he departs for Taegu to rejoin the 3rd Battalion
survivors who had made it out of Taejon.
While the incessant combat ensues east of Taejon,
the 21st Regiment, deployed a mere three to four
miles away, remains unscathed. The positions held by
the 21st Regiment at Okch’on and the official state-
ments by Colonel Stephens concerning the activity
of the 21st Regiment during the day (20th) seem to
add confusion to the unfolding events. Colonel
Stephens makes it clear that he had dispatched mo-
torized patrols, pursuant to earlier orders from Gen-
July 19, 1950
eral Dean, along the highway between Okch’on and
Taejon to keep the highway open for evacuation.
Stephens states that the patrols operated until dusk
(20th). Ironically, the North Korean roadblock had
been established during the afternoon, closing the
road and making it unlikely that the patrols could
have reached Taejon without encountering the road-
block. In addition, at this time of the year, darkness
rolls in about 2100. Colonel Stephens states that it
was subsequent to darkness when he first discovered
that the enemy had established the roadblock at Tae-
jon and it was at that time that he was informed that
the troops in Taejon were being thrashed.
The available medical supplies of the 1st Battalion,
21st Regiment, save the lives of many of the
wounded survivors as they wander into the 21st Reg-
imental perimeter and receive assistance at the first
aid center near Okch’on. The wounded are so numer-
ous that all medical supplies are expended. Strag-
glers continue moving through the hills and moun-
tains for several days. Many survivors eventually filter
into the 24th Division positions about 20 miles far-
ther east, near Yongdong on the 22nd and 23rd of
July; Colonel Wadlington reaches there on the 22nd.
Several instances of extraordinary bravery occur
during the abandonment of Taejon. In one instance,
as the engineers of Company C, 3rd Engineer Com-
bat Battalion, attempt to extricate themselves from
the besieged city, Pvt. Charles Zimmerman exhibits
extraordinary valor. Despite being wounded eleven
times, including one wound from a mortar fragment,
he escapes death when his jeep is destroyed by enemy
fire and then he wipes out five enemy soldiers and de-
stroys two machine guns to preserve the lives of the
other members of his contingent. Zimmerman re-
ceives the Silver Star for his gallantry under fire.
Another example of selfless courage is that of
Sergeant George Libby, Company C, 3rd Engineer
Combat Battalion. When the truck that is transport-
ing him crashes through an enemy barricade, enemy
fire strikes it and kills or wounds everyone except
him; Libby halts an M-5 artillery tractor as it moves
to crash through the roadblock. He carries the
nearby wounded and places them on the vehicle and
then rides on the outside of it to return fire. The
tractor continues through the menacing fire and
makes frequent stops along the route to pick up ad-
ditional wounded. Sergeant Libby becomes seriously
wounded, but he continues to hold his position on
the vehicle. Upon reaching a second roadblock, he is
again struck by enemy fire. The wounds are mortal,
and Libby fades into unconsciousness before bleed-
ing to death. But Libby’s heroism saves the lives of
the others; they reach friendly lines. Sergeant Libby
is posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor.
Darkness finally blankets the area, but the blood-
shed continues as the survivors still attempt to es-
cape the fiery meat-grinder. Meanwhile, back at the
positions of the 21st Regiment, Colonel Stephens
and General Menoher realize that the North Koreans
July 19, 1950
are preparing to overrun their positions. Stephens
requests permission to pull back from Okch’on and
establish a delaying action; he believes that if they
stay in Okch’on, the unit might be annihilated. By
midnight (20th–21st), General Menoher departs for
Yongdong, and Colonel Stephens makes prepara-
tions to evacuate. Before dawn (21st), engineers blow
the tunnels north of Okch’on, but the detonations
only partially seal the tunnels and only slow the
enemy.
U.S. soldiers (Eighth Army) are in position near the Kum River in the vicinity of Taejon. The two troops
are manning a heavy machine gun (M1917A1).
112
At daybreak (21 July), it becomes evident that the
North Koreans have funneled through the tunnel
and are unfolding an envelopment tactic destined to
isolate the 21st Regiment. Heavy exchanges of fire
occur on the 21st Regiment’s west flank, which
prompts Stephens to order the withdrawal of his reg-
iment and the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion from
their positions at Okch’on. In an effort to buy some
time for the South Korean forces, which are deployed
east of the Kum River, engineers detonate the final
 113
A U.S. soldier shares a defensive position with an ROK soldier at Taejon. The American is using a .30-
caliber Browning automatic rifle (M1919A2).
bridge across the Kum at about 1100. The Americans
successfully pull back twenty miles to their pre-
arranged positions, less than five miles northwest of
Yongdong. Here, along a highway that stretches
southwest to Kumsan, they establish and fortify a
new line of defense that includes a roadblock. In ad-
dition to the capture of Taejon, the North Korean
forces also seize Iris and Nonsan.
Once again, the 24th Division has purchased pre-
cious time for the U.N. cause; however, the price is
exorbitant. When the survivors of the 24th Division
finally regroup during the next several days, it is de-
termined that the division has sustained a 30 per-
cent casualty rate. Of nearly 4,000 troops engaged
against the enemy, 1,150 casualties are sustained.
Two hundred and twenty-eight are wounded, 48 are
slain and 874 troops are listed as missing in action;
the majority of the latter are presumed dead. Com-
pany L (34th Regiment) sustains 107 casualties from
their force of 155 men while fighting a delaying ac-
tion at Taejon. Also, the equipment losses at Taejon
are extremely high. Only 35 regimental vehicles es-
cape the wrath of the enemy. Of 34 trucks assigned
to the 24th Quartermaster Company, four remain
unscathed.
July 19 President Syngman Rhee, despite the dire
circumstances, remains confident. He proclaims that
his South Korean forces would unify all of Korea by
July 19, 1950
advancing to the Manchurian border. Presently, the
U.S. and other U.N. forces are simultaneously con-
cerned with keeping from being pushed back to Pusan,
while attempting to shove the Communists back across
the 38th Parallel.
In other activity, contingents of the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision, ashore since the previous day, move to the front;
the 5th Cavalry heads toward the Taejon vicinity. On
the following day, the 8th Cavalry moves by vehicle
and by rail to Yongdong; both regiments will be under
the command of the division artillery commander,
Brigadier General Charles D. Palmer. The Eighth Army
War Diary, G-3 section, July 19, states: “1st Cavalry
Division ordered to concentrate in Taegu-Yongdong-
Kumchon area.” The day’s diary also stipulates that ef-
fective July 20, Company A, 71st Heavy Tank Battal-
ion, is to be detached from the 24th Division, reverting
to control of the 1st Cavalry Division, its parent divi-
sion.
Also, there is some confusion as to the exact destina-
tion of the 1st Cavalry and its schedule to relieve the
24th Division. Much has been written stating that the
1st Cavalry is to relieve the 24th Division at Taejon;
but the Eighth Army War Diary, G-3 section, for today
states that the 1st Cavalry is “ordered to concentrate in
Taegu-Yongdong-Kumchon area.” The diary further
stipulates that the 1st Cavalry should be “prepared to
relieve the 24th Division on Army Order.”
East Coast area: A contingent (one of the two
July 19, 1950
advancing columns) of the N.K. 6th Division seizes
Kunsan without incident. Soon after, both enemy
columns converge on Ch’onju, about thirty miles
southeast of the prize. Effortlessly, they eliminate the de-
fending contingent of S.K. Police.
On the 20th (approximate departure date), the N.K.
6th Division drives east toward the fragile left flank of
Eighth Army. On the 23rd, the N. K. 6th Division
splits its three regiments at Kwangju, but all converge
on Sunch’on about the 25th.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of Fifth Air Force
F-80s engage and destroy three enemy Yaks in the skies
over Taegon.
In other activity, a contingent of 7 F-80s attached
to the 8th Fighter-Bomber Group (FBG), led by Lt.
Colonel William T. Samways, attacks an enemy airstrip
near Pyongyang and destroys 15 planes that are parked
on the field. Lieutenant Ralph A. Ellis (36th Fighter
Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group), pilot-
ing an F-80, attacks the airfield at Pyongyang and de-
stroys two parked fighters, both single-engine planes,
type unknown. Lieutenant Roy W. Marsh receives
credit for destroying two of the aircraft.
Also, a patrol attached to the 36th Fighter Bomber
Squadron (8th Fighter Bomber Group) led by Lieu-
tenant Robert D. McKee intercepts a Communist force
of Yaks in the vicinity of Taejon. McKee downs one of
the four planes at about 0800. Also, Lieutenant Robert
A. Walsh (80th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter
Bomber Group), flying an F-80, spots concealed aircraft
U.S. sailor Hospitalman Philip A. Barome, USN, shares C rations with Korean child.
114
at Pomgyang. He strafes the airfield and destroys two
planes at about 1500.
— In the United States: President Truman, react-
ing to the expanding crisis in Korea, requests that Con-
gress appropriate ten billion dollars for the purpose of
rearming the U.S. Armed Forces, which had rapidly
been disarmed at the conclusion of World War II. Tru-
man, upon the recommendation of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff, also activates the Organized Marine Corps Re-
serve. In turn, General Clifton B. Cates, Marine com-
mandant, informs the Marine Reserve of its impend-
ing call to active duty.
Beginning on the following day and continuing until
the 4th of August, in response to the Korean crisis, the
entire complement of 47,000 men and women of the
Marine Ground Force Reserve is called up and placed
on active duty. Marine aviators are not included in the
activation process.
— In the Pacific Ocean: The USS Henrico (subse-
quent to repairs) trails the main convoy, sailing alone
from the States toward Japan. The vessel encounters
some unexpected danger during its second night at sea.
Radar detects two “unidentified Submarines” that are
closing toward the ship. This prompts the sound of
general quarters and the trailing noise of sailors rush-
ing to their posts. With battle stations ready, the pitch-
dark sea is scanned for possible enemy contact, but ac-
cording to American intelligence, no North Korean
warships remain afloat. Following about one hour of
uneasiness, the alleged hostile bleeps on the radar screen
 115
vanish, releasing the tension. Subsequent to the strange
encounter, the Henrico continues toward the Far East
without further incident.
— In Japan: The Forward Echelon 1st MAW lands
at Haneda airport, near Tokyo; General Craig heads
directly for Admiral Joy’s (Craig’s Naval superior offi-
cer) headquarters. Following this meeting, Craig and his
staff confer with Army Generals Edward Almond and
Edwin Wright to give them the details concerning the
particulars on the Marine brigade’s air-ground team.
Also, Generals Craig and Cushman are escorted into
MacArthur’s office for a cordial and candid meeting.
MacArthur takes great pains to alleviate any pressure.
He quickly jokes about what he calls “unfounded ru-
mors” that he had been prejudiced against the Marines
during World War II and proclaims that he “had al-
ways held the greatest admiration for the Corps.”
MacArthur is completely briefed on the Marine
brigade and its capabilities, despite its frail numbers.
MacArthur is stunned to learn that the brigade is at
peacetime strength with only two rifle platoons per
company and only four guns to each battery as opposed
to six guns. The revelation that each Marine company
contains 50 fewer men than specified in the Marine
war tables had been a complete surprise to MacArthur.
Nonetheless, MacArthur is delighted to know the
Marines are en route to lessen this burden. Subse-
quently, General MacArthur requests that the Marine
brigade be immediately upgraded to wartime strength,
and again he requests that the Joint Chiefs of Staff au-
thorize and provide one complete war strength Marine
division, including its normal contingent of air sup-
port, for duty in Korea.
The Marine generals are jubilant to learn from
MacArthur that the brigade is to remain in Japan under
the operational control of Admiral Joy, rather than
Eighth Army. The stipulation guarantees the Marines
the freedom to make ready for the anticipated amphibi-
ous invasion.
In other activity, Lt. Colonel Tom Dolvin, com-
manding officer of the newly created 89th Medium
Tank Battalion, arrives in Tokyo. Seventy additional
troops join the unit to increase its strength to about
225 men. The 89th Medium Tank Battalion embarks
to Korea by sea on July 24.
July 20 (See also July 19–20 THE BATTLE OF TAE-
JON) The North Koreans overrun Taejon and push the
24th Division back. North Korean tanks lead the in-
fantry through the defenses. During the withdrawal,
General Dean remains behind with the rear echelon
troops to reassure them and instill confidence. These
under-strength units fight bravely, but their weapons,
carbines and obsolete bazookas, are outclassed against
tanks. General Dean becomes listed as missing in ac-
tion. Because of his heroic actions and superlative lead-
ership at Taejon, Dean becomes a recipient of the
Medal of Honor. Later, his name turns up on a POW
list.
At Okch’on, General Menoher and Colonel Stephens
July 20, 1950
review the various details of the day’s events. The con-
versation results in Stephens believing that his 21st Reg-
iment, 24th Division is in danger of being isolated by
the North Koreans. Stephens requests authority to fight
a delaying action while withdrawing, rather than at-
tempting to stand and fight. Menoher replies affirma-
tively and informs Stephens that it is up to his discre-
tion as to the time to pull back and how to accomplish
the withdrawal successfully.
At about midnight (20th–21st), General Menoher
departs for Yongdong. Meanwhile, additional Ameri-
can reinforcements continue to arrive in Korea. The
fall of Taejon opens a giant hole on the U.N.’s west
flank. Communist units are quick to exploit the inef-
ficiencies and follow their victory with another offen-
sive. They commence a four-pronged attack toward
Pusan. Also, the 1st Cavalry Division (Infantry), com-
manded by Major General Hobart R. Gray, advances to
deploy on the U.N. right flank and replace ROK forces
there. The 25th Division, commanded by General
William B. Kean, drives toward a point about 50 miles
northeast of Taejon to hold the line, regroup the ROK
troops and block the Communists before they reach
Taegu.
In conjunction with the buildup, contingents of the
29th Regimental Combat Team move into Korea from
Okinawa about a week after the 1st Cavalry. The com-
bat team lands on the west shores, then moves to posi-
tions near Chinju about 50 miles outside of Pusan.
These reinforcements, which are fully in place by the
end of July, forge a greater line of defense for General
Walton Walker to forestall defeat or annihilation. Dur-
ing the last two weeks in July, Communist troops seize
the entire area between Mokp’o and Sunchon, and then
they swivel eastward to obliterate everything between
them and Pusan.
But, MacArthur’s men have other plans. The orders
of the day from General Walker become “Stand and
fight or die.” General Dean describes the war effort
with apparent reference to the limitless numbers of
enemy troops: “Trying to stop the Gooks is like trying
to stop rainwater with a fish net.”
Also, Advance Headquarters, Fifth Air Force, be-
comes operational in Taegu. In conjunction, forward
contingents cooperate with the ground troops. These
teams consist of a forward air controller, radio opera-
tor and radio repairman; the latter doubles as a jeep
driver. Six of these forward groups combine with the
24th Division during the first days of the conflict.
The Fifth Air Force uses trainer aircraft (T-6s) to lo-
cate enemy targets; they often remain behind their lines
until the arrival of fighter planes; these planes are
dubbed Mosquitos. Each Mosquito plane carries a Very
High Frequency (VHF) radio that enables the crew to
communicate with Tactical Air Control Teams on the
ground and simultaneously with the fighters in the sky.
In addition, the Mosquitos also carry an SCR-300
radio which gives them contact with the ground troops.
During the observation flights, advancing enemy
contingents are discovered south of the Kum River
July 20, 1950
moving toward the west coast, but when the informa-
tion is forwarded to Intelligence, the units are consid-
ered to be components of the N.K. 4th Division.
Subsequent reports flowing from Far East Command
to Washington attribute these recently detected N.K.
6th Division units to the N.K. 4th Division. General
MacArthur interprets this misinformation as a sign that
North Korean Headquarters is assuming that the U.N.
forces are corralled in the area northeast of the Kum
River.
Central Mountain area: The ROK I Corps, which
had defended the right flank of the U.S. 24th Division
during the early part of July, is now under strength due
to a high rate of casualties and deserters. Combined ef-
forts by U.S. and South Korean officers to reorganize and
make the unit battle-ready have proceeded haphazardly.
Subsequent to the engagements east of the Seoul-Tae-
jon Highway, the S.K. 1st, 2nd and Capital Divisions
are now each composed of between 3,000 and 3,500
troops and possess a total of eleven guns, split between
the three remaining artillery batteries. The I Corps also
possesses about thirty 81-mm mortars, none of which
have sights. The dilemma will be acted upon on the
24th, when the South Korean Army reorganizes.
General Walker, concerned about the ability of the
ROK forces to repulse the advancing enemy forces at the
Mun’gyong Plateau, has issued instructions to the U.S.
25th Division to focus on Sanju to back up the ROK
forces defending the Mun’gyong Plateau; Walker ex-
pects this action to safeguard the central mountain cor-
ridors. At Sangju, conditions are atrocious, as panic-
stricken refugees are flooding into and through the
town. The roads become jammed and compound the
problem, but even more critically, the streams of re-
treating ROK troops further complicate the predica-
ment.
Contingents of the 24th Regiment, 25th Division,
the first Negro regiment to arrive in Korea, ventures
into the vicinity of Yech’on. Elements of the 3rd Battal-
ion unsuccessfully attack an enemy-held ridge on the
fringe of the town. In the meantime, K Company, 3rd
Battalion, 24th Regiment, led by Lieutenant Jasper
Johnson, advances, apparently without incident and en-
ters the town during the day. The failed attempt to cap-
ture the ridge prompts Lieutenant Johnson to request
permission to pull out of Yech’on before nightfall. He
receives an affirmative response.
By the following morning, Colonel Henry G. Fisher,
commanding officer of the 35th Regiment, is informed
that the North Koreans have driven the 3rd Battalion,
24th Regiment, from Yech’on. Instinctively, Fisher races
from Hamch’ang toward Yech’on to evaluate the situa-
tion. He locates the 3rd Battalion west of the town and
it is unharmed. Colonel Fisher attempts to get a rea-
sonable explanation and clarification from the battalion
commander, but none is forthcoming. Colonel Fisher
and his anxious entourage race five miles and enter an
uninhabited Yech’on, which is consumed by flames ig-
nited by U.S. Artillery fire. It is undetermined whether
North Korean troops occupied Yech’on on the 20th.
116
A well-recognized journalist, Tom Lambert, accompa-
nies Colonel Fisher on the trip to Yech’on. Subsequently
he has a two-page article titled “Battle of Yech’on” pub-
lished in a magazine, but the story which suggests a
great victory by the Negro regiment prompts a pointed
response from Colonel Fisher: “If his [Lambert’s] are the
facts, then I wasn’t there.”
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force planes support
the fighting in Taejon, but they are unable to halt the
enemy from seizing the city. In related activity, a con-
tingent of FOs engages enemy aircraft and two enemy
planes are downed.
— In the United States: The commandant of the
Marine Corps (General Cates) assumes that the JCS
will eventually authorize the expansion of the 1st Pro-
visional Marine Brigade and agree to upgrade the 1st
Marine Division to wartime strength. He phones Ad-
miral Sherman, CNO, and offers plans ABLE and
BAKER, two recently created procedures that detail the
blueprint for the buildup of the two units. At present
the entire corps is comprised of a mere 74,279 officers
and enlisted men: operating forces, 40,364; supporting
establishment (administrative and supply personnel),
24,592; special assignment, 3,871; non-available hos-
pitalized personnel, confined personnel or personnel en
route, 5,492.
However, Cates’ emergency request to activate the
Marine aviation units is refused by the JCS. In the
meantime, MacArthur has already agreed that Marine
air squadrons will cover the infantry. The press in the
U.S. begins to cover the perceived intentional slight of
the Marine Corps.
In other activity, General Collins and Admiral Sher-
man depart the U.S. by plane to meet with General
MacArthur in Japan.
— In Japan: Marine Generals Edward Craig and
Thomas Cushman, domiciled at General Headquar-
ters Tokyo, meet with General Stratemeyer, USAF.
They discuss the Marine brigade and clarify General
MacArthur’s decision to keep the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade unaltered; Marine air dominates the dis-
cussion and by the conclusion of the meeting, Strate-
meyer makes it emphatically clear that MAG 33 will
remain available to support the Marine ground troops
for the duration.
In other activity, General MacArthur decides on In-
chon as the site for the amphibious invasion, but he
deliberates for a long time with Generals Almond and
Wright on the alternatives. The blueprint for the oper-
ation, dubbed Operation CHROMITE, will be distributed
to General Headquarters on the 23rd.
— In Okinawa: The USS Walker arrives at Naha,
Okinawa, transporting about 400 replacement troops;
the recruits disembark quickly and are permitted to
carry with them only their toilet articles. Without re-
alizing what is occurring, they are hustled to the bat-
talion sectors and given instant assignments to compa-
nies prior to receiving their field equipment and
weapons. Nearly without pause, the troops are shut-
tled back to the dock area from where they will
 117
embark to Korea on the following day. It is not a ha-
rassment drill. Along with the remainder of the 29th
Regiment, the unseasoned troops are scheduled to move
to the front lines in Korea. However, the regiment is
supposed to receive training near Pusan before being
thrown into the fighting.
July 21 Troops of the 21st Regiment, 24th Divi-
sion, spot an enemy contingent on their west flank.
The threatening force, listed as battalion-sized, closes
from a distance of two miles. Colonel Stephens orders
the 21st Regiment to abandon its positions east of Tae-
jon and at Okch’on. At about 1100, the 21st and the
52nd Field Artillery Battalion move toward the south-
ern edge of Korea. After traveling about twenty miles
along the highway that heads southwest, between Yong-
dong to Kumsan, the 21st Regiment establishes a road-
block about four miles northwest of Yongdong.
On the previous night, during the retreat from Tae-
jon, General Dean had gone back down a mountain to
fetch water for the wounded in his party. He never re-
turned to the group, due to a fall that rendered him
unconscious. The remainder of the party, after a pro-
longed wait for Dean, moves on toward Yongdong.
Meanwhile, General Dean regains consciousness
only to find that he has a severe head wound and a bro-
ken shoulder. Although it is thought that General Dean
had been killed or captured, there is no news of his fate.
He roves around the mountains concealed from the
enemy for thirty-six days while trying to reach Amer-
ican lines. It is a futile attempt. The laborious trek
drains his strength and he loses about sixty pounds. Fi-
nally, on the 25th of August, he is captured about 35
miles south of Taejon.
Central Mountain area: The S.K. 8th Division at-
tempts to retain control of the area encompassing An-
The Communist offensive continues to pressure Eighth Army. This is the scene of a burning village
between Yech’on and Andong on 21 July.
July 21, 1950
dong and the upper Naktong River crossing there. It en-
gages the approaching N.K. 12th Division, which is
supported by about thirty Soviet T-34 tanks. The elite
N.K. 12th Division is composed of seasoned troops,
most of whom have served during the Chinese wars.
The enemy had earlier crossed the upper Han River at
Tanyang en route to Andong. The S.K. forces launch
the attack and plow into the enemy at a point between
Yongju and Andong. This ignites a vicious string of se-
vere actions which last until the end of the month.
The N.K. 12th Division, at about this time, receives
new orders from N.K. II Corps instructing it “to cap-
ture Pohang-dong by 26 July.” Even without the stiff
opposition offered by the ROK, the task is difficult, if
not insurmountable. The objective is about 75 air-miles
away, and to reach it by foot, the North Koreans must
trudge over the beastly mountains beyond Andong.
The routes of passage are primitive paths, unaccessible
except by foot or oxcart. The N.K. 12th Division reini-
tiates daylight movement, which exposes its troops to
air attack.
In other activity, the S.K. 18th Regiment, Capital
Division, assumes responsibility for the defense of
Yech’on. It relieves the 3rd Battalion, U.S. 24th Regi-
ment. The Capital Division will engage the N.K. 8th
Division in a series of skirmishes that last until the end
of July. Meanwhile, the 25th Division concentrates on
holding Sangju. To guarantee its safety, General Kean’s
force must hold the strategic road that runs across the
Mun’gyong plateau, then through Hamch’ang into
Sangju. The 25th Division also must hold the other
primary road, which leans farther west as it moves over
the plateau, then over the mountains converging on
Sangju from the east. The enemy attacks the 25th Di-
vision on the following day. The inclement weather
prevents aerial observance flights that would otherwise
July 22, 1950
chart the progress of the advancing N.K. 6th Division,
which is being mistaken as elements of the N.K. 4th
Division. General Walker’s command is aware of the
enemy movement toward southwestern Korea. Intelli-
gence attempts to dispatch an armored reconnaissance
patrol to probe the area, but there are no available per-
sonnel. Fairer skies return to the area on July 23.
— In Japan: Initially, when General MacArthur had
accepted the commitment of Marines for duty in Korea,
it had been proposed to base the ground forces in Sasebo
and the air units at Kobe Air Field, separating the units
by about 400 miles. General Craig, USMC, aware of
the impending burden, has recently requested that the
troops be garrisoned together near Kobe in order to con-
tinue training. He is so confident that the request will be
affirmed that he directs Generals Craig and Cushman to
depart Tokyo and inspect the areas. The two generals
and their accompanying staff return to Tokyo on the
23rd.
—In Okinawa: The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th In-
fantry Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel Wesley
C. Wilson and Lt. Colonel Harold W. Mott, respec-
tively, embark for Korea during a torrential rainstorm
aboard the vessels Fentriss and Takasago Maru. The ships
arrive at Pusan on the 24th. Due to circumstances, the
scheduled training in Japan is canceled and soon after
their arrival in Korea, the units ship out for the front
lines.
July 22 More 24th Division stragglers from the bat-
tle of Taejon reach Yongdong. Its relief, the 1st Cavalry
Division, is less than full strength, despite picking up
more than 1,400 replacements (including about 100
men who had been residing in the stockade) prior to de-
parting Japan. Each regiment is composed of two bat-
talions rather than the necessary three, and each artillery
battalion is composed of only two batteries. Also, only
one tank company, composed of light M24s, is with the
division. At 1200, the 1st Cavalry Division assumes re-
sponsibility for the front line positions of the Yongdong
perimeter (Taejon-Taegu corridor), relieving the bat-
tered 24th Division.
Following seventeen days of vicious combat against
two seasoned North Korean divisions, the strength of
the 24th Division has been reduced to 8,660 troops. At
Yongdong, the 8th Cavalry Regiment replaces the 21st
Regiment, 24th Division. With the whereabouts of
General Dean still unknown, since his disappearance
during the evacuation of Taejon, General John H.
Church is directed by Eighth Army to take command of
the 24th Division. The 24th Division had been plagued
by enormous disadvantages during the initial combat
against the enemy, including but not limited to the total
lack of coherent communications, atrocious lack of
proper equipment and ammunition, obsolete maps and
improper discipline, all fueled by erroneous and ludi-
crous rumors. The troops had also been ill-trained for the
extraordinary ordeal which had been thrust upon them.
At Taegu, General Walker emphatically cautions
General Gay that Yongdong must be held. Walker also
118
reminds Gay that no friendly troops bolster his rear,
but that the cavalry must keep the highway open to en-
sure replenishment of ammunition. According to
Walker, the ammunition will be the substance of life for
the cavalry, taking priority even over food.
After the short meeting with General Walker, Gen-
eral Gay departs for Yongdong, where he becomes in-
volved in a controversial meeting with a representative
of Eighth Army, Colonel Allan D. MacLean (G-3 Sec-
tion). Colonel MacLean had instructed General Palmer
to split the 8th Cavalry, deploying its two battalions
on opposing sides of the Kum River. The 1st Battalion
is to be posted about two miles southwest of Yongdong
to protect a key position, the Taejon-Taegu Road, and
the 2nd Battalion is to deploy south of the river and
about four miles northwest of the town to guard the
Chosan-ni-Muju-Kumsan Road. The strategy seems
suicidal to General Palmer and to General Gay; to them
it is obvious that the divided force will resemble the
7th Cavalry at the Little Big Horn. Gay, astonished by
MacLean’s order, flatly tells him that he will not com-
ply with the order until Eighth Army instructs him by
telephone to do so. After a short interlude, Eighth
Army is on the phone with General Gay and subse-
quent to confirmation, the orders issued by the colonel
stand.
Reluctantly, the 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, moves
northwest and the 2nd Battalion heads southwest. Both
units realize that once the battle commences, neither
can support the other. The 5th Cavalry Regiment is
placed east of Yongdong in the heights. Palmer’s plan,
with which Gay concurs, had been to spread the 1st
Cavalry on a string of hills east of Yongdong, whereby
the units would be able to support each other. In ad-
dition, the withdrawing 24th Division could retire
through a strong line of cover.
Also today, Major Raibl arrives at Taegu, intent on
arranging suitable combat training for the 29th Regi-
ment. A curt conversation between Raibl and the
Eighth Army Asst. G-3, Colonel Allan D. MacLean,
proves fruitless, as the latter appears preoccupied, un-
concerned about the unpreparedness of the anticipated
arrivals. In fairness, Raibl is not yet aware of the cru-
cial situation of the entire Eighth Army’s precarious
position. Subsequently, an empathetic General Walker
listens attentively to Raibl, but ultimately, the conclu-
sion remains the same. There is no time to spare. Raibl
departs Taegu with the impression that the 29th will get
about a three-day reprieve at Pusan to procure equip-
ment and test their weapons prior to facing the enemy.
In other activity, while it prepares to cross the Kum
River to join the fight, the N.K. 2nd Division receives
word that Taejon has fallen. The 2nd Division has been
lagging behind the other enemy divisions that fought
at Taejon. With news of the victory, the N.K. 2nd Di-
vision bypasses Taejon and advances southeast toward
Poun. Also, the N. K. 3rd Division marches out of Tae-
jon, driving toward Taegu.
Central mountain area: Northwest of Sangju, an
ROK battalion holds positions on the north side of an
 119
over-swollen stream. An arbitrary decision by Brigadier
General Vennard Wilson, Asst. 25th Division Com-
mander, has placed Company F, 2nd Battalion, 35th
Regiment, in a precarious spot at the core of the ROK
battalion, ostensibly to furnish the South Koreans some
added confidence. But F Company is untested and the
move is vehemently contested by Colonel Fisher and
the battalion commander, Lt. Colonel John Wilkins.
Behind the ROK troops, but on the north side of the
stream, stands the remainder of the U.S. 35th Regi-
ment’s 2nd Battalion. It is bolstered by a contingent of
tanks from the 79th Tank Battalion and by Battery A,
90th Field Artillery, which stands ready at a formida-
ble obstacle along the primary road near the town.
But, as usual, events do not unfold according to ex-
pectations. The weather is nasty and the ongoing del-
uge has bulged the stream, transforming it into an un-
yielding and rampaging foe. The water’s current is so
strong that huge rocks and assorted debris tumble down
the channel. From their positions south of the stream,
the troops of the 2nd Battalion, 35th Regiment, are
dispersed along a hill, situated south of Mun’gyong and
northwest of Hamch’ang. They keep vigil in case of an
enemy breakthrough. Back on the south side of the
stream, Company F, deployed with the South Koreans,
receives its baptism under fire as it becomes the center
of attention. The North Koreans launch an attack
against the ROK lines, but the ROK troops retreat,
surely exposing the untried Americans. In a swift mo-
tion, the enemy begins to envelop the isolated com-
pany. Its positions are bombarded from the rear and
the sides, creating pandemonium. The casualty list
soars.
An unsophisticated but deliberate attempt to evacuate
the walking wounded is mounted. Three men, two offi-
cers and a noncom, execute an impetuous, but nonethe-
less heroic, mission to stave off disaster. Each man wraps
himself with two twisted coils of telephone wire, then at-
tempts to reach the opposing bank and tie down a line.
The efforts are futile against the wild currents. The vol-
unteers are haphazardly bashed about and tossed down-
stream until finally, they get back to the identical bank
from which they started, about 100 yards away.
The enemy continues to pound away, but aid is en
route to the imperiled command. The turrets of a pla-
toon of U.S. tanks (A Company, 79th Tank Bn.), po-
sitioned on the north bank, begin to bellow. Their roar
instills hope for the trapped command. Swirling shells
land amidst the prancing enemy. The gunners exhibit
excellent marksmanship that forestalls disaster and pre-
vents encirclement. The protective umbrella of cover
fire continues to hold the enemy at bay. Essentially it
suspends their resiliency and brings the attack to a
screeching halt. The prodigious efforts of the tanks en-
able the survivors of Company F to extricate them-
selves. Company losses total 6 men killed, 10 wounded
and 21 missing in action. Without incident, the 2nd
Battalion, 35th Regiment remains in the heights over-
looking the north bank throughout the day. Later, on
the 23rd, Company F receives new orders.
July 22, 1950
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, U.S. 24th Reg-
iment, operating with contingents of the S.K. 17th
Regiment in an area about 20 miles northwest of
Sangju, encounters unexpected opposition. While as-
cending into the mountains, Company E is at the point
on a primitive road that leads through an ominous
canyon with huge and steep climbing mountain walls.
The 24th Regiment, which sustained a difficult time
under fire during its entry into combat, is again stunned
when several enemy automatic weapons and a couple of
mortars commence firing.
Company E hits the dirt quickly and the troops
spread out on both sides of the road, disregarding, for
one reason or another, a South Korean officer’s advice
to spread out to the left and right in an effort to evade
the enemy fire and regroup to envelop the resistance.
The pinned-down troops become targets for enemy ri-
flemen, who enjoin the action, but there is little or no
return fire as both Company E and Company F mount
an irregular retreat out of the gorge.
Word of the ambush reaches the regimental com-
mander, Colonel Horton White. He immediately
speeds toward the gorge to end the panic and restore dis-
cipline. But along the way White encounters the be-
wildered 2nd Battalion, still moving in the opposite
direction. After a while, Horton is able to restore order
within the ranks, but there is no movement to termi-
nate the resistance.
On the 23rd, South Korean troops move in to engage
the enemy positions. By this day, the 27th Regiment,
25th Division, again rerouted, arrives at Hwanggan
and receives the task to relieve the battle-weary retreat-
ing ROK troops along the Poun road.
In Naval activity, planes from the USS Valley Forge
strike Haeju and damage a bridge used for both vehic-
ular and rail traffic. Additionally, the raids destroy six
enemy locomotives. More than half of the railcars in a
33-car train are blown up.
— In the United States: The JCS have been delib-
erating over General MacArthur’s request for a wartime
strength Marine division for use in Korea, without re-
sults. Initially, MacArthur had received a response in-
forming him that his request could not be fulfilled any
earlier than late fall “without unacceptable weakening
[of ] the Fleet Marine Force Atlantic.” The message ig-
nites an immediate and more urgent response from
MacArthur: “There can be no demand for its [Marine
division’s] Potential use elsewhere that can equal the
urgency of the immediate battle mission contemplated
for it.”
This day, having read MacArthur’s most recent re-
quest, the JCS inform MacArthur that they are reexam-
ining the possibility of providing the Marine division,
and they request confirmation of the status of the Ma-
rine brigade (until Sept. 10th), which is en route.
MacArthur responds by informing the JCS that the
Marine brigade will remain in Japan under Admiral
Joy for participation in the anticipated invasion
unless the ongoing operations in Korea deteriorate.
MacArthur also states that a definitive date for the
July 23, 1950
amphibious invasion cannot be ascertained at present.
He implies that it must not be delayed or the advantage
will be lost and the alternative will be a frontal attack.
July 23 A group of survivors from Taejon, which
had initially included General Dean and was led by
Lieutenant Arthur M. Clarke, reaches the friendly lines
of the 1st Cavalry at Yongdong. The Cavalry is also
greeted by some unwelcome visitors, as advance contin-
gents of the N.K. 3rd Division close toward the perime-
ter. The 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry Regiment, initiates
its use of the 3.5 rocket launcher. Soon after, it reports
that three approaching T-34 tanks had been met, en-
gaged and terminated northwest of the town.
Meanwhile, as the 1st Battalion repels a direct frontal
assault, contingents of the N.K. 7th and 9th Regiments
drive to positions southwest of Yongdong and estab-
lish a roadblock to the rear of the 8th Cavalry Regi-
ment, essentially isolating it. On the following day, at-
tempts are made to demolish the roadblock. In other
activity, with the arrival of good weather, General
Walker requests that the Fifth Air Force order armed
reconnaissance sorties over the Kwangju-Nonsan area in
southwest Korea to verify a fresh intelligence report of
enemy movement. The flights uncover an ongoing
drive toward the rear of the west (left) flank of Eighth
Army. In conjunction, the Intelligence (G-2) predicts
the arrival of the estimated division at the area near
Anui-Chinju line in the Chiri Mountains by July 25.
Air reconnaissance reports concur and the information
proves accurate.
In other activity, the N.K. 4th Division, having
rested and acquired about 1,000 untested replacements,
departs Taejon, heading south along the Kumsan Road
to join the N.K. 6th Division in its effort to collapse the
Eighth Army’s left flank. It will pause in Kumsan to
acquire another 1,000 replacement troops (who have
received several days’ training), departing there on
about the 25th.
Also, the Second and Third Echelons of the fleet,
subsequent to delay due to weather, begin unloading
their cargoes at Pohang-dong; the former is composed
of three APs, six LSTs and four Japanese freighters and
the latter is composed of six LSTs. The debarkation of
the 1st Cavalry and its equipment is completed by the
29th.
In conjunction, on the 30th, CTF 90 reports that
ComPhibGru One has completed the operation and
no ships remain at the objective. The landing at
Pohang-dong receives scant coverage in the U.S. news-
papers, because it was unopposed; however, it has ac-
tually been a tremendous accomplishment, combining
Navy-Marine tactics and Army enthusiasm at a crucial
period. General Gay’s 1st Cavalry Division is desper-
ately required to halt the enemy, especially since the
beleaguered 24th Division had relinquished Taejon on
the 20th.
Central Mountain area: Five enemy tanks ford a
river and close toward Hamch’ang, by way of the pri-
mary road. The N.K. armor has a luckless day as it
120
comes into range of the guns of the 90th Field Artillery
Battalion, commanded by James V. Sanden. The ar-
tillery is part of the force supporting the 2nd Battal-
ion, 35th Regiment. Four of the advancing tanks are
decimated, but the sole surviving tank evades destruc-
tion by returning to the opposite bank. Soon after, it
too is destroyed by roving U.S. planes.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 35th Regiment,
is ordered to pull back from the heights and redeploy
about five miles north of Sangju. Later, circumstances
dictate that the 2nd Battalion again move. It relocates
to a new position about two miles from Sangju, and
then on the 30th, the wandering battalion is directed to
redeploy south of the town.
In the sector northwest of Sangju, where the ROKs
and 24th U.S. Regiment had been ambushed on the
previous day, contingents of the S.K. 17th Regiment
climb the mountain walls and overpower the North
Koreans who had sprung the ambush. About thirty
enemy troops, apparently guerrillas, are captured along
with one mortar and two light machine guns. The
South Korean 17th Regiment remains in the hills for
about two additional days and gains slight progress
against the enemy, but then it withdraws and returns to
Sangju.
With the absence of the ROK 17th Regiment, the
U.S. 24th Regiment is the sole unit that remains to
protect the western approach to Sangju against the
N.K. 15th Division. The western front becomes any-
thing but quiet as the regiment remains prone to hys-
teria during the majority of its missions west of Sangju.
According to the testimony of battalion and regimen-
tal officers, the abandonment of weapons and positions
is a frequent occurrence for the duration of the month.
At times, more equipment is left behind than that
which is brought back; in one instance, a contested hill
is deserted, but when the enemy occupies it, they dis-
cover fifteen machine guns (three .50-caliber and
twelve .30-caliber), eleven mortars (eight 60-mm and
three 81-mm), 102 rifles and four 3.5 rocket launch-
ers. The 24th is plagued with men heading for the rear,
whereby they unnecessarily place the lives of the men
who remain at their duty posts in great risk.
While occupying one mountain, Company L initi-
ates the operation with four officers and 105 enlisted
men and sustains some casualties, but including these
and those evacuated for different reasons (1 officer and
17 enlisted), the unit becomes skeletonized as troops
mysteriously vanish. Within a few days, a relief col-
umn moves up the mountain. And, the 24th Regiment,
all seventeen men still in their foxholes, begin the de-
scent. Surprisingly, when the gallant seventeen reach
the base of the mountain, their numbers have increased
by one officer and thirty-five enlisted men. L Com-
pany begins the descent with 88 troops unaccounted
for; now the number of missing personnel stands at 52.
Also, the 27th Regiment, commanded by Colonel
Michaelis, enters the fray. The 1st Battalion, led by Lt.
Colonel Gilbert J. Check, departs Hwanggan and
moves to establish a roadblock to halt the N.K. 2nd
 121
A U.S. 2 1/2-ton truck with a machine gun mounted upon it engages the enemy. Nearby infantry troops
remain under protective cover behind a fence during the exchange.
Division. At 1700, the unit takes responsibility for the
sector, subsequent to the ROK force passing through its
lines. During the evening, the unit digs in defensively
outside of Sangyong-ni, but south of Poun.
After an unsuccessful talk with some South Korean
troops in an attempt to determine the strength and lo-
cation of the enemy, a 30-man contingent from Com-
pany A, 27th Regiment led by Lieutenant John Buck-
ley, ventures off in the darkness to reconnoiter. The
detachment encounters an enemy column that is ad-
vancing south. Promptly, Buckley’s troops peel off and
take positions in the hills on both sides of the road. As
the enemy column (probably a spearhead of a larger
force) moves into close range, the patrol commences
firing and the column halts and then returns to Poun.
The patrol, having sustained six men missing, returns
to regimental lines at 0400 (24th).
West Coast area: The N.K. 6th Division continues
its advance against minimal opposition raised by some
S.K. Police, several hundred scattered survivors of the
S.K. 7th Division and a small amount of S.K. Marines.
The North Koreans are heading toward the anemic left
flank of Eighth Army, which is being pressed toward
Pusan. From Kwangju, the 14th N.K. Regiment drives
south to Posong, while the 13th N.K. Regiment moves
southwest to the coastal town of Mokp’o. In conjunc-
tion, the 15th N.K. Regiment moves southeast through
Sunch’on to the southern coastal town of Yosu. Lack of
stiff opposition greatly aids the under-equipped enemy
division, which is forced to subsist on meager rations
due to its atrocious supply system.
In Air Force activity, the 6132d Tactical Air Control
Group (Provisional) establishes a Tactical Air Control
Center adjacent to the Joint Operations Center at
Taegu, South Korea.
July 23, 1950
— In the United States: General Cates receives au-
thorization to mobilize the Marine Aviation Reserve.
The Marine Organized Aviation Reserve, composed of
30 VMF Squadrons and 12 GCI Squadrons, is directed
to order six VMF Squadrons and three GCI (Ground
Control Intercept) Squadrons to report to El Toro, Cal-
ifornia, to bolster the 1st Marine Air Wing and bring
it up to war strength. MAG-33 of 1st MAW has been
dispatched to the Far East, prompting the action.
— In Hawaii: The 5th Regimental Combat Team,
commanded by Colonel Godwin Ordway, embarks
Hawaii by sea for Korea. Many of the troops are
Hawaiians and there are some men who served during
World War II in the American-Japanese (Nisei) units.
The unit arrives at Pusan on July 31. Also, 14 M-26 Per-
shing tanks and the 555th Field Artillery Battalion,
nicknamed the Triple Nickel Battalion, accompany the
combat team.
— In Japan: General MacArthur makes it known
that the U.N. forces, while prosecuting the war, will
embrace the provisions of the Geneva Prisoner of War
Convention. In conjunction, Syngman Rhee, the pres-
ident of South Korea, accepts the same provisions for
the Republic of Korea. At 1730, a meeting concerning
the Inchon operation convenes at MacArthur’s head-
quarters. Representatives of the Army and Navy are in
attendance, including Generals Collins (Army chief of
staff ), Almond, Hickey and Wright, and Admirals
Sherman, Doyle, Joy and Struble.
Admiral Doyle, speaking on behalf of the Navy, ref-
erences the selection of Inchon: “The operation is not
impossible, but I do not recommend it.” Following the
naval presentation, MacArthur, who had remained
silent except for a few select questions, reverts to his
persuasiveness. Through the process of elimination, he
July 23, 1950 122

A U.S. Navy Corsair (creating vapor circles) takes off of the USS Boxer. Part of a rescue helicopter can
be seen at top right. Helicopters remain in the air during operations in the event a rescue becomes nec-
essary.

knocks out Kunsan, the site favored by Sherman and
Collins. Eventually, after speaking for about forty-five
minutes, MacArthur, hell-bent on an Inchon landing,
closes with his usual flair, noting: “The Navy has never
turned me down yet, and I know it will not now.”
MacArthur prevails, although additional attempts to
sway him continue. In conjunction, an alternate land-
ing site at Posung-myon, opposite Osan and thirty
miles south of Inchon, is suggested by Doyle.
On the following day, General Lemuel Shepherd, Jr.,
USMC, reiterates the suggestion of Admiral Doyle,
nonetheless unsuccessfully. The blueprint for Operation
CHROMITE is made available to General Headquarters.
The ambitious plan offers alternative landing sites for
the invasion of Korea: (1) Plan 100-B, Inchon (west
coast); (2) Plan 100-C, Kunsan (west coast); (3) Plan
100-D, vicinity of Chumunjin (east coast). The fea-
tured plan is B, in synchronization with an Eighth
Army attack. MacArthur apprises the Department of
the Army that he has scheduled an amphibious landing,
composed of the 5th Marines and the 2nd Infantry Di-
vision, for mid–September to be sprung against the
enemy behind his lines. However, enemy successes will
alter these plans.
In other activity, the USS Boxer arrives off Japan, trans-
porting 145 urgently needed F-51 Mustangs (procured
 123
from National Guard air squadrons) to bolster the Far
Eastern Air Force’s efforts in Korea. The Boxer has com-
pleted the voyage from Alameda in eight days and about
seven hours. Air Force records, differing from Navy
records, show the Boxer arriving on 22 July.
In other activity, the initial Red Ball Express train de-
parts Yokohama for Sasebo at 1330 and arrives at its
destination with priority cargo in slightly more than
thirty hours; from there, the cargo is forwarded to
Pusan by ferry, completing the total mission in about
50 hours. Shortly thereafter, on the 25th, the trains de-
part on a daily basis; they pull out of Yokohama at 2330
with tentative arrival at Sasebo scheduled for 0542, two
days later. The final part of the journey, following the
cargo’s transfer from the railcars to the ferry, is sched-
uled to depart for Pusan at 1330 (on a daily basis) for
arrival at Pusan at 0400 on the following day.
Also, the Marine entourage that had gone to Itami
airfield to examine the area returns to Tokyo and pro-
poses a blueprint for the deployment of the 1st Brigade
and the 1st Marine Division near there; MacArthur’s
staff concurs. Two days later, the Marine officers again
return to Itaki.
July 24 The North Koreans capture Chinan,
Kwangju, Mokp’o and Yonju. The naval base at Mokp’o
on the southwestern coast is seized by elements of the
N.K. Sixth Division, who had fooled both the U.S. and
South Koreans by marching south only during the
darkened hours; it had been thought that only small
guerrilla units had been involved. During the day, U.S.
Naval Air Reconnaissance flights had spotted huge
unidentified troop movements throughout southwest-
ern Korea and immediately passed the crucial informa-
tion on to their mother ships.
With the unexpected arrival of yet another North
Korean Division, the fate of the already threatened
Eighth Army becomes more questionable. The bad
news reaches General Walker at Eighth Army Head-
quarters, and it becomes apparent that the enemy is
only about 150 miles from Pusan, advancing against
minimal opposition. Without hesitation, Walker con-
tacts Tokyo, requesting immediate close-air support to
impede the advance and forestall encirclement of the
U.N. forces. This urgent plea re-illuminates the differ-
ence in thinking between the Air Force’s definition of
close-air support and the contrasting concept that had
been perfected between the Navy and Marines during
World War II. The method devised by the Air Force is
not yet prepared for implementation; however, the
Navy is ready to move into action.
General Jarred Crabb, USAF, contacts Rear Admiral
A.K. Morehouse, Admiral Joy’s chief of staff, request-
ing the Navy’s assistance. Morehouse, despite his re-
luctance to act because of the lack of sufficiently skilled
ground-to-air control parties on the front lines, realizes
that the Navy must act. The answer comes forth from
Admiral Struble within 58 minutes: affirmative. Stru-
ble informs Eighth Army that the planes will be air-
borne as soon as their ammunition is replenished and
July 24, 1950
the ongoing refueling operation is completed. Admiral
Joy communicates with Admiral Struble concerning
the urgency of the situation and the dangers involved:
“The calculated risk of damage to friendly forces must
be accepted. The ground situation is so critical that
commencement of operations on 25th is highly desir-
able.”
General Walker also orders the 24th Division to
speed south to intercept the enveloping force. At noon,
General Church, commanding the 24th in the absence
of General Dean, is called to Walker’s headquarters to
discuss the critical development emerging near the un-
defended left flank of Eighth Army. The 24th Divi-
sion, Walker explains, must cover the protracted area
stretching between Chinju to positions close to Kum-
ch’on; this is no simple task, considering that the two
specified locations stand about 65 air-miles apart on
opposite sides of the rugged Chiri Mountains.
The order comes down following just one day of the
division being placed on the reserve roster to permit
resupply of equipment and replacement of its many ca-
sualties. The beleaguered 24th Division lacks about 60
to 70 percent of the equipment necessary to operate, and
its three regiments each remain composed of only two
weakened battalions, rather than the normal full
strength of three battalions. Nonetheless, just prior to
midnight (24th–25th), the 19th Regiment departs for
Chinju from Kumch’on.
By the following day, reports of enemy movement
in southwest Korea flood headquarters, giving the
Eighth Army the impression that the N.K. 4th Division
is scattered across nearly 3,500 square miles of the
southwestern portion of Korea.
In other activity, the South Korean (ROK) Army re-
organizes, forming two corps (I and II) and five divi-
sions; the battered S.K. 2nd Division is dismantled and
its remaining troops are transferred to the S.K. 1st Di-
vision; the I Corps, operating in the Taebaek Mountain
area, is composed of the Capital and 8th S.K. Divi-
sions; II Corps is composed of the 1st and 6th S.K. Di-
visions. The other S.K. division, the 3rd, will be di-
rectly controlled by South Korean Army due to its
remote and virtually isolated positions on the east coast,
too distant for effective I Corps control. The South Ko-
rean forces (II Corps) adjoin the U.S. troops to the west
and stretch east through the central mountains, linking
with the I Corps at Andong (until August 1), then
Sangju to the east coast, which is defended by the S.K.
3rd Division. Also, the advance group of the Air Force
is designated Fifth Air Force in Korea.
Central Mountain area: Elements of the S.K. 6th
Division engage the N.K. 1st Division in a vicious bat-
tle in the mountains over Hamch’ang, resulting in the
destruction of seven Soviet T-34 tanks. Also, the U.S.
25th Division, as of today, assumes responsibility for the
area stretching west from Sangju to the Seoul-Taegu
Road; this releases the ROK 1st and 2nd Division com-
ponents to swivel from Sangju and head north and east
respectively to the Hamch’ang front.
Near the village of Sangyong-ni, the 27th U.S.
July 24, 1950
Regiment braces for an enemy attack. A patrol that had
gone out the previous night returns at 0400; it had de-
tected an imminent enemy approach. The weather re-
mains unkind to the defenders. Slightly after dawn, a
thick fog permeates the area, giving added advantage to
the N.K. 2nd Division, which launches its assault at
0630 and moves swiftly under the mist. At the forward
point, two rifle companies are entrenched along shal-
low ridges on both sides of the road, but the enemy
nudges too close before it is discovered. But then the
Eighth Army engineers set explosives on a bridge to prepare it for demolition if the North Koreans
threaten the positions.
124
barrels roar and the accompanying T-34s score. The
tank fire rips into the riflemen whose return fire is suf-
ficient to only halt the infantry. The tanks remain un-
scathed and press forward toward battalion headquar-
ters, with their machine guns and cannon blazing.
Action is heavy throughout the area. While the rifle-
men stall the enemy infantry, additional tanks swerve
around the bend, plow over the observation post of
Company B on the right side of the road, and then drive
toward the 1st Battalion lines. The 1st contingent
 125
A U.S. tank (Chaffee M24) pauses in a South Korean village in the vicinity of Yech’on on 24 July.
of armor effortlessly penetrates the perimeter and com-
mences firing on the battalion command post, which
lies behind Company B’s positions.
During the shoot out, several U.S. vehicles are de-
stroyed and the medical officer is killed. Return fire is
quickly mounted. The commanding officer of Com-
pany A Captain Weston commandeers a bazooka, and
from extremely close range, he kills an attacking tank;
however, the tank fire from close range costs Weston the
loss of his hearing and one nearby soldier is killed. We-
ston refuses to leave the battle area, but later he is or-
dered to the rear by Colonel Check to receive aid.
In reaction to the five additional tanks that have en-
tered the action, Colonel Check requests air strikes and
July 24, 1950
through some fortuitous luck, three F-80 jets appear
overhead. In an instant, following rapid dives, three
of the tanks are wiped out by the planes’ rockets. The
fast-paced battle lasts throughout the day with the hills
being lost and regained repeatedly. By day’s end, two
more T-34 tanks are destroyed, leaving only two oth-
ers. The heights have changed occupants three times,
but the Americans, fearful of envelopment during the
night, prepare to pull back. The 1st Battalion breaks
off the fighting and moves back, passing through the
2nd Battalion lines, apparently unnoticed by the North
Koreans. The North Koreans launch a large assault
against the abandoned positions on the following
morning.
July 25, 1950
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, near Yongdong, the
North Korean forces, following another extremely suc-
cessful infiltration operation (enhanced by posing as
refugees), squeeze the noose tighter around the cavalry.
The enemy uses some cunning methods to fool the un-
suspecting Americans, including using women who ap-
pear pregnant, but in fact are simply bulging because
of concealed radios that are being used to report U.S.
positions. On this day, one woman is scrutinized closely
and her phony pregnancy is aborted as a soldier re-
moves the radio.
Meanwhile, southwest of Yongdong, U.S. tanks re-
peatedly rush the strangling roadblock to displace it.
Four separate attacks fail to budge it and the 8th Cav-
alry remains isolated. During one of the attacks, the
2nd Battalion commanding officer, Lt. Colonel Eu-
gene Field, is wounded.
Another spirited attack to clear the rear of the be-
sieged 2nd Battalion is launched by the 1st Battalion,
5th Cavalry Regiment, supported by the 16th Recon-
naissance Company, but it too falters. By now both the
1st and 2nd Battalions (8th Cavalry) are in great jeop-
ardy and the support units as well. The massive enemy
infiltration threatens both the 99th and the 61st Field
Artillery Battalions, which have combined their re-
sources to bolster the 2nd Battalion. Both units come
under equally severe attacks, which threaten their abil-
ity to provide full-powered support fire.
In synchronization with the ongoing assaults against
the 2nd Battalion, southwest of Yongdong, the 1st Bat-
talion, precariously perched northwest of the town, sus-
tains ferocious attacks. But with unbridled support fire
from Battery A, 92nd Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion,
and the 77th Field Artillery Battalion, the North Ko-
reans are repelled temporarily.
East Coast area: The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th
Regiment, arrive at Pusan and upon debarkation, they
receive their waiting orders: proceed immediately to
Chinju to become attached to the 19th Regiment, 24th
Division. This obviously eliminates any training for
the green troops.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force moves its ad-
vanced headquarters from Japan to Taegu in an effort
to smooth communications between it and Eighth
Army. The headquarters is established close to the
headquarters of Eighth Army.
— In Japan: Today, General Almond, who has been
chief of staff of the Far East Command since February
18, 1949, subsequent to his position as deputy chief of
staff to General MacArthur (Nov. ’46–Feb. ’49), is also
appointed chief of staff, U.N. Command.
In other activity, Escort Element (CTE 96.50), com-
manded by British Captain A.D.H. Jay and composed
of the HMS Black Swan (PF), HMS Hart (PF), and
the HMS Shoalhaven (PF), is established by Naval
Forces Far East.
July 25 Starting at midnight (24th–25th), war-
ships of the Seventh Fleet swing out from the west coast
of Korea, heading toward the east coast to provide
126
close-air support for the endangered Eighth Army and
ROK ground troops. By 0800, the thunderous roar of
the planes’ engines breaks the morning silence as the
aircraft spring from the deck of the Valley Forge. Within
about twenty minutes, the naval aviators soar directly
above the battleground and fly hoops over Taeju to an-
nounce their presence to the JOC ( Joint Army–Air
Force Center).
Operating within the bounds of over-stressed com-
munication channels and the deficient numbers of
“Mosquito” plane controllers, the pilots join the fight.
Due to the difficulty in pronouncing the names of the
Korean towns and villages, the navy has its work cut
out for the day. Adding to the Herculean operation,
while the carrier aircraft attempts to communicate with
the L-5 liaison plane (spotter-observation), other planes
arrive. F-80 jets, based in Japan, speed overhead search-
ing for targets. The naval Corsairs and Skyraiders, sub-
sequent to attempting to open communications with the
ground, move farther west without the availability of ac-
curate maps. Nevertheless, the planes scour the area for
enemy movement. Several pilots dump their bombs in
the sea just prior to returning to the carrier.
During the initial mission, the British carrier Tri-
umph picks up the slack by running the bulk of com-
bat air patrols in their absence, essentially freeing every
available plane on the Valley Forge for the mission. Later
in the day, Admiral Struble reports by dispatch on the
first close-air support mission over Korea: “The results
of the morning sweeps and strikes were very minor due
to a dearth of targets. No Rolling stock seen, only a
few donkey carts plus men in rice paddies.... Seven
trucks strafed did not burn. Four trucks strafed and
burned. Will continue afternoon strikes, but under
above conditions, the prospects appear poor. Consider
it mandatory that proper communications be
arranged....”
At Kumsan, the N.K. 4th Division reinitiates its
southward march to join the N.K. 6th Division. The
tank regiment, which had accompanied it since the first
day of the invasion, lags behind at Kumsan and remains
in place awaiting the N.K. 4th Division to cross the
Naktong River.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, at Yongdong, the 1st
Cavalry’s divided positions have become untenable.
The overwhelming results of the enemy infiltration
force a withdrawal. The 2nd Battalion, 8th Cavalry,
still isolated southwest of Yongdong, has had little if
any sleep overnight as it works tirelessly to forestall de-
feat. During the early morning hours, hair-raising
friendly artillery nearly singes the ears of the men of
the 2nd Battalion as shells zoom over the heads of the
defenders into the enemy positions. Several men are
wounded.
In concert with the blazing guns of the artillery, at
0430, the desperate 2nd Battalion launches a break-
out assault, which cracks a slim hole in the roadblock.
A continuing surge of unconscious energy from the ex-
hausted troops shoves the lead contingents through the
gap, but unrelenting enemy fire plugs the leak before the
 127
entire battalion can extricate itself. Seven of the eleven
tanks fail to break out, and although most of the im-
periled battalion escapes, the rear of the column an-
chored by the tanks, Company F, 8th Cavalry, and the
16th Reconnaissance Company are trapped.
During the breakout attempt, the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Cavalry, joins the fight to help save the besieged 2nd
Battalion, 8th Cavalry; but one of its contingents,
Company F, 5th Cavalry, inadvertently moves to the
wrong hill and walks into a totally unexpected storm of
enemy fire which decimates the company. Only 26 men
escape.
Meanwhile, the men still trapped behind the road-
block discount any possibility of rescue. They aban-
don their equipment, including the tanks, and disperse
into the hills. After a two-day jaunt through the
heights, 219 men (composed primarily of Company F,
2nd Battalion, 8th Cavalry) reach friendly lines (total
casualties 1st Cavalry Division today — 275).
The North Korean pressure against the 1st Battal-
ion northwest of Yongdong is less destructive. The two
batteries of the 77th Field Artillery Battalion, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel William A. Harris, and the
heavy mortar company lay an elaborate field of cover
fire, and Lt. Colonel Robert Kane’s 1st Battalion exe-
cutes a disciplined withdrawal. Nonetheless, the enemy
is slowed, but not halted, by the sheets of fire. The ad-
vance continues and closes against the heavy mortar
company. As the North Koreans inch too close to the
mortarmen, they dispose of their mortars and escape
by transforming themselves into infantrymen and fight-
ing their way out. By nightfall, Yongdong is on the plate
for the North Koreans. The first enemy contingents
enter at about 2000.
In yet another instance, the combined ploy of frontal
attack in synchronization with infiltration and a rear
envelopment attack gains the North Koreans another
stepping stone toward Pusan. Expecting a night coun-
terattack against the eastern side of Yongdong to be
launched by the 1st Cavalry Division, the N.K. 3rd
Division establishes a defensive posture. The capture
of Yongdong, according to information obtained from
prisoners, has cost the N.K. 3rd Division about 2,000
casualties, brought about primarily by artillery fire.
This leaves the enemy 3rd Division with a strength of
approximately 5,000 troops, the equivalent of half its
original strength.
In the 27th Regiment sector, bright and early, as sus-
pected by Colonels Check and Michaelis, the North
Koreans execute another splendid envelopment tactic.
Two unleashed battalions drive to swarm upon and de-
stroy the 1st Battalion. The assault, executed flawlessly,
unfolds a superb double envelopment, but much to
their surprise, the North Koreans have surrounded thin
air, and they now stand directly to the front of the guns
of the waiting 2nd Battalion, commanded by Major
Gordon E. Murch. A heavy concentration of killing fire
is laid down, slicing in to the enemy ranks.
The combination of tanks, mortars and various other
weapons of the 2nd Battalion hand the two enemy bat-
July 25, 1950
talions a grievous thrashing. These stunned North Ko-
reans mount a hasty and disoriented retreat, but as usual
more troops advance, and by mid-afternoon the 27th
Regiment is being set up for envelopment. About an
hour before midnight, amid the ongoing heavy fight-
ing, Colonel Michaelis orders the regiment to move to-
ward Hwanggan and deploy on higher ground.
By midnight, the troops begin to move out, despite
brutal fighting on the right flank. The eight tanks of
Company A, 79th Tank Bn., and Company F cover
the withdrawal. The tanks, upon direction by Major
Murch, converge on line and peer north. From their
positions, the tankers pummel enemy ground troops
that are spotted moving down the road. By the follow-
ing day, some reinforcements arrive to augment the
27th Regiment.
Meanwhile, the 7th Cavalry Regiment’s Headquar-
ters and its 2nd Battalion, which had moved from
Pohang-dong to positions west of Kumch’on during
the fighting at Yongdong, have been apprehensive since
their arrival. The staff lacks experience and the troops
are green. Following the skirmishes of the nearby 27th
Regiment, unsubstantiated information arrives and
adds to the foreboding mood of the men of the 7th
Cavalry. But most of the news that flows into their area
concerning North Korean progress has been through
the rumor tunnels several times over, so it reaches them
with tremendous magnification.
Nonetheless, the 7th Cavalry contingents believe a re-
port that flies in slightly after midnight. Alarming news
arrives relating that the North Koreans had punched a
big hole through the 27th Regiment lines along the
Poun Road and they are advancing swiftly. Almost
without hesitation 7th Cavalry Headquarters signals
all personnel to withdraw. During the pandemonium,
the 2nd Battalion impetuously departs, leaving enor-
mous amounts of equipment and ammunition at their
abandoned positions. The “bug out,” as these charges
to the rear are dubbed, causes many cavalrymen of the
2nd Battalion to vanish.
Subsequent to daybreak, some poised platoon ser-
geants and an entourage of truck drivers and their ve-
hicles trace their steps back and recover an abundance
of weaponry, including fourteen machine guns, six 60-
mm mortars, seven BARs, and 120 M1 rifles. In addi-
tion, nine radios are recovered. Later, 119 men of the
2nd Battalion are still unaccounted for at the end of
the day (26th).
In the West Coast sector, the commanding officer,
Colonel Ned D. Moore, 19th Regiment, 24th Divi-
sion, arrives at Chinju about 0600, followed later by
the 2nd Battalion and Headquarters, which arrive at
about 1500. The 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, trails the
leading elements, but deploys to their rear along the
Kumchon Road, north of Chinju. Company A spreads
out defensively at Anui to guard a road approach from
the west, while the remainder of 1st Battalion moves far-
ther south to positions slightly east of Hamyang at
Umyong-ni (on some antiquated maps it is referred to
as Sanggam and on others Hwasan).
July 25, 1950
By now, Eighth Army at Taegu has been informed by
intelligence reports that the enemy has troops in
Mokp’o, at least ten tanks and about 500 men. Other
reports detail the presence of about 800 infantry and
some tanks at Kurye. About 500 enemy infantry engage
S.K. Police at Hadong.
Meanwhile, during the afternoon, the 1st and 3rd
Battalions, 29th Regiment, arrive at Chinju; their
weapons, including rifles (not zeroed), mortars and ma-
chine guns have not been fired. Later, after dark, Col-
onel Ned Moore (commanding officer, 19th Regiment)
directs Colonel Mott to lead his 3rd Battalion, 29th
Regiment to capture Hadong, thirty-five miles south-
west of Chinju, where S.K. police attempt to hold a
strategic road intersection that protects the western ap-
proach to Chinju. South Korean Major General Chae
Byong Duk offers and receives permission to accom-
pany Colonel Mott in an advisory capacity as well as in-
terpreter during the mission. The unit is told to be pre-
pared to depart at 2230, but the departure takes place
about 0030; the unit expects to reach Hadong prior to
dawn on the 26th.
In Taegu, Eighth Army continues to absorb the enor-
mous pressure of the advancing enemy. The Americans
and the South Koreans are each being pushed back, en-
dangering headquarters.
In other activity, Brigadier General Francis W. Far-
rell is appointed chief of KMAG. Initially he had arrived
in Korea to command an artillery unit. Farrell succeeds
Colonel W.H. Sterling Wright, who departs for the
U.S. on August 4 to attend a special school. Wright’s
participation with KMAG began during August 1948.
Wright had been scheduled to leave earlier, but the un-
expected invasion postponed his departure.
In Air Force activity, Lieutenant Upell, an Airborne
Fighter Controller, flying a T-6 to coordinate air power,
observes enemy and armor on the move in the vicinity
of Yongdong. Upell calls for F-80s, but upon their ar-
rival, Upell is informed that the pilots cannot differ-
entiate between friend and foe on the ground due to
A U.S. Army contingent engages an advancing enemy force. The jeep is delivering ammunition to the line.
128
the darkness. In a dangerous maneuver, Upell and his
observer (Lieutenant Franklyn C. Winters) decide to
turn on their lights to guide the F-80s to the targets.
Suddenly in the pitch darkness, the T-6s lights start to
beam and Upell’s radio blares a message to follow his
plane. Upell dives low to an elevation of only several
hundred feet and cruises above and through a strom of
fire from rifles, machine guns and mortars. The F-80s
follow the beam and dot the T’s. Afterwards, Upell re-
mains overhead and directs the friendly ground fire.
All planes return to their respective bases without harm.
— In the United States: The JCS has apparently di-
gested the repeated requests of General MacArthur for
a war-time strength Marine division for use in Korea;
the Pentagon orders the Marine Corps to expand the 1st
Marine Division to war strength (Plan BAKER). Major
General Oliver P. Smith assumes command of the 1st
Marine Division; he receives instructions from the
commandant to bring the division to war strength,
minus one regiment, and be prepared to embark for
Korea between the 10th and 15th of August.
Much easier said than done. Smith has a mere two
weeks to round up the troops, many of whom are scat-
tered around the country. In addition, an entire regi-
ment, the 7th Marines, is to be added, which makes
the procurement of equipment and supplies a colossal
task. On August 10, the Joint Chiefs of Staff will au-
thorize the third regiment for the 1st Marine Division,
calling for the activation of the 7th Marines at that
time. In conjunction, the chief of naval operations au-
thorizes the reduction of the stateside Marine security
forces by fifty percent, thereby permitting an additional
3,630 regular Marines to join the 1st Marine Division.
— In Japan: Marine Generals Craig and Cushman
(and some staff ) depart Tokyo for Itami Airfield, ex-
pecting to re-inspect the area due to the imminent ar-
rival of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade. Meanwhile,
a massive enemy threat continues to build against
Pusan. The North Korean offensive, poised to strike
toward Pusan from the north, gains the southwestern
 129
A U.S. soldier, using a Radio SCR 300, communicates with a for- Craig and Cushman arrive by air at
ward mortar position.
portion of the peninsula and gives the Communists
more advantage, as they are now positioned to strike
from two separate directions, evoking a new crisis along
the perimeter. General Headquarters dispatches an
emergency message recalling Craig’s transport plane,
which is about twenty minutes from Tokyo, stressing
that it is imperative.
Soon after his return, General Craig is briefed at
headquarters. General Edwin K. Wright (Far East
Command G-3) informs Craig that all available troops
will be required to confront the advancing enemy and
that General MacArthur has authorized the commit-
ment of the Marine brigade. Colonel Edward W.
Snedeker, USMC, chief of staff of the brigade, is in-
structed by dispatch to move the brigade to Korea.
In conjunction, the convoy transporting the 1st Pro-
visional Marine Brigade receives new orders directing
it to immediately change course for Korea. The convoy
arrives off Korea on August 2. The Marines go ashore
at Pusan on the following day. However, the vessels
transporting MAG-33 continue toward Japan. Later, at
1700, Generals Craig and Cushman depart for Korea,
making a stop at Itami to make some alternative ad-
justments. On the following day, the Marine generals
fly to Fukuoka, where they transfer to a smaller plane
that is adaptable to the primitive airfields of Korea.
July 26 Eighth Army, still expecting to take the
offensive, issues an operational directive signifying that
Army will deploy at predetermined positions to inter-
cept and engage the enemy while it simultaneously ma-
neuvers to secure its front lines and prepares to launch
an offensive (date to be set later). General Walker tele- comes essential. Before closing the busy day, General
July 26, 1950
phones Tokyo and speaks to General
Almond, requesting authority to re-
locate Eighth Army Headquarters
from Taegu to Pusan to ensure the
survival of the Army communication
equipment, a prerequisite for contin-
uing the struggle against the enemy.
Almond, offering his opinion, informs
Walker that the intended move would
carry bad ramifications for the morale
of the various U.S. and ROK units;
however, he does agree to inform
MacArthur of the request.
Following the conversation with
Walker, General Almond confers with
MacArthur, passing on the informa-
tion and suggesting that MacArthur
go to Korea on the following day to
give the crucial matter personal atten-
tion. MacArthur, after deliberating
for some time, advises General Al-
mond to have his plane, the Bataan,
readied for departure.
In other activity, Marine Generals
Taegu from Japan at 1400 and
quickly grasp the criticalness of the
situation. The airstrip at Taegu is
rough at best and there are few defending troops as well
as a minimum amount of planes there when the gen-
erals arrive. General Craig reports to General Walker.
Soon after, a briefing is given by Colonel Landrum to
all Marine officers, updating them on the situation as
best as possible. The defensive line is deteriorating so
quickly that headquarters is not thoroughly positive
about much of the ongoing fighting. The Marines are
informed that there is no specific sector assigned to
them because of the uncertainty of the situation as the
outnumbered American troops are being slowly pushed
back. Nonetheless, the instructions are explicit in that
the Marines are expected to be ready to move to any
point subsequent to debarkation and on instant notice.
Aboard the convoy, it is common conversation
among the Marines that they might not arrive in Korea
in time to go on the offense. There is concern that they
will debark only in time to flank and protect a general
evacuation. Also, General Walker provides his plane to
permit General Craig, Colonel Joseph Stewart (Brigade
G-3) and Lt. Colonel Arthur A. Chidester (Brigade G-
4) to inspect the combat zone, presently considered all
ground still controlled by U.N. troops. During the ex-
cursion, Pusan and its harbor are inspected and while
there, Craig confers with Brigadier General Crump
Garvin concerning the imminent arrival of the Marine
brigade.
Subsequent to departing Pusan, the Marine team,
through aerial observation, determines that it would
meet the requirements of an acceptable base for VMO-
6 and the Marine Air Support Control unit if it be-
July 26, 1950
Walker’s pilot, possessing an astute knowledge of the
area, swings farther west and gives General Craig and
his entourage a pointed look at Masan, Chinju and the
Naktong River, any of which might become the mis-
sion of the Marine brigade.
Central Mountain area: Contingents of the N.K.
15th Division, having conquered the mountain passes,
move from the west along a secondary road toward
Sangju, which is defended by the U.S. 24th Regiment.
The regiment has its entire complement of three battal-
ions deployed near the road about ten miles outside of
Sangju, and it is supported by the guns of the 64th and
159th Field Artillery Battalions and one additional bat-
tery of the 90th Field Artillery Battalion.
In the Hwanggan area, the 27th Regiment, U.S.
25th Division, holds at its new positions in the heights
outside of the village. The 27th Regiment had been
forced back from the vicinity of Sangyong-ni by pres-
sure from the N.K. 2nd Division. Some relief of the
extraordinary pressure occurs as the 1st Battalion, 35th
Regiment, arrives to cover positions on the right flank,
but a gap still exists on the left flank between the 27th
Regiment’s most distant unit stretching west, Com-
pany C, 1st Battalion. Its nearest friendly force is the 1st
Cavalry Division’s 7th Cavalry Regiment.
The enemy exploits the hole on the following day. At
Yongdong, a contingent of N.K. 3rd Division troops,
with a vanguard of four T-34 tanks, launches a night
attack against the 5th Cavalry Regiment, which is de-
ployed east of the town. The enemy, anticipating a
heavy concentration of mines in their path, uses a mod-
ified cold-hearted tactic, one that had frequently been
implemented by the Soviets during World War II. The
North Koreans forcefully push human mine detectors
(civilian refugees) ahead of the attack force to open a
clear path for the tanks and the troops.
Nonetheless, prior to daybreak, the cavalrymen repel
the assaults. However, the larger part of the enemy’s
plan unfolds southwest of the town. The N.K. 3rd Di-
vision’s 7th Regiment moves out of the town, heading
southwest along the Muju Road. It intends to execute
a wide flanking movement against Kumchon by swing-
ing through Chirye. Attentive patrols of the 5th Cav-
alry detect the wily envelopment as it winds around
the regimental left flank. The discovery creates two ad-
ditional problems for General Gay — the depth of the
tenacity of his troops on the left flank and the amount
of strength remaining in the weary 27th Regiment on
his right flank. Fortunately, the left flank holds firmly,
terminating the enemy attacks prior to daybreak. Sec-
ondly, the 27th Regiment also holds, thereby purchas-
ing more desperate time. General Gay, however, de-
cides that to remain in place, his 5th Cavalry would be
encircled and isolated from Taegu; therefore, Gay plans
to pull back to positions near Kumchon, where he is
confident the ground is extremely suitable for a strong
defense.
The withdrawal is initiated on July 29, subsequent
to the pull-back of the 27th Regiment through its
perimeter, and it is well timed. In conjunction, Eighth
130
Army, concerned about the strength of the enemy
flanking movement, adds reinforcements to the cav-
alry, attaching the 3rd Battalion, 21st Infantry (24th
Division).
East Coast area: The North Koreans and ROK
forces are still engaged for control of Yongdok. The
South Koreans are preparing for a major counterattack
on the 27th to seize the town. On this day, after dark,
roving squads of South Koreans capture seventeen
enemy machine guns, but only eight prisoners are net-
ted.
Also, Colonel Chong Won “Tiger” Kim, commander
of the S.K. 23rd Regiment, is causing additional strain
on the KMAG advisors due to his methods of disci-
plining his troops; today, he has one of his officers (a first
lieutenant) executed with a single shot to the head be-
cause the officer’s unit had been encircled by enemy
troops for a few days. This and other similar tactics of
“Tiger” Kim cause the KMAG advisers to have him re-
lieved; he will be replaced by the commanding officer,
ROK 1st Separate Battalion.
The USS Valley Forge launches planes to destroy
enemy targets, but again the results are poor, accord-
ing to Navy standards. Some aircraft locate targets, but
most of the heavy loads of bombs are dropped to per-
mit the planes to return to their carriers. A contingent
of ten F4Us, led by Lt. Commander Pittman, nets five
trucks, and another group, composed of seven F4Us
(VF-53), knocks out two trucks. Also, a contingent of
four Skyraiders snags one truck, while also inflicting
damage to a railroad bridge and strafing an enemy-
infiltrated village. The aircraft return to the carrier, but
inclement weather moves into the area, prompting the
fleet to return to the west coast of Korea.
Meanwhile, both the Army and Air Force attempt
to coordinate with the Navy to eliminate the poor com-
munications. The Navy also prioritizes solutions on its
own; Admiral Hoskins, staff members of the Valley
Forge and of the British warship the Triumph meet, re-
sulting in the British offering to commit a radio jeep and
two officers, both trained in ground-to-air communi-
cations. But, on the 29th, the HMS Triumph is de-
tached from the U.S. task force and reassigned to the
British task group, preventing the offer from being im-
plemented.
Also, with reference to the naval operation (close-
air support), Admiral Joy communicates with Admiral
Sherman, informing him that the operation was dis-
appointing. Joy attaches a contingent of an ANGLICO
(Air Naval Gunfire Liaison Company) to his command
to help expedite the training of Army–Air Force person-
nel. Joy also contacts Generals MacArthur and Strate-
meyer, offering the expertise of these specialists to train
Army–Air Force personnel immediately.
In other activity, Hadong and Yosu fall to the North
Koreans. Also, the combined strength of the South Ko-
rean Army (ROK), including the infusion of new re-
cruits, stands at 85,871 men; its total assigned strength
is 94,570 men.
West Coast area: General Church establishes his
 131
headquarters at Hyopch’on, which is construed to be a
point central to the huge area to be defended by the
24th Division; it lies approximately 25 miles north of
Chinju and 15 miles southeast of Koch’ang, where the
34th Regiment, commanded by Col. Charles
Beauchamp, will deploy. The 34th Regiment departs its
positions north of Taegu in the Kunwi-Uisong vicin-
ity and moves to Koch’ang. The 29th Regiment’s 3rd
Battalion (attached to the 19th Regiment), which had
departed Chinju slightly after midnight (25th–26th),
heads south down the highway through Konyang, ac-
companied by South Korean guides.
At Konyang the battalion swings north, taking a sec-
ondary road to bypass an impassable stream. It is a te-
dious trek, as the Battalion devotes most of the night
navigating the slim road, while constantly pulling ve-
hicles out of the adjacent rice paddies. By daylight, the
force is moving north toward Hadong when it encoun-
ters a speeding southbound truck that is transporting
15 to 20 seriously wounded South Koreans. The Ko-
reans inform Colonel Mott that they are the sole sur-
vivors of a group of about 400 militiamen who had
fought at Hadong the night of the 25th.
The 3rd Battalion (29th Regiment) continues to
Wonjon via the primary road, then halts to establish a
security line. Lacking radio communications with the
19th Regiment Headquarters at Chinju, Major Raibl
heads back there by jeep to inform Colonel Moore of
the tale of the South Koreans and to request permission
to draw a line north of Chinju to guard the Hadong
Road, west of Chinju. However, Moore instructs him
to inform Colonel Mott to continue the mission to seize
Hadong. After lunch, Raibl, still convinced that the
3rd Battalion cannot succeed, returns to Wonjon with
the orders to proceed. The 3rd Battalion halts its ad-
vance at dusk upon reaching Hoenghch’on, near a sharp
mountain road curve about three miles from the ob-
jective. A desperately needed radio jeep arrives with an
Air Force captain and a tactical air control party; how-
ever, en route, the radio becomes inoperable, prevent-
ing the team from communicating with Chinju to
guide the air strikes that are anticipated for the follow-
ing morning.
— In the United States: The SS Luxembourg Vic-
tory leaves San Francisco for Korea; among its cargo are
eighty medium tanks to bolster Eighth Army. Addi-
tional tanks are also being rushed to the Korean battle-
front.
In other activity, a messenger from Washington ar-
rives at Camp Pendleton informing General Oliver
Smith that his 1st Marine Division will be composed
of four classes of personnel: (1) Brigade units to be
united with the division in the Far East; (2) Elements
of the 2nd Marine Division (East Coast); (3) Regular
personnel from various posts and stations; and (4)
Troops from the Marine Corps Reserve who meet min-
imum combat experience requirements, to meet final
deficiencies.
— In Japan: The 7th Infantry Division is relieved
of all occupation duties, and it receives orders from
July 27, 1950
FEC to prepare for embarkation to Korea; however,
the division is drastically short of personnel. During
July, 140 officers and 1,500 NCOs and enlisted men
have been transferred to the 24th and 25th Divisions
to bolster their strength. As of the following day, 27
July, the 7th Division remains more than 9,000 men
short, lacking 290 officers, 126 warrant officers and
8,701 enlisted men.
July 27 At about 1000, General MacArthur and a
small entourage of officers, including his chief of staff,
Major General Edward Almond, arrive at Taegu from
Haneda airfield in Japan. Having been informed of the
arrival the previous night by General Almond, General
Walker and several officers are waiting at the runway.
Following the ride to Eighth Army Headquarters, Gen-
eral MacArthur and General Walker (with only Gen-
eral Almond in attendance) confer for about ninety
minutes, during which time Walker’s request to trans-
fer his headquarters to Pusan is never mentioned. How-
ever, MacArthur enunciates the importance of Eighth
Army holding its ground, in such fashion that the tone
in no way reprimands Walker, but he still gets his point
across that there can be no more withdrawals. Later,
following lunch, MacArthur states to some of the mem-
bers of Army staff that Korea would not be evacuated
and that there would be no Korean Dunkerque
(Dunkirk).
In other activity, subsequent to a TBS (talk between
ships) conversation between Vice Admiral Struble,
commander 7th Fleet, and Rear Admiral Hoskins (USS
Valley Forge), the latter sends a personal representative
to the Joint Operations Center in Korea, intending to
throw more Navy assistance into the defense of the
Pusan perimeter; Lt. Commander C.H. Gates (CAG-
5) departs the Valley Forge, arriving in Korea to initiate
direct communications between JOC and the fleet.
Gates is able to illustrate the differences in the maps
used by the Navy and those used by the Army and Air
Force. The maps employed by the Navy (World Aero-
nautical Charts) impede progress as no specific target
can be detected, but rather only general areas. The Air
Force is utilizing grid-coded maps. The pilot of the
Mosquito aircraft must locate the target on the grid
map and then convert the information by use of lati-
tude and longitude before passing the information on
to the carrier pilots, permitting the Navy to complete
the mission.
Central Mountain area: The North Korean forces
(primarily N.K. 1st Division), having complete con-
trol of the entire Mun’gyong divide, funnel contingents
into the upper Naktong Valley onto the main road near
Hamch’ang; from here, at the southern base of the
plateau, the attack will originate from north of Sangju.
In conjunction, another North Korean force is thump-
ing along the secondary road and will be poised to strike
from the west. Also, the S.K. 1st Division reports the
decimation of four Soviet T-34 tanks and the seizure of
one operational tank on the Hamch’ang front, where the
unit deployed, subsequent to being relieved from their
July 27, 1950
positions northwest of Sangju by the U.S. 24th Regi-
ment, 25th Division.
In other activity, the N.K. 2nd Division applies more
pressure against the beleaguered 27th Regiment, U.S.
25th Division. With ravaging speed they attack, pen-
etrating deeply through the existing gap on the left
flank of the 1st Battalion. Gruesome fighting erupts,
causing heavy casualties. Company C struggles im-
mensely to retain control of the crest of a hill, losing it
then regaining it three separate times. Company C sus-
tains more than 60 casualties, dangerously draining its
manpower to about 60 exhausted men.
Nearby, Company B sustains about fifteen casual-
ties. However, the enemy fails to rout the regiment.
Overwhelming pressure on the following day will com-
pel a withdrawal.
West Coast area: At about 0845 the 3rd Battalion,
29th Regiment, advances from Hoengch’on-ni to assault
Hadong. The vanguard, composed of L Company and
a heavy weapons platoon, reaches positions about 1,000
yards from the crest of the Hadong Pass when a small
contingent of enemy troops is detected moving down
the pass toward the U.S. force. The heavy weapons pla-
toon commences fire from both its 75-mm recoilless
rifles, but the enemy is unharmed as the shells pass way
over their line of advance. The enemy dashes back
through the pass, and in turn, Captain Sharra dis-
patches L Company to seize the pass.
By 0930, Sharra receives instructions to dig in and
await the impending air strike against Hadong, which
is to commence at 0945. The balance of the command
moves to the pass; Company L deploys two platoons on
the left side of the pass and one platoon on the right.
K Company is ascending to higher ground slightly
north of L Company. Soon after, a column of uniden-
tified troops is spotted advancing toward the pass, ap-
parently unaware of the Americans’ presence. Mean-
while, the U.S. troops hold their fire to allow time for
identification. When they reach a distance of about 100
yards, General Chae Byong Duk yells in Korean, re-
questing them to identify themselves, but the response
never comes as the troops dive for the sides of the road.
As U.S. machine guns commence firing, enemy fire,
seemingly well registered for the pass, lays a thunder-
ing blast, knocking out vehicles and the tactical air con-
trol jeep. Mortars pound the vehicle area while enemy
machine guns and various small arms, originating in
the heights to the north, rake the pass with additional
killing fire, devastating the 3rd Battalion staff. The first
volley of machine gun fire slays S.K. General Chae in-
stantly when he is struck in the head. Major Raibl is
also hit, but he tumbles down an incline, evading fur-
ther wounds. The battalion commander, Colonel Mott,
is also hit.
Meanwhile, two pairs of planes pass over the area, but
apparently unable to contact the air control party, the
planes depart without making a strike, leaving the 3rd
Battalion to defend itself. Major Raibl receives another
wound and Colonel Mott, having sustained a mild
wound, attempts to help unload an ammunition truck,
132
but a heavy box accidentally falls on Mott’s foot, break-
ing it. He finds refuge in a foxhole dug by another sol-
dier and for a while, his whereabouts are unknown.
In the meantime, heavy fighting occurs at the posi-
tions of L Company, which comes under blistering fire
from enemy guns above it. The 1st Platoon, led by 2nd
Lt. J. Morrissey, is attacked by a contingent of enemy
troops that had wedged between L Company and K
Company. Close combat occurs and L Company beats
back an attack against its foxholes, but two men in the
foxholes are bayoneted. Support fire by the 2nd Pla-
toon, led by Captain Sharra, pours in from the south
side of the pass, lending tremendous assistance to Com-
pany L, which holds firm on both sides of the road
against the enemy.
It is estimated that the North Koreans sustained
heavy casualties themselves while attacking through
open ground. Captain John R. Flynn, at the initiation
of the fight, had moved back to accelerate the advance
of contingents still moving up. Upon encountering K
Company and elements of the heavy weapons com-
pany, Flynn orders a platoon of K Company to attack
toward the crest of the hill. Afterwards, Flynn locates I
Company and orders Lieutenant Makarounis to lead
it forward to close the gap between L Company and K
Company. Captain Flynn also has the available
wounded placed on trucks, which speed them to
Chinju; Major Raibl, among the returning wounded,
informs Colonel Moore upon his return that the fight-
ing at Hadong is going well for the Americans and the
troops should win the battle.
At about noon, 2nd Lieutenant Ernest Philips (L
Company) informs Captain Sharra, commanding offi-
cer, L Company, that Colonel Mott has been located.
Soon after, Colonel Mott instructs Sharra to assume
command of the 3rd Battalion and extricate it. Sharra
dispatches messengers to inform the three platoons of
L Company to converge on the road at the base of the
pass. Word never reaches the 1st Platoon led by Lt.
Morrissey on the north side of the pass.
By mid-afternoon, trucks loaded with the troops of
L Company are returning to Chinju. En route they en-
counter advancing reinforcements, Battery B, 13th
Field Artillery Battalion, which turns around and heads
for Chinju, abandoning four trucks and one 105-mm
howitzer that had been stranded in rice paddies. Even-
tually, despite the poor communications, Colonel Mott
gets a radio message through to Captain Flynn, who
had returned to the pass, instructing him to order Lieu-
tenant Morrissey to retire. Flynn moves to a higher
point and yells the instructions to Morrissey, who is
still standing his ground to the right of the pass with a
mere twelve men, including two wounded (Morrissey
and one other man). After descending the hill, Morris-
sey gets them into a truck and it departs for Chinju.
Unfortunately, when Flynn jumps into his jeep, it
doesn’t start, prompting him to begin walking. He soon
locates many men from I Company in a rice paddy.
Right behind them is a strong enemy force closing
against them. Suddenly a burst of machine gun fire
 133
befalls the group as they flee toward a stream. The
crossing is precarious and many men drown in the 20-
foot-deep water. Captain Flynn is among those who
succeed in crossing the stream. After reaching a valley
less than two miles away, he encounters another group
of American soldiers, numbering about 60 to 70. Dur-
ing a short pause, enemy fire again rains on them, scat-
tering the men in all directions.
Flynn and his small entourage of about ten men enter
friendly lines of the 19th Regiment on the following
day. Another group composed of 97 men, led by
Sergeant Applegate (I Company), escape by heading
south to the coast, where they are picked up by a Ko-
rean fishing boat about five miles south of Hadong.
The fishing boat transfers them to an S.K. patrol boat,
which transports them to Pusan. Among those killed
during this action are Captain Joseph K. Donahue,
CO, K Company, and Captain Hugh P. Milleson, CO,
M Company. Lieutenant Makarounis, who led I Co.
into the gap at the pass, is captured, but later, during
October of this year, he escapes.
The unidentified U.S. Air Force captain with the air
control team who had fought bravely all day as a rifle-
man in action at the pass with Lieutenant Morrissey is
either killed or missing. Back at Chinju, during the
morning, Captain Barszcz, leading G Company, 19th
Infantry, moves out on a motorized patrol (78 men)
probing fourteen miles northeast of Hadong without in-
cident. The convoy returns to the Hadong-Chinju
Road outside the village of Sigum, about twelve miles
east of Hadong, and encounters one officer with about
50 battered troops, most of whom were clothed only in
their shorts and boots. The only weapons with the
stragglers are an unfired M1 rifle and one .45-caliber
pistol. The troops justify their appearance and lack of
weapons by stating that they had been forced to move
through rice paddies and swim a river. Captain Barszcz
relieves them of their arsenal and has two trucks take
them to Chinju.
In the event that additional stragglers might ap-
proach, G Company establishes a protective roadblock
along the road and keeps it manned until 0400 on the
28th, when a staff officer of the 2nd Battalion, 19th
Regiment, Captain Montesclaros, arrives with with-
drawal orders and a convoy of trucks to transport G
Company to a new position about four miles from
Chinju in some nearby hills. General Church receives
the bad news about Hadong later, during the night,
overriding earlier reports that the 3rd Battalion, 29th
Regiment had been doing well. A count of able-bod-
ied men of the 3rd Battalion, including some with
slight wounds, amounts to 354 officers and men. Sub-
sequent to the return of additional stragglers, the un-
official casualty count becomes two killed, 52 wounded
and 349 missing. The 3rd Battalion also loses its entire
complement of crew-served weapons (rocket launchers,
machine guns and grenade launchers), its communi-
cations equipment, about thirty vehicles and nearly all
its rifles and other small arms.
During the latter part of September, when the Amer-
July 27, 1950
icans regain the terrain at Hadong, they discover the
corpses of 313 American soldiers; most are located in
the rice paddies and along the river. On the 28th, the
3rd Battalion, 29th Infantry Regiment, reorganizes. All
surviving personnel are attached to K and L Companies,
both to be reassigned on the 29th of July.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment
(attached to 19th Regiment), commanded by Colonel
Wesley Wilson, is ordered by Colonel Ned Moore to
depart Chinju and advance north to relieve Colonel
Rhea’s 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, near Anui. Col-
onel Wilson is also directed to instruct Rhea to return
to Chinju. During the first part of the afternoon, the re-
lief occurs at Umyong-ni; however, Wilson’s command
has no armor, artillery or air support, and a mortar pla-
toon of 4.2 mortars is equipped with only two rounds
of white phosphorous shells. To make matters worse,
Colonel Wilson has no communications with Colonel
Moore’s Regimental Command Post at Chinju, 35
miles away, compelling Wilson to dispatch messengers.
First Lieutenant John C. Hughes, B Company, 1st
Battalion, 29th Regiment, accompanied by Colonel
Rhea, moves toward Anui to relieve A Company, 1st
Battalion, 19th Regiment, discovering it in heated com-
bat with the enemy. Rhea, expecting the engagement to
terminate in short order, departs for Umyong-ni to re-
join the balance of the regiment. He leaves directions for
Company A to report there as soon as possible. Com-
pany A is unable to return as the enemy severs the road;
reconnaissance teams inform Rhea of the news and he
departs for Chinju at dusk.
Meanwhile, Colonel Wilson speeds two separate
teams to contact nearby units. Two jeeps, with 2nd
Lieutenant Frank Iwanczyk in the first, roll north toward
Koch’ang to reach the 34th Regiment, while 1st Lieu-
tenant Sam Holliday heads for Hamyang to establish a
link with the S.K. troops there. Along the route to
Koch’ang, Lt. Iwanczyk’s jeep is far in front of the sec-
ond vehicle due to the overwhelming dust. About one
mile north of the intersection, a concealed enemy ma-
chine gun ambushes the lead jeep, killing all four occu-
pants and hurling them from the vehicle. The trailing
jeep halts abruptly and its occupants dive for cover,
without returning fire.
Suddenly enemy troops are moving closer, having
passed the bodies and the first jeep; then the shouting
begins and the North Koreans charge toward the Amer-
icans. One man, Private Sidney Talley, bolts from the
dirt and begins firing at the advancing enemy, killing
two and inspiring his buddies to do likewise or die. The
others commence firing and the North Koreans turn
back. Unhesitatingly, the survivors turn the jeep around
and inform the men at battalion headquarters of the
roadblock.
While the ambush is in progress, Lieutenant Holli-
day returns to Umyong from Hamyang, where he made
contact with the South Korean force of less than 600
ROK 7th Division troops and about 150 S.K. Marines.
Holliday then departs Umyong-ni with three additional
men heading toward Anui, but the enemy also
July 28, 1950
ambushes his vehicle less than three miles from the
town. One man is wounded and the jeep is demolished,
but Lieutenant Holliday is able to provide cover fire
with a BAR, and the three men withdraw with Holli-
day trailing close behind.
At about 1600, A Company, 19th Regiment, is fi-
nally relieved. It departs for Chinju, but within about
one mile from Anui, Company A encounters a skirmish
between South Koreans and Communists. Enemy fire
destroys six of the Company A vehicles. Rather than re-
joining the 29th Regiment that had relieved it, it de-
stroys the balance of its vehicles and abandons its heavy
equipment before marching through the hills, reaching
the 34th Regiment at Koch’ang on the following day
(64 Americans and 60 South Koreans arrive).
Back at Anui, the North Koreans (elements of the
N.K. 4th Division) begin pounding Company B, 29th
Regiment subsequent to its relief of Company A, 19th
Regiment. The enemy attempts to envelop Lieutenant
John C. Hughes’ command and by dark, attacks are
coming from three sides, compelling Hughes to with-
draw into Anui, from where he intends to get his unit
across the upper Nam and redeployed in the heights
east of the town.
The bolt across the river ends soon after it begins;
eighteen men, including two officers, make it across, but
incessant enemy fire halts the escape. Heavy fighting
develops within Anui, lasting until about midnight as
the isolated men of Company B fight for their survival,
then break it off to attempt escape through the hills.
Those who make it straggle into the lines of the 34th
Regiment.
Meanwhile, the balance of the 1st Battalion, with
Colonel Wilson at Umyong-ni, know that the contin-
gent at Anui is under attack; but Wilson, lacking com-
munications, is unaware of the plight of isolated B
Company. Twice attempts are made to bolster B Com-
pany, but both attempts fail due to the roadblocks.
Also, a patrol of the 34th Regiment, dispatched from
Koch’ang by Colonel Beauchamp, stretches to posi-
tions from where the fighting at Anui is observed. Upon
receiving the report, Colonel Beauchamp braces for an
anticipated assault against Koch’ang.
In Naval activity, CTF 90 is ordered to initiate raids
against selected targets on the east coast of North Korea.
The naval action is to include specialized ground troops
(underwater demolition teams and Marine reconnais-
sance troops). In conjunction, the ground troops land
at Pohang on 30 July to conduct the raids.
— In the United States: Congress passes legislation
authorizing President Truman to extend by one year
the enlistments of all troops in the U.S. Armed Forces,
whose enlistments are to expire before July 9, 1951.
The legislation covers regulars and reserves.
— In Japan: The FEAF blueprint to intercept and
impede the constant flow of enemy troops and supplies
pouring into South Korea by rail is ready today. The
strategy is to eliminate rail connections with North
Korea by taking out the railroad bridges in North Korea
at P’yongyang, which is slightly northeast of Chin-
134
nampo, along the east coast. The marshaling yard at
Pyongyang and those at Hamhung and Wonsan, also
on the east coast, are targeted. The rail bridges over the
Han River in the vicinity of enemy-held Seoul will fur-
ther cut the bloodline of the enemy. By the following
day, Far East Air Forces transmits a compilation of spe-
cific rail targets to Far East Bomber Command.
Soon after, on the 31st, bomber command receives a
list of the selected highways included in the interdiction
operation. On August 3 the Navy and the Fifth Air Force
each receive their priority list of specified targets; they will
coordinate the attacks that occur south of the 38th Par-
allel, using the Han River as the dividing line between
Fifth Air Force and the FEAF bombers.
July 28 The commanding officer of the N.K. 3rd
Division, General Lee Yong Ho, issues an order signed
by the North Korean commander-in-chief, Kim Chaek,
and the commanding officer of general staff, Kang Kon,
which calls for an end to the killing of soldiers who can
be captured. The order stipulates that troops who surren-
der will be treated as POWs and that specialists (Cul-
tural Section) will be responsible for carrying out the or-
ders. Nonetheless, the enemy at times pays little attention
to the command, and atrocities continue to occur by cer-
tain commands.
Meanwhile, at Sunchon, Major General Pang, the
commanding officer, N.K. 6th Division, issues a state-
ment of purpose and inspiration to his troops: “Com-
rades, the enemy is demoralized. The task given to us is
the liberation of Masan and Chinju and the annihila-
tion of the remnants of the enemy. We have liberated
Mokpu, Kwangju and Yosu and have thereby acceler-
ated the liberation of all Korea. However, the liberation
of Chinju and Masan means the final battle to cut off the
windpipe of the enemy. Comrades, this glorious task has
fallen to our division! Men of the 6th division, let us an-
nihilate the enemy and distinguish ourselves.” The N.K.
83rd Motorcycle Regiment, part of the 105th Armored
Division until it became a separate unit in June 1950, has
been attached to the N.K. 6th Division to augment the
attack toward Pusan.
Central Mountain area: The key confrontation that
determines the fate of Andong begins as the ROK 8th Di-
vision, augmented by contingents of the Capital Division,
engages elements of the N.K. 12th Division. There has
been heavy fighting between the two opposing forces
since the 21st, and each has sustained heavy losses. The
North Koreans have been constantly wracked by air at-
tacks that have drained their strength considerably, but
not sufficiently to halt the advance. Nonetheless, with
their tank force dwindling, the North Koreans advance
relentlessly against the badly bruised ROK troops. Sav-
age fighting remains incessant until finally on August 1,
the South Koreans are forced to withdraw, giving the
enemy control of Andong.
In the area near Hwanggan, the 27th Regiment lines
are penetrated by elements of the N.K. 2nd Division,
placing the regiment in untenable positions, perfectly
poised for envelopment. Company C pulls back from
 135
the western edge of the perimeter, while Colonel
Michaelis speeds into Hwanggan to request permission
to lead his command through the lines of the 1st Cav-
alry. While conferring with General Gay, Michaelis waits
as Gay phones Eighth Army and relays the information
to Colonel Landrum (chief of staff ). Interjecting, Gay
then asks Landrum whether the 1st Cavalry should at-
tack to break the enemy pressure or would headquarters
prefer that the 27th retire through his lines.
Soon after, General Gay receives an answer. Colonel
An Eighth Army contingent on the advance.
July 28, 1950
Landrum calls back, instructing Gay to inform Colo-
nel Michaelis to pull out and move through the 1st
Cavalry lines to Kumch’on. The 27th Regiment, 25th
Division, departs before dawn the next day and then re-
verts to Army Reserve at Waegwan, but only for one
day, as the regiment is rushed from there to bolster the
19th Regiment under Colonel Rhea at Chinju Pass.
Also, the Communists seize Chirye, Hamch’ang and
Koch’ang.
West Coast area: The contingents of the North
July 28, 1950
Korean 4th Division swing south from Anui to strike
the U.N. positions at Hamyang and Umyong-ni, de-
fended by ROK forces and U.S. forces respectively. East
of the Nam River, the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment,
under Colonel Wilson contains the enemy throughout
the day, repulsing the approaching enemy with mortar
fire; however, the enemy easily succeeds in an envelop-
ment movement, using side trails to come in from be-
hind. Wilson, upon receiving information that his
command at Umyong-ni is nearly trapped, begins a
chain of disciplined withdrawals after dark, which
places the 1st Battalion near Sanch’on by the 30th.
Meanwhile, at Hamyang, west of the Nam River,
the remaining fragments of the ROK 7th Division and
an accompaniment of green S.K. Marines come under
severe attack. Pressure from the enemy pushes the ROK
troops toward collapse, but a tenacious counterattack
by the South Korean Marines plows through the enemy,
reaching its flank and saving the day. The North Ko-
reans retreat north. Prisoners are seized, and informa-
tion extracted from them gives Colonel Wilson the first
indication of the defeat of Company B on the previous
day at Anui.
In conjunction with the withdrawal of Wilson’s com-
mand, the South Koreans move back through the lines
of the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment, and head for
Chinju. At Koch’ang, the 34th Regiment is expecting
a heavy assault against it. At a forward roadblock along
the Kumch’on Road, about four miles north of the
town, a reinforced platoon of I Company holds the
line, with the heavy mortar company standing slightly
behind it at the northern tip of the town. The western
approach to Kumch’on is guarded by the 3rd Battal-
ion, which is deployed about two miles outside the
town in the high ground overlooking the Anui Road
and the eastern approach. The Hyopch’on Road is
blocked by the 1st Battalion, which is also deployed
about two miles from the entrance. About two miles
southeast of Kumch’on, five 105-mm howitzers of Bat-
tery A, 13th Field Artillery, stand ready.
Advance spotters discover a huge enemy column
backing up west of the town along the Anui Road,
where the 34th had blocked the road. Upon receiving
instructions, the 105s commence firing, bearing down
on the stalled enemy until the sun sets. At nightfall,
Beauchamp closes his taut arc, pulling in both battal-
ions to form a more compact defense.
Soon after, Beauchamp reports to General Church at
24th Division headquarters at Hyopch’on. He informs
Church of the imminent enemy attack and explains
that the 3rd Battalion will pull back to previously des-
ignated positions about three miles southeast of Kum-
ch’on, but Church insists that the town be held.
Beauchamp telephones his headquarters, halting the
withdrawal, and subsequently returns there, arriving
about 0300 (29th), finding the area silent. But not for
long: within one hour, a strong two-pronged assault
hits the 34th with devastating effect. One force qui-
etly circles the town on the north, then thrusts south
across the Hyopch’on Road, east of Koch’ang, plowing
136
into the 1st Battalion positions there. The 1st Battal-
ion repels the attack, but it withdraws without expla-
nation or orders toward the alternate positions, three
miles east of the town.
Colonel Beauchamp intercepts the troops and halts
the unauthorized retreat. Meanwhile, the other enemy
force, attacking from the north, envelops Company I,
isolating it at the forward roadblock north of Kum-
ch’on, because the 3rd Battalion, also without orders,
abandons its positions in the high ground. The 3rd
Battalion, using the early morning darkness as cover,
rushes into Koch’ang. The enemy fire is fierce but due
to darkness mainly misdirected, causing the 3rd Battal-
ion nominal casualties; however, the abandoned Com-
pany I is essentially wiped out, its members either killed
or captured.
Bedlam also occurs at the artillery positions south-
east of the town. Some enemy small arms fire origi-
nates from a ridge east of the artillery (Battery A, 13th
Field Artillery), but the troops react as if under a regi-
mental assault. An astounded battalion executive offi-
cer, Major Cheek, is awakened by the fire, but by the
time he sprints to the road, he is met by the battery ex-
ecutive officer, who exclaims: “The enemy has over-
run the artillery.” Continuing excitedly, he proclaims
that the troops “had taken off ” despite his orders to
man the foxholes. He then tells Major Cheek that at
the first sounds of the enemy fire, a screaming soldier
was proclaiming, “run for your life,” initiating the con-
fusion which prompted the artillerymen and the two
supporting infantry squads to run away.
A composed Major Cheek takes measures to termi-
nate the uncontrolled firing of the nearby troops and to
bring about order. Cheek demands that all the prime
movers be driven back to the howitzers; the drivers and
twelve artillerymen return. Three riflemen and a BAR
man provide cover fire, while the prime movers take
the howitzers in tow. The four-man detachment
streams shells into the obstinate ridge and neutralizes the
enemy fire which had caused the panic. Major Cheek
and his twelve-man contingent rescue the five how-
itzers and ammunition and withdraw east, having es-
caped harm by the attackers, which had numbered
about six or seven enemy troops from the N.K. 4th Di-
vision (probably attached to the N.K. 18th Regiment).
Meanwhile, the defenders of Chinju are expecting
an enemy assault. Air reconnaissance flights verify heavy
enemy movement, including tanks in and near
Hadong. Additional surveillance missions will occur
on the following day. Also, Colonel Rhea arrives at
Chinju with the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, subse-
quent to its withdrawal from Anui. In conjunction,
Company A had not escaped. The 1st Battalion (19th
Regiment), composed of about 200 riflemen, is then
directed to take up positions along the coast from
Hadong and establish a blocking position at a second-
ary road leading from there to Chinju.
Also during the morning, the 2nd Battalion, 19th
Regiment (Colonel McGrail) establishes its line slightly
west of the Nam River in the heights overlooking the
 137
Chinju-Hadong Road. Various contingents of South
Korean troops are within and around Chinju as well as
the survivors of the 3rd Battalion, U.S. 29th Regiment
(from Hadong).
July 29 General MacArthur, constantly appraising
the situation of the raging battlelines, is still intent on
using the Chinese Oriental psychology of reversing the
obvious to his advantage. He maintains his desire to con-
vince his superiors that an amphibious landing behind
the enemy lines would break the back of the invaders; his
motto of “meeting force with maximun counter-force”
is presently impossible, despite the infusion of reinforce-
ments, including small contingents of U.S. tanks.
It is the U.S. Air Force that is applying its maximum
effort available to stave off total defeat of the outnum-
bered U.S. and ROK Infantry contingents. B-29 Super-
fortresses, attached to the Far East Command (Major
General Emmett O’Donnell), have been pounding
enemy strategic targets above the 38th Parallel and have
begun to include heavy bombing raids to sweep the
enemy-infested ridges and mountains from which
enemy ground units are blasting the Americans. In con-
junction, Air Force and Navy Fighters as well as the
Australian Air Force continue their sorties to buy more
time for the struggling ground forces.
The Air Force, Naval and Marine pilots hold the key
to success. Without air support, the ground forces will
be decimated. The aircraft in Korea are the modern
version of the Old West cavalry, arriving in the nick of
time, but they no longer carry sabres, they fly them.
A B-29 Superfortress on the runway in Japan gets prepared for a raid against enemy positions in Korea.
July 29, 1950
In other activity, General Walker goes to the 1st Cav-
alry command post at Kumch’on, where he confers with
General Gay and enunciates his dissatisfaction with the
recent actions of 1st Cavalry in combat against the
enemy. Walker further states that he expects no more
withdrawals. In turn, General Gay explains to Walker
that, although he could not attest to the absolute ne-
cessity of the pull-backs, his primary concern was los-
ing communications and apparently risking isolation.
Also, General Walker, apparently eliminating the
earlier withdrawal plans of Eighth Army (on the 26th),
issues his new instructions to Eight Army, shortened
by the press to “stand or die.” Of course, there is much
more substance in his talk to the men at the command
post of the 25th Division at Sangju. Walker, making this
speech subsequent to his meeting two days previous
with General MacArthur, at which time MacArthur
pressed for a rigid stand, mentions the impending ar-
rival of Army and Marine Corps reinforcements. He
also proclaims that the U.S. must mount counterat-
tacks to jolt the enemy off balance, while emphasizing
that there is “no line behind us to which we can re-
treat.”
Continuing, Walker, using words similar to those
spoken by MacArthur, states that there will be no
Dunkirk nor Bataan, claiming that a withdrawal to
Pusan would be “one of the greatest butcheries in his-
tory. We must fight until the end.... We will fight as a
team. If some of us must die, we will die fighting to-
gether. I want everybody to understand that we are
going to hold this line. We are going to win.”
July 29, 1950
A USAF flight engineer aboard a B-29.
This order on the surface makes it clear that the
forces will stand in front of the Naktong River. How-
ever, during early August, Eighth Army is compelled to
pull back again, clouding the issue of Walker’s wide-
spread and controversial order. General Walker gives
similar talks to the other divisional commanders under
his command. (The quotes of Walker are from written
notes taken during the talk to officers of the 25th Di-
vision.)
On the 31st, the 25th Division pulls back to a new
line (withdrawal) about three miles east of Sangju and
in a separate incident, troops of the 1st Cavalry will
also pull back. General Walker is also concerned with
the enemy movements coming from the west. He in-
forms General Church (24th Division) that the ROK
17th Regiment, composed of 2,000 men (presently
considered the elite of the South Korean forces), is to
bolster the 24th at the Naktong River. Walker also tells
Church that the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, has been
transferred from its positions in the vicinity of Pohang-
dong–Yongdok to Hyopch’on to shore up the rear of the
34th Regiment. The 21st Regiment deploys west of the
town and the ROK contingent (17th Regiment) will
arrive early on the 30th.
Central Mountain area: The N.K. 15th Division
138
continues closing from the west toward
Sangju, engaging contingents of the 24th
U.S. Regiment as it plods forward. Today,
the luckless 24th Regiment receives severe
incoming mortar fire, which inflicts 60 ca-
sualties on the 1st Battalion and apparently
causes a delayed anxiety attack on the re-
mainder of the men of the 1st Battalion.
Colonel Horton White directs the unit to
establish a night perimeter, which seem-
ingly creates a night fight that had appar-
ently been festering since the mortar at-
tacks. The 1st Battalion, still jittery, begins
executing the order, then suddenly and
without explanation, the battalion vacates
its positions, leaving Colonel Horton
White in an embarrassing, but more im-
portantly, a very dangerous, position.
The flimsy front lines, subsequent to the
frenzied massive disappearance of the
troops, reduces the 1st Battalion comple-
ment to one man: Colonel White. White
retains his composure and takes solace in
the fact that the artillerymen (Battery of
159th Field Artillery Bn.) and the men of
the 77th Combat Engineering Bn. remain
at their positions at the front.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans con-
tinue to advance and are engaged by the
supporting artillery. Colonel White is
compelled to regroup his lost battalion,
while the guns expend about 3,000 rounds
of ammunition. The exhausted artillery-
men succeed, preventing the North Kore-
ans from overrunning the one-man bat-
talion. Understandably, an irritated regimental adjutant
(S-3), Major John R. Woodridge, has established a
roadblock one-half mile west of Sangju during these
waning days of July, but its purpose is not to defend
the town. Woodridge has ordered that every vehicle
rolling east be stopped and searched to snag any stray
troops. The peculiar operation evolves as a prosperous
sting operation by the time it is terminated on July 31.
In the area near Hwanggan, the 27th Regiment has
withdrawn to positions near Kumch’on, but during the
afternoon, Colonel Mike Michaelis receives new in-
structions ordering him to relocate his regiment to po-
sitions closer to Taegu. He is to head for Waegwan on
the Naktong River to become Army Reserve, rather
than returning to the 25th Division. During its five
days ( July 24–28) of engaging the N.K. 2nd Division
along the road from Poun to Hwanggan, the 27th Reg-
iment sustains 53 men killed, 221 wounded and 49
missing. Estimated losses for the opposing North Ko-
rean 2nd Division and its support fire, during the same
period of combat against the 7th, range as high as 3,000
casualties.
After the withdrawal of the 27th Regiment (through
the lines of the 1st Cavalry Division), the 1st Cavalry
Division moves to its predetermined positions near
 139
Kumch’on, about thirty air miles northwest of Taegu.
The 7th Cavalry stays at its lines near Hwanggan until
the 5th and 8th Cavalry Regiments move back. At the
new positions, the 5th Cavalry deploys on a new line
southwest of Chirye to block the road there. The 8th
Cavalry redeploys north of Chirye, along the Sangju
Road and upon its arrival, the 7th Cavalry digs in along
the Kumch’on Road about six miles northwest of Kum-
chon. Another roadblock is established on the Chirye
Road, near Hawan-ni, about ten miles southwest of
Kumch’on, by the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment (re-
cently attached to 1st Cavalry Division).
In the meantime, the N.K. 7th Regiment, 3rd Divi-
sion, is moving from Yongdong toward Chirye, guar-
anteeing a confrontation. Sometime after daybreak, a
platoon-sized patrol (16th Reconnaissance Company)
moves southwest through Chirye, but before noon, a
detachment of Korean police, operating near the town,
informs Lt. Lester Lauer (leader of an earlier patrol)
that they have discovered enemy troops within Chirye.
Lauer, now strung out in front of Chirye and possi-
bly cut off, forwards the intelligence to his company
headquarters. The commanding officer, Captain
Charles Harvey, leading another platoon and fourteen
South Korean police, rushes to help ensure Lauer’s
safety. The platoon encounters several inattentive N.K.
soldiers on the fringes of Chirye and they are quickly
eliminated.
Meanwhile, only sporadic small arms fire harasses
the advance platoon, permitting a quick hook-up by
noon. But as the combined detachments return toward
Kumch’on, moving through the northern sector of
Chirye, they encounter a roadblock from which enemy
fire rakes their ranks. The platoon’s point, a trusty M-
39 vehicle, plows into the debris, gouging a hole, but
as quickly as the second vehicle, a jeep, can breech the
gap, enemy machine gun fire destroys the next trailing
vehicle, sealing the road and with it the sole exit head-
ing north out of Chirye. Americans race to the south-
ern tip of town, escaping the clutches of a closing force
of about three hundred North Koreans, maneuvering to
circle the platoons.
From their new positions, three mortars thrust their
shells into the lines of the advancing enemy, only to be
outgunned by heavier enemy return fire. Captain Har-
vey receives a wound to his hand, orders his men to
pull out, and then gets a fatal wound to his jugular
vein. One mortarman, Corporal Harry D. Mitchell,
despite four separate wounds, refuses to abandon his
weapon. Although losing blood rapidly, Mitchell re-
mains with his blazing mortar until it runs out of am-
munition. The survivors, three officers and 41 enlisted
men, discard their equipment and bolt for the hills,
where they endure a sleepless night-long march, reach-
ing the sanctuary of the 1st Cavalry lines on the 30th,
culminating a 35-mile trek. Casualties for the 16th Re-
connaissance patrol at Chirye amount to two men
killed, three men wounded and eleven men missing.
West Coast area: Advance contingents of the N.K.
4th Division move south from Anui to strike against
July 29, 1950
Colonel Wilson’s 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment, and
supporting ROK troops at Umyong-ni and Hamyang
respectively.
In other activity, K Company, 3rd Battalion, 29th In-
fantry, is attached to the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment,
24th Division, at Chinju. In conjunction, L Company,
3rd Battalion, 29th Regiment, is attached to the 1st Bat-
talion, 19th Regiment, stationed about two miles south
of Chinju. At Koch’ang, the N.K. 4th Division maintains
its pressure against the 34th Regiment (24th Division),
which is retreating east, but it retains its artillery at
Koch’ang because of the destroyed bridges along the
route to the Naktong River. As the withdrawal contin-
ues, U.S. engineers and infantrymen detonate all bridges
as they move along the Hyopch’on Road. In addition,
from a point about three miles southeast of Koch’ang,
they scatter explosives throughout the adjacent cliffs (for
a distance of about ten miles), creating landslides to fur-
ther hinder the North Korean pursuers.
At Chinju, an enemy column led by three motorcy-
cles encroaches the positions of Company F, 2nd Bat-
talion, the advance unit of the battalion, which is block-
ing the Chinju-Hadong Road about six miles southwest
of Chinju. Some inaccurate artillery fire is thrown at the
advancing enemy, but without causing any pause. For
unexplained reasons an available automatic weapon re-
mains unfired as the company contingent heads back to-
ward the battalion positions about four miles from
Chinju and to the west of the Nam River.
Meanwhile, planes move in and attack the column,
bringing it to a momentary halt. On the following day,
the North Koreans mount a flanking movement that
maneuvers north of the 2nd Battalion (19th Regiment)
and severs the road heading northwest from Chinju to
the lines of the 1st Battalion (19th Regiment).
—In the United States: An Air Force plane is loaded
with 200 newly developed 5-inch “shaped charge”
rockets at the Navy’s California Ordnance Test Station
in Inyokern, California, and it then departs for the Far
East. These are the first of this type rocket delivered to
the Navy for its fighter planes in Korea.
— In Japan: The continuing success of the enemy in
Korea interrupts General MacArthur’s plans for an am-
phibious invasion (CHROMITE) at Inchon. MacArthur
sends a reluctant dispatch to the chiefs of staff in Wash-
ington: “In Korea, the hopes that I had entertained to
hold out the 1st Marine Division (Brigade) and the
2nd Infantry Division for the enveloping counter blow
have not been fulfilled and it will be necessary to com-
mit these units to Korea on the south line rather than
... their subsequent commitment along a separate axis
in mid September.... I now plan to commit my sole re-
serve in Japan, the 7th infantry Division, as soon as it
can be brought to an approximate combat strength.”
In other activity, the French contingent of the U.N.
Naval Force arrives at Sasebo; the La Grandière, an eld-
erly frigate, enters port to participate with what is trans-
forming into a giant-sized fleet. The French ship will
depart Sasebo on September 6, escorting the slower
moving vessels toward Inchon.
July 30, 1950
July 30 General Walker, in an attempt to loosen
the slack on his statement perceived as “stand or die,”
places a more positive and less fatal addendum on the
situation. He exudes an air of confidence, stating that
the United States forces presently in Korea would hold
“until reinforcements arrive,” then underscores his re-
marks by stating that “ultimate victory will be ours.”
Walker then reiterates that the fighting in Korea “had
reached a critical point,” having given a similar response
to a question posed by a New York Times reporter sev-
eral days earlier.
The South Korean government has established fifty-
eight camps for refugees, most in the Pusan-Taegu
vicinity. Estimates place the number of refugees mov-
ing into ROK territory between the June 25 invasion
and July 15 at 380,000. From then to today, about
25,000 more arrive per day. These refugees and the un-
told numbers of infiltrating enemy troops among them
cause severe problems for the American forces and the
U.N. command.
In other activity, including the aircraft that arrived
on the USS Boxer on July 23, the Far East Air Force is
composed of 626 F-80s and 264 F-51s. Of the com-
bined total of 890 planes, only 525 are assigned to units
and prepared for battle. Also, Fifth Air Force B-29s
begin bombing the Hungnam area, which contains a
huge array of chemical facilities. The missions continue
until September 30 and deposit more than 1,700 tons
of bombs there against targets that include Najin, sit-
uated about seventeen miles below the Siberian bor-
der. The port of Najin is used as an unloading point for
military equipment, supplies and ammunition dis-
patched into North Korea from the Russians out of the
port of Vladivostok, a little more than 100 air miles
away.
In other activity, the N.K. 7th Division, which had
been activated on July 3 and is composed of about
4,000 troops of the 7th Border Constabulary Brigade
and 2,000 recruits, receives additional men. Towards the
latter part of July the 7th Division receives an artillery
regiment and on this day, 2,000 South Koreans (pressed
into service) join the division. On August 1, the divi-
sion, about 10,000 strong, departs Seoul for south-
western Korea.
Also, General Craig, having been informed by
Eighth Army on the previous day that the U.N. left
flank is folding, confers with General Walker and Air
Force General Partridge to finalize the initial mission of
the Marines. Walker informs Craig that the Marines
will be immediately sent to the southwest perimeter
and that their movement will not be encumbered by
Eighth Army. In addition, General Partridge informs
Craig that if the Marine planes are initially unavailable,
Air Force aircraft will provide support for the brigade.
After this final meeting with Walker and Partridge,
the Marine contingent departs Taegu by jeep for Pusan
to await the arrival of the brigade. In Taegu, Eighth
Army Headquarters is desperately seeking to buy some
precious time. Later during the evening in Pusan, Ma-
rine staff officers discuss the possibilities of MAG-33
140
arriving in time to provide air cover for the imminent
action of the Marine brigade. Colonel Joseph Stewart,
surprisingly, is able to make contact by phone with Col-
onel Weir (Gen. Cushman’s chief of staff ) at Itami Air
Base in Japan. He requests that Weir deliver the heli-
copters and air support contingents via LSTs to Pusan
as soon as they unload in Japan.
General Craig is informed that the Marine brigade’s
replacement troops, rather than being transported di-
rectly to Pusan, would be delayed, as the Marines would
be formed at Camp Pendleton and subsequently moved
to Korea with the 1st Marine Division. Craig, aware
of the dire necessity of replacement troops, relentlessly
presses the issue and demands that the replacements
and the third rifle companies be sent directly to Pusan.
Central Mountain area: The U.S. 35th Regiment,
25th Division, receives new orders directing it to pull
back and draw a new line of defense about eight miles
south of Sangju in a cluster of hills that overlook the
Kumch’on Road. Continual redeployment of the 35th
Regiment has been mandated by the instability of the
area and the string of collapses on the battlefront around
it. In total, the regiment — upon orders, not by enemy
immediate pressure — has withdrawn about 30 miles
in less than twelve days.
Meanwhile, Sangju is becoming more imperiled as the
advancing N.K. 15th Division, although slowed by in-
cessant artillery bombardments, continues to advance
against the U.S. 24th Division, which is deployed west
of the town, but near collapse. The 34th Regiment,
having been pushed from Koch’ang, is spread out de-
fensively along the road to Hyopch’on, near Sanje-ri
on the Naktong River. The 21st Regiment (minus
Company C and the 3rd Battalion), 24th Division,
fords the Naktong River and deploys to the rear of the
34th Regiment. In conjunction, ROK troops (17th
Regiment) filter into the area and deploy to the right
(north) of the 34th in the heights.
By today, although there have been no major battles
fought between the 24th Regiment and the enemy, the
regiment has pulled back to within three miles of
Sangju and deploys on the sole remaining high ground
in front of Sangju. Its battle readiness is under serious
question. In a desperate effort to shore up the western
approach to Sangju, General Kean orders the 1st Bat-
talion, 35th Regiment, to speed to the western approach
of the town and establish an additional line of defense,
directly to the rear of the 24th Regiment to ensure some
insulation if the 24th Regiment collapses again. The
North Koreans strike the 24th Infantry on the follow-
ing day.
Central Mountain–West Coast area: In the 1st Cav-
alry sector, General Gay, keenly apprised of the envelop-
ing move by the N.K. 3rd Division against his com-
mand, directs a considerable force to Chirye to
neutralize the enemy. The 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment
(minus Company C, still at Yongdok on the east coast)
attached to 1st Cavalry Division, the 5th Cavalry Reg-
iment and the 99th Field Artillery Battalion speed to the
town, but the enemy is already dispersed about the
 141
nearby hills. This places the Americans under the
enemy artillery units in the heights. At Chinju, the sit-
uation is deteriorating and in fact, the refugees here
pose a special problem as they express hostility toward
the Americans and appear quite benevolent to the
enemy cause.
The enemy initiates a predawn flanking move, work-
ing around the north (right) flank of the 2nd Battalion,
19th Regiment. It succeeds in blocking the road lead-
ing from the town to the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment.
From the positions of G Company (29th Regiment),
west of Chinju across the Nam River, Captain Barszcz
observes a strong enemy force estimated at 800 troops
passing his front line. G Company attempts to halt the
advance, but its fire is insufficient. Calls for air recon-
naissance are placed, but the weather is not good. One
plane arrives overhead, but the enemy troops lie prone
in their camouflage (uniforms speckled with brush),
blending into the terrain and undetectable from the
air. A short burst of artillery fire commences, but it too
lacks a punch, due to grave shortages. About twenty
rounds are fired. Inclement weather continues, prevent-
ing any further air observation flights over the lines.
The 19th Regiment’s Companies E and F during the
afternoon move back across the Nam River, establish-
ing a new perimeter about two miles west of Chinju.
This movement is followed by G Company (29th Reg-
iment), which pulls back to the east bank of the Nam
River slightly before dark and holds a defensive line
there to intercept any enemy infiltrators and prevent
them from entering the town by moving between the
river and the road. According to the regimental report
for June 30, the 19th Regiment is composed of only
1,895 troops, including 300 men in the 1st Battalion
and 290 troops in the 2nd Battalion; Colonel Ned
Moore relates that the 19th Regiment, including new
replacements, consists of 1,544 men. About 600 re-
placements arrive on this day to augment the 19th Reg-
iment and the 13th Field Artillery Battalion, the latter
receiving 100 troops.
Nonetheless, the defense of Chinju remains in seri-
ous doubt as the enemy closes. In addition to the 19th
Regiment, the endangered town is defended by Task
Force Min (remaining men of the S.K. 7th Division, re-
designated TF Min), which arrives from Hamyang with
its complement of about 1,249 troops today to bolster
the recently arrived 3rd Battalion (396 troops), 29th
Regiment, which is attached to the 19th Regiment. At
about 1600, the replacement troops begin departing
the regimental command post in Chinju to their des-
ignated units on the front lines, which are already en-
gaged with the enemy. It is a dangerous mission, against
the better judgment of several of the officers, despite
their dire need for added strength. Of the 500 men as-
signed to the 19th Regiment, about 300 equally di-
vided between the 1st and 2nd Battalions are assigned
to the rifle companies, and as predicted, deaths occur
prior to the men being logged on the roster.
Sunset brings added problems to the area as well as
the fresh troops. The North Koreans kill about five men
July 30, 1950
(out of the 60 troops) as they advance toward Com-
pany G, stationed along the east bank of the Nam. The
enemy continues to creep closer, preparing to launch a
night attack. At dusk from 1st Battalion positions in
the heights south of Chinju, Colonel Rhea observes the
enemy blatantly advancing across open ground. But he
is barred from commencing fire due to an anticipated
South Korean Marine attack, planned to swing right
across their front. The attack never occurs. Conse-
quently, the enemy gains several hours of uncontested
movement to strangle the 1st Battalion. But when the
N.K. 15th Regiment, supported by mortars and self-
propelled weapons, pound against the 1st Battalion
along the Sach’on-Chinju Road near the intersecting
road leading east to Masan, it is handily repelled. Un-
able to penetrate, the enemy retires, apparently head-
ing northwest.
Also, infiltrators penetrate G Company lines, but
those spotted are killed. Lacking communication lines
with regimental headquarters, Captain Barszcz is unable
to inform them of the situation, including the friendly
artillery that is falling too close for comfort. In the
meantime, enemy forces have sliced the road, prevent-
ing Company G from moving to join the other rifle
companies in the heights west of Chinju. By about
midnight, Barszcz gets his command across the road,
but they conceal themselves in the brush to avoid cap-
ture. While waiting to depart the area, G Company sits
dangerously close to several enemy tanks accompanied
by infantry moving toward Chinju, ensuring another
long night. Prior to dawn, radio contact is made with
headquarters and Company G is ordered to Chinju to
join the 19th Regiment there.
At 0215 (31st), enemy artillery breaks the silence,
pulverizing the American positions. After a sustained
bombardment of 45 minutes, shrill whistles signal the
infantry to charge. Company F, 19th Regiment, is the
first to feel the sting of battle as hordes of infantry as-
sault its positions. With little regard for the incoming
fire, the North Koreans press forward. Company F be-
gins to topple, then total collapse occurs at about 0500.
The men of F Company evacuate their hill positions,
with one platoon heading down the slopes toward their
supporting heavy weapons company and another rac-
ing toward Company E, but the enemy is on their heels.
Some of the guns of a heavy weapons platoon com-
mence firing into the intertwined ranks of the Ameri-
cans and North Koreans as they descend the slope, but
the guns silence and the elemenets of the heavy weapons
company withdraw back into Chinju. The North Ko-
reans keep advancing. By dawn (31st), the elements of
Companies E and F, still operational as fighting units,
also withdraw toward Chinju.
Meanwhile, Captain Barszcz, Company G, 19th
Regiment, is taking a circuitous route to rejoin Colo-
nel Moore at Chinju, which is near capitulation. The
unit moves north then east, scooping up stragglers and
wounded men from Companies E, F and H as it moves.
By break of day, Company G, which had sustained 40
casualties while manning its isolated positions, brings
July 31, 1950
out half of them, including ten men on litters, and it
is about three miles northeast east of Chinju.
The 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, which had fought
off strong attacks below the Nam River south of
Chinju, acting upon orders from Colonel Ned Moore,
departs the area heading down the Masan Road toward
Chinju Pass. Colonel Rhea is directed to make the ten-
mile trek and establish a roadblock at the pass. The 1st
Battalion arrives at the pass before dark (31st) without
incident and immediately establishes a defensive line.
In other activity, Colonel Michaelis, commanding
officer, 27th Regiment at Waegwan, receives instruc-
tions from Eighth Army to immediately head for
Changnyong, the new 24th Division command post
(relocated from Hyopch’on), and report to General
Church. Michaelis, accompanied by his operations and
training officer, Captain Earl Buchanan, departs after
directing his executive officer, Major Arthur Farthing,
to assemble the regiment and follow. Michaelson ar-
rives at Changnyong on the following day.
July 31 General Walker, while preparing to move
his forces to the Pusan perimeter, continues to focus
on the U.S. troops’ apparent lackadaisical attitude to-
ward his orders to maintain contact with the enemy.
Walker reiterates the instructions and on the 2nd of
August, the situation then compels him to enunciate
it again, more pointedly, to his divisional officers.
In other activity, Chinju falls to North Korean Com-
munists, placing them about 50 miles from the belea-
guered bastion of Pusan. A battalion of the 29th Reg-
imental Combat Team had pushed toward the
embattled town, but it is ambushed several miles out-
side of Hadong. Fierce and heroic combat ensues, but
the outnumbered unit is severely thrashed, taking ex-
tremely heavy casualties. Desperate decisions must be
made to prevent the fall of Pusan. Circumstances are
grave. General Walker, keenly aware of the condition
of the exhausted 24th Division under General John H.
Church, orders it to hold in place near Chinju. The
34th Regiment pulls out of its positions and redeploys
behind the 21st Regiment. General Church directs
Colonel Stephens to assume command of both regi-
ments. Also, Stephens redeploys the ROK 17th Regi-
ment, placing one battalion on each flank of the U.S.
troops and the third is kept in reserve.
In other activity, General Craig, USMC, and Lt. Col-
onel Joseph Stewart (G-3) take a jeep and drive southwest
to reconnoiter the ground, previously observed from the
air, to which the Marine brigade is likely to be commit-
ted. Upon his return, Craig is informed by Eighth Army
that the 5th Regimental Combat Team, recently arrived
from Hawaii, is to be attached to the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade, giving Craig two regiments.
Elements (Company A) of the 89th Medium Tank
Battalion arrive from Japan by sea at Pusan. The com-
manding officer, Colonel Dolvin, arrives by air and
meets the troops on the dock. From Pusan, Dolvin’s
contingent departs for Masan and joins the U.S. troops
there on the following day.
142
Central Mountain area: Near Sangju, the North
Koreans surge forward, unleashing probing strikes
against the 24th Regiment, prompting the folding of a
forward outpost. First Lt. Leon A. Gilbert, A Com-
pany commander, and about fifteen other defenders
make a hurried retreat to the regiment and upon their
return, Colonel H. White and several more officers of
high rank order Gilbert to return to his post, but he
declines, responding that he “is scared.” In his place, a
noncommissioned officer leads the men back to their
positions. The regiment holds its line throughout the
day. After dark, the 24th Regiment makes a disciplined
withdrawal, moving through Sangju, covered by the
1st Battalion, 35th Regiment (25th Division), which
had just recently arrived to shore up the rear.
In other activity, Major Woolridge’s unorthodox
roadblock is lifted today; on each day during its oper-
ation, about 75 men attempting to smuggle themselves
into Sangju are snagged, and on the final day of the
sting (30th), 150 men are rejoined with their outfits.
Following eleven days on the line against the advanc-
ing enemy, primarily the N.K. 15th Division, the 24th
Regiment has sustained a total of 27 men killed, 293
wounded and 3 men missing. In contrast, the North
Korean 15th Division, according to information ac-
quired from captured enemy troops, sustained severe
losses from a combination of the air strikes.
The incessant artillery bombardments and mortars as
the enemy drives against the ROK and U.S. 24th Reg-
iment allegedly deplete their strength by about half
(5,000 men) by July 31. The N.K. 13th Division,
which had bypassed Hamch’ang, encounters only a few
minor skirmishes with elements of the 2nd Battalion,
35th Regiment, and various ROK contingents, result-
ing in extremely light casualties. Also, the balance of
the 25th Division is ordered to initiate an immediate
forced march to bolster the 24th Division and ensure
that the Communists don’t penetrate any farther.
On the following day the 25th Division, deployed
near Sangju, receives new orders. In addition, the 1st
Cavalry Division must contain the enemy on both the
central and northwestern fronts. The cavalry becomes
engaged in bloody combat around Kumch’on, but
again the overwhelming numbers of enemy troops push
them back. By daybreak, a detachment of enemy troops
infiltrates the 8th Engineer Combat Battalion’s com-
mand post, slaying four troops, including the battalion
executive officer. In conjunction, 6 others are wounded.
Close by, about 1,000 yards away, lies the command
post of the 1st Cavalry Division. The enemy launches
an attack against the positions of the 7th Cavalry,
northwest of Kumch’on, but it is interrupted by in-
tense fire originating from U.S. ground forces and
planes. The combination inflicts great punishment, in-
cluding the immediate destruction of thirteen enemy
tanks caught crossing open space and a slower death
for six additional tanks put to flames. Nearby at Chirye,
the N.K. 8th Regiment, 3rd N.K. Division, arrives to
augment the N.K. 7th Regiment. Enemy artillery
perched in the heights overlooking the town unleashes
 143
heavy shelling, making the American positions unten-
able, thereby prodding them to evacuate quickly.
It had originally been estimated that between 90,000
and 130,000 crack North Korean troops had invaded
South Korea, and today, General MacArthur announces
that the estimated number of Communist casualties
stands at more than 30,000. In the N.K. 3rd Division,
which has been engaged in heavy combat with the 1st
Cavalry Division, numbers have dwindled from about
7,000 men to 5,000 during the ten days it has been
pushing the 1st Cavalry from Yongdong. During the
same period of time, the U.S. 1st Cavalry Division sus-
tains 78 killed, 419 wounded and 419 missing.
In the West Coast Sector, east of Chinju, the 1st Bat-
talion, 19th Regiment, remains at the Chinju Pass. Ar-
tillery support will arrive later in the day. At Chinju,
Colonel Moore prepares to evacuate just after daybreak;
the enemy strikes aggressively against the western
fringes of the town and hostile small arms fire is clat-
tering at a rapid pace. Six enemy armored vehicles
pierce the thin shield, entering the town. The armor
begins plastering U.S. positions while trailing infantry,
including snipers, quickly add to the dilemma, but the
troops under Colonel Moore retain their composure.
The withdrawal of the 19th Regiment remains orderly.
The U.S. heavy equipment—the 13th Field Artillery
Battalion (minus Battery A) and Battery B, 11th Field
Artillery Battalion — begin heading east by 0640. In
conjunction, trains heading east have been salvaging
the 19th Regiment’s supplies (25 rail cars total). The last
of five such rail convoys departs at 0745, sent off by
Major Jack Emery (S-4). The command post staff de-
parts at 0800, moving to new positions at Chiryong-
ni, about one mile beyond the Much’on-ni–Masan
Road fork and about twelve air miles east of Chinju.
The journey is hampered by obstacles, including the
destruction of the primary bridge span over the Nam
River at the southern tip of Chinju and the alternate
routes clogged with refugees.
Although the greater part of the 19th Regiment has
departed Chinju and ROK sources account for the cap-
ture of Chinju at 0900, one defiant U.S. contingent re-
mains — three M-26 Pershing tanks, led by Lieutenant
Sam Fowler. The tanks, not committed to the defense
of Chinju, had been waiting for new fan belts to solve
an ongoing problem. Fowler is under orders to destroy
the tanks, but he and his twelve crewmen are holding
tight, hoping for a train with flatcars, which never
shows. The engine passes through Masan, but is unable
to depart Chungam-ni. Slightly after noon, a South
Korean soldier passes the rail yard, noting that the town
contains only several S.K. troops. He suggests to the
Americans that they move out.
Soon after, an AP correspondent, William Moore,
urges Lieutenant Fowler to glance north at an ap-
proaching unidentified column moving along the
tracks. After a South Korean trooper calls for identifi-
cation, an interpreter is no longer necessary. The con-
tingent is North Korean. The tankers commence fir-
ing, spreading a steady stream of machine gun shells
July 31, 1950
into the enemy ranks, thinning the platoon. But a burst
of return rifle fire wounds Fowler. Still determined to
keep the Pershings, the troops place Fowler in a tank and
drive east toward Masan. About two miles down the
highway, they encounter a destroyed bridge and are
forced to abandon the tanks.
As the tanks are being destroyed, a concealed enemy
contingent posted near the bridge suddenly commences
firing. One man, Master Sergeant Shrader, having
reached an operable tank, unleashes its .30-caliber ma-
chine gun to cut the odds. The enemy ambush has dev-
astated the small contingent of Americans. Shrader
ceases firing his machine gun and nudges the tank close
to one of the others, quickly picking up six men and
then heading back toward Chinju. Along the way, the
surviving tank overheats (bad fanbelt) at a bridge over
the Nam River. The seven occupants dart through the
nearby bamboo, eventually reaching the sanctuary of
the 25th Division lines west of Masan.
Some of the original contingent had been killed at the
bridge and others are killed or captured attempting to
flee to safety. One captured soldier later relates that he
saw several bodies floating in the water. He recognized
one as Lieutenant Fowler and another as William
Moore, the Associated Press correspondent. The first
three Pershing tanks (M-26 Medium) to enter Korea
and the first three to go down in combat leave a valiant
legacy from the courage of their crews at Chinju.
Early estimates of the enemy troops that seize con-
trol of the town are 2,000, but a subsequent report that
arrives from a Korean source toward the end of the
night numbers the force at approximately 4,000. As
the evacuation is unfolding, 24th Division Headquar-
ters is buzzing. Air strikes throughout the day torch
Chinju, igniting ravaging fires. Meanwhile, the 2nd
Battalion (19th Regiment) heads along the road north
of the Nam, regrouping at Uiryong during the night,
while the 3rd Battalion (29th Regiment) and the ar-
tillery evacuate north of the Nam River and cross to
the south bank at Uiryong, then reorganize at Komam-
ni (Saga).
After a short while, an aircraft dispatched by General
Church passes overhead and drops a succinct order to the
artillery: return to the Chinju vicinity. Colonel Rhea’s
1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, holding the pass, is pleased
to see the eight 155-mm howitzers (11th Field Artillery,
Battery B) and Battery (13th Field Artillery) five 105-
mm howitzers roll up to the pass from the east.
East of Chinju Pass lies the village of Much’on, where
the Masan Road forks, churning around Sobuk-san, a
steep mountain mass. One route swings south through
Kogan-ni and Chindong-ni and the other veers north,
twisting through Chungam-ni and Komam-ni, enter-
ing Masan from the south and north respectively. The
northern spur is selected by Colonel Moore as the lo-
cation for his regimental command post, which is es-
tablished about one mile east of Muchon-ni.
At Sanch’ong, the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment, re-
mains unaware of the fate of Chinju, other than the
trucks transporting food on the previous day had not
July 31, 1950
yet returned. As the morning begins to fade, the towns-
people begin to vanish, sending a visual message of ur-
gency to Colonel Wesley Wilson. He rushes south to a
1st Battalion roadblock at Tansong, about ten air miles
from Chinju. Lieutenant Griffin, a platoon com-
mander, informs Colonel Wilson that about 700
refugees have passed the roadblock, relating that enemy
troops are soon to follow, ending his suspicions about
Chinju. Wilson orders that drivers move the heavy ve-
hicles at Sanch’ong to Tansong, then move east through
a primitive mountain road toward Uiryong.
The trip becomes another arduous adventure, as the
route is large enough to handle jeeps but not huge ve-
hicles. With some swift improvisation by Wilson’s
troops and by South Koreans, every vehicle, except one
that collapsed crossing a fabricated bridge and had to
be abandoned, reaches Chungam-ni. At about 1800,
about one hour into the march from Sanch’on, an ob-
servation plane passes the column, depositing a star-
tling message: “Yesterday, you were ordered to report to
the concentration area of Haman.” The message con-
tinues: “What are you doing here?”
Haman lies about thirty air miles away, but Wilson’s
route is via primitive mountain roads, and he, of course,
never received word on the previous day to move out.
Nonetheless, still en route to Tamsong, a South Ko-
rean naval lieutenant, moving with the flood of
refugees, presents himself to Colonel Wilson. He shows
Wilson a map detailing the approximate location of the
pursuing enemy, stating: “The Reds are just seven miles
behind us and will get here tonight.”
A U.S. Chaffee light tank pauses to replenish its ammunition.
144
Convinced of the accuracy of the information and the
imminence of the danger, Wilson, after a discussion
with his staff, decides to move across the mountains to
reach Haman. The several wounded members of the
battalion are placed in the jeeps between the mass of
mortars, machine guns and radios. All personal effects
of the troops are disposed of before heading into the
mountains. By about 0200 (Aug. 1), the column
reaches Masan-ni at the final north-south road by
which the Communist forces from Chinju could inter-
cept the 1st Battalion, bringing a sigh of relief for the
weary troops. A well-needed pause is taken.
Soon after, the troops and the large numbers of
refugees who have joined the Americans prepare to
move out. The march resumes at 0600 (August 1), but
it does not last long. Soon after crossing a stream, the
exhausted troops continue moving east and are greeted
by Major Arnold, who had taken the 1st Battalion ve-
hicles to safety on the previous day. The 1st Battalion
boards the vehicles and gets chauffeured to Haman.
In other activity, Colonel Michaelis arrives at the
24th Division positions in Changnyong, but General
Church, to whom he is to report, has gone to Chung-
ni. General Menoher, assistant division commander,
directs Michaelis to proceed and meet General Church
at the village of Changnyong, which lies about four
miles northeast of Masan. In the meantime, the 27th
Regiment is on the march, moving toward Chinju Pass.
Colonel Michaelis meets with General Church and they
are joined by Colonel Moore (19th Regiment), who is
transported to the railroad station meeting place from his
 145 July 31, 1950

command post near Chinju Pass by a divisional courier. Nonetheless, the U.S. soldiers of Eighth Army trans-
Moore arrives prior to midnight ( July 31-Aug. 1). portation work tirelessly during July to untangle the
Circumstances of the time preclude a clear account- chaotic rail system, attempting to move troops and sup-
ing of the precise orders received by Michaelis and plies north while simultaneously evacuating troops and
Moore from General Church, as no written notes are guiding the precious hospital trains, bearing the wounded,
taken. Apparently, Colonel Michaelis is to deploy his to safety. Two thousand five hundred and eighty-one
27th Regiment at the Chinju Pass along the northern wounded troops are evacuated from the battlefront on
spur of the Masan Road, a few miles west of Chungam-
ni, and Colonel Moore is to retain his 1st Battalion,
19th Regiment, led by Colonel Rhea, in place at Chinju
Pass. Subsequent to the conference, Colonel Michaelis
remains in Chung-ni until his rain-drenched regiment
arrives at about 0300. Then after ordering the regiment
to continue to Chungam-ni where it is to fortify the
high ground, Michaelis and several officers head for
another pass, located southwest of Chungam-ni, arriv-
ing there just after dawn. Meanwhile, Colonel Moore
departs for Much’on-ni.
In other activity, the 5th Regimental Combat Team,
with a full complement of three battalions, arrives at
Pusan to bolster Eighth Army, bringing with it the 555th
Field Artillery Battalion and a contingent of Pershing
M-26 tanks. Upon arrival at Pusan, the 5th RCT is or-
dered to move to Masan on the southwest flank of the
Eighth Army. Advance contingents arrive the following
night and the remainder of the regiment arrives by Au-
gust 2. The 5th RCT, initially, was to be attached to the
1st Provisional Marine Brigade, but it is to be attached
to the 25th Division and reverts to Eighth Army reserve.
In addition, the 9th Regiment, 2nd Infantry Divi-
sion, arrives in Pusan. Its 2nd Battalion, the first con-
tingent of U.S. troops to embark for Korea from the
States, left Tacoma, Washington, on July 17. The 9th
Regiment, commanded by Colonel John G. Hill, is
supported by the 15th Field Artillery Battalion. It de-
parts for Kyongsan about ten miles south of Taegu and
upon arrival reverts to Army reserve.
Pusan: Since the 2nd of July, more than 300,000
tons of equipment and supplies have been unloaded
from vessels at Pusan harbor. During the latter half of
July, 230 ships have arrived and 214 have re-embarked.
In conjunction, the ports of Ulsan and Surong are uti-
lized for the unloading of items requiring special pre-
cautions such as ammunition and petroleum products,
which are transferred from ships to barges, tankers and
LCMs.
This tremendous infusion of seaborne supplies alle-
viates somewhat the burden on the Air Force, which
has been hard pressed to maintain incessant priority
flights between the States and Japan and Korea. How-
ever, some items, such as the recently developed 3.5-
inch rockets, continue to be airlifted to Korea at a rate
of about 900 units per day during August.
July has not been a good month for the South Ko-
rean rail system. On July 2, slightly more than 1,400
miles of rails came under domination of U.N. troops,
but the numbers deplete rapidly toward the end of the
month. At this time, the U.N. forces control about 431 A tank commander, out of uniform, peers upward
miles of tracks, as the North Koreans aggressively move from his camouflaged position in search of enemy
south toward Pusan. movement.
July 31, 1950
38 trains. During the same period, 71 trains transport
troops to the battlefront. As of the beginning of August,
the northbound trains would not proceed beyond
Pohang-dong and Taegu, but in reaction to the enemy
threat against the Eighth Army west flank, trains are sped
daily to bolster the troops in the vicinity of Masan.
The battle casualties for the U.S. Army from arrival
in Korea through July 31 stand at 1,884 killed, 2,695
wounded, 523 missing and 901 assumed captured.
More than half of the total losses are incurred by the
24th Division (first to enter Korea); about 80 percent
of these casualties occur during the last half of July. The
South Korean casualty figures are not totally known.
Genuine estimates place them at about 70,000, includ-
ing killed, wounded and missing. Although many of
the South Korean units had retreated in a disoriented
fashion, many others were inflicting great punishment
on the enemy in the mountains. North Korean casual-
ties, according to estimates by the Intelligence Section
of MacArthur’s Headquarters, are placed at about
31,000. The Department of the Army lists enemy ca-
sualties for the same time period at 37,500. Both esti-
mates are based on information from captured prison-
ers and seized documents, but the more accurate
number is probably closer to 58,000; the low estimates
by the Americans are due partly to their underestima-
tion of the ROK operations against the North Kore-
ans. These figures on enemy battle casualties are con-
sidered more accurate than those compiled by the U.N.
representatives.
— In Japan: General MacArthur’s first report on the
Korean situation is filed with the State Department.
His message states that the beginning phase of the cam-
paign has concluded. He further states that although the
undermanned South Korean (ROK) positions had been
initially “shattered,” the swift deployment of Eighth
Army units had stemmed the tide, denying the North
Koreans victory. General MacArthur pays high praise
to the fighting men under him, giving them full credit
for the superlative effort to derail the North Korean
onslaught.
MacArthur includes American and U.N. intentions:
“Over a broad front involving continuous local strug-
gles, there are bound to be ups and downs, losses as
well as successes. Our casualties despite overwhelming
odds have been relatively light. Our strength will con-
tinually increase ... we are now in Korea in force, and
with God’s help we are here to stay until the constitu-
tional authority of the republic is fully restored.”
There is concern in the U.S. that the Russians might
use the Korean diversion by their puppet forces to
attempt to seize Japan or to enlarge the ongoing prob-
lems in Europe. U.S. strategy does not alter easily. As
with World War II, Europe remains the priority and
the Pacific is again a remote stepchild. Ambassador Se-
bald subsequently notes that during the end of July, a
member of his diplomatic staff returned from Korea
and reported that the morale of the U.S. troops at Taegu
was very low. He claimed, “The men failed to under-
stand why they were involved in such a dirty war and
146
usually considered it better tactics to withdraw, rather
than stand and fight.”
The term usually used for the action of these partic-
ular troops who would not fight is called “bugging
out.” In many instances the troops stood with obso-
lete weapons against hordes of enemy troops until it
was no longer possible to halt the enemy. This general
statement is unfair to the great majority of U.S. troops
who withstood the odds with a genuine shield of valor
while shedding their blood, and many other courageous
troops who sacrificed their lives to buy time for the
U.S. to bring in reinforcements and turn the tide. The
frequent retreating by American troops is about to
cease. Pusan will be defended with fervor, pitting guts
and glory against overwhelming odds.
In other activity, Marine reservists are reporting to
Camp Pendleton and other contingents are departing
Camp Lejeune for Pendleton; the 13th Infantry Com-
pany (Los Angeles), 12th Amphibian Tractor Com-
pany (San Francisco) and the 3rd Engineer Company
(Phoenix) arrive today, and for the immediate future,
Marines will be reporting 24 hours a day. From today
until March 31, 1951, the Volunteer Reserve will pro-
vide 51,942 of the 84,821 reservists on active duty. Of
these 99 percent of the officers and 77.5 percent of the
enlisted men are veterans of World War II.
The JCS order the chief of naval operations to bring
the 2nd Marine Division up to war strength (easier said
than done) and to add two Marine tactical air
squadrons, bringing the strength to eighteen squadrons.
The tireless efforts of General Cates, combined with
the persistence of MacArthur and the unwavering vocal
support of the chairman of the House Armed Services
Committee, Congressman Vinson, have won out, gain-
ing the employment of the Marine aviators for Korea.
In other activity, General MacArthur, based on in-
formation given him by staff during mid–July, informs
the Department of the Army that South Korea is able
to mount no more than four divisions and that he will
equip the Korean forces based on that number.
MacArthur does stipulate that some heavy equipment
will be withheld. In contrast, General Walker and Am-
bassador Muccio both believe that the U.S. should arm
many more South Koreans.
In a rare about-face, by the following week MacArthur
changes his stance and informs Walker that he should
increase the figure of armed Koreans to a point. The
carrier USS Badoeng Strait, commanded by Captain
Arnold McKechnie, arrives at Kobe, bringing with it 70
F4Us, six HO3S helicopters and eight light observa-
tion planes. In conjunction, the carrier Sicily stops at
Guam en route to disembark Antisubmarine Squadron
21 at Agana Airfield, but it then joins the Badoeng Strait
at Koebe. Its commanding officer, Captain John
Thach, is designated commanding officer CTE 96.23,
composed of the Sicily, USS Kyes (DD-787) and Doyle
(DMS-34). Captain Thach is ordered to rush to the
support of the Pusan Perimeter and by the following
day, the Sicily is steaming toward Korea.
As of this day, the Far East Air Forces have flown a
 147
total of 8,600 sorties in support of the conflict in Korea:
57 during the two strategic bombing missions; 1,600
combined cargo and reconnaissance; 2,550 close inter-
diction and 4,300 sorties in close support (ground
forces) missions.
In other activity, the portion of Task Group 53.7
transporting the forward echelon of the 1st Marine Air
Wing arrives at Kobe during the afternoon. Within
about three hours, the troops have completely debarked
and an LST is standing by to transport the Marine Tac-
tical Air Control Squadron Two and the ground troops
of VMO-6. The LST embarks for Pusan on the fol-
lowing day, arriving on the 4th. In the meantime, the
unloading process continues and the troops assemble the
helicopters and the light observation planes of VMO-
6, and to the astonishment of the observing Japanese,
the aircraft take off from the streets and move to Itami
to receive their pre-combat inspections prior to being
ferried to Korea.
— In Formosa: General MacArthur arrives on For-
mosa to meet with Chiang Kai-shek in Taipei. The
meeting occurs without sanction from Washington and
causes discontent in the State Department and the
White House. MacArthur gives some details of the con-
ference through a statement: “My visit to Formosa has
been primarily for the purpose of making a short recon-
naissance of the potential of its defense against possi-
ble attack....” Speculation emerges after the meeting
concerning why MacArthur had not taken Ambassador
Sebald along for the conference. Soon after, Secretary
of State Dean Acheson contacts Ambassador Sebald and
directs him to request more details, but the response is
not one the State Department likes. MacArthur essen-
tially cloaks the talks under the term “military” and
says that his military conversations were no concern of
the State Department.
August 1 The N.K. 7th Division departs Seoul,
but its artillery remains in the area; the force crosses
the Han River moving through Taejon and arrives at
Chinju about August 15.
Central Mountain area: The ROK 8th Division
loses the battle for Andong to the N.K. 12th Division.
During the brutal fighting for the strategic river town,
the North Koreans claim 1,500 ROK troops killed and
1,500 captured (proclaimed on a radio broadcast Au-
gust 3 that is transmitted to Japan and heard there),
and many vehicles. North Korean casualties are also
extremely high and include the divisional commander,
General Kim Mu Chong. Captured N.K. prisoners re-
late that one outfit, the 31st N.K. Regiment, sustained
600 troops killed and it is also reported that the air at-
tacks wiped out about 600 enemy troops. In addition,
eleven of the initial thirty enemy tanks have been de-
stroyed. Also, a battalion of the N.K. 12th Division’s ar-
tillery had expended its entire supply of ammunition,
compelling it to turn back and head for Tanyang.
In other activity, by dawn the 25th Division is relo-
cating to new positions south of Sangju; however, it
receives new instructions at about 1300. Eighth Army
August 1, 1950
orders the 25th Division to prepare to move to Sam-
nangjin, along the Naktong River, from where it can in-
tercept the enemy as it drives east, while simultane-
ously planning to attack westward. However, this
depletion of U.S. troops from the Central Front adds to
the burden of Eighth Army there. The expanding
enemy pressure, coupled with the redeployment of the
25th Division, mandates that Eighth Army pull back
across the Naktong River.
West Coast area: The 27th Regiment, 25th Divi-
sion, prepares to dig in at the Notch, southwest of
Chungam-ni, based on information gathered while re-
connoitering the area. But following a conversation
with the acting regimental S-3, Captain Elliott Cutler
(after daybreak), Colonel Michaelis senses that the 19th
Regiment, 24th Division, is about to withdraw from its
positions in the pass, thereby exposing the Much’on-ni
Road at its fork, giving the North Koreans easy access
to the southern route to Masan.
The North Koreans keep pressing and overpower the
19th Regiment. A flurry of activity occurs. Michaelis
heads for the command post of the 13th Field Artillery
west of Chungam-ni, from where he contacts Colonel
Moore by phone at his command post, east of
Much’on-ni. According to Colonel Michaelis, later at-
tested to by Major Jack J. Kron (executive officer of
13th Field Artillery), Moore informs Michaelis that the
Masan Road fork positions are untenable. Continuing,
according to Michaelis, Colonel Moore relates that the
19th Regiment is withdrawing to the Notch. Con-
cerned, Michaelis then tells Colonel Moore that the
19th should, upon falling back, prepare to defend the
northern route to Masan at the Notch (Chungam-ni).
This is to allow the 27th Regiment to move through
Masan and guard the southern route at Chindong-ni,
lest the North Korean forces advance unchallenged
along the southern road through Masan, enabling the
enemy to strike a killing blow against the Eighth Army.
Colonel Moore, according to Colonel Michaelis,
agrees with the strategy; however, later, Colonel Moore
cannot recall the phone conversation. Major Kron at-
tests to Michaelis’ story concerning the phone conver-
sation. By noon, having unsuccessfully tried to contact
division and Eighth Army, the 27th Regiment reverses
direction and moves to Chindong-ni. En route, while
passing through Masan, Colonel Michaelis encounters
the new command post of the 25th Division. After an-
other unsuccessful attempt to contact General Church
by phone, Michaelis gets through to Eighth Army
Headquarters, informing Colonel Landrum of the sit-
uation; Landrum agrees with Michaelis and authorizes
the move to block the south road to Masan. In turn,
Landrum notifies General Walker when he arrives back
at headquarters and General Church is then informed.
Church soon arrives at Michaelis’ positions and
meets with him in front of the village, instructing
Michaelis to deploy one battalion in the hills near the
low pass, exactly where they are speaking. The 2nd Bat-
talion, 27th Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel
Murch, gets the task. Company E deploys in front of
August 1, 1950 148

Korea situation 1 August 1950.

 149 August 1, 1950

An Eighth Army unit at port prepares to move out. The lead vehicle in the convoy is a 3/4 ton 4 by 4
weapons carrier. Other vehicles on the right are 2 1/2-ton trucks.

Pongam-ni, taking the point about ten miles west of
Chindong-ni, and the remainder of the battalion stands
about seven miles west of the town. The 1st Battalion,
27th Regiment, commanded by Colonel Check, which
is assigned to attack on the following morning, bivouacs
to the rear of the 2nd Battalion for the night.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, on
the northern road, upon orders from Colonel Moore,
has pulled back non-stop from its positions at the pass
to the Notch, arriving there about 1400. Colonel Rhea,
the commanding officer, remains at the pass with an ar-
mored car (M-20), offering protection for the with-
drawal. During the delay, enemy troops approach in a
U.S. jeep, but its two occupants expire after a short
burst of small arms fire and the jeep is repossessed, join-
ing the rear guard when it departs for the Notch.
Without an opportunity for rest, Colonel Rhea is
directed to reconnoiter the heights below the Notch,
prior to deploying the 1st Battalion. During the eve-
ning, his troops deploy on the Notch, assuming re-
sponsibility for it and the heights to the northwest
(right). The 1st Battalion’s deployment permits the
2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, commanded by Colo-
nel McGrail, which had already arrived at the Notch,
August 1, 1950 150

Top: Marine reinforcements prepare to depart by plane for Korea. Bottom: The USS Philippine Sea,
which had only arrived back in the U.S. on 10 June, embarks for Korea. While sailors jam her decks,
one navy wife watches as the vessel leaves port. The carrier arrives off Korea on 1 August.
 151
subsequent to its withdrawal from Chinju, to move to
the northern base of the pass, becoming regimental re-
serve.
Also, during the latter part of the afternoon, the 29th
Infantry’s 1st Battalion, commanded by Colonel Wil-
son, approaches Chungam-ni. The 29th will receive
orders at 2000 directing it to join the reconnaissance at-
tack on the following day. In conjunction, South Ko-
rean troops (TF Min) are entrusted responsibility for the
high ground southeast (left) of the Notch, but Colonel
Min’s force deploys too far to the east, creating a dev-
astating gap of more than one mile between it and the
19th Regiment at the Notch, which remains undiscov-
ered until it is too late.
Prior to departing the area, General Church sched-
ules a heavy reconnaissance mission for the following
day that will involve elements of the 27th and 19th
Regiments; each is to advance west from their positions
and then converge at the Masan Road fork at Much’on-
ni. During the evening, the troops of the 19th and 27th
Regiments at Chungam-ni and Chindong-ni respec-
tively exude jubilation when a platoon of medium Sher-
man tanks (Company A, 89th Medium Tank Battalion)
arrive at each location in time to join the scheduled at-
tack on the following morning.
In other activity, the North Koreans strike at the
flanks of Colonel Stephens’ force (21st and 34th Reg-
iments, 24th Division). The ROK troops under S.K.
Colonel Kim, deployed on both flanks, effectively repel
the assaults.
North Korea: On or about this day, the Soviets con-
vince the North Koreans to lay minefields at various
locations (east and west coasts) in North and South
Korea to hinder any possible U.N. amphibious inva-
sions, but the operation never rolls full steam.
Pusan Perimeter: The South Korean National Po-
lice are by now given total responsibility for guarding
all the railroad tunnels and bridges; contingents of vary-
ing sizes are posted at each remaining bridge and tun-
nel.
In other activity, at Taegu, four South Korean offi-
cers and 133 S.K. policemen volunteer to operate with
the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regiment, commanded
by Colonel Clainos. These policemen will participate
with the cavalry in the fighting at Triangulation Hill,
beginning on August 10. Later, more South Korean
troops will enjoin U.S. divisions. Also, the 2nd Infantry
Division lands at Pusan.
In Air Force activity, the 6147th Tactical Control
Squadron, Airborne, is established at Taegu. Also, 46
B-29s attached to the 22d and 92d Bombardment
Groups attack the Chosin Nitrogen Fertilizer Factory
at Hungnam.
In Naval activity, The USS Philippine Sea, com-
manded by Captain W.K. Goodney, which had arrived
in San Diego, California, subsequent to duty as an At-
lantic Fleet Carrier on June 10, 1950, arrives off Korea.
Following the unexpected outbreak of hostilities, the
Philippine Sea, expected to relieve the Valley Forge dur-
ing October 1950, had been rushed to the area ( July
August 2, 1950
5) to augment the U.S. air power. In conjunction,
CAG-11, commanded by Commander R.C. Vogel,
USN, had been ordered to depart prior to the ship’s
embarkment. The air contingent takes a crash course in
Hawaii, becoming more familiar with its jet planes be-
fore moving on to Korea.
In other activity, Eighth Army issues an operational
directive confirming the various verbal orders previ-
ously circulated among the units concerning the
planned withdrawal across the Naktong River. The di-
rective clarifies the points of redeployment along the
primary defensive lines of the Pusan Perimeter.
Also, the USS Badoeng Strait, unable to unload its air-
craft at Kobe, which lacks proper harbor facilities, re-
mains offshore, but forty-four of its Marine planes take
off and head for Itami Airfield, where they receive a
pre-combat check. On the following day, the remain-
ing twenty-six planes arrive at Itami from the carrier.
Also, Naval Forces Far East directs the USS Sicily (CVE
118) and the USS Badoeng Strait (CVE 116) and its
accompanying vessels to provide close-air support to
the U.N. troops on the ground in Korea.
Guam: Guam, claimed by the U.S. during 1898,
then lost during the initial portion of World War II
and recaptured in 1944, comes under civil rule; it will
be overseen by the Department of the Interior.
August 2 Western-Central area: From their po-
sitions on Masan Road forks, the U.S. 19th and 27th
Regiments prepare to launch their respective reconnais-
sance attacks toward Chinju along their designated
spurs of the Masan Road to locate the enemy (N.K.
6th Division) and converge at Much’on-ni where the
Masan Road forks.
The 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, commanded by
Lt. Colonel Gilbert Check, and its supporting artillery,
Battery A, 8th Field Artillery Battalion, shove off early.
Spearheaded by four Sherman tanks, each transport-
ing a portion of one platoon of infantry, the column
moves out of Chingong-ni at 0400, probing west along
the southern fork of the Masan Road, advancing to-
ward Much’on-ni. The 19th Regiment, in coordina-
tion with the 27th Regiment, launches its arm of the at-
tack from Chungam-ni, committing the 1st Battalion,
29th Regiment (attached to the 19th Regiment), com-
manded by Lt. Colonel Wesley Wilson.
Wilson’s command heads west along the northern
fork slightly after daybreak at 0615. Five Sherman tanks
take the point, trailed by four M-4 armored cars, each
transporting five men of C Company. A convoy of 22
trucks transporting the infantry and a complement of
several jeeps rolls out smoothly, trailing the armor.
However, the two separate attacking units encounter
totally different levels of opposition subsequent to de-
parture.
During the previous night, an unintentional wide
gap had opened on the left flank of the 19th Regiment,
between it and the ROK forces, which have strayed too
far to the left, permitting enemy infiltrators to ease un-
detected through the lines east of the Notch. These
August 2, 1950
troops, primarily snipers, creep in to the rear of some
American troops, eliminating five soldiers by shooting
them in the back of the head. Another contingent of
enemy infiltrators had silently penetrated through the
lines west of the Notch during the previous night and
afterwards they establish positions to spring an am-
bush.
Company B, 19th Infantry, following an exhausting
several days, ascends the western hill of the Notch dur-
ing the night of August 1, but pauses before reaching
the top, bivouacking there. During the pre-dawn hours,
while the men of Company B are still asleep, other
enemy intruders strike against them swiftly and silently,
stabbing several men, including the company com-
mander, with bayonets, and afterward force the remain-
der of the unit from the hill. These incidents unsettle
the area early and occur without the knowledge of the
two attack groups.
At the north fork, the first column to move out, the
1st Battalion 27th Regiment under Colonel Check, ad-
vances effortlessly before meeting the enemy, but that
is not the case with the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment,
when it moves out on the southern fork. Along the
northern fork, the 27th Regiment contingent moves
without incident for several miles until scouts at the
point, in advance of the lead platoon, stumble upon a
slumbering platoon of enemy troops, apparently in a
deep sleep that prevents them from hearing even the
rumble of the approaching tanks. The startled North
Koreans leap to their feet, toss their blankets and expe-
ditiously begin to sprint to safety. In unison, the U.S.
Pohang-dong, South Korea, August 1950.
152
infantrymen and the tanks commence firing. The
enemy platoon is wiped out, except for two soldiers
who are quickly captured. The column resumes its ad-
vance against some emerging resistance confined to
snipers and an occasional enemy patrol.
Around noon it reaches the Much’on-ni fork, where
it surprises another contingent of enemy troops, in-
cluding a recently arrived truck convoy laden with
equipment, ammunition and various supplies includ-
ing food and medicine. The startled truck drivers are
able to get some of the vehicles turned, and they speed
back toward Chinju, abandoning about ten of the ve-
hicles during the hasty evacuation. A group of F-81
planes swarming nearby spots the enemy convoy as it
is reversing direction on the summit of the pass. The pi-
lots attack and subsequently report that Colonel
Check’s unannounced appearance at the fork provided
the planes with an abundance of good targets, as many
other enemy vehicles in the area got caught in the open
after heading back to Chinju.
Nonetheless, more enemy resistance is building as
Check’s column moves beyond the fork, still anticipat-
ing a hook-up with Wilson’s column. At this time, Col-
onel Check has no way of knowing that the bulk of the
enemy, for which these supplies have arrived, has moved
parallel to the south fork toward Masan. But Check
decides to return his trucks, other than those required
for his artillery, to headquarters, rather than risk losing
them. It is becoming obvious that the resistance is
building and Colonel Check is convinced that if he en-
counters stiff opposition, his group can more easily fight
 153
Marines aboard the USS Pickaway arrive in Korea.
its way out without the encumbrance of extra vehicles.
The advance continues, with the infantry trailing the
tanks, toward the base of the Chinju Pass.
Meanwhile, Colonel Wilson’s 1st Battalion, 29th
Regiment, which began moving at 0615, is not mak-
ing much progress. The tip of the column advances to
its point of departure, the Notch, at about 0715, pass-
ing through the defensive positions of the 1st Battalion,
19th Regiment. Soon after, the regiment enters an un-
expected hornets’ nest. Colonel Rhea’s battalion, dis-
persed defensively throughout the hills at the Notch, is
engaged in an ongoing battle with the enemy. The
complex situation becomes compounded as the con-
voy rolls by, totally unexpected by Colonel Rhea.
The reconnaissance platoon, moving along the south
fork below the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, need not
probe further. It inadvertently rams into the enemy at-
tack as it unfolds. Enemy fire brings the armor to a
temporary halt soon after it passes the crest of the Notch
and begins descending the south slope, but most of the
convoy has yet to ascend the incline to the summit.
Nonetheless, Colonel Wilson, upon hearing the gunfire,
bolts from his jeep, which is toward the latter part of the
column, and sprints toward the peak of the hill where
he meets Colonel Rhea, who offers some advice to Wil-
son: “You better be careful — that ground down by the
pond is enemy territory. My men were fighting with
them when your tanks came by.”
While Colonel Wilson is still in the high ground,
the tanks resume the advance prudently and encounter
enemy infantrymen who are creeping up the gully ad-
jacent to the road about 100 yards down the south
slope. The Shermans swivel their turrets and respond
with rapid machine gun fire, while continuing to ad-
vance cautiously. The effort prompts some of the enemy
troops to scatter for the thicket, but several menacing
August 2, 1950
machine guns and mortar crews remain unscathed. The
tank at the point, advancing more than 400 yards down
the slope without closing its hatch, sustains a murder-
ous blow from a single mortar round which kills the
entire crew.
By this time about thirteen vehicles have begun the
descent. Immediately following the loss of the lead
tank, a shell from an antitank weapon strikes one of
the trailing trucks, setting it ablaze and bringing the
stunned column to yet another halt. Immediately, the
troops begin jumping from the stalled vehicles, but
three enemy heavy machine guns, entrenched about
200 yards down the south slope, are streaming shells
into their ranks, especially the 1st Platoon of Company
C. As the other soldiers in the stalled vehicles bolt to ex-
pected safety in the gullies, they instead encounter wait-
ing enemy troops, igniting close-quartered fighting.
Those Americans captured during these first moments
of battle are used as human shields. The North Kore-
ans prod the Americans up the slope like lambs for
slaughter after first roping their hands together.
Colonel Wilson, still in the heights slightly southwest
of the Notch, observes the debacle, again caused by
poor communications; Colonel Rhea, defending the
Notch with his battalion, had no previous knowledge
of the reconnaissance attack until the tanks passed into
his lines. A written order from the previous day detail-
ing the attack never reached him. Colonel Wilson, in-
tent on salvaging the battle, remains conspicuously in
harm’s way while restoring calm and regrouping his
troops west of the Notch. He orders the 62-man con-
tingent of Company B, 29th Regiment, to deploy
alongside the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment. As the
enemy fire continues to rain on the U.S. troops, now
scattered all about, the locations of the enemy machine
guns are discovered. Recoilless rifle teams get a focused
August 2, 1950
bead on them and terminate their fire by either de-
stroying the guns or forcing the gunners to escape the
heat of fire.
However, the recoilless rifle team, positioned west
of the Notch, sustains a deadly incoming round that
kills three crewmen. The lone survivor, Sergeant Evert
E. “Moose” Hoffman, refuses to relent. Despite the
tragic loss of his three buddies, he remains tenaciously
at his gun, spewing shells toward the enemy through-
out the remainder of the day. Other similar individual
acts of courage also emerge during the melee as the
fighting extends from the road up both slopes.
Meanwhile, Colonel Ned Moore, at the initial stage
of the engagement, moves to the west side of the Notch,
remaining at the 1st Battalion 19th Regiment Com-
mand Post there to control the defensive operations.
The elements of the 1st Battalion (Company B, 29th In-
fantry), directed by Col. Wilson to spread out within
the positions of the 1st Battalion, 19th Infantry, on the
west side of the Notch, become entwined and their po-
sitions are precariously perched. The infiltrators, which
had earlier driven Company B from the west slope,
enjoy uninhibited maneuverability to lay down numer-
ous crossfires, slicing into several units. This savage en-
filade, striking from the rear and flank, inflicts near
paralysis on the west slope; Company C, 29th Regi-
ment, still staggered by the death of many of the men
of its 1st Platoon, lost when the convoy stalled, man-
ages to advance to a spur from where it springs a pow-
erful attack, terminating the deadly enemy fire by driv-
ing the North Koreans from the hill.
Twelve men of Company C lose their lives during
the attack, but it appears possible, according to Colo-
nel Wilson, that erroneous friendly fire from the Amer-
ican positions cost as many as six of the deaths. The
grim fighting on the west side of the Notch tails off to-
ward the afternoon, while the North Koreans disen-
gage their frontal assault to set the stage for their pre-
ferred killing blow, envelopment from the flanks. Later
during the lull, Company A, 19th Infantry, ventures
down the road toward the immobilized vehicles, exter-
minating several enemy troops who had remained in
the vicinity. The contingent advances about 100 yards
past the destroyed lead tank and establishes a road-
block, in coordination with other troops that scour the
area, salvaging vehicles and recovering the dead and
wounded. The remaining troops of Company A, 29th
Regiment, move out to comb the forward ridge abut-
ting the pass to purge the enemy.
In the meantime, tenacious fighting continues on
the east side of the Notch. Back near Much’on-ni, the
1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, which has passed the
road fork junction, continues heading west, but it be-
gins encountering more enemy strength as it pushes to-
ward the Chinju Pass.
On the east side of Notch, the Americans receive an
equal share of fierce enemy fire and fare no better than
their counterparts on the west side. The existing gap
between the ROK troops and the 19th Regiment in-
creases the danger and fuels the confusion as fierce com-
154
bat ensues in the high ground throughout the day. Dur-
ing the afternoon, enemy mortar barrages score hard, in-
flicting additional casualties. At one point, the ROK
troops are hit by enemy and friendly fire, pushing them
from their positions. Hastily, they move east through the
valley toward Chungam-ni to preserve their unit from
decimation.
Colonel Moore, observing the area from his vantage
point at the battalion command post, spots an uniden-
tified group of troops moving east along the railroad
tracks. He directs Captain Elliott Cutler (Regimental
S-3) to order elements of the 2nd Battalion, 19th Reg-
iment (reserve force), to speed through the valley and
intercept the force. The column is intercepted, but it is
Colonel Min’s troops (Task Force Min) attempting to
escape from untenable positions. The 3rd Battalion,
29th Infantry (attached to 19th Regiment) had been
deployed near the ROK troops and later, Company B,
29th Infantry (attached to 19th Regiment) advanced
to the hills to help stem the rising enemy tide.
Soon after, Communist forces spring from a railroad
tunnel to the immediate front of Company B. It holds
the line rigidly, and in the process receives rapid sup-
port from Company F, 19th Regiment, which com-
mences a rousing counterattack, bashing into the ad-
vancing enemy and hurling them back in retreat.
At Chinju Pass, the enemy is positioned strongly
with elements of the N.K. 6th Division. At the base, in-
fantry, including snipers, are scattered strategically
amidst the shallow hills to forestall any advance ele-
ments that might approach. These contingents are
braced by antitank weapons, anticipating a lucrative af-
ternoon. Colonel Check’s column encroaches the en-
trance to the pass, his tanks transporting infantry at
the point. Abruptly, the tanks come under a volley of
fire. Snipers to the north of the column deliver a series
of shots that nearly singe the ears of the infantry. The
troops atop the tanks unhesitatingly jump toward the
rear of the armor to afford themselves cover from where
they can return fire.
Additional incoming fire originating from antitank
weapons takes out the second tank in line, killing its
gunner. To the immediate rear of the knocked out tank,
Lieutenant Herman Norrell, the tank platoon leader,
witnesses the devastating blow and simultaneously spots
the positions of the perpetrators: three antitank guns,
entrenched about 75 yards away to the right of the col-
umn. Before Norrell can retaliate, additional shells from
the same point of the initial fire pummel his tank, strik-
ing it three times and setting it afire. As Norrell leaps
from the burning inferno, raking machine gun fire and
shrapnel inflict wounds upon him.
Spontaneously, the Americans are returning fire and
in quick time, the artillerymen face off with the 76-
mm antitank weapons. After a short engagement, the
enemy guns become mute. Meanwhile, the infantry
lunges from its positions and seizes the enemy guns. A
large gathering of dead N.K. troops is also sprawled
about the area, and there are some others who give a
poor performance of feigning death.
 155
Colonel Check, having no contact with battalion head-
quarters since his departure, had previously sent messen-
gers back to Colonel Michaelis to inform him of the sit-
uation; however, the Communists had sealed the road in
the rear. The messengers never reach Chindong-ni.
Colonel Check remains out of communication with
headquarters, but his command is still energized, ready
to fight its way forward. During the blazing burst of
initial fire, seven additional tankers had been wounded.
Check requests volunteers to operate the two bruised
tanks. Obligingly, bulldozer operators receive a dy-
namic crash course on driving a tank, and several vol-
unteer riflemen assume their temporary duty as tank
machine gunners. Soon after, the advance resumes with
its full complement of four tanks. Steadily but slowly,
they gain several hundred tough yards.
Then at about 1700 or shortly thereafter, a friendly
aircraft appears overhead, depositing an uninspiring
update for Colonel Check from Col. Michaelis. The
note is short but obviously to the point. “Return Road
Cut behind you.... Lead with tanks if possible. Will
give you artillery support when within range.” The 1st
Battalion breaks off its ongoing fight with the enemy
and initiates a return trek toward its friendly artillery.
The two damaged tanks will not start. After being
towed by the two fully operational tanks, the two con-
tentious ones move out, leading the column, and the
others hold the rear, trailing the artillery and mortar
vehicles.
The column receives an air umbrella for added insu-
lation. Planes follow overhead until dusk. However, the
endeavor does not begin smoothly, as enemy gunners
bring the column under fire as it moves out. The U.S. in-
fantry, walking astride the vehicles but nudging the ridges
along the road, returns fire vociferously. The column,
still beyond the Much’on-ni Road fork as the sun begins
setting, prompts Colonel Check to collect his troops and
board them on the vehicles to preclude disaster. The col-
umn continues fighting as it moves and there is some
apprehension about the enemy strength at the fork.
The crammed vehicles, resembling overcrowded ar-
mored ferries, race through what might become a sea of
fire, but sporadically they pause momentarily, enabling
the infantry to spring from the vehicles when neces-
sary to eliminate enemy machine guns posted along the
route. Eventually, the weary troops reach the protec-
tive fire of the 8th Field Artillery Battalion’s 155-mm
howitzers, which rivet both sides of the road with their
version of an iron picket fence.
At about midnight (Aug. 2-3), subsequent to spend-
ing a protracted day with elements of the N.K. 6th Di-
vision, Colonel Check’s battalion reaches Chindong-
ni, having sustained thirty casualties during the arduous
mission; but it has extracted a high toll from its oppo-
nent while avoiding checkmate.
Also, during the day, while the 1st Battalion is slug-
ging along the south fork of the Masan Road, an enemy
contingent estimated at about one battalion moves in
behind the column and attacks Company E’s positions
at Pongam-ni. The company had remained behind to
August 2, 1950
defend the departure line. The 2nd Battalion rushes
reinforcements to the scene to support E Company.
The reinforcements arrive on a timely basis and support
besieged Company E while it successfully fights its way
back to Kogan-ni, three miles to the east.
In the meantime, another enemy contingent pounces
on one Platoon of Company A, 65th Engineer Com-
bat Battalion, which is posted along the Kosong-Sa-
chon Road, south of Chindong-ni. The overwhelmed
unit sustains tremendous losses, and the bulk of its
equipment is decimated. Yet other enemy contingents
encroach the positions of the 8th Field Artillery at
Chindong-ni during the afternoon bringing it under
fire. The 1st Battalion is noticeably absent, apparently
giving the North Koreans the impression that the 27th
regimental headquarters, lacking infantry, will be an
easy seizure. An attack to overrun the village is launched
on the following morning.
In other activity, an advance contingent of the 25th
Division departs Poksong-dong for Samnangjin, but
en route, all elements of the division are rerouted to
Masan, subsequent to a conference between General
Walker and General Kean at Taegu. The diverted 25th
Division moves along the primary supply route, ma-
neuvering through a steady stream of opposing traffic
heading north to the central front, giving Army G-3
operations officers a nightmare. The logistics of keep-
ing the unbroken chain of supplies moving north while
trying to maintain an efficient path weaving south re-
quires every available G-3 officer to ensure success.
During the entire journey, officers are posted at every
suspected point of gridlock congestion, and others must
ensure that the expected trains are on location at Waeg-
wan, from where the division is to be transported by rail
to Masan.
The advance elements of the 25th Division com-
mand post arrive by convoy at Masan at 2115, con-
cluding a day-long drive. Meanwhile, the equipment of
the 25th Division is loaded aboard railcars throughout
the night (Aug. 2–3). The troops begin to depart at
about 0600, trailed by the equipment trains. General
Walker, aware that he has dangerously trimmed his
central front defenses, expects to get away with the
gamble and ensure the southwest front in the process.
Southwestern sector: The 34th and 21st Regiments,
24th Division, receive orders from Eighth Army to
cross the Naktong River. Soon after the orders are re-
ceived, Colonel Stephens dispatches the 34th Regiment
to the vicinity of Yongsan.
Meanwhile, the 21st Regiment and the accompany-
ing South Korean troops hold their positions on the
opposite side of the bank, holding the enemy at bay.
During the evening, engineers destroy the Naktong
River bridge that links Ch’ogye with Changnyong, the
location of 24th Division headquarters. The 21st Reg-
iment departs during the night with its final elements
moving across the other bridge (Koryong-Taegu),
twenty air miles north, at about 0045 on the 3rd, trailed
by the 14th Engineering Combat Battalion within a
couple of hours later.
August 2, 1950 156

Colonel Stephens remains behind with the S.K. 17th
Regiment during its rear guard duty, departing with it
at about 0630 (Aug. 3). At its positions above the 24th
Division, the 1st Cavalry also receives orders from
Eighth Army to move to the east side of the Naktong
River. The cavalry, deployed in the Chirye-Kumch’on
vicinity, begins withdrawing to Waegwan, completing
the operation by dusk on August 3. The 5th Cavalry
Regiment, last of the main contingents to cross the
river, encounters a stiff skirmish with the enemy. One
battalion is nearly wiped out.
In other activity, to the north and east of Waegwan,
the South Koreans are initiating movement in concert
with the U.S., withdrawing across the Naktong,

Top: Shortly after debarking at Pusan on 2 August, the U.S. Marines hold in place at a railway station await-
ing orders to move northward. Bottom: The 1st Provisional Marine Brigade arrives in Pusan on 2 August.
 157
U.S. troops examine Pershing medium tanks that have been loaded on rail flatcars to make them secure
for transit.
encountering some severe opposition. The N.K. 12th
Division engages the S.K. 8th Division around An-
dong, and the S.K. 1st Division encounters fierce resist-
ance north of the Naktong River.
Pusan: The USS Henrico, having completed the
voyage across the Pacific alone, finally makes visual
contact with the convoy in the Tsushima Straits during
the morning hours. The convoy transporting the 1st
Provisional Marine Brigade arrives off Pusan during
the evening, with the leading vessel entering the harbor
slightly after 1700.
Soon after, as the ship creeps toward the dock, the
Marines on deck are serenaded with a “tinny and tone-
deaf ” version of the “Marine Hymn,” played by a South
Korean band. Some of the U.S. Army troops along the
dock and the Marines aboard ship trade their usual sar-
donic salutations, with some of the seasoned antago-
nists (on both sides) visibly pleased that the encounter
verifies the continuance of the tradition. As dusk ar-
rives, the dock area becomes over-animated as man and
machine begin a flurry of bustling activity lasting
August 2, 1950
throughout the night, guaranteeing little or no sleep.
Amidst the clanking of the cranes and the roaring of
the engines, some giant searchlights focus on supply
areas, while the Marine brigade’s troops debark and at-
tempt to receive their equipment, food and ammuni-
tion. Combined, 9,400 tons of brigade supplies are un-
loaded, the greatest portion thereof relinquished to the
Army Quartermaster section in Pusan and absorbed
into the general pool. Four officers and 100 enlisted
men of the Combat Service Detachment, under Major
Thomas J. O’Mahoney, USMC, are designated rear
echelon and will be based in Pusan to handle adminis-
trative and logistical duties.
Meanwhile, General Craig orders a briefing at 2100
aboard the USS Clymer, for brigade staff, Lt. Colonel
Raymond Murray, commanding officer, 5th Marines,
battalion commanders and personnel from supporting
units. At present, the Marines know they are heading
west, but the specific mission is still unknown. Even-
tually, at 2325, General Craig is informed by Colonel
Landrum that the Marine Brigade, as ordered by
August 3, 1950
An Eighth Army artillery unit fortifies a position for a 105-mm howitzer.
General Walker, would proceed to Changwon and re-
vert to Eighth Army reserve.
Early on the following morning, the Marines return
to their ships to receive a hot and hearty breakfast prior
to moving out. Also, elements of the 5th Regimental
Combat Team debark at Pusan; the 2nd Battalion,
commanded by Lt. Colonel John Throckmorton,
moves to Chindong-ni and spreads out on a spine of
high ground descending from Sobuk-san, less than two
miles west of the town.
Hill 342 (Yaban-san and Fox Hill), the highest point
of elevation occupied by the 2nd Battalion, is covered
by one platoon of Company G. At this point, the 2nd
Battalion is poised to support the 27th Regiment.
Posted to its (5th RCT) immediate front at Kogan-ni
is the 2nd Battalion, 27th Infantry. The ridge on which
Throckmorton’s command is deployed stretches north-
west to even higher ground for a distance of about three
miles until it terminates at Sobuk-san (Hill 738),
thought to be occupied by elements of the N.K. 6th
Division.
In Air Force activity, the 374 Troop Carrier Group
(TCG), in response to urgent requests from Eighth
Army, undertakes a massive operation to transport sup-
plies and equipment from Ashiya to Korea. About
300,000 pounds are moved by air in a 24-hour period,
a record setting operation.
— In the United States: At Fort Bragg, history re-
peats itself. The I Corps is activated, with General
Coulter as its commanding officer. Ironically, the I
Corps and the IX Corps had both been essential parts
of Eighth Army in Japan until the Truman Administra-
158
tion and Congress’ military cutbacks reduced the ranks
of the armed services.
A small group of staff officers and General Coulter
will embark by air for Korea on August 13. The re-
mainder of the staff will arrive in Korea on September
6. The IX Corps will be activated on August 10. The I
Corps previously had its headquarters in Kyoto (24th
and 25th Divisions). The IX Corps had its headquar-
ters in Sendai (1st Cavalry and 7th Infantry Divisions).
— In Japan: Four helicopters and four light obser-
vation planes (VMO-6) depart Itami for Pusan, Korea.
The additional four light observation planes of VMO-
6 remain in Japan to be used for parts when necessary.
Two of the helicopters, the remainder of VMO-6 and
Air Support Section move to Chinhae to operate from
its airfield. The additional two helicopters fly to Chang-
won to support the ground operations there. In con-
junction, the Air Support Section (MTACS-2) begins
establishing communications with the carriers USS
Sicily and Badoeng Strait. By August 5, the air-ground
operation is prepared.
August 3 General Walker, having earlier in
the day repeated his previous orders to “maintain con-
tact with the enemy,” places more emphasis on his in-
tent during the afternoon with yet another directive:
“Daily counterattacks will be made by all units....
Commanders will take immediate action to insure that
these and previous instructions to this effect are car-
ried out without delay.” Continuing, Walker directs:
“Counterattack is a decisive ELM (element) of the de-
fense.”
 159 August 3, 1950

Western Coastal area: In the 25th Division sector, the
27th Regiment’s headquarters remains at Chindong-ni,
a small town sitting along the south coastal road (dirt)
where mountain tributaries extending from the north
converge on the Korean Strait. Although elements of the
regiment had been strongly tested on the previous day,
the area has enjoyed a fairly quiet night — maybe too
calm. The tranquil mood is short lasting. Unbeknownst
to the sleeping men of the 27th Regiment, one battal-
ion of the ever-cunning enemy is closing toward their

A tank crew loads 76-mm shells into a Sherman medium tank M4A3 at a depot at the rear. The tank had
been there for repair before returning to the front.
August 3, 1950
positions with the intent of establishing a road-
block.
With a hushed motion, the enemy unit moves east
of the north-south road along a rough ridge that ends
abruptly at a towering cliff that extends high atop the
indented command post, a schoolhouse which is pre-
cariously tucked under the jagged ridge. From here,
the coiled elements of the 14th Regiment, N.K. 6th
Division, prepare to spring into action. The operations
of the mission are controlled from Sobuk-san, north of
the objective. The regiment’s other two battalions had
swung away from the unit farther east to assume posi-
tions and establish additional roadblocks nearer to
Masan.
In the schoolyard, adjacent to the command post,
lay the restful howitzers of Company A (11th Field Ar-
tillery Bn.); in close proximity, the weapons of the 8th
Field Artillery Battalion stand ready. It had been the
8th Artillery Bn. that had provided a powerful and pro-
tracted iron umbrella to guide the 1st Battalion as it
sprinted home along the south fork road on the previ-
ous night. Dispersed in the same area is the exhausted
1st Battalion, 35th Regiment, under Colonel Check,
which had sprawled out near the command post imme-
diately upon returning from its adventurous reconnais-
sance patrol.
Guards have been posted around the perimeter
throughout the night to ensure against intruders. But
ostensibly, some of the guards had become derelict, en-
dangering the command by sleeping at their post. In ad-
dition, several sentinels at other outposts assume that
the troops observed in the shadows are friendly ROK
soldiers, known to be posted nearby. The conduct of
some of the troops on the graveyard watch thrusts the
regiment into a gruesome contest for survival.
While the officers of the 35th Regimental staff are
just completing breakfast in the command post, the
surprise attack is launched. Enemy small arms fire, in-
tended to signal the attack, concentrates on the com-
mand post. Synchronized with the initial fire, the
enemy charges from their positions on the east ridge, but
the first troops to descend from the heights are U.S.
soldiers, some of whom complete the trek without their
boots. Unquestionably, the suddenness of the attack
causes disorganization; however, Colonels Michaelis
and Check, bolstered by no-nonsense NCOs, set about
transforming the turmoil into a disciplined defense.
During this endeavor, some troops are jerked from
their prone positions under some stationary jeeps and
trucks and propped into fighting positions. The fight-
ing on the east hill ensues heavily until around 1300.
During the remainder of the day, the North Koreans
utilize regular civilian telephones, affording the U.S.
signalmen (and S.K. interpreters) the opportunity to
continually intercept and eavesdrop on the conversa-
tions as they are diverted through the regimental
switchboard.
The North Koreans are themselves startled subse-
quent to commencing the attack, as they quickly en-
counter infantry they had not anticipated. Company
160
A, 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment convincingly bolts to-
ward the enemy-occupied hill east of the command
post, driving confidently up the slope. Two enemy ma-
chine gun crews, manning positions on the summit,
assert their tenacity, pouring fire toward advancing
Company A. The ascending troops advance undaunted,
seizing more tenable terrain from where their sharp-
shooters, using M1 rifles, wipe out both machine gun
crews, terminating the enemy machine gun fire.
The commanding officer of A Company, Captain
Logan Weston, who led the attack, receives a wound in
the leg. Weston declines evacuation and instead gets
some treatment by a medic before he resumes his par-
ticipation in the slugfest. Afterwards, Weston becomes
wounded two more times while leading his command
to seize the high ground.
Once the crest is taken, the supporting guns of the
recoilless rifles and the mortars begin sending some
heavy metal into the positions of the North Koreans.
The new occupants of the summit easily locate some of
the enemy positions. The coordinates are given to the
artillerymen and after some range adjustments, the
North Koreans are serenaded by the howitzers with
salvos of white phosphorus shells.
The 1st Battalion handily repulses the attack. The
commanding officer of the North Koreans, determined
to take Chindong-ni, commits a new force to over-
come the defenders by diverting one of the other bat-
talions, scheduled to operate closer to Masan. A con-
tingent estimated to be at minimum battalion strength
races south from the direction of Haman. As the con-
voy reaches a point about 1,000 yards away, it comes to
a halt to unload the reinforcements. The activity is
spotted by Lt. Colonel August Terry Jr., who coinciden-
tally is the commanding officer of the 8th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, self-designated chairman of the wel-
coming committee. In cadence with the quick step of
the troops as they excitedly exit the vehicles, the how-
itzers roar, accelerating the pace. Rather than attack,
the enemy reinforcements advance hurriedly toward
the hills. The threat evaporates. Colonel Check’s 1st
Battalion, 27th Regiment, which had been exhausted,
somehow reaches down for a powerful second wind to
beat back the attack and retain the regimental perime-
ter intact.
The successful defense of Chindong-ni, attributed
in great part to the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment’s sur-
prise appearance, creates additional problems for the
North Koreans. Of the additional two battalions that
had broken away from the force committed against
Chindong-ni, one had to be reattached to reinforce the
failed attack. Also, the 15th Regiment, N.K. 6th Divi-
sion, poised for an attack against Masan, cancels the
assault because of the unsuccessful attack at Chindong-
ni. Nevertheless, its troops penetrate the heights south-
west of Masan. Since the inception of fighting against
American troops on July 27 at Hadong, the N.K. 6th
Division, which has moved at a swift pace, has sus-
tained massive casualties, depleting its strength by
about one-half. Subsequent to the intensely fought
 161
battles around the Notch, the enemy pauses to prepare
for the next step toward seizing Masan.
Meanwhile, the U.N. forces prepare to further for-
tify their defenses along the left flank of Eighth Army,
which is forming the new defensive line, the Pusan
Perimeter.
In the 5th Regimental Combat Team’s sector, at Hill
342 (Fox Hill) behind the positions of the 27th Regi-
ment, an enemy contingent attacks during the morn-
ing, dislodging the platoon, which had been occupying
the crest. Later during the night, Company F mounts
a fierce counterattack that regains the ground. Company
F holds the hill until relieved by the 5th Marines. How-
ever, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Regimental Combat Team,
again comes under assault on the night of the 6th, the
eve of the scheduled start of the U.S. offensive. In other
activity, the 25th Division completes its move from
Waegwan to Masan in an unprecedented time of 36
hours. General Walker relates that the 150-mile “his-
tory breaking maneuver” was responsible for the success-
ful defense of Pusan. However, he also noted that it
could not have happened if the North Koreans had
launched a full attack against the Kumch’on front while
the 25th Division was navigating the lone highway
through Kumch’on.
In other activity, General Craig, USMC, and Lt.
Colonel Stewart, USMC, arrive from Pusan at Masan
by helicopter to confer with Generals Walker, Kean
and Barth in response to a request of Craig. General
Walker agrees to provide the Marine brigade with
South Korean Army recruits to be utilized as scouts,
interpreters and rear guards. General Walker orders
General Craig to have the brigade ready for combat
subsequent to the evening of the 5th.
In the 24th Division sector, following the successful
overnight crossing of the Naktong by the 21st and 34th
Regiments and the ROK troops (17th Regiment), ele-
ments of the 3rd Engineer Combat Battalion attempt
to detonate the Koryong-Taegu bridge at 0715, but it
remains standing. It is successfully blown later during
the night.
Also, west of Masan, at the Chungam-ni Notch,
the 35th Regiment, 25th Division, relieves the 19th
Regiment, 24th Division. The 19th Regiment departs
heading northeast toward Changnyong to divisional
headquarters, arriving there on the 4th. The 19th
Regiment, which has been in Korea for less than 25
days, is experiencing severe supply problems, including
massive shortages of hand grenades and mortar shells,
but in addition there is a near total absence of uni-
forms. In addition, the regiment has lost about one-
third of its 2 1/2-ton trucks and one-half of its 3/4-ton
trucks; it still possesses a mere 20 percent of its 1/4-ton
trucks.
Also, the 1st Cavalry Division relocates to the east
side of the Naktong River. The rear guard of the 1st
Battalion, 8th Cavalry, which had been manning posi-
tions southwest of the Waegwan Bridges along the
Songju Road to hinder the enemy advance, is to ad-
vance across the bridge just prior to its demolition, but
August 3, 1950
it becomes impossible to halt the unending line of
refugees attempting to cross with the cavalry.
General Gay, who had retained sole responsibility
for ordering the destruction of the Waegwan Road and
railroad bridges, is faced with a dilemma. Each time
the cavalry contingent moves onto the span, the
refugees are there, preventing its destruction. Finally
after several unsuccessful attempts to clear the bridge,
the cavalry is told to head back to the west side and
block the refugees and then upon signal to dash across
to the east bank. This tactic also fails, as the civilians also
begin running. Ultimately, at about sundown, General
Gay, convinced that he has no more alternatives, or-
ders the bridges blown. The reluctant decision costs the
lives of several hundred refugees who are on the bridge
when it collapses.
Pusan: At 0600, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade
heads by truck and rail for Masan, where it is placed in
Eighth Army reserve. Thanks to the cooperation be-
tween the Army and Marine General Chidester, fifty
additional trucks and accompanying Army drivers
transport elements of the Marine Brigade. The tanks,
heavy equipment and vehicles over 2 1/2-ton capacity
are moved by flat cars. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
commanded by Lt. Colonel George Newton, arrives at
the Changwon area at about 1400 and deploys defen-
sively about one mile outside (west) of town, along the
Changwon-Masan Road, to afford protection for the
remainder of the Marine Brigade. The vanguard is the
first to experience the memorable trip along the slim
and primitive serpentine roads, which provide the
Marines incessant bumps and jolts combined with the
constant gush of dust launched to the rear by the rolling
tires of the trucks.
The Marines, plastered with the grayish grime of dust,
arrive at their destination resembling galloping gray
ghosts. The Marines traveling by rail in antiquated trains
containing tiny and uncomfortable wooden seats en-
counter an equally unusual ride, as the train is constantly
stopping suddenly without cause. The trip is further
punctuated by the agonizing scent emerging from the
rice paddies that have been inundated with fertilizer.
Craig had received orders to establish positions in
Changwon, but heavy enemy activity about six miles
away west of Masan convinces him to establish positions
outside of the town. By 1600, all combat and support
contingents except one platoon of tanks arrive in the
vicinity of Changwon; the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
establishes positions in the heights to the left of the
Changwon-Masan Road, relieving the 1st Battalion,
which then extends its line deeper along the high ridge
on the right flank.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, commanded by Lt.
Colonel Harold Roise, deploys on a strategic hill amidst
a large rice paddy (south of the MSR) extending be-
tween the town and the 3rd Battalion. General Craig es-
tablishes his command post in a small hollow sheltered
by some small hills on the fringes of Changwon. The
command post is defended by the engineer company
and headquarters components; tank platoons and the
August 3, 1950
artillery of Colonel Ransom Wood’s artillery battalion
are also scattered within the perimeter.
At about 2200 there is some premature activity — a
rifle shot is fired against an invisible enemy, creating
nervousness among many of the untried troops who
believe the command post is under assault. The clang-
ing of rifle shot increases as the triggers are pulled in re-
action to the swaying of bushes in the darkness, which
are mistaken as enemy figures. By about midnight two
machine guns join the wasteful duel near the command
post; however, the nervousness has spread to the posi-
tions of the 5th Marines, causing more problems. One
man in the 2nd Battalion is shot and in the 1st Battal-
ion sector, two casualties occur, one in a mixup during
a challenge and another when a weapon fires acciden-
tally.
Eventually, by about 0300, following some colorful
expletives by the irritated NCOs, the green troops are
persuaded that they have been firing at thin air. At
dawn on the 4th, General Craig, subsequent to a rest-
less night, calls in the particular leaders from where the
majority of firing occurred and lays down the law, pro-
claiming that such activity will not be tolerated; it
doesn’t reoccur.
Following the peculiar but predictable incident near
the command post on the night of the 3rd, the remain-
ing time at Changwon is tranquil except for one inci-
dent concerning some enemy encroachment on the 4th;
seven unidentified people (using radios) are detected
on the crest of a mountain, spotting the positions of
the Marines. One platoon speeds toward its location
to eliminate the problem, but the enemy troops escape.
Nonetheless, it is another learning process for the
Marines. The steep climb in the Korean heat causes ca-
sualties.
Marine helicopters move to the crest, setting a com-
bat precedent by delivering water and rations to the
troops there; then the choppers evacuate those troops
suffering with the most severe cases of heat prostration,
initiating the first air evacuation of Marine casualties in
Korea.
The Marine Brigade is attached to the U.S. 25th Di-
vision on August 6. Initially, there is some animosity
between those soldiers already in Korea and the new
Two U.S. Sherman M-26 tanks hold positions in front of a destroyed South Korean village.
162
Marine arrivals for several reasons, including the belief
by some that the Marines always receive too much press
coverage. Another cause of the discontent is the man-
ner in which the Marines have come ashore with their
usual haughtiness and conspicuously brash “esprit de
corps.”
The Marine Brigade is enduring the same hardships
as its counterparts in the Army, including grave short-
ages of manpower; the 1st Provisional Brigade’s three
battalions of the 5th Marines are composed of just two
rifle companies each, rather than the necessary three;
one heavy weapons company is also attached. How-
ever, the bulk of its officers and about 65 percent of
the noncommissioned officers enter Korea having
gained their combat experience in the Pacific, against
the Japanese. This painfully gathered expertise will pay
grand dividends at the front lines. The inter-service
dispute between the troops in the field will dissipate
once the Marines enter the fight and prove their met-
tle. The perceived condescending attitude of the
Marines by the soldiers is transformed to respect, and
the “attitude” of the Marines gradually becomes conta-
gious as the two services galvanize to thwart the foe.
When the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade departs
Pusan, the troops carry their weapons, ammunition,
pack and rations, enabling extra mobility.
In Air Force activity, the 18th FBG establishes head-
quarters in Taegu to enlarge the F-51 operations In ad-
dition, SA-16 amphibious rescue planes initiate oper-
ations off the coast of Korea this day. The SA-16 planes
have the capacity to discover and retrieve downed U.S.
pilots.
In Naval activity, Navy and Marine commanders
have determined that VMF 214 and VMF 323 will be
operating off carriers to ensure maximum operating
ability. Today, subsequent to one day of brush-up
flights, VMF 214, commanded by Lt. Colonel Walter
Lischeid, arrives from Japan on the USS Sicily. At 1630,
the carrier is armed and refueled and the first Marine
offensive action of the conflict is initiated as fighter
planes ascend from the carrier and strike Chinju and
Sinban-ni, first with rockets and incendiary-bombs,
followed by strafing runs, introducing the corps to the
enemy.
 163 August 3, 1950

A Sherman medium tank (M4A1) with a dozer attachment.

Meanwhile, two other planes depart the carrier Sicily
for Taegu to afford the aviators a briefing on the over-
all situation in Korea. Admiral Ruble is aboard the Ba-
doeng Strait, having been relieved as commander, Naval
Air Japan. His Task Group 96.8, Carrier Division 15,
is reunited about one month after leaving San Diego.
The Badoeng Strait is escorted by the USS Endicott
(DMS-35), commanded by Commander John C. Jolly,
and the USS Taussig (DD-746), commanded by Com-
mander William C. Meyer; the Sicily is escorted by the
August 4, 1950
USS Kyes (DD-787), commanded by Commander Fran
M. Christiansen, and the USS Doyle (DMS-34), com-
manded by Commander Charles H. Momsen, Jr.
— In the United States: The final nine GCI
squadrons of the Marine Organized Aviation Reserve re-
ceive orders to report to El Toro to bolster the 1st Ma-
rine Aircraft Wing, commanded by Major General
Field Harris. Also, Fleet Marine Force Pacific orders
the 1st Marine Division to dispatch ten officers and
290 enlisted men, by airlift, to join the 1st Provisional
Marine Brigade in the Far East. The contingent is to de-
part Camp Pendleton on the 9th by MATS planes.
However, the departure occurs on the 14th, when the
troops depart by rail for San Francisco and are trans-
ported by aircraft from there.
—In Japan: A meeting convenes in Tokyo, bringing
together staff officers of Far Eastern Air Forces (FEAF)
and Commander, Naval Forces Far East (COM-
NAVFE) in an effort to enhance the Navy’s close air
support operation in support of the ground troops in
Korea. The gathering occurs while the fleet is moored
at Sasebo, but Admiral Struble is absent due to a
separate meeting with General MacArthur in Formosa.
An understanding is reached whereby the Seventh
Fleet’s first priority will be close-air support, but car-
rier actions come under control of Fifth Air Force and
will be provided only when requested by Fifth Air Force
in Korea (FAFIK) and following the subsequent ap-
proval of COMNAVFE.
Under other circumstances, the carriers are unre-
strained and will operate in other areas of Korea to de-
stroy selected targets of their choosing. Second prior-
ity targets will be those selected south of the 38th
Parallel, and the third priority will be those of the B-
29 long-range bombers. Admiral Joy, who had not
agreed with the informal agreement, invalidates parts
thereof on August 24. Subsequent to his return from
Formosa, Admiral Struble orders Seventh Fleet Base of
Operations to embark from Okinawa to Sasebo, Japan,
bringing it closer to Korea, thereby providing the car-
riers more time to strike the enemy before moving out
to replenish ammunition and supplies.
August 4 Pusan Perimeter: General Walker’s
Eighth Army and the ROK forces, having been con-
vincingly pushed back across the Naktong River by the
North Koreans, draw the final line, which forms south-
west of Masan and moves north to pass in front of
Miryang. From there, it arcs around Taegu and curves
east to the front of Yongchon, then beyond to the sea.
The perimeter encompasses an area of about 100 miles
north to south and about 50 miles east to west, with a
rectangular contour. The defensive line is also referred
to as the Naktong Line.
The U.N. forces holding the line from east to west
are U.S. 25th Division (Masan), U.S. 24th Division
(Miryang) and the U.S. 1st Cavalry Division (Taegu).
Each division holds responsibility for a line that ex-
tends between 20 and 40 miles. Also, the ROK forces
that link with the 1st Cavalry northeast of Taegu ex-
164
tend northeast through the mountainous terrain. These
units are the S.K. 1st, 6th, 8th, Capital and 3rd Divi-
sions. For the first time since their arrival in Korea, the
U.S. troops have established a solid line in conjunction
with the South Korean troops. This gives the U.S. the
luxury of having friendly troops on either side and some
reinforcements to the rear. The Pusan Perimeter is os-
tensibly permanent and its defenders seem prepared to
hold.
In other activity, General Church, 24th Division
commander, issues an order to his troops that is simi-
lar to that given by the other commanders: “Defensive
and alternate positions must be prepared, routes recon-
noitered, intensive patrolling at night, communications
perfected and each individual know his job. There will
be no withdrawal nor need there be any if each and
every one contributes his share to the preparation and,
if attacked, has the will to fight it out here. Every sol-
dier will under all circumstances retain his weapon,
ammunition, and his entrenching tool. Without these
he ceases to be a soldier capable of defending himself.
Many of our losses have been occasioned by failure to
dig a foxhole when the time permitted.”
A Herculean effort that includes some ingenious me-
chanical transplant operations in Japan on the battered
relic tanks of the Pacific Island campaigns bears fruit.
The 8072nd Medium Tank Battalion (minus Com-
pany A, already in Korea) arrives in Pusan on the 7th.
The Provisional Tank Battalion is attached to the 89th
Medium Tank Battalion.
In other activity, General Walker and his staff con-
tinue to discuss a series of two offensives to be launched
by Eighth Army. The first attack, scheduled to begin be-
tween August 5 and August 10, will drive toward
Masan-Chinju. It is to be followed by a more power-
ful thrust on or about the 15th that will retrace the
steps of the N.K. 6th Division and drive west to Yosu,
then swerve north toward the Kum River. However,
there is concern that there are too few troops available
for such a large undertaking; therefore it is decided that
Eighth Army reserves will launch a counterattack toward
Chinju to release some pressure from the Taegu vicin-
ity.
Following the meeting, Walker requests that Fifth
Air Force commit its primary strength to isolate the
battlefront and decimate the suspected enemy troop
locations on the southwest flank, between the Nam
River and Masan. He also requests that the air attacks
occur from the night of the 5th through the 6th. In
conjunction, FEAF initiates the bombing of strategic
bridges in North Korea. On the west side of the Nak-
tong at Hyopch’on, the N.K. 4th Division, com-
manded by Major General Lee Kwon Mu, prepares to
cross the river and strike the 34th Regiment, which
holds the southern sector of the 24th Division perime-
ter. Farther north, other enemy elements ford the river
to assault the 21st Regiment. General Church has or-
dered all civilians to evacuate the area that stretches five
miles east behind the 24th Division lines. Church,
thoroughly convinced that the Communist infiltrators
 165 August 4, 1950

A vehicular bridge (left) and rail bridge near Waegwan span the Naktong River. Both are destroyed by
the Americans after they cross it during Eighth Army withdrawal in early August.

are indistinguishable from the South Koreans,

makes it clear that civilians spotted behind the
American lines might be shot on sight. Church
enunciates: “If we are going to hold here, we
cannot have any enemy behind us.”
In the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade zone,
helicopters attached to VMO-6 commanded
by Major Vincent J. Gottschalk initiate the
first air evacuation of wounded Marines in
the conflict.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu:
The 1st Cavalry Division, similarly to the
24th Division, bears responsibility for a huge
front along the perimeter. It links with the
24th Division to the south. Throughout the
night (4th-5th), elements of the N.K. 13th
Division cross the Naktong River.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Force ini-
tiates Interdiction Campaign No. 1. A group
of B-29 bombers strikes bridges in Commu-
nist North Korea at points above the 38th
Parallel.
In Naval activity, Marine planes (VMF-
214) from the carrier USS Sicily fly twenty-
one sorties in the vicinity of Chinju and Sa-
chon to alleviate pressure against the southern
flank of Eighth Army. The key targets are
railroads and bridges.
— In the United States: W. Averell Harri- Two U.S. soldiers work on a communications line at forward
man, White House national security advisor, outpost in vicinity of Naktong River on 4 August.
August 5, 1950
departs the U.S. for Tokyo to confer with General
MacArthur on behalf of President Truman. The JCS
dispatch General Matthew Ridgway and General Lau-
ris Norstad, Air Force deputy chief of staff for opera-
tions, to accompany Harriman.
— In Japan: General MacArthur issues a formal re-
port to the Department of the Army that places total
U.N. troop strength in Korea (as of this day) at
141,808; and of this number, ROK forces stand at
about 82,570. The 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and
the Far East Air Force personnel stand at 4,713 and
4,051 respectively; 107 miscellaneous personnel are in-
cluded. These figures do not include the U.S. Navy
personnel or the Marine Corps aviation personnel sta-
tioned on the carriers. The combined 92,000 U.N.
combat forces in South Korea appear to outnumber the
enemy combat troops, estimated to be 70,000.
In other activity, General MacArthur relieves KMAG
of its charge to advise the S.K. Coast Guard. He dele-
gates the responsibility to U.S. Commander Naval
Forces, FEC.
August 5 The carriers USS Valley Forge and the
USS Philippine Sea converge on Korean waters within
striking range of the battle areas, but the divergence of
communication systems continues to plague the oper-
ation. Each vessel dispatches liaison pilots to Taegu to
coordinate ground-to-air communications. These pi-
lots bolster the Mosquito planes, but one pilot from
each carrier must return to his nest each day to update
the ground situation. Initially, the pilots are obliged to
control only naval attacks, but it immediately becomes
imperative that the carrier controller planes must man-
age everything in their respective areas; the front lines
are partitioned into four sectors.
Five dive bombers (AD Skyraiders) from the Valley
Forge inflict heavy casualties on the enemy near Ko-
rysong. On the 6th, Lt. Commander Hodson again
leads his squadron and repeats the success, and in ad-
dition, the strike decimates an enemy supply depot.
Four other Skyraiders, led by Lieutenant B.G. Jackson,
also from the Valley Forge, destroy several vehicles near
Kumch’on.
Complications develop during the missions when F-
80 aircraft, dispatched from Japan, take preference be-
cause of their flight distance and fuel capacity, which re-
stricts them to about five minutes over the target. This
necessitates that the carrier planes, transporting heavy
bomb loads, waste time and fuel by circling the area
for naught while the F-51s from Japan drop their loads
on the predetermined naval targets.
During one particular raid, planes attached to 67th
Fighter Bomber Squadron Group strike concealed
enemy positions near Hamchang. Return fire strikes
Major Louis Sebille’s aircraft, but despite the heavy
damage he refuses to abandon his plane. He maintains
the attack and dives directly into the enemy fire and
crashes upon the enemy batteries. Sebille posthumously
receives the Medal of Honor, the first awarded to a
member of the U.S. Air Force.
166
In other Air Force activity, an Air Force rescue plane
(SA-16) succeeds during its initial mission to save a
downed naval pilot who crashed off the coast of Korea.
The mission had been led by Captain Charles E.
Shroder, USAF.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Sicily races into the
Yellow Sea and catapults its Marine planes (VMF-214)
to strike Inchon, Seoul and Mokp’o. The raids pound
the airfields, harbor areas, bridges, railroads, factories
and warehouses. Also, VMF-323, commanded by
Major Arnold Lund, USMC, departs Itami for the car-
rier Badoeng Strait. The other Marine squadron,
VMF(N)-513, assigned to Fifth Air Force, will fly at
night and operate from a land base at Itazuke. Mean-
while, on the ground in Korea, Eighth Army moves
closer to extinction. On the 8th, MacArthur directs all
air units to concentrate on close-air support for the
ground troops to forestall disaster.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: The 24th Divi-
sion holds positions designed to guard the lower Nak-
tong. It is deployed at the convergence of the Nam and
Naktong Rivers and stretches north along the latter for
about thirty-four miles (16 air miles). The 34th Reg-
iment, commanded by Colonel Beauchamp, holds the
southern portion west of Yongsan, about six miles east
of the river. The 21st Regiment is deployed along the
northern perimeter west of Changnyong and it is bol-
stered by elements of the S.K. 17th Regiment. General
Church expects the attack to strike his most fortified
point, the northern portion of his perimeter, when they
cross the Naktong, because of the area’s lack of good
roads. Instead, the Communists launch their initial as-
sault crossing of the Naktong west of the Andong
Mountains against the southern perimeter to seize
Yongsan.
Suddenly, at midnight (5th-6th), the skies above the
Naktong River in the southern portion of the 24th Di-
vision sector become brilliantly illuminated as multi-
color flares catapult from the N.K. 4th Division posi-
tions on the west bank. On the signal, the 3rd
Battalion, 16th Regiment, and possibly contingents of
the 1st Battalion cross at about the same time. The
North Koreans have studied the American perimeter
and they pick a secure crossing site to leisurely ford the
river, west of Yongsan and slightly more than three
miles south of Pugong-ni at the Ohang Ferry, where
the water is about neck high. Some troops remove their
uniforms and carry them atop their heads to keep them
dry. Others transport their weapons and clothing on
scanty rafts.
Upon reaching the east bank of the river at the
northern fringe of the bulge, the troops dress, then ig-
nite the attack toward Yongsan. The assault troops
move through an existing two-mile wide hole that sep-
arates Companies I and L, 3rd Battalion, 34th Regi-
ment. In synchronization, another enemy contingent
bolts across the river in the sector defended by the 21st
Regiment; however, it becomes entangled in a mine
field. The North Koreans attempt to extricate them-
selves with a prudent advance, until they receive a
 167
A Lockheed F-80 Shooting Star takes off from Japan en route to Korea. The plane passes over farmers
working in a rice paddy.
combined barrage of U.S. artillery and machine gun
fire that forces them to retreat across the river in total
disarray.
The 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, commanded by
Lt. Colonel Gines Perez, defends a front line that extends
about 15,000 yards (nine miles), which exceeds by
5,000 yards the amount of terrain that was expected to
be covered by an entire U.S. division during World War
II. The front, interrupted by two valleys that each point
to giant hill masses, is blanketed with ragged hills that
at some points from the banks of the river reach eleva-
tions of 600 feet. One valley entrance is at the Ohang
Ferry, and the other lies about four miles farther south
August 5, 1950
at the bottom of the bulge. It is here that the 3rd Bat-
talion is strung out along the high ground above the
river; 4.2-inch mortars are positioned about one mile
to its rear in the gulch between the hills east of the ferry
crossing. This perimeter, too, has deficiencies. In ad-
dition to the colossal gap that exists between Compa-
nies I and L, another undefended area that stretches
west for about three miles separates Company L and
Company K; the latter is deployed at the pinnacle of the
bulge where the river dramatically curves.
Rather than strike the two rifle companies, the
enemy chooses to drive southeast directly through the
gap to attack Yongsan. Colonel Perez, unable to contact
August 5, 1950
Top: An F-80 Shooting Star damaged in action makes a safe landing at a base in Korea. Bottom: Follow-
ing the emergency landing, the pilot of the F-80 walks away uninjured.
by radio either Colonel Beauchamp or Colonel Ayres,
the 1st Battalion commander, dispatches messengers
to sound the alarm. But they fail to reach headquarters
to deliver the messages.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans press forward and
run over the mortar positions in the valley, but in the
interim, the battalion command post at nearby Soesil
is alerted to the danger. Most of these troops pull back
safely. Colonel Perez, 3rd Battalion commander, heads
for the reserve 1st Battalion positions about three miles
farther back along the Yongsan Road to inform Ayres
of the severity of the attack. By now the division is fully
cognizant of the enemy penetration, but the exact
strength is still being calculated. The available resources
to thwart it are spread thinly. And with the departure
of headquarters, 3rd Battalion, the positions of Battery
B, 13th Field Artillery Battalion along the northwest-
ern base of Obong-ni Ridge, become imperiled.
At 0520, the 34th Regimental commander, Colonel
Beauchamp, informs General Church that the enemy
has penetrated his center and that the darkness hinders
a clear evaluation of the impending peril. Beauchamp
168
also tells Church that the reserve 1st Battalion under
Colonel Ayres is being committed to the battle.
By 0830, on the 6th, Battery B hears nearby small-
arms fire, indicating the imminent presence of North
Koreans. In the meantime, the 1st Battalion attempts
to launch a counterattack to throw the enemy back;
however, enemy fire against Battery B intensifies. At
1030, the besieged battery withdraws, but it brings one
howitzer, four 2-ton trucks and three smaller vehicles
out with it; four howitzers and nine vehicles are aban-
doned. In addition, Battery B sustains two men killed,
six wounded and six more missing.
After the sun rises, U.S. planes and ground artillery
flex their muscles. They strike enemy crossing sites at
the Naktong and forbid the enemy reinforcements from
crossing until dusk. In addition to the planes, twenty-
nine Howitzers bolster the 24th Division; twelve 155-
mm and seventeen 105s spread their fire along more
than thirty miles of the divisional front at the Naktong.
The 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, launches its attack
during the bombardments, but initially, only one com-
pany encounters the enemy. A jeep transporting
 169 August 5, 1950

F-80 Shooting Stars attack an enemy village. Rising smoke can be seen following direct hits on vehicles.

Colonel Ayres and two staff officers moves to the point
to gather intelligence to improve the execution of the
attack, while trucks transporting Company C also rush
to the front. Companies A and B and the weapons com-
pany trail on foot. Ayres’ jeep reaches the 3rd Battalion
command post, which appears unmolested. The three
officers look over the terrain to find the most suitable
positions, but there is little time to prepare. Just as the
forward elements arrive, a storm of enemy fire descends
from the hills that overlook the abandoned command
post.
The troops of Company C bolt from the vehicles
and immediately attack to seize the heights. Captain
Clyde Akridge, the commanding officer, leads the
August 5, 1950 170

Two U.S. soldiers with a North Korean POW pose for a picture (5 August).

assault, but he is repeatedly wounded by the withering
fire. Following his third wound he is evacuated. Dur-
ing the bitter fighting, Colonel Ayres joins some mor-
tarmen in a gully slightly to the rear and from there he
directs return fire against the enemy positions. But here,
too, disaster strikes when incessant fire pummels the
area. The mortarmen react heroically and remain at
their posts until they exhaust their supply of 60-mm
shells.
During this fierce exchange, the mortar sergeant
 171 August 5, 1950

Top: U.S. Eighth Army troops erect a bunker to hold a communications switchboard. Bottom: A two-
man team in a vehicle maintains coordinated radio contact for artillery units.

stands boldly in full view of the enemy while he directs
the fire, until a barrage of machine gun fire nearly slices
him in half. Colonel Ayres decides to attempt to reach
Companies A and B to direct their actions and salvage
the battle. Ayres and several men from his staff run the
gauntlet, and they, too, come under fierce fire as they race
through a rice paddy. Two men in the party become
wounded, but all reach the slanting hills of Obong-ni
Ridge, which has not yet been gained by the enemy. They
maneuver around the rear of the recently abandoned
August 5, 1950
positions of Battery B 13th Field Artillery Battalion to
discover that Companies A and B have not yet arrived.
In the meantime, the positions of Company C be-
come untenable. The enemy accelerates its fire and be-
gins to shred the ranks of the beleaguered company.
The dry creek bed from which they are returning fire
becomes filled with American blood. Most of the men
are either dead or grievously wounded. During these
brief but deadly moments, two other officers attempt to
break across the rice paddy. Shortly thereafter, more
men follow and attempt to reach a grist mill that lies
south of the road. The survivors take refuge in the mill,
from where they thwart repeated enemy attempts to
overrun their positions; enemy troops advance close,
but none penetrate the building.
Nevertheless, these besieged survivors continue to
come under a seething small-arms attack. The enemy
fire remains so tenacious and of such magnitude that
they are compelled to pile the bodies of their dead bud-
dies against the fragile walls to absorb the shells while
they await rescue. Here, too, disaster strikes.
Companies A and B, the latter in the lead, advance
prudently. The troops at the point discover an enemy
contingent that is attempting to pull back. Ten of the
contingent are eliminated. Following the encounter,
the two units reinitiate the advance against some oppo-
sition. Company A moves along the left side of the road
and Company B, along the right side. The columns are
bolstered by two antiaircraft vehicles. Enemy fire orig-
inating on Cloverleaf Hill (Hill 165) hammers Com-
pany B and knocks out the trailing antitank vehicle
and its four machine guns, stalling the advance. Com-
pany A, which receives less severe fire, pushes ahead. It
passes the vacated artillery positions and reaches the
previous positions of Company C, but it is unaware
that Americans hold the grist mill. An accompanying
tank commences close-range fire to support attacking
elements of Company A. The men of the assault unit
storm the building and to their great surprise, they dis-
cover the Company C’s survivors rather than the
enemy. The inadvertent friendly fire inflicts casualties;
one man is killed and several others are wounded.
Captain Alfonso, commanding officer, Company A,
orders his men to place the wounded aboard the vehi-
cles that had earlier been used by Company C to at-
tempt evacuation, and he directs his men to bring out
the dead. The convoy, accompanied by a lead tank,
comes under fire as it withdraws, but most vehicles
make it back to battalion lines. One man, Lieutenant
Payne, is thought to be dead; however, he had only
been knocked unconscious by the concussion of the
friendly tank fire. Later when he regains consciousness,
he tells of the incident that occurred.
During the rescue, he hears one of the rescuers say-
ing, as they place him in the truck: “Payne is dead as a
mackerel.” Payne then slips back into unconsciousness,
but en route to safety, the vehicle transporting him
comes under enemy fire, which forced it into a gully.
Payne is revived by the shock of the crash and somehow,
he manages to walk and crawl to safety. Once the trucks
172
depart with the wounded, Company A reinitiates its
attack.
Companies K and L, 3rd Battalion, remain in place,
while the 1st Battalion attacks, but other 3rd Battalion
units that hold the right flank begin to evacuate their
defenses. These units are not under any attack, yet
without orders, they retreat. Company I, deployed on
the hill atop the Naktong, moves northeast toward the
21st Regiment’s lines. Soon after, they are followed by
the heavy weapons company. Then, Company A, 26th
Antiaircraft Automatic Weapons Battalion, and a mor-
tar platoon also abandon their positions.
General Church is informed of these pull-backs by
men of the 21st Regiment. Immediately, he orders Col-
onel Beauchamp, 34th Regimental commander, to in-
tercept these troops and relieve the company com-
manders. Colonel Beauchamp dispatches his executive
officer, Colonel Wadlington, to halt the retreat. He
catches the withdrawing units and redirects them to
the west, but he marches with them to ensure they re-
sume their prior positions by the river.
In conjunction, General Church dispatches the 24th
Division Reconnaissance Company to the positions that
had been abandoned by Company I. Church instructs
the unit to block the Naktong River–Changnyong
Road. Later, the Reconnaissance Company and I Com-
pany attack an enemy-held hill outside the village of
Pugong-ni, but it fails. Heavy enemy fire from the
heights inflicts serious casualties on the attacking units.
During the morning (6th), General Church con-
cludes that the majority of North Koreans that infil-
trated east of the river have been confined to the bulge
of the Naktong area. He had previously believed that
the enemy would strike the northern sector of his lines.
Church orders the 19th Regiment, 24th Division, to at-
tack west to cover the northern flank of the 34th Reg-
iment. The risk proves fruitful, as the regiment con-
verges on an enemy group composed of about 300
troops and catches them off guard in a village near
Ohang Hill about one mile east of the river. The 19th
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Ned Moore, takes
the advantage and swiftly swings into action to termi-
nate the threat. The regiment wipes out nearly the en-
tire North Korean contingent.
Meanwhile, Company A, 1st Battalion, 19th Regi-
ment, resumes its advance to the river. Company B,
earlier stalled by enemy fire, establishes positions on
Cloverleaf Hill. Although the North Koreans had oc-
cupied portions of Cloverleaf Hill as they moved east,
it becomes evident that they have not yet maneuvered
south of the Yongsan-Naktong Road. Consequently,
the high ground at Obong-ni Ridge still remains free
of the enemy. Company A reaches a contingent of
Company L at its original positions along the Naktong
River at about 2000, but the combined force amounts
to less than 100 men. After establishing night posi-
tions, Company A makes use of a forward artillery spot-
ter’s radio to reestablish contact with the 1st Battalion.
At daybreak on the 7th, Captain Alfonso discovers
that enemy troops have secured the ridge to the right
 173
of his positions. He requests artillery fire to eliminate
the threat. Alfonso dispatches a squad to investigate
the effects of the artillery, but enemy fire drives it back.
After dusk on the first day of battle for the bulge, the
enemy gets more reinforcements across the river to make
it clear that their positions will not easily be eliminated.
The fighting fails to terminate with the setting sun;
however, the enemy encounters tough opposition. Al-
though some units have been thumped and several oth-
ers have abandoned their positions, most stand stead-
fastly, thus preventing acute panic from spreading
through the lines. Before dawn on the 7th, the S.K.
17th Regiment, scheduled to move out and reform with
the ROK Army, is repeatedly struck as the enemy at-
tempts to cross the river on the right flank. Neverthe-
less, the South Koreans repel each attack, prior to their
relief by Task Force Hyzer on the morning of the 7th.
Meanwhile, during the night of the 6th, General
Church makes preparations to maintain the momen-
tum. He orders the 19th and 34th Regiments to reini-
tiate the counterattack on the 7th.
In the 25th Division sector, Marine officers General
Craig and Lt. Colonel Stewart arrive in Masan to attend
a final conference with Generals Walker and Kean to
discuss the imminent U.N. offensive. Walker enunciates
his disappointment about the inability of Eighth Army
to halt the enemy up to now. He states with equal pas-
sion that no more ground is to be surrendered, and he
reiterates his “stand or die” policy. Following the meet-
ing, Craig and Stewart hop back into the helicopter,
piloted by Lieutenant Gustave Lueddeke, and within
several minutes, Craig joins Colonel Murray at his 5th
Marines’ command post to brief him on the plan of at-
tack against Sachon and Chinju.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The N.K. 3rd
Division and the S.K. 5th Division have been heavily en-
gaged around Yongdok, with domination of the area
swinging back and forth. On this day, the North Kore-
ans launch a tenacious assault and push the defenders
from the town. They are driven south to Hill 181.
Eighth Army reacts quickly; the KMAG advisor to the
S.K. 3rd Division, Lt. Colonel Rollins Emmerich, re-
ceives a private dispatch from General Walker that em-
phasizes the imperativeness of regaining the lost ground.
A counterattack is being scheduled for the following
day, but in the meantime, the enemy maintains great
pressure on the South Korean positions on Hill 181.
In the S.K. 1st Division sector, the N.K. 13th Divi-
sion continues to ferry its troops across the Naktong
River at a point about forty air-miles northwest of
Taegu at Naktong-ni. Elements of the 21st N.K. Reg-
iment are spotted. Aircraft arrive to strafe the troops
while they are still in the water. South Korean artillery
and mortars also plaster the crossing site. The combined
artillery barrages and air strikes continue to hammer
the enemy after they reach the south bank of the river.
Later, during the night, the N.K. 19th Regiment
moves across the river in the same spot. The unit is able
to wade across, but its vehicles and heavy weapons are
left behind. Also, the N.K. 15th Division, advancing
August 6, 1950
south of the N.K. 13th Division, receives about 1,500
replacement troops while in Kumch’on, which lifts its
strength to about 6,500 troops.
In other activity, the U.S. 23rd Regiment arrives in
Korea from the United States; it departs for Taegu.
August 6 Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: (See
also August 5, 1950) The 1st Battalion, 34th Regi-
ment, mounts a counterattack in the Naktong River
area to assist the 3rd Battalion contingents that have
been under attack since midnight of the 5th-6th. The
1st Battalion is composed of twenty officers and 471 en-
listed men. The U.S. forces hold most of their ground.
Their supply route that moves up from Yongsan has
not been cut by the enemy and the road beyond the
village remains open, which permits reinforcements to
arrive from Miryang if necessary.
Also, General Church forms Task Force Hyzer,
which is composed of the 3rd Engineer Combat Bat-
talion (minus Company A), the 78th Tank Battalion
(minus its tanks) and the Reconnaissance Company
(24th Division). The task force is needed to fill a gap
created by Eighth Army orders that call for the release
of the ROK 17th Regiment (TF Min) from the 24th
Division, which reverts back to the South Korean
Army.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 9th Regiment,
2nd Division, arrives at Changnyong and is soon after
attached to the 24th Division. Heavy fighting contin-
ues in this sector until the 19th of August, while U.S.
troops engage the N.K. 4th Division. Much of the
gruesome combat centers around the strategic positions
of Cloverleaf (Hill 165) and Obong-ni Ridge.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Eighth Army issues
the operational order to launch the offensive toward
Chinju at 0630 on the following day (August 7). Major
General William Kean, 25th Division commander, will
lead the contingent, designated Task Force Kean. In
conjunction, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade is at-
tached to the 25th Division. The 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, commanded by Lt. Colonel Robert Taplett,
and the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines (Artillery), depart
Changwon at 1040 and arrive at Chindong-ni before
1230. The 2nd Platoon, 75-mm recoilless gun, and the
3rd Platoon and company engineers accompany the in-
fantry. The other units arrive later in the day.
By about 1600, Taplett orders the artillery and mor-
tar units to fire for registration on the northern ap-
proaches to Chindong-ni. Initially, the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, comes under the jurisdiction of Colonel
Michaelis, 27th Regiment, USA, but upon arrival of a
second Marine battalion, command passes to General
Craig, USMC. The main assault force, Task Force
Kean, is composed of the 25th Division (minus the
27th Regiment and the 8th Field Artillery Bn., both
of which are relieved today at the front and placed in
Army reserve), the 5th Regimental Combat Team and
the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade. The 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, relieves the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment
on and in the vicinity of Hill 255, situated about one
August 6, 1950 174

Top: U.S. troops are deployed with a 105-mm howitzer near Naktong River on 6 August. Bottom: A
bunker holding a 4.2-inch M2 chemical mortar and crew, photographed August 5. The bunker, constructed
with logs, rice straw and other items, is near the Naktong River.

and one-half miles outside of Chindong-ni on the west
side of the north-south road. The 3rd Battalion 5th
Marines command post is established on the first step
of the hill, slightly above on the second rise.
Company H, commanded by Captain Joseph Fegan,
facing north, deploys defensively. Soon after, Fegan re-
quests permission to move to higher ground, about 500
yards from the closest battalion unit, but the request is
denied. Taplett wishes to keep the battalion closely tied
to ensure blockage of the main supply route (MSR) ap-
proaches. The 2nd Platoon, Company H, spreads out
beyond Chindong-ni in the heights east of the MSR
to intercept any infiltrators that encroach from the
mountains southeast of the road or from the sea.
 175
Company G, 5th Marines commanded by Lieuten-
ant Robert Bohn, deploys its 2nd and 3rd Platoons on
nearby Hill 99, located on the opposite side of the val-
ley and slightly west of Hill 255. The 1st Platoon,
Company G, led by 2nd Lieutenant John Cahill, de-
ploys about 600 yards from Chindong-ni at the base of
Hill 255 to guard the Haman Road. The 1st Platoon
is reinforced by the Recoilless Gun Platoon.
Toward evening, the 27th Regiment and the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Regimental Combat Team, stand along
the front west of Chindong-ni, with the former close to
the road and the latter spread amid the heights to the
north. Later, the remainder of the 5th Regimental
Combat Team assumes the positions of the forward
27th Regimental troops in conjunction with the 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines, which relieves the 1st Battalion,
27th Regiment, and assumes its reserve positions. Also,
the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, is set to relieve the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Regimental Combat Team, on the high
ground north of the highway on the 7th.
Eighth Army Intelligence estimates the opposing
force (N.K. 6th Division) to be about 7,500 troops,
but it actually stands at approximately 6,000 men.
However, unbeknownst to the U.S., the 83rd N.K.
Motorized Regiment had joined the division, making
the troop estimate accurate.
In other activity, elements of the N.K. 6th Division
attack the 2nd Battalion, 35th Regiment, about three
miles west of Chungam-ni. The assault drives one com-
pany from its lines, but a strong counterattack regains
the lost terrain. The 35th Regiment had been prepar-
ing to attack on the following day. The N.K. 6th Di-
vision has occupied a series of tunnels and mine shafts
that permeate the western slopes of Sobuk-san. The
enemy troops utilize the concealed positions for un-
derground quarters and supply depots. These cavernous
areas aid the North Koreans during their month-long
(August) siege against Masan.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
commanded by Lt. Col. Robert Taplett, continues to
fortify its positions on Hill 255, while other Marine
units continue to arrive in the sector. Just after mid-
night (6th-7th), Taplett receives an urgent call from
Colonel Michaelis, who relays orders from General
Kean. The order from Kean directs the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, to speed one reinforced platoon to sup-
port a beleaguered contingent of the 5th Regimental
Combat Team, Company F, which is under attack on
the slope of Hill 342. An enemy contingent has pushed
out one platoon, which had been deployed on a small
ridge under the crest. The enemy gain places them on
excellent ground from where they can effortlessly ob-
serve activity at the command posts of both the 5th
Regimental Combat Team and the 5th Marines, caus-
ing complications for the imminent U.S. offensive.
Taplett explains that he cannot spare one platoon,
having only six, but Michaelis informs him that Gen-
eral Kean says that Hill 342 (Yaban-san) must be held
at all hazards. Fifty-two Marines from Company G’s 1st
Platoon are assigned the task. The platoon is reinforced
August 6, 1950
with a machine gun squad and an SCR-300 operator.
Lieutenant Cahill leads the contingent to Colonel
Michaelis’ CP, south of Hill 99, near a bridge and from
there to the command post of the 2nd Battalion, 5th
RCT, located slightly north of the road on the eastern
fringe of Hill 342.
Cahill’s Platoon, ordered to relieve Company F, 5th
RCT, departs the CP with a guide. Due to the pitch-
black darkness, the guide takes the wrong route and
causes a delay. Still in friendly terrain, the Marine pla-
toon is then beset by more misfortune as it advances
toward the end of the valley that lies between the two
elongated spurs of Hill 342. At about 0500, after gain-
ing only three miles, rifle fire suddenly strikes the col-
umn. Two Marines become wounded. The guide, puz-
zled by the fire from within friendly lines, suggests that
the column await dawn before ascending the slope.
Soon after, it is determined that the incoming fire had
originated from troops of the 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT,
who had been unaware of the Marines’ presence in the
sector. The troops that had opened fire erroneously as-
sumed the Marines had been an advancing enemy
force. The mission to take the hill resumes on the 7th.
Meanwhile, to the left of the 35th Regiment, the
24th Regiment undertakes the task of securing the area
of mountain mass that separates the paths of the 35th
Regiment and the 5th Regimental Combat Team, both
of which will participate in the upcoming offensive.
The 24th Regiment incurs problems at its positions
near Haman. West of the town, a contingent of North
Koreans springs an ambush upon Company L, but the
attack also disperses Company I and creates bedlam as
troops flee haphazardly. During the unruly retreat, one
officer alleges that his own command bowled him over
three separate times as they sprinted to the rear.
Nonetheless, the entire line doesn’t concede its
ground. One soldier, PFC William Thompson, at-
tached to the Heavy Weapons Company, chooses to
stand and fight. Thompson places a machine gun in
position and delivers sheets of fire against the charging
enemy. He holds without relinquishing even one yard,
despite being pummeled by enemy fire and grenades.
Thompson’s relentless actions temporarily contain the
attacking force, as its fire concentrates on him. Thomp-
son becomes wounded by grenade fragments and then
by small arms fire, but still he refuses to abandon his
weapon. Finally, an enemy grenade strikes a mortal
blow. PFC Thompson, Company M, 24th Regiment,
receives the Medal of Honor posthumously for his un-
compromising courage in the face of the enemy.
Also, Colonel Horton White is relieved as com-
mander of the 24th Regiment, subsequent to today’s
actions by the regiment. White is replaced by Colonel
Arthur Champney.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 1st
Cavalry Division is spread over a wide area; from its
farthest point, Waegwan, the 5th, 8th and 7th Cavalry
Regiments are strung (north to south). The cavalry
links with the 24th Division positions along the Nak-
tong Bulge to the south and with the S.K. 1st Division
August 6, 1950 176

to the north. The 7th and 8th Cavalry Regiments each
protect a 10,000-yard area, but the 5th Cavalry’s zone
comprises 14,000 yards at Waegwan. The cavalry’s ar-
tillery positions are about 7,000 yards to the rear and
spaced at about 6,000 to 7,000 yards apart, which
weakens the batteries’ positions because of the enor-
mous distance between them. Nevertheless, two bat-
teries are able to combine their power.
Today, north of the 1st Cavalry Division’s 5th Cav-
alry positions at Waegwan, the N.K. 1st Division ini-
tiates its crossing of the Naktong in a sector defended
by the S.K. 6th Division. The Communists complete

A gun crew aboard a carrier observes a Corsair (Vought F4U), which is armed with rockets as it takes
off.
 177
the crossing by August 8. About 2,500 replacement
troops join the enemy division, some at Hamch’ang
and the balance later.
In other activity, the third and final regiment of the
N.K. 13th Division, the 23rd, fords the Naktong dur-
ing the night of the 6th-7th using rafts. Two artillery
battalions also cross with the 23rd Regiment. The N.K.
13th Division operation has been unfolding in a distant
and thinly defended area of the S.K. 1st Division.
Nonetheless, South Korean pressure keeps the enemy
somewhat subdued and compels the Communist forces
to seek positions in the mountains. Once it regroups
in the mountains east of the Naktong, a night attack is
launched that breaks through the South Korean lines.
Within a week, the enemy division reaches the area
about fifteen miles north of Taegu, where it converges
with the N.K. 1st Division. Meanwhile, south of the
N.K. 13th Division, the N.K. 15th Division begins to
advance toward the Naktong. Its 45th Regiment heads
northeast.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: South of Yong-
dok, intense close-quartered fighting continues to ensue
on Hill 181. Each side lies within grenade range of the
other. The congested battlefield remains under obser-
vation from the S.K. 3rd Division command post while
the night attack plan is being worked out. To regain
Yongdok, the South Koreans must first rid Hill 181 of
the enemy. The South Koreans prepare to jump from
The Australian destroyer Bataan (foreground) screens the carrier USS Bataan.
August 6, 1950
their positions on Hill 181 at about 1900. At 1930,
U.S. planes attack the enemy positions. The aircraft
launch rockets and deliver both napalm and bombs for
a fifteen-minute duration to soften resistance.
Immediately following the cessation of the air strikes,
naval surface vessel guns combine with artillery units to
further pound the enemy. Then at 2000, the 22nd and
23rd S.K. Regiments advance. Both drive straight to-
ward the heights and following a tenacious exchange,
they secure the hill. Throughout the night, the North
Koreans unsuccessfully attempt to reconquer the hill.
While the two sides pound each other, one enemy
mortar shell lands in close proximity to the S.K. Com-
mand Post. Colonel Emmerich sends a runner to in-
spect the area and evaluate the damage. He discovers
several dead soldiers near the command post, but there
is no indication of the whereabouts of General Chu
Sik Lee, the commanding general, nor any of his staff.
KMAG advisors Colonel Emmerich and Major Harold
Slater begin a search, but even with the assistance of
flashlights, they too are unable to find the general.
South Korean troops join in the search, and eventually
General Lee is found, safely tucked in a hillside bunker.
Colonel Emmerich directs the general to gather his
staff and head back to the command post. On the fol-
lowing day, Emmerich arranges for the general’s relief
of command.
The contest for the hill resumes on the following
August 7, 1950
day. Also, the S.K. 1st Separate Battalion and the Yong-
dungp’o Battalion are dissolved and absorbed into the
22nd and 23rd Regiments.
In Naval activity, Naval Forces Far East establishes
Fleet Air Wing 6, which assumes operational control
of the U.S. and British patrol squadrons based in Japan.
Also, planes from the Sicily again strike the areas around
Inchon, Seoul and Mokp’o, to pound enemy facilities
and troop concentrations. Also, Marine planes (VMF-
323), armed with 20-mm cannon, five-inch rockets
and 500 pound bombs, catapult from the USS Bado-
eng Strait to fly support missions for Eighth Army. The
F4U Corsairs fly thirty sorties. The planes, led by
Major Arnold A. Lund and Major Roger F. Steinkraus,
hit targets along the Namgang River at points west of
Chinju. The missions are the first sorties flown in com-
bat in Korea from the Badoeng Strait.
— In Japan: Major General Clark L. Ruffner arrives
in Japan from the United States. Ruffner begins work-
ing with the plans for the amphibious invasion of Korea
by the 8th. Subsequently, he is appointed X Corps chief
of staff upon its activation.
In other activity, W. Averell Harriman and his
entourage, including Generals Lauris (Larry) Norstad
and Matthew Ridgway, arrive in Tokyo to meet
with General MacArthur. Harriman’s party attends
the morning briefing of the GHQ and then has lunch
with the MacArthurs at the U.S. Embassy. Later, dur-
ing the afternoon, while Harriman is again conferring
with MacArthur, Generals Ridgway and Norstad meet
with General Almond and other GHQ staff members.
Much of the conversation between Harriman and
MacArthur focuses on the two Chinas, Communist and
Formosa.
Also, General Stratemeyer begins to counter the
enemy’s new tactic of transporting its supplies only by
night. He orders reconnaissance flights to intercept
these convoys. Before the end of August, the planes
augment their missions by dropping flares. B-29s drop
M-26 parachute flares (World War II leftovers) over
suspected enemy routes from altitudes of about 10,000
feet. Trailing B-26s observe the flares as they burst at
about 6,000 feet, then strike any discovered targets.
However, many of these aged flares fail to operate.
August 7–August 15 1950 Southwest
Pusan Perimeter: In the U.N.’s first offensive
(BLOODY GULCH), Task Force Kean launches its of-
fensive, but the N.K. 6th Division initiates its attack
almost simultaneously, which guarantees a donny-
brook. Anticipated U.S. air strikes are canceled due
to a dense fog that carpets the coastal area in the vicin-
ity of Chindong-ni. Nonetheless, lacking air support,
the assault goes off. At 0700 U.S. artillery commences
a powerful barrage to signal the advance. Once the
guns become silent, from right to left, the 35th Reg-
iment jumps off from its positions at the Notch to
drive from the northeast. In synchronization, the 5th
Regimental Combat Team pushes up the center. It
heads due west along the secondary inland road. Soon
178
after, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, on the left
flank, grinds along the south coastal road.
The artillery ceases fire at 0720. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 35th Regiment, poised about three miles west of
Chungami at the Notch, jumps off and immediately
runs into stiff opposition mounted by about 500
North Korean troops supported by self-propelled
guns. Fierce fighting ensues there for about five
hours.
Meanwhile, on the right flank, slightly west of
Chindong-ni, the 1st Battalion, 5th Regimental
Combat Team, pushes out. It encounters no oppo-
sition as it proceeds to the road junction, but once
there, it commits a costly error. Rather than pursu-
ing its straight course due west, the contingent veers
left at the junction, thereby leaving one of its objec-
tives, the strategic hill that sits northwest of the in-
tersection, unmanned. The remainder of the 5th
Regimental Combat Team and the 5th Marine Reg-
iment, each trailing the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, con-
tinue their advance, expecting cover fire from the
1st Battalion on the dominating hill.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, advances
about three miles along the wrong route and reaches
a hill mass south of the road fork; this places its line
of advance on the road previously designated to the
5th Marines. Heavy opposition greatly hinders the
advancement of the 5th RCT for about two days.
Back with Lt. Colonel John Wilkins’ 2nd Battal-
ion, 35th Regiment, at the center of the advance,
the combat continues at a furious pace as both sides
hammer each other. The Americas receive some wel-
come air support toward the latter part of the five-
hour battle, which propels them to victory and gives
them possession of the pass and the heights to the
north. With the ground secured, the 35th Regiment
continues west, less encumbered by the enemy. It
reaches positions near the Much’on-ni road fork by
dark.
Near Pansong, the 35th overruns an enemy com-
mand post and seizes Russian-made radios (large ca-
pacity) and other headquarters supplies and reports.
The advance also captures four trucks, each loaded
with ammunition and weapons. The 35th Regiment,
commanded by Colonel Fisher, also slays about 350
enemy troops and destroys two tanks, five anti-tank
guns and one self-propelled gun. The 35th Regi-
ment then holds in place through the night. On the
following morning, it advances to the heights just
to the front of the road fork.
In the meantime, to the rear of the departure point
of the 35th Regiment, in the sector expected to be
swept by the 24th Regiment, the situation remains
poor, caused by the rout of the contingents of the
3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, on the previous day.
The 3rd Battalion commander, Lt. Colonel Samuel
Pierce, and another officer locate the battalion in
Haman, about four miles to the rear. The inability
of the 24th Regiment to secure Sobuk-san keeps the
Americans in the dark concerning enemy troop
 179 August 7, 1950

Top: U.S. Navy helicopter (Sikorsky R-5) departs a carrier off the coast of Korea to be prepared to res-
cue a pilot if necessary. Helicopter crews remain airborne during carrier plane missions. Bottom: A U.S.
Navy maintenance crew on the flight deck of a carrier examines a Panther jet prior to a mission.

strength in the area behind TF Kean. This failure
also enables the Communist forces to get behind
American lines and disrupt the supply convoys, at-
tempting to reach the front.
On the left flank, some contingents of the 5th
Marines have been heavily engaged since the previ-
ous night, supporting the 5th RCT commanded by
Colonel Ordway on Hill 342. As dawn breaks on
the 7th, the Marine platoon from Company G (3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines), led by 2nd Lieutenant John
Cahill, resumes its ascent up the rugged hill, advanc-
ing toward the crest. The troops pause while
August 7, 1950 180

Top: A U.S. soldier attaches a battery to a sniperscope M2. The weapon, a carbine rifle (.30-caliber), is
for use during night fighting. Bottom: U.S. aircraft carriers (Essex Class) at anchor in Japan. The carrier
on the left shows F-80 Sabre jets on its deck. A landing craft is in the foreground.
 181
Lieutenant Cahill and Sergeant Lee Buettner move
to the crest under enemy fire as they attempt to lo-
cate the isolated soldiers. This emerges as the first
action between the enemy and the Marines.
Thirty-seven Marines reach the peak, but eight
Marines are wounded and three are killed. While the
Marines are regrouping on the reverse slope, the
North Koreans pound the area with a massive
amount of fire, which prompts some soldiers to
abandon the perimeter; but quick and decisive ac-
tions by an Eighth Army lieutenant halts the stam-
pede. The troops then re-inhabit their foxholes.
Soon after, Cahill’s Marines are dispersed around
the perimeter to share positions with the soldiers in
the foxholes. The unusual mix produces excellent
results, as the assorted Army and Marine infantrymen
are each determined to exemplify the high standards
of their units. Two additional Marines are instantly
killed while being led to their positions on the crest.
More reinforcements are rushed to the hill. At
1100, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, led by Lt.
Colonel Harold Roise (subsequent to the departure
of the attacking 1st Battalion, 5th RCT USMC),
advances to relieve Colonel Throckmorton’s belea-
guered 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT, on the ridge, but it
encounters an immediate obstacle. North Korean
troops who had infiltrated the ridge during the night
have wedged themselves between the Marines and
the 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT.
In the meantime, the enemy places a curtain of
troops around Hill 342, further endangering the
small command at the top of it. At 1200, the
Marines and soldiers on the summit are unexpectedly
pummeled with a devastating, unending string of
enemy rifle and machine gun fire that slams across
the confined perimeter. Terrorizing mortar fire joins
the ensemble of flying death. In coordination with
the blazing enemy fire, the approach slope is perme-
ated with huge numbers of creeping enemy troops
who are attempting to remain concealed.
No one on the summit moves from his position
while the enemy horde approaches; rather, the isolated
troops commence firing with equal tenacity, deter-
mined to halt the attack and retain the crest. However,
the defenders are rapidly diminishing their ammunition.
Cahill uses his SCR-300 radio to contact Army ar-
tillery units to help neutralize the enemy mortars. Fol-
lowing the urgent request for assistance, the guns of
the artillery fire effectively on suspected enemy mortar
outposts. Nonetheless, the mortars are not silenced.
Cahill’s Marine platoon and the elements of the
5th RCT maintain control of the summit, but the
ammunition level reaches a critical point, and the
Army’s water supply is rapidly vanishing. Cahill calls
for an air drop to rectify the problem. A large Air
Force R4D transport plane passes over and drops
supplies and ammunition, but only one package is re-
covered. The remainder falls into enemy held ter-
rain. The sole retrieved package contains only carbine
shells and is of no value to the cause.
August 7, 1950
Two additional attempts are made by the more
maneuverable OY-2s from Marine Squadron VMO-
6. The VMO-6 squadron confiscates every available
water can in the unit to donate to the desperate
troops on the crest. The third attempt succeeds and
pinpoints the mark to deliver the supplies, but again
misfortune strikes. Each of the water cans explodes
upon impact.
The additional Marine reinforcements (2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines) advance, but en route, they en-
counter the enemy that had infiltrated during the
previous night. A vicious battle ignites. The Marines,
still unadjusted to the scorching heat of Korea, move
in to slug it out with the enemy in close-quarters as
the temperature soars to about 112 degrees. The
draining weather and accompanying enemy fire halt
the progress of the Marines, who sustain more casu-
alties (about thirty Marines) to the elements than to
the opposition. The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines es-
tablishes contact with the isolated command on the
following day, but first, it re-initiates more ferocious
fighting along the slopes.
Slightly before daybreak on the 8th, the North
Koreans storm Hill 342, but it holds. Company D,
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, drives to the summit to
relieve the Army contingent and Cahill’s platoon
from Company G, 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines.
Cahill’s platoon and the army elements evacuate the
crest. Six Marines under Cahill have been killed and
twelve wounded.
Meanwhile, Company D is struck with a storm
of fire; 2nd Lt. Wallace Reid is killed and Captain
John Finn, while attempting to retrieve Reid’s body,
receives two serious wounds. First Lieutenant Robert
Hanifin, Jr., assumes command as the North Kore-
ans mount another attack to seize the crest. Hanifin
falters as heat exhaustion causes him to collapse. But
in his place, Master Sergeant Harold Reeves and Sec-
ond Lieutenant Leroy Wirth take over the unit and
the attack is repelled. Company D, 2nd Battalion,
5th Marines, holds the hill. It sustains eight Marines
killed and twenty-eight wounded. On the 9th of Au-
gust, the summit of Hill 342 is given to the 24th
Regiment, USA.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, which
had begun relieving the 27th Regiment, USA, on
the previous night, completes the exercise at 1120.
At this time, General Edward Craig, USMC, com-
manding officer of the 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade, assumes command over all troops on the
Chindong-ni front. The action occurs due to orders
issued by General Kean, who has become especially
irritated by the ongoing confusion on the field. To
add to the dilemma, friendly tanks inadvertently
sever Army communications when their treads rip
through telephone lines that are stretched openly on
the ground.
Upon relief by the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
on Hill 342 (Fox Hill), Colonel Throckmorton’s
weakened 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT, proceeds toward
August 7, 1950
the dominant hill northwest of Chindong-ni to se-
cure it. The 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, had acciden-
tally bypassed it on the previous day. The 2nd Bat-
talion contains only two effective companies
following its week-long duty on Hill 342. The assault
to seize the hill fails, due partially to ineffective sup-
porting artillery fire.
Later in the afternoon, a fuming General Kean
arrives at the 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT, positions.
Kean makes his point by ignoring Colonel Ordway
(regimental commander, 5th RCT), while speaking
to Colonel Throckmorton, who is standing close by:
“I want that hill tonight.” After the encounter with
General Kean, three tanks are rolled into position
to provide cover fire in concert with the deployment
of 4.2-inch and 81-mm mortars. Companies E and
G, despite their weariness, launch a successful but
strenuous night attack to seize the hill. The troops are
victorious; however, by dusk on the 8th, they are
also on the brink of total exhaustion.
Since the commencement of the U.S. westward
offensive on the 7th, the din of battle has not been
confined to the area west of Chindong-ni. During the
night of the 6th-7th, North Korean contingents
move eastward and nudge around the fringes of
Chindong-ni. They occupy Hill 255, which con-
trols the road from there to Masan, essentially endan-
gering the supply route. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines and contingents of the 2nd
Battalion, 24th Regiment, bolstered by air strikes,
batter the newly enemy-occupied hill, but without
success. The Marines and soldiers also commit tanks,
mortars and ample dosages of artillery shells, but
still, the entrenched North Koreans hold Hill 255
with resolute determination.
The 159th Field Artillery Battalion’s Companies
B and C jointly propel about 1,600 shells into the
roadblock, and additional fire power is also called
upon. The 555th Artillery Battalion, at the request
of the 5th Marines on site, pours its fire upon the
enemy obstruction.
Captain Joseph Fegan, commander of H Com-
pany, commits the 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant
John Williams. The platoon advances until halted
by a storm of machine gun fire and an abundance
of thrown grenades originating about thirty yards
away. Williams is ordered to pull his unit back and
the 3rd Platoon is directed to charge the positions,
but the 3rd Platoon, apparently stunned by the
thrashing received by the 1st Platoon, fails to ad-
vance into the ring of fire.
Captain Fegan bolts into action. He leads the at-
tack; two Marines, Tech Sergeant Ray Morgan and
PFC Donald Terrio, hit the enemy’s right flank with
tenacious swiftness and knock out two enemy ma-
chine guns. Another team hits the left flank and rakes
it with BAR fire. Corporal Melvin James, leading
the assault against the left flank, extricates six
Marines who had been wounded during the fierce
action. The attack is bloody, but the 3rd Platoon an-
182
nihilates the defenders. Sgt. Edward Barrett,
wounded twice, is taken to safety by Captain Fegan.
The enemy withstands the brutal punishment for
two days, but by the morning of the 9th, the com-
bined thrust of contingents of the 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, and two battalions of the 24th Regiment,
causes the enemy to falter. Temperatures soaring well
over 100 degrees further aggravates the situation.
Undaunted, the Marines and the soldiers apply more
pressure.
The battle for Hill 255 ends successfully for the
Americans. Company H, 5th Marines, advances
during the morning of the 8th and dislodges the
enemy from the high ground. Elements of the 24th
Regiment hook up with the Marines on Hill 255,
and shortly after 1200, the roadblock is eliminated.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines receives the heaviest
opposition. It sustains about 70 casualties during the
final day; however, again, about one-half are caused
by heat exhaustion. In contrast, the Americans count
120 enemy dead and estimate total enemy casual-
ties at 600.
Task Force Kean had initiated its offensive early on
the 7th with expectations of stunning the enemy, but
instead had itself been startled as it rammed into the
unexpected enemy attack. Unlike U.S. Intelligence
during World War II, the U.S. operations in Korea
have no OSS-type units behind the lines to feed in-
formation and confound the enemy. Lacking critical
information and strategic tactics, major gaps remain
constant concerning details on enemy intentions and
troop movements.
Despite incessant pleas for operations of this type,
Washington never authorizes them, keeping the
U.N. troops at a disadvantage. And it is assumed
that all U.N. information forwarded to the United
Nations is discreetly being forwarded instantaneously
to the Soviet Union. Despite the poor intelligence
and the seemingly perpetual confusion, by the 9th,
TF Kean bulldozes through the maze of the initial
enemy opposition and prepares to jump-start the
center and southern spears of the attack.
The 5th Marines moves to the positions of the 1st
Battalion, 5th RCT, at the hill along the coastal road.
Upon relief, the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, retraces its
steps to the road junction west of Chindong-ni and
begins to advance along the proper road to rejoin
the regiment. The 5th Marines initiates a fast paced
advance down the coastal road.
On the 9th, subsequent to the seizure of Hill 255,
the 5th Marines quickens its pace as it moves under
the wings of eagles: the carriers USS Badoeng Strait
and Sicily each have their eagles soaring overhead to
scour the area in front of the advancing troops. Tar-
gets are located and in the blink of an eye, Corsairs
attached to the 1st Marine Air Wing descend rapidly
to deliver stunning overdoses of close-air support
that eradicate the threats.
Usually, weather permitting, about 6 Corsairs re-
main in close proximity to the Marine ground troops
 183
during daylight hours. The Marine pilots mother
General Craig’s ground troops as they drive forward.
In the lead, the 1st Battalion, commanded by Lt.
Colonel Newton, takes Hill 308 and secures the
strategic road junction at Tosan. Then, the 2nd Bat-
talion, led by Lt. Colonel Harold Roise, sprints to the
point to spearhead the advance toward Kosong. En
route the 2nd Battalion encounters an enemy am-
bush at Taedabok Pass, less than ten miles from
Kosong.
To ensure progress, the 3rd Battalion, led by Lieu-
tenant Robert Taplett, pivots to take a calculated
shortcut to bounce ahead of the 2nd Battalion. How-
ever, a probing patrol led by Major Morgan Mc-
Neely ventures too far out front and vanishes around
a bend. The Communists spring an ambush that
shreds the jeep and nearly decimates the six-man pa-
trol. Company G then rounds the bend and spots
the destroyed jeep and the six Marines who are help-
lessly sprawled on the ground. Three of the Marines
are dead and the other three are grievously wounded.
Colonel McNeely (mortally wounded) is dragged to
safety by Lieutenant Westerman, but he, too, be-
comes wounded in the process. The remainder of
the advance patrol cannot be extricated until the fol-
lowing day (10th).
The Marines continue to eliminate the opposi-
tion along the coastal road. By the 11th, the resist-
ance in the high ground at the constricted Taedabok
Pass is totally silenced. Two Sherman tanks take the
point, trailed by Company H. The column starts a
nine-mile march to Kosong. It encounters enemy
opposition in the high ground along the approach,
but the resistance is rooted out and the advance re-
sumes.
As the leading 3rd Battalion encroaches the ob-
jective, supporting artillery of the 1st Battalion, 11th
Marines, begins to plaster the area near a road junc-
tion west of the town to adjust its fire. Through some
good fortune, some of the artillery shells fall among
concealed enemy vehicles. Thanks to the reaction of
the North Koreans, a bonanza results. Believing their
positions have been zeroed in, the enemy force (83rd
Motorized Regiment, 105th N.K. Division) hur-
riedly boards the vehicles to evacuate the area and
rush toward Sachon to escape what they think is grid
fire. The ensuing clouds of dust bring a clear focus
to a band of four Marine Corsairs from the carrier
Badoeng Strait that arrive over the Marine column.
The planes catch the enemy column as it flees.
The four Corsairs dive and attack the convoy from
extremely low altitude. They zoom over the column
of nearly 200 exposed vehicles and strafe the entire
line, creating instant disorientation. A huge multiple
vehicle accident occurs. While some trucks crash
into one another, others attempt to get off the road
to evade the incoming fire. Consequently, troops bolt
for cover, but the motorcyclists that are dispersed
between the vehicles get trapped in the massive pile
up.
August 7, 1950
Meanwhile, the airborne quartet swings around
to unleash another attack. During the planes’ sec-
ond low-level pass, enemy ground troops return fire
and hit two of the aircraft. One plane, piloted by
Captain Vivian Moses, crashes in a nearby rice
paddy. Captain Moses, knocked unconscious upon
impact, drowns.
The other crippled plane makes an emergency
landing. By this time, about forty vehicles have been
destroyed, and the surprised enemy motorized regi-
ment is going to get stung by another attack. A few
more Marines in Corsairs arrive overhead, and they
are joined by a group of swarming Air Force F-51s.
The heat gets turned up considerably. The aircraft
easily follow the path of the crunched convoy and
dose out more deadly fire to the blistering attack.
Wild explosions occur as the Corsairs strike ammu-
nition trucks, causing more panic. The vehicles that
survive the ordeal hobble toward Sachon.
Later, during the afternoon, the 5th Marines
reaches the rubble of the convoy; 24 jeeps, 31 trucks
and 45 motorcycles lie wasted. The estimate of
enemy casualties is 200. The Marines push past the
smoldering convoy and reach a point about four
miles west of Kosong, where they rest for the night.
In concert, the 5th Marines sweeps along the
coastal road, and the 5th Regimental Combat Team
has renewed its advance up the center, moving toward
Much’on-ni. On the 10th, the Army’s 5th Regimen-
tal Combat Team approaches Pongam-ni, a dingy
village of about twenty primitive mud huts with
thatched roofs, situated east of the pass near a junc-
tion of the primary east-west road. Another tiny vil-
lage, Taejong-ni, also east of the pass, sits several
hundred yards away. Enemy fortifications north of
the town, including Tundok, have been attacked by
naval planes, but the area in front of Pongam-ni
holds concentrations of enemy troops that had not
been discovered by the air observation sorties. The
enemy lurks in the heights on the north side of the
road that will be used by the 1st Battalion, RCT5, as
it attacks on the right.
The 2nd Battalion, commanded by Colonel
Throckmorton, operating on the left, drives along
the south side of the highway. The 1st Battalion,
under Lt. Col. John P. Jones, comes under fire by
the enemy in the northern heights, but the unit
reaches Pongam-ni and establishes its command post
there. The 3rd Battalion, 5th RCT, also advances
west, and on the following day (11th), it pushes for-
ward to the Much’on-ni Road fork to hook up with
the awaiting 35th Regiment to launch a scheduled
combined thrust toward Chinju Pass. The 3rd Bat-
talion’s departure from Pongam-ni strips the Head-
quarters 5th RCT and Battery C, 555th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, positions (east of the village) of all
infantry support.
Beyond the village road junction, about 400 yards
to the northeast and on the northern side of the east-
west road, lies an ominous hill that lacks foliage. It
August 7, 1950
is the western terminus of a protracted enemy-
occupied ridge that straddles the highway. Compa-
nies B and C, 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, occupy the
eastern sector of this ridge, but the enemy controls
the remainder and it intends to dominate the pass.
West of the road junction, two additional ridges that
shadow a 300-yard-wide valley converge about 1,000
U.S. troops pass a destroyed enemy tank. One of the soldiers carries a flamethrower (M2–2), which is
capable of using liquid fuel or thickened fuel.
184
yards from the villages. The 2nd Battalion, 5th Reg-
imental Combat Team deploys on the southern sec-
tor of both of these ridges; Company E remains in
Pongam-ni.
The east-west road leads out of the western edge
of Pongam-ni and hugs the base of the southern
ridge as it ascends radically from the valley. The
 185
highway then threads the pass at the point where the
northern and more elevated ridge adjoins the south-
ern ridge. And another valley lies north of Pongam-
ni. A dirt path from the northern exit of the town
moves through the valley to Sobuk-san, from where
a stream flows south and enters an eastward flowing
stream at the western edge of Pongam-ni.
In support of the mission, the artillerymen dis-
perse in and around the villages of Pongam-ni and
Taejong-ni, north of the east-west road; Battery C,
555th Artillery Battalion, places its guns near the
rear eastern positions of the Headquarters, 5th Reg-
imental Combat Team. Battery A, 555th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, deploys under a peculiar (to the
area) concrete bridge that spans the southern flowing
stream near its convergence with the eastern flowing
stream; Battery B establishes positions at the tip of the
village, astride the stream and Headquarters Battery
deploys within the village. In conjunction, at
Pongam-ni, on the opposite (west) side of the south-
ern flowing stream, the 90th Field Artillery Battal-
ion (minus one battery) establishes its positions.
After dark on the 10th, the North Koreans mount
vicious attacks against the Americans. The artillery
units and 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, remain embattled
throughout the night, and they continue the battle
straight through the daylight hours of the 11th. The
command post of the 2nd Battalion, west of
Pongam-ni, is also besieged, but Colonel Throck-
morton speeds word to the village calling for sup-
port from Company E. With the help of the rein-
forcements, the positions are held and the enemy is
driven back. During the unwieldy fighting, commu-
nication is lost between Battery A and its parent unit,
the 555th Field Artillery Battalion. The battalion
commander, Lt. Colonel John Daly, and Colonel
John P. Jones, 1st Battalion commander, accompanied
by infantry troops, attempt to reach the embattled
positions, but both Daly and Jones become
wounded.
Colonel Jones’ wound is debilitating. Colonel
Daly assumes temporary command of the 1st Bat-
talion. In concert with the attacks at Pongam-ni, the
units east of the village receive fierce attacks, but de-
spite the lack of infantry, Headquarters 5th RCT and
Battery C, 555th Field Artillery, hold the enemy at
bay. During the morning of the 11th, planes arrive
to throw their weight into the battle. The North Ko-
reans are driven back into the high ground. Through-
out the day, enemy snipers and an array of small
enemy detachments maintain pressure on the main
supply route out of Chindong-ni, but these are neu-
tralized by several tanks and an assault gun that ride
shotgun with the supply convoys as they move to the
forward positions of the 5th RCT.
By afternoon (11th), the 5th RCT, commanded
by Colonel Godwin Ordway, is prepared to push
through the pass west of the village and continue the
advance toward Chinju. But Colonel Ordway is con-
vinced that the convoy, including the artillery, must
August 7, 1950
move after dark to ensure success. Later, General
Kean instructs Colonel Ordway to push the force
west as soon as possible, and he also informs Ordway
that one battalion of the 24th Regiment is rushing to
Pongam-ni to cover his right flank. Colonel Ord-
way senses a potential disaster. He protests the day-
light movement. Following a prolonged telephone
conversation between Kean and Ordway, Kean re-
lents and grants permission for the regimental com-
bat team to move after dusk.
In conjunction, but unbeknownst to Colonel Or-
dway, General Kean had received instructions from
Eighth Army to prepare to release the 1st Provisional
Marine Brigade and the 5th Regimental Combat
Team upon orders from Army. Kean, who has also
been directed by Army to seize and defend the
Chinju Pass, has been instructed to dispatch Task
Force Min to Taegu, from where it can be transferred
to the South Korean Army.
At Pongam-ni, the evacuation of Colonel Jones is
arranged. At 1400, Lt. Colonel T.B. Roelofs (former
battalion commander), the Regimental S-2, arrives
to assume command of the 1st Battalion. Roelofs is
directed to seize control of the ridge west of Pongam-
ni. The objective controls the pass through which
the combat team must advance. Company B moves
from its positions on the ridge to the valley in prepa-
ration for the assault. Toward evening, the 1st Bat-
talion, supported by artillery units of the 2nd Bat-
talion, mounts its attack to clear the objective.
Company C drives west along the north ridge to
hook up with B Company, which is assigned the pri-
mary task of assaulting the hill on the right, which
dominates the terrain north of the pass. Company B
secures the ground north of the pass before dark.
However, during the morning hours the enemy
strikes back ferociously.
Subsequent to the seizure of the ground north of
the pass, the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, establishes a
command post about 300 yards west of Pongam-ni.
While the 5th Regimental Combat Team prepares
its advance, one platoon of Company A, 1st Battal-
ion, supported by a contingent of tanks, remains in
place north of the village along the Tundok Road.
The balance of Company A relieves the 2nd Battal-
ion, which is to spearhead the advance. The 2nd Bat-
talion, under Colonel Throckmorton, Battery C,
555th Field Artillery Battalion, and the vehicles
begin to form on the road at about 2100. But coun-
termanding orders arrive for Colonel Ordway, creat-
ing a dilemma. Despite the earlier agreement be-
tween Ordway and General Kean to move out after
dark, the new orders (from General Kean) call for
the immediate movement of the 2nd Battalion and
one battery of artillery. In addition, to the dismay
of Ordway, the remainder of the unit is to remain in
place until daylight. Colonel Ordway, still convinced
that a daylight move could mean slaughter, attempts
but fails to make contact with General Kean at di-
vision headquarters.
August 7, 1950
Assuming that Army and the divisional com-
manders have information that he lacks, Ordway
carries out the order and cancels movement of the
balance of the combat team. In the meantime, Bat-
tery C, Headquarters Battery and the 2nd Battalion
are heading west, and they have already moved be-
yond the top of the pass. Ordway attempts to reach
the vanguard by radio, but once it moved over the top
of the pass, radio contact was impossible. The 2nd
Battalion encounters and overcomes some opposi-
tion before it completes a five-mile westward ad-
vance to Taejong-ni, where it bivouacs until morn-
ing and expects the main body to join it. Meanwhile,
back at Pongam-ni, another tortuous night unfolds
at midnight (11th-12th).
The departure of the 2nd Battalion and artillery
elements weakens the 5th Regimental Combat Team,
but it is not expecting an immediate attack.
Nonetheless, the enemy expresses no empathy as it
prepares a night assault. The 1st Battalion remains
north of the road, and the remaining elements of the
555th Field Artillery Battalion are to its rear, dis-
persed within the two villages. Slightly east, beyond
the villages, the regimental headquarters and the
159th Field Artillery Battalion are dispersed. The
tranquility of the new day is shattered abruptly
slightly after 0100 on the 12th. Company C, 1st
Battalion, which had earlier supported the assault to
clear the northern ridge, comes under a tenacious
attack. The besieged unit loses communications with
battalion, but the thunderous sounds of the guns
alert the 1st Battalion to the danger. Frantic attempts
are made to establish radio contact, but without re-
sults.
A chain of reactions begins to emerge as the 13th
Regiment, N.K. 6th Division, unleashes its power.
Meanwhile a U.S. contingent is dispatched to lay
new communication wire, and messengers are sped
to the troubled area to establish contact and report
on the situation. Colonel Roelofs, the 1st Battalion
commander, contacts Colonel Ordway and details
the ensuing fight. Roelofs further explains the grav-
ity of the situation on the northern ridge. Colonel
Ordway, feeling obliged to obey the divisional or-
ders, declines Roelofs’ plea to extricate the artillery
and vehicles by pushing them through the pass to
safety. Once the conversation ends, Colonel Roelofs
departs his command post, bolts to his jeep and, ac-
companied by two staff officers, races east toward
Pongam-ni. The party passes elements of the regi-
ment that are forming the convoy along the road,
while apparently awaiting orders to roll west.
When Roelofs reaches the bridge that spans the
south-flowing stream at the western edge of
Pongam-ni, he encounters officers of the 555th Ar-
tillery Battalion, who also appear ready for orders to
evacuate. After passing by, Roelofs’ entourage turns
north to take the Tundok Road, a dirt path. Soon
after, they come upon Company A, 1st Battalion,
and several tanks that are posted nearby to guard the
186
crossroads and the rear artillery. The troops of Com-
pany A inform Roelofs that the sounds of small arms
fire and grenades have been heard in the vicinity of
Company C, but that no other enemy activity is ap-
parent. Actually, Company C is being overpowered
by the enemy and fighting for its survival as it is
ruggedly shoved off the ridge.
The ordeal becomes hellish. The 2nd Battalion,
unaware of the unfolding tragedy, advances. Mean-
while, the promised 24th Regiment is nowhere in
sight. Colonel Roelofs rushes back to the command
post, but his hopes of receiving good news about the
fate of C Company are quickly dashed. The runners
have returned, but they were unable to locate the
stranded company. To make matters worse, the
troops that had been dispatched to lay new wires be-
tween the command post and Company C have van-
ished. In addition, during Roelofs’ absence, observers
had noticed enemy flares shooting up from C Com-
pany’s location.
The dawn of August 12 is getting closer, but the
arrival of sunlight is not expected to make the situ-
ation any better. The artillerymen still lack infantry
protection. The infantrymen north of the village are
also imperiled and no reinforcements have reached
the beleaguered command. During these final but
nonetheless perplexing predawn hours, Colonel
Roelofs again persists in getting Colonel Ordway to
get the combat team on the road before the enemy
closes the noose and traps the command in the val-
ley.
After repeated failed attempts to receive permis-
sion from General Kean to move out before daylight,
Colonel Ordway remains convinced that the enemy
is taking the high ground above Pongam-ni. He is-
sues the order to abandon the area. At about 0400 the
convoy rolls west. The supply trucks take the lead,
trailed by the artillery. The convoy is under the pro-
tection of the 1st Battalion, which brings up the rear.
If all goes well, the supply trains should clear the
pass in less than one-half hour, with time to spare be-
fore the sun rises. But, immediately, a quagmire de-
velops along the road.
The traffic creeps forward by less than quantum
leaps, gaining only several feet between stops. As the
sluggish column passes the 1st Battalion command
post, a contingent of medical vehicles attempts to
merge with the column. One ambulance becomes
bogged down in a gully and paralyzes the entire col-
umn, as the darkness is slipping away to dawn. The
ambulance is towed from the ditch and the column
then begins to move at a slightly quicker pace, but
the sun begins to rise. The enemy that holds the high
ground begins to pop shells into the column. Colo-
nel Ordway’s vehicle proceeds over the top of the
pass just after daybreak and attempts to speed up the
column, but to no avail. He then attempts to clear
the road to permit the artillery to extricate itself from
the valley, but no shoulder space is available.
As Col. Ordway clears the top of the pass, another
 187
snafu develops. The platoon from Company A and
its contingent of tanks that had been ordered to
guard the northern approach of Pongam-ni and the
artillery there is spotted moving toward the tip of
the pass. Colonel Roelofs stops the unit and inquires
as to why it had deserted its positions; one officer
claims that he was ordered to pull out. The validity
of the explanation is never determined, but nonethe-
less, the artillery now stands naked in the village.
Attempts to return the unit to its positions are ini-
tiated, but the idea is scrapped because it is thought
that the reversal will probably cause another and
larger traffic jam.
While he attempts to keep the vehicles rolling at
a steady pace through the pass, Roelofs observes the
unfolding disaster back at Pongam-ni. Horrendous
firing commences and North Koreans plow into the
valley to strike the artillery positions from three sep-
arate directions. Enemy armor delivers massive blows
against the vehicular traffic and the village, causing
pandemonium. One truck is blown to oblivion as it
crosses the bridge that spans the south stream. The
huge explosion propels a wall of fire that snarls bridge
traffic. The troops with the convoy dive for protec-
tion, but the merciless attack continues at close-
quarters. The tanks and self-propelled guns bellow
from nearly point blank range.
The exposed howitzers of the 555th Field Artillery
Battalion attempt to engage the armor, but the effort
is futile and the guns of the 90th Field Artillery fare
poorly because the armor penetrates under the range
of the guns. Despite maximum effort, the 155s can-
not be lowered sufficiently to hit the encroaching
armor. However, the artillerymen choose not to ca-
pitulate, but rather to improvise and assume the role
of infantry to supplement the few guns that remain
operational.
Farther west, the forward elements of the column
complete a five-mile trek and reach the 2nd Battal-
ion positions at Taejong-ni, but the rear elements
are undergoing a ruthless ordeal. The platoon’s aban-
donment of its positions at the roadblock north of the
village permits enemy armor to move in without
meeting any resistance. These enemy gains grant
them positions from which they can strike with total
surprise from extremely close range at a time of their
choosing.
At Taejong-ni, Colonel Ordway arrives at the po-
sitions of the 2nd Battalion; 5th RCT, where he
meets with the forward elements of the convoy and
directs them to continue moving until they find a
suitable assembly area. Ordway expects this to help
keep the road open for the remainder of the convoy.
Additional troops reach the area and one of the of-
ficers informs Ordway of the ongoing slaughter of
the artillerymen at Pongam-ni. Ordway then heads
back to the beleaguered village. En route he encoun-
ters Colonel Roelofs’ weary 1st Battalion, which is
moving west. Colonel Ordway, in an attempt to sal-
vage the command, directs the 2nd Battalion to rush
August 7, 1950
back toward Pongam-ni to establish a rear-guard ac-
tion to protect the balance of the regiment.
The valley is quickly becoming known as “Bloody
Gulch” as the savagery of the enemy power is reach-
ing full throttle. The swiftness of the enemy infantry
is in cadence with the repeated direct hits of the
armor. The artillery positions of the 555th are pum-
meled, but three of the 105s continue to return fire
until about 0900. The 90th Field Artillery Battal-
ion (stationed west of the south-flowing stream) had
earlier sustained two direct hits on its 155-mm how-
itzers and remains under constant small-arms fire
that pours in from the ridge just north of the be-
sieged road. The effectiveness of the enemy fire is
overwhelming, and the lopsided struggle approaches
total massacre.
Once the sun comes up, Corsairs from the carri-
ers arrive. Undaunted by lack of communication
with the embattled ground troops, the Marine pi-
lots modify their low level attack by following the
arc of the tracer shells toward the enemy positions.
Even this powerful strafing and rocket barrage fail
to halt the North Koreans. The crewmen of the 4.2-
inch mortar contingent are struck with blistering fire
that inflicts serious casualties. The mortarmen must
halt the return fire to seek temporary refuge. Other
segments of the remnants of the artillery command
are being squeezed between the proverbial rocks.
Unequivocally, it is the individual courage of the be-
leaguered troops that forestalls total disaster.
Some additional help arrives in the form of Air
Force F-51s, which effectively strafe the enemy po-
sitions to bolster the perimeter. The 5th RCT Team’s
contingent of heavy machine guns is dug in strongly
and not easily dislodged. Menacing return fire im-
pedes the enemy on the ridge, while the remnant
convoy elements continue their desperate attempt to
clear the pass. Meanwhile, an enemy machine gun,
positioned to the rear and slightly south of the road,
begins firing for range, but some quick action by a
U.S. truck driver takes out and kills the machine
gunner before he scores any damage.
The pressure of the enemy fire is becoming un-
bearable in the valley. Individual acts of courage con-
tinue to hold back the onslaught. West of the south-
ern stream at the positions of the 90th Field Artillery
Battalion, the predawn assault had also arrived with
a thunderous roar. Two of the howitzers are blown
up and the fires ignite some ammunition trucks of
Company A. Nonetheless, the transformed artillery-
men refuse to budge. Making good use of their fox-
holes, the newly christened infantrymen of the 90th
Field Artillery Battalion handle the machine guns
and rifles as if they were sharpshooters, to convinc-
ingly repulse the North Korean attack against their
perimeter.
One resilient soldier, PFC William Baumgartner,
commandeers a machine gun mounted on a truck.
Singlehandedly he pours fire upon the advancing
enemy until an incoming round scores a direct hit
August 7, 1950
that destroys his weapon. Baumgartner escapes
death, but he loses consciousness and drops from the
vehicle. When he revives, Baumgartner assumes the
position of rifleman and rejoins the fight to hold the
perimeter. This, too, is futile, as no reinforcements
are yet on scene. By 0900 on the 12th, it becomes ap-
parent that the artillery positions of the 90th Field
Artillery are doomed.
Slightly east, the enemy has also plowed into the
lines of Battery B, 159th Field Artillery Battalion,
but this predawn strike consists of less velocity and
tails off at about 0800. Nonetheless, its bite is deadly.
Several trucks laden with gasoline and ammunition
are blown and still others remain nearby to jeopard-
ize the unit. Several fearless drivers bolt to the sur-
viving trucks and recklessly speed the rolling am-
munition and gasoline vehicles from the area. Few
vehicles in the sector east of the bridge at Pongam-
ni survive the enemy barrages.
Back at the pass, Colonel Roelofs continues his
dogged attempt to extricate the survivors from the
nightmarish gulch, which is becoming an amphithe-
ater of death and destruction. Roelofs has no way of
communicating with the survivors at Pongam-ni.
He relies solely on information from the men who are
moving along the road toward the top of the ill-fated
pass. By now, some reinforcements are en route, but
it is too late. The melee becomes even more grue-
some as the enemy draws the noose tightly. Planes
continue to strafe the attackers, while the able sur-
vivors of the 90th Field Artillery Battalion band to-
gether. Some provide cover fire while others place
the wounded on the few vehicles still able to escape
from the valley.
The 90th Field Artillery Battalion sustains ten
dead, 60 wounded and about thirty men missing.
The 555th Field Artillery, which had been swamped
by the enemy at about 0900, is ravaged; it loses eight
105-mm howitzers, and on the following day (13th),
eighty percent of its troops are absent from duty.
The infantry ranks have also been decimated.
By this time, most of those able to escape the hor-
ror of the gulch have done so. Colonel Roelofs is
briefed on the debacle at the village by an artillery of-
ficer who is moving west with several other strag-
glers. The officer informs Roelofs that the survivors
are escaping by whatever means possible, but he re-
lates that all remaining vehicles are destroyed.
Roelofs decides to make one last effort before writ-
ing off the trapped men. He leads a small contin-
gent back toward the village.
Meanwhile, the final elements of the 1st Battalion,
5th RCT, accompanied by three tanks approach the
tip of the pass. Roelofs, who had been unaware of
any armor being in the village, is surprised to see the
armor. One of the tanks is directed to pull over and
wait in place, while the others continue moving west
through the pass. Company A still has elements at the
pass and Company B remains engaged in the hills
north of it. Company C, which had been struck
188
by the initial thrust of the attack, is now composed
of only twenty-three troops, who will straggle into the
1st Battalion positions while Roelofs is en route to the
village.
The 4.2-inch mortar platoon and the heavy ma-
chine gun platoon, which had peppered the enemy-
held ridge to the north, are each ordered to move
west. Meanwhile, Colonel Roelofs moves closer to the
village and he encounters the final vehicle moving
west, a jeep driven by Chaplain Francis A. Kapica.
The chaplain informs Colonel Roelofs that he has
recovered every wounded man he could locate, con-
vincing Roelofs that his probe into the village is use-
less. Both vehicles then return to the pass, where
Roelofs boards the waiting tank as it begins to head
west. The remnants of the 5th Regimental Combat
Team move over the rim with Company A at the
point, trailed by the survivors of Company C, which
had originally comprised 180 troops. Company B
disengages from battle on the ridge and withdraws by
platoon under cover of fire supplied by the three
tanks, which form the rear of the column behind
Company B. This, the final contingent, departs at
about 1000.
There has been much activity in conjunction with
the tragedy at Pongam-ni and the surrounding area,
but no action taken had brought any relief to the
men at the village. The 2nd Battalion is in motion
and will arrive at the pass during the morning. How-
ever, the battle has subsided and only a few strag-
glers move into the battalion positions near the pass.
No troops reach 2nd Battalion positions subsequent
to noon. Colonel Throckmorton, believing that the
North Koreans are maneuvering to attack the regi-
mental command post at Pongam-ni, requests and re-
ceives permission to return there at 1500. His return
is timely, as an enemy attack will occur on the fol-
lowing day.
Other reinforcements are also to be rushed to the
area. General Barth, after an unsuccessful attempt
to reach the embattled troops at the pass, informs
General Kean of the crisis. General Kean immediately
orders the 24th Regiment to dispatch its 3rd Battal-
ion, with instructions to attack through the hills and
get to Pongam-ni; Kean also contacts General Craig,
USMC, and orders him to send a contingent of re-
inforcements (5th Marines) to reopen the middle
road to the rear of the 5th RCT (USA).
In the meantime, the 5th Marines, having
bivouacked about four miles west of Kosong during
the night of the 11th-12th, gets an early start on the
12th. The 1st Battalion moves in front of the 3rd
Battalion, then pushes forward toward Chinju. It
advances about eleven miles without incident and
reaches a point less than five miles short of Sach’on
by 1200. At about this time, word reaches the 5th
Marines instructing Lt. Colonel George Newton to
send the 3rd Battalion to aid the artillerymen of the
5th RCT at Pongam-ni. By about 1300, the 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, is speeding toward Pongam-ni.
 189
The Marines are presently involved with the enemy
near Kosong, but the 3rd Battalion detaches itself, re-
verses direction and arrives within three miles of
Pongam-ni by 1400.
While the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, rushes to
support the 5th RCT, the other Marine units con-
tinue to move toward the sounds of the guns. Ad-
vance elements of the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
reach Changchon (Changallon) at about 1300, not
quite expecting an ambush, but the hills are infested
with the enemy and the coiled trap is about to be
sprung. Concealed at the village are units of the 2nd
Battalion, N.K. 6th Division, and contingents of the
83rd N.K. Motorized Regiment.
The enemy, which felt the deadly sting of the
Marines and their accompanying aircraft on the pre-
vious day, is apparently too anxious to waste the
Marines. In haste, they commence fire on the lead
jeeps of Company B’s reconnaissance platoon, which
alerts the entire command. Additional enemy fire
also strikes the main body of Company B, igniting
heavy fighting. The Marines react instinctively. Per-
shing tanks rush to the front. Captain Tobin, B
Company commander, speeds the 3rd Platoon for-
ward to take out the enemy, entrenched on the hills
that had fired upon the reconnaissance jeeps. In syn-
chronization, Company A attacks a hill to the right.
Marine pilots that are overhead to cover the advance
immediately dive their Corsairs toward the hills and
unleash tenacious fire that riddles the enemy ma-
chine gun emplacements. And then in a flash, the
planes spot an enemy convoy that is scurrying from
the area and streaming hurriedly toward Sach’on.
The aircraft pounce upon the convoy.
Meanwhile, Company A attacks to the right while
Company B peels off to the left and charges the
enemy entrenched in the hills there. At a frenzied
pace, the Marines charge the hills and take the fight
to the North Koreans. On the hill to the north, the
3rd Platoon enjoys initial success and secures the hill,
but the enemy regroups on the reverse slope and
mounts a stiff counterattack that begins to shove the
Marines back off the ridge. The 3rd Platoon gives
ground, but then after losing about half the hill, it
holds firmly. The hill to the left is seized by Company
B and to the right Hill 202 falls to Company A, at
1700 and 2000 respectively.
Exhausted after the day-long fighting, the
Marines, lacking food and water, sack out to get
some rest. The Marines sustain three killed and 13
wounded. The North Koreans prepare to ignite an-
other donnybrook while the Marines are sleeping.
Back at Pongam-ni, the 24th Regiment, which
had been promised by General Kean on the previous
day (11th), never arrives. On this day the 3rd Bat-
talion, 24th Regiment, moves toward Pongam-ni,
but en route it encounters an enemy force composed
of about two companies. The 24th Regiment’s two
attacking companies, composed of a combined
strength of more than two hundred troops, receive
August 7, 1950
some sparse incoming mortar fire, but it apparently
mortifies the troops. The two companies are soon
reduced to about fifty percent of strength. The sit-
uation deteriorates rapidly. By day’s end the 3rd Bat-
talion sustains a total of ten casualties and three of
these are officers.
Lt. Colonel John Corley, who assumed command
August 9, is an exceptional commanding officer with
much experience during World War II. Corley’s reg-
iment continues the attack toward the besieged 3rd
Battalion, 24th Regiment, but on the following day
(13th), each of the two attacking companies are com-
posed of less than platoon strength, consisting of 20
and 35 troops. The disappearance of these troops is
not related to casualties, but rather massive derelic-
tion of duty. Ultimately, the 24th Regimental attack
comes to a halt less than three miles from the lost
positions of the artillery.
Other attempts to get reinforcements to the area
on the 12th also fall short. A platoon of the 72nd
Engineer Combat Battalion sets out to secure the
blocked road, but it too is ambushed. The mission
fails. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
reaches Kogan-ni by about 1600. To the dismay of
the enemy, the Corsairs from the carriers, which have
been adeptly covering the Marine advance, are also
back on the scene. Marine artillery units deliver large
quantities of potent howitzer shells into the enemy
positions. The massive barrage, combined with the
low-level attacks of the Corsairs, proclaims the arrival
of the 5th Marines, which launches a dogged attack.
By dusk, the heights east of Pongam-ni and north
of the road are tucked under the wings of the 5th
Marines. On the morning of the 13th, the 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, launches another strong attack
to attempt rescue of any remaining survivors of the
Triple Nickel (555th) Field Artillery Battalion. The
attack gains another ridge by 1000, and still the
Marines have incurred no casualties, but before the
attack is completed, new orders arrive, aborting the
mission prematurely.
At this point, the Marines are virtually operating
on two separate fronts; their regimental components
are separated by about twenty-five rough miles. The
practical introduction of a new war machine, the
multi-use helicopter, greatly eases the command
problems. General Craig utilizes the new craft to
swing back and forth quickly to issue orders and
maintain strict control of his divided command. At
about midnight (12th-13th), Lt. Colonel Newton
is ordered to depart Changchon and return the 2nd
and 3rd Battalions, 5th Marines, to Chindong-ni,
in an apparent response to another trouble spot along
the Pusan Perimeter. The Marines who first encoun-
tered the Communists on August 7 have now driven
the North Korean 6th Division back about 22 miles.
However, the withdrawal is more complicated than
the Marines would prefer, partly because of an ap-
parent deadly mistake on Hill 202.
At Changchon on the 13th, the North Koreans
August 7, 1950
commence a predawn attack against Company B’s
positions on Hill 202, catching some of the Marines
off guard. The two-pronged assault strikes the flank
and the front of the night-perimeter at 0445. Evi-
dently, some of the sentries on the left flank had
fallen asleep, permitting the charging North Koreans
to startle the unsuspecting defenders and seize two
machine guns in the process. Gruesome fighting oc-
curs as the 3rd Platoon attempts to neutralize the at-
tack, which now includes fire from their own guns.
Lt. Colonel Newton instructs the 3rd Platoon to
hold on, as he proclaims that help is on the way. Ar-
tillery fire is thrown against the attackers with
tremendous effectiveness. The Marines unleash some
3.5 rocket launchers and at dawn and the two cap-
tured guns are silenced. While the 3rd Platoon sur-
vivors hold their flank, Newton reels in the 1st and
2nd Platoons to form one rigid line. Incessant fight-
ing continues for about one hour, but the combined
tenacity and effective return fire offered by the
Marines finally drive the enemy back to the bottom
of the hill.
Subsequent to the withdrawal of the North Kore-
ans, Newton is ordered to pull out immediately and
converge on the road for the trip back to Chindong-
ni. Twelve Marines are killed, eighteen are wounded
and eight men are missing.
Captain John Tobin, USMC, requests permission
to send a detachment to bring out the bodies of the
eight missing Marines, but the request is denied on
the grounds that the regiment is behind schedule and
must speed to Chindong-ni. The Marines are shat-
tered by the unexpected decision to leave their dead
A Pershing M26 medium tank is in position at Naktong River to thwart enemy crossing.
190
buddies behind. Nonetheless, the painful march pro-
ceeds as the 1st and 2nd Battalions move out. Tanks
and engineers cover the rear.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, hav-
ing gained the heights overlooking the seized posi-
tions of the artillery on the previous day, commences
an attack on the 13th to attempt rescue of any sur-
viving men of the 555th FAB who might still be near
the bridge over the southern stream at Pongam-ni.
A helicopter transporting Colonel Murray attempts
to convey word that help is on the way, but enemy
fire prevents him from getting close. The assaulting
Marines advance to the hill overtop the objective,
but the only troops they observe are enemy. The 3rd
Battalion sets up for the attack. In the meantime,
orders arrive that bar further movement and instruct
the battalion to move to Masan and rejoin the regi-
ment. It is never determined whether troops of the
artillery battalion had been at the bridge.
Farther west, at Much’on-ni, the 35th Regiment
and 3rd Battalion, 5th RCT, advance from the road
fork to Chinju Pass, and except for several patrols, the
force halts there. During the afternoon (13th), the
contingent begins to move east to return to U.S.
lines. The troops are exhausted. Along the return
route, military police are scheduled to guide the col-
umn to particular areas of assembly, but confusion
abounds and during the night, the contingent winds
up in a dry streambed near Chindong-ni. Finally, as
daylight arrives on the 14th, the various troops that
are scattered about are able to identify one another.
At Taejong-ni, the 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT, under
Colonel Throckmorton, intercepts and beats back
 191
an enemy attack during the morning. After the en-
counter it boards trucks, moves to the road fork and
from there heads east to Masan. By the following
day, Task Force Kean is back at its starting point.
The Chinju Pass had not been seized as expected.
But, Eighth Army does achieve some success. The
western offensive puts a large indentation in the N.K.
6th Division, preventing it from overrunning the
western flank, and the support provided by the 1st
Provisional Marine Brigade is a boost to U.S. forces.
Troops of Eighth Army begin to hold the line dur-
ing the crucial days to follow. Later, General
Matthew Ridgway, USA, pays eloquent tribute to
the Marines and their tanks, noting that their armor
was up to the task against the enemy T-34s: “This
force saved the day in the South and stopped the
enemy column in its tracks.” Ridgway also notes that
the U.S. planes could not stop the advance because
of the enemy resorting to night marches. Task Force
Kean will be disbanded on August 16; it has inflicted
serious casualties upon the enemy, but the operation
also costs heavy U.S. casualties.
Subsequent to the week’s fighting and the disso-
lution of Task Force Kean, the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade departs Chindong-ni on August 15 and
moves north by trains to Miryang to come under the
jurisdiction of General Church’s 24th Division. The
brigade is scheduled to participate in the Battle of
the Naktong, the final natural barrier in front of the
Pusan Perimeter. In conjunction, the 5th Regimen-
tal Combat Team, the 24th Regiment and the 35th
Regiment will deploy along the 25th Division’s line
on the southwest perimeter. The N.K. 6th Division
deploys defensively in the mountains west of Masan
and faces the 25th Division.
— In the United States: Eighty thousand volun-
teer Marine Corps reservists (every reservist in the
country) receive word of imminent activation. The
increase will bring the corps up to a strength of
200,000. About 50,000 will be on active duty by
October 31.
August 7 Three medium tank battalions arrive
from the U.S. at Pusan and on the following day, they
debark. The 6th Medium Tank Battalion reverts to
Eighth Army reserve near Taegu and the 7th Tank Bat-
talion enjoins the 1st Cavalry Division. The 73rd Tank
Battalion will be dispersed among various sectors of the
Pusan Perimeter. Company A will deploy at Ulsan to
protect the primary eastern supply road; Company B is
assigned as support for Task Force Bradley at Kirye and
Kyongju. In addition, the 27th Regiment will be aug-
mented by Company C to bolster its efforts north of
Taegu.
Also, Generals Ridgway and Norstad and Averell
Harriman fly into Taegu from Japan to confer with
General Walker. General Ridgway is not impressed
with the condition of Eighth Army, its staff or its com-
manding general; Ridgway turns in a stinging report
to the JCS. In other activity at Taegu, the 822d Engi-
August 7, 1950
neer Aviation Battalion, USAF, completes the initial
phase of construction on a new runway, designed to
increase Air Force operations there.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: (See also, August
7–August 15, 1950) In the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines
sector near Chindong-ni, the area around Colonel Ta-
plett’s command post near Hill 255 is struck by some
enemy shelling between 0100 and 0300, but otherwise
the night is fairly quiet. At about 0600, Taplett receives
word from Lieutenant Cahill’s platoon informing him
of the situation and of the casualties incurred while at-
tempting to reach the crest of Hill 342.
At dawn, the reinforced platoon, Company G, 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines, resumes its climb; it ascends
the high ground that hooks Hill 342 with its eastern
knob. Afterward, the platoon swings over slightly to
enable an advance against the summit from the south-
east. The burning sun and ghastly heat drain the
Marines’ stamina. Water discipline vanishes in an at-
tempt to quench an intolerable thirst. At times, an ad-
vance of only a few feet is lost again as the men stum-
ble back down the slope.
Following the exhaustion of the meager water sup-
ply, some Marines slip into unconsciousness. Others
are consumed with excruciating, buckling pain.
Nonetheless, despite the irregular formation of the ad-
vancing platoon, the NCOs encourage the advance.
Cahill and Sergeant Lee Buettner bolt ahead of the pack
to contact the besieged army unit. As they reach a point
about seventy-five yards from the crest, enemy fire rips
into the two-man detachment. This is the initial enemy
fire upon the Marines in Korea. Cahill orders Buettner
to lay back and lead the platoon up a draw while he
sprints through the daunting fire to reach the crest. At
0830, Cahill meets the company commander. Both
men scrutinize the perimeter and the three hard-hit
platoons. The company commander explains that the
mortars had been sent down to the base of the hill, be-
cause they attracted excessive enemy fire that rendered
them ineffective.
Meanwhile, Marine reinforcements arrive at the
peak, having sustained 1 man killed and six wounded,
including Sergeant Robert Robinson, the platoon ser-
geant, and Sergeant Thomas Blackmon, the platoon
guide. Blackmon has sustained a mortal wound, but he
insists upon reaching the crest to join Cahill. Some ad-
ditional Marines that have sustained heat prostration
and one that suffers a nervous condition remain far-
ther down the slope.
Meanwhile, at 0200, the large convoy transporting
the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, commanded by Lt.
Colonel Harold Roise, moves from Changwon to
Chindong-ni and arrives there at about 0500. The ve-
hicular traffic initially becomes congested and soon
after, it totally bogs down near Hill 255 as vehicles at-
tempt to turn around in a school yard. Enemy mortars
and artillery fire begin shelling the area while the
Marines are debarking the trucks. Colonel Murray
(CO, 5th Marines), his own vehicle among those halted
north of Chindong-ni along the MSR, instructs Roise
August 7, 1950
A ground crew loads .50-caliber ammunition aboard an F-80 Shoot- The task is given to Roise’s 2nd
ing Star jet.
to keep the trucks moving despite the shelling. Roise
replies that excessive mud in the schoolyard is stalling
the convoy, not the enemy shelling.
Eventually, when the convoy enters Chindong-ni,
Colonel Murray directs the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
to deploy on a stretch of Hill 255 above Company H’s
(3rd Bn.) positions. Murray also directs the 1st Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, to relieve Company G, 3rd Battalion,
on Hill 99, which releases it to augment Colonel Ta-
plett’s perimeter on the lower portion of Hill 255. Sub-
sequent to relief, Bohn’s contingent redeploys on the
opposite side of the valley along the lower slopes of Hill eastern base of the hill. Finn is informed that Com-
255 to face Haman Road. Enemy snipers spend the
night ringing the perimeter with shells.
Colonel Taplett’s 3rd Battalion area in Chindong-
ni remains relatively quiet after dawn. However, Cap-
tain Fegan (Company H) and Lieutenant Bohn (Com-
pany G), positioned on Hills 255 and 99 respectively,
do on occasion call in artillery fire to intercept enemy
movement along the northern approaches to Chindong-
ni. In related activity, 2nd Lieutenant Lawrence Her-
192
rick’s 3rd Platoon, Company A en-
gineers finish setting the initial Ma-
rine minefield. It stretches across
Haman Road one-half mile in front
of Chindong-ni.
Also, General Craig arrives by
helicopter at Chindong-ni slightly
after 0700 during an enemy bom-
bardment of the area. Craig imme-
diately establishes phone contact
with the 5th RCT to maintain
communications with the unit’s
progress at Tosan, which has a di-
rect connection with the Marine
brigade’s scheduled assault. Craig
receives command of all troops in
the area of Chindong-ni. At 1120,
he moves to the front to see first-
hand the progress of the 5th RCT.
It becomes clear that enemy resist-
ance is nominal, but progress is
stymied because the MSR that ex-
tends from Sangnyong at the foun-
dation of Hill 342’s spurs to the
strategic junction at Tosan is
crammed with equipment, troops
and vehicles.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion,
5th Marines, which has just begun
the ascent to occupy Hill 255, re-
ceives new orders. The Marines had
been ordered to dispatch a battalion
to advance to Hill 342, relieve
Cahill’s 1st Platoon, 3rd Battalion,
and the 2nd Battalion, 5th RCT,
then capture the balance of the hill.
Battalion. The 2nd Battalion, hav-
ing slept none during the night,
sets out toward Hill 342. At the
road junction, where the Eighth Army guide had met
Lieutenant Cahill during the previous night, Roise
splits his command. He sends Company D, com-
manded by Captain John Finn, up the north fork to
seize the eastern spur and the hill; Company E, now
led by Lieutenant William Sweeney, is ordered to move
around the rear of Sangnyong and capture the western
spur of Hill 342.
Major Morgan McNeely, 2nd Battalion S-3, and
Captain Finn move ahead by jeep to Taepyong at the
pany D is to relieve a unit of the 5th RCT in the heights
above some thatched huts, and he is told that the ascent
would be uncontested by organized resistance. In the
meantime, the torrid heat of mid-afternoon begins to
seriously affect the overtired troops of Company D.
When the column arrives at the base of the hill, it is
immediately greeted with heavy enemy rifle and ma-
chine gun fire that originates in the village of Tokkong-
ni on the opposite side of the valley and from the
 193
heights above the road. This unexpected fire quickly
dissipates the notion of an easy ascent.
Simultaneously, Captain Finn orders his Marines to
disperse into the rice paddies just off the road while he
calls for his platoon leaders. Finn directs that the enemy
fire from the village be disregarded in order to concen-
trate on seizing the hill. The 1st Platoon, led by 2nd
Lieutenant Arthur Oakley, drives to take the right flank
and advances up the southern slope of Hill 342, while
the 2nd Platoon, led by 2nd Lieutenant Wallace Reid,
passes through Taepyong-ni and ascends the hill at its
linkage with the spur. On the left flank, the 3rd Platoon,
under 2nd Lt. Edward Emmelman, advances directly
toward the crest of the spur. Company D, against spo-
radic resistance, reaches the spur, but five casualties are
inflicted by enemy fire. Nonetheless, a more powerful
enemy, the excruciating heat, takes a severe toll. Twelve
Marines fall totally unconscious and the remainder
hangs on the brink of complete exhaustion.
Finn establishes his command post in the heights
above the village of Taepyong-ni, along with the ac-
companying mortars. During the early evening and
without rest, Finn leads the three rifle platoons toward
the summit to reach Cahill’s platoon and the 5th RCT.
The platoons reach positions several hundred yards
from the crest, and then Finn contacts Colonel Roise to
report on the condition of his men. During the pause,
Lieutenant Arthur Oakley, 1st Platoon, moves forward
and greets the defenders on the crest. Cahill and the
Army company commander descend the slope with
Oakley to confer with Captain Finn. The Army officer
urges Finn to suspend the climb until dawn. He assures
Finn that his soldiers and Cahill’s Marines can un-
doubtedly hold the summit until then. Captain Finn in-
forms Colonel Roise of the meeting and Roise then
permits Company D to hold in place and relieve the
troops on the summit at dawn.
The mission of Company E goes off with less enemy
resistance, but equally nasty weather, as it advances.
Along the route to take the western spur of Hill 342, the
enemy strikes with futile long-range machine gun fire.
The column reaches the halfway point on the ridge at
dusk, and then concentrates on establishing a night
perimeter. In the 1st Bn. (reinforced), 11th Marines
sector around Chindong-ni, Lt. Colonel Ransom
Wood’s batteries had exchanged shells with the enemy
on the previous night; they expended 87 rounds in sup-
port of the 5th Marines.
By this day, the enemy fire has registered on the ar-
tillery positions. During the pre-dawn hours (7th), one
Marine battery receives a direct hit from an enemy 102-
mm shell that destroys one 105-mm howitzer and kills
two Marines; eight others are wounded. The incident
becomes another lesson for the Marines. Subsequent
to this tragedy, the Marine artillerymen require no
prodding to dig ammunition pits, foxholes and gun
pits.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: During darkness
(6th-7th), elements of the N.K. 4th Division continue
to cross the Naktong River in the 24th Division sector
August 7, 1950
to bolster the other forces that have already penetrated
east of the river. During the morning of the 7th, the
19th Regiment and Company B, 1st Battalion, 34th
Regiment, re-initiate the attack to eliminate the enemy
threat. The supply road that leads to the front remains
open, but still the units face a critical shortage of rations
and water as they advance against tenacious resistance.
Air strikes are requested, but when the planes arrive to
bolster the attack, they inadvertently pummel the 19th
Regiment, which exasperates the ground troops. The
combination of lack of food and water and the scorch-
ing heat promises little success. The mistaken air strikes
guarantee failure.
Meanwhile, Company B drives forward and contacts
troops of the heavy mortar company who had earlier
disappeared from their positions near Obong-ni Ridge
during the morning of the 6th. Soon after the recovery
of these troops, B Company pulls back. The enemy
maintains its pressure and gains a tight hold on Obong-
ni Ridge, and on Cloverleaf Hill, slightly north of the
pass. Cloverleaf Hill received its name because it re-
sembles a four leaf clover, but it has not yet proved to
be a good luck charm for the Americans.
From these two vantage points, the enemy is able to
easily observe the Americans’ main supply route, which
runs from Yongsan about five miles down the road.
Obong-ni Ridge, slightly lower than Cloverleaf, lies
south of the pass. It extends mildly southeast for about
one and one-half miles, but is saddled with a chain of
knobs that ascend 300 to 500 feet over the rice paddies
that are along its foundation.
In Company A’s (34th Regiment) sector above the
Naktong, the enemy still holds positions that threaten
to dislodge Colonel Alfonso’s command. Planes attempt
to drop food and supplies during the afternoon, but
nearly half of the shipment misses the mark and after-
wards, the contingent sustains casualties from enemy
fire while gathering the supplies. Nonetheless, the com-
pany holds its ground. During the night of the 7th,
more North Koreans move across the river to fortify
the high ground at the pass to further ensure control of
the east-west road. It is estimated that about two addi-
tional Communist battalions arrive.
In other activity, General Walker orders the 9th Reg-
iment, 2nd Division, recently attached to the 24th Di-
vision, to report to General Church. Colonel Hill’s 9th
RCT will arrive at division headquarters at 0830 on
the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The N.K.
15th Division’s 45th Regiment moves through Sonsan,
then crosses the Naktong southeast of it. Aircraft strike
the moving column. Once across the river, the enemy
regiment advances into the mountains and drives to-
ward Taegu. Initially, it encounters no resistance. After
dark during the night of the 7th-8th, the N.K. 48th
and 50th Regiments cross the river at two separate ferry
crossings, both located north of Waegwan, between it
and Indong. About two battalions cross at the upper
ferry site about six miles north of Waegwan under the
cover fire of tanks posted on the western bank. The
August 8, 1950
vehicles and armor also make their crossing here by
using an underwater bridge. Hill 201 and Hill 306,
both on the east bank of the river, opposite the upper
ferry site, are secured by elements of the enemy 15th Di-
vision, prior to its units moving into the hills to initi-
ate a seven-mile eastward advance to Tabu-dong.
Meanwhile, the ROK troops attempt to forestall the
enemy advance. Eighth Army works at a feverish pace
to bolster the South Koreans if the enemy makes a solid
breakthrough toward Taegu.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: In the area
near Yongdok, heavy skirmishing continues between
the S.K. 3rd Division and the N.K. 5th Division. Col-
onel Emmerich, KMAG advisor to the S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion, receives another urgent message from General
Walker. The dispatch underscores the strategic value
of the 520-foot bridge that spans the Osip-ch’on River
south of Yong-dok, at Kanggu-dong. Walker explic-
itly orders the bridge held without fail. A squad of en-
gineers from the 24th Division has been overseeing the
demolitions there, but it is recalled to Taegu. Korean
troops receive the responsibility. The South Koreans
are ordered to hold the bridge; with orders that it is to
be destroyed only upon specific orders from KMAG
advisor Major Britton.
In Air Force activity, U.S. Air Force B-29s attack P’y-
ongyang. The raids inflict heavy damage to the rail
yards, and an arsenal is nearly totally decimated. Planes
also strike the Chosin Petroleum facility at the port
town of Wonsan. The complex produces more than
ninety percent of the N.K. petroleum products. New
air raids occur on the 9th and 10th that completely de-
stroy it. The raids are carried out by the 98th Bomber
Group, its first raids since its recent arrival in Japan. In
other activity, the 39th Fighter Squadron, USAF, arrives
at Yonil Airfield.
August 8 Southwestern Pusan Perimeter: (See
also, August 7-15, 1950.) General Craig, USMC,
holds temporary command of all units in the vicinity
of the Masan-Chinju axis, including the Army opera-
tions along the front and those to the rear of TF Kean.
Craig orders the 5th RCT to maintain its drive to seize
Tosan to permit the Marine units to advance on the
road to Sach’on.
In the 5th RCT zone, the regiment resumes its push
toward the objective, against even stronger resistance
than it had encountered on the previous day. The 5th
RCT makes some progress from its departure point
near Singi, but it is hindered by the narrowness of the
main supply route and the huge traffic jams along it. In
addition, the advance is further slowed due to tena-
cious fighting above it on Hills 255 and 342.
In the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines zone, the 1st Battal-
ion lacks a definitive objective, but it is to drive down
the south fork of the Tosan junction, in accordance
with the attack strategy of TF Kean. Newton’s 1st Bat-
talion descends from its positions on Hill 99 on sched-
ule at 0600, but the unit gets bogged down due to the
giant traffic jam on the bridges along the main supply
194
route directly under Hill 99. The immobilized army
vehicles clog the road and Eighth Army ground troops
overwhelm the area, compelling the Marines to remain
in place. General Craig orders Colonel Newton to sus-
pend the advance until the snafu is cleared.
Meanwhile, Company B, 1st Battalion, commanded
by Captain Tobin, is ordered to return to the heights
from where it had come while the 1st Battalion awaits
(three miles from its departure point) orders to move.
Eventually, the crammed road is opened and word ar-
rives for the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, to begin its
drive. Colonel Newton, walking in advance of the col-
umn, arrives at the command post of the 5th RCT,
about one and one-half miles ahead, perched on a small
slope between the villages of Singi and Oryong. He is
informed by the Army regimental commander, Colo-
nel Godwin Ordway, that troops of the 5th RCT have
been dispersed into the heights that surround Tosan.
Newton is also informed that the rice paddies separat-
ing the command post (CP) from the hill are inun-
dated with enemy troops, which in effect have isolated
the companies in the high ground.
As Newton and Ordway confer, the leading contin-
gents of the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, catch up with
Newton, but again the battalion stalls. At about the
same time, a soggy and disgruntled Army staff sergeant
reaches the area and confirms the news. He informs the
officers that the troops south of the road junction near
Hill 308 are engaged in a severe fire fight. The sergeant
adds that he crawled almost the entire distance back to
headquarters to evade the ferocious enemy machine
gun fire covering the huge rice paddy between the CP
and the hill.
Meanwhile, General Kean spots Lt. Colonel Murray,
CO, 5th Marines, as his vehicle passes while en route
from Chindong-ni to the front; Kean halts Murray and
orders him to execute relief of the 1st Battalion, 5th
RCT. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, withdraws to the
fringes of Sangnyong to an assembly area under the
western spur of Hill 342.
While at the assembly area, Colonel Murray receives
instructions to relieve the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT, at
its positions southwest of Tosan at midnight August 8,
and then the Marines are to terminate the resistance.
The orders specify that the relief force is to be at the 5th
RCT CP by 2300, where it will be joined by guides
who will lead the contingent to Hill 308. The Marine
relief force arrives at the command post at 2200, but no
guides are there. And the Marines find that the Army
troops (1st, Bn. 5th RCT) are prematurely withdraw-
ing from the hill. Nonetheless, the Marines move
through Singi and continue heading west until they
halt at the main supply route, about one-half mile
southwest of Tosan, where they encounter soldiers
heading down a small path leading from the hill to the
supply route. Colonel Newton is informed that his
Marines should use the identical trail to reach the hill,
but they must pause until the soldiers pass, which slows
the march.
Just after midnight, the Marine column reinitiates
 195
its advance with two South Korean civilian guides who
had arrived belatedly. The Marines are unfamiliar with
the terrain; they apply caution as they plod along the
grimy dike, hoping to avoid a misstep that would cat-
apult them into the stench and filth of the rice paddy.
The anxious trek along the slim and slippery 1,200-
yard trail is arduous. The column advances in single
file without incident until it reaches Hill 308. The rear
elements of the battalion finally arrive on the hill at
dawn on the 9th.
At Hill 342, the soldiers (5th RCT) and Marines
(3rd Bn., 5th Marines) are struck slightly before dawn
with a flurry of short-range rifle and machine gun fire.
The fire is delivered from close-range by a contingent
of enemy troops who have silently crept through the
darkness to reach positions near the crest.
The Marines and soldiers aggressively return fire,
and they further liven things up by tossing grenades
down the slopes. The sting of the attack is blunted, but
one group encroaches near enough to spring an attack
against the northeastern edge of the triangular defense.
The penetration ignites immediate heated hand-to-
hand combat. The North Koreans make no headway;
rather they are harshly pushed back down the ragged
slope. One Marine and several soldiers are wounded
and one Marine is slain by a combination of bayonet
and gunshot wounds.
At sunrise, Company D, under Captain Finn, de-
parts its positions under the crest. The three platoons
move side by side and ascend the southern slope against
minimal resistance, but once they reach the peak, they
come under fierce fire.
North Koreans, holding positions on the northern
half of the hill, saturate the summit with fire. Never-
theless, Company D executes the relief and takes re-
sponsibility for the crest. Cahill’s Platoon and the rem-
nants of the 5th RCT contingent descend the crest,
battered but victorious. The North Korean units oper-
ating against Hill 342 are contingents of the 13th and
15th Regiments, N.K. 6th Division (according to doc-
uments recovered from bodies of dead enemy troops).
The estimated strength against Hill 342 (Yaban-san)
is between 500 and 600 men. Lieutenant Cahill’s 1st
Platoon (Company G), 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
sustains six men killed and twelve wounded during the
battle. Company D, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, at-
tempts to tighten the positions on the crest of Hill 342,
but the Communist troops that remain clustered on
the upper slopes maintain a steady stream of fire.
During the final climb and the fight, which contin-
ues to ensue beyond the relief operation, Company D
sustains casualties, including the deaths of Lieutenants
Oakley and Reid. Captain Finn braves the fire to re-
cover Reid’s body by crawling forward, but enemy
rounds also strike him to inflict a severe head wound
and a wound to the shoulder. Finn, temporarily nearly
blind and approaching unconsciousness, crawls back
to the lines to receive medical aid. Later, while he is
being taken down the hill for more medical attention,
Finn encounters Lieutenant Hanifin, who is moving
August 8, 1950
up the slope. Captain Finn tells Hanifin that he is now
in command of D Company.
Once at the crest, Hanifin quickly regroups his new
command, with little time to spare. The North Kore-
ans afford the exhausted Marines no rest; rather they
launch another assault to seize the summit, but it is re-
pulsed and the enemy sustains heavy casualties. Com-
pany D sustains 6 men killed and twenty-five
wounded.
At about 1130, while the struggle for the crest (Hill
342) subsides, Lieutenant Hanifin receives a call from
Colonel Roise. As the conversation begins, Roise gets
a quick picture: Hanifin collapses from heat exhaus-
tion. The problem of command is quickly rectified.
Master Sergeant Harold Reeves (nearly 30 years serv-
ice) assumes temporary command of Company D’s
three rifle platoons, and 2nd Lieutenant Leroy Wirth,
a forward observer for the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines,
assumes temporary command of the supporting units,
including the planes of MAG-33 that circle above the
positions. Soon after, Captain Andrew Zimmer (regi-
mental asst. S-3) is appointed new commanding offi-
cer of Company D.
This is the final major threat against Hill 342, but
Zimmer’s unit incurs some additional casualties, most
occurring while attempts are made to reel in supplies
that miss the mark when airdropped.
While the contest continues on Hill 342, Major Wal-
ter Gall, CO, 2nd Battalion Weapons Company, dis-
patches a small patrol to destroy the machine gun po-
sitions in Tokkong-ni, which initially had been ignored
by Company D. The patrol sustains three casualties,
but it does not quiet the guns. First Lieutenant Ira T.
Carr then turns the 81-mm guns toward the village
and commences a powerful barrage, which terminates
the guns of Tokkong-ni.
In related activity, the 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment,
USA, is scheduled to relieve the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, at Hill 342, but it is held up near Chindong-
ni. Company E, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, operating
on the western spur of Hill 342, advances several hun-
dred yards and establishes positions there.
Meanwhile, at 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines zone,
troops of Company G deployed on Hill 255 have been
harassed by snipers throughout the night, but at dawn,
four enemy troops are spotted within 100 yards of the
Marines’ positions. All four troops die suddenly.
Also, slightly after dawn on Hill 255, Marines of
Company H peer down the Haman Road and observe
a column of troops that are casually ascending the slope
and moving toward a high peak beyond the plateau.
Initially, the Marines believe that the troops are ROKs
and take no action. Captain Fegan observes the troops
positioning themselves and he orders his troops to stand
ready, and with no time to spare. The unidentified
troops commence firing, ending the mystery. It is enemy
fire. The attack is part of the major enemy offensive
and it interferes with TF Kean’s jump-off. By seizing
the high ground there, the enemy is able to sever the
Masan-Chindong-ni portion of the main supply route,
August 8, 1950
which hinders the ground troops from receiving sup-
plies and reinforcements.
In related activity, word of the plight of the 2nd Bat-
talion, 24th Regiment, north of Chindong-ni reaches
Colonel Taplett. Once informed of the enemy on the
peak, he directs Captain Fegan to commit Company
H, 5th Marines, to exterminate the enemy position.
Artillery preparatory fire and coordinated air strikes fail
to dislodge the enemy.
While the troops are safely huddled within the nat-
ural protective shield of the rocky crag, Second Lieu-
tenant John O. Williams’ 1st Platoon moves toward
the peak under cover fire of the remainder of the com-
pany. Williams’ platoon reaches a point within thirty
yards of the objective, but heavy machine gun fire grids
the area and a huge amount of grenades are tossed down
the slope, halting progress. An attempt is made to shift
the attack toward the enemy’s left flank. One fire team
advances to positions just under the enemy, but it is
repulsed. Lieutenant Williams is ordered to pull back
to regroup.
In the meantime, the 3rd Platoon is ordered by Fegan
to move through the positions of the 1st Platoon and
continue the assault, but it ignores the order and fails
to advance. Sensing that the 3rd Platoon had merely
been stunned by the failure of the 1st Platoon, he moves
quickly to restore confidence by taking personal com-
mand of the 3rd Platoon and of the attack. With Fegan
in command, the 3rd Platoon advances in wedge for-
mation, maneuvering while under continuous heavy
fire.
Staff Sgt. John Wheatley, Sergeant Edward Barrett
and several others become wounded; Barrett, debili-
tated by two wounds and lying in open ground, is car-
ried to safety by Fegan. Meanwhile, the platoon gnaws
forward and then, with a sudden thrust, the Marines
lunge onto the peak. One contingent, led by Corporal
Melvin James, strikes from the left flank, while another
attack, stimulated by the spirited actions of Tech.
Sergeant Ray Morgan and PFC Donald Terrio, plow
into the enemy’s right flank. Morgan and Terrio had
each destroyed a separate enemy machine gun and its
crews.
At this point, the contest becomes bloodier as the
Marines encounter an enemy force that desires a fight
to the death. The Marines oblige and move from fox-
hole to foxhole until the crest falls and the annihilation
is complete. Company H then moves north about 200
yards where the heights terminate with a perpendicu-
lar drop. The three platoons pause there and gaze across
the chasm toward Hill 255, awaiting orders.
In the meantime, the North Koreans continue to lay
artillery and mortar fire on the captured positions.
Company H sustains 6 men killed and 32 wounded
during the attack. Colonel Taplett directs Company H
to hold in place for the night. Marine artillery and
planes from MAG-33 support Company H during its
bivouac. The mortar platoon of the 1st Battalion, 11th
Marines, and the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, keep their
mortars firing throughout the night of August 8-9. The
196
shells carpet the entire battalion front with an iron belt
to keep the enemy sedated.
In related activity, during Company H’s attack,
Company G on Hill 255 observes enemy reinforce-
ments as they travel along Haman Road, north of Hill
99. The column traces the steps of the contingent that
had attempted to strike earlier at dawn. Bolstered by its
supporting units that provide effective interdiction fire,
the enemy column halts abruptly and its surviving
troops disperse hurriedly as they sprint back toward
their original positions.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: The 9th RCT
(2nd Division, attached to 24th Division), having de-
parted Changnyong at 0130, arrives at 24th Division
headquarters at 0830. Its commanding officer, Colonel
John Hill, reports to General Church and he receives or-
ders to begin an immediate attack. Initially, it is to
commence no later than 1500, but the two men agree
to delay it for one hour. The 9th RCT is exhausted
from its night march from Pusan. Some elements of
the 9th Regiment relieve Company B at its positions
on Cloverleaf Hill (Hill 165) and others relieve the con-
tingent of the heavy mortar company, which is impro-
vising as riflemen at positions south of the road near
Obong-ni Ridge.
At 1645, the 9th Regiment, supported by the guns
of the 15th FABn, attacks. The 2nd Battalion, led by
Colonel John Londahl, strikes against Cloverleaf to the
right, while the 1st Battalion, commanded by Colonel
Fred Harrison, drives against Obong-ni Ridge on the
left. Both contingents make some progress to gain
ground before dark, but neither secures its entire objec-
tive. The devilish heat combined with inexperience of
the attacking units adds to the frustration of the at-
tack. At day’s end, the Naktong River remains out of
reach.
In the meantime, the North Koreans regroup and
retake the ground on Obong-ni Ridge during the night.
The 9th Regiment’s 2nd Battalion incurs heavy casu-
alties among its officers, and on the following day, of-
ficer casualties again rise. While the 9th Regiment at-
tempts to destroy the enemy in the bulge, Colonel John
Hill is informed that the North Koreans are toiling at
night to complete a bridge across the river. Its surface
will lie about one foot under water, obscuring its view
from the air.
Meanwhile, farther south, other enemy forces are
slashing through the positions of the 34th Regiment,
which anchor the division’s left flank. Nevertheless, in
the 34th Regimental sector, Company A, still jeopard-
ized by enemy forces controlling the heights to its right,
continues to hold its ground. At dawn, six boats trans-
porting reinforcements across the river are spotted from
the positions of Company A. The enemy contingent,
composed of about 60 to 65 troops, causes some alarm,
prompting the placing of a call requesting air strikes.
In the meantime, the enemy reaches positions about
1,000 yards from the Americans. The North Koreans
are greeted with fire from a heavy machine gun that
prompts them to scatter along the banks of the
 197
Naktong. At about the same time, the planes arrive to
strafe the enemy as they scatter. The North Koreans,
however, still continue to press Company A through-
out the day, and their tactics include preliminary mor-
tar fire to adjust their range. Company A is convinced
that the short bursts of mortar fire are merely a prelude
to a night attack. Company A and the supporting ele-
ments of Company L discover enemy troops who ap-
pear to be moving toward their positions. The units
report the situation to headquarters and by 2300, they
receive permission to pull off the hill.
The evacuation occurs just in the nick of time.
A powerful enemy barrage is unleashed against the
positions just as the troops withdraw to safety, but
again, in the heat and confusion of the battle, costly
errors are made. One platoon fails to follow the road
leading south to U.S. lines. It heads north toward
the enemy-held positions at the northern end of
Obong-ni Ridge. The platoon incurs severe casualties.
The balance of the contingent, including the elements
of Company L, eventually arrives at the 1st Battalion
perimeter east of Obong-ni during the daylight hours
of the 9th.
The commitment of Colonel Hill’s troops (9th RCT)
prevents any strong reinforcement of the 34th Regi-
ment. During the night (8th-9th), General Church re-
mains determined to regain the center ground at the
Naktong. The 9th RCT is ordered to reinitiate the at-
tack, but all the while, the enemy gathers momentum
on the left against the 34th Regiment.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The N.K.
1st Division, which began crossing the Naktong be-
tween Hamch’ang and Sangju on the 6th, completes
its crossing. It advances toward Kunwi against stiff op-
position raised by the S.K. 6th Division. The enemy
division has received additional replacement troops,
but many lack weapons. The N.K. 15th Division, op-
erating south of the N.K. 1st and 13th Divisions, had
secured Hills 201 and 346 on the previous day.
On this day, the S.K. 1st Division launches attacks
and clears both hills, but the enemy is not forced back
across the Naktong. Rather, it vanishes deeper into the
mountains that lead east. These crossings have already
caused serious concern in Taegu, but more critical de-
cisions must be made. Two more enemy divisions, the
3rd and 10th, are both prepared to bolt the river and
strike against the 1st Cavalry Division.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The North
Koreans continue to drive south against the eastern
flank of the Pusan Perimeter, which is defended by the
South Koreans. Three enemy divisions and one inde-
pendent regiment are closing. The N.K. 12th Division
maneuvers through the mountains southeast of An-
dong en route to Pohang-dong, while the N.K. 8th Di-
vision advances down the Uisong Road toward
Yongch’on. The N.K. 5th Division moves down the
coastal road. Some infantry contingents of the N.K.
5th Division have been circumventing the S.K. 3rd Di-
vision by infiltrating through the mountains. In addi-
tion, another unit, the 766th Independent Regiment,
August 8, 1950
has swung off the coastal road to drive southwest toward
the villages of Kigye and An’gang-ni.
At Yong-dok, fighting continues between the N.K.
5th Division and the S.K. 3rd Division. Today, the
6131st Fighter Wing is established at Pohang. Con-
trasting events begin to occur as the enemy steps up its
southern drive. As the Air Force is adding strength, the
aviation engineers receive orders to have their heavy
equipment moved out of the base and transferred to a
more stable area, to avoid possible destruction by
enemy fire.
In Air Force activity, the USAF 18th FBG abandons
its base at Taegu and relocates at Ashiya, Japan, due to
the enemy threat against the area. In other activty, the
307th Bomber Group, recently arrived in Okinawa,
executes its initial mission of the war.
— In the United States: The vessels that will trans-
port the 1st Marine Division to the Far East begin to
load today in San Diego. The operation is completed
by the 22nd. Ninety stevedore crews are requested for
the huge task, but only fifty-four crews are raised. The
following vessels will handle the principal body of the
1st Marine Division: LSM 419; LST 845; USS Noble
and USS President Jackson (assault transports); USS
General Buckner, USS General Weigel, USS Marine
Phoenix, USS General Meigs and USS General Butner
(transports); and the cargo vessels SS African Patriot,
SS Alma Victory, SS American Press, SS American Vic-
tory, SS Belgian Victory, SS Dolly Thurman, SS Green
Bay Victory, SS Noonday, SS South Wind, and the SS
Twin Falls Victory.
— In Japan: General MacArthur orders all available
air support, including Seventh Fleet carriers, to focus
their efforts on interdiction and close-air support mis-
sions until the 17th. The intent is to shore up Eighth
Army while maintaining incessant pressure against the
North Korean advance toward Pusan. Also, Lt. General
Stratemeyer directs Major General Partridge to increase
the amount of night flights to fifty per night to increase
the odds of spotting enemy columns that might be
moving supplies.
In other activity, General MacArthur again meets
with Averell Harriman and Generals Ridgway and
Norstad. MacArthur exudes confidence concerning vic-
tory over the Communists in Korea, and he gives Har-
riman’s entourage the specifics on what he requires to
bring forth a successful conclusion of the conflict. In-
cluded in the necessities are the infusion of troops from
other Allied nations and the speedy arrival of the U.S.
3rd Division in Japan to afford protection, if the Rus-
sians should decide to attack there. The Korean crisis
has required the commitment of the 7th Division (In-
chon), thereby stripping Japan of its U.S. defensive
force.
Harriman and his entourage return to the States
today convinced that MacArthur’s plan to invade In-
chon will succeed. MacArthur has apparently con-
vinced them that the Chinese will not invade Formosa;
however, he adds his caveat that if the Communists do
attack Formosa, he will take command there and deliver
August 9, 1950 198

them a “crushing defeat.” Also, the trip has created which encounters only sniper fire during the climb.
some quiet concerns about the leadership ability of The summit is secured at 1200.
General Walker. En route back to the States, Harriman The weary battalion sustains many victims from the
and Norstad confer and they decide that General Ridg- heat. About one-half of Companies A and B become
way should replace Walker. Ridgway believes that sick. Troops are sent to find water to help alleviate the
Walker should be replaced subsequent to his holding the problem. In the meantime, new orders arrive from Col-
line at the Pusan Perimeter, but Ridgway makes it clear onel Murray that direct the weary contingent to de-
that he is not seeking the job. scend the hill and reinitiate the attack by driving toward
Paedun-ni. Colonel Newton instructs Companies A
August 9 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 1st and B to temporarily remain on the crest while he or-
Battalion, 5th Marines zone, dawn arrives just as the ganizes the advance column using headquarters and
trailing contingents of the battalion complete the night- weapons troops.
long journey from the 5th RCT command post near Newton, reaching the low ground northwest of the
Singi. Colonel Murray orders the 1st Battalion to con- hill, inspects his Japanese map and it displays only one
tinue the attack and secure Hill 308. The tired Marines of the two roads that lead to Paedun-ni from Oso-ri, a
move out advancing southwest, ascending 1,000 feet village about 600 yards south of Tosan. However,
from the base and 2,000 yards south. Company B, Colonel Murray’s map depicts the two roads; the south-
commanded by Captain Tobin, spearheads the attack, ern road is ragged and the western road is smooth,
but Murray’s map wrongly
identifies the rough route as
improved. He instructs New-
ton to use the supposed im-
proved road.
The column proceeds be-
yond Taesil and then it en-
counters mines scattered
about the road. Company A
engineers rush to the area
from Chindong-ni and re-
move the obstacles, which are
found to be U.S. antitank
mines that probably fell off an
army vehicle. At about the
same time, Colonel Murray
arrives on the scene, and still
using his mis-marked map, he
informs Newton that his col-
umn is on the wrong road.
Newton is told to turn the
column on the narrow road
and return to the intersection,
compounding the errors.
The vehicles and baffled
troops reach the intersection
back at Oso-ri, but the col-
umn stalls. General Craig ar-
rives and he becomes ex-
tremely unhappy with the
confusion. Eventually, the col-
umn begins advancing on the
southern route, which curves
around the base of Hill 308,
and by this time it is joined by
Companies A and B.
About one mile out,
the advance elements en-
counter a lone enemy ma-
chine gun position entrenched
in a hut about mid-point on
A soldier enjoys lunch on 9 August, while another seems to be taking a nap. the curve. The position is
 199
destroyed by ground troops, accompanied by a rocket
launcher. The column reinitiates its advance, and with-
out incident, it reaches a 400-feet pass leading between
Hills 308 and 190. As dusk approaches, the battalion is
ordered to establish defensive night positions at a point
about two miles south of the Tosan departure point.
Meanwhile, General Craig prepares a night attack
for the brigade, based in part on his assumption that the
An Army field kitchen is in a sea of mud.
August 9, 1950
lack of opposition against the advance of the 1st Bat-
talion is a signal that the enemy is not expecting a fight.
Craig orders the 5th Marines to seize Paedun-ni prior
to dawn on the 10th.
In the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines sector, the Com-
munists have sustained severe casualties while unsuccess-
fully attempting to seize Hill 342 from Company D.
The area is now tranquil except for some ineffectual
August 9, 1950
long-range machine gun and antitank fire during the
morning hours. The bulk of the enemy force is retiring
northward. Company D, having sustained eight men
killed and twenty-eight wounded during the contest
for the hill, is relieved during the afternoon by the 2nd
Battalion, 24th Regiment. Estimates vary as to the
number of enemy dead, purported to be troops of the
N.K. 13th and 15th Regiments, N.K. 6th Division,
according to papers discovered among the bodies. Lieu-
tenant Cahill, Company D, estimates 150 enemy killed,
and he notes on his report that the figure is “conserva-
tive.” The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, establishes the
number of enemy killed at 400 subsequent to its bat-
tle. The actual count of enemy dead, inflicted by Army
and Marine troops and supporting units, according to
Marine records, “probably lies somewhere between the
two figures.”
In other activity, at 0825, Marine artillery and planes
lambaste North Korean positions on Hill 255 to loosen
resistance for Company H, 3rd Battalion. The Marine
aircraft deliver the first close-support dosage of napalm
during the conflict. The supporting artillery fire and
the powerful strike by the Marine planes bring huge
dividends. Less than five minutes before Captain
Fegan’s troops throw the final punch to knock out the
enemy positions, word is received from an airborne tac-
tical air coordinator that the preparatory strikes have
rendered the objective benign. Fegan’s troops sprint the
remaining distance to the peak against inconsequen-
tial resistance and discover only the remains of two dec-
imated machine guns and a few enemy dead.
The strategy introduced to terminate the enemy
threat to the main supply route had included a Marine
drive along Hill 255 to grid line 1350 and a coordi-
nated attack north of the borderline by Army units
pushing from Masan. At 1125, Company H, 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, makes visual contact with ap-
proaching elements of the 24th Regiment. The Marine
3rd Battalion sustains 16 killed and 36 wounded while
clearing the MSR, and the majority of casualties occur
in Fegan’s Company H, reducing its effectiveness by
25 percent.
In other activity, General Craig, USMC, relinquishes
his control of all troops in the area at 1700. The road
junction is secure, permitting both the Army and Ma-
rine units to resume progress toward the objective. The
2nd Battalion, subsequent to its relief on Hill 342 by
the 24th Regiment, moves from Sangnyong-ni to Hill
308, arriving there at 2100. At 0010 on August 10, the
battalion heads south toward the new MSR to partic-
ipate in the night assault against Paedun-ni. Fifteen
minutes later, it moves through the lines of the 1st Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, at a pass between Hills 190 and
308. The 3rd Battalion remains in its sector to execute
some security details until relieved by U.S. Army units.
Afterwards, the 3rd Battalion joins the brigade on
the following morning. Also, the three batteries (four
guns each) of the 1st Bn. (reinforced), 5th Marines,
which had relieved the 8th Field Artillery Battalion at
Chindong-ni on August 6, has played a vital support
200
role for much of the ground fighting between the 7th
and 9th. In addition, the observation planes of VMO-
6 have enhanced the artillery’s success by their effec-
tive target spotting with emphasis on enemy mortar
positions.
The crews of the batteries of the 1st Battalion, 11th
Marines, quickly adjust to the perplexing combat
around Chindong-ni. The batteries form an arc to in-
tercept any threat, singular or plural and regardless of
the direction it comes from. Usually, one battery peers
north while two others face east and west. Later, Col-
onel Wood, referring to the experience gained, offers
his opinion: “I think that this is one of the most impor-
tant lessons we learned in fighting infiltrating troops.
Artillery must be able and always prepared to fire in
any direction on a moment’s notice.”
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: In the 9th Regi-
mental sector, strong fire fights ensue as the contest for
Cloverleaf and Obong-ni continues, but neither side
gains the advantage and both sides sustain heavy casu-
alties. Heavy fighting also rages along the Naktong in
the 24th Division sector as the N.K. 4th Division
pounds against the perimeter. The forward observa-
tion post of Company K, 3rd Battalion, 34th Regi-
ment, posted at the southern tip of battalion positions,
is overrun, but the remainder of the perimeter is firmly
held. The outnumbered troops receive orders to remain
in place and give no ground.
In the meantime, Company A, 1st Battalion, and
elements of Company L, 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment,
arrive at the 1st Battalion lines. Company L will be re-
formed on the following day and rushed back to rein-
force K Company. The North Korean gains compel the
24th Division to evacuate its command post at
Changnyong and reestablish it at Kyungyo, nearly fif-
teen miles to the rear.
An irritated General Walker arrives by air. He ex-
changes some heated words with General Church, who
is already under great stress. Church then orders a di-
visional attack to commence at about 1700. The three
participating regiments are held together by Band-Aids
and rubber bands, too overextended and too exhausted
to mount a fierce assault. The attack receives support
from aircraft and artillery (11th, 13th and 15th FABns)
when it commences, but the 9th RCT is burdened with
the weight of the assault. The weakened 19th and 34th
Regiments are unable to advance. The commander of
the 2nd Battalion, 9th RCT, Colonel Fred Harrison,
loses one leg during the day’s action and he is evacuated;
Colonel Joseph A. Walker, the battalion executive of-
ficer, assumes command. The opposing sides will each
launch attacks on the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The N.K.
1st and 13th Divisions continue their advance toward
Taegu. The N.K. 15th Division continues to move
through the mountains east of Hills 201 and 346 head-
ing for Tabu-dong, about fifteen miles north of Taegu.
The three enemy divisions are each operating against
South Korean defenses located west of the cavalry po-
sitions at Waegwan. And on this day, additional enemy
 201
units cross the river near the 1st Cavalry defenses. At
about 0300, the 7th Regiment, 3rd N.K. Division,
walks across the Naktong at a point near Noch’on, two
miles south of the Waegwan Bridge. Some 5th Caval-
rymen spot the enemy movement and inform artillery,
which has preset its guns for the crossing site. The N.K.
7th Regiment is greeted with bursting flares that ex-
pose it, but most troops safely make it to the hills.
Enemy soldier Choe Song Hwan’s diary, extracted after
his capture on the 12th, denotes the early morning’s
activities: “Gradually advanced toward the river. Enemy
shelling is fierce. Arrived at the river. The terrible
enemy (U.S.) has sent up flares ... the noise is ringing
in my ears. Have already crossed the river. Occupied a
hill....”
About 45 minutes before daylight, it becomes ap-
parent that Hill 268 has been occupied when a recon-
naissance detachment of the 5th Cavalry observes the
penetration. The trailing 8th and 9th Regiments at-
tempt to cross the river farther south, but by now, all
the guns and the mortars of the 5th Cavalry Regiment
are poised to fire. Suddenly, star shells and brightly il-
luminated flares burst overhead, giving the water an
iridescent glow. The encompassing enfilade inflicts
heavy casualties on the stunned regiments, which are
helplessly strung out in the water. Very few men of the
N.K. 8th and 9th Regiments safely execute the cross-
ing. They are forced to return to the east bank and sus-
pend their Naktong crossing until the following night.
At dawn, ambiguous reports of the enemy crossings
in the 5th Cavalry zone reach General Gay at his head-
quarters in Taegu. Unwilling to act impulsively, Gay
attempts to acquire more detailed specifics on the
breakthrough. In the meantime, he orders the 1st Bat-
talion, 7th Cavalry (reserve), commanded by Lt. Col-
onel Peter D. Clainos, to go on imminent alert, and he
summons 1st Lieutenant Harry A. Buckley, acting S-2,
5th Cavalry, who is supposed to have on-scene infor-
mation concerning the penetration.
Shortly thereafter, Buckley arrives at divisional head-
quarters and he clears up all doubts. Buckley’s report
states: “Approximately 45 minutes before daylight, I
observed enemy forces moving up the ridge line just
northwest of Hill 268. The enemy were moving in dog
trot in groups of four. Every fourth man carried an au-
tomatic weapon, either a light machine gun or a burp
gun.... In my opinion and I counted them carefully,
the enemy was in strength of a reinforced battalion,
approximately 750 men.” Lt. Buckley says to General
Gay: “General, I am not a very excitable person and I
know what I saw, when I saw it, where I was when I saw
it and where the enemy was going.”
General Walker arrives to question Gay on how he
intends to handle the newest crisis. Gay and Walker
agree that the crossing in the 5th Cavalry area might be
a feint to cover a larger crossing farther to the left. Gen-
eral Gay makes preparations to clear Hill 268 (Trian-
gulation Hill) of the enemy. The guns of the 61st FAB
begin to plaster the strategic objective, which domi-
nates both a segment of the key Korean north-south
August 9, 1950
highway and the double-track railroad line (Pusan-
Seoul-Harbin, Manchuria), which glides around its
base. The north-south road has been utilized since an-
cient times, and Hill 268, ten air-miles northwest of
Taegu and three miles from Waegwan, is vital for U.S.
lines of communications in the area.
The 1st Battalion gets its marching orders at 0930.
It departs Taegu supported by five tanks of Company
A, 71st Heavy Tank Battalion, and advances to the ob-
jective, Hill 268. The hill is inundated with high dense
brush and a scattering of trees that attain a height of
eight to ten feet, affording the enemy natural camou-
flage positions. The artillery launches a pre-attack bar-
rage at 1200. Upon its cessation, the 1st Battalion at-
tacks, but coordination between the artillerymen and
the infantry is less than smooth, further complicating
the arduous attack, which rages under blazing heat.
Many of the soldiers fall prey to heat prostration. Con-
sequently, the assault falters. Another attempt to dis-
lodge the N.K. 3rd Division occurs on the following
day.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The S.K. 8th
Division catches the advancing N.K. 8th Division by
surprise on the Uisong-Yongch’on Road near Uisong
and inflicts heavy casualties (about 700) on the enemy’s
3rd Regiment. During the heated exchange, some
South Koreans are deployed in a shallow valley near a
bridge to protect an antitank minefield. As an enemy
column approaches the bridge, one tank strikes a mine.
Almost instantaneously a second tank detonates a mine.
And then the guns begin blazing. Three additional
enemy tanks and one self propelled 76-mm gun reach
the road blockage. Drivers attempt to reverse their ve-
hicles. At about the same time, a group of F-51 fight-
ers arrive overhead and begin to dive for the kill. The
pilots deposit napalm and rockets, which decimate all
six vehicles.
Meanwhile, the N.K. 2nd Regiment rushes to aid
the beleaguered 3rd Regiment, but it, too, incurs severe
casualties before it finally regains the ground previously
lost to the ROK forces. The valiant stand by the South
Koreans hurts the enemy badly, forcing the N.K. 8th
Division to suspend its march against Yongch’on for
one week. Farther east, the N.K. 12th Division, which
carries the honorary title “Andong Division,” continues
its march through the mountains southeast of Andong
en route to seize Pohang-dong. The 12th Division has
diminished its strength by returning its 2nd Battalion’s
(artillery regiment) full complement of artillery pieces
to Tanyang, due to lack of ammunition.
Sporadic reports filter into Eighth Army headquar-
ters during August concerning the guerrilla units that
have been moving through the mountains in the S.K.
3rd Division sector, but today, it receives information
detailing the presence of a large enemy regular army force
that has been detected northwest of Pohang-dong. The
columns are moving toward the U.S. Air Force Base at
Yonil Airfield, jeopardizing it and the coastal road. The
S.K. 3rd Division is deployed along the coastal road
about twenty miles in front of Pohang-dong; however,
August 10, 1950
the enemy moves freely through the mountains as there
are no units forming a line of defense there.
Elements of the S.K. 25th Regiment arrive in Kigye
from Taegu, and at once, they are committed. The 1st
and 2nd Battalions drive north from the village to hook
up with the 3rd S.K. Division forces located south of
Yongdok. The two battalions advance less than three
miles when they are struck by a counterattack and
shoved back beyond the starting point to an area about
southeast of the village.
Meanwhile, in the S.K. 3rd Division sector, the com-
manding officer, S.K. 22nd Regiment, directs the
troops at the Kanggu-dong bridge to destroy it. De-
spite no orders from the KMAG advisor, Major Brit-
ton, the bridge collapses into the river at 0530, and the
action isolates about 350 troops north of the Osip-
ch’on. Again, premature anxiety increases the burden of
the S.K. forces and gives the enemy the advantage. The
S.K. 3rd Division is compelled to withdraw the divi-
sional command post to Changsadong during the after-
noon, negating two weeks of gallant fighting against
the enemy. The stranded troops attempt to cross the
Osip-ch’on, an inlet of the Sea of Japan, but many per-
ish in its deep waters. The division chief of staff, in-
censed by the destruction of the bridge, informs the
S.K. Army that the officer in question must be relieved
immediately or he would be summoned to a court mar-
tial and be executed by a firing squad. The officer is
relieved of duty at once. However, the action does lit-
tle to aid the beleaguered S.K. 3rd Division. The North
Koreans press the attack and increase the infiltration
of the lines. By the following day, the 3rd Division will
be encircled.
— In the United States: The 1st Marine Division
issues Operation Order No. 1-50, which authorizes the
embarkation of the division (minus the brigade and
one RCT) to the Far East, with orders to report to the
CinCFE upon arrival. By today, Camp Pendleton con-
tains 17,162 Marines who have arrived from across the
country, and they are eligible for transfer to the 1st Ma-
rine Division.
August 10 Planes from the USS Philippine Sea
attack enemy targets. During one raid, an enemy bar-
racks is damaged. The USS Valley Forge also catapults
its planes to strike enemy targets. One contingent, com-
posed of four F4Us commanded by Lieutenant
Clarence E. Smith, coordinates with a Mosquito plane
near Chinju and successfully blows a bridge near the
village. Following further instructions from the Mos-
quito plane, the aircraft head north of the village and
locate concealed vehicles and an oil depot. Lightning
fast passes and accurate rocket and machine gun fire
decimate the area.
In other activity, General Partridge, commander, Far
East Air Forces, gripes that his planes are being under-
utilized by Eighth Army concerning the transfer of sup-
plies from Japan to Korea. In reaction, Eighth Army
decreases its Red Ball Express cargo and expands its air-
lift operation. The Red Ball Express, initiated on July
202
23, is operating well and is much less expensive.
Nonetheless, by August 15, the land-sea mode is
sharply reduced to a schedule of operating twice a week.
Equipment transfers will be augmented by the Air
Force. Regardless of the method of transporting the
equipment from Japan, once in Korea, Eighth Army
expedites the supplies to the specified areas.
Since about the beginning of August, the Army has
been using Korean civilians (carrying A-frames) to
transport supplies into the mountains to the front lines.
The civilian transporters are less expensive for the Army
than using pack animals. Through the cooperation of
the ROK Army, the civilians are allotted to the U.S.
units. About 500 unskilled men, including laborers and
transporters, are hired per division.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 1st Provisional
Marine Brigade sector, the brigade had been released
from its mop-up operations in the area around
Chindong-ni at 1600 on the previous night, making the
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, available for the proposed
night attack against Paedun-ni. At 0115, the 2nd Bat-
talion advances through the positions of the 1st Bat-
talion, 5th Marines. The overtired contingent treks
through the darkness supported by spearheading tanks,
and it arrives near the objective without incident at
about 0500. But a mishap occurs as the point tank of
Lieutenant William Pomeroy’s platoon inadvertently
smashes into a concrete bridge and becomes jammed,
forbidding passage. Unable to extricate the M-26, the
trailing tank attempts to take a circuitous route adja-
cent to the bridge, but mid-stream, it loses a track and
stalls the column for two more hours.
In the meantime, South Korean laborers build a
makeshift bypass to provide passage for the lighter ve-
hicles that are attached to the attack group. Heavy
equipment is brought up to fabricate a crossing for the
remainder of the tanks and the other heavy vehicles.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, arrives at Paedon-ni
at 0800 and discovers it unoccupied. By 0930, the col-
umn is back on the road heading toward Kosong, but
many of the heavier vehicles still struggle for progress
at the stream. The hold-up impedes Murray’s plan to
ferry the troops by truck. The column advances, lack-
ing air and artillery support, but it expects only mini-
mal resistance. During the eight-mile march, General
Craig arrives overhead in his helicopter. After it sets
down, Craig expresses his displeasure with the tardi-
ness of the advance. He orders Murray to speed up the
march. Four jeeps and five 2 1/2 ton trucks are procured.
They roar to the head of the column to load the ad-
vance troops: the 1st and 2nd Platoons, Company D,
an assault squad, the 60-mm mortars and one machine
gun section, which become the vanguard.
The advance unit is to occupy the town and estab-
lish a defense strategy while it awaits the arrival of the
main body. Still lacking air cover and artillery support,
the forward elements advance along the road, heading
toward the unfamiliar and elevated narrow 1,000 foot
Taedabok Pass, two and one-half miles southwest of
Paedun-ni. From the pass, the column must still
 203
venture around a dangerously tight curve near the vil-
lage of Pugok. It veers left as it nudges the base of a
huge hill that dominates the entire pass. The convoy
moves through the pass without incident, providing
some added confidence that the final leg of the journey
might remain uncontested. Then suddenly, at 1500,
the first jeep of the reconnaissance unit pulls into po-
sition nearly parallel to the village of Pugok. At about
the same time, it is struck by an ambush.
Concealed machine guns unleash a swift hurricane
of fire that catapults down from the ominous hill to
riddle the troops of Company D. The Marines scurry
for cover, but as they bolt from the vehicles, a shell
from an antitank gun swoops down with a thunderous
roar and scores a direct hit on one of the lead jeeps. The
small detachment then moves back to join the remain-
der of the company. Captain Zimmer considers his op-
tions, then he directs his 1st Platoon to maneuver to
the right side of the road, then climb to positions about
half way through the pass to secure the high ground
there. Zimmer hopes the action will help neutralize the
enemy fire until the full strength of the battalion ar-
rives. The ground troops move swiftly and reach the
assigned positions without resistance. They immedi-
ately establish positions and return fire.
By this time, Company B has eliminated several
small groups of the enemy posted on both sides of the
road at the entrance to the pass and arrives to join the
fire fight. In the meantime, Zimmer discovers the po-
sition of the menacing antitank gun. Mortar fire then
pulverizes it, but in the process, the mortar ammuni-
tion becomes exhausted. Zimmer postpones any fur-
ther advance until the brigade’s heavy guns arrive. At
1630, two tanks pull up. They promptly return fire
and the powerful blasts of their 90-mm shells pummel
the enemy positions. Marine aircraft also arrive to fur-
ther augment the battalion. The combined strength ap-
parently convinces the North Koreans to scatter. With
the elimination of the enemy’s advance positions, the
drive resumes, but other enemy troops lurk nearby.
During the interruption, the 3rd Battalion, led by
Colonel Taplett, arrives at Paedun-ni from Chindong-
ni and joins the column. Colonel Murray directs Taplett
to prepare to run his 3rd Battalion through the
2nd Battalion positions and maintain the attack. The
3rd Battalion advances to the pass to reach positions
just behind the 2nd Battalion, which had moved by
foot.
Colonel Murray and Colonel Taplett, unable to lo-
cate Colonel Roise (2nd Battalion commander), move
to the high ground to scrutinize the terrain and attempt
to locate the enemy positions. Kosong, about five miles
distant, is clearly visible from their vantage point, but
the precise positions of the enemy cannot be deter-
mined. Nonetheless, the 3rd Battalion launches the at-
tack; some elements (Company G) have already crossed
the departure line and are poised to strike at the hill,
precisely at the bend in the road. However, the uncer-
tainty of the location of the entrenched enemy contin-
ues to raise concern; Major McNeely (S-3) and a small
August 10, 1950
detachment volunteer to advance in a jeep to gain the
needed intelligence.
At 1730, the party jumps off, but almost immedi-
ately, Colonel Taplett, from his observation post in the
heights on the left side of the road, spots danger await-
ing the patrol. Urgently he radios word to Lieutenant
Bohn, instructing him to halt the jeep, but it is too
late. The speeding vehicle takes the curve and as the
patrol disappears around the bend, the foreboding
sounds of heavy enemy small-arms and machine gun
fire reverberate alarmingly, signaling the probability of
fateful news.
Company G bolts forward to reach the beleaguered
patrol. Westerman’s platoon takes the point with Lieu-
tenant Duncan’s platoon trailing, but the fierce ring of
fire halts progress. Desperately trying to reach McNee-
ley’s detachment, Lieutenant Bohn orders Duncan’s
platoon to sweep wide to the right, then open the throt-
tle. Despite heavy incoming fire, the gutsy envelop-
ment succeeds. Duncan’s command swoops onto the
summit and violently evicts the enemy occupants.
Westerman’s platoon follows shortly thereafter.
Once on the summit, Westerman glances down; he
discovers the grim sight of McNeeley’s ravaged jeep.
Close by, the five Marines lay utterly still, under and to
the immediate rear of the decimated jeep. He disre-
gards furious fire, sprints to the ambushed detachment
and drags McNeely, who is mortally wounded, back to
the lines. Two killed and two severely wounded men
remain near the jeep. Intense enemy fire becomes im-
penetrable and bars additional rescue attempts.
Meanwhile, Company G resumes its attack and im-
mediately comes under a wall of relentless fire that orig-
inates from two concealed enemy machine guns at the
remote end of the curve. Company H bolsters the at-
tack force; it pushes on the left side of the road and
captures the hill opposite Bohn’s Company G.
Nonetheless, the enemy machine guns continue their
deadly fire until finally, just before dark, they are per-
manently silenced. Colonel Murray, at 2015, orders the
3rd Battalion to establish night defenses to ensure the
retention of the two captured hills. An anguishing de-
cision is reached concerning the fate of the two surviv-
ing men. Convinced that the enemy has planned a
night ambush, the mission is postponed until dawn.
With the exception of some sporadic rifle fire along
the 700-yard front of the 3rd Battalion, the night of
the 9th-10th remains peaceful. In accordance with the
orders of General Craig, the attack is to be reinitiated
at dawn on the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: The Americans
still hold some strong positions along the Naktong in
the 24th Division sector, but the North Koreans have
secured much strategic ground, including the estab-
lishment of a roadblock below the town of Yongsan,
which severs the division’s MSR from the south. The
positions of Companies K and L, 34th Regiment, above
the Naktong are becoming isolated, but they continue
to hold. Today, the Communists launch another vi-
cious assault to destroy the 9th RCT, but in turn the
August 10, 1950
men of Colonel Hill’s RCT commence an attack that
leads to a colossal head-on collision. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 9th Regiment, lacks many officers due to the se-
vere heat and ongoing brutalizing combat. Colonel
Rhea, the commanding officer, had been evacuated due
to heat exhaustion on the previous day. Company F is
the sole 9th RCT rifle company that still has more than
one officer.
This engagement takes another heavy toll on the reg-
iment and it is forced to give ground. The North Ko-
reans reclaim all the terrain that it had previously lost
on Cloverleaf (Hill 165). But to the north, the 19th
Regiment’s 2nd Battalion fights an equally fierce but
more successful battle in the rugged slopes. Stiff oppo-
sition is overcome and the 2nd Battalion seizes a few
hills, including the strategic Ohang Hill; however, the
losses are grave and the battalion completes the day’s
combat with only about 100 able riflemen remaining.
Although the Americans take Ohang Hill, the enemy
holds positions to the south of it, and the 19th Regi-
ment is unable to make further progress.
The battle at the Naktong Bulge takes on a different
light as the Americans gradually become adapted to the
extreme weather, and the boys, most of whom arrived
green, are standing firm during their baptisms under
fire, refusing to retreat under pressure. General Church
makes more adjustments in his battle plans. He places
all units in the bulge area under the command of Col-
onel John G. Hill (9th RCT) and he directs Hill to
launch another attack on the 11th. The varied units
under Hill’s command are designated Task Force Hill,
composed of the 24th Division’s 19th and 34th Regi-
ments, the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, and the 9th
Regiment (minus 3rd Battalion), 2nd Division. In ad-
dition, all supporting units, including artillery, come
under the command of Colonel Hill.
The casualty list has hugely diminished the strength
of the combined units. The 2nd Battalion, 19th Reg-
iment’s three rifle companies combined contain fewer
than 100 men. Company F stands at 25, Company E,
30 troops and Company D, the strongest of the three,
stands at about 40 men. While the officers design the
strategy for the attack scheduled for the following
morning, the enemy continues to get reinforcements
across the Naktong. An underwater bridge the enemy
has been constructing is completed during the dark-
ened hours of the 10th, and prior to dawn on the fol-
lowing day, by use of the bridge and rafts, the enemy
also crosses about twelve pieces of artillery, some mor-
tars and vehicles.
The 1st Battalion (less Company C), 21st Regiment,
commanded by Colonel Charles Smith, is committed,
because the enemy has yet to threaten the 25th Divi-
sion’s northern (right) sector guarded by Stephens’ 21st
Regiment. General Church is also bargaining heavily to
have General Walker release the 27th Regiment under
Colonel Michaelis to join the imminent battle.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: At Hill
268 (Triangulation Hill), the enemy still retains a firm
hold at dawn, but the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry Reg-
204
iment, prepares to renew its attack to seize the hill. U.S.
artillery launches resounding blows against the slopes,
and it is also struck by aircraft to dent the resistance
and create some panic among the defenders. However,
during the morning, the North Koreans maintain their
own destructive firing, and they find time to establish
ambush sites along the road. Three officers, including
the assistant division commander and a few military
police, run into an ambush along the Waegwan Road
at Hill 268. Most of the party becomes wounded.
Later in the day, General Gay and an aide are en-
grossed in conversation with the 1st Battalion executive
officers and several other troops along the same road
in the same vicinity. During the gathering, effective
mortar fire rings the area, and one direct hit wounds or
kills everyone in the group except General Gay and his
aide. An infuriated General Gay speeds five tanks for-
ward to positions along the road from which they can
pour their concentrated fire upon the reverse slope. The
tanks proceed without delay, and soon after, the turrets
bellow and strike a jackpot. The enemy had bolted to
the reverse slope to evade the murderous artillery fire.
The tanks pour incessant fire into the hill and the
enemy is caught in the frying pan as they jump from
their positions. To return to the opposing slope, they
face the artillery, and to remain on the reverse slope,
they face annihilation by tank fire.
In the meantime, in coordination with the artillery,
the ground troops of the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry
Regiment, assault the summit. They claim total dom-
ination of the hill by 1600. The seizure permits the ar-
tillery to change gears and swivel its guns westward to
again catch the fleeing enemy. The air sizzles with the
hissing of artillery shells that pound the route of re-
treat. In one instance, during the enfilade, the 61st FAB
commences a white phosphorous barrage that saturates
a village that conceals a great many fleeing troops.
Later, when U.S. soldiers enter the village, they dis-
cover about 200 enemy troops, all deceased.
By nightfall on the 10th, the 1st Battalion, 7th Cav-
alry, reverts back to Eighth Army reserve. Elements of
the 5th Cavalry Regiment move into the area to reduce
the remnant resistance on Hill 268 and the immediate
area. About 300 enemy troops of the 7th N.K. Regi-
ment escape and re-cross the Naktong, but about 700
of their comrades have been killed, wounded, or cap-
tured. The once powerful N.K. 3rd Division, which
had entered Seoul triumphantly, has been humbled.
The N.K. 3rd Division had also whipped the 19th Reg-
iment at Taejon, and in cooperation with the N.K. 4th
Division, it had pushed the 1st Cavalry from Yong-
dong. The remnants of the regiment rejoin their bat-
tered parent division on about the 12th of August, but
with its strength zapped to about 2,500 troops, the
N.K. 3rd Division is placed in reserve until replace-
ments can be added. Once again, as prisoners are ques-
tioned, it is determined that the majority of casualties
had been inflicted by the artillery.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: In the S.K.
3rd Division sector in Changsa-dong, the situation has
 205
deteriorated tremendously during the last 24 hours.
The N.K. 5th Division has swept around the South
Koreans and severed the coastal highway below Hung-
hae, about five miles above Pohang-dong. Eighth Army
establishes Task Force Pohang to counteract the
new and rapidly developing threat in the eastern cor-
ridor. The components comprise the tested S.K. 17th
Regiment and several untried units, including the S.K.
25th Regiment, the S.K. 1st Anti-guerrilla Battalion, the
S.K. Pohang Marine Battalion and Battery C, U.S. 18th
FAB. Also, the S.K. 26th Regiment, activated on the
11th, will speed east to An’gang-ni to join the task
force.
General Walker, in an attempt to forestall panic and
hold the discipline of the S.K. 3rd Division, orders Col-
onel Emmerich to come to Yonil Airfield; Emmerich
contacts the cruiser USS Helena and requests a heli-
copter for the trip. General Walker confers with Em-
merich, General Partridge and Brigadier General Fran-
cis Farrell, the chief of KMAG. During the meeting,
Colonel Emmerich is directed to instruct the S.K. 3rd
Division to hold its perimeter at Changsa-dong and to
An American tank is halted in a hole in the road. Troops work to bring it back into the operation. A hel-
icopter in the background prepares to take off.
August 10, 1950
intercept and repel any N.K. advance. Emmerich is
further informed that if the stance falters, enemy ar-
tillery and tanks could continue down the coastal road
to threaten Yonil Airfield.
After the conference, Emmerich returns to the S.K.
lines and gives the new commanding officer, Brigadier
General Kim Suk Won, the orders. No American troops
are dispatched to support the stand, as there is still poor
intelligence. Eighth Army remains unaware of the heavy
numbers of enemy troops that have infiltrated through
the mountains. While Emmerich is returning to his
area, General Walker departs for Taegu and at 1735 he
dispatches a messenger to Kyong-san with orders for
Major General Lawrence Keiser, commanding officer,
2nd Division. Keiser is directed to speed the remainder
of the 9th Regiment to Yonil Airfield.
The Command Group and the 3rd Battalion, 9th
Regiment (minus Company K), moves out after dusk
for Yonil and Pohang-dong. The column moves along
the primary road through Kyongju, and it arrives at the
airfield just before midnight. Company K moves sep-
arately, but it does not enjoy an uneventful journey. At
August 10, 1950
A Sherman medium tank fires upon targets near a North Korean–held village.
about 0120 on the 11th, the convoy transporting Com-
pany K and four vehicles of Battery C, 15th FAB,
reaches a point about ten miles north of Kyongju and
one mile east of An’gang-ni.
It is here that the highway bends abruptly while pass-
ing through the Hyongsan-gang Valley toward Pohang-
dong. The lead vehicle vanishes around the curve, while
the other vehicles trail. A waiting enemy ambush team,
thought to be composed of elements of the 766th In-
dependent Regiment, commences fire on the point ve-
hicle and strikes the driver. The truck swerves out of
control and creates an impassable blockage across the
slim road, which is carved between a river and the base
of a precipitous mountain.
The unexpected ambush and the instant quagmire
along the road breed confusion. The troops that are
able attempt to return to Kyongju. Two officers and
120 enlisted men escape and make it back to the village.
Word of the disaster reaches General Joseph Bradley,
the commanding officer of TF Bradley. He dispatches
Company I to rescue the trapped convoy. The rein-
forcements speed from Yonil back toward An’gang-ni,
but the enemy also springs an ambush on it at a point
west of Pohang-dong. A second team of reinforcements,
composed of two M-16 vehicles, each transporting four
.50-caliber machine guns, roars to the site. The ma-
jority of Company I manages to return to Yonil during
the day (11th), but 25 troops fail to return. Company
K sustains 7 dead and 40 wounded, and its accompa-
nying Battery C, 15th FAB, loses about 25 men. In ad-
dition, during the day’s heated activities, four U.S.
fighters from Yonil are shot down by enemy machine
gun and small-arms fire.
206
In Air Force activity, the Air Force launches 46 B-
29s, attached to the 22d, 92d, and 98th Bomber
Groups to strike targets in North Korea, including rails
and an oil refinery at Wonsan.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
authorize a third regiment for the 1st Marine Division;
the 7th Marines are activated with orders to sail for the
Far East by September 3. The Marine Corps orders a
battalion serving in the Mediterranean with the Sixth
Fleet to join the 1st Marine Division in the Far East.
Also on this day the 1st Marine Division leaves San
Diego for Korea. The operation is completed by 19
August. About one-third of the ships required to trans-
port the amphibious force to Korea will be Japanese
vessels manned by Japanese sailors, due to the lack of
American vessels. Previously, many of the Japanese ves-
sels were U.S. ships. Some are permeated with an atro-
cious smell due to hauling fish. The odor causes many
of the troops to become sick during the journey.
In other activity, the IX Corps, commanded by
Major General Frank W. Milburn, is activated by the
U.S. Army at Fort Sheridan, Illinois. The IX Corps has
no troops assigned to it other than staff. General Mil-
burn and a small entourage of officers will depart the
U.S. for Korea on September 5.
— In Japan: General MacArthur issues a statement
to respond to the speculative news stories streaming
out of Tokyo concerning Ambassador Sebald being left
out of a recent meeting with Chiang Kai-shek.
MacArthur reiterates that the meeting was of a mili-
tary nature, which did not require the ambassador.
MacArthur also reprimands what he calls the anony-
mous sources that he claims are “10,000 miles away
 207 August 10, 1950

Top: U.S. Army troops erect barbed wire obstacles to slow an enemy advance. Bottom: An oil refinery at
Wonsan is struck by U.S. planes on 10 August.

from the actual events.” He states, “This visit has been In other activity, General MacArthur, having re-
maliciously misrepresented to the public by those who ceived authorization from the Department of the Army,
invariably in the past have propagandized a policy of de- directs General Walker to enlarge the South Korean
featism and appeasement in the Pacific....” Army to a realistic number.
August 11, 1950
August 11 As an added precaution to ensure the
safety of Pusan, General Walker has recently received in-
structions from General MacArthur concerning a par-
ticular second line of defense to be drawn closer to
Pusan. MacArthur wants it established in the event that
the enemy is not halted at the Naktong. On this day,
General Walker directs Brigadier General Garrison
Davidson to draw plans. Davidson, an engineer, stud-
ies the selected terrain and suggests that the line be
drawn tighter to Pusan, because of more tenable de-
fensive ground. Rather than modify MacArthur’s plan,
the original lines are drawn.
Brigadier General Crump Garvin and the 2nd Lo-
gistical Command at Pusan, begin work on what be-
comes the Davidson Line. It originates eight miles
north of Ulsan on the east coast at Sodong-ni and
spreads west through the heights to a spot northeast of
Miryang. Continuing, the line sweeps down a ridge
east of Muan-ni and then it swerves south crossing the
Naktong and terminates in the heights northeast of
Masan.
The complications of forming a defensive line vary
from location to location, and this one is no different.
Davidson prefers to strip the front area of houses to
give the defenders a finer line of fire against the ap-
proaching enemy, but the idea is discarded by General
Walker. On September 1, General Davidson reports to
the divisional headquarters of the 24th Division to as-
sume the position of assistant division commander, but
work on the line continues in his absence.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 1st Provisional
Marine Brigade sector, during the early morning hours
a thick fog creeps into the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines’
perimeter while Company G prepares to attack. It will
advance from its recently captured positions in the high
ground beyond Pugok to strike Kosong. In the mean-
time, at the first glimpse of dawn, amidst the thick fog,
a Communist contingent composed of about one pla-
toon strikes against Company G. The attempt to evict
the Marines and retake the crest ignites a wild close-in
struggle, but the Marines resort to their bayonets and
bare knuckles to eliminate the threat. The donnybrook
intensifies as the enemy troops lunge toward the out-
post of Lieutenant Bohn, which stands midway along
the line. The Marines tighten the defense and sharpen
their throwing arms, then they toss grenades into the
midst of the attackers while fending off enemy
grenades. Suddenly, one of the enemy grenades ex-
plodes and wounds Bohn, but it is not debilitating. He
retains control of the troops.
Meanwhile, Sergeant Charles Kurtz, standing next to
Bohn, ignores incoming grenades and the whizzing
burst of burp gun fire while he communicates with the
support units to get some assistance. Instantly, mortar
fire arrives to squelch the attack. The timely arrival of
60-mm mortars sedates the enemy. Then the ground
troops charge and culminate the thirty minutes of fury
by shoving the surviving enemy troops down the slope.
The men of Company G also reach and rescue the two
surviving members of Major McNeeley’s patrol.
208
Following the skirmish, the brigade re-initiates its
attack toward Kosong. The 3rd Battalion acts as van-
guard. The column advances quickly, with the 3rd Pla-
toon (Lt. John Counselman), Company G, at the
point, but it comes to a screeching halt about one mile
out when the terrain to its front appears peculiar. The
forward elements of the 3rd Platoon (led by Corporal
Raymond Giaquinto) are accompanied by flank guards
that lurk astride the halted vehicles. Instinctively, the
guards sprint forward on their respective sides of the
MSR and form a lethal loop around the suspicious
ground, which harbors a machine gun and five enemy
troops. Corporal Giaquinto’s contingent creates a three-
pronged terminator force, which springs a vicious and
swift charge. The fleeting strike eliminates five defend-
ers, and the perched machine gun never gets off a
round. Soon after, the forward elements eliminate an-
other trio of enemy obstacles by combining direct as-
saults and envelopment tactics.
By 1000, the lead components of the brigade arrive
at a bridge north of the objective. Prior to crashing into
Kosong, the 3rd Battalion enlists the guns of the 1st
Battalion, 11th Marines, by requesting a preparatory
bombardment to soften the resistance. Slightly before
noon, the 105s roar. Streams of arcing shells initiate a
demolition derby. The barrage blows some buildings
into instantaneous debris and splinters, much of which
swirls into the sky. The bombardment inspires the oc-
cupying forces of the N.K. 83rd Motorcycle Regiment
to evacuate.
While the 105s maintain a steady string of deadly
fire, about 100 enemy vehicles begin their escape, but
the retreating regiment receives no reprieve. The ill-
fated convoy scoots through the flying dust and rubble,
escaping the town only to encounter more firepower.
TACP had requested air support, and as the convoy exits
the town, four Marine aircraft appear in the skies di-
rectly above it. The planes had just catapulted from the
USS Badoeng Strait in response to a call for a search-
and-destroy mission beyond the town. The imminent
bonanza is totally unanticipated by the brigade, but
nonetheless greatly appreciated.
The VMF-323 planes, led by Major Lund, are a ter-
rifying omen for the contingents of the motorcycle reg-
iment. The Corsairs swoop down to their usual dan-
gerously low level, and then trigger a relentless strafing
run that rivets the entire column. The convoy, without
choice, screeches to a halt, causing a chain reaction pile-
up and a chaotic situation. The vehicles either smash
into each other or careen wildly into the gutters astride
the road. The enemy troops bolt for cover away from the
burning vehicles. The ravaging Corsairs of Major
Arnold Lund continue to spew fire into the enemy.
The planes pummel specific targets with rockets and
20-mm shells, to the consternation of the beleaguered
enemy. However, the North Koreans resist as best they
can. Return small-arms fire damages two of the aircraft,
which compels the distressed pilots to attempt emer-
gency landings.
Captain Vivian Moses, who had been shot down and
 209
An enemy captive grabs a cigarette break while two troops stand guard over him.
rescued unharmed by a helicopter from behind the
enemy’s lines on the previous day, is again shot down.
He attempts to land his disabled plane in enemy terri-
tory. Upon impact, Moses is thrown from the cockpit
and he loses consciousness. He drowns in the rice paddy
within minutes, before a rescuing helicopter arrives to
save him. Captain Moses becomes the first fatality of
VMF-323 and the first Marine Corps aviator to be
killed during the Korean War. Moses was the nephew
of Major General Emile P. Moses. The other downed
pilot, Lieutenant Doyle Cole, ditches his plane in the
sea. Luckily, General Craig passes over in his helicop-
ter to inspect the area; Craig operates the helicopter’s
hoist and pulls Cole to safety.
Meanwhile, additional planes from VMF-323 arrive
to relieve the initial attack force. This second wave of
Marine Corsairs is bolstered by Air Force F-51s that
join the hunt dubbed “the Kosong Turkey Shoot.” Fol-
lowing the decimation of the enemy convoy, the 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines attacks Kosong; Company H
leaps through Company G’s positions along the MSR
and enters Kosong against light opposition. Captain
Fegan neutralizes the defenders with one rifle platoon
and two supporting tanks. Fegan then pivots to the
right and drives south toward Sachon while his other
two platoons maintain their southern movement to-
ward a hill in front of Sunam-dong.
In the meantime, Lieutenant Bohn’s Company G,
3rd Battalion, passes through the area just west of the
Kosong to assault Hill 88, defended by about 100 Com-
munist troops. Along the route of advance, Company
G encounters an obstinate enemy pocket. The obsta-
August 11, 1950
cle is eliminated, but several casualties are sustained.
Company H, awaiting orders, is poised to strike Hill 88;
while standing by, the ground troops see planes from
MAG-33 soar overhead and rock the summit with a
blazing attack in coordination with the guns of the 1st
Battalion, 11th Marines. Upon cessation of the air and
artillery strikes, Company H advances, and to its sur-
prise, against an enemy that has vanished. The hill is se-
cured at 1330.
While Companies G and H clear their respective
areas of responsibility, General Craig arrives in Kosong.
He witnesses a brief duel; a small detachment of enemy
snipers is perched in and about the school house adjoin-
ing the school yard where Colonel Taplett is establish-
ing his battalion command post. Unexpectedly, some
threatening but ineffective shots ring out. In sponta-
neous response, sniper teams of Taplett’s 3rd Battalion
snap into action. Following the resounding crackle of
shells fired by sharpshooters, the enemy snipers sud-
denly expire. The 3rd Battalion is ordered by General
Craig to abort any additional action around Kosong
and at once to turn its attention toward Sachon. Com-
pany G descends Hill 88, which affords a reprieve for
any North Korean troops that remain in the heights
above Sunam-dong. Company H assembles on the
western fringe of the town and prepares to spearhead the
attack.
Meanwhile, an ambulance speeds toward the area
where the casualties from the earlier skirmish at Hill
88 are waiting, but after it cruises through the posi-
tions of Company H, it misses a southward turn. In-
advertently the medics continue toward Sachon. The
August 11, 1950
U.S. Sherman tanks pause while infantry moves around a bend along a serpentine road.
ambulance races directly into the sights of two enemy
antitank guns entrenched on the blind side of a curve
in the road. The medical jeep, conspicuously marked,
is decimated when it rounds the bend. The driver,
Corpsman William Anderson, is killed by the barrage
and two other troops are catapulted from the wreckage.
Captain Fegan, Company H, moves to the curve,
bringing two M-26 tanks with him. Sergeant Johnnie
Cottrel swivels the turret of his tank toward the obsta-
210
cles, then he unleashes three 90-mm rounds that oblit-
erate the final enemy blocking position and clear the
route to Sachon. Along the way, the ground troops ac-
quire a special attitude toward VMF-323 and the Air
Force F-51s that have cluttered the road with smolder-
ing enemy vehicles, left in the wake of the retreat from
Kosong.
Momentarily, the Marines pause and stand in awe
of the massive damage inflicted by the aircraft. The
 211
abandoned enemy vehicles have become bizarre con-
tortions of scrap metal. However, some of the enemy
vehicles, including jeeps and motorcycles with side-
cars, remain unscathed and in mint condition. A quick
inspection determines that Lend-Lease to the Russians
during World War II is again haunting American
troops. The captured Communist jeeps are manufac-
tured in Russia and their Ford-type engines are quite fa-
miliar to the Marines. The normally stern NCOs crack
a smile and allow troop discipline to dissipate while
they fool around, as if in an amusement park back in the
States. The Marines drive the smacking new motorcy-
cles and the equally fresh Russian jeeps around VMF-
323’s recently created obstacle course.
The savored moments are quickly over, and the
brigade resumes the attack. The 3rd Battalion remains
out front, trailed by the 2nd Battalion, but the entire
column retains the umbrella support of VMF-323 and
the much-appreciated light observation planes that
sprout off optimistic reports on the enemy’s movement.
The reports indicate a rapid retirement toward Sachon,
with the Marines on their heels. By 1800, after advanc-
ing several miles, the lead M-26 tanks and elements of
Company H approach a concealed enemy machine gun
nest that lurks lazily in a valley to the left. Unexpect-
edly, the machine gun fire rakes the advance troops and
wounds three Marines.
The tanks move up to extinguish the threat. They
uncork their .50-caliber machine guns and destroy the
nest and its crew. At this time, the column halts for the
night. Colonel Taplett’s 3rd Battalion spreads out and
occupies two hills, both slightly north of the road. Be-
cause an amphibious operation had been considered
possible during the advance that followed the capture
of Kosong, the LST QO119 is nearby. It is operated by
Team No. 1, Company A, 1st Shore Party Battalion,
and it has been shadowing the column. The vessel is
anchored off the fishing village of Tanghong-ni. The
LST also doubles as a hospital vessel for the brigade.
Under the circumstances, which include extreme heat
as well as battle casualties, Company C, 1st Medical
Battalion, receives little rest.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: The N.K. 4th
Division, which had begun crossing the Naktong on
August 5, has now supplemented its arsenal by trans-
porting artillery and possibly some tanks across the
river during the previous night. The artillery is de-
ployed near Kogong-ni, about one mile behind the
enemy positions on the ridge and Cloverleaf, from
where it can shell Yongsan.
The steady flow of reinforcements has enabled the
North Koreans to infiltrate further and to begin to cir-
cumvent the U.S. positions at Cloverleaf and Obong-
ni Ridge; a formidable force stands to the rear of the
U.S. lines. Task Force Hill launches its attack, but it
hits strong opposition. The 1st Battalion, 21st Regi-
ment, is dislodged by enemy contingents of the N.K.
4th Division before it steps off. And the 9th RCT and
the 19th Regiment both fail to progress beyond their
jump-off points. The enemy’s infusion of artillery
August 11, 1950
makes the situation worse. By afternoon, orders arrive
directing TF Hill to abort the assault, dig in defen-
sively and hold the line. Reinforcements rush to the
24th Division sector to bolster Task Force Hill against
the superior numbered force. As of the night of the
11th, the entire N.K. 4th Division will have crossed to
the east side of the Naktong.
Meanwhile, as the main battle ensues without re-
straint, other enemy contingents slither toward a de-
tachment of Company K, 3rd Battalion, 34th Regi-
ment, which is deployed at a bridge along the southern
portion of the perimeter. The North Koreans take the
squad by complete surprise and eliminate it. The enemy
also secures the strategic bridge at Namji-ri. The seizure
of this Naktong River bridge severs the Yongsan-Masan
Road and prevents any further movement of vehicles
between the lines of the 24th and 25th Divisions. Fu-
ture trips must be by circuitous routes.
A contingent of the 24th Division reconnaissance
company encounters an enemy force south of Yongsan
and its patrol is aborted. East of Yongsan, the enemy in-
filtration hinders the flow of traffic between Miryang
and Yongsan. Concealed snipers are deployed along the
route, and as the day unfolds, the North Koreans also
establish a roadblock. Prior to dawn on the 12th, the
blockage is stretched to within three miles of the town.
All the while, feverish combat continues for domination
of Cloverleaf and Obong-ni Ridge to the front of
Yongsan.
The 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment (reserve status),
is at Masan on the southwest portion of the Pusan
Perimeter. General Walker orders it to drive north and
bolt the Naktong at Namji-ri, where the North Kore-
ans have seized the bridge. Immediately thereafter, the
battalion springs northward, zig-zagging through the
onslaught of refugees who are fleeing south along the
crammed highway. Along the route, a refugee cart gets
knocked over, and its cargo is discovered to be con-
cealed weapons for North Koreans. The infiltrators
number about twelve troops. They attempt to run
away, but instant reaction by Colonel Gordon Murch’s
troops cuts eight of them down as they speed through
a rice paddy.
After the interruption, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Reg-
iment, continues its northward march and encounters
about two hundred Communist troops near Iryuong-
ni, about two miles short of the objective. Brisk fight-
ing develops and the enemy scatters, thanks in part to
the guns of Lt. Colonel August Terry’s 8th FABn. Fol-
lowing the skirmish, the 2nd Battalion advances to the
bridge and crosses to the north side. By midnight
(11th-12th) it establishes defensive positions. Due to
the dogged resistance encountered by the 2nd Battal-
ion, 27th Regiment, General Walker directs Colonel
Stephens to commit the 3rd Battalion, commanded by
Colonel George DeChow.
In other activity, General Church orders the 14th
Engineer Combat Battalion to head for Yongsan to bol-
ster the defenses there. Suddenly, although the signs
have been visible for some time, General Church focuses
August 11, 1950
his attention to the rear rather than the offensive ac-
tions at the Naktong. The North Koreans have perme-
ated the rear and the consequences are devastating to the
24th Division, which is gasping for breath.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, the 1st Cavalry Division con-
tinues to mop up around Hill 268. In contrast, the
N.K. 3rd Division attempts to put the pieces together,
since the molestation of its 7th Regiment and the repulse
of the 8th and 9th Regiments at the Naktong on the
night of the August 9. Both engagements cost the
enemy heavily.
In other activity, the N.K. 10th Division received
orders on the previous day to attack across the Nak-
tong, near Tuksong-dong. The units congregate in the
area near Koryyong preparing to move across the river
after dark. Once across, the division is to swing east to
sever the primary Taegu-Pusan supply road. However,
the U.S. 1st Cavalry Division, in anticipation of such
a move, has taken some precautions. Riflemen and ma-
chine gunners are scattered in excellent defensive posi-
tions in the hills near the damaged bridge. In addition,
the artillerymen and mortar teams have preregistered the
crossing site to assure effective fire. Eighth Army strat-
egy intentionally leaves a damaged bridge, sturdy
enough to handle only infantry, to lure the enemy into
the trap.
The N.K. 3rd Division was expected to join the
untested N.K. 10th Division, but the 3rd’s surprising
defeat makes the combined attack impossible. On the
night of the 10th, the commanding officer of the N.K.
25th Regiment still expects support from the mighty 3rd
Division “to destroy the enemy [U.S.] in Taegu City
in coordination with the 3rd Infantry Division [N.K.].”
Nonetheless, the N.K. 10th Division begins its night ex-
cursion late on the 11th. The N.K. 25th Regiment ad-
vances on the north flank near the battered bridge. The
N.K. 29th Regiment crosses farther south, about three
to five miles west of Hyongp’ung, and the 2nd Battal-
ion crosses uneventfully at three separate ferry cross-
ings. The 2nd Battalion deploys on Hill 265, a spur of
Hill 409. The 1st and 3rd Battalions follow and oc-
cupy Hill 409. During the crossing, the 1st Battalion
sustains about 20 to 30 lost to drowning in a rapid cur-
rent.
During the morning of the 12th, it is a contingent of
this regiment that ambushes a 21st U.S. Regiment pa-
trol during the Battle of Naktong Bulge. On the north
flank, the N.K. 25th Division will initiate its crossing
at 0300 on August 12. Also, on the 11th, at 0515, a
North Korean guerrilla contingent (about 100 men)
that has infiltrated the Pusan Perimeter springs a sur-
prise attack against a radio relay station located on Hill
915, less than 10 miles south of Taegu. Seventy S.K. po-
lice defending the VHF station and its American op-
erators are driven off. The Americans sustain two killed,
two wounded and three men missing. During the day,
S.K. police move back to the area, but the enemy has
vanished.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The N.K.
212
766th Independent Regiment, which earlier split away
from the N.K. 5th Division near Yongdok, has moved
discreetly through the mountains to emerge behind
Pohang-dong, but a detachment remains at the site of
the Company K, 9th Regiment, ambush. On this day,
the enemy contingent is caught at the site of the ambush
by aerial observance. While plans are in the making to
eliminate the threat, a tank company with the 9th Reg-
iment is intercepted as it pauses at Kyongju to await
the completion of repairs on a damaged bridge; Walker
directs the tanks to advance to Yonil Airfield. Other
orders are received by the S.K. 17th Regiment releas-
ing it from TF Pohang and ordering it to move from
An’gang-ni to Yonil. A KMAG advisor to the S.K. Reg-
iment, Captain Darrigo, leads an armored patrol from
An’gang-ni to Pohang-dong and the Yonil Airfield;
Darrigo rides in the lead tank to guide the patrol to the
scene of the ambush near Tongnam-ni.
Meanwhile, TF Pohang launches a morning attack
that drives north from An’gang-ni, but it encounters
stiff opposition just after jump-off. The resistance,
thought to be forward contingents of the N.K. 12th Di-
vision, pushes the task force back. The Capital Divi-
sion also is compelled to give ground. Fighter pilots
from Yonil fly desperate missions to neutralize the
threat, but the enemy pressure remains strong. During
one heated and lopsided firefight, two entire Companies
of the S.K. 25th Regiment are wiped out. One pilot re-
lates the circumstances of the agonizing day: “I barely
had my wheels up before I started my strafing runs.”
Some enemy patrols reach positions only three miles
south of Pohang-dong; the initial troops may have en-
tered the town on the 10th. About 300 troops of the
N.K. 766th Independent Regiment and the N.K. 5th
Division move into the town on this day and temporar-
ily seize the railroad station. Planes and naval surface
vessels pummel the positions and drive the Commu-
nists back into the hills, relegating the empty town to a
no man’s land. Both sides send patrols into it during
the darkened hours, but neither holds a trump card to
claim it as a prize.
Meanwhile, the armored patrol, led by Captain Dar-
rigo, continues its mission and reaches the curve in the
road where Company K, 9th Regiment, had been am-
bushed. The enemy waits to spring yet another surprise.
The tanks roll closer, expecting to avenge the ambush,
but before the armor begins to pump its iron, four
screeching F-51 fighters swing overhead and begin to
spread their killing power amidst the concealed enemy
positions. The enfilade from the sky prompts the enemy
to abandon their holes to search for sanctuary; how-
ever, Darrigo’s armored platoon catches the troops as
they reveal their positions. The enemy is sprayed with
incessant machine gun fire that inflicts heavy casualties.
In one instance, a group of about seventy enemy troops
are snagged on bare terrain.
With the expiration of the roadblock, the armored
patrol advances and arrives at Yonil Airfield about 2030.
Captain Darrigo, the guide, is especially pleased with the
success of the mission. He had been the sole
 213
American officer on the 38th Parallel when the North
Koreans began their invasion. The patrol delivers the
first tanks to the airfield. The treaded battlewagons de-
ploy to stiffen the perimeter. Throughout the night,
the enemy in the heights south and west of the field
catapult fire toward the airstrip. The barrages disrupt
sleep, but the long-range guns continually miss the
mark. As a precaution, all aircraft have departed Yonil
for the night, but they return on the morning of the
12th.
In related activity, S.K. Colonel Kim Hi Chun’s S.K.
17th Regiment will drive to Yonil from An’gang-ni on
the 12th to further bolster the airfield.
In Air Force activity, on this day the Air Force begins
transporting trucks in C-19 Flying Boxcars from
Tachikawa Air Base to Taegu.
In Naval activity, the HMS Warrior (CVL) and HMS
Ocean (CVL) arrive to join with the U.S. and British
naval forces already operating in Korean waters.
— In the United States: President Truman author-
izes the transfer of the 3rd Infantry Division from gen-
eral reserve to the Far East, but he stipulates that it is
to be deployed only in Japan to replace the 7th Divi-
sion and he emphasizes that it is not to be committed
in Korea. In conjunction, the much-depleted U.S. 3rd
Division is in terrible shape.
— In Japan: General MacArthur instructs General
Walker (in Korea) to bolster the 7th Division by using
South Korean troops. More than 8,600 South Korean
civilians will arrive in Japan from Korea to join the di-
vision before it begins the Inchon operation. Most of the
Koreans are unable to converse in English, giving the
NCOs additional problems. The South Korean recruits
are dispersed among the rifle companies and the ar-
tillery batteries, which necessitates the implementation
of the buddy system. Back in the States, the Army races
to meet the leadership challenge. Fortunately, by the
time of the Inchon Invasion, sufficient numbers of
skilled and seasoned NCOs and officers from Fort
Benning’s Infantry and Artillery Schools arrive to raise
the caliber of the 7th Division to a higher degree of
readiness than initially expected.
August 12 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the
1st Provisional Marine Brigade area, General Craig es-
tablishes his command post at Kosong at 0800. At
1130, General Kean, commanding general, 25th Divi-
sion, contacts Craig by phone and instructs him to rush
a reinforced battalion to the rear to support the 24th
Regiment at Chindong-ni, where the enemy has severed
the MSR and captured artillery pieces. Craig dispatches
the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, by 1300. By 1400, he
ponders the risk, considering that his brigade is down
to two battalions and Sachon must still be taken.
Meanwhile, at 0630, there is a change of the guard
as the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, commanded by Lt.
Colonel George Newton, eases through the positions of
the 3rd Battalion to attack and secure Sachon. The col-
umn is spearheaded by a 15-man contingent of the re-
connaissance company. It is an unsettling march
August 12, 1950
through an eerie tranquilness that exhibits no visible
signs of the enemy. The circumstances raise some grave
concern for the seasoned veterans, who recall similar
experiences from World War II. The advance continues
uncontested for more than four hours. Nevertheless,
the tension continues to increase. The vanguard gains
eleven miles and approaches Sachon, but still, the mys-
terious and somber bone-chilling silence signals immi-
nent danger.
The recon point men, led by Captain Kenneth
Houghton, approach a suspicious curve about four
miles from the objective at about noon. Company B, 1st
Battalion, trails closely behind; its 1st Platoon is on the
point, nosing just ahead of two tanks. The 2nd and
3rd platoons follow, trailed by a caboose of three addi-
tional tanks and the remainder of the battalion. At
about 1200, the restless vanguard swings around the
foreboding curve that leads into Changchon, an
innocent-looking village of thatched huts. In a flash,
the uncanny aura is penetrated and the queer silence
ends. The Marines spot two enemy soldiers and take
them under fire to ignite a huge powder keg.
The hills on both sides of the road are infested with
enemy troops, poised to snarl the entire column by per-
mitting it to move within range before snapping the
lethal trap. But the early detection of the enemy prema-
turely trips the wire. The hills become electrified as
clanging machine guns lay down an enfilade that sprays
the Marines from both flanks and from the front. The
reconnaissance troops return fire, while awaiting rein-
forcements. Meanwhile, the artillery contingents begin
to establish positions, but their immediate help is un-
available. Captain Tobin speeds the 1st Platoon to bol-
ster the recon troops. Three Marines become casual-
ties in the process.
Then some heavier persuaders advance. Three tanks
move out, trailed by the 2nd Platoon to further augment
the point troops. The tanks confine their movement to
the road to avoid becoming bogged down in the soggy
ground, but still they provide additional shields of for-
midable armor for the infantry. Nonetheless, the enemy
fire increases.
The 3rd Platoon and headquarters troops, still to the
rear, also come under severe fire from Hill 250 on the
right side of the road. Colonel Newton calls in air sup-
port to deliver some killing power on Hill 250. Corsairs
arrive and oblige by pounding the slope. Following ces-
sation of the air strike, Lieutenant Cowling leads his
3rd Platoon to seize the heights. Company A rushes a
rifle company and one machine gun section to assist
Company B’s 3rd Platoon. Colonel Newton directs the
reinforcements from Able Company to secure Hill 301,
which also lies to the right of the road.
While the 1st Battalion engages the enemy, the 2nd
Battalion deploys to protect the remainder of the
brigade’s column. In the meantime, the Corsairs ex-
pend much of their fuel, and Colonel Newton is in-
formed that two of the planes will be available for only
five additional minutes. Newton suggests that the Cor-
sairs sweep the road between Sachon and Changchon
August 12, 1950
in search of prey. The planes zoom above the road and
catch another enemy convoy. The five remaining min-
utes of fuel is sufficient to kill some of the enemy. Fol-
lowing the deadly strafing runs, the small enemy con-
voy resembles a scale-model replica of the iron rubble
outside of Kosong, complete with swirling smoke and
twisted metal.
While the planes, artillery and mortar units plaster
Hill 301, the advancing 3rd Platoon, Company B, gets
caught in a cross-fire by surviving enemy machine guns
and small-arms fire. It is compelled to withdraw. One
man is killed and two are wounded. Nearby, reinforce-
ments from Company A seize Hill 301 without inci-
dent, but other hellish fighting continues without
pause. The 3rd Platoon, Company B, moves to Hill
301 and Captain Stephens leads the balance of his
Company A to take the heights on the right side of the
road. However, heavy enemy resistance remains on Hill
250. Marine artillerymen begin pumping iron, cata-
pulting 113 rounds into it. And the stubborn hill is
further saturated by another air strike by Marine Cor-
sairs. The hostile machine gun fire on Hill 250 is ter-
minated, and Company B’s right flank is secured.
Still, the left flank of B Company is ripe with vi-
cious fire, as the 1st and 2nd Platoons maintain their
positions in the gutters along the road. The platoons re-
turn fire while awaiting relief by the big guns. The Ma-
rine artillery flexes its muscle in synchronization with
the free-swinging Corsairs, which deliver three addi-
tional strikes. The incessant pounding eliminates the
enemy positions one at a time. The 1st and 2nd Pla-
toons bolt from the gutters and join the attack. The
ground troops dart across a rice paddy to complete the
destruction of the enemy on the hill.
Nearby, Lieutenant Taylor detects an enemy contin-
gent of thirty-nine troops as they advance along the re-
verse slope toward the summit of Hill 202. Sergeant
F.J. Lischeski rushes forward with a squad to ensure
that the enemy receives a warm greeting. The troops
disperse along the rim of the ridge, and Lischeski then
cautions them to hold their fire until they get close.
The Marines stare impatiently as the enemy climbs the
rugged hill. When they reach a point about 75 yards
from the crest, the Marine riflemen fire in unison. The
entire enemy unit is wiped out, except for one officer
who succumbs en route to the command post.
Dusk then settles over the area and Company B is
able to complete its movement to the heights on the
left side of the highway to establish a night perimeter.
Marine losses during the skirmishing are 3 killed and
13 wounded. The 1st Battalion expects to resume the
attack to take Sachon on the 13th, but new orders ar-
rive at midnight (12th-13th) that direct the battalion
to form for movement to reinforce Eighth Army units
in another area. The decision does not sit well with the
Marines, who are anxious to finish the job, having been
convinced that their swift advance has broken the back
of the enemy opposition in the vicinity of Sachon. The
brigade withdrawal order reads, “Following brigade
rapid advance from Chindong-ni to Sachon-ni in
214
which the brigade attacked, overcame and pursued the
enemy, the 25th Infantry Division has directed the
withdrawal of this brigade in order to hold a defensive
position and mop up enemy resistance in the zone of ac-
tion of elements of the 25th Division.” Subsequently,
it becomes known that the decision to pull back the
Marines was based on the enemy’s penetration of the
Naktong. This had compelled Eighth Army to rede-
ploy the Marines to prepare to launch a counterattack.
Meanwhile, in the 24th Regiment sector, shortly
after 1330, Lt. Colonel Stewart and Lt. Colonel Ta-
plett arrive by helicopter to meet a liaison officer at a
bridge specified by General Kean; however, the army
jeep scheduled to meet them is not in the area. While
landing, the Marines spot a camouflaged army tank
and inquire of the crew about the jeep, but they have
no knowledge. The two Marine officers check out the
area where the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, will be ar-
riving. Eventually, they find a line and reach the 25th
Division CP by phone, whereby they are instructed to
determine how to eliminate the enemy in the area.
Taplett and Stewart are also directed to establish se-
curity for the remaining artillery unit (one Battery
159th FAB, attached to 25th Division). Colonels Stew-
art and Taplett also survey the terrain from the heli-
copter, and then they make a quick sweep over the
MSR to locate the advancing 3rd Battalion. After re-
turning, Stewart and Taplett meet Colonel John Daly,
CO, 555th FAB, who informs them that on the previ-
ous night, Battery C of his outfit and two additional
batteries of the 90th FAB had been overwhelmed by
the enemy, rendering them destroyed as fighting units.
Colonel Daly gives the Marine officers the approximate
positions of the enemy, and in fact, he enhances their
strategy by relaying the criticalness of the defenses. It
is decided to seize two dominant ridges lying along the
MSR. But the full picture remains unclear as the day
unfolds.
The Marines, engaged in an attack at Changchon,
had been ordered to move 25 miles to the rear to seize
a ridge that was supposed to be secure. At about the
time the objectives are selected, the 3rd Battalion arrives
by vehicle. Colonel Taplett is supposed to report to
General Barth, ADC, 25th Division, upon his arrival,
but the general is still en route. Taplett decides to im-
mediately launch the attack. He concludes that if he
waits for the general, it would be too dark to initiate an
attack. Without orders, Colonel Daly provides the at-
tacking Marines with a fifteen-minute preparatory ar-
tillery barrage, and Taplett procures a squad of Cor-
sairs that carry partial bomb loads, including napalm.
Army intelligence estimates place the number of enemy
troops in the area between 2,000 and 2,500.
Following the artillery bombardment and the air
strikes, Company H leads the attack. It encounters only
minimal resistance, and the ridge falls without any ca-
sualties. Only one enemy casualty is discovered; he had
apparently succumbed while fighting a rear-action dur-
ing the withdrawal. General Barth arrives at 1900 to as-
sume overall command; he asks Taplett when his
 215
Marines would be prepared to launch the attack. Taplett
responds that the first objective had already been se-
cured. General Barth congratulates Colonel Taplett on
his quick action and he concurs with the rest of the at-
tack plan, which calls for the seizure of the next ridge
on the following morning.
Later, Battery C, 11th Marines, arrives to bolster the
3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, and General Barth further
strengthens the unit by committing three army tanks
and several M-44 armored personnel carriers to the as-
sault. Colonel Taplett and his Marines are pleased with
the cooperation of the Army and particularly with Gen-
eral Barth.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: East of Yongsan,
the enemy again ambushes conspicuously marked U.S.
ambulances. Before daylight, Colonel Hill is informed
that a few ambulances and several trucks had been at-
tacked. Despite the shortages of manpower at Clover-
leaf, Colonel Hill orders Company F, 9th Regiment,
to move from there and destroy the road blockage. The
unit is accompanied by a mortar platoon and the mis-
sion is supplemented as guns of the 15th Field Artillery
Battalion are adjusted and fired toward the trouble spot
along the road. Nevertheless, the roadblock remains
operational into the following day, and the enemy con-
tinues to increase the pressure to strangle Yongsan,
which is close to being encircled.
General Walker again arrives by air. He confers with
General Church, CO, 24th Division, and he discovers
no change for the better. But the three battered regi-
ments their respective sectors maintain their attempt
to forestall a massive breakthrough. Walker is well aware
that the 27th Regiment, 25th Division, is en route from
the south, but its two attacking battalions are hindered
by throngs of civilians who clog the route of advance
and stall the rescue operation.
Walker, in yet another desperate maneuver, orders
General Keiser (2nd Division) to dispatch one battal-
ion of the 23rd Regiment to augment the 24th Division.
Colonel Paul Freeman, commander of the 23rd Regi-
ment, directs his 1st Battalion, commanded by Colo-
nel Claire Hutchin, to execute the mission beginning
August 13. Also, during the effort to subdue the
enemy’s eastward advance and to preserve Yongsan, the
27th Regiment, 25th Division, is attached to Church’s
24th Division.
A conglomeration of U.S. Army troops ranging from
cooks and clerks to reconnaissance troops is fabricated
into a 135-man outfit and placed under the command
of Captain George Hafemen, headquarters company
commander. The improvised unit speeds from Miryang
to plug the passage along the Yongsan-Miryang Road,
just outside Simgong-ni at the pass. The modified ri-
flemen accompanied by two tanks reach the destination
and soon become engaged in a bitter skirmish. Hafe-
men’s team repels repeated enemy attacks, thanks in
part to the support of armored cars that shuttle water,
food and ammunition from Miryang.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment,
which had re-secured the bridge over the Naktong at
August 12, 1950
Namji-ri, is back on the assault. It advances north and
engages heavily fortified enemy troops who are armed
with mortars and machine guns as well as the usual
small arms. The 2nd Battalion attacks and a day-long
struggle ensues. Aided by the added punch of support-
ing aircraft, the 2nd Battalion convincingly pushes the
enemy from their positions. About 100 enemy troops
are killed, but the number of wounded is indeter-
minable. In addition, twelve machine guns and several
antitank “Buffalo Rifles” are included with the cache of
abandoned equipment.
On the following day, the 2nd Battalion, under Col-
onel Murch, resumes its northward drive to clear the
sector south of Yongsan. The ongoing fighting remains
heavy and neither side receives the advantage. The
North Koreans have not been thrown back across the
Naktong, and in turn, they have been unable to take
Yongsan. Meanwhile, the publicized prediction by the
North Korean leader that all of Korea would be united
under their Communist banner by August 15 seems
much less probable now.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, the N.K. 10th Division had
begun crossing the Naktong on the previous night. At
0300 this day, its 25th Regiment starts to cross the river
about fourteen miles southwest of Taegu, near the dam-
aged bridge. The area is defended by the 2nd Battalion,
7th Cavalry Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel
Gilman A. Huff. In addition, the battalion is bolstered
by the preregistered guns of the 77th Field Artillery Bat-
talion, commanded by Lt. Colonel William A. Harris.
The artillery guards the crossing site and the
Koryong-Taegu Road. About 300 to 400 enemy troops
cross and advance to the village of Wich’on-dong by
about dawn. The contingent is apparently en route to
secure the heights east of Yongp’o, from where it can
provide cover fire for the main body of the division,
which is scheduled to follow. At the village, Company
H, 7th Cavalry, intercepts the advance guard and a gru-
eling battle erupts. The Communists and Company H
become locked in a tight-fisted, close-quartered strug-
gle. The enemy unleashes a tenacious attack that in-
cludes automatic weapons and grenades.
The initial enemy thrust blows a hole into the ad-
vance positions of the cavalry. The situation at first ap-
pears grave, as the enemy lunges farther and shreds the
mortar positions and the heavy machine gun emplace-
ments. However, the gargantuan guns of the artillery ac-
celerate their powerful barrage, and at about the same
time, planes arrive to deliver more destructive fire. The
combined deadly fire quickly diminishes the strength of
the attack and gives the cavalry new momentum. By
0900, the 2nd Battalion has halted the advance in its
tracks and it has revoked the enemy’s progress. With the
blazing artillery at their backs and the attacking planes
overhead, the 2nd Battalion shoves the enemy back-
ward and chases them through Yongp’o. The remnant
enemy survivors scatter and attempt to retrace their
steps back to the bridge and beyond to the safety of
their lines.
August 13, 1950
Although the cavalry has turned back the initial at-
tack, it realizes that it must still brace for the primary
attack, which will begin during the morning hours of
the 14.
In other activity, a group of sailors (Underwater De-
molition Team) and Marines (Amphibious Scouts, Re-
connaissance Company, 1st Marine Division) debark
the USS Horace A. Bass south of Inchon to execute a
special operation. The troops, without sustaining any
casualties, launch several raids between this day and
the 16th. The team wrecks three tunnels and destroys
two bridges. Following the mission, the unit is retrieved
by the Navy.
In Air Force activity, a large group of B-29s bomb
the port of Rashin in the northeastern sector of North
Korea in the vicinity of the border with the Soviet
Union.
— In the Mediterranean: The contingent of the 6th
Marines, FMFLant, serving with the Sixth Fleet, is or-
dered to Korea. The command post aboard the USS
Yellowstone receives urgent special orders from the chief
of naval operations that direct the 6th Marines to em-
bark for the Far East. Additional contingents will em-
bark from San Diego. The orders circumvent the com-
mandant Marine Corps and Sixth Fleet, due to the
compelling circumstances in Korea; however, the com-
mandant, General Cates, is with Admiral Sherman
while the orders are being drawn.
The 6th Marines embark on the USS Bexar, which
will arrive in Suda Bay on the evening of August 14. The
unit will mold the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Ma-
rine Division, due to be activated on August 17. Nei-
ther the men nor the officers are aware of the still se-
cret plans to invade Inchon; they believe the unit will
be committed as an amphibious assault team of a U.S.
task force.
— In Japan: General MacArthur issues CINCFE
Operation Plan 100-B. The plan lists the Inchon-Seoul
vicinity as the target for the amphibious invasion force.
In three days, MacArthur will establish headquarters
for the operation.
August 13 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: The 1st
Provisional Marine Brigade, acting upon orders from the
25th Division, prepares to withdraw from the vicinity
of Changchon and Sachon. The individual units are
informed of the departure at 0400 (OP Order 1050).
Stretched left to right along Hill 202 are the 3rd, 1st and
2nd Platoons, Company B, 1st Battalion. The forma-
tion is tight and the men remain alert.
Meanwhile, silently, the enemy has crept forward to
infiltrate and assume concealed positions, poised for a
pre-dawn assault. At 0450, enemy machine gun fire
breaks the calm. With instant response, Marine 60-
mm mortar illuminating shells streak skyward and ex-
pose an enemy concentration on the right flank, near
the 2nd Platoon, but this incursion is a ruse to take the
focus off the primary assault. It commences at 0455,
when three enemy flares are propelled into the sky, two
red and one green. They ignite a furious night attack
216
against the left flank. The enemy hurls a powerful as-
sault against the 3rd Platoon and the machine gun sec-
tion; the latter is annihilated, except for two Marines.
With the absence of communications, confusion
emerges. The radios had been destroyed earlier while the
men were crossing rice paddies and trudging through
the mud. Now their phones are inoperable, probably
due to severed wires. In the midst of the feverish bat-
tle, two runners attempt to reach the besieged contin-
gents, but both are cut down by enemy fire. The fight-
ing continues to intensify and at close quarters. Shots
and grenades are rapidly exchanged during the battle,
and the enemy captures two machine guns and turns its
fire on the Marines. In the meantime, a third messen-
ger breaches the fire and reaches the left flank. He di-
rects the survivors to pull back and reform with the 1st
Platoon, but the captured machine guns hinder this
action. The gruesome exchange draws more blood and
without reprieve, but the survivors hold.
Finally, with a hint of daylight, the 3.5" rocket
launchers destroy the two captured machine guns. But
the situation doesn’t automatically get better. Enemy
fire in turn knocks out the radio of the artillery’s for-
ward observer, and then the mortars on the left flank ex-
pend their ammunition. At this point the enemy piv-
ots to divide and conquer. They drive a sharp wedge
between the 1st and 2nd Platoons, but raking return fire
inflicts severe casualties.
At 0630, Company B is ordered to disengage and de-
scend to the command post to join the battalion. Mean-
while, Captain Tobin tries using the radios of Company
A to get support from artillery and mortar fire to buy
time while he reforms for attack. The 1st and 3rd Pla-
toons are ordered to converge on the 2nd Platoon po-
sitions on the right flank. At about the same time, the
enemy withdraws toward the lower sections of the con-
tested hill. In the interim, the enemy small-arms fire
subsides, but mortars continue to sprinkle the area.
By 0815, using stiff discipline, the individual units
have descended the hill. Almost in cadence, a group of
soaring Corsairs arrives; the planes deliver a mighty
blow that culminates the action and effectively tran-
quilizes the enemy fire. The struggle on Hill 202 takes
the lives of 12 Marines and wounds 18 others. Also, 8
Marines are missing in action.
Prior to the descent, Captain Tobin had requested
permission to launch a final attack to regain the miss-
ing troops, but his request is denied on the basis that the
withdrawal is behind schedule. Tobin had been con-
vinced that a final attack would regain the lost ground
in about one hour and they could reclaim their dead.
The denial of permission to retrieve their dead buddies
is not well received by the Marines. The brigade moves
out, with its engineers and armor protecting the rear.
When the ground is retaken during September, the
bodies of seven Marines are discovered. Much later,
during November of 1953, the final missing Marine
on Hill 202 is declared dead.
The engineers are ordered to lay mines and demol-
ish some bridges and culverts. In one instance, the
 217
engineers of the 1st Platoon, Company A, 1st Engi-
neer Bn., lay a minefield on a road that leads from Sam-
chonpo toward the right flank of the brigade. The mis-
sion is accomplished. However, Lieutenant Nicholas
Canzonna, the platoon leader, discovers to his embar-
rassment that about one-half of the mines had con-
tained the wrong type fuses, which renders them impo-
tent. Apparently, it didn’t matter, as the enemy chose not
to approach them.
In the 25th Division sector, 24th Regiment zone, the
3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, reinitiates its attack to seize
the ridges that dominate the MSR, and it encounters
only slight resistance. By 1000, the two attacking rifle
companies own the real estate on both ridgelines and the
price is right. No casualties are incurred. However, no
enemy casualties are inflicted, which adds more mystery
to the episode of returning 25 miles to attack the ridge.
Nonetheless, the mission of the 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, affords the 25th Division an opportunity to
extricate survivors of the trapped artillery units that
had previously been overrun.
The cunning enemy still permeates the area. Lt. Col-
onel Murray, CO, 5th Marines, arrives over a trapped
contingent of survivors from the 555th FAB and he at-
tempts to deliver a message, but his helicopter nearly
falls prey to a waiting ambush. The helicopter escapes
damage or worse by a thin line and by the excellent skill
of the pilot.
In related activity, Colonel Taplett prepares to launch
another assault to finish his mission by recapturing the
lost artillery pieces, but the brigade receives new orders
to withdraw and the mission is left undone. The ar-
tillery pieces are not regained; rather, air strikes are
called in to demolish them, subsequent to the relief of
the Marine Brigade.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: In the 24th Di-
vision sector, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, con-
tinues its northward drive, but this day, the 3rd Battal-
ion, commanded by Colonel DeChow, enters the battle
to add extra thrust to the mission. Meanwhile, more
U.S. reinforcements rush from Miryang to the Nak-
tong area. The 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, com-
manded by Colonel Paul Freeman, arrives at Miryang.
One battalion immediately races west toward Yongsan
to bolster the attack at the bulge. The untried 1st Bat-
talion, led by executive officer Colonel Cesidio Bar-
beris, attacks and falls prey to the beastly elements. It
sustains more punishment from the weather than from
the enemy. Eight casualties are incurred due to heat ex-
haustion, and one casualty is inflicted by the enemy
during the trek to Yongsan.
At about noon, a plane is dispatched to transport
Colonel Hill (commander, 9th RCT and TF Hill) back
to 24th Division headquarters to meet with General
Walker at the command post. During the afternoon
conference, Colonel Hill responds affirmatively to a
question by General Walker. Hill states that his task
force is capable of the mission and that it will destroy
the North Korean roadblock on the Yongsan-Masan
Road before dusk.
August 13, 1950
To the south, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 27th Reg-
iment, under Colonels Murch and DeChow respec-
tively, advance doggedly. Both units disregard the harsh
heat and converge on the high ground east and north of
Yongsan. The 2nd Battalion encounters the friendly
faces of the men with Task Force Hill. By nightfall, the
threat by the North Korean forces that had breached
U.S. lines and penetrated east and south of Yongsan is
eradicated. In addition, the 27th Regiment recaptures
two U.S. 105-mm howitzers and two enemy guns.
Nevertheless, ferocious fighting continues to ensue at
Cloverleaf, Obong-ni Ridge and the area north of the
pass. Task Force Hill, despite its battle-weariness and
under-strength numbers, prepares to strike these enemy
strong points on the 14th. Colonel Hill anticipates air
and artillery support.
In related activity, some U.S. units, such as Com-
pany K and Company L, 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment,
still hold risky positions in the far southern section of
the 24th Division perimeter, but Colonel John Hill re-
calls these isolated units. At 0200 on the 14th, word
arrives and these units descend from the heights over the
Naktong; they revert to reserve and deploy to the rear
of the 1st Battalion.
In other activity, the enemy has gotten additional el-
ements across the Naktong in the 1st Cavalry area just
north of the 24th Division sector. In response, Gen-
eral Walker expands the 24th Divisional zone to han-
dle the threat. The 24th Division receives easier road ac-
cess to the affected area. Apparently, two enemy
battalions have occupied a mountain (Hill 409) just
outside Hyongp’ung, and additional enemy troops con-
tinue to arrive. Later, information describes these troops
as elements of the N.K. 29th Regiment, 10th Division.
During the night of the 13th, General Church directs
Colonel John Hill to mount a full-scale attack against
Hill 409 on the 14th. Colonels Beauchamp (34th Reg-
iment), Colonel Ned Moore (19th Regiment) and Col-
onel Brad Smith (1st Battalion, 21st Regiment) meet
with Hill to discuss strategy. The individual command-
ers and each of their units are exhausted and battle-
weary, but the assault will go off on schedule. The stress
begins to show more vividly when Colonel Hill, dur-
ing a separate conversation, orders Col. Barberis of the
hearty 900-man 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment, to form
for the battle. Barberis declines, informing Hill that he
is under the control of General Church. The direct in-
tervention of Church settles the disagreement; Barberis
is directed to hold his positions on the main road and
await new orders. Subsequently, the 1st Battalion, 23rd
Regiment is ordered north to bolster Stephens’ 21st
Regiment and Task Force Hyzer.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: At Hill
268, elements of the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regi-
ment, comb the area and discover the severity of the
loss it had inflicted upon the N.K. 7th Regiment when
troops confiscate documents, questions prisoners and
counts the enemy dead, which numbers between 300
and 400 troops. According to information received
from prisoners of the battered regiment, about 700 of
August 13, 1950
the 1,000-man contingent had become casualties. In
contrast, the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, sustained four-
teen troops killed and 48 men wounded during the bat-
tle of August 9-10 south of Waegwan.
The North Korean 10th Division makes preparations
to launch another attack across the Naktong, follow-
ing the failure of its attempt to gain ground on the pre-
vious day.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: Above Yonil
Airfield, the S.K. 3rd Division, isolated since the 10th
near Pohang-dong, continues to forestall annihilation,
but the N.K. 5th Division increases the intensity of the
battle. The South Koreans desperately pull in their lines
to brace for final charge. The cruiser USS Helena and
3 U.S. destroyers remain offshore. Two helicopters from
the Helena shuttle medical supplies for the wounded.
Using the strategic eyes of the tactical air control party
and the artillery spotters, Fifth Air Force aircraft fly
valuable support missions, and the long reaching naval
guns also provide some robust insulation.
Effective fire flows into the crucial areas in front of the
diminishing perimeter, whenever and wherever it is re-
quired, giving hope to the besieged division. However,
the enemy does not relent. The S.K. 3rd Division com-
mand post is pushed about four miles south from
Changsa-dong to the village of Toksong-ni, along the
Sea of Japan.
Also, the South Koreans transfer 313 wounded troops
to an LST at Changsa-dong, but when it attempts to
The oil refinery at Wonsan subsequent to its attack by U.S. planes (B-29s). The strategic facility burned
for several days.
218
move into Toksong-ni, the vessel hits some rocks that
tear a gash in its hull. The wounded must be removed
and placed aboard another LST, but the operation is
precarious because of choppy high seas. Eighty-six of
the most wounded are placed in amphibious vehicles
(DUKWs) and taken to an offshore South Korean hos-
pital ship. Following the mishap, the LST embarks for
Pusan. By the 15th, the 3rd S.K. Division will be or-
dered to evacuate.
At Yonil, U.S. infantry and some armor remain
at the airfield; however, without consultation with
Eighth Army, the FEAF evacuates its planes. Belatedly,
at about 1600, General MacArthur receives a United
Press report (filed at 1320) that details the abandon-
ment. The wire report states that a representative of
the U.S. Air Force had announced that the Pohang
airstrip was being abandoned, and it mentions that the
enemy is placing fire upon it. Apparently, Colonel
Robert Witty, commanding officer of Air Force units
at Yonil, suggested the evacuation of planes, and Gen-
eral Partridge, commanding officer, Fifth Air Force,
concurred.
The telephone lines between Tokyo and Korea begin
to hum. MacArthur’s headquarters telephones Eighth
Army to question the validity of the report, and it is
quickly confirmed by subordinate officers that there
was no discussion concerning the evacuation between
the Army and the Air Force at Yonil. Furthermore,
Eighth Army states that the airfield had not been under
 219
any mortar fire. In addition, MacArthur’s headquar-
ters is told that the reports concerning enemy machine
gun fire were “greatly exaggerated.” The telephone con-
versation between General Roderick R. Allen, deputy
chief of staff, ROK Army, and Colonel William A. Col-
lier, which occurred at 1600, also verifies that Army
units still hold the airfield and that no “effective enemy
fire” had struck the field. As the F-51s take off, the
airstrip is free even of potholes.
The incident does little to create harmony between
the two services. MacArthur, more than slightly per-
turbed, sends word to FEAF that the planes should not
return to Japan. He makes it emphatically clear that
the airfield will be held. Nonetheless, the 45 Fighters
(two squadrons) land at Tsuiki Air Base on Kyushu. In
conjunction, the heavy equipment that was ordered
evacuated from Yonil on the 8th is transported to the
sea and transferred to LSTs. The Fifth Air Force person-
nel will also pull out, departing on the following day.
The North Koreans proclaim the total liberation of
Pohang-dong as great numbers of the N.K. 12th Divi-
sion, which have advanced from Kigye, occupy the
town. Actually, some troops entered the town as early
as the 10th or 11th. U.S. planes and naval surface ves-
sels heavily bombard the town, prompting the 1st Reg-
iment to evacuate quickly. The entire N.K. 12th Divi-
sion moves out and redeploys in the hills to the west and
southwest of the town. The 2nd Regiment places its
2nd and 3rd Battalions in the high ground six miles to
the southwest, within striking range of Yonil. The N.K.
5th Division arrives in the hills north of Pohang-dong.
This day, the S.K. 17th Regiment is attached to the
Capital Division; backed by U.S. tanks and artillery of
Task Force Bradley. The 17th Regiment advances
against the enemy that holds the hills north of Pohang-
dong. Also, Task Force Pohang drives from An’gang-ni
to clear the enemy between it and Kigye. Both sides
sustain heavy casualties during the heated contests.
August 14 Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge:
Task Force Hill reinitiates the attack against Cloverleaf
and Obong-ni Ridge, following after the previous day’s
fighting to successfully terminate the enemy threat east
and north of Yongsan. During the predawn hours, a
storm system arrives to deliver a drenching rain and
ominous clouds. The inclement weather cancels the
preliminary air strikes, but the remaining 24th Division
artillery lays down a short burst of fire. Most of the
guns are posted west of Yongsan under the command
of Lieutenant Charles Stratton, commanding officer,
13th FAB. Following a ten-minute barrage, two battal-
ions of the 9th RCT assault the objective, but each bat-
talion lacks about one-third of its strength. The attack
advances north of the road and then up the hills of
Cloverleaf.
In conjunction, Company B, 34th Regiment, strikes
south of the road against the N.K. 16th Regiment on
Obong-ni Ridge to execute a holding action. The slopes
of Cloverleaf, also held by elements of the N.K. 16th
and 18th Regiments, begin to transform into a ghastly
August 14, 1950
garden of death. The 2nd and 1st Battalions, 9th RCT
on the left and right respectively, become locked in a
close-quarter duel. The battle swings from attack to
defense as the enemy lunges forward to dislodge the
Americans from the heights, and then the Americans
mount counterattacks.
The wild, free-swinging struggle for the slopes in-
flicts heavy casualties on both sides. By the end of the
first hour of combat, the 1st Battalion (599 troops),
under Colonel Londahl, sustains 60 men killed or
wounded in the quest to gain the four-leafed hill, with
its stem leading north. To the north, the attacking 19th
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Ned Moore, meets
rigid resistance by the N.K. 5th Regiment, which pre-
vents any progress.
Meanwhile, at Obong-ni, the holding action gains
prosperous ground and nearly seizes the crest; however,
fierce enemy resistance builds. Company B, 34th Reg-
iment, is compelled to withdraw by about 0800. Back
on Cloverleaf, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 9th RCT,
claw their way toward the summit and claim ground, but
at dusk the dogged effort is still unable to gain domi-
nation. With impunity, the North Koreans use the
darkness to infiltrate the perimeter. The intrusion in-
cites more close-quartered combat. Throughout the
night, the two sides exchange grenades, and much
hand-to-hand fighting also ensues.
During the night of the 14th, the North Koreans also
suddenly strike against the 1st Battalion, 21st Regi-
ment, which is bivouacked south of Obong-ni. The
night raid inflicts serious casualties, but it also envelops
the command, compelling Colonel Hill, at 0300 (15th),
to direct Colonel Charles B. Smith to fight his way out.
Prior to dawn, Smith’s beleaguered regiment plows
through the trap, and it reestablishes defensive posi-
tions along the southern tip of the main line of battle.
In other activity, the 27th Regiment, 25th Division,
is detached from the 24th Division subsequent to its
duty in the southern portion of the Naktong Bulge.
Eighth Army, on the following day, orders the 27th
Regiment, led by Colonel Michaelis, to move to Ky-
ongsan.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, at about dawn, the enemy 10th
Division launches its second and major attempt to cross
the Naktong. Contingents ford the river between
Tuksong-dong and Yongp’o. They advance toward
Yongp’o, the farthest point reached on the previous day,
before being routed.
Troops in the advance outposts acknowledge prob-
lems at about 0520, when the silence in the rice paddies
and pea pods ends. Muffled noises emerge as the terrain
begins to rustle with the shrill voices of the enemy.
Word is quickly passed back to the 2nd Battalion, 7th
Cavalry and to division headquarters, setting the stage
for another donnybrook. The main enemy assault is
augmented by tank fire and artillery barrages that orig-
inate on the west side of the river.
In the meantime, General Gay instructs the 1st Bat-
talion, 7th Cavalry (reserve unit), to prepare to move
August 14, 1950
out. The North Koreans push about 500 troops to
Yongp’o, and in about fifteen minutes, the force stands
about one mile east of the crossing site at the partially
damaged bridge. This places the enemy precariously
close to the 2nd Battalion’s perimeter near Wich’on-
dong. Heavy skirmishing erupts, but the cavalry is not
caught off guard. The battle takes on a grim tone as
the bitter, close-quartered fighting is bloody and re-
lentless.
The attacking soldiers are apparently operating on
extra adrenaline, having received a message from their
leader, Kim Il Sung. He attempts to inspire his troops
by informing them that their crossing of the Naktong
will carry them to victory. He closes his message:
“Young men! Let us protect our glorious pride by com-
pletely annihilating the enemy!” Nonetheless, the 7th
Cavalry, having previously had its pride dented near
Yongdong, is ready for revenge.
By 0800, the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, which had
fought on Hill 268 on August 9-10, is already crammed
on its vehicles when it receives orders to roll to Yong-
p’o to bolster the 2nd Battalion.
Meanwhile, as both sides hammer each other, more
enemy reinforcements gather on the west side of the
Naktong. While they prepare to bolt across the river at
Panjang and at Tuksong-dong, planes arrive overhead.
They bomb and strafe the troop concentrations to in-
terrupt the jump-off. The air strike is bolstered by the
77th Field Artillery Battalion, which arcs nearly 1,900
rounds so quickly that the overworked guns become
damaged. While the aircraft and artillery plaster the
enemy, the cavalry pours its fire into the battle.
The enemy troops, which participate in the second
crossing and make it to the east bank, advance about
one and one-half miles beyond the damaged bridge.
But here, the enemy comes to an abrupt halt at the vil-
lage of Samuni-dong, when they encounter impene-
trable fire. The combined power of all the available in-
fantry weapons and the supporting artillery jolts the
enemy. Some troops spin around and attempt to evade
destruction by retiring to the river. The spine of the
enemy bridgehead at Yongp’o begins to crumble, and
the 7th Cavalry senses the kill. Huge numbers of enemy
troops attempt to get back to the west side of the Nak-
tong by noon, and their pace quickens as the heat rises
on their tails.
The 7th Cavalry pursues with relentless tenacity. Ar-
tillery spotters with a propensity to devour enemy ranks
adjust the range for the guns, and a repeat perform-
ance unfolds. The withdrawing enemy to the front of
the cavalry positions is then raked with more mortar
and artillery fire that ravages 25th and 27th N.K. Reg-
iments, which are caught in the patches and paddies
respectively.
By dark, the dauntless efforts of the 7th Cavalry
cause the enemy bridgehead at Yongp’o to vanish. Of
the 1,700 participating enemy troops of the 25th and
27th N.K. Regiments, 7th Cavalry estimates that 1,500
had been slain. Company G, 2nd Battalion, which sus-
tains 2 killed and 4 wounded, counts the bodies of 125
220
enemy troops in its zone. Another unit, Company H,
2nd Battalion, reports (two days later) that the num-
ber of dead to its front in the paddies had not been to-
taled, but that 267 dead enemy troops discovered be-
hind its lines had already been buried. The N.K. 10th
Division, after only two days of initiation into com-
bat, has been devastated, according to information as-
certained from prisoners. The division sustained about
2,500 total casualties in its futile attempt to dislodge the
cavalry and move against Taegu.
In the 1st Calvary sector, farther north at the extreme
tip, another battle develops near Waegwan at Hill 303,
where the cavalry’s perimeter edges against the S.K. 1st
Division, which has its base at the northern fringe of
Waegwan, near the roads that run southeast into Taegu
and northeast toward Tabu-dong. The hill mass
stretches southeast to northeast to form an oval con-
figuration slightly more than two miles in length, with
its west slope slipping into the east bank of the river. The
position affords its defenders a perfect vantage point to
observe the town and the network of roads running
through it. In addition, Hill 303 dominates the main
Seoul-Pusan Railroad and vehicular bridges there.
The hill, considered the bulwark of the 1st Cavalry’s
right flank, is manned by only one company: Com-
pany G, 5th Cavalry, supported by mortarmen of Com-
pany H. It has become known that for several days, the
enemy has been massing on the west bank of the river
about six miles north of Waegwan, opposite the lines of
the S.K. 1st Division. During the early morning hours,
an enemy force of regimental strength fords the river by
use of a second underwater bridge, but upon crossing,
it moves south rather than dispersing to the mountains.
One contingent drives toward Hill 303 and brings
Company G under small-arms fire by the end of morn-
ing. The North Koreans make no massive attack to
seize the hill this day, but the area bursts with skir-
mishes on the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The evacuation
of Yonil by Fifth Air Force continues; however, the air-
field is still not under attack. Meanwhile, Eighth Army
remains at the field with some tanks posted along the
perimeter. Fifth Air Force personnel depart on LSTs.
The Air Force leaves large supplies of petroleum prod-
ucts and aviation fuel, but by this day, even the bombs
have been removed. The 3rd Battalion, 9th Infantry
Regiment, commanded by Colonel D.M. McMains,
garrisons the base until September 14, when it is re-
lieved by the S.K. 3rd Division. In the meantime,
planes land to refuel and the airstrip remains accessible
for disabled aircraft so that they might avoid chancing
a long flight or be forced to ditch.
In other activity, acting upon orders from Eighth
Army, the S.K. Capital Division moves from its posi-
tions near Andong to the vicinity of An’gang-ni–Kigye;
it deploys east of the S.K. 8th Division. Also, the S.K.
I Corps establishes headquarters at the town of
Yongch’on.
In the 1st Marine Brigade zone, Brigadier General
Edward A. Craig is directed to move expeditiously to
 221
Miryang from the vicinity of Chinju. The Marines are
ordered to halt the Communists at the Naktong to pre-
serve the line.
— In Japan: Tensions continue to build between
Washington and Tokyo. MacArthur receives a succinct
directive from Secretary of Defense George C. Mar-
shall, which mandates that no authorization of a Na-
tionalist Chinese attack against the mainland be given.
Marshall states no action should be taken by the Allies
that might precipitate World War III. The terse mes-
sage from General Marshall receives a quick response
from MacArthur. Marshall is told that MacArthur
completely understands President Truman’s decision of
June 27 “to protect the Chinese Communist main-
land.”
In other activity, General MacArthur calls General
Stratemeyer to his headquarters in Tokyo to discuss
missions for the Far East Air Forces. MacArthur wants
him to use the Air Force to saturate the North Korean
positions that threaten the perimeter of Pusan. Strate-
meyer and Major General Emmett O’Donnell, com-
manding officer, Far East Bomber Command, discuss
the possibilities.
General O’Donnell informs Stratemeyer that the Air
Force could carpet a three by five mile area.
MacArthur’s personnel decide on an area north of
Waegwan and west of the Naktong. The decision dis-
counts General Gay’s requests to also strike northeast of
the town. Gay’s request is denied because it is thought
that casualties could occur within the ranks of the cav-
alry and the S.K. 1st Division. The date scheduled for
the attack is August 16, and the estimated enemy
strength in the selected target area includes four divi-
sions and several armored regiments totaling about
40,000 enemy troops.
August 15 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Gen-
eral Walker orders the U.S. 25th Division, subsequent
to the detachment of the 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade from Task Force Kean, to deploy west of Masan
along the southern flank of the perimeter. The rede-
ployment places it east of Chinju in the most defensi-
ble terrain below Chinju Pass. The terrain west of
Chindong-ni, the left flank of the division, is guarded
by Throckmorton’s 5th Regimental Combat Team. It
spreads out northward in front of the Chindong-ni
coastal road to Fox Hill (Yaban-san), but from there, a
dangerous hole exists between it and the 24th Regi-
ment, which holds the division’s central zone.
This gap causes General Kean distress. Colonel
Throckmorton dispatches a contingent of about 100
South Korean troops and several U.S. officers to plug
the hole. When the troops reach the designated objec-
tive, Sobuk-san, they find that the 2,000-foot ridge is
already occupied by an enemy force that had arrived
during the first week of August. Sobuk-san is one of
two strategic ridges that dominate this area west of
Masan and it affords an excellent set of vantage points
to guard the Komam-ni (Saga)-Haman-Chindong-ni
Road. The enemy on Sobuk-san forbids any advance
August 15, 1950
and forces the South Koreans to withdraw. General
Kean then directs the 5th RCT to seize the ridge; how-
ever, the initial delay in occupying the ridge makes this
mission unfeasible.
In the 25th Division sector, the 2nd Battalion, 24th
Regiment, begins to redeploy west of Masan. It disen-
gages with the enemy at Obong-san and moves slightly
west to Battle Mountain (Hill 665). The 2nd Battalion
spreads out there and on a ridge west of Haman; later
it is bolstered by the 3rd Battalion. Battle Mountain
(Hill 665) assumes several descriptive aliases, including
some printable ones: Old Baldy, Bloody Knob and Na-
palm Hill.
Between Battle Mountain and P’il-bong, the ridge
line slims down to mold a stony ridge dubbed Rocky
Crags, and north of Battle Mountain, there is more in-
famous ground that abruptly declines and forms two ex-
tended subsidiary ridges of the Sobuk-san mountain
mass. The eastern ridge is nicknamed Green Peak. The
24th Regiment deploys on the east side of Battle Moun-
tain, opposite the enemy-held western slope.
Meanwhile, the 35th Regiment, led by Colonel
Fisher, takes the northern extension of the 25th Divi-
sion’s perimeter. The defense line links with the 24th
Division sector. It covers the Sibidang–Komam-ni
vicinity and stretches north for about 26,000 yards to
the bank of the Nam River, and from there, it leads
east along the water to its confluence with the Nak-
tong River. The sector immediately west of Komam-ni
is manned by the 1st Battalion under Lt. Colonel
Bernard Teeter. The 2nd Battalion, led by Major
Robert Woolfolk, disperses along the Nam. The 3rd
Battalion stands in reserve at Chirwon, along the
Masan-Chinju Road, from where it can be propelled to
a trouble spot in either battalion zone. The Masan-
Chinju Highway, the Nam River corridor, and the rail-
road lines fall within the zone of the 35th Regiment.
The 25th Division completes its deployment by this
day. In contrast, the N.K. 6th Division is establishing
defensive positions west of Masan, while it forms for an
attack to crush the U.N. southwest perimeter. Strung
from south to north, the N.K. 14th, 15th and 13th
Regiments face the U.S. 25th Division. The Commu-
nists have been pressing South Koreans into their ranks
to fill out their regiments, but these recent conscrip-
tors, having been scooped up in the vicinity of Seoul,
are mostly reluctant warriors.
By today, about 2,000 of these replacement troops are
funneled into the N.K. 6th Division. At Chinju, the
untried recruits are issued grenades, but they receive
no weapons. Rather, they are instructed to procure their
weapons and ammunition by initiating scavenger hunts
on the battlefield to retrieve weapons from their dead
and wounded comrades. By the 21st, the N.K. 6th Di-
vision receives about 2,500 additional South Korean
replacement troops, expanding its strength to about
8,500 troops.
In other activity, Communist reinforcements arrive
in southwestern Korea from Seoul to bolster the N.K.
6th Division. Elements of the N.K. 7th Division (1st
August 15, 1950
and 3rd Regiments) arrive at Chinju and the port town
of Yosu is occupied by the 2nd Regiment.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: The weather
hovering over the lower Naktong remains terrible, and
the cloud-filled skies cancel all air support for the troops
of Task Force Hill. Nevertheless, it attacks to rid
Cloverleaf and the Obong-ni Ridge vicinity of resist-
ance. Task Force Hill advances, but obstinate resist-
ance holds it at bay. Both sides sustain more heavy ca-
sualties. In one raucous engagement on Obong-ni,
elements of the 34th Regiment attack the enemy on a
small knoll.
One platoon from A Company, composed of 35
men, dashes across a slim saddle and encroaches the
enemy positions on the reverse slope to ignite a ferocious
battle. Grenades are tossed from close range and rifle fire
is rapidly exchanged from distances of 25 to 30 feet.
The two sides bloody each other terribly, and within one
hour, 25 men of the original platoon are wounded or
killed. As the survivors, including eleven able troops,
begin to withdraw from the brutal firefight, PFC Ed-
ward O. Cleaborn apparently becomes angered by the
tenacious enemy fire. He lags behind, hoping to get off
another round, but before he pulls the trigger, an
enemy shell kills him. The ten surviving troops move
back, transporting nine wounded men with them. Be-
fore the wounded can be treated by Medics, three of
them die.
The situation remains grave. Not only has the enemy
rebuffed Task Force Hill, but TF Hill is extremely hard
pressed to hold its lines. Its strength is diminished and
it lacks reinforcements. A decision made jointly by
General Church and Colonel Hill changes the tone of
battle from offense to defense to preserve the remain-
ing ground.
However, Eighth Army, which up to now has been
unwilling to believe that the entire N.K. 4th Division
had crossed the Naktong, is finally convinced. Eighth
Army agrees to throw more weight into the battle to
achieve victory. Before noon, General Walker arrives
at General Church’s headquarters with a conspicuous
belligerent attitude and tells General Church: “I am
going to give you the Marine Brigade. I want this sit-
uation cleaned up and quick.”
At about noon, Walker returns to Taegu to firm up
his plan to reinforce the 24th Division. Within one
hour, Walker dispatches Colonel William Collier to
Miryang to inform General Craig of the plan. The 1st
Marine Provisional Brigade had been in Masan subse-
quent to its recently concluded participation with Task
Force Kean along the southwestern perimeter, and it
is just setting up its bivouac. Nevertheless, the Marines
break camp and move to Yongsan, having at least en-
joyed their first hot meal since arriving in Korea.
The 1st Marine Provisional Brigade is attached to
the 24th Division. General Church, CO, 24th Division
and General Craig, Marine brigade commander, con-
fer on strategy. It is decided that the entire 24th Divi-
sion (reinforced) will launch a counterattack against
the enemy bridgehead at 0800 on August 17. The
222
attached 1st Provisional Marine Brigade will attack the
North Korean positions east of the Naktong.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, 5th Cavalry zone near Hill 303,
about fifty enemy troops supported by two tanks ad-
vance south, trailed by another contingent. The
predawn movement is observed by Company G. Soon
after, nearby Company F comes under attack. Fearing
encirclement, Company F withdraws south. By 0830,
the area around Hill 303 becomes untenable; Com-
pany G and its supporting mortar platoon from Com-
pany H are surrounded. The commanding officer of
Company G informs the mortar platoon leader by
phone that a contingent of about sixty South Korean
troops are rushing to assist.
Soon after, just after breakfast, elements of a Korean
unit are observed moving up the slope. The mortar-
men, thinking it is the reinforcements, send out a pa-
trol. It is greeted with automatic weapons fire. Despite
the fire, the platoon leader remains convinced that the
approaching troops are friendly. He gives no order to
fire. Suddenly, it is too late, as the Communists are on
both sides of their foxholes and at arms length. While
burp guns are jabbed into the sides of the Americans,
they are plucked from their foxholes and seized. U.S. re-
inforcements, unaware of the capitulation, rush to their
aid, but enemy fire halts the column, composed of
Company B, 5th Cavalry, and some supporting tanks.
In the meantime, Company G manages to hold the
hill throughout the day against a force estimated to be
building to a battalion, comprising about 700 troops.
As the struggle for Hill 303 continues, confusion builds
within portions of the 5th Cavalry, but both the 1st
and 2nd Battalions still prepare to rescue isolated G
Company and its supporting mortarmen from Com-
pany H. The captured men of Company H, however,
are taken from the hill and placed in a nearby orchard
where they are tied and bound by contingents of the
4th Company, 2nd Battalion, 206th Regiment, N.K.
105th Armored Division, and some elements of the
N.K. 3rd Division. On the following day, the U.S. pris-
oners are transferred to several different places, but the
Americans remain unaware of their fate.
In other activity, twenty-one T-34 replacement tanks
arrive to strengthen the enemy attack against Taegu.
The armor is parceled out to the various divisions. Also,
the South Korean Army establishes another training
center, the Ground General School, located at Tongnae
in the vicinity of Pusan. It will accept its first class on
August 23, and its primary function is to train replace-
ment first lieutenants for the S.K. Infantry at a rate of
about 250 men per week.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The North
Koreans maintain a ruthless attack against the S.K. 3rd
Division, and its perimeter at Toksong-ni is becoming
untenable. Eighth Army orders its evacuation by sea to
Kuryongp’o-ni, farther south in the Yonil Bay. It will
then relieve contingents of the Capital Division at their
lines south of Pohang-dong.
In other activity, the S.K. Capital Division and Task
 223
Force Pohang heavily engage the enemy in the vicinity
of An’gang-ni–Kigye for several days.
— In the United States: Every male Marine Corps
reservist with the rank of private to sergeant is ordered
to active duty.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, alarmed by high
casualty rates in the U.S. divisions operating in Korea,
directs General Walker to initiate the merging of South
Korean soldiers into U.S. units. The instructions dic-
tate that each U.S. company and battery be augmented
by 100 South Korean troops. This transfer of troops
will affect each of the four U.S. divisions already in
Korea and the U.S. 7th Division, which is still in Japan.
The South Koreans are to remain under the juris-
diction of the South Korean Army and receive their pay
from it, but the troops will be accommodated with U.S.
rations. The projected amount of South Korean troops
to be integrated into the U.S. units is about 30,000 to
40,000 men. Some U.S. contingents have already in-
cluded South Koreans within their ranks on an unof-
ficial basis.
In other activity, headquarters is established by
MacArthur for the impending amphibious operation;
to retain secrecy, the group is selected from GHQ FEC
staff and it will be designated Special Planning Staff,
GHQ.
August 16 The USS Philippine Sea launches
planes that pummel nine separate enemy held villages
and several groves. The raids, carried out by eight
Skyraiders and eight F4Us, also damage a pair of enemy
trucks. Additional planes attached to the USS Valley
Forge raid other enemy concentrations. Five AD
Skyraiders hit one village inflicting damage, and they
also destroy nine vehicles and damage three additional
trucks. Another group, composed of four F4Us, at-
tacks four villages in the vicinity of Taegu and strikes
a supply depot and gasoline dump, setting both afire.
In other activity, the 72nd Tank Battalion, an or-
ganic unit of the 2nd Infantry Division, arrives at Pusan
from the United States. The arrival of the newest tanks
further bolsters the division’s armor, which already
comprises two regimental tank companies (6th
Medium Tank Bn.).
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, a group of S.K. police sent by General Kean ar-
rives at the 24th Regiment positions; Colonel Champ-
ney, the regimental commander, orders it to deploy in
an existing gap at P’il-bong, between the 5th RCT and
the lines of the 24th Regiment. On the 18th, the Com-
munists launch an attack against the 24th Regiment.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: At Obong-ni and
Cloverleaf, the close-quartered fighting continues to
rage. The exhausted men of Task Force Hill eagerly
await reinforcements. The enemy makes progress in
the 9th RCT zone on Cloverleaf, killing some of the
defenders in their foxholes, then setting up positions
in the captured ground. At Ohang Hill, vicious com-
bat erupts. The enemy uses its usual envelopment tac-
tics to surround the 19th and 34th Regiments, but
August 16, 1950
through some tough resistance and persistence, the two
endangered regiments evade encirclement.
In the newly expanded 24th Division area at Hill
409 near Hyongp’ung, orders for the division arrive
slightly after midnight (15th-16th) to mount an at-
tack. The enemy could have moved from the hill and
caused tremendous damage at the already strained
American positions at the bulge, but the N.K. Regi-
ment remains fixed. To thwart any attempt by the
Communists to drive south from the hill, reinforce-
ments (1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment) arrive to fortify
the 24th Division.
Also, the carriers Badoeng Strait and Sicily move to
positions from which their planes can support the at-
tack. General Church intends to launch a coordinated
assault, committing the Marines against Obong-ni
Ridge and the 9th RCT against Cloverleaf. General
Craig, using his helicopter, scouts the battlefield.
Later, Craig drops in at the 9th RCT command post
to meet with Colonel John Hill. Colonel Murray also
arrives at the front to discuss the attack strategy with
Hill. While there, Murray notes the thinning lines of the
battle-weary troops on both Hill 125 and Observation
Hill, following their five days of tough fighting. Mur-
ray also trains his eyes on the terrain that will become
his battleground, and then he focuses on the low
ground that could entrap both his 5th Marines and the
9th RCT if they are simultaneously caught in the open.
Murray concludes that only one unit should jump
off first, and he reasons that his objective, Obong-ni,
is the closest. Murray suggests that if agreeable, the
Marines would attack at 0800, under cover fire from the
9th RCT. Then according to the plan, the 9th will ad-
vance with Marine cover fire. Colonel Hill concurs.
Meanwhile, complications are developing on the eve
of the attack. General Church had assured General
Craig that 145 Eighth Army vehicles would be available
to facilitate the movement of the brigade. The trucks
should enable Murray to speed one battalion to Ob-
servation Hill while the remaining two battalions set
to attack. However, only forty-three trucks are avail-
able at Miryang. This upsets the schedule and wastes
valuable energy and time, as many of the troops must
now walk. At 1900, the 3rd Battalion boards the trucks
and moves to the 5th Marines command post about
3,000 yards behind the front lines. From there, they
march to Cloverleaf and relieve the 34th Regiment.
Responsibility for the area south of the MSR passes to
Colonel Taplett at 0445 on August 17. The 2nd Bat-
talion advances the old fashioned way, by foot, and
reaches positions near Cloverleaf at 0130.
The lack of trucks also makes the 3rd Battalion’s trek
to the front run way behind schedule, causing it to arrive
at the assembly area later than expected. One thing re-
mains certain; there is little sleep for the Marines prior
to the scheduled assault. As usual, there is scant intelligence
on the opposing forces, but it is assumed that Obong-ni
Ridge is strongly defended and that the next objective,
Hill 207, will be difficult to seize. Furthermore, giant Hill
311, the third objective, is also deemed potent.
August 16, 1950
At this point General Craig is unaware of the agree-
ment between Colonel Hill and Colonel Murray con-
cerning the method of attack, but conversations just
prior to the assault clarify the situation. Craig asks
Murray to explain his tactical plan and he is informed
that the 5th Marines will attack in columns of battal-
ions. The 2nd Battalion will seize Obong-ni, and be
followed by the 1st Battalion, which will pass through
the 2nd and secure Hill 207. The 3rd Battalion will
seize the third and final objective, Hill 311. General
Craig concurs with Murray’s plan.
Also, the N.K. 2nd Division reminds its troops of
the order that forbids the shooting of POWs. A memo
issued through its Cultural Section says: “Some of us are
still slaughtering enemy troops that come to surrender.
Therefore, the responsibility of teaching the soldiers to
take prisoners of war and to treat them kindly rests on
the political section of each unit.” Another massacre
unfolds at the Central Front on Hill 303 as the re-
minder is issued.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front , Taegu: In Air
Force activity, 98 B-29 Superfortresses attempt to an-
nihilate about 40,000 enemy troops suspected of stag-
ing north of Waegwan. The planes pulverize the area
north of Taegu. At 1158, the first squadrons of the five
bombing groups, based in Okinawa and Japan, arrive
over the designated areas. By the time the final run is
completed, the 19th, 22nd, 92nd, 98th and 307th
Bomber Groups unleash nearly 1,000 tons of
500–1000 pound bombs on the target sites.
U.S. Army bivouac area on 16 August 1950. There are 3.5-inch and 2.36-inch rocket launchers on right
and a 4.2-inch M2 chemical mortar on left.
224
General O’Donnell, who remains airborne for more
than two hours, witnesses the colossal air strikes. He
reports that during the strikes, no enemy activity could
be detected from the air. Subsequent patrols from the
1st Cavalry sector also are unable to gather any intelli-
gence on the success of the raids. One patrol is halted
at the Naktong River by enemy fire. Another crosses
the river, but additional strong enemy fire pushes it
back. Intelligence later received from prisoners alleges
that the enemy units suspected of being in the area had
already crossed the river before the initiation of the air
strikes. The results of the Air Force’s heavy strike re-
mains unavailable. But following the massive bomb-
ing mission, the enemy artillery that had been firing
from that area slacks off dramatically.
In other Air Force activity, the advanced Fifth Air
Force headquarters relocates from Taegu to Pusan. On
the following day, the North Koreans initiate a heavy as-
sault along the Taegu Front.
In other activity, during the past twenty-four hours,
the enemy has seized ground on Hill 303, but Company
G, 5th Cavalry, still maintains its isolated positions
there. The condition of the supporting mortarmen re-
mains questionable, but critical at best. The tanks sup-
port Company B, which mounts another attack to re-
lieve the besieged command on the hill, but again the
enemy repulses it, despite additional support fire from
the guns of the 61st FAB and several howitzers of Bat-
tery B, 82nd FAB. Waegwan, sitting amidst the blaz-
ing combat, becomes a no man’s land.
 225
The 5th Cavalry’s commander, Colonel Marcel
Crombez, becomes infuriated with the 2nd Battalion
commander’s progress. The officer has apparently al-
lowed control of the units to slip away from him to the
point that he is unaware of their locations. Crombez
relieves the officer of command. Another officer as-
sumes command and then he resumes the attack.
Nonetheless, the enemy repels all forward movement.
After dark, Company G eludes capture and destruc-
tion. It escapes through the enemy lines to safety, but
the mortarmen of Company H remain in place, un-
able to break out.
On the following day, a new attack is launched to
seize the obstinate hill. In the meantime, while the
enemy attempts to break through the cavalry, it also
launches persistent assaults against the adjoining S.K.
1st Division, commanded by Major General Paik Sun
Yup, in the rugged mountains northeast of the cavalry.
The S.K. 1st Division’s 13th Regiment is strung along
the river. Its 11th and 12th Regiments, deployed deeper
in the mountains, engage the enemy east of the Nak-
tong at Suam-san and Yuhak-san, west and northwest
of Tabu-dong respectively.
The North Koreans, despite coming under heavy ar-
tillery fire that includes direct hits, maintains an under-
water bridge near Hills 201 and 346, about six miles
north of Waegwan. The combined enemy pressure
within the zones of the cavalry and the ROK 1st Divi-
sion places Taegu in a more precarious position. Two
enemy tanks penetrate the S.K. 1st Division lines dur-
ing the day at Tabu-dong, but their progress is quickly
halted by ROK bazooka teams, which eliminate both.
In an effort to bolster the tottering city, which is
bulging with ever-increasing numbers of refugees, caus-
ing its population to soar from 300,000 to 700,000, a
contingent of 750 S.K. police is posted along its fringes.
The refugee population still conceals countless num-
bers of North Korean enemy troops, regular and irreg-
ular, and they remain indistinguishable from the South
Koreans.
In other activity, the 27th Regiment, 25th Division,
arrives at Kyongsan and reverts to Army reserve. But
Colonel Michaelis is immediately ordered to dispatch
reconnaissance patrols north, northwest and west of the
town. Meanwhile, Michaelis is to remain prepared to
move out if the enemy is detected.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: At Toksong-
ni during the night of the 16th-17th, the drastically
shrinking perimeter of the S.K. 3rd Division becomes
electrified. The 3rd Division has ably held off the
enemy along the coastal road, permitting other inland
contingents to pull back, but now, it is forced to begin
backing toward the sea.
Meanwhile, the heavy guns of the naval surface ves-
sels of Rear Admiral Hartman’s TG 96.51 rivet an iron
picket fence to the immediate front of the division, pre-
venting hordes of Communists from overrunning their
point of departure. While the U.S. Navy attempts to
confine the enemy to prone positions with accompany-
ing lack of sleep, the troops of the S.K. 22nd and 23rd
August 16, 1950
Regiments and the attached contingent of National Po-
lice begin boarding LSTs, taking all their equipment
and weapons with them. The evacuation is totally suc-
cessful, and at 0700 the final vessel embarks, moving
out with the remaining troops and equipment, none
of which is lost to the enemy.
After daylight on the 17th, planes of the Fifth Air
Force carpet the beach area to the immediate front of
the evacuees with a monstrous blanket of impenetrable
fire, forbidding advance to the water by the enemy. In
the meantime, the floating convoy, formidably escorted
by the USS Helena and a few destroyers (Destroyer
Squadron 11), arrives at Kuryongp’o-ni at 1030. The
ground troops debark immediately. Orders await the
S.K. 3rd Division instructing it to advance on the fol-
lowing day to the positions of the Capital Division,
south of Pohang-dong.
Meanwhile, the S.K. Capital Division and Task
Force Pohang each maintain pressure against the
enemy. By the following day, the North Koreans are
shoved from the vicinity of the Kyongju corridor near
An’gang-ni and pushed north of the Taegu-Pohang
Road.
In other activity, the 23rd Regiment, 2nd U.S. Di-
vision, is en route to Kyongju to bolster the forces there.
Also, South Korean troops leave Pusan for Japan to be
attached to the badly diminished U.S. 7th Division,
which had been heavily stripped of its ranks to fill the
1st Cavalry and the 24th and 25th Infantry Divisions.
The contingent comprising 313 South Korean recruits
arrives in Japan on August 18.
—In the Mediterranean: A battalion of Marines
departs Crete for the Far East. The vessels USS Bexar
and Montague, transporting the troops and cargo re-
spectively, sail from Suda Bay and then through the
Suez Canal. The Marine contingent arrives at Pusan to
join the 7th Marines as its 3rd Battalion on September
9. The sea movement remains under stiff security and
makes only one stop en route, at Celon for six hours,
to take on fuel.
Other contingents of the 6th Marines are being pre-
pared to join the 7th Marines, although the official ac-
tivation of the 7th Marines does not occur until the
17th. The scheduled departure date for the U.S. con-
tingent is September 3, but the unit will ship out on
September 1.
— In the United States: The advance group of the
1st Marine Division departs the West Coast at 1400
by air for Japan. The contingent includes 12 officers
and 6 enlisted men who are to initiate planning for the
invasion of Inchon. General Smith remains at Camp
Pendleton for two additional days.
In other activity, the remaining elements of the
1st Marine Air Wing at El Toro receive orders to move
to the Far East. One unit is Wing Headquarters
Squadron 1. The other is MAG-12, composed of
Headquarters Squadron 12, Service Squadron 12,
VMF-212, VMF 312, VMF(N)-542 and the rear ech-
elon of VMF(N)-5113. Embarkation by sea begins on
August 24.
August 17, 1950
August 17 MacArthur’s directive calling for ex-
tensive air support for the U.N. ground troops termi-
nates this day. The carriers that have been alternating
two days in action and one day off for replenishing their
supplies will continue to make air strikes. Subsequent
to the activities of the carriers during this operation
and during the fleet’s return to Sasebo, Admiral Stru-
ble remarks: “A temporary lull in the ground fighting
had been reached.” The results of the carrier close-air
support had been disappointing because the power of
strength at hand could not be fully utilized.
Rear Admiral E.C. Ewen, commanding officer of
Task Force 77, remarks: “A continuation of the present
method of providing close-air support is both wasteful
and ineffective.” Admiral Hoskins comments: “The
simple fact was that there were too few trained control
parties on the ground, too few ‘Mosquito’ planes in the
air, and too little equipment to handle the numbers of
aircraft over the battline [battleline].”
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Some contingents of
the N.K. 7th Division, which arrived at Chinju about
August 15, push to T’ongyong, dislodge the South Ko-
rean police and occupy the town, giving the enemy po-
sitions at the southern point of Korea. Soon after on
the 19th, U.S. naval vessels move offshore and bom-
bard the town in conjunction with an amphibious
landing by ROK Marines. The infusion of the N.K.
7th Division into the area has taken place to bolster the
N.K. 6th Division and to protect its rear against inva-
sion by U.S. forces.
By this day, the North Koreans have nudged closer
to the U.S. 25th Division’s perimeter, giving them the
opportunity to initiate attacks to test the mettle of the
American lines. The Communists continue these ac-
tions persistently until the end of August, but they con-
fine the majority of these heavy patrols, ranging to
strengths of up to one battalion, to the high ground in
the mountains west of Haman. The combat points are
concentrated around Battle Mountain and the two
ridges, P’il-bong and Sobuk-san, the area comprising
the northernmost sector defended by the 35th Regi-
ment and the central zone manned by the 24th Regi-
ment.
The enemy jumps off early today. At 0300, North
Korean artillery commences a barrage that strikes the
35th Regiment’s 1st Battalion Command Post at
Komam-ni. Within one hour, the enemy ground
troops charge the perimeter to initiate a five-day bat-
tle for control of the terrain two miles west of the town
on the southern spurs of Sibidang. The contested
ground is held by Colonel Teeter’s 1st Battalion. The at-
tack is met by some flares and by illuminated mortar and
artillery shells; however, the supply of these illuminat-
ing shells is becoming scarce. Before dawn, Company
A is forced to give ground. A mortar position is over-
whelmed and two platoons are driven back, but soon
after dawn, Company B launches a counterattack and
recaptures the lost ground.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: FIRST BATTLE OF
THE NAKTONG BULGE During the predawn hours
226
(0130), the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, commanded by
Lt. Colonel Harold Roise, completes its march from
Miryang and moves to its assembly area near Clover-
leaf. While the Marines of the 2nd Battalion await the
signal to attack, they are able to fix their eyes on six
ominous knobs (Hills 102, 109, 117, 143, 147 and
153) protruding from the jagged ridge. At one partic-
ular spot, conspicuous by its crimson color, the ridge
is parted at about its mid-point by a huge gash created
by a previous landslide. The cut is the marker that
forms the boundary separating Company D and Com-
pany E, which operate on the right and left respectively.
At 0725, under clear skies, the artillery commences
firing for range, but the shells fall ineffectively, due ei-
ther to poor registration fire on the previous day or be-
cause of mistakes by the observers. A scheduled coor-
dinating air strike is delayed. Eighteen Marine Corsairs
arrive to slam the ridge, but not until 0740, fifteen
minutes late, cutting their striking time in half, thereby
permitting only one pass before the ground troops jump
off.
At 0800, the four rifle companies of the 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, begin the advance simultaneously.
They cross the valley moving toward what is to be called
No Name Ridge. Soon after, the tanks of Company A,
1st Tank Battalion, move to positions from where they
can support the attack throughout the day by plaster-
ing enemy positions with their 90-mm shells and ma-
chine gun fire. Company D operates on the right and
Company E operates on the left. Company D, led by
Captain Zimmer, traveling on the right, traverses the
road-cut below the spur and moves onto the exposed
ground between Observation Hill and Hill 125. The
2nd Platoon, led by Sergeant Sidney Dickerson, de-
ploys as reserve near the southern spur of Hill 125.
Captain Zimmer establishes his command post there.
The 3rd Platoon, led by Lieutenant Michael Shinka,
nudges into the foul scented rice paddy, trailed by the
1st Platoon and a rocket launcher section. The rocket
launcher detachment tails off and establishes positions
near the road to guard the main supply route. Then
about halfway through the paddy, the 1st Platoon, led
by Sergeant T. Albert Crowson, increases the pace and
swings over to the right, all the while receiving no re-
sistance. The 1st Platoon catches up with the 3rd and
then both units advance abreast.
To the left of Company D, Company E, commanded
by Lieutenant Sweeney, attacks simultaneously. The
1st and 2nd Platoons plod into the rice paddy with its
near-indelible stink, moving from their positions on
the southern parcel of Observation Hill. Disregarding
the official boundary separating his company from
Company D, the attacking contingents of Sweeney’s
command concentrate their drive toward the village of
Obong-ni, which sits immediately beneath Hills 143
and 147. Similarly to the advance of Company D, the
resistance against Company B is limited to a few harm-
less shots. Nevertheless, the atmosphere is spooky and
a transparent veil of danger appears to be suspended
unnaturally above the battalion, waiting to drop its
 227
virulent storm. However, once the company reaches
the base of the slope, the situation changes.
The prolonged silence is shattered and the agonizing
apprehension dissipates during a rapid-paced series of
events that suddenly unfold, beginning with a burst of
fire against the 2nd Platoon, Company D, held in re-
serve on Hill 125. In the meantime, the four attacking
platoons of Companies D and E maintain their cau-
tious advances toward the objective, anticipating a
cloudburst of enemy fire with each and every dogged
step.
While Company D’s 1st Platoon moves up the draw
to the right of the spur of Hill 102, the 3rd Platoon,
advancing on the left, drives through a gully advancing
toward the first objective. And then, enemy fire changes
the tone of the attack.
The 2nd Platoon, Company D, providing cover fire
for the attacking units from its positions on Hill 125, is
struck by long-range machine gun fire, much of which
is incoming from Obong-ni and originating simulta-
neously from the area of Hills 117 and 143. This fierce
fire inflicts the first two casualties on Company D. The
echo of the fire encroaches the 2nd Battalion attack
force like a distant storm and the rifle companies real-
ize that beyond the thunder lurks the deadly lightning.
Meanwhile, the 1st and 3rd Platoons have ascended
nearly halfway up the slope, on the right side of the red-
dish gash. Then without warning, incessant bolts of
enemy fire descend upon the slope. About twelve ma-
chine guns of the N.K. 18th Regiment unleash interdic-
tion fire upon the advancing troops, and this massive
display is joined by enemy mortar fire. The gushing
thrust of unending streams of shells impedes but does
not halt the ascent. The 1st and 3rd Platoons gnaw for-
ward, exhibiting contempt toward the enemy fire.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans also express resolute de-
termination. They increase the pressure by pouring
more punishing fire upon the Marines, which delays
the 3rd Platoon’s exiting from the gully. At about the
same time, enemy machine guns focus on the 1st Pla-
toon and inflict severe casualties against it, bringing the
advance to a standstill. The layers of fire become impen-
etrable.
Undaunted, the casualty-weakened 3rd Platoon,
Company D, led by Lieutenant Michael Shinka, reini-
tiates its ascent to seize the summit of Hill 109 at 1000,
but the advance is precarious, as the men are forced to
move entirely on naked ground. At the onset, the
Marines are beset with a whirlwind of automatic
weapons fire supplemented with an avalanche of
grenades. Nevertheless, twenty troops reach the crest, but
they are intercepted by a North Korean surge. Enemy
troops emerge from their foxholes, located just over the
reverse slope. Then, more enemy grenades are launched
toward the Marines.
During the heated contest, five more Marines be-
come casualties, bringing Shinka’s strength down to fif-
teen men. The 3rd Platoon is then compelled to de-
scend the slope, shadowed by the pounding of the
enemy fire from the crest and by the ever-increasing
August 17, 1950
machine gun and mortar fire originating on the still
unmolested enemy positions on Hills 117 and 143. The
platoon is struck by more menacing fire, originating at
enemy positions in the areas north and south of Hills
102 and 109. Meanwhile, the beleaguered 1st Platoon
remains stalled and under heavy fire at its positions on
the right.
Captain Zimmer resorts to committing his slim re-
serve, the 2nd Platoon, led by Sergeant Dickerson.
Zimmer quickly decides that passing the 2nd Platoon
through the gully used by the 3rd Platoon would be
fruitless and expensive. He directs Dickerson to attack
through the draw, where the 1st Platoon remains stuck.
Initially, Dickerson traces the route of the 3rd Platoon,
sloshing through the rice paddy while inhaling the
raunchy stench and absorbing the human fertilizer that
clings to the fatigues, to the further consternation of
the troops.
Soon after, the 2nd Platoon arrives at the draw and
encounters the 3rd Platoon, which is regrouping, fol-
lowing its futile attack toward the crest of Hill 109. At
that point, Dickerson’s platoon sprints over the spur of
Hill 102. Instantaneously, both of his flanks are satu-
rated with rings of heavy fire. Shells arc into the right
from the heights north of Tugok, in cadence with more
intense fire streaming in from Hills 117 and 143, each
on the left side of the MSR. All the while, Captain
Zimmer scans the battlefield. He notices the enemy
positions beyond Tugok, then he deduces the reasons
for the severe casualties being incurred by the 1st Pla-
toon, which is trapped along the northern approaches
to the objective, No Name Ridge.
To Zimmer, it becomes apparent that the enemy is
striking its rear and flank from entrenched positions
within the zone of the 9th RCT. Zimmer takes meas-
ures intended to terminate the withering, slaughtering
fire. He calls for the 2nd Battalion to redirect its guns
and commence an artillery barrage, but the request re-
ceives no response. The task is then given to the ar-
tillery of the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines. Immediately,
the guns roar, but they then suddenly quiet as the fire
rings too close to the 9th RCT. Captain Zimmer then
directs his 60-mm mortars to try taking out the enemy
positions, but that too fails; the shells fall way short.
To meet the non-stop initiative of Shinka’s 3rd Pla-
toon, the North Koreans attempt to shove a heavy ma-
chine gun into place on a saddle between the two
northernmost peaks. Marine fire forces it back. The
process is repeated, but again effective Marine fire turns
the enemy gunners back. Tenaciously, the enemy pulls
the machine gun back into a position a third time, but
it has little effect on who will control the hill. Captain
Zimmer has procured the services of a 75-mm recoil-
less rifle. While the enemy crew is placing the machine
gun on the saddle, a lone shot is fired by the 75-mm
gun. It scores, and instantly the machine gun and its
crew are eliminated.
By this time, Company E emerges from the rice
paddy, filthy but unscathed, while its counterpart, Com-
pany D, remains embattled on the right. Company E’s
August 17, 1950
rifle components continue moving toward the village of
Obong-ni, encountering bitter fire. Lieutenant
Sweeney’s 1st and 2nd Platoons drive directly toward the
inferno. The 2nd Platoon begins lagging, then it loses
its forward thrust and becomes spiritless.
Meanwhile, the 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant Nick-
olas Arkadis, presses forward. Disregarding the men-
acing flying steel, the troops zoom into the village, and
without pause, they zip through it and exit in front of
the nameless slope. The 1st Platoon then is greeted by
new and more concentrated fire. Enemy machine gun
crews, entrenched on Hills 147 and 153, pound the
flanks with jackhammer speed. Lieutenant Sweeney
has the operation under observation from his command
post and attempts to supply artillery support to aid his
beleaguered troops. The attempt fails, as the forward ob-
server is unable to communicate with the artillery.
Sweeney then tries to contact the mortar section, but
this, too, is unsuccessful. Sweeney becomes desperate
and chances severe improvisation. He commits his re-
serve to tackle the sinister obstacles.
The 2nd Platoon, Company E, races to the spur to
the left of the village and grinds forward, moving toward
positions from which fire can be established to lessen the
pressure on the attacking platoons. The gamble pays
off. Lieutenant Rodger Eddy’s platoon lays effective fire
on Hills 147 and 153.
At about the same time, more enemy fire begins
pouring into Company E from enemy positions south
of Obong-ni on the lower slopes of the ridge. Instinc-
tively, Sweeney utilizes the scant remainder of his re-
serves to forestall any threat against his positions. The
mortar section and Sweeney’s headquarters troops are
directed to deploy in the valley to intercept the enemy
at a point where they can block the southern approach
through a rice paddy. Leaving his executive officer,
Lieutenant Paul Uffelman, to lead the troops covering
the flank, Sweeney speeds to the positions of the 1st
and 2nd Platoons and discovers the latter’s situation
chaotic and leaderless. But Sweeney’s 1st Platoon, bol-
stered by strong support fire from the 81-mm mortars
of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, has gained ground
and advanced nearly to the summit.
Then the attack stalls, as friendly artillery fire falls
short of target and blisters their skirmish line with white
phosphorous. Soon after the friendly bombardment
ceases, elements of Company E again surge toward the
summit, but as they begin to converge upon it, new
orders arrive directing the unit to pull back to safer po-
sitions due to an imminent air strike. The order is in-
stantly obeyed; however, the Corsairs arrive so swiftly
that some Company E troops are still within twenty-
five yards of the peak.
At about 1100, the planes from the carriers arrive
on the scene, but an acute shortage of fuel tanks pre-
vents the aircraft from carrying napalm. The enemy
positions are plastered with another cogent air strike.
Nevertheless, some enemy troops withstand the assault
by hugging the ground in their foxholes on the reverse
slope.
228
After the air strikes, the Marines, holding positions
about midway on the slope, reinitiate their assault.
Company D, to the right of the gash, and Company
E, to the left, advance. During the aerial bombard-
ment, the 3rd Platoon, Company E, which had moved
forward to provide cover fire and neutralize the enemy
fire coming from Hills 147 and 153, withdraws about
100 yards, but this permits the enemy to reinitiate its
fire. Heavy machine gun fire from both peaks ham-
mers the riflemen of Company E at their positions on
the slope, thereby preventing the resumption of its at-
tack to gain the crest.
The 3rd Platoon (Company D), fifteen men strong,
musters the stamina to re-climb the slope, and despite
the raging fire, it overwhelms the defenders and gains
the crest. An enemy contingent composed of about one
squad counterattacks from its positions on the reverse
slope, only to be slain by Marine riflemen. The crest of
Hill 109 now belongs to the Marines, all nine of them.
And their ammunition is nearly depleted, with no re-
supply in sight.
From their vantage points above Hill 109, on Hill
143, the enemy increases the fire on the left flank of
Lieutenant Shinka’s small contingent. Hill 207 to their
front is also enemy-controlled and it rains shells on the
crest, subjecting the beleaguered contingent to ruth-
less punishing fire.
Shinka contacts Captain Zimmer, briefs him on the
casualties and explains the stark consequences of the
biting enemy fire. Soon after, Corsairs from MAG-33
reappear and deliver some white phosphorous shells
upon Hill 143, lessening but not eliminating the enemy
fire. The newly won positions appear untenable,
prompting Shinka to order his men off the crest, with
orders bring out the wounded and the weapons. The
remnants of Company D’s 3rd Platoon abandon the
crest and redeploy about halfway down the slope, but
Shinka’s force has been reduced to six able bodied men.
Soon after, Shinka, unable to shake his concern, de-
cides to return to the crest in case any wounded have
been inadvertently abandoned. Reaching the scorched
summit, he creeps over the evacuated positions and
then discovers PFC George Hric, who is still alive and
lying prone between two dead Marines. A dangerous
rescue then unfolds. As Shinka later relates the inci-
dent: “As I grabbed him under the arms and pulled
him from the foxhole, a bullet shattered my chin. Blood
ran into my throat and I couldn’t breathe. I tossed a
grenade at a gook crawling up the slope, didn’t wait for
it to explode, turned and reached under the Marine’s
arms and dragged him as far as the military crest.”
At that point, Shinka again is struck; a bullet spears
into his right arm and the momentum violently spins
him around, causing him to tip over and flip down the
hill. Remarkably, Lieutenant Shinka recovers and makes
it back to his lines.
By noon, the combined casualties of the 2nd Battalion,
5th Marines, rise to 23 dead and 119 wounded, nearly all
attributed to Companies D and E during the savage fight-
ing for the hill. And it is becoming increasingly apparent
 229
that the lack of a third rifle company in the battalion
is hindering the progress of the operation and unnec-
essarily increasing the casualties. Yet, the persistent at-
tacks have obviously cut deeply into the enemy defend-
ers, exhibited by the numerous scattered bodies of the
N.K. 4th Division and its demolished equipment.
Nonetheless, the 2nd Battalion, like nearly every
other unit in Korea, is under-strength and unable to
propel reserves into the battle. Its six bloodied rifle
companies are too depleted to complete the conquest of
the ridge. Subsequent to its grueling seven-hour battle
for the ridge, the 2nd Battalion’s able-bodied riflemen
stand at fewer than 100, mandating the commitment
of Colonel Newton’s 1st Battalion.
Meanwhile, General Craig becomes troubled by the
noticeable inactivity within the zone of the 9th RCT,
which has permitted the enemy from their position at
Tugok to maintain heavy pressure against the right flank
of his Marine Brigade. Upon inquiring why there has
been no timely assault, Craig is informed of the previ-
ous agreement reached between Colonel Murray (CO,
5th Marines) and Colonel Hill (CO, 9th RCT),
whereby the 9th RCT would postpone its attack and af-
ford cover fire until the Marines seize the first objective.
Craig then orders Tugok to be bombarded.
Colonel Murray becomes apprehensive because up
to this point, no cover fire has come forth. He attempts
to contact Colonel Hill and request that the 9th RCT
begin its attack, but there is a delay in getting the mes-
sage through, prompting Murray to concentrate on his
dilemma. With few alternatives remaining, at about
1300, Murray directs Colonel Newton to pass his 1st
Battalion through the lines of the 2nd Battalion and
resume the attack to vanquish the enemy on Obong-ni
Ridge.
While the 1st Battalion moves toward its assembly
point, additional planes from MAG-33 again streak
overhead to revisit the over-baked ridge. While the
Corsairs carpet the enemy positions, the guns of the
1st Battalion, 11th Marines, and some Able Company
tanks join the fight. In the midst of transferring re-
sponsibility for the attack, Colonel Murray, command-
ing officer, 5th Marines, is speaking on the radio with
Captain Zimmer, Company D, 2nd Battalion. While
Zimmer is briefing Murray on the situation in his area,
heavy enemy machine gun fire pours into Zimmer’s
outpost. Zimmer is hit and severely wounded, as are
several other nearby Marines. Zimmer struggles, but
by painful crawling, he reaches his company command
post on the opposite slope of the spur and places Lieu-
tenant R.T. Hanifin in command.
Zimmer heads back to battalion lines for medical
treatment while Company D prepares to withdraw to
Observation Hill, its portion of the battle ended for
now. The 1st Battalion sets up its command post right
next to that of the 2nd Battalion, to the rear of the road
cut. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines weapons company,
deploys behind the CP. Also, Colonel Newton estab-
lishes the 1st Battalion outpost close to Colonel Roise’s
2nd Battalion outpost on Observation Hill. In con-
August 17, 1950
junction, Colonel Hill’s 9th RCT will simultaneously
launch its attack against Cloverleaf.
At 1600, following a towering artillery barrage that
includes time-on-target air bursts that wreak havoc over
the entire slope of Cloverleaf, the 9th RCT commences
its attack. And in synchronization, the 1st Battalion,
5th Marines, presses forward to complete the destruc-
tion of the enemy on Obong-ni Ridge. The effective ar-
tillery shelling of Cloverleaf demoralizes the enemy de-
fenders, enabling the 2nd Battalion, 9th Regiment, to
charge aggressively. This forces the surviving North
Koreans to hurriedly flee down the reverse slope. Im-
plementing quick action, the 2nd Battalion, 9th RCT,
secures Cloverleaf and prepares to use its weaponry to
augment the advance against Obong-ni, where the
Marines experience resolute resistance.
While the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, presses its at-
tack, Marine artillery pounds enemy positions on the
forward and reverse slopes of Obong-ni Ridge. Marine
aircraft deliver equally stunning blows against it. Mean-
while, a detachment of tanks moves forward and pours
its 90-mm shells and machine gun fire into the target
areas to support the ground Marines. But still the
enemy continues to exhibit enormous resiliency. Dur-
ing the tedious day-long fighting, the tanks eliminate
a minimum of twelve enemy antitank guns and some
automatic weapons. Enemy return fire pounds the four
U.S. tanks and scores twenty-three hits. One tank is
struck by three direct hits. Surprisingly, the damage is
minimal and only one crewman is wounded, superfi-
cially.
In the meantime, Captain Tobin’s Company B, 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines, passes through the lines of the
2nd Battalion. Its 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant
Schryver, pushes toward Hill 102, while the 2nd Pla-
toon, led by Lieutenant Taylor, makes exceptional
progress as it plows up the gully, driving toward the
saddle between Hill 102 and Hill 109. Still in reserve,
the 3rd Platoon and some machine guns deploy on Ob-
servation Hill. The machine guns spread out along the
forward slopes to bolster the attack. Tobin, also on Ob-
servation Hill, notes the platoons’ headway while he
confers with his executive officer, Captain Fenton. At
that time, enemy machine gun fire rakes the area,
wounding Tobin. Subsequent to getting Captain Tobin
evacuated for medical aid, Fenton assumes command of
Company B and speeds to the ridge where, by now, the
1st and 2nd Platoons are stalled by heavy fire.
The 1st Platoon is way up the slope and the 2nd is
positioned well below the mid-point. The 2nd Platoon
is struck by enfilade fire and its ranks are being shred-
ded from fire originating on Hills 109, 117, and 143.
Lieutenant Taylor sustains a mortal wound. Captain
Fenton is with the 2nd Platoon and aware that both
units are stalled. Fenton orders the 3rd Platoon into
the fight. Meanwhile, Lieutenant Schryver concludes
that the nemesis of his 1st Platoon’s advance is the men-
acing fire coming from Tugok. He requests and receives
assistance from the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines Weapons
Company.
August 17, 1950 230

Top: A U.S. Army tractor (earth moving crawler) clears ground for an airstrip to handle light aircraft.
Bottom: A U.S. Army Motor Carriage M19 with twin 40-mm guns operates near Yongsan during August.

Soon after, the village becomes the recipient of inces-
sant 81-mm mortar shells. While the deadly Marine fire
descends upon the village, the 1st Platoon eases to the
western spur overlooking the MSR, and from there, it
outflanks the enemy and strikes viciously. The 1st Pla-
toon converges on Hill 102 and secures it at 1710. In the
meantime, while the 1st Platoon drives from the south,
some blazing machine gun fire of Company B contin-
ues to drill the summits of Hills 117 and 143. This
surge permits the 2nd Platoon to shoot the draw, and
within fifteen minutes it secures Hill 109 (at 1725).
At 1500, while Company B, 1st Battalion, launches
its attack through the lines of Company D, 2nd Battal-
ion, the 1st Battalion’s Company A attacks through the
positions of Sweeney’s Company E, 2nd Battalion.
Company A scampers through the rank rice paddy and
moves beyond to the near incinerated slopes. The 1st
and 2nd Platoons, each accompanied by a machine gun
 231
section, advance, while battle-weary and drawn Com-
pany E, 2nd Battalion, moves back to Observation Hill.
At first, the advance meets only nominal opposition,
permitting the 1st and 2nd Platoons to easily pass the
midway point, sustaining little more than sporadic
sniper fire from the forward slopes and from the sum-
mit of Obong-ni Ridge. But then, the North Koreans
spring to action, and in an instant, the seemingly be-
nign summit is transformed into a multi-tongued ser-
pent. Seething streams of fire permeate the paths of ad-
vance and slice ruthlessly into the ranks of the 1st and
2nd Platoons. The 1st Platoon gets snagged between
Hills 109 and 117, and the 2nd Platoon becomes
snarled between Hills 117 and 143. Both platoons are
dangerously strung out and the intensity of the fire
staggers the grueling advance.
Marines on Observation Hill watch in anguish as
their buddies become imperiled, despite the copious
bombardment that has pulverized enemy positions on
Hills 117 and 143. Lieutenant Robert Sebilan, leading
the 1st Platoon through the gully, disregards the wall of
fire. He pushes his platoon forward. Sebilan, soon after,
receives a debilitating blow when his leg is shattered.
Sergeant Orval McMullen assumes command and the
platoon again drives forward, reaching the saddle above
the gully about the same time Company B gains Hill
109. However, there is no advance to the south toward
Hill 117. Another wall of enemy fire bars progress.
The 2nd Platoon, Company A, led by Lieutenant
Thomas Johnston, is also paralyzed by withering enemy
fire as it advances to the left of the 1st Platoon. John-
ston, incensed by the machine gun fire that is cutting
his platoon to pieces, defiantly jumps up and bolts for-
ward, singlehandedly charging the enemy positions,
but he is felled when he reaches the base of the summit.
Sergeant Frank Lawson assumes command and he at-
tempts to lead the dwindling 2nd Platoon forward
against more aggravating fire. The platoon is quickly re-
duced to about one squad.
The recently committed 3rd Platoon moves forward
from its positions on Observation Hill. Led by Lieuten-
ant George Fox, it moves through the rice paddy. An
enemy mortar barrage strikes the advancing platoon
before it can emerge from the rice paddy, killing one
man. Nevertheless, the platoon advances, reaches
Obong-ni Ridge and then begins to climb, collecting
some remnants of the 1st and 2nd Platoons as it grinds
toward the crest. As with the previous assaults, the unit
passes the mid-point before hitting impenetrable fire.
Two attempts to break through are stymied by the vi-
cious fire.
Meanwhile, Captain Stevens arrives at the founda-
tion of the ridge, where he is able to spot the 1st and
2nd Platoons, but not the 3rd. There is no radio com-
munication between Stevens and the troops on the
slope. And at dusk, Hills 117 and 143 still belong to the
enemy.
In addition to the attacks by the 9th RCT and the 5th
Marines, other attacks by the 19th and 34th Regiments,
operating on the 24th Division right, begin during late
August 17, 1950
afternoon after numerous holdups. These attacks prove
costly, particularly to L Company, 34th Regiment,
which sustains heavy casualties, many caused by enemy
fire striking from the rear. But with persistence the two
regiments seize their objectives to the north, and by
darkness, Ohang Hill is taken by the 19th Regiment.
The 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, to the southeast,
maintains its blocking position without challenge. Also,
the 9th RCT has cleared Tugok and Finger Ridge
against nominal resistance. On the following day,
Marines will uncover the maimed bodies of thirty U.S.
soldiers at a medical station that had been overrun dur-
ing the previous week; the troops show conspicuous
signs of torture that occurred prior to their execution.
In the meantime, the Marines begin to establish
night positions on Hills 102 and 109, but apparently
the enemy isn’t ready to pause. At 2000, troops of
Company B, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, on Hill 102
glance to the west and spot four T-34 tanks rumbling
down the MSR. Trailed by infantry, the armor heads
for the pass between Obong-ni and Cloverleaf. From
their vantage points on Hill 102, the Marines appear in-
trigued by the arrogant T-34s as they encroach the pass.
The enemy tanks have yet to encounter the Marine
Pershings, which have been supporting the ground at-
tacks throughout the day, but the encounter is immi-
nent.
A radioman with B Company grabs a radio and in-
forms battalion headquarters of the approaching in-
truders. Within a short time, the M-26 Pershings re-
fuel and get equipped with 90-mm armor-piercing
shells, then race to the pass. At about the same time, sev-
eral soaring Corsairs detect the enemy armor. The
planes immediately attack the column, destroy the trail-
ing tank and scatter the enemy infantry. The remain-
ing three tanks continue the advance and pass beyond
Finger and Obong-ni Ridges to encroach the curve near
Hill 125.
The Marines on Hill 125 rush two 3.5-inch rocket
launcher teams to positions near the curve on the MSR
to await the enemy armor. They are accompanied by the
1st 75-mm Recoilless Rifle Platoon, which is deployed
on nearby Observation Hill. The three Pershing tanks
(M-26s) continue to race forward, transporting some
heavier fireworks.
The T-34s announce their presence by the clouds of
dust that ascend from the road as they crank forward.
The Marines wait for the armor to round the bend.
When the lead tank is sighted, a bazooka is prepared for
fire. When it reaches a point about 100 yards away, a
shot rings out and it clips the tank’s treads. The crip-
pled T-34 continues to advance with its guns blazing.
In an instant, the tank is struck by a second scorching
blow from the bazooka. At about the same time, it sus-
tains a massive hit from a recoilless rifle; the shell blows
a hole in the tank’s hull. But still, the tank refuses to die.
Its movement becomes erratic as it haphazardly
swings around the curve, firing blindly as it rumbles
along, unaware of new lurking danger. Standing in the
path is Sergeant Cecil R. Fuller’s Pershing tank, which
August 17, 1950
quickly fires two shots that kill the T-34. One enemy
soldier survives the explosion and he escapes the blaz-
ing tank, but he is immediately cut down by Marine ri-
flemen.
By now, the second T-34 takes the deadly curve and
it is instantly hit by an assault squad from Company
A. It, too, manages to hobble forward, but one track is
dragging. The handicap is soon eliminated. Before it
gets too far it is clobbered by a rocket, fired by a detach-
ment of the 1st Battalion, and then it is pounded by re-
coilless rifles. The mugged tank limps to a halt directly
behind the first dead tank, but its 85-mm gun contin-
ues to fire wildly into the wind.
In the meantime, another Pershing tank arrives to
keep Sergeant Fuller company on the skimpy firing line,
giving the impression that the tanks are metallic
Siamese twins. By now, the third Russian-made T-34
swings around the bend and into the sights of the wait-
ing Marine tanks. Both Pershings commence firing and
pump out six 90-mm shells that stagger the T-34. The
decimated tank maintains its ability to fire, which
prompts both Pershings to increase the dosage. The T-
34 sustains seven additional hits. And in the meantime,
a white phosphorous shell launched by a 1st Battalion
rocket team scores a peculiar direct hit with a bank
shot. One of the enemy crewmen attempts to escape
the iron coffin. He opens the hatch while the phospho-
rous shell is en route and as it opens, the shell hits it and
bounces down into the turret, igniting an inferno just
before the Pershings’ seven rounds arrive to blow
through the turret and create a violent explosion.
The legend of the sterling invincibility of the Rus-
sian tanks is evolving as a myth. The final T-34 charges
around the bend, only to greeted by the rubble of the
two that preceded it. After an abrupt halt, the lone op-
erational enemy tank is quickly transformed into burn-
ing scrap metal. The combined power of the two Per-
shings, the rocket launchers and the grizzly recoilless
rifles unleashes an onslaught of decimating fire that
concludes the lop-sided encounter. The rattled T-34
trembles under the shock, then explodes. In the first
encounter between the Marines’ Pershings and the
Russian-made T-34s, the Pershings eliminate the foe
in less than ten minutes.
With the threat of the tanks terminated, the Marines
resume establishing their night perimeter, including
the ample distribution of trip-flares in preparation for
an anticipated night attack. At the same time, artillery
units maintain fire along suspected enemy approach
routes leading toward Cloverleaf and Obong-ni, to hin-
der the advance of any reinforcements.
While the battlefield activity subsides on the slope,
the medics and ambulances, overworked for the entire
day, become more animated in the race to save lives.
During the incessant contest, casualties continue to be
carried non-stop from the slopes, ensuring that Lieu-
tenants Bentley Nelson and Chester Klein (battalion
medical officers) and their corpsmen receive no rest.
So taxing is the crisis that all ambulances in the rear, in-
cluding sixteen Eighth Army vehicles, are comman-
232
deered to transport the wounded. Also, the light obser-
vation planes of VMO-6 transfer the more seriously
wounded to the ships offshore.
Soon after the tank encounter, at about 2030, Cap-
tain Stevens, commanding officer, Company A, 1st
Battalion, makes contact with his 1st Platoon, which is
straddled between Hills 109 and 117 and next to Com-
pany B. Stevens is informed that a 100-yard gap sepa-
rates it from the 2nd and 3rd Platoons. Stevens meets
with the platoon leaders at the base of the ridge and
they discuss continuing the assault; however, with the
imminence of darkness and the diminished supply of
ammunition, food and water, the platoon leaders con-
tend that their exhausted troops should not attack.
Stevens and the platoon leaders agree that a large enemy
attack might be following right behind the destroyed
armor, and their attack should be postponed.
Captain Stevens informs Colonel Newton, the 1st
Battalion commander, of the situation and Newton
then instructs Stevens to discontinue the attack and
bind together with Fenton’s Company B to hold the
perimeter for the night. Fenton’s Company B, com-
posed of 195 troops, tightens up as its 1st and 2nd Pla-
toons dig in defensively on the forward slopes of Hills
102 and 109, while its machine guns on the summits
exchange fire with the North Koreans on Hill 117. The
3rd Platoon reverts to reserve.
Also, Company A, composed of 185 men, shifts far-
ther right from its positions below Hills 117 and 143
to link more closely with Company B. The 1st Platoon
is the furthermost unit on the left of Company A’s front,
which extends left from the southern part of Hill 109.
The 1st Platoon extends right to the middle of the sad-
dle toward Hill 117. From there the 2nd Platoon’s
perimeter line curves downward to the spur underneath
enemy controlled Hill 117, where it enjoins what is vir-
tually the perpendicular line of the 3rd Platoon (left
flank) that extends up and down the spur of Hill 117.
Theoretically, the brigade’s line is completed by the
1st Battalion’s Headquarters Company, which is to
stretch across the rice paddy extending from Observa-
tion Hill to Company A, but the severe casualties in-
curred by Headquarters Company prevent the hook
up, leaving the 3rd Platoon strung out precariously.
Nevertheless, Colonel Murray, 5th Marines, upon ar-
riving back at his command post near Yongsan, remains
confident despite the tactical problems. He realizes his
forces are powerfully concentrated within their re-
stricted area and that the reserve 2nd and 3rd Battalions
on Observation and Cloverleaf, respectively, can easily
mount a strong support attack if the enemy strikes dur-
ing the night.
Most of the Marines attempt to get some rest, but
about 25 percent remain on guard and at the ready. Al-
though the units prepare for an anticipated enemy night
assault, elements of the 24th Division have intercepted an
enemy radio message that details chronic shortages of
ammunition in the area of the Naktong Bulge, and they
have also intercepted a related request that would author-
ize the North Koreans to withdraw back across the river.
 233 August 17, 1950

Meanwhile, on Obong-ni Ridge just before 2200,
the screaming rattle of incoming mortar fire and its vi-
olent explosions are heard, followed by a devastating
direct hit inflicted by four white phosphorus shells that
land dead center within the entrenched positions of
Company A. Eighteen men, nearly the entire contin-
gent in the gully, become casualties and its 60-mm
mortars are destroyed. On the fringe of the impacting
shells, several men of the 3rd Platoon are also wounded,
including Captain George C. Fox, platoon leader.
Subsequent to the contest and the capture of enemy
equipment, it is determined that the enemy had

U.S. troops advance past a destroyed enemy tank. Some carry 3.5-inch rocket launchers. The soldier on
the right in the foreground carries rockets. Two South Korean laborers transport a casualty to rear to
receive medical attention.
August 17, 1950 234

Supplies are dropped to isolated troops. The drop marks are located in a rice paddy.

possession of a captured U.S. Army radio (SCR-300)
and its frequency setting was that used by the 1st Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, giving the enemy an added advan-
tage during this battle.
The next several hours pass with unnatural tranquil-
ity, except for some sporadic fire originating from
enemy positions south of the Marine perimeter. An at-
tack by the 1st Battalion is scheduled for 0700, but in
the interim, the enemy night attack is still expected.
And at 0230 it arrives — with a bang.
As expected, the Communists launch their attack,
hoping to catch the Marines on Obong-ni off guard.
Initially, the Marines on Hill 117 detect enemy move-
ment and in synchronization, North Korean machine
 235
Crew of M15A prepares to move out in the vicinity of Yongsan. The M15A, like the M19, was designed
as an antiaircraft weapon.
guns on the summit commence firing into Company A’s
positions. A luminous green flare consumes the night
sky as the North Koreans charge from their concealed
positions on Hill 117 against the positions of Com-
pany A, commanded by Captain John Stevens.
Simultaneously, an assault strikes Company B at its
positions on Hill 109. Two enemy platoons driving
west head up the gully against Fenton’s main defenses,
while a diversionary attack is launched by one squad
attacking from the gully west of the saddle between
Hills 102 and 109. Company B remains solid and the
attack falters. However, some enemy troops penetrate
by evading Marines in foxholes and striking the com-
mand post on Hill 109. They are met by mortarmen,
rocket launcher crewmen and clerks who encounter
and annihilate the infiltrators.
Meanwhile, brilliant artificial daylight is created by
the burst of 81-mm illuminating mortar shells that ex-
pose the enemy attack and offer the Americans a
panoramic view and a lesson on the enemy tactics. The
North Koreans bolt noisily from the ground, lobbing
grenades as they sprint forward, firing their automatic
weapons toward the flank and to the front. It is noted
that the attacking units travel only short distances, then
they drop prone to the ground to permit trailing squads
to leap forward and repeat the process, continuing the
strategy for the duration of the attack.
The killing grounds appear more gruesome because
of the colossal flares. The enemy pressure succeeds in
isolating the remnant 2nd Platoon of Company A, but
August 17, 1950
the greatly outnumbered platoon resists tenaciously for
about one-half hour of deadly close-quartered fight-
ing.
Tech Sergeant Lawson, who had replaced Lieutenant
Johnston as 2nd Platoon leader earlier in the day, is
wounded three times during the struggle, but he re-
fuses evacuation, choosing instead to lead and inspire
his troops to fight on. Finally, the 2nd Platoon is over-
whelmed, but the enemy misses the opportunity of
gushing through the gap in large numbers. Nonethe-
less, the North Koreans splinter the two companies as
they press toward the command post of Stevens’ Com-
pany A, to the immediate rear of the overwhelmed 2nd
Platoon. The attackers, bolstered by heavy submachine
gun fire and grenades, shove Stevens and his headquar-
ters down the gully, toward the saddle south of Hill
109. This in turn opens the left flank of his 1st Pla-
toon, compelling it to pull back toward the southern
face of Hill 109.
Captain Fenton, informed of the enemy seizure of the
saddle south of Hill 109, begins to further tighten his
left flank by pulling it in tightly toward his 3rd Pla-
toon, which is deployed on the reverse slope. This ma-
neuver forms a configuration similar to that of a foot-
ball at this portion of the defenses, and it enables
Company B to fend off enemy pressure that is driving
from the south. Following about one hour of furious
battle, the enemy is driven back.
Marine artillery fire lends support to the riflemen of
Company A in their effort to hold off the enemy thrust.
August 17, 1950
The 3rd Platoon, deployed on the left along the spur
below Hill 117, remains unscathed, except for some
brief exchanges with enemy infantry during the attack.
Lieutenant Fox reforms his 3rd Platoon and stretches its
perimeter to afford more protection, utilizing some few
surviving troops of the 2nd Platoon. By 0400, Cap-
tain Stevens is momentarily out of touch with his com-
pany; however, the situation is not critical. Stevens bal-
ances his center near the bottom of the draw.
One Company A officer, Lieutenant Fred Eubanks,
singlehandedly charges up the gully against the enemy.
Soon after, he is joined by another officer, Lieutenant
Francis Muetzel, who was assumed dead during the ini-
tial enemy penetration against the 2nd Platoon. The
machine gun officer had only been knocked out. His
timely recovery is a welcome addition for Eubanks.
Both then advance together, hacking their way through
the enemy lines to safely reach the Marine zones. Dur-
ing the struggle, Tech. Sergeant Paul Hodge, disregard-
ing his wounds, enables Stevens to make contact with
Lieutenant Fox (3rd Platoon) prior to dawn and the
loose ends are tied, setting up the attack.
In the meantime, Colonel Newton’s request to have
the artillery barrage the enemy positions has been an-
swered so powerfully that the 11th Marines are asked
to hold back a few rounds to support the brigade attack,
still scheduled to jump off in several hours, at 0700.
Newton retorts that if the battalion does not continue
to receive maximum artillery support, the brigade
would be attacking for the purpose of regaining Objec-
tive One at 0700. The incessant bombardment contin-
ues and it is bolstered by the 2nd Battalion’s total com-
plement of 81-mm mortar ammunition, which greatly
increases the killing power of Newton’s mortarmen.
The bitter night attack had started with both Marine
companies being numerically weak, and at its conclu-
sion, the 1st Battalion is victorious but further drained.
At dawn, while the surviving remnants of the enemy are
retiring back to their lines, machine guns still en-
trenched on Hill 117 rattle off some shots at the
Marines. Company A is down to 90 able men and
Company B has incurred 85 casualties, thinning its
ranks to 110 troops, but B Company still commands
Hills 102 and 109.
With the arrival of daylight, the 5th Marines, hav-
ing repelled the North Korean onslaught, prepare to
mount the scheduled attack to clear Hill 117, where
the enemy had withdrawn after being rebuffed by the
Marines. The 1st Battalion reorganizes and Company
A prepares to conclude yesterday’s task by taking the
hill. At 0700, after conferring with Colonel Newton,
Stevens orders the 3rd Platoon to strike. The skies re-
main clear on the 18th, giving the Marines the added
power of close-air support as well as artillery support.
The Marines (1st Bn., 5th Marines) drive south to-
ward the hill, crossing the saddle effortlessly, but as the
troops begin to ascend the slope, enemy machine guns
string a ghastly wall of fire across the line of advance.
One Marine BARman, PFC Harold Twedt, eliminates
two of the machine guns, but enemy fire kills him.
236
About fifty yards farther up the slope, another machine
gun position stalls the advance by laying sheets of fire.
The Marines are hung high on the slope. An urgent
call for an air strike is dispatched and soon afterward the
tactical air coordinator, Lt. Colonel Norman Ander-
son, obliges with Corsairs overhead.
Anderson fires a colorful smoke rocket to identify
the location of the target and Major Arnold Lund
(VMF-323) directs his section leader, Captain John P.
Kelley, to destroy the menacing obstacle. Kelley’s Cor-
sair zooms overhead, then dives toward a belly-scrap-
ing level, nearly shaving the heads of the troops of the
3rd Platoon, before unleashing his 500-pound parcel of
that destroys all four machine guns. The impact jolts the
Marines on the ground, and one BARman is inadver-
tently killed by the blast.
At about the point of detonation, while the smoke
and debris are still hovering above the charred earth,
the Marines charge from their positions and secure the
hill. Upon reaching the enemy gun emplacement it be-
comes evident that Captain Kelley had hit the bull’s-eye
with his bomb, scoring a massive direct hit. Within five
minutes of the appearance of the Corsair, the Marines
sprint to the summit, claiming Hill 117, and soon after,
they are joined by Orval McMullen’s 1st Platoon, which
has driven from Hill 109, prompting the enemy to flee
from the crest and the reverse slope under heavy fire
from the new occupants.
With the crest of Hill 117 in their pocket, the men
of Company A, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, swing to-
ward the south to sweep the crest. Twenty Marines at-
tack and seize Hill 143 against light resistance. Imme-
diately, Stevens requests permission from Newton to
continue the attack and he receives this response: “Af-
firmative.” Soon after, the 3rd Platoon, Company A, at-
tacks and overruns Hill 147. Many of the enemy de-
fenders flee their positions. Some choose to stand and
fight for the crest, and they are annihilated.
The victors scour the summit and detect a disci-
plined enemy column composed of about 150 troops
descending the western slope and about halfway to the
base. Suddenly, Marine fire commences from the crest
and the neatly moving columns-of-four begin to un-
ravel.
The jewel of Obong-ni, Hill 153, with its towering
peak, still remains to be taken, and it is expected that
the North Koreans will resist tenaciously. Company A’s
3rd Platoon drives expeditiously to the crest, encoun-
tering discarded equipment and weapons and some
enemy corpses. The Marines search the area and the
slopes for the vanishing enemy, and they discover an
unusual sight on the reverse slope when the spot some
scrub pines that harbor hostile tree-huggers. The
Marines observe the bushes unnaturally moving down
the hill and react. Some of the enemy are slain, but
their pace is so quick that many of the fleeing bushes es-
cape.
While the 1st and 2nd Platoons, Company A, con-
centrate on the middle peaks, the 3rd Platoon sweeps
the southern stretches below Hill 153, encountering no
 237
opposition. The 1st Platoon’s engineers sweep through
the swamps south of Hill 153, securing it and the left
flank of the 3rd Platoon by establishing a solid mine-
field that stretches from the southern summit down-
ward to the valley and eastward from there across the
swamp.
In the meantime, Colonel Taplett’s 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, which had received warning orders at
midnight (17th-18th) to continue its attack, is prepar-
ing to jump from its assembly area. Artillery fire and
mortars converge on the objective and air strikes plas-
ter the hill to loosen resistance. Colonel Taplett estab-
lishes his observation post on the northern portion of
Obong-ni. Companies G and H, with support fire
from the 9th Regiment, USA, on Cloverleaf, jump off
from the northern edge of Obong-ni and drive toward
Hill 207. (In some U.S. Army references this hill is
noted as 206).
At about 1000, Fenton’s Company H contingent
breaks from the main supply route and moves onto
some open ground between Obong-ni and Finger
Ridges. From there, it drives up the eastern spur, while
the trailing Company G, under Bohn, pivots to the
right and from the opposite side of a deep gully charges
up the western spur. While the attacking troops ascend
the slopes, watchful tanks of the 3rd Platoon, Com-
pany A, spot an enemy platoon working the flank. The
M-26s open fire from a range of 300 yards, shattering
the attack, killing many and scattering the remainder.
The tanks maintain their cover fire to the front and
flanks, enabling the ground troops to continue the
climb.
As Company H’s 1st Platoon encroaches the summit,
a few of the defenders rise from their foxholes and toss
grenades at the attacking Marines. Instinctively, every-
one hits the deck and remains prone until the grenades
detonate. Then with a sudden burst, the final lap is
run, catching the defenders off guard. Most defenders
head down the reverse slope, but some remain to resist;
all are quickly killed.
Meanwhile, Company G, driving on the right,
swings in over the western portion of the objective and
quickly eradicates the few remaining enemy troops,
culminating the conquest of Hill 207 (Objective Two)
at 1237.
The N.K. 4th Division begins to crumble. Contin-
gents are speeding from the slopes of Hill 207. Some
bee-line for Hill 311 on the opposite side of the MSR,
and others flee toward the Naktong River. The disci-
plined enemy division is in disorganized flight, lack-
ing its usual cover of darkness. The exposed North Ko-
reans offer an abundance of killing opportunities for
the artillerymen and the Marine Corsairs. Planes of
MAG-33 obliterate the assumed position of the com-
mand post of the N.K. 18th Regiment on a crest south
of Hill 207. The attack delivers thunderous bolts of
flaming steel and short circuits the enemy communica-
tions. In the meantime, other Corsairs alternate as they
spray the banks of the Naktong and assault the hundreds
of fleeing enemy troops with more steel.
August 17, 1950
The murderous thunderclap increases its intensity. At
about 1200, when information concerning the enemy
retreat across the Naktong is transmitted, the artillery
hones in on the Naktong River crossings, in concert
with aircraft that strafe the roads and paths on the west-
ern slopes, slicing the enemy ranks there. The enemy
troops become caught on naked ground as they try to
reach the river.
While the enemy is being shredded on the banks by
the Corsairs, the artillery is adjusted to place interdic-
tion fire on each of the river crossings, greatly increas-
ing the fatalities and casualties on the beleaguered
Communist Division. The guns of the artillery are ad-
justed for effectiveness on target and modified by sup-
plementing the barrage with “adjusted air bursts” and
“quick fuse” shells to ensure a greater killing area. The
time-delayed shells spring deadly surprises on the
enemy troops who attempt escape by swimming under
water. When they come up for air they are greeted with
clusters of exploding shell fragments overhead.
Colonel Taplett, not to be outdone, concentrates his
supporting tanks, mortars and machine guns on the
enemy, including those caught in the valley and upon
Hills 207 and 311. Taplett requests permission to con-
tinue the assault, but he is directed to hold in place
while the brigade completes the annihilation operation
at the river.
Following the seizure of Hill 206 at 1530, Compa-
nies G and H begin departing the summit, meeting at
the base the 1st Platoon, Company A, 1st Tank Bn.,
commanded by Lieutenant Pomeroy. From there, with
the security of the tanks, the 3rd Battalion slants slightly
northwest and crosses the valley toward the final ridge
in front of the Naktong, Hill 311 (Objective Three).
Meanwhile, the North Koreans are receiving a thor-
ough thrashing, and most are attempting to withdraw
across the Naktong. Nevertheless, those enemy troops
still remaining on Hill 311 are pounded by a heavy
preparatory bombardment. MAG-33 aircraft coat the
peak with napalm, while the big guns of the artillery,
74-mm recoilless rifles and mortars whack the high
slopes with thundering blasts. The massive fire power
obstructs free flight by the enemy, while the assault at
the Naktong remains in progress.
The once resolute resistance of the N.K. 4th Division
has been shattered by the Marines and its remnants are
scattering under the overwhelming pressure. The planes
hammer from the sky in conjunction with the blazing
action of the ground troops. The enemy hunters be-
come the prey, but at some points, the North Koreans
still mount formidable opposition.
In conjunction with the Marine assault, the 19th
and 34th Regiments, operating on the right flank of
the 24th Division, continue their advance into the
bulge. Before dusk, Hill 223 is seized by the 19th Reg-
iment and Hill 240 is secured by the 34th Regiment.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marine Compa-
nies G and H, drive up parallel spurs and close on the
summit. Enemy fire rips into Company H when it
climbs to within about 200 yards shy of the crest. The
August 17, 1950 238

U.S. soldiers fire a 60-mm mortar M2 at the enemy in the vicinity of the Naktong River during late August.

stiff resistance is raised by a lone platoon, but the attack
stalls and the machine guns are of no value due to thick
brush. Company G overpowers light resistance and ad-
vances to the southern tip of the crest at 1730. Soon
after, it pivots and drives north, only to stall as it en-
counters fierce fire from the identical enemy platoon
that has stymied Company H. Lieutenant Bohn dis-
patches the 1st Platoon, Company G, under Cahill to
the west to envelop the enemy to the left. The maneu-
ver works and the obstacle is eliminated, but then the
North Koreans on the forward slopes raise heavy resist-
ance and close-quartered fighting ensues between them
and Company H.
During the pitched battle on the slopes, Captain
 239
Fegan becomes wounded, totally halting the progress of
Company H. In conjunction, due to imminent dark-
ness, Lieutenant Bohn recalls his over-extended 1st Pla-
toon and receives a report from its leader, Lieutenant
Cahill, himself wounded, that the platoon’s casualties
amount to two killed and eight wounded.
Subsequent to the day’s fierce combat, which cul-
minates with the capture of the majority of Hill 311,
Colonel Taplett orders his 3rd Battalion to establish a
night perimeter. The remnant resistance on the crest is
scheduled for destruction on the following morning
(19th). Sunset on the 18th sets a somber note for the
N.K. 4th Division, which has been decisively defeated,
giving the North Korean Army its first major setback
since the outbreak of hostilities.
The 81-mm mortars of the 3rd Battalion bellow at
0610, signaling the demise of Hill 311, the third and
final objective of the Marine brigade. Company H,
seemingly moving on the tailwinds of the mortar fire,
advances rapidly, popping over abandoned enemy en-
trenchments to reach the northern portion of the hill
without interruption. Objective Three is Marine terrain
by 0645, culminating the mission of the brigade. The
1st Battalion, 5th Marines, holds Obong-ni Ridge, the
2nd controls Hill 207, where it deployed on the previ-
ous day, and now the 3rd Battalion holds the com-
manding heights in the Naktong Bulge. The Marine
price: 66 dead, 278 wounded and one missing in action.
On the morning of the 19th, elements of the 34th
Regiment and contingents of the 5th Marines converge
on the Naktong, essentially terminating the battle of
the Naktong Bulge. Patrols scout the river area during
the afternoon and discover no enemy troops. Subse-
quent information extracted from prisoners verifies that
most survivors of the initial attacking force had with-
drawn across the Naktong during the night (18th-
19th). Although no contact is made with the enemy
and its exact losses are unknown, it is increasingly clear
that the enemy had sustained grave casualties. The 24th
Division buries more than 1,200 Communist troops.
Additional information gained from prisoners claims
that the remnant force of the decimated 4th N.K. Di-
vision had been reduced to 3,500 men.
Coincidentally, the defeated division receives word
from North Korean Army Headquarters today that it
has been designated (by army order) a “Guard Divi-
sion,” for recognition of its excellent achievements dur-
ing the battle of Taejon in July. The North Koreans
lose face with the destruction of the supposed crack
4th Division. In an attempt to regain the momentum
to capture Pusan and throw the Americans back into the
sea, the North Koreans remove the 2nd and 9th Divi-
sions from the Taegu front to succeed the battered 4th
N.K. Division. Simultaneously, the Communists build
up the N.K. 6th Division, which has also taken a beat-
ing at Chinju. The unexpected redeployment of the
N.K. 2nd and 9th Divisions is a blessing for General
Walker’s Eighth Army, as the strategy inadvertently bol-
sters Walker’s diminishing force at Taegu.
Following the battle at Obong-ni, detachments from
August 17, 1950
Marine ordnance units begin collecting the enemy’s
abandoned and destroyed heavy weapons. Detachments
scoop up 34 artillery pieces, more than half of them
positioned adjacent to the Yongsan–Naktong River
Road. Other weapons captured (including destroyed
and abandoned) include eight antitank rifles, 25 light
machine guns, eighteen heavy machine guns and 63
submachine guns; countries of origin for these weapons
are Russia and the USA. The U.S. forces also confiscate
large quantities of grenades and ammunition as they
mop up along the Naktong.
With the victorious conclusion of the fighting in the
bulge, Eighth Army releases the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade from the 24th Division. The Marines
move to an assembly area outside of Changwon, east of
Masan, reverting to Eighth Army reserve until its serv-
ices are again needed during early September.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: Enemy-
held Hill 303 comes under attack during the predawn
hours, as the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 5th Cavalry Reg-
iment, supported by tanks and artillery, charge the
enemy positions. The Americans encounter resolute
resistance, including intense mortar fire that halts the
advance at the fringe of Waegwan, the base of the
southern slope. The artillery units catapult steady
streams of fire into the enemy positions without success,
prompting the 5th Cavalry to request some heavier as-
sistance from division. First Cavalry Division head-
quarters informs 5th Cavalry that the Air Force is
scheduled to carpet the hill at 1400. The 5th Cavalry
is not disappointed.
At precisely 1400, the planes arrive overhead and
begin whacking the hill, charring it with napalm and
rockets. Simultaneously, large pockets of open ground
are created by the thunderous shuddering impact of
the descending layers of bombs, intertwined with the
arcing artillery shells that have joined the fire of the
aircraft to further frazzle the nerves of the surviving
defenders on the sizzling slopes.
By 1530, the combined air strikes and the artillery
barrages have cut a steady path for the infantry by clear-
ing the hill of all living members of the defenders. The
U.S. infantry charges up the hill expecting a tenacious
fight, but it encounters no opposition and easily re-
gains complete control by about 1630, when sixty
troops from Companies E and F take the summit.
About 200 enemy dead are noticed as the ground
troops pass by en route to the summit, and it is esti-
mated that about 500 additional enemy troops had
been wounded on the hill by the artillery air strikes.
But the enemy dead are not the sole corpses on the rav-
aged battlefield. The fate of the mortarmen of Company
H is no longer a mystery. Twenty-six U.S. troops, each
with his hands fastened by rope or wire behind his
back, lay dead. The twenty-six American soldiers lie
prone, riddled with bloody holes from rampant burp
gun fire. Later information discloses that while the U.S.
attack is underway this day, the captives, taken during
the predawn hours of the 15th, are ordered slaughtered
by a North Korean officer.
August 18, 1950
During the afternoon nightmarish news hits the reg-
iment. Scouts bring in one of the few survivors, Pri-
vate Roy Manring, who had wounds in both legs and
one arm but dragged himself down the hill into the line
of advance by the reinforcements. Lieutenant Paul Kelly
leads the I&R Platoon to the site and captures two
North Korean troops who had been involved with the
slaughter. Several mortarmen, including Corporal
James Rudd (three wounds), who had been captured
and scheduled for execution, evade death by absorbing
their wounds, then seeking insulation by crawling
under the bodies of the dead. Fighting continues near
the hill for the remainder of the day. Later, during some
night fighting, enemy antitank weapons knock out two
tanks of the 70th Tank Battalion. On the following day
when U.S. troops arrive at the scene, they discover six
bodies, and each of the deceased tankers had been cap-
tured before being summarily executed.
In other activity, a short but devastating enemy ar-
tillery barrage strikes Taegu, raising the level of anxiety
with just seven shells. The harassing fire destroys one
railroad engine, damages the roundhouse at the rail-
road station and kills one civilian. Eight other civilians
are wounded. The incident promotes exaggerated reac-
tion, as later in the day, the Korean Provincial Govern-
ment orders the city evacuated. The president of the
Republic of Korea, Syngman Rhee, hurriedly transfers
his floating capital to Pusan. The new unfolding chain
of events is creating more difficulties for hard-pressed
Eighth Army. Military traffic could become totally par-
alyzed by the swarming refugees, and the morale of the
defending troops is plummeting as the newest confu-
sion begins to compound the crisis.
Eighth Army (coordinator for protection of lines of
communications) halts the evacuation. The enemy will
shell the town twice more between today and the 20th.
Near Taegu, the 27th Regimental Headquarters moves
out of Kyongsan with a reinforced battalion to relocate
at a point across the Kumho River along the Tabu-
dong–Sanju Road, about three miles north of Taegu.
The battalion dispatched by the 27th Regiment
is to intercept any enemy movement heading south
along the road. Information has been received from the
South Koreans that an enemy regiment accompanied by
six tanks has moved into Kumhwa, a little village
two miles north of Tabu-dong. The 1st Battalion ad-
vances with a heavy mortar company platoon and the
8th FAB (minus Battery B). By dark, the entire regiment
will be north of Taegu (along Tabu-dong road), sup-
ported by Company C, 73rd Tank Battalion. On the
following day, the 37th FAB, minus its Battery A, ar-
rives to further augment the 27th Regiment’s support-
ing artillery.
Meanwhile, the S.K. 1st Division remains embroiled
with elements of the N.K. 13th Division in the high
ground around Yuhak-san for about one week, at-
tempting to prevent the Communists from breaching
the Tabu-dong corridor and reaching Taegu. But this
day, despite the severe casualties it has incurred during
the week’s fighting (about 1,500 casualties), the North
240
Koreans penetrate and by the following day they en-
croach Tabu-dong.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The South
Koreans progress well against heavy opposition in the
vicinity of An’gang-ni–Kigye, and they convincingly
force the North Koreans to surrender ground. By dawn,
the 23rd Regiment, U.S. 2nd Division, arrives at Ky-
ongju to bolster the lines there. Intense fighting con-
tinues throughout the day, and by nightfall, the N.K.
766th Independent Regiment, fearful of total encir-
clement, withdraws into the mountains north of Kigye.
The N.K. 12th Division receives a thrashing as well,
coming under thunderous bombardment from the U.S.
naval surface vessels and by lightning-quick strikes
from the support planes while they attempt to fend off
the aggressiveness of the South Korean ground troops.
At about 2000, the N.K. 12th Division issues orders for
all its contingents to pull back to Top’yong-dong.
While en route, heavy casualties are incurred, forcing
the 12th Division to reorganize on the 19th. Subse-
quent reports from POWs indicate that the average
enemy battalion is composed of no more that 250 men
as of August 17.
— In North Korea: North Korean Premier Kim Il
Sung (born Kim Song-ju) had earlier predicted the
ouster of the U.S. and the unification of Korea, subse-
quent to the destruction of the South Korean resist-
ance by August 15. But now Kim Il Sung is compelled
to modify his schedule. He proclaims a new order by
radio broadcast, again calling for the eviction of the
Americans and the destruction of South Korea by the
end of August. Kim Il Sung further states that his
Communist forces should “destroy the South Korean
and United States [troops] to the last man.”
— In the United States: The 7th Marines, pursuant
to authority by the JCS, is activated at Camp Pendle-
ton, California. Colonel Homer L. Litzenberg is ap-
pointed commander of the regiment. The catalyst of
the regiment is the 6th Marines (less two battalions),
which had arrived at Pendleton from Camp Lejeune
on the previous day. The 3rd Battalion, 6th Marines,
2nd Marine Division, is stationed in the Mediter-
ranean, but it receives orders to proceed to Japan to
join the 7th Marines, 1st Marine Division. Other units
utilized to form the 7th Marines include 3rd Battal-
ion, 11th Marines; Company D, 1st Tank Bn.; Com-
pany D, 1st Engineer Bn.; Company C, 1st Shore Party
Bn. (including two Shore Party Communications
Teams attached to Signal Company, Signal Bn.); Com-
pany D, 1st Motor Transport Bn.; and Company E,
1st Medical Bn.
August 18 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Ele-
ments of the N.K. 6th Division launch another morn-
ing assault against Colonel Fisher’s 35th Regiment,
25th Division, at Sibidang, again pushing Company A
from its sector, but the lost ground is then regained by
a counterattack. Two companies of S.K. Police
arrive to bolster the right flank of Company A, and
the artillery of the 64th Field Artillery Battalion,
 241
commanded by Lt. Colonel Arthur Logan, and its at-
tached Battery C, 90th Field Artillery Battalion, also
give support to Companies A and B during these skir-
mishes.
To the south of the 35th’s positions, the North Ko-
reans initiate a morning assault against the 24th Regi-
ment. The attack strikes strongly against Company E,
2nd Battalion, posted on the northern spinal ridge of
Battle Mountain. The enemy gains some ground, dis-
lodging portions of the company and killing its com-
manding officer. During the day’s skirmishing on Bat-
tle Mountain, Lt. Colonel George R. Cole,
commanding officer, 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment,
is replaced by Lt. Colonel Paul F. Roberts.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade area, patrols
from each battalion scrutinize their areas of responsibil-
ity to eliminate any snipers or lagging enemy stragglers.
One mop up patrol discovers three concealed 122-mm
howitzers deployed in a column and positioned whereby
they could fire over one another from their camouflaged
area in the brush on a hill near the Naktong River. The
find is a bonanza of intelligence, as the Marines have
never before encountered enemy guns deployed in this
fashion. General Craig believes that these undisturbed
howitzers are the guns that had been striking the Ma-
rine positions until the final bell of the battle.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 37th
Field Artillery Battalion elements arrive from Kyongju–-
Pohang-dong at the 27th Regiment’s lines along the
Tabu-dong road, above Taegu. The N.K. 13th Divi-
sion, which had forced its way into the Tabu-dong cor-
ridor, reaches positions slightly north of Tabu-dong.
West of this activity, at Yuhak-san, the N.K. 15th Di-
vision is also engaging contingents of the S.K. 1st Di-
vision, but up to this point, the combat has been con-
fined to minor skirmishes.
The North Korean Army Command, determined to
take Taegu, redirects its 15th Division from the area
northwest of Tabu-dong to positions eastward along
the Yongch’on front, where the N.K. 8th Division has
been repelled near the lateral Taegu corridor. The divi-
sion departs for its newly designated area on about the
20th. Also, the N.K. 1st Division operating east (left)
of the N.K. 13th Division is directed to advance to po-
sitions that parallel the 13th Division to form for a com-
bined assault against Taegu through the Tabu-dong cor-
ridor.
In the meantime, Eighth Army orders Colonel
Michaelis to attack to help regroup the S.K. lines at
Sokchok about four miles north of Tabu-dong; the 27th
Regiment, supported by M-26 tanks of Company C,
73rd Tank Battalion, and the artillery of the 37th FAB,
is to drive north along the Sangju-Taegu Road in con-
junction with the S.K. 1st Division, which is to simul-
taneously assault the enemy positions in the hills on
both sides of the highway.
During the afternoon, the convoy, spearheaded by
tanks, roars out of Tabu-dong moving north. The ad-
vancing troops are able to observe the ensuing fighting
in the hills between the South Koreans and the enemy
August 18, 1950
as they roll toward the line of departure. At a desig-
nated spot, the vehicles halt, and the ground troops
jump to the road. The 1st and 2nd Battalions deploy
on the left and right of the highway. At 1300, the 1st
and 2nd Battalions, led by Colonels Check and Murch
respectively, cross the line of departure and advance
into the ongoing fighting by sweeping the lower hills
against nominal opposition. This permits them to keep
pace with the tanks, which are purposely advancing at
a sluggish pace to afford the infantry an abundance of
cover fire.
The tankers deliver a steady line of fire toward the
high ground, drilling the slopes with steel. The sounds
of the impacting shells reverberate like percussion in-
struments in a deep well, with the echoes bouncing
back and forth through the valley below. While the
27th Regiment continues its advance, the S.K. 1st Di-
vision contingents in the higher ground are encounter-
ing stiff resistance, forcing the attack to be suspended.
The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 27th Regiment, establish
a perimeter slightly north of Soi-ri, a tiny village
dwarfed even more by the huge slopes that abut it. The
S.K. units retain their positions in the heights above
both sides of the road. The U.S. perimeter is spiked to
the front of the Infantry with two tanks in the stream
and two more on the road. The line is further bolstered
by six bazooka teams dispersed in the same vicinity.
The perimeter is anchored in the rear by artillery and
six additional tanks, which are held in reserve to pro-
vide some extra comfort for the 27th Regiment, which
is anticipating yet another unenchanted evening with
the enemy. In the 1st Battalion sector on the left, Com-
pany C takes the point in the high ground with Com-
pany A to its rear. Company B, straddled to the right,
stretches out in front of A Company and extends across
a streambed and the valley to the road. To the right of
the road, the 2nd Battalion’s Company E deploys along
and to the east of the road, aligned with Company F to
its right. In conjunction, Company G deploys on a hill
to the rear of Company F, completing the regiment’s
night perimeter. All units await an attack to emerge in
the hills and along the valley road.
Soon after dark, the 27th Regiment is serenaded with
mortar and artillery barrages, followed by the usual
enemy flares, signaling the enemy night assault that
transforms the valley into a combustion chamber.
Enemy armor leads the attack. The armor had appar-
ently remained concealed during the day at Sinjumak,
a dinky village slightly more than one mile to the front
of the 27th’s lines beyond a fork of the Sangju and
Kunwi Roads. The village of Sinjumak, nestled behind
the hills on the left (Sangju road) fork, is protected
from artillery by the hills. Nonetheless, the two enemy
tanks and a self-propelled gun venture from their sanc-
tuary into the range of the U.S. guns, trailed by in-
fantry, some moving by truck and others by foot. As
the roving enemy armor probes for the American po-
sitions, the second tank and the self-propelled gun shat-
ter the night silence, blasting shells toward Company
F’s sector, but the firing is inaccurate.
August 18, 1950
The lead tank moves innocently, its guns still silent
as if searching for a target. The armor continues its ad-
vance and closes prudently but confidently until the
waiting guns of the Americans begin to bellow. The
8th Field Artillery begins limbering up in cadence with
the bazookas from Company F. Their combined per-
formance makes the enemy jittery. The lead tank is
swiftly struck by two bazooka shells, but neither deto-
nate. Nonetheless, the duds convince the crew to aban-
don the tank. At about the same time, the second tank
is decimated by bazooka fire. The ensuing interdictory
barrage from the 8th Field Artillery, directed by an as-
tute artillery observer, Lieutenant Lewis Millett, knocks
out the self-propelled gun and two enemy trucks. The
endeavor kills or wounds an estimated 100 enemy
troops. Iron-nerved Millet conducted his artillery or-
chestra while the enemy tank reached a position fifty
yards from his foxhole.
Several additional tanks advance to the area, but
upon observing the decimation to their front, they each
quickly reverse direction and retire. Lacking armor, the
enemy infantry assault evaporates rather quickly. By
0030 (19th), the valley becomes tranquil for a while.
The persistent North Koreans launch a milder attack at
about 0230, but it, too, sizzles as the guns of the 8th
Field Artillery, supplemented by mortar fire, soon
prompt the enemy to disengage and disperse. The 27th
Regiment is a quick-study unit and it notices that the
North Koreans always introduce green flares to pin-
point their primary area of attack. An abundant sup-
ply of green flares is procured post-haste by the 27th
Regiment, adding new dimensions to the future night
attacks.
The Americans also ring the valley road with mines,
U.S. tanks (medium M4A3 in foreground and medium M-26 in background) fire at enemy targets in the
vicinity of Yongsan on 18 August.
242
which slow the tanks. When the enemy infantry ar-
rives to dislodge the land mines, the skies are instantly
illuminated with brilliant bursting flares that provide
added guidance to the preregistered mortars and ar-
tillery shells, which strike up a deadly chorus for the
stalled enemy. The North Koreans mount six more suc-
cessive night attacks in what becomes “The Battle of the
Bowling Alley.”
In other activity, General Walker, acting upon the re-
cent direction from General MacArthur, requests per-
mission to activate five new South Korean divisions,
all to be fully equipped and each composed of 10,500
troops. Walker wants to activate one new division per
month beginning in September. General MacArthur
agrees with the new force, but due to the critical short-
ages of equipment, he holds back Walker’s authority.
MacArthur insists that the new S.K. divisions have only
equipment arriving from the U.S. The present strength
of the South Korean Army is approximately 84,800
troops.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The North
Korean 12th Division and the 766th Independent Reg-
iment continue to recoil in the hills in the vicinity of
Top’yong-dong and Pohang-dong, following hard and
bitter fighting with the South Korean forces. The North
Korean force has lacked adequate supplies since about
August 12. One captured North Korean officer details
the 12th Division’s frustration, claiming it is due to
moving beyond Andong and through the mountains
there without artillery to support them in Pohang-
dong. The captive officer also cites critical shortages of
food. Another captured prisoner, a sergeant with the
N.K. 1st Regiment’s 2nd Battalion, informs his inter-
rogators that his battalion, composed of 630 troops,
 243
contained only twenty troops as of August 18. It ap-
pears as if the North Koreans have been thwarted along
the eastern perimeter, but the calm remains temporary.
By early September, the North Koreans are poised for
more powerful attacks against the entire Pusan Perime-
ter.
—In the United States: The second echelon of plan-
ners (1st Marine Division) leaves Camp Pendleton for
Japan; General O.P. Smith departs with the entourage.
In conjunction, the 1st Marine Division command post
at Pendleton is closed in coordination with the depar-
ture of the commanding general; however, a few thou-
sand Marines (rear echelon) remain there under the
command of General Alfred H. Noble. In other activ-
ity, the Marine Corps lowers the term of enlistment to
three years from its norm of four years.
— In Japan: The first contingent of South Korean
troops who are to be filtered into the U.S. 7th Division
arrive in Japan. The final contingent arrives by the 24th,
giving the U.S. 7th Division a total of 8,625 Korean
troops, including officers and men. It is a complicated
set up that doesn’t work out too well due to many
things, including a language barrier, insufficient train-
ing and a much different culture and set of loyalties.
Some of the troops who arrive are particularly young
and still carrying their schoolbooks; many of these new
recruits have been scooped up in Taegu and Pusan.
August 19 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: U.S.
Naval Forces bombard the enemy positions at recently
seized T’ongyong in support of an ROK amphibious
invasion; with the support of the U.S. Navy fire, the
S.K. Marines take the town. The North Koreans lose
about 350 troops during this action, splitting their force
by about 50 percent. The survivors withdraw to Chinju.
In the U.S. 25th Division sector, the North Koreans
continue to slim the ranks of the 1st Battalion, 35th
Regiment, but Lt. Colonel Bernard Teeter’s men hold
firmly with the support of artillery, which cranks out
about 200 rounds an hour during the night of the 19th-
20th. To reinforce Company A, the South Korean po-
lice on the flank and Company B reinforcements rush
to the scene. Company C, 35th Regiment, and Com-
pany A, 29th Regiment, speed to positions along the
Komam-ni Road on the morning of the 20th.
In the 24th Regiment sector at Battle Mountain, the
enemy again mounts a morning attack. Company C,
1st Battalion, quickly dislodges itself and hurriedly de-
scends the slope. In the confusion of the battle, many
of the newly arrived South Korean police on P’il-bong
also desert their positions in the face of the enemy at-
tack. About forty troops of Company C, 1st Battalion,
are collected by officers and ordered back to their po-
sitions. The enemy takes its usual advantage, and by
day’s end, an indeterminable number of N.K. troops
infiltrate the hole, which now extends about one mile
north from P’il-bong. This enables them to get trac-
tion for the next assault.
The deserting troops who seem to vanish on the
slope have no easy task to get to the base of the moun-
August 19, 1950
tain. It takes several tedious hours to descend the pre-
cipitous eastern slope, which has only foot paths at best,
and at certain points the climbing or descending is nor-
mally accomplished with the help of ropes, carefully
extended along the side of the path.
With each new penetration, the enemy expends more
time severing the communication lines of the 24th Reg-
iment, causing the wire repairmen to work tirelessly to
fix the breaks. Alternate ways of communicating with
the commands on the mountain are strenuous. An av-
erage trip by messenger from the base of the mountain
to the defenders and back consumes nearly eight hours.
The 25th Division, in addition to being heavily in-
volved with the enemy, is hampered by its efforts to
help the South Korean police scrutinize the legions of
refugees, who have been flooding the area between the
Nam River and Chindong-ni. Since about August 12,
more than 50,000 refugees have been moved out of the
sector. This is not an isolated incident. The 25th Di-
vision, since August 1, has moved about 120,000
refugees from its zone.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, General
Craig, USMC, moves by helicopter to meet with Gen-
eral Church at 24th Division Headquarters. While
there, Craig is informed that the Marine Brigade is re-
leased from the 24th Division and it will revert to
Eighth Army reserve.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: Subse-
quent to the attacks by the North Koreans against the
lines of the 27th Regiment during the previous night
into the early morning hours, the S.K. 1st Division
launches counterattacks against the enemy in the higher
ground between Tabu-dong and the village of
Ch’ong’yong-dong at the fork of the Sangju and Kunwi
Roads. The S.K. 11th and 13th Regiments mount the
attacks and make some progress.
In the meantime, General Walker orders the S.K.
10th Regiment (reserve) to move to the Taegu front to
fortify a weakened hole between the S.K. 1st and 6th
Divisions. The U.S. 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, is
ordered to advance to bolster the positions of the 8th
and 37th Field Artillery positions about eight miles
north of Taegu. Also, the “Rock of the Marne” Regi-
ment, the 38th Infantry, commanded by Colonel
George Peploe, arrives at Pusan. It will proceed to
Miryang to join its parent 2nd Division.
Inchon vicinity: the South Korean Navy has recently
initiated some small-scale raids against enemy territory
in coordination with the ongoing evacuation of iso-
lated South Korean troops. Today, the South Korean
vessel PC-703 debarks troops on Yonghung-do, but
the enemy has not yet arrived there and the civilians
are loyal South Koreans. A small contingent of troops
is deployed on the island, which is less than fifteen miles
south of Inchon. The PC-703 then departs and for-
wards the intelligence to Tokyo. Soon after, a recon-
naissance detachment, led by Lieutenant Clark, USN,
arrives to take advantage of the strategic island.
In Air Force activity, the enemy continues its
free movement across the Han River at Seoul. The two
August 19, 1950
U.S. Army positions on a hillside near the Naktong River (background) on 19 August. The troops use
camouflage shelter halves atop the foxholes.
pontoon bridges constructed after the Communist
seizure of the city are intact. In addition, the railroad
bridge west of Seoul remains operational and one ad-
ditional railroad bridge is under construction. Air Force
planes have bombed the bridge west of the city for
nearly one month without bringing about its demise.
On this day, the obstinate steel span is again struck.
244
Nine B-29s of the 19th Bomber Group deposit more
than fifty tons of 1,000-pound bombs on the bridge
without destroying it. Soon afterward, carrier-based
planes attack the bridge and score eight direct hits that
finally collapse the span. However, the pontoon bridges
remain active, and the North Koreans continue to re-
pair them at night until late August.
 245 August 19, 1950

An American patrol moves from its hill positions toward another hill near Naktong River about 18–19
August.

In other Air Force activity, General Partridge trans-
fers the Joint Operations Center to Pusan after con-
cluding that Taegu is being threatened by the Com-
munists.
In Naval activity, the USS Philippine Sea again
launches planes to hit enemy targets in support of the
ground troops. Ten F4Us and eight AD Skyraiders, as-
sisted by a Mosquito aircraft, attack various enemy
troop concentrations and supply depots along the Nak-
tong River in the area between the front lines and
Hypoch’on. The effective use of incendiary bombs ig-
nites many explosions and fires that prompt the enemy
August 20, 1950
troops to bolt from their positions. They flee onto open
fields, giving the pilots productive strafing runs. Dur-
ing the attacks, at least two enemy trucks are destroyed
and several additional vehicles sustain damage.
Estimates of enemy casualties stand at about 30
killed and an equal number wounded. Two enemy
command cars race to the sanctuary of a warehouse and
gain a temporary reprieve. Soon after, direct hits strike
the building and the warehouse and its occupants are
transformed into burning timbers.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, in an effort to
strengthen the ground forces in Korea, requests that
Washington provide sufficient troops to form two corps
headquarters, and he further asks that the corps be des-
ignated I and IX Corps.
In other activity, Eighth Army Rear takes action to
find replacement troops for the Korean Theater where
the U.S. units have sustained heavy casualties since en-
tering the fight against the Communists in early July.
Operation FLUSHOUT is initiated; it mandates that
every unit in Japan must contribute troops to help fill
the ranks, and by September 6, the Eighth Army in
Korea will receive an additional 229 officers and 2,201
enlisted men.
August 20 The 1st Marine Provisional Brigade
and the U.S. 24th Division, by this date, eradicate a
Communist bridgehead across the Naktong in the
vicinity of Changnyoung southwest of Taegu. Also, the
South Korean Army (through a dispatch) states that
its forces, since August 17, have killed 3,800 North Ko-
reans and captured 181 men. The memorandum also
states that 20 artillery pieces, eleven light mortars,
twenty-one 82-mm mortars and 160 machine guns
have been seized, and more than 550 U.S. M1 rifles
and nearly 400 Japanese rifles have also been captured.
Apparently, during the end of July, after the enemy
had captured more American weapons from ROK
units, the troops of the N.K. 12th Division began ex-
changing their Japanese 99 rifles for U.S. M1s and car-
bines.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Skirmishing contin-
ues between elements of the N.K. 6th Division and the
35th Regiment at Sibidang; a sizable contingent of
North Korean troops, en route to attack the positions
of the 35th Regiment, is observed by Colonel Fisher,
who quickly requests artillery fire and air attacks to
subdue the force. Planes arrive to complement the ar-
tillery and the combined firepower inflicts heavy casu-
alties on the attacking force, slicing it from about 700
to 350 men.
In the 24th Regiment sector, the North Koreans at-
tack the apparently fragile perimeter of the 24th Reg-
iment, instigating more panic as the troops again react
poorly and desert their positions. One platoon of Com-
pany E, except eight troops who stay at their posts, runs
from the enemy. At Company C’s lines, many more
flee, jeopardizing the lives of the commanding officer
and about twenty-five courageous troops who choose
to do their duty and remain in their foxholes. Com-
246
pany C’s small force holds the crest of Battle Moun-
tain, but the deserters cause more harm than the enemy.
When their fleeting descent is complete, rumors,
transmitted as fact, paint a dreary picture as a ration-
alization for the hasty abandonment of the mountain.
It is falsely reported that the positions of Company C
had been overrun, and that its commanding officer had
been killed. Assuming the information received by the
deserters to be true, the supporting artillery of the
159th Field Artillery Battalion and some mortar fire
are called upon to saturate the enemy. To augment this
firepower, air strikes are requested.
Soon after, a bewildered Company C commander
and the 25 troops still holding the grim summit are
lambasteed by a cyclone of friendly fire, including 38
sorties flown by fighter bombers that coat the crest with
crimson napalm, rockets, fragmentation bombs and the
usual punishment by strafing. After holding the con-
tested peak for twenty gruesome hours, the remainder
of C Company is driven from the summit by friendly
fire, prompted by the loose tongues of those who had
run away.
Meanwhile, on the left flank, ROK troops capture a
regimental commander (N.K. 15th Regiment) during
the skirmishing there, and through some fortuitous
luck, he is carrying some valuable documents on his
person. It is impossible to question him because several
minutes after capture, he attempts to flee and is felled
by fire.
The enemy also drives the S.K. police from their po-
sitions at P’il-bong on the regiment’s left flank during
the day’s combat, adding stress to the 24th Division at
Sobuk-san. Colonel Throckmorton receives orders
from General Kean to form an attack force from his
5th RCT for an assault against Sobuk-san on the fol-
lowing day.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The front
keeps a quiet profile during daylight hours; however,
U.S. planes fly repeated sorties to strike the enemy po-
sitions and at times, the pilots create some emotional
minutes. The planes’ machine gun fire skims the
perimeter and sometimes creases the individual unit
identification banners. Some friendly but unwelcome
expended .50-caliber shell cartridges fall into the fox-
holes.
Then, at 1700, the North Koreans commence a bar-
rage of 120-mm mortar fire that strikes in the vicinity
of the heavy weapons company perimeter. Subsequent
to the shelling, enemy tanks, flanked by infantry, ini-
tiate another night attack.
The brightly shining moon contributes nicely to the
U.S. cause. It exposes silhouettes of the enemy armor
as the tanks plow down the shadowy valley, attempting
to continue the advance despite the U.S. artillery and
mortar fire pounding the route. The 27th Regiment re-
strains its riflemen and machine gunners until the enemy
advances to within 150 yards of the night perimeter. At
that point, with little fanfare, the waiting ground troops
fire in unison, frying the area of advance. The combined
thrust of the firepower halts the attack.
 247
The 27th Regiment attempts to get some rest, and
on the morning of the 21st, a strong patrol composed
of two infantry platoons advances to analyze the results
of the night’s action. The patrol, seeing several white
flags to their front, move out with caution. It encoun-
ters some isolated resistance and it receives some in-
coming artillery, but still, it proceeds about one mile up
the road.
Along the route, five crippled enemy tanks, each de-
stroyed by thermite grenades, adorn the highway. Far-
ther up the highway, the troops stumble upon another
destroyed enemy tank that had been abandoned in a
schoolyard. In addition, the patrol discovers many dead
enemy troops, two destroyed self-propelled guns and a
decimated 120-mm mortar.
In other activity, enemy artillery shells Taegu for the
final time. General Walker arrives at the Taegu front
and he seems pleased with the situation, claiming that
the enemy fire has diminished greatly and that Taegu “is
saved.” But the city remains jeopardized, as the enemy
still has not been completely stopped at the Naktong.
Six battalions of South Korean police are brought
into the area to bolster the 750 men already there. The
police are dispersed to guard the strategic tunnels within
the Pusan Perimeter that carry the rail and vehicular
traffic maintaining the city’s bloodline.
In other activity, a Communist using the name Seoul
City Sue has been taking to the airwaves to broadcast
propaganda. Members of the 588th Military Police had
reported hearing her as early as August 10. Also, at
Pusan, the South Korean Army establishes the 2nd Re-
placement Training Center, which will train replace-
ment troops during a ten-day class. The continuing
process eventually graduates about 500 troops each day.
The U.S. divisions begin receiving S.K. recruits on
this day. The infusion continues daily until the latter
part of August, when it drops down to about twice a
week, concluding with each division scheduled to receive
about 8,300 S.K. troops, most of whom receive a total
of five days’ training. The “buddy system” is employed,
encouraging an American soldier to bear responsibility
for training his counterpart, but this doesn’t work too
well. Two regiments of the 25th Division implement
the practice, but the other regiment maintains separate
platoons led by U.S. officers and NCOs.
The 24th Division places the South Koreans in sep-
arate platoons commanded by Korean officers and
NCOs, with the units being attached to U.S. units.
Eventually, it appears that the best utilization of the
South Koreans is for them to be banded as a unit with
U.S. officers. The South Koreans will be engaged in
scouting, patrolling and security missions. Also, as U.S.
replacements become available, the U.S. units begin to
filter out the South Koreans. By winter (1950–1951),
the buddy system vanishes without fanfare.
Also on this day, Eighth Army directs that the 24th
Division be relieved at its positions along the Naktong
by the U.S. 2nd Division. The relief will be completed
by August 24.
At North Korean Front Headquarters in Kumchon, the
August 21, 1950
operational order calling for a major attack by the N.K.
I Corps is issued and the scheduled day for the assault is
August 31. The N.K. II Corps is scheduled to launch its
attack against the perimeter on September 2.
— In Great Britain: The British War Office pro-
claims that Great Britain is immediately dispatching
two complete infantry battalions, presently in Hong
Kong, to the Korean Theater. The contingents embark
for Korea on August 25.
— In Japan: Admiral Joy, with the authorization of
General MacArthur, issues orders establishing Joint
Task Force 7, which will execute the invasion of In-
chon. The task force commander is Admiral Struble
(commander of Seventh Fleet). Basically, it is the Sev-
enth Fleet, modified to extend its authority over all the
armed services. The fleet is composed of six primary
task forces. Other countries’ Navies participate; they
are Australia, Canada, France, Great Britain, Japan,
New Zealand and some merchant vessels.
This unorthodox move to establish a joint task force
places a Naval commander (Struble) over Air Force ac-
tivity or inactivity, thereby ensuring that the Marine
and Naval planes will conduct the operation as they
did during World War II, rather than using the Air
Force’s air-ground support system. The Naval and Ma-
rine planes will be unable to handle the Pusan Perime-
ter due to the Inchon operations. This responsibility
will be handled by the U.S. Air Force.
August 21 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Con-
tingents of the N.K. 6th Division maintain their at-
tempt to collapse the positions of the 35th Regiment,
25th Division, at Sibidang. An attack will be launched
during the early morning hours of the following day.
In the 24th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 5th
RCT (minus Company A), supported by artillery,
launches an attack to secure Sobuk-san and after over-
coming some nominal resistance, the objective is seized
by noon. With the elements of the 5th RCT holding the
summit of Sobuk-san, the enemy reverts to a punish-
ing barrage of menacing mortar fire. Following its loss
of the terrain, the enemy lunges forward with a night
counterattack, which drives the 1st Battalion back from
the mountain. Conversely, the irritated 1st Battalion
regroups and re-initiate its attack on the following day.
In the 24th Division zone, north of the 25th Divi-
sion sector, an attack is launched to retake Battle
Mountain, which Company C had been forced to re-
linquish on the previous day. In another series of mad-
hat incidents, artillery fire and air strikes precede the as-
sault of the 24th Regiment contingents. Despite the
excruciating heat and the obstinate steep slopes, the
challenge is met. Company L conquers the summit of
Battle Mountain by about noon. Nonetheless, the elas-
tic enemy is undaunted and begins to pound the posi-
tions with mortar fire throughout the afternoon. While
Company L is unsuccessfully trying to galvanize its
hold on the summit, some unexpected North Koreans
emerge from their bunkers on the west slope of Battle
Mountain and slip into the perimeter.
August 21, 1950
Without warning, the enemy opens fire and a deadly
grenade is tossed into the foxhole of a platoon leader,
causing pandemonium. The startling sound of the gun-
fire ignites yet another inglorious charge down the
slopes, as the other two platoons self-evict and begin a
descent posthaste, followed soon after by contingents of
E Company. Strong efforts are taken to regroup Com-
panies L and I on the precarious east slopes of Battle
Mountain. The guns of the enemy have reclaimed the
crest with minimal effort. The 2nd Battalion executive
officer, Major Horace Donaho, later attests to the stren-
uous regrouping effort.
A counterattack is then mounted. With the heavy
support of air strikes combined with the firepower of
tanks, artillery and mortar fire, the flip side of the
mountain again erupts in a storm of thunderous fire.
Companies L and I ascend toward the peak, nudging
forward with some progress, but the assault is brought
to a halt at midnight to await dawn.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, at 1300,
General Craig arrives at the Marine brigade’s new quar-
ters outside of Masan, dubbed the “Bean Patch.” Fol-
lowing the establishment of his command post, Craig
reports to General Kean, 25th Division commanding
officer, who has responsibility for the area. The conver-
sation between the two generals includes enemy pene-
tration. General Kean informs Craig that the Marines
might be required to lend support if the enemy makes
additional gains. The conquest of Obong-ni has
drained the already slim numbers of the ground troops.
While General Craig has repeatedly requested rein-
forcement and replacement troops, they have not yet ar-
rived from the States.
While at the Bean Patch, Craig requests volunteers
from other Marine units to fill the gap. Headquarters
personnel, engineers, shore party troops and others —
all having had experience with a rifle — swarm to the
call. More men volunteer than the number required.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 27th
Regiment, anticipating another enemy night attack,
awaits darkness, then places conspicuous rows of mines
about 250 yards in front of the perimeter. The mines,
strewn sloppily and in excellent view of an advancing
enemy, lay atop the earth. But closer to the lines, the
regiment diligently establishes strings of trip flares about
100 yards back and 150 yards to its front, dangling the
flares irregularly across the road and the stream bed to
provide the enemy some illumination. The troops also
trim the area near the trip flares with an abundance of
neatly buried anti-personnel and antitank mines.
The troops of Company C hold forward positions
on the left side of the road while they await the North
Korean armor. As the night winds down, the show is
about to begin. Company C detects the sounds of the
clanking armor, and then informs headquarters and the
artillery sections. While this enemy column drives along
the road, other troops attached to the 1st Regiment,
N.K. 1st Division, avoid the engagement and infiltrate
through the heights, skirting around the left flank of the
27th Regiment.
248
The Communist unit reaches positions about nine
miles outside of Taegu and six miles behind the 27th
Regiment. Within seconds after the enemy column is
detected, a friendly artillery gun catapults an illumi-
nating shell that brightens the sky and underscores the
precise positions and numbers of the armor. A quick
tally by the company commander of Company C iden-
tifies 19 advancing vehicles, including nine T-34 tanks
and several self-propelled guns. Accompanying infantry
drives along both sides of the highway in conjunction
with other enemy contingents that are prowling higher
in the hills to strike against the S.K. units there. As the
enemy continues its advance, U.S. artillery and mortars
pound the route of advance. Of the artillery and mor-
tar participants, Company F expends nearly 400 mor-
tar rounds, while Battery B, 8th Field Artillery Battal-
ion, propels 1,661 105-mm shells during the five-hour
duel in the darkness.
In the meantime, the ground troops sheepishly hold
their fire and the Pershing tanks linger menacingly in
the murky shadows to guarantee no interlude during
the wild shoot-out. The enemy tiptoes through the first
minefield, and effortlessly continues the advance until
the hidden minefield is encountered. Suddenly, as
enemy troops try to dislodge themselves from the death
grid along the road, the regimental machine guns begin
to roar. The devastating enfilade strikes deeply into the
North Korean ranks. Meanwhile, enemy tanks con-
tinue driving forward, moving boldly toward the 27th
Regiment. The enemy tank fire soars through the val-
ley, but most shells land harmlessly behind the U.S. in-
fantry positions.
The sounds of the incessant firing on the slopes and
in the diminutive valley create an eerie aura on the bat-
tlefield, but the enemy armor continues its advance.
Then, as the clanking armor gets too close for comfort,
the stalwart Pershings bead in on the enemy tanks and
unleash their harnessed power. The sudden burst
further stuns the enemy. The lead tank is destroyed
when it reaches a point about 125 yards in front of
the Pershings, and then an agile bazooka team from
Company F quickly takes out the third vehicle in
the column, a self-propelled gun, tossing the column
out of kilter. The second vehicle, itself paralyzed by
bazooka fire, is deserted by its crew. The enfilade con-
tinues as the American tanks and artillerymen pound
the enemy.
The blazing combat transforms the valley into a
shooting gallery. Seven additional enemy tanks are
blown away, as well as three more self-propelled guns,
an array of personnel carriers and some trucks. In the
meantime, while the 27th Regiment is repelling the
enemy along the road, the S.K. 1st Division units fare
well on the slopes, but the enemy pressure continues
to build against the battle-weary ROKs. Nonetheless,
their fierce resistance is a major contribution to the suc-
cess of the U.S. 27th Regiment, for without the South
Koreans protecting the heights, the battle might have
ended differently.
As the din of battle subsides, it becomes apparent
 249 August 21, 1950

Top: U.S. Amy chow line, August 1950. Bottom: A Pershing M-26 provides a ride to ground troops near
the Naktong River.

that the enemy has sustained severe losses. New patrols,
mounted at daylight on the 22nd, confirm the colossal
punishment inflicted upon the N.K. 13th Division el-
ements and the accompanying armor that had entered
the valley. One patrol strolls past the shredded metal and
counts the legions of enemy dead, concluding that they
had sustained about 1,300 total casualties and losing
the entire column of vehicles.
The patrol also seizes eleven prisoners, including
N.K. Major Kim Song Jun, commanding officer, 19th
August 22, 1950
N.K. Regiment. The captured officer informs the
Americans that about seventy-five percent of their force
had been lost and he places some of the blame for the
losses on the N.K. 19th Regiment, accusing it of in-
competence. Other information gained from the offi-
cer centers around the failure of the 19th Regiment to
coordinate its actions with the balance of the division
during the fight.
The commanding general of the 13th Division, re-
fusing to accept any blame on his part, also jumps all
over the commanding officer of the supporting artillery
regiment. The officer, Lt. Col. Chong Pong Uk, doesn’t
take kindly to the criticism and on the following morn-
ing, he detaches himself from the Communist Army
and walks into the perimeter of the S.K. 1st Division,
brandishing a prominent white flag.
The men of the U.S. 27th Regiment’s Company F,
mesmerized at times by the unfolding scenes of battle,
had compared the shells zooming down the valley to
bowling balls streaming down an alley, giving birth to
the name Battle of the Bowling Alley.
In Naval activity, the Valley Forge (CV 45) and
Philippine Sea (CV 47), carriers of Task Force 77,
launch raids against Pyongyang. The planes establish a
new one-day record after executing 202 sorties.
— In Japan: General MacArthur requests authori-
zation from the Department of the Army (by radio) for
permission to activate Headquarters X Corps; subse-
quent to approval, MacArthur activates it on August
26.
August 22 With the initiation of U.S. forces
against the Communist forces, Eighth Army as of this
day has sustained the loss of 20 medium tanks to enemy
fire. But the U.S. has greatly increased the number of
tanks in the Korean Theater. Six medium tank battal-
ions, averaging about 69 tanks each, have debarked at
Korea during August. They join four regimental tank
companies, plus about thirty light tanks in the field,
giving the U.S. a large armored advantage over the
enemy by September.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Prior to dawn, and
lacking artillery and mortar preparatory fire, the North
Koreans launch a large attack against the perimeter of
the 25th Division. The enemy troops sever the barbed
wire and penetrate the 35th Regiment’s 1st Battalion
zone to ignite a grueling close-quartered fight. The as-
sault dislodges some elements of the 1st Battalion, but
subsequent to several hours of bitter combat, at 0700,
Company A counterattacks, and it drives the enemy
back and re-secures the area. On the following day, the
North Koreans, who have sustained heavy casualties
during the futile attempt to overrun the 35th Regi-
ment, retire from the area.
In the 24th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 5th RCT,
which had won and then lost control of Subok-san on
the previous day, mounts an attack at noon to retake
the mountain. After a vicious five-hour contest, Com-
pany B gains the summit, prompting General Kean to
recreate the boundary line separating the 24th Regi-
250
ment and the 5th RCT. Kean gives responsibility for
the captured crest to the 24th Regiment. Afterward, the
5th RCT attempts to regroup, but the enemy mounts
repetitive night attacks and catapults mortar fire against
its positions, preventing Companies A and B from link-
ing together to form a galvanized perimeter.
Also, with the enemy deeply entrenched in the rocky
crags that flow from Sobuk-san northward toward P’il-
bong, the adjacent contingents of the 24th Regiment are
barred from advancing to link up with the 5th RCT’s
Company B, 1st Battalion.
Meanwhile, the up-again-down-again struggle on
Battle Mountain is reinitiated at dawn by elements of the
24th Regiment. Advancing under the cover fire of Com-
pany I, Company L moves out, heading toward the crest
of Old Baldy (Battle Mountain). The attacking unit
makes sluggish progress despite minimal resistance. One
contingent, led by Lieutenant Gerald Alexander, inches
ahead only two hundred yards in one hour, although
no enemy fire interferes with the climb. According to
Alexander, when his group finally reaches its target area,
several enemy grenades are lobbed into its midst, in-
flicting six casualties and prompting the balance of the
contingent to head back down the slope. At a point
about 100 yards to the rear, Alexander orders the troops
to return to their positions, but his orders are brashly dis-
regarded. Not one trooper obeys the order.
Lieutenant Alexander and one BARman ascend by
themselves, and they discover that Battle Mountain’s
crest is unoccupied. Soon after, the balance of the com-
mand arrives. Nonetheless, life at the top is short last-
ing. Within several hours, the enemy, which has re-
coiled on the west slope, sends a small force around the
right flank to probe the strength on the summit. The
maneuver succeeds and gains more than expected as
Company L abandons the summit and withdraws to
the lines of Company I at the base of the mountain.
The struggle for the mountain resumes again on Au-
gust 23.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, the 1st
Battalion, 11th Marines, is ordered to Chindong-ni to
bolster the 25th Division. The brigade receives orders
from Eighth Army to be prepared to launch a counter-
attack in support of the 25th Division; however, this
proves unnecessary. The Marines, while adjusting to
their new environs, dispatch patrols to the rear of the
25th Division to root out infiltrators. These patrols re-
ceive hot meals compliments of the helicopters of
VMO-6. Also, the Marines’ bivouac area lacks tents,
providing the brigade an opportunity to sleep in the
open with an unobstructed view of the stars, when it
isn’t raining.
In other activity, the brigade receives a message from
the Commandant, General Clifton B. Cates: “I am very
proud of the performance of your air-ground team.
Keep on hitting them, front flanks, rear and topside!
Well done!”
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: Following
another hard night of fighting, the 27th Regiment, 25th
Division, sends out patrols and prepares for
 251
another expected assault. Meanwhile, the North Ko-
rean contingents that had previously infiltrated the
27th’s lines take up positions about nine miles north
of Taegu. They begin to harass the main supply route
from there to a point stretching five miles farther north.
The enemy penetration causes some friction between the
27th Regiment and the South Korean 1st Division, as
Colonel Michaelis informs Eighth Army that his left
flank, manned by the South Koreans, had folded and
that the South Koreans were not fighting.
The report infuriates S.K. General Paik, who chal-
lenges the American commander’s statement. Eighth
Army dispatches KMAG officers to verify Michaelis’
insinuations, but upon inspection, all ROK contingents
are in their designated areas. This is subsequently con-
firmed by Brigadier General William C. Bullock, Asst.
G-3, Eighth Army. General Paik suggests that his
troops cover the valley with all the supporting artillery
and tanks and that the 27th Regiment exchanges places
with his troops and takes over the high ground to fight
the North Koreans there. During this particular strug-
gle in the valley and mountains, the South Koreans had
come down from their positions during the day to ac-
quire food or to bathe in the stream, but all made the
return trip to their positions, aided by U.S. artillery as
they fought their way back.
At about 1000, Colonel Chong Pong Uk, com-
manding officer of the N.K. 13th Division Artillery
Regiment, strolls into the lines of the S.K. 1st Division
and surrenders. Chong, the highest ranking officer to
become a captive of the U.S., aids the Americans by
pinpointing the location and number of his old out-
fit’s concealed artillery (seven 122-mm howitzers and
thirteen 76-mm guns). The identified area, an orchard
in a shallow valley less than five miles north of Taegu,
is struck by aircraft and artillery fire.
In other activity, different units of the same group of
North Korean troops who had penetrated the 27th Reg-
iment lines during the previous night now strike the po-
sitions of the 2nd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, which had
deployed to defend the supporting artillery of the 27th
Regiment. North Korean infantry lodge themselves be-
tween the positions of the 23rd and 27th Regiments,
while other contingents circumvent the east flank of the
23rd Regiment’s forward unit, the 2nd Battalion.
At 1605, the enemy commences a heavy bombard-
ment that strikes the 8th Artillery Battalion’s positions
near headquarters. Less than one-half hour later, the
enemy guns score two direct hits on the Fire Direction
Center, wiping out the center and killing four officers
and two noncoms. Lacking further direction from
headquarters, the battalion’s individual batteries control
their own fire. The enemy fire also strikes the 37th
Field Artillery Battalion. At 1640, the 23rd’s regimen-
tal commander, Colonel Paul Freeman, notifies Eighth
Army of the situation. Consequently, U.S. Air Force
and Navy planes, bolstered by Australian aircraft,
swoop in and pound the enemy-held ridge east of the
highway and other suspected enemy positions in a
nearby valley beyond the ridge.
August 22, 1950
After dusk, General Walker detaches the 23rd Reg-
iment (minus 1st Battalion) from the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision, then orders it to destroy the North Koreans in
the hills above the main highway and along the road.
Still obsessed with gaining a victory, the enemy mounts
another night assault, but the attempt is feeble. It is
easily repulsed by the 27th Regiment. In addition, dur-
ing the night, the 2nd Battalion, 23rd Regiment,
throws back several enemy counterattacks. The activ-
ity interrupts preparations for an attack on the morn-
ing of the 23rd, but the 2nd Battalion still moves out
at daybreak.
Inchon vicinity: A contingent of sailors and Marines,
UDT and Marine Amphibious Scouts of the 1st Recon-
naissance Company, 1st Marine Division, secretly lands
in the vicinity of Posung-Myon, about twenty miles
south of Inchon. It collects valuable intelligence on the
landing areas. The reconnaissance team remains there
until the 25th, then returns to the USS Horace A. Bass
(APD-124), which takes the troops back to friendly
lines. The gathered intelligence is handed over to top
brass on August 25. General Shepherd uses the findings
to take one last shot at convincing MacArthur to per-
mit the landing to occur at Posung-Myon. MacArthur
declines the suggestion, holding firm with Inchon.
In Air Force activity, Chinese antiaircraft gunners
across the Yalu River in Manchuria take planes (RB-
29s) on a photographic reconnaissance mission under
fire. The planes are unharmed. It is the first time U.S.
planes come under fire from the Chinese Communists.
— In the United States: The operation to load the
1st Marine Division’s vessels destined for the Far East,
which had begun on August 8, is completed today.
— In Japan: General Oliver P. Smith, 23 officers,
and 12 enlisted men of the 1st Marine Division arrive
at Haneda Airfield; they are met by Admiral Doyle.
Later, Smith is driven to the USS Mount McKinley,
which is docked at Tokyo harbor; the Marines establish
an advance command post on it. General Smith is ad-
vised of the tentative date and hour of the invasion of
Inchon. Up to now, Smith had been unaware of the
details. The entire Inchon operation plan and its exe-
cution are concluded in a record breaking twenty-three
days, a feat that may stand for the rest of time. Actu-
ally, fewer than 23 days remain, as many of the warships
must embark port by September 10.
Also, at 1730, General O.P. Smith meets General
Almond for the first time, and the encounter is educa-
tional for both. The two men emulate mutual respect,
but there is a definite clash between personalities that
will linger for the duration. Subsequent to his confer-
ence with Almond, Smith meets with General
MacArthur in a relaxed atmosphere. MacArthur lights
his pipe and reassures Smith that despite the hazards, the
war could be won at Inchon within thirty days.
MacArthur proclaims that the Marines will prevail at In-
chon and in so doing, they could win the war. Also,
the 1st Marine Division troops and the staff of the 7th
Marines begin arriving on August 28 and complete the
debarkation by September 6.
August 23, 1950
August 23 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: At the
mountain of many names—Battle Mountain, Hill 665,
Old Baldy, Bloody Knob and Napalm Hill — the day
begins with plans to retake the hill. It is an arduous
trek to the summit and the reverse course is equally
awkward, especially for the wounded. In order to get a
wounded trooper back from the slope to the base, it
requires six men to bear the stretcher, a medic to admin-
ister assistance along the way, and frequently, riflemen
become necessary to cover the evacuation and fend off
snipers. Even then, the hours it takes to reach the base
of the mountain causes some of the wounded to suc-
cumb before they can get to medical areas.
Today, the 24th Regiment receives some heavy as-
sistance as the 81-mm mortars and 4.2-inch mortars
hone in on the enemy-held western slopes of the moun-
tain. Meanwhile, Companies L and I launch an attack
that is bolstered by the arrival of South Korean police
reinforcements. The assault succeeds and the combined
force recaptures the crest. Company L gives a report of
its strength on the mountaintop. The report informs
battalion headquarters that Company L now has only
seventeen men in foxholes. Subsequent to its relief, L
Company descends the mountain and about halfway
down the slope, it becomes infused with thirty-one ad-
ditional troops. By morning of the 24th, Company L’s
strength bounces back to more than 100 troops.
Later, the commanding officer of the 3rd Battalion,
24th Regiment, Colonel John T. Corley, gives his tes-
timony concerning the action on Battle Mountain:
“Companies of my battalion dwindle to platoon size
when engaged with the enemy. My chain of command
stops at the company level. If this unit is to continue to
fight as a battalion, it is recommended that the T/O
General O.P. Smith, commanding officer, 1st Marine Division, confers with Admiral Doyle (Amphibi-
ous Group 1) aboard the USS Rochester.
252
(Tables of Organization) of officers be doubled. One of-
ficer must lead and the other must drive.”
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, General
Craig meets with General J. Lawton Collins, chief of
staff, USA, and General Kean, CO, 25th Division.
General Collins requests that Craig prepare a memoran-
dum to detail the Marine strategy used to destroy the
North Korean T-34 (Russian made) tanks.
In other activity, the Marines are treated to an eve-
ning of entertainment, provided by South Korean girls
playing Korean instruments and singing Western songs
with the help of some English speaking refugees from
Seoul University. Following the show, General Craig
speaks to his Marines to relay his great thanks for their
efforts on the battlefield. He notes that POWs of the
N.K. 4th Division had informed G-2 interrogators that
they preferred “to steer clear of the Americans in the
yellow leggings.”
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: At dawn,
acting on orders received from General Walker on the
previous night, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 23rd Reg-
iment, 2nd Division, commence their attacks against
the enemy positions. The 2nd Battalion secures the
heights above the road and the 3rd Battalion combs the
hills east of the road, scouring a three-mile area. The ac-
tivity cleanses the terrain on the flanks and to the rear
of Michaelis’ 27th Regiment, 25th Division. But by
about 1335, Eighth Army is informed by Colonel
Michaelis that the enemy had shattered the highway to
his front and they had laid mines to delay the U.S. 27th
Regiment’s advance while the N.K. 13th Division pulls
back from the area. Nonetheless, many enemy strag-
glers remain behind the U.S. lines, ensuring a heavy
mop up operation.
 253
While the 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, had been
on the offensive, about 100 undiscovered North Korean
troops spring up like weeds behind the forward perime-
ter of the 27th Regiment, igniting a fierce skirmish
slightly before noon. The enemy at first startles the de-
fenders from Company K, 27th Regiment, and the 1st
Platoon of Company C, 65th Engineer Combat Battal-
ion. Initially, some contingents are pushed back; how-
ever, the troops exhibit resiliency and bounce back with
fervor to deliver a jackhammer punch. The enemy scat-
ters, but it sustains fifty killed during the failed attack.
In other activity, the Fifth Air Force has continued
to increase its numbers of Mosquito T-6 aircraft and by
this day, twenty-nine aircraft are operating as coordi-
nators in conjunction with the air strikes.
In other activity, Russian T-34 tanks arrive at P’y-
ongyang on or about this day to fill the needs of the
16th and 17th N.K. Armored Brigades; the former re-
ceives forty-three new tanks and the latter, forty. The
enemy brigades depart the town by rail during the night
to join the other elements facing the Pusan Perimeter.
These tanks have been manufactured in Russia and
shipped into Korea by way of Manchuria. These newly
arriving tanks are instantly manned by experienced
crews. Each brigade is divided into two battalions, with
each battalion being subdivided into four separate tank
companies. In Air Force activity, planes attached to the
19th Bomber Group, using antiquated equipment
(Razon), attack enemy positions west of P’yongyang,
but for the most part, the equipment fails to properly
guide the bombs. However, one of the bombs does
strike the target, a railroad bridge.
— In the United States: Replacement Marines,
composed of ten officers and 300 enlisted men, bound
for the 1st Provisional Brigade in Korea, depart bases
in Hawaii and Guam by airlift. These Marines are re-
placed by identical numbers of non-combat Marines
whom are flown from Camp Pendleton. In conjunction,
Fleet Marine Force Pacific, on two separate occasions,
repeats the process and airlifts additional Marines (20
officers and 590 enlisted men) to Korea as replace-
ments for the Marine Brigade and to form third com-
panies of the 5th Marines’ Battalions.
— In Japan: The Far East Command, endeavoring
to bring the 7th Division up to strength for commit-
ment to Korea, begins attaching all arriving infantry
replacement troops (for FEC duty) to the division.
This practice continues until September 3. In addi-
tion, from this day until September 8, all replacement
artillery troops are also attached to the 7th Division.
Similarly, General MacArthur uses the identical strat-
egy to acquire troops for X Corps. MacArthur siphons
arriving Eighth Army replacement troops and places
them in X Corps to further augment the Inchon Op-
eration.
In other activity, Major General Clark L. Ruffner,
USA, conducts a staff meeting in Tokyo. Ruffner, chief
of staff of the upcoming X Corps, mentions during the
meeting that subsequent to the capture of Inchon, the
1st Marine Division is to ford the Han River and seize
August 24, 1950
Seoul. General Smith, USMC, is in attendance and he
is surprised to hear the information, considering that the
X Corps lacks the necessary equipment and material
to bridge the Han River. Later at another meeting with
General MacArthur and other top ranking U.S. officers,
it becomes obvious that MacArthur will prevail and
Inchon will remain the objective. Nevertheless, Admi-
ral Doyle makes a final attempt to emphasize all the
dangers involved with Inchon. His presentation con-
sumes about one and one-half hours, and he concludes
his remarks by addressing MacArthur with this: “The
best I can say is that Inchon is not impossible.”
MacArthur, having listened to all the reasons for
choosing an alternate to Inchon, begins to dominate
the meeting. He speaks for about forty-five minutes
and explains why the target must be Inchon. On occa-
sion, he pauses to enjoy his pipe. MacArthur concludes
his presentation with a profound sentence that sum-
marizes his vision: “We shall land at Inchon and I shall
crush them.” The final sentence of the last meeting
concerning the invasion of Inchon is intended to be a
prophecy. Now it is up to the Marines.
Generals Almond, Collins, Stratemeyer, Hickey and
Edwin Wright are in attendance. Also, Admirals Doyle,
Joy, Radford, and Struble and Marine Generals Lemuel
Shepherd and O.P. Smith attend the briefing.
August 24 Major General Pang Ho San, com-
manding general, N.K. 6th Division, issues a directive in-
tended to further accelerate the morale of his troops. He
proclaims that the division’s mission is to “liberate Masan
and Pusan within a few days.” He then emphasizes the
battle lessons learned, particularly from the Chinju fight-
ing. He also makes it clear that all attacks should be com-
menced after dark, with daylight hours being utilized
for preparation. Pang also states that prior to dawn, the
troops should fight only at close quarters to ensure that
at dawn the U.S. aircraft could not distinguish friend
from foe, thereby preventing excessive North Korean ca-
sualties. The N.K. 6th Division will participate in the
major offensive scheduled to begin in September.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: The U.S. 2nd Divi-
sion, commanded by Major General Lawrence Keiser,
concludes its relief of General Church’s 24th Division.
Keiser assumes responsibility for the area at 1800. The
weary 24th Division has been zapped of a great deal of
its strength, which now stands at about 10,500 troops.
It will requires about 8,000 replacement troops to bring
about a genuine war-time strength for the 24th Divi-
sion. Also, the 24th Division’s 19th Regiment and the
11th Field Artillery Battalion are enjoined with the 2nd
Division for use as a reserve unit.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The front
remains basically quiet throughout the day as the N.K.
13th Division recoils. However, the American and
South Korean troops maintain an aggressive defense
posture and continue to clean out the enemy from their
concealed positions behind the lines. The Americans
suffer casualties as an Eighth Army tank recovery team
advances to an area that had been mined, in an effort
August 25, 1950
to recover a deserted but operational enemy T-34 tank.
The coveted tank stalls at the beginning of the mine-
field. As the U.S. tank tows the T-34 forward, a sud-
den and unexpected explosion occurs. The T-34 had
been stopped over an area where mines had been tossed
under some lightly packed dirt. When the tank is pulled
forward, a mine detonates, wounding twelve troops
who are standing in the immediate area and heavily
damaging the tank.
In other activity, the N.K. 13th Division and the 1st
Regiment, N.K. 1st Division, each sustain severe losses,
the latter having been reduced to about 400 troops dur-
ing the fighting. General Walker is convinced that the
area north of Taegu has been wrested from the enemy,
thus preserving the city. Consequently, the 27th Reg-
iment receives orders to depart the valley and redeploy
at Masan (once relieved by the S.K. 1st Division) with
its parent 25th Division to bolster Eighth Army’s south-
western flank.
— In the United States: Marine Air Squadron
VMF-312 and the rear echelon of VMF(N)-542 em-
bark aboard the USS Sitkoh Bay. The Marines and their
planes sail from the West Coast for the Far East. Other
units of the 1st Marine Air Wing based at El Toro de-
part on August 27, and the final contingents depart on
September 1.
— In Japan: Admiral Joy dispatches a memorandum
to General MacArthur in an attempt to alter the prior-
ity of the carriers at sea and have their power concen-
trated where it can be most constructive: “North Korea
contains a multiplicity of very lucrative and profitable
targets which are well suited for carrier strikes, whereas,
in [South Korea], targets are few and well hidden. After
25 August, I strongly recommend that Task Force 77 be
employed north of the 38th parallel.”
Nevertheless, on the following day, another urgent
call for naval assistance is requested by Fifth Air Force
to strike south of the boundary. In other activity, Japan
Logistical Command ( JLC) is established by General
MacArthur. It will relieve Eighth Army Rear of its re-
sponsibilities with regard to camps, posts and stations.
The new organization will also bear responsibility for
the logistical support of the ground forces operating in
Korea. Some specific units, such as the Marines, will be
exempted from this command.
August 25 Intelligence determines that the North
Koreans are preparing to launch a major offensive to
cross the Naktong River and crush the Naktong de-
fense perimeter. Fifth Air Force flashes an imperative re-
quest calling for additional U. S. Navy close air strikes
to disrupt the enemy’s timetable.
General Dean, who had been separated from his
command during the battle at Taejon during the pre-
vious month, is captured on this day while in a house
with about fifteen Koreans. The North Koreans main-
tain secrecy with Dean’s imprisonment and he is not
transferred even to the Chinese. At one point during the
war, Dean is the only American held by the North Ko-
reans, all others having been handed over to Chinese.
254
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: Task Force Baker —
commanded by Lt. Colonel George R. Cole and
composed of Company C, one platoon of Company
E, 24th Regiment, 25th Division, and a contingent of
South Korean police—continues to hold Battle Moun-
tain since its recapture on the 23rd. Beginning today and
continuing to August 26, the enemy mounts several
unsuccessful attacks to dislodge the defenders, who re-
ceive some steady support from planes. In one instance,
an exposed enemy contingent comprising about 100
troops is spotted as it advances along a spinal ridge of
Battle Mountain that stretches from Tundok on the
western slope area. A detachment of Air Force planes at-
tack the column and deliver a deluge of fire, including
napalm bombs. The criss-cross strafing decimates the
enemy force, permitting very few to escape the fury.
While Task Force Baker assumes responsibility for
Battle Mountain, the 3rd Battalion (minus Company
C), 24th Regiment, relieves the 1st Battalion at its po-
sitions in the Battle Mountain–P’il-bong vicinity.
Meanwhile, the battle remains heated in the zone of
the 5th RCT. Company C is struck by a determined
force just before midnight (25th-26th). Sergeant
Melvin Handrich moves from his entrenched position
and takes a defensive position way out front to direct the
mortar and artillery fire. Handrich, despite lack of
sleep, remains at this dangerous post for eight hours to
attempt to halt the enemy force, composed of about
150 troops. The North Koreans reinitiate the attack on
the morning of the 26th, and again they encounter the
indomitable Sergeant Handrich, who refuses to budge.
During the pinnacle of the attack, Handrich is sud-
denly standing in full view of the enemy while he fires
his weapon and simultaneously directs the artillery and
mortars.
While glancing back toward his company, he notices
some men of Company C giving the appearance of
abandoning their positions. Instinctively, Handrich
dashes through the storm of enemy fire and prevents a
stampede; however, while he is leading his men and
inspiring them to continue the fight, enemy fire rips
into him and inflicts a serious wound. Undaunted, he
disregards medical attention, restores calm within the
unit, and moves back to the point to resume his one-
man forward outpost position. Handrich’s position is
later overrun and he becomes mortally wounded. When
the ground is later re-secured, about seventy enemy
dead are discovered in the vicinity of Handrich’s post.
He is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for
his extraordinary courage in the face of the enemy.
In the 2nd Division sector, north of the 25th Divi-
sion, Colonel John G. Hill, commanding officer 9th
Regiment, decides to launch a combat patrol based on
intelligence gathered from recent forays to the west side
of the Naktong River. The operation, undertaken by
one company, is coded Operation MANCHU. Its purpose
is to destroy the command post of the N.K. 9th Divi-
sion, which is located about two miles west of the Nak-
tong. Actually, Task Force Manchu has come about by
Eighth Army’s directives to all units to begin active
 255
patrolling. The operation will commence on August
31.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The per-
sistent North Koreans let midnight (24th-25th) pass
quietly, but soon afterward, the Bowling Alley again
comes alive with its usual enemy night attack. The
somber valley becomes consumed with unfurled fury.
Several tanks, acting as vanguard, roll forward, flanked
by about two companies of infantry, but the small col-
umn and the accompanying ground troops lack the
power to penetrate the 27th Regiment’s defenses. The
supporting U.S. artillery, upon orders, commences fir-
ing along with the 27th Regiment. The ravaging bar-
rage is ill-received by the advancing enemy. The attack
is stopped in its tracks and the North Koreans lose two
more T-34s, bringing their total tank losses during the
fighting in the valley (18th-25th) to thirteen. For the
enemy, the Bowling Alley is a harrowing experience
that also costs them five self-propelled guns and eight-
een trucks.
At 1800, the 27th Regiment’s relief by the S.K. 1st
Division begins, and by 0345 on the following morn-
ing, the operation is complete.
The 27th Regiment departs the vicinity of Taegu at
0800 on the 26th. Some contingents move by train and
others are transported overland by vehicles. Nonethe-
less, the relief of the 27th Regiment is not totally un-
eventful. As the operation begins, enemy fire kills the
2nd Battalion’s S-3 officer and a South Korean battal-
ion commander. When Colonel Check’s 1st Battalion
and Colonel Murch’s 2nd Battalion arrive at Masan, it
becomes clear that their reputation for being tenacious
fighters in the Bowling Alley has preceded them. The
final contingents arrive by 2030, on August 31. The
2nd and 3rd Battalions of the U.S. 23rd Regiment re-
main at the Bowling Alley north of Taegu to augment
the S.K. 1st Division.
In its entirety, the battle for the Bowling Alley had
been a well-coordinated affair. The S.K. 1st Division
fought courageously and successfully defended the high
ground, tilting the advantage to the U.S. troops in the
valley. The Air Force also contributed some stupendous
performances and kept the enemy tightly fastened to the
earth during the daylight hours. And after dark, the
awesome tanks, the snorting guns of the artillery and
the heavy breathing mortars had supported the 23rd
and 27th Regiments, which had steadily held the lanes
in the giant Bowling Alley in the valley.
— In the United States: Two transport vessels, car-
rying the 65th Regiment, 3rd Infantry Division, em-
barks from Puerto Rico for Korea. The convoy will ar-
rive off Korea on September 22 and the troops will
debark on the 23rd. The other two regiments, the 7th
and the 15th, will embark from the States beginning
on August 30.
— In Hong Kong: The British 27th Infantry Brigade
Headquarters, the 1st Battalion of the Argyll and
Sutherland Highlanders Regiment, and the 1st Battal-
ion of the Middlesex Regiment, commanded by British
Brigadier Basil A. Coad, board ship to the music of
August 26, 1950
their traditional bagpipes, then depart for Korea aboard
five vessels, including the carrier HMS Unicorn. The
convoy arrives at Pusan on 29 August.
— In Japan: Admiral Struble, commanding officer,
Joint Task Force Seven, has been at sea during the var-
ious conferences in Tokyo, but he returns to Sasebo
this day to learn that he will command the Inchon in-
vasion. Struble quickly gathers some of his staff from the
USS Rochester, and then they depart by plane for Tokyo
to oversee the final planning for the invasion.
August 26 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the
5th RCT zone, south of P’il-bong, fighting remains
heavy.
In other activity, the U.S. 24th Division makes some
further adjustments after a meeting between Generals
Walker and Church. The troops of the 34th Regiment
and their equipment are divided between the 19th and
21st Regiments, the former having already been at-
tached to the 2nd Division. The 34th Regiment re-
mains on the 2nd Division roster, but only on paper,
and the status of the 63rd FAB becomes identical, as its
complement is transferred and infused into the newly
established Batteries C of the 11th, 13th and 52nd
Field Artillery Battalions. The artillery transfers occur
effective this day, while the infantry transfer becomes ef-
fective August 31.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The U.S. 1st
Cavalry Division receives three battalions (from the
U.S.), bringing each regiment to three battalions and all
at full strength. The 3rd Battalion, 7th Regiment, 3rd
Infantry Division (Fort Devens, Mass.), becomes the
3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, commanded by Lt. Colo-
nel Harold K. Johnson. The 2nd Battalion, 30th
Regiment, 3rd Division (Fort Benning, Georgia), is
transformed into the 3rd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel James H. Lynch.
An additional battalion, raised from the 14th Regi-
ment (Camp Carson, Colorado), becomes the 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Cavalry, commanded by Lt. Colonel Edgar
Treacy. In addition, three provisional artillery batteries
arrive to provide a third battery for each artillery bat-
talion of the 1st Cavalry Division.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, chief of the
United Nations Command, makes some additional
changes within his military organizations. The U.S. Far
East Air Forces and the U.S. Naval Forces Far East are
officially attached to the United Nations Command.
In other activity, MacArthur issues GHC FEC Gen-
eral Order 24, officially activating X Corps (Eighth
Army). In conjunction, all units presently in Japan and
those en route, including the 1st Marine Division, are
designated X Corps reserve. MacArthur, having pre-
viously selected General Almond (apparently during
mid–August) to command X Corps, makes it official on
this day. General Almond also is to retain his position
as chief of staff (FEC), primarily because MacArthur an-
ticipates a startling quick victory subsequent to the in-
vasion of Inchon, and he foresees a speedy return by
Almond to his previous position.
August 27, 1950
The Joint Chiefs of Staff do not share MacArthur’s
enthusiasm nor his confidence concerning the Inchon
operation. The designated X Corps’ chief of staff is
Major General Clark L. Ruffner, who during World
War II was chief of staff, U.S. Army Forces, Pacific
Ocean Areas, headquartered in Hawaii. The primary
components (ground troops) of the X Corps are the 1st
Marine Division and the U.S. 7th Infantry Division, the
former en route and the latter being brought to wartime
strength in Japan. Almond expresses surprise with
MacArthur’s selection.
In Air Force activity, the 47th and 48th Troop Car-
rier Squadrons (Provisional) are established by Fifth Air
Force. The planes (C-46s) are pulled into Japan from all
across the Far East. From the base at Tachikawa, the
aircraft will focus on airlifts for the upcoming offensive
in Korea. Also, Far East Air Forces forms the 1st Troop
Carrier Task Force (Provisional), which becomes a pri-
mary part of the recently established Combat Cargo
Command (Provisional).
The task force will operate from the base at Ashiya
and it will be commanded by Major General William
H. Tunner, USAF, who brings an enormous amount of
experience to the outfit; in World War II he was known
as the designer of the airlift over the “Hump” and after-
wards, the Berlin Airlift during the early days of the
Cold War (1948–1949).
August 27 In Air Force activity, Far East Air
Forces, determined to discover a solution to the ongo-
ing problem of knocking out the two pontoon bridges
over the Han River at Seoul, deploy a new and success-
ful tactic. Orders are given to Bombing Command to
drop delayed action bombs at the spans to cause sudden
and unexpected havoc when they detonate after dark,
while the enemy troops are busily engaged in repairing
the bridges. The effectiveness of these raids is evident
and they apparently cause casualties among the repair
teams to soar. When the city of Seoul is recaptured dur-
ing September, the two spans are still uncompleted.
In other activity, two pilots flying USAF Mustangs ex-
ecute a mission to attack an airstrip near Sinuiju; how-
ever, the planes inadvertently stray into China and strike
an airfield there. In yet other activity, 24 B-29s bomb
an enemy iron and steel facility in the vicinity of Ky-
omipo.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, the 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, commanded
by Colonel Corley, completes its relief of the 1st Battal-
ion at P’il-bong on Battle Mountain. In the meantime,
Task Force Baker maintains the security of the crest of
Battle Mountain.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector near
Masan, the Marines receive no liberty while at the Bean
Patch, but their morale remains very good. Their spir-
its are raised by mail from home and from some beer ra-
tions that arrive from Pusan. A generous offer of brew-
eries in the States to supply free beer to the troops in
Korea erupts into a sea of controversy between groups
with opposing views on the subject, none of whom are
256
fighting in Korea. Nonetheless, the free beer soon
ceases.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The boundary
line between the 1st Cavalry and ROK units is being
shifted by General Walker, who is convinced that the
present line in the vicinity of the Sangju-Taegu Road
is militarily unsound. The new line tilts southeast be-
ginning at a point two miles southeast of Ka-san and ex-
tending below and east of Taegu. The revamping of the
boundary line gives the 1st Cavalry Division responsi-
bility for the Sangju-Taegu Road and the previous po-
sitions of the S.K. 1st Division. In conjunction, the
eastward movement of the 1st Cavalry is compensated
by the U.S. 2nd Division, which now extends north to
the 1st Cavalry sector.
In other activity, the North Korean II Corps makes
preparations to spring its attack on September 2, but the
N.K. 12th Division, still mending from the mauling it
took in the vicinity of Pohang-dong and Kigye,
launches an attack against the ROK Capital Division,
ending speculation that the enemy had been subdued
in its area.
At 0400, the S.K. 17th Regiment, deployed north
of Kigye, is hit unexpectedly and hard, forcing one
company to fall back. The enemy thrust then forces
the entire 17th Regiment to give ground. The 18th
Regiment, to the right, loses the protection on its flank
and also pulls back. The 17th Regiment relinquishes
Kigye to the enemy, and the Capital Division is then
compelled to retire to positions about three miles south
of the Kigye Valley.
The unfolding development in the Capital Division
zone creates major problems for Eighth Army, and the
rapidity of the surrender of ground imperils the entire
Pusan Perimeter. General Walker orders the 24th Di-
vision to rush a regiment to the trouble zone and he
also directs Major General John B. Coulter (recently
arrived in Korea) to head for the area to collect accu-
rate information. Coulter and his chief of staff, Colo-
nel Andrew Tychsen, immediately depart by air for Ky-
ongju.
In the meantime, Walker appoints Coulter as deputy
commander, Eighth Army, and instructs him to assume
command of the S.K. I Corps, the U.S. 21st Regiment,
the 3rd Battalion, 9th Regiment and the 73rd Medium
Tank Battalion (minus Company C). These various
units under General Coulter become Task Force Jack-
son.
Under Coulter’s command, there will be no inter-
lude. A flurry of activity begins during the anxious
morning of the 27th. The 21st Regiment under Colo-
nel Stephens is stopped en route to positions north of
Taegu, and it is ordered by General Walker to reverse
directions and speed to Kyongju. Stephens turns the
regiment and it departs Taegu by 1000, and arrives at
its destination during the afternoon. The 3rd Battal-
ion, 21st Regiment, is immediately ordered to move
north to An’gang-ni and deploy to the rear of the S.K.
Capital Division. The 2nd Battalion will arrive on Au-
gust 31 and be placed in TF reserve at An’gang-ni.
 257
General Coulter plans to launch an attack on the
following day. In the meantime, the North Koreans
dislodge the S.K. 17th Regiment from its positions on
a ridge north of the curve of the Kigye Valley during a
successful night attack. The South Koreans retake the
ground on the following afternoon (28th), only to lose
it again after dark. Simultaneously, the N.K. 5th Divi-
sion infiltrates the lines of the S.K. 3rd Division south-
west of Pohang-dong.
A contingent of twelve Marines arrives in Saigon,
South Vietnam, from Seoul, Korea, to protect the
American legation there and other American interests.
— In the United States: The USS Cape Esperance
leaves the West Coast and steams toward the Far East,
transporting units of the 1st Marine Air Wing, VMF-
212 and VMF(N)-542.
August 28 Fifth Air Force B-29s lambaste
Songjin, an industrial area of metal working factories in
North Korea.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, 24th Regiment zone, a North Korean contingent
composed of about two companies launches an early
morning attack that penetrates between the positions of
Company C, posted on Old Baldy, and Company I,
3rd Battalion, at its positions on Battle Mountain.
Then, after dusk, the enemy begins popping mortar
fire into the perimeter of C Company, some of it appar-
ently well-aimed toward the command post to fray
some nerves. A detachment of enemy troops maneuvers
to the rear of the company and attacks at 0245 (29th),
overwhelming the defenders and seizing the command
post of Company C on Old Baldy. Some of the troops
desert their positions, igniting another crisis for the de-
fenders who remain to fight.
During the unfolding skirmish, the enemy sends
some of its troops toward Company E’s positions, dis-
lodging some of these defenders; however, the Air Force
arrives after daybreak and lends some strong assistance
to the beleaguered troops who attempt to forestall de-
feat of their diminished command.
On the enemy side (west) of the Naktong, N.K.
General Pak Kyo Sam, commanding officer, N.K. 9th
Division, issues an operational order to his troops that
pertains to their participation in the upcoming general
offensive. It directs them “to outflank and destroy the
enemy by capturing the Miryang and Samnangjin in
areas, thereby cutting off his [Eighth Army] route of
withdrawal between Taegu and Pusan.” The attack of
the N.K. 9th Division, scheduled to commence the
night of August 31–September 1, is expected to strike
the U.S. 24th Division, but apparently the enemy fails
to discover that on the eve of the offensive, the 24th
Division is relieved at the Naktong by the U.S. 2nd Di-
vision.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The pre-
vious floods of enemy units banging against Eighth
Army positions along the Pusan Perimeter have often
forced the splintering of divisional contingents. Now
the desperate rushing of key units to plug gaps or re-
August 28, 1950
inforce beleaguered elements of other divisions hap-
pens less often. This permits Eighth Army to attempt
retrieval of the scattered units to reattach them with
their parent units. On this day, the 23rd Regiment is di-
rected to depart the Taegu vicinity and head back to
Miryang along the southwestern perimeter to rejoin its
parent 2nd Division. Two days later, on August 30, the
27th Regiment is directed to return to Masan to rejoin
its 25th Division.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The 7th and
8th Cavalry Regiments, 1st Cavalry Division, are di-
rected by General Gay to deploy north of Taegu in the
mountains in the sector that has been guarded by the
S.K. 1st Division. The 7th and 8th Cavalry Regiments
deploy in the west and east sectors respectively. The re-
deployment of the involved units will be concluded by
August 30.
In the Pohang-dong–Kigye area, General Coulter,
with headquarters at Kyongju, is forced to postpone
the attack of Task Force Jackson against the N.K. 12th
Division because the South Korean contingent is unpre-
pared. The ROK commander of the S.K. I Corps in-
forms Coulter that his troops cannot launch their part
of the attack due to “too many enemy, too many casu-
alties, troops too tired.”
Meanwhile, Colonel Emmerich, KMAG advisor,
aware that the N.K. 5th Division is encroaching the
positions of the S.K. 3rd Division at Pohang-dong, in-
forms General Kim Suk Won that he should order his
S.K. 3rd Division to commence a counterattack, but
General Kim rejects the idea.
— In Japan: General MacArthur receives a dispatch
from the Joint Chiefs of Staff concerning the invasion
of Inchon. The message gives their approval, with re-
strictions, such as mentioning an amphibious invasion
either at Inchon, assuming the defenses are weak there,
or at another beach south of Inchon if one can be
found. The message continues, using Kunsan as a pos-
sible landing area. Nevertheless, MacArthur remains
intent on striking Inchon. The joint chiefs expect a re-
sponse from MacArthur, but it is not forthcoming.
They send another dispatch September 5 that presses
him for a reply.
In other activity, X Corps Intelligence section cal-
culates that Seoul is defended by about 5,000 troops
and Inchon by about 1,000. In addition, the estimate
of enemy troops at Kimpo Airfield is about 500. Dur-
ing the first week of September, intelligence estimates
of enemy troops in the Seoul-Inchon area remain sim-
ilar, except that soldiers are swung from Seoul to In-
chon, building the forces there and reducing the
strength at Seoul. Subsequent information, gathered
by X Corps G-2, keeps the estimates of enemy defend-
ers at the same levels right up to D-Day.
X Corps deduces that the enemy’s ability to quickly
reinforce the target area is minimum; however, several
other factors enter the equation. Enemy movement
traveling south from Manchuria has been detected from
the air, but the surveillance has not determined whether
it is supplies or reinforcements. It has been documented
August 29, 1950
Chow line on the front lines, 28 August. One soldier intends to eat in the shade.
that the Chinese Communists have bolstered their
troops along the Manchurian border; however, there
is no proof that the Chinese have begun to move across
it.
Another concern of Far East Command is the pos-
sibility that the forces mounted against the Pusan
Perimeter might be diverted and thrown into the Inchon
area. One thing favoring the landing at Inchon is the
fact that the North Korean Navy is essentially extinct,
except for five divisions of patrol vessels, four of which
258
are corralled on the east coast at Wonsan and the final
unit at Chinnamp’o on the west coast, which also is
penned up tightly. The North Korean Air Force, esti-
mated to contain about nineteen antiquated Russian
planes, also poses no threat to the massive fleet. And,
between this day and D-Day, the Allied aircraft continue
to pound suspected N.K. airfields.
August 29 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In
the 25th Division sector at Battle Mountain, isolated
 259
Company C receives some strong artillery fire support
that pounds the enemy positions and keeps reinforce-
ments from reaching the crest and overrunning the be-
leaguered contingent on Old Baldy. In addition, while
the artillery delivers sheets of fire to keep the enemy
advance stalled, planes dispense immense amounts of
fire to help thwart the North Koreans. The planes also
deliver ammunition and supplies to C Company. The
North Korean contingents, which had seized the posi-
tions of Company E during the night of the 28th-29th,
are hit by incessant barrages throughout the day. After
dark, Company E commences a counterattack that re-
captures the ground it had surrendered earlier.
However, the enemy is not ready to quit. At about
2300, the North Koreans mount a night counterattack
against Company C, 24th Regiment which easily pen-
etrates the left flank. Troops manning the flank bolt
from their foxholes and begin to sprint, yelling as they
run: “They have broken through.” Only seventeen
troops, including several wounded, remain at the com-
mand post with Captain Corcoran, but they lack the
strength and numbers to retake the crest, which the
North Koreans have again reclaimed.
After sunrise on the 30th, the Air Force is back on the
scene to once again inundate Battle Mountain with fire.
The charred crest is also blitzed by a steady stream of
artillery, mortar and tank fire, and the powerful com-
bination apparently does the trick. A wounded trooper
makes his way down the mountain and informs head-
quarters that the bulk of the enemy has evacuated the
crest and taken refuge west of the summit on some
wooded ridges to better conceal themselves.
Soon after, at 1100, another counterattack is
mounted by Company B, which jumps off under cover
fire. The attack is brisk and the crest is retaken within
two hours. Later Captain Corcoran gives testimony
that fire discipline in his command was very poor. Cor-
coran adds that his troops “would fire at targets out of
range until they had exhausted their ammunition and
at night would fire when there were no targets.” Within
his entire Company C, Corcoran counted twenty-five
as soldiers and said that those twenty-five carried the re-
mainder of the company.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, eighty-
seven Marines receive Purple Hearts at a ceremony at-
tended by S.K. President Syngman Rhee. After the cer-
emony, Rhee speaks to the troops, offering his thanks
and congratulations for their actions. Also, Rhee in-
forms General Craig that he would like to present an
award to every man in the Marine brigade. Later, the
brigade receives an S.K. Presidential Unit citation.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 1st
Cavalry Division takes responsibility for the S.K. 1st
Division zone north of Taegu. The I&R Platoon is dis-
patched to the crest of Hill 902, known as Ka-san, a
walled city; however, the fortress is not really walled.
The I&R Platoon reaches the top and encounters 156
S.K. troops.
General Gay has attempted to get the area released
from his authority, claiming that the 1st Cavalry is al-
August 29, 1950
ready too extended across a 35-mile front. The ques-
tion concerning responsibility will become moot in sev-
eral days, after the enemy seizes the hill.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The 3rd Bat-
talion, 23rd Regiment, moves into the southern zone of
the 1st Cavalry Division, relieving the 7th Cavalry,
which then relieves the S.K. 13th Regiment and some
elements of the S.K. 12th Regiment at their positions
east of the Sangju-Taegu Road. In conjunction, the 3rd
Battalion, 23rd Regiment, which Eighth Army attaches
to the 1st Cavalry Division, assumes responsibility for
the vacated positions of the 7th Cavalry. A plan to push
the U.S. 2nd Division farther to the north is scrapped
because of the difficulty of bringing in supplies, thereby
keeping the boundary between it and the 1st Cavalry
Division at its present location.
In other activity, S.K. General Kim Suk Won, be-
cause of the approaching N.K. 5th Division, informs
Colonel Emmerich that he is moving the headquarters
of the S.K. 3rd Division out of Pohang-dong, only to
be told by Emmerich that the KMAG advisors will re-
main. General Kim Suk Won then counteracts his order
and the general also remains.
In related activity, General Coulter had ordered Col-
onel Stephens to commit a contingent of his 21st Reg-
iment to intercept and destroy the enemy force that
had infiltrated the S.K. 3rd Division area. Stephens
dispatches Company B, 21st Regiment, and one platoon
of tanks (73rd Medium Tank Battalion). The tanks
and infantry bolt from the southwest fringe of Pohang-
dong and drive northwest, advancing about one and
one-half miles. Trailing South Korean troops occupy
the gained ground, and the U.S. contingent returns to
the town. Later, during the night, the South Koreans
retire, compelling the Americans to again advance on
the 30th.
In other activity, the S.K. Capital Division, aug-
mented by U.S. artillery fire and American tanks, at-
tacks and seizes Kigye, then repulses several counterat-
tacks to hold control of the town until the morning of
the 30th, when the enemy initiates another attack and
retakes it. The U.S. escalates its air attacks in the vicin-
ity of Kigye, and U.S. naval surface vessels pound
enemy positions near Hunghae. One cruiser and two
destroyers sling a steady stream of fire into the area
about five miles north of Pohang-dong, where the N.K.
5th Division is forming for its attack. The naval surface
fire, in support of the S.K. 3rd Division, propels about
1,500 5-inch shells toward Hunghae between this day
and August 30.
In other activity, in response to a request from Gen-
eral MacArthur, KMAG is detached from the Depart-
ment of the Army and attached to Far East Command.
— In the United States: In response to a recent sug-
gestion by Congressman Gordon L. McDonough that
the commandant of the Marine Corps be appointed as
a member of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. President Truman
fires back a letter stating that the Marines are only “the
Navy’s police force.” Truman tosses another zinger:
“They have a propaganda machine that is almost equal
August 30, 1950
to Stalin’s.” Within a week, the nasty sentiments become
public and an embarrassed President Truman apolo-
gizes.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, unable to attend
the National Convention of the Veterans of Foreign
Wars due to what has presently been termed “a police
action,” sends a message to the attending members: “I
am happy to report [to his fellow troops during former
wars] that their successors now engaging the enemy
along our battle lines in Korea are exemplifying that
same high standard of high devotion, fortitude and
valor, which characterized their own march to victory
when they themselves engaged in combat in the field ...
toward victory, however difficult the road, they are giv-
ing an account of themselves which should make every
American heart beat with pride and infinite satisfac-
tion.”
MacArthur also frames some choice words to con-
vince the VFW members to hold the torch to ensure
that defeatism at home cannot overcome the valor of the
cause, thereby endangering the United States: “To pur-
sue any other course would be to turn over the fruits of
our Pacific victory to a potential enemy. It would shift
any future battle area 5,000 miles eastward to the coasts
of the American continent, our own home coast. It
would completely expose ourselves and our homes and
friends to the lustful thrusts of those who stand for slav-
ery against liberty, for atheism as against God.”
In other activity, the 1st Marine Division begins
landing at Kobe and completes the debarkation on Sep-
tember 3. Sleeping quarters are crammed, but two
transport vessels are used as floating barracks. This pro-
vides a lucrative labor force of Marines to handle the
cargo.
August 30 In Air Force activity, eight Air Force
Fighter Squadrons are flying support missions over
Korea, about the maximum number that can be sup-
ported by the airbases in Kyushu, Japan. The divisions,
operating along the Pusan Perimeter during the month
of August, each receive equal proportions of planes,
about forty sorties per day. One distinctive and distin-
guished airman, Major Dean E. Hess, seemingly spends
more time in the air than on the ground. Hess has
the unique position of being an instructor for South
Korean pilots and he acquires the reputation of being
“the one man air force of the South Korean Army,” but
he is officially grounded by the end of August, subse-
quent to flying 95 combat missions during July and
August.
B-29s execute a mission designed to illuminate the
area over the Han River to attempt to reveal a pontoon
bridge and pave the way for B-26s to eliminate it; how-
ever, the flares fail to locate the bridge. The planes, in-
stead, attack the regular bridge there.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: The 24th Division’s
34th Regiment, which began its arrival into Korea on
the 3rd of July with a complement of about 2,000
troops, has been transformed into a paper regiment.
Of the original contingent, only 184 troops remain.
260
The remainder have either been killed, wounded or are
missing in action. The casualty figures for the 34th
Regiment for the period July 3 through August 23 is 98
killed, 569 wounded, 773 missing in action and 274
casualties from non-battle circumstances.
As per orders of the 26th, the troops of the 34th Reg-
iment are officially integrated with the division’s 19th
and 21st Regiments on this day. Its 1st Battalion be-
comes the 3rd Battalion, 19th Regiment, and the 3rd
Battalion becomes the 2nd Battalion, 21st Regiment.
Colonel Beauchamp, the 34th Regiment’s command-
ing officer, is transferred back to his previous regiment,
the 32nd Infantry, 7th Division.
With these actions, General Walker transfers the 5th
Regimental Combat Team, composed of about 3,500
troops, to the 24th Division to bolster it as a third reg-
iment. The 6th Medium Tank Battalion, composed of
about 650 troops, will also augment the 24th Division,
but another 4,000 troops will be required to bring the
division to full strength.
In other activity, the 25th Division is manning a
front extending nearly thirty miles, with its command
post at Masan. From the Namji-ri bridge at the Nak-
tong, the line extends west along the heights south of
the Naktong, to the river’s junction with the Nam
River, and from there, the line turns southwest to the
Sobuk-san mountain mass at the point where the
mountain slims down at the extreme northernmost
point. The serpentine line then winds south to
Sibidang-san (Hill 276) and across the Chinju-Masan
Road to the coastal road at Chindong-ni.
Colonel Throckmorton’s 5th Regiment holds the
southern part of the line, which runs north from the
coastal road at Chindong-ni to the southern spur of
Sobuk-san, with the command post at Chindong-ni.
South Korean Marines stretch south from Chindong-
ni to the coast. Adjoining the 5th Regiment, the 24th
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Champney, forms
the line northward through the high ground west of
Haman and south of the Chinju-Masan Road, and it
includes P’il-bong (Hill 743) and Battle Mountain
(Hill 665).
The northern portion of the 25th Divisional line,
stretching from the north side of the highway to the
Namji-ri bridge, is held by Colonel Fisher’s 35th
Regiment. The steel bridge span is guarded by the
1st platoon of Company F, and it is located in a part
of the perimeter along the Naktong that includes a
huge three-mile hole that separates the 1st Platoon on
the east from the remainder of the company on
the west. The command post of the 35th Regiment
is located between the towns of Chirwon and Chung-
ni, east of the main road. North of the 25th Division,
the 2nd Division replaces the 24th Division, and
then it prepares to meet a North Korean attack. The
enemy is unaware that the 2nd has relieved the 24th
Division.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 714th
Transportation Railway Operating Battalion arrives in
Korea this day, and it begins taking responsibility for
 261
shuttling supplies along the 500 miles of the remain-
ing rail lines within the friendly lines. The runs origi-
nate in Pusan and fan out to various divisional rail de-
pots, from where items can be transported by trucks
to the regimental front lines.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The recently
arrived 3rd Battalion, 5th Cavalry Regiment, assumes
responsibility for the zone (encompassing 14,000 yards)
guarded by the 8th Cavalry Regiment. The 8th Cavalry
then moves out to relieve the remaining elements of
the S.K. 12th Regiment and the entire S.K. 13th Reg-
iment, 1st S.K. Division. With the addition of the 3rd
Battalion, 5th Cavalry, and the new area of responsibil-
ity, the 5th Cavalry perimeter stretches its front to a
length of 32,000 yards. By 1300, the redeployment of
the 1st Cavalry Division, ordered by General Walker on
the 28th, is complete.
— In the United States: Two regiments of the 3rd
Infantry Division, the 7th and 15th, leave San Francisco
en route to Japan. From there they will move to Korea
to join the 65th Regiment. The 3rd Division will join the
X Corps. The convoy will arrive at Moji, Japan, and the
final contingent will debark by September 16.
— In Japan: A dispatch from General Oliver P.
Smith, commanding officer, 1st Marine Division, is
received by X Corps, the recently activated tactical or-
ganization formed specifically for the Inchon opera-
tion. The message stipulates the need for the brigade to
be released from Eighth Army on September 1 to en-
able it to participate with the 1st Marine Division’s in-
vasion of Inchon. Eighth Army is reluctant to release the
Marine Brigade; however, General Smith eventually
prevails, and pursuant to orders by General MacArthur,
the brigade is to be released to the 1st Marine Division
on September 4.
General Walker, speaking with General Almond,
makes it perfectly clear that he requires the 5th Marines:
“If I lose the 5th Marine Regiment, I will not be respon-
sible for the safety of the front.” General Almond, com-
manding officer of the X Corps, is convinced that the
corps can accomplish its mission without the 5th
Marines and he supports Walker. In the meantime, the
enemy launches a fierce attack on September 1 and
MacArthur countermands his order to release the 5th
Marines. Further deliberations in Tokyo on Septem-
ber 3 terminate the debate on the fate of the Marines.
Admiral C. Turner Joy, commander, Naval Forces
Far East, issues Operation Plan 108-50 delegating the
seizure of Inchon by amphibious assault to JTF-7. X
Corps is part of JTF-7. Also, X Corps’ Operation Order
No. 1 (dated August 28) is received by the 1st Marine
Division this day.
Admirals Struble and Doyle and Marine General
O.P. Smith have been holding meetings for several days.
On this day, Struble holds a conference on Inchon with
Admirals Andrewes, Higgins and Ruble and Captain
Austin.
August 31 The North Koreans diligently prepare
to launch another powerful attack against the Pusan
August 31, 1950
Perimeter by striking it at all points, from the west to
the east coasts, in an effort to destroy all the resistance.
Thirteen enemy infantry divisions, one armored divi-
sion and two armored brigades have been assembled to
decimate the Pusan Perimeter. The North Korean Front
Headquarters at Kumch’on has been directing the at-
tacks against the perimeter.
General Kim Chaek has been commanding head-
quarters and he continues to do so through Septem-
ber. N.K. Lt. General Kang Kon is Kim Chaek’s chief
of staff. The N.K. I Corps, commanded by Lt. General
Kim Ung, is responsible for the western portion of the
enemy perimeter, which stretches south from Waeg-
wan to the Korea Strait. The N.K. II Corps, with head-
quarters at Mun’gyong, bears responsibility for the east-
ern half of the enemy perimeter, which stretches from
positions north of Taegu to the east coast. The N.K. I
Corps units, deployed south to north, are the 6th, 7th,
9th, 4th, 2nd and 10th N.K. Infantry Divisions, and
these are augmented by contingents of the N.K. 105th
Armored Division. The newest arrival, the 16th Ar-
mored Brigade with its contingent of new T-34 tanks,
also bolsters the force.
The 7th N.K. Division has not yet been committed
to battle, except for a skirmish by two battalions against
S.K. Marines at T’ong-yong. The N.K. 9th Infantry
Division is also being committed to its initial battles.
The N.K. II Corps units, strung from west to east
(northwest of Taegu are: 3rd, 13th, 1st, 8th, 15th, 12th
and 5th Infantry Divisions, bolstered by the 17th Ar-
mored Brigade and contingents of the 105th N.K. Ar-
mored Division. Only the 17th Armored Brigade is a
new arrival with the corps. The North Koreans have
amassed about 98,000 troops for the scheduled massive
assault, but approximately one third of this force is to-
tally untested. Many of these untested troops have been
scooped up in the vicinity of Seoul after its capture and
reluctantly pressed into service for the Communist
cause. The N.K. I Corps is scheduled to attack at 2330
on August 31 and the N.K. II Corps is to commence its
attacks on September 2 at 1800.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: The North Koreans
have not been able to crush the defenses of the U.S.
25th Division in the vicinity of Sobuk-san at Battle
Mountain and P’il-bong. Nevertheless, the U.S. and
supporting South Korean troops have been unable to
claim victory, and both sides sustained heavy casual-
ties. Reports vary on the number of times Old Baldy had
been won and lost. On some days between the 15th
and this day, the summit exchanged occupants between
the 24th Regiment and the North Koreans three times
within twenty-four hours. One sergeant’s tally has the
objective changing hands nineteen times.
In the area of Sobuk-san, south of Battle Mountain
and P’il-bong, the 5th RCT has also faced consistent
combat, especially during the final week in August, and
although the enemy is prevented from making a break-
through, the fighting here remains a stalemate.
In the 25th Division sector, at its left center, the 2nd
Battalion, 24th Regiment, under Lt. Colonel Paul
August 31, 1950
Roberts, is holding the summit of the second ridge west
of Haman, from where it can observe a secondary road
that runs east from enemy-held Chungam-ni (enemy
held). From there, the ridge swings through the 2nd
Battalion zone about one mile west of Masan in a pass.
During the afternoon, Company G, 24th Regiment,
discovers a large enemy troop contingent moving toward
the ridge from about one mile to its front. The infor-
mation is passed on and later, at about dusk, two sep-
arate air strikes pound the area. Despite the air attacks,
the enemy continues to advance and slightly before
midnight (Aug. 31-Sept. 1), the North Koreans com-
mence an attack that strikes Company F along the
Chungam-ni–Haman Road on the north side of the
pass.
The South Korean troops holding positions in the
pass pull up stakes and withdraw to the south side of
the pass to the positions of Company G. The struggle
continues throughout the night, and the North Kore-
ans capture a 75-mm recoilless rifle as they enter the
pass. The gun is whipped into action against both the
Americans and the South Koreans. Two U.S. tanks are
destroyed by the captured weapon. In addition, the
enemy overwhelms an 81-mm mortar position at the
east end of the pass, further diminishing the firepower
of the defenders. Company E, 24th Regiment, posted
farther up the hill, is also hit by the enemy at midnight
and more complications then rapidly develop.
The commanding officer, Lieutenant Charles Ellis,
rushes to the left flank to find the 3rd Platoon making
a hurried evacuation. Attempting to pull the outfit to-
gether, Ellis warns the platoon leader that he might be
shot if he doesn’t return to his position, and Ellis enun-
ciates the threat by firing a shell between his legs for
effect. Then, Ellis is forced to speed to the right flank,
as the platoon deployed there is also beginning to pull
out. Eventually, as the night progresses and the men
vanish, Company E is whittled down to twelve men, in-
cluding Ellis. Some of the troops who flee to avoid fac-
ing the enemy are killed when they run through the
minefield they had previously laid. Lieutenant Charles
Ellis and the remnants of Company E remain at their
positions.
In the 35th Regimental sector, along the Nam River,
north of the 24th Regiment, the North Koreans initi-
ate a powerful campaign to crush the regimental line
there and further shatter the 25th Division’s defenses.
The enemy begins pumping fire into the positions of
Company G, 2nd Battalion, at about 2330. The first
catapulted shells arrive from a self-propelled gun from
its position across the river. These are soon followed
by artillery fire, which initially strikes the positions near
the Namji River and then expands westward to ring
the entire perimeter of the 35th Regiment for one-half
hour.
While the 35th Regiment is reckoning with the
shelling, its Companies F and G, 2nd Battalion (Lt.
Colonel John L. Wilkins), come under a severe attack.
A reinforced regiment, N.K. 7th Division, uses the ar-
tillery as an umbrella to ford the Nam and whack the
262
two companies. In synchronization with this assault,
more enemy troops cross the river north of Komam-ni
near the point that separates the 2nd Battalion’s river line
from the 1st Battalion’s lines in the hills, which extend
from the Nam to Sibidang and beyond to the Chinju-
Masan Road. The area of the alternate crossing is de-
fended by about 300 South Korean police who are
straddled in the lowlands between the 1st and 2nd Bat-
talions.
The police are to hold the line until reinforcements
can be rushed to their aid. However, the enemy surge
quickly topples the South Koreans, who disperse at the
first sounds of battle, allowing the enemy easy access for
infiltration. In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion is being
held in reserve to the rear of Komam-ni, enabling Col-
onel Fisher to commit it wherever it is needed.
By 0030 (September 1), the enemy attackers breach
the low ground and fan out. Some contingents move left
to strangle Company G, while other contingents pivot
to the right to take out Company C, which is deployed
west of the Komam-ni Road; however, rather than at-
tack toward the Komam-ni Road fork, the North Ko-
reans swing east and infiltrate the hills to the rear of
the 2nd Battalion. In the 1st Battalion perimeter, Com-
pany B, holding Sibidang-san, 1,200 feet above the
Masan Road about two miles west of Masan, feels the
lethal sting of the enemy shelling, which strikes its po-
sitions about 2330 and lasts until midnight. Like the
2nd Battalion, it attempts to prepare for an attack while
still coping with the menacing barrage.
Meanwhile, two battalions of the N.K. 13th Regi-
ment, 6th Division, pound against the door and reach
positions within 150 yards of Company B’s defenses.
The first assault fizzles as the attackers get snarled in a
minefield. Below Sibidang, enemy armor and antitank
guns advance along the road toward Koman-ni, ensur-
ing more gruesome combat.
While the terrific fire is being exchanged on the sum-
mit, slightly after midnight (Aug. 31–Sept. 1), a U.S.
tank posted on the road below roars into action and
knocks out an approaching T-34 tank, while a nearby
bazooka team devastates several 45-mm antitank guns
and one self-propelled gun.
Meanwhile, back on the summit at Sibidang-san,
Company B holds firmly and gives no ground as it
maintains a steady stream of fire into the attackers, re-
pelling the repeated assaults. Improvisation becomes
the order of the day to retain the line. Company C, 1st
Battalion, sprints up the slope in about forty-five record
setting minutes to replenish the ammunition for be-
leaguered but confident Company B, which has been
compelled to strip its machine guns’ ammunition belts
to keep the rifles firing.
As darkness fades and the frenzied pace of the enemy
attack recedes, the view from the top of Sibidang-san
is breathtaking for Company B, which has held with res-
olute tenacity. The entire area is consumed with aban-
doned enemy weapons, including three heavy machine
guns and thirty light machine guns.
The enemy, although rebuffed all along the line, has
 263
been able to dislodge the advance platoon of Company
G, and during the night-long fighting, about 3,000
enemy troops have infiltrated to positions behind the
35th Regiment. The farthest point of advance to the
east reaches terrain slightly south of Chirwon in the
heights above the north-south highway.
Meanwhile, with the arrival of dawn, Colonel
Fisher’s 35th Regiment wastes no time. Headquarters
troops of Company C, bolstered by tanks, rush to se-
cure the road to Sibidang-san and replenish the am-
munition of Company B’s 2nd Platoon. The effort
proves extremely valuable. The exhausted platoon, with
the influx of fresh ammo, absorbs the shock of the final
attack and it returns incessant withering fire that shreds
the attackers, killing seventy-seven while capturing
twenty-one. The commanding officer of the N.K. 13th
Regiment had been killed during one of the earlier at-
tacks against the crest.
In the U.S. 2nd Division sector, the North Koreans
breach the Naktong in force, and by the following day,
the force succeeds in dividing the American units. The
9th Regiment holds the southern portion of the zone,
which is on the right flank of the 35th Regiment (25th
Division). The 23rd Regiment holds the line to the right
of the 9th Regiment. Farther north, the 38th Infantry
is deployed. The enemy has made some progress with
infiltration through the 20,000-yard perimeter of the
9th Regiment recently, but the forward detachments
accept these incursions as ordinary patrol activity.
The rifle companies of the 9th Regiment, assigned to
manning the forward river line positions, control only
the strategic peaks and hills, since Eighth Army has
scaled down the manpower in the bulge area, where
heavy fighting had occurred during early August. Each
of these positions contains large frontages between
3,000 and 4,000 feet. These observation points are only
to monitor enemy activity.
Company A stands on a fortified finger ridge just
above the confluence of the Nam and Naktong Rivers.
The ridge ends on Hill 94 at the Kihang Ferry crossing,
and it also overlooks the river road that runs west from
Namji-ri, adjacent to the Naktong and across the south-
ern edge of the ridge where it crosses to the western
bank of the river, near the ferry crossing. Company B
is deployed on the summit of Hill 209. Elements of
Company A, bolstered by two tanks (Company A,
72nd Tank Bn.), and two antitank vehicles (Battery D,
82nd FAB), establish a roadblock close to the tiny vil-
lage of Agok at the base of Hill 94.
During the night, orders arrive calling for Company
A to pull up from its ridge positions and reform along
the river below the ridge line, but as the exchange of
positions is occurring, an eerie fog is overtaking the
area, adding extra edginess to the situation by 2000.
Company C is deployed to the right of Company A.
By 2200, the enemy commences some mortar firing,
but within fifteen minutes, the positions of Company
A receive stiff incoming fire from heavy mortars. The
enemy activity continues to accelerate and by 2230, as
the dreary fog suddenly lifts, enemy contingents of the
August 31, 1950
N.K. 9th Division are spotted as they attempt to com-
plete the laying of a bridge to cross the river. An astute
tanker, Sergeant Ernest Kouma, anchored about forty
yards from the ferry, bolts to his .50-caliber machine
gun after instructing his gunner to use the .90-mm can-
non to sever the bridge. In conjunction, the other tank
and the two antitank vehicles begin to pour fire toward
the bridge and the span falls. The U.S. firing continues
and most of the supporting pontoon barges, which have
broken loose, are also destroyed. But, even this ferocious
activity does not permanently halt the Communists.
Within one-half hour another short burst of fire re-
heats the contest. The North Koreans, having crossed
the Naktong in strength, charge with the accompani-
ment of blaring whistles and bright green flares. The
firefight ensuing north of the tanks quickly subsides;
however, more recent orders come into the roadblock
by field phone instructing the two Company A rifle
squads to rejoin the company, which is returning to its
original positions on the finger ridge. The Company
A commander, Lieutenant Adam Rodriguez, has de-
cided that he must move his command post due to the
severity of the attack.
In the meantime, while enemy contingents are strik-
ing the 1st Platoon of Company A, the 2nd Platoon,
also near Agok but slightly north, does not come under
assault. Yet, Company C, to the right of the 2nd Pla-
toon, Company A, is struck hard and overrun. The
men of Company C offer some resistance, but of short
duration, before the troops break for safety. Two soldiers
from Company C arrive at the defenses of the 2nd Pla-
toon and inform its commander, Lieutenant Fern, of the
fate of their unit. The 2nd Platoon encounters some
enemy resistance as it climbs the ridge, but it is nom-
inal. The platoon completes the trek and establishes a
night perimeter.
Meanwhile, as the roadblock at Agok is being dis-
mantled, an infantryman at the outpost yells, “We are
moving out tankers.” Immediately following the de-
parture of the infantry, Sergeant Kouma observes seven
troops donning American uniforms with the “Indian-
head” insignia of the 2nd Division. They are racing
from the recently abandoned command post at the
roadblock and heading toward his tank. Kouma ini-
tially assumes they are South Koreans, attached to the
9th Regiment. Three of these troops board his tank,
then excitedly and in good English, they inform him
that Company A has been overrun. Continuing, these
troops inform Kouma that most of the troops have been
either killed or captured.
As the conversation continues, Kouma remains on
top of the tank rechecking his gun while listening. And
then, in a flash, the troops expose themselves as the
enemy. On cue, the three enemy troops pull the pins
from their grenades and bolt from the tank. While they
toss grenades upon the tank, other enemy fire, originat-
ing in some high ground about 150 yards to the right
of the tankers, begins to hammer the area. Instinctively,
Kouma dives into the tank and with a record setting
closing of the hatch, the Americans pump out some re-
August 31, 1950
A 105-mm howitzer crew prepares to fire upon enemy positions.
turn fire. Nonetheless, the enemy retains their cun-
ningness as the tenacious firefight develops. Instantly,
more enemy troops move against the tanks. The de-
tachment that encroaches the Quad-50 is well versed on
the password, permitting the enemy to effortlessly over-
run it. One crewman escapes, but the others are killed.
The other antitank vehicle sustains some wounded,
but it safely pulls away, leaving the two tanks to fight
264
it out alone, and fight they do. Sergeant Kouma,
wounded twice, refuses to relent. Both tanks pivot and
tear out from beneath the cliffs, searching for open
ground to level the playing field. They find positions
giving them a killing field of 200 yards, revolving on a
360-degree angle. The enemy attacks repeatedly, but the
side-by-side stance of the tanks slices the enemy and re-
pulses all attacks. However, as the night stretches out
 265
South Korean troops (ROKs) hold in place in a rice paddy.
further, the tank led by SFC Berry develops engine
trouble. At 0130, Berry informs Kouma that his en-
gine is overheating badly and that he is going to with-
draw. He makes it to a point about one mile to the rear,
but the engine becomes engulfed in flames, forcing him
to abandon his tank. Meanwhile, Kouma remains in
place and confounds the attackers, who are unable to
take him out.
Finally, at daybreak, the enemy ceases its attacks,
and by 0730, Sergeant Kouma rolls toward friendly
lines, but not uneventfully. His tank fires toward the
enemy positions along the route as the tank speeds
home. In conjunction, the 2nd Division will report on
September 2 that 110 troops of Company C, which
had scattered after being overrun, have returned to the
divisional lines. The 2nd Division area is further con-
sumed with fighting and the enemy crossings have in-
advertently crossed up an expected attack. The 9th
Regiment’s Task Force Manchu, composed of Com-
pany E (regiment reserve) and one light machine gun
section from Company H, is scheduled to cross the
Naktong at the Paekchin Ferry. The task force is to ex-
ecute a surprise attack against the N.K. 9th Division’s
command post, which stands about two miles from the
west bank.
Companies D and H are designated as support units,
and each will supply one section of heavy machine
guns, one section of 75-mm recoilless rifles, one section
of 81-mm mortars and one platoon of 4.2-inch mor-
tars. The proposed attack, planned on August 25, be-
gins to unfold at sundown when the various compo-
August 31, 1950
nents begin the preparations, but unexpected develop-
ments occur. The 1st Platoon, 2nd Engineer Combat
Battalion, which is to transport the task force across
the river in assault boats, and Company E (TF
Manchu) remain near Yongsan.
Meanwhile, the support troops of Companies D and
H, led by Lieutenants Charles Caldwell and Edward
Schmitt respectively, move to the base of Hill 209
within the perimeter of Company B, 9th Regiment, to
establish their positions and deploy the weapons. From
these positions, the Paekchin Ferry is easily observed.
There are great expectations for the success of this night
assault and Colonel Hill, the commanding officer, 9th
Regiment, and his S-3 accompany the mortar platoon.
By 2100, Lieutenants Schmitt and Caldwell have
taken their section leaders to the positions on the hill
where they want the weapons deployed. While the sup-
porting units of Task Force Manchu are readying for the
crossing, elements of Company B, holding the crest,
begin to hear unusual noises coming from the water
just below their positions. Visibility is not too good,
and the dimming twilight hours do little to enhance
vision. Nonetheless, an exerted effort with their field
glasses reaveals the faint signs of a huge enemy force
fording the river. The troops spotted are part of the
enemy’s general offensive and will surely cause bedlam.
Actually, elements of the N.K. 9th Division had begun
crossing the river at about 2130 to reach positions from
which an attack will be launched following the cessa-
tion of the artillery bombardment.
While the support troops of Company D and H are
August 31, 1950
Artillery is moved through mud en route to firing positions in vicinity of Taegu.
involved with establishing their positions, the enemy
makes it across the river and strikes a stunning blow,
killing or capturing nearly all. Colonel Hill and several
other troops escape from harm just before midnight
and make it to friendly lines. Meanwhile, the first heavy
weapons bearers detachment, already en route to the
crest, makes it safely and remains there without incident
throughout the night.
At 2355, Operation MANCHU is terminated with-
out ever getting started. Along the remainder of the
perimeter, the North Koreans pour into the area of the
9th Regiment. Company B, holding the summit of Hill
209, will be attacked early on September 1.
In the 23rd Regimental zone, north of the 9th Regi-
ment, the situation is also serious. Its 3rd Battalion has
been attached to the 1st Cavalry Division, and the
perimeter stretches across a 16,000-yard front of unfa-
miliar ground along the Naktong, which includes two
roads leading from the river to Changnyong. The 23rd
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Paul Freeman —
which has just relieved the 3rd Battalion, 38th Regi-
ment, a few days prior — sparingly deploys its 1st Bat-
talion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Claire Hutchin, Jr.,
in the hills. The 2nd Battalion, commanded by Lt. Col-
onel James Edwards, spreads out eight miles to the rear,
guarding both roads.
During the afternoon, the enemy presence is con-
spicuous on the opposite side of the Naktong, north
of Pugong-ni. Enemy troops in large numbers move
freely about the rice paddies. The 42 defenders of Com-
pany B’s 2nd Platoon, scattered on seven different hills,
observe the activity with great curiosity. Toward dusk,
the activity becomes more brisk. The sun is in the last
266
stages of fading beyond the horizon when Lieutenant
Glasgow and the men in the 1st Squad spot huge num-
bers of torch-carrying men moving toward the river.
Soon after, a forward artillery observer who estimates
the number at 2,000 sends word back to regimental
headquarters. Consequently, an artillery bombardment
begins, but despite some torches being quickly extin-
guished, the undeterred enemy troops keep advancing
toward the river.
The enemy initiates its artillery barrage at 2100, in
synchronization with the troops who ford the Naktong
and then silently advance up the slopes. After the enemy
barrage subsides at 2300, the sky becomes illuminated
with a green flare. This signals the attack, which strikes
all along the 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment’s outposts
on the various hills. Shortly after the flare diminishes,
enemy grenades are tossed into Lieutenant Glasgow’s
positions (with the 1st Squad, 2nd Platoon). At about
the same time, hard close-quartered fighting begins;
however, the slimly numbered Americans are unable
to hold for long. The enemy drives them from the hill,
but the fighting continues into the morning of Sep-
tember 1.
In the 38th Regimental zone: West of Hyongp’ung, a
heavy concentration of the N.K. 10th Division is de-
ployed on Hill 409. The remainder of the division is dis-
persed as the northernmost extremity of the N.K. I Corps
and it is expected to support the enemy thrust to destroy
the American–South Korean lines along the Naktong
River. After dark, large numbers of the enemy descend
Hill 409 and press toward the far right flank of the U.S.
2nd Division to strike against the 23rd Regiment’s po-
sitions. Hyongp’ung is defended by C Company.
 267 August 31, 1950

Top: A destroyed enemy tank in the vicinity of Waegwan during late August. Bottom: Radar equipment
in tow by tractors (13-ton high-speed M5s) arrive at rendezvous site in a river bed.
August 31, 1950
U.S. soldiers posted in the vicinity of Yongsan with a .30-caliber machine gun observe a wounded trooper
being brought back for medical aid during late August.
The fighting around Hyongp’ung and Hill 409 con-
tinues for weeks, but strangely, the N.K. 10th Division
fails to genuinely bolster the I Corps’ attacks by support-
ing the N.K. 2nd Division efforts, inadvertently aiding
Eighth Army’s cause.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: Kigye, recap-
tured by the North Koreans at dawn on the 30th, comes
under heavy air attack by U.S. naval planes. South Ko-
rean troops later report the discovery of large numbers
268
of dead enemy troops, apparently killed by the air strike
delivered by thirty-eight planes. Also at Pusan, the Joint
(Army–Air Force) Operation Center sends out another
urgent request for naval close-air support, reacting to
the initiation of a massive enemy offensive against the
Naktong defense perimeter.
In other activity, although it is ahead of schedule and
not in synchronization with the plans of General
Walker, the South Korean Army has reactivated the
 269
ROK 7th Division, which is to be composed of a min-
imum of one battalion per regiment (3rd, 5th and 8th
Regiments). Task Force Min is vanishing as an S.K.
unit. It will be transformed into the 1st and 2nd Bat-
talions, 5th Regiment, S.K. 7th Division.
Also, battle casualties during August within the four
U.S. Divisions fighting in Korea thus far have been se-
vere. The 1st Cavalry Division sustains 1,503 casual-
ties, the 24th Division 1,941, the 25th Division 1,800
and the 2nd Division’s 9th RCT suffers 827 casualties.
All divisions share an equally high rate of non-battle
casualties, especially from heat prostration. The South
Korean Army suffers many more battle casualties than
the American units.
At present, Walker has three U.S. regiments in re-
serve. The 25th Regiment arrives at Masan this day
and is scheduled to relieve the 5th RCT, which will re-
join its parent 24th Division at Taegu. The 19th Reg-
iment, 24th Division, is at Kyongsan southeast of
Taegu. The 5th Marines, 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade, is at Changwon, about six miles northeast of
Masan. Eighth Army also has the British 27th Infantry
Brigade, composed of two battalions; however, it is still
not totally equipped.
In Air Force activity, B-29s of Fifth Air Force strike a
heavy blow against Chinnamp’o, an industrial area in
North Korea with aluminum and magnesium factories.
With August closing out, the combined Naval–Air Force
air strikes have impaired, but not halted, the movement
of enemy supply lines. The North Koreans manage to
continue moving supply trains and trucks, but at a re-
duced rate. Also, the movement of enemy artillery has di-
minished greatly during August, but tanks and heavy
weapons remain a crucial priority, along with fuel, and
they continue to flow. In contrast, food becomes a lesser
priority and by this day, the majority of North Korean
units on the front lines receive the ramifications. Lack
of rations impedes their ability to fight with vitality.
In Naval activity, in response to an urgent request
from the Joint (Army–Air Force) Operation Center at
Pusan, Admiral Ewen, commander Task Force 77, re-
calls every airborne aircraft engaged in bombing runs
over the Seoul-Inchon area. While the planes are re-
turning to their carriers, the fleet changes course on the
run and steams southeast to intercept the enemy and
provide close-air support along the Naktong Perimeter.
The aircraft already on board are speedily refitted with
proper armaments and those returning to ships will be
altered upon their return.
The crucial message received by the fleet at 1101 is
answered while the fleet is en route to the battle area:
“The fleet’s close air support will start at 1430. First
strike will be 12 Skyraiders each with three 1000-pound
bombs. Also, 16 Corsairs, each with one 1,000-pound
bomb plus four rockets and full cannon ammo. Second
similar flight follows at 1530.” The message continues:
“More coming.” And it does, on the following day.
Also, U.S. naval surface vessels continue to bombard
Hunghae to disable the N.K. 5th Division, which is
forming there to attack the Pusan Perimeter.
September 1, 1950
— In Japan: The carrier USS Badoeng Strait, com-
manded by Captain Arnold McKechnie, arrives at
Kobe, bringing with it 70 F4Us, 6 HO3S helicopters
and eight light observation planes. The carrier USS
Sicily had stopped at Guam en route to disembark An-
tisubmarine Squadron 21 at Agana Airfield; however,
it joins the Badoeng Strait at Kobe. Its commanding of-
ficer, Captain John Thach, USN, is designated CTE
96.23, composed of the USS Sicily, USS Kyes (DD-
787) and USS Doyle (DMS-34). Captain Thach is or-
dered to rush to the support of the Pusan Perimeter
and by the following day, the Sicily is steaming toward
Korea.
September 1 The U.S. Navy continues its prepa-
rations for the invasion of Inchon. Discreetly, Lieuten-
ant Eugene Clark, USN, a member of MacArthur’s
JSPOG staff, is being sent to reconnoiter Yonghung-
do, a tiny strategic island perched at the mouth of the
channel, about fifteen sea miles southwest of Inchon.
The clandestine mission is dubbed Operation TRUDY
JACKSON. The HMS Charity, having transported Clark
from Sasebo on the previous night, rendezvous with
the South Korean patrol vessel PC-703. Clark, two in-
terpreters and a small entourage of several other men,
apparently U.S. Army Intelligence, transfer to the Ko-
rean vessel. U.S. Marines and British Marines accom-
pany Clark aboard the Charity on the voyage from
Sasebo.
Once debarked, Clark, who brings ample ammuni-
tion, 30 cases of C-Rations and 200 pounds of rice, is
quickly able to befriend the native Koreans (about
300–400 friendly Koreans). Clark organizes about 150
of them between the ages of 14 and 18 as his personal
OSS unit. He dispatches them repeatedly into Inchon
to measure the depth of the water and spy on the
enemy, counting their numbers and identifying their
positions. Clark also utilizes the Koreans to organize a
defense of Yonghung-do, which is close to enemy-held
Taebu-do, from which the enemy can walk during low
tide.
The mission is extremely successful and includes a
naval victory of sorts. During the dangerous mission,
the inevitable occurs as North Koreans move toward
Yonghung-do in boats protected by a sampan gunship.
Clark and a crew of three Koreans engages the unusual
flotilla with a slow chugging sampan, outfitted with a
.50-caliber machine gun. The sea joust erupts on Sep-
tember 8, when the enemy sampan gunboat fires its at-
tached 37-mm tank gun, expending several rounds and
showcasing poor marksmanship. Clark’s crew com-
mences firing and their machine gun fire decimates the
enemy sampan, sinking it. Clark continues firing and
sinks one of the accompanying boats. Three of the
eighteen enemy occupants are captured. Clark reports
the incident, and on the following day (9th), the de-
stroyer USS Hanson and some aircraft arrive to bombard
Taebu-do.
Meanwhile, Clark continues the primary mission of
gaining intelligence and transmitting it to friendly
September 1, 1950
A U.S. infantry contingent moving in search of enemy troops.
vessels operating off Korea. In addition, during one of
the nights on the island, Clark rows a boat straight into
Inchon to test the density of the muck, and when the
tide rolls out, he walks into the mud up to his waist.
Concluding that landing troops would be futile, he dis-
patches the following message: “Inchon not suitable
for landing either troops or vehicles across the mud.”
Despite his daily reports of intelligence and a grow-
ing danger to his life, Clark refuses continuous efforts
to evacuate him. Cognizant of his fate if caught, he car-
ries one grenade to ensure the North Koreans don’t cap-
ture him. During this unsung heroic action, Clark also
manages to repair a light beacon on Palmi Island, which
the enemy had previously put out of operation without
destroying it. Undaunted, the daily reports from Clark
continue to flow, but finally he is compelled to evacu-
ate hastily on the 14th, when a large contingent of
enemy troops storm Yonghung-do. Clark escapes harm
and flees to the temporary sanctuary of the repaired
beacon light (Palmi-do), but the North Koreans slaugh-
ter about fifty Korean men and women on Yonghung-
do. At about midnight (14th-15th), Clark abandons
the island and is retrieved by the Navy.
Other sources of information also contribute to the
intelligence gathering of the U.S. forces, including War-
rant Officer W.R. Miller, USA (Second Transportation
Medium, Yokohama). Miller is temporarily assigned
commander of Amphibious Group One because of his
experience with Inchon’s tides and the unloading prob-
lems at the port. In addition, an Air Force officer, Col-
onel Richard W. Philbrick, and two civilians, Donald
Graves and Amron Katz, have been dispatched from
the States. They measure the varying height of the In-
270
chon seawalls, subsequent to inspection of aerial pho-
tographs taken by RF-80 jet aircraft from a distance of
200 feet during various stages of the tides.
In other activity, Eighth Army realizes early that the
enemy attacks on the previous day had been the fore-
runner of the tremendous enemy offensive unfolding in
the southern part of the perimeter. In reaction, General
Walker keeps a feverish pace, beginning with request-
ing Air Force assistance at 0900. He calls for massive
strikes to corner off the battleground by bombing
slightly in front of the 2nd Division boundary, which
stretches along the Naktong from Toksong-dong south-
ward. He also requests simultaneous raids to be
launched as deeply as 10 to 15 miles west of the Nak-
tong.
Upon receiving Eighth Army’s urgent request, the
Air Force Far East Command seeks some additional
power from the Navy. NAVFE contacts the Seventh
Fleet, which is striking the area near Inchon and Seoul,
and directs it to disengage and speed its aircraft south
to hit new targets.
Meanwhile, General Walker, holding limited re-
serves (three under-strength regiments), ponders which
units to juggle to reinforce the stand. The available
units are the 27th Regiment, 25th Division, the 19th
Regiment, 24th Division, and the 5th Marines. Each
contingent receives orders to stand by and be prepared
to move out at any minute. At 1045, Eighth Army in-
forms the 25th Division that the 27th Regiment is to
prepare for possible movement to the 2nd Division sec-
tor farther north. Even the possibility of losing the reg-
iment is considered grave news for the beleaguered 25th
Division.
 271
At 1100, Walker, having decided that the most crit-
ical area is the Naktong Bulge (2nd Division sector),
orders the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade to dispatch
the 5th Marines to the bulge in order to halt the North
Koreans outside of Miryang. The 5th Marines receive
the warning order at 1109 and confirmation orders ar-
rive at 1215, instructing the regiment to move forward
at 1330. The Marines advance from Changwon about
six miles northeast of Masan.
In conjunction, the Marines had received an alert at
0810 to prepare for movement, but the destination at
that time was not forthcoming. By 1800, General Craig
has his command post established at Miryang and ad-
vance units are there to assist the Marine brigade. The
1st Battalion, 11th Marines, released from the 25th Di-
vision, is among the advance units. Craig’s Marine
brigade will come under the operational control of the
2nd Division. Before day’s end, at 2230, General Craig
is informed by Eighth Army that the brigade is to move
out at dawn and deploy to the rear of the 9th Infantry,
2nd Division, south of Yongsan.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: During the last week
in August and the first week in September, the North
Korean 6th Division receives another 3,000 conscripted
South Koreans, which increases its strength to more
than 11,000 troops. Since mid–August, the Commu-
nists have pressed about 7,500 South Koreans into the
N.K. 6th Division.
In other activity, Eighth Army Intelligence Section
estimates (on the 30th of August) that the combined
strength of the twelve N.K. Infantry Divisions, known
to be operating against Eighth Army, hold a combined
effective strength of about 82,500 troops, but the U.S.
and South Korean forces have been steadily increased
during August, and now the enemy is outnumbered. In
addition, the North Korean replacement troops are fre-
quently pressed into service without weapons. The nu-
merical advantage and the welcome addition of addi-
tional U.S. tanks and artillery further swell the strength
of the Pusan Perimeter.
With the line now extending from the southwest
coast to the east coast, the enemy is stripped of one of
its most deadly tactics, the envelopment, forcing them
to win ground the old-fashioned way: direct frontal as-
sault. Eighth Army believes it can withstand the at-
tacks and hold the Pusan Perimeter, while awaiting
even more reinforcements.
In the 25th Division sector, at Masan, it becomes ap-
parent that the enemy thrust is threatening the 25th
Division perimeter, prompting General Walker to fly
to Masan to confer with General Kean. While dis-
cussing the criticalness of the situation, Kean requests
authority to commit the balance of the 27th Regiment,
which arrived at Masan the night of August 31. But
Walker, who has already granted permission for the use
of the 1st Battalion of the 27th, denies the request.
In conjunction, the 1st Battalion, commanded by
Colonel Check, which had been advised of its mission
early in the morning, moves out of Masan and arrives
at the command post of the 24th Division in Haman
September 1, 1950
at 1000. The 1st Battalion, 35th Regiment reinforced,
is supported by the 27th Regiment’s 1st Platoon, Heavy
Mortar Company, Battery A, 8th FAB, and one pla-
toon of tanks, Company B, 89th Tank Battalion. Upon
its arrival, Colonel Check’s command is attached to the
24th Division.
Slightly later, despite General Walker’s denial of per-
mission to commit another battalion, Kean intuitively
senses the need for the additional firepower. He orders
Colonel Murch to lead his 2nd Battalion, 27th Regi-
ment, in support of the 35th Regiment and the divi-
sional artillery that are under attack. When the details
are provided to General Walker concerning General
Kean’s decision to commit the 2nd Battalion, he con-
curs with the strategy.
West of Haman, fighting that had begun the previ-
ous night continues to ensue, but the enemy (N.K. 6th
and 7th Divisions) does not strike against the 3rd Bat-
talion, 24th Regiment, posted north of the 2nd Battal-
ion, nor against the 5th Regiment, except for some light
probing skirmishes, seemingly used as a diversion. The
enemy also implements sporadic application of artillery
and mortar fire. Contingents of the N.K. 6th Division
make rapid progress against the 2nd Battalion, 24th
Regiment, by romping through the lines, killing and
wounding large numbers of troops and overrunning
the battalion command post in the process.
During the early morning hours, the North Kore-
ans close against Haman and have it nearly surrounded.
Colonel Roberts directs an officer to take a detachment
of the dwindling battalion to establish a roadblock on
the southern fringe of the town. The lieutenant follow-
ing his orders directs a hefty amount of nearby troops
to move out and hold the blockade, but a mere eight
troops obey the order, eliminating the 2nd Battalion
as an effective unit to help stem the rising tide. With
the sudden and unexpected enemy gains, Colonel
Champney attempts to restore the Regimental line; he
orders the 1st Battalion, deployed several miles south of
Haman, to launch a counterattack, scheduled to com-
mence at 0730.
By 0400, the situation at Haman becomes more
grievous. The town is consumed by a collage of fire-
balls. Colonel Champney shifts the command post to
a spot two miles northeast of the town, seeking safer ter-
rain along the new engineer road in a shallow valley.
North of Haman, another enemy contingent strikes the
positions of Battery C, 159th Field Artillery Battalion,
about one mile outside of town. Two tanks of the 89th
Tank Battalion throw their hefty weight into the bat-
tle and buy enough time for the artillerymen to put the
howitzers under tow and get them heading east through
Haman to safety. West of Haman, as daylight emerges,
Company G, 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment, south of
the pass, resembles little more than a squad. Lieuten-
ant Houston McMurray discovers that only eight men
from his platoon and seven South Koreans remain with
him out of 69 troops who had been on second ridge
west of Haman the previous night.
The shortage of defenders doesn’t affect the enemy.
September 1, 1950
They attack at daybreak by punching through a barbed
wire barricade that had been protected by BARmen
who had abandoned the position, thereby permitting
easy passage. The remaining small defending force is
quickly overwhelmed after a shower of grenades and a
barrage of vicious burp gun fire. Also, the eleven troops
of Company E who chose to remain on the ridge with
Lieutenant Ellis find themselves encircled by a deadly
ring of fire. Several troops attempt to break out; how-
ever, enemy guns quickly kill them. Ellis and the re-
maining troops hold their ground tightly, then defi-
antly and successfully withstand further vicious attacks
for two days.
Following the daring stand, the beleaguered detach-
ment moves south and farther up the mountain to join
the 3rd Battalion. During the dangerous escape, Ellis
spots a wounded trooper lying helplessly in a minefield
and he successfully extricates the soldier.
Some forward troops of the 3rd Battalion, 24th Reg-
iment, manning an outpost in the high ground on the
right flank, had observed more than 500 N.K. troops
moving toward Haman.
By dawn on September 1, it is apparent that about
eight hundred Communist troops are flowing into the
town. As ordered earlier by Colonel Champney, the 1st
Battalion, 24th Regiment, commanded by Colonel
Roberts, advances from its positions along the
Chindong-ni Road. Roberts has infused the 1st Bat-
talion with the available stragglers of the 2nd Battalion
(40 troops). The slightly reinforced 1st Battalion drives
toward the enemy, but the engagement is brief, as the
1st Battalion breaks under fire. It disperses into the
heights about two miles east of Haman, causing more
problems. The failure to hold and fight collapses the line
there and permits nearly two enemy regiments to effort-
lessly gallop through the three-mile-wide Haman gap.
The commander of Company F, 24th Regiment,
claims that his company held fast on the battalion’s
right sector, with two platoons on the line and one
in reserve. Company F holds through the night but
takes high casualties, and on the following day it
makes a disciplined northward march to the lines of
the 35th Regiment to inform the officers there that
their left flank is exposed. Company F then moves to
Haman to deploy defensively and await the reorgan-
ization of the 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment.
At 1000, Colonel Check’s 1st Battalion, 27th Reg-
iment, arrives at Colonel Champney’s headquarters
near Haman amidst a sea of confusion and chaos,
which includes a total lack of discipline within the
ranks of the 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment. Haphaz-
ardly, the troops of the 24th Regiment attempt to
move to the rear, but the effort creates a quagmire
on the roads that impedes the ability of the 1st Bat-
talion, 27th Regiment, to react to the enemy break-
through. The fiasco actually prevents any action by
the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, for about six
hours. Vehicles of every description are moving to
the rear, and many additional troops are departing by
foot, their pace frequently accelerated by the
272
nearby thuds of exploding enemy mortar shells,
which otherwise score no damage.
Colonel Check takes notice of the fact that the des-
perate attempts of Colonel Champney to restore order
among the retreating troops of the 24th Regiment and
of the equally fast-paced retiring South Korean troops
fall on deaf ears. None of the units are reorganized as
fighting units. Sergeant Jack Riley, 25th MP Company,
attempts to clear the road while troops—some without
boots, many without rifles and yet others without hel-
mets — are bolting from the mountain. Riley attempts
to halt the stream of deserters, stopping a few.
At that point, he orders all officers and noncoms to
halt their flight, but none heed the call, prompting
Riley to forcibly stop one man, a first sergeant. Irri-
tated by the actions of the retreating troops, Riley, his
carbine still cocked, asks those he has stopped why they
are reluctant to stand and fight with the battalion.
Amidst their sarcastic laughter he is told: “We didn’t
see any MPs on the hill.” The 2nd Battalion, 24th Reg-
iment, continues its “bug out” until it reaches the rear
of the newly arrived 27th Regiment. The disoriented
battalion then begins to reform at about 1600, but its
force has diminished to between 150 and 200 troops.
In the meantime, Colonel Champney receives orders
from General Kean at 1445 directing him to initiate
an immediate counterattack to re-establish the lines of
the 24th Regiment.
In conjunction, planes, including squadrons from
the carriers Philippine Sea and the Valley Forge, aug-
ment the attack while their mother ships race toward the
area from their positions 200 miles distant. In addition
to inflicting damage, the air strikes confine and harass
the enemy, keeping the Communists off balance
throughout the day. The aircraft prevent the North Ko-
reans from regrouping to capitalize on their gains. Four-
teen Corsairs from the Valley Forge arrive to give aid,
but there are no targets for their large bomb loads. The
planes circle for 45 minutes, awaiting a target for their
1,000-pound bombs.
Meanwhile, the controller calls in F-51s to strafe the
area. Eventually, the Corsairs receive orders to hit five
separate villages near Kaepyodong and each target is
struck and destroyed, along with a supply depot. Soon
after, additional planes strike Haman in support of the
ground troops, while others level a ridge just west of
the town, while still other planes strike Chugam-ni.
Sixteen jets also join the fight. Eight are launched at
1615 to augment the ground troops with close-air sup-
port and another eight are launched at 1745, striking
targets along the Naktong.
At the same time, the Philippine Sea launches its
planes and the skies become more crowded. Eight F4Us
and six ADs arrive on the scene, but they cannot lo-
cate an air controller to coordinate with them, forcing
the pilots to discover their own targets. Some enemy
troop concentrations are struck and the raids partially
destroy a bridge.
A second strike force is catapulted from the Philip-
pine Sea at 1430, but again, there is no coordination
 273
Three soldiers in the field get some hot food.
with an air controller. Following these attacks, two ad-
ditional contingents of jets arrive, but again, there is
no contact between the pilots and air controllers. Con-
sequently, neither group fires any shots.
At 1630, Colonel Check’s 1st Battalion, 27th Regi-
ment — after air strikes lasting thirty minutes and a fif-
teen minute artillery bombardment against Haman and
the nearby enemy dominated ridges — begins to drive
west to regain the ground earlier abandoned by the 24th
Regiment without a fight. The welcome addition of
one platoon of tanks from Company A, 79th Tank Bat-
talion, supplements the punching power of Check’s
September 1, 1950
attack. Eight tanks (transporting infantry) lead
the charge. The vanguard comes under fierce enemy
fire, originating from the ridge on the western part
of Haman, but despite the raging streams of green
tracer fire, the attack remains relentless and presses for-
ward. The infantry sustains heavy casualties, and the
enemy also knocks out one of the tanks. Undaunted,
Colonel Check’s 1st Battalion gnaws forward toward
the enemy-infested ridge, gaining ground one yard at
a time.
By 1825, the first obstinate ridge, lying about 500
yards west of Haman, falls to the Americans. Without
September 1, 1950
pause, the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, inches fur-
ther, exterminating more of the enemy. In less than
two hours it regains about one-half of the prior battle
lines on the higher elevated ridge beyond its assigned ob-
jective. To get a breather, Check’s 1st Battalion digs in
defensively for the night at its newly won positions,
two hundred yards below the summit of the balance of
the enemy-held ridge, about one mile west of Haman.
Uncharacteristically, the North Koreans fail to launch
a night assault against Check’s perimeter and the Amer-
icans get some sleep. In addition, strangely, the North
Koreans illuminate the skies above their entrenched po-
sitions with flares.
In other activity, the 24th Regiment has not partic-
ipated in the fight to regain the ground it surrendered,
but nonetheless, the North Koreans bombard its rear
positions with mortar fire throughout the night, forc-
ing Colonel Champney to move his command post
even farther to the rear.
Also in the 25th Division sector, south of the 2nd Di-
vision, the 35th Regiment is deployed north of Haman
on the divisional right flank. Prior to dawn, contin-
gents of the N.K. 7th Division ford the Nam River,
then pivot left to establish a bridgehead on the Nam
and dislodge the Americans in the heights overlooking
the river. Company G, 2nd Battalion, 35th Regiment,
entrenched on the northern part of the gap, is struck ini-
tially; however, other enemy units bypass Company G
to hammer Company F to the north at the Namji-ri
bridge and some units head south to destroy Company
E, positioned about two miles downstream of Com-
pany G. By 0300, the 3rd Platoon, Heavy Mortar
Company, is pushed from its hill. The mortarmen move
quickly to Hill 179 and enjoin Company G’s 2nd Pla-
toon there.
By daylight, the 25th Division has retained all its
terrain on the right flank, except the low ground
stretching between the Nam River and Komam-ni,
which had been evacuated by two companies of ROK
police at midnight. After dawn, Company K, sup-
ported by tanks, counterattacks and regains some of
the terrain previously lost by the ROK police. In the
meantime, the North Koreans have infiltrated heavily
during the night, reaching positions behind the lines of
the 35th Regiment, extending as far as six miles east of
Komam-ni near Chirwon-ni and Chung-ni.
The N.K. 6th Division, meanwhile, is to drive east
along the primary Chinju–Komam-ni highway to de-
stroy the 1st Battalion, 35th Regiment. The N.K. 7th
Division is to concentrate its force on the 2nd Battal-
ion, 35th Infantry’s positions by advancing south to
sever the Chirwon Road, which leads directly to the
Namji-ri bridge. From there, the N.K. 7th Division is
to press through Chirwon and advance toward the pri-
mary Masan highway. The North Koreans mount sav-
age attacks against the 1st Battalion on Sibidang-san,
but the contingent holds tight, surrendering no ground.
Bolstered within its small perimeter with additional
supporting weaponry and further augmented by total
encirclement by barbed wire, trip flares and some con-
274
cealed booby-traps, the besieged 1st Battalion main-
tains command of the terrain. In conjunction, the 1st
Battalion has the luxury of having all the approach
routes to its positions gridded, permitting the troops
to call in deadly effective support fire.
Meanwhile, in the 2nd Battalion area, engineers
launch a drive up the Chirwon Road (alternate route),
but by the afternoon, enemy resistance halts its progress
way short of Chirwon. In the meantime, additional
enemy contingents continue to cross the Nam River
during the daylight hours. These units, while crossing,
are easily detected from the air. The 64th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion receives the exact positions of the force,
which equals about four companies. The artillerymen
bombard the area with proximity (VT) fuze fire and
inflict severe casualties, estimated to be about 75 per-
cent of the Communist force. Soon after, soaring air-
craft spot the stragglers and begin effective strafing
runs, inflicting further devastation.
Later in the day, another huge group of enemy troops
is spotted from the air. The artillery again commences
firing and inflicts about 200 additional casualties. Back
at the right flank, Company F holds resolutely at the
Namji-ri bridge, and by the following day, about one
enemy battalion will be lost in the futile attempt to
take the bridge. Colonel Fisher’s 35th Regiment be-
comes surrounded as the day progresses, but he remains
undaunted and intends to hold the perimeter. During
the day’s earlier fighting, Company G had taken the
brunt of the attack.
While the mortarmen are being evicted from their
positions and forced to combine with the 2nd Platoon,
the 3rd Platoon, Company G, also nears extinction.
The enemy encroaches its positions along the Nam
River, about four miles from its confluence with the
Naktong River. The exchange of fire is vicious and
brisk as the enemy knot tightens. Captain LeRoy Ma-
jeske orders identification banners to be laid out to dis-
tinguish Company G’s positions, and he daringly re-
quests air strikes to blast the North Koreans to the
front; however, the arrival of the aircraft is belated and
the enemy, by 1145, is nearly at hand’s length from the
defenders on the crest. Slightly after the attackers reach
the identification banners, Captain Majeskie is slain.
Despite the close proximity of the enemy, Lieutenant
George Roach, having assumed command after Ma-
jeskie’s death, again requests the nail-splitting air
strikes.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans bolt to the crest and
commandeer foxholes within the positions of the be-
sieged company. Finally, the planes arrive and pummel
the opposite slope, which is controlled by the enemy,
terminating the attack, but not the infiltrators. Close-
quartered fighting ensues and grenades and bayonets be-
come the arbitrators of the struggle. The defenders of
Company G fight valiantly, but their numbers decrease
rapidly. The bloody contest continues during the af-
ternoon. One of the flying grenades costs Lieutenant
Roach his life. SFC Junius Poovey assumes command.
But, despite the iron-resistance and the incessant
 275
heroism, including the actions of men like Corporal
Hideo Hashimoto, the overwhelming enemy strength
takes its toll. Hashimoto disregards the enemy fire and
crawls to within ten feet of the enemy-held foxholes to
lob grenades. As the heated contests drags on, the pla-
toon’s slim positions become totally untenable.
By 1800, twenty-nine troops remain alive, but sev-
enteen are wounded, leaving Sergeant Poovey only
twelve able-bodied troops to forestall disaster. Nearly
out of ammunition, he requests and receives permis-
sion to withdraw. Using cover of darkness and the syn-
chronized arrival of U.S. tanks, the survivors (includ-
ing three men on stretchers) evacuate their positions
and reach the main perimeter on Hill 179 about 2330.
In the 2nd Division sector, the tenacious fighting of
the previous night continues with more brutal intensity,
including fierce combat in the hills on each side of
Company B, 9th Regiment (Hill 209). An equally fe-
rocious battle continues on Hill 211, situated about
one and one-half miles to the rear of the river. In one
incident during the feverish struggle near Yongsan, the
enemy overruns the advance elements of Company E,
9th Regiment.
Because of the superior enemy numbers, orders come
in to withdraw from the high ground, but some units
are surrounded and unable to move. From close-range,
a grenade is tossed into the mortar section of Company
E before it can extricate itself. PFC David M. Smith
yells frantic warnings to the other five endangered men
with him, and then he blankets the grenade with his
body to spare the others. Smith receives the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his selfless sacrifice.
Meanwhile, Company B still holds the summit of
Hill 209. Although unscathed during the initial enemy
crossing of the Naktong, Company B now becomes se-
riously threatened and the crest of Hill 209 is at great
risk. At 0200, contingents of the N.K. 9th Division,
which had inflicted severe casualties to other contin-
gents of the 9th Regiment on the previous night, arrive
tumultuously at the base of the hill. Following the blare
of a shrill whistle, the enemy advances up the hill and
proceeds to inflict heavy casualties upon Company B
and drive it from its fortifications. The regimental
chaplain, Captain Lewis Sheen, is able to lead some of
the troops to safety. They arrive at friendly lines on
September 4.
An isolated contingent of TF Manchu (Companies
D and H, and Heavy Weapons Platoon personnel),
which had been on the slope under Company B, is not
discovered by the enemy and remains on the hill
throughout the night (Aug. 31-Sept. 1) without inci-
dent.
Upon daylight, the isolated advance contingent of
TF Manchu faces a perilous predicament due to the
unanticipated loss of Hill 209 by Company B. From
its positions on a southern knoll, it becomes evident
that the advance unit is surrounded. Communications
with the 9th Regiment’s 1st Battalion had been estab-
lished on the night of August 31 by Lieutenant Schmitt.
At the time, Schmitt, had been informed that help
September 1, 1950
would arrive on September 1. Nonetheless, it is easier
said than to actually get the reinforcements to the iso-
lated contingent. The enemy contingents holding
ground above and below the remnants of the disbanded
task force discover the trapped Americans. They launch
an attack at 1400; however, the small band raises tena-
cious resistance and repels the assault.
After sunset, more attacks are launched, but again
the Americans under Schmitt hold steadfastly. They
repulse the enemy and retain the small knob. After-
wards, the troops prepare to fend off even more attacks,
anticipated on the following day.
Meanwhile, Company A, 9th Regiment, which was
driven from Agok on the previous night, observes the
enemy from its precarious positions on the ridge line.
It becomes apparent that Company A, led by Lt. Ro-
driguez, is also facing certain encirclement. Lieutenant
Fern, 2nd Platoon Leader, dispatches a patrol into Agok
to reclaim some abandoned supplies. A brief firefight
erupts that costs two casualties, but the patrol obtains
the supplies and it eliminates 3 enemy troops. Closer
to noon, Rodriguez orders a squad equipped with a
light machine gun crew to deploy on the southern edge
of the ridge to engage some enemy troops that have
crossed the Naktong.
En route to the position, the squad encounters ten
dead enemy troops, and nearby lays a badly wounded
Negro soldier who had taken them out. The wounded
soldier is rushed to the rear for medical aid, but he suc-
cumbs later in the day. Continuing on the mission, the
squad reaches its destination and discovers a group of
North Korean troops who have taken positions in a
house. Without delay, the information is rushed to
Lieutenant Fern.
Soon after, through the direction of a forward ar-
tillery observer, the area is pummeled with proximity
fuze fire. The enemy contingent also receives steady
doses of machine gun fire from the squad and by one
other machine gun, which is posted on the opposite
side of the Naktong in the 25th Division sector. The
startled occupants dash from the house and sprint to-
ward the river, inundated with crashing shells. The
fierce barrage kills or wounds about 300 of the enemy.
Company A becomes the recipient of some of the air-
dropped supplies, but much of it is never secured.
During the day, beleaguered Company A stops sev-
eral banzai assaults. During this brash fighting, PFC
Luther H. Story commandeers a machine gun from a
wounded gunner and pours effective fire into a large
enemy force that is crossing the river. Story’s actions
kill or wound about 100 enemy troops, but more keep
coming and the imperiled unit is now nearly sur-
rounded. By dark, Rodriguez is ordered to withdraw
eastward by moving along the summit of the ridge.
Luther Story, although wounded, insists on covering
the withdrawal. When an enemy vehicle approaches, he
bolts to the road and begins tossing grenades until all
are expended. Undaunted, he continues gathering more
grenades from his buddies and maintains his bulwark
stance. Story, well aware of his debilitating wounds,
September 1, 1950
refuses to depart with the company. When last seen,
Story was still firing incessantly at the approaching
hordes of North Koreans. He received the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary heroism and
leadership under fire.
An enemy force of about 400 troops is encountered
by the spearheading 2nd Platoon as it descends toward
the base of the eastern tip. This compels Lieutenant
Rodriguez (Company A, 9th Regiment) to reverse di-
rection and head back up the slopes, using Fern’s 2nd
Platoon to protect the wounded and cover the rear. But
again, disaster looms in the darkness. Enemy troops
commence firing on Company A just about the time the
lagging 2nd Platoon reaches the base of the ridge. The
severe fire also halts any further advance by Fern’s 2nd
Platoon, which becomes pinned down.
Fern directs a ten-man detachment under Sergeant
Herbert Freeman to take the wounded back into the
ravine. A few remnants of the advanced contingent of
Company A arrive and they detail the fighting and ex-
plain to Fern that a large enemy force had intercepted
Rodriguez. Lieutenant Rodriguez and nearly all the
troops with him are killed.
In the 23rd Regiment zone, Company C, 1st Battal-
ion, commanded by Captain Cyril Bartholdi, holds
precarious positions along the primary Pugong-
ni–Changnyong Road, but the previous night’s (Aug.
30) fighting had not affected it. However, at 0300 this
day, the North Koreans pulverize the unit, nearly an-
nihilating it. Captain Bartholdi and most of the com-
pany are wiped out. Initially, only seven soldiers ap-
pear to have survived, but several days later, when the
other remnants appear, the Company C survivors
amount to nineteen troops.
The unrelenting thrust of the enemy endangers the
entire 1st Battalion. Except for bludgeoned Company
C, Lt. Colonel Hutchins is able to gather most of the
battalion and successfully make it to his command post
near the northern road that leads to Changnyong on
the northern outskirts of Lake U-p’o. Colonel Free-
man, immediately upon being informed of the
dilemma of his 1st Battalion, secures Companies F and
G from 2nd Division reserve and he commits both.
Company F moves on the southern road toward
Pugong-ni, but it is unable to reach Company C. Major
Lloyd Jensen (executive officer, 2nd Battalion), mov-
ing with Company F, gathers some C Company strag-
glers and soon after, Company F captures some ground
in the heights outside of Ponch’o-ri above Lake
Sanorho. The unit digs in there to form a defensive
line. This captured terrain becomes the main defense
line of the 23rd Regiment. In the meantime, the enemy
also ignites more fighting to increase the pressure
against the 2nd Division.
At the strategic pass between Cloverleaf and Obong-
ni, the scene of the first fighting of the Naktong Bulge,
skirmishing develops at 0230 when a tank attached to
Company A, 72nd Tank Battalion, destroys an N.K.
Soviet made T-34 tank at the village of Tugok (Morisil).
At 0300, Company E, originally intended to be the at-
276
tack force of TF Manchu until the enemy offensive of
the previous night forced cancellation of the attack, is
called upon to form a desperate blocking line about six
miles in front of Yongsan at the strategic pass. Company
E is the sole reserve unit of the 9th Regiment.
The efforts of Company E to halt the enemy are fu-
tile. It rushes west, but east of the pass, the enemy
springs a deadly ambush that inflicts severe casualties
and prevents any chance of the unit preserving the pass.
The commanding officer of Company B is among those
killed. The North Koreans take control of much of
Cloverleaf and Obong-ni Ridge before daylight on Sep-
tember 1, giving them the strategic high ground be-
tween the Naktong River and Yongsan.
The 2nd Division is then forced to defend the town
on poor ground to the immediate front in the shallow
hills there. At Muan-ni, along the Miryang Road, about
seven air-miles from Yongsan, activity at 2nd Division
headquarters is vigorous. At 0810, General Keiser calls
Eighth Army informing General Walker of the gravity
of the situation, explaining that the most severe enemy
infiltration has occurred in the U.S. 9th Regiment’s
zone. As the morning wears on tediously, the enemy
(N.K. 2nd and 9th Divisions) pressure presents a grim
outlook. Units holding the various front lines become
separated, lose communications and are in danger of
expending their supplies and ammunition. Light air-
craft, operating with divisional artillery, make fourteen
frantic air drops to resupply the imperiled front line
troops, but the 9th and 23rd Regiments are undisci-
plined, with some companies unaccounted for in their
entirety.
Meanwhile, the enemy cracks a massive gap that ex-
tends about six miles wide and eight miles deep directly
through the center of the 2nd Division lines. The
progress of the enemy in the 2nd Division sector is
easily measurable before noon. Grave decisions must
be made. General Keiser, aware that the North Kore-
ans have advanced to the north-south Changnyong-
Yongsan Road and splintered the division positions by
the massive breakthrough, forms two separate com-
mands. The southern section command, composed of
the 9th Regiment, 2nd Engineer Combat Battalion,
the greatest part of the 72nd Tank Battalion and some
miscellaneous units, becomes Task Force Bradley, com-
manded by Brigadier General Joseph S. Bradley, the
assistant 2nd Division commander.
The northern force, composed of the 23rd and 38th
Regiments and nearly all of the division’s artillery (37th
FABn, Battery C, 503rd FAB, Batteries A, B, and C,
82nd AAA AW Bn SP), becomes Task Force Haynes,
commanded by Brigadier General Loyal M. Haynes.
Meanwhile, the 1st and 2nd Regiments of the N.K.
9th Division pour across the Naktong, the former on
the north and the latter on the south. Elements begin
closing on Yongsan and forward contingents move into
the hills west of the town by afternoon. Although the
3rd Regiment of the N.K. 9th Division remains in In-
chon, there is other support, including two tank bat-
talions, one antiaircraft battalion of the 16th Armored
 277
A U.S. Marine posted outside a demolished building fires his sniper’s rifle (M1903A4 .30-caliber). A
destroyed bridge is in the background.
Brigade, one battalion of the N.K. 4th Division ar-
tillery and one N.K. I Corps 76-mm artillery battalion.
In addition, the untried N.K. 4th Division, com-
posed mainly of green and weaponless troops, fords the
river behind the 9th Division units. It is cause for great
alarm, as Yongsan is slimly defended by some sparse
ground troops, engineers and a scattering of artillery.
September 1, 1950
At Yongsan, General Keiser attaches the 2nd Engineer
Combat Bn. to the 9th Regiment to bolster the rem-
nants of Company E, 9th Regiment. In addition, the
2nd Division Reconnaissance Company and the 72nd
Tank Bn. are also in close proximity, south of the town.
Company A, 2nd Engineer Bn., commanded by Cap-
tain Frank M. Reed, heads west toward the southern
September 1, 1950
U.S. troops are accompanied by tanks on the advance as they pass a damaged bridge, September 1950.
side of the Yongsan-Naktong River Road to comple-
ment Company D, 2nd Engineer Bn., which is de-
ployed along the north side of the road, giving the en-
gineers positions amidst the low hills northwest of
Yongsan.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans continue to press for-
ward. About 300 enemy troops engage Company A,
2nd Engineering Battalion, at a point about two miles
west of Yongsan, setting off a grueling three-hour duel.
The 82nd Field Artillery Bn. bolsters this action. Com-
pany D, 2nd Engineer Battalion, concerned about its
questionable positions, receives permission from
Brigadier General Bradley to redeploy south of the
town on a hill with the dual advantages of dominating
the town and the exit highway leading to Miryang.
Subsequent to the heavy skirmishing with the enemy,
Company A, 2nd Engineer Combat Bn., withdraws and
takes positions along the road to the rear of Company D
and opposite Company C, 2nd Engineer Combat Battal-
ion. Other enemy contingents advancing from the south
strike toward Yongsan, igniting more heavy combat.
A contingent of tanks attached to the 72nd Tank
Battalion and the 2nd Division Reconnaissance Com-
pany meet this threat. Severe mortar fire begins rip-
ping into the reconnaissance troops in synchronization
with incessant enemy machine gun fire. One soldier,
Sergeant Charles Turner, guides his section into a firm
defensive position to thwart the huge assault, but he
then notices the brunt of the attack is moving against
the tanks, about 100 yards distant. Turner recklessly
sprints from his entrenched position to commandeer
an exposed machine gun on top of one of the tanks,
from which he initiates a one-man assault force.
278
Despite a hurricane of overwhelming enemy fire,
Turner continues to trade shots without flinching.
While the fearless sergeant dishes out 75-mm machine
gun shells, he becomes seriously wounded, but still,
Turner refuses to vacate his exposed position, choos-
ing to carry the fight and inspire his men. The enemy
fire continues to pummel the area. Turner’s gun mount
is struck three times, while the tank is constantly rung
with fire that inflicts more than fifty hits. Turner main-
tains a steady rain of devastating fire upon the enemy
positions, until finally a burst of fire slays him at the
gun. Turner obliterates seven enemy machine gun nests
before he succumbs and in addition, his unit is able to
regroup and mount a successful counterattack. Sergeant
Turner receives the Medal of Honor posthumously, for
his extraordinary heroism under fire.
During the night, enemy contingents composed of
about one battalion, bolstered by some tanks, skirt over
the low land to move around the town and enter
Yongsan from the south. Once there, the enemy pre-
pares to move against Miryang.
In the 23rd Regimental sector, north of the 9th Reg-
iment, enemy progress continues through the night.
By daylight this day, the 1st Battalion has been shoved
three miles west of its original positions along the Nak-
tong, and the unit is now isolated. Things begin to de-
teriorate further. About 400 enemy troops overwhelm
the 1st Battalion command post, forcing Colonel Free-
man to reestablish it about 600 yards farther back.
At this newest line, about five miles northwest of
Changnyong, regimental staff officers, various other
units of the 23rd Regiment, the 23rd Regimental
Headquarters and Headquarters Company engage the
 279
An adventurous journey by truck carries troops across a damaged bridge held up by sandbags.
enemy there with enormous fervor. For three bristling
hours the opponents exchange vicious blows, but the
23rd Regiment beats the North Koreans back, due in
great part to the outstanding leadership of Captain
Niles McIntyre (Headquarters Company).
The 2nd Battalion, 38th Regiment, is ordered to
drive south, hook up with the 23rd Regiment and bol-
ster its defensive position west of Changnyong, but the
enemy is already holding much of the ground on the
ridges overlooking the road. Actually, North Korean
units have reached Hill 284, immediately above the
38th Regimental command post.
In the meantime, the 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment,
receives orders to withdraw, but Colonel Hutchin’s bat-
talion faces the enemy to its rear. At 1400, Hutchin
speeds a patrol to determine if the road to the rear is
clear. He is soon informed that about one enemy bat-
talion is deployed at the nearby mountain pass, mak-
ing a successful withdrawal improbable. During the
evening, Hutchin requests and receives permission to
stand and fight. The 1st Battalion is subsidized by air
drops delivered by C-47s, which permit the isolated
contingent to maintain its perimeter for three grueling
days.
During the morning, the 2nd Division commits the
3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment, ordering it to attack west
from positions near Mosan-ni at the command post of
the 23rd Regiment and to secure the road from there to
the isolated 1st Battalion. Also, elements of Company
F, 2nd Battalion, deployed on a strategic ridge near
Am-dong, come under a fierce attack that includes ar-
tillery and mortar fire. The platoon leader, 1st Lieu-
tenant Frederick F. Henry, moves to steady the stunned
platoon members. He moves from his foxhole to re-
store order and after directing his troops to maintain fire
against the attackers, he moves out farther to try to
stem the tide.
As the ammunition depletes, Henry orders the pla-
September 1, 1950
toon to withdraw, but he remains alone to cover the
pull back. Lieutenant Henry’s action saves the platoon
from further harm; however, his singlehanded stand
lasts only until his ammunition is expended. The main
body is by this time prepared to throw back the assault,
but Henry’s position is overrun, subsequent to his de-
struction of about 50 enemy troops. He is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his tremendous
leadership in the face of the enemy and his selfless sac-
rifice above and beyond the call of duty.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: The 1st
Cavalry Division receives orders from General Walker
to launch an attack with the option of driving north
or northwest to draw attention and to siphon some of
the large enemy force that has congregated to the south.
Initially, the attack is supposed to head north, but Gen-
eral Gay confers with his staff and they decide to attack
northwestwardly against Hill 518. The hill, which has
recently come into the 1st Cavalry sector, will be struck
by the 7th Cavalry Regiment, augmented by two rifle
companies of the 3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry. The attack
is set to begin the next day.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: U.S. observa-
tion planes spot large numbers of enemy troops ad-
vancing southward through the mountains in the vicin-
ity of Pohang-dong and Kigye. In the mountainous
area straddled between the east sector and the Taegu
sector to the west, the S.K. 6th and 8th Divisions are
deployed defensively to halt any enemy force attempt-
ing to advance south. This day, as part of the unfold-
ing general assault, the N.K. 8th Division is poised to
strike toward Hayang by running over the S.K. 6th Di-
vision.
Farther east, the N.K. 15th Division is mounting an
assault to overrun the S.K. 8th Division and seize
Yongch’on. The primary objective of the two-pronged
assault is to cut the Taegu–Pohang-dong corridor road,
while also gaining Hayang, twelve air miles from Taegu
September 2, 1950
and Yongju, the latter, about 20 air miles from Taegu.
The contest between the enemy and the ROK troops re-
mains heavy for nearly two weeks.
— In the United States: Congress passes the De-
fense Production Act authorizing President Truman to
control wages and prices, as well as control distribu-
tion of scarce commodities and ration items that are in
short supply. President Truman, in a radio address, an-
nounces he is increasing the U.S. Armed Forces from
one and one-half million to about three million.
In other activity, El Toro becomes quieter as the final
elements of the 1st Marine Air Wing embark for the
Far East aboard the USS General Morton; Major Gen-
eral Field Harris, commanding officer 1st MAW, had
departed El Toro by air on the previous day.
— In Japan: In response to the enemy offensive
launched this day in Korea, General MacArthur cancels
his previous order releasing the 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade to the 1st Marine Division. MacArthur wants
to permit its use to neutralize the attack. Most brigade
equipment is already at Pusan waiting to be shipped to
Japan. In conjunction, Colonel Edward Forney,
USMC, the newly appointed deputy chief of staff, X
Corps, suggests to General Oliver Smith, USMC, that
he accept the 32nd Regiment, USA, in place of the 5th
Marines. Smith declines because the 32nd Regiment is
untrained in amphibious invasions. General Smith re-
mains adamant concerning the return of the 5th
Marines. A meeting will be held on September 3 to
reach a solution.
In other activity, the docks in Kobe, Sasebo and
Yokohama are highly active as naval personnel scurry to
complete the final phase of preparations for the Inchon
invasion. The Gunfire Support Group, comprising the
majority of the escort vessels and the command ships,
are at Sasebo. The 1st Marine Division, minus the 5th
Marines (embarking from Pusan), will board its vessels
at Kobe, and the 7th Infantry Division will embark
from Yokohama.
The assault troops have been debarking in Japan
since the closing days of August, and there is little time
before the big shove-off. To remain on schedule and
reach Inchon on the 15th, the LSTs must depart Kobe
on September 10, and the transports and cargo vessels
have to embark Yokohama by the 12th.
— In the Mediterranean: The 3rd Battalion, 6th
Marines, embarks for the Far East to supplement the
Marine forces in Korea.
September 2 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In
the 25th Division sector, the 35th Regiment maintains
its grasp, north of Haman. On Hill 179, Company G,
2nd Battalion, repulses the enemy’s heated attempts to
annihilate it. In accordance with General Kean’s order
of the previous day, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment,
commanded by Colonel Murch, launches an attack at
1700. The battalion springs forward from the vicinity
of Chung-ni to bolster the 35th Regiment. The trek
over the mountainous terrain (Kuhe-ri Ferry Road)
under a pitch black sky is arduous, but combined with
280
ferocious enemy resistance, the unit is compelled to ad-
vance more slowly. It is unable to reach the embattled
35th Regiment near Hill 179 until the following after-
noon.
Subsequent to the departure of the 2nd Battalion,
27th Regiment, the command post of the 24th Regi-
ment, 25th Division, is attacked by a contingent of
North Koreans who had penetrated behind the lines. In
reaction, General Kean orders the 3rd Battalion, 27th
Regiment, to move out and eliminate the enemy infil-
trators. The 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment, commanded
by Lt. Colonel George H. DeChow, is actually the 3rd
Battalion, 29th Regiment, until September 10, when it
becomes the former. DeChow’s command will initiate
its assault on the following day.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, com-
manded by Colonel Check, had initiated a counterat-
tack on the previous day to reclaim the ground surren-
dered by the 24th Regiment. It has spent the night on
the seized ground upon a ridge about one mile west of
Haman. At daybreak the North Koreans lunge against
the 1st Battalion, using a soupy fog to obscure their
advance, but the Americans steadily pour fire into the
attackers. Aircraft arrive and deliver lethal dosages of na-
palm, incinerating large numbers of the North Koreans
and increasing the odds for the 1st Battalion. Finally, at
about noon, the struggle ends victoriously for Check’s
1st Battalion; it has recovered all of all ground previously
lost by the 24th Regiment. The 1st Battalion also re-
captures the 24th’s intact crew-operated weapons. The
warriors of the 27th Regiment move into the foxholes
that had been abruptly vacated two nights earlier by
the 24th Regiment. Check’s troops get a short breather
and prepare for the next enemy attack.
In related activity, enemy contingents penetrate the
positions of the 159th Field Artillery near the Nam
River (northernmost sector of the 25th Division), but
the artillerymen handily repulse the assault. Also, the
day-long support of aircraft has inflicted enormous
punishment on the enemy. The 25th Division sector is
the recipient of 135 sorties, which account for many
enemy casualties, the decimation of several enemy
tanks, some artillery pieces and the violent destruction
of three villages, each concealing ammunition depots.
In the 2nd Division sector near Agok, the 2nd Pla-
toon, Company A, 9th Regiment (surviving unit of
Company A) attempts to break for friendly lines be-
fore daybreak. Lieutenant Fern dispatches a messenger
to the rear to inform Sergeant Herbert Freeman to bring
up the wounded and rejoin the platoon, but Freeman’s
contingent cannot be located. Fern moves out under
the umbrella of a dense fog and heads toward Yongsan.
The 2nd Platoon arrives above the town at about noon,
while a fierce battle is in progress, and moves into the
lines of the 72nd Tank Battalion, just outside Yongsan.
Meanwhile, the lost detachment of Sergeant Free-
man remains behind enemy lines for five days, but the
entire detachment, including the wounded, re-enters
U.S. lines. The small band had re-climbed the crest on
the night of August 31 to escape harm. However, the
 281
remnant troops of TF Manchu are still stranded on a
southern knoll on Hill 209, having withstood severe
attacks against its small, but rigid, perimeter since the
previous day.
At dawn, the beleaguered command, led by Lieuten-
ant Schmitt, easily spots large numbers of dead enemy
troops to the front of the perimeter; however, ammu-
nition and supplies, especially grenades, are becom-
ing scarce. At 0900, a keen eyed sergeant, Travis
Watkins, detects two enemy troops about fifty yards
from the perimeter. Watkins takes quick action and
eliminates both, and then he bolts from the line to
confiscate their weapons and grenades. During this
dangerous advance, three other enemy troops who are
concealed about twenty yards away open fire on
Watkins, who returns fire, killing all. The resilient ser-
geant returns to the perimeter with the weapons and
ammo of the five enemy troops. In the process, he also
takes the time to bring back the insignia from the uni-
forms.
Soon after, six more enemy soldiers venture very
close to the perimeter and firmly entrench themselves,
then lob grenades toward a machine gun position 25
yards away. Once again, Watkins, now suffering from
a head wound, springs into action with his rifle. Stand-
ing conspicuously, Watkins ferociously engages the
enemy. While he is singlehandedly engaging the Com-
munists with his rifle, the enemy has opened fire on
him with a deadly machine gun. Shells rip into his left
side, snapping his back and causing instant paralysis
from the waist down. Despite the menacing wounds
and incalculable pain, Watkins takes out all six enemy
troops before collapsing back into his foxhole. The
sergeant’s maneuverability has been severed, but there
is no lack of courage. Confidently, Watkins assumes the
role of cheerleader and he inspires the desperate com-
mand to continue the fight.
Watkins refuses his share of the remaining rations,
claiming that he doesn’t deserve food because he is no
longer able to engage the enemy. Meanwhile, no rein-
forcements arrive to rescue the men on the desolate Hill
U.S. tank and infantry in action against enemy during September.
September 2, 1950
209. Later in the day, a liaison plane attempts to drop
supplies into the cramped perimeter, but threading the
needle in this case is too difficult, and the supplies hit
the slopes within the lines of the North Koreans. Un-
daunted, another attempt is made to drop supplies dur-
ing the evening, but it, too, misses the mark.
Nevertheless, Lt. Schmitt and several troops recover
some rations, ammunition and grenades, and then they
spot a small bonanza consisting of twenty-one air-
delivered cans of beer. In the meantime, the enemy co-
erces an American prisoner to march up the hill and
deliver an ultimatum: “You have one hour to surrender
or be blown to pieces.” Schmitt scorns the warning and
his troops tighten the line.
In less than one hour, enemy machine guns deployed
atop the embattled contingent commence firing. A
heavy dose of antitank fire, followed shortly thereafter
by mortar fire originating on a higher ridge to the east,
strikes Schmitt’s positions on Hill 209. The command,
however, holds. As the enemy guns silence in cadence
with the setting sun, the dwindling number of deter-
mined defenders prepare for the suspected night at-
tacks. And they come on schedule. During these press-
ing hours, more heroics occur. PFC Joseph Ouellette,
Company H, 9th Regiment, braves the fire to retrieve
ammunition and weapons from the nearby enemy dead.
He also attempts to retrieve some air-dropped water
cans. Ouellette makes it to the water cans, but all have
been cracked open and are empty. His subsequent trip
to retrieve ammunition is successful, but not until he en-
counters and kills an enemy soldier in close-quartered
fighting.
On the following day (September 3), when the
enemy repeatedly attacks the perimeter, Ouellette
comes under constant grenade bombardment, chasing
him from his foxhole six times. He jumps from the fox-
hole and returns fire while standing totally exposed.
His extraordinary courage under fire costs Ouellette
his life. OuelletteHe receives the Medal of Honor
posthumously.
As this day fades, the fighting on Hill 209 closes in
September 2, 1950
fury, but despite the Americans’ numbers having been
cut in half, they defy the heavy odds and retain the hill.
Nonetheless, the situation for the following day remains
grave. No reinforcements arrive and there is no water,
and nearly all the ammunition has been expended. In
addition, the list of wounded climbs steadily, but only
one medic, with the scantiest of supplies, is with the de-
tachment. Lieutenant Schmitt is wounded but able to
continue in command.
Meanwhile, the area around Yongsan is becoming
an inferno due to the infusion of enemy troops that
moved into the town on the previous night. At about
0300, sentries (Company D, 2nd Engineer Combat
Battalion) detect a long column of people donned in
white clothing moving through Yonsan toward the
blockage east of the town. Word of the unidentified
crowd is immediately passed on to Company A, which
prepares for any eventuality. Requests for identifica-
tion are answered by a barrage of fire, terminating the
early morning mystery. The engineers react promptly,
and another day of vicious fighting is underway.
With the arrival of dawn, the North Koreans attempt
to commit reinforcements into the blazing battle, but
Lieutenant Lee Beahler’s Company D, which had taken
positions on the dominating hill above Yongsan on the
previous day, retains its hold and unleashes a relentless
blanket of fire. Without pause, the engineers and their
supporting tanks manifest resolute resistance, despite
the lack of artillery and mortar support fire. Company
D improvises, combining the firepower of its nine older
2.36-inch rocket launchers and nine recently arrived
3.5-inch new model bazookas to shred the advancing
enemy infantry. Intertwined with the menacing
bazooka fire, eight machine guns and tank fire further
decimate the attackers. Many North Koreans who es-
cape this enfilade and the avenging tanks are cut to
pieces by the effective fire of the riflemen. Those who
advance even closer are greeted by a savage barrage of
grenades.
By about 1100, the blood-bath fighting on the
fringes of Yongsan and on the slope of the hill south of
it subsides. Temporarily, the enemy’s attempt to burst
forward and drive east toward Miryang is thwarted,
and their ranks are now greatly diminished. Enormous
amounts of enemy dead are splattered over the land-
scape, in and near large quantities of destroyed enemy
equipment. The tankmen of Companies A and B, 72nd
Tank Battalion, the combat engineers and the 2nd Di-
vision Reconnaissance Company have bought some ad-
ditional time for Eighth Army, but at a terrific price.
Company A, 2nd Engineer Battalion, sustains 12
troops killed and 18 wounded. Lieutenant Beahler is the
only officer of Company D who is neither wounded
nor killed.
In the meantime, Colonel Hill, commanding officer,
9th Regiment, begins regrouping about 800 troops of
the 9th Regiment who have withdrawn east from their
river line perimeter. The troops include Companies E
and F, which had been bypassed by the primary enemy
advance across the Naktong. During the afternoon, the
282
reorganized 2nd Battalion, 9th Regiment, and some
supporting tanks advance through the positions of
Company A, 2nd Combat Engineer Battalion, then
commence a counterattack. The inclusion of the 2nd
Battalion tilts the scales and by 1500, Yongsan is re-
secured. However, some enemy tanks remain in the
area. Two bazooka teams (Company A, 2nd Engineer
Bn.) join the battle and eliminate three T-34s, located
and engaged slightly west of Yongsan. Additional enemy
tanks are decimated by other ground units and by ar-
riving planes. In essence, the North Koreans have been
intercepted, engaged and routed at Yongsan. By dusk,
the enemy is moving west heading into the hills.
Following the retirement of the enemy, the 2nd Bat-
talion, 9th Regiment, and Company A, 2nd Engineer
Combat Battalion, spread out about one mile beyond
Yonsan, the former to the northwest and the latter to
the west. General Walker arrives at the 2nd Division
front at about noon and he makes his position clear:
he demands a “stand or die defense.”
At 1315, Walker attaches the 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade to the 2nd Division. In conjunction, Walker or-
ders every available unit of the 2nd Division, includ-
ing the recently arrived Marines, to destroy the enemy
east of the Naktong and retake the river line. Also,
Eighth Army directs the 24th Division Headquarters
and the 19th Regiment to pick up and head for Susan-
ni, situated about 15 miles east of the junction of the
Nam and Naktong Rivers and about eight air miles
south of Miryang. From those positions, the units can
be sped into the 2nd or 25th Division sector, depend-
ing upon the need.
In the 23rd Regimental sector, at Changnyong, the
villagers begin evacuating the town about 1300, send-
ing a clear message that the enemy is close by. Shortly
afterward, Major Jack Young and Captain Harry H.
White, holding positions with their small force of about
300 South Korean police, decide to evacuate when they
detect two separate enemy contingents approaching
from the northwest and southwest respectively. The
contingent retires eastward to fade into the hills there.
Later, during the night, the enemy troops occupy
Changnyong.
Meanwhile, communications have ceased between
the northern force (TF Haynes) and the more southern
units, the 9th Regiment and the 2nd Division Head-
quarters, prompting General Haynes to dispatch three
tanks to Yongsan in an effort to reopen the communi-
cations. However, the task is difficult and costly for
Company C, 72nd Tank Battalion. Two tanks are lost
while fighting their way along the Yongsan Road.
Nonetheless, Captain Manes R. Dew’s tank completes
the trek and appraises General Joseph Bradley of the
situation in TF Haynes zone.
In the 38th Regiment sector, north of the 23rd Regi-
ment, the enemy retains its grasp on Hill 284, threat-
ening the regiment’s command post. Colonel Peploe’s
command is dispersed widely. The 2nd Battalion moves
south to join elements of the 23rd Regiment and the 3rd
Battalion advances along the Yongsan Road to rescue the
 283
isolated 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment, near Changny-
ong. The extreme right flank of the 38th Regimental
zone is held by the 1st Battalion. During the night of
the 2nd-3rd, enemy attacks force Company C, 1st Bat-
talion, to evacuate Hyongp’ung.
For the following two weeks, the town is under dom-
ination of the enemy or falls into the “no man’s land”
category. The area north and east of the town and Hill
409 is mountainous terrain that also is classified as “no
man’s land” for the first weeks of September, due ba-
sically to the fact that no genuine U.N. defenses are
entrenched there. Farther north, about four miles dis-
tant, the Yongp’o bridge that spans the Naktong and
serves as the dividing point between the 1st Cavalry
and the 2nd Division is guarded by the 3rd Battalion,
23rd Regiment (attached 1st Cavalry Division). The
cavalry battalion will be relieved by a British contin-
gent in several days.
The 3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment which had de-
parted on the previous day, reaches the 1st Battalion,
23rd Regiment, having successfully overcome the enemy
obstacles. Major Everett Stewart, battalion executive of-
ficer and acting commander, gets some forward contin-
gents to Colonel Hutchins by 1700. During the night,
the North Koreans attack the 3rd Battalion’s positions
on Hill 209 north of the road and directly across from
Hutchin’s positions at the pass. One company is dis-
lodged, but otherwise the line holds.
In other activity, a crucial meeting is held at the 2nd
Division command post during the afternoon to con-
sider strategy for an attack. Colonel William A. Collier,
Eighth Army deputy chief of staff, and General Keiser,
commanding officer, 2nd Division, attend. Brigadier
General Edward Craig and Major Frank R. Stewart, both
of the Marine Corps, are also there. A decision is made
that an attack will be launched on the following day.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, the 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, arrives at its blocking positions on
the highway heading into Yongsan at 0630, with the
balance of the brigade moving to its assembly areas
throughout the day. General Craig arrives at 2nd Di-
vision headquarters at 0830 to discuss the brigade’s
commitment. Following the meeting, Craig surveys
the area by helicopter. At 1430, Craig returns to 2nd
Division headquarters and is briefed by General Keiser
on the deteriorating circumstances. Keiser urges Craig
to initiate a large-scale assault during the afternoon,
but Craig, pointing out the variables that prevent such
an attack: the late hour, lack of air cover due to nasty
weather and, most importantly, too many of his troops
are still en route to their assembly sectors.
General Craig requests that rather than launching a
wide frontal attack, Keiser specify particular objectives
for the brigade. General Keiser concurs. At 1900, Col-
onel Hill, upon his return to the 9th Regimental com-
mand post east of Yongsan, confers with Colonel Mur-
ray, 5th Marines, and informs him that the Marine
departure line for the impending attack is secure. The
various attack units begin to prepare and take their po-
sitions.
September 2, 1950
Company A, 2nd Combat Engineer Battalion, en-
counters strong enemy resistance during the night and
it is prevented from reaching the high ground that is
scheduled to be part of the departure line for the
Marines. In conjunction, when the Marines launch
their attack at 0800 on September 3 driving west, the
9th Regiment, USA, and its supporting units will at-
tack northwest to establish contact with the 23rd Reg-
iment. The 2nd Engineer Combat Battalion and some
other supporting units will attack south of the Marines
in support of their left flank, to re-establish contact
with the 25th Division.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: North Ko-
rean Major Kim Song Jun, the operations and training
officer of the N.K. 19th Regiment, 13th Division, surren-
ders. Kim Song Jun tells his captors that the North Ko-
reans will launch a major offensive against the Pusan
Perimeter at sunset.
In other activity, the scheduled attack against Hill 518
(Suam-san) by the 1st Cavalry commences slightly after
1000, subsequent to preparatory artillery bombardment
and a savage thirty-seven minute air strike against it and
another target, Hill 346. The 7th Cavalry attack is sup-
ported by the 77th FABn, Battery A, 61st FABn, and
Batteries B and C, 9th FABn. Additional support comes
from a contingent of Battery B, 82nd FABn. The air
strikes and the artillery are insufficient to diminish the
resistance of the enemy and the ground attack quickly
falters.
In conjunction, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, guards
the left flank of the attacking 1st Battalion, and the
untested 3rd Battalion holds ground to the rear of the
2nd Battalion in an existing hole between the 2nd Battal-
ion and Hill 518. The terrain along which the attack ad-
vances is tight, forcing the 1st Battalion to spoon its troops
forward directly into the range of the unmolested ma-
chine guns and mortars still deeply entrenched on the
slopes of Hill 518. Unable to spread out, the attacking
contingents become condensed from regimental capacity
to about the size of a squad, severely diluting their offen-
sive power.
Enemy fire originating from the northeast on nearby
Hill 490 is also pouring into the slim ranks of the ad-
vance troops, preventing them from reaching the sum-
mit. During this afternoon, the 1st Battalion aborts the at-
tack, descends the hill and then advances against Hill 490.
The North Koreans also retain this hill throughout the
day.
In the 8th Cavalry sector at the Bowling Alley, north of
Taegu, the N.K. 13th Division launches a lightning-quick
raid during the night, striking the regiment that is de-
ployed to defend the Sanju Road. The 2nd Battalion, po-
sitioned on Hill 448 two miles north of Tabu-dong and
west of the Bowling Alley, takes the brunt of the assault.
The battalion is overwhelmed and easily pushed back. To
the right, along the perimeter, Company E is unmolested,
but nonetheless the unit becomes isolated and is forced to
escape by a circuitous route. This unit will be committed
to support a contingent of engineers when an attack is
launched against Hill 755 on September 4.
September 3, 1950
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion establishes blocking
positions, but here, too, the enemy penetrates. At about
0200 (Sept. 3), enemy infantry, bolstered by two tanks,
pound against Company I, which is dug in along the
road just north of Tabu-dong. The beleaguered com-
pany of the 3rd Battalion holds off the enemy attack,
but it sustains heavy casualties in the process. The
mauled 2nd Battalion moves back through the posi-
tions of the 3rd Battalion, which has reformed slightly
south of Tabu-dong. The vicious fighting continues
through the following day.
In the mountainous area between the eastern sector and
the Taegu sector, the N.K. 8th Division (II Corps) com-
mences its attack toward Hayang, but progress is not
forthcoming. The S.K. 6th Division mounts rigid and
resolute resistance. Operating on the next road to the
east, the N.K. 15th Division, considerably drained of
its strength and operating with three regiments total-
ing only about 3,500 troops, launches its attack and
drives against the S.K. 8th Division. The enemy divi-
sion advances to Yongch’on by the 5th.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: At Hill 99, lo-
cated to the front of the S.K. 23rd Regiment, 3rd Di-
vision, north of Pohang-dong, enemy reinforcements
from the N.K. 5th Division (N.K. II Corps) continue
to move in and reinforce the contingents already there.
Attempts by the S.K. 3rd Division to reduce the oppo-
sition have failed repeatedly, despite assistance by U.S.
artillery, naval surface vessel fire and additional sup-
port from air strikes. The South Koreans sustain heavy
casualties.
This day, the U.S. 21st Regiment launches its attack
to bolster the South Korean attempt to seize Hill 99.
Departing from Pohang-dong, the 21st Regiment
drives northwest, making slight progress at best, and
in some places, no advancement is accomplished de-
spite the accompaniment of one platoon of tanks (6th
Tank Battalion), which shepherds the attack along the
valley road between Hunghae and Pohang-dong. The
hill, designated for capture by Company K, is retained
by the enemy.
The vicious fighting for control of the hill takes a
high toll. By 1525, Company K stands at about thirty-
five men, due in part to the deluge of grenades thrust
upon the attacking company. In addition, the tank pla-
toon loses two tanks, one getting snagged in a minefield
and the other lost after losing a track. By dark, the
North Koreans are able to infiltrate and drive a wedge
about three miles east of Kigye between the S.K. Cap-
ital and S.K. 3rd Divisions.
In other activity, it is determined that the enemy is
grouping for an attack, to be launched from the areas
north and northwest of Kigye. An estimated 2,500
North Koreans have infiltrated between the S.K. Cap-
ital Division’s 17th and 18th Regiments.
In Air Force activity, during an encounter with MiGs
on this day, Captain Ralph D. Gibson, 335th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group,
acquires two kills. Both MiGs go down near Sinanju,
Korea, about 1245. Gibson later becomes an ace. Also,
284
Captain Richard S. Johns, 335th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, knocks
down a MiG during an encounter near Anju.
— In Japan: At about 0935, Major General Doyle
Hickey (deputy chief of staff, Far East Command) re-
ceives a telephone call from General Walker informing
him about the situation along the perimeter. Walker
specifies that the most severe threat is occurring in the
terrain between the U.S. 2nd and 25th Divisions in the
southwestern sector. Walker, who has already dis-
patched the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade toward
Yongsan, wants to make sure MacArthur approves of its
use before he commits it, and he is reassured by Hickey
that General MacArthur has consented.
This news relieves Walker, who had told General
Hickey that he was of the opinion the line could not be
restored at Yongsan unless he commited the Marines.
In other activity, the fleet at Kobe, composed of
about fifty vessels and the 1st Marine Division, receives
some bad news concerning the imminent arrival of an
unwelcome guest, Typhoon Jane. The storm is due to
whack the port on the following day. All loading oper-
ations are suspended for thirty-six hours.
September 3 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In
the 25th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 35th Regi-
ment, still controls a confined perimeter on Sibidang,
the extreme western position of the U.N. forces; how-
ever, the enemy has gained control of the terrain to its
rear, including the primary supply road. On this day, at
0100, the North Koreans strike tenaciously at the de-
fenses on Sibidang-ni, but the 1st Battalion and its sup-
porting artillery units again deal out punishing blows.
During the fierce contest, about fifty enemy troops
penetrate the lines of Battery A, 64th Field Artillery
Battalion, commanded by Captain Andrew Anderson.
The enemy assault runs over two protective machine
gun positions of the artillery, reaching the guns at 0300,
but the artillerymen react rapidly, engaging the attack-
ers in gruesome close-quartered hand-to-hand combat.
Nearby, Battery C, 90th Field Artillery Battalion,
throws its weight into the battle, providing an iron
shield for the besieged Battery A, which forbids the
entry of enemy reinforcements and permits Captain
Andrew Anderson’s troops to continue the fight. Several
guns are temporarily seized by the enemy, but they are
soon regained.
When the battle subsides at about sunrise, the enemy
has been repelled and at great loss; 143 enemy dead are
counted in the immediate front of the positions, and
from this figure the 1st Battalion estimates total enemy
casualties at about 500 troops. In conjunction, Battery
A sustains 7 troops killed and 12 men wounded. Dur-
ing these first days of September, the guns (105s) of five
batteries of the 64th and 159th FABns and Battery C,
90th FABn, supplement the 25th Division with 36
guns. The artillerymen claim the loss of more than
1,800 enemy troops in defense of the Nam River lines
of the 25th Division sector.
The striking power of the U.S. Air Force has played
 285
a key role, as reported by General Kean, speaking on
September 3: “The close air support rendered by Fifth
Air Force again saved this division [25th] as they have
many times before.” In November, General Walker says
of the Air Force assistance: “I will gladly lay my cards
on the table and state that if it had not been for the air
support that we received from the Fifth Air Force we
would not have been able to stay in Korea.”
In other activity, Company G, 2nd Battalion, 35th
Regiment, maintains its hold on Hill 179. The 2nd
Battalion, 27th Regiment, which had commenced its at-
tack to support the 35th Regiment on the previous day,
fights to within 1,000 yards of the initial defensive po-
sitions of Company G, 35th Regiment. The point is
reached at about 1300. Subsequently, the infantry, aug-
mented by air strikes, armor and artillery fire, gnaws
ahead and drives a lethal wedge into the enemy posi-
tions. By 1800, the front line perimeter is restored and
in the process, large quantities of previously abandoned
Company G equipment is reclaimed.
Colonel Murch’s 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, re-
tains control of the recaptured ground throughout the
night of September 3–4, but on the following day, the
battalion is directed to launch an attack to the rear to
secure the western tip of the battalion zone, thereby
opening the alternate supply route. The huge enemy
penetration to the rear of the 25th Division lines has un-
questionably tested the mettle of the division and its
individual units, many of which are coerced into oper-
ating as self-sustaining contingents, relying on air drops
and sporadic arrivals of armor while the elements of the
27th Regiment are advancing to their aid.
The various isolated battalions, companies and pla-
toons meet the test; however, more than 3,000 North
Koreans (behind the lines) push them to the brink.
During the horrendous skirmishes, evacuation of the
wounded remains a grueling task. Attempts to resup-
ply the beleaguered division exemplify courage and
heroism. Nonetheless, the enemy manages to create
much confusion while masterminding more abom-
inable atrocities. In one instance, tanks spearheading a
column of vehicles transporting hot food toward
stranded Company G, 35th Regiment, encounter fierce
resistance less than two miles from the objective. The
tanks roar forward, sustaining no losses. But the enemy
fire compels the majority of the mess vehicles to turn
back. One segment of the column braves the fire and
speeds forward to rejoin the tanks.
Some of these troops are captured and tortured. One
trooper remains concealed in a haystack, but another,
his buddy, is not so lucky, and as the survivor relates,
the anguished soldier proclaims: “You might as well kill
me now.” The Communists execute him. Later, the
body of the tortured American is discovered. His cap-
tors had severed his fingers and inflicted him with cas-
tration. Other dead Americans are also recovered when
the enemy is driven from the 25th Division area. The
enemy, prior to executing them, tied their hands and
amputated their feet. Others had their tongues cut out
of their mouths.
September 3, 1950
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment
(3rd Bn. 29th Reg.), operating west of the “Horseshoe,”
encounters several hundred enemy troops near the po-
sitions of the artillery and engages them during the
morning hours. The battalion launches its attack at
1500. Colonel DeChow’s troops drive forward to rein-
force the rear of the 24th Regiment by seizing control
of the high ground, which overlooks the Horseshoe
portion of the Masan Road, less than five miles east of
Komam-ni. The advance, supported with only one
piece of artillery, becomes arduous and soon after jump-
off, the force is intercepted by an enemy contingent
comprised of more than 1,000 troops.
The 3rd Battalion is struck hard by a fierce counter-
attack that inflicts heavy casualties, including thirteen
officers. Planes bolster the attack by hindering the
enemy thrust and more tanks arrive to lessen the brunt
of the enemy counterattack. During one of the skir-
mishes, Lieutenant Elwood F. James, Company K com-
mander, is killed while leading an assault. With the ar-
rival of the air power and the reinforcing tanks, the 3rd
Battalion overcomes the tenacious resistance and seizes
the objective, and from these heights, the attack to-
ward the 24th Regimental command post is scheduled
to resume on the morning of the 4th. However, on the
following morning, Colonel DeChow receives new or-
ders of attack.
At Masan, the situation is also critical, as the Com-
munists have successfully nurtured a network of sym-
pathizers and agents, enabling the North Koreans to
easily receive reports on conditions within the town.
While the fighting ensues, some enemy units are being
engaged within a few miles from Masan. About four
miles from Masan, at Changwon, an enemy contingent
composed of about fifty guerrillas executes a surprise
night raid, capturing a diminutive detachment of five
Americans and two South Koreans at a radio relay sta-
tion. Their tent on the crest of a hill is overtaken swiftly.
The guerrillas confiscate the weapons and the various
documents in the tent. The lone woman in the enemy
unit, brandishing a Tommy gun, assumes the role of
assassin and riddles the seven U.N. captives with shells,
but two of the Americans survive.
At the recovered positions of the 24th Regiment,
several miles west of Haman, Colonel Check’s victori-
ous 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, is severely tested dur-
ing the early morning hours. The North Koreans de-
scend on the perimeter with great fervor, intending to
dislodge the Americans, but the battalion is perched
for the anticipated assault and unleashes some hefty
firepower of its own. Some of the enemy troops strike
at the battalion’s rear, but after a few improvisations
the rear is blanketed with a ring of fire. Tanks are
thrown into the battle and for some extra kick, mortars
and artillery fire are catapulted toward the enemy, thin-
ning their ranks considerably. Some precision coordi-
nation between the battalion command post and soar-
ing aircraft provides a killing blow with meticulous
timing that shatters the force of the assault. The pin-
pointed air strike assures victory for Check’s troops on
September 3, 1950
the ridge and delivers excruciating pain to the North
Koreans.
According to information acquired from a captured
North Korean, four battalions had engaged Colonel
Check’s 1st Battalion during the two-day contest (2nd-
3rd) and of these, about 1,000 enemy troops had been
lost. The 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, will be relieved
on the following day.
In the 2nd Division sector, 23rd Regiment zone, on
Hill 209, it has been another abominable night for the
remnant troops of TF Manchu, with no signs of im-
provement. Although daylight brings relief from in-
fantry assaults, the devastating machine gun fire and
mortars continue to ring the area, increasing the num-
ber of dead and wounded. The limp, bloodied bodies
of expired Americans consume the hellish perimeter
and the rapidly rising temperatures increase the stench
as the third day progresses toward the fourth night. Still
no reinforcements are en route to rescue the battle-
weary contingent and the repeated requests for air
strikes and artillery support by Lieutenant Schmitt have
gone unanswered, leaving the surrounded troops to
fend for themselves.
The enemy machine gun fire becomes more effec-
tive and upon the sighting of any American movement,
grid-fire consumes the perimeter. Meanwhile, the dev-
astating fire has mauled and destroyed the radio equip-
ment, severing all communications with the other units.
However, there is no lack of spirit, nor is there any
slacking off of the galvanized heroism. Sergeant
Watkins, paralyzed during the previous day’s gruesome
fighting, continues to inspire the others to fight hard.
Lieutenant Schmitt, also badly wounded, retains his
boldness throughout the ordeal, until one of the deadly
mortar shells scores a direct hit, killing him. Another of
the conspicuous heroes, Sergeant Ouellette, makes the
ultimate sacrifice while dodging grenades and attempt-
ing to fight off the enemy at extremely close range.
Lieutenant Raymond McDoniel (platoon leader,
Company D) assumes command after the death of
Lieutenant Schmitt, and he provides equally proficient
leadership that enables the forgotten command to fore-
stall total annihilation. According to later accounts by
participants, about twenty stiff attacks are thrown back.
Some comfort is delivered during the night of Septem-
ber 3 when the usually pesky rain arrives, prompting im-
mediate reaction. McDoniel plops two blankets in the
open to absorb the falling water, and the remainder of
the defenders shed their crusty uniforms to simulate
McDoniel’s activity. The blankets collect enough water
to swell a five-gallon water can and the uniforms pro-
vide water for the individual canteens. As darkness per-
meates the hill, the ill-equipped and greatly outnum-
bered remnants of TF Manchu continue to repel the
enemy while attempting to evade the flying steel, ex-
hibiting resolute determination.
By the following morning (Sept. 4), the besieged
troops have taken extremely heavy casualties (about
fifty percent), including the loss of three of their five of-
ficers: Lt. Schmitt (Company H), Lt. Paul Kremser
286
(Company H) and Lt. Edmund Lilly, III (Company
B).
Meanwhile, at 0300, the 38th Regimental command
post is besieged by about 400 enemy troops who spring
an assault from their positions on Hill 284. Colonel
Peploe utilizes all his available officers and every en-
listed man in the vicinity to make up for his shortage
of combat troops. Peploe also involves the artillerymen,
mortarmen and tankers to forestall disaster. The gru-
eling struggle continues until the 5th of September. Pe-
ploe’s repeated requests for planes to bomb the attack-
ing enemy are refused, because the enemy and U.S.
positions are too closely intertwined. However, some
planes arrive to launch rockets and strafe the enemy
positions with machine gun fire.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 38th Infantry,
led by Major Stewart, having repulsed attacks on the
previous night, remains at Hill 209, along with the
nearby 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment, which had been
totally isolated until the arrival of Major Stewart’s com-
mand.
Pusan Perimeter, Naktong Bulge: SECOND BATTLE
OF NAKTONG BULGE Word has it that the Marines will
again be facing the N.K. 4th Division, which had been
decimated by the brigade during August. Its survivors
and new recruits are moving behind the N.K. 9th Di-
vision. The 5th Marines begins to move forward at
0300 to form for its attack, but enemy resistance hin-
ders the operation. At 0450, the 2nd Battalion’s trucks
halt at a point about 800 yards from Yongsan to unload
the troops. Soon after, the column marches into the
town, encountering sniper fire. The battalion silences
the resistance and moves through the town, reaching the
road junction at its western end by 0630.
Still, about 1,000 yards from its line of departure,
the 2nd Battalion, under Colonel Roise, again comes
under fire, originating from its right front. Roise ad-
vances an additional 500 yards and to his amazement,
he discovers that the lines of the supporting 9th In-
fantry there had folded. To the left of the road, Roise
spots a U.S. Army tank contingent posted to the rear of
the small hill he has reached. To the front, Roise spots
four tanks, two demolished and two abandoned. Be-
yond them lie two decimated enemy T-34s. To the
right of the highway, there is also a distressing view. An
earlier attack launched by the North Korean 9th Divi-
sion at dawn has pushed back the Eighth Army contin-
gents posted at the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, depar-
ture line.
Meanwhile, General Craig and an accompanying
officer land to the rear of Yongsan. They move by jeep
to reach the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines CP, and dis-
cover that the battalion is somewhat off line. The 1st
Battalion realigns itself as much as possible in the dark-
ness. Eventually, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 5th
Marines, are in their respective assembly area, which is
a long north-south ridgeline directly south of Myong-
ni and about one thousand yards west of Yongsan, the
1st Bn. south of Yongsan and the 2nd Bn. north of it.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, deploys southwest of
 287
Yongsan to guard the approaches from that direction.
In conjunction, the 2nd Platoon, Company A, 1st Ma-
rine Tank Battalion, commanded by Lieutenant Robert
Winter, will push down the MSR from its positions
about 500 yards west of Yongsan.
Meanwhile, guarding the line of departure, Eighth
Army contingents are deployed in the hills just west of
Yongsan. Company G, 9th Regiment, is spread north
of the highway leading west through Kogan-ni to the
Naktong River. Company A, 2nd Engineer Combat
Battalion, is dispersed southward across the road and
Company F, 9th Regiment, holds the ground to the
rear of the engineers. One unit, Company A, 2nd En-
gineer Battalion, has not reached its destination due to
heavy enemy resistance on the previous night.
At dawn, Company A, 2nd Engineers, led by Cap-
tain Frank Reed, commences an assault to seize the
heights designated as part of the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines’ line of departure. Braving fierce enemy fire,
the company ascends to within 100 yards of the crest.
Captain Reed nears the top, but he is greeted by an
enemy grenade. He snatches it and tosses it away from
his troops, but he is wounded in the process. Mean-
while, the enemy continues to resist feverishly. Marine
tank fire joins the fight to supplement the power of the
ground troops and they seize the hill. However, enemy
penetration is driving the 9th Regiment, USA, back.
At 0645, Colonel Roise directs Marine tanks to
speed forward and cover the 9th Regiment withdrawal
from the heights in the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
zone. In addition, Marine tanks (2nd Platoon) led by
Lieutenant Robert Winter move to positions adjacent
to the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines’ command post and
from there, they begin pouring support fire to aid the
9th Regiment.
At 0700, the 2nd Battalion’s Companies D and E
strike along the Yongsan–Myong-ni Road to clear the
brigades’ right flank. In synchronization, while the final
troops of the 9th RCT pull back from the 1st Battal-
ion’s departure line, Colonel Roise orders artillery, mor-
tars, machine guns, tanks and air strikes to pound the
vacated ridgeline to the left front. Despite the huge
bombardment, enemy fire still rings down on Com-
pany E, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, as it secures some
hills below Myong-ni. On the previous day, these hills
had been selected as the departure line for the 2nd Bat-
talion, but they are now incorporated as part of Objec-
tive Number One.
At 0800, Captain Samuel Jaskilka reports to Colo-
nel Roise, confirming that Company E’s mission has
concluded successfully. Roise then directs Company D
to drive through Myong-ni and secure the hill slightly
northwest of the village. By now the Eighth Army’s
armor, posted at the southern part of the hill near the
MSR, joins the Marine tanks. The 1st Platoon, Com-
pany A, 1st Engineer Battalion, also comes on scene, re-
sulting in a massive display of firepower that instantly
halts the progress of the N.K. 9th Division, but not its
return fire. General Craig’s command post comes under
wild fire, which wounds several men, including Lieu-
September 3, 1950
tenant Winter, who receives a neck wound. Another
Marine who offers first aid to Winter is also wounded.
Winter, wounded but not without his priorities and
sense of humor, offers General Craig a bottle of whiskey
that had somehow found its way into Winter’s tank.
Two Navy chaplains, Lt. Commander Otto Sporrer
and Lieutenant Bernard Hickey, approach the hill to
comfort the wounded and they, too, are greeted by
enemy machine gun fire, which thankfully misses all
parties. Chaplain Sporrer quips: “Its lucky they’re poor
shots.”
At 0855, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, initiates its
attack from below Chukchon-ni, but the formation to
the south is off course. Companies A and B quickly
adjust by swinging northwest, with the former under
Captain Stevens on the right and the latter under Cap-
tain Fenton advancing on the left. Each drives toward
the enemy-held heights, about 1,000 yards distant. As
the 1st Battalion advances through the rice paddy,
enemy fire from the ridge strikes from long distance,
causing some casualties. But U.S. return fire, including
artillery and mortars, pounds the enemy positions.
In addition, an Eighth Army tank destroyer posted
on the hill south of Chukchon-ni bolsters Company A
with its heavy reaching arm. The attack also receives
support from planes and at one point, enemy resist-
ance originating in a village at the base of the objec-
tive is terminated by the combined firepower of the
tank destroyer and Marine recoilless rifles.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion is operating to the
south. The 1st, 2nd and 3rd Platoons are spread out
from right to left, the 3rd Platoon trailing slightly to
guard the exposed left flank. While the Marines ad-
vance, they encounter stragglers from Eighth Army
units, some of whom have been separated for as much
as three days. Nearly all are wounded and none have
weapons.
While the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, moves to secure
its objective, the 2nd Battalion, commanded by Colo-
nel Roise, secures the 1st Battalion’s right flank, when
its Company D secures Myong-ni, terminating the re-
sistance there and then eliminating the resistance on
the hill northwest of the village. But the enemy on Hill
117 situated to the immediate front of the 2nd Battal-
ion, north of the main supply route and about 500 yards
west of Myong-ni, brings Company D under machine
gun and mortar fire. Colonel Roise is informed of the
situation and actions to rectify the problem will be ini-
tiated just after noon in coordination with the 1st Bat-
talion’s activity on the opposite side of the MSR.
At 1100, Colonel Newton (CO 1st Bn.) is in contact
with Captains Stevens and Fenton, Companies A and
B, respectively, and both officers inform the battalion
commander that the units are prepared to assault the
ridge. At about that time, Newton orders the ridge
bombarded by 81-mm mortars to neutralize the North
Korean machine guns. In the meantime, the 2nd Pla-
toon under Lieutenant Muetzel is stalled at a steep rise
that leads to the crest.
The 1st Platoon swings over to the right while the
September 3, 1950
3rd Platoon forms to the left. Upon cessation of the
preparatory fire, Muetzel bolts to the front of his men,
from where he yells the order “Attack!” Company A
leaps forward, apparently screaming with enough vol-
ume to startle the enemy defenders and convince them
to abandon their positions on the forward slope and
speed toward the summit. This gives the Marines a
needed pause. The riflemen and BARmen almost
leisurely set up and begin popping shells into the enemy
as they flee, killing most. When the remnants vanish
over the peak, the Marines reinitiate their climb, se-
curing the hill (first objective) within several minutes
at about 1200.
After seizing the first objective, the 1st Battalion be-
gins evacuating its wounded and getting re-supplied
while it prepares to move against its next objective. In
the meantime, some unwelcome enemy fire from the re-
verse slope strikes the summit, wounding several men.
Colonel Newton calls in air support and soon after,
Corsairs arrive, plundering the enemy positions and
prompting a post haste abandonment of the north
slope. The North Koreans break for Hill 117, across
the MSR, but Newton calls in artillery fire that catches
the fleeing enemy in stride, effectively thinning their
ranks as the slope and road become inundated with
enemy dead and abandoned or destroyed equipment.
However, many more escape to bolster Hill 117.
As the two Marine infantry battalions engage their re-
spective enemy contingents, the 2nd Platoon of tanks is
still advancing down the road, encountering fierce re-
sistance. At one point, enemy antitank weapons take the
armor under fire and the unit incurs casualties as Marines
open their hatches to scan the ground for concealed po-
sitions. Lieutenant Winter becomes wounded and Lieu-
tenant John S. Carson takes command, but he is imme-
diately struck by instantly fatal enemy machine gun fire.
As the nasty morning fighting continues, the tanks
rumble forward and unexpectedly stumble upon several
T-34 tanks, igniting a concise but decisive duel. All
three enemy tanks are demolished by 90-mm shells.
Following the quick demise of the T-34s, the Marine
tanks concentrate on a newfound abundance of tar-
gets, including antitank weapons and machine guns,
as well as fast approaching reinforcements and rapidly
retreating advance troops. The 3rd Platoon of tanks,
led by Lieutenant Sweet, arrives at about noon to ex-
pedite the rout.
The combined firepower of the M-26 tanks ensures
more destruction for the Communists. One tank from
the 2nd Platoon pokes its turret toward a suspected po-
sition of a concealed antitank weapon and commences
firing, blowing another T-34 into oblivion. As the af-
ternoon begins to unfold, another T-34 becomes a lu-
crative target. Its crew abandons the tank just prior to
its destruction as it stands idle on the left side of the
MSR.
In the meantime, Lieutenant H.J. Smith, the recently
appointed commanding officer, Company D, 2nd Bat-
talion, remains in contact with Colonel Roise, updat-
ing him on the situation on the ridge northwest of
288
Myong-ni. When Roise is informed of the ongoing
rout of the enemy on the ridge across the MSR and the
flight of its defenders, he directs Lieutenant Smith to
spring from the captured ridge and drive southwest to
intercept the retreating enemy before they reach Hill
117.
Driving from the north, Company D advances
through the rice paddy and encircles the objective. In
conjunction, Company E, 2nd Battalion, commanded
by Captain Jaskilka, is unable to advance from the po-
sitions it gained during the morning due to the contin-
uing enemy fire from the high ridge in the 1st Battal-
ion (Company B) zone. Nonetheless, Company E
supports the attack of Company D by pouring cover
fire into Hill 117, in coordination with a platoon of 75-
mm recoilless rifles that deploy to the right of Com-
pany E. Return fire from the Communists emerges from
a camouflaged T-34 tank, resulting in the death of two
Marines of the recoilless rifle platoon and the wound-
ing of seven others.
Company D, 2nd Battalion, advances against nom-
inal resistance, securing a hold on a spur of Hill 117, then
it pivots south and moves toward the crest. Meanwhile,
the throngs of enemy troops who abandoned the slope
in the 1st Battalion sector greatly increase the numbers
on Hill 117, placing Lieutenant Smith’s company in se-
rious trouble. The isolated unit is strung out about 500
yards beyond the nearest contingent of the 2nd Battal-
ion and it comes under severe fire, including mortars, au-
tomatic weapons and artillery. Resistance on Hill 117,
now defended by about two enemy battalions, staggers
Company D and places the newly won ground of the
battalion in doubt as casualties soar.
The afternoon brings with it a shift in the grueling
combat. As the enemy resistance subsides in the 1st Bat-
talion zone, it accelerates in the 2nd Battalion sector.
At the 1st Battalion’s positions on Objective One and
following its resupply, Colonel Newton orders it to seize
Objective Two. Company A’s objective is Hill 91, which
is linked to its present positions on the right by an ex-
tremely slim and dangerously jagged ridge, guarantee-
ing a laborious advance. The objective lies to the front,
beyond a 200 yard valley. Company B’s portion of the
objective is the connecting ridgeline of its earlier gained
ground. The ridge runs parallel with the MSR for about
1,000 yards and contains four prominent peaks.
Prior to launching the attack, the troops of both com-
panies peer toward their respective objectives in awe of
the crushing preparatory fire, which includes the mas-
sive guns of the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines, and the
circling aircraft of MAG-33. The devastating bombard-
ment further fractures the enemy resistance in the 1st
Battalion zone, prompting additional throngs of Com-
munist troops to flee their positions. The good news
for the 1st Battalion is not necessarily terrific tidings for
the 2nd Battalion. The retreating enemy troops dart to
the area under attack by Roise’s 2nd Battalion, com-
pounding the problem there. During the afternoon, the
9th Regiment, USA, drives forward, clearing the area
north of the 5th Marines’ attack zone.
 289
At 1510, the 1st Battalion jumps off, gaining the
momentum at once. Fenton’s Company B sweeps across
the ridge during its 1,000-yard jaunt, and it advances
speedily. Fenton contacts Colonel Roise (2nd Battal-
ion), telling him to expect an influx of enemy troops
who are hastily sprinting toward his lines. Company
B’s objective, a peak lying directly across the road from
Hill 117, falls within about one hour.
Simultaneously, Company A, led by Captain
Stevens, moves to seize its objective, using its machine
guns and 1st Platoon to provide cover fire. The 2nd
Platoon launches a frontal assault, but only as a ruse.
While the enemy anticipates being struck by Lieuten-
ant Muetzel’s platoon, the 3rd Platoon, under Captain
Fox, has worked its way south to strike the main blow
against Hill 91 by assaulting the enemy’s right flank. But
several strategy flaws develop during the tedious march.
The 3rd Platoon’s envelopment maneuver remains
undiscovered by the enemy while it nudges toward the
right flank by keeping close to the banks of a rice
paddy.
However, Captain Fox, unaware of when the artillery
barrage will cease, holds his squads back from the as-
sault line to ensure additional safety. Upon cessation
of the bombardment, the stunned enemy springs back
into position, and Fox’s caution allows the enemy suf-
ficient time to prepare for the attack. The 3rd Platoon
advances too far up the slope as it emerges from the
draw and finds itself an easy target of enemy grenades
and machine gun fire.
The three squads of the 3rd Platoon are split by an
iron seam. Two squads remain pinned on the left side
of the draw and the other is totally stymied on the right.
By now, the North Koreans pour fire upon the stalled
platoon, inflicting casualties, including a debilitating
wound incurred by Captain Fox. Sergeant George
Bolkow assumes command of the platoon and moves it
forward. Extemporaneously, Corporal Virgil Hender-
son stimulates the 3rd Platoon. He defiantly leads his
3rd squad toward the rear of one obstinate machine
gun, and with sudden swiftness, the menacing obsta-
cle is demolished. During the attack, an enemy bullet
wickedly whips into Henderson’s jaw. In the meantime,
Corporal Raymond Stevens’s squad, stalled on the right,
maneuvers around the enemy’s left flank to add pres-
sure to the lethal vise.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Platoon receives word over its
SCR radio that Fox has been wounded, prompting in-
stinctive action on its part. Lieutenant Muetzel, erro-
neously convinced that the 3rd Platoon has been per-
manently stalled, requests and receives permission to
initiate a frontal assault against Hill 91. Its original di-
versionary ruse has it strung on the slopes and under
enemy mortar fire, making the option of attack safer in
the long run. With the infusion of the 2nd Platoon
grinding against the front, the enemy on Hill 91 begins
to hear the shrill sirens of death closing from three sides.
Muetzel’s 2nd Platoon fiercely lunges from the east,
while Corporal Stevens and Sergeant Bolkow tighten
the clamp when their platoons bang against it from the
September 3, 1950
north and south respectively. At 1630, Hill 91 belongs
to the Company A, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines.
The 5th Marines then establish night perimeters,
and both the 1st and 2nd Battalions are confronted
with very large areas of responsibility. The 1st Battal-
ion front extends nearly one mile long and its Compa-
nies A and B are each secluded on opposite sides of the
200 yard valley. Adding to the danger, about 1,000
yards of the right flank remain completely exposed
along the MSR. On the left flank, the brigade’s recon-
naissance company is deployed well into the heights,
but with the many enemy approach routes from the
south, the strength of the recon unit is inadequate.
Roise’s 2nd Battalion has an equally difficult perime-
ter to defend. The contour of the front takes the shape
of a right angle and stretches about 2,000 yards, in-
cluding a 500-yard hole that separates isolated Com-
pany D (northern edge of Hill 117) and Company E,
which is deployed below Myong-ni.
In the 1st Battalion zone, at 1000, Colonel Newton
orders engineers to bolster the defenses by depositing as-
sorted enemy repellents around the area to help insu-
late Companies A and B. The 1st Platoon, Company A,
Engineers, takes a cue from the mythical Johnny Ap-
pleseed, except that they spread deadly steel apples; one
detachment permeates both the front and right flank of
Company B with trip-line hand grenades, antiperson-
nel mines and specially packed crates of TNT deco-
rated with 60-penny spikes.
Company A’s perimeter is also infused with an enor-
mous amount of lurking death. In addition, at mid-
night (3rd-4th), the 2nd squad moves forward about
1,000 yards and deposits an antitank minefield across
the MSR, close to the southern tip of Hill 117. While
fabricating the tank obstacles, the Marines stumble
upon an enemy antitank minefield (Russian mines),
which has been methodically placed upon the highway.
Although this is the first Marine encounter with Rus-
sian wooden-box mines, previous intelligence and
training give the squad an edge. All enemy mines are de-
fused and extricated, nearly without incident.
During the arduous procedure of disarming the
enemy mines, a distinctive and unsettling sound is de-
tected as hostile and seemingly too close. Sergeant Saw-
eren J. Dennis suspends the operation momentarily and
quickly searches for the source. Soon after, Dennis star-
tles an enemy soldier in a ditch alongside the road, fu-
tilely engaged with loading his submachine gun with a
fresh magazine, but it is too late. Sergeant Dennis ter-
minates the threat and the operation continues without
further incident.
And all for naught. Before the engineers return to
the 1st Battalion perimeter, another foe, Mother Na-
ture, enters the battlefield. A horrendous brow-beat-
ing rainstorm takes center stage until it is interrupted
by frigid icy winds, most unusual weather for early Sep-
tember in Korea. Nonetheless, the gripping weather
mandates an otherwise tranquil night for the Marines
and the enemy. The day’s combat costs the 5th Marines
34 killed and 77 wounded and of this figure, the 2nd
September 3, 1950
Battalion’s casualties rise to 18 killed and 77 wounded,
the largest percentage sustained by Company D.
Just after dawn on the 4th, the minefield, laid the
previous night, is dismantled by engineers, clearing the
way for the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines’ assault. At 0750,
the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines’ artillery begins pound-
ing the enemy positions. One contingent of enemy
troops on a summit to the front of Company B is
stunned by the barrage. The North Koreans abandon
their weapons and flee west. Marine riflemen holding
nearby positions take aim and methodically trim the
enemy’s ranks by cluttering the escape route with
enemy dead.
At 0800, Companies A and B resume the attack and
make tremendous progress in the heights south of the
MSR. During the fast-paced advance, increasing num-
bers of Communist troops begin darting for safety in
small units, but the massive amount of air support, ar-
tillery and armor further diminishes the retreating
enemy numbers. By 1505, the 1st Battalion reaches
Kang-ni (Objective One), more than 3,000 yards from
its starting point.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
jumps off slightly after 0800, taking over for the 2nd
Battalion. Companies G and H move out, departing
from the lines of 1st Battalion’s Company E and D, re-
spectively. Driving south of the MSR, Company G
crosses the rice paddy heading toward Hill 117, then it
sprints over a small hill, discovering unoccupied enemy
entrenchments, except some Communist dead. Con-
tinuing on, Company G reaches and secures the south-
ern slope of the objective. Surprisingly, only fifteen
enemy troops are eliminated along the way. Company
H maneuvers to the right, making a deep curve around
the northern fringes of Hill 117 and it makes splendid
progress against minimum resistance as it links with
Company G. By 0840, Hill 117, which had been the
nemesis of the 5th Marines on the previous day, fades
with a hardly a whimper.
Colonel Taplett begins relocating his headquarters
to the MSR. Although engineers had removed enemy
mines on the main highway, the connecting road from
Myong-ni had not been cleared, causing a serious prob-
lem. While en route, the lead vehicle strikes a mine,
injuring ten Marines, all with communication units.
Engineers scour the road and discover additional
Russian-made mines, but by 1200, the secondary road
east of Hill 117 is wide open.
Subsequent to the capture of Hill 117, the 3rd Bat-
talion resumes the attack. Side by side, Companies G
and H drive west across the heights north of the MSR.
They are flanked on the left by the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, and on the right by the 9th Regiment, USA;
however, along the route, visual contact with the 9th
Regiment is lost. While Lieutenant Bohn leads Com-
pany G toward the objective, it is struck by enemy ma-
chine gun fire originating from the hill north of Kang-
ni, the target of the 3rd Battalion. Colonel Taplett
places an urgent call to the heavier enforcers, MAG-
33 and the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines Artillery.
290
The combination results in yet another bloody
thrashing of the enemy. Without pause, streams shells
trounce the defenders, knocking them into a period of
bewilderment. After about one hour of relentless pun-
ishment, the North Koreans abandon the hill, but their
path becomes a death funnel. While maintaining the
pressure on Hill 117, some of the guns make minor ad-
justments, and then the gunners begin to catapult blaz-
ing steel spears into the retreating North Koreans.
In concert, the Corsairs begin spitting fire into the
retreating enemy, leaving the ridges, slopes and high-
way blanketed with additional scores of dead North
Koreans. Following the pulverizing of the objective,
Lieutenant Robert Bohn initiates the last rung of Com-
pany G’s attack; almost effortlessly, it secures Hill 117
at 1515. Soon after setting up occupancy, the Marines
spot a retiring T-34 tank and some accompanying
enemy infantry, all scooting toward the lines of the 9th
Infantry Regiment; Company G machine gunners
commence firing and rake the enemy column, scatter-
ing it.
Meanwhile, Communist reinforcements are driving
along the MSR to the North Korean lines; however, be-
tween Hill 117 and Kang-ni, a deluge of fire from the sky
brings the advance to a succinct halt. The column is vir-
tually decimated after being struck by a massive fusillade
delivered by diving Corsairs and artillery shells. The entire
area resembles a giant scrap yard. Enemy antitank guns,
vehicles, machine guns, mortars and tanks litter the land-
scape. Some of the armor is burning and some is operable,
but all is unmanned.
The Marine attack has also regained an enormous
amount of previously captured Eighth Army equipment,
including artillery pieces, mortars, vehicles, and tanks, as
well as ammunition and small arms. These and some re-
captured supply depots are transferred to the 2nd Divi-
sion. An apparent enemy command post is seized and
among the prizes are large quantities of documents and
maps that are subsequently scrutinized by Army and Ma-
rine intelligence personnel.
With Hill 117 secure, the brigade prepares for the next
part of the operation. In conjunction, the 9th Regiment,
USA, advances to the heights northeast of the 3rd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, culminating the first part of the 2nd Di-
vision’s counterattack plan. With all coordinating units at
Phase Line One, General Craig receives orders from Gen-
eral Keiser to drive toward Phase Line Two, drawn through
Hill 125 and Observation Hill.
The Marine Brigade’s western boundary line beyond
Kang-ni is the MSR, restricting the 3rd Battalion from
driving west from its positions; therefore, Newton’s 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines, is ordered to seize the next objec-
tive: Cloverleaf. It lies about 1,000 yards distant, slightly
south of the MSR at Hwayong-ni.
The Marines are greeted with the well-known re-
pugnant scent of a rice paddy when Companies A and
B spring forward, the former on the left and the latter
slightly below the MSR. Company B, under Captain
Fenton, encounters resistance immediately. Enemy ma-
chine gun posted in the high ground north of
 291
Hwayong-ni pour fire upon the advancing unit. The
normal operating procedure during this ongoing mis-
sion is quickly set in motion. Colonel Newton again
requests air support to neutralize the enemy-held ridge,
and like a magician pulling rabbits out of a hat, Cor-
sairs reappear and terminate the machine gun fire.
Company B leaps forward, and at 1800, Cloverleaf is
secure.
Colonel Murray directs the 1st and 3rd Battalions,
both at the front, to establish their respective night
perimeters. Both units are instructed to be ready to
reinitiate the advance at 0800 on the 5th. The Marine
Brigade stretches out in configurations nearly identi-
cal to those of the night before. The 1st Battalion’s po-
sitions are to the left front about 1,000 yards out. Com-
panies A and B string a precarious line nearly one mile
in length with a totally exposed left flank. But again,
throughout the night, the perimeter receives no genuine
threats from enemy ground troops.
Nevertheless, the night does not pass without inci-
dent. The North Koreans spend the evening and early
morning hours bombarding the perimeter. Taplett’s 3rd
Battalion receives little rest due to the shelling. The 1st
Battalion, under Newton, is also subjected to the ha-
rassing barrages. Newton’s command post sustains sev-
eral direct hits that cause casualties. One Marine is
killed and two are wounded. One artillery officer, Lieu-
tenant Joris Snyder, is poised only several feet from the
impact of a 120-mm shell. The explosion knocks him
into deep unconsciousness, but otherwise he escapes
unscathed and recovers in about three hours.
At about 0230 on the 5th, Major Joseph Reinburg’s
night-fighters (VMF(N)-513) arrive from their base in
Japan and effectively strike the most blatant enemy mor-
tar position, successfully terminating most of the
shelling. Then the aircraft deliver some well-placed
bombs (including fragmentation type) on detected
enemy vehicles and troop locations.
Prior to dawn, the enemy attempts to execute a prob-
ing mission against the lines of the 3rd Battalion, but
Companies G and H are both alert and prepared. Sen-
tries quickly detect the movement to their front. In a
flash, 81-mm illuminating shells are catapulted sky-
ward and when they burst, a few small contingents of
enemy troops are showcased. In response, the enemy
pops off some ineffective rounds, but there is no deter-
mined attempt to launch an attack. However, one de-
tachment seemingly inadvertently blunders badly and
finds itself at the 3rd Battalion command post. Some
eager weapons company personnel, manning a listening
post, extend an iron hand. One N.K. officer is killed and
the others flee. The duration of the night remains quiet
until dawn, when the North Koreans launch a bold at-
tack against the nearby 9th Regiment, USA.
Meanwhile, General Walker reluctantly releases the
1st Marine Provisional Brigade from the operational
control of the 2nd Division, effective September 5 at
midnight. Walker has relented, but he remains con-
vinced that he must maintain the Marine brigade to
ensure the safety of the perimeter. In contrast, the
September 3, 1950
build-up for the imminent amphibious invasion of
South Korea mandates the participation of the Marine
Brigade.
On the 5th, with the repulse of the enemy attack
against the 9th Infantry completed, Colonel Newton
orders Companies A and B to jump off at 0800. While
the Marines on Cloverleaf assemble for the assault
against Obong-ni, two U.S. Air Force planes, lacking
air-ground controllers, inadvertently strafe Companies
A and B while they are attacking enemy positions on the
high ground north of Hwayong-ni. The aircraft spring
the stinging raid by honing in from the north to zap
the ridge from there southward. As the planes begin
their ascent from the dive, the Marines come under a
storm of fire. One Marine is wounded by the friendly
fire.
After the air strike, at 0820, the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, advances westward, moving through a thick
fog and a penetrating rain to secure its segment of Phase
Line Two, Hill 125 and Observation Hill, the two re-
maining obstacles between the Marines and bloodied
Obong-ni Ridge, the final objective in front of the
Naktong River. Air support is hindered throughout the
day by inclement weather.
Companies A and B trudge through the rice paddy
below the MSR and make swift progress to a point
where the road makes a sharp right angle turn, leading
south for about 1,000 yards before it reverts back to its
western direction. At the re-initiation of the western
route, Company B, led by Captain Fenton, swivels to-
ward the base of the heights. Meanwhile, Company A,
led by Captain Stevens, drives toward the summit of
Observation Hill. The MSR separates the two attack-
ing units. Company A begins the tedious climb up the
eastern slopes of Observation Hill, while Company B
seizes the eastern wing of Hill 125.
At 0935, the Communists on Obong-ni Ridge de-
liver mortars and artillery shells to the advancing Com-
panies A and B of the 3rd Battalion; however, the 1st
Battalion, 11th Marines, steps in with its artillery.
Combined with the mortars of the 3rd Battalion, the
Marines return an even more resounding proclamation
to the North Koreans. Companies A and B maintain the
advance and seize Hill 125 and Observation Hill by
1100. Colonel Murray then orders the 1st Battalion to
suspend its advance, pausing at Phase Line Two, until
the 9th Regiment moves up to positions on Company
B’s right. In the meantime, intermittent automatic
weapons fire from Obong-ni harasses both companies.
Meanwhile, at 1000, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
had begun to swing around the rear of Cloverleaf, ma-
neuvering southward to deploy on the 5th Marines’ left
as part of a two-battalion assault against Obong-ni.
Company G moves swiftly through the rice paddy
south of Cloverleaf, bolstered by the artillery and 75-
mm recoilless rifles that pummel suspected enemy em-
placements. Soon after, Lieutenant Robert Bohn and his
command reach the base of the high ground of Hill 91,
a southern extension of the Obong-ni. Bohn immedi-
ately requests cessation of the support guns’ fire,
September 3, 1950
including that of the accompanying tanks. Company G
then bolts toward the summit. Immediately, it receives
some aid from a 75-mm recoilless rifle, which deci-
mates a machine gun and its crew just as the position
is being set up on the crest.
With the advance still in its infancy and merely a
few yards up the slope, unexpected orders arrive. The
Marines are directed to abort the assault. Company H,
moving between Hill 91 and Observation Hill en route
to the eastern approaches of Obong-ni, also receives
orders to halt its advance. Both companies are directed
to disengage and return to Observation Hill, where the
regimental commander, Colonel Murray, is redeploy-
ing the 5th Marines along the MSR.
The reason for the suddenly aborted attack soon be-
comes clear. On the crest of Hill 125, where Company
B, 1st Battalion, had been halted earlier, the Marines are
deployed in their recently dug foxholes that now re-
semble mud holes. The battalion’s supporting tanks
(1st Platoon) are poised in the road cut behind the
sharp curve that swings around the forward slopes of the
hill. The view from the crest is less than breathtaking,
with the village of Tugok and Finger Ridge to the east
and west, respectively, and to the southwest, Obong-ni,
which has just received a reprieve.
The men wait and watch, but it is daylight, making
an enemy attack unlikely. The troops still come under
some intermittent fire, but the only noted symbol of
enemy presence is three dead T-34 tanks that have been
in the road since an engagement with the brigade two
weeks prior.
And then, at 1420, conditions begin to change. The
haunting fog still hovers above the battlefield and the
dismal rainstorm continues to saturate the troops, but
nonetheless the aura is shifting. The infrequent clang of
the enemy weapons heats up from a simmer to a boil
and beyond, until it reaches the equivalency of a full-
scale preparatory fire. Within minutes, Company B is
besieged with enfilade fire, which is poured upon its
lines from machine gun positions on the northern
fringe of Obong-ni. Slightly after this thunderstorm of
fire commences, the enemy’s camouflaged positions at
Tugok open fire, and this action is joined by fierce fire
originating on the northern foundation of Observation
Hill. These guns pummel the crest with more auto-
matic weapons fire. Adding more fury to the thrust, an
antitank gun bellows from its position on Finger Ridge.
All the while, enemy tanks and infantry advance under
a ghoulish drab fog, in synchronization with the inces-
sant support fire.
The Communists, spearheaded by T-34s, drive down
the MSR, unbeknownst to the Marines’ 1st Platoon of
tanks. The situation further worsens due to a colossal
equipment failure. While Captain Fenton is informing
Colonel Newton about the enemy attack, his radio dies.
Almost instantaneously every other radio in Company
B goes dead, slain by the constant rain and mud. Con-
sequently, there is no possibility of warning the tanks
of the imminent approach of the T-34s. Lieutenant
Pomeroy, oblivious to the encroaching enemy armor
292
and lacking contact with Fenton, quickly orders his
tanks to move forward and take positions on the other
side of the curve to strike at the enemy machine gun po-
sitions on Obong-ni Ridge to relieve the pressure on
Company B.
Meanwhile, as the opposing contingents of tanks are
both converging on the curve, the accompanying
enemy infantry swings onto the slopes of Hill 125 and
begins a dash toward the summit. In concert, another
enemy detachment emerges from a draw in the vicin-
ity of Tugok. Insulated by heavy supporting fire, the
contingent strikes against Company B’s right flank.
Fenton, having no realistic alternatives, is compelled
to hold the crest. He staggers his troops in exposed po-
sitions around the peak. Then, to protect his left flank,
he deploys his assault squad on the slopes just below
his positions. From these restricted positions, Fenton
expects to intercept the threat on the MSR and beat
back the assault, or face annihilation.
During these rapidly passing moments of desperate
action, the opposing tanks continue their movement
and become separated only by seconds. They are nearly
nose to nose. Still unaware of the presence of enemy
armor, the lead M-26, its turret pointing toward the
left front, takes the curve. Unexpectedly, it is struck
with a vicious close-range hit before it can swivel its
turret into proper positioning. Several more 85-mm
shells plow into the Pershing and destroy it. This is the
first loss of a Marine tank to the enemy. The trailing M-
26 plows forward and attempts to maneuver on the
slim, serpentine curve, which is now partially blocked
by the lead tank. The narrowness of the easement hin-
ders movement and the 2nd tank also falls prey to the
enemy armor. The double loss blocks the entire passage,
causing the remaining tanks to halt and leave respon-
sibility for final victory to the ground Marines. De-
spite the loss of the two tanks, the crews safely escape
their disabled armor. Engineers accompanying the
tanks rush to aid the wounded crewmen.
Fenton’s deployment of the assault platoon on the
slopes becomes a welcome hand of trump cards. The in-
fantry starts with a bang: using 3.5 rockets. The
Marines destroy the first enemy T-34 and soon after, the
rockets decimate the second tank. The third and final
enemy armored vehicle advances, and yet another per-
fectly aimed rocket destroys the personnel carrier.
In the meantime, the Marines of Company B retain
control of the crest of Hill 125, but they remain under
siege and their ammunition supply is rapidly dimin-
ishing. The 60-mm mortars are totally expended and
Company B’s casualty list soars under the roar of the
enemy fire. Nonetheless, the Marines continue to
thwart the North Koreans by tossing grenades as if the
supply were infinite. Without pause, the Marines also
ignore the deluge of murderous enemy automatic
weapons fire criss-crossing the crest. They maintain
strict discipline and snap off incessant small arms fire
to keep the Communists at bay.
By 1500, the situation on Hill 125 appears grim. The
ammunition is scarce, but the Marines do not contemplate
 293
surrender of the ridge. Fenton, still lacking communi-
cations, speeds a messenger to Colonel Newton to
arrange a resupply. All the while, the enemy keeps the
pressure high. At about 1530, Fenton spots Hill’s 9th
Regiment, USA, as it deploys in the heights north of his
besieged positions. He believes he has discovered a so-
lution to terminating the attack. Immediately, Fenton
dispatches another runner to brave the fire and reach
Colonel Hill’s command to request immediate support
fire from the 9th Regiment and to urgently request that
it be delivered to the immediate front of Company B,
5th Marines.
While Company B awaits help and continues to hold
its positions, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, begins re-
lieving Company A at its positions on Observation Hill.
Company A is ordered to depart without its grenades
and extra ammunition and to fall back to the rear, but
during the transfer of responsibility, Company A re-
ceives new orders directing it to speed to Hill 125 and
bolster Company B. After some quick reshuffling to
retrieve its ammunition, the unit shoves off to aid Fen-
ton’s command.
In the meantime, the second runner reaches Colo-
nel Hill (9th RCT). Soon after, the guns of the 9th Reg-
iment plaster the forward slopes in front of Fenton. The
commotion gets the delayed attention of the 1st Bat-
talion, 5th Marines’ mortar section. The combined fire-
power launches legions of scorching shells that irrigate
the forward slopes and exterminate more of the enemy.
Fenton’s intuition has paid off. His Marines still control
the hill, and reinforcements are close at hand.
Subsequent to relief by the 3rd Battalion, Captain
Stevens dispatches the 1st Platoon, Company A, to Hill
125. Without delay, upon arrival into the inferno on
the crest, the troops of Company A plop into the lines
and commence firing in unison with the troops of
Company B, all of whom are entrenched at the forward
wall.
The reinforcements and the additional grenades and
weapons are as welcome as Santa Claus on Christmas.
Despite the prolonged enemy hell-fire catapulted upon
Hill 125, Company B sustains only two dead during
the siege. Twenty-three other Marines are wounded.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, on Observation Hill
sustains twenty-four casualties inflicted by artillery and
mortar fire, until it is relieved by a unit of the 23rd Reg-
iment, USA, slightly after midnight (5th-6th). The suc-
cessful contribution of the artillery and the trailing mor-
tars crack the enemy attack against Fenton’s B
Company. Now, with further support of the mortars of
Company A, the power becomes focused on Obong-ni
and Finger Ridges. The relentless pounding of the
enemy-held positions terminates the attack with final-
ity. The North Koreans who remain alive retire to the
village of Tugok.
But the battle for Obong-ni is not quite over, and the
Marines are being pulled out before they can eliminate
the foe. Obong-ni Ridge still contains some of the be-
leaguered N.K. 9th Division and some green troops of
the N.K. 4th Division; however, both units have re-
September 3, 1950
ceived a severe thrashing since the U.S. offensive began
on September 3. Following the collision with the Ma-
rine Brigade, neither enemy division is capable of tak-
ing the offensive.
During the afternoon, Colonel Murray informs his
battalion commanders about General Craig’s final field
directive concerning the brigade’s activity within the
Pusan Perimeter. The order says, in part: “This my
OPN Order 22–50 x Commencing at 2400 5 Sept Brig
moves by rail and motor to staging area Pusan for fur-
ther operation against the enemy x Prior to commence-
ment of movement 5th Mars will stand relieved by elms
of 2nd Inf Div commencing at darkness.... Conceal
from the enemy activities connected with your with-
drawal.”
Just after midnight (5th-6th), at 0015, the 5th
Marines depart from their positions at Obong-ni Ridge
and begin the trek to Pusan to join the Seventh Fleet and
the 1st Marine Division. The 5th Marines’ battle casu-
alties stand at 35 killed, 91 wounded and none missing
in action.
After relief by the 2nd Infantry Division, the 5th
Marines, 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, joins the 1st
Marine Division to participate in the imminent Inva-
sion of Inchon.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Cavalry
Regiment, receives its initiation into battle at 1200
when it resumes the attack against Hill 518, which the
1st Battalion had not been able to seize on the previous
day. Identically to the attack by the 1st Battalion, the
3rd Battalion advances as a regiment, but due to the
space constraints, when the advance troops funnel
through the South Korean lines in the high ground,
they are squeezed into the size of about one squad, plac-
ing the attackers at a severe disadvantage as they strug-
gle up the slope against more withering fire. Hill 518
withstands the feeble assault, turning it back easily.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, Tabu-dong is taken by
contingents of the N.K. 1st Division, subsequent to
the pull-back of the regiment. And in the afternoon, the
slim force composing the I&R Platoon and a contingent
of South Korean police are forced from Ka-san, the
summit of Hill 902, less than five miles east of Tabu-
dong and a mere ten miles outside Taegu. With Hill
902 in possession of the enemy, the positions of the
90th Field Artillery Battalion become precarious.
Enemy artillery originating from the summit is able to
hit the area and it does so intermittently, inflicting some
damage. However, to the good fortune of the Ameri-
cans, the enemy lacks sufficient ammunition to cause
major harm. The entire perimeter comes under attack.
In this sector, General Walker and Eighth Army react
by rushing in a battalion of S.K. troops to fortify the
rear of the 8th Cavalry.
Meanwhile, Task Force Allen, commanded by
Brigadier General Frank Allen, Jr., is established by the
1st Cavalry Division. T.F. Allen is composed of two
provisional battalions selected from division headquar-
ters, technical service troops, the replacement company
September 3, 1950
and various other troops, including the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision band. All of the contingents are committed to
be thrown into combat in the event the enemy pene-
trates the fringe area of Taegu.
In the meantime, Eighth Army attempts to fend off
the enemy thrust by ordering the 1st Cavalry to initi-
ate a counterattack to re-secure Hill 902, which at pres-
ent gives the North Koreans a keen observation post,
permitting them to watch Eighth Army contingents
south of the hill and within Taegu itself.
Colonel Ernest Holmes, 1st Cavalry chief of staff in
General Gay’s absence from headquarters, receives a
telephone call from Eighth Army informing General
Gay that 1st Cavalry has responsibility for Ka-san, a
point that Gay has been stating was too far to extend
Tanks (M45 medium) during an Eighth Army breakout at Pusan beachhead.
294
his troops. But now the point is moot. Holmes informs
Army G-3 that he would tell General Gay and that
troops would be dispatched to Ka-san. Soon after, Gay
and Holmes confer and Gay concurs, stating that if
Eighth Army has ordered the responsibility, “it had to
be complied with.”
Colonel Palmer, commanding officer, 8th Cavalry
Regiment, details the plan of attack to Lt. Colonel
William C. Holley, C.O., 8th Engineering Battalion,
Lieutenant John T. Kennedy, Company D, 8th Engi-
neering Battalion, and the commanding officer of
Company E, 8th Cavalry. Company D will launch the
attack, trailed by Company E.
Company E had been designated as the point com-
pany, but the commanding officer had been unwilling
 295
to lead the attack. Consequently, he is relieved of com-
mand. The troops move out to the assembly area to
await orders to advance, but the orders don’t arrive,
prompting the companies to return to their perimeter.
The attack is launched on the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: Soon after
midnight (2nd-3rd), the N.K. 12th Division launches
its portion of the II Corps attack (0145), driving force-
fully into the S.K. Capital Division at several separate
points, causing the South Koreans to begin faltering
quickly. The S.K. 17th Regiment, defending the area
around Hill 445, and the 18th Regiment to the left,
near Hills 334 and 448, each give ground hurriedly
during the initial hours of attack. By sunrise, the enemy
pushes forward about five miles and reaches the pri-
mary east-west corridor highway, about three miles east
of An’gang-ni. The advance punishes the S.K. Capital
Division and hammers it nearly to total disintegration.
General Coulter immediately orders the 21st Regiment,
which had recently deployed north of Pohang-dong,
to pick up and redeploy near Kyongju.
The 2nd Battalion will arrive from An’gang-ni and
spread out, forming a horseshoe-shaped defense with
some contingents dispersed in the high ground about
two miles east of the town that dominates the Ky-
ongju–Pohang-dong Road. The balance of the regi-
ment moves to an assembly area just north of Kyongju.
In conjunctive and simultaneous action with the or-
ders of General Coulter, the recently activated S.K. 7th
Division is ordered by General Walker to speed toward
the An’gang-ni area to intercept and halt the enemy
penetration there.
During the afternoon, the first contingent of the S.K.
7th Division arrives in the designated area and the 5th
Regiment reaches Yongch’on. Later, the 3rd Regiment
(less 1st Battalion) pulls into Kyongju. General Walker
attempts to give General Coulter more firepower, au-
thorizing him to utilize the 3rd Battalion, 9th Regi-
ment, the 15th Field Artillery Battalion and the 9th
Infantry Regimental Tank Battalion, all of which are
posted at Yonil Airfield.
The departure of the 21st Infantry Regiment from
Pohang-dong and the other unfolding events there ap-
parently place the commanding officer of the S.K. 3rd
Division on edge. Colonel Emmerich alerts General
Coulter that the S.K. 3rd Division is making prepara-
tions to abandon Pohang-dong. Coulter persuades the
S.K. I Corps commander to issue orders forbidding the
evacuation. Coulter personally reinvestigates the situ-
ation about every half-hour to ensure the troops re-
main in place. Still, the situation in the S.K. I Corps de-
teriorates throughout the day.
Following darkness, the enemy pressure accelerates
and the attacks liquidate the entire S.K. I Corps line.
A battery of S.K. artillery is routed by the enemy prior
to the dislodging of two battalions of the S.K. 5th Reg-
iment, 7th S.K. Division. By 0220, on the morning of
the 4th, following an artillery bombardment, the
enemy plows into An’gang-ni. Within another hour,
the S.K. Capital Division abandons its command post
September 3, 1950
there. This move is carried out without informing
Company G, 21st U.S. Regiment. Adding to the
dilemma, the supporting fire of the U.S. tanks is ter-
minated at 0400, as the remaining South Koreans and
the enemy forces become totally blended, frustrating
the tankers, who cannot distinguish the South Kore-
ans from the enemy troops.
— In Japan: Typhoon Jane sweeps by with her roar-
ing 110-mile-an-hour winds at just about noon,
wreaking terrible havoc for more than three and one-
half hours. The powerful winds create forty-foot waves
that overwhelm the dock area and imperil both man
and machine, pushing both to the brink. Despite the
precautions taken upon advance notice of the typhoon,
nature prevails. One huge 200-ton crane is sheared
from its base, as if it had been torn from cardboard.
Port troops and Marines work tirelessly to forestall ca-
tastrophe, but they must struggle against unruly break-
ers that engulf the piers.
During the desperate effort, even the massive war-
ships are mismatched. Seven vessels are sprung from
their moorings when heavy-duty steel lines, with di-
ameters of two and one-half inches, snap like twisted
paper clips. The calamity exposes the overmatched
ships to the raging surf. However, the wild storm that
had zoomed in from the east begins to subside by about
1530, permitting the troops to rebound and get a bet-
ter grip on the situation. Fortunately, no major damage
is sustained, and by 1630, the wildcat storm has passed
over Kobe and begins whipping over the churning sea.
The trailing tranquility is appreciated, but there is
hardly time to relax, as it is time for a mandated field
day. The cleanup crew is everyone and sufficient toil
remains in the wake. Several ships are flooded, causing
damage to the cargo. Some other vessels are put into
drydock to receive emergency repairs. The cargo aboard
the transport Marine Phoenix had shifted drastically
during the storm causing a sharp list, but it is quickly
adjusted and righted.
General Field Harris, USMC, commanding general
1st MAW, and his staff arrive in Tokyo. Many of his
staff move to Itami Airfield; however, General Field
and several others remain in Tokyo to attend the con-
ferences concerning Inchon. In Tokyo, Marine, Navy
and Army officers meet to decide the fate of the 5th
Marines and its place with regard to Inchon. General
Almond, USA, former chief of staff, General Head-
quarters Far East Command, and now commander of
X Corps, states that the 5th Marines will remain in
Korea with Eighth Army and that the 32nd Regiment,
7th Division, will replace it for the invasion of Inchon.
General Oliver Smith and Admirals Doyle, Joy and
Struble reiterate his position concerning the 32nd Reg-
iment’s unpreparedness for an amphibious invasion,
and then Smith emphatically restates the preeminence
of the 5th Marines’ presence for the Inchon invasion.
Shortly thereafter, General Almond excuses himself
and departs to confer with MacArthur, explaining the
stalemate to him and advising MacArthur that the Navy
and General Smith are not willing to strike Inchon
September 4, 1950
without the 5th Marines. MacArthur informs Almond:
“Tell Walker he will have to give up the 5th Marine
Regiment.” Admiral Struble offers a compromise, com-
mitting the 5th Marines to the counterattack, while
the 32nd Regiment or equivalent unit from the 7th Di-
vision embarks for Korea from Japan to replace it when
the fires are extinguished. The latter solution is finally
accepted.
On the following day, MacArthur sends General
Wright to Taegu, Korea, to update General Walker and
inform him of the situation.
In other activity, Admiral Struble issues JTF Seven
Operational Plan 9–50 (Inchon Invasion). The Task
Force components are: TF-90, Attack Force, com-
manded by Rear Admiral Doyle; TF-92, X Corps,
commanded by Major General Edward Almond; TF-
99, Patrol and Reconnaissance Force, commanded by
Rear Admiral G.R. Henderson; 4TF-91, Blockade and
Covering Force, commanded by Rear Admiral W.G.
Andrews (Royal Navy); TF-77, Fast Carrier Force,
commanded by Rear Admiral E.C. Ewen; Logistic Sup-
port Force, commanded by Captain B.L. Austin, USN;
and TF-70.1, Flagship Group, commanded by Cap-
tain E.L. Woodyard, USN.
Air support operating within the Naval Force in-
cludes naval aircraft from the USS Boxer, Marine air-
craft from their two accompanying escort carriers and
British aircraft from a light British carrier. All aircraft
missions will be controlled from the USS Mount
McKinley, the flagship of the amphibious force. The
planes and surface vessels are restricted, the former for-
bidden from operating within twenty miles of Chinese
or Soviet territory and the latter under orders to re-
main outside the twelve-mile limit of the same coun-
tries. While the carriers of the 7th Fleet are getting re-
supplied this day, the operation is protected by Marine
carrier-based planes operating from Ashiya Air Force
Base.
September 4 Reports concerning the involve-
ment of the Chinese in the Korean conflict have been
coming into U.S. Intelligence for some time, and these
observations have alleged that Chinese troops have been
heading north and deploying in large numbers along the
Chinese side of the Yalu River, poised for action in
Korea. There is also much speculation that the Soviets
are intertwined in the hostilities, by virtue of directing
Chinese and North Korean activities. While various
American military leaders in the U.S. and Japan are
piecing together the fragments of information to de-
termine the seriousness of the situation, some conclu-
sive evidence is gathered this day. (See also, In Naval
activity, this day.)
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, receives or-
ders to attack to the rear to secure the alternate route
(Chirwon Road). Colonel Murch’s command initiates
the assault. The force drives along the road between
the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 35th Regiment, leaving
Company G, 35th Regiment, to hold Hill 179. Soon
296
after launching the attack, Murch is informed that
Company G has been dislodged from the hill. This
compels Murch to reverse direction and assist the be-
leaguered unit.
By about noon, the mission is accomplished, and
Company G is again given responsibility for the area,
while Murch’s 2nd Battalion resumes the attack to clear
the supply lines, expending much of its ammunition
in the process. Adding to the complexity of the clear-
ing attack against large numbers of enemy troops, the
area is besieged by a tumultuous rainstorm that im-
pedes the vision of the attacking troops.
Meanwhile, the enemy continues to pour more
troops into the area behind the 35th Regiment. Lack-
ing sufficient ammunition, Colonel Murch pulls back
his battalion and the men to dig in while awaiting re-
supply, which will not occur until the following day.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment (3rd
Battalion, 29th Regiment), led by Colonel DeChow,
cancels its attack toward the 24th Regiment command
post. New orders direct it to drive toward Komam-ni
to intercept an enemy force attacking the positions of
the artillery there. At 0900, despite heavy resistance,
including intense small arms fire, the 3rd Battalion
plows straight ahead and drives toward the heights
above the Komam-ni crossroads. The fighting remains
nasty throughout the afternoon and conditions on the
field worsen as torrential rains pound the area. With
the help of air support, the determined effort makes
progress, but the casualties continue to mount, dimin-
ishing the battalion’s strength. By day’s end, Companies
I and K seize the objective and retain the heights
throughout the night.
On the following day, Colonel DeChow, diverted
from his initial task of attacking to relieve the pressure
on the 24th Regiment’s command post, will resume
that mission. General Kean, aware that the strength of
DeChow’s 3rd Battalion has been terribly zapped by
the gruesome contest near the Komam-ni crossroads, or-
ders Company C, 65th Engineer Combat Battalion, to
be attached to the 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment.
Meanwhile, west of Haman, the 1st Battalion, 27th
Regiment, under Colonel Check retains control of the
regained positions of the 24th Regiment. At dusk, the
1st Battalion relinquishes the ridge to the 1st Battal-
ion, 24th Regiment, and Company F, 2nd Battalion,
24th Regiment. Consequently, the 1st Battalion, 27th
Regiment, moves out and establishes a defensive
perimeter on the other side of Haman, about one and
one-half miles east of the town. Colonel Champney re-
establishes his 24th Regimental command post at the
foundation of a hill about 300 yards west of the center
of Haman.
Undeterred by the savage losses inflicted upon them
by the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, the enemy mounts
another night attack against Haman and it is a lesson
in persistence. A component of the enemy assault force,
composed of about two companies, encroaches the po-
sitions of Company H, which is designated as security
for the regimental command post. The command
 297
A solitary tree and one onlooker above the docks and rail yards at Pusan.
center is on a hill along the western fringes of town.
About one-half of the enemy contingent lacks weapons,
but the security force departs the area without taking
notice or offering even minimal resistance. Not one
single shot is fired by the troops of Company H, which
permits the enemy to casually pick up two abandoned
machine guns and make a stealth advance toward the
command post.
The enemy presence becomes explicitly evident when
the two captured machine guns open fire on the troops
at the CP. The puny enemy detachment moves to
within about 100 yards of the command post, but at
that point, the North Koreans are intercepted by troops
of the I&R Platoon. Following a brief exchange of
grenades, the North Koreans scurry away; however, one
enemy grenade lands in an ammunition vehicle and
creates an illusion that a major battle is occurring
within Haman. Later, three tanks enter the skirmish
and the enemy is driven from the town.
Meanwhile, about twenty of the nocturnal enemy
marauders move discreetly and creep close to the posi-
tions of the command post of the 1st Battalion, 24th
Regiment, creating yet another instant stir. The North
Koreans flick a few grenades and pop off some burp
gun fire, which certainly stimulates the troops at the
command post. Approximately forty-five regimental
troops and about twenty South Korean recruits are po-
sitioned there when the fireworks begin. By sunrise,
the small enemy force is beaten back, but an astonished
battalion executive officer, Major Eugene J. Carson,
discovers that many of his defending troops have mys-
September 4, 1950
teriously vanished. Seven wounded troops and 23 able
bodied men remain with him on the hill for the con-
clusion of the skirmish.
As Carson glances down the slope, he detects move-
ment in the rice paddies below his command. About
forty friendly troops are extricating themselves from
the soggy paddies and moving toward a friendly tank,
which is holding a roadblock. The stragglers offer
greatly exaggerated reports of being overrun by the
enemy and being driven from their positions on the
hill.
While this debacle is unfolding, another contingent
of the 24th Regiment posted west of Haman also
deserts its positions, leaving a roadblock totally unat-
tended. One officer and about 35 to 40 troops flee to-
ward the positions of Colonel Check’s 1st Battalion,
27th Regiment, reaching there about 0500 on the
morning of the 5th, with additional unfounded tales
of gloom and doom.
In the 2nd Division area, 1st Provisional Marine
Brigade sector (See also, SECOND BATTLE OF THE NAK-
TONG BULGE, September 3, 1950), Hill 209 remains
in the hands of the Spartan force of TF Manchu rem-
nants, but the overwhelming enemy pressure has not
subsided, and the menacing enemy fire continues to
rake the confined perimeter. Some troops react irra-
tionally and jump from their foxholes in a state of be-
wilderment, nearly guaranteeing themselves instant
death. Again, no planes arrive to provide support fire,
and the artillery remains silent. Undaunted, the de-
fenders hold the line and relentlessly return fire. The
September 4, 1950
gallant stand is successful, but the men are unaware
that their stalwart defense on Hill 209 has severely pun-
ished the attackers.
Toward darkness, Lieutenant McDoniel decides that
he must abandon the hill to save his command. He is
cognizant that his remaining effective troops are each
down to about one clip of ammunition and that they
have expended nearly all their grenades during the quest
to retain the position. But, after sundown and prior to
withdrawal, the enemy signals yet another attack. It
then becomes obvious that the stalwart defense had
been effective. Their fortitude on the beleaguered hill
pays dividends. Several enemy grenades fall into the
perimeter to signal the attack; however, none of the in-
fantry advance, despite the repeated order, “Manzai.”
Finally, at 2200, after sustaining themselves for five
nights and four days, Lieutenants McDoniel and
Charles Caldwell (Company D), the other surviving
officer begin the dangerous withdrawal. The two offi-
cers and 27 surviving troops split into small groups and
head for safe territory.
Sergeant Watkins, who had contributed so much to
retain the hill, remains paralyzed and refuses to im-
pede the withdrawal. According to later testimony by
survivors, Watkins asks that his carbine be loaded, then
placed upon his chest with the barrel directly under
his chin, and it is further reported that a broad smile
remained on his face as he wished them good luck on
their journey. Sergeant Travis Watkins receives the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his unrelenting
courage and leadership during the five-night four-day
battle for Hill 209.
Of the twenty-nine troops who move off Hill 209,
twenty-two reach friendly lines. Lieutenant Caldwell
is captured on the 6th, but his two North Koreans cap-
tors fail to murder him. After pounding him in the head
with a rock, the enemy tosses him over a cliff into the
Naktong River, but he survives and feigns death. Then
after dark, Caldwell continues his escape and he even-
tually reaches the lines of the 72nd Tank Battalion on
September 10. Nonetheless, the heroic stance on Hill
209 further adds to the laurels of the U.S. Army, as the
survivors bring out important intelligence concerning
the activity of the enemy in the area near the Paekchin
Ferry.
In about three weeks, when the Americans return to
the scene of the fighting on Hill 209, the sight is
ghastly. The approximate number of U.S. dead is thirty,
but many of the bodies have been obliterated, and it is
impossible at times to determine whether two or three
Americans are in a foxhole. Fifteen of the corpses are
identifiable.
In other activity, General Haynes adjusts the bound-
ary between the 23rd and 38th Regiments, relinquish-
ing the northern sector of the 23rd Regiment to the
38th Regiment, thereby permitting the 23rd to shore
up its defenses along the Pugong-ni–Changnyong
Road. In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion, 38th Regi-
ment, which had sped to rescue Hutchin’s 1st Battal-
ion, remains near Hill 209. Hutchins’ 1st Battalion, 23rd
298
Regiment, departs the area and heads south to fortify
the 2nd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, which is defending
the southern route into Changnyong.
Subsequent to its tenacious three-day stand,
Hutchin’s 1st Battalion has sustained about 500 casu-
alties, drastically draining its original strength of 1,100
troops. Nonetheless, Hutchin’s battered battalion will
deploy on the left flank of the 2nd Battalion. The 23rd
Regimental command post is transplanted to the rear
of the 1st Battalion. Severe fighting continues in the
23rd Regiment’s sector and frequently, while fending off
North Korean assaults from the front, concentrated ef-
forts are required to eliminate constant and nagging
enemy penetrations to the rear, which hinder the sup-
ply route. In conjunction, the enemy launches an espe-
cially heavy assault against the 23rd’s perimeter on Sep-
tember 8.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: General
Wright arrives in Taegu from MacArthur’s headquarters
in Japan to meet with General Walker and to inform
him that General MacArthur has ordered that the Ma-
rine Brigade must be released from Eighth Army by the
night of the 5th-6th. Wright also explains that the 17th
Regiment, 7th Division, will be sailing from Japan on
the 6th to be placed in Eighth Army floating reserve.
MacArthur also sends word that the 65th Regiment,
3rd Division, due in Japan about September 18, will
also be sent to Korea to further augment Eighth Army.
In related activity, General Walker requests through
General Wright that Eighth Army be granted permis-
sion to withhold its scheduled attack on the 15th in
conjunction with X Corps until the 16th, giving Eighth
Army a one day reprieve. Wright concurs with Walker
on the timing of Eighth Army’s involvement, and soon
after, MacArthur also approves.
In other activity, General Walker directs the 24th
Division to relinquish its reserve positions outside
Taegu. On the following day, the 24th Division is to
move to the 2nd Division sector at the Naktong Bulge
to relieve the Marines who are preparing to move out
and join the Inchon Invasion force. The 24th Division
had endured a dreary trek, which culminated on the
banks of the Naktong outside Susan’ni, where it has
spent the night in a torrential downpour. Nonetheless,
the relief of the Marines is canceled before execution
begins. The 24th Division receives more recent orders
directing it to again pick up and move to Kyongju to
bolster General Coulter and TF Jackson.
In the 1st Cavalry sector, the enemy (N.K. 3rd Divi-
sion) continues to repel attacks by contingents of the 7th
Cavalry Regiment. Based on information from a cap-
tured North Korean soldier, Hill 518 is apparently de-
fended by about 1,200 well-supplied North Koreans.
In other activity, Hill 303 is seized by the 2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Cavalry Regiment. Fighting is prevalent
throughout the 5th and 7th Cavalry zones north of
Taegu. While the U.S. assaults are underway, the N.K.
3rd Division has been unfolding its own attacks, and
simultaneously it pushes large numbers of troops to
positions behind the U.S. lines. An overwhelming
 299
contingent of North Koreans moves toward the 7th
Cavalry, passing through a break between the 3rd Bat-
talion’s positions on Hill 518 (southern slope) and the
2nd Battalion posted slightly west.
At the 3rd Battalion command post on Hill 518, it
seems as if the enemy is preparing to swing east to at-
tack it, but rather, the enemy turns westward, then
solidly occupies Hill 464, giving the 3rd Battalion a
temporary reprieve. However, enemy-occupied Hill
464, located on the southern side of the Waegwan–-
Tabu-dong Road, creates new threats as the 7th Cav-
alry Regiment becomes sandwiched between two
enemy-held hills, 464 to its rear and 518 to its front.
With the severing of the Waegwan–Tabu-dong
Road, the 7th Cavalry Regiment’s communications be-
come limited to those units to the west. The recent de-
velopments within the 7th Cavalry sector compel the
regiment to pull back on Hill 518. Later, on the follow-
ing day, more dramatic withdrawals occur.
Meanwhile, the enemy’s hopes of victory have not
dwindled. Additional forces continue to penetrate the
cavalry defenses and render the perimeter nearly un-
tenable. The 1st Cavalry Division’s ammunition sup-
ply depot in Taegu also is considered possibly endan-
gered. The rail cars are soon crammed with
ammunition and prepared to roll farther south to safer
positions. In conjunction, opposing rail traffic north
of Samnangjin on the primary rail line ceases. The east-
ern rail line handling rail traffic east of Kyongju also
halts.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, Company D, 8th Engineer
Combat Battalion, lacking rations, moves to re-secure
Ka-san (Hill 902) with Company E, 8th Cavalry Reg-
iment, transporting food, water and supplies, trailing.
Company D comes under sniper fire as it prepares to
lunge forward from the base of the hill to recapture it
from what is supposed to be a defending force of about
seventy-five enemy soldiers. However, the hill had been
reinforced on the previous day, and it is now fortified
by the 2nd Battalion, 2nd Regiment, 1st N.K. Division.
At about noon, the attack commences and soon
after, it comes under a hail of enemy machine gun fire
that slows the assault. Eventually, while the force ad-
vances cautiously, BAR fire from the 3rd Platoon elim-
inates the gun. Farther along the route, more enemy
fire again halts progress, but artillery fire is called upon
and the gun is destroyed.
Company E, 8th Cavalry Regiment, trailing attack-
ing Company D, makes little progress. The company
commander is relieved when he states that he cannot ad-
vance because of the enemy mortar fire. The new com-
manding officer of Company E somehow breaks his
glasses on some rocks, and he informs Colonel Holley,
the CO of the 8th Engineering Battalion, that he, too,
cannot advance. The second officer is told to get on
the phone with Colonel Palmer, who is moving with
Company D. Palmer orders him to attack without his
glasses. Within a short while, this officer becomes
wounded in the leg.
Meanwhile, the attacking column of engineers
September 4, 1950
swings off the path when it ends abruptly at a ravine.
The column then resumes the climb amidst more enemy
fire, which continues to inflict casualties. The 8th Cav-
alry Regimental commander, Colonel Palmer, and his
S-2, Captain Rene Guiraud, without the knowledge of
General Gay, are with the attack force. During the as-
cent, the leader of the 2nd Platoon becomes disabled
and the platoon leadership is passed to Sergeant James
Vandygriff, who leads his command forward, and at
about 1700, it is the first to emerge from a tunnel that
passes under a ridge and the stone wall. The 2nd Pla-
toon then pushes to the summit of Hill 755, which is the
southern limb of Ka-san (Hill 902).
Colonel Palmer, although only about fifty yards from
the crest, is ordered by General Gay to immediately de-
scend. Company D, comprising ninety men, establishes
its command post in the tunnel to the rear of the 2nd
Platoon. The platoons spread out in a semi-circle, from
west to northeast, with the 1st Platoon holding the an-
chor on a wooded mound in the center and flanked left
to right by the 2nd in the vicinity of the stone wall. The
three platoons all are within the wall, but the positions
of the 3rd Platoon are where the wall has fallen apart
and been covered with brush.
While the troops are establishing the perimeter on
the summit, enemy mortar fire, originating from a ridge
to the east, begins to strike the crest. The platoons, how-
ever, apparently make no request for counter-artillery fire
to silence the enemy guns. Within about one-half hour,
after its ascent to the crest, Company D comes under a
severe attack, but most of the 3rd Platoon is unaware,
because two squads have gone out toward enemy mor-
tar positions. The enemy force, composed of about one
battalion, has advanced from Hill 902. It hammers
against Company D, pitting the brunt of the strike
against the 2nd Platoon.
The two entrenched machine guns and the made-to-
order 15-foot wall add some insulation to the besieged
company and Sergeant Vandygriff ’s 2nd Platoon. The
assault is beaten back. Just before the attack, Lieuten-
ant Thomas T. Jones, leading the 3rd Platoon, which
had initially discovered the location of the enemy mor-
tars, returns from a meeting with the company com-
mander to find that his platoon sergeant had advanced
with two squads toward the enemy mortars. Lieutenant
Kennedy, Company D commander, is unaware of the ac-
tions of the 3rd Platoon.
In the meantime, more than ten enemy troops, bran-
dishing weapons and one machine gun, are encroach-
ing the remaining squad of the 3rd Platoon, which re-
mains at the fringe of the woods. Jones ventures forward
to retrieve the two roving squads to bolster the line,
but he departs without his radio, thinking the mission
will be short. Jones locates one squad, but the other is
too far out, prompting him to dispatch a runner. Lieu-
tenant Jones is also unable to return to the 3rd squad,
which remains with the company on the crest of Hill
755. In the meantime, the enemy launches an attack
against the summit, and Jones’ contingent believes the
North Koreans have severed the return route.
September 4, 1950
The only voices heard by the isolated troops with
Jones are those of the enemy. Jones attempts to con-
tact the 3rd Platoon. He sends out a patrol, but it re-
turns stating that rocket launchers and two light ma-
chine guns were in place, but no troops could be found.
In the meantime, the 3rd squad had rejoined Company
D. Back at the command post, at 2000, Company E,
8th Cavalry, with its third commanding officer (on the
same day) resumes its advance from the base of the hill
to join the engineers of Company D. The unit climbs
to within fifty yards of the crest by dawn of the fol-
lowing day, but it is stopped there by fierce enemy fire.
Nonetheless, Company D retains possession of the hill
throughout the night, withstanding the incessant
nerve-wracking rains and several probing attacks.
Lieutenant Jones (3rd Platoon), while attempting to
reach the two forward squads, had heard the main at-
tack. He becomes convinced the route back to the 3rd
squad and the remainder of the company had been cut
by the enemy. Lacking his radio and thinking the hill
had been lost, he and his eight-man contingent attempt
to make it back to friendly lines. They are captured by
the enemy on September 10. Some others from for-
ward squads of the 3rd Platoon do succeed in reaching
friendly lines.
In conjunction, troops of the S.K. 1st Division cap-
ture a North Korean soldier, who relates that about 800
North Korean troops occupy Ka-san, and he claims
that three more battalions are approaching it from the
north.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: At dawn, in
An’gang-ni, Company G, 2nd Battalion, 21st Regi-
ment, discovers that the enemy nearly has them sur-
rounded. The South Korean troops have abandoned
their positions, creating the emergency. The besieged
troops hold their positions until 1810, then they scoot
to safety, reaching positions near the remainder of the
battalion east of the town near the bridge that spans
the Hyongsan.
Colonel Perez receives orders from Colonel Stephens
directing him to withdraw his battalion from the area
and rejoin the regiment at its positions above Kyongju.
Perez leads his troops through an enemy roadblock
along the Kyongju–An’gang-ni Highway on the eastern
side of the river, less than five miles from An’gang-ni,
but soon after, he discovers that Company G is not
with the battalion. Perez is directed by Stephens to re-
turn and extricate Company G, giving the 2nd Battal-
ion another eventful trip. The 2nd Battalion returns to
the river and recovers Company G. Then, spearheaded
by tanks, the battalion, as a full unit again, fights its way
to safety. The tanks blast the road and the adjacent hills
with fire to smooth the way. North Korean return fire
knocks out three tanks by damaging their treads, but
still, the 2nd Battalion successfully reaches Kyongju at
about noon on the 5th. The three damaged tanks are
destroyed by U.S. artillery to prevent capture by the
enemy.
Meanwhile, the Communists keep the pressure on
the U.S. and South Korean troops. Three separate
300
North Korean roadblocks have been established within
a few miles of Kyongju. In the vicinity of Pohang-dong,
the S.K. 3rd Division and the Capital Division bound-
ary lines contain a hole, comprising about two miles
of undefended ground. To further exasperate the crisis,
another and much greater gap exists in the mountains
northwest of Kyongju. Eight miles separate the S.K.
8th Division, operating to the west, from the Capital
Division. In an effort to solve the problem or at least
minimize the odds, General Coulter orders the 21st
U.S. Regiment to deploy in the high ground northwest
of Kyongju and in the valley to intercept any North
Korean advance emerging from that area.
Meanwhile, the South Koreans begin to get edgy,
and they are contemplating evacuating Kyongju based
on their information that the North Koreans are en-
croaching from positions about three miles north. The
S.K. I Corps commander informs General Coulter, the
commanding officer of Task Force Jackson, of his in-
tentions to abscond. Coulter instructs the South Korean
commander that his corps command post would re-
main stationary. He installs four mobile support posts
around the structure, four tanks, their barrels nosed
close to the exits. Kyongju is held, but not by repuls-
ing the enemy. The anticipated assault is never
launched. Instead, the North Koreans pivot and drive
east toward Yonil Airfield.
General Coulter is described by some of the officers
who served with him, including Colonel John Greco
(G-2), as being hard to please and irritable, but Coul-
ter is also known as an officer who refused sleep in order
to preserve Kyongju.
In the mountainous region between the eastern Perime-
ter and the Taegu Perimeter, the N.K. 15th Division ad-
vances to positions near the lateral corridor at
Yongch’on.
In Air Force activity, Captain Robert E. Wayne,
USAF, is shot down behind enemy lines near Hang-
gan, but in the first rescue of a pilot by H-5 helicop-
ter, Wayne is retrieved by Lieutenant Paul W. Van
Boven.
In other activity, several squadrons of C-119 Flying
Boxcars arrive in Japan at Ashiya Air Base. The planes
will support the operations in Korea.
In Naval activity, offshore in the Yellow Sea, near the
west coast of Korea, a bomber brandishing a Red Star
on its wing soars over a naval screening vessel near the
38th Parallel, en route toward a group of U.S. naval
warships. The enemy aircraft encounters a fighter pa-
trol and commences firing. Instant return fire destroys
the enemy plane and subsequently, crewmen of one of
the destroyers in the area retrieve the corpse of one
member of the aircraft. He is identified as an officer of
the Soviet Union’s armed forces.
On the following day, the New York Times prints the
State Department press release concerning the incident.
On September 7, the Times publishes the Russian ver-
sion of the incident and the article includes the request
by Russia for compensation for the shooting down of
one of its bombers. It has not been determined if the
 301
Panther jets (F9F Grumman) take off from a carrier for a mission against targets in North Korea.
downed plane is one given to the Russians through
Lend-Lease during World War II. In any event, the
U.S. declines to acknowledge the Russian claim.
In other activity, aircraft begin raids in preparation
for the invasion of Inchon. These missions continue
until the landing occurs. Air Force, Navy, Marine and
other U.N. aircraft participate.
— In Japan: The 1st Marine Division issues Oper-
ation Order 2–50, the landing force plan for Inchon. Al-
though the reports from an agent (Lt. Clark, USN)
have not yet been accumulated, the plan requires little
modification when his radio reports eventually arrive
from the island of Yonghung-do. The USS Mount
McKinley sails from Tokyo, arriving at Kobe on the fol-
lowing day. The Marines will have some personnel
problems — on the following day the secretary of the
Navy will direct that all Marines involved with the In-
chon operation who have not reached the age of eight-
een must be given non-combat assignments.
In other activity, Naval Forces Far East orders the
fleet base at Buckner Bay to be transferred to Sasebo.
September 5 A Soviet twin-engine bomber that
maneuvers in the vicinity of TF-77 is downed by car-
September 5, 1950
rier aircraft. The incident is reported to the U.N. Also,
this day’s battle casualties are heavy along the entire
Pusan Perimeter, totaling 1,245 troops. Army casual-
ties stand at 102 killed, 430 wounded and 587 missing
in action. The North Korean 9th and 4th Divisions
have virtually succumbed to the ongoing frailties of the
N.K. Army, which is now over-extended, lacking good
communications and burdened by an equally poor lo-
gistics system. The two N.K. divisions have been un-
able to take advantage of their early successes. Nor are
they able to overcome the potent power of U.S. artillery
fire, air strikes and the neutralization of the T-34 tanks.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, commanded
by Colonel Murch, receives its needed supplies, espe-
cially ammunition (requested on the previous day)
when eight planes soar overhead during the morning
and deposit them on the mark, permitting the battal-
ion to resume its attack to the rear. The advancing 2nd
Battalion, 27th Regiment, which had initially departed
the Chung-ni vicinity on September 2, pushes forward
throughout the day.
By nightfall it has cleared the rear supply route and
has eliminated the enemy resistance in the immediate
September 5, 1950
area for a distance of about eight thousand yards from
the forward perimeter of Company G, 35th Regiment.
However, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, receives
little rest. Colonel Murch is ordered to halt his battal-
ion and prepare to drive northeast from there to estab-
lish contact with the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, near
Haman.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment (3rd
Bn., 29th Regiment), commanded by Colonel De-
Chow, departs its positions at the recently captured
heights atop the Komam-ni crossroads and reinitiates
its attack toward Haman to bolster the 24th Regiment.
In other activity, there is still some trouble at
Haman, caused by a small band of enemy troops, but
the problem is eliminated by daybreak. At 0500, the
24th Regiment, which had abandoned its roadblock
west of Haman during the night, arrives at the com-
mand post of the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment. Colo-
nel Check is informed by the accompanying officer that
an enemy force, composed of about 2,000 troops, had
overrun his position at a roadblock west of Haman.
Check is also told that additional 24th Regimental units
had also succumbed to the enemy surge. Colonel Check
immediately informs General Kean of the alleged dis-
aster. Soon after, Check speeds one platoon of tanks
and one infantry platoon to determine the criticalness
of the situation in Haman. In the meantime, about 220
additional troops of the 24th Regiment are hastily pro-
ceeding to the rear, until they are abruptly halted by
officers of the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment.
These soldiers are ordered by Colonel Check to halt
their retreat and to join the advance to Haman. Some
do so immediately, yet others exhibit arrogant reluc-
tance. Check’s troops use the ultimate persuasion,
threatening the dissidents with pointed weapons, which
instantly becomes an effective tactic. All the faint-
hearted troops then volunteer and return toward
Haman for the anticipated duel with the enemy. But
when the troops arrive, there is no fight. Much to the
surprise of Colonel Check, the tanks roar into Haman
without incident, and there is no enemy to be found.
Haman is tranquil and the 24th Regimental command
post, although scantily defended, is unmolested.
In the 2nd Division sector, slightly before dawn, while
the U.S. troops prepare to launch yet another counter-
attack to exterminate the remaining enemy still posi-
tioned east of the Naktong, the short-lived silence is
shattered north of the 5th Marines’ perimeter in the
vicinity of the east-west road. In the midst of a driving
rain, the enemy springs a vicious attack against the 9th
Regiment, USA, hammering Company G with the
brunt of the strike. Nearby, the 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, perched in the adjacent heights, has a bird’s eye
view and it attempts to support the 9th Regiment.
Companies G, H, and Headquarters (3/5th Marines)
activate their machine guns and begin slicing into the
ranks of the company-strong N.K. contingent, forcing
it back.
Nearby at a 9th Regiment outpost, SFC Loren Kauf-
man, Company G, attempts to rush his detachment to
302
the aid of his besieged company, but en route, the group
runs into an enemy force that is attempting to surround
the command. Unhesitatingly, Kaufman begins run-
ning toward the enemy, and with a quick slash, he bay-
onets the lead enemy scout, killing him. As he contin-
ues forward along the ridge, Kaufman’s rifle rips shells
into the enemy, while he simultaneously launches
grenades. His one-man attack seemingly bewilders the
enemy and prompts them to turn back.
Soon after, Kaufman’s platoon arrives to bolster the
remainder of Company G, but in the meantime, the
enemy seizes the dominating ground and paralyzes the
company in a draw. Again, Kaufman is off and run-
ning, disregarding severe enemy fire. During his dar-
ing attempt to dislodge the enemy, Kaufman’s venture
carries him toward two additional enemy troops, both
of whom are killed by his bayonet. Continuing further,
Kaufman commandeers a dormant machine gun, with
which he further rakes the enemy positions and pur-
chases some breathing room for the immobile com-
pany.
After a quick regrouping, Company G takes the of-
fensive with Kaufman leading the attack. Upon ascend-
ing to the crest of the ridge, Kaufman decimates an
enemy machine gun position, and he drives the remain-
ing enemy from the crest. During the brief jaunt, he
kills two more of the enemy with his bayonet and then
he encounters a mortar position. It, too, is destroyed and
its crew eliminated. But Kaufman notes that some of the
enemy have escaped and are holed up in a nearby vil-
lage. He gathers a patrol and moves it against the flee-
ing prey, quickly dispersing the stragglers by torching
the village. For his extraordinary heroism and courage
in the face of the enemy, SFC Kaufman receives the
Medal of Honor.
Meanwhile, U.S. artillery continues to catapult in-
cessant fire to the 9th Regiment’s front, permitting the
unit to repulse the enemy assaults throughout the day.
In other activity, Colonel John Hill, commanding
officer, 9th Regiment, is relieved of command. He is
succeeded by Colonel Charles Sloane, Jr. The 9th Reg-
iment under Sloane undergoes some changes. Lt. Col-
onel Barberis (23rd Regiment) replaces Lt. Colonel
Joseph Walker as CO, 2nd Battalion, 9th Regiment,
but Lt. Colonel John Londahl remains in command of
the 1st Battalion, 9th Regiment.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade area, the 1st
Provisional Brigade moves from front lines to Pusan,
from where the Marines will embark for the Inchon
operation. (See also, SECOND BATTLE OF THE NAK-
TONG BULGE, September 3, 1950.)
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: Eighth
Army is becoming increasingly alarmed as the North Ko-
rean offensive continues to unfold against the still thinly
held perimeter. The decision to withdraw the entire
perimeter to the secondary line (Davidson Line) is being
considered by General Walker. But it is questionable
whether Eighth Army and the South Korean troops can
withstand the enemy thrust, which is striking across the
entire perimeter and making gains in various areas.
 303
One concern of General Walker is what the N.K.
15th Division will do now that it has gotten troops
through the defenses of the S.K. 8th Division and into
Yongch’on. If the N.K. 15th decides to pivot west and
drive toward Taegu, it might be in position to strike
the 1st Cavalry and Eighth Army from the rear. An-
other major concern for Walker is Task Force Jackson.
If the N.K. 15th swings to the east or southeast, the
task force stands in harm’s way, from either the rear or
the flank. Neither option is favorable for Eighth Army.
And Walker has the same serious concerns about the
1st Cavalry sector.
General Gay, commanding officer, 1st Cavalry Di-
vision, subsequent to conferring with General Walker,
orders the division to execute a general withdrawal dur-
ing the night of the 5th-6th. At this time, Waegwan
on the Divisional right is controlled by the North Ko-
reans. The 7th Cavalry at Hill 518 is unable to utilize
the lateral supply road to its rear, and it is close to being
totally encircled. The 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, still
in control of Hill 303, is delegated to provide cover fire
during the withdrawal. But the 2nd Battalion is also
ordered to seize Hill 464 subsequent to the withdrawal.
The action requires the 2nd Battalion to disengage with
the enemy to its front and initiate an attack to its rear.
In the Eighth Cavalry sector, Company D, 8th Engi-
neering Battalion, led by Lieutenant John T. Kennedy,
comes under another strong attack on Hill 755 just
after daylight. Kennedy’s force has nearly exhausted its
ammunition and rations for the previous day have yet
to arrive. Nevertheless, again, the fighting engineers
repulse the enemy, but as usual, it is not an easy task.
The 2nd Platoon’s radio is destroyed by enemy fire and
Sergeant Vandygriff reverts to sending runners between
his platoon and the company command post, while he
continues to rally his troops. At one spot, while Vandy-
griff pauses with PFC Melvin L. Brown (3rd Squad),
he notices five dead enemy troops lying next to a wall
near Brown’s little piece of earth. Brown had the situ-
ation under control with the help of his BAR.
In the meantime, attempts to resupply the belea-
guered platoon continue. Attempts are made to air-
drop supplies, but the cunning enemy matches the
color code of the panel laid out by the besieged engi-
neers. The tricked pilots inadvertently deposit the sup-
plies over enemy positions and they mistakenly bomb
and strafe the Americans. Miraculously, one dropped
napalm bomb is a dud and the other causes no harm.
The troops also avoid casualties during the accidental
strafing runs. All the while, the enemy continues to
pour fire upon the crest, and during this vicious ex-
change of fire, Lieutenant Kennedy becomes wounded
in the leg.
Meanwhile, between 1000 and 1100, Company E,
8th Cavalry, makes it to the crest, but it lacks mortars.
The company commander assumes command of both
units. The reinforcements deploy to the right of
Sergeant Vandygriff ’s 2nd Platoon to bolster the effort
to hold the hill. Lieutenant Kennedy and twelve other
wounded troops then begin the descent. Meanwhile,
September 5, 1950
the enemy launches a fresh assault, but the quick action
and improvisation by Vandygriff stems the rising tide.
Lacking mortars, the tireless sergeant fires a 3.5 rocket
launcher, and it accomplishes the desired effect. The
enemy disengages. Vandygriff then directs his troops
to move about the enemy dead and confiscate as many
weapons and as much ammunition as possible.
The dangerous scavenger hunt concludes with the
acquisition of more than forty enemy rifles, an array
of grenades and five burp guns. At the extreme tip of
the 2nd Platoon’s zone, PFC Melvin Brown still holds
his ground, but more enemy dead have begun to crowd
him. Brown’s BAR has expended all its ammo, and
he also has exhausted his supply of grenades, including
many tossed to him from other nearby troops. Vandy-
griff inquires about the enemy dead near his position,
which now numbers nearly twenty, and Brown
responds with simplicity, explaining: “Every time
they came up, I knocked them off the wall.” After
running out of ammunition, Brown kept his spade
cocked and he smacked the enemy’s heads to finish
them off.
Although the hill has been held, General Gay orders
the Eighth Cavalry contingents to relinquish it at 1330.
Gay is fearful that the force is insufficient to retain pos-
session. However, communications with the defenders
on the hill is poor and it is not known if word ever
reaches the troops on the crest. In any event, a pouring
rainstorm and a dismal fog settle over the area and the
Communists take advantage. They launch another and
more serious assault. The attack ignites confusion as
the enemy seemingly strikes the perimeter from every
direction. Vandygriff directs one badly wounded man
to report to the command post in the tunnel, but he re-
turns in about one-half hour informing Vandygriff that
the command post is gone, and that the only troops
there are enemy dead.
The remaining troops of Company D (Engineers)
and the reinforcing troops of Company E, 8th Cav-
alry, attempt to extricate themselves from the peak and
get down the mountain. Casualties have been obviously
heavy, and when Company D reassembles, it finds that
fifty percent of the unit had become casualties. Eigh-
teen men are wounded and thirty remain missing in
action.
PFC Melvin Brown, who had remained at his post
despite his wounds, is discovered dead at his post. PFC
Brown is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously
for his tremendous courage under fire and his selfless
sarifice for his fellow soldiers. One officer (Company D,
8th Eng. Bn.), wounded by machine gun fire, requests
that he remain in a house to await a jeep rather than be
withdrawn with the others. Soon after, his desperate
screams are heard by the retiring troops. Two weeks
later, when the terrain is recaptured, the officer is located
in the house. The sequence of events is not known.
However, the North Koreans apparently had raised the
body of the wounded American officer, whose hands
and feet were bound, and built a fire under him. The
North Koreans, in addition to burning portions of his
September 5, 1950
body, also tore off one of his thumbs and gouged out
both his eyes.
By nightfall, about five battalions of North Koreans
hold Ka-san and its forward slope. With the Walled
City in their possession, the N.K. 1st and 13th Divi-
sions prepare to lunge from the mountain to seize
Taegu. In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regi-
ment, attached to the 1st Cavalry Division, relinquishes
its line of defense at the Yongp’o bridge at the bound-
ary separating the 2nd Division from the 1st Cavalry
Division. The unit is relieved at 0410 by the British
27th Infantry Brigade, thus initiating British participa-
tion in the ground war in Korea.
In the meantime, the North Korean 10th Division
continues its excursions from positions on Hill 409.
Enemy units tramp through the mountainous terrain
northeast of Hyongp’ung and penetrate through a hole
between the British brigade and the U.S. 2nd Division.
In other activity, Eighth Army draws up plans for
withdrawal, subject to issuance of an order by General
Walker, but no order is forthcoming. However, al-
though Eighth Army will hold, as a precaution Eighth
Army Headquarters relocates to the old fisheries college
located north of Pusan, near Tongnae. In conjunction,
the ROK Army Headquarters transfers to Pusan.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: At Pohang-
dong along the coast, the enemy ground troops and
their accompanying armor steadily advance against the
slim defensive line. General Coulter had concentrated
on bolstering the Kyongju corridor, which could pose
a serious threat to the rail and road traffic, using the
respective routes to Pusan. The 19th Regiment and
some other 24th Division troops who had just arrived
at the Naktong on the previous day depart and head
for Kyongju. The remainder of the division follows.
Nearly all of the first contingent reach the town by mid-
night.
The entire division arrives by 0700 on the follow-
ing day. General Davidson, the assistant commanding
officer, arrives on the night of the 5th. General Church,
the commanding officer, arrives on the afternoon of
the 6th. The 24th Division relocates to help check the
N.K. 15th Division, which is driving toward Kongju
from the lateral Taegu corridor. The S.K. 3rd Division
commander, at Pohang-dong, ponders evacuation.
North of the town, the enemy positions are struck by
U.S. Air Force planes, which focus on a triangular area
comprising the Kigye–Kyongju–Pohang-dong vicin-
ity.
Colonel Emmerich departs Pohang-dong at 0200
for Yonil Air Base to meet with Lt. Col. McMains, the
commanding officer of the 3rd Battalion, 9th Infantry,
which is protecting the airfield. Emmerich, subsequent
to the informational briefing concerning the unfold-
ing chain of events near Pohang-dong, returns, bring-
ing one platoon of tanks with him to fortify the town
and neutralize the enemy armor.
Without delay, the tanks are posted at strategic spots
to await the enemy. It doesn’t take too long. By 0530,
word is received by Emmerich, KMAG advisor, that
304
the 22nd S.K. Regiment had been dispersed by the
North Korean attack. Consequently, the enemy receives
an easy gap to funnel through. By 1100, the enemy has
inched closer and begins firing, using machine guns
against the tanks at Pohang-dong. In concert, five
enemy self-propelled guns approach and begin to shell
the American armor. From close range, the tanks pre-
pare to fire. When the enemy reaches a point of about
one block away, the tanks initiate effective fire, which
destroys the point gun and ignites a furious exchange.
The fiercely contested battle culminates with the
speedy departure of the enemy guns. However, the
enemy’s escape is not uneventful. Emmerich calls in
artillery fire and air support. The combination deci-
mates the other four guns. Although the enemy is tem-
porarily halted, the overall situation at Yonil remains
jeopardized. And the personnel at the air base are or-
dered (at 1435) to move all substantive equipment and
supplies to a safer location.
During the night (5th-6th) at midnight, Pohang-
dong becomes the recipient of a short burst of enemy
artillery or mortar shells, but the ten rounds score
enough on the shock barometer to disrupt the S.K. 3rd
Division command post, convincing it to relocate. Un-
fortunately, the South Koreans are apparently under
close observation by the enemy, and as the command
moves out, it is trailed by effective enemy fire from
which a byproduct develops. The commanding officer
and his G-2 and G-3 officers “get sick.” Ultimately,
the South Koreans abandon Pohang-dong.
On the 6th, the enemy takes control of it. In con-
junction, ROK Army relieves the ROK I Corps’ com-
manding officer and General Kim Suk Won, the com-
manding officer of the 3rd S.K. Division. Colonel
Emmerich had called for the relief of Kim Suk Won on
August 28. In the meantime, the S.K. 3rd Regiment
drives from positions west of An’gang-ni and heads to-
ward Yongch’on to plug the critical hole between the
Capital and 8th S.K. Divisions.
In other activity, control of the S.K. 8th Division is
unmanageable for its parent I Corps, due to the dis-
tance between it and the S.K. Capital Division. At
1030, S.K. Army places the 8th Division under the
control of the I Corps and it attaches the unit to the
S.K. 5th Regiment (S.K. 7th Division). At about the
same time that the 8th Division is being absorbed by the
I Corps, the North Koreans are punching holes in its
lines at Yongch’on and elements of the N.K. 15th Di-
vision push into Yongch’on.
In Naval activity, the USS Badoeng Strait and the
HMS Triumph accelerate their attacks against various
enemy targets on the east and west coasts of Korea to
attempt to keep the enemy guessing about U.N. inten-
tions. The two carriers are supplemented on the 8th,
when the USS Sicily joins the mission. The roving car-
rier aircraft stake out rolling trains, power stations and
various enemy supply roads. These diversionary air sor-
ties make frequent visits to Haeju, Kaesong, Kumchon,
Pyongyang and Seoul, but Inchon and Wolmi-do also
receive some attention. The raids cease on the 10th. In
 305
conjunction, the carrier planes of Task Force 77 pound
other robust enemy targets, too. The Panther jets of
the U.S. Navy penetrate farther north to slam the North
Korean airfields.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
are still simmering because of no response from
MacArthur to their dispatch of August 28 regarding
the impending Inchon operation. They send another
dispatch, igniting a series of communications.
MacArthur responds on the following day, explaining
that his initial plans remain identical. The joint chiefs
then speed yet another message to MacArthur on Sep-
tember 7, urging a rethinking of the entire question
and directing him to dispatch an estimate of the
chances of a favorable outcome.
The continuing success of the enemy has caused a
good deal of doubt to linger in the minds of the Joint
Chiefs of Staff. They are doubtful of the ability of
Eighth Army to revert to an offensive, and they remain
equally doubtful about the X Corps’ ability to over-
whelm the enemy in the Inchon-Seoul area. MacArthur
responds on September 8.
In other activity, the demeaning remarks by President
Truman about the Marine Corps are publicized dur-
ing the Marine Corps League’s annual convention in
Washington, D.C., raising a storm of protest. On the
following day, President Truman appears before the
Marine conventioneers and makes a humble and gen-
uine apology, which is accepted.
September 5–September 13 1950
Admiral Doyle’s attack force begins to move toward
Inchon. The Pontoon Movement Group, composed
of two ATFs, three LSUs, one YTB and one YMW,
depart Yokohama on the fifth. Two other vessels em-
bark Sasebo on the 11th and join the other ships at
sea. Three LSMRs will sail from Yokohama on the
9th. Tractor Element A, composed of one LSM, one
AMS, one AM, one ARS, two LSDs and 36 LSTs,
will depart Kobe on the 10th. Tractor Element B,
composed of one ARL, one PF, one PCEC and
twelve LSTs, departs Kobe on the 10th. Transport
Movement Group, composed of five APAs, eight
AKS, one AP and two PFs, scheduled to depart Kobe
on the 12th, sails on the 11th due to impending in-
clement weather. The Advance Attack Group
(Wolmi-do), composed of one LSD and three APDs,
sails from Pusan on the 13th to join the Fleet at sea.
September 6 Eighth Army publishes its break-
out attack plan, and on the following day it is sent to
Tokyo for tentative approval. Subsequently, Eighth
Army revises the plan (11th). By the 16th, it becomes
an operations directive. In conjunction, General Walker
concludes that he will place the key breakout troops
under the recently reactivated I Corps. Walker begins
to decide upon the I Corps commanding officer. On the
11th of September, he chooses General Frank W. Mil-
burn, the IX Corps’ commander.
In other activity, most of the remaining I Corps staff
arrives in Korea by air from Fort Bragg.
September 6, 1950
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, some of the enemy pressure subsides, due in great
part to the relentless efforts of the division, and in par-
ticular the 35th Regiment. However, despite severe ca-
sualties, the enemy continues to mount new attacks
against various units. Today, the 1st Battalion, 27th
Regiment, commanded by Colonel Check, departs the
Haman area, heading north to enjoin the 2nd Battal-
ion, 27th Regiment, to bolster the effort to mop up the
area to the rear of the 35th Regiment, which is deployed
in the heights along the Nam River. The 1st Battalion
tightens the vise on the remnant enemy contingents
below the Nam by condensing its area of activity while
pressing forward toward the 35th Regiment. Accord-
ing to reports, sixteen separate enemy detachments
(N.K. 7th Division) are encountered and scattered, and
each enemy unit sustains severe casualties.
In other activity, the 24th Regiment’s sector at
Haman remains relatively quiet, but while Colonel
Champney is touring his front line positions, a sniper’s
bullet inflicts a severe wound upon him. Champney is
immediately evacuated for medical treatment. Com-
mand of the regiment is assumed by Colonel John Cor-
ley, the commanding officer of the 3rd Battalion, 24th
Regiment. Corley receives a battlefield promotion that
makes him a full colonel. In conjunction, the 24th Reg-
iment undergoes more changes. Lt. Colonel Paul
Roberts, temporary commander 2nd Battalion, returns
to the position of regimental executive officer. The 2nd
and 3rd Battalions receive temporary commanders for
a few weeks until permanent commanders are ap-
pointed. Colonel Corley appoints Lt. Colonel Joseph
Missal to his staff and within a short while, Lt. Colonels
George A. Clayton and Melvin R. Blair will become
permanent commanders of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions
respectively.
In the 2nd Division sector, the British 27th Infantry
Brigade encounters some difficulty on its first day of
action on the front. On the previous day, the British
had replaced the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, at the
Yongp’o bridge over the Naktong, where the boundary
separates the 2nd Division from the 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion. A combat patrol led by Captain Neil A. Buchanan
meets heavy opposition from enemy elements that have
swung down from Hill 409. The skirmishing becomes
a deadly baptism under fire. Captain Buchanan and
one other British soldier become seriously wounded.
The casualties hinder an escape effort. Buchanan or-
ders the balance of the patrol to break for safety. Nei-
ther Buchanan nor the other wounded soldier is ever
heard from again.
Enemy pressure in the area of Hill 409 is tough on
the British, and the closest unit atop the hill becomes so
tightly sealed off that even acquiring water is extremely
dangerous. Planes deliver blocks of ice to keep the
troops from attempting to carry water cans up the
slopes.
In other activity, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade,
by dawn, is departing the 2nd Division sector heading
for Pusan, from where it will embark to join the 1st
September 6, 1950
Marine Division. The entire brigade will reach Pusan
by the following day.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: At 1600,
Eighth Army opens its headquarters at the fisheries col-
lege located between Tongnae and Pusan. General
Walker and several staff officers stay in Taegu to re-
main closer to the front lines and to technically act as
a tactical headquarters. General Walker continues his
daily movement around the perimeter, using the options
of his armored jeep (which doesn’t seem to have a low
gear) or his liaison plane, which frequently flies at tree-
top levels, giving Walker an opportunity to shout or-
ders to the troops below.
The primary reason for uprooting the headquarters
from Taegu is to preserve the Signal Corps communi-
cations equipment, which if lost to the enemy could
not be replaced. An example would be the Marc 2, a
four-van unit used for teletype and a 1,200 line switch-
board, of which only one is in Korea and one is in
Japan. The ROK Army headquarters, which also trans-
ferred from Taegu on the previous day, opens in Pusan
at 0800. At Pusan, Brigadier General Crump Garvin in-
structs the service troops in the 2nd Logistical Com-
mand to be prepared to establish defensive positions
around the city limits and in the nearby hills if the ne-
cessity arises.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the 1st Battalion,
7th Cavalry, completes its withdrawal without incident
during a driving rain. The 3rd Battalion heads west and
as it moves, several separate contingents of enemy
troops mistake the Americans for their own and inad-
vertently join the retreating column, only to become
prisoners. After daybreak, the 3rd Battalion is struck
by enemy tanks and mortar fire when it approaches
Waegwan; about eighteen troops become casualties.
The 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, which has provided
cover fire for the withdrawal, disengages and begins to
pull back at 0300, but the North Koreans notice the
withdrawal and launch an attack.
During the firefights, Major Omar Hitchner, the
temporary battalion commander, and Captain James
Milam (S-3) are among the killed. Company G moves
to assault Hill 464, while the balance of the 2nd Bat-
talion drives to capture Hill 380. But, at about day-
break, the attacking 2nd Battalion becomes caught be-
tween the enemy. Colonel Cecil Nist, the commanding
officer, 7th Cavalry, believes the entire 2nd Battalion
will be destroyed. Nonetheless, the assaults go as
planned. Company G, isolated from its friendly units
and composed of about eighty troops, nears the sum-
mit of Hill 464 at 0800. It gains some surprise and slays
three enemy troops. Success ends at that point, as the
North Koreans open fire and halt further progress.
By afternoon, orders arrive by radio message to with-
draw from the hill after dark. During the descent on the
steep slope, a pounding rain adds difficulty to the pull-
back. The wounded are brought down on improvised
stretchers, but the bodies of six slain men cannot be
brought out. In addition, friendly artillery fire strikes
the company as it withdraws, killing one NCO. The
306
company commander, Captain Herman West, receives
a severe wound to the back when an artillery shell ex-
plodes. Although the company disperses rapidly, Cap-
tain West reforms it quickly; then the company moves
with quiet discipline under explicit orders not to fire in
hopes of giving the illusion that the company is an
enemy unit. The ruse works and G Company rede-
ploys defensively on the eastern base of Hill 464.
During the night (6th-7th), the Weapons Platoon
becomes separated. It is an uncanny evening for the
Weapons Platoon, which on three separate occasions
stumbles upon enemy troops moving along the same
trail. Each side continues moving, but no shots are ex-
changed. At about dawn on the 7th, the platoon creeps
up on several enemy-held foxholes on a knoll, and then
it quickly takes out thirteen troops and captures three
others.
Nearby, the remainder of the 2nd Battalion is short
on supplies, and encircled at the eastern base of Hill
380. South Korean carriers attempt to transport supplies
to the beleaguered contingent, but they are unable to
locate the positions.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Cavalry (Lt.
Colonel Paul Clifford), holding Hill 303 on the divi-
sion left, is struck by a ferocious enemy attack, prompt-
ing the battalion to request permission to withdraw.
The request is temporarily denied by the regimental
commander (Crombez), because he claims no with-
drawal can occur until the 7th Cavalry completes clear-
ing the withdrawal road. Hill 303 is abandoned later in
the day, but not before the 2nd Battalion, 5th Cavalry,
incurs severe casualties.
In the 8th Cavalry zone, the North Koreans occupy
Hill 570, about two miles southwest of Ka-san. They
establish a roadblock along the Taegu Road about three
miles below Tabu-dong, and deploy in the hills on the
east side of the road and in the rice paddies on the op-
posite side.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: General Coul-
ter orders the 21st Regiment, 24th Division to prepare
to attack on the 7th. The regiment is to drive from Ky-
ongju into the valley and hills northwest of the town and
through the mountain mass leading toward Yongch’on.
In the mountainous region between the Eastern Perime-
ter and the Taegu Perimeter, the N.K. 8th Division con-
tinues to struggle with its quest to reach Hayang. It
advances against heavy opposition that originates in the
heights above the road, where the South Koreans who
hold dominating positions in the high ground are rais-
ing the tempo. The area is within a huge mountain
mass that includes overwhelming Hill 928, which
reaches a height of 3,000 feet, and some slightly smaller
peaks on the west side of the road that extend to 2,000
feet. The combination of artillery and other weapons
takes a heavy toll on the North Koreans and their ad-
vance stalls, preventing them from moving beyond the
mountains to Hwajong-dong.
In other activity, the N.K. 15th Division pushes con-
tingents into Yongch’on, and it gets other troops into
positions south of the town. But the town is not held.
 307
Rather, the North Koreans occupy the heights south
and southwest of it, giving the enemy positions atop the
Taegu-Kyongju-Pusan road.
In Air Force activity, in conjunction with the with-
drawal of Eighth Army headquarters from Taegu, Col-
onel Aaron Tyler, USAF, initiates the relocation of the
remaining planes of the 6147th Tactical Control
Squadron to Pusan.
— In the United States: President Truman, who has
recently made some disparaging remarks about the Ma-
rine Corps, apologizes in a letter to General Cates. Tru-
man also reaffirms his confidence in the Marine Corps
and compliments the Corps on its heroism.
— In Japan: Itami Airbase is designated the base of
operations for the 1st Marine Air Wing.
In other activity, a conference concerning Inchon is
held aboard the USS Mount McKinley at Kobe and the
opinions of General Almond and General O.P. Smith,
USMC, differ when the subject of a commando raid
against Kimpo Airfield is placed on the table. Almond
favors it and Smith is opposed, due to his belief that
the delegated Army troops have not been sufficiently
trained. Smith also believes the troops could interfere
with the U.S. guns.
General Almond’s plan calls for recently established
X Corps’ Special Operations Company, composed of
124 Army troops, commanded by Colonel Louis Ely,
USA, to embark on September 10 to attack Kimpo.
Almond expects the company to be reinforced by
Marines. But Smith raises the objection of casualties
already incurred by the Marine Brigade, and he cites
another problem concerning the 500 Marines under
18 years old who were cut from the invasion, claiming
the troops are not available. In addition, Smith con-
tends that the rubber boats cannot withstand the three-
mile row against the tide. Concluding the effort would
be futile, he opposes placing the troops in harm’s way.
There is no agreement during the meeting, but sub-
sequently General Shepherd supports General Smith,
and the Marines are not attached to the mission. Also,
Colonel Homer L. Litzenberg, USMC, commanding
officer of the 7th Marines, arrives at Itami Airfield from
Camp Pendleton in advance of his regiment. The 7th
Marines, 3rd rifle regiment of the division, is sched-
uled to arrive in Japan on September 17.
September 7 U.S. warships detect an enemy
mine off the west coast, near Chinnampo. It is the first
hostile mine detected.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, maintains its
attack toward the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, op-
erating to the rear of the 35th Regiment. The ongoing
operation continues to wreak havoc on the trapped
enemy contingents of the N.K. 7th Division (which
had apparently been responsible for the recent atroci-
ties of captured troops of the 35th Regiment). The
enemy exhibits no discretion as it breaks hastily, at-
tempting to get across the Nam River to safety, but
many troops are unable to complete the return trip
September 7, 1950
across the river. Excluding the large numbers of North
Korean dead to the front of its perimeter, the burial
detachments of the 25th Division are overactive. From
September 1 until today, more than 2,000 enemy
troops who penetrated the rear of the division are
buried, and the battleground will soon be littered with
more enemy dead.
In the 24th Regimental zone, west of Masan at Battle
Mountain, the North Koreans mount an attack and
drive the Americans and South Koreans off the moun-
tain. General Kean orders Colonel DeChow to recap-
ture the objective with his 3rd Battalion, 27th Regi-
ment. DeChow’s command has just driven to the
Haman area to reinforce the rear of the 24th Regiment.
The 3rd Battalion initiates its attack against Battle
Mountain, which is defended by about two companies
on the summit and an additional two companies pro-
tecting the flank. The enduring struggle for control of
the mountain continues for three days. In conjunction,
Companies B and K, 24th Regiment, are to trail the
3rd Battalion and assume control of the summit once
it is taken.
In other activity, General Walker, convinced that
the critical period has passed for the 25th Division, di-
rects General Kean to release the attached 5th RCT by
September 9. After sunset, the 1st and 2nd Battalions,
27th Regiment, will depart from their positions near the
Nam River, heading for Masan to relieve the 5th RCT.
Also, Admiral Struble has ordered a diversionary
landing at Kunsan as part of the strategy to keep the
enemy off guard while the U.S. finalizes the invasion of
Inchon. The landing is executed by U.S. Army com-
mandos and Royal Marines who are transported by the
HMS Whitesand Bay, a British frigate.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 2nd
Battalion, 7th Cavalry sector, Company G is on the
alert as the sun begins to rise. Four barely visible sol-
diers are spotted as they slowly walk toward the perime-
ter and it becomes apparent that the troops are un-
friendly. Several shots are fired and the four are quickly
eliminated, but other nearby enemy troops commence
firing, and this is followed by yet more fire originating
from another area.
Captain West, upon hearing the secondary fire, cor-
rectly determines that it is the sound of U.S. weaponry.
He leads his command toward the sound of the guns
and the company is eventually reunited. The reunifica-
tion also brings some fortuitous information; Com-
pany G captures a briefcase containing significant doc-
uments from a dead North Korean. The information
discloses that Hill 464 is an assembly point for por-
tions of the N.K. 3rd Division as it moves from Hill
518 toward Taegu.
Later today, Captain Melbourne Chandler, acting
commander 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry (since recent
death of Major Omar Hitchner), receives orders to
withdraw as quickly as possible from the desperate po-
sitions at the eastern base of Hill 380.
In the meantime, an observation plane locates iso-
lated Company G, and it forwards the information to
September 8, 1950
Chandler, who dispatches a patrol that retrieves the
stranded company. The 2nd Battalion then moves to-
ward the positions of the 5th Cavalry Regiment, but
along the way, it nearly stumbles upon an ambush. For-
tunately, the North Koreans, although dressed in U.S.
uniforms, still do not resemble Americans. When they
swing their helmets and yell with an accent, “Hey, this
way, G.I.,” the trick becomes obvious and the battalion
evades the trap by pivoting.
The situation in the 1st Battalion’s area, east of the
2nd Battalion, is no better. Enemy pressure pounds the
1st Battalion, and during the heated skirmishing, the
North Koreans overwhelm the battalion aid station,
wounding 7 troops and killing 4. By day’s end, Divi-
sion attaches the 1st Battalion to the 5th Cavalry Reg-
iment, and the 2nd Battalion and the remainder of the
7th Cavalry Regiment relocate to a point near Taegu,
where it is placed in division reserve.
In other activity, the 5th Cavalry Regiment is or-
dered to pull back farther and establish a new defensive
perimeter along the primary Seoul-Taegu Road below
Waegwan. Meanwhile, the North Koreans continue to
push additional troops across the Naktong River. Con-
tingents of the 3rd N.K. Division and some artillery
pieces are observed as fifteen barges transport them
across the river at a point about two miles north of
Waegwan, during the night of the 7th.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, near Ka-san, an attack is
ordered by General Gay to reduce the roadblock on the
Taegu Road. Five tanks of the 16th Reconnaissance
Company speed into the rice paddies west of the road,
and the enemy retreats expeditiously; however, the en-
trenched enemy troops in the hills east of the road are
even more obstinate. Nevertheless, the reconnaissance
troops clear the hills within several hours.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry Reg-
iment, commanded by Lt. Colonel Harold K. John-
son, pulls back from its positions, but on the following
day, the unit attacks enemy-held Hill 570.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The 21st Reg-
iment, 24th Division departs Kyongju and drives
through the valley and across the heights to reach
Yongch’on, but no resistance is encountered.
In other activity, General Church replaces General
Coulter on the eastern front. Task Force Jackson is re-
named Task Force Church at 1230. In conjunction,
General Coulter leaves Kyongju for Taegu pursuant to
orders from General Walker to continue working on
his duties as a planner. Subsequent to his relief of Coul-
ter, General Church recalls the 21st Regiment from its
attack, deciding that it is an unnecessary use of man-
power. Church is convinced that the regiment should
be held closer to Kyongju.
In the mountainous area between the Eastern Perime-
ter and the Taegu Perimeter, a contingent of the N.K.
15th Division establishes a roadblock along the Taegu-
Kyongju-Pusan Road slightly more than three miles
southeast of Yongch’on. Meanwhile, additional troops
strike South Korean positions about one mile south of
the town. And, the S.K. 5th Regiment, 7th Division,
308
attacks along the lateral corridor. It secures Yongch’on,
and then it spreads out defensively north of the town.
This successful attack by the South Koreans rings espe-
cially well for General Walker. The enemy is prevented
from advancing to positions from which they might
plow into the rear or flank of Task Force Jackson.
At Pusan: The 1st Provisional Marine Brigade com-
pletes its trek from the Naktong Front to Pusan. Gen-
eral Craig’s headquarters is based on the university cam-
pus. For the next week it becomes over-active. The
Marines are shipping out in less than one week, prevent-
ing any practice for the upcoming amphibious inva-
sion of Inchon. The brigade will be further burdened
because it must train a recently attached S.K. Marine
Brigade, comprised of 3,000 troops, in the use of
weapons. These South Koreans (1st Korean Marine
Regiment) are able to strip an M-1 Rifle with speed
and precision, but none have ever fired a weapon. More
than a few excited U.S. Marine NCOs are thrilled when
the first exercise with the M-1s is completed. Each
South Korean fires eight rounds and no accidental ca-
sualties occur, except among the trainees who literally
take it on the cheek when they feel the recoil of their
rifle. As the S.K. Marines become familiar with their
new rifles, the swollen cheeks vanish.
In Air Force activity, twenty-four B-29s (Far East Air
Forces) attached to the 22nd Bomber Group strike a
target in the northeastern sector of North Korea at
Chongjin in an attempt to destroy the iron works com-
plex facility there.
— In Japan: Admiral Struble travels by plane from
Tokyo to Sasebo to hold meetings and discuss the In-
chon invasion plans with Admirals Andrewes, Ewen
and Higgins and Captain Austin. After the discussions,
Struble moves to Kobe to confer with General Almond,
USA, and General O.P. Smith, USMC. These rapid-
paced meetings, which have been ongoing since late
August, have established the objectives and the execu-
tion plans.
Initially, Wolmi-do, an island linked to Inchon, will
be swept clean by one attacking battalion of Marines
during the early morning tide (0630). During the later
tide (1700), the main invasion (1st Marine Division,
minus one RCT) will seize a beachhead at Inchon,
landing on “Red,” “Yellow” and “Blue” beaches. The
establishment of the beachhead will be followed by the
seizure of Kimpo Airfield and positions on the Han
River line (west of Seoul). Also, the plan calls for admin-
istrative landings by the U.S. 7th Division (reinforced)
and X Corps troops, during second and third echelon
landings at the city of Inchon at a time designated by
General Almond, commanding officer, X Corps. The
plan also incorporates the fast carriers, escort carriers and
naval surface vessels for bombardment and troop cover,
in close cooperation with the entire operation.
September 8 The 1st Marine Brigade at Pusan
begins to embark for the invasion of Inchon.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector, west of Masan at Battle Mountain, the 3rd
 309
Battalion, 27th Regiment, continues its counterattack
to regain the mountain’s summit, but fierce resistance
hinders progress.
In the 2nd Division sector, at 0230, elements of the
N.K. 2nd Division, supported by heavy artillery fire,
commence a vicious assault against the 23rd Regiment,
intending to pierce the line to drive east. Initially, the
attack pushes Company F from its positions, and in
the process, all the officers become casualties. The sud-
den surge endangers the complete regimental perime-
ter, and the inclement weather provides little solace.
Lieutenant Ralph Robinson, 2nd Battalion adjutant,
bolts into action and takes command of the besieged
company, and he then attempts to restore order. Mean-
while, the enemy is moving through the perimeter and
forming a deadly circle. Robinson disregards the dan-
ger and dashes 500 yards through a penetrating rain
and the grim darkness to safely reach the positions of
Company A. Then he returns, bringing a reserve pla-
toon (Co. A) with him to reform the staggered line. By
daybreak, the enemy is repelled. The crushing pressure
subsides until dusk, but then more strong attacks are
launched to disintegrate the line. However, again, the
North Koreans are repeatedly repulsed throughout the
night and into the following morning.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, elements of the N.K. 3rd Divi-
sion strike the left flank about three miles east of Waeg-
wan and dislodge the 1st Battalion, 5th Cavalry. The
attack forces the battalion into gruesome struggles on
both Hill 203 and Hill 174. The battle for control of
the two hills swings back and forth, with each side ex-
changing occupancy during the bloody fighting. The at-
tached 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, prior to rejoining its
regiment, takes Hill 174, subsequent to launching four
strong attacks.
In the 8th Cavalry sector near Ka-san, enemy artillery
pounds the positions of the 9th and 90th FABns, com-
pelling two batteries to fall back.
In other activity, General Walker orders the 1st Cav-
alry Division and the S.K. 1st Division to launch a
combined attack to recapture Ka-san and Hill 902. The
3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, commanded by Lt. Colo-
nel Harold K. Johnson, launches an assault to seize Hill
570, about eight air miles from Taegu and held by
about 1,000 Communist troops. The three peaks of
the mountain are below clouds, eliminating air, artillery
and mortar support. Colonel Johnson sends his three
rifle companies toward the crests of the three peaks.
One peak falls without resistance and another is taken
subsequent to the Americans surprising some sleeping
enemy troops. But the defenders of the third and high-
est peak raise rigid resistance, repelling the attack by
Company L. A strong counterattack by the enemy re-
captures the peak where the sleeping enemy troops had
been surprised and overrun.
The 1st Cavalry Division prepares to send the 3rd
Battalion, 7th Cavalry, commanded by Lt. Colonel
James Lynch, to take another shot at Hill 570, but in
the meantime, the North Koreans strike south at Hill
September 8, 1950
314, and also against Hill 660, east of Hill 570. The
enemy surge postpones the cavalry’s assault.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: General
Church relocates the command post of Task Force
Church from Kyongju to a point four miles farther
south, outside Choyang-ni, on the assumption that the
post could more easily fend off an attack in the open
ground than in a congested village. Meanwhile, the
South Korean Capital Division and the North Kore-
ans continue heavy skirmishing in the hills bordering the
valley, between An’gang-ni and Kyongju.
Just after midnight (8th-9th), the recently arrived
3rd Battalion, 19th Regiment, feels the sting of the
enemy. Company K, deployed on Hill 300 about mid-
way between An’gang’ni and Kyongju, is unable to re-
pulse the attack and is pushed from the hill. Attempts
to regain the ground on the following day are repelled
by the enemy. Fighting will continue for the ground,
and on the 11th, a contingent of the S.K. 3rd Division
recaptures the hill.
In the mountainous area between the Eastern Corri-
dor and the Taegu Perimeter, the N.K. 8th Division con-
tinues to take a shellacking from the S.K. 6th Division
in the vicinity of Hwajong-dong. The enemy division
is near annihilation. In one battalion sector of the 83rd
Regiment, 8th N.K. Division, the captured diary of a
soldier, Pak Han Pin, relates: “We suffered miserably
[since Sept. 2nd]. Heavy casualties from fierce enemy
air, artillery and heavy machine gun attacks. Only 20
remain alive out of our entire battalion.” However, the
enemy division continues the fight, refusing to relent de-
spite the enormous casualties being racked up.
In other activity, the North Korean 15th Division
contingents, positioned near Yongch’on, receive
reinforcements who arrive and recapture the town.
Meanwhile, additional South Korean troops are driv-
ing from the Taegu Front. The 11th Regiment, 1st S.K.
Division, arrives during the afternoon and launches an
immediate counter-attack, which re-secures most of
Yongch’on. But some enemy contingents deployed
southeast of the town retain control of the railroad sta-
tion and others are scattered along the road leading to-
ward Kyongch’on.
At Pusan: The 1st Provisional Marine Brigade con-
tinues to prepare for embarkation to a point unknown.
The imminent invasion of Inchon remains secret, but
rumors of all sorts persist. At one point before the
brigade departs, there is a large formation near the
docks and a long litany is read aloud explaining the
specifics of the waters off Kunsan. Legions of enemy
spies are in Pusan and it is hoped that the information
is absorbed and dispatched to the North Korean mili-
tary. The Marine scuttlebutt continues, but Kunsan is
now definitely stricken from their list of targets.
Nonetheless, Kunsan continues to be struck by air and
naval surface vessels. Also, the Marine Brigade com-
mander, General Craig, receives some encouraging
words from General O.P. Smith: “I appreciate the beat-
ing you are taking in coming out of action and mount-
ing out. Only Marines could do what you are doing....
September 8, 1950 310

Map of Inchon Invasion September 1950.

 311
The Brigade has done a splendid job in South Korea
and we are all proud of you.”
In Air Force activity, the 18th Fighter Bomber Group
(formerly 18th Fighter Group) that had been pulled
from Korea during the previous month returns and is
reestablished for operations from the Pusan area at
Tongnae.
—In Japan: General MacArthur, responding to sev-
eral messages from the Joint Chiefs of Staff concern-
ing the Inchon operation, dispatches his answer, weav-
ing the sentences with his usual effectiveness and nearly
guaranteeing the persuasion of the recipients:
“There is no question in my mind as to the feasibil-
ity of the operation and I regard its chance of success
as excellent. I go further and believe that it represents
the only hope of wresting the initiative from the enemy
and thereby presenting an opportunity for a decisive
blow. To do otherwise is to commit us to a war of in-
definite duration, of gradual attrition and of doubtful
results.... There is no slightest possibility ... of our force
being ejected from the Pusan Beachhead. The envel-
opment from the north will instantly relieve the pres-
sure on the south perimeter and, indeed, is the only
way that this can be accomplished.... The success of
the envelopment movement from the north does not
depend upon the rapid juncture of the X Corps and
the Eighth Army. The seizure of the heart of the enemy
distributing system in the Seoul area will completely
dislocate the logistical supply of his forces now operat-
ing in South Korea and therefore will ultimately result
in their disintegration. This indeed, is the primary pur-
pose of the movement. Caught between our northern
and southern forces, both of which are completely self-
sustaining because of our absolute air and naval su-
premacy, the enemy cannot fail to be ultimately shat-
tered through disruption of his logistical support and
our combined combat activities....”
MacArthur closes the message, exclaiming that the
reasons stated are why the operation is unfolding as
planned. On the following day (9th in Japan and 8th
in Washington), the MacArthur charm again has its
way. The Joint Chiefs respond: “We approve your plan
and President has been so informed.”
In other activity, Tactical Air Command X Corps is
activated today; its components will arrive in Japan this
same day. In conjunction, Brigadier General Thomas
Cushman, USMC, is appointed TAC X Corps com-
mander.
September 9 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In
the 25th Division sector, the 35th and 27th Regiments
continue mopping up along the perimeter, despite in-
cessant rains that had begun on the previous day. The
inclement weather has swollen the Naktong by about
two feet, preventing enemy forces from crossing it in
large numbers. Meanwhile, Colonel Fisher, command-
ing officer, 35th Regiment, moves about the rear areas
that had been consumed with tenacious fighting. He is
seemingly mystified by the colossal numbers of enemy
dead still splattered throughout the battlefield. Recall-
September 9, 1950
ing the scene later, Fisher remarks: “The area of Trun
in the Falaise Gap in Europe couldn’t match it.” The
conspicuous and sickly sight of armies of flies feeding
on the enemy dead prompts Colonel Fisher to relate
further: “Flies were so thick on some areas it limited
vision.”
In other activity, the Namji-ri bridge over the Nak-
tong, defended by the 1st Platoon, Company F, 35th
Regiment, is inadvertently bombed by the Air Force.
One 500-pound bomb destroys the bridge, which the
enemy has been unable to seize since the offensive
began. The heroic stance by Company F’s 1st Platoon
had been sterling and the bridge that had connected
the 25th Division with the 2nd Division had been
dubbed “Vickery’s Bridge” in honor of Lieutenant
Vickery and his bulwark platoon.
The 35th Regiment has become fond of many of its
individual weapons and has given them nicknames,
such as “The Little Professor,” dubbed by Colonel
Fisher. It became notorious as the 155 howitzer that
fired effectively from Komam-ni into the N.K. 6th Di-
vision supply line, which moved across the notch. Not
to be outdone, the 1st Platoon, Company F, 35th Reg-
iment, which has guarded the bridge with the support
of one tank and one 105-mm howitzer, dubs its sole
gun “Peg O’ My Heart.” Lieutenant Vickery and his
small band have repelled nightly assaults against the
Namji-ri bridge, apparently playing a much larger part
in the battle to halt the enemy offensive than realized
by the platoon. According to the thoughts of some of
the commanding officers, the North Korean forces
could possibly have pushed without obstruction to
Pusan had the bridge been bypassed.
In the 27th Regiment’s zone, west of Masan at Battle
Mountain, the 3rd Battalion again resumes its coun-
terattack to recapture the summit. Company I, led by
Captain William Mitchell, streaks to the crest, and
close-quartered fighting ensues to dislodge the well-
entrenched enemy. Trailing right behind, Company L
ascends to the top, but even the combined force is in-
sufficient to take the summit. Both units are pushed
down the slope. Later, during the afternoon, the at-
tacking force disengages and pulls back to positions
about 1,000 yards east of the mountain (the heights it
had captured on the first day [7th] of the counter-
attack). Soon after, the 25th Division directs the 3rd
Battalion to redeploy near Masan.
Subsequent to the withdrawal of the 3rd Battalion,
27th Regiment, U.S. artillery, mortars and air strikes
continue to hammer Battle Mountain. During the eve-
ning of the 9th, Colonel Corley, the recently appointed
commander of the 24th Regiment, aborts the mission
of retaking Battle Mountain. Corley’s strategy is to re-
deploy Company K, 24th Regiment, and Company C,
65th Engineer Battalion, on the lower elevated hill just
east of Battle Mountain and to fortify the command
by encircling it with barbed wire and minefields. Cor-
ley also concentrates on all approaches to the command,
giving the artillery and mortars zeroed positions to fire
upon in case of attack.
September 9, 1950
The North Koreans initiate repeated assaults during
the coming days, but each is driven back by Company
K and the engineers. In essence, the North Koreans
control the strategic heights of Battle Mountain, but
the initiative of the 24th Division elements and their
supporting artillery fire prevent any enemy exploita-
tion from there. Nonetheless, the North Koreans set
the stage to seize P’il-bong, situated about one air-mile
southeast of Battle Mountain. P’il-bong, elevated about
250 feet more than Battle Mountain, will be struck
during the early morning hours of the 14th.
In other activity, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 27th
Regiment, arrive at Masan from their Nam River front
line positions, relieving the 5th RCT. Colonel John
“Mike” Michaelis assumes command of the area at
1500, and his “Wolf hounds” take to defending the
zone. The 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment, disengages at
Battle Mountain as previously mentioned and moves
to Masan to join the balance of the regiment there on
September 11. Also, the 5th RCT will depart on the
following day and upon arrival at Samnangjin, it will
transfer to Eighth Army reserve.
In other activity, General Kean, distressed by the
performance of the 24th Regiment since its initiation
into battle during August, suggests that the 24th Reg-
iment be relieved of combat and that it be disbanded
and its troops placed into separate units as replace-
ments. Kean remarks: “It is my considered opinion that
the 24th Infantry Regiment has demonstrated in com-
bat that it is untrustworthy and incapable of carrying
out missions expected of an infantry regiment.”
Most of 24th regimental officers and large numbers
of the Negro NCOs and enlisted personnel also agreed
with Kean’s conclusions. Many of the Negro troops of
the 24th Regiment stood tall and held their positions
despite the odds during the crucial battles involving
the regiment, and their bravery and performance had
been excellent. On the other side of the discussion,
some placed the blame on what they considered the
poor quality of the white officers and the equally poor
training the Negro troops received, but according to
the Army, it placed officers of “unusually high caliber”
with the 24th Regiment to provide strong leadership.
Nonetheless, the battlefield performance of the reg-
iment remains poor. General Walker takes no action
on General Kean’s request, ostensibly because so many
variables are present in Korea at present, making the
changes infeasible. Subsequently, the 24th Regiment
maintains its status as a Negro regiment for another
year, and after that its members will be utilized as re-
placements and transferred to other Eighth Army in-
fantry outfits.
In the 2nd Division sector, the N.K. 2nd Division’s at-
tempt to destroy the lines of the 23rd Regiment con-
tinues and the ranks of the regiment are rapidly thin-
ning from the violent struggle. Continuous lines of
wounded are brought to the medics, who work franti-
cally to save the troops. In conjunction, the Air Force
rushes its support, plastering the fringes of the imper-
iled perimeter to buy some additional time. Every avail-
312
able man, including those from Headquarters Com-
pany, is thrown into the battle. At one point during the
desperate crisis, the number of reserve troops dwindles
to six men.
Nonetheless, by noon, an exhausted and depleted
23rd Regiment derails the attack and guts the offen-
sive capability of the N.K. 2nd Division in the process.
The 23rd Regiment has lost more than sixty percent of
its combat efficiency. In contrast, the N.K. 2nd Divi-
sion, although still able to launch harassing raids behind
the lines near Changnyong, has been thoroughly
thrashed during the initial two weeks of fighting in
September. According to information given by Lieuten-
ant Lee Kwan Hyon, medical officer of the N.K. 17th
Regiment, 2nd Division (captured several days later),
the unit has sustained 1,300 killed and 2,500 wounded
during the battles west of Changnyong, and an average
number of casualties transported to a hospital in
Pugong-ni has been about three hundred per night.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: The area is
still covered by heavy clouds and horrid rain storms,
preventing nearly all air support for ground actions,
but nonetheless, the heavy fighting continues. To the left
of the valley north of Hill 300, where the North Kore-
ans are maintaining control, the S.K. 17th Regiment,
supported by artillery fire (13th Field Artillery Bn.) at-
tacks and captures Hill 285, then holds it against sub-
sequent enemy counterattacks throughout the 9th. The
S.K. 18th Regiment makes some gains during its drive
on the eastern side of the valley.
In other activity, the North Koreans have continued
penetrating the area in large numbers. Contingents of
the N.K. 5th Division begin to put a noose around
Pohang-dong, wedging troops south, southwest and
west of the town. Southwest of Yonil Airfield, more
than 1,500 enemy troops reach Hill 482 and Hill 510,
giving the enemy positions less than five miles from the
airfield and in close proximity to the two S.K. Regi-
ments, which posted south of the Yonil Airfield along
the west side of the valley.
By dusk, General Church establishes TF Davidson,
composed of the 19th Regiment (minus 3rd Battalion),
the 3rd Battalion, 9th Regiment, and the 13th FABn.
The force is further augmented by Battery C, 15th
FABn, Company A, 3rd Engineer Battalion, two anti-
aircraft automatic weapons batteries, some other mis-
cellaneous units and the 9th Regimental Tank Battal-
ion. Task Force Davidson, designed to ensure the life
expectancy of Yonil Airfield, departs from the Kyongju
area on the following day; however, heavy enemy pen-
etration has choked off most routes from the town to
Yonil, compelling the task force to maneuver south-
ward to complete the journey.
In the mountainous area between the Eastern Perime-
ter and the Taegu Perimeter, the N.K. 15th Division dis-
regards its severe losses and apparently miscalculates
the South Korean resistance, as it continues its drive
toward Yongch’on. In the meantime the beleaguered
S.K. 8th Division has been bolstered by two new reg-
iments. The N.K. artillery is at the front of the drive,
 313
but lacks infantry support. The surrounding hills are
consumed with South Korean firepower, including the
recently arrived 5th and 11th S.K. Regiments, 7th S.K.
Division.
Massive exchanges of artillery fire occur between the
two sides. The enemy artillery units expend their sup-
ply of shells; the return fire decimates the North Korean
artillery and the barrages slay the commanding officer.
The South Korean regiments, using a familiar North
Korean tactic, begin encircling the disorganized enemy
forces in this area and by the following day, the N.K.
15th Division is destroyed along the Kyongju Road,
southeast of Yongch’on.
Inchon vicinity: Lieutenant Clark, USN, maintains
his operation on Yonghung. On the previous day,
Clark’s small force had won a small victory at sea against
an attacking enemy force that had been moving from
Taebu in Sampans. On this day, the destroyer USS
Hanson and aircraft from the USS Badoeng Strait lam-
bast enemy-held Taebu.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces Bomber
Command initiates an interdiction operation to im-
pede the enemy advances against Taegu by striking
marshalling yards and other selected targets along the
enemy-controlled rails.
In Marine Corps activity, Captain Leslie E. Brown,
attached to an Air Force fighter bomber squadron,
participates in a combat mission on this day to become
the first Marine jet pilot to fly against an enemy
force.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, aware of the des-
perate situation in Korea concerning the dangerous level
of remaining ammunition, dispatches an urgent request
to two transports carrying ammunition to Yokohama,
Japan, and Pusan, Korea. The message urges the vessels
to speed as fast as possible, but not to endanger the ves-
sels’ safety, to deliver the supplies earlier than the an-
ticipated arrival date of September 11. The ongoing
Communist attacks against the entire Pusan Perimeter
are seriously draining the ammunition stock, especially
the howitzer shells.
In other activity, General Smith, CO, 1st Marine
Division, receives a recommendation from General Al-
mond calling for one battalion of the 32nd Infantry
Regiment to land on Wolmi-do Island late on the 15th,
and from there it is to speed across the causeway to cap-
ture the high ground south of Seoul. Smith is requested
to provide five Marine tanks to cover the 32nd’s 20-mile
inland advance. General Smith is disinterested in the
plan, convinced that it is logistically infeasible, especially
since Marine artillery battalions will be landing there as
scheduled. In conjunction, when the invasion unfolds,
X Corps lands the 32nd Regiment on the 18th.
September 10 Eighth Army further reduces the
ration of howitzer shells per unit from fifty per day to
twenty-five. The order has apparently taken on a sense
of humor, as it stipulates “except in cases of emergency.”
The 17th Field Artillery Battalion, is unaffected by the
order. It is the first artillery unit requiring 8-inch shells
September 10, 1950
to arrive in Korea; however, the unit totally lacks am-
munition for its guns.
Inchon vicinity: U.S. aircraft strike Inchon and
Wolmi-do Island, the latter receiving napalm deliver-
ies by Marine planes. Sixty-five sorties are flown against
Inchon. The Marine pilots of TF-95.5 deliver the na-
palm to destroy trees on Wolmi-do that are hiding the
enemy artillery. Initially, eight planes (VMF-214) and
six aircraft (VMF-323) are launched from their carri-
ers at 0600. Shortly thereafter, the eastern portion of
Wolmo-di becomes an inferno. The smoke is so thick
that the second contingent of fourteen planes is com-
pelled to circle the area momentarily while the smoke
dissipates, before they can strike their target area. The
second attack group is met by some anti-aircraft fire. A
third contingent composed of fourteen planes departs
the carriers slightly before noon and following their
devastating attack, the entire island of Wolmo-di re-
sembles one huge barbecue. The island is permeated
with smoke and fire. On the following day, the carri-
ers, USS Badoeng Strait and the USS Sicily return to
Sasebo, Japan, to get re-supplied; however, other Navy
pilots (TF-77) will resume the attacks during the in-
terim.
In other activity, the South Korean Vessel PC-703,
commanded by Lt. Commander Lee, encounters a
North Korean ship of sail in Haeju Bay and his crew
places a well-aimed shell into it. Surprisingly, the sail-
boat is loaded with mines (manufactured in Russia)
and it explodes. The intrepid South Korean PC-703
maintains its aggressive actions to aid the cause, seek-
ing out and destroying enemy sampans.
Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In the 25th Division
sector at Masan, an operation to evacuate civilians is
underway. General Kean, aware of the infiltration of
enemy agents, had ordered the civilian evacuation of
Masan, with some limitations. Police, required labor-
ers and their families, railroad employees, utility work-
ers and public officials are permitted to remain in the
town. On the following day, about 12,000 people de-
part Masan by LSTs. Enemy sympathizers include the
leader of the guards at the local prison, known to be
the leader of a Communist cell. Another noteworthy
Communist is Han Gum Jo, the manager of the Korean
Press Association in Masan. Also the chief of the South
Korean Labor Party, Han Gum Jo admits to feeding
intelligence information to the enemy forces.
In other activity, the 25th Division issues G.O. 134,
directing that the 3rd Battalion, 29th Regiment, be-
come operational as the 3rd Battalion, 27th Regiment,
and that the 1st Battalion, 29th Regiment, become the
3rd Battalion, 35th Regiment, effective this day. The
changes had initially been authorized on September
2nd by EUSAK G.O. 49.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry Division sector, the bulk of its combat units are
deployed to defend the right flank north of Taegu. The
5th Cavalry is posted about eight air-miles northeast of
Taegu, dispersed among the hills overlooking the Waeg-
wan Road. The 3rd Battalion, 7th Cavalry (attached
September 11, 1950
to 8th Cavalry) is deployed on Hills 181 and 182, along
the Tabu-dong Road (six air miles from Taegu) to the
rear of the 8th Cavalry. The 8th Engineer Battalion,
still operating as an infantry unit, is posted on the left
of the 5th Cavalry. The 8th Engineer Battalion, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel William C. Holley, is delegated
to guard a strategic bridge east of Taegu that spans the
Kumho River near its confluence with the Naktong
River.
Near Ka-san, Lieutenant Thomas T. Jones, 3rd Pla-
toon, Company D, 8th Engineering Bn., and eight
other troops who had been with him since the fighting
on Hill 755 on September 4-5, are captured by the
North Koreans. Jones and the other captives are taken
to the crest of Ka-san. Subsequently and without expla-
nation, Lieutenant Jones and three other captured
troops will be released near Ch’unch’on. The four men
make it to the perimeter of the S.K. 6th Division. An
American observation plane soars overhead, but the
400–500 enemy troops on the crest are not discovered,
because no air strikes follow.
In the ROK 1st Division sector on the right flank of the
1st Cavalry Division, the N.K. 1st Division attempts to
infiltrate its 2nd Regiment, but the South Koreans are
prepared. The enemy contingent, composed of about
1,200 troops, departs its positions near Ka-san, reach-
ing the crest of P’algong-san Mountain at about dawn.
Soon after, the attack is launched. The attacking troops,
primarily new replacement troops, are cajoled to charge
by sinister methods. Active burp guns to their rear ig-
nite an unruly charge that is met head-on and repelled
by deadly accurate South Korean fire, which mauls the
assault force and kills or wounds nearly 800 of the
enemy.
In other activity, contingents of the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision attack to gain a hill near Kasan. Severe enemy
machine gun fire stops the advance. Corporal Gordon
M. Craig, reconnaissance company, and four other cav-
alrymen advance to eliminate the nest, but soon after,
an enemy grenade is thrown toward the Americans.
Craig dives on the grenade to save the others, taking
the full blast. Inspired, the four survivors bolt forward
and decimate the enemy crewmen and the gun. Cor-
poral Craig is posthumously awarded the Medal of
Honor for his selfless heroism.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: At Yonil Air-
field, the personnel anticipate the arrival of reinforce-
ments. TF Davidson arrives at Yongdok-tong about
one mile south of the airfield at 1900. Colonel Em-
merich and General Davidson, whose plane had landed
on the highway at Yongdok-tong earlier in the day, are
both on scene to meet the task force. Davidson’s flight
from Kyongju observed no enemy presence along the
route, but he is informed by Colonel Emmerich that
the enemy has seized Hill 131, located on the south-
ern side of the boundary line separating the two S.K.
Regiments posted in front of Yonil in defensive posi-
tions.
After a brief meeting, Emmerich and Davidson de-
cide that the South Koreans must commence a night
314
attack to retake the ground to afford cover fire on the
following day, when the task force drives through the
S.K. positions to seize Hill 482, the primary enemy-
held hill. After dusk, the South Koreans mount a suc-
cessful assault and recapture Hill 131. In support of
the assault, Captain Walter Hutchins (KMAG) leads
the 3rd S.K. Engineer Battalion, which fights as in-
fantrymen, adding some extra muscle to the fight. Also,
by this day, each of the six operational South Korean Di-
visions has been bolstered by one U.S. howitzer (105s)
battalions.
In the mountainous area between the Eastern Perime-
ter and the Taegu Perimeter, elements of the 5th and 7th
Regiments, 7th S.K. Division, and elements of the S.K.
8th Division successfully conclude the battle with the
N.K. 15th Division, rendering it finished as a fighting
unit. The enemy division loses many high ranking of-
ficers.
During this day’s fighting, the S.K. 8th Division,
rejuvenated by the arrival of reinforcements and the
strenuous actions of KMAG officers to corral stragglers
and stray troops to refill the ranks, moves along the
Yongch’on–Kyongju Road, clearing it of the enemy.
During the operation, much equipment is captured,
including six howitzers, two tanks, some antitank guns
and one self-propelled gun. In addition, the S.K. 5th
Regiment, 7th S.K. Division, and other contingents of
the S.K. 8th Division drive north beyond Yongch’on
in pursuit of the fleeing remnants of the N.K. 15th Di-
vision. The pursuit encounters minimal opposition.
— In Japan: Between this day and the 11th, sixty
vessels transporting cargo for the Inchon invasion force
embark Kobe.
In other activity, a plan conceived by General Al-
mond to launch a surprise attack against Kimpo Airfield
near Inchon is executed on schedule. Special Opera-
tions Company (X Corps), commanded by Colonel
Louis Ely, embarks Kobe on a British frigate to ren-
dezvous with a South Korean picket boat off Korea.
On D-day (September 15), the soldiers are to be taken
to a point from which they must row several miles to
shore and attack the airfield in concert with the main
invasion of Inchon. Ely’s command embarks on sched-
ule and makes the approach, but in the final moments,
a decision is reached to abort the mission due to the
rowing distance involved with rubber boats.
September 11 General Walker transfers Gen-
eral Frank Milburn (IX Corps commander) to I Corps,
which he will command. Milburn assumes responsi-
bility for I Corps on this day at Taegu, replacing Gen-
eral Coulter. Coulter will assume command of IX
Corps on the 12th at Miryang.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry sector, north of Taegu, the fighting is ferocious,
but nonetheless perplexing. Company E, 5th Cavalry,
operating on the divisional left and composed of only
three officers and sixty-three men, attacks Hill 203,
while the 3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry stabs futilely at
Hill 570. In the meantime, the North Koreans capture
 315
The USS Boxer en route to Japan. The carrier is transporting 96 F-51s and 14 other planes.
the crest of Hill 314, adjacent to Hill 570, changing
the dimension of the confusion. While the enemy drives
the 16th Reconnaissance Company from Hill 314, the
recently arrived S.K. 5th Training Battalion manages
to forestall total disaster by maintaining a hold on the
reverse slope. In addition, the 3rd Battalion, 8th Cav-
alry, disengages on Hill 570 and speeds to nearby Hill
314 to attempt to recapture it. The South Koreans
launch two successive assaults, reaching the summit on
both occasions. But being unable to retain possession,
the ROKs pull back and deploy on the lower southern
slopes. On the following day, the 3rd Battalion, 8th
Cavalry, which is presently deployed in a blocking po-
sition, will attempt to seize Hill 314.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: During the
previous night, the South Koreans recaptured Hill 131,
giving it positions from which cover fire can be laid
out for Task Force Davidson. TF Davidson commences
its attack to reduce the enemy resistance on Hill 482.
The 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, takes the point by
moving out and passing through the South Korean po-
sitions, slightly south of Hill 131. The 1st Battalion
makes expeditious progress by advancing two miles and
taking control of the first hill mass west of the jump-
off line without incident by 0930.
September 11, 1950
In leap-frog motion, the 2nd Battalion jumps ahead
of the 1st Battalion and attacks toward the objective,
Hill 482 (Unje-san). The contrast is stark. The 2nd
Battalion is driving west, but the objective is at the op-
posite side of a one-mile gorge with sheer slopes and
menacing enemy machine guns that are well fortified.
The attack is repelled for the balance of the day be-
cause the battalion is unable to dislodge the machine
guns. But, on the following day, four Australian planes
arrive and loosen the resistance by depositing napalm.
After cessation of the air strike, artillery commences a
powerful bombardment. By noon on the 12th, the 2nd
Battalion scales the steep slopes and seizes Hill 482.
Soon after capturing the objective, the task force is re-
lieved by South Korean troops, who assume responsi-
bility of the area. Task Force Davidson, subsequent to
its relief, descends to the valley.
In other activity, Hill 300, located north of Kyongju
and about midway between it and An’gang-ni, is seized
by one regiment of the S.K. 3rd Division, culminating
about one week of combat. The 3rd Battalion, 19th
Regiment, which had been involved with the struggle
for Hill 300, moves up and relieves the South Koreans.
It was Company K, 3rd Battalion, that had been driven
from the hill during the night of the 8th-9th. The 3rd
September 12, 1950
Battalion, 19th Regiment, pays an expensive price for
their participation. It sustains the loss of 29 enlisted
men and 8 lieutenants. In conjunction, the 3rd Battal-
ion, 19th Regiment, is attached to the 21st Regiment
during this period of fighting.
Subsequent to clearing Hill 300 of the North Kore-
ans, the victors encounter an abundance of weapons,
other equipment and supplies (some U.S. made). In
addition, the bodies of 257 enemy troops are left
on the slopes. By this day, the North Korean endeavor
to conquer the territory in the eastern Pusan Perimeter
seemingly has become tepid and is approaching
termination. The N.K. 12th Division has sustained
huge losses, rendering it totally ineffective, and its
survivors are being hotly pursued by the S.K. Capital
Division. Pursuit is guided by observation aircraft,
which discover many enemy groups moving both
north and east. Meanwhile, the S.K. 3rd Division
chases the retreating N.K. 5th Division, which is
making an effort to regroup its forces near Pohang-
dong.
In Naval activity, as a precaution against enemy
mines, Admiral Joy orders the U.N. Blocking and Es-
cort Force (primarily U.S. ships) to remain outside the
100-fathom line along the east coast of Korea to avoid
unnecessary contact with enemy mines.
— In Japan: The 1st Marine Division departs Kobe
by sea for Inchon, while the 7th Infantry Division,
USA, leaves Yokohama. The warships sail just ahead
of another approaching typhoon: Kezia, which is ex-
pected to swoop in from the southwest and strike the
Korea Straits on September 12-13. Admiral Doyle and
General O.P. Smith depart Kobe at 1030 aboard the
USS Mount McKinley. The voyage is extremely rough
due to the storm.
Meanwhile, the USS Boxer is closing on Japan, trans-
porting its complement of 96 planes and an additional
fourteen aircraft. Typhoon Kezia forces the Boxer to
launch the extra fourteen planes, dispatching them to
Okinawa. In conjunction, the 5th Marines will sail
from Pusan, Korea, on the 13th and join the fleet at
sea. Also, the massive suction of ground forces from
Japan makes that country extremely vulnerable to at-
tack, should the Soviets or China choose to retaliate
because of the Inchon operation.
September 12 U.S. fighting men have had more
than a fair share of bad days since their arrival in Korea,
and this day is definitely not one of their favorites.
While the various units have been tramping through
the mud and rain and tracking the enemy, there has
been a bitter controversy concerning them and some
of their rations. There had been no apparent furor over
the poor weapons, the lack of proper equipment and
ammunition, nor has there been any investigations to
determine why so many American units have been gut-
ted and unprepared for battle, but word has reached
the States that the fighting men have been receiving
occasional free beer through rations, similarly to the
way they receive cigarettes and candy. The argument
316
is raised by various organizations and at one point, it is
discussed on the floor of the U.S. Congress.
Acquiescing to the pressure, the Army directs the Far
East Command to designate September 12 as the final
day for free beer. Beginning on the following day, the
troops will be required to pay for beer, and it remains
available at the PXs. There are not many post exchanges
within short distances from the front lines. A Congress-
man who defended the beer rations expresses his
thoughts: “Water in Korea is worse than the bullets.”
And the stereotyped response of the foot soldier is: “We
are doing the fighting over here and it gets pretty bad.
One can of beer never hurt nobody.”
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry sector, contingents of the N.K. 3rd Division
launch fierce but unsuccessful attacks against the 5th
Cavalry Regiment on Hill 203, but early on the fol-
lowing day, the enemy retakes the hill.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Cav-
alry, moves to Hill 660 and relieves elements of the S.K.
1st Division there. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Cavalry, prepares to attack Hill 314, west of Hill 660,
but first, it is compelled to eliminate enemy troops who
have penetrated its perimeter. Then, it will initiate an
unusual siege. The enemy defenders on the hill, many
of whom are equipped with American rifles and car-
bines, are clothed in U.S. uniforms, including G.I.
boots and helmets.
The 3rd Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel James
H. Lynch, is forced to attack without supporting ar-
tillery fire due to the shortage of ammunition. The
troops jump off at 1100, following an air strike against
the enemy positions on Hill 314. Company I, com-
manded by Lieutenant Joseph A. Fields, and Company
L, commanded by Captain Robert W. Walker, from
the lines of the 8th Cavalry, bolt forward from the lower
slope of the hill amidst a storm of enemy mortar fire.
Undaunted, the troops advance, encountering some
machine gun and small arms fire for about 500 yards.
However, beyond this point, the intensity of the fire
greatly accelerates. The combination of preregistered
enemy artillery fire and the infusion of more heavy rifle
fire draws an impenetrable line across the slope, halt-
ing the advance and gluing the attackers close to the
ground.
Meanwhile, the enemy attempts to counterattack
Company L, but the conspicuous positioning of the
North Koreans sounds the alarm and enables the Amer-
icans to properly prepare. Air strikes are requested, but
the available planes are in the process of refueling on the
ground, which prevents their arrival until mid-
afternoon. Nonetheless, the infantry garnishes a sec-
ond wind and repulses the counterattack, despite the
rain of mortar fire that pounds their positions. During
this feverish encounter on Hill 314, the men of the two
attacking companies are pulled tightly together, be-
coming intertwined, but still, the casualties continue
to mount and seriously drain the ranks of the officers.
A portion of Company L is overrun, but the ground
is soon shored up tightly. Lieutenant Marvin Haynes
 317
leads a scanty but determined detachment that drives
the enemy out. Haynes gives his life during the brief de-
cisive action. Company I is deluged with devastating
mortar fire and its casualties reach twenty-five percent.
Lieutenant Fields, disregarding his personal safety,
moves about the ringing fire and regroups his com-
mand, but he becomes wounded in the process. The
NCOs are not spared the grueling punishment.
Master Sergeant Roy McCullom, seemingly a glut-
ton for punishment, transforms his weapons platoon
into a rifle platoon, then he leads a charge. McCullom
becomes wounded and then twice more he sustains
wounds, but still he leads the attack. Finally a fourth
wound, which strikes him in the head, takes him out
of action. The hill, meanwhile, becomes consumed
with blood and no end is in sight. The decimating mor-
tar fire remains unrelenting. Another diligent officer,
Lieutenant Marshall Engle, also inspires the troops of
the battalion as he exudes fearlessness while leading
Company I.
Although wounded by a fragment from mortar fire,
Engle twice refuses evacuation, instructing the litter
bearers to forget him and move forward to retrieve the
more seriously wounded. Well into the night, after lying
on the field for about twelve hours and receiving yet
another wound, Fields is finally evacuated for medical
treatment. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion refuses to give
ground. It exhibits an extraordinary thirst for nothing
short of victory. The heated pitch of battle is inter-
rupted only by the enfilade of mortar fire, which tem-
porarily pins down the battalion and postpones the ad-
vance.
The tempo of the raging contest rises to an even more
horrid pace as friendly planes arrive at 1400. Within
about fifteen minutes after the cessation of the first of
several afternoon air strikes that carpet the summit and
blaze the north slope, the cavalrymen reinitiate the
quest for the peak. Unhesitatingly, the troops drive for-
ward, despite sustaining more punishment as they ad-
vance. The attackers’ gain brings them nose-to-nose
with the enemy and then all hell breaks loose as the
North Koreans, wearing oversized American uniforms,
emerge from their holes and charge into the 3rd Battal-
ion to ignite a donnybrook.
Some of the Americans breach the crest, only to be
driven back by incessant machine gun and mortar fire,
but the withdrawal is temporary. A determined second
thrust propels the 3rd Battalion back upon the sum-
mit, but again, fierce enemy fire shoves the attackers
back.
Meanwhile, the battalion sustains more casualties.
But, despite the alarm over casualties, the troops sense
victory and sheer determination galvanizes the battal-
ion. More planes swoop into the area and deposit more
devastating killing power on the enemy-held crest.
Captain Walker (CO, Company L), one of the few re-
maining unwounded officers, combines troops from
both of the hard hit companies and surges toward the
top of the hill. Walker, upon reaching the crest, glances
down to the balance of the advancing troops and bel-
September 12, 1950
lows a pointed and confident message: “Come up here
where you can see them! There are lots of them and
you can kill them.” In an obliging manner, the caval-
rymen dart up the remaining 150 yards in dynamic
fashion and accommodate Walker’s order, firing their
weapons rapidly while overrunning the obstinate enemy
positions.
The hill falls by 1530. But with the victory comes an-
guish, as each company sustains heavy casualties, and
domination of the hill also exposes more atrocities com-
mitted by the enemy. One American officer (earlier re-
ported missing) is located, but his body had been
burned after the enemy set him afire with gasoline. Two
days later, four additional soldiers are discovered, each
having been bayoneted and shot subsequent to being
tied and bound. The struggle for Hill 314 costs the 3rd
Battalion 229 casualties (most by mortar fire), includ-
ing 38 Americans killed and 167 wounded. Sixty-two
South Koreans attached to the 3rd Battalion, 7th Cav-
alry, are also killed or wounded. Company I has lost
all its officers to the casualty rolls and retains an effec-
tive force of about forty troops. Company L’s strength
is less than forty troops.
Considering the high number of casualties among
the officers, it becomes obvious that the individual sol-
dier on Hill 314 has held strictly to the honor of the reg-
iment. In addition, the nightmarish encounter has only
clasped five men with the terror of battle shock, some-
thing that is especially difficult to describe with words.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, with the seizure of
Hill 314, decreases the pressure against Taegu. The 3rd
Battalion maintains possession of Hill 314 until the
18th. Also, the enemy force on Hill 314, composed of
about 700 troops of the N.K. 13th Division, sustain
high casualties. About 200 dead are counted on the
field, and based on information gathered from prison-
ers, most of the additional 500 defenders reported to be
there have been wounded or are missing.
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: Hill 482 is
captured by Task Force Davidson.
In the mountainous area between the Eastern Perimeter
and the Taegu Perimeter, the N.K. 8th Division, subse-
quent to an enduring contest with the S.K. 6th Division
that began on September 2, takes Hwajong-dong about
twelve air-miles northwest of Yongch’on, but the division
has been devastated in the process. The 17th Armored
Brigade’s twenty-one new tanks that supported the at-
tack sustain great losses, with most of them destroyed.
In other activity, to the east, contingents of the S.K.
8th Division and the S.K. 5th Regiment, 7th S.K. Di-
vision, maintain their northern pursuit, reaching posi-
tions about eight miles beyond Yongch’on. The oper-
ation again captures much abandoned equipment,
including nine trucks, four artillery pieces, four 120-
mm mortars and four antitank guns. While the pur-
suit of the surviving troops of the N.K. 15th Division
continues, some South Korean contingents begin driv-
ing north from Kyongju, while others push east from
Yongch’on to tighten up the existing holes in the sec-
tor.
September 13, 1950
Also, the frigate HMS Whitesand Bay debarks a con-
tingent of Americans (Special Operations Company)
commanded by Colonel Ely, and British Royal Marines
led by Lieutenant E.G. Pounds, at Kunsan to maintain
the illusion of a major attack against it. The waterfront
landing ignites a disoriented firefight in the darkness.
Several Americans are killed during the confrontation.
— In Japan: Admiral Struble, commanding officer,
7th Fleet and JTF 7, sails from Sasebo aboard his flag-
ship, the USS Rochester. In other activity, General
MacArthur and other officers, including Army Gener-
als Almond, Edwin Wright, Alonzo Fox, Courtney
Whitney and Marine General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr.,
move by air from Tokyo to Itazuke Air Base. From the
airfield, the entourage is driven to Sasebo, from where
it will board the USS Mount McKinley. Initially, the
party was to have departed on the vessel from Kokura,
but typhoon Kezia has shifted directions, prompting
an earlier boarding to ensure a timely departure. The
McKinley, en route to Sasebo from Kobe, arrives at mid-
night on September 12-13, but it remains only a short
while. The vessel embarks within about thirty min-
utes.
September 13 Pusan Perimeter, Central
Front, Taegu: I Corps, commanded by General Mil-
burn, becomes operational at 1200. It is composed of
the 1st Cavalry Division, the 5th RCT and the S.K.
1st Division attached. By September 16th, I Corps will
be increased by the acquisition of the U.S. 24th Divi-
sion, the British 27th Infantry Brigade and other sup-
porting troops.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, northwest of Taegu,
the North Koreans initiate heavy counterattacks against
the 5th Cavalry Regiment. The attacks at some points
begin at about midnight (12th-13th) and continue
until about 0400. Hellish fighting occurs at Hills 174,
188 and 203. Company E loses Hill 203. Company L
is driven from Hill 174, and the enemy also seizes Hill
188 by dislodging Companies B and F. The 5th Cav-
alry mounts strong counterattacks during the after-
noon, but enemy resistance is fierce. The attacks are
repelled at Hills 174 and 203. However, the 5th Cav-
alry recaptures Hill 188, located on the southern side
of the road. Still, the agonizing contest rages and it con-
tinues to zap the strength of both sides. No clear vic-
tor emerges.
In the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade sector, at 0001,
the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade is deactivated. In
conjunction, the individual units automatically revert
to their previous unit designations within the 1st Ma-
rine Division. Subsequent to deactivation, the Marines
leave Pusan to join the division at sea following 67 days
of operations. The Brigade Air-Ground Team, operat-
ing with only two-thirds of its supporting transporta-
tion vehicles and those supplemented by the U.S. Army,
has covered 380 miles while engaging the enemy, and
has participated in three separate Eighth Army offen-
sives.
The brigade sustains 148 Marines killed and an
318
additional fifteen who succumb from their wounds.
Another 730 are wounded during the operations. Most
conspicuous of the figures is that only nine are missing
in action. Of these, seven men are subsequently iden-
tified as killed (when their bodies are later recovered),
giving the brigade two men unaccounted for during
the fighting. Enemy losses are estimated to be 9,900
killed and wounded.
The troops of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade,
dubbed the “Firemen of the Pusan Perimeter,” seem
eager to depart Korea and the “Bean Patch,” but the
Marines know they will return soon. It is only a ques-
tion of where. The Corsairs, which had been at the Ma-
rine brigade’s beck and call, remain perched on the car-
riers until their services are again needed (in two days).
During the operations, the Marine squadrons con-
stantly soared through the skies. The helicopters of
VMO-6 performed with equal brilliance during their
precedent-setting missions. Colonel Paul L. Freeman,
23rd Regiment, USA, said: “The Marines on our left
were a sight to behold. Not only was their equipment
superior or equal to ours, but they had squadrons of
air in direct support. They used it like artillery. It was
‘Hey Joe — this is Schmitty — knock the left of that
ridge in front of Item company.’ They had it [air sup-
port] day and night....”
The air squadrons had received little rest. VMF-214
flew 670 sorties, VMF-323 flew 498 sorties and
VMF(N)-513, from its base in Japan, executed 343
sorties between August 3 and September 14. An analy-
sis by a Marine Corps study board spells out the effec-
tiveness of their recently completed mission: “A careful
examination of any of these operations, in which
Marines engaged, discloses that a single failure would
have a profound effect upon the entire U.N. effort....”
On 3 separate occasions the brigade was attached to
the defending U.N. forces at points of dangerous enemy
penetrations and 3 times Marine units spearheaded the
counterattacking elements and effectively stopped the
enemy’s efforts, seizing the initiative from him, inflict-
ing serious losses upon him and forcing the abandon-
ment of immediate attempts at decisive penetration.”
Inchon vicinity: Admiral Higgins’ Gunfire Support
Group, given the responsibility of silencing the enemy
batteries on Wolmi-do Island to ensure safe passage
through the inner harbor of Inchon, sets to its task. Six
U.S. destroyers, two heavy cruisers, the Rochester and
Toledo, and two British light cruisers, the Kenya and
Jamaica, pass into the approaches to Inchon Harbor at
1010.
At 1145, thanks to the low tide, observers spot four
enemy mines in Flying Fish Channel and the vessels
take extra precautions. The cruisers tail off to provide
support, and the six destroyers advance to destroy the
mines with 40-mm shells. The USS Gurke eliminates
the first mine at 1146. Shortly thereafter, at about
1220, the cruisers drop anchor, positioning themselves
between seven and ten miles from the island, but five
of the destroyers maintain their speed, riding the flood-
ing tide and moving under the cover fire of supporting
 319 September 13, 1950

aircraft from Fast Carrier Task Force 77 to positions The destroyers pull back at 1347 under fire. The
closer to the target. Mansfield narrowly escapes harm. In the meantime, the
The destroyer USS Henderson is ordered by Captain lagging cruisers pick up the slack. From their positions,
Halle C. Allan, commanding officer, Destroyer too far out to be harmed by enemy shore batteries, the
Squadron Nine, to lay back and continue seeking and cruisers unleash their guns at 1352, and relentlessly
destroying enemy mines near Palmi-do. The remaining pound the island for one and one-half hours before tak-
destroyers take some unusual precautions. Due to the ing a pause. But the enemy receives no reprieve as
conditions of the channel and the remote possibility of planes (TF-77) move in immediately and lambaste the
enemy troops crossing the mud flats to attack a crippled island with a scathing attack.
destroyer, Admiral Higgins orders the crews to be armed Upon the conclusion of the air strikes, the cruisers re-
with grenades and Tommy guns, in case of being called sume firing at 1610 and hammer the enemy with six-
upon to repel boarders. Allan utilizes an order used fre- inch and eight-inch shells for thirty minutes. At 1645,
quently during the days of John Paul Jones, John Barry the warships move back out of the channel to prepare
and Commodore Perry: “Prepare to repel boarders.” for a return engagement on the following day. Eight
At 1230, the destroyers Collett, DeHaven, Gurke, additional mines are discovered as the warships retire
Mansfield and Swenson drop anchors, with the Gurke at and all are destroyed. The enemy fire inflicts only slight
the point about 800 yards from shore. The crew on the overall damage to the destroyers. The warships move out
DeHaven creates a ruse, stuffing uniforms with straw of sight, hoping to convince the enemy it is merely a
and rags to draw enemy fire. The destroyers are posi- naval strike.Admiral Struble orders a conference aboard
tioned to face the incoming tide, which permits all guns the Rochester, as he is not satisfied with the accuracy of
to stroke the shoreline, while providing themselves a the cruiser fire. Struble concentrates on improving air-
quick line of exit if the return fire becomes too severe. spotting for the following day, to improve the cruisers’
With a giant roar, the shells soar
into the suspected enemy posi-
tions just prior to 1300, ignit-
ing a furious slugfest. Rear Ad-
miral J.M. Higgins’ Gunfire
Support Group’s ploy to force
the enemy to reveal the posi-
tions of their guns is successful.
The DeHaven initiates the at-
tack, followed by the Collett.
The first enemy shots are fo-
cused upon the Gurke, Collett
and Swenson, the vessels closest
to shore, but the shells pass over
and a trailing barrage falls short
of the warships. But then, at
about 1306, enemy fire strikes
the Collett. By 1330, she sus-
tains three more hits, one of
which is a 75-mm armor-
piercing shell, which shatters.
One piece drills the engine
room and another fragment en-
ters the plot room, wounding
five crewmen. Meanwhile, the
Gurke takes three hits, but she
receives only slight damage. The
DeHaven and Mansfield remain
unscathed during the contest
between ship and shore; how-
ever, the Swenson loses one man
killed when the vessel receives a
near miss. The slain sailor is
Lieutenant David H. Swenson,
the sole American to die during
bombardment. Another man,
Ensign John Noonan, is
wounded. Refugees at Masan await evacuation by boat on September 13.
September 14, 1950
Marines move aboard ship for the invasion of Inchon.
accuracy of fire. Also, the naval aircraft of Task Force
77 continue to strike Wolmi-do and Inchon vicinity
this day, while the carriers of TG-95.5 get re-supplied.
— In Japan: Typhoon Kezia gains power as it whips
over the southern tip of Kyushu and slaps part of the
invasion fleet with some hefty blows, including sixty-
mile per hour winds and smashing waves that crack
across the ships’ bows. The storm causes cargo to shift
and causes many of the troops aboard to become sick.
The nasty early morning storm then begins to shift to-
wards the northeast, transforming the wild seas to more
tranquil waters by about noon. One ship, the carrier
USS Boxer, still racing from the States, gets muscled by
the storm as it approaches Japan and its crew is forced
to fight the unruly seas throughout the night. How-
ever, it does reach port safely. At dark on the 14th, the
Boxer streams out of Sasebo, full steam ahead, moving
toward Inchon, with its complement of 110 planes.
September 14 Southwest Pusan Perimeter: In
the 25th Division sector, the North Koreans launch a
pre-dawn assault to seize P’il-bong from the 24th Reg-
iment. The defending contingents, Companies I and
L, 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, engage the enemy
with ferocity and throw back several assaults. During
the bitter skirmishing for the peak, again the regiment
is plagued by desertion. Company L is suddenly re-
duced from about 100 troops to 40. The new battalion
commander, Major Melvin Blair, regroups his sparse
contingent and the attacking force numbering between
400 and 500 troops fails to overrun L Company. Blair
320
then attempts to get his diminutive company to the
crest of P’il-bong to join with Company I. The with-
drawal is successful, but when Company L reaches the
crest, it is unattended.
In the meantime, Company I, having been struck
by a nominal attack, abandons the crest without in-
forming Company L. While on P’il-bong, Major Blair
receives a serious leg wound from a sniper’s bullet, but
he refuses evacuation for medical aid. However, the few
effective troops that refused to abandon their posts are
inadequate against the superior numbered enemy, caus-
ing P’il-bong to fall to the Communists
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry sector, neither side relents as the heavy fight-
ing in the hills northwest of Taegu continues to rage.
Hill 174, which repelled an assault by the 5th Cavalry
on the previous day, is again attacked. Company I
lunges forcefully against the dug-in enemy, but when
the charging company reaches its objective, its ranks
have been heavily reduced, having sustained 82 casu-
alties. One platoon, which had begun the attack with
27 Americans and 15 South Koreans, ends the battle
with five South Koreans and eleven Americans. Also, the
attack only secures one side of the hill, giving the troops
little solace. More casualties occur when the two sides
begin exchanging hand grenades from close range. And
still no victor emerges.
In the 8th Cavalry zone, the 2nd Battalion, with its
new CO, Lt. Colonel William Walton, supported by
artillery fire originating on recently captured Hill 314,
attacks and secures portions of Hill 570, which is
 321 September 14, 1950

Map 14–15 September 1950.

September 15, 1950
defended by elements of the N.K. 19th Regiment, 13th
Division.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment,
2nd Division, is detached from the 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion and returned to the operational control of its par-
ent division. Also, the 5th Regimental Combat Team is
attached to the 1st Cavalry Division. It assembles in
an area west of Taegu, about six miles below Waegwan,
along the east bank of the Naktong. To the right of the
cavalry, the S.K. 1st Division maintains its attack and
pushes contingents to the fringes of the Walled City.
Forward units of the S.K. 15th Regiment advance to
the stone bulwark of the Walled City in synchroniza-
tion with the S.K. 11th Regiment’s capture of Hill 755
at about dusk.
Heavy fighting between the enemy and the South
Koreans continues through the night. Fierce exchanges
occur near the Walled City, defended by about 3,000
troops within the perimeter and an additional 1,500
to 2,000 troops outside the city on the summit. Other
skirmishes also break out to the southeast at various
places between the Walled City, Hills 755, 783 and be-
yond to P’algong-san.
Inchon vicinity: The warships of Rear Admiral J.M.
Higgins’ Gunfire Support Group move back into the
channel to resume the bombardment of Wolmi-do. The
ships receive only some meek sporadic return fire, giv-
ing evidence of the devastation poured upon the island
on the previous day. The enemy-held island is first
struck by planes from the carriers of TG-99.5, as the
Marines have been re-supplied and are back on the
scene. The aircraft of VMF-214 and VMF-323 spot
targets for the cruisers and deliver more punishing
dosages of napalm, prior to and subsequent to the naval
surface vessels’ bombardment. The planes arrive slightly
before 1100 to deliver their deadly fire.
The long guns of the cruisers bellow at 1116, but
this day, the cruisers incorporate additional targets and
pound Inchon during the bombardment. Waiting de-
stroyers, their flags at half-mast, bide their time, and at
about 1215, they advance to the positions they had
held on the previous day and reinitiate the bombard-
ment. In the meantime, the guns on the cruisers tem-
porarily fall silent, just as more planes soar overhead
and pour more devastating fire upon the island. Upon
cessation of the air attack, the destroyers resume their
in-close firing at 1255, ensuring no placidity on
Wolmi-do and much anxiety in Inchon.
The five participating destroyers launch 1,732 5-
inch shells into Wolmi-do and Inchon, within one hour
and fifteen minutes. The damaged Collett is detached.
Subsequent to the combined attacks of the warships
and planes, the withdrawal from the channel is totally
uneventful. The batteries on Wolmi-do have been per-
manently silenced.
In related activity, the Inchon Invasion Force, com-
posed of 70,000 troops, is fast approaching the objec-
tive. Despite the inclement weather, all ships in the
task force have arrived at the rendezvous points, and
they are preparing to strike. Only one vessel had be-
322
come disabled during the journey, an LST (the 1048)
transporting Headquarters, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines.
The vessel begins hobbling on the 12th after blowing
an engine, but a nearby ocean tug boat, the Conserver,
tows the LST at eight knots, getting her to the debarka-
tion point on schedule.
The vessels move across the Yellow Sea heading to-
ward the final rendezvous point, dubbed “California,”
off the coast of Korea. Meanwhile, British Admiral An-
drewes’ Blockade and Covering Force warships screen
the advance. Also, the Advance Attack Group, includ-
ing Admiral Higgins’ Gunfire Support Group, the
rocket ships (LSMRs) and the Battalion Landing Team
(3rd Battalion, 5th Marines and one platoon of nine
M-26 tanks (Company A, 1st Tank Bn.) begin the ap-
proach to Inchon at 0200 on the 15th. Wolmi-do is
the preliminary target, and its landing area is dubbed
Green Beach.
South Korean East Coast: A South Korean LST at-
tempts to land about 800 Korean guerrillas at Sam-
chok. The operation is directed by Eighth Army; how-
ever, no one notifies the U.S. Navy. The Navy later
learns of the incident and its help is required to cover
the premature withdrawal. Warships throw their weight
into the effort to execute a safe withdrawal.
In other activity, the USS Missouri (BB-63) arrives
from the Atlantic area and joins with TF-95.2 on the
15th. A helicopter guides the guns of Big Mo and the
area at Samchok is the first to become a recipient of its
16-inch guns. In conjunction, the evacuation opera-
tion continues for five days.
— In the United States: President Truman an-
nounces that the State Department has been author-
ized to initiate talks with Japan and Allied members of
the Far Eastern Commission to determine the accept-
ability of the proposed peace treaty and the attached
U.S.–Japan security agreement. This announcement
sends a clear message that the U.S. is prepared to con-
summate the treaty with or without the Russians’ par-
ticipation.
September 15 Nearly 33 percent of the naval
vessels carrying the X Corps troops toward Inchon are
manned by Japanese, and about twenty minesweepers,
also manned by Japanese, sweep both coasts of Korea
to clear the seas. Subsequent to the invasion by X
Corps, large numbers of Japanese longshoremen are
transported to Hungnam, Inchon and Wonsan to facil-
itate movement of supplies. The Russians mount strong
opposition to the Japanese involvement during a sub-
sequent meeting of the Allied Council, but it doesn’t faze
the Allies.
In other activity, the number of U.S. casualties since
the beginning of hostilities through September 15 are:
total casualties, 19,165 troops; 4,280 killed in action;
12,377 wounded, including 319 who succumb from
wounds; 401 men reported captured; and 2,107 miss-
ing in action.
The 3rd Division, minus its 65th Regiment, stands
at 7,494 men and will need large numbers of South
 323
Korean troops to bring it up to full strength. The two
regiments, the 7th and 15th, that recently embarked
from San Francisco are now debarking ship at Moji,
Japan. By October 1, the South Koreans will begin to
join the division.
Also, the N.K. 25th Brigade (formed during August)
begins departing Ch’orwon (northeast of Yongchon)
by train, heading for Seoul. The brigade is composed
of 2,500 troops and comprises two infantry battalions,
one 76-mm artillery battalion, one engineer battalion,
four heavy machine gun battalions and one 120-mm
mortar battalion. Additional support troops also bolster
the force.
Eighth Army estimates of enemy strength facing the
Pusan Perimeter place about 104,417 enemy troops in
the path of the advance that is to begin on the follow-
ing day. The N.K. I Corps is alleged to contain six in-
fantry divisions, bolstered by armor, deployed on the
southern half of the front. The N.K. II Corps, stretched
across the northern and eastern half of the front, is es-
timated to compose seven infantry divisions augmented
by armor. Eighth Army estimates the enemy divisions
to be at about 75 percent strength, affording it the flex-
ibility to divert three divisions to the vicinity of Seoul
without endangering its ability to establish formidable
resistance against Eighth Army’s offensive.
It is later determined that Eighth Army estimates are
high. These conclusions are determined after the cap-
ture of enemy documents and from other information
gained from enemy POWs. A more accurate estimate
of enemy strength at the perimeter is about 70,000
troops, and enemy equipment is scaled down to about
fifty percent of its original strength. Also, only about
thirty percent of the original troops remain in the units,
as the Americans have inflicted severe casualties. The
veteran enemy troops have begun a new practice since
U.S. Marines in amtracs head for a beach at Inchon, September 15.
September 15, 1950
the North Korean morale has been slipping. They shoot
any troops that attempt to desert or exhibit a reluc-
tance to advance.
General Walker’s combined forces, including the
British brigade and the South Korean troops along the
perimeter, stand at about 140,000 troops. And Air
Force personnel in Korea stands at 4,726 men. Total
U.N. strength in Korea, including about 103,000 Ko-
reans, is 221,469 men.
In other activity, Task Force Haynes, established by
the 2nd Division on September 1, is disbanded.
Pusan Perimeter, Central Front, Taegu: In the 1st
Cavalry zone, fighting continues north of Taegu. The
2nd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, remains heavily engaged
on Hill 570 east of the Tabu-dong Road, and on the
west side, enemy contingents infiltrate an existing hole
between the 5th and 8th Cavalry Regiments at Hill
401. The 3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, assaults the hill to
clear it of the enemy. Vicious combat ensues on Hill
401 throughout the day and into the night. During
one heated encounter, Sergeant Earl L. Baxter holds
the rear while his platoon is being dislodged from the
hill. Baxter kills about ten enemy troops, but an enemy
grenade then slays him.
To the right of the cavalry, the South Koreans are
still encountering heavy resistance from the enemy near
the Walled City at Hills 755 and 783 and in the vicin-
ity of P’algong-san. But it is becoming evident that the
North Koreans are initiating movement to the north.
The N.K. 1st Division appears to be pushing some el-
ements northward from the Walled City, and the N.K.
13th Division is also withdrawing north. Nonetheless,
Eighth Army is not becoming complacent concerning
the defense of Taegu. General Walker further bolsters
the city by spreading fourteen battalions of Korean po-
lice around its perimeter.
September 15, 1950
Pusan Perimeter, Eastern Corridor: Task Force
Church is disbanded at 1200. Subsequent to its dis-
banding, the ROK I Corps reverts to control of the
South Korean Army.
In other activity, General Walker orders the 24th Di-
vision, under General Church, to depart the Kyongju
area and head for Kyongsan for a regrouping effort.
However, the 19th Regiment is to remain at Kyongju
on temporary assignment as Eighth Army reserve. The
21st Regiment, 24th Division, had departed for Ky-
ongsan, southeast of Taegu, on the previous day.
Although there has been American participation in
the fighting within the eastern sector of the perimeter
during the first half of September, the majority of the
ground action has been undertaken by South Korean
troops, bolstered heavily by U.S. armor, artillery, air
strikes and ground forces. In contrast, the enemy has
been forced to endure more serious resupply problems;
their supply lines have become overextended, causing the
North Koreans in this sector to experience what could
be termed a logistical nightmare.
Also, the 5th Regimental Combat Team begins mov-
ing to the Taegu vicinity and assembles west of the
town. In addition, the USS Boxer (CV 21) arrives in
time to join with TF-77 and participate in the Inchon
invasion.
THE INVASION OF INCHON Prior to the entrance of
the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, there had been an-
other confrontation between Marines and Koreans.
Seventy-nine years ago, in May 1871, the Koreans had
massacred an American survey team. Following the Ko-
reans’ refusal to apologize, the U.S. fleet landed Marines
and sailors to seek swift reprisals. Three days of ferocious
attacks followed, culminating with the destruction of
three forts, including the well-fortified citadel. Nine
sailors and six Marines received the Medal of Honor
for their extraordinary gallantry.
Marines aboard an amtrac at Inchon, September 1950.
324
Now, a much larger and more powerful fleet, Joint
Task Force Seven, including some Royal Navy vessels,
encroaches the shores of Korea. The French contribute
the nearly antique frigate La Grandière, whose maxi-
mum speed of about twelve knots relegates her to escort-
ing the tardy vessels such as the tugs and minesweep-
ers. The fleet, under Vice Admiral Arthur Struble, is
undergoing a dazzling last minute operation to check
the minute details of the various attack and support
components.
Amphibious Group One, commanded by Rear Ad-
miral James H. Doyle, is dusting the cobwebs from the
amphibious landing craft, as the 1st Marine Division,
led by General O.P. Smith, prepares to launch the in-
vasion. Meanwhile, the thunderous guns of the advance
warships have been pummeling the objectives in con-
cert with marauding aircraft. Initially, Wolmi-do,
thought to be a well-fortified stronghold, must be seized
to prevent its use by the enemy to strike against the
flank of the invasion force. Wolmi-do must be held by
the Marines until late afternoon when the tides again
change, to permit the main invasion force to enter the
channel to storm Inchon.
Wolmi-do, by evening of the 14th, after five days of
incessant bombardment, resembles an over-charred,
smoking prime rib. While the enemy is pondering what
might occur next, the Yellow Sea is bristling with ac-
tivity. The early morning skies are as dark as the ar-
mada draws closer to the target, mindful of all the bleak
disadvantages and profound questions still facing the
operation. Is the fleet steaming across the blackened
sea and through the grim darkness toward dawn and
victory? Or is it stumbling into a watery abyss that
could doom the fleet and consume the warriors before
they brandish their shields and armor? The weighty an-
swers will be forthcoming at dawn.
Marines will launch a two-pronged landing on the
September 15, 1950
west coast at Wolmi-do and Inchon, the latter a perni-
cious nemesis for naval vessels and amphibious troops
situated on the estuary of the Yom-ha River. The ves-
sels must conquer one of the world’s most treacherous
tides (33 feet at maximum, with an average spring tide
of 23 feet). Twenty-nine feet of water is the minimum
requirement for the warships and this occurs only on
several days a month. If the invasion is forced to abort,
the next available dates will be October 11 or Novem-
ber 3, neither being in the best interests of Eighth
Army.
Moreover, the slim passage is easily blocked. If one
ship gets hung up, all preceding vessels in the channel
will be stranded, unable to reverse course, and those to
the rear will be unable to assist. As described later by
General Oliver P. Smith, “Half of the problem was in
getting to Inchon at all.” The U.S. Navy is undertak-
ing this unique challenge in stride. The remaining part
of the equation is close at hand, and the Marines are
convinced that they hold the solution.
A flawless rendezvous occurs after midnight, and the
warships of TF 90.1 initiate the invasion just before
0300. The destroyer USS Mansfield, commanded by
Commodore Halle Allan, takes the point and cautiously
slips into the combustible cauldron of Flying Fish
Above: Old Glory unfurled on Wolmi-do Island, September 15. Opposite: 15 September 1950 map.
326
Channel with its notorious tides and ill-scented odor.
Eighteen additional warships closely shadow the Mans-
field, each exercising prudence. Success depends on two
factors, the skill of the ships’ radar operators and a gen-
erous sprinkling of good luck, to gain safe passage
through the foreboding and unfamiliar dark waters.
Politicians and a majority of ranking U.S. military
leaders are highly skeptical of achieving success with
the dangerous mission. Nonetheless, they have acqui-
esced to the dynamic and peerless persuasiveness of
General Douglas MacArthur, who has remained stead-
fast in his belief that the bold and unexpected amphibi-
ous assault will smash the enemy and bring a quick ter-
mination to the hostilities. However, he is equally
cognizant of the disastrous consequences if the Marines
falter.
The vessels reach the halfway point in the channel
without any mishaps, but the final lap remains full of
lurking dangers, with the potential to become a cham-
ber of death. The intrepid actions of Lieutenant Eu-
gene Clark, USN, while in the area in advance of the
invasion have already paid great dividends of intelli-
gence, and now the invasion force becomes the recip-
ient of a spectacular bonus. As the vanguard creeps
through the murky night air, sometimes unable to
September 15, 1950
The Marines arrive at Inchon and bolt over the seawall at Red Beach.
distinguish the sky from the sea and seemingly drifting
toward a wall of ink, a brilliant flash of light comes into
view, followed by additional time-delayed flashes. The
Mansfield discovers that it is the mariner’s beacon on
Palmi-do. The mood aboard ship swings from one of
somberness to jubilation. The mariner’s beacon light,
which Lieutenant Clark had repaired, is beaming a wel-
come to the sailors and Marines.
Under the guiding light of the antiquated French
lamp, the warships safely pass through the remainder of
the critical danger points in the channel, and the troops
breathe a hefty sigh of relief. The vessels shoot forward
as if gliding along jet satin.
Meanwhile, the carriers, which have passed the night
328
with relative calm, become a churning whirlwind of
activity. The pilots have been thoroughly briefed and
the crews have the planes primed. The resonant roar of
their engines reverberates across the decks, signaling
that the attack is imminent. The ebony sky and the
inky black seas enunciate the serious tone of the task at
hand, as the eager pilots await the signal to launch their
planes. The cockpit becomes a very lonely place just
prior to takeoff, especially on a starless night when the
runway is the swaying deck of a carrier being manipu-
lated by rough seas.
Suddenly, the Marine Corsairs (VMF-214 and
VMF-323) bolt from the decks of the Sicily and the
Badoeng Strait, leaving short-lived fiery tails in their
 329 September 15, 1950

The view of Inchon at dawn, September 15, from the deck of the USS Mount McKinley.
September 15, 1950 330
General MacArthur observes the landing at Inchon. To his rear, left
to right, are Vice Admiral Struble (partially visible), Brigadier Gen- the Mount McKinley, incites the
eral Wright and Major General Almond.
wake as they stream toward Inchon. Farther west, the
carriers Boxer, Philippine Sea and the Valley Forge launch the boats are lowered into the water, and soon after,
their aircraft. The planes form above the carriers, then
soar eastward toward the objective, arriving over the
target areas at 0454.
Shortly afterward, the floating fortresses of Captain
Sears’ Advance Attack Group 90.1 glide into the narrows
west of Wolmi-do: three APDs, and one LSD. Expedi-
tiously, the vessels move to their assigned battle posi-
tions. The sleek but deadly destroyers glide just ahead
of the attack force. The USS Collett, DeHaven and
Gurke, having sustained only slight damage during the
recent exchange with enemy shore batteries, are anx-
ious to unleash their fury. The destroyers Henderson,
Mansfield, Southerland and the Swenson are also poised
to fire. The cruisers USS Rochester and USS Toledo, car-
rying Admirals Higgins and Struble respectively, as well
as the HMS Jamaica and the HMS
Kenya are in their specified battle
positions, their colossal guns star-
ing toward Inchon.
Nearby, north of the target area,
three little mighty-mites, the
LSMRs 401, 403 and 404, sway
meekly, concealing their compact
killing power while they bob in the
water. The vessels are equipped
with nasty rockets and those on
board are determined to hit the
mark.
L-Hour is fast approaching. The
murky darkness begins relinquish-
ing its post to approaching day-
light. The control ship, USS Mount
McKinley, glides forward with
quiet confidence, entering the nar-
rows a few blinks ahead of dawn,
where it straddles amidst the
gleaming steel warriors and slings
its anchor at 0508.
Meanwhile, on Wolmi-do, the
survivors of the earlier bombard-
ments are awakening to the
whirling sounds of aircraft. Since
the aircraft do not possess the
quaint sounds of “Washing Ma-
chine Charlie,” the most promi-
nent nickname for the enemy air-
craft with their sputtering sounds,
it becomes apparent that the skies
are filling with unfriendly planes.
The main event is scheduled for
later in the day, but there will be
no evening performance unless the
initial attack succeeds with ab-
solute perfection. And so it begins.
At 0520, Admiral Doyle, aboard
battle with the expected signal:
“Land the landing force.” As the
message is flung to the yardarm,
the Marines begin the downward climb to board the
wobbly craft and initiate the monotonous circling ma-
neuver about one mile off “Green Beach” while form-
ing for the attack. All the while, the wave command-
ers focus on the control vessel.
Suddenly, the four gargantuan cruisers bellow. In
unison, unending banners of burnt orange fire are
streaming toward Inchon. The first burst strikes thun-
derously at 0545. The deafening sounds of the 5- and
6-inch guns seemingly stir the sea, as the menacing
echoes resoundingly bounce and swirl through the
channel. Dawn is announced with a massive bang, as
the channel affords excellent acoustics.
The destroyers chime in vociferously, concentrating
their hardy 5-inch guns on Wolmi-do, specifically
 331
A U.S. Marine using a flamethrower on Wolmi-do.
Radio Hill. Intelligence has reported the island, linked
to Inchon by a causeway, to be defended by about 400
North Korean troops. Subsequent information, ex-
tracted from prisoners, makes it clear that the defend-
ers are attached to the N.K. 226th Marine Regiment
and the N.K. 918th Coast Artillery Battalion.
Radio Hill’s seaward profile has already been trans-
formed by the bombardments from ghostly gray to
pitch black, etched with some deep crimson. And now
it is obscured by huge clouds of smoke. The defenders
are unable to see the approaching Marine Corsairs div-
ing to inflict more punishing blows.
At 0600, the F4Us descend rapidly. In a blazing
flash, Wolmi-do is carpeted with bursting napalm
bombs and their rockets’ red glare. The whistling death
plummets to the ground with earth-shattering effects,
as the planes criss-cross the island, pounding it with
multiple layers of bombs and napalm, while shredding
it with linking chains of vicious machine gun fire and
riveting rockets. The horrific air strikes cease at 0615,
but Wolmi-do is scheduled to immediately receive sev-
eral additional lethal surprises. And the Corsairs will
reinitiate their strikes to protect the ground Marines.
While the naval surface vessels and aircraft have been
clobbering the target areas, the decks of the troop ships
have been humming with animation, as the Marines
board the landing boats. The designated spearhead of
the invasion force is the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
commanded by Colonel Taplett. Company G, aboard
the USS Diachenko, and Company H, aboard the H.A.
September 15, 1950
Bass, will lead the assault and Company I, the recently
established third rifle company, will debark the USS
Wantuck and come in as reserve. In conjunction, Reg-
imental Headquarters, the armor, vehicles, and various
types of equipment, are aboard the flagship of Captain
Sears, the LSD Fort Marion.
L-Hour is confirmed: 0630.
The Marines’ spearhead force has been aboard the
landing craft since about 0600, awaiting the signal to
attack. The 5th Marines desire to rekindle their pecu-
liar fondness for the sight of North Koreans. The last
encounter with the Communists had been at the grue-
some Pusan Perimeter, and the Marines have some un-
finished business to pursue. The Marines are not antic-
ipating the Communists setting the table or offering
an elaborate meal, but they do expect to eat dinner in
Seoul, and the sooner the better.
In the meantime, as ordered, the swashbuckling Cor-
sairs harness their flying swords at 0615, and an eerie
silence permeates Wolmi-do, now totally consumed by
choking smoke and incinerated debris. Nonetheless,
the remaining enemy survivors are about to be struck
by yet another sizzling hurricane of fire.
The trio of LSMRs, led by Commander Clarence T.
Doss, waiting patiently north of the objective, dart from
their positions as the aerial attacks subside. The vessels
sprint toward the coast, catapulting thousands of rock-
ets into the enemy positions. During the searing bar-
rage, one of the LSMRs veers south, cruising past Green
Beach and pulverizing it. Then the straying LSMR
September 15, 1950
U.S. Marine assault force (first wave) aboard LCVPs as they approach the beach at Inchon.
focuses on Radio Hill, saturating it with rocket fire be-
fore departing. Once the LSMR advances beyond
North Point of Wolmi-do, the torch passes to the sailors
commanding the landing craft and the 5th Marines’
spearhead.
The red flag is propelled to the yardarm of the con-
trol vessel, underscoring the anxiety and pre-battle an-
ticipation of the watching assault troops. The landing
craft, having ceased their circling, are formed on-line
for the assault. Seventeen LCVPs, transporting the 3rd
Battalion, and three LSVs, containing nine tanks, glide
toward the departure line.
Then swiftly, the red flag drops.
At 0625, a loudspeaker aboard ship proclaims:
“Landing Force crossing line of departure.” General
MacArthur, like the troops, has enjoyed little sleep
when he enters the bridge of the Mount McKinley to
observe the landing, just as the announcement is being
spoken. The confining flag deck is becoming over-
crowded with officers, and each of them focuses in-
tently, peering toward the bland shoreline shrouded by
a dismal hovering haze and engulfed by lingering fires.
Inchon lies about one mile away, but it’s an espe-
cially long mile, if you happen to be General
MacArthur or a member of the first wave of the 5th
Marines. This is the first major amphibious invasion
since the landing on Okinawa on Easter Sunday, April
1, 1945. Many ranking officers, including General
Omar Bradley, have considered the era of the amphibi-
ous invasions over forever, destined to attain the same
332
fate as the forlorn horse soldiers. The theory of the de-
mise of the amphibious invasion has developed since
the appearance of the atomic bomb during the latter
days of World War II. Both General MacArthur and
the Marine Corps wholeheartedly dispel the theory.
General MacArthur has held steadfast, unwilling to
yield on his belief that Inchon will fall, and by am-
phibious troops. MacArthur’s flamboyant proclama-
tion, “We will land ... and I will crush them,” is now
dependent upon the Marines and their ability to fulfill
his promising boast. There are some positive things in
MacArthur’s favor, despite his detractors and his self-
proclaimed odds of 5,000-to-1 against success. Since
the birth of the Marine Corps, November 10, 1775,
no adversary has ever thrown the U.S. Marines back to
the sea. And the 1st Marine Division intends to keep
its honor clean.
During the hazardous trip to the beach, the Marines
are consumed with a mixture of solemn and joyous
thoughts. Some hold tightly to their fond memories
of loved ones at home and others are praying that
the most recent blessings of the chaplains will bring
them safely through the murderous ordeal. Many re-
member one somber, sardonic quote, attributed to
General of the Army, Omar Bradley, while he was
speaking during Congressional hearings on October
19, 1949: “I also predict that large scale amphibious
operations will never occur again.” Some of the Marines
and sailors distinctly recall President Truman’s refer-
ence to the Marine Corps as being “nothing more than
 333
Landing craft transport scaling ladders as well as Marines close against Blue Beach.
a police force for the Navy.” As the landing boats charge
toward shore, the slogan “Truman’s Police Force” is
prominently displayed on several of them.
A mere eight minutes have trickled by since the first
wave passed the departure line. Rockets and 40-mm
shells maintain their steady stream, pulverizing the
southern portion of the island, when one platoon of
Company G, 5th Marines and three platoons of Com-
pany H violently plow ashore against Green Beach,
three minutes behind schedule, at 0633. They are fol-
lowed by the second wave, which brings in the remain-
der of the two assaulting companies, within two addi-
tional fleeting moments, at 0635.
The landing is seriously hindered by the mass of de-
stroyed enemy small craft that clutter the approaches
and confine the landing strip on the beach to fifty yards,
thereby creating extremely close quarters during the
early and most critical minutes of the landing. Due to
the huge amount of shipwrecked debris, the underwa-
ter demolitions teams had been unable to fully dislodge
the wreckage in time to ease the strain of the landing.
And as usual, everything does not work out as expected.
Lieutenant Bohn’s first step from the boat is a sobering
one, as he sinks in water over his head. But other than
the quick bath, most things go well. So far, no enemy
land mines have been encountered, and no enemy fire
emerges to slow the advance.
In the meantime, a neutralizing process is underway,
as swarms of circling Corsairs from VMF-214 and
VMF-323 swoop down and sweep the areas fifty yards
September 15, 1950
in front of the Marines, spitting deadly machine gun fire
to open holes and ensure a speedy advance. The tanks
of Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, smash ashore at
0646, bolstering the foot Marines and adding some
rolling steel cleats to their sturdy boots. The Navy’s
guns and the aircraft have purposely spared the cause-
way, giving the tanks access to the mainland when it be-
comes necessary.
The Marines have been met primarily by ugly de-
bris and some grotesque indications of mangled bod-
ies and death, but few enemy shots ring out. A rapid re-
organization occurs at the water’s edge, and the advance
begins.
Lieutenant Bohn’s Company G swings to the right
and moves against Objective 1-A, Radio Hill, advanc-
ing against some sporadic fire as it charges up the north-
ern slopes, again encountering no mines. Marine rifle-
men take aim and rapidly snap out effective fire,
suppressing the resistance. Most of the enemy encoun-
tered choose to surrender. Bohn’s Marines shoot to the
top and occupy the summit.
Company H, commanded by Captain Patrick Wild-
man, operating on the left, moves straight ahead to as-
sault Objective 2-B, which includes the shoreline fac-
tory area facing Inchon and the badgered eastern spur
of Radio Hill, but the platoons are restrained; they are
compelled to move slowly through the twisted and
burning rubble.
At 0655, twenty-two minutes after the landing,
Sergeant Alvin E. Smith, 3rd Platoon, Company G,
September 15, 1950
plants the colors. He affixes Old Glory to a battered
tree atop the shattered crest of Radio Hill, not too far
from the demolished radio towers. His actions are in-
stantly noted aboard the Mount McKinley. MacArthur
and the other officers are observing the flag raising from
the bridge. MacArthur, his chest swelling and his eyes
beaming with undeniable pride, retains his command-
ing composure while rising from his swivel chair and
nonchalantly motioning to the other officers, saying:
“That’s it. Lets get a cup of coffee.”
Meanwhile, on Wolmi-do, there is no time for the
Marines to savor the moment. Much remains to be
done to ensure total victory. The battle moves to the
next plateau. Company H, commanded by Captain
Patrick Wildman, drives toward the causeway that links
the island with Inchon. A small detachment is also dis-
patched to secure North Point, which has been reduced
to debris. About one platoon of enemy soldiers on
North Point evades the sweep, causing complications for
the fourth wave, which arrives at 0659.
Company I (Reserve), commanded by Captain
Robert McMullen, comes in as the fourth wave and
moves through North Point, once a somewhat elegant
resort, but now about the only remnant of opulence is
the swimming pool. Thinking it unoccupied, Com-
pany I proceeds to advance, paying little heed to the
many caves that had been used for dual purposes: to
store goods and for refuge from bombardment. The
roving unit encounters surprising resistance. Concealed
Results of U.S. bombardment: Industrial buildings in Inchon on fire.
334
North Koreans begin lobbing grenades, which further
splatter the debris and scatter the Marines. Soon after
the explosions, the Marines regain their composure and
the interrupted momentum, then search for the source
of the grenades, discovering it in a group of nests en-
trenched on the low cliff facing Inchon. An interpreter
attempts to convince the trapped Communists that
their predicament is futile and that they should surren-
der. A response is forthcoming, as the cornered enemy
begins slinging more grenades.
Meanwhile, the recently arrived tanks of Lieutenant
Sweet are standing by, impatiently waiting for a call
from the ground troops. Captain McMullen obliges,
subsequent to the refusal of the enemy (about platoon
strength) to capitulate. The M-26s sprint into position
while Marine riflemen deploy and provide ample cover
fire to dampen any enemy fire. Then, a dozer tank, di-
rected by McMullen, plows into the pocket and plugs
the enemy filled holes, exterminating the threat by per-
manently sealing off the openings.
Company I then resumes its advance, trailing the
movement of Company H, and encounters another
surprise as it moves toward the causeway. The advanc-
ing Marines come upon another cavern, thought to be
unoccupied until peculiar noises begin filtering out of
it. Instinctively, Marine riflemen take aim, then stand
ready as an M-26 tank encroaches the entrance, pauses
momentarily as it sets the turret’s sights, then pumps two
whizzing rounds, dead-center, through the entrance.
 335
Marines holding a causeway that links Wolmi-do with the mainland at Inchon, September 15.
Both rounds strike pay dirt as explosions shake the
ground. Immediately thereafter, huge puffs of billow-
ing smoke and flame emerge erratically from the in-
cinerated cave. The Marines are soon flabbergasted, as
thirty Red troops wobble through the dust and raise
their hands high.
Company H, which had been attempting to clear
the industrial area, continues its prolonged advance,
prompting Colonel Taplett to order Company G to se-
cure Radio Hill in its entirety. Lieutenant Bohn’s com-
mand races across the ridgeline and secures the eastern
spur. Then Bohn speeds a detachment to the western
tip of the heights to secure it.
During the clearing operations, one enemy armored
vehicle boldly attempts to run the causeway from In-
chon to Wolmi-do; however, a concerned Marine M-
26 tank crew becomes fearful that the armored car
might get caught in the causeway minefield laid ear-
lier by the engineers. The tank decides to intervene.
With precise intent, the tankers swivel the turret into
position and fire, scoring a bull’s-eye. The armored car
and its occupants are blown into oblivion, keeping the
minefield a secret and preventing the engineers from
claiming the first kill of an armored vehicle by ground
troops.
In the meantime, General MacArthur has already
leisurely enjoyed his coffee aboard the Mount McKin-
ley, after spotting the most recent performance of
Sergeant Smith. And at 0745 a message from Colonel
Taplett is received aboard the McKinley: “Captured 45
prisoners. Meeting light resistance.” The news of the 3rd
September 15, 1950
Battalion’s success is proclaimed over the loudspeaker
and shortly thereafter, General MacArthur composes
a profound note and requests that Admiral Struble relay
it to the fleet: “The Navy and Marines have never shone
more brightly than this morning. MacArthur.”
Back on Wolmi-do, progress again becomes rapid
and by 0800, Radio Hill belongs to the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, but more importantly, the 1st Marine Di-
vision now dominates the entire island, giving the
Marines control of Inchon harbor. Quickly, an elated
Colonel Taplett contacts headquarters with the news:
“This glove ... Wolmi-do secured at 0800.” Taplett es-
tablishes his battalion observation post on the crest,
giving him a panoramic view of the beach landing areas
at Inchon and a bird’s eye look toward enemy-held Ob-
servatory Hill, which towers over Inchon. The posi-
tions are undoubtedly an artillery spotter’s delight, and
as the afternoon progresses, the Navy’s guns will prove
the point.
The western base of Radio Hill, near the west coast,
had been wrapped with barbed wire intermingled with
about 300 antipersonnel mines; however, the obvious
amateurish methods used prove to be no deterrent for
Technical Sergeant Edwin Knox’s engineers (Company
A, 1st Eng. Bn.), who dismantle them effortlessly.
So as not to overlook Washington, General MacArthur
also pens a message, which is forwarded to the States to
be received by Army Generals Bradley and Collins, as
well as Air Force General Vandenberg and Admiral
Sherman. It reads: “First phase landing successful with
losses slight. All goes well and on schedule.”
September 15, 1950 336
 337
LST 1123 at Inchon during low tide.
Still, the amphibious firemen of the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, must eliminate a Communist outpost on
Sowolmi-do (Little Moontip Island), which contains a
lighthouse and is linked to the southwestern end of
Wolmi-do by a slim 750-yard causeway. In the mean-
time, Wolmi-do is being combed and transformed into
a defensive mode by the bulk of the battalion. Up to
now, the 3rd Battalion has sustained slight casualties,
considering the weight of the mission. Fourteen
Marines have been wounded.
While the Marines are mopping up the smoldering
terrain, the Marine casualties are expeditiously evacu-
ated to the Fort Marion, but some of the more critically
wounded are then shifted to the Mount McKinley. Con-
tingents of the 1st Medical Battalion, which laid out
the evacuation blueprint, handle the task admirably.
The details have been meticulous, even to the point of
committing ambulance boats capable of maneuvering
through the low tide.
Several minutes prior to 1000, 2nd Lieutenant John
Counselman, platoon leader (3rd Platoon), Company
G, receives orders to lead the attacking detachment to
secure Sowolmi-do. One infantry squad, bolstered by
machine guns and a section of tanks, advances. The
unit moves toward the puny causeway, a mere 12 yards
wide, remaining confident but staying fully alert and
prepared to react to potential enemy fire. The suspi-
cion proves right. About one enemy platoon holds the
lighthouse and from it, the enemy begins blasting the
Marine column as it approaches the entrance of the
September 15, 1950
causeway, bringing the Americans to a succinct halt
and making it apparent that the Communists are bent
on holding out. Colonel Taplett directs the infantry
and supporting tanks to halt and await instructions.
Colonel Taplett then calls for some pinch-hitters to
clear the causeway. Within several minutes, Corsairs
from VMF-214, led by Major Robert Floeck, appear
overhead to eliminate the obstacle with napalm and
cannon fire, prompting some of the defenders to avoid
the heat by diving into the water. The air strike un-
corks the bottleneck and the attack resumes. Mine-
clearing engineers lead the way, with the tanks on their
heels. The riflemen maintain a brisk pace just behind
the clanging armor.
Meanwhile, the mortars of the 3rd Battalion begin
popping some oversize on-target 81-mm shells into the
blockage, just ahead of the advancing assault squad,
convincingly reducing the heavy fire down to a few
flickering sparks. At 1048, Counselman’s squad owns
both ends of the causeway, and the observers on Radio
Hill are relieved. However, some remaining obstinate
resistance, raised by enemy troops who refuse to surren-
der, must still be crushed.
The Marines bolt from the confined passageway and
spread out to overwhelm the remaining resistance. The
enemy vigorously engages them in a brief but vicious ex-
change of rifle and machine gun fire. The Marines win
the fight, then at 1100, initiate a swift mop-up opera-
tion. After about one hour the Marines have the area se-
cured, including the elimination of the caves, which
September 15, 1950
Marines engaged in mop-up operations on Wolmi-do Island at Inchon, September 1950.
have been individually destroyed by grenades and a
bully flame thrower.
The defense of Sowolmi-do costs the North Koreans
an additional seventeen dead, including some who
drown while attempting to swim to the mainland.
Nineteen others surrender. Eight additional North Ko-
reans evade death and capture, concealing themselves
until dark and then escaping to the mainland. General
Edward Craig, who arrives on Wolmi-do during the
evening, watches them escape to the mainland while
he is observing the activity of the Marines.
By noon, the initial phase of the invasion is com-
plete. Of the 400 defenders, the 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, has captured 136 and killed 108; approxi-
mately 150 additional North Koreans have apparently
lost their lives within the caves and other sealed posi-
tions. Most of the enemy defenders had been recently
inducted into the service of the Communists and are
green. The prisoners are corralled and placed under
guard in North Point at the swimming pool.
Next stop: Inchon.
The high tides vanish by 1300 and the 3rd Battalion
is isolated on Wolmi-do, but the battalion is prepared
to remain self-sufficient until the tide rolls back into
the seawall, carrying the remainder of the 1st Marine
Division and what is expected to be a dynamic jackham-
mer knockout punch. The 3rd Battalion has sustained
seventeen wounded and none killed during the opera-
tion to secure its objectives.
In the meantime, the fleet stands offshore, shepherd-
ing Taplett’s Marines, who maintain a cautious vigil
while pondering the possibilities. Would the enemy at-
tempt to dash from the mainland and attack across the
mud? Would enemy armor bet its weight on a success-
338
ful crossing of the causeway to attempt destruction of
the battalion? The Marines wait stoically, their weapons
cocked. But the enemy at Inchon, estimated to be
about 1,600 troops, prefers to remain inactive, exhibit-
ing no outward signs of offense. With the exception of
the disappearing armored car on the causeway and some
sporadic mortar and machine gun fire, enemy activity
is minimal.
While the 3rd Battalion prepares to support the main
invasion force, Naval and Marine aircraft continue strik-
ing the Inchon area, pounding the enemy terrain as far
as twenty-five miles from the port, preventing ground
reinforcements from easily arriving to bolster Inchon. On
Wolmi-do, ordnance troops and other Marines (Ord-
nance Battalion, Combat Service Group and Service
Battalion) focus on transforming the charred island into
a support bastion for the 1st Marine Division. On the
crammed beachhead area, reconnaissance troops of the
11th Marines spread out and search for appropriate lo-
cations to deploy the howitzers that are due to arrive on
the rising tide to support the invasion by adding close-
range muscle. In addition, miles of crucial communica-
tion wire is being strung by signalmen, seemingly un-
perturbed by the arrival of a late afternoon rainstorm
that is harassing them while they work.
Colonel Taplett, commanding officer, 3rd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, is convinced by the inactivity of the
enemy that his command is strong enough to venture
across the causeway and initiate a reconnaissance in
force, at the minimum, or an attack to seize a beach-
head on “Red Beach,” which is scheduled to be secured
by the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 5th Marines. Taplett’s re-
quest to execute the mission is quickly scrapped by the
brass on the Mount McKinley.
 339
In the meantime, observers on Radio Hill scan the In-
chon area, detecting some suspected enemy emplace-
ments, and relay the intelligence to the warships. The po-
sitions are noted with special emphasis on the ships’ maps,
and the information is logged and scheduled for special
handling during the upcoming pre-invasion bombard-
ment. In one instance, Lieutenant Joseph Wayerski (Shore
Fire Control Party officer) calls in the long guns of the
Navy. However, soon after, it is discovered that the peo-
ple are civilians ravaging a mound of rice in the tidal basin
area. The guns are called off. In yet another instance,
Lieutenant Wayerski, peering into Inchon through his
binoculars, catches about twenty enemy troops moving
on Observatory Hill. The guns of the Manchester send
thirty 5-inch shells to smother the trench area.
By 1400, the waters begin to churn as some partic-
ular landing craft begin forming near their assigned
warships to participate in the landing as command
boats. Almost simultaneously, the primary control ship,
Diachenko (APD-123), is gliding into its position about
3,000 yards southwest of the line of departure of the
“Blue Beach” assault force. The set and drift of the cur-
rent is discovered to be three and one-half knots,
stronger than originally anticipated. The information is
immediately dispatched to the attack force commander,
and after quick consideration, he sets H-Hour at 1730.
At 1430, each ship in the joint task force is informed
that 1730 is the designated time for the invasion. Fif-
teen minutes later, at 1445, the signal “Land the land-
ing force” is issued. Upon receiving the word, the lurk-
ing cruisers and destroyers create rainbows of fire as the
zooming shells arc toward shore, to further cover the al-
ready scorched earth with more destruction. Inchon
begins to resemble a colossal over-baked birthday cake
embellished with murderous illuminated candles. The
enemy terrain is thrashed and bashed for three hours.
At the onset of the naval surface bombardment, the
free-flying Marine Corsairs of VMF-214 and VMF-
323 light a few thousand more candles.
The pre-invasion barrage is further supplemented
by twelve naval planes that Fast Carrier Task Force 77
has employed in the skies over Inchon to circle the area
with another ring of fire and to conduct more search and
destroy sorties. The air searches are thorough, but no
enemy reinforcements are detected. All the while, the
weather is becoming increasingly worse as the storm
clouds mingle with the war clouds, a combination that
places huge hovering patches of impenetrable smog and
smoke over the objectives, obscuring much of the area
and in particular, Blue Beach, the target of Colonel
Puller’s 1st Marines.
Activity aboard the Henrico and Cavalier rises to a
crescendo, as the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 5th Marines,
commanded by Lt. Colonel Murray, scamper down the
cargo nets and board the boats that will propel them to
“Red Beach.” The LSTs begin to swell the seas with le-
gions of additional landing craft for the 1st Marines.
The LSTs, dubbed “slow moving targets,” begin to re-
semble giant mechanical whales frolicking in the sea, es-
pecially when the wells open.
September 15, 1950
Suddenly, the sea is consumed with aquatic steel
chariots, each forming near the lines of departure,
preparing to bolt for the beaches to descend upon and
annihilate the enemy. The USS Horace A. Bass, desig-
nated control vessel for Red Beach, eases toward the
departure line, trailed by waves of assault craft and
crammed with the elements of the 5th Marines, while
the USS Wantuck (control ship) scurries to the depar-
ture line off Blue Beach. The PCEC 896, commanded
by Lieutenant Reuben Berry, glides toward its assigned
position off Green Beach (Wolmi-do) to oversee the
numerous waves scheduled to execute an administrative
landing there.
Meanwhile, the naval surface vessels and the planes
maintain pressure on the enemy as their scorching shells
continue to soar through the air, seemingly heating the
raindrops prior to their decimating impact on shore.
The voluminous shelling increases as H-Hour nears,
further obstructing vision, but the destructive raids in-
still even more confidence in the assaulting Marines,
who are impatiently awaiting the signal to attack.
On Wolmi-do, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, hold-
ing indisputable control of the island, limbers up its
support weapons while observing the ongoing pulver-
ization of Inchon. The Blue Beach assault boats pre-
pare to advance through the dismal smoke to reach the
objective, but not without difficulty and confusion. At
about 1640, the maneuver is momentarily interrupted
when enemy mortar fire begins hitting the water in
close proximity to the control vessel, Wantuck. One of
the lurking destroyers swings into action and termi-
nates the hostile fire.
The first wave of the 1st Marines, aboard eighteen
Army LVTs, penetrates the starting line at 1645, ignit-
ing the invasion thought impossible, and giving the
Marines the opportunity to overcome supposed insur-
mountable odds. As the slow moving armored LVTs
close on Blue Beach, about 5,500 yards distant, watch-
ful eyes keep a stringent vigil to ensure that no rem-
nants of the North Korean Air Force interfere with the
operation or endanger the assault craft. The second
wave follows close behind the first wave and receives
some guidance from Navy guide boats; however, the
trailing waves lack this critical support. The compasses
become useless while aboard the metal landing craft,
and the fog is horrible, distorting vision badly.
Major Edwin H. Simmons, while passing the control
vessel en route to the line of departure at 1630, requests
instructions from the bridge. He receives a response
from a naval officer who speaks through a bull horn
and directs the fifth wave toward Blue Beach Two,
while pointing to where the beach is supposed to be.
Simmons notes: “Nothing could be seen in that direc-
tion except mustard colored haze and black smoke.”
Major Simmons further states that as they press toward
the supposed target area, they converge upon another
attacking wave, and quickly ask if the other group is
heading for Blue Two. They receive this response from
the wave commander: “Hell no. We’re the 2nd Battal-
ion, headed for Blue One.” Major Simmons’s wave then
September 15, 1950
swivels to the right and he attempts to correct the blind
course and strike the objective on time.
Despite MacArthur’s unwavering confidence in the
invasion, precautions have been taken to ensure trans-
fer of command if necessary. In the event of an unex-
pected disaster, possible but not probable, the attack
force, which takes its orders from TADC aboard the
Mount McKinley, has a built-in safety net. The USS
George Clymer is equipped with an emergency commu-
nications network and a control contingent (TAC X
Corps), affording a smooth and quick transfer of com-
mand to General Cushman.
At 1705, the scenario becomes more intense as less
than thirty minutes remain until H-Hour. The seafar-
ing mighty midgets again are called to the forefront to
electrify the skies with their firestorm of rockets. Ad-
miral Higgins signals the rocket ships to commence fir-
ing, and in conjunction, the pounding guns of the
cruisers and destroyers come to a succinct halt. More
than six thousand rockets are flung against Blue and
Red Beaches during a shocking twenty-minute bar-
rage. All the while, the landing craft advance. The at-
tacking Marines are besieged not by the enemy but by
slapping winds and the sting of the miserable penetrat-
ing rain.
Time passes slowly in the assault boats during the
final minutes, but activity accelerates as the fury climbs
to a frenzied pace. Much of the spectacle is unobserv-
able due to the overwhelming smoke and inclement
weather. While the assault boats heading for Blue Beach
reach the halfway point about 2,200 yards from shore,
the rocket ships cease firing, clearing the skies for a
final strafing run for VMF-214 and VMF-233.
Meanwhile, the first wave of the 5th Marines, dis-
persed in line to the left of Wolmi-do, crosses the de-
parture line at 1722 to attack Red Beach. From left to
right, the boats, numbered one to four, transport two
platoons of Company A, 1st Battalion, toward their
objective, Cemetery Hill. At the same time, boats five
through eight, carrying elements of Company E, 2nd
Battalion, speed toward their beach sector to debark
the Marines who will secure the right flank of the beach
and seize the hill of the British Consulate. Due to the
lack of rehearsals and the poor visibility, several contin-
gents of the waves become mixed, causing some units
to wind up on the wrong beaches. This creates prob-
lems later.
In the meantime, on Wolmi-do the dormant 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines, springs into action, blasting
the mainland with incessant bursts of machine gun and
mortar fire to insulate the landing areas and provide
additional umbrella cover fire. Simultaneously, a con-
tingent of engineers, led by Sergeant Edwin Knox, ven-
tures upon the causeway to help clear the way for the
tanks of Company A, which are poised to dart to the
aid of the Marines as soon as they hit the beach. The
tanks proclaim their presence, stinging the beach areas
with rapid bursts of machine gun shells and high explo-
sives. Several of the Marine tankers draft a captured
Russian gun to test its accuracy by turning it on the
340
enemy. The experiment works well, as the Marines
claim the gun is accurate.
At dusk, the tanks of Company A, 1st Tank Battal-
ion, which had come in at Green Beach with the 5th
Marines, will stream across the causeway to join the
main attack. In conjunction, a reconnaissance team
lands on Green Beach at 1700 to make preparations
for the arrival of the tanks from Company B, due to
arrive on the following afternoon.
It is an exciting and dangerous few minutes, as the
adrenaline flows full-force through the bodies of the
Marines whose noses begin to pick up the scent of the
prey, in cadence with the bellowing instructions to the
riflemen: “Lock and load!”
Blue Beach remains under the clutches of smoke,
smog and fire as the landing craft navigate through the
hovering natural and man-made clouds. All the while,
the progress is observed by the circling aircraft, their
pilots able to peek through the smoke and debris from
their overhead positions. And more planes arrive on the
scene. Navy Skyraiders, requested by Captain John R.
Stevens, Company A, 5th Marines, add their killing
power to the attack, arriving overhead as the first wave
of the 5th Marines reaches about thirty yards from the
seawall. Lieutenant James W. Smith (FAC) 1st Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, directs their strafing runs to ensure
more accuracy to knock out the discovered obstacles.
The tide continues to swell, but the seawall remains
a formidable obstacle, protruding about four feet above
the landing crafts’ ramps. Undaunted, the 5th Marines
revert to their hastily constructed and obviously im-
provised ladders and position them for immediate use.
The shores of Inchon continue to undergo excruci-
ating punishment, although the guns of the cruisers
and destroyers remain tranquil as the support weapons
on Wolmi-do pour relentless fire upon the beaches in
concert with the roving aircraft. And now, the clenched
steel fists of the first waves of the landing craft open
widely, unleashing yet another blow against Inchon,
which lays near-naked and charred.
The 1st Marine Division crashes into Inchon. The
first crack of the whip flashes against the seawall at
1731, sparking the initial lightning bolts of the raging
storm, when boats five through eight (Company E)
reach the objective. The ladders are thrust haphazardly
against the wall while grenades are hurled to clear any
hostile troops that might be lingering on the opposing
side. In single file, immediately following the detona-
tion of the grenades, the Marines of the 1st Platoon,
Company E, scurry up the makeshift ladders, which
are swinging and swaying dangerously, as the LCVPs
plop back and forth along the wall. The gamble succeeds
and the “Hail Mary” ladders sustain the ordeal, much
to the delight of the platoon, as the entire complement
completes the trek.
Some sporadic enemy fire clangs around the beach
throughout the landing operation, but no casualties
occur. The unit drives inland, advancing about 100
yards to the railroad tracks without encountering any
opposition. The 1st Platoon follows the tracks to the
 341
British Consulate, capturing it by 1845, while another
contingent seizes the built-up area on the opposite side
of the tracks on the lower slopes of Observatory Hill.
The quick gains provide some supplemental insurance
for the twenty-two additional waves of landing craft
and LSTs; however, the towering Observatory Hill
must still be reduced.
Nearby, the four boats operating on the left (north)
of Red Beach, which are transporting the main contin-
gent of Company A, sustain some trouble. Boat No.
1, containing half of the 1st Platoon and Tech. Sergeant
Orval McMullen, incurs engine trouble, delaying it.
However, Boats 2, 3 and 4 hit shore on the heels of
Company E at 1733, encountering stiff resistance be-
yond the wall. Company A is not easily deterred.
Sergeant Charles D. Allen, leading the remainder of
the 1st Platoon, begins getting his troops off Boat 2
and up the trembling ladders. Enemy fire also rips into
them. Several Marines are struck and killed immediately,
and the rest are halted on the beach just several yards
beyond the seawall.
Close by, Boat No. 3 debarks its contingent, a 2nd
Platoon squad led by Lieutenant Francis Muetzel. The
detachment advances and without the use of ladders it
scurries through a hole in the seawall. Suddenly it dis-
covers the ominous presence of an enemy machine gun
silently standing in the path of advance. Unperturbed,
the Marines charge, and amazingly, the deadly gun re-
mains mute.
While the squad romps to positions on the beach,
the Marines on Boat No. 4, transporting a second squad
of the 2nd Platoon, Company A, and a 3.5-inch rocket
section, merge with the troops of Boat No. 3. The pill-
box containing the machine gun is occupied, but not for
long. Two Marines work their way toward the emplace-
ment, while the others take cover in an unoccupied
protracted trench. The unnatural calm within the pill-
box is shattered as grenades are popped into it. Follow-
ing the reverberating explosions, six battered and
bloodied Communist troops stagger through the
smoke, exiting into the waiting arms of the Marines.
Lieutenant Muetzel, 2nd Platoon, Company A, then
initiates an attack to secure Asahi Brewery, but some
of his platoon is still offshore with the lagging second
wave.
While Lt. Colonel Murray’s 5th Marines are secur-
ing Red Beach, the 1st Marines storm ashore at Blue
Beach One on schedule. At precisely 1730, elements
of Lt. Colonel Allan Sutter’s 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, dart from their nine LVT(A)s, encountering
no resistance. Grasping the unexpected advantage, the
2nd Battalion’s spearhead drills inland and northward
toward a road that edges a knoll and leads farther in-
land. The advance comes to an abrupt halt. The Navy’s
surface vessels had seared parts of the high ground to
such an extent that landslides have blocked the exit,
immobilizing the amphibious vehicles.
The successive waves of the 1st Marines begin com-
ing ashore at Blue Beach One at 1830. The bulk of the
remaining eleven LVTs comprising the second wave
September 15, 1950
crash ashore, springing elements of two assault com-
panies into the midst of the enemy-held terrain. The
trailing landing craft of the second wave gets clipped by
the mud about 300 yards from the beach, compelling
the contingent of Fox Company to walk the distance.
Some crucial communications equipment is lost along
the way.
However, unlike many of the landings during World
War II, the enemy raises no opposition. The high
ground is quickly secured, and the contingents of Com-
panies D and F eagerly await the arrival of the remain-
der of their unit, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines.
Slightly after H-Hour, Blue Beach Two becomes the
recipient of nine LVT(A)s that are honing in on the
drainage ditch on the left, until some keen-eyed driv-
ers take notice of imminent danger due to a confined
passageway and an abundance of muck. The landing
craft begin reversing their engines. During the precar-
ious maneuver, some nearby enemy troops begin firing
from positions close to the waterfront. The resistance
is met by return fire.
Soon after, the second wave of the 1st Battalion
speeds past the army amphibious vehicles, screeching to
a stop at the seawall about ten minutes behind sched-
ule. Contingents of Companies G and I (3rd Battal-
ion) on the left and right respectively, catapult ashore.
At about the same time, some of the lead craft of the
third wave arrive at the seawall and, in effect, place Col-
onel Ridge’s (commanding officer, 3rd Battalion) trac-
tor ashore prematurely.
Blue Beach Two is buzzing with activity as the 1st
Marines attempt to get a tight hold. The amphibians
transporting Company G initiate a solid column and
wedge into the drainage ditch, while the elements of
Company I struggle with their improvised ladders to
scale the seawall. Some of the aluminum steps fail the
test, crumbling under the pressure of the ascending
Marines. More improvisation begins. Engineers from
Company C, 1st Engineering Battalion, rush to the
seawall and fabricate new climbing devices by anchor-
ing cargo nets to it.
The venture by Company G into the drainage ditch
proves faulty, as the lead vehicle gets bogged down in
the mud, paralyzing the five trailing LVTs. Without
hesitation, Captain Westover, commanding officer
Company G, directs his troops to dismount and prepare
to drive inland on foot to complete its primary mis-
sion, which is to secure a lowland corridor and block a
secondary highway originating in the east and leading
to Blue Beach.
Colonel Lewis B. “Chesty” Puller, commanding of-
ficer, 1st Marines, has come ashore early on Blue Beach
Two with the third wave to lend his experience to this
unrehearsed operation. In retrospect he comments, “I
recall being extremely gratified that my prior concern
in this connection was not warranted.” Although there
had been serious concerns about the operation, the ob-
stacles, expected and unknown, have been conquered
thus far.
By 1800, the situation on Blue Beach is excellent and
September 15, 1950
Companies G and I have expeditiously cleared the
beach, having sustained only light casualties, most in-
flicted by one obstinate machine gun. This has since
been exterminated by fire from an LVT. Company G,
3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, drives on the left toward
the lowland corridor, while Company I attacks toward
the seaward peak of Hill 233, Objective Charlie.
Back on Red Beach, the 2nd Platoon, Company A,
5th Marines, grinds forward toward its objective, hur-
rying over the skimpy beachhead, bypassing various
locked buildings and disregarding the flaming debris.
Nonetheless, the 2nd Platoon remains concerned that
the enemy might be holding the high ground on Ceme-
tery Hill, waiting to commence firing. The Marines
advance without incident, diminishing fears that they
might become stalled and trapped. The platoon moves
around the south side of the hill, from where it enters
the city and proceeds unopposed along a street lead-
ing directly to the Asahi Brewery, which it takes effort-
lessly.
However, the contingents of the 1st Platoon, Com-
pany A, which have made it to the beach, remain
stalled. They are held up by severe fire originating from
a fortified emplacement to its immediate front and by
heavy flanking fire.
The 3rd Platoon, Company A, lands and finally, the
second wave also delivers the remainder of the 1st Pla-
toon. The beach becomes extremely overcrowded. Lieu-
tenant Baldomero Lopez (Company A) leads a detach-
ment to destroy the bunker that is stalling the attack.
Lopez gets to within grenade-throwing range and read-
ies his tossing arm, but enemy fire rips into him, knock-
ing him to the ground and causing the grenade to fall.
Instinctively, Lopez, despite his critical wounds and an-
guishing pain, attempts to recover the projectile and
toss it at the enemy. Unable to garnish the strength to
hurl the grenade and unwilling to risk the lives of his
fellow Marines, Lopez clasps the grenade with his
wounded right arm and pulls it under his body to ab-
sorb the entire blast. He is posthumously awarded the
Medal of Honor for his extraordinary heroism.
Two other Marines, carrying flamethrowers, attack
the menacing bunker. Both are felled by enemy shells.
Time is beginning to run heavily against the success of
the mission on Red Beach. The obstacle must be elim-
inated quickly or the expected waves of additional
Marines might be jeopardized by fire from Cemetery
Hill, the objective of the 1st Platoon, which remains
under the control of the Communists.
Captain John R. Stevens, commanding officer Com-
pany A, comes ashore at H-plus 5, landing in Lieuten-
ant Muetzel’s 1st Platoon sector. He is immediately in-
formed of the situation, including the death of Lopez.
After unsuccessfully attempting to contact Sergeant
Orval McMullen in Boat 1, which had earlier stalled
offshore, Stevens orders Lieutenant Fred Eubanks
(Company A, exec. off.) to get the troops on the left or-
ganized and on the advance. Lieutenant Meutzel’s con-
tingent of the 2nd Platoon is recalled from the brewery
with orders to rush back to the beach to lend some as-
342
sistance. Along the return route, Meutzel takes note of
Cemetery Hill, especially the tantalizing southern slope,
which seems to him to be a magnificent path to the
crest.
Recalling Captain Stevens’ earlier feelings that the
2nd Platoon might be committed to seize the hill if the
task would become too difficult for the 1st Platoon, he
decides to take it.
Muetzel’s 2nd Platoon moves back, heading toward
the waterfront, but upon reaching the enemy-held
Cemetery Hill, the platoon pivots and sprints up the
southern slope, quickly gaining the summit and captur-
ing about twelve enemy troops along the climb. Soon
after, the Marines are atop the summit and are con-
fronted by rag-tag contingents of the N.K. 226th Reg-
iment’s Mortar Company. The defenders of the crest
resemble zombies rather than tough enemy troops.
They exhibit no desire to resist and defend the crest.
Each moves slowly from the trenches, as if tranquilized,
and passively puts down his weapon before filing down
to the base of the hill. A small detachment guards them
to ensure they remain docile.
Cemetery Hill falls to the 2nd Platoon in less than ten
minutes, and again, Muetzel’s unit sustains no casual-
ties. He prepares to dispatch a strong contingent to bol-
ster the 1st Platoon, which is still hung up on the beach.
That little corner of the world called Red Beach has
been an inferno since the Marines landed thirty min-
utes earlier. Lieutenant Eubanks, during his few min-
utes on the beach, gets the 1st Platoon, Company A,
back on track. While Meutzel is preparing to send help
to the beachhead, the 1st and 3rd Platoons, having won
the grenade duel, penetrate the firewall and launch a
successful attack against the bunker, destroying it with
a flamethrower. With the breathing room, the two pla-
toons break out of the pocket and drive to the fringes
of the inland sector of Inchon, establishing contact with
the 2nd Platoon there.
Company A sustains eight killed and twenty-eight
men wounded before culminating the battle in the
northern sector of Red Beach. At 1755, Captain Stevens
fires an eagerly awaited signal. The amber star cluster
flare soon explodes, proclaiming the capture of Ceme-
tery Hill for the 5th Marines. Nonetheless, Observa-
tory Hill must still be secured. Company C, 1st Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, arrives at the beachhead at 1800, and
is delegated to seize Objective A, the northern sector
of the hill. Company D, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, is
designated to secure the southern portion, Objective
B.
Both of these units have experienced some trouble
during the landings, including troops debarking on the
wrong beaches. The snafu causes delays in the attacks
and also provides the enemy some time to re-establish
some fierce pockets of resistance on the hill.
While the day wears on, the beaches become more
clogged as additional cargo and troops flow in. At 1830,
the LST 859, first of the eight LSTs, crosses the line of
departure and closes toward the beach. By 1835, the
enemy brings it under fire, and the vessel returns the
 343
greeting by activating its guns. The ships’ command-
ing officers see the crowded beachhead and conclude
that the Marines have been unable to advance. Obser-
vatory Hill is struck by the return fire, but so is Ceme-
tery Hill, the latter controlled by the 2nd Platoon,
Company A, 5th Marines. The erroneous friendly
shelling is not received kindly by the ground Marines.
The trailing LSTs also come under enemy fire. Their
crews commence firing against suspected enemy posi-
tions, still unaware of Marines holding forward posi-
tions. The LSTs 975 and 857, second and third in the
column, fire against suspected enemy positions, caus-
ing more friendly fire to strike Lieutenant Muetzel’s
platoon, driving it from the crest of Cemetery Hill.
The platoon moves to the slope overlooking Inchon,
where it then comes under enemy fire originating on
Observatory Hill. Then suddenly, one of the shells from
an LST scores a direct hit on the building housing the
enemy gun, eliminating the trouble. Again, Muetzel’s
2nd Platoon sustains no casualties.
In the meantime, an enemy shell ignites a fire on
LST 914, endangering fully loaded ammunition trucks
and obviously, the vessel. Marines and sailors extin-
guish the flames, preventing a calamity.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, commanded by
Colonel Roise, is not as lucky as the 1st Battalion. H&S
and Weapons Company (1st Shore Party Bn.) lands
about 1830, traveling aboard the lead LSTs, and be-
gins driving inland. The friendly fire of the trailing
LSTs strikes its ranks hard, inflicting one death and
wounding twenty-three other Marines, prompting Col-
onel Roise to remark: “If it hadn’t been for the thick
walls of the Nippon Flour Company, the casualties
might have been worse.”
Meanwhile, the 2nd Platoon, Company C, reorgan-
ized by Lieutenant Byron Magness, executes an attack
to seize Observatory Hill, despite the fact that the bal-
ance of the company is still regrouping on the beach.
Supported by Lieutenant Max Merritt’s 60-mm mor-
tar section, Magness’ platoon drives up the slopes.
Sergeant Max Stein becomes wounded while taking on
a machine gun nest, but his actions spur more determi-
nation by the charging Marines.
By 1845 the saddle between Objective A (northern
part of Observatory Hill) and Objective B (southern
part of Observatory Hill) is controlled by Lieutenants
Magness and Merritt. Their sole flare is fired to signal
the seizure. But it misfires, preventing the beachhead
and Colonel Newton from becoming aware of the vic-
tory. Efforts to raise Lieutenant Pedersen (CO, Co. C)
by radio also fail.
During the contest to seize the saddle, Company B,
1st Battalion, 5th Marines (reserve), hits the beach in
the 2nd Battalion’s sector, subsequent to evading enemy
shore fire at the assigned landing site. Captain Francis
Fenton confers with the battalion commander, Colo-
nel Newton. Newton orders Fenton’s battle-tested
troops to assume responsibility for Company C’s mis-
sion to seize Objective A, the northern part of Obser-
vatory Hill.
September 15, 1950
Finally, by 1900, amidst choking smoke and driv-
ing rain showers, the eight LSTs and their loose-fin-
gered gun crews reach the dock, to the relief of the
Marines. Contact is immediately established between
the ground troops and the ships’ guns become quiet.
However, there is no tranquility on Red Beach. The
attack against Objective A is initiated.
Company B, led by Captain Fenton, charges up the
slopes under blackened skies, approaching the crest in
a two-pronged assault, with one unit pressing directly
forward while the other swings around to the left to
attack. The latter squirms around the rear of the hill,
where it encounters C Company’s 2nd Platoon, which
has secured the straddling saddle to the right of Ob-
jective A. The enemy raises resistance as the Marines
climb the slope, but it is eliminated. The crest, con-
taining an enemy battalion command post, is overrun
and secured at 2000. Six Marines are wounded in the
process.
Quickly, three platoons are deployed, and linkage is
established between Company B and the Marines of
Company C’s 2nd Platoon, which is holding the sad-
dle to the right of Objective A. At 2240, Colonel New-
ton contacts the 5th Marines’ headquarters by radio,
informing Colonel Murray that the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines’ portion of the O-A line is secure.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines — hav-
ing incurred several snafus, including the earlier con-
fusion of the boat waves at Red Beach, and the poor
visibility — pushes out. Company D, subsequent to re-
organizing after reclaiming its troops, which strayed to
the wrong beaches, moves out to capture Objective B,
the southern part of Observatory Hill.
Company D assumes that Company E is holding the
summit and it advances without normal precautions.
The 1st Platoon, acting as spearhead, openly advances
along a street, reaching the top of a hill without inci-
dent. The platoon continues its advance, maintaining
its march on the road heading toward the second peak,
where it expects to establish contact with Company E.
Instead, the forward troops are engaged by waiting
North Koreans. Machine gun fire suddenly erupts from
entrenched positions along the route, prompting the
Marines to bolt to the left side of the road for cover,
from where they can return fire and destroy the am-
bushers.
The exchange continues as the two forces, holding
opposite sides of the road, begin trading grenades dur-
ing a ferocious fifteen-minute contest, culminating
with Lieutenant Heck’s 1st Platoon having the better
aim. During the tenacious battle, one of Heck’s Marines
is killed and three others are wounded. The corpsman,
himself wounded, disregards his own safety, refusing
to be evacuated to ensure that he can aid the other
wounded.
Also, Lt. Colonel Roise and his executive officer,
Lieutenant Michael Dunbar, rush forward to the scene
of the fighting. Dunbar becomes wounded by a rico-
chet shell. By the time darkness overtakes the area, the
Communists are convincingly driven off the hill and
September 15, 1950
Company D establishes a night perimeter. Three rifle
platoons are deployed on the forward slopes of Objec-
tive B, and a platoon from Company F (Battalion re-
serve), commanded by Lieutenant Harry Nolan, moves
up to hold the ground between Company D, and the
2nd Platoon, Company C, 1st Battalion, which is hold-
ing the saddle with Lieutenant Merritt’s mortar con-
tingent. Activity ceases for the night.
Colonel Roise is reluctant to penetrate deeper into the
city, since he is unfamiliar with the terrain and because
of the total darkness of the night. He concludes that
there could be unnecessary casualties, but at regimen-
tal headquarters, established earlier on Wolmi-do
(1830), there is some concern over his decision. New or-
ders soon arrive from Colonel Murray.
During a conversation with Lt. Colonel Murray,
commanding officer 5th Marines, Roise is instructed to
ensure that the areas considered to be undefendable
from a tactical standpoint should, at the minimum,
have a forward guard. Outposts are ordered established.
With the successful vanquishing of the enemy on
Cemetery and Observatory Hills, the O-A line is secure,
with the exception of the farthest point on the right, the
inner tidal basin. Roise dispatches two squads from
Company F and a contingent of S.K. Marines to the
tidal basin area. This small force undertakes a reconnais-
sance mission into Inchon, and it returns at 2300 to
inform Colonel Roise that no enemy troops had been
detected.
Following the briefing by the reconnaissance squads,
Colonel Roise orders Company F, less the platoon on
Observatory Hill, to spread out on the right flank. Sub-
sequently, just after midnight, Captain Uel Peters de-
ploys his Company (F) adjacent to the tidal basin for the
night. Also, at 2000, the 3rd Battalion moves across
the causeway from Wolmi-do and rejoins the regiment.
Back on Blue Beach, the Marine infantry (1st
Marines) continues its inland drive. Company I focuses
its attention on Hill 233, and Company G drills to-
ward the lowland corridor. The final waves of the at-
tack force are greatly affected by the approaching dark-
ness. During the initial landings, a serious
miscalculation occurs when Colonel Puller orders Lieu-
tenant Jack Hawkins to cross the line of departure with
LCVP waves twenty-one through twenty-five compris-
ing the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines.
The waves are expected at 1815, but a guiding
searchlight aboard the control vessel, due to the poor
visibility, points toward the tidal basin, placing the
waves 45 degrees off course to the northeast. The first
two waves debark, presumably at Blue Beach Two.
Lieutenant Hawkins, aboard the third wave (23rd), dis-
covers the error and at about the same time, the exec-
utive officer, Lt. Colonel Robert Rickert of the 1st Bat-
talion, maneuvering about in his free boat, notices the
erroneous landings and begins to intercept the waves
and reroute them to the proper landing sites. Lieuten-
ant Hawkins runs along the basin wall, yelling correc-
tive instructions to the first two waves.
Most of the Marines get back on track, but one con-
344
tingent is forced to remain overnight on the wrong
landing area due to the lack of boats. This platoon, at-
tached to Company B, walks to the mainland on the
following day, netting a good many enemy troops along
the way.
Finally, Hawkins reaches Blue Beach Two, but dark-
ness has beaten him there. Upon his arrival, Hawkins
discovers Company C, which has arrived without in-
cident, thanks to a savvy boat coxswain whose intu-
ition brought them to the proper area. The 1st Battal-
ion moves inland to establish a night perimeter. Major
David Bridges (Bn. S-3) remains at the beach to direct
the late arrivals. Later, Bridges leads about 100 miscel-
laneous troops from Blue Three toward the 1st Battal-
ion bivouac area, but the contingent overshoots its ob-
jective and eventually halts in the heights to the left of
Company G, 3rd Battalion.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, has
picked up the slack. Company D occupies the strate-
gic road intersection at 2000 (Objective A), and within
two hours, Company F secures a portion of Objective
D, Hill 117, giving it positions from which it can dom-
inate the Inchon-Seoul highway.
Meanwhile, a group under Lieutenant Bruce Cun-
liffe, composed of the 60-mm section, Company F, 2nd
Battalion, misses its rendezvous point due to the dark-
ness. It moves through the 3rd Battalion lines, finally
halting near Hill 117, well beyond U.S. positions. Soon
after, these Marines encounter some North Koreans
and a terse firefight develops. The skirmish is brief as
the Communists take off, leaving several dead behind.
The Marines sustain no casualties. After the firefight,
they remain in place until dawn to rejoin their unit.
However, the 2nd Battalion does sustain one killed and
nineteen wounded during its inland drive. The enemy
sustains about fifty dead, and fifteen Communists are
captured.
In the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines sector, on the right
side of the regimental zone, the enemy has been un-
able to raise any heavy resistance. Company I informs
headquarters at 1900 that the western nose of Hill 123
(Objective C) is secure. Within about one-half hour,
Company G, which has been driving toward the low-
land corridor, reports that it is establishing blocking
positions across the corridor and along the road at the
center of the O-1 Line. The task is concluded by about
2030.
At about the same time, Company H’s 1st Platoon
launches a surprise attack against the enemy on Ob-
jective B, the small cape under Hill 94. It is a brief ex-
change; the North Koreans, about company strength,
abandon their fortified positions, leaving thirty enemy
dead and wounded behind. The fall of Hill 94 ensures
the O-1 Line, but more combat persists in the area for
a few hours. Company H, less the 1st and 2nd Pla-
toons, deploys between Companies G and I, securing
a solid blocking position about 400 yards to the rear
of the O-1 Line.
While the ground troops are winding down for the
night, the LSTs are rapidly being gutted by the tireless
 345
efforts of the Marine 1st Combat Service Group, 7th
Motor Transport Battalion, and the Army’s 2nd Engi-
neer Special Brigade, the latter being in charge of the
operation. By dusk, 450 vehicles are ashore. Flood-
lights are then swung into the port operation to permit
additional equipment and supplies to be unloaded
without delay. More supplies and equipment will arrive
in the morning, aboard LSTs and LVTs.
The night of September 15-16 remains tranquil for
both the 1st and 5th Marines, as the vanquished enemy
mounts no night counterattack. Nonetheless, there is
one startling development. At Cemetery Hill (5th
Marines), two Marines inadvertently digress from their
positions emerging in front of the high ground and
within sight of enemy guns concealed in a cave at the
The attack transport Henrico, one of the vessels used to bring the 1st Marine Division to Inchon.
September 15, 1950
base of the hill. The enemy strikes both, and attempts
to rescue them are thwarted by a ring of submachine
gun fire.
The Marines, using an interpreter, demand surren-
der under the threat of sending tanks into the cave.
The threat is sufficient. The enemy contingent capit-
ulates. However, the one straying Marine had been
killed instantly and the rescued Marine has sustained a
mortal blow.
During the night of the 15th-16th, General O.P.
Smith’s order (OpnO 3–50) to attack is issued to the 1st
and 5th Marines; it directs that the assault commence
after dawn. The 5th Marines will advance through the
southern sector of Inchon, reaching the O-2 Line and
coming to positions abreast of the 1st Marines at its
September 15, 1950
positions of the previous night, about three miles inland
at Hill 117. From that point along the Inchon-Seoul
Road, which is essentially the O-1 and O-2 Line for
the 1st Marines, the two regiments will simultaneously
attack toward the O-3 Line. In the meantime, most of
the personnel who became separated from their units
during the night are reunited.
At dawn, as ordered, the 5th Marines’ attack units
move from their positions to converge and begin the
assault. The 2nd Battalion will spearhead, trailed by
the 1st and 3rd Battalions. Murray’s regiment is to seize
two hills (Objective D and E) located on the fringes of
the city, north of the Inchon-Seoul highway, to elimi-
nate threats against the imminent ship-to-shore oper-
ations at Inchon and to sling a safety net over their sec-
tor of the O-2 Line, in coordination with the 1st
Marines. This will afford the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, domination of the heights overlooking In-
chon. Company D departs its positions on Observa-
tory Hill to bring up the rear of the advancing column
behind Company F. Company E, led by Captain Jask-
ilka, pushes out from the British Consulate and takes
the point.
There is a puzzling aura forming, as the three battal-
ions merge and begin passing the inner tidal basin,
heading through the city. The lack of resistance and
the deadening silence are welcome but perplexing. The
Marines advance through the hushed streets of Inchon
expecting at least some sniper fire, but so far, none de-
velops. Their movement is observed, but only by some
A destroyed North Korean gun at Inchon.
346
over-tense and bleary-eyed civilians, seemingly bewil-
dered by the maze of destruction surrounding them. It
becomes evident that the enemy troops have abandoned
the city to seek refuge and to evade the attacking
Marines. The Communists had not anticipated the tu-
multuous thrust of the invasion, and now, there is lit-
tle they can do to rectify the futile situation.
Meanwhile, the 1st Marines are engaging the enemy;
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines begins clear-
ing the eastern ridge of Hill 117 at 0615. Company F,
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, attacks to secure a village
on its right flank and the high ground above it, meet-
ing stiff resistance. The fire fights continue through-
out the afternoon.
While the 5th Marines are emerging from Inchon
to hook up with the 1st Marines at the O-2 Line, the
enemy does mount some opposition. At 0700 an armor
column composed of six tanks is spotted by Corsairs at
Kansong-ni, about five miles outside of town. The
tanks are clanking down the road toward Inchon, un-
escorted by infantry.
In the meantime, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
takes positions outside the city and makes visual con-
tact with the 1st Marines on Hill 117 at 0730, setting
the stage for the attacks to seize the 2nd Battalion’s ob-
jectives (two hills north of the city). Company D, 2nd
Battalion, with an escort of tanks, moves eastward, es-
tablishing contact with the 1st Marines on Hill 117 at
0900, having encountered little more than a few sniper
shots. And while Company D is linking with the 1st
 347
Marines, Companies E and F are sprinting to their re-
spective objectives, each being secured without oppo-
sition.
With the objectives taken, the main attack by the
1st and 5th Marines is reinitiated just after 0900. As
mentioned previously, elements of the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, are engaged on Hill 117. The 3rd Battalion,
1st Marines, moving from its positions on Hill 233,
initiates its drive to clear the Munhang peninsula.
Companies G and I drive southward, encountering no
organized resistance. In conjunction, the 1st Battalion,
1st Marines, regroups in the middle of Colonel Puller’s
sector south of the road and advances as the regimen-
tal reserve. Other contingents of the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, attack in synchronization with the 5th
Marines.
A platoon of tanks (Company A) and Company D,
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, spearheads the drive, fol-
lowed by Companies D and F, 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines. The juggernaut propels down the highway,
unaffected by the resistance, which is confined to some
minor sniper fire. The tanks and the elements of both
battalions reach Sogam-ni, situated on the O-3 Line,
by 1100 and halt in place to await orders. Rising smoke
is easily spotted in Kansong-ni, where enemy armor
had been detected earlier.
At 1045, General Smith issues OpnO 4–50, order-
ing Colonels Puller (1st Marines) and Murray (5th
Marines) to drive from the O-3 Line and secure the
force beachhead line, which will terminate the assault
phase of the amphibious operation. Smith’s directive
also stipulates the immediate establishment of a new
tactical bomb line that restricts the aviators from at-
tacking within the boundary, unless the attacks are co-
ordinated with the ground observers.
Back at Kansong-ni, several hundred yards in front
of Sogam-ni, the Spartan force of enemy armor had
not fared well after being detected by the Corsairs at
0700. From atop their positions on Hill 117, the men
of the 1st Marines observe a transformation. The T-34
tanks are caught on the road like sitting ducks by the
swooping Corsairs. Eight planes (VMF-214) dive low
and splinter the column. The planes snatch one tank,
consuming it with napalm fire, and seemingly discover
oil when another tank is spotted dead in its tracks, oil
gushing forth as if from a geyser. And yet another T-34
sustains a brutal blow, as its tracks are blown off.
Nonetheless, the victory is costly, as Captain William
F. Simpson, during the dangerously low level attack, is
unable to recover from the deepness of the dive. He is
killed when his aircraft plunges into the earth adjacent
to the highway.
The men of the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, are jolted
heavily as they watch their fellow Marine crash. A sec-
ond wave of VMF-214 picks up the slack, and pours
more fire into the enemy armor, destroying two tanks.
It appears, though, that both are the same tanks that had
been struck by the first wave. The enemy, attempting
to escape the wrath of the Marine pilots, seeks refuge
in some nearby huts. The Marines spew napalm into the
September 15, 1950
huts, which then vanish into ascending spirals of
smoke. VMF-214 pilots continue the attack and ap-
parently assuming all the tanks have been annihilated,
the planes destroy two other vehicles, a weapons carrier
and a jeep. The planes then make a deadly pass against
some camouflaged vehicles, ripping into both of them.
However, some of the tanks survive the attack and they
recoil within the village that is the next target of the
1st and 5th Marines.
The expected tenacious enemy resistance has not ma-
terialized and before morning ends, it is obvious to the
Marines that attaining the O-3 Line, composed of a
three-mile front extended across two connected penin-
sulas and protected on both flanks by the sea, will not
be an arduous task. The theory is further bolstered by
the great quantities of abandoned enemy arms and
equipment being vacuumed up by the sweeping
Marines.
By about noon, the 1st and 5th Marines, commanded
by Colonels Puller and Murray respectively, operating
with the Inchon-Seoul Road as their boundary line,
prepare to initiate the advance from the O-3 Line to
secure the force beachhead line (FBHL). Similarly to
the O-3 line, the FBHL, forming the configuration of
a right angle, is insulated by the sea at both ends; its
east-west arm lies above and near parallel to the Inchon-
Seoul highway, stretching for five miles, and the north-
south arm of the arc lies about seven miles inland. The
north-south arm contains an additional peninsula,
Namdong, which will be consumed by the beachhead.
Puller’s 1st Marines, operating on the right of the
highway, receive the largest mass of terrain (much of it
rough) to secure. The regiment’s expeditious advance
has caused the 1st Marines to have its components
spread over fifteen square miles of ground. The 1st
Marines will commence its main attack at 1600.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines (led by Colonel Ta-
plett), commences its attack at 1330, driving northwest
toward the hills dominating that portion of the FBHL.
Company G, advancing on the left, seizes its objective
by 1440, while Company I attacks Hill 137, reducing
it by about 1440. The swift gains are secured without
sustaining any Marine casualties, and twelve enemy
prisoners are scooped up in the process. Subsequent to
the capture of its objectives, the 3rd Battalion dispatches
reconnaissance patrols. Probes are made westward to
the sea and east to the outskirts of Ascom City, the lat-
ter discovering a bonanza. Elements of Company I, 3rd
Battalion, stumble upon an unguarded enemy ammu-
nition depot and a vehicle storage area.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines (Colonel Roise),
jumps off at 1335, encountering nominal resistance
from enemy positions north of the highway. Nonethe-
less, the spearhead drives forward, entering Kansong-
ni, where it encroaches a dangerous curve in the road
that leads northward and bypasses two lanky hills. Un-
beknownst to the advancing column, three lurking T-
34 tanks that evaded destruction earlier in the day hold
positions on the blindside of the curve. The enemy
tanks are silently poised, waiting to bludgeon the
September 16, 1950
unsuspecting advance force as it comes into view. But,
a contingent of the escorting Marine tanks rushes to
higher ground to shepherd the ground troops while
they take the curve. Men with the two tanks glance
down from their positions on the mound and spot the
three T-34s in a neatly formed column. The hatches
are drawn tightly and their guns are unelevated, pointed
directly at the curve, waiting to spring the ambush.
The undetected M-26s commence unrelenting fire,
pumping twenty armor-piercing shells into the enemy
T-34s, and terminate the battle before the T-34s can get
off a shot. Each tank sustains a decimating explosion
and becomes consumed with flames. Soon after, the
Marines burst around the curve, awed by the combined
destruction of the earlier air attacks and the most recent
surgery on the tanks. The 5th Marines continues along
the road, heading toward Ascom City.
Company D, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, sprints to
the crest of a large hill sitting on the west side of the
highway about one thousand yards beyond the curve,
while Company F surges forward on the left and speeds
over some railroad tracks that run beside the road. Af-
terwards, the company darts to the high ground near
the terrain secured by Company D. Following the cap-
ture of this ground, both hills and the adjoining low
lands are methodically combed. The operation culmi-
nates during the early evening. Although the 2nd Bat-
talion is positioned about 3,000 yards from the FBHL,
they own the dominant ground, prompting Colonel
Roise to direct his battalion to establish night positions.
Company E (reserve), covers the rear, while Companies
D and F deploy to guard the approaches to Ascom City,
which is to their immediate front.
In the 1st Marines sector, south of the highway, the
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines (Lt. Colonel Allan Sutter),
operating on the right, attacks at 1600 and drives toward
Hill 186. Company D spearheads the assault, trailed by
Company F. The swift advance passes below Kansong-
ni. It gains an additional 1,000 yards without encoun-
tering the enemy and it reaches the base of the objective.
Company D then tackles the jagged slopes of Hill 186.
It conquers the slope and overruns the opposition, seiz-
ing the crest. Company D then begins to fortify its
perimeter.
Company F arrives in short order, following the ar-
duous climb, and it deploys to the left, where there is a
commanding view of the road. In conjunction, Com-
pany E, which has been engaged throughout the day on
the right flank, rejoins the battalion and establishes re-
serve positions near the base of Hill 186, close to the
battalion command post. The battle for Hill 186 ig-
nited some resistance. The bulk of the enemy troops fire
several rounds and high-tail it, but the fire still inflicts
casualties. Four Marines are killed and ten are wounded.
In contrast, the enemy loses about 120 killed or
wounded and more than thirty prisoners are captured.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines (Col-
onel Ridge), whizzes through the Munhang peninsula,
culminating the vigorous sweep by 1600. The battal-
ion regroups at the southern tip of the O-3 Line,
348
where it will be relieved by the Reconnaissance Com-
pany, commanded by Captain Kenneth Houghton, at
1700.
The terrain separating the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 1st
Marines, is being secured by the 1st Battalion, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel Jack Hawkins. The battalion
advances speedily, right on the heels of the retreating
enemy, at a pace so quick that it shoots about two miles
beyond the O-3 Line, when it halts progress in the
heights about 2,500 yards south of Hill 186.
There are some inconsistencies in the line as the day’s
fighting winds down; however, the gaps are soon filled.
The 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, subsequent to relief by
the Reconnaissance Company, shifts to the north and
establishes rear positions there. Meanwhile, the recon-
naissance troops deploy at the base of the Namdong
peninsula to shore-up the southern flank of the night
perimeter and to ensure contact with the 1st Battalion,
1st Marines, to its left.
Darkness takes over the area as the Marines prepare
to get some rest. There is little more that can be ac-
complished this night. The tanks of Company A are
relieved at dusk, when Company B, 1st Tank Battalion,
comes ashore. Today’s action has cost the 1st Marine Di-
vision four dead and twenty-one wounded, the bulk of
the casualties being sustained by the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, at Hill 186. As the day’s actions conclude, it
is clear that Inchon belongs to the Marines.
General O.P. Smith, having bid his goodbyes to
General MacArthur on the previous day, departed the
Mount McKinley and arrived on Yellow Beach at 1730
on the 15th. Upon his arrival at the 1st Marine Divi-
sion’s command post, he informed Admiral Doyle that
he would assume responsibility for the ground opera-
tions at 1800 on September 16.
The amphibious assault phase of the invasion is
thereby terminated successfully, within nearly twenty-
four hours of when the first wave of Marines hit the
beach.
General MacArthur’s parting words are preeminent
in General O.P. Smith’s thoughts as he prepares to
launch the next phase of the operation: “Take Kimpo
Airfield at the first opportunity.” The Marines attack
Kimpo Airfield on the following day en route to retake
Seoul.
September 16–November 2 1950
SECOND DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
THE U.N. OFFENSIVE
September 16 Enemy reinforcements attached
to the N.K. 9th Division attempt to augment the de-
fenders near Inchon. The N.K. 87th Regiment departs
Kumch’on aboard trains that travel by night and re-
main concealed in tunnels during the day to avoid de-
tection by U.S. aircraft. (See also, September 15, THE
INVASION OF INCHON.)
Eighth Army sets the date and hour for its breakout
from the Pusan Perimeter, in accordance with its
 349
revised attack plan of September 11. At 0900 this day,
U.N. and ROK troops attack from their present posi-
tions to effect a linkage with the X Corps, which landed
at Inchon on the previous day. The primary attack force
is to advance along the Taegu–Kumch’on–Taejon–
Suwon axis. The main thrust is to be by the recently es-
tablished I Corps, which holds the center of the line. Be-
cause of the contour of the terrain, the force has access
to the best roads and it is closest to the X Corps.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, Gen-
eral O.P. Smith issues OpnO 5–50, directing the 1st
and 5th Marines to launch an attack toward Corps
Phase Line CC to extend the front beachhead line
(FBHL). The assault is scheduled to commence on the
morning of the 17th.
In other activity, the ships transporting the 7th In-
fantry Division arrive at Inchon Harbor. The division
troops begin to debark on the 18th. General Almond
has requested Admiral Doyle’s assistance in hurrying
the debarkation so Almond can speed the 7th Division
to positions where it can cut off enemy movement
south of Seoul.
Also, Lieutenant Max Nebergal, a helicopter pilot
(VMO-6), rescues a downed Navy pilot offshore, exe-
cuting the first such rescue of the Inchon-Seoul oper-
ation. The unit, VMO-6, executes other missions as
well, including several reconnaissance flights and two
missions which spot for artillery.
Pusan Perimeter: In the Eighth Army area, the attack
intended to break Eighth Army out of the perimeter
and propel the troops toward a linkage with X Corps
to crush the North Koreans is scheduled for 0900, but
neither the weather nor the enemy cooperates. Dawn
arrives in cadence with another lousy day, not entirely
unexpected in this part of the world. Dark clouds, fog
and torrential rains compel the Air Force to abort a
planned carpet bombardment of the enemy positions at
Waegwan by B-29s.
At 0900, many units are unable to commence their
portion of the assault on a timely basis, as the North Ko-
reans have begun counterattacks that keep the various
units preoccupied with defending the terrain they hold.
The ongoing battles for control of the hills merely con-
tinue, with savage attacks and counterattacks being
launched by both sides.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the attached 5th
RCT, commanded by Colonel Throckmorton, initi-
ates its attack. Spearheaded by the 2nd Battalion, the
unit advances north, grinding toward Waegwan and
Hill 268 southeast of the town. The 3rd Battalion
jumps into the fight during the latter part of the 17th.
Above Taegu and to the right of the 5th RCT, the 1st
Cavalry Division and the South Korean 1st Division
are engaged in heavy see-saw fighting with the N.K.
1st, 3rd and 13th Divisions. The struggle has been en-
suing here for days and in some areas, for nearly one
month along two corridors leading to Taegu, the Waeg-
wan–Taegu Road and the Tabu-dong Road.
In the 5th Cavalry sector, vicious fighting is ongoing
with elements of the N.K. 3rd Division, about eight
September 16, 1950
miles northwest of Taegu and about five miles south-
east of Waegwan. This day, the 1st Battalion drives
against Hills 174 and 203 north of the road and Hill
188 south of the road. Enemy resistance is fierce. North
of Taegu in the mountains, the enemy has been pound-
ing against the Taegu defenses. Other contingents of
the 1st Cavalry Division and the S.K. 1st Division are
slugging it out there. Elements of the N.K. 1st and 13th
Divisions are within six miles of Taegu and still in the
high ground, overlooking the Taegu bowl.
North of the 2nd Division and to the right of the
1st Cavalry Division, the S.K. 15th Regiment, 1st S.K.
Division, attacks toward the Walled City, a formidable
enemy strong point east of Taegu. The tenacious ad-
vance breaks through enemy lines, placing the S.K.
Regiment to the right of the city. In the meantime, the
S.K. 12th Regiment shoots through a gap in the enemy
lines and makes giant strides, pushing to a point about
thirteen miles in front of the forward units of the 1st
Cavalry Division. The S.K. 12th Regiment emerges on
the Tabu-dong–Kunwi Road about ten miles north-
east of Tabu-dong. The regiment is deep behind the
lines of the N.K. 1st and 13th Divisions, and it is
poised to amputate one of the key enemy lines of retreat.
In conjunction, the U.S. 10th AAA Group is advanc-
ing with the South Koreans.
In the 2nd Division sector, the enemy launches a
predawn attack and pierces the lines of Company C,
23rd Regiment, inflicting twenty-three casualties. All
Company C officers become casualties. Nonetheless,
the enemy assault is repelled. Meanwhile, the 9th, 23rd
and 38th Regiments commence an attack and en-
counter resolute resistance as they drive toward the
Naktong to push the N.K. 2nd, 4th and 9th Divisions
and contingents of the N.K. 10th Division back across
the river. On the left flank, the entrenched enemy
(N.K. 9th Division) on Hill 201 holds back repeated
thrusts by the S.K. 9th Regiment.
In the center, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment (re-
leased from 1st Cavalry Division), which has just re-
turned to the regiment, is committed to the battle. At
1000, after the enemy attack against Company C is re-
pulsed, Lt. Colonel R.G. Sherrard orders his 3rd Bat-
talion to advance. The unit is supported by Company
C, 72nd Tank Battalion; however, the North Koreans
raise heavy resistance and prolong the fight until mid-
afternoon.
By about noon, the skies clear and the persistent
pressure finally forces the enemy to begin evacuating
its positions and head for the Naktong. Meanwhile, the
1st Battalion probes the enemy positions on Hill 409,
on the northern boundary of the Division, but no at-
tacks are mounted against it. The hill is defended by
contingents of the N.K. 10th Division.
In anticipation of a retreat, such as the one prompted
by the 23rd Regiment, Eighth Army has prepared a
surprise for the enemy. A task force, composed of the
23rd Regimental Tank Company and Battery B, 82nd
Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion, remains mobile and
prepared to sever the enemy escape route.
September 16, 1950 350

Top: A Marine unloading operation at the inner harbor of Inchon, September 16. Bottom: LSTs on the
mud flats during low tide at Inchon’s inner harbor, September 16.

At about 1600, and continuing to dusk, the search-
and-destroy task force remains on target, and it mows
down enormous numbers of enemy troops as they reach
the river area. The task force receives additional support-
ing firepower when the skies clear and aircraft join the
hunt and pummel the retreating enemy forces, nearly
wiping out the entire contingent.
In the meantime, the 38th Regiment, attacking on
the right flank of the 2nd Division, makes good progress
and it maintains pace with the center attacking force, the
 351
South Korean troops (ROKs) debark a grounded LST at P’ohang-dong. Naval gunfire creates smoke in
the background, September 15.
23rd Regiment. Planes also assist the 38th Regiment,
delivering potent doses of bombs, rockets and napalm,
dropping the deadly cargo just to the front of the assault
troops. The flying iron and liquid fire heat Hill 208 to
a boil and then the 2nd Battalion seizes it, giving the
regiment a perfect elevated view of the Naktong. Later,
more fighter planes arrive and they launch vicious straf-
ing runs that hammer the enemy as they flee toward
the Naktong west of Changnyong.
Subsequent to the day-long thrashing sustained by the
N.K. 2nd Division, it begins to evacuate. During the
night, the divisional command post escapes to the oppo-
site side of the Naktong, followed soon after by the sur-
vivors of the N.K. 4th, 6th, and 17th Regiments. In ad-
September 16, 1950
dition, the N.K. 2nd Division artillery regiment aban-
dons its positions and completes the escape by the fol-
lowing day. The enemy within the U.S. 2nd Division
area continues to receive a tremendous beating on the
following day. Dangerous contingents of isolated enemy
troops still operate behind the lines, and some are as much
as twenty miles to the rear of the 2nd Division’s front.
In the 25th Division sector, on the left flank near Masan,
no attack is possible as the enemy resistance lingers. Many
enemy troops remain behind U.S. lines, and in addition,
the enemy positions on Battle Mountain, P’il-bong and
Sobuk-san show no signs of relenting. The 24th Regi-
ment, in the center of the division line, is to be the spear-
head of the breakout and it is still under daily attack. The
September 16, 1950 352

Top: A U.S. Marine at Inchon takes North Korean prisoners to POW camp. The destroyed tank is a Rus-
sian T-34. Bottom: A 5th Marines’ patrol moving through Inchon.
 353 September 16, 1950

Top: A contingent of the 1st Marines in DUKWs in Inchon. Bottom: U.S. Marines guard about 700 North
Korean prisoners while they are being taken to a POW compound at Inchon, September 16.

27th and 35th Regiments, on the left and right respec-
tively, are confined to their positions until the 24th Reg-
iment initiates the breakout. General Kean organizes a
task force, commanded by Major Robert Woolfolk (CO,
3rd Battalion, 35th Regiment). Woolfolk’s task force
launches an attack on the following day.
In the ROK I Corps area, the Capital Division is heav-
ily engaged in the vicinity of Kigye–An’gang-
ni–Kyongju. Contingents are doggedly moving through
the streets of An’gang-ni. The N.K. 12th Division re-
sists stubbornly.
In other activity, the S.K. 3rd Division advances
September 16, 1950
The USS Repose, a hospital ship at Pusan.
to positions slightly below Pohang-dong and reaches
the north bank of the Hyongsan-gang. In conjunction,
a task group commanded by Admiral Charles C.
Hartman arrives off Pohang-dong; the battleship
USS Missouri is among the warships. The Missouri
flexes its sixteen-inch guns and the enemy positions
below the town are plastered with 2,000-pound
shells.
Meanwhile, the S.K. 8th Division advances north-
ward, encountering only minor resistance, as the N.K.
15th Division has been devastated.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 7th Division is
354
advancing from the west to establish contact with the
S.K. Capital Division. Also, the beleaguered N.K. 8th
Division is under great stress, subsequent to about two
weeks of trying to break through the S.K. 6th Divi-
sion. The equally tired S.K. 6th Division storms against
the enemy, initiating a near non-stop four-day strug-
gle that pulverizes the N.K. 8th Division, which sustains
about 4,000 casualties.
— In Japan: Elements of the 3rd Division have been
arriving at Moji for the past several days. By this day,
the final elements of the two regiments, the 7th and
15th, debark and prepare to move to Korea.
 355
U.S. Marines converge near the burning remnants of a railroad station at Inchon.
September 17 Enemy troops begin mining the
approaches to the Han River to impede the advance of
the Marines. Also, at about this time, the N.K. 70th
Regiment moves from Suwon to support the battle for
Seoul. Inchon-Seoul vicinity: The landing force com-
mander, General O.P. Smith, USMC, is directed to re-
instate a civilian government in Inchon. Although it is
only two days since the invasion, the population is re-
turning to the city in large numbers, and Korean
Marines are assigned the task of filtering out the Com-
munist sympathizers. Frequently, the S.K. Marines re-
vert to harsh measures when suspecting disloyal civil-
ians. General Smith, after consultation with S.K.
Admiral Sohn Won Yil (S.K. chief of Naval operations),
selects a political prisoner named Pyo Yang Moon as
the mayor of Inchon. Moon, the loser in the previous
mayoral contest, will be installed on the following day.
In other activity, the North Koreans test their brash-
ness. Two Yak aircraft fly over Inchon’s harbor and
bomb the USS Rochester. The Yaks make two passes,
the first missing with three of the four dropped bombs,
while the fourth one hits the ship’s crane and bounces
off without detonating. All the bombs miss on the sec-
ond pass, but the near misses inflict some minor dam-
age to the ship’s electrical system. One of the two attack-
ing planes passes over the HMS Jamaica, executing a
strafing run. Three casualties are sustained. The Yak is
blown from the sky.
Also, VMO-6, previously domiciled aboard an LST,
debarks and establishes headquarters near the 1st Ma-
rine Division command post at an improvised airstrip;
reconnaissance and rescue missions will begin from
dawn to dusk on a continual basis. Also, control of tac-
September 17, 1950
tical air support is transferred from TADC (aboard the
Mount McKinley) to the air support section of MTACS-
2 on shore.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the attack against
Kimpo Airfield is delayed for about one hour due to
some unexpected complications. But the preparations
are complete. Company D, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
maintains positions on a hill west of the Inchon-Seoul
highway. The hill contains a knob situated about 200
yards to the front of the perimeter, which slides into
the center of Ascom City. Wary of the terrain, Lieu-
tenant H.J. Smith had dispatched the 2nd Platoon at
dusk (16th) to establish a forward outpost on the knob
where the road swerves to the east and moves through
a slash in the foundation of the knob. The platoon, led
by Lieutenant Lee Howard, is reinforced by machine
gun and rocket launcher teams to bolster its strength.
To the immediate rear of Company D, a platoon
of Company A tanks is anchored defensively to inter-
cept any N.K. armor that might be advancing along
the road from the east. The hefty rocket launchers of
the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, and the 75-mm re-
coilless rifles of the 5th Marines are also slightly to the
rear of Company D, poised for instant support if re-
quired.
The opposite side of the highway is held by Company
F, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, and its perimeter has the
added muscle of the 1st Marines’ 75-mm recoilless ri-
fles and 3.5 rockets. The entire front had been extremely
quiet during the night of the 16th and the mood within
the perimeter was tranquil. At about midnight (16th-
17th), there is a slight stir, but it is just a truck moving
down the highway, hardly even noticed by the 2nd
September 17, 1950
Battalion. The vehicle continues rolling down the
highway, but the tankmen of Company A are more in-
quisitive. When the vehicle approaches the tanks,
which are spread out on the highway, it is halted. Every-
one is taken by surprise. The Marines are startled to
discover that a North Korean officer and four enlisted
men had stumbled into the perimeter and penetrated
several hundred yards without challenge. The enemy
detachment finds themselves captured.
The incident turns out well, as the Marines deduce
that the enemy headquarters is totally uninformed
about the location of the Marines. The encounter is
treated as an unusual isolated incident and things go
back to normal.
At about 0545, the forward outpost (2nd Battalion,
5th Marines) detects an enemy column at a position
several miles east of Ascom City. Lieutenant Howard,
at the outpost, notifies Lieutenant H.J. Smith (Com-
pany D commander) that the contingent is composed
of six T-34s and about 200 infantrymen, many of
whom are aboard the tanks. Smith dispatches the infor-
mation to Colonel Roise at battalion headquarters, but
Roise initially believes the information might be more
wishful thinking than fact.
The young officer’s information proves true shortly
after the report is forwarded. As with the straggler
truck, it seems that the column is not anticipating any
opposition. The tanks rumble closer toward Ascom
City. Some North Koreans aboard the tanks are
leisurely devouring their chow and those walking are
consumed with laughter and babbling conversation. It
seems as if they think they are on a casual ride, but it
is daytime and the column is advancing along the road
to intercept the Marines. Nonetheless, Lieutenant
Howard is preparing to give the intruders a surprise
welcome. The column advances closer, with the trail-
ing infantry maintaining a casual march.
Unbeknownst to the Communists, they are enter-
ing a midway held by Marines. The 2nd Platoon takes
aim, awaiting the suspended order to fire. Lieutenant
Howard, unruffled in manner, focuses on the spear-
head of the column, permitting it access to the curve.
The enemy tanks rumble forward toward Company
D’s positions and just as they take the curve, Howard
bellows the order to fire. Corporal Okey Douglas, who
has moved in position on the lower part of the hill,
swings a mighty blow as he unleashes his bazooka from
a distance of 75 yards and his 2.36-inch rocket shells kill
the lead tank. Douglas continues firing and damages
the second tank in the line.
Meanwhile, the bazooka has plenty of accompany-
ing fire. The 2nd Platoon is also pounding the tanks
with a combination of machine gun, BARs and rifle
fire, knocking off many of the infantrymen. The enemy
infantry bolts for safety, but to no avail. Some fall di-
rectly into the paths of their disoriented tanks. They
are squashed by the treads. The others attempt to escape
to a nearby rice paddy, but discover their efforts are fu-
tile as the Marines’ fire accelerates to shred their ranks.
Lieutenant Pomeroy’s tanks from Company A join the
356
contest, and they pulverize the crippled tank and the
four other surviving tanks.
The enemy armor is barraged by 45 armor-piercing
shells propelled from a distance of 600 yards. PFC Wal-
ter Monegan, Company F, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines,
is at the curve with his bazooka. He fires from point-
blank range to inflict more punishment. And from a
distance of 500 yards, Lieutenant Charles M. Jones’
Platoon (AT Co., 5th Marines) commences fire. The
platoon’s recoilless rifles strike the enemy in concert
with the 75-mm rifles of the 1st Marines, deployed on
Hill 186. As the storm of fire continues to intensify,
the enemy column is also being struck by the 3.5-inch
rocket launchers of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines.
The one-sided shootout lasts only about five minutes,
and it is terminated due to the elimination of targets.
The six T-34s are permanently decommissioned and
consumed with fire. Two hundred dead Communist
troops are scattered between the battered tanks and the
rice paddy. Some have managed to escape, but not
many. In contrast, the Marines’ casualty list is short.
One Marine receives a minor wound. The enemy con-
tingent consisted of troops from the 42nd N.K. Mech-
anized Regiment and elements of the N.K. 18th Divi-
sion, based at Seoul.
The North Korean Tank Corps is no longer winning
any laurels for their Russian tanks, which initially were
considered near-invincible. Although the battle lasts
only five minutes, conversations concerning the kills
continue. Various units from both regiments claim kills
and partial kills, due to the tremendous amount of
combined fire that converged on the same targets.
In the meantime, General MacArthur, Admiral Stru-
ble and other top brass arrive at Yellow Beach to con-
fer with General O.P. Smith. From here, the entourage
moves to the front, stopping at the 1st Marines’ com-
mand post to present medals to Colonel Puller and
South Korean Admiral Sohn. MacArthur dips into his
pocket and discovers that he hadn’t brought any medals
with him. Undaunted, MacArthur instructs an aide to
take note of the minor problem.
The entourage then moves to the site of the success-
ful bushwhacking of the enemy tanks and all are enthu-
siastic about the results. However, General O.P. Smith
is anxious to get MacArthur and the other top officers
out of the area before some enemy straggler causes a
major disaster. MacArthur dismounts the jeep to give
the area a sweeping look. He is swarmed by the press
and their cameras are snapping off photographs to
speed back to the States. In addition to MacArthur and
Admiral Struble, the entourage includes Generals Al-
mond, Fox, Hodes, Ruffner, Shepherd, O.P. Smith,
Whitney and Wright.
General Smith is greatly relieved when the group de-
parts the area, heading for the 5th Marines’ command
post to inform General Craig and Lt. Col. Murray that
they are to receive the Silver Star. The trail of dust in
the wake of the speeding convoy of jeeps could not be
outdone in a John Wayne movie. Soon after the depar-
ture of MacArthur, the Marines prepare to continue
 357
the attack, when suddenly the men of Lieutenant
George McNaughton’s platoon hear an unfamiliar
noise. The unusual sounds emerge from the culvert di-
rectly under the place where General MacArthur had
halted his jeep. Instantly, the Marines take persuasive ac-
tion, and seven armed North Koreans decide to sur-
render. They are the only known survivors of the failed
ambush.
In Ascom City, a huge enemy depot is discovered. It
contains 2,000 tons of captured American ammuni-
tion (for artillery, machine guns and mortars), seized
by the Communists during June. The ammunition is in
good shape and the X Corps will make excellent use of
it.
Following the departure of MacArthur and his en-
tourage, the Marines launch an attack to secure Kimpo
Airfield, which is defended by 400 to 500 troops. In
conjunction with the advance of the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, the 3rd Battalion advances as regimental re-
serve, and it takes over specified assembly areas left in
the wake of the 2nd Battalion.
While the 2nd Battalion attack is ongoing, the 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines, drives on the regimental right
and encounters no opposition. By 1900, Company A
takes the southern portion of Objective Easy. In con-
junction, Company B, 1st Battalion, follows this ad-
vance and seizes the northern half of the heights, also
without incident. Company C, 1st Battalion, will oc-
cupy yet another hill to the west, giving the 1st Battal-
ion positions about 1,500 yards southeast of the 2nd
Battalion. Also, the 3rd Battalion, South Korean
Marines, having passed through the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, at 0500, drives north, reducing pockets of re-
sistance west of Ascom City as it advances.
At 0900, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, jumps off
and drives east, spearheaded by Company E. The force
moves along the Inchon-Seoul Highway and passes the
burning debris of the earlier-destroyed enemy tanks.
After an advance of about one mile, the spearhead piv-
ots left to take a secondary road that leads north around
the eastern tip of Ascom City, which is now a haven
for enemy stragglers.
Meanwhile, Company F’s 2nd Platoon, commanded
by Lieutenant Tilton Anderson (2nd Battalion), drives
directly into and through the city to cover the left flank
of Company E. The 2nd Platoon receives no resistance.
However, the platoon does not execute a house-to-
house search, nor does it comb the side streets as it
moves.
At the eastern tip of the city, things are quite differ-
ent. From various locations on either side of the road,
North Koreans fire upon the troops of Company E,
hindering progress. Nonetheless, the Marines, led by
Captain Samuel Jaskilka, eliminate the obstacles one
by one, completing the task by about 1200. Following
some confusion due to inaccurate maps, the battalion
locates its objectives by the use of reconnaissance patrols
and reinitiates its four-mile march (northeast) at about
1400.
In the meantime, during the morning, the S.K.
September 17, 1950
Marines experience difficulty on the western fringes of
the city, forcing Taplett’s 3rd Battalion to intercede.
Company G plows into an enemy machine gun posi-
tion, eliminating it. Soon after, another G Company
contingent drills against an enemy obstacle among the
town’s buildings. The heated firefight terminates with
eighteen dead Communists; the number of wounded re-
mains unknown, as the enemy departs hastily. Three
Marines from Company G are wounded during the
fight. Also, the 3rd Battalion’s Companies H and I rush
into the town to complete the reduction of enemy re-
sistance there.
Following the cleansing of the town, the assembly
areas are secured and the South Koreans resume their
northward attack. The 3rd Battalion then settles in as
regimental reserve and keeps vigil at a strategic road
intersection, about halfway between Ascom City and
Kimpo Airfield. By about 1500, contact is made be-
tween the 3rd Battalion and the 1st Platoon of Com-
pany A tanks, under Lieutenant Pomeroy. A rifle pla-
toon (Company F), led by Lieutenant Anderson,
accompanies Pomeroy’s tanks, which push out of
Ascom City to link up with the 2nd Battalion.
But the tanks also experience difficulty in locating a
road running northeast. Eventually a route is located
that can handle the weight of the armor, but a damaged
bridge causes more problems. Engineers (Company A,
2nd Platoon Engineers) rush to the scene to make re-
pairs, and during the wait, more tanks arrive to bolster
Pomeroy’s platoon.
Although the rolling thunder of the tanks has been
halted at the water’s edge, the ground troops of the 2nd
Battalion punch forward and reach two hills that lie
about 4,000 yards in front of Kimpo Airfield. The hills,
objectives A and B, give no appearance of being in-
fested with enemy, prompting Colonel Roise to imme-
diately thread them with rifle companies. At about
1600, Company E’s 1st Platoon sprints to the summit
of Objective B without incident, while the remainder
of the 2nd Battalion holds in place to await word.
Lieutenant Deptula radios that the objective is un-
defended, and he also makes it clear that the other hill,
Objective A, is also clear of the enemy. Furthermore, the
platoon leader believes that the descent to the airfield
should be effortless. Roise orders the 2nd Battalion to
prepare for attack. The battalion faces the objective,
and Companies D and E initiate the assault and en-
counter only sniper fire. The steamroller effect of the at-
tacking Marines is embellished by the arrival of the
tanks.
Some unfriendly fire greets the armor at a point
about 1,000 yards south of the airfield, but it is insuf-
ficient to halt the momentum. Marines attached to the
2nd Platoon, Company F, fly from the tanks and exter-
minate the threat, knocking out one automatic weapon
with grenades. The tanks finish the job, splattering the
area with seven rounds of 90-mm high explosive (HE)
shells that quickly extinguish the resistance. Then, to
ensure success, the tanks rivet the ground with effective
machine gun fire.
September 17, 1950 358

In the meantime, Company D, escorted by tanks,
joins the fight and drills toward Kimpo Airfield, while
the other tanks swivel and move to support Company
E’s attack. By 1800, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, is
at the steps of the objective, and the enemy is com-
pletely caught off guard. The 2nd Battalion secures the
southern portion of the airfield’s runway by 2000. The
seizure permits the Marines to establish a defensive
night-perimeter without too much difficulty.
Tanks are on scene to bolster the line. Slightly before
dusk, the 1st Platoon, Company E, moves to Soryu-li
to hold it, while the remainder of Company E deploys
about three hundred yards behind Soryu-li at the air-
field. East of the runway, Company E holds the line,

Top: Cargo is loaded on an LST at Inchon. Bottom: Supplies are stocked for waiting LSTs at Inchon.
 359 September 17, 1950

Top: At Kimpo airfield, a tractor is unloaded from a Fairchild C-119. Bottom: U.S. troops load a 3/4-ton
truck and water trailer aboard a Fairchild C-119 cargo plane at Kimpo airfield outside of Seoul.

interconnected with Company D, which deploys west
of the runway. In conjunction, Company F deploys
south of the runway and focuses on the main road and
two nearby secondary road junctions. However, there
is some unexpected trouble.
In other activity, during the day, Colonel Murray’s
regimental headquarters (5th Marines) is established
north of Ascom City, near the railroad station. Al-
though the area has been tranquil, there is enemy pres-
ence. While a small detachment is searching for a site
to locate the ordnance depot, the North Koreans
commence firing, killing Warrant Officer Bill Parrish
September 17, 1950
Top: U.S. Marine tanks and amtracs. Bottom: Red Beach at Inchon, 17 September.
instantly. The enemy fire also wounds two NCOs. The
enemy fire had originated in a rice paddy and in an or-
chard, catching the detachment by surprise as they re-
connoitered a small knoll.
Reinforcements (1st Platoon A Engineers) speed for-
ward to intercept the enemy force and some quick ac-
tion brings the enemy activity to a halt. Ten Commu-
nists die around the orchard, and soon after, another
360
seven are taken prisoner by S.K. police. Almost simul-
taneously, more enemy fire strikes near the command
post perimeter, just as advance elements arrive to secure
a sector for Battery A, 1st Battalion, 11th Marines. The
incoming fire causes no casualties, but two of the
Marines do brave the fire and strike against the attack-
ers, killing four additional Communist troops. More
excitement erupts throughout the day as one additional
 361 September 17, 1950

Marine is killed and another wounded in close proxim- time, elements of the 3rd Battalion are on the scene.
ity to the command post. The tankers detect a sinister appearing hut. The M-26s
During the night, beginning at about 0200 on the commence firing and one concealed T-34 tank is de-
18th and continuing until dawn, the enemy mounts molished before it can return fire.
several counterattacks against the 2nd Battalion, but Soon after, the ground Marines aboard the tanks
all are handily repulsed. The enemy sustains severe ca- jump off and deploy. The tanks (1st Platoon, Company
sualties for its efforts, predominantly inflicted by the B), commanded by Lieutenant Robert Grover, scour
Americans and Company E, which receives the brunt the area for targets from their positions on the road, and
of the assaults. The remainder of Kimpo is secured on then they begin laying a steady barrage of shells. The
the following day. enemy disengages and retires eastward, giving the 1st
In the 1st Marines sector, the road to Mahang-ri and Marines control of Mahang-ri just prior to 1600.
beyond will be struck solely by the 1st Marines under Subsequent to the fall of Mahang-ri and the domi-
Colonel Puller, as the 5th Marines under Colonel Mur- nation of Hill 208, the 1st Marines push toward the
ray have swung northeast to seize Kimpo. The 1st next objective, Corps Phase Line CC. Colonel Puller’s
Marines, supported by tanks, resumes its attack and 1st Marines head for Sosa, the midpoint between
drives from Ascom City, heading along the Inchon- Mahang-ri and the objective. In the meantime, Com-
Seoul Highway, toward Yongdungp’o. Lt. Colonel Allan munist reinforcements are converging on Sosa to dis-
Sutter’s 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, drives forward. mantle the Marines’ attack. Nevertheless, the 1st
Company D advances over the heights
to the south, while Companies E and
F advance on the left and right sides of
the road respectively.
Communist resistance emerges sud-
denly near and upon Hill 208, a fea-
ture stretching southward from the
highway in the vicinity of Mahang-ri,
but the artillery of the 11th Marines
supplements the attack and pounds
suspected enemy positions in the
heights to the front. Some progress is
made, but an enemy roadblock about
500 yards outside Mahang-ri halts
Company E. Its 2nd Platoon becomes
besieged by withering fire coming from
three separate sides.
Reinforcements speed forward to ex-
tricate the stalled platoon. Lieutenant
McAlee, one of the two officers bring-
ing up the fresh troops, is wounded,
but the other, Lieutenant Johnny
Carter, gets through. In the meantime,
Carter gets medical help for the
wounded officer. He requests bazooka
and recoilless rifle fire to loosen the op-
position. The imperiled platoon then
bolts to a tiny knoll to the right of the
obstacle to seek more tenable positions,
while the remainder of the company
moves forward. The skirmish at the
roadblock costs the enemy about
twenty troops.
While the roadblock is being re-
duced, other units are joining the at-
tack. The 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines,
spearheaded by Company G, and one
platoon of Company B’s tanks, grinds
down the highway. By about 1200, Hill
208 falls to Companies D and F. The
village of Mahang-ri is to be seized by General MacArthur arrives at Inchon on a D-plus 2 and is greeted
Company E, 2nd Battalion. By this by General O.P. Smith, USMC.
September 17, 1950
Marines attack to gain Kimpo. They pass a knocked out enemy tank with enemy dead.
Marines resume the assault, spearheaded by Compa-
nies E and F, 2nd Battalion, which advance along the
left side of the highway, accompanied by the sturdy
tanks of Company B’s 2nd Platoon. To the rear of the
tanks, Company G, 3rd Battalion, is transported
aboard LVTs.
The remainder of the 1st Battalion follows close be-
hind, bringing up the rear. Along the route, the col-
umn approaches a seemingly dangerous pass, prompt-
ing extreme caution. The tank at the nose of the
column nudges into the pass against sporadic enemy
fire, while the ground Marines fan out on either side of
the highway. Then, the enemy fire unexpectedly be-
comes ferocious, as if the hillside is collapsing. The
enemy small arms fire is supplemented by antitank fire
and mortars that pummel the advance party. The
ground Marines are stymied, unable to advance, and
the tank becomes the center of attention because the
engine fails.
Despite the precarious circumstances, the crew re-
mains calm. Lieutenant Bryan Combings, platoon
leader, instinctively recalls that infantry had been
aboard his M-26. Combings flings open the hatch to
check for any lingering Marines as the enemy is clos-
ing. A lone Marine rifleman is still aboard, prompting
Combings to irreverently pull him into the tank, and
not a second too soon. Like mice on cheese, the North
Koreans are atop the tank. Inside the airtight armored
tank, a double dilemma arises. Nauseating fumes from
362
the 90-mm gun are dangerously building, and the res-
cued Marine is becoming hysterical, giving the platoon
leader few encouraging options.
Action is taken. The frenzied Marine is knocked un-
conscious and the pistol port is slid open to forestall
asphyxiation. However, the fresh oxygen is accompanied
by an enemy grenade, which wounds three of the oc-
cupants, including Combings.
In near cadence with the detonation of the enemy
grenade, the enemy is about to finish the annihilation
of the tankers, but the beleaguered crew is saved by the
bell. Fortuitously, a second American M-26, com-
manded by Sergeant Marion Altaire, arrives and cranks
a steady ring of machine gun fire upon the stalled tank,
peeling off some paint and clearing off the enemy, who
succumb to the menacing fire.
Meanwhile, Marine planes (VMF-214) soar over-
head and dive toward the enemy-held high ground,
plastering the positions with bombs, rockets and ma-
chine gun fire. Soon after, the entrapped Marines, hav-
ing neared Heaven’s gates, pop open the hatch and
deeply inhale, ever grateful for their new lease on life,
compliments of Sergeant Altaire.
Meanwhile, Company G regains its momentum and
storms forward on the right side of the road to gain the
heights above the pass. In cadence with the rejuvenated
advance, another section of Cummings’ tank platoon
enters the pass and crashes forward with its guns blaz-
ing. The enemy loses six antitank guns; however, one
 363
U.S. tank loses a track and two additional tanks sustain
minor damage. In conjunction, the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, surges to the summit of the heights on the
left side of the highway and dislodges the enemy.
Marine riflemen rivet the ranks of the retreating
North Koreans as they break hurriedly for Sosa. After
the attacking forces capture the ground, the remainder
of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 1st Marines, arrive, and
the decision to establish a night perimeter is made. The
day’s progress has gained nearly 5,000 yards for the 2nd
and 3rd Battalions. The enemy sustains about 250
killed and wounded, and seventy troops are captured.
The Marines (2nd Battalion) lose one man killed and
sustain 28 wounded. The 3rd Battalion’s Company G
sustains six Marines wounded.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, com-
manded by Colonel Hawkins and bolstered by the di-
vision reconnaissance company, initiates an attack dur-
ing the morning, but it encounters only slight
opposition. The unit races forward, sweeping through
the unfamiliar valleys and unfriendly hills before halt-
ing in the heights just south of the 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines. The reconnaissance company advances to the
edge of the Namdong peninsula. Captain Houghton’s
recon Marines sweep the area for two days and discover
a mine manufacturing plant and some prisoners.
In yet other activity, in addition to the six enemy
tanks destroyed in the morning at Ascom City and the
Map Ascom City 17 September 1950.
September 17, 1950
concealed tank wasted later in the day, Marine planes
also account for one destroyed enemy tank. The divi-
sional report of fourteen tanks destroyed cannot be ver-
ified by the record of division units, and the report of
four tanks destroyed during the afternoon are actually
part of those reported destroyed earlier in the day near
Ascom City by the 1st and 5th Marines and Able Com-
pany tanks.
At day’s end, the 1st Marines stand within one mile
from the village of Sosa. The Marines call for some as-
sistance from their British cousins. The night remains
tranquil, possibly due in part to the HMS Kenya, which
spends the night offshore and delivers about 300 six-
inch shells into suspected Communist positions at Sosa
and on Hill 123. At dawn on the 18th, the attack will
resume.
In the Eighth Army I Corps area, 1st Cavalry sector,
enemy resistance remains tough. Repeated attempts by
the 1st Battalion, 5th Cavalry, and its supporting tanks
to take Hill 203 are unsuccessful. Enemy fire takes a toll
on the tanks. On this day, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Cav-
alry, enters the fight and attacks toward another ob-
jective to the west, Hill 253. Companies F and G en-
gage the enemy, but fail to dislodge the defenders,
despite ferocious fighting. Enemy fire compels the
troops to withdraw and seek more tenable positions
south of the road. During the withdrawal of Company
G, Captain Fred DePalina (wounded) holds in place
365 September 17, 1950
September 18, 1950
to cover the withdrawal, but as he attempts to rejoin his
company, the enemy ambushes him. Despite his
wounds, DePalina kills six of the enemy before his de-
mise.
In the 24th Division area, General Church receives or-
ders to advance through the ground recently cleared by
the 5th RCT and cross the Naktong west of Taegu, near
the Hasan-dong ferry crossing site. The 21st Regiment
initiates the move after dark on the following day.
The enemy begins to execute South Korean civilian
prisoners as Eighth Army initiates its crossing of the
Naktong. Civilians and some U.S. and South Korean
troops who had been held in Taejon are taken from
their compounds and shot. In other areas, the Com-
munists duplicate the effort. The mass killing intensi-
fies as the Americans close on Taejon.
In the 2nd Division sector, the enemy continues to
escape across the Naktong River, but pressure from the
ground and the sky remains relentless. The Americans
are in hot pursuit and the North Koreans do not mount
any counterattacks. The 23rd Regiment advances and
overruns several abandoned areas that are bulging with
equipment and in the process seizes six antitank guns,
thirteen artillery pieces and four mortars.
In the meantime, the 38th Regiment captures twelve
antitank guns, six pieces of artillery, one self-propelled
gun and nine mortars. While the ground troops drive
against the retreating enemy, planes reinitiate the air
strikes and hurl more devastation upon the Commu-
nists. The aircraft deposit 260 110-gallon napalm tanks
to the front of the 2nd Division. The planes also catch
enemy contingents west of Changnyong and strafe
them as they retreat.
In the 25th Division sector, the recently activated task
force, commanded by Major Woolfolk, attacks enemy
positions on Battle Mountain and P’il-bong to recon-
struct the 24th Regiment’s lines. Despite the heavy sup-
port of the 8th and 90th FABNs and air strikes, the
enemy is not dislodged. The attacks must be resumed
on the following day. The division’s progress is directly
connected with clearing a route through the mountains
here.
In the ROK I Corps area, the Capital Division con-
tinues to battle the N.K. 12th Division in the moun-
tains.
In the ROK II Corps area, S.K. 7th Division sector,
one battalion drives farther west and establishes contact
with the S.K. Capital Division (I Corps); the linkage
seals a gap between the S.K. I and II Corps that has ex-
isted for about two weeks.
In Naval activity, the USS Rochester (CA-124) comes
under attack by enemy planes. The HMS Jamaica
(CVL) comes to her aid and downs two Yak single-
engine planes. This is the first incident in the conflict
in which enemy planes are destroyed by naval gunfire.
In other activity, TF-77, in support of the Inchon op-
eration, executes 304 sorties against enemy targets
north of Inchon.
— In Japan: Marine Night Fighter Squadron
VMF(N)-513, based at Itazuke, initiates the first of
366
fifteen daylight support missions (17th-19th) to bolster
Eighth Army during its breakout from the Pusan
Perimeter. The squadron, commanded by Major Joseph
Reinburg, pounds the entire perimeter and hammers
enemy armor, artillery and infantry contingents.
September 18 North Korea finally publicly
mentions that there is activity at Inchon, but little is
stated. The Communists proclaim that two American
aircraft have been shot down by elements of the coastal
defense units there, but still, there is no mention of the
invasion.
Inchon-Seoul vicinity: In the X Corps sector, a cere-
mony is held in Inchon to proclaim the installation of
a civilian government. The proclamation is read in En-
glish and Korean as the mayor is being installed. Imme-
diately following the ceremony, the government begins
its work and reinstates a police force to maintain order.
In addition, food is distributed to the ragged refugees
and plans are set up to establish a hospital. The S.K.
17th Regiment, a recently established security contin-
gent, arrives at Inchon and recieves orders to sweep the
terrain between Ascom City and the coast.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 32nd Regiment,
7th Division, debarks and arrives in Inchon during the
morning, followed later by the remainder of the regi-
ment. In the latter part of the afternoon, X Corps is-
sues orders to force the Han River.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the attack to seize
the remainder of Kimpo is readied, but there are some
distractions. During the early morning hours, the
enemy mounts several counterattacks, but none is sup-
ported with weapons heavier than submachine guns
and rifles. Slightly after midnight, Company F (2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines) comes under attack at its po-
sitions at an overpass located at the southernmost point
of the perimeter. Engineers under Lieutenant Wayne
Richards and the assault platoon, led by Lieutenant
James Harrell, hold the bridge, but the attackers are
intercepted by one Marine before they can destroy the
bridge. Sergeant Ray Kearl slays the sole officer and
three of his men, but two others avoid Kearl and run
for safety. The perimeter remains on the alert, and be-
fore the first signs of dawn, another enemy contingent
approaches the bridge, but it is wiped out. Nonetheless,
the Communists persist in the attempt to dislodge the
Marines at Kimpo.
At dawn, the Communists mount another assault.
Again the Marines are prepared, and the Communists
are fried before they reach the lines of the 2nd Battal-
ion. The 1st Battalion detects the attackers moving
from the south across open ground. Unhesitatingly,
Company B commences firing, but to add steam to the
fire, it calls for assistance from artillery and the heavy
mortar sections. Consequently, the enemy is shredded
in front of Kimpo. However, one enemy platoon
reaches the lines of Company F, but to no avail. The
enemy encounter is fierce, but the Marines under Har-
rell and the Marine engineers under Lieutenant
Richards hold the bridge.
 367 September 18, 1950

Top: U.S. Marines control Kimpo Airfield. Bottom: An enemy ammunition depot in vicinity of Yong-
dungp’o explodes.
369 September 18, 1950
September 18, 1950
Sergeant Robert Kitka disregards his safety and re-
mains exposed to the ring of fire, giving his life while
he rallies his men. A bulldozer operator, Sergeant David
DeArmond, commandeers a machine gun to meet the
enemy threat, but he, too, is slain by enemy fire. Nev-
ertheless, the attack sizzles as the surviving North Ko-
reans disengage and flee through a rice paddy. The
Marines give hot pursuit. Companies E and F, bolstered
by some tanks of Company A, rummage through the
area to annihilate the remnant enemy troops before they
can reach the Han River. Company C, 1st Battalion,
5th Marines, joins in the hunt, supported by artillery.
Its objectives are seized by 0930 against nominal oppo-
sition. The remainder of the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
remains at its positions of the previous day.
In the meantime, Lieutenant Deptula’s platoon, the
farthest extension of Company E, detects enemy move-
ment at about 0300, when the Communists move
against its positions at Soryu-li. When the enemy en-
croaches, Sergeant Richard Martson bolts to his feet
and screams “United States Marines!” while he simul-
taneously empties his carbine. The remainder of the
platoon commences firing at about the same time,
bringing the enemy contingent to an instant halt.
Twelve of them literally drop dead in their tracks, while
the remainder of the column bolts to safety. Un-
daunted, the Communists launch three more unsuc-
cessful attacks against Deptula’s steadfast platoon.
Still, the Communists attempt to take the platoon,
adding a T-34 tank to the next assault. Deptula, aware
of the isolated position of his platoon, chooses not to
take on the tank; rather, he orders his men to move
back to the 2nd Battalion positions. The Marines pull
back, having sustained one killed and one wounded.
The platoon reaches the perimeter of Company E at
about 0500. Prior to dawn, despite a solid perimeter,
a Communist officer penetrates the line, wounds an
engineer, Lieutenant Lawrence Hetrick, and evades
capture.
At dawn, Colonel Murray is awakened, but not by his
bugler. The enemy officer and one rifleman, both near
the CP, are firing incessantly. A platoon of engineers
attacks and eliminates the threat with a flurry of
grenades and rifle fire. One Marine casualty is sustained
during the brief exchange.
Soon after, the North Koreans mount another two-
pronged attack, striking the 2nd Battalion’s Company
E from the east and from the west. Initially, the Marines
believe the fire coming from the east is friendly. Cap-
tain Jaskilka orders his men not to return fire, while he
bolts to his feet and begins yelling to nearby Company
D, telling the men to cease firing. Fortuitously, Jaskilka
is not hit by the enemy fire and the mistake is rectified.
The Marines pour fire into the attackers, composed of
about two squads, but another assault is emerging from
the east against the 2nd Platoon. Company E holds
firmly.
By 1000, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, seizes
Kimpo Airfield intact. The North Koreans fail to destroy
the runway, which is 150 feet wide and 6,000 feet long.
370
The Marines capture one Russian Yak fighter and two
Russian Stormovik planes, which had not been de-
stroyed. The captured aircraft are transferred to Air
Force Intelligence. The Yak had been found by Lieuten-
ant Edward Collins (Ordnance Battalion) and it had
been armed and fueled. The aircraft is quickly repainted
and given U.S. insignias to assure it could be safely
flown to Japan, if the enemy threatens Kimpo.
At about 1030, Colonel Roise dispatches Company
D, escorted by tanks and other heavy weapons, to take
Hill 131 (Regimental Objective Dog). For added insur-
ance, the U.S. Navy shepherds the operation, blasting
the objective as the Marines advance. The objective is
taken without opposition at 1145, giving the Marines
the strategic heights that command the banks of the
Han River north of Kimpo. The Marines take quick
advantage of the prizes.
Meanwhile, at 1000, the first U.S. aircraft lands at
Kimpo since the invasion during June. The aircraft is
a helicopter, piloted by Captain Victor A. Armstrong.
General Shepherd and Colonel Krulak arrive aboard
the HO3S-1 and they are met by General Craig on the
runway. At 1409, a Corsair lands. Marine aircraft at-
tached to MAG 33 also arrive at the field today. Also,
Colonel Murray relocates his regimental command post
at Kimpo at 1245. The Marines draw X Corps a notch
closer to Seoul.
Also, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, seizes Hill 99
northeast of Kimpo, before it reaches the Han. Since its
departure from Ascom City on the previous day, the
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, sustains four killed and
nineteen wounded, while covering about nine miles
over the high ground and through the rice paddies. In
contrast, the Marines (2nd Battalion) kill 100 enemy
troops in their sector while capturing ten POWs. No
figures are available for enemy wounded.
Subsequent to the seizure of Kimpo, the 5th Marines
sector remains tranquil, especially to the east, from
where the Communists are retreating. However, intel-
ligence concludes that about 1,000 enemy troops are
forming north and south of the Han River to launch a
counterattack against Kimpo.
Naval carrier aircraft are committed. Four Skyraiders
scorch enemy troop formations that are spotted north-
east of the river on both banks. The Communists scat-
ter, but about fifty die suddenly.
In related activity, Marine planes discover additional
enemy troop formations near Hill 125 and near
Haengju, north of the airfield at Kimpo and across
from the 5th Marines’ 2nd Battalion. Also, in accor-
dance with the orders of X Corps, Division issues or-
ders to cross the Han River. The 5th Marines will seize
crossing sites on the following day, but Puller’s 1st
Marines is to continue its drive toward Yongdungp’o.
In other activity, the Marine 2nd Engineer Special
Brigade assumes responsibility for Inchon’s security,
freeing the South Korean Marines to advance to the
Han River.
In the 1st Marines sector, the attack is resumed. The
2nd Battalion’s D and E Companies drive on the right
 371
and left respectively. A mishap occurs, causing casual-
ties when several artillery shells detonate prematurely
during the preparation fire. Two Marines (Company
E) are accidentally killed and three others are wounded.
The 3rd Battalion, commanded by Colonel Thomas
Ridge, moves forward, transported aboard various ve-
hicles including jeeps and DUKWs. The 3rd Battal-
ion moves right through the positions of the 2nd Bat-
talion. The forward thrust lacks serious enemy ground
opposition and it effortlessly steamrolls over a road-
block to the front of Sosa. By 1200, the town is se-
cured. The 2nd Battalion takes a defensive stance to
the right of the village’s railroad and across the tracks,
while the 3rd Battalion spreads out on Hill 123, north
of the highway and east of the town.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, dashes
forward, still meeting little opposition on the division
right. The 1st Battalion winds the day down by taking
positions in the heights about two miles south of the
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines.
In other activity in the area to the left of the 5th
Marines, the 1st Battalion, Korean Marines, arrives to
assist the 3rd Battalion, Korean Marines, with the
search of the Kumpo peninsula. Colonel Puller’s situ-
ation remains dangerous. The 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines, posted on Hill 123, sustains a severe mortar
bombardment at 1415.
The incoming fire whacks the Marines relentlessly
as the air observers and ground observers are unable to
locate its origin. Thirty Marines sustain wounds within
one hour. Later, at 1800, the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, comes under fire at its positions south of the
road. Fourteen more Marines are wounded there, in-
cluding the commanding officer, Company E, Cap-
tain Albert Williams, and the battalion supply officer,
Warrant Officer Bartley Kent.
In addition, the enemy has laid minefields along the
highway north of Sosa to hinder the Marines’ advance
to Yongdungp’o. In concert with the 1st Marines’ assault
to seize Sosa, Marine aircraft (VMF-214) have flown
close support missions to speed the advance. The pilots
detail the destruction of various enemy supply areas,
concealed in various places on the sand spit between
Yongdungp’o and Seoul. Also, VMF-214 destroys two
enemy tanks, but four others avoid damage. Some of the
town’s buildings also sustain damage.
In the Eighth Army, I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division
sector, enemy resistance on Hill 203 continues to be in-
vincible, but the 1st Battalion, 5th Cavalry, remains
undaunted. Company A, 70th Tank Battalion, sup-
ports the attack against Hill 203, and it, too, sustains
losses. Ten tanks have been lost during the fighting on
the 17th-18th. Enemy mines decimate six of the tanks;
antitank guns knock out two and enemy tanks destroy
two others. U.S. tanks demolish two entrenched enemy
tanks during the fighting.
The 1st Battalion seizes the hill, but the enemy re-
mains heavily entrenched in the hills to the northwest
and in particular, on Hill 253, east of Waegwan. The
2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, hammers against these
September 18, 1950
enemy hill positions and pays a stiff price. The 2nd
Battalion’s three rifle companies sustain heavy casual-
ties. The combined force dwindles to 165 able-bodied
troops, and Company F is reduced to 45 troops. The
defenders on the hill mass, including Hills 253 and
371, repel all attacks, forcing the battle to continue into
the following day.
In the 24th Division sector, the Kumho, a tributary of
the Naktong River, becomes an unexpected obstacle. I
Corps Engineers have not fabricated a bridge across it
as directed, compelling Division to rush its engineers to
the crossing to lay sandbags over the covered bridge al-
ready there. The division then makes it to the Naktong
for its scheduled crossing, but the mission is behind
schedule and the traffic is lined up for about five miles,
preventing a night crossing. General Church remains
concerned about a daylight crossing and pressures Col-
onel Stephens to push his 21st Regiment across the river
before dawn on the 19th, rather than face dawn and
possible enemy resistance on the opposite bank.
In the 2nd Division sector, the breakout attack re-
ceives a stroke of luck in the 38th Regiment’s sector. The
2nd and 3rd Battalions, 38th Regiment, operating west
of Changnyong and east of the Naktong respectively,
make great progress. Concealed enemy supplies and
equipment are seized near the east bank of the river.
More than 125 tons of ammunition and an abundance
of new rifles are among the stores discovered buried in
the sand or hidden in culverts.
Both battalions push patrols across the Naktong in
the vicinity of Pugong’ni, where the river is about 100
yards wide and about 12 feet deep. The patrols dart to
the heights on the west side of the river. Surprisingly,
the nearby high ground is free of North Korean troops,
prompting the regimental commander, Colonel Peploe,
to order two squads (2nd Battalion) to ford the river
and begin establishing a beachhead. The squads travel
across the water in squatty rubber rafts, each capable of
holding two men, but one platoon is preparing to move
in right on their heels.
At 1320, Peploe is authorized to dispatch one battal-
ion across the river. In less than three hours, Compa-
nies E, F and contingents of Company G, 2nd Battal-
ion, are on the west bank and advancing toward Hill
308, one mile west. This crossing of the Naktong by the
38th Regiment is the first permanent crossing of the
river by Eighth Army during the breakout from the
perimeter. The 2nd Battalion has caught the enemy off
guard and it encounters only minor resistance. Forward
contingents of the battalion seize Hill 308 before 1800.
Also, the capture of the hill gives the 38th Regiment
control of the Ch’ogye Highway.
Once atop the summit, the 2nd Battalion troops
peer west and detect about one battalion of enemy
troops at about 1,000 yards from the hill; however, no
counterattack is mounted. The 2nd Division now con-
trols most of the terrain in its sector east of the Naktong,
but Hills 201 and 409, to the south and north respec-
tively, remain in enemy control. The former has re-
pelled the repeated efforts of the 9th Regiment, and
September 19, 1950
Hill 409 has been struck by air and artillery, but no
major ground attacks have been launched against it.
Meanwhile, Colonel Skeldon, 2nd Battalion com-
mander, takes precautions for his beachhead positions
on the west bank of the river. He requests aircraft pro-
tection, beginning thirty minutes after dawn on Sep-
tember 19. The 38th Regiment collects 132 POWs
during this day’s operation, including 32 female nurses.
In the 23rd Regiment sector, a patrol composed of
twenty-two men of the I&R Platoon attempts to cross
the Naktong in its zone, but enemy fire from the west
bank of the river repels progress. Three men are killed,
one man is wounded, and the patrol is pushed back to
the east bank.
In the 25th Division sector, the attacks against Battle
Mountain and P’il-bong by Major Woolfolk’s task force
are resumed, but again, the enemy repels each attack.
The Americans sustain severe casualties, including 57
in Company A, 27th Regiment. Also, a contingent of
Company C, 27th Regiment, comes under extremely
heavy fire while fighting for a ridge in the vicinity of
Chindong-ni during the night of the 18th-19th. An
enemy grenade is tossed among a few men, but Corpo-
ral John W. Collier takes action to save the others by div-
ing on the grenade and taking the full blast. The other
three soldiers survive, but Corporal Collier is killed.
He is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
courage and selfless sacrifice.
Also, although the enemy is raising tenacious resist-
ance against the division, many of the N.K. units are be-
ginning to withdraw. The N.K. 7th Division begins to
retire from its positions south of the Nam River, com-
pleting the crossing by the morning of the 19th. In the
meantime, contingents of the N.K. 6th Division rede-
ploy to cover the retreat, and then it pulls out from its
positions at Sobuk-san.
In the S.K. area, on the east coast, the USS Missouri
reinitiates her bombardment of the enemy positions
below Pohang-dong, pounding the dike there. The fire
is guided by Colonel Emmerich, KMAG advisor, at-
tached to the S.K. 3rd Division.
In conjunction, the S.K. 3rd Division launches an
attack against the positions; however, impenetrable
enemy machine gun fire mows down the troops as they
race across a bridge. The South Koreans lose an inde-
terminable number of troops killed and 144 are
wounded. The S.K. 3rd Division is determined to take
the ground. Thirty-one troops volunteer to make an-
other attempt. The impetuous do-or-die charge takes
a high toll on the attackers, as nineteen are hit and
stopped on the bridge. Nonetheless, eleven troops suc-
cessfully run the gamut and clasp a small hold north
of the river. More S.K. troops speed across the bridge
to bolster the Spartan detachment. The machine guns
are intact, but the gunners are found dead, tied to their
weapons.
In other activity, the S.K. Miryang Guerrilla Battal-
ion, which had been debarked at Changsa-dong about
ten miles north of Pohang-dong during the night of
the 14th-15th, is evacuated by the U.S. Navy, saving it
372
from annihilation. The unit, armed with Russian-made
weapons, had been ordered to torment the N.K. 3rd
Division operating north of the S.K. 3rd Division, but
the operation fails.
The N.K. 12th Regiment has pushed the unit to the
beach where the guns of the naval vessels keep the
enemy at bay. Thirty-nine troops are killed. LSTs pick
up 725 troops, including 110 wounded. Another
thirty-two refuse to make a run for the ships.
In Air Force activity, planes attached to the 92d and
98th Bombardment Groups strike enemy troop forma-
tions in the vicinity of Waegwan to break them up.
Forty-two B29s participate and deliver 1,600 bombs.
September 19 The Pusan Logistical Command
is redesignated the 2nd Logistical Command. In other
activity, the Philippine 10th Infantry Battalion Com-
bat Team debarks at Pusan. Also, President Syngman
Rhee speaks to a very large audience in Pusan and
makes his intentions clear concerning the South Ko-
rean goals. He states: “We have to advance as far as the
Manchurian border until not a single enemy soldier is
left in our country.” Rhee also states that he does not
expect the U.N. troops to halt at the 38th Parallel, but
he insists that if they do halt the pursuit, the South Ko-
reans will maintain the advance singlehandedly.
Inchon-Seoul vicinity: General Wright, acting upon
direction from General MacArthur, dispatches a mes-
sage to General Hickey (acting chief of staff, FEC,
Tokyo), instructing him to prepare Plan 100-C for ex-
ecution. The plan calls for an amphibious landing at
Kunsan, carried out by two U.S. divisions and one
South Korean division. The scheduled date is October
15. The plan exhibits MacArthur’s concerns that Eighth
Army will be unable to successfully break out of the
Pusan Perimeter. General Walker is against the plan.
The 31st Regiment, 7th Division, begins to come
ashore at Inchon. Also, the USS Missouri, which has
been operating off the east coast of Korea, arrives off In-
chon to provide support fire for the newly arriving 7th
Division, which will operate on the right flank. In con-
junction, the USS Rochester and the USS Toledo have
been providing long-range cover fire on the left flank,
bolstering the Marines and South Korean troops. How-
ever, the 1st and 5th Marines have both reached forward
positions beyond the range of light cruisers and de-
stroyers.
Between today and September 24, the Toledo and
the Rochester provide support fire for the 3rd Battal-
ion, S.K. Marines, which is requested by Lt. Wayerski
(Shore Fire Control Party officer). The extra firepower
comes in handy. During one patrol, operating slightly
northwest of Kimpo, the S.K. Marines annihilate a
company-strength enemy contingent and they capture
about 150 prisoners in close proximity to Chongdong
on the south bank of the Han River.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, TAC X Corps es-
tablishes headquarters at Kimpo Airfield; it is followed
by MTACS-2, MGCIS-1 and VMO-6. Cargo trans-
ports and other planes arrive at Kimpo Airfield from
 373
U.S. Army troops move through a village southeast of Inchon, following their landing (X Corps) in Sep-
tember.
Japan: a pair of planes from VMF-312 land at Kimpo,
and VMF-212, commanded by Lt. Colonel Richard
Wyczawski, also arrives today. Lt. Colonel Max Vol-
cansek and his squadron, VMF(N)-542, depart Japan
and land at Kimpo at 1830. Volcansek’s squadron,
composed of 6 fighters (F7F-3Ns), are the first planes
of MAG-33 to arrive at Kimpo. Among 54 officers and
274 enlisted men, the squadron has only twenty trained
night fighter pilots, the remainder being volunteer re-
servists.
The 1st MAW remains at Itami Airbase in Japan.
The 1st Marine Division command post moves from the
Kimpo vicinity and relocates at Ocoso-ri, less than two
miles southeast of Kimpo. It becomes operational at
1645.
Also, at 0930, Marine General O.P. Smith confers
with General Almond at Kimpo to finalize the selection
of a crossing site at the Han. They discuss an equally im-
portant topic, the availability of bridging materials. In
conjunction, the site, in the vicinity of Haengju, be-
comes the objective, provided it passes a visual inspec-
tion from a helicopter. Lt. Colonel Edward Rowny (X
Corps engineer officer) informs General Smith that X
Corps lacks bridging, except for that transported by
Lt. Colonel Partridge’s 1st Engineer Battalion.
Partridge tells Smith he will improvise by using one
fifty-ton raft to support the ground Marines and that
he will bring up another to bolster the effort. He states
that rafts will be utilized to transport the tanks and
other vehicles. Also, during the meeting, General Al-
mond informs General Smith that the 32nd Regiment,
7th Division, will deploy on the right flank of the 1st
September 19, 1950
Marines. General Almond expedites its movement to the
front to relieve the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines.
In the 5th Marines sector, the 1st Battalion remains
deeply rooted in the heights east of Kimpo Airfield, but
as usual, the Marines are about to begin another at-
tack. During the previous night, Colonel Newton re-
ceived orders from Colonel Murray to secure Hills 80
and 85, the keys to Yongdungp’o, but first, the battal-
ion must level the resistance on Hill 118, the dominant
feature standing between the airfield and Yongdung-
p’o.
However, before the 1st Battalion jumps off, it is at-
tacked by a strong enemy force. About 500 North Ko-
reans launch the assault at dawn in cadence with a bar-
rage of mortar and small arms fire, which jolts
Company C, 1st Battalion, into action. Many of the
Communists are driving down the Yongdungp’o–
Kimpo Road seemingly heading for the airfield, while
one other contingent is advancing toward Company
C’s positions on the crest of Objective Fox to the front
of Hill 118.
The Communists are met by terrific return fire and
their ranks diminish quickly. Despite the enemy coun-
terattack, Company B, 1st Battalion, operating on
schedule, lunges toward its objective, Hill 118, where
yet other large concentrations of enemy troops have
been detected. Company A holds tight to the rear of
Objective Easy, poised to engage any enemy troops that
reach the airfield approaches. Convincingly, Company
C streams steady fire into the attackers, while Captain
Fenton’s Company B ascends Hill 118.
By 1100, Fenton’s troops gain the crest of Hill 118
September 19, 1950
U.S. infantrymen are deployed in the heights along the Naktong River during the Eighth Army drive to
Taejon.
and their firepower is then focused on the enemy attack-
ers caught between Company C and Company B. It is
a strong concoction of deadly fire, thanks to the effec-
tive air strikes and artillery fire. Company B secures its
objective without sustaining any casualties. The re-
maining Communists stretched out between Compa-
nies A and B are pummeled. The enemy sustains about
three hundred killed, and the Marines capture an ad-
ditional 100 troops. The surviving enemy flees the area,
vanishing near the villages and fields in the vicinity of
the Han.
After the battle, Company C advances to its desig-
nated positions on Hill 118. It sustains 2 killed and 6
wounded while turning back the attack. Once both
companies are on Hill 118, they regroup, but there is
no pause in the action. Nearby, Hill 80 is occupied by
374
another huge enemy force and the Marines prepare to
make another 1,000-yard dash. The assault will be aug-
mented by artillery and air strikes, as Captain Fenton
requests the additional muscle. The planes score an-
other bull’s-eye, whacking the enemy with horrific fire-
power that kills many and disperses the survivors on
Hill 80.
More enemy troops are detected near the Kalchon
bridge, which leads to Yongdungp’o. These Commu-
nists begin firing into the positions of Company B at
about the same time the Americans spot their positions.
Enemy machine gun fire and antitank fire strike at
Company B, but Captain Fenton had already called for
artillery and it outclasses the enemy fire. Ninety-six ar-
tillery shells arc toward the opposite side of the bridge
and slap harshly at the enemy positions, quieting their
 375
guns, but the several minutes of devastating fire also
inflict severe damage to the bridge.
At about 1430, Company C drives down the high-
way moving toward Hills 80 and 85, but the Marines,
operating on a tight schedule, spend no time clearing
the enemy still standing between the road and the river.
With the assistance of planes and a platoon of Company
A tanks, Company C rolls forward. Company C’s 3rd
Platoon pivots from the road slightly after 1500 and
strikes against Hill 80, while the 1st Platoon, led by
Lieutenant Robert Corbet, maintains its pace and con-
tinues advancing along the road, closing on Hill 85.
Both objectives fall nearly effortlessly by 1650, due in
great part to the effectiveness of the planes and artillery.
But the enemy retains its tenacity and Company C
soon comes under severe fire.
Enemy mortars, artillery and small arms combine to
halt any further advance. Company C halts and estab-
lishes defensive positions on the reverse slopes of the
heights to prepare for an anticipated enemy counterat-
tack to regain Hills 80 and 85. In the meantime, the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, reduces the enemy resistance
in the heights within its sector along the Han. The 5th
Marines is to be relieved on its hill positions by the 1st
Marines; however, the regiment arrives late. By dusk,
the 5th Marines control the south bank of the Han in
its zone.
Also, at Kimpo, Colonel Murray and other officers
hold a staff meeting in the command post to prepare for
the crossing of the Han. In conjunction, the South Ko-
rean Marines who had begun departing Inchon on the
previous day deploy on the left flank of the 5th
Marines, poised to cross the Han on the 20th with the
U.S. Marines.
A contingent of fourteen troops (mostly Reconnais-
sance Company) swims the Han at about 2000 to
check the landing area on the opposite bank. The con-
tingent is composed of Captain Kenneth J. Houghton,
CO, Reconnaissance Co.; Lieutenant Dana Cashion;
two naval officers, Lt. Horace Underwood and Ensign
John Seigle; and ten enlisted Marines.
The detachment makes it to the opposite bank at
about 2040 and encounters two Koreans; both are cap-
tured effortlessly. The captives claim they are escaping
from Seoul. The group then discovers that the area can
handle the nine LVTs, which will carry the company.
Four men led by Lieutenant Cashion ascend Hill 125,
but before reaching the summit, the detachment pulls
back (without incident), thinking the objective unoc-
cupied. Nevertheless, as the patrol returns to the beach,
it comes under fire.
In the meantime, the area near the north bank seems
tranquil, and Captain Kenneth Houghton orders the
remainder of the company to begin crossing. The still-
ness of the night had been interrupted by the clanging
noises of the amtracs, which had traveled about five
miles from Kimpo to the crossing site. Meanwhile, the
Communists prepare to fire. Eight of the vessels’ trac-
tors enter the water and they are immediately greeted
by menacing machine gun and mortar fire. The enemy
September 19, 1950
fire focuses on the amtracs and against the advance
party on the north bank. The mission begins to get
tangled. Four of the amtracs become grounded, jeop-
ardizing the vehicles and the troops aboard them.
To make matters worse, communications become
poor. The 1st and 2nd Platoons, commanded by Lieu-
tenants Kraince and Philip Shutler, are stuck in the
muck. Orders direct them to debark from the LVTs
and return to the south bank. In conjunction, the 3rd
Platoon, led by Lieutenant Charles Puckett and not yet
in river, is to provide cover fire.
While the grounded amtracs are attempting to re-
turn to the north bank, the advance team is trying to
swim out to the vessels. During the confusion, the two
captured prisoners break for safety, but Marine fire kills
both.
Meanwhile, the advance party breaks for the north
bank, coming under fire as the men begin swimming.
Some Marine mortar shells fall short and create addi-
tional havoc for the swimmers. Captain Kenneth
Houghton is knocked cold by the concussion of one of
the shells, but he regains consciousness and is taken to
one of the grounded LVTs. Nevertheless, the remain-
ing men of the advance team of swimmers returns to the
south bank; one man, Private Alphonse Ledet, Jr., is
missing and presumed dead, and two others in addition
to Captain Kenneth Houghton are wounded.
The majority of reconnaissance troops on the
stranded LVTs make it back to the north bank near Hill
131. From there, they are shipped back to Kimpo.
Gunnery Sergeant Ernest DeFazio makes sure his ca-
sualties (swimmers) are cared for immediately, and
then, he and eight others search for Captain Kenneth
Houghton and discover him on one of the grounded
LVTs. By about dawn (20th), DeFazio is back at the
5th Marines CP giving a report and Captain Houghton
is en route to a hospital. Two of the four stranded LVTs
are brought back to the south bank.
In the meantime, the Marines have learned another
valuable lesson. Initially it was thought that the area
was lightly defended; however, the reconnaissance com-
pany would have been facing about one battalion if it
had landed during the night. A decision had been
reached at about 0430 that the 3rd Battalion would
cross at 0630.
In the 1st Marines sector, the 2nd Battalion, 32nd
Regiment, 7th Division, USA, moves out of Inchon
and relieves the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, at its posi-
tions in the high ground south of the highway on the
right flank, effecting the linkup by noon. The relief
force had arrived later than expected.
In the meantime, Colonel Puller orders his 2nd and
3rd Battalions, 1st Marines, to initiate their attack at
1030, the former driving along the highway and the
latter advancing on the left of the road. While the
Marines push toward Yongdungp’o, the 7th Division
protects their right flank. Colonel Puller’s 2nd Battal-
ion is bolstered by tanks, but the armor sustains dam-
age after advancing about 500 yards.
Enemy fire originating from the right front on Hill
September 19, 1950
72, in the zone of the 32nd Infantry, pounds the ad-
vancing column of Company F. At the same time, the
lead Company C tank strikes a mine and loses one of
its tracks and two road wheels. Unable to easily ad-
vance, the trailing armor halts. The Marines return fire
and they receive assistance from artillery and planes
(VMF-214). Company F is joined by the remainder of
the battalion to ensure the demise of the blockage.
Meanwhile, engineers (2nd Platoon, Company C)
advance under fire and begin to detonate the mines
scattered about the road. The engineers purposely avoid
the mines on the shoulders to quicken the reentry of the
tanks, and the units to the rear are informed of the
lurking danger. Nonetheless, some vehicles are later lost
on the shoulders because the troops fail to heed the
warning. The enemy is thrown back by the three rifle
companies, giving the engineers (Lieutenant George
Gabe’s 2nd Platoon) extra breathing room. Shortly
thereafter, a 250-yard minefield is cleared.
In the meantime, Companies D and F grind forward
and advance about one mile under continual fire, most
of which is coming from Hill 146, another feature in
the zone of the 32nd Regiment to the right of the high-
way. Unable to await the arrival of the Army regiment,
Colonel Sutter continues the advance. Company D
spins into the Army zone and charges up the western
spur of Hill 146. All the while, VMF-214 planes bom-
bard the summit, in synchronization with the 11th
Marines, which streams shells across the entire 2nd Bat-
talion front. While Company D is climbing to the sum-
mit, Company F captures a hill to the left.
Meanwhile, the engineers are concluding the
minefield-clearing operation. By 1300, the tanks roar
forward to rejoin the ground Marines. The armor is off
and running, but just as it nears the ground troops, an-
other road blockage bars passage. Quickly, a bulldozer
tank races to the obstacle and begins to clear the high-
way, but disaster strikes again, as the Communists had
placed mines under the debris. The tank hits a mine
and is set afire.
Again, the engineers speed to the front and begin
clearing yet another minefield, which extends about
75 yards. All the while, the ground Marines are driv-
ing forward, securing the terrain as they advance.
By 1730, enemy resistance along the highway in the
2nd Battalion sector is reduced. The Marines capture
many discarded weapons and one mine-laden truck.
The day-long advance gains the 2nd Battalion about
4,800 yards by 1900. Colonel Sutter then orders the
battalion to establish a night perimeter. The Commu-
nists lose 350 casualties to the 2nd Battalion during
the day and an additional five are captured. The
Marines (2nd Battalion) sustains four killed and eight-
een wounded.
In the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines sector, the attack also
commences at 1030. Companies H and I, lacking tank
support, drive forward on the left of the highway to se-
cure the ridge network, which stretches several miles
before culminating at the front of Hill 118. The battal-
ion’s principal objective is Lookout Hill, which will
376
place the 3rd Battalion about 300 yards behind the 5th
Marines’ positions on Hill 118.
The attacking companies, led by Major Joseph
Trompeter (Battalion S-3), burst through the enemy
resistance, and they sweep the sheer ridges clean. The
Communists’ resistance is moderate, yet tenacious. At
day’s end, Lookout Hill falls to the 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines. The action costs the 3rd Battalion two killed
and fifteen wounded. Companies H and I peer west
from the prize and easily see Yongdungp’o on the op-
posite side of the Kalchon River.
In the meantime, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, sub-
sequent to relief, advances from below Sosa (right flank)
to relieve the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, on Hills 80,
85 and 118. Trucks transport the troops from Sosa to
Wonjong-ni, but from there, the Marines debark and
finish the journey moving by foot along a crude path.
Company A, commanded by Captain Robert Barrow,
sets a heavy pace to ensure reaching the summit of Hill
118 before nightfall.
It arrives as scheduled and relieves Company B, 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines there. But at dusk, Companies
B and C (1st Marines) are still en route, prompting
Colonel Hawkins to change his plans. Hawkins confers
momentarily with Colonel Murray (CO 5th Marines),
then he directs Company C to join Company A on Hill
118. Hawkins then orders Company B to establish po-
sitions on a southern extension of Hill 118. The relief
force is unable to complete the mission before dark,
causing complications at Hills 80 and 85. The 5th
Marines are compelled to pull out before the arrival of
the 1st Marine contingents (at 2100), due to instruc-
tions to be at the Han at a specified time to make the
crossing. The remainder of the 1st Marines arrives in the
vicinity and halts at Kal-ch’on Creek, slightly west of
the town, but Hills 80 and 85 are unoccupied.
In other activity, in accordance with the imminent
plan to cross the Han, the 1st Amphibious Tractor Bat-
talion is ordered to discontinue its support of the 1st
Marines. Its LVTs return to Kimpo. In conjunction,
the 1st Shore Party Battalion reverts to Division con-
trol and moves to the area near Oeoso.
In the meantime, the North Koreans are planning
to regain Hills 80, 85 and 118, which they had lost to
the 5th Marines, but they are unaware that the Marines
have abandoned Hills 80 and 85. The North Koreans
are also planning another attack against the 1st Marines
in synchronization with the planned counterattacks
against the 5th Marines’ positions.
Also, the leading elements of the N.K. 25th Brigade
begin arriving in Seoul. The brigade, commanded by
Major General Wol Ki Chan, has many experienced
officers who have previously served with Chinese Com-
munist forces.
In the Eighth Army area, by today, North Korean
High Command issues orders to its primary forces in
South Korea to initiate withdrawal. Many of the units
to the south had no knowledge of the Inchon Invasion
until several days after the operation.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, General
 377
Gay initiates his envelopment tactics to surround the
enemy. During the day, Gay orders the 1st Battalion,
7th Cavalry, to depart its divisional right positions and
redeploy to the divisional left to spearhead the drive to
Tabu-dong.
In the meantime, with continual air support, the at-
tached 5th RCT initiates its attack to dislodge and de-
stroy the contingents of the N.K. 3rd Division that are
defending Hill 268 and the surrounding area along the
southern approaches to Waegwan. While the attack is
in progress, the 5th Cavalry and units of the 7th Cav-
alry engage in severe fighting east of Waegwan, along
the right flank of the 5th RCT, in support of the RCTs
advance.
The enemy on Hills 253 and 300 has ostensibly de-
cided to fight to the last man. Nonetheless, both hills
fall to the 5th Cavalry. The 1st Battalion, 5th Cavalry,
reduces the resistance on Hill 300 and secures the sum-
mit subsequent to a bloody fight. The U.S. sustains
179 casualties, including 28 men killed and four troops
missing. In addition, the attached South Koreans sus-
tain 28 casualties. A total of 205 enemy dead are
counted on Hill 300.
About one mile north of Hills 253 and 300, the
North Koreans refuse to capitulate on Hill 371, and
they turn back all attempts by the 5th Cavalry to seize
it. The hill is finally taken when the enemy retreats
from the area. The Waegwan pocket is reoccupied and
the 5th Cavalry discovers the conspicuous presence of
27 T-34 tanks and one U.S. M-4, which had been
modified by the North Koreans. The armor includes
destroyed and captured vehicles.
Meanwhile, the 5th Regimental Combat Team drives
from the south, intent on popping the cork at the left
flank of the N.K. II Corps and then flooding into
Waegwan. The advance shatters the defenses of the
N.K. 3rd Division in the vicinity of Waegwan. The
success of the 5th and 7th Cavalries on the flank speeds
the process. Aerial observers spot about 1,500 enemy
troops, all slightly north of Waegwan and in the mid-
dle of a hurried retreat across the Naktong.
Later, the highways leading from the town are each
saturated with enemy contingents. Nonetheless, bitter
combat ensues throughout the day as the Americans
barrel forward, bolstered by roaming aircraft. Dogged
persistence pays off. Most of Hill 268 falls to the com-
bat team. Before dusk, the 3rd Battalion is on the hill,
and the 2nd Battalion seizes Hill 121, about one mile
south of Waegwan.
In the meantime, the 1st Battalion swings northwest
at Hill 268 and attacks other enemy targets. It will
hook up with the other battalions at Waegwan on the
following day.
In other activity, at 1800, the 5th Regimental Com-
bat Team and the 6th Medium Tank Battalion are
placed under the operational control of the 24th Divi-
sion.
In the 24th Division sector, subsequent to delays, the
Division is preparing to push elements across the Nak-
tong, near the Hasan-dong ferry site. Once the spear-
September 19, 1950
heading 21st Regiment reaches the west bank, it is to
drive north to a spot opposite Waegwan, and from there
it is to pivot and secure the primary road leading to
Kumch’on. Artillery has twice bombarded the oppos-
ing bank during the night to loosen resistance.
At 0530, the 21st Regiment pushes off in assault
boats under a dense fog. The first contingents hit the
opposite bank and start to advance, but enemy fire
commences immediately. The troops are snagged by a
ferocious cross-fire. Within minutes, both banks come
under enemy fire, including the additional sting of ar-
tillery and mortars. The 1st Battalion sustains many
casualties.
By 0730, air support arrives to relieve some pressure.
The planes bomb and strafe Hill 174, where much of
the enemy fire is originating. Once on the west bank,
the 1st Battalion regroups. It has sustained 120 casu-
alties during the perilous crossing. Obstinate Hill 174
falls by 1200. Subsequent to the seizure of the hill, the
3rd Battalion crosses to the west bank of the river,
moves north and secures another hill in its path. The
trailing 2nd Battalion delays its crossing until the eve-
ning and completes the trek by the following morning.
In the meantime, other units are crossing about two
miles farther south. The 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment,
crosses at 1600 against heavy opposition. Prior to de-
parting the east bank, enemy shelling inflicts about fifty
casualties. The enemy fire diminishes once the crossing
is complete. Later, during the night, the 24th Recon-
naissance Company crosses in the same area as the 19th
Regiment. Both units are to secure the highway lead-
ing from Songju, an enemy-held town about six miles
west of the Naktong. The 3rd Combat Engineer Bat-
talion also sustains casualties while it assists the cross-
ing. Ten troops are killed and 37 are wounded. In ad-
dition, five attached Koreans are killed, ten Koreans are
wounded and five others are missing in action.
In the 2nd Division sector, the 9th Infantry continues
its quest to vanquish the stubborn enemy resistance on
Hill 201. Reinforcements, including tanks, arrive to
bolster the assault. Upon their arrival, the tanks heave
a mighty blow against the hill. In an unusual tactic,
Sergeant George E. Vonton leads one platoon of tanks
in a convincing charge to the summit. Vonton’s regi-
mental tanks play a strategic part in the reduction of the
resolute resistance. With the seizure of Hill 201, the
path is open for the 2nd Division to bridge the Nak-
tong.
In the 23rd Regiment sector, the 1st Battalion is dis-
patched to bolster the 9th Regiment’s assault against
Hill 201, while the 2nd Battalion races across the 9th
Regiment’s sector and assaults Hill 174. Meanwhile,
the 2nd Battalion, 38th Regiment, is to spearhead the
drive to dismember the enemy units in its sector.
In the 38th Regiment zone, the 3rd Battalion crosses
the Naktong to defend the bridgehead, while the 2nd
Battalion is on the attack. Some artillery, tanks and
mortars arrive on the west bank with the 3rd Battal-
ion. In the meantime, due to the heavy damage inflicted
upon the two spans of the Changnyong–Ch’ogye
September 20, 1950
bridge, the 2nd Engineer Combat Bn. begins to fabri-
cate a temporary bridge. The floating bridge will expe-
dite the crossing of additional armor and other vehi-
cles.
In the 25th Division sector, Battle Mountain is aban-
doned by the enemy prior to dawn. During the morn-
ing, the 1st Battalion, 24th Regiment, occupies the
summit. In the meantime, the 35th Regiment drives
forward encountering nominal resistance, but its 1st
Battalion inadvertently passes some enemy troops in
the heights outside of Chungam-ni. From their con-
cealed positions, the enemy is able to fire at the battal-
ion from the rear. Nonetheless, Chungam-ni falls on
the following day.
Also, Company C, 1st Battalion, 35th Regiment, is
engaged heavily with the enemy near Saga during an as-
sault to seize a ragged ridge. A frontal attack hits stiff
resistance and fails, prompting the contingent to strike
simultaneously from the front and the flank during the
second assault. One platoon, led by Sergeant William
B. Jecelin, braves the fire and drives across a rice field
and crosses rocky ground under a hail of fire to pound
the front and divert attention from the flanks.
The attack stalls at the bottom of the slope, but
Jecelin bolts to his feet and with fixed bayonet, charges.
His men follow suit and after ascending to the
crest, the bayonets and rifle butts carry the summit.
Nonetheless, the enemy pours fire upon them from
a self-propelled gun. Jecelin fearlessly ignores the
gun and inspires his men to make another lunge.
As the attack drives forward, an enemy grenade is
thrown in the midst of some of the troops. Jecelin
spots it and blankets it with his body to save the
others. The blast kills him, but it instills more determi-
nation in the remainder of his platoon. They charge
and eliminate all of the enemy contingent. Sergeant
William Jecelin is awarded the Medal of Honor for
his extraordinary leadership and heroism in the face of
the enemy.
In other activity, the hard-hit task force, commanded
by Major Woolfolk, is disbanded. The task force is
composed of about battalion strength, and it includes
Headquarters, 3rd Bn., 35th Regiment; I Company,
35th Regiment; Company A, 27th Regiment; and
Company B and one platoon from Company C, 65th
Combat Engineer Bn. The task force receives support
from the 25th Reconnaissance Company and the Heavy
Weapons Company, 24th Regiment.
In the ROK II Corps area, S.K. 1st Division sector,
contingents advance through the mountain terrain
north of Taegu and get to the rear of the enemy lines,
prompting the N.K. 1st and 13th Divisions to begin
their withdrawal.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion sector, patrols advance to the edge of Pohang-dong
by dusk.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Force’s Combat
Cargo Command initiates an airlift to Kimpo Airfield
near Seoul. The supplies and equipment are transported
aboard 32 C-54s.
378
September 20 Inchon-Seoul vicinity: The 7th
Marines arrive off Inchon, bringing the 1st Marine Di-
vision to a strength of three regiments. At this time,
49,568 troops have come ashore at Inchon. In addi-
tion, 5,356 vehicles and 22,222 tons of equipment and
supplies have also been unloaded.
Kimpo Airfield is utilized to gain Seoul. Corsairs fly
the first sorties from Kimpo. At 0735, planes of
VMF(N)-542 execute the first combat mission from
Kimpo by destroying two enemy locomotives. The four
participating F7F-3Ns stream 3,000 rounds of 20-mm
ammo toward the enemy during the attack. Squadrons
VMF-212 and 312 also fly combat missions today.
The planes that arrived at Kimpo on the previous
day are compelled to use the gas remaining in their
tanks, as there are no refueling operations yet estab-
lished. The Marines are also unable to mechanically
load the armaments; the bombs are loaded manually.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, 5th Marines zone,,
there has been much discussion between General Craig,
Colonel Murray and staff officers concerning the cross-
ing of the Han River. General Craig notes: “The eyes
of the world were upon us. It would have looked bad
for the Marines, of all people, to reach a river and not
be able to cross.”
During the early morning hours it had been decided
that the 3rd Battalion would cross. The attack across the
Han River begins at 0645. A fifteen-minute artillery
barrage, commenced by the 1st and 4th Battalions,
11th Marines, against Hill 125, precedes the attack,
but many of the shells miss the mark, giving the ground
Marines no advantage.
The 5th Marines is bolstered by elements of the 1st
Tank Battalion, the Division Reconnaissance Company
and elements of the 56th Amphibian Tractor Bn., USA.
The attack is further augmented by the 1st Engineer
Bn., 1st Shore Party Bn., 1st Amphibious Tractor Bn.
and the 11th Marines, which provides artillery fire.
Company I, 3rd Battalion, spearheads the 5th Marines’
crossing, but it comes under heavy fire from Hill 125.
Thanks to the armor plating, none of the ground
Marines are hit, despite the first wave of amtracs sus-
taining about 200 hits. Four crewmen are wounded.
Company I reaches the north bank at 0650, followed
by Companies G and H.
The enemy continues pouring fire into Company I as
it debarks; however, the platoon leaders maintain dis-
cipline as they organize for the attack against Hill 125
(Objective Able). Lieutenant Stanley Carpenter deploys
his platoon of amtracs to provide some cover fire for the
2nd and 3rd Platoons, which are launching attacks from
the left and right respectively. Soon after, the attacking
Marines receive some additional help when four Corsairs
(VMF-214) arrive and blast the hill. Meanwhile, the
attacking platoons continue to come under heavy fire
as they grind forward. Lieutenant Peterson’s 2nd Pla-
toon is carried several hundred yards inland by LVTs,
while Lieutenant William Sparks’ 3rd Platoon is lung-
ing forward along the key spur on the right. The Com-
munists relentlessly pour fire upon the attackers.
 379 September 20, 1950

Top: A wounded Marine (during the drive to Seoul) is carried back for medical aid by other Marines.
Bottom: South Korean civilians return to their destroyed houses on the fringes of Seoul.
September 20, 1950 380
September 20, 1950 382

A U.S. tank crew seems to be enjoying the sight of infantry using a cow as a pack animal as they move
through Waegwan. The tank with the words “Wild Woody” painted on the side is a Sherman M4A3.

Another contingent of amtracs, commanded by Cap-
tain Joseph Irick, plows eastward to gain supporting po-
sitions. From there, Irick’s amtracs stream shells into the
enemy positions. Machine gun and small arms fire in-
flicts severe casualties. Menacing fire wipes out nearly an
entire mortar section, and the Marines have advanced
only about halfway up the hill. Lieutenant Sparks (3rd
Platoon) becomes wounded and the platoon is taken over
by Lieutenant Williamson, but it requires reorganization.
Meanwhile, Lieutenant Peterson’s 2nd Platoon con-
tinues to gnaw forward on the left, but his communi-
cations temporarily cease. Soon after, Peterson is spot-
ted on the left. Captain McMullen orders the 1st
Platoon (reserve) under Lieutenant Roy Krieger to rush
forward and pass through the 3rd Platoon to give it
time to pull back and reorganize. Meanwhile, head-
quarters troops and engineers arrive to inflate the 3rd
Platoon. McMullen orders the attack to gain the
 383 September 20, 1950

Top: Part of the 187th Airborne Regiment, which is dropped near Sukch’on on 20 September. In addi-
tion to 2,800 troops, the planes drop artillery pieces. Bottom: An artillery piece (105 howitzer) awaits
loading on a plane from which it will be dropped north of Pyongyang along with paratroopers on 20
September.
September 20, 1950
plateau. The enemy is struck from three sides and the
plateau falls. However, casualties force another regroup-
ing before the final thrust to the crest. Company I reini-
tiates the attack. Despite being wounded, Captain Mc-
Mullen leads the way. The 1st and 3rd Platoons bolt
toward the crest.
In the meantime, more Corsairs arrive. Lieutenant
Peterson (2nd Platoon) reports from his positions on
the left that Communist troops are fleeing from the
crest and racing toward the low ground to the north of
the hill. The Corsairs have detected the enemy in flight,
and the pilots take measures to eliminate them. Com-
pany I gains the crest of Hill 125 by 0940. From the
heights, the Marines begin picking off many of the
Communists as they try to rid themselves of their uni-
forms to don civilian clothing.
The remainder of the 3rd Battalion meets little op-
position during the crossing. Company H captures Hill
95 (Objective Charlie) and Company G seizes Hill 51
(Objective Baker), giving the 3rd Battalion possession
of all its objectives by 0940.
By 0830, the Seoul–Kaesong Railroad is severed and
a strategic road at the village of Nung-dong is cut. The
3rd Battalion sustains a total of 43 casualties during the
operation, and most have been suffered by Company
I. In contrast, the Communists lose about 200 troops.
Also, the Marines receive some bonuses. The two pre-
viously stranded LVTs are extricated from the mud and
Private Ledet, one of the swimmers believed killed on
the previous night, is discovered alive. Ledet had been
manning an advance outpost and he was inadvertently
left behind when the swimmers returned to the south
bank of the Han. He maintained his discipline and
avoided capture, while being able to gather much intel-
ligence on the enemy. The battalion retains its LVTs
and continues the attack by curving southeast to fol-
low the tracks into Seoul.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, fords
the Han at 1000. It remains aboard the LVTs and moves
through the 3rd Battalion to continue the attack. By
1445, the 2nd Battalion gains control of Objectives Dog
and Easy, the heights on both sides of the Kaesong–
Seoul Railroad, several miles east of Haengju. Com-
pany D digs in on Objective Easy, while Company E de-
ploys on Objective Dog. Company F is ordered to de-
ploy in the hole separating Companies D and E. In
conjunction, Army troops attached to the amtracs de-
tect enemy presence on Objective Easy. They ring out
several warning shots and soon after, about thirty
enemy troops emerge from a cave and surrender.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, is or-
dered to cross the Han at 1330 and deploy near Hill
95 to await orders to attack toward Seoul. A contingent
will be dispatched to Hill 125 to secure the landing area
for the night. The 3rd Battalion, subsequent to seizing
its objectives during the morning, moves to positions
slightly north of Hill 95. The 5th Marines and twelve
supporting tanks (Company A, 1st Tank Battalion) are
on the north bank of the Han by dusk. The 2nd Pla-
toon crosses at 1410, the 1st Platoon at 1600 and
384
the 3rd Platoon of tanks makes it across the river dur-
ing the latter part of the afternoon.
In related activity, Colonel Partridge’s engineers, as
promised, deliver a completed six-float M4A2 raft
within four hours. It becomes operational across the
Han within six hours of the first crossing of the ground
Marines. The crossing site is known as Baker ferry; it
is manned by Company B, 1st Shore Party Battalion.
Teams 1 and 2 remain on the south bank and Team 3
deploys on the north bank. The 2nd Battalion, S.K.
Marines, crosses with the Americans, but their DUKWs
are unable to navigate easily. They become stuck near
the south bank. Eventually, the Korean Marines are
transferred to LVTs. Company A, 56th Amphibian
Tractor Battalion, USA, and the S.K. Marines are di-
rected to guard the rear of the 5th Marines.
In the 1st Marines sector, the enemy launches several
simultaneous predawn attacks to regain the hills lost
to 5th Marines. Some North Korean assault troops de-
part Yongdungpo and move across the rice paddies to
Kal-ch’on Creek (which flows north and swings around
the western tip of the city into the Han) while one bat-
talion exits the town and drives down the road. The
enemy fords the creek and takes Hills 80 and 85 with-
out incident, as the 5th Marines had evacuated both
hills at 2100 (under orders to advance to the Han) on
the previous night.
In conjunction, 1st Marines has not yet occupied
them. Part of the enemy force advances to Hill 118,
but here the story is different, as Companies A and C
bolstered by planes (VMF-323), raise a steadfast de-
fense of the summit and repel the attacks. Now the 1st
Marines must retake Hills 80 and 85.
Meanwhile, the other enemy force, spearheaded by
five tanks, advances down the Inchon Highway toward
the positions of the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines. At
about 0400, the faraway sounds of armor are detected
by Company F, which is posted to the front in the
heights near Company D. The two companies are de-
ployed parallel to the Inchon Road and south of it. The
distant clamor of the armor becomes more pronounced
as the enemy column closes blindly toward the Marines’
positions. By 0430, the clanking armor is through the
positions of Companies D and F, encroaching Com-
pany E.
The lead vehicle is an ammunition truck which has
found itself well in advance of the tanks. Private Oliver
O’Neil, a machine gunner of Company E, stands to
give challenge and the response is deadly, as enemy fire
quickly slays O’Neil. At this point, the pitch darkness
is transformed into bright illumination. Two T-34
tanks pull up short of the Marines’ positions and begin
to fire blindly. Their fire is met ten-fold. Companies D
and F, entrenched in the heights, pour sheets of fire
into the enemy.
A raging iron-storm erupts as grenades, machine
guns, mortars and other small arms begin to pummel
the column in cadence with the weapons of Company
E, which is streaming more fire upon the North Kore-
ans. The tanks jostle back and forth attempting to
 385
evade damage and escape, but the column is destined
for destruction. The 11th Marines’ artillery keeps the
rear escape route closed, trapping the enemy battalion.
In the meantime, the ammunition truck sustains a gar-
gantuan hit and it explodes violently. The tanks con-
tinue to come under assault, and then one of the
Marines, PFC Gonegan, takes it upon himself to move
in closer. Gonegan destroys the lead T-34, then he sin-
glehandedly moves against the second tank and destroys
it. Gonegan takes aim on a third tank, which is at-
tempting to reverse and escape, but before he can fire
his 3.5 rocket, enemy fire slays him.
The incessant hammering causes the enemy infantry
to break for safety. They flee up the slopes; however, the
guns of Companies D and F shred the ranks, barring
escape.
At dawn, when the battlefield becomes visible, the
Marines peer to the front and see about 300 North Ko-
reans, scattered along the road, on the slopes and in the
ditches, but they are all deceased. Marine losses for the
engagement are few, but the exact figures for the bat-
tle are unavailable. However, the 2nd Battalion’s casu-
alties for the entire day are (including the action sub-
sequent to the enemy counterattack) four killed and 32
wounded. After vanquishing the enemy and terminat-
ing the counterattack, the 2nd Battalion, operating on
the regimental right, drives along the Inchon–Seoul
Highway.
At 0645, the battalion begins smashing through spo-
radic opposition and it reaches the bridge crossing at the
western branch of the Kalchon River by 1230, at a
point about 2,000 yards from the 2nd span, which
crosses the eastern branch of the Kalchon into Yong-
dungp’o. At that time, the 2nd Battalion commander,
Colonel Allan Sutter, dispatches engineers to inspect
the span. The engineers report that the damaged con-
crete bridge can bear the traffic of the tanks.
Colonel Sutter also takes serious note of some high
ground to the right that lies in the zone of the 32nd
Regiment and remains loaded with enemy activity. Sut-
ter requests authorization from the commanding offi-
cer of the 2nd Battalion, 32nd Regiment (Lt. Colonel
Charles Mount), to bombard the ridge to eliminate it
as a threat during the attack of the following day. Col-
onel Mount gives his permission to plaster the ridge at
1300; however, by the time word travels through the 7th
Division to X Corps and then to the 1st Marine Divi-
sion, it is past 2000 when the 11th Marines receive the
order to fire the ridge. The barrage occurs, but darkness
prevents observation of the damage inflicted on the
enemy.
Also in the 1st Marines sector, preparations are being
outlined to attack Yongdungp’o on the following day,
but the first priority is to retake Hills 80 and 85; Col-
onel Puller designates the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines,
as the attacking unit. In conjunction, the 2nd Battal-
ion is to drive to the two bridges that cross the Kalchon
on the outskirts of Yongdungp’o. The 3rd Battalion is
ordered to remain on Lookout Hill. No casualties are
sustained by the 3rd Battalion during the entire day.
September 20, 1950
Within fifteen minutes after the heights are secured,
General Almond arrives to confer with Colonel Puller.
During the meeting, Almond authorizes the 1st
Marines to bombard Yongdungp’o. The Marines gladly
oblige the general’s order. Aircraft and artillery units
initiate a day-long barrage against Yongdungp’o. Also,
while the 1st Marines advance, the Army’s 32nd Reg-
iment is to move forward to cover the Marines’ right
flank. The 32nd is to attack across a six-mile front to
capture Tongdok Mountain, south of the main supply
route and about two miles from Yongdungp’o.
Shortly after dawn, Colonel Hawkins, commanding
officer, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, establishes his out-
post on the crest of Hill 118. His arrival occurs just as
Companies A and C are confidently throwing back an
attack that has emerged from the target hills. Company
C, commanded by Captain Robert Wray, is ordered to
seize both hills (80 and 85). It will be bolstered by the
guns of Major William Bates’ Weapons Company (1st
Bn., 1st Marines). Company B, 1st Battalion, com-
manded by Captain Richard Bland, will seize Hill 55
and several villages on the bank of the Han River while
Company C is engaged at Hills 80 and 85.
The 2nd Platoon, Company C, led by Lieutenant
John Guild, takes the point and moves toward a village
that blocks the path to the hills, but after gaining about
500 yards, it is slowed by heavy enemy fire. Captain
Wray immediately dispatches the remainder of Com-
pany C to augment the assault. The reinforcements
split into two groups, move around the flanks of the
stalled 2nd Platoon, and then ram through the oppo-
sition. Fierce firefights develop, but the Marines prevail
and the enemy survivors flee hurriedly toward Hill 80.
Subsequent to extricating the 1st Platoon, Company
C eases into the small village while simultaneously gain-
ing control of the knoll. Still, some obstinate enemy
troops remain in the area. A patrol is dispatched to
eliminate the threat.
During the latter part of the afternoon, Company
C, supported by Weapons and Able Companies, re-
sumes the attack to seize Hill 80. The 1st Platoon, led
by Lieutenant William Craven, and the 3rd Platoon,
commanded by Lieutenant Henry Commiskey, advance
on the left and right respectively, executing a success-
ful double envelopment that seizes Hill 80 effortlessly.
The fall of Hill 80 occurs slightly before dusk, leaving
little time to capture the next objective easily.
Captain Robert Wray immediately takes steps to
seize Hill 85 by ordering yet another double envelop-
ment. Meanwhile, the enemy, expecting another en-
velopment attack, reforms its lines by peeling back both
flanks to prevent infiltration through the rear or sides.
With support fire from the 1st Platoon and Company
C’s machine guns, the 2nd Platoon, led by Lieutenant
Guild, advances from the left and drives forward
through a sheet of fire, reaching the western slope of Hill
85. Simultaneously, on the right, the 3rd Platoon, led
by Lieutenant Commiskey, drills directly toward the
crest of Hill 85. The Communists raise defiant oppo-
sition and pound both attacking platoons. Heroism
September 20, 1950
abounds as the Marines bolt toward the crest through
a maze of enemy fire. Red machine guns cut down
Lieutenant Guild, inflicting a mortal blow as he nears
the summit, but he insists that the fight continue.
Meanwhile, Lieutenant Commiskey is on the point.
He leaps way out to the front of his platoon and hits the
crest first. Armed only with his pistol, Commiskey
dives into a machine gun nest and kills four of the five
defenders. He holds the fifth man down until the pla-
toon catches up, and then he takes out the last defender
in the nest. Singlehandedly, Commiskey then races for-
ward and assaults another nest, killing two more of the
enemy. Finally, Commiskey leads the platoon to the
rear of the hill and drives the remaining enemy from the
slope. Lieutenant Henry Commiskey receives the
Medal of Honor for his courage in the face of the
enemy.
Back with the 2nd Platoon, Lieutenant Guild’s
wound has not deterred the effort; his Marines con-
tinue the charge and reach the summit, just after the 3rd
Platoon. By this time, the Communists are sprinting
down the eastern slopes and fleeing toward the Kalchon
River. Lieutenant Guild, despite the severity of his
wounds, continues to inspire his troops. Captain Wray
advances to Guild, who is still on his feet. Wray calls for
a corpsman to aid Guild, but Guild tells Captain Wray
that another wounded Marine “needs one more than I
do.” Soon after, Lt. Guild succumbs.
During the morning the Marines sustain some other
casualties, aside from those incurred in the attacks to re-
gain the targeted hills. When the 5th Marines had
seized the hill on the previous day, no efforts were made
to clear the enemy from the terrain that lies between the
Kimpo Highway and the Han River. Now those enemy
troops execute some nasty ambushes.
A small contingent of the 1st Signal Battalion rolls
along the highway, stringing wire in the 1st Marines
zone. As it approaches the Kalchon bridge, the Com-
munists spring an ambush and kill or capture the
Marines. The Marines on Hill 118 observe the grizzly
incident, but they are unable to give aid. Soon after,
and still under the eyes of the 1st Battalion on Hill 118,
another unsuspecting Marine vehicle, carrying four
men, approaches the ambush site. Again in agony, the
Marines on Hill 118 observe the engineers’ truck head-
ing into danger. But their positions are about 1,000
yards away, leaving few options. Captain Barrow, com-
manding officer, Company A, 1st Battalion, 1st
Marines, orders his troops to fire in front of the mov-
ing vehicle, hoping to force it to turn around, but the
effort fails.
The engineers (Company A) keep advancing and run
into a wall of enemy fire, forcing them to abandon the
vehicle and break for safety. Three of the Marines make
it safely to a rice paddy, but the fourth, PFC Clayton
Edwards, wounded and lacking ammunition, is cap-
tured. One of the Communists then moves closer and
bayonets Edwards in the shoulder. The story does have
a happy ending for the Americans, as PFC Edwards
outwits his captors and escapes from captivity while he
386
is being transported aboard a POW train heading
north.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, the 31st Regiment
arrives at Inchon. It deploys south of the 32nd Regi-
ment. The 32nd Regiment, commanded by Colonel
Charles Beauchamp, launches an attack to seize
Anyang-ni and sever the Seoul–Suwon Highway. The
column, spearheaded by tanks of Company A, 73rd
Tank Battalion, encounters difficulty as it advances
along a small dirt road heading toward the objectives.
Three of the forward tanks become damaged when they
strike mines and another mine blows up Colonel
Beauchamp’s jeep, killing the driver and wounding the
radio operator. Beauchamp had dismounted the vehi-
cle just before the explosion and he is spared injury.
Meanwhile, the road is blocked, hindering the oper-
ation. Nonetheless, the regiment continues the attack.
Engineers extract about 150 mines from the road. By
day’s end, the 32nd Regiment seizes T’ongdok Moun-
tain and secures part of Copper Mine Hill. The ad-
vance costs the 32nd Regiment seven killed and 36
wounded. By dusk, it is deployed to the right of the
Marines.
Eighth Army area, I Corps, in the 1st Cavalry sector, the
5th RCT, which reverted back to the 24th Division on
the previous day, maintains its attack to reduce the
enemy in its target zone. The 1st and 2nd Battalions en-
gage the enemy west of Hill 268, making progress
against tough opposition. The North Koreans lose
about 300 troops during these firefights.
Meanwhile, on Hill 268, the 3rd Battalion presses
forward against the enemy’s fortified bunkers. Slightly
before noon, several contingents of F-51s strike the
enemy, delivering napalm and rockets, while simulta-
neously ringing the bunkers with machine gun fire.
The sudden dose of fire breaks the jam. The 3rd Bat-
talion overruns the log-layered bunkers and secures Hill
268. About 250 enemy troops are killed on the hill.
By about 1415, the 2nd Battalion drives into Waeg-
wan, hooking up with the 1st Battalion there at about
1430. The 2nd Battalion pushes through the town and
startles some enemy troops as they are setting up a
minefield. The troops are quickly eradicated and the
battalion resumes its advance, exiting the opposite end
of the town by 1530. Soon after, the 2nd Battalion
seizes Hill 303, north of Waegwan, the final objective
of the 5th RCT.
In the meantime, the 1st Battalion resumes its ad-
vance and seizes Hill 300, which is slightly northeast of
Hill 303. At about 1945, the 1st Battalion begins to
dart across the Naktong at a point near the Waegwan
railroad bridge, followed soon after by the 2nd Battal-
ion. Both battalions complete the crossing by midnight.
The 5th RCT sustains severe casualties today: eight-
een men are killed, 111 troops are wounded and three
men are reported missing.
In the 7th Cavalry sector, General Gay orders the 3rd
Battalion to swing from divisional right to the left.
From there it will trail the 1st Battalion toward Tabu-
dong. The 1st Battalion, bolstered by tanks from Com-
 387
pany C, 70th Tank Battalion, jumps off and passes Hill
300 en route to Waegwan.
At about 0900, the 1st Battalion is two miles shy of
Waegwan. It departs the primary road and begins mov-
ing along a primitive secondary road to reach the
Waegwan-Tabu-dong Road several miles east of Waeg-
wan. Enemy resistance along the route is heavy. The
valley road is clamped between high mountains on both
sides, mandating a cautious advance. The column is
immediately beset by enemy fire. The tanks spearhead
the drive, but the impact is nominal. One of the tanks
hits a mine and the entire column becomes stalled, hav-
ing advanced only about two miles by the middle of
the afternoon.
At this point, General Gay becomes testy and orders
the 1st Battalion to speed ahead to Tabu-dong. The
enemy is bypassed as the battalion sprints to the Tabu-
dong Road, and then drives northeast toward the ob-
jective. It halts for the night about four miles short of
the town. Colonel Clainos becomes wounded by a
mine, but he declines evacuation.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion boards trucks
north of Taegu and then it moves west toward Waeg-
wan, but the convoy is halted short of its destination.
The regimental commanding officer, Colonel Nist,
fears that enemy artillery and mortars might ambush the
trucks, prompting him to order the troops to march
part of the way. The battalion runs behind schedule
and the troops are exhausted when they arrive at their
destination.
General Gay becomes annoyed at the tardiness of
the 3rd Battalion, and in addition, there are some other
problems. Gay replaces the 7th Cavalry commander
with Lt. Colonel William A. Harris, who had been
commanding officer of the 77th FABn. At about mid-
night (20th-21st) Colonel Harris directs his battalion
commanders to seize Tabu-dong on the 22nd. He fur-
ther orders that the first contingent to reach the town
is to swing south and establish contact with the 8th
Cavalry. Also, Colonel Harris appoints Lt. Colonel
James Webel (S-3 3rd Bn., 7th Cavalry) as regimental
S-3 to replace Witherspoon (21st).
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, re-
lieves the British 27th Brigade in place, east of the Nak-
tong. The British move north and cross the river in the
zone of the 19th Regiment, 24th Division, at about
noon. Enemy fire harasses the British as they proceed
in single file, marching across a makeshift footbridge.
The British sustain some casualties and the enemy gun
remains undetected, despite aerial observation.
In the 24th Division area, all three regiments have
crossed the Naktong, permitting General Church to
prepare to attack west along the Taegu–Kumch’on–Tae-
jon–Seoul Road. However, the division still has oper-
ation problems and must get the equipment across the
river to join the infantry regiments. The bridges that
span the Naktong at Waegwan were destroyed during
August by the 1st Cavalry Division. Engineers begin a
non-stop effort to construct a pontoon bridge across
the river and complete it within thirty-six hours.
September 20, 1950
In other activity, the British 27th Infantry Brigade
is attached to the 24th Division by the I Corps. It will
participate in the attack.
In the 19th Regiment sector, the high ground west of
the river by the Songju road is held by the regiment.
The 24th Reconnaissance Company passes through the
perimeter of the 19th Regiment and drives west along
the Songju Road, probing deeply. In conjunction, the
British Brigade will also attack along this route. The
19th Regiment will support the attack of the 21st Reg-
iment.
In the 21st Regiment sector, the 1st Battalion drives
north to Hill 170, west of the river and opposite Waeg-
wan, while the 3rd Battalion advances about one mile
farther north and occupies the hill there.
In the 2nd Division sector, 23rd Regiment zone, the 3rd
Battalion, 23rd Regiment, crosses the Naktong at the
Sangp’o ferry site, slightly south of where the Sinban
River flows eastward into the Naktong. The precision
of the night crossing by the assault boats literally
catches the enemy napping. Company L snares a sleep-
ing enemy lieutenant colonel and his staff. The regi-
ment receives some additional fortuitous opportuni-
ties. Among the captured documents is a map that
pinpoints the present positions of the N.K. 2nd, 4th
and 9th Divisions, which are in the vicinity of Sinban-
ni.
The 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, subsequent to
the crossing, advances and eliminates the resistance on
Hill 227 by noon. This seizure assures command of
the strategic high ground that controls the crossing site
on the west side of the river. Later, during the after-
noon, the 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment, advances to-
ward the Naktong to cross it and seize Hill 207, about
one mile above the Sangp’o ferry site. However, the
lead unit unexpectedly encounters the Sinban and no
one had been aware of the river. Eventually, after a te-
dious delay, the battalion crosses in DUKWs.
During the night, another horrid rainstorm hits the
area. The 1st Battalion launches an attack to seize its
objective and discovers that the enemy has fled. In the
meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, estab-
lishes a night perimeter on Hill 227, and unbeknownst
to the troops, the North Koreans sneak to positions
just under the crest and remain undiscovered during the
inclement weather.
In the 38th Regiment zone, the regiment remains east
of the Naktong and advances along a road about six
miles north of the 23rd Regiment, encountering stiff
opposition as it moves toward Ch’ogye and Hyopch’on.
In the 25th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 35th Reg-
iment, secures Chungam-ni. In the meantime, the 2nd
Battalion, 35th Regiment, seizes the ridge line that
stretches northwest from Chungam-ni to the Nam
River. On the left, the 27th Regiment encounters tena-
cious opposition as it attempts to advance.
In the S.K. 3rd Division sector, Pohang-dong is
secured at 1015. One regiment continues its attack and
gains the heights north of the town. Following the
seizure of Pohang-dong, the 3rd Division, bolstered by
September 21, 1950
U.S. naval surface vessel fire and fighter planes, drives
farther north. By the 22nd, the N.K. 5th Division is in
full retreat and Hunghae is seized. In Air Force activity,
the mission to supply the troops in Korea, initiated on
the previous day by Far East Air Force (Combat Cargo
Command), enlarges the mission to push supplies into
Kimpo 24 hours a day. The task is made possible be-
cause of lighting that had been delivered on the previ-
ous day. In other activity, bombers attack several sep-
arate areas in and near Pyongyang that contain enemy
troop barracks.
September 21 Inchon-Seoul vicinity: Changes
occur within the structure of the Marine Air Wing.
VMF-214, VMF-323 and VMF(N)-513 are trans-
ferred from MAG-33 to MAG-12. VMF(N)-513 re-
mains domiciled at Itazuke Air Base, Japan, and the
other two units continue operating off the carriers USS
Sicily and Badoeng Strait. Other than the transfer to
MAG-12, the mission remains the same, to support
the ground troops, while the other squadrons complete
their transfer from Japan to Kimpo. Also, VMF-212,
VMF-312 and VMF(N)-542 are transferred from
MAG-12 to MAG-33.
In the X Corps area, General Almond, commanding
officer X Corps, establishes his command post at In-
chon; he assumes control of all forces ashore at 1700.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the 7th Marines (3rd
rifle regiment) arrives. The regiment, commanded by
Colonel Litzenberg, begins debarking at Inchon; it will
388
move up to the Han River. The 3rd Battalion, 11th
Marines, commanded by Major Francis Parry, also ar-
rives; it is attached to the 7th Marines. Colonel Litzen-
berg arrives at General O.P. Smith’s headquarters and
inquires about which unit to debark first. Smith replies:
“An infantry battalion.” Litzenberg then asks: “And
what next?” General Smith responds: “Another infantry
battalion.”
In the 5th Marines sector, the enemy mounts a morn-
ing counterattack. The company-size contingent is re-
pelled prior to the Marines’ reinitiating the attack along
the tracks and highway toward Seoul. The 1st Battal-
ion advances between the river and the rails, while the
3rd Battalion, to the right, moves through the lines of
the 2nd Battalion and pushes forward along the railroad
tracks. The 1st Battalion seizes several small hills south
of the highway and the railroad tracks that parallel the
Han River. The prizes include Hills 96 and 68. The
Marines dig in and hold Hill 68 throughout the night.
The 1st Battalion reaches Sogang at the southern tip
of the hills, placing it within three miles of the key rail-
road station (Yongsan) in Seoul.
The 2nd Battalion remains in reserve several miles
east of Haengju along the railroad tracks near Hill 51.
Two of its members discover a giant toy. Sergeant James
Higgins and one other Marine commandeer an enemy
locomotive, and after tinkering with it, the novice
engineers get the engine running. The advancing train
slowly comes to a halt near the regimental command
post and it causes some excitement. The train’s stack
 389
bellows huge puffs of smoke that can be seen for miles.
Sergeant Higgins is emphatically instructed to get his
toy back to the rear before the enemy guns use it as a
marker to pound the area.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion drives through increas-
ing resistance and gains about five and one-half miles
to seize Hill 104 north of the tracks. South Korean
Marines are then given responsibility to hold it. Follow-
ing the fall of Hill 104, the 3rd Battalion pivots north-
east and drives toward Hill 296, situated at the western
fringe of Seoul. But the western approaches to the city
are insulated by a chain of hills that stretch along a
north-south line. By dark, the 3rd Battalion advances
to Hill 216, located about six miles east of the ferry
crossing, and Hill 125.
Also, during the night (21st-22nd) an enemy shell
strikes the command post of the 5th Marines, which is
located in a house northwest of Seoul. The unexpected
shell inflicts damage, including a severe wound to the
regimental executive officer, Lt. Colonel Lawrence
Hays. He is evacuated, but Colonel Murray, only
slightly wounded in the blast, orders the CP to be
moved to a nearby cave on the opposite slope of a hill.
In the 1st Marines sector, the attack to seize Yong-
dungp’o resumes at dawn. The night (20th-21st) has
passed without action erupting between the ground
forces, but Marine artillery has been serenading Yong-
dungp’o throughout the night with riveting fire that
keeps the town aglow. At 0630 the Marines advance. To
the north, the 1st Battalion’s Company B lunges from
September 21, 1950
its positions and begins the attack, supported by tank
fire and mortar and machine gun fire on Hill 85. The
ground troops charge across the rickety bridge and
reach the eastern bank. From there, the troops move
to an undefended knob on the left that peers down on
the Han River.
Company B’s advance then slows, as the Communists
have fortified the two dikes at the northern entrances
to the city. The two obstacles are each manned by a
company. One dike stretches the length of the western
fringe of the town and then joins the other, which par-
allels the Han River north of Yongdungp’o at the
Kalchon bridge. Company B focuses on the latter, giv-
ing its rear and left flank the protection of the river
while it advances. Enemy fire takes a toll on Company
B, but the Marines press eastward, gaining about 2,000
yards by about noon.
At this point, the second dike, 500 yards to their
front, becomes the priority, and the Marines ignite a
furious exchange with the Reds. Nevertheless, the
enemy fights the Marines to a deadly stalemate, with
both sides sustaining severe casualties. Marine support
weapons continue to lend assistance, but some com-
plications develop as the artillery becomes apprehensive
about firing too close to the rear of Company B to strike
the dike there.
By late afternoon, the confusion is untangled and
the southern barrier is hammered by the artillery and
planes. The enemy takes the punishing blows without
collapsing, and the attack remains stalled. By dusk,
 391
Company C and Weapons Company are dispatched
over the bridge to augment Company B, and to help es-
tablish a solid night perimeter. Meanwhile, the 2nd
Battalion attacks simultaneously (0630), jumping off
from its positions at the southern extremity of the line.
Companies D and E lead the way across the first bridge,
completing the trek without difficulty. The ground
Marines spread out to assault the second bridge. Then
they are suddenly, although not unexpectedly, brought
under tenacious fire, originating on a ridge to the right
of the highway. Colonel Sutter requests immediate ar-
tillery relief, but again there is a delay in getting a re-
sponse. Sutter takes it on himself to alleviate the prob-
lem by ordering his attached mortars to ring the heights
with fire.
Company D advances on the left of the road, inch-
ing toward a formidable dike to the front of the
Kalchon’s western branch. Companies E and F grind
forward toward the high ground. The fighting becomes
ferocious on both sides of the road. By noon, Com-
pany D reaches a point about 100 yards from the dike,
while Companies E and F continue to slug their way to-
ward the crest. Casualties mount as the day progresses.
Enemy fire keeps Company D at bay for the duration
of the afternoon.
Companies E and F make expensive progress. By
evening, they reach positions near the crest, but at high
cost. Close-quartered fighting on the summit fails to
gain the ridge by nightfall, prompting Colonel Sutter
to order both companies to disengage and pull back to
Company D’s positions to establish a night perimeter
there.
The Marines are treated to some phenomenal flying
by the pilots of the Corsairs who cover the disengage-
ment. The planes, coordinated by Lieutenant Norman
Vining (air controller), rivet the area 100 yards to their
front with rockets and bombs, and then the planes daz-
zle the Marines by indenting the ground with steel zip-
pers about thirty yards beyond their noses to forestall
any enemy advance during the withdrawal. The men-
acing enemy fire inflicts 85 casualties, including eleven
dead, on the 2nd Battalion today, increasing its losses
to a dangerous point.
Since landing at Inchon, the 2nd Battalion has sus-
tained 28 killed and 226 Marines wounded in action.
Colonel Puller, aware of the high casualties, at 1530
orders the 3rd Battalion to advance from Lookout Hill
to relieve the 2nd Battalion. Soon after, the 3rd Battal-
ion darts from the hill and drives northeast to outflank
the dike, which is keeping Company D from making
progress.
Initially, the 3rd Battalion advances against minor
opposition as it crosses the Kalchon, but the enemy
raises fierce resistance, including murderous machine
gun fire in front of the southwestern approaches to
Yongdungp’o. Undaunted, the 3rd Battalion’s machine
guns stream fire into the enemy positions at the levees,
quieting the enemy battery. The 3rd Battalion maintains
its attack and remains under severe effective fire as it
nears the menacing dike.
September 21, 1950
By dusk, and subsequent to a cost of eleven Marines
killed and eighteen wounded, the dike falls to the
3rd Battalion, which now stands north of the 2nd Bat-
talion at the bridge leading to Yongdungp’o. A night
perimeter is established on the same (left) side of
the highway as the 2nd Battalion. Basically, at nightfall,
the North Koreans have fought the 1st and 2nd Battal-
ions to a standstill in the northwest and southwest
respectively. And there is a growing apprehension
concerning the fate of another unit, Company A, 1st
Battalion, which departed its positions near Hill
80 during the morning to begin trudging through the
rice paddies after Company B bogged down at the
bridge.
Company A, 1st Battalion, commanded by Captain
Robert Barrow, drives discreetly toward the dikes lo-
cated in the rice paddies, near the center of the enemy
line. The contingent moves diligently, but with cau-
tion. The 2nd and 3rd Platoons advance on the right
and left respectively with the 1st Platoon trailing the
3rd Platoon. The staggered columns traverse in the
shadows of some low hills, taking a circuitous route to
a point west of the primary portion of the city and near
the center of the enemy line. Concealed behind a lofty
dike, the men regroup, and then they move through
the shoulder-high rice with its unique scent and be-
yond to the uninviting muddy Kal-ch’on Creek. The
blazing battles at both ends of the line continue with
such intensity that the mud Marines of Company A, re-
inforced, emerge on the opposite bank of the creek
without detection. The troops take refuge behind yet
another dike to reform before entering the city.
Unembarrassed by their grimy uniforms and unso-
cial scent, the Marines enter the city. There is no wel-
coming committee, but the Marines are not offended.
They start their own tour, venturing directly through
the heart of the town, picking up the distinct sounds of
heavy fighting to their left and right. They are also able
to spot Marine planes that are plastering the town.
Captain Barrow realizes that his command is in the
middle of the enemy lines and cut off from the other
Marine units. Undeterred by the situation, Barrow con-
tinues the advance.
By noon, Company A advances several hundred
yards, but still no enemy troops are discovered. A check
of the buildings bears no fruit. Barrow radios Colonel
Jack Hawkins requesting instructions, and he is advised
to continue the advance. Barrow senses trouble due to
the activity occurring to the southwest. He orders Lieu-
tenant McClelland’s 1st Platoon to pivot and swing
from the left side of the highway to the right.
His instincts prove true. Enemy reinforcements are
spotted on the road leading into town from the direc-
tion of Seoul. The enemy advance then comes to a suc-
cinct halt when Lieutenant John Sword’s 3rd Platoon
pours withering fire into the column, wiping it out. At
about the same time, both lead platoons begin spitting
bullets toward small units and individual Communist
troops in the eastern sector of the town. With blazing
fire emerging from the barrels of the Marines’ guns in
September 21, 1950
the middle of the enemy lines, the enemy troops break
for safety.
Other North Korean troops, farther in the distance,
spot the Marines, but fail to identify them. Wasting no
time, the 3rd Platoon races through town on the left side
of the road, and once at the east side of town, it de-
ploys defensively; Sword deploys his troops on both
sides of a 30-foot-high dike that is connected by a road
to the Inchon–Seoul road. The defensive positions give
the Marines a commanding view of the giant sand spit
thath contains an airfield and some approaches to
Seoul.
Soon after, the 3rd Platoon detects another large
enemy force advancing toward the spit. The Marines
swing their light machine guns into position and begin
to bludgeon the column. Others rush forward with
heavy machine guns. The Marines relentlessly main-
tain their fire, shredding the column on naked ground.
The North Korean contingent sustains horrendous ca-
sualties, but some enemy troops manage to escape. The
3rd Platoon is soon joined by the remainder of Com-
pany A, giving it a ringside seat in the midst of the
enemy’s fortress. For Company A, it has already been
an incredible day and there is more to come.
While the majority of the 1st and 2nd Battalions are
exchanging blows with the enemy at the opposite end
of the town, Company A is sitting atop the strategic
road junction of the enemy. Company A digs in tightly
while the enemy is occupied in the western portion of
the town. A brief firefight then erupts between the
Marines and a tiny detachment of North Koreans who
appear to be taking cover behind a colossal hill of coal
on the other side of the road junction. One Marine
hurls a grenade into the midst of the enemy and sur-
prises even himself. An earth-shattering explosion fol-
lows the detonation of the grenade. The alleged pile of
coal is actually stacked ammunition covered with cam-
ouflage.
Company A, with the tossing of one grenade, has
quickly informed the remainder of the 1st Marines
where it is deployed. Although isolated, the men of
Company A hold the key to the demise of the Yong-
dungp’o garrison, providing they can hold throughout
the night to await reinforcements.
During the balance of the afternoon, the North Ko-
reans unsuccessfully attempt to destroy the Devil Dogs
at the intersection by sending repeated assault parties
from the south. In the process of thwarting the attacks,
the Marines have expended much of their ammunition.
But while inspecting a multi-story building near the
intersection, they discover large amounts of captured
U.S. Army equipment, medical supplies and heavy cal-
iber ammunition. Although they are unable to utilize
the ammunition, the plasma is most welcome.
As dusk settles over the area, Company A deploys to
defend a compact 100-yard patch of the levee just north
of the road junction. Barrow staggers his troops on the
slopes of the macadam road there, where it stretches
about 25 feet above ground level. Barrow’s BARmen
and machine gunners bolster the riflemen by position-
392
ing themselves along the shoulders at the top in order
to have the ability to swivel in any direction to place a
line of fire. The 3rd Platoon fans out in a semi-circle
at the northern end, while the 2nd and 1st Platoons
deploy on the east and west respectively.
The men of the 60-mm mortars section, lacking am-
munition after their afternoon’s work, disperse into the
foxholes and become infantry. About two hundred
Marines have their fingers in the dike and they expect
to see the colors in the morning. However, the North
Koreans have a different attitude, and they are equally
determined to expel Company A.
Soon after daylight vanishes, enemy armor is heard
reverberating along the road. Five T-34’s, lacking in-
fantry, begin closing toward the roadblock, but they
swerve left just before the blockage and run nose-to-tail
along a road that parallels the imperiled dike. Suddenly,
from a distance of about thirty yards, the enemy armor
spews 85-mm shells and accompanying machine gun
fire toward the Marines’ positions. The troops are pre-
pared; their foxholes are especially deep, saving them
from harm as the shells shatter the earth. The 3.5 rocket
launcher teams, having little experience with the new
weapons, spring from their holes and unleash their fire.
The Marines demolish the lead tank and watch it burst
into flames.
Nevertheless, the trailing armor maintain their ad-
vance, moving to the end of the perimeter. The T-34s
run the course and pound the Marines’ positions with
resounding fire before sprinting away to initiate an-
other trip, but the Marine rocket teams dispense some
additional lethal medicine from their arsenal. Two more
T-34’s sustain hits during the charge, prompting both
cripples to wobble away. The remaining two enemy
tanks are less than inspired by the loss of their com-
rades, but they complete the circuit and then make one
final pass before they vanish into the town.
After the enemy armor depart, the Marines shake
the dust from their faces and check for casualties. Only
one Marine has become a casualty, suffering a concus-
sion. But the night is only beginning and the Marines
expect even more punishing blows to occur.
In the meantime, between 1900 and 2100, an aura
of tranquility is in the air, except for some minor incur-
sions. McClelland’s 1st Platoon spots and kills several
enemy troops who attempt to remove equipment from
the multi-story building. The evening passes slowly,
but slightly after 2100, the tempo begins to rise. The
enemy strikes a hard blow against Lieutenant Sword’s
3rd Platoon, but the northern semi-circle of the de-
fense remains steadfast during the non-stop skirmish.
After about fifteen minutes, the North Koreans disen-
gage. Meanwhile, the 3rd Platoon stands ready for the
next assault.
Within about thirty minutes, the Communists again
pound against the northern extension of the road junc-
tion, only to be humbled under fire as the Marines raise
rock resistance, unaffected by the raucous screams
of “Banzai!” The defenders are equally unimpressed
by the multi-colored flares that seemingly paint an
 393
iridescent glow on the faces of the enemy as they suc-
cumb in front of the Marine positions. The enemy
mounts several additional attacks, all futile.
By midnight the 3rd Platoon, despite its depleting
ammunition, has thrown back five assaults, each about
company-strength. One Communist POW manages to
escape from Company A just before the fifth assault.
While fleeing northward toward safety, an interpreter
informs the Marines that the prisoner is repeatedly
yelling, while he scampers away, “Don’t attack anymore.
They’re too strong for you.” No additional assaults are
mounted by the enemy. The North Koreans, unable to
gain access to their supplies, essentially relinquish Yong-
dungp’o to Puller’s 1st Marines. Nevertheless, sporadic
fighting breaks out during the remainder of the night.
At dawn’s first light, Company A begins to assess the
battle and it counts 275 enemy bodies around its
perimeter, the majority of them near the 3rd Platoon.
The four T-34 tanks that scampered back into town
are discovered abandoned there. Company C has re-
tained its hold on the eastern edge of the city through-
out the night. Meanwhile, elements of the N.K. 18th
Division and the N.K. 87th Regiment, N.K. 9th Di-
vision, which have been unable to eliminate the Amer-
icans at the rear door of Yongdungp’o, evacuate the city
before dawn on the 22nd.
At 0800 (22nd), the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 1st
Marines, attack and encounter only minor opposition
as they advance into Yongdungp’o and occupy it, as
well as hooking up with the isolated Company C,
which is the sole occupant of the town when the bulk
of the battalions arrive. The North Koreans sustain
heavy casualties at Yongdungp’o. One battalion of the
N.K. 87th Regiment suffers an 80 percent casualty rate.
In the 7th Marines zone, Colonel Litzenberg estab-
lishes his command post at Wonjong-ni by 2200. The
village is about two miles south of Kimpo Airfield.
H&S Company and the 3rd Battalion, commanded by
Major Maurice Roach, deploy in assembly areas close
to the Command Post. Lt. Colonel Thornton Hinkle’s
2nd Battalion arrives at Hill 131, about one mile north
of the airfield, at 0100 (22nd). It will protect the air-
field and a nearby river crossing. Also, the 1st Battal-
ion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Raymond Davis, re-
mains at Inchon. It unloads the vessels in the convoy.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, the 32nd Regi-
ment, operating on the right flank of the 1st Marines,
makes good progress. Its 1st Battalion captures the re-
mainder of Copper Mine Hill, then seizes Hill 300 out-
side of Anyang-ni. In addition, elements of the 2nd
Battalion, 32nd Regiment, advance on the left of the
Army and adjacent to the Marines’ sector and seize the
heights about two miles south of Yongdungp’o.
Beauchamp’s regiment is making excellent progress dur-
ing its second day in the field. By 1430, the Recon-
naissance Company of the 7th Division reaches
Anyang-ni and soon after, it is ordered to swing south
and attack the airfield below Suwon.
By dusk, the 1st Battalion, 32nd Regiment, holds
the heights northeast of Anyang-ni and dominates the
September 21, 1950
highway east of it. In conjunction, elements move north
and make contact with the 2nd Battalion at Toksan-ni.
The 2nd Battalion deploys along the Seoul-Suwon
highway about two miles south of Anyang-ni. In the
meantime, the Reconnaissance Company, 7th Divi-
sion, augmented by tanks, drives toward the airfield at
about 1400; however, the contingent has no maps.
While the force is en route to the objective, naval
planes precede its arrival and plaster Suwon, destroying
a prominent wooden structure that sits upon the large
stone wall above the entrance to the town. The rubble
clogs the entrance, compelling the attacking unit and
its tanks to seek another route. The column then ven-
tures into the city, joined in the meantime by one pla-
toon of engineers (Company B, 18th Engineer Com-
bat Bn.).
It is an eventful advance, with Lt. Colonel Henry
Hampton (G-3, 7th Division), Major Irwin Edwards
(G-2, 7th Division) and two enlisted troops in the lead.
Enemy troops throw up some resistance, but it is over-
come. When the lead elements approach the center of
Suwon, two N.K. officers in a U.S. jeep attempt to es-
cape, but Major Edwards shoots the driver. The other
officer, a major attached to the N.K. 105th Armored
Division, decides to surrender.
Meanwhile, the column engages several groups of
enemy troops as it drives through the town toward the
airfield. Thirty-seven North Koreans are captured.
Subsequently, the column advances to a point about
three miles south of Suwon, then discovers it is one
mile beyond the airfield. As the night of the 21st begins
to wind down, Colonel Hampton and the platoon of
engineers head toward Suwon to make contact with the
Reconnaissance Company. Communications between
the force at Suwon and division have ceased. At divi-
sion headquarters, concern continues to grow.
At 2125, subsequent to an order by Major General
David Barr, Task Force Hannum speeds toward Suwon.
The armored force commanded by Lt. Colonel Calvin
Hannum, commanding officer, 73rd Tank Battalion, is
composed of Company B, 73rd Tank Battalion, com-
manded by Captain Harold R. Beavers, and the ad-
vance group of the battalion in addition to Company
K, 32nd Regiment, Battery C, 48th FABn and a med-
ical contingent.
While the armored column is en route, Lt. Colonel
John W. Paddock (G-2, 7th Div.), accompanying the
relief force, makes radio contact with Major Edwards’
command. Slightly before midnight, the armored col-
umn reaches Suwon, which is illuminated by a full
moon. As with the Reconnaissance Company, the force
is compelled to bypass the destroyed East Gate and
move in through another part of the aged stone wall. Al-
though the Reconnaissance Company has cleared the
town and taken prisoners, the tanks receive a deadly
surprise when they enter. An enemy tank, concealed in
a house, fires one round and knocks out the point tank,
killing Captain Harold Beavers (CO, Company B). A
blazing exchange of fire then erupts and that Russian T-
34 tank is destroyed; however, another T-34 escapes,
September 21, 1950
losing the pursuing U.S. tanks at the town’s exit. The
U.S. tanks hold their positions until dawn to deter any
possibility of another enemy ambush.
In the meantime, the Reconnaissance Company,
which remains in position south of the town, detects to
the north the conspicuous noise of tanks rumbling for-
ward in the darkness. Anticipating the arrival of the ar-
mored column and in response to a previous request,
jeeps move out to greet the column and lead it into the
perimeter. One tank officer, Lieutenant Jesse Van Sant,
believes the tanks have the distinct sounds of T-34s,
but his theory is disregarded. Four jeeps move out. The
lead vehicle is driven by Major Edwards. Colonel
Henry Hampton (7th Division G-3) grabs a ride in
one of the other jeeps.
The approaching tanks come into view and Major
Edwards signals the armor by blinking his headlights.
At the same time, Colonel Hampton begins walking
toward the tanks to greet the Americans, but as Lieu-
tenant Van Sant had suggested, the tanks are North
Korean and they are advancing with their machine guns
firing. Hampton continues walking forward, appar-
ently still convinced that the tanks are American. He is
quickly cut down by the rapid fire, and several other
Americans are also killed.
The charging tanks drive forward and one crashes
into Edwards’ jeep, but he evades injury and escapes.
Edwards rejoins his command the following morning.
While the four T-34s are speeding toward the lines of
the Reconnaissance Company, one of the escaping
troops races back to the perimeter, just ahead of the T-
34s, and he sounds the alarm. Lieutenant Jesse Van
Sant’s tanks are close to the perimeter line and they im-
mediately prepare to give the enemy armor a lethal kiss.
The first two T-34 tanks reach the perimeter and stand
about thirty yards from the Pershings when Van Sant is-
sues the order to fire; both enemy tanks are decimated.
The two trailing enemy tanks halt their advance and
make a hasty retreat toward Suwon. At the first sign of
daylight, Major Edwards leads the Reconnaissance
Company and the accompanying tanks back about one
mile to the Suwon Airfield.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker, at Taegu,
places a telephone call to General Hickey in Tokyo with
an astonishing bit of news. Walker tells Hickey that
N.K. Colonel Lee Hak Ku, the chief of staff, N.K. 13th
Division, has surrendered to men of the 8th Cavalry
near Samsan-dong. Continuing, Walker informs
Hickey that the N.K. officer has informed Eighth Army
that the N.K. II Corps had issued orders on September
17 mandating all its units to revert to defense. The
N.K. 13th Division had not been informed of the In-
chon Invasion.
The captured officer relays much intelligence to
Eighth Army, including the precise positions of the
N.K. 13th Division and its command post. In addi-
tion, Colonel Lee reports that the division has been
driven down to about 1,500 troops and it is no longer
able to fight as an effective unit. According to Colonel
Lee, the division’s remnant troops are fleeing from
394
Tabu-dong toward Sangju and with its communica-
tions network ruined, each regiment is operating inde-
pendently. However, Lee also verifies that the bulk of
the division, during the previous month, had been
composed of South Korean conscripts. Nonetheless,
the officers are North Koreans.
Following the surrender of Colonel Lee Hak Ku,
other top ranking officers also surrender, including the
division surgeon (27th). One contingent, led by Lt.
Colonel Yun Bong Hun, continues to attempt escape,
but his group of 167 troops becomes cut off near
Tanyang. He surrenders the contingent to S.K. police
at Subi-myon.
The assigned strength of U.N. forces as of 1800
are: Eighth Army, 76,837; British 27th Infantry
Brigade, 1,679; Air Force in Korea, 4,791; Philippine
10th Battalion Combat Team, 1,200; and ROK Army,
74,987.
In the I Corps sector, during the two days of fighting
near Waegwan, on both sides of the Naktong, the
North Koreans sustain severe losses of both equipment
and troops. In one sector, twenty-nine destroyed enemy
tanks are counted by elements of the 24th Division,
but it is apparent that many of them had been devas-
tated in earlier combat during July and August.
In the 1st Cavalry Division area, 5th Cavalry sector, the
2nd Battalion, 5th Cavalry, relieves the 3rd Battalion,
5th RCT, at its positions on the east side of the Nak-
tong. Following its relief, the 3rd Battalion, 5th RCT,
crosses the river and joins the other battalions there.
By now, subsequent to the five days of relentless attack
by the 5th RCT, the enemy’s center has collapsed and
the right flank has vanished. The N.K. 3rd Division is
fleeing from the sledgehammer assault.
Meanwhile, the advance enemy positions along the
road to Taegu are being pounded by the 5th Cavalry.
The fighting is vicious, but the North Koreans posi-
tions are no longer formidable. In addition to the pur-
suing ground troops, the enemy is under constant air
attack by fighters and bombers. Nonetheless, between
1,000 and 1,800 troops will form a pocket of resist-
ance at P’onggang by the beginning of October. It will
be dubbed “The Iron Triangle.”
In the 7th Cavalry sector, the 1st Battalion, which
had halted on the previous night near Togae-dong,
reinitiates its attack and drives four miles to Tabu-dong.
Its commanding officer, Colonel Clainos, is evacuated
for treatment of wounds sustained on the previous
night. Major William O. Witherspoon (Regimental S-
3) assumes temporary command of the 1st Battalion.
The battalion grinds against Tabu-dong at 1255 and
is met by steady opposition. The 1st Battalion initiates
a two-pronged strike that bangs against the town from
the southwest and northwest. The attacks secure Tabu-
dong by 1635. By about 1735, the 1st Battalion re-
sumes the attack and drives south along the Taegu road,
to link up with the 8th Cavalry.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, ar-
rives at Tabu-dong, from where it pivots north and
deploys on both sides of the road in a defensive mode.
 395
Also, General Gay orders Lt. Colonel William Harris,
CO, 7th Cavalry Regiment, to spearhead the divisional
pursuit of the enemy. Colonel Harris’ 7th Cavalry Reg-
iment is temporarily without the 2nd Battalion, which
has relieved the British Brigade at the Naktong.
Harris establishes TF-777 to accomplish the mis-
sion. The force is composed of elements of three primary
components, the 7th Cavalry Regiment, the 77th FABn
and the 70th Tank Battalion. Its vanguard is the 3rd
Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel James Lynch,
designated TF Lynch. Task Force 777 also contains two
platoons, Company C, 70th Tank Battalion, the 77th
FABn, minus one battery; the 3rd Platoon, Heavy
Mortar Company; Company B, 8th Engineer Combat
Battalion, the regimental I&R Platoon and a TAC
party.
The attack begins on the following morning. Gen-
eral Gay had decided to cross the river at Naktong-ni,
but General Walker countermands the order and in-
structs Gay to cross at Sonsan.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, during the pre-dawn hours,
two sleeping U.S. soldiers are awakened by an enemy
officer; however, he had come to surrender, not to
fight. The enemy officer, Colonel Lee, had vanished
from his lines during the night with intentions of sur-
rendering. Lee is the highest ranking enemy officer to
become a prisoner of war during the entire Korean con-
flict. General Walker is immediately informed of the
incident and slightly before noon, he relays the infor-
mation to Tokyo. (See also, In the Eighth Army area,
this entry.)
Later, during the afternoon, a platoon of Company
C, 7th Cavalry, establishes contact with the 1st Battal-
ion, 8th Cavalry, as the latter is advancing north. The
link up completes the encirclement of Tabu-dong. The
combined operations of the 1st Cavalry Division and
the S.K. 1st Division seemingly have trapped large
numbers of enemy troops in the mountains north of
Taegu.
In the 24th Division area, the 11th Engineer Com-
bat Battalion and the 55th Engineer Treadway Bridge
Company complete the fabrication of an M2 pontoon
float treadway bridge across the Naktong at 1000. The
bridge permits the 24th Division to begin to get its
tanks and other vehicles into the battle. The bridge is
utilized immediately and by midnight, all vehicles are
on the west bank of the Naktong. Many of the vehicles
are painted with slogans; one of them is “We Remem-
ber Taejon.”
In the meantime, the enemy forces are in retreat to-
ward Kumch’on. But many rear action units’ weaponry
includes tanks, self-propelled guns and antitank guns,
as well as infantry. Two enemy units — the N.K. 203rd
Regiment, 105th Armored Division, and the 107th
Regiment — crossed the Naktong with nine and four-
teen tanks respectively. Also, U.S. Air Force forward
observers, operating in T-6 Mosquitoes, spot about
thirty enemy T-34 tanks that are poised to ambush the
vanguard of the 24nd Division. Planes are called by the
observers and the aircraft are supported by artillery.
September 21, 1950
Fourteen of the tanks are destroyed and the remainder
retire.
In the 2nd Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 23rd
Regiment, supported by one platoon of tanks (72nd
Tank Bn.), drives toward Sinban-ni to seize it and the
enemy headquarters command post located there. The
enemy resists fiercely, hindering the advance, but poor
coordination between the infantry and tanks adds to
the problem. Nonetheless, supporting units make a dif-
ference. Twin-40 and Quad-50 self-propelled AA gun
vehicles blow some holes in the enemy lines and the
1st Battalion advances half-way to the objective, about
two and one-half miles, while bypassing several enemy
contingents.
In the meantime, the enemy troops who had con-
cealed themselves on Hill 227 during the night launch
a surprise attack against Company L while it is eating
morning chow. Grenades and small arms fire besiege
the perimeter and one platoon is driven from its posi-
tions. Twenty-six casualties are sustained. After regain-
ing their momentum, Company L drives back the
enemy and by noon, the position is re-secured.
In the 38th Regiment zone, the regiment continues to
hit heavy resistance during its drive toward Ch’ogye
and Hyopch’on. The 2nd Battalion drives toward Hill
239 and receives support from planes. The air strikes
make things most uncomfortable for the enemy, as na-
palm and fragmentation bombs saturate the area. The
2nd Battalion then shatters the remaining enemy op-
position and seizes Hill 239, which dominates Ch’o-
gye. During the fighting in the 1st Battalion sector,
enemy documents are captured. One accurately depicts
the location of every 1st Battalion position east of the
river.
The British 27th Infantry Brigade (attached to 24th
U.S. Division) is operating on the right flank of the
2nd Division. The brigade has been tracing the steps of
the retreating N.K. 10th Division, and it is now across
the Naktong. The British brigade is directed to move
through Songju, then attack the primary highway,
which runs between the river and Kumch’on, at its
midpoint.
At first light, the British brigade’s 1st Battalion seizes
a tiny hill, dubbed Plum Pudding Hill. After seizing
the hill, which sits several miles below Songju, the
British charge toward the heights to the northeast to
its next objective, known to the British as Middlesex
Hill (or Point 325). Supported by U.S. tank fire and
bolstered by their own mortars and machine guns, the
Middlesex Battalion attacks and becomes engaged in
heavy fighting. Nonetheless, the British Middlesex Bat-
talion dislodges the enemy and takes the hill before
dark.
In the meantime, the Scottish Highlander Argyll
Battalion is advancing to prepare to assault Hill 282, to
the left of Hill 325, on the following day.
In the 25th Division sector, the 24th and 27th Regi-
ments advance on the division center and left respec-
tively. The ground is rugged, mandating a slow
advance; however, there is no enemy opposition.
September 22, 1950
Meanwhile, the 35th Regiment seizes the Notch, lo-
cated several miles southwest of Chungam-ni. This is
the area where heavy fighting occurred during early
September. Many new North Korean atrocities are dis-
covered, such as the 35th Division trooper who had
been castrated and had his fingers sawed off. Other
dead and unburied 35th Regimental troops, each with
their hands tied behind their backs and their feet sawed
off, are also found.
Following the capture of the notorious Notch, the
regiment begins to make a wide westward sweep that ad-
vances about eight air-miles without incident, passing
the Much’on-ni road. At about 2230, the regiment
reaches the heights at Chinju Pass, where it establishes
a night perimeter.
In the ROK I Corps area, the S.K. 8th Division pushes
north and meets minimal resistance. The N.K. 15th
Division has literally been knocked out of action as a
combat unit.
In the ROK II Corps area, S.K. 1st Division sector,
contingents have severed the Sangju Road above Tabu-
dong and are attacking south toward the town. The
S.K. 12th Regiment is still the most extended unit. It
establishes a roadblock northeast of the town and below
Kunwi. Meanwhile, subsequent to four dogged days of
combat against the N.K. 8th Division, the S.K. 6th Di-
vision is advancing rapidly, pushing north beyond Ui-
hung. Meanwhile, the survivors of the decimated N.K.
8th Division flee toward Yech’on.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Force begins to
transport supplies and ammunition to the front lines.
C-54s arrive at Suwon Airfield south of Seoul to deliver
ammunition and food rations. In addition, the troops
on the line receive air drops.
September 22 The 65th Regimental Combat
Team, composed primarily of the 65th Puerto Rican
Infantry Regiment, debarks at Pusan.
Inchon–Seoul vicinity: By today, Eighth Army
is making progress, prompting General MacArthur
to scrap the proposed plan for an amphibious invasion
at Kunsan, but Eighth Army is not yet aware that
the enemy has begun a full withdrawal. U.S. Eighth
Army Intelligence reports: “Although the enemy is ap-
parently falling back in all sectors, there are no indica-
tions of an over-all planned disengagement and with-
drawal.”
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the 1st Marines en-
ters abandoned Yongdungp’o during the morning and
hooks up with Captain Barrow’s C Company. Contin-
gents of the 1st Marines, operating on the left, probe
eastward and advance about two miles to reach the de-
molished bridges (rail and road) at the Han River.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Division issues the
order establishing its battle plan for the seizure of Seoul.
The 1st Marines is to ford the Han River near Yong-
dungp’o and hook up with the 5th Marines at its po-
sitions north (Division right) of the city. In conjunc-
tion, the 7th Marines, which had arrived on the 21st at
Inchon, moves out to deploy north of the 5th Marines,
396
establishing a three-regiment line with the 7th Marines
in the center.
Meanwhile, General Almond, X Corps commander,
alters General O.P. Smith’s order; he adds the S.K.
Marines and the S.K. 17th Regiment to the assault
force. The 1st Marine Division had expected to capture
the city with its own components.
In the 5th Marines sector, the objective is to reduce the
remaining hill to the front of Seoul. The North Ko-
rean defense line at the western fringes of Seoul, from
north to south, begins at Hill 296, west of Seoul’s So-
daemun Prison and slightly south of Kaesong highway.
The line moves from the summit of Hill 296, then arcs
to the east and to the south, following two spur ridges
for a distance of about two and one-half miles to the
Han River. The largest portion of this erratic ridge line
is controlled by a trio of equally elevated hills (105 me-
ters), each named Hills 105 (North, Center and South).
Hills 105 North and Center are situated north of the
highway and rail routes that shadow the northern bank
of the Han River as they lead into Seoul. Hill 105 South
sits between the Han and the road and railroad tracks.
The two strategic hills dominate the road that runs
across the saddle between Hills 105 Center and South
into Seoul and the primary rail line (Pusan to
Manchuria–Kyonggi).
At 0700, the attack commences. The 1st and 3rd
Battalions advance on the right and left respectively,
while the 1st S.K. Marines drive up the center. Each
moves against a separate Hill 105. The 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines advances from Hill 216 and strikes against
Hill 296. By 0945, the battalion reports that its north-
ern objective is secure, subsequent to eliminating mod-
erate resistance.
However, the report is premature, as the bulk of the
North Korean resistance is on the southern slopes of
Hill 296, which have not yet been taken. And Hill 296
is bonded to Hills 56, 88 and 105 N, adding to the
depth of the resistance in front of Seoul. Further com-
plicating the task, Hills 105 C, 72 and 105 S, which
swing southward, are also heavily defended. The enemy
mounts a determined counterattack against the 3rd Bat-
talion, but the Marines, supported by tanks, force the
North Koreans to pay a heavy price, including the cap-
ture of forty prisoners.
During the afternoon, patrols of the 3rd Battalion
encounter stiff resistance when they venture northeast
of Hill 216. At the village of Nokpon-ni, a fierce fire-
fight develops. The Marines lose 2 killed and 11
wounded before the fighting subsides at dusk. At about
that time, the 3rd Battalion receives orders to prepare
to eliminate enemy infiltrators who are moving in from
the south, southeast and the northeast in an attempt
by the Communists to retake the lost terrain.
The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, assaults Hill 105
South and it encounters heavy opposition, some of
which is raised by a captured American machine gun.
Company A advances through Company C to launch
the assault, supported by fire from Company B, but
just after the three assault platoons of A Company
 397
South Gate of Suwon, after it was captured by Eighth Army on 22 September.
become positioned, enemy fire forbids any immediate
advance. Eventually the lower slopes of Hill 105 south
are seized by Company A; however, Lieutenant Schim-
menti becomes seriously wounded, and Lieutenant
Nathaniel Mann is killed.
By about 1500, Company C concludes its wide sweep
and converges on the enemy’s right flank. During the
same time period, Company B slides through the positions
of Company A and hammers the forward slopes. Later,
a fierce artillery and mortar bombardment is called into
the fight. MAG-33 commits its planes to further loosen
the resistance. At about 1720, the horrific air and ground
bombardment ceases. Within fifteen minutes, Hill 105
South is seized by the 1st Battalion. The three attacking
September 22, 1950
companies sustain a total of 12 men killed and 31
wounded. In conjunction, the support flights of Marine
squadrons VMF-212, VMF(N)-542, and VMF-323
greatly aid all three assault battalions.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, S.K. Marines,
launches its attack to secure Hill 105 center, but two
preliminary objectives to its front must first be taken.
The knolls are called Hills 66 and 88. This particular
struggle is arduous. Enemy fire fiercely hits the South
Koreans, inflicting serious casualties. Marine aircraft
support the effort, but nonetheless, Hills 66 and 88 re-
main under enemy control. The South Koreans retire
to their starting point, Hill 104, and reinitiate the at-
tack on the following day.
September 22, 1950
U.S. soldiers work along a riverbank near Chinju in search of mines. One of the troops is using an SCR
625 mine detector.
Information subsequently gathered from enemy pris-
oners gives evidence that the crack N.K. 25th Brigade,
commanded by Major General Wol Ki Chan and com-
posed of 4,000 to 5,000 troops, sustains forty percent
casualties on this day. Another enemy unit, the N.K.
78th Independent Regiment, commanded by Colonel
Pak Han Lin, also takes high casualties. By about dusk,
398
Colonel Murray, reacting to the lack of progress of the
South Koreans, orders the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
to withdraw one company to Hill 68. The two remain-
ing companies hold Hill 105 South.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, at dawn, TF Han-
num departs a deserted Suwon; it advances past the scene
of the previous night’s confrontation and discovers
 399 September 22, 1950

American bodies. The

column moves to the air-
field and joins the recon-
naissance company there.
During the latter part of
the morning, the 31st
Regiment (minus 3rd Bat-
talion) arrives at the
Suwon Airfield to relieve
TF Hannum, which then
heads toward Anyang-ni
to rejoin the 7th Division.
With control of the air-
field acquired by U.S.
troops, the U.N. now has
another airfield located
about twenty miles south
of Seoul from which to
strike the Communists. In
conjunction, after the ar-
rival of Colonel Richard
Ovenshine’s 31st Regi-
ment, the Reconnaissance
Company probes south-
ward, grinding toward
Osan.
In other activity, the
31st Regiment, 7th Divi-
sion, runs into difficulty.
Company B walks into an
ambush about seven miles
northeast of Anyang-ni.
The company is unable to
overcome the enemy. The
commanding officer, 1st
Battalion, Lt. Colonel
Don Faith, recalls the bat-
tered company, but the
enemy initiates pursuit.
Company B, somewhat
disoriented, reaches the Two U.S. soldiers, during the advance toward Sanju, work cautiously to affix
vicinity of Kwanmundong. two blocks of dynamite to create an improvised super hand grenade.
It is bolstered by other el-
ements of the 1st Battalion, which repel the enemy an assault to break out, but it encounters rock opposi-
thrust. tion by the Americans. Subsequent to supporting the ef-
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 32nd Regiment, fort to break up the enemy counterattack, TF Lynch
commanded by Lt. Colonel Charles Mount, reinitiates advances from its positions west of Tabu-dong at 0800.
its advance on the right flank of the 1st Marines. The General Gay rides with the convoy. Air Force planes
battalion captures several hills between one and two scour the road to the front of the column and strafe the
miles south of the highway and the rail bridges that enemy groups as they retreat. Some minor resistance is
span the Han River. encountered by the leading armor, but the advance
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, the 1st Cav- pushes through.
alry, the U.S. 24th Division, 1st S.K. Division and the The forward elements approach a point where the
British 27th Brigade continue to pound against the highway curves over the crest of a hill, and the lead
N.K. 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 10th and 13th Divisions during tank comes under fire from an undisclosed position.
the fighting along the Kumchon–Taejon Line (Central The tank is stopped in its tracks. Unable to spot the
Front). By the 25th, I Corps advances about 35 miles. enemy, General Gay orders the remaining four lead
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, 7th Cavalry zone, a tanks to charge over the crest with all guns blazing.
large enemy contingent attempts to escape northward, The blind charge overruns two antitank positions and
but it gets cut off by U.S. troops. The enemy mounts reopens the route. The column resumes the attack, but
September 22, 1950
The U.S. 32nd Regiment crosses the Han River aboard USMC amtracs.
soon after, another obstacle hinders progress. A ten-
minute grenade duel ensues and it culminates with the
termination of the obstruction.
When the column reaches Kumgok, en route to the
Sonsan ferry site at the Naktong, new orders arrive. A
liaison plane soars overhead and deposits a message that
changes the course. The task force is ordered to abort
the crossing at Sonsan and continue north to Naktong-
ni. The column reaches Sonsan, about ten miles short
of Naktong-ni, at 1545. General Gay then returns to
the Division command post at Taegu.
The advance resumes at 1900, and after moving
about five miles, it begins passing through burning vil-
lages. Shortly thereafter, it encounters rear-guard
enemy troops, but they surrender without resistance. Fi-
nally, at about 2230, under a brightly lit moon, the
lead tanks halt on a cliff overlooking the river. Crew-
men of the point tank detect an antitank gun and im-
mediately take action. The tank rings a shot toward the
gun and unexpectedly, it blows up an ammunition
truck. The huge explosion illuminates the entire area
and puts the enemy on Broadway. Scores of abandoned
vehicles are strewn about the area in full view, but more
importantly, the river crossing is full of escaping troops.
In an instant, the task force begins to saturate the
crossing with shells that score effectively. About 200
enemy troops die in the waist-high water. In addition,
TF Lynch seizes a huge store of supplies and vehicles,
including two operable T-34 tanks and fifty trucks, a
good proportion of the trucks still bearing U.S. in-
signias. The main enemy force, caught here at the Nak-
tong, is the N.K. 3rd Division, but contingents of the
N.K. 1st and 13th Divisions are also strung out in the
400
same vicinity. Colonel Lynch dispatches reconnaissance
detachments to check out the crossing site. Subsequent
to receiving the reports, he directs the infantry to cross
the river during the early morning hours of the 23rd.
In the 24th Division sector, the initial objective is to
drive about twenty miles to seize Kumch’on, the head-
quarters of the North Korean field forces. The 24th
Division and its supporting units are on the west side
of the Naktong and prepared to advance.
In other activity, the Scottish Highlander Argyll Bat-
talion (attached to U.S. 24th Division) operating on
the right flank of the U.S. 2nd Division, launches an at-
tack prior to dawn. Companies B and C ascend Hill
282 and although it takes about one hour to reach the
summit, the enemy fails to detect the units. The enemy
troops are still eating their breakfast when the British
reach the crest and seize it.
While two companies are taking Hill 282, the re-
maining unit, Company C, advances against Hill 388
about one mile southwest. However, the enemy initi-
ates an attack to recapture Hill 282. Enemy mortar fire
and artillery begin shelling the British positions. The
tenacious exchange continues throughout the morn-
ing, but the supporting American artillery ceases with-
out a definitive reason, and the U.S. tanks cannot bring
their weapons to bear due to the contour of the terrain.
Slightly before noon, the British request an air strike
to neutralize the North Korean counterattack and soon
after, the planes appear. The British soldiers place white
panels around their positions on Hill 282, but the
enemy on Hill 388 uses the same colored panel hoping
to fool the aircraft. The ruse works. The TAC party is
unable to establish contact with the overhead planes
401 September 22, 1950
September 22, 1950
and disaster follows. At 1215, the F-51s plaster the
British on Hill 282, inflicting tremendous casualties
within two minutes. The summit becomes an inferno
from the bombs and napalm. Survivors dive for safety,
some descending about fifty feet down the slope.
A few British troops retain the hill and Major Ken-
neth Muir spots them. Muir had earlier led a detach-
ment to the crest to resupply the troops there. Muir
again heads for the crest with about thirty troops to
intercept an approaching column of North Koreans.
Major Muir, mortally wounded by two bursts of enemy
fire, speaks his last words as he is being transported
from the summit: “The enemy will never get the Argylls
off this ridge.”
Unfortunately, there is insufficient strength to hold
the hill because only about ten troops remain on the
crest, and some of them are wounded. Their position
untenable, the British abandon the hill. Major Muir
receives the British Victoria Cross (British equivalent of
the U.S. Medal of Honor) posthumously.
On the following day, the casualty list is accrued.
The British lose 13 men killed, including 2 officers,
and 74 troops wounded, including 4 officers. In addi-
tion, 2 troops are reported missing. The mistaken air
strikes account for about 60 of the 89 casualties at Hill
282.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment,
launches a night attack from its positions at Pusang-
dong and drives south toward Sonju. Also, during the
night of the 22nd-23rd, enemy artillery harasses the
troops along the Naktong River bank throughout the
night. The sole available raft there is destroyed and the
only operable footbridge is wrecked three separate
times. The enemy fire creates a nightmare for the troops
who are responsible for re-supplying the assault troops.
Many local Koreans transport the supplies across the
river during the night hours to ensure that some sup-
plies and ammunition are available for the succeeding
days.
In the 2nd Division sector, a bridge across the Naktong
is completed at the Sadung Ferry site during the
afternoon, thanks to the ingenuity of the engineers.
The river is 400 feet wide at the point of the bridging
and the division has only 276 feet of bridging material.
In the 23rd Regiment zone, the 1st Battalion, 23rd
Regiment, and its supporting contingents, having
been stalled west of the river on the previous day, remain
less than three miles from the objective. Before it
can reinitiate the advance, the enemy strikes. At dawn,
Company B is pounded. The unit is dislodged from
its positions and it sustains heavy casualties, including
its commanding officer, Captain Art Stelle, who is
killed.
The regiment attempts to advance, but resistance
north of the road increases. According to Lieutenant
William Glasgow, one of the more severely wounded
men of Company B, some of the troops had performed
“poorly” while under attack. Glasgow had also been in-
volved with the fighting along the Naktong during the
latter part of August.
402
South of the road, the 3rd Battalion makes progress
against nominal resistance. The 2nd Battalion rushes
across the Naktong to support the 1st Battalion north
of the road. Nonetheless, the fighting ends in a draw.
About two enemy battalions hold the line and forestall
the fall of Sinban-ni.
In the 38th Regiment zone, the 2nd Battalion occu-
pies Ch’ogye in the afternoon. In other activity, the 1st
Battalion, 38th Regiment, continues to engage the
enemy (N.K. 10th Division) east of the Naktong on
Hill 409, until the latter part of the night. Prior to mid-
night, the 1st Battalion is relieved by the 2nd Battalion,
9th Regiment. Upon relief, the 1st Battalion, 38th Reg-
iment, begins to bridge the Naktong and link up with
its parent regiment.
In the 25th Division sector, the enemy continues to re-
treat, but isolated contingents in the mountains continue
to raise resistance. Company A, 24th Regiment, re-
ceives some uninvited guests during the early morning
hours. One enemy soldier creeps up on a sleeping pla-
toon leader. The American awakes and spots the in-
truder, then without hesitation he grabs the pointed
bayonet and a tussle occurs. The confrontation is short.
Another American arrives in time to shoot the enemy
soldier.
In another pre-dawn incident, a North Korean tosses
a grenade into a foxhole, wounding one man and killing
the other two soldiers. Subsequently, enemy mortar fire
breaks up a meeting and inflicts seven additional casu-
alties, including the death of the commanding officer
of Headquarters Company.
At the Chinju Pass, contingents of the N.K. 6th Di-
vision hinder the advance of the 35th Regiment, but the
1st Battalion grinds to within 200 yards of the sum-
mit of Hill 152.
In the ROK I Corps area, the Capital Division finally
takes Kigye. The beleaguered N.K. 12th Division,
down to about 2,000 troops, retreats toward Andong.
In the ROK II Corps area, S.K. 1st Division sector,
the S.K. 11th Regiment and contingents of the S.K.
National Police secure the Walled City of Ka-san.
Meanwhile, contingents of the S.K. 15th Regiment
drive from the north and link up with the 1st Cavalry
Division.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion sector, Hunghae is taken after several days of hard
fighting. The N.K. 5th Division is fleeing toward Yong-
dok.
In Air Force activity, an Air Force Mosquito plane, pi-
loted by Lieutenant George W. Nelson, passes over a
group of about 200 North Koreans who are spotted
northeast of Kunsan. The group is targeted as it heads
north; the Communists units have been ordered to
withdraw. The dropped note instructs the North Ko-
reans to move to a specific hill to surrender to friendly
forces there. The troops comply.
In other activity, Air Force B-29 bombers drop
flares over rail targets to illuminate the targets for trail-
ing B-26s that attack the enemy’s trains during dark-
ness.
 2
The Korean War
This page intentionally left blank
The Korean War
An Exhaustive Chronolog y
BUD HANNINGS
Foreword by General P.X. Kelley,
USMC (Ret.), 28th Commandant

Volume 2
(September 23, 1950–November 12, 1951)

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Jefferson, North Carolina, and London
 Volume 2
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CATALOGUING-IN-PUBLICATION DATA
Hannings, Bud.
The Korean war : an exhaustive chronology / Bud Hannings ;
foreword by General P.X. Kelley, USMC (Ret.).
p. cm.
Includes index.

3 volume set—
ISBN-13: 978-0-7864-2814-4
illustrated case binding : 50# alkaline paper

1. Korean War, 1950–1953 — Chronology. 2. Korean War, 1950–1953.

3. Korean War, 1950–1953 — United States — Chronology.
4. United Nations — Armed Forces — Korea — Chronology. I. Title.
DS918.H336 2007 951.904'20202 — dc22 2007010570

British Library cataloguing data are available

©2007 Bud Hannings. All rights reserved

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying
or recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the publisher.

On the cover: Situation Map of Korea November 25, 1950;

Elements of Eighth Army retire from Sunch’on
and move south towards P’yongyang, December 2, 1950

Manufactured in the United States of America

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Box 611, Jefferson, North Carolina 28640
www.mcfarlandpub.com
 Contents
• Volume 1 •
Foreword, by General P. X. Kelley, USMC (Ret.) 1
Preface 3
Prologue: The Prelude to War 7
Acronyms and Abbreviations 15

Chronology: January 5, 1950–

September 22, 1950 23

• Volume 2 •

Chronology: September 23, 1950–

November 12, 1951 403

• Volume 3 •

Chronology: November 13, 1951–

September 6, 1953 803

Appendices
1. Eighth Army, Order of Battle 975
2. Major Combat Events 981
3. United Nations Command, Senior Military Commanders 983
4. U.S. Air Force Commanders 985
5. Medal of Honor Recipients 988
6. Major U.S. Air Force Units 994

v
Contents vi

7. U.S. Marine Units 997

8. U.S. Naval Vessels 999
9. U.S. Naval Air Units 1002
10. Carrier-Based and Non–Carrier-Based Squadrons 1003
11. U.S. Naval Vessels Sunk or Damaged in Action 1009
12. Numbers of U.S. Navy and
Marine Corps Personnel Killed and Wounded 1013
13. U.S. Aces of the Korean War 1014
14. U.S. Army Command Strength 1016
15. U.S. Army Battle Casualties 1017
16. Foreign Nation Forces 1018

Bibliography 1021
General Index 1025
Military Units Index 1069
 403
September 23 The Swedish Red Cross Field
Hospital contingent arrives at Pusan.
Inchon–Seoul vicinity: X Corps Headquarters
relocates from Inchon to Ascom City. General Almond
impatiently complains of what he considers a slow Ma-
rine advance. He suggests to General O.P. Smith that
the 1st Marines should execute an envelopment attack
by utilizing the terrain south of the Han River.
In turn, General O.P. Smith rejects the idea, choos-
ing not to divide the 1st and 5th Marines by a river.
General Almond, determined to give MacArthur the
city of Seoul, issues an ultimatum to Smith, giving him
twenty-four hours to break through the stiff resistance
or he would commit the 7th Infantry Division by or-
dering the 32nd Regiment to envelop the enemy posi-
tions in Seoul.
Seoul, a strategic military objective, is becoming an
equally important political prize, fraying the nerves on
both sides of the argument. Meanwhile, three days of
resolute enemy resistance at the city continues to fore-
stall its capture.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Marines Reg-
iment advances nearly without incident to the Han
River. The 3rd Battalion captures Hill 108, the strate-
gic high ground that controls the damaged bridges that
span the river. Later, at 2200, headquarters issues an
order instructing the 1st Marines to ford the Han River
on the following morning, essentially confirming an
earlier verbal directive.
In the 5th Marines sector, the 2nd Battalion, S.K.
Marines, resumes its attack toward Hill 105 Center,
but the resistance on the two knolls (Hills 66 and 88),
designated Hill 56 by the U.S. Marines, remains tena-
cious, and the South Koreans continue to take addi-
tional casualties without making any significant
progress.
At about 1300, Colonel Roise (2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines) pushes his command post forward to the base
of Hill 104. By the middle of the afternoon, upon au-
thorization from Colonel Murray, Roise’s 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, replaces the South Korean Marines
and carries the fight. At this time, it is still not known
to the Marines that they are encountering the enemy’s
main line of resistance.
After a moderate artillery barrage, the 2nd Battalion
advances, bolstered by one platoon of tanks. Compa-
nies D and F attack while Company E offers support fire
from the eastern slopes of Hill 104. Company F, on the
right, jumps off from its positions south of the railroad
to capture the heights below the railroad tunnel.
Meanwhile, Company D, led by 1st Lieutenant H.J.
Smith, advances along a sunken road, moving toward
Hill 56 north of the tunnel. Complications quickly de-
velop when the assault troops begin crossing about
1,000 yards of rice paddies. The point tank, unable to
pass through a huge ditch, becomes immobilized. Con-
sequently, the four trailing tanks stall. Three of the
tanks divert and shadow the railroad tracks, while a
fourth remains in the paddy to shepherd the ground
Marines.
September 23, 1950
Meanwhile, Company F, led by Captain Peters, is
incurring heavy casualties. A mortar section is ordered
to move up to support Company F, but the instruc-
tions, according to Lt. Sansing, are not received on his
radio. This snafu costs the company heavily when its
three platoons, lacking 60-mm support fire, ascend Hill
56 against sheets of heavy enemy fire.
In the meantime, Company D, commanded by
Lieutenant H.J. Smith, successfully navigates the
sunken road. It easily reaches its initial objective. How-
ever, the 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant Heck, launches
its attack on the primary objective, Smith’s Ridge (so
named in honor of Lt. H.J. Smith).
The 1st Platoon swings to the left to lead the assault,
while the 2nd and 3rd Platoons move against the slopes
of Hill 56. The 1st Platoon advances effortlessly until
it reaches open ground about halfway from the objec-
tive. Suddenly, menacing layers of fire, originating from
a huge knob on the southern slope of Smith’s Ridge,
crash violently upon the exposed Marines, slimming
their numbers.
The 1st Platoon contains less than half its strength
following the several-minute ordeal. The platoon
leader, Lieutenant Heck, receives a mortal wound, and
his top NCO, Sergeant T. Crowson, receives a severe
wound.
Meanwhile, Lieutenant H.J. Smith enters the field of
fire to personally extricate the beleaguered 1st Platoon.
The 2nd and 3rd Platoons (Company D) maintain
their efforts to seize the northeastern slopes of Hill 56.
Nevertheless, the enemy remains entrenched, giving
little ground.
Simultaneously, counterattacks are mounted. The
2nd Battalion repulses the enemy attacks, but it is un-
able to secure the enemy held ridges by dark. Lt. Smith
directs his embattled command to establish night po-
sitions on the high ground; however, the unit is out of
contact with friendly forces.
On the eastern slopes, Company F has also spent the
day in a wild slugfest. It doggedly advances against
heavy resistance to seize the railroad tunnel (northeast-
ern slopes, Hill 56). The 1st Platoon, led by Lieuten-
ant Anderson, attacks an enemy strong point near the
tunnel, but ferocious enemy fire cuts the platoon down
to 27 men. Undaunted, the weary contingent forges
ahead and engages the enemy at close-quarters, ex-
changing grenades while they also fire from point-blank
range.
The enemy force, estimated to be company strength,
is annihilated. Seven Marines of the 1st Platoon remain
unscathed, while the remainder have been either killed
or wounded. The survivors of the 1st Platoon receive
orders to return to the company positions.
All the wounded and most of the Marine dead are
brought back. The troops of Anderson’s 1st Platoon and
Lieutenant Nolan’s 2nd Platoon are consolidated as
Company F and establish night positions about fifty
yards from the isolated 3rd Platoon of Lieutenant Albert
Belbusti.
Both Company D and Company F hold precarious
September 23, 1950
positions and each is isolated, but anticipated enemy
counterattacks never develop during the night (23rd-
24th). The incessant firing of the 11th Marines’ how-
itzers upon the enemy positions throughout the night
might have been the neutralizer.
In the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines sector, enemy troop
positions near Nokpon-ni come under effective bom-
bardment as weapons company troops, poised on Hill
296, experiment and blast the troop formations with fire
from a captured enemy howitzer. Also, Company H,
augmented by tanks, engages the enemy throughout
the day. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, similar to the
3rd Battalion, had been assigned defensive duties, but
its positions on Hill 105 South remain under fire
throughout the day. The opposition’s fire is especially
effective.
Companies B and C are unable to move about and
the troops lack a resupply of ammo, food and water
until after dusk. Nevertheless, the Marine air support,
although hindered by enemy smoke pots, successfully
carries out six missions, including a stunning blow that
occurs when planes (attached to VMF-214) led by Lt.
Colonel Lischeid pummel an enemy troop concentra-
tion, thereby aborting a counterattack against Hill 105
South.
In other activity, the recently arrived 7th Marines,
commanded by Colonel Homer Litzenberg, receives
orders to advance from Inchon to the Han River. The
orders stipulate that the regiment is to cross the river and
deploy behind the 5th Marines. Headquarters (Regi-
mental) and the 3rd Battalion ford the river during the
latter part of the morning. Later, slightly after 1700,
Colonel Litzenberg establishes his command post on
the north bank of the river. The 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, remains in position northwest of Kimpo until
it is relieved on the following day by a U.S. Army unit.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, continues
to debark at Inchon.
In the 7th Infantry Division area, the 1st Battalion,
32nd Regiment, secures Hill 290, located about three
miles below the Han River and about seven miles
southeast of Yongdungp’o. Seizure of the hill gives
the 7th Division strategic high ground that commands
the southeastern approaches to the Han River and to
Seoul.
Meanwhile, the 31st Regiment, operating about
thirty miles south of Seoul, assumes responsibility for
Suwon and its airfield, and has the responsibility to se-
cure the town and capture the heights south of the air-
field. The reconnaissance company, which captures
prisoners in Suwon, is informed by the POWs that the
N.K. 105th Armored Division had been in Choch’i-
won on the 18th, en route to bolster the Seoul defend-
ers. The 31st Regiment maintains a steady eye on the
southern approach routes to Suwon in search of the
enemy armor.
In the Eighth Army area, Army Headquarters moves
from Pusan to Taegu and reopens there at 1400. The IX
Corps (U.S. 2nd and 25th Divisions and their support-
ing units), commanded by Major General John B.
404
Coulter, becomes operational at 1400. In conjunction,
since 21 September, the 2nd and 25th Divisions have
shoved the N.K. 4th, 6th, 7th and 9th Divisions back
about fifteen miles from the area around Mason to
Chinju.
A shortage of equipment and communications per-
sonnel has played a big part in the IX Corps’ delay in
becoming operational. These same crucial needs con-
tinue to hinder the IX Corps operations. Many of its in-
tended personnel and equipment had been transferred
to X Corps. IX Corps has been saddled with running
supplies for the I Corps, due to the inability of the rails
to maintain pace with the ground troops.
The 2nd and 25th Divisions, during the northward
advance of Eighth Army beyond the 38th Parallel, will
forfeit a portion of the spine of its motor pool. In one
instance, the 2nd Division loses 320 trucks to establish
a Red Ball Express to provide support for I Corps once
it crosses the Han River. Nonetheless, between this day
and September 30th, IX Corps fares well. Participating
units capture twenty-two antitank guns, forty-one ar-
tillery pieces, four self-propelled guns, forty-two mor-
tars and four enemy tanks. It also seizes nearly 500 tons
of ammunition.
General Coulter confers with General Walker at the
25th Division command post. Coulter receives permis-
sion to modify the axis of his attack, switching it from
a southwest direction to a westward and a southwest-
ward course. But Coulter is ordered to maintain the
corps’ boundaries as they stand.
In other activity, it is now apparent that the colossal
enemy ring around the Pusan Perimeter has vanished,
and it is now equally obvious that the successful inva-
sion of Inchon by the Marines has caused the turn-
about. Eighth Army and the South Korean Army are fi-
nally on the threshold of the long-awaited offensive
needed to regain their honor after the long period of
defeat and at times humiliation.
The South Koreans had been matched against the
N.K. 5th, 8th, 12th and 15th Divisions on the north-
ern front of the Pusan Perimeter. Beginning this day, the
South Koreans will advance about 70 miles within a
week. At present, about 160,000 U.N. troops are de-
ployed within the Pusan Perimeter, about 76,000 in
Eighth Army area and 75,000 in the South Korean
Army sector.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, 7th
Cavalry zone, TF-777 continues the advance, spear-
headed by TF Lynch. At 0430, the ground troops cross
the Naktong River to resume the chase. Companies I
and K walk through the chilled river water, and in near
cadence with the soggy march, an enemy ammo depot
on the opposite bank detonates and creates a rousing
boom. Nonetheless, the two companies seize the far
bank at 0530, about twenty-two hours after the task
force had departed Tabu-dong. The 36-mile drive has
scooped up 5 enemy tanks, about 50 trucks, 20 pieces
of artillery and 10 motorcycles. In addition, the task
force has killed or captured about 500 enemy troops.
The 1st Battalion, commanded by Major William
 405
O. Witherspoon, bolts the river and drives northwest
to Sangju, which is discovered to be free of the enemy.
In the meantime, engineers modify the crossing site by
establishing a ferry and using rafts, each strong enough
to transport the tanks and trucks across the river. The
task is complete by the following day.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, Lt. Colonel Hallett Edson re-
places Colonel Raymond Palmer as regimental command-
ing officer. Palmer embarks for Japan. Later, during early
November, Palmer regains his command. Other rank-
ing officers in the regiment are unhappy with the de-
cision by the corps commander, General Milburn, to
bring in Edson.
In the 24th Division sector, General Church orders the
division to initiate its attack. Three regiments advance
northwest in a drive that plows along the Taejon–Seoul
Highway moving toward Kumch’on. The 21st Regiment
spearheads the assault, but General Church has modified
his plans to permit the regiments to leap-frog to main-
tain pressure against the enemy. The advance encounters
stiff resistance, which is raised by units of the N.K. 105th
Armored Division. The route is blocked at various points
by an array of concealed and entrenched weapons, in-
cluding antitank guns and tanks. The roads are satu-
rated with minefields to further hinder the advance, but
the Americans push forward.
During the afternoon, a ferocious exchange erupts
between the tanks of Company C, 6th Medium Tank
Battalion, and those of the enemy. Four Patton M-46
tanks succumb to the combined enemy fire of tanks
and antitank guns. But three enemy tanks are knocked
out by air strikes and U.S. tank fire. Toward midnight,
ROK troops are aboard trains at Inchon, en route to participate in the attack to regain Seoul.
September 23, 1950
the 5th RCT is poised to jump ahead of the 21st Reg-
iment and take the lead to Kumch’on. Meanwhile, the
1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, continues its advance.
The regiment drives south along the Waegwan–Kum-
ch’on Highway moving toward Songju, which it seizes
during the early morning hours of the 24th.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the N.K.
2nd, 4th and 9th Divisions, which have been deployed
on the opposing side of the Naktong Bulge, retreat west
under the pressure of the Eighth Army attacks. The
N.K. 9th Division, in the lead, heads through Hy-
opch’on, but its dust barely dissipates as contingents of
the 2nd Division arrive. The N.K. 4th Division de-
parts Sinban-ni and swings toward Hyopch’on, while
the 2nd Division moves through Ch’ogye, heading to-
ward Hyopch’on. At Ch’ogye, the 38th Regiment bat-
tles fiercely and overwhelms the enemy rear-guards.
The U.S. 38th Regiment closes against Hyopch’on on
the 24th, in synchronization with the 23rd Regiment.
In the 25th Division sector, in accordance with the
change in the direction of attack by division, the 27th
Regiment moves from the south flank to redeploy on the
division’s north flank.
In other activity, General Kean establishes Task Force
Torman, commanded by Captain Charles Torman
(CO, 25th Reconnaissance Co.). During the evening,
the task force passes through the 27th Regiment at
Paedun-ni. The 27th Regiment then redeploys on the
north flank at Chungam-ni, from where it will attack
and establish a bridgehead on the opposite side of the
Nam River. From there, it is to attack through Uiryong
and then drive to Chinju.
September 24, 1950
In other activity, the enemy resistance against the
35th Regiment at the Chinju Pass dissipates as the
North Korean 6th Division contingents withdraw dur-
ing the night of the 23rd-24th.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force relocates its
Korea headquarters to Taegu from Pusan. Also, Far East
Air Force initiates the first known special operations
mission of the Korean War when on this day, SB-17
aircraft, attached to the 3d Air Rescue Squadron based
in Japan, execute a classified flight over Korea.
The SB-17 is a long-range four-engine search and
rescue aircraft that is manned by a crew of nine or ten
men. Initially, the aircraft was a prototype of the B-17
and received its first flight in July 1935. The plane is
heavily armed with thirteen 50-inch machine guns and
has the capacity to carry a bomb-load of 17,600
pounds. These Flying Fortresses also played a huge part
in the air campaign in Europe during World War II.
Afterward, about fifty of the Flying Fortresses (B-
17Gs) were converted specifically for search and sea
rescue missions and re-designated as SB-17s. Two of
these, attached to 3rd Air Rescue Squadron, serve dur-
ing the Korean Conflict from their base in Japan. Two
other RB-17s (reconnaissance attached to photo map-
ping flight), based in the Philippines at Clark Air Base,
also serve the U.S. in Korea by executing special mis-
sions to gather intelligence. The planes contain radar
and they carry boats that can be dropped into the sea
to rescue downed pilots.
— In the United States: Congress overrides a pres-
idential veto, enabling the McCarran Internal Security
Act to become law. The legislation mandates that all
Communist organizations must open their member-
ship records and disclose their finances. In addition,
the act requires all members of the Communist Party
in the U.S. to register with the Justice Department.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, upon his return
to Tokyo, sends a message to the Joint Chiefs of Staff
in Washington explaining that at the earliest opportu-
nity, he is going to restore President Syngman Rhee,
his cabinet and other government officials to power.
September 24 Inchon–Seoul vicinity: The 17th
Regiment, 7th Division, arrives at Inchon from Pusan,
where it had been floating reserve, Eighth Army. The
regiment debarks on the 25th, and within four addi-
tional days, the unit will be engaged in combat. In
enemy-held Seoul, the N.K. 18th Division, which had
fought in the vicinity of Yongdungp’o, regroups and
prepares to evacuate Seoul and evade the Marines by
heading north on Uijongbu Road toward Ch’orwon.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, as usual, the Marine
aviators are overtaxed. On this day, the 2nd Battalion
receives abundant air support. Marine squadron VMF-
214, commanded by Lt. Colonel Lischeid, strikes
enemy positions every two hours, with each strike ex-
ecuted by 5 planes. In addition, VMF-212 establishes
a record by executing 12 flights that include 46 sorties.
In the 5th Marines sector, the North Koreans retain
control of Hills 66 (Marines’ Hill 56) and 88 to the
406
front of Hill 105 Center, having repulsed the S.K.
Marines and the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, since the
22nd. According to OpnO 26–50, Hill 105 North is
the final objective of the 2nd Battalion. However,
Smith’s Ridge and Hill 88 must also be taken by the
beleaguered 2nd Battalion.
Company D, 2nd Battalion, drives against Hill 66
(56) in synchronization with contingents of the 3rd
Battalion that attack from their positions on Hill 296
to strike the enemy’s flank. Company D had watched
the previous night pass under relative calm. Company
F, 2nd Battalion, has been hit especially hard, and its
three platoon leaders (Nolan, Anderson and Belbusti)
have all been wounded.
About 2,500 Communist troops stand in front of
the two scheduled attacking Marine companies. At
0610, the heavy guns of the 11th Marines signal the
imminent attack, and planes (VMF-323) arrive to bol-
ster the twenty-minute bombardment. At 0630, Com-
pany F drives from the eastern slope of Hill 56 (Lt.
Harry Nolan has been evacuated). Lieutenant Belbusti
leads about 20 troops toward the heights east of the
railroad tunnel, while Lieutenant Anderson jumps off
with the able-bodied men of the 2nd and 3rd platoons,
which combined, number about 20 men.
The attack receives some added muscle when planes
(VMF-323) zoom overhead at low levels and drop their
bombs in close proximity, but ahead of the charging
Marines. The attack on the east slope succeeds and F
Company seizes high ground, from which it gains the
advantage. Later, planes attached to VMF-214 arrive to
assure control of the area.
Following the fierce firefights, both platoons are or-
dered to push forward toward a stone wall on the
enemy’s flank, giving the Marines targets at 300 yards
distant. The Communists, caught naked in an open
field, are quickly shredded, and the objective is taken.
Meanwhile, Company D attacks under the cover of
a thick mist and permeating smoke that hover over the
burning dwellings. The Marines advance toward the
base of Hill 56. Suddenly, as the contingent encroaches
the objective, enemy fire, originating on Smith’s Ridge,
creates a wall of fire that temporarily prevents further
progress. The incessant barrage includes artillery and
mortar fire as well as automatic weapons.
Marine armor roars forward to assist, but one vehi-
cle strikes a mine and another sustains a direct hit by a
mortar shell, which disables it. Casualties continue to
mount as Company D attempts to break from its un-
tenable positions. The company commander, Lieuten-
ant H.J. Smith, commits every man in the outfit. Still,
no advance occurs and the ammunition is rapidly being
expended. Relentlessly, the enemy fire continues, an-
swered with equal fervor by the stalled Marines.
A donnybrook ensues during the stalemate. In some
instances, the opposing sides are within grenade-
throwing distances. The Marines, however, score much
more accurately with their tosses. A squad led by
Sergeant Robert Smith moves around the southern flank
of the hill to strike from the flank, but it encounters
 407
rock solid resistance. Nine men, including a corpsman,
are slain. Sergeant Smith and two other wounded
Marines survive.
At about 1000, Colonel Roise receives word by radio
that Lieutenant H.J. Smith’s Company D is in dire need
of reinforcements, but the battalion commander is
compelled to deny the request, stating that the reserve
troops (Company E) must be retained for the assault
against the ultimate objectives. Meanwhile, Colonel
Roise, the battalion commander, becomes wounded,
but it is not serious. After receiving medical attention
for his injured arm, Roise returns to his headquarters
to complete the mission.
By about 1030, the fog and smoke vanish and the
skies clear, providing the Marines with an opportu-
nity. The artillery of the 11th Marines, the mortars of
Lieutenant George Grimes’ 81-mm section (2nd Bat-
talion) and Marine planes arrive to bolster the ground
troops. Initially, four Corsairs of VMF-323 execute re-
peated low-level sweeps. Subsequently, additional
planes arrive.
During two of the air attacks, enemy antiaircraft fire
damages 5 of 10 attacking planes. There is no lapse of
enemy fire. Mortars and automatic weapons turn up
the heat. Undaunted, despite being held up for about
two hours, the remnants of Company D, commanded
by Lieutenant Smith, remain determined to seize the
hill.
During the first part of the afternoon, the 30 re-
maining riflemen of Company D and 14 other Marines
(Weapons Platoon) form to attack. Marine aircraft
again soar overhead and deposit bombs and napalm
while strafing the objective. Soon after, a Corsair exe-
cutes two dry runs over the target, the latter signaling
the commencement of the attack. The Marines find
themselves advancing over and through large numbers
of enemy bodies that have been slain, in great part, by
the thunderous fire of the artillery and aircraft.
Marines spring toward the crest in awe of the num-
bers of Communist dead, which explains the lack of
fierce resistance. Short of the summit, Smith halts the
attack to regroup for the final push. Shortly thereafter,
32 Marines, with Smith at the front, dart from their
positions and sprint toward the crest. The charge sur-
prises the enemy, but not sufficiently to halt their return
fire, which pours down the slope.
Lieutenant H.J. Smith is killed during the ascent.
The remaining able-bodied Marines maintain the
thrust, and twenty-six Marines place their clamps on the
summit. The defenders react in various ways. Some
feign death, while others gallop down the reverse slopes.
Some others resist ferociously. Undaunted, despite the
weary 100-yard dash up the treacherous slope, the
Marines crush the resistance and secure the hill. The
foxholes are corroded with layers of corpses and the rest
of the summit is carpeted with other enemy dead. Even
the bunkers have been transformed into crypts.
Meanwhile, 11 trailing Marines bring up the machine
guns and ammunition to ensure retention of the bloody
crest. The enemy survivors come under vicious fire as
September 24, 1950
they dash down the slope. In the meantime, more
Company D troops arrive at the peak to bring the de-
fending force to 56 men. Of these, 26 are wounded.
Nevertheless, the wounded refuse to be evacuated.
At 1300, Lieutenant Karle Seydel, the lone un-
wounded officer of Company D, radios word to battal-
ion headquarters that its objectives, including Hill 66
(56), are secure. The North Koreans mount a futile
counterattack to retake Hill 66. At day’s end, battle-
weary Company D has sustained 176 casualties, in-
cluding 36 killed and 116 wounded (and evacuated).
The company’s complement of 206 Marines now stands
at twenty-six able-bodied men and the additional four
wounded men who had remained on the crest.
On the following day, the 2nd Battalion reinitiates
the attack against Hill 105 Center. In other 2nd Bat-
talion activity, Company E is restrained from attacking
until the other two companies secure their objectives.
Following the victories of Companies D and F, Com-
pany E strikes against Hill 105 North.
At 1500, while en route to its objective, enemy fire
rains upon Company E shortly after it passes Hill 56.
The menacing mortar and automatic weapons fire hin-
ders the advance, and other obstacles remain in the
path. The Communists had laid mines along the ap-
proaches. Five tanks (1st Platoon, Company B, 1st
Tank Battalion) push forward to augment the assault,
but they get snagged in a minefield. One tank is lost to
mortar fire and another is destroyed after striking a
mine. The remaining three tanks are stymied, unable
to navigate through the minefield.
Quick action by one daring engineer, Sergeant Stan-
ley McPherson (Company A, 1st Engineer Battalion),
forestalls disaster when he ventures onto the blocked
road, and while under strong fire, he singlehandedly
clears a path for the armor. The tanks then speed for-
ward and unleash their firepower, which decimates a
few machine gun strongholds and knocks out two an-
titank guns. However, the delay is costly; twilight be-
gins to overtake the area and forces a postponement
against what appears to be the prominent obstacle fac-
ing Company E — Hill 72, which is straddled between
Hills 105 North and 105 Center.
In the 3rd Battalion sector, the enemy launches two
unsuccessful predawn assaults against Marine positions
on Hill 296. The 3rd Battalion is scheduled to drive
down the eastern spur of Hill 296 to execute a flank-
ing attack and to supply cover fire for the 2nd Battal-
ion. The 1st Battalion is to relieve the 3rd Battalion on
Hills 216 and 296. Following the shattering of the
predawn attacks, Company H remains engaged with
the Communists on the eastern slopes of Hill 296, but
at 1550, Company G swings out and smashes into the
enemy’s right flank in a coordinated attack with Com-
pany H to terminate the resistance there.
The 3rd Battalion incurs five killed and thirty-three
wounded on this day. By about 2000, the 1st Battalion
completes the relief of Company I and various other
3rd Battalion troops on Hill 216.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, atop
September 24, 1950
Hill 105 South, guards the site on the Han where the
1st Marines will cross.
In the 1st Marines sector, dawn sparks the initiation
of the attack. Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion,
moves out and secures a crossing site on the Han at a
point about 2,000 yards south of Hill 105 South, but
it is an exhausting ordeal, as enemy mines permeate
the area. Nevertheless, elements of the 2nd Battalion,
1st Marines, begin the move from their positions near
Yongdungp’o at about 0800. LVTs (Company A, 1st
Tractor Bn.) speed the battalion across the river, com-
pleting the trek by about 0945. The 2nd Battalion sus-
tains 2 men killed and 9 wounded, due to unexpected
fire from Hill 105 South, thought to have been reduced
previously by the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines. Later,
Colonel Sutter’s troops establish contact with units of
the 5th Marines on the north bank.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, commanded by Lt.
Colonel Jack Hawkins, and Regimental Headquarters
follow the 2nd Battalion across the Han. The 1st Bat-
talion receives orders to drive east and jump through the
2nd Battalion, which is easier said than done. The 2nd
Battalion is sprinting toward Hill 79, the regimental
objective. At about 1300, unexpected enemy fire again
erupts from concealed positions on Hill 105 South.
The hostile fire inflicts 4 casualties on the 1st Battalion.
At 1500, Colonel Hawkins’ Marines seize Hill 79.
They decorate it with Old Glory so enemy troops in
nearby railroad marshaling yards could clearly see that
the Stars and Stripes had entered the southwest section
of Seoul.
In other activity, at 1515, the 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines, commanded by Lt. Colonel Thomas Ridge,
receives orders from Division to relinquish its defense
of Hill 108 south of the Han bridges. The battalion is
to revert to regimental control and begin to cross the
Han. Ridge’s unit completes the crossing by 2000.
Again, enemy fire zips into the newest occupants of the
north bank of the Han. Ridge’s Marines engage in a
heated but brief exchange of fire with the enemy on
Hill 105 South. Company I is committed to perma-
nently extinguish the nagging opposition. Ten Commu-
nist troops are taken prisoner, but the Marines lose one
man killed and two wounded.
The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 1st Marines, relieve the
1st Battalion, 5th Marines, and assume responsibility
for the southern flank of the Marines’ line along the
western fringe of Seoul. The 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines,
settles down in an assembly area slightly to the rear.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 187th Airborne RCT,
relieves the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, permitting the
Marine battalion to cross the Han and join the regi-
ment. Also, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, having con-
cluded debarkation at Inchon, rejoins the regiment.
The 7th Marines, on the left flank of the 5th Marines,
is ordered to sweep across the northern tip of Seoul to
guard the north flank and the rear of the 5th Marines.
Simultaneously, it is to block the escape routes to the
north.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, General Almond
408
arrives at Division headquarters at 0930. He confers
with Generals Barr and Henry Hodes, the command-
ing officer and assistant CO, respectively, and with Col-
onel Louis Heath, the divisional chief of staff. The dis-
cussions include the possibility of a 7th Division attack
into Seoul on the following day. Later, when Almond
arrives back at his headquarters, he informs S.K. Col-
onel Paik to prepare for battle, in case his S.K. 17th
Regiment is attached to the 32nd Regiment for the at-
tack into Seoul.
In the meantime, General Almond decides that he
will order the 7th Division to attack into Seoul. At
1400, Army Generals Barr and Hodes, Marine Gen-
eral O.P. Smith and other officers, including Colonel
Forney, USMC, X Corps deputy chief of staff, and Col-
onel Beauchamp, CO, 32nd Regiment, are informed by
Almond during a meeting at Yongdungp’o Circle that
the attack will commence at 0600 on the 25th.
X Corps supplements the 7th Division, attaching
the Marine 1st Amphibious Tractor Battalion (minus
one company) and two platoons of Company A, 56th
Amphibious Tank and Tractor Battalion, to it. In ad-
dition, the S.K. 17th Regiment is attached to the 7th
Division. The three main objectives of the 32nd Reg-
iment’s attack are to capture South Mountain, drive
two miles east and secure Hill 120, then capture Hill
348, the dominating feature five miles east of Seoul.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 32nd Regiment,
launches a successful predawn attack against enemy po-
sitions on the south side of the Han River across from
Seoul. The surprise attack becomes a deadly wake-up
call for some sleeping North Koreans. The battalion
easily reduces the opposition, while it also seizes sup-
plies and captures a regimental headquarters. The 2nd
Battalion then continues the attack and secures the
south bank of the Han at a bend in the river southeast
of Seoul.
In the meantime, the 31st Regiment is in the Suwon
vicinity. The 2nd Battalion, 31st Regiment, deployed
on Hill 142 about two miles south of the airfield, comes
under severe attack at about 2300. Enemy tanks storm
the left flank along the Suwon–Osan road. The battal-
ion holds tough and receives some strong assistance
from both the 57th FABn and Battery B, 15th FABn.
The attack is repelled and four T-34 tanks are de-
stroyed.
In the Eighth Army area, the Army modifies its pre-
vious breakout operation order. It directs IX Corps to
launch unlimited attacks to seize Chonju and Kang-
gyong.
In Air Force activity, planes continue to seek enemy
troop concentrations, but some of the pilots complete
their sorties and arrive back at their bases without hav-
ing discovered any targets.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, Divi-
sion focuses on the area around Sangju–Naktong-ni
until the 25th, but the 7th Cavalry continues to ad-
vance.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the tanks of TF-777 cross the
Naktong by noon, and they advance 10 miles to Sanju
 409
to join the task force there. Colonel William Harris
dispatches one platoon of tanks and Company K, 7th
Cavalry, to Poun, a thirty-mile jaunt. Meanwhile, Gen-
eral Gay orders a contingent of tanks and infantry to ad-
vance toward Kumch’on to bolster the 24th Division el-
ements that are slugging it out with the enemy on the
Waegwan–Taejon–Seoul Highway. The 7th Cavalry
contingent reaches the 24th Division, but in so doing,
it exits the cavalry zone of action and soon after receives
orders to return to its operating area.
In the 24th Division sector, during the first moments
of the 24th, the 5th RCT takes the point and drives
toward Kumch’on. A concentration of enemy troops
on Hill 140, about three miles outside of Kumch’on,
raises tenacious resistance. The advance stalls and the
enemy on the hill buys some time to permit other units
to withdraw. The N.K. 9th Division retreats toward
Taejon, but it is diverted to the area around Hill 140.
Other enemy units are committed at Kumch’on to hold
back the surging Eighth Army. The rear guard forces in-
clude the surviving tanks of the N.K. 105th Armored
Division and the 849th Independent Anti-Tank Reg-
iment. The slugfest accelerates as the Americans en-
croach the objective. Air strikes destroy five enemy
tanks and U.S. ground fire finishes off another three.
Meanwhile, the ground troops pound the enemy. The
849th Independent Anti Tank Regiment is nearly anni-
hilated. Six Patton tanks are lost to enemy fire. Later in
the day, the 21st Regiment drives forward north of the
highway, establishes contact with the 5th RCT and bol-
sters its attack. In conjunction, some enemy contingents
lay back along the Waegwan Highway and engage the
Division’s trailing unit, the 19th Regiment. By day’s end,
the 5th RCT and its supporting contingents sustain
about 100 casualties, due mostly to tank and mortar fire.
In related activity, the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment,
seizes Songju at 0200. Later, the unit moves out to
hook up with the 27th British Brigade to conduct mop-
up operations in the area. In the meantime, the N.K.
10th Division begins to bury its artillery before initi-
ating its withdrawal.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the 23rd
Regiment rapidly drives from the south in coordina-
tion with the 38th Regiment, which closes against Hy-
opch’on from the northeast to unleash a double envel-
opment assault. A contingent of 38th Regiment
establishes a roadblock that severs the Chinju–Kum-
ch’on Road and blocks the northeastern escape route
from Hyopch’on. About two battalions of enemy troops
are trapped in the town.
During the afternoon, the 23rd Regiment drives into
the town and pushes the enemy out. Unwittingly, they
flee northeast directly into the roadblock. About 300
enemy troops are killed. But the plight of the enemy is
only beginning; soaring Air Force F-51 fighters join the
fight. The planes fly fifty-three sorties and further pul-
verize the survivors while they flee for the hills. Later,
after dusk, the 1st Battalion, 38th Regiment, moves
into Hypoch’on, and joins the 23rd Regiment there.
In the 25th Division sector, Task Force Torman drives
September 25, 1950
along the coastal road heading toward Chinju, but it en-
counters resistance from elements of the N.K. 3rd Bat-
talion, 104th Security Regiment. By dusk, the task
force secures the heights at the road junction about
three miles outside Chinju. The enemy force is com-
posed of about 200 troops, according to information
later gained from the battalion commanding officer,
Lt. Colonel Pak Chong Song, during an interrogation.
In other activity, the 35th Regiment regroups at the
Chinju pass, subsequent to the withdrawal of the
enemy. During the night, a patrol probes to the Nam
River and discovers that the enemy has knocked out
the bridge span. Also, General Kean, to better handle
his area of responsibility with regard to IX Corps ob-
jectives, establishes two key task forces, TF Matthews
and TF Dolvin. TF Dolvin had formerly been TF Tor-
man.
Task Force Matthews is composed of the 25th Recon-
naissance Company, Company A, 79th Tank Battal-
ion; one platoon of Company B, 67th Engineer Com-
bat Battalion; an Air TAC party; and the medical
section of the 27th Regiment. Two additional task
forces also are involved with the attack. TF Matthews
spearheads the assault, but is closely trailed by TF Blair,
commanded by Major Melvin Blair (CO, 3rd Bn., 24th
Regiment), and TF Corley, commanded by Colonel
John Corley (CO, 24th Regiment).
The two primary task forces are to attack simultane-
ously, but TF Matthews (on the left) is unable to exe-
cute the mission until the 27th, due to the three de-
molished bridges west of Chinju. TF Dolvin,
commanded by Lt. Colonel Welborn G. Dolvin, CO,
89th Tank Battalion, commences its attack from the
division right on the 26th. The primary components of
the task force are Companies A and B, 89th Tank Bat-
talion, and Companies B and C, 35th Regiment.
Task Force Dolvin will split into two units, each
composed of tanks and infantry contingents. Other
units attached to TF Dolvin are the 1st Platoon, Com-
pany A, 65th Engineer Combat Battalion; 2nd Pla-
toon, Heavy Mortar Company, 35th Regiment; the
medical detachment, 89th Tank Bn., and some task
force trains.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th and 8th Di-
visions push rapidly through the mountains and gain
about sixteen miles on this day. The 6th Division
reaches Andong before midnight. Meanwhile, the N.K.
8th and 12th Divisions abandon their positions in the
vicinity of Andong, but they raise resistance during the
withdrawal. Forward units of the S.K. force enter the
city. Other S.K. troops arrive to block some of the es-
cape routes, which forces elements of the N.K. 8th Di-
vision to divert and move into the mountains. Most of
the survivors (about 1,500) make it to the Yalu River.
In the meantime, most of the N.K. 12th Division
has exited the town. The S.K. 6th Division, operating
on the left, drives toward Hamch’ang.
September 25 On or about this date, the N.K.
I Corps orders all units still south of Waegwan to retire
September 25, 1950
A Sherman medium tank (M4) pauses along a road in the vicinity of Kumch’on while infantry troops
pass by.
northward. This is the final day of action for the USS
Sicily and VMF-214 during the Seoul-Inchon cam-
paign. During the latter part of the day it embarks to
receive required maintenance. The USS Badoeng Strait
and its VMF-323 assume responsibility for further ac-
tion in support of the ground troops.
The commanding officer of the Badoeng Strait bans
the number 17 from the carrier. The first plane lost by
the Carrier on D-Day plus 2 was numbered 17. Two
days later, a sergeant examining the new aircraft, also
designated number 17, was mortally wounded when
the guns accidentally fired. And then on September 23,
the ill-fated Corsair 17 is again plagued when its pilot,
Major Robert Floeck, is killed. Today, Plane Number
17 leaves the carrier and yet another life is lost, prompt-
ing Captain John Thach to permanently banish the
number 17.
Also on this day, Captain Leslie E. Brown, who on
September 9 became the first Marine pilot to fly a jet
against an enemy force, is killed on another mission.
His plane is downed by antiaircraft fire.
Inchon–Seoul vicinity: In the X Corps area, slightly
before dark, aerial observance detects enemy columns
moving out of Seoul. General Almond places an
urgent request for Far East Air Forces to illuminate
the escape route with flares to aid Marine Night Fight-
ers. A B-29 arrives and its crew obliges and soon
after spends about three hours’ flying time over the
area to deposit the flares above the enemy. Two gigan-
410
tic enemy columns receive some punishing blows
from the Marine planes. In conjunction, X Corps ar-
tillery units unleash their guns and deliver an enfilade
of blazing fire upon the closer portions of the retiring
enemy.
General Almond makes what some construe as a pre-
mature proclamation slightly before midnight. He pro-
claims the liberation of Seoul. The announcement is
made precisely three months to the day since the city
had been captured by the Communists, and coinciden-
tally, it is on the same day that Almond had promised
General MacArthur that it would fall.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 187th Airborne
Regiment, arrives at Kimpo Airfield by air from Ashiya,
Japan. The airborne troops take responsibility for the
airfield.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, today, all the Divi-
sion’s regiments will be north of the Han River and
linked together. At 0700 the Division commences the
final phase of its attack to seize Seoul. According to
OpnO 11–50, RCT 1 and the attached 2nd Korean
Marine Battalion is to capture that portion of Seoul
within its zone (South Mountain and Ducksoo Palace
area). Following these seizures, it is to advance about 6
additional miles and seize Objective Able, the heights
beyond the northeastern suburbs. RCT-5 its attached
division reconnaissance company and the 1st Korean
Marine Battalion are to secure the northwest sector of
Seoul.
 411
Following this gain, they are to capture Objective
Baker, the heights above the Seoul–Uijongbu Road,
which lie about 6 miles outside the city. RCT-7 is to
seize Objective Charlie, the heights above the
Seoul–Kaesong Road near Chonsong-ni, about 6 miles
northwest of the city’s center-point. The combat team
is to simultaneously cover the division’s left flank. In
conjunction, the 3rd Battalion, 187th Airborne RCT,
is to remain under the control of the 1st Marine Divi-
sion with orders to guard the left flank, both south and
west of the Han River.
Also, the attached South Korean Marine units are
utilized for mop-up operations. The Korean Marine
Regiment (minus the 1st and 2nd Battalions) is to re-
main as division reserve. Subsequent to the recapture of
the city, it is to resume control of its detached battal-
ions and occupy the capital.
At 2040, the 1st Marine Division receives a somewhat
confusing order, directing it to launch an immediate
attack: “X Corps TACair commander, reports enemy
fleeing city of Seoul on road north.... He is conducting
heavy air attack and will continue same. You will attack
now to the limit of your objective to insure maximum
destruction of enemy forces.” But Colonel Alpha
Bowser, 1st Marine Division G-3, remains uncon-
vinced that the Communists are abandoning the city.
He inquires at X Corps headquarters and he is informed
that the order, issued by General Almond, stands. Gen-
eral O.P. Smith is adamantly opposed to the order, and
he, too, calls headquarters, only to receive a similar re-
buff from the chief of staff, General Ruffner, who ex-
plains that General Almond insists on an immediate
attack.
At 2200, Smith reluctantly and against his instincts
directs the 1st and 5th Marines, commanded by
Colonels Puller and Murray respectively, to attack, but
he stipulates that they move only along routes that can
be easily identified in the dark. The 1st Marines receives
the orders at 2205, and the 5th Marines is informed at
2215, the latter having just turned back an enemy at-
tack about two hours earlier. Both regiments take meas-
ures to prepare their exhausted troops to again attack,
and the word is passed to the 7th and 11th Marines.
Within minutes after the orders to attack are received,
the 5th Marines is hit by an enemy counterattack.
In the 5th Marines sector, the 1st Battalion, com-
manded by Colonel Newton, having completed its re-
lief of the 3rd Battalion units on Hills 216 and 296, is
poised to advance on the left of the 3rd Battalion upon
orders. The leftward shift by the 1st Battalion postures
it to protect the steep entrances to both hills. Mean-
while, artillery and air strikes pummel the enemy line
throughout the morning. The Marine air support
(VMF-214), sustains another loss, its second in two
days, when Lt. Colonel Lischeid is shot from the sky
over the western portion of Seoul. Within about two ad-
ditional hours, Lt. Colonels Wyczawski and Volcansek,
the commanders of VMF-212 and VMF(N)-542 re-
spectively, also are downed by enemy fire, but these
two pilots survive.
September 25, 1950
Subsequent to the preparatory barrages, the 3rd Bat-
talion, under Taplett, drives down Hill 296, in concert
with the 2nd Battalion, under Roise, which grinds
toward Hill 105 North. The 3rd Battalion is to secure
the two southeastern knobs of Hill 296. The 2nd Bat-
talion assault is bolstered by fire from the 3rd Battalion
on Hill 296 and one platoon of tanks. Company E
spearheads the attack. Company D (less than full
strength), on its left, drives northward from Hill 66
(Smith’s Ridge) and follows the ridge line that leans
southwest from Hill 296. From there, Company D,
led by Lieutenant Seydel, pivots southeast and contin-
ues its hard fought advance.At 1320, following a gru-
eling contest, Hill 88 falls to Company D. Meanwhile,
Company E, led by Captain Jaskilka, encounters fierce
fire originating on enemy-held Hill 72. Despite the
horrific fire and mounting casualties, the 1st Platoon,
led by Lieutenant Deptula, silences the mortars and the
automatic weapons fire. Hill 72 is secured at 1335.
Company F, held in reserve, then advances to occupy
Hill 72.
During the ongoing melee, at 1310, air strikes are
requested to thump the enemy positions on Hill 105
North to lessen the resistance against the final attack
by the remaining two platoons of Company E. At 1325,
the artillery roars and signals the imminent assault
by the platoons of Lieutenants James Epley and
Samuel Eddy. The attacking Marines relentlessly grind
forward, and by 1545, Hill 105 North falls to the 2nd
Battalion.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion gnaws forward. Like
the 2nd Battalion, it, too, receives powerful blows from
enemy artillery, as long-range interdiction fire arrives
from Hill 105 North and from Hill 338, on its
right and left respectively. After being temporarily
held up by Colonel Murray, while Hill 105 North is
being secured by the 2nd Battalion, Companies G
and H resume the attack at 1435 against extremely
dense fire originating from their left. The Marines plow
forward, taking heavy casualties as they advance.
Company H is hit especially hard as it grinds forward
along the giant knob on the open left flank. Neverthe-
less, it reaches the objective, an intermediate peak, by
1635.
In the meantime, Company G secures an unnamed
peak north of the 2nd Battalion’s positions, but on the
same ridge. Contact is quickly made between the two
battalions. Following the seizures, Company I jumps
off to continue the assault at about 1700; however, the
enemy launches a counterattack and draws blood. The
Communist attack is augmented by effective support fire
that presses both Companies H and I. The Marines
maintain their positions and pound the attacking Reds.
Finally, by about dusk, the enemy losses climb to about
100 killed and they abort the assault.
The beleaguered Marines then prepare for the
next task. Company H reverts to battalion reserve.
Company I assumes responsibility for the front
lines, and it prepares to drive into Seoul on the follow-
ing day.
September 25, 1950
In related activity, other elements of the 2nd Battal-
ion successfully attack Hill 105 Center to reduce the
resistance there by mid-afternoon. According to infor-
mation ascertained from enemy prisoners, about 500
North Koreans are killed on Hill 105 Center. Conse-
quently, the Marine advances have destroyed the west-
ern defenses of Seoul and inflicted severe casualties
upon the enemy. About 1,200 Communist dead are
strewn about the hills and in the foxholes. The Marines
estimate total enemy dead along the western defenses
by all weaponry at 1,750.
The 5th Marines enter the northwest sector of the
city and advance toward Sodaemun Prison and Govern-
ment House. A synchronized attack by the 1st and
5th Marines on the following day is planned by the
two regiments during the evening of the 25th. But,
while the 5th Marine Regiment is preparing the
attack, new orders arrive at slightly after 2200 for an
immediate attack into the city by the 1st and 5th
Marines. However, the enemy strikes first and the 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines, is attacked by about 200 North
Koreans. A savage night-long battle ensues, but the
Marines repel the Communists and terminate the ac-
tion at 0445.
While the fighting is raging between the Marines
and the enemy, the 5th Marines also has patrols out in
an attempt to establish contact with the 1st and 7th
Marines. Contingents extending south and southeast
fail to make contact with the 1st Marines, and the pa-
trols to the north are unable to locate the 7th Marines.
General O.P. Smith had directed the regiments to make
contact before assaulting Seoul in the darkness. The di-
visional attack will be postponed and the 5th Marines
does not advance from its positions during the night,
except for the patrols.
In the 1st Marines sector, the 1st Battalion maintains
a blocking position at Hill 79 along the southern por-
tion of Seoul during the morning, while it waits for the
3rd Battalion to alter its course of attack against Seoul.
The 3rd Battalion, led by Lt. Colonel Thomas Ridge,
advances prior to dawn and moves east through the po-
sitions of the 2nd Battalion in a column of companies.
At that point, it pivots sharply, then drives north toward
the center of Seoul.
At about the same time, the 1st Battalion shifts
slightly backward from its positions, and then it too
drives north, operating on the right flank of the 3rd
Battalion. The maneuver puts great strength against
Seoul, but it creates a hole between the 1st and 5th
Marines. Due to an unexpected crisis at Hill 105 South,
the 1st Marines lack tank support. The tank column ex-
pects to encounter mines along the route, which par-
allels the rail lines that lead into Seoul. Therefore, the
two tank platoons of Company B (commanded by
Captain Bruce Williams), 1st Tank Battalion, are bol-
stered by engineers and by one infantry platoon of
Company F to safeguard its passage through the lines
of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines.
Infantry take the point and the engineers are couched
between the tanks. The advance through the gap in the
412
lines occurs without incident. But when the column
reaches the midway point, an ambush is sprung. Enemy
fire rings out from Hill 105 South, thought to have
previously been secured by the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, and swept clean by mop-up teams of the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines. The ambush, perpetrated by
about 300 troops, catches the column off guard and its
ripping fire inflicts casualties.
Lieutenant Babe, commanding officer 2nd Platoon,
Company C, Engineers, is struck immediately. The
debilitating wound prevents him from ordering the
infantry under Sergeant Farrington to strike the left
flank of the enemy to eliminate the blockage. Soon
after, Sergeant Paolino assumes command of Babe’s en-
gineers, but the enemy force appears much too power-
ful.
Meanwhile, the commanding officer of the tanks,
Captain Bruce Williams, ponders a withdrawal to avoid
being overrun, but he decides to commit his equaliz-
ers. He sends out a flamethrower tank and an M-26
escort. By circuitous route, the armor maneuvers into
position on the left flank of the infested slope. The
tanks immediately roar into action. Bellowing bursts
of napalm bounce along the entire string of enemy en-
trenchments, compelling the inhabitants to seek cooler
ground. They flee directly into the menacing machine
gun fire of Lieutenant Cummings’ platoon and then,
his tanks shred the fleeing enemy troops. All the
while, the engineers and infantry reorganize along the
rails and lower slopes by Sergeants Paolino and Far-
rington respectively. A sharp line of cover fire begins
to emerge, but yet another hazard threatens the
Marines.
Nearby, enemy grenades begin to explode, and they
activate the Marines’ instinctive alarms. They spot
the problem: three primitive huts that sit on the
slope just under the enemy trenches on the left flank.
They also discover that an enemy cave is concealed
by the third hut. Sergeant Paolino receives permission
from Captain Williams to apply tank fire. Lieutenant
Cummings responds to a string of hefty bangs on
his tank by Paolino. He swivels his turret and pum-
mels the trio of huts with several devastating 90-mm
shells.
While adjusting his fire to ring the newest target,
Cummings and the others observe about ten enemy
troops as they file out of the cave with their hands
extended high above their heads. After this initial
surrender, a steady stream of Communist troops
pours out of the endangered cave. Soon after, 131
North Koreans are captured, including two weapon-
carrying women in uniform. About 150 enemy troop are
killed. Hill 105 South, thought benign, is finally dor-
mant.
The column, outnumbered by its prisoners, reiniti-
ates the march and pushes forward after searching the
women prisoners. They claim to be nurses, not sol-
diers, and they complain that they had not been treated
fairly. The media fans the incident and the people in the
States read some sensational stories. Nevertheless, the
 413
Marines maintain they had treated them properly under
the circumstances, and had given them clothes that
make them look more like women.
At about 1200, the small armored task force reaches
the positions of the 1st Marines and pulls up to the
intersection where the rail tracks converge with the
boulevard that leads into Seoul. Lieutenant Cummings
reports to Colonel Puller, and then, the push into the
city begins. The Marines, spearheaded by tanks, grind
forward against roadblocks and fierce resistance.
Antitank weapons, mortars and automatic weapons at-
tempt to stall the advance. Nonetheless, the Marines
gnaw forward and move down both sides of the boule-
vard. Two of the lead tanks, including that of Cum-
mings, strike mines, but both are saved. The 1st
Marines drives toward the main Seoul railroad and
several other key points, including the American and
Russian consulates, City Hall and the ancient Ducksoo
Palace. By evening, the 1st and 3rd Battalions each
penetrate about two thousand yards. The former halts
in the heights to the right of the 3rd Battalion. The 3rd
Battalion drills directly into the city and halts at posi-
tions next to the rail lines and on the western slope of
Hill 97. Both units then converge and take up defen-
sive positions on Hill 82 to prepare for the following
day’s attack.
Engineers begin removing mines, previously set by
them, to clear the path for the attack. The 2nd Battal-
ion (Reserve) deploys to the rear of the 1st Battalion to
provide cover on the right flank and for the rear. Like
the other Marine regiments, the 1st Marines receives
orders at about 2200 instructing it to immediately
launch an attack into Seoul. At about 0145, subsequent
to a fifteen-minute artillery barrage, the 1st Marines
are poised to advance. But, Colonel Puller, at about
seven minutes before jump off, concludes that the bom-
bardment is insufficient. He requests a repeat perform-
ance to bolster the assault.
The attack is rescheduled for 0200, but the enemy
nixes the attack by striking first. At 0153, an emer-
gency message arrives that proclaims that a fierce enemy
assault, including armor, is pushing from the city, driv-
ing toward the 1st Marines positions to the southwest.
The urgent news suggests that self-propelled guns are
also with the attack units.
Meanwhile, a 3rd Battalion patrol, led by Corporal
Charles Collins and composed of eight Marines and
three South Koreans, probes to establish contact with
the 5th Marines. Instead, at about 0130, the patrol en-
counters the surging enemy. A fire fight ensues about
four hundred yards to the front of the 1st Marines’
lines. Several men of the patrol make it back to their
zone and give the alert. Corporal Collins is not among
them; he is presumed killed.
In the meantime, Major Edwin Simmons detects the
absolute sounds of tracked vehicles, and they are not
sporting Marine insignia. Simmons receives word that
two enemy tanks are encroaching George Company’s
roadblock, which is bolstered with 3.5 rocket launch-
ers, heavy machine guns and some hefty 75-mm re-
September 25, 1950
coilless rifles. Without hesitation, the enemy tanks are
plastered with seething fire; one is knocked out and
the other retreats.
The uninvited visitors derail the Marine assault
scheduled for 0200; however, both sides still gather
in the darkness. The enemy attack force numbers
about battalion strength and it is fortified by tanks.
The enemy advance is intercepted by the 11th Marines’
artillery and by mortar fire. The attack reaches its
pinnacle at about 0230, but it falls prey to an iron
hailstorm, which literally blows the attackers back and
stalls the attack. Subsequent enemy infantry advances
are ineffective. The surviving armor launches sporadic
advances, but they also fail to cross through the
Marines’ line.
By dawn, the counterattack sizzles and the survivors
disengage, then retire hurriedly. Marine fire slays
the last two enemy T-34 tanks at 0630. Daylight em-
phasizes the horror of the killing grounds, which
are permeated with the stench of death, the peculiar
odor of scorched armor and the scores of mangled
corpses. Corporal Collins, thought to have been lost, is
not among the deceased. After his patrol encountered
the attack force, he had concealed himself in Korean
civilian garb. He walks back into friendly lines at about
0630.
The N.K. 25th Brigade sustains 475 to 500 killed
and a great deal more wounded. In addition, 83 pris-
oners are collected by the 1st Marines. Interrogation of
the POWs, coupled with the combing of the battle-
field, determines that seven enemy tanks and two self-
propelled guns were destroyed. If this 700-man enemy
force was in the process of abandoning Seoul, as de-
scribed by General Almond, it had apparently been re-
tiring in the wrong direction.
In the 7th Marines sector, the 1st Battalion sends out
continuous reconnaissance patrols to maintain contact
with RCT-5 and RCT-7 and to sweep the terrain lying
between both units. The 2nd Battalion moves out at
0630 to secure Objective Charlie, then takes it without
incident at 1215. In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion re-
mains in a defensive arc-like posture to protect the
highways and trails near the ferry-crossing site at
Haengju.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the 17th Regiment
comes ashore to join the 7th Division as its 3rd Regi-
ment. In other activity, the scheduled attack by the
32nd Regiment, reinforced, is being prepared. The
spearheading 2nd Battalion and the 96th FABn are de-
ployed east of the town. The 1st and 3rd Battalions,
deployed northwest of it, are commanded by Colonels
Faith and Schumann respectively. Both units will trail
Colonel Mount’s 2nd Battalion when it crosses the
Han.
Company A, 56th Amphibian Tractor Battalion, and
the Marine 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion (minus
Company B) had spent an exhausting night to assure
success. They were compelled to execute a 25-mile
round-trip to transport the troops to a jump-off site
about 5,000 yards east of a rail bridge at Yongdungp’o.
September 25, 1950
At 0600, a thirty-minute artillery barrage is initi-
ated by the 48th FABn, and its thunderous roar is
enjoined by heavy mortars that sizzle the bluffs
beyond the river bank. At 0630, the 2nd Battalion,
32nd Regiment, spearheaded by Company F, begins
crossing the river during an usually foggy morning, and
it completes the trek without incident. The LVTs
transport the troops inland about 200 yards. From
that point, they dart across the tiny beach area and
ascend the 30 to 60 foot bluffs bringing the vanguard
to the slopes of South Mountain. The sun emerges
through the fog at about 0730. At about the same
time, air strikes pound Hill 120, and South Mountain,
the latter standing ominously on the north bank,
leans northwest and extends backward directly into
Seoul.
By about noon, the 3rd Battalion brings up the rear,
and soon after, it fords the river and traces the steps
of the 1st Battalion. It moves east, jumps through
the 1st Battalion and occupies Hill 120. The 1st Bat-
talion then deploys in positions between the 2nd and
3rd Battalions. In the meantime, the vanguard is swiftly
ascending South Mountain. It overcomes moderate
resistance as it surges to the summit and claims it by
1500.
The 2nd Battalion immediately establishes a night
defensive perimeter on the summit. The regiment is
unable to proceed from the heights into the city be-
cause the movement might impede the ongoing oper-
ations of the 1st and 5th Marines. In conjunction, the
ROKs cross behind the 3rd Battalion against heavy fire,
but the LVTs safely deliver the S.K. 17th Regiment.
The 32nd Regiment and the ROKs deploy within a
zone of action from which they can expeditiously ad-
vance on the right flank of the Marines at the prescribed
time.
Meanwhile, Colonel Mount deploys Company F on
South Mountain’s low eastern knob, and he places
Company G on the more elevated western knob. Dur-
ing the night of the 25th-26th, while one enemy bat-
talion is being vanquished by a night-long battle with
the 1st Marines on the outskirts of Seoul, another
enemy battalion assaults the 2nd Battalion, 32nd Reg-
iment. At 0500 (26th), the Communists pound the
2nd Battalion and make some progress. The troops
holding the forward positions are temporarily shoved
back, but then a counterattack ignites a fierce battle
that regains the lost ground.
By about 0700, the lines are fully restored and the
Reds are shoved off the ridge. The victors count 394
dead Communist troops on the battlefield and another
174 taken prisoner. At 2150, the S.K. 17th Regiment,
on the far right flank of the 32nd Regiment, jumps off
at 2150 to seize Hill 348. The battle continues through-
out the night (25th-26th). By mid-afternoon on Sep-
tember 26, the South Koreans secure Hills 292 and
348.
In the 31st Regiment’s sector at Suwon, aerial intelli-
gence determines that the series of hills that lie about
ten miles south of Suwon and about two or three
414
miles south of the U.S. positions are heavily fortified
by the enemy. These hills command both sides of the
road and the railroad lines slightly north of Osan. The
92nd FABn arrives at Suwon to augment the forces
there.
In the Eighth Army area, during the day, General
Walker pays homage to the South Korean forces in trib-
ute to the tremendous progress they have made against
the enemy. Walker states: “Too little has been said in
praise of the South Korean Army which has performed
so magnificently in helping turn this war from the de-
fensive to the offensive.”
In other activity, the British 27th Brigade is detached
from the U.S. 24th Division and attached to I Corps
control.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, Gen-
eral Gay becomes perturbed during the evening of the
25th when orders arrive from I Corps that direct him
to retain the 1st Cavalry Division at its present positions.
Gay attempts unsuccessfully to contact Eighth Army
headquarters to clarify what appears to have been erro-
neous orders. He wants authorization to resume the at-
tack and hook up with X Corps. General Gay dis-
patches an urgent message by liaison plane to Eighth
Army.
Toward midnight and subsequent to the installation
of phone lines, Gay receives a call from Colonel Edgar
J. Conley, Jr. (Eighth Army G-1). Conley informs him
that Walker has authorized 1st Cavalry to attack to-
ward Suwon to establish contact with X Corps if he be-
lieves the mission can be accomplished. The cavalry as-
sault force moves out the morning of the 26th.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the unit is to remain in Poun
until notified otherwise.
In the 24th Division sector, Kumch’on falls to the 5th
RCT. The 3rd Battalion, commanded by Colonel Ben-
jamin Heckemeyer, enters the ruins during the morn-
ing to eliminate the remaining resistance, and secures
it by 1445.
In other activity, mop-up operations continue in the
vicinity of Songju. The enemy defenders become fur-
ther exasperated. The N.K. 10th Division, reduced to
about twenty-five percent of its strength, has expended
nearly all of its ammunition and depleted its fuel sup-
ply. Its withdrawal, which had begun on the previous
day, moves into high gear. By dusk, the U.S. 21st Reg-
iment jumps off and continues the attack. The regi-
ment drives west along the highway against dissipating
enemy resistance.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the 23rd
Regiment is ordered to move against Koch’ang via a
road that supposedly lies south of the route of the 38th
Regiment; however, reconnaissance (air and ground)
concludes that the road is either nonexistent or impen-
etrable. General Keiser then orders the 23rd Regiment
to alter its route and advance along a road to the north.
At 1600, the regiment (less the 1st Battalion) departs for
Koch’ang. The march is tedious and opposition is en-
countered. Three separate heavy firefights occur, and in
addition, the regiment must reconstruct four bridges.
 415
Nonetheless, the 23rd Regiment arrives at Koch’ang on
the following morning.
In the meantime, the 38th Regiment departs Hy-
opch’on at dawn and it, too, drives toward Koch’ang.
Meanwhile, the N.K. 2nd Division abandons its vehi-
cles and equipment as it retreats haphazardly. The de-
bris hinders and then stalls the 38th Regimental vehi-
cles, which cannot navigate around the obstacles. The
infantry begins to pursue on foot. The day-long thirty-
mile chase nets 450 prisoners, and about 260 Commu-
nists are slain. At 2030, the 38th Regiment halts sev-
eral miles from Koch’ang.
Air Force planes hammer Koch’ang during the late af-
ternoon and the target is inundated with rockets, na-
palm and bombs. The swift pace of the 38th Regiment
and the heavy steel claws of the Air Force have combined
to thwart the plans of the enemy. The N.K. 2nd, 4th,
9th and 10th Divisions had planned to converge on
Koch’ang and regroup, but those plans are now impos-
sible. The N.K. 2nd Division is down to about 2,500
troops (maximum), and most are under duress from
the U.S. onslaught. The sweep to Koch’ang captures
fourteen antitank guns, four artillery pieces, nine mor-
tars and seventeen vehicles. In addition, the 38th Reg-
iment seizes ten motorcycles and about 300 tons of am-
munition.
The regiment enters Koch’ang on the following
morning. By the end of September, most of the North
Korean 2nd Division has dispersed into the hills, leav-
ing the commanding officer, Major General Choe
Hyon, with only about 200 troops.
In the 25th Division sector, Task Force Torman ap-
proaches the Nam River bridge, which leads into
Chinju. One of the supporting tanks runs over a mine
and fragments fly in every direction. Captain Torman
is struck and wounded, then evacuated. Captain
Charles M. Matthews, CO, Company A, 79th Tank
Battalion, assumes command.
In the meantime, the 2nd Battalion, 35th Regiment,
begins to cross the Nam about two and one-half miles
southeast of Chinju at 0200 and then drives against
Chinju, which is defended by about 300 enemy troops.
The 2nd Battalion, bolstered by TF Torman’s tank fire
from the opposite bank of the Nam, overcomes the op-
position and secures Chinju. During the afternoon, the
1st and 3rd Battalions ford the Nam and join the 2nd
Battalion. During the evening, and thanks to an under-
water bridge constructed by the 65th Engineers, TF
Torman also moves into Chinju. The engineers work
throughout the night, and by noon on the following
day, vehicles ford the river several miles south of the
damaged bridge.
Farther south near Uiryong, about 1,000 Korean
refugees and U.S. engineers, while under sporadic
mortar fire, construct another sandbag crossing of
the Nam. The 8th FABn commits its guns and the
mortars are put out of commission. During the night
(25th-26th), the 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, crosses
to the north bank, completing the trek by dawn on the
26th.
September 26, 1950
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th Division
pushes into Hamch’ang after dark. Within two addi-
tional days, it presses through the most rugged part of
the Sobaek Mountain Range to draw closer to
Chungju.
In other activity, the S.K. 8th Division overcomes
minefields. It begins eliminating the remaining resist-
ance in Andong and secures it on the following day.
In ROK Army Headquarters area, the S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion, bolstered by the guns of U.S. naval surface vessels,
attacks Yongdok, defended by the N.K. 5th Division.
The defenders, unable to retreat east by the sea, at-
tempt to evacuate and head inland toward the moun-
tains. The Navy’s guns redesigned the landscape of the
town; it is scarred and charred and the rising smoke
blankets the skyline. The Communists apparently evac-
uate swiftly. The South Koreans enter the town to dis-
cover horse-drawn carts complete with hitched ponies.
The assault troops also capture other equipment, in-
cluding Russian-made trucks that are abandoned with
the motors running. The South Koreans initiate im-
mediate pursuit.
One U.S. officer, Major Curtis Ivey (KMAG),
has procured 25 trucks through the ingenuity of Col-
onel McPhail, an advisor to the ROK I Corps.
The South Koreans roar up the coastal road to finish off
the division, which by now is reduced to about
one regiment. In conjunction, most of the time the
South Korean forces advance by foot. The trucks are a
luxury.
In Air Force activity, during encounters with MiGs on
this day, Lieutenant Booth T. Holker (334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group)
receives two victories in the vicinity of Taechon.
Lieutenant Charles F. Loyd, also of the 334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, downs a MiG in the vicinity
of Sinanju. In another air duel, Lieutenant Paul
E. Roach, 334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, and
his wingman combine to knock out another MiG near
Anju.
September 26–October 21 1950 Sub-
sequent to the Eighth Army breakout from the Pusan
Perimeter and up to October 1, 1950, seven damage
survey teams scour the area to attempt to arrive at ac-
curate numbers concerning destroyed or captured
enemy equipment. The information is required to
offset what apparently have been inflated figures cal-
culated from the units’ daily records. The troops
comb every primary route of transportation used by
armor between the 38th Parallel and the Perimeter.
The Kaesong–Sariwon–Pyongyang Road above the
38th Parallel is also scoured.
The detachments discover sixty demolished U.S.
tanks. Enemy equipment discovered: 239 enemy T-
34s, either destroyed or abandoned, and 76 self-
propelled 76-mm guns. Evidence indicates the Air
Force should receive credit for sixty of the enemy
tanks. U.S. tanks gain credit for killing thirty-nine
enemy tanks and the rocket launcher teams receive
417 September 26, 1950
September 26, 1950
credit for thirteen kills, but it is certain that the
bazookas accounted for many more enemy tanks
than the figures state. The Air Force may have got-
ten credit for some tanks that had been taken out
earlier by the bazookas.
U.S. tank losses, since their introduction to the
conflict in July and continuing through September,
from all causes is 136. The most startling statistic is
that nearly 100 (70 percent) of the tanks had been
lost to enemy mines. The figure is in sharp contrast
to the tank losses attributable to mines during World
War II, which totaled 20 percent.
September 26 In Naval activity, the destroyer
USS Brush sustains damage by an enemy mine off the
east coast of Korea.
Inchon–Seoul vicnity: In the X Corps area, the 1st
Marine Division zone, after daylight the Marines execute
the orders of the previous night. Division issues OpnO
12–50 at 1230. The directive mandates the resump-
tion of the attack against Seoul, and it is slightly al-
tered by committing the 7th Marines to the quest. Prior
to the attack, the 1st Marine Division is deployed in a
half-moon formation that stretches from the northwest
to the south and encompasses the ground between the
Kaesong Highway and Hill 82.
In the 1st Marines sector, the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, commanded by Colonel Sutter, starts early
and passes through the positions of the 3rd Battalion.
Coming out of reserve, it drives down Ma-Po Boule-
418
vard to seize Seoul. Companies F and G, led by Baker
Company tanks, sprint forward. But Lieutenant Cum-
mings’ tank strikes a mine (U.S. M-6) that the engineers
had missed during a clearing operation the previous
night. The detonation knocks out the tank and inflicts
casualties to some ground Marines on both sides of the
tank.
The advance continues, but the situation gets no bet-
ter. The Communists have made roadblocks out of rice
bags piled eight feet high and about five feet thick,
placed about 300 to 400 yards apart. The obstacles are
augmented by defenders and anti-tank guns. Never-
theless, the Marine infantry and armor plow forward.
Engineers, covered by sharpshooters, move methodi-
cally to open a path. Once the mines are eliminated
the tanks burst through the barriers, followed by the
infantry.
As the Marines terminate the individual blockages,
other North Koreans continue to fire from nearby
buildings. Seemingly, every rooftop, window and alley
is launching shells at the charging Marines, who must
defend against fire coming from all points. The progress
is measured by yards, and the attack is hindered by even
more unexpected obstacles, such as groups of civilians,
including women and children, scattered along the line
of advance. The tanks continue to crash through the
bunkers and the ground troops drill deeper, disregard-
ing the intense heat, smoke and flames emerging from
the burning buildings.
The battle rages furiously, and it includes suicidal
 419
missions by individuals carrying demolition charges
who attack the armor. The first attempt succeeds when
one North Korean dashes fearlessly toward a
flamethrower tank and damages it while the vehicle is
shadowing two M-26s. However, the crew escapes the
burning vehicle and nearby infantrymen cut down sub-
sequent demolition-men well before they reach the
armor.
The dogged pace of the advance expends the ammu-
nition and consumes the fuel at an alarming rate, which
forces the vehicles to move to the rear to procure the
necessary fuel and supplies. In the meantime, the in-
fantry wisely pauses to await the return of the tanks
before it jumps to the next blockade. Following the re-
turn of the armor, the Marines reinitiate the tedious
drive into Seoul. Company F, led by Captain Groff,
and Company E pound against the enemy resistance
until dark and gain about 1,200 yards. At one key in-
tersection, Company F encounters such stiff resistance
that Company E, scheduled to peel off to the right, is
compelled to throw its weight into the fight to ensure
advancement.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, operat-
ing on the right flank of the regimental sector, begins
its descent from its positions on Hill 82. Companies A
and B are to advance on the right and secure the
promontory on the northwestern edge of South Moun-
tain and the finger extending out below it. In conjunc-
tion, Company C’s objective is the primary railroad
station and the nearby slopes of South Mountain, where
the enemy remains active, slightly east of the sector of
the 32nd Infantry Regiment. Marine planes plaster
enemy positions, and a heavy artillery and mortar bar-
rage commences prior to jump off.
Upon cessation of the preparatory bombardments,
Captain Wray’s Company C spearheads the attack. It
descends down the slope and regroups near a stream
that runs alongside the railroad yard. From there, the
company drives north after fording the river. The
Marines encounter moderate resistance that is amplified
due to the pesky positions. The Communists are in-
tertwined in buildings and railcars. Nonetheless, the
Marines grind forward, yard by yard. The rail station
is seized and its yard is secured. Once inside the station,
the Marines discover some executed Korean women
and children and a few dead Communist troops. By
dusk, the area is secure.
In the 5th Marines sector, during the early morning
hours and following a heavy artillery and mortar bar-
rage, the 3rd Battalion jumps off to finish clearing the
remaining opposition from the Hill 296 group. The
descent is rugged for both companies; G Company de-
parts its positions on a ridge above Hill 105 North to
secure the low terrain to the right of Company I. Mean-
while, Company I descends the huge spur on Hill 296
that leads to the center of Seoul.
Both missions are eventful. Company G encounters
tenacious opposition throughout the day. In one in-
stance, while Company G is pinned down, PFC Eugene
Obregon spots a wounded Marine. Disregarding the
September 26, 1950
tenacious fire, he dashes out to rescue him. After he drags
the wounded man to the side of the road, an enemy con-
tingent closes on them. Obregon covers the wounded
Marine with his body and he returns effective fire, but
eventually he is fatally struck by a burst of enemy machine
gun fire. PFC Obregon receives the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his selfless heroism under fire.
Company I, lacking support weapons, attacks. Its
commanding officer, Captain McMullen, convinced
that his organic weapons can suffice, cancels the
preparatory artillery. Almost immediately, the rugged
advance by Company I is met by ferocious resistance.
The Marines attack down the slopes, but the resistance
on the lower section of the slope is much stronger than
anticipated. The lack of support weapons takes its toll.
The Communists deliver sheets of fire against the two
platoons of descending Marines and inflict casualties.
The North Korean fire continues without pause, but
the Marines push to a knob and seize it, despite both
attacking platoon leaders being wounded.
To bolster the assault, Captain McMullen throws in
his reserve platoon to offset the losses sustained on the
right by the 3rd Platoon, and then he takes personal
command of the attack. As Company I drills down-
ward, it plows into an enemy labyrinth that contains
about 200 troops. Close-quartered bloody fighting en-
sues, but when it concludes, the Marines evict the
North Koreans and send them fleeing to lower posi-
tions on the slope. However, Company I is thoroughly
drained of strength, unable to advance farther.
Company I takes a slight pause to rejuvenate itself,
but the tranquility on the knob is short-lived. The
Communists mount an unexpected counterattack to
retake the positions. The exhausted company reaches in-
ward for a second breath to thwart the assault, but am-
munition is becoming scarce. The enemy pushes hard
and the donnybrook intensifies as the situation becomes
grave. The Marines are pushed to the brink as the ca-
sualty list, which includes Captain McMullen, soars.
McMullen has just sustained his seventh wound, in-
cluding World War II and Korea; he is evacuated.
To forestall disaster, a small but impetuous supply
party led by Lieutenant Wallace Williamson arrives. It
barrels into the inferno, and without missing a step,
the ammunition is passed out. The infusion of supplies
gives the Marines a B-12 shot, and the exhausted com-
pany then pours out the iron. It breaks up the assault
and destroys the enemy defense system there. Fighting
continues the rest of the day. The threat of being dis-
lodged is terminated, but Company I is too weak to
seize the peak of the knob before dark.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
operating south of the 3rd Battalion, spends the day
mopping up. Also, the 1st KMC Battalion deploys be-
tween the Reconnaissance Company and the 3rd Bat-
talion, the former holding the summit of Hill 296 in the
northwest. Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion remains in
regimental reserve. Due to the heavy resistance encoun-
tered on this day, the 5th Marines are unable to move
into Seoul and establish contact with the 1st Marines.
September 26, 1950
In the 7th Marines sector, the regiment receives or-
ders to drive north of Seoul and secure the mountain
pass. From there they are to sever the road running from
Seoul to Uijongbu and Ch’orwon, at a point about one
mile beyond Government House. The 7th Marines is
bolstered by the divisional recon company and the 5th
S.K. Marine Battalion. The orders also specify that the
regiment is to pinch out the 5th Marines there, and
begin an attack alongside the 1st Marines, which is
driving northeast.
The 5th Marines is ordered to support the 7th
Marines until it is pinched out. At that point, the
5th Marines is to revert to division reserve and relieve
units of the 7th Marines. The objectives of the 7th
Marines: Baker (Hill 171); Dog (northern half of 338);
Easy (Hill 342); Fox (Hill 133) and George (Hill 343).
The ground is nasty, which ensures a difficult task
for the fresh regiment. The 1st Battalion, 7th Marines,
commanded by Lt. Colonel Raymond G. Davis,
relieves the 2nd Battalion (minus Company D) and
the 3rd Battalion at their northeastern positions
along the Kaesong Highway during the morning. The
relief operation frees both battalions for the attack on
Seoul.
Meanwhile, at 0630, Colonel Homer Litzenberg or-
ders Company D, 7th Marines, to head southwest
along the Kaesong Highway and establish contact with
the 5th Marines at Seoul. Initially, the trip is unevent-
ful and at times surprising. Throngs of seemingly happy
Korean civilians bellow loud cheers of welcome; how-
ever, the unexpected string of greeters prevents the
Marines from employing flank guards. The column ef-
fortlessly travels through Hoengjeoe, and by about
0900, the convoy nears Hills 338 and 296, two huge
slopes on the left and right respectively. The ominous
slim valley pass that splits the two overwhelming slopes
also is in view. When the column reaches a point
slightly in front of Sodaemun Prison in the northwest
sector of Seoul, the enemy strikes. Menacing machine
guns pour their shells into the approaching convoy and
inflict casualties. Among the wounded is the machine
gun officer, Lieutenant Goggin. The Marines bolt from
the vehicles and take cover to return fire.
The target remains about 400 yards down the high-
way, where the enemy is utilizing a huge tower to de-
liver their storm of fire. The Marines, lacking flank
protection, are caught off guard on flat terrain. Instinc-
tively, they begin to return fire, but the enemy answers
with more fire, some originating within 100 yards of
the convoy. Both flanks are at risk, making the posi-
tions nearly untenable. The commanding officer, Cap-
tain Richard Breen, directs the 2nd Platoon, led by
Lieutenant Seeburger, to assault the heights near the
prison.
In the meantime, two mortars are set up and al-
though in naked positions, their 60-mm shells destroy
one enemy machine gun position. However, return fire
remains relentless. Undaunted, the mortar crews, led
by Lieutenant Paul Sartwell, continue to exchange
blows. Sartwell becomes wounded twice, but he con-
420
tinues fighting until he is struck by a third and debili-
tating wound.
All the while, the 2nd Platoon closes on the prison,
and the 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant Paul Mullaney,
attacks on the left to ascend Hill 338 and break the
pressure, but to no avail. Enemy fire forbids success.
The struggling company is dangerously stretched out,
and lacking armor and artillery, the convoy is guarded
only by the 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant James D.
Hammond.
Captain Breen, himself wounded, receives a call on
his radio from Major Raymond Fridrich (Regimental S-
3). Fridich asks how bad the situation has become, and
Breen assures him that his beleaguered Company D
will hold its ground. While the Marines seek solutions
to extricate the isolated company, the Communists at-
tempt to encircle the command. Enemy contingents
rush to the rear of the trapped Marines to prevent res-
cue. A support column is rushed to the area, but the
enemy roadblock forces it to return. The crisis becomes
more grave as ammunition and supplies are being rap-
idly expended. Captain Breen reels in his troops to gain
more tenable positions and to prevent annihilation.
In the meantime, Marine planes pound the enemy
positions to alleviate some of the pressure. Company D
(carrying all of its wounded and dead) relocates about
1,000 yards from where it was ambushed, at a split in
the road between the two towering enemy-infested
slopes. The regrouping is complete by 1600. After tak-
ing the new positions, Captain Breen takes defensive
measures to ensure that the unit makes it through the
night. Additional planes arrive and successfully drop
supplies within the tiny perimeter. Two planes are dam-
aged during the mission, and one of them is forced to
make an emergency landing at Kimpo.
At about dawn on the following day (27th), a rescue
unit composed of the tanks and infantry rolls down the
highway and extricates besieged Company D. The
weary command is transported back to Hoengjeoe-ri.
In the meantime, the remainder of the 2nd Battalion
had followed the steps of Company D, but as scheduled
and unaware of the dilemma, the battalion swings to the
left and moves into the hills at Hoengjeoe about one
mile from where Company D is trapped. From its po-
sitions in the heights, the 2nd Battalion dispatches re-
connaissance units to check the area above Hoengjeoe,
but they too remain unaware of Company D’s predica-
ment.
Then, at 1400, Companies E and F, 2nd Battalion,
drive east to capture Hill 343. The assault gains about
1,000 yards, but then enemy fire originating on Hill
338 plugs the hole and stalls the advance. Lt. Colonel
Hinkle, to avoid the risk of losing his right flank, or-
ders his men to halt and dig in for the night.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, led
by Major Roach, concludes an eight-mile march and
arrives in an assembly area to prepare to assault Hill 338
(north). Companies G and H advance to seize it. At
1700, Company G, led by Captain Thomas Cooney,
moves around the northern half of the objective, and
 421
then he dispatches two platoons to seize the summit.
Without opposition, Company G takes the northern
summit of Hill 338. Meanwhile, Company H, led by
Captain Nicholas Shields, advances to the right of
Company G, but as it reaches a draw, heavy fire prevents
further advance. Shields, rather than risk his right flank
to heavy fire, orders his company to establish defensive
positions on the slopes for the night.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, during the mid-
afternoon, Generals Walker and Partridge arrive at
Suwon Airfield from Taegu to conduct an impromptu
meeting with the 31st Regimental staff. During the
meeting, Walker informs those in attendance that the
1st Cavalry Division is advancing quickly and that it will
apparently reach X Corps lines within about thirty-six
hours. It is possible that, because of the arrival of
Walker in Suwon and the warning messages that arrive
in X Corps Headquarters, an advance unit of the 1st
Cavalry is spared annihilation during the later part of
today; unannounced, it plunges into the 31st Regimen-
tal lines.
In the 31st Regimental sector, the commanding offi-
cer, Colonel Ovenshine, orders the 2nd Battalion to
secure the heights near Osan. The task force assigned
to seize the high ground is composed of Companies E
and F, reinforced by a contingent of Company G and
two tank platoons. In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion is
poised to bolster the attack, if required. Colonel Oven-
shine also establishes another task force, composed of
contingents of Companies G and H, and Company A,
73rd Tank Battalion. The task force is to drive south
along the highway. The two task forces are to attack si-
multaneously on the following day.
In other activity, an advance contingent of TF Lynch
(1st Cavalry Div.) establishes contact with the 31st Reg-
iment during the latter part of the night, but the en-
counter is not expected by the 31st Regiment. (See also,
September 26, 1950, In the 1st Cavalry Division, 7th
Cavalry sector.)
In the 32nd Regimental zone, having crossed the Han
on the previous day, the regiment awaits a counterat-
tack, but the night passes quietly. Then, at 0430, the
silence is shattered. In the 2nd Battalion zone, auto-
matic weapons fire is heard and the distinct noise of
rumbling T-34s is also picked up. Within about one-
half hour, the view to the front displays about 1,000
North Koreans moving toward the Americans on South
Mountain. A bloody contest begins as the enemy hordes
speed up the pace and charge forward. The 2nd Battal-
ion pours its firepower into the enemy ranks, but the
advance continues.
On the lower eastern knob of South Mountain,
Company F is unable to withstand the onslaught and
it is overcome, but to the west, Company G defiantly
holds the knob and repulses the enemy while it inflicts
heavy losses. Colonel Mount commits his entire re-
serve, and the attack is halted. Lost terrain is retaken by
0700. The 32nd further clobbers the attackers with
everything available as they retreat down the slopes.
Company E, 2nd Battalion, mops up the reverse
September 26, 1950
slopes of South Mountain and the ground near its base
by the river. The regiment counts 394 dead Commu-
nists, including 110 who had been slain within the
perimeter. Another 134 enemy troops are captured.
In the 1st Battalion sector, north of South Mountain,
heavy firefights develop in the streets of Seoul. Follow-
ing the 2nd Battalion’s victory, the 1st Battalion en-
counters what apparently is a straggler contingent of
the original attacking force against South Mountain.
Eighty North Koreans are captured during the skir-
mish. In the meantime, at 0800, the 3rd Battalion
drives four miles east from its positions on Hill 120 to
seize Hill 106 (aka 348).
En route, an enemy column is detected as it attempts
to evacuate Seoul. Company L, commanded by Lieu-
tenant Harry McCaffrey, attacks and devastates a
strongly defended fortification, while Company I
moves to the base of the objective. Company L’s attack
captures a headquarters, seemingly that of a corps and
possibly the primary enemy headquarters posted in
Seoul. Planes arrive to hammer the retreating column,
just as the U.S. soldiers bolt into action. The enemy
troops are bludgeoned and rocked into a state of shock.
Meanwhile, Company I storms the crest of the hill.
The combined effort of the planes and the 32nd Reg-
iment demolishes five enemy tanks and destroys or cap-
tures about forty other vehicles. Additional prizes in-
clude seven machine guns, several artillery pieces and
two ammunition depots. The enemy force loses about
500 killed.
In other activity, the S.K. 17th Regiment controls
Hills 292 and 348, following its night-long assault.
The seized terrain commands the highway four miles
east of Seoul. By day’s end, all enemy resistance is
cleared from the 32nd Regiment’s sector, giving it an
impressive record covering its actions over the past eight
days. The 32nd has secured all of its assigned objec-
tives, about 15 percent of the fortified portion of Seoul
and South Mountain.
Also, patrols of the 1st Marines probe the right flank
and establish contact with Company E, 32nd Regi-
ment, at the western foundation of South Mountain.
During today’s fighting, the 32nd Regiment sustains
6 killed, 92 wounded and three MIAs.
In the Eighth Army area, there is some apprehension
at headquarters. General Walker and his staff prefer
that X Corps be incorporated under the control of
Eighth Army. Walker is convinced that there should
be a unified command over all U.N. troops in Korea.
However, no written record shows Walker ever bring-
ing his concerns directly to MacArthur. Today, Walker
does request of MacArthur that he be kept informed
of X Corps’ progress, to afford Walker a clearer focus to
prepare for the imminent convergence of the two forces.
On the following day, Walker receives a response from
MacArthur.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, Gen-
eral Gay meets with his commanders and he issues the
order to attack at 1200. The 7th Cavalry will spear-
head the advance.
September 26, 1950
In the 7th Cavalry zone, TF Lynch departs Poun at
1130 and speeds northwest to link with the 7th Divi-
sion (X Corps). Task Force Lynch remains unchanged,
except that the artillery unit is composed of only Bat-
tery C, 77th FABn. The vanguard is composed of the
Regimental I&R Platoon and the 3rd Platoon of tanks
(70th Tank Bn.), commanded by Lieutenant Robert
W. Baker.
Colonel Lynch orders Baker to withhold his fire un-
less the enemy initiates the action. The armor and in-
fantry speed along the highway without incident and
encounter only South Korean civilians. During the
middle of the afternoon, the column passes through
deserted Ch’ongju, and later, it halts at Ipchang-ni.
The column halts after traveling about sixty-four miles
due to lack of gasoline, and no refueling truck accom-
panies the convoy. Extra gas cans are collected from the
other vehicles and the troops refuel three of the six
tanks.
At about the same time, several men of the I&R Pla-
toon spot what they believe to be an approaching
enemy tank. The U.S. tanks prepare for action, but the
approaching danger turns out to be three enemy trucks.
When they notice they are within the clutches of the
Americans, all three drivers bolt from their moving ve-
hicles. One of the careening trucks comes to a stop
after crashing into an I& R Platoon jeep. The Ameri-
cans commandeer the enemy’s gasoline to refuel the re-
maining armor, and the convoy resumes the advance
at about 2000.
Colonel Lynch, having received permission to use
his discretion, orders the convoy to turn on its vehi-
cles’ lights. Lynch also grants Lieutenant Baker permis-
sion to fire at the enemy if necessary. The convoy in-
creases its speed and about 2030, it reaches the main
Seoul Highway, slightly south of Ch’onan.
The task force soon discovers that the town is full of
enemy troops. Undaunted, Baker advances in the lead
vehicle and the convoy reaches a guarded intersection.
Undecided about which way to lead the convoy, he
points his finger and inquires of an enemy sentry:
“Osan?” The sentry nods, but looks as if he has seen a
ghost. He vanishes in the darkness.
The convoy roars through the town while congre-
gations of enemy troops merely meander about and
watch the task force pass. The convoy holds its fire until
it is through the town and on the heels of an enemy
contingent of about company strength. The enemy
contingent is raked with machine gun fire. The three
point tanks advance too far and lose communications
with the main force.
Meanwhile, Colonel Lynch forms a new point and
the task force resumes the advance, spearheaded by one
platoon of infantry and bolstered by a bazooka team
and a .50-caliber ring mounted machine gun. At a point
about ten miles south of Osan, the distinct sounds of
tank and artillery fire are heard. Immediately, Colonel
Lynch orders the convoy’s lights turned off. In the
meantime, the three lead tanks continue their rapid ad-
vance and pass through Osan at full throttle, then
422
they pause to check out the situation. Baker believes
he hears the vehicles of the TF to his rear, but his de-
tachment spots enemy tank tracks. A large number of
T-34s are nearby, but due to the darkness and prob-
ably poor communications, the enemy assumes Baker’s
tanks are part of their force, and they pass without in-
cident.
When the tanks reach a point about three miles
north of Osan, they come under enemy fire. The three
tanks blaze through the barrage and soon after, dis-
cover American M-26 tank tracks, which signal that
Baker’s tanks are approaching X Corps lines. However,
X Corps expects no friendly tanks. As Baker’s column
approaches the perimeter, elements of the 31st Regi-
ment, 7th Division, commence fire, including that of
recoilless rifles. Eighth Army has now established con-
tact with X Corps, but it isn’t exactly as planned.
One of the incoming shells hits the third tank in
line, severing its .50-caliber machine gun and decapi-
tating one crewman. Baker’s tanks continue to race
through the friendly fire and burst into the U.S. lines.
Baker’s small force receives a bonus. Engineers have just
removed the mines along his approach route to accom-
modate an imminent attack by the 31st Regiment. Ad-
ditionally, the X Corps tanks purposely hold their fire.
The crews think they might be American, once they
see the tanks are coming in with lights on and travel-
ing at high speed. Nonetheless, the triggers are ready and
only the first tank is to be permitted an unmolested
entrance. The second tank is destroyed. Suddenly, and
fortuitously, a white phosphorous grenade illuminates
the American white star on one of TF Lynch’s tanks, and
it is seen by the X Corps tanks.
Subsequent to the jubilant link-up, Lieutenant Baker
and the tankers with the 31st Regiment try unsuccess-
fully to contact Colonel Lynch. The main body of the
task force lags behind Baker by about one hour, and
the route is becoming much more precarious. The con-
voy proceeds with its lights out and reaches a point shy
of Habong-ni at about 2400.
The midnight hour rings of potential danger. Col-
onel Lynch glances at a T-34 that is about twenty yards
from the road; it appears to be out of action, like most
of the enemy armor encountered along the route. Lynch
motions to Captain James B. Webel (Regimental S-3),
and he mentions that the Air Force had probably taken
the tank out. At about this time, the tank commences
firing, and in an instant, an undiscovered tank begins
to pound the column. The infantry scatters for cover
and a bazooka team speeds back from the point to ex-
terminate the ambush contingent. The first T-34 is
blown away, but the second tank rams the column. It
maintains its fire and crashes into several vehicles. A
recoilless rifle batters the charging tank, and afterward,
it becomes entangled with a damaged U.S. vehicle and
finally stalls, but its guns remain operable. A bazooka
team attempts to destroy it, but the bazooka doesn’t
fire. Captain Webel creeps up to the immobilized tank
and attempts to board it to deposit a grenade down the
hatch.
 423
Meanwhile, the T-34 breaks loose and nearly crushes
Webel in the process. Webel commandeers a five-gal-
lon can of gasoline and reinitiates his attack. He douses
the rear of the T-34 with the combustible fuel and then
funnels some directly onto the engine. It explodes im-
mediately and Webel is catapulted from the inferno.
He lands about twenty feet behind the burning tank.
Webel emerges with only some superficial wounds on
his face and hands and two broken ribs. In the mean-
time, the exchange of fire and the flames from the burn-
ing tank attract the attention of other nearby tanks.
Colonel Lynch hears the approaching armor, but he
cannot verify that they are the tanks with Lieutenant
Baker. Taking precautions, Lynch orders the road
blocked with a truck. Soon after, two tanks encroach
and they are definitely T-34s. One of the North Kore-
ans in his native tongue yells: “What the Hell goes on
here?” At the first sound of the inquiry, the Americans
open fire. The T-34s snap their hatches closed and
begin firing. The truck that blocks their passage ex-
plodes in flames. Meanwhile, the three remaining U.S.
tanks move up to neutralize the enemy advantage. And
then, the enemy ups the ante. Eight additional T-34s
arrive on the scene.
The armor exchanges bloody blows in the darkness,
and the Americas are being struck hard. One T-34 is de-
stroyed, but the North Koreans knock out two of the
three task force tanks. Captain Webel disregards his
wounds and rushes forward to end the threat. He
dashes past several Americans who are holding a
bazooka with ammunition, but no one in the detach-
ment knows how to operate the weapon. Webel grabs
the bazooka and goes into action. He knocks out two
tanks. The enemy troops bolt from their disabled tank
only to be met by Webel, who greets them with a sub-
machine gun. Hurriedly, they flee.
Meanwhile, Sergeant Willard H. Hopkins boards an
enemy tank and slides a grenade down the open hatch
to destroy the crew and the tank. Hopkins then forms
an improvised bazooka team to continue the hunt. The
enemy tanks are being eliminated, one by one, as the
battle rages outside of Habong-ni. The remaining
enemy tanks continue to fire against the Americans.
Some manage to advance well into the depth of the
convoy. One tank crashes forward, ringing fire and
smashing into vehicles as it moves, until it reaches the
southern end of the convoy — point-blank range for a
waiting 105 howitzer. The raging T-34 is transformed
into debris.
Hopkins had attempted to take out this tank, but
he became caught in a cross-fire and was killed. The
ferocious contest lasts for about one hour and is costly,
but the U.S. infantry takes the day. Seven of the ten T-
34s are destroyed and the remaining three scoot in the
opposite direction. TF Lynch sustains 2 men killed and
28 wounded. In addition to the loss of two tanks, the
TF loses 15 vehicles. Subsequent to the action, Task
Force Lynch remains in place until daylight.
In the 24th Division sector, the 19th Regiment leap-
frogs over the 21st Regiment and drives to Yongdong,
September 26, 1950
seizing it without incident. Three Americans discov-
ered in the local jail are freed. The 19th Regiment then
drives toward Okch’on, about 10 miles east of Taejon.
The column reaches the objective at 0200 on the 27th.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, at 0830, the
38th Regiment pushes contingents into Koch’ang. An
enemy hospital is seized and 45 enemy wounded are
captured. The 23rd Regiment arrives shortly thereafter.
Later, during the evening, the regiment advances four-
teen miles without incident and reaches Anui at 1930.
The regiment discovers the area to be a labyrinth of
soggy, flooded rice paddies. The town’s roads are capa-
ble of handling the vehicles, but they cannot stray from
the highway. The area still contains enemy contingents.
They will strike during the night (26th-27th).
In the 25th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 27th
Regiment, crosses the Nam and then as vanguard, it
drives northwest to Uiryong and seizes it before noon.
The remainder of the regiment follows. TF Matthews
is to attack west toward Hadong and from there it is to
swing northwest and drive against Iri, Kumje, Kunsan,
Kurye, Namwon and Sunch’ang, but the drive does not
begin until the following day. The 228-mile drive from
Chinju to the Kum River culminates on September 30.
In the meantime, Task Force Dolvin, operating on
the right, jumps off at 0600. The column departs
Chinju, its infantry transported atop the rear of the
tanks. The column drives northwest toward Hamyang,
tracing the steps of the retreating N.K. 6th Division.
The 35th Regiment follows TF Dolvin through this
dense, nasty terrain, which has been a sanctuary for
guerrillas and other Communist forces. The task force
must maneuver through the eastern and northern sides
of the rugged, mountainous Chiri-san area. TF Dolvin
travels 138 miles during its advance from Chinju to
the Kum River, and it encounters mines early on.
Several miles out, the lead tank hits a mine and the
entire column stalls. Engineers dislodge 11 additional
mines from the road and the column resumes its ad-
vance, but it enters a new minefield and another tank
is damaged. At a third minefield, an enemy contingent
unsuccessfully attempts to block the column. The
North Koreans are quickly dispersed. The task force
discovers 9 vehicles about seven truckloads of ammu-
nition, plus six antitank guns. Later, at about dark, the
enemy blows a bridge just north of Hajon-ni. Task
Force Dolvin fabricates another crossing and fords the
stream during the night (26th-27th). On the following
day, the task force again encounters resistance.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 8th Division seizes
Andong. Some forward contingents advance farther
northwest and drive into Yech’on.
In Air Force activity, The 22nd Bomber Group strikes
targets in the vicinity of Haeju. The mission is exe-
cuted by 22 B-29s and they hit an ammunition man-
ufacturing complex. Also, B29s attached to the 92nd
Bomber Group attack targets in the vicinity of Hung-
nam, including the Pujon hydroelectric plant. The air
strikes executed this day terminate the first strategic
bombing phase against North Korean targets.
September 27, 1950
In other activity, at Taegu, Fifth Air Force establishes
the provisional 543rd Tactical Support Group for the
purpose of overseeing the Air Force’s tactical reconnais-
sance squadrons in Korea.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps an-
nounces that on this day, its 138 organized reserve
ground units have within the last 43 days reported for
duty.
— In Japan: At 1410, General MacArthur signs and
publicizes United Nations Command Communique 9,
which states that Seoul is liberated. Similarly to the an-
nouncement of General Almond, the proclamation is
premature. Bloody fighting still ensues throughout the
city and by dusk, X Corps controls only about half of
it. The proclamation states: “Seoul, the capital of the Re-
public of Korea, is again in friendly hands. United Na-
tions forces including the 17th Regiment of the ROK
Army and elements of the U.S. 7th and 1st Marine Di-
visions, have completed the envelopment and seizure
of the city.” Nonetheless, more of the enemy will have
to be eliminated before the entire city is secure.
In other activity, MacArthur’s headquarters in Tokyo
dispatches a radio message to X Corps in Korea ex-
plaining that Eighth Army is closing on X Corps posi-
tions and contact should occur at any time. Identical
messages are forwarded to NAVFE and to Far East Air
Forces. All parties are instructed to take every precau-
tion to ensure that these advancing units are not
brought under fire.
In other activity, General Edwin Wright receives a
memorandum from General Hickey (deputy of chief
of staff, FEC), informing him that MacArthur wants a
plan developed that would incorporate X Corps as the
amphibious invasion force to be committed at Won-
san. General Wright (G-3), head of JSPOG, has the
plans forwarded to MacArthur within several hours.
The plan, detailing the advance into North Korea, calls
for X Corps to land at Wonsan on the east coast or
“elsewhere” while Eighth Army concentrates to the
west. The plan sparks controversy, as it creates two sep-
arate field commands that will split the forces.
Wonsan is a likely candidate for the invasion site. It
has been the bloodline of Russian supplies being
shipped by sea from Vladivostok, and its rail line leads
directly north to Vladivostok. The east coast seaport
of Wonsan also fills the bill of a geographic swivel, ca-
pable of catapulting troops to various strategic loca-
tions. These include the prime real estate at
Hamhung–Hungnam, fifty miles north. A force also
could easily be shot west across the peninsula to P’y-
ongyang.
September 27 Inchon–Seoul vicinity: Seoul
still contains an abundance of snipers in buildings and
the remaining fortified blockades. One by one, the
roadblocks are crumbling. The 1st Battalion, 1st
Marines, advances north through the city against fierce
opposition. Enemy guns hold up Company C near the
rail station. Tanks roll forward to take the brunt of the
resistance and blow holes in the defenses. Flamethrow-
424
ers and M-26s fire incessantly, but enemy fire knocks
out one armored vehicle and a mine takes out another
before the blockage is clear. Soon after, the attack grinds
eastward to reduce the remaining opposition. Com-
pany E moves on the left while Company A drives on
the right, each eliminating the barricades that stand in
its path.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, grinds
down Ma-Po Boulevard against rigid opposition dur-
ing the first phase of its assault. The battalion drives to
the French Consulate and captures it just prior to 1100.
The Marines briskly propel Old Glory up the staff. The
flag-raising event is the prelude to the recapture of the
U.S. Embassy. During the struggle for the streets of
Seoul, a pitched battle erupts at the city’s primary in-
tersection, and the arrival of Lieutenant Cummings’
tanks is a welcome sight. Company D, under the um-
brella of the armor, penetrates directly into the hor-
net’s nest, defended by self-propelled guns.
Cummings’ tank knocks two guns out of commis-
sion, but then his tank strikes a mine and becomes
damaged. Meanwhile, one enemy truck, with a how-
itzer in tow, is destroyed by Sergeant Mcdonald’s tank
as it attempts escape. The advance maintains a steady
pace, despite the inability of the 7th Marines to con-
nect with the 1st Marines. By 1530, the Marines whip
through the rugged urban streets and secure the Rus-
sian Consulate Embassy.
Elements of Company E, 2nd Battalion, com-
manded by Captain Charles D. Frederick, remove the
Russian colors and replace them with the Stars and
Stripes. Within ten minutes, the Marines dash another
350 yards to the U.S. Consulate, and at 1537, Old
Glory is unfurled atop the nearby U.S. Embassy, which
still contains a contingent of North Koreans that con-
trol a machine gun. The North Koreans capitulate
without firing a shot.
Company D, operating south of the government
compound, drives east, but severe incoming fire from
three separate directions halts progress. The Marines
take cover in buildings while Corsairs zoom overhead
and lace the street with deadly iron streamers that crash
within one block of the stalled company. In conjunc-
tion with the air strikes, the 1st Platoon, again covered
by tank fire, jumps farther ahead in the wake of each
pass of the aircraft. The 1st Platoon then lunges forward,
taking a wide leap to terminate the resistance. The ri-
flemen and BARmen fire incessantly as they advance
and crush the resistance by 1630.
The city of Seoul belongs to the U.S. Marines. Al-
though the battle is won, some remnant snipers and
several small pockets of Communist troops remain. The
Marines, the S.K. Marines and the S.K. police execute
mop-up operations. Subsequent to the termination of
the organized opposition, the 1st and 2nd Battalions
of Chesty Puller’s 1st Marines ignore the lingering
sniper fire and march to the eastern sector of the city
to establish night positions there.
In the 5th Marines sector, at the northern part of Seoul,
the enemy resistance finally dissipates, permitting a more
 425
rapid advance. Sodaemun is seized without incident by
Company E, but too late. A Korean civilian reports
that the Communists, anticipating the loss of Seoul,
had recently removed about 400 American POWs and
shipped them north.
Meanwhile, the primary attack of the 5th Marines
occurs farther south. At 0645, the 3rd Battalion ad-
vances to seize the eastern knob of Hill 296, and then
its principal objective, Government House. All the
while, huge spirals of smoke still ring upward from the
charred and shattered city, half-choking the men of
Companies G and I as they clear the heights. To their
surprise, they encounter no heavy fire; rather, the rem-
nant defenders on the ridge offer only sporadic sniper
fire. Once the high ground is secured, the Marines drive
to seize their sector of Seoul.
By about 0730, Companies G and I descend the
heights and begin plowing through the streets in the
western sector of the city. The ground Marines, with
supporting engineers and tanks, encounter resistance.
Individually, the obstacles along the streets are de-
stroyed and within two hours, elements of Company G
establish contact with the 1st Marines. Without pause,
the 3rd Battalion presses forward, driving north. Prior
to 1030, it secures Seoul Middle School and the heights
(Hill 79) north of the school. From here, the Marines
lurch against Kwang Who Moon Circle, which boasts
the final enemy barricade that raises organized resist-
ance.
The Marine tanks advance to crush the barrier. One
tank, a flamethrower, nudges close to the blockade at
the intersection and unleashes steady bursts of flame
that terminate the opposition. From the reduced plaza,
Company G, 3rd Battalion, moves without incident to
Government House. At 1508, simultaneously, the
Marines run down North Korean flags that are flying
on two poles at opposite ends of the building. In quick
motion, twin U.S. flags are immediately catapulted to
the top of the flagpoles, signaling the retaking of the
capital. The occupants of the Government House ap-
parently had not expected to be evicted. When Marines
enter the unoccupied building, they discover warm
food. After vanquishing the organized resistance, the
3rd Battalion reverts to eliminating the remaining
snipers and stragglers.
In the evening the 3rd Battalion establishes its com-
mand post in Government House. In the meantime,
the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, which is trailing the 3rd
Battalion, reaches the Seoul Middle School during the
morning. From there, it swings left and drives north
toward another strategic target, Hill 338, situated about
one mile northwest of Government House. The attack
commences at 1300, following air strikes and an ar-
tillery and mortar barrage. Initially, the 1st Platoon,
Company A, surges forward and gains some high
ground. Then the 2nd Platoon, led by Lieutenant Ed-
ward Collins, shoots around the left of a wall and
climbs to seize the summit. But heavy enemy fire causes
a temporary suspension of the advance to allow planes
to arrive and quell the resistance.
September 27, 1950
The Marine pilots roar over the area and plunder the
enemy positions on the crest. This devastating fire is
followed by a heavy concentration of mortars, which
provides ample cover fire. The Marines advance be-
hind the whizzing shells and hammer the enemy. The
1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant Nicholas Trapnell,
springs to a knoll just below the towering peak. In con-
junction, the 2nd Platoon reinitiates its assault against
the summit and it advances to the left of the wall.
At about the same time, the 3rd Platoon, led by
Sergeant George Bolkow, operating on the right, bolts
to the front and becomes the vanguard. The 3rd Platoon
bursts through the final resistance and secures the sum-
mit of Hill 338 at 1508, to complete the mission of the
3rd Battalion. It now controls the Seoul–Pyongyang
Highway at the northwest edge of Seoul. After dark,
the bulk of the remaining enemy troops in Seoul ab-
scond.
In the 7th Marines sector, in the 1st Battalion zone,
near the area dubbed “Haengju Front,” the enemy pops
out of the northern hills at about 1200 and drives to-
ward the old ferry crossing at Hill 125. En route, the
Communists encounter Company A, commanded by
Captain David Banks, the designated guardians of a
roadblock at Ryokokyu. Soon after, Company C, com-
manded by Captain Richard Delamar III, is thrown
into the fight to ensure the safety of the bridgehead.
The heated exchange ensues without pause and causes
the Marines to add more punch. One platoon of Com-
pany B bolsters the bridgehead and the slugfest ends.
The enemy disengages and bolts for Kaesong.
In the 2nd Battalion zone, a contingent that includes
tanks, infantry and engineers rolls down the Kaesong
Highway and easily establishes contact with Company
D. The battle-weary troops, isolated between Hills 238
and 296 since the 25th, are easily rescued. The column
then returns to Hoengjeoe, again against no significant
resistance.
At about the same time, the 3rd Battalion, supported
by fire from the 2nd Battalion, jumps off to reduce the
northern portion of Hill 338. The assault meets rigid
resistance. Companies H and G advance on the left
and right respectively. Company H then maneuvers
through a precarious draw on the right of Company
G, while Company I advances on the left flank of G
Company.
And then, unexpected heavy fire pours down from
the heights. One platoon (Company H), the 3rd, led by
Lieutenant Paul Denny, shoots forward, but the 1st and
2nd platoons remain stalled, forcing Captain Shields,
the company commander, to reel it back rather than
risk isolation.
In the meantime, Company I temporarily shifts its
positions to bolster Company H, but still the stiff
enemy fire prevents advance. Company I then reiniti-
ates its original mission and begins to drive north to
reduce the remaining obstinate resistance on the far-
strung knobs of Hill 338. Later, Company G is ordered
to depart from its ridge line position and strike against
Hill 342 to the east. To bolster the assault, Colonel
September 27, 1950
Litzenberg, during mid-morning, orders his 2nd Bat-
talion to strike Hill 343, located about 2,500 yards
north of its lines. Like the other ongoing assaults, this,
too, is a methodical advance against ferocious enemy fire
and over nasty ground. Companies E and F, com-
manded by Captains Walter Phillips and Elmer Zorn,
respectively, launch the attack.
Company F advances on the left while Company E,
to the right, plows straight ahead. Following a tedious
contest, the Marines take the objective by dusk. Com-
pany E commands the summit. Meanwhile, Company
G, commanded by Captain Cooney, is heavily engaged
at Hill 342. Initially, the advance progresses well. It
A Marine rifleman, from inside a damaged building, fires at the enemy while two others hold under some
cover.
426
safely passes through a complicated enemy minefield
without incident, compliments of South Koreans who
had marked the mines. However, upon reaching the
objective, the Marines are greeted by sniper fire. The 1st
Platoon advances to provide cover fire while the 2nd and
3rd Platoons assault the objective. Enemy fire bars the
1st Platoon from reaching its designated positions in
the heights. Meanwhile, the other two platoons ad-
vance, but lacking cover fire, they, too, are unable to as-
cend from the low ground on the slope.
For the rest of the day, the enemy on Hill 342 con-
tinues to hold the high ground. The 7th Marines have
reduced Hill 343 but it still shares occupancy with the
 427
enemy on Hills 338 and 342. In conjunction, the 7th
Marines, covering the period September 23–27, report
375 enemy dead and 34 prisoners. The regiment cap-
tures six rifles, four machine guns and about 600 bay-
onets.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, at Suwon, the 31st
Regiment prepares to initiate its assault to seize the
heights at Osan. At about dawn, when the flanking
force arrives at Osan, it is fired upon by an N.K. tank,
but a bazooka team takes action and knocks the tank
out. The contingent then passes through Osan and
drives north toward the high ground. Simultaneously,
the other task force begins to drive south, but it en-
counters resistance that, as suspected, is part of the
105th N.K. Armored Division. Enemy tanks and an-
titank guns bolster the ground troops.
The combat that emerges along the highway contin-
ues to intensify as the day passes, but progress is slow.
Toward the end of the grueling day, the 31st Regiment’s
two task forces converge near Hill 113, which contains
the bulk of the enemy force. The task forces establish
a night perimeter there. During the two attacks, the
enemy sustains the loss of 300 troops. In addition, 14
enemy tanks, 6 antitank guns and a few mortars are
destroyed. Lt. Colonel Robert Summers, 2nd Battalion,
commanding officer, and Major Lester Olson, Regi-
mental S-3, become seriously wounded.
In the 32nd Regimental zone, at South Mountain, the
day remains relatively tranquil, while the regiment
awaits the arrival of the 1st Marines at the conclusion
of its attack. Later in the day, the Marines come abreast
of the 32nd, facing east.
In other activity, the 32nd Regiment reports its ca-
sualties for this day as 32 killed, 33 wounded and nine
MIAs; however, many of these had been sustained dur-
ing the previous day’s heavy fighting at South Moun-
tain. (See also, In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division
sector, 7th Cavalry zone, this date.)
In other activity, General Gay, commanding officer,
1st Cavalry Division, arrives at Osan prior to noon.
The 1st Cavalry’s TF-777 does not participate in the
ongoing attack of the 31st Regiment, but Gay, upon
conferring with a 31st regimental battalion com-
mander, offers to commit the 8th Cavalry to bolster
the assault. Gay also agrees to commit the 77th and
99th FABns and one tank company. The battalion
commander (31st Regiment), according to Gay, in-
forms him that he will need authorization from higher
authority. There is no confirmation of any conversations
concerning 1st Cavalry participation, but the cavalry
is not called upon to assist.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker receives a re-
sponse from General MacArthur regarding his inquiry
of the previous day. If Walker had retained any hope
that X Corps would be coming under the authority of
Eighth Army, he now knows it will not occur.
MacArthur informs Walker that X Corps will be re-
tained as GHQ Reserve and that it will be confined to
occupation of the Inchon-Seoul vicinity, while await-
ing new GHQ orders. MacArthur tells Walker that he
September 27, 1950
will be “appraised” of the X Corps situation at an “early
date.”
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, 7th
Cavalry zone, the enemy lies in wait for the approach of
TF Lynch, which resumes its advance at 0700, but the
marching column expects trouble. The point detach-
ment comes under fire by a tank, but the threat is
quickly eradicated by a bazooka team. Shortly there-
after, the column is fired upon by an enemy machine
gun crew. Lieutenant William Woodside mounts an
immediate charge that crushes the resistance. Then,
the task force encounters two abandoned enemy tanks,
but this time, Colonel Lynch takes no chances. Both
tanks are destroyed.
Task Force Lynch enters Osan at 0800. In less than
one half-hour, at 0826, contingents of Companies K
and L, 7th Cavalry, encounter contingents of Com-
pany H, 31st Regiment, 7th Division, at a bridge
slightly north of Osan. Task Force 777 informs Gen-
eral Gay that contact has been established between
Eighth Army and X Corps this day, at 0826 near Osan.
In the 24th Division sector, the 19th Regiment pulls
into Okch’on at 0200 and takes a slight pause. Once the
tanks are refueled, the attack resumes. At 0530, the
regiment rolls out of town and the enemy is there to
meet it. One tank stumbles upon a mine, and imme-
diately following the detonation, an antitank gun de-
molishes the tank. This is enjoined by heavy fire orig-
inating in the heights west of Okch’on. The 1st
Battalion mounts an attack, but it gains little ground
against the granite resistance.
Meanwhile, thousands of enemy troops continue to
abandon the Taejon vicinity. The Air Force maintains
heat on the besieged city and the nearby strong points,
while the ground troops continue to gnaw forward.
About 300 enemy prisoners, representing seven sepa-
rate divisions, are captured during the day. This makes
it clear that Taejon is a major point of convergence for
the units, which are retreating from positions both
south and west of Waegwan.
The reports of tanks destroyed conflict; the figures
are inflated: the Air Force claims twenty kills, includ-
ing thirteen near Taejon and eight additional tanks
damaged. The ground forces also report thirteen kills
outside Taejon; Company A, 19th Regiment bazooka
teams claim three of these.
At day’s end, the 19th Regiment prepares to launch
another attack in the morning.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the 23rd
Regiment remains in Anui, its troops confined to the
town due to flooded paddies. At 0400, the enemy com-
mences a deadly mortar and artillery attack. The com-
manding officer of the 3rd Battalion, Lt. Colonel R.G.
Sherrard, is severely wounded when the command post
is struck and his staff is decimated. The battalion ex-
ecutive officer, the S-2, assistant S-3, the artillery liai-
son officer and one antiaircraft officer are killed by the
blast. The pre-dawn bombardment also wounds
twenty-five enlisted men (Regimental and Headquar-
ters Companies).
September 27, 1950 428

teen aircraft arrive to extin-

guish the threat. The fire-
power of the F-51s is
strongly felt by the enemy,
and following the delivery of
the bombs, napalm and
rockets, the task force reiniti-
ates the assault. The charge
succeeds and the infantry
pushes through, bypassing
about 600 North Koreans,
but again the column stalls
when it arrives at a blown
bridge.
In other activity, TF
Matthews, trailed by the 2nd
Battalion, 24th Regiment,
attacks at 1000. It drives to-
ward Hadong. Along the
route, the column continues
to hear news of retreating
North Koreans and their
American captives.
The pace accelerates to
close the gap, but the enemy
remains about four hours
ahead. When the column
reaches Hadong at 1730,
refugees report that one con-
tingent of enemy troops and
its captives are only about
one-half hour ahead. The
column swings northwest in
A Marine fires a sub machine gun (.45-caliber M3) during fighting in Seoul, hot pursuit.
while another uses a radio. TF Matthews reaches
Komdu, about ten miles dis-
In other activity, Hill 409 near Hyongp’ung is aban- tant, and rescues eleven American soldiers (3rd Battal-
doned prior to dawn by elements of the N.K. 10th Di- ion, 29th Regiment). Most are unable to walk, and it
vision. The remaining contingents cross to the west is evident that the North Koreans have administered
bank of the Naktong, terminating organized enemy re- no medical treatment to their wounds.
sistance east of the river. Contingents of the U.S. 9th In the ROK II Corps area, S.K. 8th Division sector, el-
Regiment enter Hyongp’ung during the afternoon. In ements advance to Tanyang, near the upper Han River.
the meantime, two companies of the 2nd Battalion, In the Capital Division sector, the Division advances
9th Regiment, secure Hill 409 without incident. On the north through the mountains and moves into Ch’un-
following day, the 2nd Battalion crosses the Naktong. yang, about thirty-one miles east of the advancing S.K.
In other activity, on or about this date, the com- 8th Division.
manding officer of the N.K. I Corps disbands his head- — In Japan: General MacArthur is informed by the
quarters at Choch’iwon. He and some other N.K. of- Joint Chiefs of Staff that he is now authorized to cross
ficers head for the Taebaek Mountains. the 38th Parallel to complete the destruction of the
In the 25th Division sector, Task Force Dolvin re- North Korean forces. The orders stipulate that no U.N.
sumes its attack toward Hamyang, but the enemy troops are to cross the Yalu River into Chinese or
mounts heavy opposition. The lead tank in the column Soviet territory and they mandate that only South
becomes damaged after it hits a mine. In the mean- Korean units should proceed to the border. The in-
time, enemy troops scattered about the nearby ridges structions also direct MacArthur, if feasible, to unite
initiate mortar and small arms fire. The U.S. infantry all of Korea under the leadership of Syngman Rhee.
fails to dislodge the enemy on the right side of the high- However, MacArthur is informed that this directive is
way, but the tanks eliminate the resistance on the left subject to change, depending on the unfolding circum-
side of it. Planes are called upon to subdue the resist- stances. The JCS mandate in their directive that
ance and bolster another infantry assault. MacArthur is to focus on the intentions of the Soviets
Meanwhile, General Kean arrives on the scene. Six- and Chinese and inform the JCS immediately if he
 429
concludes that they might be preparing to enter the
conflict.
General MacArthur is also ordered to dispatch his
plan of operations concerning the crossing of the 38th
Parallel to the JCS for their approval. MacArthur balks
at the suggestion that he should seek approval. He re-
quests authorization to cross the 38th Parallel if the
North Koreans refuse to surrender. MacArthur receives
an answer on the 29th.
September 28 Inchon-Seoul vicinity: Seoul
falls to X Corps. The North Koreans are retreating
north toward Uijongbu. However, prior to evacuating
the city, the Communists wreak havoc on the suspected
families of the S.K. troops, guerrillas and policemen.
Despicable atrocities occur. During the latter part of
the day, Generals O.P. Smith and Edward Craig trans-
fer the 1st Marine Division’s CP from Oeoso-ri to
Seoul.
In the 1st Marines sector, the 1st and 2nd Battalions
resume the attack at 0645, while the 3rd Battalion re-
mains in reserve. It and the 2nd S.K. Marine Battalion
execute mop-up missions in the rear. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, sweep the northeast section of Seoul.
The battalion overcomes mines and advances against
light opposition. In contrast, the 1st Battalion encoun-
ters many mines and some solid opposition even
though organized resistance has been shattered. Com-
bined, the 1st and 2nd Battalions clear the remainder
of Seoul.
By dark, the 1st Marines advances to Hill 133 to af-
ford the regiment domination of the
Seoul–Uijongbu–Ch’orwon Highway at the northeast
fringe of Seoul. The 7th Marines’ attack against Hill
224, about one mile farther north, and becomes stalled
by fierce resistance.
In the 5th Marines sector, patrols are dispatched
throughout the day, but all are without incident. The
5th Marines, subsequent to gaining its objectives, is
pinched out by the 1st and 7th Marines. The regiment
U.S. Marines and tanks move through Seoul during the battle for control of the city.
September 28, 1950
assembles near the Women’s University in Seoul. Col-
onel Murray establishes his headquarters with the
perimeter of the university.
In the 7th Marines sector, elements of the 7th Marines
drive down the main road and secure the heights be-
tween Seoul and Uijongbu. The enemy raises stiff re-
sistance to protect their escape routes to Uijongbu.
During the day’s fighting, Lt. Colonel Thornton Hin-
kle, commanding officer of the 2nd Battalion, becomes
wounded, and he is evacuated. Major Sawyer replaces
him.
The day’s prizes include about 75 tons of dynamite,
all of it manufactured in the U.S. and thought to have
been captured by the North Koreans from the ROKs
during the initial stages of the invasion into the south.
Colonel Litzenberg establishes his headquarters slightly
west of Ducksoo Palace, where Colonel Puller estab-
lishes the 1st Marines headquarters.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, in the 31st Regi-
mental sector, naval air strikes are scheduled to hit
enemy-held Hills 92 and 113 at about noon to crack the
remaining resistance there. The infantry, as ordered, at
0830 begins pulling back from its positions of the pre-
vious night as a precaution against being bombed by
mistake. The planes arrive on schedule and attack the
targets, including a rail tunnel near Hill 92, for about
fifty minutes.
After the air strikes, artillery (57th and 92nd FABn)
and mortar fire begin pounding the slopes until just
before 1330. When the guns cease firing, Companies
K and L drive against Hill 113. They overcome nom-
inal resistance and seize it by 1515. Company K de-
ploys on Hill 113 and it provides cover fire for Com-
pany L, which drives to Hill 92. The objective is
quickly seized, giving the regiment domination of both
hills within one hour. Enemy survivors retire eastward.
The 31st Regiment sustains no casualties during the
mission, which clears the highway between Suwon and
Osan. The regiment buries more than 100 Commu-
nists troops.
September 28, 1950
Supplies on a pier in Pusan.
On the previous day, General Gay had offered to
commit elements of the 1st Cavalry to bolster the 31st
Regimental attack, but the 8th Cavalry remained out
of the fight. General Barr, commanding officer, 7th
Infantry Division, states that he was never informed of
General Gay’s offer.
In the Eighth Army area, since Eighth Army’s cross-
ing of the Naktong, the Communists continue to in-
crease the massacre of South Koreans. At Sach’on, the
jail is torched, and about 280 police, government offi-
cials and civilians are burned to death. Other enemy
occupied towns, such as Chonju, Hamyang, Kongju,
Mokp’o and Anui, are found to contain mass burial
sites. The victims include women and children.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, Royal Australian
Regiment, arrives at Pusan. Soon after, it will join the
British 27th Brigade at Kumch’on.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, the
swift advance of the Division has caught many enemy
units in a clamp. Contingents of the N.K. 105th Ar-
mored Division are isolated in the vicinity of Ansong
and P’yongt’aek. Very few of these enemy troops reach
North Korea. Other remnant forces of various units are
trapped in the vicinity of Taejon.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, ten enemy tanks pound a
contingent of the 16th Reconnaissance Company near
P’yongt’aek. The detachment sustains casualties, but
reinforcements arrive to extricate the besieged unit.
Contingents of both Company K, 7th Cavalry, and
Company C, 70th Tank Battalion, arrive and encounter
430
the enemy tanks. Fighter bombers also arrive overhead.
The combined thrust of the 7th Cavalry and the aircraft
destroys 7 of the 10 tanks. The planes destroy five of
the T-34s.
In the 24th Division sector, at 0700, the Air Force
again lambastes the enemy positions in the heights west
of Okch’on, preceding an attack by the 2nd Battalion,
19th Regiment. After the air strike, the battalion drives
up the slopes. Surprisingly, it encounters no resistance.
During the previous night, the enemy had abandoned
the slopes. However, about 800 enemy troops are de-
tected by aircraft as they flee from Taejon while the air
strikes are in progress. One other retreating contingent
is discovered west of Taejon, moving toward Choch’i-
won.
Just west of Taejon, the Air Force targets a group of
about 1,000 enemy troops. The planes strafe the
columns and scorch the area with napalm. In the mean-
time, the 19th Regiment and engineers prepare to re-
take the city, which had been seized from them during
July. At 1630, a forward detachment of scouts (2nd
Bn., 19th Reg.) and engineers (Company C, 3rd Eng.
Bn.) move into Taejon, followed within an hour by the
main column of the 19th Regiment.
Meanwhile, a 24th Division liaison plane lands at
the airstrip at 1800, and by 1830, the regiment secures
Taejon. The recapture of the city brings exhilaration
to the 19th Regiment and the engineers of Company C.
The two units were among the final elements to aban-
don the city on July 20.
431 September 28, 1950
September 28, 1950
However, the good spirits are short-lasting, as the
Americans discover more atrocities. In and around Tae-
jon, about 5,000 to 7,000 South Koreans have been
massacred. The scenes are grisly. The dead had been
tied together in groups, ranging between 100 and 200
people, and each had his hands bound behind his back
prior to execution. Forty American soldiers captured
during the earlier fighting and 17 South Korean sol-
diers are among the murdered masses.
Only 6 people cheat death. Two Americans, one S.K.
soldier and three civilians remain alive when the city is
taken. The six survivors, thought to be dead, had only
been wounded and were feigning death when buried
alive.
A group of 500 massacred South Korean troops, each
with their hands tied behind their backs, is discovered
near the Taejon airstrip. The appalling sights are wit-
nessed by hundreds of American troops, including
Generals Milburn and Church, and the innumerable
official reports are not exaggerated.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, elements of
the 23rd Regiment, driving from the east, approach
Hamyang. Contact is made with TF Dolvin at an in-
tersection east of the town.
In the 9th Regiment sector, the 2nd Battalion, subse-
quent to being relieved by the 65th Regimental Com-
bat Team at Hill 409, crosses the Naktong River and re-
joins the 2nd Division there.
In other activity, the 38th Regiment begins a
seventy-three mile advance to Chonju. At 0400, the
2nd Battalion departs Kuch’ang and leads the way
across the mountains. The enemy raises some resist-
ance along the route, but the regiment eliminates it and
continues on course. The column reaches Chonju in
the western plain of Korea at 1315, after being on the
road for nine and one-half hours.
Once in Chonju, there is no time to relax. About
300 enemy defenders remain in the town. The 2nd
Battalion shrinks the ranks of the N.K. 102nd and
104th Security Regiments as 170 prisoners are seized
and about 100 additional Communists are killed. Fol-
lowing the skirmishes, the 2nd Battalion halts in
Chonju; its vehicles have expended their fuel. The bat-
talion informs a passing liaison plane of the situation,
and division begins to deliver more gasoline.
In the 25th Division sector, the 27th Regiment de-
parts Uiryong and attacks toward Chinju against min-
imal resistance. Also, TF Dolvin resumes its attack at
dawn and makes progress throughout the morning. It
establishes contact with contingents of the 2nd Division
at about 1100.
Later, TF Dolvin approaches a bridge that is about
to be blown. A passing liaison plane detects the enemy
at work and alerts the TF. Colonel Dolvin speeds his
tanks forward and they arrive just as the span is about
to be blown. The enemy is interrupted by the clanging
sounds of the tanks’ machine guns, and the bridge is
then secured intact. The seizure upsets the enemy’s
plans and permits the attack to continue.
Once across the bridge, TF Dolvin advances at a steady
432
pace. It sprints about twenty miles per hour. By the mid-
dle of the afternoon, TF Dolvin pushes into Namwon
and encounters contingents of the U.S. 24th Regiment and
TF Matthews. TF Dolvin pauses there until slightly after
midnight, before it pushes out toward Chonju.
In the meantime, TF Matthews is back on the hunt
in an attempt to rescue additional U.S. captives. The
task force advances to a river crossing below Namwon
at about noon. One tank crosses the river without in-
cident, but those trailing become stuck and the col-
umn stalls. Sergeant Raymond Reifers, in the lead tank,
continues to advance and he penetrates Namwon un-
noticed by the enemy. Apparently, the North Koreans
had become preoccupied with a pair of F-84 jets that
are striking the town. Reifers moves his tank forward as
if accompanied by a regiment. The unexpected armor
becomes a great stimulant to the enemy. The North
Koreans caught on the streets break for safety. They
scamper over fences, and jump from roof to roof, then
haphazardly scatter in all directions.
The effort to escape prompts the enemy to abandon
the American prisoners, although Sergeant Reifers’ tank
stands alone in the town while the column remains
stalled at the river. Reifers attempts to react accord-
ingly, but he is surprised as voices begin to yell: “Don’t
shoot! Americans!” And then, a gate flies open and
Americans jam the street.
At about the same time, back at the river, the radio
in Lieutenant Sawyer’s tank bellows an urgent request
for assistance from Reifers. He proclaims that the town
is full of enemy troops, and that he has made contact
with American captives. By this time, additional tanks
cross the river and speed into town to encounter Reifer
and 86 near-starved American soldiers. The remnant
enemy troops in Namwon are eliminated. Sergeant
Reifers is killed in action on 27 November of this year.
Later, at about 1515, Task Force Dolvin arrives in
Namwon. In conjunction, TF Blair moves out and con-
tinues to attack toward Chongup. TF Matthews re-
mains in Namwon until the following day.
In Air Force activity, the 7th Fighter Bomber
Squadron arrives at Taegu from Itazuke, Japan. It is the
first jet squadron to operate in Korea.
In other activity, the Air Force’s first three jet recon-
naissance planes (RB-45 Tornadoes) arrive in the Far
East to participate in the conflict in Korea. Also, Lieu-
tenant Ralph G. Hall (35th Fighter Bomber Squadron,
8th Fighter Bomber Group), flying an F-51 Mustang,
destroys an unidentified enemy fighter plane parked at
the Pyongyang airfield.
In Naval activity, a South Korean minesweeper,
YMS-905, is damaged when it strikes an enemy mine
off the east coast of Korea. Also, Admiral Turner Joy,
commander, Naval Forces Far East, issues OpnO
17–50 regarding minesweeper operations off Korea.
Things have changed drastically since the termina-
tion of World War II, when there was an abundance of
ships to handle minesweeping. Only twelve U.S.
minesweepers are involved at this time, due to the
critical shortage of such vessels. The Japanese supply
 433
nine vessels and the South Koreans provide three
minesweepers, but the ships lack some of the essential
equipment. Two of the U.S. vessels, the USS Doyle and
the USS Endicott, are severely restricted by their large
size and high-speed capacity.
Three other U.S. vessels, the Incredible, Pirate and
Pledge, are also too large to function properly in the
shallow Korean waters. The remaining U.S. vessels —
Chatterer, Kite, Merganser, Mockingbird, Osprey, Par-
tridge and the Redhead— get the primary duty of clear-
ing the mines off Wonsan; these smaller minesweepers
each contain wooden hulls and move at slow speeds.
Despite their sluggishness, the vessels are tough and
easily adapted to the tedious chore.
September 29 In the X Corps area, the Corps
has requested that the 1st Marine Division provide a
band and two honor guards for the ceremony in Seoul;
however, the Marines had not brought their instru-
ments from Japan. It is suggested that the Marines send
them by air, but in the meantime, General MacArthur
makes it clear that there will be no fanfare at the cere-
mony celebrating the liberation of Seoul.
At 1000, General MacArthur, having traveled from
Japan, lands at Kimpo Airfield to preside over the
restoration of a civilian government in Seoul. By the
time MacArthur arrives, his path of advance into the city
has been swept free of resistance, but the enemy had
been active during the early morning hours. The 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines, is posted along the route and the
1st Battalion, 5th Marines, is deployed all around Gov-
ernment House.
With many people, including politicians, citizens
and military representatives of the combat units, in at-
tendance, MacArthur begins the ceremony at 1200. He
unabashedly refers to God during his short speech, re-
ferring to “a merciful Providence” while he reestablishes
Syngman Rhee’s government. After his speech,
MacArthur leads the audience in saying the Lord’s
Prayer. President Syngman Rhee addresses the Ameri-
can military personnel in the audience and remarks,
“How can I ever explain to you my own underlying
gratitude and that of the Korean people.”
General MacArthur departs Seoul immediately fol-
lowing the simple ceremony. His plane takes off from
Kimpo Airfield at 1335, to the great relief of the
Marines assigned to protect MacArthur and the other
dignitaries. The Marines are quite aware that all the
mines had not been extricated, and they remain con-
cerned about snipers still in the area.
U.S. Intelligence had estimated that Seoul had been
defended by about 8,000 soldiers, and that another
5,000 were deployed in Yongdungp’o. In addition,
about 7,000 reinforcements had arrived in the area after
the invasion of Inchon. This gives the enemy about
20,000 troops, but another 10,000 to 13,000 are spread
out between the Han River and Osan. Intelligence also
suggests that about 10,000 other troops had been in
the area, but either they were not thrown into the fight-
ing or they arrived too late.
September 29, 1950
While in Korea, General MacArthur confers with
General Almond (X Corps), General Stratemeyer
(FEAF), General Walker (Eighth Army) and Admiral
Joy (NFFE) with regards to the Wonsan Operation.
During the conference, MacArthur specifies October 20
as the date the 1st Marine Division will land at Won-
san.
Later in the day, General Almond confers with divi-
sion commanders and various staff members at X Corps
headquarters in Ascom City, outside Inchon, to dis-
cuss the Wonsan Operation. It is decided that D-Day
for the invasion will be tentatively scheduled for Octo-
ber 15. Almond’s decision to invade on the 15th is
founded on the assumption that Eighth Army will
complete relief of X Corps by October 3. The Marines
in attendance, including General Shepherd, feel
strongly that the schedule laid out by Almond is not
feasible, especially in view of the fact that the Marines
are still deeply involved with terminating the ongoing
Seoul operation.
— Inchon-Seoul vicinity: In the X Corps area, all
units are informed that another amphibious invasion
will probably be undertaken and that it will occur on
the east coast of Korea.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, at 2000, OpnO
13–50 is issued. It sets forth directions for securing the
captured capital. The order specifies that the attack
continue eastward, while simultaneous reconnaissance
patrols (in strength) probe north and northwest. In ad-
dition, the order stipulates that the 1st Marine Division
relieve elements of the 7th Infantry Division posted
north of the Han River, and that it seize defined block-
ing positions. In conjunction, the 1st Marines will de-
ploy to the northeast, the 5th Marines to the north-
west and the 7th Marines to the north, essentially
forming a semi-circle around the capital. Also, the
Marines receive responsibility for the area north of the
Han River and west of the Pukhan River.
In the 1st Marines sector, the enemy mounts two
counterattacks, each against the 2nd Battalion. A rifle
platoon defending an outpost to the front of the MLR
is struck at 0445, but the assault fails. Soon after, the
enemy strikes the left flank of the 2nd Battalion, but
here, too, the enemy is easily thwarted. Much of the
fighting is close-quartered and enemy grenades inflict
the bulk of Marine casualties. A contingent of Company
E, 2nd Battalion, holding positions at a listening post
in front of Hill 132, comes under attack, but the main
body of the platoon gets a warning when a runner is
sent back by PFC Stanley R. Christianson.
Christianson volunteers to hold the position despite
the high odds that he would be killed. He attempts to
forestall the attack to give his platoon time to prepare.
The enemy contingent closes upon Christianson and
seven of them fall before his position is overrun. He is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary courage and for his selfless sacrifice to save
others. The Marines sustain four killed and 28
wounded. The Communists lose 48 killed.
In the 7th Marines sector, at about 0600, the North
September 30, 1950
Koreans strike against the positions of the 7th Marines,
but the attack is quickly extinguished. Following the
early action, the 7th Marines advances from its positions
and gains the remainder of its assigned objectives by
dusk.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the 2nd Battalion,
17th Regiment, operating in the southeast section of
Seoul, enters its first battle and encounters a strong
enemy force. The firefights continue beyond dusk, and
the battalion sustains seventy-nine casualties. The
enemy attempts to mount a new counterattack, but the
guns of the 49th FABn enter the fight and commence
a powerful bombardment that shatters the attack. The
enemy losses during the engagement amount to more
than 400.
In other activity, South Korean Marines secure Yosu
on the south coast.
In the Eighth Army area, IX Corps, since its establish-
ment, has been short of equipment and some person-
nel. Now corps has a mere two and one-half companies
of trucks to maintain the supply lines of both the 2nd
and 25th Divisions.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, 5th
Cavalry zone, a small enemy convoy, composed of 9
Russian-made jeeps, heads north from Taejon trans-
porting about fifty Communist troops. Company L,
5th Cavalry, bushwhacks the convoy and the survivors
scatter.
In the 24th Division sector, headquarters transfers to
Taejon; it bears responsibility for keeping the Army
line of communications secure within its sector and
back to the Naktong River. The 24th Division perime-
ter stretches about 100 miles: the 5th RCT is deployed
near Kumch’on, the 24th Reconnaissance Company
holds the Waegwan bridges; the 19th Regiment is de-
ployed in Taejon and stretches to the Kum River, and
the 21st Regiment extends southeast from Taejon to
Yongdong.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the 2nd Bat-
talion, 9th Regiment, receives its needed fuel. By 1530,
the battalion is back on the attack. It drives to Nonsan
and beyond to reach the Kum River at Kanggyong at
0300 on the 30th. At this time, the 2nd Division sup-
ply line extends more than 200 miles across rugged ter-
rain and confining roads. The average time for a sup-
ply convoy to race from Miryang to the front lines is
forty-eight hours.
In the 25th Division sector, TF Dolvin advances to
Chonju, where it encounters contingents of the 38th
Regiment and from there, the TF drives to the Kum
River at Iri. In the meantime, Task Force Blair secures
Chungup by noon, and then it advances to Iri, which
it seizes during the evening. TF Matthews arrives at Iri
from Namwon and joins TF Blair there.
In other activity, the 27th Regiment departs Chinju
and moves north to Hamyang and Namwon, while it
keeps the supply road open.
In the ROK Army area, on the east coast, the S.K.
3rd Division continues its vigorous pursuit of the re-
treating elements of the N.K. 5th Division. The town
434
of Samch’ok is captured during the morning, but the di-
vision continues the drive and speeds toward Kang-
nung. In conjunction, a small plane flies over Sam-
ch’ok, and a KMAG G-3 officer deposits a message,
which is picked up and then forwarded (during the af-
ternoon) to Colonel Emmerich at Kangnung. The mes-
sage orders the S.K. 3rd Division to attack across the
38th Parallel. The attack commences on the following
day.
In Naval activity, the commander, Fleet Air Wing
Japan, orders the use of planes for detecting and de-
stroying mines in the waters off the west coast of Korea.
The patrols operate during daylight. Also, the USS
Magpie (AMS-25), while participating in a mine clear-
ing operation, hits a mine and sinks off Pohang.
— In Japan: On this day, subsequent to the recap-
ture of Seoul, the capital of the Republic of Korea,
General MacArthur receives a message from President
Truman: “I know I speak for the entire American peo-
ple when I send you my warmest congratulations on
the victory which has been achieved under your lead-
ership in Korea. Few operations in military history can
match either the delaying action where you traded space
for time in which to build up your forces, or the bril-
liant maneuver [Marine amphibious landing] which
has now resulted in the liberation of Seoul.”
More praise for MacArthur and his command ar-
rives from the Joint Chiefs of Staff. President Truman
also sends praise to the American commanders of the
Air Force, Army and Navy: Lt. Generals George Strate-
meyer and Walton H. Walker, and Vice Admiral
Charles T. Joy. Personal congratulations to the troops
of all nations fighting under the colors of the United
Nations are also dispatched by Truman.
Although the magnificent victory at Inchon has
compressed the differences between MacArthur and
Washington, they still exist. MacArthur believes firmly
that the Communists will conquer Europe via South-
east Asia unless they are halted, and he would prefer
more powerful forces in Southeast Asia. But Washing-
ton maintains that Europe must receive the bulk of U.S.
troops to forestall a Soviet advance there. If this strat-
egy is to continue, the Korean crisis must be held to a
small-scale war.
In other activity, General MacArthur receives a re-
sponse to his message to the JCS on the 27th. He re-
ceives a confidential letter from General George C.
Marshall, which in essence gives him full authority to
cross the 38th Parallel. President Truman has approved
Marshall’s letter to MacArthur.
In other activity, General MacArthur issues Opera-
tions Plan 9–50, which gives the 1st Marine Division
priority for embarkation at Inchon. The Marines again
are the amphibious assault portion of X Corps.
September 30 In the X Corps area, the Corps
reports that 14,000 North Korean troops have been
killed during the Inchon–Seoul operations, and that
an additional 7,000 enemy troops have been captured.
Estimates of enemy casualties inflicted by South Korean
 435 September 30, 1950

Top: U.S. Army engineers construct a Bailey bridge atop a destroyed span near Chinju. Bottom: U.S.
Army gun carriages. On the left is an M19 with twin .40-caliber guns, and on the right is an M16 that
carries four .50-caliber machine guns.
September 30, 1950
U.S. Army Sheridan medium tank passes a knocked out Russian T-34.
troops are not available. Also, there is no exact count on
destroyed enemy tanks, but the losses are estimated at
45 to 50 in the vicinity of Inchon–Seoul–Yongdung-
p’o. Enemy losses at Suwon–Osan amount to about fif-
teen tanks. The U.S. Army (X Corps) has no tanks in
action during the operation. The Marines lose no tanks
to the enemy tank forces, but enemy ground forces cost
the Marines several tanks.
In the X Corps sector, engineers, with the strong sup-
port of the FEAF Combat Cargo Command, complete
the fabrication of a pontoon bridge across the Han
River that permits traffic to cross; 3,034 vehicles cross
into Seoul today, and crossings continue 24 hours a day
436
for many days. The Air Force flies the bridge in from
Japan on C-119s, which make seventy-nine flights.
The engineers are working on completing a second span
across the river to open two-way traffic.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, General O.P. Smith
is informed of the probable X Corps invasion of Won-
san. The 1st Marine Division assumes responsibility
for the 32nd Regiment sector in Seoul, which permits
the regiment to move back across the Han River to the
south bank.
Also, the 1st Marine Division reports that it has in-
flicted 13,666 casualties upon the enemy during the
Inchon–Seoul operation, and it also states that 4,792
 437
enemy troops have been captured. The Marines report
that they have destroyed or seized nineteen 45-mm an-
titank guns, 56 heavy machine guns, 337 light and sub-
machine guns, and twenty-three 120-mm mortars, as
well as 59 14.5 antitank rifles and 7,453 enemy rifles.
The 1st Marine Division sustains the heaviest losses of
X Corps: 366 killed, 49 who succumb to wounds,
2,029 wounded and six missing. Marine losses are most
severe September 21-27 in Seoul, when 1,482 casual-
ties are sustained; 285 of these occur on the 24th.
Division issues OpnO 14–50 at 1500; it designates
the missions of the regiments.
In other activity, The 1st Marines (RCT-1) takes re-
sponsibility for the right flank, and it is to establish
blocking positions in the heights from two to five miles
northeast of the capital. The 5th Marines (RCT-5) is or-
dered to maintain a strong reconnaissance presence by
dispatching a reinforced battalion to Suyuhyon to es-
tablish a blocking position while also protecting the di-
vision’s left flank. The order also stipulates that the 5th
Marines is to (upon order) commit one reinforced rifle
company for Task Force Kumpo. The attachment units
are 1st Battalion, 11th Marines; one battery, 50th AAA
Battalion, USA; Company A, 1st Tank Battalion;
Company A, 1st Engineer Battalion, and one Com-
pany of the 1st Motor Transport Battalion.
The 7th Marines (RCT-7) is to speed to the area
near Uijongbu and secure blocking positions there. The
attachment contingents are 3rd Battalion, 11th
Marines; one battery, 50th AAA Battalion, USA; Com-
pany D, 1st Tank Battalion, and one company of South
Korean Marines. The order directs that the KMC Reg-
iment (minus the 1st and 3rd Battalions and one com-
pany of the 5th Battalion), augmented by one detach-
ment of Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company, is to
proceed east to the confluence of the Han and Pukhan
Rivers. Once there, it is to secure blocking positions
along the road that stretches from Seoul.
Also, Task Force Kumpo, when activated by Division,
is to include one reinforced rifle company, 5th Marines;
the 3rd KMC Battalion; Battery C, 50th AAA Battal-
ion, USA; and, if necessary, a detachment of tanks.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the 7th Division
reports that its 32nd Regiment has killed about 3,000
enemy troops and captured 1,203. The 17th and 31st
Regiments each inflict several hundred casualties upon
the North Koreans. The 7th Division sustains 572 bat-
tle casualties: 106 killed, 409 wounded and 57 MIA.
These casualty figures include 166 South Korean troops
who had been attached to the 7th Division.
In other activity, the 7th Division begins moving to
Suwon and Ich’on, south and southeast respectively, to
begin the laborious movement by land to Pusan. The
division’s tanks and heavy equipment will embark from
Ich’on aboard ten LSTs that await the arrival of the 7th
Division components.
In the Eighth Army, I Corps, area, 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion sector, the 5th Cavalry discovers three locomotives
and attached trains the enemy had concealed in tunnels.
In the 24th Division sector, the road bridge over the
October 1, 1950
Naktong at Waegwan has been repaired and it begins
to handle vehicular traffic. Engineers have used pile
bents and a 100-feet triple single-panel Bailey bridge to
stitch the 207-foot hole.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the regi-
ments are deployed throughout the area from the Kum
River and the area south of it. The 9th Regiment stands
in the Koryong–Samga vicinity. The 23rd Regiment is
deployed around Anui and the 38th Regiment holds
positions in the vicinity of Chonju–Kanggyong.
In the 25th Division sector, TF Dolvin, subsequent to
accomplishing its objectives, is disbanded at 1500.
Since the initiation of its attack on September 26, TF
Dolvin has sustained one officer and forty-five enlisted
men wounded. In addition, three tanks have been lost
to enemy mines. In contrast, TF Dolvin has killed
about 350 enemy troops and captured 750 others. It has
seized or destroyed 19 vehicles, 16 antitank guns and
about 250 tons of ammunition.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 24th Regiment,
captures Kunsan, a port city on the Kum River estuary,
without incident at 1300.
In the ROK Army I Corps area, the S.K. 3rd Division
continues ripping up the coastal road as it races north.
The pace-setting advance outdistances all other attack-
ing units, and it winds up at a point five miles short of
the 38th Parallel. Some advance patrols cross the 38th
Parallel this day.
In the ROK II Corps area, South Korean troops ad-
vance several miles north of Andong and inspect a tun-
nel that had been bombarded by Air Force planes. The
tunnel, obviously struck by napalm, contains dead
enemy troops at both ends. It is packed with supplies
and equipment, including 76-mm guns, 120-mm mor-
tars, five trucks and four jeeps.
South of Andong at Uisong, other S.K. troops cap-
ture about 100 tons of rice and a tremendous amount
of equipment. The cache includes large numbers of
tanks and vehicles, and huge quantities of ammuni-
tion. The enemy division had expended its fuel and
was compelled to abandon the vehicles.
In Naval activity, the USS Mansfield (DD 728)
strikes a mine off Changjon.
— In Japan: General MacArthur dispatches a mes-
sage to the secretary of defense: “Unless and until the
enemy capitulates, I regard all of Korea open for our
military operations.”
October 1 The commander-in-chief of the North
Korean Forces receives a call for surrender from Gen-
eral MacArthur: “The early and total defeat and com-
plete destruction of your armed forces and war-making
potential is now inevitable. In order that the decision
of the United Nations may be carried out with a min-
imum of further loss of life and destruction of property,
I, as the United Nations’ commander-in-chief, call
upon you and the forces under your command, in
whatever part of Korea situated, forthwith to lay down
your arms and cease hostilities....”
The North Koreans are also informed that they
October 1, 1950
should free all POWs and civilian prisoners. The broad-
cast receives no response. Subsequently, on October 9,
another surrender offer is delivered to the North Korean
leader. In other activity, from September 1 until this
day, the U.N. has collected about 30,000 enemy pris-
oners.
In the X Corps area, preliminary directions from
GHQ, Far East Command, concerning the amphibious
landing at Wonsan are delivered to Admiral Struble
and General Almond; Joint TF 7 is re-established. Stru-
ble is renamed the commanding officer. The objectives
of JTF 7 are: to maintain a naval blockade of Korea’s east
coast from Ch’ongjin southward; to board and transport
X Corps to the Wonsan area and provide cover and
support en route; to initiate the required pre–D-day
Naval operations; to launch (on D-day) an amphibious
assault and seize, occupy and defend a beachhead in
the vicinity of Wonsan; and to provide naval gunfire,
air and initial logistical support.
The North Koreans have maintained Wonsan as a
naval base, but it was the Japanese who initially devel-
oped the city’s naval capabilities. Also, off Wonsan, a
helicopter attached to the USS Rochester discovers
enemy mines while conducting a reconnaissance mis-
sion; 61 mines are spotted. Also, the USS Missouri par-
ticipates in the bombardment of targets on the east
coast of Korea.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, General O.P. Smith
receives a memorandum directing him to submit a plan
by Oct. 3 for loading the 1st Marine Division at Inchon
for the Wonsan invasion; however, at present, no ships
have been designated for the operation, thus making it
impossible for Smith to provide the requested infor-
mation at the required time.
In the 1st Marines zone, as scheduled, the Regiment
deploys at its assigned blocking positions northeast of
the capital, and the day passes without major incident.
Nevertheless, several patrols encounter some light resist-
ance.
In the 5th Marines sector, in the 2nd Battalion zone,
patrols are dispatched along the Pyongyang Road,
stretching to Munsan-ni and the Imjin River. At 0600
the 3rd Battalion, bolstered by a detachment of engi-
neers, one tank platoon and one battery of artillery,
drives toward Suyuhyon. Its rear is guarded by the 1st
Battalion’s Company C, which is to simultaneously
protect the route of the returning vehicles. The col-
umn advances throughout the day, hindered primarily
by two enemy roadblocks, but both are demolished.
By dusk, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines (reinforced),
reaches the heights just shy of the objective. An enemy
counterattack is sprung on the following morning.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines’ patrols
scan their wide area for the enemy. Contact with the
enemy is made at about 1030, when about 150 to 200
North Korean troops are detected. The firefight is brief,
thanks in great part to the timely arrival of planes and
an effective mortar bombardment. The enemy is
quickly routed, leaving thirty dead troops on the field.
In the 7th Marines sector, the Regiment moves out
438
early. By 0630, the battalions advance with the 3rd Bat-
talion acting as vanguard while the 2nd Battalion trails
in reserve. Meanwhile, anticipating an enemy ambush
about halfway to the objective, Colonel Litzenberg dis-
patches the 1st Battalion, led by Lt. Colonel Raymond
Davis, to take positions from which it can provide cover
fire for the 3rd Battalion when it traverses a passageway
that is susceptible to heavy fire from concealed enemy
positions on the sheer slopes that dominate the pass.
The 1st Battalion deploys on both sides of the pas-
sageway and awaits the advancing 3rd Battalion. In the
meantime, the 2nd Battalion becomes snarled when it
encounters an enemy minefield. While the ground
troops, tanks and artillery units are forced to halt, en-
gineers immediately begin to eliminate the obstacles.
During the day’s march, one 3rd Battalion patrol
comes across a grisly scene — the bodies of thirty exe-
cuted civilian Koreans, including some women and one
child, all of whom have their hands bound behind their
backs. According to a Communist prisoner, the vic-
tims are relatives of South Korean soldiers.
While Major Roach’s 2nd Battalion struggles to clear
the mines and resume the advance, the enemy and the
1st Battalion clash. As expected, the hills are infested
with enemy troops. The accompanying artillery initi-
ates a heavy series of barrages that strike both Marine
battalions during the day. Aircraft arrive to pound the
slopes to loosen resistance, but the enemy holds firmly.
The Marines halt the advance for the night.
In conjunction, the 7th Marines are reinforced by
the 3rd Battalion, 11th Marines (Artillery), Company
D, 1st Tank Battalion, Company D, 1st Engineer Bat-
talion and one company of Korean Marines (Company
C).
In the Eighth Army area, covering the period from
its entrance into the war until today, Eighth Army has
sustained 24,172 casualties: 5,145 killed in action;
16,461 wounded in action, including 422 who die
from their wounds; 42 reported captured and 2,164
missing in action.
In other activity, Army suffers from the lack of un-
loading facilities at Inchon, as the 1st Marine Division
has priority due to the Wonsan operation. Also, Army
is unable to handle more than one corps beyond the
Han River, forcing the IX Corps to suspend its advance
into North Korea until the logistics situation eases. The
U.N. rail system extends only as far as the original
Pusan Perimeter, unable to supply Eighth Army ele-
ments now stretched about 200 miles north of it at the
Han River. A Herculean effort is undertaken to restore
the rails, particularly those north of Waegwan.
In conjunction, Eighth Army begins to repair the
rail bridges and the larger road bridges, while I Corps
assumes responsibility for the remainder of the road
bridges. South Korean troops repair the smaller bridges.
Advance elements of the Thailand Battalion arrive
at Pusan, followed by the remainder on 7 November.
Also, the weather is quickly changing and the U.S. and
other U.N. troops lack sufficient winter clothing.
Eighth Army continues to overwork its vehicles to
 439 October 1, 1950

Wounded troops aboard a transport plane en route from Korea to Japan are treated by a nurse.

resupply the advancing units. During September and
through October, more than seventy-five percent of
the Eighth Army vehicles operate on a round-the-clock
basis. The practice continues into November. During
the operation, the trucks of the 2nd and 25th Divi-
sions are cannibalized to supply other units. The ab-
sence of rails makes the supply situation terrible. Truck
drivers must be flown into Pusan or transported there
by train to pick up vehicles and drive them north. The
trip takes the trucks on a 400-mile journey over nasty
highways.
In the I Corps area, the corps has logistical problems.
October 2, 1950
Some units are reduced to one day’s supplies. Many
tanks are operating in advanced areas with inadequate
fuel. The tankers frequently go into action realizing
they may not be able to sustain the attack into the fol-
lowing day.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, Colonel Mon Che
Won, commanding officer 19th Regiment, N.K. 13th
Division, tires of hiding near Tabu-dong and surren-
ders. The enemy division has been decimated, but some
of its troops eventually escape to Pyonggang, dubbed the
“Iron Triangle.”
In the 24th Division area, the 24th Division advances
along the Kumsan Road and captures much enemy
equipment and ammunition, fifteen artillery pieces and
seven working tanks.
In other activity, the North Koreans establish a for-
midable roadblock on the main Seoul Road in an effort
to buy time to permit about 2,000 troops of the N.K.
6th Division to escape to the North. The enemy had
abandoned its heavy weapons, near Sanch’ong (Chirye
Mountains), but retains its machine guns and mortars.
The blockade, about fifteen miles northwest of Kum-
ch’on, holds for nearly ten hours.
In the IX Corps area, 25th Division sector, about 200
enemy troops are spotted northeast of Kumsan. A Mos-
quito aircraft drops a message to them instructing them
to lay down their weapons and march to a nearby hill.
The North Koreans follow the instructions and wait
on the hill until patrols, guided by the plane, advance
and capture them.
In the ROK I Corps area, two rifle companies of the
S.K. 3rd Division shoot across the 38th Parallel just
before noon. These riflemen encounter some opposition
from entrenched enemy troops, but by the following
day, both the Capital Division and the S.K. 3rd Divi-
sion establish their respective command posts at
Yangyang.
In the ROK II Corps area, although the enemy is on
the retreat, some units have evaded the surging South
Koreans and maintained cohesion in the mountains.
One of these groups, composed of between 1,000 and
2000 troops, is isolated but not docile. The North Ko-
rean contingent launches an attack to break through
the S.K. lines and escape northward. Slightly after mid-
night (October 1-2) the ROK II Corps headquarters in
Wonju becomes the recipient of the assault.
The Communists overwhelm headquarters and rav-
age the town. Five American officers are among the dead.
The Americans had either been attached to the corps or
been in Wonju on liaison missions. The rampage con-
tinues until the morning of the 2nd. At its conclusion, be-
tween 1,000 and 2,000 civilians are massacred.
The North Korean 1st Division, which is retreating
through Wonju and Inje, eventually reaches the vicin-
ity of Pyongyang. By the latter part of October, about
2,000 troops assemble there. According to U.S. esti-
mates, about 25,000 to 30,000 Communist troops es-
cape to North Korea, but the vast majority of the force
has been destroyed or captured. For all intents and pur-
poses, the N.K. Army has been destroyed.
440
In Air Force activity, Lieutenant Hamilton B. Shawe,
a pilot attached to the 8th Tactical Reconnaissance
Squadron, executes a most dangerous mission. He flies
solo to Wonsan, a distance of 425 miles, in an unarmed
aircraft to photograph enemy positions there. The
Communists score several hits upon his plane, but he
is able to get important photographs and return safely
to his base.
Also, during another encounter between Sabre jets
and MiGs near Songchon, Lieutenant Raymond O.
Barton, 334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th
Fighter-Interceptor Group, downs one MiG-15 during
a morning mission.
In other activity, a pilot based on a carrier is reported
down about 90 miles inside enemy territory. A rescue
helicopter races to the scene. Lieutenant William B.
Evans and two escort F-86s arrive at the spot between
Kyomip’o and Pyongyang. Evans lands and rescues the
pilot. All aircraft return safely, although Evans’ heli-
copter had come under intense enemy fire.
— In China: Premier Chou En-lai, during a speech
today, lets it be known that China is prepared to di-
rectly enter the Korean conflict. The premier states that
China “will not tolerate foreign aggression and will not
stand aside should the imperialists wantonly invade the
territory of their neighbor.”
— In Japan: U.S. troops and the sparse contingents
of the other U.N. Allies have supported the South Ko-
rean Army’s plight against the Communist invaders.
By today, the tables have turned 180 degrees. The
North Korean forces are being thrashed all across South
Korea. The combination of the invasion at Inchon and
the breakout from the Pusan Perimeter has dealt Gen-
eral MacArthur the success he needed to forestall the loss
of South Korea to the Communists. U.S. troops who
had been mauled and forced into humiliating retreat
are now on the offense. The successful advance per-
mits General MacArthur to harness some of his power.
Today, MacArthur directs the Air Force to abort its
missions to destroy the remaining bridges, rails and
roads below the 38th Parallel. He also orders the Air
Force to suspend attacks against communication cen-
ters in the same area. General MacArthur ceases all at-
tacks against primary installations in North Korea and
furthermore, he strikes enemy air fields south of the
40th Parallel from the list of targets.
October 2 Several conferences are held between
this day and October 4 concerning the Wonsan oper-
ation. Admiral Struble and staff officers decide to estab-
lish Advance JTF 7. The advance group — composed
of 21 minesweepers, including 8 Japanese, 1 South Ko-
rean and 10 U.S. vessels — begins its clearing operation
in Wonsan Harbor on the 10th.
In the X Corps area, responsibility for Kumpo penin-
sula is transferred from X Corps to the 1st Marine Di-
vision. (Both Kimpo and Kumpo are names used to des-
ignate the peninsula formed by the mouth of the Han
River. Kimpo is the name of the airfield and Kumpo is
the name of the principal town on the peninsula.)
 441
Task Force Kumpo, composed of the 3rd Korean
Marine Battalion, a unit of the 1st Signal Battalion,
USMC, and C Battery, 50th AAA Battalion, USA, re-
lieves elements of the 187th Airborne RCT and as-
sumes responsibility for the operations there. However,
no enemy activity is discovered on the peninsula after
this day. During the 187th’s watch, the unit had been
plagued with a lack of artillery, compelling it to de-
pend on naval gunfire and the spot teams led by Lieu-
tenants Leo McMillan, USN, and John E. Dolan, 7th
Marines. Both officers and their respective teams re-
main with TF Kumpo. The 187th Airborne RCT had
protected the Marines’ right flank as they advanced to
Seoul.
In the 5th Marines sector, the enemy launches a
company-sized assault against the Marines at 0230. It
is met by tenacious machine gun fire and easily termi-
nated. The Marines discover 67 enemy dead on the
field at daybreak. At 0700, the march is resumed and
without further incident, Suyuhyon is occupied.
In the 7th Marines sector, the N.K. 31st Regiment,
31st Division, still holds its bulwark positions in the
heights along the Uijongbu Road, near Nuwon-ni, sev-
eral miles south of Uijongbu. At 0630, the 1st and 3rd
Battalions, commanded by Colonel Davis and Major
Roach respectively, reinitiate the drive down the road
to fracture the resolute enemy entrenchments on the
slopes above the defile. Marine squadron VMF-312
planes swarm over the area throughout the day, plaster-
ing the slopes to aid the eviction of the entrenched
enemy.
North Korean officers and enlisted men who surrendered at the 38th Parallel under U.N. guards.
October 2, 1950
The 1st Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel
Davis, advances on the left (east) of the defile, in con-
junction with the 3rd Battalion, which drives forward
on the right (west). The 3rd Battalion, commanded by
Major Roach, punches its way to the midpoint of the
passageway, but again, enemy minefields slow the
progress of the tanks and force the engineers to resume
the task of clearing the path while under incessant fire.
Meanwhile, the enemy throws a roundhouse punch to
break up the advance. The North Koreans launch a
horrific barrage that includes artillery fire and mortars.
These supplement the ongoing small arms fire ham-
mering both of the advancing battalions.
The tanks of the 1st Platoon spring into action. They
swivel their turrets toward two dingy huts that contain
enemy troops. The guns roar and their thundering fire
decimates the huts and kills about 35 North Korean
troops. During the heated exchange, the enemy man-
ages to thread the needle by firing directly through the
105-mm gun tube of a dozer tank. The shot wounds
two Marine crewmen.
The 1st Battalion, also bolstered by planes, contin-
ues its dogged advance. The battalion presses forward
and darts across the stream east of the passageway and
then lunges into the nearby heights. The battalion gains
only about three hundred yards at day’s end.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector, the
South Koreans continue to advance beyond the 38th
Parallel. Divisional Headquarters is established at
Yangyang about eight miles north of the parallel by
both the Capital and S.K. 3rd Divisions.
October 3, 1950
Elements of the ROK 3rd Division at the 38th Parallel.
Western press representatives announce the crossing
of the border into North Korea, but official news is not
forthcoming until the following day. A U.S. Air Force
plane scours the area north of the 38th Parallel in the
vicinity of Hwach’on and Kumhwa. The pilot reports
spotting many small groups of N.K. troops and esti-
mates a combined total about 5,000.
In Air Force activity, the 8th TRS Squadron arrives
at Taegu form Japan to become the Air Force’s initial day
reconnaissance squadron to operate from a base in
Korea.
In other activity, a contingent of twenty-two B-29s
strikes a Communist military training complex located
in Nanam and devastates it. Also, a contingent of F-
86s attached to the 336th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, clash with
MiGs near Kunu-ri. One of the enemy planes is
downed by Lieutenant Loyd J. Thompson.
— In the United Nations: The Soviets offer a plan
to order a cease fire in Korea. The Russian proposal
also calls for the withdrawal of all foreign troops from
Korea.
— In Japan: General MacArthur issues U.N. Com-
mand Operations Order 2, the order concerning the
imminent attack into North Korea. It stipulates spe-
cific instructions concerning U.N. operations above the
38th Parallel, and it clarifies the precise mission of X
Corps and its plan of movement.
X Corps is to revert to GHQ reserve when Eighth
Army moves through it, while advancing through Seoul.
Also, the 1st Marine Division and X Corps headquarters
are to embark at Inchon. The 7th Infantry Division and
the majority of X Corps troops are to move to Pusan and
442
embark there. MacArthur concludes that the congestion
at the port of Inchon, combined with the lousy tides,
will definitely hinder the mission. He decides that some
of the force will have to embark at Pusan to ensure that
the operation remains on schedule. On the following
day, Eighth Army issues its operation order to blueprint
its portion of the attack into North Korea.
October 3 Inchon-Seoul vicinity: X Corps orders
the 1st Marine Division to begin moving to an assem-
bly area at Inchon to prepare to embark for Wonsan.
The town of Wonsan, located along the southwest tip
of Yonghung Bay, is much more accessible and the in-
digenous tides are more easily conquerable than those
at Inchon. The port, considered one of the finest nat-
ural harbors in Korea, is strategically located about 80
miles north of the 38th Parallel.
By 6 October, the 1st, 5th and 11th Marines are in
position at Inchon. The 7th Marines arrives later. The
1st and 7th Marines are scheduled to assault Wonsan.
Unlike Inchon, the invasion force will face neither un-
ruly currents nor nasty seawalls blanketed by fog, thereby
ensuring the landing craft a quick trek to the beaches.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st and 5th Ma-
rine Regiments maintain their positions, but continue
to send out patrols. The commandant, General Clifton
Cates, arrives by helicopter at Division headquarters.
His party includes Generals Edwin Pollock and Clay-
ton Jerome. After receiving a briefing, General Cates de-
parts by helicopter to observe the sectors of the 1st and
5th Marines. Afterward, Cates takes a jeep to the front
lines of the 7th Marines to watch the Regiment ham-
mer its way to the objective.
 443
A USMC F7F Tigercat at Kimpo Airfield.
In the 7th Marines sector, the attack to seize the
heights above the defile and to gain Uijongbu resumes.
Roach’s 3rd Battalion pushes along the west side of the
road, while the 1st Battalion, under Davis, drives along
the east side, with each afforded heavy air and tank sup-
port. The armor throws its full weight into the battle and
slams the enemy with relentless firepower, expending
167 rounds of 90-mm shells and about 20,000 ma-
chine gun shells to bolster the attacks. The supporting
air attacks by VMF-312, although effective, are costly.
An unending string of low-level sorties blasts the
North Korean–held slopes. Enemy small arms fire
knocks out one plane, piloted by First Lieutenant
Robert Crocker, who dies shortly after the crash. An-
other pilot, Major Charles McLean, is also shot down.
He lands his plane on friendly terrain and survives.
During the day’s fighting, the planes of VMF-312
spot an enemy column of vehicles and immediately
take it under fire. The swift action decimates seven ve-
hicles, but one truck escapes destruction. The attack-
ers gain ground and both battalions surge to the high
ground on opposite sides of the road. To add more mo-
mentum, Colonel Litzenberg commits Major Webb D.
Sawyer’s 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines. It speeds through
the passageway, aware that the 1st and 3rd Battalions
dominate the east and west respectively.
The attacking Marines welcome the buffer in the
heights, which provides them with extra stamina to
burst through the remaining obstacles. The attack ac-
celerates further when the 2nd Battalion discovers that
the enemy artillery positions and supply centers have
been deserted. The 2nd Battalion storms down the
October 3, 1950
highway heading straight for the objective, fully aware
that the regiment has bludgeoned the resistance. Two
damaged enemy tanks are captured during the assault,
but seven tanks escape.
Meanwhile, the Marine planes have also destroyed
four additional supporting tanks. Three battalions of the
N.K. 31st Regiment, one artillery battalion, and con-
tingents of the N.K. 17th Division and the Seoul Di-
vision had staunchly blocked the 7th Marines. Never-
theless, subsequent to three brutal days of grueling
combat, Colonel Litzenberg’s RCT-7, the freshest reg-
iment in the division, prevails. Today’s advance of about
three miles through strenuous terrain crushes the re-
sistance.
At 1700 the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, under
Major Webb Sawyer, enters the abandoned town and
takes uncontested control of Uijongbu, which is re-
duced to charred debris by the air assaults. The advance
also severs the enemy’s communications between the
areas east and west of the captured town. The victory
for the Marines’ newest regiment also provides X Corps
with a vital blocking position along its final phase line.
But the victory is not without pain. The regiment sus-
tains 13 killed and 111 wounded during the three-day
fight for the town.
The 7th Marines occupy the heights north of the
prize and establish a line around the town as a night
perimeter. The combat in the vicinity of Uijongbu,
during the 2nd-3rd, is the final organized resistance
raised against the 1st Marine Division during the In-
chon–Seoul operations. From this point on, the
Marines hold their blocking positions, but continue to
October 4, 1950
Marine Corsairs at Kimpo Airfield.
dispatch patrols to the front and along the flank. Or-
ders arrive on October 5 that direct the Marine regi-
ments to begin staging in Inchon.
In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army issues its op-
eration plan for the attack into North Korea. I Corps
is ordered to seize a line north of the Imjin River near
the 38th Parallel. The order stipulates that the minimum
force to be committed is one division. The IX Corps is
to relieve the I Corps, then I Corps is to drive north.
The advance is to be spearheaded by the 1st Cavalry
Division. In conjunction, the flanks are to be protected
by the 24th Division and the S.K. 1st Division.
In related activity, the ROK Army is ordered to field
a new division (the 11th) by October 5. The S.K. 11th
Division is to support IX Corps during the operations
south of the 38th Parallel. Also, ROK Army is directed
to transfer its I Corps to terrain on the east coast, be-
tween Chumunjin-up and Yongp’o. Its II Corps is to
move to Central Korea and deploy between Ch’unch’on
and Uijongbu. Both S.K. corps are then to prepare for
the northward attack.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, Royal Australian
Regiment, arrives at Kumch’on to join the British
Brigade. Upon the arrival of the Australian Regiment,
the British 27th Brigade becomes known as the 27th
British Commonwealth Brigade. On October 5, most
of the British Brigade will be flown to Kimpo Airfield,
where it becomes part of the S.K. I Corps operations in
the vicinity of the 38th Parallel.
444
In ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector, the
S.K. 3rd Division maintains its quick paced advance
and gains an average of about 15 miles a day, despite for-
midable opposition raised by the surviving elements of
the N.K. 5th Division. Some enemy groups are by-
passed during the northward march. These stragglers
begin to harass the rear supply columns of the S.K. 3rd
Division. Other contingents of the N.K. 5th Division
continue to defend the routes of advance as they re-
treat. Mortar fire and heavy 76-mm antitank guns also
pound the South Koreans.
— In the United Nations: The Indian delegate to
the U.N., Sir Benegal Rau, makes it known that India
is against sending U.N. troops across the 38th Parallel.
In conjunction, Chinese government officials have in-
formed India’s ambassador to China that the Chinese
will enter the war if U.N. troops enter North Korea.
— In Japan: General MacArthur makes the first of-
ficial statement concerning the U.N. crossing of the
38th Parallel.
October 4–10 1950 In Naval activity, Ad-
miral Doyle gathers an array of vessels off Inchon to
accommodate the landing force for the Wonsan op-
eration. The ships include some from the Military
Sea Transport Service and LSTs, the latter manned by
Japanese sailors. Transport Squadron One arrives on
the 8th, bringing the complement to 71 vessels. The
force is composed of one AGC (amphibious force
 445
flagship); eight APAs (assault transports); two APs
(transports); ten AKAs (assault cargo ships); five LSDs
(landing ship, dock); 36 LSTs (landing ship, tank);
three LSUs (landing ship, utility) and one LSM (land-
ing ship, medium). The Naval force also includes six
commercial cargo ships (“Victory” and C-2 types).
In other Naval activity, Task Force 77 reports that
its carrier planes, for the 13-day period covering the
Inchon attack, had flown 3,330 sorties. Also, the
commander, Naval Forces Far East (COMNAVFE)
reports that during the past month, patrols had de-
tected and more than 65 mines, including floating
Some of the first Chinese Communists captured by U.N. forces in Korea.
October 4, 1950
and moored, in the waters off Korea. COMNAVFE
orders the bombardment (air and naval surface) of the
areas around Chinnampo and Haeju.
October 4 At Wonsan, during the darkened
hours, the Communists have been working tirelessly to
lay an impenetrable minefield in the channel and on
the beaches. Subsequent to the arrival of U.S. X Corps
troops, it becomes known that thirty Russians had su-
pervised the entire operation until today. The Russians
evacuate the town due to the imminent approach of
U.S. and S.K. troops.
October 5, 1950
In the X Corps area, the corps is less than jubilant
when Far East Air Forces and the Fifth Air Force, pur-
suant to an order of July 8, take control of all Marine
squadrons at Kimpo Airfield. Nonetheless, the Marines
sustain no substantive losses, as the FEAF orders the
1st Marine Air Wing to continue to support the X
Corps.
In other activity, General Almond issues corps order
OpnO-4, which details the plan of operation for the
Wonsan mission and specifies the missions of subordi-
nate units. The plan directs the 1st Marine Division to
seize a base of operations by initiating an amphibious
assault to secure the airport. In conjunction, the 7th
Division and the 92nd and 96th FABns receive orders
to embark from Pusan and land at Wonsan (upon or-
ders). In the meantime, the 7th Division is directed to
attack west toward Pyongyang and link up with the
advancing Eighth Army there.
In other activity, the fuel situation at Kimpo eases
during October, subsequent to the completion of a
pipeline that carries aviation fuel from Inchon to the air-
field.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision passes through the lines of the 5th Marines
northwest of Seoul as it moves toward Kaesong. Also,
the S.K. II Corps begins to assemble in the sector of
the 7th Marines, in the vicinity of Uijongbu.
In the Eighth Army area, Army specifies which route
the 7th Division (X Corps) is to use to advance from In-
chon and Suwon to Pusan. It is to advance through
Ch’ungju, Hamch’ang, Kumch’on, Taegu and Kyongju.
The troops are directed to board trains at Taegu to carry
them on the last phase of the 350-mile journey. From
Taegu, the trucks are to return to the departure areas
and duplicate the trip with other troops.
In the IX Corps area, IX Corps is scheduled to relieve
I Corps, but it is also designated the responsibility to
continue reducing the remaining enemy resistance in
South Korea. It is also under orders to keep clear the line
of communications among Seoul, Suwon, Taejon,
Taegu and Pusan. The South Korean police are to as-
sist IX Corps with the operation to finish off the North
Koreans in South Korea.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, the S.K. 3rd
Division, trailed by the Capital Division, continues to
advance, disregarding its own dire circumstances. Many
of the troops have no shoes. Undaunted, the advance
drives straight over the rocky, mountainous terrain. En
route, some of the Capital Division units are diverted
into the Diamond Mountains.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces assumes con-
trol of all land-based aircraft in Korea, including
USMC units. With the recent gains in Korea and the
expectation of gaining enemy airfields, Fifth Air Force
halts the majority of its raids on fields below the 40th
Parallel.
In yet other activity, a South African Air Force con-
tingent, the 2d South African Fighter Squadron, ar-
rives and is attached to Far East Air Forces.
— In Japan: During the early morning hours an ur-
446
gent telegram for Ambassador Sebald arrives at the em-
bassy from Washington. The message documents a con-
versation between the Indian ambassador to China and
Chou En-lai, whereby Chou En-lai convincingly sug-
gests that if U.N. troops cross the 38th Parallel, Chi-
nese combat troops will join the fight. At this point, it
has already been determined that Chinese forces are in-
volved and have been since August. This has been con-
firmed by antiaircraft fire originating on the Chinese
side of the Yalu River in Manchuria. Active Chinese
participation has also been irrefutably verified by the
capture of Chinese soldiers.
October 5 Admiral Struble reinitiates JTF-7,
again utilizing vessels from his Seventh Fleet. The units
are: TF-95 (Advance Force), commanded by Rear Ad-
miral Allen E. Smith; TG-95.2 (Covering and Sup-
port), commanded by Rear Admiral Charles Hartman;
TG-95.6 (Minesweeping), commanded by Captain
Richard Spofford; TF-90 (Attack Force), commanded
by Rear Admiral James Doyle; TF-79 (Logistical Sup-
port Force), commanded by Captain Bernard Austin;
TF-77 (Fast Carrier Force), commanded by Rear Ad-
miral Edward Ewen; TG-96.8 (Escort Carrier Group),
commanded by Rear Admiral Richard Ruble; TG-96.2
(Patrol and Reconnaissance), commanded by Rear Ad-
miral George Henderson; and TG-70.1 (Flagship
Group), commanded by Captain Irving T. Duke. Ad-
miral Struble’s flag will fly aboard the recently arrived
battleship USS Missouri.
Pursuant to Struble’s order, the Fast Carrier Force
and the Patrol Reconnaissance Force initiate search and
attack missions prior to the landing of the ground forces
at Wonsan. The cruisers, destroyers and minesweepers
of the Advance Force will also be operating off Won-
san. These combined forces will coordinate their ef-
forts to lessen enemy resistance and seize control of the
seas off the objective.
Inchon–Seoul vicinity: In the X Corps area, 1st Ma-
rine Division zone, as directed by OpnO 15–50, the
final order issued by the 1st Marine Division during
the Inchon Operation, the 5th Marines culminates its
dogged 20 days on the fields of battle. It is to begin
staging in Inchon at 1700. The exhausted regiment
moves back across the Han River and returns to In-
chon, where it prepares to move against Wonsan. In
conjunction, the 11th Marines is scheduled to begin
its staging at 1700 on the 6th, followed by the 1st
Marines, prior to darkness on 6th. The 7th Marines’
orders stipulate that it is to join the other regiments in
Inchon during the afternoon of the 7th. The Korean
Marine Regiment is to arrive in Inchon prior to dark-
ness on the 7th.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, General Almond,
apparently unsatisfied with Colonel Ovenshine’s meth-
ods of command during the fighting below Suwon, re-
lieves him of command of the 31st Regiment.
Division begins its move toward Pusan at 0350. The
3rd Battalion, 31st Regiment, takes the lead. At about
0750, the 32nd Regiment begins to advance through
 447
Inchon. The 32nd Regiment had protected the
Marines’ left flank during the advance against Seoul.
The 17th Regiment holds in place until October 8 to
maintain a blocking position until relieved. The divi-
sion’s tanks move to Pusan by sea.
In the Eighth Army area, Army issues the order au-
thorizing the crossing of the 38th Parallel, but the date
for the attack is not publicized.
In other activity, the rail bridge at Waegwan is re-
paired and traffic begins to move across the Naktong
River. Subsequent to some preparatory work, engineers
persevere for seven days to fix the 165-foot breach in
the span.
In the I Corps area, the 1st Cavalry pushes north from
Seoul to seize an assembly area for the I Corps. Com-
pany I, 5th Cavalry, reaches Munsan-ni on the north
bank of the Imjin River during the evening.
In the IX Corps area, Corps opens its command post
at Taejon. The 2nd Division bears responsibility for
the terrain west and southwest of Taejon, and the 25th
Division will defend the area south and east of the city,
as well as Taejon proper. The area of operation for the
division encompasses 6,500 square miles of terrain,
nearly all of it in the mountains. The enemy, much of
which has been bypassed, remains in the high ground,
and the 25th Division concentrates much of its activ-
ity against guerrillas. In conjunction, the S.K. 11th Di-
vision is attached to IX Corps to assist corps in the rear
areas of its zone.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, II Corps sector,
Corps prepares to attack across the 38th Parallel on the
following day.
October 6 The 3rd Logistical Command (USN)
assumes responsibility for all unloading operations at In-
chon. X Corps uses its muscle to pull strings — it re-
quests that all unloading unrelated to the X Corps mis-
sion be suspended to prevent the ongoing operation
(Wonsan) from running behind schedule. It is esti-
mated that unless X Corps retains total use of the port
facilities, the operation would run six to twenty days be-
hind schedule.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, the
1st Marines departs its positions near Uijongbu and
moves to Inchon to join the 5th Marines. Along the
outskirts of Inchon where the Marines had established
a cemetery, responsibility for it is transferred to the
United Nations. A stirring ceremony includes an in-
vocation by Chaplain R.M. Schwyhart (1st Marine Di-
vision). Following the prayers, General Almond, USA,
gives his remarks and then lays a wreath on the grave
of an unknown soldier. Following this, the graves of a
Marine, an Army soldier and an ROK trooper receive
similar wreaths by General O.P. Smith, General Barr,
USA, and S.K. Colonel Lee, respectively. Taps blows
and erect riflemen fire volleys over the graves of their
fallen brothers. The ceremony ends with the playing
of the “Star Spangled Banner” and the Korean national
anthem.
In other activity, the Attack Force–Landing Force
October 7, 1950
obtains the required intelligence and maps to enable
staff officers to plan for the invasion of Wonsan, but
the arrival is not timely. It soon becomes obvious that
the tentative invasion date (October 15) must be post-
poned. Nevertheless, General O.P. Smith orders the 1st
Marine Division to embark on the 8th. The initial
Landing Force contingents and accompanying
weaponry will prematurely be placed aboard ships to
await the conclusions of the planners with regard to the
expected enemy resistance at Wonsan.
In the 7th Division sector, the 7th Division continues
moving toward Pusan, but remnant enemy forces raise
havoc with elements of the 2nd Battalion, 31st Regi-
ment. At 0200, the North Koreans spring an ambush
from positions in the mountains near Mun’gyong and
inflict nine casualties.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Di-
vision zone, the advance to secure the assembly area is
maintained.
In the 24th Division zone, Division focuses on the
terrain around Seoul.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, II Corps sector,
the S.K. 6th Division pushes out from its positions in
the vicinity of Chonchon and drives across the 38th
Parallel toward Hwach’on, which is fiercely defended by
the remnants of the N.K. 9th Division. Several days of
bitter combat ensue. In conjunction, ROK warships
receive permission to proceed as far north as necessary
along the east coast of Korea to support the ROK
ground troops.
In Air Force activity, Kimpo Airfield, under the ju-
risdiction of the Marine Corps since its recapture, is
transferred to the U.S. Air Force. In other activity, a
contingent of eighteen B-29s strike the arsenal located
in Kan-ni in North Korea. Also, the Air Force initiates
a new interdiction blueprint that halts its attacks on
the bridges located south of Pyongyang and Wonsan.
October 7 Admiral Doyle, commanding officer
of the JTF-7 Attack Force, suggests October 20 as the
earliest date on which the Wonsan assault forces could
meet for the purpose of invading Wonsan. Admirals
Joy and Struble agree with Doyle. The recommenda-
tion is then forwarded to General MacArthur, who ac-
cepts the tentative date for D-day, but he recommends
that everything possible should be done to attempt to
jump off earlier. Necessary transport vessels for the in-
vasion have arrived late, and they lack the promised
supplies. Also contributing to the delay is the fact that
Eighth Army’s relief of X Corps has run four days be-
hind schedule.
The carrier USS Leyte Gulf (CV 32) arrives on this
day from the Atlantic to join TF-77. Also, Marines are
being withdrawn from north of Seoul to participate in
Wonsan landings. Elements of 1st Marine Division
commence embarking in assault shipping at Inchon for
Wonsan operations.
In the X Corps area, Corps relinquishes responsibil-
ity for the Inchon-Seoul area to Eighth Army at 1200,
when elements of Eighth Army relieve the remaining
October 7, 1950
The USS Cimarron, a fuel tanker, refuels the carrier USS Leyte Gulf off Korea, while the USS Hender-
son in the background stands watch.
troops of the 7th Marines at Uijongbu. X Corps then
reverts to GHQ reserve, as stipulated in prior orders.
The 7th Marines move to Inchon to rejoin the divi-
sion there. In other activity, the 31st and 32nd Regi-
ments begin reaching Pusan.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the 7th Marines de-
parts Uijongbu to join its division at Inchon. During
the early morning hours, the 1st Marine Division com-
mand post departs Seoul and moves to an area slightly
north of Ascom City. The Marine Corps, having con-
cluded one of the most daring and important amphibi-
ous invasions of its history, successfully ends the
Seoul–Inchon operation, and without incident. At
0935, General O.P. Smith, acting upon orders (Corps
OpnO 5), reports to Admiral Doyle to assume respon-
sibility as landing force commander for the expected
invasion of Wonsan.
The 1st Marine Division casualties for the entire
Inchon-Seoul operation stands at 366 Marines killed
and 49 who die of their wounds. In addition, 2,029
448
men are wounded and 6 others are listed as missing in
action. Marine Corps records indicate that the 1st Ma-
rine Division accounts for the destruction of 44 enemy
tanks (the figure is later adjusted to 38 due to duplicated
claims).
At Kimpo Airfield, squadrons of the 1st Marine Air-
craft Wing remain in action for two additional days,
despite the relief of the ground Marines. The five Ma-
rine squadrons, in action since 7 September, terminate
operations on October 7, having flown 2,774 sorties.
The bulk of the missions during the thirty-three day
span consisted of close support for the ground units.
Marine aviation losses are 11 planes shot down at a cost
of six pilots killed, 1 crewman killed and two pilots
wounded.
Also, the Flying Angels of VMO-6 buzzed in and
out of the furious battlefields to rescue downed pilots
and evacuate wounded ground troops. These helicop-
ters and observation planes flew 643 flights within a
period of 515 hours. The crews extricated 12 downed
 449
pilots from behind enemy lines, and in addition, they
evacuated 179 seriously wounded troops to receive
medical aid at hospitals at sea and on shore.
Subsequent to the seizure of Seoul, General
MacArthur, in a report to the United Nations, empha-
sizes the dedicated effort to prostrate the enemy
strength. He states:
Events of the past two weeks have been decisive....
Caught between our northern and southern forces,
both of which are completely self sustaining because of
our absolute air and naval supremacy, the enemy is
thoroughly shattered through disruption of his logisti-
cal support and our combined combat activities.... The
prompt action of our two forces is dramatically symbolic
of this collapse.... A successful frontal attack and envel-
opment has completely changed the tide of battle in
South Korea. The backbone of the North Korean Army
has been broken and their scattered forces are being
liquidated or driven north with material losses in equip-
ment and men captured.
In the Eighth Army area, Army prepares to move its
headquarters from Taegu to Seoul. The new headquar-
ters opens on October 12. In other activity, Army in-
forms General Milburn of I Corps and the ROK Army
chief of staff that the attack to seize Pyongyang is im-
minent.
The 3rd Logistical Command based at Inchon is as-
signed to Army and its key mission is to maintain the
logistical support to sustain the drive into North Korea.
However, Eighth Army attaches the 3rd Logistical
Command to the 2nd Logistical Command, which is
at Pusan. From Pusan, the 2nd Logistical Command
maintains its operation to shuttle supplies forward by
use of trucks and trains. It is the rails that play the dom-
inant role in moving Army supplies, relegating the
trucks and air deliveries to emergency shipments out of
Pusan. Also, engineers complete laying a second pon-
toon bridge across the Han. On the following day, two-
way traffic resumes in Seoul.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
ongoing operation to secure an assembly area contin-
ues. The 16th Reconnaissance Company advances into
Kaesong. Later, during the night, contingents of the
1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, enter Kaesong. In conjunc-
tion, probing patrols cross the 38th Parallel during the
latter part of the afternoon.
In the IX Corps area, 25th Division sector, a large
enemy force composed of about 400 soldiers is de-
tected. The 1st Battalion, 35th Regiment, plasters the
column with devastating artillery fire. Nearly eighty
percent of the North Koreans are killed. Also, during the
anti-guerrilla activity of the 25th Division, the 3rd Bat-
talion, 35th Regiment, captures 549 prisoners (Octo-
ber 7–8). The 25th Division, during October, is heav-
ily involved with anti-guerrilla operations within its
vast perimeter, which extends for about 6,500 square-
miles of mountainous terrain.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector, the
S.K. 8th Division crosses the 38th Parallel and begins
its northward attack toward the “Iron Triangle.”
October 8, 1950
In the ROK II Corps sector, vicious combat continues
near Hwach’on, between two defending regiments of the
N.K. 5th Division and the advancing S.K. 6th Division.
In Air Force activity, planes drop food rations to a
large group of about 150 POWs who escaped from the
Communists as they headed north.
— In Japan: General Hickey receives a call from
General Frank Allen (asst. commander, 1st Cavalry
Div.); Allen, inquiring for General Walker, requests a
date for A-day (crossing the 38th Parallel) and he re-
ceives the response: “You’re a-Day will be at such time
as you see it ready.” General Allen then informs Gen-
eral Hickey that Eighth Army is nearly ready to attack.
In conjunction, Eighth Army, subsequent to relieving
X Corps, deploys along the 38th Parallel. Elements of
the 1st Cavalry will cross on the 9th.
October 8 In anticipation of a premature seizure
of Wonsan, General MacArthur has devised a supple-
mentary plan to incorporate a landing at Hungnam,
about 50 miles north of Wonsan. But, the modified
plan of CinCFE Plan 9–50, issued this day, is not flaw-
less. If implemented, Eighth Army’s mission remains
identical, but X Corps would be required to sever the
enemy communications north of Wonsan and elimi-
nate the resistance there. In conjunction, the landing at
Hungnam by the 7th Infantry Division would greatly
hinder its ability to quickly seize Pyongyang by over-
land march, due to the distance involved. In addition,
the usual shortages of landing craft make it implausi-
ble for the 7th Division to debark at Wonsan while the
Marines are striking Hungnam.
If two separate landings occur, the U.S. Navy’s over-
burdened minesweepers will be overwhelmed by the
task of clearing mines from both sites, but the option
planners are not yet fully aware of the impending com-
plications. Admirals Joy and Doyle, at their positions
in Japan and Korea, respectively, concur that there is
not enough time to change the mission of X Corps, but
Admiral Joy’s attempts to change MacArthur’s mind
are unsuccessful.
In related activity, Admiral Turner Joy directs Ad-
miral Doyle and General O.P. Smith to implement his
OpnPlan 113–50.
In Naval activity, Task Group 95.6, commanded by
Captain Richard Spofford, converges off Sasebo. It will
initiate action to clear the mines from the waters off
Wonsan prior to the appearance of the giant 250-ship
flotilla that will transport the 1st Marine Division and
other elements of X Corps to the objective. Captain
Spofford’s task group departs Japan on the 10th.
In the X Corps area, the 2nd Logistical Command is
ordered to provide enough supplies of all classes for fif-
teen days for each of the 25,000 troops boarding ships
at Pusan. All troops boarding at Inchon are to be pro-
vided ten days of Class II and IV supplies. Fifteen days
of re-supplies are to be delivered to Wonsan on Octo-
ber 28, to ensure the operation continues unhindered.
To meet the stiff requirements, the logistics personnel
are compelled to draw much of the supplies from
October 8, 1950
Eighth Army’s source, Japan Logistical Command. The
logistics personnel are unfamiliar with the requirements
of the individual units with regard to Class II items,
including winter clothing and post exchange comfort
items. At Inchon, the loading of bulk cargo for the
Wonsan mission begins. The operation, completed by
October 16, is overseen by George C. Stewart, com-
manding officer of 3rd Logistical Command.
A view of the terrain at Kaesong. A U.S. soldier in the foreground leans over at communications equip-
ment.
450
The 5th Marines, commanded by Colonel Murray,
begins boarding ships. The 1st Battalion boards the
USS Bayfield, while the 2nd and 3rd Battalions board
the vessels George Clymer and Bexar, respectively. By
this time, Eighth Army is beyond the 38th Parallel and
maintaining its northern drive.
In other activity, the 7th Division command post at
Anyang-ni is closed. A new CP is established at Pusan.
 451
Also, X Corps orders the 7th Division to complete its
loading operation at Pusan by October 17.
In the Eighth Army area, additional United Nations
troops are now arriving in Korea. Although it is begin-
ning to seem as if their presence might not be necessary,
in light of the ongoing destruction of the North Korean
Armed Forces, these troops still must become familiar
with U.S. equipment and weaponry. General Walker
orders the 2nd Logistical Command to establish a U.N.
Reception Center at Taegu University, once the EUSAK
departs from it. The center is also to provide clothing
and equipment to the new arrivals. The maximum
number of troops expected to be receiving training at
any one time is 6,200 men.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, the
advance to secure the assembly area from which to
launch the northward attack continues. By the end of
the day, contingents of the 7th and 8th Cavalries com-
plete the mission. Ground is secured near Kaesong, in
close proximity to the 38th Parallel. Some contingents
are within range of enemy small arms fire. During the
evening, more probing patrols venture across the 38th
Parallel.
General Gay issues the order to attack on the fol-
lowing morning. Eighth Army anticipates heavy resist-
ance, once it crashes across the 38th Parallel. Intelli-
gence estimates have concluded that as many as six
newly trained divisions are ready to join the North Ko-
rean forces that had raised opposition at Seoul.
In other activity, the 7th Cavalry receives orders to
advance to the Yesong River to locate crossing sites and
to eliminate any remaining North Korean troops dis-
covered southwest of Kaesong. The 7th Cavalry lacks
bridging equipment, making the crossing especially dif-
ficult. All available bridging is being used at Munsan-
ni to carry the primary attack force across the Imjin
River there. In conjunction, the I&R Platoon locates the
bridge. The span is damaged, but still capable of car-
rying ground troops. The platoon also discovers enemy
presence. The North Koreans hold positions extend-
ing from the southern end of the peninsula on the op-
posite bank (west) to a point about one-half mile north-
east of the bridge.
Colonel Clainos, commander 1st Battalion, accom-
panies one Company A platoon to the river and makes
contact with the I&R Platoon. Clainos’ contingent,
similarly to the I&R Platoon, comes under enemy fire.
The unexpected news concerning the bridge ignites
quick reaction. Colonel William Harris, commander
7th Cavalry, orders the bridge seized, but General Gay
is skeptical and fears the enemy has set a trap on the
crossing site. Colonel Harris and his S-3, Captain
Webel, eventually convince Gay to permit an attack on
the following day.
The regiment had been informed by the divisional G-
4 that gasoline and some ammunition could not be
provided to sustain the drive. Colonel Harris and Cap-
tain Webel had improvised and sent an officer, Captain
Arthur Westburg, to Inchon to seek help. The port
commander, Brigadier General George Stewart, and
October 9, 1950
the 3rd Logistical Command take the challenge and
provide thirteen LCVs, which arrive at the 7th Cav-
alry crossing site at the Yesong River the afternoon of
the 10th.
In the IX Corps sector, the 25th Division continues
searching for guerrillas, but these contingents continue
to wreak havoc on unprotected South Korean villages
and some S.K. police stations. The guerrillas, allegedly
instructed by Kim Chaek, commander, North Korean
Front Headquarters, have stretched their hit-and-run
tactics way down the peninsula. In particular, they seek
out U.N. trains and communication wires for destruc-
tion.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, Army reorgan-
izes and expands. It activates the 1st Guerrilla Group,
which is composed of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th
Battalions, and it reactivates the S.K. 5th Division at
Taegu.
In the ROK I Corps sector, the S.K. 7th Division be-
gins to cross the 38th Parallel to the right of the S.K.
8th Division on or about this day. It, too, drives to-
ward the “Iron Triangle.”
In the ROK II Corps sector, the S.K. 6th Division
overcomes three days of stiff resistance and drives into
Hwach’on during the latter part of the afternoon. Two
enemy battalions retreat northwest after being driven
from the town. Following the seizure, the 6th S.K. Di-
vision lunges toward Ch’orwon and Kumwha.
In Air Force activity, two pilots in F-80s on a mission
near the Yalu River stray northeast across the border
into Russia and inadvertently strafe a Soviet airfield in
the vicinity of Vladivostok. In reaction, the group com-
mander is reassigned to FEAF headquarters and the pi-
lots receive a court martial. Also, the Air Force reiniti-
ates Razon bomb missions in conjunction with the
arrival of better radio-guided bombs from the States.
In other activity, the 162d TRS arrives at Taegu from
Itazuke, Japan. It is the first night reconnaissance
squadron to be based in Korea.
October 9 Admiral Struble issues his operation
plan, which blueprints the JTF-7 organization. It is
listed as follows: (1) 90— Attack Force, Rear Admiral
James Doyle; (2) 95 — Advance Force, Rear Admiral
Allan E. Smith; (3) 95.2 — Covering and Support
Group, Rear Admiral Charles Hartman; (4) 95.6 —
Minesweeping Group, Captain Richard Spofford; (5)
92 — X Corps, Major General Edward Almond; (6)
96.2 — Patrol and Reconnaissance Group, Rear Admi-
ral George Henderson; (7) 96.8 — Escort Carrier
Group, Rear Admiral Richard Ruble; (8) 77 — Fast
Carrier Force, Rear Admiral Edward Ewen; (9) 70.1 —
Flagship Group (USS Missouri), Captain Irving T.
Duke; (10) 79—Logistics Support, Captain Bernard L.
Austin.
In the X Corps area, the loading activity at Inchon is
not a longshoreman’s delight and there are many rea-
sons, including a tremendous shortage of loading
berths. The port contains only seven berths capable of
loading beached LSTs or landing craft, and these can be
October 9, 1950 452

used only during high tide. Furthermore, the staging several miles northwest of the town. Six troops are
area is scant and Inchon has only one pier from where killed by machine gun fire and several vehicles are de-
vehicles can be loaded into LCMs. The process be- stroyed.
comes one of great improvisation. The Logistical Cargo During the afternoon, contingents of the 1st Battal-
Command personnel load many of the vehicles onto ion, 17th Regiment, secure the pass above Mun’gyong
the top decks of LSTs, which then transport the equip-and it remains in the high ground for several days to as-
ment out to the ships in the harbor. At that point, sure that no further incidents occur.
cranes transfer the cargo to the APAs and AKAs. Other In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, armored con-
equipment is similarly loaded, unloaded and reloaded tingents of the 1st Cavalry Division spearhead the I
again, as the dilemma seems never-ending. In related Corps attack across the 38th Parallel to capture Sariwon
activity, some X Corps troops begin boarding ship thisand Pyongyang. At 0900, General Gay gives the word
day. to launch the attack. The strategy calls for the 8th Cav-
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, Gen-
alry to act as vanguard and drive straight along the pri-
eral O.P. Smith is informed that the landing site for the
mary highway toward Kumch’on. Meanwhile the 5th
Marines is about to be changed. Meanwhile, Admiral Cavalry attempts a rope trick, swinging east and then
Joy maintains his argument (with MacArthur) that the swinging west in a looping motion designed to lasso
proposed modified plans are not feasible. On the 10th,the enemy troops south of Kumch’on.
MacArthur relents and the original plan to land the en- In the meantime, the 7th Cavalry is to ford the
tire X Corps at Wonsan is agreed upon. Yesong River and drive north along the road toward
In the 7th Division sector, the enemy springs another
Hanp’o-ri, situated about 6 miles north of Kumch’on,
deadly ambush on the Division in the same general areabeside the Yesong River at a point where the primary Py-
(in the mountains outside Mun’gyong) as the ambush ongyang Highway crosses over it. General Gay has cal-
of the previous day. At 0230, the divisional headquar-culated that the sweeps of the 5th and 8th Cavalries
ters column is attacked as it advances through a pass will stampede many enemy troops into the clutches of
the 7th Cavalry. Nonethe-
less, General Gay is aware
that the mission to cross
the Yesong River will be
extremely difficult, due to
the lack of sufficient sup-
port. He is depending on
the 5th and 8th Cavalries’
attacks to ensure success of
the drive.
The attack is launched
and the 8th Cavalry soon
encounters opposition.
Enemy mines block the
road in frequent intervals,
causing the advance to
continually stall waiting
for engineers to clear the
road.
Company E is struck by
heavy mortar and auto-
matic weapons fire, which
pins it in a deadly cross-
fire and inflicts many ca-
sualties. One trooper, PFC
Robert H. Young, is re-
peatedly wounded while
he holds his ground and
returns fire. He kills five
enemy troops before sus-
taining yet another
wound. Tanks rush for-
ward to assist the belea-
guered platoon, and
Young, still refusing med-
A pause in the action. U.S. troops take a break to consume C-rations. ical treatment, directs the
 453
tanks’ fire. The tanks knock out three enemy guns.
Young then begins to aid several other wounded men,
but a mortar shell bursts and he is again struck. The
fatally wounded Young insists that the other wounded
soldiers be evacuated before himself. PFC Young re-
ceives the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary actions. The 8th Cavalry overcomes the
obstacles and maintains its drive toward Kumch’on.
Meanwhile, the 5th Cavalry becomes slowed but
reaches the 38th Parallel at 1930. The regiment com-
mences its attack on the following morning. At 1500,
in the midst of a three-hour artillery and mortar bom-
bardment against the enemy-held west bank, one
platoon of Company C moves across the bridge
and encounters small arms fire. The unit sustains sev-
eral casualties, but seizes a hold on the west bank.
Shortly thereafter, engineers attached to Company B
initiate repairs on the bridge while the remainder of
Company C, charges across the span and secures a hill
to the right.
All the while, enemy guns remain active and pound
the troops as they cross. Once the entire battalion com-
pletes the crossing, the U.S. barrage is adjusted whereby
the fire in the vicinity of the bridge is terminated. The
1st Battalion sustains 78 casualties during the crossing.
The heaviest toll is suffered by Company C, which sus-
tains six men killed and thirty-six wounded.
By dark, the enemy is thinking counterattack. The
North Koreans commence their assault to dislodge the
1st Battalion. In turn, Colonel Harris orders the 2nd
Battalion to speed up its crossing to bolster the 1st Bat-
talion. However, the enemy guns are still ringing the
bridge. Slightly before midnight, Lt. Colonel Gilmon
Huff leads his 2nd Battalion to the west bank and
reaches a point about 100 yards west of the bridge and
on the south flank of Clainos’ 1st Battalion. Company
G, 2nd Battalion, spearheads the attack. It drives west
along the Paekch’on Road and is soon struck by a dev-
astating enemy counterattack.
The 2nd Battalion becomes temporarily stunned, but
Colonel Huff maintains his composure and the battal-
ion rebounds splendidly despite the lack of heavy
weapons. The night-long fight continues into the fol-
lowing morning. Although Huff is wounded early in the
battle, he continues to command until he relinquishes
it to his executive officer. The fierce contest remains
relentless, but when dawn (10th) rises over the hori-
zon there is no doubt as to the victor. The enemy is
vanquished and the 2nd Battalion holds the high
ground southeast of the bridge, which assures that the
regiment will make further progress.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 3rd Division and the
Capital Division converge on the southern fringes of
Wonsan after having advanced about 110 air-miles
north of the 38th Parallel. The S.K. 3rd Division has
driven up the coastal road, and the Capital Division
has advanced along the Wonsan–Iron Triangle Road.
The latter captures six enemy tanks and 5,000 Russian
rifles as it gains the ground. In addition, about 500
submachine guns, 4 artillery pieces, 11 mortars and 1
October 10, 1950
boxcar full of medical supplies are among the seized
enemy equipment during the day’s march.
However, the enemy still has some awesome fire-
power in its arsenal. Contingents of the N.K. 24th
Mechanized Artillery Brigade, naval amphibious troops
of the N.K. 945th Regiment and some other miscella-
neous naval units engage the advancing South Kore-
ans at Wonsan. By the following day, troops of the Cap-
ital Division and the S.K. 3rd Division penetrate the
enemy lines and enter the city.
— In Japan: General MacArthur again urges the
North Koreans to surrender. He addresses a message
to the “The Premier, Government of North Korea.”
As with his announcement on the 1st, the North Ko-
reans ignore the suggestion. Ambassador Sebald, speak-
ing with Colonel Laurence Bunker, an aide to
MacArthur, expresses his concerns about the unortho-
dox method of the general, addressing the surrender
directly to the political leaders of an unrecognized gov-
ernment. Bunker worries that it could cause ramifica-
tions in Washington. Nonetheless, the Communists
show no interest and no official response is forthcom-
ing.
October 10 In the X Corps area, at Inchon, Gen-
eral O.P. Smith establishes his command post on the
USS Mount McKinley. He issues OpnO 16–50, which
culminates the planning at Inchon regarding the 1st
Marine Division’s participation at Wonsan. The cho-
sen points of attack are beaches Blue and Yellow on the
eastern shore of Kalma peninsula. The order specifies
the particulars of the Wonsan assault, and it includes the
blueprint of the duties expected of the subordinate
units. Later in the day, an alternate plan is issued that
directs (upon orders) the Marines to initiate an admin-
istrative landing on Red Beach, situated north of Won-
san, rather than the initial landing sites on Kalma
peninsula.
The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 1st Marines, board LSTs
and await orders to land. It will be sixteen days aboard
the overcrowded ships before these Marines get to re-
familiarize themselves with the ground. Once ashore,
they are to secure ten objectives within the projected
sweeping arc of the beachhead, and each is located in
the high ground. The 5th Marines is to land and form
west of the town to await instructions. The Korean 3rd
and 5th Marine Battalions, attached to the 7th and 1st
Marines respectively, are to land behind the U.S.
Marines.
In the meantime, the S.K. 3rd and Capital Divisions
advance rapidly. Just after 0800, the South Koreans,
who have punched their way overland, drive into Won-
san. By the latter part of the following day, the port
city is secure, and its nearby airfield is fully controlled.
These seizures render the invasion of Wonsan unneces-
sary.
In other activity, the 7th Division artillery units de-
part Inchon and complete the operation by 1700. It is the
final major component to leave the town. Off Wonsan,
a helicopter swoops over the channel and discovers
October 11, 1950
that the thirty-fathom channel is saturated with mines.
The plan to sweep the channel here is aborted. The new
designated target area is the 100-fathom curve in the
Russian Hydropac Channel that passes between Yo-do
and the Hwangto-do Islands. Without delay, the
minesweepers begin to vacuum the harbor. By the 12th,
the ships clear twenty-four miles to secure the channel
to within 10 miles of the inner harbor.
In the Eighth Army area, following seventeen tedious
days of work by the engineers, Army reopens the 200-
mile stretch of rails that runs between the Naktong and
Han Rivers. Rail traffic begins to cross the Han and
roll into Seoul during the latter part of October.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, the
5th Cavalry commences its attack. The regiment crosses
the 38th Parallel and seizes the nearby heights to per-
mit progress along the highway. The 1st Battalion
drives forward, but about fifteen miles northeast of
Kaesong, the enemy controls a large ridge line with
three fortified knobs (Hills 174, 175 and 179). The
stiff resistance raised there causes the 1st Battalion to halt
its advance for the night.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the 3rd Battalion prepares to
cross the Yesong River to join the other two battalions.
The required supplies (500 tons) needed to sustain the
attack arrive by LCVs from Inchon. Meanwhile, by
noon, the 2nd Battalion completes the defeat of the
enemy counterattack that had begun on the previous
night. During the afternoon the 2nd Battalion secures
Paekch’on and the heights north of it.
In the IX Corps area, Eighth Army Ranger Company
is attached to IX Corps; it hooks up with the 25th Di-
vision Reconnaissance Company to add punch to the
anti-guerrilla missions that are operating northeast of
Taejon in the vicinity of Poun.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector,
fighting erupts in enemy-held Wonsan when elements
of the Capital Division and the S.K. 3rd Division each
push troops into the city. The corps commander,
Brigadier General Kim Baik Yil, determines that both
divisions had simultaneously entered Wonsan at 0600
and that the city was secured by both units at 1000.
However, the enemy has yet to be vanquished and
heavy fighting continues throughout the day. Colonel
Emmerich is with the 23rd Regiment when it enters
the city just before noon.
By about this time, the enemy has ceased its
morning-long artillery bombardment and has pulled
most of its guns from the city to relocate them in the
heights northwest of Wonsan. Despite the continuing
shelling by the Communists, the South Koreans seize the
airfield on the peninsula east of the city. In the mean-
time, the battle for control of Wonsan continues with-
out pause. Blazing firefights permeate the city’s streets
until dusk. The contest then moves to another phase.
The heavy street fighting subsides until the following
day, but a feverish skirmish erupts for control of the
airfield. An enemy armored force closes against it and
blasts everything in sight. Nearly all buildings and
hangars are destroyed.
454
In the ROK II Corps area, elements of the S.K. 6th Di-
vision reach the “Iron Triangle,” the defensive
triangular-shaped enemy line located between twenty
to thirty miles north of the 38th Parallel in the moun-
tainous east central portion of Korea. It contains a key
rail and road communications center that links the east
and west coasts of Korea. The Triangle area, with Py-
ongyang at its northernmost point and supported at
the eastern base by Kumhwa and Ch’orwon at the west-
ern base, is also the junction that maintains the com-
munication network that runs south through Central
South Korea. The ROKs intend to compress the enemy
within it and force its collapse. Contingents of the 16th
Regiment encounter and defeat an enemy force near
Ch’orwon. The 16th Regiment convincingly turns back
successive heavy attacks, which forces the enemy to re-
treat. Later, contingents of the S.K. 16th Regiment
penetrate Ch’orwon.
In Air Force activity, a crew aboard a 3d ARS H-5
craft while in flight successfully administers blood
plasma to a wounded pilot that they had rescued.
In Naval activity, TG-95.6 arrives off Wonsan to ini-
tiate mine-clearing operations. The big guns of the
cruiser Rochester and the destroyers Collett, Maddox,
Swenson and Thomas are operating in the vicinity of
the minesweepers. A helicopter from the USS Rochester
again spots enormous amounts of enemy mines. By the
latter part of the afternoon, the minesweepers clear a
3,000-yard channel that extends from the 100-fathom
curve to the thirty-fathom line, giving the Navy high
expectations that the job might be concluded sooner
than expected. However, five more strings of mines are
detected, dousing the enthusiasm. The discoveries seem
to verify the intelligence reports that stated Russian as-
sistance had been given to the North Korean Commu-
nists.
Apparently, the Russians began helping the Reds at
Wonsan, either during the latter part of July or the first
days of August. The North Koreans, utilizing sampans,
junks and barges, combined with Russian know-how,
spread about 2,000 mines in the sea approaches to
Wonsan.
— In Japan: General MacArthur orders that UN
Operations Plan 2 be placed into effect, superseding
all other tentative plans. In other activity, personnel
monitoring the various radio broadcasts pick up a
broadcast originating in Pyongyang. The speaker is
Kim Il Sung, and he is rejecting MacArthur’s call to
surrender.
October 11 X Corps closes its on-shore com-
mand post and transfers it to the USS Mount McKin-
ley. In other activity, other X Corps troops begin to
move by land to Pusan. Engineers, medical personnel,
ordnance troops, and quartermaster, chemical and sig-
nal units are included. In conjunction, during the seven
days of moving X Corps to Pusan, the vehicles trans-
port 13,422 troops and 1,460 tons of supplies and
equipment. The 52nd Truck Battalion and 7th Divi-
sion vehicles handle the task.
 455
Inchon vicinity: In the 1st Marine Division sector,
Colonel Murray, CO, 5th Marines (reserve regiment
for Wonsan), establishes his command post aboard the
USS Bayfield. Embarkation of 5th Marines is con-
cluded. In conjunction, elements of the 1st and 7th
Marines (reserve and administrative components) board
their vessels early; however, the four assault battalions
remain onshore until the 13th, awaiting available LSTs.
In the meantime, South Korean forces take Wonsan.
This prompts the scheduled air support for the invasion
to be canceled. Elements of the 1st Marine Air Wing ar-
rive at the Wonsan airfield on the 13th.
In the 7th Division sector, the 27th Regiment, 25th
Division (Eighth Army IX Corps) relieves the 1st Bat-
talion, 17th Regiment, 7th Division in the mountains
near Mun’gyong. Also, about 450 soldiers (7th Divi-
sion) are airlifted from Kimpo Airfield to Pusan.
In the Eighth Army area, 1st Cavalry Division sector,
the 5th Cavalry reinitiates its attack to clear the hills
northeast of Kaesong. The 1st Battalion, stopped on
the previous day, is bolstered by the 2nd Battalion to ex-
pedite the elimination of the obstacles. At Hill 174,
Company C advances against a strong barrage of small
arms fire. One soldier jumps into an enemy position,
thinking it to be unoccupied, but concealed enemy
troops are there to greet him. Lieutenant Samuel S.
Coursen jumps to aid the beleaguered soldier who be-
comes wounded but escapes. Coursen engages the
enemy in vicious and bloody hand-to-hand combat.
He saves the wounded soldier but loses his life.
Later, when the company recovers Coursen’s body,
seven deceased North Koreans lie beside him and a few
of them had obviously succumbed to Coursen’s rifle
butt; their skulls had been smashed. Lieutenant
Coursen, for his heroism in the face of the enemy, re-
ceives the Medal of Honor posthumously. The three
knobs and the ridge fall to the 5th Cavalry during the
afternoon.
In the 7th Cavalry sector, the 3rd Battalion crosses
the Yesong River and joins the other two battalions
there, which now places all three regiments on the west
bank of the river and above the 38th Parallel. The 8th
Cavalry maintains its slow-paced advance toward Kum-
ch’on and dislodges enemy mines along the road as it
moves.
In other activity, the 27th British Commonwealth
Brigade, accompanied by a contingent of tanks (Com-
pany B, 6th Med. Tank Bn.), crosses the Imjin River
and traces the steps of the 5th Cavalry. The British
move through the mountains and head northwest to
execute an envelopment operation at Kumch’on, but
the roads on the maps are inaccurate. An aerial observer
had provided Gay with the inaccurate information con-
cerning the roads. The road used by the British dead-
ends in the mountains.
The British, with their usual stiff upper lip, back-
track and wind down the road, which is ill-suited for
anything larger than a cart. They select another route
and reinitiate the drive to Kumch’on, but it, too, leads
nowhere, and the British get lost. Undaunted, they dis-
October 12, 1950
cover yet another road and take it, hoping to arrive at
Kumch’on, but the effort is futile. The contingent re-
mains lost in the mountainous forest and misses the
entire operation at Kumch’on.
In the S.K. 1st Division sector, at dawn, the Division
departs Korangp’o and crosses the Imjin River. The
South Koreans, operating east of the 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion, drive northwest along a highway that funnels into
the road used by the 5th Cavalry.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector, at
Wonsan, vicious combat is reinitiated on the streets of
the city as the South Koreans continue to purge the
enemy. Once the city is secured, the attack moves be-
yond. By dusk the 3rd S.K. Division, which had car-
ried the bulk of the attack, advances north about one
mile. The Capital Division has supported the mission
to seize the city. Generals Walker and Partridge arrive
at the airfield to inspect it. Later, General Partridge di-
rects the Combat Cargo Command to bring in the sup-
plies on the following day.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the S.K. 8th Division and
the 7th Regiment, S.K. 6th Division, close on Py-
ongyang.
In Naval activity, planes attached to TF 77 attack
North Korean vessels in the waters off Songjin, Won-
san and north of Hungham. Other targets of the car-
rier planes include railroads, vehicles, and supply depots
in the vicinity of Songjin.
— In Japan: General MacArthur sends a radio mes-
sage to General Walker informing him that Wonsan Air-
field is to be utilized for land-based planes, which will be
under the command of X Corps. It adds that the S.K. I
Corps will be detached from Eighth Army and attached
to X Corps upon the latter’s landing at Wonsan.
October 12 In Naval activity, minesweeping op-
erations continue off Wonsan, while other elements of
JTF 7 bombard enemy positions along the east coast.
The warships of TG 95.2 concentrate their fire on
Songjin and Tanchon. The USS Missouri pounds the
marshaling yards of Tanchon. The cruisers Ceylon, He-
lena and Worcester focus their fire on Chongjin. Captain
Spofford attempts to streamline the minesweeping op-
eration. He requests assistance from the carriers. Thirty-
nine aircraft attached to the carriers Leyte Gulf and
Philippine Sea arrive and drop about fifty tons of 1,000-
pound bombs in the Russian Channel, but to no avail.
The high-percussion explosions fail to detonate the
mines. Similar efforts had been undertaken during
World War II, and those experiments concluded with
identical results.
Later, three minesweepers proceed through the tar-
geted area, which had just been bombed. At 1209, the
USS Pirate (AM 275), while sweeping approaches to
Wonsan, strikes an unexploded mine off Yo-do Island
and sinks. Within a short while, at 1215, the USS
Pledge (AM–277) hits a mine and it, too, sinks. Rescue
operations get underway immediately, but enemy shore
batteries remain cogent and hinder the missions. Both
minesweepers sustain heavy casualties; 12 men are killed
October 12, 1950
and one wounded man succumbs to his wounds. Exact
numbers of wounded are not known, but the figure is
estimated to be about 87. During the rescue operation,
a third minesweeper, the USS Incredible, comes under
severe fire. Still, it rescues 27 sailors before it bolts to-
ward safer waters.
In the meantime, the mines remain a serious prob-
lem. Captain Spofford deduces that depth charges
might be the solution, prompting him to call for more
naval craft. This improvised method also fails and
proves only that the mines must be destroyed the old
fashioned way, one at a time. The flying boats (Mariners
and Sunderlands) resume the task of detecting and de-
molishing the mines with .50-caliber machine gun fire.
Navy innovation soon eases the burdensome task. It
implements the use of hydrographic office charts. The
planes spot the targets on charts and drop them onto the
minesweepers to give the crews the exact locations of
hundreds of floating death traps.
In the Eighth Army area, advance elements of the 1st
Turkish Armed Forces Command arrive at Pusan. The
remainder of the brigade arrives on the 17th.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the 5th Cavalry con-
tinues its advance. During the afternoon, the enemy
raises fierce resistance at an intersection along the high-
way. In the meantime, the S.K. 1st Division, driving
from the southeast, arrives at the crossroads and bolsters
the cavalry. The U.S. commander, Colonel Crombez,
and the S.K. 1st Division commander confer. It is de-
cided that the U.S. troops will control the road until the
5th Cavalry pivots at a point about five miles farther
The battleship USS Missouri, operating on the east coast of Korea, bombards Ch’ongjin on 12 October.
456
north to drive down a lateral path toward Kumch’on.
The S.K. 1st Division, supported by tanks of Company
C, 6th Medium Tank Battalion, is scheduled to trail the
cavalry until it swings off the road. At that point, the
tanks are to continue their advance using the main road
to Sibyon-ni. From Sibyon-ni, the S.K. 1st Division is
to turn northwest and drive toward Pyongyang.
In the 7th Cavalry sector, the 3rd Battalion secures
the railroad and road bridges at Hanp’o-ri, and it seizes
control of the road junction there. Friendly aircraft er-
roneously strafe the town and inflict several casualties.
The captured objectives prove to be strategic positions
that enable the 3rd Battalion to tightly close the north-
ern escape routes from Kumch’on. About 1,000 North
Koreans remain isolated in the town.
After darkness falls, the 2nd Battalion arrives at
Hanp’o-ri to join the 3rd Battalion. During the night,
11 enemy vehicles, with their lights on, approach the
7th Cavalry blockade, manned by one platoon of Com-
pany L. Four of the vehicles are transporting ammuni-
tion and it becomes evident as each explodes. The ex-
cursion costs the Communists about 50 men killed,
and another 50 are captured, including a mortally
wounded regimental commander.
A captured document reveals that the N.K. 19th and
27th Divisions plan to break out of the cordon around
Kumch’on during the night of the 14th. A captured
officer, prior to his demise, informs the Americans that
some of the enemy force has been instructed to depart
Kumch’on, and head to Namch’onjom, about fifteen
miles farther north.
 457
At the 7th Cavalry crossing site along the Yesong
River, a contingent of I Corps’ engineers constructs a
pontoon ferry capable of handling tanks. Company C,
70th Tank Battalion, moves across the river and sup-
ports the assault.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, the regiment continues to
attack north, but upon reaching the halfway point from
the objective, it is intercepted by a strong enemy force.
The Communists commit antiaircraft guns, self-
propelled guns and tanks to jackhammer the 8th Cav-
alry, but the cavalry calls for air strikes. Sixteen planes
arrive and lambaste the enemy positions. Artillery fire
is also committed, but the enemy holds steadfastly.
Again, the regiment halts its advance for the day. Dur-
ing the heavy exchange, Lt. Colonel Robert W. Kane,
the 1st Battalion commander, receives a serious wound
and is evacuated.
In the 24th Division sector, several groups of the N.K.
43rd Division are trapped below P’aekch’on. The
groups bypass the town and attempt to flee north to
evade elements of the 21st Regiment. One of these
enemy contingents ambushes a 7th Cavalry unit on the
following day.
Pusan: The 7th Divisional artillery and the 1st Bat-
talion, 17th Regiment, arrive in Pusan to terminate the
divisional transfer from the Ich’on area to Pusan. The
units prepare for the Wonsan operation.
In the ROK Army Headquarters area, I Corps sector,
Wonsan is controlled by the S.K. 3rd Division, which
remains in the area for the next week to maintain secu-
rity until X Corps troops arrive. Twenty-two aircraft,
attached to the Transport Cargo Command, arrive at
Wonsan Airfield and deliver about 131 tons of supplies
required to sustain the South Korean offensive. In other
activity, the Capital Division drives farther north as it
heads toward Hamhung and the port at Hungnam.
In the ROK II Corps, elements of the S.K. 6th Divi-
sion advance about twenty miles and establish contact
with the S.K. Capital Division, which is advancing
from Wonsan.
In Air Force activity, in conjunction with the recent
capture of Wonsan by ROK forces, planes from Far
East Air Force Combat Cargo Command arrive there
to deliver military equipment and supplies. Planes laden
with supplies also land at Kimpo Airfield.
October 13 In Inchon: LSTs, having completed
ferrying operations off Inchon, arrive to receive the as-
sault battalions of the 1st and 7th Marines. The board-
ing operation is completed during the early hours of
the 15th. Major General Field Harris, CG 1st Marine
Aircraft Wing and Tactical Air Command X Corps, ar-
rives on the east coast at the Wonsan Airfield to inspect
the facility. He concludes that conditions are acceptable
and that operations should be initiated immediately.
By the following day Marine aviation units begin to
arrive.
In the Eighth Army area, 1st Cavalry Division sector,
the 7th Cavalry maintains its roadblock north of Kum-
ch’on, in conjunction with the 5th and 8th Cavalries,
October 13, 1950
which are pressing against the enemy from the south and
east respectively to squeeze the Communists at Kum-
ch’on.
In the 5th Cavalry sector, the regiment grinds for-
ward, hindered throughout the day by minefields. Nev-
ertheless, the 5th Cavalry overcomes the mines and
continues the march. Less than ten miles from Kum-
ch’on, it engages and scatters several hundred enemy
troops. By dusk, the 5th Cavalry encroaches the ob-
jective and at midnight, it reinitiates the attackand
drives from the east to strangle Kumch’on. The for-
ward thrust of the 2nd Battalion overwhelms an enemy
force in front of the town. The Americans are to drive
into Kumch’on and secure its northern sector. In the
meantime, the trailing 3rd Battalion plows into the
southern sector of town and secures it.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, the regiment encounters
fierce resistance as it grinds along the main road. A
huge artillery barrage strikes the enemy to loosen resist-
ance and B-17s are scheduled to also pulverize the area,
but the air strikes are aborted due to the close proxim-
ity of the U.S. troops to the target area. The Commu-
nists then launch several counterattacks to hold the 8th
Cavalry at bay and buy time to evacuate Kumch’on.
During one blistering attack, armor moves under the
cover of morning mist and drives into the positions of
Company B’s tanks, and within the direct sights of the
tank commanded by Sergeant Drewery.
From a distance of fifty yards, Drewery’s gunner
commences firing, but the T-34 maintains its speed. A
second shot strikes the T-34 when it reaches a point
twenty yards away, but still it rambles forward. Drew-
ery’s tank is then rammed by the enemy tank and they
become entangled, but the U.S. tank reverses gears and
pulls free. Immediately thereafter, from a distance of a
mere two or three yards, the T-34 receives another pun-
ishing blow that shatters its turret and sets it afire. Still,
the T-34 refuses to halt. Rather, like a bloodied bull, it
again plows into Drewery’s tank. Finally a fourth round
strikes the killing blow.
In related activity, Company B, 70th Tank Battalion,
has a good day of hunting. It kills another six T-34s
and loses none. Ground troops account for the destruc-
tion of one additional enemy tank. Despite the suc-
cesses, the Americans are unable to break through the
enemy resistance. While the 8th Cavalry is forestalled,
the Reds attempt to evacuate Kumch’on, but they run
directly into the 7th Cavalry.
In the 7th Cavalry sector, a large enemy convoy of
trucks and carts accompanied by about 1,000 troops
moves north from Kumch’on. All goes well until the
column reaches the bridge at Hanp’o-ri, where it is in-
tercepted by the 7th Cavalry and U.S. aircraft. The
enemy is relentlessly pounded and the convoy is shred-
ded. About 500 Communists are killed and 201 addi-
tional enemy troops are captured, but several hundred
more troops evade death or capture and flee northeast
into the hills.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, ad-
vances north from P’aekch’on. The trailing part of the
October 14, 1950
Major General Field Harris (Commander, 1st Marine Aircraft Wing) stands with a captured Russian-
made burp gun.
column is snarled by an enemy ambush. The North
Koreans slam the contingent, which includes some of
Battery A, 77th FABn, and Company B, 8th Engineer
Combat Battalion. One trooper sprints back to
P’aekch’on to inform the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment,
of the disaster. Colonel Stephens (21st Regimental
Commander) is at the command post of the 1st Battal-
ion. He reacts immediately. Reinforcements speed to
extricate the beleaguered cavalrymen. But time is of the
essence, and apparently the trapped Americans offer
little resistance, causing devastating results.
The reinforcements arrive at the site, thrash the
enemy and capture thirty-six troops. The ambush costs
the lives of twenty-nine Americans and eight South
Koreans. Also, 30 Americans and 8 South Koreans are
wounded. The Communists destroy four trucks and
damage 14 others.
During the evening, a supply convoy of the 2nd Bat-
talion, 7th Cavalry, advances down the highway, and it,
too, is caught by an enemy ambush. The officer and
11 troops are captured. Five of the enlisted men and the
officer manage to escape.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 1st Division secures
Sibyon-ni, a strategic crossroads sector northeast of
Kaesong. Meanwhile, the S.K. 7th Division arrives at
Pyongyang from Kumhwa.
October 14 Two enemy planes manage to pene-
trate and strike the harbor at Inchon and the airfield at
458
Kimpo. The planes remain unidentified, but it is
thought they had arrived from a North Korean town,
Sinuiju, on the border with China.
In the X Corps sector, at Pusan, work crews begin to
load the supplies aboard ships for the 7th Division’s
Wonsan operation. The troops begin to board on the
16th, and the entire operation is completed on the 17th.
In other activity, General Almond flies to Wonsan to
confer with the S.K. I Corps commander and inform
him of the unfolding developments regarding his corps,
which will come under Almond’s jurisdiction, and it
will be affected by the newest directive, which stipulates
that X Corps makes an administrative landing. Once
ashore, X Corps is to initiate a speedy westward ad-
vance to hook up with Eighth Army. The drive is
scheduled to move along the Wonsan–Pyongyang axis.
In the 1st Marine Division area, General O.P. Smith,
in accordance with X Corps orders, activates his alter-
nate plan and orders an administrative landing on Red
Beach. The Marines are ordered to seize an objective
northeast of Pyongyang.
Meanwhile, Marine aviators take advantage of the
South Korean seizure of Wonsan. Marine Fighter
Squadron VMF-312 arrives at Wonsan from Kimpo. In
addition, R5Ds (transport planes) deliver 210
men of the advance units of Headquarters Squadron
Hedron-12, Service Squadron SMS-12, and VMF(N)-
513, the all-weather night fighter squadron.
VMF(N)-513 initiates missions to deliver bombs
 459
and rockets to Wonsan while naval transports embark
from Kobe, Japan, and transport critical cargo for
MAG-12. The captured airbase is further augmented,
as planes attached to Combat Cargo Command arrive
to begin ferrying the crucial aviation fuel required to
keep the show moving until the sea blockade is bro-
ken.
In conjunction, the two Marine squadrons, operat-
ing from Wonsan, remain dependent upon airlifts until
the ships can safely enter port. In the meantime, the
support crews are heavily burdened. Only one jeep and
eight trailers are available to transfer the bombs. And
MAG-12 is presented with a new quandary due to the
change in orders for the Marines to execute an admin-
istrative landing rather than an assault landing. The
new circumstances place MAG-12 under the control
of Far East Air Forces, which operates under totally dif-
ferent procedures not indigenous to Marine Corps
close-air support tactics.
Nonetheless, the Marine aviators try to conform with
the new directives, including the requirement that all
scheduled missions be received by Headquarters (Fifth
Air Force in Seoul) by 1800 on the previous day. Time
restrictions make it impossible for the Marines in Won-
san to receive clearance in a timely manner, but a meet-
ing is soon called, and General Partridge (Fifth AF) and
General Harris (USMC) agree on a pragmatic solution.
Partridge gives Harris verbal permission to plan and
execute missions while awaiting permission from Head-
quarters. The agreement works satisfactorily, and later,
during November, General Harris receives permission
in writing from Fifth Air Force.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, the North
Korean Army, which had earlier slashed through the
U.N. forces with little effort, no longer bears any resem-
blance to its initial characterization of being near-
invincible. The Communists are in complete disarray
and the North Korean Army is facing total annihila-
tion. Enemy lines of resistance, standing between the
38th Parallel and the North Korean capital, have van-
ished.
In the 1st Cavalry sector, Colonel Crombez, com-
manding officer, 5th Cavalry, arrives in Kumch’on at
0830. Crombez orders the 1st Battalion to remain and
mop up the town. Crombez directs the 2nd Battalion
to drive north and hook up with the 7th Cavalry at
Hanp’o-ri, and he orders the 3rd Battalion to move
south on the Kaesong Road, to link with the 8th Cav-
alry.
— In North Korea: Premier Kim Il Sung, the leader
and commander in chief, North Korea, and Pak Hon
Yong, the chief of Supreme Political Bureau, issue a
blanket order to all troops of the N.K. People’s Army.
The order rationalizes the reasons for the defeat of the
North Korean Army and details tough measures to be
instituted to insure discipline within the remaining
ranks. The measures include the summary executions
of “agitators and “deserters.” The pointed command:
“Do not retreat one step further. Now we have no space
in which to fall back.”
October 15, 1950
North Korean division commanders and regimental
commanders are also directed to organize (by the 15th)
what Kim Il Sung refers to as the Supervising Army, to
be composed of troops who had distinguished them-
selves on the battlefield.
At about this time, Chinese Communist troops
begin to enter Korea to aid the North Koreans. Their
movement is confined to the darkened hours to avoid
detection by aircraft. Eventually, the troops disperse in
the heights about 50 air-miles south of the Yalu, amidst
the mountains. The line of deployment stretches west
from Huich’on and extends about sixty air-miles to
skirt through Onjung, and from there to Unsan. By
about the 20th, the Chinese units, scattered east to west
along this route, are the 38th, 40th and 39th Armies.
Two additional armies are hidden in reserve.
In essence, the Eighth Army and the ROK II Corps
will face fifteen separate Chinese Divisions, excluding
the Chinese 125th Division, which will be engaged
with the S.K. 7th Division, below Ch’osan. Also, be-
fore the end of October, the Chinese 50th and 60th
Armies enter Korea to further bolster Chinese strength.
The Chinese 42nd Army, composed of the 124th,
125th and 126th Divisions, departs T’ung-hua in
southern Manchuria by train for Korea. Subsequent to
arriving at Chi-an, across the Yalu from Manp’ojin, the
124th Division is the first unit to ford the river. Two
days later the 124th Division, trailed by the other two
divisions, marches southeast toward Hagaru-ri. It en-
counters and engages ROK troops and shortly it will
meet X Corps, U.S. Marines.
October 15 Admiral Doyle, commander, Am-
phibious Group One, issues OpnO 16–50, which calls
for an assault landing at Wonsan. It is in contrast to
the scheduled administrative landing about to be exe-
cuted; however, for the U.S. Navy, the movement of
troops from ship to shore remains identical, regardless
of the type of landing.
On October 24, division dispatches instructions can-
celing OpnOs 16 and 17, and it directs an administra-
tive landing on Kalma peninsula, as ordered by CTF 90.
The dispatch is sent at 1450.
In the X Corps area, the remnants of the N.K. 7th
Division, which had escaped from South Korea, begin
to reassemble above the 38th Parallel, in the Inje-
Yanggu vicinity. It has been reported that its command-
ing general had been killed during fighting near Kum-
ch’on while the division was fleeing north.
In other activity, the Fifth Air Force headquarters
transfers from Japan to Seoul. The recent victories in
Korea permit the Air Force to again base planes on Ko-
rean soil, enabling Fifth Air Force to get maximum time
over targets. The bombers and fighters will also be af-
forded heavier bomb-loads and they will have the abil-
ity to plunge deeper into North Korea.
Also, near Seoul, a group of guerrillas attacks a radio
relay station less than five miles from the capital build-
ing. Guerrilla activity is ongoing behind U.N. lines,
and the raids stretch as far south as Pusan.
October 15, 1950
In other Air Force activity, Chinese Communist anti-
aircraft artillery downs an F-51 while it is on a mission
at the Yalu River in the vicinity of Sinuiju.
In yet other activity, Fifth Air Force in Korea estab-
lishes headquarters in Seoul.
In the 1st Marine Division area, the U.S. Navy LSTs
receive the final elements of the 1st and 7th Marines,
which concludes the embarkation process. The Division
had originally expected a speedy westward advance fol-
lowing the landing at Wonsan; therefore, each RCT is
equipped with sixteen trucks, all laden with supplies.
A U.S. Sheridan medium M4A3 tank moves back down a hill following its support for an infantry attack
against enemy positions.
460
Sixteen additional trailers and three truck companies
are also committed to the attacking regiments, to en-
able them to have ammo dumps extended well to the
front. By the latter part of the day, the landing craft sail
for the objective, and by evening, the majority of the
transports also depart.
The USS Mount McKinley and USS Bayfield embark
on the 17th. The landing force and accompanying X
Corps troops that depart Inchon number 1,902 officers
and 28,287 enlisted men. Of these, 1,461 officers and
23,938 men are mustered on the rolls of the 1st
 461
Marine Division. Further breakdown of the numbers
are: Marine officers 1,119; Marine enlisted 20,597;
Navy officers 153; Navy enlisted 1,002; USA and KMC
officers attached, 189; and USA and KMC enlisted at-
tached, 2,339.
In other activity, MAG-12 initiates operations from
Wonsan. These sorties continue until November 9.
There are some early restrictions due to the airfield’s
lack of lighting. VMF(N)-513 is unable to conduct
night missions until the latter part of October, but it
does operate during daylight hours, along with VMF-
312 and the two fighter squadrons that fly from the car-
riers. Refueling is not an easy task either, as the ground
crews are compelled to hand-roll the 50-gallon drums
of fuel from the depot to the airfield one mile away.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker shows signs
of dissatisfaction with the pace of the advance.
In the I Corps sector, General Milburn, mirroring
Walker’s sentiments, attempts to speed the attack. He
orders the 24th Division to pivot and then spring an at-
tack from the left (west) of the 1st Cavalry and capture
Sariwon. The Division is to then attack north into the
capital (Pyongyang).
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, heavy rainstorms
begin to strike the area. The inclement weather neutral-
izes the progress of some units of the cavalry, particu-
larly the 5th Regiment. Nonetheless, General Gay con-
tinues to push the advance. Gay orders the British
Commonwealth Brigade to take positions to the rear
of the 7th Cavalry and prepare to push through it to
seize Sariwon.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the regiment reaches positions
near Namch’onjom, but it awaits the cessation of an
air strike, which begins at 0700, before launching its as-
sault. The 2nd Battalion, bolstered by artillery, drives
against staunch defenses. It hammers the enemy, but
in turn, the defenders raise tenacious resistance. By
noon, the 2nd Battalion reduces the resistance, storms
into the town, and secures it. Captured prisoners state
that the morning bombardment had devastated the
command post of the N.K. 19th Division and killed
the division’s chief of staff. The battle for Namch’on-
jom costs the 2nd Battalion 10 troops killed and thirty
wounded.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 1st Division, oper-
ating to the right of the 1st Cavalry Division, advances
to the vicinity of Miu-dong, about 12 miles northeast
of Namch’onjom, and once there, it encounters a large
enemy force. The North Koreans, about regimental
strength, are accompanied by artillery and six tanks,
but the South Koreans are bolstered by U.S. Air Force
planes. The South Korean infantry drives through the
high ground while their supporting tanks grind for-
ward on the road. The advance closes toward Suan.
In Naval activity, U.S. naval vessels converge on the
Wonsan area to support and protect the minesweeping
operations and amphibious landings. The approaches
to Wonsan are protected by the destroyers and the USS
Missouri (BB 63), USS Helena (CA 75), USS Toledo
(CA 133), and the USS Manchester (CA 83).
October 16, 1950
— Wake Island: President Truman arrives at Wake
Island in the Pacific to confer with General MacArthur,
who has flown in from Japan. It is an apparent attempt
to clarify misunderstandings between the commander-
in-chief and the commanding general, as well as to
scrutinize the battle plans for winning in Korea. The
meeting ends amicably, but differences of opinion on
how to conduct the war will re-emerge. The friction
between the general and his commander-in-chief shows
no signs of easing. However, at present, it is common
belief that the war in Korea is about to be terminated,
and in accordance with this premise, agreements are
reached during this meeting to alter troop movements
to meet the changing situation.
MacArthur is of the opinion that Russia is unable to
muster forces soon enough to change the situation in
Korea before winter, and he believes that Chinese in-
tervention is, at best, a remote possibility. However,
the possibility of Communist intervention is not to-
tally discarded by him, or by Washington. MacArthur
remains convinced that the hostilities will cease by
Thanksgiving Day and that Eighth Army should re-
turn to Japan by Christmas. He also believes that X
Corps can retain stability within a united Korea until
peace is fully restored. General MacArthur receives a
Distinguished Service Medal (his fifth) from President
Truman.
The Department of the Army and the commander-
in-chief, Far East, have agreed to embark the U.S. 2nd
Division to the States or to Europe. Other participants
at the Wake Island meeting include Frank Pace (secre-
tary of Army), General Omar Bradley, Admiral Arthur
Radford (CinCPacFlt), General Courtney Whitney,
Assistant Secretary of State Dean Rusk and Secretary of
State Averell Harriman.
October 16 Elements of the Chinese 124th
(CCF) Division cross the Yalu River into North Korea
on or about this day, but they are not discovered. The
units are later identified by prisoners. During the fol-
lowing ten days, elements of the two regiments move
south and deploy near the Chosin Reservoir.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, Won-
san begins to bustle with activity. Marine Fighter
Squadrons VMF-214 and 323 arrive off Wonsan from
Sasebo, Japan, to begin operations from the decks of the
Sicily and the Badoeng Strait. The Marine pilots initi-
ate sorties on the following day. During the latter part
of the afternoon, Amphibious Group One and the
LSTs, transporting the tractor group, embark from In-
chon. These ships will be followed by the main attack
force, which departs on the following day. VMO-6 re-
mains under the operational control of the 1st Marine
Division, but it is controlled administratively by MAG-
12. Elements of VMO-6 (still at Kimpo) begin to ar-
rive at Wonsan on the 23rd.
In other activity, the 7th Division Advance Com-
mand Post is established aboard the USS Eldorado. It
will be some time before it is transferred to shore. Won-
san harbor is saturated with enemy mines, causing a
October 17, 1950
two-week postponement of the convoys’ arrival at the
objective.
Lt. Colonel William J. McCaffrey (deputy chief of
staff, X Corps) and the X Corps advance command post
depart Kimpo Airfield by plane and arrive at Wonsan.
McCaffrey immediately makes contact with the com-
mander of the offshore minesweeping operation and with
the ROK I Corps. Once contact is established with the
South Koreans, McCaffrey’s group initiates the task of
discovering who had laid the minefields and, if possible,
determining where the remaining mines are stored.
ROK intelligence makes contact with a Korean civil-
ian who had worked in the mine storage area. The civil-
ian leads a detachment to the place where the mines
had been assembled. He also informs the party about
the captain of a sampan who assisted with the disper-
sion of the mines. The meek Korean civilian and the
other informer disclose that Russian troops had over-
seen the operation. Thirty-two small boats and their
crews had placed about 3,000 mines in the waters off
Wonsan and on the beaches.
In related activity, South Korean troops have discov-
ered and moved about 1,000 20-pound box-mines to
a location at the northern sector of the harbor. Six S.K.
troops, including one officer, move about 200 yards
away from the stacked explosives and seemingly decide
to celebrate. The officer fires into the cache and the ex-
plosion that follows shatters nerves and windows for
several miles around. The six soldiers are killed in the
blast.
Also, General Almond is directed to have X Corps at-
tack west. The advance is to drive along the
Wonsan–Pyongyang axis, but these orders are modi-
fied on the following day.
In the Eighth Army area, Army anticipates the im-
minent fall of Pyongyang and establishes Task Force
Indianhead, commanded by Lt. Colonel Ralph Foster
(Asst. CoS for G-2, 2nd Division). The force is com-
posed of Company K, 38th Regiment, a contingent of
demolition engineers, a detachment of 82nd AAA Bat-
talion automatic weapons vehicles and 6 tanks attached
to Company C, 72nd Medium Tank Battalion. A group
of counterintelligence troops also joins the mission.
The task force moves into Pyongyang with the 1st Cav-
alry and seizes particular government buildings and
some foreign countries’ compounds to gather intelli-
gence.
Once the city is secured, Army utilizes supplies that
had been airlifted from Kimpo Airfield in Inchon and
from Ashiya Airbase in Japan. This cargo sustains the
attack and alleviates some pressure, as the trucks are
being worn down into wrecks from the non-stop use.
In the I Corps area, General Milburn informs Gen-
eral Gay (1st Cavalry) and General Church (24th Di-
vision) that the division, which is first to reach Sari-
won, will be the division that spearheads the attack into
Pyongyang. There is already plenty of competitiveness
between divisions and the individual units, and it is
not necessarily always friendly, as the troops are be-
coming increasingly edgy.
462
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, 7th Cavalry zone, the
3rd Battalion, commanded by Colonel Lynch, drives
from Namch’onjom. By noon it advances 17 miles and
secures Sohung. In the meantime, the 1st Battalion,
commanded by Colonel Clainos, passes through the
captured town and swings north to prepare to take
Hwang-ju on the following day.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion holds the prize and
with Company F, it establishes roadblocks south of So-
hung. Colonel Harris issues orders to shoot at all tar-
gets spotted in front of the perimeter after dusk. Har-
ris’ 7th Cavalry is aware that the British will be passing
through on the following morning, but no other
friendly troops are due in the area. Colonel Harris
transfers his headquarters to Sohung and he arrives
there during the latter part of the afternoon.
In other activity, the road at Namch’onjom becomes
clogged. The 5th Cavalry, the 19th Regiment (24th
Division) and the British Commonwealth Brigade con-
verge there and create a log-jam. The vehicles are nearly
immobilized.
In the 24th Division zone, the 21st Regiment, com-
manded by Colonel Stephens, advances toward Sari-
won and closes on Haeju, against enemy resistance.
General Church has ordered the 19th Regiment to
speed its advance, but it trails the 5th Cavalry on the
highway and becomes part of a massive traffic jam.
In the ROK Army area, Army activates the ROK III
Corps, which is delegated responsibility of retaining
the security of the ROK-held terrain south of the
Seoul–Chunchon–Inje–Yangyang line. It is to elimi-
nate the remnant enemy groups, including guerrillas.
The ROK III Corps is composed of the S.K. 5th and
11th Divisions.
The S.K. 1st Division, commanded by General Paik,
overcomes the opposition and drives into Suan. Now
standing about forty miles from Pyongyang, General
Paik decides that his tactics are “No stop.” Paik intends
to drive straight into the North Korean Capital. His
troops still lack transportation and many are shoeless.
Nonetheless, the South Koreans race far ahead of the
U.S. motorized columns.
October 17 By this time, the North Koreans have
concluded that it would be futile to prepare a steadfast
defense at Pyongyang, and that such a plan would most
probably cause the annihilation of the remaining North
Korean troops. In conjunction, four South Korean di-
visions are rapidly racing toward the capital. The British
contingent (27th Commonwealth Brigade) of the U.S.
I Corps and the Americans are also closing fast.
MacArthur’s initial flanking operation of Wonsan
by X Corps is executed by the ROKs prior to the land-
ing of X Corps. MacArthur informs General Almond
that if Eighth Army takes Pyongyang prior to X Corps’
landing, X Corps is to alter its plans and attack north.
By the 19th, the final order is received by Almond and
it directs the attack to move north.
In other activity, about 300 American soldiers,
crammed aboard two enemy trains at Pyongyang, are
 463
taken north. During September, when the Commu-
nists marched them from Seoul to Pyongyang, the cap-
tives numbered about 370 men. The death-trains move
slowly, as the tracks along the way must frequently be
repaired, and travel during daylight hours is especially
dangerous due to U.S. planes. During the repair stops,
some of the captive GIs manage to escape into the
woods; however, many more do not survive the ordeal.
About five to six soldiers die each day during the cruel
voyage due to either starvation or dysentery. Their bod-
ies are removed from the trains by the Communists and
left to rot in the woods.
In the X Corps area, the 1st Marine Division embarks
from Inchon aboard the warships of JTF 7’s Attack
Force (including TF-90). At 0800, the armada heads for
the Yellow Sea to begin the 830-mile voyage to Won-
san on Korea’s east coast.
In the 7th Division sector, the loading operation at
Pusan is concluded. Men and equipment are set for
embarkation. Corps troops begin boarding the ships
on the 19th.
In the Eighth Army area, Army has concluded that
the combined effective force of the N.K. 17th and 32nd
Divisions at Pyongyang stands at about 8,000 troops,
and Eighth Army is convinced that the enemy will raise
only token resistance to permit the bulk of its troops to
cross the Ch’ongch’on River to flee north. The river is
about 65 miles from the Yalu, and it flows northeast to
southwest, similarly to the Yalu. General Walker di-
rects the 1st Cavalry to spearhead the attack into the
North Korean capital. Its attached British Brigade had
entered Sariwon before the 24th Division.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, Gen-
eral Gay, upon receiving word from Army that his di-
vision is to make the attack against Pyongyang, dele-
gates the furthest unit (7th Cavalry) to initiate the
attack on the morning of the 18th.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, Captain Arthur Truxes, Jr.,
commanding Company F, holds the roadblock south of
Sohung. At about 0300, his troops spot some move-
ment. Pursuant to orders, Company F commences fire;
however, the approaching force is a contingent of the
5th Cavalry. The unnecessary firefight costs the 5th
Cavalry seven wounded before the two American units
discover the error.
Testimony shows that opinions differ on some of the
details of the firefight. Captain Webel (7th Cavalry S-
3) states that he informed the 5th Cavalry liaison offi-
cer of the orders to shoot, and that he asked him to go
to the 5th Cavalry to relay the information. The offi-
cer apparently remains in the 7th Cavalry sector dur-
ing the night. Captain Truxes is killed; therefore, his ac-
count of the incident is never ascertained.
General Gay replaces Colonel William Harris with
Colonel James Woolnough as commanding officer, 7th
Cavalry. Harris, infuriated with the disciplinary action,
returns to Seoul. Later, Gay alleges that Harris was
merely sent back for R&R.
In other activity, as scheduled for the morning, the
British 27th Commonwealth Brigade moves through
October 17, 1950
the 7th Cavalry positions at Sohung. The unit,
equipped with U.S. tanks, drives tenaciously along the
main road toward Sariwon. The advance is spearheaded
by a platoon of Company A, Argyll 1st Battalion,
which travels aboard the tanks. Soon the 7th Cavalry,
spearheaded by the 1st Battalion, also drives west toward
Sariwon, but it takes a roundabout route to Hwangju
to strike against the primary road (Pyongyang Road)
north of Sariwon. Russian tanks, seemingly abandoned
for lack of fuel, line the road and there is also much
human debris. North Korean troops await an opportu-
nity to surrender. But, farther down the road, about
four miles short of the objective, other enemy troops es-
tablish resistance.
Brigadier General Frank A. Allen (asst. 1st Cavalry
commanding officer) is accompanying the British. He
immediately orders the tanks to rake an orchard to
eliminate the opposition there. A spotter plane pin-
points the enemy positions to aid the effort. As the
tanks begin to fire, some North Koreans bolt from the
orchard, abandon their weapons and sprint to the op-
posite side of the ridge line.
The tanks then oversee the British as they romp
through the orchard, confiscate 10 machine guns and
clear it of any remaining Communists. Forty Commu-
nists are killed and some others are captured. After pass-
ing an abandoned battery of antitank guns in the pass,
the British roll into Sariwon. The skirmish costs the
British one man killed and several wounded.
Meanwhile, the 7th Cavalry treks along the slim path
toward its objective. At about 1600, General Gay flies
over the regiment at Hwangju and drops instructions
that direct one battalion to divert southward at
Hwangju and join with the British on the primary road
to help eliminate or capture a large concentration of
enemy troops spotted there. After a brief meeting, the
commanders determine that the 1st Battalion (Colonel
Clainos) will move to join the British and the 2nd Bat-
talion (Colonel Callaway) will remain in Hwangju.
Almost immediately after swinging south and driv-
ing down the Sariwon–Pyongyang Road, the 1st Bat-
talion captures a contingent of enemy cavalry and about
thirty horses. The 1st Battalion then resumes its ad-
vance, but it retains its vehicles rather than switching
to the horses. It has been rumored that one of the sad-
dles becomes an ornament for Colonel Clainos’ jeep.
Shortly thereafter, the 7th Cavalry’s 1st Battalion
encounters more of the enemy and a skirmish erupts.
A South Korean interpreter, despite being wounded,
advances to the enemy positions and falsely tells them
that they are firing upon Russian troops. The enemy is
successfully duped and it walks into the hands of the 7th
Cavalry. Several of the North Koreans become frus-
trated and resist, but the episode is brief. A squad leader
punches one of the resisters and knocks him into a
ditch.
Unknown to the cavalrymen, this unusual daylight
capture is being observed by several hundred other
enemy troops from their positions in the nearby
heights. In a little while, the eastern side of the slope
October 17, 1950
begins raining enemy troops who swarm toward the
battalion to surrender. The enemy on the west side con-
tinues to fire at the 1st Battalion until dusk. Nonethe-
less, during the evening, about 1,700 enemy troops,
including 13 female nurses, surrender to Colonel
Clainos’ 1st Battalion. Clainos establishes contact with
the Australians by radio at 1800.
Later, at 2230, he informs them that he is about to
move through the pass to enter the Australian lines.
Meanwhile, at about 1700, the Australian 3rd Battalion
passes through Sariwon and drives 5 additional miles
to close on Hwangju, where the enemy is entrenched
in the hills. The Australians halt their advance and pre-
pare to launch an attack on the following morning.
During the day, there are many cases of mistaken
identity. In one instance, the enemy believes the British
are Russian and in another instance, U.N. troops inad-
vertently accept enemy troops as South Korean troops.
A contingent of British reconnaissance troops en-
counters an enemy truck that is heading north into
Sariwon. The Communists break through to the town,
but unable to exit, the vehicle reverses course and runs
back into the British. About twenty Reds are killed dur-
ing the second encounter. Another high-spirited fight
erupts when the Communists stumble upon the British,
begin to call them “comrade” and hand out cigarettes
before they realize the troops are British. A close-
quartered battle erupts.
In yet another incident, Lieutenant Robin Fairrey, a
British mortar officer, walks around a corner and finds
himself in the middle of a group of enemy troops. He
bellows, “Rusky! Rusky!” and the North Koreans re-
main fooled. He briskly walks to safety.
During another peculiar encounter, south of Sari-
won, a contingent of the Australian 3rd Battalion spots
a large enemy force as it approaches a roadblock and
prepares for a heated struggle. At the same time, Major
I.B. Ferguson jumps upon a tank and begins to call for
the enemy to surrender. Erroneously, he informs them
that they are surrounded. Surprisingly, they capitulate
and the Australians rake in 1,982 prisoners. After this
incident, the Australians prepare to launch an attack
on the following day, but the troops on the line receive
yet another surprise.
At 2300, the pass that leads toward Sariwon becomes
illuminated. The convoy transporting the 1st Battal-
ion, 7th Cavalry, is moving south on the highway and
it advances through the pass with all the vehicles’ head-
lights beaming brightly. The entourage of accompany-
ing prisoners is highly visible and at midnight, when the
column reaches the Australian lines, the Australians are
buzzing. Colonel Clainos notes that one Australian sol-
dier quips to another, “Here we are all set for a coor-
dinated attack in the morning and the bloody Yanks
come in at midnight from the north, with their lights
burning, and bringing the whole damned north Ko-
rean Army as prisoners.”
In the 24th Division sector, the advance moves up the
west coast to the left of the Kaesong–Sariwon–Py-
ongyang axis. The 19th Regiment closes on Sariwon,
464
but at 1700 orders arrive that instruct it to halt its at-
tack, as the town had already been secured.
Meanwhile, Colonel Stephens’ 21st Regiment en-
counters stiff resistance at Haeju, but it continues to
hammer the 300 defenders and overwhelm them. The
town is secure before evening.
In the ROK Army area, a contingent of South Ko-
rean troops eliminates the enemy shore batteries that
had been firing upon the minesweepers in the Russian
Channel off Wonsan. With Wonsan under control, the
S.K. forces also secure the peninsulas and islands that
dominate the Wonsan harbor approaches. Although
the shore guns are liquidated, the channel remains filled
with mines. The Capital Division secures Hamhung,
Hungnam and Yonpo Airfield. The S.K. 3rd Division
has one regiment en route to Hamhung, and two other
regiments are at Wonsan and Kojo.
In other activity, the S.K. 1st Division advances from
the southeast and reaches a point about 15 miles from
the North Korean capital, Pyongyang. To the right
from the east, the S.K. 7th Division also closes against
Pyongyang.
Meanwhile, in the central mountains, the S.K. 6th
Division drives from the northeast and nears Yangdok,
about fifty air-miles from the objective. The S.K. 8th
Division is also in the central mountains near Yang-
dok. It closes on the Pyongyang–Wonsan Road, from
where it is to swing west and drive to the city.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Force initiates
flights to recently captured Sinmak, less than fifty miles
from the Communist capital of Pyongyang. The planes
deliver food rations and fuel. Then the aircraft evacu-
ate wounded troops and transport them to Kimpo Air-
field.
— In the United States: President Truman, back in
San Francisco from Wake Island, gives General
MacArthur high accolades: “It is fortunate for the world
that we had the right man for this purpose, a man who
is a very great soldier.” The president notes that the
only reason for being in Korea “is to establish peace
and independence. We seek no territory or special priv-
ilege—the only victory we seek is the victory of peace.”
Also, the president mentions the Soviet Union’s in-
cessant military buildup in Asia and Europe, which he
then proclaims is threatening world peace. Truman
states emphatically: “The free men of the world have but
one choice if they are to remain free. They must oppose
strength with strength.... We hate war, but we love our
liberties. We will not see them destroyed.”
— In Japan: General MacArthur issues UNC Oper-
ations Order 4 that removes the restriction specified in
the previous order issued on September 27 forbidding
troops (other than South Korean) from advancing be-
yond a line extending from Ch’ongju on the west to
Hamhung on the east coast. The new line is drawn
along an axis thirty to forty miles south of the
Manchurian border with North Korea. The order will
be confirmed in a distributed message on the 19th. Also,
the previous orders restricting Fifth Air Force planes
from flying closer than fifty miles from the North
 465
Korean border, at the Yalu River, are somewhat relaxed
to give the pilots some slack.
October 18 In Naval activity, minesweeping op-
erations continue off Wonsan as the Navy chisels out a
safe channel that leads to the harbor. A successful con-
clusion seems near until a Japanese vessel ( JMS-14)
strikes a mine and plummets to the bottom. The
tragedy sobers the optimism.
In the Eighth Army area, the principal body (5,192
troops) of the 1st Turkish Armed Forces Command,
which had arrived at Pusan on the previous day, comes
ashore. The Turkish Brigade then moves to Taegu to
begin training at the newly established U.N. Reception
Center (UNRC). The Turkish Brigade is fully equipped
with the exception of certain weapons, which must be
provided by the Americans.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the morale of the
troops skyrockets when erroneous rumors spread
through the ranks. The false notions imply that once
Pyongyang falls, the mission of the Americans is termi-
nated and the U.S. troops will embark for Japan, in
time to eat dinner there on Thanksgiving Day.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, the Regiment resumes its at-
tack at dawn. The 3rd Battalion, following its tedious
night march to reach Hwangju, jumps off and bolts
across a small stream at Hwangju. From there, it ad-
vances toward the objective, Pyongyang. Initially, the
enemy raises nominal resistance to harass the battal-
ion, but later, when the 3rd Battalion encroaches the
high ground slightly south of the midway point at
Hukkyo-ri, the stakes get raised. Communist gunners
begin to pour extremely heavy fire into the ranks. The
resistance includes high-velocity guns, 120-mm mor-
tars, several entrenched T-34 tanks and a heavily mined
road.
The U.S. troops are bolstered by planes and twenty
tanks attached to Company C, 70th Tank Bn. Enemy
small arms fire, which is also tenacious, brings down one
of the attacking aircraft. The enemy force, composed of
about 800 troops, holds its ground firmly and greatly
hinders progress. General Gay becomes impatient with
the headway of the assault. Consequently, during the
middle of the afternoon, he directs the 7th Cavalry
commander, Colonel Woolnough (temporarily replac-
ing Colonel Harris), to commit the remaining two bat-
talions. To speed up the advance, they are each to flank
the enemy-dominated ridges. Colonel Webel urges
General Gay to cancel the order, claiming that the ridge
is nearly secured and that the reinforcements are not
needed. Nevertheless Gay, after being informed by
Woolnough that the mission is in progress, decides to
let the order stand.
In the meantime, the 1st and 2nd Battalions advance
toward the enemy flanks and the attack continues
throughout the night. Also, General Gay tells Colonel
Woolnough that the 5th Cavalry is to pass through the
7th Cavalry on the morning of the 19th to resume the
assault. After this conversation, Gay departs and lo-
cates Colonel Crombez and his 5th Cavalry, which is
October 19, 1950
still scattered along the lousy road that is more suitable
for donkeys or oxen rather than cavalrymen. Crombez
is informed that his regiment will spearhead the fol-
lowing day’s attack.
The 5th Cavalry Regiment, trailing the 7th Cavalry,
completes its march through the mountains and reaches
Hwangju at 2300. The 7th Cavalry remains deeply dis-
appointed with General Gay. The 7th had spearheaded
the drive from Seoul, but it is now being denied the
opportunity to take Pyongyang.
In the ROK Army area, two South Korean warships
strike mines in the channel off Wonsan. A minesweeper
sinks and the other vessel sustains damage.
In other activity, the S.K. 1st Division rapidly ad-
vances toward Pyongyang, far ahead of the American
drive, but when it reaches a point about ten miles from
the city, resistance intensifies. The combination of the
accelerated opposition and a heavy concentration of
mines prevents great progress. The South Koreans ad-
vance only about two miles. The contest outside Py-
ongyang continues throughout the night and into the
following morning, all the while under a dreary rain-
storm.
The leading elements of the 1st Cavalry Division
stand about 30 miles from the city; however, the cav-
alry is not encountering heavy resistance. In Air Force
activity, during a mission, an RB-29 reconnaissance
plane’s crew spots about 75 fighter planes on the
ground at the airfield in Antung, China, across the Yalu
River along the border with North Korea. The pres-
ence of the enemy aircraft suggests an imminent entry
by China into the war.
October 19 In Naval activity, the risky mine-
sweeping operation off Wonsan sustains another dev-
astating blow when the S.K. minesweeper YMS-516 is
rocked by a thunderous explosion as it passes through
a supposedly clear sector of the channel. The area had
been swept, but the enemy had also spread magnetic
mines. These were implanted with time devices that
permit as many as 12 vessels to pass safely before det-
onation.
In other activity, the USS Mount McKinley arrives
off Wonsan. Admiral Doyle, General Almond and other
X Corps staff set up a conference with Admiral Struble
aboard the USS Missouri. Struble thinks it will take
three additional days to clear the remaining magnetic
mines from the channel. He states that no landing will
occur until all the magnetic mines are eliminated from
the channel.
The UNC Operations Order 4, issued by MacArthur
on the 17th, is confirmed today. The new line of op-
erations for the U.N. troops (other than South Korean)
runs from Sonch’on and extends through Koin-
dong–P’yongwon–P’ungsan and beyond until it ter-
minates at Songjin on the east coast. The new line re-
mains within the original guidelines of the original JCS
directive of September 27, which is still in effect. It is
about 100 miles from the Soviet Union.
The directives still permit only South Korean troops
October 19, 1950
to operate in the provinces that border the Yalu River
and neighboring Communist China. Soon after, on the
24th, General MacArthur again changes the parameters
of the operation in North Korea. This directive creates
an even larger gap between Eight Army and X Corps.
In the X Corps area, following his meeting with Ad-
miral Struble aboard the Missouri, General Almond de-
cides to move to Wonsan on the following day.
In the 1st Marine Division area, although it cannot be
found in the official government records, the Marines
aboard ships in the Yellow Sea, slightly beyond the
Wonsan Channel, initiate what becomes known as Op-
eration Yo-yo. The Marines, who had originally been
scheduled to storm the beaches on the 20th, find them-
selves in a most uncomfortable position on the eve of
their landing. Rather than facing D-Day and enemy
resistance, the Marines face Z-day, as in zany.
At about 1700, the colossal 250-vessel armada,
which is steaming north, suddenly spins on a dime and
swings around, then heads south toward Pusan. The
rumors begin as murmurs, but then, they accelerate
into great exhortation as the floating procession begins
its southward course. The sounds of the Marines bel-
low across the decks: “War’s over!” “They’re taking us
back to Pusan for embarkation to the States.” Never-
theless, if the Marines feel the surge of magnanimous
surprise, they are in for another bombshell when dawn
arrives on the following day.
In the Eighth Army area, the forward distribution
center for Army is at Kaesong. It requires about 200
trucks to transport the supplies from there to the for-
ward positions, and most units are more than 100 miles
north of Kaesong. The vehicles move food, gasoline
and other supplies to small depots located about fifty
miles north of Seoul.
The 187th Airborne Regiment at Kimpo Airfield in
Inchon prepares to parachute into North Korea on the
following day. These airborne troops have been held
in GHQ Reserve and did not participate in Eighth
Army’s attack across the 38th Parallel.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, 5th Cavalry zone,
Colonel Paul Clifford’s 2nd Battalion, having received
little sleep, departs Hwangju at 0500. The battalion
reaches the 7th Cavalry lines at Hukkyo-ri, toward the
tail end of a battle in which the enemy has been re-
pulsed by the 7th Cavalry. Three tanks roar into the
area and stop suddenly. The tankers open their hatches
and begin conversing with each other in close proxim-
ity to three 5th Cavalrymen, who realize that the tanks
are hostile. One trooper, in obvious slang, yells to the
team leader, “Them ain’t GIs, them are gooks.” The
bazooka team leader chimes in: “Let’s shoot the
S.O.B.s.” Their marksmanship is superior to their use
of the King’s English. The three enemy tanks are de-
stroyed.
Soon after, Company F, commanded by Lieutenant
James H. Bell, pushes off with the added support of
one platoon of engineers, a section of heavy machine
guns and five tanks. The attacking unit is further bol-
stered by aircraft.
466
Company F is hardly out of the gate when a jet plane
attempts to lend support and nearly causes a disaster.
While the column passes by the first burning tank, the
jet dives and fires a rocket that knocks Lieutenant Bell
out of action by the concussion. Following the near-
mishap, Company F picks up its pace and grinds for-
ward. At 1102, the vanguard reaches the southern
fringes of Pyongyang, where it pauses briefly at the
Mujinch’on River, a tributary of the Taedong River.
The advance troops wait while mortar fire is brought to
bear on the enemy positions on the opposite side of the
twenty-yard-wide river. The defenses include three an-
titank guns, which are zeroed in on the road bridge.
After about one-half hour of effective fire, the guns be-
come docile as the defenders abandon the positions.
Following the elimination of the enemy fire, Com-
pany F enters the city. The drive had been shepherded
by Fifth Air Force aircraft. The official Army records,
from an aerial observer’s report, indicate that Com-
pany F enters Pyongyang at 1102, but Lieutenant Bell
estimates that his unit breached the city at about 1330.
Pyongyang is located along the Taedong River, about
40 miles from its confluence with the Yellow Sea. The
sector of the city north of the Taedong contains the
primary government buildings.
South of the river, an industrial suburb area has been
established. Bell’s orders direct him to swing west and
secure the two railroad bridges (Pusan–Seoul–Mukden
Railroad) situated about two miles downstream from the
primary road bridge. Particular factories there are also
listed as targets. Bell is directed to establish a bridgehead
on the north bank of the river. When Lieutenant Bell
reaches the south bank of the river, he discovers that
each of the three-span railroad bridges contain only
one span intact. Using the eastern span, which he con-
siders sturdier, Bell orders a detachment to remain at the
southern end to guard the tanks, while he leads the re-
mainder of the company to secure an island in the river.
An enemy contingent operating on the north bank de-
stroys a section of the bridge there.
During the afternoon, Company F secures the is-
land. Later it is relieved by the 3rd Battalion, 5th Cav-
alry. In the meantime, the remainder of the 2nd Bat-
talion crosses the Mujinch’on River and swings right
to secure the primary bridge (the sole remaining intact
bridge at Pyongyang), that spans the Taedong River.
Before contingents of Companies E and G reach the
objective, the North Koreans detonate the middle span.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Cavalry, commanded by Col-
onel John Clifford, then continues northeast to find a
new crossing site. Soon after, a contingent locates a
stream and discovers that the S.K. 15th Regiment had
already crossed there. The South Koreans, familiar with
the area, knew the exact location of the crossing site.
In the 7th Cavalry sector, at dawn, the two battalions
that had flanked the enemy positions in the high
ground in front of Hukkyo-ri on the previous day dis-
cover that the enemy has abandoned their ridge posi-
tions.
In other activity, the North Koreans launch an
 467 October 19, 1950

A contingent of ROKs (S.K. 7th Division) engage in a firefight with Communists in Pyongyang on 19
October.

unsuccessful early morning attack against the 7th Cav-
alry perimeter at Hukkyo-ri.
In the ROK Army area, IX Corps sector, S.K. 1st Divi-
sion zone, fighting from the previous night continues
even after dawn. The division grinds through tough op-
position and gains another two hard-fought miles. Fol-
lowing about one or two hours of tenacious battle, the
South Koreans mount an attack supported by tanks of
Company C, 6th Tank Battalion. The thrust of the tanks
blows a giant hole in the defenses near Kojo-dong.
October 20, 1950
The S.K. (ROK) YMS-516 is destroyed after striking a mine on 19 October off Wonsan.
Afterward, the armor converge on both flanks and pul-
verize the North Korean positions. Machine guns, some
other weapons and enemy troops are blown into par-
ticles. The tanks account for about 300 deceased Com-
munists.
Meanwhile, elements of the S.K. 2nd Battalion, 12th
Regiment, 1st Division, maintain their advance and
slightly before 1100, the units reach the Taedong River.
The regiment deploys northeast of the road bridge
along the south bank of the river.
As the 1st Cavalry Division pounds its way into Py-
ongyang, the S.K. 1st Division drills through the city’s
defenses northeast of the lines of the 1st Cavalry. The
ROKS advance along the Sibyon-ni–Pyongyang Road.
By dusk, most of the S.K. 1st Division enters Py-
ongyang.
The records of the U.S. tank unit (Company C, 6th
Med. Tank Bn.) that accompanies the South Koreans
indicate that its tanks enter the southern fringes of the
city at 1245. Soon after, tanks of Company D drive
into the city via the identical route. The tanks of Com-
pany C swing north to support the S.K. 11th Regi-
ment, which is assaulting the main airfield. It is secure
by 1440.
Earlier in the day, other South Korean contingents
had seized a smaller airfield. In addition, the 8th Reg-
iment, S.K. 7th Division, enters Pyongyang from the
east. At 1700, Kim Il Sung University in the northeast
sector of the city is secure.
468
October 20 General MacArthur has been keep-
ing the 187th Airborne Regiment at Kimpo while he
prepares to unleash it to conduct a dangerous operation.
It is expected to rescue American POWs suspected of
being held captive on North Korean trains that are
being sent farther north. The mission is executed on
this day. The airdrop is supplemented by seventy-four
tons of equipment, which is also dropped. This is the
first time heavy equipment is airdropped in combat,
and it is also the initial use of C-19s in a combat para-
chute operation. The paratroopers will be followed to
earth by such items as 90-mm towed antitank guns,
105-mm howitzers, jeeps and a mobile radio transmis-
sion set. In conjunction, seven 105-mm howitzers of the
674th FABn and 1,125 shells are also dropped. Six of
the guns survive in operable condition, and only about
ten percent of the shells are damaged and fortunately,
none explode upon impact.
In what is considered a usual practice for MacArthur,
he and Generals Stratemeyer, Whitney and Wright have
flown from Japan to observe the parachutists. At 0230,
during a torrential downpour, the paratroopers fall out
for an early reveille. The soaked troops are treated to
breakfast before they move to the airstrip to await a
change in the weather. At about noon, conditions im-
prove and the flying warriors board their aircraft. About
2,800 men of the airborne unit cram into 113 planes
to execute the first combat troop airdrop since World
War II.
 469
About 1,200 more paratroopers will follow on suc-
ceeding days. The total weight of the dropped equip-
ment amounts to more than 600 tons. The C-19s and
the C-47s, of the 314th and 21st Troop Carrier
Squadrons respectively, are scheduled to make two pri-
mary drops at positions about 30 miles north of Py-
ongyang.
Prior to the arrival of the paratroopers, fighter planes
fly over the target areas to bomb and strafe the terrain.
The commanding officer, Colonel Frank Bowen, Jr., is
aboard the lead aircraft, which is airborne at 1200.
Once the remaining planes are in the air and assem-
bled, they head toward Sukch’on and Sunchon, to in-
tercept the targeted train.
At about 1400, Colonel Bowen and 1,470 troops
(1st Bn., Regimental Headquarters and Headquarters
Company, medical personnel, engineers and service
troops) jump from their planes over Drop Zone
William southeast of Sukch’on. They encounter only
some sniper fire. Twenty-five troops are accidentally
injured during this jump. One group misses the drop
zone by about one and one-half miles. One man is
killed by enemy fire while he is descending.
The airborne troops of the 1st Battalion quickly seize
Hill 97 east of Sukch’on and Hill 104 to the north. Si-
multaneously they secure the town.
The terrain to the immediate north of the town must
also be seized to provide the paratroopers domination
of the primary road that runs north of Sukch’on. It is
cleared on the following day. Colonel Bowen estab-
lishes his command post on Hill 97 and a roadblock is
established near Hill 104. The 3rd Battalion, com-
manded by Colonel Delbert E. Munson, also lands in
Drop Zone William, but it moves south and establishes
roadblocks below the town at the highway and at the
railroad.
By 1700, its objectives are seized without any casu-
alties. In turn, the enemy loses five troops killed and
forty-two others captured. Trailing the first air-drop, at
1420, the 2nd Battalion, commanded by Col. William
J. Boyle, jumps to begin its descent and lands in Drop
Zone Easy, about 2 miles southwest of Sunchon, against
no opposition. However, 20 paratroopers are injured
during the jump.
Following a quick assembly, the battalion quickly
moves out and seizes all of its objectives by dusk. Road-
blocks are established south and west of the town and
manned by two companies, while another company
moves to Sunchon and makes contact with the S.K. 6th
Division. The South Koreans are advancing from the
southeast, en route to the Ch’ongch’on River.
Once all the paratroopers hit the ground, the en-
tourage of brass departs the area for Pyongyang, where
MacArthur makes some comments to the waiting press.
MacArthur claims that the airborne operation has
caught the enemy by complete surprise and that about
30,000 enemy troops have been clamped between the
paratroopers in the north and the claws of both the 1st
Cavalry Division and the S.K. 1st Division, which are
closing from the south. In addition, MacArthur claims
October 20, 1950
that either the demise or capture of the trapped enemy
is at hand.
While at Sunchon, the 2nd Battalion does not en-
counter much difficulty, as the S.K. 6th Division se-
cures most of the town and the immediate vicinity. The
successful operation does sever two key enemy escape
routes that lead to Manchuria. One of the two trains
transporting the American POWs into the northern-
most areas of North Korea pauses in a tunnel north-
west of Sunchon. During the evening, while the train
is still halted, the Communists massacre the GIs (See
also October 21, 1st Cavalry sector.)
In the X Corps sector, Admiral Struble had decided
on the previous day not to take unnecessary risks by
landing Marines at Wonsan on this day. His decision
was probably influenced by the lack of pressure, due
to the earlier seizure of the town by South Korean
troops and their subsequent advance to positions beyond
the North Korean capital. General MacArthur and Ad-
miral Joy concur with the decision. General Almond
departs the USS Missouri by helicopter and arrives at
Wonsan Airfield, where he assumes command of the X
Corps troops in the area, north and east of the Taebaek
Range. Most of the X Corps is still at sea.
In the 1st Marine Division area, Marines aboard the
ships of the armada are again surprised as the flotilla
makes another seagoing “about face.” The flotilla re-
initiates its northward course and sails back toward
Wonsan. The perplexed Marines and accompanying X
Corps troops don’t realize their short respite was based
on military strategy rather than the cessation of hos-
tilities.
Meanwhile, the assault troops mark time aboard ship
as they prepare for the landing. The troops reach the
pinnacle of grumbling, one of the other things Marines
are best known for besides fighting. The warships cruise
northward, but after 12 hours and without notice, the
vessels again suddenly swirl and retrace the southern
course, giving the landing force another quick dose of
mixed emotions. The armada takes on an aura of mys-
tery, and the Marines, seemingly on a string, dub the
cruise to nowhere Operation YO YO.
The troops suffer from a variety of ailments due to
the crowded conditions and prolonged duration of the
unusual pattern, which automatically reverses course
every twelve hours. Operation YO YO creates much
more than boredom and anxiety. The transports and
LSTs, anticipating a brief cruise, are ill-equipped for
the arduous trek and unexpected complications emerge.
Smallpox breaks out on the Bayfield and everyone
aboard receives urgent vaccinations. Other medical
emergencies such as dysentery and various stomach
troubles take a high toll. The Marine Phoenix, a heav-
ily laden transport, is plagued with illness, despite all
necessary medical precautions. The sick list soars to
750 men during the revolving north-south excursion,
which continues until the 25th.
In the Eighth Army area, the Communists remove most
of the American captives from Pyongyang prior to the ar-
rival of U.N. troops; however, some POWs are saved.
October 20, 1950 470

Troops of the 187th Airborne Regiment board a C-119 at Kimpo airfield on 20 October. One of the para-
troopers carrying full gear gets help from two others to make it inside the aircraft.

Twenty Americans either escape from the enemy or are
rescued when the city falls. Subsequent to the seizure of
Pyongyang, General Milburn orders the I Corps to re-
sume the attack and advance to the MacArthur Line, a
point about 35 miles south of the Yalu River.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the 5th Cavalry de-
ploys in the southern fringes of Pyongyang. The 7th
Cavalry will hold at Chinnamp’o, the city’s port, and
the 8th Cavalry stretches out in the northern suburbs.
Subsequent to the fall of the city, the 7th Cavalry moves
to Chinnamp’o, arriving there after a forced night
march on October 22.
 471
Part of the airborne operation on 20 October, when 113 planes fill the skies over the Sukch’on–Sunchon
region and drop about 2,800 men of the 187th Airborne RCT.
In the 5th Cavalry sector, engineers’ assault boats ar-
rive to carry the 3rd Battalion, 5th Cavalry, across the
Taedong River to the north bank. The attached 3rd
Battalion, 7th Cavalry, also fords the river, and by
noon, the troops are being received by the resounding
clang of church bells rather than enemy artillery. The
Christian churches ring their bells in unison as these
Americans enter Pyongyang.
In other activity, pursuant to orders of October 16,
TF Indianhead, which acquires its name from the patch
of the 2nd Division, secures the bulk of its objectives
in Pyongyang and in the process discovers much intel-
ligence from within the seized buildings and captured
compounds. The documents include both military and
political information. The pertinent items are trans-
ferred to a special detachment from GHQ Far East
Command, which carries them by plane back to Tokyo.
October 20, 1950
In the 8th Cavalry zone, TF Rodgers, commanded
by Lt. Colonel William M. Rodgers and composed of
the 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, and one company of
tanks (70th Tank Bn.), departs Pyongyang to establish
contact with the 187th RCT (Airborne) at Sunchon.
En route, the task force discovers five Americans who
escaped from their captors. TF Rodgers arrives at its
objective on the following morning.
In the 24th Division sector, pursuant to orders from
I Corps, the 24th Division, spearheaded by the 27th
British Commonwealth Brigade, advances toward the
Yalu River with instructions to halt at the MacArthur
Line.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 1st Division drives
into the center of Pyongyang and effortlessly seizes the
Administrative Center, as the defenders exhibit no de-
sire to fight, and in fact, abandon their positions. Soon
October 21, 1950
Top: LSTs unload cargo at Wonsan. Bottom: U.S. Navy frogmen engage in a mine clearing operation at
a landing beach near Wonsan.
after, at 1000, the South Koreans declare the entire city
secure.
In other activity, the S.K. 1st Division, attached to
I Corps, and the 6th and 8th S.K. Divisions (ROK II
Corps) are poised to join the I Corps attack.
October 21 General MacArthur arrives by air at
Pyongyang Airfield to meet with Generals Walker and
472
Stratemeyer. While there, MacArthur reviews Com-
pany F, 5th Cavalry, the first U.S. unit to enter the
North Korean capital. The 5th Cavalry, which arrived
in Korea on July 18, less than 100 days ago, receives a
request from General MacArthur. He asks that all
troops of the Company (nearly 200 men) that initially
landed in Korea step forward. Five cavalrymen advance,
and of these, three are wounded.
 473
In other activity, General Almond attempts to get
one Marine regiment to immediately land at Kojo-dong
to relieve elements of the S.K. 3rd Division, but Admi-
ral Struble (CO, JTF 7) responds in the negative, still
refusing to permit the Marines to pass through the
channel due to the minefields.
Also, General O.P. Smith, USMC, receives a mes-
sage from Admiral Joy informing him that at the close
of hostilities (anticipated to be in the near future), Joy
will recommend that the 1st Marine Division be re-
turned to the U.S., with the exception of one RCT,
which would be deployed in Japan.
In the Eighth Army area, the airborne operation in
North Korea continues. The 1st Battalion, 187th Reg-
iment, commanded by Colonel Arthur H. Wilson,
pushes north and captures the strategic ground north
of Sukch’on, which gives the battalion domination of
the highway there, but there is yet another string of
hills that sit north of the 1st Battalion at Sukch’on, and
it, too, must be reduced. Later in the day, contingents
of the 1st Battalion encounter elements of the 2nd Bat-
talion, 187th Regiment, at Sunchon, linking the two
battalions.
At 0900, the 3rd Battalion, divided into two com-
bat teams, begins to move from its roadblock position.
It drives toward Pyongyang. Company I and Company
K advance south along the railroad and highway re-
spectively. At about 1300, Company I reaches Op’a-
ri, where an enemy contingent estimated at battalion
strength springs an attack. The muscle of 40-mm guns
and 120-mm mortars is thrown at the advancing Amer-
icans, who tenaciously engage the enemy for about two
and one-half hours of nasty combat. However, the
overwhelming numerical strength weighs in heavily.
The enemy overruns two platoons of Company I. The
commander of the besieged unit, having ninety men
unaccounted for, orders a withdrawal toward the west
to grasp more tenable positions at Hill 281.
Meanwhile, PFC Richard G. Wilson (medic, Co. I,
187th Airborne Regiment), attempts to save some
wounded troops by totally disregarding his own safety.
Wilson moves about the casualties while the contin-
gent continues its desperate attempt to extricate itself
from the ambush. Wilson is convinced that he has re-
trieved all the wounded, but as the unit withdraws, he
moves back into the line of fire to save one more sol-
dier who originally was thought to be dead. Wilson
reaches the wounded man, but he lacks a weapon and
comes under heavy fire. When the unit retakes the
ground, Wilson is found next to the body of the other
soldier. Wilson is riddled with bullets and in a posi-
tion that exhibited his intent of shielding the wounded
trooper. PFC Wilson receives the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary valor and courage
in the face of the enemy.
Fortunately for outnumbered Company I, the enemy
chooses to disengage and retire to their entrenched po-
sitions in the heights around Op’a-ri. Meanwhile, the
other U.S. column, Company K, moves south along
the highway and it, too, encounters about one enemy
October 21, 1950
battalion. Slightly north of Yongyu, the two opposing
forces clash, but in this case, the smaller unit, Com-
pany K, fends off the Communists. Following a fierce
firefight, the enemy breaks off the engagement and
moves to positions south of O’pa-ri. Company K re-
sumes its advance along the highway to Yongju and de-
ploys slightly north of it at Hill 163.
Company K, at Hill 163 and Company I, at O’pa-
ri, are separated by about three miles. The airborne
regiment in its entirety is deployed between Pyongyang
and Suk’chon. The enemy is stretched along a chain of
hills that lean from the southeast to the northwest and
are straddled between Pyongyang and the Ch’ongch’on
River. The positions are defended by about 2,500
troops of the N.K. 239th Regiment, the final unit to de-
part Pyongyang. Its mission is to hold the rear against
the advancing I Corps, Eighth Army. Suddenly the sit-
uation is reversed on the North Koreans, who find
themselves in an unenviable position of having their
positions being pounded from the rear.
At about midnight, the enemy launches a northward
attack to penetrate the U.S. lines and flee the trap, but
the endeavor does not end successfully. Initially, the at-
tack penetrates the command post of Company K at
Hill 163. The company commander becomes wounded
twice, but he gives no quarter and lunges directly at a
Communist attacker and seizes his burp gun. Immedi-
ately thereafter, Captain Claude Josey collapses from
his wounds. The company executive officer is also
wounded during the brief confrontation, but ultimately
the North Koreans are either wiped out or driven back.
More attacks are launched. The first one commences
just after midnight (21st-22nd). A Company K contin-
gent again resists tenaciously, but the unit holding the
roadblock at Hill 163 spends its entire complement of
ammunition and is compelled to abandon its positions.
At 0400 the enemy ignites another assault against
Company K. By 0545 the North Koreans smash into
another unit, but this time they stumble into the bat-
talion command post of Company L, a fresh unit. The
enemy is met with smothering fire that inflicts heavy ca-
sualties upon the attackers. Nevertheless, the North
Koreans refuse to relent. They reinitiate the attack and
cause some concern among the airborne contingent. A
quick call is placed, urgently requesting immediate sup-
port, and reinforcements rush to the scene. Company
L continues to withstand the thrust of about 300 attack-
ers while headquarters halts the progress of about 450
charging enemy troops.
A contingent of the advancing I Corps is also close
at hand. The attached British Commonwealth Brigade
remains about two miles away at day’s end.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, 8th
Cavalry zone, TF Rodgers arrives at Sunchon at 0900
and makes contact with the 2nd Battalion, 187th RCT
(Airborne). The linkage is observed by Generals Gay
and Frank A. Allen, both of whom are flying overhead
in an L-5 plane. The aircraft returns to Pyongyang and
General Allen moves back to Sunchon by jeep. He ar-
rives there at about noon and soon after a Korean
October 22, 1950
civilian is brought into the command post of the 2nd
Battalion (Airborne) to give details of a slaughter of
GIs. The Korean tells how the Communists had re-
cently killed American soldiers in a railroad tunnel
about five air-miles northwest of Sunch’on.
General Allen, his aide and two correspondents move
to the site of the massacre, taking the civilian with
them. Along the way, Allen pauses momentarily at the
command post of the S.K. 6th Division and picks up
a South Korean colonel to accompany him on the mis-
sion. At about 1500, the team reaches the tunnel just
beyond Myonguch’am. The S.K. colonel climbs the hill
from the road and walks into the railroad tunnel to ver-
ify the story.
Seven dead GIs lie near the track, but their causes
of death appear to have been either starvation or disease.
The bodies are emaciated and several of the seven
corpses have obviously aged wounds. By now General
Allen and the others in the party also enter the tunnel.
The S.K. colonel moves through the tunnel and
emerges at the other end and then, he spots five more
dead GIs at the top of a ridge. At about the same time,
a seriously wounded GI moves from his hiding place
and is rescued. The soldier, PFC Valdor John, is over-
whelmed by the sight of the friendly troops, and when
he is given General Allen’s coat to make him warm, he
proclaims that he is “too dirty to wear it.”
PFC Valdor John is the sole survivor of his group of
eighteen. The other seventeen American soldiers, each
executed by bullets, lie in a blood-filled gully. One cor-
respondent who is present walks away, sickened by the
sight, only to stroll directly into another group of mas-
sacred Americans. Fifteen more executed GIs lie dead,
each holding an empty rice dish in his hands, apparently
expecting food from the Communists, not death. And
yet another group of 34 massacred GIs are found
nearby, bringing the total of executed American sol-
diers at this site to sixty-six, not including the seven
thought to have died from other causes.
In addition to PFC Valdor John, twenty-two other
Americans are rescued, and of these, two men die dur-
ing the night. The remaining survivors are carefully
transported back to Pyongyang by S.K. troops, and
from there they are airlifted to Japan for treatment. The
bodies of those killed are taken back for burial. These
troops had been the POWs that the airborne had been
dispatched to rescue. Information gathered by the sur-
vivors details the excruciating journey they endured on
the trains that departed Pyongyang on the 17th.
In the 24th Division sector, the British Brigade de-
parts Pyongyang at noon and drives north along the
road toward Sukch’on, where contingents of the air-
borne regiment are deployed. Unknown to the British,
when they halt for the night, they are close to the be-
leaguered airborne troops who are heavily engaged. The
heavy fire can be heard and it appears to be about three
miles farther north. The Commonwealth troops join
the fight at dawn.
— In North Korea: The Communists make a radio
broadcast proclaiming that Sinuiju, situated on the
474
south bank of the Yalu River across from An-tung,
China, is the new capital for Kim Il Sung’s govern-
ment; however, the surging U.N. advance will force
the Communists to relocate in the mountains at Kang-
gye, where the terrain is perfectly suited for guerrilla
tactics. It was in this general area (Kanggye–Manp’o-
jin) where the Koreans had based their operations
against the Japanese occupation during World War II.
In Air Force activity, A C-47 aircraft operating in the
vicinity uses a loudspeaker rather than bullets to con-
vince about 500 enemy troops to surrender.
In other activity, Combat Cargo Command initiates
the use of helicopters to evacuate wounded from Py-
ongyang. Fifth Air Force supports the 187th Airborne
operation to intercept and rescue American POWs. Air
Force helicopters (H-5s of the 3d ARS) evacuated about
35 paratroopers in what becomes the initial mission of
helicopters in support of an airborne operation. In ad-
dition, 7 former POWs are also evacuated.
— In Japan: Continuing to speak with optimism,
General MacArthur reiterates his praise of the previ-
ous day’s airborne operation and notes that the “War is
definitely coming to an end shortly.” However, it is de-
termined that the surprise airdrop is unable to isolate
any large enemy units, nor any high-ranking North
Korean officers. Information gathered from civilians
explains that the chief N.K. officials had departed Py-
ongyang on October 12 and moved toward Manp’ojin
at the Yalu River. Contrasting intelligence indicates that
the N.K. government officials had evacuated the cap-
ital and moved to the mountains at Kanggye, about
twenty air-miles from Manp’ojin.
October 22 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Di-
vision sector, General O.P. Smith, USMC, issues a new
plan to conform with the proposed X Corps bound-
aries. The Marines will deploy in the far southern por-
tion of the corps zone (according to plan). X Corps is
to extend from the Chongsanjangsi–Songjin line. Ma-
rine reconnaissance units come ashore on the 24th or
25th to select assembly areas, but the effort proves to
be of no value, as General MacArthur, on the 25th,
cancels the restrictions and orders the forces to proceed
to the Manchurian and Soviet borders.
Information reaches General Smith that a dispatch
(for the purpose of planning) had been delivered to X
Corps indicating that the Americans would leave an
occupation force in Korea, comprised of about one di-
vision. It also said that the X Corps commander would
become commander of the forces. At this time, it is still
thought that the final destruction of the enemy is close
at hand.
In the Eighth Army area, At Pyongyang, Colonel
Collier (Eighth Army staff ) establishes Advance Eighth
Army Headquarters in the building recently evacuated
by North Korean Premier Kim Il Sung. Kim Il Sung
had departed in hasty fashion, but a large portrait of
Stalin still hangs on the wall.
The 3rd Battalion, 187th RCT (Airborne), contin-
ues to battle the N.K. 239th Regiment while it awaits
 475 October 22, 1950

reinforcements. In conjunction, the 24th Division con-
tinues to close fast. The spearhead unit is the British
Brigade.
In other activity, General Walker now believes that
the U.N. forces have more ammunition than will be
required to complete the destruction of the North Ko-
rean Army and terminate the war. Walker asks Gen-
eral MacArthur to authorize re-routing any additional
ships that are transporting bulk-loaded ammunition en
route to Korea; Walker wants to divert them to Japan.
MacArthur concurs and he initiates action that inter-
cepts six ships transporting 105-mm, 155-mm and Air
Force bombs. The vessels are diverted to either Hawaii
or back to the States.

A primitive road several miles south of Sunchon. Note the one-way sign on the solitary tree.
October 23, 1950
The commanding officer, Japan Logistical Com-
mand, Major General Walter Weible, requests that the
commanding general, San Francisco Port of Embarka-
tion, take action to abort fulfilling all pending requisi-
tions for ammunition (pertaining to ground troops).
The request also asks that all loaded ships remaining
in port be unloaded. The aura of victory is overtaking
all levels of the U.S. Armed Forces in the Far East at
this time, and many of the troops expect to be depart-
ing Korea in the near future.
In the I Corps area, Company C, 6th Medium Tank
Battalion, is designated Task Force Elephant. It departs
Pyongyang and shoots through Sunchon to reach the
railroad at Kujang-dong to intercept any enemy trains
that arrive there. The objective is reached at 2200. From
Sunchon, the task force, trailed by the S.K. 1st Division,
moves west toward Kunu-ri, sometimes referred to as
Kaech’on, in the Ch’ongch’on valley. En route, forty
American GIs who escaped from the death trains are
rescued by the South Koreans. The ROKs immediately
transport them back to Pyongyang.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, The 7th Cavalry ar-
rives at Chinnamp’o, thirty-five miles southwest of Py-
ongyang and is assigned the task to hold the port city.
In the 24th Division sector, the Argyll 1st Battalion
moves out at dawn to relieve the pressure against the 3rd
Battalion, 187 RCT. It moves into Yongju. Then the
Australian 3rd Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel
Charles Green, passes through its lines and initiates the
advance. Company C, commanded by Captain A.P.
Denness, takes the point. Bolstered by the tanks of
Company D, 89th Tank Battalion, the contingent
moves quickly, but slightly north of the town, the col-
umn approaches an apple orchard on both sides of the
highway. The apples trees are permeated with enemy
troops. The North Koreans commence fire from the
orchard, and the Australians spring from their perches
aboard the U.S. tanks and bolt into the orchard to shred
the enemy in a brutal close-quartered battle.
One of the Australians, described as a rather large
man with red hair, dives into an entrenchment and ig-
nites a lightning-quick squabble. When the noise sub-
sides and the battle ends, only the Australian trooper
emerges from the trench, looking much different than
when he entered it. His uniform is splintered and blood
is running from his hands, caused by innumerable cuts.
Eight deceased North Koreans remain in the foxhole.
In the meantime, more enemy fire erupts from an-
other cluster of enemy troops. Colonel Green dis-
patches another company to meet this threat that
emerges from the heights to the right of the highway.
A third company sprints to the ground that lies left of
the highway to bolster Company C. Green then leads
his headquarters contingent directly into the orchard,
and they, too, become heavily engaged.
Meanwhile, the enemy commits mortars to supple-
ment its automatic weapons and rifle units. Undaunted,
the Australians penetrate deeper into the bush, press-
ing their rifles and bayonets into as many of the enemy
as possible. Grenades are also used as the Americans’
476
cousins punch their way through the enemy defenses.
Green’s small headquarters contingent is struck by a
strong force, but it is quickly cut down to size. Thirty-
four North Koreans are killed and the Australians sus-
tain only three wounded. The Australians whack the
enemy and send the survivors into flight.
The close-quartered battle costs the enemy a total
of about 270 troops killed, and the Aussies collect an ad-
ditional 200 prisoners during the morning confronta-
tion. The Australian Battalion sustains about seven
wounded and none killed.
Following the battle in the apple orchard, the Mid-
dlesex Battalion moves through the lines of the Aus-
tralian 3rd Battalion and supported by tanks, it ad-
vances.
At 1100, the Middlesex Battalion establishes a link
with the 187th RCT (Airborne). In conjunction, the
187th Regiment’s 3rd Battalion had scored success
against the enemy at Yongyu. The 3rd Battalion, 187th
RCT, reports that the enemy it faced had sustained 805
killed and 681 others captured. The combined thrust
of the Americans and the Commonwealth Brigade has
nearly wiped out the N.K. 239th Regiment.
Later, during the afternoon, the 3rd Battalion, 187th
RCT, moves back to Sukch’on, trailed by the British
Brigade. Once there, the British Commonwealth
Brigade relieves the 187th RCT (Airborne). The British
then push on toward Sinanju. During the evening,
some 24th Division forward elements arrive in an as-
sembly area north of Pyongyang and assume control of
the British 27th Commonwealth Brigade, the 90th
FABn, and the 89th Tank Battalion.
In the ROK area, enemy guerrilla forces continue to
operate behind Eighth Army lines. On this day, a South
Korean force, composed of more than fifty soldiers and
police, are driven from the Hwach’on Dam, located
north of Wonju in central Korea above the 38th Paral-
lel. The guerrillas unlock the valves and by the follow-
ing day, the Pukhan River rises by several feet. It causes
damage downstream. S.K. troops recapture the dam on
the 25th.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th Division con-
tinues its rapid advance and begins to close against
Kunu-ri, about 45 air miles north of Pyongyang.
October 23 In Naval activity, the USS Mount
McKinley ventures into the inner harbor of Wonsan, a
signal that the minesweeping operation is finally near-
ing its welcome conclusion. Admiral Doyle directs the
fleet to arrive on the 25th. The order terminates the
dubious Operation YO YO, to the relief of the men
aboard the ships. The transport group is to enter first,
trailed by the tractor group.
In the X Corps area, the Advanced Group JTF 7 re-
ports that the channel leading into Wonsan is secure to
Blue-Yellow Beach, but the report also indicates that
the beach area must still be cleared.
In the 1st Marine Division area, two helicopters
(VMO-6), piloted by Captain Wallace Blatt and Lieu-
tenant Chester Ward, arrive at Wonsan from Kimpo.
 477
The bulk of the remainder of the squadron is en route
by LST, but one Echelon unit, commanded by Cap-
tain Victor Armstrong, temporarily remains at Kimpo
to assist in the evacuation of wounded men of the 187th
Airborne Task Force, which is engaged in the vicinity
of Sukch’on. Fifth Air Force has requested the aid of
the Marine helicopters.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker assumes
personal command of the Advance Eighth Army Head-
quarters. He informs General Coulter that IX Corps
will be relieved by the ROK III Corps no later than
November 10, thereby freeing IX Corps to drive into
North Korea.
At Kunu-ri, two GIs who escaped from the Com-
munists straggle into the lines of Task Force Elephant,
but again, many more are not so lucky. Later during
the afternoon, a South Korean sergeant (S.K. 6th Di-
vision) discovers the bodies of twenty-eight additional
American soldiers (POWs) along the railroad tracks
about four miles north of Kujang-dong. Three other
soldiers are found alive.
In the Airborne zone, the 187th RCT departs the
Sukch’on–Sunchon area and returns to Pyongyang, but
it does not use the main road, which is reserved for the
British Brigade and the 24th Division. Since October
20, when the 187th Combat Team began its operation,
it has achieved excellent success. The unit captured
3,818 enemy troops while ravaging the N.K. 239th
Regiment. The operation costs the Airborne Regiment
111 casualties, but of these, sixty-five are jump injuries.
Colonel Bowen, the 187th Regimental Combat
Team commander, will be promoted to brigadier gen-
eral. Colonel George H. Gerhart, the regimental exec-
utive officer, becomes the CO of the 187th Airborne
Regiment. Also, Colonel William J. Boyle, the 2nd Bat-
talion, 187th RCT, commander, will be replaced by
Colonel John P. Connor. Colonel Munson, wounded
during the operation, returns to take command of the
3rd Battalion, 187th, after he recuperates.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, Gen-
eral Gay appoints Colonel Marcel B. Crombez, com-
manding officer, 5th Cavalry Regiment, to the posi-
tion of civil assistance officer for the city of Pyongyang.
Crombez is familiar with Korea and its citizens. Colo-
nel Harold K. Johnson (previously CO, 3rd Battalion,
8th Cavalry) succeeds Colonel Crombez as the CO of
the 5th Cavalry until December 14.
In other activity, during the morning, the S.K. 1st
Division, operating to the rear of the 1st Cavalry Di-
vision, departs Kunu-ri and advances down the
Ch’ongch’on valley, which is much larger than most of
the valleys in Korea. Its width ranges between three
and twenty miles. When the column nears Anju, its
supporting tanks (Company D) capture one enemy T-
34 and knock out two other T-34s and two self-
propelled guns. Once the enemy armor is reduced to
scrap, the force resumes its advance and leaps forward
to reach the wooden bridge at the river several miles
northeast of the town. Just before noon, one platoon of
tanks commandeers the bridge and gains access over
October 23, 1950
the Ch’ongch’on River. Between this day and the 24th,
the S.K. 1st Division crosses the Ch’ongch’on River at
Anju and at several other seized crossing sites.
In the meantime, another contingent of tanks con-
tinues moving farther downstream to Sinanju and dis-
covers it abandoned by the enemy. The bridges there are
out. Without fanfare, repair to the Anju bridges be-
gins. By the following morning, vehicular traffic be-
gins to cross the Ch’ongch’on River.
The Ch’ongch’on and its tributaries, the Kuryong
and Taeryong Rivers, each flowing from the north,
mold the final dominant water barrier in the Eighth
Army field of operations south of the North Korean
border. The Ch’ongch’on River will prescribe the
greater part of Eighth Army’s tactics and troop deploy-
ment strategies in the latter part of October through
November.
In the 24th Division sector, the British Brigade arrives
from Sukch’on at Sianju, several hours after the arrival
of the tanks that are supporting the S.K. 1st Division.
The British contingent also seizes an airstrip about five
miles southeast of the town. Meanwhile, the 24th Di-
vision, pursuant to orders, concludes its twelve-mile
northward advance from the Pyongyang vicinity to
Sunan.
The Division has not arrived in time to rescue Gen-
eral Dean. As reported by Korean civilians, General
Dean had indeed been at Sunan and from there shifted
farther north before the arrival of the Americans. Up to
this time, Dean’s fate had been unknown.
In the ROK Army area, ROK I Corps, on or about this
day, elements of the Chinese XIII Army Group arrive
in the vicinity of Sudong. The 370th Regiment is the
first unit to arrive, followed by the 371st and 372nd
Regiments that come into the area during the next few
days. The Chinese have apparently crossed the Yalu
River near Manp’ojin on about the 14th or 16th.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th and 8th Di-
visions, operating on the U.N. right in conjunction
with the advance of I Corps (on the left), advance
swiftly despite the mountainous terrain. The S.K. 6th
Division whacks its way through the mountains and
has seized two enemy trains near Kunu-ri. Eighth
enemy tanks are aboard one of the trains. The S.K. 6th
Division surges forward, and near Kujang-dong, an-
other bonus is found, fifty boxcars, each crammed with
ammunition. The S.K. 6th Division encounters stiff
resistance outside of Huich’on. Nonetheless, the South
Koreans drive from the south and overwhelm the
enemy force, estimated to be regimental strength. Dur-
ing the night (23rd), they drive into Huich’on and seize
supplies and equipment, including twenty T-34 tanks,
each in need of only slight repairs. From Huich’on, the
division swings west and advances toward Onjong, lo-
cated about ten air-miles northeast of Unsan. Mean-
while, the S.K. 8th Division reaches Tokch’on at mid-
night (23rd-24th) and from there, it pivots north and
grinds toward Kujang-dong at the Ch’ongch’on River.
In Air Force activity, planes attached to Combat
Cargo Command for the fourth consecutive day
October 24, 1950
deliver supplies, ammunition and equipment to the
paratroopers. The Flying Boxcars (C-47s), in the four-
day period, have dropped about 600 tons of supplies in
addition to the 4,000 paratroopers of the 187th Regi-
mental Combat Team.
October 24 Off Wonsan, a conference is held
aboard the USS Missouri to decide when to debark the
Marines. Admirals Struble and Doyle and General Al-
mond conclude that the Marines will debark at Yellow
and Blue Beaches, as originally designed by Marine Di-
vision OpnO 16–50. The landing is scheduled for the
morning of the 26th. It is also decided at the meeting
that the minesweepers, subsequent to securing the inner
harbor at Wonsan, would proceed to Hungnam and
clear the channels there.
Apparently, the task becomes much more difficult
and more dangerous than anticipated. The inner har-
bor area is not fully secured by the minesweepers until
November 4. Wonsan is to be utilized as a supply base.
In conjunction, the Hungnam mine-clearing opera-
tion, required to support X Corps in northeast Korea,
is equally hazardous.
Also, VMF-312, while operating out of Wonsan,
detects a plump enemy column tramping along a road
about 39 miles south of the airfield. The pilots dive
and attack, spewing relentless fire upon the estimated
800-man contingent. The pounding is incessant and
registers hit after hit, while the Communists seek refuge
from the hell-fire, but there is little chance for escape
and no entrenchments to offer shelter. The planes dive
in near-overlapping layers and ravage the enemy
columns with cogent fire that decimates the ranks. The
fire disperses the remnants and speeds their retreat.
In other activity, while the Marines at sea fare badly
aboard the crammed ships, several special guests, in-
cluding “Thanks For The Memories” Bob Hope and the
USO, arrive at Wonsan by air to entertain the troops.
Hope’s entourage beats the Marines to Wonsan, and
much of his humor during the USO show is pointed to
the seafaring Marines.
In other activity, Marine pilots report coming under
fire from positions in Manchuria.
In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army contingents cross
the Ch’ongch’on River, penetrating the sole remaining
primary river standing between Eighth Army and the
Chinese border. It has been about four weeks since the
seizure of Seoul. Subsequent to the breakout at the Pusan
Perimeter, Eighth Army has driven 160 air-miles north
of Seoul, seized the Communist capital at Pyongyang and
played a key role in ravaging the remaining North Korean
fighting units. Eighth Army has undergone a remarkable
transformation since the invasion of Inchon less than six
weeks ago. The combined thrust of Eighth Army and the
ROK forces have catapulted the front lines 300 miles
northward to enter the enemy’s back yard and place them
close to the Yalu River and China.
In other activity, advance contingents of the Nether-
lands Battalion and the British 29th Brigade arrive in
Korea.
478
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, at
Anju, the S.K. 1st Division completes its crossing of
the Ch’onch’on River. The ROKS move northeast to
seize Unsan. Trucks begin to roll across the repaired
bridges at 0900. The tanks of the 6th Medium Tank
Battalion discover a crossing site east of the bridge and
ford the river there.
In the 24th Division sector, The 1st Battalion, British
Middlesex Regiment, boards assault boats and crosses
the Ch’ongch’on River at Sinanju. The primary Py-
ongyang Road crosses the river there and leads west
and northwest to Sinuiju, on the coast at the North
Korean border. The remainder of the Commonwealth
Brigade and its vehicles wait until nightfall to cross over
the bridge at Anju. In conjunction, engineers continue
to repair and prepare the terrible roads for carrying the
bulk of Eighth Army’s logistical support units, a prereq-
uisite if the attack to the Manchurian border is to be sus-
tained.
In the ROK Army area, I Corps sector, the I Corps has
been driving swiftly through the mountains in the east-
ern sector of Korea, and with its capture of Wonsan, X
Corps’s debarkation there is switched from an amphibi-
ous invasion to an administrative landing.
In the ROK II Corps area, the South Korean 6th and
8th Divisions continue to make progress. The S.K. 6th
Division, having pocketed Huich’on on the previous
night, drives toward Ch’osan at the Yalu River, about
sixty air- miles away. This fast-paced drive places the
unit far in advance of all other divisions, including the
Americans. The march heads west, but then the divi-
sion swings north to reach its objective. During the
night, the 7th Regiment moves through Onjong, then
pivots and races north to catch up with its forward bat-
talion. Ch’osan stands at the Yalu about fifty air-miles
away.
— In Japan: In Korea, the advance forces of the
U.N. command are crossing the Ch’ongch’on River.
General MacArthur issues a new order to his com-
manders in Korea, which removes the previous restric-
tions on the northward advance to the Yalu. He directs
all participating units to implement maximum force
and drive to the Yalu River. In reaction, the JCS send
a memorandum to MacArthur, stipulating that his
order is in direct conflict with the initial orders of Sep-
tember 27 concerning the U.N. advance, but the mes-
sage does not countermand MacArthur’s order. It
merely requests an explanation. MacArthur responds
to the JCS on the following day.
October 25 In the X Corps area, Corps issues OI
(Operation Instructions) 13, but a copy of it does not
reach General O.P. Smith until the 27th. The Marines’
area of operations stretches fifty miles wide and runs
300 miles north to south.
In the 1st Marine Division area, finally, after seven
trying days of cruising up and down the Yellow Sea,
the transports move into Wonsan harbor and drop an-
chor to the jubilation of the 1st Marine Division, which
is anxious to set foot on ground. But, the approaches
 479
are not totally secured until the latter part of the after-
noon, which causes many of the Marines to be treated
to yet another day of Navy hospitality (and some sea-
sickness). The main body debarks on the following day.
During the evening, five LSTs arrive at the beach
(Kalma peninsula). Contingents of Combat Service
Group, Engineer and Shore Party, debark. Advance el-
ements have been ashore for about nine days, and they
have used Korean laborers to prepare for the landing.
Tonight, Shore Party Group C, commanded by
Major George A. Smith, takes responsibility for Yellow
Beach. Shore Party Group B, commanded by Major
Henry Brzezinski, takes control of Blue Beach. The
task of debarking X Corps is hefty and many of the
heavy-laden amphibious craft are unable to pass
through the shallow water. The shore parties fabricate
ramps, composed of sand-filled rice bags, which stretch
about thirty feet into the water.
X Corps directs the 1st Marine Division to relieve
the South Korean units at the Chosin and Fusen Reser-
voirs and to deploy one RCT where it can focus on the
Hamhung area, about 50–60 air-miles south of the
reservoirs. In other activity, reconnaissance units, which
had cleared the channel during the past several days,
have selected various assembly areas for the Marine reg-
iments. One of the locations is the Saint Benedict
Abbey, near Wonsan, which had been selected for the
7th Marines to give the unit a good jump-off spot for
its drive north.
In the Eighth Army area, toward the latter part of
October, the Far East Command has altered the ratio
of South Korean troops assigned to U.S. divisions. The
previous figure of 100 men per company is lowered to
twenty-five per company. The new procedure releases
several thousand South Korean troops for reassignment
to the South Korean Army.
In other activity, Army is informed of the capture of
a Chinese soldier and the probability that tens of thou-
sands of Chinese soldiers are now positioned to block
the northward advance.
In the I Corps area, at 1600, Corps circulates its or-
ders calling for the advance to the Yalu River. The at-
tached S.K. 1st Division is to continue the mission of
destroying the remaining North Korean troops in the
sector. However, the Chinese have already crossed the
Yalu and as the order is being published, they are already
on the attack against U.N. forces.
In other activity, S.K. General Paik, the 1st Division
commander, is informed about the intervention of the
Chinese while he is attending a celebration in Py-
ongyang. He rushes back to his command post at Yong-
byon, and soon after, he moves forward to inspect the
enemy dead. His conclusions make it irrefutable that
the force is Chinese, and he so informs General Milburn,
I Corps Commander. Paik had previously served with
the Japanese Manchurian Army during World War II,
where he became knowledgeable of the Chinese.
In the 24th Division sector, the British 27th Com-
monwealth Brigade maintains its advance throughout
the day. Later, during the evening, the unit crosses the
October 25, 1950
Taeryong River, at Pakch’on. Once on the west bank of
the river, the British progress is slowed by opposition.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 9th Division, com-
posed of the 28th, 29th and 30th Regiments, each con-
taining two battalions, is established today. By the end
of the month, additional forces will be attached to be-
come the 3rd Battalions of the respective regiments of
the newly activated 9th Division.
The S.K. 1st Division continues its advance. It has
units spread out on the road that runs between the
Ch’ongch’on River and Unsan. The 15th Regiment,
spearheaded by tanks of Company D, 6th Medium
Tank Battalion, advances without incident to Unsan,
about fifteen air-miles north. The forward contingent
of the column passes through the town and continues
the advance. The column gains about one and one-half
additional miles and is about to cross a bridge when
suddenly it is struck by a storm of enemy mortar fire.
The South Korean troops spread out and engage the
enemy, estimated to be about 300 Chinese. After a
short while, the South Koreans capture one Chinese
soldier, the first Chinese troop to be seized. The soldier
informs his captors that 10,000 Chinese are dispersed
in the hills north and northwest of Unsan, and he also
states that another 10,000 Chinese Communists are
deployed east of the town. Apparently, Chinese 39th
Army units are on the move against Unsan. The South
Koreans continue to battle the Chinese throughout the
afternoon.
The TACP controller has been under constant fire
and unable to establish communications with the Mos-
quito plane in the area, but eventually the hook-up is
made. Shortly thereafter, news of the arrival of large
numbers of Chinese troops is sped to Eighth Army.
The captive is taken to Pyongyang and interrogated
there on the following day.
In the meantime, the S.K. 12th Regiment, the sec-
ond unit in the advancing column, reaches Unsan, but
it swings west. It also encounters Chinese troops soon
after it exits the town. Fighting erupts at the enemy
roadblock. The trailing 11th Regiment halts short of the
town and establishes a night perimeter. The battle
north of Unsan continues tenaciously throughout the
day and into the night.
In the ROK I Corps area, The S.K. 3rd Division and
the Capital Division advance north, the former toward
Changjin Reservoir and the latter along the coastal
road. Elements of the S.K. 3rd Division reach two hy-
droelectric plants of the Changjin Reservoir, the mid-
way point from the reservoir. After dark a prisoner is
taken who states that he is from the 5th Regiment, Chi-
nese 8th Army. Also, south of the Changjin Reservoir,
elements of the Chinese 124th Division, 42nd Army,
engage contingents of the S.K. 26th Regiment. It is the
42nd Army that will soon engage the 1st Marine Di-
vision in the vicinity of Sudong. This entire day has
been exceptionally cold, and during the early morning
hours of the following day, the troops will witness the
first snowfall of the season.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th Division
October 25, 1950
maintains its quick advance during the morning, but it
pauses at Kojang about eight air- miles from Ch’osan.
The ROKs prepare to attack Ch’osan on the following
day. Also, the 3rd Battalion, 2nd Regiment, S.K. 6th
Division, composed of about 750 troops, departs On-
jong and drives northwest toward Pukchin. A KMAG
advisor, Lieutenant Glen C. Jones, is with the battal-
ion. It advances about eight miles and encounters
enemy fire. The South Koreans are about to find out
first-hand that the Chinese have entered the war.
South Korean troops jump from the vehicles to elim-
inate the obstacle, thought to be remnant North Korean
troops, but the foe is the Chinese 40th Army and the
An ROK minesweeper hits a mine off Wonsan.
480
ROKs have entered a deadly trap. The Communist
Chinese nearly wipe out the battalion. Only about 400
ROKs evade death or capture and are able to make it
back to Onjong. Stragglers move back into the town
during the afternoon. Lieutenant Glen Jones is cap-
tured and dies in a Communist prison camp.
When troops at Onjong hear about the encounter
with the Chinese, the 2nd Battalion, 2nd Regiment, S.K.
6th Division, speeds to support the 3rd Battalion. En
route, it detects enemy movement in the heights to the
north. Patrols are immediately dispatched, and during the
mission, the troops capture another Chinese soldier. The
Communist captive bears even more bad news. He in-
 481
forms the South Koreans that the Chinese have been im-
planted in the hills around Pukchin since October 17,
waiting for the U.N. forces. Soon after, as elements of the
battalion advance farther along the road, another Chinese
soldier (seriously wounded) is captured.
The Chinese stake out the approaching 2nd Battal-
ion and isolate it, but the South Koreans extricate
themselves from the trap and make it back to rejoin
the 1st Battalion and regimental headquarters in On-
jong. In the meantime, the S.K. 8th Division arrives
at Kujang-dong during the night (25th-26th). On the
following day, it swings north and marches up the
Ch’ongch’on Valley to hook up with the S.K. 6th Di-
vision at Huich’on.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Force, which initi-
ated the use of B-29s against enemy targets the previ-
ous June, on this day suspends combat flights for its
B-29s. The bombers have run out of lucrative targets.
In other activity, restrictions on close-air support mis-
sions near the Yalu River are removed. This action frees
pilots and permits the fighters to increase their fields of
attack as far north as the border with China. Also,
Combat Cargo Command on this day delivers 1,767
tons of equipment to various locations within Korea to
set a new record for deliveries on a single day.
— In the United States: The Department of the
Army informs General MacArthur that the scheduled
transfer (October and November) of enlisted reserve
corps troops from the States to the Far East is to be
canceled, but the dispatch of 17,000 NCOs will pro-
ceed as scheduled.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, responding to the
message from the JCS on the previous day, informs the
JCS that the new directive ordering the advance to the
northernmost border of Korea is of “military necessity.”
MacArthur also explains that the South Koreans are in-
capable of carrying the mission by themselves, and he
believes he has enough leeway in the present directives
to issue the order extending the area of advance. Gen-
eral MacArthur also informs the JCS that the entire
matter of the advance to the Yalu had been covered at
the Wake Island Conference.
Fifth Air Force is authorized to fly certain missions
up to the Yalu River to afford ground troops close sup-
port, but the planes are forbidden to bomb any targets
within five miles of the border. Nonetheless, missions
that encroach the Manchurian border continue to come
under close scrutiny and must be overseen by a tacti-
cal air control party or a Mosquito observer.
October 26 In the X Corps area, at the first
glimpse of daylight, the transports off Wonsan are es-
pecially animated as the Marines clog the decks and
begin their long-awaited descent to the landing craft.
Thirty-nine waves are set to hit the beaches in an ad-
ministrative landing on what has finally become D-
Day, dubbed “Doyle Day” by General Almond. At
0730, tanks (1st Tank BN., USMC), adapted with
deep water apparatus, burst from the bellies of LSUs,
crash through the waves and come to rest on the beach.
October 26, 1950
At about the same time, the 1st Amphibian Tractor
Battalion moves onto the beachhead to deliver men and
supplies. The seemingly unending line of landing craft
continues to pour men and equipment onto the
beaches. At 0900, the 1st and 3rd Battalions, 1st
Marines, sprint from LSTs and land on Yellow Beach,
while headquarters (1st Marines), aboard the USS
Noble, arrives on other landing craft. Colonel Puller’s
2nd Battalion (Reserve), 1st Marines, remains aboard
ship until the 28th. The rifle units of the 1st Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, depart at 1200 by train for Kojo, a lit-
tle seaport town about forty miles down the coast. It re-
mains unscathed by the hostilities.
Another train, carrying reinforcements and supplies,
will depart for Kojo on the following day. Upon arrival
at Kojo, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, begin to replace
the South Korean troops and take responsibility for the
supply depot. Unknown to Lt. Colonel Hawkins, the
supplies have dwindled as the South Koreans have ex-
pended nearly everything in the depot. By 1700, the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines, establishes its night positions
near Wonsan.
In other activity, Colonel Puller is informed by Gen-
eral O.P. Smith that he has been selected for promo-
tion to brigadier general.
While the 1st Marines are landing, advance contin-
gents of the 5th Marines (Reserve) begin landing at
0800 on Yellow and Blue Beaches; however, the major-
ity of the regiment (minus 2nd Battalion and some re-
connaissance units) comes ashore on the following day.
The 7th Marines lands on Blue Beach and then ad-
vances north of Wonsan to assemble around Saint
Benedict’s Abbey, which was recently ravaged by the
Communists during their retreat. Colonel Litzenberg
establishes his command post there at 1300.
Also, the 2nd Battalion, 11th Marines, and some re-
connaissance units of the regiment land on this day, but
the majority of the artillery regiment debarks on the
27th. The remainder of the 11th Marines comes ashore
on the following day. Later, during the night, two
Marines are instantly killed when they attempt to pick
up booby-trapped firewood on the beach. These are
the only Marine casualties to occur on D-Day.
According to its schedule, Combat Service Group
establishes its Class I, III, and V Depots, but other sup-
plies (Class II and IV) arrive on the beach. This causes
an enormous mix-up, which hinders the operation.
About 1,500 to 2,000 Korean laborers are hired daily
to untangle the supplies and issue them to the various
units.
In the ROK area, the S.K. Capital Division, holding
positions north of Hungnam, continues to drive north-
ward utilizing three regimental combats teams, includ-
ing a motorized cavalry regiment dubbed “The Flying
Regiment” by General Almond. This cavalry unit
speeds toward the border, supported by a tactical air
control team of the 7th Division and by an LST that
supplies it from sea. The cavalry drives northeast toward
Songjin. Also, the 1st Regiment, Capital Division, ad-
vances toward P’ungsan.
October 26, 1950
An LVT, followed by an LCT, moves to the beach at Wonsan on 26 October. A C-54 in the right back-
ground is making its landing approach.
In the Eighth Army area, Army intelligence officers in-
terrogate a recently captured Chinese prisoner at Py-
ongyang. He speaks no Korean, nor Japanese.
Throughout the day, more information concerning the
Chinese intervention pours into headquarters. It is con-
cluded that the Chinese troops have been dispatched to
assist the North Koreans to defend the border ap-
proaches. Intelligence also determines that “there is no
indication of open intervention on the part of Chinese
Communist forces in Korea.”
Nevertheless, North of Unsan, the S.K. 1st Division
remains entangled with Chinese forces and their pres-
ence is further confirmed when thirty dead Chinese
troops are discovered. The S.K. 12th Regiment repels
the Chinese west of Unsan and surrenders no ground.
The 11th Regiment advances to bolster the 12th Reg-
iment, but the Chinese envelop the rear and the S.K.
11th Regiment withdraws to eliminate the enemy unit
that is cutting the main supply road south of Unsan.
Unfortunately, the 11th Regiment fails to reduce the
enemy force. Instead, it is shoved north to the fringes
of Unsan.
Meanwhile, during the morning, the S.K. 15th Reg-
iment is also forced to give some ground. It pulls back
to more tenable positions. Lt. Colonel John S. Grow-
482
den, 6th Medium Tank Battalion, commanding officer,
moves to prevent his armor from becoming jeopard-
ized. Growdon orders Company D’s tanks to retire and
redeploy in the heights southeast of the town.
Also, the U.S. 10th Antiaircraft Artillery Group re-
ceives information concerning the new threat; it pre-
pares for a possible withdrawal. At present, the U.S.
17th FABn, 10th AAG, and two companies of the 6th
Medium Tank Battalion are supporting the S.K. 1st Di-
vision. According to S.K. intelligence, about one Chi-
nese division is in action against the S.K. 1st Division.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 6th Division re-
mains in position at Kojang, but it dispatches a recon-
naissance patrol into Ch’osan. The reconnaissance unit,
accompanied by Major Harry Fleming (KMAG advi-
sor, S.K. 7th Regiment), advances into the town and ob-
serves enemy troops reaching the sanctuary of
Manchuria by streaming across a small footbridge that
spans the Yalu. The patrol establishes some machine
gun positions to intercept the enemy column, but al-
ters the line of fire to prevent the guns from firing into
China.
In the meantime, the town is combed for enemy
remnants before the patrol returns to Kojang. A small
contingent is left behind to protect the artillery and
 483
hold the town until the following day, when the S.K. 7th
Regiment is expected to arrive. A strange precedent is
set by the reconnaissance patrol. On the 24th, General
MacArthur authorized all U.N. units to drive to the
Yalu. This patrol is the first unit to reach the river and
it is also the final Eighth Army unit to advance to the
Yalu.
In other activity, the S.K. 8th Division advances up
the Ch’ongch’on valley en route to Huich’on to join
the S.K. 6th Division. Also, at 0300 the Communists
strike the South Korean positions at Onjong. The
South Koreans attempt to flee, but officers halt the
troops at the southeastern fringes of the town and re-
store order. Three KMAG advisors are with the regi-
ment when the attack commences. The Communists
pierce the lines at 0600, and the South Korean 2nd
Regiment begins to abandon its lines and retreat. The
regiment becomes disorganized.
The survivors move about three miles east and en-
counter a Chinese roadblock. Rather than fight their
way through it, the South Koreans flee into the hills.
Two American advisors escape, but a third, Captain
Paul V. Liles, is captured by the Communists. About
2,700 troops of the regiment make it back to
Ch’ongch’on, out of an initial force of 3,100 troops.
In other activity, the 10th Regiment, S.K. 6th Divi-
sion (less one Battalion), and the 19th Regiment, S.K. 8th
Division, are at Huich’on when the Chinese encounter
the S.K. 2nd Regiment. The ROK II Corps’ command-
ing officer, Major General Yu Jae Hung, orders the 1st
Battalion, 10th Regiment, to remain in Huich’on while
the other troops attack to reclaim the abandoned vehi-
cles and weapons of the 2nd Regiment. The force moves
west and reaches the general area on the 28th.
In other activity, the S.K. 7th Regiment, 6th Divi-
sion, is deployed around Kojang. It prepares an attack
for the following morning to occupy Ch’osan, but it is
informed of the devastation of the 2nd Regiment by
the Chinese and ordered to withdraw to rejoin the di-
vision. The order cannot be executed. Major Fleming
(KMAG advisor) responds to the orders by informing
ROK 6th Division that the regiment lacks ammuni-
tion, gasoline and food. Fleming requests an airdrop,
but it does not arrive until 1100 on the 28th. By this
time, the Chinese 38th Army has bolstered the Chi-
nese 40th Army against the S.K. 6th and 8th Divisions
at Onjong and Huich’on. The enemy then drives the
ROK II Corps back to Kunu-ri.
October 27 In the X Corps area, the 1st Marine
Division closes its command post on the USS Mount
McKinley at 1000, and reopens it in a crusty Russian
barracks about one mile north of Wonsan. General O.P.
Smith receives his operational instructions (issued on
25th). The Marines are to secure the Wonsan beaches,
relieve the South Koreans in the area and proceed north
to the border with Manchuria. The instructions also
direct the Marines to guard the Wonsan–Kojo–Majon-
ni area, while dispatching patrols on all roads that head
west in the zone of operations.
October 27, 1950
In addition, the Marines receive two orders; com-
mit one engineering company to assist the South Ko-
reans with repairs along the Yonghung–Hamhung rail-
road, and prepare a battalion landing team for
debarkation at Chongjin, upon orders.
In other activity, the remainder of Colonel James
Brower’s 11th Marines (Artillery) debarks at Wonsan.
The 2nd Battalion, which had debarked on the previ-
ous day, is assigned to the 1st Marines at 1715. The 1st
and 3rd Battalions, 11th Marines, remain in assembly
and await orders. The ongoing operation to unload
supplies continues under difficult circumstances. Many
of the landing craft, laden with heavy cargo, are un-
able to move into the beaches, compelling shore party
personnel to fabricate piers that stretch about thirty
feet from shore. Some other vessels get hung up on a
nuisance sandbar and must be towed.
At Kojo, the South Korean troops, having been re-
lieved on the previous day by elements of the 1st Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, head north. Today, a second train
departs Wonsan at 1330 to deliver reinforcements and
supplies for the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, at Kojo. The
train arrives late in the afternoon following an unevent-
ful trip. In addition, a convoy composed of vehicles
from the 1st Battalion, the Motor Transport Battalion
and Battery F, 2nd Battalion, 11th Marines, arrives
from Wonsan. The convoy is further bolstered by the
1st Platoon, Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion, and
a contingent of Company D, 1st Medical Battalion.
The area around Kojo remains tranquil throughout
the day, but only on the surface. The South Koreans
confer with Lt. Colonel Jack Hawkins concerning the
perimeter that extends along a coastal plain for a dis-
tance of about 5,000 yards (diameter) and encompasses
the terrain from the bay to a cluster of slight hills.
Marines assume responsibility for the perimeter.
The Marines have been informed by the South Ko-
reans that the enemy has confined its activity to spo-
radic raids to commandeer rice. Nevertheless, the 1st
Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Hawkins, takes
extra precautions to secure the perimeter, including the
vulnerable supply depot at the rail station, which is
poorly positioned just south of Kojo on dangerously
low ground. The depot is susceptible to attack from
every point.
The bulk of the regiment deploys west of Kojo.
However, Company B, commanded by Captain Wes-
ley Noren, deploys south and southwest of Kojo atop
several lumps of high ground amid the rice paddies.
Extending east to west, the 1st Platoon holds the east
slope of Hill 109, the 3rd Platoon takes positions in
high ground south and west of the 1st Platoon, and the
2nd Platoon deploys on Hill 185. Company C holds
positions about one and one-half mile north of Com-
pany B. The 2nd, 3rd and 1st Platoons, respectively,
spread out from west to east. About 250 yards east of
Company C, two platoons of Company A hold the
ground. Its 3rd Platoon spreads out on the crest of Hill
117.
Colonel Hawkins establishes his command post
October 27, 1950
north of Company A’s positions. The mortar platoon
(4.2" mortars), commanded by Lieutenant Kaufer,
shares the slope with Hawkins’ command post. While
the Marines are establishing their positions, the valley
southwest of Kojo becomes flooded with refugees who
are attempting to reach the port. Darkness arrives and
prevents the Marines from inspecting the refugees to
weed out enemy infiltrators, but Colonel Hawkins fun-
nels them toward the peninsula northeast of Kojo to
keep them isolated until morning.
However, it becomes apparent that some Commu-
nist troops have infiltrated the march to the sea. At
about 1600, hostile fire strikes a detachment of Marines
as they lay wire near Hill 185, and at about 1800, near
Hill 109, enemy fire strikes a small detachment of
Marines while they attempt to repair a stalled vehicle.
The vehicles are abandoned.
At about 1900, another detachment comes under
fire, but it retrieves the stranded vehicles. Aside from the
minor skirmishes, the day passes without any obvious
signs of organized resistance, but once darkness arrives,
signs of the enemy emerge. The Marines also become
acquainted with Korean cold weather. The heat of sum-
mer has faded and the first frost appears. The foxholes
spaced around the perimeter of Company B each con-
tain two men. One man attempts to get warm and rest
while the other keeps vigil with his rifle.
Suddenly, the calm is shattered when the enemy
launches simultaneous attacks against opposite ends of
Company B’s positions. Soon an equally devastating
thrust is thrown against Company C.
These well-organized assaults are sprung from
grenade-throwing distance in lightning-quick fashion.
During the engagement, the enemy attempts to be cun-
ning by using English. The soldiers bellow: “Come this
way.... Don’t shoot! We’re friends.” Shouts of warning
fly from the foxholes, nearly in cadence with the ex-
plosion of the hostile projectiles. The tranquility is gone
and the frost is forgotten as the Marines defend their po-
sitions. The 1st Platoon, Company B, holding the east-
ern slope of Hill 109, is struck quickly and the position
is overrun. Seven Marines are slain before they get out
of their sleeping bags.
At about the same time, the command post and the
3rd Platoon come under severe attack at several loca-
tions. In response, Marines launch mortars, including
60-mm and 81s, which closely pass over the defenders’
heads to rivet the paths of the attackers. The mortars seal
the entranceway and hold the line for the 3rd Platoon,
but the pressure against the 1st Platoon continues to
build. Once the tenacious skirmish winds down it be-
comes clear that the 3rd Platoon and the command
post has held.
Later, the enemy mounts another fierce attack to dis-
lodge Company B. Meanwhile, back on Hill 109, the
enemy utilizes blaring whistles and brilliant flares as it
methodically pounds the 1st platoon’s positions. About
160 Communists attack and isolate an outpost position
and overwhelm a squad deployed on the right flank.
All the while, the slugfest in the perimeter of Com-
484
pany C continues. The enemy, having gained positions
about ten feet from the perimeter, lunges against the
Marines’ positions. The contingent pierces the lines,
gains ground and isolates about twenty Marines. How-
ever, they persist, and eventually their actions through-
out the night reunite them with their unit.
Although Company C is pushed back, it is only
temporary. The troops soon recover the momentum
and regain the advantage. And afterwards, for the
remainder of the night, they repel every enemy attack.
Although the horrendous night-long combat does iso-
late Companies B and C from the remainder of the bat-
talion, the mortars incessantly pound the approaches
and contribute greatly to keep the situation stabilized.
Undaunted, the Communists continue to press the at-
tacks.
At 2215, beleaguered Company B is the recipient of
a repeat performance. The Reds again pound against the
positions of the 3rd Platoon, led by Sergeant Matthew
Monk, on the heights to the south and west of the ten-
uous positions of the 1st Platoon. The 3rd Platoon,
bolstered by mortars and machine gun fire, slashes the
attackers and thwarts the assault. However, the enemy,
despite incurring severe casualties, presses relentlessly.
Meanwhile, the 1st Platoon (Company B) is shoved
from its positions on the eastern slopes of Hill 109.
When the unit withdraws, thirty troops are missing.
Sergeant Clayton Roberts makes the extrication possi-
ble by singlehandedly holding the ground and covering
the evacuation with a light machine gun. The 1st Pla-
toon evades annihilation, but Clayton is encircled and
slain. And the donnybrook continues within the posi-
tions of the 3rd Platoon, which is struck by another
multi-pronged assault. Its left rear and front are simul-
taneously stung heavily.
Finally, at 2350, when it becomes inevitable that the
positions are untenable, Captain Noren, CO, Com-
pany B, requests permission from battalion to pull
back. Without hesitation, permission is granted. The
three platoons are ordered to converge at a point where
the railroad tracks meet the dike. At about midnight,
while Companies B and C are exchanging heavy blows
with the Reds, artillery (Fox Battery) arrives in the
vicinity of Kojo and establishes positions northeast of
the town on the beach by about 0200. The three belea-
guered platoons, each exhibiting heavy discipline, ma-
neuver to the point of convergence.
By 0215, the 2nd Platoon, having fought its way
from Hill 185, is the last to arrive at the dike. Here the
three Company B platoons regroup. Captain Noren,
lacking an operative radio, instinctively forms a defen-
sive circle that covers both sides of the railroad tracks
at a point just south of Chonchon to thwart an antic-
ipated attack.
Noren’s instincts prove true, but in the meantime, the
artillery of Fox Battery prepares for fire. Noren’s men
combine spare parts and reactivate a radio, extending
their chances of survival. The Reds strike from the east
and from the west; however, Company B returns
heated fire and firmly holds the line. By about 0300,
 485
radio contact is established between Noren and the
mortar units, which provides the mortarmen man-
made night vision. Under the guidance of Captain
Noren, an avalanche of 61-mm fire disperses the enemy
attack. Simultaneously, they deliver sheets of 81-mm
mortar fire into Chonchon-ni.
By 0330, the Communists disengage and retire
northward toward Kojo. One Marine is killed and six
are wounded in the engagement. By about 0400, Fox
Battery artillery registers, but its guns remain still. The
battlefield known as Company B’s area has become
silent, and it remains quiet until dawn.
In the 7th Division sector, like the 1st Marine Divi-
sion, the 7th Division has been stuck aboard ship and
floating off Pusan for ten days. On this day, it receives
orders and departs for Iwon, about 150 miles north of
Wonsan. The initial plan of attack called for X Corps
to drive west from Wonsan, but the situation has dras-
tically changed and the attack will advance north toward
the N.K. border at the Yalu River.
The 17th RCT, commanded by Colonel Herbert B.
Powell, is scheduled to spearhead the landing at Iwon,
and this causes logistics problems. The 17th RCT,
which could encounter resistance at the new objective,
unloads its equipment from the transports and reloads
it on LSTs to enable it to overcome opposition on the
beach. Seven LSTs, transporting the 17th RCT, leave
Pusan, but in the meantime, South Korean troops
pressing north by land have already secured the town.
They continue the advance.
In the Eighth Army, 1st Cavalry sector, the attached
S.K. 1st Division receives assistance. C-119s arrive
from Ashiya Airbase, Japan, and deliver tanks of the
6th Medium Tank Bn. and fresh ammunition for the
howitzers of the U.S. support units. The S.K. 12th and
15th Regiments launch an assault and make some
progress north and west of Unsan, while the 11th Reg-
iment fights to secure the ground south of the town.
The 11th Regiment secures the highway, then during
the afternoon, it reports that the Chinese have with-
drawn heading northwest.
In the 24th Division sector, the British launch an at-
tack from their positions at the Taeryong River. The
1st Battalion, Middlesex Regiment, bolstered by ar-
tillery, gains about three miles, but then it encounters
fierce opposition. Artillery and air strikes are ordered to
support the advance and the added muscle nets ten T-
34s and two self-propelled guns destroyed. The tena-
cious enemy resistance convinces the British Brigade
commander, Brigadier General Coad, that daylight ad-
vances will cease and that intense combat is imminent.
Coad reverts to a different type formation, better suited
to meet heavy opposition.
In the ROK I Corps area, The S.K. 3rd Division con-
tinues to drive toward the Changjin Reservoir, but the
resistance is becoming increasingly rigid.
In Air Force activity, planes (B-26s) attached to the
452nd Bomber Group are launched on their initial
combat mission in Korea. The unit had been recently
activated in the States.
October 28, 1950
October 28 On this day, the North Koreans
again move General William Dean. He is taken in se-
crecy to Manchuria and kept from being seen by any-
one, even the Chinese. In a memoir written later, Gen-
eral Dean recalls that the numerous flies in Manchuria
are not bothered by the cold; “They just move indoors.”
He notes that during his captivity near Pyongyang he
killed thousands of flies in one day.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, Divi-
sion orders direct RCT-5 (minus 2nd Bn.), under the
temporary control of RCT-1, to bear responsibility for
Munchon and Yonghung, and Company A, 1st Tank
Battalion (attached to 5th Marines), receives responsi-
bility for the three primary roads that converge on the
MSR from the west.
In the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines sector, the early
morning hours remain hectic, but the bulk of enemy ac-
tivity has subsided. At 0418, the 1st Battalion gets word
by radio to the 7th Marines concerning the situation at
Kojo, but communication remains poor. The 7th
Marines, in turn, informs 1st Marines, which finally
gets information to the 1st Marine Division. Compa-
nies B and C, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, each are
greeted at dawn with a silent perimeter, but the Com-
munists launch an assault against Hill 117, defended
by Company A. One platoon, led by Lieutenant John
Sword, repulses the assault.
Meanwhile, Company B reinitiates its withdrawal
from Hill 109, slowed somewhat by the evacuation of
its wounded. Marines attached to Company A help
carry the wounded through the deep and muddy rice
paddies coated by a slim layer of ice. The operation en-
sues without incident, but suddenly, a contingent of
enemy troops emerges from Kojo and heads west. The
Marines do not pause to determine whether the Reds
are moving to attack or trying to escape. Rather, the
artillery, joined by the weaponry of Companies A and
B, commence firing and kill about 75 of the estimated
200 Communists. The survivors scatter into the heights
west of the town, hotly pursued by a contingent of C
Company. Planes of VMF(N)-513 arrive at about 1035
to further terrorize the retreating enemy. Despite con-
tinuing poor communications between the aircraft and
the forward air controller, the planes swoop in low and
deliver a powerful dose of fire.
At 1238, a report received at division headquarters
describes the ordeal of the 1st Battalion: “Received de-
termined attack from south north and west from sun-
set to sunrise by large enemy force. Estimated from
1,000 to 1,200 ... civilian reports indicate possibly
3,000 enemy this immediate area. Have suffered 9 kia,
39 wia, 34 mia, probably dead. Two positions overrun
during night. If this position is to be held, a regiment
is required ... request immediate instructions. Send all
available helicopters for wounded.”
Instantly, a decision is made to hold Kojo. Orders
are drawn to dispatch Colonel Puller’s 1st Marines and
a reinforcing battalion. And to bolster the one offshore
destroyer, a second destroyer is requested to be sent to
Kojo. In addition to one hospital ship for casualties, an
October 28, 1950
LST is also requested to transport the tanks, which had
been unable to make the land trip due to poor roads and
bridges. The LST 883 embarks with the tanks, but the
vessel gets snagged by a sandbar and is unable to reach
the area until the following day. Helicopters are also
dispatched to Kojo to evacuate wounded.
During the day, things brighten somewhat when sev-
enteen Marines, listed as missing, make it to their lines
safely. Several more are rescued later. By the 29th, ac-
curate casualty figures become known.
The 1st Battalion continues to assess the situation,
and all intelligence points to a heavy attack, expected
to be launched after dark. Fresh reports arrive at divi-
sion at 1415 and 1840, each delivering urgent informa-
tion. The first dispatch mentions the possibility of
7,000 enemy troops of the N.K. 5th Division being
near Tongchon. The second report, which arrives over
the radio, indicates more dire news. It exclaims that the
enemy is on all sides, except the sea, and that no rein-
forcements have arrived. Nevertheless, the 1st Marines
hold the perimeter.
At 2230, reinforcements arrive on the first train to
enter the area. But since 1000, there has been no ac-
tion. A second train with reinforcements arrives within
several hours. With the arrival of Colonel Sutter’s 2nd
Battalion, 1st Marines, and its supporting units, the 1st
Battalion rests easier. The 2nd Battalion reinforcements
establish night positions at Hill 117 and bunk with the
1st Battalion. Puller informs Division that the situation
is well, and that no further artillery should be required.
Meanwhile, the Navy keeps the pressure on Kojo,
initially with one destroyer, the USS Hank, and then
with two when the USS English arrives and begins to
plaster the town. Both vessels remain offshore through-
out the night. The USS Wantuck, transporting medical
personnel, rushes to the area, and VMO-6 dispatches
six helicopters to the 1st Battalion positions. To keep the
lid on the enemy, Marine Corps’ planes pummel Tong-
chon throughout the day, reducing it to ashes.
In other activity, at 0800, division issues OpnO
18–50, which designates the tasks of the regiments.
The 1st Marine Division is delegated to cover 15,000
square miles. It is imperative to deploy troops at
Majon-ni, situated along the Imjin River and at a key
road junction that spins east to Wonsan, west to Py-
ongyang and south to Seoul. The 1st Marines is to re-
lieve the South Korean troops in the vicinity of Won-
san–Kojo–Majon-ni, establish blocking positions and
dispatch patrols. The situation at Kojo creates some
problems at Wonsan; the 2nd Battalion is required to
move out of Wonsan to support the 1st Battalion.
Since the departure of the 3rd Battalion to Majon-
ni to relieve South Korean troops there, no other 1st
Marine units are available to patrol the roads or estab-
lish blocking positions at Anbyon. To remedy the sit-
uation, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, and the 5th
Korean Marine Battalion are attached to the 1st Marines
and assigned the responsibility for patrol and blocking
positions. The 1st Marines also receive additional mus-
cle with the availability of the 1st Amphibious Tractor
486
Battalion, Company B, 1st Armored Amphibian Trac-
tor Battalion, and the 1st Shore Party Battalion. Each
of these units can be utilized to protect the airfield and
Wonsan harbor area.
The 1st Marines is to prepare to activate a battalion
landing team for Chongjin. The 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines (reinforced), commanded by Lt. Colonel
Thomas Ridge, arrives at Majon-ni at 1600 to relieve
elements of the 26th S.K. Regiment. The ROKs are
transported to Wonsan in the vehicles that had brought
the 3rd Battalion.
The 3rd Battalion’s mission is to establish defensive
positions, keep the 28-mile highway to Wonsan open,
dispatch patrols and prevent the enemy from using the
roads there. The battalion is composed of the three rifle
companies, headquarters and service (H&S) company
and weapons companies, but it is bolstered by Battery
D, 2nd Battalion, 11th Marines, 3rd Platoon, Com-
pany C, 1st Engineer Battalion, contingents of AN-
GLICO, 1st Signal Battalion, Company D, 1st Med-
ical Battalion and H&S Company, 1st Marines.
Although there are extra troops, the area is rough
and the dominating ground is far from the town. Ridge
and his S-3, Major Joseph Thompson, decide that com-
pany outposts will be established only during daylight
hours and that the battalion perimeter, with a circum-
ference of 3,370 yards, will be heavily patrolled to
maintain control of the three key highways. Colonel
Ridge’s command post is established in the local school-
house. The responsibility for the three roadblocks falls
to Major Edwin H. Simmons’ weapons company.
Along with containing the enemy, Simmons’ troops
also bear responsibility for sorting out the Communist
troops that pose as civilians.
In the meantime, the 5th Marines is to deploy to the
rear of the 7th Marines (in the vicinity of the
Hamhung–Chosin Reservoir Road), relieve contingents
of the South Korean Army at the Fusen Reservoir and
establish roadblocks. The 7th Marines is to relieve con-
tingents of the S.K. I Corps along the Hamhung–
Chosin Reservoir Road. Once the relief is complete, it
is to push elements to the northern edge of the reser-
voir and to Changjin.
From these points, the 7th Marines is to prepare to
drive to the northern border of Korea. This is a mon-
umental and punishing task. The roads, except the key
coastal route, are primitive mountain paths unsuitable
for tanks or heavy vehicles. The 11th Marines (rein-
forced and minus detachments) is to assemble near
Hamhung and await orders. Also, The 1st Marine Di-
vision gets its full complement of combat troops ashore
by the end of this day.
In the ROK area, Capital Division sector, the S.K.
Cavalry Regiment overcomes fierce resistance and seizes
Songjin, 100 miles northeast of Hungnam. Also, the
S.K. 1st Regiment, driving inland, encroaches P’ungsan
at about the midway point from the Korean-
Manchurian border along the Iwon–Sinch’ang-
ni–Hyesanjin Road. Meanwhile, the ROK 18th Regi-
ment advances toward the Pujon Reservoir.
 487
In the Eighth Army area, reports about the Chinese
units in Korea and their probable numbers continue
coming into headquarters, but the information is not
considered totally accurate. Nonetheless, General
Walker and his staff become acutely aware of Chinese
advances north of the Ch’ongch’on River. The origi-
nal information extracted from prisoners and gathered
from the field causes Eighth Army to modify its con-
clusions.
In other activity, the rails that lead to Seoul are
opened, permitting trains to cross the Han River and
reach the city, but by now, Eighth Army is beyond the
capital. Some advance elements have reached points
about 200 miles north of the Imjin River at Chonchon.
However, the rails extend only into Munsan-ni at the
south bank of the Imjin River.
In the 1st Cavalry sector, the attached S.K. 1st Divi-
sion has forestalled an enemy rout in its sector. The
skirmishing around Unsan subsides; however, the
South Koreans capture two more Chinese troops. The
drastic changes in the situation alarm General Walker.
He orders the 1st Cavalry Division to relinquish its se-
curity mission at Pyongyang, immediately advance to
Unsan, then pass through the S.K. 1st Division to
launch an assault toward the Yalu River. General Gay
orders the 8th Cavalry to spearhead the attack. It will
depart Pyongyang on the following morning.
In the 24th Division sector, the British Brigade drives
fifteen miles and reaches positions about three miles
from Ch’ongju, then halts for the night and prepares to
attack on the following morning.
In the 5th Regiment zone, the Regiment, trailing the
British, crosses the Ch’ongch’on River, becoming the
first 24th Division unit to cross it. The 5th Regiment
pushes farther and crosses the Taeryong River. Then,
from positions above P’akch’on and on the right of the
British units, it drives north toward Taech’on.
In the ROK Army area, I Corps sector, South Korean
contingents (S.K. 3rd Division) sustain heavy casualties
as they drive against fierce enemy resistance near
Sudong.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the S.K. 19th Regiment,
6th Division, and the S.K. 10th Regiment, S.K. 8th
Division, each minus one battalion, reach the area of
Onjong, the point where the 2nd Regiment had previ-
ously broken ranks and run. Neither makes any fur-
ther progress. Both regiments have a minor enemy en-
counter on the 29th.
In other activity, the S.K. 7th Regiment, 6th Divi-
sion, receives supplies by airdrop and prepares to with-
draw south.
In Air Force activity, a recently captured airfield at
Sinanju along the mouth of the Ch’ongch’on River is
utilized by C-47s to evacuate wounded. The airfield,
about forty miles north of Pyongyang, becomes the
northernmost field used by the U.S. Air Force.
October 29 In the X Corps area, OpnO 18–50,
issued by 1st Marine Division on the previous day, is al-
tered. The 1st Battalion, S.K. Marines, is attached to the
October 29, 1950
5th Marines and the 5th Battalion, Korean Marines, is
attached to the 1st Marines. The security of Munchon
and Yonghung, thirteen and thirty-two miles north of
Wonsan, respectively, is delegated to the 5th Marines,
bolstered by Company A, 1st Tank Battalion.
In the 1st Marines area, helicopters in support of
ground troops initiate reconnaissance missions. Several
Marines isolated by the previous fighting are rescued by
Lieutenant George Farish’s patrols. During the after-
noon, the undisturbed bodies of twelve Marines are
discovered when a patrol led by Captain Noren (Com-
pany B) arrives back at its previous positions near Hill
109. Later, Noren’s detachment probes farther south
and encounters enemy fire originating in the ruins of
Tongchon. Marine planes arrive to assist. Twenty Com-
munist troops hurriedly flee their positions; however,
there is little chance of escape. Noren’s patrol, bolstered
by machine guns, shreds the enemy force and kills 16.
In other activity, patrols of Companies D and F enter
Kojo and see first-hand the devastation inflicted by
planes and naval surface vessel guns. No enemy pres-
ence is found. Nor does Company E’s patrol encounter
any enemy activity as it scours the terrain west of the
town. General Craig and General Almond arrive at
Kojo on this day and they conclude that the situation
is stable.
Meanwhile, LST 883 arrives at Kojo, but it runs
aground and must be nudged by a tug. Its cargo, ten
tanks of Company C, 1st Tank Battalion, is no longer
required and the LST returns to Wonsan. The bodies
of nineteen Marines and seventeen enemy prisoners are
brought aboard. Pilots of VMO-6 rush seven seriously
wounded Marines from Kojo to a hospital transport
vessel moored off Wonsan, and twenty-four other
wounded are transported from Kojo to Wonsan. Ma-
rine casualties for the mission are 23 killed, 47 wounded
and four missing in action. The estimates of Commu-
nist casualties are 250 killed and an indeterminable
number of wounded. Marine patrols count 165 enemy
dead and capture 85 men.
At Majon-ni, Ridge’s 3rd Battalion maintains con-
trol of the roads. Civilians are halted and questioned at
blockage points to weed out enemy troops. Today, 24
POWs are seized. This operation continues for seven-
teen days, and the average number of prisoners taken
is 82 per day. A supply convoy arrives to supplement the
3rd Battalion, but it is the last one to safely make the
trip for one week.
In related activity, 3rd Battalion patrols detect no
enemy activity along the roads to Wonsan, Pyongyang,
or Seoul. As a precaution, Major Simmons’ weapons
company continues to plaster suspected enemy posi-
tions, and the effort is coordinated with planes capable
of spotting enemy targets and calling in air strikes.
These missions, during the first four days, discover no
enemy activity. However, prisoner interrogation ses-
sions confirm the presence of the battered 15th N.K.
Division and its components, including the 45th, 48th
and 50th Regiments. The enemy division, commanded
by Major General Pak Sun Chol, has been moving
October 29, 1950
north from Seoul under orders to initiate guerrilla ac-
tivity in the Imjin Valley and attempt to dominate the
area. Intelligence, based on prisoner information, esti-
mates that about 11,000 enemy troops are in the area.
In the 7th Marines sector, the Regiment, having only
received some of its winter gear, departs Wonsan by
overland route for Hamhung and completes the trek
by the 31st. The 7th Marines is scheduled to be the
vanguard for the advance to the northern border of
North Korea. The full amount of cold-weather gear is
received by the 7th Marines when they reach Koto-ri.
In the 7th Division sector, the 17th RCT, commanded
by Colonel Herbert B. Powell, lands at Iwon without
incident. The remainder of the Division follows later.
The entire Division, except for the majority of its tanks,
is ashore by November 8. Minesweeping operations
prior to the landing reveal no mines. The 7th Division
is also scheduled to drive to the northern border of
Korea.
This day, the 1st Battalion, the 49th FABn, and
Company A, 13th Engineer Battalion, move fifty miles
from the beachhead and deploy at Cho-ri, from where
the 7th Division is to begin its drive to the town of
Hyesanjin at the border with Manchuria. The ROK I
Corps, already on the move, is far ahead of other X
Corps troops. The 3rd Infantry Division, due to arrive
in Korea about November 8, is to relieve the 1st
Marines units deployed south of Hamhung, and then
the Marines are to advance to the Yalu.
In the Eighth Army area, the emergence of the Chi-
nese Communists into the conflict and the near instant
destruction of the ROK II Corps cause grave concern,
and the rising number of confusing reports filtering
into headquarters makes matters worse. General Walker
releases the S.K. 7th Division from U.S. I Corps and at-
taches it to the faltering ROK II Corps, which is sus-
taining terrible routs by the Chinese. Army also directs
the ROK II Corps to deploy the S.K. 8th Division
north of the Ch’ongch’on River to establish defensive
positions that stretch eastward from Yongbyon to
Kujang-dong. From there, the S.K. 7th Division is to
pick up the defensive line and string out to the south
toward Tokch’on.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, the
8th Cavalry advances from Pyongyang and reaches
Anju at the Ch’ongch’on River. It establishes a night
perimeter at Yongsan-dong during the evening.
In the S.K. 1st Division sector, an attack is launched
at dawn, but it is repulsed by the Communist Chinese.
Fifth Air Force planes arrive to bolster the attack, but
still the Chinese remain well-entrenched and raise res-
olute resistance. Due to the near destruction of the
ROK II Corps, the S.K. 1st Division has become a key
player in holding off the Chinese on the northern ex-
tension of the U.N. line. However, the S.K. 1st Divi-
sion and the 24th Division, the nearest Eighth Army
contingent to the west, are separated by fifteen miles.
In the 24th Division sector, the British initiate an at-
tack to seize Ch’ongju; the Australian 3rd Battalion
supported by some aerial assistance advances. Mean-
488
while, an observation plane spots enemy tanks and sup-
porting North Korean troops. Air Force aircraft arrive
and decimate four T-34s. The Australians (Argylls)
then press forward and seize the pass and the ridges in
front of the objective. At about 2200, the North Kore-
ans launch a counterattack. They commit tanks and
employ self-propelled guns. The Australians, indiffer-
ent to the danger, move up bazooka teams, and shortly
thereafter, three additional T-34s are destroyed. Ac-
companying U.S. tanks join in and pour their fire into
the enemy ranks. Enemy fire during the skirmish slays
nine Australians and wounds thirty others. On the fol-
lowing day, the Australians move into Ch’ongju.
In the 5th Regiment zone, the Regiment, commanded
by Colonel Throckmorton, drives closer to Taech’on
and encounters strong North Korean resistance. Planes
quickly arrive to support the advance. The combination
of ground force and air power knocks out the resist-
ance, giving the 5th Regiment control of Taech’on.
Nine enemy tanks and four self-propelled guns are de-
stroyed in the heated skirmish.
Eighty-nine prisoners are seized and of these, two
are Chinese, but no Chinese units had engaged the 5th
Regiment at Taech’on. The two Chinese POWs, ap-
parently stragglers, are the first Chinese captured by
American troops. From Taech’on, the 5th RCT drives
northwest toward Kusong against a defending force of
about 5,000 to 6,000 North Korean troops.
In the ROK Army area, I Corps sector, more tenacious
fighting occurs near a Changjin Reservoir hydroelectric
plant, located about thirty miles inland from Hung-
nam. The close-quartered engagement takes a toll on the
South Koreans and a rapidly depleting supply of
grenades adds to the problem. During the brutal strug-
gle, sixteen additional Chinese are taken prisoner. They
inform their captors that the Chinese 370th Regiment,
124th Division, 42nd Army, is deployed slightly north
of the reservoir, and that the remainder of the division
is at Hagaru, at the southern fringe of Changjin Reser-
voir. General Almond is informed of the Chinese
POWs by S.K. General Suk Won Kim.
Also, sixty North Korean troops are captured by the
S.K. 26th Regiment. Ironically, most of the enemy’s
mortars, machine guns, and Thompson submachine
guns are U.S. issue, which had apparently been previ-
ously captured from the Nationalist Chinese. Also, the
Chinese 124th Division, facing nasty mountainous ter-
rain, has advanced into North Korea without trans-
porting its artillery. The division’s heaviest weapons are
82-mm mortars.
In the ROK II Corps area, the Chinese cut off the at-
tacking units of the S.K. 19th and 10th Regiments and
badly whip them. The ROKs lose all three of their ar-
tillery batteries and every vehicle in the column. The
S.K. 7th Regiment, 6th Division, begins withdrawing
from Kojang to reach the remainder of the division, but
time has withered away and the Chinese wait in am-
bush. Almost immediately after the column gets un-
derway, it encounters a roadblock, but this regiment
attempts to fight its way through. Air support arrives to
 489
neutralize the enemy’s power and it forestalls disaster.
However, at dusk, when the fighter plane support
ceases, the regiment is overwhelmed. Still, many South
Korean troops hold their positions and tenaciously re-
sist throughout the night. During the dark of night,
many others vanish into the hills.
By dawn the South Koreans are thoroughly beaten.
According to a document captured later, in March
1951, it seems as if only one battalion of the Chinese
373rd Regiment, 125th Division, had engaged and de-
stroyed the S.K. 7th Regiment. Major Fleming, the only
American to survive the battle, is wounded fifteen times
and captured. Major Fleming survives his imprison-
ment by the Communists and is among the POWs
exchanged in 1953. The other survivors, about 875
troops of an original number of 3,552, evade capture or
death and make it back to Kunu-ri to rejoin the divi-
sion. The regimental commander, Colonel Lim Bu
Taik, and two of his battalion commanders escape, but
the other S.K. staff officers and KMAG advisors are
killed or captured.
October 30 In the X Corps area, at headquarters
in Wonsan, General Almond briefs General Barr, 7th
Division commander. Almond makes it clear that the
7th Division will drive to Hyesanjin on the Yalu River,
while the Marines advance to the border via Chinhung-
ni, Koto-ri and Hagaru. The 3rd Infantry Division is
to assume responsibility for the rear. General Almond,
pointing to the map and referring to the surge to the
border, optimistically states: “When we have cleared
all this out, the ROKs will take over, and we will pull
our Divisions out of Korea.” Major Henry J. Woessner,
(S-3, 7th Marines) attends a portion of the briefing.
Woessner makes a reconnaissance flight over the route
of advance. (See also, In the 7th Marines sector, this
date.)
In the 1st Marine Division sector, at Kojo, the division
continues to maintain outposts across its front and
probing patrols. During the past several days, Marines
have recovered various pieces of equipment that had
been abandoned earlier. Much to their surprise, nearly
all the equipment is still operable. Relief contingents
arrive at Kojo on the following day.
In other activity, engineers under 1st Lieutenant
Leroy Duffy continue working to complete an OY
landing strip along the eastern perimeter, but the effort
is tedious because the valley, which contains a rugged
cliff, is not suitable for accommodating planes.
In the 7th Marines sector, Major Henry Woessner
takes an aerial surveillance flight aboard an Air Force
plane and scrutinizes the expected route along which the
7th Marines will advance. The reconnaissance flight
discovers no enemy forces, but it does reveal much
rugged terrain that stretches along the MSR. Woess-
ner informs Colonel Litzenberg of the various dangers
that lurk along the route in the vicinity of Hamhung–
Hagaru.
Litzenberg then calls a briefing meeting to inform
the officers and NCOs of what might occur because of
October 30, 1950
their actions. He states that they might be initiating
the opening battle of World War III. And Litzenberg
then emphasizes the point to his 7th Marines. “We can
expect to meet Chinese Communist troops, and it is
important that we win the first battle. The results of
that battle will reverberate around the world, and we
want to make sure that the outcome has an adverse ef-
fect in Moscow as well as Peiping.”
In the ROK I Corps area, the elements of the S.K.
Capital Division drive to positions just south of the
Pujon Reservoir.
In other activity, along the coastal road, the S.K.
Cavalry Regiment continues its advance. In its path
stands an enemy force of about one battalion strength.
The enemy contingent retires and heads north toward
Kilchu, an inland town that is out of range of the U.S.
naval surface gun fire. South Koreans give pursuit.
In the Eighth Army area, Army continues making
progress, but logistically the situation is still poor. The
railroad lines lack the distance to maintain pace with the
rapid advance of the ground troops. In some instances,
such as with the 24th Division, the trucks remain the
beasts of burden. Their trips begin at the termination
point of the divisional rail lines at Yongdungp’o south
of the Han River and must move northward more than
200 miles, much of it along primitive paths, to reach
and supply the units at Pakch’on. The unsung heroes of
the motor pool are the mechanics who have kept the ve-
hicles rolling nonstop for the past two months.
In the 1st Cavalry sector, the 5th Cavalry arrives at
Yongsan-dong from Pyongyang. The regiment, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel Harold K. Johnson, is directed
to guard the rear of the 8th Cavalry, which has now ad-
vanced to Unsan to relieve the pressure from the S.K.
1st Division.
In the 8th Cavalry zone, the 1st Battalion arrives at
Unsan during the afternoon. Its commanding officer,
Major John Millikin, meets with KMAG officers at-
tached to the 12th Regiment, 1st S.K. Division, to dis-
cuss the situation. Millikin is informed of the condition
of the divisional line, which is under tremendous strain.
The line stands 800 yards north of Unsan but is being
driven back by the surge of the Chinese.
Company C, 99th FABn, advances to bolster the
3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry. Also, the enemy is begin-
ning to set large fires in the mountains, seemingly to cre-
ate hovering smoke to conceal Communist troop move-
ment in the area. The 8th Cavalry relieves the S.K. 12th
Regiment on the following day.
In the 24th Division sector, the Australian 3rd Battal-
ion (Argylls), having defeated the defending enemy
force outside the town, enters Ch’ongju. During the
evening, the North Koreans bombard the town with
an artillery barrage. The 3rd Battalion headquarters
area becomes the recipient of six high velocity shells.
One projectile, of the six that strike near headquarters,
soars over the crest of a hill, smashes into a tree and
detonates close to the commanding officer’s tent. Al-
though many troops are nearby, only one man is
wounded, but it is fatal. One shell fragment plunges
October 31, 1950
into Colonel Green’s stomach. Green is rushed to Anju
for emergency treatment, but he succumbs in three
days. Lt. Colonel I.B. Ferguson succeeds Colonel Green
as commanding officer, 3rd Australian Battalion. One
other British officer, Major Reith, is killed by either
enemy tank or artillery fire.
In other activity, British Brigadier General Coad in-
forms General Church that the Commonwealth
Brigade at Ch’ongju is extremely tired. He requests that
a U.S. regiment leap-frog ahead of it. General Church
orders the 21st Regiment to pass through the British
Brigade and take the point. By dusk, the 21st Regi-
ment passes through the British lines and advances
north, observing many houses in Ch’ongju that are
burning under the brightness of the autumn moon.
In the 5th Regiment zone, Throckmorton’s 5th RCT
continues to grind forward toward Kusong against stiff
opposition, which includes tanks and self-propelled
guns. Planes arrive to blast the enemy positions and
provide support for the advance.
In the ROK I Corps area, General Almond arrives at
Hamhung to speak with Chinese POWs held at the
command post of General Kim Suk Won. The prison-
ers state that most of the troops in their parent unit,
the 124th Chinese Division, had initially been in Chi-
ang Kai-shek’s Nationalist Army when it surrendered to
the Communists during the Chinese Civil War that
followed the close of World War II. General Almond in-
forms General MacArthur of the presence of Chinese
troops in northeast Korea.
In other activity, three battalions of the 1st Anti-
guerrilla Group are assigned to the newly activated S.K.
9th Division. One battalion is attached to each regi-
ment as its 3rd Battalion.
October 31 U.S. aircraft are intercepted by
Russian-made MiG-15s near Sinuiju, but these pro-
peller driven craft engage and knock out several of the
Communist jets. This is the first encounter between
U.S. planes and MiGs, but it is not determined whether
the enemy planes are piloted by North Koreans or by
a possible “volunteer air force.”
In other activity, ships attached to CTF-90 move to
Moji, Japan, to begin to transport the 3rd Infantry Di-
vision to Korea. The first contingents of the 65th RCT
arrive on November 5. Also, ComNavFE dissolves JTF-
7. In conjunction, TG-95.2 Support and Covering
Group now comes under the jurisdiction of CTF-90,
commanded by Admiral Doyle.
In the 1st Marine Division area, Lt. General Lemuel
Shepherd, Jr. arrives at Wonsan and meets with Admi-
ral Struble, General O.P. Smith and General Almond at
X Corps headquarters. It is ascertained at this meeting
that Communist Chinese soldiers had been captured
by South Korean troops near Hamhung. Information
is also being gathered by the 1st Cavalry Division, since
it is encountering Chinese troops in Western Korea.
Shepherd takes a helicopter to Kojo to make an aer-
ial inspection of the perimeter. At 1430, the LST 973
arrives at Kojo and debarks the 5th Battalion, KMC
490
Regiment. On the following day, U.S. Marines begin
moving to Wonsan.
Also, General Smith orders Colonel Murray, CO,
5th Marines, to dispatch one battalion to Chigyong,
eight miles southwest of Hamhung. The 1st Battalion,
5th Marines, moves out, but one company is diverted
and instructed to relieve a contingent of the 7th
Marines at the advance supply point at Yonpo Airfield,
about five miles southwest of Hungnam. The 1st Tank
Battalion (minus Company C, attached to 1st Marines)
departs for Munchon. Its Company A is already there.
The components of the 11th Marines, excluding the
battalions attached to the RCTs, are deployed at
Munpyong, about five miles northwest of Wonsan.
In the 7th Marines sector, a small patrol composed of
three jeeps moves out on a reconnaissance mission to aid
the upcoming advance. The contingent, led by Cap-
tain Myron Wilcox, stops at the ROK 26th Regiment’s
command post. When the patrol reports back, it in-
forms headquarters that it encountered one Chinese
prisoner at the ROK 3rd Division lines. Actually, the
South Korean 26th Regiment has captured sixteen Chi-
nese prisoners to date. The 7th Marines are scheduled
to relieve the South Korean 3rd Division at Sudong on
November 2.
In other activity, a patrol composed of five jeeps and
twenty men moves toward Chigyong, but it encounters
no enemy presence. Colonel Litzenberg believes he will
be engaging Chinese forces soon. On the following day,
he again sends out patrols.
In the 7th Division area, the 1st Battalion, 17th Reg-
iment, and headquarters depart Cho-ri and move 70
miles to P’ungsan, about the mid-point between the
landing site at Iwon and the ultimate objective, Hye-
sanjin. The journey is relatively quiet, as the 1st Regi-
ment, S.K. Capital Division, has already advanced
there, clearing the resistance as it moved.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker gives Gen-
eral Milburn, I Corps commander, a verbal order to
continue the attacks of the 24th Division within the
limits of the fluid situation in the vicinity of Unsan,
but some contingents penetrate farther than antici-
pated. These over-stretched units are quickly ordered
to pull back.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, General Gay es-
tablishes his divisional command post at Yongsan,
about twelve miles south of Unsan.
In the 8th Cavalry sector, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions
relieve the 12th Regiment, S.K. 1st Division. Another
South Korean unit, the 2nd Battalion, had been at-
tacked during the night and forced to surrender more
than one mile. But this battalion insists on regaining the
ground before being relieved.
Later, General Milburn, I Corps commander, con-
fers at the 8th Cavalry command post. It is agreed that
the S.K. 2nd Battalion is stable. On the following day,
it attacks to re-secure the lost ground.
In the 24th Division sector, the 21st Regiment contin-
ues its advance that began October 30 from Ch’ongju.
The column moves cautiously along the eerie route.
 491
Despite lack of sleep, the regiment still maintains alert-
ness at 0200 as it reaches a point several miles west of
Kwaksan.
Suddenly, dark shadows begin to come alive. Nearly
500 enemy troops concealed in the heights spring an
ambush. The surprisingly bright illumination spot-
lights seven tanks that lurk along the road. At about
the same time, the enemy infantry pours out menacing
fire that rivets the column, and in concert, the point
tank, standing about 300 yards away, spews a string of
fire toward the 2nd Battalion. Soon the other T-34s
commence firing. The roar of incoming fire galvanizes
the troops, who instantly return heavy fire.
Unending strings of flying orange shells catapult
from the posted T-34s to deliver the thunderclap from
many angles, all converging near the American armor.
Undaunted, the U.S. tanks immediately unleash their
fire power. An avalanche of fire begins to spin directly
toward the origin of the gun flashes to transform the
ambush into a spectacular duel between nocturnal fire-
balls. But when the guns silence, it is the Communists
who have been bushwhacked.
Most of the sheets of fire that swarmed into the area
had failed to hit the mark and the few shells that struck
the U.S. armor harmlessly bounced off without explod-
ing, similarly to what happened to TF Smith when its
ammo ineffectively bounced off the T-34s when the
U.S. first encountered them back in July. Lt. Colonel
Charles Smith, commanding officer of the 3rd Battal-
ion, 21st Regiment, was the commander of Task Force
Smith during that lopsided July battle.
The fighting remains heavy throughout the night,
but at dawn’s first light, the enemy is vanquished and
the heights are free of North Koreans, as they have
abandoned their positions and equipment. Five enemy
tanks, seven antitank guns and one self-propelled gun
have been reduced to twisted, charred metal. In addi-
tion, fifty dead North Koreans remain at the scene of
the failed ambush.
The 21st Regiment resumes its march following the
early morning battle and encounters only sporadic,
minimal opposition. The 1st Battalion jumps ahead of
the 2nd Battalion and leads the way. By noon on the fol-
lowing day, Lt. Col. Charles B. Smith’s contingent
reaches Chonggo-dong.
In the 5th Regiment zone, the 5th RCT forces the col-
lapse of the defenders at Kusong and secures it slightly
after noon. The combat team resumes its attack on the
following day.
In the ROK I Corps area, General Almond again vis-
its Hamhung and finds that seven more Chinese soldiers
have been taken prisoner. They provide information
that one more Chinese division is deployed near the
Changjin Reservoir.
In the ROK II Corps area, the Chinese launch attacks
against the ROK II Corps’ defensive line, and pound
against the positions north and east of Kunu-ri. The
incessant attack cracks through the lines of the S.K.
16th Regiment, 8th Division, at a point near its bound-
ary with the S.K. 1st Division. One battalion collapses
November 1, 1950
and runs for the hills. The Chinese Communists also
hammer the S.K. 7th Division’s lines south of the
Ch’ongch’on River.
November 1 Marine Corps planes initiate
nightly strikes against Sinuiju at the mouth of the Yalu
River. These raids ignite incessant fires, but according
to reports from the pilots, enemy vehicle traffic con-
tinues to flow south through the town. Pilots of
VMF(N)-542, on a nightly basis, detect convoys that
originate in Antung, Manchuria. The air-strikes con-
tinue until November 9 and all intelligence information
is passed to Division G-2 Officers.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the assistant division
commander, General Craig, inspects the area at Hung-
nam where division headquarters will be located after it
moves from Wonsan on November 4. While there,
Craig is taken to see a ghastly scene, the bodies of about
200 civilians. The North Koreans had killed them and
left them lying along a knob in a perfectly straight line.
In the 1st Marines zone, the 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines, maintains its roadblocks and patrols at Majon-
ni, but no enemy activity is detected. Lt. Colonel
Ridge, concerned about resupply problems, requests a
practice air-drop. The operation is a success and Ridge’s
instincts prove correct. On the following day a supply
convoy is attacked and forced to return to Wonsan.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, re-
mains at Kojo. Also, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, at
Anbyon, awaits relief by Korean units. Marines receive
word of the heavy losses incurred by the 1st Cavalry
Division while engaged against Chinese forces, but their
orders are not altered. The 7th Marines is still to drive
to the border with Manchuria and the initial objective
remains Koto-ri, about twenty-three miles north of
Majon-dong.
In the 7th Marines zone, the regiment is transported
by truck to an assembly area between Oro-ri and
Majon-dong. A patrol composed of twenty-one jeeps
moves to the vicinity of Huksu-ri, about 45 miles
northwest of Hamhung, to search for Chinese. The
convoy halts about 4,500 yards in front of the town
and establishes a night perimeter.
During the night, fire is exchanged sporadically with
North Korean guerrillas; however, the patrol reports
that no contact is made with Chinese forces. The 1st
Battalion, 7th Marines, probes about four miles north
and reaches the area of the ROK positions above
Majon-dong. During the latter part of the afternoon,
the 7th Marines establish a secure and stiff night
perimeter.
The 7th Marines is bolstered by the 3rd Battalion,
11th Marines, commanded by Major Francis Parry;
Company D, 1st Engineer Battalion, commanded by
Captain Byron Turner; the 1st Motor Transport Battal-
ion, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Olin Beall; and
the Division Reconnaissance Company, commanded by
1st Lieutenant Ralph Crossman. The 7th Marines is
augmented by Company E, 1st Medical Battalion, com-
manded by Lt. Commander Charles K. Halloway,
November 1, 1950 492

Top: 11th Marines artillery (105-mm howitzers) in action. Bottom: 11th Marines artillery crew.
 493
USN; contingents of the division military police com-
pany; and components of the 1st Signal and 1st Service
Battalion.
When the 7th Marines advances to the border, its
entire left flank will be exposed, with the exception of
the division reconnaissance company, which is sched-
uled to be relieved by RCT-1 shortly.
In the 7th Division zone, the division contains 18,837
men, which places it at nearly full strength, and an at-
tached complement of 7,804 South Koreans. At
P’ungsan the North Koreans engage the 1st Regiment,
S.K. Capital Division, a couple of miles north of the
town. The recently arrived 1st Battalion, 17th Regi-
ment, U.S. 7th Division, receives its baptism under fire
when it joins in the battle to help the ROKs turn back
the heavy assault. The commanding officer, Colonel
Powell, orders his 17th Regiment to prepare to attack
at 0800 on the following day to eliminate the remain-
ing resistance, but the North Koreans have other plans
of their own.
In the Eighth Army area, headquarters is not taking
too seriously the ongoing infusion of Chinese troops
into the battle; many of the incoming reports that give
specifics concerning Chinese troops are disregarded.
The U.S. 2nd Division has thoughts of being shipped
back to Japan due to the anticipated termination of the
war, but those dreams are shattered. The Division is
attached by Army to the I Corps and ordered to make
a snappy assembly at Sunchon and be prepared to move
out to cover a newly created gap between Army and
the ROK II Corps.
Eighth Army now faces a new threat. Its right flank
is unprotected since the thrashing of the ROK II Corps.
The Chinese have crossed the Ch’ongch’on River and
are threading the gap. In addition, the Chinese jeopard-
ize the center of Eighth Army’s lines at Unsan, where
the S.K. 1st Division is attempting to hold the line.
With the arrival of the 8th Cavalry at Unsan, the line
of deployment will be: the 8th Cavalry, north, west and
south of the town; and the S.K. 1st Division northeast,
east and southeast of Unsan.
In the I Corps area, during the afternoon, General
Milburn receives a call from General Walker, who in-
forms him that the ROK II Corps has disintegrated and
is no longer considered a cohesive fighting unit, thereby
leaving U.S. I Corps’ right flank bare. Milburn is di-
rected to take protective measures and to assume con-
trol of any ROK units that move into I Corps’ area.
Milburn immediately dispatches a contingent of troops,
commanded by General Rinaldo Van Brunt, to hold
the line. His force, principally composed of engineers
and ordnance troops, moves to positions on the Kunu-
ri–Anju Road, southwest of Kunu-ri to defend the right
flank and the pontoon bridges that span the
Ch’ongch’on River.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, General Gay, con-
cerned with the stretched out deployment of his 1st
Cavalry Division, requests permission from I Corps to
move the 7th Cavalry from its tenuous positions near
Ch’ongch’on to Yongsan-dong, and he requests that
November 1, 1950
the 8th Cavalry withdraw a few miles from Unsan. His
requests are denied. Gay also is disturbed because the
3rd Battalion, 5th Cavalry is dangerously over-ex-
tended at the corps’ eastern boundary.
At Yongsan-dong during the afternoon, General Gay
and General Charles Palmer (1st Cavalry Artillery
Commander) scrutinize the conversations that are
buzzing across the artillery radios when an aerial ob-
server recounts the bizarre activity in his view. The ob-
server, guiding the fire of the 82nd FABn, explains that
two separate enemy columns moving southeast along
the paths near Myongdang-dong and Yonghung-dong
continue to advance, despite being pummeled by ar-
tillery shells. Both enemy columns remain oblivious to
the bombardment. General Palmer takes the radio and
orders the 99th FABn to lend its guns to the fight to in-
tensify the heat.
In the 5th Cavalry sector, Lt. Colonel Harold K.
Johnson prepares to dispatch the 3rd Battalion to the
boundary line with the S.K. ROK II Corps to support
the collapsing lines there. The regiment is to advance
east at 1230. At about noon, the 8th Cavalry executive
officer, Lt. Colonel Hallet Edson, arrives at Johnsons’
Headquarters and explains that throngs of civilian
refugees are pouring into the middle of the area that
separates the 5th and 8th Cavalry Regiments. He reports
that the civilians speak of seeing huge numbers of Chi-
nese troops driving from the west and closing on the im-
mediate rear of the Korean civilians. This places the
enemy near the Nammyon River at its confluence with
the Camels’ Head Bend of the Kuryong River, a trib-
utary of the Ch’ongch’on.
The information is an unwelcome reality. Colonel
Johnson, ordered to protect the rear of the 8th Cav-
alry, dispatches a patrol of the 1st Battalion to confirm
the story. The platoon speeds to the scene and validates
the information. The Chinese are located at positions
less than five air-miles from the 8th Cavalry lines at
Unsan. About 2,000 Chinese are in a valley about nine
miles southwest of Unsan and another large group,
composed of about 3,000 troops, is at Obong-san,
about six miles southwest of Unsan.
In the meantime, Johnson accompanies the 3rd Bat-
talion to its objective about six miles northeast of Yong-
byon. Johnson orders the battalion to deploy in a set of
low hills near the Yongbyon–Kujang-dong Road to
meet any threat coming from the east. Johnson and the
3rd Battalion commander venture farther east to get a
handle on the situation. Soon after, they encounter
troops of the ROK II Corps. The South Koreans are
totally disorganized and in full retreat, oblivious even
to the moving vehicles.
Johnson returns to his command post (5th Cavalry)
at Yongsan-dong during the evening and receives in-
telligence gathered by the 1st Battalion’s platoon. The
Chinese were detected at Turtle Head Bend along the
Kuryong River and they are close to the 8th Cavalry
lines. The 1st Battalion commander, in response to the
information, rushes reinforcements (Companies A and
B) to bolster the platoon.
November 1, 1950
Johnson dispatches Company C (in response to re-
quest from 1st Battalion commander) to speed north to
further augment the force. However, while Company
C is en route, the Communists strike and dislodge
Company B. Four mortars and other equipment are
abandoned. Company B is then directed to withdraw
and dig in near the newly established positions of Com-
pany C. The enemy roadblock at Turtle Head Bend
thwarts the two U.S. rifle companies, despite their air
support throughout the day.
The situation continues to deteriorate as enemy
troops now hold entrenched positions on three sides of
the 8th Cavalry Regiment. Its only buffer is to the east,
defended by the S.K. 15th Regiment. The 2nd Battal-
ion, which had sustained heavy resistance on the pre-
vious day, reinitiates its drive. It arrives in the 1st Bat-
talion, 8th Cavalry, zone during the early morning
hours of November 2 to aid the battle-weary troops
there.
In the 8th Cavalry zone, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions
are in place, having relieved contingents of the S.K.
12th Regiment on the previous day near Unsan, but
the 1st Battalion remains in a defensive stance to the rear
of the 2nd Battalion, S.K. 12th Regiment, awaiting the
ROKs to retake lost terrain from the Chinese.
In the S.K. 1st Division sector, the 2nd Battalion, 12th
Regiment, supported by tanks (6th Med. Tank Bn.)
makes minor gains, but the Chinese are not easily
moved. Company B, 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, initi-
ates an attack to support the S.K. 2nd Battalion. Sup-
ported by tanks of Company B, 70th Tank Battalion,
the unit drives north shadowing the west bank of the
Samt’an River. The added weight of B Company’s
tanks succeed in reducing the pressure on the S.K. Reg-
iment. The attack regains about one-half mile by noon.
Nonetheless, three U.S. tanks sustain damage during
the fight, and the afternoon wears down the determi-
nation of the S.K. 12th Regiment. Fierce enemy mor-
tar fire halts further advance by the tanks.
The S.K. battalion commander, who on the previ-
ous day insisted on regaining the ground, now informs
the cavalry that if it is not relieved by 1600, the posi-
tions will be abandoned. In response to the S.K. ulti-
matum, Colonel Raymond Palmer rejects the idea and
forbids any U.S. advance, while the Chinese continue
their intensive artillery attack. Nevertheless, the 1st
Battalion relieves the South Koreans at 1600 by neces-
sity. The South Koreans abandon their positions and re-
treat through the American lines. However, the 1st Bat-
talion, 8th Cavalry, remains in place and simultaneously
relieves the ROKs. All the while, the heights on the east
side of the river become more crowded as legions of
Chinese troops move along the ridge.
Meanwhile, the S.K. 11th Regiment, 1st Division,
is deployed near the ROK II Corps boundary. An
enemy column advances toward the regiment and it is
detected less than ten miles southwest of Unsan. Planes
and artillery strike the column before it can inflict dam-
age. About 100 horses and an indeterminable number
of enemy troops are killed. Later, during the afternoon,
494
other enemy columns are spotted in the same general
area and also in the area northeast of Unsan. Again
planes arrive to hammer twenty-nine troop-laden ve-
hicles. About two miles away, the S.K. 15th Regiment
is heavily engaged east of the river, then Chinese on
the ridge begin to approach its lines.
The 8th Cavalry is deployed in a half-moon type
perimeter. Its 1st Battalion stands one mile northwest
of Unsan on the west bank of the river and slightly
below the village of MaeBong-dong. The 2nd and 3rd
Battalions continue the east-west line, which leans
southwest and slides over a mountain to a point several
miles west of Unsan. There it cuts across the east-west
road that leads out of Unsan before it swerves southeast
to the Yongsan-dong–Yongbyon Road, three miles
southeast of Unsan. The enemy plows through the
South Koreans.
By 1700, the 8th Cavalry comes under attack. By
dusk, the Americans face the enemy on three separate
sides, north, south and west. The initial assault is sup-
ported by new weaponry, truck-mounted Russian-
made rockets. Major Millikin’s 1st Battalion sustains
the assault and is aided by artillery, which zeroes in on
the enemy rocket trucks. Effective fire forces the enemy
to withdraw their rockets. Prior to the withdrawal, the
enemy’s attack had hit an ammunition truck parked
near the battalion headquarters.
The 1st Battalion controls the Samt’an River’s north-
ern approaches by dark, but its left flank is fragile. At
some points, troops are insufficient to stretch to the
primary ridge that moves into Unsan. Contact in this
area between the 1st and 2nd Battalions is possible only
by patrols. The main ridge is manned, but only with
outposts of both battalions.
Following the initial attack at 1700, the enemy re-
news its assault at 1930 and again pounds the 1st Bat-
talion, but this new assault also hammers the entire line
and ruptures the right flank, which withdraws about
400 yards.
Meanwhile, a platoon of engineers and the heavy
mortar company rush to help hold the line. The troops
defending the left flank pull back about 200 yards to
tighten the line. The 1st Battalion then holds against vi-
cious attacks.
The Communist Chinese discover holes on the pri-
mary ridge, and at about 2100, they begin funneling
through to descend upon the rear of the 2nd Battal-
ion. Shortly thereafter, all hell begins to break loose.
Both battalions are fully engulfed in battle, and to the
east, the South Koreans are heavily engaged.
Northeast of Unsan, the tank contingent guarding
the bridge over the Samt’an River discovers large num-
bers of enemy troops on the opposite bank. This new
threat imperils the 1st Battalion’s positions north of
Unsan. Major Millikin sends an officer across the river
to attempt to locate the mortarmen who had been sup-
porting the ROKs, but his jeep comes under fire, which
forces him to scurry back.
By about 2300, the S.K. 15th Regiment collapses.
While the Communists to the east barrel past the 1st
 495
Battalion positions, Millikin orders all 1st Battalion
trains and non-combat vehicles to move back through
Unsan and converge on the road fork south of the town.
Lt. Colonel William Walton gives a similar order and
the 2nd Battalion also begins withdrawing its vehicles.
By 2300, each battalion had paid high prices and lost
some ground during the close-quartered fighting. From
the road fork, the vehicles of both battalions move
southeast and reach Ipsok. To make matters worse, the
1st Battalion is nearly out of ammunition, and the re-
serve stores are close to exhaustion, too.
Unknown to the 1st and 2nd Battalions, a meeting
had been held at I Corps headquarters at 2000 to deal
with the deteriorating circumstances in the South Ko-
rean II Corps sector. This is the second meeting on the
subject this day. The meeting concludes with an order
going out to the 8th Cavalry to withdraw and for the
Corps to take a defensive posture. However, the news
of the enemy progress in the 8th Cavalry zone is still not
known at I Corps Headquarters.
Slightly after midnight, General Gay returns to his
headquarters and is told of the disastrous news at
Unsan. The orders to withdraw arrive at Colonel
Palmer’s headquarters at about 2300. At midnight, the
8th Cavalry attempts to withdraw, but easier said than
done. Colonel Palmer orders Colonel Edson, the 8th
Cavalry Regimental executive officer, to oversee the
operation.
Elements of the 3rd Battalion deploy to defend the
exit route at the south fork near Unsan. Edson and
Captain Rene Guiraud (Regimental S-2) and a contin-
gent of the I&R Platoon travel to the junction to co-
ordinate the regiment’s withdrawal. By about midnight,
Captain Filmore McAbee (3rd Battalion S-3) and one
platoon of Company I, 3rd Battalion, move to the junc-
tion to guard the approaches from the north. Soon
after, the four tanks of the 1st Platoon arrive, followed
by two tanks of the 2nd Platoon (70th Tank Battalion)
to bolster the road fork positions. Upon arrival of the
2nd Platoon’s tanks, the 1st platoon of tanks crosses
the Kuryong River to cover the withdrawal from there.
The regiment’s trains pass through safely, as do those of
the 1st and 2nd Battalions.
North of Unsan, the beleaguered 1st Battalion re-
mains under severe pressure, and the supporting tanks
(Company B, 70th Tank Battalion) on the right flank
at the bridge northeast of the town are equally endan-
gered. They have been compelled to withdraw to the
road fork at the northeast tip of Unsan. The tanks at-
tempt to hold the fork to permit the 1st Battalion to ex-
tricate itself. One platoon each from Companies A and
B act as rear guards, while the companies, including
Company D, retreat to the fork.
Meanwhile, the enemy has heavily penetrated
Unsan. Major Millikin arrives at the north road fork
slightly before Companies A and B, which arrive at
about 0030 November 2. Enemy fire originating in
Unsan inflicts more casualties, which prompts Millikin
to divert the troops. He directs them to skirt around the
eastern side of the town and proceed to the road fork
November 1, 1950
south of Unsan, then hold in place until he arrives. In
the meantime, two tanks and several Company D mor-
tar vehicles have arrived at the northeast road fork.
Other tanks have entered Unsan. They are engaged
against the enemy in an attempt to fight their way to
the southern road fork. Four tanks of the 1st Platoon,
Company B, break through, but the course remains
much rougher for the remaining tanks and the mortar
vehicles.
At about 0045, two more tanks and the mortar ve-
hicles attempt to break through and get the wounded
to safety. Burning debris blocks passage at a turn. The
first tank maneuvers around the fiery truck, but then
it gets bogged down in a crater. Quickly, the Commu-
nists rake the stalled tank with shells while blowing the
tracks on the remaining tank. The other vehicles also
are pummeled. Apparently, all the wounded aboard the
mortar vehicles are lost. Of the ten tanker crewmen,
two are killed, including the tank commander of the
stalled tank. Five others are wounded.
Meanwhile, the scattered 2nd Battalion lacked good
communications when the order to withdraw had been
issued. Company H, the only unit in contact with Lt.
Colonel Walton, is given the instructions with orders
to pass on the word to the other units. There is still
contact between the rifle companies. Millikin had told
Walton that he would try to keep control of Unsan until
the 2nd Battalion had withdrawn. Some of the 2nd
Battalion will break out, but much of it will be cut off,
unable to reach the road fork. Walton reaches the road-
block and from there he leads 103 troops to Ipsok, ar-
riving the following morning. The situation near and
in Unsan continues worsening.
By about 0100, Millikin is greeted by stragglers from
the ROK 15th Regiment and troops of various units,
including Company C, but Chinese soldiers also ar-
rive north of the town at the road fork. The Americans
evacuate the area in small groups and try to make it to
the southern fork. Another contingent, Company H,
2nd Battalion, meets Millikin and his small group at
about 0200 as they take a circuitous route to the fork
south of Unsan. This group reaches the destination,
but the scene is ugly and permeated with abandoned
equipment. The enemy is closing fast and the south
road fork is now under small arms fire.
Millikin encounters Major Robert Ormond, 3rd bat-
talion commander, and one platoon of infantry from
Company I at the roadblock. Ormond informs Mil-
likin that no new orders have arrived and that the 3rd
Battalion had been instructed to cover the withdrawal
of the 1st and 2nd Battalions. Ormond departs to begin
to withdraw his 3rd Battalion. Millikin uses the radio
of the lone operable tank at the south roadblock to try
to contact other units, but he is able only to commu-
nicate with another tank. It is at the Kuryong River
and engaged.
Millikin and the troops with him attempt to break
through the blockage by following the remaining tank
at the fork, but enemy fire thwarts the effort. Millikin’s
contingent bolts from the area in tiny groups that head
November 1, 1950
south. Millikin and the men ford the Kuryong River
and reach Ipsok on the morning of the 2nd. Contingents
that are moving to the rear of Millikin had not reached
the south road fork. And west of the blockage, the Chi-
nese had brought other units to a sputtering halt. Bat-
tery A, 99th FABn and the 3rd Platoon, Company B,
70th Tank Battalion, are stopped less than one mile
from the fork.
Almost immediately the road becomes jammed as
vehicles are deserted. The tanks then become paralyzed;
the crews are forced to destroy the weapons and aban-
don their armor. Most of the infantry (primarily 2nd
Battalion) and the tankers make a dash for the heights,
but some manage to reach the south road fork. In con-
junction, the stragglers spread out. Some reach the po-
sitions of the 3rd Battalion on the following morning
and others stumble into the lines of the ROK troops at
Ipsok.
In the 3rd Battalion area, south of Unsan, the enemy
has been quiet to this point. By about 0130, the sup-
porting artillery components (99th FABn units) of the
3rd Battalion begin passing through the fork. In the
3rd Battalion zone, things have been tranquil during
the day. The battalion command post is several air-
miles south of Unsan and slightly north of the Nam-
myon River. Northwest of the headquarters, along a
ridge line atop a stream, Companies I and K are de-
ployed. The perimeter is further protected by a pla-
toon of tanks (Company B, 70th Tank Battalion) dis-
persed on either side of the road north of the river. And
elements of Company M guard the bridge to the rear.
By midnight (1st-2nd) Major Ormond informs his
commanders that the withdrawal is imminent. Soon,
Companies I and K receive orders to pull back to the
command post; Company L, stretched out west in the
heights along the south side of the river, is ordered to
protect the withdrawal.
At 0115, the first units, Battery B, 99th FABn, and
battalion headquarters move north and pass the south
road fork without incident. At about 0230, Captain
Bolt, commanding officer, Battery C, pauses to speak
with Colonel Edson at the road fork and Edson assures
him that everything is under control and that the ar-
tillery should proceed. Bolt’s convoy, composed of
twenty vehicles, moves out toward the Kuryong River.
The second vehicle misses a turn and it goes unnoticed
momentarily by Captain Bolt, but then he orders his
jeep to halt to await the column. In the meantime, the
vehicle that missed the turn is forced to reverse and the
mishap clogs the road.
Suddenly, Bolt spots some troops moving toward his
stalled jeep, and at first glance, they appear to be retreat-
ing 8th Cavalrymen. However, when shots ring out, it
becomes apparent they are enemy troops. The jeep roars
off, but when it rounds a curve about twenty Chinese
troops are to its front stretched along the road. Chi-
nese fire rings out, but Bolt returns fire with his sub-
machine gun and the ambush is thwarted when the
enemy scatters. The jeep keeps moving with Bolt’s gun
blazing and it breaks through several more small groups
496
of enemy troops and finally makes contact with the
convoy, which is now Battery B and four tanks (1st
Platoon Company B, 70th Tank Battalion).
Bolt directs one of the tanks to return down the road
and fire upon the enemy, but the tanker states that he
has expended his ammunition. At about the same time,
Bolt’s jeep vanishes around the curve, another U.S. ve-
hicle comes under fire at the road fork and its driver
loses control of the vehicle, causing it to tumble over and
block the highway. All attempts by a tank to push it
aside are futile, and the tank becomes disabled. It is
abandoned after its weapons are demolished. The last
vehicle to pass the roadblock is Bolt’s jeep.
For the remainder of the troops at the roadblock
south of Unsan, the nightmare continues to become
more grim. Colonel Edson attempts to raise resistance
to break out, but to no avail. There is no group of sol-
diers who band together to strike back. Several officers
collect troops who have abandoned their vehicles, but
while the officers attempt to gather more, the others
stream for safety. In the meantime, Major Ormond had
spoken with Major Millikin at the roadblock and then
moved back to his headquarters to complete the with-
drawal. He departs only moments before the Chinese
command the area at the roadblock, which makes his
withdrawal difficult. Unable to move north, Ormond
chooses a circuitous route and orders some tanks to
guard the withdrawal. A tanker, Sergeant Elmer L.
Miller, sets out to probe for a crossing site for the tanks,
but he is forced back.
Before 0300, the vehicles are positioned nose to tail
awaiting orders, but again, grave mistakes are made and
pandemonium occurs. The Company M squads at the
bridge south of headquarters observe a contingent of
troops encroaching the Nammyon River bridge, and
assume they are South Korean. The troops pass over
the bridge and advance toward the command post
without incident, but then a Chinese bugle blares to
ignite a gruesome surprise assault on the CP. Chinese
converge from all directions, but the Americans believe
it to be a North Korean attack.
Major Ormond and Captain McAbee leave their
headquarters to gauge the depth of the assault. Or-
mond moves toward Company L at the river but he be-
comes wounded and left unattended for the night.
McAbee heads for the bridge to the south, but he also
is wounded. Undaunted, McAbee attempts to reach the
command post and encounters several Chinese, which
he eliminates with his carbine. Then, McAbee stumbles
upon about thirty more Chinese troops who are try-
ing to destroy a tank; again he fires his carbine until all
his ammunition is expended. Having sustained a great
loss of blood, McAbee reinitiates his bid to return to the
command post. It is a harrowing trek. He brushes with
the enemy several more times, and even though they
have him in their reach, he works his way out of the
crisis.
Meanwhile, small arms fire intensifies and grenades
are flying in every direction. All the while, the shrill
sounds of whistles and giant speakers in the distance
 497
bellow the amplified sounds of stampeding horses. The
Chinese also blare taps. During the swift attack, the
Chinese toss explosive charges into the vehicles, setting
many afire. The Americans are caught flat-footed and
some are still bleary eyed in their foxholes and trenches,
still awaiting the order to board the vehicles. Bloody
hand-to-hand fighting is the order of the day, but the
enemy holds the advantage. Many of the troops near
headquarters are thrashed and stabbed to death by bay-
onets.
The morbid sight of slaughtered soldiers is not eas-
ily cloaked under the brightness of the moon, nor are
the grim expressions on the faces of the surviving fight-
ing men. The enemy continues to press forward, hop-
ing to annihilate those at the command post. The chap-
lain, Father (Major) Emil Kapaun, ventures outside to
check things out and spots Captain McAbee as he
struggles to reach the CP. Father Kapaun rescues him,
and then someone else is yelling for help. Major Mori-
arity, the battalion executive officer, rushes to the aid
of another officer (Battalion S-4), who is wrapped up
on the ground with a Communist. Moriarity kills the
enemy troop with his pistol and he eliminates one other
enemy soldier in the vicinity.
Later, Moriarity spots a group of U.S. infantry po-
sitioned around Sergeant Elmer Miller’s tank. As he
moves to the tank, the enemy begins to sling mortars
that land dangerously close to the armor. Moriarity
gathers the men and leads them south to ford the
stream. Along the way, they encounter and destroy an
enemy contingent at the stream. Moriarity and the
troops then head southeast toward friendly lines, pick-
ing up stragglers as they move.
In the meantime, at about the same time headquar-
ters had been struck, the Chinese also pour fire into
the 3rd Battalion lines. The tanks, still posted near the
road south of the command post, are struck hard.
Sergeant Miller, who had gone to seek a crossing, creeps
back to his tank to join the defenders. Again at close-
range, Miller uses his pistol. One of the tanks is dam-
aged and then it blows. The remaining three tanks pull
back to the road and successfully hold back the enemy.
The tank fire prevents them from fording the stream
from the south.
Company L, southwest of the command post along
the stream, also receives heavy attacks. Nonetheless,
Company L fights tenaciously and completes its previ-
ous orders to reel into the command post. Company
K attempts to make it to the battalion zone and is struck
by an ambush that inflicts heavy losses on one platoon
and its command group. However, the remainder of
the company reaches headquarters and augments the
defenses there. The three tanks band tightly together
and the nearby infantry help galvanize the resistance.
At the command post, the small group of defenders
throws back the Chinese and holds until dawn, but the
cost is high. Enemy grenades slay three soldiers who
had manned the machine gun at the command post,
and of the twenty or so troops who defended the posi-
tion, only five remain alive at dawn.
November 1, 1950
In the 24th Division sector, elements of the Chinese
66th Army engage contingents of the 19th Regiment in
small firefights near Kusong.
Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion continues to set the
pace for the 21st Regiment. It reaches the fringes of
Chonggo-dong by noon, which places the regiment
within eighteen air-miles from the Yalu River. The
troops of the 21st Regiment are anxious to proceed to
the border; however, orders have filtered down from I
Corps that direct the regiment to halt and establish
strong defensive positions at Chonggo-dong.
The order delivered by Colonel Stephens stuns the
troops, but they are not fully aware of the rapid changes
dictating the battle plans. During the afternoon, the
1st Battalion is struck by a grueling counterattack. A
North Korean infantry force, composed of about 500
troops and augmented by seven tanks, attacks the lines
of the 1st battalion to ignite a fury-filled battle. The
U.S. artillery and the ground troops propel a hurricane
of fire toward the attackers, while the tanks of Company
A, 6th Medium Tank Battalion, gallop toward the
enemy armor to instigate a deadly joust. The opposing
tanks begin to bludgeon each other. The tanks slug it
out and pound each other with incessant fire for about
one-half hour. The tanks’ guns subside after the seventh
T-34 is decimated.
Meanwhile, the curtain of fire raised by the 1st Bat-
talion and the accompanying guns of the artillery repulse
the infantry and inflict about 100 casualties. Two of
Captain Jack G. Moss’ tanks receive some minor dam-
age. This action becomes the Eighth Army’s northern-
most battle for the duration of the conflict and Lt. Col-
onel Charles B. Smith’s 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment,
is the engaging unit. TF Smith, which had fought the
initial battle against the North Koreans during early
July, was commanded by Colonel Smith and the task
force included elements of the 21st Regiment.
In the 5th Regimental zone, the regiment reinitiates its
attack. The column advances several miles north of the
town and runs into a formidable enemy roadblock. Un-
daunted, the RCT rams against it and pulverizes the
defenses. The enemy loses between 300 and 400
troops. In addition, six anti-tank guns, eight howitzers
(76-mm), five machine guns and eight mortars are de-
stroyed. Two self-propelled guns are also decimated.
Once the road junction is secured, forward elements
of the regiment push north and reach positions about
ten miles beyond the town. At about noon, a liaison
plane flies over Kusong and drops an urgent message in-
structing the regiment to halt where it stands. The 5th
Regiment’s reaction is the same as the 21st Regiment’s;
the disappointment of the troops is conspicuous.
Toward the end of the night, at about 2300, orders
arrive from division directing the regiment to pull back
to the Ch’ongch’on River at once. The 21st Regiment
receives the same instructions and during the night
(Nov. 1-2), both regiments retire to the river, still per-
plexed by the turn of events.
In the ROK II Corps area, the S.K. 15th Regiment
comes under severe attack during the day and during the
November 1, 1950 498

The Pacific, November-December 1950.

battle, it captures some equipment including two 57-
mm recoilless rifles and two other automatic rifles. Each
weapon is marked conspicuously with Chinese identi-
fication.
By 1900, the supporting U.S. artillery unit, the 10th
AAA Group, is ordered to prepare to pull back. At
about 2030, the fire center controlling the guns is shut
down, and within another hour, the unit moves back.
The vehicles head south with their lights out.
In the meantime, the struggling South Koreans still
 499 November 1, 1950

Map of Korea, November-December 1950.

November 1, 1950 500

Leaflets are loaded into a bomb-type cluster adapter (M16M1) in Japan on 1 November. The leaflets are
afterward dropped in North Korea to persuade North Koreans to surrender.

have some artillery support as the more mobile 90-mm
guns of the 78th AAA maintain fire for one or two more
hours, until orders arrive from corps that mandate a
pull-back. By midnight (1st-2nd), the South Koreans
have been decimated and shortly thereafter, the ROK
15th Regiment is rendered unfit for battle. Nearly the
entire regiment is killed or captured. The collapse of
the regiment gives the Chinese an easier route toward
the 8th Cavalry. The regiment’s equipment is totally
written off, and the losses include four liaison aircraft,
used to assist the 6th Tank Battalion and the 9th FABN.
The planes are destroyed on the ground by U.S. air-
craft to prevent capture.
In other activity, Chinese Communist units con-
tinue to smash against the South Koreans. Below the
Ch’ongch’on River, the S.K. 7th Division has been
shoved back to the vicinity of Won-ni. The gigantic
Chinese Communist pressure jolts the ROK II Corps
 501
into positions that have the line facing east, but this
opens a huge hole between its left flank and Eighth
Army.
General Milburn arrives at ROK Headquarters and
discovers that it is moving to Sunchon. Milburn is in-
formed that communication with the various units has
been lost. The ROK commander believes he has three
battalions of the S.K. 7th Division still able to fight.
Milburn orders the South Koreans to hold Kunu-ri and
he informs them that a contingent of U.S. troops is en
route to strengthen the defense.
In Air Force activity, a group of American planes, in-
cluding one B-26, is attacked over North Korea by a
band of three Yaks. One of the enemy planes is downed
by the B-25 and the other two are shot down by two
F-81 fighters. Also, a contingent of six MiGs, later on
this same day, attack a group of F-51 Mustangs and a
T-6 in the vicinity of the Yalu River, but the U.S. sus-
tains no losses.
— In the United States: President Truman is tem-
porarily residing in the Blair House. He survives an as-
sassination attempt there on this day when two Puerto
Rican nationalists spring their attack, but one is killed
and the other is apprehended before the president can
be harmed.
November 2 The U.N. Command believes
about 16,500 Chinese are now in Korea and that about
450,000 more remain in Manchuria, close to the Yalu
River.
In the X Corps area, General Almond relocates his
command post farther north at Hamhung. The re-
mainder of his headquarters arrives on the 10th. On
the 14th, the USS Mount McKinley arrives off Hung-
nam. Admiral Doyle and his staff can now coordinate
with General Almond.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, Corps directs the
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines to depart its positions near
Kojo and return to Wonsan. The departure, which oc-
curs this day, causes the X Corps boundary to be ad-
justed. It is moved 70 miles farther south. In conjunc-
tion, the Korean Marine Regiment, recently detached
from the 1st Marine Division, is directed to assume re-
sponsibility for the Corps’ zone south of the 39th Par-
allel.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
positioned at Anbyon, about eight miles southeast of
Wonsan, is relieved by Korean contingents. The 2nd
Battalion departs by trucks to return to its regiment,
which is stationed farther north. Also, following com-
pletion of mine-sweeping operations, the port facili-
ties at Wonsan become operative today. During the
next nine days, the Combat Service Group moves
nearly 4,000 tons of ammunition by rail from Wonsan
to Hamhung.
At Majon-ni, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines’ patrols con-
tinue, but the enemy’s inactivity ceases. A motorized
patrol of Company H ventures south from the village
along a slim road and hits an ambush site after travel-
ing about five miles. Enemy fire pours down from each
November 2, 1950
side of the heights and creates massive problems for the
patrol when the vehicles stall. Marines attempt to set up
their mortars and machine guns to return fire, but their
positions are poor, and the enemy is concealed, which
causes casualties to climb. A desperate message is sent
by radio to headquarters: “We’ve been hit. Send help.
Send help.”
Soon after, enemy fire takes out the radio. Two men
defy the fire and race their jeep back to headquarters to
get reinforcements. They arrive safely, but one of the
tires had been blown by an enemy shell. Two rifle com-
panies and other Marines with 81-mm mortars rush
to rescue the besieged patrol. One man in the relief
force, PFC Jack Golden, transporting a heavy machine
gun, ascends to a position atop the enemy.
Meanwhile, communications between Majon-ni and
Wonsan remain terrible, which causes a delay in getting
air support to the imperiled patrol. Major Simmons
convinces a pilot of an OY to take him to the battle
scene, from where he can observe the positions. Marine
Corsairs then arrive to assist and the enemy is forced
from the heights. Rescue operations continue and the
seriously wounded are evacuated by helicopters. One
Marine dies during the night, but the other wounded
are evacuated by three helicopter flights.
In related activity, a 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines’ sup-
ply convoy, escorted by a rifle platoon of Company G,
departs Wonsan en route for Majon-ni. It is ambushed
about seven miles outside of Wonsan. A withering
storm of enemy fire strikes the column. The first two
trucks escape harm and continue to move, but the third
vehicle, transporting diesel fuel and C-3 explosives,
bursts into flames. The two lead trucks encounter an
impassable road and turn back. About the time they
reach the ambush site, the other vehicles are attempt-
ing to turn around. During the dangerous maneuver,
enemy fire continues to thrash the area. Two trucks fail
to safely navigate the narrow road and are lost.
In the meantime, reinforcements race to the area and
three Corsairs attached to VMF-312 arrive and drive off
several hundred enemy troops. Riflemen aboard six
trucks and five tanks, including a dozer tank, safely res-
cue the imperiled convoy and return it to Wonsan. Nine
Marines are killed and fifteen are wounded during the
ambush. Nonetheless, the 1st Marines at Majon-ni des-
perately need the ammunition. Lt. Colonel Ridge re-
quests delivery by air and within several hours, C-47s
of the Air Force soar overhead and deliver more than 150
parachutes, each carrying supplies to the Majon-ni
perimeter. Colonel Puller, concerned that his Marines
would require more supplies and ammunition, sched-
ules another truck convoy for November 4.
In the 5th Marines sector, the Regiment prepares to
move to Hamhung. The 1st Marines hold responsibil-
ity for the MSR as far north as Munchon and the road
from there to Chigyong. Also, a distance of about 54
miles is to be guarded by the Special Operations Com-
pany, USA, and some Korean agents. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, departs today after being released
from the 1st Marines.
November 2, 1950 502

An LST unloads equipment at Iwon, about 180 miles north of Pyongyang. Elements of the U.S. 7th Divi-
sion gather nearby on the beach.

In the 7th Marines sector, the 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, commanded by Lt. Colonel Raymond G.
Davis, departs its assembly area and moves toward
Majon-dong. It is closely followed by the 2nd Battal-
ion, commanded by Major Webb D. Sawyer. The
columns are accompanied by VMF-312’s Corsairs that
are on scene to aid reconnaissance and provide close-air
support. The columns receive some long-range fire
from Chinese units and incur a few casualties.
The 2nd Battalion takes responsibility for the heights
on both sides of the MSR, despite being the trailing
battalion. The artillery also is involved. Batteries G and
 503
North Korean POWs at Wonsan.
H are pushed to the front before noon. Battery I, also
of the 3rd Battalion, 11th Marines, commences firing
at about noon with the initial barrage. The artillery ex-
ecutes 26 missions during the day.
During the afternoon, Company D, 2nd Battalion,
7th Marines, begins to climb the eastern slopes of Hill
698 to relieve the South Koreans that are unable to se-
cure and hold the summit. Once the ROKs see the
Marines, they abandon their positions and seek positions
in the rear. Colonel Litzenberg continues to get his reg-
iment organized to meet any threat in the valley.
By about 1630, the regiment completes a 1,300-yard
advance. The troops are susceptible to coming under fire
from any direction. Litzenberg has directed that the
columns be restricted to a minimum of 4,000 yards
and a maximum of 6,000 yards, to ensure that either
close-artillery or inter-battalion infantry support can
be utilized to fend off any opposing force. Colonel
Litzenberg remains concerned about potential dangers
that could emerge. He directs Colonel Roach to take a
reconnaissance flight by helicopter to scrutinize the
Sudong valley, which abuts the smaller valley that the
7th Marines have occupied. Roach takes the excursion
flight to the area below Oro-ri during the afternoon, but
no Chinese presence is detected.
In the meantime, the 2nd Battalion pushes two
November 2, 1950
Company D platoons ahead. They drive up the steep
slope, against what starts as sporadic fire and culmi-
nates with mediocre fire from the summit. The attack-
ing platoons are ordered to pause while calls for air
strikes are made. The planes appear within several min-
utes and the suspected positions are blasted. Despite
an open field of about fifty yards, the Marines inch for-
ward and sustain casualties while they climb. The
Marines finally take the summit, but enemy troops re-
main in well-concealed positions, and they continue
their fire against the exhausted Marines. Captain Mil-
ton Hull, concerned about the condition of his Marines
after the stiff ascent, and their ability to hold the sum-
mit, orders them to pull back and take positions on the
eastern slope. Meanwhile, Hull calls for support fire to
keep heat on the enemy, but it never arrives. Company
D, 2nd Battalion, holds its positions despite the lack of
artillery fire. Company E moves to relieve Company
D.
At 2200, Company E passes through D Company
and establishes a night perimeter at positions on a
plateau that lies about 150 yards from the crest. Back
in the valley earlier in the day, aircraft had plastered the
heights to provide some security for the regiment. The
Corsairs of VMF-312 and VMF(N)-513 continue their
support missions; the former executes twelve missions
November 2, 1950
and the latter contributes several additional sorties. At
about 1700, three Marines are wounded when an
enemy shell strikes the regimental command post.
By dusk, the regiment begins to forge a night
perimeter. While Company D is committed on the
eastern slope of Hill 698, Company A, commanded by
Captain David Banks, digs in along the right side of
the MSR. Its three platoons stretch across Hill 532 to
a spindle of Hill 727, and from there the line swerves
and flows backward to cover the left flank. The line is
bolstered by a 3.5 rocket squad, deployed to intercept
any advancing armor. Mortars are placed in the vicin-
ity of the company command post.
Lieutenant Colonel Davis establishes his command
post to the rear of Company A; it is protected by one
platoon of Company C and a battalion of 81-mm mor-
tars. Opposite Company A, to the left of the MSR, C
Company establishes its line on the northeastern slopes
of Hill 698. In the process of moving into position, the
company receives some luck.
The opposition raised against Company D hinders
the movement of C Company until dark, but the Chi-
nese who have kept a constant vigil on Marine move-
ment fail to detect the deployment of Company D. To
further tighten the perimeter, one platoon of Company
B and headquarters deploy close by and to the rear of
Company A on a spindle of Hill 698. The remaining
two platoons of Company B also deploy to the rear of
Company A, but on the lower portion of Hill 727.
The 2nd Battalion maneuvers to strengthen its
perimeter, while its Company D and E are engaged on
the slopes of Hill 698. Company D remains on the
lower portion once it is relieved by E Company. Com-
pany F strings out along the precipitous Hill 727. The
2nd Battalion command post is established in a small
glen just under the positions of Company F. The CP is
bolstered by contingents of the 7th Marines antitank
company and some 4.2 mortar units.
To close the loop, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
commanded by Major Maurice Roach, deploys in such
a way as to create a backup perimeter. Opposing ridges
separated by the MSR are occupied by Companies I
and H on the right and left respectively. Both compa-
nies are linked from the south by Company G, which
stretches across the valley and holds the regiment’s
southernmost point, from where it is poised to guard the
regiment’s trains and the command post of Colonel
Litzenberg.
As the latter part of the day approaches, still there
are no significant signs of concentrated Chinese pres-
ence. The perimeter does, however, receive sporadic
incoming mortar rounds. Later, toward midnight, the
Chinese Communists make their presence known. Un-
known to the 7th Marines, who are expecting some
Chinese, there are two regiments lurking nearby. The
1st Battalion, 7th Marines, reports at about 2300 that
enemy forces are attacking its right flank, defended by
Company A. The pressure is actually a probing move-
ment.
During the night fighting, an enemy contingent at-
504
tacks the positions of Company B, 1st Battalion.
Sergeant Archie Van Winkle takes the initiative. He
races across the ground for about 40 yards, through an
onslaught of heavy fire, to regroup the command. Then
he leads an attack despite having been wounded dur-
ing his jaunt. Sergeant Van Winkle is hit again with a
grievous wound to the chest. The others provide some
momentary help, but Van Winkle refuses evacuation,
choosing instead to continue leading his beleaguered
platoon. He shouts orders until he falls into uncon-
sciousness. His extraordinary heroism inspires the pla-
toon further. They continue the fight and repulse the
assault.
Sergeant Van Winkle is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his tremendous courage and leader-
ship in the face of a superior numbered enemy force.
Van Winkle is the first Marine reservist to receive the
medal. Twelve other Marine reservists will receive it as
well.
Subsequent to the probing attacks, at 2400 (2nd-
3rd), a heavier assault begins.
In related activity, the 1st Marine Division’s recon-
naissance company moves toward Huksu-ri to probe
for Chinese presence and returns to the valley on the fol-
lowing day to assist against the Chinese attacks in the
7th Marines sector. (See also, November 3, In the 7th
Marines zone.)
In the Army’s Special Operations Company area,
enemy guerrillas strike the MSR. A call is placed for
support and the Marine 1st Tank Battalion speeds a
patrol to the area west of Munchon. The guerrillas are
driven off by the Marines. The U.S. Army contingent
loses some equipment and one man is wounded.
In the 7th Division sector, at P’ungsan, the 1st Battal-
ion, 17th Regiment, prepares to jump off and initiate
an attack at 0800; however, in the meantime, the North
Koreans launch an assault at 0700. The enemy strikes
against the Americans and ROK lines with the strength
of about one regiment to ignite a day-long slugfest.
As the fighting ensues, other elements of the regi-
ment arrive to bolster the 1st Battalion. By the latter part
of the day, all but one company arrives. By day’s end,
the 1st Regiment, Capital Division, is relieved by ele-
ments of the 17th Regiment. The ROKs depart the
area and join the Capital Division, which is driving
along the coastal road.
At the beachhead at Iwon, the debarkation contin-
ues, hindered by the weather. The unexpected slow
pace keeps many vehicles from coming ashore.
In the ROK I Corps area, at Kilchu, a town situated
twenty miles north of Songjin and almost fifteen air-
miles from the coast, has become fortified by North
Koreans who have moved north and out of the range of
the U.S. Navy’s big guns. Prior to dawn, the cavalry
regiment, South Korean Capital Division, attacks to
eliminate the opposition. Stiff resistance repels the at-
tack, but the cavalry unit is bolstered by the 1st S.K.
Regiment. Still the town holds. The fighting remains
fierce throughout the day. It continues on the follow-
ing day.
 505
In the Eighth Army area, the recent entrance of Chi-
nese troops into the Korean conflict has imperiled I
Corps. Steps are being taken to prevent it from being
trapped above the Ch’ongch’on River. There is a con-
stant flurry of activity, including a steady flow of new
orders being issued throughout the day, all centered
around getting the corps to more tenable positions to
hold the river line.
The I Corps is to funnel through the Anju–Pakch’on
areas. The U.S. 19th Regiment, 24th Division, and the
British Brigade (27th Commonwealth) will form a gal-
vanized bridgehead on the north side of the
Ch’ongch’on to defend the ford crossings of the tanks
and the bridges that span the Ch’ongch’on and Taery-
ong Rivers. The line must hold if the allied offensive is
to regain any momentum. However, a huge five-mile
hole lies between the lines of 19th Regiment’s left flank
and the British Brigade. At Anju, the 3rd Engineer
Combat Battalion resumes its role as an Infantry unit
and defends the bridges there.
In the I Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, 5th
Cavalry zone, contingents are rushing to the aid of the
cavalrymen near Unsan. The 2nd Battalion, 5th Cav-
alry, drives to positions north of Unsan and reaches
there at 0400. The 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, had held
these positions on the previous day, until forced out by
the Chinese. At dawn, Colonel Johnson’s 5th Cavalry
reinitiates its mission to rescue the beleaguered 3rd Bat-
talion, 8th Cavalry’s survivors, still at the battalion
command post, south of Unsan. The 1st and 2nd Bat-
talion, on the left and right sides of the road respec-
tively, are to drive forward and seize the enemy-
controlled ridge to their front and create a gap to permit
the 3rd Battalion to surge through and extricate the
trapped 8th Cavalrymen.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Cavalry, released for this duty
during the morning, speeds to the area. Its attack will
be bolstered by tanks. General Gay authorizes the com-
mitment of the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, to support
the attack of the 5th Cavalry. It is to drive toward the
left flank of the Chinese and pound the flank in con-
junction with the 5th Cavalry’s frontal assault. The at-
tack, also supported by air strikes, commences, but an-
ticipated light artillery is not brought up to support
the assault. Apparently, corps or even higher sources
do not authorize their movement. Consequently, the
assault force is augmented by a mere two 155-mm
howitzers. The spearhead fails to gain its objective.
Both assault companies fall short of the goal. Elements
of the 7th Cavalry needed to strike the Chinese left
flank never reach the battle area.
Following some afternoon air strikes, the 2nd Battal-
ion drives against the enemy-held positions, but the
hefty air strikes are deemed ineffective. The battalion
is unable to gain ground. However, the attack does cost
the 2nd Battalion heavy casualties. By 1500, another
grim decision is made. General Milburn tells General
Gay that the 1st Cavalry Division is to abort the attack
and retreat, which leaves the feisty survivors of the 3rd
Battalion, 8th Cavalry, to the mercy of the enemy.
November 2, 1950
Just before dark a liaison plane flies over the posi-
tions of the trapped cavalrymen and deposits an order
from General Gay, which instructs the survivors to
withdraw after dusk. The message fails to instruct the
isolated troops on how they are to transport the
wounded through the lines of the Chinese. General
Gay claims that his order to have the 5th Cavalry retreat
and leave the 3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, alone is the
most difficult decision he was ever called upon to make.
The failed attack costs the 5th Cavalry about 350 ca-
sualties and of those, about 250 of these are sustained
by the 2nd Battalion.
In the 8th Cavalry zone, many troops of the 8th Cav-
alry, including those with Major Millikin, have made
it to Ipsok from the vicinity of Unsan during the night.
Millikin’s group had crossed the river before dawn and
arrived at Ipsok at about 0800.
Millikin discovers his trains there and about 200 1st
Battalion troops (mainly men of Companies A and B)
who had been among the first to evacuate Unsan. Four
tanks (Company B, 70th Tank Battalion), five artillery
pieces and the greatest part of the battalion headquar-
ters, which departed the area the night before, reaches
Ipsok, but nearly half of the 1st Battalion’s heavy
weapons and mortars have been lost. Also, more 1st
Battalion troops filter into Ipsok to give Millikin a more
accurate picture of the disaster. The 1st Battalion casu-
alty list, including all brackets, stands at about 15 of-
ficers and 250 enlisted men.
At dawn the survivors of the 3rd Battalion near
Unsan still hold the command post. The Chinese have
been driven off. However, enemy mortars continue to
rain on the Americans, which compels them to keep
their heads low.
About one hour after first light of dawn, U.S. planes
arrive overhead and initiate day-long strikes to keep
the Chinese at bay. During the lull in the ground com-
bat, the survivors seek out the wounded and assess the
damage. Major Ormond is located, but he has been se-
verely wounded. It is also determined that the other
3rd Battalion staff officers are either wounded or miss-
ing. Just over 200 men, including six officers, remain
able to fight. About 170 wounded soldiers are rounded
up within 500 yards of the besieged 200-yard perime-
ter and brought to safety.
Attempts to reinforce and resupply the embattled
troops unfold. A helicopter tries to land to evacuate
the seriously wounded troops, but enemy fire hits the
aircraft and the crew departs without landing. However,
twenty-one critically wounded are flown out of Ipsok
by helicopters. In the meantime, some medicine is air-
dropped. And, a pilot in a Mosquito plane helps build
morale by informing the exhausted troops that a 5th
Cavalry relief column is at the road fork north of
Unsan, a position held the previous night by the 1st
Battalion, 8th Cavalry.
As previously mentioned, the attack fails. Subsequent
to the order to withdraw the 1st Cavalry Division, word
does reach the trapped troops. A plane soars overhead
and delivers orders to withdraw by their own methods.
November 3, 1950
Nevertheless, the 8th Cavalry survivors near the com-
mand post area choose to ignore the order. They re-
main in place to fight or die. The tiny perimeter is now
much smaller, and the command post (where 50–60
wounded are held) is about 150 yards outside the lines.
Only two machine guns remain there to defend it. The
tankers and infantrymen brace for a tough night as the
last of the planes depart the area.
The Chinese strike up the band, the bugles and the
whistles and everything else they can muster. Heavy
artillery shells ring the spartan perimeter and Sergeant
Elmer Miller, who thinks the shells are from mortars,
moves his tanks outside the area in an attempt to add
a slight safety net for the infantry, but to no avail. The
bombardment continues to intensify. The infantry, un-
daunted by the full-scale barrages and full of obstinacy,
continue to forestall disaster. All of the tanks are hit by
shells, and one is set afire. One of the crew is killed try-
ing to extinguish the flames.
Miller speaks with the infantry over his radio and it
is agreed that the tanks, which are extremely low on
fuel and lack sufficient ammunition, are of no more
value to the trapped soldiers. The tanks head south-
west, but within several miles, they are abandoned.
Miller and several of the tankers eventually reach
friendly lines.
In the meantime, the wounded at the perimeter
begin to outnumber the able-bodied troops. Major Or-
mond, seriously wounded during the opening moments
of the initial Chinese attack (November 1), still refuses
treatment until all the other casualties are tended.
Relentlessly, the Chinese maintain the pressure. They
mount six major night attacks against the perimeter.
But the Americans refuse to capitulate. The Americans
fire bazooka shells to ignite their own vehicles to pro-
vide some nocturnal illumination. Nonetheless, the
Chinese come in hordes, wave after wave, and charge
across an open field. During the fighting, about fifty
men of the 2nd Battalion that had been isolated in the
heights during the day race to the perimeter to give it
added strength.
Meanwhile, the Chinese eliminate the machine guns
at the old command post and overrun it. They capture
about fifteen walking wounded, but permit between
30–45 seriously wounded troops to remain. Both Cap-
tain McAbee and Chaplain Kapaun are among those
seized and taken to the Nammyon River area. At dawn,
the defenders still hold the ground and Chinese dead
are piled in layers. Still, no relief force is en route, but
a three-man patrol reaches the besieged unit.
In the ROK area, having anticipated relief by the 7th
Marines, the South Koreans have pulled back from their
forward positions at Sudong and redeployed about four
miles south of the village at a valley junction. At 0600,
the South Koreans are struck by an enemy force com-
prising about two platoons. The enemy attack subsides
after about one-half hour. Later, elements of the 7th
Marines approach. The South Koreans pull up stakes
and stream toward the rear.
In other activity, within the Iron Triangle, near P’y-
506
onggang, about 1,000 Communist guerrillas attack a
work train, but the ambush backfires. A 200-man con-
tingent of the S.K. 17th Regiment is aboard as an armed
guard. The regimental unit repels the attackers, kills
about 40 and captures 23 others. Upon interrogation,
the captives reveal that about 4,000 guerrillas are in the
area to strike all trains that attempt to reach Wonsan.
To meet the threat, the whole 27th S.K. Regiment
moves to the area and later, it is bolstered by units of
the U.S. 25th Division.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches an
RB-45 Tornado jet, which becomes its first reconnais-
sance mission of the war.
November 3 1950–January 24 1951. THIRD DES-
IGNATED CAMPAIGN: CHINESE COMMU-
NIST FORCES (CCF) INTERVENTION.
November 3 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Di-
vision sector, the Division accelerates its march to the
north, which mandates that the Wonsan-Hungnam
MSR be securely held. The 1st Marines and contin-
gents of the 1st Tank Battalion guard the route from
Wonsan to a northward point about fifteen miles dis-
tant. In conjunction, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
protect the route from Hamhung south to Chigyong.
A 54-mile gap remains nearly totally undefended.
The area stretching from Chigyong to Munchon is pro-
tected only by Special Operations Company, USA, and
some patrols of Korean Counter Intelligence units.
Both of these outfits are under X Corps control.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, 1st Marines zone, at
Kojo, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, initiates its over-
land march to Wonsan. En route, information arrives
that informs Colonel Sutter that Korean bandits, un-
aligned with either side, have blown the rail line at An-
byon. Colonel Sutter halts the march at Anbyon and he
stops two small convoys (a train and a truck convoy),
which had also departed Kojo. Another small contin-
gent of the battalion also pauses for the night at Anbyon.
In the 5th Marines zone, the regiment has been scour-
ing the routes that lead to the Fusen Reservoir, which
is located east of the 7th Marines operations, without
incident.
In the 7th Marines zone, the Chinese had initiated
small actions against the perimeter of Company A, 1st
Battalion, at 2300, on the previous night. Around mid-
night (3rd-4th), the pressure begins to intensify as the
Chinese 370th and 371st Regiments move to shred the
7th Marines. The 372nd Regiment, Chinese 124th Di-
vision, establishes a defensive perimeter in the vicinity
of Chinhung-ni, less than five miles north of Sudong.
The 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, reports two enemy
battalions on its left flank. The enemy fire continues to
increase during the first hour, and by 0100, the Chi-
nese that had silently navigated the ridge lines are
poised to launch a full-scale assault against the left and
right flanks.
At the sound of blaring bugles, the illumination of
 507
U.S. troops fire a 3.5 rocket launcher (M20) into the heights against Communist positions on 3 Novem-
ber.
flares, and the howling of shrill whistles, two battalions
of the Chinese 371st Regiment sprint down the slopes
and plow into 1st and 2nd Battalion perimeters. Com-
panies A and F on the east and Company B on the west
are struck. However, on Hill 698, Company C encoun-
ters no activity along its lines. The Chinese, who bran-
dish grenades and submachine guns, show no signs of
timidity. They descend the slopes with total disregard
November 3, 1950
to the Marines’ return fire. Close-quartered fighting
erupts in the heights, and at times, the enemy detects
holes in the line. When this opportunity arises, the Chi-
nese bolt straight down to the lowest reaches of the
slopes and gain positions within the Marine perimeter
to carve a wedge between the battalions.
During the fighting, an enemy tank moves down the
MSR and effortlessly passes a roadblock when the
November 3, 1950
guards believe it to be friendly. Soon after, a T-34
comes to a halt just to the front of Company A’s com-
mand post. At about the same time that a sergeant yells
“tank!” as a warning, the T-34 commences fire, which
prompts the Marines to scramble for safer positions
from which to return fire. But the tank roars back onto
the road and speeds south toward the 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines’ command post, then halts and bangs out some
more shells. Nevertheless, the tank fire overshoots and
instead strikes the heights to the rear of the CP. Nearby
Marines return fire, but the rockets and recoilless ri-
fles do not stop the tank.
The tank retires while under fire and moves back to
the highway and comes within firing range of Com-
pany A’s roadblock. This time the Marines are prepared.
Their 3.5-inch rockets commence fire and the tank is hit
by at least one shell, but the only apparent damage is
that the sandbags that insulate the turret are set ablaze.
However, the armor also sustains some inconspicuous
damage. The simmering tank instantly gets off a round
from about point-blank range. The solitary shell strikes
a solid devastating blow that takes a very high toll on the
antitank crew, and nearly wipes it out. The enemy tank
then disengages and moves back toward its lines, visible
because of bouncing sparks and a trail of flame that van-
ishes once the tank rounds the bend; it is abandoned
on the following day. This loss brings the number of
available enemy tanks down to four.
Nonetheless, the destruction of the tank does not
provide a reprieve for the Marines in the heights. In-
stead, the enemy, dressed in sneakers, continues to creep
and leap upon the Americans. Company A, now per-
ilously deployed and heavily outnumbered, continues
to sustain high casualties, while its 1st and 2nd Pla-
toons attempt to throw back simultaneous assaults that
press from three separate directions. The combat ex-
pands from the heights and breaks out in the lower
ground at the MSR. The 3rd Platoon, deployed at the
beginning of the spur, absorbs elements of the other
two hard-hit platoons that had been forced back.
Meanwhile, enemy infiltration prevents some of the
troops from completing the pull-back. Those troops
join with Company B, but here, too, enemy pressure
causes problems. The Communists tighten a vise on
two of Company B’s platoons and compel both to move
to the low ground. In turn, the remaining platoon is also
forced to pull back. But, the enemy’s occupation of
Company B’s ground is temporary. A do-or-die coun-
terattack retakes the ground.
In the meantime, west of the MSR, other contin-
gents of Company B remain engaged in hotly contested
skirmishes to the rear and on the left flank against Chi-
nese forces that bypass Company C on Hill 698. Rein-
forcements are committed to the battle to thwart the at-
tacks. The 1st Battalion reserve, Company B’s 2nd
Platoon, moves to fill the gap on the left flank, but
there, too, the enemy infiltration curtails the aid.
Enemy troops stretched along the river bed flood the
MSR with fire that severs the relief route and halts the
reserves before they can cross the MSR.
508
Still, in the heights and also besieged by infiltrating
Chinese, Companies E and F, 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, maintain their steadfastness, giving no
ground. The Chinese numbers continue to multiply in
all areas. By now, enemy contingents have bee-lined
from the heights and grabbed positions along the MSR.
Other components are poised to inundate the valley
and overwhelm the command posts of the AT Com-
pany, as well as both the 1st and 2nd Battalion CPs.
Chinese who spotted even small gaps along the flanks
of Companies E and F in the heights have gnawed their
way to dominant ground at the principal curve in the
MSR. The maneuver splits the route between the 1st
and 2nd Battalions. The main defending force at the
curve is Battery I, but it occupies low ground and re-
mains unaware that about one company of Chinese
troops has circumvented the Marine positions in the
heights above it and has settled in for the kill.
Meanwhile, more Communist troops flood the val-
ley. The advance overpowers the positions of the 4.2-
inch mortar sections of the 7th Marines; one mortar
tube is captured. The darkness factor does not favor
the Marines. They realize that the Chinese have struck
in force, but the total damage to the perimeters will
not be understood until the break of dawn, when it is
discovered that enemy forces hold ground that is un-
mistakably within the Marine perimeter in the valley
that lies south of Sudong. During the course of the
confusing night fighting, the mortars and the howitzers
of Batteries G and H bombard suspected enemy posi-
tions, but much is blind fire that probably scores little
damage. The defenders trying to hold Hills 698 and
727, as well as the valley, eagerly await the rising sun and
the imminent arrival of Marine Corsairs. The Chinese
have pushed, shoved, and thrown everything they have
available to dislodge the 7th Marines, but to no avail.
At the break of dawn, despite the intense pressure
and the rising rate of casualties, the 7th Marines still
hold. Colonel Litzenberg prepares to rectify a bad sit-
uation, particularly the weaknesses along his right flank.
His tattered and exhausted regiment prepares to retake
the ground and evict the Chinese. The end of the sup-
pressing darkness brings mixed blessings. The enemy
seems to be herded in batches amidst and above the
Marines. They had successfully conducted an elabo-
rate and unrestrained night-long attacking maneuver,
which has them positioned to either celebrate the de-
mise of the 7th Marines or at least act as a human guil-
lotine to decapitate many of its components.
The newly discovered irregular alignment of the
enemy regiments seems to present an immense chal-
lenge to Litzenberg’s strategy. Unwilling to capitulate
to the odds against some of his isolated units, Litzen-
berg utilizes his unexpected defensive stand to regroup.
The Marines’ artillery, mortars, heavy machine guns
and infantry fire in unison. As expected, Corsairs arrive
to stitch the ridges with steel seams. The planes of
VMF-312 remain on scene. They scorch the squatted
enemy formations that lie upon the naked ridges,
but they also form a deadly sky-chain that delivers
 509
enormous sheets of fire toward Chinese artillery, trucks
and an assortment of other vehicles. At 0910, VMF-312
is joined by four planes of VMF(N)-513. Together,
they further shatter the stability of the enemy. Mean-
while, the ground Marines struggle to hook up with
Battery I at the key road bend along the MSR.
By 1100, the Chinese are dispersed and Battery I is
again able to hold tenable positions. The battery joins
the other artillery units’ action by catapulting its sup-
ply of shells into the enemy lines. In addition, the 7th
Marines continue to kill off infiltrators that remain
within the respective sectors of the 1st and 2nd Battal-
ions. The Chinese continue to raise tough opposition
during the day, but now the Marines’ firepower is far su-
perior to that of the diminishing Chinese still in the
valley.
The 1st Battalion puts its heavy machine guns to
work. By noon, the low ground is under Marine con-
trol. And by late afternoon, more concentrated action
evicts the Chinese from the valley. The Chinese at-
tempt to depart the valley by heading north, walking
astride the railroad tracks. The 1st Battalion’s weapons
company rivets the column with machine gun shells
that ravage the ranks. The daylight retreat greatly in-
creases enemy casualties. Six hundred and sixty-two
enemy bodies are counted when the din of battle sub-
sides.
Nevertheless, other Chinese units are simultaneously
engaged against the Marines in the 2nd Battalion sec-
tor. The enemy still holds ground in the heights on a
spur of Hill 727, above the MSR at its dominant curve.
Consequently, some contingents of the 2nd Battalion re-
main isolated.
To ensure availability of sufficient ammunition, Col-
onel Litzenberg requests that planes deliver supplies to
his forward contingents. Company D, deployed at the
base of Hill 698 and south of the roadblock, is ordered
to cross the river and eliminate the blockage. Contin-
gents of Company E advance up the slope against op-
position.
By about 0800, the 2nd Platoon, led by Lieutenant
John Yancy, gains positions about 50 yards from the
summit, which is defended only by one Chinese soldier.
Atop the summit, the defenders show no signs of relin-
quishing control. The 3rd Platoon, commanded by
Lieutenant Robert Bey, moves through the 2nd Pla-
toon and charges toward the crest, but an avalanche of
grenades tumbles down the slope and forces the 3rd
Platoon to halt its attack.
At about 1400, planes arrive to plaster the top of the
mass and clear the way to the crest. Company E drives
to the peak and discovers its 40 defenders, all of whom
are deceased. In the meantime, the roadblock at the
curve still exists. Company D’s attempt to take out the
enemy on the spur of Hill 727 hits obstacles. Passage
through the valley had gone well, but at the water’s
edge, enemy fire bars a crossing. Company D impro-
vises. It swings left to new positions near the slope of
Hill 698. From there, the Marines face Chinese on the
opposite side of the MSR.
November 3, 1950
During the operation, Litzenberg again improvises.
He directs Lieutenant Delong, executive officer, AT
Company, to advance with a 75-mm recoilless rifle to
join the fire of the planes and the ongoing artillery bar-
rage that are pounding the obstacle. At about this time,
the division’s reconnaissance company returns from a
night patrol and forms near Litzenberg’s command
post. It, too, joins the battle, and fires upon the enemy
from the rear. These reconnaissance troops climb into
the heights atop the enemy positions, then they move
north along the ridgeline to attack.
All the while, Company D continues to destroy the
remaining resistance on Hill 698 while it drives toward
the blockage. The ground troops continue to receive
support from the air and artillery, a combination that
takes a high toll on the defenders and prompts them
to abandon the roadblock.
Company D, subsequent to terminating the resist-
ance on Hill 698, awaits the cessation of two air strikes,
then it mounts a stiff charge. In the meantime, the Chi-
nese head for safer positions. The reconnaissance com-
pany’s troops spot the retreating Chinese as they scurry
across open ground. Immediately, they call for air
strikes to annihilate them, but the response is negative,
as Captain Hull’s Marines are too close, and in fact,
directly in the target area.
The MSR is re-secured by 1810; however, the enemy
does raise two counterattacks to oust Company D.
Both assaults fail. Twenty-eight dead Chinese are
counted at the roadblock. With the route again open,
Marine supply convoys begin again to roll north from
the regimental CP at about dusk to bolster the 1st and
2nd Battalions and to bring out the wounded. About
100 casualties are transported back to either the divi-
sion hospital or to Hungnam, to receive treatment at the
121st Army Evacuation Hospital.
The Chinese resort to long-range harassment fire
and a spattering of some light contact through the night
of the 3rd-4th. Nevertheless, Marine artillery and mor-
tars negate the enemy’s efforts. The sporadic night con-
tacts are deemed to be either Chinese patrols or Com-
munist stragglers, not full-size contingents.
The fighting initiated on November 2 continues
through November 4, and in the process, the ranks of
both attacking enemy regiments are greatly thinned.
The 371st Regiment’s 1st and 3rd Battalions sustain a
combined loss of about five companies and the 370th
Regiment’s 3rd Battalion incurs the loss of about two
companies. The dead count in the 370th Regiment’s
field of attack stands at 793.
Subsequent to the battering the two enemy regiments
have received at the hands of the 7th Marines, they
move back to the lines of the 372nd Regiment to de-
fend against the expected advance of the 7th Marines.
In addition, planes spot various enemy columns while
they hurriedly move in the area south of the Chosin
Reservoir. The reports estimate about three convoys that
travel in groups of about 15 to 20 trucks in a column.
Litzenberg absorbs the information and prepares to en-
counter more opposition on the following day.
November 4, 1950
North of Chinhung-ni, elements of the 124th Chi-
nese Division entrench themselves on gargantuan Hills
891 and 987. These dominant masses overlook the
MSR at a point about two miles north of the town.
The Chinese are unable to accommodate the remain-
ing four tanks of the 344th N.K. Tank Regiment be-
cause the narrow roads will not permit passage of
armor.
Meanwhile, relative calm settles in for the night and
the 7th Marines’ perimeter, which had been unnaturally
altered on the previous day, is restored. One difference
is that east of the roadblock, the heights are now pos-
sessed by Company D. At dawn, probing patrols will
penetrate farther north to set the tone for the advance.
In the 7th Division area, At Iwon, the 3rd Battalion,
31st Infantry Regiment, debarks. The remainder of the
regiment comes ashore on the following day. Its mission
will be to advance and deploy west of the 17th Regiment
on its left flank in the vicinity of P’ungsan.
In other activity, the 17th Regiment at P’ungsan re-
quests an airdrop of ammunition and supplies.
In the Eighth Army area, 1st Cavalry Division sector,
the dwindling number of survivors, 3rd Battalion, 8th
Cavalry, receive no reprieve. The Chinese continue to
hammer the defenders, but the Americans exhibit a
fighting spirit. Early in the day, a three-man detachment
moves to the old command post to get rations to the
wounded. The patrol is told that the Chinese had been
there and taken prisoners.
The enemy attacks continue throughout the day, but
the Americans again hold and throw the Chinese back.
The defenders continue to rack up heavy casualties
against the Chinese, but they attack in legions. The
cavalry’s ammunition is quickly depleting and no air
support is available, but the Americans borrow from
the Chinese. After each attack, the troops slither out of
their holes and retrieve ammunition and weapons from
the piles of dead Chinese that lie close to their posi-
tions. The Americans keep the weapons but return the
ammunition on each succeeding attack.
The Chinese inch closer, but the 8th Cavalry retains
its honor and still controls the perimeter. The number
of Communist buglers that have been silenced is un-
known, but the blaring noise continues through the
night. At dawn (4th), having repelled all assaults, the
cavalrymen maintain their positions. The 8th Cavalry
reports that it is about 55 percent under strength. Di-
vision consensus considers the regiment unfit for com-
bat until it receives replacement troops and becomes
re-supplied.
In the British 27th Commonwealth Brigade zone, pur-
suant to orders, the Brigade has moved from Taech’on.
It deploys near Pakch’on to build a defense at the north-
west junction of the bridgehead. Chinese Communist
troops move into Taech’on soon after the British de-
part. The British have had some slight skirmishes at
Taech’on and several enemy troops desert and enter
British lines. The deserters are Chinese, and upon in-
spection of enemy dead near Taech’on, it is discovered
that they are attired in superb fur boots.
510
In the 24th Division sector, the 19th Regiment moves
from its positions and redeploys northeast of Anju;
from left to right, the 1st, 2nd and 3rd Battalions
stretch from the Ch’ongch’on River to the Kuryong
River. Meanwhile, the 5th RCT deploys to the rear of
the ROK II Corps, less than five miles northeast of
Kunu-ri. The South Korean 7th Division holds Hill
622, about three miles northeast of the town.
In the 2nd Division sector, the 9th Regiment is de-
ployed south of Kunu-ri and delegated with responsi-
bility for guarding the road to Sunchon.
In the ROK II Corps area, after the redeployment of
the 19th Regiment, 24th Division, the S.K. 1st Divi-
sion disengages its fight with the enemy at positions
northeast of the Americans. Afterwards, the ROKs
withdraw through the U.S. positions and cross the
Ch’ongch’on. The maneuver by the South Koreans is
complete by the following day.
The S.K. 7th Division’s 3rd and 5th Regiments are
stationed on the most strategic terrain at Kunu-ri, Hill
622. It is a huge mountain that lies several miles north-
east of the town. The 8th Regiment, 7th S.K. Divi-
sion, is posted east of Kunu-ri and held in reserve. Hill
622 controls the town and Ch’ongch’on Valley, through
which flows the rails and communication lines. The
U.S. 5th RCT is stationed to the immediate rear of the
S.K. 7th Division.
November 4 U.N. minesweepers conclude the
minesweeping operation to clear the inner harbor at
Wonsan. Still, mines remain in the channel. The
minesweepers move to Hungnam to secure a thirty-
two mile channel and also to sweep the inner harbor.
In the X Corps area, Special Operations Company,
USA, operating between Chigyong and Munchon, in-
forms corps that it has spotted huge numbers of North
Koreans as they descend into the area west of their po-
sitions. Also, Corps informs the 1st Marine Division
that mounted guerrillas had struck Kowan about fif-
teen miles north of Munchon and fired upon the rail-
way police.
In the 1st Marine Division area, the command post
is relocated from Wonsan to Hungnam in coordina-
tion with the assignments that direct the 5th and 7th
Marines to initiate missions in the north. The 2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, which has been under the opera-
tional control of the 1st Marines while performing pa-
trol details for the 1st Marines, is included in this
movement. The 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, and two ac-
companying convoys arrive at Wonsan from Anbyon.
General O.P. Smith arrives at Hungnam by helicop-
ter and establishes the command post at 1100. At 2130,
a train transporting 160 officers and men of headquar-
ters also arrives from Wonsan. Enemy guerrilla fire
strikes the train while it is en route, but no casualties
are sustained. A defensive perimeter is established to
fortify the CP. Two outposts and eight machine gun
positions are spread about to guard all probable ap-
proach routes. Unknown to the Marines at the com-
mand post, three nearby connected caves house about
 511
250 tons of high explosives. This dangerous material is
not discovered for about one week. A detachment of
sixteen Marines guards it until it can be removed from
the caves and detonated.
In other activity, Division issues OpnO 10–50; it
directs the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, to prepare to
move to Chonjin, located 220 air-miles from Wonsan;
however, the order is rescinded by X Corps on Novem-
ber 9.
In the 1st Marines sector, At 1440, a heavily guarded
thirty-four supply vehicle convoy departs Wonsan for
Manjon-ni. A light observation plane is airborne and
two Corsairs are available to bolster the column, but
no forward air controller makes the trip. Instead, a tac-
tical air control party, placed toward the rear of the
convoy, receives the information from the OY and
transfers it to the VMF-312 Corsairs. Company A, re-
inforced by one platoon of Company C, engineers, a
mortar section and a contingent of recoilless rifles, pro-
vides ground security for the convoy.
The engineers act as vanguard to clear the path of
obstacles. The column encounters four unprotected
enemy roadblocks. Engineers effortlessly plug the
craters to speed progress, but the next obstacle is heav-
ily fortified by troops in the heights that spring an am-
bush on the engineers. About eight miles out, a wall of
fire cascades down from the high ground on both sides
of the primitive road. Vehicles stall and clog the path,
which hinders the advance of the riflemen. The engi-
neers take cover near their vehicles and return effective
fire to forestall disaster.
In the meantime, the Corsairs arrive to assist, but
the effort falls short due to the lack of the forward air
controller and the approach of dusk.
The convoy’s commanding officer, Captain Barrow,
attempts a return to Wonsan rather than risk unneces-
sary casualties in the darkness. The vehicles reverse di-
rection through a series of harrowing turns on a dan-
gerous road, where one false move could plunge a
vehicle several hundred feet into the valley. Long-range
artillery fire accelerates and it prompts Barrow to order
the convoy to proceed without lights.
The besieged convoy makes it back, but along the
route, one vehicle misses a turn and shoots off the path.
Fortuitously, the truck, transporting twenty Marines,
lands on a rare road shoulder and no fatalities occur.
Other Marines pull the men to safety. Captain Bar-
row’s force sustains eight men killed and sixteen in-
jured. The convoy loses five vehicles. Barrow’s rein-
forced Company A retraces the route on the following
morning.
Colonel Puller informs Barrow that the failure of the
mission was due to the late start and the absence of a
TAC, not his decision in the field.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 5th Marines detaches
its 1st Battalion to divisional control. In addition, its 3rd
Battalion deploys near Oro-ri, while the 2nd Battalion
moves toward the Sinhung Valley to relieve the S.K.
18th Regiment. The 2nd Battalion effect the relief at
about 1145, at positions about five miles north and
November 4, 1950
fifteen miles east of the 7th Marines. Lt. Colonel Roise’s
2nd Battalion is given the task of guarding the Sinhung
corridor while assessing the enemy’s positions and re-
lated strength. The 2nd Battalion is to inspect partic-
ular northerly paths to the Chosin and Fusen Reser-
voirs. Patrols will be initiated on the following day.
In the 7th Marines sector, at about dawn, elements of
the 1st Battalion advance through the valley floor and
move toward Sudong. They reach the fringes of the
town without incident, and then return to the perime-
ter, again without encountering resistance. Colonel
Litzenberg directs the 2nd Battalion to hold in place
in the heights on Hills 698 and 727, to provide cover
fire for the advance. At about 0800, the column moves
out, spearheaded by the 1st Platoon’s reconnaissance
company. The reconnaissance company moves swiftly
in jeeps. Soon after, the 2nd and 3rd Platoons begin
to move through the heights above the town, while the
1st Platoon enters the supposedly unoccupied town.
At a point midway through the town, the lead jeeps
swing around a turn and stun some lingering Chinese
troops. A heated fire-fight erupts, but thirty minutes
later, three Chinese are killed and twenty others are
taken prisoner. Meanwhile, the 7th Marines maintains
its advance as it shadows the reconnaissance company.
Following the interruption at Sudong, the 2nd Pla-
toon replaces the 1st Platoon as vanguard. Later, the
column reinitiates its drive toward Chinhung-ni, while
the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, moves out from its po-
sitions south of Sudong and follows the route taken
through the lowlands by the reconnaissance company.
At the next objective, Chinhung-ni, there is a rail-
road connecting point that services Funchilin Pass with
cable cars. The rail lines straddle the west side of the
river, opposite the highway, and the tracks enter the
town by way of a bridge that crosses over a medium
stream.
At Samgo station, slightly beyond the town, a small
contingent of Chinese soldiers are posted, but they seem
not to notice the approaching jeeps of the reconnais-
sance company that are clearly visible on the highway
on the opposite bank. Neither do the Marines detect the
presence of the four T-34s lying in wait along their ap-
proach route, but suspicions are soon raised when con-
spicuous enemy tank tracks are discovered at a point
about 2,000 yards in front of Chinhung-ni. Word of the
tracks is sent back, but orders from Lt. Colonel Davis
instruct the reconnaissance platoon to advance.
The 2nd Platoon moves directly past the first Com-
munist tank as it reaches the road that enters the town.
The vanguard continues for a short distance, and at
that point, the Marines glance across the river and spot
the Chinese on the opposite bank, yet they fail to de-
tect yet a second tank that is perilously close to them.
The Marines fire upon the enemy ground troops,
prompting the Chinese to hurriedly disperse, but not
before many of them succumb to the effective fire.
During the brief exchange, Lieutenant Sharon and his
troops notice a strange pile of brush, which conceals
the second tank. There are no visible signs of it being
November 4, 1950
occupied. Sharon and two other Marines board the
tank and suddenly the periscope begins to turn. Staff
Sergeant Twohey and Corporal McDermott both move
into action. McDermott breaks the glass, while Twohey
quickly deposits a grenade into the tank. Sharon,
Twohey and McDermott fly from the tank to take cover
just as it detonates.
The grenade damages but does not kill the tank,
which suddenly bolts forward. Twohey re-boards the
cantankerous vehicle and makes another grenade de-
posit. In quick motion, the grenade is flipped into the
periscope. Afterwards, a huge bang terminates any fur-
ther movement by the tank. Smoke emerges from the
charred armor, but to be sure, more devastation is
thrust upon the tank. Other troops, including the re-
coilless rifles and Company C’s 3.5-inch rocket crews,
begin to catch up with the vanguard. The recoilless ri-
fles and rockets blast the tank to ensure its demise.
In the meantime, the first tank remains tranquil, but
at the burst of fire, a third tank springs from its cover,
a thatched hut that collapses as the tank roars out. The
enemy tank appears as the nearby valley becomes con-
sumed with advancing vehicles and Marines. The tank’s
turret points toward the column and prepares to unleash
its 81-mm shells.
A forward air observer, Lieutenant Elledge, radios
for air support while the recoilless rifles and rockets
again commence fire. The tank is hit, but not fatally.
It advances farther and comes under attack from the
air. One of the planes dives and delivers a killing blow
with two 5-inch rockets that strike the mark and in-
stantly decimate the armor. Both VMF-312 and
VMF(N)-513 provide close-support missions. It is not
determined which outfit scores the kill.
Following the destruction of the second tank, Lieu-
tenant Sharon and the reconnaissance Marines move
forward, but prudently, in expectation of more trou-
ble. And they find it. The landscape is again unnatu-
rally bulging. A fourth tank is detected, nestled just to
their front and nudged alongside a hill.
Meanwhile, the trailing Marines continue to ad-
vance, and at about the same time Sharon spots the
fourth tank, the initial tank is discovered by other
Marines. Tank number one, back near Chinhung-ni,
finds itself in the middle of the advancing Marine col-
umn. The recoilless rifles and the rockets hammer it
with fire. The crew decides to abandon the tank and
surrender.
In the meantime, the final tank comes under attack
by Sharon’s men, who ford the stream and close on the
armor. But before a shot is fired, the crew, which is out-
side and to the rear of the tank, capitulates without a
struggle. The surrender culminates the demise of the
344th N.K. Tank Regiment. The abandoned tank is
not spared. The recoilless rifles and rockets destroy it.
All the while, the trailing elements continue to arrive
at Chinhung-ni. The 7th Marines gains about 6,000
yards by the middle of the afternoon and at that point,
Colonel Litzenberg prepares to form his perimeter. By
1600, the 1st Battalion begins to dig in tightly. Recon-
512
naissance company patrols are dispatched into Fun-
chilin Pass to probe enemy strength and confirm ear-
lier reports of enemy troops across the canyon from
Hill 987 on Hill 891. The units are to penetrate about
2,000 yards and establish an outpost on Hill 891’s
southern tip.
The Reconnaissance company’s 3rd Platoon, led by
Lt. Charles Puckett, takes the point as the column rolls
about one mile deep into the pass and reaches a point
where the road swerves to the east and obstinate Hill
987 bulges on the west. The precarious highway moves
dead east for about 1,000 yards before it makes a deep
curve, and then ascends on a coinciding route that
heads back toward the initial point of the curve, but
just before the point, it again changes direction and
leads north, astride the granite-like slopes of Hill 891.
The road challenges all vehicles, with or without ac-
companying opposition. The patrol proceeds with pru-
dence and expects danger at any moment.
At about 1630, immediately after rounding the steep
curve, the Communists commence firing. To the left,
across the abyss, shells descend from Hill 987. From
the front on the slopes of Hill 891, more fire is poured
upon the lead vehicles. To the right, a Chinese patrol
operating on the serpentine highway joins the attack.
The riveting fire halts the patrol and compels it to re-
main pinned to the ground with no alternative except
to await help.
Finally, through the combined aid of Marine aircraft
and darkness, the besieged patrol is able to extricate it-
self and return to the perimeter. Enemy fire inflicts fa-
talities. Two men are killed and five others are
wounded. Also, the two lead jeeps are destroyed.
The remainder of the night is calm for the 7th
Marines. During the tranquility, Colonel Litzenberg
establishes the blueprint for the following day’s ad-
vance. The Marine night fighters of VMF(N)-513 re-
ceive little sleep. They execute sorties to bombard and
strafe enemy convoys in the vicinity of the Chosin
Reservoir to lessen resistance for the following day.
Also, during the day, an enemy contingent attacks
Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, at its posi-
tions on Hill 532. The contingent, led by Sergeant
James L. Poynter, repels the assault, despite initially
being surrounded. Poynter spots three enemy machine
guns being brought against his diminutive command.
He bolts from his position, knocks out two of the crews
and then eliminates the third gun, but in the process,
Poynter is mortally wounded. His actions save the pla-
toon, which is able to extricate itself from encirclement
and deploy in more favorable positions. Sergeant Poyn-
ter is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his
extraordinary heroism under fire.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines,
deployed to afford cover fire for the day’s offensive, en-
gages the enemy at a strategic position near Hills 698
and 727. Company E receives the task of taking the el-
evation, which has already survived five assaults by
other U.N. units, including Marines. Corporal Lee H.
Phillips leads the attack and begins to ascend the nearly
 513
un-ascendable hill. When the detachment makes it up
the rocky cliff, its numbers have been cut to five, with
the others all wounded along the way. Nevertheless,
Phillips’ command charges against the strongpoints and
eliminates all but one; however, his command is again
thinned, down to three men. Undaunted, Phillips con-
tinues the ascent to eliminate the lone surviving obsta-
cle.
The position is seized by the Marines, but shortly
thereafter, a larger enemy force counterattacks. The at-
tack is repulsed; however, Corporal Phillips is killed. He
is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his
extraordinary heroism and leadership in the face of a
hostile force.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the tardiness of the
unloading operation at Iwon beachhead has created
pressure on the 17th Regiment at P’ungsan. The regi-
ment on the previous day had requested an airdrop with
particular emphasis on the delivery of 4.2-inch, 60-
mm and 81-mm mortar ammunition to ensure it has
enough weaponry and supplies to meet any threat that
might arise. The items are dropped this day.
In other activity, patrols discover that the enemy to
their front has vanished. Expecting no resistance, the
17th Regiment advances, feeling the chill of the 2-de-
gree weather, to the Ungi River without incident.
At Iwon, the 31st Regiment completes its debarkation
and begins to initiate its movement to the high ground
at the Pujon Reservoir, where it will deploy west of the
17th Regiment to guard the left flank. It, too, will soon
experience the Korean winter in the mountains.
The 32nd Regiment begins to debark, then it ad-
vances southwest along the coast, and after passing
Hamhung, it pivots and heads northeast to deploy at
Tangp’ang-ni, from where it will stage to participate
in the upcoming offensive.
In the ROK I Corps area, heavy fighting continues at
Kilchu as elements of the S.K. Capital Division reini-
tiate the battle to seize the town. The contest contin-
ues into the following day.
In the Eighth Army area, 1st Cavalry Division sector,
the survivors of the 8th Cavalry (south of Unsan) now
number about 450 men; however, of these, about 250
troops are wounded and unable to fight. Realizing that
circumstances are not going to be altered for the bet-
ter, it is decided that those still able should attempt to
break for safety. A small 4-man probing contingent,
composed of two officers and two enlisted men, squirm
out of the perimeter and creep to the old command
post, then, after a brief pause, the group safely makes
it to the river and beyond to a village, unoccupied ex-
cept for several wounded Chinese.
Lieutenants Walter Mayo and George Peterson re-
main at the village to check out the crossing site, while
the enlisted men, at about 1430, return to the 3rd Bat-
talion perimeter to bring out the remaining officers and
troops. Captain George McDonald (2nd Battalion),
Captain William McClain (Company E), Lieutenant
Paul Bromser (Company L) and the other healthy
troops begin to head east and barely in the nick of time.
November 4, 1950
Just after they move out, the Chinese carpet the perime-
ter with white phosphorous shells, obviously prepara-
tion fire for yet another assault. As the able-bodied
troops depart, reportedly there are no tears from the
wounded. In fact, they remain steadfast and encourage
those leaving to hurry back with reinforcements. Cap-
tain Clarence Anderson, battalion surgeon, elects to re-
main behind with his wounded.
The 200 evacuees continue moving throughout the
night, disregarding their weariness and the inclement
weather that deteriorates further when a rainstorm
moves over the area. The column swings from its east-
ward direction and moves northeast, and then it swings
southward. By the following morning, the column still
has not been spotted by the Chinese.
Major Ormond is taken prisoner, but he succumbs
from his wounds. Later, it is reported that he had been
buried near Unsan. The chaplain, Father Kapaun, dies
in a Communist prison in 1951. Captain Filmore
McAbee and the surgeon, Captain Anderson, survive
captivity and return to the U.S.A. during the POW ex-
change after hostilities end.
At Anju, endless columns of refugees flood across
the Ch’ongch’on River heading south.
In the 24th Division sector, the U.S. and British con-
tingents that hold the line north of the Ch’ongch’on
River to protect the retreat of the I Corps receive a
strong attack. About 1,000 Chinese soldiers skirt across
the Kuryong River and strike the rear of the 1st Battal-
ion, 19th Regiment. The effect is devastating. The Chi-
nese interrupt a radio operator while he is informing
headquarters of the attack and abruptly terminate the
transmission. Soon after, and without any genuine re-
sistance, evident by the lack of casualties, the Chinese
have overrun the positions and the regiment abandons
its positions hastily.
Reinforcements rush to the scene, but the 1st Battal-
ion almost in its entirety bolts eastward across the Kury-
ong and the Ch’ongch’on Rivers. Its equipment is aban-
doned; however, some equipment and vehicles are
self-destroyed. The reinforcements, composed of con-
tingents of the 3rd Battalion, make no headway. The re-
mainder of the battalion enters the fight, but still the
Chinese hold the road.
At about the same time, Chinese pound against the
defenses of the 5th RCT south of the river. The alarms
ring loudly at divisional headquarters and General
Church attempts to forestall total disaster. Church di-
rects General Garrison Davidson to take command of
all 24th Division troops north of the Ch’ongch’on. By
about noon, Davidson reaches the 19th Regimental
command post and takes command of TF Davidson
and in addition, he is directed to co-ordinate the activ-
ity of the British troops at the bridgehead. However, the
enemy presses forward at full-throttle. At some points,
the night attacks further pierce the lines of the 19th
Regiment.
By mid-afternoon, General Church orders the 21st
Regiment to await darkness, then ford the Ch’ongch’on
to prepare to attack on the following day to push the
November 5, 1950
Chinese back. British defenders on the western por-
tion of the Ch’ongch’on bridgehead receive a slight re-
prieve, but only until dawn on the 5th.
Across from Pakch’on, on the west bank of the Taery-
ong River, the Australian 3rd Battalion and the bulk of
the British Argyll 1st Battalion are deeply dug in at their
positions. The Middlesex Regiment and Company A
of the Argylls are posted in and around Pakch’on. These
British Commonwealth units are bolstered by the guns
of the 1st Cavalry’s 61st FABn, which are deployed less
than three miles south of the town.
In addition to the attacks against the defenses at
Kunu-ri and the western sector of the Ch’ongch’on
bridgehead, the Chinese have dispatched other contin-
gents east with orders to bypass Pakch’on and close to-
ward the U.S. artillery positions to eliminate the guns
and, simultaneously, sever the road to the rear of the
British. The mission succeeds. By dawn November 5,
the enemy is poised for the attack.
In the 5th RCT zone, the enemy crashes through the
defenses of the South Koreans on Hill 622 and plows
into the American defenses south of the Ch’ongch’on
near Kunu-ri. The progress threatens the right flank of
Eighth Army. The Chinese elements are components of
the 38th Army and estimated to be about division
strength.
Initially, the 5th RCT surrenders about 1,000 yards,
but it quickly bounces back. The vicious fighting at
times is close-quartered, with tenacious hand-to-hand
fighting. Chinese machine guns enter the fight and rip
into the ranks. Lieutenant Morgan Hansel disregards his
own safety and singlehandedly charges numerous
enemy emplacements to prevent the annihilation of one
platoon of Company C. The courageous action of
Hansel results in the loss of his life. But, the regiment
thwarts the attacks and holds Kunu-ri.
In the ROK II Corps area, Chinese forces close against
Hill 622 and the powerful surge plows into the S.K.
3rd Regiment and drives it back toward U.S. lines. The
retreating South Koreans are halted and by Captain
Hubert Ellis, who dispatches the unit back toward the
hill. In addition, the 8th Regiment is taken out of re-
serves and committed.
Heavy see-saw fighting continues on the mountain
throughout the day, but by dusk, the Chinese are driven
back and the South Koreans control the strategic north-
west ridge.
In Air Force activity, while Eighth Army comes under
heavy pressure, B-26s arrive to provide close-air sup-
port. The air strikes in the vicinity of Chongju kill
about 500 of the enemy.
November 5 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Di-
vision sector, 1st Marines zone, Captain Barrow again
leads his convoy toward Majon-ni. It departs Wonsan
at 0830, which should provide plenty of daylight if the
Communists intend to spring another ambush. Bar-
row also changes the rules. Anticipating that the enemy
will hear the noisy lead vehicles, he sends out his in-
fantry with orders to alternate the platoons, but main-
514
tain a pace that keeps them at least 1,000 yards in front
of the vehicles. The modified plan produces excellent
results.
Apparently, the enemy is resting and having break-
fast while awaiting the roar of the vehicles when the
Americans unexpectedly arrive. The vanguard platoon,
led by 2nd Lieutenant Donald R. Jones, silently rounds
a curve near the scene of the previous day’s fighting
and discovers an early morning picnic with about sev-
enty participants. Without warning, the platoon ri-
flemen open fire. The threat that had lurked is in-
stantly terminated. Some of the contingent escape, but
fifty-one of the Communists succumb and three oth-
ers are taken prisoner. The Marines sustain no casual-
ties, nor do they sustain any for the remainder of the
trip.
The convoy passes the ambush scene unhindered by
the enemy corpses and rolls into Manjon-ni just after
lunch without further incident. The supply-laden
trucks are greeted jubilantly by the 3rd Battalion de-
fenders; Army Intelligence has informed them that the
enemy has planned to attack the perimeter at 0100 on
the 6th.
With the arrival of the ammunition and supplies,
coupled with Barrow’s reinforced Company A, 1st Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, the 3rd Battalion initiates a search
mission to discover the suspected 2,000–3,000 enemy
troops expected to launch the attack. A strong force
composed of Companies G and I, bolstered by a con-
tingent of weapons company, advances about six miles
along the Pyongyang Road to the suspected objective.
Except for some distant sniper fire, the convoy en-
counters no resistance. Eighty-one enemy troops are
encountered, but they choose to surrender without any
prompting. Although it had not been necessary, the
convoy was further buffered by artillery units in
Manjon-ni. Nevertheless, Army Intelligence reports
prove true. The Communists initiate an attack during
the early morning of November 6.
In the 5th Marines sector, in the Sinhung Valley, the
2nd Battalion initiates reconnaissance patrols composed
of about squad strength. Additionally, reinforced com-
bat patrols are dispatched to augment the inspection
of the routes that lead to the reservoirs. These patrols
continue until November 9. Ultimately, the patrols dis-
cover that all southern routes to the Fusen and Chosin
Reservoirs are not fitted for military traffic. However,
the road that leads northeast from Sinhung is capable
of sustaining traffic to the sector of the 7th Division
and beyond to the Manchurian border. Lieutenant Col-
onel Roise’s 2nd Battalion begins making contact with
U.S. Army patrols on November 7.
In the 7th Marines sector, the memory of the ambush
on the previous day is fresh in the minds of the regiment
as it plans to advance. Mortars and the artillery of the
3rd Battalion, 11th Marines, are to remain in positions
south of Sudong, from where they can catapult sup-
port fire if opposition emerges from the heights in Fun-
chilin Pass.
At 0700, the 1st Platoon’s reconnaissance company
 515 November 5, 1950

retraces the steps of the patrol that

had gotten snagged on the previous
day. It drives down the highway,
guarding the right flank in concert
with the 1st Battalion, also desig-
nated to protect the right flank.
The 2nd Battalion trails the lead
1st Battalion, but it is to pass
through and take the lead to initi-
ate the attack to secure the pass.
However, the enemy remains
tightly concealed and within im-
pregnable positions, awaiting the
arrival of the vanguard.
At the same place Lieutenant
Puckett’s 3rd Platoon had been
bushwhacked, the Chinese catch
the 1st Platoon, led by Lt. Har-
gett. It, too, is unable to advance,
nor is it able to immediately retire.
But within minutes, support fire
arrives to cool the slopes. The ar-
tillery crashes down on the enemy
positions and the planes of VMF-
312 arrive on scene to blister the
heights. During the enfilade, the
1st Platoon pulls back to avoid the
friendly fire.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battal-
ion, commanded by Major Roach,
departs at 0800 to clear the obsta-
cles. Company I drives toward
Hill 987, while Company G, com-
manded by Captain Thomas
Cooney, advances toward equally
obstinate Hill 891. The enemy
raises walls of fire that strike both
companies as they reach the vicious
bend in the road. The intense fire Chinese POWs.

Two captured Russian-built 76-mm self-propelled guns.

November 5, 1950
A U.S. infantryman has a .30-caliber Browning automatic rifle (M1918A2) at an assembly area.
essentially severs the highway and forces the Marines
of Company G to hold where they stand. The Marines
return fire as effectively as possible. Captain Cooney is
wounded twice during the day’s fighting.
Meanwhile, from about 1000 until the end of the
day, the engagement leans toward the action of the
planes, artillery and mortars that support the Marines
against the long-range mortars of the enemy. During the
course of the day’s combat, General O.P. Smith pin-
points Koto-ri as the initial target, but the task becomes
unattainable. The day-long ground skirmishes remain
nearly stationary with no measurable gains.
During the incessant bombardments, one of the
enemy troops decides to call it a day. He jumps from
his position and surrenders to Marines. Following his
capture, the Chinese soldier outlines the positions of his
comrades. The Americans zero in on the two battal-
ions on Hills 891 and 987 and the enemy battalion
held in reserve on a knob between Hill 987 and 1304.
The huge amount of firepower dispensed by the
Americans keeps the enemy at bay and scores much de-
struction to men and equipment. Although the Chinese
in the heights sustain heavy losses and have watched
many of their guns fall prey to the American air and
artillery barrages, they maintain control of their posi-
tions when the fighting subsides at the fall of darkness.
In the meantime, Marine pilots from VMF-312
pound enemy positions throughout the day to disrupt
convoys running between Chinhung-ni and the Chosin
Reservoir. Twenty-one trucks are decimated. During
516
the raids, the pilots report that the ridges are infested
with Chinese. They also report that the air strikes have
greatly diminished their numbers.
The planes of VMF(N)-513 execute 37 sorties that
consume 90 hours of close-support missions. The rov-
ing aircraft blast an array of targets that stretch from
Koto-ri to the reservoir at Haguru, and inflict more
losses of men, equipment and vehicles upon the enemy.
Marine casualties for the day are extremely light, and
due as much to the nasty terrain as well as enemy fire.
It becomes apparent that the Marines will need another
day to take their objective. Colonel Litzenberg estab-
lishes a night perimeter and prepares to reinitiate the at-
tack on the morning of the 6th. The 3rd Battalion will
lead the attack. As darkness settles, the area at the pass
again becomes peaceful and no enemy night-attack
forms. Only a few minor encounters occur along the
perimeter.
In the U.S. 3rd Infantry Division, the first units of
the 3rd Division arrive at Wonsan. The 2nd Battalion,
65th RCT, debarks, followed by the remainder of the
regiment. The operation is completed on November
18.
The 65th Regiment is the first of the 3rd Division
units to join X Corps. When the Regiment embarked
from Puerto Rico, its enlisted men were all Puerto Ricans,
and 64 of the complement of 206 officers were also
Puerto Rican. Now it is composed of Puerto Ricans, men
from the Virgin Islands, Japanese-Americans and Amer-
icans. South Korean draftees also join the regiment.
 517
In the ROK I Corps area, at Kilchu, following sev-
eral days of fighting, the South Koreans encircle the
town before dawn. The North Koreans continue to re-
sist, but by noon, the town is captured by the S.K. 1st
Regiment and the cavalry regiment. Corsairs attached
to the 1st Marine Air Wing support the attacks and
knock out two tanks and four pieces of artillery, and
they also slay about 350 ground troops.
On the following day, when the toll is taken, the
enemy has sustained 530 killed. The South Koreans
lose 21 killed and 91 wounded. Upon questioning
POWs, it is determined that Kilchu had been defended
by elements of the N.K. 57th Brigade. In addition, the
South Koreans capture nine 45-mm antitank guns.
In the Eighth Army area, Army proclaims that due
to an “ambush,” all arriving replacement troops would
be assigned to the 1st Cavalry Division. The decision
is mandated because of the mauling of the 8th Cavalry
Regiment at Unsan. Casualty figures, thus far, are high;
about 1,000 troops are listed as missing in action. How-
ever, stragglers continue to arrive within friendly lines
and when the final census is taken, the losses total about
600 troops.
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the surviving men
of the 8th Cavalry continue to head toward friendly
lines. From their positions in the heights, they observe
Chinese troops, including infantry and horse cavalry,
that are moving on a road below them. Undetected,
the Americans continue to move through the hills to-
ward Ipsok.
In the 24th Division sector, Colonel Throckmorton’s
5th RCT has repelled the Chinese attacks of the pre-
vious day. Kunu-ri remains safe.
In the 19th Regimental zone, the previous day’s fight-
ing at the bridgehead has cost the 1st Battalion some
ground, but this day the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 21st
Regiment, are thrown into the fight and the ground is
regained. Nevertheless, the Chinese continue to infil-
trate in great numbers and they then combine with
North Korean forces. The Chinese 355th Regiment
(119th Division), the Chinese 358th Regiment (120th
Division) and one N.K. regiment oppose the U.S. 19th
Regiment.
After dark, the Chinese and North Koreans launch
an attack that crashes against the entire front and lasts
through the night of the 5th-6th. Vicious combat
erupts in every sector and artillery fire is called upon to
assist the outnumbered ground troops. The 1st and 3rd
Battalions successfully hold their ground; however, the
Chinese hit the 2nd Battalion on Hill 123 especially
hard. The attacks strike the front and rear of the line to
gain surprise against Companies E and G. Hill 123, on
the right flank of Eighth Army and less than five miles
above the Ch’ongch’on River, overlooks the village of
Ch’ongch’on.
Apparently, some Chinese discover the communica-
tion wires of Company E and trace them to the rear of
the command post. One trooper, Corporal Mitchell
Red Cloud, Jr., Company E, is the first to be greeted
by the Chinese. Red Cloud, positioned on the tip of
November 5, 1950
the ridge where a path heads to the command post,
spots the enemy. He clasps his BAR, bolts to his feet and
unleashes devastating fire that rips into the Chinese at
point-blank range. Return fire cuts Red Cloud down,
but he refuses medical treatment; rather, he struggles to
his feet, clamps his arm around a tree and resumes fire
that kills more Chinese. Enemy fire finally inflicts a
mortal wound, but Red Cloud’s valiant actions buy
some desperately needed time.
Another Company E BARman, Corporal Joseph
Balboni, spots Chinese troops that encroach his posi-
tion. Balboni, from a distance of about seventy-five
feet, intercepts the Communists and rains fire upon
them. Again, they maintain the advance despite the
wall of fire. Balboni refuses to yield; he remains stead-
fastly in place and maintains his incessant fire until
enemy fire kills him.
The Communists, seemingly disregarding their high
losses, continue to attack and finally penetrate the bat-
talion lines. The Chinese overrun much of the area.
Many men of Company E are still asleep when the
enemy strikes from the rear. The Chinese slaughter
some with shots to the back of the head and others are
killed while still in their sleeping bags. The tenacious
enemy pressure forces the 2nd Battalion to pull back.
By 0300, it has surrendered about 1,000 yards. For
the next several hours, the 2nd Battalion struggles to re-
tain control of its new line, but it holds. At about dawn,
the Chinese disengage and the eastern bridgehead re-
mains intact.
The 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, which had been
routed on November 4, has received new equipment.
During the night (5th-6th) it moves back across the
Ch’ongch’on River to the north bank.
Corporal Red Cloud receives the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary courage in the face
of the enemy. Corporal Balboni, credited with the
death of seventeen Communist troops subsequently
discovered to the front of his corpse, receives the Dis-
tinguished Service Cross posthumously.
In the British zone, at the western sector of the bridge-
head along the Ch’ongch’on River, the Chinese strike
against the U.S. 61st FABn, which is deployed to the
rear of the British perimeter. The attack is geared to
include the destruction of a strategic bridge and to en-
sure the annihilation of the artillery battalion. Sud-
denly, shells arcing from the east rain upon the artillery
positions. The artillerymen react positively. The gun
crewmen and every other available man circles the
tightened perimeter to form a solid wall of fire, includ-
ing that of automatic weapons. The British are in-
formed of the ongoing assault, and they immediately
rush reinforcements to the aid of the Americans.
Planes appear to hammer the attackers throughout
the day and into the night. Company A, Argylls, speeds
to the area. Slightly afterward, the Australian 3rd Bat-
talion receives orders to withdraw from its positions on
the west side of the Taeryong River and redeploy east
of the river. From a quickly tightened line, the artillery
batteries prepare for the brunt of an attack. Battery C
November 6, 1950
becomes the recipient of the harshest fire. Its com-
mander, Captain Howard Moore, shifts one howitzer
to meet the threat. From point-blank range, a raging
storm of fire streams eastward into the advancing troop
formation and causes the enemy-occupied rice paddy
to turn blood-red.
Within about forty-five minutes, another howitzer
redirects its withering fire against a new line of attack-
ers. And, to further hinder the advancing Communists,
an aerial observer guides the fire of yet another battery
toward the charging Chinese. The artillerymen main-
tain their discipline and exhibit no signs of abandon-
ing their positions, despite the incoming firestorm of
mortar fire and small arms fire. Nevertheless, the Chi-
nese continue their relentless assault. Initially, the attack-
ers comprise only about one battalion, but the entire as-
sault force climbs to the strength of an entire division
during the attempt to decimate the British Brigade and
the 61st FABn, 1st Cavalry Division.
More air power arrives to pound the attacking Chi-
nese and help forestall the isolation of the Common-
wealth brigade. The Chinese continue to inundate the
area. Accurate fire saves the bridge, which an enemy
demolition team attacks. One enemy soldier is slain
within twenty yards of the objective.
The besieged artillerymen fend off the onslaught,
but the attack takes a toll. One howitzer, six vehicles and
some other equipment are destroyed; however, loss of
life is less than anticipated. By 0900, the 61st Artillery
Battalion has sustained thirty-five wounded and two
dead. Battery C sustains some fatalities and eighteen
wounded.
At about the same time, two tanks pull into Battery
C’s line to stiffen the resistance. Outside the meager
perimeter, enemy dead continue to pile up. British re-
inforcements, Company A, Argyll, and some additional
tanks also arrive at the perimeter.
Meanwhile, the remainder of the Argyll Battalion
receives instructions to withdraw to the east bank of
the Taeryong River. Following a quick regrouping,
Company A, Argylls, drives against a menacing hill
about two miles below Pakch’on. The British seize the
objective, but an enemy counterattack regains the
heights. During the afternoon, the Australian 3rd Bat-
talion, which has moved through the zone of the Argylls,
attacks to dislodge the Chinese on the hill in front of
Pakch’on. It’s a bloody close-quartered assault that in-
cludes bayonets. The Australians retake the ground,
but the cost is high; twelve troops are slain and 64 men
are wounded.
The determined artillerymen and the equally heroic
actions of the reinforcements have held the perimeter,
but there are simply too many enemy troops against it.
During and after the attack, the Pakch’on bridgehead
is relinquished. With the Australian assault, the Mid-
dlesex 1st Battalion drives south to open the road.
Meanwhile, the U.S. artillery units and the remain-
der of the brigade retire south under heavy fire toward
the Ch’ongch’on River. The Australians trace the steps
of the British Brigade and enter the new perimeter
518
about 4,000 to 6,000 yards north of the Ch’ongch’on.
It is built along a chain of hills on both sides of the
Pakch’on Road.
The Chinese await dusk, then upon the signal of the
bugle launch another attack. The assault strikes the far-
thest extension of the perimeter, which is defended by
the exhausted Australians. Two greatly outnumbered
companies give some ground; however, the powerful
thrust fails to knock out the Australians. Following
about four hours of incessant fighting, the battle begins
to subside, and when the sun rises on the 6th, the Aus-
tralians watch the enemy retire northward through a
valley.
In Air Force activity, Bomber Command initiates in-
cendiary bomb strikes against selected North Korean
cities and towns. A contingent of twenty-one B-29s at-
tached to the 19th Bomber Group strike Kanggye and
drop 170 tons of fire bombs. The strike devastates the
town, which is located less than 20 miles from the bor-
der with China.
— In Japan: General MacArthur dispatches a cru-
cial report to the United Nations, which includes the
particulars of Chinese participation in Korea. He enu-
merates the complications developing because of their
involvement. MacArthur has become concerned about
the heavy infusion of Chinese soldiers and their equip-
ment into Korea. He orders the Air Force to bomb the
Yalu River bridges on the Korean side of the river to
halt or at least lessen the abundance of ground forces en-
tering Korea.
The orders go out, but word reaches Washington,
and the JCS immediately countermand the order.
MacArthur argues vehemently that the destruction of
the bridges is necessary and he implores the interven-
tion of President Truman. Also, General Willoughby’s
intelligence summary makes it clear that the Chinese
have the potential to commence a full-scale counter-
offensive.
November 6 The 65th RCT (minus one battal-
ion), subsequent to landing at Wonsan, is directed to re-
lieve contingents of the 96th FABn at Yonghung. The
artillery unit had only recently been deployed there.
The other regimental battalion had been given a tem-
porary assignment with the 1st Marine Division and is
operating at Majon-ni. At Yonghung, the artillerymen
come under attack during the early morning hours and
lose some equipment and ammunition to the enemy.
The 2nd Battalion, 65th RCT, which arrives later dur-
ing the afternoon, will be attacked on the 7th.
In Naval activity, Task Group 95.6 initiates
minesweeping operations in the vicinity of Hungnam.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, mine-
clearing operations postpone troop movement by water
from Wonsan to Hamhung. The disruption compels
Division to increase rail movements. During the after-
noon, one train that departs Hamhung is halted at
Yonghung at 1700 due to reports of guerrilla activity.
The first two trains that depart Wonson complete
the journey, but at dusk, a third train, protected by 38
 519
enlisted Marines and one lieutenant attached to the 1st
Amphibious Tractor Battalion, encounters difficulty.
It is halted at Kowon due to a break along the tracks.
Korean guerrillas take advantage of the darkness and
strike the stalled train, firing from all sides. The sur-
prised Marines feel the bullets as they rip through the
wooden walls and drop to the floor. Soon after,
grenades are tossed into the car and they kill eight men
and wound two others. The other twenty-nine Marines
take positions about two hundred yards from the dam-
aged train and engage the guerrillas. Six men sustain
wounds. The Marines then break off the firefight and
make it to the lines of the 96th Field Artillery Battal-
ion.
On the following day, at about 1400, a fourth sup-
ply train is forced to stop south of Kowon because of a
break in the rails due to sabotage. The Marine guard ad-
vances to examine the scene and comes upon the dev-
astation of the previous day. The bodies are found and
one ammunition car remains in flames. The damage is
too bad to easily repair. Train service is postponed until
9 November.
Also, the 1st Marine Engineering Battalion receives
orders to improve the main supply route to enable tanks
to reach Koto-ri.
In the 1st Marines zone, at 0100, the expected time
of an enemy attack, the perimeter at Majon-ni remains
quiet. Nevertheless, the Marines keep a deep-seated
vigil. Army Intelligence information proves true. At
0130, conspicuous alarms go off. Booby traps explode
in cadence with sudden illumination created by trip-
wire flares. Despite the blasts and instant lighting, no
enemy is seen. The engagement remains at long-
distance, as the North Koreans fail to openly attack.
At about 0500, in a thick fog, the battalion outpost,
located within the Company H zone, is attacked. Ma-
rine wiremen, artillerymen and mortarmen raise stiff re-
sistance, but lack of ammunition compels them to pull
back. Briefly, the enemy takes the abandoned outpost;
however, the moment the fog dissipates, H&S Marines,
led by Captain Thomas McCarthy, retake the position.
Corsairs arrive overhead to totally terminate the skir-
mish at 0730, as the Communists head for the heights.
The Marines sustain two wounded during the fight-
ing.
In other activity, Company A, which had brought
in supplies on the previous day, heads back for Won-
san and retraces the steps through “Ambush Alley.” The
convoy transports unusual cargo, 619 Communist pris-
oners who are jammed into the vehicles to be trans-
ferred to a stockade. Following the return of Company
A, Colonel Puller dispatches the 2nd Battalion to
Munchon-ni, but there are only sufficient vehicles to
carry one rifle company. In addition, the convoy must
travel the treacherous Majon-ni Road to reach the vil-
lage, which sits near the crown of the highest pass
within Ambush Alley.
Less than five miles out, the convoy is ambushed. As
the final vehicle enters a curved portion of the road, a
steady stream of boulders cascades from the heights to
November 6, 1950
block passage. The trucks stall, leaving the troops no op-
tions. To their right stand huge slopes, and to the im-
mediate left, there is a perpendicular drop. Meanwhile,
heavy enemy fire rings down from the high ground.
Company E’s riflemen jump from the vehicles and
begin to return the fire, but the enemy positions are
well concealed.
Rather than remain trapped, the Marines attack to
clear the roadblock, manned by about 200 enemy
troops. They burst through the enemy positions, but the
attack is costly. The Marines sustain eight men killed
and thirty-eight wounded. Six truck drivers are also
wounded. Captain Charles Frederick, the Company E
commander, and four other officers are also wounded.
The most seriously wounded are evacuated by helicop-
ter and the others are returned to Wonsan once Able
Company arrives on scene.
As the passage is cleared, the Marines count sixty-
one enemy dead on the field. About 300 boxes of small
arms cartridges and fifty containers of 120-mm shells
are discovered and destroyed during the operation. By
1600, the balance of the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines,
under Colonel Sutter, and Company A converge on
the roadblock from different directions. Company A
then transports the wounded and its entourage of pris-
oners to Wonsan without incident.
Meanwhile, as scheduled, Colonel Sutter’s force
moves to Munchon-ni.
In the 5th Marines zone, patrols continue to inspect
the routes near the Chosin and Fusen Reservoirs.
In the 7th Marines sector, Colonel Roach’s 3rd Bat-
talion prepares to attack through Funchilin Pass. Com-
pany I reinitiates its drive to secure Hill 987. Company
G supplies support-cover fire to the troops of Com-
pany H as it drives against the southeastern slopes of
Hill 891. The craggy terrain causes horrendous prob-
lems. Company H begins its advance at 0800, but it
takes about seven hours to reach the jump-off point, the
high ground slightly above Company G.
In the meantime, Company I grinds forward only
about 300 yards, but in the process it throws back a
counterattack and continues to fend off fire from the
heights above the MSR.
Prior to H Company’s attack, two Corsairs pound the
enemy positions in conjunction with barrages by the
artillery and mortars. At about 1615, two platoons of
Company H drive down the slopes and reform in the
vicinity of the sharp curve in the road to strike from
the southeast and secure Hill 891. When the ascent to
the summit begins, the two platoons use separate but
parallel paths, each destructive to the assault troops be-
cause of the precipitousness of the slope and the dogged
soil.
The Chinese raise resistance against one of the pla-
toons, but the other encounters no opposition. The
unopposed platoon, operating on the right, makes it
to a point where the two paths converge just below the
crest. Meanwhile, the hard-pressed platoon, led by
Lieutenant Minard Newton, joins with Lieutenant
Robert Dale Reem’s men. Lieutenant Harris, Company
November 6, 1950
H commander, who had climbed the slope with New-
ton’s platoon, now directs Newton to lead Reem to the
crest where they will divide. Reem is to swerve to the
right and Newton to the left to overwhelm the oppo-
sition. The Chinese react determinedly by initiating a
counterattack, in concert with a wave of grenades to
annihilate Newton’s force. One man, Sergeant Foster,
singlehandedly charges to interrupt the assault. His ac-
tions cost his life when he surges to the summit, but he
inspires the other Marines to break up the attack.
Meanwhile, on the left, Lieutenant Reem’s group re-
mains engaged in close-quartered fighting. Reem calls
his squad leaders together to finalize the assault to gain
the right portion of the crest, but an enemy grenade is
flipped into their area. Reem blankets the grenade with
his body and sacrifices his life to spare the other nearby
Marines. Following the death of Reem, Sergeant An-
thony Ricardi assumes command of the platoon.
By this time, it is dusk and Company H is overtired
from the tedious climb and the incessant battle. Lieu-
tenant Harris, at about 1800, informs the battalion
commander, Major Roach, of the condition of his men.
He reports eight casualties, including two dead. The
platoons are running low on ammunition.
Colonel Litzenberg, upon notification of the situa-
tion, orders Roach to withdraw the attacking platoons.
Aware of remaining Chinese strength, support fire is
commenced to provide an umbrella during the descent
to the friendly lines of the 7th Marines.
As the sun disappears, the enemy apparently decides
to vacate the area. The darkness brings tranquility
throughout the night and at dawn, there still are no vis-
ible signs of the enemy. The Chinese 124th Division had
met and engaged the 7th Marines, but it had sustained
heavy casualties. Colonel Litzenberg, who had informed
his Marines of the importance of victory over the Chi-
nese in the first battle, had not been disappointed.
Lieutenant Robert Dale Reem, Company H, 3rd
Battalion, who had been killed during the fighting, is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary heroism in the face of hostile enemy fire.
In the ROK I Corps area, the Capital Division holds
Kilchu; however, reports indicate that more enemy
forces, about six to seven battalions, have departed
Ch’ongjin, advancing southward on the coastal road.
The armor-supported column will encounter the South
Koreans on November 12.
In addition to the advancing enemy, the South Ko-
reans face more hardship; another brutal touch of Ko-
rean winter is also en route. By the 16th, the temper-
ature will be 16 degrees below zero.
In the Eighth Army area, the Chinese maintain
predawn strikes against Kunu-ri and the Pakch’on
bridgehead, but these are the final major confronta-
tions that occur during the first phase of Chinese par-
ticipation in the conflict. Observers in aircraft detect
great numbers of Chinese as they travel north through-
out the daylight hours. Eighth Army has sustained
twelve days of terrific battle against the Chinese, but the
Ch’ongch’on bridgehead has held.
520
In the 1st Cavalry Division sector, the remnants of the
8th Cavalry continue to evade the Chinese as they move
south. The troops realize they are close to safety once
they see the U.S. artillery in action, but before reach-
ing the lines, the Chinese detect them and in a flash
they are surrounded. With little time to spare, another
quick decision is made. Rather than surrender, the
group will splinter itself into small detachments to at-
tempt a break out from the trap.
The fighting 8th Cavalrymen run out of luck. The
Chinese decimate the groups and by about 1600, the
3rd Battalion, 8th Cavalry, no longer remains an or-
ganized fighting force. Nearly all its remaining troops
are either captured or killed during the fighting and
breakout at Yongbyon.
Aside from some stragglers who rejoin later, fewer
than 200 enlisted men and ten officers of the 3rd Bat-
talion escape to rejoin the 8th Cavalry Regiment. Ini-
tially, more than 1,000 men of the 8th Cavalry are un-
accounted for, but during the next few weeks, some
troops make it to U.S. lines.
Tanks that patrol the area continue to encounter and
rescue Americans who were wounded during the fight-
ing at Unsan, some of whom have been hidden and
cared for by friendly Koreans. Later, it is determined
that 8th Cavalry losses at Unsan totaled about 600
troops. The Communists eventually make it known
that they captured between 200 and 300 of those troops
at Unsan.
In the 24th Division sector, 19th Regimental zone, the
Chinese attacks of the previous night have been thrown
back. But, the hole between the bulk of the regiment
and the 2nd Battalion to its left remains open. Slightly
after dawn, the 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, launches
an assault and seals the gap. Subsequently, the 19th
Regiment starts rebuilding its initial lines along the
eastern bridgehead.
In the 2nd Division zone, a patrol of Company M,
23rd Regiment, led by Lieutenant Doric A. Ball and
assisted by a local Korean chief of police, uncovers a
large enemy arms-manufacturing center less than ten
miles northeast of Kangdong in an abandoned lead
mine. The underground location, in proximity to P’y-
ongyang, is out of reach of U.S. bombing raids. It was
the bombing strikes that compelled the North Kore-
ans to transfer the facility from its above ground loca-
tion to the cave.
The facility, known as Arsenal No. 65, is split into
nineteen big rooms and utilizes offices, storage sections,
and manufacturing. The underground complex also
contains an auditorium and about 400 lathes that were
manufactured in America, England and the Soviet
Union. These machines had given the enemy the abil-
ity to make burp guns and 120-mm mortars.
In the 25th Division zone, a 27th Regimental patrol
composed of the I&R Platoon, Company L, and Bat-
tery C, 8th Field Artillery Battalion, is ambushed by
guerrillas as it moves between Kumch’on and Sibyon-
ni. Reinforcements speed to the scene and reach it by
midnight, but the enemy had vanished, taking captives
 521
with them. The relief force rescues the wounded sur-
vivors and it rounds up several others who had been
missing.
Later, on the 9th, another contingent discovers a
shallow grave that contains the bodies of 15 men of the
8th FABn. According to an account by a survivor, the
Communists interrogated one of the captured men,
Lieutenant Harold G. Parris, who gave them only his
name, rank and serial number. The other captives fol-
lowed suit and consequently, the Communists executed
them.
In other activity, a Communist force composed of
about 1,000 troops controls the town of Ich’on. Dur-
ing the previous week, the North Koreans had attacked
a field hospital in Ich’on and massacred the wounded
and the hospital personnel.
On the following day, the 27th Infantry and the S.K.
17th Regiment, attacking from the southwest and east
respectively, strike against the town and drive the enemy
out.
In the British sector near the Ch’ongch’on River, dawn
arrives and the new line has held against fierce enemy
attack. The enemy disengages and begins moving
north. The enemy attacks of the previous day and night
against the bridgehead cost the Chinese high casualties
without the luxury of destroying the defending ele-
ments. According to British estimates, the Chinese sus-
tain between 600 to 1,000 casualties due to air attacks
and lose about 300 troops to ground fire.
— In Japan: General MacArthur receives his answer
from Washington concerning the bombing of the Yalu
Bridges. As requested, Truman had been brought into
the decision-making process. The JCS inform
MacArthur that he now has permission to bomb the
bridges, but he is forbidden to strike the dams and
power plants on the Yalu. MacArthur is further re-
stricted by instructions not to violate Manchurian air
space, nor to strike any targets in Manchuria.
Enemy planes blow across the border, strike targets
at will, then shoot back across the Yalu, aware that U.S.
planes are forbidden to pursue. This practice remains
in effect for the duration and presents the enemy with
an extraordinary advantage. Nonetheless, during the
course of the war, U.S. planes shoot down the enemy
at a ratio of fourteen to one despite the restrictions.
November 7 By today, pursuant to the recent
FEC directives concerning the number of South Kore-
ans serving with U.S. Divisions, 8,272 ROK troops
have been detached and transferred back to ROK con-
trol. Several thousand additional South Korean soldiers
are close to being released from U.S. units.
In other activity, the S.K. 2nd Division, which had
been decimated during the early days of the conflict, is
re-established this day. It is initially composed of two
regiments, the 17th and the 38th, but within a week a
third will be attached.
In the X Corps area, at Yonghung at about 0300 the
recently arrived 65th RCT, 3rd Division, is attacked
by guerrillas. The combat team sustains six killed and
November 7, 1950
fourteen wounded. The guerrilla elements, composed
of between 500 and 800 men, also strike the 96th
FABn and contingents of the 4th Signal Battalion,
USA.
A Marine tank of Company D, 1st Tank Battalion,
and one M-29 (“Weasel”) move to the besieged troops
to evacuate the wounded. An Amtrac platoon, assigned
to guard the empty train that had been stalled since the
previous day, also aids the evacuation mission. At 1400,
the train is permitted to move to Wonsan, but about
two miles down the track, the engine and six cars de-
rail while passing a split in the rails. The accident costs
one man killed and 14 injured.
Also, General O.P. Smith meets with General Al-
mond at Wonsan. General Almond decides to slow the
pace of the troops that are sprinting to the border. Gen-
eral Smith suggests that the priority ground to hold is
Hamhung, Hungham and Wonsan. Almond is inclined
to add Hagaru, but he concurs with Smith that the
other three should get the most attention. It is decided
that Wonsan supply trains will run only during day-
light hours and that the complement of guards will be
increased from 38 to 58 men.
The 65th RCT, the 96th FABn, and the S.K. 26th
Regiment are temporarily assigned to the 1st Marine
Division. Their responsibilities are to protect primary
points and bridges. The South Koreans are to push the
North Koreans toward the 65th RCT at Yonghung, but
the mission never gets initiated. During their short
tenure under Marine control, the S.K. units carry out
security duties along the MSR.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, following forty-
eight hours of intense fighting, the Marines compel the
Chinese Communists to cease making contact against
Marine units and begin to retreat northward.
In the 5th Marines zone, patrols of Lt. Colonel Roise’s
2nd Battalion encounter patrols attached to the U.S.
Army units in the vicinity of the Fusen Reservoir.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion’s Companies A
and B, led by Major Merlin Olson (executive officer),
move toward Huksu-ri, an obstinate road junction west
of Oro-ri. No enemy activity is discovered, but the
Marines encounter an enemy force on the following
day.
In the 7th Marines zone, the unit, composed of a force
that includes 34 percent reservists, defeat the Commu-
nists after heavy fighting at and around Sudong. The
7th Marines is the first U.S. unit to defeat the Commu-
nist Chinese in battle.
The Chinese 124th Division has abandoned the area
during the previous night after several days of battling
the Marines near Sudong. This disengagement by the
enemy provides the Marines easy access to the south-
ern slopes of Hills 891 and 987, both of which, the
Marines discover, are unoccupied, while they climb to
the crest of Hill 891 against no resistance. The 7th
Marines personnel ponder the absence of the Chinese,
but they continue to search. The Marines realign their
forces along the MSR and simultaneously dispatch pa-
trols, but no enemy encounters occur.
November 8, 1950
In the Eighth Army area, a small group of Canadians,
composed of 345 troops, arrives at Pusan to prepare
for the arrival of the main body of 10,000 volunteers,
but because it appears that the war is nearly at an end,
the Canadians send only one battalion and hold the re-
mainder in Canada.
At Pakch’on, aircraft strike the enemy positions and
inflict heavy damage to components of the re-created
N.K. 105th Armored Division. It loses six tanks, forty-
five vehicles and several armored cars. The N.K. armor
had been committed to aid the Chinese, who are trav-
eling light, but the Fifth Air Force has more or less can-
celed its importance by decimating most of its equip-
ment before it can advance to the scene of battle.
However, some armor arrives at several of the skir-
mishes.
— In Japan: During a general headquarters meet-
ing, General Willoughby gives a brief but detailed eval-
uation of Chinese units operating in North Korea.
Based on additional intelligence, he specifies that indi-
vidual reserve contingents are still in Manchuria, but
they are nudging close to the Yalu River. During the
meeting, Ambassador Sebald asks Willoughby if the
information on “units and locations” was accurate.
Willoughby responds: “Affirmative.”
November 8 In the 1st Marine Division area, at
Majon-ni, the Communists bolster their forces to about
250 troops. They maneuver toward the rear of an out-
post defended by two squads of Company H’s Second
Platoon, 1st Marines. To forestall encirclement of the
squads and prevent further jeopardy, a Company I pla-
toon and the remaining two platoons of Company H
move out to engage the enemy. Supported by artillery
fire and mortars, the enemy force is quickly dispersed,
but not before sustaining heavy losses of about 100
troops. The Marines lose one man killed and ten
wounded during the clean out operation.
In the 1st Marines sector at Wonsan, it is reported that
aircraft have spotted some small enemy vessels. Colo-
nel Puller is then informed that there have been two
unidentified explosions. The level of concern at head-
quarters begins to rise as more information arrives. It
states that the enemy is launching an amphibious land-
ing north of Wonsan. Supposedly, the force is being
transported by between 500 and 1,000 boats. An ar-
mored patrol attached to Company C, 1st Tank Battal-
ion, speeds to the suspected target area, but no enemy
is sighted.
In the 5th Marines zone, a skirmish develops when
an enemy force is encountered short of the objective of
Companies A and B. Orders arrive, which direct them
to disengage and return to regimental lines. Headquar-
ters has received word that a force of about 2,000 North
Koreans is en route to the MSR. The 5th Marines are
being reeled in to meet this potential threat.
Meanwhile, Company D, reinforced, moves to a val-
ley northwest of Sinhung and advances to within ten
miles east of Koto-ri. During the overnight mission, a
sleeping Chinese trooper is snagged and brought back
522
to headquarters. Upon interrogation, the prisoner
claims that he is attached to the Chinese 126th Divi-
sion and he informs the Marines that China is prepared
to throw twenty-four Divisions into the conflict.
In the 7th Marines sector, just as on the previous day
near Sudong, patrols search in vain for Chinese Com-
munists, while the remainder of the regiment advances
along the MSR. At about 1200, a group of fifteen vol-
unteers, attached to the 2nd Battalion and led by Lieu-
tenant William Goggin, probes through the ragged,
mountainous area west of the MSR. The patrol engages
Chinese in one firefight. Lieutenant Goggin sustains a
superficial wound, but no other Marines are hurt. The
platoon reaches the plateau at the Chosin Reservoir at
about 1400 on the 9th, finding no visible signs of the
enemy at Koto-ri.
In other activity, General Almond arrives in the 7th
Marines sector. Upon being informed of the actions of
Captain Cooney at Hill 891, now dubbed “How Hill,”
General Almond awards him a Silver Star, despite not
having authentic citations with him. The general sim-
ply attaches a note to Cooney’s uniform, complete with
his signature, attesting to the award.
In the 7th Division zone, the landing operation at
Iwon is completed. When the debarking operation is
completed, 28,995 troops, 5,994 vehicles and about
30,116 short-tons of supplies will have been brought
ashore.
In other activity, the 31st Regiment, en route to the
Pujon Reservoir, encounters Chinese opposition a lit-
tle more than ten miles from the southern end of the
Pujon Reservoir on the eastern slopes of Paeksan, a
huge peak that rises to a height of 7,700 feet. This, the
initial battle for the 7th Division, begins during the
early afternoon in bitter cold weather and terminates
prior to dusk. The Chinese unit, later found to be the
Chinese 376th Regiment, 126th Division, sustains
about fifty killed prior to its disengagement. Also, a
patrol encounters a U.S. Marine patrol about halfway
between Hamhung and the Pujon Reservoir, initiating
the first contact between the 7th Division and the 1st
Marine Division in northeast Korea.
In Air Force activity, about seventy B-29s, supported
by fighter planes, initiate the first bomber attack against
the Yalu River bridges and other targets at Sinuiju. The
planes execute the largest incendiary strike of the war.
Russian MiGs arrive to intercept and drive off the
U.S. planes to protect the rail and highway connection
that links China and Korea. This clash ignites the first
air duel between jet planes. A U.S. Air Force F-80, pi-
loted by Lieutenant Russell J. Brown (16th Interceptor
Fighter Squadron), knocks out a MiG-15, which
plummets to the earth in flames. Brown’s elimination
of the Soviet-made MiG-15 over Sinuiju gives him the
first jet air-to-air kill in Korea. The name and nation-
ality of the downed Communist pilot remains un-
known to the West.
The air raids against the border bridges continue
until the end of November, but pursuit of enemy planes
terminates at the Yalu.
 523
In the X Corps area, some small enemy vessels are
sighted by aircraft.
November 9 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Di-
vision sector, 1st Marines zone, again the supply trains
begin to roll at Wonsan. Since the hold-up on the rails,
about 95 cars have accumulated in the yards.
In the 5th Marines zone, the Regiment is ordered to
deploy along the MSR that leads to the Chosin Reser-
voir. Colonel Murray directs the 1st Battalion to defend
it at Majon-dong, and he instructs the 3rd Battalion to
spread out near Chinhung-ni. Some complications de-
velop on the following day and cause the mission to ex-
tend into two days before it is completed.
In the 7th Marines zone, Lieutenant Goggins’ patrol
reaches the vicinity of the Chosin Reservoir at 1400.
Finding Koto-ri unoccupied by the enemy, Goggin in-
forms Colonel Litzenberg of the situation, then he leads
the patrol back to the lines of the regiment’s 3rd Bat-
talion near Sudong. There is relative quiet within the
lines throughout the night.
In other activity, Lt. Colonel Randolph Lockwood
relieves Major Webb Sawyer as commanding officer,
2nd Battalion, 7th Marines. Sawyer becomes executive
officer on the 10th. He succeeds Major Roland Carey.
In the Eighth Army area, 25th Division zone of the
Iron Triangle, at Ch’orwon, a defending force of 800
South Korean police is struck and driven out by a
1,400-man contingent of the N.K. 4th Division’s 18th
Regiment.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the 7th Reconnais-
sance Company, 7th Infantry Division, pushes to Sil-
lyong, which is east of P’ungsan, and deploys to safe-
guard the power facility located there.
In Air Force activity, Sergeant Harry J. Levene
(Lavine), a gunner aboard a B-29 (RB-29, 91st Strate-
gic Reconnaissance Squadron), downs a MiG-15 dur-
ing an air engagement. Levene receives credit for the
first kill of a jet during the war. The B-29 becomes
damaged during the attack, but it makes it back to
Japan. The plane makes a crash landing in which five
of the crew die.
November 10 A convoy of supplies and the 3rd
Korean Marine Corps Battalion arrives at Majon-ni to
fortify the area against increasing numbers of enemy
troops. The Korean Marines deploy in the sector vacated
by Company I, 1st Marines, which had recently de-
parted for Wonsan.
In the afternoon, enemy troop concentrations are
discovered less than five miles from Majon-ni by an
observation plane of VMO-6. Remedies are quickly
sought. Through the assistance of aerial observers, the
force of about 300 troops is scattered by effective ar-
tillery fire. Also, Intelligence informs the 1st Marines
that an attack against the perimeter by the N.K. 45th
Regiment should be expected during the night of the
11th-12th.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines gain six miles in the Changjin Reservoir area
on this day.
November 11, 1950
In the 5th Marines’ zone, an enemy force ambushes
a Company C, 1st Battalion, patrol. The patrol is ex-
tricated on the following day by an attack by the bat-
talion.
In the 7th Marines zone, the 1st Battalion begins its
march at 0830. It passes through the 3rd Battalion lines
and exits the Funchilin Pass, then occupies Koto-ri at
about 1000. There is little contact with the enemy for
the next several days; however, the Marines, now en-
trenched in the mountains of northeastern Korea, cre-
ate a defensive perimeter around the village. A new ter-
ror enters the perimeter and the Marines are unprepared
for it. Another frigid Korean winter arrives with dev-
astating results: casualties due to the unexpected cold.
In the 3rd Division sector, an advance contingent of
the 3rd Division establishes a tactical command post
at Wonsan. Elements begin to arrive on the following
day.
In the Eighth Army area, 25th Division zone, a 500-
man unit of the 5th Regiment, N.K. 4th Division,
moves into and occupies the town of Yonch’on, which
lies about ten miles south of Ch’orwon, a town seized
by the North Koreans on the previous day. Later, ele-
ments of the 25th Division’s 24th Regiment attacks to
regain the town, but the Communists repulse it. After
dusk, the North Koreans strike hard. They spring a
fierce ambush outside the Ch’orwon, which inflicts
devastating damage and loss of life against Company A,
24th Regiment, and the I&R Platoon.
On the following day, the 24th Regiment resumes
its attack and secures Yonch’on. The North Koreans
also attack P’yonggang, defended by the S.K. 17th Reg-
iment. The heat of battle rages incessantly throughout
the day and by dawn on the 11th, the South Koreans
become isolated.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of B-29s attached
to the 30th Bomber Group comes under attack by
MiG-15s near the Yalu River. One of the planes is shot
down, the first B-29 lost to the enemy. The crew is able
to parachute; however, they are in enemy territory
when they land. The crew is captured and imprisoned.
In other activity, the recently arrived 437th TCW
(Troop Carrier Wing) initiates its airlifts on this day to
deliver cargo to Korea.
November 11 In Naval activity, the USS Buck
(DD 761) and the USS Thompson (DE 203) collide (at
39° 13' N, 129° 32' E). Both vessels sustain some dam-
age.
In the X Corps sector, OpnO 6 directs an advance to
the border with Manchuria. The 1st Marine Division
is to establish blocking positions to the west in the vil-
lages of Huksu-ri and Yudam-ni, but it is to still con-
tinue its northern drive to the border. Corps issues
OpnO 6 at 2400. The S.K. I Corps and the 1st Marine
Division are to advance on the left and right respec-
tively. The 7th Infantry Division is to proceed up the
middle. The 3rd Infantry Division is to relieve contin-
gents of the 1st Marine Division, then assume respon-
sibility for the Wonsan-Hamhung vicinity. The S.K.
November 12, 1950
26th Regiment, attached to the 3rd Division, will as-
sist. The Marines are to establish blocking positions at
Huksu-ri and Yudam-ni. The rear of the corps’ sector
is held by elements of the 1st KMC Regiment, deployed
south and west of Kojo. The various forces are wide-
spread and resupply will be difficult, but the feeling
remains that the Chinese will not pour into the conflict.
In the 1st Marine Division area, the Marine zone of
operations at the Yalu is about 40 miles wide. Two
roads that branch off from the Changjin area approach
it; one terminates at Huchanggangu and the other ends
at Singalpajin. From there, the 7th Division zone leads
east to Hyesanjin, then leans sharply north before turn-
ing east again toward Hapsu.
The South Korean I Corps picks up at the
Hapsu–Chuchonhujang area. It is to march north
along the coastal route to secure Chongjin. In the 1st
Marines sector, near Majon-ni, the 1st Marines con-
tinue to prepare for an anticipated attack against the
perimeter.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 1st Battalion launches an
assault to rescue a patrol of Company C, which had
been trapped since the previous day. Following the suc-
cessful mission, the battalion departs for Majon-dong.
In the 7th Marines zone, at Koto-ri, Company C en-
counters an enemy force. The company reports four
killed and four wounded, while inflicting forty casual-
ties upon the enemy.
In other activity, Lt. Colonel William Harris (son of
Major General Field Harris) succeeds Lt. Colonel
Roach as CO, 3rd Battalion. Roach had become Bat-
talion S4 on the 10th.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, X Corps directs Di-
vision to prepare to continue its northward drive. Kap-
san, below Hyesanjin, and the south shore of the Pujon
Reservoir are to be secured by the 17th and 32nd Reg-
iments, respectively. The 31st Regiment is to drive for-
ward on the left of the 17th Regiment, then advance to
the border at Hyesanjin on the Yalu.
In the 3rd Division zone, the 15th Regiment begins
to debark at Wonsan. It is followed by the 7th Regi-
ment, which completes the operation on November 17.
The mission of the 3rd Division is to relieve the 1st
Marine troops deployed in the vicinity of Wonsan and
those stationed south of Hamhung.
Additionally, the 7th Division is to control the pri-
mary highways in the southern portion of X Corps
zone, eliminate any guerrilla activity and maintain the
security of the Hungnam coastal strip. It is a Herculean
task, as the area handed over to it is ninety by thirty-
five miles. Four regimental combat teams are estab-
lished, each having separate missions and separate sec-
tors.
Colonel John S. Guthrie commands the 7th RCT,
which is held in reserve, with responsibility for con-
trolling the area near the coast from Chong-dong to
Hungnam. The 10th FABn will support the 7th RCT.
Colonel Dennis M. Moore commands the 15th RCT,
which assumes responsibility for the security of Won-
san and the area south and west of it, including the
524
Wonsan–Majon-ni–Tongyang Road; it is supported by
the 39th FABn. The 65th RCT, commanded by Col-
onel William W. Harris, takes responsibility for the di-
vision’s west central zone, north of the positions of the
15th RCT, which includes the Yonghung–Hadongsan-
ni Road, the primary highway that leads into the regi-
mental sector from the coast. It is supported by the
58th Armored Artillery Battalion (Self-propelled guns)
and by Company C, 64th Heavy Tank Battalion.
The fourth RCT, the ROK 26th Regiment, com-
manded by Colonel Rhee Chi Suh, is augmented by
Battery A, 96th FABn. The ROKs are directed to con-
trol the area west of Hamhung, the northern portion of
the division zone. The combat team will also patrol the
area of X Corps to the boundary with Eighth Army.
In the ROK area, the 3rd Korean Marine Corps Bat-
talion lands at Wonsan with orders to move westward
and establish a blocking position near Tongyang.
In the Eighth Army area, 25th Division zone, the 24th
Regiment successfully regains Yonch’on from elements
of the N.K. 4th Division, but the victory brings little
joy. Upon regaining the ground, the unit reaches the
site of the ambush that occurred on the previous night
and discovers the corpses of thirty-eight U.S. soldiers.
All the vehicles had been torched.
In other activity, the elements of the S.K. 17th Reg-
iment, surrounded at P’yonggang and still embattled
with elements of the N.K. 4th Division, refuse to ca-
pitulate. The accompanying KMAG advisor, Major
Robert B. Holt, sends out a radio call for help, request-
ing the 3rd Battalion, posted at Ich’on, to attack east-
ward and break the encirclement of the 1st and 2nd
Battalions. Major Holt also requests and receives an
airdrop of ammunition, to ensure the besieged units
can survive until the reinforcements arrive and arrange-
ments are made to pick him up.
A Mosquito observation plane lands and soon after,
Holt directs the arriving aircraft to enable the planes
to strike with accuracy. The enemy continues its quest
to eliminate the South Koreans, but in vain. Finally,
having sustained heavy casualties, due in great part to
effective air strikes, the Communists pull out during
the night of the 11th-12th. However, on the 13th,
again the North Koreans attack to seize P’yonggang.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, apparently still
anticipating a successful mission, suggests that X Corps
offers assistance to Eighth Army to speed its march to
the Yalu. MacArthur’s request is delivered to X Corps
by General Wright, G-3 of Far East Command. Gen-
eral Almond will reply on 15 November.
November 12 In the X Corps area, X Corps issues
OpnO 6; it stipulates that the 3rd Division is to relieve
contingents of the 1st Marines. The 3rd Division would
then be responsible for the security of the X Corps’ left
flank, but it is also to plan to launch a westward attack.
Meanwhile, the 1st Marines is to prepare to move
north. Also, planes attached to carriers strike a Yalu
River border town, Hyesanjin. These air strikes thor-
oughly damage the area and destroy the military
 525
facility there. A warehouse and barracks are set afire
and destroyed. When elements of the 7th Division
reach it on the twentieth, they observe a town in ruins.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, General O.P. Smith,
commanding general, 1st Marine Division, issues
FragO at 2130. It directs the seizure of Hagaru and it
orders the 5th Marines to dispatch a battalion to Koto-
ri.
In the 1st Marines zone, at 0130, the Communists
initiate an attack against the perimeter at Majon-ni. It
fails to deliver any genuine punch. Several small prob-
ing attacks strike the lines, and these are followed by a
weak attack against the Korean Marines. The Commu-
nists seem intimidated once they encounter a minefield
that lies close to the perimeter. The lagging attacks
cease by 0600, to end the final engagement at Majon-
ni, when the enemy disengages and pulls back. Casu-
alties for friendly forces are two men killed and six
wounded.
Later, in retrospect, General Ruffner, CoS, X Corps,
states that the “Marines had done a masterful job at
Majon-ni.” Ruffner adds that he believed the Marines
broke up the remaining North Korean units that oth-
erwise would have created much trouble at Wonsan.
Following the disengagement at Majon-ni, the N.K.
15th Division concentrates on guerrilla operations in the
Imjin Valley. At Majon-ni, the American and Korean
Marines are to be relieved on the following day.
At Wonsan, a large U.S. Army convoy that includes
thirty-six Marine supply vehicles departs for Majon-
ni at 1030. The 1st Battalion, 13th Regiment, 3rd Di-
vision, is the relief unit. The convoy proceeds past the
Marine outposts held by elements of the 2nd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, but soon after, a damaged bridge and
several craters halt progress. Enemy guerrillas open fire
and pound the convoy. The action kills two soldiers
and wounds three more. A jeep and two supply vehi-
cles are also lost.
The delay postpones the arrival of the Army contin-
gents at Majon-ni until the following day. Lt. Colonel
Robert Blanchard directs his 1st Battalion, 15th Regi-
ment, to establish a defensive perimeter while repairs are
completed.
In the 7th Marines zone, there is no contact with the
enemy at Koto-ri, but the Marines do spot Chinese
forces. On the following day, the 7th Marines will set
out for Hagaru.
In the 3rd Division sector, the North Koreans initiate
roadblocks along the main supply routes and launch
ambushes at various points to hinder the division’s
progress. These clashes continue until the end of the
month and at times, inflict heavy casualties. The 15th
RCT sustains the heaviest casualties and at times great
losses of equipment, while operating west of Wonsan,
between Majon-ni and Tongyang. It appears as if the
North Koreans are acting in concert with the Chinese
troops that have entered Korea.
In the ROK I Corps area, a huge clash occurs when a
large force of enemy armor and supporting infantry en-
counter and engage elements of the S.K. Capital Divi-
November 13, 1950
sion at a point along the coastal road near Orang-ch’on,
about thirty miles north of Kilchu. The contest rages
at a feverish pace under poor weather conditions. The
nasty weather prevents the arrival of supporting planes
and the scene is out of range for the guns of U.S. Navy
destroyers. But, the heavy guns of the cruisers can hit
the mark. The USS Rochester sails to a point from which
its firepower can join the battle, but still the ROKs are
compelled to fall back under the pressure. On the fol-
lowing day, the two antagonists resume the fight.
November 13 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
Division zone, Division issues OpnO 21–50. It directs
the 1st Marines to secure Huksu-ri, while the 5th
Marines deploy to guard the MSR and simultaneously
prepare to pass through the 7th Marines at Haguru,
from where it will move to Changjin, about forty miles
north. The 7th Marines are to capture Hagaru and
await orders to move against Yudam-ni. The division
reconnaissance company is to operate on the right flank,
in the Soyang-ni–Sinhung Valley, and extend as far as
the division’s eastern boundary.
In the 1st Marines zone, relief troops, the 1st Battal-
ion, 15th Regiment, 3rd Division, arrive at 1530 and
begin to assume responsibility for the Majon-ni area.
The 1st Marines prepares to move to Wonsan and de-
parts at 1015 on the following day.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 2nd Battalion begins to
depart the Sinhung Valley en route to relieve the 7th
Marines at Koto-ri. The battalion, under Colonel
Roise, had encountered little opposition during the
mission. Nevertheless, it has captured thirteen prison-
ers, including one Chinese trooper.
In the 7th Marines zone, the regiment departs for
Haguru once contingents of the 5th Marines arrive at
Koto-ri to relieve them. Additional relief elements of the
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, continue to arrive through
the following day. Through verbal orders from the di-
visional commander, the 7th Marines is to establish
blocking positions at Toktong Pass, midway between
Hagaru and Yudam-ni, until more reinforcements ar-
rive. The regiment will encounter about 150–200
enemy troops, bolstered by machine guns, near the
pass. Air power and artillery is called upon to assist and
afterward the enemy is scattered.
General O.P. Smith remains concerned about full-
scale Chinese intervention. At Koto-ri, an OY (obser-
vation plane) airstrip is completed this day. At Hagaru,
the necessary equipment to fabricate an airstrip will re-
quire much heavier equipment. Lt. Colonel Partridge,
CO, 1st Engineering Battalion, will be responsible for
the project. A sturdy road will have to be constructed
to enable the heavy equipment and armor to be trans-
ferred to Hagaru.
In the ROK Army area, the S.K. 32nd Regiment is
activated at Seoul and attached to the recently re-
established S.K. 2nd Division.
In the ROK I Corps area, at Orang-ch’on in the S.K.
Capital Division sector, the North Koreans continue
to drive against the S.K. lines. Later in the day, after
November 14, 1950
the weather clears somewhat, Corsairs arrive and join
the fight to blast the enemy positions. Armor spread
about a snow-filled battlefield feels the sting of the
planes. Two tanks are destroyed; one is damaged and
another disengages and retires hurriedly through six
inches of snow to avoid the firepower of the airstrike.
The enemy has pushed the 18th Regiment back across
a stream, but it still has some tenacity and will again en-
gage on the following day. The 1st S.K. Regiment loses
no ground.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, the 17th Regiment,
acting upon Corps’ orders, sets up to launch an attack
against the enemy at the Ungi River. It is scheduled to
cross the frigid waters on the following morning, dis-
perse the enemy and reconstruct the bridge that had
been destroyed by the enemy. In preparation for the
crossing, Colonel Powell directs South Korean troops
to fabricate a floating footbridge by laying planks be-
tween empty oil drums. This mission, initiated by the
2nd Battalion, gets underway, but the North Koreans
seriously disrupt the plans of the 3rd Battalion. Later
this day, during the night of the 13th-14th, the enemy
operating upstream opens the floodgates of the dams in
the area and the results are disastrous.
In the Eighth Army area, 25th Division zone at P’yong-
gang, the S.K. 17th Regiment, which has repelled
enemy attacks on the 11th-12th, is again struck. After
dark, elements of the N.K. 4th Division launch an as-
sault that strikes both the town and the airport, but
again, the South Koreans repel the attacks. Fighting
lasts into the late morning hours of the 14th. For their
unsuccessful effort, the Communists lose 141 killed
and 20 taken prisoner. The S.K. 17th Regiment sustains
11 troops killed and 23 wounded.
Nevertheless, the guerrilla activity in this area will
not recede. Once the U.S. 25th Division pulls out to
prepare for its part in the upcoming offensive, sched-
uled for November 24, the South Koreans face even
more pressure.
November 14 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
Division sector, 1st Marines zone, seventeen days of op-
erating at Majon-ni ceases for the 1st Marines. Having
been received by Army contingents of the 3rd Divi-
sion, the Marine contingents depart for Wonsan. The
mission accounts for 1,395 prisoners, the majority of
whom have voluntarily surrendered. The Marines sus-
tain 16 killed in action, four of whom die of their
wounds, and 45 wounded. Marine estimates of enemy
casualties at Majon-ni are 525 killed, but numbers of
their wounded are unknown. Regarding the main sup-
ply route, Marine casualties amount to nine killed and
eighty-one wounded while guarding convoys as they
moved through Ambush Alley.
In other activity, at 1820, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines,
arrives by train at Chigyong from Wonsan. Other ele-
ments follow by truck convoy. Also, the ROK 3rd Ko-
rean Marine Corps Battalion arrives at Majon-ni from
Wonsan, then it advances about twelve air-miles and es-
tablishes a roadblock near Tongyang, along the north-
526
south road, where it crosses the Wonsan–P’yonggang
Road.
In the 7th Marines zone, Hagaru is seized without
incident at 1400. In the ROK I Corps area, heavy fight-
ing continues at Orang-ch’on for the fourth day and
the enemy continues to hammer the Capital Division,
but the South Koreans dish out equal punishment.
Nonetheless, the pressure forces the Cavalry Regiment
and the 1st Regiment to pull back and give ground.
The South Koreans are saved from more disastrous re-
sults by continuing close-air support that stops the
North Koreans from a full-scale breakthrough.
The combined hammering by the ROKs and the
support fire of the Navy and aircraft finally deflate the
enemy’s staying power. This day, the planes take out
another three tanks, two self-propelled guns and twelve
trucks. By the following day, the 18th Regiment, S.K.
Capital Division, resumes its advance.
In related activity, thirty B-29s deliver 40,000 in-
cendiary bombs to the vicinity of Hoeryong, along the
Tumen River at the Manchurian border. The Korean
town is located about 100 miles southwest of Vladi-
vostok.
In the 7th Infantry Division zone, in below zero
weather, the 17th Regiment launches its assault to cross
the Ungi River. The 2nd Battalion fords the river by
use of a recently constructed floating footbridge, but
the enemy has complicated the operation by flooding
the river with water from an upstream dam, which
brings the water level to about waist high to hinder the
crossing of the 3rd Battalion. Crossing without the
footbridge causes instant casualties among the troops
who attempt to cross the freezing cold water. Those
who crossed had to immediately return, but then their
clothes had to be cut from their bodies. The endeavor
costs 1 man killed, six wounded and another eighteen
with frostbite. The battalion is forced to postpone the
crossing and use the footbridge later.
The rapidly sinking temperatures also hinder the op-
eration of the vehicles and compel the regiment on the
following day to urgently request special supplies to
keep the gasoline from freezing. The needed item is an
alcohol-based antifreeze that can be mixed with the
gas. The enemy fire aimed at the regiment is from a
great distance and off-target.
In the Eighth Army area, the road blockage estab-
lished by the 3rd Korean Marine Battalion lies on the
Army boundary line that separates it from X Corps.
In Air Force activity, B-29s again bomb the bridges
at Sinuiju along the Yalu River, but the mission is in-
terrupted when fifteen MiGs attack. Two of the B-29s
are damaged, but all return to their base.
In other activity, a band of MiGs attack a four-plane
formation of B-29s in the vicinity of Sinuiju. The
planes attached to the 371st Bombardment Squadron,
307th Bombardment Group (M), engage the enemy.
A tailgunner aboard one of the closing planes attempts
to take out a MiG, but his firing range is outside the
gunner’s range. Sergeant Richard W. Fisher, aboard the
same aircraft as the central fire controller, finds the MiG
 527
A Corsair on the ice covered deck of the USS Badoeng Strait on 14 November 1950.
within his sights. Fisher commences fire and holds the
trigger down until a huge cloud of black smoke is spot-
ted, and then he pours more fire into the plane until it
begins to fall from the air to crash.
— In the United States: Captain Leonard A. Miller
becomes the first Marine to be assigned to helicopter
training at Quantico.
—In Japan: In Tokyo, General MacArthur and Am-
bassador Sebald discuss the Korean strategy from
MacArthur’s point of view. MacArthur specifies that
he intends to decimate the Yalu River bridges, thereby
severing supply routes and cutting off enemy forces be-
tween the Yalu and the U.N. forces. Air Force and
ground forces will devastate all fortified obstacles in
these sectors as they drive the enemy across the Yalu, but
he indicates that specific instructions will halt the U.N.
troops at the Yalu.
Ambassador Sebald later states that General
MacArthur believes if the offensive fails, the only viable
alternative would be to make air strikes against strate-
gic enemy targets in Manchuria. Lt. General Strate-
meyer, commander, Far East Air Forces, during a later
conversation with Ambassador Sebald, states that he
“could flatten China with his airpower if authorized to
do so.”
Stratemeyer’s opinion is not an isolated one among
the military commanders. However, some Washington
November 15, 1950
politicians and the United Nations members feel oth-
erwise. They seem intimidated by the thought of Rus-
sia and China combining their forces.
November 15 In the X Corps area, General Al-
mond responds to MacArthur’s letter of 11 November. He
seeks permission to continue the northern attack, but to
also initiate an attack west of the Chosin Reservoir.
Meanwhile, MacArthur, prior to Almond’s letter
reaching him, decides to instructs Almond by radio, to
devise an attack plan (alternate to OpnO 6) to move his
attack westward to seize Chanjin and sever the Chinese
main supply route, the Manpojin–Kanggye–Huich’on
Road and rail line. This changes the mission, as
CinCFE had during the latter part of October called for
a drive to the border. The X Corps report indicates that
the enemy’s stiff challenge to Eighth Army’s drive
prompted the change in plans.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, General O.P. Smith
dispatches a letter to the commandant, General Clifton
B. Cates. It indicates his opposing view to the ongoing
optimism regarding the U.N. war efforts in Korea.
Smith and his staff anticipate the probability of Chinese
intervention on a large scale and initiate preparations for
such an event. Smith emphasizes the eighty-mile gap
between the Eighth Army and the Marines. He also
states:
November 16, 1950 528

Someone in high authority will have to make up his Capital Division, reinitiates its advance toward the bor-
mind as to what is our goal. My mission is still to der.
advance to the border. The Eighth Army will not attack In Naval activity, the U.S. Navy initiates minesweep-
until the 20th. Manifestly, we should not push on with- ing operations in the vicinity of Songjin.
out regard to Eighth Army. We would simply get
further out on a limb.... I believe a winter campaign in
November 16 An Army tugboat, towing a crane
barge, strikes a mine at the entrance of the Wonsan
the mountains of North Korea is too much to ask of
harbor and disaster ensues. The vessel sinks and only ten
the American Soldier or Marine, and I doubt the fea-
men out of about forty troops survive.
sibility of supplying troops in this area during the win-
In the X Corps area, General Almond, in response to
ter or providing for the evacuation of sick and
MacArthur’s directive to devise an alternate plan of at-
wounded.
tack, directs his staff to produce a blueprint. The ini-
Smith’s letter contains other thoughts and concerns,
tial plan is given a negative by Almond, but a second
including his “wide open left flank” and the deploy-
plan is developed during the next four days. He accepts
ment of one Marine Division scattered along a single
it, but makes some modifications. The third draft is
mountain road from Hamhung to the border, a dis-
then taken to Tokyo to be presented to General Head-
tance of about 120 air miles.
quarters.
Later on, during 1956, General Almond comments
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the mine clearing
on General Smith’s letter. He states: “I am mindful of
operation at Hungnam is complete. The port is opened.
the skepticism of General Smith in all of the supply
In the 1st Marines zone, the 2nd Battalion, 1st
plans that X Corps conceived and I sympathize with
Marines, departs Wonsan by rail and moves towards
his viewpoint very thoroughly. However, in my mind
Chigyong. The 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, departs on
there was always the assistance to be gained by air sup-
the following day.
ply either drop or landing them and the counterpart of
In the 7th Marines sector, the regiment occupies Ha-
that, the evacuation to be expected by plane from the
garu and discovers a new enemy, the weather. The tem-
air field that we were to build.”
perature at Hagaru stands at four degrees below zero,
In the 1st Marines zone, the 3rd Battalion, 15th In-
indicating a vicious premature beginning of winter.
fantry, completes its relief of the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Generals O.P. Smith and Field Harris arrive to inspect
Marines, which had been deployed to block the enemy
the area. General Harris, commander 1st Marine Air-
at Ambush Alley. Company D, 2nd Battalion, 1st
craft Wing and Tactical Air Command, X Corps, had
Marines, deployed to the rear of Wonsan, is also re-
been asked by Almond to check out the site. Almond
lieved by Army forces. The 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines,
wants an airstrip long enough to handle R4Ds to en-
prepares to move seventy miles to Chigyong. Problems
able evacuation and resupply missions to be carried out.
with the rails have also hindered a quick move.
A suitable site is discovered south of the village.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 2nd Battalion is perched
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, the 17th Regiment,
at Koto-ri. The 3rd Battalion is at Chinhung-ni, sup-
across the Ungi River, advances about eight miles, in
ported by Battery K, 4th Battalion, 11th Marines, a
marked contrast to the slow gains of the past several
detachment of 1st Service Battalion and Company B
days. Information reported by observation planes re-
(minus 3rd Platoon), 1st Engineer Battalion. In addi-
veals that the enemy units are separating into small con-
tion, the 1st Battalion and Company D, 1st Tank Bat-
tingents and retiring in the direction of Kapsan, the ob-
talion, is deployed at Majon-dong.
jective of both the 17th and the 32nd Regiments. Also,
In the 7th Marines zone, the regiment stands at Ha-
a patrol of the 3rd Battalion, 31st Infantry, moves from
garu, the entrance to the Chosin Reservoir. General
its positions east of the reservoir to reconnoiter the
Edward Craig, assistant division commander, arrives
northern side of the Pujon Reservoir. The contingent
at Hagaru. He believes it should be the Marines’ for-
discovers and engages about 200 Chinese troops. Fol-
ward base.
lowing a short firefight, the Chinese retire.
In the 11th Marines zone, Lt. Colonel Harvey Feehan
In Naval activity, the USS St. Paul (CA 73) joins in
assumes command of the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines.
the operations with Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77) at
He relieves Lt. Colonel Ransom M. Wood, who had
Kyojo Wan. Also, the USS Rochester (CA 124) arrives
commanded the battalion since its arrival in Korea on
off Songjin to bolster Cruiser Division 5.
2 August.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, because of the se- November 17 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
vere weather conditions, division requests 500 oil- Division sector, at Wonsan, the 3rd Battalion, 1st
burning stoves, 250 squad tents and special fuel. Also, Marines, departs for Chigyong. The final components
the 1st Battalion, 17th Regiment, fords the Ungi River of RCT-1 also depart. The 1st Tank Battalion’s head-
and deploys to the left of the 2nd Battalion, which had quarters and service companies begin operating at
preceded it. Each makes only minimal gains during the Soyang-ni, about eight miles northwest of Hamhung.
day. Also, a 3rd Battalion patrol advances to the east- The route from Chinhung-ni to Koto-ri still is unable
ern side of the Pujon Reservoir. to carry M-26 tanks, but engineers continue to expand
In the ROK I Corps area, following hard fighting the width of the curves along the one-way road.
against a large enemy force, the S.K. 18th Regiment, In the 5th Marines zone, pursuant to Division OpnO
 529 November 17, 1950

A contingent of the recently arrived Thai Battalion is inspected by a U.S. Army officer and a Thai offi-
cer on 17 November at Taegu.

22–50, issued at 0800, the regi-

ment receives instructions for its
imminent advance east of the
Chosin Reservoir. The 5th
Marines is to pass a minimum of
one battalion through the 7th
Marines at Hagaru and advance
about seven miles up the east
side of the reservoir to secure
Sinhung-ni, northeast of Ha-
garu. Then, upon orders, the 5th
Marines is to capture a key road
junction about twenty miles
north of Hagaru at Kyolmul-ni.
Lt. Colonel John W. Stevens
II replaces Lt. Colonel George R.
Newton as commanding officer,
1st Battalion, 5th Marines.
In the 7th Marines zone,
today’s Division OpnO 22–50
presents the regiment with mul-
tiple missions. It is to post at
least one battalion to guard the
division’s left flank between Ha-
garu and Yudam-ni. It also is to
relieve contingents of the 5th
Marines and assume responsibil-
ity for the MSR in its area, be-
tween Chinhung-ni, Hagaru
and Koto-ri.
The division reconnaissance
company holds responsibility for
U.S. Marine riflemen in vicinity of Yudam-ni. the left flank of the MSR, near
November 18, 1950
Majon-dong, while the 11th Marines deploys its 4th
Battalion in the same vicinity awaiting orders to ad-
vance north.
In the ROK I Corps area, the Capital Division con-
tinues its march, but the pace has slowed, due in part
to the enemy, but equally due to the temperature,
which has sunk way below zero. These troops have not
been properly equipped to deal with the elements. Most
have only fatigues, inadequate shoes and one blanket per
man in addition to a U.S. winter overcoat.
This day, an LST arrives at Songjin, bringing 26,000
South Korean winter uniforms. Other supplies are en
route. Another LST departs Pusan transporting winter
shoes, socks, field jackets and other necessary items of
clothing.
Also, a report that details fighting between the eve-
ning of the 14th through today lists the North Korean
casualties at 1,753 killed and 105 captured. It also re-
ports the seizure of 101 burp guns, 62 light machine
guns, four rapid-fire guns and 649 rifles.
In related activity, the USS St. Paul is en route to
throw its weight into the advance. Also, the S.K. 3rd Di-
vision, on the advance along the coastal road, is nudg-
ing toward the Capital Division. The 23rd Regiment
departs Songjin en route to Hapsu.
In Naval activity, operations to clear the harbors of
Hungnam, Chinnamp’o, Inchon and Kusan are com-
plete. The harbors are safe and prepared to accept ship-
ping.
November 18 In the X Corps area, the debarka-
tion of the U.S. 3rd Infantry Division, commanded by
Major General Robert H. Soule, at Wonsan is com-
pleted this day. Its arrival brings X Corps to its full
strength of major units. X Corps now consists of the 1st
Marine Division, the 3rd and 7th Infantry Divisions
and the ROK I Corps. Each is assigned a zone, but the
area for each is massive.
The 65th Regiment, 3rd Division, establishes its
perimeter, but a huge gap that contains the Paeksan
Pass, which reaches a height of 5,600 feet, exists be-
tween it and the S.K. 26th Regiment, posted to the
north. Attempts are initiated by Company B, 65th Reg-
iment, to establish contact with the South Koreans. Be-
tween today and November 22, two separate engage-
ments develop between the Communists and Company
B, but the Americans cannot penetrate the pass. And
there are no roads capable of handling vehicles in the
northern part of the 3rd Division sector.
In other activity, X Corps requests and receives per-
mission to use the S.K. 26th Regiment to seize Huksu-
ri. Subsequently, the 1st Marines are to relieve the Ko-
reans, but these orders change on November 21.
In the 1st Marine Division area, at Majon-dong, Lt.
Colonel Harry Milne, CO, 1st Tank Battalion, has re-
cently established a provisional tank platoon composed
of two Sherman (M4A3) tanks attached to Headquar-
ters Company and four Company D dozer-tanks. The
improvised tank platoon departs for Hagaru and ar-
rives without encountering any resistance. Thanks to
530
the opening of the road to Hagaru to heavy traffic, the
engineers begin constructing the airstrip.
In the 1st Marines sector, the regiment, still hindered
by poor rail and truck transportation, is behind sched-
ule in its attempt to reach Chigyong. The final con-
tingents are still en route. However, the mission is still
to march westward to secure Huksu-ri. In the mean-
time, the S.K. 26th Regiment departs Chigyong dur-
ing the early morning hours of the 19th to seize Huksu-
ri.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, patrols of the 31st
Regiment spread out on both sides of the Pujon Reser-
voir.
In the ROK I Corps area, the S.K. 22nd Regiment, 3rd
S.K. Division, departs Kilchu and advances toward
Hapsu, the same objective as that which elements of
the S.K. Capital Division are driving toward. Both di-
visions of I Corps are receiving supplies from six Ko-
rean LSTs.
In Naval activity, planes attached to Fast Carrier Task
Force (TF 77) encounters a group of Russian MiG-15s.
An engagement ensues and the Soviets lose one plane;
five others sustain damage. The F9Fs sustain no losses.
November 19 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
Division zone, five huge dozers arrive to assist the en-
gineers of Company D at Hagaru. The engineers must
create the airstrip from a piece of earth that stands like
solid rock in a frozen wasteland. The runway is to be
3,200 feet, some shorter than what the engineers’ man-
uals dictate, but the engineers hope it can suffice.
Also, a supply regulating station is established at Ha-
garu to permit a resupply operation to function. Pre-
viously, the supply depots had been handled by the 1st
Service and 1st Ordnance Battalions at Hamhung. The
port operation at Hamhung is the responsibility of the
2nd Engineer Special Brigade, USA. Korean laborers
are also employed.
Trains depart Hungnam for Chinhung-ni once the
Marines put the line back into activity. The 1st Ser-
vice Battalion gets the job. Korean civilians operate the
trains. Once at Chinhung-ni, the trains are unloaded
and from there the supplies are trucked to Hagaru.
The newly unfolding operations expect large casual-
ties. The divisional hospital, expanded to 400 beds, re-
mains at Hungnam, staffed by Companies A and B,
1st Medical Battalion, and H&S personnel. The 1st,
5th and 7th Marines receive Companies D, C and E,
1st Medical Battalion, respectively. Soon after, division
anticipates the need of a hospital scenario at Hagaru. It
is decided that in an emergency, medical detachments
will be airlifted from Hungnam. To further bolster the
operations, the hospital ship USS Consolation will em-
bark from Wonsan and take a position off Hungnam.
In addition, heated rail cars will be emplaced to han-
dle the transporting of casualties along the 35-mile
stretch of narrow gauge tracks from Chinhung-ni.
In other activity, the 1st Motor Transport Battalion
(minus detachments) comes under the control of the
1st Supply Regulating Detachment at Hagaru, which
 531
increases the productivity of supply movement for the
Marines. Transportation units have been overwhelmed
since the Wonsan landing. The 7th Motor Transport
Battalion had earlier been moved to the operational
control of X Corps, which forces the 1st Mountain Bat-
talion to be attached to the 7th RCT.
In the U.S. 3rd Division zone, one great difficulty,
because of the lack of roads, is the task of supplying
the S.K. 26th Regiment, which is deployed on the op-
posite side of Paeksan Pass. In addition to the nasty
terrain, intelligence estimates that of around 25,000
North Korean guerrilla fighters operating in its zone,
most are within about a ten-mile radius of the omi-
nous pass.
In the 7th Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 17th Reg-
iment, following a strongly coordinated assault sup-
ported by artillery and tanks, seizes Kapsan. North Ko-
rean troops, defending from their foxholes, are
mismatched against the roving tanks that roll through
as if passing anthills. In addition, other enemy infantry,
deployed in trenches and pillboxes, receive a hurricane
of fire compliments of the guns of the 15th AAA Ar-
tillery Battalion. The enemy troops quickly bolt from
their positions to escape the firestorm, but combined ef-
fective fire slays them as they run.
Subsequently, under the identical support fire, the
1st Battalion crosses the river and secures the town by
1030. After the capture, it advances, trailed later by the
2nd and 3rd Battalions, and by evening, it stands about
23 miles from Hyesanjin along the headwaters of the
Yalu River. The regimental command post is estab-
lished in Kapsan for the night.
On the following day, the regiment closes against
the Yalu. In the 31st Regimental sector, both the east
and west sides of the Pujon Reservoir are patrolled
without incident. By the 20th, the regiment begins to
move to terrain near the Cho-ri–P’ungsan Road to the
rear of the 17th Regiment.
In the ROK I Corps area, the USS St. Paul is on scene
and its guns bolster the ROK Capital Division’s ad-
vance. Also, the weather is sufficiently clear to permit
aircraft to shadow the advance. This day, planes de-
stroy two tanks and two artillery pieces. Intelligence
determines that the opposing force engaged with the
Capital Division at Orang-ch’on is the N.K. 507th
Brigade and one Regiment of the N.K. 41st Division,
which combined total about 6,000 troops. On the fol-
lowing day, the Capital Division bolts across the
Orang-ch’on River and reinitiates its drive toward
Ch’ongjin.
In Air Force activity, Musan, North Korea, is attacked
by a group of fifty B-26s (light bombers), initiating the
first massive strike by light bombers during the Korean
War. The planes drop incendiary bombs on the mili-
tary barracks in the town, located along the Tumen
River at the border with Communist China.
November 20 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
Division sector, the British 41st Independent Com-
mando, Royal Marines, arrives at Hungnam to serve
November 20, 1950
with the U.S. Marines. The unit, commanded by
British Lieutenant Colonel Douglas B. Drysdale, is
composed of 14 officers and 221 enlisted men. It had
been in Japan attached to ComNavFE and had re-
quested to serve with the American Marines.
General O.P. Smith, during conversations with Ad-
miral Doyle in the beginning of November, had con-
summated the agreement to have the British join the 1st
Marine Division. General Smith will utilize the troops,
who are greatly skilled in reconnaissance, to guard the
left flank of the Marines’ advance. The British contin-
gent suffers from the lack of transportation and is
scheduled to move to Hagaru on the 28th, in conjunc-
tion with the transfer of the division CP to Hagaru.
In the 3rd Division sector, in Majon-ni, the 1st Bat-
talion, 15th Regiment, which had relieved the Marines
on the 13th, is struck by an enemy assault during the
night and the fighting continues into the early morn-
ing hours of the 21st. The enemy force, composed of
about two hundred troops, is repulsed; however, at a
point, it succeeds in breaking through the perimeter
line.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, in freezing cold
weather and along ice-covered roads, the 17th Regi-
ment reinitiates its march to the border at Hyesanjin.
The 1st Battalion acts as vanguard, trailed by the 3rd
and 2nd Battalions. The columns tread slowly for nine-
teen miles as the troops cautiously walk along the
treacherous mountain roads. They encounter only spo-
radic light opposition, raised by small enemy contin-
gents. The march terminates several miles from the ob-
jective and establishes a night perimeter.
Also, upon orders of General David Barr, the 31st
and 32nd Regiments advance to the vicinity of
P’ungsan–Kapsan to take positions behind the 17th
Regiment; however; contingents are left behind to keep
secure the mountain passes that lead east.
South Korean troops arrive at about midnight on
the 20th-21st to relieve Company I, 32nd Regiment,
at Sillyong on the divisional right front, but mistaken
identity by both parties ignites a firefight. The skir-
mish ends quickly, but five South Koreans are
wounded.
In related activity, U.S. Air Force planes arrive on
this day to drop food and gasoline to the 7th Division
at Kapsan.
In the ROK I Corps area, having tended its wounded
following the vicious struggle of the previous week, the
Capital Division crosses the Orang-ch’on River en
route to seize the big industrial facilities at Ch’ongjin,
about thirty miles north. Once there, the unit will be
only 65 air-miles (southwest) from the Siberian bor-
der.
In the Eighth Army area, intelligence estimates that the
Chinese build-ups are emerging in Korea, as well as in
Manchuria. Nevertheless, headquarters in Tokyo re-
mains convinced that the Chinese will not intervene
in great strength.
— In Japan: General MacArthur receives a U.N. di-
rective indicating that only minimum sized units will
November 21, 1950
advance to the boundary of Korea and Manchuria. The
order also states that no U.N. troops are permitted to
leave or enter Korea by use of the Manchurian or So-
viet borders. The directive insists that the international
border be “meticulously preserved.” The general belief
is that the advance is occupational and will not incite
confrontation with the Chinese.
November 21 In the X Corps area, the U.S. 7th
Division reaches the Manchurian border. The pend-
ing massive Chinese Communist assault is still unex-
pected. Up to this point, the Chinese remain inter-
twined with North Korean units under the guise of
volunteers. X Corps informs the 1st Marine Division
that the 1st Marines are relieved of responsibility for
Huksu-ri, which is now placed under the 3rd Divi-
sion, with its modified boundary.
General Almond receives a request from Major Gen-
eral Robert H. Soule, 3rd Division, who wants Almond
to realign the existing boundary between the 3rd Di-
vision and the 1st Marine Division. By modifying the
line and extending the 3rd’s perimeter northward by
only several miles, it would give the division access to
the Huksu-ri–Sach’ang-ni Road and provide an easier
method of resupplying the S.K. 26th Regiment. Soule
receives an affirmative response on the following day.
In Majon-ni, a patrol composed of two officers and 91
men of the 1st Battalion, 15th Regiment, moves west-
A contingent of the 17th Regiment, U.S. 7th Division, in the desolate village of Hyesanjin at the
Manchurian border on 21 November.
532
ward by vehicles to make contact with the 3rd Battal-
ion, Korean Marines, holding the roadblock at
Tongyang. At about the halfway point, while the con-
voy passes through an eight-mile gorge, disaster strikes.
The column drives directly into an ambush, which costs
the unit 28 men killed and the loss of nearly its entire
complement of vehicles and heavy weapons. The Com-
munists mine the roads to impede the U.S. movement be-
tween Majon-ni and the South Korean Marines at
Tongyang. With Majon-ni imperiled, reinforcements
are rushed to bolster it. One company of infantry from
the 2nd Battalion, accompanied by a contingent of tanks,
speed to the perimeter.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, the 17th Regiment
enters and occupies Hyesanjin without incident by
1000. In addition to Colonel Powell, commanding of-
ficer of the 17th Regiment, Generals Almond and Gen-
eral Barr enter the town with the leading contingents
and they observe the remnants of the objective, which
had been heavily struck by carrier-based planes on the
13th to bring about near-total destruction.
Word of the occupation of Hyesanjin by the 7th Di-
vision reaches General MacArthur, who dispatches a
message to X Corps commander General Ned Almond:
“Heartiest congratulations, Ned, and tell Dave Barr
that he hit the jackpot.” General Almond, on the fol-
lowing day, sends his congratulations.
At this time, the Yalu is nearly totally frozen. Only
 533
Troops of the 17th Regiment, U.S. 7th Division, move through the snow at Hyesanjin at the Manchurian
border with China on 21 November.
about a six-foot-wide channel remains open and within
days, the entire river will be frozen over. As troops stare
across the Yalu, they see Chinese guarding the oppos-
ing banks and an unscathed village on the Manchurian
side several hundred yards upstream. The close proxim-
ity of CCF soldiers immediately raises concerns of the
troops about the probability of China’s entry into the
conflict. Still, there is no official word on any imminent
threat of a major attack by the Chinese. The troops are
preparing for Thanksgiving and a hot meal featuring
turkey.
November 22 In the X Corps area, Corps directs
the 3rd Infantry Division to establish blocking posi-
tions at Yudam-ni. In other activity, the boundary sep-
arating the 1st Marine Division and the 3rd Infantry
Division is changed to move the Huksu-ri–Sach’ang-
ni Road into the 3rd Division’s zone. In conjunction,
the 26th S.K. Regiment receives orders from the 3rd
Division to establish positions at Huksu-ri and
Sach’ang-ni. Following several successful skirmishes,
including one at Sach’ang-ni that costs the enemy more
than 100 killed or captured, the order is carried out.
Soon after, the South Koreans again initiate attacks
northward and westward, gaining several miles beyond
Sach’ang-ni.
General Almond offers his optimistic congratula-
tions to the 7th Division for its success in reaching the
border at Hyesanjin: “The fact that only twenty days ago
this division landed amphibiously over the beaches at
Iwon and advanced 200 miles over tortuous mountain
terrain and fought successfully against a determined
foe in subzero weather will be recorded in history as an
outstanding military achievement.”
In the 1st Marine Division sector, General Smith will
begin to step up the advance now that he can utilize
November 23, 1950
the 1st Marines to occupy rear positions on the MSR
and dispatch the forward two regiments and the ac-
companying British contingent.
In the 7th Division sector, despite frigid weather con-
ditions and primitive mountain roads, elements of the
17th Regiment advance to Hyesanjin at the Yalu River
and become the first American unit to reach the bor-
der. It is also the only U.S. component to reach the
border. News of this mission arrives throughout X
Corps by the following day. The fact that no Chinese
opposition is encountered expands the optimism of the
troops and makes for a happy Thanksgiving.
The 32nd Regiment at Kapsan prepares to drive to
Singalpajin to deploy to the left of the 17th Regiment,
which is at Hyesanjin. Task Force Kingston, com-
manded by 2nd Lieutenant Robert C. Kingston, ad-
vances without incident to Samsu and enters it by the
middle of the afternoon. Later, the remainder of the
3rd Battalion (minus Company I) arrives there. It and
the nearby 32nd Regiment are to hook up, but as the
17th Regiment initiates an attack, North Korean re-
sistance prevents the hook-up. North Korean opposi-
tion continues to hinder the 17th Regiment in this area
for the next week.
In Majon-ni, a patrol supported by armor heads to-
ward Tongyang to again attempt to establish contact
with the ROK Marines, but it is compelled to abort
the mission because the Communists had spent the
night destroying the road and laying mines along the
route. This action totally isolates the 3rd Korean Ma-
rine Battalion at its roadblock positions and places the
South Koreans in great jeopardy. Their only sure source
of supplies from this point on will be by airdrop.
November 23 In the X Corps area, it is Thurs-
day, Thanksgiving Day, the eve of the U.N. offensive
November 23, 1950 534

scheduled to be carried out primarily by U.S. troops.
Most of the men believe they will be home by Christ-
mas. The day’s festive menu throughout the various X
Corps units, as prescribed by Corps, is shrimp cock-
tail, roast turkey, cranberry sauce and candied sweet
potatoes. For dessert, the samplings include fruit salad,
fruit cake, mince pie and coffee. This menu had been
distributed from Corps to subordinate commands on 18
November.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, Division OpnO
2350 is issued at 0800. RCT 1 is to relieve contingents
of the 7th Marines near Hagaru and Koto-ri and it is
to guard the MSR at Chinhung-ni, Hagaru and Koto-
ri. The 5th Marines is to capture Kyolmul-ni, which lies

X Corps troops enjoy Thanksgiving dinner at Hamhung.

 535
about twenty miles north of Hagaru. In addition, the
5th RCT is to prepare to advance northwest to the vil-
lage to seize Toksil-li. From there, upon orders, the
RCT is to prepare to move northeast about fifteen ad-
ditional miles to secure Tuan-di.
The 7th Marines is to march to Yudam-ni, secure it
and maintain one battalion there. Additionally, the
OpnO directs the Royal Marines to advance on the left
flank, as far as fifteen miles west of Koto-ri. The com-
bined force of division reconnaissance troops and the
British might be in a position to discover and destroy
Chinese forces that have been undiscovered by regular
infantry patrols. The 1st Tank Battalion is ordered to
guard the main supply route near Majon-dong and
Soyang-ni. The 1st Engineer Battalion is ordered to
augment Division operations, but to primarily focus
on the airstrip at Hagaru and the upkeep of the MSR.
In the 1st Marines zone, the regiment still suffers from
lack of adequate transportation vehicles. The 1st Bat-
talion, using 11th Marines’ trucks, arrives at Chinhung-
ni and relieves the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines.
In the 7th Marines zone, pursuant to OpnO 23–50,
the Regiment advances to seize Yudam-ni. The 1st Bat-
talion acts as vanguard. It will miss its Thanksgiving
dinner. The route is sporadically blocked with a vari-
ety of minor obstacles, including abandoned road-
blocks that contain cunningly placed booby-traps. The
regiment also encounters several detachments of enemy
troops, but they, too, are overcome.
In Majon-ni, for the third time in as many days, a
contingent of the 15th Regiment moves out to estab-
lish contact with the South Korean Marines at
Tongyang, but the contingent is also forced to first re-
pair holes and clear mines along the way. The South
Korean Marines have been directed to dispatch a con-
tingent to hook up with the advancing Americans. Ini-
tially, all goes well as the convoy advances, even through
the site of the recent ambush. However, once it ad-
vances about two miles beyond the ambush site, the
Communists, from concealed positions, again strike.
The patrol returns fire against the force of about 300
troops and during the heated skirmish, the South Ko-
reans arrive from the opposite direction to partially foil
the ambush. Nevertheless, the Communists continue
to pound the positions of both the Americans and the
South Koreans. Sixteen men of the regimental patrol
sustain wounds and three others are missing in action.
At about this time, the patrol and the Korean
Marines break off the fight and retire to their respec-
tive lines. On the 25th, yet another attempt will be
made to unclog the Communist blockage.
In the South Korean 3rd Division sector, a contingent
of the S.K. 26th Regiment, operating near Sach’ang-ni
along the highway that leads south from Yudam-ni and
the west shore of the Changjin Reservoir, captures 26
Chinese soldiers.
In the U.S. 7th Division sector, elements of the 7th Di-
vision occupy Hyesanjin on the Yalu River. At Samsu,
North Korean contingents continue to raise opposition
against the 32nd Regiment, preventing Task Force
November 24, 1950
Kingston from advancing to Singalpajin. Also, as of
this day, casualties due to the extreme weather have
skyrocketed. The 31st Regiment has sustained 83 frost-
bite cases and 53 of these are evacuated. The divisional
cases of frostbite stand at 142.
In other activity, a downed pilot, stranded about
eighty miles behind enemy lines near Kanggye, comes
close to being captured, but a helicopter crew risks its
own safety to rescue the pilot. Just as the helicopter
reaches the position, the pilot shoots a flare into the
air. Enemy fire commences immediately, but the heli-
copter lands and one man, Sergeant James K. Bryson,
leaps from the helicopter and brings the injured pilot
to the aircraft. The crew takes off with Communist
troops about two feet from their helicopter. Although
the helicopter sustains hits, it makes it back to friendly
lines at Sinanju.
In Naval activity, the East Coast Blockade and Patrol
Task Group (TG-95.2) comes under the operational
control of United Nations Blockading and Escort Task
Force (TF-95).
November 24 The Eighth Army offensive be-
gins at 0800. General MacArthur dispatches a special
message to the U.N.: “The United Nations’ massive
compression in North Korea against the new Red
Armies operating there is now approaching its decisive
effort.... If successful this should for all practical pur-
poses end the war[,] restore peace and unity to Korea,
enable the prompt withdrawal of U.N. military forces,
and permit the complete assumption by the Korean
people and nation of full sovereignty and international
equality. It is that for which we fight.”
By this time, MacArthur’s intelligence units and his
troops in the field have determined that Chinese Com-
munist contingents have been infiltrating North Korea.
General MacArthur flies to Korea to oversee the initi-
ation of the planned offensive. On the following day,
Communist forces swarm against Eighth Army’s west-
ern positions and follow this attack with another gi-
gantic assault on the 28th, against the 1st Marine Di-
vision positions to the east near the Chosin River.
In other activity, X Corps G-3 Lt. Colonel Chiles
delivers X Corps OpnPlan 8, Draft 3 to Headquarters
in Tokyo. It is approved at United Nations Headquar-
ters, but with some alteration. The proposed boundary
separating X Corps and Eighth Army is moved farther
south and into the 1st Marine Division sector.
Eighth Army and the X Corps, under Generals
Walker and Almond respectively, begin the final attack
to gain the remainder of terrain between the UN forces
and the northern border of Korea at the Yalu River.
The carriers of Task Force 77 support the offensive.
The Eighth Army and X Corps operate independently.
According to calculations the Americans, along with
the South Koreans and other allies, expect to encounter
nearly 50,000 Chinese and North Korean troops as
they advance the final 100 miles that stand between
them and northern border of Korea, where it prima-
rily meets the Yalu River and Manchuria; however, at
November 25, 1950
the northeastern border, for a short distance, it meets
with Soviet territory.
At this time it is thought that the conflict would be
terminated by Christmas Day. General Walker, as of
the previous day, maintains logistical control of Gen-
eral Almond’s X Corps, which had arrived in Korea
during the previous September; however, X Corps op-
erates as a totally separate command.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, General Frank
W. Milburn orders his two divisions to advance west
and northwest toward Chongju and Taech’on, but he
retains the British Brigade to keep it in reserve. The
21st Regiment, 24th Division, operating on the left,
moves out with a supporting complement of tanks,
then along Route 1 toward Chongju, just under twenty
miles away. On the corps’ right, two regiments of the
ROK 1st Division move against Taech’on, but they lack
a good road and are forced to advance along both sides
of the Taeryong River. En route, the force encounters
some enemy resistance, but it is still able to reach a
point less than five miles from its objective by nightfall.
The Chinese launch a stiff counterattack that lasts
through the night of 24th-25th and terminates at about
dawn. Some South Korean units on the right (east bank
of the Taeryong) are driven back about two miles; how-
ever, those on the west bank maintain their positions.
In the IX Corps sector, the 2nd Division, under Gen-
eral Laurence B. Keiser, stands about three miles in
front of the 25th Division, and essentially, it stays in
place when the offensive begins. Nonetheless, General
Keiser, in an effort to prevent any penetration of its
west flank, directs the 9th and 38th Regiments to ad-
just their positions by making a small forward jump to
the lower bank of the Paengnyong River, a tributary of
the Ch’ongch’on River.
In the meantime, General John B. Coulter orders
the 25th Division, led by General William B. Kean and
his second in command, Brigadier General Vennard
Wilson, to advance north (left), towards Unsan. The
24th and 35th Regiments hold the right and left re-
spectively, while Task Force Dolvin advances in the
center. These I Corps troops move parallel to the Kury-
ong River. Enemy resistance is sporadic, which permits
Task Force Dolvin to advance about seven miles.
Meanwhile, the 24th and 35th Regiments gain about
four miles. During the advances, thirty weary troops
of the 8th Cavalry are discovered by Task Force Dolvin.
These troops, earlier captured at Unsan and subse-
quently released by the enemy, are suffering from
wounds, frostbite or both.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the ROK 7th and 8th Di-
visions gain only about one mile and at some points,
much less, particularly when the forces encounter two
battalions of Chinese infantry. Nevertheless, the ROK
3rd Regiment, 7th Division, is able to gain additional
ground. It reaches the Paengnyong River and makes
contact with the U.S. 38th Regiment, 2nd Division (I
Corps).
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, 1st
Marines zone, the 2nd Battalion and 1st Marines Head-
536
quarters initiate the relief of the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, at Koto-ri. The operation is completed on the
following day.
In the 5th Marines sector, each of the three battalions
is now operating east of the Chosin Reservoir. General
Smith remains concerned about the situation and care-
fully watches the advance, while awaiting the supplies
to increase at Hagaru.
In the 7th Marines zone, the advance toward Yudam-
ni continues. The 1st Battalion pauses to celebrate
Thanksgiving a day late; they savor their turkey dinner.
They do not realize this will be the last hot meal for
seventeen days.
In the 3rd Division zone, at Sach’ang-ni, the S.K.
26th Regiment holds its positions in the vicinity of
Paeksan Pass. It is to be relieved on the following day
by elements of the U.S. 7th Infantry Regiment.
In other activity, there has been a large Communist
buildup in this area. Contingents of the Chinese 125th
Division have been here for several weeks in expecta-
tion of a U.N. advance.
At Samsu, Task Force Kingston (32nd Regiment)
still is unable to break through to hook up with the
17th Regiment at Singalpajin.
In the Eighth Army area, at 1000, the offensive begins.
MacArthur is flying overhead to observe the units as
they advance against no resistance. Various components
across the wide front gain between 4,000 and 16,000
yards. There has been guerrilla activity in Eighth
Army’s area (west coastal area) during November, but
it has been at a lower level than that which has been
unfolding in the central and northeast sectors of Korea.
Nevertheless, Eighth Army patrols continue their activ-
ity to discover enemy presence. The area north and east
of Pyongyang contains many deposits of enemy supplies
that have been concealed in abandoned mine shafts,
caves and tunnels.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces and Fifth
Air Force strike enemy targets. B-29s for the former
hit the Yalu River bridges and for the latter, fighters
execute close-air support mission. The Eighth Army
offensive continues in conjunction with the air strikes.
Also, planes attached to Combat Cargo Command fly
missions to drop ammunition to the front lines.
November 25 A contingent of C-47s, attached
to the Greek Royal Hellenic Air Force arrives in theater
and is attached to Far East Air Forces.
In the X Corps area, Corps issues OpnO 7. It is tai-
lored to conform with the plan presented to Tokyo on
the 24th. Basically it directs the Corps to supply more
assistance to the ongoing Eighth Army offensive. The
attack, primarily carried out by the Marines, 3rd and
7th Infantry Divisions and the S.K. I Corps, is to com-
mence at 0800 on 27 November.
The 1st Marine Division is to advance to the Yalu
and seize Mupyong-ni en route. The 3rd Division is to
establish and maintain contact with Eighth Army’s
right flank, while simultaneously guarding the left flank
of X Corps. In addition, upon order, the overtaxed 3rd
537 November 25, 1950
November 25, 1950
Division is to bolster the 1st Marine Division while it
guards the airfield and harbor at Wonsan. Meanwhile,
it is to seek and destroy any enemy guerrilla units op-
erating in its sector.
The 7th Division is directed to launch its assault
from the east side of the Chosin Reservoir and advance
to the Yalu River. The 7th Division is also to cooper-
ate with the S.K. I Corps and secure the terrain in the
vicinity of Pungsan. According to the directive, the
S.K. I Corps is to depart the areas of Hapsu and
Chongjin and move to the border while eliminating
the enemy within its sector.
A briefing occurs at 1000. General Smith is informed
that his division will now form the northern arm of the
pincer movement rather than launch the attack east of
the Chosin Reservoir. In conjunction, the 7th Divi-
sion will attack from east of the reservoir to reach the
Yalu River.
In related activity, the 1st Battalion, 7th Infantry re-
lieves the S.K. 26th Regiment at Sach’ang-ni.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the boundary
changes now thrust the Marine lines across Korea to
the area north of Eighth Army. The path for advance
leads west about fifty-five miles and stretches from
Yudam-ni to Mupyong-ni. The rear boundary of the
Marines has also moved north, to a point slightly south
of Hagaru, listed as 3rd Division responsibility. How-
ever, General O.P. Smith, aware that the 3rd Division
is too overstretched to provide enough troops, requests
permission to deploy garrisons at Koto-ri and
Chinhung-ni. The response is affirmative. Now the
3rd Division retains responsibility for the security of
the MSR leading south from Sudong to Hamhung.
The attack remains scheduled for the 27th, with the
1st Marine Division acting as vanguard.
In the 5th Marines sector, two tanks accompany a
platoon-strength patrol that reaches the area near the
end of the Chosin Reservoir. It encounters some enemy
troops and a brief fight ensues. The chase nets one pris-
oner and five killed. In addition, the Marines destroy
an abandoned 75-mm gun. Neither this patrol, nor
any others, including a helicopter reconnaissance flight,
uncover any large numbers of enemy troops. In addi-
tion, subsequent to relief by elements of the 32nd Reg-
iment, the 5th Marines prepares to move against
Mupyong-ni.
In the 7th Marines zone, Yudam-ni is seized by the 1st
Battalion, which encounters paltry resistance. The 3rd
Battalion, 7th Marines, contingents of the 3rd Battal-
ion, 11th Marines, and regimental headquarters arrive
later.
In the 7th Division zone, the 1st Battalion, 32nd Reg-
iment, begins the relief of the 5th Marines, thus termi-
nating Marine activity in the area east of the Chosin
Reservoir at 1200. The Army battalion remains under
temporary operational control of the 1st Marine Divi-
sion. By noon on the following day, all elements of the
5th Marines are to be relieved.
In the ROK I Corps area, elements of the Capital Di-
vision reach Ch’ongjin. The advance is preceded by a
538
thunderous bombardment of naval gunfire, which per-
mits the ROKs to more easily encircle the objective.
During the evening, the 1st Regiment slips to a point
about five miles north of the town, while the 18th Reg-
iment deploys along the southern fringes. Meanwhile,
the ROK Cavalry Regiment moves to the western tip of
the town and captures the airfield. An attack to seize
Ch’ongjin is planned for the following day.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, the 21st In-
fantry Regiment, 24th Division, enters Chongju with-
out incident, while the 19th Regiment continues to
move towards Napchongjong. This seizure places the
24th Division on the Eighth Army first phase line.
In other activity, the Corps is struck, as part of an on-
going Chinese offensive, by contingents of the 50th
and 66th Armies.
In the 1st ROK Division zone, the Chinese continue
to raise heavy resistance near Taech’on, which prevents
the South Koreans from gaining the town. Following
day-long opposition, the objective remains three miles
beyond their reach. Nevertheless, the Division is de-
ployed in close proximity to the U.S. 24th Division.
In the IX Corps sector, the 38th Infantry, 2nd Divi-
sion, remains in place at Paengnyong, while the 9th
Regiment moves through the Ch’ongch’on Valley and
gains about two miles. Later, the 2nd Division estab-
lishes night positions along its fifteen-mile perimeter
that stretches across the Ch’ongch’on Valley.
A contingent of the 38th Regiment holds positions
north of Kunu-ri and east of the Ch’ongch’on River.
Its line extends southeastward towards the lower bank
of the Paengnyong River. The 2nd and 3rd Battalions,
38th Regiment, are deployed on a line that extends par-
allel to the south bank of the Paengnyong River to the
zone of the ROK II Corps.
On the left side of the perimeter, the 9th Regiment
is deployed in line with the 38th Regiment, but a wide
gap of about one-half mile stands between them. The
2nd and 3rd Battalions, minus one company of the 2nd
Battalion (38th Regiment), hold the line on the oppos-
ing side of the river, with each company in separate
positions along a series of ridges. The 23rd Infantry is
deployed in the vicinity of Kunu-ri, but a contingent
composed of headquarters, the 1st Battalion and one
tank company is stretched out across the valley highway
at the lower bank of the Ch’ongch’on River, just to the
rear of the 9th Regiment.
In the meantime, the Chinese XIII Army Group,
commanded by General Li Tien-yu, initiates its offen-
sive, with the heaviest thrust unfolding against the IX
Corps; however, other contingents will strike the I
Corps and the ROK II Corps. In the 2nd Division
zone, the Chinese commit elements of the 39th and
40th Armies to launch two regiments against the for-
ward 9th Regiment positions, while another regiment
drives against the middle of the 38th Regiment at
Paengnyong.
The 2nd Battalion, deployed in the high ground, is
not assaulted, but the 3rd Battalion sustains a heavy hit
and as the fighting continues through the night, the
 539
regiment is compelled to give some ground. Mean-
while, other Chinese troops funnel through the gaps
between the separate company positions of the 3rd Bat-
talion and plunge ahead into the lines of the 1st Battal-
ion, 23rd Regiment, as well as the 61st Field Artillery
Battalion.
The artillery contingent, a unit of the 1st Cavalry
Division attached to the 2nd Division, is severely
struck. The commanding officer of Battery A is among
those slain. The entire unit begins a hasty retreat. But
Battery A leads the way, as it abandons its weapons and
vehicles. The routed Americans scatter with a few mov-
ing east, but the Chinese pursue the main group, which
is speeding southward right into the positions of Col-
onel Freeman’s 23rd Regiment. The 23rd also sustains
a heavy attack, but despite the initial confusion caused
by retreating troops and heavy Chinese fire, the assault
is repelled. The Chinese retire to Chinaman’s Hat, a
mountain northeast of the 23rd Regiment. They will re-
turn later.
Meanwhile, another Chinese regiment plows into
the 1st Battalion, 9th Infantry, in a double strike. While
some of the regiment hits the front, another column
moves through the gap between the 9th Regiment and
the 38th Regiment, which gives the Communists po-
sitions from which to lunge forward into the rear of the
1st Battalion, 9th Regiment. The momentum blows
through the lines and tramples over the command post
and the medical aid station. The Chinese continue
moving and make their way to Chinaman’s Hat to hook
up with the regiment that preceded them.
Prior to dawn, the Chinese bolt from the mountain
positions and again strike Colonel Freeman’s lines, on
the right flank east of the valley road. The Chinese force
a small collapse on the flank, but Freeman modifies his
positions and his troops repulse the assault. By dawn,
the enemy returns once again to Chinaman’s Hat.
In the 38th Regimental zone, the evening remains
quiet, but toward midnight, yet another Chinese reg-
iment that had eased through the half-mile gap be-
tween the 9th and 38th Regiments launches an attack
that pounds against Company A, which is deployed
north of the Paengnyong River. Simultaneously, the
same regiment strikes against the regimental boundary
positions of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions on the oppos-
ing bank of the river. These assaults jackhammer Com-
panies F and L, but they are unable to gain ground.
Both companies hold steadfastly. The enemy maintains
the attacks for about three hours, but at 0230, after the
apparent realization of having sustained heavy casual-
ties, the Chinese disengage. Nonetheless, at about
0500, the attack is reinitiated.
Meanwhile, isolated Company A, 1st Battalion, 38th
Regiment, becomes encircled. The remainder of the 1st
Battalion initiates a counterattack to regain lost ground.
The attack is executed just before dawn when the battal-
ion jumps off and drives east into the west flank of the
Chinese, who had earlier penetrated the middle of the
regiment’s lines. Shortly thereafter, the enemy is driven
off and the perimeter is realigned to its former positions.
November 26, 1950
In the 25th Division sector, resistance is encountered
as the columns move towards Unsan. The bulk of the
fire is from long-range artillery and machine gun fire;
however, some small arms fire meets the advance. Nev-
ertheless, the division gains about two miles as it pushes
along the left bank of the Kuryong River, reaching a
point about one day’s march from Unsan, when it es-
tablishes night positions.
Later, the Chinese (39th and 40th Armies) strike,
but in less force than that used against the 2nd Divi-
sion. The brunt of the assault hits Task Force Dolvin’s
lines on the east side of the Kuryong River, where they
also control two hills in their most forward positions.
The fighting lasts throughout the night of the 25th-
26th. Eventually the Chinese push the Americans from
one of the hills.
In the S.K. II Corps area, the Chinese Communists
strike hard against the Koreans at Tokchon, located
about seventy miles southwest of Yudam-ni, a point
that the 7th Marines are preparing to move toward.
The South Koreans are slugged back by contingents of
the 38th and 42nd Armies, but the episode is not suf-
ficiently bad to warrant changes in the attack plan.
However, the Chinese will again strike on the follow-
ing day.
Meanwhile, the S.K. 16th Regiment, ROK 8th Di-
vision, assigned to the east flank of the corps (and
Eighth Army), engages enemy troops east of Yongdong-
ni. The enemy assault, which includes horse-cavalry
troops, succeeds in driving the regiment back about
two miles. Despite the regimental setback, the corps’
gains seem in line with General Walker’s plans to main-
tain the offensive. Nevertheless, the threat against the
II Corps endangers the nearby 2nd U.S. Division and
the right flank of Eighth Army.
In Majon-ni, using a full-strength attack, the 1st Bat-
talion, 15th ROK Regiment, drives from Majon-ni and
the South Korean Marines advance from Tongyang to
converge upon the Communist force that holds the
ground separating the two contingents. The combined
power of the two forces overwhelms the enemy and clears
the passageway from Majon-ni to Tongyang. The victory
costs the Communists about 150 killed and the loss of
a huge amount of ammunition and four 120-mm mor-
tars. Although the enemy is dispersed, they continue to
operate in the area for the duration of the conflict.
November 26 The S.K. 1st Division captures
an important enemy document that specifies how the
Chinese appraise the fighting ability of their American
opponents. After the Chinese 39th Army drove the
U.N. forces from the vicinity of Unsan, the Chinese
66th Army Headquarters issued a memorandum (on
November 20) based on the resistance raised by the 8th
Cavalry Regiment. The memo states the potency of the
U.S. mortars and artillery and emphasizes the terrific
transportation network. It also underscores the accuracy
of air strikes and long-range artillery. However, the
Chinese depiction of American soldiers, once cut off,
is not very positive:
November 26, 1950
They abandon all their heavy weapons and play pos-
sum.... Their infantrymen are weak, afraid to die, and
haven’t the courage to attack or defend. They depend
on their planes, tanks and artillery. At the same time,
they are afraid of our fire power. They will cringe when
if on the advance, they hear firing ... they specialize in
day fighting. They are not familiar with night fighting
or hand to hand combat.... If defeated, they have no or-
derly formation. Without the use of their mortars, they
become completely lost.... At Unsan, they were sur-
rounded for several days, yet they did nothing. They
are afraid when the rear is cut off. When transporta-
tion comes to a standstill, the infantry loses the will to
fight.
The document also states the goals of the Chinese
against the Americans in the future; the terms include
avoiding highways and level terrain to evade the fire of
tanks and artillery and night attacks: “As a main objec-
tive, one of the units must fight its way rapidly around
the enemy and cut off their rear.... Small leading patrol
groups attack and then sound the bugle. A large num-
ber will at that time follow in column.”
The Chinese XIII Army Group will maintain its of-
fensive and attack throughout the night of the 26th
into the 27th, hitting most points except the Eighth
Army west flank.
In the X Corps area, 1st Marine Division sector, Divi-
sion issues OpnO 24–50 at 0800. It orders the attack,
which is to commence at 0800 on the following day.
General O.P. Smith moves by helicopter from Hungnam
to Yudam-ni, and he cautiously observes the MSR en
route. Among the units spotted south of Chinhung-
ni, are the 1st Tank Battalion less the Provisional Ar-
mored Platoon at Hagaru and Company D’s 2nd Pla-
toon at Chinhung-ni.
Upon returning to Hungnam, General Smith is in-
formed that the Communists have scored greatly against
the S.K. II Corps, which had been thrashed, endanger-
ing the right flank. This unexpected setback imperils
both the U.S. 2nd Division and the Turkish Brigade, ex-
posing them to a flank attack. No enemy activity is
discovered during the day and the night remains espe-
cially frigid, but inactive.
In the 1st Marines zone, the vehicles previously used
to transport the 1st and 2nd Battalions to their new
positions have returned to Chigyong. They transport
the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines (minus George Com-
pany and elements of a weapons company), to Hagaru
to relieve the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines. Company G
has remained at Chigyong due to lack of trucks.
When the attack is launched on the 27th, the 1st
Marines is to remain in divisional reserve to guard the
MSR, Chinhung-ni, Hagaru and Koto-ri. Hagaru, lo-
cated at the base of the Chosin Reservoir, contains the
Marines’ sole airstrip and it is not yet completed.
Nonetheless, Hagaru must hold or there is no way to re-
group the scattered division. The responsibility for Ha-
garu, surely a huge task, lies solely with Lt. Colonel
Ridge’s 3rd Battalion.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 5th Marines prepares to
540
pass through the 7th Marines on the 27th by 0800,
and from there move to seize the road junction at
Yongnim-dong, about twenty-seven miles west of
Yudam-ni. The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, completes
its move from the reservoir to Yudam-ni by evening.
The town, surrounded by five huge ridges, is located
in the middle of a giant valley. These massive ridges,
each with large numbers of nasty peaks, dangerous
spurs and spooky draws, exhibit a natural blueprint for
disaster. The ridges are named North, Northwest,
South, Southeast and Southwest. The difficult terrain,
matched with abominable weather, guarantees a gruel-
ing mission. Today’s temperature plunges to zero de-
grees. On the 27th, the weather in Korea reaches a tem-
perature of 20 degrees below zero.
The 2nd Battalion receives orders to seize a pass west
of Yudam-ni. The attack will be assisted by the 7th
Marines, which will drive forward along two ridgelines.
In the 7th Marines zone, the regiment is to guard the
MSR from Yudam-ni to Sinhung-ni, which lies about
seven miles west of Hagaru. The Division Reconnais-
sance Company is to act in conjunction with the 7th
Marines and operate north of Yudam-ni. The British
Royal Marines unit will operate southwest of Yudam-
ni to guard the Division’s left flank. The 7th Regiment
is deployed on four of the five ridges that encircle
Yudam-ni. Companies D and E, attached to 1st Bat-
talion, are deployed on North Ridge. The 1st Battalion
stands on both South and Southeast Ridges, while the
3rd Battalion is deployed on Southwest Ridge. These
positions give the 7th Marines the heights that domi-
nate the attack route of the 5th Marines.
A patrol composed of a rifle platoon of Company A,
1st Battalion, moves into an ambush site and comes
under fire from point-blank range. Lieutenant Frank
N. Mitchell maintains discipline, then bolts to the front
of his command, takes over an automatic weapon and
returns fire.
Mitchell gets volunteers to gather the wounded, de-
spite the confusion of the darkness. The Marines move
into the enemy terrain to conduct the search. With the
litter bearers to his rear, Mitchell carries the fight to
the enemy. Afterwards, the platoon is able to extricate
itself, while Mitchell, already repeatedly wounded, pro-
vides cover fire. He is slain while holding the line to
enable his troops to withdraw. Lieutenant Mitchell is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary bravery and leadership while under enemy
fire.
Later this day, the 5th Marines receives a new ob-
jective, a pass about ten miles west of Yudam-ni. Con-
tingents of the 7th Marines will grind forward along
Northwest and Southwest Ridges to protect the 5th
Marines’ flank.
At 2200, the regimental officers confer on the indi-
vidual missions. The 3rd Battalion is to penetrate
deeper along Southwest Ridge on the 27th, but it is
also assigned the task of securing an objective on the op-
posite side of the MSR. It is to take Hill 1403, on
Northwest Ridge, to enable it to provide sufficient
 541
support for the 5th Marines. Companies D and E are
assigned responsibility for running patrols along the
west coast of the reservoir and on North Ridge. The
1st Battalion is to scour South and Southeast Ridges
with patrols while focusing on the routes along the low
ground. The primary road to Hagaru stretches through
the valley between huge hills.
In other activity, the Regiment announces that it has
captured three Chinese soldiers, attached to the Chinese
60th Division. Intelligence officers have discovered
from the captives that the Chinese 58th, 59th and 60th
Divisions had arrived in the vicinity of Yudam-ni on the
20th. This brings the total of identified Communist
Chinese units in northeast Korea to six divisions. Nev-
ertheless, it is still thought that the Chinese probably
will not attack in strength. Rather, it is thought that a
westward withdrawal will be executed. The Marines
anticipate an engagement with the Chinese in the
mountains west of Yudam-ni.
In the 11th Marines area, the units deployed in the
vicinity of Yudam-ni are to contribute support to the
attacking elements.
In the ROK I Corps area, Ch’ongjin is attacked and
captured by the S.K. Capital Division. Following the
victory, the ROKs prepare to pivot and initiate a north-
ward attack that will push the force inland along the
highway and railroad toward Hoeryong, which is lo-
cated at the border with Manchuria.
In the Eighth Army area, reports regarding the losses
inflicted upon the ROK II Corps pour into headquar-
ters during the day. General Walker, informed that his
right flank now consists of the 38th Regiment, 25th
Division, moves feverishly to rearrange his defenses.
By day’s end, General Walker is informed that the es-
timate of about 54,000 Chinese troops in the area is
inaccurate. The new estimate by Intelligence is more
than 100,000 troops.
The Chinese XIII Army Group, under General Li
Tien-yu, continues its offensive. During the course of
this day and into the following day, the greater part of
the Eighth Army sector comes under assault.
In the I Corps area, the situation is comparatively
calm, but General Milburn remains concerned about
the Chinese threat as I Corps, like the other Corps, is
at less than full strength and General Walker is also uti-
lizing I Corps forces to strengthen other units that face
imminent threat by the enemy.
In other activity, General Hobart Gay is ordered by
General Walker to redeploy his 1st Cavalry Division
to meet what appears to be a serious threat by the Chi-
nese, due to the collapse of the ROK II Corps this day.
The cavalry makes preparations to depart from its po-
sitions at Kunu-ri and Sukch’on on the following day
to establish new positions at the village of Sunchon and
protect the approaches from the east. The 187th Air-
borne RCT, augmented by the Philippine 10th Battal-
ion Combat Team, will take over the protection of sup-
ply depots at Kunu-ri and Sukch’on.
In other activity, the British 27th Brigade is directed
by General Walker to redeploy with the IX Corps to
November 26, 1950
bolster its forces in place of the reserve Turkish Brigade,
which is en route to Tokch’on. Although the Eighth
Army offensive is essentially at a standstill, the 24th
Division is deployed along Route 1 and poised for an
advance to the Yalu River, but this attack, despite an-
ticipation of slight resistance, is aborted for fear of the
division overextending itself and becoming isolated
with no means to launch a relief force.
General Church then orders the 5th Regimental
Combat Team to establish positions to the right of his
two regiments that are extended along Route 1. Church
assumes that this deployment will fill the hole between
the ROK 1st Division and the 24th Division’s posi-
tions. The ROK 1st Division is operating on the corps’
right and has advanced along the banks of the Taery-
ong River to the vicinity of Taech’on. Although the
Koreans had advanced beyond the 24th Division, the
Chinese continue to raise fierce resistance.
In the meantime, General Su Ching-huai, com-
mander of the Chinese 66th Army, awaits dusk before
he orders his force to drive down the east bank of the
Taeryong River. Once properly positioned, the Chi-
nese spring an attack against both sides of the river and
strike the 11th and 12th S.K. Regiments on the east
and west sides respectively.
The South Koreans on the east side are driven back,
and on the west bank the 12th also loses ground, but
it is able to recapture the terrain by dawn on the 27th.
Nonetheless, the Chinese maintain the pressure on the
27th and the enemy progress is beginning to seriously
threaten the 24th U.S. Division, which is stationed on
the west side of the Taeryong River.
In the IX Corps sector, General Walker directs Gen-
eral John B. Coulter to use his reserve, the Turkish
brigade, to recapture Tokch’on, which had been lost
by the ROK II Corps. Tokch’on gives the Chinese a
path towards the rear of Eighth Army, but if it is seized,
the Turks would hold the ground and be near the 2nd
Division northwest of the village. The assault is set for
the following morning and if successful it will give
Eighth Army control of the Tokch’on–Kunu-ri Road,
an attack route from the west to Kunu-ri.
In the meantime, General Coulter dispatches the 1st
Battalion and he will later order the 2nd Battalion to
move out with both units expected to be at Wawon by
dawn on the following day.
In the 2nd Division zone, in the Ch’ongch’on Valley,
the 9th Regiment, led by Colonel Charles Sloane, re-
deploys in the heights above the upper bank of the
Ch’ongch’on River. Due to losses within the 3rd Bat-
talion during the previous night’s combat, the regiment
is bolstered by the 2nd Engineering Combat Battalion
(minus Company C).
Meanwhile, General Keiser makes other adjust-
ments. The 1st and 2nd Battalion, 23rd Regiment, ad-
vance and redeploy below Chinaman’s Hat, the latter
taking positions alongside the 61st Field Artillery Bat-
talion. The artillerymen had, by this time, returned to
their positions of the previous night and reclaimed
some of the abandoned weaponry lost, prior to pulling
November 26, 1950
back and establishing new lines near the other two ar-
tillery battalions deployed under the 27th Regiment.
General Keiser directs his final reserve unit, the 3rd
Battalion, 27th Regiment, to deploy to the rear of the
27th Regiment. It stretches out in the vicinity of
Kujang-dong on a highway east of the town that is used
to resupply the 38th Regiment.
A contingent of Company C, 1st Battalion, 27th
Regiment, led by Sergeant John A. Pittman, volunteers
to attack and regain a previously lost strategic position.
The detachment encounters heavy fire. A grenade lands
in the midst of the patrol and Pittman throws his body
upon it to take the full impact. He survives and the
others are saved from harm. When medics reach him,
he immediately asks how many of his men had been
wounded from the blast. The answer was none.
Sergeant Pittman becomes a recipient of the Medal of
Honor for his intrepid actions and selfless sacrifice to
save others.
In the 38th Regiment zone, at Paengnyong, Colonel
Peploe is working on his defenses, but his command
had sustained very heavy casualties on the previous day.
Company G stands at about sixty troops and Com-
pany A had been devastated after being caught in a trap.
There is no enemy activity during the early part of this
day; however, Peploe’s lines, north of the supply road,
seem to be in the direct route of the enemy, which at
this time is mauling the S.K. II Corps. Once informed
of the inability of the South Koreans to hold the line,
he deduces that the 38th Regiment might well become
the right flank of the Eighth Army if the II Corps falls.
As the day progresses, the Chinese on Chinaman’s
Hat prepare for yet another assault. After dusk, they
descend from the mountain and execute a two-pronged
attack against Colonel Freeman’s 23rd Regiment, and
later, just before midnight, they pound against the mid-
dle of Colonel Sloane’s 9th Regiment. During the first
assault, the enemy forces Freeman to abandon his com-
mand post. Shortly thereafter, just prior to midnight,
Freeman commits Company F and headquarters per-
sonnel from the 2nd and 3rd Battalions as well as the
regimental headquarters company. The attack regains
the command post, but the Chinese who still domi-
nate the heights east of the Ch’ongch’on River unleash
a hurricane of fire that again forces Freeman to aban-
don the positions.
Rather than risk unnecessary casualties, Colonel
Freeman postpones any further activity until daylight.
In the meantime, the 9th Regiment, posted on the
ground east of the Ch’ongch’on River, remains vigilant
during the night, which passes without enemy activity,
but as midnight nears, the middle of the line suddenly
comes under a severe attack. The 2nd Battalion returns
fire, but the pressure continues to mount. The enemy,
bolstered by mortars, recoilless rifles and 3.5 rocket-
launchers, evicts the weary battalion and drives it to
the bank of the river.
The battle continues, but after awhile, the 2nd Bat-
talion is compelled to escape to the east bank, leaving
some of its weapons behind. The regimental com-
542
mander, Colonel Sloane, calls in artillery support to
cover the retreat and it apparently deters enemy pursuit
across the river. Consequently, the 2nd Battalion es-
capes; however, the ordeal squeezes the unit of its op-
erational ability for the time being.
In the 23rd Regiment’s zone, the night passes with-
out any major combat. Despite the routing of the 2nd
Battalion, 9th Regiment, the Chinese choose not to
ford the river into the 9th Regiment’s zone on the east
bank.
In the 38th Regiment sector, which lies in and around
Somin-dong to the right of the 9th and 23rd Regi-
ments, elements of the Chinese 40th Army launch at-
tacks just after darkness overcomes the area.
The first assault is sprung against Company C while
it is en route to the east side of the perimeter to re-
establish the positions previously held by Company G.
The enemy, driving from the northwest, encircles
Company C, but only with a contingent of the force.
Other troops in the attack force continue moving and
strike the middle of the perimeter hammering against
Companies F and L. The heavy penetration causes
problems throughout the lines and some companies are
compelled to give ground. The Chinese continue to
pour troops into the area and it is determined that
about two divisions are involved between this contest
in the 38th Regimental zone and the nearby ROK II
Corps sector.
During the engagement, many of the American units
get splintered and wind up in different companies. As
the night-attack intensifies, Colonel Peploe calls upon
the S.K. 3rd Regiment to assist. It had already retired
from the ROK II Corps perimeter. All the while, Peploe
struggles with the dilemma of reorganizing his scat-
tered units while he gets help from the 2nd Reconnais-
sance Company, which holds the line on the Kujang-
dong Road in an effort to halt the South Koreans who
are hurriedly retiring. The 38th Regiment is forced to
pull back on two sides, the east and north. Neverthe-
less, the regiment continues to engage the enemy all
through the night and into the following day.
In the 25th Division sector, General Kean aborts plans
to reinitiate the advance of the 25th Division. Instead,
he prepares for a potential attack by the Chinese. Task
Force Dolvin, which had been struck during the pre-
vious day, and the 1st Battalion, 24th Infantry Regi-
ment, are enjoined as Task Force Wilson. However, the
ranger company, which had been attached to the 1st
Battalion and had recently withdrawn from the front,
is not part of the new task force, which is to be com-
manded by General Vennard Wilson.
Kean’s deduction that the Chinese would attack
proves to be accurate. Slightly after 1200, while a two-
company contingent of the 24th Regiment is attempt-
ing to retrieve supplies that had been dropped by
planes, are caught in a trap by the enemy. The remain-
der of the regiment under Colonel John Corley is not
involved in a rescue, but the greater number of the
troops slip away and make it to the lines of the 2nd
Division.
 543
In the meantime, Task Force Wilson is bolstered by
the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, which establishes
positions to its rear. The 24th Regiment, minus the
contingent that had been encircled, is augmented by
the remainder of the 27th Regiment, the latter having
been held in reserve.
Later in the day, the reports of the near disintegra-
tion of the ROK II Corps’ resistance is authenticated.
Peploe is compelled to again realign his forces. The
38th Regiment establishes a new line beginning with the
2nd Battalion, which holds the ground above the high-
way to Kujang-dong. The other units in the regiment
extend eastward to the town of Somin-dong and from
there, the regiment stretches through the heights west
of the road leading to Tokch’on. These drastic rede-
ployment maneuvers are in place by about 1800, but
still the weakened regiment is unable to form a large
perimeter. Consequently, the right flank of Eighth
Army, specifically, the 38th Regiment, is confined to a
small perimeter, leaving open paths for attack from the
northeast. And adding to the dilemma, there is also a
huge threat to the rear of Eighth Army.
In the S.K. II Corps area, the Chinese reinitiate the
attack that causes the Korean II Corps to collapse under
the extreme pressure. The inability to withstand the
assault causes the Eighth Army offensive to ostensibly
stall prior to the commencement of the 1st Marine Di-
vision jump-off on the 27th.
During the previous night, much of the South Ko-
rean corps came under heavy attack when an enemy
regiment pounded its way through the 16th ROK Reg-
iment, while other forces clamped down on the ROK
7th Division. By 0800 this day, the corps is being
shredded at various points all across the perimeter. The
enemy pressure compels the east flank to collapse. Its
defenders, the 21st Regiment, abandons its positions
and heads for Yongdong-ni and another, the 10th Reg-
iment, begins retiring to the same location.
The west flank, defended by the ROK 3rd Regiment,
for the time being remains unscathed, but only until
dusk. Then the Chinese push some of the regiment
from its sector into the lines of the U.S. 38th Infantry.
Throughout the day, the Chinese continue to plow
through other South Korean lines. An enemy regiment
pushes against an unsteady 7th ROK Division and ef-
fortlessly causes its 5th and 8th Regiments to hastily
retire. Lacking the support of these two regiments, the
3rd regiment soon departs the area and speeds towards
the lines of the U.S. IX Corps.
Other Chinese troops are able to bolt from the corps’
frontal positions and advance to Tokch’on, ten miles
inside the perimeter. This unexpected action isolates
the 2nd Regiment, ROK 6th Division, which had been
held in reserve in the village. The South Koreans are
unable to regroup. General Yu’s repeated attempts to
galvanize some type of resistance fails. The Chinese
continue to topple the resistance and overrun addi-
tional terrain as troops that had come in from the
northeast take the towns of Yongdong-ni and
Maengsan.
November 27, 1950
In Air Force activity, light bombers (B-26s) under
the guidance of tactical air control party (TACP) ini-
tiate their first night close-air support missions. Sixty-
seven planes attached to the 3rd Bomber Group strike
targets along the Eighth Army’s bomb-line. Nonethe-
less, the massive bombing runs do not halt the Com-
munist pressure in northwestern Korea against Eighth
Army or in the X Corps zone in northeast Korea.
Lieutenant John W. Enyart, while on a reconnais-
sance mission in the area around Tokch’on, receives a
message on the radio about a ground observer and his
contingent that the Communists had encircled. En-
yart, despite being in an unarmed plane, moves through
extremely heavy fire, lands on a primitive airstrip and
rescues the controller, then he returns to pick up another
of the contingent, but by the time he returns, the Com-
munists control the strip.
— In Japan: Reports indicating nearly a 100 per-
cent increase in the estimated number of Chinese
troops in Korea reach the Far East Command.
Nonetheless, despite the fact that 100,000 Chinese
troops are facing Eighth Army, the information does
not bring the Intelligence section to disagree with
Eighth Army that the Chinese will initiate a major of-
fensive. Rather, both General Willoughby in Japan and
Walker in Korea think the enemy will rely on defense
and counterattack. Eighth Army still concludes that its
offensive, although stalled, will soon be reinitiated and
if the Chinese take the offensive in the valley, their ef-
fort will only stall the drive to the Yalu. These conclu-
sions regarding the U.N. offensive are dispatched by
Headquarters to Washington.
November 27 In X Corps area, 1st Marine Divi-
sion sector, 1st Marines zone, Hagaru, defended by the
3rd Battalion, is under threat by the Chinese. Lt. Col-
onel Ridge, after scanning the terrain, realizes that his
battalion is insufficiently strong to withstand a major
assault, due to the length of the perimeter that extends
about four miles. And this only includes protection of
the two reverse slopes. Other areas would have to be
covered by supporting fire. To add to the uncertainty,
while the Marines anticipate an assault from either the
hill east of the town or a draw that heads into the south-
west end, the Chinese could yet find another approach.
The Chinese who control the heights around the town
can observe the Marines as they fortify their positions.
Also, a convoy (Headquarters Battalion) arrives at
Hagaru to set up the divisional command post. While
the Marines must evaluate the time and estimated
strength of an assault, they are also under the gun to
check a large amount of Korean civilians who are mov-
ing into the town. The refugees had been halted and
searched at a roadblock, and then escorted to the local
police station for interrogation. The day passes without
an enemy attack being launched.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, drives down the highway leading from
Yudam-ni to seize its objectives. Company H moves to
Toktong Pass. The battalion is supported by the guns
November 27, 1950
of Battery H, 3rd Battalion, 11th Marines, which re-
mains in Hagaru. The carved, undersize highway slith-
ers along the valley and passes between the gargantuan
walls of Southwest and Northwest Ridges. The van-
guard, Company F, commanded by Captain Uel Pe-
ters, advances toward the first objective, an elongated
knob on Northwest Ridge. This frozen, rock-hard spur
lies about 500 yards across a ravine from Hill 1403.
At about 0935, Chinese that hold positions on the
knob commence long-range fire that strikes the
Marines just as they approach the entry to the ravine.
Meanwhile, an overhead spotter plane from VMO-6
detects enemy troops entrenched along the entire front.
Company F pauses to reassess its situation. In the
meantime, engineers speed to the front to demolish un-
defended roadblocks that are scattered along the MSR.
Nine such obstacles are unblocked. Company D, 2nd
Battalion, advances down the MSR, while Company
F moves along slopes and passes through the 7th
Marines on Hill 1403. It too comes under heavy fire as
it approaches the mouth of the ravine. Mortar units
and recoilless rifles return fire against the slopes of the
knob.
By 1015, the guns of the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines,
begin to hammer the slopes and the barrage eases the
resistance. At 1115, planes of VMF-312 jolt the slopes
with heavy strikes, then Companies F and G resume
the attack. Company F’s 1st Platoon, led by Lieuten-
ant Gerald McLaughlin, plows toward the knob’s north
flank. It is bolstered by cover fire from the remainder
of the company from positions on Hill 1403. The com-
bined strength of the air strike, mortars and artillery
that pummels enemy positions prompts many of them
to flee westward from the knob. The northern portion
of the knob is seized by the 1st Platoon by 1300. Three
Chinese are captured.
Following the collapse of the northern half, the
southern half of the knob above the road is attacked.
The 2nd Platoon, led by Lieutenant Donald Krabbe,
moves through the 1st Platoon, and afterwards, it en-
counters heavy machine gun fire as it advances. The
menacing fire originates on another peak that lies about
1,000 yards to the west. While the advance continues
in the heights, Company D grinds forward along the
road. It reaches a bend in the road effortlessly, then
drives toward a valley road junction several hundred
yards in the distance.
Meanwhile, the Chinese have constructed layers of
defensive positions in the heights of the eastern slopes
of Sakkat Mountain to stall the advance. The Chinese
commence firing upon Company D. The blanket of
fire compels Colonel Roise to terminate the attack. At
1440, Company D is directed to establish a defensive
perimeter by extending across the MSR on a spur of
Southwest Ridge. Fox Company is directed to establish
positions on Northwest Ridge. The key attack gains
1,500 yards with the successful seizure of the intended
objective. Nevertheless, the attack is unable to gain the
additional several miles targeted by the advance. The
lack of further success turns into a blessing. Further
544
gains would have caused the Marines to become totally
encircled.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, ar-
rives from its positions east of the reservoir to Yudam-
ni subsequent to dusk and establishes positions in the
valley. The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, under Lt. Col-
onel Taplett, which had been on the east coast of the
reservoir, arrives at North Ridge at about noon. The
troops deploy on an unoccupied spur that flows to Hill
1384.
In the 7th Marines zone, the sun begins to rise at
Yudam-ni, but it beams no heat. The scene at Yudam-
ni at daybreak is bleak. Near- frozen men gather close
to the fires to thaw their rations and de-ice their
weapons for the dogged day that awaits them. The 5th
Marines launch the primary assault. The 7th Marines
remain high in the hills. Companies G and H, 3rd Bat-
talion, on Southwest Ridge move out at 0815. Com-
pany H, commanded by Captain Leroy Cooke, seizes
Hill 1403 without incident. Cooke had become com-
pany commander on November 12. Lieutenant H.
Harris reverted to executive officer.
Initially, Company G, commanded by Captain
Thomas Cooney, also makes good progress. It swiftly
gains about 1,200 yards and secures Hill 1426, a dom-
inating peak on Southwest Ridge, by 0845. The ad-
vance encounters no opposition. However, the Chi-
nese lurk in the distance. Cooney’s Marines resume the
advance, but resistance rises almost immediately, as an-
other ridge about 500 yards distant is layered with Chi-
nese.
In other activity, a contingent of the 1st Service Bat-
talion arrives to institute a system of resupply and to
build a divisional depot. Rations are down to about
three days’ supply, but a convoy requested by the 7th
Marines arrives well after dark. Additionally, Lt. Col-
onel Beall, CO, 1st Motor Transport Battalion, com-
mands a night convoy from Yudam-ni to Hagaru. Beall
anticipates a return trip on the 28th with additional
supplies to ease the situation. He takes all 5th and 7th
Marines’ organic vehicles except between 40 and 50
trucks. Although the Chinese have heavily infiltrated
the area, the trucks reach Hagaru unmolested; how-
ever, there is no return trip.
Also, four M-4 tanks (Provisional Tank Platoon) de-
part from Hagaru for Yudam-ni, but all return after
each slides off the road. Later, one M-26 succeeds in
making it to Yudam-ni before the Chinese sever the
road to prevent any others from arriving.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, experiences difficulty
during the afternoon. Company G pushes forward to
occupy a peak of Hill 1426 by 1500. The advance is
costly. During the fighting, Captain Cooney heads to
the rear to bring up reinforcements, but he sustains a
mortal wound. Captain Eric Haars becomes command-
ing officer, G Company, on 27 November.
Similar to the 5th Marines’ predicament, the heavy
fire originating on Sakkat Mountain hinders progress.
Company G is compelled to withdraw from the crest.
Company I, 3rd Battalion, speeds from its positions in
 545
the heights above Yudam-ni to bolster the efforts of
Company G. At about 1230, Company B, 1st Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, diverts from its patrol duties in the
valley between South and Southwest Ridges. It climbs
to the sound of the guns in the high ground to offer
its firepower. Chinese fire clamps the advancing com-
pany with a ring of fire, prompting Company C to
lunge forward from its positions at Yudam-ni.
During an attack against Company E, 2nd Battalion,
7th Marines, on the night of the 27th-28th, an enemy
grenade is thrown into the midst of some Marines dur-
ing a heated battle in which the platoon leader had been
wounded. The assistant leader, Staff Sergeant Robert S.
Kennemore, is directing the return fire when the
grenade lands in the vicinity of a machine gun posi-
tion. Kennemore immediately moves to it and places
one leg upon the grenade to take the brunt of the blast.
His actions save a machine gun squad and the gun.
Kennemore survives the blast and his Marines drive the
enemy from their positions. Sergeant Kennemore be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his hero-
ism and leadership against a superior enemy force.
Still, the Chinese hold the dominating ground. In
addition, while elements of three battalions (2/5, 1/7
and 3/7) slug it out on Southwest Ridge, more compli-
cations develop. A patrol of Company D, 2nd Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, encounters heavy resistance on the
west coast of the reservoir at positions about 400 yards
from Yudam-ni. Marine planes provide support and
quell the machine guns positioned north and north-
east on North Ridge. At 1645, the patrol disengages
and extricates itself, but some casualties are sustained.
By day’s end, the battalion gains include about 1,200
yards on the crest of Southwest Ridge. About 2,000
yards is gained with Company H’s seizure of Hill 1403,
which is in concert with the primary assault launched
by the 5th Marines. The advance of Company H gains
about 1,500 yards.
In the meantime, Company F, 2nd Battalion, de-
parts Hagaru at 1200 en route to heights at the mid-
point of Toktong Pass about seven miles distant.
In other activity, Colonel Litzenberg dispatches his
S-4, Major Maurice Roach, to Hagaru to procure am-
munition, petroleum items and rations. Litzenberg re-
quests five truckloads of each item. Toward the latter
part of the day, the trucks arrive at Yudam-ni. These are
the final truckloads of supplies to reach the perimeter.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Di-
vision zone, orders arrive from General Walker direct-
ing the 1st Cavalry Division to join the IX Corps. It
moves out on the following day for Pukch’ang-ni to
join with the S.K. 6th Division to form a defensive line
to protect Sunch’on from a Chinese assault.
In the Turkish Brigade zone, the advance from
Wawon, ordered by General Walker on the previous
day, begins during the morning. The unit, having no
battle experience, is supported by one tank platoon
(72nd Tank Battalion) to bolster the attempt to seize
Tokch’on.
In the meantime, a large enemy force advances west-
November 27, 1950
ward from the objective, Tokch’on. When the infor-
mation reaches headquarters, the Turkish Brigade is
contacted and ordered to abort its attack. The brigade,
led by General Tahsin Yasici, at about noon, begins to
retrace its steps; however, rather than pull back to po-
sitions about seven miles east of Wawon, the order is
misinterpreted and the Turks redeploy along the Kunu-
ri road just outside of Wawon.
In the 24th Division zone, Division remains west of
the Taeryong River, but the progress of the enemy
forces General Church to make some quick adjustments
to avoid being isolated. He directs the 21st Regiment
at Chongju to depart for Napch’ongjong, while the
19th Regiment advances from the latter to Pakch’on,
which lies at about the middle of the corps sector on the
east side of the river.
The Chinese 66th Army, which is advancing on the
east side of the river against the ROK 1st Division,
causes peril for the 24th Division. General Milburn,
the I Corps commander, is set to order the 24th Divi-
sion and the S.K. 12th Regiment to pull back about
five miles on the following day to be positioned in con-
junction with the S.K. 1st Division, which has given up
ground.
In other activity, the 25th Division (IX Corps) is di-
rected by General Walker to transfer to the I Corps.
In the ROK 1st Division zone, the Chinese 66th Army
maintains its advance. The defending ROK units on
the east bank of the Taeryong River are unable to with-
stand the pressure. Consequently, the enemy gains
about five miles. The Chinese are able to deeply pen-
etrate and also jeopardize the 25th Division (IX Corps).
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, General
Keiser begins to take steps to realign his perimeter into
a more compact line along the Ch’ongch’on river in an
effort to thwart the Chinese, who are on the offensive.
The new line is to be established on the following day.
In the 9th Regimental zone, the 2nd Battalion at-
tempts to regroup at Kujang-dong after having been
pushed across the Ch’ongch’on River during the early
morning hours. Due to the excessive shortage of man-
power, the regimental commander, Colonel Sloane, is
forced to redeploy the unit, despite its lack of equipment
(having lost it the previous night). Nonetheless, the left
flank badly needs some protection; Sloane dispatches the
2nd Battalion back across the river to form a defensive
line. The beleaguered battalion is needed particularly
because of the 25th Division’s withdrawal back to
Ipson. By dusk, the 2nd Battalion completes its move
and establishes the far left positions of the regiment.
In related activity, subsequent to darkness, the Chi-
nese again strike along the 2nd Division perimeter. The
1st Battalion, 9th Regiment, along with the 2nd Engi-
neering Battalion hold positions on the west side of the
Ch’ongch’on River, but a Chinese attack forces both
units to abandon their positions and ford the river.
Meanwhile, other regiments on the east side of the river
also come under a stiff attack. The Chinese offensive
jeopardizes the entire 2nd Division, particularly its
flanks.
November 27, 1950
In the 23rd Regimental zone, at first sunlight the
1st and 2nd Battalions, 23rd Regiment, advance to-
ward the regimental command post, which had been
relinquished to the enemy during the early morning
hours after a battle that had begun just before mid-
night.
In the 38th Regimental zone, Colonel Peploe, having
sustained some setbacks the previous night, decides to
withdraw somewhat to concentrate on the middle of
the regiment’s positions, whereby they can consolidate
and maintain dominance over the Kujang-dong Road.
The regiment stretches out along a two-mile perimeter
between Kujang-dong and Somin-dong.
After dark, the Chinese engage the 9th Regiment on
the west side of the Ch’ongch’on River and they also
unleash a stinging assault against the 38th Regiment
along its perimeter on the west side of the river. Enemy
units plow into the lines from both the east and the
north. The regiment is unable to withstand the over-
whelming numerical strength and is compelled to re-
tire towards Kujang-dong. The regiment continues rais-
ing resistance into the following day.
In the 25th Division sector, elements of the Chinese
39th and 40th Armies continue their offensive. Other
units of these armies also pound the 2nd Division
perimeter. The Chinese drive from the north during
the early morning hours and hammer the 35th Regi-
ment and Task Force Wilson in the middle and on the
left respectively. The main outposts and Task Force
Wilson get stung at about 0300, and within one hour,
the main body sustains a major assault. The Chinese
117th Division drills against the perimeter line and
with the support of mortars and machine gun fire, some
indentations are made, but the line holds and the
enemy sustains high casualties.
By 0800, with their casualty list rapidly climbing to-
ward 400 killed, the Chinese abort the attack. In the
meantime, Task Force Wilson on the east side of the
Kuryong River engages the 115th and 116th Chinese
Divisions. Initially, the enemy vanguard strikes, but
soon the task force sustains an attack by both regiments.
At this point, reinforcements drawn from the divisional
reserve are committed to bolster Task Force Wilson;
however, as the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, pre-
pares to advance, it comes under attack by elements
that had succeeded in penetrating sufficiently to arrive
in the rear of the task force.
Meanwhile, other enemy units attached to the same
group strike about one mile behind the 2nd Battalion
at Ipsok. There the artillerymen (8th FABn) gain
enough time to fire at point-blank range before they
retire to more tenable positions. This enfilade, sup-
ported by machine gun fire, buys enough time for the
battalion to safely retire with all of its equipment. Fol-
lowing the evacuation, the 8th Field Artillery Battalion
redeploys slightly less than five miles to the rear. Mean-
while, the 2nd Battalion, 27th Regiment, continues to
exchange heavy fire with the Chinese and denies the
enemy any gains. Nonetheless, the Chinese prevent the
2nd Battalion from getting to Task Force Wilson. Un-
546
daunted by the overwhelming force against it, TF Wil-
son maintains the positions.
Later, due to modifications along the line of the 25th
Division by General Kean, the task force finally with-
draws under the protective fire of the 27th Regiment
(excluding 2nd Battalion) to rejoin the main body,
which during the day had withdrawn about four miles
and redrawn its perimeter. Company E, 27th Regi-
ment, is to defend the task force’s command post in
the vicinity of Ipsok to prevent the enemy from using
the darkness to penetrate. The company commander,
Captain Reginald Desidario, accompanies a reconnais-
sance patrol and afterwards draws a defensive line. Soon
after, the company comes under attack. Desidario is
wounded, but he refuses evacuation and retains com-
mand.
Another attack follows and Desidario bolts from his
position and charges the attackers, taking some down
with his carbine and others with grenades, but again
he is wounded, mortally. The remainder of his com-
mand continues the fight and repels the assault. Cap-
tain Desidario is awarded the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his tremendous leadership and courage in the
face of a superior enemy force.
In the meantime, the ROK 1st Division has re-
grouped at its new positions, essentially forming and
covering the left flank of General Kean. The 25th Di-
vision, including its Task Force Wilson, completes its
task prior to 1900, then it redeploys on an east to west
line, which passes through Ipsok. Nonetheless, the Chi-
nese 39th Army remains intent on maintaining its at-
tack. Slightly before midnight, the intensity of the Chi-
nese attack accelerates when the 39th and 66th Chinese
Armies, operating from the west, advance on two fronts,
south and southeast, with both expecting to converge
on Yongsan-dong, a strategic village that lies between
the Taeryong and Kuryong Rivers.
The attack forces stream towards the objective,
which is to the rear of the ROK 1st Division and on the
left of the 25th Division perimeter at Ipsok. The 39th
Army elements drive along the west bank of the Kury-
ong and strike the 35th Infantry, 25th Division, while
the 66th Army hammers the ROK 11th and 15th Reg-
iments, which hold the left flank of the 25th’s perime-
ter. The enemy attacks terminate about dawn; how-
ever, the Chinese are able to seize Yongsan-dong
without the knowledge of the 35th Regiment.
Pursuant to orders by General Walker, the 25th Di-
vision is attached to the I Corps, to bolster it following
the evaporation of the ROK II Corps. In its place, Gen-
eral Walker attaches the 1st Cavalry Division, under
General Gay, to the IX Corps. General Coulter’s
perimeter on the east is lessened by the loss of the 25th,
but with the addition of the 1st Cavalry Division, the
perimeter is extended on the west.
The IX Corps is to receive one division of ROK II
Corps troops or a combination of troops to establish a
force equal to a division. The corps at this time is com-
posed of the U.S. 2nd Division, the U.S. 1st Cavalry
Division, the British 27th Brigade, the Turkish Brigade
 547
and an ROK II Corps division. The 1st Cavalry, at po-
sitions east of Sunchon and in the vicinity of Kujong-
ni, advance to Pukch’ang-ni on the following day.
In the ROK II Corps area, confusion continues follow-
ing the strong Chinese offensive that rolled through
the area. General Yu focuses on regrouping scattered
troops of both the ROK 7th and 8th Divisions; how-
ever, only disorganized groups have reached the vicin-
ity of Pukch’ang-ni. Essentially, the entire corps is unfit
for the field. The situation is so dangerous here that
General Coulter is informed by General Walker that
the S.K. II Corps sector is being placed under his re-
sponsibility.
In other activity, Sgt. Raymond N. Reifers, 25th Re-
connaissance Company, is killed in action near Unsan,
North Korea. Sgt. Reifers had entered Namwon with
his tank on September 28 and liberated eighty-six
American POWs by surprising the enemy and push-
ing them into a panic. (See also, September 28, In the
25th Division sector.)
In the 1st Marine Division zone, at dusk the regimen-
tal CPs of the 5th and 7th Marines are within Yudam-
ni, supported by their respective headquarters contin-
gents; however, the 7th Marines’ antitank company
remains at Hagaru. In addition, the headquarters ele-
ments of the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, and some sec-
tions of its weapons company also are at Hagaru. The
majority of the artillery of the 11th Marines is at
Yudam-ni, but only a few tanks are there in support of
division. The 1st and 4th Battalions and Batteries G
and I, 3rd Battalion, are on scene. Battery K, 4th Bat-
talion, remains under the direction of the 1st Battalion
until its parent unit arrives.
The 3rd Battalion is deployed below the slopes of
Hill 1240 (North Ridge). Its 105s had provided sup-
port fire for the 7th Marines on the 26th and 27th.
The 1st Battalion arrived earlier this day to provide
support for the 5th Marines operating in the valley be-
tween South and Southwest Ridges. The 4th Battal-
ion, 11th Marines arrives later in the day, but all three
batteries will be in operation on the lowlands that sep-
arate South and Southeast Ridges by 2300.
South of the town near South and Southeast Ridges,
along the lowlands, stand the howitzers, thirty 105-
mm and eighteen 155-mm. To the north of these, the
75-mm recoilless rifles and the mortar companies of
the 5th and 7th Marines are posted. Nevertheless, these
artillery and mortar units lack stockpiles of extra am-
munition. Enemy fire harasses the artillery positions
throughout the day, but few casualties occur due to the
marksmanship of the enemy. The units of the 5th and
7th Marines that are scattered amid the heights com-
prise ten rifle companies (all under full strength). Two
battalions of the 5th Marines are posted near the town
in the valley and two additional rifle companies of the
7th Marines hold extended and isolated positions along
the MSR.
On North Ridge, Companies D and E, 2nd Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, occupy Hills 1240 and 1282. The
combined perimeter spans about one mile in width,
November 27, 1950
but a gap of about 500 yards exists between the two
units. The flanks of both units are naked; however, the
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines’ units stationed below in
the valley can provide support. The 1st Battalion holds
positions in the valley just below Hills 1240 and 1282.
The 3rd Battalion’s perimeter is established at the foun-
dation of North Ridge, near Hill 1384. The 1st Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, commanded by Lt. Colonel John W.
Stevens II, and the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, com-
manded by Lt. Colonel Taplett, are in position to as-
sist the 7th Marine units on Hills 1240 and 1282.
To the left of North Ridge stands Company H, 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines, which is dug in on the sum-
mit of Hill 1403, the terminal height of Northwest
Ridge. Company E, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines holds
positions in the wide ravine to the left of Northwest
Ridge and its line stretches along the left side of the
ravine until it links with Company F. The latter unit
had earlier captured its spur from the Chinese. Com-
pany F’s left flank is above the road that separates the
spur from Southwest Ridge.
Opposite Company F stands Company D, which is
deployed on a slim finger of Southwest Ridge. Farther
left stands the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines’ Companies
G and I. These two units hold the summit of Southwest
Ridge. Behind these units on the same hill mass to their
left stands Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines,
which is deployed on Hill 1294, a terminal peak that
towers above a wide valley that separates it from South
Ridge. To hold the floor of the valley, one platoon of
Company C, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, deploys to
protect the approaches to the Marine artillery to the
rear.
On South Ridge, Company B, 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, is entrenched on the farthest point of the
cone-shaped ridge that juts about 1,600 feet into the
sky. The company’s weapons are focused upon the deep
and slim gorge that lies between South and Southeast
Ridges.
Opposite South Ridge, Company C holds perilous
positions on a finger of Southeast Ridge, which lies
about five miles from Yudam-ni. The positions guard
a narrow portion of the MSR at a point where it sharply
swerves east about three miles from Yudam-ni valley
and leads into Toktong Pass. Another unit is farther
left and separated from Company C by two miles of
rugged mountain terrain.
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, is deployed
in Toktong Pass, which is equally dangerous ground
with overextended positions. The mission of Company
F is identical to that of Company C, 7th Marines, to
protect the MSR between Hagaru and Yudam-ni.
After dusk, the Communist Chinese 9th Army
Group, commanded by Sung Shin-lun, springs from
its concealed positions in northeast Korea to conclude
its mission. It expects to annihilate the 1st Marine
Division. The Marines are aware of some Chinese
presence, but the Communists have successfully con-
cealed their overwhelming numbers by moving only
at night. Now, the heretofore hidden hordes close
November 27, 1950
against the Yudam-ni perimeter under cover of deep
sable skies.
Twilight quickly fades, leaving not even a glimpse
of moonlight on the village as the sun slips behind
Sakkat Mountain at 1630. It had been a grueling, cold
day; however, once the skies over Yudam-ni darken,
the intolerable weather takes yet another turn for the
worse. The frigid weather shows no mercy to either the
troops or their equipment as the temperature in the
pitch-dark village drops to twenty degrees below zero.
The combination of bone chilling cold and eerie dark-
ness stirs the imaginations of the guardians of the
perimeter, each of whom look forward to a quiet night
and the arrival of dawn.
The Marines’ carbines and BARs are unreliable due
to the extreme cold and in many cases the weapons fail
to function at all. However, the M-1 rifles and the
Browning machine guns split the difference between
life and death for many of the Marines on the rugged
ridges. The troops remain unaware that the stark si-
lence is about to be shattered by a massive attack against
their northwest arch, at North and Northwest Ridges.
In synchronization with this powerful frontal blow by
the Chinese 79th and 89th Divisions, another assault
will be unleashed against the southern portion of the
perimeter by the 59th Chinese Division. The Chinese
59th Division, having maneuvered to positions to the
south, will launch its attack to sever the MSR between
Yudam-ni and Hagaru at South Ridge and Toktong
Pass.
Meanwhile, the Marines hold their positions and try
to avoid frostbite. Just before midnight, the Chinese
announce their presence with the flare of whistles, sirens
and blaring bugles. Screaming infantrymen, donned in
rubber sneaks, recklessly charge under the cover of ma-
chine gun fire. These three Chinese divisions crash
against the 5th and 7th Marines to test the mettle of the
two regiments.
The 5th and 7th Marines complain about the nasty
weather, lack of sleep, cold food and just about every-
thing else on this piece of frozen terrain, but as always,
the grumbling ceases at the first sizzling sound of gun-
fire.
At about 2100 the pernicious trap set against North-
west Ridge is sprung by elements of two units of the
Chinese 89th Division, the 266th and the 267th Reg-
iments. About fifteen minutes earlier, Company I, 5th
Marines, had come under fire at its positions on the
slopes of Southwest Ridge by vanguard elements of the
237th Chinese Regiment. These sniper-type actions in
the south continue sporadically while the attacks against
North and Northwest Ridge unfold.
The Chinese initiate several diversionary probing
raids. While the Communists continue to silently inch
closer to the perimeter of the 5th and 7th Marines’ po-
sitions on Northwest Ridge, one enemy patrol jabs at
the roadblock manned by Company D, 5th Marines. A
quick flurry of soaring grenades exchanged by the two
sides and the skirmish terminates with the death of two
Chinese. Mortars join the skirmish, which prompts an
548
expeditious withdrawal by the enemy patrol. At about
the same time, other enemy detachments poke annoy-
ingly at Company F’s perimeter on Northwest Ridge,
but here, too, the contact is slick and quick. The enemy
prods for a while, then disappears into the bleak dark-
ness.
As the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, fends off the
stinging actions against its mid-section, more enemy
troops flood into the area. Northwest Ridge is perme-
ated with Chinese troops, most within a couple hun-
dred yards of the Marines, which sets up a deadly con-
frontation that threatens Companies E and F. Company
H, 7th Marines, dug in on Hill 1403 to the north, is
equally imperiled.
Suddenly, the piercing sounds of whistles blast and
the Chinese bugles blare to signal the ominous charge
into a blood-filled confrontation between two half-
frozen forces. These shrill sounds infuse the defenders
with a surge of adrenaline that prepares them for the im-
minent clash for survival. Meanwhile, more sinister
sounds arrive when the thundering mortars streak
through the bleak night air to plummet upon the Ma-
rine lines. This is followed by the roar of blazing sub-
machine guns, coupled with the lightning crackle of
grenades. Shortly thereafter, more vicious fire pours
upon the Marine lines when the Chinese add some sav-
age automatic weapons fire, which originates from po-
sitions all along Northwest Ridge. This massive unan-
ticipated wave of hellish fury, devised to crack the
nerves and destroy the 5th and 7th Marines, transforms
Northwest Ridge into a cauldron of death.
By 2125, the mortars begin to strike the rear positions
of Companies E and F. Shortly thereafter, the machine
gun fire subsides, only to be replaced by another round
of shrill whistles and bellowing yells of charging
columns of Chinese troops who boldly encroach the
steadfast Marine perimeter. Upon reaching grenade-
throwing positions, the columns begin to flow into a
ragged skirmish line. The Marines, initially surprised,
now anxiously wait the signal to fire.
At nearly the same time, Company H, 7th Marines,
deployed slightly north on Hill 1403, sustains a with-
ering attack by these seemingly unending waves of
enemy troops.
The machine gunners and riflemen of Companies E
and F raise a solid wall of fire and create a horrid moun-
tain of enemy dead all along their front, but for every
enemy troop slain, seemingly, five or more appear.
Eventually, the overwhelming numbers of Chinese force
a crack in the thinly held gap. They flush through a
point on the northern spur to expose the Marines’
flanks with this jagged wedge. During this lightning-
fast incident, Company F’s right side is penetrated and
the enemy forces back a portion of one platoon, threat-
ening a breakthrough in the fragile draw.
Nearby, the 1st Platoon, Company E, stands at the
fringe of the penetration where it forms a small but co-
hesive line of defense against the onslaught. A detach-
ment from the 1st Platoon, Company E, led by Lieu-
tenant Jack Nolan, and a section of light machine guns
 549
race to the front to sew up the hole and bolster the 1st
Platoon. In addition, the 81-mm howitzers of the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, enter the fight and propel
round after round into the enemy positions to lessen the
pressure within the gap.
The battlefield psychology works and the barrage
validates the laws of physics. A howitzer shell and an
enemy soldier cannot occupy the same space. The iron
injections strongly support Company E, and it holds
firmly to forbid any further enemy penetration and en-
croachment to its rear. Unable to crack through Com-
pany E, the Chinese maintain their pressure against the
rear positions of a defiant Company F.
Meanwhile, the 2nd Platoon, Company E, stretched
thinly on the right front of the perimeter, scores a for-
tuitous round of shots. During the incessant donny-
brook, its machine gun fire cascades upon a Korean
hut and gains unexpected results. The succeeding ex-
plosion ignites a huge fire that propels spiraling arcs of
flame into the ebony sky. At about 2215, the enemy
assault reaches its pinnacle, but by 2230, when the hut
becomes a huge bonfire, the attack nears its culmina-
tion. The immense illumination creates a gargantuan
natural spotlight that dispenses imminent doom for the
enemy. The hovering radiance pinpoints the precise lo-
cations of the Chinese troops as they tramp through
the slim corridor.
Clusters of other enemy contingents dispersed along
the adjoining slopes instantly discover that their con-
cealed positions have been revealed. The Marines be-
come jubilant, having discovered what appears to be
the whole remains of the primary enemy assault force.
A short while ago, while the attack was hitting high
gear, Lt. Colonel Roise had been saddled with some
pessimism based on the tremendous odds that faced his
command. Roise had ordered H&S Company, 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, to form a defense around the
CP; however, the challenge has been met and the threat
forestalled. As the Marines react to their new-found
prize, the gloom dissipates and the CP remains un-
scathed. The scant number of Chinese who succeed in
breaking through the lines ultimately encounters furi-
ous return fire. Their effort is futile and fatal. The
Marines take complete advantage of the ongoing rag-
ing fire. Every available weapon is brought to bear on
the Chinese that still remain alive in the grilled corri-
dor. Marine fire hammers the shattered attackers. The
ruthless force of arms shreds the columns and scorches
the corridor and its opposing slopes.
The enfilade ends at 2400. At the conclusion, the
grim result is that the primary attack force has been
blown into oblivion. Nevertheless, the Communists
still hold ground on the northern tip of the spur, which
gives them tenable positions from which they can de-
liver a deluge of fire into the Marines’ positions. In ad-
dition, Company F remains separated from Company
E. Patrols are unable to re-establish contact with the
isolated unit. Lt. Colonel Roise pushes Company D’s
reserve platoon to positions that fortify Company F’s
side of the perimeter to equalize what Company E had
November 27, 1950
earlier done to plug the gap on its side. In essence, the
reassignment keeps the defense in the gap more cohe-
sive and forbids easy advance through the draw. The
Communists, having sustained huge losses, abort fur-
ther attempts to re-enter the draw.
In the meantime, at Company H, 7th Marines’ iso-
lated positions on Hill 1403, north of the 5th Marines’
units, come under attack at 2135. They soon discover
that the half-moon perimeter that stretches from the
road to the crest of the hill is vulnerable to attack from
all directions. The mission of the far-strung company
is to safeguard the communications that link with
Yudam-ni and the valley. Captain Cooke, the CO,
posts his command post on the reverse slope.
Subsequent to a series of quick, stabbing raids last-
ing about thirty minutes, the Chinese mount a fierce
frontal strike against the right side, held only by one
platoon, led by Lieutenant Elmer Krieg. This power-
ful blow quickly rips through the front line of the out-
numbered platoon. As the brittle right flank folds, com-
munications also end between the platoon and the
company command post. Lieutenant Krieg orders his
troops to redeploy to the left to link with Lieutenant
Paul Denny’s platoon to form a tougher defense.
The Chinese maintain the pressure; however, the
command post makes an urgent request for supporting
fire to strengthen the line. The valley floor seemingly
rises to a crescendo as the howitzers and mortars cata-
pult shells toward the lost ground on the crest to sub-
due the enemy. Captain Cooke regroups his platoons
and readies a counterattack. When the barrage lifts,
Cooke leads a futile charge to regain the lost terrain
from the newly entrenched Communists. The attack
hits a solid wall of machine gun and small arms fire
that terminates the charge and kills Captain Cooke,
who had been at the point of the assault. Lieutenant
James Mitchell assumes temporary command. Com-
pany H sustains heavy casualties, but the Chinese are
unable to overrun its positions.
By about midnight, Lieutenant H.H. Harris climbs
the hill to relieve Lieutenant Mitchell and discovers
that Lieutenant Minard Newton is the sole unwounded
company officer. Harris quickly redeploys Newton’s
platoon from the left flank to the right flank to give it
more sturdiness. Newton’s platoon counterattacks and
recaptures some primary real estate to guarantee that
the company locks its hold on the frozen hill, despite
the high casualties sustained. During the fighting, a
few troops wind up at Lt. Colonel Taplett’s 3rd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines’ CP, at the foot of Southwest Ridge.
They report that Chinese had overrun their mortar po-
sition on Hill 1403.
Despite high losses, the Chinese bring in more rein-
forcements to break the impasse. Following about two
hours of quietness, the enemy again advances toward the
perimeter and strikes Companies E and F, 5th Marines,
and Company H, 7th Marines, with ferocious fire. In
the infamous draw, about three hundred Chinese ad-
vance towards the center of the two-mile front, manned
by Jaskilka’s Company E. To the left, more Chinese
November 27, 1950
close toward Company F. To the right, Company H, in
the heights on Hill 1403, is struck along both flanks and
the front.
Blazing fire meets the threats at all points. At Com-
pany E’s positions on the floor of the draw, several hun-
dred Chinese fly into the incessant machine gun fire;
most die suddenly. Trailing columns note the grim
scene in the bloody corridor and choose to stop short
and take cover. Most of the remaining action in Com-
pany E’s zone is long range; however, some sporadic
close-range action occurs on the flanks.
In the meantime, about two hundred Chinese as-
sault F Company. Company F sustains high casualties
as it pours deadly fire into unending numbers of charg-
ing troops who plow into the center of the line. The
enemy disregards their layers of dead as they tramp over
them to break through. Eventually, two outnumbered
machine gun positions are overwhelmed, but the com-
pany holds. Throughout the remainder of the night,
Companies E and F hold their ground.
Back in the heights, Company H remains under
tremendous siege for about one hour. Successive waves
of Chinese also pound this perimeter, but Harris’ com-
mand catapults round after round into the attackers,
increasing the number of corpses on Hill 1403. The
roadblock in the valley, defended by Sergeant William
Vick (Company H, 7th Marines) also holds firmly and
gives no ground. Nevertheless, the beleaguered com-
pany, out of touch with other units, is ordered by Lt.
Harris to pull back at 0400 and redeploy to the rear of
Company E, 5th Marines.
By about 0600, Company H successfully disengages
and fights its way back, but the situation deteriorates
as the enemy gains the heights of the key hill and with
it, the means to strike the rear of the 2nd Battalion,
5th Marines. The 2nd Battalion is threatened with iso-
lation and those Marines on North and Southwest
Ridges face a threat to their flanks and rear. In addition,
by break of dawn, the Chinese are able to scrutinize
the positions of about two thousand Marines still de-
ployed down in the hazardous valley.
While the elements of the Chinese 89th Division
pound the Marines on Northwest Ridge, contingents
of the Chinese 79th Division seek to wipe out two
isolated companies of the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines,
at their lonely positions in the heights above Yudam-ni
on North Ridge at Hills 1240 and 1282. These attacks
simultaneously threaten the command posts of the
5th and 7th Marines in Yudam-ni. The Marines
surmise that the village will become a target. Colonel
Taplett redeploys his 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines.
He directs it to switch from its compact assembly
area north of the village to form a wide defensive
perimeter in the same vicinity, to forestall any
potential breakthrough from the slopes of Northwest
Ridge.
Companies H and I dig in on Hill 1403 facing the
ridge, while Company G spreads out at Southwest
Ridge. Two platoons of Company G entrench them-
selves at the foundation of the ridge, while the third
550
platoon disperses among the slopes to establish an out-
post there.
Meanwhile, Colonel Taplett establishes his 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines’ CP in the low ground at the foun-
dation of Northwest Ridge, between Hill 1282 and the
knob of Hill 1384. Taplett learns that the spur of Hill
1384 is undefended. He dispatches one platoon of
Company I, with orders to take positions about 300
yards up the slope. About 300 yards to the rear of Com-
pany I, a detachment of South Korean police manning
machine guns holds a section of the spur that lies di-
rectly above the battalion CP.
The enemy elements had maneuvered over the spine
of North Ridge to reach positions near the 2nd Battal-
ion, 7th Marines. The 1st Battalion, 235th Chinese
Regiment, is to overrun Hill 1240, but it receives no or-
ders to capture Hill 1282. Inadvertently, while advanc-
ing in the bleak darkness, the enemy 1st Battalion
climbs a knob that leads toward Hill 1282, still think-
ing it is the objective. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion,
236th Regiment, operating to the left of the 1st Battal-
ion, 235th Regiment, moves toward its objective, un-
occupied Hill 1167. However, the tactical error rolls
into its ranks and causes the 3rd Battalion to end up at
the foundation of the sheer slopes of Hill 1240.
The terrain is in sharp contrast to the shallow rolling
slopes of Hill 1167. The confusion stalls the attack of the
3rd Battalion for a few hours, but the equally confused
1st Battalion, 235th Regiment, executes its attack at
2200. Convinced they are stalking a lone Marine pla-
toon on Hill 1240, the Chinese launch their assault
against Company E, commanded by Captain W.D.
Phillips, positioned on Hill 1282 about 1,000 yards
west of Hill 1240. The Chinese 1st and Special Duty
Companies initiate probing raids with the resounding
sounds of their sub machine gunners and grenadiers.
The Marines commence fire and drive the attacks
back. Within about two hours, the Communists lunge
against Hill 1240. At 2345, Company D, 2nd Battal-
ion, informs headquarters of enemy infiltration on the
hill. Both Company D and Company E prepare for the
inevitable. All patrols interacting between the two com-
panies are postponed. Two platoons of Company E
plant themselves on the crest, while the remaining pla-
toon, under Lieutenant Bey, deploys in the rear to the
right of the line to hold a spur on the eastern side above
Yudam-ni. Company D diligently denies the freezing
temperature on Hill 1240 to bolster its positions.
At midnight, amidst the howling winds and darkened
crevices on the crest, Chinese bugles bellow to signal the
attack. Instantly, these clamors are joined by the
screaming chants of the night-assault troops who charge
the perimeter’s northeastern bow. They advance head-
long into an intrepid sheet of gunfire, provided by Lieu-
tenant Yancey’s platoon. Many of the chants cease as
the attacking squads are ripped to pieces.
The Chinese attempt to sidestep the hurricane of fire
by swerving eastward to break through, but here, too,
the Chinese face disaster. Bey’s platoon holds an iron
grip on the jutting spur. His Marines fire incessantly
 551
and again thin the ranks of the Chinese. Undeterred,
many more continue to charge, ignoring the layers of
their dead comrades that are splattered along the ghastly
perimeter. The remainder of the two attacking compa-
nies maintain their futile attack.
By about 0200, the Chinese have been ravaged by
Company E and the assault to begins to fizzle. Com-
pany E takes high casualties but remains rigid. Ma-
chine gunners and riflemen, aided by the timely toss-
ing of grenades, maintain the pressure. By about 0300,
both enemy units are literally wiped out as fighting
units, having sustained the loss of nearly every man.
When the battle subsides, Hill 1282 remains in pos-
session of battered Company E, 7th Marines.
The hill’s frozen slopes become cluttered with more
than 200 recently deceased Chinese of the 1st Battal-
ion, 235th Chinese Regiment. Reinforcements are
struggling to reach the embattled U.S. command, but
in the meantime, the Chinese show no signs of relent-
ing. In a short while, the 3rd Company, 1st Battalion,
235th Regiment, is thrown upon the fiery gauntlet to
seize the obstinate crest. The scant force, the surviving
troops of the first attack, are clamped into the unit,
bringing the attack force to about 125 men.
Meanwhile, back at Hill 1240, on North Ridge, the
probing raids also begin at about midnight when ele-
ments of the 3rd Battalion, 236th Chinese Regiment,
explore the perimeter of Company D, 2nd Battalion,
7th Marines. These jabbing raids shift upward to a full-
scale attack just after 0100. Within the first thirty min-
utes of the initial attacks, some Chinese bolt through
the saddle between Hills 1240 and 1282. They occupy
positions in the high ground, from where they com-
mence fire upon the regimental (5th and 7th) com-
mand post in the village.
Actually, an outpost on Hill 1384 held by Company
I, 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, had received incoming fire
prior to 2100, becoming the first unit to come under
fire. It is this outpost that gets badgered at 0145, about
thirty minutes after the battalion goes on full alert.
Once the enemy commits to the assault, Colonel Mur-
ray redeploys the 1st Battalion in anticipation of a sec-
ond assault. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, moves to
positions to the rear of the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines.
At 0100, the 1st Platoon, Company A, led by Lt.
Nicholas Trapnell, begins to ascend the slippery slopes
of Hill 1282 to bolster hard-hit Company E, but the trek
takes longer than two hours. The abominable weather,
having reached twenty degrees below zero, makes the
task unbearable. Shortly thereafter, Company A’s 3rd
Platoon, commanded by Lieutenant Robert Snyder,
makes the ascent, trailing the 1st Platoon.
In the meantime, at 0145, Company I’s platoon on
the spur of Hill 1384 reports that it is coming under in-
creasingly heavy fire from the heights above. Soon after,
reliable word is spread from Company H, 7th Marines,
on Hill 1403 that Chinese are maneuvering around the
hill to sever the MSR.
By dawn, Company H is forced to withdraw from the
hill, leaving it to the enemy. Some of these troops make
November 27, 1950
it to the lines of the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, while
others reach the positions of the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines. A short time later, at about 0218, Company
I identifies enemy movement and commences firing to
thwart a platoon-sized enemy contingent. The enemy
unit retreats, but this incident is soon overshadowed
by the advance of a larger force. Between one and two
companies begin to flow down the slopes of Hill 1384.
They sweep over the undersized Company I platoon
and lunge nearly 300 yards toward the South Korean
police. The Koreans, on the spur that overlooks the
command post, dish out tenacious machine gun fire to
momentarily halt the marauders, but the Korean platoon
is unable to permanently hold. It is compelled to pull
back, leaving the heights to the swarming enemy.
Down below in the draw, the CP becomes threat-
ened. H&S and Weapons Companies return fire to-
ward the heights, but the former is forced to pull back
to the other side of the MSR. The Weapons Company,
holding more tenable positions, holds its ground de-
spite the avalanche of fire from above. All the while,
the 3rd Battalion rifle companies remain unengaged.
Nevertheless, the CP stands nearly naked in the draw
since the pull back of H&S Company.
Taplett, informed of his precarious situation, chooses
to remain in the tent to maintain contact with his rifle
companies. The Chinese, apparently thinking the tent
is unoccupied, fail to direct their fire upon it, leaving
Taplett the opportunity to control his command. The
battalion executive officer, Major John Canney, departs
the tent, leaving the S-3, Major Thomas Durham,
armed with only his pistol to guard Taplett. Canney
moves to regroup H&S Company, but as he reaches
the MSR, an enemy bullet kills him.
Outside the blackened CP tent, Taplett has one other
guard, PFC Louis Swinson, whose radio has fallen prey
to the elements. Swinson, poised with his rifle, keeps
vigil on the approach routes to the CP. This harrowing
incident, which lasts for about one hour, goes unnoticed
by the battalion’s three rifle companies posted about
300 yards away. Luckily, the Chinese make no genuine
effort to storm the CP. Very few Chinese attempt to
make the descent from the spur.
Back on Hill 1282, a second assault is thrown against
Company E, 7th Marines while reinforcements are en
route to the summit. The exhausted troops of Com-
pany E repeatedly throw back the attackers, but at high
cost, including probable annihilation at any moment.
Meanwhile, the 1st Platoon, Company A, reaches the
bloody peak slightly after 0300 and takes positions with
Lt. Bey’s platoon on the spur that bolts out from the
eastern side of the ridge. The platoon arrives prior to the
full velocity of the Chinese thrust.
Subsequently, the haggard 3rd Platoon of Lieutenant
Snyder arrives to reinforce the few survivors of the two
besieged platoons. Snyder, unable to establish contact
with the troops on the spur, directs his men to inter-
twine with the troops of E Company, but even more
Chinese reach the crest to offset the arrival of reinforce-
ments. The Oriental chants and screeching whistles
November 27, 1950
increase the intensity, but now the sky bursts with il-
luminating flares and the profound reverberating
sounds of multiple explosions that quiver the frozen
earth. Brutal hand-to-hand combat and ferocious ex-
changes of grenades and gunfire erupt. The wild don-
nybrook inflicts horrifying numbers of casualties to
both sides. The Marines’ resources are quickly dimin-
ishing.
Eventually, the Communists drive a wicked spear be-
tween the defenders holding the crest and those on the
equally perilous spur. By 0400, the summit is overrun
by Chinese. They take over the command post on the
peak and begin to speak in Chinese on the captured
telephone. The summit takes on the appearance of a
slaughterhouse as the surviving men of Company E at-
tempt to circle the rhetorical wagons for a final stand.
Like falling dominoes, the remaining able-bodied Ma-
rine officers become casualties during this desperate
struggle.
During the regrouping, Lieutenant Yancy, a
wounded platoon leader, is again struck, as is Lieuten-
ant William Schrier of the mortar section. Lt. Leonard
Clements, the other Company E platoon leader, sustains
a wound. The company commander, Captain Phillips,
continues throwing grenades at the encroaching enemy
until he is slain. Immediately, Lieutenant Raymond Ball
(executive officer) assumes command of Company E,
but he, too, has sustained multiple wounds.
Yelling advice and encouragement from his prone
position, Ball sustains several additional wounds that
render him unconscious. He is rushed to the medics, but
he succumbs. Recently arrived Lieutenant Snyder (3rd
Platoon, Company A, 5th Marines) assumes command
of the dwindling company and his battered platoon.
The Chinese ignore their horrific casualty rate that has
climbed to about 250, as opposed to the 150 sustained
by the Marines on this contested Hill 1282, which now
resembles a huge morgue.
By 0500, the Chinese control the crest, but they re-
main convinced that their effort has given them Hill
1240. The enemy wedge has widely separated the Ma-
rine defenders. Snyder’s survivors have been pushed
to the reverse slope. The contingent stands at about
one-half rifle platoon from Company E and about
six able-bodied men of his 3rd Platoon. The combined
casualties of the two Company A Platoons, since their
ascent to the summit, stands at about forty killed
and wounded. To the left, the remainder of Company
E’s riflemen, led by Lt. Bey, and Lt. Trapnell’s 1st Pla-
toon, Company A, 5th Marines retains a precarious
hold on the summit of the rugged southeastern spur
directly above Yudam-ni.
Meanwhile, the Chinese have also made some sub-
stantial gains at Hill 1240 against Company D, 7th
Marines which had brushed back the initial probing
strikes. At about 0105, elements of the 3rd Battalion,
236th Chinese Regiment, uncork a full-blast assault
against the perimeter, which ignites a furious slugfest.
The enemy surge encounters a platoon led by Sergeant
O.J. Reller when it slams into the northwestern sector,
552
and another platoon led by Lieutenant Seeburger that
holds the eastern (right) side of the line.
Supporting machine gun sections hold the line to
the front of Captain Hull’s CP. Successive assaults are
turned back by Reller’s unit, but the Chinese intensify
the effort and pour unending amounts of troops into the
battle. By 0230, the enemy breaks through the line on
the left. Full-throttled pressure bars Seeburger from
moving to assist Reller’s platoon. Lieutenant Webber,
a machine gun platoon leader, attempts to stem the
tide by rushing reinforcements, but the Chinese raise the
pressure against the CP and compel Weber to abort the
attempt. Heavy fighting continues without pause.
Nonetheless, by 0300, Captain Hull’s CP is over-
whelmed by Chinese. The remnants of the two pla-
toons on the line and the reserve platoon, led by Lt.
Anthony Sota, is directed by Captain Hull to form at
the base of the hill. Hull, wounded but determined to
hold the hill, regroups his troops and leads a counter-
attack to regain the lost ground. The assault stuns the
Chinese and prompts them to give ground, but the
weakened command finds itself in near untenable po-
sitions.
The Chinese mount an attack, pounding the
diminutive contingent at three separate points. The
Marines hold steadfastly as they simultaneously defend
their front, right flank and the right side of their rear.
The cost is high, but as dawn approaches and the com-
pany becomes compacted like a squad, the remaining
sixteen able-bodied Marines still hold their positions.
However, the Chinese retain the heights to their
front, the slopes to the rear and both flanks. The Com-
munists’ gains on Hill 1240, combined with the seizure
of Hill 1282, add to the dilemma of holding Yudam-
ni and preserving the firepower of the accompanying ar-
tillery units, especially the 3rd Battalion, under Major
Parry, and Battery K, 4th Battalion. The former is de-
ployed just under the slopes of 1240 and the latter
stands at positions just under the southeastern spur of
Hill 1282.
While the 5th and 7th Marines are engulfed in bit-
ter combat at North and Northwest Ridges, other Chi-
nese contingents begin to whack the defenders at South
Ridge. Company B, 7th Marines, is heavily engaged
with elements of the Chinese 59th Division at Hill
1419. By the arrival of dusk, the company has sustained
serious casualties. Company C drives down the MSR
and deploys across the road from Hill 1419 to support
B Company. After the arrival of reinforcements, Com-
pany B brings out its wounded and returns to Yudam-
ni with Lt. Colonel Davis, who had brought in Com-
pany C (only two rifle companies), commanded by
Captain Morris. He establishes positions on Hill 1419.
His two platoons deploy in a half-moon perimeter
along the lower slopes of the eastern spur. The 60-mm
mortar section is also within the perimeter. In the dis-
tance is the ominous crest.
At 0230 (28th), the slopes come alive with the usual
notorious sounds of attacking Chinese. The right flank
of the perimeter is heavily struck by large numbers of
 553
troops that spring from the heights. The defending pla-
toon, commanded by Lieutenant Jack Chabek, sustains
high casualties and the Chinese penetrate. The left flank
then comes under a ferocious attack and the weakened
platoon under Sergeant Earle Payne also is pummeled.
One squad is deployed in higher ground, causing the
platoon to partially collapse and be pushed back. This
detachment becomes totally isolated and its fate re-
mains unknown at dawn.
Captain Morris attempts to forestall disaster. He
speeds reinforcements to both flanks, utilizing his head-
quarters and mortar personnel. The maneuver saves the
command from being decimated. The Marines con-
tend with the attacks until dawn, when the din of bat-
tle subsides and artillery fire is turned against the enemy
positions. Nonetheless, enemy fire continues to rain
down on the beleaguered unit from every direction.
The circumstances remain dire, as the combat had de-
stroyed the radio and racked up high casualties. The
pinned-down command, which has sustained about
forty casualties, also suffers from lack of air support
due to the break-down of communications.
Meanwhile, the Chinese have gained control of the
MSR leading south toward Toktong Pass and to the
north toward Yudam-ni. Attempts to contact the miss-
ing squad from Sergeant Payne’s platoon are futile. One
man, Corporal Kiesling, voluntarily heads up the slope
to locate it, but machine gun fire slays him. The day-
light brings no solace to Company C. It becomes cap-
tive to the terrain while the enemy begins to encircle it.
The only option is to tighten the perimeter and hold
until relief arrives, but ammunition is running low. The
besieged company regroups in hills east of the road.
Throughout the morning of the 28th, Captain Mor-
ris and his Marines await rescue. Meanwhile, they
watch the Communists form a deadly circle around the
diminutive perimeter.
In Fox Company’s zone, Captain William Barber,
2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, deploys his unit midway
through Toktong Pass, upon a sequestered hill just
north of the MSR. The reinforced company, composed
of 240 officers and men, also has heavy machine guns
and 81-mm mortars. The machine guns are placed with
the rifle platoons. The 1st Platoon, led by Lieutenant
J. Dunne, and the 2nd Platoon, commanded by Lieu-
tenant Elmer Peterson, take the right and left flanks
respectively. With each leaning toward the MSR, the
platoons string down the hill to fortify the 3rd platoon,
under Lieutenant R. McCarthy, which holds the crest
and stares northward. At the foundation of the hill,
Barber establishes his headquarters. Between it and the
flanking platoons, the reverse slope is held by head-
quarters company and a rocket section and these are
hooked to the flanking platoons.
The night positions of Fox Company are under a full
moon, which creates a mixed blessing, but the temper-
atures become extremely hostile, challenging the minds
and numbing the bodies of the men. The area remains
quiet throughout the night of the 27th and into the
early part of the 28th, but concentration is difficult.
November 27, 1950
The exceptions to the silence are the convoys transport-
ing the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, and the 4th Battal-
ion, 11th Marines, back to Yudam-ni and the empty ve-
hicles of Lt. Colonel Beall that are en route to Hagaru.
The 3rd Platoon stretches out along a hilltop position
linked to the other two platoons, which lean down the
slopes pointing toward the MSR. Each of the platoons
is bolstered by machine gun units.
Fox Company’s positions remain unchallenged dur-
ing the night of the 27th; however, this situation
changes drastically during the early morning hours of
the 28th. Under a bright moon, the 3rd Platoon waits
apprehensively in anticipation of an attack, but it is
hindered by the extreme cold that dulls attentiveness.
Lieutenant McCarthy zips through the positions a lit-
tle after 0100 to make sure all are prepared for the in-
evitable. He emphasizes the need to maintain a con-
stant vigil.
At about 0230, the Chinese announce their presence
when a force estimated at about company strength
plows into the positions of Company F. The enemy
tries to open a gap between the lines of the 2nd and
3rd Platoons. The attack is met with ferocious fire that
inflicts heavy casualties upon the enemy on the hills;
however, the 3rd Platoon under McCarthy, holding the
crest, is struck with an overwhelming blow that nearly
eradicates two squads. Although McCarthy’s command
loses fifteen killed and nine wounded, eight survivors
make it back to the reserve squad’s positions.
Meanwhile, as the Chinese take this peak, the
Marines steadfastly hold and otherwise prevent pene-
tration, due in great part to the valor of several who re-
fused to accept defeat. These men, PFC Robert F. Ben-
son, Private Hector A. Cafferatta (2nd Platoon) and
PFC Gerald J. Smith, supported by Smith’s fire team,
provide two enemy platoons with sudden death, elim-
inating these contingents in their entirety.
Private Cafferatta intentionally makes himself a tar-
get to draw fire away form the others. He leapfrogs
along the lines, singlehandedly taking on the enemy as
they arrive. Fifteen of them fall. He wounds many oth-
ers during his atttempt to buy time for reinforcements
to arrive. In one incident, at close quarters an enemy
grenade is tossed near him and others. Cafferatta jumps
into the gully, retrieves the grenade and tosses it back;
however, just after it leaves his right hand, it detonates.
He loses one finger and sustains other injuries to his
hand and arm. He disregards the wounds and contin-
ues to battle the enemy. Later he is hit by a sniper’s bul-
let and is finally forced to agree to evacuation. Private
Cafferatta, for his extraordinary heroism under fire, be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor.
Fox Company remains engulfed in combat through-
out the frigid night. Apparently, the Chinese had ex-
pected to overrun two rifle platoons, but instead, these
attackers bump into the main command post of Cap-
tain William Barber, which contains the mortars. Bar-
ber’s troops fall back to more tenable positions, giving
the enemy some running room, while the Marines
climb higher to a cluster of trees that stand above an
November 28, 1950
embankment along the MSR. The Chinese give pursuit
and find themselves unable to climb the hill. On each
attempt to ascend the embankment, Marine fire cuts
them down. While they take measures to find safety
behind the embankment, the Marines pull the pins on
grenades and let them tumble directly upon the Chi-
nese.
After concluding the Marine positions are impene-
trable, the enemy attempts to retreat, but as they hit
the open ground, Marine fire eliminates more of them.
The Chinese attack finally is deemed over at 0630 on
the 28th. About 100 dead Chinese are laid out to the
front of the 1st Platoon and along the MSR at the foun-
dation of the hill, while another 350 are in front of the
2nd and 3rd Platoon positions. These Marines sustain
20 killed and 54 wounded.
November 28 Intelligence reports reveal that the
Chinese are heavily involved in Korea, something that
had not been anticipated. General MacArthur sends
additional information to the United Nations concern-
ing new players in the fighting: “Enemy reactions de-
veloped in the course of our assault operations of the
past four days disclose — continental armed forces in
army, corps, and divisional organization of an aggre-
gate strength is now arrayed against the United Na-
tions forces in North Korea.... Heavy reinforcements
are now concentrated within the privileged sanctuary
north of the international boundary and constantly
moving forward.” Soon after Macarthur sends an alert:
“We face an entirely new war.”
Within several days, President Truman issues a state-
ment that points the blame on the Soviets. Also, dur-
ing the evening, General MacArthur summons Gener-
als Walker and Almond to Tokyo to confer with them
regarding the situation in Korea. Walker and Almond
return to Korea during the following day.
In the X Corps area, 7th Division sector, following a
week of heavy skirmishing with North Korean troops,
Task Force Kingston, reinforced, commanded by 2nd
Lt. Robert C. Kingston, finally breaks through and
reaches Singalpajin. TF Drysdale arrived at Koto-ri,
but instead of being used for reconnaissance as planned,
circumstances compelled X Corps to slip it into the op-
erations designed to bolster Hagaru. The 41st Inde-
pendent Commando, Royal Marines, joins with U.S.
Marines and Army contingents on the following day
in an attempt to break through to Hagaru.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, General Oliver P.
Smith arrives at Hagaru from Hungnam and officially
establishes headquarters at 1100. Staff and intelligence
officers fill him in on the situation, while plans con-
tinue for an assault. Agents operating in the field report
back later in the day and inform headquarters that they
have actually conversed with enemy officers and the
Chinese boasted that they would seize Hagaru on this
day, after dark. Meanwhile, Lt. General Edward M.
Almond, USA, arrives at Hagaru to discuss strategy
with General Smith.
In the 1st Marines sector, Lt. Colonel Ridge continues
554
to direct his 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, to prepare for
an imminent attack. The enemy has established positions
that isolated Marine positions at Yudam-ni, Fox Hill,
Hagaru and Koto-ri, preventing the Marines from
maintaining contact with each other. Companies H and
I protect the south and southwest sector of the line.
George Company was to defend East Hill, but it has
not yet reached the area. Other units, including Com-
pany D, 1st Engineer Battalion, and elements of the
2nd Battalion, 11th Marines, are deployed on the south-
east part of the perimeter, which links How Company
with East Hill. Lacking the manpower of George Com-
pany, East Hill had to be defended by troops from X
Corps headquarters and a contingent of the 10th Engi-
neer Battalion, USA. The area just north of East Hill is
held by the Antitank Battalion (7th Marines).
The Chinese launch an attack on the following
night.
In the 5th Marines zone, the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, executes an attack to lessen the pressure in its
zone. Company C, which had recently deployed to re-
inforce the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, to hold the line
in the valley, comes under the jurisdiction of the 7th
Marines to help stabilize the unsteady situation on Hills
1282 and 1240.
Two platoons under Captain Jack R. Jones during
the early morning hours begin to climb Hill 1282 to
support Company E, 7th Marines. Meanwhile, the
other Company C platoon moves to Hill 1240 to bol-
ster Company D, 7th Marines. As the contingent under
Jones ascends the slope, many wounded Marines are
descending and even from them, it is impossible to de-
termine what is actually occurring at the crest in the
darkness. Nonetheless, the platoons maintain the slow
advance in the bitter cold.
By about 0430, enemy fire from the nearby crest
alerts the Marines they are near the objective. Shortly
thereafter, it becomes clear that the situation is grim.
Company E has lost is positions and about twenty sur-
vivors are regrouping to attempt an attack to regain the
lost ground. Captain Jones aligns his two platoons and
joins the Company E survivors under Sergeant Daniel
Murphy. Supported by mortars, the men launch their
attack just after the crack of dawn to dislodge the 235th
Chinese Regiment’s 3rd Company, 1st Battalion.
In numbing cold, the Marines defy the onslaught of
machine gun fire and a barrage of hand grenades. They
lack artillery cover due to the close quarters of the op-
posing forces. And the skies are clear of planes; the Cor-
sairs have not yet reached the target.
Nevertheless, the charge gains speed and overwhelms
the enemy defenders. Of the fifty or so Chinese troops,
only about five survive. Within a while, led by an of-
ficer who had survived the attack, another enemy pla-
toon ascends the slope, only this time, the slope is dom-
inated by Marines. Another Chinese platoon follows
and it, too, is struck by riveting fire.
The Marines repulse attack after attack and finally the
enemy company is reduced to seven survivors. The
Chinese commander has one company remaining and
 555
it is down to one platoon. The Marines of Company C
also greet this attack and it, too, amounts to nothing
more than additional dead Chinese. Following the final
attack by the remaining reserve squad, six of these Chi-
nese remain standing.
The Chinese 1st Battalion, 235th Regiment, loses
about 400 men, including nearly every one of the
NCOs, platoon leaders and company commanders.
Company C, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, sustain 15
killed and 67 wounded. Company E, 2nd Battalion,
7th Marines, suffer about 120 casualties, including
killed and wounded.
Following the early morning action the Marines at-
tempt to rescue their wounded, some of whom are from
Company E, still in their foxholes on the slope of Hill
1282. The operation succeeds despite heavy fire from
enemy positions. By about noon, the Marines definitely
maintain control of Hill 1282.
In the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines zone, Lt. Colonel
Roise’s battalion at Northwest Ridge has been heavily
involved against the Chinese. The enemy is able to gain
some ground on the spur and it overruns two machine
gun positions. However, the Marines succeed in re-
pelling several major attacks in the draw and along the
spur to the left of the 7th Marines’ lines. The 5th
Marines dominate in its area and the enemy dead con-
tinues to rise, but at about 0430, stragglers from Com-
pany H, 7th Marines, which had held Hill 1403, arrive
at 5th Marines lines, which makes it clear that the
Communists hold the hill and that communications
with the remainder of the 5th Marines at Yudam-ni are
also in jeopardy. At one point during the early morn-
ing hours, fifteen Chinese troops penetrate the posi-
tions of Company F and all are killed.
By about 0600, a counterattack executed by Com-
pany E succeeds in pushing out the Chinese and it re-
gains the two machine guns that had earlier been seized.
In the meantime, Company E, 5th Marines, takes the
offensive and engages a large Chinese force on the spur,
which is setting up an assault against the 2nd Battalion’s
right flank.
After the night’s combat in Roise’s zone, the weather
inflicts more casualties than the enemy. The Chinese,
however, suffer heavy casualties. Combined, Compa-
nies E and F sustain 60 casualties to the elements and
seven killed. Also, 25 Marines are wounded. The Chi-
nese sustain about 500 killed, but this figure does not
include those killed at Hill 1403, as Company H had
not made a body count.
The 5th Marines, under recent orders to launch an
attack after dawn, abort the assault following an assess-
ment that the area now contains too many Chinese
troops. At about 1650, orders to officially stop the of-
fensive arrive from General Oliver P. Smith’s headquar-
ters. The 5th Marines deploy to positions where they
can cooperate with the 7th Marines. By 2000, the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, complete a movement from
Northwest Ridge to Southwest Ridge.
In the meantime, Company I, 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, relieves contingents of the 1st Battalion, 5th
November 28, 1950
Marines at Hill 1282 (North Ridge). Also, Companies
G and H, 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, establish positions
from where they can guard the northwest approaches to
Yudam-ni. The beleaguered troops at Hill 1240 are re-
lieved by Company B, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines.
In the 7th Marines zone, at about 1015, Company
A, 1st Battalion, acting as vanguard, moves out to res-
cue Companies C and F, both of which are trapped and
surrounded at their positions along the MSR that heads
to Hagaru. The remaining troops of the 1st Battalion,
led by Lt. Colonel Davis, bring up the rear. They en-
counter heavy enemy resistance, particularly after they
drive into the gorge between South and Southeast
Ridges.
The unit manages to reach a point about one mile
from the besieged companies just after 1500; however,
after it ascends to the high ground, the Chinese effec-
tively halt the column. Meanwhile, Davis directs Com-
pany B, to take a circuitous route and outflank the Chi-
nese by advancing on the west side of the MSR to gain
the heights. The operation, supported by mortar fire
and planes, succeeds. Combined, the relief force drives
the Chinese from their positions.
From the newly gained ground directly overlooking
the positions of Company C, the force deploys in a
half-moon position and points towards the MSR, form-
ing a solid line of fire between the Chinese to the South
and the once imperiled platoon. Although the trapped
Marines of Company C have an umbrella of protec-
tion, Fox Company, which had been unable to extricate
itself from the Toktong Pass, is still jeopardized when
darkness overtakes the area.
Davis’ relief force prepares to establish night posi-
tions, but Colonel Litzenberg concludes that to permit
the 1st Battalion to remain in its dangerous positions
could also endanger the 1st Battalion. Davis is ordered
to return to Yudam-ni to eliminate any possibility of
being surrounded in the gorge. Shortly after receiving
the directive, Davis moves out. The unit brings Com-
pany C and its 46 wounded Marines along.
In the 2nd Battalion’s zone, Company F remains in
control of its positions; however, the Chinese night at-
tacks have inflicted casualties that total 54 wounded.
After dawn, the Marines scrounge around the Chi-
nese dead and seize many weapons, including Ameri-
can Thompson submachine guns and some Springfield
rifles. Attempts to relieve Company F through the day
are unsuccessful, but some air support by Australian
planes eases the pressure for a while. In addition, Ma-
rine RFDs drop supplies, but the unit on Fox Hill sus-
tains two casualties while it retrieves the supplies from
the bottom of the hill. The unit remains surrounded and
two separate rescue missions from Hagaru and Yudam-
ni each fail to reach the lines. Fox Company prepares
to hold the position. The situation on the hill remains
tranquil through midnight, but during the early morn-
ing hours of the 29th, the Chinese attack.
In the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines zone, a counterat-
tack is initiated against Hill 1384. Company G commits
two platoons while one remains in place at the outpost
November 28, 1950
on Southwest Ridge. Both units move out simultane-
ously, push across the MSR and quickly rescue the im-
periled command post of Lt. Colonel Taplett. Contin-
uing, the Marines move into the draw and eliminate
resistance, essentially ensuring the safety of the Weapons
Platoon (3rd Battalion, 5th Marines) still stuck there.
From this point, the attacking platoons continue to
advance through the stark darkness and reach the spur
defended by about 25 Chinese. After evicting the de-
fenders, the Marines claim the spur and soon after, the
Korean police platoon, which had earlier abandoned
the position, redeploy there. Once the ground is se-
cured, the attack is halted to await sunrise.
Soon after, at the first glimpse of the sun, the attack
is reinitiated by these two dogged platoons. To the
amazement of the commanding officer, Colonel Ta-
plett, the troops have clearly penetrated the enemy’s
lines and stand at the approach to the crest of Hill
1384. Taplett, aware that only the platoons of Lieu-
tenants John Cahill and Dana Cashion are on the of-
fensive, immediately orders the attack to cease.
Nonetheless, these platoons have alleviated the enor-
mous pressure on the other Marines in the valley west
of Yudam-ni. The attack had also cleared a path for H
Company, 7th Marines, which permits it to retire from
imperiled positions and join with the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, at the slopes of Hill 1403 at Northwest
Ridge. Following orders to retire, Cashion and Cahill
return to the recently captured spur.
In Company D’s zone, the unit holding Hill 1240 has
been under attack by the 3rd Battalion, 236th Chinese
Regiment, and it holds only a skimpy piece of the hill
while defending against attacks from several sides. The
3rd Platoon, Company C, 5th Marines, had earlier ad-
vanced to support it, but the darkness and enemy re-
sistance had impeded progress.
As the sun rises, it becomes obvious to the Marines
on Hill 1282 that their counterparts on Hill 1240 are
in trouble, but the distance of 1,000 yards is too much
for an easy solution. With the light of the sun and the
determination of Lieutenant Dawe’s platoon, a hook-
up finally occurs with Company D, 7th Marines. How-
ever, by this time, the situation is getting more grave,
as the Chinese are massing on the reverse sides of Hills
1240 and 1282. The Marines are able to eliminate the
enemy from Hill 1240, but they lack sufficient strength
to hold off a major attack. All communications have
ceased, which forbids Dawe’s from informing Head-
quarters of the imminent assault and eliminates any
possibility of artillery support.
At about 1100, the sirens blare and the Chinese send
about two battalions against the diminutive force. Un-
able to totally withstand the attack, the Marines are
compelled to pull back, but they hold again about 150
yards to the rear and refuse to budge. Dawe’s shattered
platoon and about sixteen survivors of Company D
repel the remaining assaults. Relief finally arrives at
about 1700. Company B, 5th Marines, arrives at Hill
1240 and discovers the high casualties it cost to hold the
ground. Only about one-half of Dawe’s platoon
556
still functions and most of Captain Hull’s Company D
has been lost to the casualty list.
In the Eighth Army area, prior to noon, due to the in-
tensity of the enemy offensive, General Walker issues
orders to the I Corps and the IX Corps to pull back
from their respective positions to draw a new line of
defenses at the Ch’ongch’on River. The redeployment
operations begin at about noon, but the IX Corps is
unable to complete the operation by the end of the day.
As the day passes, General Walker learns of several sit-
uations in the Eighth Army sector that impede his
plans, but still he is convinced that the re-initiation of
the offensive will proceed in a short while.
Complications develop in the 1st Cavalry sector, the
ROK II Corps sector and in both corps areas. Mean-
while, the onslaught of the Chinese XIII Army Group
also continues to thwart plans. By day’s end, it becomes
crystal clear that the bridgehead at the Ch’ongch’on
River will not be completed to ensure that the Chinese
will be halted. Specifically, the ROK II Corps, already
having been clobbered, is positioned to fold and Eighth
Army’s left flank is endangered. Throughout the day, re-
ports both from the field and from the air, filter into
headquarters and sound the alarm about large num-
bers of enemy troops moving southwest towards
Sunch’on, while another huge force advances from two
directions, east and northeast, against Kunu-ri.
In the I Corps area, the 24th Division establishes new
positions without any major interference by the enemy;
however, pursuant to orders from Eighth Army, the
bulk of the division, except the 5th Regimental Com-
bat Team (attached to Eighth Army), will move again
on the following day to strengthen IX Corps.
In the 25th Division sector, the 25th Division has re-
cently been transferred from IX Corps to I Corps. The
division had come under assault during the latter part
of the previous night by elements of the 39th Chinese
Army. The fighting, which concentrated heavily upon
the 35th Regiment, continued until sunrise. Task Force
Wilson also sustains a severe assault by contingents of
the Chinese 39th Army. The enemy pressure compels
TF Wilson to pull back to the vicinity of Yongbyon,
east of the Kuryong River. Subsequent to the termina-
tion of the attack, the 35th Regiment is ordered to
move from its positions near Ipsok and advance to a
point slightly less than five miles below the Kuryong
River, from where it can guard the approach to Kunu-
ri.
The 35th Regiment heads towards its objective, but
en route, the unit is unaware that Yongsan-dong had
fallen during the early morning hours and when it ap-
proaches the town, it is hit with heavy enemy fire. The
35th Regiment is able to return fire and eventually
break through the trap, but much of its equipment is
abandoned in the process. The regiment, led by Colo-
nel Fisher, finally arrives at Yongbyon, where it regroups
and deploys in a spot just northeast of the 27th Regi-
ment.
In the meantime, the 27th Regiment redeploys
in positions that lie to the right of TF Wilson. In
 557
conjunction, the enemy assault of the previous night
had gained nearly five miles and in the process had
pierced the lines between the Kuryong and Taeryong
Rivers. The unexpected advance increases the danger to
the entire I Corps.
In related activity, under orders of General Walker,
General Milburn oversees the redeployment of his
entire corps. The corps initiates a move to the
Ch’ongch’on River, where it is to design a new bridge-
head that extends from the mouth of the river to the
village of Pakch’on, in conjunction with the IX Corps,
also under orders to retire to a new line. The latter
will deploy along the lower bank of the river at Pugwon
and stretch out toward the southeast to the village
of Taeul-li, which is near the boundary of the X
Corps.
During the afternoon, the ROK 1st Division sets up
as cover force by deploying its 11th and 15th Regi-
ments, while the remaining regiment, the 12th, heads
for the new line at the river. With the support of the
ROKs, the 24th Division and the 25th Division retire
to the new defensive line at the Ch’ongch’on River.
During the operation, the Chinese 66th Army repeat-
edly attempts to eliminate the cover force, but the
South Korean regiments repel the enemy attacks.
The 24th Division under General Church stretches
out along the west side of the Taeryong River with its
21st Regiment and forms a half-moon between it and
Route 1, a strategic highway. The remainder of the di-
vision establishes a perimeter on the east side of the
Taeryong. The 25th Division under General Kean dis-
engages and retires about two miles to positions near the
Kuryong River (corps’ right). In addition, Task Force
Wilson is disbanded. Although the 24th Division’s re-
tirement had been simple, the 25th Division had been
heavily engaged with elements of the Chinese 39th
Army, making the operation much more complicated.
Nonetheless, General Kean by the end of the day has his
three regiments in place, following the two-mile south-
ward march to the Kuryong River.
The 24th and 27th Regiments line up between the
east bank of the Kuryong to the vicinity of the west
bank of the Ch’ongch’on, near the village of Puwon.
Consequently, the 25th forms a blocking position along
the highway that leads from Yongbyon in the north to
the Ch’ongch’on River, as well as the path to Kunu-ri.
Meanwhile, the two South Korean regiments that
had covered the retreat are still in great jeopardy. Gen-
eral Paik orders the 11th and 15th Regiments to re-
main in place throughout the night rather than risk
unnecessary casualties. Subsequent to dawn on the
29th, they are to join the main force at the new lines.
In other activity, as the day progresses, more modi-
fications occur as General Walker becomes concerned
that the Chinese, who are making large gains in the
ROK II Corps area, might well cut off the rear of
Eighth Army. He orders General Church to dispatch the
greater part of his 24th Division to the IX Corps for de-
ployment at Sunch’on. With only one regiment of the
24th scheduled to remain in I Corps area, Walker
November 28, 1950
directs the British 29th Brigade to move up to Anju to
bolster the I Corps.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
1st Cavalry Division under General Gay, like the other
units in Eighth Army, receives new orders. Rather than
retire to the newly drawn defensive line, the 1st Cav-
alry is directed to drive up the Sunchon Road to bol-
ster the ROK 6th Division, posted near Pukch’ang-ni.
General Gay, however, does not immediately initiate
the advance. Instead, he awaits the arrival of the 5th
Cavalry Regiment, which is en route from Kaech’on.
Meanwhile, the 7th Cavalry holds in place at a point
near Pukch’ang-ni, less than ten miles from the South
Korean 6th Division. The 8th Cavalry remains at
Sinch’ang-ni, leaving its objective, the primary lateral
road between Songch’on and Pyongyang, open for the
Chinese advance. The delay adds to the dilemma of
Eighth Army. The Chinese launch large-scale attacks
towards midnight (28th-29th).
In the meantime, the 5th Cavalry initiates its ad-
vance to division positions during the morning hours,
but enemy resistance occurs soon after it departs the
vicinity of Kaech’on. The vanguard, composed of the
intelligence and reconnaissance platoon, is intercepted
by Chinese who hold dominant positions in the heights
near Samso-ri. The ambush succeeds in devastating the
platoon, leaving only four troops, including the pla-
toon sergeant, as survivors. Reinforcements trailing the
advance unit arrive, but the enemy force, originally at
about 100 troops, is now heavily increased. Heavy
fighting continues as the 2nd Battalion bolts to both
sides of the highway and into the respective heights to
terminate the blockade, but Chinese fire prevents any
progress.
The regiment is compelled to regroup and modify the
route to evade the trap. Nevertheless, the 5th Cavalry,
due to its circuitous route, does not arrive at Sunch’on
until late in the night. Consequently, the ROK 6th Di-
vision receives no reinforcements and at least four
enemy regiments are encroaching its positions. Gen-
eral Gay anticipates completing the movement on the
following day.
In the 2nd Division zone, General Keiser oversees the
redeployment of the division at Kujang-dong. The line
stretches from a point about three miles west of the
Ch’ongch’on River to a point that lies about four miles
southeast of the river. Two regiments, the 23rd and
38th, hold on the left and right, respectively, with the
9th Regiment being held in reserve at two locations,
Yongdam-ni below Kujang-dong and at Pugwon. The
S.K. 3rd Regiment at this time is with the 38th U.S.
Regiment.
The ongoing Chinese offensive causes more adjust-
ments within Eighth Army. The IX Corps receives new
orders this morning. The 2nd Division is to raise as
much resistance as possible while the division pulls back
to the new line, drawn for the division as the ground be-
tween Pugwan and Wawon, the latter being where the
Turkish Brigade under General Tahsin Yasici is posted.
The high number of vehicles causes the road to become
November 28, 1950
too congested, slowing everything down until a quag-
mire develops. The attempt to simultaneously move
the 9th, 23rd, and 38th Infantry Regiments as well as
the ROK 3rd Regiment and armor paralyzes the
Ch’ongch’on Road, particularly between Kujang-dong
and Kunu-ri.
While the roads remain jammed, the Chinese con-
tinue their attacks. Units emerge from the east and the
north against the 38th Regiment. Despite the confusion,
Colonel Peploe modifies his plans and moves his 38th
Regiment and the ROK 3rd Regiment westward to-
ward Kujang-dong. And from there, Peploe pivots
southward to the vicinity of Kunu-ri. He halts the
movement at about 2000 to await daylight on the fol-
lowing day. In the meantime, the 23rd Regiment under
Colonel Freeman moves in separate units with one bat-
talion trailing Peploe’s 38th Regiment and another fol-
lowing the 9th Regiment. The remaining battalion
(1st), accompanied by the 72nd Tank Battalion, main-
tains the Division rear to cover the main body. The
tanks are repeatedly forced to fight off Chinese units on
the heels of the Division.
The 9th Regiment, led by Colonel Sloane, again
fords the Ch’ongch’on River to the west side and drives
southward to Pugwon, where it arrives about one hour
before midnight. Colonel Sloane spreads out his regi-
ment. He places the 1st Battalion along the west side of
the river on the right and rear of the 24th Regiment,
25th Division. He directs his 2nd Battalion (9th Reg-
iment) to establish positions above the town along the
valley road. The 3rd Battalion takes positions in the
heights just south of the village. Slightly farther to the
rear, about two miles south of the village, the 1st and
2nd Battalions, 23rd Regiment, deploy and await or-
ders to relieve the 9th Regiment.
Also, the 27th British Brigade, posted in the vicin-
ity of Kunu-ri, is to redeploy about five miles south of
Sunchon at Chasan, from where it will be poised to
bolster either the 1st Cavalry Division or the 2nd Di-
vision, whichever becomes more threatened. General
Keiser anticipates completing his redeployment at the
crack of dawn, but the Chinese choose not to let the
night pass quietly.
At about midnight, the bugles blare near the 2nd
Battalion, 9th Regiment’s positions below Pugwon,
only a short while after it had arrived. Unfortunately for
the 2nd Division defenders, the new lines are not yet
set up and there is much confusion between the divi-
sion and the Turkish Brigade assigned to it. While the
2nd Battalion comes under attack, the Turks at the op-
posite end of the line sustain an assault at about the
same time. The Turks had, in the meantime, been
under assault at Wawon by the Chinese 38th Army.
At about dusk, the Turks are out of radio contact
with corps. They disengage and pull back several miles
to regroup at Sinnim-ni, arriving there a few strokes
before midnight. The Turkish Brigade had been totally
unaware of its recent attachment to the 2nd Division,
and although earlier it had communications with corps,
at this time there is no contact with either the 2nd Di-
558
vision or corps. Nonetheless, the mix-up is costly. The
brigade was ordered to be at Wawon and it does not
become aware of its attachment to the 2nd Division
until the latter part of this night.
With the Turkish Brigade absent at Wawon and the
non-arrival of the 1st Cavalry Division in the ROK 6th
Division zone, the Eighth Army situation becomes pre-
carious, particularly when the Chinese also seize Pug-
won in the valley. And the Turkish Brigade, which is re-
grouping at Sinnim-ni, again comes under attack in
the early morning hours of the following day.
The Chinese mount a huge force along the road be-
tween Kunu-ri and Sunchon, which the 2nd Division
uses as its supply road. Some of these enemy troops are
dispatched to establish roadblocks in the I Corps sec-
tor, along a road that runs southeast from Anju to Sun-
chon. These enemy units, on the following day, attempt
to ambush elements of the 24th Division as its units
move toward Sunchon.
In the 25th Division sector, General Kean continues
to rework his lines at Ipsok. In conjunction, the 25th
Division is transferred to the I Corps. Also, the 1st Cav-
alry Division, commanded by General Gay, is trans-
ferred from I Corps to IX Corps.
In Air Force activity, U.S. troops encircled in the
vicinity of the Changjin Reservoir by Chinese begin to
receive supplies from planes of Combat Cargo Com-
mand. The air-drop resupply missions continue for two
weeks.
In related activity, the 35th Fighter Interceptor
Group based at Yonpo, North Korea, begin to fly close-
air support sorties to bolster the beleaguered ground
troops that are surrounded. B-26 light bombers, for
the first time, with the added element of more accurate
radar, are able to bomb within 1,000 yards of he front
lines.
In other activity, a solitary small plane penetrates
and bombs the airfield at Pyongyang. The raid inflicts
damage on eleven P-51 Mustangs parked on the
ground.
During the day’s fighting, pilot Lieutenant William
P. Dougherty (35th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th
Fighter Bomber Group) strafes the airfield at Py-
ongyang and destroys a parked enemy fighter of un-
determined make.
In Naval activity, due the enormous enemy pressure,
all available aircraft are requested for Eighth Army and
X Corps. TF-77, which has been concentrating its car-
rier planes on the Yalu River bridges, switch the prior-
ity to the ground forces to provide close-air support.
— In Japan: General MacArthur, following a con-
ference with his staff and the field commanders in
Korea, notifies the Joint Chiefs of Staff in Washington,
D.C., that his command in Korea is preparing to
cancel the offensive and take a defensive position. The
Joint Chiefs concur; however, there is disagreement
between them and MacArthur about the type of
defensive lines to be established. MacArthur clings to
the strategy of the ongoing separation of Eighth Army
and X Corps under Generals Walker and Almond
 559 November 28, 1950

Signs of a Korean winter at sea. A Navy crewman aboard the icy deck of the USS Philippine Sea turns
the snow-covered propeller of an F4U Corsair fighter prior to its takeoff.
Top: An M41 (155-mm howitzer) in action near Pukch’on on the east coast of Korea. Bottom: A U.S.
infantry contingent advances to rescue a convoy stalled under heavy enemy fire during U.N. withdrawal.
 561
respectively. However, the Joint Chiefs are convinced
that a line is required between Pyongyang and Wonsan,
the latter on the east coast of Korea in the X Corps area.
The major concern of Washington is that the gap
between the forces affords the Chinese an opportunity
to drive a wedge between the two and outflank either
or both. MacArthur contends that the purported line
is neither supportable nor tenable, due in part to the
lack of roads in the mountains that divide the I and IX
Corps. He further contends that the available forces
under him are insufficient to retain Pyongyang.
Nonetheless, he receives no encouraging words from
the Joint Chiefs regarding reinforcements.
November 29 In the X Corps area, 1st Marine
Division sector, 1st Marines zone, the enemy had at-
tacked at about 2230 on the 28th and struck the cen-
ter of the line defended by Companies H and I. The
Chinese had surrounded the command post; they stole
clothing but chose not to penetrate further against the
outnumbered Marines. They had gained East Hill soon
after an ROK platoon gave way. Reinforcements from
X Corps, composed of engineers and signalmen, arrive
to bolster How Company. How Company and Item
Company are able to regain the territory and the divi-
sional command post remains intact. The defenders at
East Hill were not bolstered with any infantry troops.
The army engineers there lose 10 killed and 25
wounded. Of the ninety ROKs, some are killed and
wounded, but most are missing.
By 0400 on this day, the Marines prevail and the
Chinese attack fails to gain its objectives. The Marines
initiate plans to counterattack at 0440 to restore the
line and liquidate the resistance on East Hill. The
Marines move out with artillery support at 0530 and
within about one hour, the line is restored. In the
meantime, the attack to regain East Hill is suspended
until the early morning fog clears. By about 0930, Ma-
rine planes (VMF-312) arrive to deliver napalm on the
enemy-held hill. The Marines, however, have no ar-
tillery or mortar support as they climb the slippery
slopes against enemy fire and grenades. The tossed
grenades pick up speed as they roll down the icy slopes.
The Chinese still hold the hill at noon, but by that time
reinforcements arrive. Nevertheless, the exhaustive trek
to the hill by Able Company (1st Platoon), led by Lieu-
tenant Nicholas A. Canzona, does not attack. Orders
arrive to cancel it.
Headquarters had planned an attack from a point
other than the southwestern slope, which is held by
troops under Major Reginald R. Myers and his impro-
vised unit. Myers, however, is later credited with pre-
venting the Chinese from encircling Hagaru-ri. Myers
becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his hero-
ism under fire.
Canzona, leading approximately twenty men, after-
wards moves up the opposite slope, but his contingent,
too, is pinned down and subjected to the same resist-
ance as that sustained by Myers. As the night settles
around the hill, the Chinese still control the summit.
November 29, 1950
In addition, George Company, 1st Marines, and British
Commandos had not been able to break through from
Koto-ri. The Chinese hold the heights outside Koto-
ri and despite dogged fighting, dusk arrives and the ad-
vance stalls less than five miles outside Koto-ri. One
hill had been seized, soon after the column departed
and the second objective, Hill 1236, is seized after a
heavy skirmish by the British and Marines.
At the third objective, Hill 1182, Captain Carl Sit-
ter (George Company) is ordered by Colonel Drysdale
to disengage after the attackers sustain unending heavy
fire. After dark, an enemy grenade is tossed into a truck
that holds elements of Company G. PFC William B.
Baugh shouts a warning to the others in the vehicle,
then to save lives, he blankets the grenade with his body
to absorb the full impact of the blast. PFC Baugh is
awarded the Medal of Honor for his selfless sacrifice
above and beyond the call of duty.
The situation at Hagaru remains desperate and the
column is ordered to continue the drive. Air cover van-
ishes at dusk, but the column advances. Later, it is am-
bushed. The Chinese destroy a truck in the middle of
the convoy and block the road. Consequently, vehicles
and personnel (including a reserve unit, Company B,
31st U.S. Infantry Regiment) in the rear of the de-
stroyed truck become isolated.
Tanks rush from Koto-ri, but the hills cleaned out
earlier are again held by Chinese, who impede the
tanks’ progress at Hill 1182 and Hill 1236. In the
meantime, the column splinters into several groups,
which also decreases the ability of the smaller groups to
forestall overwhelming Chinese forces. Some of the
troops at the rear are able to make it back to Koto-ri be-
fore midnight and some in the middle of the column
get back by about 0230 on the following morning.
Those still defending the column, under Major John
N. McLaughlin, USMC, include only about forty op-
erable troops (British, Army and Marines) who begin
to run out of ammunition. During the confrontation
with the Chinese, more of the troops are able to es-
cape. About one hundred infantry and one tank com-
pany punches through to Hagaru. The battle is known
as the Fight in Hell Fire Valley.
At dusk, the lead elements of the column under
Drysdale are unaware that the column had been cut
off. Drysdale’s British troops and the Americans reach
the perimeter at Hagaru at about 1900, after fighting
through more heavy enemy fire about 2,200 yards from
Hagaru. British Lt. Colonel Douglas Drysdale had been
wounded during the advance. Command passes to
Captain Carl L. Sitter, Company G. The troops re-
main in reserve for the night, but on the following day,
George Company is ordered to attack East Hill, which
still jeopardizes Hagaru.
In conjunction, one contingent of twenty-two
British Marines becomes isolated, but the fate of the
men remains unknown until the breakout from Ha-
garu. On 7 December, the British Marines will be res-
cued. The precise casualties remain unknown; how-
ever, the estimated casualties are: 41st British
November 29, 1950
Commando, 18 killed or MIA and 43 wounded;
George Company, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, 8 killed
or MIA and 40 wounded; Company B, 31st U.S. In-
fantry, 100 killed or MIA; Divisional Headquarters
Battalion, USMC, 25 killed or MIA and 25 wounded;
1st Signal Battalion, 4 killed or MIA and 2 wounded;
7th Motor Transport Battalion, 2 killed or MIA and 3
wounded; elements of Company B and Company D,
USMC, 12 and 8 wounded respectively; and elements
of Antitank Company, RCT-5, USMC, 1 wounded.
The Allied force also loses 75 vehicles. Captain Carl
Sitter is awarded the Medal of Honor for his heroism,
leadership and courage during the breakout. Captain
Sitter, while carrying out his duties, also moved from
foxhole to foxhole weeding out infiltrators. During the
fighting, Sitter was wounded in the face, arms and
chest, yet refused evacuation.
In the 7th Marines sector, Company F, 2nd Battal-
ion, on Fox Hill comes under an enemy mortar attack
at about 0215. Shortly thereafter, a force of less than
fifty Chinese, having discovered what they believe to be
a weak spot in the line, initiate a charge and manage to
push the Marines back a short distance, but the Marines
still hold firmly at that point. Rather than risk unnec-
essary casualties in the dark, they suspend further ac-
tion, but once the sun rises, they bolt forward and drive
the enemy from the hill. Once the regained positions
are secured, the Marines, still entrapped, prepare for
another long day while awaiting relief. Various colored
parachutes gathered from the air-drops of the previous
day are stretched out to provide the planes with a con-
spicuous spot for supplies to be delivered.
As expected, about mid-morning, supplies including
ammunition are dropped and soon after a helicopter
from VMO-6 lands and delivers fresh batteries for the
radios. Chinese fire damages the helicopter, but its
pilot, Lieutenant Floyd Englehardt, departs safely. No
relief force is able to reach the beleaguered unit, but
during the afternoon, more planes arrive to drop fresh
ammunition. Despite the marker chutes, the deliveries
sometimes miss the target and force the Marines to
brave enemy fire to retrieve the desperately needed mor-
tar shells. A patrol moves out to gather the stray ammo,
but effective fire prevents it from making it back to the
lines. Consequently, the ammunition and the patrol are
stranded about 500 yards from the main body. Lieuten-
ant Elmer Peterson, the leader of the detachment, sends
the men back individually.
In the meantime, a relief force composed of Compa-
nies A (1st Battalion, 5th Marines), Company B (1st
Battalion, 7th Marines) and G Company (3rd Battalion,
7th Marines), bolstered by mortars and a recoilless rifle
detachment, set out to rescue the besieged unit, but
shortly after it moves out at 0800, it encounters heavy
resistance. Aircraft arrive to support the advance. The
planes remain overhead, but after gaining about 4,500
yards, the ground troops are notified by the pilots fly-
ing cover that the Chinese hold strong positions on ei-
ther side of the MSR and in the high ground. Head-
quarters at Yudam-ni is also notified of the situation.
562
The new crisis compels Colonel Litzenberg to mod-
ify his orders. Rather than rescue Fox Company and
continue forward to open the route to Hagaru, Major
Warren Morris is directed to abort the plan to move to
Hagaru and confine his actions to extricating Fox Com-
pany. Nevertheless, the Chinese strength is far supe-
rior to the composite battalion under Morris. By about
1315, the orders are again modified and the rescue force
is ordered to return to Yudma-ni due to the possibility
of it, too, being surrounded. After dark, Captain Bar-
ber, Fox Company’s commanding officer, dispatches
another contingent and it succeeds in retrieving the
supplies. All remains relatively quiet until the early
morning hours of the following day.
In the 7th Infantry Division sector, Lieutenant Colo-
nel Don C. Faith (TF Faith), deployed north of
Sinhung-ni with his 1st Battalion, 32nd Infantry, above
the perimeter of the 3rd Battalion, 31st Infantry Reg-
iment, and the 1st Battalion, 57th Field Artillery Bat-
talion, drive through enemy resistance to reach
Sinhung-ni. During intense fighting on the night of
the 27th-28th, the Chinese managed to separate the
units and prevent a link-up. On the 28th, Marine close-
air support maintains missions to keep the positions
from being overrun. Chinese attacks are beaten back
and afterwards, Colonel Faith drives southward to link
with the forces at Sinhung-ni.
Nevertheless, the combined force remains greatly
outnumbered and under threat of annihilation. Rein-
forcements (one company) from the 31st Infantry Reg-
iment are dispatched (29th) to rescue the beleaguered
force, but the Chinese hold greatly superior numbers.
The relief force sustains heavy casualties and it is forced
back. In addition, two of the supporting tanks are de-
stroyed. Lieutenant Colonel Faith assumed command
after the senior ranking officer was killed. Faith holds
in place and receives supplies from air deliveries to fore-
stall disaster. Later, on 1 December, the force attempts
to drive through the resistance to reach Marine lines at
Hagaru.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, 24th Division
zone, General Church, acting on orders from Eighth
Army, directs the division to advance from its lines on
both sides of the Taeryong River to new positions closer
to Sunchon. The movement begins at about noon and
continues into the latter part of the night. The 19th
Regiment leads the advance from Pakch’on, while the
21st Regiment is held up to await South Korean rein-
forcements to take over its positions on the I Corps’
left. The 21st, under Colonel Richard W. Stephens,
departs for the objective during the latter part of the
afternoon. By the time the 19th Regimental Combat
Team advances less than five miles beyond Anjou on a
highway that leans southeast towards Sunchon, it is in-
formed that the Chinese have erected at least two road-
blocks. Colonel Moore directs part of his force to elim-
inate the blockages, while he takes the remainder on a
circuitous route via Route 1 to the village.
Meanwhile, the contingent driving down the lateral
road from Anju hits the first ambush at about 1400 and
 563
effortlessly drives the Chinese from their positions. Sev-
eral additional miles down the road, more Chinese are
encountered and they hold the heights near a reservoir.
The regimental combat team utilizes its tanks and mor-
tars while it requests air strikes. The combination of
fire power quickly clears the heights of the enemy and
permits easy passage towards Sunchon. Colonel Moore’s
force arrives slightly after dusk and the task force that
had been directed to clear the blockage arrives prior to
midnight. The 21st Regimental Combat Team under
Colonel Stephens arrives afterwards. Both regiments
are in place and prepared for action by the following
morning.
In the 25th Division sector, around midnight (28th-
29th), elements of the Chinese 40th Army move down
the west side of the Ch’ongch’on River and strike the
24th Regiment, 25th Division. Subsequent to the as-
sault, which succeeds in jolting and denting the regi-
ment’s right flank, the Chinese ford the river and join
the Chinese forces that had captured Pugwon in the IX
Corps sector. I Corps maintains its bridgehead, but
later during the afternoon, orders arrive to retire to a
new line, similarly to those orders that arrive at IX
Corps. General Milburn is directed by General Walker
to await dusk and then retire to a new line, but follow-
ing this, the corps is to again move on the following
morning to a line behind the Ch’ongch’on River.
The U.S. 25th Division under General Kean and the
ROK 1st Division complete the initial phase of the op-
eration prior to midnight (29th-30th). While the Chi-
nese attack in the IX Corps sector, some elements move
through a gap created when the 3rd Battalion, 23rd
Regiment (IX Corps), retire from their positions on the
Ch’ongch’on Road to rejoin the main body of the reg-
iment. This enemy contingent drives into Kunu-ri and
at about midnight, assaults the positions of the 3rd Bat-
talion, 24th Regiment. It also prepares to move out to
positions southwest of the village, where it is to estab-
lish a perimeter close to the 23rd Regiment (2nd Di-
vision, IX Corps) below the Kaech’on River.
The strength of the unexpected attack stuns the bat-
talion, but it rallies and heavy fighting ensues. The bat-
talion command post loses communications with reg-
imental headquarters, but the battalion headquarters’
troops are able to fight their way back to Colonel Cor-
ley’s headquarters. Soon after he arranges for the Air
Force to provide support, however, the three trapped
companies are unable to break through the enemy line,
which has come in from the east to positions in their
rear.
In the IX Corps area, 1st Cavalry Division sector, the
7th Cavalry Regiment’s positions along the Sunchon
Road about seven miles below Walpo-ri become active
early in the morning, due to retreating South Korean
troops of the ROK 6th Division, which had been scat-
tered by a Chinese attack just prior to dawn against its
lines near Pukch’ang-ni. The 1st Cavalry Division had
been expected to reinforce the 6th ROK Division on the
previous day, but General Gay had delayed the advance.
Nonetheless, as the South Korean troops and hordes of
November 29, 1950
Korean civilians race to the perimeter, it becomes ap-
parent that the Chinese will soon be banging on the
door.
The unending lines of civilians moving south are
complicating the task of the 7th Cavalry in several ways,
including the presence of enemy troops disguised as
civilians within the crowds.
The 7th Cavalry troops bring some semblance of
order by about 0630; however, at about the same time,
the Chinese 125th Division that holds the heights
above the cavalry positions commences firing. Fire is
quickly returned by the cavalry. The contest ensues for
about two hours and the added weight of artillery fire
finally terminates the enemy enfilade. During the tena-
cious exchange, South Korean units continue to speed
toward the friendly lines. One of these contingents gets
severely rattled when its lead vehicle stalls and clogs the
highway. Rather than clearing the path by ditching the
truck, the South Koreans abandon their vehicles and
weapons and sprint to the 7th Cavalry perimeter.
Shortly thereafter, a seven-man contingent of the 1st
Battalion moves out and retrieves sixteen vehicles and
eight howitzers. Also, while the civilians flood the lines,
some of the pretenders toss grenades and casualties
occur. Seven troopers are wounded and one officer is
killed.
After the fight ends, orders arrive from General Gay
that direct 7th Cavalry to withdraw to a new line at
Sinch’ang-ni, three miles to the rear. The cavalry along
with the 6th ROK Division, without interference from
the enemy, moves out during the afternoon. Once at the
destination, the South Koreans deploy in the heights
west of the village and the 7th Cavalry establishes po-
sitions above the village along the Sunchon Road along
Eighth Army’s right.
Following the deployment, the zone remains free of
enemy attack until the latter part of the night, when
the Chinese initiate an assault. At about 2230, the cav-
alry comes under heavy fire, including machine guns
and mortars. The enemy infantry launches its attack
about one-half hour later and it is intercepted by
equally ferocious fire from the two advance battalions.
The attack is repulsed, but about 150 Chinese penetrate
a gap in the line and advance directly into the village of
Sinch’ang-ni. The two forward battalions are each com-
pelled to fend off attacks against their respective com-
mand posts.
Two tanks, accompanied by riflemen acquired from
the reserve battalion, advance at about 0200 (30th) to
eliminate the infiltrators. In less than one hour, the
enemy retires. Prior to pulling back, the Chinese sus-
tain a loss of 350 killed and 10 captured; however, the
number of wounded is unknown. The 7th Cavalry sus-
tains 38 killed, 107 wounded and 11 missing. It is re-
ported, but not for certain, that the Chinese 37th Reg-
iment, 125th Division, had initiated the attack.
In the 5th Cavalry zone, the 5th Cavalry deploys
about two miles north of Sunchon along the Taedong
River, which places the regiment to the left of the ROK
6th Division. All the while, the 8th Cavalry continues
November 29, 1950
its trek from Sinch’ang-ni to Songch’on. The combined
forces of the 1st Cavalry Division and the 6th ROK
Division extend along what is known as the Sunchon–
Sinch’ang-ni–Songch’on Line.
In the 2nd Division sector, in the Ch’ongch’on Valley
near Kunu-ri, the tranquility of the night gets shattered
at about midnight (28th-29th). The Chinese 40th Army,
which has elements moving down both sides of the
Ch’ongch’on River, initiates a full-scale assault that
strikes units of the I Corps on the west side of the river,
while elements operating on the east side hammer the
2nd Battalion, 9th Regiment (2nd Division). The 2nd
Battalion raises resistance, but it is unable to repulse the
attack. The Chinese push the battalion back and seize
Pugwon. After dawn, the contingents that engaged the
25th Division (I Corps) on the opposite bank arrive at
Pugwon. In conjunction, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions,
9th Regiment, retire to a line to the rear of the 23rd Reg-
iment, which remains posted along the valley road below
Pugwon. Meanwhile, the 1st Battalion, 9th Regiment,
which is deployed with the 25th Division on the west
side of the river, continues to support its 24th Regiment
before finally returning to the main body toward the lat-
ter part of the night.
In other activity, during the early morning hours,
the 2nd Division’s command post below Kunu-ri is in-
formed by some Turkish troops with a convoy trans-
porting supplies to the Turkish Brigade that an enemy
blocking force had been posted along the road north
of Sunchon. Steps will be taken in an effort to elimi-
nate the roadblock, but in the meantime, the relocation
operation begins. A patrol of military police is dis-
patched to confirm the report and it proves accurate;
however, one man is killed and several are wounded
when the contingent encounters the roadblock in a pass
in the vicinity of the village of Yongwon, less than five
miles from the command post.
In the meantime, unknown to General Keiser, a pla-
toon of American tanks, attached to the British 27th
Brigade, encounters the blockage while it moves south
on the highway, but it breaks through due to the
enemy’s inability to destroy the armor. Subsequently, a
reconnaissance company supported by artillery attempts
to eliminate the problem before noon, but the Chinese
refuse to be dislodged. The 2nd Division dispatches
yet another unit, Company C, 38th Regiment, sup-
ported by a contingent of tanks to augment the recon-
naissance force already there, but the enemy force had
been strengthened and still, the blockage remains intact.
By dusk, the operation is aborted and the contin-
gents are ordered to return to the division’s headquar-
ters. In the meantime, the corps commander, General
Coulter, once aware of the roadblock, orders the British
Middlesex Battalion (reserve) to divert from its mis-
sion to clear some Chinese from Samso-ri and instead,
advance towards the blocked pass. By dusk, the British
are slightly more than five miles from the target. Plans
are made for a joint attack on the following morning,
with the Americans striking from the north and the
British attacking from the south.
564
In the Turkish Brigade zone at Sinnim-ni, the right
flank of the 2nd Division, an attack is launched by con-
tingents of the Chinese 38th Army against the advance
units of the brigade shortly after midnight. Communi-
cations, which had been poor on the previous day, show
no improvement, and the lack of contact with brigade
headquarters at Kaech’on adds to the dilemma of the
brigade. Nonetheless, the three defending infantry bat-
talions continue to battle the enemy until dawn.
Meanwhile, word gets back to headquarters only
when the artillery battalion abandons its positions and
retires to Kaech’on. General Yasici is told that the in-
fantry units are encircled, but due to the darkness, he
postpones sending reinforcements until first light.
Slightly after dawn (29th), a relief force accompanied
by one platoon of tanks (72nd Tank Battalion) speeds
to the rescue. Without any interference from the Chi-
nese, the infantry and the relief force return to head-
quarters.
In related activity, due to the fluid activities within
the 2nd Division sector and the rising threat of the
Chinese, General Keiser by about noon is again chang-
ing plans for his defensive line to meet the threat, which
is expected to include a massive enemy assault along
the entire Eighth Army line. Just off the northeast tip
of Kaech’on, the right flank of the 2nd Division, the
38th Regiment establishes positions that extend along
the Tokch’on–Kunu-ri Road toward a string of hills
that run directly below Piho-san Ridge on the left. The
S.K. 3rd Regiment deploys on the left in the heights
while the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 38rd Regiment, ex-
tend over to Kaech’on, which is held by the Turkish
Brigade. And the 1st Battalion remains in place at a
point about one mile east of Kunu-ri, where it had de-
ployed the previous night.
West of the U.S. 38th Regiment’s positions, Gen-
eral Keiser directs the 23rd Regiment to set up along the
Ch’ongch’on Road between Kunu-ri and Pugwon. The
2nd Battalion takes the point position about two miles
below Pugwon, while the 3rd Battalion takes up posi-
tions slightly north of Kunu-ri and the 1st Battalion
redeploys slightly east of the 3rd Battalion, to protect
yet another route to Kunu-ri.
In the meantime, the 9th Regiment continues to hold
at its positions below Pugwon to the rear of the 23rd
Regiment. The new 2nd Division line heavily depends
on the Turkish Brigade at Kaech’on. Instructions are de-
livered to its commanding general to deploy his force in
two places, the high ground at the southeast end of town
near the 38th Regiment and within the terrain below
the Kaech’on River from where the force can dominate
a valley that contains a road from Sunchon. The Turks,
however, prove unwilling to cover the terrain below the
river and only about two companies move to the hill on
the edges of the town. The main body of the brigade re-
mains in the village, which causes a conspicuous weak-
ening of the divisional right flank when only two battal-
ions of the 23rd Regiment are posted below the river in
position to attempt to block the passageway of the Chi-
nese forces above the Kaech’on River.
 565
While General Keiser prepares to design his new line
and prior to receiving a new Eighth Army order to
again withdraw, his perimeter comes under attack dur-
ing the afternoon by elements of the Chinese 38th and
40th Armies. The Chinese skirt past the Turks at
Kaech’on and a contingent of the 38th Army plows into
the 3rd Battalion, 38th Infantry’s right flank, shatter-
ing it from the sheer strength of the attack. Urgent re-
quests for the Turks to reinforce are dispatched, but
still they fail to respond and remain within the village.
Shortly thereafter, the Turks are greeted with a heavy
artillery barrage that forces reaction. In conjunction
with the incoming shells, Chinese troops emerge un-
scathed from a valley that lies southwest of the village.
U.S. tanks in support of the Turks commence firing
from their positions on the opposing bank of the
Kaech’on River, but the Chinese relentlessly continue
to advance toward some high ground about one mile be-
hind and northwest of the village. Rather than initiate
a counterattack, the Turks flee westward through a pass.
The Turks’ abandonment of their positions further
jeopardizes the 2nd and 3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment,
the sole defenders along the road. In the meantime, the
Chinese reach the hills northwest of the village and as-
cend to positions from which their fire can dominate the
road leading toward Kunu-ri. All the while, the 2nd
and 3rd Battalions, 38th Infantry, are heavily engaged
with the advancing Chinese. Reinforcements composed
of elements of the 1st Battalion mount trucks and speed
eastward toward the embattled troops outside of
Kaech’on; however, the convoy is brought to an abrupt
halt when it encounters the Turkish Brigade racing
westward on the same highway. The confusion brings
all traffic to a halt. The retreating Turks prevent any
further movement by the relief force. Consequently,
the 1st Battalion, 38th Regiment, is directed by Colo-
nel Peploe to abort the mission and withdraw to a po-
sition alongside the highway at a point about one mile
east of Kunu-ri. Shortly afterward, he orders the 2nd
and 3rd Battalions to disengage and make their way
back to positions in the rear of the 1st Battalion.
While the 38th Regiment is attempting to redeploy,
the Chinese are also striking the 3rd South Korean Reg-
iment, which is posted in the hills slightly south of
Piho-san Ridge. The Koreans withdraw to positions
just behind the 3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment, and es-
tablish positions about one mile northeast of Kunu-ri,
with its right flank linked close to the left flank of Pe-
ploe’s 1st Battalion. The new line is designed to bolster
the covering fire for troops retiring from the east; still
the Chinese pressure continues to mount. Heavy fire
rings down from the heights into the pass, essentially
trapping Americans and Turks there. Only a few tanks
and other vehicles transporting wounded are able to
break out.
As the situation worsens, air power is called upon, but
the Fifth Air Force is less than efficient with close-air
support after dusk. Nevertheless, the Chinese are the re-
cipients of a B-26 air strike and it does the trick with
sufficient accuracy to terminate the Chinese fire.
November 29, 1950
Shortly after the cessation of the enemy fire and still in
complete darkness, the 38th Regiment units in the pass
and the Turks move out heading west towards Kunu-
ri. The 38th Regiment is able to regroup at the new
positions by about midnight, but the Turkish Brigade
remains in a shambles with many of its officers unac-
counted for and its units scattered in disorganized
groups. Some troops still are in the pass and others are
haphazardly located all along the road from the pass to
Kunu-ri and beyond, as far as the 2nd Division head-
quarters more than five miles beyond Kunu-ri.
During the struggle in the pass, Chinese gains have
continued to force Eighth Army to modify its plans
and the 2nd Division is in the process of yet another
withdrawal to positions farther beyond Kunu-ri, but
the confusion in the pass hinders the movement. The
23rd Regiment under Colonel Freeman, presently de-
ployed north of Kaech’on, pulls back to a line below
the town and south of the Kaech’on River, under cover
fire of the 38th Regiment and the ROK 3rd Regiment.
Freeman also leaves his 3rd Battalion along the
Ch’ongch’on valley road near Kunu-ri to ensure safe
passage of the regiment. The retirement places Free-
man’s regiment, except for a contingent of riflemen and
some supporting tanks, between the Kaech’on and the
Ch’ongch’on Rivers. The 38th Regiment and the ROKs
then pull back under cover of the riflemen of the 23rd
Regiment and one platoon of tanks.
The Chinese interfere with the execution of the re-
tirement; they strike the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment,
along the road, but the battalion disengages before mid-
night. It speeds toward the new perimeter, but one
company and some tanks pause near the northern tip
of Kunu-ri to cover the rear.
Later, at about midnight, the Chinese encroach the
tanks (72nd Tank Battalion) and their supporting
Company L. The rear guard raises tenacious resistance
and repeatedly turns back the assaults. After the fourth
attack is repelled, the tanks and the riflemen head for
the main body’s positions south of the river. Once the
3rd Battalion abandons its positions on the
Ch’ongch’on Road, a hole develops that leads directly
to what becomes, at this time, an undefended left flank
of the 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment (25th Division, I
Corps).
Meanwhile, the 3rd ROK Regiment’s 1st Battalion
had also been struck with great force as it attempted to
reach the lines of the 2nd Division. Here, too, the
South Koreans battle with tenacity until they are able
to disengage at about 0400 (30th). New orders from
Eighth Army arrive at about 0100 on the 30th. The
2nd Division is to disengage at Kunu-ri and withdraw
to the new line and redeploy at positions that extend
southeastward between the villages of Sunchon and
Songch’on. Once in place, the 2nd Division will be in
close proximity to the 1st Cavalry Division, which is to
deploy about six miles outside of Sunchon. The with-
drawal is to take place on the following day (30th).
— In Japan: At a General Headquarters briefing,
the mood is somber. The typhoon-like surge of the
November 30, 1950
Communists had ravaged the center and west portions
of the Eighth Army right wing, decimating the South
Korean II Corps as it advanced. The total collapse of the
right wing creates great peril for the left wing. An in-
stant pull back to the Ch’ongch’on River is initiated to
avoid a second catastrophe. Reports on the previous
day had announced that more than 200,000 enemy
troops are involved with the powerful offensive. Some
estimates project the amount to be nearer 300,000.
November 30 In the X Corps area, the 1st Air
Delivery Platoon, domiciled at Wonsan Airfield, has
been involved with responsibility for 141 replenish-
ment missions that consisted of 864 man-hours of
flight, and the delivery by parachute of about 377 tons
of supplies. At Hagaru, General Almond concludes that
it is not pragmatic to consolidate the forces in the vicin-
ity of the Chosin Reservoir. Almond authorizes Gen-
eral Oliver Smith to destroy all equipment that might
impede his withdrawal to Hamhung, but Smith in-
forms Almond that all equipment will be necessary in
order for the Marines to fight their way out and carry
their wounded with them. At the conference it is also
decided that Wonson is to be abandoned. The aircraft
there was relocated at Yonpo by 1 December; however,
during the transfer period, missions were maintained
to provide support for the ground troops.
In the 1st Marine Division area, the situation in
Yudam-ni remains calm; only some sporadic skirmishes
with the Chinese occur. Nonetheless, the Marines again
received little or no rest, as attacks had been antici-
pated.
In the 1st Marines sector, George Company, which
had fought its way to Hararu-ri on the previous day, is
heavily engaged at East Hill. Just before midnight, en-
gineers of Able Company plow into the positions of
George Company without pausing to give the pass-
word, “Abraham.” The Communists were right on their
tails, so they shouted the password and the response,
yelling Abraham Lincoln. The hill is defended by the
1st Platoon of Baker Company engineers and the 3rd
platoon of Able Company engineers as well as George
Company’s 2nd and 3rd platoons. Other units there
include the 1st Platoon, Able Engineers under Lieu-
tenant Canzona, a couple of tanks and elements of the
1st Service Battalion.
The enemy regiment arrives just behind the engi-
neers and a donnybrook breaks out. George Company
is overwhelmed and compelled to give ground and
abandon their positions with the Communists Chinese
giving pursuit. Toward the bottom of the hill, the ele-
ments from the 1st Service Battalion join the fight and
the Chinese there are eliminated.
Meanwhile, the Chinese who gain the evacuated po-
sitions hold the ground, but with no friendly troops in
the area, they are pounded with artillery and by tank
fire. In addition, the enemy is struck by withering ma-
chine gun and mortar fire. The Army engineers who
had been thrown into the positions as a makeshift de-
fense prove themselves to be a credible fighting force,
566
which greatly assists in holding the line and preventing
a breakthrough at the gap on the central and northwest
slopes of East Hill.
The night fighting occurs under nasty conditions
along extremely icy slopes. The British commandos
that had arrived with the Marines remain in reserve
during the initial fighting; however, following the losses
sustained by George Company, the British Commando
unit moves to secure the line and bolster the remaining
George Company able bodied troops. A counterattack
during daylight (1 December) retakes the lost ground
and within a short while, air cover arrives to ensure it
is not again threatened. George Company and the sup-
port units combined sustain about sixty casualties, in-
cluding killed and wounded.
Also, at about midnight, the Communists strike in
force against Item Company’s positions. The attackers
are shredded by the concentrated fire power. Several
Chinese advance to the well-defended foxholes, only
to be killed. Marine estimates place the enemy dead at
between 500 to 750. Item Company, commanded by
1st Lieutenant Joseph R. Fisher, sustains 2 killed and
10 wounded.
In the 7th Marines zone, Fox Company maintains its
hold on Fox Hill despite the lack of reinforcements and
continuing frigid weather. The previous night had been
calm, but at 0200, the Marines are greeted by a curi-
ous sounding Chinese soldier who pretends to pass
himself off as an officer from the 11th Marines. Fox
Company hears a plea that the Marines should surren-
der to the Chinese and in return they would be given
clothes and fair treatment. The Marines, unable to see
the benevolent messenger, greet him with illumination
shells. Once the sky brightens, the Marines notice that
the impostor is trailed by a large force of Chinese troops
approaching from the south.
The Marines, having refused surrender and the new
clothes, greet the attackers with hot steel as they maneu-
ver across the valley. They unleash a furious enfilade of
fire, including machine gun and mortars, which dev-
astates the enemy assault. By dawn, it is clear that the
Marines still own the hill and when the Corsairs soar
overhead just after dawn, the success is validated. About
three enemy companies are wiped out. Fox Company
sustains none killed and only one Marine wounded.
In the Eighth Army area, toward the latter part of the
previous night, General Walker had issued a general
order directing all Eighth Army units to withdraw to a
new line at a point about twenty miles south of Kunu-
ri, in an effort to prevent any chance of being encir-
cled by Chinese who are swiftly moving down from the
north and the east against Kunu-ri. The new line is ex-
pected to galvanize Eighth Army’s corps and tighten
the defenses, which are expected to hold firmly about
thirty miles above Pyongyang, near the villages of
Sukch’on, Sunchon and Songch’on.
In the I Corps area, General Milburn, in compliance
with Army orders, directs the withdrawal of corps to the
new line.
In the 25th Division sector, at Kunu-ri, Companies I,
 567
K and L, 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, remain under
heavy fire from an attack that had begun at about mid-
night of the previous day. Their confined positions in
Kunu-ri had received air support, but the blocking
enemy force had been impenetrable. The three compa-
nies maintain their positions throughout the day until
about 1630, when they succeed in breaking out of the
trap. The engagement costs the battalion 1 killed, 30
wounded and 109 missing. Following the break out, the
troops head for the regimental lines which Colonel
Corley established about five miles southwest of Kunu-
ri.
The remainder of the division had begun to retire
An ice covered Marine convoy during the fighting withdrawal from the Chosin Reservoir.
November 30, 1950
to the new line at 0700, under the protection of the
5th Regimental Combat Team (24th Division) at Anju,
near the Ch’ongch’on River. It will, later in the day, as-
semble outside Sunchon. The ROK 1st Division initi-
ates its retirement at 0600 and heads for Sukch’on. By
about 1800, the cover force receives instructions from
General Milburn to abandon its positions and head for
Yongyu; however, friendly troops are still coming
through the area and Colonel Throckmorton decides to
remain for their safety. Some of the retiring forces are
attached to the 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, which
had for awhile been cornered in Kunu-ri, but others
include tank units of the 89th Tank Battalion and
November 30, 1950
troops from the 27th Regiment, 25th Division. Con-
sequently, Throckmorton’s combat team is unable to
depart from the Ch’ongch’on River until the early
morning hours of the following day.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, during the
early morning hours, the Division command post
comes under fire by an enemy patrol that had over-
whelmed a small contingent of military police posted on
a nearby hill. The Division, however, is still preparing
to withdraw south to its newly designated positions at
Sunchon. The operation commences at 0330. The 2nd
Battalion, 9th Regiment, trailed by the mortar com-
pany, leads the way from Kunu-ri, followed by the 3rd
Battalion, 9th Regiment, and a contingent of tanks.
The columns are expecting to eliminate a roadblock in
a pass along the way, but at about 0630, the enemy ini-
tiates an attack north of the roadblock. The lead vehi-
cles pull back, while infantry contingents prepare to
clear the high ground of the enemy. The Chinese repel
an attack launched by the 2nd Battalion and one com-
pany of the 3rd Battalion. Meanwhile, the remainder of
the 3rd Battalion seeks to hit the Chinese from another
direction, but as the enemy pulls back from this attack,
yet another hill to the south commences fire and both
battalions are brought to a halt.
The Chinese, having moved to expand the road-
block, had not been anticipated by the battalion, and
the British Middlesex Battalion still remains south of the
roadblock, unaware of the snag in the plan. The British
wait in place for orders from the 2nd Division to attack
from the south. Attempts are made by the 2nd Division
to contact the British by radio, but without success.
Also, on the north side of the blockage, the ROK 3rd
Regiment is committed to the fight. In addition, urgent
messages are sent to IX Corps headquarters requesting
that it contact the British and instruct them to attack
the blockage.
As this activity continues, the ROKs move up and re-
lieve the 9th Regiment, which is stranded on the west
side of the road, to permit the regiment to regroup and
prepare to renew the attack. Tanks are then directed to
crack the blockage and race to the British positions
south of the pass. The tanks plow through intense fire
and succeed in reaching the Middlesex Battalion.
By the time the tanks arrive, the British had already
received the orders from IX Corps to attack, but the
Chinese also stymie them. Some small gains are made
by the South Korean 3rd Regiment, but it is a gain of
less than one mile, despite being supported by air strikes
and machine gun fire from accompanying tanks. The
morning passes into afternoon and while General Keiser
is still attempting to solve the problem and eliminate the
roadblock, the Chinese are closing fast on Colonel Free-
man’s 23rd Regiment near Kunu-ri. The situation in the
23rd Regiment’s positions make it clear that General
Keiser can not use the roads used by I Corps to move
south. He decides, based on his assumption that the
Chinese have only small arms fire against them, to run
the blockade.
All units and their vehicles are directed to form with
568
the 38th Regiment taking the lead, while the 23rd Reg-
imental Combat Team holds the rear. The lead tank
breaks through to the British positions by 1400; how-
ever, it comes under severe fire from the heights and is
forced to plow through two blockages, each composed
of recently captured American vehicles. The tank rum-
bles along and pushes the vehicles out of its way, but the
delay causes a domino effect throughout the convoy
that stalls the entire line.
The arrival of the lead tank causes the British to send
a premature message to Eighth Army headquarters pro-
claiming that the supply road between Kunu-ri and
Sunchon had been cleared. Back on the MSR, the Chi-
nese fire, including machine guns and mortars, rains
down on the 38th Regiment and casualties rise rapidly
while stalled and destroyed vehicles clog the roads fur-
ther. Attempts are made to clear the highway and other
troops try to rescue the wounded, but each time the
convoy gets rolling, another stoppage develops. Even-
tually, the discipline of the regiment dissolves; how-
ever, all the while, fire is returned by the Americans as
well as the South Koreans and the Turks that are at-
tached to the convoy.
Meanwhile, the 9th Regiment, under Colonel
Sloane, is moving down the road toward the pass and
by now the enemy fire is much heavier, particularly at
the pass. The 2nd Battalion and the regimental mortar
company lead the way, while the 3rd Battalion remains
farther back as protection against any Chinese coming
in from the rear. While the lead troops of the 38th Reg-
iment break through the pass at about 1500, the MSR
and the pass begin to resemble a massive junkyard with
trucks and other vehicles scattered about. The 9th Reg-
iment contingents and some ROKs and Turkish troops
hit the pass but, again, disabled vehicles create a major
problem. The other trailing contingents — including
the divisional headquarters unit, the 82nd Antiaircraft
Artillery Automatic Weapons Battalion and the 1st Bat-
talion, 9th Regiment — get squeezed between the ve-
hicles and the incessant fire from the opposite sides of
the pass. The length of the stalled units reaches back for
at least two miles.
By about 1500–1530, General Keiser reaches the
front of the blocked convoy at the pass. Shortly there-
after, air support is requested, but still, Keiser contem-
plates abandoning all vehicles in order to break out.
However, the planes that arrive succeed in their attacks,
flying dangerously low in the close quarters of the pass.
Apparently, the planes come in at such low altitudes
that they can clearly see the enemy groups in the heights
above both sides of the pass. A combination of bombs,
napalm and machine gun fire quells most of the enemy
fire.
Meanwhile, tanks roar forward and begin to shove
the debris off to the side to clear a path for the stranded
convoy, which by about this time has been shortened.
Colonel Freeman’s 23rd Regimental Combat Team,
holding up the rear, receives permission to take a dif-
ferent route around the roadblock, using instead the
Kunu-ri–Sinanju–Sukch’on Road through the I Corps
 569
sector. Freeman, subsequent to receiving permission to
use the alternate road, inquires of the 38th FAB and
the rear elements of the 9th Regiment if they want to
accompany his outfit, but they decide to remain in the
rear of the main column. Freeman’s force, including
attachments, makes it to Sunch’on just before mid-
night.
In the meantime, darkness settles in and the fighter-
bombers are forced to depart the area, but their efforts
ease the pressure enough for the remainder of this sec-
tion of the column to complete the run through the
pass. Some enemy fire continues, but it is not sufficient
to halt the column. Nonetheless, the final section of
the column, including division engineers, the trailing
units of the 9th Regiment and four artillery battalions,
have yet to enter the pass. The lead unit is the 17th
Field Artillery Battalion. It begins the trek after dark-
ness falls and encounters no enemy fire, but when
nearly out of harm’s way, misfortune strikes as the unit
attempts to cross a stream slightly west of the village
of Karhyin-dong.
Suddenly, one of the 8-inch howitzers overturns and
tumbles into a ditch. Rather than permitting it to fall
into the hands of the enemy, one soldier moves into the
ditch and disables it. Enemy troops in the village spot
a light being used by the artillerymen and soon the area
comes under mortar attack. Nevertheless, the battal-
ion moves forward to the assembly area.
The 37th Field Artillery Battalion, trailing the 17th,
also comes under fire, but it, too, makes its way
through the pass to safety. The remaining units in the
column advance toward the pass, but by now the Chi-
nese have descended from the heights to positions ex-
tremely close to the highway. As the convoy jumps off,
it comes under severe attack and the road becomes
blocked by the damaged and destroyed vehicles. Some
in the lead are able to penetrate the fire and continue,
but for the remainder of the final segment of the col-
umn, it is a dead end. As the attack continues, the
troops attempt to break out of the trap, leaving the
equipment, weapons and vehicles; however, the Chinese
had been closing in great strength, making it difficult
for the stragglers to evade the Chinese and make it to
Sunchon.
In related activity, November is an especially diffi-
cult for the 2nd Division, particularly after the 15th of
the month, when 4,940 battle casualties are sustained,
including 1,267 for the 9th Regiment, 1,075 for the
38th Regiment, 485 for the 23rd Regiment, and 1,461
for the 2nd Division Artillery. In addition, the 2nd En-
gineering Battalion sustains 561 casualties and the 72nd
Tank Battalion suffers 19 casualties. Units that sustain
lighter casualties are the 2nd MP Company, 13 casu-
alties; 2nd Reconnaissance Company, 27 casualties; Di-
visional Headquarters Company, 15 casualties; Divi-
sional Headquarters, 3 casualties; 2nd Signal Company,
10 casualties; and one other detachment suffers three ca-
sualties. Equipment losses for the division are also ex-
tremely high and include 64 pieces of artillery and more
than one hundred trucks.
December 1, 1950
— In the United States: President Harry Truman
makes another statement regarding Korea:
Recent developments in Korea confront the world
with a serious crisis. The Chinese Communist leaders
have sent their troops from Manchuria to launch a
strong and well-organized attack against the United
Nations forces in North Korea.... Because of the historic
friendship between the people of the United States and
China, it is particularly shocking to us that the Chi-
nese are being forced into battle against our troops in
the United Nations command.... If aggression is success-
ful in Korea, we can expect it to spread through Asia and
Europe to this hemisphere. We are fighting in Korea
for our own national security and survival. This coun-
try is the keystone of the hopes of mankind.
December 1 Some U.S. forces and other U.N.
troops continue to come under attack by enemy air-
craft, which then quickly seek sanctuary across the bor-
der in Manchuria. In air action over Korea, the U.S.
fighter pilots outfight the Soviet aircraft, including the
superior MiGs, knocking them out at a ratio of four-
teen to one. Rather than permit General MacArthur
to authorize his forces to pursue across the Yalu River,
the U.N., with the support of the U.S. State Depart-
ment and the British Government, seeks to open peace
negotiations with the Communists.
In other activity, Fifth Air Force designates the 1st
Marine Air Wing as the unit to provide close-air sup-
port for X Corps. Also, the initial C-37 arrives at
Nagaru-ri to evacuate X Corps casualties.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st
Marine Division and supporting elements have for sev-
eral days come under attack. A battle that had started
around midnight the previous night, at East Hill in the
area covered by the 1st Marines, is concluded. Un-
known to the Americans, the Chinese attacks had less-
ened due in great part to the enormous casualties that
had been recently inflicted upon them by X Corps.
High casualties were also sustained by some American
units that had been in the area east of the Chosin Reser-
voir. Three beleaguered battalions and some ROK
troops under Lieutenant Colonel Faith, isolated at
Sinhung-ni and close to being wiped out, attempt to
break out and fight through to Hagaru. Since the U.S.
Army units came under heavy attack on the night of
27–28 November, more than six hundred casualties
have been sustained. After destroying their howitzers
and other equipment before they can be seized by the
Communists, the column, under close air support of
Marine pilots, moves out heading toward Hagaru.
Lt. Colonel Don Faith had been able to lead the col-
umn through one roadblock, but enemy fire again pins
it down. Faith takes the point and leads an assault to de-
molish the obstacle. At a point about thirty yards from
the roadblock, enemy fire rips into him and inflicts a
mortal wound, but Faith refuses to quit. From his po-
sition, he directs the attack. Although Faith succumbs,
his courage and leadership permits the beleaguered col-
umn to break through and reach safety. Lt. Colonel
December 1, 1950
Faith is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for
his extraordinary heroism under fire. At the time Faith
is killed, the column stands about five miles from Ha-
garu.
The remainder of the trek is extremely dangerous,
particularly with all the wounded in the column, and
the lack of command due to the high casualties among
officers and NCOs. The survivors lose discipline. The
column splinters into a confused group of individuals
who each seek personal safety. Small parties band to-
gether and move forward. Somehow, most stragglers
make it to the Marine perimeter by about dawn on the
following day. About 670 of the survivors of TF Faith
are inside the safety of the Marine perimeter.
At daybreak, Marines move out in search of other
survivors and discover more than they can transport. A
convoy of assorted vehicles and some sleds, led by Lieu-
tenant Colonel Beall (1st Motor Transport Battalion),
is gathered. The convoy moves through the lines to col-
lect the remainder of the survivors of Task Force Faith.
Three hundred and nineteen additional troops, most
suffering from frostbite and other wounds, are rescued.
The Marines afterwards share some confounding
news. As it turned out, the Chinese not only raised lit-
tle opposition, but they in fact on several occasions as-
sisted in the rescue. The three army battalions posted
east of the reservoir sustain a casualty rate of about
seventy-five percent during 27 November through 1
December.
Task Force Anderson departs Hagaru in search of
more survivors, but Chinese resistance holds up the
column. The commanding officer, Lieutenant Colo-
nel Berry K. Anderson, receives orders to abort the mis-
sion and return to Hagaru.
Meanwhile, Lt. Colonel Beall maintains his search
operation. The Marines cancel their operation when it
is believed that all survivors had been saved. A total of
1,050 soldiers out of the original force of 2,500 are
saved. The Marines also count more than three hundred
dead in the abandoned vehicles of the task force. Three
hundred and eighty-five of the survivors remain to par-
ticipate in combat. The contingent is formed into a
provisional battalion after being supplied with arms by
the Marines. The casualties at Hagaru place additional
problems on the force there. Calls are made for aircraft
to attempt a landing on a makeshift airstrip, created
upon the frozen ground.
At about 1430, a C-47 descends to pick up a group
of the wounded. The wheels bounce upon the riveted
airstrip and then, despite the ice and snow, comes to a
stop to the amazement of many observers. Soon after,
the anxiety accelerates as the plane moves to take off
and, as if in the very last seconds, gains just enough
momentum to lift off and clear the hills to the south.
The engineers that had carved that airstrip out of the
frozen ground under searchlights within sight of the
enemy had gained time and foiled any attempt by the
Chinese to annihilate the trapped force. Aircraft will
continue to evacuate the wounded and provide the
ground forces with supplies.
570
The situation remains grim, but the Marines at
Yudam-ni refuse to capitulate. They prepare to fight
their way back to Hungnam. The mood however, re-
mains somber, as circumstances forbid the transporta-
tion of the dead, an everlasting creed of the Marine
Corps; however, all wounded are evacuated or placed
in the convoy. No others are transported. Every man in
the column, except the seriously wounded, faces the
elements during the forced march along the frozen ter-
rain. The vehicles, other than those carrying supplies,
are reserved for the anticipated wounded and for the
wounded of Fox Company, 7th Marines. The bodies of
eighty-five men had to be left behind. Chaplains ac-
companying the troops conduct services at the grave
sites in the field cemetery at Yudam-ni.
The evacuation plan, as stated by General Oliver P.
Smith, calls for the transportation of all the wounded
and the equipment. However, several Chinese divisions
are deployed to block passage. This day, the 1st Marine
Division initiates its fighting withdrawal from Yudam-
ni, which takes the Marines (and afterwards other
troops, including U.S. Army, British and South Ko-
rean) along a 56-mile highway of death and devastation.
The temperatures drop to well below zero as troops ad-
vance under a massive air cover operation. The heights
are a non-ending set of obstacles, blanketed by Chi-
nese troops. An improvised battalion, dubbed the
“Damnation Battalion,” had been formed on the pre-
vious day. The unit is composed of George Company
(3rd Battalion, 7th Marines), Able Company (1st Bat-
talion, 5th Marines) and the remaining able-bodied el-
ements of Dog Company and Easy Company (2nd Bat-
talion, 7th Marines). The unit quickly becomes
galvanized and uses a green bandana as their signal of
pride and cohesion. The improvised contingent is given
responsibility for clearing and maintaining the shoul-
der of the heights during the advance of RCT-7. The
unit also contains elements of the weapons companies
of the 7th Marines and some communications troops,
also of the 7th Marines. Major Maurice E. Roach is as-
signed as the commanding officer.
The against-all-odds maneuver begins at about the
time when the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, relinquishes
its hold on Hill 1282, which allows it to pull back some-
what to relieve the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, who hold
the left portion of the line. Once relieved, the 7th
Marines redeploy south of Yudam-ni astride the main
supply route. Surprisingly, the Chinese offer little re-
sistance to the maneuvers, validating the decision to un-
fold the plan during daylight to assure air cover. Mean-
while, the 1st and 3rd Battalions remain the sole units
deployed north of Yudam-ni. The pull-back from hill
1282 is problematic during the final phase, as the Chi-
nese move within close range of George Company.
Grenades become the weapon of choice, by both the
Marines and the clinging Chinese. The situation be-
comes grim; the Marines need air cover, but due to the
intermingling of the forces, it is not feasible.
One officer, Lieutenant Daniel Green, comes up
with a solution and it is soon tested. Corsairs arrive to
 571
attack, but they drop no munitions; rather, they fly
over for effect and while the Chinese seek cover, the
Marines speed away. Afterwards, the Corsairs again visit
the slopes and deliver a lethal blow that is bolstered by
mortars and artillery. George Company becomes the
grand recipient of the strategy. The unit sustains no
casualties during the withdrawal.
At Hill 1240, 1st Lieutenant John R. Hancock un-
folds his own ruse. After acting as rear guard at the hill,
Hancock requests no air cover to permit elements of the
1st Battalion, 5th Marines, to just slip away. No casual-
ties are incurred, as the Chinese have no notice of the
withdrawal.
The 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, advances at 0900
against enemy-held Hill 1542, while How Company of
the same battalion moves against Hill 1419 to blow a
hole in the Chinese obstructions. Hill 1419 holds stead-
fastly. Reinforcements are committed to the fight and at
U.S. Artillery north of the 38th Parallel is in action against enemy positions.
December 1, 1950
about 1930, the Marines vanquish the enemy there. At
this time, the temperature stands at sixteen degrees below
zero. The Marines gain the starting point from where
the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, departs to reach Fox Hill.
At 2100, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, led by Lieu-
tenant Colonel Davis, begins to slug its way through the
snow to traverse the mountains, despite no rest
throughout the day. The first enemy obstacle to their
front is Hill 1520, but en route, the elements extract a
high toll as the Marines plow forward, often falling
along the frozen slopes. Two over-exhausted columns
ascend the hill and following a harrowing climb, the
enemy estimated at about platoon strength is elimi-
nated. The Marines, after the victory, essentially col-
lapse, ignorant of the enemy fire and the sub-zero tem-
peratures, surely the latter poised to inflict fatalities. At
0300, the column finally halts its progress. Neverthe-
less, the officers remain concerned and double check
December 1, 1950
Top: A wounded U.S. troop is placed into liaison plane that evacuates him to receive medical aid. Bot-
tom: An F-80 Shooting Star.
the men to ensure they are still capable of comprehend-
ing the surroundings and the situation.
Meanwhile, the vanguard, Lieutenant Colonel Ta-
plett’s battalion (3rd Battalion, 5th Marines), moves
out to clear the heights on the opposing sides of the
MSR. The two attacking units intend to converge in the
vicinity of Toktong Pass and Fox Hill. Taplett’s force is
able to advance nearly 1,500 yards after it jumps off
about 1500, but at that point, heavy resistance is en-
countered by the Chinese on opposite sides of the road.
572
Company H and Company I peel off west and east re-
spectively, then nudge forward yard by yard until about
1930, when the obstacles are eliminated.
Following the slight conquest Taplett orders a short
pause, but by the aura of the deep darkness, it becomes
clear that there will be little rest. Just before midnight
the Marines again advance, unknowingly against the
opposite slope where the 7th Marines were engaged.
Chinese had permeated the heights above the MSR and
it is How and Item Companies (5th Marines) that move
 573
out to clear them off the mountain. How Company
advances against slight opposition, but in the case of
Item Company, it is quite different, as the Chinese
bring about massive resistance, including an attack
against the column. George Company joins in the fight
and is caught by terrible enemy fire. In the meantime,
Item Company becomes isolated in the frozen wilder-
ness as the night-long clash ensues. After dawn, the re-
sults become apparent. Company Item had been sev-
ered into only about the strength of two platoons, when
the reserve company (George) moved through the lines.
During the night’s vicious combat, Sergeant William
G. Windrich’s contingent (Company I) is suddenly
struck by a tenacious counterattack. Windrich, aware
that his positions are untenable, attacks rather than
withdraws. His Marines charge the assault troops. They
defy the incoming machine gun and mortar fire and
press forward through a storm of withering fire and
soon get pounded with grenades. Windrich continues
the attack to break up the Communist force, but over-
whelming fire prevents further progress. Windrich,
badly wounded and having lost seven of his command,
moves back to the positions of the company’s main
body to get volunteers, then returns to the scene to
evacuate the wounded. Afterwards, the wounded are
evacuated, but Windrich continues to ignore his head
wound and maintains control of the survivors of his
contingent.
The Communists launch another stiff attack against
Windrich’s flank and he again becomes wounded, yet
still refuses evacuation. The wounds take a severe toll
A contingent of the 1st Marine Division prepares for its fighting withdrawal from Yudam-ni, located
slightly west of the Changjin Reservoir.
December 1, 1950
on Windrich, so much so that he is unable to stand.
From a sitting position, he controls his defenses and
his Marines, in turn, repel the assault to save the com-
mand. However, Sergeant Windrich is not alive to see
the Communists vanquished. The combination of the
bitter cold and massive loss of blood cause him to fall
into unconsciousness and succumb. Sergeant Windrich
is awarded the Medal of Honor for is extraordinary
heroism and intrepid courage in the face of the enemy.
Nevertheless, about three hundred and forty-two Chi-
nese are also there and their fighting days had been ter-
minated.
In the Eighth Army area, the Chinese offensive con-
tinues, but Eighth Army, which had for the most part
completed its withdrawal to the new line about twenty
miles below Kunu-ri, has paid an expensive price. It
loses equipment, weapons and vehicles. Eighth Army
units come under heavy attack at certain points along
withdrawal routes, but the enemy does not pursue. The
short reprieve brings no solace to General Walker, who
remains convinced that the enemy is not too far off,
and he anticipates new attacks against his lines. But
even more importantly, he is concerned that the enemy
might still outflank his forces or totally surround it.
Meanwhile, Walker’s force is greatly weakened from
the combat of the past couple of weeks and one unit, the
2nd Division, is too weakened to remain on the field.
This day, General Keiser leads his 2nd Division to a vil-
lage about ten miles below Pyongyang to regroup and
rebuild its strength. The plight of the 2nd Division, the
other casualties within Eighth Army and the potential
December 1, 1950 574

Top: U.S. Marines on 1 December huddle against snow covered vehicles at Yudam-ni, awaiting orders to
break out and move to Hagaru to join with other Marine forces there. Bottom: A Marine column moves
from Yudam-ni to Hagaru en route to Hungnam.

overwhelming strength of the Chinese moving in from
the east present a major dilemma for Walker. If he re-
mains at this new line, he risks being overrun. Plans are
laid to again retire. The Eighth Army forward units re-
main about thirty miles above Pyongyang, but with the
2nd Division out of action, the remaining units, in-
cluding the few reserves, lack the strength to defend
against what now appears to be more than 150,000
troops within six separate Chinese armies and the accom-
panying North Korean troops and guerrillas.
 575
Walker’s reserve units are composed of the 187th
Airborne Regimental Combat Team with its attached
U.N. units, a battalion of troops from the Philippines
and another from Thailand. Another reserve force is a
recently arrived battalion from the Netherlands, which
is just preparing for use in the field. In addition, the
French have committed a battalion of troops, which
arrive in Pusan this day.
In related activity, Eighth Army has no major en-
counters with the enemy, which permits headquarters
to concentrate on building a series of defensive lines in
their blueprint for the withdrawal.
In Air Force activity, F-86 fighters (4th Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wing) arrive in Japan aboard the USS Cape Es-
perance.
In other activity, Fifth Air Force Headquarters relo-
cates in Seoul from Nagoya, Japan. The 314th Air Di-
vision receives responsibility for the air defenses of
Japan.
Also, a contingent of six MiG-15s intercepts and en-
gages a group of three B-29s in an aerial duel that lasts
for about six minutes, the first extensive MiG attack
since the breakout of the war. The B-29s are escorted
by F-80s, but still, three of the B-29s sustain damage.
At Pyongyang, planes of Combat Cargo Command
evacuate about 1,500 wounded troops.
— In the United States: President Truman an-
nounces that the North Koreans have been supplied
with weaponry by the Soviet Union; he also proclaims
the Chinese are actively involved in the fighting: “As the
United Nations forces continued to defeat the aggres-
sors and continued to advance in their mission of lib-
eration, Chinese Communists participation in the ag-
gression became more blatant.... The only explanation
is that these Chinese have been misled or forced into
their reckless attack, an act which can only bring
tragedy to themselves, to further the imperialistic de-
signs of the Soviet Union.”
The President notes that 53 nations are unified to
halt the aggression and that in essence, the U.N. and
each of these nations is under assault by the Commu-
nists. Meanwhile, General MacArthur is convinced that
he must be permitted to use air power to strike across
the Yalu against enemy positions in Manchuria to halt
the offensive. The thought of retaliation across the Yalu
causes trepidation within the United Nations, for fear
it might trigger World War III.
— In Japan: The U.S. Navy commissions the At-
sugi Naval Air Station.
December 2 In the X Corps sector, following a
night-long confrontation with both the Chinese and
the elements, the 1st Marine Division remains on the
offensive. Several obstacles had been overcome earlier
in the day. (See also, December 1, 1950, In the X Corps
sector.) At about dawn, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines,
moves closer to Fox Hill and prepares to strike nearby
Hill 1653. Initially, as the contingent encroaches Fox
Company positions, no communications occur, caus-
ing concern that friendly fire might strike the 7th
December 2, 1950
Marines. Several obstacles are seized and in the interim,
radio contact is made with Fox Company.
Slightly before 1130, the initial elements of Baker
Company enter Fox Company’s lines. Soon after, the re-
mainder of the battalion arrives. During the operation,
a contingent moves back to get the wounded and dur-
ing the operation, a Chinese sniper fatally wounds
Lieutenant Peter A. Arrioli (MC), USN, the 7th
Marines’ surgeon. Fox Company (2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines), commanded by Captain Barber, remains
strong enough for the fights to come, but after five days
of resisting the Chinese, it had sustained 26 killed, 3
missing and 89 wounded. Captain William B. Barber
becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary leadership and courage during the period.
Also, in the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines sector, the
Chinese pound their rear-guard positions at Hill 1276
during the early hours of 2 December. Lieutenant Col-
onel Roise (2nd Battalion, 5th Marines) orders Fox
Company to attack and regain some lost ground; how-
ever, upon gaining the crest of the hill, after dawn today
following two other assaults, enemy fire from the reverse
slope compels the contingent to pull back. Air cover
arrives and pounds the Chinese positions at about
1000. The Chinese also lose troops when they abandon
their positions and flee into the sights of Company D
and G.
The struggle for control of Hill 1520 also continues.
George Company, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, moves
against it, bolstered by How Company and a compos-
ite force composed of the men of the 2nd Battalion,
7th Marines, now known as Dog-Easy Company. At
1200, the western slope falls to the Marines of George
Company.
Meanwhile, the Chinese erect a roadblock along the
MSR and detonate a bridge to halt the Marines. George
Company descends from above the Chinese positions,
while the others drive forward, augmented by air at-
tacks that pummel the enemy positions. The blockage
is eliminated; however, the blown bridge slows the ad-
vance until a modified route can be erected by engi-
neers. Afterwards, the column continues its advance.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
comes under fierce attack by elements of the 79th Chi-
nese Division at 0430. Item and George Companies
remain heavily engaged until dawn, but it is Item Com-
pany that sustains the bulk of the attack at Hill 1542.
The combined strength of both companies on this day
is down to about two hundred troops. The Chinese re-
port later that one hundred enemy troops (Item Com-
pany) were killed. No records of that time from the 7th
Marines exist; however, estimates of the Marine Corps
place the Item Company’s actual casualties from the
night’s fighting at thirty to forty troops killed or
wounded.
During the day’s struggle of the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, attached Company Jig, a provisional
platoon including artillerymen and riflemen — has en-
gaged the Chinese in a furious fight near Yudam-ni
when the Communists approach in uniforms of
December 2, 1950 576

friendly troops. Sergeant James E. Johnson takes com-
mand of the platoon and directs its fire. When the pla-
toon is ordered to seek better positions from which to
defend, Johnson holds his position and provides cover
fire. Sergeant Johnson is last seen by his troops resist-
ing the onslaught despite his wounds in a violent ex-
change between him and the enemy. Johnson uses
hand-to-hand combat and his grenades to buy time for
his platoon. Sergeant Johnson is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary courage
under fire and for his intrepid leadership in the face of
an overwhelming superior enemy force.
In related activity, the withdrawal continues
throughout the day. Meanwhile, Company H, 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, advances on the right of Company
G at Hill 520 against an obstacle to the front of it. The
troops of Company H encounter fierce resistance, but
later, after support from planes, the unit advances. After

Top: Elements of Eighth Army retire from Sunchon and move south toward Pyongyang. Bottom: Defend-
ers at Hagaru airstrip fire 105 howitzer shells at the enemy, which has the airstrip encircled.
 577
dusk, the objective is seized. The 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines, arrives within about 1,000 yards of Fox Hill
at 0200 on 3 December.
The route of the division is tedious, but the Chinese
are unable to halt its progress. In addition to the Chi-
nese, the Marines continue to get pelted by an equally
pernicious enemy, the weather. By dawn of 3 Decem-
ber, a new layer of fresh snow blankets the area.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines,
under Lt. Colonel Raymond G. Davis, following yet
another sleepless night in the frigid Korean hills, main-
tains its advance to secure positions from which the
battalion can relieve a beleaguered rifle company and se-
cure a strategic mountain pass to ensure the Marines
make it to Hungnam.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker initiates a
withdrawal from the Sukch’on–Sunchon–Songch’on
Line, just having reached it after withdrawing from
Kunu-ri. Pyongyang is to be evacuated and the new
line is to be drawn below the village. The forward units
remain about thirty miles above the village and at a
point about ten miles below that, a cover force will set
up to delay any Chinese forces that attempt to close on
the retreating columns. The enemy, in the meantime,
continues to close from the east to present General
Walker with yet another problem, the possibility of the
enemy getting into Pyongyang by swerving west and
catching Eighth Army before it can pass through the
town.
The operation moves into high gear as troops are
sped southward into Pyongyang to retrieve the sup-
plies, while other units rush toward the port of Chin-
namp’o to extricate equipment and supplies still re-
maining there. Meanwhile, to protect the retreat,
Walker dispatches contingents to guard the east flank
from assault. Pontoon bridges that span the Taedong
River are barred to civilian traffic and the 187th Air-
borne troops set up positions at each of the eight
bridges to enforce the rule. Walker had received au-
thorization from Far East Command to destroy all sup-
plies and equipment that could not be brought out with
army.
— In Japan: The carrier USS Princeton (CV 37) ar-
rives at Sasebo from the U.S. From there, the Princeton
will depart for Korean waters.
December 3 In the X Corps area, the 1st Marine
Division and attached troops continue their drive to
Hungnam. In the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, sector
near Fox Hill, the composite company known as Dog-
Easy Company is declared ineffective due to high ca-
sualties. Company G takes its place along the main sup-
ply route. The 3rd Battalion is accompanied by one
tank and although the new coat of snow gives the ap-
pearance of a tranquil mountain area, the Marines are
aware that the hills are still consumed with Chinese.
The 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, initiates a set of at-
tacks against the enemy positions. The Chinese are
startled and take no time to defend. Instead, they aban-
don their positions and inadvertently head straight to-
December 3, 1950
wards another Marine contingent, the 3rd Battalion,
5th Marines, which is on the attack. As the disorgan-
ized Chinese battalion speeds southwest with the 1st
Battalion, 7th Marines, in pursuit, the skies clear as
planes arrive to strike other enemy positions at about
the same time Lieutenant Colonel Taplett’s 3rd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, is closing. The Chinese battalion’s
untimely encounter with the threesome power of two
Marine battalions and the aircraft brings about its de-
mise.
By 1030, the enemy battalion is annihilated. Soon
after, by 1300, the Chinese had also been eliminated at
Toktong Pass, which permits the linkup of the 1st Bat-
talion, 7th Marines, and the 3rd Battalion, 5th
Marines. The first phase of the break-out ends success-
fully, but at high costs. After the anticipated rendezvous
at the pass, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, with the
convoy holding the wounded reinitiates the advance
towards Hagaru along the route to Hungnam. Some
of the less seriously wounded abandon the trucks to
make room for the troops with major wounds and still,
the vehicles are jammed.
The 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, which had defended
the pass to permit the columns to pass safely, descends
from the heights and joins the column to the rear of
the 5th Marines. Marine observation planes (VMO-6)
maintain a flying blanket overhead to forewarn the col-
umn of any enemy positions that might lurk along the
road. Six separate Marine squadrons combine to fly one
hundred and forty-five sorties.
The airborne Leathernecks fly low-level missions
that at times bring their planes to dangerously low al-
titudes, but that type of cover flight has become com-
mon practice. The Marines are determined to win and
to discredit the erroneous reports that for months had
been emerging from the American press, which fre-
quently accused the American troops as being weak and
unable to handle the heavy burden of combat.
At about 1930, following the harrowing march
through the snow and winds and the incessant fighting
for more than one week, mostly without sleep of any
length, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, calls a halt to
the march. From a point about several hundred yards
from the base at Hagaru, all the pain is discarded.
Those able to walk gather into a tightly knit forma-
tion, then march straight into the camp. They had ac-
complished what few thought could be done and they
did it as promised, carrying their wounded and their
dead. Lt. Colonel Raymond G. Davis, commanding
officer of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, receives the
Medal of Honor for his extraordinary leadership dur-
ing the treacherous march, which included the rescue
of an encircled rifle company.
Nonetheless, more miles of treacherous terrain stand
between them and Hungnam. A contingent of Royal
Marines had moved out of Hagaru to cover the flanks,
but for the most part, the Marine aviators had cleared
most of the loitering Chinese out of the way. The
3rd Battalion, 5th Marines, and the 4th Battalion,
11th Marines, are the next units expected at Hagaru.
December 3, 1950 578

Top: U.S. Marines en route to Hungnam carry one of their wounded. The hills in background are held
by the enemy. Bottom: Marines move through frigid weather along frozen roads toward Hungnam.

Chinese opposition obstructs the progress of the column
at about 0200 on 4 December.
In the Eighth Army area, preparations for a with-
drawal from the Pyongyang area continue. Meanwhile,
the Chinese withhold offensive action, but apparently
they are making plans to close from several directions
to snap a trap around Pyongyang. Reports of enemy
activity to the east and southeast of the town are scru-
tinized. General Walker becomes more convinced that
the enemy is poised to cut off the withdrawal routes
 579 December 3, 1950

Top: A transport plane, while taking off, passes over a Marine transport plane that burned after crash-
ing on the improvised airstrip at Hagaru. The in-flight plane is evacuating seriously wounded who
are unable to make the march to Hungnam. Bottom: Vehicles in line at a dock wait for evacuation at
Hungnam.

near Sin’gye. The orders to retreat are to be executed on
the following day. The new and temporary line is to
be at a point about fifteen miles below the village of
Pyongyang, with a secondary plan that calls for prepa-
rations to move from there to another line that drops
the troops on the east about thirty miles. In conjunc-
tion, those on the west will pull back about fifty miles.
— In Japan: General MacArthur informs Washing-
ton that he requires reinforcements in large numbers
in order to beat back the challenge of the Chinese who
have involved themselves in Korea. Based on his calcu-
lations, MacArthur believes that without additional
troops, he will have few options, and be compelled to
offer resistance while his forces withdraw southward in
an effort to avoid the total devastation of the U.N.
forces in Korea.
December 3, 1950 580

U.S. Army engineers place sachel charges on a railroad bridge in the vicinity of Pyongyang as the U.S.
prepares to abandon the area.
 581
Chinese prisoners captured by U.S. Marines during fighting withdrawal in the Chosin Reservoir Cam-
paign. Some of the Chinese are wearing canvas shoes (sneaks) and others rags, but some others are wear-
ing U.S. boots. All of the Chinese are wearing quilted uniforms.
December 4 Along the main supply route, the re-
maining elements of the 1st Marine Division continue
to advance toward Hagaru from Yudam-ni. During the
march, the column comes under attack at about 0200,
shortly after some of the vehicles transporting artillery
run out of fuel. The units to the front, Company G
and Company H (3rd Battalion, 5th marines), con-
tinue to advance, unaware of the problem. Chinese
forces open fire on the convoy. Marines attached to the
4th Battalion, 11th Marines (truck drivers and artillery-
men), repulse the assault and in a short while, more
Marines arrive to bolster the stalled convoy.
The unexpected attack causes confusion and a few of
the troops panic. Others restore calm. The 1st Battal-
ion, 11th Marines, and Company A, 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, arrive and by that time, Lieutenant Colonel
Taplett had also arrived at the ambush. The warrant
officer with the pointed tongue, after moving around
a bend, soon returns with a driver and an artillery piece
in tow. Ground troops combine with artillerymen to
eliminate the blockage, but in the midst of the darkness
and confusion, the Chinese blow a bridge, further com-
plicating the possibility of further progress.
By daylight, the artillery begins to pound the enemy
positions from close range and the Chinese are also
struck by air attacks. Again, the Marines advance and
the Chinese sustain devastating losses, estimated at
about one hundred and fifty troops. The remaining el-
December 4, 1950
ements arrive at Hagaru at 1400, bringing the first
phase of the operation to a successful close.
Of the 1,500 casualties that arrive at Hagaru, about
one third of them are suffering from frostbite. Four
days of Hell and fourteen miles of damnation end for
the 1st Marine Division, but still for the Marines and
the supporting troops, including the British and South
Koreans, it is still a long, long way to Hungnam.
The Marines are startled to learn, while at Hagaru,
that there were doubts among the American press and
public that they could extricate themselves from the
Chinese trap. Despite the hardships endured, the
Marines at Hagaru, with a few exceptions, remained
fully confident that they would fight through the re-
maining Chinese and reach the coast at Hungnam.
Some in the United States had prematurely written off
the entire 1st Marine Division.
In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army is to withdraw
to the new line, which is to stretch from Kyomip’o
along the lower bank of the Taedong River on the west
to Koksan in a valley near the Yesong River. I Corps
moves out to deploy in the vicinity of Kyomip’o by
traveling along a route through Pyongyang. In the
meantime, IX Corps is to move along Route 33 toward
the eastern sector of Eighth Army near Koksan. The
east flank of army is in the Yesong Valley defended
by the ROK II Corps, and the arrival of the IX Corps
is intended to augment the South Koreans and ease
December 4, 1950 582

somewhat General Walker’s concern for his east flank.
The Chinese continue to remain inconspicuous.
In Air Force activity, a three-plane contingent of re-
connaissance Tornadoes is attacked by MiGs. The
enemy shoots down one of the planes in what becomes
the first successful shoot down of a jet bomber in the
history of air power.
In Naval activity, Far East Naval Forces arrive at
Wonsan to evacuate the U.S. forces there. The USS St.
Paul (CA 73) is delegated as the gun fire support coor-

U.S. infantry troops (X Corps) south of Koto-ri work in the snow to fortify foxhole.
 583
Conditions at Marine positions in Koto-ri during early December. The Marines are greeted by another
snowstorm.
dinator during the operation. Also, the United Nations
Blockading and Escort Task Element (TE 95.1) pro-
vides naval surface gun fire and air support for Eighth
Army forces that are stretched between Chinnampo
and Inchon. The operation continues into the follow-
ing day.
In other activity, Lieutenant Thomas Jerome Hud-
ner, a pilot of Fighter Squadron 32, attached to the
USS Leyte Gulf (CV-32), attempts to assist a downed
pilot in the vicinity of the Chosin Reservoir. Hudner
flies in circles to protect the other aviator. Soon after,
Hudner decides to land in full view of the enemy to
save the pilot, whose plane had caught fire with him
trapped in the cockpit. Hudner attempts unsuccess-
fully to retrieve the pilot. Afterwards, and still in great
danger, he calls for a helicopter, all the while in the
view of the enemy. The helicopter arrives, but still the
pilot could not be extricated. Lieutenant Hudner be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary heroism in the face of the enemy, with great
risk to his own life in an attempt to save another pilot,
above and beyond the call of duty.
— In Japan: General MacArthur receives a response
from Washington regarding his recent request for rein-
forcements, but it is not what he had expected. General
Joseph Lawton Collins, Army chief of staff, makes it
clear in a meeting with MacArthur that no large num-
ber of troops will be committed at this time. Nonethe-
December 5, 1950
less, MacArthur is also informed by the Joint Chiefs of
Staff, in Washington, that they were in agreement with
him on the establishment of beachheads from which
the troops could be evacuated if necessary. Collins re-
mains in the region for a while and spends a few days
in Korea to get an onsite perspective of the situation.
December 5 In the X Corps area, at Hagaru, the
1st Marine Division continues its operation to reach
Hungnam. The Chinese for the fourth straight night do
not initiate any offensive action against the American
lines at Hagaru. On this day, 1,400 casualties remain
at Hagaru, but by the end of the day, all are evacuated
by air, to bring the total of air evacuations of wounded
to 4,312 troops (1 December through 5 December).
The casualties include 3,150 Marines, 1,137 U.S. Army
and 25 British Royal Marines (Task Force Drysdale). X
Corps figures differ slightly from Marine records, with
X Corps totals amounting to 4, 207 for the identical
time period.
The Marines and other forces at Hagaru get a short
reprieve, as the arrivals from Yudam-ni require some
rest. The next step of the advance to Koto-ri will com-
mence on the following day. At 0800 on this day,
OpnO 25–50 is issued. The General Order lays out
the plan for the breakout, which is to commence on
the following day at dawn.
There is no activity against the base today and it
December 5, 1950
U.S. Army engineers construct a treadway bridge across the Taedong River. The new bridge is built close
to another bridge that is operational.
remains tranquil throughout the night, permitting the
troops to prepare for the next jump-off without major
interruption, other than the ungodly weather.
Nonetheless, the Marines and the U.S. Army elements
at Hagaru are aware that the Chinese, although con-
cealed, are in the vicinity in overwhelming strength.
Intelligence gathered from POWs indicate that seven
complete divisions block the path and another two
enemy divisions are also suspected of being nearby. The
identified divisions are: CCF 58th, 59th, 60th, 76th,
79th, 80th and 89th. The other two thought to be in
the path are the CCF 77th and 78th. The X Corps
forces are composed of only three Marine Regimental
Combat Teams, 5, 7 and 8.
In the Eighth Army area, U.N. forces evacuate Py-
ongyang, the North Korean capital. The Americans
and the Allied units attached to Eighth Army continue
to retire toward the new line about fifteen miles below
the capital. During the morning, large portions of the
city are set afire and troops attached to IX Corps work
to destroy all equipment and supplies not scheduled
for transport by the retiring forces. The rail yards are
jammed and operations are underway to move out the
wounded; however, there is a shortage of operable trains
due to several reasons, including damage from previous
Allied air strikes.
Prior to 0800, most sections of the city are afire and
all pontoon bridges that span the Taedong River are
blown by engineers. Lingering, although unseen, Chi-
nese pressure forces a hurried retreat, which hinders
the operation to destroy the equipment. There is a huge
amount of supplies and too little time. Consequently,
although nearly all units are beyond the city during the
day, the quagmire at the rail yard prevents the evacua-
584
tion of about fifteen M-46 tanks that are parked atop
flat cars.
At Chinnampo, the port has been active for the last
several days in an effort to transport wounded and re-
move supplies and equipment. Like the activity at Py-
ongyang, the operations continue without interference
from the Chinese. Eighth Army utilizes U.S. Naval ves-
sels, Japanese commercial vessels and even Korean sail-
boats to help with the task. The forces there are load-
ing equipment, but they also allow boarding throngs
of civilians and captured enemy troops. It was, for a
while, thought that the prisoners should be left at the
port, but after discussions, it is decided that the retreat-
ing South Korean forces would probably liquidate
them.
By about 1700, the final vessels embark under the
protection of U.S. destroyers offshore and a nearby
British aircraft carrier that had been posted in the Yel-
low Sea to provide air cover during this last day of the
evacuation of Chinnampo. As at Pyongyaang, engi-
neers detonate the explosives to ensure the port town is
of little value to the enemy. In conjunction, the vessels
head toward Inchon and Pusan, with the service troops
and the supplies primarily going to the former and the
wounded and POWs moving to the latter. Evacuation
of Chinnampo and Inchon is handled by naval vessels
of Amphibious Task Force (TF 90.1) and United Na-
tions Blockading and Escort Task Force (TF 95).
In related activity, General Walker orders I Corps
and IX Corps to dispatch patrols to attempt to locate
the enemy positions, but neither makes any contact.
The absence of any prisoners makes it difficult for the
time being to guess the next move of the Chinese.
In Air Force activity, Combat Cargo Command
 585
Two bridges that span the Taedong River, both blown by U.S. forces on 5 December.
continues the operation to supply the troops sur-
rounded in northeastern Korea. The recently arrived
Greek contingent of C-47s participates in the airlift.
During this day’s operations, 3,925 wounded and
sick troops are transported to Japan. Most of the men
are lifted from the primitive airstrip at frozen Hararu-
ri.
In other activity, the Air Force cancels its strikes
against the Yalu River bridges. The extreme cold
weather along the Korean–Manchurian border has tem-
porarily made the bridges irrelevant; the rivers are to-
tally frozen, which permits the Chinese to walk across.
— In the United States: The rift between General
MacArthur and President Truman continues to inten-
sify, as the president remains infuriated at certain pub-
lic statements made by MacArthur. Truman, on this
day, issues a directive relating to all American officials
stationed overseas, including military leaders, that any
public statements be in concurrence with U.S. policies
and that no statements or communications are to made
by these officials about foreign policy or military mat-
ters. This is particularly directed toward General
MacArthur and essentially prohibits him from making
statements to the press or the other media from the
United States.
In conjunction, there is great division between
Washington and MacArthur on the way the conflict in
Korea is being handled. And MacArthur has been de-
fending his methods and strategy against the accusations
December 6, 1950
that he is responsible for the failures of the U.N. Com-
mand to halt the Chinese.
December 6 General Collins, Army chief of
staff, concludes a three-day stop in Korea. During his
visit, he spent some time conferring with Generals
Walker and Almond, the commanding officers of
Eighth Army and X Corps, respectively. He returns to
Japan to confer with General MacArthur. Collins gains
the separate opinions of Walker and Almond. Walker
believes Eighth Army must withdraw, while Almond is
convinced his X Corps can draw a solid line at Hung-
nam and withstand the Chinese attacks. A strategy
meeting will be held at Far East Headquarters on the
following day to solidify a plan.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, at
dawn, the X Corps 1st Marine Division and attached
units, again unmolested overnight by the Chinese,
commence the breakout from Hagaru. RCT-1 is as-
signed to hold Koto-ri and Changhung. RCT-7 drives
southward. It had been relieved on the previous day
from its deployment along the Hagaru perimeter by
RCT-5.
RCT-5 moves out against East Hill and from there it
is to trail RCT-7 to protect the rear. The coordinated
attacks of RCT-5 and the spearhead, RCT-7, receive air
support at about 0700. The advance is to be protected
by scores of planes at just about all times. The Marine
squadrons at Yonpo average about 100 sorties a
December 6, 1950
day and other Marines aboard the Badoeng Strait fly
another thirty-five sorties a day, while the U.S. Navy’s
carriers provided additional blanket coverage to the
point of nearly creating a traffic jam in the skies above
the column. The carriers Leyte Gulf, Valley Forge, Philip-
pine Sea and Princeton are instructed to place the col-
umn on the top priority list and each carrier is directed
to commit no less than one hundred sorties a day. Other
carriers, the Bataan and the Sicily, are closing on the
area and they too are to join in the protective umbrella.
In addition, the 11th Marines contribute non-stop
artillery support for both RCT-7 and RCT-5. In the
meantime, at Hagaru, during the night of 5–6 Decem-
ber, the artillery units continued to plaster the forward
routes with artillery shells that could not be trans-
ported. In addition to the Marines, the survivors of
Task Force Faith — numbering 385 troops and other
7th Infantry Division elements numbering slightly
more than 100 soldiers — are with the column. The
soldiers, formed into a composite battalion, are under
the command of Lieutenant Colonel Anderson and at-
tached to the 7th Marines.
Meanwhile, enemy-held East Hill, a Chinese strong-
hold since 29 November, falls to the Marines at about
1100, when the resistance vanishes. Upon occupying the
hill, about thirty Chinese troops that had died during
the fighting are discovered. Following the seizure of
East Hill, the Marines move against another hill in the
near distance; however, the Chinese do not relinquish
it easily. Nevertheless, by 1430, the Marines secure the
objective. Soon after, the Chinese are preparing a coun-
terattack, but the Marines commence a momentous
and what turns out to be a historical bombardment.
While elements of RCT-5 pummel the Chinese,
planes arrive and deliver more lethal punishment. Con-
sequently, the Chinese that are snagged on a saddle
choose to capitulate. A Marine patrol of platoon size,
led by 1st Lieutenant George C. McNaughton, accepts
the surrender of 220 Chinese, a record seizure for the
1st Marine Division during the Reservoir Campaign.
Despite horrendous casualties, the Chinese continue
to strike against Marine positions at East Hill until
about midnight, but the casualties do not deter them.
Soon after, at about 0205 (7 December), the Chinese
launch yet another assault against RCT-5. The Chi-
nese charge and get dropped. More waves follow and
again they are eliminated, but still, even more continue
to make futile charges. The Marines sustain casualties,
but the return fire decimates the attackers. Most of the
killing was observed due to the high volume of tracer
shells and the illuminating flares that spotlighted the
Chinese as they advanced.
By the time dawn arrives it becomes noticeable also
that the Chinese escape route coincided with the line
of fire of the Marines’ artillery. One group of about
sixty Chinese had maneuvered directly into the gun
sights, resulting in the instant demise of the group. A
smaller contingent nearby, composed of about fifteen
troops, had immediately surrendered. As the Marines
of RCT-5 check the field after daylight, the estimated
586
figure of Chinese killed to the front of the 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, stands at about 800 troops.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, sustains 13 killed
and 50 wounded. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, sus-
tains 10 killed and 43 wounded. To the front of the 1st
Battalion are 260 Chinese, killed at Charlie Company’s
lines. At Able Company, 200 killed Chinese are
counted.
While RCT-5 had engaged the enemy at East Hill for
nearly twenty-two hours, RCT-7 had continued its for-
ward drive toward Koto-ri. The 7th Marines initially
seizes its first objective effortlessly when it catches a
small contingent asleep in the heights just outside
Tonae-ri, but soon after, the RCT encounters fierce re-
sistance. The resistance is eventually overcome by about
noon, but again, within a short while, the Chinese hold
another blocking point. That, too, is reduced after
dogged fighting.
By dusk, RCT-7 stands at a point about 5,000 yards
below Hagaru. The opposition had been anticipated
and the order to continue to drive forward had always
been part of the planned offensive withdrawal. The 2nd
Battalion, 7th Marines, advances to what had become
known as Hell Fire Valley, but there, the enemy machine
gun position halts progress until just about midnight,
when U.S. Army tanks arrive to liquidate the blockage
and permit the drive to continue. However, the Chi-
nese also had blown yet another bridge, once again
bringing the beleaguered column to a halt. The troops
of Company D make repairs that allow the march to re-
sume. The column soon after comes across another
blown bridge and still, the Americans continue. After
a delay of about one additional hour, a bypass route is
used and the 7th Marines move along the final stretch
without opposition and enter Koto-ri.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, encounters opposi-
tion when its train is struck at about 2100, but Com-
pany G and Company I form a protective shield and re-
pulse the attack, which had come from close range.
More trouble is encountered in the vicinity of Hell Fire
Valley.
At about 0200, elements of Company I, supported
by a contingent of tanks, eliminate the obstacle before
dawn. In the meantime, the 1st Battalion, which is ad-
vancing on the west side of the river and clearing the
heights, descends the hills and hooks up with the col-
umn, which enters Koto-ri at about 0700 (7 Decem-
ber). During the afternoon, the 7th Marines had pro-
gressed far enough to finally permit Division Train
Number 1 to depart Hagaru at about 1600. Enemy re-
sistance is encountered but elements of the 3rd Battal-
ion, 11th Marines (Batteries George and How) repulse
the attack. Afterwards, at a point about 3,500 yards
south of Hagaru, again the convoy is struck. The con-
voy stalls, but the Marines hold the ground and fol-
lowing a two-hour conflagration, the enemy disen-
gages. Marine estimates place the number of troops
that fled the area at only about fifty. The remainder of
the force, numbering between 500 and 800, had either
been killed or wounded. Another part of the convoy, the
 587 December 6, 1950

Top: U.S. Marines, accompanied by Marine tanks, move along frozen road from Koto-ri to Hamhung
during breakout. Bottom: Chinese POWs captured by Marines during fighting withdrawal from Koto-ri
to Hamhung.

division headquarters company, also faces tenacious op-
position after it departs Hagaru. Most of the resistance
occurs during the early morning hours of the following
day.
Division Train Number 2 departs Hagaru after dark
on 6 December. The initial units that abandon Hagaru
arrive at Koto-ri in just under sixty hours; however,
the latter parts of the column encounter more diffi-
culty, which adds nearly twenty additional hours to the
hazardous trip.
In addition to the normal day sorties by Marine pi-
lots and the supporting planes from the U.S. Navy car-
riers, Marine Corps Night-Fighter Squadrons supply
limited protection during the darkened hours. Also,
December 7, 1950 588
for the first time in any conflict, a transport plane is
used as a TADC (tactical air direction center). The
Marines use the aircraft to continue effective close-air
support during the breakout. An RSD is used as the
airborne tactical command post. It remains in action for
six days.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker’s new lines
below Pyongyang stretch from Kyomip’o to Sin’gye
with the I Corps deployed on the west, while the IX
Corps leans from Yuli towards Sin’gye on the left, in
close proximity to the ROK II Corps in the Yekong
Valley. Although there remains great concern about the
large amount of Chinese that had been in pursuit, still
there is no major interference detected this day.
Walker, in the meantime, does get a fresh reminder
that the Chinese are around, as reports arrive at head-
quarters notifying him that Chinese troops have been
spotted at Pyongyang. Aircraft take note that hostile
forces are also on the move at Chinnamp’o, the port
city recently abandoned by Eighth Army. Meanwhile,
A single U.S. soldier with full gear during the withdrawal from Koto-
ri to Hamhung. U.S. Army troops, ROKs and some British had been
with the 1st Marine Division during the fighting withdrawal.
a 1st Cavalry Division contingent, composed of two
battalions, in search of the Chinese, encounters and
engages a North Korean force at Koksan in the Yesong
Valley (ROK II Corps zone).
Adding to these anticipated reports, Walker also
learns that the North Koreans and their guerrilla coun-
terparts are advancing towards his positions and all in-
dications point to them striking the rear and the east side
of the line. Walker decides to retreat as planned to the
next line, but still he is unaware of whether the Chinese
are poised to strike his left flank. The Chinese, who
seemed to be everywhere Eighth Army moved during
the latter part of November, remain concealed. The
absence of Chinese forces, at least from the sight of the
Eighth Army, leads Walker to think that they might
well have swerved away from his east flank in an at-
tempt to slide between his force and that of the X
Corps. This maneuver could give the enemy an open
running field from which they could swarm into South
Korea.
To counteract this possibility,
Walker concludes that he must es-
tablish a blocking force (Line A),
which will extend across the penin-
sula from the area near the mouth
of the Yesong River to the Sea of
Japan. Meanwhile, top level strat-
egy talks will be held on the fol-
lowing day in Japan and Walker,
pursuant to orders that emerge
from the meeting, will alter the
line.
In Air Force activity, a unit at-
tached to the Strategic Air Com-
mand, the 27th Fighter Escort
Wing (FEW) based at Bergstrom
Air Force Base, Texas, initiates mis-
sions from Taegu, Korea. This is
the first time the F-84 Thunder Jet
fighters enter combat in Korea.
— In the United States: The
Joint Chiefs of Staff forward to
General MacArthur in Japan the
directive of President Truman re-
garding public statements by U.S.
officials and military leaders re-
garding U.S. policy. (See also, De-
cember 5, 1950.)
December 7 In the X Corps
sector, at Hagaru, some Marine el-
ements still remain, while the
columns RCT-1, RCT-5 and RCT-
7 continue to move towards Koto-
ri. The front elements have already
arrived, but the column in its en-
tirety is stretched across about a
twelve-mile run. Division Train
Number 1 had not been able to
depart Hagaru until 1600 on the
 589
6th. During the ongoing breakout from Hagaru, the
remaining elements of the 7th Marines had entered
Koto-ri by about 0700 this day. The 2nd Battalion ar-
rived on the previous night.
During the latter part of the morning, units of the
battalion move out to provide cover for trailing ele-
ments of the 1st Marine Division. In addition to es-
tablishing positions at points between Hill 1182 and
Koto-ri along the MSR, another mission is assigned to
the 2nd Battalion. Information had been passed to the
ground troops that a group of British Marines had been
spotted by aircraft on 4 December. The pilots that
spotted the British contingents noticed that the word
“help” was imprinted in the snow. Other planes air-
dropped food and supplies to ensure that the troops
could hold out until the help they requested could ar-
rive. The men had become isolated while Task Force
Drysdale was under attack on the night of 29–30 No-
vember. The 2nd Battalion retrieves the entire group of
twenty-two British Marines.
By 1700, the remaining units of RCT 7 arrive at
Koto-ri. In the meantime, the divisional trains had
begun their departure on the previous day and while en
route, stiff Chinese opposition continues to impede
progress. Artillerymen and others, including clerks and
headquarters personnel, act as infantry to defend the
convoys.
Also, the Division Headquarters Company convoy,
which had departed Hagaru late on the previous day,
again encounters stiff opposition at about 0130. Ma-
rine Corps Night-Fighter squadrons arrive to provide
some air cover, while the Marines attempt to beat back
U.S. Marines halt at a bridge destroyed by Chinese Communists during the march to Humnang. Bridge
sections are dropped by planes and Marine engineers secure a crossing.
December 7, 1950
the attack. The planes neutralize the Chinese until just
prior to dawn. By that time, a contingent of about
thirty Chinese close against the convoy, which also has
a large contingent of Chinese POWs within the col-
umn. As the MPs continue to keep vigil on the prison-
ers, while defending against the attack, the prisoners
come under intentional fire from the attacking enemy
forces. The Chinese prisoners who had been contained
along the road immediately attempt to break, which
places them in the sights of the Chinese and the
Marines. Of the 160 POWs, 137 are killed. The
wounded POWs had been left at Hagaru.
Soon after the fierce exchange, the convoy reiniti-
ates its advance and upon entering the vicinity of
Pusong-ni, a brief firefight develops as a small contin-
gent of enemy troops, concealed in houses in the village,
are captured.
The convoy, after reaching Hell Fire Valley at about
dawn, halts progress. At the time, there is no enemy
resistance; however, the troops receive the grim task of
surveying the field where many of the members of Task
Force Drysdale had died. A detail attempts to identify
the bodies of the headquarters personnel and MPs there,
to provide information for the contingents that later
will arrive to remove the bodies.
Afterwards, the convoy rolls into Koto-ri at about
1000. Other units follow and by about 2300, the only
units not yet at Koto-ri are the contingents of the 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, the rear guard. The final ele-
ments depart at slightly after noon, just ahead of the
major explosion detonated by the engineers that
destroyed the town and prevented the Chinese from
December 7, 1950 590

An aerial view of the route taken by the 1st Marine Division from Koto-ri to Hamhung. The mountains
are full of Chinese troops. The part of the bridge blown by the Chinese can be seen on the right.

acquiring any supplies or ammunition still in the vil-
lage.
The Marines at Koto-ri prepare for the next phase of
the breakout, which commences on the following day.
Meanwhile, planes attached to Combat Cargo Com-
mand arrive to deliver food and supplies, and when
they depart, they evacuate the wounded. In addition,
eight C-119s drop bridge sections to the troops to pro-
vide a means to cross a treacherous gorge with a depth
of 1,500 feet. This is the first bridge to be delivered by
air in the history of warfare. The bridges arrive by para-
chute. Some sections are damaged and one section lands
 591 December 7, 1950

Top: The 27th Fighter Escort Wing (Bergstrom Air Force Base) introduces the F-84 Thunderjet into com-
bat in Korea on 7 December. Bottom: Marine casualties (many from frostbite) in the vicinity of Changjin
Reservoir wait to be evacuated for medical aid.

within Chinese positions; however, the ingenuity of
the engineers prevails and with some modifications, the
engineers are prepared to erect the span. Still, the dis-
tance between the engineers at Koto-ri and where the
bridge is to be erected stands several miles away.
Several Chinese strong points, including Hill 1328,
a mass that stood south and southwest of the village
and Hill 1081, another huge threat located a few miles
north of the village, remain in the way. The drive to
reduce the obstacles is scheduled for 8 December. Also,
the operations at Yonpo Airfield are beginning to wind
down. Marine Squadron VMF-214 returns to the USS
Sicily. VMF-214 had moved to Itami on December 4,
but by about 15 December, the squadron will operate
from the USS Bataan. In conjunction, the 1st Marine
Air Wing is commanded by Major General Field Har-
ris.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker continues
preparations to withdraw to the new line, Line A, to be
established along the Haeju–Sin’gye–Inchon Line. The
operation to pull back is to begin on the following day;
however, new orders arrive from Far East Command
and the plan will be modified.
Meanwhile, patrols continue to operate from both the
December 8, 1950
I and IX Corps in search of the location of the Chi-
nese. The 1st Cavalry Division, which had engaged
some North Koreans at the village of Koksan on the
previous day, dispatches a contingent back to the village
this day, but no enemy troops are encountered.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces’ B-29s bomb
targets in the vicinity of the Changjin Reservoir to pro-
vide some relief to the Marines and attached units of X
Corps, while they fight their way from Hagaru-ri amd
Koto-ri (see also, In the X Corps area, this day.)
— In Japan: A major conference is held in Tokyo to
deal with the deteriorating situation in Korea. The at-
tendees include General MacArthur, Admirals Joy and
Struble, General Stratemeyer (Air Force Far East Com-
mand), Lt. General Shepherd, USMC, and General
Collins, Army Chief of Staff. The group discusses the
various possibilities available to forestall disaster in
Korea, based on all available information received from
intelligence reports as well as the convictions of the
commanders in the field.
At the conclusion of the meeting, based on what is
and is not considered conceivable, a decision is made to
rely basically on the blueprint provided by General
Wright of G-3 (Staff Operations and Training). This
strategy calls for the sea lift of X Corps at Hungnam,
from where it can be transported to southeastern Korea
to permit it to converge with Eighth Army to galva-
nize the strength of both units for a more solid block of
resistance against the advancing Chinese armies, now es-
timated to number nearly 170,000 troops. A series of
potential defensive lines are to be established, four of
these above Seoul, with the defense of Seoul to be para-
mount; however, if the positions there become unten-
able, and only then, General Walker will be authorized
Marine riflemen are deployed along an icy road to defend against an attack during the breakout from
Koto-ri.
592
to relinquish it. The fourth and final line above Seoul
is to run across the peninsula in its entirety, extending
east to west from the coast to the Imjin River. The final
lines are spaced between the South Korean capital, with
the last one to be set up in the vicinity of Pusan.
In conjunction, MacArthur informs Generals Walker
and Almond by radio that new orders concerning the
general withdrawal will arrive on the following day.
December 8 General Walker receives new or-
ders (Order Number 5) that establish the guidelines
for the withdrawal of Eighth Army and the incorpora-
tion of X Corps into Army. MacArthur’s order sets up
nine specific lines of defense. Walker begins to imple-
ment the plan. He switches from his original line to
the one designated by Far East Command. The new
line (Line B) is nearly identical to Line A; however, as
it stretches from east to west, according to MacArthur’s
directive, at Hwach’on the westward section swings
southwest along the lower bank of the Imjin and Han
Rivers, which shortens the line somewhat on that side,
while it maintains the original eastward line from the
village. The defense of Seoul is to be at this line. The
various units are directed to initiate movement to their
respective positions.
In the X Corps area, the Marines of the 1st Division
and attached forces at Koto-ri begin to depart en route
to the coast at Hungnam. The Chinese remain in the
area in great numbers, yet Koto-ri has not come under
a major attack since the night of 28–29 November.
The town, however, remains surrounded and the
breakout is not expected to be less difficult than the
twelve miles the troops had already traveled from Ha-
garu. About ten thousand troops arrived at Koto-ri
 593 December 8, 1950

U.S. planes drop supplies to elements of 1st Marine Division at the Changjin Reservoir as it fights its
way to Hungnam.

from Hagaru. The diminutive village, on 8 December,
is crammed with more than 14,000 men, including the
Marines and U.S. Army troops already there. The Ma-
rine garrison at Koto-ri amounts to 2,640 troops, bol-
stered by 1,535 U.S. Army troops and twenty-five
British Royal Marine Commandos. The new arrivals
from Hagaru include 9,046 Marines, 818 U.S. Army,
125 British Royal Marine Commandos and 25 ROK
Police (attached to the 5th Marines).
While the operation unfolds at Koto-ri, engineers
December 8, 1950 594

Top: General O.P. Smith, commanding officer of the 1st Marine Division, pays a final tribute to the eighty-
five Marines who remained at Yudam-ni. Bottom: Marine tanks awaiting the order to depart Koto-ri.
 595 December 8, 1950

An armored column of 1st Marine Division prepares to move from Koto-ri on 8 December. A Pershing
M26 is in foreground. The other tanks are Sherman M4s.

widen the airstrip to provide access for larger planes to
transport the wounded; however, the 1st Marine Divi-
sion still must fight through the enemy forces. All those
not seriously wounded continue with the breakout col-
umn. In the meantime, the Chinese, pragmatic in their
choices of direct attack against the Marines, continue
to mount obstacles, including blowing bridges, but they
mount no offensives against the main body of the 1st
Marine Division at Koto-ri.
Daybreak on 8 December brings yet another obstacle
December 9, 1950
into the picture. A fresh snowstorm saturates the area.
At 0800, the Marines press forward to take out the op-
position in the vicinity of Funchilin Pass, which dom-
inates the route to Hungnam. The heights north of the
pass are held by the Chinese. RCT-7 (reinforced) drives
south toward the hill mass at Hill 1328. Two objec-
tives stand at the hill, one southwest of the village and
the other south, known as Objectives A and B respec-
tively, held by elements of the CCF 60th Division. After
reducing both, the 7th Marines are to sprint forward to
the next objective, slightly less than three miles from
Koto-ri.
In the meantime, RCT-5 drives towards another ob-
stacle, Hill 1457, known as Objective D, at a point
about two and one-half miles south of the village. Si-
multaneously, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, head north
from Chinhung-ni to reduce Hill 1081, while the re-
mainder of RCT-1 (reinforced) holds fast at Koto-ri to
defend the trains (convoy). In the 1st Battalion zone,
Company A, led by Captain Barrow, moves to gain the
summit of Hill 1181, while Company C, under Cap-
tain Wray, drives against its southwestern tip.
Meanwhile, Company B, commanded by Captain
Noren, presses against the enemy on the southern slope
of Hill 1181. Baker Company strikes with surprise and
gains an enemy command post, where the Chinese had
apparently been preparing breakfast. The rice contin-
ues to boil as the exchange ensues. Although the 1st
Battalion had not yet been engaged in a major battle
during the period at the reservoir, its skills had not been
dulled. The defenders at the southern slope are killed,
except for those who flee. Company B sustains 3 killed
and 6 wounded. Company A also uses the snow and
the element of surprise to take out the defenders on the
summit. One nasty machine gun blocks passage for a
short while, but it is eliminated and afterwards, the re-
maining defenders in the bunker are immediately
wiped out or killed as they attempt to flee from the
crest. About sixty Chinese are killed. Company A sus-
tains 10 killed, primarily from the machine gun nest,
and 11 wounded.
In the meantime, Company C holds at its objective
on the southwestern tip of the mass, but Company A
remains under pressure. At about midnight, the Chi-
nese launch an attack against Company A, but it fails.
To the area south of Koto-ri, the Chinese raise tena-
cious resistance against RCT-7 and impede its progress.
Despite using the reserves, Hill 1328 remains under
Chinese control, while the 3rd Battalion regroups. The
objective falls on the following day. Other elements of
the 7th Marines, attacking in support of the 3rd Bat-
talion, 7th Marines, encounter stiff resistance in the
vicinity of Hill 1304. In conjunction, RCT-5, also at-
tacking southward, seizes its initial objectives. The high
ground near the northern entrance to Funchilin Pass is
taken by the U.S. Army Provisional Battalion (attached
to RCT-5) without opposition. From there, the provi-
sional battalion jumps off and takes the ground at the
northwestern tip of Hill 1457, against no opposition.
By 1330, the battalion secures its sector and holds-
596
for the remainder of the day. The 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, holds at Koto-ri until about noon and then
moves against Hill 1457. While Company C drives up
the slopes, it joins with elements of the Army Provi-
sional Battalion, and the two contingents combine their
strength to clear the hill while Company B seizes the
heights and provides cover fire for Company C’s as-
sault. By mid-afternoon, the objective is seized and by
dusk, night positions are established as Companies B
and C form with the provisional troops.
Meanwhile, Company A establishes a separate
perimeter along the main supply route. The rear posi-
tions are covered by the British Royal Marines, who
deploy in the high ground to protect against enemy in-
filtration from the rear of the 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines. Darkness and more frigid temperatures over-
take the area and the day ends without reaching the
blown bridge. Nonetheless, the Chinese still resist
launching a major assault against the 1st Marine Divi-
sion.
Although there had been no major setbacks, the most
grim part of the day at Koto-ri came about when there
was no means of transporting the dead that had been
brought in or retrieved from the field along the route
from Hagaru. One hundred Marines, soldiers and
Royal Marine commandos are interred at Koto-ri on
this day.
The area surrounding Koto-ri also continues to be the
gathering place for Korean civilians, intent on moving
through the Communists to reach Hungnam. The
civilians are not permitted to enter the perimeter due
to the infiltration of Communist troops; however, some
medical assistance is offered to the civilians who had
lost everything except what they carried with them.
One small incident of joy occurs as U.S. Navy person-
nel assist two pregnant women who give birth. In the
Eighth Army area, a new UN unit, the Greek Expedi-
tion Force, arrives in Korea. It will be attached to the
U.S. 7th Cavalry.
December 9 In the X Corps sector, at Koto-ri, the
breakout continues as the 1st Marine Division and its
attached forces reinitiate the attacks to clear passage
along the main supply route leading to Hungnam.
North of Koto-ri, one obstacle still impedes progress,
but as dawn emerges and the skies are clear, the Marines
in the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines (RCT-1), are aware
that air cover is en route. The Chinese raise heavy re-
sistance, but the persistence of Company A prevails,
despite the elements and the tenacity of the enemy.
Company A, which had departed Koto-ri with 223
Marines at about 1500, take possession of the hill with
a strength of 112 men.
At the instant of victory, the number is cut by one,
as Staff Sergeant Ernest J. Umbaugh is killed. Umbaugh
had led a heroic mission at the onset of the fight for
the hill by charging with a squad to destroy a Chinese
bunker with grenades to open the way to the summit.
The Marines of Company A, during the ascent to
the crest, eliminate 550 Chinese defenders. Meanwhile,
 597 December 9, 1950

Top: Marine Corps tanks shepherd the ground troops during the fighting withdrawal to Hungnam. Bot-
tom: U.S. Navy and Marine Corps planes pound enemy positions in the mountains in front of a Marine
column.
December 10, 1950
The 1st Marine Division on 9 December resumes its march to Hamhung after engineers repair a destroyed
bridge. The bridge sections were air dropped, the first time in the history of warfare that a bridge was
delivered by parachute.
Company B, also operating north of Koto-ri, takes its
initial objective on the slopes without opposition.
Company A’s domination of the Funchilin Pass greatly
improves the chances of success of the breakout. In the
RCT-5 sector, the 1st Battalion maintains its positions
at Hill 1457 (Objective C). The remainder of the RCT-
5 makes final preparations to depart Koto-ri, sched-
uled for 10 December.
In RCT-7’s sector, south of Koto-ri, the attack ad-
vances against the remnant resistance on Hill 1304. It
is taken by Company A, led by Lieutenant Hovatter,
while Company B, commanded by Lieutenant Taylor,
drives to its next objective (Objective C) a nose above
the main supply route, slightly more than two miles
south of Koto-ri. RCT-7 maneuvers freely, as most
Chinese defenders have vanished and those who pop
up as conspicuous targets are very speedily disposed of
by the air cover.
Company C, led by Captain Morris and bolstered
by one platoon (Company B), encounters some resist-
ance at the site of the blown bridge, but the ground is
seized, which opens the way for the engineers to bridge
the gap and provide the exit route to Hungnam. By
1530, the span is erected and in the process the engineers
improvise with plywood to place panels on the treadways
to allow passage of the tanks and the trucks. The bridge
undergoes its stability test at 1800, when the first vehi-
cles begin the descent. Trouble strikes early, as one of
the vehicles, towing earth-moving equipment, col-
598
lapses one of the plywood panels. The mishap halts all
traffic and unhinges the entire day’s work. The Marines
again improvise as Lieutenant Colonel Partridge as-
sesses the damage and concludes that with some alter-
ations, the span can be adjusted to handle the traffic,
if the treadways get realigned at the furthest space pos-
sible, setting the planks at points to handle the jeeps as
well as the M-26s. Subsequent to extricating the stalled
equipment, the traffic stood ready and the first jeep
barely passes over with no room to spare while its tires
rub against the sides. Nonetheless, the span holds and
the remaining traffic follows.
At about 0245 on the morning of 10 December, the
vanguard of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, moves into
Chinhung-ni, a position protected by the 3rd U.S. In-
fantry Division.
In other activity, Amphibious Task Force (TF 90)
evacuates the 1st ROK Corps from Songjin.
In Air Force activity, Combat Cargo Command, fol-
lowing two straight weeks of supplying the trapped X
Corps troops in northeastern Korea, ends the mission.
The planes (C-119 and C-47s) of the participating
units had executed 350 flights. During the operation,
just under 5,000 sick and wounded troops are evacu-
ated and the planes deliver 1,580 tons of supplies, in-
cluding ammunition and equipment.
December 10 In the X Corps area, the 1st Marine
Division and attached units continue their withdraw
 599
from Koto-ri to Hungnam. The convoy had encoun-
tered some difficulty en route, but after the delays, traf-
fic reinitiated its movement against sporadic opposi-
tion. The lead elements in the convoy arrive at
Chinhung-ni at about 0830, on the heels of the van-
guard of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, which had ar-
rived about 0400. Chinese remain in the area in con-
cealed positions, including the village of Sudong, and
other Chinese troops in large numbers are spotted east
of Hill 1081 during the latter part of the morning.
Earlier, Company G, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines,
came under attack on Hill 1328 (Objective A), but the
assault was repulsed. Once the enemy sightings are con-
firmed, a massive artillery bombardment is initiated
and it is supported by air strikes, which when com-
bined, overwhelm and destroy large numbers of Chi-
nese in the valley as they move southward, oblivious to
the horrific numbers of slain troops in their midst.
Meanwhile, at about 1300, Company B, 1st Battalion,
1st Marines, pounds against a Chinese stronghold near
the railroad, located north of where the 1st Battalion was
deployed. With the support of air cover, the area is re-
duced.
Task Force Dog (3rd Infantry Division) is posted at
Chinhung-ni and other U.S. Army units attached to
the 65th Infantry Regiment are deployed in the vicin-
ity of Sudong and Madjong-dong, in an effort to keep
The port at Hungnam is crammed with supplies that are being loaded in conjunction with the abandon-
ment of the port city.
December 10, 1950
the main supply route clear. The division trains and
the 5th and 7th Marines move through Sudong with-
out incident; however, subsequent to darkness, the
Chinese block passage just outside Sudong. Elements of
the 65th Infantry Regiment reduce the obstacle. After-
ward, it is assumed that the road is open; however, by
midnight, the Chinese bolt from their positions in the
village of Sudong and stun the convoy. The initial mo-
ments inflict casualties on some of the drivers. The
trucks attached to RCT-1, caught in the unusual am-
bush, are set afire, causing great confusion within the
ranks.
Lieutenant Colonel John U.D. Page, USA, and Ma-
rine PFC Marvin L. Wasson move to the midst of the
confusion and restore order, simultaneously eliminat-
ing about twenty Chinese at the head of the stalled col-
umn. Page is killed in the exchange; PFC Wasson re-
turns to the fray wounded. Another U.S. Army officer,
Lieutenant Colonel Waldon C. Winston, takes com-
mand and leads a counterattack with troops of the 52nd
Transportation Truck Battalion, USA, and Marines.
Wasson ignores his injuries and takes out an entire
house with several rounds from a 75-mm recoilless rifle.
The inhabitants that make it outside are then liqui-
dated by machine gun fire.
Wasson’s determination and his actions impress Lieu-
tenant Colonel Winston, who nicknames Wasson “The
December 10, 1950
Some of the thousands of Chinese dead who tried to annihilate the 1st Marine Division during its march
to Hungnam.
Spirit of 76.” Lt. Colonel Page is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary heroism
during the period 29 November–10 December.
Nevertheless, the MSR remains unpassable until
dawn. The donnybrook had also cost RCT-1 nine ve-
hicles and one armored personnel carrier. PFC Was-
son, who had been wounded prior to destroying the
enemy strong point, further aids the cause by pushing
stalled vehicles off the road while their cargo of am-
munition is exploding.
In the 3rd Battalion sector, 1st Marines zone, the bat-
talion abandons its positions at the Hill 1328 mass
south of Koto-ri at about 2100 and descends to join
the column. A column of tanks trails the regimental
column in a change of strategy to ensure that if a tank
stalls, it will not halt the column. However, with the
tanks in the rear, other difficulties emerge, as the armor
is just ahead of throngs of civilians, interlaced with Chi-
nese troops who pose as refugees.
The forty tanks are protected only by a Marine
Corps reconnaissance company. Slowly and cautiously,
the tankers maneuver the serpentine paths that are
600
layered with ice. The reconnaissance troops guard the
flanks with extra vigil on the trailing civilians. While
the lead elements continue to advance, problems de-
velop in the rear when one of the tanks becomes a vic-
tim of the weather. Its brakes freeze. Thirty-one of the
tanks are unaffected, but the stalled tank and the eight
behind it remain stranded about two thousand yards
from the temporary bridge at the pass.
Pandemonium sets in when a small group of Chi-
nese approaches the rear guard and pulls off a ruse, pre-
tending to surrender, only to open fire from close-range
amid the civilians. The platoon commander, Lieuten-
ant Hargett, attempts to check out the Chinese, and
as they open fire, his carbine misfires due to the
weather. Meanwhile, the encounter at close-range also
includes enemy burp guns and grenades. Hargett uses
his carbine as a club and beats one of the Chinese to
death, but in the process, he is wounded by grenade
fragments. Corporal A.J. Amyotte, a BAR man, takes
out the other four Chinese.
As the platoon withdraws, the last tank in the stalled
column is abandoned to other Chinese troops and the
 601
next in line is also lost. As the reconnaissance troops
move forward, they pass the other vacated tanks. Fi-
nally, the stalled tank is repaired and it and one other
is salvaged. Both scurry toward the bridge.
During the fighting an explosion knocked one Ma-
rine, PFC McDermott, unconscious, and it is assumed
by the others nearby that he had been killed. The crew-
men of the last two tanks in the column are lost and in
addition, the reconnaissance platoon sustains three men
MIA and twelve wounded. Two of the missing are later
reported as killed; however, McDermott later regains
consciousness and manages to use a bypass of the blown
bridge with the civilians. Later he rejoins his unit. Once
the two tanks clear the bridge, the engineers there (be-
lieving all able Marines have made the break) blow the
bridge. The column completes the last phase of the
U.S. army troops (X Corps) guard a pass about twelve miles north of Hamhung during the evacuation
of the port city.
December 11, 1950
move from Koto-ri at 1300 on 11 December, when the
final elements arrive.
Also, VMF-311, the initial USMC jet squadron to
participate in combat sorties, begins its support of the
ongoing withdrawal of X Corps. Twelve F9Fs arrive at
Yonpo, from where the squadrons operate until 14 De-
cember; afterwards they operate from Pusan.
In the Eighth Army area, a naval convoy from Songsin
debarks elements of the South Korean Capital Divi-
sion to hold the perimeter at Seoul during the opera-
tion to evacuate the city.
December 11 General MacArthur arrives in
Korea from Japan to observe firsthand the situation and
to confer with Generals Walker and Almond, com-
manders of the Eighth Army and X Corps respectively.
December 11, 1950 602

Top: A U.S. Army artillery contingent prepares to fire against enemy positions north of Hamhung. Mid-
dle: Tanks carrying ground troops move through a village in the vicinity of Kaesong, the former capital
of North Korea, during the Eighth Army withdrawal toward Seoul. Bottom: Buildings burn at Sibyon-
ni during the Eighth Army withdrawal toward Seoul.
 603
X Corps in northeastern Korea becomes MacArthur’s
first stop. Following a conference with General Almond,
he proceeds to General Walker’s headquarters to hold a
discussion on the Eighth Army plans to withdraw and
on the importance of holding control of Seoul.
In the X Corps area, the final elements of the 1st Ma-
rine Division and attached units arrive in the
Hamhung–Hungnam sector to conclude the breakout
from Hagaru. The 1st Marine Division casualties, since
it departed Koto-ri on 8 December, amount to 51
killed (24 die of wounds), 16 missing and 256
wounded. The 1st Marine Division, upon its arrival at
Hungnam, had reversed the Chinese plans. The over-
whelming forces thrown into the region to surround
the Marines and annihilate the division failed. Instead,
the 1st Marine Division fought its way along a sixty-
mile route, and through the support of air cover, dev-
astated the Chinese forces it encountered.
The fighting withdrawal of the 1st Marine Division,
which was at the time unaware that it had been writ-
ten off by many in the United States, evolves as the
greatest achievement of a trapped American fighting
force in the history of the United States. Between six and
eight Chinese divisions were planted to wipe out the
Marines and they failed, while sustaining overwhelm-
ing casualties that greatly impeded their ability to
mount a full scale invasion against Hungnam. The Chi-
nese up to this point have not yet attempted to col-
lapse the perimeter, which is defended by contingents
of the U.S. 3rd Division and the U.S. 7th Division.
Enemy attacks are anticipated from three separate
directions: along the coast from the northeast, from the
Changjin Reservoir area, and from a southern point at
Wonsan. Chinese advances had essentially severed any
possible route back to South Korea over land. The evac-
uation is scheduled by sea and as long as possible, from
the airfield at Hungnam. General Almond’s evacuation
plan calls for the 1st Marine Division to depart first, fol-
lowed by the 7th and 3rd Infantry Divisions. It be-
comes a challenging operation to protect the perimeter
while abandoning Hungnam.
Also, the South Korean Marines (1st Korean Marine
Corps Regiment), which had been attached to the U.S.
3rd Division, moves to the airfield at Yonpo, from
where it will be evacuated by air. During the opera-
tion, air cover is provided by the Navy and Marine
Corps and in addition, U.S. naval vessels offshore re-
main to provide protection if their guns are needed.
The Allied forces to be evacuated number more than
100,000 men and more than 18,000 vehicles. Endan-
gered supplies weigh in at about 350,000 tons, plac-
ing a Herculean task upon Admiral Doyle. His trans-
port group numbers about 125 ships, but the number
is insufficient to handle the operation with only one
visit to the port. Some vessels would be required to
make additional trips to the port at Hungnam. The
troops and the transports get additional protection as
seven aircraft carriers move into the area to ensure non-
stop air cover. The U.S. Navy also had moved one bat-
tleship, seven destroyers, two cruisers and several rocket
December 12, 1950
ships into the area to form a line stretching from ten
miles south of Hungnam to a point about ten miles
north of the port.
December 12 In the X Corps sector, at Hungnam,
the evacuation operation continues. By the following
day, the 5th and 7th Marines begin to board the vessels.
In other activity, Brigadier General Edward A. Craig,
assistant division commander, and an advance party
are flown from Hungnam to Masan to prepare it for
the arrival of the 1st Marine Division, which is to as-
semble there. Masan is located on the Bay of Masan
about forty miles west of Pusan. The Marines are famil-
iar with Masan, as it is where the 1st Provisional Ma-
rine Brigade assembled at the Bean Patch following the
Battle of the Naktong during the previous August.
Also, Marine Corps reports that division casualties
during the fighting at and after the Chosin Reservoir
when the Marines broke out stands at between 3,000
and 3,300, including those missing in action.
In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army establishes a
defensive perimeter north of Seoul to protect the cap-
ital. I Corps had withdrawn into Hamhung–Hung-
nam perimeter. General Walker continues to work out
the details of the withdrawal lines. With Line B now es-
tablished above Seoul, the new addition, Line C, is pre-
pared. It will be initiated along the lower bank of the
Han River and extend northeast to the village of
Hongch’on and from there it will lead eastward to
Wonpo-ri. In addition, Line D is drawn about forty-
five miles below Seoul, where it extends from the west
coast running in a northeastwardly direction through
several villages, including P’yongt’aek, Ansong and
Wonju, before terminating at the east coast port of
Wonpo-ri.
These two lines are to give Eighth Army a buffer
zone if they are compelled to relinquish Seoul, but
Walker also believes these lines to be mandatory, due to
his perception that the ROKs, who will bear responsi-
bility for a large part of Eighth Army’s eastern line, will
give way once attacked in strength, thereby jeopardiz-
ing the Eighth Army forces still above Seoul.
Meanwhile, with the Chinese now facing Eighth
Army and X Corps in great strength, all possibilities
must be considered. Walker directs Eighth Army units
in the north to head south, while he orders ROK units
northward toward Line B. During the operation, which
continues until December 22, the Chinese remain in-
conspicuous and only some North Korean troops con-
test the withdrawals. However, both corps, I and IX, ex-
perience difficulty with the unending lines of refugees
that trail the columns and clog the roads.
In conjunction, the U.S. 2nd Division continues to
rebuild its strength, subsequent to the beating it took
during the previous November. At this time it is unpre-
pared for the field and is already below Seoul. Although
the Chinese have yet to take the offensive, Walker has
concluded that Seoul can he held only if the South Ko-
reans don’t fold, for if they do, much of Eighth Army
will get caught above Seoul. However, Walker also
December 13, 1950
The march is over. Marines at Hungnam hurry aboard a U.S. Navy troopship, where they will receive
some hot Navy food.
anticipates the IX Corps’ arrival, which will bolster his
line and give Eighth Army the ability to hold the cap-
ital.
— In Japan: The Anti-Submarine Hunter Killer
Group (TG 96.7), composed of the USS Bairoko (CVE
115) and Destroyer Division 32, initiates exercises off
eastern Hunshu. The force is bolstered by submarines
attached to Submarine Group (CTG 96.9). Also, Com-
mand, East Coast Blockading and Patrol Task Group
(CTG 95.2) (COMCRUDIV 5), establishes East Coast
Korea Blockade Patrol Element (TE 95.22). TE-95.22
is subsequently renamed TG 95.5.
December 13 In the X Corps sector, the evacua-
tion of Hungnam continues. At 1500, General Oliver
P. Smith, USMC, attends the graveside services for the
troops interred at the cemetery there and afterwards,
he moves aboard the USS Bayfield, where he re-
establishes his command post for the 1st Marine Divi-
sion. Elements of the division continue to board, while
the U.S. 3rd and 7th Infantry Divisions maintain the
perimeter. No Chinese attacks are mounted against the
city. While the evacuation continues, Marine planes at
Yonpo continue to strike Chinese positions.
December 14 In the X Corps sector, USMC
squadrons at Yonpo cease operations in conjunction
with the final phase of the abandonment of Hungnam.
The field there remains in operation to continue airlift-
ing the wounded from the area. The Marine land-based
fighters there move to Japan.
In Air Force activity, Combat Cargo Command ini-
tiates its abandonment of Yonpo Airfield near
Hamhung in conjunction with the approach of Chinese
units.
604
In other activity, the U.S. Air Force drops its initial
Tarzon bomb, which is a 6-ton version of the Razon
bomb.
— In the United States: In the United Nations, the
General Assembly passes a resolution calling for a cease-
fire in Korea. A contingent of representatives is selected
to sit at a peace table with the leaders of the Commu-
nists. It is to be an enduring ordeal, as the Commu-
nists, when they do attend, are arrogant and unwilling
to seek compromise. Rather, the Chinese Communists,
under the wing of the Soviets, humiliate the Allies with
a continuous string of unending obstacles as they main-
tain their quest to wrest South Korea from its liberty.
December 15 In the X Corps sector, the 1st Ma-
rine Division completes its boarding of vessels at Hung-
nam and embarks for Pusan. The Marines had arrived
at Hungnam from Koto-ri on 11 December. Hung-
nam remains under the protection of the 3rd and 7th
U.S. Infantry Divisions, which are also in the process of
abandoning Hungnam. Some Marines remain there to
assist with the final phases of the evacuation. The units
include elements of the Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison
Company and the 1st Amphibious Tractor Battalion.
By this time, the 1st Marine Air Wing has been re-
deployed at Japan, Pusan and aboard carriers. In con-
junction, the initial naval gunfire support at Hungnam
commences with night harassing missions, executed by
the USS St. Paul (CA 73). Also, air control is trans-
ferred from 1st Marine Air Wing Tactical Air Direction
Center to the USS Mt. McKinley (AGC 7). The wing’s
command post transfers to Itami Air Force Base, Japan.
The Marine fighter squadrons and VMO-6 (heli-
copters and light fixed wing planes) play a dominant
 605
U.S. F-86 Sabre jets. The F-86 made its initial appearance (4th Fighter Interceptor Group, USAF) in
Korea on 15 December 1950.
role in safely concluding the breakout. VMO-6, dur-
ing the period 28 October to 15 December, executed
1,544 flights in support of the 1st Marine Division and
at times, isolated Marine units had contact only with
VMO-6.
Also, along the 3rd Division perimeter at Hungnam,
Chinese forces mount attacks in the vicinity of Chi-
gyong and Orori. The lines have already been thinned
due to the loss of the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regi-
ment, which had moved to Yonpo, from where it was
to be airlifted to its new assembly area in South Korea.
The 3rd Division anticipated pulling back to the next
line on the following day; however, the probing enemy
assaults prompt General Soule to pull back during the
afternoon of 15 December.
In the Eighth Army area, General Walker orders the
1st Cavalry Division to advance to positions northeast
of Seoul to establish a blockage in the event the Chinese
attempt to move against the capital from the village of
Chunchon.
Also, the bulk of army headquarters departs Seoul
for Taegu. Meanwhile, Walker remains concerned
about the forces west of Seoul, as their destiny depends
greatly on the performance of the South Koreans along
the eastern side of the line if an enemy attack com-
mences. A small contingent of headquarters will re-
main in the capital.
In Air Force activity, the 4th Fighter Interceptor
Group introduces the F-86 Sabrejet into its operations
in Korea. Also, Far East Air Forces Bomber Command
launches its initial mission on a new sector interdiction
plan.
— In the United States: President Truman declares
a state of national emergency.
December 16 In the X Corps sector, the Chinese
press against the perimeter at Hungnam. They strike
heavily against the north and west portions of the de-
fensive line, defended by the U.S. 3rd Division. The
probing action is carried out by elements of the Chinese
81st Division (Chinese 27th Army).
While the military commanders continue to control
the evacuation of the port and forestall enemy pene-
tration of the perimeter, other problems develop as Ko-
rean refugees in large numbers flood into the area. The
December 17, 1950
civilians create a huge problem, including the in-
evitability of enemy troops masquerading among the
throngs entering the perimeter.
Simultaneously with the withdrawal of the combat
troops, the defensive line continues to thin out. The
U.S. 7th Division began its embarkation on 14 De-
cember, beginning with the 31st Infantry Regiment
and other units that had been at the Chosin Reservoir
with the Marines. Other units that followed included
the 1st Battalion, 32nd Infantry Regiment, and the
57th Field Artillery Battalion. In the meantime, the re-
mainder of the 32nd Infantry forms a part of the pro-
tective line. The ROK I Corps, relieved by the 32nd In-
fantry, withdraws from the line still held by elements of
the 3rd and 7th Divisions at the Songch’on River.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the Division com-
mand post is established at Masan. The 1st Marine Di-
vision is being placed into Eighth Army reserve from X
Corps, effective 18 December. The transfer of all units,
except VMO-6 and some smaller specialist units, from
Hungnam to Masan will be completed by the follow-
ing day.
General O.P. Smith is concerned about his Marines,
particularly since they had struggled during the Chosin
Reservoir operation, which took a high toll on their
physical strength. General Smith, soon after arriving
at Masan, informs the commander of Naval Force Far
East, Admiral Joy, that the Marines had only enjoyed
fresh food on three days since they had arrived in Korea.
Admiral Joy reacts quickly by dispatching a refrigera-
tion vessel, which arrives at Masan with 50,000 rations
of turkey.
— In the United States: President Truman issues a
Declaration of National Security (national emergency),
attempting to inspire Americans during the crisis in
Korea. He requests that they become even more neigh-
borly and make whatever sacrifices are necessary for the
welfare of the nation. Truman declares: “World con-
quest by Communist Imperialism is the goal of the
forces of aggression that have been loosed upon the
world.”
December 17 At Hungnam, the ROK I Corps
embarks for Samch’ok, where it is to redeploy as part
of the defensive line of Eighth Army. Other units that
December 17, 1950 606

Left: Two U.S. soldiers transport items, including stove pipes, on their backs en route from Pyongyang
to the 38th Parallel. Right: A. U.S. soldier gets a haircut during a blizzard.

U.S. troops (Eighth Army) erect barbed wire obstacles north of Seoul.
 607
A U.S. Army tank keeps a vigil for the enemy while a contingent of Eighth Army soldiers digs foxholes
as part of the defense of Seoul.
depart include the majority of troops attached to X
Corps headquarters, which embark for Kyongju, where
an advance command post is to be established. The 3rd
Division elements in the vicinity of the Yonpo airfield
prepare to withdraw to the next line of defense, in con-
junction with the abandonment of the airfield. Another
temporary airstrip in close proximity to the harbor is
used to transport the remaining wounded.
In Air Force activity, a patrol composed of F-86 Sabre
jets encounters a contingent of MiGs, the first time the
Sabres spot MiGs. Lt. Colonel Bruce H. Hinton, 4th
Fighter Interceptor Group, receives credit for the first
kill of a MiG by a Sabre.
In other activity, Combat Cargo Command, which
began to evacuate Yonpo Airfield on the 15th, com-
pletes the operation on this day. During the period De-
cember 14–17, the units evacuate 228 sick and
wounded, and 3,891 other people. Also, the planes
carry out 20,088 tons of cargo.
December 18 The 1st Marine Division, which
sailed from Hungnam on 15 December, is assigned to
Eighth Army. The orders from X Corps commander
General Almond arrive at Masan at 2240. The Marines
previously were assigned to X Corps. The Marines, after
arriving in Pusan, had moved about 30 miles to Masan
and assembled there while awaiting further orders. At
Hungnam, the airfield at nearby Yonpo ceases opera-
tions. The final elements to depart are part of the Fifth
Air Force. Marine squadrons based there had already
moved to Pusan and to a base at Itami, Japan.
While in operation during the abandonment of
December 18, 1950
Hungnam, the transport planes there evacuated about
3,600 troops and managed to transport nearly two hun-
dred vehicles. The airmen also evacuated several hun-
dred civilians. Subsequent to the closing of Hamhung
and the airfield at Yonpo, the U.S. Navy commences a
thunderous ground shaking bombardment that plasters
the entire front. Using a couple of cruisers, seven de-
stroyers and several vessels that carry rockets, the Navy
propels 34,000 shells and 12,800 rockets as a farewell to
any Chinese troops observing the withdrawal. At the tail
end of the shelling, the USS Missouri chimes in with the
other ships with its guns bringing finality to the bom-
bardment by contributing 162 16-inch shells.
Meanwhile, along the Hungnam perimeter, relief
operations continue as elements of the 3rd Division
take positions along the lower banks of the Songch’on
River, while the 7th Division units there prepare to
embark for Pusan. During the evacuation of Hung-
nam, the Chinese, this day intensify their attacks
against the perimeter. The enemy contingents that
launch the probing attacks are attached to the Chinese
79th Division; however, as the Chinese encroach, it is
thought that two other divisions, the 80th and 81st,
are also in close proximity. The attacks fail to inflict
any severe damage to the lines, although some tempo-
rary gains are made against some isolated outposts.
Also, contingents of the ROK I Corps, transported by
elements of Amphibious Task Force (TF 90), land with-
out incident at Bukuko Ko in the vicinity of Samch’ok.
— In the United States: General Dwight D. Eisen-
hower is appointed supreme commander, Allied Pow-
ers, Europe (NATO).
December 19, 1950 608

December 19 In the X Corps sector, the remain- ues boarding the evacuation vessels in the harbor. The
ing ground troops at the Hungnam perimeter pull back remaining ground troops further shrink the perimeter
to the next line. The 3rd Division units initiate relief under an umbrella of air cover.
of the 17th and 32nd Regiments (7th Division). Mean-
while, enemy forces accelerate attacks against the December 22 By this date, the 1st Marine Di-
perimeter as it shrinks. In addition to the presence of vision and the 7th Infantry Division have abandoned
elements of the Chinese (CCF) 7th Army Group, Hungnam, but the U.S. 3rd Division continues to hold
North Korean units appear in the vicinity. All enemy the line against the enemy, which is closing at a slow
incursions are turned back as the evacuation of Hung- pace. By the following day, the three regiments (7th,
nam continues. 15th and 65th) withdraw to their final line in prepa-
ration for evacuation. In the meantime, artillery units
December 20 At Hungnam, the enemy probing
and other support contingents are boarding the evacu-
attacks of the past few days subside. Large numbers of
ation transports. Despite the lack of a strong defensive
Chinese remain also in the vicinity of the Changin
line, the Chinese still initiate no major assaults. Nev-
Reservoir, but there, too, the 1st Marine Division
ertheless, some smaller scale assaults are launched
passed earlier without a major confrontation. Within the
against the line.
perimeter, General Almond relocates his headquarters
Engineers work tirelessly to ensure the imminent de-
(X Corps) from the city to the USS Mt. McKinley in the
struction of everything that cannot be evacuated from
harbor. The remaining troops along the perimeter cov-
Hungnam. The 1st Marine Air Wing units that oper-
ering the withdrawal are placed under the command
ated during the Hungnam redeployment operated from
of General Soule.
K-9 (VMF-311 Panther jets), an Air Force field near
The ROK I Corps, by this time, has been transported
Pusan; and from Itazuke, Japan (VMF[N]-542 and
by sea from northeastern Korea to Pusan and in the
VMF[N]513). The Corsair squadrons operated from
vicinity of Samch’ok for its new assignment, attach-
the USS Bataan, a light carrier (VMF-212), the light
ment to Eighth Army. The operation to move the corps
carrier Sicily (VMF-214) and the light carrier Badeong
by sea places it in position to augment Eighth Army at
Strait (VMF-323). In addition, VMO-6 operated from
its new line. The corps is attached to Army and then dis-
various Seventh Fleet ships during the evacuation of
patched to its assigned position. It will complete the
Hungnam.
move within the next few days. Walker assigns the two
In Air Force activity, the 4th Fighter Interceptor
divisions of ROK I Corps to the eastern end of the line.
Wing employs a new tactic to level the playing field
Also, elements of the U.S. 7th Division, commanded
against the MiGs that have greater speed and can climb
by Major General David G. Barr, begin to embark for
higher. The tactic consists of four flights of four Sabres,
Pusan and complete the operation by the following day.
each arriving on target at separate elevations and at five
Also, at K-9 airfield, where Marine Squadron VMF-
minute intervals. The mission, led by Lt. Colonel John
311 operates alongside and under the jurisdiction of
C. Myers (group commander), encounters a band of
Fifth Air Force, seventeen officers and fifty-one en-
MiGs and a donnybrook erupts. The battle rages at el-
listed men arrive. The new arrivals increase the
evations as high as 30,000 feet, but the opposing planes
squadron to a complement of twenty-seven pilots and
also badger each other at tree-top level in a hurricane
ninety-five enlisted men. The task of the jets of VMF-
of fire that lasts for about twenty minutes. Colonel
311 is to seek and destroy Chinese troop formations
Myers bags one MiG, his first during the Korean War.
that are gathering for an expected offensive.
Added to his World War II score of 24, the hit gives
In Naval activity, the USS Bataan (CVL 29) is de-
him 25 air victories.
tached from Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77) and reas-
Five other MiGs are downed, including one by Lt.
signed with Escort Carrier Group (TG 96.8). A short
Colonel Glenn T. Eagleston, commander of the 334th
time later, the Bataan is again transferred. It joins Fast
Fighter Interceptor Squadron. Although it is Eagle-
Carrier Task Force (TF 77) on December 24.
ston’s first kill of the Korean War, he has 18.5 kills on
In Air Force activity, Operation CHRISTMAS KIDLIFT
his record from World War II. The others are downed
commences. The Air Force takes action to prevent Ko-
by Captain James O. Roberts, 1st Lieutenant John Odi-
rean orphaned children from falling into the hands of
orne, 1st Lieutenant Arthur L. O’Connor and a U.S.
the Communists. Twelve planes (C-54s) attached to
Navy exchange pilot, Lt. Commander Paul E. Pugh.
the 61st TCG (Troop Carrier Group) evacuate 806
Pugh claims a second kill on 30 December; how-
South Korean children from Kimpo, then transport
ever, Air Force records do not confirm the claim. The
them to Cheju-Do Island, a friendly-held location off
Americans also damage two other MiGs, one plane shot
the Korean coast.
up by Captain James Jabara, who later becomes an ace.
December 21 The Chinese in the vicinity of The Communists score one kill. They down a Sabre jet
Hungnam still do not mount a major assault against flown by Captain Lawrence V. Bach. It is the first Sabre
the perimeter as the evacuation continues. As on the jet lost. The downing of six enemy planes on a single
previous day, there is no consequential activity by the day is the highest total for the month and the highest
enemy. since June.
Meanwhile, the U.S. 7th Infantry Division contin- In other activity, Headquarters Fifth Air Force,
 609
Eighth U.S. Army in Korea, and the Joint Operations
Center relocate to Taegu from Seoul.
December 23 In the X Corps sector, at Hung-
nam, the X Corps perimeter guards shrink the perime-
ter to the final phase line. Although only the U.S. 3rd
Division holds the line, still the Chinese and North
Koreans fail to mount a major offensive. Some isolated
fire strikes the perimeter, but no damage is incurred.
This is the final day in which the enemy fires upon the
troops at Hungnam.
In the Eighth Army area, the I Corps and the IX
Corps by this time have reached their respective posi-
tions along the new line (B), above Seoul. Both corps
are responsible for part of the western sector of the line,
with I Corps deployed near the lower banks of the Han
River and of the Imjin River. IX Corps takes responsi-
bility for the sector covering Routes 3 and 33, in the
vicinity of the 38th Parallel.
The South Koreans, with responsibility for the east-
ern part of the line, have encountered heavy resistance
as they attempt to advance to their new positions. In ad-
dition, the ROKs lack sufficient vehicles to transport the
troops. Nevertheless, the five South Korean divisions,
three presently in central Korea and southern Korea
and two others attached to the ROK II Corps, fail to
reach their respective positions.
Walker, aware of the dilemma, reaches deep and
brings up the ROK III Corps and two divisions of the
ROK II Corps to fill the gap. The ROK III Corps takes
positions along the middle of the eastern sector of the
line, north of Chunchon and just under Line B, along
the 38th Parallel. Their positions terminate near the
IX Corps.
Meanwhile, the ROK II Corps, up from South
Korea, plugs a gap along Route 24 to prevent the enemy
U.S. soldiers and ROKs board LCVPs at Hamhung while the evacuation of the port city continues.
December 23, 1950
from drilling through central Korea and the Hongch’on
River valley to move from there toward the capital.
ROK I Corps, recently arrived from X Corps area in
northeastern Korea, has also been assigned responsibil-
ity along the line. By this day, its two divisions are de-
ployed on the far end of the eastern line, where they
establish blocking positions along the east coast road
and at several strategic mountain paths. The addition
of the seven South Korean divisions on the line pro-
vides General Walker some protection on the eastern
side of the line; however, he continues to be concerned
about their ability to withstand an enemy onslaught.
On 23 December, Lieutenant General Walton H.
Walker is killed in a vehicular accident outside of Seoul.
General Walker is succeeded by Lieutenant General
Matthew Ridgway. In the interim, Major General
Frank W. Milburn, I Corps’ commanding officer, as-
sumes temporary command of Eighth Army.
During the morning hours, General Walker’s jeep
after departing Seoul to check the situation at Ui-
jongbu, about ten miles north of the capital, encoun-
tered a stalled column in the opposite lane heading
south. While the driver attempted to pass the trucks,
a vehicle being driven by a Korean civilian pulled out
and while heading south, his truck wound up in the
northbound lane. General Walker’s driver made an at-
tempt to evade the oncoming vehicle, but the truck
and the jeep collided, causing Walker’s jeep to roll over.
Afterwards, General Walker and the others who had
been thrown from the jeep were aided by the trailing ve-
hicles in the column, but General Walker was declared
dead at a nearby facility of the U.S. 24th Division.
In Air Force activity, A contingent of 11 U.S. troops
and 20 ROKs, trapped about eight miles behind enemy
lines, are rescued when three Air Force H-5 helicopters,
protected by fighters, arrive and extricate them.
December 24, 1950
Two soldiers (Eighth Army) in a company area eat their dinner under a Christmas tree. Other troops are
in the background on either side of the tank.
In Naval activity, the USS Charles S. Sperry (DD
697) comes under fire from enemy shore guns while it
is operating at Songjin. The vessel is hit several times.
December 24 The evacuation at Hungnam
comes to a close without a major enemy assault.
The perimeter remains unmolested by enemy fire. The
remnant units withdraw toward the wharfs, while less
than ten platoons remain deployed as rear guards. The
U.S. Navy provides its guns for added incentive to the
enemy to hold fast. Admiral Doyle’s warships plaster an
area that stretches inland for about one and one-half
miles.
At about 1430, Army engineers and Naval underwa-
ter demolition units detonate the port, which contains
a combination of four hundred tons of ammunition and
dynamite, the latter frozen. The gigantic explosion also
includes hundreds of barrels of oil and gasoline, as well
as about five hundred thousand-pound bombs.
Despite the horrific circumstances of the evacuation
of the entire X Corps, plagued by nature’s elements as
well as enemy forces, the operation concludes success-
fully. The X Corps, composed of 105,000 troops at
Hungnam, is fully evacuated without the loss of a sin-
gle man to enemy fire. After hearing of the successful
operation, President Truman sends a message to Gen-
eral Almond and Admiral Joy, expressing his gratitude:
610
“This saving of our men in this isolated beachhead is
the best Christmas present I have ever had.”
As the final vessels depart, there is still quite a bit
of high morale and a sense of sentimentality, as greet-
ings of Merry Christmas are exchanged on this most
memorable Christmas Eve. Only a short time ago,
while the 1st Marine Division was en route to Hung-
nam, Christmas was on their minds. As reported by
the Marine Corps, the optimistic message circulating
through the ranks on one particular day had
been: “Only fourteen more shooting days until Christ-
mas.”
After the capture of Chinese prisoners during the
following year, the question of why the Chinese did
not mount serious opposition at Hungnam began to
be answered. Intelligence gathered showed that the high
casualties inflicted upon the 9th CCF Army Group by
the 1st Marine Division during its withdrawal from
northeastern Korea forbid a full-scale offensive. The
damage inflicted eliminated a force of three corps of
four divisions each, militarily non-effective for a min-
imum of three months. Unintended consequences,
from a Chinese point of view, included the inability of
the Chinese to funnel those troops to attack Eighth
Army. Major General Oliver P. Smith later said of the
1st Marine Division: “With the knowledge of the
determination, professional competence, heroism,
 611 December 24, 1950

U.S. Army engineers at Hungnam place explosives on a pier during the last stage of the evacuation of X
Corps, 24 December.

devotion to duty and self sacrifice displayed by officers
and men of this division, my feeling is one of humble
pride. No division commander has ever been privileged
to command a finer body of men.”
At Masan, Christmas Eve becomes a big event. The
battle-hardened Marines are especially thankful to be alive
for Christmas. A group from the 5th Marines appears at
division headquarters and sings Christmas carols.
In Air Force activity, during the evacuation of Hung-
nam, B-26s combine with the surface vessels to pound
the enemy positions in front of the town, while the
final ships at port embark.
December 24, 1950 612

Top: The USS Begor off Hungnam during final detonation on Christmas Eve. Bottom: U.S. Army engi-
neers blow up the docks at Hungnam on Christmas Eve 1950.

In related activity, the 3rd Rescue Squadron (ARS)
evacuates 35 former POWs from enemy held ground.
December 25 The Americans anticipate a major
attack against its positions on Christmas Day; how-
ever, it does not occur. By this day, X Corps’ evacua-
tion of North Korea is complete. All X Corps troops
are either in South Korea or en route.
In other activity, the Communists cross the 38th
Parallel and re-enter South Korea.
— In Japan: General Matthew Ridgway arrives in
Tokyo from the United States en route to assume
 613
A U.S. Eighth Army company bivouac area, complete with fresh snow.
command of Eighth Army in Korea at about midnight
(25th-26th).
December 26 General Matthew Ridgway, the
newly appointed successor to the late General Walker,
arrives at Taegu at 1600 to take control of Eighth Army.
General Ridgway starts off his tour with disappoint-
ment after discovering that his staff (formerly Walker’s
staff ) is so far in the rear.
In the Eighth Army area, the North Koreans at about
this time initiate actions against defenses along the east-
ern section of the line near Chunchon. The ROK III
Corps is unable to halt the advance and within several
days, the enemy advances from the Hwach’on Reservoir
and penetrates the ROK 8th Division lines, gaining
about one mile. At about the same time, another replen-
ished North Korean force moves towards the southwest
against the ROK 9th Division (ROK I Corps) and pen-
etrates there to initiate an advance that reaches a point
below Chunchon by 30 December. The latter threat
poses the most danger, as the enemy establishes a road-
block more than twenty miles south of Chunchon.
— In Japan: At 0930 General Ridgway meets with
General MacArthur in MacArthur’s office in the Dai
Ichi Building in Tokyo. The only other person in the
meeting is Major General Doyle O. Hickey. MacArthur
explains to Ridgway that according to previous infor-
mation from General Walker, the Chinese always avoid
the roads and attack with terrific fire power during the
night hours. The discussion also involved MacArthur’s
belief that an attack against China by forces already in
Formosa (Taiwan) would ease the pressure against
Korea, but that Washington opposes such action.
Ridgway subsequently notes that General MacArthur
displayed no animosity towards Washington for the de-
cision to prohibit the attack. Ridgway also inquired of
MacArthur if he had permission to launch an attack.
McArthur’s response: “The Eighth Army is yours Matt.
December 27, 1950
Do with it what you want.” After the private meeting,
Ridgway confers with the chiefs of all the General
Headquarters general staff and two others, Vice Admi-
ral C. Turner Joy (Naval Forces, Far East) and Lt. Gen-
eral George E. Stratemeyer (Far East Air Forces). By
about noon, Ridgway departs for Korea.
December 27 General Matthew Ridgway, sub-
sequent to the untimely accidental death of Lt. General
Walton H. Walker, assumes direct command of the
U.S. Eighth Army. Ridgway is flown to Seoul, where he
convenes a meeting with his staff and others there be-
fore departing to visit each division and corps to ac-
quire first-hand information on the situation among
the troops. One area is not on the list, the ROK Capi-
tol Division sector in eastern Korea, as it is not thought
to be under threat.
At Seoul, General Ridgway confers with Generals
Milburn (I Corps) and Coulter. Ridgway arrived at
Kimpo Airfield on a B-17 Flying Fortress, which fol-
lowed a circuitous route from Japan and maintained a
very low altitude to give Ridgway a good opportunity
to observe the layout of the land prior to meeting with
the Eighth Army officers (IX Corps) regarding the de-
fensive positions at Seoul.
Ridgway directs the generals to establish a line above
Seoul and to select specific contingents to control the
heights in the event the Chinese launch an attack. Two
divisions will be assigned to the bridgehead there. Nev-
ertheless, precautions are taken to protect the Han River
bridges below the city in the event evacuation becomes
necessary. General Ridgway anticipates an imminent
assault.
In the meantime, he is informed of North Korean
activity along the eastern line at Chunchon. U.S. con-
tingents are sped to hot spots to defend against pene-
tration. The 2nd Division is ordered to deploy north of
Ch’ungju at Wonju. Ridgway is aware that the 2nd
December 28, 1950
Division had been hit hard recently at Ch’ongch’on,
but his grave concern about an attack against a weak
right flank compels him to push the 2nd to the limit
rather than risk disaster.
Another of Ridgway’s concerns is the defensive lines.
He requests 30,000 civilian volunteers. By the follow-
ing day, President Syngman Rhee provides 10,000 and
within two additional days, Ridgway has 30,000. The
Korean laborers using picks and shovels construct two
defensive lines to bolster the defenses against Chinese
attack. The line dug to the north is to act as a halting
block, but the line south of the Han River is to become
the final line, one which is to be held at all costs.
Also, General Ridgway is unimpressed with many
of the Eighth Army unit commanders. Rules change
immediately, as officers are directed to be at the front
with the troops and if they have paper work to complete,
it is to be done at night. Ridgway also concludes that
the fighting men still have no answer to two basic ques-
tions, “Why are we here?” and “What are we fighting
for?”
General Ridgway, this same night, pens a response.
The message explains that the real estate is unimportant
and he explains that the “issues are whether the power
of Western Civilization, as God has permitted it to
flower in our beloved lands, shall defy and defeat Com-
munism....” He closes: “It has become and it continues
to be, a fight for freedom, for our own survival, in an
honorable, independent national existence.”
In the X Corps area, the U.S. 7th Division, which
had abandoned Hungnam on 20–21 December, rede-
ploys at Yongch’on.
December 28 The North Koreans continue to
launch attacks against the ROK positions in the ROK
II Corps sector. The attack initiated from Inje above
the 38th Parallel on 26 December and the penetration
continues towards Hongch’on. At this time, General
British tanks that had been withdrawn from the 38th Parallel enter Seoul.
614
Ridgway continues to assess the situation by visiting
the various defensive positions. Ridgway becomes con-
cerned, not of the courage of the units, rather, of the
spirit. Ridgway later describes his impressions, stating
that at the time, “Eighth Army was bewildered.” Ridg-
way focuses on rebuilding a fighting spirit in his troops.
Eighth Army is taking steps to prevent a break-
through to the capital at Seoul. The X Corps is still
completing its withdrawal from Hungnam after a pro-
longed fight and is not yet ready for offensive action.
Some elements of X Corps have not yet debarked at
Pusan.
In the 1st Marine Division zone at Masan, the Marines
continue to train and rebuild their skills. At this time,
they remain about two hundred miles from the front.
The trek to the front, when called, will not include a lot
of new vehicles. Only abandoned vehicles are replaced.
Unfortunately, the Marines, upon fighting their way
from the Chosin Reservoir, brought out their equip-
ment. Now while the other units that lost or abandoned
their vehicles in the field receive new replacements, the
Marines must use their bullet-riddled trucks.
Also, General O.P. Smith receives word that he is to
journey to Kyongju on 30 December to participate in
a X Corps conference. The 1st Marine Division on 27
December was returned to X Corps from Eighth Army
reserve.
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77)
reinitiates its operations off the east coast of Korea. The
task force provides close-air support for the Eighth
Army elements on the left flank and the carrier planes
also strike enemy targets.
— In Japan: The first Bell helicopters arrive from
the States. They are scheduled to be delivered to the
Marine observation squadron in Korea. The Marines
have initiated and completed the first “piggy-back” de-
livery of aircraft that had been flown around one-third
of the world in RSDs.
 615 December 29, 1950

Top: A military convoy crosses the Han River at Seoul. A blown bridge is in the background. Bottom: A
Sherman medium tank transports U.S. soldiers to positions north of Seoul to establish a defensive line.

December 29 General Ridgway continues his
tour of Eighth Army positions. I Corps holds the ground
westward at Kanghwa Island with the 8213th Army
Unit, a ranger company. Heading eastward, the Turkish
Brigade is deployed at the Han River estuary on the
Kimpo peninsula between the Rangers and the 25th Di-
vision, which is posted near Route 1, along the lower
bank on the Imjin River. The eastern sector (I Corps’
right) is manned by the ROK 1st Division, which is
stretched along the Imjin as far east as Route 33, at the
Wonson–Seoul Corridor. The I Corps reserve, the British
29th Brigade, holds positions on the outskirts of Seoul.
In the IX Corps sector, which stretches along the 38th
Parallel in the Wonsan–Seoul corridor, the ROK 6th
December 30, 1950
Division holds the left along Route 33, with the U.S.
24th Division to its right (west) at Route 3. At Ui-
jongbu in the vicinity of the junction of Routes 3 and
33, the British 27th Brigade is deployed as reserve. Ac-
cording to intelligence reports, the main attack is an-
ticipated to directly strike at the junction of where the
British are deployed in reserve. The 7th Cavalry Divi-
sion (reserve) is posted along the Chunchon–Seoul
Road. The cavalry is reinforced with a Filipino battal-
ion and a contingent of Greeks (Expeditionary Force).
The ROK II Corps is posted at the westward end of
the defenses at the 38th Parallel, astride the ROK III
Corps. In addition, the ROK I Corps is deployed along
Eighth Army’s right in extremely nasty terrain, with
the ROK 9th Division in the mountains there, and be-
yond the slopes, the Capital Division is posted along the
coastal road near Yangyang, at the far eastern termi-
nus of the line.
The enemy had moved across the 38th Parallel, be-
yond the ROK III’s line, and it slipped through a gap
in the ROK II lines.
In other activity, on this day, Major General Robert
B. McClure directs the 23rd Infantry Regiment, 2nd
Division, and a French contingent to move to Wonju
to check a North Korean force. However, the remain-
der of the division will move there and the 23rd is or-
dered to Hongch’on. Also, General Ridgway orders the
operation at Pusan to accelerate to quicken the debark-
ing of the U.S. 3rd Division at Pusan.
Other steps taken by Ridgway include stringent orders
for his commanders. Divisional commanding officers
are to be deployed with their battalions at the front and
respective corps commanders are directed to be with
whichever of their regiments is the most heavily engaged.
In Air Force activity, RF-51 planes initiate tactical
reconnaissance missions from Taegu. The RF-51s have
a longer operating range than the RF-80s that had been
used before the new arrivals.
In Naval activity, the USS Rochester (CA 124) arrives
at Inchon. The carrier begins operations there as Am-
phibious Task Element (TE 90.12).
December 30 A plane transporting the body of
Lt. General Walton Walker departs Haneda Airfield to
return the fallen general to the United States. As the
year comes to an end, the new Eighth Army com-
mander, General Ridgway, completes a quick sweep of
the Eighth Army area that over several days gives him
on overview of the situation.
Ridgway had concluded that an offensive was not
possible. The recent clashes with the enemy had
drained morale and the X Corps, including the 1st Ma-
rine Division, had just undergone a period of intense
combat and was recuperating as temporary reserves. At
this time, no accurate estimates of numbers or posi-
tions of the enemy is known; however, it is thought
that six separate armies of the Chinese XIII Army
Group are poised from where they can strike the Eighth
Army lines. Defensive steps are taken to block sus-
pected approach routes of the enemy.
616
The 2nd Division had, on the 27th, received orders
to move to Wonju from Ch’ungju, to draw a line pro-
tecting an approach route from the northeast. Ridg-
way left little time for the X Corps to catch its breath.
He directed X Corps to speed up its reassembly as por-
tions of the 3rd Division were still in the process of de-
barking at Pusan. Nonetheless, it will be a while before
X Corps in its entirety is redeployed for combat.
In the meantime, on the following day, the 1st Ma-
rine Division and the 3rd Infantry are assigned to army
reserve. Also, the 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, moves to-
ward Hongch’on, about twenty-five miles north of
Wonju; however, the recent North Korean progress
through the ROK sector places strong points in the path.
The Communists establish a road bock in front of
Hongch’on. At this time, the ROK 27th Regiment holds
Hongch’on. The South Koreans and the U.S. 23rd Reg-
iment combine efforts to eliminate the obstacle.
In other activity, the U.S. 3rd Division, after com-
pleting unloading at Pusan, moves to a location south
of Kyongju.
In the 1st Marine Division zone at Masan, General O.P.
Smith and a small party is flown from Masan to Kyongju
to attend a conference at X Corps headquarters. General
Smith is informed that the 1st Marine Division is to re-
deploy above Taegu at Pohang-dong and prepare to op-
erate in that region about sixty-five miles north of Pusan.
However, on the following day, circumstances change
and the division receives new instructions.
December 31, 1950–January 1, 1951
As the Communist offensive begins, the Eighth
Army order of battle is:
I Corps: From left to right, northeast of Seoul —
Turkish Brigade, U.S. 25th Division and ROK 1st Di-
vision. Also, the British 29th Brigade stands in reserve.
IX Corps: From left to right north of Seoul—ROK
6th Division and U.S. 24th Division. The 1st Cav-
alry Division and the British 27th Brigade are in
corps reserve.
ROK III Corps: From left to right along central
front — ROK 2nd, 5th and 8th Divisions. The ROK
7th Division stands in reserve.
ROK II Corps: The ROK 3rd Division stands at the
east-central front.
ROK I Corps: From left to right — The ROK 9th
and Capital Divisions along the eastern front.
X Corps: The U.S. 2nd and 7th Divisions at
Wonju and Chungju respectively hold positions from
which the ROKs on the Eighth Army’s central and
eastern front can be supported.
Eighth Army Reserve: 187th Airborne RCT at
Suwon region with the Thailand Battalion attached;
the U.S. 3rd Division at Kyongju; the Canadian Bat-
talion at Miryang; and the New Zealand FABn at
Pusan. The 1st Marine Division on this day receives
orders transferring it from X Corps and placing it
back in Eighth Army reserve.
The total number of U.N. forces in Korea at the
start of the New Year stands at 444,336 troops.
617 December 31, 1950
December 31, 1950
December 31 The Communist Chinese Third
Phase Offensive is launched. The enemy force includes
at least seven Chinese armies, supported also by
the NK I and V Corps. The attack force is estimated
at about 174,000 Chinese and 60,000 North Koreans.
The number of Communists either in Korea or
in Manchuria, poised to enter Korea, is 740,000
troops.
In the area north of Seoul, the 2nd Division contin-
ues to form in the vicinity of Wonju to neutralize an
ongoing North Korean offensive. The 23rd Regiment
advances above Wonju against the North Koreans
in front of Hongch’on. In the meantime, the ROK 27th
Regiment closes on the roadblock from Hongch’on,
assisted also by the ROK 5th Regiment. Progress is
made against the obstacle, but it is not totally elimi-
nated.
In related activity, the X Corps’ U.S. 7th Division
dispatches elements to Chech’on, below Wonju, in an
attempt to lay the foundation for a supply system along
Route 29. The remainder of the division is to follow
and to coordinate with the 2nd Division. Other steps
in the works include the two reserve X Corps divisions,
the 1st Marine Division and the 3rd Infantry Division.
The Marines, as soon as possible, are to depart Masan
and deploy in the region known as Youngch’on–Ky-
ongju–Pohang-dong.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Infantry Division, once pre-
1951
January 1 In the Eighth Army area, a major Com-
munist offensive begins at midnight (December 31–
January 1) and crashes into both the I Corps and the IX
Corps perimeters. All units, except the U.S. 25th Di-
vision and the Turkish Brigade (extreme left) and the
ROK Capital Division on the east coast, are struck.
The attack is launched by elements of the Chinese 38th
and 39th Armies, while other Communist forces crash
against the ROK III Corps positions. Combined, the at-
tacks stretch across a front of about forty-five miles in
an attempt to collapse resistance along the 38th Paral-
lel and then converge upon Seoul.
The Chinese offensive follows an earlier offensive
initiated by North Korean units on 26 December. The
Chinese intervention during the Chosin Reservoir
Campaign threw large forces into the war unexpect-
edly; however, despite the huge amount of enemy
troops engaged, the 1st Marine Division extricated
itself at great cost to the Chinese. This offensive also
involved a large force, initially about three divisions,
618
pared, is to redeploy south of Seoul, in the P’yongt’aek–
Ansong region. General Ridgway’s instincts regarding
a full-scale attack prove correct. The arc (Bridgehead
Line) above Seoul becomes threatened. The earlier
North Korean attacks that slipped through the ROK de-
fenses northwest of Hongch’on on the 26th are now
being bolstered by Chinese forces, which penetrate the
main line of the ROK and advance from the northeast
towards Tokchong, through the center above Tokchong
and Kap’yong farther west.
Meanwhile, the Chinese attacks, which had started
on the previous day, strike against the I and IX Corps
lines, but the U.S. 25th Division does not come under
assault and the U.S. 24th Division is met with only
light enemy probing attacks. By about midnight, the
Chinese attacks intensify against the ROK 1st and 6th
Divisions of the I and IX Corps, respectively. As the
New Year begins, the combined Chinese–North Ko-
rean force pushes towards Seoul.
In the 1st Marine Division zone at Masan, the Division
is again placed under the jurisdiction of Eighth Army, fol-
lowing only four days with X Corps. The Marines are di-
rected to continue training and rebuilding until advised
to move to the Ulchin–Yongju–Yechon axis or to assume
responsibility for the primary defensive line. Neverthe-
less, in less than one hour, new orders arrive instructing
the Marines to move to the Pohang–Andong region to
halt any enemy intrusions there.
with others in reserve. The United States, however,
is not caught by surprise and General Ridgway
has taken steps to ensure that the mistakes of the ini-
tial invasion of June 1950 and the later Chinese inter-
vention does not cause the eviction of the UN from
Korea.
By dawn, the enemy makes progress against the
ROK 1st Division. The ROK 12th Regiment is driven
from its lines by the Chinese 116th Division. The gap
is opened as the 11th and 15th ROK Regiments are
unable to hold and they too fall back. Nearby, the ROK
6th Division is hit by elements of the 113th Division
and elements of the 116th Division, but it only loses
some ground and remains fixed. A U.S. artillery unit,
Battery C, 9th Field Artillery Battalion, nearly gets
wiped out after the collapse of the ROK 12th Regi-
ment. The artillery troops attempt to reach American
lines after the ROK unit flees, but they get snagged in
an ambush. The troops relinquish four guns but es-
cape capture or death.
 619
In the meantime, General Ridgway is heading north
while observing large numbers of vehicles crammed
with ROK troops moving southward. Ridgway’s at-
tempt to halt the traffic is fruitless. Upon reaching the
front, it turns out better than expected, as most of the
1st and 6th Division had not retreated. During the
melee, the U.S. 24th Division is hit hard, but it holds,
while the U.S. 25th Division receives only nominal op-
position and also remains in place. Rather than risk
unnecessary casualties, a counterattack is ruled out by
Ridgway and the planned disciplined withdrawal is or-
dered.
In the I Corps sector, the South Koreans are to pull
back to reassigned positions at Line C, while the U.S.
contingents are directed to move back to the Seoul
bridgehead, which arcs around the capital. The with-
drawal includes the American Rangers and the Turkish
troops from Kanghwa Island and the Kimpo penin-
sula. Prior to the evacuation, which begins during the
afternoon, there was some confusion. General Milburn
had intended to hold in place at the bridgehead, but
that order is countermanded by Ridgway, who is pre-
pared to conserve his forces by evacuating Seoul if nec-
essary. During the evacuation, the ROK 1st Division is
to hold in place until dawn on 2 January to act as rear
guard.
The Chinese launch several attacks against the South
Korean lines, but afterwards, the area remains quiet
until about midnight. The South Koreans during the
afternoon assaults withdraw southwestwardly several
miles, but it is disciplined. In the IX Corps sector,
the 24th Division is able to withdraw without great
opposition. The Division, reinforced by the 7th
Regiment, 1st Cavalry, arrives at the bridgehead line
and with the cavalry deploys on the left. In the mean-
time, the ROK 6th Division encounters heavy opposi-
tion as it moves back from Line B. The South Korean
division under General Chang Kuk reaches Tokchong
too late to pass through easily, as the Chinese arrive
there first, and compel the ROK 6th Division to take
a circuitous route. The opposition creates havoc by
causing the units to become separated. A U.S. convoy
waits at a designated point to gather the division and
transport it to the new line of defense; however, at
dawn on the following day, only about four battalions
arrive.
In related activity, the ground troops receive no
coordinated air-ground support due to an explosion
of requests that nearly strangle the system. Nonethe-
less, about 300 U.S.-U.N. fighter bombers (FEAF)
are to strike enemy formations and other targets.
Marine squadrons attached to Admiral Ruble’s
carriers about eighty miles south of Inchon participate
in the attacks. VMF-323 strikes an enemy position
at a village south of Imjin, while another group
strikes enemy positions in front of the central sector
of the line. Also, Marine Squadron VMF-212
strikes the enemy along the coastal highway on the
east coast during the morning and later pounds enemy
positions in the vicinity south of the Hwach’on
January 2, 1951
Reservoir. Afterwards, VMF-212 is ordered to the
west coast to support the other two squadrons operat-
ing there.
January 2 In the Eighth Army area, I and IX
Corps withdrew on the previous day to preassigned
positions as the Chinese continued to advance.
General Ridgway directs the 92nd and 96th FABns
(supporting X Corps) to dispatch contingents of their
155-mm howitzers to head north to Seoul to bolster
the I and IX Corps’ artillery. The new perimeter is
manned by 10 regiments and more than 250 artillery
pieces.
In the I Corps sector, the perimeter is held by the
Turkish Brigade, 24th U.S. Infantry (Colonel John T.
Corley), 35th Infantry (Colonel Gerald C. Kelleher),
British Brigade (Brigadier Brodie), and elements of the
ROK 1st Division, with the 27th Infantry (Colonel
John H. Michaelis) in reserve.
The 1st ROK Division, which remains in place,
comes under new attacks at about midnight (1st-
2nd) and the clashes continue until dawn. At that
time, upon orders, the South Koreans withdraw
to Pongilch’on. By midnight on the 2nd, the 1st
ROK Division is in place, below Seoul along the Han
River.
In the IX Corps sector, the perimeter is defended
by the 19th Infantry (Colonal Ned D. Moore), 21st
Infantry (Colonel Richard D. Stephens), 5th Infantry
(Colonel John L. Throckmorton) and the British
Commonwealth Brigade (Brigadier Basil A. Coad).
In addition, the 7th Cavalry (Colonel William A.
Harris) and the attached Greek contingent are in
reserve.
It becomes apparent that the ROK 6th Division
encounters difficulty after initiating its withdrawal.
A convoy waits just outside Seoul to pick up the troops
to transport them to the new positions, but most of
the division is still en route and in small groups. The
Chinese had cut off the escape route on the previous
day. The other units, including the 24th Division
and the attached 7th Regiment, 1st Cavalry, had ar-
rived the previous night. Troops of the ROK 6th
Division continue to arrive during the day, but by the
following morning, still only about one-half of the di-
vision makes it to Seoul. Communications between the
ROK units and General Ridgway’s headquarters re-
mains poor.
In the ROK II sector, the ROK 3rd Division is with-
drawing toward Hongch’on. On the following day, the
division will be assigned to the ROK I Corps and de-
ployed in the mountains in the west near the Capital Di-
vision.
In the X Corps sector, General Ned Almond begins to
establish his command post at Wonju. The 2nd Divi-
sion (General Robert B. McClure) and 7th Infantry
Division (Major General Claude B. Ferenbaugh) re-
enter the fight to thwart the Chinese offensive. It as-
sumes responsibility for three additional ROK Divi-
sions in a newly created corps zone, between the IX
January 3, 1951
Corps and the ROK III Corps. General Ridgway con-
fers with Syngman Rhee to inform him of his dissatis-
faction with the performance of the ROKs, then trav-
els to the area held by the 23rd RCT and confers with
Colonel Paul Freeman at the front and explains the ne-
cessity of preventing the Communists from seizing
Wonju.
In related activity, the 2nd Division’s 23rd RCT, sup-
ported by the French Battalion, attacks north of Ho-
engsong, while the 38th Regiment, supported by the
Dutch Battalion, advances to positions to the rear of
the 23rd RCT.
Meanwhile, in the zone of the 23rd Regiment, Com-
pany E, positions on a hill manned by a platoon com-
manded by Sergeant Junior D. Edwards come under a
fierce attack. The platoon is forced to abandon the hill.
Edwards, afterward, singlehandedly attacks the enemy
position. Grenades evict the enemy, but soon after, they
return and again, Edwards moves to liquidate the ob-
stacle. He charges and succeeds in destroying the gun
and its crew, but in the process, yet another enemy ma-
chine gun opens fire. Undaunted, Sergeant Edwards
attacks the third position and destroys it; however, the
enemy fire inflicts a fatal wound. Although Edwards is
killed, his force is able to continue the counterattack
and regain the lost hill. Sergeant Edwards is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his enormous cour-
age under fire.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the Communists also
drive against the ROK 5th Division. By this time, el-
ements of four separate Chinese armies are on the at-
tack, the 38th, 39th 40th and 66th. One other, the
50th, is within range of striking UN positions. And
yet another, the 542nd Army, stands at Kumhwa.
Also, the X Corps moves up to the front and deploys
at positions between the IX Corps and the ROK III
Corps.
In Air Force activity, in line with the reversals of
Eighth Army and the recent evacuations of Pyongyang,
where the 8th and 18th Fighter Bomber Groups had
been operating, and the subsequent abandonment of
Seoul, the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group completes its
evacuation of Kimpo Airfield. The final Sabre jet of
the 4th FIG departs on this day for Japan. After dusk,
while enemy fire strikes the airfield, the remaining
ground troops and pilots of the 4th FIG depart on a C-
54. Meanwhile, other aircraft, including F-
80C–equipped 51st Fighter Interceptor Squadron and
the RF-51-Ds of the TRS, still remain. On the follow-
ing day, the 3rd, the pilots launch one last raid prior to
their departure from Kimpo.
January 3 Three Chinese armies now threaten
Seoul with their nine divisions and another strong force
composed of two additional divisions is nearby, wait-
ing to push forward. General Ridgway directs the X
Corps to deploy and assume responsibility for part of
Line C (south bank of the Han River). Five divisions
are to hold the positions in the vicinity of Route 29. The
U.S. 2nd and 7th Divisions and the ROK 2nd, 5th and
620
8th Divisions spread out in an effort to prevent the
enemy from attacking from the vicinity of Chunchon.
In conjunction, the 1st Marine Division had been
detached from X Corps, following the breakout from
the Chosin Reservoir during mid December 1950. The
Marine division at that time was attached to Eighth
Army as reserve in the vicinity of Masan. While Gen-
eral Almond’s X Corps deploys, the ROK III Corps is
to stretch eastward across the mountains towards the
ROK I Corps sector. The ROK 3rd Division in the
western part of Korea is ordered to move eastward and
deploy in the ROK I Corps area near the Capital Di-
vision.
At this time, despite the redeployment maneuvers, a
large gap exists between the U.S. 2nd Division and the
ROK Capital Division. While Eighth Army attempts
to shore up the defenses, the Communists increase the
tenacity of the attacks. By 0300, the I Corps comes
under fierce attacks as the Chinese plow into the 25th
Division on the corps’ left. While the enemy there con-
tinue to funnel into the corps lines from Route 1, other
units moving along route 33 pound the British positions
on the 25th Division right.
In a sector held by the British 29th Brigade, the lines
explode at about 0730, when the Northumberland
Fusiliers on the right are struck heavily and forced to
pull back. Shortly afterwards, the Royal Ulster Rifles
holding the left of the perimeter are pounded and two
of the rifle companies are overwhelmed. Despite the
setbacks, armor and infantry mount a counterattack
and during the afternoon, following a brutal hand-to-
hand fight, the Chinese are halted and pushed back.
However, the British sustain about 300 casualties. In
conjunction, the British Brigade had been a fresh unit
and until this day, not engaged in a major fight. The
commander of the Royal Ulster Rifles, Major C.A. H.B.
Blake, is among the fatalities.
In the IX Corps sector, during the early morning hours
the area remains calm, but at about 0500, the U.S. 24th
Division comes under attack. The initial thrust against
the 21st Infantry Regiment causes only slight problems
and the attacks are repulsed later in the morning. How-
ever, the 19th Regiment encounters much stiffer oppo-
sition and the 2nd Battalion is unable to hold its
ground. After surrendering some terrain, the 2nd Bat-
talion, bolstered by armor and air support, is able to
regain the lost ground during the afternoon. Nonethe-
less, General Ridgway, aware of the great numbers of
enemy troops threatening the bridgehead, decides to
abandon the bridgehead line and redeploy his forces
below Seoul.
In addition to the pressure being mounted by the
Chinese, the North Koreans who had penetrated the
lines in the east as they drove from Inje are now clos-
ing with two corps, composed of more than ten divi-
sions. In the eastern sector, the ROK divisions are still
in the midst of a withdrawal and many of the units re-
main unaccounted for, as communications remain spo-
radic. Information acquired is not helpful to the situ-
ation at Seoul. Reports have the ROK 2nd Division in
 621 January 3, 1951

On 3 January 1951, portions of Seoul are afire, while the S.K. government officials and U.N. forces again
abandon the capital.
January 3, 1951
A view of traffic on the Hongch’on–Wonju Road on 3 January 1951.
peril with two regiments encircled by the enemy and the
other devastated, its strength reduced by more than
sixty percent.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the units are still gath-
ering and the C Line is unprotected. About one hour
after noon, the order is given to prepare to evacuate
Seoul. The abandonment includes evacuating Kimpo
airfield and Inchon. General Ridgway insists that all
civilian traffic be halted at the bridge at 1500. He places
General Palmer as commander of 1st Cavalry Division
in charge of the bridge operation, with orders to halt all
non-military traffic with use of arms if necessary. How-
ever, the Korean civilians cooperate fully, despite their
imminent danger at the hands of the Communists.
The I Corps under General Milburn withdraws from
the Seoul bridgehead at 1600 without incident; how-
ever, Chinese elements are within striking range. Con-
tingents of the Chinese 39th and 50th Armies stand
just beyond the Seoul bridgehead. For most units, the
withdrawal moves smoothly, but the British 29th
Brigade, which holds the rear, comes under attack. Its
rear guard encounters fierce opposition slightly before
midnight and part of the Royal Ulster Rifles, along
with a contingent of tanks, becomes entrapped. Some
are able to drive through the enemy encirclement, but
about two hundred and fifty troops or more are killed
or captured. About ten tanks are also lost. The main
body of the British Brigade moves across the Han River
by 0330 on 4 January. The IX Corps initiates its with-
drawal at about noon, although the official order was
not executed until 1300.
The whole maneuver is completed without incident,
with the final elements crossing the M2 bridge east of
622
Seoul by 0200 on 4 January. The engineers attempt to
take the bridge down, but many components are either
frozen or jammed. Consequently, at about 0730 on 4
January the bridge is blown.
The 5th RCT, 7th Cavalry, and the British 27th
Brigade abandon their positions by moving through I
Corps sector and crossing over the bridge there and
again, without any contact with the enemy. All units
cross the bridge by 0900 on 4 January. The Turkish
Brigade deploys at Kimpo Airfield and the 187th Air-
borne RCT deploys at Suwon Airfield, under orders to
be prepared to launch an attack towards Ichon and
Wonju on a moment’s notice.
In the X Corps sector, advance elements of the 7th
Division arrive at Wonju in search of positions to de-
ploy for defense. The corps command post had been es-
tablished at Wonju on the previous day.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces Bomber
Command joins the attack to bomb Pyongyang. The
strike force, composed of more than sixty B-29s, deliv-
ers 650 tons of incendiary bombs against the enemy
there.
In related activity, Far East Air Forces executes 958
combat sorties, which sets a one-day record.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
authorize the Marine Corps to add three fighter
squadrons to its force, which will bring its number of
fighter squadrons to twenty-one.
— In Japan: General MacArthur responds to the
Joint Chiefs of Staff regarding their recent communi-
cation informing MacArthur that Korea was not a place
where a major war should be fought. There is great
concern that the U.S. might be forced to evacuate
 623
Korea, but the decision had been to remain in Korea if
possible. When MacArthur was informed on 30 De-
cember 1950, the fateful line was drawn at a point
about half the distance between Seoul and Pusan. If
the Communists are able to push the U.S. that far, or-
ders to abandon Korea are to be forthcoming.
MacArthur informs the Joint Chiefs that he has no
schedule for evacuation and at present, it isn’t neces-
sary. MacArthur suggests a naval blockade of China
and air attacks against China’s defense manufacturing.
The suggestions of MacArthur are not accepted in
Washington.
The final elements of U.N. troops depart Inchon aboard an LST on 4 January.
January 4, 1951
January 4 In the Eighth Army area, Fragmentary
Operations Plan 20 is issued as an order, which calls
for a withdrawal to Line D (extending from the west
coast at P’yongt’aek to Samch’ok, on the east coast.
General Ridgway had not anticipated such a quick
withdrawal; however, intelligence reveals that Com-
munist forces have been converging at points between
Suwon and Wonju, creating a threat based on the pos-
sibility that the enemy might be able to penetrate be-
tween the I and IX Corps forces and the X Corps units
at Wonju. The move is initiated during the evening
and is completed by 7 January.
January 4, 1951 624

Top: Engineers prepare to blow a rail bridge across the Han River at Seoul on 4 January 1951. Bottom:
The rail bridge over the Han after it was demolished.

In conjunction, the 7th Division is establishing po-
sitions in the vicinity of Wonju. The process is accel-
erated to strengthen the line there, while the 23rd and
38th Regiments, 2nd Division, pull back on their of-
fensive posture to form a defense at Wonju.
In other activity, at 0900 at a meeting in the com-
mand post of the U.S. 27th Infantry Regiment, a
rescue of the entrapped British regiment is discussed,
but British Brigadier General Brodie concludes that
too many other lives would be lost in the attempt
 625 January 4, 1951

Top: The pontoon bridge across the frozen Han River, used to evacuate Seoul. After the final U.N. ele-
ments cross on 4 January, the bridge is blown. Bottom: The pontoon bridge across the Han River at Seoul
as it blows.
January 5, 1951
and it is ruled out. Some of the rear guard troops who
had been trapped on the previous day successfully fight
their way out, but many are lost. (See also, January 3,
1951.)
The bridges in the I Corps and IX Corps areas are ei-
ther dismantled or destroyed. Elements of Company
K, 27th Infantry Regiment, tear down the remaining
bridge over the Han and become the final unit to de-
part Seoul. The other forces had completed the evacu-
ation by slightly after 1300. During the evacuation,
there was no inadvertent interference from civilian
refugees. All civilians had, on the previous day, been
prohibited from using the roads and bridges to ensure
that Communist infiltrators could not intermingle.
Following the demolition of the bridges, Company
K crosses the Han by walking across the frozen river.
Within a short time after the evacuation of Seoul, ad-
vance Chinese troops enter the city. Soon after, while
observed by a small ROK reconnaissance patrol, the
North Korean flag is raised in the city.
General Ridgway, although in Korea as Eighth Army
commander for only about nine days, remains uncon-
cerned about the ability of his forces to repel the
Chinese, but his plan calls for doing it on his timetable.
His grave concerns are focused upon some of the
upper level officers who don’t share his enthusiasm
or his determination to galvanize his troops. Each
step backwards had been anticipated and new innova-
tion directed by Ridgway already is bearing fruit. He
has demanded that all wounded and dead be brought
out and not left to the enemy and he has ordered
all units to resist fiercely. Essentially, Ridgway is
attempting to eradicate what is known as “bugging
out.”
The withdrawals have not yet been completed, but
Ridgway is prepared to again give ground rather than
lose high casualties unnecessarily. The I and IX Corps
redeploy above Suwon. In conjunction, the U.S. 3rd
Division (under Major General Robert H. Soule), in
Eighth Army reserve, is attached to I Corps. The 187th
Airborne RCT (Brigadier General Frank S. Bowen Jr.)
is placed under the operational control of IX Corps and
directed to deploy east of Suwon to form a blocking
defense to thwart an advance from the area near Ichon
and Yoju.
In Air Force activity, most planes and their crews had
abandoned Kimpo Airfield by the 2nd, but some still
operated there on the 3rd. Despite the evacuation and
the fact the Seoul is being taken, a C-119 transport
lands at Kimpo to evacuate any troops that might still
be there.
In other activity, Captain Charles F. Wright, a B-26
pilot, while on a bombing mission in the vicinity of
Sunchon, destroys a few enemy structures and more
than ten vehicles. Afterwards, he turns his rockets and
his remaining two bombs on a train he spots. The lo-
comotive manages to escape destruction and progress
into a village. Undaunted, Wright dives to an elevation
just above the trees and passes with his lights on under
intense enemy ground fire. The locomotive is illumi-
626
nated by Wright’s lights and it is destroyed. The enemy
ground fire fails to down Wright’s plane. He returns to
his base unharmed.
January 5 Eighth Army continues to withdraw
toward Line D. The withdrawal works in contrast to
Ridgway’s orders of fighting while pulling back. There
is little contact with the enemy. During the pullback,
a wide hole develops on the east flank as the IX Corps
abandons its positions. Probing patrols of the enemy
force in the vicinity of Yongdungp’o encroach the po-
sitions of the ROK 1st Division, but fortuitously, the
gap is not discovered. At Suwon, the situation becomes
confusing as refugees create congestion and block the
rails there.
In Air Force activity, Pyongyang, which came under
a heavy air strike on 3 January, is again struck when 59
B-29s plaster the city with 672 tons of incendiary
bombs.
In other activity, the 18th Fighter Bomb Group ex-
ecutes its final missions from Suwon. The structures at
the airfield are destroyed by U.S. ground troops before
they abandon it.
In Naval activity, the redeployment by sea of the
troops from Inchon to Taech’on continues. The oper-
ation is completed by 12 January.
January 6 In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army
continues its withdrawal, but the pull-back is accom-
plished without any attempts to maintain contact with
the enemy to inflict losses and forestall progress. By
this time the enemy is moving south of Seoul. The I
Corps and the IX Corps complete the withdrawal by the
following day. Also, during the morning of 6 January,
the enemy strikes the ROK 3rd Battalion, 11th Regi-
ment (ROK 1st Division), but the attack is repulsed
by about noon. Later, during the night of 6–7 January,
two divisions of the North Korean V Corps advance
towards Wonju and by dawn, both units are in position
to launch attacks.
In related activity, the North Korean II Corps ad-
vances subsequent to dusk. The NK 2nd and 9th Di-
visions move out from the vicinity of Hongch’on en
route to the area northeast of Wonju, while the North
Korean 10th Division sets out from its positions at
Chunchon and advances through the mountains, which
are undefended, toward Wonju. The 10th Division,
under orders to avoid contact, inadvertently makes con-
tact with elements of the ROK 7th Division during its
advance on the 8th, but the minor skirmishes quickly
cease. However, the North Koreans bump into the U.S.
7th Division on 9 January and heavy fighting erupts.
In Air Force activity, Combat Cargo Command com-
pletes its resupply mission to sustain the 2nd Division,
which is heavily engaged with the enemy. During the
operation, which lasted several days, 21 C-47s attached
to a Troop Carrier Squadron land at Wonju and de-
liver 115 tons of cargo, while C-119s, attached to the
314th TCG, air drop 460 tons of supplies and ammu-
nition to the 2nd Division.
 627
An Air Force C-119 Flying Boxcar passes over some nasty terrain during January to drop supplies to
ground troops.
January 7 The carrier HMS Theseus, commanded
by British Admiral Andrewes, arrives back in waters off
the west coast of Korea to resumes air patrols and pro-
vide naval air support in that region.
In the Eighth Army area, in conjunction with the re-
cent withdrawal, Eighth Army initiates reconnaissance
patrols to re-establish contact with the Chinese Com-
munist forces. Eighth Army is unable to impress Gen-
eral Ridgway, who is determined to change the general
attitude with the ranks. By this time, Eighth Army has
surrendered Seoul, but it has not inflicted any genuine
damage to the Chinese during the offensive that had
begun at the start of the new year.
Meanwhile, Eighth Army has been pushed back
more than fifty air-miles. The I Corps and IX Corps
complete the withdrawal to Line D, which stretches
west from the vicinity of P’yongt’aek, then eastward
toward Changhowan-ni and from there northeast to
January 7, 1951
the Han River. Strong words are pointed towards Gen-
erals Milburn and Coulter, I Corps and IX Corps com-
manders respectively, from General Ridgway, who be-
comes infuriated after learning that the withdrawal
from Seoul had no contact with the enemy. Earlier,
Ridgway had ordered both to make contact and inflict
casualties while pulling back. No U.S. troops engaged
any enemy forces since the abandonment of Seoul. The
government buildings, hotels and other structures had
been blown by explosives to prevent them from being
used by the Communists.
In addition to Line D, for the I and IX Corps, the line
extends eastward toward the coast in the ROK I and
III Corps sectors, but still a large gap remains unde-
fended in the eastern sector. General Ridgway had al-
tered the original Line D in those sectors on 5 January.
He moved the line about forty-five miles lower to Sam-
ch’ok on the coast. The mountains east of Route 29 are
January 7, 1951
A well bundled South Korean child waits for his parents to gain passing through checkpoints, the guer-
passage on a vessel set to depart Inchon.
undefended. Both the I Corps and the IX Corps are
directed to begin strong patrols to search for and engage than 100 of the North Koreans are captured. Nonethe-
the enemy. The 27th Infantry Regiment (Wolf hound
Regiment) of the I Corps, pushes north from P’y-
ongt’aek and heads toward Osan, but encounters no
enemy forces. The regiment, led by Colonel John H.
Michaelis, is supported by tanks of the 89th Tank Bat-
talion (Colonel Thomas Dolvin) and the 89th and 90th
FABns (Colonels Gus Terry and James Sanden respec-
tively).
In addition, an IX Corps patrol moves toward In-
chon and encounters only small enemy detachments.
Other patrols on the western front encounter no enemy
forces.
Also, in coordination with the evacuation of Seoul,
Inchon had to be abandoned. The evacuation of In-
chon is completed this day by the Western Deployment
Group commanded by Admiral Thackrey. The U.S.
Navy successfully evacuates about 5,000 troops, 2,000
vehicles and about 70,000 tons of supplies. The re-
maining supplies are destroyed by engineers under
Eighth Army engineer Colonel (later brigadier general)
Pascal (Pat) N. Strong.
In the X Corps sector, steps are taken to provide a de- this period of indecision, rumors continue to fly among
fense in the event that the Communists exploit the hole
to initiate a thrust along Route 29. The part of the road Korea and no one in high command is able to give any
from Chech’on that stretches southward to Andong be-
628
comes the responsibility of the 7th In-
fantry Division and elements of the U.S.
2nd Infantry Division. At Chech’on the
17th Infantry Regiment (7th Division, X
Corps) and the 9th Infantry Regiment
(2nd Division, X Corps), bolstered by
one battalion of the 23rd Regiment (2nd
Division, X Corps), hold the line.
In the western sector of the X Corps
area, the line extends from the vicinity of
Wonju and moves southwestwardly to
the perimeter of the IX Corps at the Han
River. The main body of the U.S. 2nd
Division stands at Wonju. The X Corps
commander, General Almond, continues
to bring back cohesion in the ROK 2nd,
5th and 8th Divisions as they continue
to straggle into the lines from the moun-
tains north of Line D and east of Wonju.
The ROK 5th Division deploys in the
west alongside the ROK 8th Division,
which is placed in the center. Meanwhile,
the beleaguered ROK 2nd Division, at
the time only containing slightly more
than 3,000 troops, is assigned as X Corps
reserve.
At 0500, the North Koreans strike
Wonju. They approach without being
noticed as they walk with the unending
throngs of civilians who are fleeing. After
rillas reach two separate command posts
of the 2nd Division and commence fir-
ing. Units of the 2nd Division react swiftly and more
less, attacks are launched against the main defenses,
but they, too, are repulsed.
At about the same time, elements of the North Ko-
rean 12th Division strike from the west against the 10th
Regiment of the ROK 8th Division. The ROKs there
are unable to stem the tide. As pressure mounts, the
2nd Division commander, General McClure, unable
to contact General Almond, pulls out of Wonju, with
the intent to maintain the high ground just south of
the town. However, the pull back moves to positions
farther back and below the village, where the 23rd Reg-
iment redeploys.
In the meantime, the 38th Regiment withdraws even
further, to Mich’on, about seven miles from Wonju.
— In Japan: The issue of abandoning Korea remains
unsettled, as Washington and General MacArthur are
still communicating without results. General Ridgway
informs MacArthur that no evacuation of Korea should
take place if it would leave the South Korean forces
alone to face the Chinese and North Koreans. Ridg-
way repeats the message on the following day. During
the units that the UN forces are going to abandon
definitive answers to quell them.
 629
January 8 In the Eighth Army area, General Ridg-
way establishes two new lines, E and F, as the discus-
sions about whether the UN forces, primarily the U.S.,
will abandon Korea. Line E is established about twenty-
five miles below Line D, while Line F is drawn about
sixty-five miles to the rear of Line D. The next line,
known as the Raider Line, forms a semi-circle about
twenty miles to the front of Seoul and the final line of
defense is the Peter Line (previously Pusan Line).
General O.P. Smith, USMC, is called to Taegu to
meet with General Ridgway. They discuss the possi-
bility of attaching one Marine RCT to X Corps, but
Ridgway does not insist. General Smith, reluctant to
again serve with Almond (since his experience from the
previous year), returns to Masan to discuss the subject;
however, shortly after he returns, the idea is scrapped.
A new plan is offered, suggesting the entire Division
move to prepare to defend the MSR in the Andong and
Kyongju region. On 10 January, the 1st Marine Divi-
sion departs Masan for Pohang.
In the I Corps sector, a 3rd Division contingent (1st
Battalion, 15th Regiment) is ordered to head north.
The patrol moves toward Ansong and encounters strong
opposition near the village, but initial progress is un-
inhibited and the artillery had not been able to main-
tain the pace. By the following day, the battalion, which
is imperiled, requests authorization to pull back from
its positions more than twenty miles ahead of the main
body.
In the X Corps sector, General Almond becomes dis-
tressed after being informed how far the 2nd Division
commanded by Major General Robert B. McClure had
moved from Wonju. One battalion of the 23rd Regi-
ment, 2nd Division, is dispatched at dawn to secure
Wonju and its airstrip, while the remainder of the reg-
iment secures the heights on the fringes of the town.
At about noon, elements of the 2nd Battalion en-
counter some North Koreans near Hill 247, but the
small group is easily scattered.
Soon after, despite the time of day, the contingent,
Company K, discovers yet other North Koreans, and
they are asleep. The soldiers bolt from the their naps and
head for the hills to signal the arrival of the Americans.
During the skirmish, about two hundred North Kore-
ans are killed. However, in the meantime, other enemy
contingents numbering at about regimental strength
close from two sides, compelling the 2nd Battalion to
pull back to positions just beyond Hill 247. Wonju re-
mains under North Korean control.
In related activity, the ROK 10th Regiment is struck
by the North Korean 12th Division. The South Kore-
ans are driven back to Mich’on, which creates more
problems, including the opening of a hole on the flank
of the 23rd Regiment. Consequently, the 2nd Battal-
ion is ordered back to its initial positions to guard the
flank.
In Air Force activity, TF-77 is compelled to abort its
close-air support missions for X Corps due to blizzard
conditions in Korea. The Fifth Air Force takes the task
and launches B29s (Superfortresses), which remain
January 9, 1951
unaffected by the weather. The planes strike Kimpo
Airfield outside of Seoul to prevent it use by the Com-
munists.
January 9 General Ridgway arrives by plane at
Masan to confer with General O.P. Smith, his staff of-
ficers and regimental commanders of the 1st Marine
Division. Ridgway underscores the need for reconnais-
sance and a quick engagement with the enemy once
the division moves to the MSR at Yongch’on under
Eighth Army control, unattached to any corps.
In the Eighth Army area, X Corps sector, another at-
tempt is made to clear the North Koreans from Wonju.
The town is strategically located at a point considered
a key to holding domination over central Korea. A 2nd
Division contingent, Task Force Skeldon, composed of
the 2nd Battalion, 23rd Infantry, and the 2nd Battal-
ion, 38th Infantry, advances during a snowstorm at
1000. As the column approaches Hill 247, unprotected
by air cover, the North Koreans holding the high
ground commence fire and hold up the column. The
task force is unable to ascend the hill due to enemy fire,
but the unit holds there throughout the day. The task
force establishes night positions and afterwards it is re-
inforced by a French battalion.
In related activity, the ROK 8th Division again
comes under heavy attack and for a while, the 2nd Di-
vision’s rear is threatened, but the South Koreans hold
firmly.
In other activity, the North Korean 10th Division
(NK II Corps) is intercepted by elements of the U.S. 7th
Division at a spot east of Route 29 near Chech’on. The
unit, the NK 27th Regiment, is shredded. About 500
North Koreans are killed. Fourteen others are captured
and the information gathered is extremely important.
The POWs inform their captors of the blueprint of the
offensive and they detail the objectives, initially
Tanyang and afterward Taegu.
Also, the 7th Division begins to arrive in the X Corps
sector. The 17th Infantry Regiment led by Colonel
Herbert B. Powell is the first to complete the trek
through the treacherous icy mountain roads. Soon after,
Powell is promoted and he is replaced by Colonel
William “Bill” (Buffalo Bill) Quinn. The 32nd Infantry
Regiment, led by Colonel Charles Beauchamp, trails
closely behind. In conjunction, the 31st Regiment
( John A. Gavin) remains in reserve as it continues to re-
bound from its heavy losses during the previous year
at the Chosin Reservoir.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the ROK 9th Division ar-
rives at Chongson. The ROK 7th Division had arrived
at Yongwol on the previous day. General Ridgway bol-
sters the corps by placing the ROK 3rd Division (ROK
I Corps), also near Yongwol, under General Yu Jai
Heung, the new III Corps commander. By the follow-
ing day, the ROK units are deployed at positions from
where they are able to block the N.K. II Corps’ advance,
expected to come from the heights east of Route 29.
General Ridgway, determined to hold the ground, also
dispatches the 187th Airborne Regimental Combat
January 10, 1951 630

Team to the X Corps sector. And in yet another move,
Ridgway directs the 1st Marine Division, at this time,
Eighth Army reserve, to move from Masan to the
Pohang-dong–Kyongju–Yongch’on region.
Meanwhile, some North Korean units had advanced
to points beyond Route 60 between Yongwol and
Chech’on and orders are given by Ridgway to liquidate
all of them.
January 10 In the Eighth Army area, General
Ridgway receives the plans for the evacuation of Korea
from General MacArthur, in the event such a move

Elements of the U.S. 2nd Division move slowly along an icy mountain pass road south of Wonju on 10
January.
 631
becomes necessary. The blueprint includes the evacu-
ation of the South Korean Army and nearly 140,000
POWs, composed of just over six hundred Chinese and
the remainder, North Koreans.
In the X Corps sector, the 23rd Infantry Regiment
(2nd Division), continues for the third successive day
to secure Wonju. The attacking force, lacking air sup-
port, is also pressed by the temperature, which dips
as low as 25 degrees below zero, while the troops
plod through deep snow. At Hill 247, the regiment
advances toward the town against heavy opposition.
Due to new snow storms, no air cover is available. The
attack stalls by about noon. The regiment fortifies its
positions and continues to withstand attacks through-
out the day.
The intensity of the enemy assaults subsides some-
what following darkness, but the enemy is unable to
dislodge the Americans, who dig in on the hill mass.
The attacks are costly for the North Koreans. Colonel
Paul Freeman’s estimate of enemy dead or wounded is
about 2,000.
In the 1st Marines zone at Masan, OpnO 2–51 is is-
sued in conjunction with OpnO 1–51 of the previous
day. The order authorizes the Division’s movement to
Yongch’on by road and water, to be in position to plug
the gap where the enemy had penetrated the ROK III
Corps on the 2nd Division’s right. At 0545, the van-
guard of RCT-1 departs overland for the Pohang–An-
dong region.
The 1st Marine Division has replenished much of
its equipment, but the division remains nearly 1,900
men short of its full complement. The shortage of
Marines has been a concern of General O.P. Smith, but
the Marine Corps and Navy speed the gears and scram-
ble to fill the ranks. Marines are snatched from security
detachments in Japan, the Philippines and other Pa-
cific stations, while others are gathered at Camp LeJe-
une and Camp Pendleton. By 21 January, 1,000 re-
placements have joined the division and another 799
aboard the General Darby are about to debark at Pusan.
The task of finding and relocating nearly 1,800 Marines
and getting them to the 1st Marine Division had been
a remarkable achievement and exhibited the extraor-
dinary cooperation of the Air Force, Navy and Marines.
In Air Force activity, the inclement weather over
Korea again forces Fifth Air Force to cancel close-air
support missions. Again, Far East Air Forces launches
some sorties, but it is the lowest amount since July of
the previous year.
In other activity, Brigadier General James E. Briggs,
USAF, becomes commanding officer of Far East Air
Forces Bomber Command. He succeeds General Em-
mett O’Donnell. Beginning with this change of com-
mand, Strategic Air Command initiates a practice that
changes commanders of the Bomber Command every
four months. The change is brought about to permit
various officers to receive wartime experience.
— In the United States: George C. Marshall, the
secretary of state, asks Congress to authorize the draft
of 18-year-old males through legislation.
January 13, 1951
January 11 The weather remains nasty, but im-
proves slightly. Far East Air Forces and Fifth Air Force
are able to resume air strikes against enemy positions in
support of the ground troops.
In the Eighth Army area, X Corps sector, the 23rd Reg-
iment under Colonel Paul Freeman continues to with-
stand attacks by North Koreans at Hill 247 and again,
the regiment holds steadfastly and inflicts high casual-
ties upon the enemy. The regiment receives reinforce-
ments when additional elements of the French Battal-
ion arrive. More support arrives when the skies clear at
about noon, permitting planes to help liquidate more
of the attackers attached to the North Korean V Corps.
In the 1st Marines zone at Masan, the LSTs 898 and
914 embark with elements of the Tank Ordnance, En-
gineer and Service Battalions, as part of the operation to
relocate the 1st Marine Division to the Pohang–An-
dong region. The operation is completed by 17 January.
January 12 General William Dean, a captive
with the North Koreans, is moved in secrecy from
Manpo to Kanggye. At this time, the Americans still
have no word on the fate of Dean since his disappear-
ance during the previous June. There has been no word
on whether he had died or been captured.
In the Eighth Army area, IX Corps sector, General
Church dispatches a contingent of the 24th Division to
Yoju.
In the X Corps sector, outside Wonju, the North Ko-
reans again attack the 2nd Division’s 23rd Regiment at
Hill 247, but still, the Americans and the attached el-
ements of the French battalion remain fixed at their
positions. The North Koreans again are unsuccessful
and they sustain high casualties. Nevertheless, the
weather takes a high toll on the defenders; frostbite,
trenchfoot and other ailments strike the 2nd Division.
Although the enemy is unable to dislodge the Ameri-
cans at Hill 247, the North Koreans still control Wonju.
In Air Force activity, Wonju, now controlled by the
Communists, comes under attack by B-29s attached
to the 98th Bomber Group. Ten planes carry out the at-
tack, which deposits 500-pound bombs that are timed
to detonate in the air and spread the fragments over
large areas. The new experiment works well and hinders
the enemy’s progress. In another new tactic, the Air
Force introduces Shoran (a short-range navigation sys-
tem) on its B-26s to improve the precision of the bomb
runs.
January 13 In the Eighth Army area, X Corps sec-
tor, the 2nd Division continues to work to secure
Wonju. At Hill 247, the North Koreans again attack
the positions of the 23rd Regiment, but the assaults are
much less in strength than those launched over the past
several days. The final attacks to dislodge the regiment
cease during the morning. The overall progress of the
2nd Division is unsatisfactory to the corps commander,
General Almond. He requests and receives authoriza-
tion to relieve General Robert McClure.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches a mis-
sion to destroy an enemy controlled bridge at Kanggye.
January 14, 1951
The plane drops a Tarzon 6-ton radio guided bomb
and it is the first effective mission that uses the bomb.
It scores a direct hit on the center span and knocks out
nearly 60 feet of the span. The bombing is witnessed by
General William Dean, who is being held nearby at a
place about ten miles north of Pyongyang. Dean main-
tains his sanity by keeping up with mathematics, in-
cluding square roots, and he keeps a tally on the flies he
kills. On one day, he kills 2,866, and he has to hand the
results over to a North Korean officer. In his memoirs,
he recalled that he would watch a guard who slept with
his mouth open and the flies would enter and exit the
guard’s mouth at will.
January 14 In the Eighth Army area, the X Corps
sector, the 2nd Division commander, Major General
Robert L. McClure, is relieved. He is succeeded by
Major General Clark L. Ruffner. McClure had only
been in command for about one month. Historians give
various reasons for his dismissal — some say political
reasons, due to his differences with Almond, and oth-
ers claim incompetence.
Upon McClure’s relief, General Collins appoints him
commander of the 6th Division back in the States at
Fort Ord, but the damage is done and McClure’s career
is essentially over. He retires the following year. The
assistant division commander, General George Stewart,
is also a new appointment.
In other activity, elements of the 2nd Division con-
tinue trying to secure Wonju. The 23rd Regiment at Hill
247 is no longer under attack by the North Korean V
Corps. The ROK 8th Division also receives a reprieve,
as the North Korean V Corps ceases all activity against
it as well as the area south of Wonju. The N.K. V Corps,
under General Pang, has sustained extremely high casu-
alties and its supplies and ammunition are extremely low.
Intelligence recently gathered from captives of the
N.K. II Corps’ 10th Division prompts General Ridg-
way to switch priorities. Rather than seizing Wonju,
the focus moves to Tanyang, an objective of the N.K.
II Corps offensive. The ROK 8th Division at Chech’on
is redeployed at Tanyang. In conjunction, the 2nd Di-
vision deploys along a twenty-two mile section from
Chech’on to the Han River, which covers the gap cre-
ated in the western part of the sector with the rede-
ployment of the ROK 8th Division.
In Air Force activity, elements of the 4th Fighter In-
terceptor Wing and the 27th Fighter Escort Group are
ordered back to Korea from Japan. The units move to
Taegu. The initial mission is air-to-ground bombing.
After about 150 sorties, the F-86A Sabre jets of the 4th
Interceptor Squadron return to their normal missions,
without complaints from the pilots. Also, missions by
the F-84E Thunderjets are not a fair match for the
MiGs; however, the pilots do more than hold their
own.
In Naval activity, a frigate, the Prasae of Thailand,
which had grounded on 7 January, is destroyed by
friendly naval gunfire from vessels of the East Coast
Blockading and Patrol Task Group (TG 95.2).
632
January 15 General Collins, USA, and General
Hoyt S. Vandenberg arrive in Korea to confer with
General MacArthur and inform him of the president’s
views regarding the evacuation plans. MacArthur is told
to stall as long as possible to protect Eighth Army and
that in addition to evacuating the ROK Army, all South
Korean government officials and the entire SK Police
Force is to also be evacuated. After the conference,
Collins and Vandenberg move to Korea to confer with
General Ridgway at Taegu. General Collins, afterward,
speaks to the press in an effort to quell rumors with re-
gard to the possibility of abandoning Korea. He states:
“As of now, we are going to stay and fight.”
In the Eighth Army area, since 1 December of the
previous year to this day, Eighth Army has been com-
pelled to relinquish about 200 miles. It is the largest
surrender of ground in such a short period in the his-
tory of the United States. The results have devastated
morale; however, General Ridgway remains convinced
that the leadership problems, as well as the discipline of
Eighth Army, can be restored to transform the troops
into a victorious army. An exception is the 1st Marine
Division. Ridgway concurs with General O.P. Smith
that the Marines, despite a horrendous 13-day fighting
withdrawal at the Chosin Reservoir, have high morale
and that they have lost none of their fighting ability.
In the I Corps sector, patrols continue, but little con-
tact is made with the enemy. At this time, a North Ko-
rean offensive is ongoing, but it is not making any
gains. Meanwhile, intelligence gathered suggests that
Chinese forces are moving southward below Seoul.
General Ridgway orders Eighth Army to initiate strong
reconnaissance missions in the western sector. The I
Corps is ordered to dispatch a contingent, including
tanks and infantry (27th Regiment, 25th Division),
artillery and engineers to Line D, in the Suwan–Osan
region. The mission is called Operation WOLFHOUND.
Marine squadron VMF-212 (CVE Bataan) and land-
based Air Force planes support the advance and a bat-
talion from the U.S. 3rd Division protects its right
flank. The situation in the IX Corps sector is identical
to that of the I Corps area.
In the IX Corps sector, General Coulter orders the
ROK 6th Division to deploy in the vicinity of
Kumyangjang-ni to protect the eastern part of Eighth
Army’s positions.
In related activity, elements of the 15th Regiment,
U.S. 3rd Division, bolstered by a contingent of tanks,
also moves along the identical route, but along Route
20 it encounters heavy resistance that prevents the unit
from reaching Suwon. The opposition against the 3rd
Division is the only resistance encountered by Opera-
tion WOLFHOUND. Despite no resistance, progress is
slow due to the conditions of the roads and bridges,
many of which have been badly damaged. The main
body of the 27th Regiment (25th Division), reinforced,
halts for the day near Osan. The force includes the 89th
Tank Battalion, 8th Field Artillery Battalion, Battery B,
90th Field Artillery Battalion, 65th Engineer Battal-
ion, 25th Reconnaissance Company, elements of the
 633
25th Signal Company and two tactical air control con-
tingents. The 1st Battalion, 27th Regiment, and its ac-
companying tanks halt progress in the vicinity of
Paranjang near the coast.
In the X Corps sector, North Korean forces continue
to close against Tanyang and Chech’on. The X Corps
remains active and frequent patrols are dispatched in
search of the enemy. The North Korean 10th Division,
which received a pounding earlier by the U.S. 7th Di-
vision, continues to act as vanguard of the North Ko-
rean II Corps. The regiment is heading for Andong.
The weather remains nasty and it is also taking a toll on
the Communist forces as they advance. At times, tem-
peratures drop to more than twenty degrees below zero.
— In Japan: An advance detachment of Marine Air
Group 33 arrives at Bofu to initiate work on an airfield
that had been rejected for use by the Air Force. On the
following day, Seabees arrive to begin the heavy con-
struction. The Navy initially declines the field, claim-
ing it could not furnish the money for an Air Force
field to be used temporarily by the Marines. However,
the Air Force agrees to pay for the steel planking on the
runways and the Navy agrees.
In conjunction, in Korea, repairs are being made on
K-1 field, but until both airfields are operational, the
only Marine squadron in combat is VMF-212, which
operates from the carrier USS Bataan.
January 16 Marine Fighter Squadron VMF-311,
which has been experiencing mechanical and other
problems, is grounded. The jets had been operating,
but not adequately. VMF-311 is the solitary Marine
jet squadron in Korea. Marine Fighter Squadrons 323
and 214, aboard the USS Badoeng Strait (CVE 116)
and the USS Sicily (CVE 118) move to Itami, Japan.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, two separate
columns of the 27th Regiment arrive at Suwon from
Routes 1 and 39. By early afternoon, no opposition is
encountered except for a few Chinese stragglers. The
units executing Operation WOLFHOUND are ordered
to retire to the Chinwi River.
In conjunction, a small company-sized contingent
moves towards Suwon to clear it of any enemy. No
enemy forces are spotted along the southwestern fringes
of the town, but after moving onto Route 1, the con-
tingent is attacked by Chinese troops. A firefight ensues
for about one-half hour. Afterwards, the unit moves
on as air cover arrives to strike the enemy positions.
Chinese troop formations near Suwon and Kumyang-
jang signal alarms within Eighth Army. Rather than
risk a penetration that might get Communist troops to
the rear of the 27th Regiment and the 89th FABn, both
units are ordered to redeploy below Osan. The plan
anticipates pursuit by the Chinese; however, the enemy
does not advance.
In the X Corps sector, strong patrols maintain a pres-
ence and sporadic encounters with the enemy cut into
the manpower. The Communists’ resupply system is
poor and as time elapses, the combination of casualties
(due to weather and X Corps resistance) and ammuni-
January 17, 1951
tion shortages work against the N.K. II Corps and in the
favor of X Corps.
In the 1st Marines zone in the Pohang–Andong re-
gion, the division command post is established at Sin-
hung.
January 17 In the Eighth Army area, X Corps sec-
tor, the North Korean V Corps is unable to knock out
the 23rd Regiment below Wonju and sustains high ca-
sualties in the process. It withdraws from the region
and redeploys in the vicinity of Hoengsong. In the
meantime, the N.K. II Corps continues its advance,
but progress is sluggish. The X Corps troops continue
to punish the columns, which are also badgered by the
inclement weather. To make the North Koreans’ jour-
ney even more difficult, General Almond had earlier
ordered the destruction of all structures that might be
used by the Communists to avoid the freezing temper-
atures.
In Naval activity, the USS Bataan (CVL 29), along
with Destroyer Division 72, arrives and relieves the
HMS Theseus and accompanying destroyers. The ar-
mada assumes responsibility as Carrier Task Element
(TE 95.11).
In Air Force activity, a contingent of F-86s attached
to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group initiates opera-
tions at Taegu. The Sabre jets execute their initial
fighter bomber sorties in air-to-ground missions. The
planes carry out close-air support missions, but they
also execute reconnaissance missions. The pilots of the
Sabres remain concerned about the advantage of the
MiGs and continue to request heavier ammunition.
The consensus is that the only sure way for a MiG to
be knocked out is to maneuver to its rear and kill it
from close range. Consequently, a miss from close range
also places the Sabre pilot in additional danger. The
MiGs operate in the area which is in close proximity to
their bases, which usually places them at a higher ele-
vation with the option of choosing when to attack.
In other activity, due to a shortage (only three re-
main in the theater) of radio guided bombs, Far East Air
Forces suspends Tarzon bombing missions. The few
available bombs are retained in the event they are
needed for an emergency. In conjunction, between this
day and the following day, Combat Cargo Command
executes 109 sorties by C-119s to maintain a steady
drop of supplies and ammunition to the front lines.
— In Japan: General Collins, subsequent to his visit
along with General Vandenberg, USAF, to Korea, re-
turns to Japan. The short tour invigorated their outlook
on the situation in Korea and it convinced them Gen-
eral Ridgway had things under control. Ridgway’s pos-
itive outlook and their personal observations present a
different picture than that which is held by General
MacArthur, who only about one week ago believed
Korea to be untenable. After finding morale and atti-
tudes higher than previously thought, General Collins
focuses on the weaknesses of Eighth Army and con-
cludes that the most vulnerable point is within the X
Corps sector at Wonju.
January 18, 1951
January 18 In the Eighth Army area, X Corps sec-
tor, patrols continue to search for North Korean forces,
but on this day, no complete contingents are encoun-
tered. The opposition is confined to small groups, sig-
nifying the effectiveness of the X Corps patrols.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the Marines move
out from the Pohang-dong–Andong–Yongdok region
on a search and destroy mission against the North Ko-
rean guerrillas and the N.K. 10th Division. The de-
fensive perimeter includes the town of Pohang, about
65 miles north of Pusan, along the western shore of
Yongil Man, a bay within the defensive perimeter,
about five miles above the command post at Sinhung.
Pohang contains two jetties with ten feet of water
alongside to provide a place for landing craft to debark
troops and equipment. The line swings out from Po-
hang to Yongch’on and then begins to circle through Ui-
hung, Ulsong and Andong, from where it swings back
towards the coast at Yongok, north of Pohang.
The primary task of the Marines is to keep the 75
mile stretch of the MSR from Pohang to Andong clear.
However, the new sector assigned to the 1st Marine
Division encompasses 1,600 square miles, much of
which is mountainous terrain. By this date, the N.K.
10th Division is within several miles of Andong and
intelligence has ascertained that guerrilla operations are
ongoing as far west as Tanyang and as far south as Tae-
jon, which threatens the MSR of the I Corps. Never-
theless, the Marines search much terrain; however, up
to this point, there is only sporadic contact with any
considerable enemy forces.
In one instance on this day, a patrol of the 3rd Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, comes upon a group of N.K. troops
east of Andong, but the soldiers flee with Marines in
pursuit. Most escape, but three are captured and iden-
tified as members of the N.K. 27th Infantry, 25th Di-
vision, which had been devastated during the Inchon
operation of the previous September. Subsequent to its
rehabilitation, the division, now led by Major General
Lee Ban Nam, is engaged in guerrilla operations. With
the capture of the three enemy troops, the enemy di-
vision, which had been concealing its location, has been
discovered. Consequently, the mission is terminated
before a strike could be launched against the rear of X
Corps.
January 19 In the Eighth Army area, by this time,
at least five enemy divisions are operating against Eight
Army; however, there is no cohesiveness and the of-
fensive that began on 7 January has lost all its tenacity.
General Ridgway, meanwhile, continues to strengthen
his foundation, while he prepares to launch a strong
counteroffensive. The North Korean II Corps is no
longer in a position to inflict much damage. The N.K.
2nd, 9th, 27th and 31st Divisions each have sustained
heavy casualties and the commander, General Hyon
Choe, is about to order a withdrawal. Choe’s 10th Di-
vision near Andong is also close to collapse.
In the X Corps sector, a patrol from the 38th Regi-
ment discovers that Wonju is not heavily defended.
634
Once General Almond is informed of the slim defenses,
he instructs the 2nd Division to retake the town. The
9th Infantry Regiment is selected for the task. The 2nd
Battalion is transformed into a task force with support-
ing elements that include Company E, 38th Infantry,
a contingent of tanks, and a unit of the 15th FABn.
The task force, led by Colonel Cesidio V. Barberis,
bumps into some stiff resistance. Following a fierce
fight with the frequent use of grenades and bayonets,
the enemy is vanquished and the objective is gained.
Following the seizure, patrols of the 1st and 2nd Bat-
talions probe to the north, northeast and northwest. A
large North Korean force is detected at Hoengsong,
but the troops withdraw under fire and the patrol
briefly enters the town before returning to Wonju.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces begins a cam-
paign to try to stem the flow of enemy supplies and re-
inforcements from reaching the front lines. The air
campaign, which continues for three weeks, is carried
out by fighters, light bombers and medium bombers.
In Naval activity, the USS Leyte Gulf (CV 32), at-
tached to Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77), completes its
tour. It is detached and soon after, on 26 January, it
departs for the United States. Also, Escort Task Group
(TG 95.5) is activated, which bolsters the United Na-
tions Blockading and Escort Force (TF 95) with seven
additional frigates.
In other activity, a contingent of the Underwater
Demolition Team (UDT 1) is spotted by an enemy pa-
trol while it is engaged in a surveying mission on the
west coast of Korea. The unit, attached to the USS Ho-
race A. Bass (APD 124), sustains 2 killed, 5 wounded.
January 20 General MacArthur arrives in Korea
from Japan to confer with General Ridgway at Taegu;
however, he also meets with the press and states that the
UN intends to remain in Korea and will not be ousted
by the Communists. He emphasizes that they will re-
main as long as the UN intends them to stay. The visit
seems out of the ordinary, as the offensive ordered by
Ridgway had already begun. Nevertheless, MacArthur’s
staff states that his visit was to personally give his ap-
proval for the action.
In the Eighth Army area, General Almond is directed
by General Ridgway to initiate infantry patrols, bol-
stered by armor, and dispatch them into the area along
the Yonju–Wonju Line to intercept enemy units that at-
tempt to seal off the region. In addition, the patrols are
designed to prevent the North Koreans from launching
operations south of the line. The patrols are in con-
junction with the reconnaissance operations initiated
by Ridgway on 15 January.
It had recently been concluded that the Communists
had decreased the numbers of their forward units along
the P’yongt’aek–Samch’ok Line and Ridgway intends
to take advantage. The respective corps commanders
are directed to initiate brief but vicious attacks to in-
timidate the enemy and throw them off balance to pre-
vent them from launching a new attack.
In Air Force activity, after an absence of several weeks,
 635
MiG-15s are again spotted in the skies by U.S. F84s.
This is the first time the MiG-15s encounter the F-
84s. No losses are reported.
In Naval activity, Amphibious Task Force (TF 90)
initiates an operation to transfer Communist prison-
ers from South Korea to the island of Joje-do and to
transport civilian refugees to the island of Oheju-Do.
January 21 General Ridgway issues a statement
that stipulates his considered opinion on why the troops
are in Korea, an apparent response to the questions that
have been lingering since the start of the conflict, “Why
are we here?” and “What are we fighting for?” He says:
“In the final analysis, the issue now joined right here in
Korea is whether Communism or individual freedom
shall prevail; whether the flight of fear-driven people we
have witnessed here shall be checked, or shall at some
future time, however distant, engulf our own loved
ones in all its misery and despair. Those are the things
for which we fight....”
In the Eighth Army area, 1st Marine Division sector,
the Marines continue to search for guerrillas, but still,
the enemy remains evasive.
Also, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment is at-
tached to the 1st Marine Division. The four battalions
of the regiment are directed to depart Chinhae for Po-
hang. Some are carried by LSTs and others move over-
land by convoy. A regimental command post is estab-
lished at Yongdok, along the coast, north of Pohang.
In the IX Corps sector, a contingent (one battalion)
of the 24th Division, bolstered by artillery, deploys at
Ich’on.
In Air Force activity, a force of 12 MiG-15s attack
U.S. planes this day and the superior numbered enemy
force is able to down one RF-80 and one F-84 Shoot-
ing Star. An MiG-15 is downed by Lt. Colonel William
E. Bertram, commanding officer, 523rd Fighter
Bomber Squadron, 27th Fighter Escort Group. Bertram
receives credit for the first victory by a USAF F-84
Thunderjet over an MiG-15.
In conjunction, this is the first major battle between
the Chinese pilots and the Americans. The Chinese,
between combat losses and accidents, primarily the lat-
ter, are compelled to seek more training. The Chinese
4th Air Division is withdrawn from its base at Antung
and Russian pilots assume responsibility in the area
known as MiG Alley.
January 22 Marine Squadron VMF(N)-513,
which had arrived from Japan to replace VMF-311 jet
squadron, executes its initial combat mission from K-
9 field. Squadron VMF(N)-513 had been based at
Itazuke, Japan, until transferred to replace the jets at
Pusan, which had engineering problems.
In the Eighth Army area, IX Corps sector, a unit (TF
Johnson) under Colonel Harold K. Johnson is formed
for a one-day advance. Task Force Johnson is composed
of the 70th Tank Battalion (Henry Zeien) and the 3rd
Battalion, 8th Cavalry (1st Cavalry Division), rein-
forced with a company of 8th Cavalry’s heavy mortar
company. On the right, the task force is supported by
January 23, 1951
the 2nd Battalion, 5th Infantry, and on the left by el-
ements of the 7th Infantry.
Another contingent, the 1st Battalion, 35th Regi-
ment, 25th Division, advances with tanks of the 89th
Tank Battalion in support and heads towards Suwon
as a feint to divert attention from the main attack. The
task force moves out at 0530. It advances northward
to a point about five miles east of Kumyangjang-ni.
No enemy forces are encountered en route to Yangji-ri,
indicating no organized opposition below Route 20;
however, resistance is later met in the high ground
above the town.
One part of the force moves east toward Och’on-ni,
against no opposition. The other group moves west and
encounters slight opposition, which is repelled by an
air strike. En route back to friendly lines, the identical
unit encounters another small enemy force and drives
it away. The clash costs the task force two killed and five
wounded; but the enemy loses fifteen killed. Air strikes
kill an estimated fifty additional enemy troops.
In conjunction, the 7th Infantry seizes Kumyang-
jang, while the 2nd Battalion, 5th Infantry, advances to-
ward Ich’on, where the Communists are engaged with
an Australian patrol. The 5th Infantry contingent
moves against the enemy and afterward moves into
Ich’on.
Also, the 35th Regiment is able to make exceptional
progress. It reaches and retakes Osan, which provides
the 25th Division with strong positions slightly beyond
the town, which they use to establish roadblocks. The
35th Regiment is out front, with the 24th Infantry
south of it. Farther to the rear, a British contingent is
deployed on Line D.
The entire operation had been executed for purposes
of encountering and killing the enemy while gathering
intelligence. TF Johnson had encountered few enemy
troops; however, the operation is deemed a success for
several reasons, including the new spirit of the troops,
but most importantly for confirming that neither the I
Corps or IX Corps fronts are under any serious threat
from the Communists.
In the X Corps sector, little contact is made with the
North Koreans.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the situation is iden-
tical. The Marines’ clearing operation continues for
more than two weeks, but without any intense contact
with the enemy. On this day, a patrol of the 1st Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, discovers a guerrilla contingent at-
tempting to conceal itself southeast of Andong, in the
vicinity of Mukkye-dong. The Marines sustain no ca-
sualties during the engagement. The Communists van-
ish into the darkness.
—In Japan: The airfield at Bofu is prepared to begin
operations. Lieutenant Colonel Paul J. Fontana,
USMC, establishes the MAG-33 command post.
January 23 In the Eighth Army area, General
Henry I. Hodes, chief of staff to General Ridgway, di-
rects General Almond to ensure that X Corps main-
tains contact with the IX Corps at Yoju to keep the
January 23, 1951
A contingent of the 25th Division is en route to Osan on 23 January 1951.
pressure on the enemy and prevent them from operat-
ing south of the Yoju–Wonju Road. The directive is in
conjunction with an offensive that is ordered by Ridg-
way, scheduled to be executed on 25 January.
In other activity, the NK 10th Division (NK II
Corps) is ordered by the corps commander, General
Choe, to cease its offensive and attempt to retire to-
ward P’yongch’ang. The order is issued with a stipula-
tion that if the division is unable to backtrack, due to
the X Corps’ blocking its path northward and the 1st
Marine Division scouring the area below, the unit is to
initiate guerrilla tactics. The beleaguered North Kore-
ans begin to move northward, faced with the task of
evading both X Corps patrols and the Marines.
On the following day, the remainder of the enemy
corps also initiates a retreat. Also, intelligence reports
that the majority of the enemy forces are located in the
area below Seoul near Route 20 and farther north and
east along the Han River.
In related activity, VMF-212, aboard the light car-
rier USS Bataan, is the only Marine squadron operat-
ing at this time. While scouring the west coast and pro-
viding cover for the 1st Marine Division since the 16th,
the squadron detects Chinese forces entrenched along
the coast as far back as sixty miles from the lines. The
discovery indicates that the enemy has learned lessons
from Inchon, and exposes their apprehension about the
Marines’ ability to execute amphibious landings.
Three of the planes had been hit by small arms fire
on the third day of operations and one of the planes, pi-
636
loted by Captain Russell G. Patterson, Jr., was downed.
Patterson crashed behind enemy lines; however, a dar-
ing helicopter rescue saved his life. One other pilot,
Lieutenant Alfred J. Ward, was shot down and killed on
the following day.
Marine Squadron VMF-312 is able this day to begin
missions against Seoul from its refurbished field at
Bofu, Japan.
In Air Force activity, a force composed of thirty-three
F-84s (27th Fighter Escort Wing) based at Taegu strike
enemy-held Sinuiju. The planes arrive in three flights,
two that attack and a third that provides cover. Prior to
the bombing run, eight planes strafe the field before
MiG pilots at Antung can react, keeping the MiGs
from gaining an advantage of holding the high altitude.
Consequently, the air battles are fought primarily at el-
evations of about 20,000 feet. The MiGs arrive from
across the Yalu River to intercept the F-84s. A huge air
battle erupts and continues unabated for about thirty
minutes. The F-84 ThunderJets knock three of the
MiGs from the sky and sustain no losses. Two of the
MiGs are downed by First Lieutenant Jacob Kratt, Jr.,
in less than two minutes.
In other activity, a group composed of about forty F-
80s, attached to the 49th Fighter Bomber Group, at-
tack the antiaircraft positions at Pyongyang, while an
accompanying force of twenty-one B-29s bomb the
airfield there. Captain Allen McGuire and Captain
William W. Slaughter, also of the 27th FEW, each
claimed a MiG during the battle of Sinuiju. In addition,
 637
three probable kills are claimed by the 27th. However,
only three kills are listed in the Air Force official records
of 1988. McGuire’s claim is not among those. Also, four
other MiGs are damaged. The U.S. sustains no losses.
January 24 In the Eighth Army area, General Par-
tridge, acting as pilot, and General Ridgway initiate a
reconnaissance flight. After two hours, the pair discover
no large enemy formations in front of the I Corps,
headquartered at Ch’onan. After the flight, Ridgway
concludes that his forces will be able to take ground
and hold what they have when an offensive begins on
the following day.
In other activity, the North Korean II Corps ceases
its unsuccessful offensive and begins its withdrawal to-
wards P’yongchang. The offensive had begun on 7 Jan-
uary and four divisions (2nd, 9th, 27th and 31st) had
sustained more than about a fifty percent casualty rate,
including those caused by the weather. In addition, the
N.K. 10th Division, which had advanced farther south
toward Andong, also sustains extremely high casual-
ties.
Meanwhile, Eighth Army prepares for an offensive
(Operation THUNDERBOLT), scheduled to commence
on the following day.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, Communist guer-
rillas that had been attempting to operate in the zones
of the 1st and 5th Marines on this day venture south-
east into the zone of the 7th Marines. During the after-
noon, the positions of Company A and the 1st Battal-
ion command post at Topyong-dong come under
mortar fire.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral I.N. Kiland (COM-
PHIBPAC) relieves Rear Admiral J. H. Doyle, com-
mander Amphibious Group I, of the operational com-
mand of Amphibious Forces, Far East (TF 90).
Also, Marine Corsairs remain in the air over two
downed pilots to protect them until a rescue helicop-
ter arrives.
— In Japan: The 1st Marine Air Wing increases ac-
tivity at Bofu airfield. General Field Harris establishes
his headquarters. Shortly thereafter, VMF-214 and
VMF-323 arrive from Itami, Japan, to join with VMF
312, which had commenced operations on the previ-
ous day.
January 25–April 21 1951.
FOURTH DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
FIRST U.N. COUNTEROFFENSIVE
January 25 At K-9 field near Pusan, VMF(N)-
513, which has been flying in support of Eighth Army,
gets its first request to support the 1st Marine Division
ground forces in the Pohang region.
In the Eighth Army area, Eighth Army initiates its
offensive (Operation THUNDERBOLT), an attack exe-
cuted by the I and IX Corps, to drive to the Han River.
Both I and IX Corps had on the previous night estab-
lished positions about five miles above Line D. Each
January 25, 1951
corps is to commit one division, augmented by armor
and with the stipulation of bolstering the force with an
ROK regiment if required. X Corps is directed to pro-
tect the right flank, while it initiates some diversionary
attacks north of the Yoju–Wonju Road. The cruiser
USS St. Paul, some destroyers and the British cruiser
HMS Ceylon remain offshore to support the offensive,
which is also bolstered by the artillery of the 64th, 90th
and 159th FABns along with the guns of the Turkish
Artillery Regiment and the British 45th Artillery Reg-
iment.
In the I Corps sector, the 25th Division advances with
the 3rd Division covering the west flank. The Recon
Company (25th Division), supported by the 3rd Divi-
sion Recon Company on the far left, advances up the
west coast road toward Suwon, while on the right, the
35th Regiment advances in two columns. One contin-
gent moves up the Osan–Suwon Road, while the other
drives northward from Paranjang, also toward Suwon.
The 24th Infantry Regiment trails the 35th, to main-
tain control of the Paranjang Road. To its right, the
Turkish Brigade moves northeastwardly toward
Kumyangjang. Only the Turkish contingent operating
east of Osan encounters heavy opposition. By day’s end,
the 35th Regiment advances to Osan and deploys in
positions to encircle it; however, the enemy makes no
attempt to counterattack; rather, it abandons the place,
except for a rear guard. Meanwhile the 27th Infantry
Regiment (reserve) moves to Osan.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Cavalry Division drives
north in two columns. The 8th Cavalry (Colonel
William A. Harris) moves along Route 55 on the right,
while the 7th Cavalry (Colonel Harold Johnson) oper-
ates on the left and rolls up Route 13. Neither corps
encounters any heavy resistance. During the advance
of the 7th Cavalry, elements of the 24th Division rein-
force the attack force. Initially, the support unit (2nd
Battalion, 5th Regiment) holds at positions between
Ichon and Yogu to await orders to join the attack. By
the afternoon, the 8th Cavalry advances to the
Suwon–Wonju Road, where it encounters some oppo-
sition, but it is overcome.
In the meantime, the 7th Cavalry, reinforced by the
2nd Battalion, 5th Infantry Regiment, advances to
Ich’on. The 5th Cavalry (Colonel Marcel Crombez) re-
mains in reserve. The U.S. Navy, at the request of Gen-
eral Ridgway, increases its patrols along the west coast
to protect the left flank. On the following day, the of-
fensive of the I Corps advances towards the second
phase line out of the five lines identified earlier by Gen-
eral Ridgway.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, one day following
a mortar attack, the command post of the 1st Battalion,
7th Marines, is attacked by a contingent of about 100
guerrillas. The Communists lose seven killed after an ex-
change that lasts about one and one-half hours.
In the 7th Marines zone, the 3rd Battalion, supported
by a contingent of National Police, engage the enemy
in the Chiso-dong area. Initially, nine of the enemy are
killed, but as the battalion moves to take Chiso-dong,
January 26, 1951
the resistance holds and the battalion is forced to halt
for the night.
In the meantime, artillery continues to pound the
enemy positions. Marine squadrons VMF(N)-513 and
VMF-323 receive calls to support the attack, but due
to the inability to communicate with the forward air
controller, the sorties are not effective.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces makes some
changes. Combat Cargo Command, a provisional unit,
is succeeded by the 315th Air Division (Combat
Cargo). The 315th Air Division does not come under
Fifth Air Force with regard to administrative and logis-
tical support; rather is comes under the direct jurisdic-
tion of Far East Air Forces.
In other activity, in conjunction with Eighth Army’s
operation to regain territory, including the port of In-
chon and the airfield at Suwon, a force of sixty-eight C-
119s support the offensive. Between this day and 7
February, the aircraft deliver by air-drop 1,162 tons of
supplies and ammunition to the troops at Chunju,
south of the Han River.
— In Japan: Marine Squadron VMF(N)-542 re-
ceives orders at Itazuke to support the Eighth Army ad-
vance. The F7F pilots of the squadron are directed to
make the long flight of about 200 miles and after arriv-
ing, maintain non-stop patrols near the Han River to
ensure the Communists cannot retire across the frozen
river unobserved. The Marine aviators pound enemy
formations and convoys; however, they report no large
numbers of enemy troops attempting to retire across
the river. While in support of the advance, the squadron
gets tapped to spot targets for the U.S. and British
cruisers that are bombarding Inchon.
January 26 Marine Squadron VMF(N)-513 ex-
ecutes forty-nine combat missions between this day
and 31 January. The missions include 110 sorties, but
of these, only ten are in support of the 1st Marine Di-
vision.
In the Eighth Army area, I Corps sector, the 25th Di-
vision moves toward the 2nd phase line against light
opposition. By 1300, the airfield at Suwon and the
town itself is occupied by elements of the 35th Regi-
ment. Later, General Ridgway arrives at Suwon and
discovers a town in ruins. At Kumyangjang, Chinese de-
fenders raise fierce resistance against the Turkish
Brigade. Fighting continues throughout the day until
about 1930, when the Turks finally reduce the resist-
ance. The Turks fight fiercely and gain a strategic hill
just outside the town; however, most enemy deaths had
been caused by artillery bombardments.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Cavalry Division en-
counters heavy resistance in the high ground above
Yangji-ri, where Task Force Johnson had met heavy re-
sistance on 23 January. The 8th Cavalry is unable to dis-
lodge the opposition and sustains 28 killed and 141
wounded while it is encircled, until elements of the 7th
Cavalry speed to reinforce it. The 7th Cavalry strikes
from two separate directions to relieve the 8th Cavalry
from its jeopardy. The cavalry is unable to advance to
638
the second phase line. Meanwhile, the 7th Cavalry is or-
dered to shift east to defend the first phase line that
stands slightly outside Ich’on. Following the lackluster
performance of the 8th Cavalry, it is replaced by the
5th Cavalry. The 8th Cavalry is placed in reserve at
Kumyangjang.
In other activity, Major General Blackshear M.
Bryan becomes commander of the 24th Division. He
succeeds General Church, who is transferred to the
U.S. to become commandant of the Infantry School at
Fort Benning, Georgia. It is a standard policy to re-
lieve officers and to have them contribute their combat
experience to training in the States and Church’s trans-
fer is part of that procedure. Also, by the end of the
month, General Barr, the commanding officer of the
U.S. 7th Division (X Corps), will be named comman-
dant of the Armor School at Fort Knox, Kentucky. He
will be succeeded by Major General Claude B. Feren-
baugh.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the Marines continue
to maintain patrols in search of an elusive enemy. The
guerrillas do not hold the confidence of the Korean
civilians and often when spotted by the villagers, the in-
formation is passed onto the Marines. In addition, the
North Korean guerrillas are not properly equipped nor
supplied to carry out an extensive guerrilla operation.
The Marines, although not often calling for VMF
squadrons for support on this type of mission, depend
on VMO-6 to aid in the search for the Communists.
The OY observation planes scour the hills and once an
enemy contingent is spotted, helicopters are used to
keep the Marines supplied while they give pursuit.
In the 1st Marines zone, TF Puller, led by Colonel
Lewis B. Puller, is dispatched to Chongja-dong, less
than ten miles northeast of Uisong, in a rapid response
to a Korean police report that several hundred enemy
troops had taken the village. Artillery plasters the vil-
lage prior to a planned assault set for 1500. Company
A enters the village, but discovers no enemy, only an
abandoned village. In conjunction, on this same day,
Colonel Puller is promoted to brigadier general. Col-
onel Francis M. McAlister succeeds him as commander,
RCT 1.
In the 7th Marines zone, the attack from the previous
day is reinitiated to advance one more mile to seize
Chiso-dong. Artillery and more effective air strikes sup-
port the Marines against the defending force of about
400 troops. Chiso-dong falls to the Marines by 1530.
The air strikes led by VMF-323 (Captain Don H.
Fisher and VMF(N)-513 (Captain Floyd K. Fulton)
are the first flights to succeed with air to ground coop-
eration since the Chosin Reservoir Campaign of the
previous year.
In other activity, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines,
seize Hapton-ni, about eight miles southeast of
Topyong-dong. The Communists, after being evicted,
mount a failed counterattack and for the day’s action,
sustain 161 casualties, either killed or captured.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces improves its
communications in the Korea Theater. On this day, it
 639 January 26, 1951

Top: A plane in the distance (top right center) descends during a close-air support mission to bolster the
1st Cavalry Division near Ich’on on 26 January. Bottom: A convoy (96th FABn) crawls its way along an
icy highway in the mountains to reach 1st Cavalry Division positions.

launches its initial C-47 “control aircraft.” The plane
contains sufficient communications equipment to en-
sure its ability to maintain communications by radio
with all T-6 Mosquitoes, with its tactical air control
parties, and with the Tactical Air Control Center.
Also, a contingent of planes attached to the 27th
Fighter Escort Wing at Taegu encounters enemy aircraft
in the vicinity of MiG Alley. One MiG is lost, shot
down by First Lieutenant Jacob Kratt, Jr., who received
his first victory on 3 January. This is his final aerial vic-
tory of the conflict.
In other activity, at about this time, some in command
January 27, 1951
remain fearful regarding the Eighth Army offensive,
prompting General Partridge to direct a large number
of his Fifth Air Force units to depart for Japan until the
success of the offensive becomes clearer. The 49th
Fighter Bomber Wing, 27th Fighter Escort Wing and
the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing are among those out-
fits ordered to Japan. Nevertheless, the doubts about
General Ridgway’s success soon vanish, as Eighth Army
sends the Communists into retreat. Consequently, the
334th Squadron will be reordered back to Korea.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries at In-
chon commence firing against the USS St. Paul (CA
7).
January 27 At airfield K-1, outside Pusan, Col-
onel Boelcer C. Batteton, USMC, establishes the
MAG-12 command post, but the runway remains in-
complete for about two additional weeks. In the mean-
time, the Marine squadrons of MAG-12 continue op-
erating out of nearby K-9 airfield.
In the Eighth Army area, I and IX Corps sectors, Chi-
nese resistance remains light, but progress remains very
slow due primarily to an intensified search for the
enemy.
In the I Corps sector, the 35th Regiment (25th Divi-
sion) advances less than three miles beyond Suwon. In
the meantime, the Turkish Brigade advances to a point
between Suwon and Kumyangjang-ni. Also, the S.K.
3rd Division enters the fight today. Initially, a reconnais-
sance force advances, but afterwards, the division
launches a heavy attack.
In the IX Corps sector, the Chinese continue to mount
heavy resistance from their positions in the high ground
slightly above Yang-ri, where the 8th Cavalry has been
stalled since the previous day. The 5th Cavalry takes
the offensive. It leap-frogs over the 8th Cavalry and
drives against the stronghold to the west, killing several
hundred Chinese during its drive to Kumyangjang-ni.
At Hill 312, the fighting is ferocious, as both sides
pound against each other in close-quartered hand-to-
hand combat. After reducing the obstacle and reaching
the town, the 5th Cavalry advances slightly more than
one additional mile along Route 17 to reach the first
phase line. In the meantime, the 7th Cavalry Regiment
remains at its positions in the vicinity of Ich’on.
Intelligence gathered from captured Chinese points
to only one army in the immediate area, the 50th
Chinese Army. From that information and other intel-
ligence, Ridgway discerns that the bulk of the resist-
ance is forming near the Han River and it is suspected
that the forces include the six armies of the Chinese
XIII Army Group and the North Korean I Corps. Ridg-
way’s attack plan is modified to strengthen the attack
of the I Corps. He informs General Milburn to include
the 3rd Division in the next attack. To reinforce the
3rd Division, General Milburn attaches the Turkish
Brigade.
In the X Corps sector, subsequent to the N.K. II
Corps’ pull-out from P’yongch’ang, a U.S. contingent
composed of infantry and artillery advances to posi-
640
tions from which an artillery barrage is commenced to
destroy the town.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps decides
to appoint about 500 master sergeants, warrant offi-
cers and commissioned warrant officers to the rank of
temporary second lieutenant to bolster the Marine
Corps leadership during the ongoing Korean conflict.
January 28 By this date, all Marine tactical
squadrons are in action for the first time since the pre-
vious December. The great majority of flights origi-
nating at Bofu in Japan and K-9 at Pusan are diverted
from reconnaissance missions to support the ground
troops.
In the Eighth Army area, General Ridgway commits
the 3rd Division (I Corps) and 24th Division (IX
Corps) to the attack. The move by Ridgway drains the
reserve down to two units, the British 27th Brigade and
the Commonwealth Brigade in the I and IX Corps re-
spectively. Nonetheless, Ridgway is convinced his force
is fully prepared to remain on the offensive and be more
than a match for the enemy.
In the I Corps sector, elements of the 3rd Division
drive northward toward Kumyangjang against sporadic
resistance. In the early morning hours of the following
day, the Chinese launch an attack against the perime-
ter. The 25th Division continues its advance toward
the Han River. Elements reach a point about two
miles from phase line three, the half-way point from
the river, and eliminates resistance as it moves. One
contingent of the 35th Regiment, 25th Division, enters
Suwon.
Marine Squadron VMF-312, out of Bofu, Japan, re-
ceives a message that enemy troops north of the Suwon
had concealed themselves in a small village. Through the
direction of a Mosquito plane, the Marines plaster the
suspected location and destroy about forty structures.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
advance continues and it, too, receives resistance above
Yangji-ri. The 5th Cavalry halts at the 2nd phase line
and the 7th Cavalry ends its day about two miles below
the line. The assaults against the 7th Cavalry had come
from a new unit, the 112th Division, 38th Army. In-
telligence gathered from captured troops indicates that
the division had just been sent south to intercept the IX
Corps.
At about this time, Colonel Harold Johnson, 7th
Cavalry, moves to I Corps to become G-3. He is re-
placed as 7th Cavalry commander by Colonel Pete
Clainos, who had been the commanding officer of the
1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry.
The 24th Division, commanded by Major General
Blackshear M. Bryan, advances on the right of the 1st
Cavalry Division. It moves through the area above
Ich’on and Yoju, where the Han River takes a sharp
turn in a southeastwardly direction. The 5th and 19th
Regiments, led by Colonels Throckmorton and Kin-
ney respectively, drive north toward the Han River,
while the reserve 21st Regiment remains in the rear in
the area around Yoju, also along the Han.
 641 January 29, 1951

Top brass at the front lines north of Suwon on 28 January. Major General Courtney Whitney is second
from left; Lt. General Matthew B. Ridgway has a grenade hanging from his left shoulder, commander
Eighth Army General MacArthur is on the far right and General Kean, the commanding officer of the
25th Division, is in the background to the rear of MacArthur.

January 29 In the Eighth Army area, Operation
WOLFHOUND continues. The I Corps and IX Corps
each receive opposition and in some instances, land
mines are encountered, but the mines are unsophisti-
cated and poorly placed. By this time, the Chinese have
committed additional units and the U.S. corps, based
on information gained from POWs, move against five
Chinese divisions and one NK division. The 148th,
149th and 150th of the 50th Army stand in the path
of the I Corps’ 3rd and 25th Divisions. The 112th and
113th Divisions (38th Army) oppose IX Corps’ 1st
Cavalry Division. In addition, the North Korean 8th
Division opposes the Turkish Brigade and the 35th
Regiment (I Corps).
January 29, 1951 642

In the I Corps sector, during the early morning hours,

to find and destroy the enemy; however, no contact is
the Chinese strike hard against the 3rd Division posi- made. Additional information given to the Marines by
tions near Kumyangjang and inflict heavy casualties South Korean police indicate that the guerrillas are
upon the 65th Regiment; however, at dawn, the posi- planning to invade the village to confiscate food.
tions remain under American control. In other activity, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Reg-
In the IX Corps sector, on the right, elements of theiment, recently attached to the 1st Marine Division,
24th Division and of the 2nd Division (X Corps) form establishes a command post at Yongdok, which is in
a motorized patrol and advance from Yoju, east of the the area covered by the 7th and 5th Marines. The South
Han River, towards a set of enemy-dug tunnels, but Koreans receive a new sector, F, which is created out of
Chinese there cut the patrol off. Planes arrive to relieve
sectors C and D, held by the 7th and 5th Marines re-
the besieged troops. Reinforcements arrive about 0330 spectively. Their section of responsibility stretches along
on 30 January. The patrol, composed of forty-five the Yongdok–Andong Road and includes the villages of
troops, sustains five dead, twenty-nine wounded and Pongdok, Chaegok-tong and Chinandong. The 1st
five missing and presumed captured. Battalion is assigned the western portion of Sector F,
In the 1st Cavalry sector, the Chinese raise fierce re-
while the 1st Battalion deploys in the central sector and
sistance against the 5th and 7th Cavalry Regiments on the 2nd Battalion is assigned the eastern portion of the
the left and right respectively, north of the sector.
Suwon–Wonju Road. In conjunction, the 5th Battalion is attached to the
In the 1st Marine Division sector, a report of a large
1st Marines and directed to deploy and patrol in the
North Korean force spotted in the vicinity of Chachon- area around Andong. The regiment does not have a 4th
dong is received at the 5th Marines. A force is mounted Regiment due to the fact that the Korean word for 4th
and death is identical and by the Ko-
reans “4th” is considered a word asso-
ciated with bad luck.
In the X Corps sector, a strong patrol
of the 23rd Regiment, which had been
dispatched towards Chipyong to di-
vert attention from the main thrust,
Operation THUNDERBOLT, meets
with a patrol from the 21st Regiment
that had departed Yonju. The com-
bined force of slightly less than sixty
men, including four officers, proceeds
by jeeps towards Chipyong. The con-
tingent is shadowed by an observation
plane, but they encounter no enemy
forces. Several miles from Chipyong,
the patrol halts near the village of Sin-
chon to reconnoiter the double rail
tunnels (Twin Tunnels) there. As they
encroach the tunnels on foot, the
enemy in the heights commence fire
and the ambush proves deadly. Some
are immediately killed during the
melee and some others are seized. The
remainder scurries up a hill to estab-
lish a desperate line of defense.
All the while, the liaison plane is
urgently sending word back to head-
quarters. Soon after, while the patrol
fights off attempts to annihilate it,
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 23rd Reg-
iment, speeds to the ambush site. Al-
though under heavy fire since about
noon, the beleaguered patrol remains
tenacious throughout the afternoon
and is still holding steadfastly at dusk
The infantry advances one step at a time. A soldier using an A-frame when the reinforcements arrive. The
advances alone, with two jeeps to his rear and a truck moving up troops of Company F mount an at-
on his right. tack, clear the heights of the Chinese,
 643
and extricate the survivors of the patrol, which includes
37 wounded.
In Naval activity, TF 77 initiates action against
bridges located along the east coast of Korea.
January 30 In the Eighth Army area, Operation
THUNDERBOLT, which commenced on 25 January, con-
tinues against more solid resistance. The I Corps and the
IX Corps each attach a South Korean regiment to aug-
ment the strength of the respective advances. In the IX
Corps sector, the 24th Division pushes out the right.
Heavy resistance is raised by the Chinese and it contin-
ues into the following day. General Ridgway orders the
I and IX Corps to direct the final units at Line D to
depart and advance to hold the ground that had been
seized. In addition to resistance by the Chinese, the
North Koreans are congregating east of Route 29.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
Chinese attack the Greek Battalion at Hill 381. The
struggle for control of the hill continues throughout
the night and often includes close-quartered fighting.
Some of the Greeks, at times, expend their ammunition,
but they switch to knives and rifle butts rather than
surrender the crest. The Chinese disengage by dawn
after sustaining heavy casualties.
In other activity, in the 5th Cavalry zone, 1st Lieu-
tenant Robert M. McGovern, Company A, leads a pla-
toon against an enemy stronghold in the vicinity of
Kumyangjang-ni. When the platoon reaches a point
on the slope about 75 yards from the bunker, heavy
fire pounds the assault and McGovern becomes
wounded; however, he refuses to quit. The attack con-
tinues, despite the storm of enemy fire and the addition
of grenades. The grenades for the most part are tossed
back into the enemy positions, but still, casualties climb
from the devastating fire. McGovern spots the machine
gun that is holding up the attack. He charges it, but
when he is within about ten feet of the nest, the ripping
fire knocks his carbine from his hands.
Still, McGovern advances. Singlehandedly, he takes
on the enemy using his pistol and grenades. Seven of the
enemy are killed by his actions, but in the process, Mc-
Govern’s wounds are fatal. He succumbs after elimi-
nating the obstacle. His troops, however, with fixed
bayonets, continue the attack and ascend to the crest,
throwing grenades as they attack. The enemy aban-
dons the hill. Lieutenant McGovern becomes a recip-
ient of the Medal of Honor, posthumously for his hero-
ism and leadership under fire.
In the 24th Division zone, Company E, 5th Regi-
ment, launches an attack against enemy-held Hill 256,
which has been retained by the enemy despite several
attempts to dislodge them. A platoon led by 1st Lieu-
tenant Carl H. Dodd acts as vanguard, but it is quickly
halted ny intense fire including mortar and artillery,
which originates from concealed positions. Dodd, ig-
nores the small arms fire and the bombardment to at-
tempt to reorganize his paralyzed platoon, and then,
still oblivious to his own safety, he singlehandedly bolts
towards an obstinate gun position. Dodd eliminates
January 31, 1951
the machine gun and its crew. His actions inspire the
remainder of his command. They fly forward with fixed
bayonets and an abundance of grenades. The swift and
sudden thrust of the platoon takes the enemy positions
one by one as they plod forward. The initial obstacles
fall and then Dodd again reorganizes his men to take the
grand prize, Hill 256.
At a point about 200 yards from the hill, Dodd again
singlehandedly takes on a machine gun nest and de-
stroys it and the crew. The advance continues with
Dodd at the point. The troops move through a pea-
soup fog, with their bayonets fixed and yet more
grenades. The advance vanquishes the enemy on 31
January and Hill 256 is seized. Lieutenant Dodd be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary leadership and bravery in the face of a su-
perior enemy force.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the Marines await
a raid by North Korean guerrillas, expected to hit
Chachon-dong in the 5th Marines zone. The Marines
had been informed of the raid and had on the previous
night set up an ambush by concealing themselves
throughout the village. Nevertheless, at dawn, the
enemy fails to arrive.
In the X Corps sector, following the ambush near the
Twin Tunnels at Sinchon on the previous day, it be-
comes apparent that the Chinese control Chipyong.
General Ridgway, once informed of the incident, takes
immediate steps to counter the Chinese. He orders
General Almond to establish positions to protect Eighth
Army from an attack through the Han River Valley. X
Corps is directed to block any potential flow of enemy
forces from the Twin Tunnels. The task is given to the
23rd Regiment.
In Air Force activity, supplies arrive by planes at the
airfield at Suwon, which had been captured on the
28th. C-54s attached to the 61st TCG (Troop Carrier
Group), the first U.S. planes to land since the field’s
capture, bring 270 tons of supplies to fuel the Eighth
Army advance.
In Naval activity, the Blockading and Escort Force
(CTF 95) initiates a bombardment of Kosong and Ka-
song. The operation includes minesweeping as part of
the mission designed to act as a diversion landing on the
east coast of Korea. On the following day, warships of
Amphibious Task Force (TF 90), including the USS
Montague (AKA 98) and USS Seminole (AKA 105),
continue the deception by feinting a landing in an at-
tempt to confuse the enemy ground forces.
January 31 Major General Bryant E. Moore as-
sumes control of the U.S. IX Corps. He succeeds Gen-
eral Major General Milburn, who had been transferred
to I Corps to replace General Coulter. Coulter’s trans-
fer is not related in any way to his service in the field
and in fact he is promoted to lieutenant general.
In other activity, the I Corps and the IX Corps con-
tinue to encounter heavy resistance during Operation
THUNDERBOLT. The I Corps, after a dogged advance,
makes it to the 3rd phase line, while the IX Corps
February 1, 1951
advances only slightly beyond the 2nd phase line. Gen-
eral Ridgway prepares to add more punch to the offen-
sive and simultaneously, he expands the front. The
ROK III Corps and the 1st Marine Division will also
be thrown against the enemy.
The fifth phase line still stands some distance away
at Inchon and from there eastward to Yangp’yong. At
this time, General Ridgway’s intent remains unchanged,
to eliminate as many enemy forces as possible and to
gain and retain ground, but without concentrating on
fixed lines and positions. His blueprint does not in-
clude the recapture of Seoul, unless it falls in line with
the advance. Ridgway requests and receives support
from Fifth Air Force to prevent the enemy from driv-
ing north or south from the Han River.
In the X Corps sector, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Infantry
Regiment (2nd Division), supported by the French Bat-
talion and bolstered by tanks and artillery, moves
against the enemy at the tunnels where a patrol had
been ambushed on 30 January. The advance over and
across snow-filled icy terrain is long and treacherous.
The tunnels are reached during the afternoon, but no
Chinese are discovered there. The battalion establishes
positions at Sinchon, near the Twin Tunnels; however,
corps commander General Almond had intended the
force to advance farther. Nevertheless, it is about dusk
and further progress could prove dangerous. Almond or-
ders a bombardment of a nearby village, thought to be
held by the enemy. The order is reluctantly carried out,
as a probe determines no enemy there. The barrage is
fired, but not directly at the village. Colonel Freeman,
the commander of the 23rd Regiment, becomes con-
cerned that the barrage had only informed the enemy
of the presence of his force and had invited an attack.
His intuition proves correct. Prior to dawn on the fol-
lowing morning, the Chinese attack.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the search for the
enemy continues, but with little success, as the North
Korean guerrillas are less than anxious to engage the
Marines. Meanwhile, the locals still provide no assis-
tance to the Communists, which makes their task more
difficult and they are unable to easily acquire food.
In Air Force activity, the 21st TCS (Troop Carrier
Squadron) executes a clandestine mission. A special-
ized unit of the squadron deposits a UN agent into
enemy-controlled territory below the 38th Parallel, at
a point in the vicinity of Yonan located on the west
coast of Korea. This mission is the first of this type to
be recorded during the war.
February 1–6 1951 In the 1st Marine Di-
vision sector, information from the 7th Marines be-
gins to circulate that the 5th Marines are to expect
elements of the NK 25th and 27th Regiments, which
are in flight in front of the 7th Marines. The 5th
Marines prepare a welcome and deploy, while antic-
ipating a decisive engagement to eliminate the foe
during the early days of February; however, the
North Koreans disappoint the 5th Marines. The
guerrillas approach Topyong-dong and swing north-
644
ward to evade the 5th Marines. The guerrillas move
right into the waiting arms of the 1st Marines, spe-
cifically, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions. The Marines
close the clamps tightly with the added support of the
Korean Marines as the latter (2nd and 3rd Battal-
ions) establishes blocking positions on the escape
routes near Sango-ri and Paekcha-dong. The rem-
nant enemy forces scatter and move only in small
groups to avoid total destruction.
On 5 February, the North Korean guerrillas en-
counter the Korean Marines southwest of Yongdok.
The Korean Marines, commanded by Colonel Kim
Sung Eun, at the request of the 7th Marines, estab-
lish blocking positions. One platoon of the 2nd Bat-
talion, Korean Marine Regiment, encounters the
Communists at their entrenched positions. The Ko-
reans, after encountering enemy mortar fire and ma-
chine gun fire, begin an undisciplined retreat after
abandoning their equipment and weapons. The Ko-
reans lose 1 killed, 8 wounded and 24 missing in ac-
tion. The missing troops later show up minus their
weapons.
No U.S. Marines participate in the action, which
becomes the sole engagement that ends in a success
for the guerrillas. On the following day, the Korean
Marines attack in battalion strength with the sup-
port of four planes of Marine Squadron VMF(N)-
513; however, again the guerrillas escape after rais-
ing some minor initial resistance.
February 1 In the X Corps sector, Second Division
zone, the 23rd Regiment comes under fierce attack at the
Twin Tunnels north of the Han River. The attack ini-
tiated by the Chinese 125th Division prior to dawn is
relentless, but the enemy receives incessant return fire,
including the guns of the artillery, accompanying tanks
and mortars. The Chinese, after encountering an in-
surmountable wall of fire, pull back to regroup for a
second attack. It occurs at about dawn, when the French
contingent holding at Hill 453 is struck by a string of
waves, each as ferocious as the one that preceded it.
Nonetheless, the French troops, drawn from French
forces in Africa, Madagascar and other French garrisons
in Asia, hold the ground. Chinese thrusts against the
23rd Regiment continue throughout the day.
The U.S. infantry is bolstered by the 37th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion, which had been with them since they
established positions there on the previous day. For a
while, the situation remains desperate. The French by
mid-afternoon lose their high ground and they along
with the remainder of the 23rd Regiment have dimin-
ished most of their ammunition. However, the remain-
der of the 23rd Regiment continues to hurl sheets of fire
towards the attackers, who seem to continually multi-
ply.
Meanwhile, reinforcements are sped to relieve the
beleaguered force. While the fresh elements of the 23rd
Regiment drive forward, the 9th Regiment sets itself
up to replace the contingent if necessary. One platoon
of Company I is pushed from its positions and its leader
 645
becomes wounded. Another man, Sergeant Hubert L.
Lee, assumes command and leads a charge, but he, too,
becomes wounded. Lee disregards his leg wound and
drives forward. The enemy drives his contingent back
five times, but still Lee adamantly refuses to quit and
by this time, he is literally crawling ahead, having sus-
tained two wounds. Lee encroaches the enemy obsta-
cle, forces himself to get up and from a kneeling posi-
tion, and pours more fire into the enemy until he is yet
again wounded. Lee still maintains command and di-
rects the final charge. Lee’s actions lead to the attack
team eliminating 83 of the enemy and pushing the re-
mainder from the hill. Sergeant Lee becomes a recipi-
ent of the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary hero-
ism and leadership under fire.
In the meantime, the Chinese continue to press for-
ward to complete the attack and claim a victory, but
the skies clear and planes that had been unable to op-
erate earlier arrive to save the day. A contingent of Ma-
rine planes arrives and saturates the enemy formation
with bombs. More planes follow as the Marines con-
tinue to paper the slopes in front of the French with
fire. The Chinese hopes of gaining the hill go up in
smoke as they receive riveting fire from the ground
troops while they are pummeled from the skies. The
slopes remain full of Chinese, but most are deceased.
The survivors retreat hurriedly with Colonel Freeman’s
27th Regiment in pursuit. The U.S. sustains 45 killed,
207 wounded and 4 missing. The majority of the ca-
sualties occur within the French Battalion and the 3rd
Battalion, 23rd Regiment. The Chinese suffer about
3,600 casualties. More than 1,200 Chinese dead are
counted.
The operation at Twin Tunnels had been launched as
a precautionary measure; however, in the process, it
had turned into a major victory against the Chinese,
who lose the 125th Division as an effective force.
In related activity, while Operation THUNDERBOLT
is ongoing, General Almond is authorized by General
Ridgway to initiate an offensive (Operation ROUNDUP)
to seize Chipyong-ni, which he has concluded is a key
defensive position of the Chinese, which provides them
with domination on Highway 2, Highway 24 and
Highway 24A. U.S. possession, in addition to elimi-
nating a strong point, would also position the Ameri-
cans so they can trap the enemy forces below the Han.
The operation commences on 5 February.
February 2 In the I Corps sector, the 35th Infantry
Regiment, 25th Division, and the Turkish Brigade
launch an attack to reduce Hill 431, which has been
raising tough resistance to the I Corps advance (Oper-
ation THUNDERBOLT), which had begun on 25 January.
The battle continues for several days. The Turks and the
35th Regiment units gain ground on the lower slopes
of the hill, but stiff counterattacks push the UN troops
back.
In the X Corps sector, during diversionary probes, the
village of Hoengsong is seized after some minor resist-
ance is eliminated.
February 4, 1951
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the Marines continue
to search for enemy forces while maintaining control
of the MSR, with most of their focus on the stretch be-
tween Andong and Yongchon. Meanwhile, between
shortages of food and supplies, combined with the re-
lentless pressure of the Marines, the North Koreans
continue to evade the Americans. Large groups of
Communist forces are not encountered in the sector, but
the patrols continue.
In Naval activity, during patrol activities, the USS
Partridge sustains severe damage and sinks after strik-
ing a mine. Eight crewmen are killed and six others are
wounded.
February 3 In the I Corps sector, 25th Division
zone, the violent struggle continues for control of
enemy-held Hill 431, but the dogged attempts of the
35th Regiment and the Turkish Brigade are unable to
penetrate the defenses. General Ridgway changes strat-
egy by directing General Kean to abort the futile frontal
assaults and revert to a flank attack, which commences
on the following day.
In the 3rd Division sector, the 3rd Battalion, 15th
Regiment, encounters heavy resistance from entrenched
enemy positions on a hill in the path of their advance.
The battalion plunges forward and engages in a horrific
battle for the elevation. The hill is seized due to the
doggedness of the assault; but the cost is heavy. Fifteen
enlisted men are killed and the wounded list soars.
Following the victory, Colonel Ed Farrell, the 3rd
Battalion commander, is evacuated due to his wound.
He is replaced by Colonel Clyde H. Baden.
In the 1st Marine sector, a patrol of RCT-7 unexpect-
edly encounters a North Korean 2nd lieutenant who
surrenders, along with three of his men. The lieuten-
ant offers information that exposes exactly how bad
things have been going for the guerrillas and how the
various units are seeking to survive rather than to en-
gage the Americans. In addition, the officer explains
that the North Korean commander of the guerrillas,
Major General Lee Ban Nam, has been essentially a re-
cluse, spending his time by himself in foxholes in the
heights. On 23 January, another Communist had been
captured and papers he was carrying instructed the
North Koreans to attempt to break out of the encir-
clement and make it back to positions in the north.
Meanwhile, conditions remain poor for those units un-
able to escape, particularly knowing they were on their
own with no chance of resupply or reinforcements.
February 4 Air attacks ordered by General Ridg-
way after four days achieve only nominal results against
the enemy. In fact, by 5 February, a new Chinese divi-
sion (114th) arrives in the IX Corps sector.
In the I Corps sector, 25th Division zone, the 35th In-
fantry Regiment and the Turkish Brigade, bolstered by
a heavy artillery bombardment, launch yet another as-
sault to clear the obstinate defenders on Hill 431. The
fight carries into the following day, as the troops tan-
gle with the enemy and bone-chilling cold.
In the IX Corps area, 2nd Division sector, the enemy
February 5, 1951
launches an attack at 0100 against an outpost of the
19th Regiment outside Sesim-ni manned by a platoon
of Company A. The platoon, led by Master Sergeant
Stanley T. Adams, reacts quickly after Adams spots the
force of about 250 troops closing on his positions under
a bright moon. Adams leads twelve of his men in an
impetuous charge with bayonets fixed. When his con-
tingent reaches a point about fifty yards from the
enemy, Adams is struck in one leg by a bullet. He falls,
but only momentarily. Once back on his feet, the
charge continues. He is knocked down four additional
times by the concussion of grenades that detonate and
still he is able to lead the attack against a superior force.
At close range, the battle rages and the struggle turns
to the bayonets and rifle butts.
Despite the overwhelming numbers, the enemy is
vanquished. More than fifty of the enemy are killed
and the remainder of the force chooses to retire. Adams
continues to hold the rear while his detachment heads
back to the outpost. Sergeant Adams receives the Medal
of Honor for his extraordinary leadership and heroism
in the face of the enemy. In conjunction, Adams re-
ceives word that his battalion is pulling back. He leads
the platoon back to the battalion lines, aware that the
battalion is no longer threatened by a surprise attack.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the 7th Marines re-
ceive some unusual assistance in their quest to catch
and destroy or capture the North Korean guerrillas in
their zone. An R4D aircraft, with an interpreter aboard,
spots a large group of Koreans and through the use of
a loud speaker aboard the plane, the interpreter, speak-
ing in Korean, urges them to surrender immediately or
expect an attack. About 150 begin to surrender by
walking with their hands in the air. Those who choose
not to surrender are attacked. Marine squadron VMF-
323 is called upon and soon after, the group is hit hard
with bombs, rockets and napalm; however, it is soon de-
termined that the Koreans had not been soldiers; rather,
civilians, as they explain, who were swept up and used
as forced laborers by the guerrillas. The plane had ac-
tually spotted them as they were in the process of escap-
ing from the Communists.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force, after conclud-
ing that the C-47s are unable to maintain sufficient
speed to keep up with the B-26s while dropping flares,
makes some changes. The Air Force suspends the C-47s
and replaces them with modified B-26s.
February 5 The I and IX Corps are up against
seven enemy divisions. The Chinese 38th Army has
deployed three divisions on the east, while another
three divisions from the 50th Army stand at the center,
bolstered by the North Korean 8th Division to the west.
Other North Korean forces are at Seoul and Inchon.
In the I and IX Corps sectors, Operation THUNDER-
BOLT is reinitiated. General Ridgway senses that the re-
cent attacks have shaken the confidence of the Chi-
nese. He orders General Milburn (I Corps) to initiate
full-scale offensive operations with his armor-infantry
task forces (TF Dolvin and TF Bartlett).
646
Two I Corps divisions (3rd and 25th), bolstered by
tanks, advance. The Turkish Brigade and elements of
the 35th Regiment maintain attacks against the flanks
of Hill 431 and force the enemy to give ground and
withdraw to regroup in the terrain, known as the open
end of the horseshoe-shaped ridge. Meanwhile, other
hills in the area are cleared. TF Dolvin seizes Hills 300
and 178, following the reduction of stiff opposition.
Afterwards, TF Dolvin is ordered to move to the rear
of the 35th Infantry, which had been in the lead dur-
ing the advance.
In the meantime, TF Bartlett has a mix-up during the
day. It awaits orders to advance from its commanding
officer, but Colonel William Bartlett falls on ice and
never issues the order. Consequently, the 64th Tank
Battalion does not move out on time. Later, under
Joseph G. Fowler (executive officer), the tanks roll.
Progress remains slow during the advance, but by 8
February, the 25th Division reaches a point within
about five miles from the Inchon–Yongdungp’o Road.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Division plows forward against op-
position and by the 9th, reaches the Han River.
In the 3rd Division sector, its three regiments advance
as task forces, each named after the commander of the
respective organic tank companies. (TF Tony, TF Myers
and TF Fisher). The vanguard of the attack is led by the
65th and 15th Infantry Regiments on the left and right
respectively, with TF Myers and TF Fisher in support.
Meanwhile, the 7th Regiment supported by TF Tony
remains in reserve.
In the IX Corps sector, the advance encounters resist-
ance and progress is tedious, but the land becomes
much more of an obstacle than the enemy as the units
move towards the Han River. Both the 24th Division
and the 1st Cavalry Division face tough resistance from
the Chinese 39th Army.
In the 1st Cavalry sector, the 5th Cavalry still acts as
vanguard, along with the 7th Cavalry. However, only
the 7th Cavalry encounters heavy resistance as it drives
towards the Han. In the 5th Cavalry advance, the Chi-
nese resistance diminishes somewhat, which permits
the northward advance to continue. However, all across
the front, the elements cause obstacles and present nat-
ural dangers, due to both ice and mud. Later, during the
night of the 5th-6th, the Chinese launch a counterat-
tack against the 3rd Battalion and greatly threaten one
unit, Company L. The company resists with ferocity
and is able to avoid disaster by mounting a counterat-
tack that routs the Chinese.
In the X Corps sector, Operation ROUNDUP begins. The
X Corps offensive is launched in coordination with the
attacks of the I and IX Corps advances. The ROK 8th
and 5th Divisions on the left and right respectively ini-
tiate the advance. The U.S. 2nd Division (General Nick
Ruffner) supports the ROK 8th Division. Its support
includes elements of the 38th Infantry (1st Battalion),
15th FABn and the 503rd FABn. The U.S. 7th Divi-
sion bolsters the ROK 5th Division and its support in-
cludes elements of the 17th Infantry (2nd Battalion), 49th
FABn, 31st FABn and the divisional Recon Company. In
 647
conjunction, the 23rd Infantry Regiment at Chipyong
and other units, including the 37th FABn and the 1st
Ranger Company, are in position to support the north-
westward attack of the ROK 8th Division, which is
thought to be the most vulnerable to a Chinese coun-
terattack.
Enemy resistance remains light on the first day, but
afterwards, it builds. Nevertheless, the advance is hin-
dered more by the terrain than the enemy. The Corps
commander, General Milburn, retains his 2nd and 7th
Divisions along the line of departure and the reserve
division, the ROK 2nd Division, remains weakened
from its earlier contest during the Chinese New Year.
In addition, the 187th Airborne Regimental Com-
bat Team is being pulled from the line. The ROKs are
en route to Hongchon. All the while, concerns have
arisen at Eighth Army regarding a massive Chinese of-
fensive that intelligence has discerned will be launched
against Wonju, in the X Corps sector, by 15 February.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, General O.P. Smith
has concluded that his Marines have completed the
mission in the Pohang region. He responds to a request
from General Ridgway as to the time in which the mis-
sion will be complete. General Smith informs General
Ridgway that the 10th NK Division units in the Ma-
rine sector have been sliced down to a strength of about
forty percent. He also states that the force is no longer
capable of mounting a major attack and that the
Marines’ mission is essentially complete and awaiting a
new assignment.
In Air Force activity, an F-51 Mustang, piloted by
Major Arnold Mullins (67th FBS), engages and downs
a Yak-9 in the skies about seven miles north of Py-
ongyang. The kill by Mullins is the sole victory in the
sky by an Air Force pilot during February.
February 6 General Thomas J. Cushman,
USMC, assistant commanding general, 1st Marine Air
Wing, advises the commanding officer, General Har-
ris, that the K-1 airfield at Pusan is nearly complete
and will be able to accommodate one squadron on 8
February and an additional one on each succeeding day.
In conjunction, K-3, near Pohang, when completed,
is scheduled to be the permanent base for MAG 33,
but K-1 is to be used in the interim.
In the I Corps sector, armored units advance against
some opposition, but most of the obstacles encountered
are mines. The advance had been held up for a short
time while TF Dolvin awaits TF Fowler, which had been
lagging behind due to a late start on the previous day.
Ridgway had insisted all units advance abreast for a more
galvanized attack and less chance of the enemy penetrat-
ing by counterattack. The advance is slowed by minefields
along the road, but the enemy had laid them in such
fashion that they are easily spotted.
During the advance, elements of I Corps seize North
Korean troops affiliated with the N.K. 47th Division in
the vicinity of Anyang. The enemy 47th Division had
apparently deployed at Kwanak Mountain, south of
Seoul, after being relieved at Inchon by the N.K. 17th
February 7, 1951
Division. TF Dolvin again secures Hills 300 and 178,
then as on the previous day, the armor moves back be-
hind the 35th Regiment.
In the IX Corps sector, 24th Division zone, the ad-
vance moves cautiously and sluggishly towards the Han
River. The Chinese spring a strong assault at a point
between the 19th and 21st Infantry Regiments. Both
U.S. units resist fiercely, but the Chinese inflict high
casualties before the assault is halted.
In Air Force activity, a group of C-54s evacuate 343
sick and wounded troops from Chungju. The planes,
attached to the 315th Air Division, transport the troops
to Pusan.
In other activity, eight C-54s arrive at Taegu from
Japan, each transporting sections of a 310-foot tread-
way bridge from Japan to Taegu. The bridge is com-
posed of 279 separate sections.
Also, a contingent of six C-119s pass over enemy
territory and in an attempt to torment the troops there,
the crews drop thirty-two boxes, each one individually
booby-trapped to explode once opened. The surprise
packages are dropped while the planes are over
Kwangdong-ni.
In yet other activity, the 91st Strategic Reconnais-
sance Squadron executes its initial night photographic
mission.
February 7 The I and IX Corps continue to ad-
vance (Operation THUNDERBOLT). The enemy raises
opposition and it grows more intense as the offensive
continues.
In the I Corps sector, as on the previous two days, TF
Dolvin again moves to clear Hills 300 and 178. The
Chinese, in the meantime, greatly reinforce Hill 300
and with the fresh troops, they are able to prevent TF
Dolvin from re-seizing the entire hill. As dusk settles in
over the area, TF Dolvin is directed to disengage and
return to positions to the rear of the 35th Infantry Reg-
iment at Anyang.
By this time all units of the I Corps attack force are
on line, in conjunction with the original directive of
General Ridgway. Nevertheless, TF Fowler had not ex-
perienced an easy day. During the advance, enemy re-
sistance at one of the targeted hills had been especially
ferocious. The 1st Platoon, Company E, 27th Infantry,
25th Division, hits stiff resistance and gets stalled. Two
other platoons of the company, led by Lieutenant Lewis
W. Millet, execute a bayonet charge against a dug-in
force of about 200 troops. The powerful thrust cracks
the defenses and the cold steel evicts the defenders on
the crest. The platoons follow his lead and the ascent
bludgeons the enemy as it moves. Millet, who gets
wounded by grenade fragments, takes out two of the
enemy during the ascent with his bayonet and a few
others with grenades. Captain Millet becomes a recip-
ient of the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary valor
and leadership during the assault.
In the IX Corps sector, 24th Division zone, the 19th
Regiment, which had come under heavy attack on the
previous day, is again hit with a furious assault when it
February 8, 1951
attempts to continue its northward advance. The Chi-
nese pressure forces the regiment to give ground, a hill
that the leading 3rd Battalion had passed. The 1st Bat-
talion is pushed back while the 3rd Battalion gets cut
off and is forced to fight its way back to the main body.
Recently appointed commander of the 19th Regi-
ment, Colonel Ollie Kinney, is shortly thereafter re-
lieved and transferred to the position of division G-2.
He is succeeded by Colonel Peter W. Garland.
U.S. B-26s of Fifth Air Force (452nd Light Bomber Wing) strike a marshaling yard south of Wonsan.
The target is hit with napalm.
648
In the X Corps sector, during Operation ROUNDUP
the ROK 5th Division discovers an enemy force of
about 4,000 troops. Plans are laid to attack and elim-
inate them on the following day.
February 8 General Ridgway directs General
Milburn to drive his I Corps against Kwanak Mountain.
In conjunction, he requests help from the U.S. Navy and
asks for it to send a diversionary force against Inchon
 649
on 10 February. Preliminary activity is carried out by
the USS Missouri (BB 63) and a group of amphibious
vessels.
In other activity, Marine Squadron VMF-323 ar-
rives at K-1 from Japan. It will be followed by VMF-
214 on the 9th and VMF-312 on 10th. The squadrons
are scheduled to move again to K-3, near Pohang, once
it is finished.
In the I Corps sector, the advance continues against
light resistance. The North Korean opposition that had
appeared seems to have moved south to cover the with-
drawal of the Chinese 50th Army, but by this day, the
North Koreans also are heading north rather than hold-
ing positions to resist the advance.
In the IX Corps sector, the Chinese raise stiff resistance.
At some points along the advance, enemy counterat-
tacks force withdrawals. In the IX Corps sector, the
advance pushes against a point below the Han River,
where the Chinese have poured reinforcements in order
to hold a bridgehead.
In the X Corps sector, Operation ROUNDUP continues.
The Corps’ main thrust is handled by the ROK III
Corps, which is advancing along Route 29. The South
Koreans gain ground beyond Hongsong to the north,
northeast and northwest. The ROK 7th Division
pushes elements to within several miles of Ch’angdong-
ni and the ROK 9th Division stands above Chong-son;
however, enemy resistance has slowed progress of the
ROKs. The slow-down provides the enemy with an
opportunity to bang against the right flank of X Corps.
In conjunction, the U.S. 7th Division advances to the
rear of the ROK 7th Division.
Also, General Ridgway transfers the ROK 3rd Divi-
sion to General Almond for the remainder of Operation
ROUNDUP. The ROK 3rd Division is assigned the task
of continuing the maneuver to come in from the east to
encircle Hongch’on, while the ROK 5th Division estab-
lishes blocking positions on the exposed right flank. In
the ROK 5th Division sector, the enemy launches an
attack against the ROK 27th Regiment before the
South Koreans are able to launch their offensive. The
South Koreans are struck hard, east of Route 29, forc-
ing one battalion to collapse. Afterward, the regiment
retires. Fighting continues to rage between the 27th
Regiment and the North Koreans into the following
day.
In Air Force activity, enemy rail lines in North Korea
are attacked by a large force composed of B-26s, B-
29s, and fighters. The strikes hit the area that stretches
from Hoeryong to Wonsan.
In other activity, Brigadier General John P. Hene-
bry becomes commanding officer of the 315th AD. He
succeeds General Willliam H. Tunner. During
post–World War II General Tunner handled the Berlin
Airlift, but he had been assigned this task on a tempo-
rary basis.
February 9 In the I Corps sector, Kwanak Moun-
tain is seized by the 25th Division without the support
of air cover. Bad weather had cancelled all flights. Pa-
February 10, 1951
trols from the division drive ahead in the snow to reach
positions near Inchon and Yongdungp’o. TF Dolvin,
part of the 25th Division, advances to positions from
which the city of Seoul can be seen, but no move into
the city is attempted. The task force again receives or-
ders to withdraw and take positions to the rear of the
infantry. Meanwhile, the 3rd Division pushes against no
resistance and TF Myers advances to the Han.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division’s 27th
Regiment finally concludes its hard fighting that had
begun on the previous day. During the early morning
hours, the North Koreans disengage. Steps are quickly
taken by General Almond to restore his right flank. On
the following day, Almond orders the ROK 5th Divi-
sion to establish positions slightly less than fifteen miles
northeast of Hoengsong, at about the same place where
the North Koreans struck the 27th Regiment.
Also, the U.S. 27th Regiment, 2nd Division, had
earlier established positions in Chipyong-ni and after-
wards initiated patrols. On this day, a patrol spots a
heavy concentration of enemy troops on an elevation,
Hill 444, almost five miles east of Chipyong-ni. One
battalion, the 1st (9th Regiment), is dispatched north
from Yonju, while another battalion moves from the
east to reduce the resistance on Hill 444.
February 10 During Operation THUNDERBOLT,
progress continues.
In the I Corps sector, the 25th Division seizes the
Inchon-Yongdungp’o Road by 1100. In the meantime,
no enemy activity is discovered in Inchon; however,
the port, earlier destroyed by U.S. forces upon abandon-
ment, is still a massive scene of destruction. Conse-
quently, the planned amphibious diversionary landing
is cancelled.
In the meantime, General Ridgway, convinced that
the enemy is in retreat, loosens the leash on the ad-
vance to accelerate pursuit. In addition, TF Dolvin and
TF Fowler are combined as one task force. It races to
the Kimpo peninsula, where Task Force Allen moves
forward in two columns. The east force effortlessly takes
Kimpo Airfield. The troops continue their progress
throughout the day and by dusk, the advance of about
11,000 yards gains positions nearly ten miles above the
Han River. Other units trailing the task force include
the 24th and 35th Regiments. The two regiments and
the attached ROK 15th Regiment hold positions along
the Han, between the airfield and Yongdungp’o.
Meanwhile, the Eighth Army Ranger Company and
the 25th Division’s Reconnaissance Company close on
Inchon. At about 1700, the reconnaissance force enters
Inchon and no enemy troops are discovered; however,
at about the same time, the small force of ROK Marines
that had been with the amphibious force that aborted
the landing arrives at Inchon aboard small boats.
In the 3rd Division zone, operating on the Corps’
right, the 65th Infantry Regiment and the 15th Regi-
ment advance to the Han and join with Task Force
Myers. The regiments encounter only one sighting of
enemy forces near the river. The 15th relieves the 65th
February 11, 1951
Regiment at the river, which permits the 65th to re-
vert to reserve.
The successful advance to the Han River boosts the
morale of Eighth Army. It had driven the Chinese back
across the river and forced the Communists to surren-
der strategic ground, including Kimpo Airfield, Inchon
and Suwon, all of which had been required for the U.S.
to regain air superiority in the northern reaches of
North Korea, particularly MiG Alley.
In the X Corps sector, Operation ROUNDUP begins on
the eastern flank. The U.S. 7th Division dispatches one
battalion from its positions near P’yongchang to a point
about fifteen or sixteen miles east of Hoengsong, in an
effort to flush out the North Koreans there and pinch
them between the U.S. troops and the ROK 5th Divi-
sion, which had been ordered to a point northeast of
Hoengsong. General Almond also dispatches a contin-
gent of the 187th Airborne Regimental Combat Team
to bolster the east flank to the rear of the ROK 5th Di-
vision at a point about slightly less than ten miles east
of Hoengsong. In conjunction, the ROK 3rd Division,
deployed on the fringes of Hoengsong, prepares to
jump off on the following day to coordinate with the
attack of the ROK 5th Division.
February 11 General O.P. Smith, USMC, ar-
rives in Taegu to confer with General Ridgway with
regard to the next mission to be assigned to the
Marines. Several possibilities are discussed and Ridgway
proposes relieving the 24th Division at the Han River,
at the Yoju corridor in the IX Corps sector, and rede-
ploying on the east coast in the event an amphibious
landing is required. No decision is reached. However,
Ridgway makes it clear that he has confidence in the
Marines’ ability.
By day’s end, the Chinese launch their offensive
(fourth phase) in the 2nd Division sector, and by the
following morning, as Ridgway had mentioned, the
Marines find themselves being ordered to the center of
the hornets’ nest at the rear of IX Corps, where the
brunt of the attack is being felt.
The ongoing offensive, which has carried Eighth
Army to the Han River and put the Chinese to flight,
causes more complications in Washington. There are
differences of opinion on whether to push beyond the
38th Parallel; however, the powers to be, including the
Pentagon and the State Department, are in agreement
with the British and French that the strategy should be
to halt at the 38th Parallel and negotiate with the Com-
munists to terminate the war. In contrast, General
MacArthur believes it necessary to continue the attack
and he is adamantly opposed to the UN policy of giv-
ing the Communists a free, untouchable sanctuary in
Manchuria.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK III Corps maintains
its progress. The ROK 7th Division deploys in the
vicinity of Ch’angdong-ni after first driving through
it. The ROK 3rd Division advances along Route 29 to
a point about five miles above Hoengsong. Farther east,
the ROK 5th Division moves toward its blocking po-
650
sitions on the east flank. Also, the ROK 8th Division
reaches a point along Route 29, slightly less than ten
miles north of Hoengsong. In the meantime, the ROK
9th Division plows through the Han valley and estab-
lishes contact with the ROK I Corps.
In the South Korean I Corps sector, by this date, ele-
ments of the Capital Division, which had been joined
by the ROK 9th Division, stand in the Taebaek moun-
tains. Kangnung and Chumunjin are both occupied.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 9th Infantry Reg-
iment, seizes Hill 444 east of Chipyong-ni, eliminat-
ing a threat against the 2nd Division positions. After
dusk, the Chinese launch an attack that drives from
Hongch’on to the right of the U.S. 2nd Division that
strikes the ROK 8th Division. The Chinese also evade
the Americans (Support Force 21) at Ch’angbong-ni.
Meanwhile, the Chinese force the regimental head-
quarters to order the ROK 21st Regiment to withdraw
and hook up with the American Support Force 21. The
Chinese also pound the ROK 10th and 16th Regi-
ments. Chinese troops flood both sides of Route 29 as
they drive forward. By about midnight on the 11th-
12th, the command posts of the 10th and 16th Regi-
ments are both overrun. The swift movement also iso-
lates the ROK 20th and 50th Field Artillery Battalions
and Support Team A. Shortly thereafter, the ROK units
lose all communications between regiments.
February 12 The Chinese offensive that un-
folded northeast of Wonju at about midnight contin-
ues to gather steam.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
5th Cavalry gathers at IX Corps headquarters in
Changhowon-ni, slightly more than ten miles below
Yoju. Also, the 7th Cavalry, which had been making
remarkable progress, stalls slightly more than ten miles
from its objective, the Han River. The enemy is deeply
entrenched in the vicinity of Mugam on Hill 578. Gen-
eral Ridgway decides that the hill must be taken before
the 7th Cavalry is relieved by the 27th Regiment (25th
Division). A full-throttle attack to reduce the obstacle
is scheduled for 14 February.
In the X Corps sector, within about one hour after
midnight, it becomes apparent that the Chinese had
overrun the ROK 8th Division. The supporting Amer-
ican units get caught in the confusion. By about 0100,
2nd Division artillery units request permission to pull
back to more tenable positions. The U.S. support team
withdraws toward the positions of the 38th Regiment
and encounters fierce opposition as it drives eastward.
The unit finally arrives at friendly lines by about dawn;
however, the cost of the drive is high. Only six men
are immediately known to be wounded, but the miss-
ing number nearly 150 troops. In addition, two tanks
are lost. More than 7,000 South Korean troops are ei-
ther killed or captured.
The ROK 3rd Division also comes under heavy at-
tack. The ROK 22nd and 23rd Regiments withdraw to
the vicinity of Ch’angbong-ni before the Chinese en-
velop them. By 0245, the Americans (Support Force
 651
21) receive authorization to withdraw. The Chinese,
however, had gained positions along Route 29 and
pound the troops as they move. En route, Support
Force 21 passes abandoned artillery of the 503rd Field
Artillery Battalion. The commanding officer of SF 21,
Colonel Keith, has no troops in his command who can
drive tractors and no explosives. The artillery is left for
the enemy. Keith’s column, following a tedious flight,
joins with the 3rd Battalion.
Finally, at about 1000, the column arrives at the lines
of the 3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment (2nd Division). It
discovers that the Chinese are also attacking the 38th
Regiment. The 38th had been designated as the unit to
hold the line at the Route 29 mountain road junction.
Keith’s artillery is deployed to bolster the positions.
The defenders at Hill 300, in the 38th Regiment’s zone,
are hit especially hard by a large force.
By about 0300, the units are ordered to pull back.
One of the troops, Sergeant Charles R. Long, Com-
pany M, a forward observer for the mortar section,
holds his ground to assist in the withdrawal by direct-
ing fire. In addition, as the enemy closes on him, he
reverts to resisting with his carbine and grenades. How-
ever, the overwhelming enemy force is able to encircle
him. Sergeant Long is killed, but his company safely
pulls back and afterwards, returns to retake the posi-
tions. Long becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor
for his extraordinary valor and selfless sacrifice in the
face of the enemy. The ROK 8th Division had nearly
been annihilated.
By 1100, the 2nd Division receives orders to desig-
nate the 38th Regiment a Regimental Combat Team.
Support Force 21 is ordered to withdraw to Hoeng-
song. Support Force 7, deployed several miles north of
Hoengsong near the ROK 3rd Division, also receives or-
ders to withdraw to Hoengsong. In the meantime, the
Chinese continue to encircle various units, including
one regiment of the ROK 3rd Division. The ROK 5th
Division is also being compelled to fight its way to-
wards Hoengsong. The situation continues to deterio-
rate and by noon, General Almond informs General
Ridgway that Hoengsong will be abandoned in order to
defend Wonju. The fighting withdrawal continues into
the morning of the 13th and casualties become high.
Nevertheless, the Dutch Battalion becomes key to a
successful withdrawal. The final units to abandon Ho-
engsong for Wonju are the Dutch Battalion and the
2nd Battalion, 17th Infantry Regiment (7th Division).
The casualty list for X Corps, including the ROK
troops, at best estimate (11 February through early 13
February) stands at about 9,800 South Koreans, 1,900
Americans and 100 Dutch. Equipment losses are also
heavy. The South Koreans (3rd, 5th and 8th Divisions)
lose more than 1,000 weapons, including 14 howitzers
and they also lose nearly 90 vehicles. The Americans
and Dutch lose more than 300 weapons, including
twenty howitzers. The 15th Field Artillery Battalion
abandons fourteen howitzers and the 503rd Field Ar-
tillery Battalion loses 5 artillery pieces. In addition, the
U.S. loses two tanks and just under 300 vehicles.
February 13, 1951
In conjunction, Far East Air Forces’ planes arrive
overhead and drop supplies at the airstrip near the X
Corps command post at Wonju.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, orders arrive from
Eighth Army headquarters that instruct General O.P.
Smith to prepare to move out of the Pohang–Andong
region and redeploy in the rear sector of the IX Corps
to galvanize the lines there where the Chinese are mak-
ing their strongest thrust. General Smith is also directed
to dispatch reconnaissance units to the Chungju re-
gion. In conjunction, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment
is detached from the 1st Marine Division and attached
to the ROK Capital Division, which is deployed on the
east coast at Samch’ok.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces makes emer-
gency passes over the X Corps command post and drops
supplies. Also, a C-47 plane is struck by enemy anti-
aircraft fire while it is dropping leaflets during daylight
hours. The plane makes a crash landing at Suwon. The
incident prompts Fifth Air Force to discontinue the
daylight leaflet flights.
In other activity, a contingent of B-26s using guid-
ance of flares strikes enemy positions along the front
lines; however, on this mission, two enemy planes in the
area use the illumination to attack UN positions.
February 13–16 1952 In Air Force activ-
ity, H-5 helicopters deliver medical supplies to the
besieged elements of the 2nd Division and evacuate
more than forty wounded troops. Air Force planes
also drop supplies. Fifth Air Force focuses on close-
air support missions to bolster the positions of the en-
circled troops.
February 13 General MacArthur arrives in
Korea and confers with General Ridgway. It is decided
that Chipyong-ni in the X Corps sector will be held. It
remains clear that the I and IX Corps are to hold the line
at the Han River.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Air Wing is nearing
completion of its consolidation of all units to Korea.
At K-1, near Pohang, Lieutenant Colonel Fontana es-
tablishes the MAG-33 command post. The squadrons
temporarily at K-1 are directed to move to K-3. In the
meantime, the support units are en route from Japan.
Also, the jets (VMF-311) that had been grounded due
to engineering problems during early January are back
in operating condition and their arrival from Japan is
imminent.
Also, by the end of the month, the all weather Ma-
rine Squadron VMF(N)-542 will be based at K-1 near
Pusan; however, VMF(N)-513 will operate from K-1.
Another group, the Headquarters Squadron (photo pi-
lots), is in the process of transferring from Japan to K-
1.
In the I Corps sector, the Communists (North Korean
6th Division, N.K. I Corps) launch a counterattack
against the rear near Suwon. Initially, the N.K. 1st Reg-
iment crashes into the 15th Regiment, but fortuitously,
the 65th Regiment, composed of Puerto Ricans, de-
ployed in the nearby high ground, is able to intercept
February 13, 1951
On 13 February, it is decided to hold Chipyong-ni. The 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, and attached French
troops hold the crossroads for several days although surrounded.
the enemy. The 65th at the time is catching a breather
from its recent stint at the front. The 65th bolts from
its positions and swarms around and upon the invaders
and prevents them from penetrating to the divisional
command post. The North Koreans are shredded dur-
ing the night (13th-14th).
On the 14th, the U.S. force scours the area and it
is determined that 1,152 enemy troops had been killed
(counted). In addition, 353 enemy troops are taken
as prisoners. The 65th Regiment is responsible for
eliminating nearly 600 of the enemy. Although
the enemy attack is repulsed, the fact that they had
struck with such force and had gotten behind the lines
causes concern. Once the 3rd Division fords the
Han on the advance, only the 35th Regiment, the
Turkish Brigade and the ROK 1st Division remain on
the south side of the Han River across from Seoul.
Consequently, a repeat attack could succeed and in so
doing, isolate the 3rd Division on the opposite bank
of the Han.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
652
Communists launch a night attack against the 8th Cav-
alry while it is preparing to participate in a diversion-
ary attack to support the 7th Cavalry, which is held up
at Hill 578. The Chinese assault is thwarted, but the
lines are penetrated. The 8th Cavalry remains confined
to holding the ground and liquidating the intruders. It
is unable to jump off on the morning of the 14th in
support of the 7th Cavalry.
In the X Corps sector, General Almond attempts to
regroup and prepare for the defense of Wonju. The un-
expected attack by such a great force, composed of four
Chinese divisions and two North Korean divisions, is
too strong to halt. However, General Ridgway remains
convinced that the resupply ability of the enemy is un-
able to sustain a prolonged offensive. The enemy swarm
into Hoengsong after it is abandoned during the early
morning hours of this day, but the Chinese do not ini-
tiate pursuit of the U.S. 2nd Division while it moves to
Wonju.
By this time, all contingents north of Wonju, includ-
ing the 38th Infantry (and Dutch Battalion attached),
 653 February 13, 1951

Top: A contingent of the 15th Regiment, U.S. 3rd Division, engages the enemy as it moves toward the
Han River. Bottom: A U.S. tank starts its move around a curve as it advances toward the Han River.
February 14, 1951
187th Airborne RCT, ROK 18th Regiment (ROK
3rd Division) and the 2nd Battalion, 17th Regiment
(7th Division) succeed in making it back to positions
around Wonju. Meanwhile, the withdrawal by X Corps
jeopardizes the forces at Chipyong-ni, which is de-
fended by the 23rd Regimental Combat Team, com-
posed of the 23rd Infantry Regiment (Colonel Paul F.
Freeman, 2nd Division), 1st Ranger Company, 37th
Field Artillery Battalion, and other units, including
Battery B, 503rd Artillery Battalion, Battery B, 82nd
Antiaircraft Artillery Automatic Weapons Battalion,
Company B, 2nd Engineer Combat Battalion, and the
French Battalion.
The Chinese launch a full-scale attack against the
defenses of Chipyong-ni at about 2200. The contest
lasts throughout the night into the morning of the 14th.
Colonel Freeman, after learning of the withdrawal to
Wonju, requests permission to abandon Chipyong, but
it is denied. He is told to hold and that reinforcements
(5th Cavalry and a British Brigade) will be dispatched
to ensure the ground is held.
In other activity, the 2nd Division Reconnaissance
Company and Company L, 9th Infantry, at Chuam-ni
come under assault by elements of the Chinese 116th
Division throughout the day. The Chinese attempt to
encircle the force after dark and on the following day,
a stronger assault is launched.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, departure orders ar-
rive from Eighth Army that instruct the Marines to de-
part for Chunju, in the rear of the IX Corps on 15 Feb-
ruary.
In Air Force activity, priority airlifts develop for the
315th AD. The planes evacuate 800 sick and wounded
troops from airstrips in the forward areas, including
Wonju. The men are transported to Taegu and Pusan.
The operation requires a large number of C-47s and
drains the supply. Requests for airlifts from other loca-
tions cannot be answered.
— In Japan: The Photographic Unit, 1st Marine
Division, transfers from Itami Air Force Base to Brad-
shaw Air Force Base at Pusan. The photographic unit
will work in conjunction with the 15th Troop Carrier
Squadron.
February 14 The enemy continues its attacks,
but the Korean winter is taking a toll on their ranks
and enthusiasm. In addition to being pounded by
ground forces, aircraft and artillery, the Communists
find it difficult to find protection from the frigid cold.
Most towns have been decimated, leaving few houses
and huts and when they find temporary sanctuary,
planes usually attack and destroy the structures. In ad-
dition, many of the Chinese are now poorly dressed for
the season. It is difficult to acquire medical attention.
Nevertheless, those still able continue to maintain the
attack.
During the previous November, when the Chinese
entered the conflict openly on the side of the North
Korean Communists, they were in close proximity to
Manchuria and they had bases to their rear, but now,
654
they are more than 250 miles from the Manchurian
border.
In the IX Corps sector, the 5th Cavalry Regiment
at Changhowon moves out to open Route 24A and
drives to the isolated RCT 23 at Chipyong-ni. The
cavalry is bolstered by a contingent of engineers, two
tank companies and two artillery battalions. The
column is trailed by vehicles carrying supplies and a
contingent of ambulances. The advance makes progress
until it hits a destroyed bridge, which forces the
advance to suspend at Hup’o-ri until the engineers
improvise and construct a modified bypass around the
obstacle.
Meanwhile, RCT 23, which had earlier been sup-
plied by air, remains isolated until the following day.
During the night, the Chinese launch yet another as-
sault against Chipyong-ni. U.S. positions on the north
and east are hit hard, but by dawn of the following day,
the Communists Chinese fail to make gains. The suc-
cessful defense of Chipyong-ni eliminates some heavy
problems for General Ridgway. If it had fallen, al-
though only a diminutive village of a few huts, the
Communists would have gained the road junction there
and imperiled the entire Eighth Army front. However,
the eastern perimeter is also struck with a severe attack
and gains are made by the Chinese. Company G, 5th
Cavalry is compelled to abandon its positions by about
0300 on the 15th.
Nearby artillery positions, held by the 503rd Field
Artillery Battalion, are deployed from where the battal-
ion continues to pound the enemy. The effective fire
keeps the Chinese at bay. The U.S. launches a counter-
attack at 0400. The force (TF Crombez) is composed
of Company G, 5th Cavalry, reinforced by Company
F, and a contingent of rangers. The attack gains some
of the lost positions of Company G; however, the Chi-
nese push the attackers back and inflict high casualties.
A contingent of French troops support the attack and
they, too, pull back.
In the 7th Cavalry zone, a scheduled attack to clear
the enemy from Hill 578 commences; however, cir-
cumstances surrounding the assault cause complica-
tions. Scheduled air support had been diverted to
Wonju and a supporting attack by the 8th Cavalry is
aborted due to an enemy counterattack against the 8th
Cavalry on the previous night. Nonetheless, at 0700,
following a prolonged artillery bombardment, the
7th Cavalry, supported by a contingent of tanks (70th
Tank Battalion) drives against Hill 578. The attack con-
tinues against steadfast resistance throughout the day
and into the following morning. The Communists con-
tinue to come under heavy fire, but still they give no
ground. Finally, after about twenty-four continuous
hours of gruesome fighting, the 7th Cavalry prevails.
Hill 578, through the efforts of the entire regiment,
including the attached Greek Battalion, falls on the
morning of the 15th.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the 23rd
Regiment and its support units at Chipyong continue
to come under assault from the attack launched during
 655
the previous night. The defenses had been under heavy
bombardment and the usual infantry assaults, but the
Chinese receive equal punishment from the encircled
perimeter. Although the attacks are repulsed, the town
remains surrounded and the anticipated reinforcements
do not arrive. The 3rd Battalion is struck again at about
0630, but the Chinese fail to break through. At about
0730, the sector defended by the French also repels an
attack. The Chinese disengage and withdraw into the
heights around the town. Colonel Freeman had be-
come wounded during the night long fight by a shell
fragment, but he declines evacuation and remains in
command. Planes arrive during the afternoon to drop
supplies, but the reinforcements will not make it to
Chipyong.
The 27th British Brigade is stalled by heavy resistance
and the 5th Cavalry with a contingent of tanks is still
at the Han River at Wonju. The Fifth Air Force arrives
overhead and drops supplies and ammunition, but
the delivery lacks heavy mortar shells and illumination
shells. Other airdrops follow for the next three
days. The supplies get dropped during night hours
at designated spots illuminated by burning rags that
had been soaked in gasoline. During the resupply
flights, ninety-three transport planes deliver more than
400 tons of supplies and ammunition. After dark,
the Communists attack, initially by propelling streams
of mortar and artillery shells into the beleaguered
perimeter and afterwards with the ground troops that
as usual remain oblivious to the artillery barrages. The
2nd Battalion is hit especially hard on the southern sec-
tor of the perimeter, where the pressure continues to
build.
Although the defenders lack illuminating shells, a
Fifth Air Force Firefly (C-47) supports the defense and
lightens the skies with flares attached to parachutes that
linger overhead for about fifteen minutes to provide a
grand view of the charging enemy. The Chinese close
and the battle quickly changes to a fierce hand-to-hand
contest. Never-ending waves pound against the lines
and by 0315, Company G is compelled to give way. It
withdraws. In the process, the battery of the 503rd
FABn is lost. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion is also under
heavy assault.
A counterattack is mounted by the 1st Ranger Com-
pany and Company F in an attempt to regain the lost
ground, but the Chinese refuse passage. The slug-fest
continues straight through the night into dawn. Still, no
reinforcements arrive, but Colonel Freeman’s troops
hang on and refuse to capitulate.
Also, during one attack against Company I, an
enemy grenade is tossed into a machine gun position
and knocks it out. Another machine gun replaces it.
Sergeant William S. Sitman, attached to Company I,
and his detachment provide protection for the new
crew. Meanwhile, another grenade is thrown into the
position. Sitman blankets the grenade to save the lives
of the others. He is fatally wounded, but the others re-
main unscathed, able to continue the fight. Sitman be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor posthumously
February 14, 1951
for his tremendous heroism during the attack. His ac-
tions also save five other men at the machine gun em-
placement.
Colonel Freeman had been ordered to evacuate be-
cause of his wounds and a replacement arrived during
the afternoon of the 13th, but the plane left without
waiting to evacuate Freeman. Nonetheless, he had ear-
lier refused evacuation and he continues to hold com-
mand, even though Colonel John H. Chiles arrives to
assume command.
In other activity, the 2nd Division Reconnaissance
Company and Company L, 9th Infantry, at Chuam-ni,
again come under heavy assault. The U.S. defenders
attempt to withdraw, but the Chinese had established
blockages and destroyed a bridge, impeding the pull-
back. More than 200 casualties are sustained and of
those, about 114 are killed.
In the meantime, the Chinese also move against
Wonju. Some ground is surrendered by the French and
some penetration is made against the 3rd Battalion,
38th Regiment, during the morning. However, by af-
ternoon, all lost ground is retaken. Air support and ar-
tillery pound the Chinese columns, but despite heavy
losses, the unbroken link in the column continues to ad-
vance. Once again, there seems to be more Chinese
than artillery shells. The overtaxed artillery units re-
quest permission to suspend the bombardment, but
they are ordered to continue firing until the final shell
is expended. Shortly thereafter, word is passed again
that the guns are near collapse from overuse, but the
order comes back to maintain fire until the guns ex-
plode. The number of Chinese dead continues to
climb, yet more walk into the whirlwind of fire. Fi-
nally, by about 1500, Chinese losses grow too high and
the attack against Wonju is aborted.
As the enemy ranks collapse and the retreat begins,
the overworked guns continue to fire into the enemy
troops that head north. Just under 650 Chinese dead are
counted between midnight on the 13th-14th until dusk
on the 14th, but overall Chinese casualties are esti-
mated at 3,200 killed and 2,500 wounded. The devas-
tation inflicted upon the enemy eradicates four Chi-
nese divisions from the field.
In related activity, the British 27th Brigade moves
from IX Corps to X Corps during the morning hours.
It is attached to the U.S. 2nd Division. Afterwards, the
British advance up Route 24 against opposition. Also,
the ROK 6th Division arrives later, at about 1100 and
it, too, is attached to the 2nd Division. The South Ko-
reans deploy at a place near the convergence of the Han
and Som Rivers.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the ROK 3rd and 5th
Divisions had pulled back from their respective positions
and are in the process of redeploying between P’y-
ongch’ang and Wonju. During the afternoon, both di-
visions are engaged by North Korean units. The ROK
3rd Division is able to withstand the assaults; however,
the 5th Division, farther east, is unable to hold firmly.
The division is tossed into more chaos. The ROK sec-
tor becomes more disorganized and two divisions, the
February 15, 1951
ROK 7th and 9th, receive orders from General Yu to
withdraw from their respective sectors. The order to
withdraw threatens the left of the X Corps lines. In
conjunction, North Korean forces at this time are mov-
ing against P’yongch’ang.
February 15 The Chinese continue their coun-
terattack against the central front. They drive south-
east in force from the IX Corps sector to the X Corps
front and isolate the 23rd Infantry Regiment, 2nd Di-
vision.
In the IX Corps sector, General Ridgway designates
IX Corps with Operation KILLER, designed to elimi-
nate the Chinese and terminate the counterattack.
In the X Corps sector, the 5th Cavalry continues to
move to rescue the isolated 23rd Regiment, 25th Di-
vision, at Chipyong. Meanwhile, the defenders receive
some unexpected help Planes that could not come on
the previous day had concluded their mission at Wonju
and now arrive to support Colonel Freeman’s exhausted
troops. Marine and Navy planes plaster the enemy po-
sitions by executing more than 130 close-support sor-
ties. Colonel Freeman, the commander of RCT 23,
convinced that the threat is now under control, agrees
to be airlifted out of the area. Colonel Chiles assumes
command.
More supplies arrive when transport planes from
Japan drop the desperately needed ammunition. How-
ever, some of the parachutes drift into enemy territory.
Subsequent attempts to extricate the supplies take a toll
as enemy fire inflicts casualties. All the while, the Chi-
nese hold strong positions in front of the advancing 5th
Cavalry.
Colonel Crombez concludes that his force will fail
to reach Chipyong before dusk. He decides to send
armor with infantry atop, a controversial decision. At
Chipyong, Colonel Chiles urges Crombez to continue
to advance even if it is impossible to bring the vehicles.
The column moves out at 1545 and soon after, at
Koksu, enemy fire halts the advance. The infantry
(Company L, 3rd Battalion) bolts from the tanks to
find safer positions, while the tanks work to silence the
enemy.
Meanwhile, the tanks are ordered by Crombez to
plow forward, but without informing the attached in-
fantry. Chaos follows as the bewildered infantry troops
watch tanks leave. Most are able to jump aboard, but
others are left stranded. Later, about one mile up the
road, the enemy again commences heavy fire and halts
the column. The infantry repeats itself and jumps from
the tanks to get out harm’s way. Soon after, the infantry
seeks cover, and the tanks again dash forward, leaving
the infantry on its own. Those who are able jump
aboard the armor, but a large number — including the
3rd Battalion commander, Colonel Edgar J. Treacy —
misses the ride.
Those who catch the train soon find themselves
prime targets, as the Chinese continue to bring the
armor under attack. The infantry, having only their
uniforms as armor, cling haphazardly to the tanks as
656
they charge through the fire. Finally, at about 1700,
the battered armor and weary survivors of the infantry
arrive at the perimeter, just about the time the 2nd Bat-
talion, 23rd Infantry, 2nd Division, is launching a
counterattack. The siege is lifted, but the cost is high.
Company L, which had been with the armor, stands
at 23 men out of 160 that began the advance. Of the
23, 13 are wounded. One tank had been destroyed and
only its driver survived (with serious burns). The
stranded infantry had been told that the tanks would
return for them, but no relief force is sent.
Later, many of the troops make it back to friendly
lines; however, the cost remains high with 12 killed,
40 wounded and 19, including Colonel Treacy, miss-
ing. Colonel Crombez had refused Treacy permission to
join the relief column, but Treacy jumped aboard any-
way, refusing to let his troops undertake such a dan-
gerous mission without him. It is later learned that
Treacy had been captured and died from his wounds
in captivity.
At Chipyong, the 23rd Regiment sustains 52 killed,
259 wounded and 42 missing. Charles Parziale replaces
Treacy as commander, 3rd Battalion.
In the X Corps sector, the U.S. 7th Division is ordered
to speed a contingent (31st Infantry Regiment) from
the vicinity of P’yongch’ang to the rear of the ROK 5th
Division to bolster Chech’on, held by the 32nd In-
fantry Regiment. To further strengthen the line there,
the 17th Infantry Regiment suspends its advance along
Route 29 toward Wonju and deploys to the rear of the
ROK 3rd Division.
In other activity, the British 27th Brigade continues
to advance along Route 24 against nominal resistance,
as it attempts to reach Chipyong. At Chipyong, RCT
23 continues to hold, but the Chinese maintain ex-
traordinary pressure against the entire perimeter. The
defenders had received supplies by air on the previous
day, but again, the ammunition is nearly expended.
The Chinese, however, are unable to overwhelm the
steadfast combat team.
The most desperate sector is held by the 2nd Battal-
ion, 23rd Regiment. A new counterattack is launched
to restore the lost ground, but the strength of Com-
pany B, Freeman’s last reserve, is insufficient. The at-
tack fails to regain the ground. At about 1200, Air
Force and Marine planes arrive to strike the Chinese
positions. Later, the Chinese are compelled to disen-
gage. At about 1630, while the planes and artillery
maintain a constant attack, tanks are spotted by RCT
23’s tanks and to their jubilation, it is a relief column
under Colonel Crombez. As the tanks begin to con-
verge, the enemy retires and the flight provides a large
amount of targets for the U.S.
Crombez’s contingent sustains 3 killed and 4
wounded (armor) and Company L sustains 12 killed, 40
wounded and 19 missing. Chinese casualties, estimated
by RCT 23, amount to more than 4,900. TF Crombez
estimates about 500 casualties inflicted upon the Chi-
nese during the trek to reach Chipyong-ni. The Chi-
nese had committed elements from about six regiments
 657
to the unsuccessful assault to reduce Chipyong-ni.
RCT 23 reports 52 killed, 259 wounded and 42 miss-
ing.
In the 1st Marine sector, the operation in the Pohang–
Andong region known as the guerrilla hunt officially
terminates this day. The division begins to move to
Chungju in the IX Corps sector; however, the 1st Ma-
rine Division remains under Eighth Army rather than
IX Corps control. During the period covering the op-
eration (18 January to 15 February) the Marines suc-
cessfully complete all objectives, including keeping the
MSR clear. For the same period, Marines sustain 19
killed in action, 149 wounded in action, 7 who later die
of wounds, and 10 missing. In addition, the Marines
sustain 1,751 other non-battle casualties, primarily
frostbite.
The Marines had essentially knocked the 10th N.K.
Division out of action and prevented it from achiev-
ing any success. The Marines count 120 enemy dead
and another 184 are seized as prisoners, but no esti-
mates are available for enemy wounded.
In the ROK I Corps sector, at 1400, the ROK I
Corps assumes control of the SK 3rd, 5th and 8th Di-
visions.
In other activity, elements of the N.K. V Corps drive
against the ROK 3rd Division and for a while, the 22nd
ROK Regiment is threatened; however, artillery support
is provided by the U.S. 7th Division and the assault
is repelled. The ROK 5th Division on the left does
not fare well. By day’s end, the 5th Division retreats
about five miles and it is considered ineffective for the
field.
In Naval activity, at Masan, the USS Wiseman
(DE 667) initiates a program that trains Korean mid-
shipmen of the ROK Naval Academy and other naval
personnel from the Service School at the Chinhae Naval
Base.
February 16 In the I Corps sector, an enemy force
on Hill 185 takes a platoon of the 7th Regiment, 3rd
Division, under heavy fire and stalls the attack. Lieu-
tenant Darwin K. Kyle jumps up to defy the intense fire
and inspires his men to follow him. Shortly thereafter,
an enemy machine gun again stalls the assault. Kyle
singlehandedly charges the nest, engages its three occu-
pants in hand-to-hand combat and eliminates all of
them. Six men are already wounded when yet another
nest opens fire. Kyle again leads an assault and in the
process, he takes out four more of the enemy before
enemy submachine gun fire kills him. Lieutenant Kyle
becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his extraordinary valor and heroism while
leading his troops under fire.
In the IX Corps sector, a pending plan to commit IX
Corps to an attack against the flanks of the Chinese
salient is postponed due to several reasons, including
the inability of the 1st Cavalry Division to field two of
its regiments (7th and 8th). The 25th Division, which
had relieved the 1st Cavalry Division, initiates an ad-
vance to Line Boston at the Han River. Four regiments
February 17, 1951
move out with the British Brigade on the left, the 24th
Infantry (center), 27th Infantry (right) and to the far
right, the 5th Infantry (24th Division, I Corps). The ad-
vance is bolstered by powerful artillery bombardments
that eliminate many of the Chinese who otherwise
would have increased the resistance.
In other activity, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 5th
Cavalry, depart the vicinity of Hills 143 and 152
respectively and advance to Chipyong-ni. Also, Colo-
nel Crombez, who arrived on the previous night to
lift the siege at Chipyong, departs for Koksu’ri. After-
ward, supply vehicles and ambulances depart Koksu’ri
for Chipyong-ni and en route, the troops gather some
U.S. troops, including wounded, along the road. The
troops had been stranded during the advance of TF
Crombez. The defenders at Chipyong-ni serve as an
example of Ridgway’s conviction that the Eighth Army
could withstand the Chinese with its rejuvenated fight-
ing spirit.
Also, the 7th and 8th Cavalry, relieved at Mugam
by elements of the 25th Division, prepare to move to
Yonju. The 5th Cavalry participates in the offensive
that is being launched. In related activity, Colonel
Robert Blanchard replaces Colonel Michaelis as com-
mander of the 8th Cavalry. Michaelis, in command of
the regiment for less than one month, is reassigned to
other duties in Pusan. The 7th Cavalry, having engaged
in vicious combat for a few weeks, including the hard-
fought battle at Hill 578, is battle-weary, but in addi-
tion, the regiment is hit with an outbreak of typhus,
making it incapable of resuming the attack. It is placed
in reserve with the 8th Cavalry at Changhowon. Also,
the 24th Division remains in its positions outside Yoju,
near at the Han River.
In the X Corps sector, some attacks occur along the
Wonju Line, but none are substantial, as the enemy of-
fensive begins to subside. The ROK 3rd and 5th Divi-
sions again come under pressure, but neither is forced
to give ground.
February 17 Following the end of heavy fight-
ing at Chipyong-ni, the S.K. 6th Division and the
British 27th Brigade revert back to IX Corps. The Chi-
nese had used five divisions against the 2nd Division’s
lines, but the 23rd RCT and the attached French Bat-
talion had held. The Chinese disengage.
In related activity, General Ridgway arrives at Chipy-
ong to confer with Colonels Crombez (5th Cavalry)
and Chiles (23rd Regiment).
In the X Corps sector, enemy pressure against the
Wonju Line diminishes further and by the following
day, it is apparent that the North Korean V Corps
has withdrawn from its sector. Although the U.S.
had anticipated a heavy assault against Wonju, no ef-
forts have been made by the Chinese since 14 Febru-
ary.
In Air Force activity, during the night (17th-18th),
B-26s execute the initial mission that uses a new short-
range navigational system for precision bombing mis-
sions. The system, known as Shoran, operates with an
February 18, 1951 658

Elements of the 27th Regiment, 25th Division, move along a snow covered mountain in the vicinity of
Kyongan-ni on February 17. At about this time, the 3rd Division is to hold a sector of the Lincoln Line.

airborne radar device coordinated with two ground
beacon stations.
In Naval activity, enemy positions at Wonsan are
bombarded by Task Element of UN Blockade and Es-
cort Task Group (TG 95.2).
February 18 In the Eighth Army area, General
Ridgway during the latter part of this day declines a
recommendation by his staff to hold in place and estab-
lish a defensive perimeter. Ridgway is unwilling to even
consider canceling the offensive and affording the
 659 February 20, 1951

enemy an opportunity to retire in leisurely fashion. Also, after being directed by General Ridgway to
Eighth Army is ordered to remain on the offensive. move from Pohang-dong, the 1st Marine Division
During the meeting with his staff, Ridgway informs (minus 7th Marines) arrives at Ch’ungju and prepares
them that the 1st Marine Division will anchor the at- to spearhead the IX Corps drive when Operation
tack as part of IX Corps. KILLER commences. In conjunction, the Marines re-
In the I Corps sector, there is no contact with either place the 2nd Division and the 187th Airborne RCT in
the North Koreans or the Chinese. The 25th Division the vicinity of Wonju. The relief permits the U.S. Army
sees some action in support of the IX Corps drive. By units to rejoin X Corps on the 21st, when the bound-
day’s end, it becomes apparent that the Chinese and ary is modified to bring Wonju into the IX Corps ju-
the North Koreans are abandoning South Korea. It is risdiction.
a significant accomplishment for Ridgway, who, since In the X Corps sector, there is no contact with the
he assumed command of Eighth Army, has believed his Chinese or North Koreans.
troops could prevail. The victory also proves the the-
ory of Ridgway and others that the Communists could
February 19 In the Eighth Army area, General
Ridgway arrives at IX Corps headquarters at Yoju to
not drive Eighth Army from Korea.
meet with General Bryant Moore and other staff offi-
It is estimated that since the previous October,
cers, including Generals O.P. Smith and Lewis B.
Eighth Army, including the 1st Marine Division and the
(Chesty) Puller, both of the 1st Marine Division. Gen-
supporting air and naval units, had decimated about
eral Ridgway continues to work on Operation KILLER,
fourteen Chinese divisions. And Ridgway had accom-
scheduled to commence on the 21st. Ridgway is not
plished the tremendous turnabout in less than sixty
totally sure of the combined strength of the Chinese
days.
and North Koreans, but best estimates from Intelli-
In the IX Corps sector, at 0745, the I Corps com-
gence place the opposition at about 6 to 7 new Chinese
mander, Major General Bryant E. Moore, informs Gen-
armies and four North Korean corps (plus, three armies
eral Ridgway that one of his regiments (5th Infantry,
and one corps in reserve).
24th Division) has reported its front, east of Mugam, to
Also, during the conference in which X Corps at-
be wide open with no enemy in the way. All fortifications
tended, the 1st Marine Division learns it is being de-
encountered had been abandoned; however, the enemy
tached from X Corps and placed under IX Corps con-
had apparently departed hurriedly, as many weapons re-
trol. General O.P. Smith (1st Marine Division) had not
mained, and they had also abandoned large amounts of
been receptive to again serve under General Almond
cooking equipment. The reports are passed on to other
(X Corps), since his experience with him in the previ-
units and warnings of a ruse are sent out, but similar en-
ous year during the Inchon–Chosin Reservoir cam-
counters occur all across the line, indicating the enemy
paign. The Marines also learn that two army units, the
is in the process of a general withdrawal.
74th Truck Company and the 92nd FABn, are being as-
Meanwhile, the 1st Cavalry Division, supported by
signed to the 1st Marine Division for added support.
the British 27th Brigade, and the ROK 6th Division
The Marines need no introduction to the 92nd FABn.
advance towards the heights overlooking the
Under the leadership of Lt. Colonel Leon F. Lavoie, its
Wonju–Seoul railroad line at a point several miles
guns had provided welcome support during the Chosin
northwest of Chipyong-ni. The troops are ordered to
Reservoir operations.
form a line to prevent the enemy from entering the Han
Although the Marines will spearhead the attack, they
River Valley.
will be supported by the entire IX Corps and X Corps,
Reconnaissance probes on the previous night discov-
except for the 187th Airborne RCT. The Marines are
ered that enemy resistance had begun to vanish except
directed to drive northeastwardly from Wonju and liq-
for an obstacle west of the river. The Chinese had evac-
uidate as many of the enemy as possible during Oper-
uated their positions in the hills and apparently too fast
ation KILLER.
to consider taking their dead along. The U.S. advance
In Naval activity, Task Group 95.9, commanded by
is effortless at the abandoned positions. About 600 dead
Rear Admiral A.E. Smith, is established. Admiral Smith
remain on the field. Large amounts of ammunition and
is relieved this day of command of United Nations
supplies had also been left behind.
Blockading and Escort Force (CTF 95) by Vice Admi-
The U.S. 24th Division expands the offensive and
ral William Andrewes. Also, enemy shore batteries in
drives towards Hajin by pushing through the bridge-
the vicinity of Wonsan initiate fire against the USS
head, but the entire IX Corps had been ordered to at-
Ozbourn (DD 846).
tack by General Moore. The corps is also supported by
elements of the I Corps. Its 25th Division advances February 20 General MacArthur arrives in
through the western portion of the bridgehead. Great Korea from Japan. He confers with General Ridgway in
progress is made throughout the day. The Chinese raise the X Corps sector at a forward command post near
only some sporadic resistance. Opposition throughout Wonju. Ridgway doesn’t particularly appreciate the
the central region dissipates. By 1800, the Han River, conference, as MacArthur’s appearance acts as an auto-
near Yongp’yong, is reached by elements of the 24th matic signal to the enemy that an offensive is underway.
Division, while the 1st Cavalry arrives to deploy in the MacArthur announces that the offensive had been or-
Hajin–Chipyong area. dered by him, yet he had no part in it.
February 21, 1951
A contingent of the U.S. 7th Division climbs Hill 675 on 20 February.
In the 1st Marines sector, the focus is on last minute
preparations for the advance by the 1st and 5th Marines
scheduled for the following morning at 0800.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces establishes
“Special Air Mission.” The specialized unit, attached
to the 315th Air Division, is assigned the responsibil-
ity for handling the flights for high ranking officials, but
another task is to execute missions that drop leaflets
over enemy terrain and, when needed, to broadcast
messages from speakers installed on the aircraft.
February 21 By this date, the Communist salient
at Chech’on is eliminated, which foils their attempt to
turn the Allied flank.
Operation KILLER commences. The offensive (IX
and X Corps) moves against the enemy east of the Han
River and south of Line Arizona, which runs from the
vicinity of Yangp’yong stretching across Route 29 at a
point several miles above Hoengsong and across Route
60, at a point about six miles above P’yongchang.
In the I Corps sector, the units of the I Corps and the
24th Division (IX Corps) deployed along the lower
bank of the Han River protect the west flank of the at-
tacking forces.
In the IX Corps sector, the units advance up Route
29.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, General Puller, the
assistant division commander, concerned about the 5th
Marines’ possible delay in reaching the line of departure
660
in time for the attack, contacts General O.P. Smith to
inform him of the snarled traffic on the highway. Smith
and General Bryant Moore (IX Corps) at the Marine
command post at Wonju deliberate and conclude that
the attack will commence on time, with whatever
troops are on line. However, the delay causes the jump-
off time to be changed to 1000.
The advance to seize the ridgeline several miles south
of the heights that dominate Hoengsong is led by the
1st Battalion, 5th Marines. The elements provide most
of the resistance as the Marines move under pesky rain,
unending mud and slush, but no close range resistance.
During the latter part of the afternoon, the enemy en-
gages the Marines, but from great distance. After two
fire fights, the enemy retires. The Marines sustain three
men wounded. They establish night positions and
spend a most uncomfortable night in water-drenched
foxholes.
During the early morning hours, the ground remains
frozen; however, by afternoon it begins to thaw, caus-
ing havoc. In addition to the normal problems associ-
ated with nature, the thawed ground exposes land
mines that become active and deadly once the ice thaws.
In the X Corps sector, the assault drives up Route 60. As
the offensive jumps off, nature delivers unexpected obsta-
cles. The weather had suddenly turned relatively warmer,
following about three weeks of continual cold that ranged
from about 15 degrees below zero to about 33 to 34 de-
grees above zero. On this day, the temperature rises to
 661
nearly 50 degrees. Subsequently, the region is struck by
rainfall and during the next several days, some roads
became impassable and many bridges are either dam-
aged or washed out.
In the meantime, the Chinese and the North Kore-
ans had used the time to continue their retreat. The
2nd Division, attacking on the right of the Marines,
commences its assault on the 22nd.
February 22 In the Eighth Army area, Operation
KILLER continues against sporadic resistance. The offen-
sive continues to be impeded by the elements.
In the IX Corps zone, the 1st Marine Division contin-
ues its advance with the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, act-
ing as vanguard. Similarly to the previous day, again
the elements become the primary problem impeding
the attack. The enemy continues to retreat and raises
opposition only from long range.
In the X Corps sector, the 2nd and 7th Divisions ini-
tiate their attacks, but the elements create major prob-
lems which make the crossing of the Chech’on River
hazardous. The river, usually more like a shallow
stream, flows wildly at a depth of more than three feet.
The lighter vehicles are unable to cross due to the strong
currents. The tanks, however, make it across, but it is
nearly 48 hours later when the two divisions finally get
all units across the river. The 23rd Regiment, 2nd Di-
vision, hops aboard the tanks and gets a lead on the
other infantry units.
February 23 Operation KILLER continues, but
progress remains slow. The condition of the roads in-
terrupts the supply system; however, planes bolster the
drive and drop supplies to maintain the efficiency of
the offensive. While the ground troops continue to ad-
vance in search of the enemy, engineers work tirelessly
to repair the roads and the bridges that had been af-
fected by the elements. About 800 sorties (Fifth Air
Force) are flown in support of the advance.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines finally encounter opposition. The 1st and 2nd
Battalions, 1st Marines, advance together to seize two
elevations along a ridge in front of the objective. Ma-
rine air support requested on the previous day to bol-
ster the attack does not materialize; however, the ar-
tillery provides sufficient punch. The Marines eliminate
the resistance and gain the first hill. During the after-
noon, they move to evict a contingent of about
battalion-strength from deeply entrenched positions
on the remaining hill. The assault is augmented by two
air strikes. The hill is seized and 61 enemy dead are
counted. The Marines lose 1 killed and 21 wounded.
In the X Corps sector, the 2nd and 7th Divisions en-
counter stiff resistance en route to Chipyong-ni. Urgent
calls for air support go out and soon after, the call re-
ceives a response. Planes, including Marine Squadron
VMF-312, arrive and the Chinese positions are
pounded during the afternoon raids.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces Bomber
Command executes its initial B-29 bombing mission
that uses the more efficient MPQ-2 radar. The planes
February 24, 1951
strike a bridge located less than ten miles northeast of
Seoul.
February 24 In the IX Corps sector, the helicop-
ter transporting Major General Bryant E. Moore dur-
ing Operation KILLER crashes in the Han River. Gen-
eral Moore and his pilot sustain no major injuries.
However, less than one hour after the crash, General
Moore suffers a heart attack and succumbs. General
Moore had only recently assumed command of IX
Corps. He is temporarily replaced by General Oliver
P. Smith, USMC.
Also, during the crossing of the Chech’on River, one
of the tanks strikes a mine and a steel fragment strikes
Colonel Cesidio Barberis, the commander of the 2nd
Battalion, 9th Infantry Regiment. Although he isn’t
killed, Barberis is critically wounded and evacuated.
He is replaced by Colonel Peter F. Bermingham.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st and 3rd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, drive forward and seize the in-
tended Phase 1 objectives. Following an artillery bar-
rage and an air strike, an infantry patrol (1st Marines),
supported by one tank, moves into Hoengsong. After-
wards, a platoon of tanks and Company C, 1st Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, enters the village, but the Chinese in
the nearby heights to the west initiate mortar and ma-
chine gun fire. Two tanks sustain slight yet damaging
hits, as their antennae are severed. Nevertheless, the
Marines modify their strategy and by the use of a run-
ner, Captain Wray is able to coordinate the enemy’s
positions. They are soon eliminated by the tanks.
In the meantime, Chinese are spotted by an aerial
observer who informs the battalion commander, Lt.
Colonel Schmuck, that the Chinese are maneuvering to
ambush the patrol as it begins to move deeper into the
town. The patrol is ordered to withdraw. Planes are
called upon to blast the Chinese as they attempt to set
up the ambush.
Captain Wray’s contingent moves northwest of the
village to a spot known as “Massacre Valley,” the scene
of a recent ambush of a U.S. Army truck convoy. The
survivors are retrieved.
Later this day, enemy fire originating in the high
ground northwest of Hoengsong causes problems and
kills one Marine and wounds four others. The 2nd Bat-
talion, 11th Marines, returns fire and terminates the
enemy fire. By dusk, all divisional preliminary objec-
tives are achieved.
In other activity, General Lewis B. Puller assumes
command of the 1st Marine Division in place of Gen-
eral O.P. Smith, who receives temporary control of IX
Corps.
In the X Corps sector, the 2nd and 7th Divisions en-
counter fierce resistance in front of Chipyong-ni. Air
strikes are called upon to break up the resistance. Planes
from VMF-312 arrive and strike the positions marked
with white phosphorous. The enemy is struck repeat-
edly by napalm and rockets in addition to strafing,
which compels the Chinese to abandon their positions.
However, Major Daniel H. Davis, executive officer of
February 25, 1951 662

the squadron, is killed after his plane loses a wing and unfolds his plan known as Operation RIPPER during a
crashes on his eighth run. meeting with the commanders of the I, IX and X Corps
Elements of the 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, ad- at Changhowon. The operation is to commence on 10
vance to the Hoengsong–Pangnim Road. Conditions re- March; however, the date is later changed to 7 March.
main terrible and there is concern of stretching too far Although there had been much discussion in Washing-
without a proper path for resupply, but orders arrive ton on why Eighth Army should not attempt to cross
from X Corps to continue the attack. the 38th Parallel, Ridgway’s plan had been accepted by
Meanwhile, elements of the 7th Division advance to the Joint Chiefs of Staff. The operation is intended to
Pangnim. liquidate as many Communists as possible to disrupt
In Naval activity, two destroyers and other vessels their plans, if any, about launching an offensive. An-
protect the landing of ROK Marines at Sindo-ri Island other part of the operation is to regain Seoul.
in Wonsan Harbor without incident. Also, the Combat Cargo Command continues to
In Air Force activity, a huge contingent of planes overwork its crews and planes to deliver more than 600
composed of sixty-seven C-119s and two C-47s, at- tons of supplies and 1,193 passengers to keep the offen-
tached to the 315th Air Division, distribute by air drop sive moving. On the previous day, the planes had de-
333 tons of supplies and equipment to the units along livered nearly 500 tons of supplies and just over 1,000
the front lines. passengers.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division prepares
February 25 Operation KILLER
continues; however, the main advance
is suspended temporarily by General
Ridgway to await resupply of ammu-
nition and fuel as well as supplies.
The entire operation is not halted,
thanks to air drops of supplies. Once
the supplies are at the front, the at-
tack to the main objective, Phase Line
Arizona, resumes. The IX and X
Corps maintain the offensive, but the
elements remain nasty.
In other activity, General Ridgway
issues orders for the second phase of
Operation KILLER, to begin on 1
March.
In the IX Corps sector, the ground
Marines are disgruntled because they
are receiving mostly Air Force support
instead of their usual close-air support
by Marine squadrons. The 1st Marine
Air Wing is under Fifth Air Force ju-
risdiction and as the advance contin-
ues, the U.S. Army and the British
units request Marine fighter squad-
rons. On Feb. 23, the third day of Op-
eration KILLER, the Marine squadrons
flew 101 of the 800 sorties. Marine
pilots are known for flying support
missions just above the helmets of the
ground troops if necessary.
Also, the weather impedes the ad-
vances of the 1st Cavalry Division
and the 24th Division, each advanc-
ing on the Marines’ left. The Com-
monwealth Brigade, which replaced
the 7th Cavalry, hits severe resistance
east of Chipyong. Elements of the
Australian and Canadian Battalions
attempt to eliminate the obstacles,
A view of some Korean mountains from the top of a pole. A line-
but the Chinese repel the attempt.
man repairs a communications wire, a task that apparently does not
February 26 General Ridgway get too many volunteers.
 663
for the next phase of the operation. While it holds its
positions at Hoengsong, the next objective is within
sight of the troops that observe the hills to the north of
the village. The Marines face a river crossing, without
the benefit of a bridge nor engineers to construct a
bridge. They also must push their way forward to re-
lieve the ROK 6th Division at the point prior to ford-
ing the river.
Nevertheless, they improvise. Major (later General)
Edwin H. Simmons (Weapons Company) pulls out a
manual on how to construct a “Swiss bent bridge.”
Simmons hands the book to Sergeant Carmelo J. Ran-
dazzo. Randazzo becomes the engineering expert and by
dark of the 28th, the bridge is complete in two parts.
One length stretches 120 feet to a sandbar and from
the sandbar to the opposite bank, the span stretches 60
feet.
In the X Corps sector, as part of Operation KILLER,
Company E, 17th Regiment, 7th Division, gets stalled
as it attacks a ridge in the vicinity of Maltari. The two
squads at the point are prevented from an advance by
ferocious fire. Corporal Einar H. Ingman, Jr., assumes
command of the point after several men and the two re-
spective squad leaders become wounded. Ingman,
without waiting for his command to follow, bolts from
his position to silence an enemy machine gun that riv-
ets his men’s positions. He eliminates the entire detach-
ment and its gun, but then he is brought under fire by
yet another gun. Ingman darts toward the menace, but
he is hit by fire and grenades that knock him to the
ground. Despite wounds to his neck and face, Ingman
rises and continues to charge, using only his rifle. His
stamina exceeds normal human expectations and he is
able to eliminate the entire second gun crew. But, just
after clearing the nest, he collapses into unconscious-
ness.
By this time, his squads are back on the attack and
they finish the task. The enemy force of about 100
troops is vanquished. They abandon the hill and re-
tire. Ingman is rushed to the rear for medical aid. He
survives and becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor
for his extraordinary courage and leadership in the face
of an overwhelming enemy force.
February 27 Operation KILLER continues. The
IX and X Corps continue to advance slowly. By the fol-
lowing day, the IX Corps, operating in the east, is at the
heights above Hoengsong and the X Corps reaches po-
sitions in the heights just under five miles north of the
junction of Routes 20 and 60.
February 28 By this day, the Communist threat
in the area south of the Han River folds, terminating
weeks of heavy fighting. By the end of this day, the en-
tire line of Eighth Army is restored with no gaps and no
enemy forces threatening the lines. The IX and X Corps
have each reached Arizona line on the west and east re-
spectively. Operation KILLER continues.
In addition to the recent loss of Major General
Moore, some other command changes had occurred
during February. Brigadier General Charles D. Palmer
March 1, 1951
replaced General Gay as commander, 1st Cavalry Di-
vision (IX Corps), and Brigadier General J. Sladen
Bradley assumes command of the 25th Infantry Divi-
sion. He succeeds General Kean.
March 1 General Ridgway again holds a meeting
with his corps commanders at Changhowon to update
the plans for Operation RIPPER. The date is changed
from 10 March to 6 March; however, the offensive ac-
tually commences on 7 March. Later this same day, the
operation orders are officially issued. The designated
lines are Albany, Buffalo, Cairo and Idaho.
In the IX Corps sector, some units continue to ad-
vance to reach the Arizona Line, but they face no heavy
resistance. The Chinese 39th Army is deployed to the
front of IX Corps.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, moves across the new bridge built by reg-
ular Marines under the supervision of Sergeant Ran-
dazzo. The attack force vanguard advances to the
heights north of Hoengsong, with the 3rd Battalion,
1st Marines, trailing. The Marines’ arrival on the west
bank of the river had been announced by a tumultuous
artillery bombardment. In addition, planes arrive, but
behind schedule, to deliver air strikes.
The 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 7th Marines, hit resist-
ance. Initially the 2nd Battalion encounters small arms
fire and afterward, both Battalions enter an area that is
booby-trapped, which stalls the attack. The Chinese
remain deeply entrenched and the artillery is unable to
evict them. By the middle of the afternoon, it is de-
cided to halt the drive until the following day.
In related activity, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines,
east of the river seizes Hill 208 and afterwards, joins
with the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines.
In other activity, General Puller informs General
Shepherd, commander, Fleet Marine Force Pacific, that
Marine close-air support is non-existent and repeated
requests go unanswered. He further explains that Navy
and Air Force planes arrive and do a good job, but not
the same as would be accomplished with Marine pi-
lots. The message is sent in hope of getting back to di-
rect Marine support rather than Joint Operations Cen-
ter for Fifth Air Force.
In the X Corps sector, the enemy raises opposition in
the heights above Route 20. The resistance continues,
particularly against the 2nd Division, until the 5th.
The X Corps is facing the North Korean III Corps
(minus NK 3rd Division).
In Air Force activity, Bomber Command (FEAF) ini-
tiates the initial mission of a new interdiction cam-
paign. The B-29s executing the mission are to be es-
corted by twenty-two F-80s, but headwinds cause
problems and the rendezvous does not occur. Nonethe-
less, the jets arrive over the target area, Kogunyong,
prior to the arrival of the B-29s. Consequently, the F-
80s run low on fuel and return to base, leaving the B-
29s unprotected in the North Korean skies. A band of
MiGs attacks the Superfortresses. The B-29s attempt
to fight off the MiGs, and succeed in downing one.
March 2, 1951
However, ten of the B-29s sustain damage and of these,
three are unable to return to Japan and make emer-
gency landings in South Korea.
March 2 Although most of the IX and X Corps
had reached the objectives along the Arizona Line, other
units are continuing to advance towards it.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
advance continues, but while the Communists remain
well entrenched in the heights, the Marines trek across
rocky ground. The 11th Marines’ artillery catapults
streams of shells into the enemy positions, but they are
not dislodged.
In the 1st Cavalry Division zone, enemy mortars strike
the perimeter. The commander of the 2nd Battalion,
5th Cavalry, is killed during the attack. He is replaced
by Lt. Colonel Richard L. Irby. The 5th Cavalry has
been undergoing other unexpected changes of com-
mand. The 3rd Battalion commander, Colonel Treacy
had been taken prisoner of war in early February.
Charles T. Heinrich replaced Morgan Heasley as com-
mander of the 3rd Battalion.
March 3 In the ROK III Corps area, the corps,
which had initiated an offensive along Route 20 dur-
ing the latter part of February, encounters fierce resist-
ance. It had departed from the sector around Kang-
nung to establish a defensive line in front of the IX and
X Corps. The advancing force, composed of two regi-
ments of the ROK Capital Division, is unexpectedly
attacked by elements of the NK 2nd Division at a point
about twenty-five miles west of its departure point, at
a village known as Soksa-ri. The ambush takes a dev-
astating toll on the regiments and knocks them out of
action. The casualties amount to 59 killed, 119
wounded and 802 troops missing.
In the IX Corps sector, the Marines close upon the
Arizona Line. At dawn, the final objectives come into
sight as the Marines gaze north towards the five enemy-
held hills along Phase Line Arizona from west to east,
Hills 536 and 533 in the path of the 7th Marines, and
Hills 321, 335 and 201 in that of the 1st Marines. The
7th Marines attack is met with fierce resistance at Hills
536 and 333. The 1st Battalion is called upon to cover
the left flank of the regiment and simultaneously sup-
port the assault against Hill 536. At Hill 333, the
enemy holds steadfastly against the 3rd Battalion. At
dusk, the summits of both hills remain in enemy hands.
In the 1st Marines zone, at Hill 321, the Chinese are
abandoning their positions as the 3rd Battalion, 1st
Marines, approach. The Marines overcome the resist-
ance without much effort, but the unit still sustains ca-
sualties due to the trek across the nasty terrain. In the
meantime, Hills 335 and 201 are secured. By the fol-
lowing day, the 1st Marines executes mop-up opera-
tions, while the 7th Marines prepares to mount another
assault to take the summits of Hills 536 and 333.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces resumes
bombing missions that use radar guided Tazon bombs.
These missions had been suspended on 17 January due
to a shortage of the bombs.
664
March 4 In the IX Corps sector, General William
M. Hoge, USA, arrives at Yoju to assume command of
IX Corps. On the following day, he replaces General
O.P. Smith, USMC, the temporary commander. Smith
returns to resume command of the 1st Marine Divi-
sion. In turn, the temporary commander, General
Puller, resumes his duties as assistant division com-
mander.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, subsequent to an ar-
tillery bombardment, the 7th Marines, at 0800,
launches an attack to gain the crests of Hills 536 and
333. The only resistance encountered is the rear guard.
The main body had evacuated the area during the
night. The 1st Marine Division, having eliminated the
five hills along the Phase Line Arizona, achieves its ob-
jectives to terminate its part of Operation KILLER by
dusk. However, mop-up operations continue on the
following day. The 1st Marine Division during the
eight days of the operation sustains 48 killed, 345
wounded and 2 missing. The Marines are unable to
count all of the enemy dead, because often, when time
allows, the Chinese bury their dead before abandon-
ing the area. The Marines however, count 274 dead
and they have seized 48 prisoners.
March 5 The date for the commencement of Op-
eration RIPPER is 6 March; however, there is concern
that the ammunition supplies are not yet sufficient to
ensure all units have ample amounts. The operation is
postponed for one day in order to acquire more supplies.
In the IX Corps sector, Major General William J. Hoge
assumes command of the IX Corps succeeding the tem-
porary commander, General Oliver P. Smith, USMC.
General Joseph Swing, the initial selection by Ridg-
way, is unavailable. The U.S. Army refuses to release
him form his post at the Army War College. General
Ridgway had received heat from various sources for se-
lecting General Smith to command an army corps, but
he did not acquiesce. Nevertheless, General Smith did
find some humor in the way the army rushed to find a
permanent commander.
In the X Corps sector, following five days of heavy re-
sistance, the 2nd Division finally scatters the N.K.
troops that had been holding formidable positions in the
heights. After dark, the North Koreans abandon their
positions.
March 6 In the IX Corps sector, all units by this
time reach the Arizona Line or have advanced to posi-
tions close to it.
In Air Force activity, F-86 Sabres attached to the
334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, after an absence
of several months, again initiate raids from Suwon
against targets in the Yalu River area. The 334th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter Interceptor Group,
has no breathing room at Suwon, with its one runway
and no taxiway. The pilots must back up the runway
after landing to park their planes. The 336th Fighter In-
terceptor Squadron, another recalled unit, moves to
Taegu and stages its jets through Suwon.
 665
March 7 By this day, Operation KILLER achieves
only some of its objectives and falls short of liquidat-
ing all of the enemy forces below the Arizona line. Nev-
ertheless, IX Corps reports 7,819 enemy killed, 1,469
wounded and 208 captured. In the meantime, the
enemy continues to withdraw from its positions.
Operation RIPPER commences at 0545 with a mas-
sive artillery barrage that rings enemy positions north
of the Han River until about 0615, when the guns
switch to targets deeper in the enemy’s territory. The of-
fensive is designed to continue to eliminate as many
enemy forces as possible. The seizure of territory is not
a primary part of the operation.
Naval task forces have been bombarding enemy po-
sitions since the previous month and they continue to
operate. In addition, the U.S. Navy has commenced
several diversionary operations to feign an amphibious
attack. The ultimate objective of the offensive is the
Idaho Line to the east is along the Han River, less than
ten miles from Seoul. From there, it stretches across a
portion of the eastern sector of the I Corps sector until
it reaches a point near the 38th Parallel.
The attack, which is also supported by Fifth Air
Force, is planned to advance in phases to a group of
lines, Albany, in the vicinity of Hongch’on, slightly
more than ten miles in front of the I, IX and X Corps;
Buffalo Line, in front of the I and IX Corps and the
Cairo Line, which concerns only IX Corps and signi-
fied the gateway to Ch’unch’on.
As usual, General MacArthur arrives in Korea, but
in line with the request of General Ridgway, his arrival
occurs later in the morning, which permits the offen-
sive to jump off without the enemy getting a premature
signal from MacArthur’s presence. While at Suwon,
A Sherman tank (M4) attached to the 89th Tank Battalion in the foreground crosses the Han River near
its convergence with the Pukham River on 7 March.
March 7, 1951
MacArthur, at a press conference, mentions the possi-
bility of a stalemate in Korea. His remarks reflect his
displeasure with Washington, which does not agree
with his plans, including permitting the Nationalist
Chinese to invade the China mainland and a huge
number of U.S. reinforcements.
In the I Corps sector, the U.S. 3rd Division and the
ROK 1st Division, in the eastern and western areas re-
spectively, are directed to protect the flank and defend
Inchon, where the Navy is tirelessly unloading supplies
to support the offensive. The 3rd Division maneuvers
along the Han south of Seoul to draw attention away
from the 25th Division, while the ROK 1st Division ad-
vances northwest of Kimpo Airfield.
Meanwhile, the 25th Division, which holds ground
east of Seoul, is to drive across the Han River where it
converges with the Pukham River and from there, it is
to clear the heights above the Pukham River. From
there the 3rd Division is to deploy from where it can
drive against enemy-held Seoul and to simultaneously
defend the IX Corps’ left flank.
Prior to dawn, elements of three regiments of the
25th Division cross the river in boats, followed by
tanks. The assault regiments are the 27th and 35th,
but the 24th Regiment (including Turkish Brigade) also
has a key role during the offensive. Shortly thereafter,
at sunrise, planes arrive to bolster the advance. The
enemy throws up resistance, including road obstacles,
but after short bursts of heavy fire, the Communists
retire. By dusk, the advance gains less than three miles,
but the division pushes elements across the Han River
in the vicinity of the Pukham River and establishes a
bridgehead on the north bank.
During the night, the Chinese attack the positions of
March 8, 1951
the 2nd Battalion, 24th Regiment, pounding against
Companies E and F. The companies are driven from
their positions in the heights, but on the following day,
a counterattack is mounted and the ground is regained.
The Chinese resistance remains heavy for several days
and the average ground gained remains about the same.
The 25th Division unexpectedly seizes more than 300
Chinese prisoners during the first day of the operation.
After interrogation, it seems apparent that the Chinese
have lost much of their fighting spirit, a piece of intelli-
gence that adds to the morale of Eighth Army. Circum-
stances have changed greatly since the Chinese have ven-
tured so far south from Manchuria and their main bases.
In the IX Corps sector, the primary thrust of the of-
fensive begins. The advance drives towards Chunchon
and Hongch’on. The 187th Airborne RCT remains at
Taegu, prepared if necessary to support the advance.
Four divisions jump off. In the eastern half of the sec-
tor, the 1st Cavalry, 1st Marine Division, and the ROK
6th Division plow towards Hoengsong. The 24th Di-
vision, operating on the Corps’ left, drives forward
across the Yongmun Mountains.
In the 24th Division zone, the 19th Regiment encoun-
ters stiff resistance in the vicinity of Yonggong-ni. A
squad attached to Company I attempts to ascend a hill,
but heavy fire halts progress. The squad leader, Sergeant
Nelson V. Brittin, under the support fire of the detach-
ment, plows ahead and throws a grenade at the first en-
trenchment he encounters, but while returning to his de-
tachment an enemy grenade explodes and wounds him.
He disregards his injury, grabs more grenades and heads
back to eliminate more of the enemy and clear the path
for his troops. Brittin expeditiously moves, eliminating
obstacles in his way and then, his weapon jams.
He jumps into the next foxhole and with the butt
of his rifle and bayonet, he eliminates those in it. But
still, the platoon is unable to advance, due mostly to an-
other machine gun nest. Brittin maneuvers to its rear,
deposits a grenade and then speeds to the front to fin-
ish off the several occupants in the nest. Afterward, the
platoon is able to advance, but shortly thereafter, yet an-
other enemy machine gun halts progress.
Once again, Brittin singlehandedly drives toward the
nest. Brittin is stopped short of the nest by automatic
weapons fire that kills him instantly. His actions, how-
ever, inspire the remainder of his command and the
objective is seized. Prior to his demise, Brittin had elim-
inated twenty of the enemy and destroyed four ma-
chine gun nests. Sergeant Brittin is awarded the Medal
of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary valor
under fire.
In the 1st Marines zone, the initial objective is slightly
more than five miles distant, just beyond Oum Moun-
tain, but no map is required, as its towering peak is vis-
ible from the line of departure. During this offensive,
the Marines are en route to reintroduce themselves to
the Chinese 66th Army, commanded by General Show
Shiu Kwai. The 7th Marines and the 1st Marines on the
left and right respectively advance abreast against light
resistance.
666
Meanwhile, the 5th Marines remains in reserve, con-
fined to patrols in the vicinity of Hoengsong. The Ho-
engsong–Hongchon Road that curves through Kun-
sama Pass actually parallels the boundary separating the
7th and 5th Marines. During the advance, the Marines
are jubilant; the sky is full of MAG-33 squadrons,
which more than makes up for an unusual decrease in
artillery support due to a shortage of shells. By day’s
end, all objectives are achieved. The Marines sustain 7
men wounded in action during the advance. Elements
of the 2nd Division (X Corps) accompany the Marines
and search for troops that had been killed during Feb-
ruary (Operation ROUNDUP).
In the X Corps sector, the drive focuses on clearing
enemy forces along two separate north-south routes.
Also, the ROK 5th Division is reattached to X Corps.
Enemy resistance raised by the North Koreans against
the 2nd and 7th U.S. Divisions and the ROK 5th Di-
vision remains heavy for several days. The 7th Divi-
sion drills along Route 20, holding the right, while the
2nd Division advances through the Pungam’ni corridor
on the left. In conjunction, the ROK troops work the
ridges in between the two U.S. divisions.
In the ROK sectors, the ROK I and III Corps move to
clear the other part of the sector to the east. The ROK
3rd Division and Headquarters, ROK I Corps (ROK
9th and Capital Divisions), are detached from X Corps
and reattached to the ROK III Corps. During Opera-
tion RIPPER, the ROK Corps are designated responsi-
bility for clearing Route 30. The I Corps is deployed
near the coast, at or near the Idaho line; however, the
ROK III Corps is fixed farther inland and it is to drive
north through the Taeback ridges to reach the line at a
point about five miles above Route 20.
March 8 In the I Corps sector, 25th Division zone,
the 24th Regiment, which had lost some ground on
the previous night, launches a counterattack and drives
the Chinese back, then regains the ground. Progress
also continues for the 27th and 35th Regiments as the
advance moves into the heights of the Pukham valley.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
7th and 1st Marine Regiments resume the attack and
again become jubilant when MAG-12 Marine
squadrons are spotted overhead during the trek. The
3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, accompanied by Company
A, 1st Tank Battalion, encounters some stiff resistance,
but it does not last too long. The 11th Marines pinpoint
the area and initiate an artillery barrage that terminates
the resistance, again raised by rear-guard troops en-
trenched mostly in log bunkers.
As the 7th Marines advance, Company A encounters
fierce resistance originating on a hill mass to the left of
Oum San, several hundred yards distant. Two men of
the 2nd Platoon are killed and several others, includ-
ing Lieutenant Clayton Bush, the platoon leader, are
wounded when their positions sustain a direct hit from
a high explosive shell. The 1st Platoon takes over and
with the support of tanks, the enemy is evicted from the
hill. The Marines’ system to root them out seems to
 667
work well. Initially, the resistance is struck by napalm
and then fire from the tanks’ 90-mm shells, just prior
to the close-quartered assault, when the Marines close
and toss hand grenades into the bunkers. By dusk, the
Marines reach their assigned zones.
In Naval activity, U.S. and British warships USS
Manchester (CL 83), USS Evans (DD 754), USS Sperry
(DD 697) and HMNS Evertsen (DD), initiate a siege
bombardment of enemy-held Songjin.
March 9 In the I Corps sector, 25th Division zone,
progress continues as the Division maneuvers to out-
flank Seoul.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines suspend the advance to await the Army units
on the right to move up and come abreast. The 2nd
Battalion, 1st Marines, establishes blocking positions,
while the 1st and 7th Marines dispatch patrols on the
flanks in search of the enemy.
In the X Corps sector, 7th Division zone, Company C,
17th Regiment, encounters heavy resistance near
Taemi-dong. Tenacious impenetrable fire from auto-
matic weapons stalls the advance. Captain Raymond
Harvey’s 1st Platoon is at the point. Harvey takes the
initiative to unclog the path. He drives singlehandedly
to the first machine gun nest and eliminates it and the
crew, then bolts to the next nest and destroys it. The
platoon is then able to advance, but only until the next
machine gun halts its progress. Harvey, with an appar-
ent propensity for defying the odds, again singlehand-
edly moves against the third nest and somehow gets
through a riveting blanket of fire from where he is able
to destroy it, too.
With the destruction of the third nest, Harvey again
leads the platoon forward, but he pauses after spotting
yet another nest. Captain Harvey springs toward the
obstacle and plugs a hole with grenades to destroy the
gun and the five members of its crew. By this time,
Harvey is wounded. Nonetheless, he refuses evacua-
tion and maintains command. The platoon presses for-
ward, with the remainder of the company trailing. The
obstacles are liquidated and the advance continues.
Captain Harvey becomes a recipient of the Medal of
Honor for his extraordinary actions under fire and his
steadfast leadership in the face of the enemy.
March 10 Operation RIPPER continues to push
ahead against some enemy resistance, but it is com-
pelled to frequently give ground. Large numbers of
Chinese and North Koreans are converging on the area
above the 38th Parallel. General Ridgway establishes a
command post at Yoju. In addition, he directs Eighth
Army headquarters to move from Taegu to Chongju, to
conspicuously show the advance is permanent.
In the I Corps sector, resistance against the advance
subsides. By this day, the enemy forces have rebuilt
their numbers with fresh troops from Manchuria.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines maintain patrols, but the advance remains on
hold. In conjunction, to the rear, the Marine service
moves up to the vicinity of Hoengsong.
March 12, 1951
March 11 Enemy resistance, which has often
been heavy since the opening of Operation RIPPER, di-
minishes. This permits huge gains all across the front.
In the IX Corps sector, elements of the corps begin to
arrive at the Albany Line. Other units follow during
the next two days. The attack to reach the second line
begins on 14 March.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the advance is re-
sumed after the Reconnaissance Company, reinforced
with a platoon of tanks, relieves the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines. The Communists continue to withdraw as
the Marines move forward. Resistance in front of the ad-
vance remains light, but at Hill 549, a patrol from the
3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, unexpectedly comes under
heavy fire. Tanks accompanying the patrol return fire
from a distance of about fifty yards, while Marines
gnaw forward and from close range, five enemy bunkers
are blasted with hand grenades. The patrol, which ini-
tially loses one man killed and nine wounded, with-
draws. The 11th Marines then plaster the hill to finish
destroying any remaining bunkers.
March 12 In the Eighth Army area, General Ridg-
way holds a press conference at his recently established
command post at Yoju. Ridgway proclaims that an
Eighth Army offensive to regain the 38th Parallel would
be a momentous victory and would ensure that the
Communists’ thrust had been halted, essentially ac-
complishing the goal of the U.N.
Also, U.S. planes on reconnaissance missions observe
large numbers of enemy troops as they move away from
Seoul. Although it isn’t a definite sign, it is thought by
the Americans that the Communists are preparing to
abandon the South Korean capital without a fight.
After dark, patrols from I Corps move across the Han
River and discover some enemy positions along the river
that have been abandoned. By dusk, the 1st Marine
Division, the 1st Cavalry Division and the 24th Divi-
sion are in positions along the Albany Line.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division ad-
vances and in most instances merely occupies ground,
as the enemy has retreated. Also, the recovery unit of the
2nd Division, which has been moving with the Marines
since the 7th, has retrieved the remains of more than two
hundred and fifty troops, primarily from Support Force
21. In addition, the troops recover five operable 155-
mm howitzers, thought to have been destroyed by
planes when the unit retired. The operation also recov-
ers four of six tanks that had been lost and six M-5
tractors.
General Ridgway had arrived in the Marines’ sector
during the morning and after departing, he had his
pilot fly him over the recaptured area in Massacre Val-
ley near Hoengsong where elements of the 2nd Divi-
sion (Support Force 21) had been devastated the pre-
vious February.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of four RF-80
Shooting Stars, attached to the 36th Fighter Bomber
Squadron, are intercepted by a band of 12 MiGs while
on a reconnaissance mission in the vicinity of Nansi.
March 13, 1951 668

The F-80 pilots engage the enemy, but no MiGs are General Ridgway’s intuition had been correct. The
downed, although several are damaged. During the air Communists abandoned Seoul without a fight. Ele-
duels, two of the MiGs collide and both crash. ments of the ROK 1st Division move into the capital
against no opposition and unfurl the ROK colors on
March 13 In the I Corps sector, the 25th Division’s the capitol building. This seizure is the fourth time
three attacking regiments by this time are fully deployed
Seoul has changed hands since the conflict began.
at the Pukham River (Albany Line). The 35th Regi-
In the IX Corps sector, Hongchon becomes the objec-
ment, which arrived on the 11th, established its lines on
tive of the 1st Cavalry Division and the 1st Marine
the east side of the river. The west side of the river is oc-
Division. The town is secured on the following day
cupied by the 24th Regiment. In the nearby high
and afterwards, the respective forces deploy along the
ground (Yebong Mountain mass), the 27th Regiment
Buffalo line outside the village in position to hold
establishes positions from where it can advance several
Route 29, which moves northwestwardly towards
miles to the Seoul–Chunchon Road in the vicinity of
Chunchon and Route 24 through the Hongch’on River
the outskirts of Seoul.
valley.
After dark, patrols from the 3rd Division and the
Also, the 1st Cavalry, operating on the west, moves
ROK 1st Division venture about one-half mile above the
against Hongchon, while the 1st Marine Division drives
Han River without incident. The lack of enemy contact
against it from the east through the treacherous Oum
prompts a crossing of the river the following day.
Mountains. The Marines reach a point several miles
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division con-
outside Hongchon, but after the exhausting trek, they
tinues to occupy positions against no resistance along
establish night positions rather than continue the drive.
the Albany Line. The IX Corps advance (First Phase,
Meanwhile, the 1st Cavalry had arrived at the river just
Operation RIPPER, March 7–March 13) reports enemy
west of the village by mid-afternoon. The enemy raises
casualties as 6,413 killed in action and 216 captured.
fierce resistance that continues into the 16th and be-
The IX Corps’ casualties are reported as 158 killed, 965
yond.
wounded and 35 missing in action.
In conjunction, the 24th Division, supported by the
In the X Corps sector, elements of the 2nd and 7th
ROK 6th Division, clears the western sector of the
Divisions arrive at the Albany Line.
corps’ zone effortlessly, due to the total lack of resistance.
In the ROK I Corps sector, elements of the ROK 9th
The advance continues to the lower bank of the Hong-
Division and the Capital Division hold a line that
chon River and the Chongp’yong Reservoir, still with-
stretches from the vicinity of the Huangbyong Moun-
out opposition. The attack to seize Hongchon com-
tains to the coast, in close proximity to Chumunjin.
mences on the following morning.
A large force of North Koreans, survivors of an ear-
In Air Force activity, Bomber Command initiates a
lier operation initiated by the Marines and the ROK
new tactic. Its B-26s drop a new type of spike on the
2nd Division, avoided liquidation and on this day ap-
highways frequented by enemy convoys. Tetrahedral
proach the ROK line. The division had been trapped
tacks are designed especially for this type of mission
in the Pohang-dong–Andong–Yongdok region since
and they perform much better that what had previously
February, but it managed to move through the Taebaek
been used, roofing nails.
Mountains and reach the Chungbong Mountains. The
In Naval activity, enemy positions and other targets,
ROK troops, aware of the threat to their rear, funnel two
Chaho, Kyojo Wan, Songjin and Wonsan, are bom-
regiments of the ROK 9th Division and a contingent of
barded by Fast Carrier Task Forces (TF 77) from this
troops from the Capital Division to engage and destroy
day until 8 March. The USS Missouri (BB 63) partic-
the remnant force of about two thousand men. The
ipates and receives credit for the destruction of fifteen
opposing sides skirmish this day.
rail and highway bridges.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the Albany line is reached
and some of the units are able to move beyond it.
March 15 By this date, the offensive has ac-
March 14 Operation RIPPER initiates Phase Two. counted for more than 7,100 enemy dead; however,
Eighth Army drives towards the second line, Buffalo. the Chinese and North Koreans continue to withdraw,
In the I Corps sector, on the west side of the Pukham making it difficult to greatly increase the numbers and
River, the 25th Division advances towards a point thoroughly liquidate the Communists forces.
slightly less than five miles above the Seoul–Chunchon In other activity, the 1st Marine Air Wing by this
Road. During midday, small contingents of the U.S. time is authorized to fly forty sorties per day in close-
3rd Division and the ROK 1st Division bolt across the support missions for the 1st Marine Division. Also,
Han River, anticipating resistance at a prominent obsta- Marine Squadron VMF(N)-542 is at about this time
cle, Hill 348 several miles south of the capital; however, heading back to the Marine base, El Toro, California,
the positions had been abandoned by the enemy. Other to be transformed into an all-weather jet (F3D)
patrols also advance. One unit moves to the squadron. Other changes include VMF(N)-312 reliev-
Seoul–Chunchon Road without incident, while another ing VMF-212 on the USS Bataan. Meanwhile, VMF-
advanced to the city’s southeastern fringes expecting re- 212 moves to K-3 at Pohang.
sistance from Hill 175, a heavily defended part of South General Ridgway, having Seoul back in the hands of
Mountain, but it, too, had been abandoned. the UN, decides to exploit the Communist retreat by
 669
expanding the offensive and moving farther north to
the Imjin River. The I Corps plays a larger part in this
operation, which becomes known as Operation
COURAGEOUS in place of Operations KILLER and RIP-
PER.
In the I Corps sector, Seoul is searched for enemy rem-
nants, but only some North Koreans who apparently
deserted were discovered. Outside the city, patrols scour
the area north of the capital and encounter no opposi-
A patrol advances through Hongch’on, seized without opposition by the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, on
15 March.
March 15, 1951
tion until reaching a point about five miles out. North
of the capital, it is discovered by aerial observance that
the enemy had established defensive positions. Troop
concentrations are observed along the route between
Seoul and Uijongbu. The Belgian Battalion, attached
to the U.S. 3rd Division after its arrival during the lat-
ter part of January, is also unsuccessful during its search
for the enemy troops in its sector, along the eastern
fringes of the capital.
March 16, 1951
Ridgway orders the 3rd Division to move from the
south bank of the Han River to positions north of
Seoul, along the Seoul–Uijongbu Road, along the Lin-
coln Line (east sector) next to the 25th Division’s po-
sitions. The ROK 3rd Division is also ordered to move
across the Han River and deploy along the Seoul–Mun-
san Road along the Lincoln Line (west sector) next to
the 3rd Division. The British Brigade is to move from
reserve to Yongdungp’o and be prepared to bolster the
Lincoln Line. The movement is initiated on 16 March.
In the IX Corps sector, the 24th Division, operating
in the extreme left section of the sector and still bolstered
by the ROK 6th Division, reaches the lower bank of
the Chongp’yong Reservoir. Nearby, the ROK troops
deploy in the high ground above the Hongchon River.
As the advance continues, the 15th, 24th and 27th Reg-
iments of the 25th Division, operating on the corps’
right, reach the Seoul–Chunchon Road by about dusk.
Its attached Turkish Brigade advances to a point on the
extreme right of the zone to positions slightly less than
three miles above the road. Meanwhile, the Turks de-
ploy there near the 24th Division.
In other activity, the Marines hit stiff resistance at a
ridge slightly east of Hongchon. While the Marines
eradicate the opposition, a contingent, the 1st Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, seizes the town at about 1200 with-
out incident. The 1st Battalion commander, Major
Webb D. Sawyer, dispatches a patrol through the de-
molished village in search of remnant Chinese forces,
but none are found. The town was unoccupied, how-
ever. Bombs dropped earlier by planes of the Far East
Air Force were set to detonate when touched. As the
patrol moves back, one jeep is damaged when it deto-
nates a “Butterfly” bomb. Later, while specialists (Com-
pany D, 1st Engineer Battalion) work to eliminate the
bombs, the battalion moves through and deploys in the
heights just northeast of the village. The bomb-clear-
ing operation lasts for three days.
The 1st Cavalry Division remains at the Hongchon
River until the remainder of the Marine force moves
beyond the opposition on the ridge to join it and reini-
tiate the advance. Later, General Milburn (I Corps) is
directed by General Ridgway to deploy in the high
ground just outside the city. Milburn chooses the
heights about two miles west of the capital that stretch
across the ridge containing Hill 348. Lincoln Line, links
with the Buffalo Line in the sector held by the 25th
Division. A section of the line is to be held by the 3rd
Division; however, the larger part is held by the ROK
1st Division, with the South Koreans receiving respon-
sibility for Seoul and the U.S. holding the lesser por-
tion east of Seoul.
General Ridgway also instructs Milburn to not for-
tify with full strength; rather, to deploy one battalion,
bolstered by some tanks. The South Koreans are in-
structed to deploy one regiment. Instructions are also
delivered that insist that no attack be initiated. Ridg-
way explains that the present task is to shadow the
enemy retreat.
In other activity, the enemy raises fierce resistance
670
east of Hongchon against the Marines. Following day-
long fighting, the enemy abandons its positions after
dark.
In the X Corps sector, the advance towards the
Idaho Line continues. This day, the North Koreans
raise resistance, but it is the sole incident during
the advance. By the following day, all corps units reach
the objective. The 38th Regiment, 2nd Division, had
been opposed by North Koreans who held a pass (14th-
15th), but the resistance is overrun. The Communists
lose 345 killed (counted) and an estimated 800 addi-
tional casualties had been inflicted (killed and
wounded). The 38th Regiment sustains 12 killed and
156 wounded.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of planes executes
an armed reconnaissance mission in North Korea. Dur-
ing the operation, which had been initiated in support
of ground forces, one element of the force, led by Lieu-
tenant Clarence V. Slack, Jr., moves against gun posi-
tions in the Sunan rail yards. Slack’s low level drive
draws fire and the remaining planes are able to carry
out the raid. However, Slack’s plane is hit and it crashes.
In Naval activity, Task Element of TG 95.2 com-
mences a bombardment of enemy positions in the
vicinity of Wonsan and inflicts heavy casualties, esti-
mated at 6,000 to 7,000 troops.
In other naval activity, the destroyer USS Lind (DD
703) pounds enemy positions at Singi, delivering dev-
astating effects there also. Casualties at Singi are esti-
mated at about 2,000.
March 16 In the I Corps sector, elements of the
U.S. 3rd Division and the ROK 1st Division, sup-
ported by the artillery, cross the Han River against no
opposition. The vanguard (2nd Battalion, 65th Regi-
ment) is transported across in boats and DUKWs. As
the troops proceed to their positions on the Lincoln
Line, they encounter mines and booby traps, but no
enemy troops impede their movement. Most of the
civilian population in Seoul had departed back in Jan-
uary, when the city was evacuated, but about 200,000
still remained under the Communists domination. Un-
like the celebrated takeover during the previous Septem-
ber, following the invasion at Inchon, the city is re-
taken with no celebration.
In the IX Corps sector, the Marines prepare to elimi-
nate the obstacles east of Hongchon that have impeded
their progress. The enemy raises stiff resistance that
lasts for the next two days. In the meantime, the 1st
Marines encounter heavy resistance north of Hong-
chon. At 1230, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, drive
against Hill 428, but at dusk, despite air strikes by
VMF-214, the Chinese still control the hill and con-
tinue to fire from concealed mortar positions. After
dark, the Chinese abandon the hill.
Meanwhile, the 7th Marines attack toward Hill 399.
The 1st Battalion methodically moves from bunker to
bunker eliminating the defenders by lobbing hand
grenades into the entrenchments. Also, in the corps’
western sector, the ROK 6th Division and the U.S.
 671
24th Division encounter nominal resistance near the
Hongchon River and the Chongp’yong Reservoir.
In the 1st Cavalry area west of Hongchon, the enemy
continues to hold and offer furious resistance. Never-
theless, the corps receives orders to advance. The ROK
6th Division is ordered to move to positions close to the
1st Cavalry to positions, which causes the Chinese to
become concerned about their flank. The 1st Cavalry
is directed to drive from the river to the Buster Line to
place it near the 24th Division along the Buffalo Line.
The new position stands about five miles distant. At
the conclusion of the advance, the cavalry is aligned to
the Marines who hold on the Buffalo Line, the right
side of the corps’ sector. The 24th Division is ordered
to advance and cross the Pukham River on the left side.
In Naval activity, Far East Air Forces launches a
record setting number of sorties. The planes fly 1,123
sorties in support of Operation RIPPER, a new high for
a single day.
In Naval activity, the East Coast Blockading and Pa-
trol Task Group (TG 94.2) comes under fire by enemy
shore batteries at Wonsan.
The citizens of Seoul fill the streets on 17 March, two days after the capital is regained from the Com-
munists.
March 17, 1951
March 17 During the offensive (Operation RIP-
PER), General MacArthur arrives in Korea from Japan.
He is met by General Ridgway at Suwon and from there
they both fly to Wonju in the 1st Marine Division sec-
tor. MacArthur and Generals Ridgway and O.P. Smith,
riding in a jeep, visit various units on the front.
In the IX Corps sector, enemy resistance still impedes
the 1st Cavalry Division in the region near the Hong-
chon River. The enemy defends strongly, but the Chi-
nese also mount counterattacks. All units advance, but
only the cavalry encounters heavy resistance. The ROK
forces and the Marines driving on the left hit only spo-
radic opposition.
In the 1st Marine Division sector, the 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, continues to mop up at Hill 399, which had
fallen after a tough fight on the previous day.
In other activity, MacArthur, while in Korea this day,
arrives at the command post of the 7th Marines. Also, the
1st Marine Division receives orders to mount an attack
toward Line Buffalo. The attack force is to be composed
of the 5th Marines after the unit passes through the po-
sitions of the 7th Marines and the 1st Marines.
March 17, 1951 672

Elements of the 187th Airborne Regiment are in the air aboard C-119 Flying Boxcars, while other planes
continue to load paratroopers.

In the X Corps sector, by this day, all Corps units have
advanced to the Idaho line.
In the ROK III Corps sector, like the X Corps, all units
have advanced to the Idaho line.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of planes from the
36th Fighter Bomber Squadron is intercepted by MiGs
while on patrol in the vicinity of Sunchon. No planes
are shot down by either side; however, a MiG collides
with an F-80 piloted by 1st Lieutenant Howard J.
Landry. Lieutenant Landry is killed and the pilot of
 673
The 187th Airborne, accustomed to rugged duty, jumps out of C-119s over nasty terrain.
the MiG also dies. Landry receives credit for the
downed Communist MiG, posthumously.
No other planes of Fifth Air Force are lost during
the month of March. It is thought the Russians are
changing units, which could account for the bad
marksmanship of the pilots. The Russians do not
change pilots individually; rather they exchange entire
units. The new more inexperienced contingents are the
No. 303 and the No. 324 Fighter Air Divisions.
March 18 General Ridgway maintains a close eye
on the field operations during Operation RIPPER. After
analyzing the accumulation of facts collected by intel-
ligence, air observation and information from captives,
Ridgway directs the I, IX and X Corps to dispatch re-
connaissance patrols into the region between the
Hwach’on Reservoir and the east coast.
In the IX Corps sector, the entire corps advances. The
24th Division, which had crossed the Han, joins with
the ROK 6th Division, the 1st Cavalry Division and the
1st Marine Division. The momentum swells, but the
Chinese withdraw further. After assessing the situa-
tion, General Ridgway orders the IX Corps to maintain
the attack and seize Chunchon.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 5th and 1st
Marines advance against only sporadic resistance and
make good progress during the trek to the Buffalo Line.
March 19, 1951
March 19 In the IX Corps sector, the ongoing ad-
vance continues to make excellent progress and by over-
whelming scant rear-guard actions, the units reach the
Buster-Buffalo Line towards the latter part of the day.
Meanwhile, the Chinese continue to pull back rather
than raise concentrated resistance. The largest prize of
the day falls to the ROK 6th Division. A contingent of
the 2nd Battalion, 2nd Regiment, acting as the spear-
head, surprises a battalion-sized unit just above the
Hongchon River. The Chinese battalion sustains 232
killed after the ROKs launch a three-pronged attack.
The Chinese also lose much equipment; however, only
two of the enemy force are captured.
In conjunction with General Ridgway’s orders of the
previous day, General Hoge directs his corps to advance
to the next line, the Cairo Line. The drive will place the
1st Cavalry Division within striking distance of the ob-
jective, Chunchon.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the attack continues
against minimum resistance, mostly some sniper fire
and mortars, except in the path of the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines. As the 2nd Battalion advances, enemy fire
originating on ridges west of Hill 330 compels Fox
Company to halt. While the battalion pauses to prepare
strategy to eliminate the fire, a tank platoon (Baker
Company, 1st Tank Battalion) moves forward and di-
rects their fire effectively. The Marines, using the tanks’
March 19, 1951 674

The 5th Regiment, 24th Division, after fording the Honogch’on River on 19 March, climbs another
enemy-held hill.

90-mm shells as a diversion, scurry along the ridgeline
and take out the bunkers with grenades so quickly that
the Communists had not yet recovered from the tank
fire. The Marines sustain no casualties. Afterward, they
establish night positions on Hill 330.
In the 1st Cavalry zone, General Ridgway inserts the
187th Airborne RCT into the attack. The paratroopers
are directed to prepare to drop north of Chunchon on 22
March to ambush the Communists as they attempt to es-
cape the advancing 5th and 8th Cavalry Regiments.
 675
However, when the ground troops arrive at Chunchon,
they find it abandoned. Ridgway cancels the airdrop,
but the paratroopers are committed to bolster the I
Corps on 23 March.
In Air Force activity, a flight of B-29s, attached to
the 343rd Bombardment Squadron, 98th Bombard-
ment Wing (M), is intercepted by MiGs in the vicin-
ity of Sonchin. One of the attacking MiG-15s is
downed by a tailgunner, Sergeant William H. Finnegan.
In Naval activity, the carriers of Fast Carrier Task Force
(CTF 77) are informed that the mission of rail interdic-
tion has successfully been completed. Intelligence con-
cludes that the enemy trains were severely hampered
by the operation and capable of only using small sec-
tions of the rails. By 14 March, traffic along the rails on
the northeast coast of Korea is essentially terminated,
due to the massive destruction inflicted upon the
bridges.
March 20 Eighth Army commences its advance
from the Buffalo Line to the Cairo Line.
In the IX Corps sector, the advance continues. Gen-
eral Ridgway prepares to intensify the offensive and at-
tempt to isolate and destroy the NK I Corps, known to
be in the vicinity of Uijingbu in front of the Imjin
River. Ridgway determines that if he uses the ground
forces and bolsters an advance with paratroopers, the
enemy could be trapped at Munsan-ni when it retires
along Route 1 to cross the Imjin. The operation in con-
junction with the paratroopers is set to commence on
the 22nd.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Korean Ma-
rine Regiment is reattached to the 1st Marine Division.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces receives fif-
teen new jet planes, F-94Bs. The aircraft are all-weather
jet fighters. The planes will be added as escorts for the
B-29 Superfortress night raids.
March 21 In the I Corps sector, the Corps prepares
to move toward the Cairo Line, which General Ridg-
way stretched to the Han River at Haengju. Line Cairo
had been drawn above the Lincoln Line at points vary-
ing between five to ten miles distant. The I Corps is
scheduled to be at the line by the following day to co-
incide with a planned airdrop of the 187th Airborne
RCT on the 22nd at Munsan-ni. En route, the corps
encounters some resistance from the Chinese east of
Uijongbu and to the west of the village, some North
Korean resistance is raised.
The operation is designed to reach two other lines,
Aspen and Benton, but the advance is contingent upon
the orders of Ridgway, which include a full-scale move
by the entire corps to the Benton Line at the 38th Par-
allel.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Cavalry Division ar-
rives at the Cairo Line without having encountered
opposition. The progress and lack of enemy forces
prompts General Ridgway to cancel a planned airdrop
by the 187th Airborne RCT and its attached 2nd and
4th Ranger Companies, which was scheduled for the
22nd. A reconnaissance task force slides into Chun-
March 23, 1951
chon at 1330 and finds itself in control of the aban-
doned town. The first encounter with the enemy occurs
later at a point about ten miles southeast of the town.
The small enemy contingents discovered there raise no
opposition; rather the troops scatter from the area at
Route 29 and vanish in the Soyang River valley. The
town remains under U.S. control. With this seizure,
Operation RIPPER has achieved its objectives with re-
gard to real estate, but the purpose is also to destroy as
much of the enemy as possible. By this time, it becomes
evident that the Chinese are continuing to withdraw,
but in addition, they are regrouping for what is an ex-
pected attack.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Marines and
the 5th Marines press forward on the right and left re-
spectively, with the Korean Marines moving up the cen-
ter. The enemy raises fierce resistance against the Ko-
rean Marines as they advance in an area that lacks roads.
Airdrops keep the force supplied, and it receives out-
standing artillery support, but still, it is a hard-fought
advance that continues until the morning of the 24th.
March 22 At Taegu, during the middle of the day,
General Ridgway authorizes the airdrop of the 187th
Airborne RCT at Munsan-ni. It is scheduled for 0900
on the 23rd, to be coordinated with an armored task
force from Seoul that is to hook up with the paratroop-
ers near Munsan-ni. The task force includes 6th
Medium Tank Battalion (24th Division, IX Corps),
the 2nd Battalion, 7th Infantry (3rd Division, I Corps),
elements of the 58th Armored Field Artillery Battalion
(3rd Division) and one battery of the 999th Armored
Field Artillery Battalion. In addition, the task force in-
cludes a pair of British Churchill tanks, both capable
of laying down a bridge.
In the I Corps sector, the corps’ advance to the Cairo
Line begins at 0800. By day’s end, despite only nomi-
nal opposition along the march, only the ROK 1st Di-
vision moving along Route 1 reaches the line. It arrives
there about noon, while the 3rd Division, moving along
Route 3, and the 25th Division, to its right, establish
night positions short of the objective.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st and 5th
Marines encounter only light resistance, primarily by
North Koreans who apparently are acting as rear guard
for the Chinese 39th and 66th Armies, which continue
to retreat ahead of the Marine attacks.
In related activity, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment
presses ahead against tenacious resistance at Hill 975.
March 23 Eighth Army initiates a major offensive
designed to advance to positions at the Imjin River.
Washington had been sending mixed signals regarding
a re-crossing of the 38th Parallel, including private re-
ports not to cross due to diplomatic talks and public
statements that the choice is up to MacArthur.
MacArthur had confined movements, but on this day,
he informs Ridgway to disregard his recent orders and
to attack in force beyond the 38th Parallel.
Also, Task Force Growdon, an armored contingent,
departs Seoul en route to bolster the 187th Airborne
March 23, 1951
RCT (Colonel Frank S. Bowen), which is flown from
Taegu aboard 135 planes at 0730 and dropped over
Munsan-ni as part of Operation COURAGEOUS, de-
signed to eliminate the NK I Corps and reach the 38th
Parallel. The massive formation is supported by Fifth
Air Force aircraft, which attack enemy positions while
the planes transporting the paratroopers, protected by
Mustangs (P-51s), move above the Yellow Sea to arrive
from the west at Munsan.
In other activity, General Ridgway modifies the Ben-
ton Line, stretching it to reach Chunchon, where the
1st Cavalry occupies a patrol base, and from there to the
IX Corps’ right, where the ground is held by the 1st
Marine Division. The extension links the Benton Line
with the Cairo Line. Ridgway has blueprinted the ad-
vance to include bringing I Corps from the Lincoln
Line at Seoul to the Imjin River, which would stretch
Eighth Army’s line slightly less than ten miles from the
38th Parallel, from Munsan to Chunchon (west to
east).
In the I Corps sector, TF Growdon, commanded by
Lt. Colonel John S. Growdon, passes through the ROK
1st Division along Route 1 as it moves to Munsan-ni.
The armor is followed by the ROK force that is to re-
lieve the paratroopers. After passing through and driv-
ing up the highway, the armor is barred from crossing
a damaged bridge at the Changnung River. While seek-
ing a nearby crossing of the shallow river, a tank in the
A vanguard of the 24th Division advances across an enemy-built footbridge northwest of Ch’ongp’yong
on 23 March.
676
column strikes a mine. No enemy resistance arises, but
more mines there and farther along the route slow the
column to a crawl.
Meanwhile, at 0900, on schedule, the paratroopers
of Operation TOMAHAWK drop at Munsan-ni, while
the armor support remains about fifteen miles away.
Other unexpected problems also develop; one of the
planes transporting the paratroopers is compelled to
return to base due to engine failure. The plane that re-
turned to Taegu is carrying Colonel Arthur (Harry)
Wilson, the commanding officer of the 1st Battalion.
Nevertheless, the bulk of the force, transported by more
than 100 twin-tailed Flying Boxcars, drops as planned
slightly northeast of the town, but in the confusion,
the elements of the 1st Battalion are inadvertently
dropped in the identical zone used by the 3rd Battal-
ion (Delbert E. Munson) and the 4th Ranger Com-
pany, instead of a point southeast of the town. The mis-
calculation causes some problems, as no troops are at the
south drop zone. Later, when the remainder of the force
(1st Battalion) arrives, it drops in its proper zone, but
lacks full strength and the small force for a while remains
isolated.
The Communists bring Wilson’s contingent under
fire from their positions in the heights; however, Wil-
son directs his troops to safer positions. The Commu-
nists remain in the high ground and make no move
against the Wilson’s troops. Company B, 1st Battalion,
 677 March 23, 1951

Elements of the 187th Airborne Regimental Combat Team in the high ground east of Munsan-ni are en
route to intercept the enemy forces to the front of the 3rd Division.

moves from the north drop zone to the south zone to
bolster the force under Wilson and deter the North Ko-
reans from launching an attack. In the meantime, re-
sistance against the paratroopers remains nominal and
Munsan-ni is seized. Afterward, a contingent leaves for
the southeast drop zone to rescue troops from heavy
enemy fire originating on Hill 216.
By 1700, the rescue has succeeded and the entire
force is at Munsan-ni. The operation cost the force
nineteen casualties from battle and another eighty-four
from accidental injuries during the jump. The enemy
sustains 136 killed and 149 captured. The bulk of the
NK I Corps at Munsan-ni had retired prior to the ar-
rival of the airborne troops. It was determined that the
enemy force encountered was the NK 36th Regiment,
19th Division, composed of about three hundred to
five hundred troops. The armored task force vanguard
arrives to join the paratroopers at 1830.
In other activity, the U.S. 3rd and 25th Divisions
continue to advance. The 3rd Division, under General
Robert H. Soule, encounters resistance; however, it ar-
rives at Uijongbu and takes it effortlessly at 0900. The
initial unit to enter is TF Hawkins, composed of ele-
ments of the 64th Tank Battalion and contingents of the
15th and 65th Infantry Regiments.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the units continue to
come up on the Cairo Line, but the center of the ad-
vance handled by the Korean Marines’ 2nd and 3rd
Battalions continue to be blocked at Hill 975.
In Air Force activity, in addition to the incidents listed
earlier on this same date, helicopters evacuate sixty-
eight paratroopers who were injured during the jump.
March 24, 1951
A Marine Pershing Tank (M26) at a tight spot on a mountain road as the 1st Marine Division advances
north and east of Ch’unch’on.
Also, one of the C-119s that transported the paratroop-
ers catches fire en route back to its base and crashes. It
is thought the plane might have been hit by bullets.
In other activity, forty-five F-86 jets escort a contin-
gent of twenty-two B-29s on a bombing mission to de-
stroy two bridges in North Korea. The B-29s, attached
to the 19th and 307th Bomber Groups, sustain no losses.
March 24 General MacArthur arrives in Korea
from Japan to confer with General Ridgway. Before de-
678
parting for the meeting, MacArthur issues a statement
indicating that he is willing to hold a conference with
the Communists to initiate a cease-fire. The statement
includes MacArthur’s opinion that the Chinese were
not going to prevail in Korea. His statement causes
consternation in Washington. President Truman, await-
ing information on the ongoing operation, had pre-
pared a speech, timed to the U.S. drive to the 38th Par-
allel. The Communists accept MacArthur’s statement
with disdain. MacArthur’s position pushes him farther
 679
Elements of the 5th Regiment, 24th Division, operating on the right of the 25th Division during an Eighth
Army offensive, captures enemy troops on 24 March.
from President Truman. Word arrives from the Joint
Chiefs of Staff for MacArthur to report to them if he
receives a response from the Chinese, but none is actu-
ally anticipated. In the meantime, Truman moves to-
ward replacing MacArthur.
General Ridgway extends the Cairo Line from its
end in the right of the IX Corps sector, held by the 1st
Marine Division, to the east coast at Chosan-ni.
In the I Corps sector, the bulk of the armored task
force under Lt. Colonel Growdon arrives at the posi-
tions of the paratroopers (187th Airborne RCT) near
Munsan-ni by 0700 on the following day. The column
had been impeded by mines along the route. Four tanks
sustain damage from the mines and another two are
damaged by enemy artillery fire on the last leg of the
journey. Also, the ROK 1st Division arrives at Munsan-
ni to relieve the airborne troops.
At Munsan-ni, General Frank S. Bowen, Jr., com-
manding officer, 187th Airborne, takes command of
TF Growdon. The armor is directed to run patrols
along the Imjin River to reconnoiter ferry crossings and
to search along Route 2Y, a road that leads to Sinch’on.
The mission succeeds in seizing twenty-two enemy
troops. Another six are reported killed. The U.S. sus-
tains no casualties; however, one tank is scuttled after
it snags in a stream, unable to cross.
In related activity, another contingent, TF Boone,
ROK 1st Division, begins to arrive at Munsan-ni prior
to noon. Company C, 64th Tank Battalion (on loan
to the ROK 1st Division from the U.S. 3rd Division),
is the first unit to arrive. Subsequently, the ROK Divi-
sion under General Paik relieves the paratroopers. The
South Koreans assume command from General Bowen
at 1700 and deploy around the town. TF Boone estab-
March 24, 1951
lishes positions slightly above the town, while the re-
mainder of the division deploys below Munsan-ni, near
Route 1, leading northeastwardly to nearby Pobwon-ni,
slightly more than five miles from Munsan-ni.
Despite the success of taking the objective, the NK
I Corps still evades confrontation and retires further.
In addition, the Chinese 26th Army remains en-
trenched, prepared to raise strong resistance to the I
Corps’ 3rd and 25th Divisions. The 25th Division,
operating on the corps’ right since the previous day,
has also encountered large numbers of land mines that
have impeded progress. Nonetheless, by dusk, the 25th
Division advances to the vicinity of Uijongbu, held by
the 3rd Division, which is encountering fierce resist-
ance.
In the 3rd Division sector, the Chinese had fortified
their positions at two separate hills. The division jumps
off unaware of the firepower on Hill 337 northeast of
the village and Hill 468 just northwest of it. The resist-
ance remains tenacious throughout the day; however,
Hill 337 is secured by the 15th Infantry Regiment. The
enemy maintains control of Hill 468, despite repeated
efforts by the 65th Infantry to evict them.
Efforts are undertaken by General Bowen to commit
the 187th Airborne in an eastward attack to strike the
Chinese that threaten the 3rd Division and catch them
between his attacking force and the advancing 3rd Di-
vision. The column encounters natural obstacles. At
1800, only a small unit of tanks is able to move out.
The remainder of the column’s vehicles hold up for fuel.
Later, en route, the weather interferes. Some tanks are
held up by landslides and then rain further impedes the
mission. The tanks return to Munsan-ni; however the
remainder of the force, excluding the 2nd Battalion, 7th
March 25, 1951
Infantry, which had earlier returned to the 3rd Division.
The task force under General Bowen arrives at Sinch’on
on the following morning.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Korean Marine Regi-
ment overcomes the resistance at Hill 975 and after-
wards forms along the Cairo Line. Also, the 24th Di-
vision continues to advance to the right of the 25th
Division (I Corps) en route to the 38th Parallel.
In Air Force activity, a new and larger helicopter, the
H-19, is introduced to the Korean War. The H-19 is
much more powerful than the H-5 now used to trans-
port the wounded, and it has a greater range of opera-
tions.
In other activity, C-46s and C-119s pass over Munsan-
ni and drop large quantities of supplies and ammuni-
tion. The planes return on the 26th and 27th to drop
more supplies to the troops on the ground. The amount
dropped during the three deliveries totals 264 tons.
March 25 General of the Army Douglas
MacArthur authorizes the U.N. forces in Korea to cross
the 38th Parallel, if it becomes necessary for tactical
purposes.
In the I Corps sector, the 187th Airborne RCT arrives
at Sinch’on at 0600 and soon the attack is reinitiated.
The objective, Hill 228 along the west side of Route
33, is heavily defended by the Chinese. In the mean-
time, the 3rd Division and the 25th Division reinitiate
the advance, but the enemy raises only nominal resist-
ance against both. During the afternoon, armor from
the 3rd Division arrives to bolster the attack of the air-
borne, but still, the resistance repels the assaults.
March 26 In the I Corps sector, the Chinese con-
tinue to hold Hill 228 against attempts by the 187th
Airborne RCT. Later in the day, tanks from the 3rd Di-
vision arrive to bolster the assault, but still the Com-
munists do not yield. In conjunction, during the at-
tack to gain the hill, the U.S. armor is able to destroy
an enemy T34 tank. It is the first T34 destroyed since
General Ridgway assumed command of Eighth Army.
In other activity, the 3rd and 25th Divisions con-
tinue to advance against sporadic light resistance.
In the IX Corps sector, late in the day orders arrive in-
structing the corps to continue to advance to the Ben-
ton Line.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, orders arrive to move
to a new Cairo Line, but it actually an extension of the
present line to the boundary between the IX and X
Corps.
In the X Corps sector, the identical order arrives and
the X Corps also moves to the Benton Line. The moves
of the IX and X Corps remain unopposed; the Chinese
have pulled back without contesting the advances.
March 27 While Operation RIPPER continues,
General Ridgway convenes a meeting at Yoju with I,
IX and X Corps commanders and the commanding of-
ficers of the respective divisions. The conference is to
map out further strategy with regard to the options fac-
ing Eighth Army.
680
Word is circling that in addition to the Chinese and
North Koreans posted above the 38th Parallel, the Rus-
sians are also close to entering the conflict against the
U.N. force, primarily composed of U.S. fighting troops.
In the I Corps sector, following fierce fighting that
began on the 25th, the 187th Airborne RCT seizes con-
trol of Hill 228 along Route 33. For the second day in
a row, the 3rd and 25th Divisions encounter only slight
resistance. Following the capture of Hill 228 at 0900,
the paratroopers prepare to attack to clear the high
ground along Route 33. Also, later in the day, elements
of the 3rd Division arrive to join the 187th Airborne
RCT at its position along Route 33. The plan to trap
the enemy between the two forces fails to materialize.
Two regiments, the 15th and 65th, arrive, but en route,
no enemy forces are detected.
In related activity, the 25th Division continues to
advance and it, too, encounters only slight sporadic re-
sistance.
In the IX Corps sector, 24th Division zone, the Com-
monwealth Brigade (Brigadier B.A. Burke) is brought
out of reserve to relieve the 19th Regiment (Colonel
Peter Garland) and assume responsibility for the cen-
ter of the line. Burke had recently replaced Basil Coad
as commander of the British Brigade.
In Naval activity, the USS Boxer (CV 21) relieves the
USS Valley Forge (CV 45). Two vessels, the Glendale
(PF 36) and the Carmick (DMS 33) collide near
Songjin during a fog.
March 28 In the I Corps sector, the 187th Air-
borne RCT reinitiates the attack along Route 33 and
again bumps into stiff resistance from strongpoints in
the heights along the east side of the highway. Nonethe-
less, by dusk, the paratroopers secure the ground. In
the meantime, the 3rd and 25th Divisions advance
against nominal resistance and by the latter part of the
day, both divisions arrive at the Aspen line.
While elements of the 3rd Division and the 187th
Airborne RCT maneuver to entrap the Communists, the
bulk of the enemy in the area is able to slip away and
safely cross the Imjin River to continue the northward
trek. The 24th and 35th Regiments (25th Division)
continue the drive, but the former encounters heavy
resistance that halts its progress. By the following day,
the 27th Regiment bolsters the 24th Regiment. The
combined strength plows through the Communist re-
sistance.
In related activity, the 187th Airborne Regiment re-
verts to reserve. It moves to Taegu.
In Naval activity, Vice Admiral H.M. Martin suc-
ceeds Vice Admiral A.D. Struble as commanding offi-
cer, Seventh Fleet. Also, activity gets underway to re-
open the port of Inchon.
March 29 I, IX and X Corps continue to advance
to their final respective positions to bring Operation
RIPPER to a conclusion. No major enemy resistance is
encountered. The NK I Corps remains elusive while it
withdraws to positions beyond the Yesong River. In re-
lated activity, the 187th Airborne RCT departs from
 681
the line and returns to Taegu. Also, General Ridgway
issues a plan for the next phase, Operation RUGGED.
In the X Corps area, elements of the corps relieve the
1st Marines. In conjunction, the 7th Marines are to re-
vert to reserve in the vicinity of Hongchon and become
attached to the 1st Cavalry Division, which is prepar-
ing to attack beyond Ch’ongch’on.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches B-
29s, escorted by fighter planes, on another mission to
destroy bridges at the Yalu River. The fading of winter
and the thawing of the river once again make the
bridges a threat to the UN forces. During the winter
months, fighters and light bombers of Fifth Air Force
concentrated on destroying the bridges at the Yalu, but
their efforts failed to knock out the spans.
March 30 Eighth Army components close on the
final phase line, which has become the Benton-Cairo
Line. Eighth Army by the following day completes the
operation and achieves its goals with regard to terri-
tory. The line extends to the 38th Parallel.
In the I Corps sector, 25th Division zone, the 27th
Regiment relieves the 24th Regiment and assumes re-
sponsibility for the left part of the sector. Also, the 35th
Regiment encounters fierce resistance at Chongsong
and the supporting artillery is unable to destroy the
deep bunkers. Nevertheless, the infantry plods forward
and methodically eliminates the obstacles one by one.
In Air Force activity, a band of MiGs intercepts a
bombing mission over Sinuiju. During the attack,
Technical Sergeant Charles W. Summers, a tailgunner
aboard one of the B-29s (28th Bombardment
Squadron, 19th Bombardment Group [M]), places a
diving MiG in his sights and fires more than 300 shells
at it. The MiG takes hits, including some into its air in-
take, causing it to explode in mid-air. Also, Sergeant
Norman S. Greene, aboard another of the B-29s, points
his sights to an attacking plane just prior to the actual
release of the bomb load on the target. Greene, man-
ning the plane’s gun on the left, begins to fire as the
MiG attacks from at 8 o’clock. Greene fires about fifty
shots at the MiG before it explodes in mid-air.
March 31 The U.S. crosses the 38th Parallel for
the second time. Operation RIPPER is complete. The
UN forces are on the Idaho Line and all geographical
objectives have been gained. The offensive does not
eliminate as many enemy troops as expected, because the
Communists continue to withdraw rather than engage
in a major confrontation. Nonetheless, the advance,
which gained a minimum of twenty-five miles, has
brought the U.S. forces back to the 38th Parallel. The
operation also regained the South Korean capital.
From 7 March until this day, Eighth Army reports
that 4,800 Chinese and North Koreans had been cap-
tured. In addition, it is reported that enemy casualties
had been extremely high. Elements of the 5th Regi-
ment (24th Division), formed as an infantry-armor
contingent, encounter opposition and a brisk firefight
ensues. The Communists sustain more than 30 killed
during the confrontation. Soon after, Colonel Throck-
April 1, 1951
morton becomes an aide to General Collins. Colonel
Arthur (Harry) Wilson of the 187th Airborne RCT re-
places him as commander of the 5th Infantry Regi-
ment.
In Air Force activity, during a mission of the 334th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, a Canadian pilot, Flight
Lt. J.A.O. Levesque, Royal Canadian Air Force, in
an F-86, downs a MiG-15. It is the first kill of a MiG
by an F-86 since the previous year. The MiG-15s
are lighter, able to climb higher and carry heavier
ammunition. The Sabres hold 50-caliber machine
guns, while the MiGs have two 23-mm cannon and
one 37-mm cannon. The Sabre’s guns fire much more
quickly, as opposed to the slower weapons on the MiGs.
The difference is usually the skill of the pilot that gives
the U.S. the advantage. One flaw of the MiG is that at
high speeds, the pilots are prone to lose control of
the aircraft and another is that at high altitudes, a MiG
is susceptible to uncontrollable spins. The Sabres,
however, with their adjustable stabilizers, are much
more steady. Yet the Sabres are weighed down by a slow
climb rate and insufficient acceleration in speed during
level flights.
In other activity, the a contingent of the 3rd ARS
(Air Rescue Squadron) flying an H-19 helicopter, pen-
etrates enemy lines and picks up about eighteen U.N.
troops. This is the initial time the H-19 is committed
to a special operations mission.
In yet other activity, the 3rd Air Division grounds its
C-119s for repairs and maintenance. While the C-119s
are grounded, the workload will be carried by C-47s.
By the end of April, the C-119s are back in action.
— In Japan: General MacArthur informs the Joints
Chiefs of Staff that about 475,000 enemy troops are
Korea, including about 274,000 Chinese; however, it
is also estimated that about 478,000 enemy troops are
stationed in Manchuria in reserve. The figures raise
extra alarms in Washington, particularly because intel-
ligence has deduced that the Communist air forces have
also greatly increased. Another concern is that the So-
viet Union, already clandestinely involved, may be con-
sidering entering the war openly. In Washington, ten-
tative plans are laid for a withdrawal from Korea to
Japan if the Russians enter the war.
April 1-21 1950 During this period, while
the Chinese continue to mount their forces for an
offensive, they string out troops along mountain tops
to maintain a vigil for approaching planes. As part of
the strategy, the Communist sentinels fire shots to
signal the arrival of the aircraft. In addition, the Chi-
nese plant dummy trucks and tanks near antiaircraft
guns. As the planes close to attack, they come under
heavy fire. During this period, the Marine squadrons
lose sixteen planes. Two of the pilots are able to sur-
vive by either crash landing or parachuting into
friendly lines, but nine are killed and one other is
captured. Three other Marine pilots are rescued be-
hind enemy lines and one other crashes in enemy
territory, but makes it back to friendly lines.
April 1, 1951
April 1 Operations RUGGED and DAUNTLESS are
initiated. The mission continues until 22 April. The
offensive is designed to drive beyond the 38th Parallel
and make inroads, while several possibilities about the
next phases of the conflict linger. The U.S. and U.N.
remain concerned that Russia will enter the conflict
with supposed volunteers from Mongolia. Ridgway and
MacArthur both conclude that the conflict will not ter-
minate in total victory, rather, by stalemate. Conse-
quently, the offensive is to push north to gain ground
prior to a cease fire.
As Eighth Army prepares to launch the offensive, it
is known that the Communists also are preparing to
initiate an offensive, but intelligence is unable to deter-
mine exactly when. Precautions are taken to repel an of-
fensive by redeploying various units to protect Seoul
and other strategic targets. The primary objectives of the
Eighth Army offensive are the towns of Ch’orwon and
Kumhwa, located in the south, and the town of Py-
onggang in the north. The layout of the three targets
above the 38th Parallel forms a triangle and the area is
soon dubbed the “Iron Triangle.”
Ridgway designates the first phase line, Kansas. It is
drawn in the west from the lower bank of the Imjin
River and it stretches eastward passing over the routes
to the objectives and continues beyond to the Hwach’on
Reservoir. From the reservoir, the line is adjusted to
shift northward to a point about ten miles from the
38th Parallel, before tailing off in a southeastwardly di-
rection to terminate at the coast in the vicinity of
Hwach’on. The advance is supported by large numbers
of Korean reserves who transport supplies on their
backs. About 15,000 reserves acting as porters are at-
tached to the advance.
In the I and IX Corps sector, I Corps is directed to
work with IX Corps to gain and clear the area that
stretches between the Imjin River to the western tip of
the Hwach’on Reservoir.
In the 1st Marine Division zone (IX Corps), the or-
ders change. Rather than reverting to reserve, the
Marines are directed to continue the attack with two
regiments, the 1st and 5th, and to relieve the 1st Cav-
alry Division (7th Marines attached).
In the X Corps sector, the corps, operating on the east,
is directed to secure and hold the ground that runs from
the reservoir to Route 24, located in the Soyang River
Valley. In conjunction, the ROK I and III Corps are
to cover the territory extending from Route 24 to the
town of Yangyang.
April 2 Eighth Army continues to prepare for the
initiation of Operation RUGGED, designed to advance
beyond the 38th Parallel to the Kansas Line, en route to
what becomes known as the “Iron Triangle.” After
Eighth Army reaches the Kansas Line, General Ridg-
way has a blueprint in place to redeploy particular units
to prepare against an enemy counterattack, while IX
and X Corps (Operation DAUNTLESS) continue the ad-
vance to the primary objective, for the purpose of dis-
rupting the enemy rather than conquering the territory.
682
The phase lines drawn for the operation are known
as the Utah Line and the Wyoming Line. A secondary
plan includes a pull-back by the two corps to the
Kansas Line if the Communists launch a counterat-
tack. The offensive commences this day; however, it
doesn’t actually accumulate full steam until 5 April.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division is or-
dered to go into reserve in the vicinity of Hongchon;
however, the 5th Marines and the 1st Korean Marine
Regiment are directed to continue the attack. In the X
Corps sector, General Ruffner assumes temporary com-
mand of the X Corps, while General Almond departs
for Japan. While Almond is in Japan on April 2-9, Gen-
eral George Stewart temporarily replaces Ruffner as
2nd Division commander.
April 3 General MacArthur again arrives in Korea
from Japan as Operation RUGGED (the advance to the
Kansas Line) unfolds. The date for commencement had
been moved up from 5 April to this day. MacArthur
arrives on the east coast within the ROK I Corps zone.
General Ridgway and MacArthur confer and concur
that the Kansas Line should be held. On this visit,
MacArthur moves north by jeep from Kangnung and
crosses the 38th Parallel in the ROK 9th Division zone.
It is MacArthur’s strong opinion that at the conclusion
of the operation, the conflict will be at a stalemate.
The enemy forces that stand in opposition to the I
and IX Corps are the Chinese 26th, 39th and 40th
Armies. Also, the N.K. III Corps, which had evaded
the advancing forces during Operation RIPPER, stand in
front of X Corps and the ROK I and III Corps. The
N.K. III Corps is composed of elements of the 1st, 15th
and 45th Divisions, supported also by the 69th
Brigade.
In the I Corps zone, the troops near the Imjin River
(west) hold in place, but in the eastern sector of the
zone, the 24th (IX Corps on loan to I Corps) and 25th
Divisions drive north along Route 3 toward the Iron
Triangle. The offensive is supported by the 6th, 64th
and 89th Tank Battalions, air support and artillery sup-
port.
In the IX Corps sector, the advance commences with
the Commonwealth Brigade, ROK 6th Division and
the 1st Cavalry Division. The 7th and 8th Cavalry Reg-
iments ford the Soyang River and drive toward the
Hwach’on Reservoir, slightly north of the 38th Paral-
lel. The Greek and Thai contingents are attached to
the 7th and 8th Cavalries respectively. The advance
also includes the 7th Marines, which is temporarily at-
tached to the 1st Cavalry Division. The Marines under
Colonel Litzenberg advance to the rear of the cavalry.
In other activity, in the 1st Marine Division sector,
the 5th Marines and the 1st Korean Marine Regiment
maintain the advance.
In Air Force activity, an attempt to rescue a downed
F-51 pilot by a helicopter crew of the 3rd Air Rescue
Squadron succeeds. The pilot is retrieved in enemy ter-
ritory southeast of Pyongyang by an H-19 service test
helicopter.
 683 April 6, 1951

In other activity, a contingent of Sabre jets encoun- ready died and he is wounded again; still, he refuses
ters and engages a band of MiGs. The MiGs lose three personal treatment. While attending to another
planes and of these, one is downed by Captain Jabara wounded Marine, Corpsman Dewert is struck again,
(334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron), his first. The this time with a fatal wound. Hospital Corpsman Dew-
Sabre jets sustain no losses. In a repeat performance on ert is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his
the following day, the MiGs lose one plane. No losses extraordinary heroism and selfless sacrifice.
are sustained by the Sabre jets. In the X Corps sector, the 23rd Infantry Regiment,
In Naval activity, Logistic Support Force (TF 92) which had relieved the 5th Marines, prepares to launch
composed of Service Squadron Three and Service Di- an attack the following day against the Hwach’on
vision Thirty-one and United Nations Blockading and Reservoir.
Escort Force (TF 95) come under the operational con- — In Japan: General MacArthur, aware that all as-
trol of the Seventh Fleet. Also, Rear Admiral A.E. Smith signed forces had crossed the 38th Parallel, informs the
is reassigned as commanding officer of the U.N. Joint Chiefs of Staff that the advance would continue
Blockading and Escort Force (TF 95). to the Kansas Line. MacArthur’s message also men-
tions that I Corps will commence Operation DAUNT-
April 4 In the I Corps sector, the 25th Division LESS, designed to move the line forward to Lines Utah
closes on the high ground above the Hant’an River and
and Wyoming.
secures it by the following day. The 24th Division ad-
vance encounters nominal resistance except at the right April 6 Operation RUGGED continues to make
where the enemy stalls the 2nd Battalion, 21st Infantry progress.
Regiment, at the western slopes of Kungmang Moun- In the I Corps sector, elements of the 24th Division
tain. The Chinese stand prepared for a tough contest (temporarily attached to I Corps) reach the Kansas Line,
and have permeated the approaches with land mines which stretches along the south bank of the Hant’an
and barbed wire.
In the IX Corps sector, the British contin-
gent operating on the corps’ left had also
been stalled by the heavy fire from the
heights on Kungmang Mountain.
In the X Corps sector, the 1st Cavalry con-
tinues to advance. The 7th Marines, at-
tached to the 1st Cavalry, moves north with
the 7th and 8th Cavalry Regiments against
nominal resistance, which permits them to
be among the first Eighth Army troops to
recross the 38th Parallel.
April 5 In the I Corps sector, the 24th
Division’s 2nd Battalion, 21st Infantry,
supported by planes and artillery, clears the
enemy from the western slopes of Kung-
mang Mountain early in the day. After the
high ground is secured, it is occupied by
the 5th Infantry Regiment. The 21st Reg-
iment arrives at the Kansas Line on 6 April.
The 24th Division is temporarily attached
to I Corps.
In the IX Corps sector, subsequent to the
eviction of the enemy on Kungmang
Mountain, the British 27th Brigade, oper-
ating on the corps’ left and stalled by fierce
enemy fire, is able to reinitiate its advance.
On the following day, the British move to
the Kansas Line without incident.
In the 1st Marine Division zone (IX
Corps), a heated firefight erupts and some
Marines are wounded. An accompanying
Navy corpsman, Richard D. Dewert, assists
the wounded and himself becomes
wounded, but he refuses treatment and
continues to brave the heavy fire. On his A contingent of the 32nd Regiment, 7th Division, climbs yet
third run he discovers one Marine had al- another Korean hill.
April 7, 1951
River. In the 25th Division zone, General Joseph S.
Bradley prepares for Operation DAUNTLESS. He selects
the Greek detachment and the 24th Regiment to act
as vanguard when the Division crosses the Hant’an
River. As part of the ongoing preparations, the 27th
Regiment, deployed on the left, is relieved by the Greek
contingent, while the 24th Regiment deploys on the
right, after relieving the 35th Regiment. The 27th and
35th Regiments, subsequent to being relieved, revert
to reserve.
In the 24th Division zone at the Kansas Line, the 19th
Regiment relieves the 5th Regiment and the latter pre-
pares to join with the 21st Regiment to be the vanguard
of the Division’s advance in Operation DAUNTLESS.
In the IX Corps sector, the ROK 6th Division encoun-
ters resistance as it moves up the center, but it pushes
through and reaches the Kansas Line.
In other activity, the 1st Cavalry Division drives on
the right. Its 7th and 8th Regiments advance on the
left (east) side of the Pukham River and encounter
primitive routes and enemy resistance, raised by ele-
ments of the Chinese 39th Army. However, the 7th
Marines (attached to the 1st Cavalry) encounters no
strong resistance as it pushes forward on the west side
of the river. At day’s end, the cavalry remains several
miles short of its intended positions at the Hwach’on
Reservoir.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the 23rd In-
fantry Regiment (French Battalion attached) initiates its
northward attack towards the eastern edge of the
Hwach’on Reservoir (Kansas Line). In conjunction, the
23rd is the only regiment on the offensive. The 9th and
38th Infantry Regiments remain in reserve. The French
contingent advances to the Kansas Line by 8 April.
In the 7th Division zone, the 17th and 32nd Regi-
ments will attack towards the Kansas Line, subsequent
to relieving the ROK 5th Division.
April 7 On this date, the total air defense of the
Pusan–Pohang area becomes the responsibility of the 1st
Marine Air Wing. In conjunction, the Air Defense Sec-
tion of the Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron 2 ini-
tiates the implementation of the defense system. Also,
General Ridgway remains concerned about the possibil-
ity of the Chinese opening the gates of the dam at the
Hwach’on Reservoir. Ridgway had modified the Kansas
Line to place it into the IX Corps zone. Earlier, it had been
determined that the dam could not be destroyed by the
available bombs. With the modification of the line, the
1st Marine Division is to secure the dam, subsequent to
its relief of the 1st Cavalry Division at the Kansas Line.
Also, on this day, the 4th Ranger Company is re-
leased from the 187th Airborne RCT and attached to
IX Corps. The corps commander, General Hoge, de-
cides to use the rangers to knock the dam’s gates out of
commission. General Palmer is not aware that the plan
is to strike quickly with only the rangers. On the fol-
lowing day, instead of using only the rangers, General
Palmer directs the 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry, and the
attached rangers the task of taking the dam.
684
In the I Corps sector, 3rd Division zone, an infantry-
armor patrol, composed of the 64th Tank Battalion and
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Regiment, moves north
of the 38th Parallel above the Hant’an River and en-
counters opposition, which it scatters. During the ex-
change of fire, the Communists hold positions in
bunkers; however, they do not deter the patrol. The
Chinese sustain high casualties, including nearly forty
troops captured. The patrol, led by Lt. Colonel Wilson
Hawkins (64th Tank Battalion), sustains only a few ca-
sualties, each of a non-serious nature.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of 48 F-84Es de-
part Japan to rendezvous with B-29 bombers while they
venture into MiG Alley. The bombers pound targets
at Sinuiju and Uiju under the protection of the 27th
Fighter Escort Wing. MiGs arrive to intercept and of
30 planes on the attack, one is able to break through the
jets to reach the bombers. One B-29 is shot down.
In Naval activity, Special Task Force (TF-74)—com-
posed of the USS St. Paul (CA 73), USS Lind (DD
703), USS Massey (DD 778), USS Fort Marion (LSD
22), and the USS Begor (APD 127)—carries out a dem-
olition mission at Sorye-dong. A landing force, com-
posed of British Marines of the 41st Independent Royal
Marine Commandos, executes the landing against no
resistance and destroys rails in the area.
April 8 Navy Task Force 77 initiates maneuvers
off Taiwan and near the coast of mainland China to
show force and discourage the Communists from
launching an invasion of Taiwan. Intelligence gather-
ing had picked up the possibility of such an assault dur-
ing spring. The exercise apparently succeeds. No inva-
sion occurs; however, in the absence of the U.S. Navy
off Korea, the Communists had been able to make huge
repairs to the rail and bridge system that the carrier
planes had destroyed the previous March. The task
force and its planes depart the Formosa Strait and re-
sume attacks over Korea on 16 April.
In the IX Corps sector, fierce resistance continues from
the previous day above Chunchon, as the 1st Cavalry
drives toward the Kansas Line. During the latter part
of this day, General Palmer issues orders to the two at-
tacking regiments (7th and 8th) to form in tighter and
greater strength on the following day. Both units are
stalled, but the pressure against the 8th Cavalry forces
it to pull back. To bolster the attack, the 5th Cavalry
is plucked from reserve.
In addition, General Palmer prepares the 2nd Bat-
talion, 7th Cavalry, for the task of taking the Hwach’on
dam. The attack is scheduled for 10 April. However, in
the meantime, at about midnight (8th-9th), the enemy
opens the floodgates to catch the cavalry by surprise
and impede any progress. The attacking units had been
forewarned of the possibility of the attempt to flood
the route and the troops are prepared. The waters of
the Pukham River rise high, but cause no casualties.
The sweeping waters damage some bridges and force
the Americans to remove some floating bridges.
In related activity, the enemy forces that had
 685
impeded the cavalry advance withdraw to avoid being
trapped by the flood waters, but some forces remain to
hold the dam.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, attached to the 1st
Cavalry Division, encounters fierce resistance that orig-
inates on a ridge near the western end of the Hwach’on
Reservoir. Unable to overcome the mortar and machine
gun fire, the patrols also become jeopardized by hand
grenades. An urgent call for air support is placed; how-
ever, all air traffic for the Marines remains under the
control of the Joint Operations Center. The Marines
are told help is on the way, but at one point, orders
come down that state the 1st Marine Division is not
eligible for air strikes until it comes out of reserve. And
yet more bureaucracy emerges, but finally after six
hours, U.S. Air Force planes arrive. In the meantime,
Marine squadrons had been in operation supporting
the ROKs and the 7th and 8th Cavalry.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, orders arrive from
Eighth Army to relieve the 1st Cavalry Division at Line
Kansas and commence an attack toward Line Quan-
tico above Hwach’on and about ten miles below the
Iron Triangle.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the French
Battalion attached to the 23rd Regiment reaches the
Kansas Line; however, it encounters fierce opposition
from entrenched positions on Hill 796, in the vicinity
of the southern part of the reservoir.
April 9 Operation DAUNTLESS, ordered by General
Ridgway in coordination with Operation RUGGED, is
set with a commencement date of 11 April.
In the IX Corps sector, the 7th and 8th Cavalry Reg-
iments advance without resistance following two days
of hitting tenacious opposition. The regiments arrive at
the Kansas Line prior to noon. In related activity, the
operation to seize the dam is initiated and General
Palmer anticipates its seizure on this day to finalize the
mission, prior to being relieved by the Marines on the
following day. The 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regi-
ment, jumps off slightly after noon, but the task be-
comes more difficult than anticipated. The approaches
forbid the passage of tanks. The primitive path is too
slim even for artillery, so much so that at points, even
a jeep is hardly able to maneuver.
Company F, 2nd Battalion, spearheads the assault
to gain Hill 454, located above the dam and afterwards,
the rangers that trail are to bolt to the dam and disable
the gates. Enemy mortars pound the force and then,
more fire pounds the company. Machine guns and
small arms stall the advance and prevent Company E
from gaining access to Hill 364 along the southern tip
of the ridge. Meanwhile, the enemy holding Hill 364
pours fire upon the cavalrymen to bring the attack to
a halt. Division artillery to the north is too far from
the target to provide accurate fire. An air strike is called
upon to crack the resistance, but it fails to dislodge the
enemy. The Chinese hold the dam.
General Hoge, the corps commander, and General
Palmer, 1st Cavalry commander, agree to commence
April 10, 1951
another assault on the following day. Lt. Colonel John
W. Callaway’s 2nd Battalion again gets the task.
April 10 In the IX Corps sector, the bulk of the 1st
Cavalry Regiment initiates its movement from
the Kansas Line; however, the 7th Cavalry remains
in place to launch a second attack to seize the dam at
the Hwach’on Reservoir. Company G (2nd Battalion,
7th Cavalry), jumps off and as on the previous day,
enemy fire prevents progress. The troops have no room
to maneuver and they come under fire from the north
and the northwest while they are stalled at the base of
the diminutive road. The U.S. artillery remains too dis-
tant to support the assault and in the meantime, the
weather deteriorates, which prevents the possibility of
air strikes.
General Hoge concludes that Calloway’s 2nd Bat-
talion had not attacked strongly and he decides to at-
tempt yet another assault. General Hoge remains fo-
cused on securing the dam prior to withdrawing the
7th Cavalry; however, the 3rd Battalion is already with-
drawing from the Kansas Line. Nevertheless, a third
assault is planned for the following day.
In related activity, the ROK 1st Division patrols,
which had been encountering elements of the N.K. 8th
Division near the far bank of the Imjin River, on this
day find the enemy positions abandoned. Subsequent
patrols advance to the old capital of Korea, Kaesong,
more than ten miles above the Imjin River, without
detecting enemy presence.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, as the Division pre-
pares to advance from Line Kansas to the Quantico
Line, it is directed to postpone its attack. The Marines
are directed to confine their activity to patrols.
In the X Corps sector, elements of the 23rd Regiment,
2nd Division, operating on the corps’ left (Operation
SWING), move along the lower shore of the reservoir in
an attempt to eliminate the remaining opposition on
Hill 796 and catch the withdrawing N.K. 1st Division.
The enemy evades an engagement. Some escape across
the reservoir in boats and others pass through Yanggu
and speed north. The 23rd Regiment arrives in Yanggu
and deploys on the Kansas Line on 15 April. The
enemy contingents had been part of the N.K. 1st Reg-
iment (also known as 14th N.K. Regiment).
In the 7th Division zone, the 17th and 32nd Regi-
ments on the left and right respectively drive toward
the Soyang River, which stands at the 38th Parallel.
The advance is impeded by the elements and the enemy
as it crawls towards its objective, Inje, along the Kansas
Line, a few miles north of the 38th Parallel. The 7th Di-
vision is the sole Eighth Army unit that remains short
of the Kansas Line.
— In the United States: The Defense Department
issues an order (effective 1 May) that lowers the intel-
ligence standards for the Air Force, Navy, and Marine
Corps. The adjustment brings the level equal to that
of the Army. For the first time since World War II, the
Marine Corps as well as the Air Force and the Navy
will be accepting draftees.
April 11, 1951
April 11 In the I Corps sector, Operation DAUNT-
LESS commences. It consists of two phases, the first, a
drive to the Utah Line, followed by a drive to the
Wyoming Line. The 65th Infantry Regiment, 3rd Di-
vision, supported by the Philippine 10th Battalion
Combat Team and two companies of the 64th Tank
Battalion, drives toward the objective. The force pushes
up the corps’ center. On the corps’ right, the 25th Di-
vision and the 24th Division (X Corps) drive toward
Ch’orwon and Kumhwa against resistance raised by the
Chinese 26th and 40th Armies.
A U.S. convoy crosses the Soyang River at the 38th Parallel.
686
In conjunction, the 25th Division encounters heavy
resistance as it moves, holding up progress. The 25th
Division gets across the Hant’an River after four dogged
days to gain positions in the high ground between
Route 33 and Route 3, known as the Pogae-san heights.
After two additional days, the division arrives at a point
about five miles from the Utah Line.
Meanwhile, the 24th Division, on loan from X
Corps, drives against resistance originating on the ridges
(Kwangdok-san) along the Yongp’yong River.
In the IX Corps sector, the 7th Cavalry again initiates
 687
an attack to clear the Chinese from the dam at the
Hwach’on Reservoir. The regiment, commanded by
Colonel William A. Harris, has already expended much
of its ammunition and its supplies have dwindled. Al-
though Harris is authorized to commit the entire 7th
Cavalry Regiment, he is convinced there is insufficient
time to resupply the regiment in time to sustain a full-
scale assault.
Since the attack of the previous day, some artillery,
two 8-inch batteries of the 17th FABn, and one 155-
mm battery of the 4th FABn (1st Marine Division) has
arrived to points close enough to support the assault.
However, the weather again is inclement and air sup-
port is unavailable. The assault is further hampered be-
cause much of the cavalry’s amphibious equipment had
already been moved to Taegu or transferred to the 1st
Marine Division as it moved up on the 10th to relieve
the 1st Cavalry. Colonel Harris conducts a scavenger
hunt and the search comes up with fewer than ten boats
to use to carry rangers, but not all are equipped with
motors. In addition, boat operators are lacking, which
compels Colonel Harris to improvise and use men from
his own regiment.
Nonetheless, prior to dawn, two platoons of the 4th
Ranger Company push off to take the dam. The rangers
safely debark on the eastern peninsula, but the trailing
rangers cross in daylight and the Chinese pour fire upon
them. In the meantime, the first unit encounters heavy
fire as the rangers move to seize the heights. The attack
stalls and back on the water, some of the trailing rangers
are forced to return to their starting point. All the while,
Chinese on the western peninsula rush to bolster the de-
fenses against the attacking force. The rangers under
Captain Dorsey B. Anderson remain stalled, prompting
Colonel Harris to call up the 3rd Battalion, Company I,
which crosses the reservoir at about 1100. Due to the
difficulties caused by the lack of boats and motors, the
unit is unable to quickly reach the eastern peninsula. By
midday, only one platoon reaches the rangers.
In coordination with the attack to seize the dam, a
diversionary attack gets stalled before it can advance. A
patrol initiated by Company A is unable to evict gun-
ners in the northwest. To further derail the mission,
Company E, 2nd Battalion, is still held up at the west-
ern ridge, unable to advance from its base. The enemy’s
fortifications withstand U.S. artillery fire and maintain
heavy fire that forbids progress.
Before nightfall, the attack is cancelled. The rangers
and Company I are ordered to withdraw rather than
risk being overwhelmed during the darkened hours by
a Chinese assault. The elements of Company I at the
front and the rangers pull back without being harassed
by the Chinese. At about dusk, the troops move to the
south shore of the reservoir. Just after midnight the
rangers and Company I reach the positions of the reg-
iment at the Kansas Line. The mission had been costly,
as both units sustain high casualties. The 7th Cavalry
is afterwards placed into reserve. Its commander, Col-
onel William Harris, is transferred to the United States.
He is replaced by Colonel Dan Gilmer.
April 12, 1951
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77)
initiates operations in the Straits of Formosa just out-
side the three-mile limit of mainland China. Carrier
planes carry out an air parade that lasts for three days.
During the operation, photos of particular potential
targets in China are acquired.
—In the United States: General Douglas MacArthur
is fired by President Truman. He is succeeded by Gen-
eral Matthew B. Ridgway, who at this time is com-
mander, Eighth Army. With his promotion, Ridgway
also receives the other posts held by MacArthur:
supreme commander, Allied Powers in Japan;
commander-in-chief, U.N. Command in Korea; U.S.
commander-in-chief, Far East; and commanding gen-
eral, U.S. Army, Far East.
Lieutenant General James A. Van Fleet succeeds
General Ridgway as Eighth Army commander in Korea
beginning 14 April. General Ridgway arrives in Japan
from Korea and he makes it clear to the Japanese that
all polices will remain in place, with no changes to
come.
April 12 In the IX Corps sector, the ROK 1st Ma-
rine Corps Regiment relieves the 7th Cavalry, 1st Cav-
alry Division, at the Kansas Line.
In Air Force activity, since the arrival of spring and the
thawing of the rivers, the Yalu River bridges remain a
high priority of the U.S. Air Force. On this day, forty-
six B-29s, escorted by a force of 100 fighters (F-84s),
move against the targeted bridges. However, the B-29s
fail to maintain a close formation and compel the escort
fighters to spread out too far. The planes are met by a
large force of about 50 or more MiGs that arrive from
across the Yalu. At the approach of the enemy, the es-
cort fighters try to close their ranks, but the MiGs are
able by that time to break through and down two of the
B-29s while inflicting severe damage to a third that
forces it to make an emergency landing at Suwon. In ad-
dition, four to seven others are damaged in the skies.
The B-29 gunners score seven kills.
One of the tailgunners credited with a victory this day
is Sergeant Ercel S. Dye, attached to the 371st Bom-
bardment Squadron, 307th Bombardment Wing (M).
Sergeant Dye begins firing at a charging MiG from a
distance of 2,000 yards and his finger remains on the
trigger when the MiG stands at 50 feet away, veers off,
goes into a vertical dive and explodes upon impact. The
escort force of F-84s destroys four others in aerial duels.
Another tailgunner, Sergeant Robert A. Winslow,
attached to the 30th Bombardment Squadron, 19th
Bombardment Group (M), gets a kill when a MiG
closes on the rear. Winslow keeps the plane under fire
and just as it pulls even closer to pass and reaches a
point just above Winslow’s plane at a distance of about
50 feet, he lets go with another series of shots that strike
paydirt. The MiG sustains successive explosions and
crashes. No F-84s are lost.
Although the spans sustain some direct hits, the raids
do not succeed in destroying the bridges. The B-29
gunners initially claim ten kills, but the Air Force
April 13, 1951
awards credit for only seven. Of these, Sergeant Billy G.
Beach gets credit for two of the downed MiGs. Colo-
nel Meyer and Lt. Colonel Hinton each get one kill
(the final one for both men). Other gunners aboard B-
29s, including Sergeant Lyle R. Patterson (30th Bom-
bardment Squadron, 19th Bombardment Group, M),
Sergeant David R. Stime (371st Bombardment
Squadron, 307th Bombardment Wing, M), and
Sergeant Royal A. Veatch (30th Bombardment
Squadron, 19th Bombardment Group, M), also receive
credit for a victory after each gunner downs one of the
MiG-15s. In addition, two Sabre jet pilots, Captain
Jabara and Captain Howard M. Lane, each down one
of the MiGs.
The climbing total of B-29 losses compels General
Stratemeyer to suspend B-29 Superfortress attacks in the
Sinuiju region. The F-84 Thunderjets are not capable
of neutralizing the MiGs. General Partridge reports to
Far East Air Forces that it would take the F-86 Sabre jets
to handle the MiG threat against the bombers.
— In Japan: General Ridgway and General
MacArthur meet at the Embassy library in Tokyo. Dur-
ing the meeting, General Ridgway decides to wait until
General Van Fleet arrives on April 14 before officially
replacing MacArthur. Ridgway returns to Korea to con-
tinue to control Operations RUGGED and DAUNTLESS.
April 13 General Ridgway is completing some
final issues prior to moving to Japan. However, he will
retain much control over Eighth Army after General
Van Fleet becomes its commander on the following
day. Strategy sessions this day determine that at pres-
ent, the Chinese are not yet prepared to launch an of-
fensive. Nevertheless, new lines are established by Ridg-
way’s staff in the event that withdrawals are forced by
a later Communist attack. Line Delta, the initial line to
the south, stretches east to west from coast to coast,
originating at Chonchon. Secondly, the Nevada Line,
also extending from coast to coast, runs from the west
at the lower bank of the Han River and afterward, it
pivots northeastwardly toward Yangyang. Line Golden
is drawn from the Han River, slightly more than five
miles west of the capital, to a point that intersects with
the Nevada Line in the vicinity of Yongp’yong.
In other activity, the I Corps continues to advance to
the Utah Line. Also, the X Corps and the ROK III
Corps maintain the advance to the Kansas Line.
In the X Corps sector, enemy resistance against the
7th Cavalry Regiment in the center and the ROK 5th
Division on the right begins to lessen considerably.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force reconnaissance
planes discover as many as 400 to 500 MiGs parked
on one field in Manchuria. The intelligence brings the
dilemma of the U.S. aviators, once again, to the fore-
front. Even now, at this stage in the war, Congress has
not provided sufficient funding for the number of Sabre
jets required to neutralize the overwhelming enemy
planes and pilots. Nonetheless, the Sabre jet pilots ig-
nore the odds and continue to prevail in the skies.
The U.S. planes are forbidden from chasing MiGs
688
across the Yalu, but on occasion, some planes stray. And
in some instances, pilots intentionally cross the river, ap-
parently accidentally on purpose. The number of kills
by Sabre jets sometimes varies from official records.
There is combat footage of MiGs with their wheels
down as they approach a landing strip and other footage
shows parked MiGs on a field in Manchuria.
In Naval activity, Commander Fleet Air, Japan, is
designated CTG 96.4. Also, Commander Fleet Air
Wing Six is designated CTG 96.2. The designations
cause the detachment of Fleet Air Wing Six from the op-
erational control of Commander Fleet Air, Japan.
April 14 General Van Fleet arrives in Korea to as-
sume command of Eighth Army. He is met by General
Ridgway upon his arrival. The transfer-of-command
ceremony commences at 1700 hours. Ridgway directs
Van Fleet not to advance beyond the Wyoming Line in
strength and to inform him if it is necessary to move
beyond the Utah Line. General Ridgway departs for
Japan later in the day, but avoids going to headquarters
as a courtesy to General MacArthur, who had not yet de-
parted for the United States. He remains quartered at a
hotel in Tokyo.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division,
after overcoming resistance in the Taebaek Mountains,
arrives at the Kansas Line. The advance had been ex-
tremely difficult for the troops, who had no roads to
ease the march. In addition to the weather and the
enemy obstacles, the force had to be supplied by air
drops.
In the I Corps sector, the 65th Infantry Regiment, 3rd
Division, arrives at the Utah Line. The regiment, bol-
stered by elements of the 64th Tank Battalion and the
Philippine 10th Battalion Combat Team, had encoun-
tered contingents of the Chinese 26th Army en route
to the line, at points between the Imjin River and Route
33, but the opposition was eliminated. The rapid
progress of the 65th Regiment greatly extends the I
Corps line, but at this time, there is no indication of an
enemy offensive in the works.
Since about 9 April, Eighth Army units have spot-
ted large plumes of smoke. Planes also spot the fires
and the origins. The enemy is intentionally starting
fires to camouflage daytime troop movements. The
nasty weather, combined with the smoke, causes diffi-
culty for the U.S. air operations and for the ar-
tillery.
April 15 Eighth Army operations continue, but
the enemy, with regard to major combat, remains elu-
sive.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division advances
in the vicinity of Inje. It encounters and evicts elements
of the N.K. 45th Division from their positions. Subse-
quent to clearing the village, the advance is bolstered
during the night by artillery that hammers the ridges
above Inje, to further clear the path to the Kansas Line.
In the U.S. 7th Division zone, the 17th Regiment en-
counters mines and other obstacles along Route 29 as
it moves toward the Kansas Line; however, opposition
 689
from the N.K. 15th Division had subsided over the
past few days. The 17th Regiment establishes contact
with the 2nd Division this day. In the meantime, the
32nd Regiment is also pushing towards the Kansas Line
against heavy resistance.
In Naval activity, Marine Force Far East (TF-91) is
re-designated Marine Air Force Far East (TF-91). Also,
Escort Carrier Group (TG-96.8) is dissolved.
April 16 General Van Fleet arrives in the ROK
Army zone to confer with the commanders and the
South Korean defense minister. Also, the Communists
continue to retreat, leaving most of the Eighth Army
front much more quiet than usual.
In the IX Corps sector, the British 27th Brigade ar-
rives at the Utah Line. The British had moved across
and cleared elements of the Chinese 40th Army from
Paegun Mountain while it was en route to the line. The
British Brigade is relieved by the ROK 6th Division’s
19th Regiment. One contingent of New Zealand ar-
tillery remains with the South Koreans, while the
brigade moves to Kap’yong as corps reserve.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division advances
to the Kansas Line against no organized resistance. The
division had secured Inje on the previous day and the
remaining enemy forces on nearby ridges had appar-
ently been cleared by nightlong artillery bombard-
ments. Also, more contingents of the 17th Regiment,
7th Division, enter Yanggu this day to form with the 7th
Division along the Kansas Line. The 32nd Regiment,
7th Division, continues to advance against resistance
towards the Kansas Line.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces initiates a
short series of missions against Pongyang, Kangdong
and Yonpo and various airfields in the vicinity. Between
this date and 20 April, B-29s fly about ten sorties each
day against the targets.
— In Japan: General MacArthur departs Japan.
General Ridgway confers with the headquarters staff
subsequent to a farewell ceremony for MacArthur.
While MacArthur is being driven to the airport, he
witnesses huge crowds of Japanese who had lined the
route from Tokyo to Haneda Airport to say farewell.
The entourage arrives at the airport at 0700, and
an Army band is in place to accompany the flyover
by U.S. planes and a nineteen gun salute by an artillery
unit. The plane that transports MacArthur and his
family arrives in Hawaii before continuing on to the
States.
General Ridgway makes some immediate changes.
Major General Doyle O. Hickey, acting chief of staff
(Far East Command and U.N. Command) is officially
appointed to the post. He had been acting chief of staff
since the previous September in place of General Al-
mond, who departed as commander of X Corps.
During their final conversation, MacArthur informs
Ridgway that if he had the choice of selecting his own
successor, “I would have chosen you.” Thirteen years
later, according to Ridgway, a report surfaces from an
interview MacArthur gave to a reporter in 1954 that
April 17, 1951
places Ridgway at the bottom of MacArthur’s list of
field commanders.
April 17 General Van Fleet moves across the en-
tire front, covering it from coast to coast. Up to this
point, the initial phase of Operation DAUNTLESS suc-
ceeds. Nevertheless, there is still great concern that the
Communists are preparing to strike. Also, The U.S.,
aware of a massive operation to rebuild the airfields for
the People’s Air Force since February, launches attacks
to destroy the airfields to prevent the Chinese from
providing air support to their ground troops. It was
earlier decided that premature strikes could not have
succeeded in total destruction. This day, B-29s pound
the bases and the air attacks continue until the 23rd.
The massive air strikes take out the fields and prevent
the Communists from providing air support for their
spring offensive.
In the I Corps sector, enemy resistance against the
25th and 24th Divisions begins to subside. One pa-
trol, attached to the 5th Tank Battalion, 24th Divi-
sion, plows along Route 3 and reaches a point about
six or seven miles from Kumhwa without incident.
Meanwhile, the 25th Division maintains its slow-paced
advance.
In the IX Corps sector, on the opposite side of the
Hwach’on Reservoir from the X Corps positions, ongo-
ing patrols of the 1st Marine Division and ROK 6th Di-
vision search for the enemy. All reports indicate that
the Chinese continue to retire. Nevertheless, Eighth
Army still anticipates an enemy offensive in the mak-
ing.
Also, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment de-
ploys elements in the high ground above the Pukham
River, west of the dam at the Hwach’on Reservoir and
on the ridge inside the Pukham loop, to prepare to evict
the Chinese still holding the dam. The 7th Cavalry fails
to seize it prior to being relieved by the Korean Marines.
In the X Corps sector, General Almond orders patrols
to probe for enemy hot spots above his positions along
the Kansas line. The 32nd Regiment, 7th Division, ar-
rives at the Kansas Line.
In Air Force activity, a specialized U.S. and South
Korean contingent executes a mission known as Oper-
ation MiG. The party gets behind enemy lines in an
H-19 helicopter to the scene of a crashed MiG-15 in
the vicinity of Sinanju. The detachment succeeds in
retrieving particular components of the plane and gets
them back to friendly lines where they can be trans-
ferred to gather intelligence. En route, the helicopter is
hit once by enemy fire, but it returns safely.
In other activity, B-29s, escorted by F-86 Sabre jets
of the 4th Interceptor Fighter Wing, attack enemy
bridges.
—In the United States: General Douglas MacArthur
arrives in San Francisco from Hawaii, where he
had been received by large, enthusiastic crowds. Upon
his arrival back in the States during the evening, again,
huge crowds gather along the route from the airport
to the city, causing the motorcade a long delay in
April 18, 1951
reaching the hotel. On the following day, the people
of San Francisco gather again and the city celebrates
MacArthur’s return with a tickertape parade.
President Truman, by executive order, extends the
enlistments of U.S. military personnel, which freezes
all discharges.
April 18 In the I Corps sector, elements of the 25th
Division, including the 35th Infantry Regiment, the
89th Tank Battalion and a contingent of artillery, ad-
vance through the Hant’an River valley without inci-
dent, until the force reaches a point about five miles
from Ch’orwon.
In the IX Corps sector, a small patrol of Korean
Marines fords the Pukham River slightly less than five
miles west of the dam at the Hwachon Reservoir and af-
terward discovers the town of Hwach’on undefended,
except for eleven Chinese troops, who are quickly
seized.
In the X Corps sector, patrols again venture north of
the Kansas Line in search of enemy positions, but no
major concentrations are located.
In Air Force activity, rescue helicopters come under
fire during evacuation sorties. Ten H-5 helicopters (3rd
ARS) arrive at the front line to pick up seriously
wounded troops to get them to medical facilities. Five
of them come under fire; however, all complete their
missions and twenty troops are evacuated safely.
April 19 Elements of the attacking units of I and
IX Corps are on the Utah Line.
In the I Corps sector, the 25th and 24th Divisions
plow forward against the enemy and the elements to-
ward the Utah Line. Enemy fire, combined with heavy
rains and primitive roads, slow progress, but the bulk
of the 25th Division arrives at the line on the follow-
ing day. The 24th Division also arrives on the line on
the 20th. Eighth Army pauses to catch a slight breather
and get the units re-supplied before it reinitiates the
The British 29th Brigade takes a pause during its pullback under pressure by enemy offensive.
690
attack. The offensive to reach the Wyoming Line re-
sumes on 21 April.
In the X Corps sector, for the third straight day, Gen-
eral Almond’s patrols encounter no enemy strong points
north of the Kansas Line. Only sporadic resistance is en-
countered.
In Air Force activity, the C-119s ground on 31 May
begin to come back into service. The first plane to re-
ceive some modifications and be reconditioned is placed
back in operation.
— In the United States: General MacArthur arrives
in Washington, D.C., and delivers an address to a joint
session of Congress. MacArthur gives his outlook on
the conflict in Korea, his thoughts on the Communist
threats to the U.S. and the necessity of bringing about
victory. The speech, which lasts slightly longer than
thirty-five minutes, is interrupted about fifty times
with loud, sustained applause.
MacArthur closes by saying:
“I am closing my fifty-two years of military service.
When I joined the Army, even before the turn of the
century, it was with the fulfillment of all my boyish
hopes and dreams. The world has turned over many
times since I took the oath on the Plain at West Point,
and the hopes and dreams have long since vanished,
but I still remember the refrain of one of the most pop-
ular barrack ballads of that day which proclaimed most
proudly that old soldiers never die; they just fade away.
And like the old soldier of that ballad, I now close my
military career and just fade away, an old soldier who
tried to do his duty as God gave him the light to see that
duty. Goodbye.”
April 20 Intelligence is unable to provide a specific
date for the anticipated enemy counterattack, but it is
thought to be between this day and 1 May. Nonethe-
less, no outward signs of an offensive are spotted in any
sector of Eighth Army. Intelligence had determined
 691
that the Chinese had succeeded in getting two new
Army groups (III and IX) into the region near the
Kumch’on–Koksan–Ich’on area. The information leads
the U.S. to speculate that the attack, when launched,
will pour across the Imjin River from the north and
northwest.
General Van Fleet informs General Ridgway that all
units are either at or close to their respective Lines
(Kansas and Utah) and that Eighth Army will initiate
the next phase of Operation DAUNTLESS on the follow-
ing day. General Van Fleet, in addition to directing the
I and IX Corps to advance to the Wyoming Line, re-
quests of Ridgway authorization to have the X Corps
and the ROK I and III Corps push to Kansong, a town
situated along the coast near the junction of Route 24
and the coastal road. The X Corps objective stands
slightly more than twenty miles above Yangyang. Ridg-
way authorizes the plan, but he modifies the route of at-
tack by shortening the arc of the eastern sweep. The
operation is to commence on 24 April.
In other activity, two planes attached to Marine
Squadron VMF-312 aboard the light carrier Bataan
encounter and engage four enemy Yak fighters in the
Pyongyang–Chinnamp’o area. Three of the enemy
planes are destroyed; one escapes.
In the I Corps sector, the 3rd Division under General
Robert H. Soule, unlike the 24th and 25th Divisions,
had made long gains during the advance. The Corps’
line, due to the progress of the 3rd Division, extends
from the mouth of the Imjin River to a point about ten
miles from Ch’orwon, which gives the I Corps about
thirty miles to defend if the Communists launch an at-
tack. The ROK 1st Division, on the 3rd Division’s left,
holds ground at Route 1 that extends from the mouth
of the Imjin to a point about fifteen miles distant,
known as the Korangp’o-ri bend. The 3rd Division
stands at the Korangp’o-ri Route 33 sector. It is aug-
mented by the British 29th Brigade.
In the X Corps sector, patrols advance to a point about
two miles above the Kansas Line, but still, the enemy
remains elusive.
April 21 Marine planes attached to a carrier en-
counter enemy aircraft for the first time over Korea.
Two Yaks are downed by Captain Philip C. DeLong,
while another Marine pilot, 1st Lieutenant Harold U.
Daigh, downs one plane and inflicts damage upon one
other.
Also, The U.N. forces, composed primarily of U.S.
troops, advance beyond the 38th Parallel as the final
phase of Operation DAUNTLESS commences. The 1st
Marine Division launches an attack in its zone in co-
ordination with the operation. The Marines drive to-
ward the area above the Hwach’on Dam. At the same
time, the elusive enemy that has been difficult to engage
since about the 11 April initiates an offensive on this
day.
In the I Corps sector, 3rd and the 25th Divisions push
off for their respective objectives. The 25th advances to-
wards Ch’orwon while the 24th drives towards
April 22, 1951
Kumhwa, the latter at the point of the Iron Triangle.
Both divisions move beyond the Kansas Line and gain,
at some points, about five miles, against minor spo-
radic resistance. Meanwhile, the 25th Division moves
across the Pogae-san heights en route to Ch’orwon, but
the task is much more difficult, as the troops are hit by
heavy artillery fire. After dark, the Chinese attack the
Utah Line particularly hard in the zone of the Turkish
Brigade at Route 33. During the night (21st-22nd),
patrols discover that the Chinese have fortified posi-
tions at the Imjin River.
In the IX Corps sector, no enemy opposition is en-
countered. The ROK 6th Division moves in the
Kwangdok-san ridges, alongside of the 24th Division
(on loan to I Corps).
In the 1st Marine Division zone, after a three-week
delay, the Division is directed to initiate its attack from
the Kansas Line to Line Quantico. The attack is to
begin the following day.
In the X Corps sector, patrols of the 2nd and 7th Di-
visions encounter large concentrations of North Ko-
rean troops in the area east of the Hwach’on Reservoir.
The discovery of various concentrations of enemy units,
some of which contain up to 1,000 troops, is a signal
to Eighth Army that they are relieving and reinforcing
units, but still, there is no absolute evidence to prove
a counterattack is imminent. Also, Marine Air Group
12 (Forward Echelon) begins to operate from the air-
port in Seoul.
In Air Force activity, a plane (SA-16) attached to the
3rd Air Rescue Squad takes off for the scene of a
downed enemy Yak pilot in the vicinity of Chinnam-
p’o to try to retrieve him for the purpose of gathering
intelligence; however, after the plane lands and puts
out a raft, enemy fire becomes too heavy. The mission
is aborted and the plane takes off without harm and
without the enemy pilot.
Also, Major Blake, on a mission as part of the 13th
Bombardment Squadron, comes under heavy fire from
antiaircraft guns as his bomber approaches the target.
Despite the lack of gun turrets on his B-26, Blake passes
at low levels and bombs and strafes the marshaling yard
at Songchon. His plane sustains some damage to the
radio antennae, but Blake destroys one locomotive,
damages another and damages about 15 boxcars. After
expending all of his ammunition, including machine
gun shells, Blake chooses to remain overhead until day-
light to try to detect moving trains. After dawn he calls
for fighters and guides them to the marshaling yards.
April 22–July 8 1951. FIFTH DESIGNATED
CAMPAIGN: CCF SPRING OFFENSIVE.
April 22 The Communists launch a spring offen-
sive (fifth phase). Aerial observation spots large concen-
trations of enemy forces to the north of I and IX Corps
and more are detected northwest of I Corps. More
enemy units are spotted east of the Hwach’on Reservoir
above Yanggu and Inje. The combined Communist
April 22, 1951
U.S. troops (25th Division) assist a wounded soldier on 22 April to get him down a hill to medical aid.
force moving against Seoul numbers about 270,000
troops and includes the III, IX and XIX Army Groups.
The Chinese, following a four-hour bombardment,
unleash three armies in a two-pronged assault. Under
a full moon amid endless sounds of whistles, flares and
blaring bugles, the Chinese launch the first phase of
the attack against Eighth Army troops in central Korea,
as a diversion. The primary assault is thrown against I
and IX Corps to encircle and destroy Eighth Army de-
fenders and seize Seoul. About 50 percent of the avail-
able enemy forces in Korea participate in the attack;
however, it is not heavily supported by artillery, nor
does it receive close-air support. Nonetheless, by the
following day, the Communist offensive is in full swing
across the entire Korean peninsula.
In the I Corps sector, the advance to the Wyoming
Line is reinitiated. Enemy resistance is encountered,
but on the left flank, the coveted dam at the Hwach’on
Reservoir is seized effortlessly by the 1st Korean Ma-
rine Corps Regiment. It becomes apparent on the
ground that the enemy offensive is underway, as civil-
ians approach from the northwest. More evidence is
discovered in the 3rd Division zone, when a patrol cap-
tures a soldier attached to the Chinese 34th Division,
12th Army.
At about 1700, air observers in the 25th Division
zone spot a huge column with vehicles and artillery as
it moves down Route 33, on a collision course with the
Turkish Brigade. Meanwhile, in the 24th Division sec-
tor, other enemy ground troops are spotted on Route
692
33. The U.S. initiates an artillery attack to impede
progress. As General Bryan directs the 24th Division in
preparation for an imminent attack, the ROK 6th Di-
vision, positioned beside the 24th, seems to be in line
for a direct assault. Elements of the 24th Division had
seized prisoners attached to the Chinese 59th Division.
In the 25th Division zone, as anticipated, the brunt
of the enemy assault strikes the Turkish Brigade. Fol-
lowing a heavy artillery bombardment, which lasts sev-
eral hours, the Chinese strike the Turks’ perimeter along
Route 33. At about midnight, elements of the Chinese
179th Division (III Army Group) plow into the Turk-
ish lines and the positions of the 24th Regiment. The
Turks are split into several isolated contingents as the
Chinese push through between the Turks and the left
flank of the 24th Regiment. Artillery support is can-
celled due to the close-quartered fighting. The Chi-
nese pound against the lines throughout the night and
by dawn, they are threatening also the 27th Infantry
Regiment. Some enemy forces penetrate about two
miles beyond the front lines.
At dawn the Chinese strike the Division’s right, de-
fended by the 27th Regiment. However, the 27th In-
fantry throws up a wall of fire that the Chinese are un-
able to penetrate. After less than one hour of failed
attempts and high casualties, the Chinese disengage.
General Sladen Bradley, the division commander, di-
rects the 24th and 27th Regiments to pull back about
two miles. The Turkish brigade is directed to leave the
line to regroup. Despite the harrowing night, the Turks
 693
emerge with much less damage than expected. Never-
theless, one of the isolated Turkish contingents, a full
company, is annihilated. The reserve 35th Infantry Reg-
iment assumes responsibility for the Turkish zone.
In the 3rd Division zone, the Chinese also strike at
about midnight of the 22nd-23rd. The initial thrust
against the 65th Infantry Regiment hits the Philippine
10th Battalion Combat Team and knocks it out of its
positions, but otherwise, no gains are accomplished.
Throughout the night, the two enemy divisions (34th
Division, 12th Army and 29th Division, 15th Army)
expend many troops. During the morning of the 23rd,
the Filipinos mount a counterattack and regain the
ground they had lost at the beginning of the fight.
In the meantime, the attacks subside, but the with-
drawal of the Turks has left the right flank of the 65th
Regiment exposed. Also, the regiment’s perimeter re-
mains under threat by the Chinese XIX Army Group,
which is pressing against the British 29th Brigade de-
ployed in the southwest. The British also come under
severe attack at about midnight. The enemy crashes
through a hole that exists between the Northumber-
land Fusiliers and the Belgians along the Imjin River
near Hill 194.
Word is passed from the Belgians that the enemy is
moving to unguarded crossings. Reinforcements at-
tached to the Ulster battalion speed toward the two
suspected bridges, but Chinese forces ambush the col-
umn. The unit is nearly annihilated. The Chinese,
meanwhile, continue to pour into the region with some
moving to assault the Belgians at Hill 194, and others
heading straight to the two unguarded bridges. Soon
after, Company Z (Northumberland Fusileers), de-
ployed on Hill 257 on the opposite bank, is attacked.
Another objective that comes under attack by the forces
that cross the bridges is Company X, also of the
Fusiliers, deployed on Hill 162 along the Imjin, but
downstream from Hill 257.
Company Y, deployed in the right tip of the zone,
evades attack, but the enemy advances on both sides
of their lines. The Chinese dominate the bridges from
positions at Hill 257 and at dawn, their artillery fire
prevents U.S. reinforcements from accessing the Han-
t’an crossing along Route 11. In addition, Chinese re-
inforcements continue to arrive to bolster the assault
against Hill 294, held by the Belgians. At about dawn,
the British commander concludes that a pullback is
necessary.
In the IX Corps sector, the advance continues without
encountering any heavy resistance. Later in the day, the
ROK 6th Division captures members of the Chinese
60th Division. Other Chinese are captured by the
Turkish Brigade. Information gathered from the POWs
indicates that an attack by the enemy would be
launched subsequent to dusk. In the ROK 6th Division
zone, the advance towards the Wyoming Line is halted
by about 1600. The commanding officer, General
Chang, disregards the advice of his KMAG advisor re-
garding the deployment of the division and deploys his
reserve (7th Regiment) too close to the front, immedi-
April 22, 1951
ately behind his 2nd Regiment. The 2nd Regiment and
the 19th Regiment fail to establish defensive positions
as ordered. Within about four hours, the Chinese strike
the ROK 6th Division, which collapses. The ROK 2nd
and 19th Regiments retreat haphazardly, leaving great
quantities of weapons and equipment for the Commu-
nists. The reserve 7th Regiment, after seeing the stam-
pede, also retires aimlessly.
The failure to stand and fight jeopardizes many other
units. The New Zealand artillery contingents in support
of the 6th Division are compelled to withdraw. Nearby,
the South Korean artillery battalion, unprotected after
the abandonment of positions by the 6th Division, is
caught by the Chinese before it can retreat. The Korean
artillerymen, like the infantry, abandon their weapons.
U.S. units in support of the South Koreans are also
compelled to pull back; however, the Americans carry
out all their equipment and weapons. They head east-
ward to link with the 92nd Armored FABn, but the
route is clogged by retreating Koreans and abandoned
vehicles.
When the elements of Company C, 2nd Chemical
Mortar Battalion, and the 2nd Rocket Field Artillery
Battery arrive at the lines of the 92nd Armored FABN
positions, much of their weapons have been left behind
along the unpassable road. While the U.S. toils to fill
in gaps and hold against the attacks, the ROK 6th Di-
vision continues to run. General Chang is unable to
regroup any of his command until about dawn on the
following day at positions about ten miles from where
they were supposed to be. The 24th Division and the
1st Marine Division are both severely jeopardized.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 7th and 5th
Marines advance on the left and center, with the 1st
Korean Marine Regiment moving on the right. In con-
junction, the 1st Marines are kept in reserve. During the
day, the advance meets with little opposition. All the
while, the enemy pours troops into the vacated positions
of the ROK 6th Division. At 2130, word arrives that
west of the division positions, the ROK 6th Division is
under strong pressure. Just after 2200, orders arrive in-
structing the Marines to cancel the scheduled resump-
tion of the advance (at 0800 on the 23rd) and instead,
consolidate their positions. At about the same time, the
ROKs collapse, which creates a huge hole.
The Chinese plow through the gap and punch
against the 7th Marines with the brunt of the assault,
but the 5th Marines also come under attack. The 1st
Battalion, 1st Marines, is called from reserve to move
up and fill the gap on the division’s left flank. Mean-
while, the retreat of the ROKs jams the roads and hin-
ders the advance of the 1st Marines. Just before mid-
night, the Chinese strike the Korean Marines (2nd
Battalion) at Hill 509 on the right and maneuver to
partially surround the 1st Battalion.
At the same time, the center of the perimeter, held by
the 5th Marines, sustains a tenacious assault. At the 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines’ command post at Hwach’on, a
contingent is immediately dispatched to gain Hill 313,
the dominating point that controls the town. A bitter
April 23, 1951
contest ensues as, the Marine platoon and the Chinese
each covet the hill. The Marines lose 7 killed and 17
wounded. Reinforcements from the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, move to reinforce 1st Battalion, but by dawn,
the situation eases. The Marine platoon holds Hill 313;
the Chinese had abandoned it during the night.
In the 7th Marines area along the Division left, the
1st Battalion braces against the onslaught of about
2,000 troops of the 358th Regiment, 120th Division,
Chinese 40th Army. Despite the overwhelming odds,
the Marine 1st Battalion holds steadfastly, thanks in
great part to the support of artillery.
During the battle, PFC Herbert A. Littleton, Com-
pany A, 1st Battalion, is on guard when the attack is
sprung. He alerts the forward observers and remains at
his post to help guide the artillery, but just after more
Marines rush to join him, the enemy tosses a grenade
in their positions. Littleton spots the live grenade and
blankets it with his body to save the others. His sacri-
fice spares the others and permits them to support the
artillery. PFC Littleton is awarded the4 Medal of Honor
posthumously for his selfless sacrifice.
The 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, move up in time to
help hold the line west of Hwach’on. By dawn on the
23rd, the American and South Korean Marines had
thrown back the attacks. The town of Hwach’on and
the dam are preserved. No further attempts to gain it
are made.
With the arrival of dawn on the 23rd, it is apparent
that the Chinese fail to exploit the gap on the flanks,
opened with the retreat of the ROK 6th Division. Only
frontal attacks had been thrown against the Marines.
In the X Corps sector, elements of the N.K. 45th Di-
vision launch attacks against the 32nd Infantry Regi-
ment on the 7th Division’s right flank, but no progress
is made. However, the ROK 3rd Division, holding the
east flank, is hit hard. Before noon on the following
day, the Communists drive the ROKs back and create
a gap with which to reach Inje.
In the ROK III Corps sector, contact is made with el-
ements of the N.K. 12th Division (V Corps) by the
ROK 5th Division at a spot above Inje. Prior to this
day, the ROKs had been encountering elements of the
N.K. 45th Division.
In the 25th Division zone, pressure by the Chinese
and North Koreans prompts the Marines to order the
air support section of MCTACS-2 to pull back about
six miles and reestablish positions about one mile north
of Chunchon. On the 24th, the unit again withdraws
to a point about four miles south of the town.
In Air Force activity, by this date, the airfield at
Suwon has been improved above its primitive condition
and additional Sabre jets of the 334th and 336th
Fighter Interceptor Squadrons of the 4th Fighter In-
terceptor Wing are now there, which permits the U.S.
to dispatch more planes into MiG Alley. The planes on
this afternoon get an opportunity to unfold their re-
cently developed tactic, which has been made possible
by adding two planes to each flight, bringing the total
from four to six planes. With the added power, the
694
Sabres expect to neutraize the MiGs that attack and
separate the formation into two pairs. A patrol of 12
Sabres is intercepted by a band of 36 MiGs while on pa-
trol by the Yalu River. When the MiGs use their tactic
of one diving and one climbing, they discover that four
Sabres pursue the one that climbs and two chase the
one that dives. In addition, the Communists discover
that their timing is bad, as another twelve Sabres arrive
to relieve the one already engaged. The tactic works
well. Four of the MiGs are destroyed and another four
sustain damage. One of the downed planes is credited
to Lt. Colonel Eagleston. It is Eagleston’s second and
final kill of the war. Captain Jabara also gets one kill,
his fourth.
April 23–27 1951 The U.S. Marines en-
gage and halt the Chinese Communist offensive and
prevent them from turning the IX Corps’ flank.
April 23 Far East Air Forces concludes a series of
devastating raids against enemy-held airfields. B29s
have been saturating the airfields, particularly those in
the forward areas in the vicinity of Pyongyang, since the
17th. On this day, the planes also execute about 340
sorties in close-air support missions. The bombers suc-
ceed in eliminating air support for the enemy offen-
sive launched the previous day.
In other activity, prior to noon, General Van Fleet de-
termines that the positions of the I Corps and the IX
Corps have become undefendable, subsequent to the
hasty retreat of the ROK 6th Division on the previous
day. General Van Fleet aborts the advance to the Al-
abama Line (scheduled for 24 April) and he directs I and
IX Corps to establish entrenched positions along the
Kansas Line. Nonetheless, by day’s end, the corps
perimeter remains in peril due to enemy pressure. Dur-
ing the latter part of the day, it is suggested to abandon
the Kansas Line for the Golden Line, just to the front
of Seoul, but General Van Fleet prefers not to grant the
enemy more territory without having them pay a stiff
price.
In other activity, Naval Task Force 77, operating in
the Sea of Japan, changes its fast carrier mission from
interdiction to close support. Other air support in-
cludes USMC fighter squadrons, five of which are land-
based in southeastern Korea and a sixth aboard the es-
cort carrier Bataan. The ground troops are also
supported by the Fifth Air Force, which on this day
carries out 340 sorties. The 1st Marine Air Wing flies
205 sorties and of these, 153 are in support of the front,
including the I Corps as the 24th and 25th Divisions
and elements of the 3rd Infantry Division withdraw to
the Kansas Line.
In the I Corps sector, at Hill 194, defended by the Bel-
gians in the British 29th Brigade zone, a heavy enemy
assault is launched. Reinforcements from the U.S. 2nd
Battalion, 7th Infantry Regiment, bolstered by tanks,
move against the two bridges that had been unprotected
but now remain under the guns of the Chinese. Heavy
fire from the heights at Hill 257 prevents the Ameri-
cans from attempting to force the Hant’an crossing.
 695
A contingent of the 25th Division is deployed in the hills south of Ch’orwon, April 23.
British Brigadier Thomas Brodie pulls back his force
and draws a line about two miles below Hill 257 and
deploys on both sides of Route 11.
Meanwhile, Brodie requests help from General
Soule, who dispatches the 1st Battalion, 7th Infantry
Regiment, to bolster the British positions. The Gloster
Battalion, holding near Route 5Y, had engaged the Chi-
nese since the previous night on Hill 148 west of the
road and Hills 144 and 182 on the opposite side of the
road. Company A, on Hill 144, remains unscathed,
but Company D, at Hill 182, sustains high casualties,
but surrenders no ground. At Hill 148, Company A
repels the enemy throughout the night, but by dawn,
the remaining able-bodied troops are unable to con-
tinue to hold. The positions at an ancient castle near the
summit of the hill are abandoned. Company A estab-
lishes an ambush at the Imjin and after successfully
eliminating many Chinese, the unit retires without sus-
taining any casualties. After dawn (23rd), the battal-
ion redeploys in the vicinity of Solma-ri. Company A
occupies Hill 235 and the remainder deploys nearby
on either side of the road.
During the early part of the day, the Chinese attempt
to ford the Imjin in force at several locations, but ar-
tillery fire and air strikes halt the penetrations prior to
noon.
In related activity, the ROK 1st Division, bolstered
by tanks, repels several intrusions. The 12th ROK Reg-
iment eliminates the probing attacks by about noon.
Other elements push out in front of the perimeter and
April 23, 1951
engage enemy forces until dusk. The regiment inflicts
high casualties on the enemy. About midnight (23rd-
24th), the Communists again strike the ROK 1st Di-
vision. Later, after the ROK 6th Division again aban-
dons its positions, the British Brigade is in the line of
the Chinese advance. The South Koreans halt their
flight after getting to the rear of the Australians.
At about 2200, a platoon of U.S. tanks (4th Platoon,
Company A, 72nd Tank Battalion), under orders to
withdraw as the Chinese approach, had been one of
the units on guard at an outpost by the Kap’yong River
while the South Koreans retreated. Suddenly, the unit
comes under fire as the approaching troops, thought
to be ROKs, actually are Chinese. The tankers resist
the hordes tenaciously and with the hatches open. The
engagement costs the platoon two of its tank com-
manders and its commanding officer before it is able to
turn and retire and hook up with the 2nd platoon at the
Kap’yong ford. En route, another tank platoon (1st
Platoon) intercepts the 4th Platoon at the blocking po-
sition.
Chinese troops compel the 4th Platoon leader to re-
turn to the island ridge, while the remainder of the pla-
toon continues toward the ford. In the meantime, the
Chinese continue to flood through the gaps. The Aus-
tralians on Hill 504 maintain a steadfast defense, despite
the lack of artillery support. Repeatedly, the Australians
repel assaults. The Chinese gain two positions held by
platoons, but one is later regained. During the night-
long contest, the U.S. tanks on the island hold the
April 23, 1951
U.S. troops in search of enemy near the Hant’an River.
ground, but Company B, 2nd Chemical Mortar Com-
pany, deployed behind the Australians, had pulled out
and abandoned its vehicles and weapons. The 213th
FABn and the New Zealanders, also deployed to the
rear of Hill 504, had been ordered to pull back by
Brigadier Burke when Chinese pressure became too
great. Nevertheless, the Australians hold.
By about dawn on the following day, the Chinese
again sustained heavy casualties. Their attacks subside.
However, at about midnight (23rd-24th), the Com-
munists reinitiate contact and engage some units of the
24th and 25th Divisions. The ROK 1st Division and
the British 29th Brigade, each deployed along the Imjin
696
River, also come under attack. Company B, holding
the battalion’s right flank, becomes surrounded.
Meanwhile, within the British zone, Company C,
along Route 5Y, is directed to withdraw to positions
between Companies A and D near Hill 235, but
Brigadier Brodie is convinced that the troops on the
right flank would not be able to penetrate the Chinese
to reach safety. The isolated unit, Company B, spends
the night repelling all attempts to destroy it.
In the 3rd Division zone, General Soule orders a pull-
back from the western part of the zone along the Utah
Line. At about noon, the 65th Infantry Regiment be-
gins to drop back by passing through the 7th Infantry
 697
Regiment. As the leap-frog move unfolds, the 3rd Bat-
talion, 65th Infantry, bolstered by tanks (64th Tank
Battalion) and the 3rd Reconnaissance Company deploy
slightly above the Hant’an River along Route 33 to de-
fend there until the Belgian contingent on Hill 194 is
able to extricate itself. The 1st Battalion, 7th Infantry
Regiment, supported by tanks, moves up Route 11 to
attack Hill 675 on the summit of Kamak Mountain.
Later at about 1800, the 1st Battalion pivots and
moves north against Hill 257, but only minimal
progress is made by 2000. In the meantime, the Belgians
are able to abandon their positions and reach relative
safety on Route 33, which leads them to an assembly
zone at the junction with Route 11. In conjunction,
the 1st Battalion, led by Colonel Weyand, breaks off its
attack and rejoins the 7th Regiment along the Kansas
Line. Also, once the Belgians form with their vehicles
and head to the line, the 65th Infantry’s 3rd Battalion
and its supporting armor and reconnaissance units
abandon the blocking positions at the Hant’an River
and head for the Kansas Line.
Meanwhile, the Philippine 10th Battalion Combat
Team, expected to plug the hole in the British Brigade’s
line, arrives at the brigade’s headquarters at about 2000,
but too late to attempt to deploy between the Gloster
Battalion and the fusiliers.
At about midnight, the Communists press against
the entire 3rd Division line. Meanwhile, the belea-
guered ROK 6th Division (IX Corps) remains scat-
tered, but more than 2,000 troops had been regrouped
by General Chang. He is directed to move his force
several miles north to the Kansas Line. The Chinese,
however, rip into the positions of the 24th Division
(on loan to I Corps) at the center of the line to open
a hole between the 19th and 5th Infantry Regiments.
The struggle continues through the early morning
hours and some units are compelled to give ground.
General Bryan orders his reserve 21st Regiment to seize
the high ground, where the penetration first occurred,
but the Chinese arrive before the regiment could take
it. The Chinese are able to drive a wedge that pene-
trates about three miles, but General Bryan readjusts his
regiments, drawing them back and forming a galva-
nized line. Chinese pressure remains constant, but the
line holds.
After General Bryan learns of his unprotected flank
because of the ROK 5th Division’s retreat, he directs the
21st Regiment to plug the gap. The Chinese again fail
to take advantage of the hole, instead launching frontal
attacks. Patrols of the Eighth Army’s Ranger Company
(attached to the 21st Regiment) move out in an east-
ward direction, but no Chinese forces are discovered
on the flank. The division manages to withdraw to the
Kansas Line by 1800.
After dark, the Communists again strike the ROK
6th Division and as on the previous night, it immedi-
ately collapses and runs. The retreat causes pandemo-
nium as the roads clog. The New Zealanders had sped
to support the ROK 6th Division, but before the con-
tingent could prepare its defense, it, too, becomes jeop-
April 23, 1951
ardized. In addition, the 27th British Brigade’s posi-
tions become threatened.
In the 25th Division zone, in the eastern section, by
dawn, enemy pressure lessens. The Division is able to
reach the Kansas Line during the afternoon. After ar-
riving, the 24th and 35th Regiments redeploy on the
ridges that the division previously held between the
Yongp’yong and Hant’an Rivers. In conjunction, the
27th Regiment and the Turkish Brigade set up posi-
tions at the Yongp’yong River.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
preparations are being completed for the advance to
the Alabama Line, but by about 1100 on the following
day, the operation is cancelled. The 1st Marine Divi-
sion is ordered to form a line that extends from the dam
at the Hwach’on Reservoir in a southwestwardly direc-
tion that traces the Pukham River. The line is desig-
nated Pendleton. The 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, are
taken by truck from the village of Todun-ni along the
west bank of the Pukham River to Hill 902, but the
Chinese also are en route to gain the hill, aware that it
controls the river where the 1st Marine Division would
have to cross.
The Chinese are unable to arrive first. Companies
G, H and I, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, occupy three
separate ridge lines that straddle the path to the hill
mass, with mortar and machine gun support to their re-
spective immediate rears. By mid-day, the three Ma-
rine regiments complete the establishment of a line
formed in what might be described as a fish hook, but
some separations exist between the regiments. Nonethe-
less, the Marines are prepared for an expected Chinese
night assault.
By day’s end, it becomes evident that the ROK 6th
Division remains unstable and disorganized, which
places the Marines in further jeopardy. In conjunction,
the 11th Marines (Marine Artillery) is deployed at
Chich’on-ni. The 92nd FABn and the other units, in-
cluding the 987th FABn, that were driven back subse-
quent to the retreat of the ROK 6th Division are di-
rected to form in the vicinity of the 11th Marines.
During the operation to move to the Kansas Line, ob-
servation planes detect large numbers of Chinese mov-
ing through the vacated positions of the ROK 6th Di-
vision. The Marines conclude that these forward forces
are en route to sever the supply line.
At Horseshoe Ridge, defended by the 1st Battalion,
1st Marines, elements of the Chinese 120th Division
launch an attack at about 2000. Several hundred Chi-
nese rush in successive waves and compel a forward po-
sition of Company C to pull back under the relentless
thrust, which includes machine gun and mortar fire
and, from close-range, hundreds of grenades. The
Marines, however, hold the ridge, despite about four
hours of non-stop combat and a simultaneous eerie ser-
enade of Chinese chants and yells. At about midnight,
the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, is attacked, but Com-
panies G, H and I receive the brunt of it. At Company
G’s outpost, the Communists overrun the small contin-
gent and force it back.
April 24, 1951
A nearby contingent led by Tech Sergeant Harold E.
Wilson attempts to return fire and cover the retirement.
Wilson becomes wounded twice as he assists the sur-
vivors from the outpost. The heavy fire continues to
pour down from the heights. Despite his wounds, Wil-
son refuses evacuation and maintains control over his
contingent. Meanwhile, he is wounded twice more and
incapacitated, unable to use his arms to fire. Un-
daunted, Wilson continues to hand ammunition and
weapons to his fellow troops and in addition, he finds
time to call for reinforcements. When they arrive, he
also directs them against the enemy. Wilson continues
in extreme pain, but he refuses to quit and his men fol-
low suit. At dawn, the enemy has been repulsed and
the ground remains under the control of C Company.
Wilson becomes the recipient of the Medal of Honor for
his outstanding leadership and courage in the face of the
enemy.
Other units that come under attack include the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines, and the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines. Nonetheless, by dawn, the Marines remain
in place and the Chinese sustain a huge number of ca-
sualties.
In other activity, the ROK 6th Division is expected
to arrive at the Kansas Line; however, by the latter part
of the afternoon, it remains in place, still unprepared to
move. General Hoge, concerned about the absence of
the ROKs on the Kansas Line, directs the British 27th
Brigade to deploy and defend the Kap’yong River Val-
ley to the rear of the South Koreans. Hoge wants to as-
sure that the Chinese cannot sever Route 17 and take
the village of Kap’yong. The blocking positions guard
against intrusions along both valley approaches.
Elements of the Royal Australian Regiment deploy at
Hill 504 and a contingent of the Princess Patricia’s
Canadian Light Infantry spreads out on Hill 677. The
British positions are supported by U.S. contingents, in-
cluding elements of the 72nd Tank Battalion, 2nd
Chemical Mortar Battalion and the 74th Engineer
Combat Battalion.
In the ROK III Corps sector, at about midnight (22nd-
23rd), while the corps prepares for an advance on the
following day to the Alabama Line, the Communists
strike the positions of the ROK 35th Regiment, ROK
5th Division, at midnight. The Communists continue
to pound the regiment and by dawn, the South Kore-
ans take flight. In the meantime, the North Korean
12th Division funnels into the zone. The enemy ad-
vances into a large gap between the 35th and the 5th
Regiments (7th ROK Division). Although 35th deserts
its positions, the ROK 5th Regiment attempts to hold,
but it too is compelled to retreat or risk entrapment. The
5th Regiment makes a disciplined fighting withdrawal.
Afterwards, all ROK forces in the vicinity of Inje come
under the control of Colonel Min Ki Shik, the com-
mander of the 5th Regiment.
In Air Force activity, F-86s attached to the 336th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron begin to operate from the
airfield at Suwon. From this location, the F-86s are able
to stay in the air on target for longer periods when op-
698
erating in the area near the Yalu River, known as MiG
Alley.
Also, in an effort to bolster the offensive, Far East
Air Forces presses its capacity in the air by initiating
more than 1,000 sorties on this day. The performances
of the pilots remain identical for the next three days,
with an average of 1,000 combat sorties each day. The
planes achieve great success and inflict heavy casualties
upon enemy forces and in the process huge amounts
of supplies are also destroyed.
April 24 In the I Corps sector, the 24th and 25th
Divisions and elements of the 3rd Division are now on
the Kansas Line. The Communists, at about midnight
(23rd-24th), launched attacks against some units, but
heavier assaults had been thrown against the ROK 6th
Division and the British 29th Brigade at the same time.
On this day, the attacks intensify. Despite heavy sup-
port for the 1st Marine Division, Marine squadrons
also support I Corps with 57 sorties.
In the 24th Division zone, Hill 664 is gained by the
Chinese 179th Regiment, giving it dominating high
ground; however, throughout the day, the Chinese fail
to push the 24th Division from its positions. The line
is augmented by two battalions of the 27th Infantry
Regiment (25th Division) that deploy at the base of
Hill 664. Repeated assaults are repelled. Some minor
gains are made against the 17th Regiment, but U.S.
counterattacks regain the lost ground. Although the
24th Division holds the line, it discovers that large
numbers of Chinese forces are gathering in positions
to strike the right flank, held by the 21st Regiment,
and other attacks against the front.
In the British 29th Brigade zone near Solma-ri, along
Route 5 at Hill 235, as dawn emerges, Company
B, Gloster Battalion, still holds its ground but the
situation deteriorates. The Chinese prepare to liqui-
date the isolated command. Under cover fire, the be-
leaguered troops try to break out by descending the
south slopes, but the trek turns into tragedy. Only
twenty men escape the Chinese fire to reach the main
body at Hill 235.
At Hill 235, the Chinese mount a furious attack and
temporarily gain the summit, but the casualty rate had
been so high that a counterattack regains the ground.
The Gloster Battalion receives word that reinforcements
are en route, but in the meantime, the Chinese are
massing for a full-scale attack. Complications develop
as the reinforcements encounter problems.
In the 3rd Division zone, events of the previous night
cause General Soule to modify his lines. The Chinese
had on the previous night shadowed the 1st Battalion,
7th Regiment (3rd Division), as it withdrew from the
vicinity of Hill 257 and afterwards, attacked elements
of the Northumberland Fusiliers and the Royal Ulster
Rifles at their positions near Route 11, about two miles
south. On this day heavy fighting breaks out between
the enemy and Company B, 1st Battalion, 7th Regi-
ment, in the vicinity of Popsu-dong. The attack is too
strong to thwart. Orders to retire arrive, but Corporal
 699
Clair Goodblood, a machine gunner from Company
H attached, volunteers to cover the withdrawal.
Meanwhile the assault continues and waves of enemy
troops storm the area. Another man assists Goodblood
with the Herculean task of keeping the enemy at bay,
but a grenade is tossed into their position. Goodblood
slams himself over the other man to protect him, but
to no avail, the grenade wounds both. Goodblood re-
sists evacuation, instead insisting on getting the other
trooper out. The badly wounded Goodblood remains
at his machine gun to ensure the withdrawal succeeds.
Eventually the enemy overruns his position, but when
the command returns and retakes the ground, Good-
blood is not alone. About 100 enemy dead are still in
the field to the front of his silent gun. Corporal Good-
blood is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraor-
dinary heroism and his selfless sacrifice.
In another fierce contest, Company H, 3rd Battal-
ion, comes under a heavy assault during darkness. The
enemy is introduced to Corporal Hiroshi Miyamura, a
New Mexican who leads a squad of the machine gun
section. Miyamura first bolts from his position with a
rifle and fixed bayonet to protect his squad. In the brief
contest, about ten of the enemy fall to the steel, but af-
terwards, the machine gun takes over, until the position
becomes untenable due to the exhaustion of his am-
munition.
Still Miyamura pauses at the gun after he directs the
remainder of his detachment to withdraw. The fight-
ing corporal disables the gun and then, with his bayo-
net, fights his way back to another machine gun and
continues to fire against the hordes of enemy troops.
When last spotted by the survivors of his squad, he was
heavily engaged against a large number of enemy
troops. Corporal Hiroshi H. Miyamura, known as
“Hershey,” is awarded the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary heroism against insurmountable odds. At
this time, there is no knowledge of the corporal’s fate;
however, he is not killed; rather captured. He survives
brutal treatment and loses about fifty pounds in cap-
tivity.
In the meantime, the Gloster Battalion’s withdrawal
to Hill 235, linked with the pull-back of the 7th Reg-
iment, creates a large gap of about four miles. General
Soule orders British Brigadier Brodie to dispatch a bat-
talion to block the hole. In addition, Brodie is directed
to dispatch a contingent of tanks, supported by in-
fantry, to advance and clear Route 5Y, to permit rein-
forcement of the Gloster Battalion.
Six Centurians attached to C Squadron, 8th Hus-
sars, and four tanks of the 10th Philippine Combat
Battalion shepherd three rifle companies; however, the
Centurians are too large to pass some points on the
road, leaving only the light tanks of the Filipinos to
complete the trip.
The Glosters remain under the impression that the
full complement is en route and Colonel Carne has de-
termined that his force is not sufficiently strong to fight
its way out of the trap.
In the 65th Regimental zone, the Chinese strike the
April 24, 1951
area with mortars and small arms, while the Northum-
berland Fusilier and Royal Ulster Rifle Battalions fight
off strong frontal assaults by the Chinese 188th Divi-
sion. Some elements of the enemy division manage to
penetrate to the rear of the two battalions.
Also, by about dusk, the situation along the entire 7th
Infantry Regiment perimeter becomes calm. During
the afternoon, the lull in the battle permitted the 1st
Battalion, 7th Regiment, to relieve the 3rd Battalion,
65th Infantry Regiment, at the center of the regimen-
tal line. Once relieved, the 3rd Battalion moves to re-
join its main body to prepare to extricate the isolated
Gloster Battalion. A few hours before midnight, the
tranquility along the 7th’s line is shattered.
The Chinese press the entire line and by about 0230,
the 2nd Battalion becomes encircled. Nevertheless,
through some complicated maneuvers, the isolated bat-
talion is able to splinter into small contingents and
break through the Chinese lines to reach friendly forces
by about dawn (25th). The 1st and 3rd Battalions, still
under the regimental commander Colonel Boswell,
thwart the repeated assaults and hold the line. A group
of Gloster troops, captured on the previous night, es-
cape harm when U.S. planes strike the Chinese positions
near Hill 675. They also literally escape and reach
friendly lines during the morning. It is learned from
the escapees that at least 1,000 Chinese are deployed at
Hill 675.
The decision to continue the relief effort is suspended
until the following day. Nevertheless, during the after-
noon, it is learned that the Philippine 10th Combat
Battalion Team had broken through with the Centuri-
ans trailing, so again the strategy is changed and the
attack to rescue the Glosters is reinitiated. Soon after,
the tank on the point loses a track from either a mine
or mortar fire and it blocks the route. The Chinese
pour fire upon the stalled tank and ground troops de-
scend the heights to reach it. In the meantime, two of
the heavier Centurians advance and move cautiously
past the stalled Filipino column. The tanks move only
a short distance farther due to the thinning of the path,
but they do manage to rescue the jeopardized crew in
the disabled tank.
The attack is cancelled and the relief force is ordered
to withdraw. In the confusion of the order, the 10th
Battalion Combat Team inadvertently is directed to re-
tire, rather than hold a blocking position as earlier or-
dered. The Gloster Battalion remains stranded. The
failure of the ROK 6th Division to hold its positions,
combined with the deteriorating situation of the be-
leaguered British contingent, the I Corps is unable to
execute a withdrawal on schedule as planned by Eighth
Army. While efforts are undertaken to extricate the
British, the Chinese maintain enormous pressure
against I Corps.
In the ROK 1st Division zone, the Communists had
suspended their attacks at about noon on the previous
day, but later, at midnight (23rd-24th), again an at-
tack is launched. The ROK 12th Regiment is compelled
to surrender ground where it stood on the right flank
April 24, 1951
along the Imjin. By dawn, elements of the Chinese
190th Division shoot across the Imjin at several places
in the vicinity of Korangp’o-ri, where earlier contin-
gents of the 189th Chinese Division had crossed. The
enemy forces break into various columns and some
penetrate between the 11th and 12th ROK Regiments,
while others drive south between the 12th Regiment
and the isolated Gloster battalion.
Following a day-long counter-attack, the ROKs,
supported by Company A, 72nd Tank Battalion, re-
gain the gap and establish entrenched positions there be-
tween the two ROK regiments. The penetration causes
great concern at corps headquarters. General Milburn
moves to bolster the line to protect Seoul. The only
available reserve, the 15th Regiment, 3rd Division,
speeds to establish a line slightly more than five miles
behind the ROKs where Route 1B can be blocked.
General Milburn dispatches the 2nd Battalion, 15th
Regiment, to secure another secondary road, Route 2X.
By about 1800, the 1st Battalion encounters an enemy
roadblock near Uijongbu and immediately eradicates it.
The enemy loses twenty defenders and the rest aban-
don the obstacle. Afterwards, the 15th Regiment, rather
than risk unnecessary casualties, suspends its clearing
operation until dawn on the following day.
Also, about dusk, the 25th Division in the eastern
corps sector comes under a tenacious assault that con-
tinues relentlessly until about midnight (24th-25th).
The Americans fight off elements of three divisions
(Chinese 29th, 81st and 179th). During the attacks,
the 24th and 27th Regiments give ground and withdraw
southward about one mile, but the Chinese pursue.
While the 25th Division attempts to halt the Chinese
progress, the 24th Division holding the corps’ right
sector also is struck. The pressure becomes too high,
which compels General Milburn at 0500 (25th) to
order a pullback to the Delta Line.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
1st Marine Division withstands a night-long attack
against its line and inflicts large numbers of casualties
against elements of the Chinese 40th Army (359th and
360th Regiments, 120th Division) and the Chinese
39th Army (115th and 116th Divisions). After day-
break, the division withdraws from its Pendleton Line
to the Kansas Line. During the final phase of the attack,
the Chinese manage to get behind the Marines to strike
against the 92nd Armored Field Artillery Battalion as
it is beginning to move out. The troops redeploy to de-
fend and soon after, they are bolstered by Marine tanks.
The enemy pays another steep price and fails to inter-
rupt the withdrawal. The attacking force of between
200 and 300 troops is decimated. The 92nd sustains
four killed and eleven wounded.
The largest problem during the attacks seemed to
have been maintaining an ammunition supply. Marines
in some instances became runners to hand carry ammo
to the front, after transporting wounded Marines to
safety.
One VMO-6 helicopter, piloted by Lt. Robert E.
Matthewson, is downed during the morning while at-
700
tempting to evacuate wounded. Although the helicop-
ter is destroyed, he survives. Another helicopter arrives
to lift him to safety, but he declines the offer and instead
picks up an M-1 rifle to join the infantry as they with-
draw.
In related activity, some enemy forces attempt to
shadow the Marines as they move toward the Kansas
Line, but the fighting withdrawal of the rear-guard re-
ceives support from planes and artillery. Forty-nine
Marine Corsairs and forty Navy and Air Force Ads
shepherd the Marine pullback. Three Corsairs and one
observation plane are downed by the Chinese during the
operation. However, the pull-back is successful, so
much so that by dawn on the 25th, the Marines’
perimeter is free of major opposition. The 120th Di-
vision (40th Army) and the 39th Army’s divisions fail
to mount any future major attacks during the offen-
sive. The move to the Kansas Line is necessitated pri-
marily because the ROK 6th Division is still unable to
move into position.
On this day, General Chang informs General Hoge
that he is in the process of regrouping about four thou-
sand to five thousand men in his command that con-
verged on positions behind the Australians on Hill 504.
At Hill 504, the Australians continue to hold against fe-
rocious attacks. They have no artillery support, but
still, they hold.
The commanding officers request reinforcements
from British Brigadier Burke. The Australians lose a
little ground, but from the new command post, some
good fortune arrives. The New Zealanders have by this
time regrouped and redeployed to provide artillery. The
defenders on Hill 504 also are greeted by the sound of
Marine Corsairs. The combined fire of the Australians,
the artillery and the Corsairs shreds the attacking
columns. Repeated assaults are repelled; however, dur-
ing one of the air strikes, an Australian unit is inadver-
tently hit with napalm. The accident costs the lives of
two men and it wounds several others. Despite the ap-
parent success, the Australians on Hill 504 remain in
peril due to a large hole between them and the Middle-
sex positions.
Prior to noon, Brigadier Burke orders the hill aban-
doned. The U.S. tanks (72nd Tank Battalion) on the is-
land ridge transport Colonel Ferguson from his com-
mand post to Hill 504 to execute the withdrawal. The
tanks bring out wounded and then they return across
the field of fire to transport ammunition and supplies
to the troops on the hill. Defying the odds, the tanks
also pick up volunteers from Company B, 74th Engi-
neer Battalion, and transport them to the abandoned
positions of the mortar company that fled the previous
night. The engineers, afterwards, are protected by the
tanks as they gather some of the equipment that they
had earlier abandoned.
In the meantime, the Australians move off Hill 504,
while the tanks push to the north to block the ford and
prevent the Chinese from moving through the Kap’y-
ong Valley to overwhelm the Australians as they with-
draw.
 701
As the Australians descend from Hill 504, the Chi-
nese begin to ascend, but unexpectedly, they are greeted
by smoke signals. The New Zealanders pound the
slopes with artillery shells that deliver the smoke screen.
The New Zealanders also present the Chinese with a
large dose of high explosive rounds as they descend one
company at a time while covering the rear. Both the
Australians and the New Zealanders move through the
Middlesex lines slightly after dusk.
In related activity, after the Australians evade the
Chinese, the Canadians on Hill 677 become the prey.
The Chinese launch the attack against Hill 677 at about
2200 and the battle continues through the night.
In the X Corps sector, at about dawn, the ROK 5th Di-
vision is struck by the N.K. 12th Division. The de-
fenders collapse and the Communists drive easily to
Inje. At the lines of the U.S. 7th Division, the N.K.
45th Division plows against the 32nd Regiment, posi-
tioned left of the ROK 5th Division, but here the Com-
munists do not fare well. And nearby, at the west flank
of X Corps perimeter, the 23rd Regiment, 2nd Divi-
sion, also holds firmly.
During the enemy assault, the North Koreans con-
verge upon a draw near Tokko-ri, but while there, un-
expectedly, an iron storm overwhelms them. A U.S.
forward observer for artillery spots the enticing target
and alerts the artillery. Shortly thereafter, the relent-
less bombardment commences and scores a massive se-
ries of direct hits on the troops numbering about 400.
The artillery observer who detected the formations in-
forms headquarters that only two North Koreans came
out of the gully. The ill-fated advance of the N.K. 45th
Division is unable to gain territory, but once the 32nd
Infantry Regiment abandons its positions to deploy on
a ridge and link with the ROK 5th Division that had
been shoved below Inje, the North Koreans occupy the
32nd’s positions.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the NK 6th Division
drives against the III Corps positions and penetrates to
a point several miles below Inje, but the ROKs are able
at that time to halt the momentum.
In Air Force activity, a B-26 light bomber gets shot
down by enemy fire in the vicinity of Ch’orwon. The
3rd Air Rescue Squadron dispatches an H-19 helicop-
ter to rescue the pilot and the navigator. The rescue at-
tempt is not an easy task. The helicopter first rescues
the pilot and the navigator is then rescued, but under
special circumstances. The navigator had broken his
leg and is captured by two enemy troops. Nonetheless,
he is able to seize one of his captors’ guns and the enemy
then flees. Both men are safely retrieved and brought
back to friendly lines. During the retrieval, the rescuers
work while fighter planes circle and keep the enemy
pinned down.
April 25 General Van Fleet remains concerned
about the security of Seoul, particularly since the I
Corps had withdrawn from the Imjin River, which pro-
vided an opportunity for the Communists to slip across
the Han River estuary without being detected. If ac-
April 25, 1951
complished, they enemy could effortlessly drive down
the Kimpo peninsula to the rear of the capital and cap-
ture Inchon along with Kimpo airfield and the airport
at Seoul. To thwart such enemy progress, Van Fleet re-
quests support from the U.S. Navy. He gets it from
Task Force 95. By the following day, planes from the
western section of the task force maintain vigil over the
area where it is thought a crossing might be attempted.
The USS Toledo embarks from the Sea of Japan to the
area near Inchon, from where it can provide its guns to
the operation.
In the I Corps sector, prior to dawn General Milburn
concludes that the I Corps must abandon the Kansas
Line due to Chinese pressure. At 0500, the order for the
corps to withdraw is issued. General Milburn remains
concerned about the isolated Gloster Battalion. To
maintain cohesion during the withdrawal, the 24th and
25th Divisions are to commence the move at 0800;
however, the 3rd Division and the ROK 1st Division
are to hold in place until the beleaguered Gloster unit
is retrieved. As it turns out, the relief efforts fail and
the cost is high, due in part to bad communications.
The Gloster Battalion on Hill 235 apparently believes
that help is en route and that the troops can hold. The
general withdrawal causes one attempt by the 65th
Regiment, 3rd Division, to be cancelled, but another
contingent from the only available reserve, the 64th
Tank Battalion and the 65th Infantry tank company,
is available.
British Major Huth suggests that tanks alone would
be unable to break through to the trapped command,
and his opinion is based on his experience of the pre-
vious day’s rescue attempt. Nevertheless, no strong in-
fantry is included. The commander of the 65th In-
fantry tank company is informed also that he is not to
commit his full company. The one tank platoon that de-
parts is short one of its tanks. During the planning, the
3rd Division commander, General Soule, is unaware
of just how bad the situation is for the Gloster Battal-
ion.
All the while, the ROK 1st Division is attempting to
advance to secure ground lost by the ROK 12th Regi-
ment of the previous day. The ROKs are supported by
elements of the 73rd Heavy Tank Battalion. General
Kanh intends to have his force clear the area and break
through to the Gloster Battalion. While the Gloster
Battalion attempts to hold, the initial rescue team hits
opposition short of its target and is halted. The fire
fight costs the tanks most of their ammunition and they
cancel the advance.
By about noon, the ROKs become stalled. In the
meantime, at about 0900, the Glosters are directed by
Brigadier Brodie to fight their way out of the trap. At
about the same time Brigadier Brodie instructs the
Northumberland Fusiliers and the Royal Ulster Rifles
to retire southward along Route 11, through the lines
of the Belgians. The retreat of the British is hotly pur-
sued by the Chinese, costing the British dearly. Many
wounded are left unprotected on the tanks as heavy
Chinese fire rips the tanks as they race for safety.
April 25, 1951
Artillerymen of the 204th FABn, deployed north of Seoul, initiate a barrage with their “Long Toms.”
Chinese fire disables some of the tanks and the occu-
pants are apparently all killed. Later, Brodie is able to
get the mangled forces back to the Delta line.
Meanwhile at about 0900, the Gloster Battalion
under Colonel Carne attempts to break out, but not in
the direction of the advancing 65th Infantry tank com-
pany; rather, Carne intends to head southwest from Hill
235. Colonel Carne directs the troops to withdraw, but
he informs them he is staying with the wounded, about
fifty troops. Suddenly others — including the chaplain,
the battalion surgeon and some medics—also decide to
stay. About 100 men with Captain M.G. Harvey take
a separate route than the main body. Soon Harvey’s
group encounters two Chinese as they enter the valley,
but both are eliminated. Later they are spotted by an
observation plane, but the Chinese also detect the men
702
and more troops are hit. Eventually, they encounter
American tanks, but initially the tankers mistake them
for enemy and six more troops are wounded.
The Gloster survivors reach safety with the tanks
and the ROKs at about 1400. Most of the remainder of
the battalion that attempted to break out had been cap-
tured en route.
Meanwhile, in the 7th Regiment zone, heavy fight-
ing continues from the previous day. Company A, 1st
Battalion, near Popsu-dong continues fighting a delay-
ing action, while the 3rd Battalion pulls back. Two
squads have already repelled repetitive assaults, but
more of the enemy continues to press against their
diminutive positions on the right flank and threaten to
isolate the contingents.
Corporal John Essebagger, Jr., with one of the
 703
The 65th Infantry, 3rd Division, traverses a valley road during late April. The regiment reverts to reserve
on 27 April.
squads, senses the danger as the noose closes. He vol-
unteers to hold the line to provide cover fire for a with-
drawal. The squad, under cover fire from Essebagger,
safely evacuates. Essebagger manages to eliminate a
high number of the enemy but is finally overrun. Cor-
poral Essebagger is posthumously awarded the Medal
of Honor for his tremendous heroism under fire and
his selfless sacrifice to save others.
In the 3rd Battalion area, the enemy launches a fe-
rocious attack against Company I. Two troops try to
stem the tide, but the enemy fire kills one of the troops,
leaving Corporal Charles L. Gilliland to stand alone
with his automatic rifle. Rather than retreat, Gilliland
holds his ground and pours fire into the attackers, but
the odds are too great. He bolts from his foxhole in
pursuit of two of the enemy who had penetrated his
sector. He eliminates both with his pistol. In the
process, Gilliland is wounded in the head. He refuses
treatment and when orders arrive to pull back, he vol-
unteers to hold the line to provide cover fire. The com-
pany safely retires. Corporal Gilliland is killed. He is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary courage and selfless sacrifice.
Also, the Chinese 354th Regiment, bloodied by the
Australians at Hill 504 on the previous night, also moved
against the Canadians holding Hill 677. The Chinese
had been reinforced by elements of the 118th Regiment.
Aware of the impending threat, the Canadians under Lt.
Colonel J.R. Stone switched a contingent from positions
on the northern slopes to a southern slope on Stone’s in-
tuition that the Chinese might move against the rear.
The attack, beginning with machine gun fire and mor-
tars, had struck at 2200 on the 24th, but the Canadians
had not been caught off-guard. While Company B de-
fended the southern slope, the remainder fought off
frontal assaults. The Canadians received some additional
support from a bright moon, which fortuitously illumi-
nated the targets. A large contingent of Chinese is
whacked decisively by artillery as they move across the
Kap’yong River heading east.
While the New Zealanders hammer the enemy at
the river, the Canadians mow down the Chinese that
April 25, 1951
emerge from a gully during the frontal attack. In the
meantime, the rear approach comes under attack, but
here, too, the troops of Company B repulse the initial
charge. Afterward, some ground is lost to a second at-
tack, but subsequent assaults throughout the night into
dawn (25th) are repelled at the rear.
At about 0200 on this day, the Chinese mount a tena-
cious assault against the front of the perimeter. Company
D, holding the left flank, is nearly overwhelmed by an
enormous force, but the commander calls in artillery
upon his own positions. The artillery succeeds in bolster-
ing the positions and the Canadians push the Chinese
from the crest. By dawn, with the added support of tanks
attached to the U.S. 72nd Tank Battalion, the Chinese
abort the attacks against the flanks. The hill remains
under Canadian control. However, the Chinese hold
ground along the Kap’yong Road, which prevents the
British from getting supplies to the beleaguered force.
Meanwhile, Lt. Colonel Stone defies the odds and re-
quests an air drop. About six hours later, planes from
Japan fly over and deposit ammunition and supplies.
The Canadians (Patricia’s Canadian Light Infantry)
compel the Chinese to abandon the attack during the
latter part of the afternoon. The Chinese sustain high
casualties for their failed attempt to seize the hill. The
Canadians lose ten killed and twenty-three wounded.
Also, during the operation to withdraw, the 25th Di-
vision’s route includes two bridges, one at Route 3 and
another at Yongp’yong. The Chinese earlier gained Hill
664, several miles north of the Route 3 crossing, prompt-
ing General Bradley to deploy the 3rd Battalion, 27th In-
fantry, in front of the bridge to block any Chinese ad-
vance. The entire 27th Regiment receives responsibility
to keep both bridges secure for the withdrawal.
By the evening, the 27th Regiment arrives at the Delta
line. In the meantime, the 5th Infantry Regiment (on
loan from IX Corps, 24th Division), is deployed along
Route 3A a few miles to the rear of the Kansas Line. It
is directed to cover the pull-back of the 19th and 21st
Infantry Regiments and its support units, including
the 555th FABn and Company D, 6th Medium Tank
Battalion.
April 26, 1951
The 5th Infantry anticipates the arrival of the 8th
Ranger Company, but before it can arrive, the Chinese
encircle it. The Rangers attempt to hold at Hill 1010
just off the right flank of the 21st Regiment. The 5th
Regiment moves out to rescue the rangers.
In the meantime, the 19th and 21st Regiments reach
the Delta Line. The 21st Regiment is attacked by the
Chinese after its arrival, but the enemy thrust from the
east is repulsed. Subsequently, the ROK 6th Division
in the IX Corps and the 21st Regiment make contact
on the line. While the regiments establish their new
positions, the rangers attempt to break through the
Chinese lines. A contingent of tanks moving toward
the embattled hill spots some rangers who broke out.
Sixty-five exhausted rangers are picked up. They are
the survivors of the 8th Ranger Company.
After the surviving rangers are brought to safety, the
5th Regiment and its support units initiate the move to
the Delta Line. En route, Chinese holding high ground
on opposite side of the escape road pound the column
and hit the 555th FABn especially hard. The column
stands less than one mile from the Delta Line when it
comes under the heavy assault.
Colonel Wilson’s forces return fire and succeed in elim-
inating the threat on the east side of Route 3A, but even
more fire continues to pour down from the west side.
Successive attacks fail to eliminate the enemy. The 1st
Battalion is repulsed three times and the 2nd Battalion also
is stymied. In addition, a contingent of tanks attempt to
quell the fire, but it costs Company A, 6th Medium Tank
Battalion, two of its tanks and the infantry atop them. No
reinforcements arrive from the Delta Line, but a separate
road is discovered and the column takes the circuitous
route unhindered by the Chinese, and arrives at the lines
of the 19th Regiment slightly after dusk.
In the IX Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division gal-
vanizes its positions at the Kansas Line. On the previ-
ous day, subsequent to moving from the Pendleton
Line, the Chinese entered Hwach’on and covered the
area, including where the dam is located, but the
Marines retired unhindered by pursuers. On this day,
the Marines’ zone remains relatively tranquil.
A U.S. M46 Patton tank tows a disabled tank through Uijongbu.
704
The casualties incurred by the 1st Marine Division
on 24-25 April amount to 18 killed and 82 wounded,
which brings the total casualties since 1 April to just
under 300. The IX Corps instructs the 1st Marine Di-
vision to be prepared to move back to Chunchon on the
26th to deploy on the south bank of the Soyang River
to guard the service units as they withdraw their re-
spective supply depots. The Chinese assaults in the IX
Corps zone had failed, but they change strategy and try
to penetrate the I Corps to seize Seoul.
In the X Corps sector, the U.S. 2nd Division modifies its
positions to adjust to the absence of the 1st Marine Di-
vision. The 23rd Regiment pulls back to positions near
the eastern fringes of the Hwach’on Reservoir. The rede-
ployment places the regiment about online with the
Marines who are deployed along the Kansas Line at the
western end of the reservoir in the vicinity of Yuch’on-ni.
The X Corps commander, General Almond, initiates
several directives to blunt the enemy offensive. The
ROK 5th Division is ordered to mount a counterattack
to regain Inje, which the division had surrendered on the
previous day. The town is seized, but the Communists
afterward force the South Koreans to retire. The ROK
III Corps, expected to join in the attack, never advances.
Almond also directs the 2nd Division to initiate contact
with the 1st Marine Division on a daily basis to ensure
a coordinated effort against any potential threat.
General Ruffner establishes TF Zebra, composed of
elements of the 72nd Tank Battalion and the 2nd Re-
connaissance Company, bolstered further by a French
Battalion and a Netherlands battalion. The 1st Ranger
Company joins TF Zebra, which is commanded by
Colonel Elbridge L. Brubaker. In related activity, after
General Almond is informed of the failure to retain
Inje, he orders yet another assault to commence on the
following day.
April 26 Although the enemy continues to attack
toward Seoul, the ferocity of the assaults is lessening
largely because the Communists have sustained devas-
tating numbers of casualties, estimated to be nearly
50,000 along the I Corps lines. The Communists sever
 705
U.S. troops near Uijongbu. A battalion commander on a field phone reports his positions.
the highway that links Seoul with Chonchon (Central
Korea) and Kansong (East Coast).
General Van Fleet, Eighth Army commander, estab-
lishes another defensive line that runs from coast to
coast. The line begins just above Seoul and uses the ex-
isting Golden Line and stretches across Korea to the
vicinity of Yangyang on the east coast. Van Fleet’s new
line receives no name and is soon dubbed the “No
Name Line.” The section covering the Pukham and
Han corridors falls into the area where the 24th Divi-
sion is deployed. Consequently, responsibility for that
region falls to the IX Corps. The 24th Division, on
loan to the I Corps, is posted in position to guard the
corridors; therefore on the following day, the 24th Di-
vision reverts back to IX Corps.
The carrier USS Toledo (CA 133) arrives off Inchon
to provide air support in the event the Communists at-
April 26, 1951
tempt to penetrate Seoul. Also, the 1st Marine Division
commander, Major General O.P. Smith, is relieved by
Major General Gerald C. Thomas.
In the I Corps sector, the enemy continues to press
against the recent line of defense, the Delta Line. The
line is meant to stand only temporarily as the corps
withdraws towards the Golden Line. Prior to noon,
General Milburn issues orders to withdraw to positions
in the vicinity of Uijongbu.
Nightlong enemy attacks make inroads against the
ROK 1st Division. After dusk, the Communists strike
against the entire corps front, except for the lines of the
24th Division, which holds the right section. How-
ever, there is action in the sector. A unit of Company
C, 21st Regiment, becomes isolated during the day
when the platoon is ordered to pull back.
Sergeant Ray E. Duke, once aware of the predicament,
April 26, 1951
An F80 Shooting Star (top left) leaves the area after striking enemy positions on hill near Ch’orwon.
leads a charge to extricate the isolated troops. The at-
tack succeeds but afterward another one is launched.
Duke, wounded by this time, continues to rally his men
and soon after, he is wounded yet again. The platoon
is ordered to withdraw, but Duke’s wounds in both legs
forbid any walking. Two others carry him out, but
Duke becomes concerned for their safety and orders
them to leave him. Sergeant Duke holds his positions
and continues firing at the attacking troops until he is
killed. Sergeant Duke is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary actions under fire.
The assaults against the 25th Division focus upon the
27th Infantry Regiment. Some ground is gained by the
attacks, but with the support of radar-controlled bombs
and flares bursting overhead as the Chinese push for-
ward, they are halted with devastating results. Other
heavy attacks strike the 65th Regiment (3rd Division)
and the ROK 1st Division west of Uijongbu. The Chi-
nese meet a wall of artillery fire and air strikes also de-
scend upon them as they are repelled by the 65th and
the ROKs along the left sector of the 3rd Division’s lines.
706
In the meantime, the 15th Regiment to the right of
the ROKs is compelled to surrender some ground.
Nearby in the area defended by the 11th Regiment and
a tank destroyer battalion, a North Korean force
smashes through and inflicts high casualties on the
troops of the tank destroyer battalion. The enemy
thrust is capped by counterattacks of the South Kore-
ans, bolstered by U.S. tanks.
In the IX Corps sector, a planned attack by the ROK
5th Division (X Corps) to regain Inje is aborted due
to yet another debacle caused by the ROK 6th Division
on the left part of the IX Corps sector on the previous
day. The IX Corps, due to the I Corps’ changes, mod-
ifies its lines to conform with the adjusted positions of
the I Corps. In conjunction, the 1st Marine Division
pulls away from the Kansas Line and redeploys along the
Pukham River in the vicinity of the northern fringes
of Chunchon and then the line curves along the lower
bank of the Soyang River.
The Marine zone remains quiet during the night of
the 25th-26th except for several small probing assaults
 707
and some mortar fire. Other adjustments in IX Corps
include the redeployment of the ROK 6th Division,
which is directed to pull back and form the line that
links with the right flank of the I Corps. In addition,
the British 28th Brigade redeploys in the evacuated po-
sitions previously held by the Australians and Canadi-
ans in the high ground above Kap’yong.
In the X Corps sector, adjustments are ordered by
General Almond to maintain alignment with the IX
Corps. The new positions link with the Marines at the
Soyang River and extend toward the vicinity of Yanggu,
from where it stretches southeast to the ROK 5th Di-
vision positions.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces initiates an
On 27 April, the 24th Division reverts to IX Corps. In this picture the 24th is pulling back to new defen-
sive lines.
April 27, 1951
attack by B-29s during the night (26th-27th) against
enemy forces that are converging to launch an attack
against IX Corps. The Superfortresses pound the enemy
positions and succeed in causing the Communists to
abort the attack.
April 27 In the I Corps sector, at 0600, the 24th
Division reverts to the IX Corps. In conjunction with
the jurisdiction transfer, the boundary between the two
corps is similarly adjusted.
In other activity, General Milburn issues orders to
with draw to the next line, just above the Golden Line
in front of Seoul.
In the 25th Division zone, the Chinese strike against
April 27, 1951
An infantryman of the 24th Regiment, 25th Division, is deployed in the hills along the Wyoming Line.
the 27th Infantry Regiment as it prepares to move from
the first phase line. The 35th Regiment also comes
under attack while it tries to establish positions to cover
the besieged 27th Regiment. The fighting continues
throughout the morning and into the afternoon. Later
the regiment makes it to the second phase line.
In the meantime, the Chinese strike also at the 3rd
Division and hit the 7th Cavalry, which had on the
previous day reinforced the 3rd Division. The flank of
the 3rd Division might have been very vulnerable had
it not been covered by the cavalry. The cavalry, by the
afternoon, eliminates the attacks, which originated
708
from the northeast. The cavalry had come under as-
sault as part of the thrust against the ROK 1st Division’s
15th Regiment.
Following the confrontations, the 7th and 15th Reg-
iments form along the second phase line, while the 65th
Regiment is placed in reserve. The 7th Cavalry, which
remains to bolster the 3rd Division, deploys on the left
alongside the 7th Regiment in the center of the line.
The ROK 1st Division area calms during the after-
noon and the division reaches the second phase line.
The divisional perimeter remains tranquil throughout
the night.
 709 April 30, 1951

In the IX Corps sector, the front remains relatively Also, the ROK 1st Division dispatches patrols in
tranquil during the night, again exhibiting the enemy’s search and pursuit of the N.K. 8th Division, which had
inability to launch strong attacks there. A withdrawal unsuccessfully attacked the previous night. In less than
to the No Name Line continues. three miles, the patrol finds more than nine hundred
enemy dead in the field.
April 28 Eighth Army receives word from General In the IX Corps sector, withdrawal to the No Name
Van Fleet that he intendts to hold firmly at the No
Line continues.
Name Line and in so doing retain Seoul. Van Fleet’s
In Naval activity, the U.S. Navy initiates a diversion
directives unambiguously dictate no retreat from the
mission to relieve pressure against Eighth Army. The
line, unless it is his order. Van Fleet further stipulates
warships USS Helena (CA 75), USS Manchester (CL
that if a withdrawal becomes necessary due to pressure
83), USS Bausell (DD 845), USS Rogers (DDR 876),
against Eighth Amy, the forces are to move back to the
USS Agerholm (DD 826) and the USS Anderson (DD
Waco Line, which will still keep the Eighth Army po-
786) plaster various targets on the east coast of Korea
sitions above the Nevada Line.
in the vicinity of Kojo-Tongchon. The USS Okonogan
In the I Corps sector, General Milburn again issues
(APA 22), USS Telfair (APA 210), and USS Winston
orders to withdraw. This move places the corps at Line
(AKA 94) execute an amphibious landing. The opera-
Golden. The withdrawal causes the other forces to
tion continues into the following day.
move back to No Name Line. Concentrated efforts over
the past several days had continued to focus on disci-
pline and determination to preserve the capital, Seoul.
April 30 The Chinese offensive is halted north of
Seoul and north of the Han River. General Van Fleet
During the morning the various corps units initiate the
orders Eighth Army to fortify the line designated No
withdrawal. No heavy assaults are launched by the
Name, to bring it up to the level of the Golden Line,
enemy, but some North Korean contingents are spot-
which provides Seoul with a staunch umbrella of
ted above the Han River in the vicinity of the village of
protection. General Van Fleet makes it clear to the var-
Haengju. Artillery units and the big guns of the USS
ious commanders that despite the casualties inflicted
Toledo pound their positions to prevent a crossing of
upon the enemy, he expects yet more attacks. The for-
the Han. The bombardment succeeds and the troops
tifications are to bolster as much as possible the entire
that survive the fire storm retire. Earlier in the day, the
line, with expectations that the attack would come from
7th Cavalry, temporarily attached as support for the
the east or against the front at Seoul. Van Fleet is also
3rd Division, engages a Chinese contingent, and the
concerned with the dam at the Hwach’on Reservoir,
cavalry is unscathed. Later the 7th Cavalry reverts back
which still stands. Rather than risk the Chinese flood-
to the 1st Cavalry Division.
ing the area, he requests and receives air support to par-
In related activity, the ROKs are able to withdraw
tially knock out the flood gates. Naval Task Force 77
without incident to reach the Golden Line earlier than
sends a contingent of AD Skyraiders on this day. The
expected. While the enemy intrusions have subsided,
dive bombers knock out one gate and on the following
Eighth Army prepares to launch a counterattack. The
day, they return to finish the task.
3rd Division (minus the 65th Regiment in reserve) re-
During the Chinese spring offensive (22 April to 30
ceives the order to launch the attack. Also, the remain-
April), the number of U.S. Army casualties up to 29
der of I Corps establishes defensive positions to pro-
April amounts to 314 killed and 1,600 wounded. Es-
tect the capital.
timates of enemy casualties for the period 22 April
The ROK 1st Division comes under attack toward the
through 30 April vary. Eighth Army reports 13,349
latter part of the day. Once again, the guns of the USS
known killed and 23,820 estimated killed. The reports
Toledo stationed off Inchon lend their support and com-
also account for 246 POWs. The United Nations Com-
bined with the artillery and supporting tanks, the South
mand reports estimate enemy casualties for the same
Koreans force the Communists to abort the assault. At
period as 75,000 to 80,000 killed and wounded. Of
about dawn on the 29th, armored patrols are dispatched.
those, 50,000 casualties occurred in the Seoul region.
April 29 It is sometimes reported that on this day, There is no exact official count, but it is known that the
a massive force of about 6,000 enemy soldiers attempt enemy casualties were extremely high.
to cross the Han River to use the Kimpo peninsula to In the I Corps sector, the units will deploy to protect
get behind Eighth Army and seize Seoul, but no offi- the approaches from Uijongbu. The units include the
cial government records document the attempt. How- 25th Division, 1st Cavalry Division and the ROK 1st
ever, on the previous day, a large enemy assault at the Division along the line. The 3rd Division and the 29th
Han was aborted due to heavy naval and artillery fire. British Brigade stand in reserve. Also, in the I Corps
In the I Corps sector, Fifth Air Force planes attack sector, the line is defended by the ROK Capital Divi-
enemy forces west of Seoul and inflict heavy casualties. sion and the ROK 11th Division.
In the 25th Division sector, some enemy troops form In the IX Corps sector, the British 28th Brigade, 24th
for an attack, but it is not launched. After dusk, ar- Division, ROK 6th Division and 7th Division (X
tillery fire and air attacks break up the force. Mean- Corps) stand along the No Name Line. The reserve is
while, the 3rd Division holds steadfastly in its zone composed of the 187th Airborne RCT and it is de-
slightly outside Seoul. ployed along the south bank of the Han River to the rear
May 1951
of the 24th Division to thwart an attack if one is
launched through the Pukham Valley. The 7th Division
had been directed to move from Eighth Army’s east
flank in X Corps to stiffen the center of I Corps by de-
ploying at positions from which it can bolster the ROK
2nd and 6th Divisions.
Also, by this date, the 1st Marines become reserve,
while the 5th Marines, 1st Korean Marine Regiment,
and 7th Marines deploy along the No Name Line.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Division is for the
third time in eight months transferred to the opera-
tional control of X Corps. The Division is to deploy in
the western corps sector subsequent to its boundary
with IX Corps being shifted slightly more than ten
miles to the west.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division comes
under the operational control of X Corps, having passed
from IX Corps. The 1st Marine Division and the 2nd
Division (minus the reserve 65th Infantry Regiment)
hold the corps’ left to defend the Chunchon–Hongch’on
region. The corps’ right is held by the ROK 5th and
7th Divisions.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the zone is held by the
ROK 9th and 3rd Divisions.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force continues to
press the enemy by pounding their positions. On
this day, 960 sorties are executed. During the day’s
action, two downed pilots are retrieved behind enemy
lines in separate missions by two H-5 helicopters,
one of which is hit by enemy fire. Nonetheless, both
pilots and both helicopters return to friendly lines
safely.
In other activity, enemy fire brings down three out
of four F-51s that attack enemy targets at Sinmak. The
high loss indicates to Far East Air Forces that the enemy
has initiated the use of radar controlled anti-aircraft
guns.
May 1951 In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force
establishes a radar station on Chodo, located in the
Yellow Sea. From there, the radar direction center
remains effective as far away as the Yalu River on the
border with Manchuria. With the addition of
the facility, the Sabre jets receive support that aids
their efforts. During the month of May, the center
is responsible for the downing of 6 of the 27 MiGs
that are shot down by pilots of Sabre jets. The Sabres
also shoot down an additional 6 planes. However,
during May, the Communists, also supported with
more modern radar, down five F-86s, three F-84s
and one F-51 Mustang. Also, the 4th Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wing begins an experiment by carrying
1,000-pound bombs for use in air-to-ground oper-
ations, but the aircraft is unsuitable for the task. Sub-
sequently, with the arrival of the F-86F, the plan be-
comes feasible.
May 1 Although the Communists sustained high
casualties during the offensive, intelligence estimates
place more than 500,000 Chinese troops in Korea, bol-
stered by just under 200,000 North Koreans. Intelli-
710
gence also estimates that about 300,000 troops are
within striking distance of Eighth Army. The enemy,
however, continues to have supply problems. All corps
initiate patrols that stretch out as far as five miles from
the line in search of enemy forces. The patrols continue
into the following day, but only near the I Corps sec-
tor are any Communist elements detected in strength.
An ROK 1st Division patrol discovers elements of the
N.K. 8th Division along Route 1.
In the meantime, all units continue to strengthen
the line in their respective sectors. The land in front of
the lines is augmented by barbed wire, mines and
drums that contain a mixture of napalm and gasoline.
Patrols in the X Corps sector stretch westward and
General Van Fleet also orders forward patrol bases to be
established about five miles out along a line leading
east to Route 24. In line with General Van Fleet’s corps
adjustments for the next enemy attack, Eighth Army as
of this date, is deployed from left to right: I Corps —
ROK 1st Division, 1st Cavalry Division and the 25th
Infantry Division; with the 3rd Infantry Division and
the British 29th Brigade in reserve; IX Corps — the
British 27th Brigade, 24th Infantry Division, 5th and
6th ROK Divisions and the 7th Infantry Divisions,
with the 187th Airborne RCT in reserve; X Corps—the
1st Marine Division, 2nd Infantry Division, and 5th
and 7th ROK Divisions; ROK III Corps–ROK 9th
and 3rd Divisions; ROK I Corps — Capital Division
and ROK 11th Division.
In Naval activity, the USS Helena (CA-75) comes
under extremely heavy fire from enemy shore batteries
deployed in the vicinity of Wonsan.
May 2 Eighth Army continues to strengthen the
No Name Line and the corps continues to form a reg-
imental combat team to respond quickly to any Com-
munist intrusion.
In the I Corps sector, patrols continue to scout the
front in search of the enemy. In addition, preparations
are underway to advance the front east of Route 24 to
the Missouri Line.
May 3 By about this time, Eighth Army is focus-
ing on patrol bases to maintain contact with the enemy.
Also, by this time, the artillery units’ acute ammunition
shortages have ended. The artillery units are under or-
ders to execute fire each day, but the 11th Marines react
with a protest, proclaiming that the troops are seldom
in contact with the enemy. The artillery shells are, as
some would contend, wasted, until later in the month
when the Chinese again attack. The shortage of am-
munition again occurs.
In the X Corps sector, the Marines continue to bolster
their positions along the No Name Line; however, there
is a lull in the combat as the enemy apparently prepares
to launch the next phase of its spring offensive. The
attack is anticipated along the eastern sector of the
Eighth Army perimeter.
In Naval activity, carrier planes attached to the USS
Princeton (CV 37) attack and damage the Hwach’on
Dam.
 711
A squadron of F-9F Panther jets prepares to land on the USS Princeton (left center). The USS Philip-
pine Sea is nearby (upper right).
May 4 In the I Corps sector, a contingent of the 12th
Regiment, ROK 1st Division, moves up Route 1 to es-
tablish a patrol base. In the 25th Division zone, the es-
tablishment of a patrol base is complicated by a short-
age of reserve troops. To solve the problem, the 7th
Infantry (3rd Division) is pulled from reserve.
In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry Division zone, the
May 4, 1951
7th Cavalry is designated as the unit to establish an ad-
vance patrol base in the vicinity of Uijongbu.
— In the United States: A bill that authorizes the
Marine Corps to double its size to 400,000 is passed
unanimously by the U.S. Senate. In addition, the com-
mandant of the Marine Corps is to become a consult-
ant to the Joint Chiefs of Staff.
May 5, 1951 712

Top: An AD Skyraider on the deck of the USS Princeton prepares to take off on a mission. Bottom: U.S.
Navy carrier planes (AD Skyraiders) strike the Hwach’on Dam.

May 5 The Canadian 25th Infantry Brigade ar-
rives in Korea.
In Air Force activity, enemy fire shoots down an F-
51 in the skies north of Seoul. A crew attached to the
3rd Air Rescue Squadron is alerted and dispatched to
attempt to rescue the pilot. They take off in an
H-5 helicopter, locate the pilot, and successfully re-
trieve him. Enemy ground troops open fire, but no
harm comes to the crew or the pilot.
May 6 The Imperial Ethiopian Expeditionary force
(known also as the Kagnew Battalion) arrives in Korea.
 713
The Ethiopian force is not a heavily trained combat
outfit and it has arrived with no equipment or weapons.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral G.R. Henderson re-
lieves Rear Admiral R.A. Ofstie as commander, Carrier
Division 5 and Task Force 77.
In other activity, the vessels USS Helena (CL 75),
Orleck (DD 886), Fiske (DD 842), Buck (DD 761) and
HMS Cockade (DD), initiate a bombardment of enemy
targets in the vicinity of Kansong and Kosong to soften
enemy resistance for the ROK troops in the area. The
operation continues into the following day as the ROKs
advance to the Missouri Line. A patrol of the 1st Ko-
rean Marine Regiment reports that the naval fire had in-
flicted devastating damage to enemy targets and spared
the ROK troops from possible annihilation.
May 7 The six ROK divisions in the eastern sec-
tor of the line initiate a move to the Missouri Line.
In the I Corps sector, the advance encounters only
minimal sporadic opposition.
In Air Force activity, the 39th Fighter Bomber
Squadron, 35th Fighter-Bomber Group, is transferred
into the 18th Fighter Bomber Group, commanded by
a new CO, Colonel William P. McBride. This is a com-
ponent of the plan to combine all F-51 Mustang
squadrons into one contingent. It occurs while the 35th
Group is converting their aircraft.
In Naval activity, the USS Hoquiam (PF 5), operat-
ing off Songjin, comes under fire by enemy shore guns.
One seaman is injured.
May 8 The advance to the Missouri Line by the
ROKs continues.
In the I Corps sector, the ROK 1st Division advances
up Route 1, and on this day, some N.K. resistance is en-
countered. Skirmishing continues during the advance,
but by the following day, the South Koreans compel
the enemy to retire.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th and 7th Divisions
advance on the Corps’ right.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the 3rd and 9th Divi-
sions move forward.
In the ROK I Corps sector, the 11th and Capital Di-
visions advance.
In Air Force activity, two U.S. ground troops caught
in enemy territory north of Seoul are located and ex-
tricated by an H-5 helicopter attached to the 3rd Air
Rescue Squadron.
May 9 General Ridgway and Ambassador Muccio
meet with South Korean President Syngman Rhee.
Ridgway informs Rhee that leadership within the ROK
forces is poor and must be improved.
Also, the Fifth Air Force strikes enemy positions in
the vicinity of Sinuiju, near the Yalu River. The 1st
Marine Air Wing participates in the attack, which is
executed by several hundred planes, including Marine
Corps Corsair fighters and Panther jets. The massive
strike against the enemy airfield and vicinity is exe-
cuted by 312 planes and the attack results in the de-
struction of 15 enemy jets and 100 buildings.
May 11, 1951
In the I Corps sector, enemy resistance against the
ROK 1st Division is terminated. The division estab-
lishes a patrol base along Route 1 and then returns to
the No Name Line.
In the ROK I Corps sector, a contingent of the ROK
11th Division, a tank destroyer battalion, moves well
beyond the Missouri Line and enters Kansong, slightly
more than fifteen miles above the line. Kansong is
strategically located where Route 24 terminates at the
coastal highway.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division arrives
at the Missouri Line.
In Air Force activity, the airfield at Sinuiju is pounded
heavily by a combination of Air Force F-51s, F-80s and
Marine Corps F4-Us. The strike force is protected by
U.S. Navy F9Fs and Air Force F-84s and F-86s. Dur-
ing the attack, a contingent of about 50 MiGs arrive
from Antung on the opposite side of the Yalu River in
Manchuria, but their attack is mild at best and in one
instance, a group of eight MiGs passes within one hun-
dred yards of a formation of Sabre jets, but it makes no
move to attack; rather it keeps moving. The attack
damages the airfield sufficiently to knock it out of ac-
tion.
May 10 Preparations continue for a move by
Eighth Army to the Kansas Line; however, intelligence
reports continue to point to an imminent Chinese of-
fensive. By this time Communist resistance is becom-
ing more tenacious. In addition, it has been determined
that the enemy now has about 1,000 planes available
and that about fifty new enemy airfields are nearly
completed. Large concentrations of enemy troops are
detected in the area north of the I Corps.
In Naval activity, a contingent of U.S. Air Force per-
sonnel, transported by a contingent of Amphibious
Task Force (TF 90), arrives at Inchon from Okinawa.
May 11 General Van Fleet cancels a plan to ad-
vance to the Kansas Line, scheduled to begin on 12
May with an attack toward the Topeka Line. The attack
had been scheduled on 9 May, but the situation has
changed. Intelligence informs Van Fleet that the enemy
offensive is about to be reinitiated imminently. Initially
Eighth Army knows about eight separate Chinese
armies. Four (12th, 20th, 60th and 64th) are not in
the immediate area. Of the four (15th, 27th, 63rd and
65th) that are in nearby sectors, intelligence can find
only one division out front.
Later Van Fleet is informed that five of the armies are
staging in the region west of the Pukham River from
where they are positioned to launch an attack against the
west central sector. Although the primary attack is can-
celled, the ROK III and I Corps remain under orders
to continue their attack toward the Missouri Line. Later
the orders will be modified, instructing the ROKs to stay
ahead of the No Name Line, but to postpone the ad-
vance to the Missouri Line.
In the I Corps sector, the 3rd Division is still sched-
uled to move into corps reserve, but this day, combat
teams form to prepare to support any corps sector. The
May 12, 1951
7th RCT assembles in Seoul, from where it is posi-
tioned to speed to support the I Corps. The 65th RCT
deploys about twenty miles southeast of Seoul near
Kyongan-ni, from where it can bolster the IX Corps.
The 15th RCT forms in the vicinity of Ichon, near the
junction of Route 13 and 20, about thirty-five miles
southeast of Seoul, from where it can augment the X
Corps.
In the IX Corps sector, a contingent of the ROK 9th
Division moves into Inje during the afternoon with-
out incident.
In Naval activity, the USS Orleck (DD 886), guided
by a shore fire control party (ten Marines in group act-
ing as eyes of naval ship) pound enemy positions along
the east coast of Korea and inflict about 300 casualties.
Also, pursuant to requests by the U.S. Air Force at the
end of April, planes attached to Fast Carrier Task Force
(TF-77) are launched against four specific enemy tar-
gets—rail bridges. Three of the bridges are demolished.
May 12 While Eighth Army continues to rein-
force its defenses, the ROK III and I Corps press for-
ward toward Inje and Yongdae-ri with a full scale attack.
The ROK 3rd, 9th, 11th and Capital Divisions all par-
ticipate. A reconnaissance contingent of the ROK 9th
Division that had entered Inje on the previous day en-
counters an enemy force slightly beyond the town and
drives it off before returning to the main body; how-
ever, the main attack is unable to reach its objectives due
to a combination of the distance involved (Yongdae–ri
is nearly fifteen miles northeast of Inje) and the amount
of resistance encountered. Meanwhile, Eighth Army
still has no complete picture of where the enemy is de-
ployed.
— In the United States: General O.P. Smith, re-
cently transferred commander, 1st Marine Division,
assumes command of Fleet Marine Force Pacific Troops
and Marine Barracks, Camp Pendleton.
May 13 By this date, more intelligence is collected
and it becomes evident that large enemy forces are shift-
ing from positions in the west and west central regions
to the east, but there is no precise information on when
and from where the attack will be launched. Intelli-
gence determines that the Chinese have advanced five
armies into the region to the front of Chunchon–Inje
area, a huge threat against the X Corps and the ROK
III Corps. In the meantime, the elements begin to work
against Eighth Army, which will impede air observation
missions.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of the 4th Fighter
Interceptor Wing, while on a mission (experimental)
as a ground attack force, encounters enemy fire. The
planes are carrying 1,000-pound bombs. One of the
pilots, Bud Mahurin, a World War II ace, is shot down
and captured.
May 14 The No Name Line is heavily fortified in
preparation for a Communist offensive. The line is bol-
stered by interlocking machine gun positions, an unend-
ing series of miles, and strategically placed drums of
714
napalm and gasoline, each set to detonate by electrical
devices. The line is also augmented by barbed wire.
Also, the Canadian 15th Infantry Brigade, in reserve,
is ordered to move from Pusan to Kumnyangyang-ni,
slightly less than twenty-five miles southeast of Seoul.
The Canadians are to deploy and defend against an
enemy attack, if it emerges from the Pukham or
Seoul–Suwon corridors.
In the IX Corps sector, the 187th Airborne RCT pre-
pares to launch an attack toward Kap’yong on the follow-
ing day. On this day, weather prevents observation planes
from initiating any missions and as the day progresses, the
heavy rains also hinder ground reconnaissance patrols.
In other activity, General Van Fleet visits the 24th
Division perimeter and after observing the defenses,
concludes that the division has not properly bolstered
the lines.
May 15 The Chinese reinitiate the offensive with
a force estimated at 21 divisions, supported by 9 North
Korean divisions on the flank. The main attack strikes
X Corps and the ROK III Corps.
In the IX Corps sector, the 187th Airborne RCT
aborts its planned attack against an enemy force,
thought to be in an assembly area near Kap’yong, due
to inclement weather, which has caused the roads to
become too poor for travel.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th and 7th Divisions
are struck hard by the Chinese. By the following day,
the ROKs are driven from the high ground to the right
of Chonchon.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches
daylight strikes against enemy positions to impede their
progress.
May 16–20 1951 The Communists main-
tain pressure against the UN forces in Korea. In an
effort to sustain the ground troops, Far East Air
Forces maintains an aggressive campaign to keep the
troops supplied with rations, equipment and ammu-
nition. During this five-day period, the aircraft at-
tached to the 315th AD deliver an average of 1,000
tons of supplies each day.
May 16–23 1951 The Chinese launch the
second and final phase of the Spring Offensive. The
attacks are halted by the 23rd. By 30 May, Eighth
Army is again positioned at the Kansas Line.
May 16 Eighth Army continues to bolster its de-
fenses. The most solid information on the enemy inten-
tions had come from captives picked up during the past
week. According to one captive caught above Seoul,
the 2nd Division, X Corps, and the ROKs along the
eastern part of the line are the primary objectives. The
information proves true during the latter part of this
day, when the Chinese offensive (fifth phase, second
and final effort) is re-ignited.
The Chinese 60th, 15th and 12th Armies strike from
positions above the Soyang River from the vicinity of
Chunchon to Naep’yong-ni (Battle of Soyang-gang).
This is the start of the Second Chinese Communist
 715
Spring Offensive. The 27th Army launches its attack
against the ROK 5th and 7th Divisions. In addition, the
N.K. V Corps and II Corps strike the eastern sector of
the line. The strength of the attacking force is estimated
at 21 Chinese divisions, supported by 3 North Korean
divisions.
In the IX Corps sector, a contingent of the 7th Marines
holding along Route 29 is attacked during the night in
a contest that lasts about four hours. Captives seized
by the Marines provide evidence that the Chinese III
Army Group is in the area and in position to threaten
the X Corps.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th and 7th Divisions
are hit with heavy attacks with the main thrust pene-
trating between the two divisions. The Chinese 87th
Division, 27th Army, drives toward Sangam-ni as the
ROKs again collapse quickly. By midnight (16th-17th),
both divisions are authorized by General Almond to
withdraw to the No Name Line. The infantry units
scatter haphazardly, but the artillery units of both di-
visions make it safely down Route 24 to reach the lines
of the U.S. 2nd Division. By noon on the following
day, the ROK 7th Division is still disorganized. The
only available ROK 7th Division forces on the field are
two battalions of the reserve 3rd Regiment.
In the meantime, the ROK 5th Division is able to get
forces to the right flank of the 2nd Division. The 2nd
Division becomes jeopardized due to the collapse of
the ROK 7th Division. The division is defending a fif-
teen mile front with the 9th and 38th Regiments hold-
ing the left and bolstered further by Task Force Zebra,
which holds the right side of the perimeter. The French
Battalion stands about five miles behind the lines of
TF Zebra, and remains the only reserve in the division
zone.
In the 38th Regiment’s zone, the attached Nether-
lands Battalion is posted on Hill 710 and Hill 975 to
augment the 1st Battalion, 38th Regiment. Daylight
attacks against the 2nd Division’s lines indicate that
stronger attacks are imminent. Meanwhile, the French
and Dutch Battalions, along with the U.S. 23rd and
38th Regiments, drive southward to secure the MSR.
At about dusk, the Communists pound against the lines
of TF Zebra and the 38th Regiment in an attempt to
penetrate between the two units. The attacks continue
until about dawn on the following day. In conjunction,
during 16th-17th, the 38th FABn fires more than
10,000 rounds.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the perimeter is not
tested by the Chinese. However, during the early morn-
ing hours of the following day, the Chinese make con-
tact.
May 17–22 1951 Far East Air Forces contin-
ues to support the ground troops as they attempt to
quell the enemy offensive. B-29s attached to Bomber
Command execute ninety-four sorties against the
enemy ground troops and of these, most are after dusk
and designed to deter enemy night attacks. Super-
fortresses undertake other missions during this time.
May 17, 1951
May 17 The U.S. Air Force intensifies its support
to bolster X Corps. Orders from General Stratemeyer
stipulate that a minimum of twelve medium bombers
be committed for night runs to pulverize suspected
enemy positions in front of the Eight Army lines,
within the X Corps sector. Enemy targets selected by X
Corps become the recipients of the bomb loads, com-
posed of about three hundred and fifty 500-pound
bombs.
In the face of the enemy’s re-initiation of the offen-
sive, the ROK Army Headquarters, ROK III Corps and
I Corps pull back to the No Name Line. During the
early morning hours, the 30th FABn, ROK 9th Divi-
sion, gets snagged by an enemy roadblock as it moves
back. The 11th Regiment, ROK 3rd Division, trailing
the 30th FABn, also gets tangled in the roadblock. By
the latter part of the day, the artillery that survives and
the 11th Regiment moves back toward Hyon-ni to the
north to establish positions there.
Also, the scattered ROK 5th Division is later able to
regroup and make it to the right flank of the 2nd Di-
vision. The No Name Line, by about 0100, is stabi-
lized and secure, but in the X Corps sector, the attacks
continue relentlessly.
In the IX Corps sector, the boundary is shifted about
four miles to the east to modify positions prior to an ex-
pected heavy attack against the X Corps. The 1st Ma-
rine Division is directed to relieve the 9th and 38th
Regiments, 2nd Division (X Corps), which permits the
two X Corps regiments to extend farther eastward. In
addition, the ROK III Corps and I Corps are ordered
to withdraw to the Waco Line, more than fifteen miles
below the No Name Line. General Almond is directed
by General Van Fleet to realign his forces to the south-
east, where a link is to be made with the ROK III Corps
at the Waco Line.
In the X Corps sector, two battalions of the 3rd Reg-
iment, 7th ROK Division, stand their ground and en-
gage elements of the Chinese 81st Division in the vicin-
ity of Sangam-ni. In the 2nd Division sector, by about
dawn, concentrated attacks against the 38th Regiment
and TF Zebra terminate, but the fighting does not end
at other spots that remain contested in the sector. At
about the stroke of midnight (16th-17th), elements of
the Chinese 45th Division, 15th Army, drive against
the positions of the 2nd Battalion, 38th Regiment at
Hill 755, defended by Company E. In less than three
hours, Company F comes under siege at Hill 755. It
withdraws to positions to the rear of the 3rd Battalion.
In the meantime, in the 1st Battalion zone, Hill
1051, held by Company A, and Company C, on Hill
914, remain under attack since the previous night. As-
saults that had begun at about dusk on the previous
day continue to fail, but the pressure to hold becomes
too great. As the Chinese ascend the slopes, their num-
bers quickly lessen due to the defenders and an ava-
lanche of artillery fire, combined with deadly mines
and illumination flares. The U.S. forces at most points
remain steadfast after having inflicted huge numbers
of casualties against the attack force.
May 17, 1951
Company A, at Hill 1051, is struck with a severe
blow at about 0200, but it holds. A contingent of
Netherlands troops is rushed to support the beleaguered
platoon at dawn, but Chinese opposition is too stiff to
break through. Subsequently, the full battalion prepares
to advance to rescue the defenders at Hill 1051, but
too late.
In the meantime, Company C is compelled to aban-
don Hill 914. The Chinese begin to flow into the gap
about one hour prior to noon, due in part to the inabil-
ity of the Dutch and French contingents to plug the
gap. At 1300, the Netherlands force is directed to ad-
vance, but the force stays in place. Finally, after more
prodding, the Netherlands Battalion advances at 1500,
but it makes no progress against the Chinese forces in
front of it. Colonel Chiles, X Corps G-3, at about 1430
takes charge of the X Corps front, including TF Zebra,
the French Battalion and the reserve 23rd Regiment.
Reinforcements are en route to bolster the positions.
They include the ROK 8th Division and the 3rd Di-
vision (minus the 7th and 65th Combat Teams). The
3rd Division reinforcements arrive first just before
noon, when the vanguard of the 15th RCT moves into
the area. The remainder of the division will be in place
by the following day. The X Corps also receives an in-
flux of artillery units, borrowed also from IX Corps.
General Van Fleet intends to halt the attack and de-
liver a punishing blow to the enemy. Earlier, Van Fleet
had stated: “I welcome his [Chinese] attack and want
to be strong enough in position and fire power to de-
feat him.” Preparations had been made to increase the
artillery against the Chinese during this offensive by
about 500 percent and according to the situation, the
pace could be maintained for seven days without re-
supply. While the ammunition is a priority, it is ac-
cepted that other supplies would not be delivered on a
regular basis for the duration of the offensive.
The order to execute the monstrous bombardments
upon suspected enemy positions is issued late on this
day. On the following day, more than 41,000 rounds are
expended and the total increases on successive days.
Also, the artillery attacks are augmented by radar-
guided air strikes. Planes deliver 500-pound bombs
against targets of Chinese troop concentrations, some
of which are less than 500 yards from the perimeter.
The afternoon remains relatively quiet, but the Chi-
nese, despite sustaining heavy losses, continue to mount
more forces against the X Corps lines. The X Corps
boundary is realigned to move southeast and connect
with the ROK III Corps at the Waco Line, below the
No Name Line. Late in the day before dusk, large con-
centrations of enemy troops are detected as they filter
through the gap to strike the front of the 38th Regi-
ment, 2nd Division, and near the front of the 23rd
Regiment. The attack force is composed of elements of
the Chinese 45th Division.
Air strikes are called upon and the artillery com-
mences a tumultuous bombardment that causes high
enemy casualties, but the Chinese ignore casualties and
continue to press. The 3rd Battalion, 38th Infantry
716
Regiment, is struck with a strong blow and some pen-
etration occurs. Nevertheless, the toll extracted by the
3rd Battalion, coupled with the air and artillery, thins
out the force and the Chinese fail to sustain their thrust.
The 3rd Battalion regains the lost terrain and ousts the
enemy from the lines by the early hours of the 18th.
Along the eastern sector of the 2nd Division zone, the
Chinese also sustain horrific casualties, but again, they
are not dissuaded as they funnel through the area be-
tween Hill 1051 and Hill 914. Undaunted by the re-
lentless bombardment, the Chinese (181st Division,
60th Army, attached to 12th Army) walk through the
enfilade of fire, oblivious to the shells, bombs and the
massive amount of dead Chinese that they pass over as
if stepping on a leaf or tree branch.
Before dusk, the Chinese reach the positions of the
French Battalion at Hill 975. The French hold their
ground, but only for about two hours before they are
compelled to withdraw, giving the Chinese an oppor-
tunity to hammer the left flank of the 23rd Regiment
during the early morning hours of the 18th.
In the meantime, to the front of the left flank of the
regiment, Company F comes under attack, but it com-
pletely suppresses it by about midnight (17th-18th).
After failing to make progress the Chinese disengage
and head east.
At the same time the 23rd Regiment is repulsing the
enemy, the ROK 5th Division elements, deployed on
the right flank, come under attack, but General Al-
mond authorizes a withdrawal to positions east of
Chaun-ni. By morning of the 18th, the entire 38th
Regiment becomes imperiled.
The same circumstances face the 1st and 2nd Battal-
ions, 38th Infantry, which became jeopardized after the
Netherlands Battalion, without a fight, abandoned its
positions on Hill 975. Much pressure is placed upon
the 1st and 2nd Battalions (38th Regiment) until day-
light on the 18th, but by then the forward companies
eliminate the threat. However, Companies A and F are
isolated and unable to breakthrough from their positions
to the rear of Company B, which remains encircled. In
the meantime, the 3rd Battalion at Hill 800 and be-
yond to the southeast through Han’gye to Hill 693 re-
mains intact and under no immediate threat.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, a contingent of Chi-
nese, about regimental strength, manage to get through
to the rear of a Korean Marine patrol base in an at-
tempt to strike the 2nd Division; however, a recent
move by elements of the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
puts them in position to greet the Chinese. At about
dusk, the battalion completes a roadblock at the
Morae–Kogae pass along the Chonchon road, and by
midnight (17th-18th), it is reinforced by Company G,
to place the entire regiment there.
Although the Marines had not expected the Chi-
nese, it becomes apparent that the Chinese’s thoughts
of a free run to the 2nd Division are shattered by
the fortuitous move of the 3rd Battalion. At the north-
ern tip of the Marines’ perimeter, the Chinese are
welcomed by a surprised Company I, a platoon of
 717
Company D, tanks, and a weapons company platoon.
The Chinese are caught completely off guard, but they
return furious fire. The exchange transforms the area
into a cauldron of fire. Two tanks are lost, and the Chi-
nese attempt unsuccessfully to destroy another. The
fight continues into the following day.
In Naval Activity, Rear Admiral R.A. Ofstie, having
recently been relieved of his command of Task Force
77 by Admiral Henderson, becomes Chief of Staff,
Naval Forces Far East. He succeeds Rear Admiral A.K.
Morehouse.
May 18 General Van Fleet, after assessing the situ-
ation, makes a decision at about midnight (17th-18th)
to bolster the eastern sector of the X Corps, due in great
part to the inability of the South Koreans to hold their
positions. The remaining 3rd Division contingents are di-
rected to move eastward from Seoul and other units will
follow, including the 7th RCT and the 65th RCT, which
will redeploy on the 19th and 20th respectively. In con-
junction, the 15th RCT is unaffected; it is to remain at-
tached to the 2nd Division. Van Fleet also directs the I
Corps, IX Corps and the 1st Marine Division to dis-
patch patrols and prepare to attack a phase line (Topeka).
Marines on patrol. The silhouette of one Marine can be seen in the rear doorway, while other Marines
move toward the front of a hut. One enemy casualty can be seen. His boots are visible in the doorway.
May 18, 1951
In the IX Corps sector, the 7th Marines are ordered
to withdraw from blocking positions along Route 29
and relieve the 1st Marines at its positions on the right
sector of the zone, along the No Name Line, to permit
the 1st Marines to relieve the 9th Infantry Regiment
(X Corps). On the division’s left flank, the 5th Marines
relieve the 38th Infantry Regiment (X Corps) after el-
ements of the 7th Division (X Corps) redeploy in the
5th Marines sector.
In the X Corps sector, subsequent to the pull back on
the previous night by the French Battalion on Hill 975,
elements of the Chinese 181st Division effortlessly gain
access to Route 24, which enables the enemy to strike
at the left flank of the 23rd Infantry Regiment at
Chaun-ni by about 0330. Other enemy contingents
advance to positions in the heights west of Chaun-ni to
place the Chinese between the village and the French
Battalion, which had withdrawn to some high ground
on the fringes of Putchaetful.
In the X Corps sector, General Almond orders a
boundary shift. The boundary is extended slightly less
than fifteen miles to connect corps with the Waco Line
and the ROK III Corps at Habae-jae. During the three-
day battle (16th-18th), General Ruffner, 2nd Division
May 18, 1951 718

The smoking lamp is lit. A trio attached to the U.S. 7th Division pauses to smoke cigarettes along a road
in the vicinity of Chungbangdac south of the Hongch’on River on 22 May.

commander, reports 900 killed, wounded and missing.
He reports Chinese and North Korean losses at 39,000.
In the 2nd Division zone, the 1st Marines (IX Corps)
completes relief of the 9th Regiment, which permits
the 9th Regiment to complete its redeployment to bol-
ster the 38th Regiment. By noon, the 1st Battalion, 9th
Infantry, begins to establish positions between the 2nd
and 3rd Battalions. During the realignment of the 2nd
Division line, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions are directed
to punch forward to attempt to rescue Company B,
 719
38th Regiment, which has not been able to break out
of its encirclement at Hill 724 because of the Chinese
that had massed on Hill 710 to the rear of Companies
A and F.
Another attempt to rescue the beleaguered unit is
scheduled to commence at about 1800. Planes expected
to support the advance are compelled to return to base
due to a sudden unexpected storm. Cancellation of the
air power is followed by the suspension of a massive ar-
tillery barrage. Meanwhile, the 9th Regiment — bol-
stered by Company G (38th Regiment) and the Dutch
battalion — is en route to extricate the trapped units.
By the following morning, when stragglers that reach
the positions of the 9th Regiment are counted, the ca-
sualties are extremely high. Company A stands at
eighty-nine men and two officers. Company B ac-
counts for seventy-four enlisted men, but no officers.
Company F accounts for no officers and eighty-one
enlisted men. The other units in the 1st and 2nd Bat-
talions of the 38th Regiment also sustain high casualty
rates.
Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 38th Regiment, holds
Hill 800 and awaits the arrival of the 5th Marines,
which on the following day is to fill the gap there be-
tween the 3rd Battalion and two battalions of the 9th
Infantry Regiment. The Chinese, however, advance
after dark to seize Hill 800. Company K, defending
the summit, receives an enormous amount of support.
With each successive assault, artillery strikes are called
upon and the Chinese continue to get raked with relent-
less fire. All the while, the troops of Company K wait
in the security of the defenses. The attacks continue
until dawn on the following day, but the crest remains
unscathed and the Chinese lose about 800 troops to
the artillery bombardments.
In the 23rd Regiment zone, orders direct the regiment
to redeploy along the new line in positions east of Route
24; however, the Chinese block the only route capable
of carrying vehicles. To add to the crisis, a mix-up in
communications causes more problems. The French
inform the 72nd Tank Battalion that the road from
Chaun-ni is mined. The information is passed on to
Chaun-ni, but it does not reach the officers. Conse-
quently, the supply trains of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions,
some tanks of the 72nd Tank Battalion, along with a
contingent of a mortar company face mines and a wall
of fire, unless the Chinese can quickly be evicted.
Elements of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, bolstered
by a platoon of tanks, attempts to clear the way, but
the Chinese force is insurmountable. The 3rd Battal-
ion advances to positions near the roadblock by early af-
ternoon, while the 2nd Battalion works to clear other
enemy forces along the road, but to no avail. Orders
arrive instructing the supply trains and accompanying
units to plow through the blockade, while the 2nd Bat-
talion moves to join with the 3rd Battalion for a com-
bined withdrawal. Still unaware of mines along the
route, the convoy, led by tanks, rolls out of Chaun-ni,
but after traveling only a short distance, the lead tank
hits a mine and stalls the entire convoy.
May 18, 1951
The Chinese, meanwhile, remain perched in the
high ground on opposite sides of the road and imme-
diately open fire. Pandemonium breaks out as the driv-
ers, including tankers, attempt to escape the fire by
abandoning the vehicles. The second tank in the col-
umn rams its way through the iron debris and gets
ahead of the disabled tank, but to no avail. Soon after,
it also loses a track to a mine. Attempts are made to
get the convoy off the road and onto a stream bed lead-
ing southward. There, too, the enemy totally disrupts
the withdrawal. Drivers again abandon vehicles, some
of which are halted by collisions and others afire by
burning ammunition.
The troops flee toward the 2nd and 3rd Battalions
and accompany them on yet another tedious and dan-
gerous phase of the withdrawal. The rear guard of the
force is Company C, 72nd Tank Battalion. At about
1830, even the weather turns against the retreat. Heavy
rain begins to saturate the area. Nonetheless, by about
midnight, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions reach positions be-
hind the 1st Battalion. In the meantime, the Chinese
enjoy a scavenger hunt among the abandoned vehicles.
The ROK 5th Division, positioned east of Chaun-
ni, is forced to retire in disorderly fashion. The ROKs
halt the retreat at positions slightly south of Hill 683,
but only some are there. Many more South Koreans are
scattered all about. Also, elements of the ROK 7th Di-
vision holds the X Corps’ east flank at positions south-
east of Hasolch’i, slightly below P’ungam-ni. The bulk
of the division is like the ROK 5th Division, scattered
as far away as the ROK III Corps sector.
In the X Corps zone, a night-long battle at the Morae–
Kongae pass ends successfully for the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines. The Chinese had mounted a tenacious as-
sault, but a counterattack by Company I regains the
ground and suppresses the assault, while other Marines
and tanks bolstered by artillery maneuver to seal off
the enemy’s rear. By dawn (18th), the Chinese sustain
a devastating defeat. Air support again arrives late at
about 1030, but still there are plenty of enemy targets
in the area. The Chinese lose 112 killed (counted) and
82 POWs. The U.S. loses 7 killed and 19 wounded.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Division, acting on
Eighth Army orders, shrinks its perimeter to support the
2nd Division on the east. While the 1st Marines speed
to relieve the 9th Infantry, 2nd Division, the 7th
Marines pull back to the No Name Line to relieve the
1st Marines. In conjunction, the 5th Marines pull out
of the division’s left flank to relieve the 38th Infantry
Regiment on the far right. In turn, the relief by the
Marines allows the 2nd Division the flexibility to de-
ploy from where the Chinese moving from the east can
be engaged and halted.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the 5th and 9th ROK
Divisions each receive orders to withdraw to the Waco
Line. Both divisions are attacked and each collapses.
The South Koreans lose several hundred vehicles and all
of their artillery.
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77)
launches planes in support of Eighth Army. The day is
May 19, 1951
costly, as 6 aircraft (5 F4U, 1AD) are lost, the highest
casualty rate to this point in the conflict. Two of the pi-
lots are rescued, but three others are killed and one is
missing.
Also, the vessels USS Duncan (DDR 874), Brinkley
Bass (DD 887), and the Leonard F. Mason (DD 852)
combine their fire power and propel more than 1,000
rounds of 5-inch shells against enemy positions at
Wonsan. Enemy shore batteries on Kalma Gak return
heavy fire, but no damage or casualties are sustained
by the naval warships.
May 19 The Communists continue to mount high
casualties as they maintain the offensive. Meanwhile,
Eighth Army continues to modify its lines and strategy
to terminate the attacks. By this day, the fighting tilts to
the eastern part of the lines. By darkness, the entire east-
ern front is threatened by the total strength of the Chi-
nese IX Army Group, positioned primarily between
Han’gye and Soksa-ri. At Soksa-ri, only one platoon of
the Reconnaissance Company (3rd Division) is posi-
tioned. However, General Van Fleet is convinced that
the Chinese are stretched too far. After checking along
the entire front, Van fleet concludes that a massive coun-
terattack will crack the Chinese offensive. He schedules
the offensive by the I and IX Corps, against enemy sup-
ply areas and communications centers in the vicinity of
Mansedari, Hwach’on and Inje, to begin on the follow-
ing day. General Ridgway arrives at X Corps from Japan
and confers with Generals Van Fleet, Almond (X Corps)
and Hoge (IX Corps) at Hoengsong. Eighth Army ur-
gently requests full-scale air support to stem the tide.
In the X Corps sector, another difficult day emerges as
the Chinese relentlessly move to overwhelm the X
Corps.
In the 2nd Division zone, stragglers from the 23rd
Regiment continue to arrive at the 9th Regimental po-
sitions, following the failed attempts to extricate the
isolated units. The 23rd Infantry Regiment and accom-
panying units sustain 72 killed, 158 wounded and 190
missing. More than 150 vehicles, including some tanks,
are lost. The regiment inflicts upon the enemy more
than 2,200 killed and 1,400 wounded. The 23rd Reg-
iment captures 22 Chinese soldiers attached to several
divisions, the 31st, 35th and 181st.
Also, elements of the 3rd Division arrive from Seoul.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Infantry Regiment, deploys to
hold Route 20 and to protect against intrusions from
the mountain paths northwest of their line. The re-
mainder of the 7th Infantry arrives later and deploys
in the vicinity of Ami-dong.
At the divisional right, the 15th RCT (on loan from
3rd Division) passes through the ROK 3rd Regiment
and gains P’ungam-ni prior to noon. Afterward, the
15th RCT gains the high ground to the northwest of the
village. The ROK 3rd Regiment and several contin-
gents of the ROK 7th Regiment shadow the 15th RCT
to positions north and northeast of P’ungam-ni.
In the 23rd Regiment zone, prior to dawn, again, the
Chinese launch an attack. The regiment calls for assis-
720
tance from artillery and by air strikes to inflict more
casualties upon the 181st Regiment. Meanwhile, the
1st and 3rd Battalion remain under great pressure until
about noon, when the skies clear and planes arrive to
support counterattacks. After eliminating the threat,
the battalion advances to positions near Route 24,
below Hasolch’i.
In the meantime, the 9th Regiment continues mov-
ing to its positions above Hasolch’i after dusk. The 1st
Battalion deploys to the right of the ROK 35th Regi-
ment. The 2nd Battalion moves to positions to the rear
of the ROK 36th Regiment. Also, the French Battalion
is prevented from linking with the ROK 36th Regi-
ment, positioned northwest of Hasolch’i.
Also, the 2nd Division receives a huge amount of
support from the U.S. Air Force, which delivers about
700 radar controlled bombs after dark to help smash the
enemy troop formations in front of the 2nd Division.
In the 3rd Division zone, elements of the Chinese 93rd
Regiment, 31st Division, arrive after dusk and compel
a small reconnaissance contingent of the 3rd Division
to evacuate the their positions in Soksa-ri.
In the ROK III Corps sector, disorder remains ram-
pant as troops from various units are still scattered
about. None of the units reach the Waco Line.
In the ROK I Corps sector, the Capital Division and
the 11th Division remain disciplined and the units are
able to arrive at the Waco Line.
In Air Force activity, enemy fire shoots down an F-
51 in the area southwest of Ch’orwon. An H-5 heli-
copter from the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron is dispatched
to attempt to rescue the pilot. The mission is success-
ful and the pilot is retrieved and brought back to
friendly positions; however, enemy fire is encountered
while the crew is bringing the man aboard.
May 20 Operation STRANGLE commences. The
operation is designed to destroy the enemy’s rail and
vehicle traffic where it can be caught in North Korea.
The operation is unfolded primarily with air power,
but the planes are not able to provide sufficient air
power to the ground troops. Eighth Army for some
time receives fewer than 100 sorties a day. Operation
STRANGLE continues into September.
Also, the I Corps and IX Corps initiate counterat-
tacks (Operation DETONATE), while the X Corps con-
tinues to fend off the remaining attacks in its area. The
Communists against X Corps continue to sustain ex-
tremely high casualties without making progress.
Also, by this date, the Communist offensive is halted,
unable to gather any momentum against the galvanized
Eighth Army.
In the I Corps sector, the advance moves toward the
major road center in the Yongp’yong River valley; how-
ever, the orders will be modified and on 23 May, sub-
sequent to rearranging the IX Corps–X Corps bound-
ary in an eastward direction, the IX Corps will assume
responsibility for the road hub west of the Hwach’on
Reservoir and the security of the Hongch’on–Chun-
chon–Hwach’on Road. In conjunction, the modified
 721
orders give X Corps responsibility for the road centers
east of the Hwach’on Reservoir.
On this day, General Milburn directs a three-division
advance. The 1st Cavalry Division advances up Route
33, while the 25th Division drives north along Route
3, toward the Yongp’yong River valley. In addition, the
ROK 1st Division advances toward Munsan-ni.
In the 25th Division zone, Company E, 35th Regi-
ment, engages an enemy contingent in the vicinity of
Seoul. During the struggle, just as the vanguard ap-
proaches the positions of the enemy, a grenade is tossed
into the ranks. Sergeant Donald R. Moyer spots the
live grenade and to save the lives of the others with
him, he dives on it and takes the full blast. Sergeant
Moyer receives the Medal of Honor posthumously for
his selfless actions on behalf of his fellow soldiers. The
hill is later taken.
In the IX Corps sector, the counterattack is executed
by the 24th Division and the ROK 2nd, 6th and 7th di-
visions. The IX Corps objective is to pursue and engage
the enemy reserves; however, the progress of the at-
tacks rates poor at best, despite only minimum oppo-
sition.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, elements of
the Chinese 34th Division strike the positions of the 9th
Infantry Regiment northeast of Hasolch’i. Following
General Ridgway (far right) discusses strategy with (from left to right) Major General William M. Hoge
(IX Corps commander), Blackshear M. Bryan (24th Division commander) and Lt. General James A. Van
Fleet (Eighth Army commander).
May 20, 1951
the massive air bombardment of the previous night,
this is the only heavy attack to commence by dawn.
Nevertheless, the defenders, Company C, receive mas-
sive support, including air attacks and artillery, bol-
stered further by a counterattack launched by Com-
pany A. The attacking force of about five hundred
troops is liquidated.
In other activity, elements of the 7th Regiment, 3rd
Division, in battalion strength, advances to evict the
Chinese that occupied Soksa-ni on the previous night,
but the Chinese repulse the attempt. Nearby, above
Soksa-ri, the Chinese strike against the 23rd ROK Reg-
iment (3rd Division).
In the 23rd Infantry Regiment zone, the left flank is hit
by the 181st Regiment, which emerges from the
Naech’on River valley. The Communists move through
a wall of withering fire while planes deliver yet more
killing power. The fire is so overwhelming that the Chi-
nese halt and retire before crashing into the regimen-
tal line. To the rear of the devastated 181st, more Com-
munists gather to again brave the deadly fire; however,
Eighth Army relentlessly maintains its artillery fire and
B-29s saturate the various gathering places of the
enemy formations. The powerful display riddles the
Chinese and prevents any attacks against the 2nd Di-
vision throughout the night of 20–21 May.
May 21, 1951
The convincing efforts against the 12th Army galva-
nizes the division. General Almond had withdrawal
plans in effect, but prior to execution, he concludes
that the line will hold steadfastly and he aborts the
withdrawal. Instead, he directs his attention to modi-
fying the lines to prevent the possibility of an attack
from the east.
While the 2nd Division remains in place like a steel
picket fence, Almond prepares to take Soksa-ri back
on the following day. The lines are further strength-
ened by the arrival of the 65th RCT (3rd Division).
Another contingent, the ROK 8th Division, arrives in
the vicinity of Chech’on, giving General Almond the
option of dispatching the South Koreans from there to
augment the eastern flank of X Corps. The ROK 8th
Division had been operating in South Korea engaged in
eliminating guerrillas behind Eighth Army lines. Gen-
eral Almond also has elements of the ROK 7th Division
at P’ungam-ni, as well as elements of the battered 38th
Regiment.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Korean Ma-
rine Regiment attacks with the IX Corps; however, the
three U.S. regiments remain in place. During the early
morning hours, again the Chinese are surprised when
they unexpectedly encounter Marine forces. At about
0445, a large contingent of about regimental strength
encroaches the lines of the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines,
expecting to occupy the positions, but not anticipat-
ing that the Marines already hold it. The surprise is
deadly and one-sided. By 0930, the Chinese are intro-
duced to every available weapon of the 7th Marines.
The Marines count 152 dead and collect fifteen pris-
oners. The Chinese survivors flee into the hills.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of Sabre jets on a
mission get intercepted by about 50 MiGs. The Sabre
pilots call for support, but in the meantime, they en-
gage the MiGs in a wild shoot-out in the skies. One of
the pilots, Captain Jabara, has problems with his plane;
he cannot drop one of his wing tanks. Nonetheless, he
maintains a stable flight. The Communists lose three
MiGs, two of which are downed by Captain Jabara for
his fifth and sixth kills. The Sabre pilots note a possi-
ble fourth kill and they report five MiGs damaged.
Subsequent to the less than sterling performance, the
Russians who had piloted the MiGs fail to show up for
awhile, but they return to the skies on 31 May. Cap-
tain Jabara becomes the first jet-to-jet ace.
In Naval activity, U.S. warships continue to operate
off Wonsan. Enemy shore batteries inflict slight dam-
age to the USS Brinkley Bass (DD 887) and inflict ca-
sualties. One seaman is killed and nine others are in-
jured before the ship pulls back out of the range of the
guns.
Also, the USS New Jersey (BB 62) initiates its activ-
ity in the conflict by pounding enemy positions in the
vicinity of Kansong and afterward at Kosang and Won-
san. On the following day, the USS New Jersey sustains
minor damage to gun turret No. 121 after being fired
upon by an enemy shore gun. One seaman is killed and
three others are wounded.
722
In other activity, with air support provided by the
USS Bataan (CVL-29) and naval surface support fire,
British commandos land on the west coast of Korea
across from Cho-do Island. The operation continues
into the following day, with warships, including the
USS Toledo (CA-133), providing continued naval sur-
face support fire.
— In Japan: General George E. Stratemeyer, the
commanding officer of Far East Air Forces, suffers a
severe heart attack. On the following day, he is replaced
by General Partridge. Partridge’s position as com-
mander Fifth Air Force is temporarily filled by Major
General Edward J. Timberlake, Jr., USAF.
May 21 The Chinese offensive begins to slacken
along Eighth Army’s front, except in the ROK III and
I Corps sectors. However, the Eighth Army offensive of
the I and IX Corps accelerates in an effort to drive the
Chinese back and inflict punishing casualties. Toward
the latter part of the day, the ROK III Corps receives
orders to hold and make no additional withdrawals.
The order stipulates that the corps re-establish its de-
fensive positions along Route 20. Also, at about the
same time, the ROK I Corps is directed to withdraw
from its positions along the Waco Line and establish
new defensive positions that protect Route 20, the sec-
tion that stretches between Yuch’on-ni and the coast at
Kangnung.
In the I Corps sector, the progress continues and the
entire force closes on the Topeka Line. Elements of the
ROK 1st Division enter Munsan-ni prior to noon.
In the IX Corps sector, the counterattack continues to
make slow progress.
In the X Corps sector, General Almond orders an at-
tack to regain Soksa-ri.
In other activity, the 187th Airborne RCT is released
from IX Corps reserve. It moves to positions to the
right of the 1st Marine Division, which places it to the
left of the 2nd Division. Also, in the 7th Division zone,
a platoon of Company F, 17th Regiment, attacks an
enemy position in the heights in the vicinity of Monye-
ri. Enemy fire stalls the advance and grenades that plop
down the slope cause the troops to scatter for safety.
Sergeant Joseph C. Rodriguez, 2nd Platoon, jumps
from his protected position and pushes toward the
enemy. He sprints through the raging enemy fire for
about sixty yards, then deposits a few of his grenades di-
rectly into the first foxhole he spots. Immediately he
bolts forward and eliminates an automatic weapon with
another delivery of grenades. Following his impetuous
climb, Rodriguez reaches the summit and immediately
liquidates the occupants of two additional foxholes.
Still on the hunt, Rodriguez locates the remaining gun
emplacement and takes it out to ease the path to the
summit for the rest of his command. Rodriguez re-
ceives credit for the elimination of fifteen of the enemy.
The enemy is routed. Rodriguez becomes the recipi-
ent of the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary hero-
ism under fire.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of four F-86 Sabre
 723
jets led by Lieutenant Baldwin encounters and engages
a band of MiGs in the skies over Kyebang-san. The pa-
trol, which had arrived from Japan, is hitting bad
weather and its target is in a mountainous area. How-
ever, the Sabres contact a tactical controller who guides
them through the foggy weather to spot the target, a
force the size of about two battalions, placed to threaten
friendly troops.
The planes arrive over the target just as the enemy is
ascending a steep draw. But the Americans, in addi-
tion to the rain and overcast skies, are greeted by heavy
antiaircraft fire. The combination of poor weather and
low fuel compels the tactical control plane to depart
the region. Nevertheless, the Sabre jets execute an at-
tack. The strafing runs are so effective that the friendly
ground troops get the needed relief and take the
ground, where they discover and count about 700
enemy killed by the air attacks. They find huge stacks
of equipment and supplies — no longer of any use. The
planes had also destroyed the supplies.
— In Japan: Major General Partridge, commander
Fifth Air Force, succeeds General George E. Strate-
meyer as commander Far East Air Forces. General
Stratemeyer had suffered a heart attack. Major Gen-
eral Frank E. Everest succeeds General Partridge as
commander Fifth Air Force; however until Everest can
arrives to assume command, Major General Edward J.
Timberlake becomes temporary commander.
May 22 The Communist focus, according to
Eighth Army intelligence, seems to be against objec-
tives along Route 20, Py’ongch-ang and Yongwol, and
from there to Kangnung, but General Van Fleet re-
mains convinced that the Communists’ attacks are fiz-
zling out. Van Fleet directs the ROK I Corps to bolster
the positions along Route 20 by establishing defenses
to thwart an assault from the east. The orders stipulate
that if enemy pressure prevents the I Corps from hold-
ing there, it is to form to protect the road hub at Kang-
nung.
Meanwhile, the enemy forces in the X Corps zone
initiate a withdrawal subsequent to dusk. Although
enemy intentions remain uncertain to Eighth Army,
the Chinese apparently have concluded that the casu-
alty rates sustained during the offensive have been too
great to continue the advance. Nevertheless, the Com-
munists still have enormous reserves in the region. All
the while, the Eighth Army counterattack continues in
the I and IX Corps sectors.
In the IX Corps sector, still only slight progress is ac-
complished. The full corps attacks reach no farther than
the Georgia Line. The corps’ poor progress prompts
General Van Fleet to commit the X Corps to join in
on the following day to strengthen the assault.
In the X Corps sector, recently formed Task Force
Yoke, led by Colonel Lawrence K. Ladue, moves to take
control of Habae-jae to prevent the Chinese from using
it as a path to strike the line. TF Yoke is composed of
the 2nd Battalion, 38th Regiment, a large contingent
of the 72nd Tank Battalion, one platoon of the 15th
May 22, 1951
Infantry’s tank company and the greater part of the
ROK 3rd Regiment. In addition, TF Yoke includes one
battery of the 300th FABn and a tactical air control
party.
The task force advances through the lines of the
ROK 7th Division near P’ungam-ni en route to the
Habae-jae road junction; however, the objective is not
achieved. The advance, due in great part to the tardi-
ness of the ROKs, misses the mark by less than five
miles. Later, Task Force Able is formed to resume the
task of seizing Habae-jae.
The task force is initially composed of the 15th RCT
and two units from TF Yoke, the ROK 3rd Regiment
and the 300th FABn; however, the force is altered. Al-
mond returns the ROKs to the 7th Division and re-
places them with the 3rd Battalion, 15th Infantry Reg-
iment. One company of the 72nd Tank Battalion is
added. The advance is set for the following day. Colo-
nel Ladue, commander of TF Yoke, succumbs two days
later due to a heart attack.
Also, the 187th Airborne RCT initiates an advance
up Route 24 to seize the high ground near Han’gye.
The afternoon advance encounters only light resistance
and effortlessly gains the objective. In related activity,
regarding the primary attack, the 2nd Division, rein-
forced with the 187th Airborne RCT, moves against
Inje, while the 1st Marine Division pushes toward
Yanggu (Hongch’on–Omyang–Yanggu axis). During
the arduous trek to Yangu, the 1st and 5th Marines sus-
tain many injuries due to the nasty terrain. The
Marines attack toward Hill 1051, which had been
seized by Chinese on 17 April. The 5th Marines while
advancing and engaging rear-guard units of the Chinese
15th Army through some fortuitous luck, discover
eleven 2nd Division troops that had been wounded and
unable to reach friendly lines during the earlier Chi-
nese attack.
In the ROK III Corps sector, the ROK 3rd Division,
commanded by General Kim Jong Oh, and 9th Divi-
sion, led by General Choi Suk, again are unable to
complete tasks assigned to them and both divisions are
mauled by the Chinese by early afternoon. The lines
of both units collapse and their command posts vanish
as the Communists overrun positions effortlessly. Some
units of the ROK 3rd Division are discovered on the fol-
lowing day at positions fifteen miles below Hajinbu-ri.
Also on the following day, some elements of the ROK
9th Division, through the efforts of a KMAG advisor,
begin to regroup about five miles southeast of Hajinbu-
ri. By the latter part of the day, General Van Fleet con-
cludes that the ROK III Corps is no longer cohesive.
The III Corps is designated inactive. The ROK 3rd Di-
vision is transferred to the ROK I Corps, while the ROK
9th Division is placed under the jurisdiction of X Corps.
The failure of the South Koreans increases the difficulty
for Eighth Army, but Van Fleet remains convinced that
the Communists are in the process of a major with-
drawal. He removes the ROK Army forward headquar-
ters from the field and Van Fleet himself assumes re-
sponsibility for the ROK I Corps.
May 23, 1951 724

In the ROK I Corps sector, during the early morning vinced that if the corps commanders quicken the pace,
hours, the Communists smash into the ROK 20th Reg- the Chinese and North Koreans attempting to with-
iment, 11th ROK Division, at Yuch’on-ni. The regiment draw can still be caught in a vise and destroyed.
is driven out by the elements of the N.K. II Corps. In other activity, the saga of a group of 18 Marines
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force executes a large and one U.S. Army interpreter captured during the pre-
number of close-air support sorties and reports that the vious year ends at U.S. lines. The captives had been
attacks inflict about 1,700 casualties on the enemy. brought to the Communist lines near Ch’orwon, prob-
ably to be used as laborers during April. During an ar-
May 23 In the I Corps sector, Task Force Able, com- tillery barrage, the Chinese guards seek cover while the
manded by Lt. Colonel Thomas R. Yancey, resumes
POWs flee. On the following day while concealed in the
the attack toward Habae-jae road center, in place of
heights, the band fabricates a sign from wallpaper
TF Yoke, which had not been able to seize it on the
stripped from a nearby destroyed house, reading:
previous day. Although the task force is only several
“POW 19 RESCUE.” A pilot in an observation plane
miles from the target, it, too, is unable to reach the ob-
spots the sign. On the 26th, several tanks roar to the area
jective due to the rough terrain.
and rescue the men.
In the 3rd Division zone, the advance continues
In the I Corps sector, the advance pushes up Route 3
against North Korean rear-guard units. Elements of the
toward the Kansas Line. Elements reach the line on the
1st Battalion, 7th Infantry Regiment, reach the pass
following day.
north of Soksa-ri.
In the IX Corps sector, the objective is the Topeka
Also, the 65th Infantry Regiment reaches positions
Line at a point in the 7th Division’s newly assigned
west of the 7th Regiment, while the ROK 9th Divi-
area, just above Chunchon. General Ferenbaugh, the
sion holds the rear of the advance in reserve.
7th Division commander, is directed by General Hoge
In the IX Corps sector, after some modifications are
to dispatch an armored force toward Chunchon to dis-
made amidst the forces, the corps finally experiences
cover crossing sites at the Soyang River. Task Force
some progress and gains ground. Nonetheless, the
Hazel is formed for the task, but it is only a light unit,
largest advances move only slightly more than five miles
composed only of a platoon of tanks, the 7th Recon-
against the Chinese 63rd and 64th Armies, which con-
naissance Company and a contingent of engineers. The
tinue a hurried retreat. The task force, composed of
task force comes under heavy attack by small arms and
tanks and the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment (24th Di-
machine gun fire along Route 29 near Sinjom, about
vision), led by General Bryan, makes the deepest pen-
eight miles from Chunchon.
etration and seizes Kap’yong.
Captain Hazel, immediately after coming under at-
In the X Corps sector, the ROK III Corps sector is as-
tack, pulls back the vanguard, which consists of jeeps
sumed by X Corps subsequent to the ROK III Corps
and half-tracs, then pushes eleven tanks to the point.
being dissolved on the previous night by General Van
The Chinese continue to pound against the tanks as
Fleet. Also, the 1st Marine Division initiates its attack
they drive through the pass; however, the enemy fire
northward toward Yanggu at the eastern tip of the
strikes only harmless blows against the armor. Despite
Hwachon Reservoir, to secure the road hub at the east-
being intercepted by an enemy force of regimental
ern tip of the reservoir. The advance is led by the 1st and
strength, by the latter part of the afternoon, the armor
5th Marines. Meanwhile, the 7th Marines, after being
rolls into Chunchon. Captain Hazel is ordered to re-
relieved by a contingent of the 7th Infantry Division
main in Chunchon and await reinforcements, two tank
(IX Corps), moves to the east to operate on the Divi-
platoons carrying supplies and ammunition.
sion’s right flank.
In the meantime, General Ferenbaugh moves out to
In other activity, a contingent of the 2nd Division,
catch up with the task force to oversee the operation.
including the 187th Airborne RCT (attached), is di-
After Hazel’s armor enters Chunchon, the tank crews
rected by General Almond to establish a bridgehead at
scour the town and the river banks. About 100 Chinese
the Soyang River and from there advance to Inje.
are discovered and of those, some are either killed or
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General Robert H.
captured while others escape.
Terrill assumes command of Far East Air Forces
Also, at Hill 302, the tank crews spot a large Chinese
Bomber Command. He succeeds General Elbert
contingent attempting to flee. The tanks unleash an
Briggs. General Briggs will return to the States in June
avalanche of fire upon the hill. The Chinese continue
to assume the position of deputy commander, Fifteenth
to flee without returning fire.
Air Force, at March Air Force Base in California.
Meanwhile, after no communication from General
In Naval activity, two LSMRs (Landing Shore
Ferenbaugh, grave concern arises. When Captain Hazel
Medium Rocket) launch a huge barrage against enemy
is asked if the general is at Chunchon, Hazel replies that
positions at Wonsan during their initial action at the
he didn’t even realize the general was en route. A special
siege of Wonsan. The two vessels fire more than 4,900
unit moving up the road solves the mystery. The troops
rockets during a 35-minute period as part of Operation
come upon the place where General Ferenbaugh’s two-
FIREBALL, executed by cruisers and destroyers.
jeep convoy had been ambushed at 1630. Two men were
May 24 General Van Fleet continues to become killed, but the general, his driver and aide escaped harm
impatient with the tardiness of the offensive. He is con- and sought concealment off the road.
 725 May 24, 1951

Top: A contingent of the 31st Regiment, 7th Division, in action near Ch’onchon on 24 May. One of the
troops, a casualty, receives aid from a medic. Bottom: The 34th Regiment is deployed in the hills near
Ch’unchon.
May 25, 1951
A platoon of tanks led by Lt. Ivan G. Stanaway, while
preparing to move out to reinforce Captain Hazel,
speeds to the point of ambush and encounters some
opposition. Nevertheless, the tankers rescue the
wounded man along the road. Soon after, General Fer-
enbaugh and the others are located. The tanks wait pa-
tiently until dark, unaffected by the small arms fire. At
that time, the general and the other two men abandon
their concealed position, reach the tanks in single file
and climb aboard by squeezing through the escape
hatch. By about 2100, the tanks and the general’s con-
tingent return to the lines of the 38th Infantry.
In related activity, the situation at Chunchon
changes. Captain Hazel receives new orders that direct
him to abandon the village and return due to concerns
that resupply might not be possible. During the pull-
back from Chunchon, two tanks in Captain Hazel’s
command are lost; one is destroyed after it runs out of
fuel and another drops off the road into a gully. Oth-
erwise, the contingent sustains no damage from the
enemy. However, some captives held atop the tanks are
struck by small arms fire.
In the X Corps sector, the offensive continues in an
effort to push the enemy to positions that might trap
it between the IX and X Corps. The 2nd Division ini-
tiates a drive to the Soyang River to secure the Umyang-
ni bridge with an armored force. The task force is ini-
tially commanded by Colonel Brubaker, but while he
is en route P’ungam-ni, Colonel William Gerhardt
takes command of the force at Han’gye. The operation
gets a late start at 1300. The spearhead of the column
takes precautions on the road to avoid mines, but this
slows the drive. An irritated General Almond orders
the tanks to open the throttles and advance. In the
meantime, the main body remains at Han’gye, prompt-
ing Almond to relieve Colonel Brubaker (commander
187th Airborne).
In the meantime, the vanguard, led by Major Charles
A. Newman, races toward the objective. Just below
Umyang-ni the armor encounters an enormous force
of Chinese that numbers several thousand. The Chinese
are startled by the sudden appearance of a line of tanks
and raise no resistance. They break for safety while the
tanks open fire. Afterward, the tanks roll into the town
and scour the area near the river for more enemy troops.
In the meantime, enemy contingents continue to run
north as the tanks maintain a stream of fire upon both
banks of the Soyang River. Later, about 1830, the main
body of Task Force Gerhardt arrives to join the van-
guard.
In the 2nd Division zone, the 38th Infantry Regiment
advances to a position slightly less than ten miles from
Hyon-ni-on, but the progress is hindered by poor road
conditions more so than enemy resistance. On the fol-
lowing day, the 24th Regiment is removed from reserve
to secure the Soyang bridgehead. In the meantime, the
187th Airborne Task Force (minus the contingent at-
tached to TF Gerhardt) moves up Route 24 on the side
of the road opposite the Marines and makes only slight
progress against heavy resistance. On the following day,
726
a contingent punches through the resistance and fords
the Soyang River to establish a bridgehead.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, on the corps’ right,
the advance up Route 24, to the rear of TF Gerhardt,
reaches the area around Yanggu, which is secured; how-
ever, the 7th Marines jumps off late, due to a vehicle
shortage and enemy resistance. Consequently, the
Marines end the day short of the objective, the high
ground west of Umyang-ni. The 7th Marines main-
tain the move toward the Soyang River.
In related activity, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 5th
Marines, encounter heavy resistance as they advance
toward their objective, several hills north of Han’gye.
Hill 1051 is spotted as the origin of the enemy fire. Ar-
tillery fire is requested to clear the hill. Shortly there-
after, the summit and the southeastern slopes are en-
gulfed with fire that promptly evicts the Chinese, who
flee northward. By about 1300, Hill 883 is gained by
Company D. The Marines continue their advance and
by midnight, Colonel Hayward, commanding officer,
reports that the objective of the 5th Marines has been
secured.
In Naval activity, the USS Manchester (CL 83) and
the USS Brinkley Bass (DD 887), operating in the
vicinity of Wonsan and using night radar, commence
firing upon an enemy formation and cause the group to
disperse. The Manchester seizes four enemy sampans
that contain eleven enemy dead and one wounded.
In Air Force activity, the 136th Fighter Bomber Wing
(Air National Guard), which had previously arrived in
Japan from the U.S., initiates its initial combat mis-
sion of the war in Korea. The troops are drawn from
Texas and Arkansas.
May 25 In the IX Corps sector, TF Hazel against
sets out for Chunchon, this time supported by one bat-
talion of the 17th Infantry Regiment (7th Division).
No ambushes are encountered and the enemy is not
found along the route or in Chunchon. Apparently, the
Chinese believed that the tank column that entered
Chunchon on the previous night had been the spear-
head of a large force and rather than engage, they re-
tired. Nevertheless, the air observers spot large enemy
formations, one composed of more than ten thousand
troops, along and near Route 17 above the village. Af-
terward, well before noon, artillery and air attacks pum-
mel the retiring enemy forces.
In the meantime, the remainder of the 17th Infantry
speeds to Chunchon and initiates pursuit from there
at about noon. To add to the dilemma of the Chinese,
the 21st Infantry Regiment, 24th Division, is advanc-
ing up the Kap’yong–Chiam-ni road en route to link
with the 17th Regiment, 7th Division, at Chiam-ni.
Observation planes continue to shadow the advance
and while on patrol, a sign (later discovered to be made
of wallpaper and shells) is spotted southeast of Chun-
chon. It reads: “POW 19” and is underscored by shells
with the word “rescue.” The pilot accepts the message
as urgent and drops a note to the tanks in the town.
Soon after, eighteen Marines and one soldier are soon
 727
greeted by three of Captain Hazel’s tanks. The troops
had been seized at the Changjin Reservoir during the
previous November and abandoned when the town was
evacuated this day.
Just before dusk, observation planes on patrol de-
tect a large group of Chinese moving west toward
Route 24 (X Corps troops are en route there); how-
ever, an escape hatch remains there and the enemy con-
tinues to move across the road throughout the night. In
conjunction, elements of the Chinese 106th Regiment,
34th Division, take advantage of the absence of U.S.
troops and establish defensive positions to protect the
retreat. Task Force Gerhardt (X Corps) is within strik-
ing distance, but the commander fails to dispatch any
units, despite his awareness that a twenty-truck convoy
had been ambushed and only one vehicle had survived.
In the X Corps sector, as in the IX Corps sector, aer-
ial observers detect large enemy formations attached to
the Chinese 12th and 15th Armies as the units retire
from positions below the Hwach’on Reservoir. The X
Corps troops react by increasing the pact to reach
Hwach’on town, while artillery and planes deliver dev-
astating blows against the columns, formed by more
than 10,000 troops and unending rows of vehicles, as
they head north.
In the 2nd Division zone, the 23rd Infantry Regiment
arrives at the Soyang River and lays a bridge across the
river to ease the path of trailing units en route to Inje,
another strategy needed to cut off the retreating enemy.
Also, General Ruffner is alerted to an ambush of
twenty vehicles attempting to drop back and get sup-
plies. Of twenty trucks, nineteen are destroyed and
only two drivers survive. The 23rd Infantry Regiment
is ordered to advance to liquidate the roadblock, but not
until dawn on the following day.
In the 38th Infantry Regiment zone, the North Kore-
ans raise fierce opposition below Sangam-ni and halt
the regiment’s progress. In conjunction, the 9th Infantry
Regiment advances, but encounters no opposition. The
Communists in the 23rd Infantry’s zone continue to re-
tire through the gap between the front of the Marines (X
Corps) and TF Gerhardt in the vicinity of Umyang-ni.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans being pursued by the
38th Regiment maintain their retreat toward Inje. Gen-
eral Almond forms Task Force Baker, using elements
of Task Force Gerhardt and the remaining units of the
187th Airborne RCT. The task force sets out on the
following day to secure Kansong along the coast.
Other action following the establishment of the
bridgehead at the Soyang River includes placing the
2nd Division (minus the 9th Infantry) into reserve.
The ROK 5th Division assumes responsibility for the
2nd Division zone stretched between Route 24 and the
P’ungam-ni–Hyon-ni–Inje road. Other corps changes
include the 3rd Division assuming responsibility for
the area protected by Task Force Able, which is dis-
banded. The 3rd Division continues to keep the ROK
8th and 9th Divisions attached.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st Marines
reaches its objectives, short of the Soyang River. At that
May 26, 1951
point, the Marines are relieved by the 1st Korean Ma-
rine Corps Regiment. The 1st Marines are placed in
reserve. Meanwhile, the 7th Marines, advancing to the
rear of the 5th Marines, continues advancing toward
the Soyang River.
May 26–28 1951 During this period of the
ongoing U.S. offensive, the remaining Communist
forces below the 38th Parallel either escape north of
the parallel or are driven beyond it. However, some
scattered forces remain south of the 38th Parallel.
During this period, great numbers of enemy forces
surrender, many without attempting to resist. In ad-
dition, the Chinese have broken one of their traits by
risking disaster and moving during daylight hours
to escape the wrath of Eighth Army. Chinese retire
while the North Koreans are sacrificed in rear ac-
tions to permit the Chinese to flee without a fight.
The Communists come under attack by planes and
artillery that devastate their ranks.
May 26 In the I Corps sector, the 3rd Division, re-
inforced, advances against sporadic resistance. The 7th
Infantry Regiment effortlessly reaches its objective, the
road junction east of Habae-jae.
In the IX Corps sector, the 17th Infantry Regiment,
7th Division (X Corps) and the 21st Infantry Regi-
ment, 24th Division (IX Corps), both converge upon
Chiam-ni. Several miles southwest of the town, the
regimental headquarters of the 17th Regiment and the
medical detachment establish positions separate from
the infantry units. In the meantime, the 19th Regi-
ment, 24th Division, in the center, drives toward po-
sitions within several miles of Chiam-ni. The ROK 6th
Division is directed to shift from the center to the east
and advance with the 7th Division.
During the day’s operations, some of the Chinese
caught below Chiam-ni escape the trap set by the three
closing regiments; however, others remain in the area.
One group drives against the non-infantry contingent
outside Chiam-ni slightly after midnight (26th-27th);
however, despite no infantry units, the headquarters and
medical personnel hold steadfastly and pulverize a contin-
gent of about three hundred. More Chinese follow and
they, too, fail to break through. The Chinese even at-
tempt close-quartered fighting and still find themselves
on the short end, with high casualties. Failing to penetrate
and shoot through to safety, the enemy bolts for the high
ground and from there attempts to harass the perimeter.
By about dawn (27th), riflemen arrive from the south
to take over the fight. The 5th Infantry, 24th Regiment,
eliminates the last of the assault troops. The Americans
lose two killed and twenty wounded while defending the
perimeter. The Chinese sustain about three hundred
killed, and about two hundred and fifty wounded. In
addition, four hundred and fifty Chinese are captured.
In the X Corps sector, recently formed TF Baker ad-
vances toward the coast to seize Kansong. Also, the 23rd
Regiment, 2nd Division, advances at dawn to knock out
the roadblock along Route 24. The enemy defenders
there, attached to the Chinese 12th Army, are eliminated.
May 27, 1951
The advance moves forward up Route 24 toward Inje
after fording the Soyang River in late morning. Later, the
enemy again raises resistance and prevents the 23rd Reg-
iment from breaking through to Inje.
In related activity, the 7th Marines advance on the
west flank of the 23rd Infantry Regiment. The Chinese
had been retiring in a northwesterly direction, but sub-
sequent to the elimination of nearly the entire 106th
Division, the retreating forces pivot and move to the
northeast toward Yanggu. The 2nd Division is ordered
to seize Inje to provide easy passage across the Soyang
River and through the town to speed its pace to Kansong.
General Almond, X Corps commander, and Gen-
eral Van Fleet remain convinced that the opportunity
to cut off and eliminate many Chinese below Route 24
is still available. In addition to the formation of TF
Baker by General Almond, this day he directs the 3rd
Division to form Task Force Charlie, composed pri-
marily of 7th Infantry Regiment, and attack northeast-
ward to the coast to capture and secure Yangyang.
The advance of TF Charlie experiences problems.
The task force hits mines and an impassable bridge that
suspends further progress after a gain of under five
miles. The pursuit continues across the entire corps
front and during the afternoon, the skies clear, giving
the advance the support of air attacks. Air observation
planes spot more large enemy formations as they move
hurriedly north and west of Inje. The information is
forwarded to headquarters. Soon after, artillery in sup-
The U.S. 2nd Division sustains casualties during the fight to seize Inje. Some of the wounded are trans-
ported across the Soyang River.
728
port of the 38th Infantry’s advance catapults streams
of fire toward designated targets above Inje.
Later, fighter planes arrive overhead and deliver more
punishing blows. The Communists attempt to outrun
the shells and bombs, but without much success. In
addition to the artillery and fighter planes, the Com-
munists also become the recipients of about thirteen
tons of bombs delivered on target by B-29s. Despite
the overpowering bombardments and strafing runs, the
38th Regiment is unable to break through a blockage
established by the N.K. 19th Regiment, 13th Division,
in front of Hyon-ni.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the advance toward
Yanggu continues.
In the ROK I Corps sector, the South Koreans enter
Kansong. Consequently, TF Charlie is ordered to halt
its attack on the village.
In the 7th Marines sector, the 7th Marines close on the
Soyang River. The 2nd Battalion crashes into an enemy
ammunition dump and seizes the remnant forces there,
27 troops, some of whom are wounded and apparently
left behind. The Marines also confiscate a huge amount
of ammunition and supplies, including 100,000 rounds
of small arms ammunition, 12,000 mortar rounds and
9,000 grenades. By dusk, the 7th Marines arrive at the
south bank of the Soyang River.
May 27 The U.S. counterattack continues to make
progress as the Chinese and North Koreans maintain
 729 May 27, 1951

Top: U.S. planes pass over positions of the 187th Airborne RCT (vicinity of Umyang) and drop supplies.
Bottom: Sherman tanks (M4s) attached to the 1st Cavalry Division cross the Imjin River.

their respective retreats. Eighth Army progress remains
behind the schedule expected of it, prompting General
Van Fleet to plan a new phase, Operation PILE DRIVER.
Van Fleet’s blueprint calls for the I and IX Corps to
sever the enemy communications by securing the
Wyoming Line, which will also provide domination of
the area at the base of the Iron Triangle. The operation
also encompasses the simultaneous establishment of a
solid defensive wall to prevent the enemy from exiting
the triangle from the northwest, along the primary
roads leading to Chunchon and the Hwach’on Reser-
voir.
In other activity, Major General Thomas J. Cush-
man succeeds General Harris as commander 1st Marine
Air Wing. In conjunction, Brigadier General William
O. Brice, recently arrived from the U.S., succeeds Gen-
eral Cushing as deputy commander.
In the IX Corps sector, at Chiam-ni, some Chinese
still search for a route of escape, but the clamps continue
to tighten. One group tries unsuccessfully to break out
May 28, 1951
during the early morning hours. Afterward, all escape
routes close. The 17th and 21st Infantry Regiments dis-
continue their respective operations around Chiam-ni
and moved to participate in the main advance along
Route 17, but the 5th Infantry Regiment, supported by
the ROK 19th Regiment, 6th ROK Division, begins a
mop-up of the area. About 2,000 Chinese are captured.
In the X Corps sector, despite poor weather, some air
observations flights operate, and reports continue to
indicate strong enemy forces on the retreat. One group
of about seven thousand is detected as it drives north
along the Hyon-ni–Inje Road in front of the 38th In-
fantry Regiment. Meanwhile, TF Baker drives toward
Inje at full speed, avoiding some enemy units as it
moves, aware that the trailing 23rd Regiment will en-
gage them. The North Koreans raise opposition and
impede the advance of the 23rd Regiment. TF Baker
plows into Inje at 1430, but the 23rd Regiment en-
counters stiff opposition. Nonetheless, by about dusk,
Hyon-ni is secure. Later, Task Force Baker and ele-
ments of the 23rd Regiment secure the town, but by that
time it is too late to push to Kanyong.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the attack advances
to a point slightly more than five miles from Inje.
In the X Corps sector, the 1st Marine Division (5th and
7th Marines) continues its advance against a vanishing
enemy.
May 28 The elements again are uncooperative,
preventing any air activity until the afternoon.
Nonetheless, activity across the Eighth Army front con-
tinues to focus on destroying as many enemy troops as
possible. Also, General Ridgway arrives in Korea from
Japan to confer with General Van Fleet in Seoul. The
conference regards Van Fleet’s intent to attack beyond
the Kansas and Wyoming Lines and secure the
T’ongch’on area near the coast. Van Fleet seeks per-
mission to penetrate farther to engage the enemy troops
that escaped the trap that was expected to nab them at
Route 24. Ridgway, however, is adamantly opposed to
stretching the lines to the T’ongch’on region, which in
his opinion would be too risky. Nevertheless, Van Fleet
receives authorization to modify the Kansas Line where
it stretches east of the Hwach’on Reservoir.
In the I Corps sector, General Milburn plans a three-
division advance to the Wyoming Line. The objective
of the 1st Cavalry Division on the corps’ right becomes
the section of the line southwest of Ch’orwon to the
Imjin River. The 25th Division is to advance on the
right of Route 33 to seize Kumhwa at the eastern point
of the triangle, while the 3rd Division drives forward to
seize Ch’orwon. The full-scale advance for the I Corps
is set for 3 June, followed two days later by the IX
Corps.
In the IX Corps sector, General Hoge, like General
Milburn in the X Corps sector, plans for a three-divi-
sion attack to reach the Wyoming Line. The 7th Divi-
sion and the ROK 2nd Division are to seize the terrain
above Route 17, extending northwest from Hwach’on
to the Iron Triangle. In conjunction, the ROK 6th Di-
730
vision is directed to take the territory above the west-
ern side of the Hwach’on Reservoir from Route 17 to
the Pukham River.
In other activity, at Chiam-ni, the 5th Infantry Reg-
iment and the ROK 19th Regiment continue to mop up.
The Chinese, still trapped, surrender in large numbers.
The total of captives gained stands at 38,000 troops.
Meanwhile, the 17th Regiment, 7th Division, drives
up Route 17 and encounters some tenacious resistance.
Nevertheless, the regiment overcomes the Chinese cov-
ering forces and pushes to Hwach’on, which it reaches
by about 1400.
In related activity, the main body of the ROK 6th Di-
vision advances on the right against no opposition, but
makes little progress as it reaches the area west of the
reservoir. Consequently, the Chinese still have open es-
cape routes near the Hwach’on Reservoir. The air ob-
servation flights that resume during the afternoon dis-
cover that the area below the reservoir had surely been
evacuated.
Meanwhile, the 17th Infantry Regiment pushes be-
yond the village of Hwach’on. But the 20th Chinese
Army, which slipped through the lines, posts elements
above the village that halt the advance. In addition to
the disciplined troops north and east of Hwach’on,
other elements of the Chinese 20th Army raise fero-
cious opposition farther west against the advance of the
24th Division and the ROK 2nd Division.
May 29 At Seoul, the talks between Generals
Ridgway and Van Fleet conclude. General Van Fleet is
directed to provide Ridgway with a blueprint that es-
timates the Eighth Army situation as far out as sixty
days. In conjunction, the report is also to include Van
Fleet’s suggestions for future operations. With regard to
the advance to the Wyoming and Kansas Lines, Ridg-
way anticipates strong opposition in the terrain below
the Iron Triangle and along the flanks there. Nonethe-
less, it is thought that the objectives can be achieved
within two weeks.
In the X Corps sector, the 5th and 7th Marines each
encounter tenacious enemy resistance. Calls are made
to get immediate air support; however, the Marines
still are not able to maintain direct support from the
Marine squadrons. The Marines request 92 sorties and
receive only 55. In addition, only 20 are handled by
Marine Corsairs or Panther jets. Thirty-five sorties are
executed by Air Force Mustangs and jets. Marines who
are accustomed to immediate and direct support are
essentially left to clear the resistance from the ground.
Most flights arrive between two and four hours late. In
one incident within the 5th Marines zone, Company C,
1st Battalion, becomes heavily engaged near Kwagch’i-
dong.
A rifleman and scout, PFC Whitt L. Moreland, uses
his skills to support the elimination of an obstinate po-
sition. Moreland afterward leads a detachment against
a heavily fortified bunker. As the unit approaches the
obstacle, enemy grenades land in their midst. More-
land shoves a few away, but one remains to endanger
 731 June 1, 1951

him and others nearby. He dives on it to save the lives ground troops with artillery, machine guns and mortars.
of the others. PFC Moreland receives the Medal of The diminutive force, attached to Company G, is un-
Honor posthumously for his selfless sacrifice. able to withstand the superior numbers of attackers be-
In Naval activity, the USS Stickell (DD 888) and cause of expending their ammunition. The platoon is
USS Burlington (PF 51) land a raiding party near ordered to withdraw.
Songjin. A few small boats are destroyed. The party Corporal Rodolfo P. Hernandez, although wounded,
sustains no casualties. attempts to hold the line while the others retire. Her-
nandez fires into the rushing forces until his weapon
May 30 By this date, Eighth Army is back on the
fails. The sentinel continues to battle with a rifle and
Kansas Line. Subsequent to the recent discussions with
bayonet until his wound (a combination of a grenade,
General Ridgway, General Van Fleet makes prepara-
bayonet and a bullet) forces him to drop in place, un-
tions to carry out Eighth Army objectives, which will
conscious. However, his actions save the others and
also include contingency plans. While plans are being
they return to retake the ground. Corporal Hernandez
drawn for the advance (Operation PILE DRIVER), the
is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
weather again acts against the operation. Heavy rains
courage in the face of the enemy.
strike across the area and continue during the follow-
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force initiates Oper-
ing day, causing nasty consequences for the troops and
ation STRANGLE, designed to destroy the supply lines of
vehicles that must move along the water-clogged
the enemy. Also, a contingent of B-29s is intercepted by
ground and roads. While the I and IX Corps prepare to
MiGs in the vicinity of Sinuiju. The Superfortresses
attack, it becomes evident, as predicted by General
and their escort planes engage the attack force and when
Ridgway, that the Communists are willing to pay a huge
the air battle subsides, the Russians lose four MiGs,
price to hold the Iron Triangle. Patrols from each corps
against no U.S. losses. The gunners aboard the B-29s
encounter resistance.
take out one of the MiGs and two others are downed
May 31 According to reports, the enemy sustains by the Sabre jets.
more than 62,000 casualties during the U.S. counter- In Naval activity, Rear Admiral A.A. Burke, recently
attack, which began on 20 May. When the Chinese of- appointed commanding officer, Cruiser Division 5,
fensive is added, enemy casualties rise to more than aboard the USS Los Angeles (CA 135), arrives off the east
73,000 and include 44,705 killed, 19,753 wounded coast of Korea and assumes command of Bombline El-
and 8,749 captured. Of the casualties, the 1st Marine ement (TE 9.28).
Division reports 1,870 killed (counted) and 593 cap-
tured. Eighth Army estimates of enemy casualties for the
Summer 1951 During the summer, the So-
viets and the Chinese have amassed about 445 MiG-
last half of May include 17,000 killed (counted) and
15s across the Yalu River, where they remain safe
17,000 POWs. Eighth Army reports 33,770 casualties
from U.S. forces. Far East Air Forces, at this time, has
for all of May, with most sustained by the South Ko-
only 89 F-86s (Sabre jets) in its force. Only 44 are
reans. American casualties amount to 745 killed, 4,218
assigned to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing, which
wounded and 572 missing. In addition, Eighth Army
greatly curtails its efficiency against the MiGs. To
sustains 6,758 non-battle casualties, mostly from dis-
add to the dilemma, at times due to maintenance,
ease.
about half remain out of service.
In the IX Corps sector, the casualties for May, includ-
Lieutenant General Otto P. Weyland, recently ap-
ing the Chinese offensive and the U.S. counterattack,
pointed FEAF commander, has constantly requested
amount to 341 killed, 2,011 wounded and 195 missing.
additional planes but his pleas are met by deaf ears
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the 7th
in Washington. The consensus in D.C. continues to
Marines encounter a treacherous pass that leads into
focus on the Soviet threat to Europe. The massive
Yanggu. The Marines atop the ridges that overlook the
cutbacks in the military following the close of World
pass begin a slow and methodical descent to clear the
War II continue to hurt the troops in the theater.
enemy. General Van Fleet, who happens to be at the 7th
Nonetheless, the top brass in the Air Force will begin
Marines’ positions, looks up at the towering ridges and
to replace the F-86As with F-86Es, but not on a
in amazement asks: “How did you ever get the men up
large scale; rather, one at a time.
those cliffs?” Colonel Nickerson responds with a suc-
It is well that the E-model, featuring a “flying tail”
cinct answer: “They climbed.” By dusk, the Marines
(a horizontal stabilizer moving as one unit) and hy-
complete their descent, evict the enemy and gain con-
draulically powered flight controls that substantially
trol of Yanggu and its airfield as well as the surround-
increased maneuverability, begin to arrive, because
ing heights. In the meantime, the 5th Marines reaches
the 4th FIW is now faced with an improved MiG,
positions about 6,000 yards northeast of Yanggu. Dur-
the MiG-15bis. This version has a more powerful
ing the month of May, the 1st Marine Division sus-
engine that gives it a higher maximum speed and a
tains 75 killed, 8 who die of their wounds, and 731 are
greater operational altitude.
wounded in action.
In other activity, the enemy launches an attack June 1 Eighth Army issues orders to all Corps to
against Hill 120, defended by a contingent of the 187th bolster the Kansas and Wyoming Lines. In conjunc-
Airborne Regiment. The Communists support the tion with General Ridgway’s recent instructions to
June 2, 1951
General Van Fleet to suspend any major attacks toward
the T’onch’on region, each corps is directed to initiate
only limited attacks and strong reconnaissance missions
in addition to their normal patrols.
In an effort to further solidify the defensive line, all
civilians are moved from an area five miles behind the
Kansas line to a point above the line where forward pa-
trol bases are located. The relocation of the civilians per-
mits the troops to more easily deal with and identify the
enemy, while the defenses are being more heavily fortified.
The full-scale attack is scheduled to jump off in the
I Corps area on 3 June. In the meantime, on this day
the weather clears, but the enemy resistance continues
to be aggressive.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the 5th
and 7th Marines launch an attack toward the Kansas
Line. The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, encounters fierce
resistance at Hill 651, defended by about 200 North
Koreans. The attacks by noon are still unable to dislodge
the Communists, but air strikes are requested to
quicken the eviction. Four Marine planes arrive and
plaster the slopes with bombs and strafing runs, which
succeed in cracking the defense wide open. The
Marines afterward push forward and seize the hill.
Also, 1st Marine Aircraft Wing initiates its plan of de-
ploying one squadron at Hoengeong, which is located
to the rear of the 1st Marine Division.
In Air Force activity, a band of 22 MiGs attacks a
group of B-29s attached to the 343th Bomber
Squadron. One of the B-29s is shot down, but the Su-
perfortresses’ gunners down two of the MiGs. The Rus-
sians again, after failing to make progress against U.S.
A U.S. observation plane is on a mission above mountains in search of enemy movements and positions.
732
pilots, sink into temporary invisibility and do not re-
turn to the skies until 17 June. Also, one other B-29 is
damaged.
In other activity, a flight of F-86s, attached to the
336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, encounters a band
of 18 MiGs near Sinanju while it is escorting a B-26
bombing mission. A U.S. Navy exchange pilot, Lieu-
tenant Simpson Evans, Jr., attached to 336th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group,
gets the victory. The plane is set afire and the wing falls
off, causing the MiG to crash.
Another pilot attached to the 336th Squadron, Cap-
tain Richard O. Ransbottom, also gets one of the MiGs.
Ransbottom knocks the MiG out after three bursts of
machine gun fire. The pilot is able to eject, but his
plane crashes in flames.
In yet other activity, Far East Air Forces Special Air
Mission transports a group of fifteen South Koreans
that parachute behind enemy line on a mission to
gather components of a crashed MiG. The entire con-
tingent is captured.
—In Japan, Major General Frank F. Everest, USAF,
assumes command of the Fifth Air Force (Major Gen-
eral Edward J. Timberlake had been in temporary com-
mand after General Stratemeyer suffered a heart attack
and was hospitalized).
— In the United States: The 3rd Marine Brigade is
activated at Camp Pendleton, California.
June 2 In the I Corps sector, final preparations are
made for the attack scheduled for the following day.
In the 25th Division zone, a contingent of Company
 733
C, 24th Regiment, engages an entrenched enemy po-
sition in the vicinity of Chipo-ri. The platoon leading
the attack gets stalled by intense fire. The platoon leader
becomes wounded, but he is evacuated. Meanwhile,
Sergeant Cornelius H. Charlton assumes command,
then continues the attack by ascending farther up the
slope, despite the heavy fire. Charlton takes the point
and single-handedly eliminates two gun positions and
six defenders. Soon the platoon is again stalled by heavy
fire. Undaunted, Charlton leads yet another attack,
until he is felled by grenades. Despite a serious chest
wound, Charlton refuses medical aid and instead leads
yet another charge that seizes the ridge.
Upon gaining the crest, Charlton notices that the
reverse slope contains another gun emplacement. Sin-
glehandedly, Charlton drives straight into the position
and takes it out with grenades. The company gains con-
trol of the hill and the enemy retires. Charlton, how-
ever, succumbs from his wounds. He is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary
leadership in the face of the enemy and for his tremen-
dous individual heroism.
In the IX Corps sector, patrols continue, but the jump-
off for the main assault remains three days off.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st
Battalion, 5th Marines, advances toward the Kansas
Line. Intense enemy fire holds up the advance until
tanks arrive to add some punch to the drive. The tanks
pour fire into the log bunkers, providing time for the
Marines to reach the forward slope of Hill 610. Mean-
while, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, continues to
drive along a parallel ridge. The enemy positions on
Hill 610 are completely eliminated by 1945. Afterward,
the 2nd Battalion jumps out and advances another
5,000 yards. Later, the enemy mounts a failed counter-
attack against Hill 610.
In other activity, the 1st Marines prepares to relieve
the 7th Marines as ordered the previous night. The 1st
Marines arrives at the assembly area at 0630, but shortly
thereafter, an enemy mortar strikes a gathering of of-
ficers, killing the artillery liaison officer and wounding
four company commanders. More than thirty enlisted
men are wounded. Lieutenant Colonel Homer E. Hire
is unharmed. Nevertheless, the scheduled operation to
pass through the 7th Marines and continue the attack
is suspended until the following day.
In Naval activity, the Begor (APD 127) and Under-
water Demolition Team 3 (UDT 3), operating on the
east coast of Korea in the vicinity of Kojo, lands a group
of ROK guerrillas on Song-do Island during the night
of June 2-3.
June 3 Operation PILE DRIVER commences. The I
Corps launches its advance from the Kansas Line to the
Wyoming Line. It encounters tenacious resistance as
the Chinese anchor themselves to hold the Iron Trian-
gle. Following a couple of clear days, the rains again
descend upon Eighth Army sectors to further hamper
the advance.
In the X Corps zone, the 1st Marines, which had sus-
June 5, 1951
pended the attack for one day, moves out to seize the ob-
jective, designated X-RAY. The 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, drives toward Hill 516, while the 3rd Battal-
ion advances along a parallel ridge. Planes attached to
VMF-214 and VMF-323 support the advances and
the objective is secure by 1900.
Also, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, supported by air
attacks, drives to seize Hill 680, which falls by about
1400. Then the Marines move against nearby Hill 692.
Air support is requested after the attacking force is
halted by intense enemy fire. However, fog sets in and
delays the planes. At about 1600, the attack is resumed
without air cover, but as the Marines approach the
summit, the planes arrive to drop napalm. The Marines
scatter to avoid becoming casualties of the friendly fire.
While they run to seek cover, enemy fire inflicts some
casualties. Once the planes complete their passes, Com-
pany A reinitiates the attack and gains Hill 692.
The day’s fighting terminates the Battle of Soyang-
gang, which had begun on 16 May. The Marines con-
tinue the offensive in their new zone of responsibility,
east of the Hwach’on Reservoir.
In Air Force activity, during a resupply flight, friendly
ground artillery fire downs two C-119s as they are in
the process of dropping supplies. The tragedy compels
the U.S. to change its method of identification to dis-
tinguish friend from foe during the Air Force’s air-drop
flights.
June 4 Bad weather and continuing stiff oppositions
impedes the advance of the I Corps as it punches its
way toward the Wyoming Line.
In the X Corps sector, the ROK 5th Division advances
toward the Kansas Line in coordination with the 1st
Marine Division, the latter already on the move toward
the line and the Punch Bowl.
In other activity, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Reg-
iment relieves the 5th Marines. The Korean Marines
receive the task of seizing Hill 1316 (Taeam-san).
In the ROK I Corps sector, the Corps has advanced
against light opposition and by this date, its three di-
visions reach and deploy along the Kansas Line to pro-
tect the area that stretches across a ridge to the front of
Route 24.
In Naval activity, Marine Fighter Squadron VMF-
312 departs the USS Bataan (CVL 29) for Itami Air
Force Base, Japan.
June 5 Two F-80s on patrol spot several Commu-
nist MiG-15s at 39–52 N, 12–50 E, the deepest south-
ern penetration by enemy jet fighters at this point in the
conflict, with the exception of one incident the previ-
ous year, when a naval helicopter had come under at-
tack in the same zone during December 1950.
Also, the IX Corps commences its advance to the
Wyoming Line. Like the I Corps, it too becomes hin-
dered by inclement weather and tough resistance as it
slowly grinds forward.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the Ko-
rean Marines move to seize Hill 1316, defended by
North Koreans who had been directed by the Chinese
June 6, 1951
to “hold until death.” The hill is located in extremely
nasty terrain and the battle to gain it lasts five day with-
out any success by the Korean Marines. On 10 June, the
strategy to take the hill changes.
In the 7th Division zone, a contingent of Company I,
31st Regiment, led by 1st Lieutenant Benjamin F. Wil-
son, moves against an obstinate enemy position in the
vicinity of Hwach’on–Myon. The vanguard gets stalled
as it presses ahead, but Wilson speeds to the point and
takes his own action. He drills toward the position with
his rifle and grenades, takes out the position and its
four defenders, then races forward to the next obstacle.
Wilson, leading a charge with his troops’ bayonets fixed,
takes the next obstacle and about 27 defenders are elim-
inated. The Communists mount a counterattack to re-
gain the ground, but again, Wilson takes action before
his command, which is regrouping, can be over-
whelmed.
Single-handedly, Lieutenant Wilson bolts forward,
takes out seven of the attackers and wounds two oth-
ers. The enemy, apparently stunned Wilson’s action,
retreats hurriedly. The contingent then completes its
regrouping and moves against its primary objective,
but when it reaches a point about fifteen yards from it,
the enemy commences fire. The fire becomes impene-
trable, which compels the troops to pull back. During
the withdrawal, Wilson becomes wounded.
Meanwhile, the enemy mounts yet another counter-
attack. The company resists, but the company com-
mander and the platoon leader become wounded. Wil-
son, despite his own wound, leads a counterattack and
throws the enemy back, buying enough time for the
Sikorsky helicopter is on a dangerous slope, held down by Marines during high winds.
734
company to make a disciplined withdrawal. Lieutenant
Wilson becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for
his services above and beyond the call of duty.
In Air Force activity, Colonel Ralph H. ‘Salty’ Saltz-
man assumes command of the 18th Fighter Bomber
Group. He succeeds Colonel William P. McBride.
June 6–8 1951 The Chinese continue to re-
sist in front of the Iron Triangle, but the I and IX
Corps maintain pressure, which finally punctures
the enemy lines on 8 June.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
1st Marines continue to advance against building re-
sistance.
June 6 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the advance to the Kansas Line continues. The
Marines’ objectives are five ridgelines that run north-
west to southeast along the Kansas Line. At 1300, the
5th Marines moves out to seize Hill 729. Air support
does not arrive until 1400 due to fog. Nevertheless, by
2100, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 5th Marines, regroup
on the first ridge and for the next ten days, they secure
the four remaining ridges.
June 7 In the IX Corps sector, 7th Division zone,
the Communists launch an attack against a contingent
of Company F, 31st Regiment’s perimeter near Pachi-
dong. Elements of the company are deployed on
two strategic hills separated by a large saddle. The
enemy strikes at 0300 and the fire immediately becomes
fierce. Four of the defenders are immediately wounded,
but while the contingents defend, the wounded are
 735
A Marine casualty receives plasma from a medic after being wounded by a mine. Four other Marines also
sustained wounds from the explosion.
evacuated. A machine gun manned by PFC Jack G.
Hanson becomes extremely important, situated where
it can protect the command post and the weapons pla-
toon. Hanson volunteers to hold his position to permit
the platoon to withdraw to more tenable positions. The
1st Platoon is able to retire and regroup for a counter-
attack.
Soon after, the assault is launched and the ground is
regained. PFC Hanson remains at his machine gun,
but he had been killed. His machine gun had expended
its ammunition but Hanson remained at his post. He
is discovered with his pistol in his right hand, a blood-
June 7, 1951
ied machete in is left hand, surrounded by 22 dead
enemy troops. PFC Jack Hanson is awarded the Medal
of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary courage
in the face of a superior numbered enemy.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces initiates a
three-day campaign by B-26s and B-29s that saturates
enemy positions in the Iron Triangle during the dark-
ened hours. The planes drop radar-directed 500-pound
bombs that burst over the heads of the enemy troops
and spread fragments over a wide area. The Air Force’s
campaign is designed to loosen the resistance against
imminent attacks by the friendly ground troops.
June 8, 1951
A Sikorsky helicopter approaches a landing site to evacuate wounded Marines.
In Naval activity, a raiding party debarks from the
USS Rupertus (DD 851) at Songjin and soon after
comes under enemy fire. The contingent returns to the
ship without sustaining any casualties. Three prisoners
(North Koreans) are seized and carried back to the ship.
June 8 The Communists’ resistance cracks and the
I and IX Corps increase the pace of their respective ad-
vances toward the Wyoming Line.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines continue to advance toward the Kansas Line,
but Major General Gerard C. Thomas becomes con-
cerned about climbing casualties. He commits the
greater part of the reserve 7th Marines to add more
strength to the attack. Only the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines, remains in division reserve.
In other activity, the ROK 7th Division is ordered to
drive above the eastern sector of the Hwach’on Reser-
voir to secure it and gain the Kansas Line. The 1st Ma-
rine Division drives against North Korean resistance in
front of the lower portion of the Punch Bowl.
June 9–11 1951 Elements of the I and IX
Corps reach their objectives at the Wyoming Line.
Communist forces have withdrawn farther north.
In the X Corps sector, the advance to the Kansas
Line continues.
June 9 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the reserves (7th Marines) join the advance to the
Punch Bowl. Heavy resistance continues, but the
Marines also face especially nasty terrain and lousy
weather. The advance is hindered by many natural ob-
stacles, including landslides that frequently block the
736
routes and at times cause vehicles to veer off the roads.
Frequent fog also creates problems by preventing air
cover.
In the 1st Marines zone, during the early morning
hours as the 2nd Battalion prepares to advance, an
enemy mortar barrage strikes the lines just prior to an
enemy attack by a company-sized contingent of North
Koreans. The attack is easily repelled and the North
Koreans sustain heavy casualties. After eliminating the
North Korean attackers, the advance jumps off on
schedule and as the 1st and 2nd Battalions advance,
the resistance continues to be heavy. Nonetheless, prior
to noon, the Marines seize the first ridge and by 1600,
with the support of elements of the regimental anti-
tank company, the second ridge is gained.
In the 7th Marines zone, the 1st Battalion advances
along the ridgeline, while the 2nd Battalion punches
forward through the valley to secure Hill 420. The
North Koreans raise heavy resistance, primarily from
mortars and artillery fire; however, the Marines secure
the hill prior to dusk. The Marines count 85 N.K. dead
and they capture sixteen others.
In Naval activity, in an effort to expedite the ex-
change of information between TF-77 and forces in
the vicinity of Wonsan, the U.S. Navy initiates an air
drop and pick-up station on Yo-Do Island.
June 10 In the I Corps sector, elements of the 3rd
Division, ROK 9th Division and the 10th Philippine
Battalion seize high ground south of Ch’orwon. In the
meantime, the 25th Division and the Turkish Brigade
reach positions within several miles of Kumhwa.
In the X Corps area, the ROK 7th Division arrives at
 737
U.S. Army engineers move in front of a tank along a road south of Ch’orwon on 10 June to clear any
mines laid by the enemy.
the Kansas Line, the objective of Operation DETO-
NATE. The Marines, meanwhile, trudge across the
rugged terrain against heavy resistance and make only
slow progress.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, enemy resistance
prompts a change in strategy. General Almond confers
with Colonel Wilbur S. Brown (Commander, 1st
Marines) and afterward, by 1100, the entire 2nd Bat-
talion is committed to bolster the assault. During the
ferocious contest, Corporal Charles G. Abrell, Com-
pany E, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, participates in a
charge against a fortified enemy gun position. Abrell,
already wounded, closes on the position, but he is hit
twice more while he is at the point within striking dis-
tance of the obstacle. Despite, or possibly because of,
the three wounds, Abrell continues to advance, while he
calls for the others to follow. With a grenade in his
hand, Abrell pulls the pin and dives into the bunker.
The entire enemy gun crew is killed and Corporal
Abrell is mortally wounded. Corporal Abrell is awarded
the Medal of Honor posthumously for is selfless cour-
age in the face of the enemy.
The Communists raise tenacious resistance through-
out the day. By dusk, both battalions are short of their
objectives and although many Communists had been
liquidated by grenades and bayonets, they still hold
steadfastly. The 11th Marines in support of the attack
June 10, 1951
coordinate their fire and deliver a relentless barrage to
soften the resistance. In addition, air strikes bolster the
ground troops, but in the end, it is the infantry that fi-
nally evicts the defenders from their log bunkers. The
Marines secure their final objective including Hill 802
prior to midnight (10th-11th). The Marine casualties for
this attack include 14 killed in action and 114 wounded
in action. The 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, which seized
Hill 802, sustains 9 killed and 97 wounded.
Colonel Brown moves to the front to observe the
final assault. Later, he states: “It was a glorious specta-
cle, that last bayonet assault. In the last analysis, 2/1
had to take its objective with the bayonet and hand
grenades, gnawing its way up the side of a mountain to
get at the enemy. It was bloody work, the hardest fight-
ing I have ever seen.”
Also, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment, following
five days of failed attempts to gain Hill 1316, at 2000
prepares to mount a night attack. The defenders are
caught completely off guard when they are struck by
the weight of three battalions at 0200 on the 11th.
In other activity, the ROK 5th Regiment secures its
objectives during the morning hours.
In Air Force activity, the 315th Air Division is able to
expand its resupply operations with the opening of the
airfield at Chunchon to cargo planes. The airfield, lo-
cated slightly below the 38th Parallel, about fifty miles
June 11, 1951
northeast of Seoul, expands the ability of the planes to
resupply the troops in the field by air drop.
In Naval activity, two PB4Y-2 planes initiate action
to assist the night operations. The aircraft drop flares
to illuminate the target areas for Marine Squadron
VMF-323.
— In Japan: Lt. General Otto P. Weyland assumes
command in Tokyo of Far East Air Forces, replacing
General Partridge. Partridge had been commanding of-
ficer of Fifth Air Force until May 21, when he suc-
ceeded General Stratemeyer as commander FEAF.
June 11 In the I Corps sector, the Communists, fac-
ing pressure from the 3rd Division, ROK 9th Division
and the Turkish Brigade, abandon Ch’orwon and
Kumhwa. The gains of the 3rd and 25th Divisions con-
tinue to press the Communists. Two tank-infantry
forces drive across the Iron Triangle to P’yonggang and
enter it on the 13th.
In the X Corps zone, 1st Marine Division sector, the 1st
Marines recuperates for only a short while following
the tenacious battle on the previous day. The advance
continues with the 3rd Battalion taking the lead; how-
ever, by this date, the North Koreans in front of the
advancing 1st Marines are no longer able to raise strong
resistance. By 14 June, the Marines reach the Brown
Line, an extension of the Kansas Line.
In other activity, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Reg-
iment launches a full-scale attack, turning the table on
the North Koreans defending Hill 1316 and the adja-
cent ridges. The defenders, totally surprised, are un-
able to react quickly enough to resist the three-battal-
ion onslaught. Hill 1122 falls and the enemy withdraws
from the shoulder, providing the Korean Marines an
easy task to seize Taeam-san (Hill 1316). The Korean
Marines sustain about 500 casualties during the oper-
ation.
In Air Force activity, an F-51, while on a mission,
gets shot down in the vicinity of Kyomipo. The pilot
ejects and lands in the Taedong River. A rescue plane
attached to the 3rd ARS arrives to pick up the pilot at
just about dusk and despite enemy fire originating on
either side of the river, the SA-16, with its lights off,
safely passes low hanging electrical transmission wires,
then lands on the river, which is filled with debris and
rocks. Nevertheless, the pilot is successfully extricated.
June 12 The I and IX Corps strengthen their po-
sitions along the Wyoming Line.
In Naval activity, the USS Walke (DD 723) strikes a
floating mine at 38–52 N, 129–25 E. Twenty-six en-
listed men are killed and 35 receive minor wounds.
June 13 In the I Corps zone, patrols from Ch’orwon
and Kumhwa push forward to P’yonggang at the tip of
the Iron Triangle and enter the town without incident.
Although the town is deserted, the Chinese have not
totally abandoned the region. They are redeployed in
dominating ground northeast and northwest of P’y-
onggang. The patrols, detecting the enemy strength,
then pull back out of the town.
738
In the IX Corps sector, Chinese forces are detected
northeast of Kumsong.
In the X Corps sector, North Koreans hold positions
east of the Hwach’on Reservoir.
June 14 The USS Thompson (DMS 38), while op-
erating against the enemy off Songjin on the 99th day
of the siege, sustains fourteen hits by shore batteries.
The vessel sustains some damage and in addition, three
men are killed and another three are wounded. One
other seaman receives a superficial wound.
June 15 By this day, all geographical objectives of
Operation PILE DRIVER are attained. Also, an infantry
battalion from Colombia arrives in Korea. Colombia
is the final member country to send ground troops to
the United Nations forces. However, some additional
British units (headquarters and service contingents)
also arrive during June. The British units would later,
during the latter part of July, be formed with other
United Kingdom contingents as the 1st Common-
wealth Brigade.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force headquarters,
located at Taegu, relocates again to Seoul.
June 16 By this date, Eighth Army achieves its
objectives, as elements of all units have arrived at their
respective positions along the Wyoming-Kansas Line.
In the X Corps sector, The 1st Marine Division reaches
its objective, a line extending from the Hwach’on
Reservoir to the Punch Bowl.
June 17 In the I Corps sector, the Communists re-
occupy P’yonggang.
In the X Corps sector, the advance continues toward
the Kansas Line. The 7th Marines, which had joined in
the attack on the 9th, still lacks the 3rd Battalion, but
it prepares to come out of reserve on the following day.
The 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, is at this time the sole
unit in division reserve.
In Air Force activity, a band of about 25 MiGs at-
tacks a formation of Sabre jets near the Yalu River in the
vicinity of Sinuiju. The enemy is especially aggressive,
but to no avail. The U.S. sustains no losses; however,
the Communists sustain one MiG destroyed and six
others damaged. The MiG is downed by Captain
Samuel Pesacreta, attached to the 4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group. Captain Pesacreta’s contingent of
four F-86s had been attacked by eight MiGs.
Also, a Polikarpov Po–2 biplane, a type of aircraft
from the pre–World War II days dubbed “Bedcheck
Charlie,” makes a usual bombing run over Seoul. The
plane, which rarely scores great damage and can hardly
reach 100 miles per hour, scores a big hit on this day.
Its bomb strikes the ramp at Suwon and destroys one
Sabre jet of the 335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron
and inflicts damage on eight others.
— In Japan: Fifth Air Force issues a warning, stat-
ing that the Communists have increased their number
of planes in Korea from about 800 in mid–May to
about 1,050 at present. Despite constant air strikes
against the Communists’ airfields in North Korea, the
 739
fields remain operable. At this time there are an esti-
mated 58 Communist divisions in Korea. The
U.S.–U.N. air strikes have not halted the flow of sup-
plies and ammunition that continues to arrive to main-
tain their resources.
June 18 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the advance closes on the east-west hill that iden-
tifies the Brown Line. The terrain is too difficult to
mount an attack except directly from the front. The
enemy-held ridge is defended by the 1st Battalion, 41st
Regiment, N.K. 12th Division. The Marines ascend
the ridge and just as they approach the crest, the North
Koreans, concealed on the opposite slope, launch an
attack. Company G, 7th Marines holds solidly and re-
pels five successive charges. Company I participates in
the fifth enemy assault and it, too, refuses to budge.
At about dusk, the brutal contest ends. The Marines es-
tablish night positions and prepare to resume the attack
on the following morning.
In Air Force activity, a group of 40 MiGs encounters
and intercepts a formation of F-86 Sabre jets during
the morning to ignite another wild fight in the skies.
The Russians fare poorly and lose a minimum of five of
their MiGs, two of which are downed by Lieutenant
Ralph D. Gibson. Nevertheless, the Russians do shoot
down one Sabre jet, the second Sabre lost during the
war. Another pilot, Captain Erwin A. Hesse, 4th
Fighter-Interceptor Group, also receives credit for
downing one of the MiGs.
In Naval activity, the USS Evans (DD 754), operat-
ing off Wonsan, comes under fire by enemy shore guns,
but no major damage is sustained; however, some
sailors receive minor wounds.
June 19 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Marines prepare to complete the seizure of
the ridge along the Brown Line, but the enemy ab-
sconded during the night (18th-19th).
In Air Force activity, again a band of MiGs intercepts
A squadron of F-86 Sabre jets prepares to take off for MiG Alley.
June 21, 1951
and engages a formation of F-86 Sabre jets in MiG
Alley. It is the third consecutive day that the Russians
have come out to fight. The Sabre jets manage to dam-
age four MiGs, but one Sabre jet is lost.
—In the United States: President Truman signs a bill
that lowers the age of those eligible to be drafted to
eighteen and one-half.
June 20 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the modified Kansas Line is completely secure by
noon. Preparations to bolster the line are begun imme-
diately.
In Air Force activity, F-51 Mustangs intercept the
contingent of six Il-10s (Ilyushins). Two of the enemy
craft are shot from the sky, but neither kill is officially
credited to the pilots. Three others are damaged. One
of the pilots to get a victory is Lieutenant James B. Har-
rison. It is the last official kill by an F-51 pilot during
the conflict.
While the Mustangs engage the Il-10s, MiGs arrive,
but at the same time, Sabre jets arrive to bolster the F-
51s. During the air battle, one of the MiGs moves away
from the Sabres and hits one of the Mustangs with
shells that rip off one of its wings. The pilot is unable
to bail out and goes down with his plane.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral G.C. Dyer relieves
Rear Admiral A.E. Smith as Commander United Na-
tions Blockading and Escort Force (CTF 95). Also, car-
rier planes encounter MiGs while operating against
enemy propeller aircraft along the west coast of Korea.
It is the first recorded incident of MiGs coming to the
support of conventional aircraft under attack.
In other activity, the USS Brinkley Bass (DD 887)
initiates SCAB (ship control of aircraft bombing) when
it controls and guides a B-26 bomber-run in the vicin-
ity of Wonsan.
June 21 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 1st Marines and the 1st Korean Marine Corps
Regiment stretch their right and left flanks respectively,
June 22, 1951
which pinches out the 7th Marines. The 7th Marines
revert to reserve.
June 22 The 1st Marine Division, as of this date,
terminates two months of continuous fighting against
the Chinese spring offensive. The Marines are directed
by Eighth Army to establish patrol bases on the Bad-
ger Line, but when General Almond arrives at the 1st
Marine Division command post, it is decided that
stretching out patrol bases while units are still in con-
tact with the enemy is risky and the idea is shelved.
However, on the following day, again orders arrive di-
recting the patrol bases be set up.
June 23 The 1st Marine Division is again in-
structed to establish patrol bases. The order is reluc-
tantly carried out. The Marines are aware that each of
the three battalion patrol bases will become susceptible
to enemy incursions and may be encircled and imper-
iled.
—In the United States: A hint of a possible cease fire
in Korea is spoken by the Soviet representative to the
U.N. during a broadcast (U.N. Price of Peace) in which
Jacob Malik claims that the warfare in Korea is the fault
of the United States. However, toward the end of the
program, Malik slips in the proposition that the Soviet
Union thinks that the war could be stopped by mutual
agreement of both sides pulling back from the 38th
Parallel.
The U.S. shows no outward signs of accepting the
suggestion as genuine, but steps are taken in the event
that a cease fire might be in the works. Diplomatically,
the U.S. probes to discern the credibility of Malik’s re-
marks. Militarily, the Joint Chiefs of Staff and Eighth
Army assess the situation on the ground in Korea to
determine where a dominating line should be drawn
prior to any talks with the Communists.
June 24 (Korea) In the I Corps area, 3rd Divi-
sion zone, the Communists launch a strong assault at
about 0200 against the 15th Regiment sector. About
two battalions chash against the perimeter. Company
B, holds firmly for awhile, but the overwhelming
strength threatens the entire line. PFC Emory L. Ben-
nett bolts from his foxhole carrying his automatic rifle
to attempt to stem the tide, while his outfit regroups.
All the while, the enemy continues to press forward
and some penetration occurs. Orders to pull back are
given, but Bennett, although wounded, volunteers to
maintain his one-man defensive line. In conjunction,
the contingent safely pulls back, thanks to the rear
guard fire, attributed to Bennet’s weapon. Nonetheless,
PFC Bennett sacrifices his life to save the others. Ben-
nett is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for
his extraordinary heroism and his selfless sacrifice to
save the remainder of the command.
— In the Soviet Union: In a move that catches the
attention of the U.S., two newspapers in the Soviet
Union publish the entire context of the recent state-
ment made by Jacob Malik with regard to a cease fire
in Korea. The article signals Soviet approval of a cease
740
fire. On the following day, influential newspapers in
China publish Malik’s statement. The U.S. senses that
the Communists are ready to initiate talks to bring
about a cease fire.
June 25 A staff officer from headquarters in Japan
arrives in Korea to discuss strategy with General Van
Fleet regarding where the line should be drawn with
regard to negotiations with the Communists. The pos-
sible location considered by General Ridgway and Van
Fleet had been the Kansas Line, but Ridgway is consid-
ering a forward line about twenty miles above the
Kansas Line and another ten miles out front as an out-
post line. General Van Fleet is not in favor of extend-
ing beyond the Kansas Line due to the possibility of
unnecessary casualties, but only recently, during the
counterattack, it had been Van Fleet that had been in
favor of a much deeper penetration.
Also, one year has passed since the Communists
unleashed their invasion of South Korea on June 25,
1950. Since that fateful day, about 1,250,000 men have
been killed, wounded or captured. Of those horrific
numbers, about one million of the casualties have
been the Communist Chinese and the North Koreans.
Other victims include about two million civilians who
died from various causes, including warfare and
disease. The Communists, one year after the invasion,
hold much less territory, having lost about 2,100 square
miles. In addition to the massive loss of equipment,
including 391 planes, 1,000 artillery pieces and count-
less small arms, North Korea has been reduced to
rubble.
Essentially, by this time, the Chinese Communists
under Mao Tse-tung’s “volunteers” had sustained a
devastating defeat and a loss of face as the great offen-
sive (Fifth Phase) failed to gain any objectives and surely
Seoul would not become a present by May Day
as promised. Although Eighth Army initially sustained
tremendous setbacks due to being unprepared for
the conflict, at this time the Eighth Army is at a razor’s
point and Generals Ridgway and Van Fleet are
prepared to finish the job and bring victory to the peo-
ple of the Republic of South Korea. But diplomacy
and the situation in Washington are prodding to turn
to the peace table and settle on a stalemate. General
Ridgway is informed this day by the Joint Chiefs of
Staff that cease-fire negotiations are expected to begin
soon.
In Air Force activity, the 8th Fighter Bomber Group
moves its operations to Kimpo Air Base in Seoul, sub-
sequent to repairs being completed on the runway to
lengthen it. The unit reinitiates its combat sorties from
there, while work continues on the runway.
In other activity, a flight of F-86 Sabres, led by
Captain Milton E. Nelson (335th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group), encounters
a large force of enemy planes in the vicinity of Sinuiju.
The American patrol comes under attack. Captain
Nelson maneuvers and gets behind one of the MiG-
15s. Nelson knocks the MiG from the sky, leaving
 741
the enemy 24-plane contingent short one aircraft.
Nelson, who had won a victory in the same area on
20 May, will achieve others here on 9 July and 11
July.
June 26 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a contingent of Marines pushes out ahead of the
perimeter and establishes a patrol base on Hill 761;
however, the isolated battalion comes under heavy mor-
tar fire and by the following day, it is ordered back to
the main lines.
In Air Force activity, the recently arrived 136th
Fighter Bomber Wing, which executed its initial
combat mission on 24 May, on this day encounters a
band of MiGs. The F-84 ThunderJets, while provid-
ing an escort to B-29s to the airfield at Yongyu, are in-
tercepted. One of the MiGs is downed and credit is
claimed by 1st Lieutenant Arthur E. Olinger and Cap-
tain Harry Underwood. The MiG had been able to
evade a flight of Sabres before it encountered the Thun-
derJets. This is the first kill of the war for the Air Na-
tional Guard.
— In China: The Chinese Communists broadcast
their approval of cease-fire talks by acknowledging the
comments of Jacob Malik, the Soviet representative to
the U.N., one day after Chinese newspapers had printed
the context of his remarks. However, the Communists
stipulate that the U.S. must acquiesce to the often re-
peated Communist demands that Formosa (Taiwan) is
to be returned to Communist (Red) China and all
United Nations forces must be withdrawn from Korea.
They also demand a seat at the U.N.
June 27 The U.S. notices changes in the Com-
munists’ broadcasts. Pyongyang radio continues to en-
courage the eviction of the U.S.-U.N. forces, but on
this day, the statement changes from “drive the enemy
to the sea” to “drive the enemy to the 38th Parallel.”
President Truman authorizes General Ridgway to pub-
licize an offer to negotiate a cease-fire.
In Naval activity, South Korean guerrillas bolstered
by U.S. naval surface ships spring a raid on enemy-held
Chong Ye-ri, on the west coast of Korea. The guerril-
las seize several prisoners and they destroy two ammu-
nition depots.
— In the Soviet Union: The U.S. directs its ambas-
sador to the Soviet Union in Moscow to inquire
about the Soviet positions with regard to the demands
of the Chinese on the previous day. Deputy Foreign
Minister Andrei Gromyko informs Ambassador
Alan G. Kirk that the position of the Soviet Union
does not include any contingencies such as territorial
claims; rather the talks from the perspective of the
Soviets should be confined to military matters. The
Soviets, through Gromyko, inform the U.S. represen-
tative that territorial and political matters should
be discussed later and separately from the military
matters.
June 29 Enemy shore batteries in the vicinity of
Wonsan harbor return fire against the USS Tucker
July 1, 1951
(DDE 875). The vessel sustains some minor damage
and one man is slightly wounded.
June 30 A Marine Tigercat squadron (VMF
513) known as the Flying Nightmares engages and
destroys a PO-2 above Seoul by the Han River. It is
the first PO-2 downed by an F7F. The PO-2s are not
constructed of metal and while they had been raiding
the area around Seoul, the Marine squadrons had dif-
ficulty tracking them, as they avoided detection by
radar.
The strength of the Marine Corps on this date stands
at 192,620 men.
In Naval activity, the siege of Wonsan, which in-
cludes a naval bombardment, continues on this, the
134th consecutive day.
—In Japan: Following a long period of political ma-
neuvering in the U.S., the U.N. and by the Russians
and Chinese, the stage is set by Washington to dele-
gate General Ridgway to publicly offer a cease fire in
Korea. The preceding maneuvers had been compli-
cated, as the U.S. does not officially recognize either
the Chinese or North Korean authorities. In turn, the
Chinese take no responsibility for the Chinese troops
claimed to be volunteers, but the Chinese commander
is authorized to act on their behalf.
At 0800, as directed by the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
General Ridgway broadcasts the statement. The state-
ment suggests that if the Communists agree to talks, a
meeting could be convened in Wonsan Harbor aboard
a Danish hospital ship. The cease fire offer is addressed
to the commander in chief of the Communist forces in
Korea. The Communists reply to General Ridgway’s
proposal on the following day.
July 1 The Communists respond to General Ridg-
way’s cease-fire proposal of the previous day. In China
and Korea, Peking radio and Pyongyang radio simul-
taneously break into their respective programming to
broadcast a combined reply from Peng Teh-huai
(China) and Kim II Sung (N.K.) which essentially
agrees to talks; however, the Chinese prefer to meet at
Kaesong rather than at Wonsan harbor. As part of the
Communist reply, a proposal to call an immediate cease
fire for the duration of the talks is made.
U.S. officials realize by the offer means the Chinese
are not prepared to attack and need a cease fire to rebuild
their devastated units and bring in yet additional fresh
troops. General Ridgway agrees to meet with the Com-
munists at Kaesong, but the cease fire proposal is ignored.
As earlier directed by the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Ridgway
intends to continue operations, including missions by the
Fifth Air force. A preliminary meeting occurs on 8 July.
In the I Corps sector, infantry supported by tanks
moves to clear the Sobang Hills of the Chinese who
had re-occupied the area subsequent to the Eighth
Army’s June offensive; however, the Chinese are able to
hold the ground.
Also, the commander of the 67th Tactical Recon-
naissance (Intelligence) Wing, Colonel Karl L. (Pop)
July 2, 1951
Polif ka, while on a mission in the vicinity of the front
lines near Kaesong, is hit by enemy fire. His plane,
an RF-51, crashes and Colonel Polif ka is killed. He
is temporarily succeeded by Colonel Bert N. Smiley
until the permanent successor, Colonel Vincent
W. Howard, assumes command on 4 July. Colonel
Polifca had been the first pilot to spot the Japanese
fleet while it moved toward Port Moresby during May
1942, just prior to the eruption of the Battle of the
Coral Sea.
July 2 Typhoon Kate strikes and hinders opera-
tions, including those of Fast Carrier Task Force 77,
which is unable to launch planes.
July 3 In response to news of a downed pilot in
North Korea, a Navy helicopter pilot, Lieutenant John
Kelvin Koelsch, volunteers to take the rescue mission.
Troops of the 7th Regiment, 3rd Division, in action atop a hill on 3 July.
742
Lacking fighter coverage, he descends to low level below
the clouds and locates the downed pilot, despite
weather conditions that include a total overcast.
Koelsch defies tenacious enemy fire and lands. The
pilot, wounded, is raised into the helicopter, but more
fire strikes the helicopter and it crashes into the moun-
tain. Koelsch gets his crew and the wounded pilot out
of the helicopter and together, they vanish in the woods
to evade capture. Nine days later, the group is cap-
tured. Lieutenant Koelsch is later awarded the Medal of
Honor for his heroism and leadership under fire.
Koelsch succumbs while imprisoned by the Commu-
nists.
In other activity, the USS Everett (PF 8), operating
off Wonsan, sustains minor damage from enemy
shore batteries. One seaman is killed and seven are
wounded.
 743
Elements of the 7th Division in action in the Iron Triangle on 3 July.
July 4 In the I Corps area, 3rd Division sector, Com-
pany B, 7th Regiment, seizes Hill 586, but the contest is
extremely difficult and drains the victors. While the con-
tingent attempts to catch a breather, the enemy prepares
for a counterattack. After dark it is launched and the 1st
Platoon is hit heavily and compelled to pull back.
Sergeant Leroy A. Mendonca remains in his position to
provide cover fire. The enemy comes under a wall of fire
form Mendonca, until he exhausts his ammunition and
they encounter his rifle butt and bayonet as he attempts
in vain to block the rushing wave. The platoon rejoins the
main body and the hill is retained after the enemy is
routed. Sergeant Mendonca gives the ultimate sacrifice
to save the command. He is credited with the elimination
of about 37 enemy casualties prior to his demise at his
post. Mendonica is awarded the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his extraordinary heroism under fire and his
selfless sacrifice to save others in his command.
In Naval activity, Bombardment Element (TE 95.21)
encounters fierce return fire from enemy shore batteries at
Wonsan. On the following day, Wonsan is struck heavily.
July 5 The enemy at Wonsan has recently bolstered
July 7, 1951
its positions and reached a capacity from which U.S.
warships become threatened with heavy fire. Carrier
planes pummel selected targets in the Wonsan area.
The mission includes 247 sorties.
In other naval activity, warships bolster a mission
executed by about 600 ROK troops who launch a raid
upon the mainland opposite Cho-do Island.
July 6 In Air Force activity, a tanker (KB-29M), at-
tached to an air materiel command but flown by a crew
of the strategic air command and attached to the 43rd
Air Refueling Squadron, refuels four separate RF-80
Shooting Stars. The task is accomplished in enemy ter-
ritory while the planes are in flight engaged in reconnais-
sance missions. This is the first in-air refueling that oc-
curs over enemy territory during a combat mission.
In Naval activity, the USS Evans (DD 754) lands a
shore fire control party (SFCP) on Hwangto-do Island,
located in the southern section of Wonsan Harbor, to
direct fire. Three destroyers blast the area and level
buildings and a torpedo station.
July 7 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment is notified that
July 8, 1951
it will be receiving orders to move out on the follow-
ing day to establish a patrol base on Taeu-san.
In Naval activity, a shore fire control party and ele-
ments of the 1st Korean Marine Regiment debark the
USS Blue (DD 744) at Wonsan to establish an obser-
vation post from which the fire of warships can be di-
rected against enemy targets.
July 8 A U.S. three-man liaison team meets at
Kaesong with Communist representatives to set up the
official armistice talks. The date agreed upon is 10 July.
After sitting across the negotiating table from the U.S.
representatives, the Communists notice the difference
in height between the two sides. They saw off part of
the legs of the chairs to make the U.S. representatives
appear shorter. Another piece of mischief by the Com-
munists occurs when the chairs are arranged so the
U.N. representatives are facing north, where the losers
are made to sit in Asia during negotiations.
Communist photographers make good use of the
shots of the participants at the table and when the pic-
tures are viewed across Asia, they give the illusion of
defeated Americans. An even more devious tactic is
used when the Communists insist that all vehicles fly
white flags for identification purposes, but when the
photos are distributed, it gives the impression to the
Orientals that the U.N. had capitulated. They also in-
sist that the U.N. representatives remain unarmed;
however, when the U.S. representatives and accompa-
nying troops are photographed without arms, the pic-
tures show the Communists well armed.
Communist representatives at Kaesong are (left to right): Major General Hsieh Fang (Chinese Army); Lt.
General Teng Hua (Chinese Army); Lt. General Nam II, chief delegate; Major General Lee Sang Cho
(N.K. Army) and Major General Chang Pyong San (N.K. Army).
744
The Communists also outdo the U.S.-U.N represen-
tatives, as they received a confirmation that the peace talks
will be held at Kaesong, which is directly in the path of
the Eighth Army. The Communists realize that by hold-
ing the talks in Kaesong, the Americans will be unable to
advance and secure the strategic road center there.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, ele-
ments of the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment move
out to establish a patrol base at Taeu-san at 1030, but
little progress is made. Enemy mortar and machine gun
fire halts the advance on the right, while the left section
manages to reach Hill 1100, still short of Taeu-san.
In Air Force activity, a four-plane contingent of F-86
Sabre jets led by Lieutenant Richard S. Becker (334th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Group) encounters a pair of MiGs in the skies over Py-
ongyang. He takes one of the two MiGs by machine
gun fire from his F-86. The MiG, after being struck, be-
gins to spin out of control and rolls into a dive that
takes it directly into the ground about one mile south
of the Pyongyang East Air Field.
July 9–November 27 1951.
SIXTH DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
THE U.N. SUMMER-FALL OFFENSIVE.
July 9 General Ridgway appoints Vice Admiral
C.T. Joy, USN, as chief of the U.N. delegation that will
convene with the Communists for the truce talks at
Kaesong. Others in the delegation are Major General
 745 July 10, 1951

UN representatives at Kaesong are (left to right): Major General Lawrence C. Craigie (USAF); Major
General Paik Sun Yup (ROK I Corps commander); Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy (Far East naval commander),
acting as chief delegate for U.N; Major General Henry I. Hodes (deputy chief of staff, Eighth Army) and
Rear Admiral Arleigh A. Burke, USN.

L.C. Craigie, USAF, Major General H.I. Hodes, deputy
chief of staff, Eusak, Rear Admiral A.A. Burke, USN,
and Major General Paik Syn Yun, ROK Army.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the Ko-
rean Marines reinitiate the advance to establish a patrol
base at Taeu-san. The full weight of the battalion
pushes forward on the right, but similarly to the pre-
vious day, the enemy halts the advance. In the mean-
time, the troops that had reached Hill 1100 on the pre-
vious day are driven back.
Hill 1001 is seized by the 1st Battalion, but it is ap-
parent that Taeu-san can not be seized by the Korean
Marines. During the operation, the Korean Marines
sustain 222 casualties. Subsequently, the task is given to
the 2nd Division. Taeu-san is designated Hill 1179.
July 10 Armistice negotiations begin at Kaesong
on this day in an attempt to bring a conclusion to the
conflict that has been ongoing since June of the previ-
ous year. Admiral C. Turner Joy (commander Far East
Naval Forces) leads the U.N. command negotiations.
Admiral Joy informs the Communists that the U.S.-
U.N. will not under any circumstances suspend action
unless and until the negotiations are completed. The
Communists, who recently requested an immediate
cease fire, are not in a position to contest. Consequently,
they are compelled to agree to a continuation of hostil-
ities.
The U.S. also maintains a naval blockade of Korea’s
east and west coasts and the U.S. Navy and Air Force
maintain consistent bombardment of Communist shore
batteries. From the beginning of the war until now, the
Communists have sustained horrendous casualties that
total almost one million. The recent spring offensive
by the Communists helped to dramatically increase the
numbers. The huge losses and inability to overwhelm
the U.S.-U.N. forces is apparently the primary reason
the Communists have agreed to talk about a cease fire.
July 10, 1951 746

A signal corps team at work making repairs to a communications line along a mountain pass south of
Hwach’on.

The U.S. is inclined to believe the Communists are gle” before swinging southeast to the lower tip of the
stalling for time to rebuild their shattered forces. Punch Bowl and from there it runs north and east to the
At this time, the front extends from the Imjin River Sea of Japan at a point above Kaesong. At Kaesong, the
to Ch’orwon, then parallels the base of the “Iron Trian- neutrality of the place is not conspicuous. The Chinese
 747
carry Tommy guns and attempt to intimidate U.N. en-
voys. In addition, the Chinese propagandize the “white
flags” on the U.N. jeeps, attempting to transform the
neutrality into a scene of surrender or capitulation. The
film is played throughout Asia.
As the talks begin, the U.S. holds 163,000 POWs,
most of whom are North Korean. The U.N. has sus-
tained about 294,000 casualties and of these, the South
Koreans account for 212,500. U.S. casualties stand at
77,000, mostly sustained by the U.S. Army, which loses
11,327 killed and 42,900 wounded. Of the wounded
or injured in action, 1,075 later succumb from their
injuries. In addition, 6,088 soldiers are captured and of
these, 2,583 die while held in captivity by the Commu-
nists. Another 3,979 soldiers are reported missing in
action and among these, 3,323 are subsequently de-
clared dead.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of F-80s, while on
a mission, spot an enemy convoy stalled at an impass-
able bridge. The pilots of the F-80s relay the informa-
tion and location to Fifth Air Force. Shortly thereafter,
every available aircraft is directed to converge on the
convoy. The planes deliver a massive amount of bombs,
rockets and machine gun fire that shreds the stalled
column. It is reported that more than 150 vehicles, in-
cluding about 50 tanks, are demolished in the attacks.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps will ac-
cept 7,000 draftees to help bolster its force of 194,000
USS New Jersey in action off the east coast of Korea.
July 11, 1951
troops to bring it closer to its authorized strength of
204,000. This is the first time the Marines has drafted
men since World War II.
July 11–12 1951 Operation CAVE DWELLER
commences. The USS New Jersey (BB 62) and USS
Leonard F. Mason (DD 852) combine their firepower
to blast enemy positions, supply depots and troops
formations in the vicinity of Kensong. Estimates of
enemy casualties are 129 killed.
July 11 General Ridgway prepares for operations
to further destroy the enemy and force a quick deci-
sion for an armistice at Kaesong. Restrictions upon
Eighth Army on operations had been lifted on the pre-
vious day by the Joint Chiefs of Staff, giving Ridgway
authorization to expand the lines. In addition to the
normal air and ground operations, Eighth Army is
preparing to execute Plan Overwhelming, set tenta-
tively for commencement on 1 September. The plan,
designed by General Van Fleet at the request of Ridg-
way, calls for an offensive to move the line from Kansas
to the P’yongyang–Wonsan Line. However, Van Fleet
is convinced he can do much more to damage the
enemy when operating from the Kansas Line. Mean-
while, Ridgway considers the possibility of high casu-
alties and the remote possibility of a settlement at
Kaesong.
In Naval activity, U.S. warships, including the USS
July 12, 1951
The battleship New Jersey’s guns in action, in a close-up view of a bombardment of enemy positions along
the east coast of Korea.
Blue (DD 744) and the USS Evans (DD 754), operat-
ing near Yo-do Island, come under fire from enemy
shore batteries; however, no damage is sustained.
July 12 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Marines inform X Corps that the patrol base
established by the 1st Korean Marine Regiment near
Hill 1001 is to be considered the 1st Marine Division
patrol base.
July 13 A plane (VMF[N]-513) piloted by Cap-
tain Donald Fenton spots and destroys a PO-2 in the
vicinity of Seoul. It is the second elusive non-metal bi-
plane destroyed over Seoul.
July 14 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, combat for the past two weeks has not been too
heavy. Nonetheless, the casualties, including the Ko-
rean Marines (attached), amount to 55 killed, 360
wounded and 22 missing.
In other activity, Marine squadrons (MAG 12) at
K-46 near Hoengsong abandon the field and move
temporarily to K-1 near Seoul. Subsequently, MAG
748
12’s new field will be K-18, on the east coast at
Kangnung, about forty miles to the rear of the 1st
Marine Division lines and just slightly below the 38th
Parallel.
In Naval activity, elements of the British 4lst Inde-
pendent, aboard an LST, arrive from Wonsan at Yo-do
Island.
In Air Force activity, one plane attached to the 452nd
Bomber Group launches an attack against two separate
enemy convoys it spots during the darkness in the
area north of Sinanju. The crew of the B-26 light
bomber reports both columns devastated with a
combined loss of 68 vehicles either destroyed or dam-
aged.
July 15 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 2nd Division completes its relief of the 1st
Marine Division. The 2nd Division is then designated
as the attack force to push the Kansas Line forward to
the Punch Bowl. The 2nd Division is flanked by the
ROK 5th and 7th Divisions on the east and west respec-
tively.
 749
U.S. planes strike an enemy industrial complex. The target is hit with napalm bombs.
July 16 In the X Corps sector, the 1st Marine Divi-
sion is in the process of moving to the rear of X Corps.
The maneuver is completed by the following day.
July 17–31 1951 By this date, nearly all of
the 1st Marine Division is in X Corps reserve. The
exception is the 5th Marines, which is in the vicin-
ity of Inje as “ready reserve,” under the operational
control of X Corps. Subsequently, the 3rd Battalion,
11th Marines, is attached to the operational control
of the 2nd Division.
In related activity, the 7th Marines and the Divi-
sion Reconnaissance Company move to the vicinity
of Yanggu to participate in training and to support
the building up of the fortifications there. Also, by
about this time, General Almond is relieved as com-
mander of X Corps by Major General Clovis E.
Byers. General Almond returns to the States.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries on
Kalmagak, Umi-do and Ho-do Pando bombard
naval warships (TE 95.21) operating off Wonsan and
the U.N. positions on islands. Fire is continuous and
well coordinated. The USS O’Brien (DD 725) sus-
tains only one minor casualty. The LSMR (rocket
ship) 409 and the LSMR 525 sustain only minor
damage. Other U.S. warships speed to the area to
augment the force already there. Task Element 77.14
(USS Helena [CA 75] and accompanying destroyers
arrive and Task Element 77.11, USS New Jersey (BB
62) moves to bolster the relief force. The Helena is
on site by evening. Also, the USS New Jersey arrives
during the early morning hours of the 18th.
July 21, 1951
July 18 Operation KICKOFF commences at 1500
in Wonsan harbor. The warships initiate what becomes
a daily ritual. The vessels maneuver at five knots,
moving clockwise and firing effectively at known
enemy positions, where the batteries had been used
to threaten the U.S. Fleet. The bombardments
begin each day at the same time and continue until
dusk.
July 21 At Cho-do Island, following a clandestine
operation, a contingent of the 6004th Air Intelligence
Service Squadron terminates a mission that began
one week ago in an effort to disassemble components
of a downed MiG-15. The crashed aircraft contains
many parts that help the U.S. unlock its secrets. The
detachment is provided with protection while the
operation is in progress. The mission succeeds in
salvaging the parts, the most ever from a captured
MiG. The protective force includes planes, attached
to a British carrier, that maintain low level flights,
while Fifth Air Force executes high level flights. A
vessel that contains a crane is provided by the U.S.
Army.
Also, a Marine patrol composed of three F4-Us is
attacked by 15 MiGs at a point when the Marines’ F9Fs
are nearly out of fuel. The Marines fend off the MiGs,
which show little aggressiveness, then head for cloud
cover. One of the planes fails to return to base. The
fate of the pilot, Lieutenant Richard Bell, is for a while
unknown, but he is captured. Bell returns during the
POW exchange in 1953.
July 22, 1951
U.S. Army engineers make road repairs at a spot near Inje on 21 July. Torrential rains caused large
washouts. A deep drop can be seen in the center.
July 22-24 1951 The Communists’ demand
for the withdrawal of all foreign troops from Kaesong
goes unheeded. Consequently, the truce talks are
temporarily aborted.
July 24 The 116th Fighter Bomber Wing (Air Na-
tional Guard), composed of F-84 ThunderJets, arrives
at Japan. The wing, the second National Guard air unit
to arrive, will be based at Misawa and Chitose Air Bases
in Japan. The 116th is the second Air National Guard
aviation unit to arrive in the theater. It follows the
136th Fighter Bomber Wing, which came the previous
May. The 116th had come in from its base in Geor-
gia. The arrival of both Air National Guard units does
not necessarily improve the combat capabilities for Far
East Air Forces.
In conjunction with the arrival of the F-84 Thunder-
Jets, elements of the 27th Fighter Escort Wing provide
training for the crews, but the 27th has been returned
to Strategic Air Command due to the efforts of Gen-
eral Curtis LeMay. Once the training period is com-
pleted, the 27th departs for the States. The acute short-
age of Sabre jets continues to impede operations and
raise the danger level for those pilots in the theater. Far
East Air Forces is in urgent need of about a fifty per-
cent increase in Sabres, but the Air Force chief of staff,
General Hoyt Vandenberg, will inform FEAF to ex-
pect no more than a ten percent increase.
July 25 British warships initiate a bombardment of
enemy positions near the Han. The HMS Cardigan
Bay (PF), HMAS Murschison (PF), ROKN Apnok (PF
62), and several minesweepers participate.
750
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force officially orders
the establishment of the air defenses of South Korea.
The defensive measures are to be undertaken by the
502nd Tactical Control Group and its attached units.
July 26 The maintenance crews of MAG 12 aban-
don K-46 at Hoengsong and join the squadrons at K-
1. The airfield had been abandoned due to chronic
maintenance problems caused by the primitive, rocky
runway.
July 27 Major General Christian F. Schilt assumes
command of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing.
July 28 The USS Los Angeles (CA 135), subse-
quent to the recent mine-clearing operation in the
Haeju Man channel, arrives and bombards enemy po-
sitions in the area. In the meantime, British warships
continue to bombard the area along the north bank of
the Han River.
July 29 In Japan: Regimental Combat Team 160,
40th Infantry Division, undergoing amphibious land-
ing exercises at Chigasaki Beach, completes its train-
ing.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of U.N. jet fighter-
bombers and some reconnaissance planes operating near
Pyongyang spot a group of MiG-15s, but the planes
avoid contact with the enemy aircraft.
July 30 A huge contingent of fighter bombers,
composed of 354 Air Force and Marine Corps
squadrons protected by ninety-one F-80s, strike enemy
targets in the vicinity of Pyongyang.
 751 August 1, 1951

July 31 The USS Helena (CA-75), while bom- August 1 At this time, the 1st Marine Division re-
barding enemy positions in the vicinity of Wonsan, is ports its strength as 1,386 officers and 24,044 enlisted
struck by enemy shore battery fire, but no major dam- men. In addition, the division has 165 interpreters and
age is sustained. 4,184 civilians, the latter known as cargadores (laborers).

A U.S. carrier en route to Japan. Its deck is covered with F-84 Thunderjets that will join the air war in
Korea.
August 6, 1951 752

An Eighth Army convoy of trucks moves along a recently repaired road leading into Inje on 1 August.
The road is similar to many others, a single lane with a deep drop-off.

August 6 By this date, LSMRs (rocket ships), ac-
cording to Navy reports, have fired more than 100,000
rockets at enemy positions. Also, the USS Carmick
(DMS 32), operating in the vicinity of Chongjin, de-
stroys four sampans and seizes 13 fishermen (enemy).
August 10 The carrier USS Princeton (CVE 37),
after being detached from TF-77, moves to Yokosuka,
Japan, and from there it embarks for the United States.
August 11 The truce talks in Kaesong resume
after the Communists agree to maintain Kaesong as a
neutral site.
In Naval activity, the enemy at several locations fires
 753
upon U.S. Navy warships. Near Ho-do Pando, the USS
Dextrous (AM-34) comes under attack from shore bat-
teries and sustains two strikes that inflict casualties.
One sailor is killed and three others are wounded. The
vessel sustains some damage.
Also, the destroyer USS Hopewell (DD 681), coor-
dinating with a SFCP party on Hwangto-do Island at
Wonsan Harbor, initates a bombardment of enemy po-
sitions. Also, warships continue to blast Communist
positions in the vicinity of the Han River’s north bank.
August 12 In the X Corps sector, the 2nd Division
is informed that a possible attack is being planned
against Hills 983, 940 and 773. Just after midnight
(12th-13th), a directive arrives instructing Division to
draw up plans to seize the hills in question and submit
the plan to X Corps.
August 13 In the X Corps sector, orders arrive in-
structing the 2nd Division to decrease its boundary.
The directive is an extension of an earlier order to plan
for an attack against Hills 983, 940 and 773. That sec-
tor of the boundary, which is reduced, is taken over by
the ROK 7th Division.
August 14 Although newspapers in the United
States continue to speak of the possibility of a truce in
Korea, various directives that spread through Eighth
Army discount that possibility. On this day, all divi-
sions in Korea receive word that Eighth Army had been
in receipt of requisitions for winter clothing, surely sig-
naling that the troops would be spending a second win-
ter in Korea.
In the X Corps sector, the 2nd Division is informed
that the attack to seize Hills 983, 940 and 773 is im-
minent. In conjunction, the ROK 36th Regiment (7th
ROK Division) is attached to the 2nd Division. The
ROKs are to spearhead the assault. In conjunction,
Company B, 72nd Tank Battalion, is attached to the 7th
ROK Division to augment its offensive strength.
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS William Seiver-
ling (DE 441), operating off Tanchin, halts Commu-
nist fishing sampans and seizes 9 men.
August 15 In the X Corps sector, an attack against
an ominous ridgeline, which had been included in
Eighth Army’s planning while negotiations continue at
Kaesong, is now in the final planning stages. The assault
is scheduled to commence on 18 August. The enemy-
held objective, later known as Bloody Ridge, includes
three hills, 983, 940 and 773, but the ridges that link
the hills must also be secured. On the western end, four
separate rugged ridges converge to form Hill 983,
which is also the highest peak. Hill 940 lies east of Hill
983, along the center of the ridge on the opposite side
of a deep ravine and farther east, about 1,000 yards,
the Communists hold Hill 773.
Each of the hills is well defended and the fortifica-
tions are camouflaged. The bunkers are often linked
and built so well that they are shielded from artillery and
air strikes, which essentially leaves the job of clearing to
the ground troops. Each of the three enemy-held hills
August 17, 1951
are a threat to the 2nd Division, as the North Koreans
are able to use them as strategic observation posts to
maintain a vigil on the western zone along the Kansas
Line at Hill 1179 (Taeu-san), a 3,890-foot-high moun-
tain defended by about one regiment (1,700 troops).
The 2nd Division had earlier eliminated the enemy east
of the hill, but with three obstacles remaining, Eighth
Army had directed that they be destroyed.
The 9th, 23rd and 38th Regiments have been dis-
patching patrols to evaluate the enemy’s intent and it is
concluded that no offensive action is imminent. How-
ever, the enemy artillery posted along the ridgeline
makes it mandatory that the hills be seized. During this
month of August, while the troops must endure the tri-
als of combat, nature is also working against Eighth
Army. Frequent heavy rains sometimes reduce the roads
to mud and inflict damage to the bridges. Engineers
work tirelessly to keep the roads open and the bridges
operable, but fierce enemy artillery bombardments con-
stantly interfere and often the engineers are ordered to
suspend their work. In conjunction, to soften resist-
ance, fighter planes strike the enemy area during the
night (15th-16th) and deliver napalm while strafing
the ridges; the rear slopes are struck by a B-26 that
drops 500-pound bombs.
August 16–17 1951 In the X Corps sector,
the preliminary stages of the offensive to gain the
area soon to be known as Bloody Ridge continue.
Enemy positions continue to come under bombard-
ment in an effort to soften the resistance against the
ROK 7th Division before its attack.
— In Japan: The final contingent of the 40th In-
fantry Division, Regimental Combat Team 224,
completes its training (amphibious) at Chigasaki.
August 17 A Chinese security patrol is ambushed
near the “neutrality zone.” The Chinese at Kaesong
protest and insist that the U.N. apologize. After an in-
vestigation, it is determined that the ambush had been
staged by South Korean partisan irregulars who acted
out of the U.N. and South Korean government juris-
dictions. No apology is made.
In the X Corps sector, the 2nd Division initiates a pre-
attack bombardment against Hills 983, 940 and 773,
in an attempt to soften resistance for the ROK 36th
Regiment, ROK 7th Division, which will launch the at-
tack on the following day. The enemy is struck by
planes and artillery; however, the North Koreans are
not too hard-hit. Their bunkers are deeply entrenched
and well camouflaged. Many of the bunkers are linked
and some are spacious enough to quarter more than
fifty troops.
In Naval activity, Special Bombardment Group TG
95.9 is established. It is composed of the vessels USS
New Jersey (BB 62), USS Toledo (CA 133), the Dutch
destroyer Van Galen (DD) and USS Agerholm (DD
826). Also, the British continue to plaster enemy po-
sitions along the north bank of the Han River. The
HMAS Murchison (PF), HMS Cardigan Bay (PF) and
the HMS Morecombe Bay (PF) participate; however,
August 18, 1951
due to the imminent arrival of a typhoon, the ships
abandon the area for safer waters.
August 18–20 1951 Typhoon Marge sweeps
into the area. The 1st Marine Air Wing evacuates
Korea for Japan. The air units return on 21 August.
August 18–September 5 1951 BATTLE
OF BLOODY RIDGE In the X Corps Sector zone, fol-
lowing the lifting of a two-day bombardment, the
ROK 36th Regiment, ROK 7th Division, advances
through a thick and murky fog toward a ridgeline
that includes Hills 983, 940 and 773. Hill 983 stands
A contingent of the 2nd Division ascends Hill 1179 (Taeu-san). Stretcher bearers are among the column.
754
in the west at the convergence point of four knife-like
ridges. Hill 940 lies east of Hill 983 on the opposite
side of a huge ravine and farther east is the other
major link, Hill 773.
In an attempt to bolster the assault, the 2nd Di-
vision uses elements to draw attention from the pri-
mary attack. The 23rd Infantry Regiment attacks in
the east against fierce resistance and the 38th Regi-
ment attacks northeast of the targeted three hills.
The 38th Regiment is able to secure its objectives in
the heights there and afterward, its guns bolster the
ROK attack. The attack is also bolstered by an im-
 755 August 18, 1951

Wounded troops attached to the U.S. 2nd Division, able to walk, descend Hill 1179 (Taeu-san).

mense amount of artillery support, which includes
the four division artillery battalions and three other
artillery battalions, composed of two medium and
one 105-mm battalion. Other support units include
several tank companies and two heavy-mortar com-
panies.
Meanwhile, the ROKs initiate the frontal assault.
Initially, the resistance is nominal, but as the ROKs
encroach the slopes of the respective objectives, the
resistance intensifies. Small arms fire rings down
upon them as they ascend the slopes. Machine gun
fire and mortars, as if synchronized, pour down from
each of the three respective hills.
The ROKs, however, continue to drive up the
August 18, 1951
slopes and en route to the summits, often the Com-
munists pop out of their bunkers to ignite close-
quartered fighting. The ROK 36th Regiment main-
tains its discipline and tenaciously drills forward,
eliminating bunkers as they ascend. Nevertheless, by
the latter part of the afternoon, the enemy fire be-
comes too fierce to penetrate. The attack is sus-
pended.
The 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, which had
launched a diversionary attack, secures Hill 1059
with Company G; however, the enemy artillery fire
against the advance of Company E compels it to halt
and retire. After dark, the ROKs re-ignite the at-
tack, still exhibiting great persistence, a trait that
often in the past had been lacking with ROK units.
In the meantime, the 2nd Division informs the
9th Infantry Regiment to be ready to jump to re-
lieve the ROKs in the event they succeed in seizing
the hills; however, the North Koreans are equally de-
termined to hold the real estate. The 2nd and 3rd
Battalions claw forward to within several hundred
yards of their objectives, but at that point, the enemy
fire forbids further advancement. The ROKs estab-
lish night positions and prepare to resume the fight
on the following morning.
At dawn on the 19th, it quickly becomes apparent
that the Communists had not abandoned their posi-
tions. Enemy fire continues to be heavy against all
units at the respective hills and the enemy guns also
begin to bombard the support guns of the 38th Reg-
iment. All the while, the ROKs slowly but method-
ically grind forward against the menacing fire. At
Hills 940 and 773, the ROKs attain positions slightly
more than 200 yards from the respective summits and
at Hill 983, on the west and the highest peak on the
ridge, they hammer their way to positions slightly
more than fifty yards from the summit. Once again,
the ROK 36th Regiment establishes night positions,
still determined to take the objectives. Meanwhile,
the 2nd Division continues to support the assault,
but no U.S. units are ordered to relieve the ROKs.
On the 20th, the ROKs finally begin to achieve
some success for their tireless efforts. On the slopes
of Hills 940 and 983, the stamina of the ROKs
greatly outweighs that of the Communists and the
ROKs gain the advantage as they begin to punish
the defenders on the respective hills, but still the
summits continues to be defended by deeply en-
trenched troops in formidable bunkers that are being
eliminated one by one.
At Hill 773, the ROKs battle relentlessly again,
outweighing the defenders’ determination. The sum-
mit is gained and secured by 1800. Immediately, the
South Koreans establish defensive positions in ex-
pectation of a counterattack. As anticipated, the
Communists, determined to oust the ROKs, mount
a counterattack to evict them from Hill 773, but it
is met with rigid, non-bendable resistance from the
ROK 36th Regiment. Although the South Koreans
hold the summit, the situation becomes close to a
756
crisis. Ammunition and supplies have been greatly
depleted during the heated contest, and still, the re-
maining hills must be secured.
The North Koreans remaining on Hills 940 and
983 continue to dominate, but the rugged determi-
nation of the ROKs carries over from the previous
day. After another tenacious day of battle, both hills
fall to the 36th Regiment. In addition to securing
all of its objectives, the 36th ROK Regiment enjoys
a pause in the combat; the North Koreans either
choose not to attack or are unable to launch a coun-
terattack during the night (21st-22nd), permitting
the regiment to catch a breather.
Nevertheless, the depletion of supplies remains a
huge concern. While the ROKs and the 2nd Divi-
sion are maneuvering to seize the objectives, the ne-
gotiations in Kaesong are deteriorating. The Com-
munists have been stalling for time; however, on the
22nd, after apparently concluding that their de-
mands are being ignored, the Communist leader,
Nam II, proclaims that the U.N. had, through air
attacks, attempted to kill his delegation and abruptly
cancels the meetings at Kaesong.
The ROKs have up to this point gained the objec-
tives, but their task is extended to include several
other unnamed hills slightly north of their present
positions. However, the North Koreans exhibit no
signs of withdrawing as they had in the past, which
makes it plain that the contest to secure the no-name
hills will be yet another grueling advance.
Enemy artillery remains extremely active on the
23rd and based on the amount of fire, there is no
lack of ammunition or guns, despite a Herculean ef-
fort by the Air Force bombers to halt the flow of
Chinese arms. The ROKs move cautiously toward
the hills designated A, B and C. Elements of the 2nd
Division continue to dispatch reconnaissance pa-
trols. None of the patrols encounter any heavy re-
sistance until 24 August, when the North Koreans try
to deliver a killing blow to the ROK 26th Regiment
and terminate the advance before the troops reach
the objectives.
As the ROKs push ahead on the 24th, the resist-
ance galvanizes. The Communist counterattack suc-
ceeds in bringing the advance to a halt. In addition,
the North Koreans initiate attacks against elements
of the 2nd Division, including patrols of the 38th
Regiment and others posted near Hill 1059. By the
following day, the 2nd Division takes steps to aug-
ment the ROKs. The 9th Infantry Regiment shifts to-
ward the area near Hill 983 to initiate contact with
the ROKs positioned on the southwest slope, while
the 38th Infantry Regiment moves hurriedly to es-
tablish a link with the ROKs at Hill 773.
All the while, the ROKs are instructed to focus
their attack against the undesignated hill known as
“C,” which stands to the front of Hills 940 and 773.
Still the North Koreans maintain an iron wall of re-
sistance on the 25th, preventing the ROKs from
gaining ground in front of Objective C.
 757
However, in the zones of the U.S. 38th Regiment,
again the North Koreans become elusive and avoid
major contact with the Americans. Subsequently, as
part of an X Corps offensive, the seizure of Objec-
tive “C” becomes the responsibility of the U.S. 9th
Infantry Regiment.
During the night (25th-26th), the Communists
revert back to their tactics of night assaults. At 0245,
the North Koreans holding positions to the north of
Hill 983 execute a two-pronged assault. While some
units surge forward with a frontal assault, other con-
tingents maneuver to gain positions between Hills
940 and 983. The gains threaten Hill 940 and Hill
983, the latter becoming encircled by 1200.
In the meantime, elements of the 38th Regiment,
holding positions north of Pia-ri, come under fierce
attack. Unable to release the pressure, the troops are
compelled to withdraw slightly more than one thou-
sand yards. At Hill 983, the situation has severely
deteriorated and the ROK positions become unten-
able; however, there is no route of escape. By 1430,
with no options, the surviving members of the 36th
ROK Regiment are compelled to capitulate.
Meanwhile, after news of the fall of Hill 983 and
of the retreat of Companies F and G north of Pia-ri,
steps are hurriedly taken to plug the line. Company
E at the Kansas Line is rushed to reinforce Compa-
nies F and G, while at Division headquarters, plans
are modified to include the recapture of Hill 983.
The task of evicting the North Koreans is dele-
gated to the 9th Infantry Regiment. The North Ko-
reans, however, do not remain dormant during the
day. Later, about one and one-half hours before mid-
night (25th-26th), elements of the 38th Regiment
(2nd Battalion) move to Hill 773 to augment the
contingent of the ROK 36th Regiment there, which
has been able to throw back repeated attacks that
were launched prior to dusk.
As scheduled, during the morning of the 27th, the
9th Regiment advances to seize its objectives, but
enemy resistance continues to block all progress of the
attacking 2nd Battalion. Consequently, at dusk, Hill
983 remains under Communist control.
In the meantime, X Corps remains determined to
conquer the objectives, particularly to prevent the
enemy from maintaining positions from which they
can continue to observe X Corps’ positions and op-
erations, but equally important, because Hills 983
and 773 dominate the Hwach’on Reservoir, the
source of the capital’s electricity. The depth of the ar-
tillery in the fullest sense is brought to bear upon
the crafty enemy defenses on Hill 983.
Subsequent to dusk, the 2nd Division catapults
thousands upon thousands of rounds that rock the
slopes and plant an iron picket fence composed of
more than 22,000 shells. While the thunderous ar-
tillery bombardment pounds the enemy positions,
the 3rd Battalion prepares to pass through the be-
leaguered 2nd Battalion to continue the assault.
As dawn emerges on the 28th, the 1st Battalion
August 18, 1951
remains at the Kansas Line while the 3rd Battalion,
9th Infantry Regiment, takes the point to spearhead
the assault against the unyielding defenders at Hill
983, but another enemy again enters the contest.
The inclement weather, in its predictable manner,
has transformed the roads into giant pits of mud.
The condition of the roads causes delays in the bat-
talion’s jump-off until afternoon.
Meanwhile, the North Koreans sustain the iden-
tical torrential rains, but they are unaffected by the
poor conditions of the road and wait in their cam-
ouflaged bunkers for the advancing infantry. As the
3rd Battalion drives toward the objective, the resist-
ance refuses to falter; however, the 3rd Battalion
presses ahead despite the rings of fire. Company I
and Company F lunge forward inch-by-inch and
yard-by-yard and by darkness, following the dread-
ful trek, still fall short of the prize. The summit re-
mains a long three hundred yards or so from their
grasp. As the sun sets the 3rd Battalion attempts to
establish night positions to protect against a coun-
terattack; still the weather refuses to relent. The
pesky, irritating rain that has helped to bog down
the advance increases in intensity and inundates the
area. The slopes of the hill are transformed into a
series of unruly streams of water that funnel into the
ravines and the mountain streams.
While the 2nd Division continues to implement
strategy to end the quest for Hill 983, the raging
flood waters wreak havoc on logistics. Bridges, in-
cluding the primary Bailey bridge (LaDue bridge)
at the Soyang River, sustain damage during the night
of the 28th when a runaway pontoon bridge gets
tossed against one of its anchors, damaging the
northern end. Traffic on the double-span is curtailed,
but the problem becomes especially complicated be-
cause of the great need to maintain the flow of am-
munition and supplies. A circuitous route is used to
ease the pressure.
Vehicles at Chunchon are ordered to move out
with supplies. Toward the latter part of the day, the
2nd and 3rd Battalions, both of which have sustained
grueling punishment during the advance, are in-
formed that they will be joined by the 1st Battalion
on the 29th. Nonetheless, the North Koreans hold
steadfast throughout the day’s fighting.
While the North Koreans attempt to cling to their
positions, including Hill 983, X Corps moves to add
more muscle to the attack. In addition to the contin-
uation of the assault to gain Hill 983, X Corps on 29
August orders a larger attack, scheduled for 31 Au-
gust. In the meantime, the 9th Infantry continues
to slug its way forward against resolute opposition,
carrying the prolonged battle into the next day, still
without a victor at the ridge that becomes known as
Bloody Ridge through an article in Stars and Stripes.
Prior to dawn on 30 August, the 9th Infantry Reg-
iment resumes its attack to clear the ridgeline that
encompasses Hills 983 and 940, as well as the linger-
ing defenders farther north at Objective “C,” the
August 18, 1951
The 9th Regiment, 2nd Division, ascends Hill 940 during the Battle of Bloody Ridge (18 August–5 Sep-
tember).
unnamed hill that had not been secured by the
ROKs. The 1st and 2nd Battalions press ahead
against continuing opposition, which has been re-
inforced by a contingent estimated to be about 1,000
troops. The slug-fest at Hill 940 rages throughout the
day without success.
In the zone of Company A, the casualties rise to
about fifty percent and the list includes the com-
pany commander (wounded). Orders arrive to pull
back, but in the meantime, Lieutenant John H.
Dunn, who had assumed command, is also killed.
Command reverts to an artillery officer, Lieutenant
Edwin C. Morrow. During the withdrawal the
troops receive cover fire requested by Morrow. Seven
battalions of artillery lay smoke to aid evacuation of
the wounded that have to be carried down the slopes.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 38th Infantry
Regiment, moves to relieve the ROKs at Hill 773, but
they had already absconded and instead, as the bat-
talion moves up the slopes, the troops are met by
North Koreans. Following a tenacious fire fight, the
battalion is pushed from the hill.
After a while, the battalion regroups and plows
758
up the slope a second time, only to be halted short
of the summit. It loses a hill thought to have been
controlled by the ROKs. At dusk, after concluding
a brutal contest and sustaining high casualties, the
U.S. contingents establish night positions and pre-
pare to spend another uncomfortable and restless
night prior to the next attack, most probably before
the sun rises.
On 31 August, at 0400, the 1st Battalion, 9th In-
fantry Regiment, forms at the assembly area where it
had originally occupied positions prior to the attack.
Despite lack of sleep, the troops are ordered to be
ready in case of an attack. After a suspension of sev-
eral hours, the trucks move to the vicinity of Worun-
ni, where again they are stalled until nearly 1200.
Then a short ride takes them to a point from which
they attack Hill 773 from the east.
Company C, in the lead, reaches the tip of the
ridgeline and swings left to attack the first knoll that
stands between the column and the objective. The
trek is effortless, as the knoll is controlled by ele-
ments of the 38th Regiment, who recently estab-
lished an outpost there. The column advances in
 759
U.S. armor (Quad 50s) is in action to bolster the 9th Regiment’s attack against Bloody Ridge.
single file obscured by fog, but a more ominous sight
is the haze and low clouds that completely cloak Hills
773 and 940, as if they don’t exist. Nevertheless, the
vanguard of the column out in front of the first knoll
realizes that, at any time, the next step could ignite
the fight for the hill.
As the scouts on the point arrive slightly beyond
the first knob, sudden but anticipated enemy ma-
chine gun fire strikes with effect. A brief fire fight
erupts with devastating results. Several troops and
the commanding officer of Company C are
wounded. Meanwhile, the enemy remains un-
scathed, as their positions are about two hundred
yards away and contained in fortified bunkers. Soon
after, the two remaining officers become wounded
August 18, 1951
and at about the same time, the fire becomes so
heavy that the advance is halted.
The battalion commander, Lt. Colonel Gaylord
Bishop, is posted at the 38th Regimental positions on
a hill east of the road, placing him within sight of
the fight. Visibility is poor and Bishop is informed
of the situation by radio. He directs Company B to
jump to the front and continue the attack. The 1st
Platoon, led by Lieutenant Joseph W. Burkett, takes
the point and leads the drive toward the first knoll
under support fire from the remainder of the com-
pany and elements of Company C. The advance has
no artillery or air support due to the fog, but four
machine guns provide some comfort as Burkett drills
forward through the fog.
August 18, 1951
Resistance against the platoon remains light, giv-
ing the platoon leverage to reach the knoll, but as it
arrives at the diminutive hill caution rules as they
await some deadly grenades to come tumbling upon
them. None are tossed. Burkett lunges up the hill
and throws a grenade over to the reverse slope, while
several of his troops trail the grenade and discover
abandoned positions.
Burkett leads his platoon toward the next knoll,
but en route, in addition to losing radio contact, the
support fire from the machine guns also ceases, caus-
ing great concern, particularly because at about the
same time, the enemy fire intensifies. Nonetheless,
the platoon forges ahead directly into the path of in-
coming grenades that cause the vanguard of the pla-
toon to scatter. Fortunately, the grenades continue to
tumble farther down the hill and detonate without
causing any casualties.
After the grenades harmlessly explode, more follow,
but Burkett detects the bunker from which they came
and moves to liquidate the position. Meanwhile the
second grenade toss does inflict casualties, some due
to the troops not attempting to get out of harm’s way.
In the meantime, several BAR teams rush to support
the beleaguered platoon. Immediately after their ar-
rival, PFC Domingo Trujillo, standing straight up,
fires his BAR directly into the bunker, but unbe-
knownst to Trujillo, the bunker remains deadly. As he
lowers his BAR, another BAR man spots a North
Korean in the bunker preparing to fire. In an instant,
the 2nd BAR misfires and Trujillo is hit directly in the
chest and neck, killing him instantly.
Lieutenant Burkett, although hindered by the fog,
orders his troops to provide cover fire while he ma-
neuvers to get atop the bunker. Shortly thereafter,
Burkett bolts through the haze to the opposite side
of the knoll and squirms along the ridge to a point
he believes is just above the bunker. He pulls the pin
and deposits it right on top of the bunker and then
for good measure drops another. Meanwhile, an-
other soldier tosses several more grenades to Burkett
and each is dropped into the bunker.
To Burkett’s surprise, the six grenades had appar-
ently only stirred the hornet’s nest. The bunker that
defended the frontal approach to the crest also had
a back door. A North Korean bolts through the door
and tosses at least five grenades at Burkett, who hur-
riedly dives down the ridge, but not quickly enough.
The first wave scores no harm, but as he warns a ser-
geant, another grenade lands farther up the slope
and explodes about five or six feet from where they
stand. Both Burkett and Sergeant Hartman, the man
who initially tossed the grenades to Burkett, are both
wounded.
Burkett is still able to direct his platoon. He orders
the men to withdraw out of the range of grenades
and remain there until he can return with help.
Nonetheless, Burkett is overruled by the regimental
commander, Colonel Bishop, who concludes that it
is too late to reinitiate the assault. He orders Com-
760
pany B to establish a night perimeter and resume the
attack on the following day. Meanwhile, other troops
from Company B are dispatched to assist with the
evacuation of the wounded from Lieutenant Bur-
kett’s platoon.
At dawn on 1 September, the weather is cooper-
ating. The daylight is no longer obscured by fog and
haze. Still, the crack of dawn signals another day of
gruesome combat. After another restless night, the
9th Infantry Regiment moves out to vanquish the
remaining defenders on Bloody Ridge, held by the
Communists since 18 August. The attack is spear-
headed by Company A. Due to the absence of fog,
artillery is able to support the advance. Cover fire is
applied along the ridgeline between Hills 773 and
940 and the former also becomes the recipient of
mortar and heavy machine gun fire, supplied by
Company C, which also supports the assault. As the
vanguard reaches the point of advance gained on the
previous day by Company B, again, the North Ko-
reans pour fire upon the attacking platoon.
A second platoon, led by the company com-
mander Lieutenant Elden Foulk, speeds forward and
it, too, incurs casualties, including Lieutenant Foulk.
Despite a serious wound, Foulk makes it back to the
lines of Company C and just before he collapses,
Foulk requests reinforcements for Company A. Once
Colonel Bishop is informed, he throws Company B
back into the fight. The reinforcements sprint to the
lines of Company A and jump ahead, drilling straight
toward the obstinate bunker that has halted progress.
After the reinforcements close on the obstacle, a few
grenades clear the way. The ferocious resistance on
the third knoll is terminated by 1000.
Having secured the first three knolls, the 9th Reg-
iment focuses on the next objective, the tallest peak
of the ridge that encompasses Hill 773, a ridgeline
known as the question mark due to its curvature that
seems to form a hook at the tip. It stands less than
300 yards distant, but in the hills of Korea, 300
yards, at times, are measured by inches and under-
scored with blood and steel. The advance pushes for-
ward at about 1400 and casualties mount on both
sides. Company B is operating with only about fifty
troops. As the vanguard pushes ahead, suddenly,
enemy fire originating on Hill 940 pounds the unit
just about the time the troops encounter several more
bunkers, each of which are heavily fortified. Occu-
pants of the concealed bunkers begin to lob grenades
that wound more troops. Company B is compelled
to withdraw, but only for a short time.
Quick thinking on the part of the commanding of-
ficer, Captain Edward Krzyzowski, places the com-
pany back on the offensive. A runner acquires a
bazooka and ammunition to level the field. The first
bunker is liquidated and then a second is destroyed
by an agile soldier, PFC Edward K. Jenkins, who
slivers into position above the obstacle and maneu-
vers into position from where he drops several
grenades upon the defenders to silence the guns
 761
there. In a short while, Jenkins destroys the third
bunker as he positions himself from where he can
attack. After catching three grenades tossed to him,
he deposits two of them into the laps of the defend-
ers to terminate the resistance.
Progress is still stalled; yet another one emerges
and the fire halts the advance. Attempts are made to
inch forward to knock it out, but the twenty-five
yards separating them is also covered by several other
positions that place the empty space in a menacing
cross-fire. After assessing the odds and the fast-
approaching darkness, it is concluded that the com-
bined guns on Hill 773, those on the peak of the
question mark and the longer-range weapons on Hill
940 make the bunker a task too risky. Companies A
and B, now holding a combined strength of only
forty some able-bodied men, cancel the advance and
establish a night perimeter.
At dawn on 2 September, the quest to secure the
objectives continues. No major assaults are launched;
however, small probing advances press against Hill
773 and discover the occupants are prepared to fight.
The advancing platoons are each greeted with hand
grenades tossed from the high ground on the slopes.
Meanwhile, urgently needed replacement troops
are assigned to the 1st Battalion. The beleaguered
1st Battalion, 9th Infantry Regiment, receives more
than 150 replacements, including 6 officers. Com-
pany A and Company B are each bolstered by 65
men and Company C receives 20 men. In addition,
each company receives 2 officers. The force is aug-
mented by artillery fire, air strikes and mortars, fo-
cused primarily against Hill 940 and the western sec-
tor of the ridgeline.
Although no large sized assaults are initiated,
Lieutenant Mallard, acting commander of Company
C, establishes an outpost on the most recently cap-
tured knoll and from there, he is able to communi-
cate by radio with some tanks. The tanks in turn
pound various targets selected by Mallard. The clear
skies allow heavy mortars to focus upon Hill 773.
Enemy-held Hill 940 is pounded by artillery and to
further inflict punishment upon the enemy, planes ar-
rive to strike the western portion of the ridgeline.
As daylight arrives on 3 September, the 9th In-
fantry fine tunes its strategy for the attack. At 0900,
the assigned platoon of Company C is directed to
move to spearhead the assault; however, before the
advance jumps off, orders arrive from Colonel
Bishop to hold in place until an imminent air strike
is carried out. At about 1030, planes arrive and de-
liver napalm upon targets selected by the Company
A, whose commander, Lieutenant Robert D. Lacaze,
had replaced Lieutenant Foulk of the 2nd after he
had been wounded. Lieutenant Mallard continues
to control the tanks’ fire and the mortar units. Hills
773 and 940 are deluged with an avalanche of fire.
In early afternoon, the air strikes are completed
and Company C jumps off, but its composition has
greatly changed in the past few days. Of the three
August 18, 1951
platoons, the combined strength is about 85 troops
and of these, two of the platoons are battle hardened
while the other is composed primarily of replace-
ment troops. In a short period of time, the fresh
troops will receive their baptism of fire.
The vanguard leads the way around the curve of
the question mark and immediately encounters ob-
stacles. The obstinate bunkers present less of a chal-
lenge than that which would be encountered if the
attack moved directly over the treacherous ridge
against heavy machine gun fire from Hill 940; how-
ever, the task remains daunting. The advance presses
against the first of a trio of bunkers and then the sec-
ond, but as they move forward, it begins to rain
grenades. The grenade launching originates on the
opposite side of a steep ravine that separates the
North Koreans there by only a few, but deadly, yards.
The troops sustain high casualties, primarily from
the grenades, but the first two bunkers are destroyed.
The third bunker, however, is able to halt the ad-
vance. The platoon is too badly battered to continue.
A second platoon, also battle tested, moves out to
continue the attack, but it, too, comes under devas-
tating grenade and small arms fire, which inflicts
high casualties.
All the while, the third bunker operates under the
protection of cover fire from adjacent positions, jeop-
ardizing both platoons. Through the earlier actions
of Colonel Bishop, 6 men who had taken a course in
flame throwers arrive during the morning to bolster
Company C, at about the same time that both pla-
toons stall at the steps of the third bunker. Soon
after, Lieutenant Mallard dispatches his third pla-
toon along with the flame throwers. A platoon from
Company A covers as reserve while the final Com-
pany C platoon advances.
Heavy fire impedes the advance. One of the three
accompanying flame thrower teams is victimized by
the enemy fire, but only the flame thrower is hit,
sparing the men from harm. The two remaining
teams make it to positions just under the summit
and point the flame throwers toward the sky before
pulling the trigger. The flames are propelled on an
angle that carries the burning jelly over the top of
the knife-like ridge and onto the reverse slope, jolt-
ing the Communists into a frenzy as they abandon the
bunker.
The flame thrower trainees are now battle tested
and their clearance operation opens the way for the
remainder of Company C to swerve around the hook
of the question mark and into the path leading to
two additional bunkers, the final obstacles in front of
Hill 773. The advance continues and the bunkers
are silenced.
Afterward, there is a final thrust to the summit
and Hill 773 is back in the hands of the U.S. The
quest on this day drains Company C from its start-
ing complement of about 85 troops to a force about
the size of a platoon.
Lieutenant Mallard directs his weakened Company
August 18, 1951
C to establish night positions and with authoriza-
tion from Colonel Bishop, he uses the Company A
platoon and incorporates it into Company C to
strengthen the perimeter and provide him with an
opportunity to merge the fresh troops with his vet-
erans. Although much progress had been accom-
plished, the North Koreans continue to threaten the
positions and inflict more casualties.
Shortly after securing Hill 773, Lieutenant Mal-
lard is struck and wounded by friendly fire when an
artillery shell inadvertently drops short of its target.
While he is moving back to receive medical attention
he encounters Captain Krzyzowski, who is directing
Company B’s deployment in the area vacated by
Company C. While they exchange information, fire
from an enemy machine gun on Hill 940, 1,000
yards distant, strikes and kills Krzyzowski. The
wounding of Mallard and the death of Krzyzowski is
a costly blow. Only two officers remain among the
three infantry companies of the 1st Battalion, 9th
Infantry Regiment.
Circumstances unexpectedly change for the 9th
Infantry Regiment on 4 September as the men peer
at the death and destruction on the ridge, which by
this day has been shattered by a combination of air
strikes, artillery bombardments and the direct fire of
tanks. The 9th Infantry is ordered to suspend its ad-
vance toward Hill 940 due to a planned full-scale
attack. The bomb-scarred ridge is pummeled with
more bombs and napalm and the attack is under-
scored with earth-shattering artillery bombardments.
While the 9th Regiment has encroached but not
reached the summit of the ridge the 38th Regiment,
as part of the ongoing X Corps’ offensive, has pierced
the enemy’s defenses. On this day it secures Hills
660 and 774 north of Pia-ri. Elements of the 38th
Regiment, on 26 August, had been pushed from po-
sitions north of the village to positions about 1,000
yards below the village. But now they have retaken
the ground and are in position to provide its guns to
bolster the 9th Regiment at Bloody Ridge. In addi-
tion, the 23rd Regiment is directed to move west
into another cauldron, designated Objective “N,” a
stretch of the ridge leaning northward from Hill 983
to Hill 778.
At dawn on 5 September, the target is Hill 940.
Yet again, the overtaxed troops of the 9th Regiment
ascend the slopes to the summit, but this advance
succeeds. The ground troops charge to the summit
to deliver a resounding blow that ensures victory.
The ground troops of the 1st and 2nd Battalions lit-
erally pass hundreds of North Korean corpses as they
ascend the slopes, in what becomes the final assault
on Bloody Ridge. The troops still on the crest bolt
from their positions in an attempt to escape. The
9th Infantry Regiment permanently secures the hill
at about 1400. Communist losses in defending the
blood-stained ridge amount to more than 4,000
killed and about 7,000 wounded. While the 9th In-
fantry Regiment is securing its objective, the 23rd
762
Regiment also scores successes during its supporting
role against Objective “N.” (See also, September 5,
1951.)
Despite the horrific losses inflicted upon the
North Koreans on Bloody Ridge, the Communists,
after retiring from the ridgeline, immediately begin
to regroup and form a new line of defense from
which to terminate the continuing progress of the
2nd Division. The North Koreans replenish their
grievous losses with several new battalions and form
a new defensive line in yet another rugged ridgeline
that extends north to south and encompasses Hills
851, 931 and 894.
At Hill 894, to the south, the curvature of the
slopes swing in a southwestward direction and begins
to level out with a group of smaller hills near the vil-
lage of Tutayon. This defensive line becomes the next
battleground for the 2nd Division. Like Bloody
Ridge, this new killing field receives a name that
overshadows the respective hills, Heartbreak Ridge.
August 18 In Air Force activity, Far East Air
Forces commences Operation STRANGLE, designed to
destroy and damage the enemy rails in North Korea.
The Air Force had commenced a similar operation with
the identical name on 31 May to destroy enemy sup-
ply lines. Also, a 2-plane patrol attached to the 334th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter Interceptor
Group, led by 1st Lieutenant Richard S. Becker, en-
counters and attacks a solitary MiG-15 in the vicinity
of Sinuiju. Becker knocks it out at 1115 following a
short hunt and then within a few minutes, at 1121,
Becker pumps several bursts of machine gun fire an-
other MiG-15 and damages it severely, but it remains
in the air. He closes further and from a distance of
about 200 feet, he again pulls the trigger and the MiG
catches fire, while the pilot ejects from the aircraft.
August 19 In the I Corps sector, following a four-
day struggle, elements of the 2nd Division seize the
crest of Hill 1179 (Taeu-san), in the vicinity of the
southwestern tip of the Punch Bowl. Earlier, ROK
troops had failed to seize the objective.
August 20 Enemy shore batteries fire upon the
destroyer USS Uhlmann (DD 867) while she operates
off Ho-do Pando Island at Wonsan. The Uhlmann re-
turns fire and knocks out two guns of the seven that had
been spotted. The warship aborts further fire due to
the activity of a friendly contingent on the ground in
the same area. The Uhlmann sustains no damage.
August 22 At Kaesong, the Communists, having
made good use of the partial lull in battle to refurbish
their forces, use another delaying tactic. The Commu-
nist representatives at the peace table in Kaesong
abruptly walk out of the meeting after claiming falsely
that U.N. planes had broken the neutrality of Kaesong
by dropping napalm bombs. After dusk, the Commu-
nists and a USAF team, using flashlights, inspect the
supposed location of the bombing by a U.N. plane.
Colonel Andrew J. Kinney and his party discover a hole
 763
A pontoon bridge in the I Corps sector, 3rd Division zone, was overwhelmed by flash flood and washed
about 300 yards downstream.
and evidence of exploding grenades. No scorching from
napalm was found, but there were some unexplainable
metal parts, including the tail-fin of a rocket. Never-
theless, the Chinese demand a “confession” and an
“apology.” None is given.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the di-
vision is informed that it is to prepare for a return to of-
fensive action.
In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Toledo (CA 133)
continues to operate off the east coast of Korea in sup-
port of the X Corps and the ROK I Corps. Also, the
USS Essex (CV 9) joins Fast Carrier Task Force 77 in
place of the USS Princeton (CV 37), which recently
embarked for the U.S. The Essex is the first carrier ca-
pable of carrying jets to arrive in the war zone. By the
following day, the jet fighters (F2H McDonnell Ban-
shees) engage in their first combat missions.
August 23 At Kaesong, the Communists halt the
negotiations, claiming erroneously that the United Na-
tions had violated the neutral territory.
In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Los Angeles (CA
1351) arrives on the east coast of Korea to relieve the
cruiser USS Toledo (CA 133).
August 24 Missions carried out this day and the
next by light bombers (B-26’s) report more than 800
enemy vehicles destroyed during the ongoing night
raids against enemy supply lines.
In Air Force activity, Colonel Benjamin S. Preston, Jr.
August 26, 1951
(336th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter In-
terceptor Group), while leading a patrol encounters a
group of four MiG-15s. Preston’s four Sabre jets at-
tack. The trailing MiG is picked up by Preston, who
from a range of about 500 feet snaps off six bursts of
machine gun fire that downs the enemy plane. While
the MiG plummets, the pilot is able to bail out at an el-
evation of about 9,000 feet to free himself of the burn-
ing aircraft. Also, Captain Jack A. Robinson (334th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter Interceptor
Group), while on patrol in the vicinity of Taechon, ob-
serves a MiG traveling alone. Robinson closes for the
attack and releases a string of machine gun fire that
strikes and downs the MiG.
August 25 The USS Essex (CV-9) launches
fighter planes to fly escort for U.S. Air Force bombers
on a mission over the enemy rail yards at Rashin. It is
the first time during the Korean War that U.S. Navy
planes escort an Air Force bomber mission. It also be-
comes the first mission in which U.S. Navy fighters fly
as escort for Air Force bombers on a combat mission.
Other naval surface craft involved with the mission in-
clude the USS Helena (CA 75), USS Harry E. Hub-
bard (DD 748) and the USS Rogers (DDR 876).
August 26–28 1951 Transport Division 13
initiates an amphibious demonstration near Changjon
to cut the resistance in front of the ongoing advance
of the ground troops. Amphibious vessels, the cruiser
August 26, 1951
USS Helena (CA 71), the battleship New Jersey (BB-
62), a contingent of destroyers and some minesweep-
ers participate during some portions of the opera-
tion.
August 26 The 1st Marine Division informs all
of its components that offensive actions are imminent.
At this time, the Division is deployed as follows: the
1st Marines at Chogutan, the 5th Marines in the vicin-
ity of Inje, the 7th Marines near Yanggu and the 1st
Korean Marine Regiment at Hangye. The division
command post and the service units are posted along the
Hongchon–Hangye Road near Tundong-ni.
In conjunction, the 11th Marines (minus) with the
196th FABn (11th Marine Regiment Group) is at this
time an element of X Corps artillery. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 11th Marines, is attached to the 1st Marine Divi-
sion, while the 3rd Battalion is attached to the 2nd In-
fantry Division.
August 27 In the X Corps sector, Communists seize
the recently captured Bloody Ridge from the ROK 5th
Division during the night of the 27th-28th. The U.S.
9th Infantry Regiment, 2nd Division, attacks, but fails
to regain the hill. Subsequent to the loss, it is decided
to commit a five-division attack in the X Corps sector.
In related activity, 1st Lieutenant Lee R. Hartell (Bat-
tery A, 15th FABn, 2nd Division), attached to Company
B, 9th Regiment, comes under attack near Kobangsan-
ni, during the early morning hours. Hartell, as a forward
artillery observer, does not withdraw, despite over-
whelming numbers of the enemy who encroach his po-
sition. Instead, he remains in place to direct the artillery.
He is about to be overrun, but still he maintains
An LST laden with boxcars awaits unloading.
764
his hold on the microphone, while calling for flares.
Just in time a protective wall of fire arrives that drives
the Communists back, but only for a short time. Soon
after, yet more of the enemy arrive, but Hartell, by this
time mortally wounded, continues to guide the artillery
and in his last directives, he urges both artillery batter-
ies without pause. Lieutenant Hartell is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his intrepid courage
in the face of the enemy.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 5th and 7th
Marines are directed to move to the region south and
west of the Punch Bowl to relieve U.S. Army and ROK
units at Bloody Ridge. The 1st Korean Marine Regi-
ment also moves with the other two regiments, but the
1st Marines is to remain in division reserve. Early on this
day, the 7th Marines near Yanggu prepare to move to
the Soyang River, but no trucks arrive until 2100. In
conjunction, the 5th Marines at Inje are to trail the 7th
Marines. Meanwhile, the troops are under a constant
rain. The 3rd Battalion finally arrives at the 7th Marines
command post at Sohwari at 0300 on the 28th.
August 29 X Corps orders a larger attack, de-
scribed as a “limited offensive.” The attack is to com-
mence on 31 August. The advance is in conjunction
with the ongoing battle to control Bloody Ridge in the
2nd Division zone.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, arrives at Sohwari at 0300, following a
tedious day of waiting at the jump-off point until nearly
midnight. After arriving, the Marines discover their
bivouac area is flooded, which forces the troops to
remain in the trucks to attempt to get a little rest. In
 765 August 29, 1951

A crane unloads a boxcar at Pusan.

addition, the assembly area is on the opposite bank of
the Soyang River. The first contingent to attempt to
cross is Company H, but the trek becomes so perilous
that the remainder of the battalion must be carried by
DUKWs. Nevertheless, both battalions, the 2nd and
3rd, are on the opposite (west) bank by mid afternoon
to begin relief of the U.S. Army and ROK units.
Also, two battalions of the 1st Korean Marine Reg-
iment, to the left of the 7th Marines, assume respon-
sibility for the area formerly held by contingents of the
August 30, 1951
2nd Infantry Division and the ROK 8th Division. The
1st Battalion, 7th Marines, on the west bank of the
Soyang, relieve elements of the ROK 8th Division at a
hill position about one and one-half miles north of
Topyong. During the evening, enemy mortars strike
the lines without harm.
August 30 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 1st and 3rd Battalions, 1st Korean Ma-
rine Regiment, are positioned to the rear of the line of
departure on Hill 755. The Korean Marines make last
minute preparations for the attack, scheduled to com-
mence on the following morning. In conjunction, the
2nd Battalion holds at the regimental positions on the
Kansas Line. In the meantime, the 2nd and 3rd Battal-
ions, 7th Marines complete relief of the ROK 8th Di-
vision. Back on the opposite bank of the Soyang, the 1st
Battalion, 7th Marines, had relieved elements of the
ROK 8th Division on a hill position about one and
one-half miles north of Topyong.
August 31 In the X Corps sector, in conjunction
with the ongoing attack by the 9th Infantry to gain Hill
983, X Corps commences an offensive all along the
front, which actually is a full-scale drive to the Hays
Line. The 2nd Division’s objectives, aside from Hill
983, is a hill mass that runs north-south in the eastern
sector of the divisional zone. The targeted ridgeline
stretches into the 1st Marine Division zone as it swerves
into the northern rim of the Punch Bowl and intersects
with an east-west ridge there. The Punch Bowl is cut
from the 2nd Division zone and left for the Marines
and the ROK 5th Division. The section delegated to the
2nd Division extends about 3,000 yards and includes
a formidable enemy-held position, Hill 1243. The 38th
Infantry is delegated Hill 1243.
In the 23rd Infantry Regimental zone, two battal-
ions remain in reserve for use at any point in the divi-
sional sector and the other battalion holds in place along
the Kansas Line. The path to Hill 1243 is notched with
a series of other hills that must first be secured prior to
the primary target, Hill 1243, known as Kachilbong
by the locals. Those initial obstacles include 1059 and
1181 and each of them that lean northeast from Taeu-
san is as ominous as the largest of the group. The effort
to secure the entire group will not be supported by
tanks due to the nasty terrain.
The vanguard of the 23rd Infantry, the 1st Battalion,
moves out at dawn. After a few hours, the resistance
accelerates and becomes intense. Company C, at the
point, plows into a large enemy force, but holds its
ground. In the meantime, the other companies move up
to reinforce, with one pivoting in an attempt to corral
the opposition, but the North Koreans slug it out and
give no ground. The intense combat terminates at dusk
with no clear victor.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, an attack is launched
against the northern section of the Punch Bowl. The 7th
Marines and the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment
commence an attack at 0600 to seize the X Corps’ ob-
jective, designated Yoke, a ridgeline running west to
766
east from Hill 930 through Hill 1026 and beyond to
Hill 924 to the east. In conjunction, the first objective,
the hill mass northeast of Topyong, is presently occu-
pied by the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines.
Meanwhile, the sector of Yoke Ridge, east of Hill
924, lies in the path of the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines.
Hills 924 and 1026 are to be secured by the Korean
Marines. Also, the 1st Tank Battalion is ordered to pre-
pare to support the attacking regiments.
In related activity, the 5th Marines are to patrol the
Kansas Line and the 1st Marines remain in X Corps
reserve in the vicinity of Hongchon. The 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, initially encounters light resistance, but as
the advance continues, the opposition becomes heated
and the slopes of Hill 702 are inundated with mines.
The attack is suspended during the latter part of the
afternoon. In conjunction, the Korean Marines also
come to a halt.
In other activity, Marine Transport Helicopter
Squadron 161 arrives in Korea. The unit will get organ-
ized and begin to move to Airfield X-83, near Sowo-ri,
where VMO-6 is stationed.
September 1 Planes attached to Far East Air
Forces, directed by the destroyer USS Hopewell (DD
681), carry out bombing and strafing missions in the
vicinity of Wonsan on this day and the next.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the com-
mander, Major General Clark L. Ruffner, having com-
pleted his regular tour of duty, departs for the U.S. The
assistant commander, General Thomas de Shazo, as-
sumes temporary command, until Ruffner’s replace-
ment, Major General Robert N. Young, arrives to as-
sume command on 20 September. At this time, the
2nd Division has the highest rate of deaths in action.
In other activity, the 23rd Regiment resumes its ad-
vance toward Kachilbong (Hill 1243). The attack re-
ceives a huge assist by a thunderous artillery bombard-
ment that strikes like a jackhammer to loosen the
resistance. As the troops advance, the enemy attempts
to repel the advance, but to no avail. Cracks in the de-
fense appear and as the momentum builds, the North
Koreans pull back, permitting the 1st Battalion to as-
cend the slope of Hill 1059 and plunge upon the sum-
mit by 1100. Afterward, the regiment makes quick
progress as it drives along the ridge toward the next ob-
jective, Hill 1181, which is seized by about 1900.
Once Hill 1181 is secure, the regiment establishes
night positions. In addition to the full complement of
the regiment, other troops had been attached to assist
in the tedious task of maintaining supplies and ammu-
nition, which can be carried only by people in this ter-
rain. The regiment gets assistance from Korean labor-
ers, headquarters and service company, and some
crewmen from the tank units who help transport the
ammunition.
In related activity, the Communists strike the posi-
tions of the 2nd Reconnaissance Company (2nd Divi-
sion) with mortars and artillery fire. Sergeant Charles
W. Turner takes notice that the assault is pinpointed
 767 September 1, 1951

The summit of Bloody Ridge, Hill 983, in the hands of the 2nd Division. The battle for Bloody Ridge
raged from August 18 through September 5.

toward the tanks. He speeds to the tanks about 100
yards distant, mounts a tank and takes over the ma-
chine gun, then while pouring fire into the enemy po-
sitions, he directs fire for the tank’s 75-mm gun. With
Turner atop the tank and exposed, the armor is struck
more than fifty times. Seven enemy machine gun nests
are destroyed, but during the fierce engagement, Turner
is killed. Lieutenant Turner is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary heroism
under fire.
September 2, 1951
Also, in the 9th Regimental zone, the Communists
launch an attack with contingents of three separate di-
visions. The positions of Company A, 1st Battalion,
near the Naktong in the vicinity of Agok, are bashed,
but no penetration occurs; rather, the unit is bypassed,
which jeopardizes it and places it in near isolation. Soon
another enemy unit encroaches its positions, but it is
spotted. PFC Luther H. Story takes over a machine
gun from his wounded gunner and then focuses on the
approaching hordes as they ford the river. Story elim-
inates about 100 of the enemy. However, as usual, more
take their place.
The intrepid actions of Story forestall disaster, but in
a flash, he spots a truck closing on their positions and
it contains troops and a trailer laden with ammunition.
Story bolts to the road, then flings grenades. After ex-
hausting his supply, he slithers back to his squad to get
more and then throws them at the truck. Nonetheless,
the enemy continues to press forward. Company A is
ordered to withdraw, but Story, although wounded,
volunteers to remain to afford cover fire. When the
final elements of his unit depart, he is seen fighting off
a far-superior force. PFC Luther H. Story is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary
actions and heroism under fire.
In the 7th Division area, the 17th Regiment is heav-
ily engaged with the enemy in the vicinity of Chup’a-
ri. One platoon becomes stalled by vicious enemy fire
that kills the platoon leader. Corporal William F. Lyell
takes command and leads an attack against the heavily
fortified positions, but the platoon again stalls. Lyell
moves quickly despite the fire and confiscates a recoil-
less rifle with which he proceeds to knock out the ob-
stacle to permit the attack to resume. Soon after, two
other enemy positions stall his platoon. Lyell remains
undaunted. He grabs a supply of grenades and single-
handedly charges two bunkers and eliminates both;
however, he becomes wounded. Nonetheless, Lyell
leads his command to the north slope, from which the
troops are positioned to fire into the enemy resistance.
In the meantime, reinforcements rush to the slope, but
Lyell is mortally wounded while providing cover fire.
Corporal Lyell is awarded the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his extraordinary actions in the face of hos-
tile fire.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, and the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regi-
ment reinitiate the attack to seize objective, Yoke. The
3rd Battalion, Korean Marine Regiment, passes
through the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, and drives to-
ward a ridge on the flank of the ridgeline objective.
After a dogged fight, the Korean Marines encroach the
crest of Hill 924 by 1700, yet the Communist North
Koreans are able to hold until about 2100 before the ob-
jective is secured, only to be lost again by a furious
counterattack at midnight (1st-2nd).
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
encounters tenacious North Korean resistance near Hill
702. The Communists launch five counterattacks
against the 7th Marines on Hill 602 and some penetrate
768
the lines of the 3rd Battalion. Patrols of the 1st Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, operating on the opposite bank of
the Soyang River, see the distress and call for air strikes
to aid the 3rd Battalion. The 11th Marines also satu-
rate the enemy positions with an avalanche of fire. The
all-day engagement breaks off at dusk.
In related activity, Air Force planes arrive to drop
ammunition and supplies to the Korean Marines; how-
ever, of thirty-nine additional air drops in X Corps
during the month of September, this is the only one
that is delivered to the 1st Marine Division. All other
supplies have to be delivered by Korean laborers.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of the 335th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Group, encounters MiGs in the vicinity of Sinanju.
Major Winton W. Marshall, the leader of one section
of the flight, drives directly into a pack of 30 to 50
enemy planes. No U.S. planes are lost.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns (anti-tank ar-
tillery, mortars and machine guns) strike the HMAS
Murchison (PF) while the vessel is operating against
Communist positions along the north bank of the Han
River. The British sustain three wounded, two seri-
ously.
September 2 In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, the 38th Regiment bolts from its positions on
Hill 1181 en route to Kachilbong (Hill 1243); how-
ever, enemy pressure again becomes heavy. The ad-
vance, led by the 3rd Battalion, is subjected to artillery
fire and mortars, as well as the entrenched enemy. The
vanguard force presses forward and eliminates strong
points as it moves. Enemy machine guns and burp guns
are silenced to ease the pathway. The fire intensifies as
the advance encroaches the summit, but the ascent con-
tinues, step by step. Darkness settles over the area; how-
ever, the illumination of gunfire signals that the battle
continues unabated, exhausting both the defenders and
the attackers to the point that the side with the most
stamina will prevail.
The summit suddenly becomes silent at 2145 when
the contest ends. The beleaguered 38th Regiment van-
quishes the defenders and holds the hill as the victors.
Despite exhaustion, there is no time to relax until a
perimeter is established to safeguard the summit. Sub-
sequently, on 7 September, the 38th Regiment is re-
lieved on the ridgeline by the ROK 5th Division.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the Marines again
reinitiate the attack to seize objective Yoke. At Hill 924,
the Korean Marines, who participated in a see-saw bat-
tle for control of the hill on the previous day, mount a
furious assault at dawn. The 11th Marines support the
advance and by noon, the objective is secured. Follow-
ing the capture of Hill 924, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Ko-
rean Marine Regiment, moves through the 2nd and
3rd Battalions to lead the way to Hill 1026, to the west.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
which had turned back at least five counterattacks on
the previous day, is again struck before it can jump off
to seize its objective. However, the Marines repulse the
 769
attack by 0700, and regroup to move against Hill 602.
At about 0900, the attack commences. Supported by
11th Marines’ artillery, the summit is secure by about
1100. The North Koreans mount several counterat-
tacks to reclaim the hill, but all fail. At about 1500,
the North Koreans disengage and retire.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of four F-86
Sabre jets, attached to the 335th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, led by Major
Winton W. Marshall, encounters a pack of six MiG-
15s in the vicinity of Sinanju. Major Marshall moves
in close behind the trailing plane and flames it with
several bursts of fire. The plane sustains a hit in the
fuselage and afterward, Marshall pours another burst
of machine gun fire to down the MiG. The enemy pilot
is spotted after he bails out. Also, Colonel Francis S.
Gabreski, the commanding officer of the 4th Fighter In-
terceptor Wing (later, 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing)
engages and destroys one MiG-15 in the skies north-
west of Taechon.
September 3 In the X Corps sector, the 2nd In-
fantry Division and the ROK 5th Division continue to
advance west of the Punch Bowl against minimum re-
sistance to make substantial gains.
In related activity, the 9th Infantry, since 31 August,
has been engaged in the vicinity of Tondul at Hill 700.
Captain Edward C. Krzyzowski had eliminated several
obstacles on the first day of the conflict and on the suc-
ceeding days, he continues to take a lead in the attacks.
Often he singlehandedly eliminates obstinate enemy
positions. Krzyzowski, although seriously wounded,
ordered his command to pull back while he provided
cover fire. On this day, again Krzyzowski leads the way.
Initially several positions are overrun, but still, enemy
fire is able to stall the advance. Krzyzowski maneuvers
into position on a knoll to direct mortar fire, but be-
fore he can direct the fire, he is slain by a sniper. Cap-
tain Krzyzowski is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary heroism under fire.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines, fortify their positions on Hill 602. The 1st
Korean Marine Regiment reinitiates its attack to gain
Hill 1026. In conjunction, the 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, comes out of reserve and fills in a part of a
new sector that occurred when the 7th Marines’ zone
was stretched to cut down the length of the Korean
Marines’ area.
The North Koreans react tenaciously against the Ko-
rean Marines and mount a ferocious counterattack, but
following a brutal contest that lasts more than three
hours, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment prevails. Later,
at 1230, the North Koreans again mount a strong at-
tack to regain the hill, but they fail. By about 1430,
the Communists disengage and retire.
By 1800, all X Corps objectives of Ridge Yoke are
accomplished and the 1st Marine Division holds the
entire Hays Line, which is also the complete northern
rim of the Punch Bowl. The North Korean defenders
are victimized after four difficult days of combat; how-
September 5, 1951
ever, the cost of victory had been expensive. Casual-
ties, including the Korean Marines, amounts to 109
killed and 494 wounded. The Communists lose 656
killed (counted) and 40 are captured.
In Naval activity, Vice Admiral I.N. Kiland, USN,
commander Amphibious Force Far East (CTF 90), is
succeeded by Rear Admiral T.B. Hill (commander Am-
phibious Group 1).
September 4 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the Marines consolidate their positions
along the Hays Line. In conjunction, patrols are dis-
patched northward in search of enemy units, while
preparations are made to commence the next phase of
the 1st Marine Division’s attack. In the course of the op-
eration to seize Ridge Yoke, it became apparent that
the Communists had taken advantage of the lull in
combat while peace talks were underway in Kaesong.
The Communists’ fire power during the recent Marine
operation was almost equivalent to that of the 11th
Marines and U.S. Army units that supported the
Marines.
While the Communists managed to build their ar-
senal in Korea, the 1st Marine Division concludes that
the next phase of the attack must be postponed until 9
September, to allow time to replenish artillery and mor-
tar ammunition. The supply depot, Ammunition Sup-
ply Point (ASP) 60-B, is located about five miles to the
rear of the guns and just under fifty miles from
Hongch’on. Due to the extremely poor condition of
the road, which for most of the distance is a slim ser-
pentine path, the time required to make one round trip
is about twenty-five hours. All the while, about fifty
trucks will not be available for other division uses.
In related activity, during the daylight hours, patrols
are unable to spot the enemy, but during the night
(4th-5th), the North Koreans strike positions of the
5th Marines along the Kansas Line. Similarly, in the
7th Marines area, about five miles in front of the 5th
Marines, patrols move out from the Hays Line without
encountering the enemy. The Communists continue
to strike the Marine perimeter with artillery; however,
the locations of the guns are concealed.
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77) sus-
tains the loss of four planes, three by enemy fire and a
fourth by mechanical difficulties. Three pilots are killed
and the one who survives sustains injuries from burns.
September 5 In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, the 2nd Battalion, 23rd Infantry Regiment, in
coordination with the 9th Infantry Regiment, attacks
and seizes Objective “N” slightly after 1600. The bat-
talion was bolstered by Company B and Company C,
72nd Tank Battalion. While the 2nd Battalion secures
its objective, the 1st Battalion encroaches the summit
of Hill 618. Shortly after Objective “N” is secured, Hill
618 comes under the control of the Regiment. Con-
trol of Hill 618, west of Bloody Ridge, gives the regi-
ment a strategic piece of real estate that is a natural
blockage along the MSR, causing the curve in the road
running northward to swerve eastward.
September 6, 1951 770

Top: A rescue helicopter lands on the USS Boxer following the rescue at sea of a downed pilot. Bottom:
A U.S. Navy tanker refuels a destroyer (left) and a cruiser (right) in the Sea of Japan.

In Naval activity, CTG 95.6 is ordered to initiate a
minesweeping operation in the area from Wonsan to
the waters near Hungnam, to clear the way for war-
ships to patrol the area from which their guns can safely
reach their targets. Hungnam is scheduled to come
under bombardment for the first time since X Corps
abandoned it, during the period following the Chosin
Reservoir campaign of the previous year.
September 6 In the I Corps sector, 3rd Division
zone, the positions of Company L, 3rd Battalion, near
Ch’orwon on Hill 284 come under attack during the
 771
night (6th-7th). Small outpost positions are overrun.
During the savage exchange, Corporal Jerry K. Crump
observes two enemy troops closing on a friendly un-
manned machine gun. The two troops are killed, both
by bayonet. Afterward, he moves back to his foxhole,
now inhabited by four other men of the command and
each is wounded. Shortly thereafter, an enemy grenade
is tossed into the foxhole. Crump, in an attempt to save
the others, blankets the grenade with his body. All sur-
vive. Corporal Crump is awarded the Medal of Honor
for his extraordinary heroism in the face of the enemy.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the 23rd In-
fantry Regiment relieves the 9th Infantry Regiment,
the latter having just completed a prolonged hard-
fought series of battles for Bloody Ridge. After complet-
ing the relief, the Company E, 23rd Regiment is dis-
patched to occupy Hill 785, located northwest of
Objective “N.” Company F deploys on Hill 778 north-
east of Objective “N.”
In other activity, toward the later part of the night,
an enemy contingent operating from Hill 618 launches
an unsuccessful attack against Company I.
September 7 In the I Corps sector, the Commu-
nists launch a strong assault against the positions of
Company I, 3rd Battalion, 35th Regiment. One man,
Private Billie G. Kanell, defies the mortar and artillery
barrage to fire at the approaching ground troops. A
grenade lands near Kanell and two nearby troops, but
Kanell blankets the grenade to save the others. He sur-
vives, but is badly wounded. Shortly thereafter, yet an-
other grenade is thrown at the small group and again,
Kanell, unable to move quickly, still gathers the energy
to smother the grenade with is body to save the others.
Private Kanell is awarded the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his extraordinary courage in the face of the
enemy and for his selfless sacrifice to save others.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, Division
command post is moved to a place near the eastern sec-
tor of the Hwach’on Reservoir. The 38th Infantry Reg-
iment is relieved at Kachilbong (Hill 1243) by the ROK
5th Division. (See also, September 2, 1951.)
Also, reconnaissance patrols operating west of Hill
1181 near Kachilbong encounter enemy units on Hill
868. Other enemy contingents are discovered north of
Hill 660 at Hill 703.
September 8 Naval ships operating on the west
coast of Korea land a contingent of about 200 ROK
guerrillas who launch a raid against enemy positions. Es-
timates of enemy killed are slightly more than 100.
Also, the USS Seiverling (DE 441), while operating off
Wonsan, comes under enemy fire from shore positions.
The Seiverling is struck several times, but no casualties
are sustained.
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the Divi-
sion’s artillery units and the 72nd Tank Battalion sup-
port ROK attacks this day and the next. The ROK 5th
Division at Kachilbong dispatches a contingent north,
against an enemy strongpoint at Hill 1211, but the as-
sault fails to make progress. Another attack supported
September 9, 1951
by elements of the 72nd Tank Battalion is launched by
the 7th ROK Division to secure Hill 883, but it, too,
fails to gain the objective.
September 9 In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 38th Infantry Regi-
ment, move to the ridge that curves west off of Hill
1181 to secure and occupy it, but the move fails; the
Communists have gained positions there. The enemy
penetration causes complications, as the Communists
who had infiltrated the area also plant mines. Two tanks
hit mines as they patrol along the Pia-ri–Worun-ni
Road.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, orders are issued that
instruct the 7th Marines to prepare to commence an
attack on 11 September to seize Objectives Able (Hill
673) and Baker (749).
In other activity, the 1st Marines receives orders that
detach the unit from X Corps reserve and place it under
the 1st Marine Division, with orders to prepare to pass
through the 7th Marines once the objectives are se-
cured. Then they are to extend the attack against Ob-
jective Charlie, a ridgeline that stretches northeast from
Hill 1052. One company of the 5th Marines is to re-
main on the Kansas Line, while the remainder of the
regiment moves into 1st Marine Division reserve.
Also, Marine Transport Helicopter Squadron 161
completes its transfer to Airfield X-83. The large trans-
port helicopters will be used to drastically change com-
bat supply tactics within three days. The squadron now
consists of 15 HRS-1 Sikorsky helicopters. The helicop-
ters are able to carry more troops (4 to 6 men in full gear)
and can transport three to five casualties in litters.
In Air Force activity, a group of 28 F-86 Sabre jets op-
erating in the area between Sinanju and Pyongyang is
intercepted by a massive force of 70 MiGs. A group of
6 Sabres under Captain Richard S. Becker (334th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron) on the patrol in the area between
Sinanju and Pyongyang spots a force of 30 MiGs flying
above the Sabres. Soon after, Becker spots yet another
large formation closing on his command. Despite the
odds, Becker orders the squadron to attack right into the
enemy formation. The impetuous pilots totally disrupt
the Communists. The Communists break their forma-
tion, but during the ongoing maneuvering, Becker gets
separated from his squadron. Meanwhile, as he prepares
to withdraw, Becker spots another contingent of about
15 planes. Rather than withdraw, Becker on his own
dives toward the enemy and again the enemy becomes
unbalanced. The aggressiveness of Captain Becker keeps
him safe through the battle and he downs one of the
MiGS, bringing his total for kills to five.
Also, during the air battles Captain Ralph D. Gib-
son, 335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, also downs a
MiG, his fifth kill to date. Both Becker and Gibson
become aces. They join Captain James Jabara, who be-
came the first jet-to-jet ace during the previous May.
In conjunction, each of the officers, Creighton, Becker
and Fisher, receive the Silver Star for their heroism and
leadership under fire.
September 10, 1951
September 10–12 1951 In the X Corps
sector, 2nd Division zone, the 38th Regiment takes
action against enemy elements that had been en-
countered at Hill 868 on the 7th. The day-long as-
sault by Companies A and G gnaw through the re-
sistance and begin to ascend the slopes; however,
ferocious resistance prevents the units from securing
the summit. Night positions are established and on
the following day, three companies attack. Company
E maneuvers to positions from which it ascends from
the southwest, while Companies A and G grind for-
ward from the northeast. Again, the enemy pours
continuous fire upon the assault troops. The ascents
on either side are able to encroach the summit, but
the Communists refuse to budge.
The first to grasp a hold near the crest is Com-
pany E, which reaches a point slightly more than
fifty yards from the crest by about 1830, but the
enemy is prepared to react and the force is met by
grenades in such numbers that the assault is halted.
Meanwhile, the other units maintain the assault and
reach positions nearly within arm’s reach of the crest,
but here too, the Communists compel the force to
pull back. While the enemy holds formidable posi-
tions, the 38th Regiment refuses to disengage.
The regiment establishes night positions and pre-
pares to reinitiate the attack on the 12th with addi-
tional fire power. Following two unsuccessful days of
combat, the attack commences with Companies A,
E, G and I synchronized. The four companies ad-
vance in unison and the combined power eventually
wears down the resistance. Nevertheless, the advance
again is blood-filled, as the infantry drills to the sum-
mit and secures it by mid-afternoon.
In other activity, the 9th Infantry Regiment ini-
tiates the relief of the 23rd Regiment and completes
the operation by 11 September. Company B, 72nd
Tank Battalion, which has been attached to the 23rd
Regiment, is attached to the 9th Regiment to provide
support.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the Advanced
Echelon HMR 161 (Helicopter Transport Squadron)
arrives at Nayhyon-Ri, from where it will support
ground operations of the Marines.
In Air Force activity, Captain Ward M. Millar, an
F-80 pilot, following a harrowing set of circum-
stances, finds himself in territory south of Py-
ongyang. Captain Millar, attached to the 7th Fighter
Bomber Squadron, had been shot down. He ejected
and upon landing broke both of his ankles. The
Communists captured him. About two months later,
Millar escaped with the aid of a North Korean ser-
geant. Both then evade the Communists for about
three weeks. On this day, an H-5 helicopter locates
Millar and the North Korean and retrieves both men,
then transports them back to Seoul.
In Naval activity, the USS Redstart (AM-378) and
the USS Heron (AMS-18), while operating in the
vicinity of Wonsan, are each struck by enemy shore
batteries.
772
September 11 In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, the 23rd Regiment, upon relief by the 9th In-
fantry Regiment, initiates relief of the 38th Infantry,
beginning with the units not engaged against Hill 868.
The entire regiment is relieved by 13 September.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 7th Marines ini-
tiates the assault to gain Hills 673 and 749; however,
the ground between the Marines and the objectives in-
clude three formidable and dominating enemy-held
positions, Hills 812, 980 and 1052, on Kanmubong
Ridge, about 4,000 rugged yards from the primary ob-
jectives. And yet, one other obstacle had to be taken
first, Hill 602, just to the front of the spearhead of the
attack, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines. At just about
dawn, Company H, 3rd Battalion, in the center, pre-
pares to jump off, but inclement weather delays the as-
sault. With the element of surprise lost, the ascent up
the hill is easily detected. The Communists halt the ad-
vance at about the mid-way point.
Company I moves up the southwest spur of the hill
to divert attention and release some pressure from
Company H, but while H Company is able to reach a
point about fifty yards from the crest, Company I
somehow gets off course and ends up on the spur with
H Company at about 1245. All the while, the North
Koreans from their dug-in bunkers steadily pour ma-
chine gun and mortar fire into the Marine positions. Be-
fore dark the North Koreans launch two counterattacks
that succeeded in pushing the Marines back.
Equally tenacious resistance is raised on Hill 673
(Objective Able), in the 1st Battalion zone, causing the
1st Battalion to also establish night positions short of
the objective. During the darkness, the 2nd Battalion
moves out and reaches positions behind the North Ko-
reans on Hill 673 and prepares to strike from the rear.
September 12 In the I Corps area, 25th Division
zone, Company B, 27th Regiment, engages the enemy
in a fierce battle in the vicinity of Kumhwa. The intense
enemy fire stalls the attack. Lieutenant Jerome A. Sudut
attempts to clear the blockage; he drives directly to-
ward the obstacle and ignores the wall of fire directed
at him from the bunker. Sudut succeeds in destroying
the obstacle and three occupants while the others retire
hurriedly. Although the thrust succeeds, Sudut becomes
seriously wounded. Nonetheless, he refuses evacuation
and instead leads the next assault.
The abandoned bunker had in the meantime been re-
occupied by the enemy who had used connecting
trenches without being discovered. The platoon is again
stalled. Sudut and one rifleman advance, but the rifle-
man is wounded. Sudut moves forward and eliminates
three of four occupants before running out of ammu-
nition. The remaining enemy soldier is greeted by
Sudut, armed only with his trench knife, but still he
prevails. The actions of Sudut inspire the command
and they follow to seize the objective. Lieutenant Sudut
had been wounded fatally. He is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his intrepid actions and un-
wavering leadership in the face of the enemy.
 773
In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, Company
B, 23rd Infantry Regiment, secures Hill 702 without a
major contest by mid-afternoon.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, which had maneuvered behind the North Ko-
reans on Hill 673 without being detected, springs from
its positions at the first crack of sunlight. The attack
catches the Communists totally off guard. Although
the 1st Battalion is slowed tremendously by mines that
pepper the slope, the troops complete the ascent by
1415. During the ascent, Company B halts due to a
wall of fire. Sergeant Frederick W. Mausert III, an act-
ing platoon leader, bolts form his cover to retrieve two
wounded Marines. Mausert receives a head wound but
he refuses evacuation. Within minutes, Mausert leads
a bayonet charge and en route to the objective, he gets
hit again. His helmet absorbs the shot. He is knocked
down but otherwise okay.
Meanwhile, as the troops are ready to take the final
objective, the crest, enemy fire again stalls the attack.
Mausert refuses to halt. He jumps ahead, runs directly
toward the enemy machine gun to draw fire away form
the remainder of his command, and stops only when the
fire cuts him down. Still, Mausert remains adamant
about leading his men to the crest. He ignores his mul-
tiple wounds, bolts to the summit and destroys a ma-
chine gun nest before he is fatally wounded. Sergeant
Mausert is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraor-
dinary courage in the face of the enemy.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
seize its objective, Hill 602, and all attacking units reach
the summit by 1030. During the attack, Second Lieu-
tenant George H. Ramer leads his 3rd Platoon against
a heavily fortified position. During the treacherous as-
cent, the bulk of his command becomes wounded.
Lieutenant Ramer, with the able bodied men of the
platoon, continue the climb and once at the crest,
Ramer singlehandedly destroys an obstinate bunker.
Ramer and eight other Marines seize the summit. How-
ever, the positions become untenable. Ramer, having
sustained two wounds, directs the remainder of his con-
tingent to seek shelter, but he refuses evacuation and
holds the crest until the enemy finally overwhelms him.
Lieutenant George Ramer is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary courage
under hostile fire.
Later, at slightly after 1710, the 2nd Battalion re-
ports Hill 749 (Objective Baker) secure; however, the
North Koreans retain positions on the slope and
threaten the Marines. Later, when the 1st Marines
begin to relieve the 7th Marines, the 2nd Battalion is
too engaged and some units are isolated, making the
change impossible. Subsequently, a two-battalion surge
secures the objective.
Fox Company, 2nd Battalion, is not relieved by the
1st Marines until 1100 on the following day. During the
two-day contest, the Marines sustain 22 killed and 245
wounded. Enemy killed are calculated only by actual
count, which is, for the identical time period, 30 killed
and 22 prisoners.
September 13, 1951
In other activity, during the night (12th-13th), the
1st Marines relieves the 7th Marines and assumes re-
sponsibility for the zones of the 1st and 3rd Battalions,
which pass into reserve. The helicopters are able to
carry only two wounded Marines per trip, prolonging
the evacuation mission.
September 13–October 15 1951 THE
BATTLE OF HEARTBREAK RIDGE Having recently
cleared Bloody Ridge of the enemy, X Corps now
prepares to eliminate the next North Korean line of
defense, a ridgeline north of Bloody Ridge and
equally treacherous. After being driven from their
prior positions, the Communists retired to a series of
razor-tipped ridges that include Hill 894, on a
straight line about three miles north of Bloody
Ridge, Hill 931, north of 894, standing as the tallest
peak on the ridge, and beyond, the final major ob-
stacle, Hill 851, sometimes referred to as the nee-
dle. The ridges are nestled between the Sat’ae-ri Val-
ley and the Mundung Valley on the east and west
respectively.
The North Korean 12th Division (N.K. III Corps)
is deployed on the west bank of the Suip-ch’on River
in the high ground above it to dominate the
Mundung-ni valley. The other primary unit, the 6th
N.K. Division, also of the N.K. III Corps, is de-
ployed to defend Heartbreak Ridge and the Sat’ae-
ri Valley.
Although Eighth Army is not focused on real es-
tate for the sake of gaining it, the ridgeline that
stretches about seven miles, specifically because of
its strategic location, poses a tremendous threat to
X Corps positions, mandating that the resistance
there be leveled to prevent any catastrophic events
from occurring to disrupt the U.N. bargaining power
with the Communists.
The 2nd Division, which prevailed at Bloody
Ridge after a prolonged duel, again receives the task.
It is given responsibility for securing the southern
portion of the ridgeline to cut off any possibility of
the valleys being used as a funnel to threaten the lines
west of the Punch Bowl. The key to the domination
of the valleys is Hill 931. However, the enemy has
tirelessly fortified the ridges and used their excellent
skills to camouflage their positions to gain extra ad-
vantage during the eight days since they had been
driven from their final bastion at Bloody Ridge.
During the final planning session, there is no
unanimous consensus on the degree of resistance the
Communists are willing to raise to hold the ground.
In the recent past, the North Koreans, under orders
from the Chinese, have been holding their ground,
but at Bloody Ridge, their losses were extremely
high, apparently bringing some on staff to conclude
that the resistance would not remain rigid for too
long. Others, including the commander of the ar-
tillery, remain convinced that they will “fight like
hell” to hold the terrain.
At this time, General Ruffner has transferred back
September 13, 1951
Company B, 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, moves up to relieve Company C during the fighting on Heart-
break Ridge (13 September–15 October).
to the U.S. The 2nd Division is now commanded
by the acting division commander, Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas E. de Shazo. He decides to launch the
assault with only one regiment, the 23rd, rather than
two, based on his leaning toward the theory that re-
sistance will not be too substantial. Backup plans in
place have the 9th Regiment prepared to lunge to-
ward Hill 728 immediately after the fall of Hill 894.
At 0600, following a preliminary artillery attack
of one-half hour, the 3rd Battalion, 23rd Regiment,
774
led by Lt. Colonel Virgil E. Craven, advances north
from Hill 702 as the spearhead of the assault force.
A protective umbrella of artillery fire supports the
drive. The 37th FABn assumes responsibility for di-
rect and immediate support, while other units — the
38th FABn, 96th FABn, 503rd FABn and one bat-
tery of Company C, 780th FABn—add supplemen-
tal support. The 37th and 38th FABns are posted
several miles southeast of the objective. The 96th is
deployed more than five miles south of the objective
 775
A U.S. soldier attached to the 23rd Regiment, 2nd Division, pauses for a rest near an enemy casualty
during the fighting on Heartbreak Ridge.
and the 503rd is positioned nearly ten miles south-
east of the ridgeline. Even farther back, Company
C, 780th FABn, is deployed slightly more than ten
miles south of the ridge.
As the advance progresses there is an ever-
increasing anxiety caused by the lack of serious resist-
ance. The veterans and the replacements each real-
ize that the tranquil appearance of the valley is but
a ruse to conceal a cauldron of fire on the brink of
erupting at any time. The apprehension of the van-
guard is not confined; rather, it is evenly spread
within the ranks of Lt. Colonel Henry F. Daniels’
2nd Battalion, which is directly behind the 3rd. Ini-
tially, there is an ominous silence as the advance ven-
tures through the Sat’ae-ri valley en route to the east-
west spur of the ridge upon which the ground troops
will traverse to the core of Heartbreak Ridge. From
there the regiment splits to take out Hill 851 to the
north with one battalion, while the other pivots to
the south to seize 931 and 894.
As the troops advance, the resistance becomes se-
vere, much more so than the strategy session had an-
ticipated. Nevertheless, the 3rd Battalion presses
ahead and then, the North Koreans open the flood
gates. The columns are pounded with ravaging ar-
tillery barrages and menacing mortars. Casualties are
September 13, 1951
incurred. With each yard gained, more casualties are
sustained, yet, still the advance continues. The gru-
eling trek to the east-west spur continues to slowly
wedge through the walls of fire.
The 3rd Battalion reaches the spur and begins the
ascent, but soon after, the North Koreans, holding
concealed positions, reveal their presence and un-
leash deadly streams of fire from machine gun and
mortars. That ferocious burst of firepower, added to
the incoming artillery fire, forbids passage and com-
pels the 3rd Battalion to essentially hug the ground
at the foot of the hill. The heavy resistance also
prompts a change in the schedule, as the 9th Infantry
had been awaiting word on the seizure of Hill 894 as
a signal to move against Hill 728. With the obvious
stall in the advance, the 9th Regiment’s attack is sus-
pended.
In the meantime, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions es-
tablish night positions and prepare to spend another
uncomfortable, sleepless night in the Korean wilder-
ness.
On the morning of 14 September, General de
Shazo moves to get the attack back on track. He di-
rects the 9th Regiment, at Yao-dong, to abort its
plans to seize Hill 728 and focus on relieving the
overwhelming pressure on the 23rd Regiment by
September 13, 1951
attacking Hill 894. The 2nd Battalion, 9th Regi-
ment, moves toward the objective, Hill 894. The at-
tack is supported by elements of Company B, 72nd
Tank Battalion, and further augmented by the heavy
mortar company and a battalion of 155-mm how-
itzers to help insulate the troops and level the field
if strong resistance lies in the path. After the battal-
ion surges forward, it meets only nominal resistance,
which permits quicker than expected progress.
By dusk, the battalion holds positions less than
700 yards from the summit of the objective. The at-
tack is suspended for the night. The troops estab-
lish a night perimeter and begin preparations to con-
tinue the assault on the morning of the 15th. Unlike
the most recent struggles to claim ownership of the
dreadful real estate in this region of Korea, the 2nd
Battalion has sustained extremely light casualties.
On the 15th, the stalled 23rd Regiment resumes
its attack to break through the resistance and thread
the line between Hill 931 the dominant peak on the
ridge and Hill 851. The enemy still commands the
approaches with positions at various angles that seal
the slope and keep the regiment from ascending be-
yond the lower portion of the hill.
In the meantime, the 2nd Battalion, 9th Regi-
ment, resumes the ascent on the southwestern slope
of Hill 894. After a rough climb on the ragged slope,
the vanguard bursts upon the summit during the af-
ternoon to the dismay of the defenders, who are
handily evicted. The battalion accomplishes its mis-
sion with only 11 casualties. The main mission in
the seizure had been to press the enemy sufficiently
to reduce the resistance against the 23rd Regiment,
but the capture has no effect. The 23rd Regiment is
unable to capitalize and ends the day at the lower
portion of the ridge.
On the 16th, the circumstances of the 23rd Reg-
iment remain dismal; however, other than the con-
quest at Hill 894, the entire 2nd Division continues
to be impeded by the aggressive defense of the ridge.
Even the continuous artillery bombardments and air
strikes fail to collapse the iron resistance. The North
Koreans burrow down during the massive strikes and
when the artillery silences, they return to their guns.
While the 23rd Regiment attempts to modify its at-
tack by switching from a column formation to ad-
vancing abreast, the commanding officer also alters
the tactics. Colonel Adams orders the 2nd Battalion
to pivot and move southwest toward Hill 931, while
the 3rd Battalion maintains its drive to the west. In
another support move, elements of the 1st Battal-
ion, Company C, move against Hill 931 by passing
through the positions of the 9th Infantry Regiment
at recently captured Hill 894 to launch an assault
from the south.
As the separate units push ahead, each is easily ob-
served by the North Koreans who wait patiently in
their bunkers for the Americans to come within
range of their small arms and grenades. As the day
passes, casualties continue to mount, but still the
776
men climb and eventually encroach the summit of
Hill 931, only to find themselves on the receiving
end of cascading grenades and machine gun fire. The
hill and the ridgeline remain under North Korean
control.
In the meantime, because the American regiments
have not gained control of the hills or the valleys,
the Communists continue to effortlessly resupply
and bring in fresh troops. On the 16th, the N.K.
13th Regiment, 6th Division, moves onto the ridge
and relieves the N.K. 1st Regiment.
By the termination of the fighting on the ridge on
the 16th, the U.S. forces begin moving beyond ex-
haustion. Their relentless pursuit of victory has
brought forth no results, yet there are no signs of
giving up the struggle. Of course the morale droops,
but primarily because of the difficulty of the terrain
and the inability to quickly acquire supplies.
Unlike the Communists, the U.S. troops experi-
ence terrible logistics problems. Often, the Korean la-
borers abscond, abandoning the supplies as they flee.
The roads are jammed due to the enemy’s ability to
pour fire at all strategic points that lead to the 23rd
Regiments’ positions. Another equally disturbing fact
is that the task of evacuating the casualties is equiv-
alent to walking through a firestorm. The trek back
from the front of the regiment’s positions while car-
rying a wounded soldier in a litter can take as long
as eight to ten hours. And there is no indicator of
the situation changing for the better. Nevertheless, the
struggle to gain superiority continues on the 17th
and the 18th. Still the Communists hold.
On the 17th, Company C, 23rd Regiment, comes
under a vicious attack. One platoon holding strate-
gic ground is hit by wave after wave. PFC Herbert
K. Pililaau volunteers to hold the ground to afford
cover fire while his exhausted platoon, upon orders,
pulls back. He expends his automatic weapon ammu-
nition, then reverts to grenades and when that sup-
ply is expended, Pililaau takes on the enemy that
closes upon him with hand-to-hand combat. His
final stand is accomplished with his fists and trench
knife, but finally the enemy overruns his one-man
line. On the following day, when Corporal Pililaau’s
body is retrieved, the detail counts more than forty
enemy dead around him. Corporal Pililaau is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously.
On the 19th, the contest is again reinitiated, but
while the troops slug it out with the North Koreans,
Colonel Lynch concludes that changes should be
made to turn the tide of the battle to break the stale-
mate. Colonel Lynch, the commander of the 9th In-
fantry Regiment, is convinced that the assault must
be enlarged and strengthened to punch a hole in the
resistance that to this point has remained nearly in-
vincible. His theory is that if he dispatches his 1st
Battalion to seize Hills 867 and 1024, both located
less than five miles south of Hill 894, which is
presently held by the 9th Regiment, it will appear as
if a major assault is being launched from the west. If
 777
the ruse works, he contends, the North Koreans will
take the bait and slim their lines on the ridge to
thwart the threat. However, General de Shazo, the
acting commander, disagrees. He contends that the
priority of X Corps, by a directive of General Byers,
remains Hill 931, where the enemy had repulsed an
attack by elements of the 9th Infantry Regiment on
the 16th.
On the following day, 20 September, General de
Shazo reverts back to the position of assistant divi-
sion commander as General Young arrives and as-
sumes command of the 2nd Division. Colonel
Lynch’s idea of the previous day is well received by
Young. The plan is put into effect and the diversion-
ary attack across the Mundung-ni Valley is sched-
uled to commence on 23 September, with Hill 1024
as the initial objective.
Meanwhile, there are no changes in the zone of
the 23rd Regiment. It continues to grind forward
with similar results, unable to permanently crack
through the resistance. Throughout the 22nd, Hill
931 is assaulted from two sides, but at day’s end, the
North Koreans are able to hold the crest. On the fol-
lowing day, the 1st Battalion climbs to the summit,
but during the early morning hours of the 23rd, it
sustains severe casualties. The battalion, after ex-
pending all of its ammunition, relinquishes the crest
to the N.K. 3rd Regiment, 12th Division.
During the 22nd, while the 9th Regiment pre-
pares for its upcoming assault, General Van Fleet di-
rects X Corps to expand its west flank to bring it
alongside the IX Corps positions. Pursuant to Van
Fleet’s order, General Byers orders the ROK 7th Di-
vision to prepare to advance to seize yet another el-
evation, Hill 1142, which stands northwest of Hill
1024. The additional objective becomes another
component in the attempt to draw forces away from
the 23rd Regiment.
The two attacks jump off on the 23rd and unlike
the 23rd Regiment, both forces, the 9th Regiment
and the ROKs, push forward and gain ground. The
attack continues to gain ground on 24 September in
both zones. On the 25th, Hill 1024 is gained by the
9th Regiment. Meanwhile, the ROKs maintain their
progress against Hill 1142.
The strategy of the X Corps begins to show suc-
cess. The Communists feel the pressure closing
against Heartbreak Ridge. The North Koreans antic-
ipate an attack against another strategic point, Hill
867, farther north in the Mundung-ni valley. To
counteract the 2nd Division movements, the Com-
munists dispatch the N.K. 3rd Regiment, 6th Divi-
sion, from its positions on Heartbreak Ridge, to
forge a defensive line at Hill 867.
On the 26th, while the ROKs take Hill 1142, still
the pressure against the 23rd Regiment remains rigid.
During the day’s contest, the French Battalion takes
over for the 2nd Battalion and pushes south, but
without any progress. In conjunction with the south-
ern push, the 1st Battalion, 23rd Regiment, contin-
September 13, 1951
ues to grind north against near-impregnable posi-
tions of the heavy mortar and machine gun crews at
and along the approaches to Hill 931. The 2nd Di-
vision had launched the attack on 13 September and
as of this date, the casualties have risen to well more
than 1,600 men. The 23rd Regiment has been hit
the hardest; its casualties soar to more than 950
troops.
Colonel Adams, the regimental commander, on
the 26th informs General Young that the ongoing
operation is destined to accomplish only more griev-
ous casualties unless the plan of attack is drastically
modified. Adams concurs with the strategy of Col-
onel Lynch, 9th Regimental commander, and re-
quests the attack be greatly expanded to compel the
Communists to slim their defenses on Heartbreak
Ridge, to defend against a wider assault. General
Young and General Byers, X Corps commander,
consider Colonel Adams’ plan and by the following
day, it is authorized.
The 23rd Regiment is ordered to halt its attack
while new plans are drawn to execute a full-scale di-
visional assault, through both the valleys with the
support of all available artillery and armor. The op-
eration is later dubbed Operation TOUCHDOWN.
The operational order is issued on 2 October in an
effort to transform the two valleys of death into
places of victory.
The preliminaries prior to the attack depend heav-
ily on logistics to ensure that each participating unit
has sufficient ammunition to sustain the attack for the
duration. The transport crews become overtaxed to
fulfill the requisitions, particularly because of the ar-
duous trek from the rear to the front along pot-holed
paths. Having learned from the debacle of the 23rd
Regiment on Hill 931, supply depots are placed
north of the Kansas Line so an abundant supply of
ammunition will ready to go forward when required.
Meanwhile, the engineers are equally tested. The
2nd Engineering Battalion must transform the hole-
torn road leading through the Mundung-ni valley
into a highway capable of carrying Sherman tanks.
The Communists have earlier taken precautions to
make the road impassable by creating obstacles, in-
cluding the usual menacing mines, but they have also
pushed huge rocks from the heights. The engineers,
working without their bulldozers, which are out of
operation and in for repairs, plod forward. When pos-
sible the obstacles, such as craters, are repaired. Oth-
ers are detonated, but if all else fails, the engineers
modify the route and swerve it to the stream bed until
it can be again diverted back upon the road. The en-
gineers, by working without their mechanized equip-
ment, draw less attention from the enemy.
During the first few days of October, the 2nd Di-
vision units deploy at their respective jump-off
points and await the signal to attack. Meanwhile,
the commanders spend countless repetitive hours
going over the attack strategy. The 72nd Tank Bat-
talion is informed that the roads are prepared to
September 13, 1951
shuttle the armor through the Mundung-ni valley
and that at those points too tight for passage, the en-
gineers had sculptured the slopes with explosives to
remove the jagged rocks.
In the 23rd Regimental zone, Task Force Stur-
man, established two days prior to the assault, is
formed as yet another diversion to knock the enemy
on Heartbreak Ridge, while simultaneously protect-
ing the right flank. It is to drive through the Sat’ae-
ri valley to pound against the enemy on the east slope
of the ridge. The task force is built from a compos-
ite of units, including a French platoon and a
company-sized contingent created out of the 2nd
Division’s security units. The task force is further
bolstered by the 2nd Reconnaissance Company and
the 23rd Tank Company.
As dawn breaks on 4 October, the troops of the
2nd Division begin final preparations for the attack
as the armor begins to roll toward the respective
starting lines. However, while the divisional assault
is not scheduled until late on the night of the 5th,
Task Force Sturman bolts ahead and moves north-
ward through the Sat’ae-ri valley to distract the
enemy. And the task force is not the only distrac-
tion. Forty-nine fighter bombers arrive to bomb and
strafe the enemy’s positions.
On 5 October, the stage is finally set for Opera-
tion TOUCHDOWN. The entire 2nd Division is lined
up and ready to charge to the end zone, known as
Heartbreak Ridge. During the afternoon, a thun-
derous, earth-shattering artillery bombardment com-
mences. Meanwhile, as TF Sturman grinds ahead in
the Sat’ae-ri valley, the 72nd Tank Battalion has its
engines at the ready to plow through the Mundung-
ni Valley and lead the way to the objectives, Hills
867, 1005, 980 and 1040, on the western sector of
the valley. They are to be seized by the 9th Regi-
ment, operating on the Divisional left flank.
In the meantime, the 23rd Regiment prepares to
advance against the obstinate prize, Hill 931, and
the ridge stretching from there to the west, but its task
doesn’t halt there. The 23rd is to position itself from
where it can pivot to either move to secure an objec-
tive west of Hill 851, known as Hill 520, or to di-
rectly attack Hill 728, or bolster the attack of the
38th Regiment against it, depending on the progress
of the offensive. The 38th Regiment is assigned re-
sponsibility for securing Hill 485. Through some
luck, elements of the 38th Regiment on the previous
day had detected that Hill 485 had been abandoned
by the enemy.
In the late afternoon of 5 October, the artillery
preparation commences. Later, just prior to the
jump-off at 2100, Marine night fighter squadrons
arrive and plaster the enemy positions with a com-
bination of rockets and napalm, adding streams of
machine gun fire that rivet the slopes. The tank-
infantry forces move out in a wide-sweeping strike
that finds cracks in the defenses. On the left, the 3rd
Battalion, 9th Infantry, encounters only nominal op-
778
position as it drills toward Hill 867, while the 1st
Battalion pushes toward Hill 666 and encounters
similar resistance.
On the west the 3rd Battalion, 9th Infantry,
presses toward Hill 867. Doggedly, the offensive con-
tinues through the dark of night in an all-out effort
to end the stalemate. The 1st Battalion drives to-
ward Hill 666. The full-throttle advance continues
to progress throughout the following day and no se-
rious problems develop with resupply. On 7 Octo-
ber, Hill 867, defended by the N.K. 3rd Regiment,
12th Division, falls to the 3rd Battalion, but there is
no pause in the fight. On the following day, Hill 960
is secured by the 3rd Battalion, while the 1st Battal-
ion evicts the occupants of Hill 666. Coupled with
the progress of the 38th Regiment, by the 8th, the
2nd Division achieves five of its objectives. The rapid
progress signals the fast approaching demise of the
now temporary invincibility of the Communists on
Heartbreak Ridge.
The 23rd Regiment, snagged in a quagmire since
the initial attack commenced, receives the sparks
necessary to break out from the abominable posi-
tions before the area is transformed into a graveyard.
The developing strategy to disrupt the security of
the enemy’s galvanized lines unfolds well in the zone
and the absence of an artillery bombardment and air
strikes on Hill 931 underscores the ruse. The de-
fenders are anticipating a leisurely night, unaware
that the 23rd is finally on the move. The property
value of the hill rises steeply.
The attack maintains the element of surprise as
the attached French platoon gives all outward ap-
pearances of driving against Hill 931, while the 1st
Battalion, 23rd Regiment, advances in the direction
leading to Hill 851. All the while, the 2nd Battalion
creeps quietly up the slopes of the real target, Hill
931, in a stealth move coordinated with the guns of
the 37th FABn, the latter awaiting the signal to com-
mence firing. Over the course of the operation, each
enemy bunker yet undestroyed is marked for obliv-
ion by the artillery. As the 2nd Battalion encroaches
the target, every available piece of artillery goes into
action, sending an enfilade of fire upon the slopes
with tremendous effectiveness. The mortars, which
had inflicted about eighty-five percent of the casu-
alties on the 23rd Regiment, begin to be silenced.
Meanwhile, the infantry charges toward the crest,
using flame throwers as they climb, taking out other
bunkers previously unmolested by the artillery. The
momentum of the charge stuns the defenders as the
2nd Battalion rolls forward like an assembly line to
finish the project with their rifles and grenades. The
attack continues in lop-sided fashion. The enemy is
unable to return any punishing fire. While the enemy
is being eliminated, the regiment sustains only light
casualties into the early morning hours of the 6th. By
about 0300, about one-half of the hill is controlled by
the 2nd Battalion. The enemy, however, still attempts
to thwart the inevitable. A strong counterattack is
 779 September 13, 1951

Two U.S. troops rush through heavy fire and smoke.

mounted. The 2nd Battalion, in anticipation of the
attack, is fully prepared and repulses it handily prior
to dawn.
At the crack of dawn on the 6th, still in the zone
of the 23rd Regiment, the attack is reinitiated. As
the 2nd and 3rd Battalions grind forward, a link is
made with the French battalion. Some resistance re-
mains, but the powerful thrust of the combined
strength of the three regiments clears the hill by
about noon.
Back in the 38th Regiment’s zone of operations,
after occupying Hill 485 on the 4th, the regiment’s
1st Battalion focuses on Hill 728, which it secures by
about noon. Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion moves
September 13, 1951
against Hill 636, which is secured on the following
day. The seizure of the two hills proves to be a key
achievement during the early stages of the operation.
It gives the 38th Regiment dominating positions
from which to shepherd the engineers while they
continue to complete the last leg of the pathway for
the tanks. And, it permits the 38th Regiment to pro-
vide an umbrella of cover fire.
In conjunction with the seizure of the second ob-
jective, Hill 636, the 72nd Tank Battalion is attached
to the 38th Regiment. The tankers, led by Lt. Col-
onel John O. Woods, assist the regiment in the quest
to seize several more targets, beginning with Hill 605
farther north and from there Hill 905–Hill 974,
which stretches northwest from Hill 636 to Hill
1220 along the Kim Il Sung Mountain range. In ad-
dition, Hill 841 north of Hill 974 falls into the zone
of the 38th Regiment.
On the 9th, from newly gained positions at Hill
960, northwest of Hill 867, the 9th Regiment con-
tinues to advance northwest to secure Hill 1005, be-
yond Hill 666. Some stubborn resistance occurs at the
objective as the troops close upon the crest, but the
close-quartered fighting rises to a crescendo of fury
following an order to fix bayonets. The cold steel of
the regiment’s bayonets overcomes the grenades and
burp guns of the defenders. The hill falls, further
shrinking the enemy’s tenacious stranglehold on the
high ground. In the meantime, the ROK 8th Divi-
sion, which is advancing against Hill 1050, pounces
upon it and secures it on 10 October.
By 10 October, the engineers finish the task of
removing the obstacles and laying the road, which
acts as a draw-bridge for the armor to plow deep into
the enemy’s lair, something totally unexpected by
the Communists. While the tanks of the 72nd Tank
Battalion surge forward, supported by a contingent
of engineers and an infantry detachment (Company
L), they stumble upon the vanguard of the Chinese
204th Division (68th Army) while they are leisurely
relieving elements of the N.K. V Corps in the vicin-
ity of the village of Mungdung-ni. Suddenly the
Communists come under an avalanche of fire that
totally catches them off-guard. As the Chinese break
for safer positions, the tank-infantry force pursues.
During the running fight, the troops sustain ca-
sualties as they bolt through Mungdung-ni, but the
Chinese sustain high casualties. During the ex-
change, the tanks continue to penetrate deeper and
in conjunction with the advance, the tanks are
spaced from where they can provide cover for one
another while simultaneously pounding the enemy
positions. The operation succeeds in severing the
enemy supply lines on the western side of Heart-
break Ridge.
The loss of the supply line also hampers the abil-
ity to bring in fresh troops, which adds another spike
into the enemy’s defenses, which are tumbling but
not yet toward a total collapse. As the tanks plow
forward, the 2nd Battalion, 38th Infantry, launches
780
an attack against Hill 605, but there, the enemy re-
fuses to budge.
Company L, 38th Regiment, encounters fierce re-
sistance in the vicinity of Mundung-ni. To break the
impasses and get the platoon on the advance,
Sergeant Tony K. Burris singlehandedly advances
through the fire to destroy the obstacle. Burris tosses
a bunch of grenades and takes out 15 of the enemy
force. The fighting continues into the following day,
while the 3rd Battalion presses ahead. On the 9th, at
the next ridge in the path, Burris again takes action
and leads a contingent to the crest, but he becomes
wounded en route. Upon reaching the summit, he is
again wounded. Undaunted, he stands to expose the
enemy position and provide guidance for a 57-mm
rifle team. The machine gun nest is quickly de-
stroyed.
The attack resumes, but Burris refuses evacuation.
He settles for emergency aid on the spot, then par-
ticipates in the attack. Again, a wall of enemy fire
stalls the advance. Burris, ignoring his wounds,
lunges forward to take on the machine gun nest and
he succeeds in destroying it and the 6-man crew. Af-
terward, Burris bolts to the next nest. He moves to
within grenade throwing range and tosses it to elim-
inate the nest, but in the process, enemy fire cuts
him down with a mortal wound. The remainder of
his command secures Hill 605 on Heartbreak Ridge.
Sergeant Tony Burris is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary heroism and
courage in the face of the enemy.
Also on the 9th, while Hill 605 falls to the 2nd
Battalion, the 1st Battalion strikes a fatal blow against
Hill 900 to bring it down and under the control of
the 38th Regiment. Nevertheless, in this region of
hills and more hills, the 38th Regiment remains on
the attack while the tanks scour the valley on a search
and destroy mission. Two other objectives remain in
the zone, Hills 974 and 1220 in the Kim II Sung
Mountain range. They fall on 12 and 15 October, re-
spectively.
The tanks make full use of the paths modified by
the engineers, roaring through the valley and inflict-
ing devastating punishment. Thanks to the light-
ning strikes of the 72nd Tank Battalion during five
brutal days, the enemy loses about 350 bunkers on
or near Heartbreak Ridge. The combined actions of
the 72nd Tank Battalion and TF Sturman in the
Mundung-ni and Sat’ae-ri Valleys respectively seal
the fate of the Communists by encircling Heartbreak
Ridge with an armored picket fence. The defenders
are left with no hope of relief and only two options:
surrender or fight to the last man. They choose the
latter.
On the 10th at Heartbreak Ridge, the 23rd Reg-
iment moves to dispose of the remaining resistance on
the final objective, Hill 851, which by this time is
defended by North Koreans and by Chinese elements
who had escaped the fury of the tanks near
Mungdung-ni. The 1st and 3rd Battalions, supported
 781
by the French Battalion, close the clamps on the ob-
stinate defenders who choose not to capitulate.
In conjunction with the attack to gain the hill,
the 2nd Battalion moves from Heartbreak Ridge to
Hill 520, slightly south of the village of Mungdung-
ni. However, some enemy forces still hold parts of
Hill 520. The hostile ground is to be seized by Com-
pany G. The 3rd Platoon is delegated as the unit to
spearhead the attack.
Company G, 2nd Battalion, led by Lt. Riddle
(acting commander) is bolstered by Companies E
and F. Company F is posted from where it can pass
through the positions of Company G to continue
the assault, and Company E is deployed nearby on
a separate ridge about 500 yards to the south. From
its positions, Company E is to provide cover fire.
One small hill stands between the attackers and the
target on the top of Hill 520, which is flat ground.
During the afternoon at about 1300— following an
artillery barrage, heavy machine gun fire and recoil-
less rifles that pound the hill — the platoon moves
hurriedly to the knoll under cover fire from other
elements of Company G. The number of defenders
remains unknown, making it difficult to determine
if one platoon is sufficiently strong enough to reduce
the resistance, but a direct attack is still considered
as the most effective route. The Fluor Spar Valley
there is inundated with mines.
The platoon, led by Corporal David W. Lamb,
comes under severe enemy fire, much of which orig-
inates on the south side of the hill, but the platoon
advances to the knoll unscathed. While maneuver-
ing to eliminate the enemy positions, the platoon is
forced to take incoming fire from the enemy, but
other dangers also lurk; friendly fire behind them is
also stroking the terrain.
One man, PFC Harry Schmidt, stands out amid
the platoon. He wears a bright yellow band around
his waist, marking him as a prime target, but essen-
tially, his daring is actually a beacon for the U.S. sup-
port weapons that follow the yellow band to identify
the exact location of the advancing platoon.
The enemy maintains their positions and as one
squad swings to the left side of the objective, enemy
fire brings it to a halt. After several of the troops are
wounded, a call is made for reinforcements. In the
meantime, the main body of the platoon comes
under more fire and some casualties are incurred at
the knob in front of the hill. The 1st Platoon, led
by Lt. Jay M. Gano, is thrown into the fight. How-
ever, Gano, new to the outfit, delegates temporary
command to Private Cliff R. High, who has been in
charge of the platoon, to maintain his position and
give Gano a little time to gather combat experience.
Nevertheless, as the 1st Platoon begins its sprint to-
ward the 3rd Platoon, several men are struck and
one is literally restrained by Private High. Mean-
while, the remainder of the platoon under Gano con-
tinues moving ahead until Gano is killed.
As the 1st Platoon stalls, without leadership, other
September 13, 1951
problems develop as the machine gun up front with
Corporal Lamb expends its ammunition at just about
the same time some North Koreans bolt from their
concealed bunkers on the hill. Urgent calls are placed
by Lamb and support fire pours upon the hill, but in-
effectively, striking above the enemy. As the platoon
members begin to withdraw, pursuit is given by the
Communists, but unexplainedly, they halt and head
back up the hill. Suddenly, the 3rd Platoon is ob-
scured by smoke and the objective is not visible ei-
ther. Lieutenant Riddle orders machine guns posted
at the jump-off point to commence firing at the sus-
pected positions on Hill 520 and the targets are ap-
parently hit effectively; word reaches Riddle that the
fire was on target.
Afterward, Private High again moves ahead with
the 1st Platoon, passing wounded troops who are
moving back toward the main line. Meanwhile, Cor-
poral Lamb is in the process of receiving more am-
munition. Both Lamb and High prepare to take the
next move to gain the hill; however, enemy fire still
pounds the positions to rack up more casualties.
With a combined strength of less than twenty men,
Lamb and High advance about thirty yards before
encountering machine gun fire, but the contingent
continues to push and fortuitously the fire is not
well-aimed.
As they cover about thirty remaining yards, the
enemy begins to use grenades, one of which wounds
Corporal Lamb. Before the attack can stall, one sol-
dier, Corporal Arne Severson, clasps his machine
gun and defies the fire. He advances with his weapon
blazing. The enemy takes Severson out with a
grenade just as he reaches the slope. Despite having
sustained two broken legs, a determined Severson is
able to establish a position from which he continues
to fire at the enemy. As the attack fails to make more
progress, Severson is retrieved by others and pulled
back to the main body.
Although progress remains slow and plagued with
complications, the remaining able-bodied men of
the two platoons launch a second assault to gain the
hill, and in the process, Private High is downed by
a grenade and knocked unconscious. His troops er-
roneously assume he had been killed and head back
to the line of departure, but soon they are astonished
to see High appear back at the line. A new attack is
prepared by Private High. The attack is initially bol-
stered by the arrival of three flame throwers. Unfor-
tunately, one of the men carrying the weapons is
wounded as the attack jumps off and the other two
turn out later to be inoperable, again leaving the task
of destroying the bunkers to the infantry.
Eventually, Private High and several others take
out an obstinate bunker (eastern side of the hill),
then move to the south side of the hill where other
enemy bunkers stall the attack. One particular
bunker remains unscathed despite intense efforts to
eliminate it. Although the bunker remains active, it
is kept at bay by riflemen. But yet another bunker
September 13, 1951
comes to life. Soon after, it is silenced by a grenade,
opening the way to the top of the hill. Amazingly,
Private Schmidt is still wearing his bright yellow
waistband as the troops ascend the hill. Three
bunkers are encountered, but each is unmanned.
Once the troops reach the top of the hill, eight
enemy troops are detected as they attempt to escape
to the northwest.
Soon after, on the north side of the hill, the enemy
command post is discovered. The troops also spot
eight soldiers there and quickly accept their surren-
der. At another bunker, not known to the Ameri-
cans, surprisingly, four troops emerge and surren-
der. Some of the defenders are able to escape, but
the hill itself falls to Company G at 1600 following
a harrowing three-hour battle.
While the 2nd Battalion takes and maintains the
security of Hill 520, the 1st Battalion, 23rd Regi-
ment and the French Battalion plod forward to re-
duce Hill 851. The cost is thirty casualties, most of
which are minor.
The North Koreans and Chinese desperately toil
to hold Hill 851, but their resources have weakened
greatly at Heartbreak Ridge since the opening of the
full offensive on 5 October. The 23rd Regiment,
which had sustained heavy casualties while bogged
down during the first couple of weeks, is exhibiting
ferocity as they advance. Although the hill in ques-
tion is but a speck of battered ground, to the 2nd
Division it is the summit to be gained in honor of all
the troops who had fallen there.
During the 11th and 12th, the 2nd Battalion and
the French contingent press ahead, again in small
but methodical steps, eliminating obstacles as they
move. In a coordinated maneuver, the 3rd Battal-
ion bolts to the east-west spur that stretches from
Hill 520 (held by the 1st Battalion) and the 2nd Bat-
talion’s objective, Hill 851, to threaten the hill from
the west and alert the enemy of their presence, to
again bolster the main attack. During the night of the
12th-13th, the two attacking battalions establish
night positions and prepare to reinitiate the advance
on the following day.
On 13 October, the North Koreans and the Chi-
nese defenders on Hill 851 are greeted at dawn by the
first glimmer of daylight and the uninvited French
Battalion, led by Lt. Colonel Ralph Monclar, which
pounces upon the foe and gains the coveted prize for
the 2nd Division.
The grim path to victory had taken thirty days,
most of which were consumed with horrendous
combat and horrific casualties on both sides, but in
the case of the enemy, they are much more severe.
The 2nd Division sustains more than 3,700 casual-
ties, with about 1,800 inflicted on the 23rd Regi-
ment (including the attached French contingent),
primarily from the deadly mortar fire that dominated
the ridges for weeks. The U.S. Army estimates that
about 25,000 casualties had been inflicted upon the
enemy at Heartbreak Ridge during the period 13
782
September through 15 October. The defending units
were composed of the N.K. 6th, 12th, and 13th Di-
visions and the Chinese 204th Division.
The 2nd Division had also been supported by
Fifth Air Force; however despite 842 sorties that de-
livered about 250 tons of bombs on suspected posi-
tions, the enemy had so brilliantly constructed the
bunkers that most were unscathed and had to be de-
stroyed by direct hits. Nevertheless, the air power
played a vital part in the victory by disrupting enemy
movements and assisting in suppressing enemy ar-
tillery. In the end, similarly as it had been through
the ages, it was the infantry that had to finally take
out the obstacles one by one.
For most of the world, Heartbreak Ridge will be
remembered as one more barren piece of valueless
ground in the Korean wilderness, but to the 2nd Di-
vision, it is not retained as a passing dreadful mem-
ory. Rather, it and the recently hard-fought contest
for Bloody Ridge will be indelibly etched in their
hearts. At a cost of nearly 4,000 casualties, for the 2nd
Division its losses had hallowed the ground on
Heartbreak Ridge. Operation TOUCHDOWN had
crumbled the resistance and carried the 2nd Divi-
sion across the finish line and helped to write the
newest chapter in its history.
With the capture of Heartbreak Ridge, the X
Corps sector is no longer under the observation of the
enemy and the lines in the sector are aligned with
IX Corps.
September 13 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 1st Marines jump off and advance
at 0900, six hours late due to a lack of sufficient am-
munition and supplies, as well as an ongoing evacuation
mission to get wounded Marines to medical facilities.
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, is relieved by
the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, south of Hill 749 (Ob-
jective Baker) at 1100. Afterward, the task of relieving
the remaining two companies begins. The North Ko-
reans are deeply entrenched in bunkers. The 7th
Marines are on the opposite slope of Hill 749, about
400 yards from where the 1st Marines expected the
troops to be, based on a report.
In the meantime, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, is
unable to push closer to its objective, Hill 751, because
of fire from enemy controlled Hill 749. Elements of
the 2nd Battalion continue to hold. At 1600, the ad-
vancing 3rd Battalion remains several hundred yards
short of the 2nd Battalion. Finally, at about 2025, the
two units are joined. However, the night does not re-
main calm. The Marines are subjected to mortar at-
tacks and several counterattacks. Hill 749 remains
under Communist control throughout the night.
In other activity, the Marines have had difficulty get-
ting re-supplied; however, on this date, the 1st Marines
receive a bonus, dubbed Operation WINDMILL. Just prior
to 1600, four choppers, transporting the landing point
section (20 by 40 feet), and soon after, seven helicopters
each transporting about 800 pounds of ammunition and
 783 September 13, 1951

A U.S. mortar team fires upon Hill 931, north of 894. It is the highest peak on what becomes known as
Heartbreak Ridge. The battle for the ridge continues from September 13 to October 15.
September 13, 1951 784

A contingent of the 2nd Division (Fire Direction and Control Team) are deployed from where they can
observe the crest of Hill 931 (Heartbreak Ridge).

supplies, depart to deliver to the 1st Marines. The 11th
Marines contributes to the historic operation by laying
smoke to help cover the flights as the choppers move at
low altitude.
The first chopper arrives at 1610 and the cargo, sus-
pended in a net, is unloaded. The chopper then takes
off, transporting five wounded Marines and two oth-
ers in litters. One of the Marines on the flight receives
medical attention back at X-83 within thirty minutes
after being wounded. The operation, which includes
 785
twenty-eight flights, ends in a space of two and one-half
hours. In addition, the Marines receive 18,848 pounds
of supplies and 74 wounded are evacuated. The
Marines had been working on such a transport system
since 1947, but this is its first trial, one that changes
military transport forever.
September 14 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the attack to secure Hill 749 continues.
At 0800, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 1st Marines, inch
forward against artillery, mortar and machine gun fire
to eliminate the North Koreans on the northern slope
of the hill. The concealed bunkers are slowly elimi-
nated one by one. During the engagement, PFC Ed-
ward Gomez, an ammunition bearer, moves forward
with a rifle squad to ensure his machine gun is sup-
plied with ammunition. An enemy grenade is tossed
into the area containing Gomez and other Marines of
Company E, 2nd Battalion. To save the others, Gomez
grabs the grenade and throws himself in the trench to
take the full shock of the grenade. Gomez survives and
becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his ac-
tions, above and beyond the call of duty.
While the 2nd Battalion gains only about 325 yards,
it is sufficient to give the 3rd Battalion breathing room
to surge to the crest of Hill 751. The day’s grueling
pace does not totally eliminate the resistance north of
Hill 749.
In Air Force activity, a plane attached to the 8th Bom-
bardment Group Squadron, 3rd Bomber Group, exe-
cutes strikes against an enemy train in the vicinity of
Yangdok. The pilot of the B-26, Captain John S.
Walmsley, Jr., scores damage, but the train, laden with
supplies, is not destroyed and Walmsley’s ammunition
had been expended. Rather than depart the area, he
calls for assistance and another B-26 arrives. Walmsley
stays and uses his searchlight (experimentally attached
to his plane) to illuminate the target. He dives in at ex-
tremely low altitude, making his aircraft a lucrative tar-
get, so he can blast the area with his searchlight. Walm-
sley makes the pass but is hit by enemy fire and he
crashes into a mountain. Captain Walmsley is awarded
the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary heroism
above and beyond the call of duty. (See also September
13–October 15 1951 THE BATTLE OF HEARTBREAK
RIDGE.)
September 15 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 1st Marines,
prepare again to knock out the resistance that contin-
ues to impede progress, but the North Koreans seem
to have an endless supply of ammunition and countless
concealed log bunkers. An artillery bombardment is
requested to precede the assault of the 2nd Battalion,
but the enemy guns are not silenced. Once again, the
Marines advance at 1710, but they come under walls of
fire. The crossfire is so intense, the Marines are forced
to withdraw under cover fire of the 11th Marines’ ar-
tillery. The enemy tactic (crossfire) is dubbed the
“North Korean T Formation.”
In related activity, the 5th Marines move from the
September 16, 1951
Hays Line into position to pass through the 3rd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, on the 16th. In the meantime, Com-
pany F, 2nd Battalion, engages a strong entrenched
force on Hill 749. A forward platoon is hit with over-
whelming strength and compelled to pull back. Corpo-
ral Joseph Vittori and two others, during the with-
drawal, race through the retreating column to engage
the advancing enemy. The trio encounters a force and
in a close-quartered fight, the Marines prevail.
At that time, an un-manned machine gun is covered
by Vittori. He moves from point to point to cover the
flanks and pours fire upon the enemy, while Marine
casualties continue to climb. Nonetheless, Vittori, mor-
tally wounded, holds his ground.
The 1st Korean Marine Regiment and the Division
Recon Company are to assume responsibility for the
5th Marines’ vacated positions along the Hays Line. At
midnight (15th-16th), the 2nd Battalion is nearly
smothered by a forceful assault, but the Marines meet
the attack with even more ferociousness. The battle
continues into the daylight hours. Meanwhile, the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines, near Hill 751 comes under a
tenacious attack.
In the ROK 8th Division zone along the left flank,
the entire division moves against enemy-held Hill 854.
Some progress is made as the South Koreans force one
of the three defending North Korean battalions to
abandon their positions during the contest that con-
tinues into the following day.
In Air Force activity, General Otto P. Weyland in-
forms General Vandenberg that the continuing growth
of the strength of the Communists (Russian and Chi-
nese) in the air is reaching epidemic proportions. At
this time, the Air Force still does not have enough Sabre
jets to counter the threat due to Washington’s refusal to
provide more planes. Weyland proclaims that the Com-
munists are in position to expand MiG Alley straight
down to Pyongyang if they are not stopped.
During the month of September, FEAF loses three
F-86 Sabre jets, one P-51 Mustang, one F-80, and one
F-84. Intelligence has ascertained that the Communists
(with the belief they have greatly weakened the U.S.
Air Force) have initiated a massive program to restore
the airfields in North Korea. If the work is completed,
MiG Alley would be expanded to the point that the
Communists would be fighting for air superiority.
More Sabres are not forthcoming, but an operation to
destroy the airfields will be initiated. The first three
fields, strung between MiG Alley and Pyongyang, be-
come the first priority. The fields are Namsi, Taechon,
and Saamcham. Subsequent reports by the Chinese in-
dicate that the three fields come under 119 attacks.
September 16 General Van Fleet arrives in the
2nd Division sector and the 1st Marine Division sec-
tor to confer with the commanders and to check on the
condition and morale of the units. At this time, Van
Fleet instructs the respective Corps commanders to
“firm up his line by 20 September and to plan no fur-
ther offensives after that date.”
September 17, 1951
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, at one
minute after midnight (15th-16th), the Marines are
alerted to another night without sleep as Communist
artillery begins to ring the perimeter of the 2nd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines. The booming sounds of 76-mm, 105s
and 122-mm shells are accompanied by mortar fire.
The screeching sounds of North Korean whistles and
blaring bugles signal the arrival of yet another night at-
tack. The exhausted Marines, still able to fight despite
their diminished numbers from casualties, become gal-
vanized. The ground runs red as the Communists come
against the lines in successive waves. The Communists
penetrate, slightly against weaker parts of the line, but
as the Marines there are compelled to give some ground,
one man, Corporal Joseph Vittori, plows through the
line of retreat to lead a counterattack. In addition, Vit-
tori bolts from one foxhole to the next to man machine
guns , while others there fall from wounds. Neither
Vittoli, nor the other Marine are willing to become the
vanquished. Every wave that strikes is shattered and by
0400, the North Korean force, estimated at regimen-
tal strength, temporarily runs out of troops for the next
wave.Corporal Vittoli is killed during the final min-
utes of the fight. When Corporal Vittori’s body is re-
covered, more than 200 dead Communists are counted
at his front. Corporal Vittori is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary courage in
the face of the enemy.
The North Koreans also strike the 3rd Battalion po-
sitions at Hill 751. This attack also occurs slightly after
midnight, but not with the same intensity. Neverthe-
less, the attacking force of about 150 troops is also re-
pelled. Later, at 0830, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines,
moves out to pass through the 2nd Battalion to finish
the fight. Enemy resistance along the ridge line run-
ning to Hill 749 still has a powerful punch. Nonethe-
less, the 1st Battalion plows forward in yet one more
grueling day of combat. At 1800, it concludes. Hill
749 (Objective Baker) is secured. The Marines estab-
lish night positions with both Hill 749 and 751 in their
possession. Lt. Colonel Horace E. Knapp had been
wounded and evacuated on the previous day. He had
been replaced on this day by Lt. Colonel John E. Gor-
man.
Also, during the first part of the afternoon, the 5th
Marines commence an attack to seize Objective Dog,
a hill mass about 1,000 yards distant. The attack is
spearheaded by Company F, 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, which drills forward on a path that runs be-
tween Hill 680 and 673 (Kanmubong Ridge) and leads
directly into yet another enemy crossfire. The advance,
short of the objective, is halted at 1700 to evacuate
wounded and get a well-needed pause.
Another unit, Company, D, requests a signal to
identify the positions of Company H. A white phospho-
rous grenade is used; however, planes on a mission to
strike enemy-held Hill 980 on Kanmubong Ridge mis-
take the signal as a target location. Company H is
struck by napalm and strafing machine gun fire. No
casualties are incurred thanks to a last-minute recogni-
786
tion panel that is spotted in the nick of time. By this
time, it is too late to reinitiate the attack. It is sus-
pended until 0400 on the following day.
During the four-day contest to secure Objective
Baker (Hill 749), the Marines sustain 90 killed, 714
wounded and 1 missing. The North Koreans lose 771
killed (counted) and 81 POWs; however the estimate
of enemy killed is reported as more than twice the num-
ber counted. There will be no pause for relaxation for
the Marines.
In Naval activity, one of the jets (F2H) crash lands
on the carrier USS Essex (CV 9), causing damage and
loss of life. Four men are missing, three are killed and
27 others sustain injuries.
In other activity, the Photo Unit, 1st Marine Air-
craft Wing, relocates from Pusan to Yongil Man, Korea.
September 17 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 5th Marines reinitiate the attack to
secure Hill 812. The attack, scheduled for 0400, is
postponed until 0700. The vanguard again is Com-
pany F and the delay in jumping off, surprisingly, gives
the Marines an advantage. The enemy is spotted while
still eating breakfast. At about the same time, the po-
sitions are sent to the 11th Marines and an artillery
bombardment prompts the Communists to abort the
meal. The attacking unit advances swiftly until it gets
caught in the expected crossfire. At about 0830, Com-
pany E leap-frogs ahead with one platoon of Company
F. Air strikes are requested, but again no planes arrive.
By 1100, progress remains extremely slow. Lt. Col-
onel Stiff concludes that it will take a full-powered push
to win the prize. Bolstered by a preliminary artillery
bombardment, the platoon from Company F lunges
against the flank, while Company E plows straight
ahead. The enemy is totally unprepared along the flank
and the attack severs the resistance there. Within about
thirty-six minutes, the Marines climb to the summit
and following gruesome, close-quartered fighting, the
Marines prevail. The quest for Hill 812 proves to be
the spear that pierces the spine of the resistance.
From Hill 812, Company E bolts westward along
the ridgeline that links with Hill 980 and prepares to
seize it, but permission is denied because the North
Koreans still hold Hill 1052 and from there, the new
prize would be imperiled. Company E is directed to
withdraw 600 yards toward Hill 680. In the meantime,
while the Marines establish defensive positions, the
enemy left at Hill 980 continues to shell the perimeter
in conjunction with enemy-held Hill 1052. Company
E holds along the ridgeline that leads to Hill 980, while
Company F deploys around Hill 812. Meanwhile, the
1st Marines hold the area north of Hill 751, but the
regiment is not linked to the 2nd Battalion.
September 18–21 1951 In the X Corps
area, 1st Marine Division sector, pursuant to Operation
Order 27–51, Hill 854 is to be secured, either by re-
lief of the ROK 8th Division if it is in their hands or
by attack, if still controlled by the Communists dur-
ing the operation to relieve the South Koreans. The
 787
On 18 September, Sherman M4 tanks bolster the 2nd Division in the vicinity of Hill 1179 (Taeu-san)
near Pia-ri. By 21 September, the 2nd Division sector stabilized, but fighting did not cease.
1st Marine Division begins to stretch its line farther
east to relieve the ROK 8th Division in a complex
troop reformation. The ROK 8th Regiment, after
being relieved, is to in turn relieve the ROK 5th Di-
vision on the far left. Afterward, the ROK 5th Divi-
sion is to redeploy in a newly created zone to the left
of the 1st Marine Division. The operation is com-
pleted by 21 September.
The North Koreans still control much of Hill 854,
giving the Marines the task of clearing the remain-
ing resistance there. On the 20th, the 1st Battalion,
1st Marines, relieves two battalions of the ROK 10th
Regiment near Hill 854 without incident; however,
eleven casualties are incurred due to friendly mines.
The Marines move ahead using maps from the ROKs
that fail to correctly identify where mines had been
placed. In addition, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines
relieves two battalions of the 21st ROK Regiment.
The 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, schedules an attack
to clear the southwest ridgeline for the afternoon;
however, it is postponed due to lack of expected air
cover. Slightly after 1700, the battalion jumps off
and it also becomes victimized by friendly mines just
as Company H reaches a point about fifty yards from
the line of departure. One man is killed and another
is wounded. Consequently, the attack is suspended
to await engineers who can eliminate the problem.
The attack is reinitiated on the following day. In the
meantime, the Marines direct the ROKs to find the
mines they planted and eliminate them.
September 18 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, come under
attack at 0430. Company E’s positions are hit hard, com-
pelling the unit to give some ground. The Commu-
September 19, 1951
nists launch another assault at 0840, but it fails. The
North Koreans maintain constant artillery bombard-
ments against the Marine positions throughout the day.
The 1st Marine Division reports casualties for this day
as 16 killed and 98 wounded. Most of the day’s casual-
ties are sustained by the 2nd Battalion. Other than the
artillery fire, the day remains tranquil. The Marines also
pass the night (18–19) with little activity. Nonetheless,
at dawn, the Communists break the silence.
In Naval activity, CTG 95.9 (attached to CTF 95)
initiates a two-day mission against Wonsan. The enemy
positions in the area are attacked by planes as well as
naval surface guns and rockets. The British carrier
HMS Glory (CVL) had moved from the east coast of
Korea to the west coast to participate in this mission.
September 19 In the Eighth Army area, Fifth
Air Force executes missions to support the crossing of
the Naktong River near Waegwan by the 24th Divi-
sion. Also, The 1st Cavalry Division crashes through the
enemy lines.
In the X Corps sector, the entire line, except for the sec-
tor covered by the 2nd Division, is now stable. (See
also, September 13–October 15 1951 THE BATTLE
OF HEARTBREAK RIDGE.)
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the enemy still con-
trols Hills 980 and 1052. Between the two hills and
the Marines stands “The Rock,” a 12-foot-high gran-
ite knob on the ridgeline about 700 yards west of Hill
812. The North Koreans hold the western side, while
the Marines hold the top and the eastern side. The
northern slope is the only area able to provide some
protection to the Marines.
The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, desperately need
sand bags, barbed wire and other items. Thanks to new
September 20, 1951
additions, in the afternoon the Transport Helicopter
Squadron has 10 helicopters execute 16 flights to de-
liver more than 12,000 pounds in about one hour.
In other activity, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, re-
lieves the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 1st Marines, then de-
ploy to the right of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines.
The 1st Battalion’s line extends eastward along the ridge
toward the Soyang-gang. In conjunction, during the
day, the Marines continue to fortify their positions,
hindered primarily by long-range artillery fire.
In other activity, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, reini-
tiates the mission to clear Hill 854. In what has become
habitual, the requested planes, due to arrive at 0700,
arrive overhead at 1040. The four Air Force F-15s strike
their targets and leave the area. At 1220, subsequent to
an artillery barrage, Company H again leads the way.
Enemy resistance remains firm, prompting the vanguard
to request another air strike; however, the Marine Air
Wing is not in direct coordination with the Marines.
Fifth Air Force planes never arrive. Absent the air strikes,
the Marines call upon the artillery and mortars.
The advance remains sluggish against the ferocious
resistance, but the Marines grind forward toward the
peak. At 1745, word is passed back from Company H
that the hill is under Marine control. The battle for
Hill 854, which erupted on the previous day, cost the
3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, 64 casualties, including
those affected by friendly mines and of the total, nine
are killed. The Communists’ dead, according to actual
count at the hill, amounts to 159. The additional num-
ber of killed and wounded, estimated by the Marine
Corps, stands at 150 and 225, respectively.
Also, Marine Fighter Squadron 323 (VMF 323) de-
An enemy bunker after being reduced by the 7th Marines. An enemy casualty is on the lower left. Also,
the tree fragments are casualties of Marine artillery.
788
parts the USS Sicily (CVE 118) en route to Kangnung,
from where it will reinitiate land-based operations.
In Naval activity, the USS Toledo (CA 133), the USS
Craig (DD 885) and USS Parks (DD 884) initiate a bom-
bardment of enemy positions at Wonsan, prior to an air
strike by planes attached to the HMS Glory (CVL).
September 20 This date marks a significant
turning point in the war. The strategy for the remain-
der of the conflict changes from a war consumed with
perpetual movement to a conflict based on position. It
had long ago been decided in Washington, D.C., not
to fight for complete victory and now as the Eighth
Army has achieved extraordinary success and is begin-
ning to peak, defensive lines become the new way of
conducting the war. As of this day, X Corps is to cease
offensive attacks and according to General Van Fleet’s
order of 18 September, to “firm up the existing line
and to patrol vigorously in front of it.” Meanwhile, the
IX Corps remains engaged at Heartbreak Ridge.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, at
0315, the North Koreans strike the Marine positions on
the eastern side of “The Rock” as part of a plan to re-
gain Hill 812. The enemy initially pounds the area with
artillery and mortar fire, but right after, the Commu-
nists close against a platoon of Company E, 2nd Bat-
talion. The Marines ignore the fire of the burp guns
and grenades and mount a counterattack, but the North
Koreans push the platoon back. The Communists oc-
cupy the lost ground and take aim on Company E.
Another counterattack is mounted at 0500. Company
E drives directly into the enemy’s front while Company
F duplicates its strategy at Hill 812 and strikes the
 789
Marines on Hill 884 receive supplies on 20 September, delivered by a Sikorsky helicopter.
Communists’ flank. The North Koreans are caught off
guard by 2nd Platoon’s strike against their flank. The
resistance vaporizes as the Communists bolt for their side
(west) of The Rock. The North Koreans lose 60 killed.
By this date, the Marines, since the operation began
on 11 September, have secured three of the four ob-
jectives; however, Objective Charlie, the ridgeline in
the 1st Korean Marine Regiment zone, northwest of
Hill 1052, still needs to be seized. As the Marines pre-
pare to take the remaining objectives, everything
changes and quite suddenly. Division Operation Order
26–51 places an immediate halt to offensive operations.
As it turns out, the fight for The Rock becomes the
final chapter in the nine-day battle and it is the last
“action of mobility” for the Marines in Korea.
September 21, 1951
In Naval activity, the USS Orleck (DD 886) bom-
bards enemy positions at Wonsan. Targets hit include
an ammunition depot and one sampan. A directive is
received by Fast Carrier Task Force (TF-77) that 20
September is the final day the task force will be required
to supply close-air support missions.
In other activity, Marine Squadron VMF-323 ar-
rives at Itami Air Base, Japan, from the USS Sicily. The
squadron will depart for Korea on the 24th and begin
operation from Pusan.
September 21 Operation SUMMIT In the X Corps
sector, at Hill 884, the Marines introduce a new tactic of
getting troops from an assembly area to the front. At
1030, after a one-half hour delay due to fog, a contingent
September 21, 1951
of Marines attached to the 1st Shore Party Battalion is
transported by helicopter to Hill 884 to clear two sepa-
rate landing sites to receive what becomes the first fight-
ing force delivered by helicopter to a battlefield.
Two helicopters, each transporting one team, hover
over their respective landing sites, which stand about
100 yards from each other at a point on the hill several
hundred yards from the crest. The Marines assigned to
the task, using knotted ropes that dangle dangerously
from the helicopters, slither about thirty feet down the
ropes during high winds. The initial part of the oper-
ation succeeds within about forty minutes.
These are the only two sites on the hill capable of
handling such an operation. Each encompasses an area
of about 50 square feet and both contain two sides of
the landing space that terminate at a sheer cliff. Within
minutes after the sites are cleared, the waiting helicop-
ters of HMR-161 zoom into action at Field X-83. With
An M16 multiple-gun motor carriage maneuvers through mud in the vicinity of Kumsong on 21 Sep-
tember. Infantry in the background and a jeep move in opposite directions.
790
the exception of some temporary minor communication
problems between X-83 and the landing point team, the
operation is flawless. Within three and one-half hours
(flight time), 224 Marines and almost 18,000 pounds
of supplies and equipment are transported about four-
teen miles and delivered to the battlefield.
One contingent includes a heavy machine gun pla-
toon from the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines. The well-
oiled operation brings a helicopter above the respec-
tive landing sites every thirty seconds and the time
spent there hovering averages about twenty seconds,
while five Marines with full gear descend the ropes.
The identical trip without the use of the helicopters
would have taken fourteen hours and required supplies
to be carried by laborers.
The final part of the mission, the task of laying a
telephone line between the Reconn Company on Hill
854 and the 1st Marines command post about eight
 791
miles to the rear of the hill, is also a success. The time
to lay each line takes about fifteen minutes.
General Byers, USA, X Corps commander, is among
many who congratulate HMR-161 and the participants
in the operation. Byers commentst: “Your imaginative
experiment with this kind of transport is certain to be of
lasting value to all the services.” Another commenting on
the tremendous achievement is Major General Gerald C.
Thomas, who remarks: “Operation SUMMIT, the first hel-
icopter borne landing of a combat unit in history was an
outstanding success. To all who took part, well done.”
The team responsible for the blueprint that had to be
created within a twenty-four hour period included
Lieutenant Colonel George W. Herring (commanding
officer of HMR-161); Lt. Colonel William C. Mitchell
(Herring’s executive officer); Major Ephraim Kirby
Smith (Reconn Company CO) and Lt. Richard C.
Higgs (acting division embarkation officer).
The French Battalion attached to the U.S. 2nd Division occupies Hill 931 (Heartbreak Ridge) on 23 Sep-
tember.
September 23, 1951
In the 1st Marines zone, an enemy force launches a
probing assault against the lines of Company G, 3rd
Battalion, during the early morning hours. The attack
is repelled; however, during the fight, a grenade is
tossed into a foxhole occupied by Corporal Jack Dav-
enport and one other Marine. Davenport, in an effort
to save the other Marine’s life, takes the brunt of the ex-
plosion by covering the grenade with his body. Cor-
poral Davenport is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his courage under fire and his selfless
sacrifice to save the life of another.
In Naval activity, Marine Squadron VMF-212 de-
parts Itami Base, Japan, aboard the USS Rendova.
September 23 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the Marine Reconnaissance Company
deployed at Hill 884 is relieved by the 1st Marines.
In other activity, Marines in forward observation
September 25, 1951
posts place a call to the Navy and the USS New Jersey
responds. Enemy positions that had been spotted by
the observers are struck by the big 16-inch guns of the
New Jersey (BB-62), which hits its targets more than
twenty miles away. The 2,000-pound shells destroy
ammunition depots, artillery positions and troop for-
mations. The Marine patrols also receive hefty support
from the artillery of the 1st Marine Division and U.S.
Army units that are attached, which add extra punch to
the patrols.
The North Koreans are greeted by the New Jersey a
few additional times when called by the 1st and 3rd
Battalions, 1st Marines, while on patrol through the
end of the month. This is the first use of the Navy’s
guns in support of the 1st Marine Division since the lat-
ter part of 1950. The naval bombardments are some-
times able to break up counterattacks before they can
be initiated. The Marines are appreciative of the naval
fire power supporting them along their front, which is
spread about thirteen miles in the mountains of the
Korean wilderness and partly northwest of the Punch
Bowl, where it linked with the ROK 5th Division.
In Air Force activity, a group of eight B-29 Super-
fortressess, attached to the 19th Bomber Group, strike
and destroy the center span of the Sunch’on rail bridge.
The bombers use the SHORAN bomb system (airborne
radar device coordinated with two ground beacon sta-
tions), which prove to be unaffected by the extremely
heavy cloud cover.
September 25 In Naval activity, a contingent of
F-84s spot sixteen MiG-15s near Sinanju, but no fight
erupts. Later a larger group, composed of 36 F-84s,
encounters 16 MiG-15s in the same general area and
yet another group of 37 F-84s encounters about 100
MiG-15s. Combat ensues and the carrier planes report
the destruction of five MiGS and five others damaged.
The carrier planes sustain one plane damaged.
In Air Force activity, the Chinese reinitiate their par-
ticipation in the air battles. They (with 32 MiGS) join
with the Russians to increase the number of MiGS
against the already outnumbered Sabre jets of the
Americans. Far East Air Forces planes, while on the at-
tack to destroy bridges at the Ch’ongch’on River bat-
tle, come under attack. During the following month,
ten separate air battles occur between Chinese pilots in
their MiGS and Americans in their Sabres. Afterward
the Chinese will report the destruction of 20 downed
American planes and another 10 damaged. These
records show a marked difference from those main-
tained by Far East Air Forces, which for the identical pe-
riod report 40 MiGs destroyed and U.S. losses at seven
F-86s, two F-84s, five B-29s, and one RF-80.
A contingent of the 336th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, led by
Major Richard D. Creighton, is one of the units that
encounter the enemy this day. Creighton spots one
MiG and attacks. The MiG becomes damaged and
Creighton again fires to bring the plane down in the
vicinity of Anju.
792
September 27 General Matthew Ridgway sug-
gests (to the Chinese Communists) that site of cease
fire talks be relocated from Kaesong to a site near the
No-Man’s Land village of Songhyon.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, heli-
copters again take combat troops to the front. A day-
time exercise is initiated in preparation for a genuine
movement after dark. Subsequent to dark, Operation
BLACKBIRD commences. Six helicopters (HRS-1) lift
Company E, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, from a dry
stream bed in the vicinity of Hill 702 and transport
the unit (more than 200 troops) to the northwestern
rim of the Punch Bowl. The landing site, encompass-
ing an area of 50 by 100 feet, is prepared by the 1st
Shore Party Battalion. The entire operation, including
a round-trip of 13 miles, takes place in less than two and
one-half hours, despite traveling a circuitous route to
prevent the enemy from observing the operation.
After the troops arrive and begin the one-mile march
to the front, one Marine is wounded by a mine. Shortly
thereafter, it is determined that the entire area is mined,
causing the march to be aborted. The operation expe-
rienced other problems. The pilots had been temporar-
ily blinded by the glare on their windshields and the
trip through the mountain passes became dangerous
due to the nasty terrain and the artillery flashes. After
assessing the results, it was concluded that transferring
troops during darkness would be restricted to friendly
territory. Operation BLACKBIRD is the only time troops
are lifted in the darkness during the entire conflict.
In Air Force activity, a C-124A Globemaster aircraft,
during an operation known as PELICAN, transports its
initial cargo, 30,000 pounds of aircraft parts, from
Japan to Kimpo Airfield in Korea.
September 28 In Air Force activity, a reconnais-
sance plane (RF-80) remains in the air for slightly more
than fourteen straight hours on a combat mission over
Korea, thanks to airborne fuel tankers. The RF-80,
while in flight, is refueled repeatedly by two separate
KB-29M tankers.
In Naval activity, the HMAS Murchison, while mov-
ing along the Han River, comes under fire from ar-
tillery, mortars and small arms. The vessel sustains some
slight damage and one man is wounded.
September 29 In the United States: The draft
numbers for the month of November are elevated on
this day from 33,700 to 39,000. The Marines will take
10,000 for November and for the following month,
9000.
September 30 General Van Fleet proclaims in a
statement the reasoning for his strategy: “My basic mis-
sion during the past four months has been to destroy the
enemy, so that the men of Eighth Army will not be de-
stroyed.” Van Fleet states that it is “imperative” to elim-
inate as many weapons as possible and “mandatory”
that the high ground be controlled. By controlling the
high ground at the cost of “losing a comparative few, we
saved other thousands.” Van Fleet notes that Eighth
 793
A B-26 bomber on a mission over North Korea.
Army estimates of enemy casualties from 25 May
through 25 September amounts to 188,237. At the
close of his statement, General Van Fleet notes: “The
Communist forces in Korea (as the Eighth Army au-
tumn campaign begins) are not liquidated, but they are
crippled.”
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines have, since the 20th, been under orders to restrict
their actions to patrols. However, from the 20th until
this day, the Marines have exhibited no passiveness. Ca-
sualties for the period include 59 killed, 331 wounded
and 1 missing. Enemy losses number 505 killed (counted)
and 2327 prisoners. Marine casualties for September
stand at 1,822, and the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regi-
ment has sustained 594. North Korean losses for Sep-
tember stand at 2,799 killed (counted) and 557 prison-
ers.
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General Joe W. Kelly
assumes command of Far East Air Forces Bomber Com-
mand. He succeeds Brigadier General Robert H. Terrill.
October During this month, the U.N. forces
in Korea at the maximum reaches 236,871, U.S.
Army; 21,020, Fifth Air Force; 30,913, U.S. Marines
(including 5,386 officers and enlisted men of the 1st
Marine Air Wing). The ROK forces total 286,000
troops and from other nations, the combined total
equals 32,172. The forces are composed of four corps
and fourteen divisions deployed along a front that
extends about 123 miles across the Korean penin-
sula. Enemy forces along the front total 600,000
men, including reserves and units deployed to fill in
as reinforcing units.
October 1951
In numbers, each side hovers around 600,000;
however on the field, the enemy greatly exceeds the
U.S.-U.N. forces, because more than twenty five per-
cent of the Allied forces are behind the lines in du-
ties such as maintenance and administration.
In the Eighth Army sector, the units are essentially
operating on a defensive mode.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
activity is limited to patrols. The activity for the
entire month is greatly reduced from previous
months, so much so that Division, rather than main-
tain a daily diary, merely splits the month into two
parts. Nonetheless, while the enemy continues to
evade, when contact is made, they are engaged. The
ratio of casualties for October stands at 20 to 1
in favor of the Marines. During the previous month,
the ratio had been 4 to 1. In Air Force activity, by
this time the Communists are building their confi-
dence in the air, with flights being initiated
by Russian and Chinese pilots. Meanwhile, the U.S.
air strength remains at a disadvantage due to the
shortage of Sabres. The shortage, however, does not
prevent the FEAF from continuing its missions.
On this day, the MiGs intercept a flight of Sabres
and lose two against no U.S. losses during the ongo-
ing campaign to destroy or damage North Korean
airfields.
In related activity, a contingent of four F-86 Sabre
jets, attached to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group
and led by Lieutenant George L. Jones, encounters
and engages a pair of M-15 MiGs in the vicinity of
Tokch’on this morning. Jones downs one of the
MiGs.
October 2, 1951 794

October 2 In Naval activity, Task Element 95.11 dition, spotter planes are to be provided for the warships
that are bombarding enemy positions in the vicinity of
(Task Group 95) receives orders directing its aircraft to
Han Point.
initiate the daily bombing of the area along the north-
In Air Force activity, during Operation SNOWBALL
ern bank of the Han River west of Yesong Gang. In ad-
on October 1–3, C-119s,
attached to the 315th Air
Division, test a new tac-
tic. The planes drop 5-
gallon drums of napalm
behind enemy lines.
In air combat between
F-86 Sabre jets and Com-
munist MiGs, the Com-
munists lose six planes.
One of the MiGs is
downed about 15 miles
east of Uiju by Colonel
Francis S. Gabreski, the
commanding officer of the
4th Fighter Interceptor
Wing. Another MiG is
downed by Colonel
George J. Ola, 4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group. The
U.S. sustains no losses.
Also, Captain Paul W.
Bryce, Jr. (4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group) finds
two MiGs on either side
of his F-86 just as he is
departing the area near
Chongju at about 1500.
Bryce begins to climb,
moving directly toward
the enemy planes, and
passes the one of the
MiGs so closely that his
Sabre jet begins to vibrate
violently, but as he passes,
the MiG sustains greater
shock and the plane
breaks up. Bryce had not
fired his machine guns.
The enemy pilot is ob-
served ejecting from his
plane before it crashes.
Captain George W.
Dunn of the 334th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron, 4th
Fighter-Interceptor
Group, spots a trio of
three MiGs taking two
other Sabres under attack
near Sonchon. Dunn
drives into the MiGs, lets
go with a long burst of
machine gun fire and
General Matthew Ridgway (commander-in-chief, U.N.), on left, confers with strikes one of the enemy
Major General Claude B. Ferenbaugh, commander 7th Infantry Division on 2 planes in the wing and
October. fuselage. The enemy pilot
 795
attempts to evade Dunn, but to no avail. Dunn stays on
his tail and again opens fire. The burst pounds the
cockpit and afterward, the MiG still remains in flight,
momentarily. The plane begins to climb, but soon after,
it rolls to the left, then spins uncontrollably and crashes.
On this same day, Dunn, still leading his flight, en-
counters another band at a point about 15 miles south-
east of the Sui Ho Reservoir. He engages a damaged
MiG and downs it to receive one-half of a victory, shar-
ing it with his wingman, who damaged the plane and
then passed it without being able to finish it off.
October 3 In the I Corps sector, Operation COM-
MANDO commences. Major General (later Lieutenant
General) John W. O’Donnell, in command of I Corps
since relieving General Milburn, directs the operation,
which is intended to fortify the defensive line and se-
cure the Jamestown Line. In addition, the operation is
designed to improve the rail lines from Seoul to Ch’or-
won and Kumwa. The operation is completed success-
fully by 15 October.
In Air Force activity, a flight of F-80s attached to the
8th Bomber wing are intercepted by a band of MiGs
while on a mission. The pilots report a probable three
MiGs downed against no U.S. losses. In Naval activity,
Operation RETRIBUTION commences. The HMS Black
Swan (PF) moves up the Han River to draw fire, while
11 planes of TE 95 lurk nearby. Once the enemy ex-
poses its positions, the planes swoop down and plaster
the positions, inflicting damage to the defenses and ca-
sualties to the Communists troops.
October 4 In the X Corps sector, the 2nd Division
is engaged in fierce fighting in the area west of the
Punch Bowl.
October 5 In Naval activity, the USS Firecrest
(AMS 10), while operating off Hungnam, receives fire
from shore batteries. No casualties are sustained, but
the vessel has some slight damage. In related activity,
Task Element 77.14, composed of the USS New Jersey
(BB 62), USS Helena (CA 75), USS Small (DD 838)
and the USS Hanson (DD 832), bombard enemy po-
sitions in the Hamhung–Hungnam area. The mission
is the first naval bombardment of the area since X Corps
troops abandoned it in December.
In Air Force activity, a four-plane contingent of F-86s,
336th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group, led by Major Richard D. Creighton,
encounter a band of three MiG-15s near Taech’on.
Creighton downs on plane. The MiG crashes but the
pilot ejects.
October 6 In Air Force activity, a four-plane pa-
trol of F-86s, attached to the 336th Fighter-Intercep-
tor Squadron (4th Fighter-Interceptor Group) come
under attack in the vicinity of Sinanju by a large force
of MiG-15s. Lieutenant Arthur L. O’Connor moves
against the six enemy planes that are firing at two Sabre
jets below his plane. He leads his element into the mid-
dle of the fight to disrupt the MiG air attack and he
then moves against the MiGs that are attacking a con-
October 11, 1951
tingent of B-26 bombers who arrive on target. During
the tenacious fight, O’Connor’s wingman’s aircraft gets
hit and he attempts to pull back, with MiGs on his tail.
O’Connor disengages his dog fight and heads to pro-
tect his wingman. Once again O’Connor is able to dis-
rupt the enemy. Several of the MiGs are damaged, but
none are downed. O’Connor and his wingman make it
safely back to their base.
In Naval activity, a contingent of friendly guerrillas
operating on the west coast of Korea near Pungchon
withdraws under some protective fire from a British
warship, the HMS Amethyst.
October 7 In Naval activity, Rear Admiral J.J.
Clark, commanding officer Carrier Division 5, replaces
Rear Admiral John Perry (commander Carrier Divi-
sion 1) as commander, Fast Carrier Task Force 77. The
USS Ernest G. Small (DD 838) sustains heavy damage
after striking a mine off Hungnam. Nine crewmen are
killed and 18 others are wounded.
October 8 In Air Force activity, in one encounter
with MiGs, a Sabre jet knocks one down. No losses are
sustained by the U.S. unit.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral C.F. Espe, USN, re-
places Rear Admiral T.B. Hill as commander, Amphibi-
ous Group 1 and Amphibious Task Force 90.
October 9 Sergeant Tony Burris, 38th Regiment,
2nd Division, is killed during action against the enemy.
Burris is posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor.
(See also, September 13–October 15 1951 BATTLE OF
HEARTBREAK RIDGE.)
October 10 After delaying since late August, the
Communists respond to General Ridgway’s requests to
resume the peace talks. Since the talks had stalled, the
U.S.-U.N. forces had succeeded in gaining much of
the high ground along the front. The new positions
seem to convince the Chinese that the ground will not
be retaken and it probably would help to end the stalled
talks.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces acknowl-
edges an ancient Chinese anniversary, the overthrow of
the Manchu Dynasty in 1911. The planes drop leaflets
for the benefit of the Communist troops and they
broadcast over the radios.
In Naval activity, Task Group 95.9 commences an
air and surface attack against Kojo Island. Also, the
USS Small (DD 838), en route from Hungnam to
Sasebo, Japan, strikes a mine and sustains severe dam-
age (loses its bow); however, the crew is able to keep the
ship afloat with the remainder kept water-tight.
October 11 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, Operation BUMBLEBEE commences. At
1000, as part of the operation in which the 7th Marines
at Won-tong-ni participate, the 3rd Battalion is lifted
by helicopter and transported to the division’s center
along the front. The operation involves 156 flights by
12 helicopters. The distance from Field X-77 to the
front lines is about 17 miles and the duration of time is
October 12, 1951
about 10 to 12 minutes, with the helicopters landing
at one-minute intervals and spending an average of sev-
enteen seconds unloading the troops.
The helicopters are beginning to play a much larger
part in the war in Korea. In just under six hours, 959
fully equipped men and equipment are transported.
The total amount of weight transported during the op-
eration amounts to 229,920 pounds. In conjunction,
the remainder of the 7th Marines (1st and 2nd Battal-
ions) move by overland routes to the front to complete
relief of the 5th Marines.
In Naval activity, Kojo again comes under attack by
Task Group 95.9. Also, the USS Renshaw (DDE 499),
while operating off Songjin, comes under fire from
enemy shore guns. The vessel sustains some minor
damage and one crewman sustains a slight wound. The
enemy fire was unexpected, as the area had been quiet
for a few months.
October 12 By this date, the new line,
Jamestown, is secure. An offensive to establish the line
had commenced during the previous month by five di-
visions, the 1st Cavalry (IX Corps), 3rd, Infantry (I
Corps), 25th Infantry (I Corps) and the ROK 1st Di-
vision (X Corps) along with the 1st British Common-
wealth. The offensive advanced to extend the line three
to four miles from the vicinity of Kaesong to Ch’or-
won.
Also, friendly guerrillas operating from the island of
Sinmi-do on the west coast of Korea abandon the island
after Communist pressure makes their positions un-
tenable.
In Air Force activity, during continuing operations
to damage and destroy airfields in North Korea, one
MiG is destroyed, with no U.S. losses.
October 13 Typhoon Ruth arrives and inflicts
much destruction in the Japan-Formosa-Korea region
and its force hinders naval and air operations for sev-
eral days.
In the IX Corps sector, Operation NOMAD and POLAR
commences. It is designed to secure phase lines, later
designated the Missouri Line. The operation is carried
out with the 24th U.S. Division, supported by ROK
forces. It is completed by 22 October.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, from
1 October to this date, 87 North Korean troops surren-
der to the 1st Marine Division. (See also, September
13–October 15 1951 THE BATTLE OF HEARTBREAK
RIDGE.)
October 14 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Marines maintain only patrols through
October 31; however, while the infantry penetrates fur-
ther into enemy territory, other patrols include tanks
and when necessary, all units receive artillery support
and air cover.
October 15 The U.S. 2nd Division seizes Heart-
break Ridge (See also, September 13–October 15
1951 THE BATTLE OF HEARTBREAK RIDGE).
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, ur-
796
gent calls for help arrive for a beleaguered ROK unit that
had become surrounded while operating in the IX
Corps sector. The ROKs had sustained casualties and
had expended most of their ammunition. Marine hel-
icopters are dispatched (Operation WEDGE) to assist
the isolated contingent. Six helicopters (HRS-1) arrive
with 19,000 pounds of ammunition and evacuate 24
wounded troops.
October 16 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, a contingent of the 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, advances against North Korean fortifications
in the high ground near Changhang. The Communists
raise fierce resistance and pound the attacking force
with artillery, mortars and machine gun fire, but to no
avail. The objective is breached just prior to 1540. By
1700, all resistance is eliminated. The Marines withdraw
after determining that the area is untenable due to
booby traps and mines. They sustain three killed and
18 wounded. The Communists sustain 35 killed
(counted).
In Air Force activity, a contingent of 16 Sabre jets
commanded by Major Richard D. Creighton, 336th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, while escorting fighter
bombers on a mission near Sinuiju, prepares to leave the
area and return to base due to being low on fuel. Just
as the formation prepares to turn, Major Creighton
spots a huge force of MiG-15s that number about 100
and are closing against the fighter bombers.
Creighton’s Sabres, at a higher elevation, abort their
departure and dive to tackle the 100 MiGs. While the
MiGs focus on the Sabres, the fighter bombers complete
their mission. In the meantime, the skies become con-
sumed with the opposing planes. The clashes spread
south for about 100 miles reaching down toward Py-
ongyang. During the encounter, four MiGs are downed
and three others are damaged. During the same aerial
donnybrook, four of the planes under Major Franklin
L. Fisher drive into an eight-plane formation. He
downs one of the MiGs and just as he is running out of
ammunition, MiGs close on him, but he is able to take
evasive action and then he downs a second MiG.
Aware that the fighter bombers have completed their
task and that the Sabres are nearly running on fumes,
Creighton orders his command to disengage. No U.S.
losses occur. An Air Force publication noted that a total
of nine MiGs are destroyed on this day, but still there
are no U.S. losses. Also, Colonel Benjamin S. Preston,
Jr., 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, closes on two MiGs
and damages one, then as it begins to dive, Preston
again scores and downs the MiG about 7 miles east of
Sinuiju.
In other activity, B-29s execute thirty-one day and
night sorties on the 16th-17th. The Superfortresses
concentrate on rail bridges and marshaling yards, but the
airfield at Samchang is also hit.
In yet other activity, a flight of four F-86 Sabres at-
tached to the 334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th
Fighter-Interceptor Group, encounters and engages a
group of eight MiGs in the vicinity of P’anp Yong
 797
Dong. Lieutenant Orren H. Ohlinger heads right into
the enemy formation, takes the second in line and
opens fire. The MiG slows from the hits, permitting
Ohlinger to pour more fire and finish it off.
Also, a flight of four Sabre jets, attached to the 334th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Group, encounters and engages a band of two MiGs
in the vicinity of Sinanju. Lieutenant John J. Burke
and his element leader attack the pair. Burke scores a hit
on his target and it is shot from the sky. Also, Lieuten-
ant Merlyn E. Hroch, attached to the 334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group,
while on patrol with three other Sabre jets, spots a MiG
that attacks two other F-86s. Hroch moves against the
MiG and opens fire. It sustains damage, but the enemy
pilot evades destruction by heading into the sun. Nev-
ertheless, Hroch’s wingman takes over and blasts the
aircraft from the sky. It plummets to the earth about 10
miles from Pyongyang.
October 17 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, a contingent of the 1st Korean Marine
Corps Regiment attacks separate Communist strong-
points in the area northwest of Hill 751 and south of
Hill 1052. The contingent, bolstered by tanks and ar-
tillery, eliminates twenty-five fortified bunkers. During
the operation, 15 enemy troops are killed (counted)
and three others are captured.
In Naval activity, the USS Samuel N. Moore (DD
747), while operating off Hungnam, is hit by enemy
shore gun fire. The vessel sustains damage to the steer-
ing engine room and casualties are inflicted. One man
is killed and two others are wounded.
October 19 In Air Force activity, C-54s evacuate
sick and wounded from Korea. The troops are trans-
ported to Tachikawa Air Base, Japan, from where they
are then moved aboard C-54s to a new 1,000 bed med-
ical facility opened this day by the U.S. Army at Camp
Drew, north of the airbase.
October 21–30 1951 More than 100
MiGs are spotted each day in the skies over North
Korea, the first time the Communists have initiated
sorties there. During this period, the engagements
between the Air Force and the Communists cost the
loss of three F-86 Sabre jets. The Communists lose
five MiGs.
October 21 In the IX Corps sector, elements of
the 24th Division seize the high ground in the area just
south of Kumson.
October 22 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Marines execute Operation BUSH-
BEATER to clear the enemy from the east flank of the
division. A contingent of the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines,
is airlifted by helicopters (HMR-161) to the target zone.
The troops drive westwardly toward the Soyang-gang
River in coordination with a simultaneous operation
by the Marine Reconnaissance Company, which is clos-
ing from the opposite direction. Other similar opera-
October 23, 1951
tions are executed during October. One code-named
HOUSEBURNER is carried out literally, as the Marines
attempt to destroy as many huts as possible to ensure
that the enemy is not able to use them during the frigid
Korean winter.
In Air Force activity, in response to word of a B-29
being shot down, two SA-16s, attached to the 3rd Air
Rescue Squadron, speed to the scene and retrieve the en-
tire 12-man crew of the downed aircraft. The rescue
marks a record. It is the highest number of men re-
trieved on any single day of the war.
Also, another B-29, piloted by Captain Lyle B. Bor-
deaux (30th Bombardment Squadron, 19th Bombard-
ment Group) takes extremely heavy fire while on a
bombing mission over the airfield at Taech’on. The
plane’s controls begin to fail, but Bordeaux keeps her in
the air. Enemy fighters also arrive and the machine gun
fire wounds several crew members. Bordeaux, aware of
the dire circumstances, maintains his composure and
although the craft continues to lose altitude, he refuses
to land in enemy territory or abandon the wounded. He
makes it back to the vicinity of Seoul and continues to
circle a small island until all of the crew bails out. As the
last man out, Bordeaux jumps from an elevation of
about 1,000 feet.
October 23 The USS Helena (CA 75) is hit by
enemy shore gunfire while operating off Hungnam.
The vessel sustains some damage and four crewmen
sustain slight injuries.
In Air Force activity, the 30th Bomber Wing strikes
Namsi Airfield and ignites a furious and costly air bat-
tle. FEAF launches nine B-29s to strike Namsi Air-
field, located between MiG Alley and Pyongyang. One
of the bombers is forced to return to base. The mission
is protected by a force of 55 F-84s attached to the 49th
and 136th Fighter Bomber Wings. In addition, F-86
Sabre jets fly overhead at a higher elevation to inter-
cept any MiGs that might arrive.
MiGs encounter and engage the Sabres, preventing
the Sabres from protecting the B-29s. As the F-86s
fight off the MiGs, numbered at about 100, and down
two, other MiGs strike the B-29s and F-84s. The
bombing force is hit by a contingent of about fifty
MiGs and it is not certain whether they are a part of the
force that engages the Sabres or a totally separate band.
Nonetheless, the MiGs are an overmatch for the Thun-
derJets and their straight wings.
The Communists score heavily upon the force.
Without the Sabres there, the MiGs easily penetrate
the protective formation and succeed in shooting down
three of the B-29s. Of the remaining five bombers,
three receive such tremendous damage that they make
emergency landings in either Korea or Japan.
One of the seriously damaged bombers is piloted by
Lieutenant William E. Reeter (372nd Bombardment
Squadron, 307th Bombardment Wing). Reeter and
seven of his crew are badly wounded, but he retains
command and decides not to bail out due to the
wounded on board. His action saves the crew from
October 24, 1951
capture or worse. The plane remains in formation to re-
ceive further protection en route back to a base. Dur-
ing the encounter, three separate fires erupt aboard the
aircraft, but all are extinguished. The plane success-
fully makes an emergency landing in Korea.
Also, Colonel Albert C. Prendergast, commander,
136th Fighter-Bomber Wing, flying a Republic F-84E
in the mission, expends all of his fuel and is forced to
bail out, but he dies in the failed attempt. The B-29
gunners claim the downing of three MiGs and the F-
84E pilots also claim three. One F-84 is also shot down
during the air battles. The engagement is referred to as
the Battle of Namsi.
General Vandenberg, aware of the disaster and the
slaughter of the B-29s, rethinks his position about not
sending more Sabres. It becomes evident that if more
Sabres don’t arrive, the outnumbered Americans will
soon run out of B-29s and their crews. Consequently,
Vandenberg orders the dispatch of 75 F-86 Sabre jets
to Korea. Air Defense Command gets the directive to
fill the slots at once. The new arrivals will be F-86Es,
a newer version, and Vandergrift also orders a crew and
crew chief for each plane. The planes will be deployed
primarily with the 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing, but
some move to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing.
Experienced airmen of the 4th Wing move to the
51st to help them with the transition to the Sabre jets.
One of the veterans is Colonel Francis S. Gabreski. He
assumes command of the 51st Wing. Far East Air
Forces, with their new additions, will have a comple-
ment of 165 Sabres. Nevertheless, not all of the planes
will be available for combat. In addition, the pleas of
General Otto P. Weyland have finally doubled his force,
but the odds remain great. The Communists have more
than 550 MiGs that can attack and then run across the
Yalu River, which the Sabres are forbidden to cross.
October 24 In Air Force activity, the Far East Air
Forces campaign to bomb North Korean airfields con-
tinues. On this day, an 8-plane contingent attacks the
field at Sunch’on and during the mission a force of
about 70 MiGs intercepts the formations. The Amer-
icans shoot down two MiGs, one by gunners on the B-
29s and another by Colonel Harrison R. Thyng, at-
tached to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing. However,
the Communists down another of the B-29s. The loss
prompts General Weyland, commanding officer, Far
East Air Forces, to suspend B-29 attacks for two days.
Afterward, the daylight raids are reinitiated.
October 25 The peace talks that had been
aborted by the Communists on 23 August 1951 are re-
newed this day. The location is changed from Kaesong
to Panmunjom, a small village slightly north of the
38th Parallel. The talks are held in tents because the
village has no houses.
In Air Force activity, F-51 Mustangs execute a large
amount of sorties against enemy forces in the I Corps
sector and report that the strikes account for about 200
enemy casualties.
In other activity, while on a rescue mission to re-
798
trieve a downed pilot in enemy territory, an H-5 heli-
copter is hit by enemy fire and forced to make an emer-
gency landing. The men evade capture by making it to
concealed positions, where they remain unscathed until
the following day. On the 26th, two additional heli-
copters arrive at the scene and rescue all four men.
In Naval activity, Marine planes attached to VMF-
312 attack targets, including rails and locomotives near
Myong-dong. A band of eight MiGs attack the Corsairs,
but the enemy pilots’ poor marksmanship fails to do the
Marines’ F4U4Bs any harm. Afterward, the pilots spot
another group of MiGs, numbering 16, but again are
spared damage.
October 26 U.N and Communist representa-
tives at Panmunjom concur on a line of demarcation
(spelled out on the 23rd) and sign an agreement by ini-
tialing maps that designate the respective positions,
which essentially is listed as “a line linking up the far-
thest points of repeated contacts up to 2,000 yards for-
ward of the United Nations MLR” (Main Line of Re-
sistance, front lines). General Van Fleet, Eighth Army
commander, pursuant to the cease fire, directs his corps
to maintain “aggressive defensive actions until a full
armistice is concluded.”
The line of demarcation is to remain in effect for
thirty days; however, Van fleet insists that if a full cease-
fire is not in place by 27 November, the agreed upon
line would become subject to modification in conjunc-
tion with positions at that time.
October 27 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st Marines dispatch a reconnaissance
contingent to estimate the strength and positions of an
enemy force detected north of the 1st Battalion’s lines.
The intelligence gathering continues for three days and
on the following day, an attack is launched to elimi-
nate the problem. Also, the 1st Marine Division initi-
ates use of an airfield at Sokchori, located in the ROK
I Corps sector.
In Air Force activity, B-29s, on a final daylight raid
of the medium bombers, knock out six MiG-15s, a
high mark for a single day for the gunners. The Super-
fortresses are protected by F-84s and RAAF Meteors
during the raid against Sinanju, but all the planes are
downed by the B-29s. Three other MiGs are damaged.
Up until the last week in October, only six B-29s
had been lost, but during this one week, five have been
destroyed and another eight sustain heavy damage. The
losses force FEAF to halt daylight attacks by B-29s.
The daylight attacks by the Superfortresses will not re-
sume until 19 September 1952.
In other activity, during the day’s missions, the 67th
Fighter-Bomber Squadron, 18th Fighter-Bomber
Group, attacks the rails at Kuni-ri and subsequently,
the formation moves against a troop center at Youn-
dong. One of the men in Captain Richard D. Ander-
son’s command is shot down by antiaircraft fire. Ander-
son remains overhead to protect the other pilot and
while doing so, enemy fire also hits his plane. Never-
theless, he remains in the area. Meanwhile, an H-5
 799
helicopter from the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron, escorted
by fighters, arrives and rescues the pilot.
October 28 In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry
Division zone, enemy fire stalls Company G, 3rd Bat-
talion, in the vicinity of Chong-dong. Lieutenant Lloyd
Burke moves on his own to end the blockage. He drives
against several bunkers and throws grenades into each
of them. Following that action, Burke returns to get a
rifle, then heads back and eliminates the defenders in
a second bunker and moves again toward a third. The
contingent that had been stalled bolts up and advances,
but soon after, yet another bunker stalls progress. Burke
sets out one more time and on this trek he brings a light
machine gun and several boxes of ammunition. His
gun eliminates about 75 more enemy troops before he
expends all the ammunition. However, he sends for
more ammo and reinitiates the one-man wrecking
crew’s advance.
By this time he is wounded, but not enough to halt
his attack. He carries the light machine guns in his arms
as he drives forward. A machine gun position and two
mortar positions fall victim to his marksmanship, as
well as about 35 additional enemy troops, bringing the
count to more than 100 killed. The men in the com-
mand, about 35, are stunned by Burke’s fearlessness.
They are inspired to drive forward and continue the
attack. Lieutenant Burke becomes a recipient of the
Medal of Honor for his extraordinary heroism and lead-
ership in the face of the enemy.
In Air Force activity, a patrol of the 336th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group,
encounters MiGs in the vicinity of Taech’on. During the
engagement, one MiG is downed by First Lieutenant
Robert H. Moore.
October 29 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the USS New Jersey and the USS Toledo
support the actions during the last two weeks of Octo-
ber. By the end of the month, the New Jersey executes
11 missions and the Toledo participates in 41 missions.
On this day, the USS Toledo receives a message from
General Gerald Thomas: “Your accurate and effective
fire during period 24–29 October made an important
contribution to operations of this division. Many
thanks and come again.”
In Naval activity, the USS Osprey (AMS 28) is hit
and damaged by enemy shore batteries at Wonsan. No
fatalities occur, but one crewman is badly wounded.
October 30 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, dispatches
Company C, led by Captain John R. McMahon, to
eliminate enemy positions on a ridge to its front. The
contingent sweeps along the ridge destroying bunkers
as it advances. The North Koreans manage to threaten
the attack by pouring mortar and small arms fire; how-
ever, the Marines quickly find protective cover and pull
back under the support fire of artillery fire, air strikes
and heavy machine gun fire. The operation costs the
company one man wounded. The Marines destroy
November 1, 1951
about 40 enemy bunkers. The North Koreans lose 65
killed (counted).
In Naval activity, the British destroyer HMCS
Cayuga, operating off the west coast of Korea, comes
under fire from enemy shore guns on Amgak Island
and sustains some slight damage.
October 31 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, pursuant to
orders from General Thomas, uses Communist tactics
against the enemy. They initiate an artillery attack to
signal a night assault; however, as the guns silence, the
Marines use a North Korean bugle signal to trip up the
Communists. The bunkers empty as the North Kore-
ans answer the call to man the open trenches to prepare
to defend. Instead of Marine infantry, the Communists
are greeted by mortar and artillery fire. Estimated ca-
sualties amount to 47 killed and 48 wounded.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Division, for the
month of October, reports 50 killed, 2 missing and 2
missing in action. The figures include the Korean
Marines. Enemy casualties are reported as 709 killed
(counted) and an estimated count of 2,377 killed. The
number of enemy wounded is estimated at 4,927. The
Marines also capture 571.
In Air Force activity, subsequent to a successful exper-
iment with the C-124A during the latter part of Sep-
tember (Operation PELICAN), the plane returns to the
United States. The plane’s performance convinces the
leaders of the 315th Air Division that it would require
the services of a squadron of the C-124A Globemasters
in Korea.
In other activity, the Air Defense Section of the Ma-
rine Tactical Air Control Squadron 2 relocates to Po-
hang and is placed under the control of Marine Ground
Control Interceptor Squadron 1. The squadron con-
tinues to operate as the Tactical Air Direction Section.
November 1951–May 1952 The Chi-
nese, unlike the U.S., do not rotate individual pi-
lots in a fashion such as a particular number of mis-
sions. Rather, like the Russians, they rotate entire
units. Between November of this year and May of
1952, the Chinese rotated 17 MiG-15 regiments
and one La-11 regiment. The practice gives, in this
instance, combat experience to about 450 pilots, but
it also at times places inexperienced pilots up against
the American Sabre pilots. In the air duels that do
occur, with few exceptions, the Americans prevail,
against both the Chinese and the Soviets.
November 1 At this time, about 208,000 enemy
troops face Eighth Army, but in reserve, the enemy
has nine Chinese armies totaling about 235,000 troops
and with four North Korean Corps in reserve, the
force is strengthened by another 138,000. The U.N.
forces, composed primarily of U.S. troops, number
about 195,000; however, many of these are support
troops.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines continue to remain active along their front,
November 2, 1951
the eastern portion of the X Corps zone, but activity
is restrained to patrols. Nevertheless, the Marines
are aware that enemy units — including the 1st, 15th
and 19th N.K. Divisions — remain to their front.
Throughout November, the Marines maintain respon-
sibility for the eastern sector of X Corps zone in east-
central Korea.
In Air Force activity, Colonel Harrison R. Thyng
assumes command of the 4th Fighter Interceptor
Wing.
A victory ship unloading cargo unto a DUKW at Inchon on 3 November. The DUKW will carry its cargo
directly to waiting rail cars.
800
November 2 In Air Force activity, Lieutenant
Colonel George L. Jones (334th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group) and one
other pilot, while on a mission near Sonch’on, spot
two MiGs. Jones fires at one and damages it, but be-
fore he can finish the plane off, he expends his ammu-
nition. With smoke blowing from its wing the MiG
begins to dive, and Jones’ wingman, Lieutenant Richard
A. Pincoski, takes aim and finishes it. Both pilots share
the kill.
 801
Other types of cargo also arrive in Korea, including this net full of turkeys for the upcoming traditional
dinner on Thanksgiving Day.
— In the United States: The Defense Department
calls for a January draft of 59,600 men.
November 3 An SA-16, flying to retrieve a
downed pilot, comes under intense fire and its mission
is aborted. The helicopter, attached to the 3rd Air Res-
cue Squadron, moves to the Korea Bay and defies the
6 to 8 foot waves to land and retrieve another downed
pilot without harm.
November 4 In the I Corps sector, the 1st King’s
Own Scottish Borderers (British Commonwealth Di-
vision), holding positions on Hill 355 subsequent to
its seizure during the previous month, comes under a
surprise night attack by the Chinese. The positions first
come under a bombardment that lasts about three
hours and it is followed by an attack signaled by the
whistles and bugles that direct the Chinese foot sol-
diers to charge toward the perimeter with total disre-
gard to the barbed wire.
The British are forced to surrender some ground
when elements of Company B are overwhelmed, but
later, during the early morning hours of the 5th, the
positions are regained and the Chinese are driven back.
By dawn, the British control the hill; however, in yet an-
other of the fights on a hill with no lasting value, the
British lose 7 killed, 87 wounded and slightly more
than 40 missing.
November 6, 1951
In Air Force activity, a large group of MiGs, com-
posed of about 60 planes, attacks a formation of 34 F-
86s in the skies near Sinanju. Following the air duels,
two of the MiGs are downed and three others are
damaged. The U.S. reports no losses. Captain William
F. Guss, USMC, attached to the USAF 4th Fighter
Squadron, knocks down one MiG to become the first
Marine pilot to down a Chinese MiG.
In Naval activity, an F9F-2 plane crashes through
the barricades on the USS Antietam (CV 36), causing
damage and injuries to the crew. Four men are killed
and ten others are injured, one severely. In addition,
two planes are destroyed and six others sustain varying
degrees of damage.
November 5 In the United States: Lt. General
Lemuel Shepherd (commander Fleet Marine Force, Pa-
cific) is appointed on this day as commandant of the
Marine Corps, scheduled to succeed General Clifton
B. Cates. Shepherd assumes the position on 1 January
1952. General Cates does not retire upon the end of
his term as commandant. He is appointed as com-
manding officer, Marine Corps Schools, Quantico.
November 6 Chinese Communists flying jet
fighter planes and Soviet medium bombers strike the is-
land of Taehwa-do in the Yalu Gulf. It is the initial
confirmation of Chinese pilots flying Soviet bombers
(TU-2s).
November 7, 1951
In Air Force activity, a contingent of eleven enemy
twin-engine light bombers strike friendly-held Taehwa-
do Island in what is the first confirmed air-to-ground
action by an enemy light bomber contingent since the
outbreak of the war. The Communists mount a night
amphibious raid and seize the islands of Ka-do and
Tan-do on the west coast of Korea.
November 7–8 1951 In the X Corps sector,
1st Marine Division zone, the artillery of the 11th
Marines is especially busy as they fire in coordination
with the 90-mm rifles of the 1st Marine Tank Bat-
talion in an effort to destroy enemy fortified posi-
tions. The two-day continuous bombardment
pounds 34 known artillery positions and 25 bunkers.
The attack also concentrates on 22 machine gun po-
sitions and several supply dumps. The two U.S. units
aggressively pound the enemy positions throughout
the month, but the Communists have actually been
able to augment their fortified positions to make
them less accessible to the artillery attacks.
November 8 A group of F-86s and F-80s spots
a large formation of MiGs that numbers more than 100
planes; however, only a small number choose to take on
the outnumbered American planes. The U.S. loses one
F-86. The enemy loses one MiG and one other is dam-
aged.
Also, Marine Squadron VMF-214 departs Itami
aboard the USS Lenawee (PA-195) at Kobe, Japan.
November 9 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, preparations are made to celebrate the
birthday of the Marine Corps, which falls on the fol-
lowing day. Orders (OP-nO 50–51) arrive instructing
the division to arrange for a massive bombardment of
a particular position from where the enemy is able to ob-
serve Marine lines.
In Air Force activity, eleven stranded crewmen of a
downed B-29 are rescued by a C-47 that lands on the
beach on Paengnyong-do Island located off the south-
west coast of North Korea. The 19th BG attacks mar-
shaling yards at Hwang-ju, Kowon, and Yangdok; the
Saamcham Airfield; and a barracks area. In other night
attacks, 98th BW B-29s bomb Taech’on Airfield, fly
five close support sorties and a leaflet sortie, and strike
Hungnam.
In Naval activity, U.S. warships engaged in mine-
sweeping operations at Wonsan Harbor west of Mo-
do and Sin-do Islands come under fire from enemy
shore batteries before the mission is completed.
November 10 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, enemy positions on Hill 1052 are greeted
by a thunderous bombardment in celebration of the
Marine Corps’ Birthday, which is on this day. Eighty-
three Marine planes in coordination with the 11th
Marines’ artillery and the division’s tanks, mortars and
machine guns light up Hill 1952 like a Christmas tree.
The USS Los Angeles joins in the celebration and adds
its big guns. The Marines, in the spirit of the day, de-
802
liver 50,000 leaflets to the hill, each extending an in-
vitation for the enemy to join the Marines for their
birthday dinner that evening. Twenty North Koreans
surrender; however, it is uncertain whether the unusual
invitations had anything to do with it.
November 11 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, along the Minnesota Line, the 5th
Marines relieves the 1st Marines. This operation be-
comes the largest helicopter lift (Operation SWITCH)
of troops since the inclusion of helicopters in the Ma-
rine operations. About 2,000 troops are moved by hel-
icopters, which deliver 950 troops to Hill 884; another
952 Marines are transported from the hill to Field X-
83. The entire operation is completed in about ten
hours, another tactical historic first for the U.S.
Marines. Hill 884 soon becomes known as “Helicopter
Hill.”
In Naval activity, the USS Gloucester (PF 22) comes
under fire while operating off Hungnam. One man is
killed and 11 others are wounded.
November 12 General Ridgway instructs
General Van Fleet to halt all Eighth Army offensive
action, except those required to bolster the main line
of defense (Operation RATKILLER). In addition, Eighth
Army is to establish outposts at positions 3,000
to 4,000 yards to the front of the MLR. The 155-mile
line extends from the Yellow Sea in the west to the
Sea of Japan in the east. The I Corps, commanded
by Lt. General John W. O’Daniel, holds the left,
followed by IX Corps (Major General Willard G.
Wyman) and to the right, the X Corps (Major
General Clovis E. Byers), followed by the ROK I
Corps. The activity across the entire front during No-
vember and December of this year remains relatively
light.
In the I Corps sector, the South Korean 1st Division
mounts continual probes with tank-infantry forces, but
no major battles develop. The raids continue until 16
December.
In Naval activity, the USS New Jersey (BB 62), op-
erating on the west coast of Korea, commences its final
bombardment of enemy troop positions. The gunners
receive guidance from an air spotter attached to the
HMS Sydney (CVL).
Also, the USS Los Angeles (CA 135), operating on
the east coast of Korea, provides fire support to the
Marines and the ROK I Corps, each engaged at the
front. The U.S. Navy estimates enemy casualties at
about 105 to 140; its reports state that 27 bunkers are
destroyed and an undeterminable number of other
bunkers are damaged.
In yet other activity, Rear Admiral H.E. Regan as-
sumes command of Carrier Division 17 (Hunter Killer
Group). He relieves Captain J.L. Kane.
— In Japan: Marine Fighter Squadron VMF 214
departs Japan en route to the U.S. and its base at El
Toro (Marine Corps Air Station), California.
 3
The Korean War
This page intentionally left blank
The Korean War
An Exhaustive Chronolog y
BUD HANNINGS
Foreword by General P. X. Kelley,
USMC (Ret.), 28th Commandant

Volume 3
(November 13, 1951–September 6, 1953;
Appendices; Bibliography; Index)

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Jefferson, North Carolina, and London
 Volume 3
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CATALOGUING-IN-PUBLICATION DATA
Hannings, Bud.
The Korean war : an exhaustive chronology / Bud Hannings ;
foreword by General P.X. Kelley, USMC (Ret.).
p. cm.
Includes index.

3 volume set—
ISBN-13: 978-0-7864-2814-4
illustrated case binding : 50# alkaline paper

1. Korean War, 1950–1953 — Chronology. 2. Korean War, 1950–1953.

3. Korean War, 1950–1953 — United States — Chronology.
4. United Nations — Armed Forces — Korea — Chronology. I. Title.
DS918.H336 2007 951.904'20202 — dc22 2007010570

British Library cataloguing data are available

©2007 Bud Hannings. All rights reserved

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying
or recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system,
without permission in writing from the publisher.

On the cover: Situation Map of Korea November 25, 1950;

Elements of Eighth Army retire from Sunch’on
and move south towards P’yongyang, December 2, 1950

Manufactured in the United States of America

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers

Box 611, Jefferson, North Carolina 28640
www.mcfarlandpub.com
 Contents
• Volume 1 •
Foreword, by General P. X. Kelley, USMC (Ret.) 1
Preface 3
Prologue: The Prelude to War 7
Acronyms and Abbreviations 15

Chronology: January 5, 1950–

September 22, 1950 23

• Volume 2 •

Chronology: September 23, 1950–

November 12, 1951 403

• Volume 3 •

Chronology: November 13, 1951–

September 6, 1953 803

Appendices
1. Eighth Army, Order of Battle 975
2. Major Combat Events 981
3. United Nations Command, Senior Military Commanders 983
4. U.S. Air Force Commanders 985
5. Medal of Honor Recipients 988
6. Major U.S. Air Force Units 994

v
Contents vi

7. U.S. Marine Units 997

8. U.S. Naval Vessels 999
9. U.S. Naval Air Units 1002
10. Carrier-Based and Non–Carrier-Based Squadrons 1003
11. U.S. Naval Vessels Sunk or Damaged in Action 1009
12. Numbers of U.S. Navy and
Marine Corps Personnel Killed and Wounded 1013
13. U.S. Aces of the Korean War 1014
14. U.S. Army Command Strength 1016
15. U.S. Army Battle Casualties 1017
16. Foreign Nation Forces 1018

Bibliography 1021
General Index 1025
Military Units Index 1069
 803
The USS New Jersey bombards the western coast of North Korea with its full complement of nine 16-
inch guns. The gunners receive guidance from an air spotter.
November 13 The USS Toledo (CA-133) initi-
ates Operation COUNTER-PUNCH, a mission designed
to destroy enemy gun positions on Kojo Island to elim-
inate batteries that have been causing problems for the
fleet. The mission reports indicate several direct hits
on the targets.
November 15 In the IX Corps sector, 24th Divi-
sion zone, a contingent of Company K, 21st Regiment,
launches a night attack against a fortified enemy posi-
tion in the vicinity of Kumsong. Enemy fire however,
becomes intense and the attack is halted. Orders arrive
for the contingent (3rd Platoon) to withdraw. The unit
withdraws under heavy fire and PFC Mack A. Jordan
volunteers to remain behind to afford cover fire. Jordan
advances against an enemy machine gun and destroys
it with three hand grenades, giving the withdrawal
some breathing room. Afterward, Jordan begins to
charge another nest, but a burst of fire severs both of his
legs. Despite the horrific wounds, Jordan remains at
his gun and continues to fire until the platoon arrives
back at his position. PFC Jordan is awarded the Medal
November 13, 1951
of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary heroism
in the face of the enemy.
The 24th Division returned to Japan during Febru-
ary 1952 and reverted to Far East reserve. During its
duty in Korea, which began just after the Communist
invasion of South Korea ( June 1950), it participated in
seven campaigns. The division returned to Korea dur-
ing July 1953 to help restore order in the POW camps.
November 16 The enemy rails in the territory
that stretch from Sinanju to Sukch’on come under
heavy attacks by planes of Fifth Air Force. The strikes
cut the rails there and between Kunu and Sunch’on in
more than 100 separate places. While on the mission,
the aircraft also strike various selected targets including
fuel depots, bridges, other structures and gun emplace-
ments.
November 18 In Air Force activity, a formation
of F-86s (4th Fighter Interceptor Wing) attacks the
airfield at Uiju. Two of the four Sabre jets remain
above, while the other two, piloted by Captain Kenneth
November 18, 1951 804

Top: A pontoon bridge across the Pukham River, erected by the 378th Engineer Battalion in the IX Corps
sector (ROK 6th Division zone). Bottom: A Patton tank moves along the MSR in the I Corps sector on
17 November.

D. Chandler and 1st Lieutenant Dayton W. Ragland,
come in low just above the 12 parked planes and rake
the field with 50-caliber fire. Four of the parked MiGs
are destroyed and the remainder on the ground are
damaged, all on one pass.
In other activity, a group of three F-84 fighter
bombers is intercepted by MiGs. The F-84s jettison their
bombs, abort the scheduled mission and evade losses by
heading back to their base. The planes escape unharmed.
In other activity, while taking off from its base en
 805
route to Korea, a B-29 has an accident. The bomber,
holding a full load of bombs and a full supply of fuel, ex-
periences a malfunction on the runway prior to being
airborne. The plane loses all of its power; attempts to
bring it to a halt fail. The aircraft crashes and catches
fire. Sergeant Plumley, one of the crewmen who had es-
caped from the inferno, glances and discovers the radar
operator helplessly in shock under the tail section. With
total disregard for his own safety, Plumley heads back
and retrieves the man, then gets him to safety.
November 20 Task Group 95.8 bombards
Hungnam on this day and the next. The attack includes
air strikes.
November 21 In the IX Corps sector, 1st Cavalry
Division zone, the Chinese attack the positions of Com-
pany B, 1st Battalion, 8th Cavalry, at its positions near
Sokkogae. A platoon under Lieutenant James L. Stone is
hit especially hard, but Stone retains his discipline and is
able to control the situation against the superior num-
bered force. A flame-thrower, expected to support the
platoon, malfunctions, and still Stone remains confident.
He repairs the flame thrower in time to put it in the fight.
All the while, the platoon is being overwhelmed by
the unending enemy forces. Stone is again wounded, but
he continues to resist and lead his diminishing platoon
until he actually falls into unconsciousness as the posi-
tion is being overrun. Lieutenant Stone is awarded the
Medal of Honor for his intrepid heroism and courage
in the face of an overwhelming enemy force.
In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Los Angeles (CA
135) and the destroyer USS Hamner (DD 718), upon
the request of TF Kirkland, initiate a bombardment of
the area around Kojo in support of the ROK I Corps.
November 22 U.S. rocket ships LSMR 401, 403
and 404, attached to LSR Division 31, initiate offen-
sive action against the vicinity of Wonsan on this day
and the next.
A fresh snowstorm and frigid weather do not postpone washday in the 24th Division area on 24 November.
November 24, 1951
Also, the U.S. Navy initiates a relief operation. The
USS Helena (CA-75) is relieved by the USS St. Paul
(CA-73). The USS Toledo (CA-133) is relieved by the
USS Rochester (CA-124) and the USS New Jersey (BB-
62) is relieved by the USS Wisconsin (BB-64).
November 23 In the I Corps sector, 3rd Division
zone, the Communists launch a strong attack against
the perimeter of the 7th Regiment. Company F receives
the brunt of the assault. A direct hit followed by another
destroys a bunker in which PFC Noah O. Knight had
been deployed. Knight; however, is able to escape
death. Although wounded, he makes it to a better fir-
ing position and pours fire into the intruders, but ap-
parently the position is not well suited for focused re-
turn fire. He moves to another position and in full view
of the enemy, he rings the area with shells and forces a
halt in the attack.
Soon after, Knight spots another group of troops
that had penetrated and he turns his fire on them, elim-
inating or wounding the entire squad. Shortly there-
after, Knight finds himself without any remaining am-
munition and at about the same time, he sees three
enemy troops carrying explosives. Knight charges with
his rifle butt, leading the way, and knocks two of the
trio out of action. Third man detonates the explosives
and kills himself, the other two men with him and PFC
Knight. PFC Knight is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary courage in the face
of hostile fire.
In Naval activity, the USS Hyman (DD 732) is hit by
enemy shore battery fire on Kalmagak while it maneu-
vers to turn and retire. The vessel sustains only slight
damage.
November 24 U.S. warships support friendly
guerrillas that launch a raid against the enemy on Ka-
do Island on the 24–25th.
Also, planes attached to the 98th Bomber Wing
November 27, 1951
strike targets in the vicinity of Tongch’on and hit the
airfield there and a marshaling yard. The aircraft also
execute five close-air support missions. Another enemy
marshaling yard at Hambusong is struck by aircraft at-
tached to the 19th Bomber Group. In addition, the
19th BG’s aircraft also strike a marshaling yard complex
at Munchin, the airfield at Namsi and the Hoeyang
land bridge.
November 27 At Panmunjom, the opposing ne-
gotiators agree on a cease-fire line.
In Air Force activity, Major Richard D. Creighton,
336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, engages and
downs a MiG-15 to become an ace. (See also, October
16, 1951, In Air Force activity.)
November 28, 1951–April 30, 1952.
SEVENTH DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
SECOND KOREAN WINTER.
November 28 In Air Force activity, a four-plane
contingent of the 336th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron,
4th Fighter-Interceptor Group, encounters a band of
A self-propelled 155-mm gun illuminates the night sky in the IX Corps area, 25th Division sector, on
26 November. The 25th Division is relieved by the 2nd Division during mid–December.
806
MiGs in the vicinity of Saryuk-Tong during the morn-
ing. One MiG is downed by 1st Lieutenant Dayton W.
Ragland. The plane crashes in the sea south of the vil-
lage of Sotogi-do.
Also, pilot Winton W. Marshall (335th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group),
while leading a patrol detects a pair of MiGs in the
vicinity of Sang-dong. Marshall moves against the lead
plane and after getting close, he opens fire. He scores
damage, but runs out of ammunition before he can fin-
ish the task. His wingman replaces him in the chase
and downs the MiG-15.
Also, Lieutenant Samuel A. Groening (335th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Group), while engaged against a contingent of MiGs
near Sang-dong, gets credit for one-half a kill when his
flight leader runs out of ammunition after damaging a
MiG. Groening maneuvers to take up the fight and
finishes off the MiG. It crashes in flames in the vicin-
ity of Chamha-Ri.
In Naval activity, Communists raid the island of
Hwangto-do in Wonsan Harbor on this day and the
next. The raid is launched from sampans and receives
only nominal opposition. Seven Korean Marines are
 807
killed and one civilian loses his life. The enemy also
seizes five civilians as prisoners. The enemy destroys
nearly every structure on the island.
November 29 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, combat controls continue as they have
for the entire month of November, with similar results.
After dark 11 separate Marine ambush patrols operate
in areas between 1,500 and 2,000 yards to the front of
the MSR. At dawn on the following day, the combined
contact with enemy forces amounts to one Commu-
nist killed and one POW seized. The Marines sustain
four wounded.
In Naval activity, large numbers of MiG-15s are
spotted in the Korean skies. More than 300 enemy
planes are counted and of those, approximately 265 are
engaged in four separate air battles. Also, Rear Admi-
ral John Perry relieves Rear Admiral J.J. Clark and as-
sumes command of Fast Carrier Task Force 77.
November 30 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, Marine casualties for the month of No-
vember amount to 34 killed and 250 wounded (includ-
ing casualties of the 1st Korean Marine Regiment).
Communist losses amount to 408 killed (counted) and
1,728 estimated killed and 2,235 wounded. Also, 104
enemy prisoners are seized.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of F-86s attached
to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group encounters a
group of 44 enemy planes, including TU-2s, LA-9s
and MiGs in the vicinity of Taehwa Island. The en-
counter erupts into a donnybrook in the sky. The U.S.
pilots shoot down 12 of the enemy aircraft and dam-
age 3 others. The U.S. reports no losses.
Also, Major George A. Davis Jr., pilot and com-
manding officer of the 334th Fighter Interceptor
Squadron, shoots down two of the enemy planes, a
Russian-made TU-2 (four-seat twin-engine medium
bomber) and a MiG. Major Davis becomes an ace, but
not for the first time. During World War II, while pi-
loting a P-47 in the Pacific, Davis had seven victories,
which earned him the status of ace. He is the first man
to become an ace in both wars.
Also, Winton W. Marshall, (335th Squadron), shoots
down two enemy planes during the fight and he, too,
becomes an ace.
Although the Russians classify the TU-2 as a medium
bomber, by U.S. standards it is considered a light
bomber. The Russians first introduced the TU-2 on 31
January 1941. During the Korean War, the TU-2 is used
by the Chinese 8th, 10th and 20th Bomber Divisions,
with the 8th and 10th being deployed in Manchuria,
from where they are to support the Chinese units in
Korea. However, Fifth Air Force planes attack an enemy
amphibious force that had attacked and seized Taehwa.
The air attacks disrupt the enemy while the friendly
troops return from Cho-do and retake the island. The
Chinese are unable to provide effective support for the
ground troops with the TU-2s in Korea, which compels
them to withdraw the two air units (8th and 10th
Bomber Divisions) from Manchuria during March 1952.
December 2, 1951
Also, Colonel Benjamin S. Preston Jr. (336th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Group) during this day’s aerial combat downs an LA-
9 when his flight encounters and attacks a contingent
of enemy bombers escorted by MiG-15s. The enemy
plane is shot down in the vicinity of Sedo Island.
In other activity, Colonel Seymour M. Levenson as-
sumes command of the 18th Fighter Bomber Group.
He succeeds Colonel Ralph H. Saltzman.
In Naval activity, a Communist force operating in
the Yula Gulf raids the island of Taehwa-do. On the
following day, the destroyer HMS Cockade (DD), while
evacuating friendly forces, is struck by enemy fire. One
crewman is killed.
December 1 While peace talks continue at Pan-
munjom, Eighth Army continues to work on its defen-
sive lines in preparation for yet another winter on the
Korean peninsula; however, patrols are maintained.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, patrols
are dispatched on a daily basis along the east-central
portion of Korea. During the night hours, the Marines
often establish positions known as “duck blinds.” Con-
tact with the enemy is only sporadic and light during
these aggressive patrols.
In related activity, Communist guerrillas still oper-
ate behind the lines. These pesky threats are dealt with
by helicopter patrols.
In Air Force activity, the 51st Fighter Interceptor
Wing, commanded by Colonel Harrison R. Thyng
(formerly of the 4th FIW) initiates its first combat mis-
sion. The planes depart from Suwon, but no MiGs in-
tercept the flight; however, on the following day, the
formation does encounter MiGs. One is shot down and
the victory for the squadron’s first kill is credited to
First Lieutenant Paul E. Roach.
Also, Flying Officer Bruce Gogerly (77th Intercep-
tor Fighter Squadron, Royal Australian Air Force),
while participating in a combat mission on this date, en-
gages and downs a MiG-15 near Songchon. Gogerly’s
machine guns hit the fuselage and the right wing, caus-
ing the pilot to lose control. The MiG crashes into a hill.
December 2 In Air Force activity, a contingent
of F-86 Sabre jets, attached to the 335th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Group,
led by Captain Michael J. Novak, spots MiGs while on
patrol near Pisokko. After observing a MiG moving
against two Sabres, Novak moves against the MiG and
knocks it out of the air.
Also, Captain Nelton R. Wilson (334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron), while on patrol in the vicinity
of Kumson-ri and commanding the flight of five Sabre
jets, observes a friendly aircraft coming under attack. He
dives directly at the MiG and strikes it several times, hit-
ting the tail and wing, forcing the plane to crash.
Another pilot of the 335th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, Major Zane S. Amell, while leading his flight
of four F-86s, downs one of two MiGs that attack his
flight in the vicinity of Samhwa-Ri.
December 3, 1951
December 3–4 A contingent of the 41st
Royal Marine Commandos aboard the USS Horace
A. Bass (APD 124) lands on the east coast of Korea
to destroy transportation depots in the vicinity of
Tanchon.
In Air Force activity, Communist pilots initiate
their first air-to-ground attack. The jets strike the
lines in the vicinity of Ch’orwon, located slightly
less than sixty miles northeast of Seoul.
December 5 Again, large numbers of enemy
MiG-15s, estimated at more than 300, are spotted and
engaged in the skies over Korea.
December 6 The initial contingent of the 45th
Infantry Division is transported from Hokkaido, Japan,
to Inchon.
December 8 In the United States: The Defense
Department calls for a January draft of 55,000 men.
The Marine Corps will take 14,000.
December 13 In Air Force activity, in the vicin-
ity of Sinanju, U.S. Sabre jets of the 4th Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wing are intercepted twice on this day, during
the morning sweep of the Sinanju area and again dur-
ing the afternoon mission. The Americans prevail in
all of the duels in the sky and knock out a total of thir-
teen MiGs.
During the engagements, Major George A. Davis,
Jr. (334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group) shoots down four of the enemy
planes, which makes him, to this date, the highest scor-
ing ace. (See also, November 30, 1951, In Air Force ac-
tivity.)
Also, Captain Theodore S. Coberly, attached to
the 334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, is another
pilot who scores a victory on this day near Songhyon-
dong.
Still another pilot, 1st Lieutenant John P. Green, Jr.
(336th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-
Interceptor Group) knocks down a MiG while leading
a contingent of Sabres in the vicinity of Sanggu-dong.
Green observes a band of MiG interceptors diving to-
ward his contingent and he maneuvers his plane to get
to the rear of one of the MiG. Then after successive
bursts of machine gun fire, the enemy plane begins to
spin out of control. The pilot is able to eject, but the
MiG crashes.
Although the Russians and Chinese hold vast supe-
riority in numbers of planes and advantages of the MiG
over the Sabre, they are unable to prevail against the
Sabre jet pilots.
Lieutenant Richard A. Pincoski, 334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, downs one of the MiGs. It
crashes near Inhung. Following this thrashing, the
MiGs are less than anxious to engage. Between this date
and the end of the year, the passiveness becomes appar-
ent; only five MiGs are destroyed and of these, one is
brought down by an F-84 pilot. Also, some sources
give a total number for MiGs shot down as 14 rather
than 13, and include another incident.
808
December 14 B-29s attached to the 19th
Bomber Group launch a night attack against the mar-
shaling yards at Maengjung-dong.
Mid-December 1951 In the I Corps sector,
45th Division zone, the first National Guard division
to deploy in Korea arrives from Japan to relieve the
1st Cavalry Division and take its place on the line
north of Seoul.
In the IX Corps sector, the 2nd Division comes out
of reserve and relieves the 25th Division. Both the 1st
Cavalry and the 25th Division move to Japan.
December 16 In the I Corps sector, raids by the
ROK 1st Division, against enemy positions south of
Panmunjom that have been ongoing since the previ-
ous November, cease. For the remainder of the year,
the ROKs initiate only patrols.
In Naval activity, the British destroyer HMS Con-
stance (DD), while operating on the west coast of Korea
near the Amgak peninsula, is hit by enemy shore gun
fire. Despite some damage, no injuries are sustained.
December 17 A Communist force operating on
the west coast of Korea launches an attack on the night
of the 17th and effectively eliminates friendly guerrilla
activity on the island of Ung-do and Changyang-do
on the 17th and 18th.
December 18 During the peace talks, for the
first time, some progress is made; however, not toward
an armistice. A list of prisoners is exchanged, provid-
ing some accountability on the subject of missing and
actually held prisoners. The list contains the names of
3,198 U.S. troops and of these, only 61 Marines (in-
cluding 2 U.S. Navy corpsmen) are held. As the U.N.
hands its list of Communist prisoners to the enemy
representatives, the Chinese become disgruntled. The
names have been changed into English, making it dif-
ficult for the translation back to the Oriental characters.
The Chinese attempt in vain to retrieve their list. This
transfer of names is the final one until 1953 at the time
of the initial prisoner of war transfer (Operation LIT-
TLE SWITCH).
Names of some captured during October, Novem-
ber and December of this year are not included in the
Communist list, creating anxiety in the States for some
families, who are not aware of the respective captives
until April 1953.
December 19 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, relieves
the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, in Operation
FAREWELL, the final mission for Lt. Colonel George W.
Herring (commander HMR-1). Herring soon after de-
parts for the States to become commander, Marine He-
licopter Experimental Squadron at Quantico, Virginia.
Lt. Colonel Mitchell remains as executive officer, but
Colonel Keith B. McCutcheon succeeds Herring.
In Air Force activity, planes attached to the 307th
Bomber Wing strike the marshaling yard complex at
Chongju.
 809
A group of troops (1st Cavalry Division) gather around a small container of burning gasoline trying to
keep warm. The poncho of the soldier on the left seems to be hung up on the tree. The 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion is preparing to move back to Japan during mid–December.
December 20 Enemy positions at Wonsan are
struck by a combined attack of surface warships and
planes. Also, the Hungnam Blockade and Bombard-
ment Element, TE 95.24, is established. The unit is
ordered to patrol the area and prevent the Communists
from returning to re-mine areas already cleared; how-
ever, its responsibilities also include the destruction of
enemy forces operating in the vicinity of the Chaho-
Hungnam area.
In yet other activity, U.S. and British ships are or-
dered to establish an anti-invasion station in the vicin-
ity of Cho-do and Sokto Islands, located on the west
coast of Korea. The ships involved include the USS
Manchester (CL 83), USS Eversole (DD 789), HMS To-
bruk (DD) and the HMS Alacrity (PF). The HMS To-
bruk, actively supporting LSTs landing troops at the
islands, is struck by enemy fire, but no damage is sus-
tained.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches planes
to strike enemy rails and other selected targets between
Sinanju and Sukch’on. The combined total sorties by
all units is 530. The raids make thirty cuts in the rails;
a supply depot at Kunu-ri is also struck.
December 22 Another sighting of a Commu-
nist jet aircraft, unlike the MiG-15 and similar to the
F-86, confirms the arrival of the MiG-21 in the Korean
Theater.
December 25, 1951
In Naval activity, the LST 661 operating at the
Amgak peninsula near Sokto receives slight damage
after being hit by enemy shore gun fire. No casualties
are sustained.
December 23 At Koje-do, the POWs attack and
kill ten prisoners. Later on this same night, in another
compound, during another melee, fourteen POWs are
killed and twenty-four others are wounded. No action
is taken to discover the perpetrators.
December 24 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, nineteen patrols move out and return at
dawn on Christmas Day. Enemy contact is made by
only two patrols and in each incident, short firefights
erupted with enemy patrols. Meanwhile, the enemy
has some long-range contact with the U.S. Navy. The
guns of the USS St. Paul, a cruiser, blasts enemy posi-
tions and destroys 7 enemy bunkers.
In Air Force activity, B-29s attached to the 98th
Bomber Wing make a Christmas Eve run and strike a
railroad bridge at Sinanju and the airfield at Taech’on.
In Naval activity, on the west coast of Korea, an LST
completes the evacuation of more than 7,000 refugees
from Cho-do, Paengnyong-do and Taechong-do Is-
lands.
December 25 Eighth Army celebrates Christ-
mas in Korea. Turkeys are cooked and eaten by troops
December 26, 1951 810

Elements (179th Regiment) of the recently arrived 45th Division enjoy hot food during a pause on a
mountainside.
 811 December 27, 1951

Mail call: A truck is loaded with mail for the troops around Ch’onchon, delivered by a C-119.

all across the lines. At sea, the cooks provide similar cause is not certain, but it is thought the loss was due
Christmas dinners for the sailors and aviators. to an enemy mine.

December 26 A heavy snow blankets the entire
Eighth Army area. The elements prevent any major pa-
trol activity.
In Naval activity, a South Korean vessel, ROKN PC
740, is lost in Wonsan Harbor off To-do Island. The
December 27 The agreed upon thirty-day cease
fire concludes; however, it is proclaimed that both sides
renew the agreement, which is to remain in effect in-
definitely.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces executes 900
Late December 1951
Christmas mail gets some extra protection. A Sherman tank laden with sacks of mail heads for the front
lines.
sorties. The planes strike various enemy targets, includ-
ing artillery positions, locomotives, rail cars and other
structures.
In Naval activity, Sosuap-To, located on the west
coast of Korea, falls to the Communists.
Late December 1951 In the I Corps sector,
the Communists launch a series of raids against the
ROK 3rd Division. The enemy force, at about bat-
talion strength, strikes at positions in the eastern
mountains area under the support of artillery and
mortars. The ROKs lose one outpost and afterward,
they launch two counterattacks to recapture the po-
sition, but both attacks fail. Finally a third assault re-
gains the outpost. The enemy makes no further at-
tempt to take the ground.
December 28 On this day, an enemy force, clad
in white parkas to blend in with the snow, attacks the
1st ROK Division sector during the afternoon. The
clash in the freezing cold lasts about forty minutes. The
South Koreans are eventually pushed back by the enemy
force, estimated at about battalion strength. On the
30th, the ROKs launch a counterattack with the sup-
port of tanks and manage to recapture only about 900
yards of the lost territory, failing to regain the outpost.
Nevertheless, on the following day, the high ground is
seized, but still, the outpost remains under Chinese
control at the start of the New Year. A stronger attack
is launched on 3 January 1952.
In Air Force activity, a 4-plane flight attached to the
25th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-
Interceptor Group, led by 1st Lieutenant Paul E. Roach,
812
encounters two MiGs near Yongsang-dong. Roach leads
an attack and downs one of the MiGs, which crashes.
The pilot is able to eject.
December 29 The USS Eversole (DD 789)
comes under attack by an aircraft during the darkened
hours while the ship is operating on the west coast of
Korea south of Sokto Island, but no damage is sus-
tained.
In other Naval activity, on the west coast, friendly
guerrillas attack and regain Sosuap-to Island.
December 30 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, is di-
rected to prepare for a raid to be executed on the night
of 1–2 January 1952. The unit delegated to initiate the
raid is Company H.
December 31 The year comes to an end with
an armistice that is not actually an armistice, but it is
in conjunction with a war that is not officially a war, at
least if it is referred to by people not on the battlefield.
In Korea, to the troops, it has been and continues to be
a war; later it is often referred to as the “Forgotten
War.” However, no serviceman who spends even one
day in the Korean conflict, particularly during winter,
will ever forget it.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, when
the Marines first introduced the helicopter to the battle-
field earlier this year, there had been much speculation
about the vulnerability of the choppers. However, in
addition to establishing the helicopter as the newest
weapon on the front lines, the performance of the
 813 December 31, 1951

Thanks to an armed escort of Sabre jets, Santa makes it to visit with some of the troops in Korea.

Marine pilots and their coordinators had been sterling.
As 1951 phases out, not one helicopter pilot has been lost
to enemy fire. Several planes, however, have been lost.
During the month of December, Marine ground
troops had requested air support 22 times, but the Ma-
rine pilots remain under Fifth Air Force control, re-
stricting close-air support. Only five requests received
air support.
Also during December, despite the lack of any major
combat operations, the Marines while on patrols sus-
Top: A halftrack (Quad .50) on guard. The vehicle is barely visible due to the ice and snow. Bottom: Win-
ter 1951 in Korea.
 815
tain 24 killed (including the 1st Korean Marine Regi-
ment), 139 wounded and 8 missing. The enemy sustains
246 killed (counted) and 56 captured. Also, at the
1952
Early 1952 The Communists begin organized
disruptions in the prison compounds on Koje-do,
in response to the initiation of screening prisoners
to weed out hard-liners. The Communists resist and
attack the guards. The first compound to undergo the
inspections is met by POWs with hand-made
weapons. One soldier is killed and about 75 prison-
ers are killed. On April 10, medical personnel are at-
tacked when they enter a compound. During early
One piece of the Eighth Army artillery that bombarded enemy positions during January.
January 1952
stroke of midnight, the 11th Marines, a long way from
Times Square, rings in the New Year by initiating a tu-
multuous bombardment of enemy positions.
May, Brigadier General Francis T. Dodd, the com-
mander at Koje-do, is briefly taken prisoner by the
captives. Rioting by the Communists had occurred
since the previous year. Between April 1951 and July
1952, about 115 prisoners die during the period of
unrest.
January 1952 In Air Force activity, Far East Air
Forces continues to fight uphill against the MiG
January 1, 1952
threat. While the U.S. pilots continue to control the
skies, it is from sheer intensity rather than raw num-
bers. The Air Force, due to lack of resources, a lin-
gering problem that goes all the way back to Congres-
sional cuts following the close of World War II,
impedes progress. The planes, particularly the neme-
sis of the MiGs, the Sabre jets, lack spare parts. This
jeopardizes entire units. About 45 percent of the
Sabres are out of action.
The units are so over-extended that they urgently
need external tanks and they are near total exhaus-
tion. Consequently, the planes carry out missions
with less fuel (only one external tank) than required
and often the planes need to return too early from a
mission or face ditching for lack of fuel. All the
while, the Communists continue to add more MiGs
to their arsenal and still they have the opposite bank
of the Yalu as a line of safety where the Sabres dare
not go, due to orders.
By this time, the North Korean airfields have had
such a thrashing that the Communists now stage
their planes in Manchuria at Antung and other
places. The MiG formations come to be called trains
by the Americans. A usual day includes two separate
attack or interceptor groups departing Manchuria,
and afterward both converge on Pyongyang to re-
turn to Manchuria as one group.
January 1 — February 2 1952 Fast Carrier Task
Force (TF-77), using the full moon to its advantage,
strikes against enemy rails during the pre-dawn
hours (Operation MOONLIGHT SONATA). The raids
A 2nd Division patrol sets out on a reconnaissance mission.
816
continue until 2 February to damage the enemy’s
rails and isolate locomotives and leave them vulner-
able for later air attacks.
January 1 The U.N. initiates a mission composed
of an artillery bombardment and air strikes against
Communist positions. The mission continues through
the end of January.
In other activity, Kimpo airfield is bombed by an
aircraft that is not identified. The two bombs cause
some damage, including to one USAF F-86. In addi-
tion, two bombs drop on Inchon, again by an uniden-
tified aircraft.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, at this
time, the attached units serving with the 1st Marine
Division are the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment,
the 1st Korean Artillery Battalion and the U.S. Army
Searchlight Company. Another attached unit is Bat-
tery C, 1st 4.5 Rocket Battalion.
Also, a patrol initiated on New Year’s Eve becomes the
first Marine unit to engage the enemy during 1952. At
slightly after midnight, the ambush patrol of Company
B, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, clad in white to blend in
with the snow, waits patiently as an enemy patrol moves
to within about five yards of its positions, then opens
fire. Of the six-man enemy patrol, one is killed and it
is estimated that four others are wounded, but due to
the darkness, the enemy is able to vanish and prevent
the capture of prisoners. The patrol sustains no casu-
alties and returns to friendly lines at 0400.
In other activity, during the night of 1–2 January,
 817 January 1, 1952

A column is en route to deliver a New Year’s dinner to Company L, 21st Regiment, 2nd Division, at their
snowed in positions near Kumsong.

Company H, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, clad in white
suits, moves out in the snow from Hill 812 heading to-
ward the first objective, only to find the bunkers va-
cated. Afterward, the unit closes upon the second ob-
jective at the Soyang-gang River. Soon after, twelve
Marines pass through a suspected mined area, but the
next man in line detonates a mine. Newly distributed
thermal boots prevent the more serious wounds that
usually occur.
An ambush is set in motion, but no enemy is en-
countered. The condition of the wounded Marine
forces the unit to pull back rather than advance to the
January 2, 1952
next objective. The contingent moves back in two sep-
arate groups on the chance that some prisoners might
be gained. One of the columns does capture two North
Korean troops. This raid takes place in the same area
where heavy combat had ensued during the previous
September.
Also, the Communists control the dominating
ground near the left-central positions of the Marine
perimeter, particularly the nasty terrain west of Hill
812, where distances of only about 100–150 yards sep-
arate the two forces.
— In the United States: General Lemuel C. Shep-
herd, Jr., is succeeded by Lieutenant General Franklin
C. Hart as commander Fleet Marine Force, Pacific.
Shepherd in turn becomes Commandant of the Ma-
rine Corps, succeeding General Clifton B. Cates, whose
term ends.
January 2 In the X Corps area, the 2nd Division
dispatches patrols from the vicinity of Kumsong. The
troops are clad in white uniforms to blend in with the
snow.
January 3 In the I Corps sector, the task of evict-
ing the Chinese from an outpost they had seized from
the ROK 1st Division during the latter part of Decem-
ber 1951 continues. On this day, a heavy attack is
launched, following several lighter assaults that failed.
The South Koreans continue to pound against stiff re-
sistance, but finally on 8 January, the hill is regained.
January 4 During the night of the 4th-5th, more
than 100 Yak fighters are spotted in the vicinity of the
front lines, signaling the enemy’s increased ability to
place large numbers of propeller aircraft in the air to at-
tack U.N. positions after sunset.
In other activity, the I Corps is coming under in-
creasing pressure from the enemy against its left flank
on the Kimpo peninsula and Kangwha Island. Cruis-
ers attached to CTF-95 are ordered to move into the
area to bolster I Corps.
January 5 Enemy shore guns on the northern
edge of Amgak peninsula commence firing against the
USS Swallow (AMS 36), hindering its mine clearing
operations north of Sokto in the Murad channel. Other
warships and planes operating nearby respond to the
fire and eliminate the threat.
January 6 In Air Force activity, a patrol of F-86s,
composed of seven planes attached to the 25th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-Interceptor Group,
spots a band of four MiGs near Wongsong. The Sabres
attack. One of the MiGs is downed by Major William
T. Whisner Jr.
In Naval activity, Naval Task Force 95 (U.N.
Blockading and Escort Force) receives responsibility
for the protection of the eleven coastal islands north of
the 38th Parallel (East and West coasts) and four addi-
tional islands south of the 38th Parallel on the west
coast, the latter containing special U.S. Air Force equip-
ment. The task had previously been handled by Eighth
818
Army (land defense) and TF-95. The move is in reac-
tion to the earlier seizure of two western islands near the
mouth of the Yalu River by the Communists during
November 1951.
The task is handed to two blockading task groups
in the east and west respectively. Task Group (TG) 95.1
(West) is assigned responsibility for six islands, Sok-to
and Cho-do, each located between the 38th and 39th
Parallels. The others, Paengyong-do, Taechong-do,
Yongpyong-do and Tokchok-do, stand between the
37th and 38th Parallels. Task Group (TG) 95.2 (East)
takes responsibility for nine islands, each above
the 38th Parallel in Wonsan harbor and held by friendly
forces. They are Mo-do, Sin-do, So-do, Tae-do,
Hwangto-do, Ung-do and Yo-do. Another island
group of two lies north of Wonsan, with Yang-do being
the largest and Nan-do south of it below Wonsan.
During the latter part of 1951, U.S. Marines had
been dispatched to the most strategic islands to act as
advisors to the Korean Marines. The Marines assume
command of the island defenses for both task groups
during early 1952; however, the bulk of the fighting is
handled by the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment. In
other naval activity, a small boat used by X Corps to
gather intelligence encounters the USS Erben (DD 631)
off KoJo, Korea; however, the small craft is not
equipped with the proper identification signals and it
is mistakenly thought to be an enemy craft. The Erben
sinks it.
January 7 The 40th Division initiates its rede-
ployment from Japan to Korea to join IX Corps and
relieve the 24th Division. The first echelon lands at In-
chon on 11 January. Soon after, the 160th Regiment
moves out for the positions of the 24th Division. The
40th Division, a California National Guard unit, ini-
tially arrived in Japan the previous April.
In Air Force activity, a 4-plane patrol attached to the
25th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-
Interceptor Group, encounters a band of 12 MiGs in the
skies over Uiju and an air battle erupts. One MiG is
downed by Captain John M. Heard.
January 10 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 5th Marines is relieved by the 7th
Marines. The 5th Marines reverts to reserve.
In other activity, subsequent to several days of adapt-
ing to new techniques, Helicopter Squadron HMR-
161 executes a new mission, Operation CHANGIE-
CHANGIE, which transports a battalion to relieve
another, but the troops (2nd Battalion, 7th Marines) are
lifted to relieve the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines. The
troops are delivered to the company perimeters rather
than on a battalion level.
January 11 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, Major General John T. Selden succeeds
Major General Gerald C. Thomas as commander, 1st
Marine Division.
In other activity, Operation MOUSETRAP is initiated
to test HMR-161’s ability to quickly execute a mission
 819
against guerrillas. At 1000, the operation gets underway
and shortly thereafter, 500 Marines are lifted to a land-
ing site, pre-cleared by the Air Delivery Platoon. Sev-
eral additional operations are executed during the fol-
lowing three days. The operations go well and
experience only minor problems.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns on Ho-do Pando
commence firing upon the USS Redstart (AM 378) and
USS Dextrous (AM 341), both of which are engaged in
mine clearing operations, but lack protective warships.
The ships move to get out of range, but the Dextrous
sustains multiple direct hits at just under 5,000 yards
from shore. The damage is slight; however, one crew-
man is killed and two others are wounded.
In other activity, the USS Gregory (DD 802) and
USS Mackenzie (DD 836) trade fire with enemy shore
guns at Wonsan. The warships, following an exchange
of about one hour, sustain no damage or casualties. In
contrast, the naval vessels score damage against the
enemy positions.
January 12 In the X Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, elements of company L, 38th Regiment, launch
an attack against enemy positions in the vicinity of
Ponggilli. The vanguard, a lead platoon, comes under
fire from two separate directions while it begins its as-
cent on the elevation. Corporal Ronald E. Rosser, a
forward observer (Heavy Mortar Company), transfers
his radio to another soldier and with only his carbine
and grenades, charges the blockage. Rosser destroys the
first bunker, then moves against the next obstacle. He
encounters and eliminates seven enemy troops en route
to the bunker, which he then destroys with a grenade.
Two defenders are also killed, but Rosser expends his
ammunition.
After a brief and harrowing trip back through the
intense fire, Rosser acquires an abundance of ammuni-
tion and then reinitiates his singlehanded attack. The
next bunker in line falls to Rosser, who seems in-
domitable. Rosser is accompanied this time by other
soldiers, but each of them is hit by enemy fire. Never-
theless, Rosser drives ahead, ignoring the fire. He attacks
two additional bunkers until he again exhausts his am-
munition. Still defying the odds, he returns to the pla-
toon and gets more ammunition, then attacks once
again. He sprints to the crest, deposits grenades in the
bunkers and expends his ammunition.
As the platoon withdraws, the wounded Rosser halts
several times to retrieve other wounded troops. Cor-
poral Rosser survives the ordeal and becomes a recipi-
ent of the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary hero-
ism and courage in the face of enemy fire.
In Air Force activity, U.S. Sabre jets on patrol dis-
cover three enemy trains, each heading for the security
of a tunnel. The jets plaster the opening of the tunnel
and collapse it to block passage. Afterward, the trains
are raked by fire from the planes. The attack destroys
some boxcars and two of the three locomotives.
In other activity, the Air Force initiates a two-day
mission to destroy a strategic enemy bridge. Ten
January 23, 1952
Superfortressess based on Okinawa continue to strike
the railroad bridge that spans the Ch’ongch’on River
east of Sinanju. The bridge is damaged heavily and ren-
dered out of service following the delivery of 396 500-
pound HE bombs.
January 13 Enemy positions on Amgak peninsula
come under air and surface vessel attack. Marine planes
attached to the USS Badoeng Strait (CVE 116) partic-
ipate. In addition, the destroyer USS Collett (DD 730)
and the USS Rochester (CA 124), attached to CTF-95,
pound the positions from the sea.
Also, CTF-95 initiates Operation JUNKET, a mis-
sion designed to seize, rather than destroy, small enemy
vessels for the intent of using them for intelligence and
other purposes.
January 14 The 7th fleet learns that Ohwa Is-
land is now under Communist control. The Commu-
nists had also seized Sunwi-do on the 8th and
Changnin-do on the 10th. It becomes clear that their
next objectives are Walle-do and Yuk-to.
January 16 In Naval activity, enemy positions at
Wonsan continue to come under naval bombardment
by warships of TE-95.21 and TF-77. This day begins
the twelfth month of non-stop bombardment.
January 17 In Air Force activity, a pair of F-86
Sabre jets encounters MiGs in the vicinity of Puchin.
The two enemy planes close from 6 o’clock and the
Sabres take evasive action to maneuver and take the of-
fensive; however, when the F-86s make a sharp turn
and the MiGs follow, both of the enemy planes break
up as they cross the jet wash. While both MiGs fall in
shattered pieces, the two Communist pilots are ob-
served drifting down in their respective parachutes.
January 18 The destroyer USS Halsey Powell
(DD 686) uses its small boat to move in close at Sam-
he and direct its guns against lucrative targets. The op-
eration is dubbed CHICKEN STEALER. Shore batteries
fire at the Halsey Powell, but no damage is reported.
On the following day, again, the Halsey Powell comes
under fire, but no damage is scored.
January 19 In the IX Corps sector, the 160th Reg-
iment, 40th Division, completes its relief of the 19th
Infantry Regiment, 24th Division.
January 22 The 40th Division is attached to
Eighth Army (IX Corps).
January 23 The operation to evacuate refugees
from islands threatened by the Communists on the west
coast of Korea is completed as four LSTs, attached to
TF-90, remove the final civilians before the mission is
suspended due to an outbreak of typhoid. The opera-
tion, which began during the previous December, has
moved more than 20,00 people to other locations in
South Korea.
In other activity, the carrier USS Philippine Sea (CV
47) arrives to join the 7th Fleet.
January 24, 1952
January 24 An experimental operation dubbed
Operation HELICOPTER, in which the wounded on the
front lines are evacuated and flown directly to the hos-
pital ship, USS Consolation (AH 15), docked at the port
of Sokch’o-ri, is completed this day. It began on 21
December 1951. The vessel is the only hospital ship to
have a landing pad to receive helicopters.
January 25 A downed pilot in the Yellow Sea be-
comes the focus of a rescue helicopter that attempts to
pick him up while under fire. A contingent of F-84s
in the area blasts the ground troops to keep them from
bringing harm to the pilot, located close to shore. Dur-
ing the retrieval mission, the F-84s engage enemy
planes and three MiGs are destroyed.
In other activity, six enemy aircraft are destroyed this
day and another four are damaged. The U.S. reports
no losses. Also, a 4-plane flight of F-86 Sabres, attached
to the 16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-
Interceptor Group, spot a MiG in the vicinity of
Yongsan. One pilot, Major William F. Shaeffer, flying
in the third position, closes on the enemy aircraft and
downs the plane with several short bursts of machine
gun fire. The pilot is spotted after he ejects.
January 26 While operating in waters in the vicin-
ity of the southeast Cho-do anchorage, enemy shore bat-
teries on the mainland fire upon the destroyer escort USS
Fletcher (DDE 445) and the USS Apache (ATF 67). No
damage is sustained by the vessels; however, reports from
the HMS Belfast indicate that return fire from the U.S.
warships inflicted damage to the batteries.
Also, the HMS Belfast and the Constance (DD) come
under fire from enemy batteries on the Wolsari penin-
sula. The warships return fire and eliminate the threat.
The vessels sustain no damage.
In Air Force activity, Captain A.T. Thawley, while op-
erating his F-84 near the Yellow Sea, is shot down behind
enemy lines. Soon after, a rescue helicopter arrives and
while under fire, succeeds in safely retrieving him.
January 28 In the IX Corps sector, the 223rd Reg-
iment completed the relief of 21st Regiment by 28 Jan-
uary. The 40th Division assumes responsibility for the
area that includes Kumsong and Chwapae-ri.
Also, the 5th RCT and the 6th Tank Battalion are at-
tached to the 40th Division. By early February, the
224th Regiment, still in Japan, and the 140th Tank
Battalion will join the main body. During February,
like other units in Korea, the division has no major ac-
tion, but it does dispatch patrols and some enemy con-
tact is made.
January 29 Two planes operating off the USS
Antietam are lost while engaged against the enemy, but
one pilot is saved. In addition, another aircraft on the
Antietam, a Panther jet (F9F), is lost due to non-com-
bat causes.
January 30 Enemy positions at Wonsan are
struck by planes and naval surface fire by Task Element
77.
820
January 31 In Air Force activity, during the
month of January, despite the acute parts shortages, in-
cluding external tanks and Sabre wings, the weakened
squadrons still score victories. The 51st Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wing shoots down 27 MiG-15s and the 4th
Fighter Interceptor Wing scores five kills. The 51st is
equipped with the more advanced F-86E, while the
4th FIW still flies the F-86As. The improved Sabre
contains an advanced fire control system and flight con-
trols.
February 1 Rear Admiral John Perry, who as-
sumed command of Fast Carrier Task Force 77 during
the previous November, is relieved by Rear Admiral
F.W. McMahon. In related activity, TF-77 modifies its
operations plan by adding two daily strikes by propel-
lor driven planes. Also, the USS Essex (CV-9) departs
TF-77. It is replaced by the arrival of the USS Valley
Forge (CV-45).
February 2 The Communists abandon Sunwi-
do and Yoncho-do.
In Air Force activity, Colonel Ernest G. Ford assumes
command of the 18th Fighter Bomber Wing. He suc-
ceeds Colonel Turner C. Rogers, who held the post
since February 1951. Rogers returns to the States, fol-
lowing fifty missions, to become deputy commander of
the Crew Training Air Force at Randolph Air Force
Base.
February 3 The USS Manchester (CL 83) and
the destroyer USS Higbee (DD 806), which screens the
cruiser Manchester, are operating off Hojo. The Man-
chester pounds the enemy’s positions and scores direct
hits on an ammunition dump. The bombardment ig-
nites secondary explosions and it is estimated that about
550 enemy soldiers are killed or wounded.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Porterfield (DD
682), operating off Cho-do Island, sustains damage
from enemy shore gun battery fire, but no casualties
occur. Due to a shortage of spotter aircraft, Fifth Air
Force informs the U.S. Navy that the ongoing spotter
mission will be suspended for ten days.
February 4 The HMS Ceylon (CL) and HMS
Cockade (DD) provide protection during a landing at
Mudo-ri Island by friendly guerrillas. The guerrillas
debark the LSTs 516 and 692 and land without oppo-
sition.
In other activity, the USS Endicott (DMS 35), re-
ceives some slight damage while operating off Kojo,
but there are no casualties. Also, another carrier, the
USS Philippine Sea (CV 47), begins operations with
TF-77.
February 5 Friendly guerrillas are rescued at an
island in the vicinity of Yuk-to. The HMS Charity, the
rocket ship LSMR 401 and ROKN AMC 303 partic-
ipate.
February 7 In Air Force activity, Colonel William
H. Clark assumes command of the 18th Fighter
Bomber Wing. He succeeds Colonel Ernest G. Ford.
 821
In Naval activity, the USS Osprey (AMS–28) comes
under fire at Songjin and receives support from the
HMS Alacrity. The British warship is struck five times
and sustains some slight damage; however, no casual-
ties are reported.
In other activity, the Communists abandon the is-
lands of Yuk-to, Mudo-ri, Changnin-do, Ohwa-do,
Sunwi-do, Yongho-do and Yongwi-do off the west
coast of Korea, due to extreme pressure from rocket
ship bombardments and elements of the 1st South Ko-
rean Marine Regiment. In turn, the islands are occupied
by friendly guerrillas.
February 8 The Communists attack and seize
Mahap. The friendly guerrillas there are evacuated by
the HMAS Warramunga.
In other activity, a helicopter aboard the USS Man-
chester takes off on a mission to rescue a Navy pilot and
his crewman at a point about 25 miles from Wonsan.
The helicopter arrives safely, but it is not able to take
off due to mechanical problems. Another helicopter
attached to the U.S. Air Force arrives to rescue all, but
enemy fire prevents the chopper from landing. On the
following day, the rescue attempts are aborted when it
is learned that the troops had been seized by the Com-
munists. Planes from TF-77 destroy the disabled hel-
icopter.
In yet other activity, other aircraft losses for this day
by TF-77 include one helicopter from USS Rochester
(CA 124), and one AD and one F4U from the USS
Valley Forge (CV 45).
Also, Marine Fighter Squadron 212 relocates its
command post on the USS Badoeng Strait (CVE 116)
to Itami, Japan.
February 9–10 1952 In the X Corps zone,
1st Marine Division sector, the 11th Marines initi-
ates a massive artillery barrage to present the illusion
of cover fire to support a withdrawal as part of Op-
eration CLAM-UP, scheduled to commence on 10
February. More than 12,000 rounds are fired; how-
ever, other Eighth Army units across the front also
carry out similar exercises to deceive the enemy.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches
light bombers to strike a rail bridge at Chongju. The
planes, using radar controlled bombs, drop one hun-
dred tons of 500-pound bombs. The mission suc-
ceeds in disabling the north bypass span.
February 10 Eighth Army initiates Operation
CLAM-UP, designed to give the illusion of a withdrawal;
however, it is set to fool the enemy into sending out
patrols to allow Eighth Army the possibility of seizing
prisoners at any point along the front.
In the IX Corps sector, the 40th Division participates
in Operation CLAM-UP.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, all
regiments on line, the 7th Marines, 5th Marines and the
1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment, from right to left,
display an intent to withdraw, while the reserves, the 5th
Marines at the rear, withdraw and await darkness to be
February 12, 1952
returned to their positions by vehicles. Later this night,
enemy patrols probe, but receive no return fire from
the Marines.
In Air Force activity, a four-plane contingent of the
334th Fighter Squadron, 4th Fighter Group, is inter-
cepted by a group of Russian MiGs near the
Manchurian border. Just prior to the contact, two of the
Sabre jets had returned to base due to one of the planes
having exhausted its oxygen. The remaining two aircraft
continue to guard the accompanying fighter bombers on
their mission.
Both of the Sabre jets take on the MiGs. Major
George A. Davis, Jr., flies directly into the enemy for-
mation and knocks down one of the MiGs, while the
others focus their fire upon his plane. Davis, however,
takes out another of the MiGs and then afterward,
rather than use evasive action to avoid being shot down,
he slows his speed to down a third plane, but the enemy
fire scores a direct hit and Major Davis’ Sabre jet crashes
into a mountain.
In the meantime, the MiGs are disrupted and the
fighter bombers are able to complete their mission.
Major Davis is awarded the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary heroism in the face of the enemy. He was
an ace of the Korean War and World War II. Prior to
his demise, Davis achieved 14 air victories over the
enemy, including two that were shot down on 30 No-
vember 1951. There is some conflict on Davis’ num-
ber of kills this day. The official Medal of Honor cita-
tion lists three. A New York newspaper this same day
reports one kill and three probable kills. On 12 Febru-
ary the Air Force modifies the record, changing it to
two kills and one probable. There is no combat footage
of the air battle. (See also, November 30, 1951, In Air
Force activity.
February 11 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, after dark, a North Korean patrol probes
Marine lines near Hill 812. The Marines ignore the in-
trusion initially as Operation CLAM-UP continues. The
Communists attack using white phosphorous grenades,
prompting the Marines to acknowledge their presence.
The enemy sustains 10 killed and two others, both
wounded, are captured.
— In Japan: Elements of Marine Fighter Squadron
VMF-115 arrive at Yokosuka, Japan, from the United
States. Also, the Command Post, Marine Fighter
Squadron 312, moves from Itami Air Base to the USS
Bairoko (CVE 115), and Marine Fighter Squadron 212
departs Itami for Pusan, Korea. The LST 742 remains
active with the evacuation of refugees. It picks up about
600 at one point before moving to Sunwi-do to evac-
uate about 1,800 others, before transporting all to Kun-
san.
February 12 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Communists continue to probe the Ma-
rine perimeter, while the Marines continue the feint of
a withdrawal. At about dawn, the enemy attempts to
probe deeper and encounters a rapid response from the
1st Marines. The short exchange costs the enemy 9 killed
February 13, 1952
(counted) and 3 wounded. By this time, the Communists
conclude that Eighth Army had not withdrawn.
In Naval activity, despite continuous mine sweeping
operations in the vicinity, new mines continue to be
discovered.
February 13 The Communists commence ar-
tillery barrages against Eighth Army positions.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Communists launch after dark raids against Hills 812
and 854, which reconfirms that Eighth Army had in fact
not withdrawn. The enemy sustains heavy casualties.
February 14 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Communists repeat the attacks of the
previous day by launching night raids against Hill 812
and 854, only to suffer similar results and high casual-
ties. In the 2nd Division sector, a contingent engages
an enemy force. The Americans and accompanying
ROKs sustain some casualties.
February 15 Operation CLAM-UP ceases follow-
ing five days of attempting to convince the enemy a
withdrawal had been made. The operation had not
been too successful. Fewer prisoners had been seized
than during the five-day period that preceded the op-
eration. In addition, while the enemy patrols sustain
heavy casualties after venturing into the trap, the other
enemy lines had received a reprieve due to the silence
of Eighth Army’s artillery.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
Marines terminate their portion of Operation CLAM-UP
and the results are satisfactory. The enemy losses in the
zone amount to 56 killed (counted) and 54 wounded.
A wounded soldier (2nd Division) receives aid from a medic on 14 February. Other troops help an ROK
soldier reach the medic.
822
In Naval activity, Escort Squadron 5 is disbanded.
Ships that are shifted to Escort Squadron 7 include the
Sausalito (PF 4), Albuquerque (PF 7), Everett (PF 8),
Bayonne (PF 21), Newport (PF 27) and the Evansville
(PF 70). Also, Australian destroyer HMAS Bataan
comes under fire while operating off Sokto Cho-do,
but no damage is sustained and no casualties occur.
February 16 At Wonsan, it has been exactly one
year since the bombardments started. On this day, the
warships USS Gregory (DD 802), USS Twining (DD
547), and USS Rowan (DD 782) pound enemy posi-
tions.
In other activity, the U.S. Army introduces its own
version of aircraft for the forward observers. The L-19
Bird Dog handles forward air control to spot enemy
artillery positions and other tasks such as enemy posi-
tions. With the arrival of the aircraft, the Fifth Air Force
no longer has to provide planes for the task.
February 17 Planes attached to TE-95.1 strike
enemy targets at Sokto and Cho-do. The strikes are
supported by the naval surface guns of British warships,
including the HMS Ceylon (CL), HMS Cardigan Bay
(PF), HMCS Nootka (DDE), HMCS Athabaskan
(DDE) and HMAS Bataan (DD). In addition the
rocket ship, LSMR 403 participates.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches attacks
against enemy rails and other lucrative targets. The
strike force executes 695 sorties that take out vehicles
in a convoy in the vicinity of Sinanju and supply
depots stretched between Kumsong and Sibyong-ni.
The planes cut the rails in more than 50 places.
 823
February 18 By this date, the islands of Wi-do,
Pa-do, Dunmad-do and Yongho-do are under the con-
trol of the Communists.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of planes from the 8th
Bombardment Squadron, 3rd Bombardment Group, at-
tack enemy supply columns during the night. A large
convoy is spotted and Captain Byron A. Dobbs requests
flares to illuminate the target. During the attack under the
lights, Dobbs’ aircraft is struck by ground fire. Dobbs in-
forms the flare plane that he is departing the area; how-
ever, a fire breaks out on board. Captain Dobbs maintains
control of the aircraft until the entire crew bails out.
February 19 On this day, 389 MiG-15s are
spotted in the skies over Korea, the largest number
counted on a single day up to this point in the conflict.
Air Force pilots down three enemy aircraft.
In other activity, in response to a Communist North
Korean proclamation for amnesty, it is learned by this
date that several ROKs and guerrillas are turning them-
selves in to the Communists under a guarantee of no
reprisals and a complete pardon, once they surrender
and confess to their crimes against the North Korean
government.
The Communists launch unsuccessful attacks this
day and the next against Yang-do and Nan-do in the
vicinity of Wonsan harbor. The defenders are sup-
ported by naval vessels.
February 20 A Communist force, subsequent to
a shore battery barrage, launches an amphibious raid
against the forces on Yang-do near Songjin. The assault
force from the mainland numbered about 250, but
heavy fire from naval warships shreds the sampans and
causes many casualties. The USS Shelton (DD 790),
HNZMS Taupo (PF) and the USS Endicott (DMS 35)
participate. By 1030, the mop-up operation is com-
pleted. Seventy-nine enemy dead are counted and 14
others are seized. The friendly forces on the island sus-
tain 8 killed, 3 missing and 20 wounded.
In other activity, Rear Admiral John Perry relieves
Rear Admiral F. W. McMahon as commander, Fast
Carrier Task Force 77.
February 21 A North Korean general officer
(N.K. 24th Mechanized Artillery) defects. Brigadier
General Lee II arrives at the island of Tae-do in Won-
san harbor aboard a confiscated sampan and surren-
ders to Marines. He brings along a wealth of informa-
tion contained in his briefcase that details Communist
top secrets, which include plans and tactics for pend-
ing attacks against selected Wonsan islands. Immedi-
ately after a debriefing, General Lee II is sped to Eighth
Army headquarters to be debriefed by intelligence.
February 22 A Marine plane attached to VMA-
312 passes over Paengyong-do and a second aircraft
follows dropping a message, apparently for the mem-
bers of Task Element 95.15 who are inspecting the anti-
aircraft weapons. The pilot drops the message, but in-
advertently, he also drops a 500-pound bomb. The
February 25, 1952
bomb hits slightly west of the command post. Although
much damage is sustained, no fatalities occur.
In other activity, Fifth Air Force announces for the sec-
ond time that spotter planes are in short supply, causing
another suspension of flights for a period of seven days.
In Naval activity, enemy shore battery fire strikes the
USS Shelton (DD 790), which is operating off Yang-do
Island in the vicinity of Songjin. Twelve crewmen are
wounded.
Also, an exchange erupts after shore batteries in the
southern section of Wonsan harbor fire upon the USS
Kyes (DD-787). The USS Rowan (DD-782), operating
nearby, arrives to bolster the Kyes and during the fight,
it is struck. The vessel has some damage, but no casu-
alties are sustained. Later, the destroyer USS Shelton
engages enemy shore batteries at Songjin in a contest
that lasts just over a half hour. The enemy fire hits the
Shelton three times and inflicts three casualties, each
grievously wounded.
February 23 The USS Henderson (DD 785) sus-
tains slight damage while operating off Hungnam, but
no casualties are sustained.
In Air Force activity, Major William T. Whisner, Jr.,
attached to the 25th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, en-
gages and downs a MiG-15. The aerial victory makes
Major Whisner an ace.
Fast Carrier Task Force 77 initiates an operation de-
signed to eliminate the threat against friendly islands by
Communist forces. According to naval reports, 303
small boats are destroyed and another 547 are dam-
aged between this date and March 5.
February 24 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, at Hill 884
is relieved by the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines. The relief
operation is carried out by HMR-161, in what is the 5th
major helicopter operation at the hill. Hill 884 is often
referred to as Helicopter Hill.
In Naval activity, in response to the increasing ac-
curacy of the enemy shore gun batteries in the vicinity
of the Sokto Cho-do area, Far East Air Forces is re-
quested by TG-95 to provide two aircraft and make
them available daily from 1730 through twilight, the
period following the departure of the carrier planes.
The threat by the guns is against friendly shipping.
February 25 At Pusan, a conference is convened
aboard the USS Wisconsin (BB-64) with U.S., British
and ROK naval officers in attendance to discuss various
priority items, including the shortage of resources ham-
pering operations. Rear Admiral G.C. Dyer, USN
(CTF-95), Vice Admiral Martin, USN (7th Fleet), Vice
Admiral Robert P. Briscoe, USN (7th Fleet), British
Rear Admiral Scott Moncrieff and Vice Admiral
Sohn (ROK) participate. Other subjects covered at the
meeting include a plan for evacuation in the event of a
cease-fire and the ongoing operations to maintain the
security of the islands.
In other activity, Marine Fighter Squadron 115 com-
mand post arrives at Pusan from Yokosuka, Japan. The
February 26, 1952 824

unit joins Marine Air Group 33. Marine Photo thirty others. Another six bunkers are eliminated when
Squadron VMJ-1 is established. the 224th Infantry Regimental Tank Battalion initiates
its part of the operation in the vicinity of Kumsong.
February 26 Far East Air Forces again launches
In Air Force activity, during the month of February,
raids against enemy bridge targets. Ten B-29 Super-
17 MiGs are shot down by Sabre jet pilots. Ten are
fortressess, using radar controlled bombs, plaster the
downed by the 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing and 7
Sinhung railroad bridge near Huichon. The planes drop
are downed by the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing. The
100 tons of bombs and the mission succeeds in destroy-
U.S. loses two Sabres, including that of Colonel Davis.
ing two spans of the bridge, located in the north cen-
(See also, February 10, 1952, In Air Force activity.)
tral sector of Korea.
In Naval activity, the U.S. Navy aborts its island
In other activity, Colonel Cecil H. Childre assumes
evacuation mission after determining that the Com-
command of the 315th Air Division (Combat Cargo).
munists on the various islands in the area of Raeju–
Childre succeeds Brigadier General John Henebry.
Ongjin have infiltrated the groups being relocated. All
February 27 Enemy shore guns on Mayang-do future evacuation missions will be monitored closely to
commence firing upon the USS Henderson (DD 785) include only those known to have supported the
and USS Ptarmigan (AM 576), while the warships are U.S.–U.N. forces. One exception includes those Kore-
engaged in mine clearing operations. Neither vessel sus- ans thought to be in line for Communist reprisals.
tains any damage.
In other activity, the ever-increasing sightings of
March 1952 In Air Force activity, during the
month of March, the Sabre jets down 37 MiGs and
MiGs continues. On this day, the observations of 86
during the following month, an additional 44 MiGs
F-86s spot and count 404 MiGs in the skies over the
are destroyed. The Americans lose six Sabre jets dur-
northwestern sector of Korea. This is the highest
ing the same period.
amount of enemy MiGs spotted to date on a single day.
February 28 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
March 1 The USS Endicott (DMS 35) comes
under fire from enemy shore batteries on the east coast
vision zone, HMR-161 Squadron is grounded due to re-
of Korea, east of Chuuronjang. The Endicott sustains no
peated failures of the tail assembly, which had caused
damage, but its return fire ends the threat.
several helicopters to make emergency landings. The
In other activity, Marine Fighter Squadron 312 is
problem, discovered to have been caused by the extreme
re-designated Marine Attack Squadron 312.
weather, is finally corrected by 14 March, when new
Also, intelligence reports indicate a large enemy
modified tail assemblies arrive in Korea from the U.S.
buildup in the vicinity of Cho-do, prompting the U.S.
In other activity, the month closes with an average of
Navy to initiate interdiction fire on this day and the
13 patrols per day, 5 daylight reconnaissance and 8
next to impede the enemy’s ability to launch an attack
night-patrols, most of which make no enemy contact.
against the suspected target, Re-do.
Only one of the night ambush patrols out of the last 185
reports enemy contact; only six contacts are reported
by the reconnaissance probes.
March 2 The USS Endicott, which had come
under fire on the previous day, again comes under fire
During the month of February, the Marine artillery
as it plasters enemy positions at Kyojo-Wan. No dam-
commences 679 “observed” firing missions. The targets:
age or casualties are reported.
211 against troops, 175 against bunkers, 96 against enemy
In other activity, the LCPL, attached to the LST 561,
artillery positions and 75 on other type targets. Also, the
founders off the west coast of Korea. Twelve men
90-mm guns of the 1st Marine Tank Battalion make ex-
aboard — two U.S. Navy and two U.S. Army officers,
cellent use of their elevated positions, particularly at Hills
one South Korean naval officer, five navy enlisted men
812 and 854. Aided by the 92nd U.S. Army Searchlight
and two Royal Marines — are all lost.
Company, the tankers are able to ring direct fire upon the
— In Japan: As a precaution in anticipation of a
enemy 24 hours a day. The searchlights provide illumina-
demonstration by Communists ( Japanese Communist
tion and simultaneously blind the enemy’s sight of the
Party), U.S. naval personnel at Chigasaki Beach are
tanks. Throughout the entire winter period, the Com-
evacuated.
munists fail to knock out any of the searchlights.
Marine casualties (including the 1st Korean Marine March 3 Vice Admiral R.P. Briscoe assumes
Corps Regiment) for the month of February, despite no command of the 7th Fleet. He succeeds Vice Admiral
heavy combat, amount to 23 killed, 102 wounded and 1 M. Martin.
missing in action. February is the final month in which Also, observers on warships and ROK sources report
the Marines deploy in east Korea. During the following that the Communists have, during darkness, con-
month, the 1st Marine Division redeploys in west Korea. structed new shore batteries on Ho-do Pando and at
other positions on the south shore of Wonsan harbor.
February 29 In the IX Corps Sector, the 40th Di-
vision initiates activity against the enemy in its zone of March 4 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
responsibility. Tanks of the 140th Tank Battalion, which zone, the ground Marines receive an air drop of 260
had arrived from Japan during early February, knock out tons of supplies and ammunition, compliments of fifty-
more than five enemy bunkers and damage more than one C-119s. It is the largest drop of the month in Korea.
 825 March 11, 1952

March 5 In Air Force activity, a downed naval pilot In other activity, Task Element 95.22 commences
near Yongyon is plucked from the ground by a hoist Operation ROOFLIFTER, a mission of short duration.
lowered from an Air Force rescue helicopter. During The warships enter Songjin harbor and plaster the
the rescue, jet fighters overhead continue to hammer buildings, destroying many. The vessels HMAS War-
antiaircraft positions to suppress enemy fire. The hel- ramunga (DD) and USS Moore (DD 747) participate.
icopter and the planes return to their respective bases
safely.
March 9 The USS Samuel N. Moore (DD 747)
and the HMS Morecombe Bay (PF), while operating off
In other activity, Lieutenant Robert H. Moore, at-
Songjin, direct their fire upon enemy gun emplace-
tached to the 16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (51st
ments, which had fired upon the USS Merganser (AMS
Fighter-Interceptor Wing) leads a 4-plane flight of F-
26). The guns are knocked out of action.
86s on patrol. Near Namsan-ni, the flight encounters
a pair of MiGs. The Sabres attack. Moore closes against
one of the two enemy planes and scores damage, but the
March 10 In Air Force activity, a four-plane flight
of F-86 Sabre jets attached to the 25th Fighter-
MiG continues to fly and begins a dive to evade
Interceptor Squadron (51st Fighter-Interceptor Wing)
Moore’s Sabre jet. Moore keeps the heat on the enemy
encounters four MiGs near Sinchang and an aerial bat-
pilot and stays on his tail, but during the deep dive,
tle erupts with the Americans downing one of the
the MiG breaks up and disintegrates.
enemy planes. Captain Paul R. Henderson, in the trail-
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns in the vicinity of
ing plane, strikes the first hit; however, his plane is so
Kalmagak commence firing upon the USS Pelican
close to the tail of the MiG that the fuel smacks his
(AMS 32) and the USS Curlew (AMS 8), both of which
windshield and blocks his view. His wingman, Lieuten-
are engaged in operations offshore. No damage or ca-
ant Sabin L. Anderson, takes over and downs the MiG.
sualties are sustained.
In other activity, Lieutenant Richard R. Martin, at-
In other activity, Rear Admiral F.W. McMahon, the
tached to the 16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (51st
commander of Carrier Division 5, assumes command
Fighter-Interceptor Wing), while leading a patrol com-
of Carrier Division 1, upon relief of Rear Admiral John
posed of four F-86s, encounters one MiG in the vicin-
Perry. Also, the USS Essex embarks for the United States
ity of Sakchu. The plane first spotted by Anderson is
after her first tour during the Korean War.
also downed by Anderson.
March 6–April 1 1952 Planes attached
to Fast Carrier Task Force 77 (TF 77) fly sorties to March 11 The destroyer USS Burke (DD 763),
destroy rails and bridges. The reports indicate 2,659 operating near Cho-do, comes under enemy shore gun
rail cuts and 123 bridges taken out, as well as dam- fire. The vessel sustains no damage, but its return fire
age to 43 other bridges. knocks out the enemy position.

An F4U Corsair prepares to take off on a mission.

March 11, 1952
Top: An F7F Tigercat (1st MAW), about to drop napalm tank on an enemy target. Bottom: Panther jet
during takeoff from an airfield in Korea.
In other activity, elements of Mine Squadron 3 en-
counter a new type of Russian mine while operating
aboard the USS Colonial (LSD-18). The mine (R-
MYaM) is secured and taken back for research. It had
been designed for shallow water as a moored contact
chemical-borne mine.
In yet other activity, the destroyer USS Arnold J. Isbel
(DD-869) screens the USS St. Paul (CA-73), a cruiser,
while she pounds enemy positions in the area south of
Chongjin. Also, a swarm of enemy swept-wing jet
826
fighters attacks two Marine photo planes (Banshee jets,
F2H-2P). The two planes survive, but both sustain
damage.
In Air Force activity, enemy positions in the vicinity
of Sinmak come under a heavy attack by Far East Air
Forces. The planes strike a massive military complex
on a four square mile area, and drop a huge amount of
napalm, 33,000 gallons. And the aircraft also drop 150
tons of bombs that hit targets there, including troop
training areas. Fifth Air Force reports indicate that the
 827
A ground crew loads rockets aboard a “Devilcat” Corsair prior to taking off on a mission.
raid is the largest napalm raid on a single day during the
war.
In other activity, Air Force planes initiate a two-day
attack against the Sinchang-ni choke point, located
about ten miles east of Sunchin. The raids are executed
by ten B-29 Superfortress that drop 91 tons of bombs
on the target. The bombs devastate the point and for-
bid passage.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps an-
nounces it will halt accepting draftees on 30 June due
to an increase in volunteers.
March 12 Eighth Army is in the process of a mas-
sive unit realignment across the entire front, which at
present stretches about 125 miles.
In the I Corps sector, 25th Division zone, a night pa-
trol composed of elements of the 24th Regiment en-
counters fierce opposition as it maneuvers near Sokso-
ri. The small contingent sustains high casualties and
only one medic is along. The corpsman, PFC Bryant E.
Womack, moves as quickly as possible jumping from ca-
sualty to casualty and he becomes wounded. Womack
disregards his own injury and continues to wedge be-
tween the downed troops to administer aid. But again,
he is hit, this time with mortar fire that tears off his
right arm. He refuses aid, aware that without it, he will
March 12, 1952
die. Nonetheless, he instructs other soldiers on how to
give the first aid to the other wounded. The patrol
withdraws and Womack is the final man to leave the
field, but shortly thereafter, while being carried by other
troops, he succumbs from loss of blood. PFC Wom-
ack is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
bravery and selfless sacrifice to save others in the com-
mand.
In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, Gen-
eral Van Fleet arrives at the division command post to
announce a key command decision. It involves the
Marines being redeployed on the far left of Eighth
Army area, where they are to relieve the 1st ROK Di-
vision in the I Corps sector (West Korea). The Marines
are to position themselves from where they hold re-
sponsibility to protect against intrusion along the pri-
mary and historic invasion route into the capital, Seoul.
Pursuant to orders (OI 272) from Eighth Army, the
move is to be completed by 1 April.
In Naval activity, a reconnaissance team lands on a
diminutive island slightly south of the Suwon Dam
lighthouse on an unspecified mission. The operation
is dubbed ALCATRAZ and reported as having been suc-
cessful.
In other activity, the HMS Cossack provides support
fire for friendly guerrillas that land in the vicinity of
March 13, 1952
Haeju at Cho-do Island. The naval fire, according to
reports by the guerrillas, had succeeded in eliminating
about sixty percent of the enemy garrison there. In ad-
dition, the Cossack supports another landing of friendly
guerrillas on Onchon Island. The assault succeeds and
the guerrillas regain Onchon.
March 13 The USS Manchester (CL 83), USS
James E. Kyes (DD 787), USS McGinty (DE 365) and
the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779), supported by planes
attached to Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77), respond to
enemy guns on Kalmagak at Wonsan that are pound-
ing U.N. ground forces. The naval guns and the effec-
tive air strikes eliminate the guns.
March 14 Enemy guns on Mayang-do fire at the
USS Toucan (AM 387) from a range of about 10,000
yards, but the rounds fall short and no damage is sus-
tained.
March 15 A Communist force makes an unsuc-
cessful raid against Yong-mae in the Haeju approaches.
The attack is repelled by the destroyer HMS Concord.
In other activity, enemy shore guns in the vicinity of
Songjin score successive hits against the HMS More-
combe Bay (PF). The vessel sustains damage, but none
of the crew is injured.
In yet other activity, the Marines receive some new
protective equipment. Marine Attack Squadron (VMA)
121 receives the first shipment of combat armor plat-
ing, which is to be mounted and tested.
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General Wiley D.
Ganey assumes command of Far East Air Forces
Bomber Command (Provisional). He succeeds
Brigadier General Joe H. Kelly, who had held the post
since September 30, 1951.
— In the United States: President Truman directs
that the military responsibility for Formosa, the
Pescadores, and the Philippines be transferred from
commander-in-chief Far East to comander-in-chief Pa-
cific Area. In conjunction, TF 72 comes under the ju-
risdiction of the commander, Pacific Fleet.
March 16 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the transport General Gordon arrives at Sokcho-ri
with replacements (18th Replacement Draft). The fresh
arrivals debark only to discover they are to ship out.
While the 174 officers and 1,135 Marines prepare to
join in the redeployment mission (I Corps, left flank of
Eighth Army), the Gordon accepts 103 officers and 1,135
enlisted Marines for the voyage back to the States.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns in the Songjin
Chaho region near Dojo-ri fire upon the battleship USS
Wisconsin (BB 64) and the destroyer escort USS Dun-
can (DDR 874). The warships return fire and score
damage, including two direct strikes. The Wisconsin
sustains three wounded, but none seriously.
March 17 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the U.S. 25th Infantry Regiment assumes
responsibility for the Marine zone, while the Marines
prepare to move to positions near Seoul in west Korea.
828
In Naval activity, a Communist force attacks a group
of small islands (17th-18th) north of Kojo, manned by
friendly guerrillas. The destroyer USS Hamner is able
to evacuate the small guerrilla force and transport them
to Nan-do Island, which is thought to be occupied by
the Communists.
March 18 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 1st Marines receive orders to move from
Camp Tripoli to its new positions near Munsan-ni.
Also, the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines, and the 1st Ko-
rean Marine Corps Regiment arrive aboard LSTs at the
Kimpo peninsula from Sokcho. They are transported by
Amphibious Redeployment Group (TG 90.5). The op-
eration is completed by the 24th.
In other activity, a contingent of Communists
launches a new raid against islands north of Kojo on
this day and the next. The U.N. ground troops, sup-
ported by the battleship USS Wisconsin (BB 64) and
destroyer USS Higbee (DD 806), repulse the attack.
March 19 The USS Wisconsin (BB 64) and USS
Higbee (DDR 806) commence a night bombardment in
support of ROK troops in western Korea. The carrier
USS Antietam (CV 36), having finished her first tour
in Korea, returns to the United States.
March 20 In the X Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 7th Marines moves from Camp Tripoli to
the new positions on Eighth Army’s far left in West
Korea. In conjunction, a contingent of the 8th ROK Di-
vision assumes responsibility for the 7th Marines’ po-
sitions. Also, the 1st Tank Battalion and the antitank
companies of the 1st, 5th and 7th Marines depart their
positions in X Corps sector and move by sea to the new
area in West Korea.
In Air Force activity, a U.S. Air Force patrol, operat-
ing near the Sui-ho Reservoir on F-86 Sabre jets, comes
under attack by an aggressive band of MiGs. A furious
battle erupts in the sky as both sides persist in knock-
ing out the other. When the battle ends, the enemy
loses five planes and retires with about 13 others dam-
aged. The U.S. reports no losses.
In other activity, a four-plane contingent attached
to the 16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-
Interceptor Wing, encounters a pair of MiGs in the
vicinity of Sokha-dong. The flight leader, Major Don-
ald E. Adams, engages and shoots down one of the
enemy planes.
In Naval activity, the destroyers USS Wiltsie (DD
716) and Brinkley Bass (DD 887) bombard enemy gun
positions in the vicinity of Wonsan. At least one bat-
tery was severely struck. According to spotters, it re-
ceived seven direct hits, delivered by the Brinkley Bass.
March 21 In the IX Corps sector, ROKs (Capital
Division and ROK 6th Division) begin to relieve
the 40th Division. The operation is completed by
30 March. The 40th Division in turn relieves the S.K.
2nd Division. By 1 April, the 40th Division assumes
total responsibility for the area around Kumhwa-
Kumsong.
 829
In Naval activity, the USS Osprey (AMS 28), subse-
quent to coming under fire from an enemy battery at
Wonsan, opens up and pounds the position with re-
turn fire, made more effective by spotters. Three bat-
teries are knocked out of action. The vessel sustains no
damage or casualties.
In other activity, friendly guerrillas supported by the
South Korean vessel AMC-309 launch a raid on the
north bank of the Han River. The raid succeeds in
killing 25 Communists and destroying enemy barracks.
The South Korean guerrillas sustain no casualties.
Also, on the east coast of Korea, ROK contingents
land at various points in the vicinity of Iwon today
through the 25th to gather intelligence, including the
selection of lucrative targets. The troops are transported
by the Wantuck (APD 125) and the raids are conducted
during darkness.
March 22 In The X Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st Marine Division establishes a com-
mand post near Tongji-ri.
In Naval activity, enemy shore batteries near Kojo
commence firing upon the destroyer Hamner (DD-
718). Although star shells had illuminated the warship,
the rounds fall short. Also, enemy shore batteries at
Kalmagak take the destroyer Stickell (DD 888) under
fire. The USS Brinkley Bass joins with the Stickell and
both vessels return fire. Neither ship sustains damage
or casualties.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps activates
six additional battalions and establishes a new Marine
air group on the west coast. The new units bring the
corps up to its full strength of three divisions and three
air wings by June 1952.
March 23 In the X Corps sector, the 5th Marines
moves overland to West Korea after being relieved by
ROK troops. Also, Marine Transport Helicopter
Squadron 161 relocates its command post to a site
about four miles outside Munsan-ni.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force, in an effort to
eliminate the pesky PO-2 (Bedcheck Charlie) and other
small propeller-type aircraft, introduces the F-94B
night-fighter. On this day, the 319th Fighter Intercep-
tor Squadron, equipped with the F-94Bs, relocates to
Suwon. The new aircraft has a long-range capability, but
initially, restrictions are set upon them due to the highly
sophisticated fire-control system and classified radar
equipment, to keep it from being acquired by the
enemy. The restrictions from making deep penetration
into North Korea are lifted during November of this
year.
In the meantime, Marine F3D Skyknights begin to
provide protection for the B-29s and they also execute
the normal interception patrols. The Marine aviators
also commit a squadron of twin-engine F7Fs for the
task of escorting the B-29s on their bombing missions.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries, for the
fourth consecutive day, commence fire upon the U.S.-
UN. warships operating in the area. Again, no dam-
age or casualties are reported. The destroyers USS Wilt-
March 25, 1952
sie (DD 716) and USS Brinkley Bass (DD 887) return
fire and pound the batteries east of Kalmagak.
In other activity, a small continent of 40 ROKS, 3
U.S. officers and one enlisted man (U.S. Army), ac-
companied by a civilian photographer, are transported
by the USS Wantuck (APD 125) on a clandestine mis-
sion. The party debarks near Chuminjin to attempt to
seize prisoners and cause disruption to the rails. Al-
though an enemy patrol is observed, no engagement
occurs. The contingent returns to the vessel. Scheduled
plans for the night of the 24th and 25th are aborted.
March 24 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 1st Marine Air Wing units in support of
Division VMO-6 and HMR-161 complete their re-
spective moves from Airfield X-83 in the Punch Bowl
area to a site (A-17) several miles below Munsan-ni.
In conjunction, the rear echelon establishes positions at
Ascom City. Although both helicopter squadrons are
under the control of the 1st Marine Air Wing, they act
under the operational control of Division.
In other activity, a Communist force attacks a small
contingent, composed of two squads of Korean
Marines, on Ho-do Pando Island on the west coast.
The assault is supported by guns and mortars on the
mainland. The South Korean Marines sustain 33 killed,
one wounded and one missing.
In Air Force activity, a patrol attached to the 16th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (51st Fighter-Intercep-
tor Wing) encounters a contingent of MiGs in the
vicinity of Namsi-dong. Two pilots of the four-plane
flight move against the solo flying MiG. Lieutenant
James A. McCulley and his wingman, Lieutenant
Richard H. Schoeneman, simultaneously open fire and
the MiG is destroyed.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun fire at Ho-do
Pando strikes the destroyer USS Brinkley Bass (DD
887). The vessel sustains damage, but the crew is able
to make repairs and return to action. Five crewmen are
injured and one is evacuated for medical aid.
March 25 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 5th Marines arrives near Munsan-ni from
east Korea and deploy to the rear of the 7th Marines.
Rather than revert to reserve, as scheduled, the 5th
Marines is directed to deploy at positions between the
1st and 7th Marines, due to the need to bolster the
overextended front lines. With the exception of some
artillery, the entire 1st Marine Division by this date
completes its movement from west Korea to east Korea,
during the maneuver known as Operation MIXMASTER.
On this day, the Chinese commence artillery fire against
the Marine perimeter. One hundred and eighty-nine
shells fall within the lines of the 1st and 5th Marines.
Ten Marines are wounded.
In other activity, a Chinese sniper kills one Marine
in the 1st Marines zone. On the following day, another
is mortally wounded. The Marines stay deployed along
what remains the front lines for the duration of the
conflict to hold the route to Seoul, which had been
used for centuries by invading armies. The Marines’
March 25, 1952
Elements of the 5th Marines fight the mud and spring thaw to reach new positions in west Korea.
orders direct them to aggressively defend their sector
of the Jamestown Line. The enemy in front of the
Marines are the Chinese Communists. To the west of
the perimeter stands the Chinese 65th Army and to the
north, the Chinese 63rd Army. In addition, the Com-
munists, while holding the strength of 15 infantry bat-
talions, also have 10 artillery battalions with a com-
bined number of 106 guns. The Marines are lacking
their usual close-air support, as the Marine Air Wing
remains under the control of Fifth Air Force, and or-
ders restrict air support to 96 sorties per day along the
entire 155-mile front of Eighth Army.
In Air Force activity, enemy rail lines in North Korea
again come under a tremendous attack as Fifth Air
Force executes 959 sorties. The planes focus primarily
on the area where the rail lines stretch from Sinanju to
Chongju, but other targets are hit, too. The strikes
pound the lines and cut the rails in more than 140 sep-
arate places. In addition, some units of the strike force
also pound the Sunchon–Pyongyang Road and after-
ward reports indicate 27 hits against enemy vehicles.
March 25–31 1952 In the I Corps sector, a
Chinese contingent of about 100 troops initiates
probes against the 1st Marine Division lines, partic-
ularly against the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regi-
830
ment, which holds responsibility for the point
known as Freedom Gate on the left of the perimeter.
It is the key bridge in a chain of three that span the
Imjin River and lead to the capital. Five separate ac-
tions occur. For the Marines, the Freedom Gate
bridge is the artery that maintains contact and pro-
vides resupply for the regiments north of the river.
The other bridges, X-ray and Widgeon, are posi-
tioned farther east.
March 25 Ho-do, a small, insignificant island
that had recently been occupied by elements of the 1st
Korean Marine Corps Regiment is attacked by the
Communists. The island, about 4,000 yards below Sok-
to, lies about 400 yards from the mainland in North
Korean territory. By dawn on the 26th, following the
amphibious assault, no Korean Marines survivors are
known; however, after the Communists abandon the is-
land on 2 April, six S.K. Marines who had concealed
themselves on the island arrive at Sok-to. The island is
not again occupied by U.N. Forces.
March 27 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, Colonel Frederick P. Henderson becomes di-
vision artillery commanding officer, succeeding Colo-
nel Bruce T. Hemphill.
The artillery units are pressed heavily; the area to
 831
defend is too wide for the amount of units. In addi-
tion, Fifth Air Force continues to hold jurisdiction on
Marine air squadrons, restricting their support for the
Marine ground troops along the Jamestown Line, as
well as two other back-up lines to the rear, the
Wyoming Line and Kansas Line, both established prior
to the arrival of the Marines.
To the front of the MLR, the Marines must also
maintain an outpost line of resistance, which further
spreads the units across positions about 2,500 yards in
front of the main line of resistance. Nevertheless, dur-
ing these first days along the Jamestown Line, the ma-
jority of casualties occur from mines previously planted
and poorly marked by the South Koreans.
In Air Force activity, after being informed of a
downed pilot captured by Chinese troops, a helicopter
crew takes off and heads for the vicinity of Pyoksong.
One of the crewmen, using a rifle, keeps the Chinese
pinned down while another lowers a hoist. The mis-
sion succeeds in retrieving the pilot.
In Naval activity, the HMS Crane (PF) comes under
fire from shore batteries on recently captured Ho-do
Island. The vessel sustains only slight damage.
March 28 The USS Burlington (PF 51) comes
under attack by enemy shore guns on Ho-do Pando, but
no damage is inflicted; however, the warship responds
to the attack and propels more than 120 rounds toward
the origin of the fire. Some direct hits occur, based on
the amount of fires seen raging.
Also, the destroyer USS George K. Mackenzie (DD
836) reaches a high point during the period March
28–30 while operating off Sinchang. The Mackenzie
fires her 8,000th 5-inch round.
March 29 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the administrative rear echelon arrives to
complete the deployment of the 11th Marines’ artillery
regiment in west Korea. The Marines discover prob-
lems with their defenses, including an area far larger
than the available manpower to defend it. Korean farm-
ers working their lands on terrain separating the MLR
from the Chinese create an obstacle. The Chinese, from
their positions, also find the farmers just in front of
their positions. The Marines’ positions are out of range
of U.S. warship guns.
In Naval activity, an enemy contingent near Pungho-
dong takes the USS Murrelet (AM 372) and the USS
Symbol (AM 123) under fire with small arms and ma-
chine guns, but the effort is futile. The warships sustain
no damage.
In other activity, Rear Admiral F.X. McInerney as-
sumes command of Amphibious Force Far East and of
Task Force 90. He relieves Rear Admiral C.F. Espe.
— In the United States: President Harry S Truman,
while in attendance of the Jefferson-Jackson dinner
(Washington National Guard Armory), announces that
he will not run for reelection.
March 30 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, ground contingents of the night-squadrons move
April 1, 1952
from their east coast field to Field K-8 on the west coast,
slightly more than 100 miles south of Seoul. VMF(N)-
513 completes its redeployment there by 11
April.
March 31 The 1st Marine Division activates the
Kimpo Provisional Regiment to bring about more op-
erational control of the Kimpo defense units.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces Bomber
Command initiates a two-day operation executed by
B-29s that fly 29 sorties against rail targets, specifically,
against the Sinhung-dong rail bridge and the Kwaksan
railroad track, but other targets are also struck as sec-
ondary targets of opportunity.
In Naval activity, the USS Boxer (CV 21) arrives to
join Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77) and serve her 3rd
tour during the Korean War.
April 1952 Fifth Air Force, since the previous
May, has lost 243 aircraft during the interdiction to
destroy the Communist transportation system.
Enemy guns have damaged another 290. At this
time, only 131 airplanes have been replaced.
In other activity, elements of the 1st Amphibious
Tractor Battalion (USMC) arrive at the Kansas Line.
Units not included are Company A, at KPR, and
Company B, at Pohang. Later, during July, the bat-
talion relieves the Reconnaissance Company on the
line. In turn, the Reconnaissance Company becomes
part of Headquarters Battalion, 1st Marine Division.
April 1 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese, following an artillery bombardment
of about thirty minutes, launch an attack against the
lines of the 1st Korean Marine Regiment at 2200.
Troops of the 1st Battalion, stationed at an outpost in
front of the lines, are first to come under attack. The
Communists penetrate at a point between two outposts
and reach ground within 200 yards of the MLR and
within arm’s reach of the Freedom Gate. Another con-
tingent drives against positions farther south, but here,
progress is stymied. By about 2345, the Chinese abort
the attack and return to their lines.
Meanwhile, to the left of the 1st Battalion, the 3rd
Battalion comes under a stiff attack. By about mid-
night (1st-2nd), the Chinese force the 1st Battalion to
give ground; however, soon after, a counterattack re-
takes the ground. At 0300 the Chinese launch a new as-
sault, but it, too, is repelled. The Korean Marines sus-
tain 2 killed and 10 wounded. The Chinese sustain 2
killed (counted) and another 10 estimated killed and 10
wounded. The stamina of the 1st Korean Marine Reg-
iment prevents the Communists from gaining the key
bridge that leads to the capital and preserves the west-
ern flank of the 1st Marine Division.
In Air Force activity, contingent of F-86 Sabre jets
(Fifth Air Force) encounters a band of MiGs and a tena-
cious air battle erupts. The Americans knock down 10
MiGs and lose one plane. During the duels in the sky,
Colonel Francis S. Gabreski, the commanding officer of
the 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing (and 4th Fighter
April 2, 1952 832

Interceptor Wing), kills one of the MiGs, which makes Twelve other MiGs are damaged during the day in
him an ace for the second time. Gabreski, known as seven separate air duels. The U.S. loses one F-86; two
“Gabby” to his friends, had become an ace during others sustain minor damage. It is the largest air battle
World War II when he gained 28 kills. On a subse- of the war to date.
quent mission, his plane’s engine unexpectedly mal-
functions and he is forced to make a crash landing; the
April 2 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese, following their attacks of the previ-
Germans capture him.
ous night, begin to focus on defending their lines. Nev-
Also, Major William H. Wescott, 25th Fighter-
ertheless, later on this day, the Chinese probe the po-
Interceptor Squadron, 51st Fighter-Interceptor Wing,
sitions of the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines. Two enemy
while leading a 4-plane flight, encounters a group of 12
patrols are detected in the Korean Marines sector.
MiG-15s in the vicinity of Tangmok-tang. Wescott
In other activity, the Marines record that 3,876 ar-
knocks one of the MiGs from the sky.
tillery shells and 118 mortar rounds strike the division
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral M.A. Souchek (Car-
positions this day. For the entire month of April, the
rier Division 3) relieves Rear Admiral F.W. McMahon
Communists propel 5,000 rounds of artillery and 3,786
(Carrier Division 5) as commanding officer, Fast Car-
mortar rounds into the perimeter.
rier Task Force (CTF 77); however, Admiral McMahon
In Air Force activity, a four-plane patrol of the 25th
resumes command soon after and retains it until 23
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (51st Fighter-Intercep-
April. Enemy shore guns are active this day. At Ho-do
tor Wing) encounters six MiGs in the vicinity of
Pando, the USS Wiltsie (DD 716) comes under fire. It
Sinuiju. One MiG is knocked out of the sky by Lieu-
and the USS McGinty (DE 365) combine their fire-
tenant Dale W. Smiley.
power to knock the positions from where the fire orig-
In Naval activity, U.S. naval warships continue to
inated. The vessels sustain no casualties or damage.
come under fire from enemy shore gun batteries. At
Also, at Wonsan, the USS Condor (AMS 5) comes
Wonsan, the USS Symbol (AM 123), USS Murrelet
under attack from shore guns. It sustains no damage.
(AM 372) and the USS Edmonds (DE 406) come under
In other activity, the USS Leonard F. Mason (DD
attack while operating off Wonsan. Also, in the area
852) also engages the enemy at Wonsan. During the
near Kalmagak, the destroyer USS Wiltsie (DD 716)
time the vessel returns fire, an explosion occurs in the
is fired upon. However, the enemy barrages score no
locker that contains the depth charges. The ship sustains
damage, nor casualties.
some slight damage, but no casualties are incurred.
In Air Force activity, major air contests erupt on this April 3 In aerial combat, Captain Robert H. Moore
day, as about 363 MiGs are spotted in the skies over (336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron), on a sortie, en-
northwest Korea. The reports indicate 10 MiGs defi- gages a MiG and prevails. It is his fifth kill, which makes
nitely destroyed and a probable three more downed. him the ninth ace of the Korean War. In conjunction,

A U.S. Navy F4U-5N Corsair (Nightfighter) returns to its carrier just prior to sunrise.
 833
Moore flies an F-86 Sabre jet. All the aces of the Ko-
rean War except one fly F-86 Sabre jets. A U.S. Navy
ace, Lieutenant Guy Bordelon, achieves his ace status
in a Navy F4U-5NL Corsair night fighter. Only two pi-
lots achieve the status of ace in a plane other than an F-
86.
This figure does not include aces whose combined
score includes kills achieved during World War II and
Korea. These are John W. Andre, USMC, and William
E. Lamb, USN.
April 4 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines patrol encounters
and captures a Chinese soldier.
April 5 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment initiates
a night raid against the Chinese positions. Three pla-
toons of the 10th Company move out at 2300, and
after they ford the Sachon River, they encounter an ob-
stacle, tangle wire. Soon after, the patrol is met by an
enemy sentry who alerts the line and a firefight breaks
out. Friendly artillery and mortar fire is called upon to
support the attack.
In coordination with the support fire, the patrol pre-
pares to advance toward the objective, Tonggang-ni.
At 0148 on 6 April, the 1st platoon strikes from the
right, followed immediately thereafter by the 2nd pla-
toon, which drives directly into the front of the enemy
position to ignite close-quartered fighting, in which
the Korean Marines prevail. The Chinese disengage
and head for their bunkers, from where they continue
to fire.
After a period of about one-half hour, Communist
reinforcements are detected as they encroach the skir-
mish. Using the artillery support for cover, the patrol
withdraws at 0230. No prisoners are seized, but seven
civilians encountered in the area are brought out with
the patrol. The Korean Marines sustain 2 killed and 18
wounded. In contrast, the Chinese sustain 12 killed
(counted) and an estimated 25 wounded. The patrol ar-
rives back at its lines at about 0400.
In other activity, a 5th Marines’ patrol collects 34
civilians in the area between its lines and the Chinese.
A wounded Chinese soldier is also seized.
Also, Operation PRONTO is executed. The operation
becomes the initial major troop movement by helicop-
ters and trucks in the I Corps sector. The helicopters
(HMR-161) and vehicles transport 670 Marines (2nd
Battalion, 7th Marines) and 10,000 pounds of rations
from Munsan-ni to the Kimpo peninsula, across the
Han River. Due to the “neutrality zone” created be-
cause of the talks at Panmunjom, a circuitous route is
taken, which makes the round-trip helicopter flight a
57-mile route.
April 6 The destroyer USS Wiltsie (DD 716) again
comes under fire from enemy shore batteries at positions
near Kalmagak; however, no damage is sustained.
In other activity, the battleship USS Iowa (BB 61) ar-
rives back in the Korean Theater to relieve USS Wis
April 11, 1952
consin (BB-61) and replace her as the flagship of the
7th Fleet, commander, Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe.
In Air Force activity, Captain Iven C. Kincheloe, Jr.,
attached to the 25th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, pre-
vails in an air duel with a MiG when his F-86 downs
the enemy plane. It is his fifth kill, which makes him
the tenth pilot to become an ace during the war.
April 7 Enemy shore gun batteries in the vicinity
of Chongjin, using heavy guns, fire upon the USS En-
dicott (DMS 35). Another vessel, the destroyer Chan-
dler (DD 717) combines her firepower with that of the
Endicott and the guns (75-mm and 120-mm) are
knocked out of action. The U.S. vessels sustain no dam-
age and no casualties. Another incident occurs near
Nan-do, when the destroyer USS Hamner (DD 718)
moves into the line of fire from enemy shore guns and
like the Endicott, no damage or casualties occur.
April 8 Weather conditions deteriorate immensely.
All naval and air operations are suspended.
April 10 At Koje-do, medical personnel enter
Compound 95 to aid a sick prisoner and remove him
from the compound, but the POWs attack the medics.
A force of about 100 ROK troops is ordered into the
compound to rescue the troops and restore order.
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General (later, major
general) Chester E. McCarty, assumes command of the
315th Air Division (Combat Cargo). McCarty suc-
ceeds Colonel Cecil H. Childre, who assumed the post
at the end of February.
In Naval activity, an enemy plane probes in the Yel-
low Sea where the USS Rochester (CA 124) is operating.
The unidentified aircraft does not respond to challenges
by the Rochester; rather it heads north.
In other activity, at Wonsan, the naval bombard-
ments continue. Planes and surface vessels pound se-
lected enemy targets. The cruiser USS St. Paul (CA 73)
and the destroyer USS Hanson (DDR 832) participate.
Also, in the area north of Ho-do Pando, enemy shore
gun batteries take the destroyer USS Silverstein (DE
534) under fire from a range of more than 12,000
yards. Nevertheless, no damage is incurred.
April 11 Brigadier General Clayton C. Jerome,
USMC, replaces Major General Christian F. Schilt,
USMC, as commander, 1st Marine Aircraft Wing. The
change of command ceremony takes place at Field K-3.
In Naval activity, U.S. warships, including the de-
stroyer USS Wiltsie (DD 716) and the destroyer escort
USS McGinty (DE 365), operating in the vicinity of
Wonsan, come under attack by enemy shore batteries,
but no damage is reported. Also, at Ho-do Pando, the
destroyer escort Silverstein (DE 534), the USS Cabildo
(LSD 16), and the USS Apache (ATF 67) commence fir-
ing against enemy gun positions.
In yet other naval activity, the destroyer escort USS
Edmonds (DE 406), operating south of Hungnam, is
brought under fire from a range of about 10,000 yards.
The Edmonds is able to avoid damage and its guns si-
lence the hostile fire.
April 12, 1952
April 12 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese launch an attack against the center of
5th Marines line, but it is repulsed.
In Naval activity, the USS Wiltsie (DD 716), while
operating near Wonsan, comes under fire, but no dam-
age is scored.
In other activity, the Communists mount an attack
against Yongmae Island. The amphibious assault is in-
terrupted and repelled by the destroyer HMS Bataan.
April 13 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese for the second day in a row launch an
attack against the 5th Marines; again it is repelled.
April 14 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Communists by this date decrease the num-
ber of infantry probes; however, the Marines begin to
receive more artillery assaults. Between this date and
the end of the month, Kimpo air base is hit by 25 ar-
tillery shells, but up to this point in April, only four
rounds had been fired into the area of Kimpo.
In other activity, I Corps extends the front of the 1st
Marine Division by 6,800 yards, which until now has
been the responsibility of the 1st Commonwealth Brigade.
The already overstretched line now runs a distance of
thirty-five and one-half miles (including the Kimpo
peninsula). The directive compels the Marines to modify
their defenses. The outpost line is pulled back in order to
permit the Marines to bolster their main line of defense.
Also, although the Communists decrease their ac-
tivity, the Marines accelerate their activity before the
month ends with Operation CLOBBER, using a potent
combination of tank fire and artillery rounds to pound
the enemy positions. Company D, 1st Tank Battalion,
adds its flame-throwing tanks to the 11th Marines’ ar-
tillery. The tanks fire upon troop assembly areas as well
as enemy observation posts and artillery and mortar
positions. The attacks occur during darkness, therefore
the results of the operation remain unknown.
In Air Force activity, the 403rd Troop Carrier Wing
(Medium) arrives in Japan from the States. The 403rd
is the first Air Force Reserve wing activated for service
in Korea.
In other activity, an SA-16, attached to the 3rd Air
Rescue Squadron, braves enemy ground fire and suc-
cessfully plucks a downed U.S. naval pilot from the sea
and transports him to safety.
April 15 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese launch an attack against Company E,
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, at its positions on Out-
post 3, a 400-foot hill manned by a reinforced platoon.
The Marines are twice struck by artillery, during the
afternoon and at dusk. At 2330, a green flare is spot-
ted at Hill 67 and afterward, another artillery bom-
bardment strikes the positions of Company E. About 10
minutes prior to midnight (15–16), another green flare
is spotted and it apparently is the signal to cease fire, but
only temporarily. The barrage is terminated, but in a few
minutes, the artillery begins again, but to new posi-
tions west of the outpost.
834
Meanwhile, the Communists launch their assault,
charging directly against the front of the defenses. Sud-
denly, the outpost is under assault from three sides. The
Marines are compelled to pull back to consolidate their
beleaguered positions. Nevertheless, from their imper-
iled positions, they are able to hold the ground and
force the Communists to disengage without gaining
the outpost. The Chinese regroup and launch yet an-
other attack, only to gain the same results. The Marines
hold and drive the Communists back, except for three
who are captured. The Chinese greatly outnumber the
defending company and they had also plastered the po-
sition with artillery, mortars, machine guns, hand
grenades and recoilless rifles before meeting the Marines
in hand-to-hand fighting, in which the Marines again
prevail.
The Communists sustain 25 killed (counted) and
another 25 estimated killed, as well as 45 known
wounded and three prisoners. The Marines sustain six
killed, five missing and 25 wounded.
Communications between Chinese headquarters and
the attack force during the assault are picked up by U.S.
intelligence. After the order to withdraw is overheard,
artillery units set up and commence firing toward all
withdrawal routes. Nevertheless, the Chinese escape
without further casualties. The attack to test the
Marines’ staying power is the final attack against Ma-
rine positions for the remainder of the month. However,
the regimental commander, apparently pleased by the
courage of his platoon, concludes that the outpost is
too large to be held by only a reinforced platoon.
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77)
launches a surface and air attack against Chongjin. The
carriers USS Philippine Sea (CV 47) and Boxer (CV 21)
launch a combined total of 246 sorties against enemy
targets. In addition, one cruiser and three destroyers
participate.
April 16 In the 1st Marine Division sector, 1st
Marines zone, an enemy force launches a night attack
against the positions of Company E, 2nd Battalion,
5th Marines, near Panmunjom. During the probing at-
tack, a grenade lands in their midst among some
wounded. Corporal Duane E. Dewey spots the hot
missile, yells a warning, pulls a wounded medic from
harm’s way, then blankets the grenade with his body to
save the others. Corporal Dewey survives and is
awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
courage and selfless sacrifice in the face of hostile fire.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Philippine Sea (CV
47) is relieved by the carrier USS Valley Forge (CV 47).
The USS Murrelet (AM 372), while operating near
Musa-dan, comes under enemy machine gun fire from
a distance of less than 1,000 yards on this day and the
next. The Murrelet and another accompanying vessel,
the Toucan (AM 387), retaliate and silence the guns.
April 17 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese launch an early morning assault
against the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment at 0100.
The Korean Marines repel three separate attacks. All
 835 April 19, 1952

three are terminated by 0400. This is the final attack in launched in three phases. It is thought that the initial
the 1st Marine Division zone during April. target will be Yongmae.
In related activity, Marine patrols continue to oper-
ate and maintain a vigil on the terrain where the out-
April 18 The USS Samuel N. Moore (DD 747)
comes under a short burst of enemy fire while it oper-
posts had been withdrawn. The only sector in which
ates near Kojo, but no damage is incurred.
tanks can participate is the area guarded by the 1st Ko-
On 18–19 April, Marine carrier-based Squadron
rean Marine Corps Regiment. The remainder of the
VMA-312 carries out 80 sorties in support of Eighth
line is not suitable for armor.
Army. The number of flights is a Korean record for
In Naval activity, The USS Murrelet (AM 372) and
carrier-based squadrons up to this date.
USS Toucan (AM 387), which had recently (15th-16th)
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, Op-
exchanged fire with the enemy at Musa-dan, again
eration LEAPFROG commences. Helicopter Squadron
come under fire while operating in the vicinity of Song-
HMR-161 transports one battalion of the 1st Korean
do Gap. Neither vessel sustains any casualties or dam-
Marine Corps Regiment to the Kimpo peninsula, a
age. At Nan-do, enemy shore gun batteries fire upon the
short trip of about six miles. The exercise is to test the
destroyer USS Samuel N. Moore (DD 747) from a dis-
feasability of moving the Koreans over water to replace
tance of about 13,000 yards in the vicinity of Nan-do
one unit with another, while experimenting with the
Island, but the rounds fall short.
language barriers between the crews and the troops.
In other activity, the USS Thomas (DDR 833), op-
The operation goes smoothly and due to the inter-
erating near Chuuronjang, comes under enemy fire. It
preters, the language difference does not become a
is soon joined by the British destroyer HMS Concord.
problem. The crews discover that instead of transport-
Neither vessel sustains any damage.
ing five troops in full gear, they can move six Koreans
In yet other activity, the enemy at Wonsan fires upon
on each helicopter, due to the difference in weight be-
the USS McGinty (DE 365). Meanwhile, the destroyer
tween the American Marines and the Korean Marines.
Maddox (DD 731) rushes to join with the McGinty and
both return fire, which knocks out the enemy guns. April 19 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
Neither the McGinty or the Maddox sustain any dam- zone, the 5th Marines receives instructions to form a
age or casualties. rescue and recovery force. The unit is to be prepared,
Also, intelligence reports indicate that the Commu- if necessary, to be able to move expeditiously to rescue
nists have been building up for attacks against a series the U.N. Truce Team at Panmunjom. In conjunction,
of friendly held islands, including Kakhoe, Kotkpo, the Everready Rescue Force deploys at Outpost 2, east
Kulto, Kyo-dong, Porum, Sogom, Songmo and Yong- of Panmunjom. To bolster the force, another unit, the
mae. The reports specify that the attacks will be Forward Covering Force, stands ready to expedite the

A convoy including tanks (1st Tank Battalion, USMC) advances. South Korean women can be seen in
the water on the bottom right.
April 20, 1952
movement of infantry by tanks to the high ground
about one-half mile beyond Panmunjom. In the event
a rescue becomes necessary, once the team is retrieved,
the Pick Up Force, composed of elements of the 1st
Tank Battalion, would take the representatives and
speed them back to friendly lines. Along the route, yet
another force, the Rear Covering Force, composed of
a tank-infantry force, is to shadow the pickup force.
In Naval activity, enemy shore batteries take the USS
Endicott (DMS 35) under fire while she operates near
the Songjin–Chongjin area. The vessel sustains some
minor damage, but no casualties are incurred. A British
destroyer escort operating near Kirin-do comes under
enemy fire and inadvertently receives fire from friendly
forces as she maneuvers between the island and the
mainland.
April 20 By this date, the three Marine tactical
squadrons of MAG-12 (VMF[N]-513, VMF-212 and
VMF-323) complete their redeployment to the west
coast of Korea.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, MAG-
12 completes its redeployment from east Korea to its
new base, K-6, located about thirty miles south of
Seoul. Other Marine air support units are deployed at
K-3, and yet others are based at Itami Air Force Base in
Japan at Honshu. The Chinese sustain 36 killed
(counted) and an estimated 46 wounded. The Korean
Marines sustain 2 killed and 5 wounded.
In Naval activity, elements of TF 90 initiate the
transport of the 38th Infantry Regiment from Inchon
to Koje-do. The operation is completed on 22 April.
April 21 An explosion (powder fire) occurs on the
USS St. Paul (CA 73) while it is engaged in combat
operations off Kojo. Thirty crewmen are killed.
In other activity, the USS Horace A. Bass (APD 124)
debarks ROK troops on eight separate occasions to
launch intelligence raids along the northeast coast of
Korea. The raids are conducted through 4 May. Also,
Marine Attack Squadron 312 relocates its operations
from the USS Bairoko (CVE 115) to the USS Bataan
(CVL 29).
In Air Force activity, Captain Robert J. Love, attached
to the 335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, encoun-
ters, engages and destroys two MiGs in an air battle.
The two kills give Captain Love the status of ace.
April 21 In Air Force activity, a four-plane con-
tingent of F-51 Mustangs (67th Fighter-Bomber
Squadron, 18th Fighter-Bomber Group) escort a res-
cue helicopter in the vicinity of Sonch’on. During the
mission, while trying to ensure the helicopter gets back
to friendly lines, one of the planes, piloted by Lieuten-
ant Jack E. Shepard, gets hit by enemy ground fire. He
ignores the severe damage and continues the attack
against the enemy position to protect the helicopter.
Shepard expends his ammunition, then launches mock
dives to divert the enemy. Lieutenant Melvin Souza,
of the same outfit, also greatly aids the beleaguered hel-
icopter that had become damaged in the rescue attempt
836
of picking up a downed pilot. Souza positions himself
under the helicopter, then responds to the enemy
ground fire by diving against the enemy positions and
afterward they guide the helicopter and the rescued F-
80 pilot to safety.
April 22 Planes of the three MAG-12 Marine
squadrons participate in a Fifth Air Force attack that sets
a one-day record with 1,049 sorties flown. In Air Force
activity, due to an acute shortage of fighter bombers,
Fifth Air Force presses Sabre jets into a new task, to ex-
ecute armed reconnaissance mission of the Commu-
nists’ communication lines. Planes attached to the 4th
and 51st Fighter Interceptor Wings carry out the mis-
sions.
In Naval activity, the battleship USS Iowa (BB 61)
and the destroyer USS Bradford (DD 545) are attacked
by enemy shore batteries near Mayang-do; however,
no damage is incurred and no casualties are reported.
Also, the USS Iowa (BB 61), the USS Manchester (CL
83) and carrier planes strike the region that stretches
between Hungnam and Sinp’o.
April 23 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, Operation CIRCUS commences. Helicopter
Squadron HMR-161 transports the 7th Marines
(minus two battalions) from its positions to new posi-
tions across the Imjin River to landing sites to the im-
mediate rear of the Wyoming Forward Line, the second-
ary defensive line. The helicopters transport 1,185
troops in only 90 minutes.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral John Perry relieves
Rear Admiral F. W. McMahon and assumes command
of Carrier Division Five and Fast Carrier Task Force
(TF-77).
In other activity, the British destroyer HMS Con-
cord (DD) comes under enemy shore gun battery fire
in the Songjin-Chonjin region. The British return fire
and report severe damage inflicted upon enemy posi-
tions. The vessel sustains only minor damage; however,
a direct hit causes the death of two crewmen and the
wounding of four others.
April 24 In Naval activity, at Yanag-do, a group of
enemy sampans encounter the USS Endicott (DMS 35).
One of the boats and its several occupants are seized.
The two other boats, along with their occupants, are
destroyed.
At Songjin, the USS Osprey (AMS 28) comes under
fire while it is sweeping the area for mines. The Osprey
and another warship, the USS Doyle (DMS-34), return
fire. No damage is incurred and no casualties occur on
either vessel.
In yet other activity, the USS Brush (DD 745), op-
erating off Sokto, is called upon to support Combat
Air Patrol planes (TARCAP) that are being fired upon.
The guns of the Brush eliminate the problem and the
planes resume their mission unimpeded.
Also, other ships are engaged in retaking islands pre-
viously lost to the Communists. By this date, friendly
guerrillas have re-occupied Hachwira-do, Tok-to, and
 837
Yuk-to and in each instance, the landings had taken
place without incident, as the enemy had abandoned the
positions.
Also, two Marine F2H-2Ps (VMJ-1) piloted by
Major Robert R. Road and 1st Lieutenant Lytton F.
Blass, while on a mission, come under attack by a band
of MiGs, but both planes complete the mission and re-
turn to base without harm.
— In Japan: Marine Squadron VMA-312 departs
Itami Air Force Base to board the USS Bataan.
April 25 Aerial photographs taken over Py-
ongyang show evidence that the Communists, by gath-
ering huge amounts of sand, intend to make the air-
field there once again operable.
In other activity, the U.S. Navy reports from the USS
Boxer indicate that the Communists, according to pho-
tographic evidence, are massing large numbers of boats
in the areas west of No-do Pan at Wondan and Soman
and Songjon bays. Eighty-three boats of fishing boat size
or smaller and 17 large vessels of about 60 feet are
counted.
April 26 All HRS-1 helicopters are grounded due
to a problem with the tail rotors. The problem is solved
by mid–May. These Marine helicopters had, only sev-
eral days before, participated in a large troop transport
maneuver.
In Air Force activity, Major William H. Wescott, at-
tached to the 25th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, 51st
Fighter Interceptor Group, while on a mission engages
and destroys a MiG, the fifth to his credit in the past
four weeks. Major Wescott becomes an ace, the twelfth
of the conflict.
In Naval activity, the USS Cabildo (LSD 16) is hit
A helicopter crew rescues a downed pilot at sea.
April 28, 1952
by enemy fire while operating off Ho-do Pando. Two
crewmen are wounded and the ship sustains some slight
damage.
In other activity, while two boats are withdrawing
from Umi-do under the protection of the destroyer es-
cort USS Silverstein (DE 534), enemy shore batteries fire
upon the sampans. Fire is returned by the Silverstein
and another vessel, the destroyer USS Maddox (DD
731). In addition, planes from the carrier USS Valley
Forge (CV 45) participate. No casualties are reported
aboard the ships.
April 27 Enemy shore batteries near Kosong com-
mence firing upon the USS Samuel H. Moore (DD
748). The destroyer returns fire and knocks out the
battery. Also, the USS Waxbill (AMS 39) pours fire
upon an enemy battery near Wonsan, which had fired
first. The Waxbill sustains no casualties; however, its fire
knocks out the battery.
April 28 Enemy shore gun batteries in the vicin-
ity of Ho-do Pando fire upon the USS Conserver (ARS
39) and a smaller South Korean vessel, which are off the
western side of Yo-do. The vessels withdraw under the
protection of a smokescreen laid by the destroyer USS
Maddox. Meanwhile, the Maddox and the destroyer es-
cort Silverstein pound the suspected positions of the
batteries and end the threat.
In yet other Naval activity, the destroyer escort USS
McGinty (DE 365) fires upon and damages an enemy
Russian T-34 tank that had been operating on Kalma-
gak Island.
In Air Force activity, a downed pilot of a Hawker Sea
Fury is saved by a rescue helicopter for the second time
in less than one month. The rescue helicopter, 3rd Air
April 29, 1952
Rescue Squadron, retrieves the pilot and transports him
back to friendly lines.
April 29–30 1952 Far East Air Forces sus-
tains three tragic losses during this two-day period
when, on separate missions, three planes attached to
the 315th Air Division crash — a C-46, C-47 and a
C-119. The total number of men lost climbs to six-
teen.
April 30 Marine Squadron VMO-6, during the
month of April, dispatches its eleven fixed-wing air-
craft (OE-1 observation planes) on 508 missions, in-
cluding more than 275 for artillery spotting. Other
missions include reconnaissance, photo reconnaissance
and weather. In addition, the squadron’s helicopters
complete 248 flights, most over enemy territory.
Also, Marine squadrons operating under Fifth Air
Force also remain busy during April. Fifth Air Force
dispatches 1,397 Marine planes on missions connected
to the interdiction raids to disrupt the North Korean
transportation operations. In addition, Marine
squadrons fly only 47 missions in close-support of the
1st Maine Division; however, the Marines are also dis-
patched to other U.S.-U.N. forces and complete 547
sorties in that endeavor. Marine squadrons based at sea
also support Eighth Army heavily during April. (See
also, April 18, 1952.)
Also, another Marine unit, the recently created Ma-
rine Photographic Squadron 1 (VMJ-1), attached to
MAG-33, is deeply involved with reconnaissance mis-
sions of Fifth Air Force. The specialty squadron is re-
sponsible for about one-third of the daylight photos.
The squadron is composed of ten McDonnell Banshee
F2H-2P planes, twin-engine aircraft capable of flying
at high altitudes at a speed of 550 miles per hour. The
aircraft are single-seat jets, each carrying three cam-
eras.
In Air Force activity, a patrol attached to the 16th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (51st Fighter-Intercep-
tor Wing) encounters and engages a trio of MiG-15s in
the vicinity of Pihyon. Lieutenant Arlan P. Brietenstein
closes against one of the planes and opens fire. He
scores damage, but then passes over. His wingman
moves into position, continues the attack and downs
the MiG.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at Light-
house Point take the destroyer USS Douglas H. Fox
(DD 779) under fire while she is engaged with the de-
struction of enemy targets in Hungnam. The Fox turns
her attention on the origin points of the enemy fire and
plasters the entire area. Also, the USS Maddox (DD
731) and USS Laffey (DD 724), pound the enemy rails
at Wonsan and damage rail cars and enemy shore gun
batteries.
In other activity, the carrier USS Princeton (CV 37)
arrives to join Fast Carrier Task Force (TF-77). The
Princeton, on its first day of its second tour, gets in-
volved in an accident. While the vessel is getting refu-
eled, it collides with the USS Cacapon (AO 52). Some
slight damage occurs to the Cacapon.
838
In yet other activity, the USS Horace A. Bass (APD
124) concludes a successful operation after debarking
friendly troops along the northern coast of Korea. The
raiding contingent destroys a railroad bridge and
stretches of track in the same area. During the opera-
tion, several prisoners had been seized.
In Marine Corps air activity, a contingent of Pan-
ther jets (F9F-2), attached to Marine Fighter Squadron
VMF-311, encounters and engage eight MiG-15s in
the skies over Kunu-ri. One Marine plane sustains
damage and it is reported that one MiG had been dam-
aged by Captain W.E. Daniels. This is the initial air-to-
air encounter of 1952.
May 1, 1952–November 30, 1952. EIGHTH DES-
IGNATED CAMPAIGN: SUMMER-FALL 1952.
May 1 In the Eighth Army area, the units deployed
across the front from west to east are as follows: (I
Corps–General John O’Daniel) 1st Marine Division,
1st Commonwealth Division, 1st ROK Division, and
the U.S. 45th Division; (IX Corps–General Wyman)
ROK 9th Division, U.S. 7th Division and U.S. 40th
Division; (ROK II Corps) ROK 6th, ROK Capital and
ROK 3rd Divisions; (X Corps) ROK 7th Division,
U.S. 7th Division on line, with the ROK 8th Division
in place at the Punch Bowl, recently evacuated by the
1st Marine Division; (ROK I Corps) ROK 11th Divi-
sion, alongside X Corps and to the far east, the ROK
5th Division at the Sea of Japan.
In Naval activity, the operation to relocate POWs
that had begun on 19 April from Koje-do to other in-
ternment facilities by CTG-90 is completed this day.
The relocation movement transferred 80,225 men.
Also, the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779) comes under
enemy shore gun fire while it is operating near Hung-
nam. No damage or casualties are reported.
In other activity, the HMS Whitesand Bay (PF) pro-
vides support to friendly guerrillas that launch a raid in
the Haeju approaches. The successful mission gains 12
prisoners and includes the confiscation of enemy doc-
uments.
In yet other activity, aerial photographs gather evi-
dence that the Communists have initiated the move-
ment of heavy artillery pieces into the east coast of
Korea. Eight new guns are spotted in the area southwest
of Hamhung.
May 2 A contingent of friendly guerrillas, sup-
ported by the HMS Whitesand Bay (PF), launches a
successful raid on the mainland against Ponggu-Myon,
located in the Haeju region.
May 3 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment initiates
a patrol at just after darkness to seek and capture enemy
troops in the vicinity of Hill 34, located near the rail line
of Kaesong and less than one mile west of the Sachon
River. No prisoners are gained; however, during an
early morning shoot out, the South Koreans prevail.
 839 May 7, 1952

They account for 12 enemy killed. The Korean Marines batteries south of Hungnam, returns fire and knocks out
sustain one man wounded. one battery. Later, this same day, the warship again re-
In Air Force activity, the number of U.S. aces during turns and pounds yet another gun position, but receives
the war climbs from twelve to fourteen on this day. Five no hostile fire. No damage is sustained by the ship.
MiGs are destroyed by Sabre jets. Of the five kills,
Major Donald E. Adams, 16th Fighter Interceptor
May 6 While operating in the waters near
Singhang-ni, the destroyer USS Douglas H. Fox (DD
Squadron, downs two and Captain Robert T. Latshaw,
779), seizes 3 enemy sampans and 15 North Koreans.
Jr., attached to the 335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron,
In another incident, raiders aboard the Fox seize a large
shoots down one. Both Adams and Latshaw become
sampan and 32 North Korean fishermen near Paegan-
aces.
dan.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at
In yet other activity, the carrier USS Valley Forge (CV
Hungnam fire upon the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779)
45) sustains some damage following a mechanical fail-
without effect; however, the ship’s return fire liquidates
ure that led to the loss of the steering. The Valley Forge
the battery. In another incident, Communist troops
collides with the USS Firedrake (AE 14), which is
using small arms fire upon the USS Ptarmigan (AM
alongside the carrier to resupply it with ammunition.
376) and USS Toucan (AM 387) while they are ma-
No casualties are reported by either vessel.
neuvering to sweep mines in the vicinity of Chaho to
In other activity, the commanding officer of VMJ-
Mayang-do.
1, Major R.R. Reid, executes the squadron’s first mis-
May 4 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division sion in Korea, escorted by USAF fighters (F-86 Sabre
zone, a contingent of the 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, jets). The mission is to gather photographs in enemy
moves out on patrol at about dawn en route to an old controlled territory.
position, Outpost 3, to occupy the high ground there.
The patrol arrives at the objective at 0900, but at about
May 7 Brigadier General Frank T. Dodd, USA, is
taken captive by the Communist prisoners at Koje-do.
the same time, word arrives that an enemy attack is im-
As the gates at Compound 76 are being closed, the
minent. Troops on a nearby elevation that were mov-
POWs grab Dodd and pull him back into the com-
ing toward the patrol had been spotted by an aerial ob-
pound.
server. A short artillery barrage precedes an attack by
The Communists had used the POW camps to their
about 60–70 Communists. The enemy is greeted with
advantage. Some troops surrendered specifically to
small arms fire and shortly thereafter Marine Corsairs
pass orders from the high command. Four enclosures
arrive to hammer the enemy mortar positions that had
had earlier been constructed at Koje-do to house 6,000
fired upon the patrol. The attack is repelled with 14
prisoners, but the camp is well over its limits by the
Chinese killed.
start of 1952. The Communists tie notes to stones
Later, the Chinese again come under attack at about
and toss them from one compound to another. In
1330, when Corsairs return to pound the positions.
addition, they use songs and chants (smuggled into
Under the cover fire of the Corsairs, the patrol begins
camp with supplies) to pass orders. Other methods
to move back to its lines, but en route, the troops en-
included feigning sickness to meet at medical clinics.
counter an uncharted minefield that kills two Marines
The Communist POWs also had by this time amassed
who are carrying stretchers and wounds four others.
a huge arsenal of hand-made weapons including knives,
Meanwhile, specialists eliminate the mines and with
axes, jagged pieces of metal and spears made from
the support fire from other Marines on patrol from the
tent poles.
2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, the patrol reaches friendly
In Naval activity, USS James C. Owens (DD 776),
lines and a medical aid station where vehicles are stand-
while firing at targets of opportunity near Songjin, re-
ing by to transport the seriously wounded to medical
ceives an estimated 100 rounds of 75 mm fire from 10
facilities. The patrol reports the deaths of 27 enemy
gun batteries in the hillside area near Songjin Light-
troops, one of whom is shot into the air after a direct
house. The vessel sustains damage from six hits and
hit by an artillery shell.
many near misses. Two men are killed and seven oth-
In Air Force activity, a contingent of 25 F-86 Sabre
ers are wounded.
jets strike the airfield at Sinuiju. No MiGs intercept, but
In other activity, enemy shore gun batteries are ac-
five of nineteen counted on the ground are destroyed,
tive at Wonsan. The USS Waxbill (AMS 39) comes
despite being protected by revetments.
under fire, but no harm is inflicted. The USS Douglas
In other activity, a patrol led by Lieutenant Richard
H. Fox (DD 779) receives enemy fire from two separate
H. Schoeneman (16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron,
batteries at Mayang-do and Yuktaeso. No damage is
51st Fighter-Interceptor Wing) spots a group of enemy
inflicted upon the warship; however, the two batteries
IL-10 type aircraft in the skies near Yongsansi. Schoen-
from where the fire originated are both eliminated by
eman destroys one of the planes. Also, Lieutenant James
return fire.
A. McCulley (16th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron)
In yet other activity, aerial observance flights record
downs a Yak aircraft during the fight.
high activity regarding enemy vehicles. More than
May 5 The USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779), sub- 4,000 vehicles are observed each night for six consec-
sequent to coming under fire from enemy shore gun utive nights.
May 8, 1952 840

May 8 In the Eighth Amy area, General Ridgway
calls for an urgent meeting to deal with the seizure of
General Dodd at the Korean prison compound. Ridg-
way attempts to solve the problem prior to his depar-
ture to Europe to succeed General Eisenhower. Ridg-
way refuses to capitulate to prisoner demands to save the
general because he believes “in wartime, a general’s life
is no more precious than the life of a common soldier....
If in order to save an officer’s life, we abandoned the
cause for which enlisted men had died, we would be
guilty of betraying the men whose lives had been placed
in our care.”
Ridgway informs the Communists that Dodd is no
longer the camp commander and that if he is not set free
immediately (by 1000, 10 May), force would be used.
General Van Fleet orders a contingent of the 3rd Division’s

A Communist supply depot at Suan, less than forty miles southeast of Pyongyang, comes under attack
by U.S. planes. A Lockheed F-80 Shooting Star makes a low-level pass. A napalm tank is falling just
below the left wing.
 841
tanks to move 200 miles from the north to Koje-do to
help handle the problem.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, Op-
eration Order 12–52 is issued. It directs the 1st Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, to seize several objectives, designated
S, V and X. The targets stand in front of Outpost 3
(Objective Y) and they are to be taken to prevent their
use by the Chinese. At 0430, the 1st Platoon, Com-
pany A, moves toward a diminutive ridge west of OP
3, objective S. The platoon is shadowed by the 2nd Pla-
toon, which moves to the right, while the remaining
platoon protects the rear. The hill falls with little effort.
Afterward, the 1st Platoon pivots and drives northward
toward the remaining objectives, four peaks (V, X, Y and
Z) stretching a distance of 1,399 yards.
With the support of rocket fire, the Marines press
ahead and take the first hill, V, and eliminate about 15
of the defenders and wound a similar number. At this
time the Marines have sustained 5 wounded. In addi-
tion, one enemy soldier is seized. Meanwhile, the
enemy initiates an artillery barrage against the attack
force. One Marine is killed and three are wounded.
While the main body of the patrol edges toward Ob-
jective X, the 1st Platoon continues toward OP 3, all
under severe fire, while friendly fire continues to per-
meate the objectives. At intervals, the friendly fire cre-
ates an unnatural dust storm that temporarily and com-
pletely obscures the vision of the advancing infantry.
At Objective X, the Chinese raise formidable fire and
during the struggle the 1st Platoon repels a strong coun-
terattack, but afterward, it becomes isolated and the
remainder of the company comes under assault. Nev-
ertheless, the Marines repulse the attack.
At 1435, the 1st Platoon is ordered to rejoin the
company; however, as it moves an intense artillery bar-
rage pounds the withdrawal route. The barrage kills
three Marines and wounds several others during the 5-
minute thunderclap. By this time, three objectives have
fallen, but the final one remains under enemy control.
It is determined that the positions are untenable,
prompting a withdrawal. Support fire comes into play
and a nearby diversionary contingent in the vicinity of
Objective S also provides protective fire. The patrol re-
turns to friendly lines by about 1730 and the remain-
der of the battalion arrives shortly after.
During the mission, intended to seize prisoners, 35
enemy soldiers are killed (counted) and 53 are wounded
(counted); however, it is estimated that an additional 70
Chinese had been killed and another 105 wounded.
The Marines sustain 7 killed and 66 are wounded.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches the first
of four planned interdiction attacks between this day
and 24 May. On this day, 465 sorties are initiated by
fighter bombers. The planes hammer the supply depot
at Suan, about forty miles southeast of Pyongyang. The
attack is sustained for thirteen hours with the aircraft
pounding the complex yard-by-yard. More than 200
storage buildings and other targets are either destroyed
or damaged. The strike is the most massive one-day at-
tack since the war began.
May 12, 1952
Also, one F-86 Sabre jet is shot down by anti-air-
craft fire during a strike against the marshaling yard at
Kunu-ri. The downed aircraft becomes the first F-86
lost during a fighter bomber mission.
May 9 In Naval activity, information gathered from
prisoners points to a potential pending invasion of
Yang-do from the mainland. The conclusion is based on
intelligence regarding five separate Communist boat-
building operations on the mainland across from Yang-
do Island.
In other activity, the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779),
operating off Hungnam, launches a raid on the inner
harbor that nets 2 prisoners.
May 10 The deadline, 1000, set by General Ridg-
way passes, but General Van Fleet does not order his
forces to retake the prison compound by force. Van
Fleet claims it is because the tanks have not arrived,
but he also holds up for some other reasons. General
Ridgway claims the other reasons are unclear to him.
Meanwhile, the Communists in the compound de-
mand more outrageous concessions, including admit-
ting use of germ weapons, poison gas and experiment-
ing with the atom bomb. Later this same day, General
Colson and Dodd reply with a draft in which Dodd
falsely admits to the killing and wounding of Commu-
nist prisoners, to the jubilation of the Communists.
Dodd is released on the following day.
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS Douglas H. Fox
(DD 779) seizes four North Koreans (fishermen) in the
water south of Hungnam, near Mayang-do Island.
Also, at Wonsan, the USS Merganser (AMS 26) and
USS Redhead (AMS 34), come under enemy fire from
Kalmagak, but no damage and no casualties are re-
ported. In addition, the destroyers USS Maddox (DD
731) and USS Laffey (DD 729), operating in the same
area, commence fire against rail targets and score ef-
fectively, while the enemy also takes them under fire
without success.
May 11 General Dodd, held in the prison com-
pound by the POWs, is released at 2130.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
7th Marines relieves the 5th Marines in the central sec-
tor of the Marine zone. With its responsibility for the
peace corridor, the 7th Marines also assumes responsi-
bility for the rescue of the UN truce representatives at
Panmunjom. In conjunction, the 7th Marines replace
the tanks in the force with M-39 personnel vehicles, a
tracked personnel carrier designed by the U.S. Army. It
resembles the USMC amphibious tractor.
Also, the Marines retain a medium tank, a model
that contains extra radios and becomes known as the
“porcupine” because of a huge number of antennas.
In Naval activity, a frigate, the USS Evansville (PF
70), launches a raid off Mayang-do Island. The raid-
ing party seizes four prisoners.
May 12 In Naval activity, the enemy batteries at
Wonsan continue to harass the U.S. warships. The
Maddox, Laffey, Herbert J. Thomas, Evansville and other
May 13, 1952
vessels engaged in the minesweeping operation come
under the guns of the Communists. The warships re-
turn fire, but the origin of some batteries is difficult to
pinpoint. The Herbert J. Thomas sustains some minor
damage. At Hungnam, a small raiding contingent
aboard the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779) maneuvers
in a whale boat, lands and captures 30 prisoners. The
Fox transports the prisoners to the vicinity of Wonsan,
transfers them and then moves back into position near
Hungnam to bombard enemy positions there.
In yet other activity, the carriers USS Valley Forge
(CV 45) and the USS Princeton (CV 37) each launch
six planes after dark to search for enemy trains. The
mission is successful. Sixteen locomotives are spotted
and the planes cut the rails to the front and to the rear
on eleven of the locomotives. Subsequent sorties pound
the areas and destroy nine of the locomotives and dam-
age two others.
— In Japan: General Ridgway departs Japan for Eu-
rope to succeed General Eisenhower. General Mark
Clark succeeds General Ridgway. Clark begins almost
immediately to correct the problems at Koje-do.
Within a few days, he directs Brigadier (later major)
General Haydon L. Boatner to restore cohesion. All
civilians are ordered from the island and the prison
compounds are reconstructed to hold no more than
500 POWs each. In addition, Boatner orders the 187th
Airborne Combat Team to Koje-do.
May 13 On this day, a contingent of 12 F-86
Sabre jets, led by Colonel Walker M. Mahurin, the
commander of the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group,
strike enemy targets in western Korea. They include
Sinuiju, its airfield and the airfield at Uiju during the
morning. In early afternoon, targets include the mar-
shaling yard at Kunu-ri, where a Sabre jet had been lost
to enemy fire on the 8th. In late afternoon the Sabre jets
maintain the attacks and Sinuiju, which had bee hit on
the 8th and earlier this day, is pounded again with
1,000-pound bombs.
During the strikes, five MiG-15 are shot down by the
Sabres; however, the Americans lose one plane, that of
the commanding officer, Colonel Mahurin. He is cap-
tured, but he survives imprisonment.
Later, when he writes his autobiography, he makes it
clear that although both the United States and the So-
viet Union made official denials about Russian pilots
fighting against the U.S., in fact it was the Russians
who piloted most of the planes in the war, and partic-
ularly in MiG Alley. It becomes widely known from
various sources during the 1990s the Russians piloted
about seventy-five percent of the flights in support of
the Communist North Koreans. Nonetheless, during
the war, American pilots knocked out the enemy planes
by a ratio of about 14 to 1.
May 14 In the 1st Marine Division zone, logs arrive
for the purpose of constructing bunkers. The project is
dubbed Operation TIMBER.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries in the
vicinity of Hungnam, near Yuktaeso-ri and Mayang-do
842
Island, open fire on the USS Douglas H. Fox. The ves-
sel sustains no appreciable damage; however, two crew-
men are injured. The Fox returns fire and knocks out
the battery.
May 15 The target selected by Fifth Air Force for
this day is a vehicle maintenance complex that contains
a power plant. The facility, located in Tang-dong, north
of Pyongyang, gets whacked by fighter bombers that
execute 265 sorties. The planes’ crews report the de-
struction of 39 structures and the power plant.
During the attack, two MiGs are shot down by Lieu-
tenant James H. Kasler, attached to the 335th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron, who becomes an ace with the
two victories.
May 16 In Naval activity, the USS Murrelet (AM
372) and USS Symbol (AM 123) come under fire while
sweeping near Songjin. The USS Doyle (DMS 34) and
USS Thomas (DD 788) promptly return fire and take
the pressure off the other two vessels. No damage is
sustained and no casualties are reported.
In another incident, the ARC 304 comes under fire
as it maneuvers in the Han River estuary. The fire orig-
inates from ground troops using mortars and heavy ma-
chine guns. Nevertheless, no damage or casualties
occur.
Also, a contingent attached to East Coast Korea
Blockading and Patrol Group (TG 95.2) captures seven
enemy troops off Ho-do Pando. By the following day,
intelligence is gathered from the prisoners that indicate
an imminent attack against Yo-do.
In other activity, as part of the response to recent
riots by POWs at Koje-do, to add to other units — in-
cluding tanks that moved 200 miles from the north —
transport planes in Japan speed a large contingent of
the 187th RCT from Japan to the island of Koje-do on
May 16–17. Aircraft, including C119s, C-46s and C-
54s, transport 2,361 troops to help suppress the insur-
rection. During the riots, General Frank T. Dodd,
USA, had been taken prisoner.
May 17 In Air Force activity, by this date, most
men of the 39th Squadron, 18th Fighter Bomber
Group, have been transferred into the 51st Fighter
Group and have switched from their F-51 Mustangs
to F-86 Sabres; however, the F-51s continue to be used
by the 19th Group until early 1953, when it, too,
moves to the F-86s. The 18th is the final group to fly
the Mustangs. Major James P. Hagerstrom is the first ace
of the group. He achieves his fifth victory in a Sabre
jet during March 1953.
In related activity, Colonel Sheldon S. Brinson as-
sumes command of the 18th Fighter-Bomber Group.
In conjunction, during the upcoming summer, the F-
86F will be introduced into Korea. The initial F-86F
Sabres are attached to the 39th Squadron, 51st Wing,
at Suwon. The F-86F had been designed as a fighter
bomber. Consequently, the remaining F-51D and F-
80C contingents will begin to prepare to be re-
equipped with the F-86F.
 843
The changes will add two fighter-bomber groups
that fly Sabres, the 8th (F-80C) Fighter Bomber Group
and the 18th (F-51Ds). Fighter Bomber Group. The
8th Fighter-Bomber Group is composed of the 35th,
36th and 80th Fighter-Bomber Squadrons. The 18th
Fighter-Bomber Group is composed of the 12th and
67th Fighter-Bomber Squadrons and the South African
Air Force’s No. 2 Squadron.
In Naval activity, a contingent debarks the USS Buck
(DD 761) and launches a raid in the area south of Kojo.
The mission succeeds in gaining six prisoners. Also, the
HMS Belfast (CL), while operating near the mouth of
the Taedong River, comes under fire from enemy shore
batteries. No damage or injuries are reported; however,
the ship’s return fire pounds the position.
May 18 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a platoon attached to the 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, is ordered late in the day to return to the lines
from an outpost position. Two of the squads are or-
dered to return to the main lines, while the platoon
commander, 2nd Lieutenant Theodore H. Watson,
with the remainder, is encircled by the enemy. Watson
and the contingent engage the enemy unit, composed
of about fifty troops. Artillery fire arrives to thwart the
Communists, but they remain undaunted. Watson and
the others seek cover in the bunkers and call in the ar-
tillery fire directly upon their positions. The bombard-
ment breaks off the attack and the troops are able to re-
turn to their lines.
In Air Force activity, the rescue helicopters of the 3rd
Air Rescue Squadron once again brave enemy fire to
assist an airman in need. Despite intense enemy fire
from troops along the shore, an SA-16 lands in the
water and retrieves a pilot from a downed F-84.
May 19 The U.S. 7th Division initiates the relief
of the 40th Division and afterward, assumes responsi-
bility for the Kumhwa Valley.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Air Wing com-
mander, Major General Selden, finally persuades Fifth
Air Force to modify its directives regarding close-air
support for the Marines. The plan permits twelve close-
air support missions per day, still not what the Marines
desire for top performance, but better than they had
been receiving.
Marine pilots are accustomed to coming in at tree-
top level in support of their Marines on the ground,
but the Air Force policy differs greatly. MAG-12 re-
ceives the task and it is to begin on 21 May. The order
is to remain active for a thirty-day period, but it is ex-
tended. Later, during July, the number of sorties per
day is increased to twenty, to the jubilation of the Ma-
rine ground troops.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at
Chongjin commence firing upon the USS Symbol (AM
123), USS Murrelet (AM 372), USS Doyle (DMS 34),
and the Australian destroyer HMAS Warramunga. No
damage is reported by the vessels. At Cho-do, the USS
Lowry (DD 770) comes under fire, but no damage is re-
ported.
May 23, 1952
In other activity, friendly guerrillas land on the main-
land near Haeju with the support of surface vessels and
aircraft. The raid succeeds in killing or wounding about
150 enemy troops and the group destroys many build-
ings. The attack had been planned by the Haeju Patrol
and Defense Unit (95.12.4), which controls the mission.
The vessels HMS Ocean (CVL) and the HMAS Bataan
(DD), participate.
In yet other activity, Vice Admiral J.J. Clark assumes
command of the U.S. 7th Fleet at Yokosuka, Japan. He
succeeds Vice Admiral R.P. Briscoe.
May 20 Colonel Harrison R. Thyng, the com-
mander of the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing, engages
a MiG in an air duel and prevails. The kill, his fifth,
makes Colonel Thyng the 16th ace of the Korean War.
May 21 The USS Mount Baker (AE 4) and her es-
cort, the South Korean vessel Apnok (PF 62) acciden-
tally collide. The Apnok sustains heavy damage and
high casualties, including 25 killed and 21 wounded.
The Mount Baker sustains no damage or casualties.
May 22 Lieutenant General William K. Harrison
replaces Admiral Joy as chief representative for the U.N.
at Panmunjom. Joy, having led the team for more than
ten months, requested the change.
In Naval activity, the accidental explosion of a rocket
aboard the USS Bataan (CVL 29) causes great dam-
age. No fatalities occur, but four crewmen are
wounded. Despite the seriousness of the explosion, the
vessel is able to continue operations.
In other activity, a group of raiders from the USS
Douglas H. Fox (DD 779) join with a contingent of
friendly guerrillas and land north of Kojo at Ch’ilbo.
Enemy guns fire at the Douglas H. Fox, but with the
guidance of air spotters, the ship pounds the battery
positions to silence the guns.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches 472
fighter-bomber sorties against the Kijang-ni industrial
complex, located southwest of Pyongyang. The facil-
ity, which makes ammunition, grenades and some small
arms, is devastated by direct hits and secondary explo-
sions.
May 23 The HMCS Athabaskan (DD) and a close
air patrol attached to the USS Bataan (CVL 29) scour
the area near Taedong Man in search of enemy vessels.
The enemy shore guns open fire, but no damage is in-
flicted. The search fails to discover any enemy vessels.
In other activity, at Sinchang-ni, the USS Walton
(DE-361) debarks a raiding party that uses a whale
boat to conduct a mission. Enemy machine guns fire
upon the whale boat and the Walton, but no damage or
casualties occur.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches its final
attack of four planned major interdiction strikes. The
fighter bombers execute 275 sorties against the facil-
ity, located in the vicinity of Kijang-ni. The raid inflicts
high amounts of damage to the steel plant, leaving only
about twenty percent of it operable.
In other activity, a rescue helicopter (H-19), oblivious
May 24, 1952
to inclement weather, uses its instruments to success-
fully retrieve a Marine pilot after his AD-2 was
downed. Also, B-29s are launched to complete a two-
day mission to drop delayed-action bombs in the vicin-
ity of Kijang-ni for the purpose of impeding the enemy
repair efforts.
May 24 The South Korean government proclaims
martial law in Pusan during a period of political insta-
bility.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun battery fire takes
aim on the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779) north of
Kojo, but without effect. In turn, the Fox pounds the
position and silences the guns after delivering several di-
rect hits.
May 25 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, the
Chinese had launched three recent unsuccessful attacks
against the division’s lines. In retaliation, this night a
contingent, including nine tanks attached to the 245th
Tank Battalion and elements of the ROK 1st Division,
springs an attack against a Communist-held town,
Agok, less than ten miles from Ch’orwon. Also on this
night, the Chinese attack a patrol base of the 45th Di-
vision and the defenders repulse it.
In Naval activity, planes attached to Fast Carrier Task
Force (TF 77) strike targets at Chongjun in conjunc-
tion with the surface vessels, including the battleship
USS Iowa (BB 61) and several destroyers. The carriers
launch 244 sorties.
In other activity, a raiding party attached to the de-
stroyer USS Douglas H. Fox operates in the area north
of Kojo and destroys about one-half of a 2,000 foot
fish weir. Also, the USS Swallow (AMS 36), while
under fire from enemy shore gun batteries near the
Songjin Harbor, requests support from the USS Mur-
relet (AM 372), but as the ship speeds to the scene, it
is hit several times. The Swallow sustains two hits.
However, neither vessel sustains any major damage.
In yet other activity, the British cruiser HMS Belfast
supports a raid by friendly guerrillas in the area near
Pongyang, on the west coast of Korea. Other support-
ing vessels include the HMS Whitesand Bay (PF), the
LST 1089, and the USS Bataan (CVL 29). Reports fol-
lowing the raid account for about 300 enemy killed.
Four others are seized. In enemy activity, about 150
North Koreans aboard junks land and occupy Yongwi-
do.
May 26 The USS Endicott (DMS 35), while on
patrol near Yang-do, interrupts a group of North Ko-
reans while they are fishing. Four men are seized.
In other activity, the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779)
supports a contingent of friendly guerrillas who launch
a raid near Kojo. The guerrillas encounter opposition
shortly after landing, but the men are able to withdraw
without sustaining any casualties. The YMS 504, a
troop carrier, also participates.
In yet other activity, the HMS Constance, a British
destroyer, demolishes two junks and captures seven
prisoners in the Yalu Gulf.
844
In Air Force activity, subsequent to a successful test
period (Operation PELICAN) during the previous Sep-
tember, the initial delivery of C-124 Globemasters ar-
rives on this day in Korea. Two squadrons of the 315th
Air Division start to switch from C-54s to the new air-
craft.
In other activity, ten planes attached to the 19th
Bomber Group attack targets in the vicinity of
Sinhung-dong. The bombing runs by B-29s, which
continue into the following day, destroy one locomo-
tive, 16 boxcars, sections of rails and part of the
Sinhung-dong rail bridge.
May 27 In Seoul, the assembly hall is encircled by
South Korean military police. A group of about fifty
representatives (anti–Syngman Rhee) of the legislature
are forcefully taken from the hall and transported to a
military police station. Four of the representatives are
jailed.
In Naval activity, the USS Douglas H. Fox (DD 779)
comes under enemy shore gun fire while on patrol off
Suwon, but it sustains no damage. Fire is returned and
the battery fire is halted.
In Air Force activity, Lt. General Glenn O. Barcus
assumes command of Fifth Air Force. He succeeds Lt.
General Frank F. Everest, who had held the post since
1 June 1951.
May 28 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, a
patrol is intercepted by Chinese while it operates on
the right side of the line. The patrol becomes trapped,
but its communications remain intact. Urgent requests
for reinforcements are received and within three hours,
despite enemy artillery and mortar fire, the besieged
patrol is reached by the fresh troops. By dawn on the fol-
lowing day, the Chinese disengage.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, pursuant to Opera-
tion Plan 16–52, at 0300, the 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, commences an attack to seize Hill 104 (Ob-
jective 1) and the Tumae-ri Ridge along the old outpost
line of resistance. Again, the vanguard is Company A,
which drives forward and at just about the time it
reaches the base of the objective, a counterattack is
launched. Nonetheless, the Marines quickly adjust by
fixing their bayonets and charging to the summit.
In answer to the attack and the heavy support fire,
the Communists commence an artillery barrage against
the Marines’ positions on the summit. In the mean-
time, Company C, to the left, is ordered to seize one of
two enemy positions, though it had initially been or-
dered to only feint an attack. Company C, at 0554,
moves against the hill and is met with heavy resistance.
While the contingent is stalled by heavy fire, PFC
John D. Kelly asks and receives permission to transfer
his radio to another man, so he can participate in an at-
tack to loosen the resistance. Kelly lunges forward and
eliminates one strongpoint, then sprints to the next one
a machine gun position. Kelly becomes wounded, but
he destroys the nest. Without pause, he then charges a
third. Although mortally wounded, Kelly makes it to the
bunker, discovers the opening and fires from point-blank
 845
range. Kelly succumbs, but the other Marines, inspired
by Kelly, seize the objective.
Meanwhile, at Company A’s positions, the enemy
raises equal opposition. Corporal David B. Champagne
leads an attack against a heavily fortified bunker and
succeeds in reducing it, but Champagne becomes seri-
ously wounded. Soon after, the Communists launch a
counterattack. Despite his wounds, Champagne refuses
evacuation and continues to lead his fire team. Sud-
denly a grenade lands in the midst of the group. Cham-
pagne grabs it and lobs it back to the enemy, but at the
instant it is leaving his hand, it detonates. Champagne
loses one hand and gets blown right out of the trench,
leaving him badly wounded and exposed to the imme-
diate front of the approaching enemy. Soon after, be-
fore he can even receive aid or be pulled back into
safety, an enemy mortar lands and mortally wounds
him.
Although the fighting is fierce, the Marines prevail.
By 0700, both of the objectives are under Marine con-
trol. Meanwhile, the Communists pour heavy fire upon
the positions of Company C, and at Hill 104 Com-
pany A remains under severe enemy fire. Slightly after
noon, the attack is recalled. By 1405, the troops arrive
back at friendly lines. Still, the enemy artillery and mor-
tar positions are able to operate at full speed despite air
attacks and artillery fire intended to eliminate it.
The Marines sustain 9 killed and of these, two receive
the Medal of Honor posthumously — Corporal David
B. Champagne and PFC John D. Kelly. The Marines
inflict 40 killed and about 40 others wounded upon
the enemy. During the battle the enemy propels 4,053
rounds into the Marines’ positions.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at Won-
san fire upon the USS Lof berg (DD 759) and the USS
O’Bannon (DDE 450). The USS O’Bourn (DD 846)
and the USS Condor (AMS 5) also come under fire and
they, too, report no damage or casualties. Two North
Koreans, each armed and apparently working for the
N.K. Army, surrender to the O’Bourn and hand over a
camera and film.
May 29 The island of Yongwi-do is occupied by
North Koreans.
In Naval activity, the USS Murrelet (AM 372) and
USS Firecrest (AMS 18) receive enemy fire while sweep-
ing the extended area between Hungnam and Mayang-
do. The Firecrest sustains machine gun hits. Neither
ship has major damage or personnel casualties. The bat-
teries are silenced by the sweepers and the USS Radford
(DDE 446).
In other activity, enemy shore gun batteries fire upon
a friendly held island at Wonsan until the USS O’Ban-
non (DD 450) moves up and propels a barrage that si-
lences the battery. Also, near Hungnam, the
minesweeper USS Murrelet (AM 372) comes under fire
during operations to retrieve a downed pilot. The gun
is knocked out of action and the Murrelet sustains no
damage or casualties.
At Wonsan, the USS Ozbourn (DD 846) and the
June 1, 1952
USS Radford (DDE 446) are fired upon by enemy shore
gun batteries on 29–30 May. No damage or casualties
are reported.
Also, the minesweeper USS Heron (AMS 18) comes
under fire by ground troops using machine guns. The
Heron sustains some small damage, but no casualties
occur and the fire is silenced by the ship’s return fire.
May 30 In Naval activity, enemy ground troops
using machine guns commence firing upon the
minesweepers USS Firecrest (AMS 18) and USS Heron
(AMS 10), which are operating in the Hungnam-
Mayang-do area. Another vessel, the Colombian Cap-
itan Tono, moves into position and silences the enemy
fire.
Also, Navy and Marine carrier aircraft close out the
month of May with a total of 3,100 rail cuts to impede
the Communists’ transportation system.
May 31 Enemy shore battery guns posted in the
vicinity of Chuuronjang take the vessels HMCS Nootka
(DD), USS John W. Thomason (DD 760) and the USS
Endicott (DMS 35) under fire. About 160 rounds from
seven separate guns participate, but the enemy fire
causes no damage or casualties. In contrast, the surface
vessels return fire and hit four of the guns. Also, the
destroyer HMS Constance, on patrol in the Yalu Gulf,
seizes an enemy junk and four North Koreans, bring-
ing the total of prisoners seized by the ship to 18.
In other activity, the minesweeper USS Murrelet
(AM 372), operating in the vicinity of Hongwan
Roads, encounters two enemy picket sampans. A whale
boat approaches to accept the surrender of the occu-
pants, and one of the Communists bolts from a con-
cealed position and tosses a grenade, which kills one
crewman of the Murrelet and wounds two others. The
others in the whale boat react and commence fire. The
phony surrender terminates with the entire party of 10
enemy killed.
In yet other activity, Rear Admiral John E. Gingrich
assumes command of United Nations Blockading and
Escort Force. He succeeds Rear Admiral George C.
Dyer. Gingrich’s flagship is the USS Dixie (AD 14).
June 1952 In Air Force activity, during the
month of June in air battles between U.S. pilots and
Communist MiGs, the Sabre jets knock down 20
MiGs against the loss of three F-86 Sabre jets.
June 1 Commander Charles B. Langston is appointed
commander, Republic of Korea Naval Forces (COM-
ROK NAVFOR) and chief of the Naval Advisory Group,
ROKN. He succeeds Commander Michael J. Luosey.
Also, in the Songjin-Chongjin region, the HMCS
Nootka (DD) and the USS John W. Thomason (DD
760) come under fire from guns located east of Chu-
uronjang. No hits are scored by the enemy; however,
one round that comes close causes a little damage to
some equipment on the Nootka. Meanwhile, near
Hungnam, the enemy fires upon the USS Firecrest
(AMS 18). Following the enemy’s first shot, the USS
Radford (DDE 446) returns fire and eliminates the gun.
June 3, 1952
In other activity, friendly guerrillas, supported by
the HMS Amethyst (PF), land at a spot opposite
Kyodong-do; however, the mission is cut short due to
heavy enemy resistance. Also, during a usual Yalu Gulf
patrol, the HMS Constance (DD), encounters an enemy
junk, the fourth discovered by the Constance. The three
occupants are seized. Also, friendly guerrillas occupy
Yongi-do subsequent to its abandonment by the Com-
munists.
June 3 Enemy ground troops commence firing
machine guns against the minesweepers USS Heron
(AMS 18) and Firecrest (AMS 10) while they are ma-
neuver in the vicinity of Hongwon. Shortly thereafter,
the destroyer escort USS Radford (DDE 446) pivots its
guns and eliminates the enemy fire.
June 4 In Air Force activity, in quick response to
word that a British pilot had been downed, an H-19
helicopter of the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron speeds to
the scene and despite enemy automatic weapons fire, the
helicopter evades damage and retrieves the pilot.
In other activity, Fast Carrier Task Force 77 initiates
Plan INSOMNIA. The mission is carried out on 4–5 June
during darkness from midnight until dawn as planes
seek out and destroy enemy trains. The aircraft destroy
four locomotives during this operation.
—In Japan: Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe becomes
commander, Naval Forces Far East. He succeeds Vice
Admiral C. Turner Joy, who has held the post since
1949. On the previous day, Admiral Joy requested a list
of selected targets (power plants) in North Korea and
A giant searchlight mounted atop a 21⁄2 ton truck in the region west of Ch’orwon.
846
on this day, it is received at headquarters from Fast Car-
rier Task Force (CTF 77). The targets include plants
that can be struck from the air and from naval surface
vessels.
June 5 Enemy shore gun batteries at Wonsan open
fire upon several warships as they engage in minesweep-
ing operations south of Ho-do Pando. The USS
O’Bannon (DDE 450), USS Lof berg (DD 759) and the
USS Radford (DDE 446) move in and bombard the
suspected enemy positions. The vessels report no dam-
age or casualties.
June 6 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone,
commanding officer Major General David L. Ruffner
orders an attack (Operation COUNTER) to gain ground
west of Ch’orwon and establish eleven patrol bases
across the division front. The attack, initiated by two
regiments, by the following day succeeds in seizing ten
of the eleven objectives. Subsequently, the Chinese
mount several counterattacks until 11 June to elimi-
nate the patrol bases, but each attack is repelled. The
Division moves to take the final objective on 13 June.
In Air Force activity, F-86 Sabre jets of Fifth Air
Force, during aerial battles, down eight MiGs. The U.S.
reports no losses.
June 7 In Air Force activity, Operation HIGHTIDE,
a test to ascertain the feasibility of refueling planes while
on combat missions, commences. Thirty-five F-84
ThunderJets depart from Japan and in flight they ren-
dezvous with tankers (KB-29Ms), get refueled and then
 847
continue toward targets in North Korea. The test is
successful.
In other activity, during a night flight over the west
coast of North Korea, Lieutenant John W. Andre,
USMC, VMF(N) 513 Squadron, encounters and
knocks out a Russian piston-driven Yak fighter. Andre,
a Marine pilot, is flying a World War II vintage Cor-
sair, but his kill is the first in which a Russian plane of
that type is blown from the skies during darkness by
another aircraft. Lt. Andre, in addition to his record
setting engagement, also becomes the first Marine night
fighter ace of the Korean War. The ace status for Andre
includes four kills during World War II.
Two others who served in World War II also become
aces when their kills from World War II added to the
Korean War victories reach five. They are William E.
Lamb, USN, and John W. Andre, USMC. Andre and
Lamb are rarely listed in the names of Korean aces be-
cause it took both wars to reach five. Some aces from
the subsequent Vietnam War attain the achievement
when their kills from the Korean War are added to those
in Vietnam.
June 9 A contingent of Communists moving by
sail junks attempts to land and attack the friendly guer-
rillas on Mudo, but the South Koreans repel the as-
sault. The guerrillas report that they eliminated four
of the seven attack boats. Two guerrillas are wounded
during the incident.
In other activity, the minesweeper USS Condor
(AMS 5) comes under attack by enemy shore gun bat-
tery fire while she is operating in the waters south of
Ho-do Pando and west of Suido. No damage is re-
ported; however, return fire from the Condor records
one direct hit on the battery.
In Air Force activity, the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron
dispatches an H-19 helicopter after receiving word of
a downed U.N. pilot. Enemy fire attempt to knock out
the helicopter, but it avoids damage and retrieves the
pilot.
— In the Soviet Union: The Communist newspaper
Pravda proclaims that the U.S. is using torture and gas
chambers at their POW compounds. The Communists
claim that the Americans are using the tactics to prevent
the prisoners from showing their desire to be repatriated.
June 10 At Koje-do, the 187th Airborne Combat
Team moves into the POW compound where the Com-
munists are resisting. Within the compound, the pris-
oners had been able to acquire gasoline from U.S. sup-
ply vehicles and they also fabricated a blacksmith’s
operation to forge weapons. The troops use tear gas
and it ignites gasoline tanks, which the Communists
had hidden. The uprising is terminated within about
one and one-half hours. About 150 Communists are
killed or wounded. One American is killed and 13 are
wounded. The barracks are also burned from the fires.
Subsequent uprisings are terminated quickly by tear
gas.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
Brigadier General Twining is succeeded by Brigadier
June 13, 1952
General Robert O. Bare as assistant divisional com-
mander of the 1st Marine Division.
In other activity, Colonel Thomas C. Moore assumes
command of the 7th Marines. He succeeds Colonel
Russell E. Hornsowetz. In conjunction, Colonel Horn-
sowetz becomes assistant chief of staff, divisional G-3.
In Air Force activity, the 19th Bomber Group dis-
patches an 8-plane contingent of B-29s on the night
of the 10th-11th against a rail bridge south of the Yalu
River at Kwaksan, but the North Korean target is bol-
stered by searchlight (radar controlled) and a band of
MiGs. The MiGs intercept the force and destroy two
of the B-29s and inflict damage on one other plane.
The implementation of the new air defenses causes
Fifth Air Force to speed up new electronic counter
measures (ECM) designed to interrupt the enemy radar
by jamming the signals. Some sources report a 10-plane
contingent, but the Air Force indicates eight planes.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns on the eastern
peninsula of Songjin harbor commence firing upon the
USS Evansville (PF 70), but no damage is inflicted.
The USS Endicott (DMS 35) and the USS Thomason
(DD 760) move into position and pound the battery.
The gun is silenced.
June 11 At Koje-do, the Communist leaders in
the prisoner compounds insist the POWs continue to
resist. During the night, they order the deaths of fifteen
prisoners.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral A. Souchek (Carrier
Division 3) assumes command of Carrier Division 5
and of Carrier TF 77. He succeeds Rear Admiral John
Perry. Also, the carrier USS Valley Forge (CV 45) em-
barks for the United States.
In other activity, reconnaissance parties, using whale
boats, move from the USS Duncan (DDR 874) and
the USS Buck (DD-761). The party attached to the
Duncan encounters enemy fire from a village while giv-
ing pursuit to several sampans, but the contingent man-
ages to return to the ship without casualties. The party
that embarked the Buck encounters no resistance near
Kojo and no enemy activity is discovered. However,
six Communists (sailors) in a sampan move up along-
side the Buck while it is off Kosong and they surrender.
June 12 The USS Albuquerque (PF 7), operating
near the southeastern shore of Wonsan harbor, pounds
suspected enemy positions. Enemy shore guns in the
area return fire. No damage is sustained, but one crew-
man is injured.
June 13 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, the
unit initiates Phase II of Operation COUNTER PUNCH.
An assault is mounted to gain the final objective, a hill
it had surrendered during the previous March at the
southern edge of a T-shaped ridge line, slightly less than
ten miles north of Ch’orwon. With artillery and air sup-
port, the 2nd Battalion, 180th Infantry Regiment, ad-
vances against stiff resistance and ignites close-quartered
fighting. The Chinese launch four separate counterat-
tacks, but none succeed. On the following day, the 2nd
June 14, 1952
Battalion is relieved by the 3rd Battalion, which contin-
ues the attack and seizes the objective.
In Naval activity, a contingent attached to the USS
Buck (DD 761) and a group of friendly guerillas, while
on a mission in a 50-foot motor launch in close prox-
imity to Kojo, come under fire and are compelled to
return to the ship. Two men are wounded, but not fa-
tally. The boat returns to the ship and the Buck com-
mences fire upon the battery and terminates the fire.
June 14 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, the
3rd Battalion, 180th Infantry, seizes the final objective
of Operation COUNTER PUNCH by 1200. The seizure
of the eleventh position provides the Division with a
solid chain of patrol bases at points ranging between
one-half mile to two miles in front of the main lines.
The first phase of the operation had begun on 6 June.
The Chinese initiate counterattacks to regain the
lost ground, but they fail. The attacks occur all along
the line, but initially the emphasis is against Hill 191.
However, the defenders hold firmly and repulse the
battalion-sized assaults. The Chinese mount a new at-
tack on 20 June.
In Air Force activity, subsequent to information
gained by reconnaissance flights that the Communists
had repaired the runway at the airfield in Pyongyang,
a group of fighter bombers, attached to Fifth Air Force,
A contingent of U.S. infantry troops prepares to initiate a reconnaissance patrol.
848
execute 150 sorties that strike the field and disable it
once again. All planes return safely.
In Naval activity, the USS Skagit (AKA-105), LSM
226 and a contingent of LSTs attached to TF 90 initi-
ate the movement of U.S. Army engineers, their equip-
ment and provisions to selected sites, scheduled to be-
come new holding centers for POWs, after being
moved from Koje-do.
In the IX Corps sector, 40th Division zone, a patrol of
the 223rd Infantry Regiment engages the enemy in the
vicinity of Minari-gol while the contingent is on the
search for prisoners. While ascending a nasty hill, the
enemy commences fire and throws both automatic
weapons and small arms fire into the ranks. Several be-
come wounded.
Sergeant David B. Bleak, a medic, administers to
the wounded, but then rejoins the patrol on the ascent
toward the military crest of the elevation. Bleak is fired
upon from a nearby trench, but he descends upon it
and eliminates the occupants, two with his hands and
the remaining one with his trench knife. Soon after, a
grenade tumbles near his position and that of one other
trooper. Bleak protects the other from the blast, then
again tends to the wounded. Shortly thereafter, he be-
comes wounded, but he disregards his own injuries and
continues to help the wounded. He takes one man
down the slope, but two enemy troops stand in his
 849
path. Bleak ignores the two bayonets leaning toward
his body, clasps both of the enemy and with a power-
ful thrust he bangs their two heads together like clash-
ing cymbals. Apparently, the head-banging does the
trick, as he walks away with the wounded man in his
arms to get him to safety. Sergeant Bleak receives the
Medal of Honor for his tremendous courage and self-
less heroism in the face of the enemy.
In other activity in the same area, Corporal Clifton
T. Speicher, Company F, takes action when his platoon
gets pinned down. Speicher, although wounded,
charges an enemy position to attempt to terminate the
deadly fire. He reaches a point about ten yards from
the machine gun and again he is wounded. He drives
into the bunker, occupied by three troops. Two of them
die by his rifle and the other is taken out with his bay-
onet. Inspired by Speicher, others bolt forward and
seize the objective. Speicher makes it the bottom of the
slope, but then he collapses and dies. Corporal Spe-
icher is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordi-
nary bravery in the face of the enemy.
June 15 In Air Force activity, Lieutenant James F.
Low, attached to the 335th Fighter Interceptor
Squadron, out of flight school for only about six
months and holding four victories (his first on 4 May),
engages and prevails over a MiG-15. Lieutenant Low,
with his fifth kill, becomes an ace. He gets a sixth MiG,
then heads for the States on tour, to encourage men to
become pilots. He returns toward the end of the year
and destroys three more MiGs.
During the Vietnam War, Low gets shot down by a
ground-to-air missile on 16 December 1967, and on 8
May of 1968, without consent of commanding officers
in the POW camp, he and two others accepted a Com-
munist offer (to further their propaganda) to go home.
Lieutenant Low had fought also in World War II.
A movie, The Hunters, was released during the late
1950s. Low was portrayed by Robert Wagner (Lt. Ed
Pell). Also, the other airman aboard the plane that got
shot down, Lieutenant Howard Hill, had also ejected
and was captured, but he remained in a Communist
prison with the other POWs until the end of the con-
flict.
In Naval activity, the vessels HMCS Athabaskan
(DDE) and ROKN AMC 301 provide support for a
contingent of friendly guerrillas during a raid in the
Tokhyon-san area. The raid is deemed a success and
with the guns of the surface vessels and accompanying
aircraft, the enemy casualties amount to 60, including
25 killed. Two junks laden with fuel are destroyed, and
the guerrillas manage to seize enemy documents. The
guerrillas are also able to evacuate twenty civilians. The
mission costs the group one man wounded.
June 16 Fast Carrier Task Force (TF 77) begins
to accelerate its attacks against enemy primary trans-
portation facilities, including the rails. Carrier planes
had been executing interdiction sorties, but the new
strategy will include entire air groups being sent out to
destroy the targets.
June 21, 1952
June 17 Enemy batteries on Mayang-do fire upon
the USS Shoveler (AS4 382). Shortly thereafter, planes
from TF-77 arrive on scene to plaster the gun posi-
tions while the USS Duncan (DDR 874), which had
also arrived in position, propels a barrage toward the
battery. The guns are silenced. No damage or casual-
ties are reported by the vessels.
June 18 Enemy shore gun batteries at Mayang-
do commence firing upon the minesweeper USS
Firecrest (AMS 10). The burst of fire prompts the
minesweepers operating there to pull back out of the
range of the guns, while the USS Duncan (DDR 874)
initiates a barrage that silences the guns. No damage is
inflicted upon the vessels and no casualties are reported.
In other activity, restrictions on attacking electrical
power stations in North Korea is lifted. Fast Carrier
Task Force (TF-77) is authorized to strike at will.
June 19 In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces
launches B-29s that execute an extraordinarily high
number of sorties, 35, against the enemy targets in
North Korea during the night of the 19th-20th. Also,
the railroad bridge at Huichon is struck by 27 medium
bombers.
In Naval activity, the USS Mockingbird (AMS 27)
and USS Heron (AMS 18) maneuver to pick up a
downed pilot off Mayang-do, but the mission is mo-
mentarily interrupted by enemy shore guns. Neverthe-
less, the pilot is rescued and another warship, the de-
stroyer USS Rowan (DD 782), provides protection to
the minesweepers. No casualties are reported and no
damage is sustained.
In other activity, a contingent of friendly guerrillas,
supported by the HMS Amethyst (PF), launches a raid
near the Haeju approaches. During the operation, as re-
ported, the enemy loses 14 men to the guerrillas and 27
other enemy troops are killed by fire from the Amethyst.
June 20 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, the
Chinese again launch an attack to seize Hill 255 to the
southwest of Hill 191. Following a horrific barrage by
the artillery and mortar fire, an entire regiment attacks.
The Chinese pound against the defenses, but in return,
the defenders return devastating fire. The struggle con-
tinues into the following day, but again, as in the other
recent assaults, the Chinese fail.
In Naval activity, the USS Bayonne (PF 21), while
operating near Hungnam, destroys 17 sampans. Also,
enemy ground troops at Chojcho-do open fire on the
minesweeper USS Shoveler (AM 382). The small arms
fire is answered by the guns of the USS Duncan (DDR
874).
Also, the USS Horace A. Bass (APD 124), operating
under the control of CTF 95, initiates a mission that
continues into the 23rd. South Korean troops are
landed along the northeast of coast of Korea under
cover of darkness to destroy selected objectives and to
attempt to gather intelligence.
June 21 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a patrol from the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
June 22, 1952
moves out to establish an ambush site; however, an
enemy contingent is lying in wait and when the patrol
approaches, it comes under heavy fire. The 16-man pa-
trol is ordered to withdraw. One portion composed of
ten men makes it back to the line of departure, while
the others move toward a friendly outpost, but one man
is reported missing. On the following day, the missing
Marine is located. He had been killed by enemy mor-
tar fire.
June 22 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, while a search for a Marine from the 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, missing since the previous day, is un-
derway, another patrol is dispatched to attempt to re-
cover a body in the area known as “No Man’s land.”
The patrol moves out at dawn, under cover of smoke
delivered by artillery, and reaches the man. While head-
ing back with the corpse, the enemy pounds the return
route with a mortar attack. One Marine is killed and
another is wounded. The patrol afterward arrives back
at the 2nd Battalion with the remains of the one body
and that of the Marine slain during the recovery mis-
sion.
In Naval activity, word is passed that all ships at-
tached to United Nations Blockading and Escort Force
(CTF 95), deemed to be operating in the path of Ty-
phoon Dinah, are to seek safer waters. The winds at
Sasebo, Japan, reach about 40 knots and prevent TF-
Marine pilots (MAG 33) following a large air attack by Fifth Air Force in 1952.
850
95 from resuming normal operations. No damage is
sustained by any of the vessels. The typhoon passes
west of Sasebo. Other ships in the region continue to
evade the storm until it vanishes on the 24th.
June 23 Fifth Air Force initiates a large-scale at-
tack that strikes eight North Korean power plants (hy-
droelectric) in the central and northwestern sectors of
North Korea. Up until this point, the FAF raids had
concentrated on the Communist transportation sys-
tem, but it is concluded that the results of the opera-
tion, in effect since May 1951, had been in doubt. This
is the first time that planes of MAG-12 and MAG-33
(USMC) are assigned targets next to each other that
are simultaneously attacked.
In Naval activity, USS Bon Homme Richard (CV 31)
joins TF-77 to initiate its second tour of duty during
the Koran War. The Bon Homme Richard and the car-
riers USS Philippine Sea (CV 47), USS Boxer (CV 21)
and the USS Princeton (CV 37) launch planes that join
with Fifth Air Force aircraft in a huge raid by 290
planes that strike the hydroelectric plant at Suiho, on
the Yalu River. The mission also targets eight other hy-
droelectric plants in the vicinity of Kyosen and Fusen.
The attack is record-setting, as the Communist power
plants are attacked for the first time, pursuant to the
recent lifting of the restrictions against striking power
stations. And, it is the first time during the conflict,
 851
since autumn of 1950, that four carriers are operating
simultaneously.
Forty Skyraiders (ADs) and Corsairs (F4Us), at-
tached to Marine Air Croup 12 (lst MAW), strike a hy-
droelectric plant at Chosin and inflict damage. In ad-
dition, 38 F9F-2s attached to Marine Air Group 33
(lst MAW) strike a separate power plant at Chosin and
inflict devastating damage that destroys the facility.
June 23–27 1952 In Operation PRESSURE
PUMP, Fifth Air Force initiates a series of raids against
Communist industrial targets. Air Force, Navy and
Marine planes fly 1,654 sorties, including attack and es-
cort flights, during this three-day period. The air attacks
inflict devastating damage by knocking out eleven of
thirteen target plants and most probably destroying the
other two. The massive loss of power tosses most of
North Korea into a blackout situation for about two
weeks. Planes from VMF-311 and VMF-115, attached
to MAG-33, destroy the power complexes known as
Chosin 3 and Chosin 4 during these raids on the 23rd-
24th, in what becomes the initial mission of this type
for the Marines’ F9F jets. Also, of the 1,654 sorties
flown, only two planes are lost and of those, both naval
pilots are picked up by rescue aircraft.
June 24 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the positions of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
come under a day-long series of artillery attacks until
about 2130. As the guns silence, the Chinese launch
an attack against a thinly manned outpost known as
“Yoke” and also as Hill 179. The defenders, 34 troops
of Company F, meet the attack with ferocious fire;
however, the ever-charging numbers begin to over-
whelm the unit. Enemy fire prevents a withdrawal and
reinforcements are unable to penetrate the fire. Never-
theless, the Marines on the slope move to bunkers to
continue to resist the envelopment.
The Chinese take the slope, but the Marines defiantly
continue to resist and the enemy is unable to eliminate
them. The Chinese retire about 0300. The Marines re-
turn to the slope, only to come under yet another at-
tack. The Marines again head for the bunkers and place
more urgent calls for artillery, which soon arrives. The
Communists disengage about dawn, and the Marines
still hold “Yoke.” The Marines sustain 9 killed and 23
wounded. The Communists sustain 12 killed (counted)
and an estimated additional 50 killed.
On this day the Communists also strike four other
outposts, but none sustain the intensity of combat such
as the fighting that occurs at the Yoke. The total casu-
alties for the 2nd Battalion for the day include 10 killed
and 36 wounded (including the casualties at Yoke).
The Chinese, for the first time, wear gas masks dur-
ing the attack, but they toss white phosphorous
grenades, not tear gas. Nevertheless, it is thought by
the Marines that the ploy was to imply erroneously that
the U.S. was using poison gas.
In Air Force activity, twenty-six B-29s initiate close
air support sorties. Other planes (fighter bombers)
strike the rail complex at Samdong-ni, North Korea,
June 29, 1952
the choke point of the east-west and north-south rails
lines. Other planes, B-26s, initiate night raids that drop
delayed-action bombs to impede any repair activity
implemented by the enemy.
In Naval activity, planes from the four operating car-
riers, the USS Philippine Sea, Bon Homme Richard, Prince-
ton and the Boxer, again launch attacks against Commu-
nist power plants in North Korea. The attacks, which
had begun on the previous day, succeed in the destruction
of transformer stations in the Hwanghae Province at Yu-
chon, Haeju, Chaeryong, and Kaishu. In addition, the
power plants at Changyon have been damaged.
June 25 The conflict, which had begun with the
invasion of South Korea by the Communists in North
Korea on 25 June 1950, enters its third year.
In Naval activity, again the four operating carriers
(Fast Carrier Task Force, TF 77) launch attacks, as 193
sorties are flown against enemy targets. Having already
devastated enemy power plants during the past few
days, the aircraft are sent against targets at Wonsan.
June 26 An airstrip project that began 3 June is
completed this day on Yo-do Island. The airstrip, 2,700
feet long and 120 feet wide, is designated as Briscoe
Field. It is to be used for intelligence flights and for
emergency landings.
In other activity, Communist shore guns fire upon
the HMS Ceylon (CL) while it is operating near
Popkyo-ri. The enemy rounds fall way short, but return
fire from the Ceylon is effective.
In yet other activity, friendly guerrillas bolstered by
the vessel ROK AMS 50 launch a successful raid at
Susa-ri. The guerrillas seize 5 prisoners and report that
about 100 Communists are killed. The guerrillas sus-
tain no casualties.
June 27 The USS McCoy Reynolds (DE 440), a
destroyer escort, encounters a sampan near Mayang-
do carrying five male refugees. The civilians are taken
aboard the ship. Subsequently, enemy ground troops
near Hungnam at Konjap’o commence firing with ma-
chine guns at the ship from a distance of about 2,300
yards. The enemy fire causes no harm.
June 28 In the I Corps sector, 45th Division zone, the
Chinese launch yet another assault against Hill 255.
The defenders come under severe attack for more than
four hours, but give no ground and punish the Chi-
nese in the process.
During the entire month of June, the 45th Division
sustains 1,004 casualties, while the estimate of casual-
ties inflicted by it upon the Chinese is about 5,000.
— In the United States: President Truman signs a
compromise bill passed by Congress that authorizes the
Marine Corps to increase its strength to three divisions
and three air wings, but in addition, the bill raises the
status of the Marine commandant, giving the present
and future commandant equal status with the mem-
bers of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.
June 29 In the I Corps sector, Major General Paul
June 30, 1952
W. Kendall succeeds Lt. General O’Daniel as I Corps
commander.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, a contingent of the
1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment initiates a patrol to
seize Chinese troops at an outpost near the Sachon
River, less than five miles from Panmunjom. The unit
moves out under supporting guns, but no prisoners are
seized. Nevertheless, the patrol destroys 7 bunkers,
burns several others and kills 12 enemy troops and
wounds 6 others. The Korean Marines sustain light ca-
sualties. Due to the weight of the flamethrowers against
the weight of the average Korean Marine, the troops
designated as carriers end the patrol exhausted.
In Naval activity, friendly guerrillas, bolstered by
warships, launch a raid on the mainland at a point
north of Yongmae-do. The guerrillas return to the ships
at dawn on the 30th and bring two prisoners aboard.
The HMS Ceylon (CL), HMS Comus (DD) and the
HMS Amethyst (PF) participate.
June 30 In Naval activity, since the outbreak of
the war on 25 June 1950, until this date, the Navy and
Marine Corps have completed about 195,000 flights.
During this month, Navy and Marine aircraft rail cuts
total about 1,700. In May, the rail cuts totaled about
3,100. Also, during the month of June, enemy air ac-
tivity is light compared to the beginning of the year,
when Communist jets flew 3,700 sorties. During this
month, only 308 enemy sorties are flown.
— In the United States: The Marine Corps strength
at this time stands at 231,967 men.
July 1952 The Chinese bring a new weapon
into their arsenal in Korea. The weapon is a 132-
mm Russian rocket (Katusha), which is able to si-
multaneously launch 16 rockets from a truck. The
Marines gain the information from a POW who in-
forms them that two Katusha regiments are now op-
erating in Korea. Also, during the month of July, the
Navy sustains only three fatalities. It is the lowest
number of combat fatalities for one month since July
of the previous year, when no fatalities occurred.
In Air Force activity, during July, pilots of F-86
Sabre jets, while engaged with MiGs, destroy 16.
Four Sabre jets are lost. Also, 404 Communist sor-
ties are sighted during July. (See also, July 4, 1952,
In Air Force activity.)
July 1 In the I Corps sector, Operation AMAZON—
a plan to ensure the four bridges in the corps sector re-
main operable during the coming flood season — is ini-
tiated. The operation includes removing debris from
the rivers to prevent damage to the bridges.
Also, elements of the ROK 1st Division commence
an attack against enemy positions in the heights over-
looking the Imjin River. Heavy fighting ensues and the
South Koreans inflict 112 killed before they disengage
and return to their lines.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, patrols are dispatched
after dark and on the next two successive days, the patrol
moves out under cover of darkness to gain prisoners.
852
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries near Kojo
commence firing upon the USS Albuquerque (PFT). An-
other vessel, the USS Perkins (DDR 877), provides sup-
port and commences firing to silence the enemy guns at
a distance of about 11,000 yards. Between 75 and 100
enemy rounds are fired, but no damage is scored. The
Perkins’ guns terminate the enemy fire.
July 2 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
Company G, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, initiates a
night patrol of platoon strength, a prelude to a new at-
tack at dawn. The contingent advances to Objective
Yoke (Hill 159) without incident and establishes posi-
tions near there, from which it can offer support fire for
the anticipated attack at dawn by another platoon.
In the 5th Marines sector to the right of the 7th
Marines, a night-patrol is initiated against three enemy
outposts. Company A, 1st Battalion, moves out and
effortlessly seizes the first two objectives near Sami-
chon, as they are unoccupied. Prior to moving against
the final objective, during the early morning hours of
the 3rd, the company is ordered to return to its lines.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns initiate fire
against the USS Perkins (DDR 877), which is on the
Nan-do patrol. The ship receives no damage, but its
return fire eliminates the hostile fire.
July 3 In the I Corps sector, 45th Infantry Division
zone, a contingent of infantry, supported by tanks, at-
tacks an enemy-held hill mass in the area west of Ch’or-
won. The attack inflicts 79 killed upon the Chinese.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines, dispatches a platoon as the second part of a
mission that began on the previous night. Unlike the
other platoon that reached its objective without encoun-
tering enemy presence, the Chinese commence firing on
the advancing platoon, halting progress. Suddenly, the
platoon is up against a battalion at Hill 159 (Yoke). De-
spite the withering fire, it continues to push forward.
Sergeant William E. Shuck, Jr., in charge of a ma-
chine gun squad, also assumes command of a rifle squad
after its leader is taken out. Shuck, also wounded, leads
an attack against the summit and he becomes wounded
a second time, but still, he refuses to relent. Pressing
forward, he attempts to gain the summit until ordered
to withdraw. After making sure all the dead and
wounded are coming out with the platoon, he begins
a withdrawal. However, he is struck and killed by a
sniper. Sergeant Shuck receives the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary heroism under fire.
The Marines sustain four killed and forty wounded.
The Chinese estimated losses stand at 50 killed and
150 wounded.
In the 5th Marines sector, on the right, one patrol (1st
Battalion) dispatched the previous night returns during
the early morning hours of this date without having made
any enemy contact. After dawn, a patrol of the 2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines, engages an enemy contingent and
gains prisoners. As the patrol advances, a Marine acci-
dentally sets off an enemy mine that signals the Marines’
presence. Afterward, a tenacious one-hour skirmish
 853
A chaplain prays with a dying soldier.
develops. The Marines sustain 1 killed and 11 wounded,
prior to withdrawing under the cover of artillery delivered
smoke. Chinese casualties are unavailable. Later, a night
patrol is dispatched by the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines.
Just prior to midnight (3rd-4th), an enemy contingent
encroaches the ambush. Six Chinese are killed and 8 are
wounded. The Marines sustain no casualties and return
to their lines by 0015 on 4 July in time for a celebration.
In other activity, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment
dispatches a patrol that engages and kills nine Chinese.
Also, I Corps issues a directive in conjunction with an
earlier order from Eighth Army; it orders a battalion-
sized attack prior to 7 July. The 1st Marine Division
commander attempts to persuade the corps commander
to extend the date, explaining that more than 2,600
Marines are set to depart for the States and equally im-
portantly, there is insufficient time to plan and prepare
for such a large-scale assault (Code Name B2).
In addition, General Selden proclaims that the re-
placement Marines will not be in place until 11 July, and
that a battalion-sized attack would weaken the division
line that extends 35 miles. Nevertheless, I Corps ig-
nores his plea and orders the attack to commence on
schedule. Selden afterward sets the date for the Marine
raid to commence on the night of the 6th-7th.
In other activity, a ferry is placed into operation to
July 3, 1952
ease the flow of supplies to the troops on the front lines
north of the Imjin River. The Honker bridge is out of
service due to the recent torrential rains. By the fol-
lowing day, the waters recede to put the Widgeon
bridge back into service.
In the IX Corps zone, 7th Division zone, a contingent
of infantry moves against an enemy-held hill ten miles
south of P’yonggang and succeeds in decimating the
defenses there and annihilating the 45 defenders. In
addition, the ROK 9th Division launches two separate
raids and succeeds in destroying enemy positions, in-
cluding bunkers, machine gun emplacements and for-
tified trenches. The Chinese sustain sixty killed.
In the ROK II sector, South Korean infantry units
commence a successful attack against enemy positions
northeast of Kumhwa. The Chinese sustain 65 killed.
In the ROK I Corps sector, North Korean forces attack
an observation post that coordinates naval gunfire
concentrating on the enemy’s communication lines
along the Nam River. The Communists fail and lose
an estimated 600 troops during the assault.
In Air Force activity, the recently arrived C-124
transport planes receive their initial flight on this
day. The group, led by General McCarty, the com-
manding officer of the 315th Air Division, departs
Japan for Korea. Thirteen sorties are flown over enemy-
July 4, 1952
controlled territory. The Globemasters drop more than
twenty-two million leaflets. The C-124s had arrived
in Japan during the latter part of May.
In Naval activity, at Kojo-do, the operation to relo-
cate about 70,000 Communist POWs, those thought
to be instigators, begins. TF-90 transports the prison-
ers to other islands that now contain new and improved
camps. The operation is completed on 17 July.
Also, enemy shore gun batteries located between
Wonsan and Hungnam commence fire upon the USS
Current (ARS 22). The destroyer escort USS Currier
(DE 700) pinpoints the two separate batteries and re-
turns fire. No damage or casualties are sustained by the
warships. In addition, the Currier, while supporting
the USS Zeal (AM 131) and the USS Symbol (AM
123), comes under enemy shore gun fire near Mayang-
do, but again, no damage is sustained.
In other activity, planes attached to TF-77 strike the
electrical power plants at Fusen and Puryong.
Also, more than 300 friendly guerrillas, supported
by the HMS Comus (PC 703), launch a successful raid
against enemy positions on the peninsula at a place
north of Mudo-ri Island.
July 4 Artillery units along the entire Eighth Army
front celebrate the Fourth of July by initiating bom-
bardments.
In the I Corps sector, every available gun salutes In-
dependence Day by firing voluminous rounds at des-
ignated times in Operation FIRECRACKER. The 11th
Marines fire 3,202 rounds.
In other activity, in Seoul, about eighty representa-
tives (anti–Rhee) are strong-armed and brought into
Objective YOKE, another rugged hill in Korea.
854
the assembly hall and prevented from leaving until con-
stitutional amendments are passed. Subsequent to the
votes, Syngman Rhee announces a presidential election
on 5 August and on that date he declares victory, claim-
ing more than seventy percent of the vote.
In Air Force activity, a large force composed of sev-
enty F-84s and about fifty F-86s launch an attack near
the Yalu River against the North Korean Military Acad-
emy, located at Sakchu. More than fifty MiGs arrive
from across the Yalu to intercept the Americans. The
MiGs, many of which are piloted by Russians, score
some penetration when four of them break through the
fighter cover, but none of the fighter bombers sustains
any damage. Meanwhile, as the battle continues in the
sky, the Sabre jets own the day. The Communists lose
13 MiGs. The Americans lose two Sabres. The fighter
bombers’ raid against the military academy, however, is
not rated as being effective.
July 5 The USS Orleck (DD886) and USS Doyle
(DMS34), operating off Chuuronjang and bombard-
ing selected targets there, come under enemy fire as
they maneuver to turn. About 70 enemy rounds ring
out from a distance of about 6,000 yards, causing mo-
mentary concern. Nevertheless, the ships maintain their
focus and pull back under fire until they reach a distance
of about 16,000 yards from the shore gun batteries.
The Orleck does sustain some minor damage and one
crewman is slightly wounded.
July 6 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
Operation BUCKSHOT commences. At 2200, the 1st
Battalion, 7th Marines reinforced, initiates its attack.
Company C drives toward Objective Yoke. Meanwhile,
 855
Company B, which had moved out just after Company
C, moves toward Combat Outpost (COP) Green and
encounters no enemy presence. The vanguard of Com-
pany C, however, encounters heavy fire and it becomes
isolated, but the resistance is overcome and the objec-
tive is seized at 0020 on the 5th.
On the left, Company A and its supporting tanks
move out behind the other units at just before the
stroke of midnight, en route to the heights southwest
of Yoke as a diversionary tactic. The Communists con-
tinue to pound the attack force. At about 0200, ele-
ments of Company C encounter Company A, which has
sustained casualties, including the company com-
mander and other officers. By about 0310, both com-
panies are authorized to return to the battalion lines,
which are reached at slightly after 0830 on the 7th. The
diversionary infantry-tank force arrives back at the lines
about 0645.
The operation gains no success and no prisoners.
The Marines sustain 12 killed 85 wounded and five
missing. (See also, July 3, 1952, In the 1st Marine Di-
vision zone.) During 4–7 July, 22 Marines are killed
and 268 are wounded during combat operations.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Philippine Sea
(CVA 47) completes her second tour of duty in Korea.
Fighter Squadron VF-112 (F9Fs) completes its tour
with a near-sterling record. The squadron sustains no
major damage to any planes and no losses.
In other activity, friendly guerrillas, supported by
the vessels HMS Mounts Bay (PF), ROKN LSSL 107
and the USS Kimberly (DD521) launch a reconnais-
sance raid on the mainland in the vicinity of Chin-
nampo.
July 7 While the destroyer USS Arnold J. Isbell (DD
869) is en route for the Formosa Patrol, an accident oc-
curs. Four men are washed overboard. One man is lost and
of the three recovered crewmen, two are injured.
July 9 The HMS Ocean (CVL), HMAS Warra-
munga (DD), and USS Kimberly (DD-521) combine
their power to strike the enemy positions on the west
coast of Korea in the vicinity of the Sillyon Myon
peninsula, north of the Taedong River. The attacks
pound the coastal guns and the anti-aircraft batteries.
July 10 In Air Force activity, the 315th Air Divi-
sion initiates an operation that relocates the 474th
Fighter Bomber Wing to Kunsan Air Base I, South
Korea, from its present location at Misawa Air Base in
Japan. The operation, the biggest movement of a unit
thus far in the war, is completed in three weeks.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns on Mayang-do
Island and the mainland open fire on the destroyer USS
Hollister (DD-788), but no damage or casualties occur.
July 11 In Air Force activity, Operation PRESSURE
PUMP commences. Far East Air Forces planes focus on
thirty separate targets at Pyongyang, one of which is
the North Korean Ministry of Industry. The aircraft
initiate 1,329 sorties and destroy three targets, includ-
ing the Ministry of Industry. Most of the others sustain
July 15, 1952
damage in what becomes the raid that executes the most
sorties for a single day during July. On the night of
11th-12th, B-29s initiate 71 combat sorties and of
these, more than 50 are against targets at Pyongyang.
In Naval activity, the Communist capital of North
Korea is struck by a massive air attack as the planes
pound industrial targets in and around Pyongyang.
Planes attached to the USS Princeton (CVA 37), USS
Bon Homme Richard (CVA 31) the HMS Ocean (CVL),
aircraft attached to the U.S. and Australian Air Forces
and Marine planes join in the attack.
In other activity, a sampan in the vicinity of
Mayyang, carrying three North Koreans, encroaches
the destroyer USS Hollister (DD 788). The men surren-
der. Intelligence gathered from the prisoners leads to
information regarding five guns on the mainland that
are held in caves and can be moved out on tracks to
fire upon U.S. warships.
July 12 The USS Hollister (DD 788) lands a recon-
naissance party ashore near Hongwan. During the op-
eration enemy shore guns commence firing on the Hol-
lister. Despite firing more than 100 rounds, no damage
is inflicted.
In other activity, the USS Juneau (CL 119) comes
under fire while she is operating near Sinpo, but no
damage is incurred. In turn, the Juneau opens a barrage
that ends the hostile fire.
July 13 In Air Force activity, aircraft attached to
Far East Air Forces execute sorties that are a new way
of forewarning towns of imminent bombardment. The
planes drop leaflets that specify the targets to be stuck
by air raids.
In Naval activity, planes are launched from the car-
riers USS Princeton (CVA 37) and the USS Bon Homme
Richard (CVA 31) for a mission that becomes the first
close-air support mission undertaken by TF-77 dur-
ing 1952. The Princeton comes under fire from enemy
shore guns located near the Suwandan lighthouse, but
no damage is sustained.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Hollister (DD
788) comes under fire from three separate guns while
she operates near Sinch’ang. The destroyer returns fire
and scores one direct hit. No damage is sustained by
the Hollister.
July 14 The USS Southerland (DDR 743) comes
under fire from enemy shore gun batteries located near
Kojo. The vessel is hit four times during a barrage of
more than 60 rounds, at distances ranging from 3,000
yards to 13,000 yards. The vessel sustains some dam-
age and 8 crewmen are wounded.
In other activity, friendly guerrillas, supported by
the HMS Belfast, HMS Amethyst, and the USS LST
883, launch a raid on the Changsan Got peninsula.
July 15 In Air Force activity, a cement making fa-
cility and a locomotive repair complex at Sungho-ri
become the focus of Fifth Air Force fighter-bombers
on this day. The planes execute about 175 sorties that
pound both targets.
July 16, 1952
In Naval activity, the recently completed airstrip on
Yo-do Island at Wonsan harbor serves a useful purpose
on this day. Seven distressed Corsairs engaged in a
search for a downed pilot have expended most of their
fuel and are forced to land on the island to refuel. Af-
terward, the planes return to their carriers.
In other activity, enemy shore guns on Mayang-do
commence firing upon the USS Hollister (DD 788).
No damage is sustained. Subsequently, the battleship
USS Iowa moves into position and destroys the guns
that had fired upon the Hollister.
In yet other activity, a contingent of Communists
numbering about 156 men land on Changin-do, held
by friendly guerrillas. The HMS Belfast, HMS
Amethyst, and planes attached to the USS Bataan
(CV129) support the friendly guerrillas. During the
incident, enemy shore gun batteries fire ineffectively
upon the HMS Amethyst. The enemy batteries are af-
terward reduced. Meanwhile, the naval vessels set up a
ring around the island to further support the guerrillas.
Also, the USS Orleck (DD 886) opens fire on an
enemy train that is composed of five flat cars carrying
artillery and ten boxcars transporting explosives. The
train is destroyed.
July 16 A U.S. plane (RB-26) is attacked while it
is flying over the Yellow Sea on a weather reconnais-
sance mission, but the plane is able to evade the enemy
craft by dropping to a very low altitude of about 100
feet.
July 17 In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force further
extends the number of sorties to be flown on a daily
basis by MAG-12 in support of the Marines on the
ground. The number increases from 12 per day to 20.
The air support is requested directly from MAG-12,
bypassing Fifth Air Force, which speeds up the time of
arrival and assures the ground troops that the flights
will be on time. Also, if the 1st Marine Division lines
are under attack, or if a major offensive is underway, the
number of sorties is automatically increased to an ap-
propriate number.
By August, the operation comes to an unexpected
halt due to complaints from General Van Fleet, Eighth
Army commander, who maintains that the Marines are
part of Eighth Army and must request their support
through Fifth Air Force. On August 2, the Marines lose
their most potent weapon against the enemy positions
on the respective reverse slopes of the hills. Under Fifth
Air Force, most of the time, the requests for close-air
support run either late or fail to materialize. By the
middle of summer 1952, the Marines receive permis-
sion to use radar bombing, coordinated by a forward
observer. The tactic developed by the Marines is differ-
ent than that used by Fifth Air Force. The Marines’
unit is contained within a trailer, making it more mo-
bile, and it is able to deliver bombs within one mile of
friendly lines.
In Naval activity, friendly guerrillas reoccupy
Changin-do Island. Of the 156-man North Korean
force that had recently invaded the island, 60 are killed,
856
another 30 die by drowning while trying to swim to
safety and 41 are seized as prisoners. The reoccupation
is supported by the vessels HMS Belfast, HMS
Amethyst, and ROKN PC 702. The friendly guerrillas
sustain 8 killed and 12 wounded.
July 18 In China: Two U.S. carriers, the USS Essex
(CVA 9) and USS Philippine Sea (CVA 37), arrive off
the coast of China to exhibit a show of strength. How-
ever, while there, the planes initiate flights to obtain
intelligence and photographs between July 18 and July
24.
July 19 The destroyer USS Orleck (DD 886),
while operating near the coast, comes under fire by
enemy shore gun batteries. The vessel sustains some
slight damage and 5 crewmen are wounded.
In other activity, the enemy artillery in the Wonsan
area initiate a bombardment of friendly held islands
Hwangto-do and Yo-do during the afternoon; how-
ever, no casualties are reported. The batteries also fire
upon the USS Parks (DD 884), but no damage is in-
curred.
July 20 In Air Force activity, The 31st Fighter Es-
cort Wing initiates Operation FOX PETER ONE, a mis-
sion that includes a cross-ocean flight from Turner Field
in Georgia to Misawa Air Base, Japan. Fifty-eight F-
84Gs, the entire complement of the air wing, make the
journey with each aircraft being refueled en route. The
mission is the largest mass trans–Pacific non-stop air
movement of jet planes. The F-84Gs, which emerged
from the earlier F-84Es, by the end of the year will have
atomic capability. The first of the planes had left the as-
sembly lines prior to the new capabilities. In addition
to SAC (Strategic Air Command) receiving the planes
at Georgia, another SAC unit, the 27th Fighter Escort
Wing, based at Bergstrom Air Force Base in Texas, will
also receive F-84Gs.
In Naval activity, the USS Duncan (DDR 874) and
USS Essex (CV9) accidentally collide during a refuel-
ing operation. The Duncan sustains some damage and
one crewman is injured.
July 22 A contingent of about 300 enemy troops,
while repairing a break in the rails south of Wonsan,
come under heavy fire from the destroyer USS Parks
(DD 884). The incoming rounds pound the rails and
a bridge and inflict about 74 casualties on the work
party. In addition, the Parks illuminates the area over-
head to guide planes that arrive to strike the area.
July 23 Underwater Demolition Team 5, during
the last week of July, initiates six separate raids against
enemy fishing facilities. The raiders are supported by the
USS Diachenko (APD 123) and two ROKN motor tor-
pedo boats. During the operation, six prisoners are
seized and taken back to the ships.
July 27 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, relieves the 3rd
Battalion, 7th Marines, and the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, relieves the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, on
 857
the left and right respectively on the position known
as Bunker Hill (Hill 122).
The 1st Marines, composed of 3,603 Marines led by
Colonel Walter F. Layer, stand across the terrain de-
scribed as “No Man’s Land” from two Chinese divi-
sions. Another elevation, Hill 124, is located south-
west of Bunker Hill, about 200 yards from the main
line of resistance ( Jamestown Line). The Hill 124–122
axis is referred to for tactical purposes as Bunker Ridge.
Other defensive positions include Hill 56A (Samoa)
on the right flank, which defends against the ap-
proaches to Bunker Hill and farther west, Hill 58A
(Siberia), which is above a ravine that runs along the east
sides of Hills 122 and enemy-held Hill 120, which
stands northeast of Bunker Hill. Also, the Chinese hold
a position known as Taedok-san, which reaches a height
of 800 feet, about twenty-three feet higher than the
Marines’ dominant position, Hill 201 at 660 feet.
Taedok-san, north of the Marines’ positions, dom-
inates the entire Bunker Hill area. The Chinese at this
time are unable to launch their 60-mm mortars against
Marine positions, because they do not hold positions to
do so; however, one position held by the Marines,
known as Siberia (Hill 58A), is suitable terrain. Nev-
ertheless, the hill held by only a squad becomes an im-
minent objective and an attempt to seize it occurs on
9 August. The attempt ignites the BATTLE OF BUNKER
HILL.
In Naval activity, a contingent of eight Firefly F-51
aircraft, attached to the HMS Ocean, are attacked by
MiG-15s. Two of the British planes are damaged, but
none are lost, in what becomes the initial attack by
MiGs of planes attached to TE 95.11.
In other activity, after dark, three groups of night
hecklers are launched by TF-77. One of the groups car-
ries out its mission and returns to its carrier, while the
other two groups complete their respective missions
and land on an airfield.
Also, heavy rains arrive on this day and continue
until the 30th, causing devastating flooding and dam-
age to the bridges.
In the I Corps sector, the decking on the Widgeon
bridge is under water. The Honker bridge is removed
to keep it from being washed away. By the 29th, the
X-ray bridge is washed away and herculean efforts are
undertaken to save the Freedom Gate bridge.
July 28 The USS Strong (DD 758), operating off
Cho-do, with guidance from a naval gunfire support
team, shells a troop concentration of about 150 men.
The Strong also maneuvers off Sok-to and commences
firing at enemy shore gun battery positions. Return
enemy fire inflicts no damage upon the Strong.
In other activity, the USS Princeton launches two
strike groups with a combined total of 38 planes (13
ADS and 25 F4Us) that raid the area around Kilchu,
where a magnesium plant and other facilities, includ-
ing a thermo electrical power plant, are located. The
air strikes inflict heavy damage. The affected facilities
include barracks.
August 1, 1952
July 30 In Air Force activity, during the night of the
30th-31st, Fifth Air Force commences the largest raid
on a solitary target since the war erupted. Super-
fortresses (B-29s) attack the Oriental Light Metal (Alu-
minum) Works, less than five miles south of the Yalu
River and the Manchurian border. During the massive
raid, the enemy raises extremely intense fire, but all
planes return safely.
In other activity, many of the ground troops had be-
come isolated during the recent torrential rains. On
this day, the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron becomes over-
taxed. Its helicopters rescue about 650 people, includ-
ing troops and Korean civilians. About 600 of the peo-
ple retrieved are handled by the unit’s H-19s, while the
rest are picked up by H-5s. Two of the H-5s retrieve 60
troops in the I Corps sector. Combined, the helicopters
execute more than 100 sorties and of these, the H-5s
initiate more than 30 missions to retrieve 60 people,
including troops and civilians.
July 31 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division zone,
two reinforced companies are ordered by Major Gen-
eral James C. Fry to attack and seize Hill 266 (Old
Baldy), which the Communists had seized earlier in the
month. Heavy fighting continues into the following
morning, but the hill is regained. Once the Chinese
are evicted, work begins to bolster the position in an-
ticipation of a strong counterattack. The Chinese coun-
terattack on the following night.
In Naval activity, two MiG-15s attack and damage
a U.S. Navy PBM while it is on a reconnaissance mis-
sion over the Yellow Sea. The tail-gunner is killed, but
the plane manages to make an emergency landing at
Paengnyong-do. Subsequent to receiving repairs, the
plane returns to Japan and its base at Iwakuni.
August 1952 In Air Force activity, more than
1,150 Communist sorties are spotted during August.
Also, major air battles erupt on 6 August and on 30
August. The total number of MiGs lost for the
month is 33. In contrast, the U.S. loses two fighters.
One of the MiG kills is acquired by an RCAF pilot
attached to the 39th Fighter Interceptor Squadron.
August 1 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the
Chinese launch a strong counterattack to regain Hill 266
(Old Baldy), which they had lost during the night of
July 31–August 1, but supporting artillery and mortars
of the 2nd Division provide extra muscle for the defend-
ers. The assault is stopped during its early stages. A new
attempt to gain the hill is undertaken on 18 September.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries near the
Songjin Lighthouse commence firing on the USS
Carmick (DMS 33), but no damage is reported. The
Carmick returns fire and ends the hostile fire. Other
warships that come under fire this day include the
HMCS Nootka (DDE), which is operating on the west
coast of Korea near Samjong.
In other activity, the carrier USS Essex (CVA 9) ini-
tiates combat operations to begin its second tour of
duty with TF-77.
August 2, 1952
August 2 In the I Corp sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, General Selden delegates the 7th Marines (re-
serve) the task of bolstering the Kansas Line, the sec-
ondary line of defense behind the Jamestown Line.
In Naval activity, enemy-held Chongjim is attacked
by naval surface vessels and carrier planes, but in-
clement weather impedes the attack. Nevertheless, it is
reported that the results had been very successful.
August 3 Enemy shore gun batteries near Cho-
do commence firing upon the HMS Belfast (CL).
About 20 rounds are fired and one strikes the vessel
and causes some damage. Four crewmen are wounded,
but there are no fatalities.
August 4 The Communists violate the neutral
zone at Kaesong with the presence of ground troops.
The incident forces a one-day suspension of the talks.
On the following day, the Communists claim they will
respect the neutral zone. Consequently, the talks re-
sume.
Also, according to U.S. records, by this date, more
than 1,000 Communist MiG aircraft have been shot
down since the beginning of the Korean War on June
25, 1950.
In Naval activity, the USS Carmick (DMS 33) is at-
tacked while operating near Yujin Dan, but no damage
is sustained. The ship returns fire and it effectively
causes the guns to silence.
Also, enemy ground troops in the vicinity of Tanchon
commence firing with machine guns against the South
Korean vessel ROKN MTB 27. Soon after, the de-
stroyer USS Porter (DD 800) pounds the suspected ori-
gin of fire and inflicts about 75 casualties on the enemy.
August 5 During a raid conducted by MAG-12,
the commander, Colonel Galer, is shot down. As he
attempts to abandon the plane, he gets snagged, prob-
ably by a shoulder strap. Galer, a previous recipient of
the Medal of Honor, climbs back into the cockpit to free
himself and then he jumps, but his spiraling plane clips
him as he is descending. As he tumbles, he manages to
pull the cord. He lands about ten feet from his crashed
plane.
Immediately thereafter, a rescue operation goes into
effect as Galer signals his position and then seeks safer
ground. After changing positions and evading the
enemy during some harrowing hours, during darkness,
a helicopter passes over and then returns to the sound
of his radio. Galer releases red smoke and seconds later,
he is pulled aboard. The helicopter rescue parties are
renowned for their heroism under fire to save others. En
route back to a ship, the helicopter is hit several times
by enemy fire, but it reaches the vessel safely at just
about the time the fuel tank nears empty.
August 6 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the 5th Marines, by day, man a trio of com-
bat outposts (COPs) that run along a diagonal line from
the southwest to the northeast, but the Chinese plan to
eliminate them. The outposts, named Elmer, Hilda
and Irene, become priorities for the enemy and rather
858
than attempt to evict the Marines, they choose to oc-
cupy the outposts during the absence of the defenders.
During the darkened hours of this day, the Chinese oc-
cupy Elmer, the outpost to the far southwest.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of 36 Sabre jets
encounters and engages a force composed of 52 MiG-
15s. After the air duels close, the MiGs find the forma-
tion is shortened by the loss of six planes.
In Naval activity, MAG 33 sets a new record — its
Marine pilots fly 141 sorties this day.
In other activity, an F9F Panther jet on the deck of
the USS Boxer explodes and ignites a fire, which causes
other explosions of gasoline and ammunition. Nine
crewmen, including one officer, are killed and 63 men
are rescued from the sea by nearby vessels and some
helicopters. In total, 12 planes are destroyed. Neverthe-
less, the carrier remains operational.
On the following day, a Court of Inquiry is ap-
pointed by the commander of the 7th Fleet, Vice Ad-
miral J.J. Clark, to determine the cause of the explosion.
On 27 August 1952, the explosion was blamed on a
failure to take precautions during servicing of the plane.
Apparently, the plane’s machine gun was not cleared
prior to releasing the bolt to firing position.
Also, the destroyer USS Pierce (DD 753), while op-
erating near Tanchon, comes under fire from enemy
shore gun batteries. The vessel sustains some damage
and 10 crewmen are injured.
August 7 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a contingent of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines,
moves toward COP Elmer to set up the usual day-long
outpost, but the Marines are unable to reach the post be-
cause the Chinese had occupied it during the previous
night. Two other COPS, Hilda and Irene, remain under
Marine control, but the Chinese also covet them.
In Naval activity, in the Philippines, a U.S. Navy
Mariner PBM aircraft crashes into the western side of
Bataan Mountain in the vicinity of the entrance to
Manila Bay. The accident takes the lives of all 13
aboard.
August 8–10 1952 In the ROK II Corps
sector, the Capital Division engages Chinese forces
in the area east of Kumsong. The two sides trade
blows for several days for domination of a hill. Finally,
on 10 August, the Chinese disengage and retire, giv-
ing the South Koreans control of what becomes
known as Capital Hill. The ROKs sustain 48 killed
and about 150 wounded. The ROKs estimate the
Chinese casualties at more than 350 confirmed killed
and another estimated 450 killed and 190 estimated
wounded. The ROKs continue to engage the Com-
munists in their sector of east Korea.
August 8 In Air Force activity, a contingent of
Sabre jets attached to the 335th Fighter Interceptor
Squadron, 5th Fighter Interceptor Group, encounters
a band of MiGs. During the air duels, one pilot, Cap-
tain Clifford D. Jolley (Utah National Guard), scores his
fifth kill to become the first National Guard ace. Jolley
 859
A view of the rugged terrain known as Capital Hill, east of Kumsong.
had gotten his first victory on his birthday, 4 May 1952,
and his second on the Fourth of July. Afterward, on 7
August, Jolley knocks down two additional MiGs for his
third and fourth kills. Jolley becomes the 18th ace of the
Korean War with 7.5 kills and a possible thirteen oth-
ers downed.
— In Japan: In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy plane
(Mariner PBM) crashes on Shikoku Island, Japan, while
on a night patrol. All aboard the aircraft, including 5
officers and 9 enlisted men, are killed.
August 9–17 1952 THE BATTLE OF BUNKER
HILL In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
August 9, 1952
at about 0100, the Chinese launch an attack to seize
Hill 58A (Siberia) to gain ground from where they
can strike Marine lines with 60-mm mortars. The
defenders, one squad from Company E, is compelled
to withdraw to the MLR. In the meantime, the Chi-
nese move against other positions of Company E
south of the outpost. The Marines there break up
the assault with mortar fire. Afterward, plans are
quickly developed to regain Siberia (Hill 58A).
The enemy contingent that had gained Siberia
stands at about four squads, but Chinese guns also
bolster the position. At 0400, following a five minute
artillery barrage, a platoon moves from the MLR
August 9, 1952
against the objective and reaches the base of the hill
by about 0525. Progress is thwarted at that point
when enemy artillery forces the contingent to pull
back. Casualties incurred since the original attack
against Siberia climbs to 32 wounded and one killed.
At 0650, four Marine jet fighters appear overhead
and blast the enemy positions on Siberia, but no in-
fantry attack follows. Later, Air Force F-84 Shoot-
ing Star jets strike the objective and afterward, the
Marines launch another assault using a reinforced
platoon to evict the Chinese. The attack force, com-
posed of a contingent of Company A and one platoon
of Company E, presses forward and again comes
under extremely heavy fire. Nevertheless, the
Marines drill forward, inching close enough to be-
come recipients of enemy grenades and close-
quartered fighting.
By 1103, the Marines regain the hill and imme-
diately establish defenses to attempt to hold it. A
support platoon of Company E arrives to bolster the
position, but at about the same time, the Chinese
initiate another artillery barrage that pummels the
outpost position. The Chinese, in the attempt to
conquer the hill, to this point expend 5,000 artillery
rounds. The Marines initially seek shelter in bunkers,
but the artillery barrage is overwhelming. Again, for
the second time, they are compelled to abandon the
hill during the middle of the afternoon as the casu-
alty rate rises to about 75 percent.
A new attack is launched after Company E is re-
placed by Company A. Company C is brought up
from the rear and moves out without any artillery
support at 2245. The company reaches the enemy
positions at the hill at slightly after 0100 on the 10th
and immediately receives enemy fire. The Marines
charge the positions and overwhelm the defenders.
Some choose to resist and they are killed; however,
most of the Chinese had abandoned the outpost at
the first sign of the Marines. The hill, Siberia, is
again under Marine control by 0116.
After gaining the objective (Siberia Hill 58A),
Company C commander Captain Casimir C.
Ksycewski directs another platoon to initiate pur-
suit of the Chinese who fled to the opposite slope.
Meanwhile, the Chinese focus on yet another at-
tempt to regain the hill. The Marines engage the
Chinese on the opposite slope until about daybreak.
At that time, a Chinese contingent of about com-
pany strength launches a counterattack and once
again, the hill changes hands.
Since the initial attack against Siberia on the pre-
vious day, the Marine casualties have risen to 17 killed
and 243 wounded. The 1st Marines, later on 10 Au-
gust, convene a staff meeting and conclude that the
Chinese positions at Bunker Hill (Hill 122) and on
Hill 120 are the strategic enemy-held positions that
are causing the casualties. The Marines decide to
modify their strategy and focus upon Bunker Hill
rather than Hill 58A. They determine that by elim-
inating Bunker Hill, they can bolster their MLR and
860
deprive the Chinese of a key observation post. A di-
versionary attack against Siberia is planned by the
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, to keep the enemy off-
guard, while the primary assault to seize Bunker Hill
is to be launched by the 1st Battalion on 11 August.
During the preparation period, fire is directed
upon Hill 85A and Hill 122 by planes, artillery and
tanks during the hours of daylight. Another part of
the plan includes the 5th Marines, which is to com-
mit its guns to support the diversionary attack
against Hill 58A by pounding enemy targets in the
Ungok region. The Marines on the ground will be
supported by the 11th Marines’ artillery during the
long struggle to maintain control of Bunker Ridge.
The infantry and armor units also receive enor-
mous support from the Fifth Air Force and the 1st
Marine Air Wing. The artillery backs every attack
and defensive move by the Marines except for the
initial seizure of Bunker Hill and a diversionary at-
tack against Siberia, both of which had been planned
for execution without any artillery support to main-
tain the element of surprise.
On the 11th at dusk, the diversionary attack
against Siberia gets underway when eight tanks at-
tached to Company C, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines,
drive toward the MLR, where they will head north
to divert attention from the primary assault, which
is to unfold against Hill 122. Four of the tanks are
armed with 90-mm guns and four are equipped as
flamethrowers; the latter lead the way. Elements of
the 1st Battalion participate in the attack.
Meanwhile, elements of the 2nd Battalion, 1st
Marines, move against the main objective. By about
2110, the armor with the attack against Siberia be-
gins to fire its 90-mm rounds, while two of the flame
throwers maneuver between Hill 56A (Samoa) and
the main line of resistance, using flame to illumi-
nate its path. Once at the objective, the flame throw-
ers work their way up the slope of Hill 58A and from
the crest, the tanks drive down the opposite slope
and rake the terrain with machine gun fire. After
completing the run, the tanks return, using the same
method, lighting the way with flame.
Shortly after completing the run, the second set of
two tanks runs an identical mission on the hill. The
flame throwers return to friendly lines after com-
pleting their mission; however, the four other tanks
(M-46s) with the 90-mm guns remain at the front
to support the ground troops, 3rd Platoon, Com-
pany D. The 3rd Platoon evades the low ground used
by the tanks and makes its way over the heights to
Hill 56A (Samoa) slightly before 2300 and from
there the platoon sprints toward Hill 58A. All the
while, the tanks continue to maintain fire upon Hill
58A (Siberia), the diversionary target, and the pri-
mary objective, Hill 122 (Bunker Hill).
As the diversionary attack unfolds, the main assault
commences shortly after Company D moves beyond
Samoa. The primary attacking unit, Company B,
which reverted to operational control of the 2nd
 861
Battalion, 1st Marines, at 1800, departs the MLR
and drives through the darkness toward Bunker Hill.
The vanguard reaches the objective and by 2318,
contingents begin ascending the slopes. Within
about ten minutes, one platoon gains the crest, while
another is at the base of the hill. Both units begin to
sweep across the forward slope. As the attack moves
north, enemy fire intensifies.
In the meantime, at Siberia, the 3rd Platoon,
Company D, continues its attack and with the sup-
porting fire, it is able to claim Hill 58A (Siberia)
prior to 2330. Within about ten minutes, the Chi-
nese launch a counterattack to regain Siberia, only to
be repelled. The attack lasts only about ten minutes
before the enemy disengages. However, as previously
planned, once the Chinese retire, Company D also
pulls back, having finished its part of the diversion.
Back on Bunker Hill, the Marines are struck by
grenades. Nonetheless, the attack continues with
close-quartered combat. On the east slope, the Chi-
nese are forced to retreat up the hill, followed closely
by pursuing Marines. The Marines give no quarter
and by about 0300, the vicious fighting begins to
subside. And then suddenly, as the Marines begin to
establish defenses on Bunker Hill, a group of Chinese
troops emerges from a sector overlooked during the
struggle to gain the hill. The Marines attached to
the 1st Platoon handle the unexpected enemy pres-
ence. At about 0345, they engage a contingent of
Chinese that hold positions in a draw to the front of
Bunker Hill, but no enemy counterattack is
launched.
At dawn on 12 August, the Marines still hold
Bunker Hill. The casualties incurred amount to 1
killed and 22 wounded. In addition, at Siberia (Hill
58A), the diversionary objective, 1 casualty had been
sustained, a wounded platoon leader.
Nevertheless, the Chinese do not abandon their
quest to reclaim Bunker Hill. During the morning of
the 12th, the Marines continue to fortify their de-
fenses. Responsibility for Bunker Hill falls to the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines. Later, about 1500, the Chi-
nese commence an artillery and mortar attack against
the Marine positions, prompting the Marines to seek
cover and drop their shovels in exchange for their
weapons to meet an anticipated assault. The Chi-
nese, however, delay the attack for more than one
hour. In the meantime, the enemy barrage inflicts
more casualties upon Company B, compelling the
unit to pull back from the summit and redeploy on
the reverse (eastern) slope.
At the time of the enemy bombardment, no radio
communications exist between Company B and the
3rd Battalion, but as a precaution, Company I is dis-
patched to reinforce the troops at Bunker Hill. In
the meantime, a force of about 350 Chinese probes
Company B’s positions on the hill in search of a hole.
The Marines check the attack against the west por-
tion of the perimeter and then against the northern
sector. Nevertheless, the Chinese then focus on the
August 9, 1952
southwest, but by this time, Company I reaches the
beleaguered company.
By about 1715, the Chinese disengage and with-
draw to positions on the north side of the hill, while
the Marines maintain control of the reverse slope.
Initial reports indicate that 58 Marines had been
killed or wounded, but later reports change the fig-
ures to 34–35 killed and 29 wounded. The major-
ity of casualties were incurred from artillery and
mortar fire.
After the Chinese disengage, the Marines bolster
the perimeter. Further steps include the movement
of Company I, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, to re-
place Company I, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, along
the MLR. The reconnaissance platoon of the 3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines, deploys on Hill 1124, from
where it can support Bunker Hill and the Jamestown
Line. Other modifications occur throughout the 1st
Marine Division sector. By the end of this day, all
of the 7th Marines’ mortars are placed under the
control of the 1st Marines in the event they are
needed. All available artillery is also directed to bol-
ster Bunker Hill.
Other moves include the redeployment of two
provisional platoons (118 Marines) of the 1st Battal-
ion into the zone of the 3rd Battalion. At a strategic
point of entry to the Marines’ right flank on Bunker
Hill, the draw between Bunker Hill and the MLR is
held by tanks. Their 90-mm guns and flamethrow-
ers make passage by the enemy a most difficult chal-
lenge.
At about 2300, the Chinese mount a feint against
other positions; rather than launch a new attack
against Bunker Hill. Slightly after 2300, a Chinese
contingent stumbles upon a Korean Marine ambush
site at the Sachon River, south of the Munsan-
ni–Kaesong rail line, and ignites a ten-minute fire-
fight. The Chinese quickly withdraw.
Another diversionary attack is launched against
Hill 48A (Stromboli), located east of Bunker Hill,
about 500 yards in front of the MLR. The Chinese
launch their assault against Stromboli just after mid-
night (12th-13th). The attack is apparently part of
a larger assault against the MLR. Just as the defend-
ers on Hill 48A inform the 1st Marines headquarters
of the ongoing attack, Company F, on the right sec-
tor of the 1st Marines, also comes under assault.
The Chinese make no inroads at the MLR nor at
Hill 48A, defended only by one squad. Reinforce-
ments from Company F speed to the besieged squad,
but enemy fire forces the reinforcements to halt their
mission and return to their lines. In the meantime,
the positions of Company F continue to come under
attack. There, too, the line holds, as it does across the
entire Jamestown Line.
Back at Hill 48A (Stromboli), the Chinese con-
tinue unsuccessfully to evict the defending squad.
At one point, the Chinese encircle the defenders and
it is thought that the position had been overrun;
however, a report arrives at headquarters that the
August 9, 1952
Marines there continue to hold, but they are encir-
cled by a contingent of about platoon strength. At
0325, a rifle platoon is dispatched to rescue the squad
on Hill 48A, but while the reinforcements are en
route, the Chinese intensify their effort to dislodge
the elements of Company F. Nevertheless, the
Marines’ thwart the Communists’ attempts to seize
Hill 48A with superior hand-to-hand combat.
All the while, the reinforcements pound their way
through the resistance to reach the outpost and re-
lieve the pressure. As the Chinese withdraw from
Hill 48A, they focus again on Bunker Hill and
mount a heavy attack at about 0100 on the 13th.
At Bunker Hill, enemy mortar fire begins to ham-
mer the Marine positions on the southern slope, just
prior to 0100, and this is followed by an increase in
artillery fire. The Marines place calls to the 11th
Marines and request and receive “Box-Me-In” fire,
a defensive barrage that affords some added cover to
the troops on Bunker Hill as the Chinese mount
their attack.
By 0130, the Marines in Company I, 3rd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, spot a conspicuous line of Chinese
attackers moving abreast toward the perimeter to
strike the center and right parts of the line. The
Marines are greeted with heavy machine gun fire as
well as enemy rifle fire, but in return, the Chinese re-
ceive a thunderous response. All attempts to break
through the front lines are repelled and afterward,
the Chinese move to attack the rear, but here, too,
the Marines prevail. The battle rages non-stop for
about four hours, but the Chinese fail each time they
try to penetrate. The Marines are ably supported by
artillery, mortar, tank and rocket fire.
The Chinese also take a beating from the artillery
and tank fire at various assembly points and other
locations in the draw that leads to Bunker Hill. The
tanks, using their special illumination lights, are able
to pinpoint enemy movement as the Chinese ma-
neuver to envelop the Marines on Bunker Hill. The
savage fighting continues without pause, but the de-
fenders hold steadfastly. In the meantime, Chinese
reinforcements move toward Bunker Hill.
At 0330, the contest for domination of Bunker
Hill rises to a crescendo and continues unabated for
about one additional hour before the signs of vic-
tory begin to flash about the hill, when Chinese ar-
tillery fire intensifies in coordination with a decrease
in their small arms fire, indicating a withdrawal, but
some time passes before the Marines can claim vic-
tory.
The Marines have also sustained heavy casualties
while holding on to the terrain and holes have to be
plugged to maintain the security of the MLR. Com-
pany G, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, is directed to
move to Bunker Hill to assume responsibility for the
contested hill. However, due extremely high casu-
alties, two reinforced squads from Company I, 3rd
Battalion, 7th Marines, the closest unit, are sped to
the hill prior to the arrival of Company G.
862
Just after dawn Company G arrives at Bunker Hill
while the battle is still raging, but soon after, the ini-
tial signs of victory prove true as the Chinese disen-
gage under an intensified artillery bombardment.
The Chinese sweep the battlefield clean, taking all
their casualties. A contingent of the Marines scours
the battlefield just after the withdrawal and discov-
ers no enemy dead; however, seven live Chinese are
spotted, engaged and eliminated on the north slope
of Bunker Hill before they can rejoin the main body.
By noon on the 13th, Company H, 3rd Battal-
ion, 7th Marines, arrives at Bunker Hill and com-
pletes its relief of the exhausted troops that held off
the Communist attacks of the previous night and
the early morning hours of this day. The relief troops,
like those they replaced, are about to face the enemy
and an extra adversary, the high heat and humidity
of a Korean summer day.
By the latter part of the afternoon, the remainder
of the 7th Marines of the 2nd and 3rd Battalions
(minus Company H) who had played supporting
roles at Bunker Hill are en route back to their re-
spective reserve positions. During the actions of this
day, Marine planes fly 94 daylight sorties in the
vicinity of Bunker Hill, followed by four night mis-
sions.
The enemy onslaught included between 5,000
and 10,000 rounds that hit the 1st Marine Division
zone between 1500 on the 12th and 0600 on the
13th. The effort kills 24 Marines and wounds 214
others. In the 2nd Battalion zone, the Marines lose
7 killed and 33 wounded while defending the out-
post at Stromboli. Chinese casualties amount to 210
(counted) killed and an estimated additional 470
killed, plus an estimate of 625 wounded.
Still, the Communists intend to overrun Bunker
Hill. Later on the 13th, at about sunset, the Chi-
nese initiate an artillery attack against Company G’s
positions at an outpost near Panmunjom. Combat
Outpost 2 is on a dominant elevation atop the peace
corridor. The 90-minute bombardment inflicts sev-
eral casualties. Another unit, Company H, to the
rear of the outpost, receives incoming artillery to-
ward the last part of the barrage against the outpost
and some Chinese troops move toward the outpost,
but no actual attack is initiated.
Bunker Hill, which continues under artillery and
mortar attacks, remains a priority and at 2100, the
Communists launch yet another attack to evict the
Marines. The new inhabitants, Company H, 3rd
Battalion, 7th Marines, have only begun to settle in
at the positions and have no plans to relocate.
The Chinese work their way through the draw
east of Hill 58A, while the Marines prepare to defend
and receive additional artillery support with the
ever-popular “Box-Me-In” defensive ring. The lines
are struck in two places, to the center and the right
flank, each by a platoon. Some of the enemy pene-
trates, but the intrusion is temporary, as they are liq-
uidated by grenades and small arms fire. The Chinese
 863
maintain the assault for more than one hour, but
they make no progress. By 2215, having gained only
massive casualties, the Chinese withdraw after a fast
sweep of the field to remove the dead and wounded.
However, during this attack, the Chinese leave
twenty bodies on the field.
The estimate of enemy killed is 175. Company H,
while enduring the ground attack, is also struck by
about 3,000 artillery shells. The company sustains 7
killed and 21 wounded, but none of the casualties
are inflicted by the enemy attack force; rather, the
artillery and mortars are the cause of the casualties.
Before the defenders can get a pause in the com-
bat, the exhausted men of Company H are once
again called to the sound of the enemy bugles, as yet
another assault is launched at 0225 on the 14th. The
defenders also find themselves under fire from
Siberia, a nearby hill where the Chinese commence
firing with a heavy machine gun. The men on
Bunker Hill get an assist from tanks that illuminate
the target and effortlessly blast the machine gun into
instant silence. The Chinese return artillery fire
against the U.S. tanks and wound one man, and one
of the tank’s searchlights is damaged.
The Marines conclude that the short attack had
been unfolded more to reclaim enemy dead that had
not been retrieved during the earlier engagement,
particularly since it lasted less than five minutes.
Nonetheless, the Marines find no time to rest, as
they understand that the Chinese will again launch
an attack.
As dawn (14th) emerges, the Marines hold Bunker
Hill. Helicopters await the arrival of the casualties
to transport the most seriously wounded to hospital
centers in the rear.
In the meantime, elements of Company E, 2nd
Battalion, 1st Marines relieve Company A, 1st Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, and assume responsibility for
the 2nd Battalion’s MLR in what is known as the
Siberia sector, which lies next to the area that con-
tains Bunker Hill. Another move to bolster the de-
fenses occurs when a reinforcing platoon from Com-
pany A, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, arrives at Bunker
Hill just prior to sunset on the 14th.
During the day’s fighting, only four sorties are
flown by Marine planes and none are executed after
dark. The remainder of the night seems relatively
quiet, possibly too quiet. A patrol is dispatched at
about midnight (14th-15th) from Bunker Hill to
probe the enemy, but the contingent returns and re-
ports no contact. A short while later, a small incident
is reported as unfolding on the left flank at Bunker
Hill and another enemy contingent is spotted far-
ther west.
The enemy detection initially signals a minor action;
however, the Chinese have much larger plans and they
explode across the entire Bunker Ridge at 0118 on
the 15th. The Chinese attempt to penetrate, but once
again, support fire rings the Marines’ positions to
buffer the perimeter and simultaneously the artillery
August 9, 1952
shellacs the enemy assembly areas. Fortunately for the
Marines on Bunker Hill, a tanker’s searchlight illu-
minates a huge gathering of Chinese in the draw as
they prepare to strike from the northeast. The spot-
light ends all chances of a surprise attack.
The Chinese receive no time to recover from the
exposure, as friendly artillery and mortar fire deliver
a tornado of fire that is supplemented further by the
tanks’ 90-mm guns. The enfilade whacks the enemy
formation and causes a hurried, disorderly flight to
safer positions. The troops get an unexpected
breather on Bunker Hill, but the pause is short.
By 0206, the usual bombardment commences and
afterward, the Chinese continue to regroup to form
for the attack. At 0315, the shelling begins to di-
minish as the Marines brace for the imminent as-
sault, but still it does not materialize immediately. At
0400, the enemy guns become completely silent and
still no assault is launched. Dawn on the 15th ar-
rives and the Marines still hold Bunker Hill.
Since Company H ascended to defend the hill,
the enemy has sustained about 350 killed, the great
majority caused by artillery and mortars, but only
forty are actually counted. Company H has sustained
35 casualties, including 7 killed. Upon relief by
Company B, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, Company H
sustains four additional casualties inflicted by enemy
mortars as the unit returns to the MLR.
At Bunker Hill, the Communists commence an-
other attack at 1640 while the area is undergoing a
strong rainstorm. They advance without the support
of artillery. The Marines, despite receiving no warn-
ing signal of the enemy artillery, are prepared for the
intruders and most do not reach the lines. Those
that do succeed in encroaching the perimeter are
eliminated. The Communists disengage at 1750, and
again, uncharacteristically, they are unable or un-
willing to remove all of their dead. Thirty-five Chi-
nese troops are left on the field.
The Marines sustain four wounded. Five Marines
are evacuated due to battle fatigue. The night of the
15th passes without any major incidents and as mid-
night arrives, the apprehension begins to build along
the perimeter. The Marines await the next bugle call
to signal one more long night of combat.
At 0040 on the 16th, the suspense ends. The bu-
gles blare and the whistles blow, followed by a
battalion-sized contingent that initiates a charge,
supported by artillery and mortar fire. The defend-
ers face attacks from the west and the north. The
powerful thrust is able to make some penetration,
but no panic strikes the troops. A quick call for re-
inforcements brings a platoon from Company I, 3rd
Battalion, 7th Marines, to help extinguish the fire,
but by the time the contingent departs the
Jamestown Line, the Marines on Bunker Hill have al-
ready thwarted the assault. The enemy disengages
by 0315. The Marines sustain 3 killed and 27
wounded during the early morning attack. The Chi-
nese sustain an estimated 40 killed and 30 wounded.
August 9, 1952
Shortly thereafter, in the sector held by Company
B, the Chinese ignite another firefight at about 0515,
but it terminates within ten minutes and no infantry
attack is launched. The Marines sustain no casual-
ties. At dawn on the 16th, Bunker Hill still remains
under the control of the Marines. Company B, how-
ever, comes under attack by the enemy three addi-
tional times before it is relieved at Bunker Hill dur-
ing the morning of the 17th by Company C, 1st
Battalion, 1st Marines.
Dawn on the 17th finds Bunker Hill under con-
trol of the Marines and on this day, the prolonged
struggle for domination of the hill terminates. Nev-
ertheless, during August, the Chinese continue their
fruitless efforts to dislodge the Marines. The Com-
munists launch seven separate attacks during August
and each time, the Marines prevail. Of the seven as-
saults, the Communists only mount one attack that
is considered a full-scale assault. It is unleashed on the
night of 25th-26th and the results are identical to
the other attacks, total failure.
August 9 In Naval activity, four British Sea Fury
aircraft attached to the HMS Ocean (CVL) are attacked
by a group of eight MiG-15s in the skies north of
Chinnampo. Following the air duel, one MiG is lost.
The British sustain no losses.
August 10 In Naval activity, the HMS Mounts
Bay (PF) comes under fire from enemy shore gun bat-
teries near Songjin and sustains three hits. One crew-
man is killed and four others are wounded. The war-
ship returns fire and scores a hit on one gun.
In other activity, the USS Van Valkenburgh (DD
656) comes under fire near Kangson-ni, but no dam-
age is inflicted and no casualties occur. Also, the enemy
batteries composed of about nine guns on Ho-do Pan-
do near Wonsan commence fire upon the destroyers
USS Barton (DD 722) and the USS Jarvis (DD 799).
About 250 rounds are fired and the damage is slight;
however aboard the Barton, one crewman is killed and
one other is wounded. The Jarvis sustains no damage
and no casualties. In turn the warships had returned
fire and it is reported that two of the guns are destroyed.
August 11 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, a patrol of the 5th Marines attempts to reach
one of its COPs, Hilda, during the ongoing attack by
the 1st Marines against Bunker Hill. The 5th Marines
are acting in conjunction with the diversionary attack.
Nevertheless, the Chinese are there, having occupied
it first, giving the Chinese two of the 5th Marines’ three
combat outposts. The enemy had occupied Elmer on
6 August. The Marines, who had only occupied the
forward outposts during the daylight hours, also lose the
final one, Irene. On 17 August when the Marines at-
tempt to reoccupy it, they find it is already held by the
Chinese.
In Naval activity, the guns of the destroyer HMS
Concord (DD) exchange fire with a contingent of enemy
ground troops, about 100 strong, on the Ongjin penin-
864
sula as they move to invade Cho-do Island, held by
friendly guerrillas. The destroyer’s guns break up the
planned attack and compel the enemy to abort the mis-
sion.
Also, at Wonsan, enemy shore guns propel about 30
rounds toward the USS Grapple (ARS 7) and inflicts
damage. The vessel is struck below the water line by a
105-mm shell, but only slight damage is sustained.
Meanwhile, the destroyer USS Barton (DD 722) re-
turns fire and strikes three of the enemy gun positions.
Also, a South Korean naval vessel, the ROKN FS 905,
while moored off Yo-do Island in Wonsan Harbor,
comes under attack by enemy shore guns. The vessel,
which had arrived with fuel and ammunition for the
motor torpedo boats, is struck by one shell, but no
major damage or casualties occur.
August 13 In the 1st Marine Division sector, dur-
ing the fighting at Bunker Hill, Hospital Corpsman
John E. Kilmer on 13 August continues to move across
the ranks to aid the wounded and direction evacua-
tions. All the while, Kilmer is exposed to small arms,
mortars and machine gun fire, but he disregards it. A
mortar fragment eventually wounds Kilmer, but he in-
sists on continuing to help the other wounded. Soon
after, another mortar bombardment arrives and Kilmer
shields a wounded Marine with his body. A fragment
strikes and kills the corpsman. Corpsman Kilmer is
awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his ex-
traordinary actions on the field of battle in the face of
the enemy.
Also, Marine artillery (11th Marines), subsequent to
modified plans to coordinate with air strikes, begins to
show good results. On this day, 124 sorties are flown by
Marine pilots and no planes are hit by enemy fire.
However, four sustain minor damage. Under the new
standing operating procedure (SOP), artillery strikes
enemy artillery positions in conjunction with the
friendly air strikes, thereby impeding enemy reaction
fire. The practice is soon after adopted by the other
services.
During a recent air strike, General Lamson Scrib-
ner, while observing, noted there had been no artillery
fire against the antiaircraft positions of the enemy. It
had been his brainstorm to modify the procedures dur-
ing air strikes by implementing artillery flak suppres-
sion fires. After that, Marine plane losses, which had
reached a high during the previous June, begin to de-
crease and never again rise to the previous limits.
August 14 A six-man reconnaissance patrol of the
187th Airborne Regimental Combat Team engages the
enemy in the vicinity of Kumwha, after it penetrates
about 3,500 yards into enemy controlled terrain and
gets caught in an ambush by a superior force. The pa-
trol returns fire and before it gets completely encircled,
the band sprints to a slim draw. Meanwhile, Corporal
Lester Hammond, Jr., declines entering the draw. He re-
mains upright in an exposed position in an attempt to
resist the enemy and call for artillery to break up
the enemy force. The artillery arrives and the enemy
 865
scatters, but in the meantime Hammond is hit with a
mortal blow. Reinforcements arrive to extricate the be-
leaguered platoon. Corporal Hammond is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary
courage under fire.
In Naval activity, Enemy shore battery guns near
Songjin commence firing against the USS Porter (DD
800), but of the approximately 20 rounds fired, no hits
occur. The Porter returns fire and reports one enemy
gun destroyed. Another vessel in the same area, the
HMS Mounts Bay (PF) comes under fire from two
guns, but she too, receives no damage. The area near
Songjin remains active throughout the day. Subsequent
to darkness, the destroyers Porter and Jarvis (DD 799)
lay offshore at about a distance of 3,000 yards, guided
by contingents in motor whaleboats and ROKN motor
torpedo boats near the shoreline. Upon the approach of
an enemy train, the information is dispatched to the
destroyers that promptly propels a round of shells to-
ward the moving target. The operation on this night
nets two trains struck and damaged, one by each of the
destroyers.
August 15 In Naval activity, the USS Grapple,
while on patrol (Flycatcher Patrol) in search of enemy
sampans in the vicinity of Hungnam, is accidentally
struck by friendly fire, due to the darkness and the in-
ability of the crew on the USS Chief (AM 315) to rec-
ognize her as a friendly vessel. The mistake has deadly
effects. Two rounds from a distance of 1,000 yards
strike the Grapple and cost the lives of two men and
the wounding of 9 others. After-action reports indi-
cate that the Chief did not relay visual recognition sig-
nals prior to opening fire.
In other activity, the British destroyer escort HMCS
Crusader (DDE) and a New Zealander vessel, the
HMNZS Rotoiti (PF), each fire upon an enemy troop
concentration on the mainland opposite Kirin-do, in
support of friendly guerrillas engaged in a raid. In yet
other activity, the USS Redhead (AMS 34) and the USS
Heron (AMS 18), while operating off the Yujin Dan
peninsula, come under enemy fire from shore gun bat-
teries. The barrages fail to score any damage or inflict
casualties.
August 16 Communist gun positions on Kalma-
gak open fire on friendly-held Hwangto-do Island off
Wonsan. However, no damage is sustained.
August 17 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the struggle for Bunker Hill, which began on
9 August, ends. (See also, August 9–17 1952 THE BAT-
TLE OF BUNKER HILL.) On this day at Bunker Hill,
Company B, 1st Battalion, 1st Marines, is relieved dur-
ing the early morning hours by Company C, 1st Bat-
talion, 1st Marines. The Marines continue to hold the
hill. The enemy will probe the positions of Company
C only once during the two days it is on post on the hill.
During the same period, only a few artillery and mor-
tar shells strike the area.
In other activity, a patrol of Company F, 2nd Battal-
August 20, 1952
ion, 5th Marines, comes under attack while it advances
to establish an outpost. The enemy bombards the pa-
trol with artillery and mortar fire and grenades. One of
the enemy grenades flips into a trench occupied by
some Marines attempting to avoid the bombardment.
PFC Robert E. Simanek spots the grenade and to save
the lives of the other Marines, he pounces on it and
takes the full blast. Simanek becomes badly wounded,
but he survives. He receives the Medal of Honor for
his extraordinary heroism and selfless sacrifice.
In other activity, a typhoon moves into Okinawa,
cancelling the operations of the B-29s based there.
August 18 In Air Force activity, Far East Air
Forces begins Operation STRANGLE against North Ko-
rean railroads. An earlier maneuver also dubbed Oper-
ation STRANGLE, by the Air Force, occurred August
1951 and May 1951. Both operations were designed
to destroy the enemy’s supply lines.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Bon Homme
Richard (CV 31) marks its 50th consecutive day at sea,
which up to this time, is the longest period of contin-
ual operations by a carrier attached to Task Force 77
since autumn of 1950.
In other activity, all naval and air operations against
Wonsan cease as Typhoon Karen arrives at Korea. The
ships of TF-77 move out to seek safer waters on August
18–19.
August 19 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, Operation RIPPLE commences on August
19–20. HMR-161 initiates a new combat tactic in an
attempt to cut down damage and injury from enemy
fire, which follows U.S. rocket fire flashes and return fire
against the U.S. artillerymen.
Helicopters transport elements of the 4.5 Rocket
Battery to firing positions and after completing their
volleys, the helicopters evacuate the artillery pieces to
the next location before the enemy guns can pound the
positions. The strategy changes the way artillery is used
on the battlefield. In addition, with the use of helicop-
ters, the guns can be moved much quicker and deliv-
ered to firing locations that could not be reached by
other means.
Also, Company D, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, re-
lieves Company C at Bunker Hill.
August 20 A primary Communist supply center
on the west coast of Korea at Changpyong comes under
a massive air attack that includes planes of Fifth Air
Force as well as U.S. Navy and Marine Corps
squadrons. Reports by returning pilots estimate that
about 80 percent of the facility had been destroyed.
In other activity, the USS Thompson (DMS 38) holds
in place off Songjin while awaiting the arrival of an air
spot plane to direct its fire. In the meantime, enemy
shore gun fire commences. One of the shells explodes
above the bridge and causes casualties. Damage to the
Thompson is slight; however, 3 crewmen are killed and
10 others are wounded.
In yet other activity, a group of 12 Princeton F9Fs are
August 22, 1952
attacked over Sukchon by a band of MiG-15s, but the
U.S. sustains no damage or losses.
August 22 The Communists again use tactics to
stall the talks at Panmunjom. The U.N. is accused of
launching an air attack at Kaesong. The accusations are
obviously false and set up with phony evidence, but
the talks are postponed.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, two
separate ambush patrols of the 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines, engage Chinese contingents after dusk. Both
sides sustain serious casualties.
August 23 Eighth Army requisitions 25,000 ar-
mored vests, a type recently tested successfully in the
field by the Marines, including ground troops and avi-
ators engaged in low-level close-air attacks.
In Air Force activity, in conjunction with the ongo-
ing Operation STRANGLE, B-26s strike enemy supply
routes during the night (23rd-24th) and report the de-
struction of more than 800 vehicles.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marines Division zone, a small
Chinese contingent of four troops maneuvers near
Bunker Hill just prior to dawn. One of the enemy
troops makes it to the top of the hill from where he
fires upon the Marines and wounds one. The incur-
sion is otherwise, short-lived, as another Marine, a
sniper, takes him out.
August 24 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, Company F, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines,
which had relieved Company D, receives some enemy
fire at its positions on Bunker Hill (Hill 122), but no
assault is launched.
August 25 The Air Force and the Navy team up
to launch Far East Air Forces Bomber Command’s
largest attack during the month of August. Thirty-five
B-29 Superfortresses, accompanied by U.S. Navy fight-
ers, strike the marshaling yard at Rashin. Until now,
this target had been spared due to restrictions with re-
gard to targets located less than 20 miles from the bor-
der with Russia. The bombers drop 300 tons of bombs
on the facility in the northeastern sector of North
Korea.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, fol-
lowing several days of non-action, the Chinese launch
an attack against Company F at Bunker Hill. The
Marines, led by Captain Clarence Moody, initially are
struck by a small force, composed of about two squads,
at about dusk. The enemy encroaches the right flank
and commences a short burst of machine gun fire, ac-
companied by the tossing of a few grenades, but after-
ward, the enemy withdraws.
About one hour later, however, the Chinese mount
a stronger assault, composed of about two companies
and supported by artillery. The Marines holding the
right center of the outposts become the recipients of
the assault, but Captain Moody requests and receives
some added muscle from the 11th Marines. Tanks
within range of the enemy also commence firing to en-
sure the Marines’ positions remain in place. During the
866
initial fighting, the Marines withdraw from a forward
outpost that had been utilized as a listening post. In
the meantime, a contingent of the Chinese manage to
slither through the maze of fire and penetrate the lines;
however, by about the same time, midnight (25th-
26th), a reinforcing platoon that had departed the main
defense line arrives and the enemy quickly retires, in
conjunction with the cessation of the enemy guns.
Within about thirty minutes, the enemy fire subsides
completely.
Subsequent to the end of the contest, the Marines
move out to reoccupy the abandoned listening post,
but enemy fire prevents the contingent from reaching
it. This action culminates the major attempts during
August by the enemy to regain Bunker Hill. The
Marines sustain 8 killed and 57 wounded. They esti-
mate enemy casualties at 100 killed and 470 wounded
(most coming from the artillery and tank fire).
Late August 1952 In the I Corps sector, 1st
Marine Division zone, a 58-man contingent of the
1st Amphibious Tractor Battalion arrives to bolster
the ranks of the 1st Marines, which had sustained
high casualties during the fight for Bunker Hill.
August 27 The USS Competent (AM 336), while
operating off Chaho, comes under heavy fire from
enemy shore gun batteries. About 100 rounds are fired.
The ship sustains no damage.
In other activity, friendly guerrillas are fired upon
by the destroyer USS Tingey (DD 539). The Tingey,
cruising northward, spots what is thought to be an
enemy gun position on Song-do and the crew opens
fire. The defenders sustain no fatalities, but 4 troops
are wounded. Subsequently, on this same day, enemy
gun positions on the mainland fire upon the guerrillas
and inflict one fatality and wound one other man.
In yet other activity, the USS Competent (AMS 336)
and the USS McDermut (DD 677) come under enemy
shore gun fire. Both ships are able to avoid damage;
however, the Competent loses its sweeping gear as it ma-
neuvers to get out of the range of the guns.
August 28 A unit known as Guided Missile Unit
(GMU) 90, operating from USS Boxer (CVA 21), be-
tween this day and 2 September, launches 6 guided
missiles (F6F drones) against targets in Communist
controlled parts of Korea. The mission succeeds in de-
stroying one target, but misses four others. In addi-
tion, one of the launches is aborted.
In other activity, the USS Sarsi (ATF 111), while on
patrol off Hungnam, strikes a mine. The vessel sinks
within twenty-one minutes. Other ships in the area
rush to initiate a rescue operation and of the crew, re-
ported as 97 men, the rescuers save 92. The USS Zeal
(AM 131), USS Competent (AM 316), and the USS
Boyd (DD 544) participate. To ensure the enemy is un-
able to salvage the vessel, a warship remains in the vicin-
ity. On 20 August, a salvage operation is undertaken.
The ship is located in an upright position, but it is de-
termined that enemy shore gun fire would impede the
 867 September 1, 1952

retrieval of the Sarsi. Consequently, the ship is de- In Naval activity, enemy guns fire upon Mu-do Is-
stroyed. land, held by friendly troops. The British destroyer
In yet other activity, the USS McDermut (DD 677) HMAS Bataan (DD) quickly provides support. An ef-
comes under fire off Wonsan. No enemy hits occur, fective barrage silences the enemy fire.
but one near miss causes some slight damage; however, In other activity, enemy guns on the mainland east
no casualties are sustained. of Cho-do take the USS LSSL 108 under fire. A British
warship, the cruiser HMS Newcastle (CL), initiates a
August 29 Pyongyang is struck by a massive air
barrage and silences the enemy fire.
attack. According to Navy records, more than 1,000
planes, including Marine, Navy and Air Force units, August 31 During August the 1st Marine Air
participate. In addition, Australian and British aircraft Wing sets a record for sorties flown during one month,
participate. The Communists continue to try to inter- with 5,869 sorties flown in support of Fifth Air Force
cept the bombing raids, but with little success. Dur- missions, including close air-support for the 1st Marine
ing the month of September, Fifth Air Force loses seven Division.
Sabre jets; however, the enemy loses sixty-four MiGs. In Naval activity, it is reported that Communist guns
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the have hit nine ships fighting under the U.N. banner.
USS Tingey (DD 535) moves up to target enemy mor- The closest month for the Communists was February
tar positions on the mainland that had begun firing on 1952, a period in which eight ships had been hit.
Song-do, held by friendly troops. The destroyer’s guns
terminate the enemy fire.
September 1952 In Naval activity, the U.S.
Navy, during the period September 1952 through
August 30 In Air Force activity, a contingent of March 1953, concentrates on targeting enemy oil re-
Sabre jets engages a large force of MiGs. Five of the fineries and other strategic sources of supply. On the
MiGs are shot down, bit no Sabre jets are lost. first day of the operations, planes from three carriers
launch air attacks and pound the refinery at
Aoji and other lucrative targets. About two
weeks later, the U.S. Navy launches another
massive attack and receives no response from
the enemy. The Communist pilots evade the
U.S. planes rather than engage.
During October 1952, the commander of
the 7th Fleet, Vice Admiral Joseph J. Clark,
initiates a new type of bombing raid, known
as the “Cherokee Attack.” Admiral Clark, of
Cherokee ancestry, concludes that although
the massive raids of the Fifth Air Force and
U.S. Navy have not eliminated the huge un-
derground stockpiles, he believes plenty of
supplies are concealed above ground, beyond
the range of U.S. artillery.
Eighth Army is ecstatic about the immi-
nent support, but red tape and bureaucracy
enter the picture. Far East Air Forces raises
concerns about coordination and Fifth Air
Force believes it should control the flights.
The details are eventually worked out, with
designated strike areas and oversight by Fifth
Air Force on flights within a specified bomb-
line. Clark’s “Cherokee Attacks” bomb tar-
gets beyond the range of the friendly artillery
and behind the enemy’s MLR for the dura-
tion of the conflict.
Also, U.S. Navy reports for September
1952 indicate that the planes flown by Navy
and Marine pilots had expended 6,200 tons
of bombs, 6,100 rockets, and 1,700,000
rounds of ammunition.
A break in the action on Old Baldy (Hill 266). Two soldiers
take a breather. One man catching a cigarette glances at September 1 In Air Force activity, a
another who has his left hand bandaged and a grenade close small contingent of MiGs evades patrols
at hand. maintained by F-86 Sabres and reach Haeju
September 1, 1952
American Patrol: F-86 Sabre jets in flight over North Korea in search of MiG-15s.
slightly north of the 39th Parallel. During the flight
they manage to score damage upon an F-51 Mustang.
In Naval activity, Task Force 77 focuses its air power
on the bomb-line area and upon preselected targets,
including supply depots and enemy front line posi-
tions. The Navy-Marine air attacks against Musan and
Hoeam-dong are one of the few times the Panther jets
are used exclusively as an attack plane.
Also, planes attached to Task Force 77 attack a syn-
868
thetic oil production facility at Aoji, less than five miles
from the Manchurian border and less than 10 miles
from Russia.
In other activity, enemy shore gun batteries in the
vicinity of Kangsong commence firing upon the de-
stroyer USS Agerholm (DD 826). The vessel receives
one hit and sustains some minor damage. In addition,
one crewman is wounded. The destroyer returns fire
and eliminates the enemy fire.
 869
Also, Major General Edwin A. Pollock assumes com-
mand of the 1st Marine Division. He succeeds Major
General John T. Selden. Prior to assuming command of
the 1st Marine Division, General Pollock had com-
manded the 2nd Marine Division at Camp Lejeune,
North Carolina.
September 2 Due to problems with the F3D-2
aircraft that can cause an engine to explode, the planes
are grounded, except for daytime flights close to K-8
airfield.
September 3 In Air Force activity, B-29s attached
to Far East Air Forces Bomber Command execute fifty-
two sorties during the night of the 3rd-4th. They score
much damage in what becomes the highest number of
sorties on a single day during the month.
September 4 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Marine positions in the 1st Marines
sector at Bunker Hill had, since the night of the August
25th-26th, been relatively quiet, but at this time, the
Chinese again decide to probe the Marine defenses. At-
tacks are launched against Bunker Hill (Hill 122) and
Stromboli (Hill 48A). The Chinese initiate an artillery
bombardment upon Bunker Hill at 2030. About ten
minutes later, the commanding officer of Company E,
2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, sends word to the 3rd Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, that his positions are under attack
by a platoon-sized contingent. Captain Stanley Moak
directs his troops while they meet the challenge and
turn the attack back. However, the Marines had only
encountered the initial probe.
At about 0100 on the 5th, the enemy mounts a
stronger assault beginning with a ferocious bombard-
ment. Shortly afterward, the Chinese move directly to-
ward the defenses on Bunker Hill, with an apparent at-
titude that they are about to effortlessly occupy the
objective. Their presumption that the artillery had liq-
uidated the defenders is quickly disproved when the
Marines open fire on the Chinese as they encroach,
walking upright.
The Chinese hurriedly retire and begin to reform for
another attack. During the second assault, the Marines
hold steadfastly and inflict heavy casualties upon the
Chinese; however, some of the enemy is able to pene-
trate the lines.
A group of Chinese attempting to outflank the po-
sitions at Bunker Hill instead find themselves straying
from the objective and in the line of fire of troops on
the main line of resistance. That hapless group makes
a speedy retreat, but their presence is unexpected by
other Chinese, who mistake them for Marines and open
fire upon them. At about this time, some of the group
reaches positions within the Marine lines, but here,
too, their luck finds no fortune, as the Marines coun-
terattack and clear the area. The Chinese battalion-
sized attack fizzles out and a retreat is called.
The estimate of Chinese casualties amounts to 70
killed and 305 wounded (high casualties caused mostly
by the troops who strayed into the MLR and were hit
September 4, 1952
by fire there, the troops of Company F and the Chi-
nese). The Marines of Company F sustain 12 killed
and 40 wounded, with the greater number of casualties
being inflicted by enemy artillery and mortars.
Meanwhile, at Stromboli (Hill 48A), the Commu-
nists strike about five minutes after the attack begins
against Bunker Hill. The Marines at the outpost re-
turn fire against a reinforced platoon to ignite a two-
hour contest. The Chinese, supported by machine guns
on nearby Hill 104, plow against the outpost, but the
Marines deliver streams of return fire that prevent the
Communists from making any progress. In addition, the
Marines receive artillery and mortar fire support, which
apparently provides an advantage. The enemy guns on
Hill 104 suddenly become silent after barrages strike
the positions. At 0240, the Chinese disengage. The
Marines sustain no casualties. Enemy casualties are un-
known and no estimates are reported.
During fighting in the 3rd Battalion (5th Marines)
zone, PFC Alford L. McLaughlin, Company L, works
two machine guns as his area is hit by two enemy bat-
talions. McLaughlin holds both guns and fires from the
hip at the unending waves that plow against the posi-
tions. The guns become too hot and he places them on
the ground, then uses his carbine and grenades to con-
tinue his one-man stand. More enemy troops advance
and more fall. The Marines hold their ground and
McLaughlin’s actions play a primary role in turning
back the assault and holding the outpost. He is cred-
ited with killing about 150 of the enemy and wound-
ing about 50 more. PFC McLaughlin, despite standing
in open ground to return fire, survives his wounds. He
is awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
courage in the face of overwhelming enemy force.
In Air Force activity, the Sabre jets have an extremely
busy day. While escorting 75 fighter bombers (F-84s)
to preselected targets north of the Ch’ongch’on River,
the formation is brought under attack by MiGs that
swoop into the area from across the Yalu from their
sanctuary in Manchuria. The escort forces are com-
posed of only 39 F-86s, but they eagerly engage the
MiGs, numbered almost ninety. The 13 kills equal that
of a recent engagement on 4 July. However, on this
date, the superior numbered enemy force, which in-
cludes Russian pilots, knocks down four of the Sabre
jets.
One of the downed enemy planes is credited to
Major Frederick C. “Boots” Blesse (334th Fighter In-
terceptor Squadron), who scores his fifth kill to become
an Air Force ace. By the end of the month, Blesse
achieves a total of eight MiGs and one LA-9 to his
credit. On 3 October, he gets his next MiG, giving him
a total of ten.
During the course of the day’s combat, seventeen
separate air battles are fought with the Communists,
who have the ability to shoot across the Yalu to safety
and then return to fight again.
In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy helicopter, while on a
mission, malfunctions and crashes after it loses all
power. The 3rd Air Rescue Squadron is alerted and it
September 5, 1952
dispatches a helicopter, which successfully rescues the
two crewmen. Also, a downed fighter pilot is picked
up by the 3rd ARS.
September 5 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, fighting that began the previous day con-
tinues at Bunker Hill and more casualties occur. One
corpsman, Edward C. Benfold, moves amidst the
wounded following a night-attack. Benfold spots two
Marines in a trench along a ridge and he makes his way
to them to see if they require aid. As he arrives, enemy
troops arrive. Two of the enemy charge the position
and two others toss grenades into the trench. Benfold
grabs the two grenades and bolts from the trench, then
charges the enemy. He pushes a grenade into the chest
of each attacker, killing both; however, Benfold is mor-
tally wounded. He is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his intrepid act of bravery above and
beyond the call of duty.
In other activity, the positions of the 1st Korean
Marine Corps Regiment, along the western flank of
the three mainland 1st Marine Division regimental
sectors, come under attack. At about sundown on this
day, one of several positions, Outpost 37, is struck
by an enemy barrage. The Chinese maintain their fire
into the following day and increase their targets.
Outpost 37, on the 5th, does not come under an in-
fantry assault, but on the 6th, the Chinese launch
attacks against it and Outpost 36 as well as the regimen-
tal observation post on Hill 155 (known also as Hill
167).
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces launches
daylight sorties against a mining (ore) and processing
plant northeast of Sinanju. More than two hundred
sorties are initiated during two separate raids. Estimated
number of destroyed buildings is about seventy.
In other activity, near Kusuch’on, a patrol composed
of three F-86 Sabre jets is tailed by a MiG, but the
enemy is spotted by another set of Sabre jets led by
Major Richard L. Ayersman (334th Fighter-Intercep-
tor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor Wing). Ayersman
and his wingman initiate an attack. Once the pilot in
the MiG realizes he is under attack, he attempts to
make a hard right to evade damage, but in the process,
the stress during the turn breaks up the MiG. It plum-
mets to the earth.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries on the
Pipa-got peninsula on mainland across from Sok-to
open fire upon the Thai vessel Tachin (PF). No dam-
age is inflicted; however, the warship returns fire and
silences three guns.
In another incident, enemy guns on Kalmagak fire
upon a friendly held island in the vicinity of Wonsan.
The USS Lewis (DE 535) pours rounds into the posi-
tions and silences the enemy fire.
In yet other activity, while the destroyer USS Blue
(DD 744) provides support for minesweeping ships
near Hungnam, it comes under fire from enemy shore
gun batteries on the Sohojin Lighthouse peninsula. No
damage or casualties occur to the Blue.
870
Also, the USS Swallow (AMS 36) comes under
fire in the Hungnam approaches while it conducts
sweeping operations. The USS Comstock (LSD 19),
too, is fired upon. Neither ship sustains damage or ca-
sualties.
Also, warships fire upon and silence enemy batter-
ies on the mainland east of Cho-do, which had been
bombarding Sosa-ri, on the friendly island of Cho-do.
The enemy fire is terminated. The vessels USS Cardi-
gan Bay (PF), HMS Morecombe Bay (FF), USS LSMR
412 and the USS Bradford (DD 545) participate. No
damage is sustained by the ships; however, the friendly
Koreans at Sosa-ri sustain six casualties.
September 6 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 1st South Korean Marine Corps Reg-
iment’s positions continue to come under bombard-
ment by Chinese forces. However, unlike the previous
day, the Chinese also launch ground attacks against
several outposts. At 1605, Outpost 36 is struck by
a barrage of short duration, but following a pause
of about two hours, again the enemy guns commence
firing against it and Outpost 37. The enemy bombard-
ment also strikes the regimental outpost. In the
meantime, the Communists form near the Sachon
River and slightly after 1900, the Chinese ignite a
charge at the sound of bugles and whistles. Outpost 36
and 37 are attacked, but the former faces the most se-
vere challenge.
Outpost 36 repels the initial charge and afterward,
another attack is repulsed. However, the Chinese remain
relentless and mount a third attack, which unfolds at a
speed that is too strong for the South Koreans to fore-
stall. The communications on the outpost are severed
during the third assault. One of the besieged squad
leaders is able to make his way to the S.K. 10th Com-
pany with news that the position had been overrun.
Nevertheless, by about 2220, the severed communica-
tions line is reestablished and the remaining defenders
are able to confirm that the position is again held by the
S.K. Marines.
The Chinese had in fact taken the hill, but at an ex-
pensive price, which apparently compels them to re-
tire rather than attempt to hold the ground. The S.K.
Marines at Outpost 36 lose nine killed and seven
wounded. At Outpost 37, only four casualties are sus-
tained. Meanwhile, at the regimental observation post,
enemy artillery inflicts one fatality on the S.K. Marines
and two others, U.S. Marines, are also killed. The Chi-
nese losses are estimated at 110 killed or wounded. In
conjunction, 33 Chinese dead are counted on the field
near Outpost 36.
In the 5th Marines zone, the Chinese launch a stiff at-
tack in the 1st Marines’ sector (Bunker Hill and Strom-
boli) during the early morning hours. However, at
about the same time, the 5th Marines’ perimeter also
comes under attack. The five forward outposts—Allen,
Bruce, Clarence, Felix and Gary — become targets
of the Chinese. They strike Gary first, but the position
on the right of the line receives only shelling.
 871
No ground troops move against COP Gary; however,
the remaining outposts come under artillery and in-
fantry assaults. The Chinese artillery pummels the
slopes.
Initially, the defenders at Allen, Bruce and Clarence
feel the thrust of the attack, but about thirty minutes
later, the Chinese also pounce upon COP Felix. COP
Bruce comes under fire about 0010 by heavy machine
gun fire, artillery and mortars. The barrage lasts for
slightly more than one-half hour and just after it sub-
sides, a reinforced company-sized assault begins.
Meanwhile, the others are hit by squad-sized contin-
gents. At Bruce, the Marines receive “Boxed-in-Fire,”
which quickly neutralizes the enemy thrust and compels
the enemy to withdraw. Nonetheless, the 5th Marines
repel all attacks. By 0420 the Chinese, after scouring the
field for their dead and wounded, withdraw. The Marines
sustain 32 casualties, including killed and wounded. No
estimates of enemy dead are available. Nonetheless, the
enemy undoubtedly sustains heavy casualties. At dawn, the
Marines at Bruce inspect the field and discover that every
bunker on the forward slope had been decimated by the
enemy artillery. And on the reverse slope, the results had
been nearly identical, as only two bunkers avoid destruc-
tion. In conjunction, during the action in the 5th Marines’
sector, one Marine exhibits extraordinary heroism under
fire. PFC Alford L. McLaughlin (Company I, 3rd Battal-
ion) at COP Bruce utilizes two separate machine guns,
grenades and a carbine to singlehandedly eliminate about
two hundred enemy troops. McLaughlin becomes a re-
cipient of the Medal of Honor. In addition, one other
Marine, PFC Fernando Luis Garcia, sacrifices his life to
save that of his sergeant by diving on a grenade. Garcia re-
ceives the Medal of Honor postumously for his courage
above and beyond the call of duty.
During the daylight hours, the Marines work
under fire to rebuild the defenses. Marine and Air Force
planes execute support missions of the 5th Marines by
pounding enemy bunkers and enemy artillery positions.
Later, the Chinese mount new attacks. COP Bruce is
struck by artillery and mortars at 1915. By just about
2015, as the shelling subsides, enemy ground troops
punch forward to penetrate the outpost, but it is hand-
ily repulsed. The Chinese mount new assaults. In the
meantime, COP Allen comes under bombardment.
At Bruce, the Chinese fire inflicts high casualties and
wrecks the defensive bunkers, but still, the Marines
give no ground. Two additional assaults are launched
with punishing results. Additional Marines continue to
join the ever-growing casualty list, to a point in which
nearly every man at Bruce has either been killed or
wounded. But still, the Chinese are unable to dislodge
the defenders. The Marines face the enemy on the for-
ward slope, while another contingent works to encircle
the Marines on the reverse slope. Nothing works for the
Chinese as the wounded band of Marines holds firmly.
At 0400 on 7 September, the Chinese once again dis-
engage. The Chinese failure terminates a 51-hour siege to
liquidate the Marines at Outpost Bruce. The 5th Marines
hold Bruce at a cost of 19 killed and 38 wounded. In the
September 8, 1952
meantime, at the other secure outposts, the 5th Marines
sustain an additional 5 killed and 32 wounded. They
count 200 Chinese dead and estimate that in the final
eight hours another 200 had been wounded.
In the 25th Division zone, a listening post of Com-
pany A, 27th Regiment, in the vicinity of Sat’ae-ri
comes under attack by a force composed of about one
reinforced company. Corporal Benito Martinez holds
a machine gun position. He immediately opens fire to
cut down the attackers, but the enemy continues to
penetrate and begins to encircle the post. Martinez
maintains contact with the MLR, but insists that no
rescue attempt be undertaken due to the great risk.
Martinez eventually expends his ammunition and
begins to withdraw, using his automatic rifle and pis-
tol to fend off the enemy. Martinez keeps the enemy at
bay for about six hours, but just prior to dawn he makes
telephone contact with the main body for the final time
to state that his position is being overrun. During Mar-
tinez’s amazing stand, his outfit is able to regroup and
regain the lost ground. Corporal Martinez is awarded
the Medal of Honor posthumously.
September 7 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, fighting continues from the previous day
at the 5th Marines outposts In the 25th Division zone,
a three-man outpost near Mundung-ni, manned by el-
ements of Company G, comes under heavy attack. Two
of the three defenders are killed during the initial blow,
which includes artillery and mortar fire; however,
Sergeant Donn F. Porter survives and attempts to sin-
glehandedly hold off two platoons.
His communications severed, Porter battles fiercely
without the imminent arrival of reinforcements. His
rapid fire slays about fifteen of the attackers. And then
a wall of fire is sent his way. He pulls back, then when
a group of the enemy is about to pounce upon him, he
bolts from his position with fixed bayonet and takes on
six Communists, eliminates them and repels the as-
sault. Sergeant Porter survives the ordeal, but as he
moves back to reoccupy the outpost and await help, he
is killed by an artillery barrage. Sergeant Porter is
awarded the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary
courage in the face of a superior enemy force.
September 8 In Air Force activity, Two Sabre jets
encounter and engage four MiGs in the skies near
Namsi-dong. During the aerial duel, Major Richard
Ayersman (334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th
Fighter-Interceptor Wing), who had prevailed in a fight
on the 5th, downs another MiG on this day.
Also, Major Frederick C. Blesse, attached to the
334th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (4th Fighter-
Interceptor Wing), engages and destroys a MiG-15 in
the vicinity of Sinuiju during the early afternoon.
Within two hours, Blesse engages and destroys another
near Pihyon. Major Blesse had also downed a MiG on
4 September near Wonsong.
Also, Captain William B. Craig (334th Fighter-
Interceptor Squadron) downs one MiG. It, too, crashes
near Pihyon.
September 9, 1952
An ROK soldier receives first aid following a skirmish with Chinese on 8 September at Capital Hill, east
of Kumsong.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the Capital Division en-
gages a Communist force in the vicinity of Capital Hill
east of Kumsong. The ROKs sustain some casualties,
but lose no ground.
September 9 In Air Force activity, forty-five F-
84 fighter bombers, with an escort force of F-86 Sabre
872
jets, strike the North Korean Military Academy at
Sakchu. The facility had been attacked earlier on 4 July,
but with negative results. The formation is attacked by
MiGs that are able to penetrate the fighter protection
and down three of the ThunderJets.
Meanwhile, the Sabre jets fight off the MiGs and
down five of them without sustaining any losses.
 873
In Naval activity, a band of four MiGs intercept and
attack a three-plane flight of F4U-4Bs of VMA-323,
but the MiGs score no hits.
September 10 Marine pilots attached to the USS
Sicily, while on a mission near the 39th Parallel in search
of enemy troop formations, unexpectedly encounter two
MiG-15s that attempt to ambush a contingent includ-
ing two planes, one flown by Marine Captain Jesse G.
Folmar and the other by Lt. Willie L. Daniels. Just after
the MiGs appear, two other Russian jets arrive on scene.
The Marines, in propeller-driven planes, face jets, but
still Captain Folman is able to down one of them.
With the odds still greatly against them, the Marines
afterward disengage and head for the carrier. It’s the
first time a propeller-driven aircraft shoots down a jet.
With the MiGs in pursuit, the engagement continues
and enemy fire seriously damages Daniels’ plane, shoot-
ing off part of his left wing. Daniels is forced to aban-
don his plane, but Captain Folman remains overhead
and once he concludes Daniels is okay in the water, he
radios for a rescue team. Lt. Daniels is plucked from the
water and returned safely to the USS Sicily.
September 11 Enemy batteries in the vicinity of
Napchin commence firing upon a trio of minesweep-
ers, the USS Curlew (AMS 8), USS Osprey (AMS 28)
and a South Korean vessel, the ROKN AMS 513. No
damage is sustained by any of the ships.
In other activity, 22 fighters (F9Fs of VMF-115) of
MAG-33 at Field K-3 are dispatched to a point in
North Korea near Sariwon, south of Pyongyang, to
strike suspected enemy troop formations. As the jets
are returning to base after the mission, the weather
changes drastically and a heavy fog prevents their land-
ing. The jets are diverted to K-2 at Taegu. The weather
causes tragedy. Sixteen of the jets make their way safely
to K-2 and succeed in landing. However, six of the
planes, flying in formation, make a descent and each
plane strikes the side of a mountain due to zero visibil-
ity. The planes missed clearing the mountain by a mere
600 feet. All six pilots are killed.
September 12 In the skies over Korea, 3 F4Us
from Marine Squadron VMA-323 are attacked by four
MiGs. A ten-minute air duel erupts, but neither side
sustains any damage or shoot-downs. In addition, 2
F4Us from VMA-312 are also intercepted and attacked
by MiGs.
In Air Force activity, the massive Sui-ho power plant
complex comes under a two-layered attack during the
night of the 12th-13th. Since the implementation of
new enemy defenses, the U.S. has modified its tactics
to work around the radar controlled searchlights. The
first strike is made by U.S. Navy planes and Air Force
B-26s that plaster the area with low-level fragmentation
bombs that explode and spread large amounts of frag-
ments to disable the searchlights.
Simultaneously, a four-plane contingent of B-29s
maneuvers to the east to confuse and jam the enemy
radar. All the while, 25 B-29s drop their payloads on
September 16, 1952
the main power plant. Communist MiGs arrive and
they succeed in shooting down one of the B-29s
(medium bomber) and they damage a few others. The
raid, however, does knock the power plant out of com-
mission. After-action reports determine that the mod-
ification of tactics (hitting searchlights and jamming
radar) most probably had been responsible for the low
number of B-29 losses.
September 13 Planes attached to TF 77 are
launched to deliver two separate attacks against enemy
supply complexes and troop concentration areas at
Heeryong, located along the Manchurian border. Nei-
ther of the strikes is met with heavy opposition; how-
ever, reports indicate that a large number of enemy
planes is hovering in the area of Manchuria, about sev-
enty miles from the point of attack.
Also, enemy batteries fire upon the USS Lewis (DE
535) and USS Evansville (PF 70), but no damage is
sustained. Return fire eliminates the hostile fire. At
Wonsan, aircraft attached to the USS Bon Homme
Richard (CVA 31) spot and attack a vessel of about 130
feet.
September 14 Marine Fighter Squadron VMA-
121, led by recently appointed commander Lt. Colo-
nel Wayne M. Cargill, completes its 5,000th combat
sortie since its arrival in Korea during the previous Oc-
tober.
September 15 In Air Force activity, during the
early afternoon, a pair of F-86 Sabre jets from the 335th
Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter-Interceptor
Wing, encounters a sole MiG-15. The MiG is downed
by Lt. Colonel Caroll B. McElroy in the skies near
Wonssong-dong.
Another pilot of the same outfit, Captain Clifford
D. Jolley, while flying in a separate patrol, engages and
destroys one of three MiGs encountered in the vicin-
ity of Tongsong-ni.
In Naval activity, the USS Barton (DD 722), while
operating about 100 miles east of Wonsan, hits what is
thought to be a mine. The explosion causes flooding in
the forward fireroom. Five crewmen are reported miss-
ing and another six are injured. Nonetheless, the ship is
able to remain operational. It embarks for Sasebo, Japan.
Also, the 1st Marine Air Wing establishes a new
squadron (VMC-1). The squadron’s missions are re-
stricted to electronic countermeasures.
September 16 Friendly guerrillas on Hachwira-
do are fired upon by enemy artillery on Amgak. The
USS Bradford (DD 545) is in the area and returns fire
in support of the guerrillas, but the results of the bar-
rage are unknown. The guerrillas sustain some casual-
ties from the enemy guns.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force launches 110
sorties by B-26s. The great majority of the strikes are
night interdiction raids and armed reconnaissance. The
bombers use a recently achieved tactic that creates road-
blocks. After-action reports indicate the destruction or
damage of more than one hundred vehicles.
September 17, 1952
September 17 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, estab-
lishes an outpost on Hill 124 in the left sector of the reg-
imental perimeter. The Chinese are not receptive to
the new inhabitants and promptly plan to evict the
squad that holds the post.
In Naval activity, planes attached to TF-77 launch at-
tacks against enemy military targets at Tanchon and
Pukchong, two cities located on the northeastern coast-
line of Korea.
In other activity, a group of MiGs passes over the
USS Bradford (DD 545), which prompts the warship
to commence firing. A burst of 32 rounds is expended,
but no hits are made. The MiGs make no attack against
the Bradford.
September 18 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Divi-
sion zone, the on-again off-again battle for Hill 266
(Old Baldy) is re-ignited. The hill, lost during July, had
been recaptured during the latter part of August and
subsequent counterattacks have failed to regain it for the
Communists. On this day, in conjunction with an ar-
tillery bombardment, an enemy contingent of about
two-company strength, bolstered by tanks, strikes
swiftly and after ascending the slopes, the defenders are
forced to withdraw. Shortly thereafter, the contingent
forms positions about 400 yards from the crest, then the
troops launch a counterattack to regain the summit.
However, Chinese return fire becomes too intense to
penetrate.
In Naval activity, a peculiar incident occurs when an
aircraft with the definite appearance of an American
F-84 pursues a friendly aircraft in circles in the vicin-
ity of the bomb-line. The unidentified plane carries
USAF markings, including the star on the wings. Nev-
ertheless, after ignoring radio contact, the unidentified
plane leaves the area. It is thought that the Communists
had probably been able to salvage parts from downed
U.S. planes to come up with an operable aircraft.
In other activity, enemy shore gun batteries fire upon
the minesweeper USS Heron (AMS 18) while she op-
erates near Wonsan, but the ship does not sustain any
damage.
In yet other activity, a South Korean vessel, the
ROKN MTB 26, experiences an explosion in its en-
gine room, which causes the vessel to sink off Chin-
hae, Korea. No fatalities occur, but 4 crewmen are in-
jured.
September 19 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Divi-
sion zone, another counterattack is commenced to re-
gain Hill 266 (Old Baldy). Tanks support the assault
and although enemy fire remains fierce, as it was the
previous day, the 2nd Division contingents ascend to the
crest and secure it.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 1st South Korean
Marine Corps Regiment, which holds the west flank
of the division perimeter, again comes under attack by
the Communists. At Outpost 36, a contingent of Chi-
nese who had earlier crossed the Sachon River during
daylight emerge from concealed positions and form to
874
attack, while other supporting units move against Out-
posts 37, 33 and 31 in a diversionary move. Backed by
artillery and tanks, the Chinese lunge against the out-
post from the north, east and west. The Korean
Marines aggressively return fire and by about 2000, the
Chinese secure the hill, while the Korean Marines at-
tempt to reform to take it back.
At 0115 on the 20th, the Koreans press forward only
to discover Chinese reinforcements coming from a dis-
tance of less than one mile. The Korean Marines abort
the counterattack. Nevertheless, the Chinese remain
on the offensive. The Chinese move swiftly and rather
quietly to positions that encircle the Korean Marines.
By 0520, the outpost is completely overrun. Many of
the Korean Marines escape the entrapment and make
it back to friendly lines. Those few unable to escape
are captured and taken from the field when the Chinese
later depart.
In Air Force activity, B-29s initiate a daylight attack
for the first time since the previous October. With an
escort of F-86 Sabre jets as protection, a group of 32 B-
29s strike strategic enemy military targets southwest of
Hamhung, including barracks and supply depots. The
raids are bolstered by an RB-45 aircraft that moves
ahead of the attack force and circles an assembly area to
gather information on the weather and relay it to the
strike force.
In Naval activity, Communist gun batteries in the
vicinity of Wonsan commence firing upon the USS
Cunningham (DD 752) and strike it with a direct hit
on the first round. The batteries follow with more than
100 additional rounds and inflicting four more hits.
The ship sustains damage, but no fatalities occur. How-
ever, eight crewmen are wounded.
September 20 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the Chinese move to eliminate a recently
established outpost manned by one squad of the 2nd
Battalion, 1st Marines, on Hill 124. The Chinese
launch the attack in conjunction with the appearance
of two green flares that burst overhead at 0345. The il-
lumination signals that the attack is imminent. The
squad comes under assault by four separate groups,
with the main thrust being executed by a contingent
of about twenty troops.
The Marines receive incoming mortars, grenades and
sub-machine gun fire, but dish out deadly doses of fire
that slam into the attackers. The tenacious exchange
lasts only about five minutes and nearly every man in
the defending squad becomes wounded, but the Com-
munists are unable to penetrate. The Chinese disen-
gage and vanish into the darkness.
In other activity, the 1st Korean Marine Regiment,
which surrendered Outpost 36 during fighting that
began on the previous night, mount a new counterat-
tack at 1400. Since retaking the hill, the Chinese have
fortified their positions and those on the far side of the
hill find themselves protected from the artillery of the
11th Marines. Nonetheless, the positions remain lu-
crative targets for the Marine air squadrons.
 875
Prior to the counterattack, elements of three
squadrons, VMA-323, 121 and 212, pound the posi-
tions in concert with the guns of the 11th Marines,
softening the path for the Korean Marines. The bom-
bardment works well. The Korean Marines, backed by
artillery and tank fire, charge the positions against a
frazzled group of Chinese who have been unable to re-
cover properly from the thunderous barrage. The Com-
munists are overrun, but they withdraw only a short
distance to positions northwest of the hill. Following the
recapture of the outpost, which culminates a 20-hour
battle, the South Korean Marines hold it for the balance
of the month with no new attempts by the Communists
to retake it. In addition, by retaining control of the
outpost, the Korean Marines are able to continue to
fire upon Chinese positions.
The South Korean Marines lose 16 killed, 47
wounded and 6 missing. The Chinese casualties are es-
timated at 150. The S.K Marines actually count 20
dead.
In Naval activity, two MiGs approach and attack a
PB4Y, attached to Squadron VP-28, as it passes in the
vicinity of Shanghai. It is the first time MiGs react to
a U.S. reconnaissance flight in the area around Shang-
hai. The MiGs make five passes and on each pass they
fire, but the aircraft is able to evade damage and it re-
turns to NAF Naha.
At Old Baldy (Hill 266), a Quad 50 bolsters a 2nd Division counterattack.
September 21, 1952
September 21–29 1952 In Naval activity,
the USS Weiss (AFD 135), accompanied by two
South Korean motor torpedo boats, initiates an op-
eration with an Underwater Demolition Team,
which executes an operation against enemy fishing
complexes. The team succeeds in seizing 5 sampans,
5 commercial nets and traps and in addition, the
team seizes 44 prisoners.
September 21 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Divi-
sion zone, a contingent of Communists attack the
perimeter near Hill 266 (Old Baldy), but no ground is
lost.
In the X Corps sector, after dark, while the U.S. 45th
Division is in the process of relieving elements of the
ROK 8th Division, the North Koreans launch an assault
to gain a hill along the South Koreans’ MLR. The
North Koreans commit two full battalions, which man-
age to overrun the hill and drive the ROKs, at some
points, back about 1,000 yards. Nevertheless, the re-
mainder of the ROKs on the left halt the penetration
before the Communists can exploit the gain. The fight
continues into the following day.
Elements of the ROK 8th Division, augmented by
tanks of the 45th Division’s 245th Tank Battalion,
counterattack and seize part of the hill. Later, the South
Koreans push to regain the entire hill. The divisional
September 22, 1952
reserve regiment is committed and it ascends to the
crest and secures it by dusk. The 45th Division com-
pletes the relief operation on 26 September.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of 41 F-84s, es-
corted by F-86 Sabre jets, strike an enemy ammuni-
tion facility in Pukchong. During the raid, MiGs arrive
to intercept the formation. Captain Robinson Risner,
attached to the 336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron,
engages and knocks down two of the MiGs, which
brings his total number of kills to five to make him an
Air Force ace.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries com-
mence fire upon the destroyer escorts USS Jenkins
(DDE 447) and USS Taylor (DDE 468) while they are
operating off Hwangto-do Island, but the enemy fire is
inaccurate and scores no damage. Other enemy guns
also fire upon the friendly held island of Hwangto-do
in Wonsan harbor, but the Jenkins is able to move into
position and silence the guns. In another incident,
enemy guns in the vicinity of Chaho fire upon the
British destroyer HMS Charity, but no damage is sus-
tained.
September 22–26 1952 In the I Corps sec-
tor, 1st Marine Division zone, Operation HAYLIFT
commences. The 7th Marines becomes the recipi-
ent of HMR-161’s latest project to test the ability of
re-supplying a combat regiment on the MLR. The
helicopter squadron transports all Class I, III and V
items, as well as items of Class II and IV that can be
transported. All supplies, with the exception of valu-
able cargo (including mail), is to be carried in slings.
The operation succeeds and it is determined that by
using about 40 percent of a squadron’s capabilities,
it can sustain a combat regiment on the main line of
resistance for about five days without difficulty.
September 22 Friendly forces on Sosa-ri, along
the west coast of Korea, come under an artillery barrage
by enemy batteries on the mainland. The British ves-
sel HMS Cardigan Bay (PF) and the destroyer USS
Bradford (DD 545) move in to support the friendly
forces by bombarding the enemy positions. Another
friendly held island, Yo-do, off Wonsan, also comes
under attack by enemy batteries.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Air Wing grounds
14 of its F9F-2s due to the discovery of cracks in some
of the nose wheel spindles and in the socket and bush-
ing assembly castings. Also, a Chinese Communist
naval vessel fires at a VP-28 PB4Y plane, but the gun-
ners lack accuracy. The plane escapes damage.
September 23 Communist shore batteries lo-
cated at Songjin open fire on the destroyers USS Walker
(DD 517) and USS Cunningham (DD 752). Neither
ship sustains any damage and no casualties are reported.
In other activity, the battleship USS Iowa (BB 61)
comes under enemy fire from batteries at Kalmagak in
Wonsan harbor. The Iowa’s big guns quickly extinguish
the enemy fire when her 16-inch shells arrive upon
their positions.
876
September 24 In Naval activity, a South Ko-
rean naval vessel, the ROK AMS 506, runs aground
near Yo-do Island and tears a small hole in her star-
board bow. After about nine hours of toil, the vessel is
back in operation and on the way to complete its mis-
sion.
In other activity, enemy batteries pound the posi-
tions of friendly forces on Wollae-do and Yuk-to. The
New Zealander vessel HMNZ Rotoiti (FF) maneuvers
into position and returns fire in support of the guerril-
las.
September 25 Enemy shore gun batteries posted
near Wonsan attack the USS Taylor (DDE 468), but
no damage is inflicted. The Taylor returns fire and elim-
inates the hostile fire.
September 27 Subsequent to dusk, a trio of B-
26s operate in the central sector of Korea to broadcast
during the sorties. The crews of the planes broadcast for
a total of three and one-half hours. All three planes re-
turn to their base without harm.
September 28 Marine Major Alexander J. Gillis
(VMF-311), attached to the US Air Force 335th
Fighter Squadron (4th Fighter Group), while flying a
sortie as part of a four-plane mission near the mouth of
the Yalu River with one other plane, encounters then
chases two MiG-15s. Gillis forces one of the planes to
crash and later this same day, he encounters another
MiG. Gillis damages the MiG and the pilot is forced to
eject; however, Gillis’ plane also becomes inoperable
and he ejects into the Yellow Sea. Gillis is rescued. He
is the second Marine pilot to score two kills in one day
during the Korean War.
Late September 1952 In the I Corps sector,
1st Marine Division zone, the regimental area of the
1st Marines, which includes the Hill-124–122 axis,
is probed by the Chinese, but they make no serious
attempt to seize either outpost. The situation is ba-
sically the same in the remainder of the division
zone. The 7th Marines, which had deployed in the
divisional right on 7 September after relieving the
5th Marines, also sees no major challenges against
its positions.
The 7th Marines holds responsibility for the right
flank of the 1st Marine Division. The 7th Marines
also assume seven outposts from the 5th Marines and
two others, Frisco and Verdun, are established on the
14th and 26th, respectively. Verdun stands on the far
eastern sector of the perimeter, near the boundary
with the British 1st Commonwealth Brigade.
September 29 Fighter bombers attached to Fifth
Air Force execute 207 close-air support sorties. The
planes strike targets that include enemy artillery posi-
tions and bunkers.
September 30 Encounters between Sabre jets
and MiGs occur 706 times during the month of Sep-
tember, but during the following month, the figure
drops to 434.
 877
In other activity during September, aircraft of the
U.S. Navy and Marine Corps expend 6,200 tons of
bombs, 6,100 rockets, and 1,700,000 rounds of ammu-
nition.
Also, a large group of 48 B-29s drawn from the 19th
Bomber Group, 98th Bomber Wing and the 307th
Bomber Wing strike the sole remaining strategic target
in North Korea, the Namsan-ni Chemical Plant, on
this day and the next. The target is located less than
400 yards from the Yalu River.
Five of the planes in the strike force are equipped
with ECM (electronic counter measures) flak suppres-
sion to disrupt the enemy’s radar controlled search-
lights. The planes successfully attack the facility and
during the assault, seven B-26s dive to very low altitudes
and knock out eight of the lights, numbered at about
forty.
October 1952 In Naval activity, U.S. Navy pi-
lots fly 11,004 sorties during the month of October,
the highest monthly total since the outbreak of the
Korean War. About one-half of the sorties are in sup-
port of Eighth Army ground forces. Marine pilots
(1st Marine Air Wing) execute 3,765 sorties during
October, which becomes the second highest monthly
total, behind June 1951.
Slightly more than one-third of the flights are
close-air support; however, this is due to the Marines
being under the jurisdiction of Fifth Air Force, which
restricts Marine missions. In addition, Marine He-
licopter Transport Squadron 161 (HMR 161) evac-
uates 365 casualties during October, which also sets
a record for the highest number of evacuations for one
month.
Also, since January 1952, 63 incidents have oc-
curred in which Fifth Air Force planes inadvertently
caused casualties among friendly troops. Of the 63
incidents, Marine pilots are responsible for 18 or just
over 28 percent; however, Marine pilots have been
flying between 30 to 40 percent, per month, of all
Eighth Army close-support missions and have han-
dled all missions within 5 to 100 yards of the main
line of resistance, bringing the pilots into extremely
close range of friendly troops on the ground.
Also during October, minesweeping operations
swept 10 mines, 22 fewer than the previous month.
Of the ten, four were magnetic, raising the total of
magnetic mines to 18 discovered in Korean waters.
In Air Force activity, during encounters with MiGs
in October, the Sabre jets down 27 MiGs. Four
Sabres are lost.
October 1 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, certain changes of the enemy strategy be-
come more plain at about this time. It had been no-
ticed that enemy probes of Marine positions occurred
much less often. For about the past two weeks, the
enemy has not initiated any primary ground actions.
While the infantry has remained quiet, the enemy
artillery units are becoming much more active. On this
date, the Chinese issue an ultimatum demanding that
October 2, 1952
the 1st South Korean Marine Regiment on Outpost 86
surrender or the Chinese would obliterate the defenses
there. The demand is ignored and as promised at 2000,
the Chinese initiate a bombardment. The Koreans
withstand 145 rounds during the next 20 hours.
In Naval activity, an enemy shore gun battery posted
near Songjin fires upon the destroyer escort USS Naifeh
(DE 352) without success. In Naval activity, pilots’ tar-
gets change from strategic targets to tactical targets.
October 2 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the Chinese have apparently focused on four
of the nine outposts of the 7th Marines — Detroit,
Frisco, Seattle and Warsaw, all of which straddle ground
that is somewhat lower than the outposts in the regi-
ment’s western sector.
The Chinese initiate a major artillery and mortar
bombardment of Seattle and Warsaw at 1836. The bar-
rages continue for precisely one hour and just as the
fire subsides, the Chinese ground troops launch two
separate attacks. While Warsaw’s reinforced platoon
defends against a force composed of about company
strength, the Chinese also send a squad against Seattle.
During the ferocious fight at Warsaw, a grenade lands
in the midst of five Marines. Private Jack William Kelso
grabs the grenade and moves from the bunker to toss it
back; however, it detonates in his hands. Kelso, despite
his wound, returns to the bunker and instructs the
other Marines to head back to the MLR while he re-
mains to cover their withdrawal. Kelso continues to
fire against the advancing Communists until he is re-
peatedly hit and succumbs. Private Kelso becomes the
recipient of the Medal of Honor posthumously.
After heavy fighting at Warsaw that lasts about 45
minutes, the Chinese take the outpost. Within about
five minutes, the Chinese overrun Seattle. Immediately
following the loss of the outposts, the Marines form to
retake them. At Warsaw, one platoon from Company I,
3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, leaves the MLR at 2047
and effortlessly regains the hill, which had been found
abandoned. Meanwhile, the other outpost, Seattle, will
be attacked during the early morning hours of the fol-
lowing day.
In other activity, the Chinese continue to bombard
the positions of the S.K. Marines at Outpost 36. Later,
following one of the artillery bombardments at 1915,
the Communists mount a ground attack against Out-
post 37. The Korean Marines defending the post are
only at platoon strength; however, they repel the as-
sault for more than one hour before the enemy’s supe-
rior numbers compel the Koreans to abandon the post.
In the meantime, the Communists also attack Out-
posts 36 and 86. The defending S.K. Marines at OP
36 resist fiercely and repulse two assaults, but by dawn
on the following day, the enemy strength forces the Ko-
reans to abandon the hill, leaving it to the Chinese who
quickly occupy it. At Outpost 86, the Chinese drive
steadily against the defending platoon; however, they
mount a battalion against it and prior to midnight, the
hill is lost.
October 3, 1952
The Korean Marines continue to hold Outpost 37,
but it, too, is a priority for the Communists and will
come under stiff attack on the following day. Also, on
the 3rd, the S.K. Marines mount a counterattack to re-
gain Outpost 86.
In Naval activity, the destroyer escorts USS Marsh
(DE 699) and HMCS Iroquois (DE) come under
enemy fire off Songjin. The Iroquois sustains one hit
that causes damage and takes the lives of two of the
crew. In addition, eight others are wounded and of
those, one dies later this day. The Marsh remains un-
scathed. Return fire is dispatched by both vessels and
the enemy guns are eliminated. On the following day,
the Marsh again comes under fire, but again the guns
are inaccurate and no damage is sustained.
October 3 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marines Divi-
sion zone, at 0340, two squads attached to Company I,
3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, depart the MLR to regain
Outpost Seattle, which the Chinese had seized during
the previous night. The contingent proves too weak in
numbers to wrest the hill from the Chinese. The unit
is recalled, but afterward, at about dusk, the enemy is
struck heavily by an artillery barrage that precedes an-
other assault by three squads. The Chinese artillery and
grenades again prevent the Marines from gaining the
hill. Casualties from the artillery had become extremely
high. The attack is aborted.
At 2225, artillery again plasters the Chinese posi-
tions on Seattle, but once again, the Chinese are able to
hold. A new assault is launched, but yet again, the
enemy artillery and grenades inflict heavy casualties,
which stalls the advance. The contests at Warsaw and
Seattle have caused 101 casualties, including 13 killed.
During the early morning hours of the 4th, the Chinese
launch a counterattack to regain Warsaw.
In other activity, the South Korean Marines mount
counterattacks to regain Outpost 37. The second charge
gains the crest, but enemy fire forces the S.K. Marines
to find safer positions on the reverse slope. The battle
to secure the hill renews on the following day.
In other activity, the S.K. Marines stand by during
the early morning hours while planes and artillery bom-
bard Outpost 86, which the Chinese had seized on the
previous night. The combined power of the strikes,
coupled with a counterattack at 1015, compels the Chi-
nese to abandon the post, but they only move a short
distance until the artillery begins to pound them at
their new positions. Soon after, they are spotted scur-
rying away. Meanwhile, the S.K. Marines focus on for-
tifying the positions at the outpost in preparation for
an anticipated assault, which occurs on 6 October.
In Naval activity, two F4Us attached to TF-77 strafe
Yang-do Island and inadvertently strike two South Ko-
rean naval vessels, the ROKN MTB 25 and MTB 27.
Some minor damage is inflicted, but no casualties are
reported.
In another incident, enemy fire from a battery near
Wonsan attempts to strike the destroyer USS Taylor
(DD 551), but no damage occurs.
878
October 4 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the Chinese, who had on the previous night
gained and later abandoned Outpost Warsaw in the
7th Marines zone, mounts a new assault at 0145. Dur-
ing the previous night, the defenders had been forced
to abandon the hill, but after re-occupying it later that
same night, the Chinese now face a stiffer defense. The
Marines repel the attack and sustain no casualties.
In other activity, the battle for Outpost 37 rages
within the zone on the 1st South Korean Marine Reg-
iment, which has been fighting since the 2nd for con-
trol of the hill. On this day, and into the next, the grue-
some struggle causes the contest to become a see-saw
battle, with possession of the outpost changing hands
four times. The final one leaves the hill in the posses-
sion of the Communists.
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General William P.
Fisher assumes command of FEAF Bomber Command
(provisional). He succeeds Brigadier General Wiley D.
Ganey, who has held the position since the previous
March (provisional).
In other activity, Captain Manuel J. “Pete” Fernan-
dez, Jr., while on a mission, engages a MiG and downs
it to get his first victory. Captain Fernandez will sub-
sequently gain 13.5 more victories, with the fifth kill oc-
curring on 2 February.
In Naval activity, a group of seven Corsairs attached
to the USS Kearsarge (TF-77) are attacked by seven
MiGs near Yongpo in the initial contest between TF-
77 pilots and fast enemy jets. One of the Corsairs is
lost.
In other activity, 263 planes attached to TF-77 at-
tack enemy positions of the Chinese 67th Army at
Hoeyang, in what becomes the largest air attack by the
Navy subsequent to the massive air assault against the
synthetic oil plant at Aoji near Manchuria on 1 Septem-
ber.
October 5 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the Communists maintain their pressure
against outposts held by the South Korean Marines, but
they are less aggressive against the American Marines.
Since October 1, the South Koreans have lost two out-
posts, but in the 1st Marines zone, none have been sur-
rendered to the Chinese. However, late on this day, at
2230, the Chinese manage to ambush a 1st Marines pa-
trol. The patrol gets snagged, but quickly returns fire
in a fire fight that lasts about twenty minutes before the
Marines make it to the reverse slope of the hill and re-
quest support. While mortars fly into the Communists’
positions, the Marines are able to make their way back
to friendly lines. The Marines sustain four casualties.
The Chinese sustain 13 killed (counted). No estimates
of Chinese wounded are available.
In the 7th Marines zone, the Chinese mount an attack
against Outpost Frisco, but the contingent, estimated
at the strength of a squad, is repelled. Later, due to the
high casualties sustained over the past few days at the
contested outposts, the 7th Marines take steps to rein-
force the perimeter (MLR) in its sector.
 879
At 1200, the zone held by the 3rd Battalion, which
had sustained high casualties, is divided into two sec-
tors. The 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, assumes respon-
sibility for the extreme right, which includes Warsaw
and Verdon. The modifications along the line place all
three battalions at the front, beginning on the left with
the 2nd, followed by the 3rd and 1st Battalions hold-
ing the far left.
In other activity, aircraft attached to Fifth Air Force
and U.S. Navy units aboard carriers combine to launch
an attack against Loeyang, where elements of the Chi-
nese 67th Army are deployed.
October 6 In the I Corps sector, the Chinese
mount a full scale assault to gain Hill 281 in the east-
ern sector and nearby Hill 395, the elevation on the
left flank of IX Corps at the boundary with I Corps. At
Hill 281, the Communists encounter the French Bat-
talion, which meets the attack with brute strength and
returns fire as rapidly as the enemy appeared on the
slopes. The initial two companies ascending the hill are
soon joined by two more, but still, the French refuse to
surrender any ground. The Chinese commit two addi-
tional companies into the fight, but still, the French
maintain their positions and intensify their return fire.
While the French pour continuous fire into the ranks
of the attackers, more enemy troops are killed, and yet,
others continue to advance and more troops join the
struggle. By dawn, an entire enemy regiment is pound-
ing the French positions, but finally, after sustaining
extremely high casualties, the Communists disengage.
Meanwhile, at Hill 395, the fighting remains heavy
throughout the night into the following day, but at
dawn, although the ROK 9th Division retains posses-
sion, the Chinese remain on the attack. By early after-
noon, a reinforced attack by the Chinese carries the po-
A 90-mm gun motor carriage in action at Hill 395 (White Horse) northwest of Ch’orwon during Octo-
ber.
October 6, 1952
sition. The ROKs withdraw and afterward mount a de-
termined counterattack and recapture the hill. Never-
theless, the Chinese mount subsequent attacks, until
12 October, against Hill 281 and at Hill 395. A see-saw
battle continues until 10 October. At the conclusion
of the engagements, Hills 281 and 395 are under the
possession of the ROKs.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 7th Marines
mounts an attack to retake Outpost Seattle, which the
Chinese had seized on 2 October. The contingent, a
reinforced platoon (Company C, 1st Battalion, 1st
Marines), moves out at 0600, but enemy mortar and ar-
tillery fire prevent the detachment from reaching the
objective. Shortly thereafter, reinforcements advance
to support the attack, but still, the enemy firepower
prevents the attack from gaining the hill. Air support ar-
rives to bolster the ground assault, but the Chinese are
not dislodged. Following about five hours of tenacious
fighting, the Marines disengage at 1100. The mission
costs the 1st Battalion 12 killed and 44 wounded. The
enemy casualties are estimated at 44.
Later, at about dusk, the Chinese take the offensive
by initiating an artillery and mortar bombardment that
strikes five regimental outposts. The enemy also pounds
two locations along the MLR. In conjunction with the
massive shelling, the Communists launch ground at-
tacks against all of the objectives that had been under
artillery assault.
The land forces strike at 1930 while the artillery
bombardment continues, and by midnight (6th-7th),
about 4,500 rounds strike 7th Marines positions. At
Warsaw, on the far right, the Marines receive punish-
ing fire and for a while, communications are severed
between the outpost and the MLR. However, by about
2000, the communications are restored. While under
assault, friendly artillery delivers “Box-Me-In” fire to
October 7, 1952
provide a buffer. The Marines, all the while, repel the
attack and by about 2235, the Chinese disengage.
In the meantime, at Outpost Carson on the far left
(west), the fighting subsides by 2050 as the Chinese
disengage. The adjacent outpost to the east, Outpost
Reno, holds off the attack, which ceases slightly before
2300. The cost of holding Reno and Carson climbs to
12 wounded and no fatal casualties.
Two other outposts, Detroit and Frisco, receive the
brunt of the Chinese assaults. At the former, the Chi-
nese attack at 1900 in company strength and fail to
gain Detroit, but later at 2100, a new assault makes
gains. Support fire arrives from the 11th Marines, but
in the midst of the fighting at close quarters, the com-
munications between the outpost and the MLR are cut
off. Reinforcements rush to the beleaguered outpost,
but enemy fire prevents the unit from reaching it.
Meanwhile, the MLR comes under attack and at about
the same time, distress calls requesting artillery (variable
time fuse shells) are heard on the radio from the de-
fenders at Detroit.
The Marine artillery, for a while, halts the attack,
but other reinforcements are unable to reach Outpost
Detroit due to intense enemy artillery fire. Suddenly, at
0115, the Chinese again pound against the outpost and
once more are halted by friendly artillery. Neverthe-
less, the artillery fails to force a withdrawal.
Meanwhile, the communications picked up from the
outpost are the voice of Chinese. A detachment is dis-
patched to reconnoiter the area and returns at 0355
with news that the outpost had fallen. The garrison,
except for two wounded Marines who manage to escape,
falls to the Communists. Following ten brutal hours of
combat, the Marines disengage, leaving the outpost to
the Chinese.
Meanwhile, the fighting continues at Frisco, manned
by Company H, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines. The
enemy attacks at 2000 and advances to the trenches,
but the Marines repel further progress. At 2130, a con-
tingent of the enemy penetrates, but friendly artillery
again arrives to push the Chinese back. At slightly after
midnight (6th-7th), a third attempt to eliminate the
outpost is launched and again, the trench-line is
pierced. The first group of reinforcements are barred
from reaching the outpost by artillery fire, but afterward,
during the early morning hours of the 7th, elements of
Company H and Company I rush to bolster the out-
post and maintain a counterattack to ensure the
Marines hold the hill. During the gruesome night fight-
ing, a reserve company dispatches a reinforced platoon
(Company I) and it tips the balance.
By 0715, all Chinese are driven from the area, giv-
ing the Marines control of Outpost Frisco. Nonetheless,
victory at Frisco brings no jubilation. The position
must be reinforced due to its present untenable position-
ing. Instead, during the afternoon of the 7th, it is de-
cided to abandon the hill. During the two-day fight
for the outposts, the 7th Marines sustains 10 killed,
105 wounded seriously and another 23 with superficial
wounds. Also, 22 are reported missing (includes Out-
880
post Detroit). The Marines estimate Chinese casual-
ties at 200 killed and an unknown number of
wounded.
In other activity, the Communists move against the
third and final primary outpost manned by the 1st Ko-
rean Marine Corps Regiment. The assault is launched
at 2200 and by midnight (6th-7th), the S.K. Marines
lose the hill. The South Koreans regroup and mount a
counterattack during the early morning hours of the
following day and regain the hill prior to dawn.
Nonetheless, the Chinese begin an artillery and mortar
barrage that pushes the Marines from the hill.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the Chinese launch a se-
ries of attacks against the ROKs at two separate hills
and against an outpost, each on the left flank of the
ROK Capital Division. The Chinese are unable to gain
the two hills, but the outpost in the center of the line
is seized. The struggle for the outpost remains active
throughout the month, but the South Koreans are able
only to reach positions within about 300 yards from
the summit. As October fades, the Chinese maintain
domination of the outpost.
In other activity, Major Alexander J. Gillis, the com-
manding officer of Marine Squadron VMF-311, ends
his tour with a bang. While on a mission, the flight is
intercepted by MiGs. Major Gillis downs two of the
MiGs, but he, too, is shot down in the process. Gillis
is rescued, but not until he spends four hours in the
Yellow Sea.
October 7 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, a prolonged battle for outposts in the 7th
Marines sector closes this day with the Marines hold-
ing Frisco, but concluding that without reinforcements,
the position is untenable. The outpost is abandoned.
Since the beginning of October, the Communists have
gained six outposts in the Marines’ sector, OP 37, 36
and 86 (left flank) in the 1st South Korean Marine
Corps Regiment sector and Outposts Detroit, Frisco
and Seattle.
The gains give the Chinese positions from which
they can harass and threaten Jamestown Line and in
the terrain east of the Sachon River, the Communists
are able to carry out patrols without Marine interfer-
ence. The Communists inadvertently receive additional
help from the U.N., as the Marines, as well as the re-
mainder of Eighth Army, are forbidden from initiat-
ing any major offensives.
Also, during the fighting at Outpost Frisco during the
night of the 6th-7th, while the Chinese banged against
the 7th Marines, Sergeant Lewis G. Watkins, Com-
pany I, 3rd Battalion, while wounded and leading an
attack against a machine gun nest, finds himself a re-
cipient of an enemy grenade that drops in the midst of
his contingent. Watkins grabs the grenade, but before
he can toss it back, it explodes, killing him. Sergeant
Watkins becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor,
posthumously, for his extraordinary courage saved the
lives of his fellow Marines.
Also, the Communists’ gain of the outposts activates
 881
their quest to gain even more. Those they pursue are lo-
cated in the sector of the 7th Marines, the far right bat-
talion along the division front. However, for a short
while, another period of quiet overcomes the battle-
field, while the Chinese prepare to strike with strength.
In Air Force activity, carrier aircraft join once again
with planes of Fifth Air Force to launch an attack
against enemy positions. On this date, the strike is
against the Chinese 26th Army, which is deployed in the
vicinity of Yongpyong-ni.
In Naval activity, on this date, the battleship USS
Iowa (BB 61) fires its 4,000th 16-inch round during its
service in Korea.
In other activity, planes attached to TF 77 come
under attack on two separate occasions by MiGs in the
vicinity of Wonsan and Hungnam. Neither side sus-
tains any losses. In another encounter, one MiG-15 at-
tacks a four-plane contingent of F4Us south of Hung-
nam and downs one of the F4Us.
October 8 At Panmunjom, the U.N. representa-
tives again sense the Communists are simply marking
time rather than engaging in serious talks. The senior
representative, General William K. Harrison, after sug-
gesting several ways of solving the POW exchange
problem and having them ignored, calls a recess in the
talks. General Harrison assumed his position during
the previous May when he succeeded Admiral Turner
A U.S. helicopter (USMC) arrives at Panmunjom, where the truce talks have been reinitiated.
October 8, 1952
Joy. Talks resume toward the latter part of the year to
solve the stand-off, but no solution is agreed upon until
the following year, subsequent to the death of Joseph
Stalin.
In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, the ROK
8th Division retains control of Hill 281, but between
this day and the 12th, the Chinese continue to sporad-
ically attempt to seize it. At Hill 395, the Chinese
mount a counterattack and seize the hill. It is the fourth
time Hill 395 has changed possession since 6 October.
The ROKs regroup to form for a new counterattack.
Heavy fighting continues at Hill 385 for the following
two days. The Chinese hold their positions and ham-
mer the South Koreans, but the attack maintains its in-
tensity and on the 10th, the ROKs regain the crest and
drive the Chinese off. In the meantime, artillery fire
begins to bolster the ROKs and a Chinese counterat-
tack by two battalions fails to dislodge the South Ko-
reans.
In Air Force activity, planes attached to the 98th
Bomber Wing launch a daylight attack in coordination
with the amphibious diversion feint. The strikes against
Kowon are in conjunction with carrier planes that are
part of the strike force.
In other activity, a huge attack force — composed of
11 B-29s (Far East Bomber Command) and 89 aircraft
attached to TF-77 — strikes the enemy rail complex at
Kowon. The bombers deliver VT fused 500-pound
October 9, 1952
cluster bombs. The Air Force records ten B-29s in the
attack rather than eleven.
October 9 In the I Corps and IX Corps sectors, the
battle for control of Hill 385 continues. The ROK 9th
Division is unable to regain Hill 395 (IX Corps) and at
Hill 281, the French battalion continues to hold. On
10 October, the South Koreans again attack to regain
Hill 395.
In Air Force activity, Communist communication
complexes located in the vicinity of Huichon and in
the area that stretches from there to the bomb line in
front of Eighth Army come under heavy attack by
fighter-bombers.
In related activity, Fifth Air Force planes execute
close-air support sorties that strike enemy positions and
halt the units from joining an ongoing attack in the IX
Corps sector.
In Naval activity, it is reported that 14 North Korean
PT boats have been spotted in Unggi Bay, which is the
norththernmost inlet on the east coast of Korea. In
other activity, enemy shore gun batteries near Songjin
commence fire upon the USS Carmick (DMS 33). Five
separate batteries propel 80 rounds toward the Carmick
and all miss the mark. In yet other activity, planes at-
tached to TF 77 fly 91 missions in support of X Corps
troops, in an attempt to dislodge and destroy en-
trenched Communist forces.
October 10 In the I Corps sector, the South Ko-
rean 8th Division, after two days of fighting, mounts
a counterattack that regains the crest of Hill 395. The
South Koreans immediately bolster their positions and
with the support of artillery turn back a Chinese coun-
terattack. One battalion of the 9th Division, supported
by tanks, advances and gains high ground north of the
hill to add a buffer. Subsequently, the South Koreans
push further and by 15 October, gain ground up to
one thousand yards in front of the hill, ending the Chi-
nese attempts to recapture it.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of F-84s, escorted
by four F-8s, moves against a target at the mouth of
the Yalu River. The Sabres are led by Captain Robin-
son Risner (336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron). Just
prior to reaching the target zone, Risner, with author-
ization from his commanding officer, radios a code to
his flight members instructing them to turn of their
IFF (friend or foe identification) in the event they are
compelled to cross the river. At the target, MiGs are
spotted as they climb for higher elevation. Meanwhile,
the MiGs detect the F-86s and the battle erupts, with
the Sabres forced to cross the Yalu. Risner maneuvers
to the rear of a MiG, but his fire does not take it down.
More fire is poured upon the MiG, but still the enemy
pilot evades harm.
Nonetheless, Risner stays on his tail as the MiG
heads for Antung, Risner’s wingman, Joe Logan, follows
to protect Risner’s plane. As the chase continues, the
pilot in the MiG rolls and flies upside down, passing just
over the trees, and then both planes are flying side by
side with each able to see the other’s eyes. Risner, again
882
to the rear, chases the MiG directly through a space
that separates two hangars and then, with more fire,
the MiG finally explodes.
Risner and Logan find themselves in the midst of a
lot of enemy flak. Both planes break for the south. Ris-
ner remains unscathed, but Logan’s plane is badly dam-
aged (fuel and hydraulic fluid stream). Risner directs
his wing man to maintain his throttle firewalled, then
at great risk to both men, Risner moves to Logan’s rear
and when his fuel is gone, Risner literally pushes the dis-
abled jet toward Chodo. Risner’s risky procedure works!
Both he and Logan return to Chodo and then Logan
bails out after requesting a pick-up.
Risner lands, unaware that Logan ejected safely, but
on the descent, Logan gets caught up in the chute and
drowns before the rescue team reaches him. (See also,
September 21, 1952, In Air Force activity.)
In Naval activity, planes attached to TE-95.11
launch an attack intended to destroy the irrigation sys-
tem that feeds the Communist rice fields on the west
coast of Korea. The aircraft strike the sluice gates located
in the Yonan–Pyongchon region. The damage permits
salt water to flow into the rice paddies.
In other activity, on this date, TG-95.3 is established
for the purpose of patrolling southern Korea (Military
Sea Defense Zone). During the group’s first day in ac-
tion, about 500 Japanese fishing vessels are instructed
to stay clear of the designated zone.
October 11 A tragic accident occurs on the car-
rier USS Kearsarge (CVA 33) when an unexpected and
especially strong wind gust flips an active helicopter
while it is on the deck. The rotor blades kill four crew-
men and another five men on the flight deck are in-
jured.
October 12–16 1952 The Communists at
Kojo suspect a major attack due to increased activ-
ity, as the operation known as the KOJO AMPHIBIOUS
FEINT begins on the 12th. Planes attached to five
separate carriers bolster more than 100 naval surface
warships that give the appearance of preliminary tac-
tics. The impostor exercise is designed to draw
enemy ground forces into the open to present a lu-
crative target for the aircraft and to simultaneously
provide genuine training for the troops who would
be engaged in an amphibious assault. Nonetheless,
the Communists do not take the bait.
In Air Force activity, the 315th Air Division par-
ticipates with the 187th Regimental Combat Team
in a parachute exercise. The paratroops jump as part
of the KOJO AMPHIBIOUS FEINT. The exercise lasts
until the 14th.
October 12 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division
zone, the Chinese attacks against Hill 281, held by the
French Battalion, finally end this day. Their attempts
to seize possession of the hill began on 6 October; how-
ever, none had been successful.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, the 5th Marines re-
lieves the 1st Marines and assumes responsibility for the
 883
Planes (McDonnell Banshee F2H-2Ps) prepare to land on the USS Kearsarge following a mission over
North Korea. The Banshees are twin-engine aircraft capable of flying at high altitudes at a speed of 550
miles per hour.
center of the line, which includes Bunker Ridge. The 1st
Marines moves into reserve.
In the 25th Division zone, a small patrol attached to
the 14th Regiment ventures into enemy controlled ter-
ritory to destroy an outpost, but en route, the detach-
ment from Company L, 3rd Battalion, gets snagged by
an ambush team. The leader of the patrol is wounded
seriously. Another soldier, PFC Ernest E. West, directs
the remainder of the patrol to head back to friendly
lines.
Meanwhile, West maneuvers to the downed patrol
leader and despite heavy fire, reaches him. As West is
about to carry the man to safety, three Communists
carrying grenades begin to close; however, he finds time
to protect the wounded soldier while eliminating the
three enemy troops. The struggle is costly for West. He
becomes wounded and loses one of his eyes. Neverthe-
less, he prevails and brings the wounded patrol leader
back to friendly lines. PFC West becomes a recipient of
the Medal of Honor due to his extraordinary leader-
ship and heroism in the face of a superior enemy force.
In Air Force activity, a downed Sabre jet pilot receives
help from an SA-16 aircraft and a rescue helicopter; he
is retrieved by the helicopter. Soon after, the SA-16
rushes to retrieve another downed pilot at a distance
October 13, 1952
of about 100 miles away in the harbor at Haeju. The
pilot, who was forced to eject when his F-84 caught
fire, is able to hold on in a dinghy until the SA-16 from
the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron arrives, thanks to fight-
ers that remain over the area to keep the enemy at bay.
The pilot is rescued and later returns to his unit, the
69th Fighter Bomber Squadron.
Also, Far East Air Forces launches an attack against
enemy positions on the Haeju peninsula. The raid, car-
ried out by twenty-six B-29s on October 12–13, strikes
nine separate preselected areas where troop concentra-
tions had formed.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries fire upon
a contingent of minesweeping boats operating near
Tongch’on under the protection of the cruiser USS
Toledo (CA 133). The boats report no casualties. Mean-
while, the guns of the Toledo dispatch 24 eight-inch
rounds to the suspected origin point of the fire and ex-
poses three enemy tanks. Later this same day, the Toledo
comes under fire from enemy batteries in the vicinity
of Un-Bong-San; however, the gunners are inaccurate
and no damage is inflicted.
October 13 The Communists launch an air attack
against Seoul and Cho-do Island. This is the first attack
October 14, 1952
against the island on the west coast since it had been
placed under command of the U.S. Marines nearly one
year ago. No casualties are sustained. The air attacks,
carried out by diminutive fabric-covered biplanes, are
referred to as “Bedcheck Charlie” raids.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
7th Marines establish Outpost East Berlin. It and Berlin
are located in the forward position of the 3rd Battalion,
7th Marines. On this day, Lt. Colonel Barrett assumes
command of the 3rd Battalion, replacing Lt. Colonel
Russell. Also, to the far left, Outpost Carson, Reno and
Vegas stand in the sector of the 2nd Battalion about
1,000 yards to the front of the MLR. In the right, the
1st Battalion controls Outpost Warsaw and Verdon and
on 16 October, a new outpost will be established in
the 1st Battalion sector.
In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces and U.S.
Navy carrier planes strike enemy positions in the vicin-
ity of Kojo as part of the KOJO AMPHIBIOUS FEINT.
Simultaneously, naval surface vessels shell Kojo at the
area of the beach where an amphibious invasion would
land.
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS John R. Craig
(DD 885), while operating off the east coast of Korea
near Kijin, fires upon enemy positions and receives re-
turn fire from enemy batteries. The Craig sustains no
damage or casualties; however, the fire from the Craig
terminates the fire coming from the batteries.
In other activity, the USS Toledo (CA 133) again
comes under enemy fire. This day it originates in
the vicinity of Kojo. The marksmanship of the gun-
ners is inaccurate and no damage or casualties are re-
ported. In another incident, enemy guns fire upon
the USS Lewis (DE 535) while she operates near Hung-
nam. The enemy propels 84 rounds toward the Lewis
and all of them miss. In contrast, the gunners on
the Lewis return 214 rounds toward the enemy and
score at least one direct hit while also eliminating the
hostile fire.
In yet other activity, two single-engine planes en-
croach Cho-do, held by friendly forces. The planes
drop 15 bombs, but they do not inflict any casualties
and no damage is reported. The anti-aircraft guns on
Cho-do prove to be less than reliable.
Also, in the vicinity of Kojo, minesweeping boats
come under enemy fire, but no damage is inflicted.
Larger vessels move into the slot to complete the mis-
sion, but the enemy fire intensifies and the ships are
compelled to pull back. The USS Osprey (AMS 28) es-
capes a direct hit, but near misses cause damage and in
addition, four men, including the executive officer, are
slightly injured. Also, the USS Perkins (DDR 877)
avoids a direct hit at Kojo, but it, too, is damaged by
near misses, which propel shell fragments that cause
minor damage. One man is killed and 17 others are
wounded.
Also, carrier planes and Fifth Air Force aircraft strike
Kojo as part of the invasion feint.
October 14 In the IX Corps sector, 7th Division
884
zone, the 31st Regiment and the ROK 2nd Division
commence attacks designed to seize Hills 500 and 598,
both located less than five miles north of Kumhwa and
necessary to control to bolster Kumhwa, the right fin-
ger of the Iron Triangle. Two battalions of the 31st Reg-
iment move out and after encircling Hill 598, the con-
tingents ascend and seize the crest following a ferocious
six-hour fight. Subsequently, the Chinese launch a
night attack and regain the hill.
The battle for domination of the hill resumes on the
following morning, when the 31st Regiment launches
yet another attack, which retakes the hill and seizes two
smaller hills nearby. Nonetheless, the Chinese are un-
willing to concede. The Communists regroup and
mount yet another counterattack and commit two bat-
talions to regain the terrain. The 31st Regiment, how-
ever, meets the charge with massive firepower and pre-
vents the Communists from succeeding. As the sun sets
on the 15th, the Americans control the hill.
During the fighting, PFC Ralph E. Pomeroy, Com-
pany E, 2nd Battalion, 31st Infantry, takes action to
cover his platoon with his machine gun when it comes
under a heavy assault. Pomeroy pours non-stop fire into
the enemy until his gun mount is destroyed by mortar
fire. Pomeroy lifts the weapon and carries it in his arms
to continue firing. He had also been wounded, but he
refuses to relent. He moves directly toward the enemy
position and continues to rain fire upon them until his
ammunition is exhausted at a point about ten yards from
the enemy. Still, he refuses to seek safer positions.
Pomeroy uses the machine gun in unusual fashion: as a
club. He begins to pound the attackers, but soon after,
he is again hit, and it is a mortal wound. PFC Pomeroy
is awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously for his
extraordinary valor in the face of the enemy.
In the meantime, elements of the ROK 2nd Division
launch its attack against Hill 500. The South Koreans
succeed in gaining the objective, but the Chinese con-
test tenaciously. Consequently, the battle for control of
Hill 500 continues until the end of October with pos-
session changing hands frequently. Finally, the South
Koreans prevail and Hill 500 remains under their con-
trol.
In the X Corps sector, 7th Division zone, an attack
is launched by elements of the 31st Regiment to seize
terrain near Kumhwa. Company A advances to posi-
tions about 50 yards from the objective, but at that
point a wall of fire is thrown at it. Lieutenant Edward
R. Schowalter, Jr., the platoon leader, maintains disci-
pline while the 2nd Platoon speeds to the point.
Schowalter becomes wounded during the advance, but
he remains in command and leads the next phase of
the attack.
When Schowalter reaches the crest of the ridge, again
he is wounded. He continues to battle and the enemy
is routed; however, the lieutenant is wounded a third
time. Again he refuses evacuation and continues to di-
rect the attack until the objective is seized. Afterward,
Schowalter is transported back for medical treatment.
Lieutenant Schowalter is awarded the Medal of Honor
 885 October 20, 1952

for his unwavering leadership and fearless courage in the Hook and only 200 yards southeast of the enemy
the face of the enemy. on Seattle.
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns fire upon the
destroyer USS O’Brien (DD 725) as it maneuvers off October 18 In the IX Corps sector, 7th Division sec-
Kojo, but none of the 30 rounds hit the mark. tor, the task of bolstering the positions around Kumhwa
continues. Elements of the 31st Regiment push out
October 15 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division from Hill 598 and advance 1,000 yards, but the Chi-
zone, by this day, the control of both Hill 281 and 395
nese, later this day, initiate a counterattack and regain
are no longer in doubt. The Chinese on 6 October
the ground. They are unable to regain Hill 598, which
launched attacks against Hill 281, the left anchor of I
the 31st has held since the 15th. The Communists at-
Corps, and Hill 395, which protects the left flank of IX
tempt to gain the hill, but the 31st Regiment repels the
Corps. The massive attempt to collapse the IX Corps
attacks. On the 27th, the 31st Regiment at Hill 598 is
flank ends in total failure. The French Battalion holds
relieved by ROK troops.
Hill 281 and the ROK 9th Division retains Hill 395.
In Naval activity, Far East Air Wing 14 reports that
The Chinese sustain 2,000 killed (counted) on the
Chinese Communist LSTs fired at one of its PB4Y-2 air-
slopes of the two hills. The ROK 9th Division reports
craft and inflicted some damage to its starboard wing
that the attacking unit, a reserve division of the 38th
and its number 4 engine.
Chinese Communist Army, had essentially been elim-
In other activity, enemy shore guns at Kosong fire
inated as a battle ready division.
upon the destroyer USS Craig (DD 885). No damage
In the IX Corps sector, the 31st Regiment prevails at
is sustained. Meanwhile, near Sondok, the USS Impec-
Hill 598. (See also, October 14, 1952.)
cable (AM 320) and USS Chief (AM 315) come under
In Air Force activity, as part of the KOJO AMPHIBIOUS
fire, but no damage or casualties occur.
FEINT, thirty-two C-119s attached to the 403rd Troop
Also, enemy guns near Songjin fire about 38 rounds
Carrier Wing depart Taegu and upon their approach
at the USS Yarnall (DD 541) without success; how-
to Ch’orwon, the planes drop to an elevation of 800
ever, no explosion occurs when the shells hit the water,
feet as if to drop paratroops, then the planes return to
which indicates that the ammunition might have been
their base.
armor-piercing.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at Kojo
In related activity, Rear Admiral Lucien A. Moebus,
are again active. The USS Diachenko (APD 123),
chief of Naval Reserve Training, announces that two-
USS Perkins (DDR 877), USS O’Brien (DD 725),
thirds of the air strikes flown from carriers are executed
and the USS Evans (DD 754) receive hostile fire. How-
by reserve Marine and Navy pilots that have been re-
ever, none of the vessels sustain any casualties or dam-
called to duty.
age.
As part of the KOJO AMPHIBIOUS FEINT, a contingent October 19 In the I Corps sector, the 1st British
of troops climb down to assault landing craft. The Commonwealth Division, which recently assumed re-
troops are taken close to shore and then they are re- sponsibility for the Hook, comes under attack at
turned to the ship. (See also, In Air Force activity, this 1900. The enemy force, composed of about battalion
day; and see October 12–16, 1952.) strength, encounters elements of the Black Watch
and Canadian units, which had relieved the U.S.
October 16 In the IX Corps sector, the 40th Di- Marines. Heavy fighting continues until 0430 on the
vision, which has been in IX Corps reserve undergoing
following day, but the Chinese fail to make any gains.
training, receives orders to relieve the U.S. 25th Divi-
The British are supported by I Corps artillery and
sion. After the transfer of responsibility, the 40th Di-
by the 11th Marines, the latter glad to reciprocate for
vision passes to X Corps control.
the earlier help afforded the Marines by the British on
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
26–28 October. The Communists lose more than 100
1st Battalion, 7th Marines, establishes Outpost Ron-
killed.
son, part of a trio that includes Warsaw and Verdon, the
In Naval activity, enemy shore guns at the western
latter being near the 1st Commonwealth Brigade
Haeju approaches fire upon junks manned by friendly
boundary. The establishment of Ronson was necessi-
Koreans. Soon after the barrage begins, the British ves-
tated by the recent loss of Outposts Seattle and War-
sel HMS Morecombe Bay (PF) commences firing at the
saw, which had been responsible for the protection of
origin point of the hostile fire. It propels 24 rounds
the area.
that silence the guns.
Outpost Ronson becomes a key position, as it is clos-
In other activity, the USS Parks (DD 884), subse-
est to the Hook, a primary defensive position of the
quent to being fired upon near Yusong, returns fire and
Marines. The jagged Hook, although important, is also
quickly terminates the hostile fire.
vulnerable as the J shaped terrain in the east flows
northwest into the Communists positions. The Hook October 20 On this day, Fast Carrier Task Force
holds the dominant ground in the sector and holds the (TF-77) forms ECM Hunter-Killer Teams, composed
key to the Samichon Valley, from which the Chinese of two ECM equipped aircraft, four Skyraiders and
can emerge from the northeast on a direct line to Seoul. four Corsairs assigned as escorts. The teams are directed
At Ronson, the Marines stand less than 300 yards from to destroy enemy radar centers.
October 21, 1952
The rockets on an AD Skyraider are examined prior to the plane’s takeoff.
October 21 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, concern regarding artillery ammunition
continues to accelerate in the 7th Marines sector. The
quota allotted for the remainder of the month is placed
at 20 rounds of HE (105-mm high explosive) and 4.3
rounds of 155-mm high explosive for each tube. Lack-
ing ammunition, the Marines revert back to machine
guns, but it becomes evident to the enemy as they ap-
pear and receive no artillery fire.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries at
Hapchinni in Wonsan harbor fire upon two South Ko-
rean vessels, the ROKN AMS 501 and AMS 503. The
886
USS Lewis (DE 535) maneuvers into position and re-
turns fire. During the encounter, the Lewis sustains a
hit in the forward fireroom, starboard side. The dam-
age includes the loss of her No. 1 boiler. Another shell
hits the fantail, causing only slight damage. Neverthe-
less, the vessel loses 7 killed and one other crewman
wounded. The Lewis is able to continue operating.
Prior to pulling out of the area, she had sent 162 rounds
into the enemy positions.
October 23 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, preparations are made to bolster the
 887
defenses at the Hook, by now determined to be the ob-
jective of the Chinese. Enemy artillery fire saturates the
terrain containing the dug-in defenses and continues
at such a devastating rate that the Marines are unable
to make sufficient repairs. As one bunker is fixed, more
shelling destroys another. Nonetheless, the 1st Battal-
ion adapts to the conditions. Company A, 1st Battal-
ion, assumes responsibility for the battalion’s left sec-
tor, which includes the Hook. The commanding
officer, Captain Frederick C. McLaughlin, deploys a
reinforced platoon on Outpost Warsaw. At Ronson, a
squad is deployed.
October 24 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Communists increase activity. Beginning
at 1800, an artillery bombardment commences. More
than 1,200 shells rock the 7th Marines’ zone in a 24-
hour period. In conjunction with the shelling, which
includes mortars, the Marines detect large enemy troop
movements west and northwest of the Hook. The areas
hardest hit are Outposts Ronson and Warsaw, along
with the portion of the MLR in the vicinity of the
Hook. The shelling causes much damage, but more
importantly, it becomes difficult to repair the defenses
because of the enemy fire.
It becomes apparent that the Chinese, who suc-
ceeded earlier in gaining outposts, now have their eyes
set on the Hook. The Marines return fire, but it is shal-
low due to the ammunition shortages. The 7th Marines’
positions are struck with nearly 3,000 rounds by 1800
on the 26th and the great majority of them fall into the
area of the 1st Battalion.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force and Eighth
Army, subsequent to a thirty-day testing period in the
IX Corps, come up with a solution for problems that
occur when close-air missions are executed and artillery
fire ceases. With new flak suppression proficiency, the
artillery is now able to continue to fire while the air
strikes are in progress.
In Naval activity, planes are launched from the car-
riers of TF-77 on a mission to execute a primary at-
tack against Communist rail and supply complexes in
the vicinity of Hyesanjin, which is near the
Manchurian border. After-action reports indicate the at-
tack achieved good results.
In other activity, upon receipt of orders, the 7th Fleet
changes its targets to those located north of the MLR
(main line of resistance).
October 25 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 7th Marines attempt to mount return
fire against a continuing thunderous enemy bombard-
ment, interpreted by the Marines as the first signs of a
massive attack. Although encumbered by shortages of
artillery ammunition and strict quotas, Company A,
1st Tank Battalion, begins to pound enemy positions.
The tanks fire against the enemy 54 times and on the
following day, they fire nearly 175 rounds of high ex-
plosive shells. In concert, the 2nd Battalion, 11th
Marines, fires 575 and 506 rounds on the 25th and
26th, respectively. The Marines also receive support
October 26, 1952
fire from the 4th Battalion, 11th Marines, which fires
just under 200 rounds on the 25th-26th.
Still, the Chinese artillery overshadows the U.S.
guns. Other preparatory support fire arrives from rocket
fire and air support, but the amount of planes is not
overwhelming. Four planes of Marine Squadron VMF-
323 strike a trench-line southwest of the Hook and on
the following day, three other planes of the squadron at-
tack enemy positions on an elevation about 1,000 yards
southwest of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines.
In Air Force activity, B-26s and fighter-bombers at-
tached to Fifth Air Force strike the Kumgang Political
School. The raid inflicts severe damage.
October 26 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, work continues in the vicinity of the Hook
to solidify the defenses in preparation for what is be-
lieved to be an imminent attack against the 7th Marines
by the Chinese. Enemy artillery continues to relent-
lessly bombard the area. At 0410, Company C, led by
Captain Paul B. Byrum, arrives to relieve Company A
on the 1st Battalion’s left sector at the Hook. Mean-
while, Company B, led by Captain Dexter E. Evans,
protects the battalion’s right flank of the main line.
While the Marines prepare, the Chinese are not idle.
During the early morning hours of this day, unknown
to the U.S., Chinese forces move undetected from po-
sitions west of the Hook to an assembly area about one
mile from there. The troops are in close proximity to
where an air strike is delivered by VMF-323, but the
concealed position of the enemy infantry (3rd Battal-
ion, 357th Regiment) remains undiscovered. After
dusk, an enemy contingent strikes the positions of the
11th Marines at a forward outpost. While the outpost
is bludgeoned with artillery and mortar fire, ground
troops close on the position.
Meanwhile, Lieutenant Sherrod E. Skinner, Jr.,
aware of the imperative need to keep the communica-
tions open with the MLR, takes action to preserve the
position and the surviving defenders. Skinner contin-
ues to use the radio to call upon artillery to blast the ap-
proaching Communists, but his radio goes silent. He
leaves his position to maintain order in the cramped
perimeter and also directs the machine gunners. The
ammunition begins to run out as the night progresses.
Skinner is able, with the survivors, to forestall the
enemy for about three hours before the overwhelming
numbers of the enemy overrun the position. Skinner
orders his troops to feign death and the ruse works.
Enemy troops even search the imposter corpses. How-
ever, afterwards, one of the Communists tosses a
grenade into the bunker. Lt. Skinner, the twin brother
of another Marine officer, blankets the grenade with
his body, which costs him his life, while he saves the
lives of the others in the bunker. Two Marines survive
and Lt. Skinner becomes the recipient of the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his extraordinary heroism
under fire.
In the X Corps sector, the Communists launch an at-
tack against the perimeter of the 40th Division. The
October 26, 1952
enemy is met by fire from the 160th Infantry Regiment
(Companies F and G). The attack is repelled.
October 26–28 1952 BATTLE OF THE
HOOK Throughout the 26th, the Chinese take meas-
ures to remain out of sight — until about 1800. At
that time, the 7th Marines, one squad on Ronson,
comes under attack from two sides. The diminutive
force is overwhelmed. No one escapes. Shortly there-
after, Outpost Warsaw about 600 yards northeast of
Ronson is besieged. The defenders come under as-
sault from the east and west simultaneously. How-
ever, the Marines return a hurricane of fire and
within minutes, artillery fire shatters the ground to
their front, but the Chinese continue to advance
through the ring of fire. The assault troops arrive in
the midst of their own artillery, which causes some
of them to die before they can be fired upon by the
Marines.
Suddenly, it is the Marines themselves who are the
only line of defense as Chinese charge the bunkers.
U.S. Marines take machine gun ammunition to the
Hook.
888
The Marines respond desperately, but with great dis-
cipline, using their bayonets as well as the butts of
their rifles to halt the invaders. As they swing their
rifles, toss grenades and lunge their bayonets into the
enemy, they are unable to eliminate the horde. A
brutal gruesome three minutes passes when at 1907,
the Marine radio man calls out: “We’re being over-
run.” At that moment, the radio goes dead.
With Ronson gone and apparently, Warsaw, too,
the situation along the 1st Battalion positions at the
Hook appear grim. Nonetheless, the 7th Marines
maintain discipline. All the while, the enemy ar-
tillery is increasing its already relentless fire on the
Hook. This new acceleration forces the restrictions
on Marine artillery fire to be lifted. At 1859, rein-
forcements (Company A) are rushed to the Hook to
bolster Company C in its efforts to halt the attack.
However, just after the first platoon departs, the Chi-
nese strike the MLR at the Jamestown Line.
The initial assault is followed by a second wave
that presses hard and builds great pressure against
the line. The onslaught plows into the area slightly
east of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, and at the
Hook. The line becomes greatly imperiled as the
momentum pushes the Chinese into the Marines’
trenches and upon the crest of the ridge. Close-
quartered fighting erupts as the Marines attempt to
close the flood gates. However, the Chinese continue
to pour into the area and force the Marines to pull
back. Rear guard troops maintain a steady stream of
cover fire to keep the Chinese from overwhelming the
forces in retreat.
Meanwhile, back at Warsaw, all had not been lost.
At 1944, radio reports are picked up that the Marines
at Warsaw are still holding out and that the Chinese are
right atop the beleaguered bunkers. Artillery fire is
called upon by the Marines with instructions to strike
their own positions. The 11th Marines immediately
respond, to forestall disaster with the risk of blasting
their fellow Marines. In the meantime, the main thrust
of the Chinese attack continues to receive heavy ar-
tillery and mortar support as it drives forward to col-
lapse the Jamestown Line in the 7th Marines zone.
While the Marines remain under pressure from
the assault, some Chinese maneuver to positions
about 400 yards south of the Hook and slither
around the flanks and pierce the defenses of Com-
pany C, 1st Battalion. Here, Lt. John W. Meikle, 1st
Platoon, forms a defensive perimeter close to the
MLR, while other Marines form a defensive line near
the crest, about 500 yards east of the Hook. Meikle’s
contingent is joined by the vanguard of Company
A, which had set out just before the Chinese struck
the MLR. The remainder of Company A is moving
toward the crest of the east-west ridge to meet what
is expected to be the point upon which the enemy
places his main thrust. The entire area is engulfed
with vicious combat, but by 2330, it is apparent that
the defenders at Warsaw have fallen and there is no
good news at any point along the line.
 889
All units are battling to halt the attack, while si-
multaneously, they prepare to counterattack to re-
gain all lost ground. At Warsaw, the 11th Marines
open up with a huge barrage to makes things un-
comfortable for the Chinese there and to keep their
momentum unstable in front of the outpost. Other
steps taken include air support. Marine pilots are
able to provide some assistance, as two planes on
separate sorties at 2113 and 2306 blast enemy posi-
tions. The Marines defenses are also bolstered by
tanks, which begin to fire upon the enemy’s main
line at about 1930.
Although the Chinese had initiated their attack,
still other contingents remain in concealed positions,
but Marine intelligence for some time had been an-
ticipating the enemy offensive and concluded that
the Chinese focus would fall upon the outposts of
the 2nd Battalion rather than the 1st Battalion. The
calculations and estimated plan of targets proves to
be accurate as the combat continues to unfold across
the area. Prior to 1800, the starting point of the
enemy artillery, Marine artillery units had been re-
deployed to support the 2nd Battalion.
In addition, the usual night ambush contingent
scheduled to deploy near Reno is given extra fire
power by increasing it from a squad to a full pla-
toon. The ambush platoon, drawn from Company E,
moves from the MLR slightly after dusk and in a
while establishes its hidden positions several hun-
dred yards from Combat Outpost Reno.
While the Hook is under heavy attack, the invis-
ible Marines hold their positions in absolute silence
for the long wait that might snag an enemy patrol.
Their patience is rewarded at midnight, but it takes
a while longer for the extraordinary benefits derived
from the mission to be realized.
The tranquil appearance on the darkened Korean
terrain as Chinese forces approach Combat Outpost
Reno to strike it from the rear is an illusion. The
Communists had remained out of sight for the day
and even as they approach to spring the attack, their
presence goes unnoticed, until midnight. Nearby,
the Marines holding camouflaged positions detect
some slight noises in the distance, raising the possi-
bility that an enemy patrol might be encroaching,
but the Marines do not stir. Soon after, the noises
pinpoint Chinese contingents that are slowly mov-
ing to form for an attack against Reno. The Marines
hold quietly, but word of the enemy’s presence is ra-
dioed to alert the defenders at Reno. Meanwhile, the
Chinese remain under surveillance by the ambush
platoon, which still refrains from firing.
Just as it appears that the Chinese are ready to
strike, the Marines open fire. The sudden wall of fire
pounds the Chinese and derails their concentration.
The ambush platoon maintains a steady stream of
deadly fire as the Chinese attempt to reorganize to
take out the ambush platoon, but instead, the Chi-
nese become lucrative targets for the two squads of
Marines at Reno. The combined fire strikes like a
October 26, 1952
Korean rainstorm. Unable to react with any type of
counterattack, the disorganized Chinese finally are
able to regroup after the pernicious ten-minute river
of fire to escape further harm. The ambush platoon
thwarts the two-company attack against Reno. Al-
though the outpost is not hit with a major attack, be-
fore dawn on the 27th, the Chinese make another
attempt.
At 0400 on the 27th, the Marines at Reno find
themselves the recipients of a determined attack, one
quite different from those previously executed by the
Communists against the Marines since they arrived
in West Korea. The first wave moves against them
from the northeast, but it is just the vanguard of a se-
ries of rolling waves, one after the other, that pounds
against the outpost. The Marines, however, react ac-
cordingly by increasing their fire to accommodate
the enemy and crack the spinal column of the on-
slaught.
The first wave is shredded and the second receives
equally heavy fire, but some Chinese are able to pen-
etrate the wall of fire. The Marines are compelled to
seek cover in the bunkers to regroup and call for ar-
tillery fire. Soon the sky is full of incoming artillery
fire that descends ferociously on the Chinese just as
they are on open ground. The cloudburst of shells
drives the Chinese back and preserves the outpost. By
0440, the Chinese call it a day.
In the meantime, the menacing attack continues
to threaten the Marine domination of the Hook. At
slightly after midnight (26th-27th), Company A,
2nd Battalion, which had been earlier dispatched,
finally joins up with Company C at the Hook and
passes through to protect the line from the crest of
Hill 146. Just after passing Company C, the enemy
commences fire against the vanguard, but it is fol-
lowed right after by artillery and mortars that pound
the remainder of Company A. The fire is too intense
to move farther.
The commander, Captain Fred C. McLaughlin,
halts the attack temporarily to find a way to clear the
obstacles. After a short halt, the attack is resumed,
but yet again, intense enemy artillery fire prevents
progress. The Marines suspend the attack and dig in
to await support. The situation of the beleaguered
company is relayed back to the regimental command
post. Colonel Thomas Moore reaches into his final re-
serve unit, Company H, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines,
and orders it to speed to the 1st Battalion’s positions,
report to the commander there and then move for-
ward to relieve the pressure of Company A by hop-
ping over it and maintaining the attack.
When the attack by Company H takes off, Lieu-
tenant George H. O’Brien, Jr., is at the front. He
bolts from his position as he yells to his troops to
follow him, and they are right on his heels. As the de-
tachment encroaches on the enemy positions,
O’Brien is hit by automatic weapons fire from close
range. Undaunted, he jumps up from his prone po-
sition and continues to lead his Marines straight into
October 26, 1952
the enemy. O’Brien pauses briefly to aide one of his
Marines then bolts to the bunker and begins to fire
as he also throws grenades into the bunker. He drives
against the enemy and in the process is interrupted
three times from the concussion of enemy grenades.
Still, O’Brien refuses medical aid. O’Brien and his
command pound against the enemy for about four
hoursbefore he instructs his force to establish a de-
fense to meet an anticipated counterattack. After-
ward, another contingent relieves O’Brien’s force and
resumes the attack. Meanwhile, the Chinese con-
tinue to penetrate at various spots along the line,
particularly along the MLR, where it winds eastward
from the Hook and along the ridge that leads toward
Hill 146. The Chinese, by this time, control about
one mile along the line. The penetrations also pro-
vide them with a pathway to the 3rd Battalion
boundary southwest of the Hook.
During the incursion along the MLR, the Chi-
nese overrun an outpost bunker in the sector of Bat-
tery F, 2nd Battalion, 11th Marines. The Marines
in the bunker are ordered by Lieutenant Sherrod E.
Skinner to feign death. Chinese troops inspect the
bunker and are fooled by the ruse, which gains more
time for the defenders and permits them to continue
to call in artillery on the Chinese positions. Other
Chinese follow and they, too, are fooled, but one sol-
dier tosses a grenade into the midst of the Marines,
causing casualties (See also October 26, 1952).
At 0505, after having been attached to the 1st Bat-
talion, Company H (3rd Battalion) arrives at the 1st
Battalion CP. Within about forty minutes, the unit
advances to the positions of Company A, where its
leader, Captain Bernard B. Belants, confers with
Captain McLaughlin and afterward drives forward to
reach the ridgeline and resume the assault.
By 0800, Company H stands at the ridgeline and
moves to drive to the salient from the summit of Hill
146. The attack commences as the Marines descend
directly into the guns of the Chinese, who open up
with small arms fire and mortars as the Marines ad-
vance to about two hundred yards from the jump
off point on the crest. Captain Belants yells the order
to attack.
In a flash, an Irish Texan, Lieutenant George H.
O’Brien, bolts from his prone position and calls,
“Follow me!” With O’Brien at the point, his platoon
follows to keep the pace at full throttle, despite
a lack of sleep. To the front of the enemy’s main
trench, an enemy shell strikes O’Brien and he
instantly hits the ground, but in another instant, he
is back on his feet and again on the charge, with
hand grenades at the ready. He closes on the objec-
tive, but again, the enemy halts his progress by
wounding one of his Marines. O’Brien stops to give
aid to the wounded man and afterward, he renews his
charge.
Just as he is about to toss a grenade, Chinese fire
again halts his progress. He changes to his carbine and
liquidates the stumbling block and almost as an af-
890
terthought, releases the grenades. The bunker is si-
lenced, but not O’Brien. He and his platoon lunge
forward toward the Hook but run into yet another
wall of artillery fire before the bunker can be over-
run. The protective artillery fire of the Communists
preserves the bunker, but the devastation inflicted
by Company H is sufficient to disrupt the Chinese
momentum. However, the Chinese artillery is un-
deterred. The troops of Company H come under a
ferocious attack that compels them to withdraw.
Lieutenant O’Brien becomes a recipient of the Medal
of Honor for his exceptional gallantry and courage in
the face of the enemy.
During daylight on the 27th, Marine air
squadrons arrive overhead to support Company H
and inflict some pain on the Chinese positions. Four
planes of VMA-121 fly over enemy-held Outpost
Seattle at 0840 and deliver a bountiful supply of
bombs and napalm that interrupts the troops assem-
bling there as they prepare to move to the Hook.
Another former Marine outpost, Irene, is also vis-
ited by Marine pilots. Four planes from VMA-323
arrive overhead at about 0940 and drop 4,000
pounds of napalm and more than 6,000 pounds of
bombs on the Chinese assembled there. Other con-
tingents of Chinese troops known to be moving
against the Jamestown Line are caught by planes of
VMA-212. The troops are bombed and strafed as
they advance along the MSR. Later, 30 planes par-
ticipate in eight separate strikes prior to dusk.
While the Marines continue to maneuver to re-
gain the ground that had been lost and as they con-
tinue to halt the Chinese advance, they receive other
support fire. Two tanks of Company A, 1st Tank
Battalion, point their guns toward several enemy tar-
gets, including Seattle, where a 76-mm gun contin-
ues to impede Marine operations. The guns also pivot
to pound enemy positions southwest of the Hook.
During one of the attacks by planes of VMA-312,
the Marines, at 1440, observe first-hand the usual
old fashioned delivery system of a Marine pilot fly-
ing close-air support. The pilot dives and unleashes
the napalm from an elevation of fifty feet. Other
support fire originates from the 2nd and 4th Battal-
ions, 11th Marines, and from the rocket battery.
While the enemy is overwhelmed by the artillery and
air units, the Marines lay out the final plans for re-
taking the ground with a determined frontal assault.
By about noon, Company I’s 1st Platoon (3rd
Battalion, 1st Marines) passes through the command
post of Company C and heads directly to the sum-
mit of the ridge from where the units initiate their at-
tack, supported by fire from the 11th Marines and
opposed by tenacious enemy artillery and a well en-
trenched contingent deployed along the perimeter
of the Hook. Nonetheless, the Marines grind for-
ward, slowly but methodically. The path is strewn
with obstacles being thrown at the advancing
Marines with great tenacity, but the Marines plod
forward, taking casualties as they press ahead.
 891
By about 1635, the Marines reach positions on
the ridge at a forward artillery observation post
bunker, but still short of the summit. All the while,
enemy artillery continues to strike, but not only at
the attacking force. It reaches as far to the rear as the
command post, but still, the Marines persist and re-
fuse to grant the ground to the Communists. By
about 1700, the vanguard reaches the trenches and
halts to await troops still trailing.
The Chinese continue to monitor the advance and
as the Marines pause, yet another barrage strikes the
trenches, prompting the troops to seek more tenable
positions. The small group of Marines, unwilling to
remain targets, bolts for the reverse slope with the
remainder of the platoon. Nearby, about 250 yards
to the right, the main body of the company holds
on the reverse slope, waiting for a pause in the bom-
bardment for the opportunity to break for the final
run to evict the Chinese from the Jamestown Line
and repossess their lost ground.
While they wait, the enemy artillery continues to
pound the positions, yet no move is made to retreat.
In the meantime, another unit is en route to aug-
ment the repossession mission, but the trek is dan-
gerous even without the enemy artillery, as the moon
is completely obscured, and in the total darkness, it
is difficult to notice the countless shell holes that
permeate the route.
Elements of Company B, 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, arrive at positions near Company I at about
midnight (27th-28th). The first unit to position it-
self for attack is the vanguard of the 1st Platoon;
however, the 3rd Platoon also closes on its position.
Just after midnight, at 0019, the Chinese along
the trench line (Hook) on the part of the Jamestown
Line they had seized on the 26th, are greeted with the
unwelcome sounds of Marines’ rifles, machine guns
and grenades.
As the Marines nudge forward, more of the enemy
positions are silenced, but always, more take their
place. The main objectives at the trenchline remain
obstinate and the defenders pour punishing fire to-
ward the Marines. Although the moon is obscured,
the night sky over the Hook is constantly illumi-
nated by streaks of tracer fire and the burst of ar-
tillery shells, amidst the constant clack-clack of the
machine guns and rifle fire. After about 90 minutes
of grueling combat, the Marines halt the attack,
move back somewhat and call for some heavy fire to
plaster the ridgeline’s pinpointed obstacles. While
the guns and mortars hammer the selected positions,
the guns also layer the approach routes that pass
Outposts Ronson and Warsaw, to keep the passage
free of enemy reinforcements.
While the Marines remain in place, the Commu-
nists receive volley after volley, until about 0340,
when Company B springs from its positions and
commences a charge to reach and seize the ridgeline.
Again, the Chinese raise horrific resistance, but it
lacks the substance to halt the assault. Company B
October 26, 1952
plows into the enemy positions and again, close-
quartered fighting erupts. When it terminates at
0600, the Hook, once again, belongs to the U.S.
Marines.
Work still remains. The Chinese still possess the
former Marine COPs Ronson and Warsaw. With-
out further pause, the 7th Marines complete the mis-
sion. By 0630, Ronson is secured and by 0845, the
Marines retake Warsaw to regain the dominant
ground and prevent further use by the Chinese. The
victors, despite the seizure, receive no time to relax.
The positions must be immediately fortified, but
with dawn, the Marines also receive a natural obsta-
cle, as the Hook is overwhelmed by a dense fog that
impedes the tasks.
Company B assumes responsibility for the major
portion of the Hook; however, the line of the 7th
Marines, south of the Hook, remains under the pro-
tection of Company A and Company C, both of the
1st Battalion, 7th Marines. A platoon from each
company is deployed there. Following the cessation
of the battle, elements of Company B scour the area,
with the exception of the collapsed bunkers and
trenches, in search of enemy killed, but none are dis-
covered. While the inspection of the battlefield con-
tinues and the defenses are repaired and augmented,
the two platoons of Company A and C are relieved,
permitting both units to return to their respective
companies.
The Communist losses climb to more than one
third of an entire battalion. The Marines count 274
killed and 73 wounded, but the estimates of casual-
ties are 494 killed and 370 wounded. The figures
include 22 killed (counted) at Reno, due in great
part to the ambush platoon.
The Marines also sustain high casualties, partic-
ularly with regard to missing Marines. The Chinese
at times had moved right through their own artillery
as it pounded the Marines, which caught some of
the outposts by surprise. The Marines sustain 70
killed and 386 wounded. Of the wounded, 286 are
evacuated for medical treatment. In addition, 37 are
reported missing and of these, it is later learned that
27 had been captured. The loss of the 37 Marines,
most of whom had been seized during the initial at-
tacks against the outposts, becomes the second high-
est number of Marines seized during the Korean
War.
Earlier, during November 1950, more than 40
Marines had been captured when participating in
the operation of Task Force Drysdale. At COP Reno,
9 other Marines had been killed and 49 Marines had
been wounded (29 are evacuated) during the Chinese
diversion operation.
In the aftermath of the struggle, the Marines learn
some lessons from the new tactics that had been im-
plemented by the Chinese during the unsuccessful
bid to claim the Hook. They used layers of troops
by having reserves on the heels of the opening waves,
which enabled them to send the first wave and
October 27, 1952
immediately thereafter, send the second to move be-
yond the first, but the tactic didn’t prove valuable
too often, according to Marine reports, due to the
poor leadership of the units involved.
But more importantly, the Marines now realize
that non-stop efforts to curtail their flow of supplies
has not succeeded. The Chinese continue to control
inexhaustible supplies of artillery shells. In addition,
it is discovered that Chinese speaking fluent English
would stand at a bunker and instruct any Marines in-
side to surrender and when no response was forth-
coming, the Chinese dropped satchel charges and
bangalore torpedoes to destroy them and seal the en-
trances.
Also, the Marines receive additional help during
the contest when the British provide tanks and ar-
tillery support fire. In turn, during mid–November,
the British come under attack at the Hook and the
11th Marines reciprocate by providing artillery sup-
port to help the British thwart the assault.
October 27 In the I Corps sector, elements of the
ROK 2nd Division relieve contingents of the U.S. 31st
Regiment (7th Division) at Hill 598. The U.S. seized the
hill following a see-saw battle on the 14th-15th and
have held it against several subsequent enemy counter-
attacks. The South Koreans are also tested after they
assume responsibility for the hill. They hold firmly until
the 30th, when the Chinese mount a heavy attack.
In Air Force activity, aviation engineers working on
the Seoul Municipal Airport complete a project that
expands and bolsters a heavy-duty runway that is suit-
able for handling combat cargo operations.
In Naval activity, at the bomb line, an enemy con-
tingent in a boat attempts to land behind friendly lines,
but the scheme is discovered by the USS Orleck (DD
886). A contingent from the Orleck boards an armed
boat and heads for the enemy, but the Communists are
able to avoid capture and escape.
In other activity, planes flown by Navy and Marine
pilots of TF-77 carry out 1,122 sorties on this day.
October 28 The USS Orleck (DD 886) is in po-
sition when enemy shore guns near Kojo fire upon the
ROKN YMS 518. The enemy guns are soon given a
response and the rounds from the Orleck silence the
enemy fire. No casualties are sustained by the South
Korean vessel or the Orleck.
In other activity, the USS Mansfield (DD 728) comes
under attack by enemy shore guns at Wonsan, but none
of the 40 rounds succeeds in scoring a hit.
In yet other activity, the carrier USS Oriskany (CVA
34) arrives to join TF-77. On this, its first day in ac-
tion, the Oriskany launches its F9F-5 Panthers, which
make their initial entrance into combat.
October 29 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Chinese, following the defeat at the
Hook, turn their attention to the left flank, defended by
the 1st South Korean Marine Corps Regiment and a
piece of real estate that contains Hill 155, an elevation
892
that stands at a strategic place with a panoramic view of
the nearby Chinese positions and of the spacious Sa-
chon valley. Equally important, Hill 155 holds the flank
of the most prominent ground (Paekhak Hill) in the
entire 1st Marine Division zone, which encompasses
nearly 35 miles.
The Chinese had earlier gained several outposts in the
South Korean sector and the signs of a new offensive
begin on this day at 1800. The Chinese initiate a mas-
sive artillery bombardment to confirm suspicions of an
imminent attack against Outposts 39, 33 and 31 in the
northeast area and Outpost 51 in the southern (west)
half of the MLR. The bombardment follows closely on
the Communists’ failed attempt to seize the Hook in the
U.S. Marines sector.
As the artillery and the tanks that join in the bar-
rage continue to rise to a crescendo by the following
day, the defenders continue to prepare for a ground as-
sault. The ongoing action had been predicted, because
of the past pattern of the Chinese attacks. The Chi-
nese are expected to repeat their actions of early Octo-
ber, expected to switch flanks. Aware that the Chinese
had lost the struggle for the right flank, preparations
are underway to meet the next threat against the oppo-
site flank. The enemy artillery confirms the suspicions.
The bombardment ceases at 1800 on the 30th after
having propelled 1,881 shells into the Korean Marines’
positions, with the greatest number landing at two lo-
cations, COP 39 and COP 33. On the following day,
in synchronization with an assault, another 1,500
rounds ring the perimeter of the South Korean Marines.
October 30 In the IX Corps sector, the ROK 2nd
Division, which assumed responsibility for Hill 598
from the 31st Regiment, 7th U.S. Division, on the
27th, comes under a fierce enemy assault. The momen-
tum of the attack carries the Chinese to the crest and
the South Koreans are driven off the hill. Subsequent
counterattacks to regain the hill fail.
Also, as the prolonged battle for Hill 598 began on 14
October, the ROK 2nd Division had been engaged in a
see-saw battle for Hill 500, another key elevation to con-
trol Kumhwa. By the end of the month, the ROKs are able
to retain the hill. (See also, October 14, 1952.)
October 31 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Communist Chinese maintain an incon-
spicuous presence in the area facing the 1st South Ko-
rean Marine Corps Regiment during the day, but all
the while, they unfold their plan to seize the four key
remaining outposts there. Although the South Kore-
ans, during early October, surrendered ground and
some key outposts, the S.K. Marines on this day are
expecting the attack.
While the Chinese ground troops remain inactive,
the enemy artillery remains quite active. At 2200, the
Chinese commence an eight-minute barrage that
pounds COPs 39, 33, 31 and 51, a signal to the Chi-
nese ground forces to prepare to attack, but in this case,
the South Korean Marines receive the bombardment
as a signal that the Chinese are on the move.
 893
As the guns subside, the attack commences, with
each of the four outposts targeted. The Chinese sweep
in from several directions and strike simultaneously
from the north, west and south. The Korean Marines
at COP 39, the northernmost outpost, become encir-
cled by elements of two separate companies, while the
outpost to the far south, COP 51, is whacked by a four-
company contingent. Other units slam into the two
posts in the center, COPs 33 and 31.
The Chinese at COP 39 are engaged tenaciously by
the defending platoon; however, the superiority in
numbers grants the Chinese an advantage until the pla-
toon receives extra punch from U.S. artillery. Initially,
the Korean Marines are compelled to surrender some
ground, but the fight continues unabated into the early
morning hours of November 1.
By 0410, it is clear that the Chinese fail to seize the
northernmost outpost, the stepping stone to Hill 155.
Their efforts against the other outposts had terminated
with similar results. At COP 31, the Koreans trade
nasty blows with the attackers until 0155, but during
the engagement, no ground is surrendered and the Chi-
nese are forced to retire.
Meanwhile, at nearby COP 33, defended by only
two squads of Korean Marines, the Chinese force,
about company strength, is able to make some progress.
Although the South Koreans give ground, they remain
relentless in their defense and return fierce fire through-
out the night to vanquish the attackers and regain the
ground.
Their determination, backed by artillery fire, equal-
izes the opposing strengths. However, the Chinese con-
tinue to pound the defenses and transform the fight
into close-quartered combat, but still, the Korean
Marines hold their ground.
By 0515, the sounds of vicious battle subside and
all occupied positions of the Chinese are again con-
trolled by the defenders. The Chinese withdraw.
To the south, COP 51 is struck by a two-pronged
assault at the initial point of contact just after 2200,
but here, too, the defenders are prepared. Three enemy
companies drill into the southwest defenses, while
another contingent of company strength drives against
the outpost from the north. The thrust of the assault
seems less intense than assaults against the other
outposts. The initial storm of fire brought upon
the outpost is fierce, but it quickly tails off. By the
early morning hours of 1 November, the pressure
lessens greatly and by 0330, the Chinese abandon the
field, leaving COP 51 under control of the Korean
Marines.
The Chinese fail again to gain any ground and sim-
ilarly to the recent attacks against the Hook, they sus-
tain high casualties. The 1st South Korean Marine
Corps Regiment sustains 50 killed, 86 wounded and
18 missing while defending the four outposts. The Chi-
nese sustain 295 killed (known) 461 wounded (esti-
mated) and 9 POWs.
The Chinese units that participated in the battle in-
clude 3rd Company, 1st Battalion, 581st Regiment; 2nd
November 1, 1952
Company, 1st Battalion, 582nd Regiment; 4th Com-
pany, 2nd Battalion, 584th Regiment; 4th and 6th
Companies, 2nd Battalion, 585th Regiment; and 1st
Company, 1st Battalion, 585th Regiment.
In Naval activity, the South Korean vessel ROKN
PCS 205 comes under fire while it is operating near
Haeju, but no damage occurs.
November 1952 In Air Force activity, dur-
ing encounters with MiGs in November, Sabre jets
knock down 31 MiGs and in the process, three
Sabres are lost.
In Naval activity, Navy and Marine pilots, during
the month of November, execute 7,660 sorties.
The totals are down due to much inclement weather
during the month. In comparison, totals reached
9,438 in September of this year and 11,004 in Oc-
tober.
Also, during November, about one-half of the sor-
ties flown by Fast Carrier Task Force (TF-77) are in
support of ground forces.
In other activity, this month’s interdiction opera-
tion by the ADNs and F4Us eliminates 206 trucks
and inflicts damage on another 274 vehicles. The
majority of the intercepted enemy traffic is along the
routes running southward, during the darkened
hours, from Hamhung to Wonsan. The other most
popular route had been the east-west path from
Wonsan to the enemy’s front lines.
November 1 In Air Force activity, fighter
bombers, attached to Fifth Air Force, strike railroad
bridges at Yongmi-dong.
In other activity, the 61st Troop Carrier Group be-
gins to prepare to complete its tour and return to the
States. It starts to phase out its C-54s from its airlift
operations.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries near
Sinuong fire upon the USS Vammen (DE 644). No
damage is sustained; however, a shell fragment injures
one man. Marine Squadron VMF(N)-513 receives 12
of the new F3D-2 aircraft to bring the squadron to its
full complement. The Fifth Air Force puts the pilots
to work without delay. The night squadron’s
Skyknights begin to escort B-29s on the bombing runs
into North Korea. The enemy planes that had been at-
tacking the bombers begin to evade the Marines’ jets.
The enemy starts to send one plane across the front of
the formation to tease and incite pursuit, while other
MiGs wait to ambush the Marines.
Nevertheless, the Marines’ aircraft contain tail warn-
ing radar, which foils the MiGs before they can come
from the rear to attack without warning. The new
Douglas Skyknights perform admirably and by 31 Jan-
uary, the squadron knocks out five enemy jets and one
piston-operated plane without sustaining any losses.
The first night kill occurs on 3 November.
In other activity, Marine Helicopter Squadron
VMO-6 receives congratulations from the command-
ing officer, 1st Marine Air Wing, for completing
20,000 combat flights since its arrival in Korea.
November 2, 1952
A VMO-6 helicopter landing at a base.
November 2 Planes attached to the carriers USS
Bon Homme Richard (CVA 31) and the USS Oriskany
(CVA 34) of TF-77 launch the first in a series of raids
against the North Korean capital, Pyongyang. Three
raids are carried out in three days.
November 3–4 1952 In the X Corps sector,
the Communists launch an attack against the lines of
the 40th Division in the vicinity of Heartbreak
Ridge. The assault is repulsed and the defenders in-
flict high casualties upon the attacking battalion.
November 3 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, are relieved
on the Hook by the 1st Battalion, Black Watch, 29th
Infantry Brigade. The transfer of responsibility termi-
nates Marine deployment at that part of the Jamestown
Line.
In other activity, a sergeant on a night mission picks
up an apparent enemy aircraft on his intercept radar. He
loses contact, but afterward, regains it. The sergeant
passes the information to the pilot, who in turn spots
the exhaust stream of the plane. Soon after receiving
the okay, he pulls the trigger and a short volley of 20-
mm shells hits the aircraft. The enemy plane explodes
and crashes on Sinuiju Airfield. The pilot, Major
William T. Stratton, Jr., and Master Sergeant H.C.
Hoglind receive credit for the initial enemy jet downed
by airborne intercept radar. Major Stratton had been fly-
ing one of the new Douglas Skyknights.
In other activity, a Marine pilot flying an F3D en-
gages and downs a Yak-15 Jet.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries near Cho-
do mount a bombardment against the minesweeper USS
894
Condor (AMS 5); however, no damage or casualties
occur. In another incident, enemy guns located south
of Chaho fire upon the destroyer USS Uhlmann (DD
687) while the Uhlmann is targeting enemy positions.
Enemy ground forces join in the attack and fire machine
guns and mortars. A total of about 160 rounds target
the ship and of these, three hits occur. The vessel re-
ceives some damage and 13 crewmen are wounded.
November 4 In Air Force activity, reconnaissance
planes that had flown over Yongmi-dong determine that
three railroad bridges targeted in raids of 1 November are
back in operable condition. The Communists are also
working on two bypass bridges and the photographs
show they are nearly finished with the project.
— In the United States: Dwight D. Eisenhower,
having campaigned on a promise to seek an end to the
Korean War, is elected president of the United States.
November 5 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, Colonel Thomas C. Moore is succeeded by
Colonel Loren E. Haffner as commanding officer, 7th
Marines.
In other activity, a typhoon hits Okinawa and can-
cels all scheduled B-29 flights.
November 6 Far East Air Forces confirms the
presence of 15 IL-28 twin-engine light jet bombers in
Manchuria. The planes are capable of striking any point
in Korea. Up to this point, the primary threat to the F-
86 bases in Korea had been the MiG-15s.
In the IX Corps sector, 3rd Infantry Division zone, the
Chinese again take advantage of Eighth Army’s limita-
tions on offensive actions. They launch an attack against
 895
a slimly garrisoned outpost in the 3rd Division zone and
seize it. Afterward they try to seize positions in the 7th Di-
vision zone, in the area guarded by the Ethiopian Battal-
ion. The Ethiopians give no ground and pummel the at-
tacking force. The Chinese engage for only a short period
of time and then withdraw. Atypically, the Chinese leave
dead troops on the field. When the Ethiopians scour the
area, they discover 131 Chinese corpses.
In Air Force activity, in conjunction with information
that shows the railroad bridges at Yongmi-dong remain
clear, a new attack is launched to destroy them. One
hundred fighter bombers strike the targets and during
the mission, it is determined that the Communists con-
tinue to work on two bypasses, but they also have
started to construct a third bypass bridge. The enemy
also deployed more artillery.
November 8 A plane attached to VMF(N)-513
encounters and engages a MiG-15 in the skies near the
Yellow Sea, northwest of Pyongyang. The MiG is
downed, giving the crew, Captain Oliver R. Davis and
Warrant Officer Dramus F. Fessler, the first kill of an
MiG-15 by the squadron.
November 10 The 315th Air Division, in addi-
tion to other duties, evacuates the sick and wounded to
Japan from Korea. On this day, the 250,000th patient
is transported to Japan.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, Marines
The British salute the Marines. The Black Watch Pipe and Drum Corps performs for the Marines in cel-
ebration of their 177th anniversary (founded November 10, 1775).
November 16, 1952
here and across the globe celebrate the service’s 177th
Birthday. Also, the 1st Marines relieves the 7th Marines
on the Jamestown Line.
In other activity, 22 Panthers of VMF-115 (MAG-
33) work to ease the pressure on the ground Marines’
celebration by attacking enemy supply depots and troop
formations. These planes each carry four 500-pound
napalm tanks, the initial time a tank that large is
dropped by a fighter.
November 12 Far East Air Forces dispatches a
six-plane B-29 contingent attached to the 98th Bomber
Wing to strike the railroad bridges at Pyongyang on
the night of the 12th-13th. The contingent knocks
four of them out of commission.
November 13 Far East Air Forces initiates an
experimental air attack. A five-plane contingent of B-
29s, attached to the 307th Bomber Wing, drop incen-
diary cluster bombs on the Communist supply com-
plex at Sopo. The raid’s results are less than expected.
November 15 In Air Force activity, a component
of the 315th Air Division that is responsible for trans-
porting troops on R&R (rest and recreation) between
Japan and Korea sustains its first fatal accident on this
day. A C-119 (403rd Troop Carrier Wing) that is trans-
porting forty passengers from Japan to Korea crashes
in Japan. The crew and all passengers are lost.
November 17, 1952
November 16 Twenty-one planes of Marine
Squadrons VMA-121 and VMF-212 (MAG-12) strike
a hydroelectric plant about 25 miles south of Wonsan.
The 1st Marine Air Wing actually flies 98 sorties
against enemy targets on this day.
November 17 In Air Force activity, the enemy
hydroelectric complex at Kongosan comes under at-
tack by fighter bombers.
Also, Colonel Royal N. Baker, the commanding of-
ficer of the 4th Fighter Interceptor Group, knocks out
his fifth enemy plane in MiG Alley to become an Air
Force ace.
In Naval activity, carrier planes carry out a mission
(two-day attacks) from three carriers against Chongjin,
Hoeryong and Kilchu. On this day, the focus is upon
Chongjin and the attack is made by planes that deliver
four air strikes. Surface vessels involved include the bat-
tleship USS Missouri (BB 63) and the cruiser USS He-
lena (CA 75). Meanwhile, planes pound Kilchu and
Kyongsong.
November 18–19 1952 The Chinese
launch unsuccessful attacks against the Hook, now
defended by the British who had recently relieved
the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines. During the attacks,
the 11th Marines support the 1st Battalion, Black
Watch, 29th British Infantry Brigade, by propelling
more than 2,000 rounds into the enemy positions.
In Air Force activity, in MiG Alley on the
18th, Captain Leonard W. Lilley, attached to the
334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, engages and
downs a MiG, his fifth, which makes him an Air
Force ace.
Also, during the night of the 18th-19th, the 98th
Bomber Wing strikes the enemy supply complex at
Sonchin, located about 35 miles from the border
with Manchuria. The six B-29s encounter new tac-
tics that are implemented by the enemy. MiGs inter-
cept the formation and drop flares under clear skies,
which alert the searchlight positions and permit the
lights to lock in on the bombers. One of the B-29s
is shot up too badly to make it back. The crew aban-
dons the plane while it is over Cho-do.
In Naval activity, planes attached to two carriers
of TF-77 attack Hoeryong, near Manchuria on the
Yalu River, and other selected targets along the coast.
The air strikes work in conjunction with a special
mission conducted by an Air Force aircraft that
passes over the site at about noon to gather photo-
graphs.
A third carrier also participates in the day’s action
to provide CAP (Combat Air Patrol) planes and to
launch raids against additional targets. The carriers
launch 86 sorties and the combat air patrol is along
to provide protection for the propeller-driven planes.
In other activity, an engagement erupts between
planes attached to TF-77 pilots and a group of
MiGs, when the enemy (Russians), arrives from
Vladivostok to attack the fleet. The planes lack Rus-
sian identification, but it is a certainty that they have
896
Russian pilots. The force of seven MiGs attacks the
four-plane contingent of F9F-5s at a point about 35
miles north of the task force. Two MiGs are shot
down and one other is damaged. In contrast, one
F9F-5 is damaged.
November 19 In the I Corps sector, the Chinese
mount an assault against the lines of the 1st British
Commonwealth Division. Although most Eighth Army
lines have been reasonably quiet, all units, including
the British, are on alert. The British repulse the assault
and the Chinese sustain more than 100 casualties.
In Air Force activity, enemy positions at Kanggye
come under successive heavy attacks by a combined
total of 179 planes attached to the 49th and 58th
Fighter-Bomber Wings.
In Naval activity, the minesweepers USS Kite (AMS
22) and USS Heron (AMS 18) come under fire while
operating near Kalmagak Peninsula. The Heron escapes
harm; however, the Kite sustains some damage and ca-
sualties. One officer and four enlisted men are injured,
but not seriously. On the following day, the Kite again
comes under fire while she is operating off Wonsan,
but no damage or casualties are inflicted.
November 20 In Naval activity, off Wonsan, the
USS Kite (AMS 22) and USS Thompson (DMS 38)
come under fire from shore gun batteries. The Thomp-
son is hit once, but the damage is very slight. In addi-
tion, one man is wounded, but not seriously.
In other activity, an F2H-2P aircraft is accidentally
lost due to a malfunction of the port catapult of the
USS Essex (CVA 9). The Essex is compelled to sail to
Yokosuka, Japan, to make repairs.
November 21 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, Colonel Walter F. Layer is succeeded by
Colonel Hewitt D. Adams as commander of the 1st
Marines Regiment.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries are again
active. Near Sin-po, the destroyer USS Miller (DD
535) comes under fire, but no damage or casualties
occur. At Wonsan, the USS Kite, which is becoming a
traditional target, again comes under fire for the third
time in several days. No damage or casualties occur.
In other activity, the minesweeper USS Pelican (AMS
32) and the destroyer escort USS Hanna (DE 449) ac-
cidentally collide near Yongdo. Both ships sustain only
slight damage.
Also, in Japan, Rear Admiral Francis X. McInerney
assumes command of Service Squadron 3. He succeeds
Rear Admiral Burton B. Biggs.
November 22 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the 1st Marines, which had recently re-
lieved the 7th Marines at the front, initiates Operation
WAKEUP, a raid designed to strike enemy positions to
the front of COPS Reno and Vegas. Company D, 2nd
Battalion, advances prior to dawn in an attempt to seize
prisoners. The mission encounters no enemy artillery
fire; however, the Chinese react with mortars and ma-
chine gun fire. No prisoners are captured, but the raid
 897
is deemed a success due to the information gained re-
garding the enemy’s defenses in the area.
In Air Force activity, a group of four F80s led by
Major Charles J. Loring, Jr., attempts to provide close
support for ground troops in the vicinity of an eleva-
tion known as Sniper Ridge (IX Corps sector). The
planes, attached to the 80th Fighter Bomber Squadron,
8th Fighter Bomber Group, arrive over the selected tar-
gets and initiate the attack. Loring, while diving at low
altitude, delivers his bombs, but enemy fire strikes his
plane. Loring steers his aircraft directly into the enemy
positions to sacrifice his life and take out the guns there.
Major Loring is awarded the Medal of Honor posthu-
mously for his selfless sacrifice. One other F-80 is lost
during the operation.
Also, during an engagement between U.S. and Com-
munist MiGs in MiG Alley, Lieutenant Cecil G. Fos-
ter, attached to the 16th Fighter Interceptor Squadron,
knocks down one of the MiGs. It is his fifth kill, which
makes him the most recent Air Force ace.
In Naval activity, a MiG-15 attacks a Navy PB4Y
while it is conducting a normal patrol flight at an alti-
tude of about 300 feet. The pilot of the PB4Y enjoys a
particularly good day. The MiG makes eight passes,
but each time, the enemy pilot’s marksmanship is poor.
The Naval pilot returns safely from the mission.
November 23 The destroyer escort USS Wise-
man (DE 667) inadvertently strikes a rock. The acci-
dent causes damage and compels the vessel to sail to
Sasebo, Japan, to make the necessary repairs, including
to her damaged sonar dome.
November 24 The destroyer escort USS Hanna
(DE 449) comes under heavy fire from enemy shore
gun batteries near Songjin. The ship sustains one hit
that inflicts some damage and costs one killed.
T66 Multiple Rockets in action during darkness.
November 26, 1952
In other activity, enemy forces based on a small is-
land in the zone of Patrol Squadron 9 fire at and hit a
patrol plane while it is on a reconnaissance mission in
search of enemy radar stations. Although the PB4Y air-
craft is struck three times by machine gun fire, no se-
rious damage is inflicted. The plane continues on its
mission. Aerial photos acquired by the plane indicate the
presence of an enemy radar station based on the island.
November 25 In Air Force activity, Albert J. Fre-
und assumes command of the 18th Fighter Bomber
Group, composed of the 12th and 67th Fighter-
Bomber Squadrons, and the South African Air Force’s
No. 2 Squadron. Freund succeeds Colonel Sheldon S.
Brinson, who held the position since 17 May 1952.
No. 2 Squadron has experience with the F-51Ds. The
South African pilots had been using them since their en-
trance into the war. The 12th Squadron, known as the
“Fightin’ Foxey Few,” and the 67th, Squadron, known as
the “Fightin’ Cocks,” each had their planes painted dif-
ferently. The 12th’s planes appear similar to the Flying
Tigers of World War II, with conspicuous shark’s teeth and
bright yellow propellers. The planes’ propellers of the
67th Squadron are painted red and the planes are adorned
with a picture of a rooster. The attached South African
No. 2 Squadron planes each feature the picture of a
springbok (spring buck), known also as an African gazelle.
In Naval activity, the USS Thompson (DMS 38),
while in the vicinity of Wonsan, becomes the recipi-
ent of what is thought to be enemy bombs. Six to eight
explosions are heard at a distance of about 300 yards
from the ship, but no direct identification is made. The
ship’s lookout reported the sounds of aircraft, seem-
ingly jets, passing over.
November 26 In the X Corps sector, although the
front is relatively quiet, the rocket launcher sections is
November 28, 1952
Rocket launchers (T66 Multiple) in action against enemy positions in the 40th Division sector (X Corps).
active. T66 multiple rocket launchers fire upon enemy
positions.
In other activity, a contingent of six enemy planes,
each a single engine piston type, operating on the west
coast of Korea pass over and bomb the friendly island
of Cho-do; however, the bombing raid inflicts no dam-
age or casualties.
In other activity, a band of MiGs intercepts a six-
plane contingent of F4Us (VMA 312) attached to the
USS Badoeng Strait. The encounter occurs over
Chaeryong. The Americans fire eight HVAR rockets
toward the attackers and the enemy pilots lose their
focus and disengage. No damage is sustained by either
side.
November 28 In Air Force activity, two heavily
898
defended towns, Sinuiju and Uiju, come under a strong
air attack during the night of the 28th-29th by B-29s.
Initially, five B-26s execute flak suppression missions to
disrupt and jam the radar that controls about 94 of about
116 heavy gun emplacements. Then the B-29s arrive in
three separate waves at forty-five minute intervals.
Enemy searchlights, some of which are also guided by
radar, illuminate the skies as the raids unfold; however,
the B-26s, equipped with electronic countermeasures,
succeeds in disrupting the enemy’s defenses.
The airfield at Sinuiju is pounded by 14 Super-
fortresses, while the locomotive repair complex there is
hit by six of the B-29s. The airfield at Uiju is hit by
ten of the bombers, while four others strike the com-
munications complex at Uiju. The B-29s all safely re-
turn to base.
 899
In Naval activity, a flight of six Corsairs (VMA-312),
led by Major Mervin B. Porter, USMC, comes under
attack by four MiG-15s, but the superior MiGs are un-
able to score any kills. The Communist pilots disen-
gage after a ten-minute engagement.
November 29 President-elect Dwight D. Eisen-
hower departs by plane for Korea to fulfill a campaign
pledge. He spends three days in the country and visits
various military units. Eisenhower also spends time
with Generals Mark Clark and James Van Fleet. Eisen-
hower’s visit to Korea changes nothing with regard to
bringing an end to the war, but the general feeling in
the U.S. remains focused on bringing about a truce.
After concluding his visit, Eisenhower embarks by sea
for Hawaii. Also, while Eisenhower is overseas, General
MacArthur announces that he has a blueprint for end-
ing the war. Subsequent to Eisenhower’s return, he
meets with MacArthur at John Foster Dulles’ residence
to discuss the plan, a call to the Soviet Union to demand
the unification of North and South Korea and the uni-
fication of Germany under the supervision of the U.S.
and the Soviet Union.
MacArthur’s proposal includes the use of atomic
weapons against enemy installations. MacArthur’s plan
receives no serious consideration. However, subsequent
to a test of a nuclear weapon during January 1953, the
possibility of using atomic weapons in Korea to termi-
nate the war is considered.
November 30 In the X Corps sector, 45th Divi-
sion zone, a patrol of Company C, 179th Regiment,
moves into enemy terrain to seize prisoners; however,
it is met by intense enemy fire in the vicinity of
Songnae-dong. The patrol, however, reaches the crest
of the hill and hand-to-hand combat erupts. Orders
arrive for the detachment, which had completed its
mission, to pull back. Three troops, including PFC
Charles George, remain at the crest to provide cover
fire. An enemy grenade is thrown into their midst. PFC
George yells to the others, then pushes one man out of
the way and dives on the grenade to take the full im-
pact. Afterward, the two able-bodied soldiers evacuate
George, but once they carry him to an aid station, he
succumbs. PFC Charles George is awarded the Medal
of Honor posthumously for his heroism and selfless
courage in his attempt to save others.
In Japan: An explosion of gasoline occurs on the
USS Ashtabula (AO 51) while the vessel is at Sasebo.
The accident costs the life of one man, who is reported
missing; another three crewmen are injured. In addi-
tion, the ship sustains damage.
December 1, 1952–April 30, 1953.
NINTH DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN:
THIRD KOREAN WINTER.
December 1952 By this time the U.N. forces
have greatly improved their efficiency and many
ROK units that had earlier been mauled have been
December 6, 1952
exceeding expectations. By the latter part of the
month, about three-fourths of the U.N. line is under
the responsibility of the ROK forces. In total, the
U.N. has 16 Divisions on the lines: 11 South Korean;
three U.S. Army; one Marine and one British Com-
monwealth. At this time and for the past two
months, the offensive action of the enemy has greatly
subsided, and as 1953 rolls around, the battlefield
remains relatively quiet until spring.
In other activity, at the prison compound in
Pongam-do, the Communists unsuccessfully attempt
a breakout. About 85 are killed and more than 100
are wounded.
In Air Force activity, 31 MiGs are downed by Sabre
jets during December. Two Sabre jets are lost. One
notable victor in December was Capt. Manuel J.
“Pete” Fernandez, who got his first MiG on October
4. Before he was finished, Fernandez would become
the third highest scoring ace of the war with 14.5
kills.
December 1 Four unidentified planes shadow an
aircraft attached to Patrol Squadron 22 while it is over
the East China Sea. The planes make no visual contact,
but they are identified by radar. No attack or probe is
attempted and the aircraft completes its mission.
— In Japan: Headquarters Naval Forces Far East re-
locates at Yokosuka.
December 2 In Air Force activity, in an effort to
bolster IX Corps during the fighting at Sniper Ridge
in the sector north of Kumhwa, FEAF Bomber Com-
mand, which had been supplying one B-29 for radar
controlled bombing missions, jumps the total to three
planes between this date and December 7.
December 3 In the I Corps Sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Marines receive a large group of VIPs
who arrive at the division command post and receive a
briefing by Major General E.A. Pollock, the command-
ing officer of the 1st Marine Division. The dignitaries
include General Dwight D. Eisenhower (president-
elect), General Omar Bradley (chairman, Joint Chiefs
of Staff ), General Mark W. Clark (commander in chief,
Far East), General James A. Van Fleet (commanding
general, EUSAK), and Lieutenant General Paul W.
Kendall (commanding general, I Corps). Others in-
clude Charles E. Wilson, secretary of defense–desig-
nate, and Major General Parsons, (retired), special as-
sistant to Eisenhower.
In Air Force activity, enemy swept-wing jets are en-
countered by an F-86 operating in the vicinity of Py-
ongyang. The swept-wing aircraft had not been spot-
ted since 9 August of this year.
December 5 Cho-do Island comes under a
small enemy air attack slightly after 2100, when the
enemy drops three bombs. Nonetheless, they fall harm-
lessly in what is reported as the fifth such attack on the
island.
December 6 Two friendly-held islands, Sok-do
December 7, 1952
General “Ike” Eisenhower (president-elect), on the left, eats a meal with troops of the U.S. 3rd Division
during his visit to the front lines in Korea.
and Cho-do, are bombed. Neither sustains any damage
or casualties. A destroyer, the HMCS Crusader (DDE),
responds with 79 rounds, but no hits are reported.
In other activity, the minesweeper USS Merganser
(AMS 26) comes under fire while she operates near
Wonsan. A destroyer escort, the USS Seiverling (DE 441),
targets the origin of the enemy fire at the mouth of
the Namchongang River, but it comes under fire by
other guns on Kalmagak. The Seiverling propels 101
rounds toward the guns that fired upon the Merganser
and another 56 rounds toward Kalmagak. No damage
or casualties are sustained by the Naval vessels; however,
the return fire from the Seiverling terminates the hostile
fire.
Also, the destroyer escort USS Moore (DE 442) and
the destroyer HMCS Haida (DD), operating near
Songjin, come under fire, but again, no damage or ca-
sualties are inflicted. Return fire from the ships elimi-
nates the hostile fire.
In Air Force activity, subsequent to experimentation
the previous October, the tested flak suppression tech-
nique becomes effective across the Eighth Army front
lines, permitting the artillery to continue its fire dur-
ing close support sorties.
December 7 In Naval activity, at Kalmagak, once
900
again, the enemy guns are active. The minesweeper
USS Merganser (AMS 26) comes under attack, but of
the 30 rounds fired, none succeed in hitting the vessel
and no casualties occur.
December 8 In Naval activity, elements of TE-
95.11 attack Ongjin, a primary supply complex for
rice. The raid destroys about eighty percent of the sup-
ply depot.
In other activity, planes attached to the USS Essex
(CVA 9) strike the rail complex at Hunyung, which
becomes the northernmost penetration thus far in the
war.
December 9 In Naval activity, TF-77 launches
a full-scale attack against rail complexes and an am-
munition depot in the vicinity of Rashin. More than ten
buildings are devastated and another five are damaged.
The success of the raid is quickly visible from the chain
of explosions.
December 10 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, Colonel Lewis W. Walt succeeds Colonel
Eustace R. Smoak as commanding officer, 5th Marines.
Also, on this day, 1st Lieutenant J.A. Corvi and Master
Sergeant D.R. George, both USMC, receive credit for
the first enemy plane destroyed by a Marine plane
 901
through use of lock-on-radar gear. The two Marine avi-
ators, attached to the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing
all-weather squadron, down an enemy PO-2 aircraft in
the vicinity of Korea.
In yet other activity, it becomes known that Marines
in Korea are testing armored shorts.
December 11 In Air Force activity, at Kunsan
Airfield, a B-26 attached to the 3rd Bomber Wing ac-
cidentally catches fire and explodes before it can be ex-
tinguished. The flames jump to other aircraft and cause
the loss of three other B-26s and six nearby F-84 Thun-
derJets (474th Fighter Bomber Wing).
In Naval activity, a Marine F3D night interceptor
downs a Russian-built biplane (PO-2).
In other activity, the destroyer USS Shields (DD
596), the destroyer escort USS Seiverling (DE 441)
and a group of minesweepers that are operating in
Wonsan harbor come under attack by enemy shore
gun batteries. The minesweepers quickly seek cover be-
hind a smokescreen while the warships return fire.
None of the naval vessels sustain any damage or casu-
alties.
Also, the minesweeper USS Waxbill (AMS 39), while
anchored off Yo-do Island, is struck lightly by the de-
stroyer USS Marshall (DD 676). The destroyer sus-
tains no damage and the Waxbill suffers only some
slight damage.
December 12 In Naval activity, the USS Mar-
shall (DD 676), which collided with a minesweeper on
the previous day, continues to operate in Wonsan har-
bor. On this day, enemy shore guns fire 20 rounds at
her, but no damage is sustained.
Also, in the same vicinity, the USS Grasp (ARS
24) and USS Seiverling (DE 441) are fired upon from
guns posted in the vicinity of the Wonsan airfield,
but again the vessels sustain no damage and no casual-
ties.
December 13 In Naval activity, the minesweeper
USS Waxbill (AMS 39) and the destroyer USS Mar-
shall (DD 676) come under fire by enemy shore guns
located near the mouth of the Namchongang. No di-
rect hits occur, but some rounds fall near the vessels. No
damage is sustained and no casualties occur.
December 14 The Communist prisoners at
Pongam-do incite riots. More than 3,500 of the 9,000
POWs move against the guards. Eighty-four prisoners
are killed and about 120 are wounded.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries near
Chongjin fire upon the South Korean vessel, ROKN
YMS 504. The USS Rochester (CA 124) returns fire in
support of the South Koreans. In conjunction, no ca-
sualties or damage are sustained by either vessel.
December 15 Mu-do Island, in the Haeju ap-
proaches and held by friendly guerrillas, comes under
an artillery attack, but no damage is sustained and no
casualties are inflicted.
December 16 In Naval activity, Yuson-dong,
December 22, 1952
previously unscathed, becomes a primary target for
TF-77. Planes from three carriers strike the objective
to destroy its manufacturing buildings and rail facili-
ties.
December 17 Two IL-28 twin-jet bombers
are spotted for the first time by two Sabre jet (F-86)
pilots. One is seen after it crosses the Yalu River, es-
corted by two MiG-15s, in the vicinity of the Sui-ho
Reservoir, and the other is detected across the river in
Manchuria.
December 18 In Japan: The supplies of avia-
tion fuel at Sasebo, by this day, are totally expended. The
shortage creates a dilemma and no fuel is expected until
after Christmas. A fuel tanker arrives on 27 Decem-
ber.
December 19 In Air Force activity, reconnais-
sance aircraft acquire photographs of three planes on the
primary airfield at Pyongyang. This is the first sighting
of aircraft at the field since October of the previous
year.
In Naval activity, three rounds of enemy artillery are
propelled toward the USS Waxbill (AMS 39) while she
is operating near Wonsan, but none causes any damage
or casualties.
December 21 In Air Force activity, a new land-
ing strip is completed this day. The project was
undertaken by the 366th Engineering Aviation Battal-
ion, which completes a new landing strip at Pusan-
East.
December 22 Information from a captured
North Korean soldier alerts the U.N. forces to an im-
minent attack by the N.K. 23rd Brigade against the
west coast islands. The regiment is deployed on the Ko-
rean mainland across from Sok-to. On the following
day, the information proves accurate. The Communists
bombard Sok-to and Cho-do. Naval spotters posted
on the island group track the fire and inform nearby
patrol ships in the Yellow Sea. The artillery attack,
which had begun just after dusk, is quickly extin-
guished by the ships at sea. The attack by ground forces
does not occur.
In Air Force activity, enemy fire in the vicinity of
Haeju knocks down a British Glory Sea Fury plane,
but the pilot ejects and awaits rescue in an inlet of the
Yellow Sea. A rescue plane (SA-16) arrives and retrieves
the pilot.
In other activity, a Greek (Royal Hellenic Air Force
C-47) plane that is transporting patients collides with
a U.S. F-80 jet fighter bomber at Suwon Air Base in
South Korea. The collision is the only medical evacu-
ation mission during the entire war that involves fatal-
ities.
In Naval activity, TF-77 launches another huge air
attack. Three carriers launch planes that strike the
Kwangsuwon Airfield and other lucrative targets there,
including barracks, vehicle depots and construction
complexes.
December 23, 1952
A contingent of the 7th Marines in reserve along the Kansas Line.
December 23 In Naval activity, at Wonsan, enemy
shore guns fire upon the cruiser USS Toledo (CA 133), but
to no avail. The rounds all miss the mark. In another in-
cident, the destroyers USS Marshall (DD 676) and USS
McGowan (DD 678), while providing protection for a
sweeping operation, come under enemy fire in Wonsan
harbor, but no damage is scored and no casualties occur
to the destroyers or the South Korean minesweepers.
In other activity, enemy guns on the Ongjin penin-
sula fire upon South Korean vessels, the ROKN MTB
23 and MTB 25. The South Koreans return fire by pro-
pelling 32 rockets at the village from where the hostile
fire originated.
December 25 In the Eighth Army area, this is
the third Christmas celebrated by Eighth Army and the
Marines in Korea.
In Naval activity, the USS Sullivans (DD 537), a de-
stroyer, comes under fire by enemy shore guns while
operating off Songjin, but no damage is sustained. Also,
at Wonsan, the destroyer USS McGowan (DD 678)
comes under attack by enemy shore gun batteries, but
she, too, remains undamaged.
In other activity, a contingent of planes (ADs), at-
tached to VMA-121 (TF-77), mistakes a friendly F-
51 of the South African Air Force as a hostile aircraft
and shoots it down.
902
In yet other activity, friendly guerrillas on Mu-do
Island on the west coast of Korea come under attack
by enemy guns (unknown location) and cause some ca-
sualties. Two guerrillas are wounded.
December 26 In Air Force activity, the 18th
Fighter Bomber Group and attached No. 2 Squadron
(South African Air Force) moves to the uncompleted jet
base at Osan, located below Seoul, about 35 miles
south of Suwon. The 18th Group had been operating
from Chinhae in the vicinity of Pusan.
In Naval activity, during a regular flight in search of
enemy submarines, a Navy PBM-5 aircraft, attached
to Patrol Squadron 47, crashes in the Sea of Japan. Ten
members of the crew are killed and four survive. The
cause of the crash is never determined.
December 27 In Naval activity, planes attached
to Fast Carrier Task Force (TF-77) attack enemy rails
in North Korea in what is a re-initiation of the rail in-
terdiction operation.
In other activity, the 581st ARCW (Air Resupply
and Communications Wing) initiates sorties through
December 31 to transport flight agents into enemy-
held territory for clandestine operations to gather intel-
ligence. The operations originate in Seoul when four H-
19 helicopters take off to execute the drop offs.
 903 December 29, 1952

Wash day in a frozen Bivouac area.

December 28 A British plane is hit by enemy
fire and the pilot is forced to eject over the Yellow Sea
north of Cho-do, but he spends little time in the water.
An SA-16 attached to the 3rd Air Rescue Squadron
lands and safely retrieves him in less than three minutes.
December 29 Enemy guns on the Changyonsan
peninsula commence an artillery barrage against Sunwi-
do Island, held by friendly guerrillas. More than 200
rounds of mortar and artillery rounds pound the island,
but no damage is sustained and no casualties occur.
December 30, 1952
In Air Force activity, the 30th Bomber Wing launches
a contingent of eleven B-29s that strike the enemy’s
headquarters area at Teagam during the night of the
29th-30th. Reports from the night attack show that
146 buildings are destroyed.
December 30 In Air Force activity, a reconnais-
sance plane (RB-26), while operating as part of Oper-
ation SPOTLIGHT, discovers five locomotives standing in
one marshaling yard. Soon after, two B-26s arrive and
strike the yard. Four of the locomotives are destroyed
and the remaining one is damaged.
Also, on the night of 30–31, enemy-held Choak
comes under attack by planes attached to the 19th
Bomber Group. The strike against a processing facility
there is made under a full moon, which makes the mis-
sion even more dangerous. MiGs intercept the forma-
tion and one of the B-29s is shot down and two oth-
A pause in the fighting. Cardinal Spellman of New York celebrates Christmas Mass in front of 2,500
Marines.
904
ers receive heavy damage, which forces both to make
emergency landings at Suwon Air Base.
December 31 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine
Division zone, the Archbishop of New York, Cardinal
Francis Spellman, who also is the vicar for Catholic
Chaplains of the Armed Forces, visits the 1st Marine Air
Wing at K-3 in Pohang. While at the airfield, he takes
the time to shake hands with about 1,000 Marines.
The cardinal had also visited the 1st Marine Division
command post, where he celebrated Christmas Mass.
Subsequently, the Marines at K-3 are also visited by
the Episcopal Bishop of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania,
Bishop Austin Pardue.
Also, from 1 December to this day, Marine Squadron
VMF-115 carries out 726 sorties as part of Fifth Air
Force.
 905
1953
January 1953 Chronic fuel shortages impede
Eighth Army operations. Fuel is rationed. It is cut 17
percent from the previous month’s allotment down
to 829 gallons per man per day. Diesel fuel, also in
short supply, is cut by 7 percent, which limits it to
1.41 gallons. Vehicle operations are greatly reduced
throughout the month.
In Air Force activity, in aerial battles with MiGs
during January, Sabre jets down 37 MiGs and one
TU–2, a medium bomber. One Sabre jet is lost.
In other action, offensive action on the part of the
enemy remains dormant during the frigid winter
months of January and February, but the Chinese
execute numerous raids. Clashes occur in the area
known as “No Man’s Land;” however, the Chinese
usually pay the higher price. Nevertheless, the enemy,
following the upsets, changes tactics and initiates
greater use of ambush operations. The Chinese am-
bushes succeed initially, as the U.N. troops are
caught by surprise, but eventually they adapt.
January 1 In Air Force activity, Colonel Frank S.
Perego assumes command of the 18th Fighter Bomber
Wing. He succeeds Colonel William H. Clark.
In Naval activity, Navy casualty figures, including
the First Marine Air Wing, totals 132 men killed, an in-
crease of 16 fatalities for the year 1951. During De-
cember 1952, no U.N. ships had sustained a direct hit
from Communist guns.
In other activity, Rwangto-do Island, held by
friendly guerrillas, comes under an artillery attack that
includes about 90 rounds of incoming shells. The de-
stroyers USS McGowan (DD 678) and USS Marshall
(DD 676) return fire in support of the guerrillas.
January 4–14 1953 Inclement weather
greatly impedes the carriers of TF-77 during early
January. The planes operate on only two days dur-
ing the period 4–10 January. On 10 January, horrific
weather arrives and includes high gusty winds ac-
companied by snow and ice, which hinders opera-
tions until 14 January.
January 4 In Air Force activity, the enemy sup-
ply complex at Huich’on is struck by a force of 124
planes of the Fifth Air Force. Also, during the night of
the 4th-5th, planes attached to FEAF strike the enemy
supply complex and the rails at Huich’on. Twelve B-29
Superfortresses, attached to the 307th Bomber Wing,
carry out the mission.
In Naval activity, Major Deane M. Barnett, USMC,
while on a bombing mission, is killed when his plane
fails to pull out of a dive. He is the first Marine avia-
tion fatality of 1953.
January 12, 1953
January 8 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, a patrol of the 7th Marines engages a Chinese
force composed of about 80 troops near Hill 134 near
COP 2.
In other activity, Marine Major General Vernon E.
Megee succeeds Major General Clayton C. Jerome as
commanding officer of the 1st Marine Air Wing. Also,
MAG-12 flies more than 28 sorties in support of the 1st
Marine Division. The strikes, executed by planes of
VMA 121, VMA-212 and VMA-325, concentrate on
the Panmunjom corridor.
January 9 A joint operation of the USAF and the
USMC is initiated in an attempt to destroy the enemy
rails at two specific targets: Sinanju, slightly less than
fifty miles north of Pyongyang; and at Yongmi-dong,
beyond the Ch’ongch’on and Taedong Rivers in north-
western Korea. The first target, Sinanju, is hit by sev-
enteen B-29s. Other targets include antiaircraft posi-
tions in the vicinity of Sinanju and the two marshaling
yards at Yongmi-dong and Maenjung-dong. The air
strikes continue until 14 January with excellent results.
The mission knocks out the two rail systems for about
16 days.
January 10 In Air Force activity, the targets struck
on the previous day by B-29s are again hit, this time by
158 fighter bombers that pound the targets during day-
light hours. Also, during the night (10th-11th), enemy
positions in marshaling yards at Sonchon and Anju come
under attack by B-29s attached to the 307th Bomber
Wing. During the attack, a searchlight catches a bomber
and nearby enemy fighters shoot it from the sky.
In Naval activity, nasty weather does not interfere
with enemy artillery. While TF-77 is fighting the
weather, warships USS Merganser (AMS 26) and USS
Firecrest (AMS 10) are attacked with about 40 rounds
from gun positions near Ponggang-ni. No damage is
inflicted upon the ships and no casualties occur.
January 11 In Air Force activity, reconnaissance
photographs show that the recent raids against the
enemy rails in the vicinity of Yongmi had been suc-
cessful. The rails are inoperable. Also, inclement
weather halts air activity.
January 12 In Air Force activity, fighter bombers
reinitiate air attacks against rails and other selected tar-
gets in the vicinity of Sinanju. The strikes are main-
tained throughout the night.
Also, 18th Fighter-Bomber Group at Osan starts to
convert from F-51Ds to F-86Fs. Sabres initiate their
service with the 12th and No. 2 (South African)
Squadrons. The other unit, the 67th Fighter Bomber
Squadron, continues to fly its F-51 Mustangs until it,
January 13, 1953
too, receives Sabres on 23 January. The pilots receive
support and training from experienced Sabre pilots that
are transferred from the 4th and 51st Groups.
January 13 In Air Force activity, an enemy con-
tingent of MiGs numbered at about 13 attack a B-29
while it is on a leaflet dropping mission in enemy ter-
ritory in North Korea. The B-29 is shot down. On the
22nd, the Communists publicize the fate of the crew,
including Colonel John K. Arnold, Jr., the command-
ing officer of the 581st ARCW (Air Resupply and
Communications Wing).
Also, during the night of the 13th-14th, aircraft at-
tached to the 307th Bomber Wing and the 19th
Bomber Wing attack enemy marshaling yards at
Sinanju and Kunu-ri as part of the ongoing air strikes.
January 14 In Air Force activity, during an en-
counter with MiGs, Lieutenant Joseph C. McConnell,
attached to the 39th Fighter Interceptor Wing, downs his
first MiG. During World War II, McConnell had been
a navigator aboard a B-24. Also, Captain James Jabara,
now a major who achieved ace status during May of the
previous year, returns to Korea for his second tour.
January 15 In Air Force activity, reconnaissance
planes capture photographs of a previously undisclosed
section of a new camouflaged yard at the Sui-ho hy-
droelectric dam. The mission also discovers that two
of its four generators are operable.
In Naval activity, the HMS Sparrow (PF) comes
under attack while operating near Huryomdon. The
enemy guns score one hit, which causes some slight
damage. Also, the minesweeper USS Pelican (AMS 32)
comes under enemy fire while on a sweeping mission in
the vicinity of Haeju, but no damage is inflicted and no
casualties occur.
U.S. Navy on the ground in Korea. Sailors clear a runway at an emergency airfield during a blizzard.
906
Mid January–May 1953 In Air Force ac-
tivity, since the introduction of the Sabre jet to the
Korean War, pilots have been concerned about the
ability of their 50-caliber machine guns to match
the potent sting of the heavier weapons of the MiGs,
which also have the ability to climb higher than the
Sabres. Far East Air Forces initiates an experiment
with mounting heavier guns on the Sabres. The ef-
fort is dubbed Project Gun Val.
The 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing receives eight of
the specially modified Sabres, each armed with four
2-mm cannon rather than the usual four machine
guns. These eight planes (Gun Val aircraft) fly 284
combat sorties, but not as a unit. The planes fly with
the regular Sabres to conceal their extra fire power.
Nonetheless, MiGs are encountered 139 times and
engaged 41 times, but the results, which are 6 kills
and 3 probable kills, do not raise the enthusiasm.
Air Force officials recognize the kill ratio is higher
than the usual Fifth Air Force average, but it is
deemed to be because of the skill of the test pilots and
the more favorable conditions rather than the cannon.
In addition, it is discovered that the firing time of
four seconds is not sufficient and another flaw is that
at elevations higher than 35,000 feet, the guns’ com-
pressors stall. It is thought that the malfunction of the
gun might have caused the loss of one of the planes.
January 16 As of this date, U.S. casualties in
Korea stand at 128,971, including 22,735 dead, since
the outbreak of the war on 25 June 1950.
January 17 In Air Force activity, during the night
of the 17th-18th, the radio broadcasting facility at Py-
ongyang comes under attack by a contingent of eleven
B-29s of the 98th Bomber Wing; however, the crews
 907
The flight deck of a U.S. carrier resembles a skating rink in the middle of the sea. Navy crewmen clear
the ice and snow to permit operations to continue.
on this mission have two problems. The radio installa-
tion is located underground at a depth of more than
forty feet and in addition, it is thought that a POW
compound is nearby. The planes score at least eight di-
rect hits, but due to the depth, the bombs (2,000
pound) do not penetrate to devastate the radio station.
In Naval activity, a tactical air control party is at-
tacked. One man is killed and three others are
wounded. In addition, two vehicles are damaged. It is
thought that the attack was inadvertently executed by
two planes (F9Fs) attached to Fast Carrier Task Force
(TF-77).
January 18 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 1st and 7th Marines initiate Operation BIMBO,
designed to feint an attack and draw the Chinese from
their positions. Elements of the 1st and 7th Marines, sup-
ported by artillery and air cover, move out at 0630. Mean-
while, the artillery pounds enemy positions and planes
deliver napalm. The Chinese react by returning fire
January 18, 1953
against approach routes thought to be used by the
Marines. However, the Chinese fail to send out large
forces. Some troop formations are located and struck by
the artillery. The mission is completed by about 0800.
In Naval activity, enemy guns on an island east of
Swatow in the Formosa Straits downs a Neptune patrol
plane attached to VP-22A, which had been on a nor-
mal patrol flight. The aircraft crashes into the sea, but
a Coast Guard rescue plane rushes to the scene to pick
up survivors. Eleven of 13 members of the crew are
saved; however, as the plane takes off, it crashes. The
plane catches fire and sinks. Nevertheless, additional
rescue teams speed to the scene. American and British
surface ships converge on the scene of the tragedy ac-
companied by aircraft from the U.S. Navy, Air Force and
Coast Guard, as well as some planes from the RAF, but
the enemy guns remain active and hinder the opera-
tion. The rescue operation does succeed in saving ten
men. Three of the rescue planes sustain some damage,
but no losses occur.
January 22, 1953
In other activity, the USS Colahan (DD 650) comes
under fire while operating near Yujin Dan Point, but
the ship sustains no damage or casualties. Also, the South
Korean vessel ROKN YMS 514 comes under fire in the
Haeju approaches, but again, no damage is sustained.
In other activity, enemy guns fire upon the minesweep-
ers USS Waxwing (AM 389) and USS Merganser (AMS
26) while they are operating off Ongjin, but the guns
based on the mainland are unable to score any damage.
In yet other activity, Cho-do, a friendly-held island,
is bombarded by artillery on the mainland. No damage
is inflicted and the friendly troops sustain no casualties.
January 22 In Air Force activity, the final F-51
Mustangs, a staple of the 18th Fight Bomber Wing,
are brought out of combat as the wing moves toward a
full complement of Sabre jets. This terminates the
wing’s use of the single-engine propeller driven aircraft
in combat sorties of the Korean War.
In other activity, the Chinese Communists broad-
cast on Peking radio that Colonel John K. Arnold, Jr.,
and his surviving B-29 crewmen (shot down on the
13th) are in the hands of the Chinese as POWs. The an-
nouncement is unusual, as the Chinese rarely gave
names of their prisoners. Three of the crewmen died
in the crash. Colonel Arnold is not released during
1953 when the POWs are exchanged. The Commu-
nists keep him imprisoned until 1956.
Few details are available, but apparently, the Chi-
nese, through spies, spot Arnold in uniform with two
covert CIA agents in Tokyo at headquarters, and it is
thought that his plane had actually been ambushed to
catch a big stick in the CIA. Arnold is charged and con-
victed of spying by the Chinese. The specialized unit,
Air Resupply and Communications Service, is known
to have worked in close cooperation with the CIA on
clandestine missions.
January 23 In Air Force activity, during a mis-
sion in the vicinity of the Yalu River, Captain Dolphin
D. Overton, III, engages and downs two MiG-15s for
his third and fourth victories. His first two victories
occurred on the 21st and 22nd while attached to the
116th Fighter Interceptor Squadron. It is thought that
Overton had two additional kills on this day, but there
is no record because both occur while his plane is across
the Yalu. Overton gets is fifth kill on the following day.
On this same mission, the squadron commander of
the 116th, Lt. Colonel Edwin L. Heller, is shot down
at a spot about 100 miles across the Yalu in Manchuria.
Heller survives his imprisonment by the Communists
despite severe torture and is returned at the conclusion
of the conflict.
Word of the incursion into Communist China moves
all the way to the top, to General Mark Clark, with
ramifications that ripple along the chain of command.
Lt. Gen. Glenn O. Barcus, the Fifth Air Force com-
mander, tries but fails to strip Overton of his ace sta-
tus; however, Overton is shortly thereafter ordered back
to the States by the commander of the 51st Fighter In-
terceptor Squadron.
908
January 24 In the I Corps sector, Marine fighter
planes fly close-support missions in support of the
Marines on the ground.
In Air Force activity, there is activity between the
Sabre jets of the 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing and
Communist MiGs. One pilot, Captain Dolphin D.
Overton, III, of the 16th Fighter Interceptor Squadron,
achieves his fifth kill to become an ace. Overton’s
achievement is extraordinary, as he accomplishes the
feat during a four-day period. The other pilot, Cap-
tain Harold E. Fischer, Jr., of the 39th Fighter Intercep-
tor Squadron, also gets his fifth kill to become an ace.
Also, Colonel Maurice Martin assumes command of
the 18th Fighter Bomber Group. He succeeds Colonel
Sheldon S. Brinson.
January 25 In the X Corps sector, a contingent of
the 31st Infantry Regiment (7th Division) launches an
attack against an enemy position, Spud Hill (Operation
SMACK).
In Air Force activity, the Communists have been
using the peace talks at Panmunjom to their advantage
in many ways, but their ruse of re-supplying their
ground forces without interruption ceases as of this day.
The Air Force receives new orders from the U.N. com-
mand. The Communists are informed that they will
receive a free pass on only one round-trip convoy per
week. All other convoys, as of this day, heading toward
the front lines become susceptible to attack.
January 28 In Naval activity, enemy shore gun
batteries fire upon the destroyer USS Kidd (DD 661)
while she is off Kojo; however, none of the 18 rounds
scores any damage.
In Air Force activity, a contingent of fighter bombers
strikes a troop concentration in the vicinity of Pyongyang.
In the X Corps sector, the U.S. 45th Division relieves
the 40th Division. The relief operation is completed
by 31 January. The divisional artillery remains in place
and reverts to the control of the 45th Division. In ad-
dition, the 140th Tank Battalion passes from 40th Di-
vision control to the 45th Division.
In other activity, during a bombing mission on the
night of the 28th-29th, which is carried out under a
full moon, one of the B-29s of the 19th Bomber Group
sustains an explosion while over the target area south-
west of the town of Sariwon. The exact reason for the
loss is uncertain, but it is thought that the full moon
made the plane a conspicuous target for enemy fight-
ers rather than anti-aircraft fire. The loss becomes the
fourth Superfortress to go down since the previous De-
cember. No other losses are sustained during the re-
mainder of the war.
The escort fighters (Douglas F3D-2 Skyknights)
flown by Marine pilots are equipped with radar, which
the Marines use this day. One of the enemy’s planes is
downed. The kill is the first enemy jet knocked out by
a radar-equipped jet fighter plane.
January 29 In Air Force activity, the troop con-
centration area in the vicinity of Pyongyang, which
 909
had been attacked on the previous day, is again struck
on this day by a contingent of fighter bombers.
Also, during a B-29 bombing mission on the night
of the 29th-30th, the Communists again intercept the
formation. The flight, like that of the previous night,
comes under additional danger due to the full moon. No
B-29s are downed, but the MiGs are able to inflict
heavy damage to one of the planes. And, similarly to the
previous night, the radar-equipped Skynights knock
down one MiG.
Also, on the night of the 29th-30th, an F-94 Starfire,
attached to the 319th Fighter Interceptor Squadron
(radar-equipped), locks in on an enemy LA-9 (Lav-
ochkin LA-9 had been the first all-metal Lavochkin
fighter; during World War II it was dubbed the Fritz).
This victory is the initial kill by a Starfire during the Ko-
rean War. The Chinese and the North Koreans make
great use of the LA-9 during the Korean War.
January 30 In Air Force activity, a pilot attached
to the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing engages and van-
quishes an enemy TU-2s (Russian-built twin-engine
bomber) over the Yellow Sea northeast of Pyongyang.
A TU-2s had not been seen in the area since 30 Novem-
ber 1951, when the Communists launched an unsuc-
cessful and costly raid against Taehwa-do.
In other activity, a contingent of B-29s, on a bomb-
ing mission during the night of the 30th-31st, is in-
tercepted by MiGs. No losses occur, but one plane is se-
verely damaged and compelled to land in South Korea.
Also, Captain Ben L. Fithian and Lieutenant Sam R.
Lyons, attached to the 319th Fighter Interceptor
Squadron, score the Air Force’s first night victory. The
propeller-driven LA-9 is shot down completely by their
F-94 radar.
In Naval activity, no surface vessels come under at-
tack, but the enemy artillery launches an attack against
Mu-do, a friendly held island in the Haeju approaches.
About 120 rounds are fired from positions on the main-
land, but no damage is sustained.
February 1 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the Marines initiate the final rehearsal in
advance of a major raid (Operation CLAMBAKE) against
Hill 31 and 31A. The 5th Marines have been practic-
ing for five weeks and the Marine air squadrons also
have been involved with preparations. The two objec-
tives are located north of the 5th Marines zone in the
Ungok Hill mass. The assault, including a feint against
three other targets — Hill 104, Kumgok Hill and Red
Hill — is scheduled for 3 February.
February 2 In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force
launches 96 fighter bombers against a military com-
plex located slightly south of Kyomipo. The planes de-
stroy 107 buildings in the area where the troops are
housed, eliminating sleeping quarters and sanctuary for
many Communist troops from the frigid Korean win-
ter weather.
In Naval activity, two F4Us attached to the carrier
USS Kearsarge (CVA 33), caught in an emergency sit-
February 4, 1953
uation, jettison six bombs each. It is thought that these
bombs inadvertently became responsible for the lives
of three friendly troops and the wounding of another
five.
In other activity, at Hungnam, enemy shore gun bat-
teries fire upon the destroyer USS Halsey Powell (DD
686). No damage occurs and no casualties are sus-
tained.
— In the United States: President Truman directs
that Task Force 72 is to cease its naval blockade of For-
mosa. In conjunction, the directive is apparently made
for strategic purposes, but it does not impede the on-
going Formosa Patrol.
February 3 Operation CLAMBAKE In the I Corps
sector, the 5th Marines initiate an operation that in-
cludes the entire regiment either directly or by support
of the attack force. The raid focuses on Hills 31 and
31A, but other contingents press against Hill 104,
Kumgok and Red Hill in a diversion mission. At just
after the break of dawn, the operation gets underway
when tanks and infantry feint an assault against the di-
versionary targets.
Meanwhile, the main force encounters opposition
as the two contingents move against Hill 31 and 31A.
Tanks from Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, pivot
and move from the diversionary part of the assault to
cross the rice paddies, still frozen from the Korean win-
ter, to block the left flank of the attacking infantry
(Company A, reinforced, 1st Battalion). With the sup-
port of air cover, artillery and tanks, the assault ad-
vances against intense enemy fire at the respective
objectives. Chinese on Hill 31 and at 31A mount coun-
terattacks, but they are quickly neutralized by the
Marines.
During the fight, a detachment of Company A, led
by Lieutenant Raymond G. Murphy, advances to clean
out an enemy blocking point. Murphy, although
wounded, refuses treatment and continues to assist with
other wounded. He moves against the fire to direct
teams to evacuate the wounded. Once the mission is
accomplished, the contingent moves down to the base
of the hill and in the process Murphy is again wounded.
Nonetheless, he moves back up the hill under fire to
sweep for any wounded Marines that might have been
left behind. Lieutenant Murphy becomes a recipient of
the Medal of Honor for his extraordinary heroism in the
face of hostile fire.
The Chinese sustain about 390 casualties, including
90 killed (counted). The Marines sustain 14 killed and
91 wounded. In addition, the Chinese destroy one
flame-thrower tank.
February 4 A band of six MiGs attack a 4-plane
contingent of Corsairs (VMA-312) piloted by Marines
in the skies over Sokto. The presence of the MiGs sig-
nals an elevation of the quality of the Communists’
radar stations north of the Taedong-gang estuary. The
MiGs initiate the duel, but no Corsairs sustain any
damage. The Communists sustain damage to one
plane.
February 6, 1953
February 6 In Naval activity, Enemy fire, includ-
ing artillery, small arms and machine guns, strike at a
contingent from the USS Halsey Powell (DD 686) who
are in a whale boat on a raid at Hwa-do Island. The
incident costs the raiders two wounded.
In another incident, enemy shore guns posted on
Hwa-do Island fire upon the USS Halsey Powell, but
no damage is sustained.
In yet other activity, two MiGs encounter and at-
tack a group of four Sea Fury planes off Chinnampo.
The MiGs attack on one pass, but no damage is in-
flicted.
February 8 Communist gunners in the vicinity
of Kojo spot a South Korean motorized sampan and
take it under fire, expending 10 rounds without hit-
ting the diminutive target. A much larger vessel, the
destroyer USS Swenson (DD 729), moves into position
and fires its guns to eliminate the hostile fire and per-
mit the sampan to continue on its mission.
In other activity, two other South Korean vessels,
the ROKN MTB 23 and MTB 25 launch a rocket at-
tack against Communist positions on the mainland at
a point northeast of Paengnyong-do.
February 9 In Air Force activity, the military
complex at Kyomipo, which had been hit with a terrific
air attack on 2 February, is attacked again. On this day,
when Fifth Air Force fighters and light bombers arrive,
they focus upon an abandoned steel mill being used in-
stead as an ammunition factory and as a repair center
for locomotives. The raid succeeds in reducing the tar-
get to debris.
In Naval activity, no surface vessels come under at-
tack by shore gun batteries, but Communist artillery
initiates bombardments of several friendly held islands
in Wonsan harbor, including Yo-do, Sin-do and
Hwangto; however, none of the rounds inflict any
damage or casualties.
In other activity, the carriers USS Philippine Sea
(CVA 47), USS Oriskany (CVA 34) and USS Kearsarge
(CVA 33) maintain a sustained two-day air assault on
February 9–10 against lucrative enemy targets that are
stretched from Wonsan to Songjin and beyond to Ho-
eryong. The attacking planes focus on transportation fa-
cilities and vehicles as well as supply depots.
February 10 In Naval activity, a group of ves-
sels—the HMS Crane (PF), HMNZS Hawae (PF), and
HMS Opossum (PF)— focus on attempting to locate
what is thought to be an unidentified submarine. One
of the ships had recently made contact with the vessel.
Following a prolonged search, it is determined no sub
was in the area.
In other activity, as on the previous day, Communist
shore guns initiate a barrage upon friendly positions in
Wonsan harbor. Both Tae-do and Yo-do come under at-
tack, but again the enemy gunners are unable to score
any damage or cause any casualties.
February 11 Lt. Gen. Maxwell D. Taylor takes
command of the Eighth Army. He succeeds General
910
Van Fleet, who lost a son in the war after he was shot
down. The general retired from the army shortly after
he returned to the States.
In Naval activity, a report by Task Force 77 indicates
that about 80 percent of the enemy trucks that had
been destroyed or damaged by the task force during the
past several weeks had been eliminated by pilots flying
night missions.
In other activity, the Communist gunners at Won-
san again bombard friendly held islands, making it the
third successive day for the harassment fire. Yo-do,
Hwangto-do and Tae-do become the recipients of the
enemy’s marksmanship, which remains identical to the
past two days. No damage is sustained and no casual-
ties occur.
February 12 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the area held by the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines, is hit by a Chinese probe at COP Hedy (Hill
124). The enemy patrol, composed of about platoon
strength, is supported by artillery. The enemy activity
rolls into the early morning of the 13th; however, the
Marines hold all ground.
In Naval activity, Rear Admiral Clarence E. Olsen
assumes command of TF-95. He succeeds Rear Admi-
ral John E. Gingrich.
In other activity, friendly islands in Wonsan harbor
undergo their fourth consecutive bombardment by
Communist gunners. Hwangto-do, Sin-do, No-do and
Tae-do come under attack, but yet again no casualties
occur and no damage is inflicted.
Also, an HRS-1 helicopter attached to HMR-161
(USMC) crashes during a mission, causing the first fa-
talities of the squadron. The pilot, Captain Allen W.
Ruggles, and Technical Sergeant Joe L. Brand are re-
ported missing and presumed dead.
February 13 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st South Korean Marine Corps Regi-
ment dispatches a patrol against enemy-held Hill 240,
located along the Sachon River’s west bank, several
miles north of the mouth of the river. At this time dur-
ing the conflict, both sides dispatch raiding parties
against the opponent’s defenses.
In Naval activity, Hwangto Island, held by friendly
forces in Wonsan Harbor, comes under a short attack
by Communist artillery. Four rounds hit the island, but
no damage is inflicted.
February 14 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, a patrol of the 7th Marines moves out to es-
tablish positions from which to wait in ambush for
enemy patrols. En route to the selected area, the Chi-
nese instead ambush the patrol. The Marines react and
return fire, while reinforcements from the MLR speed
to the scene. The Chinese abandon the area.
In Naval activity, the Communists continue to rain
artillery shells on friendly islands in Wonsan harbor on
what becomes the sixth day in a row. Hwangto-do and
Yo-do receive a combined total of about 124 rounds.
Fire is returned by the destroyer USS DeHaven (DD
 911
727) and the destroyer escort USS Moore (DE 442),
and the enemy guns also fire on both vessels. Neither
ship receives any damage or casualties, but on Yo-do,
two men are killed. In addition, nine men are wounded,
including one U.S. Marine officer.
Also on Yo-do, damage is sustained, including a di-
rect hit on the command post of the Korean Marines.
At Hwangto-do, at least two bunkers collapse under
the fire.
February 15 In Air Force activity, the hydroelec-
tric power plant complex at Sui-ho comes under a mas-
sive attack when twenty-two F-84 ThunderJets, attached
to the 474th Fighter Bomber Wing, pound the target
with 1,000 pound bombs. The escort force is composed
of a formidable contingent of eighty-two F-86 Sabre jets
that form a protective shield that prevents enemy MiGs
from intercepting the ThunderJets. No losses are sus-
tained by either the Sabre jets or the ThunderJets.
Meanwhile, the Communists in the region receive
another blow against one of their sources of power. The
facility remains out of action for a few months, leaving
the Communists in the region short of heat and elec-
tricity.
In other activity, on the night of the 15th-16th, the
radio broadcasting center in the vicinity of Pingjang-
ni (Pyongyang radio) comes under attack. Previously,
on 27 January, eleven B-29s dropped 2,000-pound
bombs on the broadcast center at Pyongyang, but its lo-
cation, more than forty-feet below the ground, kept it
from harm. On this raid, the planes focus on the power
lines and succeed in knocking the radio station off the
air.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries again
bombard friendly islands in Wonsan harbor. The de-
stroyer escort USS DeHaven (DD 727), subsequent to
a barrage striking Yo-do, returns fire. No damage is
sustained at Yo-do on the seventh continuous day of
shelling.
February 16 In Air Force activity, a contingent of
Fifth Air Force aircraft and units of the 1st Marine Air
Wing attack a military complex that holds troop hous-
ing areas and supply depots at various spots in the west-
ern sector of North Korea, in the vicinity of Haeju and
Sariwon. The strike force, composed of 178 planes, is
led by the 1st Marine Air Wing. Lieutenant Joseph
McConnell, Jr., attached to the 39th Fighter Intercep-
tor Wing, downs an enemy plane, his fifth aerial vic-
tory, to become an ace.
In other activity, the 45th Tactical Reconnaissance
Squadron becomes a total jet squadron (RF-80s) on
this day, as its remaining F-51s depart for Japan.
In Naval activity, this day marks the second anniver-
sary of the siege of Wonsan. The naval blockade and
supporting air strikes continue, while the city is essen-
tially isolated with its 30,000 Communist troops. De-
spite the deplorable condition within the city, the Com-
munists are able to continue to use it as a transportation
complex and a supply center. At this time, only about
6,000 civilians are in the city.
February 19, 1953
In other activity, the cruiser USS Toledo (CA 133)
strikes positions of batteries that have been bombard-
ing the friendly islands in Wonsan harbor. The Toledo’s
guns score 3 direct hits.
In other activity, Marine Captain Ted Williams, follow-
ing a mission to attack enemy positions in North Korea,
crash lands at a forward base. Captain Williams survives.
Other than being known as a Marine officer, Captain
Williams is known as a Boston Red Sox star outfielder.
— In Japan: In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy PV2–5
plane, attached to Patrol Squadron 29, having com-
pleted an ASW patrol and picking up some damage,
crash lands at Atsugi (Naval Air Station). The accident
is caused by a malfunction in the hydraulic system.
February 17 In Naval activity, in the skies over
Pyongyang, a contingent of five F4Us, attached to TF-
77, encounter and engage a group of six MiG-15s. Nei-
ther side sustains any losses.
In other activity, Yo-do, a friendly-held island in
Wonsan harbor, again comes under an attack, this time
of short duration. The enemy barrage is in apparent
retaliation for an air attack delivered by planes of TF-
77.
February 18 In Air Force activity, a new joint
operation is initiated by the Air Force and MAG-33 in
an attempt to destroy a North Korean training center
for tankers and infantrymen located southwest of the
capital, Pyongyang. The mission is commanded by
Colonel Louis B. Robertshaw, USMC, the first Marine
to lead such a large joint force, composed of more than
500 aircraft.
The 208 jets that participate maintain the air strikes
for two days and afterward it is determined from pho-
tographs that the 379 sorties destroyed more than 240
buildings. Air Force records note 243 buildings de-
stroyed and for the same raid, U.S. Marine Corps
records indicate 288 destroyed.
On this day, four F-86 Sabre jets engage a force of
48 MiGs in the skies south of the Sui-ho Reservoir.
When the congested skies clear of the criss-crossing air-
craft, the MiGs are short two of their contingent from
air battles and two others are lost by self-inflicted
crashes. They attempt to shadow an F-86 to take it out
and are unable to copy the complicated maneuver of the
F-86 pilot. Both of the pursuing MiGs lose control of
their aircraft, which spin out of control and crash into
the earth. The Sabre jets sustain no losses.
Also, Captain Manuel J. Fernandez, Jr., attached to
the 334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, receives his
fifth and sixth kills to achieve the status of Air Force
ace.
In Naval activity, a sampan moving about 25 miles
south of Chongjin is encountered by the destroyer es-
cort USS Wiseman (DE 667), which seizes five civilians
as prisoners. The crew of the Toledo also destroys the
sampan.
February 19 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 1st South Korean Marine Corps Regiment
February 21, 1953
zone is probed by a Chinese contingent composed of
about two platoons. Guards posted to the front of COP
33 encounter and engage the enemy contingent and af-
terward move back to the outpost. Friendly artillery is
called upon and the combination of the artillery and
mortars inflicts casualties, compelling the enemy to hur-
riedly withdraw.
In Naval activity, the destroyers USS Prichett (DD
561) and USS Gushing (DD 796) accidentally collide.
Neither ship sustains any casualties, but both are com-
pelled to make repairs at Sasebo, Japan.
February 21 In Naval activity, planes from three
separate carriers of TF-77 launch a raid against enemy
rails and bridges.
February 22 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, the 5th Marines dispatch elements of Com-
pany H, 3rd Battalion, during the morning to attack
enemy-held Hill 35A, located southeast of the Ungok
mass. As the Marines advance toward the initial
trenches, the vanguard uses flamethrowers to more
quickly terminate the possibility of interfering grenades
emerging from the bunkers.
After dusk, the 7th Marines send out a probing pa-
trol with some additional muscle. The attack force,
composed of a reinforced platoon bolstered by four M-
46 tanks, moves out at 2137 en route to enemy-held
Hill-159 (Yoke), located slightly north of Freedom Gate
Bridge and in the vicinity of the peace corridor.
The force moves toward the objective; however, the
Chinese foil the attack. An enemy ambush emerges as
the force composed of Company B, 1st Battalion,
reaches Hill 90. The column is hit on three sides and
within minutes, the exchange becomes a close-quar-
tered battle as the Marines slug it out with the Chi-
nese, who attack with company strength. The donny-
brook continues for about thirty minutes, while
reinforcements rush from the MLR.
By 0138, the Chinese disengage and withdraw.
Enemy losses stand at 45 killed (counted) and another
33 estimated killed. In addition, the estimate of enemy
wounded is 33. The Marines sustain 5 killed and 22
wounded.
In Air Force activity, at Suwon, squadrons of the 8th
Fighter-Bomber Group, which had been flying F-80s,
begin their training with F-86Fs. The pilots are able
to adapt easier than those of the 18th Bomber Group,
which had switched from F-51 Mustangs. On this day,
the 36th Squadron initiates training. The 35th Fighter
Bomber Squadron begins its training on 14 March, fol-
lowed by the remaining squadron, the 80th, on 1 May.
The 80th Squadron is the final unit to fly the F-80
Shooting Stars in Korea.
In Naval activity, friendly islands in Wonsan harbor
are shelled by enemy shore guns for about 30 minutes.
The USS Moore (DE 442) and USS Chauncey (DD
667) take the shore batteries under fire and are them-
selves taken under fire by several rounds that land close,
but harmlessly. Four friendly troops on Yo-do Island
are wounded.
912
February 23 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Di-
vision zone, Operation HAYLIFT II commences. It is a
more complicated mission than a similar test (HAYLIFT
I) that had been carried out during the previous Sep-
tember, when helicopters were used to resupply a front-
line regiment. During this operation, helicopters are
used to resupply two regiments, the 5th and 7th
Marines. The operation is twice interrupted by fog;
however, despite the elements and some other difficul-
ties, the operation after five days is completed and the
two regiments receive 1,600,406 pounds of equipment
and supplies.
No members of HMR-161 are injured during the op-
eration, which terminates on 27 February. HMR-161,
commanded by Lt. Colonel John F. Carey, logs a total of
765 combat hours composed of 575 combat flights in
February, out of a total 1,183 flights (1,275.5 hours).
February 24 In Naval activity, the Communists
propel only two rounds against Hwangto-do Island on
this day, making the situation in Wonsan harbor rela-
tively quiet. No damage is inflicted and no casualties are
inflicted.
In other activity, the HNMS Johan Maurits Von Nas-
sau (DD) moves to get a man on Sosuap Island who is
sick and transport him to receive medical aid. While en
route to Sosuap Island, manned by friendly troops, the
ship’s boat comes under fire from another friendly held
island, Taesuapt. The incident takes the life of one
crewman and one South Korean officer is wounded se-
riously.
February 25 The 5th Marines initiates an of-
fensive designed after the recent Operation CLAMBAKE.
The new mission, dubbed Operation CHARLIE, focuses
on Hill 15 (Detroit), which stands about two miles east
of Hills 31 and 31A, the objectives of CLAMBAKE.
Company F, 2nd Battalion, initiates the raid to destroy
enemy positions and if possible, capture prisoners. The
weather, prior to dawn, is inclement, as it had been on
the previous day. The bad weather prevents air cover for
the attack. The raid, however, succeeds in reaching the
hill, where it is discovered that the enemy bunkers and
defensive positions had apparently remained unscathed,
despite a prolonged period of long range artillery at-
tacks and air raids.
In Air Force activity, following a conversion from F-
51 Mustangs (early January) and an extensive retrain-
ing period, the 18th and No. 2 (South African)
Squadron, 18th Fighter Bomber Group, initiate their
first combat mission in Sabre jets. By the beginning of
March, the 18th Fighter Bomber Group will concen-
trate only on fighter combat missions.
February 26 In Air Force activity, planes of the
Fifth Air Force react swiftly to the Communists’ in-
creased activity with daylight convoys. Armed recon-
naissance sorties are launched during daylight hours to
search and destroy any enemy vehicles detected in mo-
tion around the front lines.
February 28 In Air Force activity, two modified
 913
versions of the H-19 helicopter (disassembled) arrive in
Japan, aboard MATS (Military Air Transport Service)
C-124s (Globemasters) on a direct flight from the
States. The new model, an enlarged helicopter, had un-
dergone extensive testing prior to shipment. Once in
Japan, the helicopters are assembled and given addi-
tional test flights before they arrive in Korea to be at-
tached to the 3rd Air Rescue Group.
In Naval activity, during the month of February, de-
spite much inclement weather, the combined amount
of sorties flown by U.S. Navy and Marine Corps pilots
totals 8,680. During this same period, three aviators
are killed. A total of 18 planes are lost and of these,
nine are lost to enemy fire.
In other activity, during February, the enemy is able
to damage only one vessel and it is nominal. Mine-
sweeping operations for the month reveal 12 mines.
March 1 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division zone,
the Chinese launch an attack against Hill 355 (Little
Gibraltar), held by the 2nd Division since 30 January,
when the unit relieved the British Commonwealth Di-
vision. The momentum of the attack gains some
ground, but only temporarily. The 2nd Division units
push the Communists back and repel the assault. Nev-
ertheless, the Chinese make another attempt to seize
the hill on 17 March.
In Naval activity, the USS Valley Forge (CVA 45)
launches jets and propeller aircraft that pound the Chosin
No. 1 power plant. The attack inflicts heavy damage.
In other activity, the friendly island of Yo-do in
Wonsan harbor once again is struck by an artillery bar-
rage from Communist guns; however, no damage is in-
flicted.
March 3 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, there is little activity during the early part of
March; however, on this day, the South Korean Ma-
rine Corps Regiment dispatches one of its probing pa-
trols. The patrol does not encounter any major oppo-
sition. The U.S. Marine patrols also seldom come into
contact with enemy contingents of any large size.
In Naval activity, aircraft from TF-77 make their
first major mission of delivering leaflets throughout
Korea. The planes drop the leaflets along the east coast
of Korea, from the bomb-line to points as far north as
the Yalu River.
March 4 In Naval activity, an accident occurs off
Nan-do Island when the South Korean vessel ROKN
LSSL 110 collides with the destroyer USS Laws (DD
558). The Laws sustains some minor damage.
March 5 In Air Force activity, with a hint of spring
in the air, Fifth Air Force takes advantage of the clear
skies and launches a huge strike force that executes 700
sorties against enemy targets of interest. The industrial
sector at Chongjin in the northeastern area of North
Korea comes under a blistering attack by sixteen F-84
ThunderJets. The F-84s hammer the rails and slice
them repeatedly. The planes devastate many buildings
and demolish four bridges (two rail and two highway).
March 8, 1953
In the meantime, fighter bombers are also on the
hunt in support of the ground troops. Reports from
the crews of the fighter bombers account for the dev-
astation of a combined total of 56 bunkers and artillery
positions. The pilots also find time to strike troop po-
sitions and supply areas.
In other activity, Far East Air Forces launches seven-
teen B-29s of the 98th Bomber Group to strike Onjong,
a strategic enemy supply depot complex, on March
5–6.
Also, a two-plane contingent of B-29s strikes the
marshaling yard at Naewan on the east coast of Korea,
while two other medium bombers pound enemy posi-
tions to the front of IX and X Corps positions. In con-
junction, the planes that attack Naewan are equipped
with the SHORAN bomb system (airborne radar de-
vice coordinated with two ground beacon stations).
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS Chauncey (DD
667), operating near Yo-do Island in Wonsan harbor,
comes under attack, then returns fire and silences the
enemy batteries. In another incident at Wonsan, Com-
munist gunners launch five rounds toward the battle-
ship USS Missouri (BB 63). Unharmed, the Missouri
returns the fire and its long guns quickly extinguish the
hostile fire.
In yet other activity, the carrier USS Valley Forge
(CVA 45) launches planes that deliver an attack against
the Chosin No. 1 hydroelectric station. The raid re-
sults in much damage to the complex.
— In the Soviet Union: Premier Joseph Stalin suc-
cumbs.
March 6 In Naval activity, a tragic accident oc-
curs this day on the carrier USS Oriskany (CVA 34). A
plane on its return from a mission lands on the deck;
however, it has a 250-pound bomb hung up. Upon
landing the bomb comes loose and explodes on the
ship’s No. 3 elevator platform. Two crewmen are killed
and 13 others are injured.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Laws (DD 558),
while operating near Hungnam, comes under enemy
shore battery fire, but the barrage is inaccurate and no
damage is sustained by the ship.
March 7 In Naval activity, off Nan-do, the de-
stroyer USS Black (DD 666) inadvertently collides with
a South Korean boat used for intelligence purposes.
The collision causes the boat to sink, but no damage is
sustained by the destroyer. Six of the men on the boat
are lost; however, nine survivors are rescued.
In other activity, the Formosa Patrol Force, Pacific
Fleet (FORMPATPAC), is established this day. Rear
Admiral T.B. Williams is named as the commanding
officer.
March 8 Colonel Lewis B. Robertshaw, USMC,
commander of MAG-33, flies a mission aboard his F9F
Panther and bombs an enemy ammunition area with
six 250-pound bombs. The mission is the first Marine
jet night MPQ (ground radar controlled bombing) mis-
sion.
March 9, 1953
March 9 In the I Corps sector, 7th Division zone, a
34-man patrol moves into an ambush site and gets
deeply intertwined to the point of becoming completely
surrounded. The Chinese spring the ambush with total
surprise and inflict devastating casualties. Although
outnumbered nearly two to one and outgunned, the
patrol refuses to capitulate. The Americans continue
the fight, while those still able maintain heavy return
fire. Every man in the patrol becomes a casualty.
Twenty men are killed, 12 are wounded and two are
reported missing.
In Air Force activity, media reporters have been pro-
claiming that the border with Manchuria is frequently
violated by U.S. pilots, who give chase to the Commu-
nists’ planes that enter North Korea from Manchuria,
strike, then head back to the safety of the no-fly zone
that begins at the Yalu River.
Far East Air Forces responds to the press on this day
that U.S. pilots halt pursuit at the Yalu and hold strictly
to the rule of not entering Manchuria, but in the heat
of battle in the northern reaches of North Korea, it is
possible that some of the planes inadvertently stray
across the border. It is the rule forbidding the Ameri-
cans from crossing the border that permits the Commu-
nists a free pass if they can outrun the F-86s to reach
the river. The Communists are well aware of the ad-
vantage afforded them by Washington. Also, the Joint
Chiefs of Staff in Washington are informed that de-
spite the reports by the press, the air war in Korea is
operating strictly under the authorized guidelines.
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries
bombard the friendly islands at Wonsan harbor. The
recipient islands are Hwangto-do, Tae-do and Yo-do.
No damage is sustained and no casualties are inflicted
by the enemy fire.
In other activity, the South Korean minesweepers
ROKN AMS 506 and AMS 510 come under enemy
fire near Anbyon. About fifty rounds are fired and both
vessels sustain some slight damage; however, no casu-
alties occur.
March 10 In the I Corps sector, 7th Division zone, a
two-platoon contingent of the Colombian Battalion raids
Chinese positions, but superior enemy fire power, in-
cluding artillery, forbids progress. The Colombians dis-
engage after a short exchange and withdraw. The Colom-
bians sustain 19 killed, 44 wounded and 8 missing.
In Naval activity, the Communist gun batteries again
bombard friendly islands in Wonsan harbor, but less
than 20 rounds are expended. Hwangto-do and Yo-do
come under fire, but no damage or casualties occur.
In other incidents at Wonsan, enemy gunners fire
upon the battleship USS Missouri while her guns are
pummeling enemy positions. None of the enemy
rounds strike closer than 500 yards from the Missouri.
Also, the minesweeper USS Merganser (AMS 26) is
fired upon, but no rounds threaten the ship.
March 11 Communist troops at Wonsan fire
mortars upon Hwangto-do and Yo-do Islands, but no
damage is sustained and no casualties occur.
914
March 12 Far East Air Forces initiates a strike
during the night of the 12th-13th against a military
troop center near Choak, where an ore processing fa-
cility is located near the Yalu River. The target is struck
by twelve B-29s of the 307th Bomber Wing.
March 13 In Naval activity, planes from the car-
riers USS Valley Forge (CVA 45), USS Oriskany (CVA
34), and USS Princeton (CVA 37) execute a huge air
attack against Communist targets, specifically their rails
and bridges, in an effort to cripple transportation
routes.
In other activity, the Communists initiate one of
their usual bombardments of friendly held islands at
Wonsan. Hwangto-do is struck with mortar barrages as
well as artillery rounds, but the guerrillas there report
no damage and no casualties.
March 14 In Air Force activity, the Communists
get a bonus at each of their positions that come under
attack on this day. In addition to dropping bombs and
strafing the positions, the planes drop leaflets that tan-
talize the enemy. Crewmen of Fifth Air Force let the
leaflets, containing a solitary question, drop like
snowflakes. The question is: “Where is the Commu-
nist Air Force?”
Also, aircraft of the 18th Fighter Bomber Group,
composed of planes of the 12th and 67th Squadrons,
initiate missions along the Yalu River. No MiGs are
encountered by the 12th Squadron; however, two
planes of the 67th get intercepted by a band of about
12 MiGs and for a while, the Sabres are caught between
the enemy aircraft. Both pilots, Captain Jim Hager-
strom and Pat Buie, fight their way out of the trap.
Buie’s plane, although not shot down, is badly damaged.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Oriskany (CVA 34)
launches 104 sorties that strike a large mining center
northwest of Songjin.
March 15 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, Colonel Owen A. Chambers assumes com-
mand of HMR-161 (Marine Transport Helicopter
Squadron). He succeeds Lt. Colonel Frank F. Carey.
In Naval activity, Marine pilots (VMA 312), attached
to the carrier USS Bataan (CVL 29), take advantage of
the clear skies and spot several lucrative targets. Two
suspected radar towers are destroyed, along with eight
rail cars and a power transformer.
March 16 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, two separate but minor skirmishes occur in
the 5th Marines zone. A Chinese contingent briefly en-
gages the defenders at COP Reno and in another fire-
fight, a contingent of the 5th Marines on patrol skir-
mishes with a Chinese patrol near COP Carson.
In Naval activity, at Wonsan, Communist shore bat-
teries again bombard Hwanto-do Island, but no dam-
age is sustained. At Songjin, enemy shore gun batter-
ies fire upon the USS James E. Kyes (DD 787), but the
shells all fall far short.
In other activity, at Songjin, Communist shore bat-
teries fire at the minesweeper USS Gull (AMS 16). Sixty
 915 March 22, 1953

rounds are propelled toward the vessel and one hits, ating in front of COP Esther detects the enemy move-
causing some slight damage. In addition, two crewmen ment and scurries back to the outpost to prepare for
are wounded. the assault. The Marines at both outposts repulse the
assaults. COP Hedy is the first to force a disengage-
March 17 In the I Corps sector, 2nd Division zone, ment, but it had only been brushed, as the Chinese
the 2nd Division comes under attack by the Chinese.
company continued directly into the Jamestown Line,
Just east of the 1st Marine Division, the Communists
only to be greeted by heavy doses of artillery and mor-
strike against Hill 355, known as Little Gibraltar. The
tar fire.
2nd Division had relieved the British Commonwealth
At Esther, the Chinese continue to attack for several
Division at the hill on 30 January. Elements of the 2nd
hours but are forced to retire without gaining the out-
Division had earlier, on 1 March, repulsed an attack;
post. During the unsuccessful attempt to seize the
however, this assault is made by a stronger force, an
ground, the Chinese along the MLR and at both out-
entire battalion.
posts become the recipients of 2,400 rounds of artillery
The Communists strike from the north and north-
and mortar shells.
east and remain oblivious to the minefields and barbed
In other activity, a patrol of the 1st Battalion, 5th
wire. They are able to penetrate and reach the trenches
Marines, composed of Company B, moves out during
atop the crest. The 2nd Division defenders are forced
the early morning hours and raids enemy-held Hill
from the summit; however, two platoons holding
31A. The raid (Operation ITEM) is the first against the
blocking positions surge forward and plug the hole to
objective since February, when it and another target,
halt further penetration, while the remainder of the
Hill 31, were raided. Following air strikes and an ar-
force on the slopes engages in ferocious fighting that
tillery bombardment, two platoons move out at 0518.
includes point-blank range firing and hand-to-hand
The raid nets no prisoners, due in part because the pre-
combat. The struggle ensues throughout the night, but
liminary strikes prompted the Communists to seek
by dawn, American reinforcements arrive to augment
cover on the reverse slope; however, enemy artillery
the position and the Chinese are driven off. While the
strikes heavily and the Marines disengage and with-
Chinese disengage and retire, U.S. artillery and mortar
draw to the MLR at 0700.
fire continue to pound the retreating troops. During
In Naval activity, planes from three carriers of Task
the latter part of the month (23rd), the Chinese launch
Force 77 execute a full-scale attack against a primary
other assaults against I Corps positions.
Communist industrial target, the city of Chongjin. The
In the 1st Marine Division zone, a Chinese contin-
industrial targets in the northeastern sector of the city
gent of about platoon-size sets up an ambush post in the
are deluged with bombs, delivered by 169 sorties.
area traversed by Marine patrols operating near COP
In other activity, the Communist shore gun batter-
Vegas. The Chinese snare a patrol, but only momentar-
ies at Wonsan take Yo-do Island under fire, but no dam-
ily, as the Marines evict the ambush party. The Chinese
age is inflicted and no casualties occur. Hwangto-do
retire quickly.
also comes under attack, but again, no damage and no
In Air Force activity, the Communists get no reprieve
casualties. Also, the Communists take the cruiser USS
as ground troop locations in MiG Alley come under a
Los Angeles (CA 135) under fire while she is operating
heavy attack by medium bombers of the 307th Bomber
near Wonsan, bombarding enemy gun positions. The
Wing and the 19th Bomber Wing. The attack, exe-
Los Angeles sustains no damage and no casualties.
cuted during the night of the 17th-18th, strikes the
positions at Punghwa-dong, located only a few miles March 20 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
from the MiG base at Sinuiju, one day after Fifth Air zone, HMR-161 initiates a four-day operation to re-
Force dared the MiGs to come out and fight. Nonethe- supply ammunition by helicopter for the entire Division.
less, no planes are lost. The bombers sustain only some
minor flak damage from artillery units on the ground.
March 21 Communist representatives at the peace
talks at Panmunjom indicate they are prepared to op-
In Naval activity, the USS Taussig (DD 746) and
erate under the provisions of the Geneva Convention
USS James E. Kyes (DD), while operating near Songjin,
with regard to sick and wounded POWs. The Com-
come under fire from Communist shore batteries. The
munists also imply that the exchange of the sick and
Taussig sustains some slight damage after receiving one
wounded could bring about compromise to eliminate
hit.
the obstacles and move to a full armistice.
March 18 The LST 623 attempts to embark from In Air Force activity, Operation SPRING THAW com-
Sokch’o, however, as the vessel begins to leave the har- mences. Far East Air Forces launches eighteen B-29s
bor, it runs aground on breakwater rocks. The ground- of the 19th Bomber Group to strike the bridges at
ing inflicts heavy damage upon the ship. Yongmi-dong to impede enemy movements. The op-
eration continues on the night of the 22nd-23rd and re-
March 19 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi- sults in the destruction of two of the spans.
sion zone, the Chinese launch simultaneous company-
sized attacks against two outposts manned by the 1st March 22 In Air Force activity, the Communists
Marines. COP Hedy and Esther are separated by about repair the bridge spans at Yongmi that had been dam-
one and one-half miles. A reconnaissance patrol oper- aged the previous night. However, the work project
March 23, 1953
does not go unnoticed. Eight more B-29s arrive on the
night of the 22nd-23rd an again pound the spans, in-
cluding the one that had been repaired. The planes are
not sent back on the following day, based on the prem-
ise that enemy artillery and possibly aircraft would be
waiting and cause high casualties.
In Naval activity, at Wonsan, for the second consec-
utive day, Communist gunners fire upon the battleship
Missouri, but to no avail. The destroyer USS Prichett
(DD 561) and the minesweeper USS Waxbill (AMS
39) both come under fire with the identical results, no
damage and no casualties. The Communist shore bat-
teries also fire upon Hwangto-do and Yo-do, but the
guerrillas sustain no damages and no casualties occur.
Yo-do also comes under fire, but yet again, the Com-
munist gunners fire without achieving any accuracy.
In other activity, planes attached to TF-77, while on
a mission near the Manchurian border, observe an air-
craft on the Manchurian side of the border at Ta-ku-
shan. The plane appears to be a Russian-made TU-4,
a Communist version of the B-29.
March 23 In the I Corps sector, 7th Division zone,
the Chinese mount strong attacks to evict the U.S. 7th
Division from three outposts, Hills 255, 191 and 266,
the latter receiving the biggest thrust of the assault. At
Hill 255, known as Pork Chop Hill, and at Hill 191,
the Chinese are repulsed. At Hill 266 (Old Baldy), de-
fended by elements of the Colombian Battalion, the
first wave of Chinese steam-rolls into the positions at
about 2100 and seizes the objective. The Colombian
troops withdraw to the southeastern slope.
On the following day, the 7th Division mounts a
counterattack and fights its way to the crest, where a
tenacious brawl erupts. The Chinese, however, retain
the bunkers and trenches. The elements of the 7th Di-
vision are compelled to disengage. A new counterat-
tack is mounted on the 24th, but again, the Chinese
prevail. The Chinese gain one of the three hills, but in
the process, according to the records of the U.S. 7th
Division, they sustain about 750 casualties.
At Hill 191, the fighting is of short duration. The de-
fenders request assistance while the enemy battalion
begins its ascent. The reinforcements arrive to bolster
the line and force the Chinese to abort the attack soon
after it had begun.
In the meantime, at Hill 255, another battalion
launches an attack and, bolstered by tanks and artillery,
the Chinese succeed in gaining the summit. The ele-
ments of the 7th Division are forced to withdraw about
700 yards, but by midnight, a counterattack unfolds.
Slightly after midnight (23rd-24th), the 7th Division
contingent initiates a charge that carries them to the
summit, where they eliminate or disperse the Chinese
to reclaim the hill.
In Naval activity, jets attached to the USS Oriskany
(CVA 34) execute a devastating attack (known as
“Lights Out”) against a water power facility, located
below the Fusen Reservoir.
In other activity, at Songjin, while the destroyer USS
916
Owen (DD 536) is operating, Communist shore gun
batteries fire upon her, but the two rounds fail to in-
flict any harm. And at Yo-do, Communist gun batter-
ies fire upon guerrilla positions; however, the bombard-
ment causes no injuries or damage.
March 24 The Communists hold Hill 266 (Old
Baldy), despite renewed attacks by the 7th Division.
Hill 266 had been initially gained by the 2nd Division
during the previous summer.
March 25 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the Chinese, after failing in two attempts on
the 23rd to gain COPS Hedy or Esther (Vegas Out-
posts), focus upon other outposts in the zone defended
by the 1st Marines during the latter part of the night.
No progress is made by the enemy, but on the follow-
ing day, after dusk, the Chinese resume the assault
against COP Dagmar, an engagement that proves to
be the preliminary exchange prior to a large-scale attack.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries com-
mence firing upon the destroyer USS Prichett (DD 561)
while she is operating in the area around Wonsan. De-
spite fourteen rounds being expended, no harm comes
to the ship.
March 26–31 1953 THE BATTLE FOR
VEGAS In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone,
the recent series of raids against outposts have not
gone unnoticed by the Marines. Although they have
been restrained, along with the rest of Eighth Army,
since the previous year when the peace talks began,
the intelligence units have been working at full
strength. With the first days of spring upon them
and knowledge of past Communist actions consid-
ered, a major attack is not out of the question. The
U.S. troops and the other U.N. forces have now
completed three winters in Korea and if history re-
peats itself, the roads will flood, the bridges will be-
come imperiled, and the mud will greatly impede
overland operation by vehicles.
During the winter, some modifications along the
Jamestown Line shortened the Marine sector, but
not much. The Marines continue to be responsible
for a 33-mile stretch of the line and still, they are
the major obstacle standing between the Commu-
nists and the South Korean capital, Seoul.
Following a couple of early morning skirmishes,
the front lines of the 1st Marine Division remain
tranquil throughout the day; however, a keen vigil
is kept in the event the Chinese maintain their tra-
dition of launching a spring offensive. The Marines
pay particular attention with the realization that the
Chinese would like an opportunity to avenge their
failure at the Hook during the previous October.
While the winter passed, none of the Chinese ini-
tiatives gained any genuine progress, other than the
seizure of a few outposts.
Had they scored some major successes or moved to
position from which they could be staring at the cap-
ture of Seoul, the U.N. might have been pressured into
 917
Outpost Dagmar under artillery attack on 26 March.
bending to some of the more ludicrous demands by
the Communists at the talks in Panmunjom; how-
ever, the ongoing stalemate is not working to their
advantage. Nevertheless, the Marines are aware that
if they falter along their perimeter, the situation at
Panmunjom could change, particularly because the
Chinese had gained Old Baldy on the 23rd in the
U.S. 7th Division zone and on this day, the 7th Di-
vision abandons the hill. Eighth Army intuition re-
garding the attack comes to fruition at 1900, when
the Chinese launch a full-scale assault against the
Marine positions.
The vanguard of the defense, the 120 or so
Marines at Carson-Reno-Vegas, senses the immi-
nent approach of the Chinese as enemy positions on
Hills 44, 40, 35 and 33 commence firing with small
arms and machine guns that essentially plunder the
ground all along the entire 5th Marines’ line. The
5th Marines perimeter becomes a cauldron of fire as
the non-stop shelling pulverizes some command
posts and severs communications with the strung-
out outposts.
The defenders at the outposts do not require fur-
ther signs of attack. The thunderclap shakes the earth
just as the sun retreats over the horizon. While
enemy artillery rings the area in synchronization with
mortar fire, the shelling extends even to the rear
areas, transforming what had been a rather ordinary
day into the beginning of a hellish night. While the
enemy bombardment propels a steady stream of
shells into the 5th Marine positions in the left and
March 26, 1953
center, an enemy contingent on another nearby po-
sition, Hill 144, rakes the Marine zone with heavy
machine gun fire and rifle fire.
Meanwhile, outposts Carson, Reno and Vegas,
each renamed from their previous designation of
Allen, Bruce and Clarence, come under artillery and
mortar fire. The outposts stand in the western (left)
zone of the 5th Marines’ line, which is defended by
the 1st Battalion, but the three hills are each de-
fended by only about forty-fifty Marines, assisted
by two Navy corpsmen.
At the same time, other outposts come under at-
tack, including Berlin and East Berlin in the 3rd Bat-
talion’s zone. Farther along the line, the Chinese
pound 1st Marines’ positions, including COPS
Hedy, Bunker, Esther and Dagmar, which are spread
across the center of the regimental line. They had
come under bombardment several minutes prior to
the primary artillery assault that commenced at 1900
as part of a Chinese diversion. In conjunction with
the artillery assault in the 1st Marines’ zone, small
contingents begin to probe the defenses.
The defenders at Hedy, Esther and Dagmar are
struck by units ranging from squads to platoons,
while other units are detected advancing against the
MLR positions farther west, defended by the 1st Ko-
rean Marine Corps Regiment. The enemy thrust be-
gins as a powerful blow, and within minutes after
the attack is ignited, it becomes more potent. At
Hedy, Bunker, Esther and Dagmar, the assault be-
gins at just about the same time as the artillery fire.
March 26, 1953
The ground troops, at about company-size, are sup-
ported by machine gun fire on Hills 44, 114 and
116 and additional support is provided by riflemen
on Hill 108. The defenders hold steadfastly against
the superior numbers and methodically mow them
down at each of the outposts, but at Dagmar, the
Chinese are able to make some penetration against
the defending group of only 27 Marines who revert
to close-quartered fighting to remove the intruders
from the trenches.
For about two hours, the Marines use every tool in
their arsenal from rifles to bare knuckles and bayonets
to defend their positions. Reinforcements from Com-
pany I, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, arrive from the
MLR and efficiently clear the remaining Chinese
from the trenches. By 2120, Dagmar is secure, as the
Chinese abandon the assault. During this diversion-
ary attack, the Chinese sustain 10 known killed and
an estimated additional 20 killed. The Marines in
this sector sustain 4 killed and 16 wounded.
In the meantime, by 1910, the 358th Regiment,
120th Division, attached to the 40th Chinese Army,
unleashes about 3,500 troops that flow profusely
from four points—Ungok, Arrowhead, Hill 25A and
Hill 190— and drive directly into the 5th Marines’
positions. Contingents of 6 companies, pulled from
three separate battalions, swoop upon the perimeter
from several directions to smash through the out-
posts. At Carson, where about 1,200 mortar rounds
hit by 1920, the defending platoon is struck by two
platoons that had advanced rapidly from Ungok. At
the same time, Reno and Vegas are each pounded by
a company-sized contingent. The Chinese from Ar-
rowhead and from Hill 29 (3rd Company, 1st Bat-
talion), sprint across the Seoul Road and launch a
frontal attack, while elements of the 7th Company,
3rd Battalion, which descend from Hill 190, ma-
neuver from the north to surround the outpost and
strike from the rear.
The third spearhead of the attack is composed of
the 8th Company, 3rd Battalion, and units from the
9th Company, which slither along the ridgeline and
move about 500 yards south of Hill 25A and Hill
155, north of Vegas, from where they smash against
the frontal defenses. With the combined strength of
the three outposts standing at about 120 Marines,
the Chinese hold an advantage of about 20-to-1.
The defenders receive some extra muscle due to
the division’s anticipation of the assault. Artillery
and tanks had already prepared by registering their
fire on suspected approach routes and for protective
“Box-Me-In” fire. U.S. artillery and tanks had begun
to return fire at the first sounds of the guns. Protec-
tive fire is thrown around the outposts and the ap-
proach routes are also stung with voluminous volleys;
however, the overwhelming numbers of Chinese and
their uncanny trait of ignoring even direct hits as
they advance are not strong enough to halt the tide.
The outposts are essentially isolated as they attempt
to hold against insurmountable odds.
918
The Marines at Carson and Reno resist fero-
ciously; however, their numbers are too small to plug
every hole. By 1935, some Chinese are able to pen-
etrate the lower trenches of both outposts, but still,
they are unable to overwhelm the defenders. The
struggle turns to close-quartered brutal fighting as the
Chinese press harder, only to discover that the
Marines refuse to capitulate.
At Carson, the initial force numbers only 54
Marines, but following one hour of relentless com-
bat, the post had not been taken. The Marines had
reverted to their knives, bayonets, rifle butts, boots
and fists to retain their ground. All the while, rein-
forcements are heading to augment the Marines, but
by the time the two reinforced squads from Company
C and D are about to move to the besieged post, the
Chinese, at 2000, suddenly released the pressure
against Carson. It had held. The fighting tails off
and by 2135, the Chinese withdraw and join in the
attack to seize Reno and Vegas. The Marines continue
to receive mortar and artillery fire until about mid-
night, but no further attacks are launched against
the position, even on the following day.
While, Carson, Reno and Vegas resist the Chi-
nese assaults, two other outposts, Berlin and East
Berlin, in the far reaches of the 5th Marines sector
(right flank), also come under assault and the
strength there is close to the bare minimum. Each
outpost is defended only by a reinforced squad from
Company G, 3rd Battalion. Nevertheless, the Chi-
nese concentrate less strength against both of the
posts and the defenders are able to turn back the at-
tacks and preserve both Berlin and East Berlin,
which had come under assault by three platoons, one
against East Berlin and the others against Berlin.
For a short period, communications with head-
quarters are lost and reinforcements are dispatched.
By 2115, the Chinese abort the attacks and retire.
However, at Reno and Vegas, the situation had be-
come more grim.
The defenders at Reno are initially struck by two
companies that bang against the front and rear si-
multaneously and penetrate the trenches. Like Car-
son, an abundance of friendly artillery fire is poured
upon the approaches, but the Chinese continue to ad-
vance through the whirlwind of fire. The Marines
continue to mow down the intruders, but seemingly,
for every enemy soldier eliminated, a few more ap-
pear. The overwhelming numbers compress the
Marines into a small defensive position, due to the
absence of a sufficient number of bunkers and defen-
sive trenches. Unrelenting fire by the Chinese shreds
the numbers of the defenders. Of forty Marines that
had met the initial charge, only 7 are able to con-
tinue the struggle after a tenacious exchange that
lasts about one-half hour. While the Chinese con-
tinue to smother the resistance, the Marines hold
out in a cave, but here, too, the Chinese hold the
advantage, as all entrances are sealed by the enemy,
choking off the air supply.
 919
A view from the front. A first aid bunker built on a reverse slope to afford some safety for the wounded.
The bunker was erected by the 1st Engineer Battalion, USMC.
Desperate calls are made by the surviving troops
of Company C at 2000, explaining that their air sup-
ply had been cut. Artillery units propel illumination
shells to expose the enemy, while tanks stationed to
the rear of the beleaguered outpost take advantage
of the artificial light and pound the enemy, but still
the Chinese hammer the defiant hold-outs in the
cave. In the meantime, a flare plane arrives to pro-
vide more illumination for the support fire.
Reinforcements from the MLR move to Reno
within fifteen minutes of the urgent calls for help, but
en route, by way of the Reno Block, an enemy con-
tingent waits in ambush near Hill 47 at about 2115.
The contingent, elements of Company F, 2nd Bat-
talion, returns fire and is able to make it to the block-
ing position. Another relief column, composed of
troops from Company C, 1st Battalion, is moving be-
hind the initial group by about fifteen minutes, but
it, too, is intercepted before it can advance one-half
mile. Artillery fire showers the 2nd column, forcing
a temporary halt. After a pause, it renews the ad-
vance, only to be hit again as it nears Hill 47.
The unit fights its way past the obstacle; however,
more enemy troops await them. Two platoons pre-
vent quick passage and continue to inflict casualties
upon the reinforcements. By the time the group en-
counters the third obstacle, 10 Marines have been
wounded seriously and evacuated.
The situation at Vegas is similar to that at Reno.
The defenders come under horrific bombardment
and like the Marines at Reno, friendly artillery
March 26, 1953
mounts return fire to pummel the approach routes
and lay out a protective ring of “Box-Me-In” fire to
bolster the defenses. However, the overwhelming
waves force the Marines to seek cover in a cave to
give them more tenable positions and afford some
protection from the friendly fire.
Reinforcements, composed of elements of Com-
pany D, 2nd Battalion rush to bolster Vegas, but the
troops are intercepted at the Block. A fierce exchange
erupts, but as the two opposing forces face each other
at close range, the Marines prevail in the hand-to-
hand combat and push the Chinese back. Although
the Marines are unable to break through, they are
able to prevent the Chinese from dominating the po-
sition. While Company C trades blows with the Chi-
nese, yet another relief force, drawn from Company
F, 2nd Battalion, is quickly attached to the 1st Bat-
talion and ordered to join the relief column at the
Reno Block to strengthen the attack of Company C,
1st Battalion.
Company F, 2nd Battalion (attached to 1st Battal-
ion), drives through unrelenting artillery and mor-
tar fire in an attempt to hook up with the troops at
the Block. The first contingent leads the way at 2227,
with another platoon about 400 yards to the rear.
The entire trek is executed under a tumultuous
firestorm, but it is unable to halt the column. Casu-
alties mount quickly, even at the first steps of the ad-
vance; however, the Marines endure, aware that the
advance relief force and the survivors at Reno face a
more desperate situation. One of the platoons of
March 26, 1953
An M46 dozer attached to the 1st Tank Battalion (USMC) with an improvised protective shield. The
fencing is designed to cause a 3.5 rocket to explode before it strikes the tank.
Company F sustains a casualty rate of 70 percent
before it finally reaches the advance elements of
Company C at the Block. All the while, the few
remaining defenders at Reno continue to hold, but
at last report, only seven Marines had been able-
bodied and the string of attackers continues to be
endless and other units continue to pour from the
hills.
The Chinese unleash fresh troops from positions
to the rear of Chogum-ni and from Hills 31 and
31D, to replace the ones that had fallen and to bol-
ster the respective assaults. One of the enemy groups
is spotted in the vicinity of Chogum-ni at 2100, but
it is not able to easily join the offensive. U.S. tanks
and artillery pulverize the position and cause the Chi-
nese to disperse before they can launch their assault.
All along the chaotic battlefield, there is a constant
clash of shells and bayonets, grenades and raw knuck-
les as the Marines galvanize to halt the onslaught.
The relief column of Company F, 2nd Battalion,
fights its way to the positions of Company C, 1st
Battalion, at the Block, where it joins with the bat-
tered force. The Chinese maintain effective fire on the
position, but as the two groups combine their fire-
power, they are able to either liquidate or chase the
Communists who had entered the trenches there
from the north and south.
Meanwhile, at Reno, the defenders report at 2145
that the position is still active, but the report details
how the Chinese are attempting to dig their way into
the cave. A faint sounding radio message is received
920
at about 2300 from the cave at Reno, but it is unin-
telligible. It is the last message sent.
Like the reinforcements en route to Reno, the
same circumstances had befallen Company D, 2nd
Battalion. It, too, is stalled at the Block, unable to
break through to the diminishing number of defend-
ers at Reno. In an attempt to wipe out the relief
forces, the Chinese crash against the Block at 2157
with two platoons. Within about twenty minutes,
two additional platoons plow against the relief forces,
while the area is also plastered by mortars and ar-
tillery. The Marines resist with extraordinary tenac-
ity and repulse three separate attacks in the Block
by 2300. Within the following hour, another large
force of about company strength prepares to lunge
from Reno to pounce upon the Block.
While the Marines brace for yet another assault,
they receive effective interference, as artillery and
90-mm guns of some tanks score repeated direct hits
to eliminate the threat and buy time for the belea-
guered troops in the Block to regroup for a thrust
against Reno.
Back at the MLR, at 2323, another relief force, a
platoon from Company E, 2nd Battalion, is sped to
the Vegas Block to bolster Company D. However,
Chinese resistance refuses to falter. Enemy fire accel-
erates and more fresh troops are funneled into the
fight. The 5th Marines continues to raise ferocious
resistance, but the regiment is exhausting its reserve
in the process.
In the meantime, at 2300, the Chinese throw a
 921
huge number of fresh troops against the Block to
crush the Marine relief columns and by midnight
(26th-27th), the situation becomes more grim as
communications with Vegas are completely severed.
The reinforcements for Reno and Vegas remain
pinned at the Block and yet even more enemy troops
are pouring into the region, while the Chinese ar-
tillery continues to lambaste 5th Marines’ positions.
At the Block, the troops, despite the enfilade fire,
regroup to make another attempt at reaching Reno,
but it is unable to execute the attack.
While the Marines maintain their attacks to regain
Vegas, the Chinese threaten another outpost, Kate,
in the 1st Marines’ zone. The defenders there spot
about two platoons near the barbed wire and engage
the force. Following about a 15-minute firefight, the
Chinese retire, but shortly thereafter, at midnight, the
Chinese begin to probe Outposts Dagmar and Es-
ther. The Marines had anticipated the encounter, as
both had been probed on the previous night.
At Dagmar, the Marines of Company I, 1st
Marines, call upon artillery support and head for the
reverse slope to await the termination of the bom-
bardment. Afterward, the defenders reoccupy the
positions, supported by artillery and mortars. The
Marines exchange fire and clash at close-quarters in
the trenches with the Communists for about two
hours and at the cessation of the fight, the Marines
hold sole possession of the trenches and the outpost,
as the Chinese, unable to make gains, withdraw.
Slightly afterward, Outpost Hedy and Outpost
Bunker also come under attack by a small enemy
contingent, but at both positions, the enemy is
stymied and thrown back by the 1st Marines.
Back at the Vegas Block, by about 0145 on the
27th, the reinforcements under Captain Ralph L.
Walz are whittled down to one platoon, yet he ral-
lies the force and within an hour, they spring into an
attack three times. During one skirmish, the Marines
slug it out for one-half hour of give-no-quarter com-
bat. Following the donnybrook, the troops again re-
organize and evacuate the wounded.
Nevertheless, the Chinese still retain Reno and
Vegas and by this time, the enemy is able to open a
valve and pour fresh troops against the Block. At
about 0246, while under severe mortar attack, a new
wave of Chinese is spotted as it flows toward the
Reno Block from the direction of Reno. The 1st Bat-
talion immediately orders the artillery to plant a
picket fence of shells upon the advancing force, while
simultaneously directing Captain Walz to break off
the engagement and move back to the MLR with
the elements of Company C, 1st Battalion, 5th
Marines, and Company F, 2nd Battalion (attached to
1st Battalion), 5th Marines.
In the meantime, fighting at Vegas, which also
had come under control of the Chinese by midnight
(26th-27th), continues into the early morning hours
of the 27th, as Company D, 2nd Battalion, and
Company C, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, attempt to
March 26, 1953
penetrate beyond the communication trench of the
outpost, a point about 400 yards from Vegas. Mean-
while, the Chinese continue to pour fresh troops into
battle as if they are being created on a conveyor belt.
During the first hours of the 27th, the Chinese
send a new layer against the Marines, who resist sav-
agely. A reinforcing unit, composed of elements of
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, is rushed to
bolster the forces trying to rescue Vegas, but the
move is in vain. At 0300, the first relief platoon ad-
vances to within 200 yards of the outpost, but dis-
mal news overshadows the advance. It is learned the
Vegas as well as Reno had fallen to the Chinese, giv-
ing them some progress in this early stage of their
offensive.
By about 0400, the relief units are under orders to
postpone an attack and return to the MLR. Shortly
thereafter, the contingents — composed of Compa-
nies D and E, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, Com-
pany C, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, and Company
F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines — disengage, return
to the MLR and prepare to mount a new assault dur-
ing the daylight hours of the 27th. In conjunction,
the relief force for Reno arrives back at its lines at
0440, followed by the reinforcements for Vegas,
which arrive at 0530.
The first eight hours of the struggle for Carson-
Reno-Vegas terminates with the Chinese temporar-
ily holding a better hand, with control of two out-
posts, Reno and Vegas. Nonetheless, there is no aura
of despair hovering over the 5th Marines’ perime-
ter, rather, a more galvanized determination to return
and evict the new occupants. However, other prior-
ities have to first be handled. The defenders inflicted
heavy casualties upon the Chinese, compelling them
to pay an exorbitant price for the real estate. The
Marines, too sustain high casualties.
In the 1st and 3rd Battalion zones, stretchers, am-
bulances, vehicles and helicopters are all engaged in
moving and evacuating the wounded. During the
course of the battle for the outposts, the two regi-
ments had sustained 150 casualties (excludes relief
force casualties), while inflicting about 600 casual-
ties upon the Chinese. Many of the wounded
Marines, after being treated, return to the field to
assist in the evacuation of others. The more seriously
injured are transported by helicopters (VMO-6 and
HMR-161) to Inchon, where two hospital ships, the
USS Haven and USS Consolation, are anchored. The
helicopters also transport supplies of blood for those
who require transfusions and deliver them to various
medical aid stations along the lines.
While the 5th Marines prepare the day’s battle
plans, the 11th Marines concentrate their guns upon
Reno, Vegas and other enemy-held positions to
soften them for the attack and also to repay them in
kind for the 14,000 artillery and mortar shells that
whacked the 5th Marines during the ghastly eight-
hour donnybrook. In turn, the Marine artillery re-
turned more than 10,000 rounds during that same
March 26, 1953
period. Chinese artillery positions also come under
attack by Marine planes of VMF(N)-513, which soar
overhead and pummel targets in the vicinity of Hills
190 and 98. The Marines piloting the jets use radar
controlled bombs and strike before the arrival of
other planes, subsequent to dawn.
The Chinese discover at dawn that the 5th
Marines are not yet re-knocking on the gates of Reno
and Vegas, but unknown to the enemy, the delay had
not been due to timidity of the 5th Marines; rather,
a slight postponement occurs until a Marine
squadron arrives. At precisely 0650, as the Chinese
and the Marines glance toward the sky, it is appar-
ent that the attack is imminent. The Panther jets
from VMF-115 arrive to join with the artillery that
is riveting the enemy’s positions. The Panthers strike
at Reno and Vegas.
The ground attack, rescheduled for 0900, is again
suspended due to some communication difficulties.
In the meantime, the Marine pilots remain extremely
busy as more planes, attached to VMF-311, arrive.
Without the interference of the 5th Marines, they
take the opportunity to revisit the target repeatedly.
Four separate strikes, each by six aircraft, blanket the
area. In addition, U.S. Air Force Thunderbird (T-33)
jets arrive and deliver more punishment. All the
while, the artillery and the 1st Tank Battalion main-
tain their fire. The tankers (Company A) spot two
contingents of Chinese involved with moving logs
in an apparent step to bolster the bunkers, but the 90-
mm guns disrupt the process. One of the contin-
gents is annihilated; however the other group makes
it through the streams of fire.
At 1120, the attack is commenced, with the se-
lected target being Vegas, leaving Reno for a subse-
quent attack, but in the process of regaining Vegas,
Reno remains under the guns of the artillery and
mortar to fire to isolate it from the main assault force.
While Vegas is bludgeoned with air strikes as well as
fire from the 11th Marines and the 1st Tank Battal-
ion, Company D, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, moves
up and passes the line of departure at 1120. Chinese
return fire immediately crashes into the path of the
advancing column. The vanguard presses forward
without any relief from the enemy small arms and ar-
tillery, making the trek most difficult. Shells are fly-
ing inbound from several locations, stalling the ad-
vance. Soon after, the attack continues, only to again
be halted by artillery.
By slightly after 1200, the vanguard, the 1st Pla-
toon, is nearly totally eliminated. Only nine Marines
remain able-bodied. Nevertheless, the advance troops
refuse to stall. The forward nine press ahead, moving
through soggy swollen rice paddies toward the slopes
of the Vegas Hills. At about the time the thinning
spearhead reaches a point about 200 yards from the
MSR, enemy reinforcements are spotted as they rush
from Hill 143 to augment Vegas. In the meantime, the
enemy guns continue to hammer the approaches and
maintain a wall of fire in front of the objective.
922
The combined fire of the opposing forces creates
unbearable noise, at times making it difficult to com-
municate on the ground, and the unending streams
of shells descend upon the area like a horrific iron
hailstorm. Vegas, begins to resemble a fortress atop
an erupting volcano and the Marines of Company D
are plodding through the intense fire, at times be-
coming frozen in place due to the impenetrable walls
of fire.
While the Marines work to find a way to take the
crest, Marine squadrons join with the ongoing bom-
bardment and add to the intensity of the conflagra-
tion. Vegas is now heavily reinforced and supporting
guns are on the nearby slopes. While the vicious fire
staggers the advance, it is unable to immobilize the
troops. They have come to stay and reclaim the
ground where their fellow Marines fell the previous
night. But, now, there are many more defenders. Be-
tween noon and 1300, four additional contingents ar-
rive at Vegas from Hill 153. By 1315, another con-
tingent of about company-size arrives. And still
others are en route, one group from Reno and an-
other from Hill 21B. The Chinese plan an all-out
effort to deprive the Marines of their prize.
In the meantime, the Marines of Company D, get
some additional support from the sky, as the planes
of three squadrons are overhead criss-crossing the
hills and byways in search of prey. The Douglas
Skyknights of VMA-121 blend perfectly with the
fighter jets of MAG-33 Squadrons VMF-115 and
311. The planes strike swiftly and devastate the land-
scape, particularly that which is determined to con-
tain troops formations, bunkers, artillery positions
and trenches.
All the while, Company D grinds toward the
slopes. Reinforcements are en route from the MLR to
assist in the struggle. The Provisional Company, 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, jumps off just after 1200 and
in a short while, it is trailed by Company E, 2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines. By 1305, just about the time the
objective receives a large amount of fresh troops, Com-
pany D, initiates a determined push to take the out-
post. From the lower slopes of the hill, riflemen en-
gage the enemy using everything in their arsenal,
including BARs, M-1s, grenades and carbines, as they
gnaw forward through the fire storm coming from the
upper slopes and supporting guns of the nearby hills.
After a period of about two hours of facing hor-
rific resistance, four Marines lead the way as they
scramble out of the trenches. Soon after, by 1322,
while still braving small arms, mortar and artillery fire
as the shells explode all around them, they creep from
the trenches.
In the meantime, Company E, 2nd Battalion, ar-
rives from the MLR and is directed to pass through
Company D, retrieve and evacuate the wounded and
take over the task to seize the summit of Vegas. The
commander of Company E leads his command for-
ward and they Company D; however, the enemy fire
remains intense despite the day-long bombardments
 923
and air strikes. The reinforcing unit is unable to ad-
vance beyond the positions of Company D. Slightly
afterward, elements of Company D advance to po-
sitions at the finger of Vegas, but here, too, a wall of
artillery and mortar fire prevents passage to the crest.
Another reinforcing contingent, Company F, 2nd
Battalion, which departs the MLR at 1530, arrives
within an hour at the positions of Company D.
Upon its arrival, Company D heads back to its line
of departure.
Company F assumes the point to spearhead the
assault, but the enemy pinpoints its positions and at
1730. It is besieged with an enfilade of crushing fire
that disrupts the jump-off. The troops are compelled
to gnaw forward, while support fire from the 11th
Marines and planes of VMF-323 try to extinguish
the origin points of the seemingly inexhaustible
enemy fire. While the attacking elements creep for-
ward slowly, soaring aircraft swoop toward targets
on Hills 190 and 139, providing close-combat sup-
port by diving low and delivering their respective
munitions upon the slopes. While the hills explode
and giant fireballs ascend, the planes again dive to
deliver more punishing blows.
While the enemy attempts to find cover, tanks
along the MLR inject their 90-mm rifles into the
fight and plaster the northern crest of Vegas, the ob-
stinate stronghold of the Chinese. While the bom-
bardment continues, Company H reinitiates its at-
tack at 1800 from a point about 400 yards from the
crest of Vegas. By this time, elements of Company E,
2nd Battalion, join with Company F, led by Cap-
tain Ralph F. Estey, placing the attack force at three
platoons.
As the Marines lunge forward, they reclaim a piece
of the objective and ignite another close-quartered
savage duel in the lower trenches that terminates after
about one and one-half hours of grueling combat.
Company E moves to the right of the outpost and be-
gins to regroup by 1930. Meanwhile, a contingent of
Company F, composed of two platoons, maneuvers
to reach positions within 50 yards of the summit by
about 2000; however, they stall as the Chinese fire
intensifies. Company F is compelled to pull back
due to ferocious mortar and machine gun fire orig-
inating at the left (Able) gate of Vegas.
By this time, the struggle for control of Vegas has
been ongoing for more than 24 hours and neither
side shows any outward signs of backing down.
While the Marines prepare to spend another sleep-
less night, the Chinese continue to fortify their po-
sitions and bring in fresh troops from Reno, the other
outpost they had overrun on the previous night.
The Chinese waste no time in trying to push the
Marines from the outpost. At 1830, they launch the
first of three counterattacks. The outnumbered
Marines are unable to remain on the crest, but they
repulse each of the night assaults convincingly and
in addition, as the night passes, the Marines engage
in various firefights. In addition to their failure to
March 26, 1953
dislodge the Marines, the Chinese also are compelled
to tolerate a night sky permeated with Marine
squadrons that illuminate the slopes controlled by
the enemy by dropping more than 50,000 pounds of
explosives. Night fighter planes attached to VMF(N)-
513 and aircraft attached to MAG-12 (VMA-212
and VMA-323) participate in the support of the
ground Marines and execute nine strikes (radar con-
trolled bombing) between 1830 and 0115 (28th).
By midnight, the attack forces of Companies E
and F, 2nd Battalion, are beyond exhaustion, hav-
ing continued the fight begun by Company D and
clawing their way to Vegas for about ten hours, but
there is little time for rest. Some relief is gained after
midnight, when the heavy guns of the Chinese turn
from Vegas and initiate a barrage against the MLR,
but the early hours of the 28th are not tranquil.
Enemy troops posted on Hills 57A, Detroit and
Frisco rise up sporadically and pepper the Marine
positions with small arms fire.
Nonetheless, the Marines, having paid little at-
tention to the constant shelling of the mortars and ar-
tillery, pay even less attention to the harassing in-
fantry fire while they prepare to launch another
assault to reclaim the northern summit of Vegas.
While the Marines prepare to ascend to the summit,
the artillerymen of the 11th Marines are also over-
active, focusing on the targets of the day, the troop
assembly areas at Vegas and the mortar positions.
At 0355, the 1st, 2nd and 4th Battalions, 11th
Marines, fire in unison and unleash a ravaging se-
ries of volleys that crash into the northern slopes of
Vegas with a thunderous roar and devastating im-
pact, showering the Chinese with 2,326 rounds of
105-mm and 155-mm shells. As the enemy attempts
to react to the withering fire, Company F is already
on the move and within thirty minutes, the Marines
gain enough ground to reach positions from which
they can throw grenades. The attack, however, once
again becomes stalled; the Chinese return fire re-
mains tenacious and impenetrable. The first assault
group is forced to pull back to the south slopes, but
only for a while.
As the Marines form for another assault, they
again receive extra support to keep the Chinese off
balance. Planes streak across the sky and descend
upon the enemy positions and strike swiftly, while the
guns of the 11th Marines again begin to bellow and
propel more artillery shells into the enemy, all in con-
cert with other units that pound the slopes with
mortars in concert with the tanks that pummel the
positions with their 90-mm rifles. The Chinese,
however, seem to be able to replace the guns as soon
as they are destroyed. At sunrise, the Chinese still
control the hill and are still able to raise fierce resist-
ance.
A short while after the sun peeks over the horizon,
an F4U Corsair from VMA-213 is spotted as it ap-
proaches the area and about one-half hour later, an-
other Corsair (VMA-323) arrives. The two planes
March 26, 1953
set the stage for an upcoming series of air strikes by
laying a smoke screen that hovers over an area
stretching three miles from Arrowhead to the ex-
treme boundary between the Marines and the Army.
After Vegas is blanketed by smoke, a swarm of jets
from VMA-121 arrive to land the first blow of the
new day. Eight jets dive and unleash yet another dev-
astating blow upon the enemy positions that so far
refuse to yield. However, more planes will return.
The Chinese will have to contend with the troops
on the ground and the five squadrons who bomb
and strafe their positions throughout the entire day.
At 0600, Company F resumes its attack, but it
fails to penetrate the rock solid defenses. Captain
Estey orders his troops to withdraw to regroup for yet
another assault. While Company F prepares to re-
sume the assault, the support units and the Marine
squadrons spring to action. At 0920, the guns roar
and the planes soar above the targets and descend
again to pummel the defenses. The pulverizing close-
air support strikes continue until 1315. Meanwhile,
Company F drives toward the crest and by 1015, the
troops reach positions less than twenty yards from
the trench line of the left finger of Vegas and en-
counter another wall of fire. The Marines slug it out
for 22 minutes.
During the intense fire fight, an enemy machine
gun shell wounds one Marine. A corpsman rushes
to give aid and pull him to safety, but the machine
gun prevents the corpsman from dragging the
wounded man to safety and keeps the squad pinned
tightly to the ground. Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews,
the squad leader, spots the imperiled twosome, as-
sesses the situation and moves to outflank the posi-
tion. He bolts on top of the rock formation protect-
ing the gun and takes the crew from the rear by
surprise. Singlehandedly, he rushes the Chinese and
despite receiving a grievous wound, he continues his
charge, kills two on the crew, and causes another to
flee, leaving the machine gun to him. Matthews de-
stroys the gun. The heroism displayed by Matthews
inspires the squad to push further, but he succumbs
to his wounds before aid can reach him. The
wounded man, however, is pulled to safety.
As the contest continues, reinforcements are mov-
ing up to relieve Company F, which by this time
stands at less than forty-five effective troops.
By 1300, Company E, 2nd Battalion, led by Cap-
tain Lorence, takes the lead, while Estey’s Company
F, having launched six counterattacks since the pre-
vious day, leaves the line. The vanguard of Com-
pany E advances to within 150 yards of the summit
by 1245. As the troops encroach the crest, the U.S.
artillery begins to lift the barrage and shift direc-
tions, turning the power toward the supporting po-
sitions of the enemy, Hills 150, 153 and 190. Dur-
ing the transition, the spearhead inches closer and
at 1301, the final charge is mounted. The Marines,
led by Staff Sergeant John J. Williams, leap upon the
crest, defying intense fire, and tear into the defenses
924
to extricate the dug-in Chinese and either liquidate
them or drag them from their bunkers. The over-
whelming assault to vanquish the defenders lasts
about six devastating minutes. At 1307, the Marines
claim the crest and secure Vegas to bring it back
under Marine control.
With Vegas back in the hands of the 5th Marines,
another unit that had moved up to bolster the attack,
Company D, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, is ordered
back to its lines. In the meantime, the Chinese move
to retake the outpost. Enemy fire begins to hammer
the new occupants of the crest and at 1320, the Chi-
nese counterattack. Reaction by the 11th Marines is
fast and fierce. The guns of the artillery, bolstered by
friendly mortars and the tanks of the 1st Tank Bat-
talion, commence firing and essentially seal off the
outpost with steel that deters further advance by the
enemy. The thrust of the counterattack begins to im-
mediately diminish, while Company E continues its
mop-up operations. Finally, at 1401, Vegas, except
for one hot spot, the topographical crest (northern-
most tip), is secure. During the day’s fighting, only
two prisoners are taken.
After securing the objective, the Marines reestab-
lish defensive positions and begin an immediate re-
supply to ensure that all is prepared when the Chi-
nese return. The attack is expected to begin at any
time, allowing no relaxation for Company E nor the
supporting units. Initially, only five squads, com-
posed of 58 Marines from Company E, and 8 from
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, hold the
position. Later in the afternoon, Company F, 2nd
Battalion, 5th Marines, led by Captain Walz, de-
ploys to hold the rear trenches, while Company E
digs deeply at the outpost to ensure they are not
evicted when the next wave strikes. With the rear
supported by 150 Marines of Company F, Vegas is
defended by slightly more than 200 Marines, com-
manded by Major Benjamin G. Lee, a sergeant major
during World War II and a veteran of Guadalcanal.
In addition to the artillery, the defenders are also
supported by Marine squadrons that maintain a fly-
ing protective umbrella over the area.
While the Marines strengthen their defenses, the
Chinese toil to form for attack, but patiently, they
await sunset before attempting to smash into the
Marines’ positions. Then, at 1955, the first of several
attempts at retaking the outpost commences. Vegas
lights up like a Christmas tree as artillery, mortars
and even 3.5-inch rockets arc skyward and then
plunge upon the outpost. Al the while, a force com-
posed of about battalion strength departs enemy-
held Reno en route to clear Vegas; however, the
movement is not inconspicuous. The column is im-
mediately brought under severe fire. Two light and
one heavy artillery battalions of the 11th Marines are
joined by the 623rd Artillery Battalion of the U.S.
Army. The combined power of the artillery propels
4,670 rounds into the attack force, and they are fur-
ther pounded by the 4.5-inch Rocket Battery. The
 925
Chinese are inundated with descending shells that
bring a succinct halt to the attack.
Meanwhile, the enemy ignites a fire fight on the
right flank at 2023. The tenacious exchange contin-
ues for twenty minutes before the Chinese disen-
gage. However, pressure against Vegas continues for
about one hour. Nevertheless, despite the threats
from the ground and the bombardment, the Marines
hold steadfastly. While the Marines at Vegas with-
stand the attempts to push them from the outpost,
activity against Outpost Carson develops, ending
the tranquility there since the defenders threw back
the Chinese during the initial hours of the battle on
26 March. The enemy threats against Carson con-
tinue into the early morning hours of the 29th, but
the Chinese fail to penetrate and retire.
Back at Vegas, the ominous night air breeds some
apprehension among the Marine defenders, who
continue to brace for the inevitable: the next attack.
At about 2230, the Marines react to an approaching
force closing from Hill 153. Riflemen deployed
about twenty-five yards below the summit intend to
fend off the attackers, but the initial thrust gives the
Chinese a temporary hold on the crest. Shortly there-
after, the battling Marines retake it, but at nearly
the same time, the enemy sparks a vicious fire fight
that quickly tails off for about an hour.
At 2300, the Chinese burst upon the outpost in
their third try to dislodge the Marines and retake
Vegas. Suddenly, a force composed of about two
companies slams into the outpost, igniting a huge
conflagration. Blistering fire is exchanged as the
Marines maintain a steady stream of fire to forestall
a calamity. In the meantime, artillery fire erupts as
the 11th Marines propel another series of volleys that
slam into the enemy and provide a protective buffer
for the Americans on Vegas. Still, the Chinese keep
pressing, oblivious to the bombardment that makes
the slopes quiver.
Just before midnight (27th-28th), the Chinese
become the recipients of 6,108 rounds. Nonetheless,
about two hundred enemy troops squeeze through
the enfilade and gain positions above the Marines,
but no penetration is accomplished. Much of the
devastation is observed, as flare planes swarm across
the night-sky and illuminate the targets.
The Marines become encircled by about 0045,
but the artillery and mortar fire keep the enemy from
breaking through the defensive ring. Reinforcements
rush to Vegas to support the defense, while the Chi-
nese continue to take a beating from the big guns,
which by 0130 convince the Chinese to abort the
attack. Vegas is held, due in great part to the com-
bination of the tenacity of the Marines and the over-
whelming support of the artillery, tanks and planes.
During the Chinese retreat, enemy troops at Reno
commence firing with small arms and bazookas;
however, the 5th Marines, having thrown back three
attacks by the combined strength of two battalions,
remain unintimidated.
March 26, 1953
As the Chinese attempt their disengagement, re-
inforcements from Company E, 7th Marines, barge
through the enemy line that had encircled Vegas and
hook up with the original defenders, Companies E
and F. Together, they initiate a charge and drive the
remaining Chinese from the outpost, except for one
remaining strongpoint, the topographical crest
(northern peak) of the hill. However, the peak does
not offer sanctuary for too long.
Company E, fresh on the attack, drives up the
heights and moves through Company F, 2nd Battal-
ion, 5th Marines, at the rear trenches to replace
Company F, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines. All the
while, artillery continues to stream fire toward the
enemy positions on Reno and other points of inter-
est. In addition, Marine air squadrons swarm over-
head and strike selected targets. The friendly fire cre-
ates a protective shield around Vegas for the next two
hours, while the Chinese on Reno sustain ten air
strikes until 0459.
Meanwhile, the 11th Marines, for a two-hour pe-
riod alone, propel 4,225 rounds of artillery shells
that further pock the landscape of Reno and restrain
any thoughts by the enemy of mounting an offensive
against Vegas. At 0450, just after the last air strike of
the morning, Company E bolts from its positions,
sprints to the topographic crest and wrests the sum-
mit from the Chinese to culminate the blood-filled
struggle for control of Vegas.
Many of the officers and NCOs had been either
killed or wounded during the siege, including Major
Benjamin G. Lee, who steadfastly led his troops and
repulsed many of the enemy’s counterattacks dur-
ing the final phase of the battle. Lee is killed along
with Captain Walz (Company F, 2nd Battalion, 5th
Marines) just prior to the conquest of the hill, when
an enemy mortar shell scores a direct hit and in-
stantly kills both. Another prominent officer at Vegas
during the initial siege and re-conquest was Lieu-
tenant John S. Gray, who as a member of the 11th
Marines remained at Vegas as an artillery observer
to coordinate the strikes. He was fatally wounded by
a mortar round while trying to reposition himself
during the early morning hours of the 29th to at-
tain a better point of observation.
Subsequent to dawn, the exhausted, battered vic-
tors of Company F, 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, and
Company E, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, regroup
and consolidate their defensive positions on the
costly outpost. They finish the task by about 0830,
uninhibited by the enemy. The troops, composed of
three platoons, spread out and deploy, with two pla-
toons holding the primary sector and the remaining
contingent taking the heights. The operation is
shrouded by a blanket of smoke, but while regroup-
ing, tonly a very few enemy troops are spotted.
For the rest of the morning, a resupply operation
is underway while the trenches and bunkers are being
repaired. The Marines also devote time to the evac-
uation of wounded and bringing in replacements to
March 26, 1953
solidify the outpost for the next attack. The day’s
operations, although unhindered in any major way
by the enemy, is pestered by rain that saturates the
troops and transforms the shell-pockets into pools
of mud.
While the enemy encounters the same nasty
weather, they are also compelled to tolerate a day-long
series of strikes, coordinated by air observers who pin-
point assembly areas and supply centers. The opera-
tion ceases at dusk, when the rain is joined by snow,
prompting the air observers to return to their bases.
As daylight begins to fade, the Chinese begin to
emerge from their positions. Not unexpectedly,
enemy guns bellow. Under the protection of dark-
ness, the assault begins as three companies charge
Vegas from their positions on Hill 153 and from
Reno, banging against both flanks. However, the
darkness suddenly is transformed into daylight as
the sky overhead is greatly brightened by illuminat-
ing shells as part of the Marines’ response. Within
about ten minutes after the attack commences, five
U.S. artillery battalions initiate another earth shat-
tering bombardment. The Chinese are inundated
with flying shells; 6,404 rounds plow into the as-
sault troops and the approaches to the coveted Vegas,
inflicting extremely high casualties.
The Chinese are also struck by streaming rockets
and by the heavy mortars of a fresh U.S. Army unit,
the 461st Infantry Battalion (Companies A and C),
which just arrived in the 5th Marines’ zone to aug-
ment the 11th Marines, which are also supported by
the 8-inch howitzers of Company C, 424th FABn,
assigned this day to the 17th FABN. The blistering
combination of artillery, mortars and rockets strikes
with such enormous magnitude that the attack fal-
ters, then collapses as the formations hurriedly seek
cover by withdrawing. Nonetheless, the Chinese
continue to have fresh troops to commit and later at
2045, another attempt to reclaim Vegas is made, only
to receive the identical result — failure.
Toward midnight (29th-30th), things begin to
stir at the right finger of Hill 153 when Chinese
movement is detected to the rear of the finger. The
column is immediately brought under fire. Streams
of artillery, mortar and rocket fire converge on the tar-
get, riveting the area. The Chinese halt the advance
within ten minutes. However, the night’s combat is
not terminated, as the Chinese mount yet another
assault to gain Vegas.
During the early part of the morning, again ini-
tially under the cover of darkness, the Chinese de-
scend from Reno and Hill 153 in battalion strength
in a determined effort to dislodge the Marines and
claim domination of the outpost. Like their previous
assaults, the Chinese maneuver in an attempt to en-
circle the Marines; however, the Marine support
weapons also react in identical fashion. Round after
round of artillery streaks through the night air, ac-
companied by mortars and rockets that descend rap-
idly and powerfully amid the attacking forces.
926
Meanwhile, at Vegas, the Marines prepare to de-
fend the hill, but during what turns out to be the
final major attack, the Chinese never make it to the
objective. By 0215 on the morning of the 30th, the
Chinese abandon their final attack and relinquish
their claim to Vegas. Following four grim and blood-
filled nights of unabated ferocious combat, the
Marines prevail.
At dawn on the 30th at Vegas, the Marines are
greeted with clear skies, a good sign, as the skies will
be occupied with overprotective observation planes
and fighters as work is reinitiated to stabilize the de-
fenses of the outpost and repair the massive damage
to the bunkers and trenches. Nearby at the enemy po-
sitions, the planes take advantage of the clear weather
and devote a lot of time to bombing and strafing to
inflict destruction and rattle the ground forces to
keep them from organizing a major offensive. At Hill
21A, a primary source of trouble near Reno, planes
from VMA-212 and VMA-323 strike during the
morning. Prior to noon, Hill 25A is struck by eight
F4U Corsairs, making the task of repairing the de-
fenses difficult.
Aircraft strike targets in the afternoon, including
21B at Reno. While the enemy is preoccupied with
the Marine air squadrons, at Vegas, Company G, 3rd
Battalion, 5th Marines, arrives and resumes respon-
sibility for Vegas after relieving Company E, 2nd
Battalion, 7th Marines. The outpost comes under
no major threat during the daylight hours; however,
a small enemy contingent of five troops approaches
the perimeter about one hour before noon, walking
as if preparing to surrender. The Marines maintain
a wary watch as they come close. The five Chinese
begin to toss grenades and fire their automatic
weapons. Just as suddenly, the Marines open fire.
Three Chinese die suddenly and the other two are
seized. One of the captured prisoners later succumbs.
On this same day, 30 March, a message for Gen-
eral Pollock from General Shepherd, the Marine
commandant, arrives at the 1st Marine Division
headquarters, expressing the sentiments of the com-
mandant: “The stubborn and heroic defense of
Vegas, Reno and Carson Hills, coupled with the su-
perb offensive spirit which characterized the several
counterattacks are a source of reassurance and satis-
faction to your fellow Marines everywhere....”
As dusk settles over the outpost, there is a stark
silence in the nearby enemy-held position at Reno
and the other nearby hills. The Marines make prepa-
rations to defend against an attack, while the giant
long-reaching searchlights of the U.S. Army’s 2nd
Platoon, 61st Artillery Battalion, light up the poten-
tial battlefield and focus upon routes that might be
used by the enemy for withdrawal. All the while, the
defenders wait for the sound of the Chinese buglers
and the shrill sounds of the whistles that usually ac-
company the preliminary artillery attack. Neverthe-
less, they wait in vain. The Chinese apparently con-
cluded that another attack would prove fruitless. The
 927
fifth night at Vegas remains uneventful, to the jubi-
lation of the Marines.
Subsequent to vanquishing the Chinese at Vegas,
the Marines, both on the line and in the reserve units
that had participated in the conflagration, summa-
rized the battle in terms common to battle tested
Marines, referring to the summit of Vegas as “the
highest damn beachhead in Korea.”
During the morning of the 31st, Companies D
and F, 5th Marines, move from Vegas to the MLR.
At 0800, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, returns to
control of the 7th Marines. During the remainder
of the day, fresh units relieve others at other out-
posts, including Corinne, Dagmar, Hedy and
Bunker.
During the five-day battle for control of Vegas,
the Marines sustain 1,015 casualties, seventy per-
cent of the casualties sustained by the entire 1st Ma-
rine Division during March. The casualties include
116 killed and 801 wounded. Of the wounded, 441
are evacuated. In addition, 98 Marines are reported
missing and of these it is learned for certain that 19
had been captured. Marine positions, including the
attack and counterattack movements, sustained
45,000 rounds of artillery, mortar and rocket fire.
The Chinese 358th Regiment is decimated and
eliminated as an effective fighting unit. Enemy
losses, with estimates considered conservative by the
1st Marine Division, include 536 killed (counted),
another 654 estimated killed, 174 wounded
(counted) and another 853 estimated wounded.
Also, four Chinese are captured. The Chinese 358th
Regiment initially numbered between 3,000 and
3,500 troops.
During the fierce fighting, two corpsmen and
one Marine exhibit extraordinary heroism above
and beyond the call of duty and become recipients of
the Medal of Honor. They are Hospital Corpsman
Francis C. Hammond (posthumously), Hospital
Corpsman William R. Charette, and Sergeant
Daniel P. Matthews, Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th
Marines.
March 26 In Air Force activity, a large amount of
enemy MiGs are sighted on this day by Allied pilots
who count 289 enemy planes, the most sightings since
April of the previous year.
In Naval activity, as the USS James E. Kyes (DD 787)
maneuvers near Songjin, she appears as a lucrative tar-
get to Communist gunners posted in the area. Fifty
rounds are fired at the vessel and all miss the mark.
In other activity, the Communists launch 36 rounds
toward the guerrilla-held island of Yo-do in Wonsan
harbor, but none score any damage. Also, the enemy
batteries take aim on the destroyer USS Seton (DD
790), but the effort is futile. Other vessels in the har-
bor also become targets. The USS Eversole (DD 789),
ROKN AMS 502 and the AMS 515 come under a bar-
rage from shore batteries, yet again, no damage is in-
flicted and no casualties occur.
March 27, 1953
March 27–28 1953 In Air Force activity, at
Osan, the 18th Fighter Bomber Group continues to
convert from F-51 Mustangs to Sabres. By this date,
the 12th Squadron has 25 F-86Fs. By 17 April, the
67th Fighter Bomber Squadron will reach its full
complement of Sabre jets.
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (Task
Force 77) focuses its attention on a selected piece of
enemy real estate, composed of less than two square
miles and crammed with supply complexes in a sec-
tion only about 10 miles north of the MLR (main
line of resistance). Sorties are launched on two suc-
cessive days from three separate carriers in an at-
tempt to inundate the area with bombs and strafing
runs. The USS Princeton (CVA 37), USS Philippine
Sea (CVA 47) and the USS Oriskany (CVA34) com-
bine to launch 216 sorties.
March 27 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi-
sion zone, the Marines ground all HRS-2 helicopters
with more than 200 hours of flight time. Tests in the
U.S. had determined a flaw in the main rotor blades.
New rotor blades are sped from the States and the hel-
icopters are back into action by 2 April.
In Air Force activity, apparently, the Communist pi-
lots have received copies of the Air Force leaflets dar-
ing them to come out and fight. On this day, a contin-
gent of two RF-80s and two RAAF Meteors is
intercepted by MiGs (carrying extra fuel in outside
tanks) in the skies between Sariwon and Sinmaktwo, at
a point less than forty miles from the front lines. How-
ever, no losses are reported.
In other activity, MiGs engage other friendly planes.
Major James P. Hagerstrom, attached to the 67th
Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter-Bomber Wing,
gets his fifth kill to become an Air Force ace. By war’s
end, Hagerstrom will receive credit for 8.5 kills; he had
also achieved ace status during World War II with six
kills.
In Naval activity, Communist gunners launch a bar-
rage of 60 rounds against the cruiser USS Los Angeles
(CA 135) in the vicinity of Wonsan. One shell inflicts
slight damage.
In other activity, the carrier USS Oriskany (CVA 34)
launches three Corsairs, each with pilots who volun-
teered for the mission. The trio sweeps over the
Hamhung Highway by a primary point that is well de-
fended, and with a backdrop of a brightly illuminated
moon, they dive and release their bombs. The raid is a
huge success. The pilots blast and destroy the center
span of the bridge and are en route back to their ship
before the enemy gunners can prepare to fire a shot.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
issue a statement regarding the “stalemate” in Korea:
“In view of the extensive implications of developing an
effective conventional capability in the Far East, the
timely use of atomic weapons should be considered
against military targets affecting operations in Korea,
and operationally planned as an adjunct to any possi-
ble military course of action involving direct action
March 28, 1953 928

against Communist China and Manchuria.” Later, sion zone, the Marines at Vegas clean up following a
during mid–May, the Joint Chiefs suggest specific ac- five-day battle at Carson-Reno-Vegas (Nevada Cities
tions. Outposts). During the contest, which included two
days of bad weather and restricted air operations, the 1st
March 28 The UN is informed by the Commu-
Marine Air Wing executed 218 combat missions in
nists that they are now willing to discuss the proposals
support of the Marines. The participating squadrons
offered by the U.N. representatives regarding the ex-
are VMAs 121, 212 and 323; VMFs 115 and 311 and
change of sick and wounded prisoners. The Commu-
VMF(N)-513. The figure amounted to 63 percent of
nists had received the proposals during December
the month’s total of 346 close-air-support missions.
1951. It does not go unnoticed by the U.N. and Eighth
(See also, March 26–31 1953 THE BATTLE FOR VEGAS.)
Army that on this day, the Chinese are heavily engaged
In Naval activity, Surface vessels and carriers of TF-
for the third successive day against the U.S. Marines at
77 launch the first of a series of attacks against the
Vegas in the Eighth Army, I Corps, sector. In addition,
Communist positions, specifically, the Wonsan harbor
the sudden willingness to talk follows the recent death
coastal defenses. Enemy shore gun batteries fire upon
of Joseph Stalin. The talks resume on 6 April.
the USS Prichett (DD 561), but the barrage falls short
In the I Corps sector, the Chinese launch attacks
and the rounds land harmlessly in the harbor. How-
against the 25th Division lines to seize five outposts.
ever, the Prichett is able to maneuver and fire back at the
In Air Force activity, more MiGs rise to engage the
guns to silence them.
U.S. Sabre jets and one of them is knocked down by
Also, Marine pilots had been greatly restricted dur-
Colonel James K. Johnson, attached to the 4th Fighter
ing March, due to 19 days of nasty weather. Neverthe-
Interceptor Wing. The victory brings his number of
less, the Marine aviators execute 917 close air support
kills to five, which makes him the newest ace; how-
sorties during the month. In addition, Marine pilots
ever, on the following day, that title will be held by yet
of VMF(N)-513, assigned to escort the B-29s during
another Sabre pilot.
night-missions, report that no B-29s were lost during
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS Prichett (DD561)
March. The Marines had been assigned the escort duty
comes under fire while she operates in Wonsan harbor,
during the latter part of 1952 and since that time, while
but the sighted airburst falls short of the vessel and no
protecting the bombers, they have downed one Yak-15
damage occurs. Also, Communist shore batteries fire
and three MiG-15s. When the flights of the Marines
upon Hwangto-do, also in Wonsan harbor and held by
and those of the U.S. Navy are combined, the total of
friendly guerrillas. The enemy barrage causes no harm.
sorties for March amount to 9,062. The pilots, during
In other activity, Communist shore batteries near
the same period, deposit 6,671 tons of bombs, 2,041
Hungnam fire upon the USS James E. Kyes (DD 787)
rockets and 1,100,000 rounds of ammunition in the
and USS Waxbill (AMS 39), but no damage is inflicted.
course of executing 14,100 firing runs.
In yet other activity, Marine Air Group 12 reaches a
new record when on this day it executes 129 sorties and April 1953 In the X Corps sector, the 40th Di-
delivers more than 207 tons of bombs on enemy posi- vision (X Corps reserve) receives orders to relieve the
tions in close-air support of the 1st Marine Division S.K. 20th Division at the Punch Bowl (Line Min-
in the I Corps sector. nesota). Divisional headquarters are established at
Nambakcho-ni. The 224th Regiment remains at-
March 29 In the Eighth Army area, I Corps zone, tached to the 45th Division, where it had been trans-
the Chinese attacks that began on the previous night in
ferred during the previous month. On 14 April it
the 25th Division zone seize three of the five outposts
relieve the 5th RCT (45th Division sector). Mean-
that came under attack.
while, the 160th Regiment prepares to relieve the
In Air Force activity, MiGs again engage Sabre jets
279th Regiment (45th Division). The 160th Regi-
of the 4th Fighter Interceptor Wing and for the sec-
ment passes to control of the 45th on 19 April and
ond day in a row, one of the pilots becomes an ace. Lt.
replaces the 279th as 45th Division reserve.
Colonel George L. Jones downs his fifth enemy plane
to become the ace of the day. April 1 In Air Force activity, during a bombing mis-
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries at sion carried out by Far East Air Forces B-29s, one of
Wonsan fire upon two friendly islands, Sin-do and Yo- the planes misses the opportunity to hit the primary
do, but no damage is inflicted. target; however, prior to returning to its base, the crew
spots an enemy convoy. The B-29, attached to the
March 30 In a not so unusual manner, the Com-
307th Bomber Wing, drops its bombs on the convoy
munist shore gun batteries again launch an attack
using only a visual sighting and reports the opportune
against friendly held islands at Wonsan, including Yo-
strike bears great results. The Air Force notes that this
do and Hwangto-do, but yet again, no damage or ca-
raid is the first such attack in the history of Far East Air
sualties are reported. In another incident near Won-
Forces Bomber Command operations in North Korea.
san, the destroyers USS Prichett (DD 561) and USS
In Naval activity, a downed pilot, assigned to the
Shelton (DD 790) become the recipients of 15 enemy
USS Valley Forge (CVA 45), is in danger of being cap-
artillery rounds, but all fall short.
tured as a Communist boat closes and prepares to pull
March 31 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Divi- him aboard. Suddenly, at great risk, a helicopter defies
 929
the enemy and flies into harm’s way and snatches the
pilot before the enemy can grab him from the water. All
aboard the chopper make it safely back to the carrier.
In other activity, a boat from the destroyer USS James
E. Kyes (DD787) encroaches the shore in the vicinity
of Chaho to gather audio and visual intelligence re-
garding movement of enemy trains. A train heading
north is observed. Shortly thereafter, the information
is forwarded and a plane attached to the U.S. Air Force
appears overhead. The train is attacked and damaged,
but not destroyed.
April 2 Enemy guns on Hapchin-hi fire upon the
USS Prichett (DD561), but neither of the two shots
are accurate.
In other activity, the friendly islands of Cho-do and
Yo-do at Wonsan come under fire from Communist
guns, but no damage is inflicted. In addition, the USS
Los Angeles (CA 135) comes under fire at Wonsan. The
barrage does cause some damage. And, 13 crewmen
sustain minor injuries. Another fourteen crewmen are
hit by shrapnel, but because they are wearing vests, no
harm comes to them.
April 3 In Naval activity, the USS Prichett
(DD561) receives an enemy barrage of about 40
rounds, tracer shells, as she operates during the early
part of the morning. None of the rounds strike the ves-
sel.
April 4 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 5th Marines culminates 64 days on the line
and reverts to division reserve. The regiment initiates
its move to Camp Rose and completes the redeploy-
ment on the following day. In its place, the 7th Marines
comes on line. The 7th Marines sector includes the
right sector of the MLR. Meanwhile, the 1st Marines
control the center portion of Jamestown and defend
the MLR there, as well as 12 outposts, one of which is
COP-2 near the Panmunjom peace corridor.
In Naval activity, at Wonsan enemy guns fire upon
the friendly island of Cho-do. About 220 rounds strike
the island and cause some casualties. One man is killed
and 10 others are wounded. No U.S. naval vessels are
in position to return fire. Yo-do Island also comes under
attack, but there, no damage is inflicted and no casu-
alties occur.
In other activity, Yongwol, in the vicinity of the
Haeju approaches and held by friendly guerrillas, is in-
vaded by a force composed of about 90 North Korean
troops. The guerrillas receive some prompt assistance
from planes attached to Task Unit 95.1.1 and with the
air support, despite ten hours of fighting, the Com-
munists disengage and head back to the mainland.
April 5 In preparation for the resumption of talks
regarding a prisoner exchange with the Communists, the
Munsan-ni Provisional Command is established. It is
placed near the 1st Marine Division railhead at
Munsan-ni. The new command is responsible for
preparing to receive U.N. prisoners and is to be led by
Colonel Raymond W. Beggs, USA, assisted by another
April 6, 1953
U.S. Army officer, a Marine officer and one South Ko-
rean representative.
Colonel Wallace M. Nelson, USMC, assumes com-
mand of the U.N. Personnel and Medical Processing
Unit. In addition to preparing for the arrival of U.N.
prisoners, the new unit begins to construct a temporary
camp to hold Communist prisoners during the transi-
tion. At this time, the Communists are being held at fa-
cilities at Koje, Cheju, and Yongcho Islands and at a
hospital in the vicinity of Pusan. In preparation for the
upcoming exchange, security regulations at Pan-
munjom and Munsan-ni, about ten miles southeast,
are strictly enforced. Both locations are off limits to
Eighth Army personnel, except those involved with the
operation.
Marine engineers initiate Operation RAINBOW,
which involves the construction of what becomes
known as Freedom Village. The entire facility is built
by fewer than one hundred Marines in 31 working
hours. The units involved with the construction in-
clude Company A, 1st Shore Party Battalion; elements
of Headquarters and Service Companies; and a pla-
toon of Company D, 1st Engineer Battalion. Work be-
gins on this Sunday at 0800 and continues until 0100
on the 6th, when a pause of five hours occurs. At 0600
on the 6th, work resumes and the village is finished by
2000.
In Naval activity, the USS Maddox (DD 731) and
the South Korean minesweeper AMS 515 come under
heavy fire at Wonsan, but no damage is sustained. In ad-
dition, Sosa-ri Island comes under attack by Commu-
nist shore gun batteries. One Korean is killed and 10
others are wounded.
In other activity, the destroyer James E. Kyes (DD
787) comes under enemy fire while she is operating
near Mayang-do Island. No damage is sustained by the
vessel.
April 6 The peace talks resume at Panmunjom
after the Communists react to proposals they received
during October 1952 regarding the solution to the
stalemate of exchanging prisoners. U.N. representatives
arrive, but there is no certainty of having serious dis-
cussions. The Communists have been, for the dura-
tion, using the talks as a stall tactic. However, if the
Communists are serious, the U.N. is prepared to bring
the conflict to an end.
On 28 March, a letter from the Communists arrived
at General Mark Clark’s headquarters in Tokyo. The
letter informed Clark that the Communists were now
willing to exchange wounded and sick POWs and they
proclaim that “the delegates for armistice negotiations
of both sides immediately resume the negotiations at
Panmunjom.” Clark responds to the letter, but cau-
tiously, and the response is worded to ensure that the
POW issue remains separate from the armistice talks.
Also, At Munsan-ni, the Marines complete the con-
struction of Freedom Village, the facility that will hold
and process the returning POWs. The facility is di-
vided into three parts and holds 35,500 square feet of
Marines plant a welcome sign at Freedom Village in anticipation of the first arrivals of repatriated POWs.
 931
Communist representatives at Panmunjom at the close of the first day’s talks during April.
hospital tent space, 84 squad tents and 5 wall tents.
Three miles of combat standard roads are constructed.
The site also includes reserved areas for ambulances,
landing strips for helicopters and an abundance of signs
written in both English and Korean, underscored with
five 50-foot flagpoles. (See also, April 5, 1953.)
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries in
the vicinity of Wonsan commence firing on ships this
day, including the minesweeper USS Redhead (AMS
14) and the destroyer USS Maddox (DD 731), but nei-
ther vessel sustains any harm. Also, other guns at Won-
san fire upon Yo-do Island and Tae-do Island. No dam-
age is sustained.
April 6 In Air Force activity, a series of raids are
made by B-29 bombers of Far East Air Forces between
this date and 12 April and each of the three separate
attacks are hit again on the succeeding morning by
fighter bombers. The planes launch the night attacks on
the 6th-7th, 7th-8th and 11th-12th. The attacks each
focus on the operable railroad bridges at Sinanju that
span the Ch’ongch’on River. On each of the mornings
that the fighter bomber formations arrive, they are
treated to stalled vehicle traffic at the spans, which pro-
vides lucrative targets.
April 7 In Air Force activity, the 8th Fighter
Bomber Squadron initiates its first combat mission in
Sabre jets. The sorties move to the Yalu River. By the
beginning of May, the group will be flying fighter
bomber missions. It will be equipped with its full com-
plement of F-86F Sabre jets by 4 June.
April 9, 1953
In Naval activity, the USS Los Angeles (CA 135) and
USS McDora (DD 534) come under fire in Wonsan
harbor, but no hits are scored. In addition, the shore
gun batteries pound Yo-do Island and Tae-do Island,
but no casualties occur and no damage is sustained.
April 8 In Naval activity, Sok-to Island comes
under attack by Communist shore gun batteries, but
no damage is inflicted. The batteries also fire upon
naval ships in the area, but no damage is sustained by
any of the vessels.
April 9 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese commence a 2-hour artillery bom-
bardment against Outpost Carson, one of the outposts
they failed to gain during the attack in late March.
The barrage sends about 2,000 shells into the outpost
positions. Then at 0345, the Chinese launch an attack
with a force composed of about 300 troops that
close from Reno ridgeline and from Arrowhead to the
north.
The outpost is defended by a contingent from the
1st Battalion, 7th Marines. When the enemy encroaches
at about 0345, it is met by the defenders’ weapons as
they reach the trenches. At a few spots, some of the
enemy are able to penetrate the barbed wire; however,
the attack comes under heavy fire. The heated, close-
quartered fire fight lasts for about one and one-half
hours. A contingent of reinforcements (2nd Battalion,
7th Marines) moves toward Carson at 0545, but as it
reaches Elko, a recently established outpost following
the loss of Reno, enemy fire stalls the advance.
April 10, 1953
In the meantime, a contingent of tanks from Com-
pany A, 1st Tank Battalion, and two other tanks from
the 7th Marines’ armored platoon commence fire.
Their 90-mm rifles, combined with the mortars from
Carson, inflict much damage to the attackers. The
enemy force also comes under attack by artillery of the
2nd Battalion, 11th Marines.
By 0700, the Chinese withdraw from the vicinity of
Carson. The attempt to take the outpost fails. Another
contingent (Company E, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines)
arrives to bolster the outpost. The Marine defenders
lose 14 killed and 44 wounded and evacuated. Another
22 are wounded but not seriously. In addition, 4
Marines are reported missing. The Chinese sustain 60
dead (counted) and another 90 estimated killed, as well
as an estimated 70 wounded.
Within about fifteen minutes after the enemy is
driven off, planes from Squadrons VMA-212 and
VMA-323 arrive on scene and begin to strike Chinese
positions. They are joined by Corsairs from VMA-121.
The three squadrons linger in the area until the middle
of the afternoon and deliver a combined total of more
than 140,000 pounds of bombs on targets north of
Carson.
After dark, the Chinese, who had hurriedly departed
the area at Carson, attempt to return and recover killed
troops left on the field. The endeavor proves fatal. The
Marines at Carson detect the enemy at a destroyed and
unoccupied bunker, and immediately initiate action to
eliminate the intruders. The Chinese sustain 15 dead
(counted) and an additional estimated 15 killed. Also,
the Chinese sustain 7 wounded (for certain) and an-
other 27 estimated wounded.
April 10 In the I Corp sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines (reserve), moves to
the Kansas Line to begin a two-day training exercise.
The training is later transformed into a construction
problem, as the spring rains have devastated much of the
line’s defenses, including the bunkers. Other parts of the
regiment also undergo training, including an amphibi-
ous operation (MARLEX 5), conducted by the 2nd Bat-
talion, 5th Marines. Other exercises conducted by the
Marines during April include a joint operation with
ROKs, U.S. Army units, and the British Common-
wealth Division, when a four-day exercise called EVER-
READY GEORGE begins near Seoul on 20 April.
In other activity, Marine Panther jets arrive over Car-
son in the 7th Marines’ zone to resume air attacks,
which had been flown on the previous day by other
squadrons against Chinese positions, following a failed
attack against the outpost. The planes are from VMF
squadrons 311 and 115, but unlike the previous day’s
strikes, no enemy troops are spotted. Nonetheless, after
dark, other planes attached to VMA-121 and VMF(N)-
513 execute ground control radar bombing runs.
In Naval activity, Yo-do Island again comes under
attack by Communist shore batteries, but without ef-
fect. On the west coast of Korea, Cho-do Island comes
under attack, but no damage is inflicted. Also,
932
near Cho-do, the LSSL 107 comes under attack, but no
damage is inflicted.
April 11 At Panmunjom, the opposing represen-
tatives sign an agreement at noon regarding the ex-
change of sick and wounded prisoners. Rear Admiral
John C. Daniel, USN, signs on behalf of the U.N. and
Major General Lee Sang Cho signs on behalf of the
Communists. In accordance with the agreement, the
prisoner exchange (Operation LITTLE SWITCH) is
scheduled to begin at Panmunjom on 20 April. The
U.N. is disappointed in the number of prisoners the
Communists agree to release (450 Koreans and 150
non–Korean), The U.N. states that it intends to release
close to ten times that amount. Nevertheless, when the
exchange ends on 26 April, the Communists release
684 prisoners and the U.N. releases 6,670.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, a small
contingent of about 30 Chinese troops approaches
Elko, the outpost established the previous month to re-
place Reno. The early morning encounter occurs on
the reverse slope; however, it is a short exchange. Ar-
tillery is called upon and immediately thereafter, the
popular “Box-Me-In” fire arrives to provide a buffer
while the defenders handle the intrusion. The Chinese
retire shortly after their arrival. Later, planes from the
Marine squadrons again appear overhead to renew air
strikes against enemy gun positions and other targets of
opportunity.
The Chinese, who have tried and failed several times
to take Carson since the 26th of March, launch an-
other attack slightly after 2100. Chinese move from
Ungok to the west ridge of the Marines’ perimeter. The
Marines engage the force composed of about 70 troops
and within ten minutes of artillery, mortar and small
arms fire, and tank fire, the enemy loses about 20 killed
and wounded. The attack is aborted.
In Naval activity, the USS Eversole (DD 789), while
operating near Wonsan, is brought under fire by about
50 rounds from the mainland, but none of the shells hit
the ship.
April 12 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese, for the fourth successive day, probe
the area of Carson-Elko-Vegas. On the three previous
nights, the Chinese gained little except casualties. On
this day, subsequent to dusk, a group of about the
strength of only two squads approaches Elko. The
enemy exchanges fire with the Marine defenders for
about fifteen minutes, but again, they are repulsed and
forced to withdraw.
In other activity, after a period of testing, a new tac-
tic is employed with regard to the Marine squadrons’
close-air support missions. The Marines on the ground
in the 7th Marines’ sector use two or more 24-inch
searchlights from strategic positions along the MLR
during the night-attacks. The searchlights, which cre-
ate an artificial horizon, guide the pilots and allow them
to operate with great accuracy regardless of the depth
of darkness. The pencil-shaped beams are adaptable
for either target location or illumination. Air observers
 933
operating in VMO-6 light liaison aircraft maintain
control over the missions and from the air, the observers
direct the units operating the searchlights.
On this first night of operations with the new tactic,
two missions are flown by F7F Tigercats piloted by
Major Charles L. Sachroeder and 2nd Lt. Thomas F. St.
Denis. The Marines continue to use the tactics until
the 1st Marine Division is pulled from the line at the
end of May. In the meantime, the ground crews and
the pilots rave about the system, as the searchlights, ac-
cording to reports forwarded to the Commandant, are
a huge success: “results ... exceeded all expectations.”
In Air Force activity, Captain Joseph C. McConnell,
Jr., attached to the 39th Fighter Interceptor Wing, had
achieved ace status on 16 February and by this date he
is credited with eight kills. Nonetheless, on this date,
enemy fire knocks McConnell out of the sky and into
the Yellow Sea. McConnell is able to survive in the
water and an H-19 helicopter from the 581st ARCW
(Air Resupply and Communications Wing) arrives and
successfully rescues him.
In Naval activity, the Communist shore battery guns
commence firing on naval surface vessels operating near
Wonsan, but no hits are inflicted.
In other activity, on the east coast of Korea near the
bombline, the destroyer USS McCord (DD 534) re-
ceives one round of enemy fire, but it falls short of the
vessel.
April 13 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the area encompassing Carson-Elko-Vegas is es-
pecially quiet during the hours after sunset. As the days
begin to pass, enemy activity tails off even more. How-
ever, during early May, after the Marines transfer the
area to the U.S. 25th Division, the Chinese become
reinvigorated and activity rapidly increases.
In Air Force activity, the F-86F, the newest Sabre jet,
is flown into its first combat sortie by a pilot attached
to the 8th Fighter Bomber Wing.
In Naval activity, planes attached to TF-77 attack
Chongjin. The targeted city is the recipient of 119 sor-
ties that focus on the industrial sector and transporta-
tion centers.
In other activity, Communist shore gun batteries fire
upon Cho-do, held by friendly guerrillas. At Wonsan
harbor, the USS Los Angeles (CA 135) bombards enemy
positions. The enemy returns one round, but it fails to
hit the ship.
April 14 Tae-do, in Wonsan harbor, is struck by
enemy shore guns and some mortars, but no damage is
inflicted and no casualties occur.
April 15 A Chinese Nationalist steamer, the
Menten, sinks in the Pacific while en route from
Kaohsuing to Sencho. An American ship, the USS
Mispillion (AO 105), is able to mount a rescue opera-
tion and save 14 members of the crew, which reportedly
had been composed of 52 men. Twenty-seven bodies are
recovered.
Cho-do Island comes under bombardment by a con-
April 16, 1953
tingent of enemy planes. Two men on the island are
killed and 22 others are wounded from the air attack.
In other activity, the British destroyer escort HMCS
Crusader, while operating near Tanchon, discovers three
separate targets, each an enemy train. The ship’s guns
pound the moving trio and inflict damage upon all
three of the trains.
As of this date, about seventy-five miles of destroyed
train tracks that link Kusong with Kunu-ri and Sinpy-
ong have been repaired by the Communists. The task,
despite interdiction bombing raids, has taken about
seventy days. The enemy actually constructed bypasses
to circumvent blockages created by the Air Force
bombers while pummeling the rail facilities at Chongju,
Sinanju, and Sunchon.
April 16–18 1953 In the X Corps sector, 7th
Division zone, at about 2200, the Chinese launch an
attack against Hill 255 (Pork Chop Hill), defended
by elements of the 31st Infantry Regiment. The
Americans number less than 100 troops, but they
attempt to hold against a tenacious charge. Com-
munications fail; however, through the use of flares,
they receive support from the artillery. Nevertheless,
the artillery is able only to delay the assault. Once it
ceases, the Chinese resume the relentless attack and
by 0200 on the 17th, the enemy controls much of the
hill and the defenders are totally isolated. Reinforce-
ments mount a counterattack at 0400 and are able to
reach the positions of the defenders, but afterward,
the combined strength is insufficient to regain the
lost ground.
Subsequent to dawn, the Chinese move to elimi-
nate the Americans; however, the survivors, about
55 troops, defiantly hold their positions in the high
ground. The real estate encompassing the outpost
suddenly becomes of great value, as Eighth Army
concludes that it must not fall to the Communists to
prevent them from boasting of a victory at Pan-
munjom. At 2100 on the 17th, two companies of
the 17th Regiment move out to evict the Chinese
and rescue the men at the outpost. The Chinese,
holding the western tip of the hill, are not greeted by
whistles and bugles; rather the cold steel of the attack-
ing force, which simultaneously strikes from two
sides to ignite a furious battle that continues into the
following day.
Pork Chop Hill, already deeply scarred from heavy
fighting, becomes a cauldron, as neither side is will-
ing to concede the ground. Both the Americans and
the Chinese pour fresh troops into the day-long don-
nybrook, but by about dusk, the Americans prevail
as the Chinese retire, leaving the Pork Chop under
American control. The Chinese, however, continue
to hold Hill 266 (Old Baldy) and from their posi-
tions, they are able to maintain surveillance of Pork
Chop Hill. The hill is fortified soon after the Amer-
icans regain control and the Chinese continue to at-
tempt to retake it. Like several other hills that have
been gained, lost and regained at high cost, Pork
April 16, 1953
Chop Hill is abandoned by the Americans during
July.
April 16 In Naval activity, Communist shore gun
batteries at Wonsan fire upon minesweeping vessels in
the harbor, but no ships receive damage. In addition,
the batteries fire about 56 rounds toward the destroyer
USS Maddox (DD 731). The vessel is struck by one of
the shells and it inflicts damage on the main deck.
Three men are injured. The Maddox returns fire, but it
is unable to terminate the enemy fire.
In other activity, a contingent of troops, including
U.S. Marines and South Korean Marines, are formed as
a raiding party. The group, supported by the destroyer
USS Owen (DD 536), moves ashore in rubber boats
and succeeds in damaging a stretch of rails. The mis-
sion is carried out without incident and afterward, the
men safely return to the ship.
Soldiers take a wounded man (7th Division) on Pork Chop Hill (Hill 255) to the rear for medical aid.
934
Also, enemy planes pass over Inchon and Seoul on
April 16–17, but the pilots do not drop any bombs;
rather the planes deliver leaflets that boast of the Com-
munist wishes for “peace.”
April 17 On this day, the combined missions of
Marine planes of MAG-12 and MAG-33 fly 262 sor-
ties against enemy targets. The air strikes drop more
than 228 tons of bombs and expend 28,385 rounds of
ammunition. In conjunction, the 3rd and 7th U.S. Di-
visions, between 0410 and 2030, receive close-air sup-
port by VMF-311 and VMF-115. All targets are se-
lected by Fifth Air Force on this record-setting date for
Marine sorties.
In Naval activity, enemy shore gun batteries fire three
rounds at the destroyer USS Shelton (DD 790) while she
is operating in Wosan harbor, but each of the rounds
falls short.
 935
At Pork Chop Hill, a U.S. soldier in a jeep holds a .45-caliber pistol, while two Chinese POWs (captured
on 17 April) are taken back for interrogation. A tank is in the left background.
In other activity, Tae-do, Yo-do, and Hwangto-do are
again bombarded by enemy shore gun batteries in
Wonsan harbor.
April 18 In Naval activity, the USS James E. Kyes
(DD 787), while operating near Chaho, bombards an
enemy railroad and she is met by heavy return fire. The
Kyes fires to terminate the guns, but without success,
forcing the ship to move out of range rather than risk
being hit.
In other activity, Marine helicopters of HMR 161,
supported by the 1st Marine Air Delivery Platoon,
FMF, transport rocket launchers and ammunition to
the Waya-dong area. Once there, the launchers are po-
sitioned and a salvo is soon after en route to the target.
The firing site is then expeditiously vacated within three
minutes after the first salvo, before the enemy can pin-
point the weapons and return fire.
Also, in Wonsan harbor, the USS Eversole (DD789)
is fired upon, but no damage occurs.
April 19 In Naval activity, the USS James E. Kyes
(DD 787), while operating near Wonsan, is hit by a
round during a 60-round barrage. The ship sustains
damage to the main deck and one man is seriously
wounded. Another three crewmen are slightly wounded.
April 20, 1953
Also, the USS Shelton (DD 790) becomes the recipient
of a 25-round barrage in Wonsan harbor, but no shells
strike her. The USS Curlew (AMS 8), a minesweeper,
is also brought under attack in the harbor, but the
rounds fall short. In addition, the friendly islands of
Tae-do and Hwangto-do, also in Wonsan harbor, are
hit with a combined total of 66 rounds, fired by enemy
shore gun batteries. No harm is inflicted to the friendly
troops there.
Other incidents at Wonsan include enemy guns fir-
ing 26 rounds at the battleship New Jersey (BB-62) and
15 at the destroyer escort USS Renshaw (DDE 499).
Neither vessel sustains any damage.
April 20 Operation LITTLE SWITCH (Code-named
LITTLE SWAP) begins this day at Panmunjom. The op-
eration concludes on 26 April. On this day, the first
group (fifty troops) of prisoners arrives at 0825. An-
other contingent of fifty troops arrives about two hours
later. When the first prisoners arrive, the apprehension
greatly decreases. Until the arrival of the troops, there
was a feeling that at the last minute, the exchange
would be cancelled by the Communists.
After passing through a gate that displays a giant
sign, “Welcome Gate to Freedom,” the men are trans-
ported to Munsan by ambulances. Of the 100 troops
April 21, 1953
U.S. Army convoy transporting U.N. POWs (initial group) to Freedom Village. The convoy moves through
front lines of U.S. Marines, some of whom observe the activity.
returned, thirty are Americans. General Clark, the U.N.
commander, and other high ranking officers are there
to greet the troops. Although the new arrivals are
processed, there are no intelligence debriefings. Within
about 24 hours after returning, the men are transferred
to K-16 at Seoul and from there to Haneda Air Force
Base in Tokyo.
In Naval activity, Hwangto-do, and Tae-do, both in
Wonsan harbor, again come under attack by enemy
shore gun batteries. No damage is sustained and no re-
turn fire by naval vessels is reported.
April 21 In Naval activity, for TF-77 on this day,
the pilots get to choose their targets (BOY-SAN DAY).
Also, the destroyer USS Henderson (DD 785) comes
under attack, while on patrol in the vicinity of Won-
san. Twelve rounds are fired, but none inflict any dam-
age. Also, the Communists, as usual, bombard friendly
islands in the harbor. Hwangto-do, Yo-do, and Tae-
do Islands are struck by the enemy shore battery guns,
but no casualties are sustained and there is no major
damage.
April 22 In Naval activity, at Wonsan, Hwangto-
do and Tae-do Islands yet again come under fire from
enemy shore gun batteries, but damage or casualties
occur. Also, the USS Manchester (CL 83) comes under
936
fire while in Wonsan harbor. Some shrapnel causes
slight damage, but no casualties are sustained.
April 23 In Naval activity, at about 1430, the
Communist shore gun batteries initiate a massive bom-
bardment of Tae-do from their positions on Kalma
Pan-do. The attack causes casualties, one, extremely
serious. The USS Henderson (DD 785) and the USS
Owen (DD 536) move into action. The Owen closes
on the island to get the U.S. Marine in need of imme-
diate medical attention while the Henderson pours fire
upon the enemy positions.
Meanwhile, the enemy guns turn their attention to
the ships and specifically, to the Henderson, which re-
ceives the brunt of the fire. The Owen, however, is able
to retrieve its boat and the casualties (in total, four
South Korean Marines and 1 U.S. Marine injured).
While the mission is ongoing, a call for air support had
been heard and a response is forthcoming as 12 planes
from TF-77 arrive to pound the enemy positions. By
1730, the firing is terminated. In conjunction, the four
slightly wounded South Koreans are transported to Yo-
do; however, the U.S. Marine is taken aboard the USS
Manchester following his surgery.
In other activity, four unidentified enemy planes at-
tack a contingent of four Royal Navy Sea Furies at a
point about 10 miles east of Amgak. No planes are lost,
 937
but the attack inflicts damage on all four of the Sea Fu-
ries.
Also, Communist shore gun batteries again bom-
bard friendly islands in Wonsan harbor. Hwangto-do,
Sado, Sin-do and Tae-do come under attack, but again,
no casualties occur and no damage is sustained on any
of the islands.
April 23 In Naval activity, the USS James C.
Owens (DD 776) and the USS Henderson (DD 785)
come under a heavy bombardment from Communist
shore gun batteries at Wonsan; however, none of the
100 shells inflict damage to either vessel.
April 24 As usual, the Communists initiate bom-
bardment of friendly islands in the vicinity of Won-
san. Hwangto-do, Sin-do, Tae-do and Yo-do are
struck, but no damage occurs.
April 25 In Naval activity, the destroyer USS James
C. Owens (DD 776), while operating near Wonsan,
comes under attack by enemy shore gun batteries, but
no damage is sustained. In another incident, the USS
Saint Paul (CA 73) is fired upon by enemy shore gun
batteries in the southern sector of the Wonsan area dur-
ing the morning and again during the afternoon. Nei-
ther attack causes any damage.
In yet other activity, Communist gun batteries fire
upon the friendly island of Hwangto-do, but without
effect.
April 26 At Panmunjom, the prisoner exchange
that began on 20 April, concludes. Of the 684 troops
freed from Communist captivity, 150 are non–Korean
and of the latter, there are 15 Marines and 3 Navy
medics (in support of Marine units) and one naval avi-
ator. Each of the captured Marines had been wounded
at the time of capture and they had only recently been
taken prisoner, either in October 1952 at the outpost
contest or at the Carson-Reno-Vegas Outposts during
March 1953.
In the X Corps sector, the 223rd Regiment, 40th Di-
vision, relieves the S.K. 223rd Regiment along the Min-
nesota Line. On the following day, the 224th Regi-
ment and the 40th Division artillery are passed from the
45th Division back to the 40th Division. Also on the
27th, the 40th Division assumes total responsibility for
the area protected by the S.K. 20th Division. Some of
the artillery (40th Division) continues to support the
S.K. 12th Division.
In other activity, the armistice talks resume at Pan-
munjom; however, major differences continue and one
concerns the POWs. The Communists continue to de-
mand the return of all POWs, while the U.N. insists
that any prisoners not wanting to be repatriated will
not be compelled to return. Also, the entire U.N. and
Communist delegations convene a meeting in Pan-
munjom for the first time in about six months.
In Naval activity, the USS Owen (DD 536) comes
under attack by enemy shore gun batteries, while the
Communists simultaneously bombard friendly-held is-
lands in Wonsan harbor. Hwangto-do, Sin-do, Tae-do
April 29, 1953
and Yo-do are recipients of what has become a daily
bombardment. No damage is inflicted on the islands
or the USS Owen.
April 27 In Naval activity, the USS Gurke
(DD783), USS Owen (DD 536) and the USS Maddox
(DD 731) each comes under attack by Communist
shore gun batteries in the vicinity of Wonsan. The bat-
teries also bombard Hwangto-do Island and Tae-do Is-
land. No damage is inflicted upon the warships and no
damage occurs on any of the friendly islands.
April 28 On this day, the U.N. changes the names
of the MLR (main line of resistance), which until now
was known by various names in separate sectors; such
as Jamestown in the I Corps sector and Missouri, Du-
luth, Minnesota and Cat in others. The entire line now
becomes known as “Main Line of Resistance.” Another
modification includes the elimination of the word
“Korea” with regard to the acronym “EUSAK” (Eighth
U.S. Army in Korea). From this date forward, it be-
comes simply, “Eighth U.S. Army.”
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, all re-
mains quiet and the trend continues until the end of the
month. Marine patrols scour the terrain and find it dif-
ficult to detect enemy contingents. Even the incoming
artillery has greatly diminished. The Marines are
preparing to transfer the area to the 25th Division. The
1st Marine Division is reluctant to relinquish hold, but
Eighth Army insists on the change. The Marines make
it clear they are moving into reserve under protest of
Marine commanders. Although it at times seems as if
an armistice is near, there is a belief among the Marines
that they will have to return to the area if the Chinese
make an unexpected lunge against Carson-Elko-Vegas,
a strategic blocking point in front of Seoul.
In Naval activity, The Communist guns at Wonsan
again roar as they take the USS Owen (DD 536) under
fire along with a friendly held island, Hwangto-do.
Other targets that receive some attention this day are
Tae-do and Yo-do Islands. Despite the series of bar-
rages, no damage or casualties are inflicted upon the
warships or the guerrilla-held islands.
April 29 In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces
attempts to acquire an enemy MiG-15. A B-29 is dis-
patched to North Korea to drop leaflets to apparently
search for a defector. The mission is dubbed Project
MOOLA.
In Naval activity, the enemy shore gun batteries at
Wonsan harbor spot a helicopter (HU-1 Unit 19) while
it is on a mission in the harbor in search of mines. The
Communists propel 14 rounds at the helicopter, but
the crew is able to evade the fire and escape damage. The
guns also target the usual objectives, the friendly is-
lands in the harbor. On this day, it is Hwangto-do,
Tae-do and Yo-do that become the recipients of the
barrages. Nonetheless, the attacks cause no damage,
nor casualties. In one other incident there, the USS
Gurke (DD 783) comes under fire, but it, too, incurs
no damage.
April 30, 1953
April 30 In Naval activity, at Wonsan harbor on
Ho-do Pando, recently improved enemy shore batter-
ies cause concern for the warships operating in the area.
Destroyers receive a directive to avoid the area during
daylight hours, because of the difficulty in spotting the
positions of the guns. They are able to remain con-
cealed, visible only when the flashes are spotted. Steps
are taken to prepare to eliminate the new threat against
shipping.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Owen (DD 536)
comes under attack while operating in Wonsan harbor
and in addition, the Communists also bombard friendly
islands. Nonetheless, no damage is inflicted and no ca-
sualties are sustained.
Also, during the month of April, minesweeping op-
erations discover 37 mines, a big increase over recent
times and the largest amount found for one month since
August of the previous year.
Another statistic that climbed during April is the
amount of rounds — 2,091 — fired against TF-95,
which is record setting. With regard to the Communist
batteries at Wonsan, 1,050 rounds had been fired at
friendly-held islands during April and the incessant
bombardments had accounted for 9 wounded and no
fatalities.
In other activity during April, the combined total
of flights by Navy and Marine pilots amount to 9,458
sorties, which include 15,600 firing runs on targets.
The pilots expended 7,052 tons of bombs, 2,874 rock-
ets and 1,500,000 rounds of ammunition.
May 1–July 27 1953. TENTH DESIGNATED
CAMPAIGN: KOREAN SUMMER 1953.
May 1 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 25th Division begins to replace the 1st Ma-
rine Division on line. The operation is completed on 5
May, when the 25th Division assumes responsibility
for the zone, which stretches thirty-three miles.
In Air Force activity, in recognition of the Commu-
nists’ celebration of May Day, Fifth Air Force fighter
bombers contribute with some fireworks. The broad-
casting facility, Radio Pyongyang, is hit with a heavy at-
tack by planes attached to the 4th and 51st Fighter In-
terceptor Wings. The planes, for a short while, give the
impression that they are en route to the Yalu to strike
targets there, but upon reaching the river, the planes
change course and strike the capital.
Monitoring the battle from the air, General Glenn O.
Barcus, who assumed command of Fifth Air Force in
May 1952, is aboard one of the planes. He proclaims
that the Fifth Air Force would revisit the radio broad-
casting facility each time the Communists spread “filthy
lies” about Fifth Air Force.
In Naval activity, the USS Dextrous (AM 341) and the
USS Ruddy (AM 380) come under fire while sweeping
off Hungnam. The ships are able to evade the enemy
fire, but during the maneuvers, the Ruddy discovers her
magnetic tail missing.
938
May 2 In Naval activity, Communists pour streams
of fire on the destroyers USS Maddox (DD 731) and
USS Owen (DD 536) from guns on Ho-do Pando,
with the number soaring to more than 200 rounds. No
casualties are incurred; however, both ships sustain
slight damage.
May 3 In Naval activity, a contingent of guerrillas
lands on the mainland in the vicinity of Haeju to in-
filtrate enemy positions. The mission is supported by
the HMS St. Brides Bay and the ROKN PCS 201.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Gurke (DD 783)
comes under fire while operating in Wonsan harbor,
but no damage is sustained. In addition, the Commu-
nist batteries in the area bombard So-do Island and Yo-
do Island, but again, no damage is inflicted and no ca-
sualties are sustained.
May 4 In Naval activity, the USS Maddox (DD
731), operating near the Hamhung approaches, comes
under attack by enemy shore gun batteries, but no harm
is inflicted. Also, the Communist batteries at Wonsan
bombard friendly islands. Just under 100 rounds hit,
but no damage or casualties occur.
May 5 The U.S. 25th Division, which had been
deployed in the IX Corps sector, assumes responsibil-
ity at precisely 1120 for the far right coastal area of the
I Corps. It replaces the 1st Marine Division, which
moves to Camp Casey and reverts to I Corps reserve.
However, the 11th Marines and the Marine armor units
remain to support the 25th Division under control of
I Corps.
Camp Casey is constructed by Marine engineers
about 15 miles east of the Marines’ positions on the
MLR. While in reserve, the Marines continue to train
to remain prepared. Exercises include amphibious land-
ings (MARLEX 1 on 13 May). The 25th Division is de-
ployed from left to right as follows: Kimpo Provisional
Brigade; TF Track; 27th Regiment; 35th Regiment;
Turkish Brigade.
In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Bremerton (CA
130) strikes enemy positions at Wonsan harbor and she
receives return fire from the batteries, which inflict
some minor damage and cause two casualties, but nei-
ther man is seriously wounded. Also, the batteries fire
upon the friendly islands as usual and again without
effect.
May 6 In Naval activity, the British destroyer HMS
Cockade bombards enemy rails in the vicinity of
Songjin, but enemy batteries there return fire. The ship
sustains no damage and no casualties.
In other activity, Mu-do Island, near the Haeju ap-
proaches, comes under attack by Communist batteries
on the mainland; however, no damage occurs and no
casualties are sustained on the island or to the South
Korean vessel ROKN PG 315, which had been in the
vicinity.
May 7 At Panmunjom, the Communists relent.
After a prolonged period of refusing the U.N. proposal
 939 May 8, 1953

The vanguard of the 3rd Turkish Battalion arrives in the I Corps sector to relieve the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines.

regarding the exchange of prisoners, the Communists

accept the proposal that those prisoners not wanting
repatriation be housed in neutral custody within Korea,
rather than being kept in a neutral foreign country. The
negotiating teams still need to complete discussions on
the final details regarding the blueprint for the Demil-
itarized Zone.
In conjunction, the South Korean president, Syng-
man Rhee, becomes infuriated by the terms of the
agreement. He concludes that the U.S. would settle for
a divided Korea and create a permanent threat against
South Korea. Rhee threatens to carry on the fight alone.
In the meantime, Rhee works to upset the upcoming
cease-fire plans.
In Naval activity, the British destroyer HMS Cock-
ade (DD) comes under shore gun battery fire near
Songjin, but no damage or casualties occur.
May 8 In Naval activity, the USS Samuel N. Moore
(DD 747) and the USS Brush (DD 745) come under
fire while operating near Wonsan. One round out of
about 60 fired upon the Moore strikes it and inflicts
some slight damage, but no casualties. The Brush re-
mains more elusive and receives only two rounds that
fall without effect.
In other activity, the HMNZS Hawae (DDE), op- U.S. Navy corpsman dons an armored vest that had
erating near Haeju, comes under fire along with the been worn by an infantryman when five pounds of
South Korean vessel ROKN YMS 514. Neither vessel TNT accidentally exploded at close range. The vest
sustains damage or casualties. Also, the HMS St. Brides saved the man’s life.
May 8, 1953 940

A Marine tank in action in support of the Turkish Brigade.

 941
Bay (DE) provides support for a guerrilla raid on the
west coast near Haeju-man, but the raid is unsuccess-
ful, which compels the contingent to withdraw.
May 10 In Air Force activity, an 8-plane contingent
of ThunderJets, attached the 58th Fighter Bomber
Wing and led by its commander, Colonel Victor E.
Warford, strikes targets near the Yalu River. The enemy
raises heavy antiaircraft fire, but the strike force hits
the hydroelectric complex at Sui-ho.
Also, during the night of the 10th-11th, a forma-
tion of thirty-nine B-29 Superfortresses strike a mili-
tary complex located less than fifteen miles from the
MiG base at Sinuiju. The planes plaster the entire com-
plex, composed of 375 acres at Yangsi. About two-
thirds of the base is destroyed. All planes return to base.
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries on
the Kojo peninsula fire upon the ROKN AMS 503, but
no damage is sustained. Also, the USS Maddox (DD
731) comes under fire while operating near Yang-do,
but the gunners are unable to strike the ship.
May 11 In Air Force activity, a group of F-84 Thun-
derJets, attached to the 58th Fighter Bomber Wing,
begin to attack a chain of irrigation dams that had, until
this point in the war, been off the target list of selected
objectives in North Korea. On this date, the planes drop
their bombs on the Toksan Dam, which controls water
on the Potong River at a point about twenty miles north
of the Communist capital of Pyongyang.
The bombs hit their mark. Water crashes through
the walls and flows uncontrollably with such power
that five enemy bridges are swept away. In addition,
the primary north-south highway is made impassable,
while simultaneously, the airfield at Sunan becomes
flooded and inoperable. And yet more severe damage is
caused by floods when they oversaturate about five
square miles of rice paddies. Similar attacks continue in
the region for about two weeks.
In Naval activity, four enemy trains unexpectedly
come under attack by four destroyers as they encroach
Tanchon. Each of the trains sustains damage. The naval
attack is part of two ongoing interdiction operations of
TF-77, known as Operation PACKAGE and Operation
DERAIL, begun in December 1951. The mission calls for
cutting five primary rail targets by air and naval surface
attacks.
May 12 In Naval activity, the USS Philip (DDE
498) comes under fire near Soho-ri, but the four
rounds fall short.
Communist shore gun batteries at Wonsan bombard
friendly held islands in the area through May 15 with
more than 200 rounds, but the main focus points to
Yo-do Island, which contains Briscoe Field.
— In the United States: President Eisenhower nom-
inates Admiral Arthur W. Radford for the position of
chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff, to succeed General of
the Army Omar M. Bradley.
May 13 At Panmunjom, the discussion about pris-
oner exchange continues to be contentious and no
May 16, 1953
progress emerges. General Harrison, the top U.N. rep-
resentative, offers a counterproposal to one offered by
the Communists, but nothing is settled and the cross-
table conversations become heated. The talks are re-
cessed. However, during early June, the Communists
relent and accept Harrison’s plan, which essentially had
been the U.N.’s final offer. The acceptance by the
Communists terminates 18 months of refusal to come
to an agreement. In conjunction, the president of South
Korea, Syngman Rhee, already incensed by the terms
of a possible armistice, renounces the agreement.
In other activity, Fifth Air force continues to strike
enemy targets.
In Naval activity, the carrier USS Boxer (CVA 21)
initiates its first combat sorties of its fourth duty tour
during the Korean War.
May 14 In Naval activity, the South Korean
minesweeper ROKN AMS 503 comes under fire while
operating near the bomb-line, but the enemy rounds
miss the vessel.
May 15 In the I corps sector, not too long after mid-
night (14th-15th) and not yet two weeks since the 25th
Division relieved the Marines and assumed responsibil-
ity of Carson-Elko-Vegas, the Chinese decide to test
the mettle of the new defenders of the line. Two enemy
battalions descend upon a string of outposts, including
Berlin and East Berlin. One battalion surges toward
Carson-Elko-Vegas while the other drives against
Berlin–East Berlin.
The outposts, defended by the Turkish brigade, re-
ceive support from Turkish artillery units and the 11th
Marines, as well as the tanks of Company C (USMC).
The attack is repulsed and the enemy sustains high ca-
sualties, estimated at 200 killed and 100 wounded.
Later, during daylight, planes arrive to bomb and strafe.
Combined, the 11th Marines and the 25th Division
expend 11,527 rounds of artillery. Enemy artillery fires
about 10,000 rounds.
In other activity, the 1st Marine Air Wing under-
goes some changes. VMF(N)–513 is transferred to
MAG-12 from MAG-33. The squadron, equipped
with new twin-engine jet fighters (F3D-2s) redeploys
at K-6 (Pyongtaek). The squadron had been operating
at K-8 (Kunsan).
In Naval activity, ROKN AMS 506 comes under at-
tack while operating near Haeju. The vessel sustains
some damage and in addition, five crewmen are slightly
wounded.
In yet other activity, the destroyer USS Brush (DD
745) comes under attack near Wonsan. The ship sus-
tains one hit, which inflicts only slight damage to the
vessel; however, four men are wounded seriously and
another five receive superficial wounds.
May 16 In Air Force activity, the attacks against
previously restricted targets that began on the night
of the 11th-12th continue. A contingent of planes
from the 58th Fighter Bomber Wing executes 90 sor-
ties against another dam in North Korea, the Chasan
May 17, 1953
irrigation dam. The strikes split the dam, causing
flood waters to roar through the area. Several railroad
bridges are washed away and many rice paddies are ru-
ined.
In Naval activity, planes attached to TF-77, known
as the “Morning Hecklers,” spot and attack an enemy
train as it moves along the eastern coast of Korea. The
attack succeeds and damages the train.
In other activity, Communist shore gun batteries at
Wonsan launch nine rounds against the friendly held is-
land of Tae-do. No damage is sustained.
May 17 In Naval activity, a contingent of South
Korean troops (ROKs), supported by two destroyers, the
USS Brush (DD 745) and the USS James E. Kyes (DD
787), launches a raid at a spot north of Kojo. The mis-
sion succeeds and the troops are able to destroy 14
enemy sampans and some automatic weapons. The
troops also ignite about fifty fires.
Another destroyer, the USS Maddox (DD 731), tar-
gets and strikes a locomotive as it moves through the
Songjin region. Secondary explosions provide instant il-
lumination that permits follow-up fire to hit and rav-
age the entire train.
In yet other activity, planes attached to the escort
Carrier USS Bairoko (CVE 115) bolster a raid by am-
phibious troops along the west coast of Korea, slightly
less than fifty miles northwest of Seoul. The successful
raid confirms the ability of the U.N. forces to either
land or retrieve friendly forces from the Lonan penin-
sula–Fohan estuary area.
May 18 In Air Force activity, two survivors of a
B-26 that had crashed behind enemy lines use a mir-
ror to try to alert passing U.S. planes of their location.
The signal is picked up and a harrowing rescue opera-
tion unfolds. The isolated crew members are in constant
danger of being discovered. In addition to a helicopter,
fighters are called upon to clear the way. In the mean-
time, the H-19 helicopter moves from its base to a
holding point on a small island off the Haeju peninsula.
The fighters arrive to open the route and pound enemy
positions with the H-19 following in their path, mov-
ing through the enemy line at an elevation of 5,000
feet. The helicopter crew spots the signals from their
mirror, then swoops down, lands for about thirty sec-
onds, and retrieves both men. The helicopter and the
fighters depart without harm.
Also, the Air Force gets its first triple jet ace. Captain
Joseph C. McConnell, Jr., during the previous April
had been shot down but rescued on the 12th. At the
time, he had eight aerial victories. On this day his total
climbs to sixteen kills, when he shoots three more MiG-
15s. Captain McConnell (39th Fighter Interceptor
Wing) becomes the highest scoring ace of the Korean
War. Also, Lt. Colonel George I. Ruddell, the com-
manding officer of the 39th Fighter Squadron, downs
a MiG, his fifth, to become an ace.
In other activity, on 10 May, B-29s had attacked a
military complex at Yangsi and destroyed about two
thirds of it. On this night (18th-19th), eleven Super-
942
fortresses return to strike again. The B-29s pound the
remaining structures on the base.
May 19 In Air Force activity, a huge Communist
supply depot at Unsan-dong comes under attack dur-
ing the night of the 19th-20th by a contingent of the
19th Bomber Group. The target, located less than ten
miles from Sinanju, where a MiG base is located, is re-
lentlessly pounded by the B-29s. After-action reports
indicate that 140 buildings had been reduced. The
complex also contains a troop center for units on their
way south.
In Naval activity, another episode of destroyers on
the hunt unfolds near Chaho. The warships USS James
E. Kyes (DD 787) and USS Eversole (DD 789) are not
in search of enemy vessels; rather, enemy trains mov-
ing through the darkness. One is spotted and immedi-
ately taken under fire. The guns propel a total of 418
rounds and of these, 128 are star-shells. Combined,
the destroyers’ power pummels the train into debris, as
later reported by gathered intelligence.
In other activity, another usual barrage of friendly
islands in Wonsan harbor occurs. The barrages score
no damage.
— In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff
proposes the use of naval and air operations against
Communist China and Manchuria. The recommen-
dation includes the use of nuclear weapons and the pro-
posal also urges using surprise and full-scale attacks
rather than a gradual increase of strength. The National
Security Council, on the following day, agrees with the
recommendation. The secretary of state, John Foster
Dulles, explains the U.S. intent to the prime minister
of India and suggests that the information regarding
the bombing of targets above the Yalu would be struck
if the talks at Panmunjom did not bring about a quick
settlement. An armistice is signed during the latter part
of July and it is never made public whether the U.S.
threat to use atomic weapons was genuine or a bluff.
May 20 In Naval activity, Communist batteries
bombard two friendly held islands, Sangchwirado and
Hachwirado, both located along the west coast of
Korea. Neither island sustains any damage or casualties.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Bradford (DD
545) encounters a small boat near Yang-do Island, but
the boat’s crew fails to respond to a challenge from the
Bradford. The boat is sunk; it had held 24 friendly guer-
rillas. The Bradford picks up 5 survivors.
May 21 In Air Force activity, a contingent of B-29s
launches an attack on the night of the 21st-22nd, against
another dam, the Kuwonga dam. The Superfortresses
use the SHORAN (airborne radar device coordinated
with two ground beacon stations) bomb system, which
pinpoints the target; however, despite seven direct hits,
the dam fails to crack. The Communists had drained
about twelve feet of the water level to lower the pressure.
May 23 In Naval activity, Task Force 77 initiates
flights to familiarize and train its pilots in MPQ radar
controlled bombing.
 943
May 24 In Naval activity, at Wonsan, the Commu-
nist gunners continue to attempt to knock out a U.S.
warship, but yet again, they fail. The cruiser USS Bre-
merton (CA 130) becomes the recipient of a 10-round
bombardment and all the shells miss the mark.
May 25 The Communists increase the intensity
of artillery bombardments on the positions held by the
Turkish Brigade through May 27, but no land assaults
are initiated against the Nevada Cities Outposts
(Carson-Elko-Vegas).
In Naval activity, the friendly guerrillas on Yo-do Is-
land in Wonsan harbor come under attack by Com-
munist shore gun batteries, but no damage is inflicted.
In other activity, the carrier USS Boxer (CVA 21)
and the USS Mispillion (AO 106) accidentally collide,
but no serious damage occurs and no casualties are sus-
tained by either vessel.
May 26 In Naval activity, Communist gun bat-
teries at Wonsan pour a 50-round barrage at the USS
Duncan (DDR 874). The only damage sustained is the
ship’s radio antenna, which is clipped by a shell frag-
ment.
In other activity near Wonsan, the friendly island of
Hwangto-do comes under attack by enemy batteries,
but no damage is inflicted.
May 27 In Air Force activity, aerial reconnaissance
flights detect conspicuous activity that signals an im-
minent full-scale enemy offensive, giving Eighth Army
time to prepare.
In Naval activity, at Wonsan, the Communist shore
batteries launch an artillery barrage upon the battle-
ship USS New Jersey (BB 62), which has come on scene
to assist TF-77 planes in the mission to liquidate the re-
tractable batteries that continue to threaten the fleet
and the friendly islands. The battery gunners waste 12
shells on the New Jersey, which returns fire and ends
the hostile fire.
In other activity, the British cruiser HMS Newcastle
pounds enemy batteries located in the vicinity of the ap-
proaches to Chinnampo. Enemy batteries return fire,
sending about 30 rounds toward the Newcastle, but the
ship sustains no damage or casualties.
In yet other activity, during the earliest part of this
morning, six enemy planes bomb an airfield between
Inchon and Yongdungpo and on the same mission, the
pilots bomb a pipeline in the area. The attack inflicts
some slight damage to one F-86 and two F-80s. One
man is injured.
May 28 In the I Corps sector, in the Nevada Cities
Outposts, following several days of probing and active
enemy artillery positions, a large portion of the line ex-
plodes in raucous fashion at 1800. In concert with a
thunderous artillery barrage that crashes into the I
Corps sector, the Chinese unleash a full-scale assault
force that encompasses a distance of more than 17,000
yards. The force extends eastward from COP-2 across
the Carson-Elko-Vegas sector to the Berlin–East Berlin
area, and beyond into the sector protected by the British
May 28, 1953
Commonwealth Division. The Chinese, who had been
repeatedly blocked by the Marines from breaking
through to Seoul, make another attempt. Primary el-
ements of the Chinese 120th Division are committed
against the 25th Division and its attached units.
The sounds of the guns, the screeches of the whistles
and the blare of the bugles accompany the enemy bat-
talions as they swarm from their positions and crash
toward their respective objectives, to seek and find
points of penetration. The attacking ground forces si-
multaneously plow against the line and against the out-
posts defended by the Turks. One battalion pounds
against Carson and Elko, while another hammers
Vegas. On the right flank, a third enemy battalion
drives into Berlin and East Berlin.
The Turks at Carson and Elko resist tenaciously and
exchange violent blows for three hours. But, the Chi-
nese continue to use relentless pressure and advance to
the point that hand-to-hand combat erupts, while the
Turks continue to try to turn back the attack. The gal-
lant stand of the two Turkish platoons is unable to repel
the assault. Carson falls. Meanwhile, at nearby Elko,
the Turks are still holding, but here, too, the pressure
is building too high for the solitary platoon to hold
without reinforcements. Orders arrive at Elko that in-
struct the defenders to abandon the post and make it
back to the MLR.
Since the beginning of the onslaught, the 25th Di-
vision artillery and the 11th Marines artillery have
pounded the enemy with repeated volleys that plunge
into and around the columns, as they attempt to col-
lapse the outposts. Marine tanks form along the line
in the sector held by the Turks. Initially, 15 tanks of the
1st Marine Tank Battalion are in place in support of
the Turks. As the enemy approaches their 90-mm rifles
unleash a steady stream of fire to crush the columns, but
still the Chinese advance. As the attacks build momen-
tum, even more tanks arrive to further punish the at-
tack forces. Eventually, 33 Marine tanks are on the line.
They propel round after round into the enemy
columns. Despite the heavy artillery and the tanks, the
Chinese maintain the assault.
While the Chinese are overrunning Carson and Elko,
the defenders at Vegas, numbering 140 troops, dish out
punishing fire from their positions and prevent the Chi-
nese from seizing the outposts. Other positions along
the line also hold their ground. On the far right, in
what turns out to be a diversion, the Turks at Berlin
and East Berlin retain both outposts, as the Chinese
break off the attacks.
Back at COP-2, held by the 35th U.S. Infantry Reg-
iment, the Chinese are unable to penetrate. The regi-
ment forces a withdrawal by midnight (28th-29th).
The wide-ranging assault does not leave the British
Commonwealth sector unscathed. The Chinese pound
against Outposts Ronson and Warsaw. The British re-
sist tenaciously and like the Turks, receive support from
the 25th Division and the 11th Marines. In addition,
the 4.5 inch Rocket Battery (USMC) is deployed at the
Hook in support of the British.
May 28, 1953
The Chinese maintain the pressure into the follow-
ing day. All across the line, the troops of the 25th Di-
vision are hammered and the outposts become endan-
gered. At the Nevada Cities Outposts (Carson-Elko-
Vegas) area, the combat remains vicious throughout
the day at Vegas, with control changing hands several
times, as neither the Chinese nor the Turks relent, but
in the end, the Chinese prevail. And, in the meantime,
a counterattack regains Elko.
By about noon, in addition to the massive artillery
and tank support, Marine air squadrons arrive and also
pummel the enemy at every opportunity. The Chinese
come under attack by VMA Squadrons 212, 121 and
323 repeatedly throughout the day, as seven four-plane
strikes pound the troops and cause the ground under
them to quiver. Afterward, more Marine planes arrive
to execute ground controlled radar bombing strikes.
During the early part of the day, the 1st Marine Di-
vision, in reserve at Camp Casey, receives orders to pre-
pare to return to the line. At 1315, the 1st Marines,
commanded by Colonel Wallace M. Nelson, is trans-
ferred to the operational control of the I Corps. About
two hours later, the 1st Marines, along with its antitank
and heavy mortar companies, stand ready at the Kansas
Line in the 25th Division zone on hold, awaiting the
order to attack.
Another Marine unit, the 1st Division Reconnais-
sance Company, is ordered to the Imjin River to relieve
a reserve company of the 14th Regiment. Although the
Marines arrive and prepare to take on the attackers, the
order does not arrive. They spend the remainder of the
day waiting for orders.
At 2300, with the Chinese holding Carson and
Vegas, the 14th Regiment (reserve), which participated
in the counterattack to regain Elko, is informed that
the positions are untenable. It is ordered to abandon
the outpost. In addition, the Turkish elements at Vegas
are also ordered to abandon their positions and retire to
the MLR. The withdrawal continues the rest of the
night and into the following morning. By dawn, the
Turks and U.S. troops of the 14th Regiment complete
the retreat to the MLR.
At dawn on the 30th, the Nevada Cities Outposts,
which the Chinese had not been able to take from the
1st Marine Division earlier, are under Chinese control.
The sun is obscured as inclement weather casts an omi-
nous aura over the lost outposts. The day passes with-
out ground attacks to regain the lost terrain and the
rain dominates the region. In the meantime, the ele-
ments of the 1st Marines remain under the control of
I Corps and hold in place, in case the regiment is
needed to regain the lost ground. The Marines are re-
leased from I Corps control on 5 June, the day Eighth
Army concludes that the three hills are no longer con-
sidered strategically important. Eighth Army also de-
cides that the lost territory will remain under Chinese
control and that no new attacks would be mounted to
regain the ground, which only a short time ago was in-
deed critical and strategic.
On March 26, the Chinese launched a five-day as-
944
sault to gain the coveted hills and failed, costing them
extremely high casualties. The Marines, during the
struggle to hold the hills, sacrificed 116 killed and sus-
tained 801 wounded, while eliminating the Chinese
358th Regiment as a fighting unit. The 25th Division
reports estimated enemy casualties for the period May
28–30 as 2,200 killed and 1,057 wounded. The Turks,
during the same period, while defending the outposts,
sustain 104 killed, 324 wounded and 47 missing. (See
also, March 26–31 1953 THE BATTLE FOR VEGAS.)
May 28 In Air Force activity, another key target,
previously restricted, the Kuwonga Dam, comes under
attack by B-29s. The planes drop 2,000-pound bombs
that strike the dam; however, it does not crack. Nev-
ertheless, the Communists, in order to repair the dam-
age, are compelled to drain the reservoir. The North
Korean water supply required for irrigation is wasted.
In Naval activity, vessels in Wonsan harbor do not
come under attack, but Communist shore gun batter-
ies bombard friendly islands in Wonsan harbor. The
enemy barrage totals 131 rounds, but no damage is in-
flicted on any of the target islands.
Late May 1953 By this time, while the 1st
Marine Air Wing continues to phase out the F7F
Tigercats in Night Fighter Squadron 513, the 24 new
F3D-2 twin jets are further bolstered by four more
that arrive from the carrier USS Lake Champlain.
The squadron begins its initial primary night-
fighter mission since the outbreak of the Korean War.
The new Skyknights continue to carry out the task
of escorting the U.S. Air Force B-29s on night mis-
sions, a task assigned to the 1st Marine Air Wing
during the latter part of 1952. Since the Marines’
Tigercats began escorting the bombers, none had
been lost to enemy planes since 29 January 1953.
The Skyknights also have retained a sterling record
while protecting the flights.
May 29 In Naval activity, a new squadron, VMA-
332 (MAG-12), arrives to replace VMA-312, which is
scheduled to return to the States following its 33-
month tour as part of the wing as West Coast (CTE
95.1.1) Aerial Reconnaissance and Blockade Squadron.
VMA-332 is scheduled to operate from the carrier USS
Bairoko (CVE-115). The departing squadron had op-
erated from the USS Bataan (CVL-29), a smaller car-
rier that is also about to end its tour in Korea.
In other activity, General Mark Clark receives au-
thority from Secretary of State John Foster Dulles and
Secretary of Defense Charles E. Wilson to take any ac-
tion necessary to prevent the situation in Korea from
getting out of control, due to the ongoing opposition
from Syngman Rhee.
The U.S. recently drew up emergency plans (Plan
EVER-READY) to seize control of the S.K. government
and place Rhee under custody, if it becomes necessary.
The plan includes placing Rhee’s prime minister,
Chang Taek Sang, into the presidency and if he de-
clines, to establish a military regime.
 945
In Naval activity, at Yang-do Island, the USS Swift
(AM 122) and USS Redstart (AMS 378), while moored,
come under a brisk 25-round artillery barrage. The
Swift sustains one hit, but it causes only slight dam-
age. In addition, one crewman sustains a superficial
wound. The Redstart is unscathed.
In other activity, two British vessels, the HMS New-
castle (CL) and the HMS St. Brides Bay (PF) come
under fire while operating west of Chinnampo. The
marksmanship of the enemy gunners remains poor. No
damage is sustained and no casualties occur.
May 31 In Air Force activity, Lt. General Samuel
E. Anderson assumes command of Fifth Air Force. He
succeeds General Glenn O. Barcus, who had assumed
the position during May 1952.
Also, two planes of the 67th Fighter Bomber
Squadron are lost on this day. The leader of the day’s
mission, “Tex” Beneke, is killed upon take-off and an-
other pilot is killed during the mission. The other two
planes in the contingent are badly damaged upon land-
ing and subsequently scrubbed; however both pilots
survive.
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries in
the vicinity of Wonsan open fire on two friendly is-
lands, Hwangto-do and Yo-do. All shells miss their tar-
gets.
The Communists, during the month of May, had
launched 786 rounds into the friendly islands in Won-
san harbor. U.S. warships had also come under fire dur-
ing this same period.
— In Japan: Marine Squadron VMA-332 arrives at
Itami Air Base from Florida.
June 1 Airfields in North Korea become a high pri-
ority for TF-77 and Fifth Air Force. All restrictions are
lifted, including a directive that requires 48-hour no-
tice prior to any attacks near the border with
Manchuria.
In Naval activity, Secretary of the Navy Robert B.
Anderson announces through testimony that U.S. Navy
and Marine Corps pilots had flown thirty-seven percent
of the air strikes flown by the U.N. during the conflict
in Korea to this point, less than two months before the
end of the fighting.
June 2 In the X Corps sector, the Communists
launch an attack against the perimeter of the 40th Di-
vision along the Minnesota Line (Punch Bowl). A fierce
fight ensues, including close-quartered combat. The
attack is repelled by the 223rd Regiment. For the re-
mainder of the month, the 40th Division continues to
dispatch strong patrols to gather intelligence and to es-
tablish ambush sites.
In Air Force activity, B-29s initiate raids to support
IX Corps. The Superfortresses initiate missions that
focus upon disrupting enemy troop concentrations,
training areas and supply depots, but other targets are
also struck.
In Naval activity, The USS St. Paul (CA 73) and
USS Manchester (CL 83), while operating in the vicin-
June 5, 1953
ity of Wonsan, come under heavy fire from Commu-
nist shore gun batteries, but of the 38 rounds fired,
none come close to either vessel. Another vessel oper-
ating at Wonsan, the USS Bole (DD 755), becomes the
recipient of fire from the batteries, but none of the 14
rounds fall close to the ship. Nevertheless, the Bole re-
turns fire and terminates the hostile fire.
In other activity, Communist shore gun batteries
near Chaho commence firing upon the USS Wiltsie
(DDY 16) and the USS James E. Kyes (DD 787). The
barrage does not threaten either ship; however, return
fire from the two destroyers terminates the hostile fire.
June 3 In Naval activity, at Wonsan, the USS Lof-
berg (DD 759) and USS Bole (DD 755) come under fire
by enemy shore gun batteries, but no harm is inflicted.
In addition, the batteries fire upon the friendly islands
of Hwangto-do and Tae-do. About 129 rounds are
fired at the two islands, but none cause any damage.
In other activity, the HMS Morecombe Bay comes
under fire in the vicinity of Shinnampo, but no dam-
age is inflicted.
Also, the destroyer USS Wiltsie (DD 716) spots and
fires upon an enemy train as it moves near Tanchon
and damages it. Soon after the train is disabled, aircraft
from TF-77 arrive and totally destroy it before they re-
turn to the USS Boxer (CVA21).
In other activity, subsequent to dusk, several Soviet-
built PO-2 planes make a bombing run over Chaho, but
no damage or casualties occur.
June 4 On this day, the Communists accept the
U.N.’s final offer regarding prisoners, which had been
proposed on 7 May.
In the X Corps sector, 7th Division zone, a detachment
of Company K, 17th Regiment, comes upon an enemy
contingent about to dig positions on the slope of Pork
Chop Hill. A heavy firefight erupts, but as the battle en-
sues, the enemy increases in strength and the detach-
ment is ordered to pull back. PFC Charles Barker vol-
unteers to provide cover fire, while the others retire.
Barker is last seen while engaged in hand-to-hand com-
bat with the attackers. PFC Barker is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his tremendous
heroism and selfless sacrifice to save others.
In Naval activity, the USS LSMR 409, a rocket ship,
comes under effective fire at Wonsan. The enemy scores
two hits; however, only slight damage is caused. In ad-
dition, five crewmen are injured. The ship returns fire,
more than 200 rockets. The LSMR resumes operations,
but the gun batteries remain silent.
June 5 Eighth Army, having lost the Nevada Cities
Outposts, Carson-Elko-Vegas, to the Chinese during
late May, decides this day to forego any new attempts
to regain the lost ground. The outposts, previously des-
ignated as major posts, are now considered non-criti-
cal. (See also, March 26-31 1953 THE BATTLE FOR
VEGAS.)
In Air Force activity, Major Vermont Garrison, who
had achieved status as an ace during World War II, on
June 5, 1953
this day as commanding officer of the 335th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron engages and vanquishes two
MiG-15s, for his fifth and sixth kills of the Korean
War, since 21 February of this year. Major Garrison
will knock down a total of 10 MiGs and become a
double-ace before the end of the war. Also, during
1966, Colonel Garrison again returns to combat as
commander of the 8th Tactical Fighter Wing.
June 5-7 1953 Typhoon Judy arrives at Japan
and moves past Kyushi, one of its southern islands.
The inclement weather hinders TF-77 for several
days.
June 6 In Naval activity, the USS PC 706 maneu-
vers through a dense fog in Wonsan harbor and spots
a group of five enemy fishing boats (sampans) on the
beach at the northern end of Ho-do Pando and de-
stroys them.
June 7-19 1953 In Naval activity, Naval and
air power during this final phase of the conflict fo-
cuses upon enemy front line positions that face
Eighth Army. Carriers working together in groups
of three and four pound the enemy positions day
and night. In addition, on the eastern front, the
enemy is under heavy bombardment by the guns of
the battleship New Jersey.
June 8 At Panmunjom, a final agreement on the
exchange of POWs is reached between the U.N. and
the Communists. Soldiers not wanting to be repatri-
ated will, after a period of four months from the date
they come under the jurisdiction and custody of the
peace commission, be given the status of civilian.
POWs who seek asylum will be set free. On the fol-
lowing day, the South Korean assembly denounces the
peace plan and rejects the proposal.
In Naval activity, the USS Lof berg (DD 759) and
the USS Bole (DD 755) come under fire while operat-
ing near Wonsan, but the barrage of about 60 rounds
causes no damage to either vessel.
June 9 In Naval activity, a celebration is held
aboard the USS Boxer (CVA 21) in honor of the
59,000th landing of a plane on her deck.
In other activity, the USS Bole (DD 755) pounds
enemy positions at Wonsan and the enemy gunners re-
turn fire, but the Bole sustains no damage.
June 9-15 1953 The Communists initiate an
offensive that focuses primarily on the ROK II Corps
and some X Corps positions. Some territory is gained,
but a high price is paid, as the enemy loses about
16,300 killed. In addition, 81 are captured. Eighth
Army is bolstered by the carriers USS Princeton (CVA
37), USS Philippine Sea (CVA 47), USS Boxer (CVA
21), and USS Lake Champlain (CVA 39). The planes
essentially ignore the elements and often operate with
300-foot ceilings, rather than 1,500 feet.
June 10 From today until 17 June, the combined
flights of U.S. Air Force, Navy and Marine planes
946
amount to 8,359 sorties against enemy targets in sup-
port of the ROKs, who are being pummeled by the
Chinese. The Marine squadrons execute 1,156 of the
sorties and for the entire month of June, Marine pilots
fly 3,276 sorties, although impeded on 23 days due to
inclement weather.
On this day, 68 planes of VMF-115 and VMF-311
pass over enemy targets in the vicinity of Chaeryong
and deliver napalm that splatters about a troop complex
composed of 333 structures. Subsequently, aerial pho-
tos of the area are obtained and it is determined by
count that 230 buildings were reduced to debris and
another 40 were damaged.
In other activity, a contingent of 8 single-engine
planes bomb the friendly held island of Psengyong-do
without effect. No damage is inflicted and no casual-
ties occur.
In the I Corps sector, the Chinese continue to take
advantage of the lull in activity of Eighth Army as the
conflict seems to be moving toward an armistice. The
Communists had shuffled troops and supplies into the
area around the Pukhan River near Kumsong, from
where they launch a strong attack against the ROK II
Corps. On this day, two enemy divisions of the 60th
and 68th Chinese Armies descend southward on oppo-
site sides of the river and plunge into the ROK lines.
The massive push splinters the South Korean positions
and within six days, the Chinese make huge gains by
shoving the ROKs (5th Division) back about 4,000
yards.
The Chinese continue their offensive by pivoting
west. The Communists pound against the ROK II
main line of resistance and they stretch directly into
the X Corps sector to strike the ROK 20th Division at
the Punch Bowl. The South Korean forces collide with
the enemy all across their front, but the intensity of the
attack builds in momentum as it rolls forward.
Finally, by the 28th, the pressure lessens along the
line; however, the South Koreans are badgered in the
process. In addition to bulldozing and shrinking the
S.K. front lines by 4,000 yards along a 15,000-yard
sector of the perimeter, the Chinese also add to their re-
cently won outposts by gaining more hills east of the
Pukhan River.
The South Koreans inflict an estimated 6,600 casu-
alties upon the enemy; however, in addition to losing
the ground, the South Koreans sustain about 7,300 ca-
sualties.
In the X Corps sector, 3rd Division zone, the enemy
launches an attack against Outpost Harry, manned by
elements of Company K, 15th Regiment. At a nearby
listening post, one of the defenders had been wounded.
Master Sergeant Ola A. Mize leaves the defenses, bolts
to the wounded soldier and gets him back to safety.
Meanwhile, Mize rallies the troops and in the process,
he gets knocked down several times by artillery and
mortar blasts. Each time he is able to return to his po-
sition. Mize and the able-bodied troops move from
bunker to bunker to eliminate the enemy that had pen-
etrated.
 947
At about the same time, Mize spots the enemy about
to overrun a machine gun position. He darts to the gun
and eliminates ten of the enemy while the others with-
draw. Mize then returns to the command post to find
more wounded. He supports the wounded and calls for
artillery to pound the enemy approaches. At dawn,
Sergeant Mize leads a counterattack to drive the re-
maining enemy form the outpost. Sergeant Mize be-
comes a recipient of the Medal of Honor for his ex-
traordinary heroism and leadership in the face of a
superior numbered enemy force.
In Air Force activity, planes from Far East Air Forces
Bomber Command and from Fifth Air Force combine
their power to strike enemy airfields in North Korea
that are either operable or close to being back in serv-
ice. The fields at Sinuiju and Uiju come under a blis-
tering air strike by fifteen B-29s of the 98th Bomber
Wing, while a simultaneous attack is made by Fifth Air
Force planes (F-84s) on the airfield at Kanggye.
June 11 Between February 27, 1952, and this date,
the pilots of the 1st Marine Air Wing have completed
more than 80,000 combat sorties in support of the di-
visions of the United Nations Command.
In Naval activity, the USS Wiltsie (DD 716), a de-
stroyer, becomes the recipient of about 45 rounds of
enemy battery fire while she operates near Wonsan.
The vessel is struck by one shell and sustains some dam-
age on the main deck (starboard side); however, the
ship is able to continue its mission.
The batteries at Wonsan also propel the usual barrage
upon friendly islands in the harbor, but no damage or
casualties occur.
In yet other activity, a sea lift is initiated to evacuate
friendly Koreans from coastal islands north of the 38th
Parallel. About 19,400 people are relocated in antici-
pation of an imminent armistice; however, prior to de-
parting, the people destroy their property to prevent
the Communists from making use of it.
In Air Force activity, the air raids against enemy air-
fields continue. The field at Chunggang-ni is struck
by thirteen F-84 fighter bombers. After-action reports
indicate that the runway had been knocked out of com-
mission.
June 12 In the ROK II Corps sector, the Chinese
strike against the ROK 5th Division at its right flank,
near the Pukhan River. The fighting continues into the
following day, but a counterattack by the South Ko-
rean 8th Division (reserve) fails to halt the Commu-
nist advance. The pressure remains great as the Chi-
nese maul the ROKs. By the 14th, the Chinese are able
to completely encircle one regiment and in so doing,
imperil the left sector of the X Corps.
In Naval activity, the USS Manchester (CL 83) and
USS Carpenter (DDE 825) initiate a bombardment of
enemy positions in the vicinity of Hungnam. Com-
munist batteries return fire, but inflict no harm.
June 13 The USS Lake Champlain (CVA 39), hav-
ing recently arrived to serve with TF-77, launches
June 15, 1953
planes that strike enemy airfields at Chongjin, Hoe-
mun, Hoeryong and Wonsan.
In related activity, an accident occurs when 20-mm
rounds inadvertently hit two planes. The aircraft are
destroyed. No casualties are reported.
June 13-18 1953 The massive campaign to
destroy and damage airfields in North Korea con-
tinues. During this period U.S. Air Force and Ma-
rine Corps planes combine to destroy the dams at
Namsi and Taechon. The targets come under attack
by B-29s, F-84s and Marine F4U Corsair fighter-
bombers; however, the dams hold. It had been in-
tended to crack the dams to cause flooding of both
airfields.
June 14 In Naval activity, Task Force 77 launches
a large air attack, which includes a strike against the
Hasepori marshaling yard, a primary supply depot. The
air strikes (more than 500 sorties) are intended to slow
the Communist offensive by bolstering the Eighth
Army ground troops.
In other activity, Communist shore gun batteries at
Wonsan fire upon the USS Lof berg (DD 759) and the
USS Bole (DD 755) without effect. The batteries also
fire upon friendly islands in the harbor, but no casual-
ties or damage occur.
In yet other activity, the USS Bremerton (CA 130),
while operating near Wonsan, also comes under a failed
attack. Also, the Communist gunners bombard the
friendly-held island of Cho-do and the USS LST-529
in Wonsan harbor, but with a rapid response, the USS
LSMR 409 launches rockets that terminate the enemy
fire.
June 15-30 1953 The Chinese initiate at-
tacks in the I Corps area and by the 30th, the fight-
ing nets only two outposts.
In Naval activity, enemy batteries at Wonsan ex-
pend more than 100 rounds against a series of Amer-
ican warships, but none of the shells cause any harm.
The targets had been the USS Lof berg (DD 759),
USS Bole (DD 755) and USS Current (ARS 22).
June 15 Planes operating from the USS Princeton
fly 184 combat sorties, which set a record for the most
sorties flown from a carrier on a single day. The com-
bined sorties for the Navy and Marine Corps this day
totals 910, a record for a single day.
In the Eighth Army area, General Maxwell Taylor, in
response to the Chinese gains in the ROK II Corps sec-
tor, modifies the boundary separating the ROK II
Corps and X Corps, pushing X Corps boundary to the
Pukhan River. Taylor also attaches the ROK 5th Divi-
sion to X Corps. Other adjustments are made by X
Corps on the following day.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, Major General Ran-
dolph McC. Pate assumes command of the 1st Marine
Division. He succeeds General Pollock, who retires.
General Pate, similarly to General Pollock, moved from
command of the 2nd Marine Division at Camp LeJe-
une to take command of his new division.
June 16, 1953
In other activity, in response to the enormous gains
by the Chinese against the ROK forces, the Far East
Air Forces, including U.S. Air Force, Navy and Marine
Corps squadrons, unleash what becomes the highest
number of strikes of the entire conflict. The planes fly
2,143 sorties.
For the period 14 June through 17 June, Fifth Air
Force executes 3,941 combat sorties at a cost of nine pi-
lots killed. Eleven aircraft are lost and another 11 are se-
riously damaged. In addition, 42 planes sustain minor
damage.
In Air Force activity, Brigadier General Richard H.
Carmichael assumes command of Far East Air Forces
Bomber Command. He succeeds Brigadier General
William P. Fisher, who assumed the position on 4 Oc-
tober 1952.
In the ROK II Corps sector, the commanding officer
attempts to halt the huge enemy penetration. The ROK
3rd Division is dispatched to plug the hole that opened
between the ROK 5th and 8th Divisions.
In Air Force activity, Colonel John C. Edwards as-
sumes command of the 18th Bomber Wing. He suc-
ceeds Colonel Frank S. Perego.
June 16 The Chinese maintain enormous pres-
sure against the ROK II Corps. The collapse of its 5th
Division over the past several days has created new
problems for the X Corps, which finds its left flank in
danger.
In the X Corps sector, the commanding officer, Lieu-
tenant General I.D. White, tightens the front of the
ROK 20th Division and in addition, he directs the re-
serve ROK 7th Division to bolster the left flank of the
20th Division. The moves are positive, but in the
meantime, the right flank of the ROK 8th Division
had been unable to hold its ground and the ROK 5th
Division, defending east of the Pukhan River, had to-
tally collapsed.
The ROK 8th Division mounts a counterattack, but
the Chinese repel it. Consequently, the ROK 8th Di-
vision establishes a new line about 3,000 yards back
from where it had stood originally.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries at
Wonsan initiate a three-day bombardment of the
friendly held islands in the harbor that continues
through June 18. The artillery causes no casualties.
In other activity, the USS Princeton (CVA 37), bol-
sters the ground forces on the front lines by launching
a record-setting 184 sorties. It is the highest number of
sorties flown from a single carrier on any one day since
the beginning of the war.
Also, a U.S. Navy plane (AD) intercepts and destroys
an enemy PO-2 aircraft in the skies over the front lines.
In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force executes 1,834
sorties, which sets a record for a single day during the
Korean War. More than half are close-air sorties against
enemy positions in the Pukham valley to bolster
friendly ground troops. (See also, June 15, 1952.)
June 17 By this date, at Panmunjom, the U.N.
representatives and the Communists are finishing up
948
with the remaining details of the truce line to be drawn
and the final items regarding the truce.
In Naval activity, the Communist shore gun batter-
ies on Ho-do Pando focus on a trio of U.S. destroyers
and propel about 150 rounds in an effort to finally bag
an American ship before the close of hostilities. The
targets, USS Irwin (DD 794), USS Rowan (DD 782)
and the USS Henderson (DD 785), remain unscathed
and continue their missions in Wonsan harbor.
June 18 Under orders of South Korean President
Syngman Rhee, South Korean troops release more than
25,000 North Korean POWs that are anti–Commu-
nist. The former troops scatter from four separate com-
pounds and disperse among the civilian population of
South Korea. Most had been unwilling to seek repa-
triation. American troops, small in number, are unable
to hold the masses back while the South Korean troops
who had opened the gates merely observe the stam-
pede. The escapees receive word on Seoul radio to evade
U.S. forces to avoid recapture.
The incident ignites a furor and the Communists
imply that the U.S. had been involved with the release
of the POWs. The U.S. maintains its efforts to restore
the negotiations to a point from which the final truce
can be worked out. Discussions are held with the pres-
ident of South Korea and with the Communists. By
the end of June, General Clark is informed by Wash-
ington to work out the details and if necessary, sign an
armistice without the cooperation of the South Kore-
ans. President Rhee has threatened to pull the ROKs
from the line, a potential major problem, because at
this time, about seventy percent of the troops on line
are South Koreans.
In other activity, the attacks against the ROK II
Corps and the X Corps, which began on 10 June, begin
to diminish by this day. General Taylor orders the ROK
II Corps and the U.S. X Corps to alter their lines and
initiate relief of the ROK 5th and 7th Divisions. Tay-
lor’s directives also mandate that the boundary sepa-
rating the ROK II Corps and the X Corps be realigned
to where it had been on 15 June. In conjunction, the
mid-month attacks against the ROK II Corps are costly
for both the Communists and the South Koreans. The
estimated Chinese casualties are 6,628 troops. The
ROK II Corps sustains 7,337 casualties.
In other activity, U.S. Marines assist in preventing
anti–Communist POWs from escaping from a U.N.
prison camp in the vicinity of Inchon.
In Air Force activity, Captain Lonnie R. Moore en-
gages and downs MiG for his fifth kill to become an ace.
Another pilot, Captain Ralph S. Parr, Jr., from the same
unit as Moore, the 335th Fighter-Interceptor
Squadron, also receives his fifth kill to become an ace.
In Naval activity, the destroyer USS Irwin (DD 794),
while operating near Kalmagak, is bombarded with 90
rounds of enemy fire. The main deck sustains some
damage from one hit and 5 crewmen are injured. An-
other destroyer operating in the same area, USS Rowan
(DD 782) becomes the recipient of about 45 rounds
 949
and sustains 5 hits. The Rowan sustains damage and
10 casualties, three of whom are serious. The cruiser
USS St. Paul (CA 73) also comes under fire, but none
of the rounds strike the vessel.
In other activity, a South Korean boat operating in
Wonsan harbor, carrying intelligence personnel, en-
gages a Communist boat, the first enemy patrol boat
spotted in the harbor in more than one year. The en-
gagement lasts for about ten minutes.
June 19 In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy plane (VP–
46), while on patrol in the vicinity of Kwanga Island off
the coast of China, comes under fire from an anti-aircraft
gun, but the plane is unharmed and resumes its mission.
In other activity, the USS Rowan (DD 782), which
had been damaged by enemy fire on the previous day,
again comes under fire while operating near Yang-do.
Despite a 125-round barrage, the Communist gunners
fail to strike the ship. Also, the cruiser USS Bremerton
(CA 130) comes under fire while operating in Wonsan
harbor, but the battery fire fails to inflict any harm.
June 20 Nine enemy planes penetrate without in-
cident and bomb Seoul, with the bombs landing in
close proximity to the residence of the South Korean
president, Syngman Rhee. Two people are killed and
eight others are injured.
In other activity, the USS Current (ARS 22) and the
USS LST 855 collide at Sesebo, Japan, while in the
process of transferring supplies. The Current sustains no
damage, but the LST 855 sustains some damage. No
personnel casualties occur on either ship.
June 21 The 187th Airborne Regimental Com-
bat Team arrives in Korea from Japan. Today the entire
unit and its equipment are transported to an airbase
near the front lines. The 187th Airborne RCT will be
attached to the 2nd Division. In a few days, the 34th
Regimental Combat Team (24th Division) will also ar-
rive to further bolster Eighth Army. The 34th RCT de-
ploys to the rear of the 2nd Division.
June 22 In Air Force activity, Colonel Robert P.
Baldwin, attached to the 25th Fighter Interceptor
Squadron, engages and shoots down a MiG to receive
his fifth kill, which makes him an ace.
In other activity, Far East Air Forces initiates flights
June 22-23 to transport the 187th Airborne Combat
Team from Japan to Korea to augment Eighth Army
reserve, as the Communists continue to press to make
territorial gains to improve their bargaining position at
the peace talks in Panmunjom. Twenty-seven C-47s
and sixty-one C-119s of the 315th Air Division carry
3,252 paratroopers to complete the mission. The planes
also deliver 1,771 tons of cargo.
In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy plane (P2V) comes
under fire while on a normal patrol off the coast of
China near Amoy, but no damage is inflicted and the
plane is able to carry out its mission.
June 23 In Air Force activity, by this date, only
one North Korean airfield is operable due to the con-
June 26, 1953
stant air strikes by Far East Air Forces and Fifth Air
Force. Lt. General Otto P. Weyland directs his forces on
repetitive attacks to ensure the fields are more heavily
damaged. He concludes that a new series of raids over
a period of about four or five days would permanently
close the fields.
In Naval activity, the HMAS Culgoa arrives on scene
near Haeju at Yongmae Island to evacuate a small
friendly guerrilla force, subsequent to an invasion by
Communist Chinese troops. In conjunction, the Chi-
nese hold the island for two days only and then aban-
don it, permitting the friendly guerrillas to return.
June 24 The Chinese again take the offensive after
about six days of light activity. The South Koreans are
again the primary target. Communist attacks strike in
the IX Corps sector, against the ROK 9th Division,
which is deployed just west of the ROK II Corps.
In Naval activity, Communist shore gun batteries at
Wonsan bombard the friendly-held island of Hwangto-
do and four more rounds at USS Irwin (DD 794). No
damage or casualties were experienced.
June 24-30 1953 The 1st Marine Division
remains in reserve; however, the Marine artillery
units remain on the line and MAG-12 and MAG-33
squadrons remain extremely active in support of
Eight Army units. As part of Fifth Air Force, Marine
pilots fly constant support missions. On 30 June,
the Marines execute 301 sorties.
In other activity, during the same time period, the
Communists look to enlist “a few good men” by pro-
pelling propaganda leaflets into the U.S. Marine
lines.
June 25 This day marks the third anniversary of
the North Korean invasion of South Korea. Also, the
Chinese, who had attacked ROK forces in the IX Corps
sector on the previous day, launch a new attack, this
time against the I Corps. A separate enemy division
strikes the ROK 1st Division at its positions to the right
of the British Commonwealth Division, along the left
flank of the I Corps.
In related activity, the 7th Marines, still in reserve
with the entire 1st Marine Division, receives word that
it has been placed on standby in the event it is needed
to help quell the Chinese attacks.
In Naval activity, four F4U-5N planes attached to
TF-77 are temporarily assigned to Fifth Air Force for
the purpose of night patrols over Seoul, due to the re-
cent penetrations of propeller-driven enemy aircraft.
Fifth Air Force does not have any propeller-driven
night fighter aircraft.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Gurke (DD 783)
comes under heavy shore gun battery fire while she op-
erates near Tanchon. The vessel is struck twice and
some damage is sustained. Three crewmen are super-
ficially wounded.
June 26 In the I Corps sector, by this time, the Chi-
nese attacks against the ROK 1st Division, which began
on the previous day, gain several forward outpost
June 27, 1953
positions. The 7th Marines had been placed on standby
the previous day, in the event that it was needed to sup-
port the ROKs; however, this day, it reverts back to re-
serve. Instead, the 1st South Korean Marine Corps Reg-
iment, KMC/RCT (minus its 3rd Battalion), is ordered
to stand by for possible action. The KMC/RCT after-
ward moves from its area at Arrowhead to the left part
of the ROK 1st Division’s sector.
In related activity, the Marine 1st 4.5 inch Rocket
Battery is directed to move from its positions in the I
Corps to positions about 20 miles east to bolster the
ROKs. The Marine contingent remains in the sector
until 30 June to provide support fire. All the while, as
the Chinese pound the ROKs, the 25th Division sec-
tor remains quiet.
Also, the friendly-held islands in Wonsan harbor
come under the increased focus of the enemy shore gun
batteries June 26-28, but despite the three-day bom-
bardment, no casualties are inflicted and no damage is
sustained.
June 27 The vessel HMNZS Kaniere, while oper-
ating in the vicinity of the approaches to Chinnampo,
comes under heavy fire. Nevertheless, of the 55 rounds
fired, none cause any harm.
— In Japan: The weather in Japan deteriorates and
the flooding which follows torrential rains on Kyushu
Island knocks out the land-lines of communications
between Yokosuka and Sasebo, causing problems for
the Navy. The lines are not totally restored for a few
weeks.
Late June 1953 In the I Corps sector, the Chi-
nese launch several attacks and manage to gain con-
trol of two outposts in the ROK 1st Division zone.
The thinly manned outposts had been struck by
forces of regimental strength. Similar attacks are
launched in the X Corps sector, against the ROK
9th Division and the U.S. 3rd Division. The Chinese
are unable to penetrate the defenses of the ROKs
and at the 3rd Division positions, some temporary
gains are made; however, elements of the 3rd Divi-
sion counterattack and regain the lost ground.
June 28 In Air Force activity, the recently arrived
187th Airborne Regimental Combat Team begins its
return to Japan. Two regiments, the 19th and 34th, re-
turn between this day and 2 July aboard transport
planes of the 315th Air Division. The combat team
had arrived on 22 June to bolster Eighth Army.
In Naval activity, a U.S. Navy VP-1 plane, while on
a photographic mission off the China mainland, comes
under fire near Chiu Tung island (28-33 N, 121-56
E) and again near Chinghsu Island (28-30 N-121-52
E); however, the anti-aircraft fire has no effect. The
plane is able to continue its mission without sustaining
any damage.
June 29 In Naval activity, the USS Irwin (DD
794) while off Wonsan during the darkened hours,
comes under fire by enemy ground troops who attempt
to hit the vessel with machine gun fire, but similarly
950
to the shore gun batteries, the marksmanship is poor.
The ship is not hit by any of the fire. Enemy shore gun
batteries at Wonsan also fire upon friendly islands, but
no damage is inflicted.
June 30 In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force Sabre
jets engage and destroy 16 MiGs during this day’s action.
It is the largest number of MiGs downed on a single day
during the conflict. Lieutenant Henry Buttelmann, 25th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, gets credit for one of the
MiGs, which gives him his fifth victory and makes him
an ace. The previous high for downed enemy planes on
a single day had occurred on 13 December 1951, when
American pilots shot down fourteen enemy planes.
In Naval activity, in what has become a ritual, the
Communist shore gun batteries at Wonsan propel 30 ar-
tillery shells on the U.N. held islands, but all rounds
land harmlessly.
In other activity, the USS Manchester (CL 83), while
operating near Wonsan, comes under fire from enemy
shore gun batteries, but none of the rounds, about 40,
hit the ship directly. However, a shell fragment strikes
the vessel and inflicts some minor damage, including the
door to a powder room.
Also, the carrier planes from TF-77, assigned to Fifth
Air Force, prove their worth. Two enemy propeller
planes attempt to penetrate to bomb Seoul and they
are intercepted and shot down by one of the night pa-
trol planes.
In yet other activity, aircraft attached to Marine Air-
craft Group 12 execute 217 sorties and deliver a record-
setting 340 tons of bombs and napalm on Communist
positions.
In related activity, U.S. Navy and Marine pilots, dur-
ing the month of June, execute 9,238 sorties. For the
same time period, the British aviators execute 864 sor-
ties.
— In the United States: At this time, Marine Corps
strength stands at 249,219 men.
July 1953 In the Eighth Army area, the esti-
mated casualties of the Chinese against Eighth Army
for the month of July 1953 amount to 72,000, in-
cluding 25,000 killed — the equivalent of seven di-
visions — in the attacks against the IX Corps and the
ROK II Corps.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, dur-
ing July 1953, the final month of the Korean War, the
Marines sustain 181 infantry killed in action, but
with the wounded, total casualties rises to 1,661
men. Chinese losses against the Marines amount to
405 killed (counted), 761 estimated killed, 1,988 es-
timated wounded and 1 prisoner, to bring the total
casualties to 3,155.
During the final ten days of the war, the assault
against the MLR on 25 July had been the heaviest.
The Chinese, during the final ten days, strike I Corps
25 separate times, eight against Marine positions,
five against the British 1st Commonwealth, six in
the 1st ROK area and six in the U.S. 7th Infantry
Division zone.
 951
July 1 The 1st Marine Division, held in reserve
since early May, prepares to return to its former lines in
West Korea to relieve the 25th Division, which assumed
responsibility for the area on 5 May.
In Naval activity, an enemy train running south
along the east coast of Korea is spotted by the HMCS
Athabaskan (DDE). The ship pours fire upon the train,
but the locomotive escapes. Nevertheless, it speeds off
alone, leaving twenty boxcars behind. Soon after,
planes attached to TF-77 and the destroyer escort USS
Wiltsie (DD 716) destroy seventeen of the boxcars.
July 4 In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces
reinitiates its campaign against enemy airfields on July
4–5. The primary airfield at Pyongyang, the airfield at
Taechon and the one at Namsi come under attack by a
contingent of twenty-four B-29s. Namsi will be hit
again on the 7th.
July 5 In Air Force activity, Colonel Maurice L.
Martin, commander 18th Fighter Bomber Group, as-
sumes command of the 18th Fighter Bomber Wing.
He succeeds Colonel John C. Edwards. Four days after
the conclusion of the conflict, on 31 July, Colonel
Avelin P. Tacon assumes command of the wing.
In Naval activity, a celebration is held aboard the
carrier USS Boxer (CVA 21) in honor of its 60,000th
plane landing.
In other activity, the LST 578 is accidentally dam-
aged when it becomes grounded while operating near
Cheju-do. The vessel’s lower compartments flood.
July 6–11 1953 THE BATTLE OF PORK CHOP
HILL (HILL 255) The Chinese, aware that the
armistice is near, continue to find a weakness along
the lines to snatch a major victory during the wan-
ing days of the war. Recently, fresh troops in the form
of the Chinese 1st Army (Chinese 1st, 2nd and 7th
Divisions) had arrived to relieve other Chinese units,
providing the Communists with extra incentive to
launch an attack.
The enemy had also been broadcasting demands
for surrender, offering the 7th Division units a
choice, either surrender or die, as well as other intim-
idating threats; however, the Chinese had made sim-
ilar threats all during the conflict and in most cases,
it was the enemy which paid the ultimate price. In
this case, the men of the 17th Regiment ignore the
threats. The threats are received with equal atten-
tion that is given to the Chinese bugles. At times,
during some battles, the Americans actually acquired
Chinese bugles from enemy troops that no longer
had use for them and the Americans would use the
confiscated bugles to confuse the enemy.
On this day, subsequent to dusk, the Chinese
mount a major assault against a coveted outpost in
the 7th Division’s zone, Hill 255, known as Pork
Chop Hill. Earlier, during the previous March, the
Chinese failed in a similar attempt. On this day, sub-
sequent to dusk, amid a miserable torrential rain-
storm, the Chinese commence a massive artillery and
July 6, 1953
mortar bombardment that crashes all along the
perimeter of the 7th Division. However, the main
objective is the outpost on Hill 255, about 500 yards
to the front of the MLR and near the enemy-held
Old Baldy. Encouraged by the shrill sounds of whis-
tles, the blare of the Chinese bugles and the vocifer-
ous shouts of prodding officers, the infantry charges
forward, oblivious to the return fire and obstacles, in-
cluding barbed wire.
Some forward detachments of the company-sized
defending force, the first to see the approaching
hordes, make it back to the main defenses, manned
by Company A, 1st Battalion, 17th Regiment. Ini-
tially, elements of the Chinese 7th Division move
silently toward the target and soon after, on the sig-
nal, they start the ascent on the first of many attacks.
Successive waves pound against the American de-
fenses. The outpost is hammered by a force of about
company size, but the subsequent attacks continue
to build in strength. Although vastly outnumbered,
the defenders take a high toll on the enemy.
The troops peer down the slopes and suddenly see
an ocean of Chinese. Heavy fire commences to
knock out the initial wave, but the Chinese are more
numerous than the amount of ammunition avail-
able. After the machine gun ammunition is ex-
pended, the troops revert to other weapons, includ-
ing the bayonet. However, the sheer numbers of the
enemy eventually force the Americans to pull back
from the crest and regroup.
The south slope becomes the new line of defense
for Company A, and soon after for Company B,
which arrives to bolster the positions. Meanwhile,
the Chinese, during the course of repeated assaults,
gain ground on the north and west slopes and a large
portion of the east slope. In the midst of the nasty
weather, the grim darkness and near-insurmount-
able odds, the troops of Companies A and B launch
counterattacks to match the determination of the
relentless Chinese.
Despite disrupting the communications of the
Americans and controlling the summit by the fol-
lowing day, the Chinese are unable to finish off the
defiant defenders, who themselves hold an invalu-
able piece of the hill, the primary trench, and the
key to preservation, the access road from the out-
post to the rear and the 7th Division’s MLR.
On the morning of the 7th, the intense fighting
continues; however, neither side can claim victory
nor permanent progress. The attacks and counterat-
tacks do not change the control of the hill. On the
8th, Companies E and G, 17th Infantry Regiment,
relieve Companies A and B. Vicious fighting con-
tinues, but still, the battle remains fluid and neither
side gains the advantage. Again, on the 9th, the U.S.
7th Division mounts unsuccessful attacks. Never-
theless, neither side is willing to concede.
The bloodbath continues into the following day,
the 10th, when the Chinese mount yet another night
attack in an attempt to gain total control of Hill 255.
July 6, 1953 952

The pork chop-shaped elevation, by this time, be- The confusion is due to a motion picture titled Pork
comes one more battle-scarred piece of earth that Chop Hill made in 1959. It showcased the grueling
holds no great value, except the lives of those who warfare during the battle to gain Pork Chop Hill;
have been lost to hold it. And, the contingents of the however, the picture was focused on a previous bat-
17th and 34th Infantry Regiments that have been tle for the hill during April 1953. [See also, March 23,
fighting to hold what they have, plus evict the Chi- 1953, and April 16–18, 1953.])
nese, remain determined to regain the battered
ground.
July 6 The 1st Marine Division initiates relief of the
U.S. 25th Division in the right sector of the I Corps.
On the 10th, little remains on the hill that can be
It redeploys where it had been prior to 5 May. However,
further destroyed, except the troops. The Commu-
since the departure of the Marines, the Nevada Cities
nists continue to propel mortar shells into the Amer-
Outposts (Carson-Elko-Vegas) and another large por-
ican positions at a rapid pace. Company K, 32nd
tion of the line are now occupied by the Chinese. The
Infantry, arrives at Pork Chop Hill during the morn-
7th Marines relieves the U.S. 14th Regiment and the
ing, but it had to pass through storms of artillery
Turkish forces (TAFC) deploy to hold the right regi-
and mortar fire in order to relieve one of the other be-
mental sector.
leaguered units.
The 5th Marines assumes responsibility for the cen-
The Americans continue to hold the hill positions,
ter portion of the MLR. In conjunction, the 1st
but the Chinese form for a major assault during the
Marines reverts to regimental reserve. The 11th
morning hours of the 11th, when a battalion attacks
Marines and other units, including the armor, are al-
the Americans. The superior numbers of the Chi-
ready on line in support of the 25th Division’s efforts
nese compel the Americans to give some ground;
against the Chinese.
however, they remain steadfast in the collapsed
trenches. July 7–9 1953 THE BATTLE FOR BERLIN–
In the meantime, it becomes evident to the com- EAST BERLIN On this day, one day after the 1st Ma-
manders that the Chinese are willing to spend as rine Division regiments began to relieve the 25th
many lives as necessary to take the hill and that the Division in the I Corps sector, the Chinese launch
strategic value is outweighed by the additional cost an attack while the relief is still in progress and be-
of American lives. It is decided to abandon the out- fore the Marines can fully establish stiff defensive
post, but with the Chinese able to observe the op- positions. The Chinese have recently mauled the
erations on Pork Chop from Old Baldy, the maneu- ROKs all along the line and they have also seized key
ver to withdraw could be extremely costly, outposts (Nevada Cities) in the sector taken over by
particularly if it is initiated in the darkness. the 25th Division when the Marines had been taken
In an attempt to fool the Chinese, it is decided to from the line and placed into reserve.
use the armored personnel carriers during daylight At Berlin and East Berlin, where the Turks have
on the 11th to inconspicuously remove the defend- not yet been totally replaced by the Marines, the ar-
ers. The Chinese are familiar with the daily runs by tillery and mortars begin to strike during the initial
the armor to bring up ammunition and supplies. The moments of the attack. In concert, the Chinese
ruse works perfectly, as the Chinese are convinced swarm upon the two outposts from their newly won
that the armor had been bringing in supplies and re- positions in the heights at Vegas. Berlin and East
inforcements. Consequently, the hill is abandoned Berlin, at this time, are each defended by one platoon
without incident, but prior to departure, the area is (2nd Battalion, 7th Marines).
set with various booby traps. Nearly two days pass be- Two separate reinforced battalions, attached to the
fore the Chinese figure out what had occurred. Once Chinese 407th Regiment, 136th Division, charge
they do, they move out to occupy the American po- Berlin and East Berlin in successive waves to collapse
sitions to control the entire hill, only to be hit with the resistance. However, the brutal forces are slowed
devastating artillery fire that transforms the pock- by heavy return fire. Nonetheless, the tidal wave of
eted summit into what looks like a section of a level Chinese crashes into the lines despite the walls of
prairie. fire. By about 15 minutes before midnight (7th-8th),
During the final battle for Pork Chop Hill, Gen- the besieged defenders are face-to-face with the Chi-
eral Trudeau, the 7th Division commander, led one nese and engaged in savage close-quartered combat.
of the counterattacks up the slopes. Two men, Cor- The Marines at both posts desperately fight to throw
poral Dan D. Schoonover (Company A, 13th Engi- back the assault.
neering Bn.) and 1st Lt. Richard T. Shea, Jr. (Com- At Berlin, some Turks had not yet departed when
pany A, 17th Infantry Regiment) become recipients the Chinese attack slams into the post. A nearby con-
of the Medal of Honor, posthumously. The Ameri- tingent of Marines from Company F, a reinforced
cans sustain just under 250 killed and more than 900 squad, operating at an ambush site, is able to bolster
wounded. The Chinese sustain casualties estimated Berlin to build a more formidable shield of resist-
as high as about 6,000. ance. However, at East Berlin, they receive no rein-
(Sometimes now there is confusion about who forcements and are compelled to fight alone until
held Pork Chop Hill at the end of this final battle. some reinforcements can arrive. Here, too, nasty
 953
hand-to-hand combat ensues as the Marines are fired
upon from point-blank range. The isolated platoon,
which receives artillery and mortar support, is unable
to stem the tide. The outpost is overwhelmed by the
building momentum of the battalion. Nonetheless,
vicious fighting continues. The Marines refuse to
capitulate, but by midnight, radio communications
from East Berlin cease.
While the outnumbered survivors at Berlin and
East Berlin continues to resist, steps are taken to get
reinforcements to them from the MLR, only 325
yards away, but Chinese artillery and small arms fire
stand in the path. Nevertheless, the Marines prepare
a counterattack. In the meantime, while communi-
cations at East Berlin had been severed, headquarters
is aware that at Berlin, the defenders still hold stead-
fastly. By 0130, the situation at Berlin becomes un-
certain. All radio reports from there cease. Mean-
while, the regiment moves at full throttle to reinforce
the main line in the event the Chinese are able to
collapse the outposts and move against the MLR.
At 0355, a reinforced squad from Company F
moves out without the protection of artillery fire to
launch a surprise attack at 0445. The Chinese stop
the assault and prevent further advance. Shortly
thereafter, a second counterattack is launched at
about 0445, but again the Chinese intercept it with
artillery fire. Fifteen Marines become casualties, but
the enemy artillery fails to halt the advance. The re-
inforcements continue to drive forward, but within
about one hour, prior to reaching the objective, or-
ders arrive that direct the contingent to halt and re-
turn to its lines.
It had been decided instead to unleash another
artillery attack and send fresh troops into the battle.
At the time the counterattack is aborted, it remains
unknown whether there are any survivors at either
outpost. By 0630 on the 8th, grim news arrives. East
Berlin has fallen and still there is no news regarding
the defenders at Berlin 500 yards west.
At dawn on the 8th, preparations continue for a
counterattack to regain East Berlin and if need be,
Berlin; however, Berlin had survived the onslaught
and the Marines and Turkish elements still hold
there. The enemy battalion had not been able to fold
the defenses. But, the situation remains grave. Only
18 defenders are able-bodied. Size restraints at the
outpost prevent a large force from being dispatched
to reinforce. Consequently, an 18-man contingent
(reinforced) from the 2nd Battalion speeds toward
the battered outpost, while a more potent detach-
ment of reinforcements prepares to take East Berlin
back from the Chinese.
Under an artillery barrage of the 11th Marines,
Turkish artillery and mortar fire, a two-platoon (re-
inforced) contingent drawn from Companies G and
H, 3rd Battalion, jumps off at 1000. The advance
encounters fierce enemy artillery fire, and it strikes
just as the contingent from Company H gets snagged
by the friendly barbed wire of the Marine defenses.
July 7, 1953
The Company H platoon gets pounded while it is
trapped within the wire. The unit is suddenly re-
duced to only twenty troops. In the meantime,
Company G squeezes through the positions of Com-
pany H and maintains the attack. Just prior to 1130,
the platoon arrives in close proximity to the Chinese
and a violent fire fight breaks out. Both sides ex-
change grenades during the savage encounter at the
main trenchline at East Berlin.
While the counterattack hammers the Chinese at
the trenches, artillery and tanks continue to catapult
rounds into the defending positions at East Berlin.
The positions are plastered. Both the forward and
reverse slopes become inundated with a whirlwind of
fire, but the crest, too, is pounded. The Chinese seek
cover from the devastating artillery and mortar fire;
however, more deadly fire strikes the trenches and
bunkers from the 90-mm rifles of the Marines’
tanks. The bombardment is methodical and at times
dangerous even to the Marines, particularly when
the fire zooms directly over the heads of the attack-
ing Marines to strike just to their front.
During the mission to re-secure the outpost, the
weather remains horrible, which inhibits the air sup-
port. While the Marines push forward, the observers
adjust the fire to maintain a shield to their immedi-
ate front, almost as if they are advancing in cadence
with the rounds of the long-guns. The dogged ad-
vance continues as the Marines maintain the attack
and engage the enemy at close-quarters for about
one additional hour, while they ascend to the crest.
At about noon, four Panthers penetrate the nasty
weather that has brought about poor visibility and
come in from the north to bomb and strafe enemy
reinforcements and bunkers to soften the resistance.
The planes contribute and distribute more than
10,000 pounds of bombs as they pass over the Chi-
nese positions.
The Chinese raise fierce resistance against the
Marines, but still, the obstacles are eliminated one by
one as they climb the slope and remain focused on
the main objective, the summit. The climb up the
treacherous path ends and the Marines pounce upon
the crest. The Chinese defenders are then quickly
dispatched, with some actually being thrown down
the reverse slope. At 1233, East Berlin is back under
the belt of the Marines. The Chinese are again van-
quished, but until reinforcements arrive, control of
the hill remains in the hands of only twenty able-
bodied Marines who still stand at the outpost.
Although the 7th Marines had been engulfed in a
brutal fight to regain East Berlin, other operations
also continue. At 1300, just after retaking the out-
post, the 7th Marines completes the relief of the re-
maining Turkish forces at Berlin, giving the 7th
Marines control of both outposts. Within two addi-
tional hours, at 1500, the entire sector is transferred
from the 25th Division to the 1st Marine Division,
but still, some units of the 25th are not fully relieved.
As the transfer takes place, the Kimpo Provisional
July 7, 1953 954

Regiment and the Division Reconnaissance Com- ations, the spring rains of Korea. Torrential rains had
pany are rejoined under the 1st Marine Division. continued without pause during the battle from 5
Operations continue in the Marine zone during July through 8 July and more is on the way.
the afternoon, but few enemy troops are detected.
Nevertheless, it remains clear that the enemy artillery
July 7 Spring rains continue to disrupt operations
all across the front. The storms cause the roads to flood,
positions remain active. During the period of the
inflicting extensive damage. On this day, the Spoon-
7th-8th, the enemy battalions of artillery, number-
bill bridge (formerly X-Ray) in the 1st Marine Division
ing about 17, propel about 19,000 rounds into the
zone becomes submerged under 11 feet of water and it
Marine perimeter. However, the Marine and U.S.
collapses under the pressure.
Army battalions rapidly return fire to neutralize the
In the I Corps sector, at 0300, the 5th Marines, com-
enemy and impede the Chinese from launching a
manded by Colonel Harvey C. Tschirgi, begins to as-
major assault.
sume responsibility for the eastern half of the MLR
By about dusk, an enemy contingent is detected
when the 3rd Battalion relieves elements of the U.S.
as it moves near Frisco, en route to the Berlin–East
35th Regiment. In the afternoon, the 2nd Battalion
Berlin positions. The formation is pounded by ar-
and antitank personnel are on line in the western sec-
tillery, which stymies a further advance. Later, under
tor of the battalion.
darkened skies, the Chinese form for another attack,
Also, at 0445, the 7th Marines, commanded by Col-
but it is not launched until after midnight (8th-9th).
onel Glen C. Funk, assumes responsibility for the right
At 0104 (9th), a Chinese contingent, estimated
regimental sector. It replaces the 14th Regiment, 25th
at the size of a reinforced company, swings down
Division, and the Turkish contingent. In addition, the
from Vegas and moves toward Berlin. The force
first elements of the 1st Marines, commanded by Col-
strikes solidly, but the weakened defenses suffice and
onel Wallace M. Nelson, deploy near the Imjin River by
the Marines return tenacious fire. In the meantime,
1300 and assume responsibility for two bridges there,
the Chinese bounce off Berlin and plow into East
Spoonbill and Libby.
Berlin, but here, too, the Marines resist ferociously.
The view from the Marines’ positions is identical to
At the first sounds of the enemy guns the darkness
what it had been on 5 May, when the 1st Marine Di-
of the night becomes a brightly illuminated sky,
vision had reluctantly moved from the line after having
when the Army’s massive searchlights scour the
fought to hold the ground. Although the landscape and
enemy paths to produce lucrative targets for the
landmarks remain in place, there is a substantial differ-
tanks, artillery and mortar crews, as well as the de-
ence. Three of the outposts held by the Marines are
fending Marines at the outposts.
now occupied by the Chinese. In addition, those par-
While the opposing artillery exchange blows and
ticular landmark outposts, Carson, Elko and Vegas, had
the Marine tanks pound the slopes, the brunt of the
stood in dominant positions to block enemy ap-
fighting remains with the ground Marines, who by
proaches. In particular, the loss of Vegas now imperils
this time are heavily engaged and intertwined with
Berlin and East Berlin, which are again defended by
the enemy, clashing in hand-to-hand combat at both
the Marines as well as another remaining outpost, Ava.
outposts. The grueling, close-quartered battle con-
The Chinese, aware of the return of the Marines,
tinues for about two hours. Supporting “Box-Me-In”
choose to launch a strike before the Marines can settle
fire rivets the area to the front of the respective out-
into their positions. The Communists strike at 2100.
posts and provides some added protection, while the
(See also, July 7–9 1953 THE BATTLE FOR BERLIN–
Marines revert to hand grenades and bayonets to
EAST BERLIN.)
fend off the intruders. By 0315, the Chinese abort the
In Air Force activity, Namsi, which had been struck
attacks and retire.
by B-29s on the 4th, again comes under air attack. In
By dawn on the 9th, the Marines again regroup
a follow up raid on this day, 16 medium bombers strike
and organize the perimeter in preparation for yet an-
the marshaling yard and a supply depot.
other attack. Reinforcements arrive to augment the
In Naval activity, two American vessels, the USS
outposts. The unsuccessful attempt to seize the
Symbol (AM 123) and the USS Wiltsie (DD 716) come
Berlin–East Berlin outposts cost the Chinese 30
under fire from about six batteries while they are oper-
killed (counted) and an estimated 200 more killed.
ating near Wonsan, but no damage is incurred. At Ho-
The estimate of Chinese wounded is 400. The 7th
do Pando, the Communist shore gun batteries fire upon
Marines sustain 9 killed, 12 missing and 126
the Lof berg (DD 759), USS Thomason (DD 760) and
wounded and evacuated. Another 14 Marines sustain
the USS Hamner (DD 718). Some damage is sustained
minor wounds.
by the Thomason, but no casualties occur and no dam-
The Chinese, following their defeat, sink back
age is sustained by the other vessels. Return fire by the
into inactivity for about the next ten days, which
warships totals 800 rounds.
permits the Marines to repair the defenses, complete
the relief of the 25th Division units still in the zone July 8 In Naval activity, the destroyer USS Irwin
and initiate active patrols. However, in addition to (DD 794) engages enemy shore gun batteries located at
dealing with the Chinese, the Marines find that an- a point about ten miles south of Songjin. The Irwin
other adversary has come back to plague their oper- loses its electrical power due to exploding shrapnel that
 955
strikes the main mast. Five men, including the com-
manding officer of Destroyer Squadron 24 (DesRon
24), are wounded.
In other activity, the destroyer USS Wiltsie (DD 716)
comes under fire in the vicinity of Chaho. No direct hits
occur; however, an overhead shell burst causes injuries
to five of the crew. No damage is sustained by the ves-
sel.
In yet other activity, the friendly held islands in
Wonsan harbor again come under bombardment, but
no casualties occur and no damage is sustained. Also,
Admiral Felix B. Stump assumes command of Pacific
Fleet. He succeeds Admiral A.W. Radford.
July 10 In Air Force activity, while the Commu-
nists are preparing to make yet another push for terri-
torial gains prior to a truce, Fifth Air Force moves to im-
pede their efforts. A contingent of fighter bombers
strike rail bridges at Sinanju and Yongmi-dong. Dur-
ing the night (10th-11th), the bridges at Sinanju are
bombed by a contingent from the 8th Bomber Wing.
Simultaneously, the rail bridges at Yongmi-dong come
under attack by a group of B-29s attached to the 307th
Bomber Wing.
July 11 On this day, President Syngman Rhee
agrees to an armistice according to the terms of the Al-
lies. For some time, Rhee had been against the terms and
had even ordered the release of POWs. During the en-
tire month of July in Korea, the clouds deliver deluges
of monsoon rains that interfere with ground operations.
The nasty weather also hinders Fifth Air Force, which
on twelve separate days is compelled to cancel all flights.
Nevertheless, when possible, combat missions are exe-
cuted.
On this day, while flying with Fifth Air Force, Major
John Bolt, USMC, attached to the Fifth Air Force, 51st
Fighter Interceptor Group, knocks down two MiG-
15s, the fifth and sixth to his credit. Major Bolt ac-
complishes the feat on his 37th Sabre jet mission. He
had downed the other four planes in the period since
16 May 1953. While leading a 4-plane contingent (F-
86s) in the skies east of Sinuiju, Bolt achieves both kills
in a time span of five minutes. By this action, he be-
comes the 37th jet ace of the Korean War and the first
Marine jet ace in the history of aviation.
In the X Corps sector, the U.S. 40th Division relieves
the 45th Division at its positions in the vicinity of
Heartbreak Ridge.
In Naval activity, at Wonsan, Communist shore gun
batteries bombard the cruiser USS St. Paul (CA 75)
and inflict damage to two guns. However, no crewmen
are injured. Also, the batteries fire their usual barrages
against the friendly held islands in Wonsan harbor and
propel a total of 150 rounds that land without effect.
In yet other activity, the British destroyer HMCS
Huron runs aground on the western side of Yang-do
Island and sustains some damage.
July 12 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Marines recently came upon an area that con-
July 13, 1953
tains a previously unknown minefield. Teams have been
working to disarm them, but they are of a new type of
Russian-made mine that have both pull and tension
fuses. On this date, the uncharted mines cause casual-
ties. Four Marines are killed after accidentally detonat-
ing mines and another eight are wounded.
In other activity, Marine patrols encounter enemy
forces. A contingent of the 5th Marines, on a recon-
naissance mission near COP Esther, engage in a short
fire fight while another patrol (platoon) of the 7th
Marines engages an enemy contingent in the vicinity of
COP Elko. Other Chinese contingents are detected by
elements of the 11th Marines. The Chinese make no
major moves against the Marines; however, in the areas
controlled by ROK forces, activity is heavy. The Chi-
nese press against the South Koreans at various spots
along the center and eastern part of Eighth Army’s line.
In Air Force activity, reconnaissance flights executed
by RF-80s acquire photographs that clearly show a
sharp increase of enemy anti-aircraft artillery on the
ground facing IX Corps and the ROK II Corps. The in-
telligence provides more affirmation of an imminent
Communist offensive. Far East Air Forces immediately
takes steps to impede the enemy’s efforts.
In Naval activity, Tae-do Island in Wonsan harbor is
hit by 7 rounds from Communist shore gun batteries,
but no damage is inflicted.
In other activity, the battleship USS New Jersey (BB
62) announces its presence to the enemy in the vicin-
ity of Kojo when its big guns launch 169 16-inch shells
into suspected enemy positions. Obvious damages
noted are the radar tower, two bridges and a control
bunker.
July 13–20 1953 BATTLE OF KUMSONG
RIVER SALIENT The Communists launch a major at-
tack with a force composed of six divisions drawn
from six separate armies. The Chinese focus prima-
rily upon the positions of the IX Corps in yet an-
other effort to increase their diminishing bargain
power at Panmunjom, while at the same time trying
to punish the ROKs. The IX Corps includes the U.S.
3rd, 40th and 45th Infantry Divisions, but it is the
ROKs who feel the brunt of the offensive. Follow-
ing a day-long artillery and mortar bombardment,
the Chinese spring the attack at dusk against ROK
units holding the central front.
The first units to come under attack are those of
the ROK 9th Division, which is struck along its right
flank by elements of the Chinese 72nd Division
(Chinese 24th Army). Simultaneously, the Chinese
203rd Division (Chinese 68th Army) bangs against
the Capital Division at the Kumsong Bulge. The de-
fenders are unable to withstand the overwhelming
thrust of the attacks. The South Koreans abandon
their outposts. Heavy fighting continues for some
time, but by about midnight (13th-14th), part of
the main line of defense collapses and in the area
known as Sniper Ridge, the ROKs withdraw to pre-
vent encirclement.
July 13, 1953
In the meantime, the ROK 6th Division had also
come under a tenacious assault along its positions,
which border those of the Capital Division. Elements
of the Chinese 204th Regiment (Chinese 68th
Army) swarm against the lines of the ROK 19th Reg-
iment and overrun an outpost. Like the other areas,
the fighting remains heated throughout the night,
but by dawn, part of the 19th Regiment is sur-
rounded.
The main line of resistance, by this time, has been
deeply penetrated. After cutting through the col-
lapsed part of the line, these Chinese bolt toward the
units that are attacking the Capital Division to the
west. While the 9th, Capital and 6th Divisions
struggle to hold the lines, to the east, the ROK 8th,
3rd, 5th and 7th Divisions are also under pressure to
draw attention from the primary attack. During the
initial part of the assault on the 13th, Chinese forces
press against an outpost of the ROK 8th Division
and encircle it, while other forces pound against an
outpost in the sector of the ROK 8th Division. And
yet other units push against the ROK 5th and 7th Di-
visions. The grueling contest continues throughout
the night into the morning hours of the 14th.
Subsequent to dawn, the steadfastness of the ROK
3rd Division falters following heavy artillery and
mortar support for the Chinese. The Communists
drill through the main line defenses and attempt to
penetrate further; however, the 22nd and 23rd Reg-
iments, which have been rocked hard, are bolstered
by the 18th Regiment. The 18th Regiment holds at
its blocking positions.
Nevertheless, the enemy maneuvers around the
positions of the ROK 5th Division and pours into
positions to the rear of the 23rd Regiment and jeop-
ardizes the entire line. Faced with the imminent pos-
sibility of a double envelopment, the ROK 3rd Di-
vision withdraws. Although the Chinese are able to
maintain cohesion, the confusion of the night fight-
ing has caused many of the ROK units to become
separated and some become encircled and isolated.
The situation for the ROKs becomes more grave
when it becomes known that communications be-
tween units have been severed, leaving only runners
to transport messages.
Back at Corps headquarters, the situation at the
front remains unclear, as the ROKs are not anxious
to relay word of bad tidings. Nonetheless, it becomes
obvious that the Chinese progress threatens more
than the ROK Capital and 3rd Divisions.
With both shoulders of the Kumsong imperiled,
other ROK Divisions are in danger. General
Maxwell Taylor orders a general withdrawal of the
ROK Capital, 6th, 8th, 3rd and 5th Divisions to a
point south the Kumsong River line at its foundation.
The move is initiated to constrict the Eighth Army
lines and decrease the amount of ground to be de-
fended. However, the confusion among the ROKs
remains high and many of the retreating troops pass
right through the new defense line and hurriedly
956
continue to retreat, again jeopardizing Eighth Army
lines.
While the danger continues to build on the 14th,
Generals Mark Clark and Maxwell Taylor take quick
action to bar the door. The 187th Airborne RCT is
sped from Japan and attached to the 2nd Division.
The 2nd Division relieves the U.S. 3rd Division on
the line. The ROK 9th Division is relieved by the
187th Airborne RCT. Afterward, the ROKs pull
their lines in tightly to be in position to bolster the
Capital Division, which continues to retire. In ad-
dition, the U.S. 3rd Division, after being relieved,
sprints to blocking positions from which it can bring
a stop to the Communist advance.
By the 15th, the 3rd Division assumes responsi-
bility for the zone of the Capital Division, which is
brought under the operational control of the 3rd Di-
vision. In the meantime, on the 15th, other steps are
taken by Eighth Army Commander General Taylor
to ensure the Communists are halted from doing
more damage. Taylor places the 11th ROK Division
under the ROK II Corps and its commander, Lt.
General Chung Il Kwon, orders it to relieve the ROK
3rd Division. Along with the 3rd, the ROK 6th Di-
vision is ordered to move to the rear and reorganize.
By the following day (16th), the ROK II Corps
initiates a counterattack to regain the lost ground
and restore the line. The Chinese had made substan-
tial gains during the offensive, but in the process,
the ROKs, supported by Eighth Army artillery, had
inflicted heavy casualties. The Chinese, too far from
their major medical facilities, are struggling with the
task of aiding the casualties, while simultaneously
working to hold the ground.
The three-division counterattack by the ROK
11th, 8th and 5th Divisions plunge ahead and ad-
vance abreast of each other. The main thrust is bol-
stered by the ROK 6th, 3rd and 7th Divisions, all of
which hold blocking positions in reserve. The push
continues for several days and by the 19th, the high
ground south of the Kumsong River is gained. On
the 19th, the ROK 6th Division leap-frogs over the
ROK 5th Division to lead the attack and seize
ground on the opposite bank of the river, but by this
time, the Chinese have regained their footing and
maintain intense resistance that bars passage to the
north bank of the river.
On the 20th, the attack is aborted, leaving the
ROKs holding the river line. Some minor Commu-
nist attacks are mounted during the final week of
the conflict, but none score any success. Neverthe-
less, at the battle’s end, the Communists had eradi-
cated the Kumsong salient and claimed victory, but
the cost for the propaganda to claim the win was ex-
tremely high. Eighth Army estimates for Communists
losses exceed 28,000 casualties. Ironically, all the
ground gained during this struggle at the Kumsong
salient will be within the Demilitarized Zone and
pursuant to the signing of the armistice on 27 July,
the Chinese will be compelled to give it up.
 957
July 13 In the IX Corps sector, the Chinese launch
a massive attack against the South Korean zone. Three
enemy divisions plow against and crash through at
points along the Capital Division’s perimeter at the cen-
ter and right; however, on the far left, the defenders
maintain some discipline. At about the same time, the
Chinese also strike the ROK II Corps’ lines by pound-
ing against the ROK 6th Division, deployed on the II
Corps left. The thrust of the Communist attack against
the Capital Division causes a partial collapse.
While the left holds and withdraws with cohesion, the
other parts of the line fold, which increases the threat
against the ROK 6th Division. The Chinese maneuver to
encircle the 6th Division, but without success. The South
Koreans make a disciplined withdrawal before the Chinese
control the rear. All the while, the 8th and 3rd ROK Di-
visions also come under severe attacks, but at both areas,
the troops are able to pull back without total collapse.
General Taylor takes steps to bring about a stiff line to
prevent further penetration and avoid envelopment.
In Air Force activity, the enemy contingents that are
hammering the ROK II Corps come under heavy attack
by planes of Far East Air Forces that execute close-air
support sorties to help the ROKs hold the line. The air
strikes continue into 20 July in support of the BATTLE
OF THE KUMSONG RIVER SALIENT. During the period
12–19 July, B-29 medium bombers initiate almost one
hundred missions to support the ground troops. The
planes bomb the enemy positions and approach routes
with 4,000-pound air-burst bombs and they drop de-
layed action anti-personnel bombs to try to halt or at
least slow the offensive. (See also, July 13–20 1953
BATTLE OF KUMSONG RIVER SALIENT.)
July 14 Spring rains continue to cause havoc for
Eighth Army. Torrential rains strike this day and con-
tinue into the following day, causing massive flooding.
The water rises to 26 feet at the Libby bridge. Roads in
most sectors are impassable for about three days.
July 15 The Communists launch a series of fruit-
less assaults against the front lines of Eighth Army and
sustain an astonishingly high number of casualties, es-
timated at 27,973.
In Air Force activity, Major (later colonel) Vermont
Garrison engages and destroys a MiG-15 for his 10th
kill, which makes him a double ace. (See also, June 5,
1953, In Air Force activity.)
Also, Major James Jabara, attached to the 334th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron, engages and destroys a
MiG-15, his fifteenth aerial victory, to become the
world’s second triple jet ace.
In Naval activity, an enemy motorized sampan trav-
eling near Songjin is unexpectedly encountered by the
British destroyer HMAS Tobruk. Shortly thereafter, the
sampan terminates its service when it is sunk.
July 16–20 1953 In Air Force activity,
fighter-bombers launch repeated air attacks against
the bridges at Ch’ongch’on, inflicting severe dam-
age that makes them impassable.
July 16, 1953
In Naval activity, Fast Carrier Task Force (TF-77),
during the final phase of the conflict, has four car-
riers on hand to contain enemy enthusiasm as they
continue to seek territorial advantage prior to an
armistice. It is the third time since the outbreak of
the war that four carriers have been on station.
July 16 In the I Corps sector, 3rd Division zone, an
enemy force attacks a contingent of Company D, 15th
Regiment, at its positions near Choo Gung-dong. Cor-
poral Charles F. Pendleton is able to take quick action
to engage the enemy, but the force is much superior
and the defenses are not too strong. Pendleton fires into
the advancing troops and eliminates about 15 of them.
The remainder retire in flight from Pendleton’s grenade
toss. Aware of the danger to the flanks of the diminu-
tive position, Pendleton bolts from the trench, places the
machine gun on his knee to stabilize it and fires at the
next incoming wave, but not until he eliminates an
enemy soldier that gets too close. The enemy line is
riddled. Soon after, a grenade is tossed at Pendleton, but
he grasps it and throws it back. Meanwhile, the other
defenders return fire to whack the intruders, but their
numbers seem to increase, despite casualties.
In the meantime, Pendleton becomes wounded by an-
other grenade, but he refuses evacuation. The enemy
continues to press, but Pendleton gives no ground. And
then, another grenade strikes and destroys his machine
gun. He switches to a carbine and maintains his defense
of his position. However, in a short while, an enemy
mortar shell strikes and Pendleton sustains a mortal
wound. Corporal Pendleton is awarded the Medal of
Honor posthumously for his unceasing courage and
tenacity in the face of overwhelming enemy fire.
In the 1st Marine Division zone, similarly to 12 July,
Marine patrols encounter Chinese forces near outposts.
Chinese propagandists on this day broadcast warnings
to the Marines, instructing them not to move from
their positions. The warning: “Not to go on patrols or
be killed.” Just prior to 2300, a 13-man patrol (5th
Marines) encounters and engages a force near Hedy, in
a brisk exchange that lasts for less than ten minutes.
The Marines sustain no casualties. The Chinese sus-
tain one killed and two wounded.
At midnight (16th-17th), another 5th Marines con-
tingent from the 2nd Battalion gets snagged in an am-
bush near enemy-held Hill 90. About 30 to 40 Chinese,
deployed in concealed positions with a V formation,
catch the 15-man patrol and blast away. The patrol
immediately returns fire and calls for reinforcements
and artillery support. The two sides clash for about two
hours before the Chinese disengage. The Chinese, dur-
ing the ambush, press repeatedly in an attempt to cap-
ture Marines. Seven Marines are unaccounted for when
the battle terminates.
During the night of the 17th, a patrol moves out
and covers the area of the ambush. The patrol discov-
ers six of the seven missing men and retrieves their bod-
ies. The Chinese sustain 10 killed (counted) and an ad-
ditional estimated nine killed and three wounded.
July 17, 1953
In Naval activity, the friendly held islands in Won-
san harbor receive their usual bombardment from the
shore gun batteries. Not unexpectedly, no damage is
sustained.
July 17–20 1953 General Maxwell Taylor
orders a counterattack by the ROK II Corps to estab-
lish a new MLR south of the Kumsong River. The
attack is commenced by three divisions to gain dom-
inant positions in the heights above the Kumsong
River and to establish a new line (MLR). The offen-
sive encounters resistance for the next three days, but
the ground is seized.
— In the United States: The 3rd Marine Divi-
sion receives word that it is to prepare to ship out to
reinforce the UN command in the Far East.
July 17 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, a patrol from the 7th Marines, one of several Ma-
rine contingents dispatched on the night of the 16th, is
struck by ambush at 0045, shortly after departing the
Ava Gate, located about 250 yards northwest of the
main part of the outpost. The 30-man patrol from
Company A suddenly comes under attack from three
sides when they arrive at the ambush site, but the
Marines immediately return fire. The explosive ex-
change between the patrol and about 40–50 Chinese
continues for about fifteen minutes. By 0050, friendly
artillery is propelled into the enemy positions and sur-
rounding area. During the fight, while they defend
their positions, the Marines lose radio contact, and no
reinforcements move from the main body of Company
A; however, the Chinese disengage at about 0100.
The patrol returns to base, but upon arriving, it dis-
covers that four men from the patrol are not among
them. A contingent then moves out to try to locate the
missing troops. Three of the missing are located and
their bodies are retrieved. Meanwhile, the search for
the remaining Marine continues into the daylight
hours, assisted by smoke to help protect the searchers,
but at 0545, the search is discontinued. The Marines
sustain 3 killed, 1 missing and 19 wounded and evac-
uated. Another two Marines suffer minor wounds.
In Naval activity, at Wonson harbor, the friendly
held islands in the harbor come under bombardment,
but no damage is inflicted. There is no report of war-
ships returning any fire.
In other activity, the enemy batteries launch a bar-
rage against Cho-do Island with similar results. The
warships operating in the area do not return any fire.
July 18 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the Chinese shift their focus from U.S. Marine
positions and probe the 1st Korean Marine Corps Reg-
iment lines (KMC/RCT). The Korean Marines engage
in four separate fire fights, all of brief duration.
In the 7th Marines zone, a night-patrol that moved out
on the 17th advances to positions in close proximity
to the Chinese trenches at Ungok without being de-
tected. At 0112, the 36-man contingent (Company C)
opens the attack, first by firing a white phosphorous
958
grenade straight into a Chinese machine gun position
that had been menacing Marine lines to ignite a heated
20-minute fire fight with about 15 Chinese defenders.
After striking the machine gun position and taking on
the defenders, the Marines move back to the base; how-
ever, in an apparent response to the recent broadcasts
by the Chinese telling the Marines to remain at their
posts or be killed, the Marines leave a message for the
Chinese. Before pulling back, the Marines deposit a
Marine Corps recruiting poster.
July 19–20 1953 THE SECOND BATTLE FOR
THE BERLIN–EAST BERLIN OUTPOSTS The Marines,
since their return to the line on 6 July, have worked
on building the defenses along the MLR and at the
outposts; however, much of the strategic ground in
place when the Marines were taken from the line
during early May had been surrendered in their ab-
sence. Key posts, the Nevada Cities Outposts, re-
main under Chinese control. The Chinese recently
attempted to take ground from the Marines, but the
outposts Berlin and East Berlin, following a pro-
longed fight, remain in Marine hands. At Berlin, a
detachment of fewer than fifty men holds the posi-
tion.
On this day, at 2200, the Chinese unleash a strong
attack. A reinforced battalion acts as the component
of the first waves. Enemy artillery and mortars soar
in the air and pound into both outposts. Marine sup-
port units reciprocate and unleash a whirlwind of
fire, with some rounds zooming toward the enemy
columns. Simultaneously, friendly fire blankets the
posts with “Box-Me-In” fire. The enemy bombard-
ment also takes the 3rd Battalion MLR under heavy
fire.
Although Berlin and East Berlin appear to be the
primary objective, the Chinese also strike against 5th
Marine positions at Outposts Ingrid and Dagmar.
Both of these outposts also come under heavy ar-
tillery, mortar and small arms fire. But, Outpost
Dagmar is struck only by troops. The 5th Marines’
contingent at Dagmar repels the assault.
Meanwhile, back at Berlin and East Berlin, by
2230, swarms of enemy ground forces ascend the
slopes of the respective outposts against ferocious
fire. While the defenders maintain stiff opposition,
more Chinese descend from Detroit, Jersey and Hill
139 to the north and converge upon the outposts;
however, with only a combined total of 74 Marines
and no space for more, the situation becomes more
grave for the elements of Company I, who stand
alone.
Tanks of Company C bolster the artillery and
mortar fire, but still, more Chinese advance. The
slopes are permeated with Communists. At Berlin,
by 2000, the enemy reaches the halfway point to the
crest. Turkish artillery units stream fire into the
enemy, too, but the massive shelling is unable to
thwart the advance. All the while, the defenders con-
tinue to pour fire upon the attackers. By midnight
 959
(19th-20th), while the Chinese inch closer, the sit-
uation at both outposts moves beyond critical. Soon
after, following non-stop fighting at Berlin and East
Berlin, the defenders are no longer able to halt the
onslaught. At 0146, both outposts are declared lost
and under Communist control.
Once again, the Chinese are able to overwhelm
slimly garrisoned Marine outposts; however, work
begins immediately to take the lost ground back.
The artillery and mortar fire, supplemented by the
tanks, intensify the fire and hammer the enemy-held
positions while the Marines organize a counterat-
tack. Elements of the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines
(reserve), are placed on 30-minute standby. Mean-
while, Companies D, E and F are under operational
control of the 3rd Battalion.
Lieutenant Colonel Paul M. Jones, at 0400, issues
an order (Battalion Operation Order 2-53) for an
attack to commence at 0730 to retake the outposts.
The troops prepare to launch the counterattack, but
at 0700, the Marines are ordered by I Corps to abort
the attack.
Meanwhile, the Chinese continue to push for
more terrain to devalue the bargaining power of the
U.N. at the peace talks in Panmunjom. I Corps con-
cludes that the two posts, Berlin and East Berlin,
even if retaken by the Marines, cannot hold if the
Chinese mount strong attacks to retake them. It is de-
cided this same day to totally devastate both positions
with artillery and air power.
The loss of Berlin and East Berlin provides the
Chinese with another stepping stone, but a major
concern is Hill 119 (Boulder City) to the rear of the
Berlin outposts and under the responsibility of the
1st Marine Division. While the artillery and air
power spends the day reducing the two hills that
contain Berlin and East Berlin, the ground Marines
work to bolster Hill 119.
While the artillery and tanks maintain a day-long
barrage against Berlin, East Berlin and positions at
Vegas, the skies are crowded with air observers who
coordinate the attacks. The observation planes re-
main airborne from 0830 until after dusk. The
MAG-12 Marine Squadrons (VMA-121 and VMA-
212) streak overhead to deliver their first of nine
close-air support strikes at 1145. Nearly 20,000
pounds of bombs are dropped on East Berlin during
the initial attack; however, throughout the day, until
1930, Berlin, East Berlin and other enemy-held po-
sitions remain under air attack. The 35 participating
aircraft drop more than 145,000 pounds of bombs,
while the pilots also expend 6,500 rounds of 20-mm
ammunition. As the Chinese seek cover from the
planes, they are still under attack by the artillery and
armor, which maintain a non-stop bombardment.
By dusk, the enemy positions are struck by 3,600
rounds from six battalions under the 11th Marines.
More firepower is added by the armor that pummels
the enemy with 200 rounds of HE and WP shells,
along with 6,170 rounds of machine gun fire. And
July 19, 1953
not to be left out, the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery
sends repeated volleys against the outposts. The once
formidable positions at Berlin and East Berlin are
reduced to debris, a combination of decimated
bunkers and collapsed trenches.
For the outposts that are no longer considered ten-
able positions, the Marines sustain 6 killed and 56
missing. Another 86 sustain serious wounds and are
evacuated, while 32 others are less seriously
wounded. The Chinese casualties, estimated by the
3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, are 75 killed and 300
wounded.
The total strength at Berlin and East Berlin
amounted to 81 Marines. Following the battle, it
had been determined that the Marine defenders and
the supporting units had mauled the enemy so badly
that it had become ineffective and that for the Chi-
nese to hold the positions, they would have to bring
in another battalion.
The I Corps commander, Lieutenant Bruce C.
Clarke, remarks in a letter to the commandant of
the Marine Corps, regarding his opinion on Berlin
and East Berlin: “The outposts in front of the MLR
(main line of resistance) had gradually lost their value
in my opinion because, between the MLR and the
outposts, minefields, tactical wire, etc. had made
their reinforcement and counterattacks very costly
... holding poor real estate for sentimental reasons is
a poor excuse for undue casualties.”
July 19 The representatives of the U.N. and the
Communists agree on the terms for an armistice. By
the following day, Eighth Army begins to plan on the
boundary lines of what will become the Demilitarized
Zone. Although an agreement is reached, fighting con-
tinues.
In Naval activity, a patrol plane attached to CTU
96.2 encounters several aircraft near the Shantung
peninsula in East China. One aircraft approaches the
patrol plane from Mo Yeh Tae, while two others en-
croach from the sea. Although the planes shadow the
patrol plane, no attack is initiated and after a short
time, the closing aircraft all turn and head in a westward
direction, permitting the patrol to continue unim-
peded.
In the IX Corps sector, 40th Division zone, a patrol
composed of elements of Company F, 223rd Regiment,
moves out near Tutayon in search of enemy forces. The
patrol encounters difficulty in the darkness when the pa-
trol leader and the assistant leader both accidentally slip
and fall from a steep cliff of about 60 feet. The leader
orders the men to return to safe lines, but Sergeant
Gilbert G. Collier (assistant leader), also injured in the
fall, decides to remain with the leader. Both men sub-
sequently attempt to make it back, but the leader’s
ankle injury and Collier’s back injury impede the return
trek.
During the daylight hours of the following day, both
men conceal themselves and await darkness before re-
suming the trip back to their lines. En route they get
July 20, 1953
ambushed. Collier takes on the attackers, kills two, and
gets wounded again in the process, then gets separated
from the patrol leader. Soon after, Collier begins to lo-
cate the other soldier and again is attacked by more of
the enemy. Collier eliminates or wounds some before
he expends his ammunition, then reverts to hand-to-
hand combat and takes care of the others, those who
don’t run. However, he becomes mortally wounded.
Sergeant Collier is awarded the Medal of Honor
posthumously for his extraordinary bravery and cour-
age in the face of the enemy and for his selfless sacri-
fice to save the life of another.
In Air Force activity, Captain Clyde A. Curtin, at-
tached to the 335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, en-
gages and downs two MiG-15s on this day, to become
an ace.
July 20 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, the 1st Marines initiate relief of the 7th Marines,
the latter due off the line on 26 July. The 2nd Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, commanded by Lt. Colonel Frank A.
Long, comes under operational control of the 7th
Marines. Company F is immediately directed to bolster
Hill 119 (Boulder City) due to I Corps’ order not to at-
tack to retake Berlin and East Berlin, lost to the Chi-
nese on the night of 19th-20th.
As the relief of the 7th Marines begins, the activity
against the two surrendered hills is extensive. While ar-
Supplies arrive at Boulder City.
960
tillery and air strikes hammer the enemy positions, the
Chinese continue to bombard the Marines’ positions.
The Chinese artillery, between 1800 on the 19th and
1800 on the 20th, propel 4,900 artillery and mortar
rounds into the sector of the 3rd Battalion, 7th
Marines.
Also, as other elements of the 1st Marines initiate
relief, contingents of the 3rd Battalion, led by Lt. Col-
onel Roy D. Miller, join with the 2nd Battalion to bol-
ster Hill 119 (Boulder City) and Hill 111. (See also,
July 19–20 1953 THE SECOND BATTLE FOR THE
BERLIN–EAST BERLIN OUTPOSTS.)
In Air Force activity, Major Stephen L. Bettinger, at-
tached to the 336th Fighter Interceptor Squadron, van-
quishes a MiG-15, his fifth kill of the war, which makes
him an ace.
In Naval activity, Communist shore batteries in the
Wonsan area send yet another series of barrages against
the friendly islands in Wonsan harbor, without effect.
July 21 Fifth Air Force directs planes from MAG-
33 (VMF-115 and VMF-311) to discontinue flights
for FAF in the IX, ROK II and X Corps. The planes are
to shift their power to the 1st Marine Division zone, due
to the threat of an attack there.
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, the
front remains relatively quiet since the clash of the 19th-
20th, in which the Chinese had gained Berlin–East
 961
Berlin. The Marines continue to work to bolster the
lines at Hill 119 (Boulder City) and Hill 111. It is be-
lieved that the Chinese plan a strike to gain the strong-
points to cut off access to parts of the Imjin River, once
the armistice is signed.
In other activity, at Outposts Hedy and Dagmar,
defended by the 5th Marines, preparations are made in
anticipation of a full-scale attack by the Chinese, but
it does not occur. However, at Hedy, the defenders de-
tect a small group of Chinese, each wearing burlap bags,
as they encroach the perimeter. Marine riflemen greet
the intruders and three of the Chinese drop suddenly.
The remainder of the party hurriedly departs.
In Naval activity, the Communists, using junks,
launch an attack against the friendly forces on Ohwa Is-
land. The force of about 150 enemy troops initially
score success by killing 7 officers and wounding about
20 of the troops, but the progress sours after about 4
hours, when a New Zealander warship, the HMNZS
Hawae, arrives to evacuate the surviving friendly
troops. The enemy presents a grand array of targets and
the Hawae takes advantage by pummeling the enemy
in what is described as a “turkey shoot.”
July 21 In Air Force activity, Far East Air Forces
Bomber Command launches its last strike of the Korean
War. The mission is carried out by eighteen B-29 Su-
perfortresses that bomb the airfield at Uiju this day and
the next.
July 22 In Air Force activity, a 3-plane contingent
of Sabre jets attached to the 51st Fighter Interceptor
Wing engage a band of MiG-15s. The Sabres sustain no
The battle-torn terrain to the front of Outpost Boulder City as seen from a helicopter.
July 24, 1953
losses, but the Communists lose one of the four en-
gaged MiGs. It is shot down by Lieutenant Sam P.
Young. He receives credit for the last MiG to be shot
down during the Korean War. However, on the 27th,
the final day of the war, another type of enemy plane
is shot down.
July 23 In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division
zone, while the relief of the 7th Marines by the 1st
Marines continues, the defenders are deployed in a
three-battalion sector rather than the usual two-
battalion sector. The front line sectors are lef, center
and right by the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 2nd Bat-
talion, 1st Marines, and 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines.
In Naval activity, the USS St. Paul (CA 73) comes
under fire while on duty in the vicinity of the Wonsan
perimeter. No damage or harm occurs.
July 24 BATTLE OF BOULDER CITY OUTPOST In the
I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, Company G,
3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, led by 1st Lieutenant Oral
R. Swigaet, Jr., moves into position and relieves Com-
pany G, 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, at Hill 119 (Boul-
der City). Precautions continue to be taken due to an ex-
pected assault against Boulder City. At about 1940,
soon after enemy troops are detected to the rear of Hill
139, the formation is brought under fire. The forward
observers pin the columns, about regiment-strength, at
a point about 700 yards northwest of Berlin. Less than
one hour later, the enemy artillery erupts, followed by
an enemy surge in the right sector of the line.
Hill 111, to the right of Boulder City at the extreme
right of the sector, is the first position to be stung by the
July 24, 1953
two-battalion assault. At this time, the 1st Marines are
still in the process of relieving the 7th Marines’ units
there. The enemy pounds against Hill 111, just as
Companies H and I, 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines, are ex-
changing places with Companies H and I, 7th Marines.
The enemy, using the blackness of the night and the
poor weather, penetrates at Hill 111. The nasty weather
prohibits air strikes and the lack of air observers also
impedes the artillery. Nonetheless, the defenders at Hill
111 hold, in what turns out to be only a diversion, while
the primary objective remains Hill 119. The Chinese
disengage slightly before 2130.
Meanwhile, at Boulder City, the defenders have been
in a non-stop battle to hold the positions against ever-
increasing numbers of Chinese. Following the initial
waves that crash into the positions, other reinforce-
ments continue to flow from East Berlin and the Jersey
Ridge, where most of the columns converge upon the
Berlin Gate, the most direct path to Hill 119. The tar-
geted hill is held by Company G, 1st Marines. The su-
perior number of enemy troops is unable to collapse
the defense, but the Marines’ numbers continue to di-
minish, as the clash remains close-quartered and vi-
cious. The Marines maintain their firing at a rapid pace,
but more enemy troops continue to advance.
The beleaguered company is struck by a second pow-
erful assault at 2100. Still, the men of Company G hold
the line, despite the fact that their casualties continue
to dangerously climb. Friendly artillery opens the spigot
and streaks round after round into the charging enemy
U.S. ground troops are airlifted by helicopter to the front.
962
to stem the tide, but the attackers remain oblivious to
the cloudburst that rains steel upon them. To add even
more muscle, the 1st 4.5 Rocket Battery delivers suc-
cessive blows into the enemy positions.
By about 2200, the entire length of the trenchline
(700 yards) becomes a close-quartered shoot out inter-
twined with hand-to-hand combat. Bayonets, rifle
butts and fists rattle the ditches. The Chinese are un-
able to claim the trenches, but as the conflagration in-
tensifies, Marine casualties soar. Two corpsmen are
killed prior to midnight and of the other six with the
unit, nearly all are wounded, making it difficult to aid
the fallen Marines or evacuate the more seriously
wounded.
By midnight (24th-25th) the overwhelming pres-
sure by the Chinese against the perimeter finally forces
the line, held by beleaguered Company G, to falter.
The left and right flanks are driven back to the reverse
slope, yet the Marines refuse to relent. Horrific com-
bat continues by those Marines still standing. The Chi-
nese pour more force against the staggered company
and still the Communists are unable to roll them over,
despite having inflicted a casualty rate of seventy-five
percent. At about fifteen minutes after midnight, the
able-bodied defenders resist as if they have the Chinese
outnumbered, and though their ranks have been cut
drastically, there is no despair. Word arrives that Com-
pany I is en route and about to bolster the line, which
brings a thunderous cheer that reverberates through the
trenchline.
 963
While Company I speeds to extricate Company G
and galvanize the line to extinguish the enemy fire, the
unit is struck on the reverse slope of Boulder City by
enemy mortar and artillery fire. The Chinese had
picked up a coded message in time to swivel some of its
gun barrels and pinpoint the Marines’ positions, in-
flicting 35 casualties. Nevertheless, Company I presses
forward and joins with the surviving defenders to help
cut the odds.
In the meantime, the Communists are able to pen-
etrate the ever-thinning frontal position and for a while,
they actually gain the crest; however, the Marines, who
only recently lost a hill and on the following day, were
ordered not to take it back, seem determined to take it
right away rather than risk having the Chinese retain it
by default.
At 0130, Captain Louis J. Sarror leads Companies
G and I in a relentless charge that barges directly into
the Chinese and slams them back to begin to re-
stabilize the conditions at Hill 119. The Marines strike
menacing blows and give no quarter as they plow
through the enemy in a dogged two-hour bloodbath.
At 0330, the MLR is totally restored to order with the
Marines back in control. Sarror’s Marines ensure that
at dawn, they will not have to launch another counter-
attack to re-secure the ground. By 0550, Boulder City
belongs to the Marines. The victors become ecstatic
upon the appearance of four additional platoons,
drawn from Company E, 1st Marines, and Company
E, 7th Marines.
During the struggle, an outpost guarded by elements
of Company F, 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, comes
under a strong attack by about two battalions. The
company gets pinned down. While the men try to ex-
tricate themselves, Sergeant Ambrosio Guillen attempts
to maintain discipline and direct the defense. Guillen
is able to rally the troops and they meet the enemy
head-on in hand-to-hand combat.
Again Guillen takes responsibility and his Marines
pound the Chinese sufficiently to beat them back and
cause them to abort the attack. Sergeant Guillen had be-
come seriously wounded during the fight and refused
medical attention in order to ensure his men would be
the victors. Sergeant Guillen’s platoon prevails, but he
dies of his wounds. Sergeant Guillen is awarded the
Medal of Honor posthumously for his extraordinary
leadership, courage and heroism in the face of an over-
whelming enemy force.
Meanwhile, Boulder City and Hill 111 had not been
the only recipients of the Chinese attacks. The 5th
Marines’ positions at Esther and Dagmar come under
attack at 2115. However, the Chinese, soon after strik-
ing both outposts, only give Dagmar a light blow be-
fore focusing on Esther. The enemy, like in the 1st
Marines’ zone, is supported by mortars and artillery.
Heavy fighting continues until after midnight and be-
yond in a tight-fisted, close-quartered raging battle.
Company H, the defending unit, is pushed hard by
the superior numbered force, estimated at the size of a
reinforced battalion. The enemy thrust eventually gains
July 24, 1953
ground in the forward trenches. Nevertheless, the
Marines return fire relentlessly and although imper-
iled, they surrender no ground in either of the rear
trenches. The Chinese maneuver to isolate the Marines
at Esther, but to no avail. Long-distance help is accel-
erated to forestall disaster. The artillery and mortar fire
is rapidly increased and several tanks commit their 90-
mm rifles against the Communists. In addition, the
Chinese still face the Marine riflemen, machine gunners
and some testy flamethrowers. By 0640, the Chinese
disengage, having failed to seize Esther. The Marines
sustain 12 killed and 98 wounded (35 evacuated). The
Chinese sustain 85 killed (counted) and an additional
110 estimated killed, along with an estimated 250
wounded.
During the previous night into the morning of the
25th, the Chinese commit 3,000 troops against the
outposts. In addition to the Marines on the ground,
the several thousand enemy troops are showered with
just under 24,000 rounds by the 11th Marines in the
same period, between 2200 and 0400. The 11th
Marines and ten battalions under its operational con-
trol include units of the 25th Division, I Corps and
the British 1st Commonwealth Division. The attack-
ers at Esther were the recipients of 7,057 rounds in sup-
port of the 5th Marines and 16,668 rounds to bolster
the 1st Marines at Boulder City.
The Chinese, however, again make an offensive
move in yet another chance to dislodge the Marines
and increase their bargaining positions at the peace
talks. At 0820, Boulder City (Hill 119) is again struck.
The Marines meet the new threat with devastating fire
and inflict severe casualties upon the enemy. Still, the
Chinese probe and for the balance of the morning into
the early afternoon, the opposing sides exchange blows,
but at 1335, the last of the Chinese on Boulder City are
evicted from the forward slope.
In the meantime, the 1st Marines continue with re-
lief of the 7th Marines. At 1100, Boulder City comes
under control of the 1st Marines. At Hill 111, mop-up
operations continue as elements of Company H, 1st
Marines, and of Company H, 7th Marines, root out
remaining enemy troops still in and around the trench-
works. Later, at 1815, the 1st Marines complete relief
of Company H, 7th Marines, along the MLR.
As the day winds down, the temporary period of tran-
quility is again shattered at Hill 119, when the Chinese
mount yet another assault at 2130 to reduce the Marine
resistance. The 1st Marines and the 7th Marines are each
struck by a contingent estimated at two-company
strength. They receive instant support fire from the 11th
Marines. The artillerymen are joined by the tankers. The
combined strength of the ground troops and the sup-
port units force the Chinese to abort the assault.
And still, they refuse to quit. Later, at 0130, Boul-
der City and Hill 111 are again besieged. During this
latest attack, the Communists are able to advance in
some places to the trenches, but again, only to be driven
back out by the persistence of the defenders. By dawn
on the 26th, Boulder City complex, including Hill 111,
July 24, 1953 964

remains under Marine control. The Marines sustain 19
killed and 125 wounded. The Chinese sustain 30 killed
(counted) and an additional estimated 84 killed, along
with an estimated 310 wounded.
Subsequently, even more enemy contingents attempt
to test the lines, but they are each met with riveting fire
by Marine riflemen and machine gunners. The effective
impenetrable fire halts the Chinese in their tracks.
Meanwhile, the Communists realize the armistice is
imminent and decide to mount yet another attack in a
desperate effort to gain the Boulder City complex to
impede U.N. access to the Imjin River. Picking a usual
time, at 2130, the Chinese initiate the charge. By this
time, the 1st Marines retain responsibility for the area,
having completed the transfer at 1330. Marines on the
line are led by Captain Esmond E. Harper, command-
ing officer, Company E, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines.
Harper had assumed command after Major Thurston
had been seriously wounded.
The Chinese attack is shattered. Still, they refuse to
quit. At a few minutes after midnight (25th-26th), an-
other platoon rushes the defenses and receives the same
fate as the former, in what becomes the final assault to take
Boulder City. The platoon is handily repulsed. Later, Hill
111 comes under assault when yet another Communist
force of about platoon strength barges against its defenses
at 0045. The Chinese engage the Marines until about
0205 and after failing to make any gains and receiving a
battering blow, the attack is aborted.
This last attack against Hill 111, on 26 July, is the
final action of the Marines in Korea. The Chinese make
no further attempt to test the mettle of the Marines. The
armistice is signed on the following day at Panmunjom.
July 24 TF-77, launches 536 sorties against the
enemy, which becomes a record setting day; however,
the record is broken on the following day, when 538
offensive and 62 defensive sorties are flown, the high-
est number on a single day during the war.
July 25 In the United States: President Eisen-
hower announces that the 3rd Marine Division (and
the 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing), commanded by Major
General Robert H. Pepper, is to be sent to the Far East
to bolster the forces under General Mark Clark’s Far
East Command.
July 26 The friendly-held island of Hwangto-do
comes under fire from the mainland by machine gun-
ners and anti-tank weapons. No damage occurs. Also,
the USS Swift (AM 122) fires upon enemy sampans in
Hungnam harbor. During the incident, the enemy
shore guns commence firing upon the Swift. No dam-
age is inflicted upon the Swift; however, the enemy
guns receive return fire and the hostile fire is elimi-
nated.
July 27 ARMISTICE At 1000, in Panmunjom, the
Communists and the U.N. representatives sign the
armistice to bring an end to the Korean War, often re-
ferred to as the Korean Police Action.
Lieutenant General William K. Harrison, Jr., signs
on behalf of the U.N. Chinese General Nam II signs on
behalf of the Communists. Subsequently, General Mark
Clark (for the UN), General Kim II (for the North Ko-
reans) and General Peng Teh-Huai (for the Chinese) also
sign the papers. The truce becomes effective at 2200.
No treaty is ever signed; however, the truce remains
in effect. Since the conflict erupted with a Communist
invasion of South Korea on 25 June, 1950, the war is
finally terminated after three years, two months and
two days, but not until 2200. In the meantime, both
sides clash throughout the day.

At 1000 on 27 July 1953, the armistice that brings the hostilities in Korea to an end is signed. Lt. Gen-
eral William K. Harrison, Jr., signs on behalf of the United Nations. General Nam II signs the document
on behalf of the Communists.
 965
In the I Corps sector, 1st Marine Division zone, a
message goes around that instructs the Marines, all
26,000, that there shall be “no celebrating fire related
in any way to the advent of the armistice.” In addition,
no defensive fire is to be commenced after 2145,
unless an infantry attack is launched against the posi-
tions.
Nonetheless, in Korea, it is an awfully long time be-
tween 1000 and 2200. Following the fighting at Boul-
der City, during the early morning hours, the artillery
of the 11th Marines remains active. At about dusk,
when the Chinese launch a barrage, the 11th Marines
return fire rapidly, bringing the total of rounds fired
for July to 75,910, including 102 on this day, with the
final round being fired at 2135, ten minutes prior to the
armistice becoming effective.
Also, the Marine squadrons remain active during the
final day of combat. The 1st Marine Air Wing executes
202 sorties. The final jet flight of the squadron is flown
by Captain William I. Armagost (VMF-311), who
lands a devastating blow (four 500-pounders) on a Chi-
nese supply depot at 1835. The final flight is completed
by Captain William J. Foster, Jr., who delivers two
2000-pounders against enemy positions at 2135 in
support of U.N. troops.
Not to be outdone, at sea off Wonsan, on the final
day of the seventeen month siege, U.S. and British naval
ships bombard Wonsan. The ships await 2200 and si-
multaneously turn on their lights. The armistice, which
was not assured, occurs at 2200.
For about an hour prior to the truce, Chinese troops,
who had been conspicuous along their lines, increase in
number by about 2100. Many of the enemy troops,
apparently having confidence that they wouldn’t be
picked off, light candles. Others light flashlights and
yet others wave banners while they search for their dead
and wounded. Some Chinese actually walk up to a Ma-
rine outpost and request water while they attempt to
strike up a friendly conversation.
Another group of Chinese walks up to outpost Ava
and delivers gifts, then invites the Marines to a party.
The Marines love a party as much as anyone; however,
the Chinese receive no verbal response. The Marines
peer intently at the Chinese, but they remain absolutely
silent. All the while, the wait continues as the Marines
remain skeptical.
A solitary enemy volley of five mortar rounds strikes
Korean Outpost Camel at 2152, but no fire is returned.
Eight minutes later, while the Marines stand at the
ready, scanning the ground to their front, a white clus-
ter shell bursts in the sky, and then another burst is
seen, followed by more and then more, until the entire
sky that stretches from the Yellow Sea to the Sea of
Japan, a distance of 155 miles, is filled with brilliant
illumination. The war ends.
The Marines during the conflict lose 4,262 killed
and 26,038 wounded. More than forty Marines be-
come recipients of the Medal of Honor and of those, 26
are posthumous awards. Also, since August 1950, when
the first Marine was captured, until the termination of
July 28, 1953
the war, 221 were captured. About 90 percent of the
Marine POWs are returned.
In Air Force activity, Capt. Ralph S. Parr, Jr., at-
tached to the 335th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, en-
gages and destroys an IL-12 transport plane, for his
tenth victory of the war, making him a double ace.
In other activity, in a final farewell to the enemy,
fighter bombers of Fifth Air Force attack enemy air-
fields in North Korea during the last hours before the
armistice becomes effective. Reconnaissance aerial pho-
tos of the airfields acquired by aircraft (67th TRW)
provides evidence that all Communist airfields in North
Korea are out of action with regard to being able to
handle the landings of jet planes at the conclusion of the
war.
In yet other activity, Lieutenant Denver S. Cook
launches the final FEAF Bomber Command sortie of
the Korean War. The mission is carried out in an RB-
29 of the 91st SRS. Cook’s mission is to drop leaflets
in Communist territory.
Also, the final Air Force bombing sortie of the war
is carried out by a B-26 of the 8th Bomber Squadron
during a close-air support mission (radar directed) sub-
sequent to dusk. Ironically, the same unit initiated the
first air strike against North Korea.
The last combat sortie of the war is carried out by an
RB-26 of the 67th TRW that executes a mission into
North Korea. When the armistice begins and the skies
across Korea are illuminated by flares, all planes of Far
East Air Forces are either three miles offshore or at bases
below the front lines.
In other Naval activity, the U.S. Navy continues of-
fensive action on the final day of the war, but com-
pletes its action prior to the effective time of the
armistice, which is 2200. Planes (Navy and Marine)
attached to TF-77 pound enemy airfields, but place a
higher priority on the enemy’s transportation com-
plexes. Targets destroyed include 23 rail cars, 11 rail-
road bridges, one railroad tunnel and 69 buildings.
Other targets destroyed include 9 highway bridges.
In addition, while the pilots complete their mission
on this final day of the war, they succeed in making
forty cuts in the rails and several road cuts, but the air-
fields had not been neglected. The pilots pound five
airfields.
July 28 In the 1st Marine Division zone, which
includes the prisoner release point at Panmunjom, the
Marines play a primary role in the exchange of prison-
ers; however, other responsibilities include the establish-
ment of a new line (Post Armistice Battle Positions).
In addition, they are directed to create a “No-Pass Line”
at a point about 200 yards short of the boundary of the
Demilitarized Zone. A military demarcation line
(MDL) is established between the U.N. and Commu-
nist positions, in conjunction with the opposing battle
lines at the time the conflict was terminated. The op-
posing sides each withdraw 2,000 yards to create a
4,000-yard buffer zone.
Although a truce had been signed on the previous
Top: The fighting is over. Elements of the 1st Marines withdraw from positions along the main line of
resistance on 28 July. Bottom: A badly malnourished American POW enjoys an American cigarette for
the first time in a while as he receives new clothes at Freedom Village at Panmunjom.
 967 July 28, 1953

The U.S. 7th Division prepares to abandon its positions on 31 July following the armistice.
August 1, 1953
The 40th Division at Heartbreak Ridge prepares to abandon its positions, subsequent to the armistice.
day, the Marines remain battle-ready in the event the
Chinese attempt to break the truce. Meanwhile, activ-
ity at Freedom Village is renewed as the Marines pre-
pare to receive the arriving prisoners (Operation BIG
SWITCH).
At Munsan, the former Freedom Village is too small
to handle the large amount of expected prisoners, about
400 per day for an entire month. A new receiving cen-
ter is constructed. Also, the U.N. forces initiate a sal-
vage operation. Outposts and fortifications are reduced
and equipment and ammunition is collected and trans-
ported back to various depots.
August 1 In the 1st Marine Division zone, the on-
going operation to redeploy at the new main battle po-
sition (MBT) located south of the Demilitarized Zone
is completed by 0900.
August 5–September 6 1953 Opera-
tion BIG SWITCH At 0855, five minutes prior to the
official designated time for the exchange to com-
mence, three Russian-made jeeps, each transporting
one Chinese officer and two North Korean officers,
lead a convoy from the Communists’ sector of the
peace corridor. Following closely, a convoy of trucks
and ambulances head for the Provisional Command
Receipt and Control contingent at Panmunjom. A
large column of rising dust signals the approach of
a convoy and alerts the Marine sentinels.
Between this day and 6 September, 3,597 U.S.
POWs are returned from captivity. The figure in-
cludes 157 Marines (42 officers and 115 enlisted
men), of which 28 are aviators. In addition, the fig-
ure includes 947 British, 228 Turks, smaller numbers
968
of Australians, Filipinos, Canadians and 7,848 South
Koreans.
The U.N., during this time, returns 75,799
POWs (5,640 Chinese and 70,159 North Koreans).
The Communists return a total of 12,737 POWs.
During the entire conflict, 7,140 Americans had
been captured and of these, 4,418 are returned; how-
ever, 2,701 succumb while in Communist captivity.
The major difficulty to evolve (besides the behavior
of many Communist prisoners as they are repatriated)
is caused by South Korean president Syngman Rhee,
who refuses to allow any Indian troops to land on
South Korean soil. The U.N. had designated the In-
dian troops responsibility for overseeing the Commu-
nist POWs who did not wish to be repatriated. Con-
sequently, the entire contingent (6,000 troops) aboard
ships had to be airlifted from carriers off Inchon and
transported by helicopter to the Demilitarized Zone.
Out of the total number of Americans seized as
prisoners, 192 are subsequently found guilty of either
misconduct against fellow prisoners or cooperating
with the enemy. None were Marines. One Marine is
disciplined for cooperating with the enemy, by pen-
ning an article for a pro–Communist magazine.
Twenty-one Americans (no Marines) and one British
soldier defect.
A total of 22,000 Communists refuse repatriation.
One other Englishman, a diplomat (George Blake),
who was seized in Seoul during 1950, had been won
over by the Communists, but he is not immediately
discovered. About ten years later, he is found to have
become a Russian spy. Most of the American turn-
coats later return to the U.S.
 969 August 5, 1953

A road map of the route used by convoys to transport repatriated U.N. POWs. Radio checkpoints are
scattered along the road to monitor movement and relay progress to headquarters during Operation Big
Switch, 5 August–6 September 1953.
August 5, 1953 970

Top: A Marine observes other troops working to fill a trenchline in accordance with armistice. Bottom:
Indian troops depart the USS Point Cruz en route to the buffer zone to guard the Communist POWs
that had chosen not to be repatriated. The South Korean president refused Indian troops from setting
foot on South Korean soil.
 971 September 4, 1953

A jubilant group of former American POWs, the first to arrive back in the States, prepare to debark at
San Francisco on 22 August 1953.

August 6 In the United States: The Marine
Corps extends its tours of duty for Marines in Korea
from 11 to 14 months.
August 30 Although the armistice was signed July
27 between the U.N. and the Communists, the U.S.
forces in Korea continue to receive elements of the 3rd
Marine Division. Its final contingents arrive in Japan on
this day.
September 4 On this day, concerns about Major
General William F. Dean, USA, captured during the
September 4, 1953 972

Major General William F. Dean, who was commanding officer of the 24th Division when he was cap-
tured in July 1950, boards a plane in Tokyo on 21 September for a flight back to the United States.
 973 September 6, 1953

An airman with a young fan standing near a Sabre jet at Sampson Air Base, New York.

early days of the war on August 25, 1950, vanish. Dean September 6 At Panmunjom, the last contin-
is among the POWs released this day. (See also, gent of POWs arrives. The 160 men, transported by
July 21, 1950; October 23, 1950; and October 28, the Communists from their sector of the peace corridor,
1950.) arrive at 1100.
This page intentionally left blank
 Appendix 1.
Eighth Army Order of Battle
If the commanding officer attended West
Point, the class year and cadet number of the
graduate is noted. However, it is noted only
once and some served with separate units. An
alphabetical list of the West Point graduates is
included in the appendix.
Commanders
Lt. General Walton H. Walker (West Point, 1912,
Cadet No. 5090)—July 13, 1950–December 23, 1950.
(General Walker was killed in a vehicle accident on the
23rd.) Major General Frank W. Milburn (West Point,
1914, Cadet No. 5304)—Temporary commander until
Ridgway assumed command. Lt. General Matthew B.
Ridgway (West Point, 1917, Cadet No. 5657)— De-
cember 26, 1950–April 1951. Lt. General (later gen-
eral) James Alward Van Fleet (West Point 1915, Cadet
No. 5404)— April 14, 1951–February 11, 1953. Lt.
General (later general) Maxwell D. Taylor (West Point
1922, Cadet No. 6831)— February 11, 1953.
Note: On 23 December 1950, Lieutenant General
Walton J. Walker was killed in a vehicular accident,
outside of Seoul. ded by Lieutenant General Matthew
Ridgway. In the interim, Major General Frank W. Mil-
burn, I Corps’ commanding officer assumes temporary
command of Eighth Army.
Note: On 11 April, 1951, General Douglas Mac-
Arthur was fired by President Truman. He was suc-
ceeded by General Matthew B. Ridgway. General Ridg-
way upon assuming the new post, received the other
posts held by MacArthur, Supreme Commander, Allied
Powers in Japan; Commander-in-Chief, U.N. Com-
mand in Korea; U.S. Commander-in-Chief, Far East
and Commanding General, U.S. Army, Far East.
I Corps (I Corps, deactivated while participating in
the occupation of Japan during March 1950. It was re-
activated on 2 August 1950 at Fort Bragg.
975
Units Deployed to Korea
1st Cavalry Division (Dismounted)
Deployed 2 September 1950. Detached from I Corps
on 27 November and attached to IX Corps.
Regiments: 5th Cavalry, 7th Cavalry and 8th Cavalry
24th Infantry Division
Detached from I Corps during early December 1950
and attached to IX Corps.
Regiments: 5th, 19th, 21st
1st Republic of Korea (ROK)
Infantry Division
During April 1951, transferred to newly established
ROK Corps.
27th British Brigade
(including supporting units)
Detached from I Corps during Eighth Army with-
drawal beyond 38th Parallel and attached to IX Corps.
I Corps
The I Corps components following reorganization as of
31 December 1950. From left to right, northeast of
Seoul: Turkish Brigade; 25th Division; ROK 1st Divi-
sion. Also, the British 29th Brigade was held in reserve.
I Corps subsequent to reorganization during January
1952. (In this reorganization I-Corps lost the 1st Cal-
vary Division, 24th Infantry Division and 27th British
Brigade)
1st Cavalry (reattached to I Corps during April 1951
then later during Japan (December 1951)
3rd Infantry Division — The 3rd Division was later
during January 1953 detached (transferred from I
Corps January 1953)
Regiments: 7th, 15th, 65th
25th Infantry Division — Later transferred from I
Corps during March 1952)
Appendix 1
Regiments: 24th, 27th, 35th
1st ROK Infantry Division (transferred to ROK
Corps during April 1951); 45th Division (Oklahoma
National Guard) attached December 1951
I Corps 1952
25th Division — During March, the 25th Division was
detached from I Corps.
1st Commonwealth Division (British)—
Attached March 1952
ROK 1st — Attached March 1952; ROK 8th — At-
tached March 1952; ROK 9th—Attached March 1952
I Corps Reorganized January 1953 Units
2nd Division — Attached January 1953; 3rd Infantry
Division — Detached January 1953; 7th Division —
Attached January 1953; 24th Infantry Division — De-
tached January 1953; 25th Division — Attached Janu-
ary 1953; 45th Infantry Division — Detached January
1953; 1st Marine Division — Attached January 1953
British Commonwealth Division Infantry —
Detached January 1953
ROK 1st Infantry Division — Attached January 1953;
ROK 2nd Infantry Division — Attached January 1953;
ROK 8th Infantry Division — Detached January 1953;
ROK 9th Infantry Division — Detached January 1953;
ROK 15th Infantry Division — Attached January 1953
Following the cease fire in 1953, I-Corps remained
in Korea until 1971.
IX Corps, Ninth United States Army Corps
(During the occupation of Japan, U.S. IX-Corps was
headquartered at Sendai, Japan, and commanded the 1st
Calvary Division and the 7th Infantry Division. It was
deactivated during the downsizing reorganization of
occupation forces on 28 March 1950.)
Units: 2nd Infantry Division— 23 September
1950— The Division was placed into Eighth Army re-
serve towards the latter part of the year. (Deemed in-
capable of combat by latter part of the year due to ca-
sualties and loss of equipment).
25th Infantry Division— 23 September — The Di-
vision was placed into Eighth Army reserve towards the
latter part of the year. (Deemed incapable of combat by
latter part of the year due to casualties and loss of
equipment.)
1st Calvary Division— Attached to IX Corps lat-
ter part of 1950.
24th Infantry Division—Attached to IX Corps lat-
ter part of 1950.
1st Marine Division— Attached to IX Corps latter
part of 1950.
?th ROK Infantry Division—Attached to IX Corps
latter part of 1950.
187th Airborne Regimental Combat Team
(ARCT)— Attached to IX Corps latter part of 1950.
976
IX Corps December 31, 1950
From left to right north of Seoul: ROK 6th Division,
U.S. 24th Division. The 1st Cavalry Division and the
British 27th Brigade were in corps reserve.
IX Corps After Reorganization March 1951
(Subsequent to transfer of the 1st Marine Division and
187th ARCT.)
Units: 1st Calvary Division; 7th Infantry Division—
Attached March 1951; 24th Infantry Division — At-
tached to IX Corps latter part of 1950; ROK 2nd In-
fantry; ROK 6th Infantry
IX Corps Reorganization January 1952
Units: 1st Calvary Division — Detached January 1952;
2nd Division — Attached March 1952; 3rd Infantry
Division — Attached March 1952; 7th Infantry Divi-
sion—Attached March 1951; 24th Infantry Division—
Detached January 1952; 40th Infantry Division (Cal-
ifornia National Guard)— Attached March 1952; 45th
Infantry Division (Oklahoma National Guard)— At-
tached January 1952 and detached March 1952; ROK
2nd Infantry Division—Detached January 1952; ROK
6th Infantry Division — Detached March 1952; ROK
Capital Division — Attached March 1952
IX Corps Reorganization January 1953
Units: 2nd Division — Attached March 1952 — De-
tached January 1953; 3rd Division — Attached Janu-
ary 1953; 7th Infantry Division — Attached March
1951 — Detached January 1953; 40th Infantry Divi-
sion (California National Guard)— Detached January
1953; ROK 3rd Infantry Division — Attached March
1952 — Detached January 1953; ROK 9th Division —
Attached January 1953; ROK Capital Division — At-
tached March 1952
Note: IX Corps was reactivated at Fort Sheridan, Illi-
nois on 10 August 1950. It arrived in Korea on 22 Sep-
tember 1950. IX-Corps departed Korea for Okinawa
during November 1956.
X Corps
X Corps was activated on September 6, 1950. The
Commanding Officer was Major General Edward M.
Almond.
Units: 3rd Infantry Division; 7th Infantry Division; 1st
Marine Division; ROK 2nd Infantry Division; ROK 5th
Infantry Division; ROK 8th Infantry Division
On 24 December 1950, X Corps, which had oper-
ated independently of Eighth Army, came under Eighth
Army.
X Corps Reorganized During April 1951
2nd Infantry Division — Attached April 1951 — De-
tached March 1952; 3rd Infantry Division—Detached
April 1951; 7th Infantry Division—Detached April 1951
Regiments: 17th, 31st, 32nd
25th Division — Attached March 1952; ROK 2nd
Division — Detached March 1952; ROK 5th Divi-
 977
sion — Detached April 1951; ROK 6th Division — At-
tached March 1952; ROK 7th Division — Attached
April 1951; ROK 8th Division — Detached April 1951
X Corps Reorganized January 1953
25th Infantry Division—Detached January 1953; 40th
Infantry Division — Attached January 1953; 45th In-
fantry Division — Attached January 1953; 1st Marine
Division — Detached January 1953; ROK 6th Divi-
sion — Detached January 1953; ROK 7th Division —
Attached April 1951; ROK 12th Division — Attached
January 1953; ROK 20th Division — Attached Janu-
ary 1953
Note: X Corps remained in Korea until 1955. It was
deactivated at Fort Riley, Kansas on 27 April 1955.
Corps Commanders
I CORPS
Major General John B. Coulter — August 2, 1950—
Coulter transferred to IX Corps on 12 September 1950;
Major General Frank W. Milburn transferred from IX
Corps to I Corps on 11 September 1950 and assumed
command at Taegu; Major General John W. O’Dan-
iel—19 July 1951–June 29, 1952; Major General (Later
Lt. General) Paul W. Kendall (West Point 1918, Cadet
No. 6212)—29 Jun 1952–April 11, 1953; Major Gen-
eral Bruce Cooper Clarke (West Point 1925, Cadet No.
7658)— 11 Apr 1953.
IX CORPS
Major General Frank W. Milburn—August 10, 1950.
Transferred from I Corps assumed command of IX Corps
at Miryang on 12 September 1950; Major General John
B. Coulter — 12 September 1950–January 3, 1951.
Transferred from I Corps to assume command of IX
Corps; Major General Bryant Edward Moore (West
Point 1917, Cadet No. 5845)—January 31, 1951–Feb-
ruary 24, 1951 (died from heart attack after helicopter
accident); Major General William Morris Hoge (West
Point 1916, Cadet No. 5505)—assumed command of IX
Corps at Yoju on March 4, 1951. He replaced General
O.P. Smith, USMC, the temporary commander subse-
quent to the death of General Moore; Major General
(Later Lt. General) Willard Gordon Wyman (West Point
1919, Cadet No. 6383)— December 24, 1951–July
1952; Major General Joseph Pringle Cleland (West Point
1925, Cadet No. 7831)—Temporary command July 31,
1952–August 1952; Major General (Later Lt. General)
Reuben E. Jenkins—August 9, 1952
X CORPS COMMANDING OFFICERS
Major General Edward M. Almond — August 26,
1950–July 1951; Major General Clovis Ethelbert Byers
(West Point 1920, Cadet No. 6707)— 15 July
1951–December 1951; Major General Williston
Birkhimer Palmer (West Point 1919, Cadet No.
6264)—December 5, 1951–August 1952; Major Gen-
eral (later Lt. General) I. D. White — August 15, 1952;
General ID White had been the commanding officer of
the Constabulary in Germany from 1948–1951.
Eighth Army Order of Battle
Division Commanders
1ST CAVALRY DIVISION
Major General Hobart R. Gay — September 1949–
February 1951; Major General Charles D. Palmer —
February 1951 — July 1951; Major General Thomas
Leonard Harrold (West Point 1925, Cadet No.
7639)—July 1951–March 1952; Major General Arthur
Gilbert Trudeau — March 1952–March 1953;
Brigadier General William J. Bradley — March 1953–
April 1953; Major General Joseph P. Cleland — April
1953–June 1953
Units: Headquarters and Headquarters Company
Regiments: 5th Cavalry Regiment; 7th Cavalry
Regiment; 8th Cavalry Regiment
Artillery Units: 61st Field Artillery Battalion
(105mm); 77th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm);
82nd Field Artillery Battalion (155mm); 99th Field
Artillery Battalion (105mm); 29th Antiaircraft Artillery
Battalion
Other Units: Company A, 71st Tank Battalion
(Heavy); 70th Tank Battalion (Medium)— Replaced
Company A, 71st Tank Battalion, August 7, 1950; 8th
Engineer Battalion (Combat); 16th Reconnaissance
Company; 15th Medical Battalion; 13th Signal Com-
pany; 27th Ordnance maintenance Battalion; 15th
Quartermaster Company; 15th Military Police Com-
pany; 15th Replacement Company
Attached Units: 4th Ranger Infantry Company
(Airborne)— December 31, 1950–August 1, 1951;
Thailand 21st Infantry Regiment; Philippine 10th Bat-
talion Combat Team; Greek Expeditionary Force
2ND INFANTRY DIVISION IN KOREA
(ARRIVED AUGUST 3, 1950)
Commanding Officers: Major General Laurence
Bolton Keiser (West Point 1917, Cadet No. 5719)—
April 1950–December 1950. Note: General Keiser had
been ADJ and Commanding officer with 2nd Division
since 1948. Major General Robert B. McClure — De-
cember 1950–January 1951. He is relieved of com-
mand on 14 January 1951. Major General Clark L.
Ruffner—January 14–September 1951. On 1 Septem-
ber, Major General George Craig Stewart (West Point
1923, Cadet No. 7193), assistant commanding general
(1950–51) temporarily command (April 2nd–9th) re-
placed Ruffner as 2nd Division commander, while
Ruffner assumed temporary command of X Corps, while
General Almond was in Japan. Major General DeFazio
assumed temporary command of the 2nd Division (1
September–20 September 1951). Major General
Robert N. Young — September 1951–May 1952).
Major General James Clyde Fry (West Point 1923,
Cadet No. 6958)—May 1952–May 1953. Major Gen-
eral William L. Barriger (West Point 1918, Cadet No.
5979)— May 1953–March 1954.
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters
Company
Regiments: 9th Infantry Regiment; 23rd Infantry
Regiment; 38th Infantry Regiment
Artillery Units: 12th Field Artillery Battalion
Appendix 1
(155mm—arrived Nov. 51); 15th Field Artillery Battal-
ion (105mm); 37th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm);
38th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 503rd Field Ar-
tillery Battalion (155mm); 82nd Antiaircraft Artillery
Battalion
Other Units: 72nd Tank Battalion (Medium); 2nd
Engineer Battalion (Combat); 2nd Reconnaissance Com-
pany; 2nd Medical Company; 2nd Signal Company;
702nd Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 2nd Quarter-
master Company; 2nd Military Police Company; 2nd
Replacement Company
Attached Units: 1st Ranger Infantry Company (Air-
borne) (23 Oct 1950–1 Aug 1951); Netherlands Infantry
Battalion; French Infantry Battalion
3RD INFANTRY DIVISION IN KOREA
Commanding Officers: Major General Percy W. Clark-
son—March 1947–August 1950. Major General Robert
S. Soule—August 1950–September 1951. The 3rd Di-
vision under Soule debarked on 18 November 1950 in
Korea to participate with X Corps. Major General
Thomas J. Cross — October 1951–May 1952. Major
General Robert Leroy Dulaney (West Point 1923, Cadet
No. 7195)—May 1952–October 1952. Major General
George Winfered Smythe (West Point 1924, Cadet No.
7545)— October 1952–May 1953. General Smythe,
prior to taking command had been in command of the
24th Division while it was in Japan during 1952. Major
General Eugene Ware Ridings (West Point 1923, Cadet
No. 7074)—May 1953–October 1953.
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters Com-
pany
Regiments: 7th Infantry Regiment; 15th Infantry
Regiment; 65th Infantry Regiment
Artillery Units: 9th Field Artillery Battalion
(155mm); 10th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 39th
Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 58th Armored Field
Artillery Battalion (105mm); 3rd Antiaircraft Artillery
Battalion
Other Units: 64th Tank Battalion (Medium); 10th
Engineer Battalion (Combat); 3rd Reconnaissance Com-
pany; 3rd Medical Battalion; 3rd Signal Company; 703
Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 3rd Quartermaster
Company; 3rd Military Police Company; 3rd Replace-
ment Company
Attached Units: Eighth Army Raider Company;
8245th Army Unit (12 Nov 1950–26 Dec 1950); 3rd
Ranger Infantry Company (Airborne) (31 Apr 1951–1
Aug 1951); Belgian Infantry Battalion
7TH INFANTRY DIVISION IN KOREA
Commanding Officers: Major General David Barr—
May 1949–January 1951. General Barr returned to the
States and became commandant of the Armor School at
Fort Knox, Kentucky. Major General Claude Birkett
Ferenbaugh (West Point 1919, Cadet No. 6520)—Jan-
uary 1951–December 1951. Major General Lyman
Louis Lemnitzer (West Point 1920, Cadet No. 6625)—
December 1951–July 1952. General Lemnitzer became
commanding general Far East Ari Forces and chairman
Joint Chiefs of staff (1960–1962). Major General Wayne
978
Carleton Smith (West Point 1925, Cadet 7799)—July
1952–March 1953. General Smith, prior to assuming
command had also been assistant commanding officer,
45th Division (1952). Major General Arthur G.
Trudeau — March 1953–October 1953. General
Trudeau, prior to assuming command, had commanded
the 1st Cavalry Division. Major General Lionel Charles
McGarr (West Point 1928, Cadet No. 8378)—October
1953–May 1954. General McGarr during 1952–1953
had also been assistant commanding general of the 2nd
Division and the commander of the U.N. POW com-
pound.
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters
Company
Regiments: 17th Infantry Regiment; 31st Infantry
Regiment; 32nd Infantry Regiment
Artillery: 31st Field Artillery Battalion (155mm);
48th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 49th Field Ar-
tillery Battalion (105mm); 57th Field Artillery Battal-
ion (105mm); 15th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion
Other Units: Company A, 77th Tank Battalion; 73rd
Tank Battalion (Medium)—Replaced Company A, 77th
Tank Battalion, during August 1950; 13th Engineer Bat-
talion (Combat); 7th Reconnaissance Company
Other Units: 7th Medical Battalion; 7th Signal Bat-
talion; 707th Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 7th
Quartermaster Company; 7th Military Police Com-
pany; 7th Replacement Company
Attached Units: 2nd Ranger Infantry Company
(Airborne)— December 31, 1950–August 1, 1951
24TH DIVISION IN KOREA
Commanding Officers: Major General William Dean
24th Division July 4, 1950. General Dean was later
captured and thought killed. Brigadier General John
H. Church — July 22, 1950–December 1950. General
Church returned to the States as commandant of the In-
fantry School at Fort Benning, Georgia. Major General
Blackshear M. Bryan — December 26, 1951. The 24th
Division embarked from Japan during February 1952
and did not return to Korea until July 1953.
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters
Company
Regiments: 19th Infantry Regiment; 21st Infantry
Regiment; 34th Infantry Regiment
Artillery: 11th Field Artillery Battalion (155mm);
13th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 52nd Field
Artillery Battalion (105mm); 63rd Field Artillery Bat-
talion (105mm); 26th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion
Other Units: Company A, 78th Tank Battalion
(Heavy); 6th Tank Battalion (Medium)— Replaced
Company A, 78th Tank Battalion on August 8, 1950;
3rd Engineer Battalion (Combat); 24th Reconnaissance
Company; 24th Medical Battalion; 24th Signal Com-
pany; 724th Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 24th
Quartermaster Company; 24th Military Police Com-
pany; 24th Replacement Company
Attached Units: 5th Infantry Regiment (5th RCT)—
September 31, 1950–January 1952; 555th Field Artillery
Battalion; 8072nd Tank Battalion (Provisional); Eighth
 979 Eighth Army Order of Battle

Army Ranger Company — October 10, 1950–March Artillery: 143rd Field Artillery Battalion (105mm);
28, 1951; 8th Ranger Infantry Company (Airborne)— 625th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 980th Field
April 31, 1951–August 1, 1951; British 27th Common- Artillery Battalion (105mm); 981st Field Artillery Bat-
wealth Brigade talion (155mm); 140th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion
Other Units: 140th Tank Battalion (Medium); 578th
25TH DIVISION IN KOREA Engineer Battalion (Combat); 40th Reconnaissance
Commanding Officers: Major General William Ben- Company; 115th Medical Battalion; 40th Signal Com-
jamin Kean (West Point 1919, Cadet No. 6508)— pany; 740th Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 40th
1948–1951. Major General Joseph Sladen Bradley (West Quartermaster Company; 40th Military Police Com-
Point 1919, Cadet No. 6462—February 28, 1951–1951 pany; 40th Replacement Company
Major General Ira Platt. Swift (West Point, Cadet No. Attached Units: 11th Ranger Infantry Company
6219)— 1951–1952. Major General Samuel T. Wil- (Airborne) 1 July 1951–1 September 1951 (In Japan)
liams—1952–1953. Major General Halley Grey Mad-
45TH INFANTRY DIVISION IN KOREA
dox (West Point 1920, Cadet No. 6793)—1953–1954
Commanding Officers: Major General James C. Styron
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters
(West Point 1918, Cadet No. 6132)— September 5,
Company
1946–May 20, 1952. Major General David L.
Regiments: 24th Infantry Regiment (which was re-
Ruffner—May 21, 1952–March 15, 1953. Major Gen-
placed on 1 August 1951 by: 14th Infantry Regiment—
eral Philip DeWitt Ginder (West Point 1927, Cadet No.
Replaced 24th Regiment on August 1, 1951 as part of the
8193)—March 16, 1953–November 30, 1953.
U.S. Army’s integration policy. 27th Infantry Regiment;
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters
35th Infantry Regiment
Company
Artillery: 8th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 64th
Regiments: 179th Infantry Regiment; 180th Infantry
Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 69th Field Artillery
Regiment; 279th Infantry Regiment
Battalion (105mm); 90th Field Artillery Battalion
Artillery: 158th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm);
(155mm)
160th Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); 171st Field
Other Units: Company A, 79th Tank Battalion
Artillery Battalion (105mm); 189th Field Artillery Bat-
(Heavy); 89th Tank Battalion (Medium)— Replaced
talion (155mm); 145th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion
Company A, 89th Tank Battalion on August 7, 1950;
Other Units: 245th Tank Battalion (Medium) 120th
65th Engineer Battalion (Combat); 25th Reconnaissance
Engineer Battalion (Combat) 45th Reconnaissance
Company; 25th Medical Battalion; 25th Signal Com-
Company; 120th Medical Battalion; 45th Signal Com-
pany; 725th Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 25th
pany; 700th Ordnance Maintenance Battalion; 45th
Quartermaster Company; 25th Military Police Com-
Quartermaster Company; 45th Military Police Com-
pany; 25th Replacement Company
pany; 45th Replacement Company
Attached Units: 5th Ranger Infantry Company (Air-
Attached Units: 10th Ranger Infantry Company
borne)—(April 30, 1951–August 1, 1951); Turkish
(Airborne) (in Japan—1 July 1951–15 September 1951)
Brigade
5TH REGIMENTAL COMBAT TEAM
40TH INFANTRY DIVISION (NATIONAL GUARD) Units: 5th Infantry Regiment; 555 Field Artillery Bat-
IN KOREA talion (105mm) (Known as “The Triple-Nickel); 72nd
Commanding Officers: Major Gen D.H. Hudelson— Engineer Company
On February 1, 1951, General Hudelson informed the
187TH AIRBORNE REGIMENTAL COMBAT TEAM
Division (at the time in California) that it should prepare
187th Airborne RCT (Brigadier General Frank S. Bowen
to embark for Korea. The 40th Division, a National
Jr.
Guard division was one of only two National Guard di-
Units: 187th Airborne Infantry Regiment; 674th Air-
visions to serve in Korea. General Hudelson remained as
borne Field Artillery Battalion (105mm); Airborne An-
Division commander until June 1, 1952. Brigadier (Later
tiaircraft Artillery Battery, 187th ARCT; Airborne En-
major general) General Joseph P. Cleland — June 2,
gineer Company, 187th ARCT; Military Police Traffic
1952–July 30, 1952. Brigadier General Gordon Byrom
Platoon, 187th ARCT; Quartermaster Parachute Main-
Rodgers (West Point 1924, Cadet No. 7345), assistant
tenance Company, 187th ARCT; Medical Ambulance
commanding general—Temporary command, July 31,
Platoon, 187th ARCT; Medical Clearing Platoon, 187th
1952–August 8, 1952. Major General Joseph P. Cle-
ARCT; Pathfinder Team, 187th ARCT
land—August 9, 1952–April 16, 1953. Major General
Attached Units: 2nd and 5th Ranger Infantry Com-
Ridgely Gaither — Assumed command on April 17,
panies (Airborne)—March 3, 1951–April 4, 1951) 5-
1953, several months prior to the conclusion of the con-
man FECOM Tactical Liaison Office Team, 8177th
flict and he retained command after the armistice was
Army Unit. (Tactical Intelligence)
signed.
Units: Division Headquarters and Headquarters UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS
Company Commandants: General Clifton B. Cates — January 1,
Regiments: 160th Infantry Regiment; 223rd In- 1948–December 31, 1951. Lt. General Lemuel Shep-
fantry Regiment; 224th Infantry Regiment herd (Commander Fleet Marine Force, Pacific prior to
Appendix 1
appointment) January 1, 1952–December 31, 1955.
Note: General Cates did not retire. He was appointed
commanding officer, Marine Corps Schools, Quantico.
1ST PROVISIONAL MARINE BRIGADE AND
1ST MARINE DIVISION
1st Provisional Marine Brigade
Commander — Brigadier General Edward A. Craig —
July 7, 1950–September 13, 1950; Deputy Comman-
der — Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman
Note: On 5 July, the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, com-
manded by Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman,
was formed at El Toro, California for the purpose of
bolstering the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade.
1st Marine Division
Commanding Officers: Major General Graves B. Er-
skine, commanding officer, 1st Marine Division was
assigned to the State Department for a secret mission in
Southeast Asia during 1950. Brigadier General Harry
B. Liversedge—Temporary commander 1st Marine Di-
vision relieved by General O.P. Smith on August 1950.
General O.P. Smith — July 25, 1950–April 26, 1951
(General Oliver P. Smith — Departed Washington,
D.C. on July 18 to assume command of the 1st Marine
Division. He replaced the temporary commander,
Brigadier General Harry B. Liversedge on 25 July.).
General Lewis B. Puller — Temporary command 2
April-( April, While General O.P. Smith was in tempo-
rary command of the IX Corps. Major General Gerald
C. Thomas—April 26, 1951–January 11, 1952. Major
General John T. Selden — January 11, 1952–August 2,
1952. Major General Edwin A. Pollock — August 2,
1952–June 15, 1953. Major General Randolph McC.
Pate June 15, 1953
1ST MARINE AIR WING
Commanding Officers: Major General Field Harris—
departed El Toro on August 31, 1950 in advance of the
Air Wing to prepare for the invasion of Inchon. Gen-
eral Harris remained in command until May 27, 1951.
Major General Thomas J. Cushman — May 27,
1951–July 27, 1951. Cushman succeeded Major Gen-
eral Field Harris. Major General Christian F. Schilt —
July 27, 1951–April 11, 1952. Brigadier General Clay-
ton C. Jerome — April 11, 1952–January 8, 1953.
Major General Vernon E. Megee — January 8, 1953.
SOUTH KOREAN CORPS: ROK I Corps; ROK II
Corps; ROK III Corps
Commanders who graduated the U.S. Military Acad-
emy, West Point: Major General William L. Barriger
(West Point 1918, Cadet No. 5979). Major General
Joseph Sladen Bradley (West Point 1919, Cadet No.
6462. Major General Clovis Ethelbert Byers (West
Point 1920, Cadet No. 6707). Major General Bruce
980
Cooper Clarke (West Point 1925, Cadet No. 7658)—
11 Apr 1953. Major General Joseph Pringle Cleland
(West Point 1925, Cadet No. 7831). Major General
Robert Leroy Dulaney (West Point 1923, Cadet No.
7195). Major General Claude Birkett Ferenbaugh
(West Point 1919, Cadet No. 6520). Major General
James Clyde Fry (West Point 1923, Cadet No. 6958).
Major General Philip DeWitt Ginder (West Point
1927, Cadet No. 8193). Major General Thomas
Leonard Harrold (West Point 1925, Cadet No.
7639)— July 1951–March 1952. Major General
William Morris Hoge (West Point 1916, Cadet No.
5505). Major General William Benjamin Kean (West
Point 1919, Cadet No. 6508). Major General Laurence
Bolton Keiser (West Point 1917, Cadet No. 5719).
Major General (Later Lt. General) Paul W. Kendall
(West Point 1918, Cadet No. 6212). Major General
Lyman Louis Lemnitzer (West Point 1920, Cadet No.
6625). Major General Lionel Charles McGarr (West
Point 1928, Cadet No. 8378). Major General Halley
Grey Maddox (West Point 1920, Cadet No. 6793).
Major General Frank W. Milburn (West Point, 1914,
Cadet No. 5304). Major General Bryant Edward
Moore (West Point 1917, Cadet No. 5845). Major
General Williston Birkhimer Palmer (West Point 1919,
Cadet No. 6264). Lt. General Matthew B. Ridgway
(West Point, 1917, Cadet No. 5657). Major General
Eugene Ware Ridings (West Point 1923, Cadet No.
7074). Brigadier General Gordon Byrom Rodgers
(West Point 1924, Cadet No. 7345). Major General
Wayne Carleton Smith (West Point 1925, Cadet 7799).
Major General George Winfered Smythe (West Point
1924, Cadet No. 7545). Major General George Craig
Stewart (West Point 1923, Cadet No. 7193). Major
General James C. Styron (West Point 1918, Cadet No.
6132)Major General Ira Platt. Swift (West Point, Cadet
No. 6219); Lt. General (later general) Maxwell D. Tay-
lor (West Point 1922, Cadet No. 6831); Lt. General
(later general) James Alward Van Fleet (West Point
1915, Cadet No. 5404); Lt. General Walton H. Walker
(West Point 1912, Cadet No. 5090); Major General
Willard Gordon Wyman (West Point 1919, Cadet No.
6383)
Sources
U.S. Army, Center for Military History, USMC Histor-
ical Division, Washington, D.C.
U.S. Military Academy records
Division histories (1st Cavalry, 2nd, 3rd, 7th, 24th,
25th, 40th and 45th Divisions)
Books (each listed in bibliography)
America’s Tenth Legion, X Corps in Korea
Ebb and Flow
 Appendix 2.
Major Combat Events
The list is not all-inclusive, but it does re-
flect the major incidents of combat. All of the
action listed below are detailed in greater depth
within the context of the book on the respective
corresponding date or dates.
June 25–June 28, 1950— The Invasion of South
Korea by the North Koreans.
July 5, 1950— The Battle of Osan
July 5, 1950–February 18, 1951—Battle of Wonju
July 16, 1950— The Battle of the Kum River
July 19–20, 1950— The Battle of Taejon
August 7–15, 1950— The U.N.’s First Offensive
(Bloody Gulch)
August 17, 1950— The First Battle of the Natong
Bulge (Pusan Perimeter) including Battle for Obong-
ni (No Name Ridge)
September 1–5 1950— The North Koreans launch
major offensive. Includes Second Battle of Naktong
Bulge.
September 3, 1950— Second Battle of the Naktong
Bulge (Pusan Perimeter)
September 5–13, 1950— The Battle of Yongch’on
(Spread out on individual dates)
September 15, 1950— The Invasion of Inchon
September 15–September 27, 1950— Campaign
to Retake Seoul.
September 27, 1950— Seoul Recaptured.
October 19, 1950— The capital of North Korea,
Pyongyang was captured by Eighth Army.
November 2, 1950—Chinese attacked Eighth Army
at Unsan. The attack marked the first time the Chinese
November 26–27, 1950— Chinese launched offen-
sive against Eighth Army.
November 27, 1950–December 11, 1950—Chosin
Reservoir Campaign. The 1st Marine Division fought
its way to Hungnam.
December 31, 1950–January 15, 1951— The
Communists launched a full-scale offensive against the
entire 38th Parallel.
981
January 23, 1951—The U.N. forces in Korea under
General Ridgway, resumed its offensive (Operation
Thunderbolt).
February 13–15, 1951— The Battle of Chip’Yong
February 21, 1951—Limited offensive by IX and X
Corps.
March 7, 1951— IX and X Corps initiated Opera-
tion RIPPER an advance across the Han River.
April 22, 1951— The Communists launched their
Spring Offensive.
April 22–25, 1951— The Battle of Imjin River
April 23–25, 1951— The Battle of Kap’Yong
May 16, 1951— The Communists initiated the sec-
ond phase of their Spring Offensive.
May 20, 1951— Fifth Air Force launched Opera-
tion Strangle, a full-scale interdiction campaign.
May 21, 1951— The U.N. launched a counterof-
fensive.
June 26, 1951–March 26, 1953— The Battle of
Old Baldy
July 10, 1951— The Communists and the U.N.
representatives hold the first of the Truce talks. The
meeting convened at Kaesong.
August 31, 1951—The U.N. launches what became
its final offensive of the war. While Eighth Army at-
tacked to realign its lines, the 1st Marine Division at-
tacked towards the Punch Bowl.
September 13–October 15, 1951— The Battle of
Heartbreak Ridge
October 24, 1951— Battle of Namsi Air Force
October 25, 1951— The Truce Talks, which had
been stalled for a couple of weeks, reconvened at
Panmunjom. Three days later, a cease fire was agreed
upon.
August 9–17, 1952— The Battle of Bunker Hill
August 18–September 5, 1951— Battle of Bloody
Ridge
October 6–15 1952— Battle of White Horse Hill
October 14, 1952–November 5, 1952— The Bat-
tle of Triangle Hill (Hill 598)
October 26–28, 1952—(Korea) The Battle of The
Appendix 2
Hook (The contest for control of the hill actually lasted
until July 1953)
November 12, 1951— General Ridgway, com-
mander U.N. forces in Korea ordered an end to all of-
fensive actions, except for patrols.
March 23, 1953—The First Battle of Pork Chop Hill
March 26–30, 1953—(Korea) The Battle for Vegas-
Reno-Carson Outposts (Nevada Cities)
May 28–30, 1953— Communists launched heavy
attack against I Corps (Nevada Cities Outposts and the
vicinity of the Hook)
July 6–11, 1953—(Korea) The 2nd Battle of Pork
Chop Hill (Hill 255)
982
July 7–9, 1953— The Battle for Berlin-East Berlin
Outposts
July 13–20, 1953— The Communists launch full
scale attacks in the IX Corps and the ROK II Corps
sectors (Battle of Kumsong River Salient).
July 19–20, 1953— The Second Battle for The
Berlin-East Berlin Outposts.
July 24–27, 1953—The Communists launch strong
attacks against Berlin Outpost area (Boulder City).
July 27, 1953—Cease fire agreement consummated.
The Armistice remains in effect.
 Appendix 3.
United Nations Command,
Senior Military Commanders
See also Appendix 1: Eighth Army Order
of Battle.
Commander-in-Chief
United Nations Command (CINCUNC)
General of the Army, Douglas MacArthur — Gen-
eral MacArthur was selected as the U.N. Commander
on 8 July 1950.
Lt. General (Later general) Matthew B. Ridgway
succeeded General MacArthur on April 11, 1951. In
conjunction, MacArthur had been fired by President
Harry S Truman.
General Mark W. Clark — May 12, 1952
Commanding Generals
Eighth U.S. Army in Korea (EUSAK)
Lt. General Walton H. Walker—July 13, 1950–De-
cember 23, 1950. General Walker was killed in a vehi-
cle accident on the 23rd.
Major General Frank J. Milburn — Temporary com-
mander until Ridgway assumed command
Lt. General Matthew B. Ridgway — December 26,
1950–April 1951
Lt. General (later general) James A. Van Fleet—April
14, 1951–February 11, 1953.
Lt. General (later general) Maxwell D. Taylor—Feb-
ruary 11, 1953.
I Corps
Major General John B. Coulter — August 2, 1950
Major General Frank W. Milburn — September 11,
1950
Major General John W. O’Daniel — July 19, 1951
Major General (later Lt. General) Paul W. Kendall—
June 29, 1952–April 1953
Major General Bruce C. Clarke — April 11, 1953
983
IX Corps
Major General Frank W. Milburn — August 10,
1950–September 1950
Major General John B. Coulter — September 12,
1950–January 1951
Major General Bryant E. Moore — January 31,
1951–February 23, 1951. General Moore was aboard
a helicopter that crashed on the 23rd. Within a short
time after the crash, he suffered a heart attack and died.
Major General Oliver P. Smith, USMC — Tempo-
rary command of I Corps on February 24, 1951. He re-
tained control until March 1951 when a U.S. Army of-
ficer assumed command.
Major General (later Lt. General) William F.
Hoge — March 5, 1951–December 1951
Major General Willard G. Wyman — December 24,
1951–July 1952
Major General Joseph P. Cleland — July 31, 1952–
August 1952
Major General (later Lt. General) Reuben E. Jen-
kins — August 9, 1952
X Corps
Major General Edward M. Almond (General Mac-
Arthur’s chief-of-staff ) assumed control of X Corps on
August 26, 1950–July 1951
Major General Clovis E. Byers—July 15, 1951–De-
cember 1951
Major General Williston B. Palmer — December 5,
1951–August 1952
Far East Air Forces (FEAF)
Note: See also, Appendix U.S. Air Force Comman-
ders During the Korean War
Lt. General George E. Stratemeyer — 26 Apr 1949–
May 1951
Lt. General Earle E. Partridge (temporary) May 21,
1951
Appendix 3
Major General (later Lt. General) O. P. Weyland–
June 1, 1951
Fifth Air Force
Lt. General Earle E. Partridge — October 6, 1948–
May 1951
Major General Edward J. Timberlake — May 21,
1951–June 1951
Major General Frank F. Everest—June 1, 1951–May
1952
Lt. General Glenn O. Barcus — May 30, 1952–May
1953
Lt. General Samuel E. Anderson — May 31, 1953
Naval Forces Far East (COMNAVFE)
Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy—August 26, 1949–June
1952
Vice Admiral R. P. Briscoe — June 4, 1952
984
Seventh Fleet — Task Force 70
Vice Admiral A. D. Struble — May 6, 1950–March
1951
Vice Admiral H. H. Martin — March 28, 1951–
March 1952
Vice Admiral R. P. Briscoe — March 1952–May
1952
Vice Admiral J. J. Clark — May 20, 1952
ROK Army (Chief of Staff )
Major General Chae Byung Dok — April 10, 1950–
June 1950
Lt. General Chung II Kwon — June 30, 1950–June
1951
Major General Lee Chong Ch’an — June 23, 1951–
July 1952
Lt. General Paik Son-yup—July 23, 1952–May 1953
 Appendix 4.
U.S. Air Force Commanders
The biographical information listed below
is not intended to be a comprehensive study;
rather, it is meant to provide a snapshot of the
various individuals.
Far East Air Forces
Lt. General George E. Stratemeyer. He had been the
chief of Air Staff during World War II. During the first
year of the Korean War, he was the commander of Far
East Air Forces until he was succeeded on 21 May 1951.
Lt. General Earle E. Partridge. 21 May 1951 to 1
June 1951. General Partridge had been the command-
ing general of Fifth Air Force during the first year of the
Korean War. He was promoted to lieutenant general
during April 1951. After his short duty as temporary
commander FEAF, he returned to the States and later,
during 1954, he returned to Japan as commander of
FEAF.
General Otto P. Weyland. 10 June 1951 to 1954.
General Weyland received the appointment when Gen-
eral Stratemeyer suffered a heart attack.
Fifth Air Force Commanders
Lt. General Earle E. Partridge. 21 May 1951. See
Far East Air Forces.
Major General Edward J. Timberlake, Jr. 21 May
1951 to June 1951.
Lt. General Frank F. Everest. 1 June 1951 to 30 May
1952. In 1947 following World War II and prior to the
Korean War, General Everest was appointed com-
mander of the Yukon Sector, Alaskan Air Command,
headquartered at Ladd Field, Alaska. In June 1948 he
became assistant deputy chief of staff for operations at
Air Force Headquarters in Washington, D.C. When
he left his position as commander Fifth Air Force, he as-
sumed the position of deputy commander of the Tac-
tical Air Command at Langley Air Force Base, Virginia.
Lt. General Glenn O. Barcus. 30 May 1952 to 31
985
May 1953. During 1944, General Barcus commanded
the 64th Fighter Wing (Italy). In February 1945, he
was appointed commanding general of the 12th Tacti-
cal Air Command in France until 1946, when he was
ordered back to the States. For a while he was the chief
of staff of the Tactical Air Command at Langley Field,
but by March 1947, he was appointed as commander
of the 12th Air Force at March Field, California. He re-
mained the commander when the 12th Air Force relo-
cated to Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. Subsequently,
during 1949, he was appointed commander of the First
Air Force at Fort Slocum, N.Y. Soon after, he was trans-
ferred to Mitchel Air Force Base in New York during
September 1949. By 1951, he was appointed deputy
commander of the Tactical Air Command at Langley
Air Force Base, Virginia, and by the following year he
was appointed chief of staff of Tactical Air Command.
After he departed Korea, General Barcus became vice
commander, Air Training Command.
Lt. General Samuel E. Anderson. 21 May 1953.
Fifth Air Force Vice Commanders
Major General Edward J. Timberlake, Jr. 18 June
1951. General Timberlake became vice commander
during December 1949. Later, during 1951, he be-
came the commander of Fifth Air Force.
Brigadier General Delmar T. Spivey. 6 August 1950
to 1 December 1950. During World War II, while serv-
ing with Eighth Air Force in Europe in 1943, General
Spivey was shot down over Germany. Subsequent to
his release as a POW during 1945, he became assistant
chief of Air Staff for Personnel of the Air Training Com-
mand at Fort Worth, Texas. Shortly thereafter, during
October 1945, he became deputy chief of staff of the
command. Prior to the outbreak of war in Korea,
Spivey entered the War College and afterward served at
various locations, including the Air University in Al-
abama. While with Fifth Air Force headquarters in
Japan, he commanded the Rear Echelon, Fifth Air
Force, until December 1950, when he was named com-
Appendix 4
manding general of the 314th Air Division in Japan.
When that unit was deactivated during February 1952,
Spivey was appointed commander of the Japan Air De-
fense Force.
Brigadier General James Ferguson. 18 June 1951 to
26 January 1952. During World War II, General Fer-
guson organized and commanded the 405th Fighter-
Bomber Group in the States and moved to Europe dur-
ing early 1944. During April that year, he became
assistant chief of staff with the 9th Fighter Command.
Subsequent to the end of the war, General Ferguson
returned to the States (December 1945) and served in
various capacities until 1947, when he was transferred
to Ankara, Turkey, with the U.S. Air Force advisory
group, where he later became the head. From there he
moved to the Far East during June of 1950 and became
assistant to the vice commander and later assistant
deputy of operations for FEAF, until he became vice
commander of Fifth Air Force.
Brigadier General Dudley D. Hale. 26 January 1952
to 23 September 1952. During World War II, General
Hale served in Europe with 12th Air Force. In 1945 he
was transferred to the Army and Navy Staff College.
During 1946, he became an operations instructor at the
at the National War College and then was appointed
chief of the Communications Division of the Air Uni-
versity at Maxwel1 Field, Alabama. Subsequent to other
assignments in the States, he was transferred to Korea in
January 1952 to assume the position of vice commander
or the Fifth Air Force, a position he held until Novem-
ber that year, when he became assistant chief of staff for
operations, Allied Air Force, Central Europe, Supreme
Headquarters, Allied Powers in Europe.
Brigadier General Edward H. Underhill. 23 Septem-
ber 1952.
Thirteenth Air Force
Major General Howard M. Turner. 15 October 1951.
Prior to assuming command of 13th Air Force, General
Turner had commanded the First Bombardment Divi-
sion (Eighth Air Force) during the latter part of World
War II. Afterward, he commanded 10th Air Force at
Brooks Air Force Base ( June 1946). Subsequently, dur-
ing 1948, he became deputy commanding general of Air
Defense Command at Mitchel Air Force Base, N.Y. In
December 1948, he became vice commander of the
Continental Air Command, also at Mitchel AFB.
Major General Ernest Moore. 16 October 1951 to
October 1952. General Moore assumed command of
the Philippine Command and 13th Air Force at Clark
Air Force Base in the Philippines on 16 October 1952.
On 1 October 1952, he was appointed as deputy chief
of staff, Far East Command, headquarters Far East Air
Forces.
Brigadier General John W. Sessums, Jr. 10 October
1952. General Sessums was attached to the XXII Tac-
tical Air Command in Italy during World War II. He
flew twenty-two combat missions, but he also operated
on the ground behind enemy lines. Later he became
986
chief of staff of XXII TAC, and afterwards, chief of
staff, 12th Air Force during June 1945. Following other
duty in the States, during February 1951, he was
deputy commanding general of the Air Research and
Development Command at Wright-Patterson Air Force
Base in Ohio and later, during August 1951, he be-
came deputy for Development of the Air Research and
Development Command.
Twentieth Air Force
Major General Alvan C. Kincaid. 31 July 1950. Prior
to his service with the 20th Air Force, General Kin-
caid served in France during 1944 with the Ninth Air
Force. He was appointed commanding general of the
84th Fighter Wing. Shortly thereafter, he was ap-
pointed chief of staff of the Ninth Tactical Air Com-
mand in the European Theater and subsequently be-
came deputy commander for administration of the
Ninth Air Force. After the war, he became chief of staff
of the U.S. Strategic Air Forces in Europe ( July 1945).
Later, prior to being transferred to Korea, he served
during 1946 as chief of staff of Air Training Command,
based at Barksdale Air Force Base, Louisiana. General
Kincaid was afterward, during August 1948, transferred
to the 20th Air Force based in Guam at Harmon Air
Force Base, where he became commanding general.
The 20th Air Force relocated to Kadena Air Force Base
in Okinawa in May 1949 and General Kincaid re-
mained at his post until he departed for the States to
take command of the Fourth Air Force at Hamilton
Air Force Base, California.
Major General Ralph F. Stearley. 31 July 1950 to 13
January 1953. During World War II (April 1944),
General Stearley became the operations officer for
Ninth Tactical Air Force in the European Theater and
later, during August of that year, he assumed the same
duties with the recently established Allied Airborne
Army. In April 1945, he assumed command of the
Ninth Tactical Air Division of the Ninth Air Force.
After the war, during September 1945, he was ap-
pointed commanding officer of the Air Section, 15th
Army Theater General Board (European Theater). Fol-
lowing various duties in the States, including com-
mander of the 14th Air Force at Orlando Air Force
Base, Florida and at Robins Air Force Base, Georgia, he
arrived in Okinawa during 1950 to assume command
of the 20th Air Force at Kadena Air Force Base.
Brigadier General Robert W.C. Wimsatt. 14 Janu-
ary 1953 to 7 February 1953. During World War II,
General Wimsatt served in Greenland (Greenland Base
Command). He assumed command during 1942 when
Colonel Giles departed to take command of the North
Atlantic Wing of the Air Forces Ferrying Command.
Later, during April 1949, he became commanding of-
ficer of the 4th Interceptor Fighter Squadron, which
at the time was based in Delaware.
Brigadier General Fay R. Upthegrove. 8 February
1953. During World War II, General Upthegrove served
in the Pacific Theater from February to April 1942.
 987
Afterward, he commanded the 305th Bomb Group
(Utah) and after about two months there, he moved to
take command of the 99th Bomb Group in Arizona.
Subsequent to the Group transferring to Idaho and then
Iowa, he retained command when it departed for North
Africa during early 1943. Later, during 1944, he as-
sumed command of the 304th Bomb Wing, 15th Air
Force (Italy). After the war ended, he embarked for the
States and assumed several different positions, includ-
ing commanding officer of Chanute Field in Illinois.
From there he was transferred to Germany, where he
took command of the 7100th Headquarters Command
Wing, USAFE, during 1948. By 1951, he became part
of the Strategic Air Command in the States and again
after a couple of new assignments, he assumed com-
mand of the 20th Air Force in Okinawa during 1953.
Following that tour of duty, he assumed command of the
313th Air Division, FEAF during March 1955.
Far East Air Materiel Command
(FEAMCom) and FEALogFor
Brigadier General John P. Doyle. 10 June 1952. Prior
to assuming command of Far East Air Materiel Com-
mand at Tokyo, Japan, General Doyle served in New
Guinea from January 1943 to March 1943. Afterward,
he was transferred to the Mediterranean Theater and at-
tached to the 2686th Medium Wing (later redesigned
the 42nd Bomb Wing) as the chief of staff. During
September 1944, he assumed command of the unit
prior to its departure to France. Just after the war, he
was appointed deputy chief of staff at Headquarters
U.S. Air Forces in Europe. During the following year,
he assumed command of the 12th Air Force (Califor-
nia). During 1947, Doyle became chief of staff for the
Air Defense Command (Mitchel Air Force Base, N.Y).
Following other assignments, he became commander of
the Far East Air Materiel Command at Tokyo, Japan;
however, he was reassigned to Air Force headquarters
during July 1952 to become director of transportation.
Major General Paul E. Ruestow. June 1952. Prior to
assuming command of Far East Air Materiel Com-
mand, General Ruestow served during World War II,
but his duty stations were in the States until 1944 and
then he was transferred to England and afterwards
France, where he became deputy commander Air Tech-
nical Service Command Europe. Later he served in
Germany and upon his return to the States during
1947, he received several assignments before being sent
to Korea to assume command of FEAMC in Japan. He
remained at that post for more than three years.
U.S. Air Force Commanders
314th Air Division and
Japan Air Defense Force
Maj. General Delmar T. Spivey. 1 December 1950
to 20 January 1953. See Fifth Air Force Vice Com-
manders.
Maj. General Roy H. Lynn. 20 January 1953. Prior
to assuming command of 314th Air Division and Japan
Air Defense Force, General Lynn moved to the China-
Burma-India Theater during 1944 with the 20th
Bomber Command (India). During August of that
year, General Lynn assumed command of the Third
Tactical Air Force. In December he became deputy
commander of the Strategic Air Force Detachment in
that theater. Shortly thereafter, during July, he was ap-
pointed commanding officer of the 84th Air Depot in
that theater. Following the close of the war, Lynn be-
came deputy chief of Fourth Air Force at Hamilton
Field (California). Other assignments followed, includ-
ing attendance at the War College at Newport Rhode
Island, with the Director of Intelligence at Air Force
Headquarters and some security assignments in both
D.C. and Texas. Following his appointment as com-
mander of FEAMC in Japan, he was appointed com-
mander of Fifth Air Force during September 1954.
FEAF Bomber Command (Provisional)
Major General Emmett O’Donnell, Jr. 8 July 1950
to 10 January 1951. Prior to assuming command of
FEAF Bomber Command (Provisional), General
O’Donnell had attended West Point (Class of 1928)
and he led the first B-29 attack against Tokyo during
November 1944. Earlier, during 1941, prior to the at-
tack at Pearl Harbor, O’Donnell led the 14th Bomber
Group from there to the Philippines on 5 September to
reinforce General MacArthur. They arrived at Clark
Field in Manila one week later to complete the initial
mass movement of land-based bombers across the Pa-
cific from Hawaii to the Philippines.
Sources
The United States Air Force Historical Center
The U.S. Air Force Museum
U.S. Air Force in Korea (1950–1953), Office of Air
Force History, Washington, D.C. 1983, By Robert
F. Futrell, Government Printing Office
 Appendix 5.
Medal of Honor Recipients
Names with an asterisk indicate killed in action.
The list below provides the names of the
recipients in alphabetical order. Each entry in-
cluded the unit which the recipient belonged
and the date (or dates) and the location where
the action occurred in which the man became
a recipient. In addition, the date of birth and the
city or town of birth are also listed. In most in-
stances, when practical, the respective actions
are to be found in the main sequence of the
book on the date shown below. The list in-
cludes 131 recipients; of those, 94 made the ul-
timate sacrifice.
*Abrell, Charles G.— Corporal USMC, Company
E, 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Division,
Hangnyong, Korea, 10 June 1951. Born: 12 August
1931, Terre Haute, Indiana.
Adams, Stanley T.— Master Sergeant (then Sfc.),
U.S. Army, Company A, 19th Infantry Regiment, Near
Sesim-ni, Korea, 4 February 1951.— Born: 9 May
1922, DeSoto, Kansas.
Barber, William E.— Captain, USMC, command-
ing officer, Company F, 2d Battalion 7th Marines, 1st
Marine Division, Chosin Reservoir area, Korea, 28 No-
vember to 2 December 1950. Born: 30 November
1919, Dehart, Kentucky.
*Barker, Charles H.— Private First Class (then
Pvt.), U.S. Army, Company K, 17th Infantry Regi-
ment, 7th Infantry Division. Near Sokkogae, Korea, 4
June 1953. Born: 12 April 1935, Pickens County,
South Carolina.
*Baugh, William B.— Private First Class, U.S. Ma-
rine Corps, Company G, 3d Battalion, 1st Marine, 1st
Marine Division. Vicinity of Koto-ri to Hagaru-ri,
Korea, 29 November 1950. Born: 7 July 1930, McK-
inney, Kentucky.
*Benfold, Edward C.— Hospital Corpsman Third
988
Class, U.S. Navy, attached to the 1st Marine Division.
Korea, 5 September 1952. Born: 15 January 1931,
Staten Island, New York.
*Bennett, Emory L.— Private First Class, U.S.
Army, Company B, 15th Infantry Regiment, 3d In-
fantry Division. Near Sobangsan, Korea, 24 June 1951.
Born: 20 December 1929, New Smyrna Beach, Florida.
Bleak, David B.— Sergeant, U.S. Army, Medical
Company 223d Infantry Regiment, 40th Infantry Di-
vision. Vicinity of Minari-gol, Korea, 14 June 1952.
Born: 27 February 1932, Idaho Falls, Idaho.
*Brittin, Nelson V.— Sergeant First Class, U.S.
Army, Company I, 19th Infantry Regiment. Vicinity of
Yonggong-ni, Korea, 7 March 1951. Born Audubon,
New Jersey, Date unknown.
*Brown, Melvin L.—Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company D, 8th Engineer Combat Battalion. Near
Kasan, Korea, 4 September 1950. Bonr Mahaffey,
Pennsylvania, Date unknown.
Burke, Lloyd L.— First Lieutenant, U.S. Army,
Company G, 5th Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion. Near Chong-dong, Korea, 28 October 1951.
Born: 29 September 1924, Tichnor, Arkansas.
*Burris, Tony K.— Sergeant First Class, U.S. Army,
Company L, 38th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Di-
vision. Vicinity of Mundung-ni, Korea 8 and 9 Octo-
ber 1951. Born Blanchard, Oklahoma Date unknown.
Cafferata, Hector A., Jr.— Private, U.S. Marine
Corps Reserve, Company F, 2d Battalion, 7th Marines,
1st Marine Division. Korea, 28 November 1950. Born:
4 November 1929, New York, N.Y.
*Champagne, David B.— Corporal, U.S. Marine
Corps, Company A 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Ma-
rine Division. Korea, 28 May 1952. November 1932,
Waterville, Maryland.
Charette, William R.— Hospital Corpsman Third
Class, U.S. Navy Medical Corpsman, attached to Ma-
rine rifle company. Korea, 27 March 1953. Born Lud-
ington, Michigan, Date unknown.
*Charlton, Cornelius H.— Sergeant, U.S. Army,
Company C, 24th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry
 989
Division. Near Chipo-ri, Korea, 2 June 1951. Born:
24 July 1929, East Gulf, West Virginia.
*Christianson, Stanley R.—Private First Class, U.S.
Marine Corps, Company E, 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Seoul, Korea, 29 September 1950.
Born: 24 January 1925, Mindoro, Wisconsin.
*Collier, Gilbert G.— Sergeant (then Corporal),
U.S. Army, Company F, 223d Infantry Regiment, 40th
Infantry Division. Near Tutayon, Korea, 19–20 July
1953. Born: 30 December 1930, Hunter, Arkansas.
*Collier, John W.— Corporal, U.S. Army, Com-
pany C, 27th Infantry Regiment. Near Chindong-ni,
Korea, 19 September 1950. Born: 3 April 1929, Wor-
thington, Kentucky.
Commiskey, Henry A., Sr.—First Lieutenant (then
2d Lt.), U.S. Marine Corps, Company C, 1st Battal-
ion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Division. Near Yongdung-
p’o, Korea, 20 September 1950. Born 10 January 1927,
Hattiesburg, Mississippi.
*Coursen, Samuel S.—First Lieutenant, U.S. Army,
Company C, 5th Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion. Near Kaesong, Korea, 12 October 1950. Born: 4
August 1926 Madison, New Jersey.
*Craig, Gordon M.— Corporal, U.S. Army, Recon-
naissance Company, 1st Cavalry Division. Near Kasan,
Korea 10 September 1950. Born: 1 August 1929,
Brockton, Mass.
Crump, Jerry K.— Corporal, U.S. Army, Company
L, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Division. Near
Chorwon, Korea, 6 and 7 September 1951. Born: 18
February 1933, Charlotte, North Carolina.
*Davenport, Jack A.— Corporal, U.S. Marine
Corps, Company G, 3d Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Near Songnae-Dong, Korea, 21 Sep-
tember 1951. Born: 7 September 1931, Kansas City,
Missouri.
*Davis, George Andrew, Jr.— Major, U.S. Air
Force, CO, 334th Fighter Squadron, 4th Fighter
Group, 5th Air Force. Near Sinuiju, Korea. Born: 1
December 1920, Dublin, Texas.
Davis, Raymond G.— Lieutenant Colonel, U.S.
Marine Corps, commanding officer, 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, 1st Marine Division. Vicinity Hagaru-ri,
Korea, 1 through 4 December 1950. Born: 13 Janu-
ary 1915, Fitzgerald, Georgia.
Dean, William F.— Major General, U.S. Army,
commanding general, 24th Infantry Division. Taejon,
Korea, 20 and 21 July 1950. Born: 1 August 1899,
Carlyle, Illinois.
*Desiderio, Reginald B.— Captain, U.S. Army,
commanding officer, Company E, 27th Infantry Reg-
iment, 25th Infantry Division. Near Ipsok, Korea, 27
November 1950. Born: 12 September 1918, Clairton,
Pennsylvania.
*Dewert, Richard David— Hospital Corpsman,
U.S. Navy attached to a 1st Marine Division Marine in-
fantry company. Korea, 5 April 1951. Born Taunton,
Massachusetts, Date unknown.
Dewey, Duane E.—Corporal, U.S. Marine Corps Re-
serve, Company E, 2d Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st Ma-
Medal of Honor Recipients
rine Division. Near Panmunjon, Korea, 16 April 1952.
Born: 16 November 1931, Grand Rapids, Michigan.
Dodd, Carl H.— First Lieutenant (then 2d Lt.),
U.S. Army, Company E, 5th Infantry Regiment, 24th
Infantry Division. Near Subuk, Korea, 30 and 31 Jan-
uary 1951. Born: 21 April 1925, Evarts, Kentucky.
*Duke, Ray E.— Sergeant First Class, U.S. Army,
Company C, 21st Infantry Regiment, 24th Infantry
Division. Near Mugok, Korea, 26 April 1951. Born: 9
May 1923, Whitwell, Tennessee.
*Edwards, Junior D.— Sergeant First Class, U.S.
Army, Company E, 23d Infantry Regiment, 2d In-
fantry Division. Near Changbong-ni, Korea, 2 January
1951. Born: 7 October 1926, Indianola, Iowa.
*Essebagger, John, Jr.— Corporal, U.S. Army,
Company A, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Di-
vision. Near Popsudong, Korea, 25 April 1951. Born:
29 October 1928, Holland, Michigan.
*Faith, Don C., Jr.— Lieutenant Colonel, U.S.
Army, commanding officer, 1st Battalion, 32d Infantry
Regiment, 7th Infantry Division. Vicinity Hagaru-ri,
Northern Korea, 27 November to 1 December 1950.
Born: 26 August 1918, Washington, Indiana.
*Garcia, Fernando Luis— Private First Class,
USMC, Company I, 3d Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Korea, 5 September 1952. Born: 14
October 1929, Utuado, Puerto Rico.
*George, Charles— Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company C, 179th Infantry Regiment, 45th Infantry
Division. Near Songnae-dong, Korea, 30 November
1952. Born: 23 August 1932, Cherokee, North Car-
olina.
*Gilliland, Charles L.— Corporal (then Pfc.), U.S.
Army, Company I, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry
Division. Near Tongmang-ni, Korea, 25 April 1951.
Born: 24 May 1933, Mountain Home, Arkansas.
*Gomez, Edward— Private First Class, USMC, Re-
serve, Company E, 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Ma-
rine Division. Korea, Hill 749, 14 September 1951.
Born: 10 August 1932, Omaha, Nebraska.
*Goodblood, Clair— Corporal, U.S. Army, Com-
pany D, 7th Infantry Regiment. Near Popsu-dong,
Korea, 24 and 25 April 1951. Born: 18 September
1929, Fort Kent, Maine.
*Guillen, Ambrosio—Staff Sergeant, USMC, Com-
pany F, 2d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Divi-
sion. Near Songuch-on, Korea, 25 July 1953. Born: 7
December 1929, La Junta, Colorado.
*Hammond, Francis C.— Hospital Corpsman,
USN, attached as a medical corpsman to 1st Marine
Division. Korea, 26–27 March 1953. Born Alexandria,
Virginia, Date Unknown.
*Hammond, Lester, Jr.— Corporal, U.S. Army,
Company A, 187th Airborne Regimental Combat
Team. Near Kumwha, Korea, 14 August 1952. Born:
25 March 1931, Wayland, Missouri.
*Handrich, Melvin O.— Master Sergeant, U.S.
Army, Company C, 5th Infantry Regiment. Near
Sobuk San Mountain, Korea, 25 and 26 August 1950.
Born: 26 January 1919, Manawa, Wisconsin.
Appendix 5
*Hanson, Jack G.— Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company F, 31st Infantry Regiment. Near Pachi-dong,
Korea, 7 June 1951. Born: 18 September 1930, Es-
captawpa, Mississippi.
*Hartell, Lee R.—First Lieutenant, U.S. Army, Bat-
tery A, 15th Field Artillery Battalion, 2d Infantry Di-
vision. Near Kobangsan-ni, Korea, 27 August 1951.
Born Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Date unknown.
Harvey, Raymond—Captain, U.S. Army, Company
C, 17th Infantry Regiment. Place and date: Vicinity
of Taemi-Dong, Korea, 9 March 1951. Born: 1 March
1920 Ford City, Pennsylvania.
*Henry, Frederick F.—First Lieutenant, U.S. Army,
Company F, 38th Infantry Regiment. Vicinity of Am-
Dong, Korea, 1 September 1950. Born Vian, Okla-
homa.
Hernandez, Rodolfo P.— Corporal, U.S. Army,
Company G, 187th Airborne Regimental Combat
Team. Near Wontong-ni, Korea, 31 May 1951. Born:
14 April 1931, Colton, California.
Hudner, Thomas Jerome, Jr.— Lieutenant ( J.G.)
U.S. Navy, pilot (Fighter Squadron 32), attached to
USS Leyte. Chosin Reservoir, Korea, 4 December 1950.
Born: 31 August 1924, Fall River, Massachusetts.
Ingman, Einar H., Jr.— Sergeant (then Corporal),
U.S. Army, Company E, 17th Infantry Regiment, 7th
Infantry Division. Near Maltari, Korea, 26 February
1951. Born: 6 October 1929, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
*Jecelin, William R.— Sergeant, U.S. Army, Com-
pany C, 35th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Saga, Korea, 19 September 1950. Born Bal-
timore, Maryland, Date unknown.
*Johnson, James E.— Sergeant, USMC, Company
J, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Division.
Yudam-ni, Korea, 2 December 1950 (Declared miss-
ing in action on 2 December 1950. Later on 2 Novem-
ber, 1953, declared killed in action) Born: 1 January
1926, Pocatello, Idaho.
*Jordan, Mack A.— Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company K 21st Infantry Regiment, 24th Infantry Di-
vision. Near Kumsong, Korea, 15 November 1951.
Born: 8 December 1928, Collins, Mississippi.
*Kanell, Billie G.— Private, U.S. Army, Company
I, 35th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry Division.
Near Pyongyang, Korea, 7 September 1951. Born: 26
June 1931, Poplar Bluff, Missouri.
*Kaufman, Loren R.— Sergeant First Class, U.S.
Army, Company G, 9th Infantry Regiment. Near
Yongsan, Korea, 4 and 5 September 1950. ice at: The
Dalles, Oreg. Born: 27 July 1923. Entered service at
the Dalles, Oregon.
*Kelly, John D.—Private First Class, USMC, Com-
pany C, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Divi-
sion. Korea, 28 May 1952. Born: 8 July 1928, Youngs-
town, Ohio.
*Kelso, Jack William— Private First Class, USMC,
Company I, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Di-
vision. Korea, 2 October 1952. Born: 23 January 1934,
Madera, California.
Kennemore, Robert S.— Staff Sergeant, USMC,
990
Company E, 2d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine
Division. North of Yudam-ni, Korea, 27 and 28 No-
vember 1950. Born: 21 June 1920.
*Kilmer, John E.—Hospital Corpsman, U.S. Navy,
attached a Marine rifle company in the 1st Marine Di-
vision. Korea, 13 August 1952. Born: 15 August 1930,
Highland Park, Illinois.
*Knight, Noah O.— Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company F, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Kowang-San, Korea, 23 and 24 November
1951. Born: 27 October 1929, Chesterfield County,
South Carolina.
*Koelsch, John Kelvin— Lieutenant ( J.G.), USN.
Navy helicopter rescue unit. North Korea, 3 July 1951.
Born London, England.
Kouma, Ernest R.— Master Sergeant (then Sfc.)
U.S. Army, Company A, 72d Tank Battalion. Vicinity
of Agok, Korea, 31 August and 1 September 1950.
Born: 23 November 1919, Dwight, Nebraska.
*Krzyzowski, Edward C.— Captain, U.S. Army,
Company B, 9th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Tondul, Korea, from 31 August to 3 Septem-
ber 1951. Born: 16 January 1914, Chicago, Illinois.
*Kyle, Darwin K.—Second Lieutenant, U.S. Army,
Company K, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Di-
vision. Near Kamil-ni, Korea, 16 February 1951. Born:
1 June 1918, Jenkins, Kentucky.
Lee, Hubert L.— Master Sergeant, U.S. Army,
Company I, 23d Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Ip-ori, Korea, 1 February 1951. Born: 2
February 1915, Arburg, Missouri.
*Libby, George D.— Sergeant, U.S. Army, Com-
pany C, 3d Engineer Combat Battalion, 24th Infantry
Division. Near Taejon, Korea, 20 July 1950. Birth:
Bridgton, Maine, Date unknown.
*Littleton, Herbert A.— Private First Class, U.S.
Marine Corps Reserve, Company C, 1st Battalion, 7th
Marines, 1st Marine Division. Chungchon, Korea, 22
April 1951. Born: 1 July 1930, Mena, Arkansas.
*Long, Charles R.— Sergeant, U.S. Army, Com-
pany M, 38th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Hoengsong, Korea, 12 February 1951. Born:
10 December 1923, Kansas City, Missouri.
*Lopez, Baldomero— First Lieutenant, U.S. Ma-
rine Corps, Company A, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines,
1st Marine Division. Inchon (invasion), Korea, 15 Sep-
tember 1950. Born: 23 August 1925, Tampa, Florida.
*Loring, Charles J., Jr.— Major, USAF, 80th
Fighter-Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter-Bomber Wing.
Near Sniper Ridge, North Korea, 22 November 1952.
Born: 2 October 1918, Portland, Maine.
*Lyell, William F.— Corporal, U.S. Army, Com-
pany F, 17th Infantry Regiment, 7th Infantry Division.
Near Chup’a-ri, Korea, 31 August 1951. Born Hickman
County, Tennessee, Date unknown.
*Martinez, Benito— Corporal, U.S. Army, Com-
pany A, 27th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry Divi-
sion. Near Satae-ri Korea, 6 September 1952. Born:
21 March 1931, Fort Hancock, Texas.
*Matthews, Daniel P.—Sergeant, USMC, Company
 991
F, 2d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Division.
Vegas Hill, Korea, 28 March 1953. Born: 31 Decem-
ber 1931, Van Nuys, California.
*Mausert, Frederick W., III— Sergeant, USMC,
Company B, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine
Division. Songnap-yong, Korea, 12 September 1951.
Born: 2 May 1930, Cambridge, New York.
*McGovern, Robert M.— First Lieutenant, USA,
Company A, 5th Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion. Near Kamyangjan-ni, Korea, 30 January 1951.
Born Washington, D.C.
McLaughlin, Alford L.— Private First Class, U.S.
Marine Corps Company L, 3d Battalion, 5th Marines,
1st Marine Division. Korea, 4 and 5 September 1952.
Born: 18 March 1928, Leeds, Alabama.
*Mendonca, Leroy A.— Sergeant, USA, Company
B, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Division. Near
Chich-on, Korea, 4 July 1951. Born Honolulu, T.
Hawaii.
Millett, Lewis L.— Captain, U.S. Army, Company
E, 27th Infantry Regiment. Near Soam-Ni, Korea, 7
February 1951. Born: 15 December 1920, Mechanic
Falls, Maine.
*Mitchell, Frank N.—First Lieutenant, U.S. Marine
Corps, Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Near Hansan-ni, Korea, 26 Novem-
ber 1950.
Miyamura, Hiroshi H.— Corporal, USA, Com-
pany H, 7th Infantry Regiment, 3rd Infantry Division.
Near Taejon-ni, Korea, 24 and 25 April 1951. Born
Gallup, New Mexico, Date unknown.
Mize, Ola L.— Master Sergeant (then Sgt.), USA,
Company K, 15th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Di-
vision. Near Surang-ni, Korea, 10 to 11 June 1953.
Born: 28 August 1931, Marshall County, Alabama.
*Monegan, Walter C., Jr.— Private First Class,
USMC, Company F, 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Near Sosa-ri, Korea, 17 and 20 Sep-
tember 1950. Born: 25 December 1930, Melrose,
Massachusetts.
*Moreland, Whitt L.— Private First Class, USMC
(Reserve), Company C, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Kwagch’i-Dong, Korea, 29 May
1951. Born: 7 March 1930, Waco, Texas.
*Moyer, Donald R.— Sergeant First Class, U.S.
Army, Company E, 35th Infantry Regiment. Place and
date: Near Seoul, Korea, 20 May 1951. Born: 15 April
1930, Pontiac, Mich.
Murphy, Raymond G.—Second Lieutenant, USMC
(Reserve), Company A, 1st Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st
Marine Division. Korea, 3 February 1953. January
1930, Pueblo, Colo. Citation.
Myers, Reginald R.— Major, U.S. Marine Corps,
3d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Division, Near
Hagaru-ri, Korea, 29 November 1950. Born: 26 No-
vember 1919, Boise, Idaho.
*Obregon, Eugene Arnold—Private First Class, U.S.
Marine Corps, Company G, 3d Battalion, 5th Marines,
1st Marine Division Seoul, Korea, 26 September 1950.
Born: 12 November 1930, Los Angeles, California.
Medal of Honor Recipients
O’Brien, George H., Jr.— Second Lieutenant, U.S.
Marine Corps Reserve, Company H, 3d Battalion, 7th
Marines, 1st Marine Division Korea, 27 October,
1952. Born: 10 September 1926, Fort Worth, Texas.
*Ouellette, Joseph R.— Private First Class, U.S.
Army, Company H, 9th Infantry Regiment, 2d In-
fantry Division. Near Yongsan, Korea, from 31 August
to 3 September 1950. Born Lowell, Massachusetts,
Date unknown.
*Page, John U. D.—Lieutenant Colonel, U.S. Army,
X Corps Artillery, while attached to the 52d Transporta-
tion Truck Battalion. Near Chosin Reservoir, Korea, 29
November to 10 December 1950. Born: 8 February
1904, Malahi Island, Luzon, Philippine Islands.
*Pendleton, Charles F.—Corporal. USA, Company
D, 15th Infantry Regiment, 3d Infantry Division. Near
Choo Gung-Dong, Korea, 16 and 17 July 1953. Born:
26 September 1931, Camden, Tennessee.
*Phillips, Lee H.— Corporal, USMC, Company E,
2d Battalion, 7 Marines, 1st Marine Division (Rein.).
Korea, 4 November 1950. Born: 3 February 1930,
Stockbridge, Georgia.
*Pililaau, Herbert K.— Private First Class, U.S.
Army, Company C, 23d Infantry Regiment, 2nd In-
fantry Division. Near Pia-ri, Korea, 17 September 1951.
Born: 10 October 1928, Waianae, Oahu, T. Hawaii.
Pittman, John A.— Sergeant, USA, Company C,
23d Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Division. Place
and date: Near Kujangdong, Korea, 26 November
1950. Born: 15 October 1928, Carrolton, Mississippi.
*Pomeroy, Ralph E.— Private First Class, USA,
Company E, 31st Infantry Regiment, 7th Infantry Di-
vision. Place and date: Near Kumhwa, Korea, 15 Oc-
tober 1952. Born: 26 March 1930, Quinwood, West
Virginia.
*Porter, Donn F.— Sergeant, USA, Company G,
14th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry Division. Near
Mundung-ni Korea, 7 September 1952. March 1931,
Sewickley, Pennsylvania.
*Poynter, James I.— Sergeant, USMC, Reserve,
Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine
Division. Near Sudong, Korea, 4 November 1950.
Born: 1 December 1916, Bloomington, Illinois.
*Ramer, George H.— Second Lieutenant, USMC,
Reserve, Company I, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st
Marine Division (Rein.). Korea, 12 September 1951.
Lewisburg, Pennsylvania.
*Red Cloud, Mitchell, Jr.— Corporal, U S. Army,
Company E, 19th Infantry Regiment, 24th Infantry
Division. Near Chonghyon, Korea, 5 November 1950.
Born: 2 July 1924, Hatfield, Wisconsin.
*Reem, Robert Dale— Second Lieutenant, U.S.
Marine Corps, Company H, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines,
1st Marine Division. Near Chinhung-ni, Korea, 6 No-
vember 1950. Born: 20 October 1925, Lancaster,
Pennsylvania.
Rodriguez, Joseph C.— Sergeant (then Pfc.), USA,
Company F, 17th Infantry Regiment, 7th Infantry Di-
vision. Near Munye-ri, Korea, 21 May 1951. Born: 14
November 1928, San Bernardino, California.
Appendix 5
Rosser, Ronald E.— Corporal, U.S. Army, Heavy
Mortar Company, 38th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry
Division. Vicinity of Ponggilli, Korea, 12 January 1952.
Born: 24 October 1929, Columbus, Ohio.
Rubin, Tibor— Corporal USA, Company I, 8th
Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Division or. Pusan
Perimeter, Korea, period from July 23, 1950, to April
20, 1953. Birthplace unavailable. NOTE: Rubin’s ac-
tions spanned over a large period during the conflict.
His story is not noted at a particular place in the book.
Rubin, a Hungarian participated in the capture of 100
enemy troops. In addition, while his unit was with-
drawing, he defended a hill by himself. Later after being
severely wounded, on 30 October, 1950, he was cap-
tured. While in the POW camp, he turned down offers
of the Chinese to return him to Hungary and while
there, at great risk to his life, he repeatedly broke into
enemy storage huts and raided the gardens to get food
for the troops in the camp which were starving.
*Schoonover, Dan D.— Corporal, USA, Company
A, 13th Engineer Combat Battalion, 7th Infantry Di-
vision. Near Sokkogae, Korea, 8 to 10 July 1953. Born:
8 October 1933, Boise, Idaho.
Schowalter, Edward R., Jr.— First Lieutenant,
USA, Company A, 31st Infantry Regiment, 7th In-
fantry Division. Near Kumhwa, Korea, 14 October
1952. Birthplace unavailable.
*Sebille, Louis J.— Major, USAF, 67th Fighter-
Bomber Squadron, 18th Fighter-Bomber Group, 5th
Air Force. Near Hanchang, Korea, 5 August 1950.
Born: 21 November 1915, Harbor Beach. Michigan.
*Shea, Richard T., Jr.— First Lieutenant, U.S.
Army, Company A 17th Infantry Regiment, 7th In-
fantry Division. Near Sokkogae, Korea, 6 to 8 July
1953. Born: 3 January 1927, Portsmouth, Virginia.
*Shuck, William E., Jr.— Staff Sergeant, U.S. Ma-
rine Corps, Company G, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines,
1st Marine Division. Korea, 3 July 1952. Born. 16 Au-
gust 1926, Cumberland, Maryland.
Simanek, Robert E.— Private First Class, USMC,
Company F, 2d Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st Marine Di-
vision. Korea, 17 August 1952. Detroit, Michigan.
*Sitman, William S.— Sergeant First Class, USA,
Company M, 23d Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Di-
vision. Near Chipyong-ni, Korea, 14 February 1951.
Born Bellwood, Pennsylvania Date unknown.
Sitter, Carl L.— Captain, USMC, Company G, 3d
Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Division (Rein.).
Hagaru-ri, Korea, 29 and 30 November 1950. Born: 2
December 1921, Syracuse, Missouri.
*Skinner, Sherrod E., Jr.— Second Lieutenant,
USMC, Battery F, 2d Battalion, 11th Marines, 1st Ma-
rine Division (Rein.). Korea, 26 October 1952. Born:
29 October 1929, Hartford, Connecticut.
*Smith, David M.—Private First Class, USA, Com-
pany E, 9th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Division.
Place and date: Near Yongsan, Korea, 1 September 1950.
Born: 10 November 1926, Livingston, Kentucky.
*Speicher, Clifton T.—Corporal, U.S. Army, Com-
pany F, 223d Infantry Regiment, 40th Infantry Divi-
992
sion. Near Minarigol, Korea, 14 June 1952. Born: 25
March 1931, Gray, Pennsylvania.
Stone, James L.—First Lieutenant, USA. Company
E, 8th Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Division. Near
Sokkogae, Korea, 21 and 22 November 1951. Born:
27 December 1922, Pine Bluff, Arkansas.
*Story, Luther H.—Private First Class, USA, Com-
pany A, 9th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Division.
Near Agok, Korea, 1 September 1950. Born: 20 July
1931, Buena Vista, Georgia.
*Sudut, Jerome A.— Second Lieutenant, USA,
Company B, 27th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry
Division. Near Kumhwa, Korea, 12 September 1951.
Born Wausau, Wisconsin, Date unavailable.
*Thompson, William— Private First Class, USA,
24th Company M, 24th Infantry Regiment, 25th In-
fantry Division. Near Haman, Korea, 6 August 1950.
Born New York, N.Y., Date unknown.
*Turner, Charles W.— Sergeant First Class, USA,
2d Reconnaissance Company, 2d Infantry Division.
Near Yongsan, Korea, 1 September 1950. Birth:
Boston, Massachusetts. Date unknown.
Van Winkle, Archie— Staff Sergeant, USMC, Re-
serve, Company B, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Ma-
rine Division. Vicinity of Sudong, Korea, 2 Novem-
ber 1950. Born: 17 March 1925, Juneau, Alaska.
*Vittori, Joseph— Corporal, USMC, Reserve,
Company F, 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Di-
vision. Hill 749, Korea, 15 and 16 September 1951.
Born: 1 August 1929, Beverly, Massachusetts.
*Walmsley, John S., Jr.—Captain, USAF, 8th Bom-
bardment Squadron, 3d Bomb Group. Near Yangdok,
Korea, 14 September 1951. Born. 7 January 1920, Bal-
timore, Maryland.
*Watkins, Lewis G.—Staff Sergeant, USMC, Com-
pany I, 3d Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Divi-
sion (Rein.). Korea, 7 October 1952. Born. 6 June
1925, Seneca, South Carolina.
*Watkins, Travis E.—Master Sergeant, USA, Com-
pany H, 9th Infantry Regiment, 2d Infantry Division
Place and date: Near Yongsan, Korea, 31 August
through 3 September 1950. Born Waldo, Arkansas.
Date unknown.
West, Ernest E.— Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company L, 14th Infantry Regiment, 25th Infantry
Division. Near Sataeri, Korea, 12 October 1952. Born:
2 September 1931, Russell, Kentucky.
Wilson, Benjamin F.— First Lieutenant (then M/
Sgt.), USA, Company I, 31st Infantry Regiment, 7th
Infantry Division. Near Hwach’on-Myon, Korea, 5
June 1951. Born Vashon, Washington. Date unknown.
Wilson, Harold E.— Technical Sergeant, U.S. Ma-
rine Corps Reserve, Company G, 3d Battalion, 1st
Marines, 1st Marine Division. Korea, 23–24 April
1951. Born: S December 1921, Birmingham, Alabama.
*Wilson, Richard G.— Private First Class, USA,
Co. 1, Medical Company, 187th Airborne Infantry
Regiment. Opari, Korea, 21 October 1950. Born: 19
August 1931, Marion, Illinois.
*Windrich, William G.— Staff Sergeant, USMC,
 993
Company I, 3d Battalion, 5th Marines, 1st Marine Di-
vision (Rein.). Vicinity of Yudam-ni, Korea, 1 Decem-
ber 1950. Born: 14 May 1921, Chicago, Illinois.
*Womack, Bryant E.— Private First Class, U.S.
Army, Medical Company, 14th Infantry Regiment,
25th Infantry Division. Near Sokso-ri, Korea, 12
Medal of Honor Recipients
March 1952. Born Mill Springs, North Carolina. Date
unknown.
*Young, Robert H.—Private First Class, U.S. Army,
Company E, 8th Cavalry Regiment, 1st Cavalry Divi-
sion. North of Kaesong, Korea, 9 October 1950. Born:
4 March 1929, Oroville. California.
 Appendix 6.
Major U.S. Air Force Units
Major Air Forces Participating
in the Korean War
Far East Air Force (Overall Command)
Fifth Air Force (Main Combat Unit)
Thirteenth Air Force
Twentieth Air Force
Commands, Wings and Groups
Far East Bomber Command (Provisional)
Far East Combat Cargo Command (Provisional)
3rd Bombardment Wing (Light)
4th Fighter-Interceptor Wing
8th Fighter-Bomber Wing
17th Bombardment Wing
18th Fighter-Bomber Wing
19th Bombardment Wing (Medium)
27th Fighter Escort Wing
35th Fighter-Interceptor Wing
49th Fighter-Bomber Wing
51st Fighter-Interceptor Wing
58th Fighter-Bomber Wing
67th Tactical Reconnaissance Wing
98th Bombardment Wing (Medium)
136th Fighter-Bomber Wing
307th Bombardment Wing (Medium)
374th Troop Carrier Wing (Heavy)
403rd Troop Carrier Wing (Medium)
437th Troop Carrier Wing (Medium)
452d Bombardment Wing (Light)
474th Fighter-Bomber Wing
483rd Troop Carrier Wing (Medium)
6002nd Tactical Support Wing
6131st Tactical Support Wing
6133rd Tactical Support Wing
6149th Tactical Support Wing
19th Bombardment Group (Medium)
22nd Bombardment Group (Medium)
92nd Bombardment Group (Medium)
307th Bombardment Group (Medium)
1st Troop Carrier Group (Medium — Provisional)
61st Troop Carrier Group (Medium)
994
314th Troop Carrier Group (Medium)
315th Troop Carrier Group (Medium)
U.S. Air Force Units in the Korean War
AACS Units
1249th AACS Squadron; 1818th AACS Group;
1935th AACS Squadron; 1954th AACS Squadron;
1973rd AACS Squadron; 1993rd AACS Squadron; 1st
AACS Squadron — Mobile
Air Control Units — Tactical
116th Tactical Control Squadron; 502nd Tactical Con-
trol Group; 605th Tactical Control Squadron; 6132nd
Tactical Control Squadron; 6143rd Tactical Control
Squadron; 6147th Tactical Control Squadron; 6148th
Tactical Control Squadron; 6149th Tactical Control
Squadron; 6150th Tactical Control Squadron; 6164th
Tactical Control Squadron
Air Control Units
511th Air Control and Warning Group; 527th Air
Control and Warning Squadron; 528th Air Control
and Warning Squadron; 529th Air Control and Warn-
ing Group; 606th Air Control and Warning Squadron;
607th Air Control and Warning Squadron; 608th Air
Control and Warning Squadron; 848th Air Control
and Warning Squadron
Air Force Advisory Group
6146th Air Force Advisory Group
Air Police
3rd Air Police Squadron; 49th Air Police Squadron;
374th Air Police Squadron; 452nd Air Police Squadron;
1503rd Air Police Squadron; 6149th Air Police Squad-
ron
Air Rescue Units
3rd Air Rescue Group; 3rd Air Rescue Squadron; 39th
 995
Air Rescue Squadron; Det. F, 2157th Air Rescue
Squadron (Note: Redesignated 36th Air Rescue Squad-
ron)
Ammunition Units
543rd Ammunition Depot Squadron; 547th Ammuni-
tion Supply Squadron; 567th Ammo Supply Squadron
Bomber Units
2nd Bomb Squadron; 3rd Bomb Group 3rd Bomb
Wing 8th Bomb Squadron; 30th Bomb Squadron;
130th Bomb Squadron; 13th Bomb Squadron; 17th
Bomb Wing (Group); 19th Bomb Group; 19th Bomb
Squadron; 22nd Bomb Squadron; 22nd Bomb Wing;
28th Bomb Squadron; 33rd Bomb Squadron; 34th
Bomb Squadron; 37th Bomb Squadron; 84th Bomb
Squadron; 85th Bomb Squadron; 90th Bomb Squad-
ron; 92nd Bomb Squadron; 93rd Bomb Squadron;
95th Bomb Squadron; 97th Bomb Group; 98th Bomb
Squadron; 98th Bomb Wing; 301st Bomb Wing;
307th Bomb Squadron; 307th Bomb Wing; 325th
Bomb Squadron; 326th Bomb Squadron; 327th Bomb
Squadron; 343rd Bomb Squadron; 344th Bomb
Squadron; 345th Bomb Squadron; 352nd Bomb
Wing; 355th Bomb Squadron; 370th Bomb Squadron;
371st Bomb Squadron; 372nd Bomb Squadron; 432nd
Bomb Wing; 452nd Bomb Squadron; 452nd Bomb
Wing; 509th Bomb Wing; 728th Bomb Squadron (L);
729th Bomb Squadron (L); 730th Bomb Squadron (L)
731st Bomb Squadron (L); 2728th Bomb Squadron
Combat Camera Units
AAVS (Combat Camera )
Combat Cargo Units
1st Combat Cargo Group
Communications Units
3rd Communications Squadron; 2nd Radio Relay
Squadron; 5th Communications Group (934th Signal
Bn); 7th Communications Group—5th Air Force; 18th
Communications Squadron; 67th Communications
Squadron (K-14); 452nd Communications Squadron
Ferry Units
1737th Ferry Squadron
Fighter Units
187th Fighter Squadron; 532nd Fighter Squadron
Fighter Units, All Weather
4th All Weather Fighter Squadron; 68th All Weather
Fighter Squadron; 339th All Weather Fighter Squadron
Fighter Bomber Units
2nd South African Air Force (18FBW); 7th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 8th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 8th
Fighter Bomber Wing; 9th Fighter Bomber Squadron;
12th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 15th Fighter Bomber
Major U.S. Air Force Units
Group; 18th Fighter Bomber Wing; 35th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 36th Fighter Bomber Squadron;
40th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 44th Fighter Bomber
Squadron; 48th Fighter Bomber Wing; 49th Fighter
Bomber Group; 49th Fighter Bomber Wing; 58th
Fighter Bomber Wing; 67th Fighter Bomber Squadron;
68th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 69th Fighter Bomber
Squadron; 80th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 111th
Fighter Bomber Squadron; 116th Fighter Bomber
Wing; 136th Fighter Bomber Wing; 154th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 182nd Fighter Bomber Squadron;
310th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 311th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 428th Fighter Bomber Squadron;
429th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 430th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 474th Fighter Bomber Group;
525th Fighter Bomber Squadron; 526th Fighter
Bomber Squadron; 750th Fighter Bomber Squadron
Fighter Escort Units
27th Fighter Escort Wing; 522nd Fighter Escort
Squadron; 523rd Fighter Escort Squadron; 524th
Fighter Escort Squadron
Fighter Interceptor Units
1st Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 4th Fighter Inter-
ceptor Wing; 16th Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 25th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 35th Fighter Interceptor
Wing; 39th Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 40th Fighter
Interceptor Squadron; 41st Fighter Interceptor Squad-
ron; 51st Fighter Interceptor Wing; 55th Fighter Inter-
ceptor Group; 57th Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 68th
Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 319th Fighter Intercep-
tor Squadron; 334th Fighter Interceptor Squadron;
335th Fighter Interceptor Squadron; 336th Fighter In-
terceptor Squadron
Headquarters Units
13th Air Base Group; 42nd Air Div Eighth Air Force;
49th Air Base Group; 6002nd Air Base Group; 6146th
Air Base Unit; 6152nd Air Base Squadron; 6153rd Air
Base Squadron; 6162nd Air Base Wing; 6167th Air
Base Group HQ Fifth Air Force
Intelligence Units
6004th Air Intel Service Squadron Baker Flight; 581st
Air Resupply and Communications Squadron (K-16)
Liaison Units
10th Liaison Squadron
Maintenance Units
3rd Maintenance Squadron; 18th Fighter Bomber
Maintenance Squadron
Medical Units
67th Medical Group; 1600th Medical Group — Air
Evacuation; 6530th Medical Group
Postal Units
1st Air Postal Squadron
Appendix 6
Radar Bomb Scoring Units
3903rd Radar Bomb Scoring Group
Reconnaissance Units
2nd Photo Recon Squadron; 8th Tactical Recon
Squadron (Photo Jet); 11th Tactical Recon Squadron;
12th Tactical Recon Squadron; 15th Tactical Recon
Squadron; 18th Tactical Recon Squadron; 25th Tacti-
cal Recon Squadron; 31st Strategic Recon Squadron;
45th Tactical Recon Squadron; 51st Tactical Recon
Squadron; 56th Strategic Recon Squadron; 67th Tac-
tical Recon Wing; 91st Strategic Recon Squadron;
162nd Tactical Recon Squadron; 343rd Strategic Recon
Squadron; 363rd Recon Technical Squadron; 543rd
Tactical Support Group; 6166th Weather Recon
Squadron
Strategic Air Command (SAC) Hq.—
Security Units
Air Force Security Service (USAFSS)
Shoran Units
1st SHORAN Beacon Unit
Signal Units
15th Radio Squadron Mobile — USAFSS 16th Com-
munications Squadron
Supply Units
3rd Supply Squadron; 4th Far East Air Material Squad-
ron; 4th Supply Squadron; 581st Air Resupply &
Communications Squadron (Cover for Intelligence
Operations)
Support Units
3rd Motor Vehicle Squadron; 75th Air Depot Wing —
FEAF; 2349th Personnel Processing Group; 811th
Food Service Squadron; 1503rd Field Maintenance
Squadron; 6127 Air Terminal Group (315 Air Div);
6131st Tactical Support Wing; 6161 Maintenance
Squadron — Yokota; 6400th Field Maintenance Unit
Transport Units
49th Air Transport Squadron; 1266th Air Transport
Squadron; 1273rd Air Transport Squadron; 1503rd Air
Transport Wing
996
Troop Carrier Units
4th Troop Carrier Squadron; 6th Troop Carrier
Squadron; 7th Troop Carrier Squadron; 21st Troop Car-
rier Squadron; 22nd Troop Carrier Squadron; 34th
Troop Carrier Squadron; 36th Troop Carrier Squadron;
37th Troop Carrier Squadron; 50th Troop Carrier
Squadron; 61st Troop Carrier Squadron; 62nd Troop
Carrier Squadron; 63rd Troop Carrier Squadron; 65th
Troop Carrier Squadron; 83rd Troop Carrier Squadron;
84th Troop Carrier Squadron; 85th Troop Carrier
Squadron; 86th Troop Carrier Squadron; 315th Air Di-
vision; 374th Troop Carrier Wing; 403rd Troop Car-
rier Group; 437th Troop Carrier Group (later 315th
TCG); 446 Troop Carrier Wing; 483rd Troop Carrier
Wing; 815th Troop Carrier Squadron; 817th Troop
Carrier Squadron; 6461st Troop Carrier Squadron
Weather Units
6th Weather Squadron—Mobile; 20th Weather Squad-
ron; 30th Weather Squadron; 2015th Weather Detach-
ment; 2143rd Air Weather Wing (Tokyo)
Combat Casualties for
the United States Air Force
Killed in Action 1,176
Wounded in Action 386
Missing in Action
Aircraft Lost in Combat 1,144
Air National Guard Units to Deploy to Korea
116th Fighter Bomber Wing, Georgia — July 1951
136th Fighter Bomber Wing, Texas — May 1951
111th Fighter Bomber Squadron, Texas — May 1951
L54th Fighter Bomber Squadron, Arkansas — May
1951
158th Fighter Bomber Squadron, Georgia — July 1951
L59th Fighter Bomber Squadron, Florida — July 195l
182nd Fighter Bomber Squadron, Texas — May 51
196th Fighter Bomber Squadron, California—July 1951
Sources
U.S. Air Force Historical Division, Maxwell Air Force
Base, Alabama.
U.S. Air Force National Museum, Wright Patterson
AFB
 Appendix 7.
U.S. Marine Units
Amphibian Tractor
1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; 1st Amphibious
Tractor Battalion
ANGLICO Detachment
1st Air & Naval Gunfire Liaison Company
Artillery
1st 90mm Antiaircraft Gun Battalion 11th Marines
(Artillery)
Divisions
1st Marine Division HQ Bn, 1st Marine Division
Engineers
1st Engineer Battalion; 1st Shore Party Battalion
Infantry Units
1st Marine Regiment; 5th Marine Regiment; 7th Ma-
rine Regiment; 1st Mortar Battalion
Marine Aviation
1st Air Delivery Squadron 1st Air Wing 6511 Air Ob-
servation DEV Charlie — Marine Air Support Radar
Team FMAW HMR 161 Marine Helicopter Transport
Squadron HMR 163 Helicopter Transport Squadron
MABS 33 Air Base Squadron MACG 2 Air Control
Ground Squadron MACS 3 Tactical Air Control
Squadron MAG 12 Air Group MAG 33 Air Group
MAS 312 Attack Squadron MAS 332 Attack Squadron
MGCIS 1 Ground Control Intercept Squadron
MTACS 2 Air Control Squadron MTS 152 Transport
Squadron VMA 121 Attack Squadron VMA 212 Attack
Squadron VMA 214 Attack Squadron VMA 251 At-
997
tack Squadron VMA 311 Attack Squadron VMA 312
Attack Squadron VMA 323 Attack Squadron VMA
332 Attack Squadron VMC 1 Composite Squadron
VMF 115 ( J) Fighter Squadron VMF 121 Fighter
Squadron VMF 212 Fighter Squadron VMF 214
Fighter Squadron VMF 232 Fighter Squadron VMF
311 Fighter Squadron VMF 312 Fighter Squadron
VMF 323 Fighter Squadron VMF 513 (N) Night
Fighter Squadron VMF 542 All Weather Fighter
Squadron VMJ 1 — Photographic Squadron VMO 6
Observation Squadron VMR 253 Squadron
Medical
1st Medical Battalion
Military Police
1st Military Police Company
Ordinance
1st Ordinance Battalion
Provisional Brigades
1st Marine Provisional Brigade
Reconnaissance Units
1st Reconnaissance Company
Service Units
1st Combat Service Group; 1st Graves Registration
Platoon; 1st Service Battalion Postal Units—combined
Signal
1st Signal Battalion
Appendix 7 998

Tank Units Source

1st Tank Battalion USMC Historical Division, Headquarters, U.S. Ma-
rine Corps, Washington, D.C.
Transportation Units
1st Motor Transport Battalion; 7th Motor Transport
Battalion; 9th Motor Transport Battalion
 Appendix 8.
U.S. Naval Vessels
Battleships
USS Iowa BB 61; USS Missouri BB 63; USS New Jer-
sey BB 62; USS Wisconsin BB 64
Carriers
USS Antietam CV 36; USS Badoeng Strait CVE 116;
USS Bairoko CVE 115; USS Bataan CVL 29; USS Ben-
nington CVA 20; USS Bon Homme Richard CV 31; USS
Boxer CV 21; USS Cabot CVL 28; USS Cape Esperance
CVE 88; USS Coral Sea CV 43; USS Corregidor CVE 58;
USS Essex CV 9; USS Gilbert Islands CVE 107; USS
Hornet CVA 12; USS Kearsage CV 33; USS Kula Gulf
CVE 108; USS Lake Champlain CV 39; USS Leyte CV
32; USS Midway CV 41; USS Mindoro CVE 120; USS
Oriskany CVA 34; USS Philippine Sea CV 47; USS
Princeton CV 37; USS Point Cruz CVE 119; USS Ren-
dova CVE 114; USS Saipan CVL 48; USS Siboney CVE
112; USS Sicily CVE 118; USS Sitkoh Bay CVE 86; USS
Tarawa CV 40; USS Tripoli CVE 64; USS Valley Forge
CV 45; USS Wasp CV 18; USS Windham Bay CVE 92;
USS Wright CVL 49; USS Yorktown CV 10
Cruisers
USS Bremerton CA 130; USS Canberra CA 70; USS
Columbus CA 74; USS Helena CA 75; USS Juneau
CLAA 119; USS Los Angeles CA 135; USS Manchester
CL 83; USS Pittsburgh CA 72; USS Quincy CA 71;
USS Rochester CA 124; USS Saint Paul CA 73; USS
Toledo CA 133; USS Worcester CL 144
Destroyers
USS Agerholm DD 826; USS Allen M. Sumner DD 692;
USS R. B. Anderson DD 786; USS Arnold J. Isbell DD
869; USS Barton DD 722; USS Bausell DD 845; USS
Black DDD 666; USS Boyd DD 544; USS Brush DD
745; USS Buck DD 761; USS Carpenter DDE 825;
USS Champlain DD 601; USS Charles S. Sperry DD
999
697; USS Chevalier DDR 805; USS Clarence K. Bron-
son DD 668; USS Colahan DD 658; USS Collett DD
730; USS Cony DD 508; USS Corry DD 817; USS
Cotten DD 669; USS Dashiell DD 659; USS De Haven
DD 727; USS Douglas H Fox DD 779; USS Duncan
DDE 874; USS English DD 696; USS Ernest G Small
DD 838; USS Epperson DDE 719; USS Erben DD
631; USS Fechteler DD 870; USS Fiske DD 842; USS
Fletcher DDE 445; USS Floyd B Parks DD 884; USS
Forest B Royal DD 872; USS Frank E Evans DD 754;
USS Frank Knox DD 742; USS Fred T Berry DDE 858;
USS Gregory DD 802; USS Gurke DD 783; USS Hai-
ley DD 556; USS Hale DD 642; USS Halsey Powell
DD 686; USS Hamner DD 718; USS Hancock DD
675; USS Hank DD 702; USS Hanson DD 832; USS
Harry E Hubbard DD 748; USS Hawkins DD 873;
USS Healy DD 672; USS Henderson DD 785; USS
Henley DD 762; USS Henry W Tucker DDR 875; USS
Hickox DD 673; USS Higbee DDR 806; USS Hopewell
DD 681; USS Ingraham DD 694; USS James C. Owens
DD-776; USS Joseph P Kennedy Jr DD 850; USS John
R Pierce DD 753; USS Keppler DDE 765; USS Laffey
DD 724; USS Laws DD 558; USS Leonard F Mason
DD 852; USS Lyman K Swenson DD 729; USS Mac-
Kenzie DD 836; USS Maddox DD 731; USS Mans-
field DD 728; USS Marshall DD 676; USS McDer-
mott DD 677; USS McGowan DD 678; USS McKean
DD 784; USS McNair DD 679; USS Miller DD 535;
USS Moale DD 693; USS New DD 818; USS Nicholas
DDE 449; USS Norris DDE 859; USS O’Bannon DDE
450; USS O’Brien DD 725; USS Orleck DD 886; USS
Ozbourn DD 846; USS Perkins DDR 877; USS Philip
DDE 498; USS Picking DD 685; USS Porter DD 800;
USS Preston DD 795; USS Pritchett DD 561; USS Purdy
DD 734; USS Radford DDE 446; USS Remey DD 688;
USS Renshaw DDE 499; USS Robinson DD 562; USS
Rodgers DD 876; USS Rogers DDR 876; USS Rooks DD
804; USS Rowan DD 782; USS Rupertus DD 851; USS
Samuel M Moore DD 747; USS Soley DD 707; USS
Southerland DDR 743; USS Stembel DD 644; USS
Stockham DD 683; USS Stormes DD 780; USS Strong
Appendix 8
DD 758; USS Taussig DD 746; USS Theodore E Chan-
dler DD 717; USS The Sullivans DD 537; USS Tingey
DD 539; USS Trathen DD 530; USS Twining DD 540;
USS Uhlmann DD 687; USS Walke DD 723; USS
Walker DDE 571; USS Wallace L Lind DD 703; USS
Watts DD 567; USS Wedderburn DD 684; USS Wilkin-
son DS 930; USS Wiltsie DD 716; USS Wm R Rush DD
714; USS Yarnall DD 541; USS Zellars DD 777
Destroyer Escorts
USS Blair DE 147; USS Charles Berry DE 1035; USS
Cowell DE; USS Currier DE 700; USS Darby DE 218;
USS Foss DE 59; USS Howard DE 462; USS Lewis DE
535; USS McCoy Reynolds DE 440; USS McMorris DE
1036; USS Whitehurst DE 634; USS Wiseman DE 667
Flagships
USS Eldorado AGC 11; USS Estes AGC 12; USS Mt
McKinley AGC 7; USS Taconic AGC 17
Fleet Oilers
USS Ashtabula AO 51; USS Chikaskia AO 54; USS
Cimarron AO 22; USS Kankakee AO 39; USS Guada-
lupe AO 32; USS Mispillion AO 105; USS Navasota
AO 106; USS Passumpsic AO 107; USS Patapsco AOG
1; USS Platte AO 24; USS Taluga AO 62; USS Tolo-
vana AO 64; USS Aucilla AO 56
Frigates
USS Albuquerque PF 7; USS Bayonne PF 21; USS
Burlington PF 51; USS Everett PF 8; USS Glendale PF
36; USS Glouschester PF 22; USS Hoquiam (Patrol
Frigate) PF 53; USS Tacoma PF3
Hospital Ships
USS Consolation AH 15; USS Haven AH 12; USS Hope
AH; USS Repose AH 16
Landing Ships, Dock
USS Cabildo LSD 16; USS Colonial LSD 18; USS
Comstock LSD 19; USS Gunston Hall LSD 5; USS Tor-
tuga LSD 26; USS Whetstone LSD 27
Landing Ships, Men
LSM 226; LSM 546
Landing Ships, Men, Rocket
(launching)
LSMR 404; LSMR 409; LSMR 412; LSMR 525;
LSMR 536 (USS White River)
Landing Ships, Tank
LST 391; LST 503; LST 529; LST 561; LST 629; LST
1000
692; LST 715; LST 722; LST 758; LST 762; LST 772;
LST 819; LST 822; LST 914; LST 963 (USS Sphinx);
LST 973 (USS Trapp); LST 975; LST 1006; LST 1032;
LST 1048; LST 1073; LST 1078; LST 1080 (USS Pen-
der County); LST 1081; LST 1082; LST 1083; LST
1089; LST 1101; LST 1148
Minesweepers
Mine Division 111; USS Carmick DMS 33; USS Chat-
terer AMS 40; USS Chief AM 315; USS Competent AM
316; USS Curlew AMS 8; USS Defense AM 317; USS
Devastator AM 318; USS Dextrous AM 341; USS Doyle
DMS 34; USS Ellyson DMS 19; USS Endicott DMS
35; USS Fitch DMS 25; USS Gladiator AM 319; USS
Grosbeak AMS 14; USS Gull AMS 16; USS Gwin DM
33; USS Hambleton DMS 20; USS Harry M Bauer DM
26; USS Heron AMS 18; USS Hobson DMS 26; USS
Hornbill AMS 19; USS Hummer AMS 20; USS Impec-
cable AM 320; USS Incredible AM 249; USS Instill AM
252; USS Jubilant AM 255; USS Kite AMS 22; USS
Lark AMS 23; USS Linnet AMS 24; USS Macomb
DMS 23; USS Magpie AMS 25; USS Mainstay AM
261; USS Merganser AMS 26; USS Minah AMC 204;
USS Mockingbird AMS 27; USS Murrelet AM 372;
USS Osprey AMS 28; USS Partridge AMS 31; USS Pel-
ican AMS 32; USS Pigeon AM 374; USS Pirate AMS
275; USS Pledge AM 277; USS Plover AMS 33; USS
Ptarmigan AM 376; USS Redhead AMS 34; USS Red-
start AM 378; USS Rodman DMS 21; USS Ruddy AM
380; USS Sage AM 111; USS Seagull AMS 55; USS
Seer AM 112; USS Shea DM 30; USS Shoveler AM
382; USS Strive AM 117; USS Surf bird AM 383; USS
Sustain AM 119; USS Swallow AMS 36; USS Swan
AMS 37; USS Swift AM 122; USS Symbol AM 123;
USS Thomas E Fraser DM 24; USS Toucan AM 387;
USS Tumult AM 127; USS Waxbill AMS 39; USS
Waxwing AM 389; USS Zeal AM 131
Navy Support Units
1st Amphibious Construction Battalion ACB 1 US
Fleet Activities Navy, (Inchon & Pusan) Naval Beach
Group One
Patrol Craft Escort
PCEC 882; PCEC 896; PCEC 898
Picket Ships
USS Durant DER 389; USS Harveson DER 316; USS
Vance DER 387
Repair Ships
USS Bolster ARS 38; USS CADMUS AR 14; USS
Chourre ARV 1; USS Conserver ARS 39; USS Current
ARS 22; USS Deliver ARS 23; USS Grapple ARS 7;
 1001
USS Grasp ARS 24; USS Hector AR 7; USS Hooper Is-
land ARG 17; USS Jason ARH 1; USS Kermit Roosevelt
ARG 16; USS Laertes AR 20; USS Luzon ARG 2; USS
Reclaimer ARS 42; USS Safeguard ARS 25
Submarines
USS Besuga; USS Blackfin SS 322; USS Bowfin SS 287;
USS Bream SS; USS Catfish SS 339; USS Greenfish SS
351; USS Hammerhead SS 364; USS Perch (Special
Operations); USS Pickeral SS 534; USS Queenfish SS
393; USS Sea Fox SS 402; USS Segundo SS 398; USS
Swordfish; USS Tang
Supply Ships
USS Alstede AF 48; USS Graffias AF 29; USS Karin
AF 33; USS Merapi AF 38; USS Polaris AF 11
Supply Ships, Ammunition
USS Diphda AKA 59; USS Firedrake AE 14; USS Mt
Baker AE 34; USS Mt Katmai AE 16; USS Paricutin AE
18; USS Rainier AE 5; USS Yancey AKA 93
Tenders
USS Arcadia AD 23; USS Bryce Canyon AD 36; USS
Dixie AD 14; USS Hamul AD 20; USS Piedmont AD
17; USS Prairie AD 15; USS Shenandoah AD 26
Tender, Aviation
USS Jupiter AVS 8
Tender, Seaplane
USS Corson AVP 37; USS Currituck AV 7; USS Cur-
tiss AV 4; USS Gardiners Bay AVP 39; USS Kenneth
Whiting AV 14; USS Onslow AVP 48; USS Orca AVP;
USS Pine Island AV 12; USS Susen AVP
U.S. Naval Vessels
Tender, Submarine
USS Florkin ASR 9
Transport, Attack
USS Achernar AKA 53; USS Algol AKA 54; USS Bay-
field APA 33; USS Bellatrix AKA 3; USS BEXAR APA
237; USS Cavalier APA 37; USS Chara AKA 58; USS
Deuel APA 160; USS Diachenko APD 123; USS George
Clymer APA 27; USS Grainger AK 184; USS Henrico
APA 45; USS Horace A Bass APD 124; USS Lenawee
APA 195; USS Marquette AK 95; USS Menard APA
201; USS Merrick AKA 97; USS Montrose APA 212;
USS Oglethorpe AKA 100; USS Okanogan APA 220;
USS Passig AW 3; USS Renville APA 227; USS San-
doval APA 194; USS Skagit AKA 105; USS Sussex AK
213; USS Talladega APA 208; USS Telfair APA 210;
USS Thomas Jefferson APA 30; USS Titiania AKA 13;
USS Union AKA 106; USS Uvalde AKA 88; USS Virgo
AKA 20; USS Walter B Cobb APD 106; USS Wantuck
APD 125; USS Weiss APD 135; USS General W.H.
Gordon TAP 117; USS Winston AKA 94
Tug, Ocean
USS Lipan ATF 85; USS Sarsi ATF 111; USS Takelma
ATF 113; USS Cocopa ATF 101
Underwater Demolition
1st UDT (Underwater Demolition Team) 3rd UDT
(Underwater Demolition Team) 5th UDT (Underwa-
ter Demolition Team)
Source
Department of the Navy—Naval Historical Center 805
Kidder Breese SE, Washington Navy Yard, Wash-
ington DC.
 Appendix 9.
U.S. Naval Air Units
Squadrons, Attack
(Utron Five) VA 115 Squadron Attack; VA 195 Squad-
ron Attack; VA 45 Squadron Attack; VA 50 Squadron
Attack; VA 55 Squadron Attack; VA 65 Squadron At-
tack; VA 145 Squadron Attack; VA 702 Squadron At-
tack; VA 721 Squadron Attack; VA 728 Squadron At-
tack; VA 791 Squadron Attack; VA 923 Squadron
Attack
Squadrons, Composite
VC 4 Squadron Composite; VC 11 Squadron Com-
posite; VC 12 Squadron Composite; VC 3 Squadron
Composite; VC 33 Squadron Composite; VC 35
Squadron Composite; VC 61 Squadron Composite;
VC 62 Squadron Composite
Squadrons, Fighter
VF 22 Squadron Fighter; VF 23 Squadron Fighter; VF
24 Squadron Fighter; VF 31 Squadron Fighter; VF 32
Squadron Fighter; VF 44 Squadron Fighter; VF 51
Squadron Fighter; VF 52 Squadron Fighter; VF 53
Squadron Fighter; VF 54 Squadron Fighter; VF 62
Squadron Fighter; VF 63 Squadron Fighter; VF 64
Squadron Fighter; VF 71 Squadron Fighter; VF 71
Squadron Fighter; VF 72 Squadron Fighter; VF 74
Squadron Fighter; VF 92 Squadron Fighter; VF 93
Squadron Fighter; VF 111 Squadron Fighter; VF 112
Squadron Fighter; VF 113 Squadron Fighter; VF 114
Squadron Fighter; VF 121 Squadron Fighter; VF 141
Squadron Fighter; VF 144 Squadron Fighter; VF 151
Squadron Fighter; VF 152 Squadron Fighter; VF 153
Squadron Fighter; VF 154 Squadron Fighter; VF 155
Squadron Fighter; VF 172 Squadron Fighter; VF 191
Squadron Fighter; VF 192 Squadron Fighter; VF 193
Squadron Fighter; VF 194 Squadron Fighter; VF 653
Squadron Fighter; VF 702 Squadron Fighter; VF 713
Squadron Fighter; VF 721 Squadron Fighter; VF 781
Squadron Fighter; VF 783 Squadron Fighter; VF 791
Squadron Fighter; VF 821 Squadron Fighter; VF 831
1002
Squadron Fighter; VF 837 Squadron Fighter; VF 871
Squadron Fighter; VF 874 Squadron Fighter; VF 884
Squadron Fighter
Patrol Squadrons
VP 1 Patrol Squadron; VP 2 Patrol Squadron; VP 6 Pa-
trol Squadron; VP 7 Patrol Squadron; VP 9 Patrol
Squadron; VP 22 Patrol Squadron; VP 24 Patrol Squad-
ron; VP 28 Patrol Squadron; VP 29 Patrol Squadron; VP
3 Patrol Squadron; VP 40 Patrol Squadron; VP 42 Pa-
trol Squadron; VP 46 Patrol Squadron; VP 47 Patrol
Squadron; VP 48 Patrol Squadron; VP 50 Patrol
Squadron; VP 57 Patrol Squadron; VP 722 Patrol
Squadron; VP 731 Patrol Squadron; VP 871 Patrol
Squadron; VP 892 Patrol Squadron
Reconnaissance Squadrons
VQ 1 Fleet Recon Squadron One
Tactical Support Squadrons
VR 21 Tactical Support Squadron
Weather Squadrons
VJ 1 Weather Squadron
Unknown Mission
VS 21 Squadron; VS 23 Squadron; VS 24 Squadron;
VS 25 Squadron; VS 27 Squadron; VS 38 Squadron;
VS 653 Squadron; VS 892 Squadron; VS 931
Squadron; VW 1 Squadron
Miscellaneous
ATS 21 Air Transport Squadron CAG 11—Carrier Air
Group Fleet Air Wing 6 (Air Sea Rescue) HU 1 Heli-
copter Utility Detachment HU 2 Helicopter Utility
Detachment Military Air Transport Service (MATS)
 Appendix 10.
Carrier-Based and
Non–Carrier-Based Squadrons
Carrier, Air Group and Carrier-Based Boxer (CV 21) with CVG-101 (2 Mar 1951–24 Oct 1951)
Squadron Deployments Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Essex (CV 9) with CVG-5 (26 Jun 1951–25 Mar 1952) VF-721 F9F-2B A
VF-791 F4U-4 A
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VF-884 F4U-4 A
VF-51 F9F-2 S VA-702 AD-2/4Q A
VF-172 F2H-2 R VC-3 Det F F4U-5NL NP
VF-53 F4U-4/B S VC-11 Det F AD-4W ND
VF-54 AD-2/4/L/Q S VC-35 Det F AD-4N NR
VC-3 Det B F4U-5NL NP VC-61 Det F F9F-2P PP
VC-11 Det B AD-4W ND HU-21 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-35 Det B AD-4NL NR
VC-61 Det B F9F-2P PP Boxer (CVA 21) with CVG-2 (8 Feb 1952–26 Sep 1952)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Essex (CVA 9) with ATG-2 (16 Jun 1952–6 Feb 1953) VF-64 F4U-4 M
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VF-63 F4U-4 M
VF-24 F9F-2 M
VF-23 F9F-2 M VA-65 AD-4 M
VF-821 F9F-2 A VC-3 Det A F4U-5N NP
VF-871 F4U-4 D VC-11 Det A AD-4W ND
VA-55 AD-4 S VC-35 Det A AD-3N/4N/2Q NR
VC-3 Det I F4U-5N NP VC-61 Det A F9F-2P PP
VC-11 Det I AD-4W ND HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-35 Det I AD-4N NR GMU-90 AD-2Q/F6F-5K V
VC-61 Det I F2H-2P PP
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
Boxer (CVA 21) with ATG-1 (30 Mar 1953–28 Nov
Boxer (CV 21) with CVG-2 (24 Aug 1950–11 Nov 1950) 1953)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VF-23 F4U-4 M VF-111* F9F-5 V
VF-63 F4U-4 M VF-52 F9F-2 S
VF-64 F4U-4 M VF-151 F9F-2 H
VF-24 F4U-4 M VF-44* F4U-4 F
VA-65 AD-2 M VF-194 AD-4NA/Q B
VC-3 Det F4U-5N NP VC-3 Det H F4U-5N NP
VC-11 Det A AD-3W ND VC-11 Det H AD-4W ND
VC-33 Det AD-4N SS VC-35 Det H AD-4N NR
VC-61 Det F4U-4P PP VC-61 F2H-2P PP
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP

1003
Appendix 10 1004

*VF-111 crossdecked (transferred) from CVA 21 to CVA Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
39 on 30 June 1953 and returned to the U.S. in October VF-781 F9F-5 D
1953. VF-44 crossdecked from CVA 39 to CVA 21 on 30 VF-783 F9F-5 D
June 1953. VF-874 F4U-4 D
VA-923 AD-3 D
Bon Homme Richard (CV 31) with CVG-102 (10 May VC-3 Det G F4U-5N NP
1951–17 Dec 1951) VC-11 Det G AD-3W ND
VC-35 Det G AD-4N NR
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VC-61 Det G F2H-2P PP
VF-781 F9F-2B D HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VF-783 F4U-4 D
*CVG-102 redesignated CVG-12 on 4 February 1953.
VF-874 F4U-4 D
VF-781, VF-783, VF-874 and VA-923 became VF-
VA-923 AD-3/4Q D
121, VF-122, VF-124 and VA-125.
VC-3 Det G F4U-5NL NP
VC-11 Det G AD-4W ND
VC-35 Det G AD-4N NR Antietam (CV 36) with CVG-15 (8 Sep 1951–2 May
VC-61 Det G F9F-2P PP 1952)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Bon Homme Richard (CVA 31) with CVG-7 (20 May VF-713 F4U-4 H
VF-831 F9F-2B H
1952–8 Jan 1953) VF-837 F9F-2B H
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VA-728 AD-4/L/Q H
VF-71 F9F-2 L VC-3 Det D F4U-5N NP
VF-72 F9F-2 L VC-11 Det D AD-4W ND
VF-74 F4U-4 L VC-35 Det D AD-4NL NR
VA-75 AD-4 L VC-61 Det D F9F-2P PP
VC-4 Det 41 F4U-5N NA HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-33 Det 41 AD-4NL SS
VC-12 Det 41 AD-4W NE Princeton (CV 37) with CVG-19 (9 Nov 1950–29 May
VC-61 Det N F2H-2P/F9F-2P PP 1951*)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Leyte (CV 32) with CVG-3 (6 Sep 1950–3 Feb 1951) VF-191 F9F-2 B1
VF-192 F4U-4 B
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VF-193 F4U-4 B
VF-31 F9F-2 K VA-195 AD-4 B
VF-32 F4U-4 K VC-3 Det F F4U-5N NP
VF-33 F4U-4 K VC-11 Det AD-4W ND
VA-35 AD-3 K VC-35 Det 3 AD-4N NR
VC-4 Det 3 F4U-5N NA VC-61 Det F9F-2P PP
VC-33 Det 3 AD-4N SS HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-12 Det 3 AD-3W NE *Air Group transferred at Yokosuka, Japan, CV 37 re-
VC-62 Det 3 F4U-5P PL mained in WestPac.
HU-2 Det 3 HO3S-1 UR
Princeton (CV 37) with CVG-19X (31 May 1951–29
Kearsarge (CVA 33) with CVG-101* (11 Aug 1952–17 Aug 1951)
Mar 1953)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VF-23 F9F-2 B
VF-11 F2H-2 T VF-821 F4U-4 B
VF-721* F9F-2 A VF-871 F4U-4 B
VF-884* F4U-4 A VA-55 AD-4 B
VA-702* AD-4/L A VC-3 Det F4U-5N NP
VC-3 Det F F4U-5N NP VC-11 Det AD-4W ND
VC-11 Det F AD-4W ND VC-35 Det 7 AD-4N NR
VC-35 Det F AD-4N NR VC-61 Det F9F-2P PP
VC-61 Det F F2H-2P PP HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
HU-1 Det 15 HO3-1 UP
*CVG-101 redesignated CVG-14 on 4 February 1953. Princeton (CVA 37) with CVG-19 (21 Mar 1952–3
VF-721, VF-884 and VA-702 became VF-141, VF-
144 and VA-145. Nov 1952)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Oriskany (CVA 34) with CVG-102* (15 Sep 1952–18 VF-191 F9F-2 B
May 1953) VF-192 F4U-4 B
 1005 Squadrons

Squadron Aircraft Tail Code *CVG-2 crossdecked with CVG-11 from CV 47 on 28

VF-193 F4U-4 B March 1951 and CV 45 returned to San Diego, Calif., 7
VA-195 AD-4 B April with CVG-11.
VC-3 Det E F4U-5N NP
VC-11 Det E AD-4W ND Valley Forge (CV 45) with ATG-1 (15 Oct 1951–3 Jul
VC-35 Det E AD-4NL NR 1952)
VC-61 Det E F9F-2P PP
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VF-111 F9F-2/B V
Princeton (CVA 37) with CVG-15 (24 Jan 1953–21 VF-52 F9F-2/B S
Sep 1953) VF-653 F4U-4/B H
VF-194 F4U-4/B B
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VC-3 Det H F4U-5N/NL NP
VF-152 F4U-4 H VC-11 Det H(7) AD-4W/2Q ND
VF-153 F9F-5 H VC-35 Det H(10) AD-4NL NR
VF-154 F9F-5 H VC-61 Det H F9F-2P/F2H-2P PP
VA-155 AD-4 H HU-1 Det 20 HO3S-1 UP
VC-3 Det D F4U-5N NP
VC-11 Det D AD-4W ND Valley Forge (CVA 45) with CVG-5 (20 Nov 1952–25
VC-35 Det D AD-4N NR Jun 1953)
VC-61 Det D F9F-5P PP
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VF-51 F9F-5 S
Lake Champlain (CVA 39) with CVG-4 (26 Apr 1953– VF-92 F4U-4 N
4 Dec 1953) VF-53 F9F-5 S
VF-54 AD-4 S
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VC-3 Det B F4U-5N NP
VF-22 F2H-2 F VC-11 Det B AD-4W ND
VF-62 F2H-2 F VC-35 Det B AD-4N NR
VF-44 F4U-4 F (to 30 Jun) VC-61 Det B F9F-5P PP
VF-111 F9F-5 V (from 30 Jun) HU-1 Det 6 HO3S-1 UP
VA-45 AD-4B F
VC-4 Det 44 F2H-2B/F3D-2 NA Philippine Sea (CV 47) with CVG-11 (5 Jul 1950–26
VC-12 Det 44 AD-4W NE
VC-33 Det 44 AD-4N SS Mar 1951*)
VC-62 Det 44 F2H-2P PL Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
HU-2 Det HO3S-1 UR VF-111 F9F-2 V
VF-112 F9F-2 V
Valley Forge (CV 45) with CVG-5 (1 May 1950–1 Dec VF-113 F4U-4B V
1950) VF-114 F4U-4B V
VA-115 AD-4/Q V
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VC-3 Det 3 F4U-5N/AD-4N NP
VF-51 F9F-3 S VC-11 Det AD-4W ND
VF-52 F9F-3 S VC-61 Det 3 F4U-4P PP
VF-53 F4U-4B S HU-1 Det 3 HO3S-1 UP
VF-54 F4U-4B S *CVG-11 crossdecked with CVG-2 from CV 45; CV 47
VA-55 AD-4/Q S returned to San Diego, Calif., 26 March with CVG-2.
VC-3 Det C F4U-5N/AD-3N NP
VC-11 Det AD-3W ND
HedRon 1 Det F4U-5P AZ Philippine Sea (CV 47) with CVG-2 (28 Mar 1951–9
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Jun 1951)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Valley Forge (CV 45) with CVG-2 (6 Dec 1950–7 Apr VF-64 F4U-4 M
1951*) VF-63 F4U-4 M
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VF-24 F4U-4 M
VA-65 AD-2/Q M
VF-64 F4U-4 M VC-3 Det F4U-5N NP
VF-63 F4U-4 M VC-11 Det AD-4W ND
VF-24 F4U-4 M VC-35 Det 4 AD-4N NR
VA-65 F4U-4 M VC-61 Det F4U-4P PP
VC-3 Det F4U-5N NP HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-11 Det AD-4W ND
VC-35 Det 4 AD-4N NR
VC-61 Det F F4U-4P PP Philippine Sea (CV 47) with CVG-11 (31 Dec 1951–8
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Aug 1952)
Appendix 10 1006

Squadron Aircraft Tail Code Squadron Aircraft Tail Code

VF-112 F9F-2 V Dec–16 Feb)
VF-113 F4U-4 V VS-23 TBM-3E/S/W MI (aboard 17
VF-114 F4U-4 V Feb–15 Aug)
VA-115 AD-4 V HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VC-3 Unit C F4U-5NfNL NP
VC-11 Unit C AD-4W ND Bairoko (CVE 115) (1 Dec 1951–9 Jun 1952)
VC-35 Unit C AD-4NL/Q/-2Q NR
VC-61 Unit C F2H-2P/F9F-2P PP Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
HU-1 Unit HO3S-1 UP VS-25 AF-2S/W SK (aboard to
21 Jan, returned
Philippine Sea (CVA 47) with CVG-9 (15 Dec in May)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
1952–14 Aug 1953)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code Bairoko (CVE 115) (12 Jan 1953–24 Aug 1953)
VF-91 F9F-2 N Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VF-93 F9F-2 N
VF-94 F4U-4 N VMA-312 F4U-4/B WR (aboard 9
VA-95 AD-4/NA/NL N May–8 Jun)
VC-3 Det M F4U-5N NP VS-21 AF-2S/W BS (aboard 3
VC-11 Det M AD-4W ND Feb–8 May)
VC-35 Det M AD-4N NR VS-23 TBM-3S/W MI (ashore at
VC-61 Det M F9F-5P PP Agana, Guam,
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Feb–Apr)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
Bataan (CVL 29) (16 Nov 1950–25 Jun 1951)
Badoeng Strait (CVE 116) (14 Jul 1950–7 Feb 1951)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VMF-212 F4U-4 LD (aboard
VMF-323 F4U-4B WS
11 Dec–5 Mar)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VMF-312 F4U-4 WR (aboard
5 Mar–6 Jun)
HU-1 Det 8 HO3S-1 UP Badoeng Strait (CVE 116) (15 Sep 1951–1 Mar 1952)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Bataan (CVL 29) (27 Jan 1952–26 Aug 1952) VMF-212 F4U-4 LD
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code VS-892 TBM-3S/W ST (aboard 5
Oct–8 Dec)
VMA-312 F4U-4/B WR (aboard 21 HU-1 Det 18 HO3S-1 UP
Apr–21 Jul)
VS-25 AF-2S/W SK
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Badoeng Strait (CVE 116) (19 Jul 1952–27 Feb 1953)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Bataan (CVL 29) (28 Oct 1952–26 May 1953) VMA-312 F4U-4/B WR (aboard 19
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code Oct–9 Feb)
VS-931 AF-2S/W SV (aboard 10
VMA-312 F4U-4/B WR (aboard 9 Aug–19 Oct)
Feb–8 May) HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VS-871 TBM-3S/W SU
VS-21 AF-2S/W BS
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Sicily (CVE 118) (4 Jul 1950–5 Feb 1951)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
Rendova (CVE 114) (8 Ju1 1951–22 Dec 1951) VMF-214 F4U-4B WE (aboard 1
Aug–13 Nov)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VS-21 TBM-3E/S BS (aboard to
VMF-212 F4U-4 LD (aboard 22 3 Dec)
Sep–6 Dec) HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
VS-892 TBM-3S/W ST (aboard 16
Jul–19 Sep,
11–22 Dec)
Sicily (CVE 118) (12 May 1951–12 Oct 1951)
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VMF-323 F4U-4 WS (aboard c. 5
Bairoko (CVE 115) (14 Nov 1950–15 Aug 1951) Jun–20 Sep)
VS-892 TBM-3S/W ST (aboard to
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code 13 Jul)
VS-21 TBM-3S/W BS (aboard 3 HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP
 1007 Squadrons

Sicily (CVE 118) (8 May 1952–4 Dec 1952) Point Cruz (CVE 119) (11 Apr 1953–18 Dec 1953)
Squadron Aircraft Tail Code Squadron Aircraft Tail Code
VMAA312 F4U-4B WR (aboard 4 VMA-332 F4U-4B MR
Sep–19 Oct) VS-38 TBM-3S/W ST (put shore
VS-931 AF-2S/W SV (aboard to 9 at Agana,
Aug and 19 Guam, 28 Apr)
Oct–4 Dec) VS-23 TBM-3S/W MI (aboard 28
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP Apr–Japan)
HS-2 HRS-2 HV
HU-1 Det HO3S-1 UP

Shore Based Marine Corps Squadrons Operating in Korea

Date Date Departed
Squadron Departed Korean Tail
Designation U.S Area Code Aircraft Operated
VMC-1 15 May 1952 RM AD-4N, 4NL, AD-3N,
AD-2Q, AD-4Q, AD-4W
VMJ-1 23 Mar 1952 MW F2H-2P, F9F-2P, F7F-3P,
F4U-5P
VMO-6 14 Jul 1950 WB OY-2, H03S-1, HTL-4,
TBM-3E, OE-1, H05S-1
VMF-115 17 Feb 1952 AE F9F-2, F9F-4, F9F-5
VMA-121 2 Oct 1951 AK AD-2, AD-3, AD-4
HMR-161 16 Aug 1951 HR HRS-1, HRS-2, H05S-1
VMF/VMA-212 15 Sep 1950 LD F4U-4, F4U-5, F4U-5N,
F4U-4B, AU-1
VMF-214 14 Jun 1950 15 Nov 51 WE F4U-4B
VMA-251 9 Jun 1953